diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js index ef0aae3217..b0437ef361 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js @@ -340,6 +340,9 @@ define([ me.style = me.options.style; me.rendered = false; + // if ( /(?', '', '' diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/controller/Desktop.js b/apps/common/main/lib/controller/Desktop.js index 8e2680f134..d448f8a6fc 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/controller/Desktop.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/controller/Desktop.js @@ -169,20 +169,6 @@ define([ webapp.getController('Main').api.asc_DownloadAs(); } }; - - window.on_native_message('editor:config', 'request'); - if ( !!window.native_message_cmd ) { - for ( var c in window.native_message_cmd ) { - window.on_native_message(c, window.native_message_cmd[c]); - } - } - - native.execCommand('webapps:features', JSON.stringify(features)); - - // hide mask for modal window - var style = document.createElement('style'); - style.appendChild(document.createTextNode('.modals-mask{opacity:0 !important;}')); - document.getElementsByTagName('head')[0].appendChild(style); } var _serializeHeaderButton = function(action, config) { @@ -376,7 +362,7 @@ define([ cls: 'btn-header', iconCls: 'toolbar__icon icon--inverse btn-home', visible: false, - hint: 'Show Main window', + hint: Common.Locale.get('hintBtnHome', {name:"Common.Controllers.Desktop", default: 'Show Main window'}), dataHint:'0', dataHintDirection: 'right', dataHintOffset: '10, -18', @@ -530,7 +516,8 @@ define([ return !!native; }, isOffline: function () { - // return webapp.getController('Main').api.asc_isOffline(); + if ( config.isFillFormApp ) + return webapp.getController('ApplicationController').appOptions.isOffline; return webapp.getController('Main').appOptions.isOffline; }, isFeatureAvailable: function (feature) { @@ -568,9 +555,27 @@ define([ systemThemeSupported: function () { return nativevars.theme && nativevars.theme.system !== 'disabled'; }, + finalConstruct : function() { + if (!!native) { + window.on_native_message('editor:config', 'request'); + if ( !!window.native_message_cmd ) { + for ( var c in window.native_message_cmd ) { + window.on_native_message(c, window.native_message_cmd[c]); + } + } + + native.execCommand('webapps:features', JSON.stringify(features)); + + // hide mask for modal window + var style = document.createElement('style'); + style.appendChild(document.createTextNode('.modals-mask{opacity:0 !important;}')); + document.getElementsByTagName('head')[0].appendChild(style); + } + } }; }; !Common.Controllers && (Common.Controllers = {}); Common.Controllers.Desktop = new Desktop(); + Common.Controllers.Desktop.finalConstruct(); }); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/controller/HintManager.js b/apps/common/main/lib/controller/HintManager.js index b9ee637975..a825cbd0ae 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/controller/HintManager.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/controller/HintManager.js @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Common.UI.HintManager = new(function() { } } if (curr.prop('id') === 'btn-go-back' || curr.closest('.btn-slot').prop('id') === 'slot-btn-options' || - curr.closest('.btn-slot').prop('id') === 'slot-btn-mode' || curr.prop('id') === 'btn-favorite' || curr.parent().prop('id') === 'tlb-box-users' || + curr.closest('.btn-slot').prop('id') === 'slot-btn-mode' || curr.prop('id') === 'id-btn-favorite' || curr.parent().prop('id') === 'tlb-box-users' || curr.prop('id') === 'left-btn-thumbs' || curr.hasClass('scroll') || curr.prop('id') === 'left-btn-about' || curr.prop('id') === 'left-btn-support' || curr.closest('.btn-slot').prop('id') === 'slot-btn-search') { _resetToDefault(); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/util/htmlutils.js b/apps/common/main/lib/util/htmlutils.js index 8d814c89b9..b3b3d203da 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/util/htmlutils.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/util/htmlutils.js @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ window.Common = { else {/* error */} }).then(function (text) { const el = document.querySelector('div.inlined-svg') - el.append(htmlToElements(text)); + el.appendChild(htmlToElements(text)); const i = svg_icons.findIndex(function (item) {return item == url}); if ( !(i < 0) ) svg_icons.splice(i, 1) diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/view/Header.js b/apps/common/main/lib/view/Header.js index 802a22fb4d..9fcd64e424 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/view/Header.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/view/Header.js @@ -273,6 +273,7 @@ define([ me.btnFavorite.on('click', function (e) { // wait for setFavorite method // me.options.favorite = !me.options.favorite; + // me.btnFavorite.changeIcon(me.options.favorite ? {next: 'btn-in-favorite', curr: 'btn-favorite'} : {next: 'btn-favorite', curr: 'btn-in-favorite'}); // me.btnFavorite.changeIcon(me.options.favorite ? {next: 'btn-in-favorite'} : {curr: 'btn-in-favorite'}); // me.btnFavorite.updateHint(!me.options.favorite ? me.textAddFavorite : me.textRemoveFavorite); Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('markfavorite', !me.options.favorite); @@ -491,7 +492,7 @@ define([ }); me.btnFavorite = new Common.UI.Button({ - id: 'btn-favorite', + id: 'id-btn-favorite', cls: 'btn-header', iconCls: 'toolbar__icon icon--inverse btn-favorite', dataHint: '0', @@ -567,7 +568,7 @@ define([ if ( this.options.favorite !== undefined && this.options.favorite!==null) { me.btnFavorite.render($html.find('#slot-btn-favorite')); - me.btnFavorite.changeIcon(!!me.options.favorite ? {next: 'btn-in-favorite'} : {curr: 'btn-in-favorite'}); + me.btnFavorite.changeIcon(!!me.options.favorite ? {next: 'btn-in-favorite', curr: 'btn-favorite'} : {next: 'btn-favorite', curr: 'btn-in-favorite'}); me.btnFavorite.updateHint(!me.options.favorite ? me.textAddFavorite : me.textRemoveFavorite); } else { $html.find('#slot-btn-favorite').hide(); @@ -744,7 +745,7 @@ define([ setFavorite: function (value) { this.options.favorite = value; this.btnFavorite[value!==undefined && value!==null ? 'show' : 'hide'](); - this.btnFavorite.changeIcon(!!value ? {next: 'btn-in-favorite'} : {curr: 'btn-in-favorite'}); + this.btnFavorite.changeIcon(!!value ? {next: 'btn-in-favorite', curr: 'btn-favorite'} : {next: 'btn-favorite', curr: 'btn-in-favorite'}); this.btnFavorite.updateHint(!value ? this.textAddFavorite : this.textRemoveFavorite); updateDocNamePosition(appConfig); return this; diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/autocorrect.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/autocorrect.png index 9d9827fee3..6197e8f7c6 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/autocorrect.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/autocorrect.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartdata.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartdata.png index 367d507a13..d424fbb187 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartdata.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartdata.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charteditor.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charteditor.png index cfc10c4d05..f1ba34caa1 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charteditor.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charteditor.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png index 364932b3c0..b6bddb1b21 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png index 19488eb154..88c1dc1adf 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png index 5b83d10522..d62a7f27c5 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png index b0ae064073..2352bc444f 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png index ad3341afd1..0ac7a857cc 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis2.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis2.png index ab17e63c6d..f7a8fa0344 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis2.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis2.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png index c6b403df35..e01d172bb1 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype.png index 7d3118128d..e9e9e9464f 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype_combo.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype_combo.png index 7711422829..7aab85f35c 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype_combo.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/charttype_combo.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chatgpt_left.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chatgpt_left.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..747f9e3f6a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chatgpt_left.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/draw_tools.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/draw_tools.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..19239a60d7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/draw_tools.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/editseries.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/editseries.png index 3bbb308b2f..c8d8138052 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/editseries.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/editseries.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/find_small.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/find_small.png index 28ee507de4..7fa3c267bb 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/find_small.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/find_small.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pentool.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pentool.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..09b4af932e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pentool.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png index d3f2465e76..67c8be4df4 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/zoom_left.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/zoom_left.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8fcda246c1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/zoom_left.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/autocorrect.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/autocorrect.png index 6c1fcae097..150aefd2fe 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/autocorrect.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/autocorrect.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charteditor.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charteditor.png index 3917c70f61..329329e0c0 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charteditor.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charteditor.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png index 2fd6f21603..32f7496df5 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_layout.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_layout.png index b2612a1a53..0f9e287a66 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_layout.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_layout.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png index 0f22b97072..2ed426ffc0 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png index a7eba16ab0..c28c9cb7a6 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charttype.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charttype.png index c66786240b..d45281fab2 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charttype.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/charttype.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chatgpt_left.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chatgpt_left.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..747f9e3f6a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/chatgpt_left.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/draw_tools.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/draw_tools.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8b467f8905 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/draw_tools.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/find_small.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/find_small.png index 28ee507de4..7fa3c267bb 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/find_small.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/find_small.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/pentool.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/pentool.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b6653cf8fb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/pentool.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_chart_3d.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_chart_3d.png index a475da55db..f4146cd8ea 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_chart_3d.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_chart_3d.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/zoom_left.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/zoom_left.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8fcda246c1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/fr/images/zoom_left.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/autocorrect.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/autocorrect.png index d84bb22dee..931c8dad79 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/autocorrect.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/autocorrect.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png index 05e50b7aed..afca0d9ff8 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_alternativetext.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png index 4cb837c3ba..6b1bca0547 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_cellsnapping.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png index 6c484b651a..ae78960673 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_horizontalaxis.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_layout.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_layout.png index 5d4fe3c283..222b92d555 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_layout.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_layout.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png index 6b8a723898..3ba10070a1 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_secondaryaxis1.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png index bcd8660771..588e40e9a3 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/chartsettings_verticalaxis.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/charttype.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/charttype.png index 96f4c67366..2ba117016c 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/charttype.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/charttype.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/draw_tools.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/draw_tools.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e6c054eb90 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/draw_tools.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette_custom.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette_custom.png index e13ee0df18..1510ea7a99 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette_custom.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette_custom.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/pentool.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/pentool.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0cf37f43d3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/pentool.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart_3d.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart_3d.png index abba31ce73..1657eac363 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart_3d.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart_3d.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/btn-favorite.svg b/apps/common/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/btn-favorite.svg index e48f7f8309..20e0aa4b2d 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/btn-favorite.svg +++ b/apps/common/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/btn-favorite.svg @@ -1,3 +1 @@ - - - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/less/bigscaling.less b/apps/common/main/resources/less/bigscaling.less index a540f7fab8..7dad8c23d0 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/resources/less/bigscaling.less +++ b/apps/common/main/resources/less/bigscaling.less @@ -31,7 +31,8 @@ .btn-toolbar, .btn-header, - .btn-category + .btn-category, + .btn-options { svg.icon:not(.uni-scale):not(.pixel-ratio__2_5 *) { display: none; diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/less/listview.less b/apps/common/main/resources/less/listview.less index 31705702c3..c056f1f1d0 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/resources/less/listview.less +++ b/apps/common/main/resources/less/listview.less @@ -99,6 +99,7 @@ border-bottom: @scaled-one-px-value solid @border-regular-control; padding: 3px 6px; position: absolute; + margin: 1px; margin: @scaled-one-px-value; width: calc(100% - 2 * @scaled-one-px-value); display: flex; diff --git a/apps/common/mobile/lib/controller/collaboration/Review.jsx b/apps/common/mobile/lib/controller/collaboration/Review.jsx index 2f2b4332cb..14a591476d 100644 --- a/apps/common/mobile/lib/controller/collaboration/Review.jsx +++ b/apps/common/mobile/lib/controller/collaboration/Review.jsx @@ -17,13 +17,17 @@ class InitReview extends Component { Common.Notifications.on('document:ready', () => { const api = Common.EditorApi.get(); const appOptions = props.storeAppOptions; + const isProtected = appOptions.isProtected; let trackChanges = appOptions.customization && appOptions.customization.review ? appOptions.customization.review.trackChanges : undefined; (trackChanges===undefined) && (trackChanges = appOptions.customization ? appOptions.customization.trackChanges : undefined); trackChanges = appOptions.isReviewOnly || trackChanges === true || trackChanges !== false && LocalStorage.getBool("de-mobile-track-changes-" + (appOptions.fileKey || '')); - api.asc_SetTrackRevisions(trackChanges); + if(!isProtected) { + api.asc_SetTrackRevisions(trackChanges); + } + // Init display mode const canViewReview = appOptions.canReview || appOptions.isEdit || api.asc_HaveRevisionsChanges(true); @@ -121,9 +125,11 @@ class Review extends Component { render() { const displayMode = this.props.storeReview.displayMode; const isReviewOnly = this.appConfig.isReviewOnly; + const isProtected = this.appConfig.isProtected; const canReview = this.appConfig.canReview; const canUseReviewPermissions = this.appConfig.canUseReviewPermissions; const isRestrictedEdit = this.appConfig.isRestrictedEdit; + return ( ) } diff --git a/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/collaboration/Review.jsx b/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/collaboration/Review.jsx index 7e5bbdd697..5d6b9d6904 100644 --- a/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/collaboration/Review.jsx +++ b/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/collaboration/Review.jsx @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ import {Device} from "../../../utils/device"; const PageReview = props => { const { t } = useTranslation(); const _t = t('Common.Collaboration', {returnObjects: true}); - + const isProtected = props.isProtected; const isDisableAllSettings = props.isReviewOnly || props.displayMode === "final" || props.displayMode === "original"; const canReview = !!props.canReview; @@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ const PageReview = props => { {canReview && - - props.onTrackChanges(!props.trackChanges)}/> + + props.onTrackChanges(!props.trackChanges)} /> } {!props.isRestrictedEdit && @@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ const PageReview = props => { - {canReview && !props.canUseReviewPermissions && + {canReview && !props.canUseReviewPermissions && !isProtected && {props.onAcceptAll();}}> } - {canReview && !props.canUseReviewPermissions && + {canReview && !props.canUseReviewPermissions && !isProtected && {props.onRejectAll();}}> @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ const DisplayMode = props => { ) }; -const PageReviewChange = props => { +const PageReviewChange = inject("storeAppOptions")(observer(props => { const isAndroid = Device.android; const { t } = useTranslation(); const _t = t('Common.Collaboration', {returnObjects: true}); @@ -109,6 +109,9 @@ const PageReviewChange = props => { const displayMode = props.displayMode; const isLockAcceptReject = (!change || (change && !change.editable) || (displayMode === "final" || displayMode === "original") || !props.canReview); const isLockPrevNext = (displayMode === "final" || displayMode === "original"); + const appOptions = props.storeAppOptions; + const isProtected = appOptions.isProtected; + return ( @@ -126,12 +129,12 @@ const PageReviewChange = props => { {props.onAcceptCurrentChange()}} >{_t.textAccept} {props.onRejectCurrentChange()}} >{_t.textReject} @@ -173,7 +176,7 @@ const PageReviewChange = props => { } ) -}; +})); const PageDisplayMode = inject("storeReview")(observer(DisplayMode)); diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json index f52ca3163e..839cde15d6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "A descarregar documento…", "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar executar uma ação para a qual não tem permissão.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Código de erro: %1", - "DE.ApplicationController.errorEditingDownloadas": "Ocorreu um erro ao trabalhar o documento.
Utilize a opção 'Descarregar como...' para guardar uma cópia do ficheiro no computador.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorEditingDownloadas": "Ocorreu um erro ao trabalhar no documento.
Utilize a opção 'Descarregar como...' para guardar uma cópia do ficheiro no computador.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "O documento está protegido por palavra-passe e não pode ser aberto.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "O tamanho do documento excede o limite permitido pelo servidor.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos para mais informações.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "Ocorreu um erro ao guardar o ficheiro. Utilize a opção 'Descarregar como' para guardar o ficheiro no computador ou tente mais tarde.", @@ -23,8 +23,8 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma folha de cálculo (xls, xlsx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
Por favor contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorSubmit": "Falha ao submeter.", - "DE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
Entre em contacto com o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro foi alterada.
Antes de poder continuar a trabalhar, é necessário descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e depois voltar a carregar esta página.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro alterada.
Antes de poder trabalhar, tem que descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e, depois, recarregue esta página.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "De momento, não é possível aceder ao ficheiro.", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "DE.ApplicationController.openErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.", @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "A carregar documento", "DE.ApplicationController.textNext": "Campo seguinte", "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "de", - "DE.ApplicationController.textRequired": "Preencha todos os campos obrigatório para submeter o formulário.", + "DE.ApplicationController.textRequired": "Preencha todos os campos obrigatório para enviar o formulário.", "DE.ApplicationController.textSubmit": "Submeter", "DE.ApplicationController.textSubmited": "Formulário submetido com sucesso
Clique para fechar a dica", "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Fechar", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json index 99a2cef548..bfc7b18ba8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json @@ -4,11 +4,12 @@ "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Висота", "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Поділитися посиланням", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Ширина", + "common.view.SearchBar.textFind": "Знайти", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Не вдалося конвертувати", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Перевищено час очікування конверсії.", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Помилка", - "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Завантаження не вдалося", - "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "Завантаження документу...", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Звантаження не вдалося", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "Звантаження документу...", "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Ви намагаєтеся виконати дію, на яку у вас немає прав.
Будь ласка, зв'яжіться з адміністратором вашого Сервера документів.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Код помилки: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorEditingDownloadas": "Під час роботи з документом сталася помилка.
Використовуйте опцію 'Завантажити як...', щоб зберегти резервну копію файлу на жорсткий диск комп'ютера.", @@ -23,13 +24,13 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Застереження", "DE.ApplicationController.openErrorText": "Під час відкриття файлу сталася помилка.", "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "З'єднання занадто повільне, деякі компоненти не вдалося завантажити. Перезавантажте сторінку.", - "DE.ApplicationController.textAnonymous": "Анонімний користувач", + "DE.ApplicationController.textAnonymous": "Гість", "DE.ApplicationController.textClear": "Очистити всі поля", "DE.ApplicationController.textGotIt": "ОК", "DE.ApplicationController.textGuest": "Гість", "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "Завантаження документа", "DE.ApplicationController.textNext": "Наступне поле", - "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "з", + "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "із", "DE.ApplicationController.textRequired": "Заповніть всі обов'язкові поля для відправлення форми.", "DE.ApplicationController.textSubmit": "Відправити", "DE.ApplicationController.textSubmited": "Форму успішно відправлено
Натисніть, щоб закрити підказку", @@ -39,12 +40,13 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Невідома помилка.", "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Ваш браузер не підтримується", "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Будь ласка, зачекайте...", - "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Завантажити файл", - "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownloadDocx": "Завантажити як docx", - "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownloadPdf": "Завантажити як pdf", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Звантажити", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownloadDocx": "Звантажити як docx", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownloadPdf": "Звантажити як pdf", "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Вбудувати", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFileLocation": "Відкрити розташування файлу", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Повноекранний режим", "DE.ApplicationView.txtPrint": "Друк", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtSearch": "Пошук", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Доступ" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json index 6dfd0e014a..bc0001ab23 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -16,6 +16,11 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "該文件受密碼保護，無法打開。", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "此檔案超過這主機設定的限制的大小
想了解更多資訊，請聯絡您的文件服務主機(Document Server)的管理者。", "DE.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "儲存文件檔時發生錯誤。請使用 “下載為” 選項將文件存到硬碟，或稍後再試。", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "DE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "字體未載入。
請聯絡文件服務(Document Server)管理員。", "DE.ApplicationController.errorSubmit": "傳送失敗", "DE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "此文件安全憑證(Security Token)已過期。
請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/controller/ApplicationController.js b/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/controller/ApplicationController.js index f966805ceb..38258a0315 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/controller/ApplicationController.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/controller/ApplicationController.js @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ define([ this.appOptions.fileChoiceUrl = this.editorConfig.fileChoiceUrl; this.appOptions.saveAsUrl = this.editorConfig.saveAsUrl; this.appOptions.canRequestSaveAs = this.editorConfig.canRequestSaveAs; - this.appOptions.isDesktopApp = this.editorConfig.targetApp == 'desktop'; + this.appOptions.isDesktopApp = this.editorConfig.targetApp == 'desktop' || Common.Controllers.Desktop.isActive(); this.appOptions.lang = this.editorConfig.lang; this.appOptions.canPlugins = false; @@ -1440,6 +1440,7 @@ define([ Common.Gateway.documentReady(); Common.Analytics.trackEvent('Load', 'Complete'); + Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('document:ready'); }, onOptionsClick: function(menu, item, e) { @@ -1602,16 +1603,24 @@ define([ } if (Common.UI.Themes.available()) { - var current = Common.UI.Themes.currentThemeId(); - for (var t in Common.UI.Themes.map()) { - this.view.mnuThemes.addItem(new Common.UI.MenuItem({ - caption : Common.UI.Themes.get(t).text, - value : t, - toggleGroup : 'themes', - checkable : true, - checked : t===current - })); + const _fill_themes = function () { + const _menu = this.view.mnuThemes; + _menu.removeAll(); + + const _current = Common.UI.Themes.currentThemeId(); + for (const t in Common.UI.Themes.map()) { + _menu.addItem(new Common.UI.MenuItem({ + caption : Common.UI.Themes.get(t).text, + value : t, + toggleGroup : 'themes', + checkable : true, + checked : t === _current + })); + } } + + Common.NotificationCenter.on('uitheme:countchanged', _fill_themes.bind(this)); + _fill_themes.call(this); } if (this.view.mnuThemes.items.length<1) { menuItems[7].setVisible(false); diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/view/ApplicationView.js b/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/view/ApplicationView.js index aa8b710cb5..c453eb3298 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/view/ApplicationView.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/app/view/ApplicationView.js @@ -46,6 +46,7 @@ define([ this.btnOptions = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar no-caret', iconCls: 'svg-icon more-vertical', + scaling: false, menu: new Common.UI.Menu({ cls: 'shifted-right', items: [ @@ -103,34 +104,39 @@ define([ this.btnClear = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'svg-icon clear-style', - caption: this.textClear + caption: this.textClear, + scaling: false }); this.btnClear.render($('#id-btn-clear-fields')); this.btnNext = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'svg-icon arrow-down', - caption: this.textNext + caption: this.textNext, + scaling: false }); this.btnNext.render($('#id-btn-next-field')); this.btnPrev = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar', - iconCls: 'svg-icon arrow-up' + iconCls: 'svg-icon arrow-up', + scaling: false }); this.btnPrev.render($('#id-btn-prev-field')); this.btnUndo = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'svg-icon undo', - hint: this.tipUndo + Common.Utils.String.platformKey('Ctrl+Z') + hint: this.tipUndo + Common.Utils.String.platformKey('Ctrl+Z'), + scaling: false }); this.btnUndo.render($('#id-btn-undo')); this.btnRedo = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'svg-icon redo', - hint: this.tipRedo + Common.Utils.String.platformKey('Ctrl+Y') + hint: this.tipRedo + Common.Utils.String.platformKey('Ctrl+Y'), + scaling: false }); this.btnRedo.render($('#id-btn-redo')); diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/el.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/el.json index 81a88abc35..8eb8c5d602 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/el.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/el.json @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "Άγνωστη μορφή εικόνας.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "Η εικόνα είναι πολύ μεγάλη. Το μέγιστο μέγεθος είναι 25MB.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "Παρακαλούμε, περιμένετε...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Δεν επιτρέπεται η πρόσβαση για ανώνυμους χρήστες.
Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοίξει μόνο για προβολή.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "Η άδεια δεν είναι ενεργή.
Παρακαλούμε, επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "Έχετε φτάσει το όριο για ταυτόχρονες συνδέσεις με συντάκτες %1. Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοιχτεί μόνο για προβολή.​​
Παρακαλούμε επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας για περισσότερες πληροφορίες.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "Η άδειά σας έχει λήξει.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/es.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/es.json index 4265851e2d..857f28626e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/es.json @@ -136,6 +136,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSaveAsDesktop": "Guardar como...", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSubmited": "Formulario enviado con éxito
Haga clic para cerrar el consejo", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleLicenseExp": "La licencia ha expirado", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleLicenseNotActive": "Licencia no activa", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleServerVersion": "Editor ha sido actualizado", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleUpdateVersion": "Versión se ha cambiado", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.txtArt": "Escriba el texto aquí", @@ -151,6 +152,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "Formato de imagen desconocido.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "La imagen es demasiado grande. El tamaño máximo es de 25 MB.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "Por favor, espere...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acceso denegado para usuarios anónimos.
Este documento se abrirá solo para su visualización.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "Licencia no activa.
Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización.
Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado.
Actualice su licencia y después recargue la página.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Licencia expirada.
No tiene acceso a la funcionalidad de edición de documentos.
Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/id.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/id.json index 044a8f6c92..12ca7ea808 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/id.json @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "Format gambar tidak dikenal.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "Melebihi ukuran maksimal file. Ukuran maksimum adalah 25 MB.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "Silahkan menunggu", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Akses ditolak untuk pengguna anonim.
Dokumen ini akan dibuka hanya untuk dilihat.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "Lisensi tidak aktif.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja.
Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "Lisensi Anda sudah kadaluwarsa.
Silakan update lisensi Anda dan muat ulang halaman.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/ja.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/ja.json index ce5d0dc772..cc51c36afa 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/ja.json @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "不明なイメージ形式です", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "画像サイズの上限を超えました。サイズの上限は２５MBです。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "少々お待ちください...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名ユーザーのアクセスは拒否されます。
このドキュメントは閲覧専用に開かれます。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "ライセンスが無効になっています。
管理者までご連絡ください。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "％1エディターへの同時接続の制限に達しました。 このドキュメントは表示専用で開かれます。
詳細については、管理者にお問い合わせください。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの有効期限が切れています。
ライセンスを更新してページをリロードしてください。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/pt-pt.json index 79f9343a05..26c226eb4a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -1,36 +1,36 @@ { - "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Abril", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Agosto", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Dezembro", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "Fevereiro", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "Janeiro", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "Julho", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "Junho", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "Março", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "Maio", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "abril", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "agosto", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "dezembro", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "fevereiro", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "janeiro", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "julho", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "junho", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "março", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "maio", "Common.UI.Calendar.textMonths": "Meses", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "Novembro", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "Outubro", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "Setembro", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "Abr", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "Ago", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "Dez", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "Fev", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "Sex", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "Jan", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "Jul", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "Jun", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "Mar", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "Mai", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "Seg", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "Nov", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "Out", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "Sáb", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "Set", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "Dom", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "Qui", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Ter", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Qua", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "novembro", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "outubro", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "setembro", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "abr", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "ago", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "dez", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "fev", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "sex", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "jan", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "jul", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "jun", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "mar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "mai", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "seg", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "nov", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "out", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "sáb", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "set", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "dom", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "qui", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "ter", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "qua", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Anos", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "Localizar", "Common.UI.SearchBar.tipCloseSearch": "Fechar pesquisa", @@ -40,18 +40,18 @@ "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeContrastDark": "Contraste escuro", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeDark": "Escuro", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeLight": "Claro", - "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeSystem": "O mesmo que o sistema", + "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeSystem": "Igual ao do sistema", "Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "Cancelar", "Common.UI.Window.closeButtonText": "Fechar", "Common.UI.Window.noButtonText": "Não", "Common.UI.Window.okButtonText": "OK", "Common.UI.Window.textConfirmation": "Confirmação", - "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "Não mostrar esta mensagem novamente", + "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "Não mostrar mensagem novamente", "Common.UI.Window.textError": "Erro", "Common.UI.Window.textInformation": "Informação", "Common.UI.Window.textWarning": "Aviso", "Common.UI.Window.yesButtonText": "Sim", - "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Não mostrar esta mensagem novamente", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Não mostrar mensagem novamente", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "As ações de copiar, cortar e colar usando as ações do menu de contexto serão realizadas apenas neste separador do editor.

Para copiar ou colar de ou para aplicações fora do separador do editor, use as seguintes combinações de teclas:", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textTitle": "Ações de copiar, cortar e colar", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCopy": "para Copiar", @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ "Common.Views.EmbedDialog.textTitle": "Incorporar", "Common.Views.EmbedDialog.textWidth": "Largura", "Common.Views.EmbedDialog.txtCopy": "Copiar para a área de transferência", - "Common.Views.EmbedDialog.warnCopy": "Erro do navegador! Utilize a tecla de atalho [Ctrl] + [C]", + "Common.Views.EmbedDialog.warnCopy": "Erro do navegador! Utilize o atalho [Ctrl] + [C]", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "Colar URL de uma imagem:", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "Este campo é obrigatório", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtNotUrl": "Este campo deve ser um URL no formato \"http://www.exemplo.com\"", @@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "A carregar", "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "Pasta para guardar", "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "A carregar", - "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "Selecione a fonte dos dados", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "Selecione a origem dos dados", "Common.Views.ShareDialog.textTitle": "Partilhar ligação", "Common.Views.ShareDialog.txtCopy": "Copiar para a área de transferência", - "Common.Views.ShareDialog.warnCopy": "Erro do navegador! Utilize a tecla de atalho [Ctrl] + [C]", + "Common.Views.ShareDialog.warnCopy": "Erro do navegador! Utilize o atalho [Ctrl] + [C]", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Falha na conversão.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Excedeu o tempo limite de conversão.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Erro", @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "A descarregar documento...", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar executar uma ação para a qual não tem permissões.
Por favor contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorBadImageUrl": "O URL da imagem está incorreto", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorConnectToServer": "Não foi possível guardar o documento. Verifique a sua ligação de rede ou contacte o seu administrador.
Ao clicar no botão OK, ser-lhe-á pedido para descarregar o documento.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorConnectToServer": "Não foi possível guardar o documento. Verifique a sua ligação de rede ou contacte o seu administrador.
Se clicar no botão OK, ser-lhe-á pedido para descarregar o documento.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorDataEncrypted": "Foram recebidas alterações cifradas que não puderam ser decifradas.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Código de erro: %1", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorEditingDownloadas": "Ocorreu um erro ao trabalhar no documento.
Utilize a opção 'Descarregar como...' para guardar uma cópia do ficheiro no computador.", @@ -101,27 +101,27 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a um dos seguintes formatos: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma apresentação (ppt, pptx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma folha de cálculo (xls, xlsx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "Os tipos de letra não foram carregados.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorServerVersion": "A versão do editor foi atualizada. A página será recarregada para aplicar as alterações.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionAbsolute": "A sessão de edição expirou. Tente recarregar a página.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionIdle": "Este documento não foi editado durante muito tempo. Tente recarregar a página.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionToken": "A ligação ao servidor foi interrompida. Tente recarregar a página.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionAbsolute": "A sessão de edição expirou. Recarregue a página.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionIdle": "Este documento não foi editado durante muito tempo. Recarregue a página.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionToken": "A ligação ao servidor foi interrompida. Recarregue a página.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSubmit": "Falha ao submeter.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorTextFormWrongFormat": "O valor introduzido não corresponde ao formato do campo.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorToken": "O 'token' de segurança do documento não foi formatado corretamente.
Entre em contato com o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
Entre em contacto com o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorToken": "O 'token' de segurança do documento não estáformatado corretamente.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersion": "A versão do ficheiro foi alterada. A página será recarregada.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro foi alterada.
Antes de poder continuar a trabalhar, é necessário descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e depois voltar a carregar esta página.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro alterada.
Antes de poder trabalhar, tem que descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e, depois, recarregue esta página.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "De momento, não é possível aceder ao ficheiro.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorViewerDisconnect": "Ligação perdida. Ainda pode ver o documento mas
não o conseguirá descarregar até que a ligação seja restaurada e a página recarregada.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorViewerDisconnect": "Ligação perdida. Ainda pode ver o documento mas não o
conseguirá descarregar até que a ligação seja restaurada e a página recarregada.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.mniImageFromFile": "Imagem de um ficheiro", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.mniImageFromStorage": "Imagem de um armazenamento", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.mniImageFromUrl": "Imagem de um URL", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.openErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.saveErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao guardar o ficheiro.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.saveErrorTextDesktop": "Este ficheiro não pode ser guardado ou criado.
Os motivos podem ser:
1. O ficheiro é apenas de leitura.
2. O ficheiro está a ser editado por outro utilizador.
3. O disco está cheio ou danificado.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "A ligação está muito lenta e alguns dos componentes não foram carregados. Tente recarregar a página.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.saveErrorTextDesktop": "Este ficheiro não pode ser guardado ou criado.
Os motivos podem ser:
1. O ficheiro é apenas de leitura.
2. O ficheiro está a ser editado por outro utilizador.
3. O disco está cheio ou danificado.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "A ligação está muito lenta e alguns dos componentes não foram carregados. Recarregue a página.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textAnonymous": "Anónimo", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textBuyNow": "Visitar site", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textCloseTip": "Clique para fechar a dica.", @@ -129,9 +129,9 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textGotIt": "Percebi", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textGuest": "Convidado", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "A carregar documento", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textNoLicenseTitle": "Limite de licença atingido", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textNoLicenseTitle": "Atingiu o limite da licença", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textOf": "de", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textRequired": "Preencha todos os campos obrigatório para submeter o formulário.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textRequired": "Preencha todos os campos obrigatório para enviar o formulário.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSaveAs": "Guardar como PDF", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSaveAsDesktop": "Guardar como...", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSubmited": "Formulário submetido com sucesso
Clique para fechar a dica", @@ -150,16 +150,17 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Erro desconhecido.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "O seu navegador não é suportado.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "Formato de imagem desconhecido.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "A imagem é demasiado grande. O tamanho máximo é de 25 MB.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "A imagem é muito grande. O tamanho máximo permitido é de 25 MB.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "Aguarde...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acesso recusado para utilizadores anónimos.
O documento será aberto no modo de leitura.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "Licença inativa.
Contacte o administrador de sistemas.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas a %1 editores. Este documento será aberto no modo de leitura.
Contacte o administrador para obter mais detalhes.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas aos editores %1. Este documento será aberto no modo de leitura.
Contacte o administrador para obter mais detalhes.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "A sua licença expirou.
Deve atualizar a licença e recarregar a página.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Licença expirada.
Não pode editar o documento.
Por favor contacte o administrador de sistemas.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "Tem que renovar a sua licença.
A edição de documentos está limitada.
Contacte o administrador de sistemas para obter acesso total.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de %1 editores. Contacte o seu administrador para obter detalhes.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnNoLicense": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas a %1 editores. Este documento será aberto no modo de leitura.
Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para saber mais sobre os termos de licenciamento.", - "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Atingiu o limite de %1 editores. Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para obter mais informações.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de utilizadores para os editores %1. Contacte o seu administrador para obter detalhes.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnNoLicense": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas aos editores %1. Este documento será aberto no modo de leitura.
Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para saber mais sobre os termos de licenciamento.", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Atingiu o limite de utilizadores para os editores %1. Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para obter mais informações.", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textClear": "Limpar todos os campos", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textClearField": "Limpar campo", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textCopy": "Copiar", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/si.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/si.json index b52ef792e7..f4e6c5368b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/si.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/si.json @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "නොදන්නා අනුරුවක ආකෘතියකි.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "අනුරුව ඉතා විශාලට. උ. ප්‍රමාණය මෙ.බ. 25.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "කරුණාකර, රැඳෙන්න...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික පරිශ්‍රීලකයින් සඳහා ප්‍රවේශය ප්‍රතික්‍ෂේපිතයි.
මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වනු ඇත.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත.
කරුණාකර ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට පැමිණ ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ.
තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "ඔබගේ බලපත්‍රය කල් ඉකුත්ව ඇත.
බලපත්‍රය යාවත්කාල කර පිටුව නැවුම් කරන්න.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh-tw.json index cf660dfbab..bcd12e1328 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -96,12 +96,18 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "該文件受密碼保護，無法打開。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "此檔案超過這主機設定的限制的大小
想了解更多資訊，請聯絡您的文件服務主機(Document Server)的管理者。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "儲存文件時發生錯誤。請使用“下載為”選項將文件儲存到電腦機硬碟中，或稍後再試。", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "字體未載入。
請聯絡文件服務(Document Server)管理員。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorServerVersion": "編輯器版本已更新。該頁面將被重新加載以應用更改。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionAbsolute": "此文件編輯的會期已經過時。請重新載入此頁面。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionIdle": "此文件已經在編輯狀態有很長時間, 請重新載入此頁面。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSessionToken": "與服務器的連接已中斷。請重新加載頁面。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorSubmit": "傳送失敗", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorTextFormWrongFormat": "輸入的值與欄位格式不符。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorToken": "文檔安全令牌的格式不正確。
請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "此文件安全憑證(Security Token)已過期。
請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersion": "文件版本已更改。該頁面將重新加載。", @@ -130,6 +136,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSaveAsDesktop": "另存新檔", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.textSubmited": "表格傳送成功
點此關閉提示", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleLicenseExp": "證件過期", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleLicenseNotActive": "授權未啟用", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleServerVersion": "編輯器已更新", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.titleUpdateVersion": "版本已更改", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.txtArt": "在這輸入文字", @@ -145,6 +152,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "圖片格式未知。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大大小為25MB。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "請耐心等待...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名使用者無法存取。
此文件將僅供檢視。", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "授權未啟用。
請聯絡您的管理員。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "您的系統已經達到同時編輯連線的 %1 編輯者。只能以檢視模式開啟此文件。
進一步訊息, 請聯繫您的管理者。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "您的授權證已過期.
請更新您的授權證並重新整理頁面。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "授權過期
您已沒有編輯文件功能的授權
請與您的管理者聯繫。", @@ -153,6 +162,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnNoLicense": "您的系統已經達到同時編輯連線的 %1 編輯者。只能以檢視模式開啟此文件。
請聯繫 %1 銷售團隊來取得個人升級的需求。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnNoLicenseUsers": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。與％1銷售團隊聯繫以了解個人升級條款。", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textClear": "清除所有段落", + "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textClearField": "清除字段", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textCopy": "複製", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textCut": "剪下", "DE.Views.ApplicationView.textFitToPage": "切合至頁面", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh.json b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh.json index 5dc804c2cb..78595289e8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/forms/locale/zh.json @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageExtMessage": "未知图像格式。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.uploadImageSizeMessage": "图片太大了。最大允许的大小为 25 MB.", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.waitText": "请稍候...", + "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseAnonymous": "拒绝匿名用户的访问。
本文档将以仅查看模式而打开。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseBefore": "许可证未激活。
请联系管理员。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExceeded": "您已达到同时连接 %1 编辑器的限制。该文档将打开以查看。
请联系管理员以了解更多。", "DE.Controllers.ApplicationController.warnLicenseExp": "您的许可证已过期。
请更新您的许可证并刷新页面。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js index 7c8d8f54e6..46698f99a3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js @@ -100,6 +100,7 @@ define([ can_copycut: undefined, pgmargins: undefined, fontsize: undefined, + type_fontsize: undefined, in_equation: false, in_chart: false, linenum_apply: Asc.c_oAscSectionApplyType.All, @@ -479,9 +480,20 @@ define([ }, onApiFontSize: function(size) { - if (this._state.fontsize !== size) { - this.toolbar.cmbFontSize.setValue(size); - this._state.fontsize = size; + var type = this._state.type_fontsize; + if (this.toolbar.cmbFontSize && this._state.type_fontsize === 'string') { + var strValue = size + '_str', + rec = this.toolbar.cmbFontSize.store.findWhere({ + value: strValue + }); + if (!rec) { + type = 'number'; + } + } + var val = type === 'string' ? size + '_str' : size; + if (this._state.fontsize !== val) { + this.toolbar.cmbFontSize.setValue(val); + this._state.fontsize = val; } }, @@ -1280,8 +1292,9 @@ define([ onFontSizeSelect: function(combo, record) { this._state.fontsize = undefined; + this._state.type_fontsize = typeof record.value; if (this.api) - this.api.put_TextPrFontSize(record.value); + this.api.put_TextPrFontSize(this._state.type_fontsize === 'string' ? parseFloat(record.value) : record.value); Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('edit:complete', this.toolbar); Common.component.Analytics.trackEvent('ToolBar', 'Font Size'); @@ -1296,7 +1309,8 @@ define([ displayValue: record.value }); - if (!item) { + if (!item || isNaN(Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(record.value))) { + me._state.type_fontsize = 'number'; value = /^\+?(\d*(\.|,)?\d+)$|^\+?(\d+(\.|,)?\d*)$/.exec(record.value); if (!value) { @@ -1474,8 +1488,9 @@ define([ skipRenderOnChange: true, group : picker.options.listSettings.recentGroup, type: 0}, {at: 0}); - if (recents && recents.length>=picker.options.listSettings.recentCount) - picker.store.remove(recents[recents.length]); + recents = picker.store.where({type: 0}); + if (recents && recents.length>picker.options.listSettings.recentCount) + picker.store.remove(recents.slice(picker.options.listSettings.recentCount, recents.length)); this.toolbar.saveListPresetToStorage(picker); }, @@ -3400,6 +3415,12 @@ define([ var me = this; me.appOptions = config; + var lang = config.lang ? config.lang.toLowerCase() : 'en', + langPrefix = lang.split(/[\-_]/)[0]; + if (langPrefix === 'zh' && lang !== 'zh-tw' && lang !== 'zh_tw') { + me._state.type_fontsize = 'string'; + } + this.btnsComment = []; if ( config.canCoAuthoring && config.canComments ) { this.btnsComment = Common.Utils.injectButtons(this.toolbar.$el.find('.slot-comment'), 'tlbtn-addcomment-', 'toolbar__icon btn-menu-comments', this.toolbar.capBtnComment, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/FormsTab.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/FormsTab.js index 3efa0d505c..970167d109 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/FormsTab.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/FormsTab.js @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ define([ this.btnClear = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', - iconCls: 'toolbar__icon clear-style', + iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-clear-style', caption: this.textClear, visible: false, dataHint: '1', @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ define([ this.btnPrevForm = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', - iconCls: 'toolbar__icon previous-field', + iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-previous-field', lock: [ _set.previewReviewMode, _set.lostConnect, _set.disableOnStart, _set.docLockView, _set.docLockComments], caption: this.capBtnPrev, visible: false, @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ define([ this.btnNextForm = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', - iconCls: 'toolbar__icon next-field', + iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-next-field', lock: [ _set.previewReviewMode, _set.lostConnect, _set.disableOnStart, _set.docLockView, _set.docLockComments], caption: this.capBtnNext, visible: false, @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ define([ if (this.appConfig.canSubmitForms) { this.btnSubmit = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', - iconCls: 'toolbar__icon submit-form', + iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-submit-form', lock: [_set.lostConnect, _set.disableOnStart], caption: this.capBtnSubmit, // disabled: this.appConfig.isEdit && this.appConfig.canFeatureContentControl && this.appConfig.canFeatureForms, // disable only for edit mode, @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ define([ this.btnSaveForm = new Common.UI.Button({ cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', lock: [_set.lostConnect, _set.disableOnStart], - iconCls: 'toolbar__icon save-form', + iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-save-form', caption: this.appConfig.canRequestSaveAs || !!this.appConfig.saveAsUrl || this.appConfig.isOffline ? this.capBtnSaveForm : this.capBtnDownloadForm, // disabled: this.appConfig.isEdit && this.appConfig.canFeatureContentControl && this.appConfig.canFeatureForms, // disable only for edit mode, dataHint: '1', diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/MailMergeSettings.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/MailMergeSettings.js index 0f0ea6c1af..b72453c3c0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/MailMergeSettings.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/MailMergeSettings.js @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ define([ if (this.btnInsField.menu.items.length<1) { _.each(this._state.fieldsList, function(field, index) { var mnu = new Common.UI.MenuItem({ - caption: '«' + field + '»', + caption: '«' + Common.Utils.String.htmlEncode(field) + '»', field: field }).on('click', function(item, e) { if (me.api) { diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/RolesManagerDlg.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/RolesManagerDlg.js index 16acc80775..0f8e922f16 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/RolesManagerDlg.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/RolesManagerDlg.js @@ -356,7 +356,6 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/RolesManagerDlg.template', }, txtTitle: 'Manage Roles', - closeButtonText : 'Close', textNew: 'New', textEdit: 'Edit', textDelete: 'Delete', diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js index 097a3913c6..9da79b1c49 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js @@ -1465,28 +1465,10 @@ define([ this.cmbFontSize = new Common.UI.ComboBox({ cls: 'input-group-nr', - menuStyle: 'min-width: 55px;', + menuCls: 'scrollable-menu', + menuStyle: 'min-width: 55px;max-height: 454px;', lock: [_set.paragraphLock, _set.headerLock, _set.richEditLock, _set.plainEditLock, _set.previewReviewMode, _set.viewFormMode, _set.lostConnect, _set.disableOnStart, _set.docLockView, _set.docLockForms, _set.docLockComments], hint: this.tipFontSize, - data: [ - {value: 8, displayValue: "8"}, - {value: 9, displayValue: "9"}, - {value: 10, displayValue: "10"}, - {value: 11, displayValue: "11"}, - {value: 12, displayValue: "12"}, - {value: 14, displayValue: "14"}, - {value: 16, displayValue: "16"}, - {value: 18, displayValue: "18"}, - {value: 20, displayValue: "20"}, - {value: 22, displayValue: "22"}, - {value: 24, displayValue: "24"}, - {value: 26, displayValue: "26"}, - {value: 28, displayValue: "28"}, - {value: 36, displayValue: "36"}, - {value: 48, displayValue: "48"}, - {value: 72, displayValue: "72"}, - {value: 96, displayValue: "96"} - ], dataHint: '1', dataHintDirection: 'top' }); @@ -1779,6 +1761,71 @@ define([ onAppReady: function (config) { var me = this; + if (me.cmbFontSize) { + var lang = config.lang ? config.lang.toLowerCase() : 'en', + langPrefix = lang.split(/[\-_]/)[0]; + var fontSizeData = (langPrefix === 'zh' && lang !== 'zh-tw' && lang !== 'zh_tw') ? [ + {value: '42_str', displayValue: "初号"}, + {value: '36_str', displayValue: "小初"}, + {value: '26_str', displayValue: "一号"}, + {value: '24_str', displayValue: "小一"}, + {value: '22_str', displayValue: "二号"}, + {value: '18_str', displayValue: "小二"}, + {value: '16_str', displayValue: "三号"}, + {value: '15_str', displayValue: "小三"}, + {value: '14_str', displayValue: "四号"}, + {value: '12_str', displayValue: "小四"}, + {value: '10.5_str', displayValue: "五号"}, + {value: '9_str', displayValue: "小五"}, + {value: '7.5_str', displayValue: "六号"}, + {value: '6.5_str', displayValue: "小六"}, + {value: '5.5_str', displayValue: "七号"}, + {value: '5_str', displayValue: "八号"}, + {value: 5, displayValue: "5"}, + {value: 5.5, displayValue: "5.5"}, + {value: 6.5, displayValue: "6.5"}, + {value: 7.5, displayValue: "7.5"}, + {value: 8, displayValue: "8"}, + {value: 9, displayValue: "9"}, + {value: 10, displayValue: "10"}, + {value: 10.5, displayValue: "10.5"}, + {value: 11, displayValue: "11"}, + {value: 12, displayValue: "12"}, + {value: 14, displayValue: "14"}, + {value: 15, displayValue: "15"}, + {value: 16, displayValue: "16"}, + {value: 18, displayValue: "18"}, + {value: 20, displayValue: "20"}, + {value: 22, displayValue: "22"}, + {value: 24, displayValue: "24"}, + {value: 26, displayValue: "26"}, + {value: 28, displayValue: "28"}, + {value: 36, displayValue: "36"}, + {value: 42, displayValue: "42"}, + {value: 48, displayValue: "48"}, + {value: 72, displayValue: "72"}, + {value: 96, displayValue: "96"} + ] : [ + {value: 8, displayValue: "8"}, + {value: 9, displayValue: "9"}, + {value: 10, displayValue: "10"}, + {value: 11, displayValue: "11"}, + {value: 12, displayValue: "12"}, + {value: 14, displayValue: "14"}, + {value: 16, displayValue: "16"}, + {value: 18, displayValue: "18"}, + {value: 20, displayValue: "20"}, + {value: 22, displayValue: "22"}, + {value: 24, displayValue: "24"}, + {value: 26, displayValue: "26"}, + {value: 28, displayValue: "28"}, + {value: 36, displayValue: "36"}, + {value: 48, displayValue: "48"}, + {value: 72, displayValue: "72"}, + {value: 96, displayValue: "96"} + ]; + me.cmbFontSize.setData(fontSizeData); + } (new Promise( function(resolve, reject) { resolve(); })).then(function () { @@ -2366,8 +2413,8 @@ define([ '{"Type":"bullet","Lvl":[{"lvlJc":"left","suff":"tab","numFmt":{"val":"bullet"},"lvlText":"–","rPr":{"rFonts":{"ascii":"Arial","cs":"Arial","eastAsia":"Arial","hAnsi":"Arial"}}}]}' ]; - var listSettings = {recentPath: 'de-recent-bullets', recentCount: 8, recentGroup: 'menu-bullets-group-recent', docGroup: 'menu-bullets-group-doc', docName: this.txtGroupBulletDoc}, - recents = this.loadListPresetsFromStorage(listSettings.recentPath, listSettings.recentGroup), + var listSettings = {recentPath: 'de-recent-bullets', recentCount: 6, recentGroup: 'menu-bullets-group-recent', docGroup: 'menu-bullets-group-doc', docName: this.txtGroupBulletDoc}, + recents = this.loadListPresetsFromStorage(listSettings.recentPath, listSettings.recentGroup, listSettings.recentCount), groups = (recents.length>0) ? [{id: listSettings.recentGroup, caption: this.txtGroupRecent, type: 0}] : [], libGroup = 'menu-bullets-group-lib'; groups.push({id: libGroup, caption: this.txtGroupBulletLib, type: 1}); @@ -2413,8 +2460,8 @@ define([ '{"Type":"number","Lvl":[{"lvlJc":"left","numFmt":{"val":"russianLower"},"lvlText":"%1)"}]}' ]; - listSettings = {recentPath: 'de-recent-numbering', recentCount: 6, recentGroup: 'menu-numbering-group-recent', docGroup: 'menu-numbering-group-doc', docName: this.txtGroupNumDoc}; - recents = this.loadListPresetsFromStorage(listSettings.recentPath, listSettings.recentGroup); + listSettings = {recentPath: 'de-recent-numbering', recentCount: 8, recentGroup: 'menu-numbering-group-recent', docGroup: 'menu-numbering-group-doc', docName: this.txtGroupNumDoc}; + recents = this.loadListPresetsFromStorage(listSettings.recentPath, listSettings.recentGroup, listSettings.recentCount); libGroup = 'menu-numbering-group-lib'; groups = (recents.length>0) ? [{id: listSettings.recentGroup, caption: this.txtGroupRecent, type: 0}] : []; groups.push({id: libGroup, caption: this.txtGroupNumLib, type: 1}); @@ -2452,8 +2499,8 @@ define([ _conf && this.mnuNumbersPicker.selectByIndex(_conf.index, true); _conf = this.mnuMultilevelPicker.conf; - listSettings = {recentPath: 'de-recent-multilevels', recentCount: 6, recentGroup: 'menu-multilevels-group-recent', docGroup: 'menu-multilevels-group-doc', docName: this.txtGroupMultiDoc}; - recents = this.loadListPresetsFromStorage(listSettings.recentPath, listSettings.recentGroup); + listSettings = {recentPath: 'de-recent-multilevels', recentCount: 8, recentGroup: 'menu-multilevels-group-recent', docGroup: 'menu-multilevels-group-doc', docName: this.txtGroupMultiDoc}; + recents = this.loadListPresetsFromStorage(listSettings.recentPath, listSettings.recentGroup, listSettings.recentCount); libGroup = 'menu-multilevels-group-lib'; groups = (recents.length>0) ? [{id: listSettings.recentGroup, caption: this.txtGroupRecent, type: 0}] : []; groups.push({id: libGroup, caption: this.txtGroupMultiLib, type: 1}); @@ -2868,11 +2915,11 @@ define([ this.btnPageMargins.menu.items[0].setVisible(false); }, - loadListPresetsFromStorage: function(path, groupId) { + loadListPresetsFromStorage: function(path, groupId, recentCount) { var recents = Common.localStorage.getItem(path), arr = []; recents = recents ? JSON.parse(recents) : []; - for (var i=0; i Un cop eliminada, es podrà crear la funció predeterminada.", @@ -2793,7 +2792,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Llista d'ompliment", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Desar com a formulari", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Color de fons", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Canvia la forma automàtica", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Canvia la forma", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Color", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Emplena", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Color de primer pla", @@ -3000,7 +2999,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Espaiat entre cel·les", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternatiu", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripció", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, autoforma, gràfic o taula.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, forma, gràfic o taula.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Títol", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Canvia la mida automàticament per ajustar-la al contingut", @@ -3277,7 +3276,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserir un quadre de text horitzontal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir una imatge", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Inserir un número de pàgina", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir una forma automàtica", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir una forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Inserir una imatge SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir un símbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir una taula", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json index 1b87544329..42fe36016c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Baggrund", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "Tekst", - "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Adresse:", + "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "adresse:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "Licenstager", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "Licensgiver", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "email:", @@ -2001,7 +2001,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Tilpasning", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ tekst", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autofigur, diagram eller tabel.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, figur, diagram eller tabel.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Vinkel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pile", @@ -2592,7 +2592,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Afstand mellem celler", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ tekst", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive læst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autofigur, diagram eller tabel.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive læst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, figur, diagram eller tabel.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Tekst", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Tilpas automatisk størrelse til at passe indholdet", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json index eb86141e64..2413d59a67 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json @@ -376,6 +376,13 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Strg", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Umschalt", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "schwarz", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "blau", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "grau", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "grün", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "rot", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "weiß", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "gelb", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Adresse:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LIZENZNEHMER", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LIZENZGEBER", @@ -452,6 +459,12 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "zum Einfügen", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Ladevorgang...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Freigabeeinstellungen", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Radierer", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Auswahl", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Radierer", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Textmarker", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Stift", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Auswahl", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Diagramm bearbeiten", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Schließen", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Speichern und beenden", @@ -2261,7 +2274,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Ausrichtung", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativer Text", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschreibung", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, AutoForm, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, Form, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Winkel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pfeile", @@ -2721,7 +2734,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Befüllungsliste", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Als Formular speichern", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Hintergrundfarbe", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "AutoForm ändern", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Form ändern", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farbe", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Füllung", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Vordergrundfarbe", @@ -2928,7 +2941,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativer Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschreibung", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, AutoForm, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, Form, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Größe an Inhalt automatisch anpassen", @@ -3158,6 +3171,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Hochgestellt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "Im aktuellen Absatz verbieten", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Zusammenarbeit", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Zeichnen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Datei", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Startseite", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Einfügen", @@ -3204,7 +3218,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Horizontales Textfeld einfügen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Bild einfügen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Seitenzahl einfügen", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "AutoForm einfügen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Form einfügen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "SmartArt einfügen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Symbol einfügen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Tabelle einfügen", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/el.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/el.json index c31ff389ba..2e9776d03d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/el.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/el.json @@ -154,14 +154,23 @@ "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousBlockProcess": "Συνεχής διαδικασία μπλοκ", "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousCycle": "Συνεχής κύκλος", "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingArrows": "Συμβαλλόμενα Βέλη", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingText": "Συγκλίνον κείμενο", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCounterbalanceArrows": "Βέλη αντιστάθμισης", "Common.define.smartArt.textCycle": "Κύκλος", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCycleMatrix": "Πίνακας κύκλου", "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingBlockList": "Φθίνουσα λίστα μπλοκ", "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingProcess": "Φθίνουσα διαδικασία", "Common.define.smartArt.textDetailedProcess": "Λεπτομερής διαδικασία", "Common.define.smartArt.textDivergingArrows": "Αποκλίνοντα Βέλη", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDivergingRadial": "Αποκλίνουσα ακτινική", "Common.define.smartArt.textEquation": "Εξίσωση", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFramedTextPicture": "Εικόνα κειμένου με πλαίσιο", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFunnel": "Χωνί", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGear": "Γρανάζι", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGroupedList": "Ομαδοποιημένη λίστα", "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchy": "Ιεραρχία", "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchyList": "Λίστα ιεραρχίας", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInterconnectedBlockProcess": "Διασυνδεδεμένη διαδικασία μπλοκ", "Common.define.smartArt.textList": "Λίστα", "Common.define.smartArt.textNameAndTitleOrganizationChart": "Όνομα και Τίτλος", "Common.define.smartArt.textOpposingArrows": "Αντίθετα βέλη", @@ -174,9 +183,11 @@ "Common.define.smartArt.textProcess": "Διεργασία", "Common.define.smartArt.textProcessList": "Λίστα διεργασιών", "Common.define.smartArt.textPyramid": "Πυραμίδα", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRelationship": "Σχέση", "Common.define.smartArt.textReverseList": "Αντίστροφη λίστα", "Common.define.smartArt.textSpiralPicture": "Σπειροειδής εικόνα", "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureAccent": "Έμφαση εικόνας θέματος", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureAlternatingAccent": "Εναλλασσόμενος τόνος εικόνας θέματος", "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureGrid": "Πλέγμα εικόνας θέματος", "Common.define.smartArt.textTitlePictureLineup": "Σύνθεση εικόνων τίτλου", "Common.define.smartArt.textUpwardArrow": "Βέλος προς τα πάνω", @@ -193,6 +204,7 @@ "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalProcess": "Κάθετη διαδικασία", "Common.Translation.textMoreButton": "Περισσότερα", "Common.Translation.tipFileLocked": "Το έγγραφο είναι κλειδωμένο για επεξεργασία. Μπορείτε να κάνετε αλλαγές και να τις αποθηκεύσετε αργότερα ως τοπικό αντίγραφο.", + "Common.Translation.tipFileReadOnly": "Το αρχείο είναι μόνο για ανάγνωση. Για να διατηρήσετε τις αλλαγές σας, αποθηκεύστε το αρχείο με νέο όνομα ή σε διαφορετική θέση.", "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Δεν μπορείτε να επεξεργαστείτε αυτό το αρχείο επειδή επεξεργάζεται σε άλλη εφαρμογή.", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "Δημιουργία αντιγράφου", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "Άνοιγμα για προβολή", @@ -240,6 +252,7 @@ "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textNew": "Νέο", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textRGBErr": "Η τιμή που βάλατε δεν είναι αποδεκτή.
Παρακαλούμε βάλτε μια αριθμητική τιμή μεταξύ 0 και 255.", "Common.UI.HSBColorPicker.textNoColor": "Χωρίς Χρώμα", + "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnCalendar.textDate": "Επιλογή ημερομηνίας", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintHidePwd": "Απόκρυψη συνθηματικού", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintShowPwd": "Εμφάνιση συνθηματικού", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "Εύρεση", @@ -280,6 +293,32 @@ "Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "εκ", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtPt": "pt", "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", + "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", + "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Shift", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "Τόνος", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Παρασκήνιο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Μαύρο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "Μπλε", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "Ανοιχτό πράσινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "Καφέ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "Σκούρο μπλε", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "Σκοτεινότερο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "Σκούρο γκρι", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "Σκούρο πράσινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "Σκούρο μωβ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "Σκούρο κόκκινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "Σκούρο γαλαζοπράσινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "Σκουρο κιτρινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "Χρυσό", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "Γκρι", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "Πράσινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "Απαλό μπλε", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPink": "Ροζ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "Κόκκινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "Ρόδο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "Γαλαζοπράσινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "Κείμενο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "Κίτρινο", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Διεύθυνση: ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "ΑΔΕΙΟΔΕΚΤΗΣ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "ΑΔΕΙΟΔΟΤΗΣ", @@ -296,7 +335,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDelete": "Διαγραφή", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDoubleSpaces": "Εισαγωγή διπλού διαστήματος", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLCells": "Να γίνει κεφαλαίο το πρώτο γράμμα των κελιών του πίνακα", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLDont": "Μην χρησιμοποιείτε κεφαλαία μετά", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLSentence": "Κεφαλαιοποιήστε το πρώτο γράμμα των προτάσεων", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textForLangFL": "Εξαιρέσεις για τη γλώσσα:", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyperlink": "Μονοπάτια δικτύου και διαδικτύου με υπερσυνδέσμους", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyphens": "Παύλες (--) με πλατιά παύλα (—)", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Αυτόματη Διόρθωση Μαθηματικών", @@ -311,6 +352,7 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textResetAll": "Αρχικοποίηση στην προεπιλογή", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textRestore": "Επαναφορά", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Αυτόματη διόρθωση", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddFL": "Οι εξαιρέσεις πρέπει να περιέχουν μόνο τα γράμματα, κεφαλαία ή πεζά.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddRec": "Οι αναγνωρισμένες συναρτήσεις πρέπει να περιέχουν μόνο τα γράμματα A έως Z, κεφαλαία ή μικρά.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetRec": "Κάθε έκφραση που προσθέσατε θα αφαιρεθεί και ό,τι αφαιρέθηκε θα αποκατασταθεί. Θέλετε να συνεχίσετε;", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReplace": "Η καταχώρηση αυτόματης διόρθωσης για %1 υπάρχει ήδη. Θέλετε να την αντικαταστήσετε;", @@ -352,6 +394,12 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "για Επικόλληση", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Φόρτωση ...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Ρυθμίσεις Διαμοιρασμού", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Γόμα", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Επιλογή", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Γόμα", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Πένα", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Επιλογή", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Μέγεθος", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Συντάκτης Γραφήματος", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Κλείσιμο", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Αποθήκευση & Έξοδος", @@ -400,7 +448,7 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "Μέγεθος Πίνακα", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Διαίρεση Κελιού", "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Επιλογή γλώσσας εγγράφου", - "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Κλείσιμο Αρχείου", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Κλείσιμο αρχείου", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Κωδικοποίηση", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Το συνθηματικό είναι εσφαλμένο.", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtOpenFile": "Εισάγετε συνθηματικό για να ανοίξετε το αρχείο", @@ -543,6 +591,7 @@ "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textMatchUsingRegExp": "Ταίριασμα χρησιμοποιώντας κανονικές εκφράσεις (regexp)", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoMatches": "Χωρίς ταίριασμα", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoSearchResults": "Δεν υπάρχουν αποτελέσματα αναζήτησης", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textPartOfItemsNotReplaced": "Αντικαταστάθηκαν {0}/{1} στοιχεία. Τα υπόλοιπα {2} στοιχεία είναι κλειδωμένα από άλλους χρήστες.", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplace": "Αντικατάσταση", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceAll": "Αντικατάσταση Όλων", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceWith": "Αντικατάσταση με", @@ -597,7 +646,7 @@ "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Εύρος", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Πρόσφατα χρησιμοποιημένα σύμβολα", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Σύμβολο Καταχωρημένου", - "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Κλείσιμο Απλών Εισαγωγικών", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Κλείσιμο απλών εισαγωγικών", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Σύμβολο Τμήματος", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Πλήκτρο Συντόμευσης", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Απαλή Παύλα", @@ -609,6 +658,15 @@ "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textDontShow": "Να μην ερωτηθώ ξανά", "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textLabel": "Ετικέτα:", "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textLabelError": "Η ετικέτα δεν μπορεί να είναι κενή.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedComment": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται. Μπορείτε να εισάγετε μόνο σχόλια σε αυτό το έγγραφο.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedForms": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται. Μπορείτε να συμπληρώσετε μόνο φόρμες σε αυτό το έγγραφο.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedTrack": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται. Μπορείτε να επεξεργαστείτε αυτό το έγγραφο, αλλά όλες οι αλλαγές θα παρακολουθούνται.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedView": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται. Μπορείτε να δείτε μόνο αυτό το έγγραφο.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedComment": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται από άλλο χρήστη.\nΜπορείτε μόνο να εισάγετε σχόλια στο έγγραφο.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedForms": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται από άλλο χρήστη.\nΜπορείτε μόνο να συμπληρώσετε φόρμες μέσα στο έγγραφο.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedTrack": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται από άλλο χρήστη.\nΜπορείτε να το τροποποιήσετε, αλλά όλες οι αλλαγές θα καταγραφούν.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedView": "Το έγγραφο προστατεύεται από άλλο χρήστη.\nΜπορείτε μόνο να δείτε το έγγραφο.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasUnprotected": "Αναιρέθηκε η προστασία του εγγράφου.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Όλες οι μη αποθηκευμένες αλλαγές σε αυτό το έγγραφο θα χαθούν.
Κάντε κλικ στο «Ακύρωση» και στη συνέχεια στο «Αποθήκευση» για να τις αποθηκεύσετε. Κάντε κλικ στο «Εντάξει» για να απορρίψετε όλες τις μη αποθηκευμένες αλλαγές.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Έγγραφο χωρίς όνομα", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Προειδοποίηση", @@ -625,6 +683,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnReplaceString": "Το {0} δεν είναι έγκυρος ειδικός χαρακτήρας για το πεδίο αντικατάστασης.", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Φόρτωση των αλλαγών...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Φόρτωση των Αλλαγών", + "DE.Controllers.Main.confirmMaxChangesSize": "Το μέγεθος των ενεργειών υπερβαίνει τον περιορισμό που έχει οριστεί για τον διακομιστή σας.
Πατήστε \"Αναίρεση\" για να ακυρώσετε την τελευταία σας ενέργεια ή πατήστε \"Συνέχεια\" για να διατηρήσετε την ενέργεια τοπικά (πρέπει να κατεβάσετε το αρχείο ή να αντιγράψετε το περιεχόμενό του για να βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν θα χαθεί τίποτα).", "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Υπέρβαση χρονικού ορίου μετατροπής.", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Πατήστε \"Εντάξει\" για να επιστρέψετε στη λίστα εγγράφων.", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Σφάλμα", @@ -749,7 +808,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Η έκδοση άλλαξε", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "πάνω από", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtArt": "Το κείμενό σας εδώ", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Βασικά Σχήματα", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Βασικά σχήματα", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "παρακάτω", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "Σφάλμα! Ο σελιδοδείκτης δεν έχει οριστεί.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Κουμπιά", @@ -1004,6 +1063,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Παρακαλούμε, περιμένετε...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Η εφαρμογή έχει πενιχρές δυνατότητες στον IE9. Δοκιμάστε IE10 ή νεώτερο.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Η τρέχουσα ρύθμιση εστίασης του περιηγητή σας δεν υποστηρίζεται πλήρως. Παρακαλούμε επιστρέψτε στην προεπιλεγμένη μεγέθυνση πατώντας Ctrl+0.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Δεν επιτρέπεται η πρόσβαση για ανώνυμους χρήστες.
Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοίξει μόνο για προβολή.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Έχετε φτάσει το όριο για ταυτόχρονες συνδέσεις με συντάκτες %1. Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοιχτεί μόνο για προβολή.​​
Παρακαλούμε επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας για περισσότερες πληροφορίες.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Η άδειά σας έχει λήξει.
Παρακαλούμε ενημερώστε την άδεια χρήσης σας και ανανεώστε τη σελίδα.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Η άδεια έληξε.
Δεν έχετε πρόσβαση στη δυνατότητα επεξεργασίας εγγράφων.
Επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας.", @@ -1017,6 +1077,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Print.textMarginsLast": "Τελευταίο προσαρμοσμένο", "DE.Controllers.Print.txtCustom": "Προσαρμοσμένο", "DE.Controllers.Search.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Προειδοποίηση", + "DE.Controllers.Search.textNoTextFound": "Τα δεδομένα που αναζητάτε δεν βρέθηκαν. Παρακαλούμε προσαρμόστε τις επιλογές αναζήτησης.", "DE.Controllers.Search.textReplaceSkipped": "Η αντικατάσταση έχει γίνει. {0} περιστατικά παραλείφθηκαν.", "DE.Controllers.Search.textReplaceSuccess": "Η αναζήτηση έχει γίνει. {0}περιστατικά έχουν αντικατασταθεί", "DE.Controllers.Search.warnReplaceString": "{0} δεν είναι ένας έγκυρος ειδικός χαρακτήρας για το πλαίσιο Αντικατάσταση με.", @@ -1517,8 +1578,11 @@ "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtTitle": "Παραπομπή εντός κειμένου", "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtType": "Τύπος παραπομπής", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Αριθμός στηλών", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textEqualWidth": "Ίσο πλάτος στήλης", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Διαχωριστής στήλης", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Στήλες", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitleSpacing": "Διάστημα", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textWidth": "Πλάτος", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Ορισμός προεπιλεγμένης μορφής για {0}: \"{1}\"", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Ορισμός ως προεπιλογή", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Μορφοποιήσεις", @@ -1635,6 +1699,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Από Αρχείο", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Από Αποθηκευτικό Χώρο", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Από διεύθυνση URL", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textIndents": "Προσαρμογή εσοχών λίστας", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Ένωση με προηγούμενη λίστα", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textLeft": "Ολίσθηση κελιών αριστερά", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Νέος πίνακας", @@ -1689,7 +1754,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddTop": "Προσθήκη επάνω περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddVer": "Προσθήκη κατακόρυφης γραμμής", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAlignToChar": "Στοίχιση σε χαρακτήρα", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBehind": "Πίσω από το Κείμενο", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBehind": "Πίσω από το κείμενο", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBorderProps": "Ιδιότητες περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBottom": "Κάτω", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtColumnAlign": "Στοίχιση στήλης", @@ -1778,9 +1843,9 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Τουλάχιστον", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Αυτόματα", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Χρώμα Παρασκηνίου", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Χρώμα", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Χρώμα περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Κάντε κλικ στο διάγραμμα ή χρησιμοποιήστε τα κουμπιά για να επιλέξετε περιγράμματα", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Μέγεθος Περιγράμματος", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Μέγεθος περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Κάτω", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Κέντρο", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Στήλη", @@ -1846,6 +1911,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Αλλαγή δικαιωμάτων πρόσβασης", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Σχόλιο", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Δημιουργήθηκε", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtDocumentInfo": "Πληροφορίες εγγράφου", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtFastWV": "Γρήγορη Προβολή Δικτύου", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Φόρτωση ...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Τελευταία Τροποποίηση Από", @@ -1864,10 +1930,12 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Στατιστικά", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Θέμα", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Χαρακτήρες", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTags": "Ετικέτες", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Τίτλος", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Μεταφορτώθηκε", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Λέξεις", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtYes": "Ναι", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtAccessRights": "Δικαιώματα Πρόσβασης", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Αλλαγή δικαιωμάτων πρόσβασης", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Άτομα που έχουν δικαιώματα", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Προειδοποίηση", @@ -1878,6 +1946,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Επεξεργασία εγγράφου", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "Η επεξεργασία θα αφαιρέσει τις υπογραφές από το έγγραφο.
Θέλετε σίγουρα να συνεχίσετε;", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "Αυτό το έγγραφο έχει προστατευτεί με συνθηματικό", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtProtectDocument": "Κρυπτογραφήστε αυτό το έγγραφο με κωδικό πρόσβασης", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "Αυτό το έγγραφο πρέπει να υπογραφεί.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Προστέθηκαν έγκυρες υπογραφές στο έγγραφο. Το έγγραφο έχει προστασία επεξεργασίας.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Κάποιες από τις ψηφιακές υπογραφές του εγγράφου είναι άκυρες ή δεν επιβεβαιώθηκαν. Αποτρέπεται η επεξεργασία του.", @@ -1944,6 +2013,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Απενεργοποίηση όλων των μακροεντολών με ειδοποίηση", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "ως Windows", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWorkspace": "Χώρος εργασίας", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveAs.textDownloadAs": "Λήψη ως", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveCopy.textSaveCopyAs": "Αποθήκευση αντιγράφου ως", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAlways": "Πάντα", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAnyone": "Οποιοσδήποτε", @@ -1960,6 +2030,8 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textConnected": "Συνδεδεμένα πεδία", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCreditCard": "Αριθμός πιστωτικής κάρτας (π.χ. 4111-111111111-1111)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateField": "Πεδίο ημερομηνίας και ώρας", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateFormat": "Εμφάνιση της ημερομηνίας ως εξής", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDefValue": "Προεπιλεγμένη τιμή", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDelete": "Διαγραφή", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDigits": "Ψηφία", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDisconnect": "Αποσύνδεση", @@ -2020,6 +2092,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnView": "Προβολή Φόρμας", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capCreditCard": "Πιστωτική κάρτα", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capDateTime": "Ημερομηνία & Ώρα", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capZipCode": "ΤΚ", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textAnyone": "Οποιοσδήποτε", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textClear": "Εκκαθάριση Πεδίων", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textClearFields": "Εκκαθάριση Όλων των Πεδίων", @@ -2049,6 +2122,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipSubmit": "Υποβολή φόρμας", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipTextField": "Εισαγωγή πεδίου κειμένου", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipViewForm": "Προβολή φόρμας", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipZipCode": "Εισαγωγή ταχυδρομικού κώδικα", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtFixedDesc": "Εισαγωγή σταθερού πεδίου κειμένου", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtInlineDesc": "Εισαγωγή ενσωματωμένου πεδίου κειμένου", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtUntitled": "Άτιτλο", @@ -2122,18 +2196,18 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Στοίχιση", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Εναλλακτικό κείμενο", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Περιγραφή", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, αυτόματο σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Τίτλος", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Γωνία", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Βέλη", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Κλείδωμα αναλογίας", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Αυτόματο Ταίριασμα", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Μέγεθος Εκκίνησης", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Τεχνοτροπία Εκκίνησης", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Μέγεθος εκκίνησης", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Τεχνοτροπία εκκίνησης", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "παρακάτω", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBevel": "Πλάγια Τομή", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Κάτω", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottomMargin": "Κάτω Περιθώριο", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottomMargin": "Κάτω περιθώριο", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBtnWrap": "Αναδίπλωση Κειμένου", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCapType": "Αρχικό Γράμμα", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Κέντρο", @@ -2185,7 +2259,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWeightArrows": "Πλάτη & Βέλη", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Πλάτος", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "Τεχνοτροπία Αναδίπλωσης", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapBehindTooltip": "Πίσω από το Κείμενο", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapBehindTooltip": "Πίσω από το κείμενο", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapInFrontTooltip": "Μπροστά από το Κείμενο", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapInlineTooltip": "Εντός Κειμένου", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapSquareTooltip": "Τετράγωνο", @@ -2232,7 +2306,7 @@ "DE.Views.Links.capBtnTOF": "Πίνακας Εικόνων", "DE.Views.Links.confirmDeleteFootnotes": "Θέλετε να διαγράψετε όλες τις υποσημειώσεις;", "DE.Views.Links.confirmReplaceTOF": "Θέλετε να αντικαταστήσετε τον επιλεγμένο πίνακα εικόνων;", - "DE.Views.Links.mniConvertNote": "Μετατροπή Όλων των Σημειώσεων", + "DE.Views.Links.mniConvertNote": "Μετατροπή όλων των σημειώσεων", "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Διαγραφή Όλων των Σημειώσεων", "DE.Views.Links.mniInsEndnote": "Εισαγωγή Σημείωσης Τέλους", "DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "Εισαγωγή Υποσημείωσης", @@ -2259,20 +2333,33 @@ "DE.Views.Links.titleUpdateTOF": "Ενημέρωση Πίνακα Εικόνων", "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "Να μην εμφανίζεται στον Πίνακα Περιεχομένων", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "Επίπεδο", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textSpace": "Κενό", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtIndent": "Εσοχή κειμένου", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "Θέση κουκκίδας", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Αυτόματα", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "Έντονα", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Κέντρο", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textHide": "Απόκρυψη ρυθμίσεων", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Αριστερά", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Επίπεδο", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textMore": "Εμφάνιση περισσότερων ρυθμίσεων", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Προεπισκόπηση", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Δεξιά", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelectLevel": "Επιλέξτε επίπεδο", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSpace": "Κενό", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Στοίχιση", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "σε", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Κουκκίδα", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Χρώμα", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "Γραμματοσειρά", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtIndent": "Εσοχή κειμένου", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Ως κείμενο", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Νέα κουκίδα", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "Κανένα", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Μέγεθος", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtStart": "Έναρξη σε", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Σύμβολο", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTabStop": "Προσθήκη στηλοθέτη στο", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Ρυθμίσεις Λίστας", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Τύπος", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", @@ -2448,13 +2535,13 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Τουλάχιστον", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Πολλαπλό", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Χρώμα Παρασκηνίου", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Βασικό Κείμενο", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Χρώμα", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Βασικό κείμενο", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Χρώμα περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Κάντε κλικ στο διάγραμμα ή χρησιμοποιήστε τα κουμπιά για να επιλέξετε περιγράμματα και να εφαρμόσετε την επιλεγμένη τεχνοτροπία σε αυτά", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Μέγεθος Περιγράμματος", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Μέγεθος περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Κάτω", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Κεντραρισμένη", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Απόσταση Χαρακτήρων", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Απόσταση χαρακτήρων", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textContext": "Συμφραζόμενα", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textContextDiscret": "Συμφραζόμενα και ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textContextHistDiscret": "Συμφραζόμενα και ιστορικά", @@ -2504,6 +2591,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsWide": "Πλατύ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Όλες οι σελίδες", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "Κάτω Μέρος", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Αντίγραφα", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Τρέχουσα σελίδα", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustom": "Προσαρμοσμένο", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Προσαρμοσμένη εκτύπωση", @@ -2548,12 +2636,14 @@ "DE.Views.RoleDeleteDlg.textLabel": "Για να διαγράψετε αυτό το ρόλο, πρέπει να μετακινήσετε τα πεδία που σχετίζονται με αυτό σε άλλο ρόλο.", "DE.Views.RoleDeleteDlg.textTitle": "Διαγραφή ρόλου", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textName": "Όνομα ρόλου", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Επεξεργασία ρόλου", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Δημιουργία νέου ρόλου", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Οποιοσδήποτε", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Διαγραφή", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Είστε βέβαιοι ότι θέλετε να διαγράψετε το ρόλο {0};
Μόλις διαγραφεί, θα δημιουργηθεί ο προεπιλεγμένος ρόλος.", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDescription": "Προσθήκη ρόλων και ορισμός σειράς με την οποία οι υπογράφοντες λαμβάνουν και υπογράφουν το έγγραφο", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDown": "Μετακίνηση ρόλου προς τα κάτω", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textEdit": "Επεξεργασία", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textNew": "Νέο", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textUp": "Μετακίνηση ρόλου προς τα πάνω", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnCantDelete": "Δεν μπορείτε να διαγράψετε αυτόν τον ρόλο επειδή έχει συσχετισμένα πεδία.", @@ -2563,7 +2653,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textEmpty": "Δεν υπάρχουν ρόλοι που να σχετίζονται με πεδία.", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Αποθήκευση ως φόρμα", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Χρώμα παρασκηνίου", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Αλλαγή Αυτόματου Σχήματος", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Αλλαγή Σχήματος", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Χρώμα", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Γέμισμα", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Χρώμα προσκηνίου", @@ -2765,20 +2855,20 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Απόσταση μεταξύ κελιών", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Εναλλακτικό κείμενο", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Περιγραφή", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, αυτόματο σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Τίτλος", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Κείμενο", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Αυτόματη αλλαγή μεγέθους για προσαρμογή περιεχομένου", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Παρασκήνιο Κελιού", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "παρακάτω", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Χρώμα", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Χρώμα περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Κάντε κλικ στο διάγραμμα ή χρησιμοποιήστε τα κουμπιά για να επιλέξετε περιγράμματα και να εφαρμόσετε την επιλεγμένη τεχνοτροπία σε αυτά", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBordersBackgroung": "Περιγράμματα & Παρασκήνιο", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Μέγεθος Περιγράμματος", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Μέγεθος περιγράμματος", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Κάτω", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellOptions": "Επιλογές Κελιού", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellOptions": "Επιλογές κελιού", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellProps": "Κελί", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellSize": "Μέγεθος Κελιού", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellSize": "Μέγεθος κελιού", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Κέντρο", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenterTooltip": "Κέντρο", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Χρήση προεπιλεγμένων περιθωρίων", @@ -2789,7 +2879,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Αριστερά", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeftTooltip": "Αριστερά", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Περιθώριο", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Περιθώρια Κελιού", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Περιθώρια κελιού", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Μέτρηση σε", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Μετακίνηση αντικειμένου με κείμενο", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Μόνο για επιλεγμένα κελιά", @@ -2945,7 +3035,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Δύο", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "Πολλαπλές επιλογές", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContinuous": "Συνεχόμενα", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Συνεχόμενη Σελίδα", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Συνεχόμενη σελίδα", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCustomLineNumbers": "Επιλογές Αρίθμησης Γραμμών", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Ημερομηνία", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "Αναδυόμενη λίστα", @@ -2995,6 +3085,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Εκθέτης", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "Κατάπνιξη για Τρέχουσα Παράγραφο", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Συνεργασία", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Σχεδίαση", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Αρχείο", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Αρχική", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Εισαγωγή", @@ -3041,11 +3132,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Εισαγωγή οριζόντιου πλαισίου κειμένου", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Εισαγωγή εικόνας", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Εισαγωγή Αριθμού Σελίδας", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Εισαγωγή αυτόματου σχήματος", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Εισαγωγή σχήματος", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Εισαγωγή συμβόλου", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Εισαγωγή πίνακα", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Εισαγωγή πλαισίου κειμένου", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Εισαγωγή Τεχνοκειμένου", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertVerticalText": "Εισαγωγή κάθετου πλαισίου κειμένου", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineNumbers": "Εμφάνιση αριθμών γραμμών", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Διάστιχο παραγράφου", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "Συγχώνευση αλληλογραφίας", @@ -3084,6 +3176,9 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Επεξεργασία υδατοσήμου", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Οριζόντια Κατανομή", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Κατακόρυφη Κατανομή", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletDoc": "Κουκκίδες εγγράφου", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "Βιβλιοθήκη κουκκίδων", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "Μορφές αρίθμησης εγγράφων", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Στοίχιση στο περιθώριο", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Στοίχιση Επιλεγμένων Αντικειμένων", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Στοίχιση στη σελίδα", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json index 0e1d914db3..eb439e2852 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Enter your message here", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Show Main window", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anonymous", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Close", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "The object is disabled because it is being edited by another user.", @@ -2323,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alignment", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative text", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, shape, chart, or table.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Arrows", @@ -2798,7 +2799,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "No highlighting", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Edit Role", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Create New Role", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Close", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Anyone", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Delete", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Are you sure you want to delete the role {0}?
Once deleted, the default role will be created.", @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Filling list", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Save as Form", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Background color", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Change Autoshape", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Change Shape", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Color", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Fill", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Foreground color", @@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Spacing between cells", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, shape, chart, or table.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatically resize to fit contents", @@ -3302,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Insert horizontal text box", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insert image", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Insert page number", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insert autoshape", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insert shape", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Insert SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insert symbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insert table", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json index e0d16c2a77..a25cd691a9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Introduzca su mensaje aquí", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Mostrar ventana principal", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anónimo", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Cerrar", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "El objeto está desactivado porque lo está editando otro usuario.", @@ -118,6 +119,9 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Gráfico circular", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "Circular 3D", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Dispersión)", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "Radial", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarFilled": "Radial relleno", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarMarker": "Radial con marcadores", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "Dispersión", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "Dispersión con líneas rectas", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "Dispersión con líneas rectas y marcadores", @@ -291,6 +295,7 @@ "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "Crear una copia", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "Abrir en solo lectura", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textAutoColor": "Automático", + "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textEyedropper": "Cuentagotas", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "Más colores", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Abril", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Agosto", @@ -334,6 +339,7 @@ "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textNew": "Nuevo", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textRGBErr": "El valor introducido es incorrecto.
Por favor, introduzca un valor numérico de 0 a 225.", "Common.UI.HSBColorPicker.textNoColor": "Sin color", + "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnCalendar.textDate": "Seleccionar fecha", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintHidePwd": "Ocultar la contraseña", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintShowPwd": "Mostrar la contraseña", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "Buscar", @@ -356,6 +362,7 @@ "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textRecentColors": "Colores recientes", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Colores estándar", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Colores del tema", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textTransparent": "Transparente", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeClassicLight": "Clásico claro", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeContrastDark": "Contraste oscuro", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeDark": "Oscuro", @@ -376,6 +383,44 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Control", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Mayús", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "Acento", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "Aguamarina", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Fondo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Negro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "Azul", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "Verde vivo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "Marrón", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "Azul oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "Más oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "Gris oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "Verde oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "Púrpura oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "Rojo oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "Verde azulado oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "Amarillo oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "Oro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "Gris", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "Verde", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "Añil", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLavender": "Lavanda", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "Azul claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLighter": "Más claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "Gris claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "Verde claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightOrange": "Naranja claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightYellow": "Amarillo claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtOrange": "Naranja", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPink": "Rosa", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPurple": "Púrpura", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "Rojo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "Rosa claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "Azul cielo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "Verde azulado", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "Texto", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTurquosie": "Turquesa", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtViolet": "Violeta", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "Blanco", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "Amarillo", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "dirección: ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LICENCIATARIO ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENCIANTE", @@ -452,6 +497,14 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "para pegar", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Cargando...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Ajustes de uso compartido", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Borrador", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Seleccionar", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Borrador", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Marcador de resaltado", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "mm", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Bolígrafo", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Seleccionar", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Tamaño", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Editor de gráficos", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Cerrar", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Guardar y salir", @@ -859,6 +912,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "Las funciones «Deshacer/Rehacer» se desactivan en el modo «coedición rápido».", "DE.Controllers.Main.textUndo": "Deshacer", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Licencia ha expirado", + "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseNotActive": "Licencia no activa", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "El editor se ha actualizado", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "La versión ha cambiado", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "encima", @@ -1118,6 +1172,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Por favor, espere...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Esta aplicación tiene bajas capacidades en IE9. Utilice IE10 o superior", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "La configuración actual de 'zoom' de su navegador no es compatible por completo. Por favor, restablezca el 'zoom' predeterminado pulsando Ctrl+0.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acceso denegado para usuarios anónimos.
Este documento se abrirá solo para su visualización.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "Licencia no activa.
Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá en modo de solo lectura.
Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado.
Por favor, actualice su licencia y después recargue la página.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Licencia expirada.
No tiene acceso a la funcionalidad de edición de documentos.
Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", @@ -1636,8 +1692,11 @@ "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtTitle": "Referencia cruzada", "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtType": "Tipo de referencia", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Número de columnas", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textEqualWidth": "Columnas de igual ancho", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Divisor de columnas", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Columnas", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitleSpacing": "Espaciado", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textWidth": "Ancho", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Establecer formato predeterminado para {0}: \"{1}\"", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Establecer como predeterminado", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formatos", @@ -1755,6 +1814,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Desde archivo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Desde URL", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textIndents": "Ajustar sangrías de la lista", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Unir con lista anterior", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textLeft": "Desplazar las celdas hacia la izquierda", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Tabla anidada", @@ -2082,6 +2142,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAutofit": "Autoajustar", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textBackgroundColor": "Color del fondo", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckbox": "Casilla", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckDefault": "La casilla de verificación está marcada de forma predeterminada", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textColor": "Color del borde", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComb": "Peine de caracteres", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCombobox": "Cuadro combinado", @@ -2090,6 +2151,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCreditCard": "Número de tarjeta de crédito (por ejemplo, 4111-1111-1111-1111)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateField": "Campo de fecha y hora", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateFormat": "Mostrar la fecha de esta manera", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDefValue": "Valor predeterminado", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDelete": "Eliminar", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDigits": "Dígitos", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDisconnect": "Desconectar", @@ -2119,6 +2181,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone2": "Número de teléfono (por ejemplo, +447911123456)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPlaceholder": "Marcador de posición", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadiobox": "Botón de opción", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadioDefault": "El botón está marcado de forma predeterminada", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textReg": "Expresión regular", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRequired": "Necesario", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textScale": "Cuándo escalar", @@ -2261,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alineación", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripción", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, autoforma, gráfico o tabla.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, forma, gráfico o tabla.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Flechas", @@ -2398,22 +2461,49 @@ "DE.Views.Links.titleUpdateTOF": "Actualizar la tabla de ilustraciones", "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "No mostrar en la tabla de contenido", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "Nivel", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textSpace": "Espacio", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTab": "Marca de tabulación", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTitle": "Sangrías de la lista", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowBullet": "Viñeta seguida de", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowNumber": "Número seguido de", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtIndent": "Sangría de texto", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtNone": "Ninguna", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "Posición de la viñeta", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosNumber": "Posición de número", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automático", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "Negrita", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Centrada", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textHide": "Ocultar ajustes", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Cursiva", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Izquierda", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Nivel", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textMore": "Mostrar más ajustes", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Vista previa", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Derecha", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelectLevel": "Seleccionar nivel", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSpace": "Espacio", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textTab": "Marca de tabulación", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Alineación", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "en", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Viñeta", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Color", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFollow": "Número seguido de", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "Fuente", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtInclcudeLevel": "Incluir número de nivel", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtIndent": "Sangría de texto", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Como el texto", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtMoreTypes": "Más tipos", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Nueva viñeta", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "No", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNumFormatString": "Formato de número", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtRestart": "Reiniciar lista", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Tamaño", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtStart": "Empezar en", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Símbolo", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTabStop": "Añadir tabulación en", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Ajustes de lista", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Tipo", + "DE.Views.ListTypesAdvanced.labelSelect": "Seleccionar tipo de lista", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Enviar", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Tema", @@ -2650,7 +2740,11 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsUsNormal": "Normal (EE.UU)", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsWide": "Amplio", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Todas las páginas", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Imprimir en ambas caras", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "Girar páginas por borde largo", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "Girar páginas por borde corto", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "Parte inferior", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Copias", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Página actual", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustom": "Personalizado", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Impresión personalizada", @@ -2658,6 +2752,8 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLeft": "Izquierdo", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtMargins": "Márgenes", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "de {0}", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Imprimir a una cara", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "Imprimir solo en una cara de la página", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Página", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "Número de página no válido", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageOrientation": "Orientación de página", @@ -2667,6 +2763,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Imprimir", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Imprimir en PDF", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Intervalo de impresión", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Caras de impresión", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtRight": "Derecho", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtSelection": "Selección", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtTop": "Parte superior", @@ -2702,7 +2799,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "No resaltar", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Editar rol", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Crear nuevo rol", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Cerrar", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Cualquiera", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Eliminar", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "¿Está seguro de que desea eliminar el rol {0}?
Una vez eliminado, se creará el rol predeterminado.", @@ -2722,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Lista de relleno", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Guardar como formulario", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Color del fondo", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar autoforma", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar forma", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Color", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Relleno", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Color del primer plano", @@ -2929,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Espacio entre celdas", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripción", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, autoforma, gráfico o tabla.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, forma, gráfico o tabla.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Texto", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Cambiar tamaño automáticamente para ajustarse al contenido", @@ -3159,6 +3255,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Superíndice", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "Suprimir del párrafo actual", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Colaboración", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Dibujar", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Archivo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Inicio", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Insertar", @@ -3205,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Insertar cuadro de texto horizontal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insertar imagen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Insertar número de página", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insertar autoforma", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insertar forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Insertar 'smartart'", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insertar símbolo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insertar tabla", @@ -3254,6 +3351,13 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Editar marca de agua", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Distribuir horizontalmente", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Distribuir verticalmente", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletDoc": "Viñetas de documento", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "Biblioteca de viñetas", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiDoc": "Listas en el documento actual", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiLib": "Biblioteca de listas", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "Formatos de numeración de documentos", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumLib": "Biblioteca de numeración", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupRecent": "Usados recientemente", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Alinear al margen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Alinear objetos seleccionados", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Alinear a la página", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/eu.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/eu.json index 7042b6d1df..a662933175 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/eu.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/eu.json @@ -2271,7 +2271,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Lerrokatzea", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Ordezko testua", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskribapena", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma automatiko, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Izenburua", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angelua", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Geziak", @@ -2714,7 +2714,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Ez nabarmendu", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Editatu rola", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Sortu rol berria", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Itxi", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Edonork", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Ezabatu", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Ziur zaude {0} rola ezabatu nahi duzula?
Ezabatuz gero, rol lehenetsia sortuko da.", @@ -2734,7 +2733,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Zerrenda betetzea", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Gorde formulario bezala", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Atzeko planoaren kolorea", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Aldatu forma automatikoa", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Aldatu forma", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Kolorea", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Bete", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Aurreko planoaren kolorea", @@ -2941,7 +2940,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Tartea gelaxken artean", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Ordezko testua", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskribapena", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma automatiko, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Izenburua", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Testua", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Aldatu tamaina automatikoki edukietara doitzeko", @@ -3217,7 +3216,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Txertatu testu-koadro horizontala", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Txertatu irudia", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Txertatu orrialde-zenbakia", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Txertatu forma automatikoa", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Txertatu forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Txertatu SmartArt-a", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Txertatu ikurra", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Txertatu taula", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json index 120aa4196d..f7cab2d49f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Taulukon asetukset", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Taiteellisen tekstin asetukset", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Taustan väri", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Muuta automaattista muotoa", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Muuta muotoa", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Väri", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Täytä", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Etualan väri", @@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Lisää yhtälö", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Lisää kuva", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Lisää sivunumero", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Lisää automaattinen muoto", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Lisää muoto", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Lisää taulukko", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Lisää teksti", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Lisää taiteellinen teksti", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json index 05d6b0f324..21a0d36a4a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avertissement", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Entrez votre message ici", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Afficher la Fenêtre Principale", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anonyme", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Fermer", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "L'objet est désactivé car il est en cours de modification par un autre utilisateur.", @@ -1799,7 +1800,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Continuer la numérotation", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Copier", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Rogner", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Remplissage", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Remplir", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "Ajuster", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Couper", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "Distribuer les colonnes", @@ -1810,9 +1811,9 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "Retourner horizontalement", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Retourner verticalement", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Suivre le mouvement", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textIndents": "Ajuster les retraits de la liste", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Rejoindre la liste précédente. ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textLeft": "Décaler les cellules vers la gauche", @@ -2161,15 +2162,15 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFixed": "Taille de champ fixe", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFormat": "Format", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFormatSymbols": "Symboles autorisés", - "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromUrl": "A partir d'une URL", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textGroupKey": "Clé de groupe", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textImage": "Image", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textKey": "Clé", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLang": "Langue", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLetters": "Lettres", - "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLock": "Verrou ", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLock": "Verrouiller", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMask": "Masque arbitraire", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMaxChars": "Limite de caractères", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMulti": "Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes", @@ -2288,16 +2289,16 @@ "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtSizeLimit": "Ce champ est limité à 2083 caractères.", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Afficher les paramètres avancés", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Rogner", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Remplissage", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Remplir", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "Ajuster", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropToShape": "Rogner à la forme", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Modifier", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Modifier l'objet", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Ajuster aux marges", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Retournement", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Hauteur", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint90": "Faire pivoter à droite de 90°", @@ -2323,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alignement", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texte de remplacement", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme automatique, du graphique ou du tableau.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme, du graphique ou du tableau.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titre", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Flèches", @@ -2798,7 +2799,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Pas de surbrillance ", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Modifier le rôle", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Créer un nouveau rôle", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Fermer", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Tout le monde", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Supprimer", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Êtes-vous sûr de vouloir supprimer le rôle {0}?
Une fois supprimé, le rôle par défaut sera créé.", @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Liste de remplissage", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Enregistrer comme formulaire", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Couleur d'arrière-plan", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modifier la forme automatique", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modifier la forme", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Couleur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Remplissage", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Couleur de premier plan", @@ -2835,9 +2835,9 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Direction", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Pas de modèles", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Retournement", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Dégradé", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint270": "Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°", @@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Espacement entre les cellules", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texte de remplacement", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme automatique, du graphique ou du tableau.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme, du graphique ou du tableau.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titre", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Texte", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Redimensionner automatiquement pour ajuster au contenu", @@ -3174,9 +3174,9 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Modifier le pied de page", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Modifier l'en-tête", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Supprimer un tableau", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromUrl": "À partir de l'URL", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Bordures de tableau cachées", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Caractères non imprimables", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "Paramètres de surbrillance", @@ -3199,7 +3199,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Case à cocher", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Colonnes personnalisées", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "À gauche", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Un", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Une", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "À droite", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Trois", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Deux", @@ -3302,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Insérer une zone de texte horizontale", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insérer une image", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Insérer le numéro de page", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insérer une forme automatique", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insérer une forme", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Insérer un graphique SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insérer un symbole", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insérer un tableau", @@ -3405,9 +3405,9 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Couleur du texte", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonale", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Police", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontal", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Image en filigrane", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Italique", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/gl.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/gl.json index 45e667f23f..afa6ca9a59 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/gl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/gl.json @@ -1955,7 +1955,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Aliñamento", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrición", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma automática, gráfico ou táboa.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma, gráfico ou táboa.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Frechas", @@ -2330,7 +2330,7 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Configuración da táboa", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Configuración do Text Art ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Cor de fondo", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar autoforma", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar forma", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Cor", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Encher", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Cor de primeiro plano", @@ -2523,7 +2523,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Espazo entre celdas", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrición", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma automática, gráfico ou táboa.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma, gráfico ou táboa.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Тexto", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Cambiar tamaño automaticamente para axustar ao contido", @@ -2796,7 +2796,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Inserir ecuación", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir imaxe", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Inserir número de páxina", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma automática", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir símbolo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir táboa", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Inserir caixa do texto", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json index fee80256cf..49e3828abe 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json @@ -376,12 +376,12 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Váltás", - "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Cím:", + "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "cím:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LICENC JOGOSULTJA", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENZOR", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-mail:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.: ", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Verzió", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Hozzáad", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Alkalmazás gépelés közben", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hy.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hy.json index a506bef1e6..96bc4e2d05 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hy.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hy.json @@ -338,6 +338,7 @@ "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textNew": "Նոր", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textRGBErr": "Մուտքագրված արժեքը սխալ է:Խնդրում ենք մուտքագրել 0-ից 255 թվային արժեք:", "Common.UI.HSBColorPicker.textNoColor": "Առանց գույն", + "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnCalendar.textDate": "Ընտրել ամսաթիվը", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintHidePwd": "Թաքցնել գաղտնաբառը", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintShowPwd": "Ցուցադրել գաղտնաբառը", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "Գտնել", @@ -495,6 +496,14 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "փակցնելու համար", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Բեռնում...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Համօգտագործման կարգավորումներ", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Ջնջիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Ընտրել", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Ջնջիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Գունանշիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "մմ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Գրիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Ընտրել", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Չափ", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Գծապատկերի խմբագրիչ", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Փակել", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Պահպանել և դուրս գալ", @@ -2132,6 +2141,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAutofit": "Ինքնահարմարեցում", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textBackgroundColor": "Փոնի գույն", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckbox": "Ստուգանիշ", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckDefault": "Նշավանդակը լռելյայն նշված է", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textColor": "Եզրագծի գույն", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComb": "Սյուների ձուլում", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCombobox": "Համակցված տուփ", @@ -2140,6 +2150,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCreditCard": "Վարկային քարտի համար (օր.՝ 4111-1111-1111-1111)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateField": "Ամսաթիվ/Ժամ դաշտ", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateFormat": "Ցուցադրել ամիս-ամսաթիվն այսպես՝", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDefValue": "Լռելյայն արժեք", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDelete": "Ջնջել", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDigits": "Թվանիշեր", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDisconnect": "Անջատել", @@ -2169,6 +2180,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone2": "Հեռախոսահամար (օր՝+447911123456)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPlaceholder": "Տեղապահ ", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadiobox": "Ընտրանքի կոճակ ", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadioDefault": "Կոճակը լռելյայն ստուգված է", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textReg": "Կանոնավոր արտահայտություն", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRequired": "Պարտադիր", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textScale": "Երբ սանդղել", @@ -2448,23 +2460,49 @@ "DE.Views.Links.titleUpdateTOF": "Արդիացնել թվերի աղյուսակը", "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "Չցուցադրել բովանդակության աղյուսակում", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "Մակարդակ ", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textSpace": "Բացատ", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTab": "Սյունատի գրանշան", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTitle": "Ցուցակի նահանջները", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowBullet": "Հետևել պարբերակին", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowNumber": "Հետևել համարին", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtIndent": "Տեքստի նահանջ", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtNone": "Ոչ մեկը", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "Պարբերակների դիրք", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosNumber": "Համարի դիրք", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Ինքնաշխատ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "Թավ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Կենտրոնով", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textHide": "Թաքցնել կարգավորումները", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Շեղ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Ձախ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Մակարդակ ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textMore": "Ցույց տալ ավելի շատ կարգավորումներ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Նախադիտել", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Աջ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelectLevel": "Ընտրել մակարդակը", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSpace": "Բացատ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textTab": "Սյունատի գրանշան", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Հավասարեցում", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "Հետևյալում", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Կետանշան", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Գույն", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFollow": "Հետևել համարին", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "Տառատեսակ ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtInclcudeLevel": "Ներառել մակարդակի համարը", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtIndent": "Տեքստի նահանջ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Ինչպես տեքստում", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtMoreTypes": "Ավելի շատ տեսակներ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Նոր պարբերակ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "Ոչ մեկը", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNumFormatString": "Թվերի ձևաչափ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtRestart": "Վերագործարկել ցուցակը", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Չափ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtStart": "Մեկնարկել", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Նշան", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTabStop": "Ավելացնելսյունատի կանգ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Ցանկի կարգավորումներ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Տեսակ", + "DE.Views.ListTypesAdvanced.labelSelect": "Ընտրել ցուցակի տեսակը", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "ՈՒղարկել", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Թեմա", @@ -2701,7 +2739,11 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsUsNormal": "ԱՄՆ նորմալ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsWide": "Լայն", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Բոլոր էջեր", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Տպել երկու կողմից", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "Շրջել էջերը երկար եզրով", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "Շրջել էջերը կարճ եզրով", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "Ներքև", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Պատճեններ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Ընթացիկ էջ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustom": "Հարմարեցված", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Հարմարեցված տպագրություն", @@ -2709,6 +2751,8 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLeft": "Ձախ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtMargins": "Լուսանցքներ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "{0}-ից", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Տպել միակողմանի", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "Տպել միայն էջի մի կողմում", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Էջ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "Էջի համարն անվավեր է", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageOrientation": "Էջի կողմնորոշում", @@ -2718,6 +2762,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Տպել", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Տպել PDF-ով", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Տպման տիրույթ", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Տպել կողմերը", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtRight": "Աջ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtSelection": "Ընտրություն", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtTop": "Վերև", @@ -2753,7 +2798,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Առանց գունանշման", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Խմբագրել դերը", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Ստեղծել նոր դեր", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Փակել", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Յուրաքանչյուրը", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Ջնջել", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Համոզվա՞ծ եք, որ ցանկանում եք ջնջել {0} դերը:
Մեկ անգամ ջնջվելուց հետո, առաջադրված դերը կստեղծվի:", @@ -3210,6 +3254,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Վերգիր", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "Հեռացնել ընթացիկ պարբերության համար", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Համագործակցում", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Նկարել", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Ֆայլ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Գլխավոր", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Զետեղել", @@ -3256,7 +3301,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Զետեղել հորիզոնական գրվածքի տուփ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Զետեղել նկար", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Զետեղել էջի համարը", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Զետեղել պատկեր", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Զետեղել ինքնաձև", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Զետեղել SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Տեղադրել նշան", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Դնել աղյուսակ", @@ -3305,6 +3350,13 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Խմբագրել ջրանշանը", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Հորիզոնական բաշխում", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Ուղղահայաց բաշխում", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletDoc": "Փաստաթղթի պարբերակներ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "Պարբերակների դարան", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiDoc": "Ցուցակներ ընթացիկ փաստաթղթում", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiLib": "Ցուցակների դարան", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "Փաստաթղթերի համարակալման ձևաչափեր", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumLib": "Համարակալումների դարան", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupRecent": "Վերջերս օգտագործված", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Հավասարեցնել լուսանցքին", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Հավասարեցնել ընտրված առարկաները", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Հավասարեցնել էջին", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json index e5d055887f..ed5514ddf8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json @@ -335,6 +335,7 @@ "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textNew": "Baru", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textRGBErr": "Input yang Anda masukkan salah.
Silakan masukkan input numerik antara 0 dan 255.", "Common.UI.HSBColorPicker.textNoColor": "Tidak ada Warna", + "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnCalendar.textDate": "Pilih tanggal", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintHidePwd": "Sembunyikan password", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintShowPwd": "Tampilkan password", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "Temukan", @@ -356,7 +357,8 @@ "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "Dokumen telah diubah oleh pengguna lain.
Silakan klik untuk menyimpan perubahan dan memuat ulang pembaruan.", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textRecentColors": "Warna Terakhir", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Warna Standar", - "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Warna Tema", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Warna tema", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textTransparent": "Transparan", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeClassicLight": "Terang Klasik", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeContrastDark": "Gelap Kontras", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeDark": "Gelap", @@ -377,6 +379,7 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Shift", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "Aksen", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "Aqua", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Latar belakang", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Hitam", @@ -393,12 +396,17 @@ "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "Emas", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "Kelabu", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "Hijau", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "Indigo", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "Biru muda", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "Kelabu muda", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "Hijau muda", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightYellow": "Kuning muda", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "Merah", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "Mawar", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "Biru langit", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "Teks", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "Putih", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "Kuning", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "alamat: ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "PEMEGANG LISENSI", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "PEMBERI LISENSI", @@ -416,6 +424,7 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDoubleSpaces": "Tambahkan titik dengan spasi ganda", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLCells": "Besarkan huruf pertama di sel tabel", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLSentence": "Besarkan huruf pertama di kalimat", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textForLangFL": "Pengecualian bagi bahasa:", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyperlink": "Internet dan jalur jaringan dengan hyperlink.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyphens": "Hyphens (--) dengan garis putus-putus (—)", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "AutoCorrect Matematika", @@ -430,6 +439,7 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textResetAll": "Atur ulang kembali ke awal", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textRestore": "Pemulihan", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "AutoCorrect", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddFL": "Pengecualian hanya boleh memuat huruf besar atau kecil.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddRec": "Fungsi yang diterima harus memiliki huruf A sampai Z, huruf besar atau huruf kecil.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetFL": "Semua pengecualian yang Anda tambahkan akan dihapus dan yang sebelumnya dihapus akan dipulihkan. Apakah Anda hendak melanjutkan?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetRec": "Semua ekspresi yang Anda tambahkan akan dihilangkan dan yang sudah terhapus akan dikembalikan. Apakah Anda ingin melanjutkan?", @@ -473,9 +483,12 @@ "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Memuat...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Pengaturan berbagi", "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Penghapus", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Pilih", "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Penghapus", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Penyorot", "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "mm", "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Pena", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Pilih", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Ukuran", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Editor Bagan", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Tutup", @@ -596,14 +609,14 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Tutup", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Mode Edit Bersama", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCombine": "Gabungkan", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Hilangkan Semua Komentar", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Hilangkan Komentar Saat Ini", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Hilangkan Komentar Saya", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Hilangkan semua komentar", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Hilangkan komentar saat ini", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Hilangkan komentar saya", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "Hilangkan Komentar Saya Saat Ini", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Hapus", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolve": "Selesaikan", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveAll": "Selesaikan Semua Komentar", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveCurrent": "Selesaikan Komentar Saat Ini", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveAll": "Selesaikan semua komentar", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveCurrent": "Selesaikan komentar saat ini", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveMy": "Selesaikan Komentar Saya", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveMyCurrent": "Selesaikan Komentar Saya Saat Ini", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Komparasi", @@ -737,6 +750,15 @@ "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textDontShow": "Jangan tanya saya lagi", "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textLabel": "Label:", "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textLabelError": "Label tidak boleh kosong.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedComment": "Dokumen diproteksi. Anda hanya dapat menyisipkan komentar ke dokumen ini.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedForms": "Dokumen diproteksi. Anda hanya dapat mengisi formulir dalam dokumen ini.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedTrack": "Dokumen diproteksi. Anda dapat menyunting dokumen ini, tapi semua perubahan akan dilacak.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedView": "Dokumen terproteksi. Anda hanya dapat melihat dokumen ini.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedComment": "Dokumen telah diproteksi oleh pengguna lain.\nAnda hanya dapat menyisipkan komentar ke dokumen ini.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedForms": "Dokumen telah diproteksi oleh pengguna lain.\nAnda hanya dapat mengisi formulir dalam dokumen ini.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedTrack": "Dokumen telah diproteksi oleh pengguna lain.\nAnda dapat menyunting dokumen ini, tapi semua perubahan akan dilacak.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedView": "Dokumen telah diproteksi oleh pengguna lain.\nAnda hanya dapat melihat dokumen ini.", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasUnprotected": "Dokumen telah dibuka proteksinya.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Semua perubahan yang tidak tersimpan di dokumen ini akan hilang.
Klik \"Batal\" lalu \"Simpan\" untuk menyimpan. Klik \"OK\" untuk membuang semua perubahan yang tidak tersimpan.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Dokumen tidak bernama", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Peringatan", @@ -875,6 +897,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "Fungsi Undo/Redo dinonaktifkan untuk mode Co-editing Cepat.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textUndo": "Batalkan", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Lisensi kadaluwarsa", + "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseNotActive": "Lisensi tidak aktif", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "Editor mengupdate", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Versi telah diubah", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "di atas", @@ -1092,8 +1115,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRoundRectCallout": "Callout Persegi Panjang Sudut Lengkung", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Bintang & Pita", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Caption", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_endnote_text": "Teks Endnote", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Teks Footnote", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_endnote_text": "Teks catatan akhir", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Teks catatan kaki", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Heading 1", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Heading 2", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_3": "Heading 3", @@ -1134,6 +1157,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Silahkan menunggu", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Aplikasi ini tidak berjalan dengan baik di IE9. Gunakan IE10 atau versi yang terbaru.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Pengaturan pembesaran tampilan pada peramban Anda saat ini tidak didukung sepenuhnya. Silakan atur ulang ke pembesaran standar dengan menekan Ctrl+0.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Akses ditolak untuk pengguna anonim.
Dokumen ini akan dibuka hanya untuk dilihat.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "Lisensi tidak aktif.
Harap hubungi administrator Anda.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja.
Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Lisensi Anda sudah kedaluwarsa.
Silakan perbarui lisensi Anda dan segarkan halaman.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Lisensi kadaluwarsa.
Anda tidak memiliki akses untuk editing dokumen secara keseluruhan.
Silakan hubungi admin Anda.", @@ -1225,7 +1250,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_5": "Contoh Kasus", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_6": "Koefisien binomial", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_7": "Koefisien binomial", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Tanda Kurung", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Bilah vertikal", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "Tanda Kurung", @@ -1302,8 +1327,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedSubSup": "Integral Kontur", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTriple": "Volume integral", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleCenterSubSup": "Volume integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleSubSup": "Volume integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralSubSup": "Integral", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleSubSup": "Integral volume dengan batas", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralSubSup": "Integral dengan batas", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTriple": "Triple integral", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTripleCenterSubSup": "Triple integral", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTripleSubSup": "Triple integral", @@ -1313,15 +1338,15 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_Sub": "Wedge", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_SubSup": "Wedge", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd": "Ko-Produk", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSub": "Ko-Produk", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSubSup": "Ko-Produk", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSub": "Ko-produk dengan batas bawah", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSubSup": "Ko-produk dengan batasan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_Sub": "Ko-Produk", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_SubSup": "Ko-Produk", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_1": "Penjumlahan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_2": "Penjumlahan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_3": "Penjumlahan", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_4": "Produk", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_5": "Union", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_4": "Contoh produk", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_5": "Contoh union", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction": "Vee", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction_CenterSub": "Vee", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction_CenterSubSup": "Vee", @@ -1333,20 +1358,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Intersection_Sub": "Perpotongan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Intersection_SubSup": "Perpotongan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod": "Produk", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSub": "Produk", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSubSup": "Produk", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSub": "Produk dengan batas bawah", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSubSup": "Produk dengan batas", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_Sub": "Produk", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_SubSup": "Produk", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum": "Penjumlahan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSub": "Penjumlahan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSubSup": "Penjumlahan", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_Sub": "Penjumlahan", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_SubSup": "Penjumlahan", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_SubSup": "Penjumlahan dengan batas subskrip/superskrip", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union": "Union", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_CenterSub": "Union", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_CenterSubSup": "Union", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_Sub": "Union", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_SubSup": "Union", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_SubSup": "Union dengan batas subskrip/superskrip", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Custom_1": "Contoh Limit", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Custom_2": "Contoh Maksimal", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Lim": "Limit", @@ -1408,7 +1433,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalSqrt": "Akar pangkat dua", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_1": "Akar", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_2": "Akar", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_3": "Akar", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_3": "x kuadrat", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_4": "Akar", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSub": "Subskrip", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSubSup": "Subskrip-SuperskripKiri", @@ -1652,8 +1677,10 @@ "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtTitle": "Cross-reference", "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtType": "Tipe referensi", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Jumlah Kolom", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textEqualWidth": "Lebar kolom sama", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Pembagi kolom", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Kolom", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textWidth": "Lebar", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Atur format default untuk {0}: \"{1}\"", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Atur sesuai default", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Format", @@ -1667,6 +1694,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocProtectedView": "Dokumen terproteksi.
Anda hanya bisa melihat dokumen ini.", "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocUnlockDescription": "Masukkan kata sandi untuk membuka proteksi dokumen", "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtProtectDoc": "Proteksi dokumen", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtUnlockTitle": "Buka Proteksi Dokumen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Di atas", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Tambahkan komentar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedDropCapText": "Pengaturan Drop Cap", @@ -1697,8 +1725,8 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directHText": "Horisontal", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directionText": "Arah Teks", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editChartText": "Edit Data", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editFooterText": "Edit Footer", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHeaderText": "Edit Header", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editFooterText": "Sunting kaki", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHeaderText": "Sunting kepala", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHyperlinkText": "Edit Hyperlink", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.eqToInlineText": "Ubah ke Sebaris", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.guestText": "Tamu", @@ -1793,6 +1821,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "Rotasi 90° Berlawanan Jarum Jam", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "Rotasi 90° Searah Jarum Jam", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRow": "Hapus semua baris", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSaveAsPicture": "Simpan sebagai gambar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "Pisahkan list", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "Pengaturan", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "Beberapa Baris/Kolom", @@ -1982,6 +2011,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Ubah hak akses", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Komentar", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Dibuat", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtDocumentInfo": "Info dokumen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtFastWV": "Tampilan Web Cepat", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Memuat...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Terakhir Dimodifikasi Oleh", @@ -2012,12 +2042,14 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "Dengan password", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "Proteksi dokumen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "Dengan tanda tangan", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddedSignature": "Tanda tangan yang valid telah ditambahkan ke dokumen.
Dokumen terproteksi dari penyuntingan.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddSignature": "Memastikan integritas dokumen dengan menambahkan
\nsuatu tanda tangan digital yang tidak tampak", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Edit Dokumen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "Editing akan menghapus tandatangan dari dokumen.
Lanjutkan?", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "Dokumen ini dilindungi dengan password", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "Dokumen ini perlu ditandatangani.", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Tandatangan valid sudah ditambahkan ke dokumen. Dokumen dilindungi dari editan.", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Beberapa tandatangan digital di dokumen tidak valid atau tidak bisa diverifikasi. Dokumen dilindungi dari editan.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Tandatangan valid sudah ditambahkan ke dokumen. Dokumen dilindungi dari penyuntingan.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Beberapa tanda tangan digital di dokumen tidak valid atau tidak bisa diverifikasi. Dokumen dilindungi dari penyuntingan.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "Tampilkan tanda tangan", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Terapkan", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": "Mode Edit Bersama", @@ -2082,6 +2114,8 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Nonaktifkan semua macros dengan notifikasi", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "sebagai Windows", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWorkspace": "Ruang Kerja", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveAs.textDownloadAs": "Unduh sebagai", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveCopy.textSaveCopyAs": "Simpan Salinan sebagai", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAlways": "Selalu", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAnyone": "Siapa pun", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAspect": "Kunci aspek rasio", @@ -2115,6 +2149,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textGroupKey": "Satukan kunci", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textImage": "Gambar", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textKey": "Kunci", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLang": "Bahasa", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLetters": "Huruf", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLock": "Kunci", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMask": "Sebarang Masker", @@ -2123,6 +2158,8 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNever": "tidak pernah", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNoBorder": "Tanpa pembatas", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNone": "Tidak ada", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone1": "Nomor Telepon (mis. (123) 456-7890)", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone2": "Nomor Telepon (mis. +447911123456)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPlaceholder": "Placeholder", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadiobox": "Tombol Radio", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadioDefault": "Tombol dicentang secara baku", @@ -2138,9 +2175,12 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textTipUp": "Pindah keatas", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textTooBig": "Gambar Terlalu Besar", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textTooSmall": "Gambar Terlalu Kecil", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textUKPassport": "Nomor Paspor Inggris (mis. 925665416)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textUnlock": "Buka Kunci", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textUSSSN": "SSN AS (mis. 123-45-6789)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textValue": "Opsi Nilai", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textWidth": "Lebar sel", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textZipCodeUS": "Kode Pos AS (mis. 92663 atau 92663-1234)", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnCheckBox": "Kotak centang", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnComboBox": "Kotak combo", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnComplex": "Bidang Kompleks", @@ -2148,6 +2188,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnDropDown": "Dropdown", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnEmail": "Alamat Email", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnImage": "Gambar", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnManager": "Kelola Peran", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnNext": "Ruas Berikutnya", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnPhone": "Nomor Telepon", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnPrev": "Ruas Sebelumnya", @@ -2171,10 +2212,14 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipCheckBox": "Sisipkan kotak centang", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipComboBox": "Sisipkan kotak kombo", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipComplexField": "Sisipkan bidang kompleks", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipCreditCard": "Sisipkan nomor kartu kredit", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDateTime": "Sisipkan tanggal dan waktu", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDownloadForm": "Unduh file sebagai dokumen OFORM yang dapat diisi", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDropDown": "Sisipkan list dropdown", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipEmailField": "Sisipkan alamat email", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipFixedText": "Sisipkan ruas teks tetap", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipImageField": "Sisipkan Gambar", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipManager": "Kelola Peran", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipNextForm": "Pergi ke ruas berikutnya", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipPhoneField": "Sisipkan nomor telepon", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipPrevForm": "Pergi ke ruas sebelumnya", @@ -2183,6 +2228,9 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipSubmit": "Submit form", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipTextField": "Sisipkan ruas teks", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipViewForm": "Tampilkan form", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipZipCode": "Sisipkan kode pos", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtFixedDesc": "Sisipkan ruas teks tetap", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtFixedText": "Tetap", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtUntitled": "Tanpa Judul", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Bawah Tengah", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Bawah Kiri", @@ -2254,7 +2302,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Perataan", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Teks alternatif", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskripsi", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, autoshape, grafik, atau tabel.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, shape, grafik, atau tabel.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Judul", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Sudut", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Tanda panah", @@ -2365,16 +2413,16 @@ "DE.Views.Links.confirmDeleteFootnotes": "Apakah Anda ingin menghapus semua footnotes?", "DE.Views.Links.confirmReplaceTOF": "Apakah Anda ingin mengubah daftar gambar yang dipilih?", "DE.Views.Links.mniConvertNote": "Konversi Semua Catatan", - "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Hapus Semua Catatan", - "DE.Views.Links.mniInsEndnote": "Sisipkan Endnote", - "DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "Sisipkan Footnote", + "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Hapus semua catatan", + "DE.Views.Links.mniInsEndnote": "Sisipkan catatan akhir", + "DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "Sisipkan catatan kaki", "DE.Views.Links.mniNoteSettings": "Pengaturan Catatan", "DE.Views.Links.textContentsRemove": "Hilangkan daftar isi", "DE.Views.Links.textContentsSettings": "Pengaturan", "DE.Views.Links.textConvertToEndnotes": "Konversi Semua Footnotes Menjadi Endnotes", "DE.Views.Links.textConvertToFootnotes": "Konversi Semua Endnotes Menjadi Footnotes", - "DE.Views.Links.textGotoEndnote": "Pergi ke Endnotes", - "DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "Pergi ke Footnotes", + "DE.Views.Links.textGotoEndnote": "Pergi ke catatan akhir", + "DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "Pergi ke catatan kaki", "DE.Views.Links.textSwapNotes": "Tukar Footnotes dan Endnotes", "DE.Views.Links.textUpdateAll": "Update keseluruhan tabel", "DE.Views.Links.textUpdatePages": "Update hanya nomor halaman", @@ -2391,23 +2439,38 @@ "DE.Views.Links.titleUpdateTOF": "Update Daftar Gambar", "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "Jangan Tampilkan pada Daftar Isi", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "Level", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textSpace": "Spasi", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTab": "Karakter tab", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowNumber": "Ikuti angka dengan", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtIndent": "Indentasi teks", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtNone": "Nihil", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "Posisi bulatan", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosNumber": "Posisi bilangan", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Otomatis", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "Tebal", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Tengah", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textHide": "Sembunyikan pengaturan", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Miring", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Kiri", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Level", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Pratinjau", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Kanan", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSpace": "Spasi", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textTab": "Karakter tab", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Perataan", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "pada", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Butir", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Warna", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFollow": "Ikuti angka dengan", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "Fonta", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtInclcudeLevel": "Sertakan angka tingkat", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtIndent": "Indentasi Teks", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Seperti teks", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Butir baru", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "Tidak ada", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNumFormatString": "Format bilangan", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Ukuran", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtStart": "Dimulai pada", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Simbol", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTabStop": "Tambahkan posisi tab pada", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Pengaturan daftar", @@ -2648,6 +2711,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsUsNormal": "US Normal", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsWide": "Lebar", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Semua halaman", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Cetak pada kedua sisi", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "Bawah", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Salinan", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Halaman saat ini", @@ -2657,6 +2721,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLeft": "Kiri", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtMargins": "Margin", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "dari {0}", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Cetak satu sisi", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Halaman", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "Nomor halaman tidak valid", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageOrientation": "Orientasi halaman", @@ -2666,6 +2731,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Cetak", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Cetak ke PDF", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Rentang cetak", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Sisi cetak", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtRight": "Kanan", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtSelection": "Pilihan", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtTop": "Atas", @@ -2700,10 +2766,15 @@ "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDescription": "Tambahkan peran dan atur urutan para pengisi menerima dan menandatangani dokumen", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textEdit": "Sunting", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textNew": "Baru", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.txtTitle": "Kelola Peran", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnCantDelete": "Anda tidak bisa menghapus peran ini karena itu memiliki ruas terkait.", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnDelete": "Anda yakin hendak menghapus peran {0}?", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.saveButtonText": "Simpan", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Siapa pun", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textEmpty": "Tidak ada peran yang dikaitkan dengan ruas.", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Simpan sebagai Formulir", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Warna latar", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ubah Bentuk Otomatis", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ubah Bentuk", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Warna", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Isi", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Warna latar depan", @@ -2780,8 +2851,8 @@ "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "Editing akan menghapus tandatangan dari dokumen.
Lanjutkan?", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtRemoveWarning": "Apakah Anda ingin menghilangkan tandatangan ini?
Proses tidak bisa dikembalikan.", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtRequestedSignatures": "Dokumen ini perlu ditandatangani.", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Tandatangan valid sudah ditambahkan ke dokumen. Dokumen dilindungi dari editan.", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Beberapa tandatangan digital di dokumen tidak valid atau tidak bisa diverifikasi. Dokumen dilindungi dari editan.", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Tandatangan valid sudah ditambahkan ke dokumen. Dokumen dilindungi dari penyuntingan.", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Beberapa tanda tangan digital di dokumen tidak valid atau tidak bisa diverifikasi. Dokumen dilindungi dari penyuntingan.", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Buka Halaman", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Halaman {0} dari {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Sesuaikan Halaman", @@ -2794,6 +2865,10 @@ "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Perkecil", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPageNumInvalid": "Nomor halaman salah", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPages": "Halaman", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtSpaces": "Simbol dengan spasi", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtSymbols": "Simbol", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtWordCount": "Cacah kata", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtWords": "Kata", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textHeader": "Buat gaya baru", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textNextStyle": "Style paragraf berikutnya", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Judul", @@ -2905,7 +2980,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Beri spasi antar sel", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Teks alternatif", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskripsi", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, autoshape, grafik, atau tabel.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, shape, grafik, atau tabel.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Judul", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Teks", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Otomatis sesuaikan ukuran dengan konten", @@ -3048,12 +3123,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Wrapping", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCapitalizeWords": "Huruf Kapital Setiap Kata", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Sisipkan Tabel Khusus", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Buat Tabel", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Buat tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Pengaturan Kontrol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Pengaturan Drop Cap", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Edit Footer", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Edit Header", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Hapus Tabel", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Sunting kaki", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Sunting kepala", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Hapus tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromFile": "Dari File", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromStorage": "Dari Penyimpanan", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromUrl": "Dari URL", @@ -3065,8 +3140,8 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "Gambar dari URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniInsertSSE": "Sisipkan Spreadsheet", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniLowerCase": "huruf kecil", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniRemoveFooter": "Hapus Footer", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniRemoveHeader": "Hapus Header", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniRemoveFooter": "Hapus kaki", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniRemoveHeader": "Hapus kepala", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniSentenceCase": "Case kalimat.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniTextToTable": "Konversi Teks ke Tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniToggleCase": "tOGGLE cASE", @@ -3090,11 +3165,11 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Tanggal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "List drop-down", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Custom Watermark", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Halaman Genap", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Halaman genap", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "Dalam Margin", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Sisipkan Break Kolom", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageCount": "Sisipkan nomor dari halaman", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageNumber": "Sisipkan nomor halaman", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageNumber": "Sisipkan Nomor Halaman", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsPageBreak": "Sisipkan Jeda Halaman", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsSectionBreak": "Sisipkan Jeda Bagian", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInText": "Dalam Teks", @@ -3119,7 +3194,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Teks biasa", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Portrait", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Hilangkan Kontrol Konten", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Hilangkan Watermark", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Hilangkan tanda air", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRestartEachPage": "Restart Setiap Halaman", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRestartEachSection": "Restart Setiap Sesi", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "Rich text", @@ -3181,8 +3256,8 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Masukkan Persamaan", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Sisipkan kotak teks horizontal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Sisipkan Gambar", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Sisipkan Nomor Halaman", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Sisipkan Bentuk Otomatis", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Sisipkan nomor halaman", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Sisipkan Bentuk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Sisipkan SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Sisipkan simbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Sisipkan Tabel", @@ -3218,6 +3293,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "Tempel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "Bayangan", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "Cetak", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrintQuick": "Cetak cepat", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Ulangi", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "Simpan", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "Simpan perubahan yang Anda buat agar dapat dilihat oleh pengguna lain", @@ -3230,6 +3306,9 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Edit watermark", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Distribusikan Horizontal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Distribusikan Vertikal", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "Pustaka bulatan", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "Format penomoran dokumen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumLib": "Pustaka penomoran", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Rata dengan Margin", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Ratakan Objek yang Dipilih", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Rata dengan Halaman", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json index 8ae8d1c4aa..f01634f411 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Inserisci il tuo messaggio qui", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Mostra la finestra principale", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anonimo", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Chiudi", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "L'oggetto è disabilitato perché un altro utente lo sta modificando.", @@ -2006,7 +2007,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Allineamento", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Testo alternativo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrizione", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La rappresentazione alternativa testuale basata delle informazioni sull'oggetto visivo, che verrà letta alle persone con disabilità visive o cognitive per aiutarle a capire meglio quali informazioni ci sono nell'immagine, nella forma automatica, nel grafico o nella tabella.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La rappresentazione alternativa testuale basata delle informazioni sull'oggetto visivo, che verrà letta alle persone con disabilità visive o cognitive per aiutarle a capire meglio quali informazioni ci sono nell'immagine, nella forma, nel grafico o nella tabella.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titolo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angolo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Frecce", @@ -2601,7 +2602,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Consenti spaziatura tra celle", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Testo alternativo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrizione", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La rappresentazione alternativa testuale basata sulle informazioni dell'oggetto visivo, verrà letta alle persone con disabilità visive o cognitive per aiutarle a capire meglio quali informazioni ci sono nell'immagine, nella forma automatica, nel grafico e nella tabella.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La rappresentazione alternativa testuale basata sulle informazioni dell'oggetto visivo, verrà letta alle persone con disabilità visive o cognitive per aiutarle a capire meglio quali informazioni ci sono nell'immagine, nella forma, nel grafico e nella tabella.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titolo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Testo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Adatta automaticamente al contenuto", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json index b4e82efc9e..be0368b90b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "ここにメッセージを挿入してください。", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "メインウィンドウを表示する", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "匿名者", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "閉じる", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "他のユーザーが編集しているのためオブジェクトが無効になります。", @@ -1171,6 +1172,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "少々お待ちください...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "このアプリケーションはIE9では低機能です。IE10以上のバージョンをご使用ください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "お使いのブラウザの現在のZoomの設定は完全にはサポートされていません。Ctrl+0を押して、デフォルトのZoomにリセットしてください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名ユーザーのアクセスは拒否されます。
このドキュメントは閲覧専用に開かれます。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "ライセンスが無効になっています。
管理者までご連絡ください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "％1エディターへの同時接続の制限に達しました。 このドキュメントは表示専用で開かれます。
詳細については、管理者にお問い合わせください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの有効期限が切れています。
ライセンスを更新してページをリロードしてください。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json index c03efca8c2..bd89e69c92 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Ievietota rindkopa", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Position", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Align right", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Shape", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Forma", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Background color", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSmallCaps": "Small caps", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacing": "Spacing", @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alignment", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatīvs teksts", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Apraksts", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redzes vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, automātiskajā figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redzes vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Nosaukums", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Leņķis", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Arrows", @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Atļaut atstarpes starp šūnām", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatīvs teksts", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Apraksts", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redzes vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, automātiskajā figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redzes vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Nosaukums", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatically resize to fit contents", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ms.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ms.json index 4756ed9d25..e62e251cb5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ms.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ms.json @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "PEMBERI LESEN", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-mel: ", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Dikuasakan oleh", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versi ", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Tambah", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Guna Semasa Anda Menaip", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json index 9b0f6a7c17..59536d6d07 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENTIEVERLENER", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-mail:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Aangedreven door", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versie", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Toevoegen", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Toepassen terwijl u typt", @@ -2017,7 +2017,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Uitlijning", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatieve tekst", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschrijving", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, AutoVorm, grafiek of tabel.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, Vorm, grafiek of tabel.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Hoek", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pijlen", @@ -2404,7 +2404,7 @@ "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnDelete": "Weet u zeker dat u de rol {0} wilt verwijderen?", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Iedereen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Achtergrondkleur", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "AutoVorm wijzigen", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Vorm wijzigen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Kleur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Vulling", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Voorgrondkleur", @@ -2600,7 +2600,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Afstand tussen cellen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatieve tekst", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschrijving", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, AutoVorm, grafiek of tabel.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, Vorm, grafiek of tabel.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Tekst", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatisch aanpassen aan de inhoud", @@ -2873,7 +2873,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Vergelijking invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Afbeelding invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Paginanummer invoegen", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "AutoVorm invoegen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vorm invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Invoegen symbool", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Tabel invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Tekstvak invoegen", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/no.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/no.json index 23aced32b1..42fb09b015 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/no.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/no.json @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.saveButtonText": "Lagre", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Hvemsomhelst", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Bakgrunnsfarge", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Endre autofigur", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Endre figur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farge", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "Størrelse", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "Opasitet", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json index 9283b7930b..2440a07754 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -2038,7 +2038,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alinhamento", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Setas", @@ -2448,7 +2448,7 @@ "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Alguém", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Alguém", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Cor de fundo", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma automática", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Cor", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Preencher", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Cor principal", @@ -2649,7 +2649,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Permitir espaçamento entre células", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Тexto", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Redimensionar automaticamente para se ajustar ao conteúdo", @@ -2925,7 +2925,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserir caixa de texto horizontal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir imagem", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Inserir número da página", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma automática", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir símbolo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir tabela", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Inserir caixa de texto", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json index bfae2556a0..731164fc5e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Insira sua mensagem aqui", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Mostrar janela principal", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anônimo", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Fechar", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "O objeto está desabilitado por que está sendo editado por outro usuário.", @@ -2323,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alinhamento", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto Alternativo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto das informações de objetos visuais, que serão lidas para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor quais informações há na imagem, autoshape, gráfico ou tabela.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto das informações de objetos visuais, que serão lidas para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor quais informações há na imagem, forma, gráfico ou tabela.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Setas", @@ -2798,7 +2799,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Sem destaque", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Editar papel", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Criar nova função", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Fechar", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Alguém", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Excluir", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Tem certeza de que deseja excluir a função {0}?
Depois de excluída, a função padrão será criada.", @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Lista de preenchimento", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Salvar como formulário", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Cor do plano de fundo", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma automática", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Cor", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Preencher", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Cor do primeiro plano", @@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Permitir espaçamento entre células", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação do objeto visual, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiência visual ou cognitiva para ajudá-las a entender melhor quais informações existem na imagem, forma automática, gráfico ou mesa.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação do objeto visual, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiência visual ou cognitiva para ajudá-las a entender melhor quais informações existem na imagem, forma, gráfico ou mesa.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Тexto", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automaticamente redimensionado para ajustar conteúdo", @@ -3302,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserir caixa de texto horizontal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir imagem", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Inserir número da página", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma automática", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Inserir SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir símbolo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir tabela", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ro.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ro.json index aad2ab86ed..ee70361a24 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ro.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ro.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avertisment", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Lăsați mesaj aici", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Afișare fereastră principală", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anonim", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Închidere", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "Obiectul este dezactivat deoarece este editat de către un alt utilizator.", @@ -2323,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Aliniere", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternativ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descriere", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme automate, diagramei sau tabele.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme, diagramei sau tabele.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titlu", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Unghi", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Săgeți", @@ -2798,7 +2799,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Fără evidențiere", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Editare rol", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Creați un rol nou", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Închide", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Orice utilizator", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Ștergere", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Sunteți sigur că doriți să ștergeți rolul {0}?
Odată șters, va fi creat un rol implicit.", @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Lista de completare", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Salvare ca formular", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Culoare de fundal", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modificare formă automată", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modificare formă", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Culoare", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Umplere", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Culoarea de prim plan", @@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Spațiere între celule", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternativ", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descriere", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme automate, diagramei sau tabele.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme, diagramei sau tabele.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titlu", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Redimensionarea automată cu potrivire conținut", @@ -3302,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserare casetă text orizontală", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserare imagine", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Inserare număr de pagină", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserare formă automată", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserare formă", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Inserare SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserare simbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserare tabel", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json index f679e12244..1592282648 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Предупреждение", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Введите здесь своё сообщение", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "Показать главное окно", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Аноним", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Закрыть", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "Объект недоступен, так как редактируется другим пользователем.", @@ -2323,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Выравнивание", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативный текст", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, автофигура, диаграмма или таблица.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, фигура, диаграмма или таблица.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заголовок", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Угол", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрелки", @@ -2798,7 +2799,6 @@ "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Без подсветки", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Редактировать роль", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Создать новую роль", - "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.closeButtonText": "Закрыть", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Любой", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Удалить", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Вы действительно хотите удалить роль {0}?
После удаления будет создана роль по умолчанию.", @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "Список заполнения", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Сохранить как форму", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Цвет фона", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Изменить автофигуру", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Изменить фигуру", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Цвет", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Заливка", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Цвет переднего плана", @@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Интервалы между ячейками", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативный текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, автофигура, диаграмма или таблица.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, фигура, диаграмма или таблица.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заголовок", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Текста", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Автоподбор размеров по содержимому", @@ -3302,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Вставить горизонтальную надпись", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Вставить изображение", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Вставить номер страницы", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вставить автофигуру", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вставить фигуру", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Вставить SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Вставить символ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Вставить таблицу", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/si.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/si.json index 10b047fb3c..13c837a085 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/si.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/si.json @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "අවවාදයයි", "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "ඔබගේ පණිවිඩය මෙතැන යොදන්න", + "Common.Controllers.Desktop.hintBtnHome": "ප්‍රධාන කවුළුව පෙන්වන්න", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "වසන්න", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "වස්තුව වෙනත් පරිශීලකයෙකු විසින් සංස්කරණය කරන බැවින් එය අබල කර ඇත.", @@ -118,6 +119,9 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "පී", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "ත්‍රිමාණ පී", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (විහිදුම)", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "රේඩාර්", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarFilled": "පිරුණු රේඩාර්", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarMarker": "සලකුණුකාරක සහිත රේඩාර්", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "විසිරණය", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "සරල රේඛා සමඟ අතුරන්න", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "සරල රේඛා සහ සලකුණු සමඟ අතුරන්න", @@ -380,21 +384,27 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "මාරුව", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "උදාත්තය", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "හරිත නිල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "පසුබිම", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "කළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "නිල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "දීප්තිමත් කොළ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "දුඹුරු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "තද නිල්", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "තද අඳුරු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "තද අළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "තද කොළ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "තද දම්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "තද රතු", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "අඳුරු ටීල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "තද කහ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "රන්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "අළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "කොළ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "අවරිය", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLavender": "මධ්‍ය දම්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "ලා නිල්", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLighter": "තද දීප්ත", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "ලා අළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "ලා කොළ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightOrange": "ලා තැඹිලි", @@ -405,14 +415,17 @@ "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "රතු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "රෝස", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "අහස් නිල", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "ටීල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "පෙළ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTurquosie": "නීලමණි", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtViolet": "ජම්බූල", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "සුදු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "කහ", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "ලිපිනය:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "බලපත්‍රය", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "බලපත්‍රදායකයා", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "වි-තැපෑල:", - "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "දු.ක.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "අනුවාදය", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "එකතු කරන්න", @@ -487,7 +500,9 @@ "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "මකනය", "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "තෝරන්න", "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "මකනය", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "උද්දීපකය", "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "මි.මී.", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "පෑන", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "තෝරන්න", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "ප්‍රමාණය", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "ප්‍රස්තාරය සංස්කරකය", @@ -1016,7 +1031,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticTape": "ගැලීම් සටහන: අනුක්‍රමික ප්‍රවේශ ආචයනය", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualInput": "ගැලීම් සටහන: අතින් ආදානය ", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualOperation": "ගැලීම් සටහන: අතින් මෙහෙයුම", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "ගැලීම් සටහන: සංයුක්ත", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "ගැලීම් සටහන: ඒකාබද්ධ", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMultidocument": "ගැලීම් සටහන: බහුලේඛන", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOffpageConnector": "ගැලීම් සටහන: බැහැර පිටු සම්බන්ධකය", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOnlineStorage": "ගැලීම් සටහන: ගබඩා කළ දත්ත", @@ -1148,7 +1163,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "ඔබගේ වියමන අතිරික්සුව සහාය නොදක්වයි.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocExtMessage": "නොදන්නා ලේඛනයක ආකෘතියකි.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "උඩුගත කිරීමට ලේඛන නැත.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocSizeMessage": "ලේඛනයේ උපරිම ප්‍රමාණයේ සීමාව ඉක්මවිය.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocSizeMessage": "ලේඛනයක උපරිම ප්‍රමාණයේ සීමාව ඉක්මවිය.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "නොදන්නා අනුරුවක ආකෘතියකි.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "අනුරුවක් උඩුගත කර නැත.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "අනුරුව ඉතා විශාලට. උ. ප්‍රමාණය මෙ.බ. 25.", @@ -1157,6 +1172,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "කරුණාකර, රැඳෙන්න...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "යෙදුම IE9 හි අඩු ක්‍රියාකාරිත්වයක් ඇත. IE10 හෝ නව අනුවාද භාවිතා කරන්න", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "ඔබගේ අතිරික්සුවෙහි වත්මන් විශාලන සැකසුම් පූර්ණ වශයෙන් සහාය නොදක්වයි. කරුණාකර Ctrl+0 එබීමෙන් පෙරනිමි විශාලනයට යළි සකන්න.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික පරිශ්‍රීලකයින් සඳහා ප්‍රවේශය ප්‍රතික්‍ෂේපිතයි.
මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වනු ඇත.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත.
කරුණාකර ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට පැමිණ ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ.
තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "ඔබගේ බලපත්‍රය කල් ඉකුත්ව ඇත.
බලපත්‍රය යාවත්කාල කර පිටුව නැවුම් කරන්න.", @@ -1798,6 +1814,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "ගොනුවකින්", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "ආචයනය වෙතින්", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "ඒ.ස.නි. වෙතින්", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textIndents": "ලැයිස්තු එබුම් සකසන්න", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "කලින් ලේඛනයට එක්වන්න", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textLeft": "කෝෂ වමට මාරුව", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "කදලු වගුව", @@ -2125,6 +2142,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAutofit": "ස්වයංහැඩගැසීම", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textBackgroundColor": "පසුබිමෙහි වර්ණය", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckbox": "හරි යෙදීම", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckDefault": "පෙරනිමි ලෙස තේරීමේ බොත්තම සක්‍රියයි", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textColor": "දාරයේ පාට", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComb": "එක් එක් අකුරු සඳහා කොටු", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCombobox": "සංයුක්ත පෙට්ටිය", @@ -2163,6 +2181,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone2": "දුරකථන අංකය (උදා. +447911123456)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPlaceholder": "පිහිටුම් රැඳවුම", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadiobox": "වෘත බොත්තම", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadioDefault": "පෙරනිමි ලෙස බොත්තම අගුළු ලා ඇත", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textReg": "නිත්‍ය වාක්‍යවිධිය", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRequired": "ඇවැසිය", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textScale": "පරිමාණනය යුතු වන්නේ", @@ -2305,7 +2324,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "ඉදියුම", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "විකල්පමය පාඨය", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "සවිස්තරය", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු විකල්ප පාඨ මත පදනම්ව නිරූපණය, දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, ස්වයං හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "පෙළ මත පදනම්ව දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු නිරූපණ විකල්පය මගින් දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "සිරැසිය", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "කෝනය", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "ඊතල", @@ -2443,27 +2462,48 @@ "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "පටුනෙහි පෙන්වන්න එපා", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "මට්ටම", "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textSpace": "හිස්තැන", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTab": "පටිති අනුලකුණ", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTitle": "එබුම් ලැයිස්තුව", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowBullet": "මේ සමඟ ගුලි ගෙනයන්න", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowNumber": "මේ සමඟ අංක ගෙනයන්න", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtIndent": "පෙළ එබුම", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtNone": "කිසිවක් නැත", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "ගුලි පිහිටුම", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosNumber": "අංකයේ පිහිටුම", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "ස්වයංක්‍රීය", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "තද", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "මැද", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textHide": "සැකසුම් සඟවන්න", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textItalic": "ඇද", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "වම", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "මට්ටම", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textMore": "තව සැකසුම් පෙන්වන්න", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "පෙරදසුන", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "දකුණ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelectLevel": "මට්ටමක් තෝරන්න", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSpace": "හිස්තැන", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textTab": "පටිති අනුලකුණ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "ඉදියුම", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "හි", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "ගුළිය", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "පාට", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFollow": "මේ සමඟ අංක ගෙනයන්න", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "මුද්‍රණඅකුර", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtInclcudeLevel": "මට්ටමේ අංකය යොදන්න", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtIndent": "පෙළ එබුම", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "පෙළක් ලෙස", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtMoreTypes": "තවත් වර්ග", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "නව ගුලිය", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "කිසිවක් නැත", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNumFormatString": "අංක ආකෘතිය", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtRestart": "ලැයිස්තුව යළි අරඹන්න", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "ප්‍රමාණය", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtStart": "ඇරඹෙන්නේ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "සංකේතය", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTabStop": "පටිත්ත නැවතුව යෙදීම", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "ලේඛනයේ සැකසුම්", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "වර්ගය", + "DE.Views.ListTypesAdvanced.labelSelect": "ලැයිස්තු වර්ගය තෝරන්න", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "පීඩීඑෆ්", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "යවන්න", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "තේමාව", @@ -2492,10 +2532,10 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEmail": "වි-තැපෑල", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textFrom": "වෙතින්", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textGoToMail": "තැපෑල වෙත යන්න", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textHighlight": "සංයුක්ත ක්‍ෂේත්‍ර තීව්‍රාලෝක කරන්න", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textHighlight": "ඒකාබද්ධ ක්‍ෂේත්‍ර තීව්‍රාලෝක කරන්න", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textInsertField": "ඒකාබද්ධ ක්‍ෂේත්‍රය යොදන්න", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMaxRecepients": "උපරිම ලබන්නන් 100.", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMerge": "සංයුක්ත", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMerge": "ඒකාබද්ධ", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMergeFields": "ක්‍ෂේත්‍ර ඒකාබද්ධය", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMergeTo": "වෙත ඒකාබද්ධය", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPdf": "පීඩීඑෆ්", @@ -2700,6 +2740,9 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsUsNormal": "ඇ.එ. සමාන්‍ය", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsWide": "පුළුල්", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "සියළුම පිටු", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "දෙපසම මුද්‍රණය කරන්න", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "දිගු දාරය මත පිටු පෙරළන්න", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "කෙටි දාරය මත පිටු පෙරළන්න", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "පහළ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "පිටපත්", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "වත්මන් පිටුව", @@ -2709,6 +2752,8 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLeft": "වම", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtMargins": "මායිම්", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "/ {0}", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "එක් පසක මුද්‍රණය කරන්න", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "පිටුවේ එක් පැත්තක පමණක් මුද්‍රණය කරන්න", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "පිටුව", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "පිටු අංකය වලංගු නොවේ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageOrientation": "පිටුවේ හැඩගැස්ම", @@ -2718,6 +2763,7 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "මුද්‍රණය", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "පීඩීඑෆ් ලෙස මුද්‍රණය", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "මුද්‍රණ පරාසය", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "මුද්‍රණ පැති", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtRight": "දකුණ", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtSelection": "තේරීම", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtTop": "මුදුන", @@ -2772,7 +2818,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "පිරවීමේ ලැයිස්තුව", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "ආකෘතියක් ලෙස සුරකින්න", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "පසුබිමෙහි වර්ණය", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "ස්වයංහැඩගැසීම වෙනස් කරන්න", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "හැඩය සංශෝධනය", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "පාට", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "පුරවන්න", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "පෙරබිමෙහි පාට", @@ -2979,7 +3025,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "කෝෂ අතර ඉඩ", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "විකල්පමය පාඨය", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "සවිස්තරය", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු විකල්ප පාඨ මත පදනම්ව නිරූපණය, දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, ස්වයං හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "පෙළ මත පදනම්ව දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු නිරූපණ විකල්පය මගින් දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "සිරැසිය", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "පාඨය", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "අන්තර්ගතයට ගැලපෙන ලෙස ස්වයංක්‍රීයව ප්‍රමාණනය", @@ -3256,7 +3302,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "තිරස් පෙළ පෙට්ටියක් යොදන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "අනුරුවක් ඇතුළු කරන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "පිටු අංකය යොදන්න", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "ස්වයංහැඩගැසීම යොදන්න", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "හැඩයක් යොදන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "බුහුටි කලාවක් යොදන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "සංකේතයක් ඇතුළු කරන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "වගුවක් ඇතුළු කරන්න", @@ -3305,6 +3351,13 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "දියසලකුණ සංස්කරණය", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "තිරස්ව පතුරන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "සිරස්ව පතුරන්න", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletDoc": "ලේඛන ගුලි", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "ගුලි එකතුව", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiDoc": "වත්මන් ලේඛනයේ ලැයිස්තු", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiLib": "ලැයිස්තු එකතුව", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "ලේඛන අංකන ආකෘති", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumLib": "අංකන එකතුව", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupRecent": "මෑතදී භාවිතා කළ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "මායිමට පෙළගසන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "තේරූ වස්තූන් පෙළගසන්න", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "පිටුවට පෙළගසන්න", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json index e8a30800c8..29102acebc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json @@ -1900,7 +1900,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Zarovnanie", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatívny text", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Uhol", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Šípky", @@ -2263,7 +2263,7 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Nastavenie tabuľky", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Nastavenie Text Art", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Farba pozadia", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Zmeniť automatický tvar", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Zmeniť tvar", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farba", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Vyplniť", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Farba popredia", @@ -2456,7 +2456,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Medzera medzi bunkami", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatívny text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automaticky zmeniť veľkosť tak, aby zodpovedala obsahu", @@ -2726,7 +2726,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Vložiť rovnicu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vložiť obrázok", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Vložiť číslo stránky", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vložiť automatický tvar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vložiť tvar", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vložiť symbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vložiť tabuľku", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vložiť text", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json index cafc2fed30..a1ab52eb2b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json @@ -1628,7 +1628,7 @@ "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Vsi", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Vsi", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Barva ozadja", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Spremeni samodejno obliko", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Spremeni obliko", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Barva", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Dopolni", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Barva ospredja", @@ -1980,7 +1980,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Vstavi enačbo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vstavi sliko", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Vstavi številko strani", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vstavi samodejno obliko", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vstavi obliko", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vstavi simbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vstavi tabelo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vstavi besedilo", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json index 0d8c1dbf30..6264ccb9e4 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENSGIVARE", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-post:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Version", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Lägg till", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Korrigera när du skriver", @@ -2536,7 +2536,7 @@ "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Vem som helst", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "Spara som formulär", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Bakgrundsfärg", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ändra autoform", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ändra form", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Färg", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Fylla", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Förgrundsfärg", @@ -3007,7 +3007,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Infoga ekvation", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Infoga bild", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Infoga sidnummer", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Infoga autoform", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Infoga form", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Infoga symbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Infoga tabell", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Infoga textruta", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json index f3fcdca9c8..b3f64670ce 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json @@ -1956,7 +1956,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Hiza", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatif Metin", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Açıklama", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, otomatik şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlık", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Açı", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Oklar", @@ -2331,7 +2331,7 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Tablo Ayarları", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Yazı Sanatı ayarları", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Arka plan rengi", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Otomatik Şeklini Değiştir", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Şeklini Değiştir", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Renk", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Doldur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Önplan rengi", @@ -2524,7 +2524,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Hücreler arası aralığa izin ver", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatif Metin", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Açıklama", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, otomatik şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlık", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Metin", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "İçeriği sığdırmak için otomatik yeniden boyutlandır", @@ -2753,6 +2753,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Üstsimge", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "Bu paragraf için gizle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Ortak Çalışma", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Çizim", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Dosya", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Ana Sayfa", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Ekle", @@ -2797,7 +2798,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Insert Equation", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Resim ekle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Sayfa numarası ekle", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Otomatik Şekil ekle", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Şekil ekle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Simge ekle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Tablo ekle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Metin kutusu ekle", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json index 652d776961..36441dd5d8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json @@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Закрити", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningText": "Об'єкт вимкнено, оскільки його редагує інший користувач.", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningTitle": "Застереження", + "Common.Controllers.ExternalOleEditor.textAnonymous": "Гість", + "Common.Controllers.ExternalOleEditor.textClose": "Закрити", "Common.Controllers.History.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Застереження", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAcceptBeforeCompare": "Для порівняння документів всі відстежувані зміни в них будуть вважатись прийнятими. Ви бажаєте продовжити?", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "принаймн", @@ -114,6 +116,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Пиріг", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "Тривимірна кругова діаграма", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (розсіювання)", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "Радар", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "Точкова діаграма", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "Точкова з прямими відрізками", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "Точкова з прямими відрізками та маркерами", @@ -121,19 +124,32 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textScatterSmoothMarker": "Точкова з гладкими кривими та маркерами", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Запас", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Поверхня", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBalance": "Баланс", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCaptionedPictures": "Зображення з підписом", "Common.define.smartArt.textCycle": "Цикл", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingBlockList": "Спадаючий список блоком", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingProcess": "Спадаючий процес", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDetailedProcess": "Деталізований процес", + "Common.define.smartArt.textEquation": "Рівняння", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFramedTextPicture": "Зображення у рамці", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFunnel": "Воронка", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGridMatrix": "Матриця сіткою", "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchy": "Структура", "Common.define.smartArt.textList": "Список", "Common.define.smartArt.textMatrix": "Матриця", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOrganizationChart": "Органограма", "Common.define.smartArt.textOther": "Інше", "Common.define.smartArt.textPicture": "Зображення", "Common.define.smartArt.textProcess": "Процес", "Common.define.smartArt.textPyramid": "Піраміда", "Common.define.smartArt.textRelationship": "Відношення", + "Common.Translation.textMoreButton": "Більше", + "Common.Translation.tipFileLocked": "Документ заблоковано для редагування. Ви можете внести зміни та зберегти його як локальну копію.", "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Ви не можете редагувати цей файл, тому що він вже редагується в іншій програмі.", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "Створити копію", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "Відкрити на перегляд", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textAutoColor": "Автоматичний", + "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textEyedropper": "Піпетка", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "Новий спеціальний колір", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Квітень", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Серпень", @@ -181,6 +197,9 @@ "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintShowPwd": "Показати пароль", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "Пошук", "Common.UI.SearchBar.tipCloseSearch": "Закрити пошук", + "Common.UI.SearchBar.tipNextResult": "Наступний результат", + "Common.UI.SearchBar.tipOpenAdvancedSettings": "Відкрити розширені налаштування", + "Common.UI.SearchBar.tipPreviousResult": "Попередній результат", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textHighlight": "Виділіть результати", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textMatchCase": "З урахуванням регістру", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textReplaceDef": "Введіть текст заміни", @@ -196,6 +215,7 @@ "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Стандартні кольори", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Колірна тема", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeClassicLight": "Класична світла", + "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeContrastDark": "Контрастно-чорний", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeDark": "Темна", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeLight": "Світла", "Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "Скасувати", @@ -210,12 +230,30 @@ "Common.UI.Window.yesButtonText": "Так", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "см", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtPt": "Пт", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "Акцент", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "Вода", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Тло", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Чорний", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "Синій", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "Світло-зелений", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "Коричневий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "Темно-синій", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "Темніше", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "Темно-сірий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "Темно-зелений", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "Темно-пурпуровий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "Темно-червоний", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "Темно-чирокий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "Темно-жовтий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "Золотий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "Сірий", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "Зелений", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "адреса:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "ЛІЦЕНЗІЯ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "Ліцензіар", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "ел.пошта:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Під керуванням", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Тел.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "тел.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Версія", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Додати", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Застосовувати під час введення", @@ -224,8 +262,11 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBulleted": "Стилі маркованих списків", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "На", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDelete": "Видалити", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDoubleSpaces": "Додати крапку з подвійним пропуском", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLCells": "Робити перші літери в клітинках таблиць великими", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLDont": "Не змінювати на велику літеру після", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLSentence": "Писати речення з великої літери", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textForLangFL": "Винятки для мови:", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyperlink": "Адреси в інтернеті та мережі гіперпосиланнями", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyphens": "Дефіси (--) на тире (—)", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Автозаміна математичними символами", @@ -240,7 +281,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textResetAll": "Скинути налаштування", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textRestore": "Відновити", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Автозаміна", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddFL": "Винятки мають містити лише літери у верхньому чи нижньому регістрі.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddRec": "Розпізнані функції повинні містити тільки прописні букви від А до Я.", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetFL": "Всі виключення, які було додано вами, буде вилучено, а раніше вилучені - відновлено. Продовжити?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetRec": "Всі додані вирази будуть видалені, а видалені - відновлені. Ви хочете продовжити?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReplace": "Елемент автозаміни для %1 вже існує. Ви хочете його замінити?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReset": "Будь-які додані вами автозаміни будуть видалені, а змінені будуть відновлені до початкових. Бажаєте продовжити?", @@ -270,7 +313,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textReply": "Відповісти", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Вирішити", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolved": "Вирішено", - "Common.Views.Comments.textSort": "Сортувати коментарі", + "Common.Views.Comments.textSort": "Впорядкувати коментарі", "Common.Views.Comments.textViewResolved": "У вас немає прав для повторного відкриття коментарю", "Common.Views.Comments.txtEmpty": "Відсутні коментарі у документі.", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Не показувати це повідомлення знову", @@ -281,7 +324,13 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "Для вставлення", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Завантаження...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Налаштувати доступ", - "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "редагування діаграми", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Стирачка", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Стирачка", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Маркер", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "мм", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Ручка", + "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Редагування діаграми", + "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Закрити", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Отримувачі ел.поштою", "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Користувачі, що редагують документ:", "Common.Views.Header.textAddFavorite": "Додати в обране", @@ -297,6 +346,7 @@ "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "Звантажити файл", "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "Редагувати поточний файл", "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "Друк файлу", + "Common.Views.Header.tipPrintQuick": "Швидкий друк", "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "Повторити", "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "Зберегти", "Common.Views.Header.tipSearch": "Пошук", @@ -373,6 +423,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.textWarnTrackChangesTitle": "Увімкнути відстежування змін для всіх?", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Прийняти поточну зміну", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "Встановити режим спільного редагування", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCombine": "Об'єднати поточний документ з іншим", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "Вилучити коментарі", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "Вилучити поточні коментарі", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentResolve": "Вирішити коментарі", @@ -392,6 +443,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Чат", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Закрити", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Спільне редагування", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCombine": "Об'єднати", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Вилучити усі коментарі", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Вилучити поточні коментарі", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Вилучити мої коментарі", @@ -404,7 +456,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveMyCurrent": "Вирішити мої поточні коментарі", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Порівняти", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Мова", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtEditing": "редагування", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtEditing": "Редагування", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Усі зміни прийняті {0}", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Фіналізований", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtHistory": "Історія версій", @@ -443,6 +495,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Скасувати", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Закрити", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "Гаразд", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEnterComment": "Додайте коментар тут", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textFollowMove": "Перейти на попереднє місце", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+згадка надасть доступ до документа і відправить сповіщення поштою", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+згадка відправить користувачу сповіщення поштою", @@ -458,8 +511,10 @@ "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "Каталог для збереження", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textCaseSensitive": "З урахуванням регістру", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textCloseSearch": "Закрити пошук", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textContentChanged": "Документ змінено.", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFind": "Пошук", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFindAndReplace": "Знайти та замінити", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoMatches": "Збіги відсутні", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoSearchResults": "Нічого не знайдено", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplace": "Замінити", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceAll": "Замінити усе", @@ -469,6 +524,8 @@ "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchResults": "Результати пошуку: {0}/{1}", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textTooManyResults": "Забагато результатів для показу", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textWholeWords": "Тільки цілі слова", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.tipNextResult": "Наступний результат", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.tipPreviousResult": "Попередній результат", "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "Завантаження", "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "Вибрати джерело даних", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "Грубий", @@ -487,6 +544,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "Шрифт", "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "Розмір шрифту", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "Дозволити автору додавати коментар у вікні діалогу додавання підпису", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textDefInstruction": "Перед додаванням підпису до документу перевірте, чи вміст документу відповідає дійсності.", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "Ел.пошта", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "Ім'я", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "Посада підписанта", @@ -627,12 +685,14 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Кількість стовпчиків повинна бути менше ніж 1%.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Кількість рядків повинна бути менше% 1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Гість", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnyone": "Будь-хто", "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Застосувати до всіх рівнянь", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Відвідати сайт", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Усі зміни збережено", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Закрити", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Натисніть, щоб закрити підказку", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Зв'язатися з відділом продажів", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textContinue": "Продовжити", "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Це рівняння створено у старій версії редактора рівнянь, яка більше не підтримується. Щоб змінити це рівняння, його необхідно перетворити на формат Office Math ML.
Перетворити зараз?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Зверніть увагу, що згідно з умовами ліцензії ви не маєте права змінювати екран завантаження.
Будь ласка, зв'яжіться з нашим відділом продажів, щоб отримати ціну.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textDisconnect": "З'єднання втрачено", @@ -647,6 +707,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Запам’ятати мій вибір для всіх файлів", "DE.Controllers.Main.textRenameError": "Ім'я користувача не повинно бути порожнім.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textRenameLabel": "Введіть ім'я, що буде використовуватись для співпраці", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRequestMacros": "Макрос надіслав запит за зовнішньою адресою. Дозволити здійснити запит до %1? ", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Форма", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Суворий режим", "DE.Controllers.Main.textText": "Текст", @@ -782,7 +843,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartProcess": "Блок-схема: процес", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "Блок-схема: картка", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedTape": "Блок-схема: перфострічка", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "Блок-схема: сортування", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "Блок-схема: впорядкування", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSummingJunction": "Блок-схема: вузол суми", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartTerminator": "Блок-схема: знак закінчення", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_foldedCorner": "Загнутий кут", @@ -913,6 +974,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Будь ласка, зачекайте...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Застосунок має низьку ефективність при роботі з-під IE9. Використовувати IE10 або вище", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Наявне масштабування сторінки браузеру повністю не підтримується. Поверніться до стандартного масштабу, натиснувши Ctrl+0.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Доступ заборонено для неавторизованих користувачів.
Документ буде відкрито тільки для перегляду.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Ви досягли ліміту одночасного підключення до редакторів %1. Цей документ буде відкритий лише для перегляду.
Щоб дізнатися більше, зв’яжіться з адміністратором.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Термін дії вашої ліцензії минув.
Будь ласка, оновіть свою ліцензію та оновіть сторінку.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Термін дії ліцензії закінчився.
Немає доступ до функцій редагування документів.
Будь ласка, зверніться до адміністратора.", @@ -923,6 +985,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Вам відмовлено у наданні права редагувати файл.", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Початок документа", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "Перейти до початку документу", + "DE.Controllers.Print.txtCustom": "Власний", + "DE.Controllers.Print.txtPrintRangeSingleRange": "Зазначте або номер сторінки або діапазон сторінок (напр., 5-12). Або збережіть файл у PDF.", "DE.Controllers.Search.textNoTextFound": "Дані, які ви шукали в хмарі, не знайдено. Будь ласка, скоригуйте ваші параметри пошуку.", "DE.Controllers.Search.textReplaceSuccess": "Пошук виконано. Замінено {0} збігів", "DE.Controllers.Search.warnReplaceString": "Нічого", @@ -982,12 +1046,12 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Hat": "Капелюх", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Smile": "Короткий", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Tilde": "Тільда", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_2": "Дужки з роздільниками", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_3": "Дужки з роздільниками", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_Delimiter_2": "Дужки з роздільниками", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", @@ -998,29 +1062,29 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_5": "Приклад регістру символів", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_6": "Биномиальный коефіцієнт", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_7": "Биномиальный коефіцієнт", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_NoneNone": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_Delimiter_2": "Дужки з роздільниками", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "дужки", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseClose": "дужки", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseOpen": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "Дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseClose": "Дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseOpen": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "дужки", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "Дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "дужки", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "Дужки", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDiagonal": "Обмотана фракція", @@ -1240,12 +1304,12 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ni": "Містить в якості учасника", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_not": "Не підписаний", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_notexists": "Там не існує", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_nu": "ню", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_nu": "Ню", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_o": "Омікрон", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_omega": "Омега", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_partial": "Частковий диференціал", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_percent": "відсотковий вміст", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_phi": "фі", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_percent": "Відсотковий вміст", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_phi": "Фі", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pi": "Пі", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_plus": "Плюс", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pm": "Плюс мінус", @@ -1254,24 +1318,24 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qdrt": "Четвертий корінь", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qed": "Кінець показника", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rddots": "Вгору справа Діагональ Еліпсіс", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rho": "ро", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rho": "Ро", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rightarrow": "Права стрілочка", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sigma": "сігма", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sigma": "Сігма", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sqrt": "Радикальний знак", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_tau": "тау", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_tau": "Тау", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_therefore": "Тому", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_theta": "тета", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_theta": "Тета", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_times": "Знак множення", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_uparrow": "Стрілочка вгору", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_upsilon": "іпсилон", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_upsilon": "Iпсилон", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varepsilon": "Епсілон Варіант", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varphi": "варіант фі", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varphi": "Варіант фі", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varpi": "Пі варіант", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varrho": "Ро варіант", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varsigma": "сігма варіант", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vartheta": "тета варіант", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varsigma": "Сігма варіант", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vartheta": "Тета варіант", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "Вертикальний Еліпсіс", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "ксі", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "Ксі", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Дзета", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "За розміром сторінки", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "По ширині", @@ -1308,7 +1372,7 @@ "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Вставити", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "Підпис", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLongDash": "довге тире", - "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textNumbering": "Нумерація", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textNumbering": "Нумерований список", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textPeriod": "крапка", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textSeparator": "Використати роздільник", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTable": "Таблиця", @@ -1320,11 +1384,18 @@ "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "Рядки", "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "Вставити декілька", "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Над курсором", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dDepth": "Глибина (% від основного)", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dRotation": "Обертання 3D", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAutoscale": "Автоматичне масштабування", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Змінити тип діаграми", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textDefault": "Типове обертання", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textDown": "Вниз", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Редагувати дату", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "Висота", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textLeft": "Ліворуч", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Реальний розмір", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textPerspective": "Перспектива", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textSize": "Розмір", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "Стиль", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUndock": "Скасувати з панелі", @@ -1410,6 +1481,7 @@ "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtTitle": "Перехресне посилання", "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtType": "Тип посилання", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Кількість стовпчиків", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textEqualWidth": "Однакова ширина стовпчика", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Роздільник", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Стовпчики", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Встановити типовий формат для {0}: \"{1}\"", @@ -1429,6 +1501,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Вище", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Добавити коментар", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedDropCapText": "Налаштування буквиці", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedEquationText": "Налаштування рівняння", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Рамка розширені налаштування", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedParagraphText": "Додаткові параметри параграфу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "Таблиця розширені налаштування", @@ -1436,7 +1509,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "Вирівнювання", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "Нижче", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "Розрив сторінки перед", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "Маркери та нумерація", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "Ненумерований та нумерований списки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Вертикальне вирівнювання комірки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Комірка", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "Центр", @@ -1495,6 +1568,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSign": "Підписати", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "Форматування в стилі", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "Таблиця", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAccept": "Прийняти зміну", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "Вирівняти", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrange": "Організувати", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBack": "Надіслати до фону", @@ -1521,6 +1595,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "З файлу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Зі сховища", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "За URL", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textIndents": "Налаштувати відступ у списках", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Об'єднати з попереднім списком", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textLeft": "Клітинки зі зсувом ліворуч", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Вставити як вкладену таблицю", @@ -1730,11 +1805,14 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Коментар", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Створено", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtDocumentInfo": "Інформація про документ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Завантаження...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Змінено", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Змінено", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtNo": "Ні", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "Власник", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Сторінки", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPageSize": "Розмір сторінки", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Параграфи", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPdfTagged": "PDF з мітками", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Місцезнаходження", @@ -1747,6 +1825,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Назва", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Завантажено", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Слів", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtAccessRights": "Права доступу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Особи, які мають права", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Увага", @@ -1754,6 +1833,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "Захистити документ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "За допомогою підпису", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddedSignature": "Дійсні підписи було додано до документу.
Документ захищено від запису.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddSignature": "Забезпечити цілісність документу шляхом додавання
невидимого цифрового підпису", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Редагувати документ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "При редагуванні з документа будуть видалені підписи.
Продовжити?", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "Цей документ захищений паролем", @@ -1762,6 +1842,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "До документа додано дійсні підписи. Документ захищений від редагування.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Деякі з цифрових підписів у документі є недійсними або їх не можна перевірити. Документ захищений від редагування.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "Переглянути підписи", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.RecentFiles.txtOpenRecent": "Відкрити останнє", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Застосувати", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": "Спільне редагування", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Швидко", @@ -1773,7 +1854,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Зміни у співпраці в реальному часі", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowComments": "Показувати коментарі в тексті", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowOthersChanges": "Показувати зміни інших користувачів", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowResolvedComments": "Показувати вирішені коментарі", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowResolvedComments": "Показувати розв'язані коментарі", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strStrict": "Суворо", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strTheme": "Тема інтерфейсу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strUnit": "Одиниця виміру", @@ -1782,13 +1863,14 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text30Minutes": "Кожні 30 хвилин", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text5Minutes": "Кожні 5 хвилин", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text60Minutes": "Кожну годину", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Посібники з вирівнювання", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Лінійка вирівнювання", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Автовідновлення", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Автоматичне збереження", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Заблокований", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Збереження проміжних версій", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Кожну хвилину", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Підтримка сумісності зі старими версіями Microsoft Word при збереженні у форматі DOCX", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAdvancedSettings": "Розширені налаштування", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Показати усе", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Параметри автозаміни...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Типовий режим кешу", @@ -1805,7 +1887,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLast": "Переглянути останнє", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "як OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Рідний", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Не переглядувати нічого", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Не показувати нічого", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Правопис", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Визначити", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtQuickPrint": "Показувати кнопку \"Швидкий друк\" у заголовку редактора", @@ -1821,33 +1903,52 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Показати сповіщення", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Вимкнути всі макроси зі сповіщенням", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "як Windows", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveAs.textDownloadAs": "Звантажити як", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAlways": "Завжди", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAnyone": "Будь-хто", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAspect": "Зберігати пропорції", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAtLeast": "принаймні", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAuto": "Автоматично", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAutofit": "Автопідбір", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textBackgroundColor": "Колір фону", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckbox": "Прапорець", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textColor": "Колір меж", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComb": "Комбінувати символи", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCombobox": "Поле зі списком", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComplex": "Складне поле", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textConnected": "Підключені поля", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCreditCard": "Номер кредитної картки (напр. 4111-1111-1111-1111)", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateField": "Поле дати та часу", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateFormat": "Показувати дату як", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDefValue": "Типове значення", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDelete": "Видалити", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDigits": "Цифри", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDisconnect": "Відключити", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDropDown": "Випадаючий список", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textExact": "Точно", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textField": "Текстове поле", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFixed": "Поле фіксованого розміру", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFormat": "Формат", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFormatSymbols": "Дозволені символи", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromFile": "З файлу", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromStorage": "Зі сховища", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromUrl": "За URL", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textGroupKey": "Ключ групи", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textImage": "Зображення", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textKey": "Ключ", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLang": "Мова", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLock": "Заблокувати", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMask": "Випадкова маска", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMaxChars": "Максимальна кількість знаків", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMulti": "Багаторядкове поле", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNever": "Ніколи", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNoBorder": "Без меж", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNone": "Жоден", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone1": "Номер телефону (напр. (123) 456-7890)", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone2": "Номер телефону (напр. +380123456789)", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPlaceholder": "Заповнювач", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadiobox": "Перемикач", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadioDefault": "Застосовано типове значення кнопки", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRequired": "Обов'язково", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textScale": "Коли масштабувати", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textSelectImage": "Вибрати зображення", @@ -1864,15 +1965,22 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textWidth": "Ширина клітинки", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnCheckBox": "Прапорець", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnComboBox": "Поле зі списком", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnComplex": "Складне поле", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnDownloadForm": "Звантажити як oform", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnDropDown": "Випадаючий список", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnEmail": "Адреса електронної пошти", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnImage": "Зображення", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnNext": "Наступне поле", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnPhone": "Номер телефону", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnPrev": "Попереднє поле", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnRadioBox": "Перемикач", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnSaveForm": "Зберегти як oform", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnSubmit": "Відправити", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnText": "Текстове поле", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnView": "Переглянути форму", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capCreditCard": "Кредитна картка", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capDateTime": "Дата та час", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.textAnyone": "Будь-хто", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textClear": "Очистити поля", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textClearFields": "Очистити всі поля", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textCreateForm": "Додайте поля і створіть документ для заповнення OFORM", @@ -1883,6 +1991,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.textSubmited": "Форма успішно надіслана", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipCheckBox": "Вставити прапорець", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipComboBox": "Вставити поле зі списком", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDownloadForm": "Звантажити файл у форматі OFORM для заповнення", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDropDown": "Вставити випадаючий список", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipImageField": "Вставити зображення", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipNextForm": "Перейти до наступного поля", @@ -1892,6 +2001,7 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipSubmit": "Відправити форму", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipTextField": "Вставити текстове поле", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipViewForm": "Переглянути форму", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtFixedText": "Фіксовано", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtUntitled": "Без ім'я", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Нижній центр", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Внизу зліва", @@ -1963,7 +2073,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Вирівнювання", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, автофігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, фігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Нахил", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрілки", @@ -1971,7 +2081,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Автоматично", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Початковий розмір", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Початок стилю", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "Нижче", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "нижче", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBevel": "Скіс", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Внизу", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottomMargin": "Нижня маржа", @@ -2038,11 +2148,13 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipComments": "Коментарі", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipNavigation": "Навігація", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipOutline": "Заголовки", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipPageThumbnails": "Ескізи сторінок", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipPlugins": "Розширення", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSearch": "Пошук", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Відгуки і підтримка", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipTitles": "Назви", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "Режим розробника", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtEditor": "Редактор", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtLimit": "Обмежений доступ", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "ПРОБНИЙ РЕЖИМ", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrialDev": "Пробний режим розробника", @@ -2053,7 +2165,7 @@ "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textDocument": "До всього документа", "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textForward": "До кінця документу", "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textFromText": "З тексту", - "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textNumbering": "Нумерація", + "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textNumbering": "Нумерований список", "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textRestartEachPage": "На кожній сторінці", "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textRestartEachSection": "В кожному розділі", "DE.Views.LineNumbersDialog.textSection": "До поточного розділу", @@ -2097,18 +2209,26 @@ "DE.Views.Links.titleUpdateTOF": "Оновити список ілюстрацій", "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "Не показувати у змісті", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "Рівень", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtNone": "Жоден", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "Розташування знаку ненумерованого списку", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosNumber": "Розташування номеру", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Автоматично", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "Грубий", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "По центру", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Курсив", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "По лівому краю", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Рівень", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Перегляд", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "По правому краю", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Вирівнювання", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "у", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Маркер", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Колір", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "Шрифт", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Як текст", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Новий маркер", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "Немає", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNumFormatString": "Числовий формат", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Розмір", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Символ", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Налаштування списку", @@ -2183,7 +2303,7 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Застосувати", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "Застосувати зміни до", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textContinue": "Безперервний", - "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textCustom": "Користувальницький знак", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textCustom": "Власна позначка", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textDocEnd": "В кінці документу", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textDocument": "Весь документ", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachPage": "Перезапустити кожну сторінку", @@ -2193,7 +2313,7 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Формат", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textInsert": "Вставити", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textLocation": "Місцезнаходження", - "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "Нумерація", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "Нумерований список", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumFormat": "Номер формату", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textPageBottom": "Внизу сторінки", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textSectEnd": "В кінці розділу", @@ -2240,7 +2360,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "Лінія інтервалу", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "Параметр інтервалу", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Не додавайте інтервал між параграфами тотожнього стилю", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingAfter": "після", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingAfter": "Після", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingBefore": "Перед", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAt": "в", @@ -2282,6 +2402,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuppressLineNumbers": "Заборонити нумерацію рядків", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Вкладка", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Вирівнювання", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAll": "Все", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Мінімально", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Множник", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Колір тла", @@ -2292,6 +2413,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Внизу", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "По центру", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Пробіл між символами", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textContext": "Контекстний", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Типова вкладка", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Ефекти", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Точно", @@ -2325,9 +2447,32 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Встановити лише верхню межу", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Авто", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsLast": "Останні налаштування", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsModerate": "Помірний", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsNormal": "Звичайний", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Всі сторінки", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Двосторонній друк", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "Гортати сторінки по довгому краю", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "Гортати сторінки по короткому краю", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "Знизу", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Копії", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Поточна сторінка", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustom": "Власний", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Налаштований друк", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLandscape": "Альбомна", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLeft": "Ліворуч", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "із {0}", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Односторонній друк", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "Односторонній друк", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Сторінка", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageOrientation": "Орієнтація сторінки", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPages": "Сторінок", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageSize": "Розмір сторінки", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPortrait": "Книжкова", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Друк", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Зберегти в PDF", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Діапазон друку", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Сторони друку", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtSelection": "Вибрано", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.textComments": "Коментарі", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.textForms": "Заповнення форм", @@ -2336,6 +2481,7 @@ "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtAllow": "Дозволити лише такий тип редагування документу", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Повторно зазначений пароль не збігається", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtLimit": "Пароль має бути не більше 15 символів", + "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtOptional": "необов'язково", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtPassword": "Пароль", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtProtect": "Захистити", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtRepeat": "Повторіть пароль", @@ -2351,9 +2497,21 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "Налаштування підпису", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Налаштування таблиці", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Налаштування текстової фігури", + "DE.Views.RoleDeleteDlg.textTitle": "Вилучити роль", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textEmptyError": "Роль має містити назву", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "Без виділення", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "Редагувати роль", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "Створити нову роль", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "Будь-хто", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "Вилучити", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "Дійсно вилучити роль {0}?
Після вилучення буде створено типову роль.", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDescription": "Додати ролі та встановити порядок, за яким отримують та підписують документ", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textEdit": "Редагувати", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textNew": "Нове", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnDelete": "Дійсно вилучити роль {0}?", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "Будь-хто", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Колір тла", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змінити автофігуру", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змінити фігуру", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Колір", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Заповнити", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Колір переднього плану", @@ -2437,7 +2595,7 @@ "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "За розміром сторінки", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "По ширині", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSelectTool": "Інструмент вибору", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "вибрати мову тексту", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "Вибрати мову тексту", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "Масштаб", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "Збільшити", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Зменшити", @@ -2537,8 +2695,12 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipOuter": "Встановити лише зовнішній край", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Встановити лише зовнішній правий кордон", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Встановити лише зовнішній верхній край", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_BorderedAndLined": "Таблиці з рамками та межами", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Custom": "Власний", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Акцент", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Bordered": "З рамками", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_BorderedAndLined": "З рамками та межами", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Кольоровий", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Темний", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_GridTable": "Таблиця-сітка", @@ -2551,12 +2713,12 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Відстань між комірками", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, автофігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, фігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Автоматично змінювати розмір відповідно до вмісту", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Тло комірки", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "Нижче", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "нижче", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір меж", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Клацніть по діаграмі або використовуйте кнопки, щоб вибрати кордони та застосувати до них вибраний стиль", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBordersBackgroung": "Кордони та задній фон", @@ -2692,9 +2854,9 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgForward": "Висувати", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Група", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Обгортання", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCapitalizeWords": "Кожне слово з великої літери", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCapitalizeWords": "Кожне Слово З Великої Літери", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Вставити спеціальну таблицю", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Намалювати таблицю", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Додати таблицю", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Параметри елемента керування", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Буквиця налаштування", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Змінити нижній колонтитул", @@ -2704,7 +2866,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromStorage": "Зі сховища", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniFromUrl": "За URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Приховані границі таблиці", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "недруковані символи", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Недруковані символи", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "Колір підсвітки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Картинка з файлу", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "Зображення зі сховища", @@ -2742,7 +2904,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsSectionBreak": "Вставити розрив розділу", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInText": "у тексті", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textItalic": "Курсив", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLandscape": "ландшафт", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLandscape": "Ландшафт", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLeft": "Вліво:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textListSettings": "Налаштування списку", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsLast": "Останній користувач", @@ -2778,6 +2940,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Надрядковий", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "Відключити для поточного параграфу", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Співпраця", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Малювати", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Файл", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Головна", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Вставити", @@ -2790,7 +2953,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textToCurrent": "До поточної позиції", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTop": "Верх:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textUnderline": "Підкреслений", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignCenter": "Вирівняти центр", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignCenter": "Відцентрувати", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignJust": "По ширині", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignLeft": "Вирівняти зліва", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignRight": "Вирівняти справа", @@ -2823,7 +2986,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Вставити рівняння", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Вставити зображення", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Вставити номер сторінки", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "вставити автофігури", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вставити фігури", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Вставити фігури", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Вставити символ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Вставити таблицю", @@ -2832,7 +2995,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineNumbers": "Показувати номери рядків", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Розмітка міжрядкових інтервалів", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "Надіслати ел.поштою", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Кулі", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Ненумерований список", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersArrow": "Маркери-стрілки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersCheckmark": "Маркери-галочки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersDash": "Маркери-тире", @@ -2847,7 +3010,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultilevels": "Багаторівневий список", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelSymbols": "Багаторівневі маркери-символи", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelVarious": "Багаторівневі різні нумеровані маркери", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "Нумерація", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "Нумерований список", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageBreak": "Вставити розрив сторінки або розділу", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageMargins": "Поля сторінки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageOrient": "Орієнтація сторінки", @@ -2856,18 +3019,21 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "Вставити", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "Колір заливки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "Роздрукувати", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrintQuick": "Швидкий друк", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Повторити", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "Зберегти", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "Збережіть свої зміни, щоб інші користувачі могли їх переглянути.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSelectAll": "Вибрати все", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendBackward": "Відправити назад", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendForward": "Висувати", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "недруковані символи", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "Недруковані символи", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Документ був змінений іншим користувачем. Будь ласка, натисніть, щоб зберегти зміни та перезавантажити оновлення.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Скасувати", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Змінити підкладку", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Розподілити горизонтально", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Розподілити вертикально", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "Бібліотека знаків ненумерованого списку", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "Числові формати у документі", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Вирівняти відносно поля", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Вирівняти виділені об'єкти", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Вирівняти відносно сторінки", @@ -2905,6 +3071,9 @@ "DE.Views.ViewTab.textRulers": "Лінійки", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textStatusBar": "Рядок стану", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textZoom": "Масштаб", + "DE.Views.ViewTab.tipDarkDocument": "Затемнений документ", + "DE.Views.ViewTab.tipFitToPage": "За розміром сторінки", + "DE.Views.ViewTab.tipFitToWidth": "По ширині", "DE.Views.ViewTab.tipHeadings": "Заголовки", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Авто", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Грубий", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json index 3ba2a6737b..2555e4a1bd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -118,6 +118,9 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "餅", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "3-D 圓餅圖", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY（散點圖）", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "雷達", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarFilled": "填色雷達圖", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarMarker": "含標記的雷達", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "散佈圖", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "散佈圖同直線", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "散佈圖同直線及標記", @@ -125,16 +128,173 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textScatterSmoothMarker": "散佈圖同平滑線及標記", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "庫存", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "表面", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAccentedPicture": "強調圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAccentProcess": "強調處理", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingFlow": "交替流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingHexagons": "交替六邊形", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingPictureBlocks": "交替圖片區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingPictureCircles": "交替圖片圓形", + "Common.define.smartArt.textArchitectureLayout": "架構佈局", + "Common.define.smartArt.textArrowRibbon": "箭頭緞帶", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAscendingPictureAccentProcess": "升序圖片強調處理", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBalance": "平衡", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicBendingProcess": "基本彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicBlockList": "基本塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicChevronProcess": "基本雪佛龍流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicCycle": "基本循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicMatrix": "基本矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicPie": "基本圓餅圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicProcess": "基本流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicPyramid": "基本金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicRadial": "基本射線狀", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicTarget": "基本目標", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicTimeline": "基本時間軸", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicVenn": "基本文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureAccentList": "彎曲圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureBlocks": "彎曲圖片區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureCaption": "彎曲圖片標題", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureCaptionList": "彎曲圖片標題清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureSemiTranparentText": "彎曲圖片半透明文字", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBlockCycle": "區塊循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBubblePictureList": "氣泡圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCaptionedPictures": "帶標題的圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textChevronAccentProcess": "箭頭強調流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textChevronList": "箭頭清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleAccentTimeline": "圓形強調時間軸", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleArrowProcess": "圓形箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCirclePictureHierarchy": "圓形圖片階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleProcess": "圓形流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleRelationship": "圓形關係", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircularBendingProcess": "圓形彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircularPictureCallout": "圓形圖片註解", + "Common.define.smartArt.textClosedChevronProcess": "閉合箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousArrowProcess": "連續箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousBlockProcess": "連續塊流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousCycle": "連續循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousPictureList": "連續圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingArrows": "匯聚箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingRadial": "匯聚射線狀", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingText": "匯聚文字", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCounterbalanceArrows": "平衡箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCycle": "循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCycleMatrix": "循環矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingBlockList": "降序區塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingProcess": "降序流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDetailedProcess": "詳細流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDivergingArrows": "發散箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDivergingRadial": "發散徑向", "Common.define.smartArt.textEquation": "方程式", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFramedTextPicture": "框架文字圖片", "Common.define.smartArt.textFunnel": "漏斗", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGear": "齒輪", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGridMatrix": "網格矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGroupedList": "分組清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHalfCircleOrganizationChart": "半圓形組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHexagonCluster": "六邊形群組", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHexagonRadial": "六邊形徑向", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchy": "階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchyList": "階層清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalBulletList": "水平項目符號清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalHierarchy": "水平階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalLabeledHierarchy": "水平標籤階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalMultiLevelHierarchy": "水平多層階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalOrganizationChart": "水平組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalPictureList": "水平圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textIncreasingArrowProcess": "遞增箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textIncreasingCircleProcess": "遞增圓圈流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInterconnectedBlockProcess": "互連區塊流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInterconnectedRings": "互連環圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInvertedPyramid": "倒金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textLabeledHierarchy": "含標籤的階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textLinearVenn": "線性文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textLinedList": "有格線的清單", "Common.define.smartArt.textList": "清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textMatrix": "矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textMultidirectionalCycle": "多方向循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textNameAndTitleOrganizationChart": "名稱與職稱組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textNestedTarget": "巢狀目標", + "Common.define.smartArt.textNondirectionalCycle": "無方向循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOpposingArrows": "相對箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOpposingIdeas": "相對觀點", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOrganizationChart": "組織圖", "Common.define.smartArt.textOther": "其它", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPhasedProcess": "分階處理", "Common.define.smartArt.textPicture": "圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureAccentBlocks": "圖片強調區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureAccentList": "圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureAccentProcess": "圖片強調流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureCaptionList": "圖片標題列表", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureFrame": "圖片框架", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureGrid": "圖片網格", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureLineup": "圖片排列", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureOrganizationChart": "圖片組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureStrips": "圖片條帶", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPieProcess": "圓餅圖流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPlusAndMinus": "加號和減號", + "Common.define.smartArt.textProcess": "流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textProcessArrows": "流程箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textProcessList": "流程清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPyramid": "金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPyramidList": "金字塔清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialCluster": "徑向群組", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialCycle": "徑向循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialList": "徑向清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialPictureList": "徑向圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialVenn": "徑向文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRandomToResultProcess": "隨機結果處理", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRelationship": "關聯性", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRepeatingBendingProcess": "重複彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textReverseList": "反向清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSegmentedCycle": "分段循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSegmentedProcess": "分段流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSegmentedPyramid": "分段金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSnapshotPictureList": "快照圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSpiralPicture": "螺旋圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSquareAccentList": "方形強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStackedList": "堆疊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStackedVenn": "堆疊文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStaggeredProcess": "交錯式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStepDownProcess": "向下階梯式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStepUpProcess": "向上階梯式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSubStepProcess": "子階段式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTabbedArc": "已定位的弧形", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTableHierarchy": "表格階層", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTableList": "表格清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTabList": "定位清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTargetList": "目標清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTextCycle": "文字循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureAccent": "主題圖片強調", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureAlternatingAccent": "主題圖片交替強調", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureGrid": "主題圖片網格", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitledMatrix": "標題矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitledPictureAccentList": "標題圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitledPictureBlocks": "標題圖片區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitlePictureLineup": "標題圖片排列", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTrapezoidList": "梯形清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textUpwardArrow": "向上箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVaryingWidthList": "寬度不一的清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalAccentList": "垂直強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalArrowList": "垂直箭頭清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBendingProcess": "垂直彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBlockList": "垂直區塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBoxList": "垂直方塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBracketList": "垂直括弧清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBulletList": "垂直項目符號清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalChevronList": "垂直V型清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalCircleList": "垂直循環清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalCurvedList": "垂直彎曲清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalEquation": "垂直方程式", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalPictureAccentList": "垂直圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalPictureList": "垂直圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalProcess": "垂直流程", "Common.Translation.textMoreButton": "更多", + "Common.Translation.tipFileLocked": "文件已鎖定編輯。您可以進行更改並保存為本機副本。", + "Common.Translation.tipFileReadOnly": "此檔案是唯讀的。若要保留您的更改，請以新名稱或不同位置儲存此檔案。", "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "該文件正在另一個應用程式中進行編輯。您可以繼續編輯並將其另存為副本。", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "\n建立副本", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "打開查看", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textAutoColor": "自動", + "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textEyedropper": "滴管工具", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "新增自訂顏色", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "四月", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "八月", @@ -178,6 +338,7 @@ "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textNew": "新", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textRGBErr": "輸入的值不正確。
請輸入0到255之間的數字。", "Common.UI.HSBColorPicker.textNoColor": "無顏色", + "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnCalendar.textDate": "選取日期", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintHidePwd": "不顯示密碼", "Common.UI.InputFieldBtnPassword.textHintShowPwd": "顯示密碼", "Common.UI.SearchBar.textFind": "尋找", @@ -200,6 +361,7 @@ "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textRecentColors": "近期顏色", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "標準顏色", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "主題顏色", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textTransparent": "透明", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeClassicLight": "傳統亮色", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeContrastDark": "暗色對比", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeDark": "暗", @@ -221,10 +383,43 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Shift", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "口音", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "淺綠色", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "背景", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "黑色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "亮綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "棕色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "深藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "較深的", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "深灰色", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "深綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "深紫色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "深紅色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "藍綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "深黃色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "金色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "灰色", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "靛藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLavender": "薰衣草色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "淺藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLighter": "較淺的", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "淺灰色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "淺綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightOrange": "淺橙色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightYellow": "淺黃色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtOrange": "橘色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPink": "粉紅色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPurple": "紫色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "紅色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "玫瑰色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "天空藍", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "藍綠色", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "文字", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTurquosie": "藍綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtViolet": "紫羅蘭色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "白色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "黃色", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "地址:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "被許可人", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "許可人", @@ -241,7 +436,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDelete": "刪除", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDoubleSpaces": "按兩下空白鍵自動增加一個句點(.)符號", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLCells": "儲存格首字母大寫", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLDont": "請勿在之後大寫", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLSentence": "英文句子第一個字母大寫", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textForLangFL": "語言例外：", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyperlink": "網絡路徑超連結", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyphens": "帶連字符（-）的連字符（-）", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "數學自動更正", @@ -256,7 +453,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textResetAll": "重置為預設", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textRestore": "恢復", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "自動更正", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddFL": "例外必須包含只有字母，大小寫不拘。", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddRec": "公認的函數只能包含字母A到Z，大寫或小寫。", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetFL": "您新增的所有例外狀況都將被移除，已移除的例外狀況將會被還原。您要繼續嗎？", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetRec": "您新增的所有表達式都將被刪除，被刪除的表達式將被恢復。你想繼續嗎？", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReplace": "％1的自動更正條目已存在。您要更換嗎？", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReset": "您增加的所有自動更正功能將被刪除，更改後的自動更正將恢復為其原始值。你想繼續嗎？", @@ -297,8 +496,12 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "粘貼", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "載入中...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "分享設定", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "橡皮擦", "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "選擇", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "橡皮擦", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "螢光筆", "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "分", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "筆", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "選擇", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "大小", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "圖表編輯器", @@ -321,6 +524,7 @@ "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "下載文件", "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "編輯當前文件", "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "列印文件", + "Common.Views.Header.tipPrintQuick": "快速列印", "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "重複", "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "存檔", "Common.Views.Header.tipSearch": "搜尋", @@ -398,6 +602,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.textWarnTrackChangesTitle": "幫所有使用者開啟Track Changes?", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "同意當前更改", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "設定共同編輯模式", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCombine": "將當前文件與另一個文件合併", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "刪除註解", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "刪除當前註解", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentResolve": "標記註解為已解決", @@ -417,6 +622,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "聊天", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "關閉", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "共同編輯模式", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCombine": "合併", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "刪除所有註解", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "刪除當前註解", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "刪除我的註解", @@ -484,14 +690,18 @@ "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "儲存文件夾", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textCaseSensitive": "區分大小寫", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textCloseSearch": "關閉搜索", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textContentChanged": "文件已變更", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFind": "尋找", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFindAndReplace": "尋找與取代", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textItemsSuccessfullyReplaced": "{0} 項成功取代。", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textMatchUsingRegExp": "用正規表達式進行匹配", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoMatches": "查無匹配", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoSearchResults": "查無搜索结果", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textPartOfItemsNotReplaced": "{0}/{1} 項已取代。剩餘 {2} 項被其他使用者鎖定。", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplace": "取代", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceAll": "取代全部", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceWith": "替換為", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchAgain": "{0}進行新的搜尋{1}以獲得準確的結果。", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchHasStopped": "搜索已停止", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchResults": "搜索结果：{0}/{1}", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textTooManyResults": "因數量過多而無法顯示部分結果", @@ -516,6 +726,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "字體名稱", "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "字體大小", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "允許簽名者在簽名對話框中添加註釋", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textDefInstruction": "在簽署此文件之前，請驗證您正在簽署的內容是否正確。", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "電子郵件", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "名稱", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "簽名人稱號", @@ -553,6 +764,15 @@ "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textDontShow": "不要再顯示", "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textLabel": "標籤：", "Common.Views.UserNameDialog.textLabelError": "標籤不能為空。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedComment": "文件受到保護。您只能在此文件中插入註解。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedForms": "文件受到保護。您只能在此文件中填寫表單。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedTrack": "文件受到保護。您可以編輯此文件，但所有更改都將被追蹤。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtIsProtectedView": "文件受到保護。您只能檢視此文件。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedComment": "文件已由其他使用者保護。您只能在此文件中插入註解。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedForms": "文件已由其他使用者保護。您只能在此文件中填寫表單。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedTrack": "文件已由其他使用者保護。您可以編輯此文件，但所有更改都將被追蹤。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasProtectedView": "文件已由其他使用者保護。您只能檢視此文件。", + "DE.Controllers.DocProtection.txtWasUnprotected": "文件已取消保護。", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "該文檔中所有未儲存的更改都將丟失。
單擊“取消”，然後單擊“存檔”以保存它們。單擊“確定”，放棄所有未儲存的更改。", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "未命名文件", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -569,6 +789,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnReplaceString": "{0}不可用於替換段文字落的有效特殊符號。", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "加載更改...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "加載更改", + "DE.Controllers.Main.confirmMaxChangesSize": "操作的大小超過了伺服器設定的限制。
按下「復原」以取消最後一個動作，或按下「繼續」以在本地保留動作（需下載檔案或複製其內容，以確保不會遺失任何內容）", "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "轉換逾時。", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "按“確定”返回文檔列表。", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "錯誤", @@ -579,6 +800,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "文件下載中", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "您嘗試進行未被授權的動作。
請聯繫您的文件伺服器主機的管理者。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "不正確的圖像 URL", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCannotPasteImg": "我們無法從剪貼簿貼上此圖片，但您可以將其儲存到您的裝置，然後再從那裡插入；或者您可以複製不帶文字的圖片並將其貼入文件中。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "服務器連接丟失。該文檔目前無法編輯。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorComboSeries": "如要新增組合圖表，選擇兩個以上的Series資料。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "共同編輯時，“比較文檔”功能不可用。", @@ -595,6 +817,11 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "該文件受密碼保護，無法打開。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFileSizeExceed": "此檔案超過這一主機限制的大小
進一步資訊，請聯絡您的文件服務主機的管理者。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "保存文件時發生錯誤。請使用“下載為”選項將文件保存到電腦硬碟中，或稍後再試。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "未知密鑰描述符", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "密鑰描述符已過期", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorLoadingFont": "字體未加載。
請聯繫文件服務器管理員。", @@ -610,6 +837,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSetPassword": "無法重設密碼。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "不正確的列次序。要建立一推疊圖表, 需要將此表的資料放置為以下的次序
出價, 最高價, 最低價, 節標價。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSubmit": "傳送失敗", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTextFormWrongFormat": "輸入的值與欄位格式不符。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "文檔安全令牌的格式不正確。
請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "文檔安全令牌已過期。
請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "文件版本已更改。該頁面將重新加載。", @@ -651,6 +879,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "列數必須少於％1。", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "行數必須少於％1。", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "匿名", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnyone": "任何人", "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "適用於所有方程式", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "訪問網站", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "所有更改已儲存", @@ -677,10 +906,12 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "形狀", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "嚴格模式", "DE.Controllers.Main.textText": "文字", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryQuickPrint": "您已選擇快速列印：整個文件將由上次選定或預設的印表機列印。
是否要繼續？", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "快速共同編輯模式禁用了“復原/重複”功能。
點擊“嚴格模式”按鈕切換到“嚴格共同編輯”模式以編輯文件而不會受到其他帳戶的干擾，並且僅在保存後發送更改他們。您可以使用編輯器的“進階”設置在共同編輯模式之間切換。", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "在快速共同編輯模式下，復原/重複功能被禁用。", "DE.Controllers.Main.textUndo": "復原", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "證件過期", + "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseNotActive": "授權未啟用", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "編輯器已更新", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "版本已更改", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "以上", @@ -940,6 +1171,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "請耐心等待...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "該應用程序在IE9上具有較低的功能。使用IE10或更高版本", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "瀏覽器當前的縮放設置不受完全支持。請按Ctrl + 0重置為預設縮放。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名使用者無法存取。
此文件將僅供檢視。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "授權未啟用。
請聯絡您的管理員。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "您的系統已經達到同時編輯連線的 %1 編輯器。只能以檢視模式開啟此文件。
欲得知進一步訊息, 請聯絡您的帳號管理者。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "您的授權證已過期.
請更新您的授權證並重新整理頁面。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "授權過期
您已沒有編輯文件功能的授權
請與您的管理者聯繫。", @@ -952,6 +1185,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "轉到文檔的開頭", "DE.Controllers.Print.textMarginsLast": "最後自訂", "DE.Controllers.Print.txtCustom": "自訂", + "DE.Controllers.Print.txtPrintRangeInvalid": "無效的列印範圍", + "DE.Controllers.Print.txtPrintRangeSingleRange": "請輸入單一頁面編號或頁面範圍（例如，5-12）。或者以PDF格式列印。", "DE.Controllers.Search.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", "DE.Controllers.Search.textNoTextFound": "找不到您在搜索的數據。請調整您的搜索選項。", "DE.Controllers.Search.textReplaceSkipped": "替換已完成。 {0}個事件被跳過。", @@ -1351,20 +1586,31 @@ "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "行列", "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "插入多個", "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "游標上方", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dDepth": "深度（基準的百分比）", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dHeight": "高度（基準的百分比）", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dRotation": "3D 旋轉", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "顯示進階設定", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAutoscale": "自動縮放", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "變更圖表類型", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textDefault": "預設旋轉", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textDown": "下", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "編輯資料", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "\n高度", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textLeft": "左", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textNarrow": "窄視角", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "實際大小", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textPerspective": "透視", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textRight": "右", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textRightAngle": "直角座標軸", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textSize": "大小", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "風格", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUndock": "從面板上卸下", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUp": "上", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textWiden": "廣角", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "寬度", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textWrap": "包覆風格", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textX": "X軸旋轉", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Y軸旋轉", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtBehind": "文字在後", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtInFront": "文字在前", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtInline": "與文字排列", @@ -1445,6 +1691,7 @@ "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtTitle": "相互參照", "DE.Views.CrossReferenceDialog.txtType": "參考類型", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "列數", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textEqualWidth": "平均分配欄寬", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "欄位分隔線", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "欄", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitleSpacing": "間距", @@ -1456,15 +1703,24 @@ "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "自動更新", "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "日期和時間", "DE.Views.DocProtection.hintProtectDoc": "受保護的文件", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocProtectedComment": "文件受到保護。您只能在此文件中插入註解。", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocProtectedForms": "文件受到保護。您只能在此文件中填寫表單。", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocProtectedTrack": "文件已由其他使用者保護。您可以編輯此文件，但所有更改都將被追蹤。", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocProtectedView": "文件受到保護。您只能檢視此文件。", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtDocUnlockDescription": "輸入密碼以解除對文件的保護", "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtProtectDoc": "受保護的文件", + "DE.Views.DocProtection.txtUnlockTitle": "解除保護文件", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "以上", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "新增註解", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedDropCapText": "首字大寫設定", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedEquationText": "方程式設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "框的進階設置", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedParagraphText": "段落進階設置", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "表格進階設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedText": "進階設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "對齊", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.allLinearText": "全部 - 線性", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.allProfText": "全部 - 專業", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "之下", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "分頁之前", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "項目符和編號", @@ -1473,6 +1729,8 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "中心", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.chartText": "圖表進階設置", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.columnText": "欄", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.currLinearText": "目前 - 線性", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.currProfText": "目前 - 專業", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteColumnText": "刪除欄位", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteRowText": "刪除行列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteTableText": "刪除表格", @@ -1485,6 +1743,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editFooterText": "編輯頁腳", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHeaderText": "編輯標題", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHyperlinkText": "編輯超連結", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.eqToInlineText": "更改為內嵌", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.guestText": "來賓帳戶", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.hyperlinkText": "超連結", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.ignoreAllSpellText": "忽略所有", @@ -1554,6 +1813,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "從檔案", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "從存儲", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "從 URL", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textIndents": "調整清單縮排", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "加入上一個列表", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textLeft": "儲存格並向左移", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "套疊表格", @@ -1576,6 +1836,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "逆時針旋轉90°", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "順時針旋轉90°", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRow": "刪除整行", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSaveAsPicture": "另存為圖片", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "單獨的清單", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "多行/多列", @@ -1687,6 +1948,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUnderbar": "槓至文字底下", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUngroup": "解開組合", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtWarnUrl": "這連結可能對您的設備和資料造成損害。
您確定要繼續嗎？", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.unicodeText": "Unicode 碼", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.updateStyleText": "更新％1風格", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.vertAlignText": "垂直對齊", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "邊框和添入", @@ -1795,9 +2057,12 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "帶密碼", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "受保護的文件", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "帶簽名", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddedSignature": "已將有效簽名加入文件。
該文件受到編輯保護。", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddSignature": "添加無形的數位簽章以確保文件的完整性", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "編輯文件", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "編輯將刪除文檔中的簽名。
確定要繼續嗎？", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "本文件已受密碼保護", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtProtectDocument": "使用密碼加密此文件", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "該文件需要簽名。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "有效簽名已增加到文件檔中。該文件檔受到保護，無法編輯。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "文檔中的某些數字簽名無效或無法驗證。該文檔受到保護，無法編輯。", @@ -1851,6 +2116,8 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "查看無", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "打樣", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "點", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtQuickPrint": "在編輯器標頭中顯示快速列印按鈕", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtQuickPrintTip": "文件將由最後選取或預設的印表機列印。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "全部啟用", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "不用提示啟用全部巨集", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtShowTrackChanges": "顯示追蹤更改", @@ -1867,25 +2134,33 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveAs.textDownloadAs": "下載為", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveCopy.textSaveCopyAs": "另存新檔為", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAlways": "永遠", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAnyone": "任何人", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAspect": "鎖定寬高比", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAtLeast": "至少", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAuto": "自動", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textAutofit": "自動調整", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textBackgroundColor": "背景顏色", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckbox": "複選框", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCheckDefault": "核取方塊預設為已選取", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textColor": "邊框顏色", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComb": "文字組合", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCombobox": "組合框", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textComplex": "複雜字段", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textConnected": "段落已連結", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textCreditCard": "信用卡號碼（例如 4111-1111-1111-1111）", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateField": "日期和時間欄位", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDateFormat": "以此顯示日期", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDefValue": "預設值", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDelete": "刪除", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDigits": "數字", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDisconnect": "斷線", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textDropDown": "下拉式", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textExact": "準確的", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textField": "文字段落", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFillRoles": "誰需要填寫？", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFixed": "固定欄位大小", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFormat": "格式", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFormatSymbols": "允許的符號", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromFile": "從檔案", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromStorage": "從存儲", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textFromUrl": "從 URL", @@ -1893,14 +2168,20 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textImage": "圖像", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textKey": "鍵", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLang": "語言", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLetters": "字母", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textLock": "鎖", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMask": "任意遮罩", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMaxChars": "文字數限制", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textMulti": "多行文字欄位", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNever": "永不", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNoBorder": "無邊界", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textNone": "無", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone1": "電話號碼（例：（123）456-7890）", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPhone2": "電話號碼（例：+447911123456）", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textPlaceholder": "佔位符", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadiobox": "收音機按鈕", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRadioDefault": "按鈕預設為已選取", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textReg": "標準運算式", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textRequired": "必要", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textScale": "何時縮放", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textSelectImage": "選擇圖片", @@ -1912,15 +2193,20 @@ "DE.Views.FormSettings.textTipUp": "上移", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textTooBig": "圖像過大", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textTooSmall": "圖像過小", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textUKPassport": "英國護照號碼（例如925665416）", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textUnlock": "開鎖", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textUSSSN": "美國社會安全碼（例如123-45-6789）", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textValue": "值選項", "DE.Views.FormSettings.textWidth": "儲存格寬度", + "DE.Views.FormSettings.textZipCodeUS": "美國郵遞區號（例如92663或92663-1234）", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnCheckBox": "複選框", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnComboBox": "組合框", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnComplex": "複雜字段", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnDownloadForm": "下載為oform", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnDropDown": "下拉式", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnEmail": "電子郵件地址", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnImage": "圖像", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnManager": "管理角色", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnNext": "下一欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnPhone": "電話號碼", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnPrev": "上一欄位", @@ -1929,8 +2215,10 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnSubmit": "傳送", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnText": "文字段落", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capBtnView": "查看表格", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.capCreditCard": "信用卡", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capDateTime": "日期和時間", "DE.Views.FormsTab.capZipCode": "郵遞區號", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.textAnyone": "任何人", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textClear": "清除欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textClearFields": "清除所有段落", "DE.Views.FormsTab.textCreateForm": "新增文字段落並建立一個可填寫的 OFORM 文件", @@ -1941,17 +2229,28 @@ "DE.Views.FormsTab.textSubmited": "表格傳送成功", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipCheckBox": "插入複選框", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipComboBox": "插入組合框", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipComplexField": "插入複雜欄位", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipCreditCard": "插入信用卡號碼", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDateTime": "插入日期和時間", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDownloadForm": "下載成可編輯OFORM文件", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipDropDown": "插入下拉列表", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipEmailField": "插入電子郵件地址", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipFixedText": "插入固定文字欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipImageField": "插入圖片", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipInlineText": "插入行內文字欄位", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipManager": "管理角色", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipNextForm": "移至下一欄位", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipPhoneField": "插入電話號碼", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipPrevForm": "移至上一欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipRadioBox": "插入收音機按鈕", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipSaveForm": "儲存一份可以填寫的 OFORM 檔案", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipSubmit": "傳送表格", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipTextField": "插入文字欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipViewForm": "查看表格", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.tipZipCode": "插入郵遞區號", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtFixedDesc": "插入固定文字欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtFixedText": "固定", + "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtInlineDesc": "插入行內文字欄位", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtInlineText": "同一行", "DE.Views.FormsTab.txtUntitled": "無標題", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "底部中間", @@ -2056,7 +2355,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLine": "線", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLineStyle": "線型", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "邊框", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "Miter", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "斜接角", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "用文字移動對象", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "選項", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "實際大小", @@ -2162,30 +2461,48 @@ "DE.Views.Links.txtDontShowTof": "不要顯示在目錄", "DE.Views.Links.txtLevel": "等級", "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textSpace": "空間", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTab": "定位元", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.textTitle": "有格線的清單", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowBullet": "接續項目符號", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtFollowNumber": "接續編號", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtIndent": "文字縮排", "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtNone": "無", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosBullet": "項目符號位置", + "DE.Views.ListIndentsDialog.txtPosNumber": "編號位置", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "自動", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBold": "粗體", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "中心", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textHide": "隱藏設定", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textItalic": "斜體", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "左", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "水平", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textMore": "顯示更多設定", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "預覽", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "右", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelectLevel": "選取階層", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSpace": "空間", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textTab": "定位元", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "對齊", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlignAt": "在", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "項目點", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "顏色", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFollow": "接續編號", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFontName": "字體", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtInclcudeLevel": "包含階層編號", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtIndent": "文字縮排", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "像文字", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtMoreTypes": "更多類型", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "新子彈點", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "無", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNumFormatString": "數字格式", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtRestart": "重啟清單", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "大小", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtStart": "開始", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "符號", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTabStop": "在...新增定位點", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "清單設定", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "類型", + "DE.Views.ListTypesAdvanced.labelSelect": "選取清單樣式", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF格式", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "傳送", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "主題", @@ -2422,12 +2739,20 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsUsNormal": "美國普通", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.textMarginsWide": "寬", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "所有頁面", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "雙面列印", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "依長邊翻轉頁面", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "依短邊翻轉頁面", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBottom": "底部", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "副本", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "目前頁面", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustom": "自訂", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "自訂列印", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLandscape": "景觀", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtLeft": "左", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtMargins": "邊框", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "之 {0}", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "單面列印", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "只印單面", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "頁面", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "頁碼無效", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageOrientation": "頁面方向", @@ -2435,12 +2760,19 @@ "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageSize": "頁面大小", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPortrait": "肖像", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "打印", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "以PDF格式列印", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "列印範圍", + "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "列印面", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtRight": "右", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtSelection": "選拔", "DE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtTop": "上方", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.textComments": "留言", + "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.textForms": "填寫表單", + "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.textReview": "已追蹤的變更", + "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.textView": "沒有變更（唯獨）", + "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtAllow": "僅允許在文件中進行此類編輯", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "確認密碼不相同", + "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtLimit": "密碼限制為15字元", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtOptional": "可選的", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtPassword": "密碼", "DE.Views.ProtectDialog.txtProtect": "保護", @@ -2457,11 +2789,33 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "簽名設置", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "表格設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "文字藝術設定", + "DE.Views.RoleDeleteDlg.textLabel": "若要刪除此角色，您需要將與其關聯的欄位移至另一個角色。", + "DE.Views.RoleDeleteDlg.textSelect": "選取合併欄位角色", + "DE.Views.RoleDeleteDlg.textTitle": "刪除角色", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.errNameExists": "已存在該角色名稱。", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textEmptyError": "角色名稱不能為空。", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textName": "角色名稱", "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.textNoHighlight": "沒有突出顯示", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleEdit": "編輯角色", + "DE.Views.RoleEditDlg.txtTitleNew": "建立新角色", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textAnyone": "任何人", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDelete": "刪除", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDeleteLast": "您確定要刪除角色 {0} 嗎？
刪除後，將建立預設角色。", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDescription": "新增角色並設定填表人接收並簽署文件的順序", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textDown": "向下移動角色", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textEdit": "編輯", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textEmpty": "目前尚未建立任何角色。
請至少建立一個角色，它將顯示在此欄位中。", "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textNew": "新", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.textUp": "向上移動角色", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.txtTitle": "管理角色", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnCantDelete": "您無法刪除該角色，因為它有關聯的欄位。", + "DE.Views.RolesManagerDlg.warnDelete": "您確定要刪除角色 {0} 嗎？", "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.saveButtonText": "儲存", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textAnyone": "任何人", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textDescription": "在儲存至oform時，只有具有欄位的角色會被添加到填寫清單中。", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textEmpty": "沒有與欄位有關聯的角色。", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.textFill": "填寫清單", + "DE.Views.SaveFormDlg.txtTitle": "另存為表單", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "背景顏色", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "變更自動形狀", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "顏色", @@ -2555,7 +2909,9 @@ "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPageNumInvalid": "頁碼無效", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPages": "頁", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtParagraphs": "段落", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtSpaces": "含空格的符號", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtSymbols": "符號", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtWordCount": "字數統計", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtWords": "字幕", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textHeader": "新增風格", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textNextStyle": "下一段風格", @@ -2646,13 +3002,20 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipOuter": "僅設置外部框線", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "僅設置右外框", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "僅設置外部頂部邊框", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_BorderedAndLined": "有邊框和線條的表格", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Custom": "自訂", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Grid": "網格表格", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_List": "清單表格", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Plain": "簡單表格", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "無邊框", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "口音", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Bordered": "有邊框的", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_BorderedAndLined": "有邊框和線條的", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "七彩", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "暗", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_GridTable": "網格表", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Light": "光", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Lined": "有格線的", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ListTable": "列表表", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_PlainTable": "普通表", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_TableGrid": "表格網格", @@ -2891,6 +3254,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "上標", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuppressForCurrentParagraph": "禁止當前段落", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "共同編輯", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "繪圖", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "檔案", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "首頁", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "插入", @@ -2934,13 +3298,16 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncPrLeft": "增加縮進", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertChart": "插入圖表", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "插入方程式", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "插入水平文字方塊", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "插入圖片", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "插入頁碼", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "插入自動形狀", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "插入SmartArt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "插入符號", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "插入表格", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "插入文字框", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "插入文字藝術", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertVerticalText": "插入垂直文字方塊", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineNumbers": "顯示行號", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "段落行距", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "郵件合併", @@ -2953,6 +3320,10 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersFSquare": "實心方形項目符號", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersHRound": "空心圓項目符號", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersStar": "星星項目符號", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelArticl": "多層編號文章", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelChapter": "多級編號章節", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelHeadings": "多層編號標頭", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelHeadVarious": "多層不同編號標頭", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelNumbered": "多層次數字清單", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultilevels": "多級清單", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultiLevelSymbols": "多層次符號清單", @@ -2966,6 +3337,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "貼上", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "段落背景顏色", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "列印", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrintQuick": "快速列印", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "重複", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "存檔", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "儲存您的更改，以供其他帳戶查看。", @@ -2978,6 +3350,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "編輯水印", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "水平分佈", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "垂直分佈", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletDoc": "文件項目符號", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupBulletLib": "項目符號庫", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiDoc": "目前文件中的清單", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupMultiLib": "清單資料庫", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumDoc": "文件編號格式化", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupNumLib": "編號資料庫", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroupRecent": "最近使用", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "對齊頁邊距", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "對齊所選物件", @@ -3009,8 +3387,10 @@ "DE.Views.ViewTab.textFitToPage": "配合紙張大小", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textFitToWidth": "配合寬度", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textInterfaceTheme": "介面主題", + "DE.Views.ViewTab.textLeftMenu": "左側面板", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textNavigation": "導航", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textOutline": "標題", + "DE.Views.ViewTab.textRightMenu": "右側面板", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textRulers": "尺規", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textStatusBar": "狀態欄", "DE.Views.ViewTab.textZoom": "放大", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json index 57dc3af84d..13e912dd47 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json @@ -1171,6 +1171,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "请稍候...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "该应用程序在IE9上的功能很差。使用IE10或更高版本", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "您的浏览器当前缩放设置不完全支持。请按Ctrl + 0重设为默认缩放。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "拒绝匿名用户的访问。
本文档将以仅查看模式而打开。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "许可证未激活。
请联系管理员。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "您已达到同时连接%1编辑器的限制。该文档将被打开仅供查看。
请联系您的管理员以了解更多。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "您的许可证已过期。
请更新您的许可证并刷新页面。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css index dbcd9606c3..16d232d6d3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css @@ -180,6 +180,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index d2f96d0748..e09904f945 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -2,7 +2,8 @@ {"src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Introducing Document Editor user interface", "headername": "Program Interface"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "File tab"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Home Tab"}, - {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Insert tab"}, + { "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Insert tab" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Drawing tab"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "name": "Layout tab" }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", "name": "References tab" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm", "name": "Forms tab"}, @@ -47,7 +48,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "name": "Insert autoshapes"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Insert charts" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Insert text objects" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insert SmartArt objects" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insert SmartArt objects" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Draw freehand on a document" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "name": "Add caption" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insert symbols and characters" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "name": "Align and arrange objects on a page" }, @@ -63,7 +65,7 @@ { "src": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", "name": "Communicating in real time" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "name": "Commenting documents" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "name": "Tracking changes" }, - { "src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Comparing documents" }, + { "src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Comparing and combining documents" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "name": "Version history" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm", "name": "Edit an image", "headername": "Plugins"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "name": "Include a video" }, @@ -72,6 +74,7 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "name": "Translate text" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/OCR.htm", "name": "Extract text from an image" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Speech.htm", "name": "Read the text out loud" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm", "name": "Type via voice" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Replace a word by a synonym" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm", "name": "Upload a document to Wordpress"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm", "name": "Count words"}, @@ -80,6 +83,8 @@ { "src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communicate while editing" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm", "name": "Make Audio and Video Calls"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "name": "Create and insert diagrams"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Host and schedule Zoom meetings"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "View document information", "headername": "Tools and settings"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Save, download, print your document" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Advanced settings of Document Editor"}, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm index db3d8dbacb..5bec7277f2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Comparing documents + Comparing and combining documents @@ -14,16 +14,17 @@
-

Comparing documents

+

Comparing and combining documents

The Document Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, save document versions for future use, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file.

If you need to compare and merge two documents, the Document Editor provides you with the document Compare feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once.

-

After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file.

+

The Combine feature may seem the same but with one major difference, i.e., the Tracked Changes in both versions are merged into one version and the rest of the texts is compared.

+

After merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file.

If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged.

Choose a document for comparison

To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison:

    -
  1. switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the
    Compare button,
    2. +
  2. switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the
    Compare button,
  3. select one of the following options to load the document:
      @@ -38,41 +39,63 @@

      Choose a document for comparison

When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes.

+

Choose a document for combining

+

To combine two documents, open the original document and select the second document for combining:

+
    +
  1. switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the
    Combine button,
    2. +
  2. + select one of the following options to load the document: +
      +
    • the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button.
      • +
    • + the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. +

      Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation.

      +
      • +
    +
    3. +
+

When the second document for combining is selected, the combining process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before combining, in the process of combining, or how it will look after combining if you accept all changes.

+

Choose the changes display mode

-

Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

+

Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

  • - Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. + Markup and balloons - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison/combining. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. It also includes a baloon that displays the reviewer's name, the date and the time of the revision, and the revision itseltf. Use the balloon to accept (tick mark) or to rejet (cross mark) the change. +

    Compare documents - Markup

    +
    • + +
  • + Only markup - this option is used to display the document in the process of comparison/combining, and allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. No ballons are displayed.

    Compare documents - Markup

  • - Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. + Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison/combining as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.

    Compare documents - Final

  • - Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. + Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison/combining as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.

    Compare documents - Original

Accept or reject changes

-

Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes.

+

Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes.

To accept the currently selected change, you can:

    -
  • click the
    Accept button on the top toolbar, or
    • +
  • click the
    Accept button on the top toolbar, or
  • click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or
    • -
  • click the Accept
    button of the change pop-up window.
    • +
  • click the Accept
    button of the change pop-up window.
-

To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option.

+

To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option.

To reject the current change you can:

    -
  • click the
    Reject button on the top toolbar, or
    • +
  • click the
    Reject button on the top toolbar, or
  • click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or
    • -
  • click the Reject
    button of the change pop-up window.
    • +
  • click the Reject
    button of the change pop-up window.
-

To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option.

+

To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option.

-

Additional info on the comparison feature

+

Additional info on the comparison and combining feature

Method of comparison

Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character.

The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'.

@@ -88,8 +111,9 @@

Authorship of the document

If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes.

Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document

-

If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message.

+

If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message.

In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes.

+

If both documents contain some changes made in the review mode, they will be merged into one version in the combining process.

\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 5e6357d3e0..05f3c58c9a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -346,6 +346,12 @@

Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. + + Paste text without style formatting + Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V,
+ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V + Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. + Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K @@ -354,14 +360,14 @@

Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

Copy style - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C - ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C + Alt+Ctrl+C + ⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V - ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V + Alt+Ctrl+V + ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. @@ -701,12 +707,12 @@

Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. - - Insert an en dash - - ⌥ Option+- - Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. - + + Insert an en dash + + ⌥ Option+- + Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. + Insert a non-breaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ @@ -719,6 +725,12 @@

Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

⌥ Option+␣ Spacebar Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. + + Insert a copyright symbol + Ctrl+Alt+G + ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G + Insert a copyright symbol ‘©’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 4f69c45a51..ee2447f03c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -26,12 +26,12 @@

Adjust the View Settings

  • Zoom – to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list.
  • Fit to Page - to fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area.
  • Fit to Width - to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area.
    • -
  • Interface theme – choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. When the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled, the Dark document switcher becomes active; use it to set the working area to white or dark gray.
    • +
  • Interface Theme – choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. When the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled, the Dark Document switcher becomes active; use it to set the working area to white or dark gray.
  • - Always show toolbar – when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. + Always Show Toolbar – when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible.

    Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again.

    • -
  • Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator, Word Count Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option.
    • +
  • Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator, Word Count Indicator, and Zoom buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option.
  • Rulers - when this option is disabled, the rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents will be hidden. To show the hidden Rulers, enable this option once again.
  • Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box.
  • Right Panel - when disabled, hides the right panel where Settings are located. To show the right panel, check this box.
    • @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. - Click the Fit to width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. - To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to page icon. + Click the Fit to Width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. + To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to Page icon. Zoom settings are also available on the View tab.

    The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm index 948357fc24..4f45e5361a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm @@ -6,8 +6,8 @@ - - + +

    @@ -23,8 +23,8 @@

    Protecting documents with a password

    Setting a password

    • - go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option, -

      or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option,

      + go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Add password button to open the Set password window, +

      or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option,

    • set a password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click
      to show or hide password characters when entered. @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@

      Setting a password

      Changing a password

      • - go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option, + go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Change password button to open the Set password window,

        or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option,

      • set a new password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click
        to show or hide password characters when entered.
        • @@ -79,4 +79,4 @@

        Protecting a document

    - \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 6a1f9c8eca..0fe2e0b92a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -6,8 +6,8 @@ - - + +
    @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

    Search and Replace Function

    To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar of the Document Editor, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel.

    -

    A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.

    +

    A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar.

    Find small panel

    To access the advanced settings, click the icon or use the Ctrl+H key combination.

    The Find and replace panel will open:

    @@ -156,4 +156,4 @@

    Search and Replace Function

    - \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index b3013e3462..f4da9f42ea 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -23,15 +23,15 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (DOCX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability.

    The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing.

    - - - - - +
    FormatsDescriptionView natively
    + + + + - + - + @@ -40,14 +40,14 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - - - + + + - - + + @@ -56,14 +56,14 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - + - - + + - + - + @@ -88,14 +88,22 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - - - + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -104,14 +112,22 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - - - + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -144,22 +160,54 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -168,15 +216,15 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - - - + + + - - -
    FormatsDescriptionView natively View after conversion to OOXMLEdit nativelyEdit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML
    DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs
    DOCFilename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word
    DOCFilename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + +
    +
    DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document
    Filename extension for Microsoft Word 2007 or higher generated documents with the ability to run macros    		 +
    DOCXOffice Open XML
    Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents    		+Office Open XML
    Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents    		+ ++
    DOCXF A format to create, edit and collaborate on a Form Template. +
    FB2An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices
    FODTA text document saved in the OpenDocument format, but stored as a flat XML file + +
    +
    FB2An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices++
    HTML HyperText Markup Language
    The main markup language for web pages    		 +
    ODTWord processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents
    MHTMLMIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML
    A web archive format that combines all the contents of a webpage.    		 + +
    +
    ODTWord processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents++
    OFORM A format to fill out a Form. Form fields are fillable but users cannot change the formatting or parameters of the form elements*.
    RTFRich Text Format
    Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange
    RTFRich Text Format
    Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange    		++
    STWStarOffice Document Template
    A file format used for saving word processing documents in OpenOffice.org Writer. An STW file can be edited using any other software that supports the OpenDocument Format (ODF) standard. STW files contain text, images, and other formatting information.    		++
    SXWStarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document
    A text document format included in the StarOffice suite that is based on the OpenDocument XML format and is compatible with Apache OpenOffice (formerly OpenOffice.org) Writer, the successor to StarOffice Writer.    		++
    TXTFilename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + +
    TXTFilename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting+
    WPSMicrosoft Works Word Processor Text Document
    A text document created by Microsoft Works Word Processor, the word processing program that was replaced by Microsoft Word. WPS files are similar to Word documents, but they have fewer formatting options.    		 + +
    +
    WPTWordPerfect Text Document
    A text file with .wpt extension is saved in a binary format and can contain text, charts, images, tables and other textual data.    		++
    XML Extensible Markup Language (XML).
    A simple and flexible markup language that derived from SGML (ISO 8879) and is designed to store and transport data.    		 +
    XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
    Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft
    XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
    Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft    		 +
    + + +

    *Note: the OFORM format is a format for filling out a form. Therefore, only form fields are editable.

    The following table contains the formats in which you can download a document from the File -> Download as menu.

    @@ -190,71 +238,91 @@

    Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

    - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + + + + + - + - + - + - + - + - + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - +
    DOCDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    DOCMDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    DOCXDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    DOCXFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    DOTXDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    EPUBDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    FB2DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    HTMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    MHTMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
    ODTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    OFORMDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    OTTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    PDFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    PDF/ADOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF, PNG, RTF, TXT
    RTFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    STWDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
    SXWDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
    TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    WPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
    WPTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
    XMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
    XPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT, XPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT, XPS

    You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your documents into the most known file formats.

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e51812292a --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Draw tab + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Draw tab

    +

    The Draw tab of the Document Editor allows users to perform basic drawing operations.

    +
    +

    The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

    +

    Draw tab

    +
    +
    +

    The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

    +

    Draw tab

    +
    +

    Using this tab, you can:

    + +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 3499bc93c7..ddc25dd352 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

    Plugins tab

    The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

    Plugins tab

    -

    The Settings button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones.

    +

    The Plugin Manager button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones.

    The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation.

    Currently, the following plugins are available by default:

      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index f81ac6d7d1..648da84c3d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@

      Introducing the user interface of the Document Editor

    • The Left sidebar contains the following icons:
      • - allows using the Search and Replace tool,
        • -
      • - allows opening the Comments panel,
        • +
      • - allows opening the Comments panel,
      • - allows going to the Headings panel and managing headings,
      • - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel,
      • - (available in the online version only) allows to contact our support team,
        • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm index 92bc81978b..f16de48e10 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -24,9 +24,17 @@

        Change color scheme

      • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document.
      • Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them.
      • - Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: -

        Palette - Custom Color

        -

        The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette.

        + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
          +
        • + Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. +
          • +
        • + More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

          Palette - Custom Color

          +

          The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette.

          +
          • +
      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bee0f8e4f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + ChatGPT + + + + + + + + +
      +
      + +
      +

      ChatGPT

      +

      The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code.

      + +

      Installation

      +

      To install the ChatGPT plugin,

      +
        +
      1. Go to the Plugins tab.
        2. +
      2. Open the Plugin Manager.
        3. +
      3. Find
        ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
        4. +
      4. Click the
        ChatGPT icon in the Plugins tab.
        5. +
      5. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
        6. +
      + +

      Configuration

      +
        +
      1. Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page.
        2. +
      2. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field in the left panel of the editor.
        3. +
      +

      ChatGPT settings

      + +

      How to use

      +
        +
      1. Go to the Plugins tab.
        2. +
      2. Click the
        ChatGPT icon.
        3. +
      3. Click the Show advanced settings button to see all the available settings: +
          +
        • Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website.
          • +
        • Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion.
          • +
        • Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive.
          • +
        • Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass.
          • +
        • Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence.
          • +
        +
        4. +
      4. Enter the request and click the Submit button to process it, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one.
        5. +
      +

      ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the "as is" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE.

      +
      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm index b4f67328f1..66dcde4865 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm @@ -51,6 +51,7 @@

      Creating a new Plain Text Field

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the text field.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Format: choose the content format of the text field, i.e., only the chosen character format will be allowed: None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask (the text shall correspond with the custom mask, e.g., (999) 999 99 99), Regular Expression (the text shall correspond with the custom expression).

      When you choose an Arbitrary Mask or a Regular Expression format, an additional field below the Format field appears.

      @@ -105,6 +106,7 @@

      Creating a new Combo box

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Value Options: add
      new values, delete
      them, or move them up
      and
      down in the list.
    • Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size.
      @@ -147,6 +149,7 @@ Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Value Options: add
      new values, delete
      them, or move them up
      and
      down in the list.
    • Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size.
      @@ -187,6 +190,7 @@

      Creating a new Checkbox

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the checkbox.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Checkbox is checked by default: check this box so that the checkbox field is activated by default.
    • Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size.
      A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. @@ -226,6 +230,7 @@

      Creating a new Radio Button

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the radio button.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Button is checked by default: check this box so that the radio button field is activated by default.
    • Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size.
      A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. @@ -303,6 +308,7 @@

      Creating a new Email Address field

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the email address field.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Regular Expression by default so as to preserve the email address format \S+@\S+\.\S+.
    • Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the email address field.
    • @@ -351,6 +357,7 @@

      Creating a new Phone Number field

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the phone number field.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below.
    • Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the phone number field.
    • @@ -375,7 +382,7 @@

      Creating a new Phone Number field

      Creating a new Date and Time field

      -

      Date and Time field is used to insert a date. The date is set to DD-MM-YYYY by default.

      +

      Date and Time field is used to insert a date. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default.

      To insert a date and time field, @@ -387,38 +394,30 @@

      Creating a new Date and Time field

      • -

      The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. To enter a date, click the dropdown arrow within the field and choose the required date via the calendar.

      - + @@ -447,6 +446,7 @@

      Creating a new Zip Code field

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the zip code field.
      tip inserted +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below.
    • Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the zip code field.
    • @@ -495,6 +495,7 @@

      Creating a new Credit Card field

      Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the credit card field.
      tip inserted
      • +
    • Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default.
    • Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below.
    • Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the credit card field.
    • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm index 68dd65625f..30096ae921 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -22,9 +22,9 @@

      Create lists

    • select the list type you would like to start:
        -
      • Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets
        icon on the top toolbar
        • +
      • Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets
        icon on the top toolbar
      • - Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering
        icon on the top toolbar + Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering
        icon on the top toolbar

        Click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like.

      @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@

      Create lists

    • each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and keep on typing common text paragraphs.

      • The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them.

      -

      You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

      -

      To change the list level, click the Numbering , Bullets , or Multilevel list icon and choose the Change List Level option, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press the Tab key on a keyboard to move to the next level of the list. Proceed with the list level needed.

      +

      You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

      +

      To change the list level, click the Numbering , Bullets , or Multilevel list icon and choose the Change List Level option, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press the Tab key on a keyboard to move to the next level of the list. Proceed with the list level needed.

      change list level

      The additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section.

      @@ -71,29 +71,32 @@

      Change the list settings

      To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color:

      1. click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list,
        2. -
      2. click the Bullets
        or Numbering
        icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
        3. +
      3. click the Bullets
        or Numbering
        icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
      4. select the List Settings option,
      5. the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this:

        Bulleted List Settings window

        The numbered list settings window looks like this:

        Numbered List Settings window

        -

        For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists.

        +

        For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the type of numbers and the Font. The Alignment, Size and text emphasis options such as Bold/Italic/Color are the same both for the bulleted and the numbered lists.

        • Bullet allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.
        • Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
        • Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right.
        • Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96.
          • -
        • Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors in the palette, or specify a custom color.
          • +
        • Bold/Italic/Color allows to emphasize and to make the required bullet/number stand out. For Color, the Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the Theme colors, Standard colors or Recent colors from the palette, or click More colors to select a custom color.

        All the changes are displayed in the Preview field.

        6. -
      6. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window.
        7. +
      7. + click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. +

        Right-click a bulleted list and choose the Adjust list indents option to access List Settings the same as for a multilevel list.

        +

      To change the multilevel list settings,

      1. click a list item,
        2. -
      2. click the Multilevel list
        icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
        3. +
      3. click the Multilevel list
        icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
      4. select the List Settings option,
      5. the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: @@ -103,12 +106,24 @@

        Change the list settings

      6. Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.
      7. Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right.
      8. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96.
        9. -
      9. Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.
        10. +
      10. Bold/Italic/Color allows to emphasize and to make the required bullet/number stand out. For Color, the Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the Theme colors, Standard colors or Recent colors from the palette, or click More colors to select a custom color.
        11. +
      11. Number format shows the style of the character used to create the list.
        12. +
      12. + Click the double-headed arrow next to the Number format field to access the advanced list settings. You can customize each level of a multilevel list by choosing the level in the Select level section. +

        Multilevel List Advanced Settings window

        +
          +
        • Font allows you to select the font formatting,
          • +
        • Include level number allows you to indicate the level number of the parent for a subordinate level,
          • +
        • Start at allows you to select the necessary sequence number a numbered list starts from. Check the Restart list box to restart the list numbering,
          • +
        • Alignment allows you to set the necessary type of alignment for each list level. Choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and set the spacing before the list character,
          • +
        • Text Indent allows you to set the spacing between the list character and the text,
          • +
        • Follow number with allows you to indicate what should come after the character you have chosen as the number format. Select Tab character, Space or None from the drop-down list. When you choose to follow with a Tab character, the Add tab stop at option becomes available. Check the Add tab stop at box and specify the length of the indent.
          • +

    All the changes are displayed in the Preview field.

  • click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window.
    • - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0887a101b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Draw freehand on a document + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Draw freehand on a document

    +

    In the Document Editor, you can use the Draw tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your document.

    +

    Drawing options

    +

    To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon, and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the needed color is not in the palette.

    +

    Pen tool

    +

    When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button.

    +

    Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke.

    +

    Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element.

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 5a6449c5aa..19650f581e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -11,15 +11,15 @@
    -
    - -
    +
    + +

    Insert autoshapes

    -

    Insert an autoshape

    +

    Insert an autoshape

    To add an autoshape in the Document Editor,

    1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
      2. -
    2. click the
      Shape icon on the top toolbar,
      3. +
    3. click the
      Shape icon on the top toolbar,
    4. select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines,
    5. click the necessary autoshape within the selected group,
    6. place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added,
      7. @@ -28,29 +28,50 @@

      Insert an autoshape

      Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).

    -

    It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article.

    -

    Move and resize autoshapes

    -

    To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

    +

    It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article.

    +

    Move and resize autoshapes

    +

    To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

    -

    When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow.

    +

    When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow.

    - To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. + To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging.

    -

    To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.

    -

    - Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. -

    -
    -

    Adjust autoshape settings

    -

    To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are:

    +

    To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.

    +

    + Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. +

    +
    +

    Copy autoshape style formatting

    +

    To copy a certain autoshape style formatting,

    +
      +
    1. select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
      2. +
    2. click the Copy style
      icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this
      ),
      3. +
    3. select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting.
      4. +
    + +
    +

    Adjust autoshape settings

    +

    To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are:

    • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
    • Print selection is used to print out only a selected portion of the document.
    • Accept / Reject changes is used to accept or to reject tracked changes in a shared document.
      • -
    • Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. +
    • + Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape.
      1. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline.
      2. @@ -66,161 +87,176 @@

        Adjust autoshape settings

      3. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
      4. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page.
        5. -
      5. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position.
        6. +
      6. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position.
      7. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically.
        8. +
      8. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive.
      9. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window.
    -

    Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

    -
      -
    • Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: +

      Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

        -
      • Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. -

        Color Fill

        -

        Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

        -
        • -
      • - Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings
        icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: -

        Gradient Fill

        -

        Available menu options:

        -
          -
        • - Style - choose between Linear or Radial: -
            -
          • Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle.
            • -
          • Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward.
            • -
          -
          • -
        • - Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. -
            -
          • Use the
            Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the
            Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point.
            • -
          • Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location.
            • -
          • To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want.
            • -
          -
          • -
        -
        • -
      • Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. -

        Picture or Texture Fill

        +
      • + Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:
          -
        • If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal.
          • -
        • If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. -

          Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

          +
        • + Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. +

          Color Fill

          +

          Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

          • -
        -
          -
        • In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. -

          The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely.

          -

          The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely.

          -

          Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary.

          +
        • + Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings
          icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: +

          Gradient Fill

          +

          Available menu options:

          +
            +
          • + Style - choose between Linear or Radial: +
              +
            • Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle.
              • +
            • Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • + Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. +
              +
            • Use the
              Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the
              Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point.
              • +
            • Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location.
              • +
            • To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want.
              • +
            +
            • +
          +
          • +
        • + Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. +

          Picture or Texture Fill

          +
            +
          • If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal.
            • +
          • + If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. +

            Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

            +
            • +
          +
            +
          • + In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. +

            The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely.

            +

            The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely.

            +

            Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary.

            +
            • +
          • +
        • + Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. +

          Pattern Fill

          +
            +
          • Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu.
            • +
          • Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements.
            • +
          • Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background.
            • +
          +
          • +
        • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
        • -
      • Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. -

        Pattern Fill

        -
          -
        • Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu.
          • -
        • Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements.
          • -
        • Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background.
          • -
        -
        • -
      • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
        • -
      -

    Autoshape Settings tab

    -
      -
    • Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.
      • -
    • Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. -
        -
      • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
        • -
      • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
        • -
      • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
        • -
      -
      • -
    • Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: -
        -
      • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
        • -
      • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
        • -
      • to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
        • -
      • to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
        • -
      -
      • -
    • Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
      • -
    • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
      • -
    • Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow.
      • +
        +
      • Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.
        • +
      • + Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. +
          +
        • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
          • +
        • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
          • +
        • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
          • +
        • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
          • +
        +
        • +
      • + Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: +
          +
        • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
          • +
        • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
          • +
        • to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
          • +
        • to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
          • +
        +
        • +
      • Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
        • +
      • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
        • +
      • Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow.

      Adjust autoshape advanced settings

      To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:

      -

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      +

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      The Size tab contains the following parameters:

        -
      • Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. -
          -
        • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
          • -
        • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width.
          • -
        -
        • -
      • Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. -
          -
        • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
          • -
        • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height.
          • -
        -
        • -
      • If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio.
        • +
      • + Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. +
          +
        • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
          • +
        • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width.
          • +
        +
        • +
      • + Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. +
          +
        • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
          • +
        • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height.
          • +
        +
        • +
      • If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio.
        • +
      +

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      +

      The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

      +
        +
      • Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right.
        • +
      • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).
      -

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      -

      The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

      -
        -
      • Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right.
        • -
      • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).
        • -
      -

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      +

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

        -
      • Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). -
          -

        • Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

          -

          If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

          -
          • -

        • Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape.

          • -

        • Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges.

          • -

        • Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

          • -

        • Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape.

          • -

        • In front - the shape overlaps the text.

          • -

        • Behind - the text overlaps the shape.

          • -
        +
      • + Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). +
          +
        • +

          Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

          +

          If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

          +
          • +

        • Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape.

          • +

        • Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges.

          • +

        • Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

          • +

        • Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape.

          • +

        • In front - the shape overlaps the text.

          • +

        • Behind - the text overlaps the shape.

          • +

      If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

      -

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      +

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

        -
      • - The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: -
          -
        • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
          • -
        • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
          • -
        • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
          • -
        -
        • -
      • - The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: -
          -
        • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
          • -
        • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
          • -
        • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
          • -
        -
        • +
      • + The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: +
          +
        • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
          • +
        • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
          • +
        • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
          • +
        +
        • +
      • + The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: +
          +
        • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
          • +
        • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
          • +
        • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
          • +
        +
      • Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored.
      • Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.

      Shape - Advanced Settings

      The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

        -
      • Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: +
      • + Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters:
        • Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: @@ -243,10 +279,10 @@

          Adjust autoshape advanced settings

        • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.
        -

        Shape - Advanced Settings

        +

        Shape - Advanced Settings

        The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).

        -

        Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

        -

        Shape - Advanced Settings

        +

        Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

        +

        Shape - Advanced Settings

        The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains.

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index 51fd58227c..06f50b363c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -88,6 +88,14 @@

    Insert a chart

  • Scatter with straight lines
    • +
    + Radar Charts +
      +
    • Radar
      • +
    • Radar with markers
      • +
    • Filled radar
      • +
    +
    Combo Charts
      @@ -112,14 +120,14 @@

      Insert a chart

      Chart Editor window

    • - Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart Data window will open. + Click the Select data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open.
      1. - Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column. + Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (Series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column.

        Chart Data window

        • - Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. + Chart data range - select data for your chart.
          • Click the
            icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. @@ -128,35 +136,35 @@

            Insert a chart

        • - Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. + Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries.
            -
          • In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button.
            • +
          • In Legend entries (series), click Add button.
          • - In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the
            icon on the right of the Select name box. + In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the
            icon on the right of the Select name box.

            Edit Series window

        • - Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. + Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels.
            -
          • In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit.
            • +
          • In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit.
          • In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the
            icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range.

            Axis Labels window

          • -
        • Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis.
          • +
        • Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis.
      2. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window.
    • - Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), or Combo. + Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo.

      Chart Type window

      -

      When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart Type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a seconary axis.

      +

      When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a secondary axis.

      Chart Type Combo

    • @@ -165,39 +173,39 @@

      Insert a chart

      The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.

      • - Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
          -
        • None to not display a chart title,
          • +
        • None to display no chart title,
        • Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area,
          • -
        • No Overlay to display the title above the plot area.
          • +
        • No overlay to display the title above the plot area.
      • Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
          -
        • None to not display a legend,
          • +
        • None to display no legend,
        • Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area,
        • Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area,
        • Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area,
        • Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area,
          • -
        • Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area,
          • -
        • Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area.
          • +
        • Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area,
          • +
        • Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area.
      • - Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
        + Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
        • - Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. + Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type.
            -
          • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top.
            • +
          • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top.
          • For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom.
            • -
          • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top.
            • -
          • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
            • +
          • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top.
            • +
          • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
          • -
        • Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value,
          • -
        • Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field.
          • +
        • Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value,
          • +
        • Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field.
      • Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines.
        • @@ -207,7 +215,7 @@

        Insert a chart

      Chart - Advanced Settings window

      -

      The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

      +

      The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

      Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

      • Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed.
        • @@ -219,29 +227,30 @@

        Insert a chart

      • Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis.
      • -
    • Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
      • -
    • Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
      • -
    • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
      • -
    • Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
      • +
    • Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
      • +
    • Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
      • +
    • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
      • +
    • Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
    • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
      • +
    • Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user.
    • - The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options:
        -
      • None to not display major/minor tick marks,
        • +
      • None to display no major/minor tick marks,
      • Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,
      • In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis,
      • Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
    • - The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: + The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list:
      • None to not display tick mark labels,
      • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
      • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
      • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
      • - To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. + To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate.

        Available label format categories:

        • General
          • @@ -267,37 +276,37 @@

          Insert a chart

          Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only.

          Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart.

          -

          The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below.

          +

          The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the vertical/horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below.

          Chart - Advanced Settings window

          -

          The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

          +

          The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

          • Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed.
          • Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
              -
            • None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title,
              • -
            • No Overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis,
              • +
            • None to display no horizontal axis title,
              • +
            • No overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis,
            • -
          • Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor.
            • -
          • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
            • -
          • Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks.
            • +
          • Gridlines are used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor.
            • +
          • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
            • +
          • Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks.
          • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
          • The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
              -
            • Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
              • -
            • Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
              • +
            • Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
              • +
            • Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
          • The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories.
              -
            • Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
              • -
            • Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
              • -
            • Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
              • +
            • Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
              • +
            • Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
              • +
            • Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
            • - To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. + To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate.

              Available label format categories:

              • General
                • @@ -319,14 +328,14 @@

                Insert a chart

              Chart - Advanced Settings: Cell Snapping

              -

              The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters:

              +

              The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters:

              • Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well.
              • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.
              • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.

              Chart - Advanced Settings

              -

              The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.

              +

              The Alternative text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.

              • @@ -340,10 +349,10 @@

              Move and resize charts

              Edit chart elements

              To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text.

              To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style.

              -

              When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

              +

              When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill and Line of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

              - Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. - When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. + Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. + When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page.

              Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements.

              If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element.

              @@ -370,7 +379,7 @@

              Adjust chart settings

            You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

            -
              +
              • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
              • Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
              • Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index 81c0b8f264..d103045456 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@

                Insert an image

              • the Image from File option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button

                In the online editor, you can select several images at once.

                • -
              • the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the requiredimage, and click the OK button
                • +
              • the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the required image, and click the OK button
              • the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button
              @@ -76,19 +76,20 @@

              Adjust image settings

            • Replace Image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File, From Storage, or From URL.

            You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

            -
              +
              • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
              • Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
              • Align is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page.
                • -
              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position.
                • -
              • Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically.
                • +
              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position.
                • +
              • Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically.
                • +
              • Save as picture is used to save the image as a picture on your hard drive.
              • Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes.
              • Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one.
              • Replace image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File or From URL.
                • -
              • Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window.
                • -
              +
            • Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window.
              • +

            Shape Settings tab

            -

            When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

            +

            When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, size, color, and opacity, as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

            On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image.

            Adjust image advanced settings

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm index 44a1f9b0be..6eb4ba179c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@

            Insert references

            ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports Mendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document.

            -

            Mendeley

            -

            Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley

            +

            Mendeley

            +

            Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley

            1. Login to your Mendeley account.
            2. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@

              Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley

            3. Click Proceed.

            Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Mendeley account.

            -

            Inserting references

            +

            Inserting references using Mendeley

            1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s).
            2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              Mendeley.
              3. @@ -43,8 +43,8 @@

              Inserting references

            3. Click the Insert Bibliography button.
            -

            Zotero

            -

            Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero

            +

            Zotero

            +

            Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero

            1. Login to your Zotero account.
            2. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document.
              3. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@

              Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero

            3. Click Save.

            Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Zotero account.

            -

            Inserting references

            +

            Inserting references using Zotero

            1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s).
            2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              Zotero.
              3. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@

              Inserting references

            3. Click the Insert Bibliography button.
            -

            EasyBib

            +

            EasyBib

            1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s).
            2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              EasyBib.
              3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index d65be58a8e..17af57f3d7 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -23,6 +23,7 @@

              Insert SmartArt objects

            3. hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process,
            4. choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item.
            +

            You can save a SmartArt object as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

            You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel:

            Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually.

            @@ -89,9 +90,10 @@

            Insert SmartArt objects

          • Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line.
              -
            • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
              • +
            • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
            • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
            • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
              • +
            • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
          • Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
            • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index c3c250f82d..2665930a62 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@

            Add a text object

          • select the necessary text object type:
            • - to add a text box, click the
              Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. + to add a text box, click the
              Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button, and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text.

              Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group.

            • to add a Text Art object, click the
              Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
              • @@ -39,19 +39,20 @@

              Format a text box

              Text box selected

              • to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
                • -
              • to edit the text box fill, line, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings
                icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
                • -
              • to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page.
                • +
              • to edit the text box fill, line, wrapping style, or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings
                icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
                • +
              • to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page.
                • +
              • to save the text box on your hard drive as a picture, choose the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

              Format the text within the text box

              Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

              Text selected

              -

              Note: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In thus case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately.

              -

              To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

              -

              To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom.

              +

              Note: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In this case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately.

              +

              To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

              +

              To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option, and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom.

              Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can:

              @@ -59,7 +60,7 @@

              Format the text within the text box

              Edit a Text Art style

              Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.

              Text Art setting tab

              -

              Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size etc.

              +

              Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size, etc.

              Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options:

              • @@ -71,21 +72,22 @@

                Edit a Text Art style

                Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.

                Gradient Fill

                  -
                • Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges).
                  • +
                • Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45-degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges).
                • Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available.
                • Gradient - click on the left slider
                  under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop.
                -

                Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.

                +

                Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to full transparency.

              • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
              -

              Adjust the font Line width, color and type.

              +

              Adjust the font Line width, color, type, and opacity.

                -
              • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
                • +
              • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
              • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
              • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                • +
              • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
              -

              Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.

              +

              Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.

              Text Art Transformation

              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index 7c35f9ab29..300699c8f0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -2553,6 +2553,10 @@

              AutoFormat As You Type

              AutoFormat As You Type

              Text AutoCorrect

              You can set the editor to capitalize the first word of each sentence automatically. The option is enabled by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of sentences option.

              +

              The editor capitalizes the first letter of table cells by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of table cells box.

              +

              You can also customize capitalizing after particular words by entering the required words in the Don't capitalize after field and clicking the Add button, or by choosing the required words in the corresponding list below.

              +

              You can choose the way the exceptions work based on the language in the Exceptions for the language dropdown list.

              +

              Use the Reset to default button to cancel all custom changes.

              AutoCorrect

              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index aca5970e3f..23f1d4a4aa 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -11,56 +11,74 @@
              -
              - -
              +
              + +

              Save, download, print your document

              -

              Saving

              -

              By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.

              +

              Saving

              +

              By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.

              To save your current document manually in the current format and location,

                -
              • press the Save
                icon in the left part of the editor header, or
                • +
              • press the Save
                icon in the left part of the editor header, or
              • use the Ctrl+S key combination, or
              • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option.

              In the desktop version, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page.

              -
              -

              In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format,

              -
                -
              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                2. -
              2. select the Save as option,
                3. -
              3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDF/A, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option.
                4. -
              -
              +
              +

              In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format,

              +
                +
              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                2. +
              2. select the Save as option,
                3. +
              3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option.
                4. +
              +
              -

              Downloading

              -

              In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive,

              -
                -
              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                2. -
              2. select the Download as option,
                3. -
              3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM.
                4. -
              -

              Saving a copy

              -

              In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal,

              -
                -
              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                2. -
              2. select the Save Copy as option,
                3. -
              3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM.
                4. -
              4. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save.
                5. -
              +

              Downloading

              +

              In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive,

              +
                +
              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                2. +
              2. select the Download as option,
                3. +
              3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG.
                4. +
              +

              Saving a copy

              +

              In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal,

              +
                +
              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                2. +
              2. select the Save Copy as option,
                3. +
              3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG.
                4. +
              4. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save.
                5. +
              -

              Printing

              +

              Printing

              To print out the current document,

                -
              • click the Print
                icon in the left part of the editor header, or
                • +
              • click the Print
                icon in the left part of the editor header, or
              • use the Ctrl+P key combination, or
              • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option.
              The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first.
              -

              It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection).

              -

              In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

              +

              Print Settings window

              +

              Adjust the following parameters in the Print window that opens:

              +
                +
              • Destination - choose the destination of the printed file, e.g., Save to PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc.
                • +
              • Orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally.
                • +
              • Pages - choose one of the options for printing the pages: All, Current, Odd, Even, or Custom. In the latter case, you will have to enter the number of pages manually.
                • +
              • + Colour mode - choose whether you want your file printed in Colour or Black and white. Please note that this setting is available when the Microsoft XPS Document Writer Destination parameter is selected. For the Fax Destination parameter, the colour mode is set to black and white by default. +

                Click the More settings caption to open advanced settings.

                +
                • +
              • Paper size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list or set a user defined one.
                • +
              • Scale - set the file scaling when printed; you can fit it to page width or set the scaling manually via the Scale checkbox and the corresponding input field.
                • +
              • Pages per sheet - set the number of pages printed on one sheet, e.g., two, six, nine, etc.
                • +
              • Margins - define the page margins. You can choose either default margins or custom ones measured in inches. For custom margins, please set the required values for top, bottom, left and right margins manually. You can choose the None option as well to have no margins.
                • +
              • Options - check the Print headers and footers checkbox to have them printed, or uncheck this box to have no headers and footers printed.
                • +
              • Print using the system dialogue - click this caption to open the system dialogue to configure the printing process.
                • +
              + In the desktop version, the available printing settings are Print range, number of Pages, Copies, Print sides, Page size, Page orientation, and Margins. You can also print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer. +

              It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection).

              +

              In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm index 89e8fca55c..18aa03bc50 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@

              Columns

            • Left
              - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right,
            • Right
              - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left.
            -

            If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns (you can add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.

            +

            If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns, column Width and Spacing. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Equal column width checkbox to make all column width the same. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.

            Custom Columns

            To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.

            The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key.

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bab0aba54d --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + Type via voice + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            Type via voice

            +

            In the Document Editor, you can you can insert text with your voice.

            +
              +
            1. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text,
              2. +
            2. switch to the Plugins tab and select
              Speech input,
              3. +
            3. сhoose the recognition language in the pop-up window,
              4. +
            4. сlick the Start dictation button and start speaking. Once you pause, the text will be added to the document. To turn off voice recognition, press the button again.
              5. +
              For the plugin to work correctly, you must have an input device (e,g. a microphone or headset) as well as permissions for the browser to use these record devices.
              +
            + Speech input plugin gif +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2ac0f71535 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + Zoom + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            Zoom

            +

            The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks.

            +

            The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually.

            + +

            Installation

            +

            To install the Zoom plugin,

            +
              +
            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
              2. +
            2. Open the Plugin Manager.
              3. +
            3. Find
              Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
              4. +
            4. Click the
              Zoom icon in the Plugins tab.
              5. +
            5. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
              6. +
            +

            For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation.

            + +

            Configuration

            +
              +
            1. + Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. +

              If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation.

              +
              2. +
            2. + Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. +

              If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation.

              +
              3. +
            3. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save.
              4. +
            +

            Zoom settings

            + +

            How to use

            +
              +
            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
              2. +
            2. Click the
              Zoom icon.
              3. +
            3. + Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. +
                +
              • Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly.
                • +
              • Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready.
                • +
              +

              Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors.

              +
              4. +
            4. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again.
              5. +
            5. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language.
              6. +
            6. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard.
              7. +
            7. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode.
              8. +
            +

            A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page.

            +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css index d59bdafe7d..6f235c2cfc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css @@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png index d905b921b9..739a51b377 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png index 42e80c7633..d31690f3ca 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png index 6150318245..832dc6ab91 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/checkbox_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/checkbox_settings.png index 7f39527675..7ffb22e53e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/checkbox_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/checkbox_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/combo_box_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/combo_box_settings.png index 176235022d..021f3b3398 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/combo_box_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/combo_box_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_final.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_final.png index b55934c6a2..aa3c522c62 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_final.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_final.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup.png index db2f90fb20..16d8d1f3a8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup_balloons.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup_balloons.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49b6c88307 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_markup_balloons.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_original.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_original.png index 15da452aac..5b083b8f98 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_original.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/compare_original.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/credit_card_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/credit_card_settings.png index 923a9410ba..bc6dbe8ff3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/credit_card_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/credit_card_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customcolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customcolumns.png index 79df63f090..92074dd5e3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customcolumns.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customcolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6952238fa3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_tip.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_tip.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fd6d19d48a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_tip.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropdown_list_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropdown_list_settings.png index 81fd78ae63..50ac4b9786 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropdown_list_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropdown_list_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/email_address_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/email_address_settings.png index 5d0d0c719c..d4a3cd460b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/email_address_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/email_address_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 36118de26d..3dd8e9c0a7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..26f14ae52e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index 55f00574fb..d3d98e4209 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index d973a80de7..3ae13f1b7d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png index 8efc8b0d61..a148cc9102 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 27c6560f66..6de344eeba 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 4630b1d3c0..7c1eb78d28 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index 1708bcc809..0e39bea6ca 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 9e3cc876ce..324af26b8c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index 55f902718a..4b3c7d5619 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png index 3c63fc19a8..b2b85f1689 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png index ab4c98be99..3dd8e9c0a7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 708e6604cb..576b531119 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fd7d3baabb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 9f5414f23a..0ce163d078 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index 5855cde500..57a2a2b6d5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png index 297b7f5554..1eea32a734 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index 9a0a91576f..6140309d06 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index 8f1de3267b..ceb28125aa 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png index 3791428378..b1daf62299 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png index 4887825d6e..a23428dc04 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 1dfa9a92d3..61e38fa458 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png index a6fd1cd9b6..d9c37d4b8f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png index 6e34daa2b1..3004b11370 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png index 531d1f4e02..fac6446454 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index 9ee43c6c60..e5686aad03 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png index a95c2aa785..7eaf1d8d59 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png index 0db408454b..f472b29b43 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/list_line_indent.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/list_line_indent.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0353755463 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/list_line_indent.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/listlevel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/listlevel.png index 0933d0bbbb..1c5a3be10e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/listlevel.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/listlevel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png index 77745ddcdd..b8f6d97f7e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e1341e3773 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/oform.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/oform.png index 9da762242d..53e2f99cd7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/oform.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/oform.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png index d16a020b88..881ffa0a10 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png index 9746eb280b..556757867d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/phone_number_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/phone_number_settings.png index c87a5ea728..b763cd9814 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/phone_number_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/phone_number_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c1794b26f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/radio_button_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/radio_button_settings.png index 786e667715..d4dffc39c1 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/radio_button_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/radio_button_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/referencestab.png index d4fb85ff52..3004b11370 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png index 02b0978c5f..400bf90550 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png index ebeb007a0b..786d83fd54 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png index f42e73772d..aedf1f7714 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png index 67f24db6ea..54b1b1a3a2 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png index 898fb6af83..6bb081e925 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/text_field_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/text_field_settings.png index 5b71609762..dc9b3ac2dc 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/text_field_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/text_field_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/view_form_active2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/view_form_active2.png index 187147b2cc..4b11110779 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/view_form_active2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/view_form_active2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/zip_code_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/zip_code_settings.png index 2bd4f8dacd..d7f68daba7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/zip_code_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/zip_code_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index c46108fe22..0194ac806a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -27,23 +27,23 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", - "title": "Comparing documents", - "body": "The Document Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, save document versions for future use, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file. If you need to compare and merge two documents, the Document Editor provides you with the document Compare feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once. After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file. If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged. Choose a document for comparison To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison: switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Compare button, select one of the following options to load the document: the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate through the sections of the Documents module, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button. When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes. To accept the currently selected change, you can: click the Accept button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change pop-up window. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change pop-up window. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Additional info on the comparison feature Method of comparison Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character. The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'. Authorship of the document When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one. If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer. If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer. If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon. If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes. Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message. In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes." + "title": "Comparing and combining documents", + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, save document versions for future use, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file. If you need to compare and merge two documents, the Document Editor provides you with the document Compare feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once. The Combine feature may seem the same but with one major difference, i.e., the Tracked Changes in both versions are merged into one version and the rest of the texts is compared. After merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file. If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged. Choose a document for comparison To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison: switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Compare button, select one of the following options to load the document: the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate through the sections of the Documents module, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button. When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes. Choose a document for combining To combine two documents, open the original document and select the second document for combining: switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Combine button, select one of the following options to load the document: the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. When the second document for combining is selected, the combining process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before combining, in the process of combining, or how it will look after combining if you accept all changes. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison/combining. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison/combining as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison/combining as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes. To accept the currently selected change, you can: click the Accept button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change pop-up window. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change pop-up window. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Additional info on the comparison and combining feature Method of comparison Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character. The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'. Authorship of the document When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one. If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer. If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer. If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon. If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes. Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message. In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes. If both documents contain some changes made in the review mode, they will be merged into one version in the combining process." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Document Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and the left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab, and to see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Repeat the last 'Find' action ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Repeat the previous Find performed before the key combination was pressed. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, DOCXF, OFORM, HTML, FB2, EPUB. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window in the Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ^ Ctrl+← Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+← Backspace Delete one word to the left of the cursor. Delete word to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Delete one word to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the page up ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+= Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Insert table break Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Insert a table break within the table. Inserting special characters Insert equation Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= Insert an equation at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert an en dash ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a non-breaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a no-break space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌥ Option+␣ Spacebar Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor." + "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Document Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and the left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab, and to see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Repeat the last 'Find' action ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Repeat the previous Find performed before the key combination was pressed. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, DOCXF, OFORM, HTML, FB2, EPUB. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window in the Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ^ Ctrl+← Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+← Backspace Delete one word to the left of the cursor. Delete word to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Delete one word to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Paste text without style formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the page up ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+= Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Insert table break Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Insert a table break within the table. Inserting special characters Insert equation Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= Insert an equation at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert an en dash ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a non-breaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a no-break space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌥ Option+␣ Spacebar Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a copyright symbol Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G Insert a copyright symbol ‘©’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", - "body": "The Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, go to the View tab and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options on the View tab: Headings – to show the document headers in the left panel. Zoom – to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list. Fit to Page - to fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area. Fit to Width - to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. Interface theme – choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. When the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled, the Dark document switcher becomes active; use it to set the working area to white or dark gray. Always show toolbar – when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator, Word Count Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option. Rulers - when this option is disabled, the rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents will be hidden. To show the hidden Rulers, enable this option once again. Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box. Right Panel - when disabled, hides the right panel where Settings are located. To show the right panel, check this box. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit to width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to page icon. Zoom settings are also available on the View tab. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it. The Word Count Indicator shows the current document's word count statistics." + "body": "The Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, go to the View tab and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options on the View tab: Headings – to show the document headers in the left panel. Zoom – to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list. Fit to Page - to fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area. Fit to Width - to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. Interface Theme – choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. When the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled, the Dark Document switcher becomes active; use it to set the working area to white or dark gray. Always Show Toolbar – when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator, Word Count Indicator, and Zoom buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option. Rulers - when this option is disabled, the rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents will be hidden. To show the hidden Rulers, enable this option once again. Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box. Right Panel - when disabled, hides the right panel where Settings are located. To show the right panel, check this box. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit to Width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to Page icon. Zoom settings are also available on the View tab. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it. The Word Count Indicator shows the current document's word count statistics." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", "title": "Protecting documents with a password", - "body": "You can protect your documents with a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. You can also protect your documents by restricting access rights. Setting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered. Click OK when ready. To open the document with the full access rights, the user has to enter the set password. Changing a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a new password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered. click OK. Deleting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar, choose the Protect option, click the Delete password button. Protecting a document go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, set the password if necessary, choose the required access rights for the document provided the password has not been entered by the user: No changes (Read only) - the user can only view the document. Filling forms - the user can only fill a form. Tracked changes - the user can only view the document changes history and review the document itself. Comments - the user can only leave and answer comments. click Protect when ready. To remove protection from the document provided that the password has been set, go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, enter the set password in the Unprotect Document window." + "body": "You can protect your documents with a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. You can also protect your documents by restricting access rights. Setting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Add password button to open the Set password window, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered. Click OK when ready. To open the document with the full access rights, the user has to enter the set password. Changing a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Change password button to open the Set password window, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a new password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered. click OK. Deleting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar, choose the Protect option, click the Delete password button. Protecting a document go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, set the password if necessary, choose the required access rights for the document provided the password has not been entered by the user: No changes (Read only) - the user can only view the document. Filling forms - the user can only fill a form. Tracked changes - the user can only view the document changes history and review the document itself. Comments - the user can only leave and answer comments. click Protect when ready. To remove protection from the document provided that the password has been set, go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, enter the set password in the Unprotect Document window." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Function", - "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar of the Document Editor, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. To access the advanced settings, click the icon or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight only whole words. All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons. The Document Editor supports search for special characters. To find a special character, enter it into the search box. The list of special characters that can be used in searches Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^? Any symbol ^# Any digit ^$ Any letter ^n Column break ^e Endnote ^f Footnote ^g Graphic element ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^^ Escaping the caret itself ^w Any space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash ^y Any dash Special characters that may be used for replacement too: Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^n Column break ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash" + "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar of the Document Editor, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight only whole words. All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons. The Document Editor supports search for special characters. To find a special character, enter it into the search box. The list of special characters that can be used in searches Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^? Any symbol ^# Any digit ^$ Any letter ^n Column break ^e Endnote ^f Footnote ^g Graphic element ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^^ Escaping the caret itself ^w Any space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash ^y Any dash Special characters that may be used for replacement too: Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^n Column break ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash" }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Supported Formats of Electronic Documents", - "body": "An electronic document is one of the most commonly used computer. Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (DOCX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs + DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Filename extension for Microsoft Word 2007 or higher generated documents with the ability to run macros + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + DOCXF A format to create, edit and collaborate on a Form Template. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + + FB2 An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + OFORM A format to fill out a Form. Form fields are fillable but users cannot change the formatting or parameters of the form elements*. + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). A simple and flexible markup language that derived from SGML (ISO 8879) and is designed to store and transport data. + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + *Note: the OFORM format is a format for filling out a form. Therefore, only form fields are editable. The following table contains the formats in which you can download a document from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT OFORM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT, XPS You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your documents into the most known file formats." + "body": "An electronic document is one of the most commonly used computer. Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (DOCX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs + DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Filename extension for Microsoft Word 2007 or higher generated documents with the ability to run macros + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + DOCXF A format to create, edit and collaborate on a Form Template. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + + FODT A text document saved in the OpenDocument format, but stored as a flat XML file + + FB2 An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + MHTML MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML A web archive format that combines all the contents of a webpage. + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + OFORM A format to fill out a Form. Form fields are fillable but users cannot change the formatting or parameters of the form elements*. + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + STW StarOffice Document Template A file format used for saving word processing documents in OpenOffice.org Writer. An STW file can be edited using any other software that supports the OpenDocument Format (ODF) standard. STW files contain text, images, and other formatting information. + + SXW StarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document A text document format included in the StarOffice suite that is based on the OpenDocument XML format and is compatible with Apache OpenOffice (formerly OpenOffice.org) Writer, the successor to StarOffice Writer. + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + WPS Microsoft Works Word Processor Text Document A text document created by Microsoft Works Word Processor, the word processing program that was replaced by Microsoft Word. WPS files are similar to Word documents, but they have fewer formatting options. + + WPT WordPerfect Text Document A text file with .wpt extension is saved in a binary format and can contain text, charts, images, tables and other textual data. + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). A simple and flexible markup language that derived from SGML (ISO 8879) and is designed to store and transport data. + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + *Note: the OFORM format is a format for filling out a form. Therefore, only form fields are editable. The following table contains the formats in which you can download a document from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT MHTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OFORM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF, PNG, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT STW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT SXW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT WPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT WPT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT, XPS You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your documents into the most known file formats." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", @@ -75,6 +75,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "ONLYOFFICE Document Viewer", "body": "You can use ONLYOFFICE Document Viewer to open and navigate through PDF, XPS, DjVu files. ONLYOFFICE Document Viewer allows to: view PDF, XPS, DjVu files, add annotations using chat tool, navigate files using contents navigation panel and page thumbnails, use select and hand tools, print and download files, use internal and external links, access advanced settings of the editor and view the following document info using the File and the View tab: Location (available in the online version only) - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner (available in the online version only) - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded (available in the online version only) - the date and time when the file has been uploaded to the portal. Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces. Page size - the dimensions of the pages in the file. Last Modified - the date and time when the document was last modified. Created - the date and time when the document was created. Application - the application the document has been created with. Author - the person who has created the document. PDF Producer - the application used to convert the document to PDF. PDF Version - the version of the PDF file. Tagged PDF - shows if PDF file contains tags. Fast Web View - shows if the Fast Web View has been enabled for the document. use plugins Plugins available in the desktop version: Translator, Send, Thesaurus. Plugins available in the online version: Controls example, Get and paste html, Telegram, Typograf, Count word, Speech, Thesaurus, Translator. ONLYOFFICE Document Viewer interface: The Top toolbar provides access to File, View and Plugins tabs, and the following icons: Print allows to print out the file; Download allows to download a file to your computer; Share (available in the online version only) allows you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Open file location in the desktop version allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab; Mark as favorite / Remove from favorites (available in the online version only) click the empty star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find, or click the filled star to remove the file from favorites. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location; User displays the user’s name when you hover the mouse over it. Search - allows to search the document for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Status bar located at the bottom of the ONLYOFFICE Document Viewer window indicates the page number and displays the background status notifications. It also contains the following tools: Selection tool allows to select text in a file. Hand tool allows to drag and scroll the page. Fit to page allows to resize the page so that the screen displays the whole page. Fit to width allows to resize the page so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen. Zoom adjusting tool allows to zoom in and zoom out the page. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows to use the Search and Replace tool, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - allows to open the Headings panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. Click the heading to jump directly to a specific page. Click the Settings icon to the right of the Headings panel and use one of the available options from the menu: Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Headings panel. Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Headings panel. Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed. Font size – to customize font size of the Headings panel text by choosing one of the available presets: Small, Medium, and Large. Wrap long headings – to wrap long heading text. To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Headings panel, click the   Headings icon on the left sidebar once again. - allows to display page thumbnails for quick navigation. Click on the Page Thumbnails panel to access the Thumbnails Settings: Drag the slider to set the thumbnail size, The Highlight visible part of page is active by default to indicate the area that is currently on screen. Click it to disable. To close the Page Thumbnails panel, click the Page Thumbnails icon on the left sidebar once again. - allows to contact our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows to view the information about the program." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Draw tab", + "body": "The Draw tab of the Document Editor allows users to perform basic drawing operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: use the select tool to resize or delete the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting, use the pen and the highlighter tools to draw or to add handwritten notes and highlighting, use the eraser tool to remove the whole drawing or the handwritten text," + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", @@ -103,7 +108,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Plugins tab", - "body": "The Plugins tab of the Document Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: The Settings button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones. The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available by default: Send allows to send the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, OCR allows to recognize text included into a picture and insert it into the document text, Photo Editor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Speech allows to convert the selected text into speech (available in the online version only), Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages, This plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your document, Mendeley allows to manage research papers and generate bibliographies for scholarly articles (available in the online version only), Zotero allows to manage bibliographic data and related research materials (available in the online version only), EasyBib helps to find and insert related books, journal articles and websites (available in the online version only). The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version. The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins are not included in the free version of the editors. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." + "body": "The Plugins tab of the Document Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: The Plugin Manager button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones. The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available by default: Send allows to send the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, OCR allows to recognize text included into a picture and insert it into the document text, Photo Editor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Speech allows to convert the selected text into speech (available in the online version only), Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages, This plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your document, Mendeley allows to manage research papers and generate bibliographies for scholarly articles (available in the online version only), Zotero allows to manage bibliographic data and related research materials (available in the online version only), EasyBib helps to find and insert related books, journal articles and websites (available in the online version only). The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version. The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins are not included in the free version of the editors. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", @@ -178,13 +183,18 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "title": "Change color scheme", - "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole document. In the Document Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette." + "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole document. In the Document Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", "title": "Change text wrapping", "body": "Change the text wrapping The Wrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. In the Document Editor, you can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables. Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes To change the currently selected wrapping style: left-click a separate object to select it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. open the text wrapping settings: switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon, or right-click the object and select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu, or right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. select the necessary wrapping style: Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and precisely positioned on the page: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object. Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges. Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills the open white space within the object. To apply this effect, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object. In front - the object overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the object. If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the required values and click OK. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. You can also use the Wrapping -> Edit Wrap Boundary menu on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the required position. Change text wrapping for tables For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table. To change the currently selected wrapping style: right-click the table and select the Table Advanced Settings option, switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, select one of the following options: Inline table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is broken by the table as well as to set the alignment: left, center, right. Flow table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is wrapped around the table. Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, you can also set up the following additional parameters: For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left. For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position on the Table Position tab." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", + "title": "ChatGPT", + "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the ChatGPT icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field in the left panel of the editor. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the ChatGPT icon. Click the Show advanced settings button to see all the available settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Enter the request and click the Submit button to process it, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one. ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communicate while editing", @@ -208,12 +218,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm", "title": "Create fillable forms", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor allows you to effortlessly create fillable forms in your documents, e.g. agreement drafts or surveys. Form Template is DOCXF format that offers a range of tools to create a fillable form. Save the resulting form as a DOCXF file, and you will have a form template you can still edit, revise or collaborate on. To make a Form template fillable and to restrict file editing by other users, save it as an OFORM file. Please refer to form filling instructions for further details. DOCXF and OFORM are new ONLYOFFICE formats that allow to create form templates and fill out forms. Use ONLYOFFICE Document Editor either online or desktop to make full use of form-associated elements and options. You can also save any existing DOCX file as a DOCXF to use it as Form template. Go to the File tab, click the Download as... or Save as... option on the left side menu and choose the DOCXF icon. Now you can use all the available form editing functions to create a form. It is not only the form fields that you can edit in a DOCXF file, you can still add, edit and format text or use other Document Editor functions. Creating fillable forms is enabled through user-editable objects that ensure overall consistency of the resulting documents and allow for advanced form interaction experience. Currently, you can insert editable plain text fields, combo boxes, dropdown lists, checkboxes, radio buttons, assign designated areas for images, as well as create email address, phone number, date and time, zip code, credit card and complex fields. Access these features on the Forms tab that is available for DOCXF files only. Creating a new Plain Text Field Text fields are user-editable plain text form fields; no other objects can be added. To insert a text field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Text Field icon or click the arrow next to the Text Field icon and choose whether you want to insert an inline text field or a fixed text field. To learn more about fixed field, please read the Fixed size field paragraph of this section below. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group fields to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each text field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted text field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the text field. Format: choose the content format of the text field, i.e., only the chosen character format will be allowed: None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask (the text shall correspond with the custom mask, e.g., (999) 999 99 99), Regular Expression (the text shall correspond with the custom expression). When you choose an Arbitrary Mask or a Regular Expression format, an additional field below the Format field appears. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the text field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted text field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted text field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted text field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the text field a necessary one to fill in. Click within the inserted text field and adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Combo box Combo boxes contain a dropdown list with a set of choices that can be edited by users. To insert a combo box, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Combo box icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group combo boxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each combo box using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted combo box; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the combo box field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected, you can edit the displayed text entirely or partially by replacing it with yours. You can change font decoration, color, and size. Click within the inserted combo box and proceed according to the instructions. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Dropdown list form field Dropdown lists contain a list with a set of choices that cannot be edited by the users. To insert a dropdown list, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Dropdown icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group dropdown lists to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted dropdown list; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the dropdown list field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Dropdown list form field to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Creating a new Checkbox Checkboxes are used to provide users with a variety of options, any number of which can be selected. Checkboxes operate individually, so they can be checked or unchecked independently. To insert a checkbox, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Checkbox icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group checkboxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the checkbox. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the checkbox field a necessary one to fill in. To check the box, click it once. Creating a new Radio Button Radio buttons are used to provide users with a variety of options, only one of which can be selected. Radio buttons can be grouped so that there is no selecting several buttons within one group. To insert a radio button, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Radio Button icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Group key: to create a new group of radio buttons, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each radio button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the radio button. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted radi button. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted radio button. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the radio button field a necessary one to fill in. To check the radio button, click it once. Creating a new Image field Images are form fields which are used to enable inserting an image with the limitations you set, i.e. the location of the image or its size. To insert an image form field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group images to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted image form field; “Click to load image” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the bottom border of the image. When to scale: click the drop down menu and select an appropriate image sizing option: Always, Never, when the Image is Too Big, or when the Image is Too Small. The selected image will scale inside the field correspondingly. Lock aspect ratio: check this box to maintain the image aspect ratio without distortion. When the box is checked, use the vertical and the horizontal slider to position the image inside the inserted field. The positioning sliders are inactive when the box is unchecked. Select Image: click this button to upload an image either From File, From URL, or From Storage. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted image field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted image field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the image field a necessary one to fill in. To replace the image, click the   image icon above the form field border and select another one. To adjust the image settings, open the Image Settings tab on the right toolbar. To learn more, please read the guide on image settings. Creating a new Email Address field Email Address field is used to type in an email address corresponding to a regular expression \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. To insert an email address field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Email Address icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of email addresses, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each email address field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted email address form field; “user_name@email.com” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the email address field. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Regular Expression by default so as to preserve the email address format \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the email address field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the Autofit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted email address field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the email address field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Phone Number field Phone Number field is used to type in a phone number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to (999)999-9999 by default. To insert a phone number field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Phone Number icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of phone numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each phone number. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted phone number form field; “(999)999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the phone number field. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the phone number field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted phone number field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the phone number field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Date and Time field Date and Time field is used to insert a date. The date is set to DD-MM-YYYY by default. To insert a date and time field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Date and Time icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. To enter a date, click the dropdown arrow within the field and choose the required date via the calendar. Creating a new Zip Code field Zip Code field is used to enter a zip code corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 99999-9999 by default. To insert a zip code field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Zip Code icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of zip codes, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each zip code. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted zip code form field; “99999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the zip code field. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the zip code field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted zip code field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the zip code field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Credit Card field Credit Card field is used to enter a credit card number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 9999-9999-9999-9999 by default. To insert a credit card field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Credit Card icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of credit card numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each credit card field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted credit card form field; “9999-9999-9999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the credit card field. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the credit card field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted credit card field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the credit card field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Complex Field Complex Field combines several field types, e.g., text field and a drop-down list. You can combine fields however you need. To insert a complex field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Complex Field icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of complex fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each complex field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted complex field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the complex field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the complex field a necessary one to fill in. To insert various form fields in a complex field, click within it and choose the required field at the top toolbar in the Forms tab, then configure it to your liking. To learn more about each field type, read the corresponding sections above. Please note that you cannot use Image form field within complex fields. Managing Roles You can create new roles that will determine who can fill in certain form fields. To manage roles, go to the Forms tab in the top toolbar, click the Managing Roles icon, click the New button to create a new role, type in the role name and choose its color if necessary. You can also create a custom color by clicking the corresponding menu item, click OK to create a new role, set the order in which the fillers receive and sign the document using the and buttons, use the Edit or Delete buttons to change the roles or delete them, click Close to go back to form editing. When saving the form as .oform file, you can view all roles created for the form. Enabling the View form Note: Once you have entered the View form mode, all editing options will become unavailable. Click the View Form button on the Forms tab of the top toolbar to see how all the inserted forms will be displayed in your document. You can view the form from the point of view of each created role. To do that, click the arrow under the View Form button and choose the required role. To exit the viewing mode, click the same icon again. Moving form fields Form fields can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text. You can also copy and paste form fields: select the necessary field and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Creating required fields To make a field obligatory, check the Required option. The mandatory fields will be marked with red stroke. Locking form fields To prevent further editing of the inserted form field, click the Lock icon. Filling the fields remains available. Clearing form fields To clear all inserted fields and delete all values, click the Clear All Fields button on the Forms tab on the top toolbar. Clearing fields can be performed in the form filling mode only. Navigate, View and Save a Form Go to the Forms tab at the top toolbar. Navigate through the form fields using the Previous field and Next field buttons at the top toolbar. When you are finished, click the Save as oform button at the top toolbar to save the form as an OFORM file ready to be filled out. You can save as many OFORM files as you need. Removing form fields To remove a form field and leave all its contents, select it and click the Delete icon (make sure the field is not locked) or press the Delete key on the keyboard." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor allows you to effortlessly create fillable forms in your documents, e.g. agreement drafts or surveys. Form Template is DOCXF format that offers a range of tools to create a fillable form. Save the resulting form as a DOCXF file, and you will have a form template you can still edit, revise or collaborate on. To make a Form template fillable and to restrict file editing by other users, save it as an OFORM file. Please refer to form filling instructions for further details. DOCXF and OFORM are new ONLYOFFICE formats that allow to create form templates and fill out forms. Use ONLYOFFICE Document Editor either online or desktop to make full use of form-associated elements and options. You can also save any existing DOCX file as a DOCXF to use it as Form template. Go to the File tab, click the Download as... or Save as... option on the left side menu and choose the DOCXF icon. Now you can use all the available form editing functions to create a form. It is not only the form fields that you can edit in a DOCXF file, you can still add, edit and format text or use other Document Editor functions. Creating fillable forms is enabled through user-editable objects that ensure overall consistency of the resulting documents and allow for advanced form interaction experience. Currently, you can insert editable plain text fields, combo boxes, dropdown lists, checkboxes, radio buttons, assign designated areas for images, as well as create email address, phone number, date and time, zip code, credit card and complex fields. Access these features on the Forms tab that is available for DOCXF files only. Creating a new Plain Text Field Text fields are user-editable plain text form fields; no other objects can be added. To insert a text field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Text Field icon or click the arrow next to the Text Field icon and choose whether you want to insert an inline text field or a fixed text field. To learn more about fixed field, please read the Fixed size field paragraph of this section below. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group fields to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each text field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted text field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the text field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the text field, i.e., only the chosen character format will be allowed: None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask (the text shall correspond with the custom mask, e.g., (999) 999 99 99), Regular Expression (the text shall correspond with the custom expression). When you choose an Arbitrary Mask or a Regular Expression format, an additional field below the Format field appears. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the text field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted text field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted text field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted text field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the text field a necessary one to fill in. Click within the inserted text field and adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Combo box Combo boxes contain a dropdown list with a set of choices that can be edited by users. To insert a combo box, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Combo box icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group combo boxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each combo box using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted combo box; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the combo box field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected, you can edit the displayed text entirely or partially by replacing it with yours. You can change font decoration, color, and size. Click within the inserted combo box and proceed according to the instructions. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Dropdown list form field Dropdown lists contain a list with a set of choices that cannot be edited by the users. To insert a dropdown list, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Dropdown icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group dropdown lists to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted dropdown list; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the dropdown list field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Dropdown list form field to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Creating a new Checkbox Checkboxes are used to provide users with a variety of options, any number of which can be selected. Checkboxes operate individually, so they can be checked or unchecked independently. To insert a checkbox, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Checkbox icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group checkboxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the checkbox. Checkbox is checked by default: check this box so that the checkbox field is activated by default. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the checkbox field a necessary one to fill in. To check the box, click it once. Creating a new Radio Button Radio buttons are used to provide users with a variety of options, only one of which can be selected. Radio buttons can be grouped so that there is no selecting several buttons within one group. To insert a radio button, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Radio Button icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Group key: to create a new group of radio buttons, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each radio button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the radio button. Button is checked by default: check this box so that the radio button field is activated by default. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted radi button. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted radio button. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the radio button field a necessary one to fill in. To check the radio button, click it once. Creating a new Image field Images are form fields which are used to enable inserting an image with the limitations you set, i.e. the location of the image or its size. To insert an image form field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group images to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted image form field; “Click to load image” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the bottom border of the image. When to scale: click the drop down menu and select an appropriate image sizing option: Always, Never, when the Image is Too Big, or when the Image is Too Small. The selected image will scale inside the field correspondingly. Lock aspect ratio: check this box to maintain the image aspect ratio without distortion. When the box is checked, use the vertical and the horizontal slider to position the image inside the inserted field. The positioning sliders are inactive when the box is unchecked. Select Image: click this button to upload an image either From File, From URL, or From Storage. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted image field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted image field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the image field a necessary one to fill in. To replace the image, click the   image icon above the form field border and select another one. To adjust the image settings, open the Image Settings tab on the right toolbar. To learn more, please read the guide on image settings. Creating a new Email Address field Email Address field is used to type in an email address corresponding to a regular expression \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. To insert an email address field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Email Address icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of email addresses, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each email address field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted email address form field; “user_name@email.com” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the email address field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Regular Expression by default so as to preserve the email address format \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the email address field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the Autofit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted email address field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the email address field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Phone Number field Phone Number field is used to type in a phone number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to (999)999-9999 by default. To insert a phone number field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Phone Number icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of phone numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each phone number. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted phone number form field; “(999)999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the phone number field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the phone number field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted phone number field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the phone number field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Date and Time field Date and Time field is used to insert a date. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default. To insert a date and time field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Date and Time icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. To enter a date, click the dropdown arrow within the field and choose the required date via the calendar. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of date and time fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each date and time field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted date and time form field; by default, today's date is displayed. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the date and time field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Display the date like this: choose the format of the field, e.g., MM/DD/YYYY, Monday, MM DD, YYYY, etc. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default. Language: choose the required language for displaying the date and time. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted date and time field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted date and time field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the date and time field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Zip Code field Zip Code field is used to enter a zip code corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 99999-9999 by default. To insert a zip code field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Zip Code icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of zip codes, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each zip code. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted zip code form field; “99999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the zip code field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the zip code field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted zip code field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the zip code field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Credit Card field Credit Card field is used to enter a credit card number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 9999-9999-9999-9999 by default. To insert a credit card field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Credit Card icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of credit card numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each credit card field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted credit card form field; “9999-9999-9999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the credit card field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the credit card field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted credit card field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the credit card field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Complex Field Complex Field combines several field types, e.g., text field and a drop-down list. You can combine fields however you need. To insert a complex field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Complex Field icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of complex fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each complex field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted complex field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the complex field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the complex field a necessary one to fill in. To insert various form fields in a complex field, click within it and choose the required field at the top toolbar in the Forms tab, then configure it to your liking. To learn more about each field type, read the corresponding sections above. Please note that you cannot use Image form field within complex fields. Managing Roles You can create new roles that will determine who can fill in certain form fields. To manage roles, go to the Forms tab in the top toolbar, click the Managing Roles icon, click the New button to create a new role, type in the role name and choose its color if necessary. You can also create a custom color by clicking the corresponding menu item, click OK to create a new role, set the order in which the fillers receive and sign the document using the and buttons, use the Edit or Delete buttons to change the roles or delete them, click Close to go back to form editing. When saving the form as .oform file, you can view all roles created for the form. Enabling the View form Note: Once you have entered the View form mode, all editing options will become unavailable. Click the View Form button on the Forms tab of the top toolbar to see how all the inserted forms will be displayed in your document. You can view the form from the point of view of each created role. To do that, click the arrow under the View Form button and choose the required role. To exit the viewing mode, click the same icon again. Moving form fields Form fields can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text. You can also copy and paste form fields: select the necessary field and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Creating required fields To make a field obligatory, check the Required option. The mandatory fields will be marked with red stroke. Locking form fields To prevent further editing of the inserted form field, click the Lock icon. Filling the fields remains available. Clearing form fields To clear all inserted fields and delete all values, click the Clear All Fields button on the Forms tab on the top toolbar. Clearing fields can be performed in the form filling mode only. Navigate, View and Save a Form Go to the Forms tab at the top toolbar. Navigate through the form fields using the Previous field and Next field buttons at the top toolbar. When you are finished, click the Save as oform button at the top toolbar to save the form as an OFORM file ready to be filled out. You can save as many OFORM files as you need. Removing form fields To remove a form field and leave all its contents, select it and click the Delete icon (make sure the field is not locked) or press the Delete key on the keyboard." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "title": "Create lists", - "body": "To create a list in the Document Editor, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon on the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon on the top toolbar Click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and keep on typing common text paragraphs. The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. To change the list level, click the Numbering , Bullets , or Multilevel list icon and choose the Change List Level option, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press the Tab key on a keyboard to move to the next level of the list. Proceed with the list level needed. The additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section. Combine and separate lists To combine a list with the previous one: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To separate a list: click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button, use the Separate list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be combined, and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. Change numbering To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu. The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To set a certain numbering initial value: click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button, use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu, in the new opened window, set the required numeric value and click the OK button. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color: click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, click the Bullets or Numbering icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this: For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists. Bullet allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors in the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. To change the multilevel list settings, click a list item, click the Multilevel list icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level: Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window." + "body": "To create a list in the Document Editor, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon on the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon on the top toolbar Click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and keep on typing common text paragraphs. The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. To change the list level, click the Numbering , Bullets , or Multilevel list icon and choose the Change List Level option, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press the Tab key on a keyboard to move to the next level of the list. Proceed with the list level needed. The additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section. Combine and separate lists To combine a list with the previous one: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To separate a list: click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button, use the Separate list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be combined, and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. Change numbering To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu. The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To set a certain numbering initial value: click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button, use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu, in the new opened window, set the required numeric value and click the OK button. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color: click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, click the Bullets or Numbering icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this: For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the type of numbers and the Font. The Alignment, Size and text emphasis options such as Bold/Italic/Color are the same both for the bulleted and the numbered lists. Bullet allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. Bold/Italic/Color allows to emphasize and to make the required bullet/number stand out. For Color, the Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the Theme colors, Standard colors or Recent colors from the palette, or click More colors to select a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. Right-click a bulleted list and choose the Adjust list indents option to access List Settings the same as for a multilevel list. To change the multilevel list settings, click a list item, click the Multilevel list icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level: Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. Bold/Italic/Color allows to emphasize and to make the required bullet/number stand out. For Color, the Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the Theme colors, Standard colors or Recent colors from the palette, or click More colors to select a custom color. Number format shows the style of the character used to create the list. Click the double-headed arrow next to the Number format field to access the advanced list settings. You can customize each level of a multilevel list by choosing the level in the Select level section. Font allows you to select the font formatting, Include level number allows you to indicate the level number of the parent for a subordinate level, Start at allows you to select the necessary sequence number a numbered list starts from. Check the Restart list box to restart the list numbering, Alignment allows you to set the necessary type of alignment for each list level. Choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and set the spacing before the list character, Text Indent allows you to set the spacing between the list character and the text, Follow number with allows you to indicate what should come after the character you have chosen as the number format. Select Tab character, Space or None from the drop-down list. When you choose to follow with a Tab character, the Add tab stop at option becomes available. Check the Add tab stop at box and specify the length of the indent. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", @@ -225,6 +235,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Apply font decoration styles", "body": "In the Document Editor, you can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. To access the advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will appear, and you will need to switch to the Font tab. Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Position is used to set the characters position (vertical offset) in the line. Increase the default value to move characters upwards, or decrease the default value to move characters downwards. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Ligatures are joined letters of a word typed in either of the OpenType fonts. Please note that using ligatures can disrupt character spacing. The available ligature options are as follows: None Standard only (includes “fi”, “fl”, “ff”; enhances readability) Contextual (ligatures are applied based on the surrounding letters; enhances readability) Historical (ligatures have more swoops and curved lines; lowers readability) Discretionary (ornamental ligatures; lowers readability) Standard and Contextual Standard and Historical Contextual and Historical Standard and Discretionary Contextual and Discretionary Historical and Discretionary Standard, Contextual and Historical Standard, Contextual and Discretionary Standard, Historical and Discretionary Contextual, Historical and Discretionary All All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Draw freehand on a document", + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can use the Draw tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your document. To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon, and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the needed color is not in the palette. When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button. Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke. Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "title": "Create and insert diagrams", @@ -258,7 +273,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Document Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Print selection is used to print out only a selected portion of the document. Accept / Reject changes is used to accept or to reject tracked changes in a shared document. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Document Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Print selection is used to print out only a selected portion of the document. Accept / Reject changes is used to accept or to reject tracked changes in a shared document. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", @@ -268,7 +283,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insert charts", - "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Document Editor, Place the cursor where the chart should be added. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. After that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart Data window will open. Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column. Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button. In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart Type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a seconary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains." + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Document Editor, Place the cursor where the chart should be added. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. After that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (Series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a secondary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the vertical/horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no horizontal axis title, No overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines are used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill and Line of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", @@ -285,6 +300,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Insert date and time", "body": "To insert Date and time in the Document Editor, put the cursor where you want to insert Date and time, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Date & time icon on the top toolbar, in the Date & time window that will appear, specify the following parameters: Select the required language. Select one of the suggested formats. Check the Update automatically checkbox to let the date & time update automatically based on the current state. Note: you can also update the date and time manually by using the Refresh field option from the contextual menu. Click the Set as default button to make the current format the default for this language. Click the OK button." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", + "title": "Insert a drop cap", + "body": "A drop cap is a large capital letter used at the beginning of a paragraph or section. The size of a drop cap is usually several lines. To add a drop cap in the Document Editor, place the cursor within the required paragraph, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Drop Cap icon on the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph. In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin. The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need. To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame. To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None option from the drop-down list. To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will appear: The Drop Cap tab allows adjusting the following parameters: Position is used to change the placement of a drop cap. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap. Font is used to select a font from the list of the available fonts. Height in rows is used to define how many lines a drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10. Distance from text is used to specify the amount of spacing between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the drop cap frame. The Borders & Fill tab allows adding a border around a drop cap and adjusting its parameters. They are the following: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to. Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background. The Margins tab allows setting the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added). Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open: The Frame tab allows adjusting the following parameters: Position is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. You can also click None to delete the frame. Width and Height are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows automatically adjusting the frame size to fit the drop cap. The Exactly option allows specifying fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value). Horizontal parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame in the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Vertical parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame is the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Move with text is used to make sure that the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored. The Borders & Fill and Margins allow adjusting the same parameters as the corresponding tabs in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEndnotes.htm", "title": "Insert endnotes", @@ -308,7 +328,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insert images", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon on the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button In the online editor, you can select several images at once. the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the requiredimage, and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added, you can change its size, properties, and position. It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is different from the inline). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current image. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows you to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop the two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape. If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while the other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height and the width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File, From Storage, or From URL. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes. Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one. Replace image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File or From URL. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust image advanced settings To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the image moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes is possible for two images to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon on the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button In the online editor, you can select several images at once. the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the required image, and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added, you can change its size, properties, and position. It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is different from the inline). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current image. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows you to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop the two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape. If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while the other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height and the width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File, From Storage, or From URL. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Save as picture is used to save the image as a picture on your hard drive. Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes. Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one. Replace image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File or From URL. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, size, color, and opacity, as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust image advanced settings To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the image moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes is possible for two images to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm", @@ -323,12 +343,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm", "title": "Insert references", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports Mendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document. Mendeley Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley Login to your Mendeley account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Copy Link and Open Form button. The browser opens a form on the Mendeley site. Complete this form and note the Application ID for ONLYOFFICE. Switch back to your document. Enter the Application ID and click Save. Click Login. Click Proceed. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Mendeley account. Inserting references Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. Zotero Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero Login to your Zotero account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Zotero API settings link. On the Zotero site, create a new key for Zotero, copy it and save it for later use. Switch to your document and paste the API key. Click Save. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Zotero account. Inserting references Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. EasyBib Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose EasyBib. Select the type of source you want to find. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click '+' on the right side of the suitable Book/Journal article/Website. It will be added to Bibliography. Select references style. Click the Add Bibliography to Doc to insert the references." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports Mendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document. Mendeley Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley Login to your Mendeley account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Copy Link and Open Form button. The browser opens a form on the Mendeley site. Complete this form and note the Application ID for ONLYOFFICE. Switch back to your document. Enter the Application ID and click Save. Click Login. Click Proceed. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Mendeley account. Inserting references using Mendeley Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. Zotero Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero Login to your Zotero account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Zotero API settings link. On the Zotero site, create a new key for Zotero, copy it and save it for later use. Switch to your document and paste the API key. Click Save. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Zotero account. Inserting references using Zotero Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. EasyBib Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose EasyBib. Select the type of source you want to find. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click '+' on the right side of the suitable Book/Journal article/Website. It will be added to Bibliography. Select references style. Click the Add Bibliography to Doc to insert the references." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Insert SmartArt objects", - "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. Insert SmartArt objects or edit the ones added in third-party editors. To insert a SmartArt object, go to the Insert tab, click the SmartArt button, hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process, choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item. You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel: Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually. Fill - use this section to select the SmartArt object fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected SmartArt object. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the SmartArt object background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the SmartArt object, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the SmartArt object, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the SmartArt object has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the SmartArt object size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the SmartArt object surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the SmartArt object with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow. Click the Show advanced settings link to open the advanced settings." + "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. Insert SmartArt objects or edit the ones added in third-party editors. To insert a SmartArt object, go to the Insert tab, click the SmartArt button, hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process, choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item. You can save a SmartArt object as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel: Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually. Fill - use this section to select the SmartArt object fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected SmartArt object. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the SmartArt object background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the SmartArt object, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the SmartArt object, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the SmartArt object has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the SmartArt object size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the SmartArt object surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the SmartArt object with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow. Click the Show advanced settings link to open the advanced settings." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", @@ -343,7 +363,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Insert text objects", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows entering text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows applying some effects to the text). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As the inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default), and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In thus case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately. To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can: align the text horizontally within the text box adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box insert a hyperlink You can also click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of letters. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Adjust the font Line width, color and type. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows entering text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows applying some effects to the text). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button, and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As the inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default), and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, wrapping style, or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page. to save the text box on your hard drive as a picture, choose the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In this case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately. To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option, and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom. Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can: align the text horizontally within the text box adjust the font type, size, color, and apply decoration styles and formatting presets set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box insert a hyperlink You can also click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size, etc. Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of letters. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45-degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to full transparency. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Adjust the font Line width, color, type, and opacity. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm", @@ -358,7 +378,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "AutoCorrect Features", - "body": "The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Document Editor are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of four tabs: Math Autocorrect, Recognized Functions, AutoFormat As You Type, and Text AutoCorrect. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents, and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. Note: The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Math AutoCorrect. Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list Select the entry to be modified. You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list Select an entry to remove from the list. Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box. The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Document Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Math AutoCorrect. The supported codes Code Symbol Category !! Symbols ... Dots :: Operators := Operators /< Relational operators /> Relational operators /= Relational operators \\above Above/Below scripts \\acute Accents \\aleph Hebrew letters \\alpha Greek letters \\Alpha Greek letters \\amalg Binary operators \\angle Geometry notation \\aoint Integrals \\approx Relational operators \\asmash Arrows \\ast Binary operators \\asymp Relational operators \\atop Operators \\bar Over/Underbar \\Bar Accents \\because Relational operators \\begin Delimiters \\below Above/Below scripts \\bet Hebrew letters \\beta Greek letters \\Beta Greek letters \\beth Hebrew letters \\bigcap Large operators \\bigcup Large operators \\bigodot Large operators \\bigoplus Large operators \\bigotimes Large operators \\bigsqcup Large operators \\biguplus Large operators \\bigvee Large operators \\bigwedge Large operators \\binomial Equations \\bot Logic notation \\bowtie Relational operators \\box Symbols \\boxdot Binary operators \\boxminus Binary operators \\boxplus Binary operators \\bra Delimiters \\break Symbols \\breve Accents \\bullet Binary operators \\cap Binary operators \\cbrt Square roots and radicals \\cases Symbols \\cdot Binary operators \\cdots Dots \\check Accents \\chi Greek letters \\Chi Greek letters \\circ Binary operators \\close Delimiters \\clubsuit Symbols \\coint Integrals \\cong Relational operators \\coprod Math operators \\cup Binary operators \\dalet Hebrew letters \\daleth Hebrew letters \\dashv Relational operators \\dd Double-struck letters \\Dd Double-struck letters \\ddddot Accents \\dddot Accents \\ddot Accents \\ddots Dots \\defeq Relational operators \\degc Symbols \\degf Symbols \\degree Symbols \\delta Greek letters \\Delta Greek letters \\Deltaeq Operators \\diamond Binary operators \\diamondsuit Symbols \\div Binary operators \\dot Accents \\doteq Relational operators \\dots Dots \\doublea Double-struck letters \\doubleA Double-struck letters \\doubleb Double-struck letters \\doubleB Double-struck letters \\doublec Double-struck letters \\doubleC Double-struck letters \\doubled Double-struck letters \\doubleD Double-struck letters \\doublee Double-struck letters \\doubleE Double-struck letters \\doublef Double-struck letters \\doubleF Double-struck letters \\doubleg Double-struck letters \\doubleG Double-struck letters \\doubleh Double-struck letters \\doubleH Double-struck letters \\doublei Double-struck letters \\doubleI Double-struck letters \\doublej Double-struck letters \\doubleJ Double-struck letters \\doublek Double-struck letters \\doubleK Double-struck letters \\doublel Double-struck letters \\doubleL Double-struck letters \\doublem Double-struck letters \\doubleM Double-struck letters \\doublen Double-struck letters \\doubleN Double-struck letters \\doubleo Double-struck letters \\doubleO Double-struck letters \\doublep Double-struck letters \\doubleP Double-struck letters \\doubleq Double-struck letters \\doubleQ Double-struck letters \\doubler Double-struck letters \\doubleR Double-struck letters \\doubles Double-struck letters \\doubleS Double-struck letters \\doublet Double-struck letters \\doubleT Double-struck letters \\doubleu Double-struck letters \\doubleU Double-struck letters \\doublev Double-struck letters \\doubleV Double-struck letters \\doublew Double-struck letters \\doubleW Double-struck letters \\doublex Double-struck letters \\doubleX Double-struck letters \\doubley Double-struck letters \\doubleY Double-struck letters \\doublez Double-struck letters \\doubleZ Double-struck letters \\downarrow Arrows \\Downarrow Arrows \\dsmash Arrows \\ee Double-struck letters \\ell Symbols \\emptyset Set notations \\emsp Space characters \\end Delimiters \\ensp Space characters \\epsilon Greek letters \\Epsilon Greek letters \\eqarray Symbols \\equiv Relational operators \\eta Greek letters \\Eta Greek letters \\exists Logic notations \\forall Logic notations \\fraktura Fraktur letters \\frakturA Fraktur letters \\frakturb Fraktur letters \\frakturB Fraktur letters \\frakturc Fraktur letters \\frakturC Fraktur letters \\frakturd Fraktur letters \\frakturD Fraktur letters \\frakture Fraktur letters \\frakturE Fraktur letters \\frakturf Fraktur letters \\frakturF Fraktur letters \\frakturg Fraktur letters \\frakturG Fraktur letters \\frakturh Fraktur letters \\frakturH Fraktur letters \\frakturi Fraktur letters \\frakturI Fraktur letters \\frakturk Fraktur letters \\frakturK Fraktur letters \\frakturl Fraktur letters \\frakturL Fraktur letters \\frakturm Fraktur letters \\frakturM Fraktur letters \\frakturn Fraktur letters \\frakturN Fraktur letters \\frakturo Fraktur letters \\frakturO Fraktur letters \\frakturp Fraktur letters \\frakturP Fraktur letters \\frakturq Fraktur letters \\frakturQ Fraktur letters \\frakturr Fraktur letters \\frakturR Fraktur letters \\frakturs Fraktur letters \\frakturS Fraktur letters \\frakturt Fraktur letters \\frakturT Fraktur letters \\frakturu Fraktur letters \\frakturU Fraktur letters \\frakturv Fraktur letters \\frakturV Fraktur letters \\frakturw Fraktur letters \\frakturW Fraktur letters \\frakturx Fraktur letters \\frakturX Fraktur letters \\fraktury Fraktur letters \\frakturY Fraktur letters \\frakturz Fraktur letters \\frakturZ Fraktur letters \\frown Relational operators \\funcapply Binary operators \\G Greek letters \\gamma Greek letters \\Gamma Greek letters \\ge Relational operators \\geq Relational operators \\gets Arrows \\gg Relational operators \\gimel Hebrew letters \\grave Accents \\hairsp Space characters \\hat Accents \\hbar Symbols \\heartsuit Symbols \\hookleftarrow Arrows \\hookrightarrow Arrows \\hphantom Arrows \\hsmash Arrows \\hvec Accents \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Double-struck letters \\iiint Integrals \\iint Integrals \\iiiint Integrals \\Im Symbols \\imath Symbols \\in Relational operators \\inc Symbols \\infty Symbols \\int Integrals \\integral Integrals \\iota Greek letters \\Iota Greek letters \\itimes Math operators \\j Symbols \\jj Double-struck letters \\jmath Symbols \\kappa Greek letters \\Kappa Greek letters \\ket Delimiters \\lambda Greek letters \\Lambda Greek letters \\langle Delimiters \\lbbrack Delimiters \\lbrace Delimiters \\lbrack Delimiters \\lceil Delimiters \\ldiv Fraction slashes \\ldivide Fraction slashes \\ldots Dots \\le Relational operators \\left Delimiters \\leftarrow Arrows \\Leftarrow Arrows \\leftharpoondown Arrows \\leftharpoonup Arrows \\leftrightarrow Arrows \\Leftrightarrow Arrows \\leq Relational operators \\lfloor Delimiters \\lhvec Accents \\limit Limits \\ll Relational operators \\lmoust Delimiters \\Longleftarrow Arrows \\Longleftrightarrow Arrows \\Longrightarrow Arrows \\lrhar Arrows \\lvec Accents \\mapsto Arrows \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Space characters \\mid Relational operators \\middle Symbols \\models Relational operators \\mp Binary operators \\mu Greek letters \\Mu Greek letters \\nabla Symbols \\naryand Operators \\nbsp Space characters \\ne Relational operators \\nearrow Arrows \\neq Relational operators \\ni Relational operators \\norm Delimiters \\notcontain Relational operators \\notelement Relational operators \\notin Relational operators \\nu Greek letters \\Nu Greek letters \\nwarrow Arrows \\o Greek letters \\O Greek letters \\odot Binary operators \\of Operators \\oiiint Integrals \\oiint Integrals \\oint Integrals \\omega Greek letters \\Omega Greek letters \\ominus Binary operators \\open Delimiters \\oplus Binary operators \\otimes Binary operators \\over Delimiters \\overbar Accents \\overbrace Accents \\overbracket Accents \\overline Accents \\overparen Accents \\overshell Accents \\parallel Geometry notation \\partial Symbols \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Geometry notation \\phantom Symbols \\phi Greek letters \\Phi Greek letters \\pi Greek letters \\Pi Greek letters \\pm Binary operators \\pppprime Primes \\ppprime Primes \\pprime Primes \\prec Relational operators \\preceq Relational operators \\prime Primes \\prod Math operators \\propto Relational operators \\psi Greek letters \\Psi Greek letters \\qdrt Square roots and radicals \\quadratic Square roots and radicals \\rangle Delimiters \\Rangle Delimiters \\ratio Relational operators \\rbrace Delimiters \\rbrack Delimiters \\Rbrack Delimiters \\rceil Delimiters \\rddots Dots \\Re Symbols \\rect Symbols \\rfloor Delimiters \\rho Greek letters \\Rho Greek letters \\rhvec Accents \\right Delimiters \\rightarrow Arrows \\Rightarrow Arrows \\rightharpoondown Arrows \\rightharpoonup Arrows \\rmoust Delimiters \\root Symbols \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Fraction slashes \\sdivide Fraction slashes \\searrow Arrows \\setminus Binary operators \\sigma Greek letters \\Sigma Greek letters \\sim Relational operators \\simeq Relational operators \\smash Arrows \\smile Relational operators \\spadesuit Symbols \\sqcap Binary operators \\sqcup Binary operators \\sqrt Square roots and radicals \\sqsubseteq Set notation \\sqsuperseteq Set notation \\star Binary operators \\subset Set notation \\subseteq Set notation \\succ Relational operators \\succeq Relational operators \\sum Math operators \\superset Set notation \\superseteq Set notation \\swarrow Arrows \\tau Greek letters \\Tau Greek letters \\therefore Relational operators \\theta Greek letters \\Theta Greek letters \\thicksp Space characters \\thinsp Space characters \\tilde Accents \\times Binary operators \\to Arrows \\top Logic notation \\tvec Arrows \\ubar Accents \\Ubar Accents \\underbar Accents \\underbrace Accents \\underbracket Accents \\underline Accents \\underparen Accents \\uparrow Arrows \\Uparrow Arrows \\updownarrow Arrows \\Updownarrow Arrows \\uplus Binary operators \\upsilon Greek letters \\Upsilon Greek letters \\varepsilon Greek letters \\varphi Greek letters \\varpi Greek letters \\varrho Greek letters \\varsigma Greek letters \\vartheta Greek letters \\vbar Delimiters \\vdash Relational operators \\vdots Dots \\vec Accents \\vee Binary operators \\vert Delimiters \\Vert Delimiters \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Arrows \\vthicksp Space characters \\wedge Binary operators \\wp Symbols \\wr Binary operators \\xi Greek letters \\Xi Greek letters \\zeta Greek letters \\Zeta Greek letters \\zwnj Space characters \\zwsp Space characters ~= Relational operators -+ Binary operators +- Binary operators << Relational operators <= Relational operators -> Arrows >= Relational operators >> Relational operators Recognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored. AutoFormat As You Type By default, the editor formats the text while you are typing according to the auto-formatting presets: replaces quotation marks, converts hyphens to dashes, converts text recognized as internet or network path into a hyperlink, starts a bullet list or a numbered list when a list is detected. The Add period with double-space option allows to add a period when you double tap the spacebar. Enable or disable it as appropriate. By default, this option is disabled for Linux and Windows, and is enabled for macOS. To enable or disable the auto-formatting presets, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Text AutoCorrect You can set the editor to capitalize the first word of each sentence automatically. The option is enabled by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of sentences option." + "body": "The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Document Editor are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of four tabs: Math Autocorrect, Recognized Functions, AutoFormat As You Type, and Text AutoCorrect. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents, and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. Note: The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Math AutoCorrect. Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list Select the entry to be modified. You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list Select an entry to remove from the list. Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box. The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Document Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Math AutoCorrect. The supported codes Code Symbol Category !! Symbols ... Dots :: Operators := Operators /< Relational operators /> Relational operators /= Relational operators \\above Above/Below scripts \\acute Accents \\aleph Hebrew letters \\alpha Greek letters \\Alpha Greek letters \\amalg Binary operators \\angle Geometry notation \\aoint Integrals \\approx Relational operators \\asmash Arrows \\ast Binary operators \\asymp Relational operators \\atop Operators \\bar Over/Underbar \\Bar Accents \\because Relational operators \\begin Delimiters \\below Above/Below scripts \\bet Hebrew letters \\beta Greek letters \\Beta Greek letters \\beth Hebrew letters \\bigcap Large operators \\bigcup Large operators \\bigodot Large operators \\bigoplus Large operators \\bigotimes Large operators \\bigsqcup Large operators \\biguplus Large operators \\bigvee Large operators \\bigwedge Large operators \\binomial Equations \\bot Logic notation \\bowtie Relational operators \\box Symbols \\boxdot Binary operators \\boxminus Binary operators \\boxplus Binary operators \\bra Delimiters \\break Symbols \\breve Accents \\bullet Binary operators \\cap Binary operators \\cbrt Square roots and radicals \\cases Symbols \\cdot Binary operators \\cdots Dots \\check Accents \\chi Greek letters \\Chi Greek letters \\circ Binary operators \\close Delimiters \\clubsuit Symbols \\coint Integrals \\cong Relational operators \\coprod Math operators \\cup Binary operators \\dalet Hebrew letters \\daleth Hebrew letters \\dashv Relational operators \\dd Double-struck letters \\Dd Double-struck letters \\ddddot Accents \\dddot Accents \\ddot Accents \\ddots Dots \\defeq Relational operators \\degc Symbols \\degf Symbols \\degree Symbols \\delta Greek letters \\Delta Greek letters \\Deltaeq Operators \\diamond Binary operators \\diamondsuit Symbols \\div Binary operators \\dot Accents \\doteq Relational operators \\dots Dots \\doublea Double-struck letters \\doubleA Double-struck letters \\doubleb Double-struck letters \\doubleB Double-struck letters \\doublec Double-struck letters \\doubleC Double-struck letters \\doubled Double-struck letters \\doubleD Double-struck letters \\doublee Double-struck letters \\doubleE Double-struck letters \\doublef Double-struck letters \\doubleF Double-struck letters \\doubleg Double-struck letters \\doubleG Double-struck letters \\doubleh Double-struck letters \\doubleH Double-struck letters \\doublei Double-struck letters \\doubleI Double-struck letters \\doublej Double-struck letters \\doubleJ Double-struck letters \\doublek Double-struck letters \\doubleK Double-struck letters \\doublel Double-struck letters \\doubleL Double-struck letters \\doublem Double-struck letters \\doubleM Double-struck letters \\doublen Double-struck letters \\doubleN Double-struck letters \\doubleo Double-struck letters \\doubleO Double-struck letters \\doublep Double-struck letters \\doubleP Double-struck letters \\doubleq Double-struck letters \\doubleQ Double-struck letters \\doubler Double-struck letters \\doubleR Double-struck letters \\doubles Double-struck letters \\doubleS Double-struck letters \\doublet Double-struck letters \\doubleT Double-struck letters \\doubleu Double-struck letters \\doubleU Double-struck letters \\doublev Double-struck letters \\doubleV Double-struck letters \\doublew Double-struck letters \\doubleW Double-struck letters \\doublex Double-struck letters \\doubleX Double-struck letters \\doubley Double-struck letters \\doubleY Double-struck letters \\doublez Double-struck letters \\doubleZ Double-struck letters \\downarrow Arrows \\Downarrow Arrows \\dsmash Arrows \\ee Double-struck letters \\ell Symbols \\emptyset Set notations \\emsp Space characters \\end Delimiters \\ensp Space characters \\epsilon Greek letters \\Epsilon Greek letters \\eqarray Symbols \\equiv Relational operators \\eta Greek letters \\Eta Greek letters \\exists Logic notations \\forall Logic notations \\fraktura Fraktur letters \\frakturA Fraktur letters \\frakturb Fraktur letters \\frakturB Fraktur letters \\frakturc Fraktur letters \\frakturC Fraktur letters \\frakturd Fraktur letters \\frakturD Fraktur letters \\frakture Fraktur letters \\frakturE Fraktur letters \\frakturf Fraktur letters \\frakturF Fraktur letters \\frakturg Fraktur letters \\frakturG Fraktur letters \\frakturh Fraktur letters \\frakturH Fraktur letters \\frakturi Fraktur letters \\frakturI Fraktur letters \\frakturk Fraktur letters \\frakturK Fraktur letters \\frakturl Fraktur letters \\frakturL Fraktur letters \\frakturm Fraktur letters \\frakturM Fraktur letters \\frakturn Fraktur letters \\frakturN Fraktur letters \\frakturo Fraktur letters \\frakturO Fraktur letters \\frakturp Fraktur letters \\frakturP Fraktur letters \\frakturq Fraktur letters \\frakturQ Fraktur letters \\frakturr Fraktur letters \\frakturR Fraktur letters \\frakturs Fraktur letters \\frakturS Fraktur letters \\frakturt Fraktur letters \\frakturT Fraktur letters \\frakturu Fraktur letters \\frakturU Fraktur letters \\frakturv Fraktur letters \\frakturV Fraktur letters \\frakturw Fraktur letters \\frakturW Fraktur letters \\frakturx Fraktur letters \\frakturX Fraktur letters \\fraktury Fraktur letters \\frakturY Fraktur letters \\frakturz Fraktur letters \\frakturZ Fraktur letters \\frown Relational operators \\funcapply Binary operators \\G Greek letters \\gamma Greek letters \\Gamma Greek letters \\ge Relational operators \\geq Relational operators \\gets Arrows \\gg Relational operators \\gimel Hebrew letters \\grave Accents \\hairsp Space characters \\hat Accents \\hbar Symbols \\heartsuit Symbols \\hookleftarrow Arrows \\hookrightarrow Arrows \\hphantom Arrows \\hsmash Arrows \\hvec Accents \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Double-struck letters \\iiint Integrals \\iint Integrals \\iiiint Integrals \\Im Symbols \\imath Symbols \\in Relational operators \\inc Symbols \\infty Symbols \\int Integrals \\integral Integrals \\iota Greek letters \\Iota Greek letters \\itimes Math operators \\j Symbols \\jj Double-struck letters \\jmath Symbols \\kappa Greek letters \\Kappa Greek letters \\ket Delimiters \\lambda Greek letters \\Lambda Greek letters \\langle Delimiters \\lbbrack Delimiters \\lbrace Delimiters \\lbrack Delimiters \\lceil Delimiters \\ldiv Fraction slashes \\ldivide Fraction slashes \\ldots Dots \\le Relational operators \\left Delimiters \\leftarrow Arrows \\Leftarrow Arrows \\leftharpoondown Arrows \\leftharpoonup Arrows \\leftrightarrow Arrows \\Leftrightarrow Arrows \\leq Relational operators \\lfloor Delimiters \\lhvec Accents \\limit Limits \\ll Relational operators \\lmoust Delimiters \\Longleftarrow Arrows \\Longleftrightarrow Arrows \\Longrightarrow Arrows \\lrhar Arrows \\lvec Accents \\mapsto Arrows \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Space characters \\mid Relational operators \\middle Symbols \\models Relational operators \\mp Binary operators \\mu Greek letters \\Mu Greek letters \\nabla Symbols \\naryand Operators \\nbsp Space characters \\ne Relational operators \\nearrow Arrows \\neq Relational operators \\ni Relational operators \\norm Delimiters \\notcontain Relational operators \\notelement Relational operators \\notin Relational operators \\nu Greek letters \\Nu Greek letters \\nwarrow Arrows \\o Greek letters \\O Greek letters \\odot Binary operators \\of Operators \\oiiint Integrals \\oiint Integrals \\oint Integrals \\omega Greek letters \\Omega Greek letters \\ominus Binary operators \\open Delimiters \\oplus Binary operators \\otimes Binary operators \\over Delimiters \\overbar Accents \\overbrace Accents \\overbracket Accents \\overline Accents \\overparen Accents \\overshell Accents \\parallel Geometry notation \\partial Symbols \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Geometry notation \\phantom Symbols \\phi Greek letters \\Phi Greek letters \\pi Greek letters \\Pi Greek letters \\pm Binary operators \\pppprime Primes \\ppprime Primes \\pprime Primes \\prec Relational operators \\preceq Relational operators \\prime Primes \\prod Math operators \\propto Relational operators \\psi Greek letters \\Psi Greek letters \\qdrt Square roots and radicals \\quadratic Square roots and radicals \\rangle Delimiters \\Rangle Delimiters \\ratio Relational operators \\rbrace Delimiters \\rbrack Delimiters \\Rbrack Delimiters \\rceil Delimiters \\rddots Dots \\Re Symbols \\rect Symbols \\rfloor Delimiters \\rho Greek letters \\Rho Greek letters \\rhvec Accents \\right Delimiters \\rightarrow Arrows \\Rightarrow Arrows \\rightharpoondown Arrows \\rightharpoonup Arrows \\rmoust Delimiters \\root Symbols \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Fraction slashes \\sdivide Fraction slashes \\searrow Arrows \\setminus Binary operators \\sigma Greek letters \\Sigma Greek letters \\sim Relational operators \\simeq Relational operators \\smash Arrows \\smile Relational operators \\spadesuit Symbols \\sqcap Binary operators \\sqcup Binary operators \\sqrt Square roots and radicals \\sqsubseteq Set notation \\sqsuperseteq Set notation \\star Binary operators \\subset Set notation \\subseteq Set notation \\succ Relational operators \\succeq Relational operators \\sum Math operators \\superset Set notation \\superseteq Set notation \\swarrow Arrows \\tau Greek letters \\Tau Greek letters \\therefore Relational operators \\theta Greek letters \\Theta Greek letters \\thicksp Space characters \\thinsp Space characters \\tilde Accents \\times Binary operators \\to Arrows \\top Logic notation \\tvec Arrows \\ubar Accents \\Ubar Accents \\underbar Accents \\underbrace Accents \\underbracket Accents \\underline Accents \\underparen Accents \\uparrow Arrows \\Uparrow Arrows \\updownarrow Arrows \\Updownarrow Arrows \\uplus Binary operators \\upsilon Greek letters \\Upsilon Greek letters \\varepsilon Greek letters \\varphi Greek letters \\varpi Greek letters \\varrho Greek letters \\varsigma Greek letters \\vartheta Greek letters \\vbar Delimiters \\vdash Relational operators \\vdots Dots \\vec Accents \\vee Binary operators \\vert Delimiters \\Vert Delimiters \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Arrows \\vthicksp Space characters \\wedge Binary operators \\wp Symbols \\wr Binary operators \\xi Greek letters \\Xi Greek letters \\zeta Greek letters \\Zeta Greek letters \\zwnj Space characters \\zwsp Space characters ~= Relational operators -+ Binary operators +- Binary operators << Relational operators <= Relational operators -> Arrows >= Relational operators >> Relational operators Recognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored. AutoFormat As You Type By default, the editor formats the text while you are typing according to the auto-formatting presets: replaces quotation marks, converts hyphens to dashes, converts text recognized as internet or network path into a hyperlink, starts a bullet list or a numbered list when a list is detected. The Add period with double-space option allows to add a period when you double tap the spacebar. Enable or disable it as appropriate. By default, this option is disabled for Linux and Windows, and is enabled for macOS. To enable or disable the auto-formatting presets, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Text AutoCorrect You can set the editor to capitalize the first word of each sentence automatically. The option is enabled by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of sentences option. The editor capitalizes the first letter of table cells by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of table cells box. You can also customize capitalizing after particular words by entering the required words in the Don't capitalize after field and clicking the Add button, or by choosing the required words in the corresponding list below. You can choose the way the exceptions work based on the language in the Exceptions for the language dropdown list. Use the Reset to default button to cancel all custom changes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", @@ -393,7 +413,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Save, download, print your document", - "body": "Saving By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDF/A, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current document, click the Print icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection). In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." + "body": "Saving By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current document, click the Print icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. Adjust the following parameters in the Print window that opens: Destination - choose the destination of the printed file, e.g., Save to PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc. Orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally. Pages - choose one of the options for printing the pages: All, Current, Odd, Even, or Custom. In the latter case, you will have to enter the number of pages manually. Colour mode - choose whether you want your file printed in Colour or Black and white. Please note that this setting is available when the Microsoft XPS Document Writer Destination parameter is selected. For the Fax Destination parameter, the colour mode is set to black and white by default. Click the More settings caption to open advanced settings. Paper size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list or set a user defined one. Scale - set the file scaling when printed; you can fit it to page width or set the scaling manually via the Scale checkbox and the corresponding input field. Pages per sheet - set the number of pages printed on one sheet, e.g., two, six, nine, etc. Margins - define the page margins. You can choose either default margins or custom ones measured in inches. For custom margins, please set the required values for top, bottom, left and right margins manually. You can choose the None option as well to have no margins. Options - check the Print headers and footers checkbox to have them printed, or uncheck this box to have no headers and footers printed. Print using the system dialogue - click this caption to open the system dialogue to configure the printing process. In the desktop version, the available printing settings are Print range, number of Pages, Copies, Print sides, Page size, Page orientation, and Margins. You can also print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer. It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection). In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", @@ -408,7 +428,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Set page parameters", - "body": "To change page layout in the Document Editor, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked. In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents. You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns (you can add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." + "body": "To change page layout in the Document Editor, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked. In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents. You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns, column Width and Spacing. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Equal column width checkbox to make all column width the same. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", @@ -421,9 +441,9 @@ var indexes = "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you. Select the text to be read out. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Speech. The text will now be read out." }, { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Support of SmartArt in ONLYOFFICE Document Editor", - "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports SmartArt graphics that were inserted using third-party editors. You can open a file containing SmartArt and edit it as a graphic object using the available editing tools. Once you click a SmartArt graphic or its element, the following tabs become active on the right sidebar to customize a layout: Paragraph settings to configure indents and spacing, line and page breaks, borders and fill, fonts, tabs and paddings. See Paragraph Formatting section for a detailed description of every option. This tab becomes active for SmartArt elements only Shape settings to configure the shapes used on a layout. You can change shapes, edit the fill, the lines, the weights and arrows, the text box and the alternative text. Text Art settings to configure the Text Art style that is used in a SmartArt graphic to highlight the text. You can change the Text Art template, the fill type, color and opacity, the line size, color and type. This tab becomes active for SmartArt elements only. Right-click the SmartArt graphic or its element border to access the following formatting options: Wrapping style to define the way the object is positioned relative to the text. The Wrapping Style option is available only when you click the SmartArt graphic border. Rotate to choose the rotation direction for the selected element on a SmartArt graphic: Rotate 90° Clockwise, Rotate 90° Counterclockwise.The Rotate option becomes active for SmartArt elements only Insert Caption to label a SmartArt graphic element for reference. Shape Advanced Settings to access additional shape formatting options. Right-click the SmartArt graphic element to access the following text formatting options: Vertical Alignment to choose the text alignment inside the selected SmartArt element: Align Top, Align Middle, Align Bottom. Text Direction to choose the text direction inside the selected SmartArt element: Horizontal, Rotate Text Down, Rotate Text Up. Paragraph Advanced Settings to access additional paragraph formatting options." + "id": "UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm", + "title": "Type via voice", + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can you can insert text with your voice. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text, switch to the Plugins tab and select Speech input, сhoose the recognition language in the pop-up window, сlick the Start dictation button and start speaking. Once you pause, the text will be added to the document. To turn off voice recognition, press the button again. For the plugin to work correctly, you must have an input device (e,g. a microphone or headset) as well as permissions for the browser to use these record devices." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", @@ -466,8 +486,8 @@ var indexes = "body": "In the Document Editor, you can include a video in your document. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your document." }, { - "id": "UsageInstructions/insertdropcap.htm", - "title": "Insert a drop cap", - "body": "A drop cap is a large capital letter used at the beginning of a paragraph or section. The size of a drop cap is usually several lines. To add a drop cap in the Document Editor, place the cursor within the required paragraph, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Drop Cap icon on the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph. In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin. The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need. To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame. To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None option from the drop-down list. To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will appear: The Drop Cap tab allows adjusting the following parameters: Position is used to change the placement of a drop cap. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap. Font is used to select a font from the list of the available fonts. Height in rows is used to define how many lines a drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10. Distance from text is used to specify the amount of spacing between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the drop cap frame. The Borders & Fill tab allows adding a border around a drop cap and adjusting its parameters. They are the following: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to. Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background. The Margins tab allows setting the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added). Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open: The Frame tab allows adjusting the following parameters: Position is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. You can also click None to delete the frame. Width and Height are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows automatically adjusting the frame size to fit the drop cap. The Exactly option allows specifying fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value). Horizontal parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame in the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Vertical parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame is the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Move with text is used to make sure that the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored. The Borders & Fill and Margins allow adjusting the same parameters as the corresponding tabs in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window." + "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", + "title": "Zoom", + "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css index 429ab5cea8..2207321537 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css @@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json index e4a4bf7d43..7697e6bcce 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ [ { "src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", - "name": "Présentation de l'interface de Document Editor", + "name": "Présentation de l'interface de l'éditeur de documents", "headername": "Interface du programme" }, { @@ -12,10 +12,11 @@ "src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Accueil" }, - { - "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", - "name": "Onglet Insertion" - }, + { + "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", + "name": "Onglet Insertion" + }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Dessiner"}, { "src": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Mise en page" @@ -167,7 +168,8 @@ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Insérer des objets textuels" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Dessiner à main levée dans un document" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "name": "Ajouter une légende" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insérer des symboles et des caractères" }, { @@ -218,7 +220,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm", "name": "Insérer les références" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "name": "Traduire un texte" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/OCR.htm", "name": "Extraction du texte incrusté dans l'image" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/Speech.htm", "name": "Lire un texte à haute voix" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/Speech.htm", "name": "Lire un texte à haute voix" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm", "name": "Saisie vocale" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Remplacer un mot par synonyme" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm", "name": "Télécharger un document sur Wordpress"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm", "name": "Compter les mots"}, @@ -226,7 +229,9 @@ { "src": "UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm", "name": "Corriger la typographie" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communiquer lors de l'édition" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm", "name": "Effectuer des appels audio et vidéo"}, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "name": "Créer et insérer des diagrammes"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "name": "Créer et insérer des diagrammes" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Organiser et programmer des réunions de Zoom"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Utiliser l'intelligence artificielle pour rédiger un texte"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "Afficher les informations sur le document", @@ -238,7 +243,7 @@ }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", - "name": "Paramètres avancés de Document Editor" + "name": "Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de documents" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", @@ -257,7 +262,7 @@ {"src": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", "name": "Protéger un document avec un mot de passe"}, { "src": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", - "name": "À propos de Document Editor", + "name": "À propos de l'éditeur de documents", "headername": "Astuces utiles" }, { diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm index ce883cd3fb..9ad7f4a023 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - À propos de l'Éditeur de Documents + À propos de l'éditeur de documents - + @@ -14,10 +14,10 @@
            -

            À propos de l'Éditeur de Documents

            -

            Éditeur de Documents est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir +

            À propos de l'éditeur de documents

            +

            L'éditeur de documents est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des documents dans votre navigateur.

            -

            En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, +

            En utilisant l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF et OFORM.

            Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel, le numéro de build et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau pour Windows, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme. Dans la version de bureau pour Mac OS, accédez au menu ONLYOFFICE en haut de l'écran et sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos d'ONLYOFFICE.

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index abaef8c8f4..a12c3b343e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Paramètres avancés de l'Éditeur de Documents + Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de documents - + @@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
            -

            Paramètres avancés de l'Éditeur de Documents

            -

            Éditeur de Documents vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés....

            +

            Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de documents

            +

            L'éditeur de documents vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés....

            Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants :

            Édition et enregistrement

            @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@

            Espace de travail

          • Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte soit affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices.
          • Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. -

            Éditeur de Documents gère deux modes de mise en cache :

            +

            L'éditeur de documents prend en charge deux modes de mise en cache:

            1. Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante.
            2. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc.
              3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm index d46096b775..a1b5a38eea 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
              - +

              Collaborer sur un document en temps réel

              -

              Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

              -

              Dans l'Éditeur de Documents il y a deux modes de collaborer sur des documents en temps réel : Rapide et Strict.

              +

              L'éditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

              +

              Dans l'éditeur de documents il y a deux modes de collaborer sur des documents en temps réel : Rapide et Strict.

              Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes depuis Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure :

              Menu Mode de co-édition

              Le nombre d'utilisateurs qui travaillent sur le document actuel est spécifié sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur - . Pour afficher les personnes qui travaillent sur le fichier, cliquez sur cette icône pour ouvrir le panneau Chat avec la liste complète affichée.

              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm index 3d6c1d08af..65bc0e1d3c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
              - +

              Commenter des documents

              -

              Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions du document< pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

              -

              Dans l'Éditeur de Documents vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de documents sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer.

              +

              L'éditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions du document< pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

              +

              Dans l'éditeur de documents vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de documents sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer.

              Laisser et répondre aux commentaires

              Pour laisser un commentaire :

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm index 2e4ebfec89..25a81e1031 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
                - +

                Communiquer en temps réel

                -

                Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

                -

                Dans l'Éditeur de Documents il est possible de communiquer avec vos co-auteurs en temps réel en utilisant l'outil intégré Chat et les modules complémentaires utiles, par ex. Telegram ou Rainbow.

                +

                L'éditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

                +

                Dans l'éditeur de documents il est possible de communiquer avec vos co-auteurs en temps réel en utilisant l'outil intégré Chat et les modules complémentaires utiles, par ex. Telegram ou Rainbow.

                Pour accéder au Chat et laisser un message pour les autres utilisateurs,

                1. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm index 6e3e8aa321..451fe421e5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Comparer des documents + Comparer et combiner des documents - + @@ -12,71 +12,93 @@
                  - +
                  -

                  Comparer des documents

                  -

                  Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier.

                  -

                  Si vous avez besoin de comparer et de fusionner deux documents, l'Éditeur de Documents dispose de la fonctionnalité de Comparaison des documents. Cette fonctionnalité permet d'afficher des différences entre deux documents et de fusionner des documents en acceptant les modifications une par une ou toutes à la fois.

                  -

                  Lors de la comparaison et du fusionnement des documents, le fichier résultant sera stocké sur le portail comme une nouvelle version du fichier original.

                  +

                  Comparer et combiner des documents

                  +

                  L'éditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe: partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier.

                  +

                  Si vous avez besoin de comparer et de fusionner deux documents, l'éditeur de documents dispose de la fonctionnalité de Comparaison des documents. Cette fonctionnalité permet d'afficher des différences entre deux documents et de fusionner des documents en acceptant les modifications une par une ou toutes à la fois.

                  +

                  L'option Combiner peut sembler identique, mais il y a une différence majeure: les Modifications suivies dans les deux versions sont fusionnées dans une seule version et le reste du textes est comparé.

                  +

                  Une fois les deux documents fusionnés, le document résultant sera sauvegardé sur le portail sous une nouvelle version du fichier source.

                  Si vous ne souhaitez pas fusionner des documents lors de la comparaison, vous pouvez rejeter toutes les modifications pour que le document original demeure inchangé.

                  Choisir des documents à comparer

                  -

                  Pour comparer deux documents, ouvrez le document original et sélectionnez le deuxième document à comparer :

                  +

                  Pour comparer deux documents, ouvrez le document original et sélectionnez le deuxième document à comparer:

                    -
                  1. passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton
                    Comparer,
                    2. +
                  2. passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur
                    le bouton Comparer,
                  3. - sélectionnez l'une des options pour télécharger le document : + sélectionnez l'une des options pour télécharger le document:
                    • l'option Document à partir d'un fichier permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Recherchez le fichier .docx nécessaire sur votre disque local et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir.
                    • - l'option Document à partir d'une URL permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre pour saisir un lien vers le fichier d'un stockage de nuage externe (par exemple, Nextcloud) si vous avez l'autorisation appropriée pour accéder au fichier. Ce lien doit être un lien de téléchargement direct. Lorsque le lien est indiqué, cliquez sur le bouton OK : -

                      Remarque : Un lien de téléchargement direct permet de démarrer le téléchargement sans ouvrir le navigateur. Par exemple, pour obtenir un lien dans Nextcloud, recherchez le document nécessaire dans la liste, sélectionnez l'option Détails dans le menu. Cliquez sur l'icône Copier le lien direct (pour des utilisateurs qui ont l'autorisation pour accéder à ce fichier/dossier) à droite du nom de fichier sur le panneau de détails. Pour apprendre comment obtenir un lien direct dans un autre stockage externe, veuillez consulter la documentation approprié de cet stockage.

                      + l'option Document à partir d'une URL permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre pour saisir un lien vers le fichier d'un stockage de nuage externe (par exemple, Nextcloud) si vous avez l'autorisation appropriée pour accéder au fichier. Ce lien doit être un lien de téléchargement direct. Lorsque le lien est indiqué, cliquez sur le bouton OK: +

                      Remarque: Un lien de téléchargement direct permet de démarrer le téléchargement sans ouvrir le navigateur. Par exemple, pour obtenir un lien dans Nextcloud, recherchez le document nécessaire dans la liste, sélectionnez l'option Détails dans le menu. Cliquez sur l'icône Copier le lien direct (pour des utilisateurs qui ont l'autorisation pour accéder à ce fichier/dossier) à droite du nom de fichier sur le panneau de détails. Pour apprendre comment obtenir un lien direct dans un autre stockage externe, veuillez consulter la documentation approprié de cet stockage.

                      • -
                    • l'option Document à partir de stockage permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Une liste de tous documents .docx stockés sur votre portail auxquels vous avez accès s'affichera. Pour parcourir toutes les sections du module Documents, utilisez le menu dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre. Sélectionnez le document .docx nécessaire et cliquez sur le bouton OK.
                      • +
                    • l'option Document à partir de stockage permet d'ouvrir la fenêtreSélectionner la source de données. Une liste de tous documents .docx stockés sur votre portail auxquels vous avez accès s'affichera. Pour parcourir toutes les sections du module Documents, utilisez le menu dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre. Sélectionnez le document .docx nécessaire et cliquez sur le bouton OK.

                  Le processus de comparaison des fichiers démarrera lors de la sélection du dixième fichier et votre document ressemblera un document en mode Révision. Toutes modifications sont mises en surbrillance, alors vous pouvez voir les modifications, naviguer entre elles, les accepter ou rejeter une par une ou toutes à la fois. Vous pouvez aussi modifier le mode d'affichage pour afficher le document avant la comparaison, en cours de la comparaison et après la comparaison si vous acceptez les modifications.

                  +

                  Choisir le document à combiner

                  +

                  Pour combiner deux documents, ouvrez le document source et sélectionnez le deuxième document à combiner:

                  +
                    +
                  1. passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur
                    le bouton Combiner:
                    2. +
                  2. + sélectionnez l'une des options pour télécharger le document: +
                      +
                    • l'option Document à partir d'un fichier permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Recherchez le fichier .docx nécessaire sur votre disque local et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir.
                      • +
                    • + l'option Document à partir d'une URL permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre pour saisir un lien vers le fichier d'un stockage de nuage externe (par exemple, Nextcloud) si vous avez l'autorisation appropriée pour accéder au fichier. Ce lien doit être un lien de téléchargement direct. Lorsque le lien est indiqué, cliquez sur le bouton OK: +

                      Remarque: Un lien de téléchargement direct permet de démarrer le téléchargement sans ouvrir le navigateur. Par exemple, pour obtenir un lien dans Nextcloud, recherchez le document nécessaire dans la liste, sélectionnez l'option Détails dans le menu. Cliquez sur l'icône Copier le lien direct (pour des utilisateurs qui ont l'autorisation pour accéder à ce fichier/dossier) à droite du nom de fichier sur le panneau de détails. Pour apprendre comment obtenir un lien direct dans un autre stockage externe, veuillez consulter la documentation approprié de cet stockage.

                      +
                      • +
                    +
                    3. +
                  +

                  Une fois le deuxième document sélectionné, le processus de fusion démarra et le document semblera être en mode Révision. Toutes modifications sont mises en surbrillance, alors vous pouvez voir les modifications, naviguer entre elles, les accepter ou rejeter une par une ou toutes à la fois. Vous pouvez aussi modifier le mode d'affichage et afficher le document avant la fusion, en cours de la fusion et après la fusion si vous acceptez les modifications.

                  +

                  Choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications

                  -

                  Cliquez sur le bouton Mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'un des modes disponibles dans la liste :

                  +

                  Cliquez sur le bouton Mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'un des modes disponibles dans la liste:

                  • - Balisage - cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document en cours de comparaison. Ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. + Balisage et bulles - cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document en cours de comparaison/fusion. Ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. Ce mode inclut également une bulle comportant le nom du réviseur, la date et l'heure de la révision et les modifications apportées. Utilisez la bulle pour accepter '(l'icône de coche) ou rejeter (l'icône croix) les modifications. +

                    Comparer documents - Balisage

                    +
                    • +
                  • + Balisage uniquement - cette option est utilisé pour afficher le document en cours de comparaison/fusion. Ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. Acune bulle ne s'affiche.

                    Comparer documents - Balisage

                  • - Final - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document après la comparaison comme si toutes les modifications avaient été acceptées. Cette option n'accepte pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet de voir à quoi ressemblera le document après avoir accepté toutes les modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. + Final - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document après la comparaison/fusion comme si toutes les modifications avaient été acceptées. Cette option n'accepte pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet de voir à quoi ressemblera le document après avoir accepté toutes les modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document.

                    Comparer documents - Final

                  • - Original - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document avant la comparaison comme si toutes les modifications ont été rejetées. Cette option ne rejette pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet uniquement d'afficher le document sans modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. + Original - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document avant la comparaison/fusion comme si toutes les modifications ont été rejetées. Cette option ne rejette pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet uniquement d'afficher le document sans modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document.

                    Comparer documents - Original

                  Accepter ou rejeter les modifications

                  -

                  Utilisez les boutons Précédente et Suivante de la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les modifications.

                  -

                  Pour accepter la modification actuellement sélectionnée, vous pouvez :

                  +

                  Utilisez les boutons Précédente et Suivante de la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les modifications.

                  +

                  Pour accepter la modification actuellement sélectionnée, vous pouvez:

                    -
                  • cliquez sur le bouton
                    Accepter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                    • +
                  • cliquez sur
                    le bouton Accepter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                  • cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera acceptée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou
                    • -
                  • cliquez sur le bouton Accepter
                    dans la fenêtre contextuelle.
                    • +
                  • cliquez sur le bouton Accepter
                    dans la fenêtre contextuelle.
                  -

                  Pour accepter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter toutes les modifications.

                  -

                  Pour rejeter la modification actuelle, vous pouvez :

                  +

                  Pour accepter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter toutes les modifications.

                  +

                  Pour rejeter la modification actuelle, vous pouvez:

                    -
                  • cliquez sur le bouton
                    Rejeter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                    • +
                  • cliquez sur
                    le bouton Rejeter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                  • cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera rejetée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou
                    • -
                  • cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter
                    dans la fenêtre contextuelle.
                    • +
                  • cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter
                    dans la fenêtre contextuelle.
                  -

                  Pour rejeter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter toutes les modifications.

                  +

                  Pour rejeter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter toutes les modifications.

                  -

                  Informations supplémentaires sur la fonction de comparaison

                  +

                  Informations supplémentaires sur comparaison et fusion

                  Méthode de comparaison

                  Les documents sont comparés par des mots. Si au moins un caractère dans un mot est modifié (par exemple, si un caractère a été supprimé ou remplacé), à la suite la différence sera affichée comme le changement du mot entier, pas du caractère.

                  -

                  L'image ci-dessous illustre le cas où le fichier d'origine contient le mot « caractères » et le document de comparaison contient le mot « Caractères ».

                  -

                  Comparer documents - méthode

                  +

                  L'image ci-dessous illustre le cas où le fichier d'origine contient le mot « caractères » et le document de comparaison contient le mot «Caractères ».

                  +

                  Comparer documents - méthode

                  Auteur du document

                  Lors du lancement de la comparaison, le deuxième document de comparaison est chargé et comparé au document actuel.

                  @@ -84,12 +106,13 @@

                  Auteur du document

                2. Si le document chargé contient des données qui ne sont pas représentées dans le document d'origine, les données seront marquées comme ajoutées par un réviseur.
                3. Si le document d'origine contient des données qui ne sont représentées dans le document chargé, les données seront marquées comme supprimées par un réviseur.
          -

          Si le document original et le document chargé sont du même auteur, le réviseur est le même utilisateur. Son nom s'affiche dans la bulle de modification.

          +

          Si le document original et le document chargé sont du même auteur, le réviseur est le même utilisateur. Son nom s'affiche dans la bulle de modification.

          Si les deux fichiers sont des auteurs différents, l'auteur du deuxième fichier chargé à des fins de comparaison est l'auteur des modifications ajoutées/supprimées.

          Présence des modifications suivies dans le document comparé

          -

          Si le document d'origine contient des modifications apportées en mode révision, elles seront acceptées pendant la comparaison. Lorsque vous choisissez le deuxième fichier à comparer, vous verrez le message d'avertissement correspondant.

          +

          Si le document d'origine contient des modifications apportées en mode révision, elles seront acceptées pendant la comparaison. Lorsque vous choisissez le deuxième fichier à comparer, vous verrez le message d'avertissement correspondant.

          Dans ce cas, lorsque vous choisissez le mode d'affichage Original, il n'y aura aucune modification dans le document.

          +

          Lorsque les deux documents contiennent des modifications qu'on a apporté en mode révision, celles-ci seront fusionnées pendant la fusion.

          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 07ceb80059..edc35bb82a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Raccourcis clavier - + @@ -18,702 +18,720 @@

          Raccourcis clavier

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          -

          Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'Éditeur de Documents sans l'aide de la souris.

          +

          Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'éditeur de documents sans l'aide de la souris.

            -
          1. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état.
            2. +
          2. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état.
          3. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. -

            Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès.

            +

            Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur Alt pour afficher les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès.

            Primaires touches d'accès

            Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet.

            Touches d'accès supplémentaires

            Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer.

            4. -
          4. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour désactiver toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir aux suggestions de touches précédentes.
            5. +
          5. Appuyez sur Alt pour masquer toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir au groupe de suggestions de touches précédent.
          -

          Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants :

          -
            -
          • Windows/Linux
            • - -
          • Mac OS
            • -
          - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +

          Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants:

          +
            +
          • Windows/Linux
            • + +
          • Mac OS
            • +
          +
          Traitement du document
          Ouvrir le panneau "Fichier"Alt+F^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+FOuvrir le volet Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, afficher ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un existant, accéder à l'aide de l'Éditeur de Documents ou aux paramètres avancés.
          Ouvrir la fenêtre "Rechercher et remplacer"Ctrl+F^ Ctrl+F,
          ⌘ Cmd+F          		Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à chercher un caractère/mot/phrase dans le document actuellement édité.
          Ouvrir la fenêtre "Rechercher et remplacer" avec le champ de remplacementCtrl+H^ Ctrl+HOuvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés.
          Répéter la dernière action « Rechercher ».⇧ Shift+F4⇧ Shift+F4,
          ⌘ Cmd+G,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4          		Répéter l'action de Rechercher qui a été effectuée avant d'appuyer sur la combinaison de touches.
          Ouvrir le panneau "Commentaires"Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H          		Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs.
          Ouvrir le champ de commentairesAlt+H⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+AOuvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire.
          Ouvrir le panneau "Chat"Alt+Q^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+QOuvrir le panneau Chat et envoyer un message.
          Enregistrer le documentCtrl+S^ Ctrl+S,
          ⌘ Cmd+S          		Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document actuellement modifié à l'aide de l'Éditeur de Documents. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier.
          Imprimer le documentCtrl+P^ Ctrl+P,
          ⌘ Cmd+P          		Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier.
          Enregistrer (Télécharger comme)Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S          		Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme pour enregistrer le document actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
          Plein écranF11Passer à l'affichage plein écran pour adapter l'Éditeur de Documents à votre écran.
          Menu d'aideF1F1Ouvrir le menu Aide de l'Éditeur de Documents
          Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+OL'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant.
          Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+W,
          Ctrl+F4          		^ Ctrl+W,
          ⌘ Cmd+W          		Fermer la fenêtre du document en cours de modification dans Desktop Editors.
          Menu contextuel de l'élément⇧ Shift+F10⇧ Shift+F10Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné.
          Réinitialiser le niveau de zoomCtrl+0^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du document actuel par défaut à 100%.
          Navigation
          Sauter au début de la ligneDébutDébutPlacer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition.
          Sauter au début du documentCtrl+Début^ Ctrl+DébutPlacer le curseur au début du document en cours d'édition.
          Sauter à la fin de la ligneFinFinPlacer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition.
          Sauter à la fin du documentCtrl+Fin^ Ctrl+FinPlacer le curseur à la fin du document en cours d'édition.
          Sauter au début de la page précédenteAlt+Ctrl+Pg. précPlacez le curseur au tout début de la page qui précède la page en cours d'édition.
          Sauter au début de la page suivanteAlt+Ctrl+Pg. suiv⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Pg. suivPlacez le curseur au tout début de la page qui suit la page en cours d'édition.
          Faire défiler vers le basPg. suivPg. suiv,
          ⌥ Option+Fn+↑          		Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible.
          Faire défiler vers le hautPg. précPg. préc,
          ⌥ Option+Fn+↓          		Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible.
          Page suivanteAlt+Pg. suiv⌥ Option+Pg. suivPasser à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition.
          Page précédenteAlt+Pg. préc⌥ Option+Pg. précPasser à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition.
          Zoom avantCtrl++^ Ctrl+=,
          ⌘ Cmd+=          		Agrandir le zoom du document en cours d'édition.
          Zoom arrièreCtrl+-^ Ctrl+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+-          		Réduire le zoom du document en cours d'édition.
          Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche←←Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche.
          Déplacer un caractère vers la droite→→Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite.
          Déplacer vers le début d'un mot ou un mot vers la gaucheCtrl+←^ Ctrl+←,
          ⌘ Cmd+←          		Déplacer le curseur au début d'un mot ou d'un mot vers la gauche.
          Déplacer un caractère vers la droiteCtrl+→^ Ctrl+→,
          ⌘ Cmd+→          		Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite.
          Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑↑Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut.
          Déplacer une ligne vers le bas↓↓Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas.
          Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ TabNaviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux.
          Écriture
          Terminer le paragraphe↵ Entrée↵ RetourTerminer le paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau.
          Ajouter un saut de ligne⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée⇧ Shift+↵ RetourAjouter un saut de ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe.
          Supprimer← Retour arrière,
          Supprimer          		← Retour arrière,
          Supprimer          		Supprimer un caractère à gauche (← Retour arrière) ou vers la droite (Supprimer) du curseur.
          Supprimer le mot à gauche du curseurCtrl+← Retour arrière^ Ctrl+← Retour arrière,
          ⌘ Cmd+← Retour arrière          		Supprimer un mot à gauche du curseur.
          Supprimer le mot à droite du curseurCtrl+Supprimer^ Ctrl+Supprimer,
          ⌘ Cmd+Supprimer          		Supprimer un mot à droite du curseur.
          Créer un espace insécableCtrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace          		Créer un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante.
          Créer un trait d'union insécableCtrl+⇧ Shift+_^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union          		Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante.
          Annuler et Rétablir
          AnnulerCtrl+Z^ Ctrl+Z,
          ⌘ Cmd+Z          		Inverser la dernière action effectuée.
          RétablirCtrl+Y^ Ctrl+Y,
          ⌘ Cmd+Y,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z          		Répéter la dernière action annulée.
          Couper, Copier et Coller
          CouperCtrl+X,
          ⇧ Shift+Supprimer          		⌘ Cmd+X,
          ⇧ Shift+Supprimer          		Supprimer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme.
          CopierCtrl+C,
          Ctrl+Inser          		⌘ Cmd+CEnvoyer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme.
          CollerCtrl+V,
          ⇧ Shift+Inser          		⌘ Cmd+VInsérer le fragment du texte précédemment copié du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du texte. Le texte peut être copié précédemment à partir du même document, à partir d'un autre document, ou provenant d'un autre programme.
          Insérer un lien hypertexteCtrl+K⌘ Cmd+KInsérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web.
          Copier le styleCtrl+⇧ Shift+C⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+CCopier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre texte dans le même document.
          Appliquer le styleCtrl+⇧ Shift+V⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+VAppliquer la mise en forme précédemment copiée dans le texte du document en cours d'édition.
          Sélection de texte
          Sélectionner toutCtrl+A⌘ Cmd+ASélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images.
          Sélectionner une plage⇧ Shift+→ ←⇧ Shift+→ ←Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère.
          Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne⇧ Shift+Début⇧ Shift+DébutSélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle.
          Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne⇧ Shift+Fin⇧ Shift+FinSélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle.
          Sélectionner un caractère à droite⇧ Shift+→⇧ Shift+→Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur.
          Sélectionner un caractère à gauche⇧ Shift+←⇧ Shift+←Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur.
          Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un motCtrl+⇧ Shift+→Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin d'un mot.
          Sélectionner au début d'un motCtrl+⇧ Shift+←Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début d'un mot.
          Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut⇧ Shift+↑⇧ Shift+↑Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne).
          Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas⇧ Shift+↓⇧ Shift+↓Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne).
          Sélectionner la page vers le haut⇧ Shift+Pg. préc⇧ Shift+Pg. précSélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie supérieure de l'écran.
          Sélectionner la page vers le bas⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv⇧ Shift+Pg. suivSélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie inférieure de l'écran.
          Style de texte
          GrasCtrl+B^ Ctrl+B,
          ⌘ Cmd+B          		Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids.
          ItaliqueCtrl+I^ Ctrl+I,
          ⌘ Cmd+I          		Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite.
          SoulignéCtrl+U^ Ctrl+U,
          ⌘ Cmd+U          		Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
          BarréCtrl+5^ Ctrl+5,
          ⌘ Cmd+5          		Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
          IndiceCtrl+.^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+>          		Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques.
          ExposantCtrl+,^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+<          		Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions.
          Style Titre 1Alt+1⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Style Titre 2Alt+2⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Style Titre 3Alt+3⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Liste à pucesCtrl+⇧ Shift+L^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L          		Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste.
          Supprimer la mise en formeCtrl+␣ Barre d'espaceSupprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Agrandir la policeCtrl+]⌘ Cmd+]Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point.
          Réduire la policeCtrl+[⌘ Cmd+[Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point.
          Alignement centré/à gaucheCtrl+E^ Ctrl+E,
          ⌘ Cmd+E          		Passer de l'alignement centré à l'alignement à gauche.
          Justifié/à gaucheCtrl+J,
          Ctrl+L          		^ Ctrl+J,
          ⌘ Cmd+J          		Passer de l'alignement justifié à gauche.
          Alignement à droite/à gaucheCtrl+R^ Ctrl+R,
          ⌘ Cmd+R          		Passer de l'aligné à droite à l'aligné à gauche.
          Appliquer la mise en forme de l'indice (espacement automatique)Ctrl+=Appliquer la mise en forme d'indice au fragment de texte sélectionné.
          Appliquer la mise en forme d’exposant (espacement automatique)Ctrl+⇧ Shift++Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant au fragment de texte sélectionné.
          Insérer des sauts de pageCtrl+↵ Entrée^ Ctrl+↵ Retour,
          ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour          		Insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur.
          Augmenter le retraitCtrl+M^ Ctrl+M,
          ⌘ Cmd+M          		Augmenter le retrait gauche.
          Réduire le retraitCtrl+⇧ Shift+M^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M          		Diminuer le retrait gauche.
          Ajouter un numéro de pageCtrl+⇧ Shift+P^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P          		Ajoutez le numéro de page actuel à la position actuelle du curseur.
          Caractères non imprimablesCtrl+⇧ Shift+Num8Afficher ou masque l'affichage des caractères non imprimables.
          Supprimer un caractère à gauche← Retour arrière← Retour arrièreSupprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur.
          Supprimer un caractère à droiteSupprimerSupprimerSupprimer un caractère à droite du curseur.
          Modification des objets
          Limiter le déplacement⇧ Shift + faire glisser⇧ Shift + faire glisserLimiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement.
          Régler une rotation de 15 degrés⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation)⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation)Contraindre une rotation à un angle de 15 degrés.
          Conserver les proportions⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement)⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement)Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement.
          Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches)⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches)Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés.
          Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixelCtrl+← → ↑ ↓Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois.
          Utilisation des tableaux
          Passer à la cellule suivante d’une ligne↹ Tab↹ TabAller à la cellule suivante d'une ligne de tableau.
          Passer à la cellule précédente d'une ligne⇧ Shift+↹ Tab⇧ Shift+↹ TabAller à la cellule précédente d'une ligne de tableau.
          Passer à la ligne suivante↓↓Aller à la ligne suivante d'un tableau.
          Passer à la ligne précédente↑↑Aller à la ligne précédente d'un tableau.
          Commencer un nouveau paragraphe↵ Entrée↵ RetourCommencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule.
          Ajouter une nouvelle ligne↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau.↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau.Ajouter une nouvelle ligne au bas du tableau.
          Insérer un saut de tableauCtrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Retour,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Retour          		Insérer un saut de tableau dans le tableau.
          + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
          Travailler avec un document
          Ouvrir le panneau 'Fichier'Alt+F^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+FOuvrir le panneau Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, voir ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document existant, accéder au Centre d'aide de l'éditeur de documents ou aux paramètres avancés.
          Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer'Ctrl+F^ Ctrl+F,
          ⌘ Cmd+F          		Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à rechercher un caractère/un mot/une phrase dans le document en cours de modification.
          Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer' avec le champ de remplacementCtrl+H^ Ctrl+HOuvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés.
          Répéter la dernière action Rechercher.⇧ Maj+F4⇧ Maj+F4,
          ⌘ Cmd+G,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+F4          		Répéter la dernière recherche qui été effectuée avant on a appuyé sur la combinaison de touches.
          Ouvrir le panneau 'Commentaires'Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H          		Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs.
          Ouvrir le champ de commentairesAlt+H⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+AOuvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire.
          Ouvrir le panneau Chat (éditeurs en ligne)Alt+Q^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+QOuvrir le panneau Chat dans l'éditeur en ligne et envoyer un message:
          Enregistrer un documentCtrl+S^ Ctrl+S,
          ⌘ Cmd+S          		Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document en cours d'édition dans Document Editor. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier.
          Imprimer un documentCtrl+P^ Ctrl+P,
          ⌘ Cmd+P          		Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier.
          Télécharger comme...Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S          		Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme... pour enregistrer le document actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, DOCXF, OFORM, HTML, FB2, EPUB.
          Plein écran (éditeurs en ligne)F11Passer à l'affichage en plein écran dans les éditeurs en ligne pour adapter Document Editor à votre écran.
          Menu d'aideF1F1Ouvrir le menu Aide de Document Editor
          Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+ODans l'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant.
          Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+W,
          Ctrl+F4          		^ Ctrl+W,
          ⌘ Cmd+W          		Fermer la fenêtre du document actuel dans Desktop Editors.
          Menu contextuel de l'élément⇧ Maj+F10⇧ Maj+F10Ouvrir le menu contextuel pour l'élément sélectionné.
          Réinitialiser le niveau de zoomCtrl+0^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du document actuel par défaut à 100%.
          Navigation
          Sauter au début de la ligneDébutDébutPlacez le curseur au début de la ligne en cours de modification
          Sauter au début du documentCtrl+Début^ Ctrl+DébutPlacez le curseur au début du document en cours de modification.
          Sauter à la fin de la ligneEndEndPlacez le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours de modification.
          Sauter à la fin du documentCtrl+Fin^ Ctrl+FinPlacez le curseur à la fin du document en cours de modification.
          Sauter au début de la page précédenteAlt+Ctrl+Pg. précPlacez le curseur au début de la page qui précède la page en cours de modification.
          Sauter au début de la page suivanteAlt+Ctrl+Pg. suiv⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Pg. suivPlacez le curseur au début de la page qui suit la page en cours de modification.
          Faire défiler vers le basPg. suivPg. suiv,
          ⌥ Option+Fn+↑          		Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible.
          Faire défiler vers le hautPg. précPg. préc,
          ⌥ Option+Fn+↓          		Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible.
          Page suivanteAlt+Pg. suiv⌥ Option+Pg. suivPasser à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition.
          Page précédenteAlt+Pg. préc⌥ Option+Pg. précPasser à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition.
          Zoom avantCtrl++^ Ctrl+=,
          ⌘ Cmd+=          		Zoomer sur le document en cours d'édition
          Zoom arrièreCtrl+-^ Ctrl+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+-          		Dézoomer sur le document en cours d'édition
          Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche←←Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche.
          Déplacer un caractère vers la droite→→Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite.
          Rendre au début du mot ou déplacer d'un mot vers la gaucheCtrl+←^ Ctrl+←,
          ⌘ Cmd+←          		Déplacer le curseur au début du mot ou se déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche
          Déplacer d'un mot vers la droiteCtrl+→^ Ctrl+→,
          ⌘ Cmd+→          		Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite.
          Déplacer une ligne vers le haut↑↑Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut
          Déplacer une ligne vers le bas↓↓Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas.
          Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ TabNaviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux.
          Rédaction
          Fin du paragraphe↵ Entrée↵ RetourMettre fin au paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau paragraphe.
          Ajouter un saut de ligne⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée⇧ Maj+↵ RetourCréer une nouvelle ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe.
          Supprimer← Retour arrière,
          Supprimer          		← Retour arrière,
          Supprimer          		Supprimer un caractère à la gauche (← Retour arrière) ou à droite (Supprimer) du curseur.
          Supprimer le mot à gauche du curseurCtrl+← Retour arrière^ Ctrl+← Retour arrière,
          ⌘ Cmd+← Retour arrière          		Supprimer un mot à gauche du curseur.
          Supprimer le mot à droite du curseurCtrl+Supprimer^ Ctrl+Supprimer,
          ⌘ Cmd+Supprimer          		Supprimer un mot à droite du curseur.
          Créer un espace insécableCtrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Barre d'espace+␣ Barre d'espace          		Créer un espace entre les caractères qu'on ne peut pas utiliser pour commencer une nouvelle ligne.
          Créer un trait d'union insécableCtrl+⇧ Maj+_^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union          		Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qu'on ne peut pas utiliser pour commencer une nouvelle ligne.
          Annuler et Rétablir
          AnnulerCtrl+Z^ Ctrl+Z,
          ⌘ Cmd+Z          		Inverser la dernière action effectuée.
          RétablirCtrl+Y^ Ctrl+Y,
          ⌘ Cmd+Y,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Z          		Répéter la dernière action annulée.
          Couper, Copier et Coller
          CouperCtrl+X,
          ⇧ Maj+Supprimer          		⌘ Cmd+X,
          ⇧ Maj+Supprimer          		Supprimer le fragment du texte et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Il est possible d'insérer le texte copié dans un autre endroit du même document, dans un autre document ou dans une autre application.
          CopierCtrl+C,
          Ctrl+Inser          		⌘ Cmd+CEnvoyer le fragment du texte et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Il est possible d'insérer le texte copié dans un autre endroit du même document, dans un autre document ou dans une autre application.
          CollerCtrl+V,
          ⇧ Maj+Inser          		⌘ Cmd+VInsérer le fragment du texte copié auparavant du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. C'est d'abord possible de copier le texte dans le même document, un autre document, ou une autre application.
          Copiez du texte sans la mise en forme du styleCtrl+⇧ Maj+V,
          +           		⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+VInsérer le fragment du texte copié auparavant du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur sans utiliser la mise en forme de la source. C'est d'abord possible de copier le texte dans le même document, un autre document, ou une autre application.
          Insérer un lien hypertexteCtrl+K⌘ Cmd+KInsérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web.
          Copier le styleAlt+Ctrl+C⌘ Cmd+Alt+CCopier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre fragment du texte dans le même document.
          Appliquer du styleAlt+Ctrl+V⌘ Cmd+Alt+VAppliquer la mise en forme copiée au texte dans le document en cours d'édition.
          Séléction du texte
          Sélectionner toutCtrl+A⌘ Cmd+ASélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images.
          Sélectionner un fragment⇧ Maj+→ ←⇧ Maj+→ ←Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère.
          Sélectionner à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne⇧ Maj+Début⇧ Maj+DébutSélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle.
          Sélectionner à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne⇧ Maj+Fin⇧ Maj+FinSélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle.
          Sélectionnez un caractère à droite⇧ Maj+→⇧ Maj+→Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur.
          Sélectionnez un caractère à gauche⇧ Maj+←⇧ Maj+←Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur.
          Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un motCtrl+⇧ Maj+→Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin du mot.
          Sélectionner jusqu'au début d'un motCtrl+⇧ Maj+←Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début du mot.
          Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut⇧ Maj+↑⇧ Maj+↑Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne).
          Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas⇧ Maj+↓⇧ Maj+↓Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne).
          Sélectionner la page vers le haut⇧ Maj+Pg. préc⇧ Maj+Pg. précSélectionner le fragment de la page à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la partie supérieure de l'écran.
          Sélectionner la page vers le bas⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv⇧ Maj+Pg. suivSélectionner le fragment de la page à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la partie inférieure de l'écran.
          Appliquer des styles au texte
          GrasCtrl+B^ Ctrl+B,
          ⌘ Cmd+B          		Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids.
          ItaliqueCtrl+I^ Ctrl+I,
          ⌘ Cmd+I          		Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite.
          SoulignéCtrl+U^ Ctrl+U,
          ⌘ Cmd+U          		Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
          BarréCtrl+5^ Ctrl+5,
          ⌘ Cmd+5          		Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
          IndiceCtrl+.^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+>,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+>          		Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques.
          ExposantCtrl+,^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+<,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+<          		Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions.
          Style Titre 1Alt+1⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Style Titre 2Alt+2⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Style Titre 3Alt+3⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Liste à pucesCtrl+⇧ Maj+L^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L          		Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste.
          Supprimer la mise en formeCtrl+␣ Barre d'espaceSupprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné.
          Agrandir la policeCtrl+]⌘ Cmd+]Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point.
          Réduire la policeCtrl+[⌘ Cmd+[Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point.
          Alignement centré/à gaucheCtrl+E^ Ctrl+E,
          ⌘ Cmd+E          		Basculer entre l'alignement centré et l'alignement à gauche.
          Justifié/à gaucheCtrl+J,
          Ctrl+L          		^ Ctrl+J,
          ⌘ Cmd+J          		Basculer entre l'alignement justifié et l'alignement à gauche.
          Alignement à droite/à gaucheCtrl+R^ Ctrl+R,
          ⌘ Cmd+R          		Basculer entre l'alignement à droite et l'alignement à gauche.
          Appliquer la mise en forme de l'indice (espacement automatique)Ctrl+=Appliquer la mise en forme d'indice au fragment de texte sélectionné.
          Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant (espacement automatique)Ctrl+⇧ Maj++Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant au fragment de texte sélectionné.
          Insérer des sauts de pageCtrl+↵ Entrée^ Ctrl+↵ Retour,
          ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour          		Insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur.
          Augmenter le retraitCtrl+M^ Ctrl+M,
          ⌘ Cmd+M          		Augmenter le retrait de gauche par incrément.
          Réduire le retraitCtrl+⇧ Maj+M^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+M          		Diminuer le retrait de gauche par incrément.
          Ajouter un numéro de pageCtrl+⇧ Maj+P^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+P,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+P          		Ajouter le numéro de page actuel à la position actuelle du curseur.
          Caractères non imprimablesCtrl+⇧ Maj+Num8Afficher ou masque l'affichage des caractères non imprimables.
          Supprimer un caractère à gauche← Retour arrière← Retour arrièreSupprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur.
          Supprimer un caractère à droiteSupprimerSupprimerSupprimer un caractère à droite du curseur.
          Modification des objets
          Limiter le déplacement⇧ Maj + faire glisser⇧ Maj + faire glisserLimiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement.
          Régler une rotation de 15 degrés⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation)Limiter la rotation à à des incréments de 15 degrés.
          Conserver les proportions⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement)Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement.
          Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches)Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés.
          Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixelCtrl+← → ↑ ↓Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois.
          Utilisation des tableaux
          Déplacer vers la cellule suivante dans une ligne↹ Tab↹ TabPasser à la cellule suivante dans une ligne du tableau.
          Déplacer vers la cellule précédente dans une ligne⇧ Maj+↹ Tab⇧ Maj+↹ TabPasser à la cellule précédente dans une ligne du tableau.
          Passer à la ligne suivante↓↓Passer à la ligne suivante dans une ligne du tableau.
          Passer à la ligne précédente↑↑Passer à la ligne précédente dans une ligne du tableau.
          Commencer un nouveau paragraphe↵ Entrée↵ RetourCommencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule.
          Ajouter une nouvelle ligne↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau.↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau.Ajouter une nouvelle ligne en bas du tableau.
          Insérer un saut de tableauCtrl+⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↵ Retour,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+↵ Retour          		Insérer un saut de tableau dans le tableau.
          Insertion des caractères spéciaux
          Insérer une équationAlt+=⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+=Insérer une équation à la position actuelle du curseur.
          Insérer un tiret sur cadratinAlt+Ctrl+Verr.num-⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+-Insérer un tiret sur cadratin ‘—’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur.
          Insérer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union          		Insérer un trait d'union insécable ‘-’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur.
          Insérer un espace insécableCtrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace⌥ Option+␣ Barre d'espaceInsérer un espace insécable ‘o’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur.
          + + Insérer des caractères spéciaux + + + + Insérer une équation + Alt+= + ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= + Insérer une équation à la position actuelle du curseur. + + + Insérer un tiret sur cadratin + Alt+Ctrl+Num- + ⌥ Option+⇧ Maj+- + Insérer un tiret sur cadratin ‘—’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. + + + Insérer un tiret demi-cadratin + + ⌥ Option+- + Insérer un tiret demi-cadratin ‘-’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. + + + Insérer un trait d'union insécable + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+_ + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union + Insérer un trait d'union insécable ‘-’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. + + + Insérer un espace insécable + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace + ⌥ Option+␣ Barre d'espace + Insérer un espace insécable ‘o’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. + + + Insérer un symbole de copyright + Ctrl+Alt+G + ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G + Insérer symbole de copyright ‘©’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 0ed3739802..8e0db3ca86 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@  - Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation - - - - + Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation + + + + @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation

          -

          Document Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à visionner et naviguer à travers votre document: le zoom, l'indicateur de numéro de page etc.

          +

          L'éditeur des documents vous propose plusieurs outils pour vous aider à afficher et naviguer à travers votre document: le zoom, l'indicateur de numéro de page etc.

          Régler les paramètres d'affichage

          Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec un document, passez à l'onglet Affichage et choisissez d'afficher ou de masquer les éléments d'interface. Les options disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage: @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@

          Régler les paramètres d'affichage

          Pour naviguer à travers votre document, utilisez les outils suivants:

          - Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail.. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage. + Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail.. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage.

          Numéro de page affiche la page active dans l'ensemble des pages du document actif (page 'n' sur 'nn'). Cliquez sur ce libellé pour ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la page et y accéder rapidement.

          Statistiques affiche des informations statistiques sur votre document.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Password.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Password.htm index a641919f0c..bfbd9629e9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Password.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Password.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Protéger un document avec un mot de passe - + @@ -17,18 +17,18 @@

          Protéger un document avec un mot de passe

          Vous pouvez protéger vos documents avec un mot de passe afin que tous les coauteurs puissent d'accéder en mode d'édition. On peut modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe, le cas échéant.

          -

          Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

          +

          Ce n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

          Il est également possible de protéger vos documents en limitant l'accès.

          Définir un mot de passe

          • - passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. -

            ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer.

            + passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un mot de passe afin d'ouvrir la fenêtre, +

            ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer.

          • définissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous. Cliquez sur
            pour afficher ou masquer les caractères lors de la saisie. -

            définissez le mot de passe

            +

            Définir le mot de passe

          • Cliquez sur OK pour valider. @@ -39,12 +39,11 @@

            Définir un mot de passe

            Modifier le mot de passe

            • - passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. + passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un mot de passe afin d'ouvrir la fenêtre,

              ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer.

            • définissez le nouveau mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous. Cliquez sur
              pour afficher ou masquer les caractères lors de la saisie.
              • -
            • cliquez sur le bouton Modifier un mot de passe.
              • -
            • saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK.
              • +
            • cliquez sur OK.

            Modifier le mot de passe

            @@ -58,24 +57,24 @@

            Supprimer le mot de passe

            Protéger un document

            • passez à l'onglet Protection,
              • -
            • cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document
              • +
            • cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document,
            • le cas échéant, définissez le mot de passe,
            • sélectionnez les permissions d'accès appropriées au document si l'utilisateur n'a pas encore saisi le mot de passe:
                -
              • Aucune modification (lecture seule) - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le document.
                • +
              • Aucune modification (lecture seule) - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le document.
              • Remplissage des formulaires - l'utilisateur peut uniquement remplir le formulaire.
                • -
              • Modifications - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le suivi de modifications du document.
                • +
              • Modifications - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le suivi de modifications du document.
              • Commentaires - l'utilisateur peut uniquement commenter ou répondre au commentaires.

              Définir un mot de passe

            • cliquez sur Protéger pour valider.
            -

            Pour supprimer la protection du document protégé par un mot de passe,

            +

            Pour supprimer la protection du document protégé par un mot de passe,

            • passez à l'onglet Protection,
              • -
            • cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document
              • +
            • cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document,
            • saisissez le mot de passe dans la fenêtre Déprotéger le document.
            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Review.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Review.htm index a105f62e8a..5c51251ae8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Review.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Review.htm @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@
            - +

            Réviser des documents

            -

            Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, comparer et fusionner pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

            +

            Léditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, comparer et fusionner pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

            Lorsque quelqu'un disposant des autorisations de révision partage avec vous un fichier, vous devez utiliser la fonction Révision du document.

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, si vous êtes le relecteur, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Révision pour réviser le document, modifier des propositions, des phrases et d'autres éléments de la page, corriger l'orthographe et faire d'autres modifications dans le document sans l'éditer. Toutes vos modifications seront enregistrées et montrées à la personne qui vous a envoyé le document.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de documents, si vous êtes le relecteur, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Révision pour réviser le document, modifier des propositions, des phrases et d'autres éléments de la page, corriger l'orthographe et faire d'autres modifications dans le document sans l'éditer. Toutes vos modifications seront enregistrées et montrées à la personne qui vous a envoyé le document.

            Si vous êtes la personne qui envoie le fichier pour la révision, vous devrez afficher toutes les modifications qui y ont été apportées, les afficher et les accepter ou les rejeter.

            Activer la fonctionnalité Suivi des modifications

            Pour voir les modifications suggérées par un réviseur, activez l'option Suivi des modifications de l'une des manières suivantes :

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 523ab7c98f..55c928bb4e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Fonction de recherche et remplacement + Fonctions de recherche et remplacement - + @@ -14,146 +14,143 @@
            -

            Fonction de recherche et remplacement

            -

            Pour rechercher des caractères, des mots ou des phrases utilisés dans le document, cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre latérale gauche de l'Éditeur de Documents, sur l'icône située au coin droit en haut ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Command+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir le petit panneau Recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H pour ouvrir le panneau complet Recherche.

            -

            Un petit panneau Recherche s'affiche au coin droit en haut de la zone de travail.

            -

            Petit panneau Recherche

            -

            Afin d'accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H.

            -

            La fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche :

            +

            Fonctions de recherche et remplacement

            +

            Pour rechercher des caractères nécessaires, des mots ou des phrases dans dans le document en cours de modification, cliquez sur l'icône sur la barre latérale gauche de l'éditeur de documents, l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Commande+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir la petite barre de recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+ H pour ouvrir le plein panneau de recherche.

            +

            Une petite barre Recherche apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de l'espace de travail. La barre inclut le champ de saisie de la requête de recherche, affiche le nombre de résultats de recherche et les contrôles pour basculer entre le résultat précédent ou suivant et masquer la barre.

            +

            Petite barre Recherche

            +

            Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône ou utilisez la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H.

            +

            Le panneau Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche.

            Fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer

              -
            1. Saisissez votre enquête dans le champ de saisie correspondant Recherche.
              2. -
            2. Si vous avez besoin de remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères saisis, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie correspondant Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer l'occurrence actuellement sélectionnée ou remplacer toutes les occurrences en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants Remplacer et Remplacer tout.
              3. -
            3. Afin de parcourir les occurrences trouvées, cliquez sur un des boutons à flèche. Le bouton
              affiche l'occurrence suivante, le bouton
              ) affiche l'occurrence précédente.
              4. +
            4. Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans le champ de saisie Rechercher.
              5. +
            5. S'il vous faut remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer une seule occurrence qui est mise en surbrillance ou toutes occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant Remplacer ou Remplacer tout.
              6. +
            6. Pour naviguer à travers des occurrences, cliquez sur les boutons fléchés. Le bouton
              affiche l'occurrence suivante et le bouton
              affiche l'occurrence précédente.
            7. - Spécifiez les paramètres de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires au-dessous du champ de saisie : -
                -
              • Sensible à la casse - sert à trouver les occurrences saisies de la même casse (par exemple, si votre enquête est 'Editeur' et cette option est sélectionnée, les mots tels que 'éditeur' ou 'EDITEUR' etc. ne seront pas trouvés).
                • -
              • Seulement les mots entiers - sert à surligner les mots entiers uniquement.
                • -
              + Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées en dessous du champ de saisie: +
                +
              • Sensible aux caractères sert à passer toutes les occurrences tenant compte de la casse (par exemple, quand vous rechercher le mot «Éditeur», les mots «éditeur» et «ÉDITEUR» ne sont pas affichés).
                • +
              • Mots entiers uniquement set à mettre en surbrillance uniquement des mots entiers.
                • +
            -

            Toutes les occurrences seront mises en surbrillance dans le fichier et affichées sous forme de liste dans le panneau gauche Recherche. Utilisez la liste pour passer à l'occurrence requise ou utilisez les boutons de navigation et .

            -

            Éditeur de Documents prend en charge la recherche de caractères spéciaux. Pour rechercher un caractère spécial, saisissez-le dans le champ de recherche.

            -
            - La liste des caractères spéciaux qu'on peut utiliser dans une requête - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
            Caractère spécialDescription
            ^lSaut de ligne
            ^tTaquet de tabulation
            ^?Tout symbole
            ^#Tout chiffre
            ^$Toute lettre
            ^nSaut de colonne
            ^eNote de fin
            ^fNote de bas de page
            ^gÉlément graphique
            ^mSaut de page
            ^~Trait d'union insécable
            ^sEspace insécable
            ^^Échappement du caret lui-même
            ^wTout espace
            ^+Tiret cadratin
            ^=Tiret demi-cadratin
            ^yTout tiret
            -
            -
            - Les caractères qu'on peut utiliser pour remplacement : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
            Caractère spécialDescription
            ^lSaut de ligne
            ^tTaquet de tabulation
            ^nSaut de colonne
            ^mSaut de page
            ^~Trait d'union insécable
            ^sEspace insécable
            ^+Tiret cadratin
            ^=Tiret demi-cadratin
            -
            +

            Toutes les occurrences seront mises en surbrillance dans le fichier et seront affichés sous forme de liste sur le panneau Recherche de gauche. Utilisez la liste pour basculer vers l'occurrence recherchée ou utilisez les boutons de navigation et .

            +

            L'éditeur de documents prend en charge la recherche de caractères spéciaux. Pour rechercher un caractère spécial, saisissez-le dans le champ de recherche.

            +
            La liste des caractères spéciaux qu'on peut utiliser dans une requête: + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
            Caractère spécialDescription
            ^lSaut de ligne
            ^tTaquet de tabulation
            ^?Tout symbole
            ^#Tout chiffre
            ^$Toute lettre
            ^nSaut de colonne
            ^eNote de fin
            ^fNote de bas de page
            ^gÉlément graphique
            ^mSaut de page
            ^~Trait d'union insécable
            ^sEspace insécable
            ^^Échappement du caret lui-même
            ^wTout espace
            ^+Tiret cadratin
            ^=Tiret demi-cadratin
            ^yTout tiret
            +
            Les caractères qu'on peut utiliser pour remplacement: + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
            Caractère spécialDescription
            ^lSaut de ligne
            ^tTaquet de tabulation
            ^nSaut de colonne
            ^mSaut de page
            ^~Trait d'union insécable
            ^sEspace insécable
            ^+Tiret cadratin
            ^=Tiret demi-cadratin
            +
            -
            + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm index 753e73a089..42dc0fd8ee 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Vérification de l'orthographe

            -

            Éditeur de Documents vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte saisi dans une certaine langue et corriger des fautes lors de l'édition. L'édition de bureau de tous les trois éditeurs permet d'ajouter les mots au dictionnaire personnel.

            +

            L'éditeur de documents vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte saisi dans une certaine langue et corriger des fautes lors de l'édition. L'édition de bureau de tous les trois éditeurs permet d'ajouter les mots au dictionnaire personnel.

            À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en charge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page.

            Tout d'abord, choisissez la langue pour tout le document. cliquer sur l'icône Définir la langue du document dans la barre d'état. Dans la fenêtre ouverte sélectionnez la langue nécessaire et cliquez sur OK. La langue sélectionnée sera appliquée à tout le document.

            Définir la langue du document

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 9983117c67..2b66eb2ce1 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -1,37 +1,34 @@  - Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge - - - - + Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge + + + + - - -
            + + +

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - Les documents électroniques représentent l'un des types des fichiers les plus utilisés en informatique. - Grâce à l'utilisation du réseau informatique tant développé aujourd'hui, il est possible et plus pratique de distribuer des documents électroniques que des versions imprimées. - Les formats de fichier ouverts et propriétaires sont bien nombreux à cause de la variété des périphériques utilisés pour la présentation des documents. - Éditeur de Documents prend en charge les formats les plus populaires. + Les documents électroniques représentent l'un des types des fichiers les plus utilisés en informatique. Grâce à l'utilisation du réseau informatique tant développé aujourd'hui, il est possible et plus pratique de distribuer des documents électroniques que des versions imprimées. Les formats de fichier ouverts et propriétaires sont bien nombreux à cause de la variété des périphériques utilisés pour la présentation des documents. L'éditeur de documents prend en charge les formats les plus populaires.

            Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Open Office XML (DOCX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données.

            Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition.

            - - - - - +
            FormatsDescriptionAffichage au format natif
            + + + + - + - + @@ -40,30 +37,30 @@

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - - - + + + - - + + - + - + - - + + - + - + @@ -88,14 +85,22 @@

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - + + @@ -104,17 +109,25 @@

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + @@ -144,22 +157,54 @@

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - + + + + + - - + + @@ -168,16 +213,16 @@

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - - - + + + - - -
            FormatsDescriptionAffichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXMLÉdition au format natifÉdition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML
            DjVu Le format de fichier conçu principalement pour stocker les documents numérisés, en particulier ceux qui contiennent une combinaison du texte, des dessins au trait et des photographies
            DOCL'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word
            DOCL'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word + +
            +
            DOCMMacro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document
            Une extension de fichier Microsoft Word 2007 ou version ultérieure comportant des macros incorporées pouvant être exécutées dans le document.             		Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document
            Une extension de fichier Microsoft Word 2007 ou version ultérieure comportant des macros incorporées pouvant être exécutées dans le document.            		 + +
            DOCXOffice Open XML
            Le format de fichier compressé basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des feuilles de calcul et les graphiques, les présentations et les document du traitement textuel            		+Office Open XML
            Le format de fichier compressé basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des feuilles de calcul et les graphiques, les présentations et les document du traitement textuel            		+ ++
            DOCXF Le format pour créer, modifier et collaborer sur un Modèle de formulaire. +
            FB2Une extension de livres électroniques qui peut être lancé par votre ordinateur ou appareil mobile
            FB2Une extension de livres électroniques qui peut être lancé par votre ordinateur ou appareil mobile++
            FODTOpenDocument Flat XML
            Un document texte sauvegardé dans le format OpenDocument format, mais stocké comme un document XML brut au lieu du conteneur .ZIP qui est utilisé avec des fichier .ODT.            		 + +
            +
            HTML HyperText Markup Language
            Le principale langage de balisage pour les pages web            		 +
            ODTLe format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques
            MHTMLMIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML
            Un format d'archivage du web, l'archive comporte tout le contenu d'une page web.            		++
            ODTLe format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques + +
            +
            OFORMLe format pour remplir un formulaire. Les champs du formulaire sont à remplir mais les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas modifier la mise en forme ou les paramètres des éléments du formulaire.*Le format pour remplir un formulaire. Des champs du formulaire sont modifiables mais on ne peut pas modifier la mise en forme ou configurer les paramètres des éléments du formulaire. + +
            RTFRich Text Format
            Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents
            RTFRich Text Format
            Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents            		++
            STWStarOffice Document Template
            Un format de fichier destiné au sauvegarde des documents de traitement du texte dans OpenOffice.org Writer. Il est possible d'éditer un fichier STW à l'aide de tout logiciel prenant en charge le format OpenDocument (ODF). Les fichiers STW comprennent du texte, des images et tout autre information de mise en forme.            		++
            SXWStarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document
            Un format de fichiers texte inclus dans la suite StarOffice suite qui est basé sur le format OpenDocument XML format est compatible avec Apache OpenOffice (anciennement OpenOffice.org) Writer, succède à StarOffice Writer.            		++
            TXTL'extension de nom de fichier pour les fichiers de texte contenant habituellement une mise en forme minimale++
            WPSMicrosoft Works Word Processor Text Document
            Un format du document texte créé par Microsoft Works Word Processor, le logiciel de traitement de texte qui est remplacé par Microsoft Word. Fichiers WPS ressemblent aux files documents Word, mais moins d'options de mise en forme sont disponibles.            		 + +
            TXTL'extension de nom de fichier pour les fichiers de texte contenant habituellement une mise en forme minimale+
            WPTWordPerfect Text Document
            Un fichier texte avec l'extension .wpt extension est sauvegardé au format binaire et comprend du texte, des graphiques, des images, des tableaux et d'autres informations textuelles.            		 + +
            +
            XML Extensible Markup Language (XML).
            Le langage de balisage extensible est une forme restreinte d'application du langage de balisage généralisé standard SGM (ISO 8879) conçu pour stockage et traitement de données.            		 +
            XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
            Le format ouvert de la mise en page fixe, libre de redevance créé par Microsoft
            XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
            Le format ouvert de la mise en page fixe, libre de redevance créé par Microsoft            		 +
            -

            *Remarque : le format OFORM c'est un format qui sert à remplir un formulaire. Alors, ce sont des champs du formulaire qui sont modifiables.

            + + + +

            *Remarque: le format OFORM c'est un format qui sert à remplir un formulaire. Alors, ce sont des champs du formulaire qui sont modifiables.

            Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'un document dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme.

            @@ -186,75 +231,99 @@

            Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + + + + + - + + + + + - + - + - + - + - + - + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - +
            DjVuDjVu, PDFDjVu, JPG, PDF, PDF/A, PNG
            DOCDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            DOCMDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            DOCXDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            DOCXFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            DOTXDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            EPUBDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            FB2DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            FODTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            HTMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            MHTMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            ODTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            OFORMDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            OTTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            PDFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            PDF/ADOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            RTFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            STWDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            SXWDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            WPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            WPTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            XMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
            XPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT, XPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT

            Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos documents dans des formats les plus populaires.

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm index b80bf10219..dae1f51073 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
            - +

            Historique des versions

            -

            Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Documents vous pouvez afficher l'historique des versions du document sur lequel vous collaborez.

            +

            L'éditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de documents vous pouvez afficher l'historique des versions du document sur lequel vous collaborez.

            Afficher l'historique des versions :

            Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées au document,

              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Viewer.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Viewer.htm index dce9119a91..5a62bac9a8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Viewer.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Viewer.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE

            -

            Vous pouvez utiliser Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE pour ouvrir et parcourir des fichiers PDF, XPS et DjVu.

            +

            Vous pouvez utiliser le lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE pour ouvrir et parcourir des fichiers PDF, XPS et DjVu.

            Le lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE permet de :

            • consulter des fichiers PDF, XPS, DjVu,
              • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0d4e296938 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Onglet Dessiner + + + + + + + + +
              +
              + +
              +

              Onglet Dessiner

              +

              L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de documents permet d'effectuer les opérations dessin de base.

              +
              +

              L'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne:

              +

              Onglet Dessiner

              +
              +
              +

              L'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau:

              +

              Onglet Dessiner

              +
              +

              En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

              +
                +
              • utiliser l'outil de sélection pour redimensionner ou supprimer l'inscription, le dessin et la mise en surbrillance,
                • +
              • utiliser l'outil Stylo et Surligneur pour dessiner ou ajouter les notes manuscrites ou la mise en surbrillance,
                • +
              • utiliser l'outil Gomme pour effacer le dessin entier ou le texte manuscrit.
                • +
              +
              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 0546c606e2..19f25f9272 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

            Onglet Fichier

            -

            L'onglet Fichier dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

            +

            L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de documents permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

            -

            Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne :

            +

            Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne :

            Onglet Fichier

            -

            Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau :

            +

            Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau :

            Onglet Fichier

            En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm index b2d5fd1426..592fc9f2a5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm @@ -16,13 +16,13 @@

            Onglet Formulaires

            Remarque: cet ongle est disponible uniquement avec des fichiers au format DOCXF.

            -

            L'onglet Formulaires permet de créer des formulaires à remplir dans votre document, par ex. les projets de contrats ou les enquêtes. Ajoutez, mettez en forme et paramétrez votre texte et des champs de formulaire aussi complexe soit-il.

            +

            L'onglet Formulaires dans l'éditeur de documents permet de créer des formulaires à remplir dans votre document, par ex. les projets de contrats ou les enquêtes. Ajoutez, mettez en forme et paramétrez votre texte et des champs de formulaire aussi complexe soit-il.

            -

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans Document Editor en ligne:

            +

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne:

            Onglet Formulaires

            -

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans Document Editor de bureau:

            +

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau:

            Onglet Formulaires

            En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index 30ae9b514b..ce5e0033ab 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

            Onglet Accueil

            -

            L'onglet Accueil dans l'Éditeur de Documents s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez un document. Il permet de formater la police et les paragraphes. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que Fusion et publipostage et le jeu de couleurs.

            +

            L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de documents s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez un document. Il permet de formater la police et les paragraphes. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que Fusion et publipostage et le jeu de couleurs.

            -

            Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne :

            +

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents en ligne :

            Onglet Accueil

            -

            Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau :

            +

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents de bureau :

            Onglet Accueil

            En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 1e9aea8e76..deabaec4ec 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

            Onglet Insertion

            -

            L'onglet Insertion dans Document Editor permet d'ajouter des éléments de mise en forme de la page, des objets visuels et des commentaires.

            +

            L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de documents permet d'ajouter des éléments de mise en forme de la page, des objets visuels et des commentaires.

            -

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans Document Editor en ligne:

            +

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne:

            Onglet Insertion

            -

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans Document Editor de bureau:

            +

            La fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau:

            Onglet Insertion

            En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index 9bb40a3c87..ce9023ab12 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

            Onglet Mise en page

            -

            L'onglet Mise en page dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la mise en page des éléments visuels.

            +

            L'onglet Mise en page dans l'éditeur de documents permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la mise en page des éléments visuels.

            -

            Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne :

            +

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents en ligne :

            Onglet Mise en page

            -

            Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau :

            +

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents de bureau :

            Onglet Mise en page

            En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 6bed553f08..a29ed9708c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

            Onglet Modules complémentaires

            -

            L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

            +

            L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de documents permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

            -

            Fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne :

            +

            Fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de documents en ligne :

            Onglet Modules complémentaires

            -

            Fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau :

            +

            Fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de documents de bureau :

            Onglet Modules complémentaires

            Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer tous les modules complémentaires installés et ajouter vos propres modules.

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 1df30441bd..d86a97b213 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de Document Editor + Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de documents @@ -14,15 +14,15 @@
            -

            Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de Document Editor

            -

            Document Editor utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

            +

            Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de documents

            +

            L'éditeur de documents utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

            -

            La fenêtre principale de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor:

            -

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor

            +

            La fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de documents en ligne:

            +

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents en ligne

            -

            La fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor:

            -

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor

            +

            La fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de documents de bureau:

            +

            Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents de bureau

            L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants:

              @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@

              Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de Document Editor

            1. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes:
              • - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer,
                • -
              • - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires,
                • +
              • - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires,
              • - permet de passer au panneau En-têtes et gérer des en-têtes,
              • - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne ) permet d'ouvrir le panneau Chat,
              • - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne ) permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique,
                • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm index 36d0b0c270..7325abbe9e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

                Onglet Protection

                -

                L'onglet Protection dans Document Editor permet de protéger vos documents par un mot de passe et gérer des droits d'accès.

                +

                L'onglet Protection dans l'éditeur de documents permet de protéger vos documents par un mot de passe et gérer des droits d'accès.

                -

                La fenêtre de l'onglet dans Document Editor en ligne:

                +

                La fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne:

                Onglet Protection

                -

                La fenêtre de l'onglet dans Document Editor de bureau:

                +

                La fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau:

                Onglet Protection

                En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm index 4c74d83168..bb3981e004 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

                Onglet Références

                -

                L'onglet Références dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer différents types de références : ajouter et rafraîchir une table des matières, créer et éditer des notes de bas de page, insérer des hyperliens.

                +

                L'onglet Références dans l'éditeur de documents permet de gérer différents types de références : ajouter et rafraîchir une table des matières, créer et éditer des notes de bas de page, insérer des hyperliens.

                -

                Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne :

                +

                Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents en ligne :

                Onglet Références

                -

                Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau :

                +

                Fenêtre de l'éditeur de documents de bureau :

                Onglet Références

                En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm index 4c1385a6af..d046cdbb08 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

                Onglet Collaboration

                -

                L'onglet Collaboration dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires, suivre les modifications apportées par un réviseur, visualiser toutes les versions et révisions. En mode Commentaires vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer des commentaires, naviguer entre les modifications suivies, utilisez le chat intégré et afficher l'historique des versions. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez gérer les commentaires et utiliser la fonction Suivi des modifications.

                +

                L'onglet Collaboration dans l'éditeur de documents permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires, suivre les modifications apportées par un réviseur, visualiser toutes les versions et révisions. En mode Commentaires vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer des commentaires, naviguer entre les modifications suivies, utilisez le chat intégré et afficher l'historique des versions. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez gérer les commentaires et utiliser la fonction Suivi des modifications.

                -

                Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne :

                +

                Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne :

                Onglet Collaboration

                -

                Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau :

                +

                Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau :

                Onglet Collaboration

                En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index cf783550b8..5a3281ac13 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -16,14 +16,14 @@

                Onglet Affichage

                - L'onglet Affichage de Document Editor permet de gérer l'apparence du document pendant que vous travaillez sur celui-ci. + L'onglet Affichage de l'éditeur de documents permet de gérer l'apparence du document pendant que vous travaillez sur celui-ci.

                -

                L'onglet dans l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor:

                +

                L'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne:

                Onglet Affichage

                -

                L'onglet dans l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor:

                +

                L'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau:

                Onglet Affichage

                Les options d'affichage disponibles sous cet onglet:

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm index de0013cb55..fc85c5d0a0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                Ajouter des bordures

                -

                Pour ajouter des bordures à un paragraphe, à une page ou à tout le document dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

                +

                Pour ajouter des bordures à un paragraphe, à une page ou à tout le document dans l'éditeur de documents,

                1. placez le curseur dans le paragraphe voulu, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris ou tout le texte en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A,
                2. cliquez sur le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite,
                  3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm index 341069da2d..3f6bdbda85 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@

                  Ajouter une légende

                  La légende est une étiquette agrafée que vous pouvez appliquer à un objet, comme des tableaux d'équations, des figures et des images dans vos documents.

                  Cela facilite la référence dans votre texte car il y a une étiquette facilement reconnaissable sur votre objet.

                  Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les légendes pour créer des tableaux des figures.

                  -

                  Pour ajouter une légende à un objet dans l'Éditeur de Documents :

                  +

                  Pour ajouter une légende à un objet dans l'éditeur de documents :

                  • Sélectionnez l'objet à appliquer une légende ;
                  • Passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure ;
                    • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm index 60cbcae96b..d3af6833c5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                    Utiliser des formules dans les tableaux

                    Insérer une formule

                    -

                    Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez effectuer des calculs simples sur les données des cellules de table en ajoutant des formules. Pour insérer une formule dans une cellule du tableau,

                    +

                    Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez effectuer des calculs simples sur les données des cellules de table en ajoutant des formules. Pour insérer une formule dans une cellule du tableau,

                    1. placez le curseur dans la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
                    2. cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une formule dans la barre latérale de droite,
                      3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm index 34584d1d1e..a418f056ee 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                      Ajouter des liens hypertextes

                      -

                      Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

                      +

                      Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte dans l'éditeur de documents,

                      1. placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer un lien hypertexte,
                      2. passez à l'onglet Insérer ou Références de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                        3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddTableofFigures.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddTableofFigures.htm index 2caa98745b..c8a810741e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddTableofFigures.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddTableofFigures.htm @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@

                        Insérer et mettre en forme un tableau des figures

                        Un tableau des figures permet de répertorier toutes les équations, les graphiques et les tableaux accompagnant votre document. Un tableau des figures, au même titre qu'une table des matières, permet d'obtenir la liste des illustrations et d'organiser des objets légendés ou des en-têtes personnalisés avec un certain style de mise en forme. Les illustrations organisées de telle façon sont facile à citer et retrouver. Cliquez sur le lien dans le Tableau des figures mise sous forme de liens pour accéder à l'élément référencé. Tous les tableaux, les équations, les diagrammes, les images, les graphiques, les cartes, les photos et d'autres illustrations sont présentées en tant qu'une figure.

                        L'onglet Références

                        -

                        Pour insérer un Tableau des figures dans l'Éditeur de Documents passez à l'onglet Références et utilisez le bouton Tableau des figures dans la barre d'outils supérieure pour créer et mettre en forme le tableau des figures. Utiliser le bouton Actualiser pour mettre à jour le tableau des figures à chaque fois que vous ajoutez une nouvelle illustration à votre document.

                        +

                        Pour insérer un Tableau des figures dans l'éditeur de documents passez à l'onglet Références et utilisez le bouton Tableau des figures dans la barre d'outils supérieure pour créer et mettre en forme le tableau des figures. Utiliser le bouton Actualiser pour mettre à jour le tableau des figures à chaque fois que vous ajoutez une nouvelle illustration à votre document.

                        Créer un tableau des figures

                        Remarque : Pour créer un tableau des figures vous devez légender chaque figure ou la personnaliser avec un style de mise en forme. Avant de créer un tableau des figures, vous devez ajouter une légende à chaque équation, tableau ou illustration de votre document ou appliquer un style de texte afin que l'éditeur puisse créer automatiquement le tableau des figures.

                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm index e055b208f0..383acff800 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                          Ajouter un filigrane

                          Le filigrane est un texte ou une image placé sous le calque de texte principal. Les filigranes de texte permettent d'indiquer l'état de votre document (par exemple, confidentiel, brouillon, etc.), les filigranes d'image permettent d'ajouter une image par exemple de logo de votre entreprise.

                          -

                          Pour ajouter un filigrane dans l'Éditeur de Documents :

                          +

                          Pour ajouter un filigrane dans l'éditeur de documents :

                          1. Basculez vers l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                          2. Cliquez sur l'icône
                            Filigrane sur la barre d'outils supérieure et choisissez l'option Filigrane personnalisé du menu. Après cela, la fenêtre Paramètres du filigrane apparaîtra.
                            3. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@

                            Ajouter un filigrane

                            Paramètres du filigrane

                            • - Langue - sélectionnez la langue de votre filigrane. L'Éditeur de Documents prend en charge des langues suivantes de filigrane : Anglais, Français, Allemand, Italien, Japonais, Mandarin, Russe, Espagnol.
                              • + Langue - sélectionnez la langue de votre filigrane. L'éditeur de documents prend en charge des langues suivantes de filigrane : Anglais, Français, Allemand, Italien, Japonais, Mandarin, Russe, Espagnol.
                            • Texte - Sélectionnez l'un des exemples de texte disponibles de la langue sélectionnée. Pour le français les textes de filigrane suivants sont disponibles : BROUILLON, CONFID, COPIE, DOCUMENT INTERNE, EXEMPLE, HAUTEMENT CONFIDENTIEL, IMPORTANT, NE PAS DIFFUSER,
                            • Police - Sélectionnez le nom et la taille de la police des listes déroulantes correspondantes. Utilisez les icônes à droite pour définir la couleur de la police ou appliquez l'un des styles de décoration de police: Gras, Italique, Souligné, Barré,
                            • Semi-transparent - Cochez cette case si vous souhaitez appliquer la transparence,
                              • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm index e062a6e03d..5f1be54adf 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                              Aligner et organiser des objets sur une page

                              -

                              Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les formes automatiques, les images, les graphiques ou les zones de texte ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés et ordonnés sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner une zone de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel.

                              +

                              Dans l'éditeur de documents, les formes automatiques, les images, les graphiques ou les zones de texte ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés et ordonnés sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner une zone de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel.

                              Aligner des objets

                              Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés,

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm index 95c4555b17..70fb0a8255 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                Alignement du texte d'un paragraphe

                                -

                                Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, le texte peut être aligné de quatre façons : aligné à gauche, au centre, aligné à droite et justifié. Pour le faire,

                                +

                                Dans l'éditeur de documents, le texte peut être aligné de quatre façons : aligné à gauche, au centre, aligné à droite et justifié. Pour le faire,

                                1. placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi ),
                                2. passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm index c5cd00fb3f..10726dcd86 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                  Sélectionner la couleur d'arrière-plan pour un paragraphe

                                  -

                                  Dans Éditeur de Documents, la couleur d'arrière-plan est appliquée au paragraphe entier et remplit complètement l'espace du paragraphe de la marge de page gauche à la marge de page droite.

                                  +

                                  Dans l'éditeur de documents, la couleur d'arrière-plan est appliquée au paragraphe entier et remplit complètement l'espace du paragraphe de la marge de page gauche à la marge de page droite.

                                  Pour appliquer la couleur d'arrière-plan au paragraphe particulier ou changer la couleur actuelle,

                                  1. sélectionnez un jeu de couleurs pour votre document à partir des modèles disponibles en cliquant sur l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs
                                    dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure
                                    2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm index 1623dd2dd0..3b293f0b71 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Modifier le jeu de couleurs - + @@ -15,18 +15,26 @@

                                    Modifier le jeu de couleurs

                                    -

                                    Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les jeux de couleurs s'appliquent au document entier. Utilisés pour le changement rapide de l'apparence de votre document, les jeux de couleurs définissent la palette Couleurs de thème pour les éléments du document (police, arrière-plan, tableaux, formes automatiques, graphiques). Si vous appliquez des Couleurs de thèmes aux éléments du document et sélectionnez un nouveau Jeu de couleurs, les couleurs appliquées aux éléments de votre document, par conséquent, seront modifiées.

                                    -

                                    Pour modifier le jeu de couleurs, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le jeu de couleurs voulu parmi les variantes disponibles : New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urban, Verve.

                                    -

                                    Jeu de couleurs

                                    -

                                    Lorsque le jeu de couleurs est sélectionné, vous pouvez choisir des couleurs dans une fenêtre de palettes de couleurs qui vont correspondre à l'élément auquel vous souhaitez appliquer la couleur. Pour la plupart des éléments du document, la fenêtre des palettes de couleurs est accessible en cliquant sur la case colorée dans la barre latérale droite lorsque l'élément est sélectionné. Pour la police, cette fenêtre peut être ouverte à l'aide de la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Couleur de police de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les palettes suivantes sont disponibles :

                                    +

                                    Les jeux de couleurs sont appliqués au document entier. L'éditeur de documents, permet de modifier rapidement l'aspect de votre document et définir la palette de Couleurs de thème pour des différents éléments du document (police, arrière-plan, tableaux, formes automatiques, graphiques). Si vous appliquez les Couleurs de thème aux différents éléments du document et ensuite sélectionnez un autre jeu de couleurs, toutes les couleurs que vous avez appliqué auparavant changeraient en conséquence.

                                    +

                                    Pour modifier le jeu de couleurs, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le jeu de couleurs approprié de la liste: New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urban, Verve. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionné sera surligné dans la liste.

                                    +

                                    Jeux de couleurs

                                    +

                                    Une fois le jeu de couleurs sélectionné, il est possible se sélectionner d'autres couleurs de palettes qui sont disponibles pour l'élément nécessaire du document. Pour la plupart des éléments du document, on peut accéder à la la fenêtre de palettes de couleurs en cliquant sur la case colorée dans la barre latérale droite lorsque l'élément nécessaire est sélectionné. Quand à la police, il faut cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Couleur de police sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les palettes disponibles sont les suivants:

                                    Palette

                                      -
                                    • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée du document.
                                      • -
                                    • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionné ne les affecte pas.
                                      • +
                                    • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée dans le document.
                                      • +
                                    • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionnée ne les affecte pas.
                                    • - Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si la couleur voulue ne se trouve pas dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB (RVB) en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ RGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel afin que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : -

                                      Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                                      -

                                      La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l’élément sélectionné et ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée.

                                      + Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: +
                                        +
                                      • + Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans le document. +
                                        • +
                                      • + Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la fenêtre d'aperçu Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: +

                                        Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                                        +

                                        La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes.

                                        +
                                        • +
                                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm index a664b962ed..fd7a2ac748 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                    Changer l'habillage du texte

                                    -

                                    L'option Style d'habillage détermine la position de l'objet par rapport au texte. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez modifier le style d'habillage de texte pour les objets insérés, tels que les formes, les images, les graphiques,, les zones de texte ou les tableaux.

                                    +

                                    L'option Style d'habillage détermine la position de l'objet par rapport au texte. Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez modifier le style d'habillage de texte pour les objets insérés, tels que les formes, les images, les graphiques,, les zones de texte ou les tableaux.

                                    Modifier l'habillage de texte pour les formes, les images, les graphiques, les zones de texte

                                    Pour changer le style d'habillage actuellement sélectionné :

                                      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..91fa416293 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + ChatGPT + + + + + + + + +
                                      +
                                      + +
                                      +

                                      ChatGPT

                                      +

                                      Le module complémentaire ChatGPT permet d'utiliser l'agent conversationnel OpenAI pour effectuer les tâches visant à comprendre et à générer le langage naturel ou le code.

                                      + +

                                      Installation

                                      +

                                      Pour installer le module complémentaire ChatGPT,

                                      +
                                        +
                                      1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                        2. +
                                      2. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires.
                                        3. +
                                      3. Recherchez
                                        ChatGPT sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous.
                                        4. +
                                      4. Cliquez sur
                                        l'icône ChatGPT sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                        5. +
                                      5. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire.
                                        6. +
                                      + +

                                      Configuration

                                      +
                                        +
                                      1. Créez sur votre API key sur la page OpenAI API key.
                                        2. +
                                      2. Copiez la clé générée API key dans le champ correspondant sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur.
                                        3. +
                                      +

                                      Paramètres de ChatGPT

                                      + +

                                      Utilisation

                                      +
                                        +
                                      1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                        2. +
                                      2. Cliquez sur
                                        l'icône ChatGPT.
                                        3. +
                                      3. Configurez les paramètres disponibles tels que Modèle, Longueur maximale, Température etc.
                                        4. +
                                      +

                                      ONLYOFFICE n'assume aucune responsabilité quant aux réponses du ChatGPT qui peuvent contenir des erreurs, des omissions ou du contenu haineux ou inapproprié. Tout le texte envoyé depuis le module complémentaire est généré par ChatGPT et est fourni tel quel, sans filtrage d'aucune sorte par ONLYOFFICE.

                                      +
                                      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm index 12eb5c8cc5..cef64765f5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm @@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
                                      - +

                                      Communiquer lors de l'édition

                                      -

                                      Dans l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow.

                                      +

                                      Dans l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow.

                                      Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors, Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur.

                                      Telegram

                                      Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram,

                                      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConvertFootnotesEndnotes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConvertFootnotesEndnotes.htm index ab89a2cf6e..adb326bab2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConvertFootnotesEndnotes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConvertFootnotesEndnotes.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                      Conversion de notes de bas de page en notes de fin

                                      -

                                      Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous permet de convertir les notes de bas de page en notes de fin et vice versa, par exemple, quand vous voyez que les notes de bas de page dans le document résultant doivent être placées à la fin. Au lieu de créer les notes de fin à nouveau, utiliser les outils appropriés pour conversion rapide et sans effort.

                                      +

                                      L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE vous permet de convertir les notes de bas de page en notes de fin et vice versa, par exemple, quand vous voyez que les notes de bas de page dans le document résultant doivent être placées à la fin. Au lieu de créer les notes de fin à nouveau, utiliser les outils appropriés pour conversion rapide et sans effort.

                                      1. Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône
                                        Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut,
                                      2. Glissez votre curseur sur Convertir toutes les notes et sélectionnez l'une des options dans le menu à droite : diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm index 0ad8e58245..61fd594f2b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                        Copier/effacer la mise en forme du texte

                                        -

                                        Pour copier une certaine mise en forme du texte dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

                                        +

                                        Pour copier une certaine mise en forme du texte dans l'éditeur de documents,

                                        1. sélectionnez le fragment du texte contenant la mise en forme à copier en utilisant la souris ou le clavier,
                                        2. cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style
                                          sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante
                                          ),
                                          3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm index 559101e713..d493f5618a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                          Copier/coller les passages de texte, annuler/rétablir vos actions

                                          Utiliser les opérations de base du presse-papiers

                                          -

                                          Pour couper, copier, coller des passages de texte et des objets insérés (formes automatiques, images, graphiques) dans l'Éditeur de Documents utilisez les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel ou les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure :

                                          +

                                          Pour couper, copier, coller des passages de texte et des objets insérés (formes automatiques, images, graphiques) dans l'éditeur de documents utilisez les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel ou les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure :

                                          • Couper – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Couper dans le menu contextuel pour supprimer la sélection et l'envoyer dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document.
                                          • Copier – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Copier dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Copier
                                            de la barre d'outils supérieure pour copier la sélection dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document.
                                            • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm index 49ae538671..7f28df0c65 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm @@ -3,9 +3,9 @@ Créer des formulaires à remplir - - + + @@ -16,11 +16,11 @@

                                            Créer des formulaires à remplir

                                            -

                                            ONLYOFFICE Document Editor permet de créer plus facilement des formulaires à remplir dans votre document, par ex. les projets de contrats ou les enquêtes.

                                            +

                                            L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE permet de créer plus facilement des formulaires à remplir dans votre document, par ex. les projets de contrats ou les enquêtes.

                                            Modèle de formulaire fournit un ensemble d'outils pour créer des formulaires à remplir au format DOCXF. Sauvegardez le formulaire résultant au format DOCXF et vous aurez un modèle de formulaire modifiable que vous pourrez réviser ou travailler à plusieurs. Pour créer un formulaire à remplir et restreindre la modification du formulaire par d'autres utilisateurs, sauvegardez-le au format OFORM . Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter les instructions pour remplir un formulaire .

                                            -

                                            Les formats DOCXF et OFORM sont de nouveaux formats ONLYOFFICE permettant de créer des modèles de formulaires et de remplir les formulaires: Optez pour les versions ONLYOFFICE Document Editor en ligne ou de bureau pour utiliser pleinement tous les fonctionnalités et les options liées aux formulaires.

                                            +

                                            Les formats DOCXF et OFORM sont de nouveaux formats ONLYOFFICE permettant de créer des modèles de formulaires et de remplir les formulaires: Optez pour les versions de l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE en ligne ou de bureau pour utiliser pleinement tous les fonctionnalités et les options liées aux formulaires.

                                            Vous pouvez sauvegarder tout fichier DOCX existant au format DOCXF pour l'utiliser en tant que Modèle de formulaire. Passez à l'onglet Fichier, cliquez sur Télécharger comme... ou Enregistrer sous... sur le panneau latéral gauche et sélectionnez l'icône DOCXF. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser toutes les fonctionnalités d'édition d'un formulaire.

                                            -

                                            Ce ne sont pas seulement des champs de formulaire qu'on peut modifier dans un fichier DOCXF, il vous est toujours possible d'ajouter, de modifier et de mettre en forme du texte et d'utiliser d'autres fonctionnalités de Document Editor .

                                            +

                                            Ce ne sont pas seulement des champs de formulaire qu'on peut modifier dans un fichier DOCXF, il vous est toujours possible d'ajouter, de modifier et de mettre en forme du texte et d'utiliser d'autres fonctionnalités de l'éditeur de documents .

                                            Les formulaires à remplir peuvent être réalisés en utilisant des objets modifiables afin d'assurer une cohérence globale du document final et d'améliorer l'expérience de travail avec des formulaires interactifs.

                                            Actuellement, vous pouvez ajouter un champ texte, une zone de liste déroulante, une liste déroulante, une case à cocher, un bouton radio, définir les zones désignées pour des images et ajouter les zones destinées à l'adresse email, le numéro de téléphone, la date et l'heure, le code postal, la carte bancaire et les champs complexes. Vous pouvez accéder à ces fonctionnalités sous l'onglet Formulaires qui n'est disponible qu'avec des fichiers DOCXF.

                                            @@ -49,6 +49,7 @@

                                            Créer un champ texte

                                          • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ texte.
                                            Conseil ajouté
                                            • +
                                          • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
                                          • Format: définissez le format du champ texte, c-à-d les caractères sont autorisés en fonction du format défini: Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire (le texte doit correspondre au masque personnalisé, par ex., (999) 999 99 99), Expression régulière (le texte doit correspondre à l'expression régulière).

                                            Lorsque vous sélectionnez Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière, un champ supplémentaire apparaît au-dessous du champ Format.

                                            @@ -100,6 +101,7 @@

                                            Créer une zone de liste déroulante

                                          • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ du formulaire.
                                            Conseil ajouté
                                            • +
                                          • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
                                          • Options de valeur: ajoutez
                                            de nouvelles valeurs, supprimez
                                            ou déplacez des valeurs vers le haut
                                            et
                                            vers le bas dans la liste.
                                          • Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ.
                                            Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. @@ -133,12 +135,13 @@ Paramètres de la liste déroulante
                                            • Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci.
                                              • -
                                            • Clé: une clé à grouper les listes déroulantes afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le titre de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion.
                                              • +
                                            • Clé: une clé à grouper les listes déroulantes afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de la clé dans le champ et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion.
                                            • Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans la liste déroulante. Le texte par défaut est Choisir un élément.
                                            • Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement.
                                            • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ du formulaire.
                                              Conseil ajouté
                                              • +
                                            • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
                                            • Options de valeur: ajoutez
                                              de nouvelles valeurs, supprimez
                                              ou déplacez des valeurs vers le haut
                                              et
                                              vers le bas dans la liste.
                                            • Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ.
                                              Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. @@ -171,11 +174,12 @@

                                              Créer une case à cocher

                                              Paramètres de case à cocher
                                              • Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci.
                                                • -
                                              • Clé: une clé à grouper les cases à cocher afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le titre de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion.
                                                • +
                                              • Clé: une clé à grouper les cases à cocher afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de la clé dans le champ et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion.
                                              • Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement.
                                              • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur la case à cocher.
                                                Conseil ajouté
                                                • +
                                              • La case est cochée par défaut: cochez cette case pour que la case soit cochée par défaut.
                                              • Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ.
                                                Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position.
                                                • @@ -212,6 +216,7 @@

                                                Créer un bouton radio

                                              • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le bouton radio.
                                                Conseil ajouté
                                                • +
                                              • Le bouton est coché par défaut: cochez cette case pour que le bouton radio soit coché par défaut.
                                              • Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ.
                                                Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position.
                                                • @@ -285,6 +290,7 @@

                                                Créer un champ adresse e-mail

                                              • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ adresse e-mail.
                                                Conseil ajouté
                                                • +
                                              • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
                                              • Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Expression régulière afin de conserver le format d'adresse e-mail \S+@\S+\.\S+.
                                              • Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ adresse e-mail.
                                              • @@ -330,6 +336,7 @@

                                                Créer un champ numéro de téléphone

                                              • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ numéro de téléphone.
                                                Conseil ajouté
                                                • +
                                              • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
                                              • Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous.
                                              • Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ numéro de téléphone.
                                              • @@ -364,38 +371,29 @@

                                                Créer un champ Date et heure

                                        -

                                        Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Pour saisir une date, cliquez sur la flèche dans le champ et sélectionnez la date appropriée dans le calendrier.

                                        -
    + +

    Créer un champ code postal

    @@ -421,6 +419,7 @@

    Créer un champ code postal

  • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ code postal.
    Conseil ajouté
    • +
  • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
  • Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous.
  • Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ code postal.
  • @@ -436,7 +435,7 @@

    Créer un champ code postal

  • Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône
    pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée.
    • -
  • Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône
    pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant.
    • +
  • Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône
    pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant.
  • Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ code postal ajouté obligatoire de remplir.
    • @@ -466,6 +465,7 @@

    Créer un champ carte bancaire

  • Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire.
    Conseil ajouté
    • +
  • Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut.
  • Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous.
  • Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire.
  • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm index 2b0a8ca395..8a1fd57204 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Créer des listes - + @@ -15,37 +15,37 @@

    Créer des listes

    -

    Pour créer une liste dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

    +

    Pour créer une liste dans l'éditeur de documents,

    1. placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez commencer la liste (cela peut être une nouvelle ligne ou le texte existant),
    2. passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
    3. - sélectionnez le type de liste à créer : + sélectionnez le type de liste à créer:
        -
      • Liste non ordonnée avec des marqueurs est créée à l'aide de l'icône Puces
        de la barre d'outils supérieure
        • +
      • Liste non ordonnée avec des marqueurs est créée à l'aide de l'icône Puces
        de la barre d'outils supérieure
      • - Liste ordonnée avec numérotage spécial est créée à l'aide de l'icône Numérotation
        de la barre d'outils supérieure + Liste ordonnée avec numérotage spécial est créée à l'aide de l'icône Numérotation
        de la barre d'outils supérieure

        Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Puces ou Numérotation pour sélectionner le format de puces ou de numérotation souhaité.

      4. -
    4. appuyez sur la touche Entrée à la fin de la ligne pour ajouter un nouvel élément à la liste. Pour terminer la liste, appuyez sur la touche Retour arrière et continuez le travail.
      5. +
    5. appuyez sur la touche Entrée à la fin de la ligne pour ajouter un nouvel élément à la liste. Pour terminer la liste, appuyez sur la touche Retour arrière et continuez le travail.
    -

    L'éditeur commence automatiquement une liste numérotée lorsque vous tapez 1 et un point ou une parenthèse droite et un espace : 1., 1). La liste à puces commence automatiquement lorsque vous tapez - ou * et un espace.

    -

    Vous pouvez aussi changer le retrait du texte dans les listes et leur imbrication en utilisant les icônes Liste multi-niveaux , Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

    -

    Pour modifier le niveau de la liste, cliquez sur l'icône Numérotation , Puces , ou Liste multi-niveaux et choisissez Changer le niveau de liste, ou placer le curseur au début de la ligne et appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier pour augmenter le niveau de la liste. Procédez au niveau de liste approprié.

    +

    L'éditeur commence automatiquement une liste numérotée lorsque vous tapez 1 et un point ou une parenthèse droite et un espace: 1., 1). La liste à puces commence automatiquement lorsque vous tapez - ou * et un espace.

    +

    Vous pouvez aussi changer le retrait du texte dans les listes et leur imbrication en utilisant les icônes Liste multiniveau , Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

    +

    Pour modifier le niveau de la liste, cliquez sur l'icône Numérotation , Puces ou Liste multiniveau et choisissez Changer le niveau de liste, ou placer le curseur au début de la ligne et appuyez sur la touche Tabdu clavier pour accéder au niveau suivant de la liste. Procédez au niveau de liste approprié.

    Changer le niveau de liste

    -

    Vous pouvez configurez les paramètres supplémentaires du retrait et de l'espacement sur la barre latérale droite et dans la fenêtre de configuration de paramètres avancées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les pages Modifier le retrait des paragraphes et Régler l'interligne du paragraphe .

    +

    Vous pouvez configurez les paramètres supplémentaires du retrait et de l'espacement sur la barre latérale droite et dans la fenêtre de configuration de paramètres avancées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les pages Modifier le retrait des paragraphes et Régler l'interligne du paragraphe .

    Joindre et séparer des listes

    -

    Pour joindre une liste à la précédente :

    +

    Pour joindre une liste à la précédente:

    1. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le premier élément de la seconde liste,
    2. utilisez l'option Joindre à la liste précédente du menu contextuel.

    Les listes seront jointes et la numérotation se poursuivra conformément à la numérotation de la première liste.

    -

    Pour séparer une liste :

    +

    Pour séparer une liste:

    1. cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'élément de la liste où vous voulez commencer une nouvelle liste,
    2. sélectionnez l'option Séparer la liste du menu contextuel.
      3. @@ -53,14 +53,14 @@

      Joindre et séparer des listes

      La liste sera séparée et la numérotation dans la deuxième liste recommencera.

      Modifier la numérotation

      -

      Poursuivre la numérotation séquentielle dans la deuxième liste selon la numérotation de la liste précédente :

      +

      Poursuivre la numérotation séquentielle dans la deuxième liste selon la numérotation de la liste précédente:

      1. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le premier élément de la seconde liste,
      2. sélectionnez l'option Continuer la numérotation du menu contextuel.

      La numérotation se poursuivra conformément à la numérotation de la première liste.

      -

      Pour définir une certaine valeur initiale de numérotation :

      +

      Pour définir une certaine valeur initiale de numérotation:

      1. cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'élément de la liste où vous souhaitez appliquer une nouvelle valeur de numérotation,
      2. sélectionnez l'option Définit la valeur de la numérotation du menu contextuel,
        3. @@ -68,42 +68,57 @@

        Modifier la numérotation

      Configurer les paramètres de la liste

      -

      Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste comme la puce/la numérotation, l'alignement, la taille et la couleur :

      +

      Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste comme la puce/la numérotation, l'alignement, la taille et la couleur:

      1. cliquez sur un élément de la liste actuelle ou sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer une liste,
        2. -
      2. cliquez sur l'icône Puces
        ou Numérotation
        sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils en haut,
        3. +
      3. cliquez sur l'icône Puces
        ou Numérotation
        sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      4. sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste,
      5. - la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste à puces se présente sous cet aspect : + la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste à puces se présente sous cet aspect:

        La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste à puces

        -

        La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste numérotée se présente sous cet aspect :

        +

        La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste numérotée se présente sous cet aspect:

        La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste numérotée

        -

        Pour la liste à puces on peut choisir le caractère à utiliser comme puce et pour la liste numérotée on peut choisir le type de numérotation. Les options Alignement, Taille et Couleur sont identiques pour toutes les listes soit à puces soit numérotée.

        +

        Pour la liste à puces on peut choisir le caractère à utiliser comme puce et pour la liste numérotée on peut choisir le type et la police des numéros. Les options Alignement, Taille et les options d'accentuation du texte Gras/Italique/Couleur sont identiques pour toutes les listes soit à puces soit numérotée.

          -
        • Puce permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le champ Symboles et caractères, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles.
          • -
        • Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
          • -
        • Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement. Les options d'alignement disponibles : À gauche, Au centre, À droite.
          • -
        • Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la taille des puces correspond à la taille du texte ; Ajustez la taille en utilisant les valeurs prédéfinies de 8 à 96.
          • -
        • Couleur permet de choisir la couleur des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez les Couleurs de thème ou les Couleurs standard de la palette ou définissez la Couleur personnalisée.
          • +
        • Puce permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le champ Symboles et caractères, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles.
          • +
        • Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste. Les options suivantes sont disponibles: Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
          • +
        • Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement. Les options d'alignement disponibles: À gauche, Au centre, À droite.
          • +
        • Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la taille des puces correspond à la taille du texte; Ajustez la taille en utilisant les valeurs prédéfinies de 8 à 96.
          • +
        • Gras/Italique/Couleur permet d'accentuer et de mettre en évidence une puce/un numéro. Pour Couleur, l'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez Couleurs de thème, Couleurs standard ou Couleurs récentes de la palette ou cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour sélectionner une couleur personnalisée.

        Toutes les modifications sont affichées dans le champ Aperçu.

        6. -
      6. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre.
        7. +
      7. + Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. +

        Fautes in clic droit sur la liste à puces et sélectionnez l'option Ajuster les retraits de la liste pour ouvir la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste la même que pour une liste à plusieurs niveaux.

        +

      Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste à plusieurs niveaux,

      1. appuyez sur un élément de la liste,
        2. -
      2. cliquez sur l'icône Liste multiniveaux
        sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils en haut,
        3. +
      3. cliquez sur l'icône es Liste multiniveau
        sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      4. sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste,
      5. - la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste multiniveaux se présente sous cet aspect : + la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste multiniveaux se présente sous cet aspect:

        La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste multiniveaux

        -

        Choisissez le niveau approprié dans la liste Niveau à gauche, puis personnalisez l'aspect des puces et des nombres pour le niveau choisi :

        +

        Choisissez le niveau approprié dans la liste Niveau à gauche, puis personnalisez l'aspect des puces et des nombres pour le niveau choisi:

          -
        • Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste numérotée ou le caractère approprié pour la liste à puces. Les options disponibles pour la liste numérotée : Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Pour la liste à puces vous pouvez choisir un des symboles prédéfinis ou utiliser l'option Nouvelle puce. Lorsque vous appuyez sur cette option, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles.
          • -
        • Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement du début du paragraphe. À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Les options d'alignement disponibles : À gauche, Au centre, À droite.
          • -
        • Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Ajustez la taille en utilisant les paramètres prédéfinis de 8 à 96.
          • -
        • Couleur permet de choisir la couleur des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez les Couleurs de thème ou les Couleurs standard de la palette ou définissez la Couleur personnalisée.
          • +
        • Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste numérotée ou le caractère approprié pour la liste à puces. Les options disponibles pour la liste numérotée: Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Pour la liste à puces vous pouvez choisir un des symboles prédéfinis ou utiliser l'option Nouvelle puce. Lorsque vous appuyez sur cette option, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles.
          • +
        • Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement du début du paragraphe. À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Les options d'alignement disponibles: À gauche, Au centre, À droite.
          • +
        • Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Ajustez la taille en utilisant les paramètres prédéfinis de 8 à 96.
          • +
        • Gras/Italique/Couleur permet d'accentuer et de mettre en évidence une puce/un numéro. Pour Couleur, l'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez Couleurs de thème, Couleurs standard ou Couleurs récentes de la palette ou cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour sélectionner une couleur personnalisée.
          • +
        • Format de nombre affiche le style du caractère qu'on utilise pour créer la liste.
          • +
        • + Cliquez sur la flèche à deux pointes à côté du champ Format de nombre pour accéder aux paramètres avancés. Vous pouvez personnaliser chaque niveau de la liste à plusieurs niveaux en sélectionnant le niveau approprié dans la section Sélectionner le niveau. +

          Fenêtre Paramètres avancés de la liste multiniveaux

          +
            +
          • Police permet de sélectionner la mise en forme de la police,
            • +
          • Inclure le numéro de niveau à partir de permet d'indiquer le numéro du niveau parent pour le niveau subordonné,
            • +
          • Commencer à permet de commencer la numérotation de la liste à partir du numéro dont vous avez besoin. Activez l'option Recommencer la liste pour recommencer la numérotation,
            • +
          • Alignement permet de définir le type d'alignement spécifique pour chaque niveau de la liste. Sélectionnez À gauche, Au centre ou À droite de la liste déroulante et définissez l'espacement avant le caractère de la liste,
            • +
          • Retrait du texte permet de définir l'espacement entre le caractère de la liste et le texte,
            • +
          • Faire suivre le numéro de permet d'indiquer ce qui suit le caractère que vous avez choisi comme le format de numéro. Sélectionnez Tabulation, Espace ou Aucun de la liste déroulante. Lorsque vous choisissez la Tabulation, l'option Ajouter taquet de tabulation à devient active. Activez l'option Ajouter taquet de tabulation à et définissez la longueur du retrait.
            • +

        Toutes les modifications sont affichées dans le champ Aperçu.

        6. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm index 05c74da77b..3ea23bb7a3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@

        Table des matières

        Une table des matières contient une liste de tous les chapitres (sections, etc.) d'un document et affiche les numéros des pages où chaque chapitre est démarré. Cela permet de naviguer facilement dans un document de plusieurs pages en passant rapidement à la partie voulue du texte. La table des matières est générée automatiquement sur la base des titres de document formatés à l'aide de styles prédéfinis. Cela facilite la mise à jour de la table des matières créée sans qu'il soit nécessaire de modifier les titres et de changer manuellement les numéros de page si le texte du document a été modifié.

        Structure des titres dans la table des matières

        Formater les titres

        -

        Tout d'abord, formatez les titres dans votre document en utilisant l'un des styles prédéfinis dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Pour le faire,

        +

        Tout d'abord, formatez les titres dans votre document en utilisant l'un des styles prédéfinis dans l'éditeur de documents. Pour le faire,

        1. Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez inclure dans la table des matières.
        2. Ouvrez le menu Style sur le côté droit de l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure.
          3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm index f8e6f5f8e5..0fd9ab0abc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Appliquer les styles de police

          -

          Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez appliquer différents styles de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

          +

          Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez appliquer différents styles de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

          Remarque : si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9ecbfa415f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Dessiner à main levée dans un document + + + + + + + + +
          +
          + +
          +

          Dessiner à main levée dans un document

          +

          Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez utiliser l'onglet Dessiner pour dessiner à main levée, ajouter des notes manuscrites, mettre en surbrillance du texte et effacer dans votre document.

          +

          Options de dessin

          +

          Pour dessiner, écrire ou mettre en surbrillance du texte, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur et déplacez le curseur. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement pour personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du trait. Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs lorsque la couleur nécessaire manque à la palette.

          +

          Outil Stylo

          +

          Lorsque vous avez fini de dessiner, d'écrire ou de surligner, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur encore une fois, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap.

          +

          Cliquez sur l'outil Gomme et déplacez le curseur d'avant en arrière pour effacer le trait. La Gomme efface uniquement le trait entier.

          +

          Utilisez le bouton Sélectionner pour sélectionner l'inscription, le dessin ou la mise en surbrillance. Une fois sélectionné, il est possible de redimensionner ou supprimer l'élément.

          +
          + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm index e8ff50f9ea..e3ecd3ffdc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm @@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
          - +

          Créer et insérer des diagrammes

          -

          Lorsque vous avez besoin de créer beaucoup de diagrammes variés et complexes, l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous offre un plug-in draw.io qui peut les créer et configurer.

          +

          Lorsque vous avez besoin de créer beaucoup de diagrammes variés et complexes, l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE vous offre un plug-in draw.io qui peut les créer et configurer.

          1. Sélectionnez l'endroit sur la page où vous souhaitez insérer un diagramme.
          2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur
            draw.io.
            3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm index 5f42fce733..a58642b318 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Remplir un formulaire

          -

          Un formulaire à remplir est le fichier au format OFORM. OFORM est un format de fichier destiné à remplir ; à télécharger ou à imprimer des modèles de formulaires une fois que vous avez terminé de le remplir.

          +

          Un formulaire à remplir est le fichier au format OFORM. OFORM est un format de fichier destiné à remplir, à télécharger ou à imprimer des modèles de formulaires une fois que vous avez terminé de le remplir.

          Comment remplir un formulaire :

          1. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm index f45350f4d1..84940b0c4b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Définir le type de police, la taille et la couleur

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

            Si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme appropriée. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm index 90a2828274..22e1194d1c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Appliquer les styles de formatage

          -

          Chaque style de mise en forme représente un ensemble des options de mise en forme : (taille de la police, couleur, interligne, alignement etc.). Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les styles permettent de mettre en forme rapidement les parties différentes du texte (en-têtes, sous-titres, listes,texte normal, citations) au lieu d'appliquer les options de mise en forme différentes individuellement chaque fois que vous en avez besoin. Cela permet également d'assurer une apparence uniforme de tout le document. Un style n'est appliqué au'au paragraphe entier.

          +

          Chaque style de mise en forme représente un ensemble des options de mise en forme : (taille de la police, couleur, interligne, alignement etc.). Dans l'éditeur de documents, les styles permettent de mettre en forme rapidement les parties différentes du texte (en-têtes, sous-titres, listes,texte normal, citations) au lieu d'appliquer les options de mise en forme différentes individuellement chaque fois que vous en avez besoin. Cela permet également d'assurer une apparence uniforme de tout le document. Un style n'est appliqué au'au paragraphe entier.

          Vous pouvez appliquer les styles pour créer une table des matières ou une table des figures.

          Le style à appliquer dépend du fait si c'est le paragraphe (normal, pas d'espace, titres, paragraphe de liste etc.) ou le texte (d'après type, taille et couleur de police) que vous souhaitez mettre en forme. Différents styles sont aussi appliqués quand vous sélectionnez une partie du texte ou seulement placez le curseur sur un mot. Parfois, il faut sélectionner le style approprié deux fois de la bibliothèque de styles pour le faire appliquer correctement : lorsque vous appuyer sur le style dans le panneau pour la première fois, le style de paragraphe est appliqué. Lorsque vous appuyez pour la deuxième fois, le style du texte est appliqué.

          Appliquer des styles par défaut

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm index e8151d3302..5727b2b5cf 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
          - +

          Modifier le code HTML

          Si vous êtes en train d'écrire une page de site Web dans un éditeur de texte et souhaitez l'obtenir sous forme de code HTML, utilisez le plug-in HTML.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm index c978c7fcc5..16b9115c8b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Insérer le code en surbrillance

          -

          Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez intégrer votre code mis en surbrillance auquel le style est déjà appliqué à correspondre avec le langage de programmation et le style de coloration dans le programme choisi.

          +

          Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez intégrer votre code mis en surbrillance auquel le style est déjà appliqué à correspondre avec le langage de programmation et le style de coloration dans le programme choisi.

          1. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où le code doit être inséré.
          2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
            Code en surbrillance.
            3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 2924764454..6368dcc52f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Insérer les formes automatiques + Insérer des formes automatiques - + @@ -11,243 +11,277 @@
            -
            - -
            -

            Insérer les formes automatiques

            -

            Insérer une forme automatique

            -

            Pour insérer une forme automatique à votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

            +
            + +
            +

            Insérer des formes automatiques

            +

            Insérer une forme automatique

            +

            Pour insérer une forme automatique dans l'éditeur de documents,

              -
            1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
              2. -
            2. cliquez sur l'icône
              Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure,
              3. -
            3. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles dans la Galerie des formes : Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
              4. +
            4. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
              5. +
            5. cliquez sur
              l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure,
              6. +
            6. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles depuis la Galerie de formes: Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
            7. cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné,
              8. -
            8. placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme,
              9. +
            9. placez le curseur de la souris à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer la forme,
            10. - après avoir ajouté la forme automatique vous pouvez modifier sa taille, sa position et ses propriétés. -

              Remarque : pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi).

              + une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. +

              Remarque: pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi, si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi).

            -

            Il est également possible d'ajouter une légende à la forme automatique. Pour en savoir plus sur le travail avec des légendes pour des formes automatiques, vous pouvez vous référer à cet article.

            -

            Déplacer et redimensionner des formes automatiques

            -

            Pour modifier la taille de la forme automatique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de la forme. Pour garder les proportions de la forme automatique sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

            -

            -

            Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche.

            +

            Il est également possible d'ajouter une légende à la forme automatique. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des légendes avec des formes automatiques, veuillez consulter cet article.

            +

            Déplacer et redimensionner des formes automatiques

            +

            Pour modifier la taille de la forme automatique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de la forme. Pour garder les proportions de la forme automatique sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

            +

            +

            Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des Flèches figurées ou les Légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle vous permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche.

            - Pour modifier la position de la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme. Faites glisser la forme à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. - Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). - Pour déplacer la forme automatique de trois incréments, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. - Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement horizontalement / verticalement et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée lors du déplacement. -

            -

            Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée.

            -

            - Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. -

            -
            -

            Modifier les paramètres de la forme automatique

            -

            Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes :

            -
              -
            • Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur.
              • -
            • Imprimer la sélection sert à imprimer la partie sélectionnée du document.
              • -
            • Accepter / Rejeter les modifications sert à accepter ou rejeter des modifications suivies dans un document partagé.
              • -
            • Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. -
                -
              1. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme.
                2. -
              2. - Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. -

                Modifier les points

                -
                3. -
              3. - Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer. -

                Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité.

                -

                Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche, Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu.

                -
                4. -
              -
              • -
            • Organiser sert à placer la forme automatique choisie au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper les formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs formes à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
              • -
            • Aligner sert à aligner la forme à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
              • -
            • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée.
              • -
            • Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement.
              • -
            • Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Forme - Paramètres avancés'.
              • -
            + Pour modifier la position la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît lorsque vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme automatique. Faites glisser la forme automatique vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à la positionner sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que En ligne est sélectionné). Pour déplacer la forme automatique par incrément équivaut à un pixel, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement à l'horizontale/verticale et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée lors du glissement. +

            +

            Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, déplacez le curseur vers la poignée de rotation et faites la glisser dans le sens horaire ou antihoraire. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en faisant pivoter.

            +

            + Remarque: la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. +

            -

            Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

            -
              -
            • Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : +

              Copier la mise en forme du style de la forme automatique

              +

              Pour copier la mise en forme du style d'une forme automatique,

              +
                +
              1. sélectionnez la forme automatique dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme en utilisant la souris ou le clavier,
                2. +
              2. cliquez l'icône Copier le style
                sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci
                ),
                3. +
              3. sélectionnez la forme automatique à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme.
                4. +
              + +
              +

              Ajuster les paramètres de la forme automatique

              +

              Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes:

                -
              • Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée. -

                Couleur

                -

                Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir du jeux de couleurs disponible ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix :

                -
                • +
              • Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur.
                • +
              • Imprimer la sélection sert à imprimer la partie sélectionnée du document.
                • +
              • Accepter / Rejeter les modifications sert à accepter ou rejeter des modifications suivies dans un document partagé.
              • - Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour remplir une forme avec deux ou plusieurs couleurs et créer une transition douce entre elles. Particulariser le remplissage en dégradé sans limites. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme
                pour ouvrir le menu de Remplissage de la barre latérale droite : -

                Dégradé

                -

                Les options de menu disponibles :

                -
                  + Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. +
                    +
                  1. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme.
                  2. - Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire ou Radial : -
                      -
                    • Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé.
                      • -
                    • Radial - la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle.
                      • -
                    -
                    3. -
                  3. - Point de dégradé est un points spécifique dans lequel se fait la transition dégradé de couleurs. -
                      -
                    • Utiliser le bouton
                      Ajouter un point de dégradé dans la barre de défilement pour ajouter un dégradé. Le nombre maximal de points est 10. Chaque dégradé suivant n'affecte pas l'apparence du remplissage en dégradé actuel. Utilisez le bouton
                      Supprimer le point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain dégradé.
                      • -
                    • Ajustez la position du dégradé en glissant l'arrêt dans la barre de défilement ou utiliser le pourcentage de Position pour préciser l'emplacement du point.
                      • -
                    • Pour appliquer une couleur à un point de dégradé, cliquez sur un point dans la barre de défilement, puis cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée.
                      • -
                    -
                    4. -
                -
                • -
              • Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme. -

                Remplissage avec Image ou texture

                + Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. +

                Modifier les points

                +
                • +
              • + Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer. +

                Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité.

                +

                Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu.

                +
                • +
          + +
        3. Organiser sert à placer la forme sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. . Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
          4. +
        4. Aligner sert à aligner la forme automatique à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu ou en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, veuillez consulter cette page.
          5. +
        5. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner l'un des styles d'habillage disponibles - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte, ou modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible que si le style d'habillage défini n'est pas En ligne. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée.
          6. +
        6. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme automatique de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme automatique horizontalement ou verticalement.
          7. +
        7. Enregistrer en tant qu'image sert à sauvegarder la forme automatique en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur.
          8. +
        8. Paramètres avancés de la forme automatique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés.
          9. + +
          +

          Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur la forme automatique et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants:

          +
            +
          • + Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes:
              -
            • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image enregistrée sur votre portail.
              • -
            • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. -

              Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

              +
            • + Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. +

              Couleur de remplissage

              +

              Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix:

              +
              • +
            • + Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme.
              pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: +

              Remplissage en dégradé

              +

              Les options disponibles du menu:

              +
                +
              • + Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: +
                  +
                • Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé.
                  • +
                • Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée.
                  • +
                +
                • +
              • + Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. +
                  +
                • Utilisez le bouton
                  Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton
                  Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé.
                  • +
                • Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis.
                  • +
                • Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée.
                  • +
                +
                • +
              +
              • +
            • + Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme. +

              Remplissage Image ou Texture

              +
                +
              • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter une image À partir d'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur votre ordinateur ou À partir d'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail.
                • +
              • + Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. +

                Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: +Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                +
                • +
              +
                +
              • + Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Prolonger ou Tuile depuis la liste déroulante. +

                L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                +

                L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                +

                Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire.

                +
                • +
              +
              • +
            • + Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. +

              Remplissage avec un modèle

              +
                +
              • Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu.
                • +
              • Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle.
                • +
              • Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle.
                • +
              • +
            • Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.
            +
            • +
          +

          Onglet Paramètres de la forme

          +
            +
          • Opacité sert à régler le niveau d'opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.
            • +
          • + Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme.
              -
            • Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options : Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante. -

              L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

              -

              L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

              -

              Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, si nécessaire.

              -
              • +
            • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
              • +
            • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
              • +
            • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
              • +
            • Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur.
            • -
          • Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. -

            Modèle

            -
              -
            • Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu.
              • -
            • Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle.
              • -
            • Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle.
              • -
            +
          • + Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: +
              +
            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
              • +
            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
              • +
            • pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
              • +
            • pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
              • +
            • -
          • Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.
            • -
          - - -

          Paramètres de la forme automatique

          -
            -
          • Opacité - utilisez cette section pour régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.
            • -
          • Ligne - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du ligne de la forme automatique. -
              -
            • Pour modifier la largeur du ligne, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de ligne.
              • -
            • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
              • -
            • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : -
              -
            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
              • -
            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
              • -
            • pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
              • -
            • pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Style d'habillage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
            • -
          • Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante.
            • -
          • Ajouter une ombre - cochez cette case pour affichage de la forme ombré.
            • +
          • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
            • +
          • Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante.
            • +
          • Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à une forme.
          -

          Ajuster les paramètres avancés d'une forme automatique

          -

          Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre "Forme - Paramètres avancés" s'ouvre :

          -

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants :

          +

          Ajuster les paramètres avancés de la forme

          +

          Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans menu contextuel ou cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés s'ouvrira:

          +

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          +

          L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants:

            -
          • Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique. -
              -
            • Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...).
              • -
            • Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la largeur de la marge de gauche, la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges gauche et droite), la largeur de la page ou la largeur de la marge de droite.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Hauteur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la hauteur de la forme automatique. -
              -
            • Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...).
              • -
            • Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges supérieure et inférieure), la hauteur de la marge inférieure, la hauteur de la page ou la hauteur de la marge supérieure.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Si l'option Verrouiller le ratio d'aspect est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original.
            • +
          • + Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique. +
              +
            • Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...).
              • +
            • Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la largeur de la marge de gauche, la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges gauche et droite), la largeur de la page ou la largeur de la marge de droite.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • + Hauteur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la hauteur de la forme automatique. +
              +
            • Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...).
              • +
            • Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges supérieure et inférieure), la hauteur de la marge inférieure, la hauteur de la page ou la hauteur de la marge supérieure.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • Si l'option Verrouiller les proportions est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original.
          -

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

          -
            -
          • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
            • -
          • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers).
            • -
          -

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants :

          +

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          +

          L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants:

            -
          • Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la façon dont la forme est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). -
              -

            • En ligne sur le texte - la forme fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, la forme est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles.

              -

              Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte :

              -
              • -

            • Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme.

              • -

            • Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de la forme.

              • -

            • Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur d'elle. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel.

              • -

            • Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de la forme.

              • -

            • Devant le texte - la forme est affichée sur le texte.

              • -

            • Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur la forme.

              • -
            +
          • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
            • +
          • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers).
            • +
          +

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          +

          L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants:

          +
            +
          • + Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la façon dont la forme est positionnée par rapport au texte: elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style En ligne) ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un d'autres styles). +
              +
            • +

              En ligne - la forme fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, la forme est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles.

              +

              Si vous sélectionnez l'un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer la forme indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte:

              +
              • +

            • Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme.

              • +

            • Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de la forme.

              • +

            • Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forma et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celle-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel.

              • +

            • Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de la forme.

              • +

            • Devant le texte - la forme s'affiche sur le texte.

              • +

            • Derrière le texte - le texte recouvre la forme.

              • +
          -

          Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche).

          -

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné :

          +

          Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche).

          +

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          +

          L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Cet onglet contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné:

            -
          • - La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : -
              -
            • Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite,
              • -
            • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite,
              • -
            • Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • - La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : -
              -
            • Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure,
              • -
            • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure,
              • -
            • Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Déplacer avec le texte détermine si la forme automatique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel elle est alignée.
            • -
          • Chevauchement détermine si deux formes automatiques sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page.
            • +
          • + La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'une forme: +
              +
            • Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite,
              • +
            • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite,
              • +
            • Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • + La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'une forme: +
              +
            • Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure,
              • +
            • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure,
              • +
            • Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • Déplacer avec le texte détermine si la forme se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné.
            • +
          • Chevauchement détermine si deux formes sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page.

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants :

          +

          L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants:

            -
          • Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : -
              -
            • - Type de letterine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc. : -
                -
              • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                • -
              • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                • -
              • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                • -
              -
              • -
            • - Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : -
                -
              • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                • -
              • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                • -
              • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.
                • -
              -

              Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

              -
              • -
            +
          • + Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants: +
              +
            • + Type de bouchon - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin du trait, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: +
                +
              • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                • +
              • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                • +
              • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • + Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle: +
                +
              • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                • +
              • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                • +
              • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.
                • +
              +

              Remarque: l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

              +
              • +
            • -
          • Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante.
            • +
          • Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il est possible de définir le Style de début, le Style de fin et la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante.
          -

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          La section Rembourrage texte vous permet de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).

          -

          Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

          -

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          -

          L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau.

          +

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          +

          L'onglet Zone de texte permet de modifier les marges intérieures de la forme En haut, En bas, À gauche, À droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).

          +

          Remarque: cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

          +

          Forme - Paramètres avancés

          +

          L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information inclus dans la forme.

          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm index 909d2d8261..2ba432972f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

          Ajouter des signets

          Les signets permettent d’aller rapidement à une certaine position dans le document en cours ou d'ajouter un lien vers cette position dans le document.

          -

          Pour ajouter un signet dans l'Éditeur de Documents :

          +

          Pour ajouter un signet dans l'éditeur de documents :

          1. spécifiez l'endroit où vous voulez que le signet soit ajouté :
              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index 9f2cfb31ce..b0dfbcf161 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -3,20 +3,20 @@ Insérer des graphiques - + -
              -
              - -
              -

              Insérer des graphiques

              +
              +
              + +
              +

              Insérer des graphiques

              Insérer un graphique

              -

              Pour insérer un graphique dans Document Editor,

              +

              Pour insérer un graphique dans l'éditeur de documents,

              1. Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer un graphique.
              2. Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                3. @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@

                Insérer un graphique

                • Ligne
                • Lignes empilées
                  • -
                • Lignes empilées 100 %
                  • +
                • Lignes empilées 100%
                • Lignes avec marques de données
                • Lignes empilées avec marques de données
                • Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données
                  • @@ -72,15 +72,21 @@

                  Insérer un graphique

                • Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs
                • Disperser avec des lignes droites
                +
                Radars +
                  +
                • Radar
                  • +
                • Radar avec marqueurs
                  • +
                • Radar plein
                  • +
                Graphiques Combo
                  -
                • Histogramme groupé - lignes
                  • +
                • Histogramme groupé - Courbe
                • Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire
                • Aires empilées - histogramme groupé
                • Combinaison personnalisée
                -

                Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles.

                +

                Remarque: L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles.

              3. Lorsque la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique s'affiche, vous pouvez saisir les données en utilisant des boutons suivants: @@ -95,10 +101,10 @@

                Insérer un graphique

                Éditeur de graphique

              4. - Cliquez sur le bouton Sélection de données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche. + Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche.
                1. - Utiliser la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, la Série de la légende, le Nom de l'axe horizontal, et Changer de ligne ou de colonne. + Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, les Entrées de légende (Série), le Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), et Intervertir ligne/colonne.

                  La fenêtre Données du graphique

                  • @@ -106,51 +112,51 @@

                    Insérer un graphique

                    • Cliquez sur
                      l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. -

                      La fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                      +

                      Fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                  • - Série de la légende - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. + Entrées de légende (Série) - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende.
                      -
                    • Dans la Série de la légende, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                      • +
                    • Dans Entrées de légende (Série), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                    • - Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur
                      à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom. + Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur
                      l'icône à droite de la zone Nom de la série.

                      La fenêtre Modifier la série

                  • - Nom de l'axe horizontal - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe + Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse) - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe.
                      -
                    • Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'axe horizontal cliquez sur Modifier.
                      • +
                    • Dans Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), cliquez sur Modifier.
                    • Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur
                      l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données.

                      La fenêtre Étiquettes de l'axe

                    • -
                  • Changer de ligne ou de colonne - modifier le façon de traçage des données dans la feuille de calcul. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe.
                    • +
                  • Intervertir ligne/colonne - réorganiser la configuration de données dans la feuille de calcul selon vos besoins. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe.
                2. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre.
              5. - Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Nuages de points (XY), Boursier. + Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Boursier, Nuages de points (XY), Radar, Combo.

                La fenêtre Type de graphique

                -

                Lorsque vous choisissez Graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire.

                -

                La fenêtre Type de graphique Combo

                +

                Lorsque vous choisissez graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire.

                +

                Type de graphique Combo

              6. Paramétrer le graphique en cliquant sur Modifier le graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés s'affiche. -

                La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                +

                Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique.

                • - Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: + Définissez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                    -
                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique
                    • +
                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique,
                  • Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé,
                  • Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé.
                  @@ -158,12 +164,12 @@

                  Insérer un graphique

                • Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                    -
                  • Aucun pour ne pas afficher de légende,
                    • -
                  • Bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher la légende,
                    • +
                  • En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                  • Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé.
                  • @@ -173,24 +179,24 @@

                  Insérer un graphique

                • Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné.
                    -
                  • Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                    • -
                  • Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Centre, À gauche, À droite, En haut.
                    • -
                  • Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                    • -
                  • Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, Ligne, Barres et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre.
                    • +
                  • Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, En bas à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                    • +
                  • Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, À droite, À gauche, En haut, En bas.
                    • +
                  • Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                    • +
                  • Pour les graphiques En aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, En ligne, En barres, Radar et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre.
                  • -
                • Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur,
                  • -
                • Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur d'étiquettes de données.
                  • +
                • Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de série, Nom de catégorie, Valeur,
                  • +
                • Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données.
              7. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes.
              8. - Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). + Marqueurs - sert à spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY).

                Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY).

            -

            La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

            -

            L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

            +

            Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

            +

            L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Veuillez noter que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

            Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage.

            • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
              • @@ -202,29 +208,30 @@

              Insérer un graphique

            • Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical.
            2. -
          2. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
            3. +
          3. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
          4. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
            5. -
          5. Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical.
            6. -
          6. Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
            7. -
          7. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas.
            8. +
          8. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical.
            9. +
          9. Unités d'affichage - sert à déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
            10. +
          10. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - sert à afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas.
            11. +
          11. Échelle logarithmique - sert à activer l'échelle logarithmique pour la Base définie par l'utilisateur.
          12. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes:
              -
            • Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires,
              • -
            • Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe,
              • -
            • Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe,
              • -
            • A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
              • +
            • Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires,
              • +
            • Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe,
              • +
            • Dans pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe,
              • +
            • À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
          13. - La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: + La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
              -
            • Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations,
              • -
            • En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé,
              • -
            • En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé,
              • +
            • Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations,
              • +
            • Bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé,
              • +
            • Haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé,
            • À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe.
            • - Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. + Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée.

              Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles:

              • Général
                • @@ -246,39 +253,39 @@

                Insérer un graphique

              - La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés + Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

              Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont disponibles sur les graphiques Combo uniquement.

              Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement.

              -

              L'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous.

              -

              La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

              -

              L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

              +

              L'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous.

              +

              Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

              +

              L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Veuillez noter que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

              • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
              • Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante:
                  -
                • Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal.
                  • +
                • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal,
                • Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal.
                • -
              • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires.
                • -
              • Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical.
                • -
              • Position de l'étiquette - est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduation ou Entre graduations.
                • -
              • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche.
                • +
              • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun, Principal, Secondaire ou Principales et secondaires.
                • +
              • Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimale/maximale (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical.
                • +
              • Position de l'axe - sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduations ou Entre graduations.
                • +
              • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - sert à afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche.
              • La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants:
                  -
                • Type principal/secondaire est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                  • -
                • Intervalle entre les marques - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes.
                  • +
                • Type principale/secondaire - sert à spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                  • +
                • Intervalle entre les graduations - sert à spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes.
              • La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories.
                  -
                • Position de l'étiquette est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe.
                  • -
                • Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande.
                  • -
                • Intervalle entre les étiquettes - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux.
                  • +
                • Position de l'étiquette sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe.
                  • +
                • Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - sert à spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande.
                  • +
                • Intervalle entre les étiquettes - sert à spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux.
                • Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée.

                  Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles:

                  @@ -302,7 +309,7 @@

                  Insérer un graphique

                La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés Alignement dans une cellule

                -

                L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes:

                +

                L'onglet Accrochage à la cellule comprend les options suivantes:

                • Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi.
                • Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé.
                  • @@ -323,9 +330,9 @@

                  Déplacer et redimensionner des graphiques

                  Modifier les éléments de graphique

                  Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place.

                  Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou le style de décoration.

                  -

                  Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage, le Trait et le Style d'habillage de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme.

                  +

                  Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et le Ligne de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme.

                  - Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans le panneau droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, taille et type. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cette page. + Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme sur le panneau de droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, largeur, taille et opacité. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cette page.

                  Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique.

                  Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément.

                  @@ -347,17 +354,17 @@

                  Ajuster les paramètres du graphique

                  Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique.

                • - Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. + Modifier les données sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique.

                  Remarque: pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique, vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document.

                Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes:

                -
                  +
                  • Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur.
                  • Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. . Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                  • Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                  • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte. L'option Modifier la limite d'habillage n'est pas disponible pour les graphiques.
                    • -
                  • Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique.
                    • +
                  • Modifier les données sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique.
                  • Paramètres avancés du graphique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés.

                  En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D:

                  @@ -371,14 +378,14 @@

                  Ajuster les paramètres du graphique

                • Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches.
                • Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches.
                • Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. -

                  Veuillez noter qu'il n'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique à part, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble.

                  • +

                  Veuillez noter que c'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble.

                Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur le graphique avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du graphique du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre de paramètres du graphique s'ouvre:

                La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés Taille

                L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants:

                  -
                • Largeur et Hauteur utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                  est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ),
                  la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé.
                  • +
                • Largeur et Hauteur utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                  est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci
                  ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé.

                La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés Habillage du texte

                L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants:

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm index fcf4b3aae7..146a618619 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                Insérer des contrôles de contenu

                -

                Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE permet d'ajouter les contrôles de contenu traditionnels, c'est à dire les contrôles qui sont entièrement rétrocompatible avec les éditeurs alternatifs tels que Microsoft Word.

                +

                L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE permet d'ajouter les contrôles de contenu traditionnels, c'est à dire les contrôles qui sont entièrement rétrocompatible avec les éditeurs alternatifs tels que Microsoft Word.

                Actuellement, l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les contrôles de contenu traditionnels tels que Texte brut, Texte enrichi, Image, Zone de liste déroulante, Liste déroulante, Date, Case à cocher.

                • Texte brut est le texte comportant un objet qui ne peut pas être modifié. C'est seulement un paragraphe que le contrôle en texte brut peut contenir.
                  • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCrossReference.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCrossReference.htm index df87e6d67c..0e8dbb40b0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCrossReference.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCrossReference.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                  Insertion de renvoi

                  -

                  Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les renvois permettent de créer les liens vers d'autres parties du même document telles que les diagrammes ou les tableaux. Le renvoi apparaît sous la forme d'un lien hypertexte.

                  +

                  Dans l'éditeur de documents, les renvois permettent de créer les liens vers d'autres parties du même document telles que les diagrammes ou les tableaux. Le renvoi apparaît sous la forme d'un lien hypertexte.

                  Créer un renvoi

                  1. Positionnez le curseur dans le texte à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer un renvoi.
                    2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm index 76190c3ade..bdc5913ca8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                    Insérer la date et l'heure

                    -

                    Pour insérer la Date et l'heure dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

                    +

                    Pour insérer la Date et l'heure dans l'éditeur de documents,

                    1. placer le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer la Date et heure,
                    2. passez à l'onglet Insérer dans la barre d'outils en haut,
                      3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm index cfad57e54a..0223d0b592 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                      Insérer une lettrine

                      -

                      Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, une Lettrine est une lettre initiale majuscule placée au début d'un paragraphe ou d'une section. La taille d'une lettrine est généralement plusieurs lignes.

                      +

                      Dans l'éditeur de documents, une Lettrine est une lettre initiale majuscule placée au début d'un paragraphe ou d'une section. La taille d'une lettrine est généralement plusieurs lignes.

                      Pour ajouter une lettrine,

                      1. placez le curseur à l'intérieur du paragraphe dans lequel vous voulez insérer une lettrine,
                        2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEndnotes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEndnotes.htm index d39d4af807..21fa2cc0f8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEndnotes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEndnotes.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                        Insérer des notes de fin

                        -

                        Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, utilisez les notes de fin pour donner des explications ou ajouter des commentaires à un terme ou une proposition et citer une source à la fin du document.

                        +

                        Dans l'éditeur de documents, utilisez les notes de fin pour donner des explications ou ajouter des commentaires à un terme ou une proposition et citer une source à la fin du document.

                        Insertion de notes de fin

                        Pour insérer la note de fin dans votre document,

                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm index f329003d80..56a40bee50 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                          Insérer des équations

                          -

                          Document Editor vous permet de créer des équations à l'aide des modèles intégrés, de les modifier, d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (à savoir des opérateurs mathématiques, des lettres grecques, des accents, etc.).

                          +

                          L'éditeur de documents vous permet de créer des équations à l'aide des modèles intégrés, de les modifier, d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (à savoir des opérateurs mathématiques, des lettres grecques, des accents, etc.).

                          Ajouter une nouvelle équation

                          Pour insérer une équation depuis la galerie,

                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm index c5cb1045ee..4d2667287d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Insérer des notes de bas de page

                            -

                            Dans l'Éditeur de Documents utilisez les notes de bas de page pour donner des explications ou ajouter des commentaires à un terme ou une proposition et citer une source.

                            +

                            Dans l'éditeur de documents utilisez les notes de bas de page pour donner des explications ou ajouter des commentaires à un terme ou une proposition et citer une source.

                            Insérer des notes de bas de page

                            Pour insérer une note de bas de page dans votre document,

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm index 7c8f096189..bcf1298c37 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                              Insérer les en-têtes et les pieds de page

                              -

                              Pour ajouter ou supprimer un en-tête ou un pied de page à votre document ou modifier ceux qui déjà existent dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

                              +

                              Pour ajouter ou supprimer un en-tête ou un pied de page à votre document ou modifier ceux qui déjà existent dans l'éditeur de documents,

                              1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                              2. cliquez sur l'icône
                                En-tête/Pied de page sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index 4ae2557cea..8038898082 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer des images - + @@ -15,56 +15,56 @@

                                Insérer des images

                                -

                                Éditeur de Documents vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                                +

                                L'éditeur de documents vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre document. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                                Insérer une image

                                Pour insérer une image dans votre document de texte,

                                  -
                                1. placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer l'image,
                                  2. -
                                2. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  3. -
                                3. cliquez sur l'icône
                                  Image de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  4. +
                                4. placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer l'image,
                                  5. +
                                5. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  6. +
                                6. cliquez sur
                                  l'icône Image de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                7. sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image :
                                    -
                                  • l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir -

                                    Dans l’éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à la fois.

                                    +
                                  • l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner un fichier. Recherchez le fichier nécessaire sur votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir +

                                    Dans l'éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionnez plusieurs images à la fois.

                                    • -
                                  • l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK
                                    • +
                                  • l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre dans laquelle il faut saisir l'adresse Web de l'image, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK
                                  • l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK
                                  8. -
                                8. après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position.
                                  9. +
                                9. une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position.
                                -

                                On peut aussi ajouter une légende à l'image. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des légendes.

                                +

                                Il est également possible d'ajouter une légende à l'image. Pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des légendes, veuillez consulter cet article.

                                Déplacer et redimensionner des images

                                -

                                Pour changer la taille de l'image, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'image sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

                                -

                                Pour modifier la position de l'image, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'image vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris.

                                +

                                Pour changer la taille de l'image, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'image sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

                                +

                                Pour modifier la position de l'image, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît lorsque vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'image vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris.

                                Lorsque vous déplacez l'image, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à la positionner sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné).

                                -

                                Pour faire pivoter une image, déplacer le curseur vers la poignée de rotation et faites la glisser dans le sens horaire ou antihoraire. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Shift tout en faisant pivoter.

                                +

                                Pour faire pivoter une image, déplacer le curseur vers la poignée de rotation et faites la glisser dans le sens horaire ou antihoraire. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en faisant pivoter.

                                - Remarque : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. + Remarque: la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici.

                                Ajuster les paramètres de l'image

                                -

                                L'onglet Paramètres de l'image

                                -

                                Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                                +

                                Onglet Paramètres de l'image

                                +

                                Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants:

                                  -
                                • Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuel. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez restaurer la taille d'origine de l'image en cliquant sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Le bouton Ajuster aux marges permet de redimensionner l'image et de l'ajuster dans les marges gauche et droite. -

                                  Le bouton Rogner sert à recadrer l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez positionner le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage lorsque il se transforme en et faites la glisser.

                                  +
                                • Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuel. Le bouton Ajuster aux marges permet de redimensionner l'image et de l'ajuster dans les marges gauche et droite. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez rétablir la taille de l'image source en cliquant sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Le bouton Ajuster aux marges permet de redimensionner l'image qu'elle corresponde à la zone entre la marge droite et la marge gauche de la page. +

                                  Le bouton Rogner permet de recadrer l'image. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez positionner le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage lorsque il se transforme en et faites la glisser. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez placer le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de rognage lorsque il se transforme en icône et faites glisser la zone.

                                  • Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté.
                                  • Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle.
                                  • Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés.
                                  • Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle.
                                  -

                                  Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications.

                                  -

                                  Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir ou Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix :

                                  +

                                  Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications.

                                  +

                                  Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix:

                                    -
                                  • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme.
                                    • +
                                  • Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme.
                                  • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées.
                                    • -
                                  • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée.
                                    • +
                                  • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée.
                                  -
                                  • -
                                • Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : +
                                  • +
                                • Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons:
                                  • pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                                  • pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                                    • @@ -73,78 +73,79 @@

                                    Ajuster les paramètres de l'image

                                • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
                                  • -
                                • Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL.
                                  • +
                                • Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou À partir d'une URL.
                                -

                                Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes :

                                -
                                  +

                                  Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes:

                                  +
                                  • Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur.
                                    • -
                                  • Organiser sert à placer l'image sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des images pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs images à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                    • -
                                  • Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                    • -
                                  • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée.
                                    • -
                                  • Faire pivoter permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement.
                                    • -
                                  • Rogner est utilisé pour appliquer l'une des options de rognage : Rogner, Remplir ou Ajuster. Sélectionnez l'option Rogner dans le sous-menu, puis faites glisser les poignées de recadrage pour définir la zone de rognage, puis cliquez à nouveau sur l'une de ces trois options dans le sous-menu pour appliquer les modifications.
                                    • +
                                  • Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                    • +
                                  • Aligner sert à aligner l'image à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu ou en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, veuillez consulter cette page.
                                    • +
                                  • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner l'un des styles d'habillage disponibles - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte, ou modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible que si le style d'habillage défini n'est pas En ligne. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée.
                                    • +
                                  • Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement.
                                    • +
                                  • Enregistrer en tant qu'image sert à sauvegarder l'image en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur.
                                    • +
                                  • Rogner sert à sélectionner l'une des options de recadrage: Rogner, Remplir ou Ajuster. Sélectionnez l'option Rogner dans le sous-menu, ensuite faites glisser les poignées de recadrage pour définir la zone de rognage, puis cliquez à nouveau sur l'une de ces trois options dans le sous-menu pour appliquer les modifications.
                                  • Taille actuelle sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image et rétablir la taille d'origine.
                                    • -
                                  • Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL.
                                    • -
                                  • Paramètres avancés de l'image sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Image - Paramètres avancés'.
                                    • -
                                  +
                                • Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou À partir d'une URL.
                                  • +
                                • Paramètres avancés de l'image sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés.
                                  • +

                                L'onglet Paramètres de la forme

                                -

                                Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type du Ligne a taille et la couleur ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence.

                                -

                                Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image.

                                +

                                Une fois l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme deviendra aussi disponible à droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur et l'opacité de la Ligne ainsi que le type de la forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence.

                                +

                                Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image.

                                Ajuster les paramètres de l'image

                                -

                                Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre :

                                +

                                Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre:

                                La fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés Taille

                                -

                                L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants :

                                +

                                L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants:

                                  -
                                • Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                                  est activé (Ajouter un ombre
                                  ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle.
                                  • +
                                • Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                                  est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci
                                  ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle.

                                La fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés Rotation

                                -

                                L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

                                +

                                L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants:

                                • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                                • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers).

                                La fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés Habillage du texte

                                -

                                L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants :

                                +

                                L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants:

                                • Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont l'image est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles).

                                  • En ligne - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles.

                                    -

                                    Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte :

                                    +

                                    Si vous sélectionnez l'un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte :

                                    • -

                                  • Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image.

                                    • -

                                  • Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de l'image.

                                    • -

                                  • Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel.

                                    • -

                                  • Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de l'image.

                                    • -

                                  • Devant le texte - l'image est affichée sur le texte

                                    • -

                                  • Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur l'image.

                                    • +

                                  • Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique.

                                    • +

                                  • Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour du graphique.

                                    • +

                                  • Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel.

                                    • +

                                  • Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas du graphique.

                                    • +

                                  • Devant le texte - l'image s'affiche sur le texte.

                                    • +

                                  • Derrière le texte - le texte s'affiche sur l'image.

                                Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, gauche, droit).

                                La fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés Position

                                -

                                L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné :

                                +

                                L'onglet Position n'est disponible que si vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que En ligne. Cet onglet contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné:

                                • - La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : + La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants:
                                  • Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite,
                                    • -
                                  • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite,
                                    • +
                                  • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite,
                                  • Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite.
                                • - La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : + La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants:
                                  • Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure,
                                    • -
                                  • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure,
                                    • +
                                  • Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure,
                                  • Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure.
                                • Déplacer avec le texte détermine si l'image se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné.
                                • Chevauchement détermine si deux images sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page.
                                -

                                La fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés

                                +

                                Image - Paramètres avancés

                                L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image.

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm index 9aea712592..7df5354809 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                Insérer des numéros de ligne

                                -

                                Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE peut automatiquement compter les lignes dans votre document. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous devez faire référence à des lignes spécifiques dans un document, comme un contrat juridique ou un code de script. Pour ajouter la numérotation de ligne dans un document, utiliser la fonction Numéros de ligne. Veuillez noter que le texte ajouté aux objets tels que les tableaux, les zones de texte, les graphiques, les en-têtes/pieds de page etc. n'est pas inclus dans la numérotation consécutive. Tous ces objets comptent pour une ligne.

                                +

                                L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE peut automatiquement compter les lignes dans votre document. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous devez faire référence à des lignes spécifiques dans un document, comme un contrat juridique ou un code de script. Pour ajouter la numérotation de ligne dans un document, utiliser la fonction Numéros de ligne. Veuillez noter que le texte ajouté aux objets tels que les tableaux, les zones de texte, les graphiques, les en-têtes/pieds de page etc. n'est pas inclus dans la numérotation consécutive. Tous ces objets comptent pour une ligne.

                                Ajouter des numéros de ligne

                                1. Accédez à l'onglet Disposition dans la barre d'outils en haut et appuyez sur l'icône
                                  Numéros de ligne.
                                  2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm index 30219def2e..e2c283da50 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                  Insérer les numéros de page

                                  -

                                  Pour insérer des numéros de page dans l'Éditeur de Documents,,

                                  +

                                  Pour insérer des numéros de page dans l'éditeur de documents,

                                  1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  2. cliquez sur l'icône
                                    En-tête/Pied de page sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                    3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm index 07d9eecc14..ced2141766 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm @@ -1,81 +1,80 @@  - Insérer les références + Insérer des références - + -Éditeur de Documents +
                                    -

                                    Insérer les références

                                    -

                                    Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE supporte les logiciels de gestion de références bibliographiques Mendeley, Zotero et EasyBib pour insérer des références dans votre document.

                                    +

                                    Insérer des références

                                    +

                                    L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les logiciels de gestion de références Mendeley, Zotero et EasyBib pour insérer des références dans votre document.

                                    -

                                    Mendeley

                                    -

                                    Intégrer Mendeley à ONLYOFFICE

                                    +

                                    Mendeley

                                    +

                                    Connecter ONLYOFFICE à Mendeley

                                      -
                                    1. Connectez-vous à votre compte personnel Mendeley.
                                      2. -
                                    2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                      Mendeley, le panneau de gauche s'ouvre dans votre document. +
                                    3. Connectez-vous à votre compte Mendeley.
                                      4. +
                                    4. Dans votre document, passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                      Mendeley, un panneau s'ouvrira à gauche de votre document.
                                    5. - Appuyez sur Copier le lien et ouvrir la fiche.
                                      - Le navigateur ouvre la fiche du site Mendeley. Complétez la fiche et notez l'identifiant de l'application ONLYOFFICE. + Cliquez sur le bouton Copier le lien et ouvrir le formulaire.
                                      Le navigateur ouvre le formulaire sur le site Mendeley. Remplissez le formulaire et notez l'identifiant de l'application ONLYOFFICE.
                                    6. Revenez à votre document.
                                      7. -
                                    7. Entrez l'identifiant de l'application et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer.
                                      8. -
                                    8. Appuyez sur Me connecter.
                                      9. -
                                    9. Appuyez sur Continuer.
                                      10. +
                                    10. Saisissez l'identifiant de l'application et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer.
                                      11. +
                                    11. Cliquez sur Se connecter.
                                      12. +
                                    12. Cliquez sur Continuer.
                                    -

                                    Or, ONLYOFFICE s'est connecté à votre compte Mendeley.

                                    -

                                    Insertion des références

                                    +

                                    Désormais, ONLYOFFICE est connecté à votre compte Mendeley.

                                    +

                                    Insérer des références à l'aide de Mendeley

                                      -
                                    1. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la référence doit être insérée.
                                      2. +
                                    2. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer une ou plusieurs références.
                                    3. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                      Mendeley.
                                      4. -
                                    4. Tapez le texte à chercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier.
                                      5. +
                                    5. Saisissez le texte à rechercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier.
                                    6. Activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher.
                                      7. -
                                    7. [Facultatif] Tapez le texte nouveau à chercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher.
                                      8. -
                                    8. Sélectionnez le style pour référence de la liste déroulante Style.
                                      9. -
                                    9. Cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie.
                                      10. +
                                    10. [Facultatif] Saisissez le nouveau texte à rechercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher.
                                      11. +
                                    11. Sélectionnez le style de la référence de la liste déroulante Style.
                                      12. +
                                    12. cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie.
                                    -

                                    Zotero

                                    -

                                    Intégrer Zotero à ONLYOFFICE

                                    +

                                    Zotero

                                    +

                                    Connecter ONLYOFFICE à Zotero

                                      -
                                    1. Connectez-vous à votre compte personnel Zotero.
                                      2. -
                                    2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires de votre document ouvert et choisissez
                                      Zotero, le panneau de gauche s'ouvre dans votre document.
                                      3. -
                                    3. Cliquez sur le lien Configuration Zotero API.
                                      4. -
                                    4. Il faut obtenir une clé sur le site Zotéro, la copier et la conserver en vue d'une utilisation ultérieure.
                                      5. -
                                    5. Revenez à votre document et coller la clé API.
                                      6. -
                                    6. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
                                      7. +
                                    7. Connectez-vous à votre compte Zotero.
                                      8. +
                                    8. Dans votre document, passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                      Zotero, un panneau s'ouvrira à gauche de votre document.
                                      9. +
                                    9. Cliquez sur le lien Paramètres de l'API Zotero.
                                      10. +
                                    10. Sur le site Zotero, créez une nouvelle clé, copiez et conservez-la pour usage ultérieur.
                                      11. +
                                    11. Revenez à votre document et collez la clé API.
                                      12. +
                                    12. Cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                    -

                                    Or, ONLYOFFICE s'est connecté à votre compte Zotero.

                                    -

                                    Insertion des références

                                    +

                                    Désormais, ONLYOFFICE est connecté à votre compte Zotero.

                                    +

                                    Insérer des références à l'aide de Zotero

                                      -
                                    1. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la référence doit être insérée.
                                      2. +
                                    2. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer une ou plusieurs références.
                                    3. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                      Zotero.
                                      4. -
                                    4. Tapez le texte à chercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier.
                                      5. +
                                    5. Saisissez le texte à rechercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier.
                                    6. Activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher.
                                      7. -
                                    7. [Facultatif] Tapez le texte nouveau à chercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher.
                                      8. -
                                    8. Sélectionnez le style pour référence de la liste déroulante Style.
                                      9. -
                                    9. Cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie.
                                      10. +
                                    10. [Facultatif] Saisissez le nouveau texte à rechercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher.
                                      11. +
                                    11. Sélectionnez le style de la référence de la liste déroulante Style.
                                      12. +
                                    12. cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie.
                                    -

                                    EasyBib

                                    +

                                    EasyBib

                                      -
                                    1. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la référence doit être insérée.
                                      2. +
                                    2. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer une ou plusieurs références.
                                    3. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                      EasyBib.
                                      4. -
                                    4. Sélectionnez le type de source à trouver.
                                      5. -
                                    5. Tapez le texte à chercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier.
                                      6. -
                                    6. Cliquez sur '+' de la partie droite du Livre/Journal, de l'article/site Web. Cette source sera ajoutée dans la Bibliographie.
                                      7. +
                                    7. Sélectionnez le type de source à rechercher.
                                      8. +
                                    8. Saisissez le texte à rechercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier.
                                      9. +
                                    9. Cliquez sur '+' dans la partie droite du Livre/Journal, de l'article/site Web. Cette source sera ajoutée dans la Bibliographie.
                                    10. Sélectionnez le style de référence.
                                      11. -
                                    11. Appuyez sur Ajouter la bibliographie dans le document pour insérer les références.
                                      12. +
                                    12. Cliquez sur Ajouter la bibliographie dans le document pour insérer les références.
                                    - Gif de l'extension Easybib + Easybib plugin gif
                                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index f60864ba5c..0c6d3697f8 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer des graphiques SmartArt - + @@ -23,6 +23,7 @@

                                    Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                                  3. placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus.
                                  4. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance.
                                  +

                                  Vous pouvez sauvegarder un graphique SmartArt en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel.

                                  Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite:

                                  Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme.

                                  @@ -33,7 +34,7 @@

                                  Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                                2. Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt.

                                  Couleur de remplissage

                                  -

                                  Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix:

                                  +

                                  Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir des jeux de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix:

                                3. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme.
                                  pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: @@ -90,9 +91,10 @@

                                  Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                                4. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt.
                                    -
                                  • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                                    • +
                                  • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                                  • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                                  • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                                    • +
                                  • Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur.
                                5. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
                                  6. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm index 4585fedcfc..7e11e12e1f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                  Insérer des symboles et des caractères

                                  -

                                  Pour insérer des symboles qui ne sont pas sur votre clavier dans l'Éditeur de Documents, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole option et suivez ces étapes simples :

                                  +

                                  Pour insérer des symboles qui ne sont pas sur votre clavier dans l'éditeur de documents, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole option et suivez ces étapes simples :

                                  • placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un symbole spécifique,
                                  • passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                    • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm index 03c89196d7..ee6e7a0d2d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                    Insérer des tableaux

                                    Insérer un tableau

                                    -

                                    Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents,

                                    +

                                    Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document dans l'éditeur de documents,

                                    1. placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le tableau,
                                    2. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                      3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index 152c5fc214..2f3a554183 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                      Insérer des objets textuels

                                      -

                                      Pour rendre votre texte plus explicite et attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique du document, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police prédéfini et couleur qui permet d'appliquer certains effets de texte) dans l'Éditeur de Documents.

                                      +

                                      Pour rendre votre texte plus explicite et attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique du document, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police prédéfini et couleur qui permet d'appliquer certains effets de texte) dans l'éditeur de documents.

                                      Ajouter un objet textuel

                                      Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la page. Pour le faire :

                                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm index 3035034903..66a55b5678 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
                                        - +

                                        Effectuer des appels audio et vidéo

                                        -

                                        Les appels audio et vidéo sont disponibles immédiatement à partir de l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE à l'aide du plug-in Jitsi. Jitsi offre les fonctionnalités de vidéoconférence sécurisées et faciles à déployer.

                                        -

                                        Remarque : Plug-in Jitsi n'est pas installé par défaut, il est à installer manuellement. Veuillez consulter l'article correspondant pour trouver le guide d'installation manuelle Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur

                                        +

                                        Les appels audio et vidéo sont disponibles immédiatement à partir de l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE à l'aide du plug-in Jitsi. Jitsi offre les fonctionnalités de vidéoconférence sécurisées et faciles à déployer.

                                        +

                                        Remarque : Plug-in Jitsi n'est pas installé par défaut, il est à installer manuellement. Veuillez consulter l'article correspondant pour trouver le guide d'installation manuelle Ajouter des modules complémentaires au cloud ONLYOFFICE ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur

                                        1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur l'icône Jitsi dans la barre d'outils supérieure.
                                        2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm index e70cd1c568..ab93109d3d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                        Régler l'interligne du paragraphe

                                        -

                                        En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez définir la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et précédent ou suivant.

                                        +

                                        En utilisant l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez définir la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et précédent ou suivant.

                                        Pour ce faire,

                                        1. placez le curseur dans le paragraphe choisi, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris ou tout le texte en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A,
                                          2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index 4ccb0d8e3a..fb160e9966 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Fonctionnalités de correction automatique - + @@ -12,49 +12,48 @@
                                          - +

                                          Fonctionnalités de correction automatique

                                          -

                                          Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique ONLYOFFICE dans l'Éditeur de Documents, fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus.

                                          -

                                          Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique.

                                          +

                                          Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique de l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE servent à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus.

                                          +

                                          Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique.

                                          - La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets : Math Autocorrect, Fonctions reconnues, Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe, et Correction automatique de texte. + La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets: AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et Correction automatique de texte.

                                          AutoMaths

                                          -

                                          Lorsque vous travaillez dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en les tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque.

                                          +

                                          Lorsque vous travailler dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque.

                                          Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé.

                                          -

                                          Remarque : Les codes sont sensibles à la casse.

                                          -

                                          Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> AutoMaths.

                                          +

                                          Remarque: Les codes sont sensibles à la casse

                                          +

                                          Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths.

                                          Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques.

                                            -
                                          • Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer.
                                            • -
                                          • Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par.
                                            • -
                                          • Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                                            • +
                                          • Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer.
                                            • +
                                          • Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par.
                                            • +
                                          • Cliquez sur Ajouter.

                                          -

                                          Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques

                                          +

                                          Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques.

                                          • Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier.
                                            • -
                                          • Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones : le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par.
                                            • -
                                          • Cliquez sur le bouton Remplacer.
                                            • +
                                          • Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones: le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par.
                                            • +
                                          • Cliquez sur Remplacer.

                                          -

                                          Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques

                                          +

                                          Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques.

                                          • Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste.
                                            • -
                                          • Cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer.
                                            • +
                                          • Cliquez sur Supprimer.

                                          Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer.

                                          Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine.

                                          Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe.

                                          Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe

                                          -

                                          Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous le codes disponibles dans l'Éditeur de Présentations. à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> AutoMaths.

                                          -
                                          - Les codes disponibles +

                                          Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous les codes pris en charge par l'éditeur de documents à présent. La liste complète des codes pris en charge est également disponible sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths.

                                          +
                                          Les codes disponibles
          @@ -1408,7 +1407,7 @@

          AutoMaths

          - + @@ -1754,12 +1753,12 @@

          AutoMaths

          - + - + @@ -2184,7 +2183,7 @@

          AutoMaths

          - + @@ -2512,12 +2511,12 @@

          AutoMaths

          - + - + @@ -2537,23 +2536,26 @@

          AutoMaths

          Code
          \lmoust
          		 Séparateurs
          \qdrt
          		Nombres premiersRacine carrée et radicaux
          \quadratic
          		Nombres premiersRacine carrée et radicaux
          \rangle
          \sqrt
          		Nombres premiersRacine carrée et radicaux
          \sqsubseteq Opérateurs binaires
          <</<
          		Opérateurs relationnels
          <=/=
          		Opérateurs relationnels
          Opérateurs relationnels
          - -
          +

          Fonctions reconnues

          -

          Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnaît comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Pour accéder à la liste de fonctions reconnues, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues.

          +

          Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues.

          Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter.

          Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer.

          Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer.

          Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies.

          -

          Recognized Functions

          +

          Fonctions reconnues

          Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe

          -

          Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, comme par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des adresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste.

          -

          L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon le cas. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS.

          -

          Si vous souhaitez désactiver une des options de mise en forme automatique, désactivez la case à coche de l'élément pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas de mise en forme automatique sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe.

          -

          AutoFormat As You Type

          +

          Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des adresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste.

          +

          L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon le cas. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS.

          +

          Si vous souhaitez désactiver une des options de mise en forme automatique, passez sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe.

          +

          Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe

          Correction automatique de texte

          -

          Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des phrases. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase.

          -

          AutoCorrect

          +

          Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des propositions. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase.

          +

          Par défaut, l'éditeur met la première lettre du mot dans une cellule en majuscule. Pour désactiver cette option, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Mettre la première lettre des cellules du tableau en majuscule.

          +

          Vous pouvez également personnaliser la mise en majuscule après certains mots en saisissant les mots requis dans le champ Ne pas mettre en majuscule après et en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter, ou en choisissant les mots requis dans la liste correspondante ci-dessous.

          +

          Vous pouvez choisir le mode de fonctionnement des exceptions en fonction de la langue dans la liste déroulante Exceptions pour la langue.

          +

          Utilisez le bouton Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour annuler toutes les modifications personnalisées.

          +

          Corrections automatiques

          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm index 8a62ebcd87..62630ef1e3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

          Afficher/masquer les caractères non imprimables

          Les caractères non imprimables aident à éditer le document. Ils indiquent la présence de différents types de mises en forme, mais ils ne sont pas imprimés, même quand ils sont affichés à l'écran.

          -

          Pour afficher ou masquer les caractères non imprimables dans l'Éditeur de Documents, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

          +

          Pour afficher ou masquer les caractères non imprimables dans l'éditeur de documents, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

          Les caractères non imprimables sont les suivants :

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm index 9f5d397b44..6c269d0d17 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Extraction du texte incrusté dans l'image

          -

          En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez extraire du texte incrusté dans des images (.png .jpg) et l'insérer dans votre document.

          +

          En utilisant l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez extraire du texte incrusté dans des images (.png .jpg) et l'insérer dans votre document.

          1. Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où le texte doit être inséré.
          2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
            OCR dans le menu.
            3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index d9d8dbdbbf..9f1c25fb9d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document existant

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez créer un nouveau document, ouvrir un document existant ou revenir à la liste des documents existants.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez créer un nouveau document, ouvrir un document existant ou revenir à la liste des documents existants.

            Pour créer un nouveau document

            Dans la version en ligne

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm index 3b04aab298..9ee9b8149f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Insérer des sauts de page

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez ajouter un saut de page pour commencer une nouvelle page, insérer une page blanche et régler les options de pagination.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez ajouter un saut de page pour commencer une nouvelle page, insérer une page blanche et régler les options de pagination.

            Pour insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de page sous l'onglet Insertion ou Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option Insertion un saut de page dans le menu. Vous pouvez également utiliser la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Entrée.

            Pour insérer une page blanche à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Page vierge sous l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cela insère deux sauts de page qui créent une page blanche.

            Pour insérer un saut de page avant le paragraphe sélectionné c'est-à-dire pour commencer ce paragraphe en haut d'une nouvelle page :

            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm index 7be6719277..36067c63b2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Modifier les retraits du paragraphe

            -

            En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez changer le premier décalage de la ligne sur la partie gauche de la page aussi bien que le décalage du paragraphe du côté gauche et du côté droit de la page.

            +

            En utilisant l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez changer le premier décalage de la ligne sur la partie gauche de la page aussi bien que le décalage du paragraphe du côté gauche et du côté droit de la page.

            Pour ce faire,

            • configurez les paramètres nécessaires dans la section Retraits sur la barre latérale droite Paramètres du paragraphe, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm index 9babf233d4..0c0fea311b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

              Modification d'une image

              -

              Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations.

              +

              L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations.

              1. Sélectionnez une image incorporée dans votre document.
              2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index fa2336f50e..7c62e3c4fc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Enregistrer, exporter, imprimer votre document + Enregistrer, télécharger et imprimer un document - + @@ -11,56 +11,74 @@
                -
                - -
                -

                Enregistrer, exporter, imprimer votre document

                -

                Enregistrement

                -

                Par défaut, l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                +
                + +
                +

                Enregistrer, télécharger et imprimer un document

                +

                Enregistrement

                +

                Par défaut, l'éditeur de documents en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés .

                Pour enregistrer manuellement votre document actuel dans le format et l'emplacement actuels,

                  -
                • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer
                  dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                  • +
                • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer
                  dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou
                • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer.
                -

                Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                -
                -

                Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer le document sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format,

                -
                  -
                1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  2. -
                2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous...,
                  3. -
                3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDF/A, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de document (DOTX or OTT).
                  4. -
                -
                +

                Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés .

                +
                +

                Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer le document sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format,

                +
                  +
                1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  2. +
                2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous,
                  3. +
                3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de document (DOTX or OTT).
                  4. +
                +
                -

                Téléchargement en cours

                -

                Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger le document résultant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                -
                  -
                1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  2. -
                2. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme...,
                  3. -
                3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM.
                  4. -
                -

                Enregistrer une copie

                -

                Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail,

                -
                  -
                1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  2. -
                2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous...,
                  3. -
                3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB,DOCXF, OFORM.
                  4. -
                4. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer.
                  5. -
                +

                Téléchargement en cours

                +

                Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger le document résultant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                +
                  +
                1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  2. +
                2. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme,
                  3. +
                3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG.
                  4. +
                +

                Enregistrer une copie

                +

                Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail,

                +
                  +
                1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  2. +
                2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer une copie sous,
                  3. +
                3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG.
                  4. +
                4. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer.
                  5. +
                -

                Impression

                +

                Impression

                Pour imprimer le document actif,

                  -
                • cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer le fichier
                  dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                  • +
                • cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer
                  dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou
                • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer.
                Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance.
                -

                Il est aussi possible d'imprimer un fragment de texte en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Imprimer la sélection).

                -

                Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                +

                La fenêtre Paramètres d'impression

                +

                Configurez les paramètres suivants dans la fenêtre Imprimer qui s'affiche:

                +
                  +
                • Destination - sélectionnez la destination du fichier à imprimer, par ex. Enregistrer au format PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc.
                  • +
                • Orientation - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale.
                  • +
                • Pages - sélectionnez l'une des options d'impression: Tous, Actuelle, Pages impaires uniquement, Pages paires uniquement ou Personnalisé. Dans ce dernier cas, il faut saisir les numéros de pages manuellement.
                  • +
                • + Mode couleur - sélectionnez si vous souhaitez imprimer le fichier Couleur ou Noir et blanc. Veuillez noter que cette option n'est disponible que si Microsoft XPS Document Writer est défini comme le paramètre de Destination. Lorsque Fax est défini comme le paramètre de Destination, la couleur par défaut est noir et blanc. +

                  Cliquez sur Plus de paramètres pour accéder aux paramètres avancés,

                  +
                  • +
                • Taille du papier - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante ou définissez la taille de l'utilisateur.
                  • +
                • Mise à l'échelle - définir la mise à l'échelle du fichier lors de l'impression, ajuster à la largeur de page ou sélectionnez la mise à l'échelle personnalisée en utilisant la case à cocher Échelle et le champ de saisie approprié.
                  • +
                • Pages par feuille - définir le nombre de pages que vous voulez sur une page imprimée, par ex. deux, six, neuf etc.;
                  • +
                • Marges - définir les marges de la page. Vous pouvez choisir les marges par défaut ou personnaliser les marges en pouces. Pour les marges personnalisées, définissez manuellement les valeurs pour la marge supérieure, inférieure, gauche et droite. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Aucun pour ne pas avoir de marges.
                  • +
                • Options - cochez la case pour Imprimer les en-têtes et les pieds de page ou décochez cette option pour imprimer sans aucun en-tête et les pied de page.
                  • +
                • Imprimer via la boîte de dialogue du système - cliquez sur cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue du système et configurer l'impression.
                  • +
                + Dans la version de bureau, les paramètres d'impression disponibles sont Zone d'impression, Nombre de pages, Copies, Impression sur les deux côtés, Taille de page, Orientation de la page et Marges. Vous pouvez également imprimer au format PDF ou utilisez le bouton Impression rapide de la barre d'outils supérieure pour imprimer le fichier sur la dernière imprimante sélectionnée ou sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par défaut. +

                Il est aussi possible d'imprimer un fragment de texte en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Imprimer la sélection).

                +

                Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm index 3e68bb2b15..f3e7a5d816 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                Insérer les sauts de section

                -

                Les sauts de section vous permettent d'appliquer des mises en page et mises en formes différentes pour de certaines parties de votre document. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numérotations des pages, des marges, la taille, l'orientation, ou le numéro de colonne individuels pour chaque section séparée.

                +

                Les sauts de section vous permettent d'appliquer des mises en page et mises en formes différentes pour de certaines parties de votre document. Dans l'éditeur de documents, par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numérotations des pages, des marges, la taille, l'orientation, ou le numéro de colonne individuels pour chaque section séparée.

                Remarque : un saut de section inséré définit la mise en page de la partie précédente du document.

                Pour insérer un saut de section à la position actuelle du curseur :

                  diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm index aba84b0b59..0c43e3b85b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                  Configurer le niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe

                  -

                  Le niveau de plan désigne le niveau de paragraphe dans la structure du document. Les niveaux suivants sont disponibles dans l'Éditeur de Documents : Texte de base, Niveau 1- - Niveau 9. Le niveau hiérarchique peut être spécifié de différentes manières, par exemple, en utilisant des styles de titre : quand vous appliquez un style de titre (Titre 1 - Titre 9) à un paragraphe, il acquiert un niveau de plan correspondant. Si vous appliquez un niveau à un paragraphe à l'aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe, le paragraphe acquiert le niveau de structure uniquement tendis que son style reste intact. Le niveau hiérarchique peut également être modifié à l'aide du panneau de Navigation à gauche en utilisant des options contextuels du menu.

                  +

                  Le niveau de plan désigne le niveau de paragraphe dans la structure du document. Les niveaux suivants sont disponibles dans l'éditeur de documents : Texte de base, Niveau 1- - Niveau 9. Le niveau hiérarchique peut être spécifié de différentes manières, par exemple, en utilisant des styles de titre : quand vous appliquez un style de titre (Titre 1 - Titre 9) à un paragraphe, il acquiert un niveau de plan correspondant. Si vous appliquez un niveau à un paragraphe à l'aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe, le paragraphe acquiert le niveau de structure uniquement tendis que son style reste intact. Le niveau hiérarchique peut également être modifié à l'aide du panneau de Navigation à gauche en utilisant des options contextuels du menu.

                  Pour modifier un niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe à l'aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe:

                  1. Cliquez droit sur le texte et choisissez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez l'option Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite,
                    2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm index a0523b2678..564b367e20 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Régler les paramètres de page - + @@ -15,12 +15,12 @@

                    Régler les paramètres de page

                    -

                    Pour modifier la mise en page dans l'Éditeur de Documents, c'est-à-dire définir l'orientation et la taille de la page, ajuster les marges et insérer des colonnes, utilisez les icônes correspondantes dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                    -

                    Remarque : tous ces paramètres sont appliqués au document entier. Si vous voulez définir de différentes marges de page, l'orientation, la taille, ou le numéro de colonne pour les parties différentes de votre document, consultez cette page.

                    +

                    Pour modifier la mise en page dans l'éditeur de documents, c'est-à-dire définir l'orientation et la taille de la page, ajuster les marges et insérer des colonnes, utilisez les icônes correspondantes sous l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                    +

                    Remarque: tous ces paramètres sont appliqués au document entier. Si vous voulez définir de différentes marges de page, l'orientation, la taille, ou le numéro de colonne pour les parties différentes de votre document, consultez cette page.

                    Orientation de page

                    -

                    Changez l'orientation de page actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône Orientation . Le type d'orientation par défaut est Portrait qui peut être commuté sur Paysage.

                    +

                    Changez l'orientation de page actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône Orientation . Le type d'orientation par défaut est Portrait qui peut être commuté sur Paysage.

                    Taille de la page

                    -

                    Changez le format A4 par défaut en cliquant sur l'icône Taille de la page et sélectionnez la taille nécessaire dans la liste. Les formats offerts sont les suivants :

                    +

                    Changez le format A4 par défaut en cliquant sur l'icône Taille et sélectionnez le format nécessaire dans la liste. Les formats offerts sont les suivants. Les formats offerts sont les suivants:

                    • US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm)
                    • US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm)
                      • @@ -36,34 +36,34 @@

                      Taille de la page

                    • Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm)
                    • Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm)
                    -

                    Vous pouvez définir une taille de la page particulière en utilisant l'option Taille personnalisée dans la liste. La fenêtre Taille de la page s'ouvrira où vous pourrez sélectionner le Préréglage voulu (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Enveloppe #10, Enveloppe DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Enveloppe Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) ou définir des valeurs personnalisées de Largeur et Hauteur. Entrez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les changements.

                    -

                    Taille personnalisée de page

                    +

                    Vous pouvez définir une taille de la page particulière en utilisant l'option Taille personnalisée dans la liste. La fenêtre Taille de la page s'ouvrira où vous pourrez sélectionner le Préréglage voulu (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Enveloppe #10, Enveloppe DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Enveloppe Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) ou définir des valeurs personnalisées de Largeur et Hauteur. Saisissez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les changements.

                    +

                    Taille page personnalisée

                    Marges de la page

                    -

                    Modifiez les marges par défaut, c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bords de la page et le texte du paragraphe, en cliquant sur l'icône Marges et sélectionnez un des paramètres prédéfinis : Normal, US Normal, Étroit, Modérer, Large. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Marges personnalisées pour définir les valeurs nécessaires dans la fenêtre Marges qui s'ouvre. Entrez les valeurs des marges Haut, Bas, Gauche et Droite de la page dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction.

                    +

                    Modifiez les marges par défaut, c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bords de la page et le texte du paragraphe, en cliquant sur l'icône Marges et sélectionnez un des paramètres prédéfinis: Normal, US Normal, Étroit, Modérer, Large. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Marges personnalisées pour définir les valeurs nécessaires dans la fenêtre Marges qui s'ouvre. Entrez les valeurs des marges Haut, Bas, Gauche et Droite de la page dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction.

                    Marges personnalisées

                    -

                    Position de la reliure permet de définir l'espace supplémentaire à la marge latérale gauche ou supérieure du document. La Position de reliure assure que la reliure n'empiète pas sur le texte. Dans la fenêtre Marges spécifiez la talle de marge et la position de la reliure appropriée.

                    -

                    Remarque : ce n'est pas possible de définir la Position de reliure lorsque l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis est active.

                    -

                    Dans le menu déroulante Plusieurs pages, choisissez l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis pour configurer des pages en regard dans des documents recto verso. Lorsque cette option est activée, les marges Gauche et Droite se transforment en marges A l'intérieur et A l'extérieur respectivement.

                    +

                    Position de la reliure permet de définir l'espace supplémentaire à la marge latérale gauche ou supérieure du document. L'option Reliure assure que la reliure n'empiète pas sur le texte. Dans la fenêtre Marges spécifiez la position de la reliure appropriée dans le champ de saisie et .

                    +

                    Remarque: ce n'est pas possible de définir la Position de reliure lorsque l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis est active.

                    +

                    Dans le menu déroulante Plusieurs pages, choisissez l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis pour configurer des pages en regard dans des documents recto verso. Lorsque cette option est activée, les marges Gauche et Droite se transforment en marges À l'intérieur et À l'extérieur respectivement.

                    Dans le menu déroulante Orientation choisissez Portrait ou Paysage.

                    Toutes les modifications apportées s'affichent dans la fenêtre Aperçu.

                    -

                    Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK. Les marges personnalisées seront appliquées au document actuel et l'option Dernière mesure avec les paramètres spécifiés apparaît dans la liste des Marges pour que vous puissiez les appliquer à d'autres documents.

                    -

                    Vous pouvez également modifier les marges manuellement en faisant glisser la bordure entre les zones grises et blanches sur les règles (les zones grises des règles indiquent les marges de page) :

                    +

                    Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK. Les marges personnalisées seront appliquées au document actuel et l'option Dernières personnalisées avec les paramètres spécifiés apparaît dans la liste Marges pour que vous puissiez les appliquer à d'autres documents.

                    +

                    Vous pouvez également modifier les marges manuellement en faisant glisser la bordure entre les zones grises et blanches sur les règles (les zones grises des règles indiquent les marges de page):

                    Colonnes

                    -

                    Pour appliquez une mise en page multicolonne, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes et sélectionnez le type de la colonne nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options suivantes sont disponibles :

                    +

                    Pour appliquez une mise en page à plusieurs colonnes, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes et sélectionnez le type de la colonne nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options suivantes sont disponibles:

                      -
                    • Deux
                      - pour ajouter deux colonnes de la même largeur,
                      • -
                    • Trois
                      - pour ajouter trois colonnes de la même largeur,
                      • -
                    • A gauche
                      - pour ajouter deux colonnes : une étroite colonne à gauche et une large colonne à droite,
                      • -
                    • A droite
                      - pour ajouter deux colonnes : une étroite colonne à droite et une large colonne à gauche.
                      • +
                    • Deux
                      pour ajouter deux colonnes de la même largeur,
                      • +
                    • Trois
                      pour ajouter trois colonnes de la même largeur,
                      • +
                    • À gauche
                      pour ajouter deux colonnes: une étroite colonne à gauche et une large colonne à droite,
                      • +
                    • À droite
                      pour ajouter deux colonnes: une étroite colonne à droite et une large colonne à gauche.
                    -

                    Si vous souhaitez ajuster les paramètres de colonne, sélectionnez l'option Colonnes personnalisées dans la liste. La fenêtre Colonnes s'ouvrira où vous pourrez définir le Nombre de colonnes nécessaire (il est possible d'ajouter jusqu'à 12 colonnes) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Entrez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Cochez la case Diviseur de colonne pour ajouter une ligne verticale entre les colonnes. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les changements.

                    +

                    Si vous souhaitez ajuster les paramètres de colonne, sélectionnez l'option Colonnes personnalisées dans la liste. La fenêtre Colonnes s'ouvrira où vous pouvez définir le Nombre de colonnes, la Largeur des colonnes et et Espacement. Entrez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs de saisie ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Activez l'option Largeurs de colonne identiques pour appliquer la même largeur à toutes les colonnes. Activez l'option Diviseur de colonne pour ajouter une ligne verticale entre les colonnes. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour valider les changements.

                    Colonnes personnalisées

                    -

                    Pour spécifier exactement la position d'une nouvelle colonne, placez le curseur avant le texte à déplacer dans une nouvelle colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de colonne. Le texte sera déplacé vers la colonne suivante.

                    -

                    Les sauts de colonne ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par une ligne pointillée : . Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de section insérés, cliquez sur l'icône sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de colonne,sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur une touche Suppr.

                    +

                    Pour indiquer la position exacte d'une nouvelle colonne, placez le curseur avant le texte à déplacer dans une nouvelle colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de colonne. Le texte sera déplacé vers la colonne suivante.

                    +

                    Les sauts de colonne ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par une ligne pointillée: . Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de colonne insérés, cliquez sur l'icône sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de colonne,sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur une touche Suppr.

                    Pour modifier manuellement la largeur et l'espacement entre les colonnes, vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale.

                    -

                    Pour annuler les colonnes et revenir à la disposition en une seule colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Une dans la liste.

                    +

                    Pour annuler les colonnes et revenir à la mise en page à une seule colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Une dans la liste.

                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm index f05a7f209f..8becc5b01a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                    Définir des taquets de tabulation

                    -

                    Éditeur de Documents vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation. Taquet de tabulation est l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Onglet du clavier.

                    +

                    L'éditeur de documents vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation. Taquet de tabulation est l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Onglet du clavier.

                    Pour définir les taquets de tabulation vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale :

                    1. Sélectionnez le type du taquet de tabulation en cliquant sur le bouton
                      dans le coin supérieur gauche de la zone de travail. Trois types de taquets de tabulation sont disponibles : diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm index 77f667a37b..a4e82aaec0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                      Lire un texte à haute voix

                      -

                      Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE dispose d'une extension qui va lire un texte à voix haute.

                      +

                      L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE dispose d'une extension qui va lire un texte à voix haute.

                      1. Sélectionnez le texte à lire à haute voix.
                      2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                        Parole.
                        3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..98e606d72c --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + Saisie vocale + + + + + + + + +
                        +
                        + +
                        +

                        Saisie vocale

                        +

                        Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez écrire à la voix.

                        +
                          +
                        1. Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter du texte,
                          2. +
                        2. passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et sélectionnez
                          Saisie vocale,
                          3. +
                        3. sélectionnez la langue de reconnaissance vocale dans la fenêtre contextuelle,
                          4. +
                        4. + cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer la dictée et commencez à parler. Une fois que vous pausez, le texte est ajouté dans le document. Pour désactiver la reconnaissance vocale, cliquez sur le bouton encore une fois. +
                          Pour assurer le bon fonctionnement du module complémentaire, vous devez disposer d'une périphérique d'entrée (par ex. un microphone ou une casque) et accorder à votre navigateur l'autorisation d'enregistrer.
                          +
                          5. +
                        + Plugin Saisie vocale gif +
                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index a5f51f4907..005a9e1e5d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                        Remplacer un mot par synonyme

                        - Si on répète plusieurs fois le même mot ou il ne semble pas que le mot est juste, l'Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE vous permet de trouver les synonymes. Retrouvez les antonymes du mot affiché aussi. + Si on répète plusieurs fois le même mot ou il ne semble pas que le mot est juste, l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE vous permet de trouver les synonymes. Retrouvez les antonymes du mot affiché aussi.

                        1. Sélectionnez le mot dans votre document.
                          2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index 55d8d982d9..5792387a26 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                          Traduire un texte

                          -

                          Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez traduire votre document dans de nombreuses langues disponibles.

                          +

                          Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez traduire votre document dans de nombreuses langues disponibles.

                          1. Sélectionnez le texte à traduire.
                          2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                            Traducteur, l'application de traduction fait son apparition dans le panneau de gauche.
                            3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm index ac33e6ca7c..e78fb6d833 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
                            - +

                            Corriger la typographie

                            Si vous avez besoin de corriger la typographie de votre texte, utilisez le plugin Typograf qui placera automatiquement les espaces insécables et supprimera les espaces supplémentaires, ainsi que corrigera les fautes de frappe mineures, insérera des guillemets corrects, remplacera les traits d'union par des tirets etc.

                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index 6808cf7254..81b51bad65 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Afficher les informations sur le document

                            -

                            Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité dans l'Éditeur de Documents, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Descriptif du document...

                            +

                            Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité dans l'éditeur de documents, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Descriptif du document...

                            Informations générales

                            Le descriptif du document comprend l'ensemble des propriétés d'un document. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés.

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm index 5187e5ee54..ac8941a8f2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm @@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
                              - +

                              Compter les mots

                              -

                              Pour connaître le nombre exact de mots et de symboles avec et sans espaces dans votre document, ainsi que le nombre total de paragraphes, utilisez le plug-in Compter les mots.

                              +

                              Pour connaître le nombre exact de mots et de symboles avec et sans espaces dans votre document, ainsi que le nombre total de paragraphes, utilisez le plug-in Compter les mots.

                              1. Ouvrez l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Compter les mots et les caractères.
                              2. Sélectionnez une partie du texte ou le texte entier.
                                3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm index 187c531142..a1bf8d3b50 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                              Télécharger un document sur Wordpress

                              -

                              Vous pouvez écrire vos articles dans l'environnement de l'Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE et les télécharger sur Wordpress.

                              +

                              Vous pouvez écrire vos articles dans l'environnement de l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE et les télécharger sur Wordpress.

                              Se connecter à Wordpress

                              1. Ouvrez un document.
                                2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm index 6f5bb58d3f..49e8a524a1 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                Insérer une vidéo

                                -

                                Vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici.

                                +

                                Vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre document dans l'éditeur de documents. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici.

                                1. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer.
                                  diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..094c49bfb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + Zoom + + + + + + + + +
                                  +
                                  + +
                                  +

                                  Zoom

                                  +

                                  Le module complémentaire Zoom permet créer et programmer des réunions de Zoom directement dans l'éditeur en quelques clics.

                                  +

                                  Le module complémentaire est compatible avec la version auto-hébergée des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE et c'est possible de l'ajouter manuellement aux instances ONLYOFFICE.

                                  + +

                                  Installation

                                  +

                                  Pour installer le module complémentaire Zoom,

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                    2. +
                                  2. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de plugins.
                                    3. +
                                  3. Recherchez
                                    Zoom sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous.
                                    4. +
                                  4. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom
                                    sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                    5. +
                                  5. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire.
                                    6. +
                                  +

                                  Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter la documentation API ONLYOFFICE.

                                  + +

                                  Configuration

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. + Enregistrez l'éditeur en tant que l'application JWT sur la page Zoom Developer pour utiliser la programmation des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Le jeton JWT sera assigné à l'application. +

                                    Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom .

                                    +
                                    2. +
                                  2. + Créez l'application Meeting SDK sur la page Zoom Developer pour pouvoir joindre des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Les informations d'identification SDK seront assignées à l'application. +

                                    Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom .

                                    +
                                    3. +
                                  3. Saisissez les clés SDK Key, SDK Secret et le jeton JWT Token dans les champs appropriés sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur ONLYOFFICE et cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                    4. +
                                  +

                                  Paramètres Zoom

                                  + +

                                  Utilisation

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                    2. +
                                  2. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom
                                    .
                                    3. +
                                  3. + Saisissez le thème de la réunion et sélectionnez Démarrer une réunion ou Programmer une réunion. +
                                      +
                                    • Démarrer une réunion sert à créer une nouvelle réunion. Tous les détails s'affichent dans le chat de l'éditeur. Appuyez sur les touches de la combinaison Alt + Q pour un accès rapide au chat.
                                      • +
                                    • Programmer une réunion - définir les paramètres obligatoires de la réunion à venir tels que l'heur, la date et la durée. Accédez aux Paramètres avancés pour afficher les paramètres supplémentaires. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                      • +
                                    +

                                    Les notifications de réunion sont affichées dans le Chat de l'éditeur en ligne et dans les Commentaires de l'éditeur du bureau.

                                    +
                                    4. +
                                  4. Cliquez sur Reconfigurer pour définir les paramètres encore une fois.
                                    5. +
                                  5. Cliquez sur le bouton Mode réunion pour accéder au menu de la réunion dans lequel vous pouvez configurez les paramètres suivants: Nom, ID Réunion, Email et Mot de passe. Sélectionnez votre rôle, région de la réunion et langue de la réunion.
                                    6. +
                                  6. Cliquez sur le bouton Joindre pour vous associer à la réunion ou cliquez sur Copier le lien direct vers la réunion pour copier le lien dans le presse-papiers.
                                    7. +
                                  7. Lorsque vous rejoignez la réunion, la fenêtre Zoom s'affichera sur le panneau du module complémentaire. De la manière habituelle, vous pouvez activer ou désactiver le micro ou la caméra, effectuer diverses actions et passer au mode d'affichage Plein écran.
                                    8. +
                                  +

                                  Une fenêtre noire peut apparaître dans le navigateur Safari lorsqu'on se joint à la réunion. Pour faire disparaître l'erreur, il faut redimensionner la fenêtre du module complémentaire ou zoomer sur la page de navigateur.

                                  +
                                  + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css index 429ab5cea8..2207321537 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css @@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bulletedlistsettings.png index 451650f724..f796c34d70 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bulletedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/checkbox_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/checkbox_settings.png index 6177525907..8c7b4b8c4a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/checkbox_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/checkbox_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/combo_box_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/combo_box_settings.png index 59c8688fa7..9ea778181b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/combo_box_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/combo_box_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png index 65accd2247..16d1f50f0c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png index 00cafeb87a..866142af67 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup_ballons.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup_ballons.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d13a4f541f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup_ballons.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png index e2c7fc5b7d..5e84b46154 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png index 99378855b0..ad00bbd3b9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/complex_field_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/complex_field_settings.png index 2498372cb6..38117e470f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/complex_field_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/complex_field_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/credit_card_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/credit_card_settings.png index aaec596d4b..be89425fa0 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/credit_card_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/credit_card_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/customcolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/customcolumns.png index a038d9b6a3..72585145d8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/customcolumns.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/customcolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/date_time_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/date_time_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a5e9d2bfad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/date_time_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/date_time_tip.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/date_time_tip.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..adf70435b6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/date_time_tip.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/dropdown_list_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/dropdown_list_settings.png index 08053e41bf..265df57940 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/dropdown_list_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/dropdown_list_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/email_address_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/email_address_settings.png index 07d58900a2..d1d30733a0 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/email_address_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/email_address_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_form_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_form_settings.png index 59e19baef0..c2eff14c93 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_form_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_form_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..11818dbeac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index c772750a22..9aa2d7573a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 92ab00c1b9..2c7aa9564e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index b3b3fccd77..5edd28c184 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 5993e0224e..22f57554f9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index 47b3591a2d..01c7949256 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 08887af73b..7cba40f38b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index ad246def55..475cca61e5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png index 0722e15929..4575c5ed32 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png index d6a8c8fe5b..cbc1043b1e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index e38b1f7a53..25e6bb76b2 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8011001074 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 065aa77be8..318d7f7c29 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png index e5883a79c5..1ec7ef2923 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png index ffdc421728..e55b9df770 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png index 8496a60c4e..0bcec624ca 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png index c43856a295..cb9a6d238a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 30f9a61ae7..6a8d716a24 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png index 179ea9d490..3899c2da63 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png index b27c6af513..05ab8d7f84 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png index 3ab5ee54b9..4b96494e3b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png index 9f389e2e3b..861dc45265 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png index a85383c208..eb4e344034 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png index fe7211e9b1..440682b8e4 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/listlevel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/listlevel.png index 1a5aac2f12..c7e1826f68 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/listlevel.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/listlevel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings.png index eec3cb0e97..05f4e138ce 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a90be09c1a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/orderedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/orderedlistsettings.png index 1228076de1..3e462fd78c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/orderedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/orderedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palette.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palette.png index e9057069cb..412167fc2a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palette.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/phone_number_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/phone_number_settings.png index b5077e1605..6859954fc3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/phone_number_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/phone_number_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ea5a715d6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/radio_button_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/radio_button_settings.png index c886fd4453..cd9897b9a6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/radio_button_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/radio_button_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png index 97f7146d24..21174719c5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png index 037a83add0..58af32ae02 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png index bbcdef16f4..022137dbaa 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png index 0ab124baac..4b9278ce69 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/text_field_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/text_field_settings.png index 4ed7b9c8d3..df47b5922c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/text_field_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/text_field_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/view_form_active2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/view_form_active2.png index e57818b425..a12f5ea6cf 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/view_form_active2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/view_form_active2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/zip_code_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/zip_code_settings.png index 95c71762ef..540f5ac0ad 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/zip_code_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/zip_code_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js index a6ee24f001..216fb85b89 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js @@ -3,12 +3,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "title": "À propos de l'Éditeur de Documents", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des documents dans votre navigateur . En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel, le numéro de build et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau pour Windows, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme. Dans la version de bureau pour Mac OS, accédez au menu ONLYOFFICE en haut de l'écran et sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos d'ONLYOFFICE." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des documents dans votre navigateur . En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF et OFORM. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel, le numéro de build et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau pour Windows, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme. Dans la version de bureau pour Mac OS, accédez au menu ONLYOFFICE en haut de l'écran et sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos d'ONLYOFFICE." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Paramètres avancés de l'Éditeur de Documents", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Édition et enregistrement Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique est utilisée dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les documents en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Afficher le bouton \"Options de collage\" lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu au document. Rendre les fichiers compatibles avec les anciennes versions de MS Word lorsqu'ils sont enregistrés au format DOCX. Les fichiers enregistrés au format DOCX deviendront compatibles avec les anciennes versions de Microsoft Word. Collaboration Le Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition : Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition du document verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Afficher le suivi des modifications sert à sélectionner la façon d'affichage des modifications. Afficher par clic dans les ballons. Les modifications s'affichent dans les ballons lorsque vous activez le suivi des modifications. Afficher lorsque le pointeur est maintenu sur l'infobulle. L'infobulle s'affiche lorsque vous faites glisser le pointeur sur la modification suivie. Le paragraphe Changements de collaboration en temps réel vous permet de spécifier comment les nouveaux changements et commentaires seront affichés en temps réel. Surligner aucune modification. Les modifications effectuées au cours de la session actuelle ne seront pas mises en surbrillance. Surligner toutes les modifications. Toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session actuelle seront mises en surbrillance. Voir le dernier. Seules les modifications apportées depuis le dernier clic sur l'icône Enregistrer seront mises en surbrillance. Cette option n'est disponible que lorsque le mode de co-édition Strict est sélectionné. Activer l'affichage des commentaires. Si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale gauche. Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus. Cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans le texte du document. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans le texte du document. Vérification Vérification de l'orthographe sert à activer/désactiver l'option de vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Le menu Options d'auto-correction... permet d'acceder aux paramètres d'auto-correction tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc. Espace de travail L'option Guides d'alignement est utilisée pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la page. L'option Hiéroglyphes est utilisée pour activer/désactiver l'affichage des hiéroglyphes. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier est utilisée pour activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt / Option à un raccourci clavier. L'option Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. L'option Identique à système rend le thème d'interface de l'éditeur identique à celui de votre système. Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour. Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire. Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit. L'option Activer le mode sombre pour les documents devient activé lorsque le thème de l'interface Sombre est choisi. Le cas échéant, cochez la case Activer le mode sombre pour les documents pour activez le mode sombre. Le mode Contraste sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. L'option Activer le mode sombre pour les documents est utilisée pour rendre la zone de travail plus sombre lorsque le thème de l'interface Sombre ou Contraste sombre est choisi. Cochez la case Activer le mode sombre pour les documents afin de l'activer. Remarque : En plus des thèmes de l'interface disponibles Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste sombre, il est possible de personnaliser les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en utilisant votre propre couleur de thème. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Ajuster à la page ou Ajuster à la largeur. L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est-à-dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est-à-dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte soit affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. Éditeur de Documents gère deux modes de mise en cache : Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc. Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé : Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. L'option Réglages macros s'utilise pour définir l'affichage des macros avec notification. Choisissez Désactivez tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans votre document. Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans un document. Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans un document. Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Édition et enregistrement Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique est utilisée dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les documents en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Afficher le bouton \"Options de collage\" lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu au document. Rendre les fichiers compatibles avec les anciennes versions de MS Word lorsqu'ils sont enregistrés au format DOCX. Les fichiers enregistrés au format DOCX deviendront compatibles avec les anciennes versions de Microsoft Word. Collaboration Le Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition : Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition du document verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Afficher le suivi des modifications sert à sélectionner la façon d'affichage des modifications. Afficher par clic dans les ballons. Les modifications s'affichent dans les ballons lorsque vous activez le suivi des modifications. Afficher lorsque le pointeur est maintenu sur l'infobulle. L'infobulle s'affiche lorsque vous faites glisser le pointeur sur la modification suivie. Le paragraphe Changements de collaboration en temps réel vous permet de spécifier comment les nouveaux changements et commentaires seront affichés en temps réel. Surligner aucune modification. Les modifications effectuées au cours de la session actuelle ne seront pas mises en surbrillance. Surligner toutes les modifications. Toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session actuelle seront mises en surbrillance. Voir le dernier. Seules les modifications apportées depuis le dernier clic sur l'icône Enregistrer seront mises en surbrillance. Cette option n'est disponible que lorsque le mode de co-édition Strict est sélectionné. Activer l'affichage des commentaires. Si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale gauche. Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus. Cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans le texte du document. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans le texte du document. Vérification Vérification de l'orthographe sert à activer/désactiver l'option de vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Le menu Options d'auto-correction... permet d'accéder aux paramètres d'auto-correction tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc. Espace de travail L'option Guides d'alignement est utilisée pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la page. L'option Hiéroglyphes est utilisée pour activer/désactiver l'affichage des hiéroglyphes. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier est utilisée pour activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt / Option à un raccourci clavier. L'option Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. L'option Identique à système rend le thème d'interface de l'éditeur identique à celui de votre système. Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour. Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire. Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit. L'option Activer le mode sombre pour les documents devient activé lorsque le thème de l'interface Sombre est choisi. Le cas échéant, cochez la case Activer le mode sombre pour les documents pour activez le mode sombre. Le mode Contraste sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. L'option Activer le mode sombre pour les documents est utilisée pour rendre la zone de travail plus sombre lorsque le thème de l'interface Sombre ou Contraste sombre est choisi. Cochez la case Activer le mode sombre pour les documents afin de l'activer. Remarque : En plus des thèmes de l'interface disponibles Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste sombre, il est possible de personnaliser les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en utilisant votre propre couleur de thème. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Ajuster à la page ou Ajuster à la largeur. L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est-à-dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est-à-dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte soit affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. Éditeur de Documents gère deux modes de mise en cache : Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc. Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé : Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. L'option Réglages macros s'utilise pour définir l'affichage des macros avec notification. Choisissez Désactivez tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans votre document. Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans un document. Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans un document. Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "title": "Commenter des documents", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions du document< pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de documents sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Laisser et répondre aux commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire : sélectionnez le fragment du texte où vous pensez qu'il y a une erreur ou un problème, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration sur la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires ou utilisez l'icône sur la barre latérale de gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaireset cliquez sur le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le fragment du texte sélectionné et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu contextuel, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. Le commentaire sera affiché sur le panneau Commentaires à gauche. Tout autre utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référence au travail fait. Pour le faire il suffit de cliquer sur le lien Ajouter une réponse situé au-dessous du commentaire, saisissez votre réponse dans le champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton Répondre. Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Désactiver l'affichage des commentaires Le fragment du texte commenté sera mis en surbrillance dans le document. Pour voir le commentaire, cliquez à l'intérieur du fragment. Pour désactiver cette fonctionnalité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage de commentaires. Dans ce cas, les fragments commentés ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône . Gérer les commentaires Vous pouvez gérer les commentaires ajoutés en utilisant les icônes de la bulle de commentaire ou sur le panneau gauche Commentaires : trier les commentaires ajoutés en cliquant sur l'icône : par date : Plus récent ou Plus ancien. C'est 'ordre de tri par défaut. par auteur : Auteur de A à Z ou Auteur de Z à Z par emplacement : Du haut ou Du bas. L'ordre habituel de tri des commentaires par l'emplacement dans un document est comme suit (de haut) : commentaires au texte, commentaires aux notes de bas de page, commentaires aux notes de fin, commentaires aux en-têtes/pieds de page, commentaires aux texte entier. Filtrer par groupe : Tout ou sélectionnez un groupe de la liste. Cette option de trie n'est disponible que si votre version prend en charge cette fonctionnalité. modifier le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, supprimer le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, fermer la discussion actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône. l'icône. Si vous souhaitez masquer les commentaires résolus, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Dans ce cas, les commentaires résolus ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône, si vous souhaitez gérer plusieurs commentaires à la fois, ouvrez le menu contextuel Résoudre sous l'onglet Collaboration. Sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : résoudre les commentaires actuels, marquer mes commentaires comme résolus ou marquer tous les commentaires comme résolus. Ajouter les mentions Ce n'est qu'aux fragments du texte que vous pouvez ajouter des mentions et pas au document lui-même. Lorsque vous ajoutez un commentaire sur lequel vous voulez attirer l'attention d'une personne, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction de mentions et envoyer une notification par courrier électronique ou Talk. Pour ajouter une mention, Saisissez \"+\" ou \"@\" n'importe où dans votre commentaire, alors la liste de tous les utilisateurs du portail s'affichera. Pour faire la recherche plus rapide, tapez les premières lettres du prénom de la personne, la liste propose les suggestions au cours de la frappe. Puis sélectionnez le nom souhaité dans la liste. Si la personne mentionnée n'a pas l'autorisation d'ouvrir ce fichier, la fenêtre Paramètres de partage va apparaître. Par défaut, un document est partagé en Lecture seule. Modifiez la permission, le cas échéant.. Cliquez sur OK. La personne mentionnée recevra une notification par courrier électronique informant que son nom est mentionné dans un commentaire. La personne recevra encore une notification lorsque un fichier commenté est partagé. Supprimer des commentaires Pour supprimer les commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer sous l'onglet Collaboration dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Supprimer les commentaires actuels à supprimer la sélection du moment. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer mes commentaires à supprimer vos commentaire et laisser les commentaires d'autres. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées à vos commentaires seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer tous les commentaires sert à supprimer tous les commentaires du document. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires, cliquez sur l'icône de la barre latérale de gauche encore une fois." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions du document< pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier, comparer et fusionner les documents pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de documents sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Laisser et répondre aux commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire : sélectionnez le fragment du texte où vous pensez qu'il y a une erreur ou un problème, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration sur la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires ou utilisez l'icône sur la barre latérale de gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et cliquez sur le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le fragment du texte sélectionné et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu contextuel, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. Le commentaire sera affiché sur le panneau Commentaires à gauche. Tout autre utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référence au travail fait. Pour le faire il suffit de cliquer sur le lien Ajouter une réponse situé au-dessous du commentaire, saisissez votre réponse dans le champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton Répondre. Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Désactiver l'affichage des commentaires Le fragment du texte commenté sera mis en surbrillance dans le document. Pour voir le commentaire, cliquez à l'intérieur du fragment. Pour désactiver cette fonctionnalité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage de commentaires. Dans ce cas, les fragments commentés ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône . Gérer les commentaires Vous pouvez gérer les commentaires ajoutés en utilisant les icônes de la bulle de commentaire ou sur le panneau gauche Commentaires : trier les commentaires ajoutés en cliquant sur l'icône : par date : Plus récent ou Plus ancien. C'est 'ordre de tri par défaut. par auteur : Auteur de A à Z ou Auteur de Z à A. par emplacement : Du haut ou Du bas. L'ordre habituel de tri des commentaires par l'emplacement dans un document est comme suit (de haut) : commentaires au texte, commentaires aux notes de bas de page, commentaires aux notes de fin, commentaires aux en-têtes/pieds de page, commentaires aux texte entier. Filtrer par groupe : Tout ou sélectionnez un groupe de la liste. Cette option de trie n'est disponible que si votre version prend en charge cette fonctionnalité. modifier le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, supprimer le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, fermer la discussion actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône. l'icône. Si vous souhaitez masquer les commentaires résolus, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Dans ce cas, les commentaires résolus ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône, si vous souhaitez gérer plusieurs commentaires à la fois, ouvrez le menu contextuel Résoudre sous l'onglet Collaboration. Sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : résoudre les commentaires actuels, marquer mes commentaires comme résolus ou marquer tous les commentaires comme résolus. Ajouter les mentions Ce n'est qu'aux fragments du texte que vous pouvez ajouter des mentions et pas au document lui-même. Lorsque vous ajoutez un commentaire sur lequel vous voulez attirer l'attention d'une personne, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction de mentions et envoyer une notification par courrier électronique ou Chat. Pour ajouter une mention, Saisissez \"+\" ou \"@\" n'importe où dans votre commentaire, alors la liste de tous les utilisateurs du portail s'affichera. Pour faire la recherche plus rapide, tapez les premières lettres du prénom de la personne, la liste propose les suggestions au cours de la frappe. Puis sélectionnez le nom souhaité dans la liste. Si la personne mentionnée n'a pas l'autorisation d'ouvrir ce fichier, la fenêtre Paramètres de partage va apparaître. Par défaut, un document est partagé en Lecture seule. Modifiez la permission, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur OK. La personne mentionnée recevra une notification par courrier électronique informant que son nom est mentionné dans un commentaire. La personne recevra encore une notification lorsque un fichier commenté est partagé. Supprimer des commentaires Pour supprimer les commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer sous l'onglet Collaboration dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Supprimer les commentaires actuels à supprimer la sélection du moment. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer mes commentaires à supprimer vos commentaire et laisser les commentaires d'autres. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées à vos commentaires seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer tous les commentaires sert à supprimer tous les commentaires du document. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires, cliquez sur l'icône de la barre latérale de gauche encore une fois." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", @@ -27,43 +27,43 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", - "title": "Comparer des documents", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier. Si vous avez besoin de comparer et de fusionner deux documents, l'Éditeur de Documents dispose de la fonctionnalité de Comparaison des documents. Cette fonctionnalité permet d'afficher des différences entre deux documents et de fusionner des documents en acceptant les modifications une par une ou toutes à la fois. Lors de la comparaison et du fusionnement des documents, le fichier résultant sera stocké sur le portail comme une nouvelle version du fichier original. Si vous ne souhaitez pas fusionner des documents lors de la comparaison, vous pouvez rejeter toutes les modifications pour que le document original demeure inchangé. Choisir des documents à comparer Pour comparer deux documents, ouvrez le document original et sélectionnez le deuxième document à comparer : passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Comparer, sélectionnez l'une des options pour télécharger le document : l'option Document à partir d'un fichier permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Recherchez le fichier .docx nécessaire sur votre disque local et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. l'option Document à partir d'une URL permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre pour saisir un lien vers le fichier d'un stockage de nuage externe (par exemple, Nextcloud) si vous avez l'autorisation appropriée pour accéder au fichier. Ce lien doit être un lien de téléchargement direct. Lorsque le lien est indiqué, cliquez sur le bouton OK : Remarque : Un lien de téléchargement direct permet de démarrer le téléchargement sans ouvrir le navigateur. Par exemple, pour obtenir un lien dans Nextcloud, recherchez le document nécessaire dans la liste, sélectionnez l'option Détails dans le menu. Cliquez sur l'icône Copier le lien direct (pour des utilisateurs qui ont l'autorisation pour accéder à ce fichier/dossier) à droite du nom de fichier sur le panneau de détails. Pour apprendre comment obtenir un lien direct dans un autre stockage externe, veuillez consulter la documentation approprié de cet stockage. l'option Document à partir de stockage permet d'ouvrir la fenêtreSélectionner la source de données. Une liste de tous documents .docx stockés sur votre portail auxquels vous avez accès s'affichera. Pour parcourir toutes les sections du module Documents, utilisez le menu dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre. Sélectionnez le document .docx nécessaire et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Le processus de comparaison des fichiers démarrera lors de la sélection du dixième fichier et votre document ressemblera un document en mode Révision. Toutes modifications sont mises en surbrillance, alors vous pouvez voir les modifications, naviguer entre elles, les accepter ou rejeter une par une ou toutes à la fois. Vous pouvez aussi modifier le mode d'affichage pour afficher le document avant la comparaison, en cours de la comparaison et après la comparaison si vous acceptez les modifications. Choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications Cliquez sur le bouton Mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'un des modes disponibles dans la liste : Balisage - cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document en cours de comparaison. Ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. Final - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document après la comparaison comme si toutes les modifications avaient été acceptées. Cette option n'accepte pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet de voir à quoi ressemblera le document après avoir accepté toutes les modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Original - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document avant la comparaison comme si toutes les modifications ont été rejetées. Cette option ne rejette pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet uniquement d'afficher le document sans modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Accepter ou rejeter les modifications Utilisez les boutons Précédente et Suivante de la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les modifications. Pour accepter la modification actuellement sélectionnée, vous pouvez : cliquez sur le bouton Accepter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera acceptée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquez sur le bouton Accepter dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Pour accepter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter toutes les modifications. Pour rejeter la modification actuelle, vous pouvez : cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera rejetée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Pour rejeter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter toutes les modifications. Informations supplémentaires sur la fonction de comparaison Méthode de comparaison Les documents sont comparés par des mots. Si au moins un caractère dans un mot est modifié (par exemple, si un caractère a été supprimé ou remplacé), à la suite la différence sera affichée comme le changement du mot entier, pas du caractère. L'image ci-dessous illustre le cas où le fichier d'origine contient le mot « caractères » et le document de comparaison contient le mot « Caractères ». Auteur du document Lors du lancement de la comparaison, le deuxième document de comparaison est chargé et comparé au document actuel. Si le document chargé contient des données qui ne sont pas représentées dans le document d'origine, les données seront marquées comme ajoutées par un réviseur. Si le document d'origine contient des données qui ne sont représentées dans le document chargé, les données seront marquées comme supprimées par un réviseur. Si le document original et le document chargé sont du même auteur, le réviseur est le même utilisateur. Son nom s'affiche dans la bulle de modification. Si les deux fichiers sont des auteurs différents, l'auteur du deuxième fichier chargé à des fins de comparaison est l'auteur des modifications ajoutées/supprimées. Présence des modifications suivies dans le document comparé Si le document d'origine contient des modifications apportées en mode révision, elles seront acceptées pendant la comparaison. Lorsque vous choisissez le deuxième fichier à comparer, vous verrez le message d'avertissement correspondant. Dans ce cas, lorsque vous choisissez le mode d'affichage Original, il n'y aura aucune modification dans le document." + "title": "Comparer et combiner des documents", + "body": "L'éditeur de documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe: partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, réviser les documents et ajouter les modifications sans modifier le fichier. Si vous avez besoin de comparer et de fusionner deux documents, l'éditeur Document Editor dispose de la fonctionnalité de Comparaison des documents. Cette fonctionnalité permet d'afficher des différences entre deux documents et de fusionner des documents en acceptant les modifications une par une ou toutes à la fois. L'option Combiner peut sembler identique, mais il y a une différence majeure: les Modifications suivies dans les deux versions sont fusionnées dans une seule version et le reste du textes est comparé. Une fois les deux documents fusionnés, le document résultant sera sauvegardé sur le portail sous une nouvelle version du fichier source. Si vous ne souhaitez pas fusionner des documents lors de la comparaison, vous pouvez rejeter toutes les modifications pour que le document original demeure inchangé. Choisir des documents à comparer Pour comparer deux documents, ouvrez le document original et sélectionnez le deuxième document à comparer: passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Comparer, sélectionnez l'une des options pour télécharger le document: l'option Document à partir d'un fichier permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Recherchez le fichier .docx nécessaire sur votre disque local et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. l'option Document à partir d'une URL permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre pour saisir un lien vers le fichier d'un stockage de nuage externe (par exemple, Nextcloud) si vous avez l'autorisation appropriée pour accéder au fichier. Ce lien doit être un lien de téléchargement direct. Lorsque le lien est indiqué, cliquez sur le bouton OK: Remarque: Un lien de téléchargement direct permet de démarrer le téléchargement sans ouvrir le navigateur. Par exemple, pour obtenir un lien dans Nextcloud, recherchez le document nécessaire dans la liste, sélectionnez l'option Détails dans le menu. Cliquez sur l'icône Copier le lien direct (pour des utilisateurs qui ont l'autorisation pour accéder à ce fichier/dossier) à droite du nom de fichier sur le panneau de détails. Pour apprendre comment obtenir un lien direct dans un autre stockage externe, veuillez consulter la documentation approprié de cet stockage. l'option Document à partir de stockage permet d'ouvrir la fenêtreSélectionner la source de données. Une liste de tous documents .docx stockés sur votre portail auxquels vous avez accès s'affichera. Pour parcourir toutes les sections du module Documents, utilisez le menu dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre. Sélectionnez le document .docx nécessaire et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Le processus de comparaison des fichiers démarrera lors de la sélection du dixième fichier et votre document ressemblera un document en mode Révision. Toutes modifications sont mises en surbrillance, alors vous pouvez voir les modifications, naviguer entre elles, les accepter ou rejeter une par une ou toutes à la fois. Vous pouvez aussi modifier le mode d'affichage pour afficher le document avant la comparaison, en cours de la comparaison et après la comparaison si vous acceptez les modifications. Choisir le document à combiner Pour combiner deux documents, ouvrez le document source et sélectionnez le deuxième document à combiner: passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Combiner: sélectionnez l'une des options pour télécharger le document: l'option Document à partir d'un fichier permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Recherchez le fichier .docx nécessaire sur votre disque local et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. l'option Document à partir d'une URL permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre pour saisir un lien vers le fichier d'un stockage de nuage externe (par exemple, Nextcloud) si vous avez l'autorisation appropriée pour accéder au fichier. Ce lien doit être un lien de téléchargement direct. Lorsque le lien est indiqué, cliquez sur le bouton OK: Remarque: Un lien de téléchargement direct permet de démarrer le téléchargement sans ouvrir le navigateur. Par exemple, pour obtenir un lien dans Nextcloud, recherchez le document nécessaire dans la liste, sélectionnez l'option Détails dans le menu. Cliquez sur l'icône Copier le lien direct (pour des utilisateurs qui ont l'autorisation pour accéder à ce fichier/dossier) à droite du nom de fichier sur le panneau de détails. Pour apprendre comment obtenir un lien direct dans un autre stockage externe, veuillez consulter la documentation approprié de cet stockage. Une fois le deuxième document sélectionné, le processus de fusion démarra et le document semblera être en mode Révision. Toutes modifications sont mises en surbrillance, alors vous pouvez voir les modifications, naviguer entre elles, les accepter ou rejeter une par une ou toutes à la fois. Vous pouvez aussi modifier le mode d'affichage et afficher le document avant la fusion, en cours de la fusion et après la fusion si vous acceptez les modifications. Choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications Cliquez sur le bouton Mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'un des modes disponibles dans la liste: Balisage - cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document en cours de comparaison/fusion. Ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. Final - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document après la comparaison/fusion comme si toutes les modifications avaient été acceptées. Cette option n'accepte pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet de voir à quoi ressemblera le document après avoir accepté toutes les modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Original - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher le document avant la comparaison/fusion comme si toutes les modifications ont été rejetées. Cette option ne rejette pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet uniquement d'afficher le document sans modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Accepter ou rejeter les modifications Utilisez les boutons Précédente et Suivante de la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les modifications. Pour accepter la modification actuellement sélectionnée, vous pouvez: cliquez sur le bouton Accepter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera acceptée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquez sur le bouton Accepter dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Pour accepter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter toutes les modifications. Pour rejeter la modification actuelle, vous pouvez: cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera rejetée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Pour rejeter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter toutes les modifications. Informations supplémentaires sur comparaison et fusion Méthode de comparaison Les documents sont comparés par des mots. Si au moins un caractère dans un mot est modifié (par exemple, si un caractère a été supprimé ou remplacé), à la suite la différence sera affichée comme le changement du mot entier, pas du caractère. L'image ci-dessous illustre le cas où le fichier d'origine contient le mot « caractères » et le document de comparaison contient le mot «Caractères ». Auteur du document Lors du lancement de la comparaison, le deuxième document de comparaison est chargé et comparé au document actuel. Si le document chargé contient des données qui ne sont pas représentées dans le document d'origine, les données seront marquées comme ajoutées par un réviseur. Si le document d'origine contient des données qui ne sont représentées dans le document chargé, les données seront marquées comme supprimées par un réviseur. Si le document original et le document chargé sont du même auteur, le réviseur est le même utilisateur. Son nom s'affiche dans la bulle de modification. Si les deux fichiers sont des auteurs différents, l'auteur du deuxième fichier chargé à des fins de comparaison est l'auteur des modifications ajoutées/supprimées. Présence des modifications suivies dans le document comparé Si le document d'origine contient des modifications apportées en mode révision, elles seront acceptées pendant la comparaison. Lorsque vous choisissez le deuxième fichier à comparer, vous verrez le message d'avertissement correspondant. Dans ce cas, lorsque vous choisissez le mode d'affichage Original, il n'y aura aucune modification dans le document. Lorsque les deux documents contiennent des modifications qu'on a apporté en mode révision, celles-ci seront fusionnées pendant la fusion." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Raccourcis clavier", - "body": "Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'Éditeur de Documents sans l'aide de la souris. Appuyez sur la touche Altpour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès. Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour désactiver toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir aux suggestions de touches précédentes. Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants : Windows/Linux Mac OS Traitement du document Ouvrir le panneau \"Fichier\" Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le volet Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, afficher ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un existant, accéder à l'aide de l'Éditeur de Documents ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la fenêtre \"Rechercher et remplacer\" Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à chercher un caractère/mot/phrase dans le document actuellement édité. Ouvrir la fenêtre \"Rechercher et remplacer\" avec le champ de remplacement Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés. Répéter la dernière action « Rechercher ». ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Répéter l'action de Rechercher qui a été effectuée avant d'appuyer sur la combinaison de touches. Ouvir le panneau \"Commentaires\" Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau \"Chat\" Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat et envoyer un message. Enregistrer le document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document actuellement modifié à l'aide de l'Éditeur de Documents. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer le document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Enregistrer (Télécharger comme) Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme pour enregistrer le document actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Plein écran F11 Passer à l'affichage plein écran pour adapter l'Éditeur de Documents à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de l'Éditeur de Documents Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O L'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Fermer la fenêtre du document en cours de modification dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l'élément ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du document actuel par défaut à 100%. Navigation Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Placer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter au début du document Ctrl+Début ^ Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début du document en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin de la ligne Fin Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin du document Ctrl+Fin ^ Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin du document en cours d'édition. Sauter au début de la page précédente Alt+Ctrl+Pg. préc Placez le curseur au tout début de la page qui précède la page en cours d'édition. Sauter au début de la page suivante Alt+Ctrl+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv Placez le curseur au tout début de la page qui suit la page en cours d'édition. Faire défiler vers le bas Pg. suiv Pg. suiv, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible. Faire défiler vers le haut Pg. préc Pg. préc, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible. Page suivante Alt+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+Pg. suiv Passer à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition. Page précédente Alt+Pg. préc ⌥ Option+Pg. préc Passer à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Agrandir le zoom du document en cours d'édition. Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Réduire le zoom du document en cours d'édition. Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche ← ← Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite → → Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite. Déplacer vers le début d'un mot ou un mot vers la gauche Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Déplacer le curseur au début d'un mot ou d'un mot vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite. Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑ ↑ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut. Déplacer une ligne vers le bas ↓ ↓ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas. Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. Écriture Terminer le paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Terminer le paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau. Ajouter un saut de ligne ⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée ⇧ Shift+↵ Retour Ajouter un saut de ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe. Supprimer ← Retour arrière, Supprimer ← Retour arrière, Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à gauche (← Retour arrière) ou vers la droite (Supprimer) du curseur. Supprimer le mot à gauche du curseur Ctrl+← Retour arrière ^ Ctrl+← Retour arrière, ⌘ Cmd+← Retour arrière Supprimer un mot à gauche du curseur. Supprimer le mot à droite du curseur Ctrl+Supprimer ^ Ctrl+Supprimer, ⌘ Cmd+Supprimer Supprimer un mot à droite du curseur. Créer un espace insécable Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace Créer un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante. Créer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Supprimer Supprimer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer le fragment du texte précédemment copié du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du texte. Le texte peut être copié précédemment à partir du même document, à partir d'un autre document, ou provenant d'un autre programme. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web. Copier le style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre texte dans le même document. Appliquer le style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Appliquer la mise en forme précédemment copiée dans le texte du document en cours d'édition. Sélection de texte Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images. Sélectionner une plage ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Shift+Début ⇧ Shift+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Shift+Fin ⇧ Shift+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner un caractère à droite ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur. Sélectionner un caractère à gauche ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur. Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin d'un mot. Sélectionner au début d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début d'un mot. Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). Sélectionner la page vers le haut ⇧ Shift+Pg. préc ⇧ Shift+Pg. préc Sélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie supérieure de l'écran. Sélectionner la page vers le bas ⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv ⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv Sélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie inférieure de l'écran. Style de texte Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Indice Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Style Titre 1 Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 2 Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 3 Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Liste à puces Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. Supprimer la mise en forme Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné. Agrandir la police Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Alignement centré/à gauche Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Passer de l'alignement centré à l'alignement à gauche. Justifié/à gauche Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Passer de l'alignement justifié à gauche. Alignement à droite/à gauche Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Passer de l'aligné à droite à l'aligné à gauche. Appliquer la mise en forme de l'indice (espacement automatique) Ctrl+= Appliquer la mise en forme d'indice au fragment de texte sélectionné. Appliquer la mise en forme d’exposant (espacement automatique) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant au fragment de texte sélectionné. Insérer des sauts de page Ctrl+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour Insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur. Augmenter le retrait Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Augmenter le retrait gauche. Réduire le retrait Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Diminuer le retrait gauche. Ajouter un numéro de page Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Ajoutez le numéro de page actuel à la position actuelle du curseur. Caractères non imprimables Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Afficher ou masque l'affichage des caractères non imprimables. Supprimer un caractère à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur. Supprimer un caractère à droite Supprimer Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à droite du curseur. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Shift + faire glisser ⇧ Shift + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Contraindre une rotation à un angle de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois. Utilisation des tableaux Passer à la cellule suivante d’une ligne ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Aller à la cellule suivante d'une ligne de tableau. Passer à la cellule précédente d'une ligne ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Aller à la cellule précédente d'une ligne de tableau. Passer à la ligne suivante ↓ ↓ Aller à la ligne suivante d'un tableau. Passer à la ligne précédente ↑ ↑ Aller à la ligne précédente d'un tableau. Commencer un nouveau paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Commencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne au bas du tableau. Insérer un saut de tableau Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Retour, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Retour Insérer un saut de tableau dans le tableau. Insertion des caractères spéciaux Insérer une équation Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= Insérer une équation à la position actuelle du curseur. Insérer un tiret sur cadratin Alt+Ctrl+Verr.num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insérer un tiret sur cadratin ‘—’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. Insérer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Trait d'union Insérer un trait d'union insécable ‘-’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. Insérer un espace insécable Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace ⌥ Option+␣ Barre d'espace Insérer un espace insécable ‘o’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur." + "body": "Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'éditeur de documents sans l'aide de la souris. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur Alt pour afficher les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès. Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer. Appuyez sur Alt pour masquer toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir au groupe de suggestions de touches précédent. Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants: Windows/Linux Mac OS Travailler avec un document Ouvrir le panneau 'Fichier' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le panneau Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, voir ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document existant, accéder au Centre d'aide de l'éditeur de documents ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à rechercher un caractère/un mot/une phrase dans le document en cours de modification. Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer' avec le champ de remplacement Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés. Répéter la dernière action Rechercher. ⇧ Maj+F4 ⇧ Maj+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+F4 Répéter la dernière recherche qui été effectuée avant on a appuyé sur la combinaison de touches. Ouvrir le panneau 'Commentaires' Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau Chat (éditeurs en ligne) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat dans l'éditeur en ligne et envoyer un message: Enregistrer un document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document en cours d'édition dans Document Editor. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer un document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Télécharger comme... Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme... pour enregistrer le document actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, DOCXF, OFORM, HTML, FB2, EPUB. Plein écran (éditeurs en ligne) F11 Passer à l'affichage en plein écran dans les éditeurs en ligne pour adapter Document Editor à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de Document Editor Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O Dans l'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Fermer la fenêtre du document actuel dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l'élément ⇧ Maj+F10 ⇧ Maj+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel pour l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du document actuel par défaut à 100%. Navigation Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Placez le curseur au début de la ligne en cours de modification Sauter au début du document Ctrl+Début ^ Ctrl+Début Placez le curseur au début du document en cours de modification. Sauter à la fin de la ligne End End Placez le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours de modification. Sauter à la fin du document Ctrl+Fin ^ Ctrl+Fin Placez le curseur à la fin du document en cours de modification. Sauter au début de la page précédente Alt+Ctrl+Pg. préc Placez le curseur au début de la page qui précède la page en cours de modification. Sauter au début de la page suivante Alt+Ctrl+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv Placez le curseur au début de la page qui suit la page en cours de modification. Faire défiler vers le bas Pg. suiv Pg. suiv, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible. Faire défiler vers le haut Pg. préc Pg. préc, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible. Page suivante Alt+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+Pg. suiv Passer à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition. Page précédente Alt+Pg. préc ⌥ Option+Pg. préc Passer à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoomer sur le document en cours d'édition Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Dézoomer sur le document en cours d'édition Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche ← ← Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite → → Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite. Rendre au début du mot ou déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Déplacer le curseur au début du mot ou se déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche Déplacer d'un mot vers la droite Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite. Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑ ↑ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut Déplacer une ligne vers le bas ↓ ↓ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas. Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. Rédaction Fin du paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Mettre fin au paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau paragraphe. Ajouter un saut de ligne ⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée ⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Créer une nouvelle ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe. Supprimer ← Retour arrière, Supprimer ← Retour arrière, Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à la gauche (← Retour arrière) ou à droite (Supprimer) du curseur. Supprimer le mot à gauche du curseur Ctrl+← Retour arrière ^ Ctrl+← Retour arrière, ⌘ Cmd+← Retour arrière Supprimer un mot à gauche du curseur. Supprimer le mot à droite du curseur Ctrl+Supprimer ^ Ctrl+Supprimer, ⌘ Cmd+Supprimer Supprimer un mot à droite du curseur. Créer un espace insécable Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Barre d'espace+␣ Barre d'espace Créer un espace entre les caractères qu'on ne peut pas utiliser pour commencer une nouvelle ligne. Créer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+⇧ Maj+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qu'on ne peut pas utiliser pour commencer une nouvelle ligne. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Z Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer Supprimer le fragment du texte et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Il est possible d'insérer le texte copié dans un autre endroit du même document, dans un autre document ou dans une autre application. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer le fragment du texte et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Il est possible d'insérer le texte copié dans un autre endroit du même document, dans un autre document ou dans une autre application. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Maj+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer le fragment du texte copié auparavant du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. C'est d'abord possible de copier le texte dans le même document, un autre document, ou une autre application. Copiez du texte sans la mise en forme du style Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V Insérer le fragment du texte copié auparavant du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur sans utiliser la mise en forme de la source. C'est d'abord possible de copier le texte dans le même document, un autre document, ou une autre application. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web. Copier le style Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre fragment du texte dans le même document. Appliquer du style Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Appliquer la mise en forme copiée au texte dans le document en cours d'édition. Séléction du texte Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images. Sélectionner un fragment ⇧ Maj+→ ← ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. Sélectionner à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Début ⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Fin ⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionnez un caractère à droite ⇧ Maj+→ ⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur. Sélectionnez un caractère à gauche ⇧ Maj+← ⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur. Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin du mot. Sélectionner jusqu'au début d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début du mot. Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut ⇧ Maj+↑ ⇧ Maj+↑ Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne). Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas ⇧ Maj+↓ ⇧ Maj+↓ Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne). Sélectionner la page vers le haut ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc Sélectionner le fragment de la page à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la partie supérieure de l'écran. Sélectionner la page vers le bas ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv Sélectionner le fragment de la page à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la partie inférieure de l'écran. Appliquer des styles au texte Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Indice Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+> Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+< Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Style Titre 1 Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 2 Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 3 Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Liste à puces Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. Supprimer la mise en forme Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné. Agrandir la police Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Alignement centré/à gauche Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Basculer entre l'alignement centré et l'alignement à gauche. Justifié/à gauche Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Basculer entre l'alignement justifié et l'alignement à gauche. Alignement à droite/à gauche Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Basculer entre l'alignement à droite et l'alignement à gauche. Appliquer la mise en forme de l'indice (espacement automatique) Ctrl+= Appliquer la mise en forme d'indice au fragment de texte sélectionné. Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant (espacement automatique) Ctrl+⇧ Maj++ Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant au fragment de texte sélectionné. Insérer des sauts de page Ctrl+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour Insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur. Augmenter le retrait Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Augmenter le retrait de gauche par incrément. Réduire le retrait Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+M Diminuer le retrait de gauche par incrément. Ajouter un numéro de page Ctrl+⇧ Maj+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+P Ajouter le numéro de page actuel à la position actuelle du curseur. Caractères non imprimables Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Num8 Afficher ou masque l'affichage des caractères non imprimables. Supprimer un caractère à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur. Supprimer un caractère à droite Supprimer Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à droite du curseur. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Maj + faire glisser ⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Limiter la rotation à à des incréments de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois. Utilisation des tableaux Déplacer vers la cellule suivante dans une ligne ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Passer à la cellule suivante dans une ligne du tableau. Déplacer vers la cellule précédente dans une ligne ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Passer à la cellule précédente dans une ligne du tableau. Passer à la ligne suivante ↓ ↓ Passer à la ligne suivante dans une ligne du tableau. Passer à la ligne précédente ↑ ↑ Passer à la ligne précédente dans une ligne du tableau. Commencer un nouveau paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Commencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne en bas du tableau. Insérer un saut de tableau Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↵ Retour, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Insérer un saut de tableau dans le tableau. Insérer des caractères spéciaux Insérer une équation Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= Insérer une équation à la position actuelle du curseur. Insérer un tiret sur cadratin Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Maj+- Insérer un tiret sur cadratin ‘—’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. Insérer un tiret demi-cadratin ⌥ Option+- Insérer un tiret demi-cadratin ‘-’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. Insérer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+⇧ Maj+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union Insérer un trait d'union insécable ‘-’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. Insérer un espace insécable Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace ⌥ Option+␣ Barre d'espace Insérer un espace insécable ‘o’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur. Insérer un symbole de copyright Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G Insérer symbole de copyright ‘©’ dans le document actuel à droite du curseur." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation", - "body": "Document Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à visionner et naviguer à travers votre document: le zoom, l'indicateur de numéro de page etc. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec un document, passez à l'onglet Affichage et choisissez d'afficher ou de masquer les éléments d'interface. Les options disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage: En-têtes sert à afficher les en-têtes du document sur le panneau à gauche. Zoom sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste déroulante. Ajuster à la page sert à adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Ajuster à la largeur sert à adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail.. Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles de la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre. Lors de l'activation du thème Sombre ou Contraste élevé sombre, l'option Document sombre devient actif. Utilisez cette option pour définir la couleur de la zone de travail sur blanc ou grise. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sera masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles. Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Barre d'état - une fois désactivé, la barre qui se trouve tout en bas avec les boutons indiquant les Numéros de pages, les Statistiques et le Zoom sera masquée. Activez cette option pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée. Règles une fois désactivé, les règles qui sont utilisées pour aligner le texte, les graphiques, les tableaux et d'autres éléments dans un document, pour définir des marges, des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe sont masquées. Pour afficher les Règles, activez cette option. Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Commentaireset autres onglets sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case. Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case. La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Lorsque le panneau Commentaires ou Chat , la largeur de la barre latérale gauche est ajustée par simple glisser-déposer: déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche pour qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers la droite pour agrandir la largeur du panneau latéral. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à gauche. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre document, utilisez les outils suivants: Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail.. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage. Numéro de page affiche la page active dans l'ensemble des pages du document actif (page 'n' sur 'nn'). Cliquez sur ce libellé pour ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la page et y accéder rapidement. Statistiques affiche des informations statistiques sur votre document." + "body": "L'éditeur des documents vous propose plusieurs outils pour vous aider à afficher et naviguer à travers votre document: le zoom, l'indicateur de numéro de page etc. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec un document, passez à l'onglet Affichage et choisissez d'afficher ou de masquer les éléments d'interface. Les options disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage: En-têtes sert à afficher les en-têtes du document sur le panneau à gauche. Zoom sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste déroulante. Ajuster à la page sert à adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Ajuster à la largeur sert à adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail.. Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles de la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre. Lors de l'activation du thème Sombre ou Contraste élevé sombre, l'option Document sombre devient actif. Utilisez cette option pour définir la couleur de la zone de travail sur blanc ou grise. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sera masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles. Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Barre d'état - une fois désactivé, la barre qui se trouve tout en bas avec les boutons indiquant les Numéros de pages, les Statistiques et le Zoom sera masquée. Activez cette option pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée. Règles une fois désactivé, les règles qui sont utilisées pour aligner le texte, les graphiques, les tableaux et d'autres éléments dans un document, pour définir des marges, des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe sont masquées. Pour afficher les Règles, activez cette option. Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Commentaireset autres onglets sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case. Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case. La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Lorsque le panneau Commentaires ou Chat , la largeur de la barre latérale gauche est ajustée par simple glisser-déposer: déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche pour qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers la droite pour agrandir la largeur du panneau latéral. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à gauche. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre document, utilisez les outils suivants: Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail.. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage. Numéro de page affiche la page active dans l'ensemble des pages du document actif (page 'n' sur 'nn'). Cliquez sur ce libellé pour ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la page et y accéder rapidement. Statistiques affiche des informations statistiques sur votre document." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", "title": "Protéger un document avec un mot de passe", - "body": "Vous pouvez protéger vos documents avec un mot de passe afin que tous les coauteurs puissent d'accéder en mode d'édition. On peut modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe, le cas échéant. Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Il est également possible de protéger vos documents en limitant l'accès. Définir un mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer. définissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous. Cliquez sur pour afficher ou masquer les caractères lors de la saisie. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Pour ouvrir le document avec les permissions d'accès complet, l'utilisateur doit saisir ce mot de passe. Modifier le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer. définissez le nouveau mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous. Cliquez sur pour afficher ou masquer les caractères lors de la saisie. cliquez sur le bouton Modifier un mot de passe. saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK. Supprimer le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer un mot de passe. Protéger un document passez à l'onglet Protection, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document le cas échéant, définissez le mot de passe, sélectionnez les permissions d'accès appropriées au document si l'utilisateur n'a pas encore saisi le mot de passe: Aucune modification (lecture seule) - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le document. Remplissage des formulaires - l'utilisateur peut uniquement remplir le formulaire. Modifications - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le suivi de modifications du document. Commentaires - l'utilisateur peut uniquement commenter ou répondre au commentaires. cliquez sur Protéger pour valider. Pour supprimer la protection du document protégé par un mot de passe, passez à l'onglet Protection, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document saisissez le mot de passe dans la fenêtre Déprotéger le document." + "body": "Vous pouvez protéger vos documents avec un mot de passe afin que tous les coauteurs puissent d'accéder en mode d'édition. On peut modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe, le cas échéant. Ce n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Il est également possible de protéger vos documents en limitant l'accès. Définir un mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un mot de passe afin d'ouvrir la fenêtre, ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer. définissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous. Cliquez sur pour afficher ou masquer les caractères lors de la saisie. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Pour ouvrir le document avec les permissions d'accès complet, l'utilisateur doit saisir ce mot de passe. Modifier le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Protéger. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un mot de passe afin d'ouvrir la fenêtre, ou passer à l'onglet Protection et cliquer sur l'icône Chiffrer. définissez le nouveau mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmer le mot de passe au-dessous. Cliquez sur pour afficher ou masquer les caractères lors de la saisie. cliquez sur OK. Supprimer le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer un mot de passe. Protéger un document passez à l'onglet Protection, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document, le cas échéant, définissez le mot de passe, sélectionnez les permissions d'accès appropriées au document si l'utilisateur n'a pas encore saisi le mot de passe: Aucune modification (lecture seule) - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le document. Remplissage des formulaires - l'utilisateur peut uniquement remplir le formulaire. Modifications - l'utilisateur peut uniquement afficher le suivi de modifications du document. Commentaires - l'utilisateur peut uniquement commenter ou répondre au commentaires. cliquez sur Protéger pour valider. Pour supprimer la protection du document protégé par un mot de passe, passez à l'onglet Protection, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le document, saisissez le mot de passe dans la fenêtre Déprotéger le document." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "title": "Réviser des documents", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, comparer et fusionner pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition. Lorsque quelqu'un disposant des autorisations de révision partage avec vous un fichier, vous devez utiliser la fonction Révision du document. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, si vous êtes le relecteur, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Révision pour réviser le document, modifier des propositions, des phrases et d'autres éléments de la page, corriger l'orthographe et faire d'autres modifications dans le document sans l'éditer. Toutes vos modifications seront enregistrées et montrées à la personne qui vous a envoyé le document. Si vous êtes la personne qui envoie le fichier pour la révision, vous devrez afficher toutes les modifications qui y ont été apportées, les afficher et les accepter ou les rejeter. Activer la fonctionnalité Suivi des modifications Pour voir les modifications suggérées par un réviseur, activez l'option Suivi des modifications de l'une des manières suivantes : cliquez sur le bouton dans le coin inférieur droit de la barre d'état, ou passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Suivi des modifications. Il n'est pas nécessaire que le réviseur active l'option Suivi des modifications. Elle est activée par défaut et ne peut pas être désactivée lorsque le document est partagé avec des droits d'accès de révision uniquement. Les options disponibles pour dans le menu contextuel : ON pour moi - le suivi des modifications est activé uniquement pour l'utilisateur actuel. L'option est activée pendant la session d'édition actuelle, c-à-d elle est désactivée lors de l'actualisation ou la réouverture du document. L'activation et la désactivation du suivi des modifications par d'autres utilisateurs ne l'affecte pas. OFF pour moi - le suivi des modifications est désactivé uniquement pour l'utilisateur actuel. L'option demeure désactivée pendant la session d'édition actuelle. L'activation et la désactivation du suivi des modifications par d'autres utilisateurs ne l'affecte pas. ON pour moi et tout le monde - le suivi des modifications est actif et demeure activé lors de l'actualisation ou la réouverture du document (le suivi des modifications sera actif pour tous les utilisateurs après la mise à jour du document). Lorsque le suivi des modifications est désactivé par d'autres utilisateurs, ceux-ci passe en mode OFF pour moi et tout le monde. OFF pour moi et tout le monde - le suivi des modifications est désactivé et demeure désactivé lors de l'actualisation ou la réouverture du document (le suivi des modifications sera désactivé pour tous les utilisateurs après la mise à jour du document). Lorsque le suivi des modifications est activé par d'autres utilisateurs, ceux-ci passe en mode ON pour moi et tout le monde. Un message d'alerte s'affiche pour tous les utilisateurs qui travaillent sur le même document. Suivi des modifications Toutes les modifications apportées par un autre utilisateur sont marquées par différentes couleurs dans le texte. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le texte modifié, une bulle apparaîtra comportant le nom d'utilisateur, la date et l'heure de la modification et une description de la modification. Les icônes dan la bulle permettent d'accepter ou de rejeter la modification actuelle. Lorsque vous glissez et déposez du texte dans un document, ce texte est marqué d'un soulignement double. Le texte d'origine est signalé par un barré double. Ceux-ci sont considérés comme une seule modification Cliquez sur le texte mis en forme de double barré dans la position initiale et appuyer sur la flèche dans la bulle de la modification pour vous déplacer vers le texte en position nouvelle. Cliquez sur le texte mis en forme d'un soulignement double dans la nouvelle position et appuyer sur la flèche dans la bulle de la modification pour vous déplacer vers le texte en position initiale. Choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications Cliquez sur le bouton Mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'un des modes disponibles dans la liste : Balisage et bulles - cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Elle permet à la fois d'afficher les modifications suggérées et de modifier le document. Les modifications sont mises en surbrillance dans le document et s'affichent dans les bulles. Balisage uniquement - ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. Les modifications s'affichent uniquement dans le documents et toutes les bulles sont masquées. Final - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher toutes les modifications comme si elles étaient acceptées. Cette option n'accepte pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet de voir à quoi ressemblera le document après avoir accepté toutes les modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Original - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher toutes les modifications comme si elles avaient été rejetées. Cette option ne rejette pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet uniquement d'afficher le document sans modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Accepter ou rejeter les modifications Utilisez les boutons Précédente et Suivante de la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les modifications. Pour accepter la modification actuellement sélectionnée, vous pouvez : cliquez sur le bouton Accepter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera acceptée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquez sur le bouton Accepter dans la bulle de modification. Pour accepter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter toutes les modifications. Pour rejeter la modification actuelle, vous pouvez : cliquer sur le bouton Rejeter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera rejetée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter dans la bulle de modification. Pour rejeter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter toutes les modifications. Si vous souhaitez accepter ou rejeter une modification, faites un clic droit dessus et sélectionnez Accepter la modification ou Rejeter la modification dans le menu contextuel. Si vous révisez le document, les options Accepter et Rejeter ne sont pas disponibles pour vous. Vous pouvez supprimer vos modifications en utilisant l'icône dans la bulle de modification." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des documents en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments du document nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du document pour une utilisation ultérieure, comparer et fusionner pour faciliter le traitement et l'édition. Lorsque quelqu'un disposant des autorisations de révision partage avec vous un fichier, vous devez utiliser la fonction Révision du document. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, si vous êtes le relecteur, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Révision pour réviser le document, modifier des propositions, des phrases et d'autres éléments de la page, corriger l'orthographe et faire d'autres modifications dans le document sans l'éditer. Toutes vos modifications seront enregistrées et montrées à la personne qui vous a envoyé le document. Si vous êtes la personne qui envoie le fichier pour la révision, vous devrez afficher toutes les modifications qui y ont été apportées, les afficher et les accepter ou les rejeter. Activer la fonctionnalité Suivi des modifications Pour voir les modifications suggérées par un réviseur, activez l'option Suivi des modifications de l'une des manières suivantes : cliquez sur le bouton dans le coin inférieur droit de la barre d'état, ou passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Suivi des modifications. Il n'est pas nécessaire que le réviseur active l'option Suivi des modifications. Elle est activée par défaut et ne peut pas être désactivée lorsque le document est partagé avec des droits d'accès de révision uniquement. Les options disponibles pour dans le menu contextuel : ON pour moi - le suivi des modifications est activé uniquement pour l'utilisateur actuel. L'option est activée pendant la session d'édition actuelle, c-à-d elle est désactivée lors de l'actualisation ou la réouverture du document. L'activation et la désactivation du suivi des modifications par d'autres utilisateurs ne l'affecte pas. OFF pour moi - le suivi des modifications est désactivé uniquement pour l'utilisateur actuel. L'option demeure désactivée pendant la session d'édition actuelle. L'activation et la désactivation du suivi des modifications par d'autres utilisateurs ne l'affecte pas. ON pour moi et tout le monde - le suivi des modifications est actif et demeure activé lors de l'actualisation ou la réouverture du document (le suivi des modifications sera actif pour tous les utilisateurs après la mise à jour du document). Lorsque le suivi des modifications est désactivé par d'autres utilisateurs, ceux-ci passe en mode OFF pour moi et tout le monde. OFF pour moi et tout le monde - le suivi des modifications est désactivé et demeure désactivé lors de l'actualisation ou la réouverture du document (le suivi des modifications sera désactivé pour tous les utilisateurs après la mise à jour du document). Lorsque le suivi des modifications est activé par d'autres utilisateurs, ceux-ci passe en mode ON pour moi et tout le monde. Un message d'alerte s'affiche pour tous les utilisateurs qui travaillent sur le même document. Suivi des modifications Toutes les modifications apportées par un autre utilisateur sont marquées par différentes couleurs dans le texte. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le texte modifié, une bulle apparaîtra comportant le nom d'utilisateur, la date et l'heure de la modification et une description de la modification. Les icônes dan la bulle permettent d'accepter ou de rejeter la modification actuelle. Lorsque vous glissez et déposez du texte dans un document, ce texte est marqué d'un soulignement double. Le texte d'origine est signalé par un barré double. Ceux-ci sont considérés comme une seule modification. Cliquez sur le texte mis en forme de double barré dans la position initiale et appuyer sur la flèche dans la bulle de la modification pour vous déplacer vers le texte en position nouvelle. Cliquez sur le texte mis en forme d'un soulignement double dans la nouvelle position et appuyer sur la flèche dans la bulle de la modification pour vous déplacer vers le texte en position initiale. Choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications Cliquez sur le bouton Mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'un des modes disponibles dans la liste : Balisage et bulles - cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Elle permet à la fois d'afficher les modifications suggérées et de modifier le document. Les modifications sont mises en surbrillance dans le document et s'affichent dans les bulles. Balisage uniquement - ce mode permet d'afficher toutes les modifications et de modifier le document. Les modifications s'affichent uniquement dans le documents et toutes les bulles sont masquées. Final - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher toutes les modifications comme si elles étaient acceptées. Cette option n'accepte pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet de voir à quoi ressemblera le document après avoir accepté toutes les modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Original - ce mode est utilisé pour afficher toutes les modifications comme si elles avaient été rejetées. Cette option ne rejette pas toutes les modifications, elle vous permet uniquement d'afficher le document sans modifications. Dans ce mode, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document. Accepter ou rejeter les modifications Utilisez les boutons Précédente et Suivante de la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les modifications. Pour accepter la modification actuellement sélectionnée, vous pouvez : cliquer sur le bouton Accepter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionner l'option Accepter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera acceptée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquer sur le bouton Accepter dans la bulle de modification. Pour accepter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Accepter et sélectionnez l'option Accepter toutes les modifications. Pour rejeter la modification actuelle, vous pouvez : cliquer sur le bouton Rejeter de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter la modification en cours (dans ce cas, la modification sera rejetée et vous passerez à la modification suivante), ou cliquer sur le bouton Rejeter dans la bulle de modification. Pour rejeter rapidement toutes les modifications, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas au-dessous du bouton Rejeter et sélectionnez l'option Rejeter toutes les modifications. Si vous souhaitez accepter ou rejeter une modification, faites un clic droit dessus et sélectionnez Accepter la modification ou Rejeter la modification dans le menu contextuel. Si vous révisez le document, les options Accepter et Rejeter ne sont pas disponibles pour vous. Vous pouvez supprimer vos modifications en utilisant l'icône dans la bulle de modification." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", - "title": "Fonction de recherche et remplacement", - "body": "Pour rechercher des caractères, des mots ou des phrases utilisés dans le document, cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre latérale gauche de l'Éditeur de Documents, sur l'icône située au coin droit en haut ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Command+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir le petit panneau Recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H pour ouvrir le panneau complet Recherche. Un petit panneau Recherche s'affiche au coin droit en haut de la zone de travail. Afin d'accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H. La fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche : Saisissez votre enquête dans le champ de saisie correspondant Recherche. Si vous avez besoin de remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères saisis, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie correspondant Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer l'occurrence actuellement sélectionnée ou remplacer toutes les occurrences en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants Remplacer et Remplacer tout. Afin de parcourir les occurrences trouvées, cliquez sur un des boutons à flèche. Le bouton affiche l'occurrence suivante, le bouton ) affiche l'occurrence précédente. Spécifiez les paramètres de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires au-dessous du champ de saisie : Sensible à la casse - sert à trouver les occurrences saisies de la même casse (par exemple, si votre enquête est 'Éditeur' et cette option est sélectionnée, les mots tels que 'éditeur' ou 'EDITEUR' etc. ne seront pas trouvés). Seulement les mots entiers - sert à surligner les mots entiers uniquement. Toutes les occurrences seront mises en surbrillance dans le fichier et affichées sous forme de liste dans le panneau gauche Recherche. Utilisez la liste pour passer à l'occurrence requise ou utilisez les boutons de navigation et . Éditeur de Documents prend en charge la recherche de caractères spéciaux. Pour rechercher un caractère spécial, saisissez-le dans le champ de recherche. La liste des caractères spéciaux qu'on peut utiliser dans une requête Caractère spécial Description ^l Saut de ligne ^t Taquet de tabulation ^? Tout symbole ^# Tout chiffre ^$ Toute lettre ^n Saut de colonne ^e Note de fin ^f Note de bas de page ^g élément graphique ^m Saut de page ^~ Trait d'union insécable ^s Espace insécable ^^ échappement du caret lui-même ^w Tout espace ^+ Tiret cadratin ^= Tiret demi-cadratin ^y Tout tiret Les caractères qu'on peut utiliser pour remplacement : Caractère spécial Description ^l Saut de ligne ^t Taquet de tabulation ^n Saut de colonne ^m Saut de page ^~ Trait d'union insécable ^s Espace insécable ^+ Tiret cadratin ^= Tiret demi-cadratin" + "title": "Fonctions de recherche et remplacement", + "body": "Pour rechercher des caractères nécessaires, des mots ou des phrases dans dans le document en cours de modification, cliquez sur l'icône sur la barre latérale gauche de l'éditeur de documents, l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Commande+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir la petite barre de recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+ H pour ouvrir le plein panneau de recherche. Une petite barre Recherche apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de l'espace de travail. La barre inclut le champ de saisie de la requête de recherche, affiche le nombre de résultats de recherche et les contrôles pour basculer entre le résultat précédent ou suivant et masquer la barre. Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône ou utilisez la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H. Le panneau Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche. Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans le champ de saisie Rechercher. S'il vous faut remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer une seule occurrence qui est mise en surbrillance ou toutes occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant Remplacer ou Remplacer tout. Pour naviguer à travers des occurrences, cliquez sur les boutons fléchés. Le bouton affiche l'occurrence suivante et le bouton affiche l'occurrence précédente. Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées en dessous du champ de saisie: Sensible aux caractères sert à passer toutes les occurrences tenant compte de la casse (par exemple, quand vous rechercher le mot «Éditeur», les mots «éditeur» et «ÉDITEUR» ne sont pas affichés). Mots entiers uniquement set à mettre en surbrillance uniquement des mots entiers. Toutes les occurrences seront mises en surbrillance dans le fichier et seront affichés sous forme de liste sur le panneau Recherche de gauche. Utilisez la liste pour basculer vers l'occurrence recherchée ou utilisez les boutons de navigation et . L'éditeur de documents prend en charge la recherche de caractères spéciaux. Pour rechercher un caractère spécial, saisissez-le dans le champ de recherche. La liste des caractères spéciaux qu'on peut utiliser dans une requête: Caractère spécial Description ^l Saut de ligne ^t Taquet de tabulation ^? Tout symbole ^# Tout chiffre ^$ Toute lettre ^n Saut de colonne ^e Note de fin ^f Note de bas de page ^g Élément graphique ^m Saut de page ^~ Trait d'union insécable ^s Espace insécable ^^ Échappement du caret lui-même ^w Tout espace ^+ Tiret cadratin ^= Tiret demi-cadratin ^y Tout tiret Les caractères qu'on peut utiliser pour remplacement: Caractère spécial Description ^l Saut de ligne ^t Taquet de tabulation ^n Saut de colonne ^m Saut de page ^~ Trait d'union insécable ^s Espace insécable ^+ Tiret cadratin ^= Tiret demi-cadratin" }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", "title": "Vérification de l'orthographe", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte saisi dans une certaine langue et corriger des fautes lors de l'édition. L'édition de bureau de tous les trois éditeurs permet d'ajouter les mots au dictionnaire personnel. À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en chatge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page. Tout d'abord, choisissez la langue pour tout le document. cliquer sur l'icône Définir la langue du document dans la barre d'état. Dans la fenêtre ouverte sélectionnez la langue nécessaire et cliquez sur OK. La langue sélectionnée sera appliquée à tout le document. Pour sélectionner une langue différente pour un fragment, sélectionnez le fragment nécessaire avec la souris et utilisez le menu de la barre d'état. Pour activer l'option de vérification orthographique, vous pouvez : cliquer sur l'icône Vérification orthographique dans la barre d'état, ou basculer vers l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, aller à la section Paramètres avancés..., cocher la case Activer la vérification orthographique et cliquer sur le bouton Appliquer. Les mots mal orthographiés seront soulignés par une ligne rouge. Cliquez droit sur le mot nécessaire pour activer le menu et : choisissez une des variantes suggérées pour remplacer le mot mal orthographié. S'il y a trop de variantes, l'option Plus de variantes... apparaît dans le menu ; utilisez l'option Ignorer pour ignorer juste ce mot et supprimer le surlignage ou Ignorer tout pour ignorer tous les mots identiques présentés dans le texte ; si le mot n’est pas dans le dictionnaire, vous pouvez l’ajouter au votre dictionnaire personnel. La foi prochaine ce mot ne sera donc plus considéré comme erroné. Cette option est disponible sur l’édition de bureau. sélectionnez une autre langue pour ce mot. Pour désactiver l'option de vérification orthographique, vous pouvez : cliquer sur l'icône Vérification orthographique dans la barre d'état, ou ouvrir l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionner l'option Paramètres avancés..., décocher la case Activer la vérification orthographique, et cliquer sur le bouton Appliquer." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte saisi dans une certaine langue et corriger des fautes lors de l'édition. L'édition de bureau de tous les trois éditeurs permet d'ajouter les mots au dictionnaire personnel. À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en charge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page. Tout d'abord, choisissez la langue pour tout le document. cliquer sur l'icône Définir la langue du document dans la barre d'état. Dans la fenêtre ouverte sélectionnez la langue nécessaire et cliquez sur OK. La langue sélectionnée sera appliquée à tout le document. Pour sélectionner une langue différente pour un fragment, sélectionnez le fragment nécessaire avec la souris et utilisez le menu de la barre d'état. Pour activer l'option de vérification orthographique, vous pouvez : cliquer sur l'icône Vérification orthographique dans la barre d'état, ou basculer vers l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, aller à la section Paramètres avancés..., cocher la case Activer la vérification orthographique et cliquer sur le bouton Appliquer. Les mots mal orthographiés seront soulignés par une ligne rouge. Cliquez droit sur le mot nécessaire pour activer le menu et : choisissez une des variantes suggérées pour remplacer le mot mal orthographié. S'il y a trop de variantes, l'option Plus de variantes... apparaît dans le menu ; utilisez l'option Ignorer pour ignorer juste ce mot et supprimer le surlignage ou Ignorer tout pour ignorer tous les mots identiques présentés dans le texte ; si le mot n’est pas dans le dictionnaire, vous pouvez l’ajouter au votre dictionnaire personnel. La foi prochaine ce mot ne sera donc plus considéré comme erroné. Cette option est disponible sur l’édition de bureau. sélectionnez une autre langue pour ce mot. Pour désactiver l'option de vérification orthographique, vous pouvez : cliquer sur l'icône Vérification orthographique dans la barre d'état, ou ouvrir l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionner l'option Paramètres avancés..., décocher la case Activer la vérification orthographique, et cliquer sur le bouton Appliquer." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge", - "body": "Les documents électroniques représentent l'un des types des fichiers les plus utilisés en informatique. Grâce à l'utilisation du réseau informatique tant développé aujourd'hui, il est possible et plus pratique de distribuer des documents électroniques que des versions imprimées. Les formats de fichier ouverts et propriétaires sont bien nombreux à cause de la variété des périphériques utilisés pour la présentation des documents. Éditeur de Documents prend en charge les formats les plus populaires. Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Open Office XML (DOCX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition. Formats Description Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML DjVu Le format de fichier conçu principalement pour stocker les documents numérisés, en particulier ceux qui contiennent une combinaison du texte, des dessins au trait et des photographies + DOC L'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Une extension de fichier Microsoft Word 2007 ou version ultérieure comportant des macros incorporées pouvant être exécutées dans le document. + + DOCX Office Open XML Le format de fichier compressé basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des feuilles de calcul et les graphiques, les présentations et les document du traitement textuel + + DOCXF Le format pour créer, modifier et collaborer sur un Modèle de formulaire. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de documents texte. Un modèle DOTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme + + EPUB Electronic Publication Le format ebook standardisé, gratuit et ouvert créé par l'International Digital Publishing Forum + + FB2 Une extension de livres électroniques qui peut être lancé par votre ordinateur ou appareil mobile + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Le principale langage de balisage pour les pages web + + ODT Le format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques + + OFORM Le format pour remplir un formulaire. Les champs du formulaire sont à remplir mais les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas modifier la mise en forme ou les paramètres des éléments du formulaire.* + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de document texte. Un modèle OTT contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme + + PDF Portable Document Format Format de fichier utilisé pour représenter les documents d'une manière indépendante du logiciel, du matériel et des systèmes d'exploitation + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Une version normalisée ISO du format PDF (Portable Document Format) conçue pour l'archivage et la conservation à long terme des documents électroniques. + RTF Rich Text Format Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents + + TXT L'extension de nom de fichier pour les fichiers de texte contenant habituellement une mise en forme minimale + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). Le langage de balisage extensible est une forme restreinte d'application du langage de balisage généralisé standard SGM (ISO 8879) conçu pour stockage et traitement de données. + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Le format ouvert de la mise en page fixe, libre de redevance créé par Microsoft + *Remarque : le format OFORM c'est un format qui sert à remplir un formulaire. Alors, ce sont des champs du formulaire qui sont modifiables. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'un document dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme. Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT OFORM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT, XPS Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos documents dans des formats les plus populaires." + "body": "Les documents électroniques représentent l'un des types des fichiers les plus utilisés en informatique. Grâce à l'utilisation du réseau informatique tant développé aujourd'hui, il est possible et plus pratique de distribuer des documents électroniques que des versions imprimées. Les formats de fichier ouverts et propriétaires sont bien nombreux à cause de la variété des périphériques utilisés pour la présentation des documents. L'éditeur de documents prend en charge les formats les plus populaires. Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Open Office XML (DOCX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition. Formats Description Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML DjVu Le format de fichier conçu principalement pour stocker les documents numérisés, en particulier ceux qui contiennent une combinaison du texte, des dessins au trait et des photographies + DOC L'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Une extension de fichier Microsoft Word 2007 ou version ultérieure comportant des macros incorporées pouvant être exécutées dans le document. + + DOCX Office Open XML Le format de fichier compressé basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des feuilles de calcul et les graphiques, les présentations et les document du traitement textuel + + DOCXF Le format pour créer, modifier et collaborer sur un Modèle de formulaire. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de documents texte. Un modèle DOTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme + + EPUB Electronic Publication Le format ebook standardisé, gratuit et ouvert créé par l'International Digital Publishing Forum + + FB2 Une extension de livres électroniques qui peut être lancé par votre ordinateur ou appareil mobile + + FODT OpenDocument Flat XML Un document texte sauvegardé dans le format OpenDocument format, mais stocké comme un document XML brut au lieu du conteneur .ZIP qui est utilisé avec des fichier .ODT. + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Le principale langage de balisage pour les pages web + + MHTML MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML Un format d'archivage du web, l'archive comporte tout le contenu d'une page web. + + ODT Le format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques + + OFORM Le format pour remplir un formulaire. Des champs du formulaire sont modifiables mais on ne peut pas modifier la mise en forme ou configurer les paramètres des éléments du formulaire. + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de document texte. Un modèle OTT contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme + + PDF Portable Document Format Format de fichier utilisé pour représenter les documents d'une manière indépendante du logiciel, du matériel et des systèmes d'exploitation + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Une version normalisée ISO du format PDF (Portable Document Format) conçue pour l'archivage et la conservation à long terme des documents électroniques. + RTF Rich Text Format Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents + + STW StarOffice Document Template Un format de fichier destiné au sauvegarde des documents de traitement du texte dans OpenOffice.org Writer. Il est possible d'éditer un fichier STW à l'aide de tout logiciel prenant en charge le format OpenDocument (ODF). Les fichiers STW comprennent du texte, des images et tout autre information de mise en forme. + + SXW StarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document Un format de fichiers texte inclus dans la suite StarOffice suite qui est basé sur le format OpenDocument XML format est compatible avec Apache OpenOffice (anciennement OpenOffice.org) Writer, succède à StarOffice Writer. + + TXT L'extension de nom de fichier pour les fichiers de texte contenant habituellement une mise en forme minimale + + WPS Microsoft Works Word Processor Text Document Un format du document texte créé par Microsoft Works Word Processor, le logiciel de traitement de texte qui est remplacé par Microsoft Word. Fichiers WPS ressemblent aux files documents Word, mais moins d'options de mise en forme sont disponibles. + + WPT WordPerfect Text Document Un fichier texte avec l'extension .wpt extension est sauvegardé au format binaire et comprend du texte, des graphiques, des images, des tableaux et d'autres informations textuelles. + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). Le langage de balisage extensible est une forme restreinte d'application du langage de balisage généralisé standard SGM (ISO 8879) conçu pour stockage et traitement de données. + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Le format ouvert de la mise en page fixe, libre de redevance créé par Microsoft + *Remarque: le format OFORM c'est un format qui sert à remplir un formulaire. Alors, ce sont des champs du formulaire qui sont modifiables. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'un document dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme. Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme DjVu DjVu, JPG, PDF, PDF/A, PNG DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT FODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT MHTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OFORM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT STW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT SXW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT WPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT WPT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos documents dans des formats les plus populaires." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", @@ -73,12 +73,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Viewer.htm", "title": "Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Vous pouvez utiliser Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE pour ouvrir et parcourir des fichiers PDF, XPS et DjVu. Le lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE permet de : consulter des fichiers PDF, XPS, DjVu, ajouter des annotations à l'aide de chat, parcourir des fichiers à l'aide du panneau de navigation et des vignettes de page, utiliser l'outil de sélection et l'outil Main, imprimer et télécharger des fichiers, utiliser des liens internes et externes, accéder aux paramètres avancés du fichier dans l'éditeur et consulter le descriptif du document en utilisant l'onglet Fichier et Affichage : Emplacement (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été téléchargé. Statistiques - le nombre de pages, paragraphes, mots, symboles, symboles avec des espaces. Taille de la page - la taille des pages dans le fichier Dernière modification - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été modifié la dernière fois. Créé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Application - l'application dans laquelle on a créé le document. Auteur - la personne qui a créé le document. Producteur PDF - l'application qu'on a utilisé pour convertir le document en PDF. Version PDF - la version du fichier PDF : PDF marqué - affiche si le fichier PDF comporte des balises. Affichage rapide sur le Web - affiche si l'affichage rapide des pages web a été activé pour ce document. utiliser les modules complémentaires Les modules complémentaires disponibles dans la version du bureau : Traducteur, Send, Thésaurus. Les modules complémentaires disponibles dans la version en ligne : Controls example, Get and paste html, Telegram, Typograf, Count word, Speech, Thésaurus, Traducteur. L'interface du Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE : La barre d'outils supérieure fournit l'accès aux onglets Fichier, Affichage et Plug-ins et aux icônes suivantes : Imprimer permet d'imprimer le fichier ; Télécharger permet de sauvegarder le fichier sur votre orrdinateur ; Partager (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès au fichier directement à partir du document : inviter de nouveaux utilisateurs leur donnant les permissions de modifier, lire, commenter, remplir des formulaires ou réviser le document, ou refuser à certains utilisateurs des droits d'accès au fichier ; Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier dans la version de bureau, sert à ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur ; Marquer en tant que favori / Enlever des favoris (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) cliquez sur l'étoile vide pour ajouter le fichier aux favoris et le retrouver rapidement ou cliquez sur l'étoile remplie pour effacer le fichier des favoris. Ce n'est qu'un fichier de raccourcis car le fichier lui-même est dans l'emplacement de stockage d'origine. Le fichier réel n'est pas supprimé quand vous le supprimez des favoris ; Utilisateur affiche le nom d'utilisateur lorsque vous placer le curseur de votre souris sur l'icône ; Recherche - permet de rechercher dans le document un mot ou un symbole particulier, etc. La Barre d'état au bas de la fenêtre du Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE contient l'indicateur du numéro de page et affiche certaines notifications des processus d'arrière plan. La barre d'état comporte aussi les outils suivants : Outil de sélection sert à sélectionner du texte dans un fichier. Outil Main sert à faire glisser et défiler la page. Ajuster à la page sert à redimensionner la page pour afficher une page entière sur l'écran. Ajuster à la largeur sert à redimensionner la page pour l'adapter à la largeur de l'écran. Outil zoom sert à zoomer et dézoomer sur une page. La barre latérale gauche comporte les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat, - permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Navigation pour parcourir la liste hiérarchique des titres avec des éléments de navigation imbriqués. Cliquez sur le titre pour passer directement sur la page nécessaire. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres à droite du panneau Titres et utilisez l'une des options disponibles dans le menu : Développer tout pour développer tous les niveaux de titres sur le panneau de navigation. Réduire tout pour réduire touts les niveaux de titres sauf le niveau 1 sur le panneau de Navigation. Développer jusqu'au niveau pour développer la liste hiérarchique des titres jusqu'au niveau sélectionné. Par ex., si vous sélectionnez le niveau 3, on va développer les niveaux 1, 2 et 3 mais le niveau 4 et tous niveaux inférieurs seront réduits. Taille de la police – pour personnaliser la taille de la police du texte sur le panneau Navigation en choisissant l'un des préréglages disponibles : Petit, Moyen et Grand. Renvoyer à la ligne les longs titres – pour renvoyer à la ligne le texte des longs titres. Pour développer et réduire chaque niveau de titres à part, utilisez la flèche à droit du titre. Pour fermer le panneau de Navigation, cliquez sur l'icône Navigation sur la barre latérale gauche encore une fois. - sert à afficher les vignettes des pages afin de parcourir rapidement un document. Cliquez sur sur le panneau Miniatures des pages pour accéder aux Paramètres des miniatures : Faites glisser le curseur pour définir la taille de la vignette, Par défaut, l'option Mettre en surbrillance la partie visible de la page est active pour indiquer sur la vignette la zone affichée maintenant sur l'écran. Cliquez sur la case à coché pour désactiver cette option. Pour fermer le panneau Miniatures des pages, cliquez sur l'icône Miniatures des pages sur la barre latérale gauche encore une fois. - permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique, - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de visualiser les informations sur le programme." + "body": "Vous pouvez utiliser Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE pour ouvrir et parcourir des fichiers PDF, XPS et DjVu. Le lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE permet de : consulter des fichiers PDF, XPS, DjVu, ajouter des annotations à l'aide de chat, parcourir des fichiers à l'aide du panneau de navigation et des vignettes de page, utiliser l'outil de sélection et l'outil Main, imprimer et télécharger des fichiers, utiliser des liens internes et externes, accéder aux paramètres avancés du fichier dans l'éditeur et consulter le descriptif du document en utilisant l'onglet Fichier et Affichage : Emplacement (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été téléchargé. Statistiques - le nombre de pages, paragraphes, mots, symboles, symboles avec des espaces. Taille de la page - la taille des pages dans le fichier. Dernière modification - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été modifié la dernière fois. Créé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Application - l'application dans laquelle on a créé le document. Auteur - la personne qui a créé le document. Producteur PDF - l'application qu'on a utilisé pour convertir le document en PDF. Version PDF - la version du fichier PDF : PDF marqué - affiche si le fichier PDF comporte des balises. Affichage rapide sur le Web - affiche si l'affichage rapide des pages web a été activé pour ce document. utiliser les modules complémentaires Les modules complémentaires disponibles dans la version du bureau : Traducteur, Send, Thésaurus. Les modules complémentaires disponibles dans la version en ligne : Controls example, Obtenir et coller du html, Telegram, Typograf, Compter les mots et les caractères, Parole, Thésaurus, Traducteur. L'interface du Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE : La barre d'outils supérieure fournit l'accès aux onglets Fichier, Affichage et Plug-ins et aux icônes suivantes : Imprimer permet d'imprimer le fichier ; Télécharger permet de sauvegarder le fichier sur votre ordinateur ; Partager (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès au fichier directement à partir du document : inviter de nouveaux utilisateurs leur donnant les permissions de modifier, lire, commenter, remplir des formulaires ou réviser le document, ou refuser à certains utilisateurs des droits d'accès au fichier ; Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier dans la version de bureau, sert à ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur ; Marquer en tant que favori / Enlever des favoris (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) cliquez sur l'étoile vide pour ajouter le fichier aux favoris et le retrouver rapidement ou cliquez sur l'étoile remplie pour effacer le fichier des favoris. Ce n'est qu'un fichier de raccourcis car le fichier lui-même est dans l'emplacement de stockage d'origine. Le fichier réel n'est pas supprimé quand vous le supprimez des favoris ; Utilisateur affiche le nom d'utilisateur lorsque vous placer le curseur de votre souris sur l'icône ; Recherche - permet de rechercher dans le document un mot ou un symbole particulier, etc. La Barre d'état au bas de la fenêtre du Lecteur de documents ONLYOFFICE contient l'indicateur du numéro de page et affiche certaines notifications des processus d'arrière plan. La barre d'état comporte aussi les outils suivants : Outil de sélection sert à sélectionner du texte dans un fichier. Outil Main sert à faire glisser et défiler la page. Ajuster à la page sert à redimensionner la page pour afficher une page entière sur l'écran. Ajuster à la largeur sert à redimensionner la page pour l'adapter à la largeur de l'écran. Outil zoom sert à zoomer et dézoomer sur une page. La barre latérale gauche comporte les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat, - permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Navigation pour parcourir la liste hiérarchique des titres avec des éléments de navigation imbriqués. Cliquez sur le titre pour passer directement sur la page nécessaire. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres à droite du panneau Titres et utilisez l'une des options disponibles dans le menu : Développer tout pour développer tous les niveaux de titres sur le panneau de navigation. Réduire tout pour réduire touts les niveaux de titres sauf le niveau 1 sur le panneau de Navigation. Développer jusqu'au niveau pour développer la liste hiérarchique des titres jusqu'au niveau sélectionné. Par ex., si vous sélectionnez le niveau 3, on va développer les niveaux 1, 2 et 3 mais le niveau 4 et tous niveaux inférieurs seront réduits. Taille de la police – pour personnaliser la taille de la police du texte sur le panneau Navigation en choisissant l'un des préréglages disponibles : Petit, Moyen et Grand. Renvoyer à la ligne les longs titres – pour renvoyer à la ligne le texte des longs titres. Pour développer et réduire chaque niveau de titres à part, utilisez la flèche à droit du titre. Pour fermer le panneau de Navigation, cliquez sur l'icône Navigation sur la barre latérale gauche encore une fois. - sert à afficher les vignettes des pages afin de parcourir rapidement un document. Cliquez sur sur le panneau Miniatures des pages pour accéder aux Paramètres des miniatures : Faites glisser le curseur pour définir la taille de la vignette, Par défaut, l'option Mettre en surbrillance la partie visible de la page est active pour indiquer sur la vignette la zone affichée maintenant sur l'écran. Cliquez sur la case à coché pour désactiver cette option. Pour fermer le panneau Miniatures des pages, cliquez sur l'icône Miniatures des pages sur la barre latérale gauche encore une fois. - permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique, - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de visualiser les informations sur le programme." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Onglet Dessiner", + "body": "L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de documents permet d'effectuer les opérations dessin de base. L'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents en ligne: L'onglet dans l'éditeur de documents de bureau: En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez: utiliser l'outil de sélection pour redimensionner ou supprimer l'inscription, le dessin et la mise en surbrillance, utiliser l'outil Stylo et Surligneur pour dessiner ou ajouter les notes manuscrites ou la mise en surbrillance, utiliser l'outil Gomme pour effacer le dessin entier ou le texte manuscrit." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Fichier", - "body": "L'onglet Fichier dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours. Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : dans la version en ligne : enregistrer le fichier actuel (si l'option Enregistrement automatique est désactivée), enregistrer le document dans le format sélectionné sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur en utilisant Télécharger comme , enregistrer une copie du document dans le format sélectionné dans les documents du portail en utilisant Enregistrer la copie sous , imprimer ou renommer le fichier actuel. dans la version de bureau : enregistrer le fichier actuel en conservant le format et l'emplacement actuel à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer ou enregistrer le fichier actuel avec un nom, un emplacement ou un format différent à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer sous, imprimer le fichier actuel protéger le fichier avec un mot de passe, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe; protéger un fichier avec une signature numérique (disponible dans la version de bureau uniquement) créer un nouveau document ou en ouvrir un récemment édité (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), voir le descriptif du document ou modifier les paramètres du fichier, gérer les droits d'accès (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), suivre l'historique des versions (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur, dans la version de bureau, ouvrez le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, ouvrez le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur." + "body": "L'onglet Fichier dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours. Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : dans la version en ligne : enregistrer le fichier actuel (si l'option Enregistrement automatique est désactivée), enregistrer le document dans le format sélectionné sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur en utilisant Télécharger comme , enregistrer une copie du document dans le format sélectionné dans les documents du portail en utilisant Enregistrer la copie sous, imprimer ou renommer le fichier actuel. Dans la version de bureau : enregistrer le fichier actuel en conservant le format et l'emplacement actuel à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer ou enregistrer le fichier actuel avec un nom, un emplacement ou un format différent à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer sous, imprimer le fichier actuel. protéger le fichier avec un mot de passe, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe; protéger un fichier avec une signature numérique (disponible dans la version de bureau uniquement) créer un nouveau document ou en ouvrir un récemment édité (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), voir le descriptif du document ou modifier les paramètres du fichier, gérer les droits d'accès (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), suivre l'historique des versions (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur, dans la version de bureau, ouvrez le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, ouvrez le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm", @@ -98,12 +103,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Mise en page - ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Onglet Mise en page L'onglet Mise en page dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la mise en page des éléments visuels. Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : paramétrer les marges, l'orientation et la taillede la page, ajouter des colonnes, insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne, insérer des numéros des lignes aligner et grouper des objets (des tableaux, des images, des graphiques, des formes), modifier le retour à la ligne et modifier les limites de renvoi à la ligne, ajouter un filigrane." + "body": "Onglet Mise en page L'onglet Mise en page dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la mise en page des éléments visuels. Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : paramétrer les marges, l'orientation et la taille de la page, ajouter des colonnes, insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne, insérer des numéros des lignes aligner et grouper des objets (des tableaux, des images, des graphiques, des formes), modifier le retour à la ligne et modifier les limites de renvoi à la ligne, ajouter un filigrane." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Modules complémentaires", - "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer tous les modules complémentaires installés et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : Send sert à envoyer les documents par courriel en utilisant un client de messagerie de bureau (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), Code en surbrillance sert à surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond appropriés, OCR sert à extraire le texte incrusté dans des images et l'insérer dans votre document, Éditeur de photos sert à modifier les images : rogner, retourner, pivoter, dessiner les lignes et le formes, ajouter des icônes et du texte, charger l’image de masque et appliquer des filtres comme Niveaux de gris, Inverser, Sépia, Flou, Embosser, Affûter etc., Parole permet la lecture du texte sélectionné à voix haute (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), Thésaurus sert à trouver les synonymes et les antonymes et les utiliser à remplacer le mot sélectionné, Traducteur sert à traduire le texte dans des langues disponibles, Remarque : ce plugin ne fonctionne pas dans Internet Explorer. You Tube permet d’ajouter les videos YouTube dans votre document, Mendeley permet de gérer les mémoires de recherche et de générer une bibliographie pour les articles scientifiques (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), Zotero permet de gérer des références bibliographiques et des documents associés (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), EasyBib sert à trouver et ajouter les livres, les journaux, les articles et les sites Web (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne). Les modulesWordpress et EasyBib peuvent être utilisés si vous connectez les services correspondants dans les paramètres de votre portail. Vous pouvez utiliser les instructions suivantes pour la version serveur ou pour la version SaaS. Les plug-ins Wordpress et EasyBib ne sont pas inclus dans la version gratuite des éditeurs. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuellement disponibles sont disponibles sur GitHub." + "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer tous les modules complémentaires installés et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : Send sert à envoyer les documents par courriel en utilisant un client de messagerie de bureau (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), Code en surbrillance sert à surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond appropriés, OCR sert à extraire le texte incrusté dans des images et l'insérer dans votre document, Éditeur de photos sert à modifier les images : rogner, retourner, pivoter, dessiner les lignes et le formes, ajouter des icônes et du texte, charger l’image de masque et appliquer des filtres comme Niveaux de gris, Inverser, Sépia, Flou, Embosser, Affûter etc., Parole permet la lecture du texte sélectionné à voix haute (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), Thésaurus sert à trouver les synonymes et les antonymes et les utiliser à remplacer le mot sélectionné, Traducteur sert à traduire le texte dans des langues disponibles, Remarque : ce plugin ne fonctionne pas dans Internet Explorer. You Tube permet d'ajouter les vidéos YouTube dans votre document, Mendeley permet de gérer les mémoires de recherche et de générer une bibliographie pour les articles scientifiques (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), Zotero permet de gérer des références bibliographiques et des documents associés (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), EasyBib sert à trouver et ajouter les livres, les journaux, les articles et les sites Web (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne). Les modules Wordpress et EasyBib peuvent être utilisés si vous connectez les services correspondants dans les paramètres de votre portail. Vous pouvez utiliser les instructions suivantes pour la version serveur ou pour la version SaaS. Les plug-ins Wordpress et EasyBib ne sont pas inclus dans la version gratuite des éditeurs. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuellement disponibles sont disponibles sur GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", @@ -123,7 +128,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Collaboration", - "body": "L'onglet Collaboration dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires, suivre les modifications apportées par un réviseur, visualiser toutes les versions et révisions. En mode Commentaires vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer des commentaires, naviguer entre les modifications suivies, utilisez le chat intégré et afficher l'historique des versions. Dans la versionde bureau, vous pouvez gérer les commentaires et utiliser la fonction Suivi des modifications . Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : spécifier les paramètres de partage (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), basculer entre les modes d'édition collaborative Strict et Rapide (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), ajouter et supprimer des commentaires sur un document, activer le Suivi des modifications , choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications, gérer les changements suggérés, télécharger le document à comparer (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), ouvrir le panneau de Chat (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne>), suivre l'historique des versions (disponible dans la version en ligne< uniquement)," + "body": "L'onglet Collaboration dans l'Éditeur de Documents permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires, suivre les modifications apportées par un réviseur, visualiser toutes les versions et révisions. En mode Commentaires vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer des commentaires, naviguer entre les modifications suivies, utilisez le chat intégré et afficher l'historique des versions. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez gérer les commentaires et utiliser la fonction Suivi des modifications . Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne : Fenêtre de l'onglet dans l'Éditeur de Documents de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : spécifier les paramètres de partage (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), basculer entre les modes d'édition collaborative Strict et Rapide (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), ajouter et supprimer des commentaires sur un document, activer le Suivi des modifications , choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications, gérer les changements suggérés, télécharger le document à comparer (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), ouvrir le panneau de Chat (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne>), suivre l'historique des versions (disponible dans la version en ligne< uniquement)." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", @@ -138,7 +143,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "title": "Ajouter une légende", - "body": "La légende est une étiquette agrafée que vous pouvez appliquer à un objet, comme des tableaux d'équations, des figures et des images dans vos documents. Cela facilite la référence dans votre texte car il y a une étiquette facilement reconnaissable sur votre objet. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les légendes pour créer des tableaux des figures. Pour ajouter une légende à un objet dans l'Éditeur de Documents : Sélectionnez l'objet à appliquer une légende ; Passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure ; Cliquez sur l'icône Légende sur la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une légende pour ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue Insérer une légende Choisissez l'étiquette à utiliser pour votre légende en choisissant l'objet de la liste déroulante d'étiquette, ou Créez une nouvelle étiquette en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter. Saisissez un nom pour l'étiquette dans le champs. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton OK pour ajouter une nouvelle ; Cochez la case Inclure le numéro de chapitre pour modifier la numérotation de votre légende ; Du menu déroulant Insérer, choisissez Avant pour placer l'étiquette au-dessus de l'objet ou Après pour placer sous l'objet ; Cochez la case Exclure le de la légende pour n'avoir qu'un numéro pour cette légende particulière conformément à un numéro de séquence. Vous pouvez ensuite choisir le numéro de votre légende en attribuant un style spécifique à la légende et en ajoutant un séparateur ; Pour appliquer la légende, cliquez sur le bouton OK. Supprimer une étiquette Pour supprimer une étiquette que vous avez créée, choisissez l'étiquette dans la liste des étiquettes dans la fenêtre de légende, puis cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. L'étiquette que vous avez créée sera immédiatement supprimée. Remarque:vous pouvez supprimer les étiquettes que vous avez créées mais vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les étiquettes par défaut. Mettre en forme des légendes Dès que vous ajoutez une légende, un nouveau style de légende est automatiquement ajouté à la section. Afin de changer le style de toutes les légendes dans le document, suivez ces étapes : Sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel le nouveau style de Légende sera copié ; Recherchez le style de Légende (surligné en bleu par défaut) dans la galerie de styles que vous pouvez trouver sur l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ; Cliquez droit et choisissez l'option Mettre à jour à partir de la sélection. Regrouper des sous-titres Si vous souhaitez pouvoir déplacer l'objet et la légende ensemble, il est nécessaire de regrouper l'objet et la légende. Sélectionnez l'objet ; Sélectionnez l'un des styles d'habillage à l'aide de la barre latérale droite ; Ajoutez la légende comme mentionnée ci-dessus ; Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et sélectionnez les éléments que vous souhaitez regrouper ; Faites un clic droit sur l'un des éléments, choisissez Réorganiser > Grouper. Maintenant, les deux éléments se déplaceront simultanément si vous les faites glisser quelque part ailleurs dans le texte. Pour dissocier l'objet, cliquez respectivement sur Réorganiser > Dissocier." + "body": "La légende est une étiquette agrafée que vous pouvez appliquer à un objet, comme des tableaux d'équations, des figures et des images dans vos documents. Cela facilite la référence dans votre texte car il y a une étiquette facilement reconnaissable sur votre objet. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les légendes pour créer des tableaux des figures. Pour ajouter une légende à un objet dans l'Éditeur de Documents : Sélectionnez l'objet à appliquer une légende ; Passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure ; Cliquez sur l'icône Légende sur la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une légende pour ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue Insérer une légende Choisissez l'étiquette à utiliser pour votre légende en choisissant l'objet de la liste déroulante d'étiquette, ou Créez une nouvelle étiquette en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter. Saisissez un nom pour l'étiquette dans le champs. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton OK pour ajouter une nouvelle ; Cochez la case Inclure le numéro de chapitre pour modifier la numérotation de votre légende ; Du menu déroulant Insérer, choisissez Avant pour placer l'étiquette au-dessus de l'objet ou Après pour placer sous l'objet ; Cochez la case Exclure le de la légende pour n'avoir qu'un numéro pour cette légende particulière conformément à un numéro de séquence. Vous pouvez ensuite choisir le numéro de votre légende en attribuant un style spécifique à la légende et en ajoutant un séparateur ; Pour appliquer la légende, cliquez sur le bouton OK. Supprimer une étiquette Pour supprimer une étiquette que vous avez créée, choisissez l'étiquette dans la liste des étiquettes dans la fenêtre de légende, puis cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. L'étiquette que vous avez créée sera immédiatement supprimée. Remarque:vous pouvez supprimer les étiquettes que vous avez créées mais vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les étiquettes par défaut. Mettre en forme des légendes Dès que vous ajoutez une légende, un nouveau style de légende est automatiquement ajouté à la section. Afin de changer le style de toutes les légendes dans le document, suivez ces étapes : Sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel le nouveau style de Légende sera copié ; Recherchez le style de Légende (surligné en bleu par défaut) dans la galerie de styles que vous pouvez trouver sur l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ; Cliquez droit et choisissez l'option Mettre à jour à partir de la sélection. Regrouper des sous-titres Si vous souhaitez pouvoir déplacer l'objet et la légende ensemble, il est nécessaire de regrouper l'objet et la légende. Sélectionnez l'objet ; Sélectionnez l'un des styles d'habillage à l'aide de la barre latérale droite ; Ajoutez la légende comme mentionnée ci-dessus ; Maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée et sélectionnez les éléments que vous souhaitez regrouper ; Faites un clic droit sur l'un des éléments, choisissez Réorganiser > Grouper. Maintenant, les deux éléments se déplaceront simultanément si vous les faites glisser quelque part ailleurs dans le texte. Pour dissocier l'objet, cliquez respectivement sur Réorganiser > Dissocier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", @@ -163,7 +168,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "title": "Aligner et organiser des objets sur une page", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les formes automatiques, les images, les graphiques ou les zones de texte ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés et ordonnésr sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner une zone de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel. Aligner des objets Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : Aligner sur la page pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la page, Aligner sur la marge pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la marge, Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres, Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Aligner et sélectionnez le type d'alignement nécessaire dans la liste : Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord gauche de l'objet le plus à gauche / bord gauche de la page / marge gauche de la page, Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par leur centre/centre de la page/centre de l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page, Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord droit de l'objet le plus à droite / bord droit de la page / marge droite de la page, Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord supérieur de l'objet le plus haut/bord supérieur de la page / marge supérieure de la page, Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets verticalement par leur milieu/milieu de la page/milieu de l'espace entre les marges de la page supérieure et de la page inférieure, Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord inférieur de l'objet le plus bas/bord inférieur de la page/bord inférieur de la page. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options d'alignement disponibles. Si vous voulez aligner un objet unique, il peut être aligné par rapport aux bords de la page ou aux marges de la page. L'option Aligner sur la marge est sélectionnée par défaut dans ce cas. Distribuer des objets Pour distribuer horizontalement ou verticalement trois objets sélectionnés ou plus de façon à ce que la même distance apparaisse entre eux, Cliquez sur l'icône Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : Aligner sur la page pour répartir les objets entre les bords de la page, Aligner sur la marge pour répartir les objets entre les marges de la page, Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour distribuer les objets entre les deux objets les plus externes sélectionnés, Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Aligner et sélectionnez le type de distribution nécessaire dans la liste : Distribuer horizontalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les bords gauche et droit des objets sélectionnés/bords gauche et droit de la page/marges gauche et droite de la page. Distribuer verticalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les objets les plus en haut et les objets les plus bas sélectionnés/bords supérieur et inférieur de la page/marges de la page/bord supérieur et inférieur de la page. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles. Remarque  : les options de distribution sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de trois objets. Grouper plusieurs objets Pour grouper deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés ou les dissocier, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Grouper dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste : Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique. Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné d'objets préalablement combinés. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier. Remarque : l'option Grouper est désactivée si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. L'option Dissocier n'est disponible que lorsqu'un groupe des objets précédemment joints est sélectionné. Organiser plusieurs objets Pour organiser les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes Avancer et Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Avancer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre au premier plan - pour déplacer les objets devant tous les autres objets, Avancer - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en avant par rapport à d'autres objets. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre en arrière-plan - pour déplacer les objets derrière tous les autres objets, Reculer - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en arrière par rapport à d'autres objets. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Organiser dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de rangement disponibles." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les formes automatiques, les images, les graphiques ou les zones de texte ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés et ordonnés sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner une zone de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel. Aligner des objets Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : Aligner sur la page pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la page, Aligner sur la marge pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la marge, Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres, Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Aligner et sélectionnez le type d'alignement nécessaire dans la liste : Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord gauche de l'objet le plus à gauche / bord gauche de la page / marge gauche de la page, Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par leur centre/centre de la page/centre de l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page, Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord droit de l'objet le plus à droite / bord droit de la page / marge droite de la page, Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord supérieur de l'objet le plus haut/bord supérieur de la page / marge supérieure de la page, Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets verticalement par leur milieu/milieu de la page/milieu de l'espace entre les marges de la page supérieure et de la page inférieure, Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord inférieur de l'objet le plus bas/bord inférieur de la page/bord inférieur de la page. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options d'alignement disponibles. Si vous voulez aligner un objet unique, il peut être aligné par rapport aux bords de la page ou aux marges de la page. L'option Aligner sur la marge est sélectionnée par défaut dans ce cas. Distribuer des objets Pour distribuer horizontalement ou verticalement trois objets sélectionnés ou plus de façon à ce que la même distance apparaisse entre eux, Cliquez sur l'icône Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : Aligner sur la page pour répartir les objets entre les bords de la page, Aligner sur la marge pour répartir les objets entre les marges de la page, Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour distribuer les objets entre les deux objets les plus externes sélectionnés, Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Aligner et sélectionnez le type de distribution nécessaire dans la liste : Distribuer horizontalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les bords gauche et droit des objets sélectionnés/bords gauche et droit de la page/marges gauche et droite de la page. Distribuer verticalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les objets les plus en haut et les objets les plus bas sélectionnés/bords supérieur et inférieur de la page/marges de la page/bord supérieur et inférieur de la page. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles. Remarque : les options de distribution sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de trois objets. Grouper plusieurs objets Pour grouper deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés ou les dissocier, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Grouper dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste : Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique. Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné d'objets préalablement combinés. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier. Remarque : l'option Grouper est désactivée si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. L'option Dissocier n'est disponible que lorsqu'un groupe des objets précédemment joints est sélectionné. Organiser plusieurs objets Pour organiser les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes Avancer et Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Avancer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre au premier plan - pour déplacer les objets devant tous les autres objets, Avancer - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en avant par rapport à d'autres objets. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre en arrière-plan - pour déplacer les objets derrière tous les autres objets, Reculer - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en arrière par rapport à d'autres objets. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Organiser dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de rangement disponibles." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", @@ -178,27 +183,32 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "title": "Modifier le jeu de couleurs", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les jeux de couleurs s'appliquent au document entier. Utilisés pour le changement rapide de l'apparence de votre document, les jeux de couleurs définissent la palette Couleurs de thème pour les éléments du document (police, arrière-plan, tableaux, formes automatiques, graphiques). Si vous appliquez des Couleurs de thèmes aux éléments du document et sélectionnez un nouveau Jeu de couleurs, les couleurs appliquées aux éléments de votre document, par conséquent, seront modifiées. Pour modifier le jeu de couleurs, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le jeu de couleurs voulu parmi les variantes disponibles : New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urban, Verve. Lorsque le jeu de couleurs est sélectionné, vous pouvez choisir des couleurs dans une fenêtre de palettes de couleurs qui vont correspondre à l'élément auquel vous souhaitez appliquer la couleur. Pour la plupart des éléments du document, la fenêtre des palettes de couleurs est accessible en cliquant sur la case colorée dans la barre latérale droite lorsque l'élément est sélectionné. Pour la police, cette fenêtre peut être ouverte à l'aide de la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Couleur de police de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les palettes suivantes sont disponibles : Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée du document. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionné ne les affecte pas. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si la couleur voulue ne se trouve pas dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB (RVB) en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ RGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel afin que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l’élément sélectionné et ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée." + "body": "Les jeux de couleurs sont appliqués au document entier. L'éditeur de documents, permet de modifier rapidement l'aspect de votre document et définir la palette de Couleurs de thème pour des différents éléments du document (police, arrière-plan, tableaux, formes automatiques, graphiques). Si vous appliquez les Couleurs de thème aux différents éléments du document et ensuite sélectionnez un autre jeu de couleurs, toutes les couleurs que vous avez appliqué auparavant changeraient en conséquence. Pour modifier le jeu de couleurs, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le jeu de couleurs approprié de la liste: New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urban, Verve. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionné sera surligné dans la liste. Une fois le jeu de couleurs sélectionné, il est possible se sélectionner d'autres couleurs de palettes qui sont disponibles pour l'élément nécessaire du document. Pour la plupart des éléments du document, on peut accéder à la la fenêtre de palettes de couleurs en cliquant sur la case colorée dans la barre latérale droite lorsque l'élément nécessaire est sélectionné. Quand à la police, il faut cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Couleur de police sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les palettes disponibles sont les suivants: Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée dans le document. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionnée ne les affecte pas. Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans le document. Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la fenêtre d'aperçu Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", "title": "Changer l'habillage du texte", - "body": "L'option Style d'habillage détermine la position de l'objet par rapport au texte. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez modifier le style d'habillage de texte pour les objets insérés, tels que les formes, , les images, les graphiques,, les zones de texte ou les tableaux. Modifier l'habillage de texte pour les formes, les images, les graphiques, les zones de texte Pour changer le style d'habillage actuellement sélectionné : sélectionnez un objet séparé sur la page en cliquant dessus. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. ouvrez les paramètres d'habillage du texte : Passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de l'icône Retour à la ligne, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet et sélectionnez l'option Style d'habillage dans le menu contextuel, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés et passez à l'onglet Habillage du texte de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés de l'objet. sélectionnez le style d'habillage voulu : En ligne sur le texte - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, l'image est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'objet. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de l'objet. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celle-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de l'image. Devant le texte - l'image est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur l'objet. Si vous avez choisi l'un des styles Carré, Rapproché, Au travers, Haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droite, gauche). Pour accéder à ces paramètres, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés et passez à l'onglet Style d'habillage du texte de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés de l'objet. Définissez les valeurs voulues et cliquez sur OK. Si vous sélectionnez un style d'habillage autre que En ligne, l'onglet Position est également disponible dans la fenêtre Paramètres avancés de l'objet. Pour en savoir plus sur ces paramètres, reportez-vous aux pages correspondantes avec les instructions sur la façon de travailler avec des formes, des images ou des graphiques. Si vous sélectionnez un style d'habillage autre que En ligne, vous pouvez également modifier la limite d'habillage pour les images ou les formes. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet, sélectionnez l'option Style d'habillage dans le menu contextuel et cliquez sur Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne. Il est aussi possible d'utiliser le menu Retour à la ligne -> Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne sous l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Modifier l'habillage de texte pour les tableaux Pour les tableaux, les deux styles d'habillage suivants sont disponibles : Tableau aligné et Tableau flottant. Pour changer le style d'habillage actuellement sélectionné: cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le tableau et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau, passez à l'onglet Habillage du texte dans la fenêtre Tableau - Paramètres avancés ouverte, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Tableau aligné est utilisé pour sélectionner le style d'habillage où le texte est interrompu par le tableau ainsi que l'alignement : gauche, au centre, droit. Tableau flottant est utilisé pour sélectionner le style d'habillage où le texte est enroulé autour du tableau. À l'aide de l'onglet Habillage du texte de la fenêtre Tableau - Paramètres avancésvous pouvez également configurer les paramètres suivants : Pour les tableaux alignés, vous pouvez définir le type d'alignement du tableau (à gauche, centre ou à droite) et le Retrait à gauche. Pour les tableaux flottants, vous pouvez spécifier la Distance du texte et la position du tableau dans l'onglet Position du tableau ." + "body": "L'option Style d'habillage détermine la position de l'objet par rapport au texte. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez modifier le style d'habillage de texte pour les objets insérés, tels que les formes, les images, les graphiques,, les zones de texte ou les tableaux. Modifier l'habillage de texte pour les formes, les images, les graphiques, les zones de texte Pour changer le style d'habillage actuellement sélectionné : sélectionnez un objet séparé sur la page en cliquant dessus. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. ouvrez les paramètres d'habillage du texte : Passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de l'icône Retour à la ligne, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet et sélectionnez l'option Style d'habillage dans le menu contextuel, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés et passez à l'onglet Habillage du texte de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés de l'objet. sélectionnez le style d'habillage voulu : En ligne sur le texte - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, l'image est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'objet. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de l'objet. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celle-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de l'image. Devant le texte - l'image est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur l'objet. Si vous avez choisi l'un des styles Carré, Rapproché, Au travers, Haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droite, gauche). Pour accéder à ces paramètres, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés et passez à l'onglet Style d'habillage du texte de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés de l'objet. Définissez les valeurs voulues et cliquez sur OK. Si vous sélectionnez un style d'habillage autre que En ligne, l'onglet Position est également disponible dans la fenêtre Paramètres avancés de l'objet. Pour en savoir plus sur ces paramètres, reportez-vous aux pages correspondantes avec les instructions sur la façon de travailler avec des formes, des images ou des graphiques. Si vous sélectionnez un style d'habillage autre que En ligne, vous pouvez également modifier la limite d'habillage pour les images ou les formes. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'objet, sélectionnez l'option Style d'habillage dans le menu contextuel et cliquez sur Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne. Il est aussi possible d'utiliser le menu Retour à la ligne -> Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne sous l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Modifier l'habillage de texte pour les tableaux Pour les tableaux, les deux styles d'habillage suivants sont disponibles : Tableau aligné et Tableau flottant. Pour changer le style d'habillage actuellement sélectionné: cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le tableau et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau, passez à l'onglet Habillage du texte dans la fenêtre Tableau - Paramètres avancés ouverte, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Tableau aligné est utilisé pour sélectionner le style d'habillage où le texte est interrompu par le tableau ainsi que l'alignement : gauche, au centre, droit. Tableau flottant est utilisé pour sélectionner le style d'habillage où le texte est enroulé autour du tableau. À l'aide de l'onglet Habillage du texte de la fenêtre Tableau - Paramètres avancés vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres suivants : Pour les tableaux alignés, vous pouvez définir le type d'alignement du tableau (à gauche, centre ou à droite) et le Retrait à gauche. Pour les tableaux flottants, vous pouvez spécifier la Distance du texte et la position du tableau dans l'onglet Position du tableau." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", + "title": "ChatGPT", + "body": "Le module complémentaire ChatGPT permet d'utiliser l'agent conversationnel OpenAI pour effectuer les tâches visant à comprendre et à générer le langage naturel ou le code. Installation Pour installer le module complémentaire ChatGPT, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires. Recherchez ChatGPT sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous. Cliquez sur l'icône ChatGPT sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire. Configuration Créez sur votre API key sur la page OpenAI API key. Copiez la clé générée API key dans le champ correspondant sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur. Utilisation Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Cliquez sur l'icône ChatGPT. Configurez les paramètres disponibles tels que Modèle, Longueur maximale, Température etc. ONLYOFFICE n'assume aucune responsabilité quant aux réponses du ChatGPT qui peuvent contenir des erreurs, des omissions ou du contenu haineux ou inapproprié. Tout le texte envoyé depuis le module complémentaire est généré par ChatGPT et est fourni tel quel, sans filtrage d'aucune sorte par ONLYOFFICE." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communiquer lors de l'édition", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow. Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur . Telegram Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Telegram, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone dans le champ correspondant, cochez la case Rester connecté lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Suivant, saisissez le code reçu dans votre application Telegram, ou connectez-vous en utilisant le Code QR, ouvrez l'application Telegram sur votre téléphone, passez à Paramètres > Appareils > Numériser QR, numérisez l'image pour vous connecter. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser Telegram au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Rainbow Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Rainbow, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Rainbow, enregistrez un nouveau compte en cliquant sur le bouton Inscription ou connectez-vous à un compte déjà créé. Pour le faire, saisissez votre email dans le champ correspondant et cliquez sur Continuer, puis saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte, cochez la case Maintenir ma session lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Connecter. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à chatter dans Rainbow et travailler au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en même temps." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow. Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors , Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur . Telegram Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Telegram, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone dans le champ correspondant, cochez la case Rester connecté lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Suivant, saisissez le code reçu dans votre application Telegram, ou connectez-vous en utilisant le Code QR, ouvrez l'application Telegram sur votre téléphone, passez à Paramètres > Appareils > Numériser QR, numérisez l'image pour vous connecter. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser Telegram au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Rainbow Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Rainbow, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Rainbow, enregistrez un nouveau compte en cliquant sur le bouton Inscription ou connectez-vous à un compte déjà créé. Pour le faire, saisissez votre email dans le champ correspondant et cliquez sur Continuer, puis saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte, cochez la case Maintenir ma session lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Connecter. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à chatter dans Rainbow et travailler au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en même temps." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ConvertFootnotesEndnotes.htm", "title": "Conversion de notes de bas de page en notes de fin", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous permet de convertir les notes de bas de page en notes de fin et vice versa, par exemple, quand vous voyez que les notes de bas de page dans le document résultant doivent être placées à la fin. Au lieu de créer les notes de fin à nouveau, utiliser les outils appropriés pour conversion rapide et sans effort. Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, Glisser votre curseur sur Convertir toutes les notes et sélectionnez l'une des options dans le menu à droite : Convertir tous les pieds de page aux notes de fin pour transformer toutes les notes de bas de page en notes de fin ; Convertir toutes les notes de fin aux pieds de page pour transformer toutes les notes de fin en notes de bas de page ; Changer les notes de pied de page et les notes de fin pour changer un type de note à un autre." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous permet de convertir les notes de bas de page en notes de fin et vice versa, par exemple, quand vous voyez que les notes de bas de page dans le document résultant doivent être placées à la fin. Au lieu de créer les notes de fin à nouveau, utiliser les outils appropriés pour conversion rapide et sans effort. Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, Glissez votre curseur sur Convertir toutes les notes et sélectionnez l'une des options dans le menu à droite : Convertir tous les pieds de page aux notes de fin pour transformer toutes les notes de bas de page en notes de fin ; Convertir toutes les notes de fin aux pieds de page pour transformer toutes les notes de fin en notes de bas de page ; Changer les notes de pied de page et les notes de fin pour changer un type de note à un autre." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm", "title": "Copier/effacer la mise en forme du texte", - "body": "Pour copier une certaine mise en forme du texte dans l'Éditeur de Documents, sélectionnez le fragment du texte contenant la mise en forme à copier en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Acceuil sur la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante ), sélectionnez le fragment de texte à mettre en forme. Pour appliquer la mise en forme copiée aux plusieurs fragments du texte, sélectionnez le fragment du texte contenant la mise en forme à copier en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, double-cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante et l'icône Copier le style restera sélectionnée : ), sélectionnez les fragments du texte nécessaires un par un pour appliquer la même mise en forme pour chacun d'eux, pour quitter ce mode, cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style encore une fois ou appuyez sur la touche Échap sur le clavier. Pour effacer la mise en forme appliquée à partir de votre texte, sélectionnez le fragment de texte dont vous souhaitez supprimer la mise en forme, cliquez sur l'icône Effacer le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure." + "body": "Pour copier une certaine mise en forme du texte dans l'Éditeur de Documents, sélectionnez le fragment du texte contenant la mise en forme à copier en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante ), sélectionnez le fragment de texte à mettre en forme. Pour appliquer la mise en forme copiée aux plusieurs fragments du texte, sélectionnez le fragment du texte contenant la mise en forme à copier en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, double-cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante et l'icône Copier le style restera sélectionnée : ), sélectionnez les fragments du texte nécessaires un par un pour appliquer la même mise en forme pour chacun d'eux, pour quitter ce mode, cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style encore une fois ou appuyez sur la touche Échap sur le clavier. Pour effacer la mise en forme appliquée à partir de votre texte, sélectionnez le fragment de texte dont vous souhaitez supprimer la mise en forme, cliquez sur l'icône Effacer le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", @@ -208,47 +218,52 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm", "title": "Créer des formulaires à remplir", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor permet de créer plus facilement des formulaires à remplir dans votre document, par ex. les projets de contrats ou les enquêtes. Modèle de formulaire fournit un ensemble d'outils pour créer des formulaires à remplir au format DOCXF. Sauvegardez le formulaire résultant au format DOCXF et vous aurez un modèle de formulaire modifiable que vous pourrez réviser ou travailler à plusieurs. Pour créer un formulaire à remplir et restreindre la modification du formulaire par d'autres utilisateurs, sauvegardez-le au format OFORM . Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter les instructions pour remplir un formulaire . Les formats DOCXF et OFORM sont de nouveaux formats ONLYOFFICE permettant de créer des modèles de formulaires et de remplir les formulaires: Optez pour les versions ONLYOFFICE Document Editor en ligne ou de bureau pour utiliser pleinement tous les fonctionnalités et les options liées aux formulaires. Vous pouvez sauvegarder tout fichier DOCX existant au format DOCXF pour l'utiliser en tant que Modèle de formulaire. Passez à l'onglet Fichier, cliquez sur Télécharger comme... ou Enregistrer sous... sur le panneau latéral gauche et sélectionnez l'icône DOCXF. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser toutes les fonctionnalités d'édition d'un formulaire. Ce ne sont pas seulement des champs de formulaire qu'on peut modifier dans un fichier DOCXF, il vous est toujours possible d'ajouter, de modifier et de mettre en forme du texte et d'utiliser d'autres fonctionnalités de Document Editor . Les formulaires à remplir peuvent être réalisés en utilisant des objets modifiables afin d'assurer une cohérence globale du document final et d'améliorer l'expérience de travail avec des formulaires interactifs. Actuellement, vous pouvez ajouter un champ texte, une zone de liste déroulante, une liste déroulante, une case à cocher, un bouton radio, définir les zones désignées pour des images et ajouter les zones destinées à l'adresse email, le numéro de téléphone, la date et l'heure, le code postal, la carte bancaire et les champs complexes. Vous pouvez accéder à ces fonctionnalités sous l'onglet Formulaires qui n'est disponible qu'avec des fichiers DOCXF. Créer un champ texte Les Champs texte sont les champs de texte brut, aucun objet ne peut être ajouté. Pour ajouter un champ texte, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Champ texte ou cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Champ texte et sélectionnez le champ à insérer champ texte en ligne ou champ texte fixe. Pour en savoir plus sur les champs fixes, veuillez consulter la section Taille de champ fixe ci-dessous. Un champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les champs afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé à chaque champ texte en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ de saisie. Le texte par défaut est Votre texte ici. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ texte. Format: définissez le format du champ texte, c-à-d les caractères sont autorisés en fonction du format défini: Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire (le texte doit correspondre au masque personnalisé, par ex., (999) 999 99 99), Expression régulière (le texte doit correspondre à l'expression régulière). Lorsque vous sélectionnez Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière, un champ supplémentaire apparaît au-dessous du champ Format. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans ce champ. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ texte ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ texte ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur le champ texte ajouté et réglez le type, la taille et la couleur de la police, appliquez les styles de décoration et les styles de mise en forme. La mise en forme sera appliquée à l'ensemble du texte dans le champ. Créer une zone de liste déroulante La Zone de liste déroulante comporte une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix modifiables. Pour ajouter une zone de liste déroulante, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de liste déroulante. Le champ de formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les zones de liste déroulante afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé à chaque zone de liste déroulante. Choisissez la clé de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans zone de liste déroulante. Le texte par défaut est Choisir un élément. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ du formulaire. Options de valeur: ajoutez de nouvelles valeurs, supprimez ou déplacez des valeurs vers le haut et vers le bas dans la liste. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures de la zone de liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan de la zone de liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre la zone de liste déroulante obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur la flèche dans la partie droite de la Zone de liste déroulante ajoutée pour accéder à la liste d'éléments disponibles et choisir un élément approprié. Lorsque vous avez choisi un élément, vous pouvez modifier le texte affiché partiellement ou entièrement ou le remplacer du texte. Vous pouvez changer le style, la couleur et la taille de la police. Cliquez sur la zone de liste déroulante et suivez les instructions. La mise en forme sera appliquée à l'ensemble du texte dans le champ. Créer une liste déroulante La Liste déroulante comporte une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix non modifiable. Pour ajouter une liste déroulante, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Liste déroulante. Le champ de formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les listes déroulantes afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le titre de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans la liste déroulante. Le texte par défaut est Choisir un élément. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ du formulaire. Options de valeur: ajoutez de nouvelles valeurs, supprimez ou déplacez des valeurs vers le haut et vers le bas dans la liste. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures de la liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan de la liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre la liste déroulante obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur la flèche dans la partie droite de la Liste déroulante ajoutée pour accéder à la liste d'éléments disponibles et choisir un élément approprié. Créer une case à cocher La Case à cocher fournit plusieurs options permettant à l'utilisateur de sélectionner autant de cases à cocher que nécessaire. Cases à cocher sont utilisées indépendamment, alors chaque case peut être coché et ou décoché. Pour insérer une case à cocher, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Case à cocher. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les cases à cocher afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le titre de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur la case à cocher. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures de la case à cocher ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan de la case à cocher ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre cette case à cocher obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur la case pour la cocher. Créer un bouton radio Le Bouton radio fournit plusieurs options permettant à l'utilisateur de choisir une seule option parmi plusieurs possibles. Boutons radio sont utilisés en groupe, alors on ne peut pas choisir plusieurs boutons de la même groupe. Pour ajouter un bouton radio, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône du bouton radio Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé de groupe: pour créer un nouveau groupe de boutons radio, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque bouton radio au groupe approprié. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le bouton radio. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du bouton radio ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du bouton radio ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le bouton radio ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur le bouton radio pour le choisir. Créer un champ image Le champ Image est le champ du formulaire permettant d'insérer une image selon des limites définies, c-à-d, la position et la taille de l'image. Pour ajouter un champ d'image, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Image. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les images afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ d'image. Le texte par défaut est Cliquer pour télécharger l'image. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur la bordure inférieure de l'image. Mise à l'échelle: cliquez sur la liste déroulante et sélectionnez l'option de dimensionnement de l'image appropriée: Toujours, Jamais, lorsque L'image semble trop grande ou L'image semble trop petite. L'image sélectionnée sera redimensionnée dans le champ en fonction de l'option choisie. Verrouiller les proportions: cochez cette case pour maintenir le rapport d'aspect de l'image sans la déformer. Lors de l'activation de cette option, faites glisser le curseur vertical ou horizontal pour positionner l'image à en dedans du champ ajouté. Si la case n'est pas cochée, les curseurs de positionnement ne sont pas activés. Sélectionnez une image: cliquez sur ce bouton pour télécharger une image Depuis un fichier, À partir d'une URL ou À partir de l'espace de stockage. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ image ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ image ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ image obligatoire de remplir. Pour remplacer une image, cliquez sur l'icône d'image au-dessus de la bordure de champ image et sélectionnez une autre image. Pour paramétrer l'image, accédez à l'onglet Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter les instructions sur paramètres d'image. Créer un champ adresse e-mail Le champ Adresse e-mail sert à saisir une adresse e-mail suivant l'expression régulière \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Pour ajouter un champ adresse e-mail, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Adresse e-mail. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe d'adresses e-mail, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ adresse e-mail au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ d'adresse e-mail. Le texte par défaut est user_name@email.com. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ adresse e-mail. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Expression régulière afin de conserver le format d'adresse e-mail \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ adresse e-mail. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ adresse e-mail. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ adresse e-mail ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ adresse e-mail ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ d'adresse e-mail obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ numéro de téléphone Le champ Numéro de téléphone sert à saisir le numéro de téléphone selon le masque arbitraire défini par l'auteur du formulaire. Par défaut, c'est (999)999-9999. Pour ajouter un champ numéro de téléphone, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Numéro de téléphone. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de numéros de téléphones, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque numéro de téléphone au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ numéro de téléphone. Le texte par défaut est (999)999-9999. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ numéro de téléphone. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ numéro de téléphone. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ numéro de téléphone. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ numéro de téléphone ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ numéro de téléphone ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ numéro de téléphone ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ Date et heure Le champ Date et heure sert à insérer la date. Par défaut, le format de date est DD-MM-YYYY. Pour ajouter un champ date et heure, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Date et heure. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Pour saisir une date, cliquez sur la flèche dans le champ et sélectionnez la date appropriée dans le calendrier. Créer un champ code postal Le champ Code postal sert à saisir le code postal selon le masque arbitraire défini par l'auteur du formulaire. Par défaut, c'est 99999-9999. Pour ajouter un champ code postal, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Code postal. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de numéros de téléphones, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque numéro de téléphone au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ code postal. Le texte par défaut est 99999-9999. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ code postal. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ code postal. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ code postal. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ code postal ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ carte bancaire Le champ Carte bancaire sert à saisir le numéro de carte la bancaire selon le masque arbitraire défini par l'auteur du formulaire. Par défaut, c'est 9999-9999-9999-9999. Pour ajouter un champ numéro de carte la bancaire, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Carte bancaire. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de numéros des cartes bancaires, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ numéro de carte la bancaire au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Le texte par défaut est 9999-9999-9999-9999. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ numéro de la carte la bancaire ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ numéro de la carte la bancaire ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ complexe Un champ complexe peut combiner plusieurs champs, par ex. le champ texte et le champ liste déroulante. Vous pouvez combiner les champs selon vos besoins. Pour ajouter un champ complexe, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Champ complexe. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de champs complexes, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ complexe au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ complexe. Le texte par défaut est Votre texte ici. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ complexe. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ complexe ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ complexe ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ complexe obligatoire de remplir. Pour ajouter plusieurs champs au champ complexe, cliquez dessous et sélectionnez le champ approprié de la barre d'outils supérieure sous l'onglet Formulaire. pour en savoir plus sur chaque champ, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas ajouter le champ image dans un champ complexe. Gérer des rôles Vous pouvez créer de nouveaux rôles pour permettre aux utilisateurs de remplir les champs du formulaire. Pour gérer les rôles, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur l'icône Gérer les rôles, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau pour ajouter un nouveau rôle. saisissez le nom de rôle et sélectionnez la couleur, le cas échéant. Vous pouvez également ajouter la couleur personnalisée en cliquant sur l'option appropriée dans le menu, cliquez sur OK pour ajouter un nouveau rôle. définissez l'ordre dans lequel on va recevoir et signer le document à l'aide de et boutons, utilisez le boutons Modifier et Supprimer pour modifier et supprimer les rôles, cliquez sur Fermer pour revenir à l'édition du formulaire. Lors du sauvegarde du formulaire au format .oform, vous pouvez afficher tous les rôles du formulaire. Afficher l'aperçu du formulaire Remarque: Les options de modification ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous activez le mode Aperçu du formulaire. Cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu du formulaire sous l'onglet Formulaire de la barre d'outils supérieure, pour afficher un aperçu du formulaire sur un document. Vous pouvez afficher l'aperçu du formulaire à travers le regard de chaque rôle créé pour le formulaire. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur la flèche au-dessous du bouton Aperçu du formulaire et sélectionnez le rôle approprié. Pour quitter le mode d'aperçu, cliquer sur la même icône encore une fois. Déplacer les champs du formulaire Il est possible de déplacer les champs du formulaire vers un autre emplacement du document: cliquez sur le bouton à gauche de la bordure de contrôle et faites la glisser vers un autre emplacement sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Vous pouvez également copier et coller les champs du formulaire: sélectionnez le champ approprié et appuyez sur le raccourci Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V. Rendre un champ de formulaire obligatoire Pour rendre un champ de formulaire obligatoire, activez l'option Obligatoire. La bordure des champs obligatoires est marquée d'un trait rouge. Verrouiller les champs du formulaire Pour empêcher toute la modification ultérieure des champs du formulaire, cliquez sur l'icône Verrou . La fonctionnalité de remplissage reste disponible. Effacer les champs remplis dans un formulaire Pour effacer tous les champs remplis et supprimer toutes informations, cliquez sur le bouton Effacer tous les champs sous l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure. Il est possible d'effacer les champs remplis uniquement en mode de remplissage du formulaire. Naviguer, afficher et enregistrer un formulaire Passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure. Naviguez entre les champs du formulaire en utilisant les boutons Champ précédent et Champ suivant de la barre d'outil supérieure. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer sous oform de la barre d'outils supérieure pour enregistrer le formulaire au format OFORM prêt à remplir. Vous pouvez sauvegarder autant de formulaires au format OFORM que vous le souhaitez. Supprimer les champs du formulaire Pour supprimer un champ du formulaire et garder tous son contenu, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur l'icône Supprimer (assurez-vous que le champ n'est pas verrouillé) ou appuyez sur la touche Supprimer du clavier." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor permet de créer plus facilement des formulaires à remplir dans votre document, par ex. les projets de contrats ou les enquêtes. Modèle de formulaire fournit un ensemble d'outils pour créer des formulaires à remplir au format DOCXF. Sauvegardez le formulaire résultant au format DOCXF et vous aurez un modèle de formulaire modifiable que vous pourrez réviser ou travailler à plusieurs. Pour créer un formulaire à remplir et restreindre la modification du formulaire par d'autres utilisateurs, sauvegardez-le au format OFORM . Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter les instructions pour remplir un formulaire . Les formats DOCXF et OFORM sont de nouveaux formats ONLYOFFICE permettant de créer des modèles de formulaires et de remplir les formulaires: Optez pour les versions ONLYOFFICE Document Editor en ligne ou de bureau pour utiliser pleinement tous les fonctionnalités et les options liées aux formulaires. Vous pouvez sauvegarder tout fichier DOCX existant au format DOCXF pour l'utiliser en tant que Modèle de formulaire. Passez à l'onglet Fichier, cliquez sur Télécharger comme... ou Enregistrer sous... sur le panneau latéral gauche et sélectionnez l'icône DOCXF. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser toutes les fonctionnalités d'édition d'un formulaire. Ce ne sont pas seulement des champs de formulaire qu'on peut modifier dans un fichier DOCXF, il vous est toujours possible d'ajouter, de modifier et de mettre en forme du texte et d'utiliser d'autres fonctionnalités de Document Editor . Les formulaires à remplir peuvent être réalisés en utilisant des objets modifiables afin d'assurer une cohérence globale du document final et d'améliorer l'expérience de travail avec des formulaires interactifs. Actuellement, vous pouvez ajouter un champ texte, une zone de liste déroulante, une liste déroulante, une case à cocher, un bouton radio, définir les zones désignées pour des images et ajouter les zones destinées à l'adresse email, le numéro de téléphone, la date et l'heure, le code postal, la carte bancaire et les champs complexes. Vous pouvez accéder à ces fonctionnalités sous l'onglet Formulaires qui n'est disponible qu'avec des fichiers DOCXF. Créer un champ texte Les Champs texte sont les champs de texte brut, aucun objet ne peut être ajouté. Pour ajouter un champ texte, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Champ texte ou cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Champ texte et sélectionnez le champ à insérer champ texte en ligne ou champ texte fixe. Pour en savoir plus sur les champs fixes, veuillez consulter la section Taille de champ fixe ci-dessous. Un champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les champs afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé à chaque champ texte en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ de saisie. Le texte par défaut est Votre texte ici. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ texte. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Format: définissez le format du champ texte, c-à-d les caractères sont autorisés en fonction du format défini: Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire (le texte doit correspondre au masque personnalisé, par ex., (999) 999 99 99), Expression régulière (le texte doit correspondre à l'expression régulière). Lorsque vous sélectionnez Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière, un champ supplémentaire apparaît au-dessous du champ Format. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans ce champ. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ texte ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ texte ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur le champ texte ajouté et réglez le type, la taille et la couleur de la police, appliquez les styles de décoration et les styles de mise en forme. La mise en forme sera appliquée à l'ensemble du texte dans le champ. Créer une zone de liste déroulante La Zone de liste déroulante comporte une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix modifiables. Pour ajouter une zone de liste déroulante, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de liste déroulante. Le champ de formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les zones de liste déroulante afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé à chaque zone de liste déroulante. Choisissez la clé de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans zone de liste déroulante. Le texte par défaut est Choisir un élément. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ du formulaire. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Options de valeur: ajoutez de nouvelles valeurs, supprimez ou déplacez des valeurs vers le haut et vers le bas dans la liste. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures de la zone de liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan de la zone de liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre la zone de liste déroulante obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur la flèche dans la partie droite de la Zone de liste déroulante ajoutée pour accéder à la liste d'éléments disponibles et choisir un élément approprié. Lorsque vous avez choisi un élément, vous pouvez modifier le texte affiché partiellement ou entièrement ou le remplacer du texte. Vous pouvez changer le style, la couleur et la taille de la police. Cliquez sur la zone de liste déroulante et suivez les instructions. La mise en forme sera appliquée à l'ensemble du texte dans le champ. Créer une liste déroulante La Liste déroulante comporte une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix non modifiable. Pour ajouter une liste déroulante, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Liste déroulante. Le champ de formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les listes déroulantes afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de la clé dans le champ et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans la liste déroulante. Le texte par défaut est Choisir un élément. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ du formulaire. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Options de valeur: ajoutez de nouvelles valeurs, supprimez ou déplacez des valeurs vers le haut et vers le bas dans la liste. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures de la liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan de la liste déroulante ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre la liste déroulante obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur la flèche dans la partie droite de la Liste déroulante ajoutée pour accéder à la liste d'éléments disponibles et choisir un élément approprié. Créer une case à cocher La Case à cocher fournit plusieurs options permettant à l'utilisateur de sélectionner autant de cases à cocher que nécessaire. Cases à cocher sont utilisées indépendamment, alors chaque case peut être coché et ou décoché. Pour insérer une case à cocher, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Case à cocher. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les cases à cocher afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de la clé dans le champ et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur la case à cocher. La case est cochée par défaut: cochez cette case pour que la case soit cochée par défaut. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures de la case à cocher ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan de la case à cocher ajoutée. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre cette case à cocher obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur la case pour la cocher. Créer un bouton radio Le Bouton radio fournit plusieurs options permettant à l'utilisateur de choisir une seule option parmi plusieurs possibles. Boutons radio sont utilisés en groupe, alors on ne peut pas choisir plusieurs boutons de la même groupe. Pour ajouter un bouton radio, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône du bouton radio Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé de groupe: pour créer un nouveau groupe de boutons radio, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque bouton radio au groupe approprié. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le bouton radio. Le bouton est coché par défaut: cochez cette case pour que le bouton radio soit coché par défaut. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du bouton radio ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du bouton radio ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le bouton radio ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Cliquez sur le bouton radio pour le choisir. Créer un champ image Le champ Image est le champ du formulaire permettant d'insérer une image selon des limites définies, c-à-d, la position et la taille de l'image. Pour ajouter un champ d'image, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Image. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: une clé à grouper les images afin de les remplir simultanément. Pour créer une nouvelle clé, saisissez le nom de celle-là et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez cette clé aux champs du formulaire en choisissant de la liste déroulante. Message Champs connectés: 2/3/... s'affiche. Pour dissocier les champs, cliquez sur Déconnexion. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ d'image. Le texte par défaut est Cliquer pour télécharger l'image. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur la bordure inférieure de l'image. Mise à l'échelle: cliquez sur la liste déroulante et sélectionnez l'option de dimensionnement de l'image appropriée: Toujours, Jamais, lorsque L'image semble trop grande ou L'image semble trop petite. L'image sélectionnée sera redimensionnée dans le champ en fonction de l'option choisie. Verrouiller les proportions: cochez cette case pour maintenir le rapport d'aspect de l'image sans la déformer. Lors de l'activation de cette option, faites glisser le curseur vertical ou horizontal pour positionner l'image à en dedans du champ ajouté. Si la case n'est pas cochée, les curseurs de positionnement ne sont pas activés. Sélectionnez une image: cliquez sur ce bouton pour télécharger une image Depuis un fichier, À partir d'une URL ou À partir de l'espace de stockage. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ image ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ image ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ image obligatoire de remplir. Pour remplacer une image, cliquez sur l'icône d'image au-dessus de la bordure de champ image et sélectionnez une autre image. Pour paramétrer l'image, accédez à l'onglet Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter les instructions sur paramètres d'image. Créer un champ adresse e-mail Le champ Adresse e-mail sert à saisir une adresse e-mail suivant l'expression régulière \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Pour ajouter un champ adresse e-mail, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Adresse e-mail. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe d'adresses e-mail, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ adresse e-mail au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ d'adresse e-mail. Le texte par défaut est user_name@email.com. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ adresse e-mail. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Expression régulière afin de conserver le format d'adresse e-mail \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ adresse e-mail. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ adresse e-mail. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ adresse e-mail ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ adresse e-mail ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ d'adresse e-mail obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ numéro de téléphone Le champ Numéro de téléphone sert à saisir le numéro de téléphone selon le masque arbitraire défini par l'auteur du formulaire. Par défaut, c'est (999)999-9999. Pour ajouter un champ numéro de téléphone, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Numéro de téléphone. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de numéros de téléphones, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque numéro de téléphone au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ numéro de téléphone. Le texte par défaut est (999)999-9999. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ numéro de téléphone. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ numéro de téléphone. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ numéro de téléphone. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ numéro de téléphone ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ numéro de téléphone ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ numéro de téléphone ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ Date et heure Le champ Date et heure sert à insérer la date. Par défaut, le format de date est DD-MM-YYYY. Pour ajouter un champ date et heure, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Date et heure. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Pour saisir une date, cliquez sur la flèche dans le champ et sélectionnez la date appropriée dans le calendrier. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de champs Date et heure, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ complexe au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ date et heure. Par défaut, la date du jour est affichée. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher comme un conseil quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ date et heure . Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Afficher la date comme suit: sélectionnez le format du champ, par ex., MM/DD/YYYY, Lundi, MM DD, YYYY, etc. Par défaut, le format de date est DD/MM/YYYY. Langue: sélectionnez la langue de la date et l'heure. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ date et heure ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ date et heure ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ date et heure obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ code postal Le champ Code postal sert à saisir le code postal selon le masque arbitraire défini par l'auteur du formulaire. Par défaut, c'est 99999-9999. Pour ajouter un champ code postal, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Code postal. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de numéros de téléphones, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque numéro de téléphone au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ code postal. Le texte par défaut est 99999-9999. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ code postal. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ code postal. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ code postal. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ code postal ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ code postal ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ carte bancaire Le champ Carte bancaire sert à saisir le numéro de carte la bancaire selon le masque arbitraire défini par l'auteur du formulaire. Par défaut, c'est 9999-9999-9999-9999. Pour ajouter un champ numéro de carte la bancaire, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Carte bancaire. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de numéros des cartes bancaires, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ numéro de carte la bancaire au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Le texte par défaut est 9999-9999-9999-9999. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Valeur par défaut: saisissez la valeur à afficher dans le champ par défaut. Format: définissez le format du champ, c-à-d Aucun, Chiffres, Lettres, Masque arbitraire ou Expression régulière. Le format par défaut est Masque arbitraire Pour modifier le format, saisissez le masque approprié dans le champ au-dessous. Symboles autorisés: saisissez les symboles qui sont autorisés dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Lors de l'activation de cette option, les options Ajuster automatiquement et Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes deviennent aussi disponibles. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Ajuster automatiquement: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour ajuster automatiquement la police en fonction de la taille du champ. Champ de saisie à plusieurs lignes: il est possible d'activer cette option lors de l'activation de l'option Taille de champ fixe, cochez cette case pour créer un champ à plusieurs lignes, sinon le champ va contenir une seule ligne de texte. Limite de caractères: le nombre de caractères n'est pas limité par défaut. Activez cette option pour indiquer le nombre maximum de caractères dans le champ à droite. Peigne de caractères: configurer l'aspect général pour une présentation claire et équilibré dans le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire. Laissez cette case décoché pour garder les paramètres par défaut ou activez cette option pour configurer les paramètres suivants: Largeur de cellule: définissez la largeur en sélectionnant Automatique (la largeur est redimentionnée automatiquement), Au moins (la largeur doit être au moins égale à la valeur définie) ou Exactement (la largeur doit être égale à la valeur définie). Le texte sera justifié selon les paramètres. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ numéro de la carte la bancaire ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ numéro de la carte la bancaire ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre le champ numéro de la carte la bancaire ajouté obligatoire de remplir. Créer un champ complexe Un champ complexe peut combiner plusieurs champs, par ex. le champ texte et le champ liste déroulante. Vous pouvez combiner les champs selon vos besoins. Pour ajouter un champ complexe, positionnez le point d'insertion à la ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter un champ, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Champ complexe. Le champ du formulaire apparaîtra à la point d'insertion de la ligne de texte existante. Le menu Paramètres du formulaire s'affiche à droite. Qui doit remplir ce champ?: sélectionnez le rôle dans la liste déroulante pour affecter les utilisateurs au groupe d'utilisateurs qui ont accès à ce champ. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affectation des utilisateurs aux rôles, veuillez consulter l'article Gérer des rôles de ce guide-ci. Clé: pour créer un nouveau groupe de champs complexes, saisissez le nom du groupe et appuyez sur Entrée, ensuite attribuez chaque champ complexe au groupe approprié. Espace réservé: saisissez le texte à afficher dans le champ complexe. Le texte par défaut est Votre texte ici. Tag: saisissez le texte à afficher en tant que tag pour l'utilisation interne, c-à-d à afficher aux co-éditeurs uniquement. Conseil: saisissez le texte à afficher quand l'utilisateur fait passer la souris sur le champ complexe. Taille de champ fixe: activez cette option pour fixer la taille du champ. Un champ de taille fixe ressemble à une forme automatique. Vous pouvez définir le style d'habillage et ajuster son position. Couleur de bordure: cliquez sur l'icône pour définir la couleur des bordures du champ complexe ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée des bordures dans la palette. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ajouter une couleur personnalisée. Couleur d'arrière plan: cliquez sur l'icône pour choisir la couleur d'arrière-plan du champ complexe ajouté. Sélectionnez la couleur appropriée de la palette Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou ajoutez une nouvelle couleur personnalisée, le cas échéant. Obligatoire: cochez cette case pour rendre ce champ complexe obligatoire de remplir. Pour ajouter plusieurs champs au champ complexe, cliquez dessous et sélectionnez le champ approprié de la barre d'outils supérieure sous l'onglet Formulaire. pour en savoir plus sur chaque champ, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas ajouter le champ image dans un champ complexe. Gérer des rôles Vous pouvez créer de nouveaux rôles pour permettre aux utilisateurs de remplir les champs du formulaire. Pour gérer les rôles, passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur l'icône Gérer les rôles, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau pour ajouter un nouveau rôle. saisissez le nom de rôle et sélectionnez la couleur, le cas échéant. Vous pouvez également ajouter la couleur personnalisée en cliquant sur l'option appropriée dans le menu, cliquez sur OK pour ajouter un nouveau rôle. définissez l'ordre dans lequel on va recevoir et signer le document à l'aide de et boutons, utilisez le boutons Modifier et Supprimer pour modifier et supprimer les rôles, cliquez sur Fermer pour revenir à l'édition du formulaire. Lors du sauvegarde du formulaire au format .oform, vous pouvez afficher tous les rôles du formulaire. Afficher l'aperçu du formulaire Remarque: Les options de modification ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous activez le mode Aperçu du formulaire. Cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu du formulaire sous l'onglet Formulaire de la barre d'outils supérieure, pour afficher un aperçu du formulaire sur un document. Vous pouvez afficher l'aperçu du formulaire à travers le regard de chaque rôle créé pour le formulaire. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur la flèche au-dessous du bouton Aperçu du formulaire et sélectionnez le rôle approprié. Pour quitter le mode d'aperçu, cliquer sur la même icône encore une fois. Déplacer les champs du formulaire Il est possible de déplacer les champs du formulaire vers un autre emplacement du document: cliquez sur le bouton à gauche de la bordure de contrôle et faites la glisser vers un autre emplacement sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Vous pouvez également copier et coller les champs du formulaire: sélectionnez le champ approprié et appuyez sur le raccourci Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V. Rendre un champ de formulaire obligatoire Pour rendre un champ de formulaire obligatoire, activez l'option Obligatoire. La bordure des champs obligatoires est marquée d'un trait rouge. Verrouiller les champs du formulaire Pour empêcher toute la modification ultérieure des champs du formulaire, cliquez sur l'icône Verrou . La fonctionnalité de remplissage reste disponible. Effacer les champs remplis dans un formulaire Pour effacer tous les champs remplis et supprimer toutes informations, cliquez sur le bouton Effacer tous les champs sous l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure. Il est possible d'effacer les champs remplis uniquement en mode de remplissage du formulaire. Naviguer, afficher et enregistrer un formulaire Passez à l'onglet Formulaires de la barre d'outils supérieure. Naviguez entre les champs du formulaire en utilisant les boutons Champ précédent et Champ suivant de la barre d'outil supérieure. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer sous oform de la barre d'outils supérieure pour enregistrer le formulaire au format OFORM prêt à remplir. Vous pouvez sauvegarder autant de formulaires au format OFORM que vous le souhaitez. Supprimer les champs du formulaire Pour supprimer un champ du formulaire et garder tous son contenu, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur l'icône Supprimer (assurez-vous que le champ n'est pas verrouillé) ou appuyez sur la touche Supprimer du clavier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "title": "Créer des listes", - "body": "Pour créer une liste dans l'Éditeur de Documents, placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez commencer la liste (cela peut être une nouvelle ligne ou le texte existant), passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type de liste à créer : Liste non ordonnée avec des marqueurs est créée à l'aide de l'icône Puces de la barre d'outils supérieure Liste ordonnée avec numérotage spécial est créée à l'aide de l'icône Numérotation de la barre d'outils supérieure Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Puces ou Numérotation pour sélectionner le format de puces ou de numérotation souhaité. appuyez sur la touche Entrée à la fin de la ligne pour ajouter un nouvel élément à la liste. Pour terminer la liste, appuyez sur la touche Retour arrière et continuez le travail. L'éditeur commence automatiquement une liste numérotée lorsque vous tapez 1 et un point ou une parenthèse droite et un espace : 1., 1). La liste à puces commence automatiquement lorsque vous tapez - ou * et un espace. Vous pouvez aussi changer le retrait du texte dans les listes et leur imbrication en utilisant les icônes Liste multi-niveaux , Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour modifier le niveau de la liste, cliquez sur l'icône Numérotation , Puces , ou Liste multi-niveaux et choisissez Changer le niveau de liste, ou placer le curseur au début de la ligne et appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier pour augmenter le niveau de la liste. Procédez au niveau de liste approprié. Vous pouvez configurez les paramètres supplémentaires du retrait et de l'espacement sur la barre latérale droite et dans la fenêtre de configuration de paramètres avancées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les pages Modifier le retrait des paragraphes et Régler l'interligne du paragraphe . Joindre et séparer des listes Pour joindre une liste à la précédente : cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le premier élément de la seconde liste, utilisez l'option Joindre à la liste précédente du menu contextuel. Les listes seront jointes et la numérotation se poursuivra conformément à la numérotation de la première liste. Pour séparer une liste : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'élément de la liste où vous voulez commencer une nouvelle liste, sélectionnez l'option Séparer la liste du menu contextuel. La liste sera séparée et la numérotation dans la deuxième liste recommencera. Modifier la numérotation Poursuivre la numérotation séquentielle dans la deuxième liste selon la numérotation de la liste précédente : cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le premier élément de la seconde liste, sélectionnez l'option Continuer la numérotation du menu contextuel. La numérotation se poursuivra conformément à la numérotation de la première liste. Pour définir une certaine valeur initiale de numérotation : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'élément de la liste où vous souhaitez appliquer une nouvelle valeur de numérotation, sélectionnez l'option Définit la valeur de la numérotation du menu contextuel, dans une nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre, définissez la valeur numérique voulue et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Configurer les paramètres de la liste Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste comme la puce/la numérotation, l'alignement, la taille et la couleur : cliquez sur un élément de la liste actuelle ou sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer une liste, cliquez sur l'icône Puces ou Numérotation sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils en haut, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste, la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste à puces se présente sous cet aspect : La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste numérotée se présente sous cet aspect : Pour la liste à puces on peut choisir le caractère à utiliser comme puce et pour la liste numérotée on peut choisir le type de numérotation. Les options Alignement, Taille et Couleur sont identiques pour toutes les listes soit à puces soit numérotée. Puce permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le champ Symboles et caractères, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement. Les options d'alignement disponibles : À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la taille des puces correspond à la taille du texte ; Ajustez la taille en utilisant les valeurs prédéfinies de 8 à 96. Couleur permet de choisir la couleur des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez les Couleurs de thème ou les Couleurs standard de la palette ou définissez la Couleur personnalisée. Toutes les modifications sont affichées dans le champ Aperçu. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste à plusieurs niveaux, appuyez sur un élément de la liste, cliquez sur l'icône Liste multiniveaux sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils en haut, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste, la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste multiniveaux se présente sous cet aspect : Choisissez le niveau approprié dans la liste Niveau à gauche, puis personnalisez l'aspect des puces et des nombres pour le niveau choisi : Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste numérotée ou le caractère approprié pour la liste à puces. Les options disponibles pour la liste numérotée : Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Pour la liste à puces vous pouvez choisir un des symboles prédéfinis ou utiliser l'option Nouvelle puce. Lorsque vous appuyez sur cette option, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement du début du paragraphe. À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Les options d'alignement disponibles : À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Ajustez la taille en utilisant les paramètres prédéfinis de 8 à 96. Couleur permet de choisir la couleur des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez les Couleurs de thème ou les Couleurs standard de la palette ou définissez la Couleur personnalisée. Toutes les modifications sont affichées dans le champ Aperçu. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre." + "body": "Pour créer une liste dans l'éditeur de documents, placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez commencer la liste (cela peut être une nouvelle ligne ou le texte existant), passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type de liste à créer: Liste non ordonnée avec des marqueurs est créée à l'aide de l'icône Puces de la barre d'outils supérieure Liste ordonnée avec numérotage spécial est créée à l'aide de l'icône Numérotation de la barre d'outils supérieure Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Puces ou Numérotation pour sélectionner le format de puces ou de numérotation souhaité. appuyez sur la touche Entrée à la fin de la ligne pour ajouter un nouvel élément à la liste. Pour terminer la liste, appuyez sur la touche Retour arrière et continuez le travail. L'éditeur commence automatiquement une liste numérotée lorsque vous tapez 1 et un point ou une parenthèse droite et un espace: 1., 1). La liste à puces commence automatiquement lorsque vous tapez - ou * et un espace. Vous pouvez aussi changer le retrait du texte dans les listes et leur imbrication en utilisant les icônes Liste multiniveau , Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour modifier le niveau de la liste, cliquez sur l'icône Numérotation , Puces ou Liste multiniveau et choisissez Changer le niveau de liste, ou placer le curseur au début de la ligne et appuyez sur la touche Tabdu clavier pour accéder au niveau suivant de la liste. Procédez au niveau de liste approprié. Vous pouvez configurez les paramètres supplémentaires du retrait et de l'espacement sur la barre latérale droite et dans la fenêtre de configuration de paramètres avancées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les pages Modifier le retrait des paragraphes et Régler l'interligne du paragraphe . Joindre et séparer des listes Pour joindre une liste à la précédente: cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le premier élément de la seconde liste, utilisez l'option Joindre à la liste précédente du menu contextuel. Les listes seront jointes et la numérotation se poursuivra conformément à la numérotation de la première liste. Pour séparer une liste: cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'élément de la liste où vous voulez commencer une nouvelle liste, sélectionnez l'option Séparer la liste du menu contextuel. La liste sera séparée et la numérotation dans la deuxième liste recommencera. Modifier la numérotation Poursuivre la numérotation séquentielle dans la deuxième liste selon la numérotation de la liste précédente: cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le premier élément de la seconde liste, sélectionnez l'option Continuer la numérotation du menu contextuel. La numérotation se poursuivra conformément à la numérotation de la première liste. Pour définir une certaine valeur initiale de numérotation: cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'élément de la liste où vous souhaitez appliquer une nouvelle valeur de numérotation, sélectionnez l'option Définit la valeur de la numérotation du menu contextuel, dans une nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre, définissez la valeur numérique voulue et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Configurer les paramètres de la liste Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste comme la puce/la numérotation, l'alignement, la taille et la couleur: cliquez sur un élément de la liste actuelle ou sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer une liste, cliquez sur l'icône Puces ou Numérotation sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste, la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste à puces se présente sous cet aspect: La fenêtre de paramètres de la liste numérotée se présente sous cet aspect: Pour la liste à puces on peut choisir le caractère à utiliser comme puce et pour la liste numérotée on peut choisir le type et la police des numéros. Les options Alignement, Taille et les options d'accentuation du texte Gras/Italique/Couleur sont identiques pour toutes les listes soit à puces soit numérotée. Puce permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le champ Symboles et caractères, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste. Les options suivantes sont disponibles: Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement. Les options d'alignement disponibles: À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la taille des puces correspond à la taille du texte; Ajustez la taille en utilisant les valeurs prédéfinies de 8 à 96. Gras/Italique/Couleur permet d'accentuer et de mettre en évidence une puce/un numéro. Pour Couleur, l'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez Couleurs de thème, Couleurs standard ou Couleurs récentes de la palette ou cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour sélectionner une couleur personnalisée. Toutes les modifications sont affichées dans le champ Aperçu. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Fautes in clic droit sur la liste à puces et sélectionnez l'option Ajuster les retraits de la liste pour ouvir la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste la même que pour une liste à plusieurs niveaux. Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste à plusieurs niveaux, appuyez sur un élément de la liste, cliquez sur l'icône es Liste multiniveau sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste, la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste multiniveaux se présente sous cet aspect: Choisissez le niveau approprié dans la liste Niveau à gauche, puis personnalisez l'aspect des puces et des nombres pour le niveau choisi: Type permet de sélectionner la numérotation appropriée pour la liste numérotée ou le caractère approprié pour la liste à puces. Les options disponibles pour la liste numérotée: Rien, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Pour la liste à puces vous pouvez choisir un des symboles prédéfinis ou utiliser l'option Nouvelle puce. Lorsque vous appuyez sur cette option, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet articlepour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Alignement permet de sélectionner le type d'alignement approprié pour aligner les puces/nombres horizontalement du début du paragraphe. À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Les options d'alignement disponibles: À gauche, Au centre, À droite. Taille permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros. L'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Ajustez la taille en utilisant les paramètres prédéfinis de 8 à 96. Gras/Italique/Couleur permet d'accentuer et de mettre en évidence une puce/un numéro. Pour Couleur, l'option par défaut est En tant que texte. Lorsque cette option est active, la couleur des puces ou des chiffres correspond à la couleur du texte. Choisissez l'option Automatique pour appliquer la couleur automatiquement, sélectionnez Couleurs de thème, Couleurs standard ou Couleurs récentes de la palette ou cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour sélectionner une couleur personnalisée. Format de nombre affiche le style du caractère qu'on utilise pour créer la liste. Cliquez sur la flèche à deux pointes à côté du champ Format de nombre pour accéder aux paramètres avancés. Vous pouvez personnaliser chaque niveau de la liste à plusieurs niveaux en sélectionnant le niveau approprié dans la section Sélectionner le niveau. Police permet de sélectionner la mise en forme de la police, Inclure le numéro de niveau à partir de permet d'indiquer le numéro du niveau parent pour le niveau subordonné, Commencer à permet de commencer la numérotation de la liste à partir du numéro dont vous avez besoin. Activez l'option Recommencer la liste pour recommencer la numérotation, Alignement permet de définir le type d'alignement spécifique pour chaque niveau de la liste. Sélectionnez À gauche, Au centre ou À droite de la liste déroulante et définissez l'espacement avant le caractère de la liste, Retrait du texte permet de définir l'espacement entre le caractère de la liste et le texte, Faire suivre le numéro de permet d'indiquer ce qui suit le caractère que vous avez choisi comme le format de numéro. Sélectionnez Tabulation, Espace ou Aucun de la liste déroulante. Lorsque vous choisissez la Tabulation, l'option Ajouter taquet de tabulation à devient active. Activez l'option Ajouter taquet de tabulation à et définissez la longueur du retrait. Toutes les modifications sont affichées dans le champ Aperçu. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", "title": "Comment faire une table des matières sur document Word", - "body": "Table des matières Une table des matières contient une liste de tous les chapitres (sections, etc.) d'un document et affiche les numéros des pages où chaque chapitre est démarré. Cela permet de naviguer facilement dans un document de plusieurs pages en passant rapidement à la partie voulue du texte. La table des matières est générée automatiquement sur la base des titres de document formatés à l'aide de styles prédéfinis. Cela facilite la mise à jour de la table des matières créée sans qu'il soit nécessaire de modifier les titres et de changer manuellement les numéros de page si le texte du document a été modifié. Structure des titres dans la table des matières Formater les titres Tout d'abord, formatez les titres dans votre document en utilisant l'un des styles prédéfinis dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Pour le faire, Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez inclure dans la table des matières. Ouvrez le menu Style sur le côté droit de l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur le style que vous souhaitez appliquer. Par défaut, vous pouvez utiliser les styles Titre 1 - Titre 9. Remarque : si vous souhaitez utiliser d'autres styles (par exemple Titre, Sous-titre, etc.) pour formater les titres qui seront inclus dans la table des matières, vous devrez d'abord ajuster les paramètres de la table des matières (voir la section correspondante ci-dessous). Pour en savoir plus sur les styles de mise en forme disponibles, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Pour ajouter rapidement un texte en tant que'en-tête, Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez inclure dans la table des matières. Passez à l'onglet Référence dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter du texte dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Choisissez le niveau de titre requis. Gérer les titres Une fois les titres formatés, vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône Navigation dans la barre latérale de gauche pour ouvrir le panneau qui affiche la liste de tous les titres avec les niveaux d'imbrication correspondants. Ce panneau permet de naviguer facilement entre les titres dans le texte du document et de gérer la structure de titre. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur un titre de la liste et utilisez l'une des options disponibles dans le menu : Promouvoir - pour déplacer le titre actuellement sélectionné vers le niveau supérieur de la structure hiérarchique, par ex. le changer de Titre 2 à Titre 1. Abaisser - pour déplacer le titre actuellement sélectionné vers le niveau inférieur de la structure hiérarchique, par ex. le changer de Titre 1 à. Titre 2. Nouvel en-tête avant - pour ajouter un nouveau titre vide du même niveau avant celui actuellement sélectionné. Nouvel en-tête après- pour ajouter un nouveau titre vide du même niveau après celui actuellement sélectionné. Nouveau sous-titre - pour ajouter un nouveau sous-titre vide (c'est-à-dire un titre de niveau inférieur) après le titre actuellement sélectionné. Lorsque le titre ou la sous-rubrique est ajouté, cliquez sur l'en-tête vide ajouté dans la liste et tapez votre propre texte. Cela peut être fait à la fois dans le texte du document et sur le panneau Navigation lui-même. Sélectionner le contenu - pour sélectionner le texte sous le titre actuel du document (y compris le texte relatif à tous les sous-titres de cette rubrique). Tout développer - pour développer tous les niveaux de titres dans le panneau Navigation. Tout réduire - pour réduire tous les niveaux de titres excepté le niveau 1 dans le panneau Titres. Développer au niveau - pour étendre la structure de titre au niveau sélectionné. Par exemple. Si vous sélectionnez le niveau 3, les niveaux 1, 2 et 3 seront développés, tandis que le niveau 4 et tous les niveaux inférieurs seront réduits. Pour développer ou réduire manuellement des niveaux de titre différents, utilisez les flèches situées à gauche des en-têtes. Pour fermer le panneau Navigation cliquez sur l'icône encore une fois. Insérer une table des matières dans le document Pour insérer une table des matières dans votre document : Positionnez le point d'insertion à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter la table des matières. passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Table des matières dans la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le menu. Vous pouvez sélectionner la table des matières qui affiche les titres, les numéros de page et les repères, ou les en-têtes uniquement. Remarque : l'apparence de la table des matières peut être ajustée ultérieurement via les paramètres de la table des matières. La table des matières sera insérée à la position actuelle du curseur. Pour modifier la position de la table des matières, vous pouvez sélectionner le champ de la table des matières (contrôle du contenu) et le faire simplement glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur le bouton dans le coin supérieur gauche du champ Table des matières et faites-le glisser sans relâcher le bouton de la souris sur une autre position dans le texte du document. Pour naviguer entre les titres, appuyez sur la touche Ctrl et cliquez sur le titre souhaité dans le champ de la table des matières. Vous serez ramené à la page correspondante. Ajuster la table des matières créée Actualiser la table des matières Une fois la table des matières créée, vous pouvez continuer à modifier votre texte en ajoutant de nouveaux chapitres, en modifiant leur ordre, en supprimant certains paragraphes ou en développant le texte associé à un titre de manière à changer les numéros de page correspondants à la section considérée. Dans ce cas, utilisez l'option Actualiser pour appliquer automatiquement toutes les modifications à la table des matières. Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Actualiser dans l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le menu : Actualiser la totalité de la table : pour ajouter les titres que vous avez ajoutés au document, supprimer ceux que vous avez supprimés du document, mettre à jour les titres modifiés (renommés) et les numéros de page. Actualiser uniquement les numéros de page pour mettre à jour les numéros de page sans appliquer de modifications aux titres. Vous pouvez également sélectionner la table des matières dans le texte du document et cliquer sur l'icône Actualiser en haut du champ Table des matières pour afficher les options mentionnées ci-dessus. Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la table des matières et d'utiliser les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel. Ajuster les paramètres de la table des matières Pour ouvrir les paramètres de la table des matières, vous pouvez procéder de la manière suivante : Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Table des matières dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres dans le menu. Sélectionnez la table des matières dans le texte du document, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du titre du champ Table des matières et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la table des matières et utilisez l'option Paramètres de table des matières dans le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira où vous pourrez ajuster les paramètres suivants : Afficher les numéros de page - cette option permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les numéros de page ou non. Aligner à droite les numéros de page - cette option permet de choisir si vous souhaitez aligner les numéros de page sur le côté droit de la page ou non. Points de suite - cette option permet de choisir le type de points de suite que vous voulez utiliser. Un point de suite est une ligne de caractères (points ou traits d'union) qui remplit l'espace entre un titre et le numéro de page correspondant. Il est également possible de sélectionner l'option Aucun si vous ne souhaitez pas utiliser de points de suite. Mettre en forme la table des matières en tant que liens - cette option est cochée par défaut. Si vous le décochez, vous ne pourrez pas passer au chapitre souhaité en appuyant sur Ctrl et en cliquant sur le titre correspondant. Créer une table des matières à partir de - cette section permet de spécifier le nombre de niveaux hiérarchiques voulus ainsi que les styles par défaut qui seront utilisés pour créer la table des matières. Cochez le champ correspondant : Niveaux hiérarchiques - lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, vous pouvez ajuster le nombre de niveaux hiérarchiques utilisés dans la table des matières. Cliquez sur les flèches dans le champ Niveaux pour diminuer ou augmenter le nombre de niveaux (les valeurs de 1 à 9 sont disponibles). Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez la valeur 3, les en-têtes de niveau 4 à 9 ne seront pas inclus dans la table des matières. Styles sélectionnés - lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, vous pouvez spécifier des styles supplémentaires pouvant être utilisés pour créer la table des matières et affecter un niveau de plan correspondant à chacun d'eux. Spécifiez la valeur de niveau souhaitée dans le champ situé à droite du style. Une fois les paramètres enregistrés, vous pourrez utiliser ce style lors de la création de la table des matières. Styles - cette option permet de sélectionner l'apparence souhaitée de la table des matières. Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante : Le champ d'aperçu ci-dessus affiche l'apparence de la table des matières. Les quatre styles par défaut suivants sont disponibles : Simple, Standard, Moderne, Classique. L'option Actuel est utilisée si vous personnalisez le style de la table des matières. Cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la fenêtre des paramètres pour appliquer les changements. Personnaliser le style de la table des matières Après avoir appliqué l'un des styles de table des matières par défaut dans la fenêtre des paramètres de la Table des matières, vous pouvez le modifier afin que le texte figurant dans le champ de la table des matières ressemble au résultat que vous recherchez. Sélectionnez le texte dans le champ de la table des matières, par ex. en appuyant sur le bouton dans le coin supérieur gauche du contrôle du contenu de la table des matières. Mettez en forme la table des matières en modifiant le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou en appliquant les styles de décoration de police. Mettez à jour les styles pour les éléments de chaque niveau. Pour mettre à jour le style, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'élément mis en forme, sélectionnez l'option Mise en forme du style dans le menu contextuel et cliquez sur l'option Mettre à jour le style TM N (le style TM 2 correspond aux éléments de niveau 2, le style correspond aux éléments de et ainsi de suite). Actualiser la table des matières. Supprimer la table des matières Pour supprimer la table des matières du document : cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Table des matières dans la barre d'outils supérieure et utilisez l'option Supprimer la table des matières, ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard du titre de contrôle du contenu de la table des matières et utilisez l'option Supprimer la table des matières." + "body": "Table des matières Une table des matières contient une liste de tous les chapitres (sections, etc.) d'un document et affiche les numéros des pages où chaque chapitre est démarré. Cela permet de naviguer facilement dans un document de plusieurs pages en passant rapidement à la partie voulue du texte. La table des matières est générée automatiquement sur la base des titres de document formatés à l'aide de styles prédéfinis. Cela facilite la mise à jour de la table des matières créée sans qu'il soit nécessaire de modifier les titres et de changer manuellement les numéros de page si le texte du document a été modifié. Structure des titres dans la table des matières Formater les titres Tout d'abord, formatez les titres dans votre document en utilisant l'un des styles prédéfinis dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Pour le faire, Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez inclure dans la table des matières. Ouvrez le menu Style sur le côté droit de l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur le style que vous souhaitez appliquer. Par défaut, vous pouvez utiliser les styles Titre 1 - Titre 9. Remarque : si vous souhaitez utiliser d'autres styles (par exemple Titre, Sous-titre, etc.) pour formater les titres qui seront inclus dans la table des matières, vous devrez d'abord ajuster les paramètres de la table des matières (voir la section correspondante ci-dessous). Pour en savoir plus sur les styles de mise en forme disponibles, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Pour ajouter rapidement un texte en tant que'en-tête, Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez inclure dans la table des matières. Passez à l'onglet Référence dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter du texte dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Choisissez le niveau de titre requis. Gérer les titres Une fois les titres formatés, vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône Navigation dans la barre latérale de gauche pour ouvrir le panneau qui affiche la liste de tous les titres avec les niveaux d'imbrication correspondants. Ce panneau permet de naviguer facilement entre les titres dans le texte du document et de gérer la structure de titre. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur un titre de la liste et utilisez l'une des options disponibles dans le menu : Promouvoir - pour déplacer le titre actuellement sélectionné vers le niveau supérieur de la structure hiérarchique, par ex. le changer de Titre 2 à Titre 1. Abaisser - pour déplacer le titre actuellement sélectionné vers le niveau inférieur de la structure hiérarchique, par ex. le changer de Titre 1 à. Titre 2. Nouvel en-tête avant - pour ajouter un nouveau titre vide du même niveau avant celui actuellement sélectionné. Nouvel en-tête après- pour ajouter un nouveau titre vide du même niveau après celui actuellement sélectionné. Nouveau sous-titre - pour ajouter un nouveau sous-titre vide (c'est-à-dire un titre de niveau inférieur) après le titre actuellement sélectionné. Lorsque le titre ou la sous-rubrique est ajouté, cliquez sur l'en-tête vide ajouté dans la liste et tapez votre propre texte. Cela peut être fait à la fois dans le texte du document et sur le panneau Navigation lui-même. Sélectionner le contenu - pour sélectionner le texte sous le titre actuel du document (y compris le texte relatif à tous les sous-titres de cette rubrique). Tout développer - pour développer tous les niveaux de titres dans le panneau Navigation. Tout réduire - pour réduire tous les niveaux de titres excepté le niveau 1 dans le panneau Titres. Développer au niveau - pour étendre la structure de titre au niveau sélectionné. Par exemple. Si vous sélectionnez le niveau 3, les niveaux 1, 2 et 3 seront développés, tandis que le niveau 4 et tous les niveaux inférieurs seront réduits. Pour développer ou réduire manuellement des niveaux de titre différents, utilisez les flèches situées à gauche des en-têtes. Pour fermer le panneau Navigation cliquez sur l'icône encore une fois. Insérer une table des matières dans le document Pour insérer une table des matières dans votre document : positionnez le point d'insertion à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter la table des matières. passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Table des matières dans la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le menu. Vous pouvez sélectionner la table des matières qui affiche les titres, les numéros de page et les repères, ou les en-têtes uniquement. Remarque : l'apparence de la table des matières peut être ajustée ultérieurement via les paramètres de la table des matières. La table des matières sera insérée à la position actuelle du curseur. Pour modifier la position de la table des matières, vous pouvez sélectionner le champ de la table des matières (contrôle du contenu) et le faire simplement glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur le bouton dans le coin supérieur gauche du champ Table des matières et faites-le glisser sans relâcher le bouton de la souris sur une autre position dans le texte du document. Pour naviguer entre les titres, appuyez sur la touche Ctrl et cliquez sur le titre souhaité dans le champ de la table des matières. Vous serez ramené à la page correspondante. Ajuster la table des matières créée Actualiser la table des matières Une fois la table des matières créée, vous pouvez continuer à modifier votre texte en ajoutant de nouveaux chapitres, en modifiant leur ordre, en supprimant certains paragraphes ou en développant le texte associé à un titre de manière à changer les numéros de page correspondants à la section considérée. Dans ce cas, utilisez l'option Actualiser pour appliquer automatiquement toutes les modifications à la table des matières. Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Actualiser dans l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le menu : Actualiser la totalité de la table : pour ajouter les titres que vous avez ajoutés au document, supprimer ceux que vous avez supprimés du document, mettre à jour les titres modifiés (renommés) et les numéros de page. Actualiser uniquement les numéros de page pour mettre à jour les numéros de page sans appliquer de modifications aux titres. Vous pouvez également sélectionner la table des matières dans le texte du document et cliquer sur l'icône Actualiser en haut du champ Table des matières pour afficher les options mentionnées ci-dessus. Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la table des matières et d'utiliser les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel. Ajuster les paramètres de la table des matières Pour ouvrir les paramètres de la table des matières, vous pouvez procéder de la manière suivante : Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Table des matières dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres dans le menu. Sélectionnez la table des matières dans le texte du document, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du titre du champ Table des matières et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la table des matières et utilisez l'option Paramètres de table des matières dans le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira où vous pourrez ajuster les paramètres suivants : Afficher les numéros de page - cette option permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les numéros de page ou non. Aligner à droite les numéros de page - cette option permet de choisir si vous souhaitez aligner les numéros de page sur le côté droit de la page ou non. Points de suite - cette option permet de choisir le type de points de suite que vous voulez utiliser. Un point de suite est une ligne de caractères (points ou traits d'union) qui remplit l'espace entre un titre et le numéro de page correspondant. Il est également possible de sélectionner l'option Aucun si vous ne souhaitez pas utiliser de points de suite. Mettre en forme la table des matières en tant que liens - cette option est cochée par défaut. Si vous le décochez, vous ne pourrez pas passer au chapitre souhaité en appuyant sur Ctrl et en cliquant sur le titre correspondant. Créer une table des matières à partir de - cette section permet de spécifier le nombre de niveaux hiérarchiques voulus ainsi que les styles par défaut qui seront utilisés pour créer la table des matières. Cochez le champ correspondant : Niveaux hiérarchiques - lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, vous pouvez ajuster le nombre de niveaux hiérarchiques utilisés dans la table des matières. Cliquez sur les flèches dans le champ Niveaux pour diminuer ou augmenter le nombre de niveaux (les valeurs de 1 à 9 sont disponibles). Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez la valeur 3, les en-têtes de niveau 4 à 9 ne seront pas inclus dans la table des matières. Styles sélectionnés - lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, vous pouvez spécifier des styles supplémentaires pouvant être utilisés pour créer la table des matières et affecter un niveau de plan correspondant à chacun d'eux. Spécifiez la valeur de niveau souhaitée dans le champ situé à droite du style. Une fois les paramètres enregistrés, vous pourrez utiliser ce style lors de la création de la table des matières. Styles - cette option permet de sélectionner l'apparence souhaitée de la table des matières. Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante : Le champ d'aperçu ci-dessus affiche l'apparence de la table des matières. Les quatre styles par défaut suivants sont disponibles : Simple, Standard, Moderne, Classique. L'option Actuel est utilisée si vous personnalisez le style de la table des matières. Cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la fenêtre des paramètres pour appliquer les changements. Personnaliser le style de la table des matières Après avoir appliqué l'un des styles de table des matières par défaut dans la fenêtre des paramètres de la Table des matières, vous pouvez le modifier afin que le texte figurant dans le champ de la table des matières ressemble au résultat que vous recherchez. Sélectionnez le texte dans le champ de la table des matières, par ex. en appuyant sur le bouton dans le coin supérieur gauche du contrôle du contenu de la table des matières. Mettez en forme la table des matières en modifiant le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou en appliquant les styles de décoration de police. Mettez à jour les styles pour les éléments de chaque niveau. Pour mettre à jour le style, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'élément mis en forme, sélectionnez l'option Mise en forme du style dans le menu contextuel et cliquez sur l'option Mettre à jour le style TM N (le style TM 2 correspond aux éléments de niveau 2, le style correspond aux éléments de et ainsi de suite). Actualiser la table des matières. Supprimer la table des matières Pour supprimer la table des matières du document : cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Table des matières dans la barre d'outils supérieure et utilisez l'option Supprimer la table des matières, ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard du titre de contrôle du contenu de la table des matières et utilisez l'option Supprimer la table des matières." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm", "title": "Appliquer les styles de police", "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez appliquer différents styles de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Exposant Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de la police, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. Dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte passez à l'onglet Police. Ici vous pouvez utiliser les styles de décoration de police et les paramètres suivants : Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Position permet de définir la position des caractères (décalage vertical) dans la ligne. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour déplacer les caractères vers le haut ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour les déplacer vers le bas. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Ligatures sont des lettres jointes d'un mot tapé dans l'une des polices OpenType. Veuillez noter que l'utilisation de ligatures peut perturber l'espacement des caractères. Les options de ligatures disponibles sont : Aucune Standards uniquement (inclut “fi”, “fl”, “ff” ; améliore la lisibilité) Contextuelles (ligatures sont appliquées en fonction des lettres environnantes ; améliore la lisibilité) Historiques (ligatures ont plus de descentes et lignes courbées ; réduit la lisibilité) Discrétionnaires (ligatures ornementales ; réduit la lisibilité) Standards et contextuelles Standards et historiques Contextuelles et historiques Standards et discrétionnaires Contextuelles et discrétionnaires Historiques et discrétionnaires Standards, contextuelles et historiques Standards, contextuelles et discrétionnaires Standards, historiques et discrétionnaires Contextuelles, historiques et discrétionnaires Toutes Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Dessiner à main levée dans un document", + "body": "Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez utiliser l'onglet Dessiner pour dessiner à main levée, ajouter des notes manuscrites, mettre en surbrillance du texte et effacer dans votre document. Pour dessiner, écrire ou mettre en surbrillance du texte, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur et déplacez le curseur. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement pour personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du trait. Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs lorsque la couleur nécessaire manque à la palette. Lorsque vous avez fini de dessiner, d'écrire ou de surligner, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur encore une fois, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap. Cliquez sur l'outil Gomme et déplacez le curseur d'avant en arrière pour effacer le trait. La Gomme efface uniquement le trait entier. Utilisez le bouton Sélectionner pour sélectionner l'inscription, le dessin ou la mise en surbrillance. Une fois sélectionné, il est possible de redimensionner ou supprimer l'élément." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "title": "Créer et insérer des diagrammes", - "body": "Lorsque vous avez besoin de créer beaucoup de diagrammes variés et complexes, l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous offre un plug-in draw.io qui peut les créer et configurer. Sélectionnez l'endroit sur la page où vous souhaitez insérer un diagramme. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur draw.io. La fenêtre draw io s'ouvre avec les sections suivantes : Barre d'outils supérieure contient des outils pour gérer les fichiers, configurer l'interface, modifier des données en utilisant les onglets Fichier, Modifier, Afficher, Organiser, Extras, Aide et les options appropriées. Barre latérale gauche contient des formes variées pour sélectionner parmi : Standard, Logiciel , Réseau, Business, Autres. Pour ajouter de nouvelles formes à celles disponibles par défaut, cliquez sur le bouton Plus de formes, choisissez les types d'objet nécessaires et cliquez sur Appliquer. Barre latérale droite contient des outils et paramètres pour personnaliser la feuille de calcul, les formes, les graphiques, les feuilles, le texte et les flèches : Paramètres de la Feuille de calcul : Affichage : Grille, ses taille et couleur, Affichage de la page, Arrière-plan - vous pouvez sélectionner une image locale, fournir l'URL ou choisir une couleur appropriée à l'aide de la palette de couleurs, ainsi qu'ajouter des effets Ombre. Options : Flèches de connexion, Points de connexion, Guides. Taille de papier : orientation Portrait ou Paysage avec les paramètres de longueur et de largeur spécifiés. Paramètres de Forme : Couleur : Couleur remplissage, Gradient. Ligne : Couleur, Type, Largeur, Largeur du périmètre. Opacité. Paramètres de Flèche : Couleur : Couleur remplissage, Gradient. Ligne : Couleur, Type, Largeur, Fin de ligne, Début de ligne. Opacité. Zone de travail pour afficher des diagrammes, saisir et modifier des données. Ici vous pouvez déplacer des objets, former des diagrammes séquentiels et connecter des objets avec des flèches. Barre d'état contient des outils de navigation pour basculer facilement entre les feuilles et les gérer. En utilisant ces outils créez les diagrammes nécessaires et modifiez-les. Quand tout est prêt cliquez sur le bouton Insérer pour les ajouter au document." + "body": "Lorsque vous avez besoin de créer beaucoup de diagrammes variés et complexes, l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE vous offre un plug-in draw.io qui peut les créer et configurer. Sélectionnez l'endroit sur la page où vous souhaitez insérer un diagramme. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur draw.io. La fenêtre draw io s'ouvre avec les sections suivantes : Barre d'outils supérieure contient des outils pour gérer les fichiers, configurer l'interface, modifier des données en utilisant les onglets Fichier, Modifier, Afficher, Organiser, Extras, Aide et les options appropriées. Barre latérale gauche contient des formes variées pour sélectionner parmi : Standard, Logiciel, Réseau, Business, Autres. Pour ajouter de nouvelles formes à celles disponibles par défaut, cliquez sur le bouton Plus de formes, choisissez les types d'objet nécessaires et cliquez sur Appliquer. Barre latérale droite contient des outils et paramètres pour personnaliser la feuille de calcul, les formes, les graphiques, les feuilles, le texte et les flèches : Paramètres de la Feuille de calcul : Affichage : Grille, ses taille et couleur, Affichage de la page, Arrière-plan - vous pouvez sélectionner une image locale, fournir l'URL ou choisir une couleur appropriée à l'aide de la palette de couleurs, ainsi qu'ajouter des effets Ombre. Options : Flèches de connexion, Points de connexion, Guides. Taille de papier : orientation Portrait ou Paysage avec les paramètres de longueur et de largeur spécifiés. Paramètres de Forme : Couleur : Couleur remplissage, Gradient. Ligne : Couleur, Type, Largeur, Largeur du périmètre. Opacité. Paramètres de Flèche : Couleur : Couleur remplissage, Gradient. Ligne : Couleur, Type, Largeur, Fin de ligne, Début de ligne. Opacité. Zone de travail pour afficher des diagrammes, saisir et modifier des données. Ici vous pouvez déplacer des objets, former des diagrammes séquentiels et connecter des objets avec des flèches. Barre d'état contient des outils de navigation pour basculer facilement entre les feuilles et les gérer. En utilisant ces outils créez les diagrammes nécessaires et modifiez-les. Quand tout est prêt cliquez sur le bouton Insérer pour les ajouter au document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm", "title": "Remplir un formulaire", - "body": "Un formulaire à remplir est le fichier au format OFORM. OFORM est un format de fichier destiné à remplir ; à télécharger ou à imprimer des modèles de formulaires une fois que vous avez terminé de le remplir. Comment remplir un formulaire : Ouvrez le formulaire au format OFORM. Remplissez tous les champs obligatoires. La bordure des champs obligatoires est rouge. Utilisez ou Champ suivant dans la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les champs ou cliquez sur le champ à remplir. Utilisez le bouton Effacer tous les champs pour vider tous les champs de saisie. Une fois tous les champs remplis, cliquez sur Enregistrer comme PDF pour sauvegarder le formulaire sur votre ordinateur en tant que fichier PDF. Cliquer sur dans le coin droit de la barre d'outils supérieure pour accéder aux options supplémentaires. Vous pouvez Imprimer, Télécharger en tant que docx ou Télécharger en tant que pdf. Il est même possible de modifier le thème d'interface en choisissant Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre ou Contraste sombre. Une fois le thème d'interface Sombre ou Contraste sombre activé, l'option Mode sombre devient disponible. Zoom permet de mettre à l'échelle et de redimensionner la page en utilisant des options Ajuster à la page, Ajuster à la largeur et l'outil pour régler le niveau de Zoom : Ajuster à la page sert à redimensionner la page pour afficher une page entière sur l'écran. Ajuster à la largeur sert à redimensionner la page pour l'adapter à la largeur de l'écran. Outil Zoom sert à zoomer et dézoomer sur une page. Ouvrir l'emplacement de fichier lorsque vous avez besoin d'accéder le dossier où le fichier est stocké." + "body": "Un formulaire à remplir est le fichier au format OFORM. OFORM est un format de fichier destiné à remplir ; à télécharger ou à imprimer des modèles de formulaires une fois que vous avez terminé de le remplir. Comment remplir un formulaire : Ouvrez le formulaire au format OFORM. Remplissez tous les champs obligatoires. La bordure des champs obligatoires est rouge. Utilisez Champ précédent ou Champ suivant dans la barre d'outils supérieure pour naviguer entre les champs ou cliquez sur le champ à remplir. Utilisez le bouton Effacer tous les champs pour vider tous les champs de saisie. Une fois tous les champs remplis, cliquez sur Enregistrer comme PDF pour sauvegarder le formulaire sur votre ordinateur en tant que fichier PDF. Cliquer sur dans le coin droit de la barre d'outils supérieure pour accéder aux options supplémentaires. Vous pouvez Imprimer, Télécharger en tant que docx ou Télécharger en tant que pdf. Il est même possible de modifier le thème d'interface en choisissant Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre ou Contraste sombre. Une fois le thème d'interface Sombre ou Contraste sombre activé, l'option Mode sombre devient disponible. Zoom permet de mettre à l'échelle et de redimensionner la page en utilisant des options Ajuster à la page, Ajuster à la largeur et l'outil pour régler le niveau de Zoom : Ajuster à la page sert à redimensionner la page pour afficher une page entière sur l'écran. Ajuster à la largeur sert à redimensionner la page pour l'adapter à la largeur de l'écran. Outil Zoom sert à zoomer et dézoomer sur une page. Ouvrir l'emplacement de fichier lorsque vous avez besoin d'accéder le dossier où le fichier est stocké." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", "title": "Définir le type de police, la taille et la couleur", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme appropriée. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme. Nom de la police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante, les valeurs par défaut sont : 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police jusqu'à 300 pt. Appuyer sur la touche Entrée pour confirmer Augmenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Diminuer la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Modifier la casse Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres. MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres. Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot. Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte ou le mot sur lequel le curseur de la souris est positionné. Couleur de surlignage Est utilisé pour marquer des phrases, des fragments, des mots ou même des caractères séparés en ajoutant une bande de couleur qui imite l'effet du surligneur sur le texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner la partie voulue du texte, puis cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner une couleur dans la palette (cet ensemble de couleurs ne dépend pas du Jeux de couleurs sélectionné et comprend 16 couleurs). La couleur sera appliquée à la sélection. Alternativement, vous pouvez d'abord choisir une couleur de surbrillance et ensuite commencer à sélectionner le texte avec la souris - le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et vous serez en mesure de surligner plusieurs parties différentes de votre texte de manière séquentielle. Pour enlever la mise en surbrillance, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Pour effacer la couleur de surbrillance, choisissez l'option Pas de remplissage. La Couleur de surlignage est différente de la Couleur de fond car cette dernière est appliquée au paragraphe entier et remplit complètement l'espace du paragraphe de la marge de page gauche à la marge de page droite. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres /caractères dans le texte. Par défaut, la couleur de police automatique est définie dans un nouveau document vide. Elle s'affiche comme la police noire sur l'arrière-plan blanc. Si vous choisissez le noir comme la couleur d'arrière-plan, la couleur de la police se change automatiquement à la couleur blanche pour que le texte soit visible. Pour choisir une autre couleur, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône et sélectionnez une couleur disponible dans les palettes (les couleurs de la palette Couleurs de thème dépend du jeu de couleurssélectionné). Après avoir modifié la couleur de police par défaut, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Automatique dans la fenêtre des palettes de couleurs pour restaurer rapidement la couleur automatique pour le fragment du texte sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des palettes de couleurs, consultez cette page." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme appropriée. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme. Nom de la police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante, les valeurs par défaut sont : 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police jusqu'à 300 pt. Appuyer sur la touche Entrée pour confirmer Augmenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Diminuer la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Modifier la casse Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres. MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres. Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot. Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte ou le mot sur lequel le curseur de la souris est positionné. Couleur de surlignage Est utilisé pour marquer des phrases, des fragments, des mots ou même des caractères séparés en ajoutant une bande de couleur qui imite l'effet du surligneur sur le texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner la partie voulue du texte, puis cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner une couleur dans la palette (cet ensemble de couleurs ne dépend pas du Jeux de couleurs sélectionné et comprend 16 couleurs). La couleur sera appliquée à la sélection. Alternativement, vous pouvez d'abord choisir une couleur de surbrillance et ensuite commencer à sélectionner le texte avec la souris - le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et vous serez en mesure de surligner plusieurs parties différentes de votre texte de manière séquentielle. Pour enlever la mise en surbrillance, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Pour effacer la couleur de surbrillance, choisissez l'option Pas de remplissage. La Couleur de surlignage est différente de la Couleur de fond car cette dernière est appliquée au paragraphe entier et remplit complètement l'espace du paragraphe de la marge de page gauche à la marge de page droite. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres /caractères dans le texte. Par défaut, la couleur de police automatique est définie dans un nouveau document vide. Elle s'affiche comme la police noire sur l'arrière-plan blanc. Si vous choisissez le noir comme la couleur d'arrière-plan, la couleur de la police se change automatiquement à la couleur blanche pour que le texte soit visible. Pour choisir une autre couleur, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône et sélectionnez une couleur disponible dans les palettes (les couleurs de la palette Couleurs de thème dépend du jeu de couleurs sélectionné). Après avoir modifié la couleur de police par défaut, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Automatique dans la fenêtre des palettes de couleurs pour restaurer rapidement la couleur automatique pour le fragment du texte sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des palettes de couleurs, consultez cette page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", "title": "Appliquer les styles de formatage", - "body": "Chaque style de mise en forme représente un ensemble des options de mise en forme : (taille de la police, couleur, interligne, alignment etc.). Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les styles permettent de mettre en forme rapidement les parties différentes du texte (en-têtes, sous-titres, listes,texte normal, citations) au lieu d'appliquer les options de mise en forme différentes individuellement chaque fois que vous en avez besoin. Cela permet également d'assurer une apparence uniforme de tout le document. Un style n'est appliqué au'au paragraphe entier. Vous pouvez appliquer les styles pour créer une table des matières ou une table des figures. Le style à appliquer depend du fait si c'est le paragraphe (normal, pas d'espace, titres, paragraphe de liste etc.) ou le texte (d'aprèz type, taille et couleur de police) que vous souhaitez mettre en forme. Différents styles sont aussi appliqués quand vous sélectionnez une partie du texte ou seulement placez le curseur sur un mot. Parfois, il faut sélectionner le style approprié deux fois de la bibliothèque de styles pour le faire appliquer correctement : lorsque vous appuyer sur le style dans le panneau pour la première fois, le style de paragraphe est appliqué. Lorsque vous appuyez pour la deuxième fois, le style du texte est appliqué. Appliquer des styles par défault Pour appliquer un des styles de mise en forme disponibles, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe nécessaire, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes pour appliquer un des styles de mise en forme, sélectionnez le style nécessaire à partir de la galerie de styles située à droite de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les styles de mise en forme disponibles sont : normal, non-espacemen, titre 1-9, title, sous-titre, citation, citation intense, paragraphe de liste. Modifier des styles disponibles et créer de nouveaux Pour modifier le style existant : Appliquez le style nécessaire à un paragraphe. Sélectionnez le texte du paragraphe et modifiez tous les paramètres de mise en forme dont vous avez besoin. Enregistrez les modifications effectuées : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte en cours de modification, sélectionnez l'option En tant que style et sélectionnez l'option Mettre à jour le style 'Nomdestyle' ('Nomdestyle' correspond au style appliqué à l'étape 1), ou sélectionnez le fragment du texte en cours de modification avec la souris, ouvrez le menu déroulant de la galerie des styles, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style à modifier et sélectionnez l'option Mettre à jour selon la sélection. Une fois que le style est modifié, tous les paragraphes dans le document qui a été mis en forme à l'aide de ce style vont changer leur apparence de manière correspondante. Pour créer un tout nouveau style : Mettez en forme un fragment du texte d'une manière nécessaire. Choisissez une façon appropriée de sauvegarder le style : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte en cours de modification, sélectionnez l'option En tant que style et puis choisissez l'option Créer un nouveau style, ou sélectionnez le fragment du texte à l'aide de la souris, ouvrez la liste déroulante de la galerie de styles et cliquez sur l'option Nouveau style à partir du fragment sélectionné. Définissez les paramètres du nouveau style dans la fenêtre Créer un nouveau style qui s'ouvre : Spécifiez un nom du nouveau style en utilisant le champ correspondant. Chosissez le style nécessaire du paragraphe suivant en utilisant la liste Style du nouveau paragraphe. Cliquez sur le bouton OK. Le style créé sera ajouté à la galerie des styles. Gérez vos styles personnalisés : Pour restaurer les paramètres par défaut d'un style que vous avez modifié, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style que vous voulez restaurer et sélectionnez l'option Restaurer les paramètres par défaut. Pour restaurer les paramètres par défaut de tous les styles que vous avez modifiés, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style dans la galerie des styles et sélectionnez l'option Restaurer tous les styles par défaut. Pour supprimer un des styles que vous avez créé, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style à supprimer et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer le style. Pour supprimer tous les nouveaux style que vous avez crées, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un des nouveaux styles crées et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer tous les styles personnalisés." + "body": "Chaque style de mise en forme représente un ensemble des options de mise en forme : (taille de la police, couleur, interligne, alignement etc.). Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les styles permettent de mettre en forme rapidement les parties différentes du texte (en-têtes, sous-titres, listes,texte normal, citations) au lieu d'appliquer les options de mise en forme différentes individuellement chaque fois que vous en avez besoin. Cela permet également d'assurer une apparence uniforme de tout le document. Un style n'est appliqué au'au paragraphe entier. Vous pouvez appliquer les styles pour créer une table des matières ou une table des figures. Le style à appliquer dépend du fait si c'est le paragraphe (normal, pas d'espace, titres, paragraphe de liste etc.) ou le texte (d'après type, taille et couleur de police) que vous souhaitez mettre en forme. Différents styles sont aussi appliqués quand vous sélectionnez une partie du texte ou seulement placez le curseur sur un mot. Parfois, il faut sélectionner le style approprié deux fois de la bibliothèque de styles pour le faire appliquer correctement : lorsque vous appuyer sur le style dans le panneau pour la première fois, le style de paragraphe est appliqué. Lorsque vous appuyez pour la deuxième fois, le style du texte est appliqué. Appliquer des styles par défaut Pour appliquer un des styles de mise en forme disponibles, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe nécessaire, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes pour appliquer un des styles de mise en forme, sélectionnez le style nécessaire à partir de la galerie de styles située à droite de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les styles de mise en forme disponibles sont : normal, non-espacement, titre 1-9, titre, sous-titre, citation, citation intense, paragraphe de liste. Modifier des styles disponibles et créer de nouveaux Pour modifier le style existant : Appliquez le style nécessaire à un paragraphe. Sélectionnez le texte du paragraphe et modifiez tous les paramètres de mise en forme dont vous avez besoin. Enregistrez les modifications effectuées : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte en cours de modification, sélectionnez l'option En tant que style et sélectionnez l'option Mettre à jour le style 'Nomdestyle' ('Nomdestyle' correspond au style appliqué à l'étape 1), ou sélectionnez le fragment du texte en cours de modification avec la souris, ouvrez le menu déroulant de la galerie des styles, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style à modifier et sélectionnez l'option Mettre à jour selon la sélection. Une fois que le style est modifié, tous les paragraphes dans le document qui a été mis en forme à l'aide de ce style vont changer leur apparence de manière correspondante. Pour créer un tout nouveau style : Mettez en forme un fragment du texte d'une manière nécessaire. Choisissez une façon appropriée de sauvegarder le style : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte en cours de modification, sélectionnez l'option En tant que style et puis choisissez l'option Créer un nouveau style, ou sélectionnez le fragment du texte à l'aide de la souris, ouvrez la liste déroulante de la galerie de styles et cliquez sur l'option Nouveau style à partir du fragment sélectionné. Définissez les paramètres du nouveau style dans la fenêtre Créer un nouveau style qui s'ouvre : Spécifiez un nom du nouveau style en utilisant le champ correspondant. Choisissez le style nécessaire du paragraphe suivant en utilisant la liste Style du nouveau paragraphe. Cliquez sur le bouton OK. Le style créé sera ajouté à la galerie des styles. Gérez vos styles personnalisés : Pour restaurer les paramètres par défaut d'un style que vous avez modifié, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style que vous voulez restaurer et sélectionnez l'option Restaurer les paramètres par défaut. Pour restaurer les paramètres par défaut de tous les styles que vous avez modifiés, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style dans la galerie des styles et sélectionnez l'option Restaurer tous les styles par défaut. Pour supprimer un des styles que vous avez créé, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le style à supprimer et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer le style. Pour supprimer tous les nouveaux style que vous avez crées, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un des nouveaux styles crées et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer tous les styles personnalisés." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/HTML.htm", "title": "Modifier le code HTML", - "body": "Si vous êtes en train d'écrire une page de site Web dans un éditeur de texte et souhaitez l'obtenir sous forme de code HTML, utilisez le plug-in HTML. Ouvrez l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Obtenir et coller du html. Sélectionnez le contenu nécessaire. Le code HTML du paragraphe sélectionné s'affiche dans le champ de module sur le panneau latéral gauche. Vous pouvez modifier le code pour modifier les caractéristiques du texte, par exemple la taille de la police ou la famille de la police etc. Cliquez sur Coller dans le document afin d'insérer le texte avec son code HTML modifié à la position actuelle du curseur dans votre document. Vous pouvez également ecrire votre propre code HTML (sans sélectionner le contenu du document) et ensuite le coller dans votre document. Pour plus d'informations sur le plug-in HTML et son installation, veuillez consulter la page de plug-in dans AppDirectory." + "body": "Si vous êtes en train d'écrire une page de site Web dans un éditeur de texte et souhaitez l'obtenir sous forme de code HTML, utilisez le plug-in HTML. Ouvrez l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Obtenir et coller du html. Sélectionnez le contenu nécessaire. Le code HTML du paragraphe sélectionné s'affiche dans le champ de module sur le panneau latéral gauche. Vous pouvez modifier le code pour modifier les caractéristiques du texte, par exemple la taille de la police ou la famille de la police etc. Cliquez sur Coller dans le document afin d'insérer le texte avec son code HTML modifié à la position actuelle du curseur dans votre document. Vous pouvez également écrire votre propre code HTML (sans sélectionner le contenu du document) et ensuite le coller dans votre document. Pour plus d'informations sur le plug-in HTML et son installation, veuillez consulter la page de plug-in dans AppDirectory." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", @@ -257,8 +272,8 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", - "title": "Insérer les formes automatiques", - "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour insérer une forme automatique à votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles dans la Galerie des formes : Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, après avoir ajouté la forme automatique vous pouvez modifier sa taille, sa position et ses propriétés. Remarque : pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Il est également possible d'ajouter une légende à la forme automatique. Pour en savoir plus sur le travail avec des légendes pour des formes automatiques, vous pouvez vous référer à cet article. Déplacer et redimensionner des formes automatiques Pour modifier la taille de la forme automatique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de la forme. Pour garder les proportions de la forme automatique sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier la position de la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme. Faites glisser la forme à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour déplacer la forme automatique de trois incréments, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement horizontallement / verticallement et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée lors du déplacement. Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Modifier les paramètres de la forme automatique Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Imprimer la sélection sert à imprimer la partie sélectionnée du document. Accepter / Rejeter les modifications sert à accepter ou rejeter des modifications suivies dans un document partagé. Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer. Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité. Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche, Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu. Organiser sert à placer la forme automatique choisie au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper les formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs formes à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner la forme à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Forme - Paramètres avancés'. Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir du jeux de couleurs disponible ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix : Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour remplir une forme avec deux ou plusieurs couleurs et créer une transition douce entre elles. Particulariser le remplissage en dégrédé sans limites. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme pour ouvrir le menu de Remplissage de la barre latérale droite : Les options de menu disponibles : Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire ou Radial : Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial - la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle. Point de dégradé est un points spécifique dans lequel se fait la transition dégradé de couleurs. Utiliser le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé dans la barre de défilement pour ajouter un dégradé. Le nombre maximal de points est 10. Chaque dégradé suivant n'affecte pas l'apparence du remplissage en dégradé actuel. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer le point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain dégradé. Ajustez la position du dégradé en glissant l'arrêt dans la barre de défilement ou utiliser le pourcentage de Position pour préciser l'emplacement du point. Pour appliquer une couleur à un point de dégradé, cliquez sur un point dans la barre de défilement, puis cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image enregistrée sur vortre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options : Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité - utilisez cette section pour régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Ligne - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du ligne de la forme automatique. Pour modifier la largeur du ligne, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de ligne. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Style d'habillage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante. Ajouter une ombre - cochez cette case pour affichage de la forme ombré. Adjuster les paramètres avancés d'une forme automatique Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre \"Forme - Paramètres avancés\" s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la largeur de la marge de gauche, la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges gauche et droite), la largeur de la page ou la largeur de la marge de droite. Hauteur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la hauteur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges supérieure et inférieure), la hauteur de la marge inférieure, la hauteur de la page ou la hauteur de la marge supérieure. Si l'option Verrouiller le ratio d'aspect est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la façon dont la forme est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). En ligne sur le texte - la forme fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, la forme est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de la forme. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur d'elle. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de la forme. Devant le texte - la forme est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur la forme. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si la forme automatique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel elle est alignée. Chevauchement détermine si deux formes automatiques sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants : Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : Type de litterine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc. : Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. La section Rembourrage texte vous permet de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau." + "title": "Insérer des formes automatiques", + "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour insérer une forme automatique dans l'éditeur de documents, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles depuis la Galerie de formes: Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, placez le curseur de la souris à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer la forme, une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. Remarque: pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi, si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Il est également possible d'ajouter une légende à la forme automatique. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des légendes avec des formes automatiques, veuillez consulter cet article. Déplacer et redimensionner des formes automatiques Pour modifier la taille de la forme automatique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de la forme. Pour garder les proportions de la forme automatique sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des Flèches figurées ou les Légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle vous permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier la position la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît lorsque vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme automatique. Faites glisser la forme automatique vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à la positionner sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que En ligne est sélectionné). Pour déplacer la forme automatique par incrément équivaut à un pixel, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement à l'horizontale/verticale et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée lors du glissement. Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, déplacez le curseur vers la poignée de rotation et faites la glisser dans le sens horaire ou antihoraire. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en faisant pivoter. Remarque: la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Copier la mise en forme du style de la forme automatique Pour copier la mise en forme du style d'une forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme automatique dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, cliquez l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci ), sélectionnez la forme automatique à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme. Ajuster les paramètres de la forme automatique Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes: Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Imprimer la sélection sert à imprimer la partie sélectionnée du document. Accepter / Rejeter les modifications sert à accepter ou rejeter des modifications suivies dans un document partagé. Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer. Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité. Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu. Organiser sert à placer la forme sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. . Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner la forme automatique à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu ou en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, veuillez consulter cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner l'un des styles d'habillage disponibles - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte, ou modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible que si le style d'habillage défini n'est pas En ligne. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme automatique de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme automatique horizontalement ou verticalement. Enregistrer en tant qu'image sert à sauvegarder la forme automatique en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur. Paramètres avancés de la forme automatique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés. Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur la forme automatique et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants: Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix: Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter une image À partir d'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur votre ordinateur ou À partir d'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Prolonger ou Tuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité sert à régler le niveau d'opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante. Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à une forme. Ajuster les paramètres avancés de la forme Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans menu contextuel ou cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés s'ouvrira: L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants: Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la largeur de la marge de gauche, la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges gauche et droite), la largeur de la page ou la largeur de la marge de droite. Hauteur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la hauteur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges supérieure et inférieure), la hauteur de la marge inférieure, la hauteur de la page ou la hauteur de la marge supérieure. Si l'option Verrouiller les proportions est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants: Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants: Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la façon dont la forme est positionnée par rapport au texte: elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style En ligne) ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un d'autres styles). En ligne - la forme fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, la forme est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez l'un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer la forme indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte: Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de la forme. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forma et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celle-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de la forme. Devant le texte - la forme s'affiche sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte recouvre la forme. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Cet onglet contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné: La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'une forme: Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'une forme: Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si la forme se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux formes sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants: Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants: Type de bouchon - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin du trait, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle: Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque: l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il est possible de définir le Style de début, le Style de fin et la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. L'onglet Zone de texte permet de modifier les marges intérieures de la forme En haut, En bas, À gauche, À droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque: cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information inclus dans la forme." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", @@ -268,23 +283,28 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insérer des graphiques", - "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans Document Editor, Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer un graphique. Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié: Graphique à colonnes Histogramme groupé Histogramme empilé Histogramme empilé 100 % Histogramme groupé en 3D Histogramme empilé en 3D Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D Histogrammes en 3D Graphiques en ligne Ligne Lignes empilées Lignes empilées 100 % Lignes avec marques de données Lignes empilées avec marques de données Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données Lignes 3D Graphiques en secteurs Secteurs Donut Camembert 3D Graphiques à barres Barres groupées Barres empilées Barres empilées 100 % Barres groupées en 3D Barres empilées en 3D Barres empilées 100 % en 3D Graphiques en aires Aires Aires empilées Aires empilées 100 % Graphiques boursiers Nuage de points (XY) Disperser Barres empilées Disperser avec lignes lissées et marqueurs Disperser avec lignes lissées Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs Disperser avec des lignes droites Graphiques Combo Histogramme groupé - lignes Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire Aires empilées - histogramme groupé Combinaison personnalisée Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles. Lorsque la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique s'affiche, vous pouvez saisir les données en utilisant des boutons suivants: et pour copier et coller des données et pour annuler et rétablir une action pour insérer une fonction et pour réduire et ajouter une décimale modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi pour modifier le type de graphique. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélection de données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche. Utiliser la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, la Série de la légende, le Nom de l'axe horizontal, et Changer de ligne ou de colonne. Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. Série de la légende - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. Dans la Série de la légende, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom. Nom de l'axe horizontal - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'axe horizontal cliquez sur Modifier. Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. Changer de ligne ou de colonne - modifier le façon de traçage des données dans la feuille de calcul. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Nuages de points (XY), Boursier. Lorsque vous choisissez Graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire. Paramétrer le graphique en cliquant sur Modifier le graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés s'affiche. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher de légende, Bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données): Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Centre, À gauche, À droite, En haut. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, Ligne, Barres et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre. Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur, Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur d'étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont disponibles sur les graphiques Combo uniquement. Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement. L'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal. Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires. Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical. Position de l'étiquette - est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduation ou Entre graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: Type principal/secondaire est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les marques - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories. Position de l'étiquette est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe. Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande. Intervalle entre les étiquettes - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du graphique si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Déplacer et redimensionner des graphiques Une fois le graphique ajouté, on peut également modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour changer la taille du graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position du graphique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur le graphique. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez le graphique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Remarque: la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou le style de décoration. Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage, le Trait et le Style d'habillage de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans le panneau droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, taille et type. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cette page. Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique. Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément. Pour modifier la position d'un élément, cliquez sur cet élément avec le bouton gauche de souris, vérifiez si le curseur est devenu , maintenez le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé et faites-le glisser vers la position souhaité. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Ajuster les paramètres du graphique Certains paramètres du graphique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres du graphique de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le graphique et sélectionne l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants: Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur du graphique actuel. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Changer le type de graphique permet de modifier le type et/ou le style du graphique sélectionné. Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique. Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. Remarque: pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique, vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes: Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. . Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte. L'option Modifier la limite d'habillage n'est pas disponible pour les graphiques. Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. Paramètres avancés du graphique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés. En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D: Rotation X - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe X en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Gauche et Droite. Rotation Y - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe Y en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Haut et Bas. Perspective - définissez la valeur appropriée de profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Rétrécir le champ ou Élargir le champ. Axes à angle droit sert à définir l'angle de l'axe à droite. Mise à l'échelle automatique - activez cette option pour mettre automatiquement à l'échelle la profondeur et la hauteur du graphique ou désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement la profondeur et la hauteur. Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. Veuillez noter qu'il n'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique à part, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur le graphique avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du graphique du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre de paramètres du graphique s'ouvre: L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants: Largeur et Hauteur utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants: Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont le graphique est positionné par rapport au texte: il peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style « aligné sur le texte ») ou être contourné par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). En ligne - le graphique fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer le graphique indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte: Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour du graphique. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas du graphique. Devant le texte - le graphique est affiché sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur le graphique. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Cet onglet contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné: La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants: Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants: Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si le graphique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux graphiques se chevauchent ou non si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique." + "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans l'éditeur de documents, Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer un graphique. Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié: Graphique à colonnes Histogramme groupé Histogramme empilé Histogramme empilé 100 % Histogramme groupé en 3D Histogramme empilé en 3D Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D Histogrammes en 3D Graphiques en ligne Ligne Lignes empilées Lignes empilées 100% Lignes avec marques de données Lignes empilées avec marques de données Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données Lignes 3D Graphiques en secteurs Secteurs Donut Camembert 3D Graphiques à barres Barres groupées Barres empilées Barres empilées 100 % Barres groupées en 3D Barres empilées en 3D Barres empilées 100 % en 3D Graphiques en aires Aires Aires empilées Aires empilées 100 % Graphiques boursiers Nuage de points (XY) Disperser Barres empilées Disperser avec lignes lissées et marqueurs Disperser avec lignes lissées Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs Disperser avec des lignes droites Radars Radar Radar avec marqueurs Radar plein Graphiques Combo Histogramme groupé - Courbe Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire Aires empilées - histogramme groupé Combinaison personnalisée Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles. Lorsque la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique s'affiche, vous pouvez saisir les données en utilisant des boutons suivants: et pour copier et coller des données et pour annuler et rétablir une action pour insérer une fonction et pour réduire et ajouter une décimale modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi pour modifier le type de graphique. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche. Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, les Entrées de légende (Série), le Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), et Intervertir ligne/colonne. Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. Entrées de légende (Série) - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. Dans Entrées de légende (Série), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Nom de la série. Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse) - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe. Dans Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), cliquez sur Modifier. Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. Intervertir ligne/colonne - réorganiser la configuration de données dans la feuille de calcul selon vos besoins. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Boursier, Nuages de points (XY), Radar, Combo. Lorsque vous choisissez graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire. Paramétrer le graphique en cliquant sur Modifier le graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés s'affiche. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Définissez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher la légende, En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données): Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, En bas à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, À droite, À gauche, En haut, En bas. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques En aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, En ligne, En barres, Radar et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre. Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de série, Nom de catégorie, Valeur, Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - sert à spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Veuillez noter que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - sert à déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - sert à afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. Échelle logarithmique - sert à activer l'échelle logarithmique pour la Base définie par l'utilisateur. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations, Bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont disponibles sur les graphiques Combo uniquement. Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement. L'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Veuillez noter que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun, Principal, Secondaire ou Principales et secondaires. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimale/maximale (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical. Position de l'axe - sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduations ou Entre graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - sert à afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: Type principale/secondaire - sert à spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les graduations - sert à spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories. Position de l'étiquette sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe. Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - sert à spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande. Intervalle entre les étiquettes - sert à spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. L'onglet Accrochage à la cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du graphique si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Déplacer et redimensionner des graphiques Une fois le graphique ajouté, on peut également modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour changer la taille du graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position du graphique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur le graphique. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez le graphique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Remarque: la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou le style de décoration. Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et le Ligne de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme sur le panneau de droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, largeur, taille et opacité. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cette page. Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique. Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément. Pour modifier la position d'un élément, cliquez sur cet élément avec le bouton gauche de souris, vérifiez si le curseur est devenu , maintenez le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé et faites-le glisser vers la position souhaité. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Ajuster les paramètres du graphique Certains paramètres du graphique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres du graphique de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le graphique et sélectionne l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants: Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur du graphique actuel. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Changer le type de graphique permet de modifier le type et/ou le style du graphique sélectionné. Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique. Modifier les données sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. Remarque: pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique, vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes: Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. . Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte. L'option Modifier la limite d'habillage n'est pas disponible pour les graphiques. Modifier les données sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. Paramètres avancés du graphique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés. En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D: Rotation X - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe X en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Gauche et Droite. Rotation Y - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe Y en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Haut et Bas. Perspective - définissez la valeur appropriée de profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Rétrécir le champ ou Élargir le champ. Axes à angle droit sert à définir l'angle de l'axe à droite. Mise à l'échelle automatique - activez cette option pour mettre automatiquement à l'échelle la profondeur et la hauteur du graphique ou désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement la profondeur et la hauteur. Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. Veuillez noter que c'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur le graphique avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du graphique du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre de paramètres du graphique s'ouvre: L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants: Largeur et Hauteur utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants: Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont le graphique est positionné par rapport au texte: il peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style « aligné sur le texte ») ou être contourné par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). En ligne - le graphique fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer le graphique indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte: Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour du graphique. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas du graphique. Devant le texte - le graphique est affiché sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur le graphique. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Cet onglet contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné: La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants: Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants: Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si le graphique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux graphiques se chevauchent ou non si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "title": "Insérer des contrôles de contenu", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE permet d'ajouter les contrôles de contenu traditionnels, c'est à dire les contrôles qui sont entièrement rétrocompatible avec les éditeurs alternatifs tels que Microsoft Word. Actuellement, l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les contrôles de contenu traditionnels tels que Texte brut, Texte enrichi, Image, Zone de liste déroulante, Liste déroulante, Date, Case à cocher. Texte brut est le texte comportant un objet qui ne peut pas être modifié. C'est seulement un paragraphe que le contrôle en texte brut peut contenir. Texte enrichi est le texte comportant un objet qui peut être modifié. Les contrôles en texte enrichi peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes, listes et objets (images, formes, tableaux etc.). Image est un objet comportant une image. Zone de liste déroulante est un objet comportant une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix. Ce contrôle permet de choisir une valeur prédéfinie et la modifier au besoin. Liste déroulante est un objet comportant une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix. Ce contrôle permet de choisir une valeur prédéfinie. La valeur choisie ne peut pas être modifiée. Date est l'objet comportant le calendrier qui permet de choisir une date. Case à cocher est un objet permettant d'afficher deux options : la case cochée et la case décochée. Ajouter des contrôles de contenu Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte brut positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un passage de texte que vous souhaitez transformer en contrôle du contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu en texte brut dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré au point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte existant. Tapez votre texte à remplacer du texte par défaut à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu (Votre texte ici) : sélectionnez le texte par défaut et tapez du texte approprié ou copiez le texte que vous voulez et collez le à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Les contrôles de contenu de texte brut ne permettent pas l'ajout de sauts de ligne et ne peuvent pas contenir d'autres objets tels que des images, des tableaux, etc. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte enrichi positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un passage de texte que vous souhaitez transformer en contrôle du contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu en texte enrichi dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré dans un nouveau paragraphe du texte. Tapez votre texte à remplacer du texte par défaut à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu (Votre texte ici) : sélectionnez le texte par défaut et tapez du texte approprié ou copiez le texte que vous voulez et collez le à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi permettent d'ajouter des sauts de ligne, c'est-à-dire peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes ainsi que certains objets, tels que des images, des tableaux, d'autres contrôles de contenu, etc. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu d'image positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Image dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez sur l'icône Image dans le bouton au dessus de la bordure du contrôle de contenu, la fenêtre de sélection standard va apparaître. Choisissez l'image stockée sur votre ordinateur et cliquez sur Ouvrir. L'image choisie sera affichée à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Pour remplacer l'image, cliquez sur l'icône d'image dans le bouton au dessus de la bordure du contrôle de contenu et sélectionnez une autre image. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu Zone de liste déroulante ou Liste déroulante Zone de liste déroulante et la Liste déroulante sont des objets comportant une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix. Ces contrôles de contenu sont crées de la même façon. La différence entre les contrôles Zone de liste déroulante et Liste déroulante est que la liste déroulante propose des choix que vous êtes obligé de sélectionner tandis que la Zone de liste déroulante accepte la saisie d'un autre élément. positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle de contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Zone de liste déroulante et Liste déroulante dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu ajouté et sélectionnez Paramètres du contrôle de contenu du menu contextuel. dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu qui s'ouvre, passez à l'onglet Zone de liste déroulante ou Liste déroulante en fonction du type de contrôle de contenu sélectionné. pour ajouter un nouveau élément à la liste, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter et remplissez les rubriques disponibles dans la fenêtre qui s'ouvre : saisissez le texte approprié dans le champ Nom d'affichage, par exemple, Oui, Non, Autre option. Ce texte sera affiché à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu dans le document. par défaut le texte du champ Valeur coïncide avec celui-ci du champ Nom d'affichage. Si vous souhaitez modifier le texte du champ Valeur, veuillez noter que la valeur doit être unique pour chaque élément. Cliquez sur OK. les boutons Modifier et Effacer à droite servent à modifier ou supprimer les éléments de la liste et les boutons En haut et Bas à changer l'ordre d'affichage des éléments. Une fois les paramètres configurés, cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer la configuration et fermer la fenêtre. Vous pouvez cliquez sur la flèche à droite du contrôle de contenu Zone de liste déroulante ou Liste déroulante ajouté pour ouvrir la liste et sélectionner l'élément approprié. Une fois sélectionné dans la Zone de liste déroulante, on peut modifier le texte affiché en saisissant propre texte partiellement ou entièrement. La Liste déroulante ne permet pas la saisie d'un autre élément. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu sélecteur des dates positionnez le point d'insertion dans le texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle de contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Date dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu indiquant la date actuelle sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu ajouté et sélectionnez Paramètres du contrôle de contenu du menu contextuel. dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu, passez à l'onglet Format de date. Sélectionnez la Langue et le format de date appropriée dans la liste Afficher le date comme suit. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Vous pouvez cliquez sur la flèche à droite du contrôle de contenu Date ajouté pour ouvrir le calendrier et sélectionner la date appropriée. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de case à cocher positionnez le point d'insertion dans le texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle de contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Case à cocher dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu ajouté et sélectionnez Paramètres du contrôle de contenu du menu contextuel. dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu, passez à l'onglet Case à cocher. cliquez sur le bouton Symbole Activé pour spécifier le symbole indiquant la case cochée ou le Symbole Désactivé pour spécifier la façon d'afficher la case décochée. La fenêtre Symbole s'ouvre. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Une fois les paramètres configurés, cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer la configuration et fermer la fenêtre. La case à cocher s'affiche désactivée. Une fois que vous cliquiez la case à cocher, le symbole qu'on a spécifié comme le Symbole Activé est inséré. Remarque : La bordure du contrôle de contenu est visible uniquement lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné. Les bordures n'apparaissent pas sur une version imprimée. Déplacer des contrôles de contenu Les contrôles peuvent être déplacés à un autre endroit du document : cliquez sur le bouton à gauche de la bordure de contrôle pour sélectionner le contrôle et faites-le glisser sans relâcher le bouton de la souris à un autre endroit dans le texte du document. Vous pouvez également copier et coller des contrôles de contenu : sélectionnez le contrôle voulu et utilisez les combinaisons de touches Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V. Modifier des contrôles de contenu en texte brut et en texte enrichi On peut modifier le texte à l'intérieur des contrôles de contenu en texte brut et en texte enrichi à l'aide des icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure : vous pouvez ajuster le type, la taille et la couleur de police, appliquer des styles de décoration et les configurations de mise en forme. Il est également possible d'utiliser la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés accessible depuis le menu contextuel ou depuis la barre latérale de droite pour modifier les propriétés du texte. Le texte contenu dans les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi peut être mis en forme comme un texte normal du document, c'est-à-dire que vous pouvez définir l'interlignage, modifier les retraits de paragraphe, ajuster les taquets de tabulation, etc. Modification des paramètres de contrôle du contenu Quel que soit le type du contrôle de contenu, on peut configurer ses paramètres sous les onglets Général et Verrouillage dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu. Pour ouvrir les paramètres de contrôle du contenu, vous pouvez procéder de la manière suivante : Sélectionnez le contrôle de contenu nécessaire, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de contrôle du menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans le contrôle de contenu et utilisez l'option Paramètres de contrôle du contenu dans le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira. Sous l'onglet Général vous pouvez configurer les paramètres suivants : Spécifiez le Titre, l'Espace réservé ou le Tag dans les champs correspondants. Le titre s'affiche lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné dans le document. L'espace réservé est le texte principal qui s'affiche à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Les Tags sont utilisées pour identifier les contrôles de contenu afin que vous puissiez y faire référence dans votre code. Choisissez si vous voulez afficher le contrôle de contenu avec une Boîte d'encombrement ou non. Utilisez l'option Aucun pour afficher le contrôle sans aucune boîte d'encombrement. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Boîte d'encombrement, vous pouvez choisir la Couleur de la boîte à l'aide du champ ci-dessous. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tous pour appliquer les paramètres d'Apparence spécifiés à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Sous l'onglet Verrouillage vous pouvez empêchez toute suppression ou modifcation du contrôle de contenu en utilisant les paramètres suivants : Le contrôle du contenu ne peut pas être supprimé - cochez cette case pour empêcher la suppression du contrôle de contenu. Le contenu ne peut pas être modifié - cochez cette case pour protéger le contenu du contrôle de contenu contre une modification. Sous le troisième onglet on peut configurer les paramètres spécifiques de certain type du contrôle de contenu, comme : Zone de liste déroulante, Liste déroulante, Date, Case à cocher. Tous ces paramètres ont déjà été décrits ci-dessus dans la section appropriée à chaque contrôle de contenu. Cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la fenêtre des paramètres pour appliquer les changements. Il est également possible de surligner les contrôles de contenu avec une certaine couleur. Pour surligner les contrôles avec une couleur : Cliquez sur le bouton situé à gauche de la bordure du champ pour sélectionner le contrôle, Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de surbrillance du menu, Sélectionnez la couleur souhaitée dans les palettes disponibles : Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou spécifiez une nouvelle Couleur personnalisée. Pour supprimer la surbrillance des couleurs précédemment appliquée, utilisez l'option Pas de surbrillance. Les options de surbrillance sélectionnées seront appliquées à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Supprimer des contrôles de contenu Pour supprimer un contrôle et laisser tout son contenu, cliquez sur le contrôle de contenu pour le sélectionner, puis procédez de l'une des façons suivantes : Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer le contrôle du contenu dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu et utilisez l'option Supprimer le contrôle du contenu dans le menu contextuel. Pour supprimer un contrôle et tout son contenu, sélectionnez le contrôle nécessaire et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE permet d'ajouter les contrôles de contenu traditionnels, c'est à dire les contrôles qui sont entièrement rétrocompatible avec les éditeurs alternatifs tels que Microsoft Word. Actuellement, l'Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les contrôles de contenu traditionnels tels que Texte brut, Texte enrichi, Image, Zone de liste déroulante, Liste déroulante, Date, Case à cocher. Texte brut est le texte comportant un objet qui ne peut pas être modifié. C'est seulement un paragraphe que le contrôle en texte brut peut contenir. Texte enrichi est le texte comportant un objet qui peut être modifié. Les contrôles en texte enrichi peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes, listes et objets (images, formes, tableaux etc.). Image est un objet comportant une image. Zone de liste déroulante est un objet comportant une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix. Ce contrôle permet de choisir une valeur prédéfinie et la modifier au besoin. Liste déroulante est un objet comportant une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix. Ce contrôle permet de choisir une valeur prédéfinie. La valeur choisie ne peut pas être modifiée. Date est l'objet comportant le calendrier qui permet de choisir une date. Case à cocher est un objet permettant d'afficher deux options : la case cochée et la case décochée. Ajouter des contrôles de contenu Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte brut positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un passage de texte que vous souhaitez transformer en contrôle du contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu en texte brut dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré au point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte existant. Tapez votre texte à remplacer du texte par défaut à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu (Votre texte ici) : sélectionnez le texte par défaut et tapez du texte approprié ou copiez le texte que vous voulez et collez le à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Les contrôles de contenu de texte brut ne permettent pas l'ajout de sauts de ligne et ne peuvent pas contenir d'autres objets tels que des images, des tableaux, etc. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte enrichi positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un passage de texte que vous souhaitez transformer en contrôle du contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu en texte enrichi dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré dans un nouveau paragraphe du texte. Tapez votre texte à remplacer du texte par défaut à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu (Votre texte ici) : sélectionnez le texte par défaut et tapez du texte approprié ou copiez le texte que vous voulez et collez le à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi permettent d'ajouter des sauts de ligne, c'est-à-dire peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes ainsi que certains objets, tels que des images, des tableaux, d'autres contrôles de contenu, etc. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu d'image positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Image dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez sur l'icône Image dans le bouton au dessus de la bordure du contrôle de contenu, la fenêtre de sélection standard va apparaître. Choisissez l'image stockée sur votre ordinateur et cliquez sur Ouvrir. L'image choisie sera affichée à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Pour remplacer l'image, cliquez sur l'icône d'image dans le bouton au dessus de la bordure du contrôle de contenu et sélectionnez une autre image. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu Zone de liste déroulante ou Liste déroulante Zone de liste déroulante et la Liste déroulante sont des objets comportant une liste déroulante avec un ensemble de choix. Ces contrôles de contenu sont crées de la même façon. La différence entre les contrôles Zone de liste déroulante et Liste déroulante est que la liste déroulante propose des choix que vous êtes obligé de sélectionner tandis que la Zone de liste déroulante accepte la saisie d'un autre élément. positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle de contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Zone de liste déroulante et Liste déroulante dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu ajouté et sélectionnez Paramètres du contrôle de contenu du menu contextuel. dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu qui s'ouvre, passez à l'onglet Zone de liste déroulante ou Liste déroulante en fonction du type de contrôle de contenu sélectionné. pour ajouter un nouveau élément à la liste, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter et remplissez les rubriques disponibles dans la fenêtre qui s'ouvre : saisissez le texte approprié dans le champ Nom d'affichage, par exemple, Oui, Non, Autre option. Ce texte sera affiché à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu dans le document. par défaut le texte du champ Valeur coïncide avec celui-ci du champ Nom d'affichage. Si vous souhaitez modifier le texte du champ Valeur, veuillez noter que la valeur doit être unique pour chaque élément. Cliquez sur OK. les boutons Modifier et Effacer à droite servent à modifier ou supprimer les éléments de la liste et les boutons En haut et Bas à changer l'ordre d'affichage des éléments. Une fois les paramètres configurés, cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer la configuration et fermer la fenêtre. Vous pouvez cliquez sur la flèche à droite du contrôle de contenu Zone de liste déroulante ou Liste déroulante ajouté pour ouvrir la liste et sélectionner l'élément approprié. Une fois sélectionné dans la Zone de liste déroulante, on peut modifier le texte affiché en saisissant propre texte partiellement ou entièrement. La Liste déroulante ne permet pas la saisie d'un autre élément. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu sélecteur des dates positionnez le point d'insertion dans le texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle de contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Date dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu indiquant la date actuelle sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu ajouté et sélectionnez Paramètres du contrôle de contenu du menu contextuel. dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu, passez à l'onglet Format de date. Sélectionnez la Langue et le format de date appropriée dans la liste Afficher le date comme suit. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Vous pouvez cliquez sur la flèche à droite du contrôle de contenu Date ajouté pour ouvrir le calendrier et sélectionner la date appropriée. Créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de case à cocher positionnez le point d'insertion dans le texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle de contenu. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Case à cocher dans le menu et le contrôle de contenu sera inséré au point d'insertion. cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu ajouté et sélectionnez Paramètres du contrôle de contenu du menu contextuel. dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu, passez à l'onglet Case à cocher. cliquez sur le bouton Symbole Activé pour spécifier le symbole indiquant la case cochée ou le Symbole Désactivé pour spécifier la façon d'afficher la case décochée. La fenêtre Symbole s'ouvre. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Une fois les paramètres configurés, cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer la configuration et fermer la fenêtre. La case à cocher s'affiche désactivée. Une fois que vous cliquiez la case à cocher, le symbole qu'on a spécifié comme le Symbole Activé est inséré. Remarque : La bordure du contrôle de contenu est visible uniquement lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné. Les bordures n'apparaissent pas sur une version imprimée. Déplacer des contrôles de contenu Les contrôles peuvent être déplacés à un autre endroit du document : cliquez sur le bouton à gauche de la bordure de contrôle pour sélectionner le contrôle et faites-le glisser sans relâcher le bouton de la souris à un autre endroit dans le texte du document. Vous pouvez également copier et coller des contrôles de contenu : sélectionnez le contrôle voulu et utilisez les combinaisons de touches Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V. Modifier des contrôles de contenu en texte brut et en texte enrichi On peut modifier le texte à l'intérieur des contrôles de contenu en texte brut et en texte enrichi à l'aide des icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure : vous pouvez ajuster le type, la taille et la couleur de police, appliquer des styles de décoration et les configurations de mise en forme. Il est également possible d'utiliser la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés accessible depuis le menu contextuel ou depuis la barre latérale de droite pour modifier les propriétés du texte. Le texte contenu dans les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi peut être mis en forme comme un texte normal du document, c'est-à-dire que vous pouvez définir l'interlignage, modifier les retraits de paragraphe, ajuster les taquets de tabulation, etc. Modification des paramètres de contrôle du contenu Quel que soit le type du contrôle de contenu, on peut configurer ses paramètres sous les onglets Général et Verrouillage dans la fenêtre Paramètres du contrôle de contenu. Pour ouvrir les paramètres de contrôle du contenu, vous pouvez procéder de la manière suivante : Sélectionnez le contrôle de contenu nécessaire, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de contrôle du menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans le contrôle de contenu et utilisez l'option Paramètres de contrôle du contenu dans le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira. Sous l'onglet Général vous pouvez configurer les paramètres suivants : Spécifiez le Titre, l'Espace réservé ou le Tag dans les champs correspondants. Le titre s'affiche lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné dans le document. L'espace réservé est le texte principal qui s'affiche à l'intérieur du contrôle de contenu. Les Tags sont utilisées pour identifier les contrôles de contenu afin que vous puissiez y faire référence dans votre code. Choisissez si vous voulez afficher le contrôle de contenu avec une Boîte d'encombrement ou non. Utilisez l'option Aucun pour afficher le contrôle sans aucune boîte d'encombrement. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Boîte d'encombrement, vous pouvez choisir la Couleur de la boîte à l'aide du champ ci-dessous. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tous pour appliquer les paramètres d'Apparence spécifiés à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Sous l'onglet Verrouillage vous pouvez empêchez toute suppression ou modification du contrôle de contenu en utilisant les paramètres suivants : Le contrôle du contenu ne peut pas être supprimé - cochez cette case pour empêcher la suppression du contrôle de contenu. Le contenu ne peut pas être modifié - cochez cette case pour protéger le contenu du contrôle de contenu contre une modification. Sous le troisième onglet on peut configurer les paramètres spécifiques de certain type du contrôle de contenu, comme : Zone de liste déroulante, Liste déroulante, Date, Case à cocher. Tous ces paramètres ont déjà été décrits ci-dessus dans la section appropriée à chaque contrôle de contenu. Cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la fenêtre des paramètres pour appliquer les changements. Il est également possible de surligner les contrôles de contenu avec une certaine couleur. Pour surligner les contrôles avec une couleur : Cliquez sur le bouton situé à gauche de la bordure du champ pour sélectionner le contrôle, Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de surbrillance du menu, Sélectionnez la couleur souhaitée dans les palettes disponibles : Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou spécifiez une nouvelle Couleur personnalisée. Pour supprimer la surbrillance des couleurs précédemment appliquée, utilisez l'option Pas de surbrillance. Les options de surbrillance sélectionnées seront appliquées à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Supprimer des contrôles de contenu Pour supprimer un contrôle et laisser tout son contenu, cliquez sur le contrôle de contenu pour le sélectionner, puis procédez de l'une des façons suivantes : Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer le contrôle du contenu dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le contrôle de contenu et utilisez l'option Supprimer le contrôle du contenu dans le menu contextuel. Pour supprimer un contrôle et tout son contenu, sélectionnez le contrôle nécessaire et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCrossReference.htm", "title": "Insertion de renvoi", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les renvois permettent de créer les liens vers d'autres parties du même document telles que les diagrammes ou les tableaux. Le renvoi apparaît sous la forme d'un lien hypertexte. Créer un renvoi Positionnez le curseur dans le texte à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer un renvoi. Passez à l'onglet Références et cliquez sur l'icône Renvoi. Paramétrez le renvoi dans la fenêtre contextuelle Renvoi. Dans la liste déroulante Type de référence spécifiez l'élément vers lequel on veut renvoyer, par exemple, l'objet numéroté (option par défaut), en-tête, signet, note de bas de page, note de fin, équation, figure, et tableau. Sélectionnez l'élément approprié. Dans la liste Insérer la référence à spécifiez les informations que vous voulez insérer dans le document. Votre choix dépend de la nature des éléments que vous avez choisi dans la liste Type de référence. Par exemple, pour l'option En-tête on peut spécifier les informations suivantes : Texte de l'en-tête, Numéro de page, Numéro de l'en-tête, Numéro de l'en-tête (pas de contexte), Numéro de l'en-tête (contexte global), Au-dessus/au-dessous. La liste complète des options dépend du type de référence choisi : Type de référence Insérer la référence à Description Objet numéroté Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page du l'objet numéroté Numéro de paragraphe Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe du l'objet numéroté Numéro de paragraphe (pas de contexte) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe abrégé. On fait la référence à un élément spécifique de la liste numérotée, par exemple vous faites une référence seulement à 1 au lieu de 4.1.1. Numéro de paragraphe (contexte global) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe complet, par exemple 4.1.1. Texte du paragraphe Pour insérer la valeur textuelle du paragraphe, par exemple pour 4.1.1. Conditions générales on fait référence seulement à Conditions générales Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. En-tête Texte de l'en-tête Pour insérer le texte complet de l'en-tête Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page d'un en-tête Numéro de l'en-tête Pour insérer la numérotation consécutive de l'en-tête Numéro de l'en-tête (pas de contexte) Pour insérer le numéro de l'en-tête abrégé. Assurez-vous de placer le curseur dans la section à laquelle vous souhaiter faire une référence, par exemple, vous êtes dans la section 4 et vous souhaiter faire référence à l'en-tête 4.B alors au lieu de 4.B s'affiche seulement B. Numéro de l'en-tête (contexte global) Pour insérer le numéro de l'en-tête complet même si le curseur est dans la même section Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Signet Le texte du signet Pour insérer le texte complet du signet Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page du signet Numéro de paragraphe Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe du signet Numéro de paragraphe (pas de contexte) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe abrégé. On fait la référence seulement à un élément spécifique, par exemple vous faites une référence seulement à 1 au lieu de 4.1.1. Numéro de paragraphe (contexte global) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe complet, par exemple 4.1.1. Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Note de bas de page Numéro de la note de bas de page Pour insérer le numéro de la note de bas de page Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page de la note de bas de page Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Le numéro de la note de bas de page (mis en forme) Pour insérer le numéro de la note de bas de page mis en forme d'une note de bas de page. La numérotation de notes de bas de page existantes n'est pas affectée Note de fin Le numéro de la note de fin Pour insérer le numéro de la note de fin Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page de la note de fin Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Le numéro de la note de fin (mis en forme) Pour insérer le numéro de la note de fin mis en forme d'une note de fin. La numérotation de notes de fin existantes n'est pas affectée Équation / Figure / Tableau La légende complète Pour insérer le texte complet de la légende Seulement l'étiquette et le numéro Pour insérer l'étiquette et le numéro de l'objet, par exemple, Tableau 1.1 Seulement le texte de la légende Pour insérer seulement le texte de la légende Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de la page comportant du l'objet référencé Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Pour faire apparaître une référence comme un lien actif, cochez la case Insérer en tant que lien hypertexte. Pour spécifier la position de l'élément référencé, cochez la case Inclure au-dessus/au-dessous (si disponible). Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE insère automatiquement des mots “au-dessus” ou “au-dessous” en fonction de la position de l'élément. Pour spécifier le séparateur, cochez la case à droite Séparer les numéros avec. Il faut spécifier le séparateur pour les références dans le contexte global. Dans la zone Pour quel en-tête choisissez l'élément spécifique auquel renvoyer en fonction de la Type référence choisi, par exemple : pour l'option En-tête on va afficher la liste complète des en-têtes dans ce document. Pour créer le renvoi cliquez sur Insérer. Supprimer des renvois Pour supprimer un renvoi, sélectionnez le renvoi que vous souhaitez supprimer et appuyez sur la touche Suppr." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, les renvois permettent de créer les liens vers d'autres parties du même document telles que les diagrammes ou les tableaux. Le renvoi apparaît sous la forme d'un lien hypertexte. Créer un renvoi Positionnez le curseur dans le texte à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer un renvoi. Passez à l'onglet Références et cliquez sur l'icône Renvoi. Paramétrez le renvoi dans la fenêtre contextuelle Renvoi. Dans la liste déroulante Type de référence spécifiez l'élément vers lequel on veut renvoyer, par exemple, l'objet numéroté (option par défaut), en-tête, signet, note de bas de page, note de fin, équation, figure et tableau. Sélectionnez l'élément approprié. Dans la liste Insérer la référence à spécifiez les informations que vous voulez insérer dans le document. Votre choix dépend de la nature des éléments que vous avez choisi dans la liste Type de référence. Par exemple, pour l'option En-tête on peut spécifier les informations suivantes : Texte de l'en-tête, Numéro de page, Numéro de l'en-tête, Numéro de l'en-tête (pas de contexte), Numéro de l'en-tête (contexte global), Au-dessus/au-dessous. La liste complète des options dépend du type de référence choisi : Type de référence Insérer la référence à Description Objet numéroté Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page du l'objet numéroté Numéro de paragraphe Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe du l'objet numéroté Numéro de paragraphe (pas de contexte) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe abrégé. On fait la référence à un élément spécifique de la liste numérotée, par exemple vous faites une référence seulement à 1 au lieu de 4.1.1. Numéro de paragraphe (contexte global) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe complet, par exemple 4.1.1. Texte du paragraphe Pour insérer la valeur textuelle du paragraphe, par exemple pour 4.1.1. Conditions générales on fait référence seulement à Conditions générales Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. En-tête Texte de l'en-tête Pour insérer le texte complet de l'en-tête Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page d'un en-tête Numéro de l'en-tête Pour insérer la numérotation consécutive de l'en-tête Numéro de l'en-tête (pas de contexte) Pour insérer le numéro de l'en-tête abrégé. Assurez-vous de placer le curseur dans la section à laquelle vous souhaiter faire une référence, par exemple, vous êtes dans la section 4 et vous souhaiter faire référence à l'en-tête 4.B alors au lieu de 4.B s'affiche seulement B. Numéro de l'en-tête (contexte global) Pour insérer le numéro de l'en-tête complet même si le curseur est dans la même section Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Signet Le texte du signet Pour insérer le texte complet du signet Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page du signet Numéro de paragraphe Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe du signet Numéro de paragraphe (pas de contexte) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe abrégé. On fait la référence seulement à un élément spécifique, par exemple vous faites une référence seulement à 1 au lieu de 4.1.1. Numéro de paragraphe (contexte global) Pour insérer le numéro de paragraphe complet, par exemple 4.1.1. Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Note de bas de page Numéro de la note de bas de page Pour insérer le numéro de la note de bas de page Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page de la note de bas de page Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Le numéro de la note de bas de page (mis en forme) Pour insérer le numéro de la note de bas de page mis en forme d'une note de bas de page. La numérotation de notes de bas de page existantes n'est pas affectée Note de fin Le numéro de la note de fin Pour insérer le numéro de la note de fin Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de page de la note de fin Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Le numéro de la note de fin (mis en forme) Pour insérer le numéro de la note de fin mis en forme d'une note de fin. La numérotation de notes de fin existantes n'est pas affectée Équation / Figure / Tableau La légende complète Pour insérer le texte complet de la légende Seulement l'étiquette et le numéro Pour insérer l'étiquette et le numéro de l'objet, par exemple, Tableau 1.1 Seulement le texte de la légende Pour insérer seulement le texte de la légende Numéro de page Pour insérer le numéro de la page comportant du l'objet référencé Au-dessus/au-dessous Pour insérer automatiquement des mots Au-dessus ou Au-dessous en fonction de la position de l'élément. Pour faire apparaître une référence comme un lien actif, cochez la case Insérer en tant que lien hypertexte. Pour spécifier la position de l'élément référencé, cochez la case Inclure au-dessus/au-dessous (si disponible). Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE insère automatiquement des mots “au-dessus” ou “au-dessous” en fonction de la position de l'élément. Pour spécifier le séparateur, cochez la case à droite Séparer les numéros avec. Il faut spécifier le séparateur pour les références dans le contexte global. Dans la zone Pour quel en-tête choisissez l'élément spécifique auquel renvoyer en fonction de la Type référence choisi, par exemple : pour l'option En-tête on va afficher la liste complète des en-têtes dans ce document. Pour créer le renvoi cliquez sur Insérer. Supprimer des renvois Pour supprimer un renvoi, sélectionnez le renvoi que vous souhaitez supprimer et appuyez sur la touche Suppr." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm", "title": "Insérer la date et l'heure", "body": "Pour insérer la Date et l'heure dans l'Éditeur de Documents, placer le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer la Date et heure, passez à l'onglet Insérer dans la barre d'outils en haut, cliquez sur l'icône Date et heure dans la barre d'outils en haut, dans la fenêtre Date et l'heure qui s'affiche, configurez les paramètres, comme suit : Sélectionnez la langue visée. Sélectionnez le format parmi ceux proposés. Cochez la case Mettre à jour automatiquement en tant que la date et l'heure sont automatiquement mis à jour. Remarque : Si vous préférez mettre à jour la date et l'heure manuellement, vous pouvez utiliser l'option de Mettre à jour dans le menu contextuel. Sélectionnez l'option Définir par défaut pour utiliser ce format par défaut pour cette langue. Cliquez sur OK." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", + "title": "Insérer une lettrine", + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, une Lettrine est une lettre initiale majuscule placée au début d'un paragraphe ou d'une section. La taille d'une lettrine est généralement plusieurs lignes. Pour ajouter une lettrine, placez le curseur à l'intérieur du paragraphe dans lequel vous voulez insérer une lettrine, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Lettrine sur la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante : Dans le texte - pour insérer une lettrine dans le paragraphe. Dans la marge - pour placer une lettrine dans la marge gauche. La lettre initiale du paragraphe sélectionné sera transformée en une lettrine. Si vous avez besoin d'ajouter quelques lettres, vous pouvez le faire manuellement : sélectionnez la lettrine et tapez les lettres nécessaires. Pour régler l'apparence de la lettrine (par exemple, taille de police, type, style de décoration ou couleur), sélectionnez la lettre et utilisez les icônes correspondantes sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure. La lettrine sélectionnée est entourée par un cadre (un conteneur utilisé pour positionner la lettrine sur la page). Vous pouvez facilement changer la taille du cadre en faisant glisser ses bordures ou changer sa position en utilisant l'icône qui apparaît si vous positionnez le curseur sur le cadre. Pour supprimer la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône Lettrine sous l'onglet Insérer sur la barre d'outils supérieure et choisissez l'option Aucune dans la liste déroulante. Pour modifier les paramètres de la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône Lettrine sous l'onglet Insérer sur la barre d'outils supérieure et choisissez l'option Paramètres de la lettrine dans la liste déroulante. La fenêtre Lettrine - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Lettrine vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants : Position sert à changer l'emplacement de la lettrine. Sélectionnez l'option Dans le texte ou Dans la marge, ou cliquez sur Aucune pour supprimer la lettrine. Police sert à sélectionner la police dans la liste des polices disponibles. Hauteur des lignes sert à spécifier le nombre des lignes occupées par la lettrine. Il est possible de sélectionner de 1 à 10 lignes. Distance du texte sert à spécifier l'espace entre le texte du paragraphe et la bordure droite du cadre qui entoure la lettrine. L'onglet Bordures et remplissage vous permet d'ajouter une bordure autour de la lettrine et de régler ses paramètres. Ils sont les suivants : Paramètres de la Bordure (taille, couleur, sa présence ou absence) - définissez la taille des bordures, sélectionnez leur couleur et choisissez les bordures auxquelles (en haut, en bas, à gauche, à droite ou quelques unes à la fois) vous voulez appliquer ces paramètres. Couleur d'arrière-plan - choisissez la couleur pour l'arrière-plan de la lettrine. L'onglet Marges vous permet de définir la distance entre la lettrine et les bordures En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite autour d'elle (si les bordures ont été préalablement ajoutées). Après avoir ajouté la lettrine vous pouvez également changer les paramètres du Cadre. Pour y accéder, cliquez droit à l'intérieur du cadre et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancées du cadre du menu contextuel. La fenêtre Cadre - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Cadre vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants : Position sert à sélectionner une des styles d'habillage Aligné ou Flottant. Ou vous pouvez cliquer sur Aucune pour supprimer le cadre. Largeur et Hauteur servent à changer la taille du cadre. L'option Auto vous permet de régler la taille du cadre automatiquement en l'ajustant à la lettrine à l'intérieur. L'option Exactement vous permet de spécifier les valeurs fixes. L'option Au moins est utilisée pour définir la hauteur minimale (si vous changez la taille du cadre, la hauteur du cadre change en conséquence, mais elle ne peut pas être inférieure à la valeur spécifiée). Horizontal sert à définir la position exacte du cadre des unités sélectionnées par rapport à la marge, la page ou la colonne, ou à aligner le cadre (à gauche, au centre ou à droite) par rapport à un des points de référence. Vous pouvez également définir la Distance du texte horizontale c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bordures verticales du cadre et le texte du paragraphe. Vertical sert à définir la position exacte du cadre des unités sélectionnées par rapport à la marge, la page ou le paragraphe, ou à aligner le cadre (en haut, au centre ou en bas) par rapport à un des points de référence. Vous pouvez également définir la Distance du texte verticale c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bordures horizontales et le texte du paragraphe. Déplacer avec le texte contrôle si la lettrine se déplace comme le paragraphe auquel elle est liée. Les onglets Bordures et remplissage et Marges permettent de définir les mêmes paramètres que dans les onglets de la fenêtre Lettrine - Paramètres avancés." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEndnotes.htm", "title": "Insérer des notes de fin", @@ -298,7 +318,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "title": "Insérer des notes de bas de page", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, utilisez les notes de bas de page pour donner des explications ou ajouter des commentaires à un terme ou une proposition et citer une source. Insérer des notes de bas de page Pour insérer une note de bas de page dans votre document, placez un point d'insertion à la fin du texte ou du mot concerné, passez à l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, cliquez sur l'icône les Notes de bas de page dans la barre d'outils en haut ou appuyez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Notes de bas de page et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une note de bas de page du menu, Le symbole de la note de bas de page est alors ajouté dans le corps de texte (symbole en exposant qui indique la note de bas de page), et le point d'insertion se déplace à la fin de document. Vous pouvez saisir votre texte. Il faut suivre la même procédure pour insérer une note de bas de page suivante sur un autre fragment du texte. La numérotation des notes de fin est appliquée automatiquement. Affichage des notes de fin dans le document Faites glisser le curseur au symbole de la note de bas de page dans le texte du document, la note de bas de page s'affiche dans une petite fenêtre contextuelle. Parcourir les notes de bas de page Vous pouvez facilement passer d'une note de bas de page à une autre dans votre document, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, dans la section Accéder aux notes de bas de page utilisez la flèche gauche pour se déplacer à la note de bas de page suivante ou la flèche droite pour se déplacer à la note de bas de page précédente. Modification des notes de bas de page Pour particulariser les notes de bas de page, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, appuyez sur Paramètres des notes dans le menu, modifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres des notes qui va apparaître : Cochez la casse Note de bas de page pour modifier seulement les notes de bas de page. Spécifiez l'Emplacement des notes de bas de page et sélectionnez l'une des options dans la liste déroulante à droite : Bas de page - les notes de bas de page sont placées au bas de la page (cette option est activée par défaut). Sous le texte - les notes de bas de page sont placées près du texte. Cette fonction est utile si le texte sur une page est court. Modifiez le Format des notes de bas de page : Format de nombre- sélectionnez le format de nombre disponible dans la liste : 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Début- utilisez les flèches pour spécifier le nombre ou la lettre à utiliser pour la première note de fin. Numérotation- sélectionnez les options de numérotation des notes de bas de page : Continue- numérotation de manière séquentielle dans le document, À chaque section- numérotation redémarre à 1 (ou à une autre séquence de symboles) au début de chaque section du document, À chaque page- numérotation redémarre à 1 (ou à une autre séquence de symboles) au début de chaque page du document. Marque personalisée - séquence de symboles ou mots spéciaux à utiliser comme symbole de note de bas de page (Exemple : * ou Note1). Tapez le symbole/mot dans le champ et cliquez sur Insérer en bas de la boîte dialogue Paramètres des notes. Dans la liste déroulante Appliquer les modifications à sélectionnez si vous voulez appliquer les modifications À tout le document ou seulement À cette section. Remarque : pour définir un format différent pour les notes de fin sur différentes sections du document, il faut tout d'abord utiliser les sauts de sections. Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Appliquer. Supprimer les notes de bas de page Pour supprimer une note de bas de page, placez un point d'insertion devant le symbole de note de bas de page dans le texte et cliquez sur la touche Supprimer. Toutes les autres notes de bas de page sont renumérotées. Pour supprimer toutes les notes de bas de page du document, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, sélectionnez Supprimer les notes dans le menu. dans la boîte de dialogue sélectionnez Supprimer les notes de bas de page et cliquez sur OK." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents utilisez les notes de bas de page pour donner des explications ou ajouter des commentaires à un terme ou une proposition et citer une source. Insérer des notes de bas de page Pour insérer une note de bas de page dans votre document, placez un point d'insertion à la fin du texte ou du mot concerné, passez à l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, cliquez sur l'icône les Notes de bas de page dans la barre d'outils en haut ou appuyez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Notes de bas de page et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une note de bas de page du menu, Le symbole de la note de bas de page est alors ajouté dans le corps de texte (symbole en exposant qui indique la note de bas de page), et le point d'insertion se déplace à la fin de document. Vous pouvez saisir votre texte. Il faut suivre la même procédure pour insérer une note de bas de page suivante sur un autre fragment du texte. La numérotation des notes de fin est appliquée automatiquement. Affichage des notes de fin dans le document Faites glisser le curseur au symbole de la note de bas de page dans le texte du document, la note de bas de page s'affiche dans une petite fenêtre contextuelle. Parcourir les notes de bas de page Vous pouvez facilement passer d'une note de bas de page à une autre dans votre document, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, dans la section Accéder aux notes de bas de page utilisez la flèche gauche pour se déplacer à la note de bas de page suivante ou la flèche droite pour se déplacer à la note de bas de page précédente. Modification des notes de bas de page Pour particulariser les notes de bas de page, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, appuyez sur Paramètres des notes dans le menu, modifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres des notes qui va apparaître : Cochez la casse Note de bas de page pour modifier seulement les notes de bas de page. Spécifiez l'Emplacement des notes de bas de page et sélectionnez l'une des options dans la liste déroulante à droite : Bas de page - les notes de bas de page sont placées au bas de la page (cette option est activée par défaut). Sous le texte - les notes de bas de page sont placées près du texte. Cette fonction est utile si le texte sur une page est court. Modifiez le Format des notes de bas de page : Format de nombre- sélectionnez le format de nombre disponible dans la liste : 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Début- utilisez les flèches pour spécifier le nombre ou la lettre à utiliser pour la première note de fin. Numérotation- sélectionnez les options de numérotation des notes de bas de page : Continue- numérotation de manière séquentielle dans le document, À chaque section- numérotation redémarre à 1 (ou à une autre séquence de symboles) au début de chaque section du document, À chaque page- numérotation redémarre à 1 (ou à une autre séquence de symboles) au début de chaque page du document. Marque personnalisée - séquence de symboles ou mots spéciaux à utiliser comme symbole de note de bas de page (Exemple : * ou Note1). Tapez le symbole/mot dans le champ et cliquez sur Insérer en bas de la boîte dialogue Paramètres des notes. Dans la liste déroulante Appliquer les modifications à sélectionnez si vous voulez appliquer les modifications À tout le document ou seulement À cette section. Remarque : pour définir un format différent pour les notes de fin sur différentes sections du document, il faut tout d'abord utiliser les sauts de sections. Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Appliquer. Supprimer les notes de bas de page Pour supprimer une note de bas de page, placez un point d'insertion devant le symbole de note de bas de page dans le texte et cliquez sur la touche Supprimer. Toutes les autres notes de bas de page sont renumérotées. Pour supprimer toutes les notes de bas de page du document, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Note de bas de page dans l'onglet Références dans la barre d'outils en haut, sélectionnez Supprimer les notes dans le menu. dans la boîte de dialogue sélectionnez Supprimer les notes de bas de page et cliquez sur OK." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", @@ -308,12 +328,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insérer des images", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insérer une image Pour insérer une image dans votre document de texte, placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer l'image, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Image de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir Dans l’éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à la fois. l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. On peut aussi ajouter une légende à l'image. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des légendes. Déplacer et redimensionner des images Pour changer la taille de l'image, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'image sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position de l'image, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'image vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez l'image, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à la positionner sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour faire pivoter une image, déplacer le curseur vers la poignée de rotation et faites la glisser dans le sens horaire ou antihoraire. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en faisant pivoter. Remarque : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuel. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez restaurer la taille d'origine de l'image en cliquant sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Le bouton Ajuster aux marges permet de redimensionner l'image et de l'ajuster dans les marges gauche et droite. Le bouton Rogner sert à recadrer l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez positionner le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage lorsque il se transforme en et faites la glisser. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir ou Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix : Si vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le poiunteur de la soiris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers) Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer l'image sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des images pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs images à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Faire pivoter permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Rogner est utilisé pour appliquer l'une des options de rognage : Rogner, Remplir ou Ajuster. Sélectionnez l'option Rogner dans le sous-menu, puis faites glisser les poignées de recadrage pour définir la zone de rognage, puis cliquez à nouveau sur l'une de ces trois options dans le sous-menu pour appliquer les modifications. Taille actuelle sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image et rétablir la taille d'origine. Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL. Paramètres avancés de l'image sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Image - Paramètres avancés'. Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type du Ligne a taille et la couleur ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (Ajouter un ombre) ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont l'image est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). En ligne - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de l'image. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de l'image. Devant le texte - l'image est affichée sur le texte Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur l'image. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, gauche, droit). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c'est-à-dire Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si l'image se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux images sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image." + "body": "L'éditeur de documents vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre document. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insérer une image Pour insérer une image dans votre document de texte, placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer l'image, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Image de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner un fichier. Recherchez le fichier nécessaire sur votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir Dans l'éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionnez plusieurs images à la fois. l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre dans laquelle il faut saisir l'adresse Web de l'image, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. Il est également possible d'ajouter une légende à l'image. Pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des légendes, veuillez consulter cet article. Déplacer et redimensionner des images Pour changer la taille de l'image, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'image sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position de l'image, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît lorsque vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'image vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez l'image, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à la positionner sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour faire pivoter une image, déplacer le curseur vers la poignée de rotation et faites la glisser dans le sens horaire ou antihoraire. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en faisant pivoter. Remarque: la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants: Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuel. Le bouton Ajuster aux marges permet de redimensionner l'image et de l'ajuster dans les marges gauche et droite. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez rétablir la taille de l'image source en cliquant sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Le bouton Ajuster aux marges permet de redimensionner l'image qu'elle corresponde à la zone entre la marge droite et la marge gauche de la page. Le bouton Rogner permet de recadrer l'image. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez positionner le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage lorsque il se transforme en et faites la glisser. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez placer le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de rognage lorsque il se transforme en icône et faites glisser la zone. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix: Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers) Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou À partir d'une URL. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes: Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner l'image à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu ou en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, veuillez consulter cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner l'un des styles d'habillage disponibles - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte, ou modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible que si le style d'habillage défini n'est pas En ligne. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Enregistrer en tant qu'image sert à sauvegarder l'image en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur. Rogner sert à sélectionner l'une des options de recadrage: Rogner, Remplir ou Ajuster. Sélectionnez l'option Rogner dans le sous-menu, ensuite faites glisser les poignées de recadrage pour définir la zone de rognage, puis cliquez à nouveau sur l'une de ces trois options dans le sous-menu pour appliquer les modifications. Taille actuelle sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image et rétablir la taille d'origine. Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou À partir d'une URL. Paramètres avancés de l'image sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Image - Paramètres avancés. Une fois l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme deviendra aussi disponible à droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur et l'opacité de la Ligne ainsi que le type de la forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre: L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants: Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants: Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants: Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont l'image est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). En ligne - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez l'un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour du graphique. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas du graphique. Devant le texte - l'image s'affiche sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte s'affiche sur l'image. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, gauche, droit). L'onglet Position n'est disponible que si vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que En ligne. Cet onglet contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné: La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants: Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants: Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) au-dessous de la ligne, de la marge, de la marge inférieure, du paragraphe, de la page ou la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si l'image se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux images sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm", "title": "Insérer des numéros de ligne", - "body": "Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE peut automatiquement compter les lignes dans votre document. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous devez faire référence à des lignes spécifiques dans un document, comme un contrat juridique ou un code de script. Pour ajouter la numérotation de ligne dans un document, utiliser la fonction Numéros de ligne. Veuillez noter que le texte ajouté aux objets tels que les tableaux, les zones de texte, les graphiques, les en-têtes/pieds de page etc n'est pas inclus dans la numérotation consécutive. Tous ces objets comptent pour une ligne. Ajouter des numéros de ligne Accédez à l'onglet Disposition dans la barre d'outils en haut et appuyez sur l'icône Numéros de ligne. Pour une configuration rapide, sélectionnez les paramètres appropriés dans la liste déroulante : Continue - pour une numérotation consécutive dans l'ensemble du document. Restaurer chaque page - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque page. Restaurer chaque section - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque section du document. Veuillez consulter ce guide pour en savoir plus sur le sauts de sections. Supprimer pour le paragraphe actif - pour supprimer la numérotation de ligne du paragraphe actuel. Cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris et sélectionnez les paragraphes pour lesquels on veut supprimer les numéros de ligne avant d'opter pour cette option. Configurez les paramètres avancés si vous en avez besoin. Cliquez sur Paramètres de la numérotation de ligne dans le menu déroulant Numéros de ligne. Cochez la case Ajouter la numérotation des lignes pour ajouter des numéros de ligne au document et pour accéder aux paramètres avancées : Commencer par - spécifiez à quelle ligne la numérotation doit commencer. Par défaut, il démarre à 1. À partir du texte - saisissez les valeurs de l'espace situé entre le texte et le numéro de ligne. Les unités de distance sont affichées en cm. Le paramètre par défaut est Auto. Compter par - spécifiez la valeur de variable si celle-ci n' augmente pas à 1, c'est-à-dire numéroter chaque ligne ou seulement une sur deux, une sur 3, une sur 4, une sur 5 etc. Saisissez une valeur numérique. Par défaut, il démarre à 1. Restaurer chaque page - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque page. Restaurer chaque section - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque section du document. Continue - pour une numérotation consécutive dans l'ensemble du document. Dans la liste déroulante Appliquer les modifications à sélectionnez la partie du document à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter des numéros de lignes. Choisissez parmi les options suivantes : À cette section pour ajouter des numéros de ligne à la section du document spécifiée ; A partir de ce point pour ajouter des numéros de ligne à partir du point où votre curseur est placé ; A tout le document pour ajouter des numéros de ligne à tout ce document. Par défaut, le paramètre est A tout le document. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications. Supprimer les numéros de ligne Pour supprimer les numéros de ligne, accédez à l'onglet Disposition dans la barre d'outils en haut et appuyez sur l'icône Numéros de ligne. sélectionnez l'option Aucune dans le menu déroulant ou appuyez sur Paramètres de numérotation des lignes et décochez la case Ajouter la numérotation de ligne dans la boîte de dialogue Numéros de ligne." + "body": "Éditeur de Documents ONLYOFFICE peut automatiquement compter les lignes dans votre document. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous devez faire référence à des lignes spécifiques dans un document, comme un contrat juridique ou un code de script. Pour ajouter la numérotation de ligne dans un document, utiliser la fonction Numéros de ligne. Veuillez noter que le texte ajouté aux objets tels que les tableaux, les zones de texte, les graphiques, les en-têtes/pieds de page etc. n'est pas inclus dans la numérotation consécutive. Tous ces objets comptent pour une ligne. Ajouter des numéros de ligne Accédez à l'onglet Disposition dans la barre d'outils en haut et appuyez sur l'icône Numéros de ligne. Pour une configuration rapide, sélectionnez les paramètres appropriés dans la liste déroulante : Continue - pour une numérotation consécutive dans l'ensemble du document. Restaurer chaque page - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque page. Restaurer chaque section - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque section du document. Veuillez consulter ce guide pour en savoir plus sur le sauts de sections. Supprimer pour le paragraphe actif - pour supprimer la numérotation de ligne du paragraphe actuel. Cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris et sélectionnez les paragraphes pour lesquels on veut supprimer les numéros de ligne avant d'opter pour cette option. Configurez les paramètres avancés si vous en avez besoin. Cliquez sur Paramètres de la numérotation de ligne dans le menu déroulant Numéros de ligne. Cochez la case Ajouter la numérotation des lignes pour ajouter des numéros de ligne au document et pour accéder aux paramètres avancées : Commencer par - spécifiez à quelle ligne la numérotation doit commencer. Par défaut, il démarre à 1. À partir du texte - saisissez les valeurs de l'espace situé entre le texte et le numéro de ligne. Les unités de distance sont affichées en cm. Le paramètre par défaut est Auto. Compter par - spécifiez la valeur de variable si celle-ci n' augmente pas à 1, c'est-à-dire numéroter chaque ligne ou seulement une sur deux, une sur 3, une sur 4, une sur 5 etc. Saisissez une valeur numérique. Par défaut, il démarre à 1. Restaurer chaque page - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque page. Restaurer chaque section - pour commencer la numérotation consécutive sur chaque section du document. Continue - pour une numérotation consécutive dans l'ensemble du document. Dans la liste déroulante Appliquer les modifications à sélectionnez la partie du document à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter des numéros de lignes. Choisissez parmi les options suivantes : À cette section pour ajouter des numéros de ligne à la section du document spécifiée ; A partir de ce point pour ajouter des numéros de ligne à partir du point où votre curseur est placé ; A tout le document pour ajouter des numéros de ligne à tout ce document. Par défaut, le paramètre est A tout le document. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications. Supprimer les numéros de ligne Pour supprimer les numéros de ligne, accédez à l'onglet Disposition dans la barre d'outils en haut et appuyez sur l'icône Numéros de ligne. sélectionnez l'option Aucune dans le menu déroulant ou appuyez sur Paramètres de numérotation des lignes et décochez la case Ajouter la numérotation de ligne dans la boîte de dialogue Numéros de ligne." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", @@ -322,13 +342,13 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm", - "title": "Insérer les références", - "body": "Éditeur de Documents Insérer les références Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE supporte les logiciels de gestion de références bibliographiques Mendeley, Zotero et EasyBib pour insérer des références dans votre document. Mendeley Intégrer Mendeley à ONLYOFFICE Connectez-vous à votre compte personnel Mendeley. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Mendeley, le panneau de gauche s'ouvre dans votre document. Appuyez sur Copier le lien et ouvrir la fiche. Le navigateur ouvre la fiche du site Mendeley. Complétez la fiche et notez l'identifiant de l'application ONLYOFFICE. Revenez à votre document. Entrez l'identifiant de l'application et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer. Appuyez sur Me connecter. Appuyez sur Continuer. Or, ONLYOFFICE s'est connecté à votre compte Mendeley. Insertion des références Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la référence doit être insérée. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Mendeley. Tapez le texte à chercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier. Activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. [Facultatif] Tapez le texte nouveau à chercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. Sélectionnez le style pour référence de la liste déroulante Style. Cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie. Zotero Intégrer Zotero à ONLYOFFICE Connectez-vous à votre compte personnel Zotero. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires de votre document ouvert et choisissez Zotero, le panneau de gauche s'ouvre dans votre document. Cliquez sur le lien Configuration Zotero API. Il faut obtenir une clé sur le site Zotéro, la copier et la conserver en vue d'une utilisation ultérieure. Revenez à votre document et coller la clé API. Appuyez sur Enregistrer. Or, ONLYOFFICE s'est connecté à votre compte Zotero. Insertion des références Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la référence doit être insérée. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Zotero. Tapez le texte à chercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier. Activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. [Facultatif] Tapez le texte nouveau à chercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. Sélectionnez le style pour référence de la liste déroulante Style. Cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie. EasyBib Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la référence doit être insérée. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez EasyBib. Sélectionnez le type de source à trouver. Tapez le texte à chercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier. Cliquez sur '+' de la partie droite du Livre/Journal, de l'article/site Web. Cette source sera ajoutée dans la Bibliographie. Sélectionnez le style de référence. Appuyez sur Ajouter la bibliographie dans le document pour insérer les références." + "title": "Insérer des références", + "body": "L'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les logiciels de gestion de références Mendeley, Zotero et EasyBib pour insérer des références dans votre document. Mendeley Connecter ONLYOFFICE à Mendeley Connectez-vous à votre compte Mendeley. Dans votre document, passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Mendeley, un panneau s'ouvrira à gauche de votre document. Cliquez sur le bouton Copier le lien et ouvrir le formulaire. Le navigateur ouvre le formulaire sur le site Mendeley. Remplissez le formulaire et notez l'identifiant de l'application ONLYOFFICE. Revenez à votre document. Saisissez l'identifiant de l'application et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer. Cliquez sur Se connecter. Cliquez sur Continuer. Désormais, ONLYOFFICE est connecté à votre compte Mendeley. Insérer des références à l'aide de Mendeley Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer une ou plusieurs références. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Mendeley. Saisissez le texte à rechercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier. Activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. [Facultatif] Saisissez le nouveau texte à rechercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. Sélectionnez le style de la référence de la liste déroulante Style. cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie. Zotero Connecter ONLYOFFICE à Zotero Connectez-vous à votre compte Zotero. Dans votre document, passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Zotero, un panneau s'ouvrira à gauche de votre document. Cliquez sur le lien Paramètres de l'API Zotero. Sur le site Zotero, créez une nouvelle clé, copiez et conservez-la pour usage ultérieur. Revenez à votre document et collez la clé API. Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Désormais, ONLYOFFICE est connecté à votre compte Zotero. Insérer des références à l'aide de Zotero Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer une ou plusieurs références. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Zotero. Saisissez le texte à rechercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier. Activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. [Facultatif] Saisissez le nouveau texte à rechercher et activez une ou plusieurs cases à cocher. Sélectionnez le style de la référence de la liste déroulante Style. cliquez sur le bouton Insérer la bibliographie. EasyBib Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer une ou plusieurs références. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez EasyBib. Sélectionnez le type de source à rechercher. Saisissez le texte à rechercher et appuyez sur la touche Entrée du clavier. Cliquez sur '+' dans la partie droite du Livre/Journal, de l'article/site Web. Cette source sera ajoutée dans la Bibliographie. Sélectionnez le style de référence. Cliquez sur Ajouter la bibliographie dans le document pour insérer les références." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt", - "body": "Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers. Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt, passez à l'onglet Insertion, cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt, placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite: Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme. Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage du graphique SmartArt. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix: Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que le graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options Prolonger ouTuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface du graphique SmartArt afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour accéder aux paramètres avancés." + "body": "Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers. Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt, passez à l'onglet Insertion, cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt, placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez sauvegarder un graphique SmartArt en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite: Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme. Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage du graphique SmartArt. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir des jeux de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix: Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que le graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options Prolonger ouTuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface du graphique SmartArt afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour accéder aux paramètres avancés." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", @@ -338,7 +358,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "title": "Insérer des tableaux", - "body": "Insérer un tableau Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents, placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le tableau, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une des options pour créer le tableau : soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum) Si vous voulez ajouter rapidement un tableau, il vous suffit de sélectionner le nombre de lignes (8 au maximum) et de colonnes (10 au maximum). soit un tableau personnalisé Si vous avez besoin d'un tableau de plus de 10 par 8 cellules, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre et spécifiez le nombre nécessaire de lignes et de colonnes, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK. Sélectionnez l'option Dessiner un tableau, si vous souhaitez dessiner un tableau à la souris. Cette option est utile lorsque vous devez créer un tableau et délimiter des lignes et des colonnes de tailles différentes. Le pointeur de la souris se transforme en crayon . Tracez le contour du tableau où vous souhaitez l'ajouter, puis tracez les traits horizontaux pour délimiter des lignes et les traits verticaux pour délimiter des colonnes à l'intérieur du contour. Si vous souhaitez convertir du texte en tableau, sélectionnez l'option Convertir un texte en tableau. Cette fonctionnalité peut ce rendre utile lorsque vous avez déjà saisi du texte et il faut l'organiser en tableau. La fenêtre Convertir un texte en tableau comporte 3 sections : Taille du tableau. Définissez le nombre de colonnes/lignes à créer. Pour ce faire, utilisez les flèches vers le haut et le bas ou servez-vous du clavier pour saisir le nombre manuellement. Comportement de l'ajustement automatique. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée pour définir comment l'ajustement du texte doit être fait : Largeur de colonne fixe (la veleur est défini par défaut sur Auto. Utilisez les flèches vers le haut et le bas ou servez-vous du clavier pour saisir le nombre enter manuellement), Ajuster au contenu (la largeur des colonnes correspond aux longueurs des textes), Ajuster à la fenêtre (la largeur des colonnes correspond à la largeur de la page). Séparer le texte au niveau des. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée pour définir le caractère qui va indiquer où générer chaque colonne : Paragraphes, Tabulation, Points-virgules et Autre (saisissez le caractère de séparation souhaité manuellement). Cliquez sur OK pour convertir le texte en tableau. Lorsque vous voulez insérer un tableau comme un objet OLE : Sélectionnez l'option Insérer la feuille de calcul. La fenêtre correspondante s'ouvre dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir les données requises et les modifier en utilisant les outils de formatage du Tableur, par exemple sélectionner la police, le type et le style, saisir le format de nombre, insérer des fonctions, mettre en forme les tableaux etc. L'en-tête contient le bouton Zone visible dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Choisissez l'option Modifier la zone visible afin de sélectionner la zone qui sera affichée quand l'objet est inseré au sein du document ; les autres données ne sont pas perdues mais seulement masquées. Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque c'est prêt. Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher la zone visible afin d'afficher la zone sélectionnée qui aura une bordure bleue. Quand tout est prêt, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et quitter. après avoir ajouté le tableau, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. Pour redimensionner un tableau, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée dans son coin inférieur droit et faites-la glisser jusqu'à ce que la taille du tableau soit atteinte. Vous pouvez également modifier manuellement la largeur d'une certaine colonne ou la hauteur d'une ligne. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure droite de la colonne de sorte que le curseur se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure vers la gauche ou la droite pour définir la largeur nécessaire. Pour modifier manuellement la hauteur d'une seule ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure inférieure de la ligne afin que le curseur devienne la flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers le haut ou le bas. Pour déplacer une table, maintenez la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche et faites-la glisser à l'endroit voulu dans le document. On peut aussi ajouter une légende au tableau. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des légendes avec les tableaux. Sélectionnez un tableau ou une portion de tableau Pour sélectionner un tableau entier, cliquez sur la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche. Pour sélectionner une certaine cellule, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur le côté gauche de la cellule nécessaire pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche du tableau à côté de la ligne voulue pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire horizontale , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine colonne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure supérieure de la colonne voulue pour que le curseur se transforme en flèche noire dirigée vers le bas , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Il est également possible de sélectionner une cellule, une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau à l'aide des options du menu contextuel ou de la section Lignes et colonnes de la barre latérale droite. Remarque : pour vous déplacer dans un tableau, vous pouvez utiliser des raccourcis clavier. Ajuster les paramètres du tableau Certaines paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide du menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionner sert à sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, une cellule ou un tableau. Insérer sert à insérer une ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de la ligne où le curseur est placé ainsi qu'insérer une colonne à gauche ou à droite de la colonne à la position actuelle du curseur. Il est possible d'insérer plusieurs lignes ou colonnes. Lorsque l'option Plusieurs lignes/colonnes est sélectionnée, la fenêtre Insérer plusieurs apparaît. Sélectionnez Lignes ou Colonnes dans la liste, spécifiez le nombre de colonnes/lignes que vous souhaitez insérer et spécifiez l'endroit où les insérer : Au-dessus du curseur ou Au-dessous du curseur et cliquez sur OK. Supprimer sert à supprimer une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau. Lorsque l'option Cellule est sélectionnée, la fenêtre Supprimer les cellules apparaît où on peut choisir parmi les options : Décaler les cellules vers la gauche, Supprimer la ligne entière ou Supprimer la colonne entière. Fusionner les cellules est disponible si deux ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées et est utilisé pour les fusionner. Il est aussi possible de fusionner les cellules en effaçant la bordure à l'aide de l'outil gomme. Pour le faire, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer un tableau. Le pointeur de la souris se transforme en gomme . Faites glisser le pointeur de la souris vers la bordure séparant les cellules que vous souhaitez fusionner et effacez-la. Fractionner la cellule... sert à ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre nécessaire de colonnes et de lignes de la cellule qui doit être divisée. Il est aussi possible de fractionner la cellule en dessinant les lignes et les colonnes à l'aide de l'outil crayon. Pour le faire, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Dessiner un tableau. Le pointeur de la souris se transforme en crayon . Tracez un trait horizontal pour délimiter une ligne ou un trait vertical pour délimiter une colonne. Distribuer les lignes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même hauteur sans changer la hauteur globale du tableau. Distribuer les colonnes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même largeur sans modifier la largeur globale du tableau. Alignement vertical de cellule sert à aligner le texte en haut, au centre ou en bas de la cellule sélectionnée. Orientation du texte sert à modifier l'orientation du texte dans une cellule. Vous pouvez placer le texte horizontalement, verticalement de haut en bas (Rotation du texte vers le bas), ou verticalement de bas en haut (Rotation du texte vers le haut). Paramètres avancés du tableau sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Lien hypertexte sert à insérer un lien hypertexte. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés'. Vous pouvez également modifier les propriétés du tableau en utilisant la barre latérale droite : Lignes et Colonnes servent à sélectionner les parties du tableau à mettre en surbrillance. Pour les lignes : En-tête - pour souligner la première ligne Total - pour souligner la dernière ligne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième ligne Pour les colonnes : Premier - pour souligner la première colonne Dernier - pour souligner la dernière colonne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième colonne Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle sert à choisir un modèle de tableau à partir de ceux qui sont disponibles. Style des bordures sert à sélectionner la taille de la bordure, la couleur, le style ainsi que la couleur d'arrière-plan. Lignes et colonnes sert à effectuer certaines opérations avec le tableau : sélectionner, supprimer, insérer des lignes et des colonnes, fusionner des cellules, fractionner une cellule. Taille des lignes et des colonnes est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur. Ajouter une formule permet d'insérer une formule dans la cellule de tableau sélectionnée. Répéter en haut de chaque page en tant que ligne d'en-tête sert à insérer la même rangée d'en-tête en haut de chaque page dans les tableaux longs. Afficher les paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre des paramètres du tableau s'ouvre : L'onglet Tableau permet de modifier les paramètres de tout le tableau. La section Taille du tableau contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur - par défaut, la largeur du tableau est ajustée automatiquement à la largeur de la page, c-à-d le tableau occupe tout l'espace entre la marge gauche et la marge droite de la page. Vous pouvez cocher cette case et spécifier la largeur du tableau manuellement. Mesure en permet de définir la largeur du tableau en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option choisie dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés... tab) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale de la page. Remarque: vous pouvez aussi ajuster la taille du tableau manuellement en changeant la hauteur des lignes et la largeur des colonnes. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la ligne/ de la colonne jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour changer la largeur de la colonne et les marqueurs sur la règle verticale pour modifier la hauteur de la ligne. Redimensionner automatiquement pour ajuster au contenu - permet de changer automatiquement la largeur de chaque colonne selon le texte dans ses cellules. La section Marges des cellules par défaut permet de changer l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule utilisé par défaut. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Espacement entre les cellules - l'espacement des cellules qui sera rempli par la couleur de l'Arrière-plan de tableau. L'onglet Cellule permet de modifier les paramètres des cellules individuelles. D'abord vous devez sélectionner la cellule à appliquer les modifications ou sélectionner le tableau à modifier les propriétés de toutes ses cellules. La section Taille de la cellule contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur préférée - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule par défaut. C'est la taille à laquelle la cellule essaie de correspondre, mais dans certains cas ce n'est pas possible se s'adapter à cette valeur exacte. Par exemple, si le texte dans une cellule dépasse la largeur spécifiée, il sera rompu par la ligne suivante de sorte que la largeur de cellule préférée reste intacte, mais si vous insérez une nouvelle colonne, la largeur préférée sera réduite. Mesure en - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale du tableau. Remarque : vous pouvez aussi définir la largeur de la cellule manuellement. Pour rendre une cellule plus large ou plus étroite dans une colonne, sélectionnez la cellule nécessaire et déplacez le curseur de la souris sur sa bordure droite jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle, puis faites glisser la bordure. Pour modifier la largeur de toutes les cellules d'une colonne, utilisez les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour modifier la largeur de la colonne. La section Marges de la cellule permet d'ajuster l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule. Par défaut, les valeurs standard sont utilisées (les valeurs par défaut peuvent être modifiées également en utilisant l'onglet Tableau), mais vous pouvez désactiver l'option Utiliser marges par défaut et entrer les valeurs nécessaires manuellement. La section Option de la cellule permet de modifier le paramètre suivant : L'option Envelopper le texte est activée par défaut. Il permet d'envelopper le texte dans une cellule qui dépasse sa largeur sur la ligne suivante en agrandissant la hauteur de la rangée et en gardant la largeur de la colonne inchangée. L'onglet Bordures et arrière-plan contient les paramètres suivants : Les paramètres de la Bordure (taille, couleur, présence ou absence) - définissez la taille de la bordure, sélectionnez sa couleur et choisissez la façon d'affichage dans les cellules. Remarque : si vous choisissez de ne pas afficher les bordures du tableau en cliquant sur le bouton ou en désélectionnant toutes les bordures manuellement sur le diagramme, les bordures seront indiquées par une ligne pointillée. Pour les faire disparaître, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Bordures du tableau cachées. Fond de la cellule - la couleur d'arrière plan dans les cellules (disponible uniquement si une ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées ou l'option Espacement entre les cellules est sélectionnée dans l'onglet Tableau). Fond du tableau - la couleur d'arrière plan du tableau ou le fond de l'espacement entre les cellules dans le cas où l'option Espacement entre les cellules est choisie dans l'onglet Tableau. L'onglet Position du tableau est disponible uniquement si l'option Tableau flottant sous l'onglet Habillage du texte est sélectionnée et contient les paramètres suivants : Horizontal sert à régler l'alignement du tableau par rapport à la marge (à gauche, au centre, à droite), la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position à droite de la marge, la page ou le texte. Vertical sert à régler l'alignement du tableau par rapport à la marge (à gauche, au centre, à droite), la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position en dessous de la marge, la page ou le texte. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Déplacer avec le texte contrôle si la tableau se déplace comme le texte dans lequel il est inséré. Autoriser le chevauchement sert à déterminer si deux tableaux sont fusionnés en un seul grand tableau ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les uns près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage du texte - Tableau aligné ou Tableau flottant. Utilisez l'option voulue pour changer la façon de positionner le tableau par rapport au texte : soit il sera une partie du texte ( si vous avez choisi le style aligné), soit il sera entouré par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous avez choisi le style flottant). Après avoir sélectionné le style d'habillage, les paramètres d'habillage supplémentaires peuvent être définis pour les tableaux alignés et flottants : Pour les tableaux alignés, vous pouvez spécifier l'Alignement du tableau et le Retrait à gauche. Pour les tableaux flottants, vous pouvez spécifier la distance du texte et la position du tableau sous l'onglet Position du tableau. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau." + "body": "Insérer un tableau Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents, placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le tableau, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une des options pour créer le tableau : soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum) Si vous voulez ajouter rapidement un tableau, il vous suffit de sélectionner le nombre de lignes (8 au maximum) et de colonnes (10 au maximum). soit un tableau personnalisé Si vous avez besoin d'un tableau de plus de 10 par 8 cellules, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre et spécifiez le nombre nécessaire de lignes et de colonnes, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK. Sélectionnez l'option Dessiner un tableau, si vous souhaitez dessiner un tableau à la souris. Cette option est utile lorsque vous devez créer un tableau et délimiter des lignes et des colonnes de tailles différentes. Le pointeur de la souris se transforme en crayon . Tracez le contour du tableau où vous souhaitez l'ajouter, puis tracez les traits horizontaux pour délimiter des lignes et les traits verticaux pour délimiter des colonnes à l'intérieur du contour. Si vous souhaitez convertir du texte en tableau, sélectionnez l'option Convertir un texte en tableau. Cette fonctionnalité peut ce rendre utile lorsque vous avez déjà saisi du texte et il faut l'organiser en tableau. La fenêtre Convertir un texte en tableau comporte 3 sections : Taille du tableau. Définissez le nombre de colonnes/lignes à créer. Pour ce faire, utilisez les flèches vers le haut et le bas ou servez-vous du clavier pour saisir le nombre manuellement. Comportement de l'ajustement automatique. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée pour définir comment l'ajustement du texte doit être fait : Largeur de colonne fixe (la valeur est défini par défaut sur Auto. Utilisez les flèches vers le haut et le bas ou servez-vous du clavier pour saisir le nombre manuellement), Ajuster au contenu (la largeur des colonnes correspond aux longueurs des textes), Ajuster à la fenêtre (la largeur des colonnes correspond à la largeur de la page). Séparer le texte au niveau des. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée pour définir le caractère qui va indiquer où générer chaque colonne : Paragraphes, Tabulation, Points-virgules et Autre (saisissez le caractère de séparation souhaité manuellement). Cliquez sur OK pour convertir le texte en tableau. Lorsque vous voulez insérer un tableau comme un objet OLE : Sélectionnez l'option Insérer la feuille de calcul. La fenêtre correspondante s'ouvre dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir les données requises et les modifier en utilisant les outils de formatage du Tableur, par exemple sélectionner la police, le type et le style, saisir le format de nombre, insérer des fonctions, mettre en forme les tableaux etc. L'en-tête contient le bouton Zone visible dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Choisissez l'option Modifier la zone visible afin de sélectionner la zone qui sera affichée quand l'objet est inséré au sein du document ; les autres données ne sont pas perdues mais seulement masquées. Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque c'est prêt. Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher la zone visible afin d'afficher la zone sélectionnée qui aura une bordure bleue. Quand tout est prêt, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et quitter. après avoir ajouté le tableau, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. Pour redimensionner un tableau, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée dans son coin inférieur droit et faites-la glisser jusqu'à ce que la taille du tableau soit atteinte. Vous pouvez également modifier manuellement la largeur d'une certaine colonne ou la hauteur d'une ligne. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure droite de la colonne de sorte que le curseur se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure vers la gauche ou la droite pour définir la largeur nécessaire. Pour modifier manuellement la hauteur d'une seule ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure inférieure de la ligne afin que le curseur devienne la flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers le haut ou le bas. Pour déplacer une table, maintenez la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche et faites-la glisser à l'endroit voulu dans le document. On peut aussi ajouter une légende au tableau. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des légendes avec les tableaux. Sélectionnez un tableau ou une portion de tableau Pour sélectionner un tableau entier, cliquez sur la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche. Pour sélectionner une certaine cellule, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur le côté gauche de la cellule nécessaire pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche du tableau à côté de la ligne voulue pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire horizontale , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine colonne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure supérieure de la colonne voulue pour que le curseur se transforme en flèche noire dirigée vers le bas , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Il est également possible de sélectionner une cellule, une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau à l'aide des options du menu contextuel ou de la section Lignes et colonnes de la barre latérale droite. Remarque : pour vous déplacer dans un tableau, vous pouvez utiliser des raccourcis clavier. Ajuster les paramètres du tableau Certaines paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide du menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précédemment coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionner sert à sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, une cellule ou un tableau. Insérer sert à insérer une ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de la ligne où le curseur est placé ainsi qu'insérer une colonne à gauche ou à droite de la colonne à la position actuelle du curseur. Il est possible d'insérer plusieurs lignes ou colonnes. Lorsque l'option Plusieurs lignes/colonnes est sélectionnée, la fenêtre Insérer plusieurs apparaît. Sélectionnez Lignes ou Colonnes dans la liste, spécifiez le nombre de colonnes/lignes que vous souhaitez insérer et spécifiez l'endroit où les insérer : Au-dessus du curseur ou Au-dessous du curseur et cliquez sur OK. Supprimer sert à supprimer une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau. Lorsque l'option Cellule est sélectionnée, la fenêtre Supprimer les cellules apparaît où on peut choisir parmi les options : Décaler les cellules vers la gauche, Supprimer la ligne entière ou Supprimer la colonne entière. Fusionner les cellules est disponible si deux ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées et est utilisé pour les fusionner. Il est aussi possible de fusionner les cellules en effaçant la bordure à l'aide de l'outil gomme. Pour le faire, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Supprimer un tableau. Le pointeur de la souris se transforme en gomme . Faites glisser le pointeur de la souris vers la bordure séparant les cellules que vous souhaitez fusionner et effacez-la. Fractionner la cellule... sert à ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre nécessaire de colonnes et de lignes de la cellule qui doit être divisée. Il est aussi possible de fractionner la cellule en dessinant les lignes et les colonnes à l'aide de l'outil crayon. Pour le faire, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Dessiner un tableau. Le pointeur de la souris se transforme en crayon . Tracez un trait horizontal pour délimiter une ligne ou un trait vertical pour délimiter une colonne. Distribuer les lignes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même hauteur sans changer la hauteur globale du tableau. Distribuer les colonnes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même largeur sans modifier la largeur globale du tableau. Alignement vertical de cellule sert à aligner le texte en haut, au centre ou en bas de la cellule sélectionnée. Orientation du texte sert à modifier l'orientation du texte dans une cellule. Vous pouvez placer le texte horizontalement, verticalement de haut en bas (Rotation du texte vers le bas), ou verticalement de bas en haut (Rotation du texte vers le haut). Paramètres avancés du tableau sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Lien hypertexte sert à insérer un lien hypertexte. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés'. Vous pouvez également modifier les propriétés du tableau en utilisant la barre latérale droite : Lignes et Colonnes servent à sélectionner les parties du tableau à mettre en surbrillance. Pour les lignes : En-tête - pour souligner la première ligne Total - pour souligner la dernière ligne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième ligne Pour les colonnes : Premier - pour souligner la première colonne Dernier - pour souligner la dernière colonne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième colonne Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle sert à choisir un modèle de tableau à partir de ceux qui sont disponibles. Style des bordures sert à sélectionner la taille de la bordure, la couleur, le style ainsi que la couleur d'arrière-plan. Lignes et colonnes sert à effectuer certaines opérations avec le tableau : sélectionner, supprimer, insérer des lignes et des colonnes, fusionner des cellules, fractionner une cellule. Taille des lignes et des colonnes est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur. Ajouter une formule permet d'insérer une formule dans la cellule de tableau sélectionnée. Répéter en haut de chaque page en tant que ligne d'en-tête sert à insérer la même rangée d'en-tête en haut de chaque page dans les tableaux longs. Afficher les paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre des paramètres du tableau s'ouvre : L'onglet Tableau permet de modifier les paramètres de tout le tableau. La section Taille du tableau contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur - par défaut, la largeur du tableau est ajustée automatiquement à la largeur de la page, c-à-d le tableau occupe tout l'espace entre la marge gauche et la marge droite de la page. Vous pouvez cocher cette case et spécifier la largeur du tableau manuellement. Mesure en permet de définir la largeur du tableau en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option choisie dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés... tab) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale de la page. Remarque: vous pouvez aussi ajuster la taille du tableau manuellement en changeant la hauteur des lignes et la largeur des colonnes. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la ligne/ de la colonne jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour changer la largeur de la colonne et les marqueurs sur la règle verticale pour modifier la hauteur de la ligne. Redimensionner automatiquement pour ajuster au contenu - permet de changer automatiquement la largeur de chaque colonne selon le texte dans ses cellules. La section Marges des cellules par défaut permet de changer l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule utilisé par défaut. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Espacement entre les cellules - l'espacement des cellules qui sera rempli par la couleur de l'Arrière-plan de tableau. L'onglet Cellule permet de modifier les paramètres des cellules individuelles. D'abord vous devez sélectionner la cellule à appliquer les modifications ou sélectionner le tableau à modifier les propriétés de toutes ses cellules. La section Taille de la cellule contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur préférée - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule par défaut. C'est la taille à laquelle la cellule essaie de correspondre, mais dans certains cas ce n'est pas possible se s'adapter à cette valeur exacte. Par exemple, si le texte dans une cellule dépasse la largeur spécifiée, il sera rompu par la ligne suivante de sorte que la largeur de cellule préférée reste intacte, mais si vous insérez une nouvelle colonne, la largeur préférée sera réduite. Mesure en - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale du tableau. Remarque : vous pouvez aussi définir la largeur de la cellule manuellement. Pour rendre une cellule plus large ou plus étroite dans une colonne, sélectionnez la cellule nécessaire et déplacez le curseur de la souris sur sa bordure droite jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle, puis faites glisser la bordure. Pour modifier la largeur de toutes les cellules d'une colonne, utilisez les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour modifier la largeur de la colonne. La section Marges de la cellule permet d'ajuster l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule. Par défaut, les valeurs standard sont utilisées (les valeurs par défaut peuvent être modifiées également en utilisant l'onglet Tableau), mais vous pouvez désactiver l'option Utiliser marges par défaut et entrer les valeurs nécessaires manuellement. La section Option de la cellule permet de modifier le paramètre suivant : L'option Envelopper le texte est activée par défaut. Il permet d'envelopper le texte dans une cellule qui dépasse sa largeur sur la ligne suivante en agrandissant la hauteur de la rangée et en gardant la largeur de la colonne inchangée. L'onglet Bordures et arrière-plan contient les paramètres suivants : Les paramètres de la Bordure (taille, couleur, présence ou absence) - définissez la taille de la bordure, sélectionnez sa couleur et choisissez la façon d'affichage dans les cellules. Remarque : si vous choisissez de ne pas afficher les bordures du tableau en cliquant sur le bouton ou en désélectionnant toutes les bordures manuellement sur le diagramme, les bordures seront indiquées par une ligne pointillée. Pour les faire disparaître, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Bordures du tableau cachées. Fond de la cellule - la couleur d'arrière plan dans les cellules (disponible uniquement si une ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées ou l'option Espacement entre les cellules est sélectionnée dans l'onglet Tableau). Fond du tableau - la couleur d'arrière plan du tableau ou le fond de l'espacement entre les cellules dans le cas où l'option Espacement entre les cellules est choisie dans l'onglet Tableau. L'onglet Position du tableau est disponible uniquement si l'option Tableau flottant sous l'onglet Habillage du texte est sélectionnée et contient les paramètres suivants : Horizontal sert à régler l'alignement du tableau par rapport à la marge (à gauche, au centre, à droite), la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position à droite de la marge, la page ou le texte. Vertical sert à régler l'alignement du tableau par rapport à la marge (à gauche, au centre, à droite), la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position en dessous de la marge, la page ou le texte. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Déplacer avec le texte contrôle si la tableau se déplace comme le texte dans lequel il est inséré. Autoriser le chevauchement sert à déterminer si deux tableaux sont fusionnés en un seul grand tableau ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les uns près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage du texte - Tableau aligné ou Tableau flottant. Utilisez l'option voulue pour changer la façon de positionner le tableau par rapport au texte : soit il sera une partie du texte ( si vous avez choisi le style aligné), soit il sera entouré par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous avez choisi le style flottant). Après avoir sélectionné le style d'habillage, les paramètres d'habillage supplémentaires peuvent être définis pour les tableaux alignés et flottants : Pour les tableaux alignés, vous pouvez spécifier l'Alignement du tableau et le Retrait à gauche. Pour les tableaux flottants, vous pouvez spécifier la distance du texte et la position du tableau sous l'onglet Position du tableau. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", @@ -358,12 +378,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "Fonctionnalités de correction automatique", - "body": "Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique ONLYOFFICE dans l'Éditeur de Documents, fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus. Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier tab -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique. La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets : Math Autocorrect, Fonctions reconnues, Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe, et Correction automatique de texte. AutoMaths Lorsque vous travaillez dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en les tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque. Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé. Remarque : Les codes sont sensibles à la casse. Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques. Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer. Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier. Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones : le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur le bouton Remplacer. Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste. Cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine. Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe. Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous le codes disponibles dans l'Éditeur de Présentations. à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Les codes disponibles Code Symbole Catégorie !! Symboles ... Dots :: Opérateurs := Opérateurs /< Opérateurs relationnels /> Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels \\above Indices et exposants \\acute Accentuation \\aleph Lettres hébraïques \\alpha Lettres grecques \\Alpha Lettres grecques \\amalg Opérateurs binaires \\angle Notation de géométrie \\aoint Intégrales \\approx Opérateurs relationnels \\asmash Flèches \\ast Opérateurs binaires \\asymp Opérateurs relationnels \\atop Opérateurs \\bar Trait suscrit/souscrit \\Bar Accentuation \\because Opérateurs relationnels \\begin Séparateurs \\below Indices et exposants \\bet Lettres hébraïques \\beta Lettres grecques \\Beta Lettres grecques \\beth Lettres hébraïques \\bigcap Grands opérateurs \\bigcup Grands opérateurs \\bigodot Grands opérateurs \\bigoplus Grands opérateurs \\bigotimes Grands opérateurs \\bigsqcup Grands opérateurs \\biguplus Grands opérateurs \\bigvee Grands opérateurs \\bigwedge Grands opérateurs \\binomial Équations \\bot Notations logiques \\bowtie Opérateurs relationnels \\box Symboles \\boxdot Opérateurs binaires \\boxminus Opérateurs binaires \\boxplus Opérateurs binaires \\bra Séparateurs \\break Symboles \\breve Accentuation \\bullet Opérateurs binaires \\cap Opérateurs binaires \\cbrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\cases Symboles \\cdot Opérateurs binaires \\cdots Dots \\check Accentuation \\chi Lettres grecques \\Chi Lettres grecques \\circ Opérateurs binaires \\close Séparateurs \\clubsuit Symboles \\coint Intégrales \\cong Opérateurs relationnels \\coprod Opérateurs mathématiques \\cup Opérateurs binaires \\dalet Lettres hébraïques \\daleth Lettres hébraïques \\dashv Opérateurs relationnels \\dd Lettres avec double barres \\Dd Lettres avec double barres \\ddddot Accentuation \\dddot Accentuation \\ddot Accentuation \\ddots Dots \\defeq Opérateurs relationnels \\degc Symboles \\degf Symboles \\degree Symboles \\delta Lettres grecques \\Delta Lettres grecques \\Deltaeq Opérateurs \\diamond Opérateurs binaires \\diamondsuit Symboles \\div Opérateurs binaires \\dot Accentuation \\doteq Opérateurs relationnels \\dots Dots \\doublea Lettres avec double barres \\doubleA Lettres avec double barres \\doubleb Lettres avec double barres \\doubleB Lettres avec double barres \\doublec Lettres avec double barres \\doubleC Lettres avec double barres \\doubled Lettres avec double barres \\doubleD Lettres avec double barres \\doublee Lettres avec double barres \\doubleE Lettres avec double barres \\doublef Lettres avec double barres \\doubleF Lettres avec double barres \\doubleg Lettres avec double barres \\doubleG Lettres avec double barres \\doubleh Lettres avec double barres \\doubleH Lettres avec double barres \\doublei Lettres avec double barres \\doubleI Lettres avec double barres \\doublej Lettres avec double barres \\doubleJ Lettres avec double barres \\doublek Lettres avec double barres \\doubleK Lettres avec double barres \\doublel Lettres avec double barres \\doubleL Lettres avec double barres \\doublem Lettres avec double barres \\doubleM Lettres avec double barres \\doublen Lettres avec double barres \\doubleN Lettres avec double barres \\doubleo Lettres avec double barres \\doubleO Lettres avec double barres \\doublep Lettres avec double barres \\doubleP Lettres avec double barres \\doubleq Lettres avec double barres \\doubleQ Lettres avec double barres \\doubler Lettres avec double barres \\doubleR Lettres avec double barres \\doubles Lettres avec double barres \\doubleS Lettres avec double barres \\doublet Lettres avec double barres \\doubleT Lettres avec double barres \\doubleu Lettres avec double barres \\doubleU Lettres avec double barres \\doublev Lettres avec double barres \\doubleV Lettres avec double barres \\doublew Lettres avec double barres \\doubleW Lettres avec double barres \\doublex Lettres avec double barres \\doubleX Lettres avec double barres \\doubley Lettres avec double barres \\doubleY Lettres avec double barres \\doublez Lettres avec double barres \\doubleZ Lettres avec double barres \\downarrow Flèches \\Downarrow Flèches \\dsmash Flèches \\ee Lettres avec double barres \\ell Symboles \\emptyset Ensemble de notations \\emsp Caractères d'espace \\end Séparateurs \\ensp Caractères d'espace \\epsilon Lettres grecques \\Epsilon Lettres grecques \\eqarray Symboles \\equiv Opérateurs relationnels \\eta Lettres grecques \\Eta Lettres grecques \\exists Notations logiques \\forall Notations logiques \\fraktura Fraktur \\frakturA Fraktur \\frakturb Fraktur \\frakturB Fraktur \\frakturc Fraktur \\frakturC Fraktur \\frakturd Fraktur \\frakturD Fraktur \\frakture Fraktur \\frakturE Fraktur \\frakturf Fraktur \\frakturF Fraktur \\frakturg Fraktur \\frakturG Fraktur \\frakturh Fraktur \\frakturH Fraktur \\frakturi Fraktur \\frakturI Fraktur \\frakturk Fraktur \\frakturK Fraktur \\frakturl Fraktur \\frakturL Fraktur \\frakturm Fraktur \\frakturM Fraktur \\frakturn Fraktur \\frakturN Fraktur \\frakturo Fraktur \\frakturO Fraktur \\frakturp Fraktur \\frakturP Fraktur \\frakturq Fraktur \\frakturQ Fraktur \\frakturr Fraktur \\frakturR Fraktur \\frakturs Fraktur \\frakturS Fraktur \\frakturt Fraktur \\frakturT Fraktur \\frakturu Fraktur \\frakturU Fraktur \\frakturv Fraktur \\frakturV Fraktur \\frakturw Fraktur \\frakturW Fraktur \\frakturx Fraktur \\frakturX Fraktur \\fraktury Fraktur \\frakturY Fraktur \\frakturz Fraktur \\frakturZ Fraktur \\frown Opérateurs relationnels \\funcapply Opérateurs binaires \\G Lettres grecques \\gamma Lettres grecques \\Gamma Lettres grecques \\ge Opérateurs relationnels \\geq Opérateurs relationnels \\gets Flèches \\gg Opérateurs relationnels \\gimel Lettres hébraïques \\grave Accentuation \\hairsp Caractères d'espace \\hat Accentuation \\hbar Symboles \\heartsuit Symboles \\hookleftarrow Flèches \\hookrightarrow Flèches \\hphantom Flèches \\hsmash Flèches \\hvec Accentuation \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Lettres avec double barres \\iiint Intégrales \\iint Intégrales \\iiiint Intégrales \\Im Symboles \\imath Symboles \\in Opérateurs relationnels \\inc Symboles \\infty Symboles \\int Intégrales \\integral Intégrales \\iota Lettres grecques \\Iota Lettres grecques \\itimes Opérateurs mathématiques \\j Symboles \\jj Lettres avec double barres \\jmath Symboles \\kappa Lettres grecques \\Kappa Lettres grecques \\ket Séparateurs \\lambda Lettres grecques \\Lambda Lettres grecques \\langle Séparateurs \\lbbrack Séparateurs \\lbrace Séparateurs \\lbrack Séparateurs \\lceil Séparateurs \\ldiv Barres obliques \\ldivide Barres obliques \\ldots Dots \\le Opérateurs relationnels \\left Séparateurs \\leftarrow Flèches \\Leftarrow Flèches \\leftharpoondown Flèches \\leftharpoonup Flèches \\leftrightarrow Flèches \\Leftrightarrow Flèches \\leq Opérateurs relationnels \\lfloor Séparateurs \\lhvec Accentuation \\limit Limites \\ll Opérateurs relationnels \\lmoust Séparateurs \\Longleftarrow Flèches \\Longleftrightarrow Flèches \\Longrightarrow Flèches \\lrhar Flèches \\lvec Accentuation \\mapsto Flèches \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Caractères d'espace \\mid Opérateurs relationnels \\middle Symboles \\models Opérateurs relationnels \\mp Opérateurs binaires \\mu Lettres grecques \\Mu Lettres grecques \\nabla Symboles \\naryand Opérateurs \\nbsp Caractères d'espace \\ne Opérateurs relationnels \\nearrow Flèches \\neq Opérateurs relationnels \\ni Opérateurs relationnels \\norm Séparateurs \\notcontain Opérateurs relationnels \\notelement Opérateurs relationnels \\notin Opérateurs relationnels \\nu Lettres grecques \\Nu Lettres grecques \\nwarrow Flèches \\o Lettres grecques \\O Lettres grecques \\odot Opérateurs binaires \\of Opérateurs \\oiiint Intégrales \\oiint Intégrales \\oint Intégrales \\omega Lettres grecques \\Omega Lettres grecques \\ominus Opérateurs binaires \\open Séparateurs \\oplus Opérateurs binaires \\otimes Opérateurs binaires \\over Séparateurs \\overbar Accentuation \\overbrace Accentuation \\overbracket Accentuation \\overline Accentuation \\overparen Accentuation \\overshell Accentuation \\parallel Notation de géométrie \\partial Symboles \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Notation de géométrie \\phantom Symboles \\phi Lettres grecques \\Phi Lettres grecques \\pi Lettres grecques \\Pi Lettres grecques \\pm Opérateurs binaires \\pppprime Nombres premiers \\ppprime Nombres premiers \\pprime Nombres premiers \\prec Opérateurs relationnels \\preceq Opérateurs relationnels \\prime Nombres premiers \\prod Opérateurs mathématiques \\propto Opérateurs relationnels \\psi Lettres grecques \\Psi Lettres grecques \\qdrt Nombres premiers \\quadratic Nombres premiers \\rangle Séparateurs \\Rangle Séparateurs \\ratio Opérateurs relationnels \\rbrace Séparateurs \\rbrack Séparateurs \\Rbrack Séparateurs \\rceil Séparateurs \\rddots Dots \\Re Symboles \\rect Symboles \\rfloor Séparateurs \\rho Lettres grecques \\Rho Lettres grecques \\rhvec Accentuation \\right Séparateurs \\rightarrow Flèches \\Rightarrow Flèches \\rightharpoondown Flèches \\rightharpoonup Flèches \\rmoust Séparateurs \\root Symboles \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Barres obliques \\sdivide Barres obliques \\searrow Flèches \\setminus Opérateurs binaires \\sigma Lettres grecques \\Sigma Lettres grecques \\sim Opérateurs relationnels \\simeq Opérateurs relationnels \\smash Flèches \\smile Opérateurs relationnels \\spadesuit Symboles \\sqcap Opérateurs binaires \\sqcup Opérateurs binaires \\sqrt Nombres premiers \\sqsubseteq Ensemble de notations \\sqsuperseteq Ensemble de notations \\star Opérateurs binaires \\subset Ensemble de notations \\subseteq Ensemble de notations \\succ Opérateurs relationnels \\succeq Opérateurs relationnels \\sum Opérateurs mathématiques \\superset Ensemble de notations \\superseteq Ensemble de notations \\swarrow Flèches \\tau Lettres grecques \\Tau Lettres grecques \\therefore Opérateurs relationnels \\theta Lettres grecques \\Theta Lettres grecques \\thicksp Caractères d'espace \\thinsp Caractères d'espace \\tilde Accentuation \\times Opérateurs binaires \\to Flèches \\top Notations logiques \\tvec Flèches \\ubar Accentuation \\Ubar Accentuation \\underbar Accentuation \\underbrace Accentuation \\underbracket Accentuation \\underline Accentuation \\underparen Accentuation \\uparrow Flèches \\Uparrow Flèches \\updownarrow Flèches \\Updownarrow Flèches \\uplus Opérateurs binaires \\upsilon Lettres grecques \\Upsilon Lettres grecques \\varepsilon Lettres grecques \\varphi Lettres grecques \\varpi Lettres grecques \\varrho Lettres grecques \\varsigma Lettres grecques \\vartheta Lettres grecques \\vbar Séparateurs \\vdash Opérateurs relationnels \\vdots Dots \\vec Accentuation \\vee Opérateurs binaires \\vert Séparateurs \\Vert Séparateurs \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Flèches \\vthicksp Caractères d'espace \\wedge Opérateurs binaires \\wp Symboles \\wr Opérateurs binaires \\xi Lettres grecques \\Xi Lettres grecques \\zeta Lettres grecques \\Zeta Lettres grecques \\zwnj Caractères d'espace \\zwsp Caractères d'espace ~= Opérateurs relationnels -+ Opérateurs binaires +- Opérateurs binaires << Opérateurs relationnels <= Opérateurs relationnels -> Flèches >= Opérateurs relationnels >> Opérateurs relationnels Fonctions reconnues Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Pour accéder à la liste de fonctions reconnues, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues. Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies. Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, comme par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des addresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste. L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon le cas. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS. Si vous souhaitez désactiver une des options de mise en forme automatique, désactivez la case à coche de l'élément pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas de mise en forme automatique sous l'onglet Fichier -> AParamètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. Correction automatique de texte Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des phrases. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase." + "body": "Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique de l'éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE servent à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus. Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique. La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets: AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et Correction automatique de texte. AutoMaths Lorsque vous travailler dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque. Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé. Remarque: Les codes sont sensibles à la casse Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques. Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer. Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier. Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones: le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Remplacer. Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste. Cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine. Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe. Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous les codes pris en charge par l'éditeur de documents à présent. La liste complète des codes pris en charge est également disponible sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Les codes disponibles Code Symbole Catégorie !! Symboles ... Dots :: Opérateurs := Opérateurs /< Opérateurs relationnels /> Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels \\above Indices et exposants \\acute Accentuation \\aleph Lettres hébraïques \\alpha Lettres grecques \\Alpha Lettres grecques \\amalg Opérateurs binaires \\angle Notation de géométrie \\aoint Intégrales \\approx Opérateurs relationnels \\asmash Flèches \\ast Opérateurs binaires \\asymp Opérateurs relationnels \\atop Opérateurs \\bar Trait suscrit/souscrit \\Bar Accentuation \\because Opérateurs relationnels \\begin Séparateurs \\below Indices et exposants \\bet Lettres hébraïques \\beta Lettres grecques \\Beta Lettres grecques \\beth Lettres hébraïques \\bigcap Grands opérateurs \\bigcup Grands opérateurs \\bigodot Grands opérateurs \\bigoplus Grands opérateurs \\bigotimes Grands opérateurs \\bigsqcup Grands opérateurs \\biguplus Grands opérateurs \\bigvee Grands opérateurs \\bigwedge Grands opérateurs \\binomial Équations \\bot Notations logiques \\bowtie Opérateurs relationnels \\box Symboles \\boxdot Opérateurs binaires \\boxminus Opérateurs binaires \\boxplus Opérateurs binaires \\bra Séparateurs \\break Symboles \\breve Accentuation \\bullet Opérateurs binaires \\cap Opérateurs binaires \\cbrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\cases Symboles \\cdot Opérateurs binaires \\cdots Dots \\check Accentuation \\chi Lettres grecques \\Chi Lettres grecques \\circ Opérateurs binaires \\close Séparateurs \\clubsuit Symboles \\coint Intégrales \\cong Opérateurs relationnels \\coprod Opérateurs mathématiques \\cup Opérateurs binaires \\dalet Lettres hébraïques \\daleth Lettres hébraïques \\dashv Opérateurs relationnels \\dd Lettres avec double barres \\Dd Lettres avec double barres \\ddddot Accentuation \\dddot Accentuation \\ddot Accentuation \\ddots Dots \\defeq Opérateurs relationnels \\degc Symboles \\degf Symboles \\degree Symboles \\delta Lettres grecques \\Delta Lettres grecques \\Deltaeq Opérateurs \\diamond Opérateurs binaires \\diamondsuit Symboles \\div Opérateurs binaires \\dot Accentuation \\doteq Opérateurs relationnels \\dots Dots \\doublea Lettres avec double barres \\doubleA Lettres avec double barres \\doubleb Lettres avec double barres \\doubleB Lettres avec double barres \\doublec Lettres avec double barres \\doubleC Lettres avec double barres \\doubled Lettres avec double barres \\doubleD Lettres avec double barres \\doublee Lettres avec double barres \\doubleE Lettres avec double barres \\doublef Lettres avec double barres \\doubleF Lettres avec double barres \\doubleg Lettres avec double barres \\doubleG Lettres avec double barres \\doubleh Lettres avec double barres \\doubleH Lettres avec double barres \\doublei Lettres avec double barres \\doubleI Lettres avec double barres \\doublej Lettres avec double barres \\doubleJ Lettres avec double barres \\doublek Lettres avec double barres \\doubleK Lettres avec double barres \\doublel Lettres avec double barres \\doubleL Lettres avec double barres \\doublem Lettres avec double barres \\doubleM Lettres avec double barres \\doublen Lettres avec double barres \\doubleN Lettres avec double barres \\doubleo Lettres avec double barres \\doubleO Lettres avec double barres \\doublep Lettres avec double barres \\doubleP Lettres avec double barres \\doubleq Lettres avec double barres \\doubleQ Lettres avec double barres \\doubler Lettres avec double barres \\doubleR Lettres avec double barres \\doubles Lettres avec double barres \\doubleS Lettres avec double barres \\doublet Lettres avec double barres \\doubleT Lettres avec double barres \\doubleu Lettres avec double barres \\doubleU Lettres avec double barres \\doublev Lettres avec double barres \\doubleV Lettres avec double barres \\doublew Lettres avec double barres \\doubleW Lettres avec double barres \\doublex Lettres avec double barres \\doubleX Lettres avec double barres \\doubley Lettres avec double barres \\doubleY Lettres avec double barres \\doublez Lettres avec double barres \\doubleZ Lettres avec double barres \\downarrow Flèches \\Downarrow Flèches \\dsmash Flèches \\ee Lettres avec double barres \\ell Symboles \\emptyset Ensemble de notations \\emsp Caractères d'espace \\end Séparateurs \\ensp Caractères d'espace \\epsilon Lettres grecques \\Epsilon Lettres grecques \\eqarray Symboles \\equiv Opérateurs relationnels \\eta Lettres grecques \\Eta Lettres grecques \\exists Notations logiques \\forall Notations logiques \\fraktura Fraktur \\frakturA Fraktur \\frakturb Fraktur \\frakturB Fraktur \\frakturc Fraktur \\frakturC Fraktur \\frakturd Fraktur \\frakturD Fraktur \\frakture Fraktur \\frakturE Fraktur \\frakturf Fraktur \\frakturF Fraktur \\frakturg Fraktur \\frakturG Fraktur \\frakturh Fraktur \\frakturH Fraktur \\frakturi Fraktur \\frakturI Fraktur \\frakturk Fraktur \\frakturK Fraktur \\frakturl Fraktur \\frakturL Fraktur \\frakturm Fraktur \\frakturM Fraktur \\frakturn Fraktur \\frakturN Fraktur \\frakturo Fraktur \\frakturO Fraktur \\frakturp Fraktur \\frakturP Fraktur \\frakturq Fraktur \\frakturQ Fraktur \\frakturr Fraktur \\frakturR Fraktur \\frakturs Fraktur \\frakturS Fraktur \\frakturt Fraktur \\frakturT Fraktur \\frakturu Fraktur \\frakturU Fraktur \\frakturv Fraktur \\frakturV Fraktur \\frakturw Fraktur \\frakturW Fraktur \\frakturx Fraktur \\frakturX Fraktur \\fraktury Fraktur \\frakturY Fraktur \\frakturz Fraktur \\frakturZ Fraktur \\frown Opérateurs relationnels \\funcapply Opérateurs binaires \\G Lettres grecques \\gamma Lettres grecques \\Gamma Lettres grecques \\ge Opérateurs relationnels \\geq Opérateurs relationnels \\gets Flèches \\gg Opérateurs relationnels \\gimel Lettres hébraïques \\grave Accentuation \\hairsp Caractères d'espace \\hat Accentuation \\hbar Symboles \\heartsuit Symboles \\hookleftarrow Flèches \\hookrightarrow Flèches \\hphantom Flèches \\hsmash Flèches \\hvec Accentuation \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Lettres avec double barres \\iiint Intégrales \\iint Intégrales \\iiiint Intégrales \\Im Symboles \\imath Symboles \\in Opérateurs relationnels \\inc Symboles \\infty Symboles \\int Intégrales \\integral Intégrales \\iota Lettres grecques \\Iota Lettres grecques \\itimes Opérateurs mathématiques \\j Symboles \\jj Lettres avec double barres \\jmath Symboles \\kappa Lettres grecques \\Kappa Lettres grecques \\ket Séparateurs \\lambda Lettres grecques \\Lambda Lettres grecques \\langle Séparateurs \\lbbrack Séparateurs \\lbrace Séparateurs \\lbrack Séparateurs \\lceil Séparateurs \\ldiv Barres obliques \\ldivide Barres obliques \\ldots Dots \\le Opérateurs relationnels \\left Séparateurs \\leftarrow Flèches \\Leftarrow Flèches \\leftharpoondown Flèches \\leftharpoonup Flèches \\leftrightarrow Flèches \\Leftrightarrow Flèches \\leq Opérateurs relationnels \\lfloor Séparateurs \\lhvec Accentuation \\limit Limites \\ll Opérateurs relationnels \\lmoust Séparateurs \\Longleftarrow Flèches \\Longleftrightarrow Flèches \\Longrightarrow Flèches \\lrhar Flèches \\lvec Accentuation \\mapsto Flèches \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Caractères d'espace \\mid Opérateurs relationnels \\middle Symboles \\models Opérateurs relationnels \\mp Opérateurs binaires \\mu Lettres grecques \\Mu Lettres grecques \\nabla Symboles \\naryand Opérateurs \\nbsp Caractères d'espace \\ne Opérateurs relationnels \\nearrow Flèches \\neq Opérateurs relationnels \\ni Opérateurs relationnels \\norm Séparateurs \\notcontain Opérateurs relationnels \\notelement Opérateurs relationnels \\notin Opérateurs relationnels \\nu Lettres grecques \\Nu Lettres grecques \\nwarrow Flèches \\o Lettres grecques \\O Lettres grecques \\odot Opérateurs binaires \\of Opérateurs \\oiiint Intégrales \\oiint Intégrales \\oint Intégrales \\omega Lettres grecques \\Omega Lettres grecques \\ominus Opérateurs binaires \\open Séparateurs \\oplus Opérateurs binaires \\otimes Opérateurs binaires \\over Séparateurs \\overbar Accentuation \\overbrace Accentuation \\overbracket Accentuation \\overline Accentuation \\overparen Accentuation \\overshell Accentuation \\parallel Notation de géométrie \\partial Symboles \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Notation de géométrie \\phantom Symboles \\phi Lettres grecques \\Phi Lettres grecques \\pi Lettres grecques \\Pi Lettres grecques \\pm Opérateurs binaires \\pppprime Nombres premiers \\ppprime Nombres premiers \\pprime Nombres premiers \\prec Opérateurs relationnels \\preceq Opérateurs relationnels \\prime Nombres premiers \\prod Opérateurs mathématiques \\propto Opérateurs relationnels \\psi Lettres grecques \\Psi Lettres grecques \\qdrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\quadratic Racine carrée et radicaux \\rangle Séparateurs \\Rangle Séparateurs \\ratio Opérateurs relationnels \\rbrace Séparateurs \\rbrack Séparateurs \\Rbrack Séparateurs \\rceil Séparateurs \\rddots Dots \\Re Symboles \\rect Symboles \\rfloor Séparateurs \\rho Lettres grecques \\Rho Lettres grecques \\rhvec Accentuation \\right Séparateurs \\rightarrow Flèches \\Rightarrow Flèches \\rightharpoondown Flèches \\rightharpoonup Flèches \\rmoust Séparateurs \\root Symboles \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Barres obliques \\sdivide Barres obliques \\searrow Flèches \\setminus Opérateurs binaires \\sigma Lettres grecques \\Sigma Lettres grecques \\sim Opérateurs relationnels \\simeq Opérateurs relationnels \\smash Flèches \\smile Opérateurs relationnels \\spadesuit Symboles \\sqcap Opérateurs binaires \\sqcup Opérateurs binaires \\sqrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\sqsubseteq Ensemble de notations \\sqsuperseteq Ensemble de notations \\star Opérateurs binaires \\subset Ensemble de notations \\subseteq Ensemble de notations \\succ Opérateurs relationnels \\succeq Opérateurs relationnels \\sum Opérateurs mathématiques \\superset Ensemble de notations \\superseteq Ensemble de notations \\swarrow Flèches \\tau Lettres grecques \\Tau Lettres grecques \\therefore Opérateurs relationnels \\theta Lettres grecques \\Theta Lettres grecques \\thicksp Caractères d'espace \\thinsp Caractères d'espace \\tilde Accentuation \\times Opérateurs binaires \\to Flèches \\top Notations logiques \\tvec Flèches \\ubar Accentuation \\Ubar Accentuation \\underbar Accentuation \\underbrace Accentuation \\underbracket Accentuation \\underline Accentuation \\underparen Accentuation \\uparrow Flèches \\Uparrow Flèches \\updownarrow Flèches \\Updownarrow Flèches \\uplus Opérateurs binaires \\upsilon Lettres grecques \\Upsilon Lettres grecques \\varepsilon Lettres grecques \\varphi Lettres grecques \\varpi Lettres grecques \\varrho Lettres grecques \\varsigma Lettres grecques \\vartheta Lettres grecques \\vbar Séparateurs \\vdash Opérateurs relationnels \\vdots Dots \\vec Accentuation \\vee Opérateurs binaires \\vert Séparateurs \\Vert Séparateurs \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Flèches \\vthicksp Caractères d'espace \\wedge Opérateurs binaires \\wp Symboles \\wr Opérateurs binaires \\xi Lettres grecques \\Xi Lettres grecques \\zeta Lettres grecques \\Zeta Lettres grecques \\zwnj Caractères d'espace \\zwsp Caractères d'espace ~= Opérateurs relationnels -+ Opérateurs binaires +- Opérateurs binaires /< Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels -> Flèches >= Opérateurs relationnels >> Opérateurs relationnels Fonctions reconnues Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues. Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies. Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des adresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste. L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon le cas. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS. Si vous souhaitez désactiver une des options de mise en forme automatique, passez sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. Correction automatique de texte Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des propositions. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase. Par défaut, l'éditeur met la première lettre du mot dans une cellule en majuscule. Pour désactiver cette option, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Mettre la première lettre des cellules du tableau en majuscule. Vous pouvez également personnaliser la mise en majuscule après certains mots en saisissant les mots requis dans le champ Ne pas mettre en majuscule après et en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter, ou en choisissant les mots requis dans la liste correspondante ci-dessous. Vous pouvez choisir le mode de fonctionnement des exceptions en fonction de la langue dans la liste déroulante Exceptions pour la langue. Utilisez le bouton Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour annuler toutes les modifications personnalisées." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", "title": "Afficher/masquer les caractères non imprimables", - "body": "Les caractères non imprimables aident à éditer le document. Ils indiquent la présence de différents types de mises en forme, mais ils ne sont pas imprimés, même quand ils sont affichés à l'écran. Pour afficher ou masquer les caractères non imprimables dans l'Éditeur de Documents, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les caractères non imprimables sont les suivants : Espaces Il est inséré lorsque vous appuyez sur la Barre d'espacement sur le clavier. Il crée un espace entre les caractères. Tabulations Il est inséré lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Tabulation. Il est utilisé pour faire avancer le curseur sur le prochain taquet de tabulation. Marques de paragraphe Il est inséré lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Il est utilisé pour terminer un paragraphe et ajouter un peu d'espace après. Il contient des informations sur la mise en forme du paragraphe. Sauts de ligne Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez la combinaison de touches Shift+Entrée. Il rompt la ligne actuelle et met des lignes de texte très rapprochées. Retour à la ligne est principalement utilisé dans les titres et les en-têtes. Espace insécable Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Shift+Espace. Il crée un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour commencer une nouvelle ligne. Sauts de page Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez l'icône Sauts de page dans l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de page ou sélectionnez l'option Saut de page avant du menu contextuel ou de la fenêtre des paramètres avancés. Sauts de section Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez l'icône Sauts de page dans l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure puis sélectionnez une des options du sous-menu Insérer un saut de section (l’indicateur de saut de section diffère selon l'option choisie : Page suivante, Page continue, Page paire ou Page impaire). Sauts de colonne Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez l'icône Sauts de page dans l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure puis sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de colonne. Marquers des tableaux Fin de cellule et Fin de ligne Ces marqueurs contiennent des codes de mise en forme de la cellule individuelle et de la ligne respectivement. Petit carré noir dans la marge gauche d'un paragraphe Il indique qu'au moins une des options de paragraphe a été appliquée, par exemple Lignes solidaires, Saut de page avant. Symboles d'ancre Ils indiquent la position des objets flottants ( valables pour tout style d'habillage sauf le style En ligne), par exemple images, formes automatiques, graphiques. Vous devez sélectionner un objet pour faire son ancre visible." + "body": "Les caractères non imprimables aident à éditer le document. Ils indiquent la présence de différents types de mises en forme, mais ils ne sont pas imprimés, même quand ils sont affichés à l'écran. Pour afficher ou masquer les caractères non imprimables dans l'Éditeur de Documents, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les caractères non imprimables sont les suivants : Espaces Il est inséré lorsque vous appuyez sur la Barre d'espacement sur le clavier. Il crée un espace entre les caractères. Tabulations Il est inséré lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Tabulation. Il est utilisé pour faire avancer le curseur sur le prochain taquet de tabulation. Marques de paragraphe Il est inséré lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Il est utilisé pour terminer un paragraphe et ajouter un peu d'espace après. Il contient des informations sur la mise en forme du paragraphe. Sauts de ligne Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez la combinaison de touches Shift+Entrée. Il rompt la ligne actuelle et met des lignes de texte très rapprochées. Retour à la ligne est principalement utilisé dans les titres et les en-têtes. Espace insécable Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Shift+Espace. Il crée un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour commencer une nouvelle ligne. Sauts de page Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez l'icône Sauts de page dans l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de page ou sélectionnez l'option Saut de page avant du menu contextuel ou de la fenêtre des paramètres avancés. Sauts de section Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez l'icône Sauts de page dans l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure puis sélectionnez une des options du sous-menu Insérer un saut de section (l’indicateur de saut de section diffère selon l'option choisie : Page suivante, Page continue, Page paire ou Page impaire). Sauts de colonne Il est inséré lorsque vous utilisez l'icône Sauts de page dans l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure puis sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de colonne. Marqueurs des tableaux Fin de cellule et Fin de ligne Ces marqueurs contiennent des codes de mise en forme de la cellule individuelle et de la ligne respectivement. Petit carré noir dans la marge gauche d'un paragraphe Il indique qu'au moins une des options de paragraphe a été appliquée, par exemple Lignes solidaires, Saut de page avant. Symboles d'ancre Ils indiquent la position des objets flottants ( valables pour tout style d'habillage sauf le style En ligne), par exemple images, formes automatiques, graphiques. Vous devez sélectionner un objet pour faire son ancre visible." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/OCR.htm", @@ -383,7 +403,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", "title": "Modifier les retraits du paragraphe", - "body": "En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez changer le premier décalage de la ligne sur la partie gauche de la page aussi bien que le décalage du paragraphe du côté gauche et du côté droit de la page. Pour ce faire, configurez les paramètres nécessaires dans la section Retraits sur la barre latérale droite Paramètres du paragraphe, Gauche spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge gauche de la page et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Droite spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge droite de la page et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Spécial - spécifier le retrait de la première ligne du paragraphe : sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu, ou placez le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris ou tout le texte en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite, dans la fenêtre ouverte Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés, passez à l'onglet Retraits et espacement et configurez les paramètres dans la section Retraits (les paramètres sont présentés ci-dessus), cliquez sur OK. Pour modifier rapidement le retrait de paragraphe du côté gauche de la page, vous pouvez également utiliser les icônes respectives dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure : Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait . Vous pouvez également utilisez la règle horizontale pour changer les retraits. Sélectionnez le(s) paragraphe(s) et faites glisser les marqueurs tout au long de la règle Le marqueur Retrait de première ligne sert à définir le décalage du côté gauche de la page pour la première ligne du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait suspendu sert à définir le décalage sert à définir le décalage du bord gauche de la page pour la deuxième ligne et toutes les lignes suivantes du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait de gauche sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe du côté gauche de la page. Le marqueur Retrait de droite sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe du côté droit de la page." + "body": "En utilisant l'Éditeur de Documents, vous pouvez changer le premier décalage de la ligne sur la partie gauche de la page aussi bien que le décalage du paragraphe du côté gauche et du côté droit de la page. Pour ce faire, configurez les paramètres nécessaires dans la section Retraits sur la barre latérale droite Paramètres du paragraphe, Gauche spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge gauche de la page et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Droite spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge droite de la page et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Spécial - spécifier le retrait de la première ligne du paragraphe : sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu, ou placez le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris ou tout le texte en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite, dans la fenêtre ouverte Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés, passez à l'onglet Retraits et espacement et configurez les paramètres dans la section Retraits (les paramètres sont présentés ci-dessus), cliquez sur OK. Pour modifier rapidement le retrait de paragraphe du côté gauche de la page, vous pouvez également utiliser les icônes respectives dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure : Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait . Vous pouvez également utilisez la règle horizontale pour changer les retraits. Sélectionnez le(s) paragraphe(s) et faites glisser les marqueurs tout au long de la règle : Le marqueur Retrait de première ligne sert à définir le décalage du côté gauche de la page pour la première ligne du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait suspendu sert à définir le décalage sert à définir le décalage du bord gauche de la page pour la deuxième ligne et toutes les lignes suivantes du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait de gauche sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe du côté gauche de la page. Le marqueur Retrait de droite sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe du côté droit de la page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm", @@ -392,13 +412,13 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", - "title": "Enregistrer, exporter, imprimer votre document", - "body": "Enregistrement Par défaut, l'Éditeur de Documents en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés. Pour enregistrer manuellement votre document actuel dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer le document sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDF/A, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de document (DOTX or OTT). Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger le document résultant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB,DOCXF, OFORM. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer le document actif, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer le fichier dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance. Il est aussi possible d'imprimer un fragment de texte en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Imprimer la sélection). Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe." + "title": "Enregistrer, télécharger et imprimer un document ", + "body": "Enregistrement Par défaut, l'éditeur de documents en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés . Pour enregistrer manuellement votre document actuel dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés . Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer le document sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de document (DOTX or OTT). Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger le document résultant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG. Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer une copie sous, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer le document actif, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance. Configurez les paramètres suivants dans la fenêtre Imprimer qui s'affiche: Destination - sélectionnez la destination du fichier à imprimer, par ex. Enregistrer au format PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc. Orientation - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale. Pages - sélectionnez l'une des options d'impression: Tous, Actuelle, Pages impaires uniquement, Pages paires uniquement ou Personnalisé. Dans ce dernier cas, il faut saisir les numéros de pages manuellement. Mode couleur - sélectionnez si vous souhaitez imprimer le fichier Couleur ou Noir et blanc. Veuillez noter que cette option n'est disponible que si Microsoft XPS Document Writer est défini comme le paramètre de Destination. Lorsque Fax est défini comme le paramètre de Destination, la couleur par défaut est noir et blanc. Cliquez sur Plus de paramètres pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, Taille du papier - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante ou définissez la taille de l'utilisateur. Mise à l'échelle - définir la mise à l'échelle du fichier lors de l'impression, ajuster à la largeur de page ou sélectionnez la mise à l'échelle personnalisée en utilisant la case à cocher Échelle et le champ de saisie approprié. Pages par feuille - définir le nombre de pages que vous voulez sur une page imprimée, par ex. deux, six, neuf etc.; Marges - définir les marges de la page. Vous pouvez choisir les marges par défaut ou personnaliser les marges en pouces. Pour les marges personnalisées, définissez manuellement les valeurs pour la marge supérieure, inférieure, gauche et droite. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Aucun pour ne pas avoir de marges. Options - cochez la case pour Imprimer les en-têtes et les pieds de page ou décochez cette option pour imprimer sans aucun en-tête et les pied de page. Imprimer via la boîte de dialogue du système - cliquez sur cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue du système et configurer l'impression. Dans la version de bureau, les paramètres d'impression disponibles sont Zone d'impression, Nombre de pages, Copies, Impression sur les deux côtés, Taille de page, Orientation de la page et Marges. Vous pouvez également imprimer au format PDF ou utilisez le bouton Impression rapide de la barre d'outils supérieure pour imprimer le fichier sur la dernière imprimante sélectionnée ou sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par défaut. Il est aussi possible d'imprimer un fragment de texte en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Imprimer la sélection). Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", "title": "Insérer les sauts de section", - "body": "Les sauts de section vous permettent d'appliquer des mises en page et mises en formes différentes pour de certaines parties de votre document. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numérotations des pages, des marges, la taille, l'orientation, ou le numéro de colonne individuels pour chaque section séparée. Remarque : un saut de section inséré définit la mise en page de la partie précédente du document. Pour insérer un saut de section à la position actuelle du curseur : cliquez sur l'icône Saut de section dans l'onglet Insertion ou Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de section sélectionnez le type du saut de section nécessaire : Page suivante - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante Page continue - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page actuelle Page paire - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante paire Page impaire - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante impaire Des sauts d'une section ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par un double trait pointillé : Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de section insérés, cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de section, sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Lorsque vous supprimez un saut de section, la mise en forme de cette section sera également supprimée, car un saut de section définit la mise en forme de la section précédente. La partie du document qui précède le saut de section supprimé acquiert la mise en forme de la partie qui la suive." + "body": "Les sauts de section vous permettent d'appliquer des mises en page et mises en formes différentes pour de certaines parties de votre document. Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numérotations des pages, des marges, la taille, l'orientation, ou le numéro de colonne individuels pour chaque section séparée. Remarque : un saut de section inséré définit la mise en page de la partie précédente du document. Pour insérer un saut de section à la position actuelle du curseur : cliquez sur l'icône Saut de section dans l'onglet Insertion ou Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de section sélectionnez le type du saut de section nécessaire : Page suivante - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante Page continue - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page actuelle Page paire - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante paire Page impaire - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante impaire Des sauts d'une section ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par un double trait pointillé : Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de section insérés, cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de section, sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Lorsque vous supprimez un saut de section, la mise en forme de cette section sera également supprimée, car un saut de section définit la mise en forme de la section précédente. La partie du document qui précède le saut de section supprimé acquiert la mise en forme de la partie qui la suit." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm", @@ -408,7 +428,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Régler les paramètres de page", - "body": "Pour modifier la mise en page dans l'Éditeur de Documents, c'est-à-dire définir l'orientation et la taille de la page, ajuster les marges et insérer des colonnes, utilisez les icônes correspondantes dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : tous ces paramètres sont appliqués au document entier. Si vous voulez définir de différentes marges de page, l'orientation, la taille, ou le numéro de colonne pour les parties différentes de votre document, consultez cette page. Orientation de page Changez l'orientation de page actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône Orientation . Le type d'orientation par défaut est Portrait qui peut être commuté sur Paysage. Taille de la page Changez le format A4 par défaut en cliquant sur l'icône Taille de la page et sélectionnez la taille nécessaire dans la liste. Les formats offerts sont les suivants : US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) Vous pouvez définir une taille de la page particulière en utilisant l'option Taille personnalisée dans la liste. La fenêtre Taille de la page s'ouvrira où vous pourrez sélectionner le Préréglage voulu (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Enveloppe #10, Enveloppe DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Enveloppe Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) ou définir des valeurs personnalisées de Largeur et Hauteur. Entrez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les changements. Marges de la page Modifiez les marges par défaut, c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bords de la page et le texte du paragraphe, en cliquant sur l'icône Marges et sélectionnez un des paramètres prédéfinis : Normal, US Normal, Étroit, Modérer, Large. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Marges personnalisées pour définir les valeurs nécessaires dans la fenêtre Marges qui s'ouvre. Entrez les valeurs des marges Haut, Bas, Gauche et Droite de la page dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Position de la reliure permet de définir l'espace supplémentaire à la marge latérale gauche ou supérieure du document. La Position de reliure assure que la reliure n'empiète pas sur le texte. Dans la fenêtre Marges spécifiez la talle de marge et la position de la reliure appropriée. Remarque : ce n'est pas possible de définir la Position de reliure lorsque l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis est active. Dans le menu déroulante Plusieurs pages, choisissez l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis pour configurer des pages en regard dans des documents recto verso. Lorsque cette option est activée, les marges Gauche et Droite se transforment en marges A l'intérieur et A l'extérieur respectivement. Dans le menu déroulante Orientation choisissez Portrait ou Paysage. Toutes les modifications apportées s'affichent dans la fenêtre Aperçu. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK. Les marges personnalisées seront appliquées au document actuel et l'option Dernière mesure avec les paramètres spécifiés apparaît dans la liste des Marges pour que vous puissiez les appliquer à d'autres documents. Vous pouvez également modifier les marges manuellement en faisant glisser la bordure entre les zones grises et blanches sur les règles (les zones grises des règles indiquent les marges de page) : Colonnes Pour appliquez une mise en page multicolonne, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes et sélectionnez le type de la colonne nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : Deux - pour ajouter deux colonnes de la même largeur, Trois - pour ajouter trois colonnes de la même largeur, A gauche - pour ajouter deux colonnes : une étroite colonne à gauche et une large colonne à droite, A droite - pour ajouter deux colonnes : une étroite colonne à droite et une large colonne à gauche. Si vous souhaitez ajuster les paramètres de colonne, sélectionnez l'option Colonnes personnalisées dans la liste. La fenêtre Colonnes s'ouvrira où vous pourrez définir le Nombre de colonnes nécessaire (il est possible d'ajouter jusqu'à 12 colonnes) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Entrez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Cochez la case Diviseur de colonne pour ajouter une ligne verticale entre les colonnes. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les changements. Pour spécifier exactement la position d'une nouvelle colonne, placez le curseur avant le texte à déplacer dans une nouvelle colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de colonne. Le texte sera déplacé vers la colonne suivante. Les sauts de colonne ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par une ligne pointillée : . Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de section insérés, cliquez sur l'icône sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de colonne,sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur une touche Suppr. Pour modifier manuellement la largeur et l'espacement entre les colonnes, vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale. Pour annuler les colonnes et revenir à la disposition en une seule colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Une dans la liste." + "body": "Pour modifier la mise en page dans l'éditeur de documents, c'est-à-dire définir l'orientation et la taille de la page, ajuster les marges et insérer des colonnes, utilisez les icônes correspondantes sous l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque: tous ces paramètres sont appliqués au document entier. Si vous voulez définir de différentes marges de page, l'orientation, la taille, ou le numéro de colonne pour les parties différentes de votre document, consultez cette page. Orientation de page Changez l'orientation de page actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône Orientation . Le type d'orientation par défaut est Portrait qui peut être commuté sur Paysage. Taille de la page Changez le format A4 par défaut en cliquant sur l'icône Taille et sélectionnez le format nécessaire dans la liste. Les formats offerts sont les suivants. Les formats offerts sont les suivants: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) Vous pouvez définir une taille de la page particulière en utilisant l'option Taille personnalisée dans la liste. La fenêtre Taille de la page s'ouvrira où vous pourrez sélectionner le Préréglage voulu (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Enveloppe #10, Enveloppe DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Enveloppe Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) ou définir des valeurs personnalisées de Largeur et Hauteur. Saisissez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les changements. Marges de la page Modifiez les marges par défaut, c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bords de la page et le texte du paragraphe, en cliquant sur l'icône Marges et sélectionnez un des paramètres prédéfinis: Normal, US Normal, Étroit, Modérer, Large. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Marges personnalisées pour définir les valeurs nécessaires dans la fenêtre Marges qui s'ouvre. Entrez les valeurs des marges Haut, Bas, Gauche et Droite de la page dans les champs d'entrées ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Position de la reliure permet de définir l'espace supplémentaire à la marge latérale gauche ou supérieure du document. L'option Reliure assure que la reliure n'empiète pas sur le texte. Dans la fenêtre Marges spécifiez la position de la reliure appropriée dans le champ de saisie et . Remarque: ce n'est pas possible de définir la Position de reliure lorsque l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis est active. Dans le menu déroulante Plusieurs pages, choisissez l'option des Pages en vis-à-vis pour configurer des pages en regard dans des documents recto verso. Lorsque cette option est activée, les marges Gauche et Droite se transforment en marges À l'intérieur et À l'extérieur respectivement. Dans le menu déroulante Orientation choisissez Portrait ou Paysage. Toutes les modifications apportées s'affichent dans la fenêtre Aperçu. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK. Les marges personnalisées seront appliquées au document actuel et l'option Dernières personnalisées avec les paramètres spécifiés apparaît dans la liste Marges pour que vous puissiez les appliquer à d'autres documents. Vous pouvez également modifier les marges manuellement en faisant glisser la bordure entre les zones grises et blanches sur les règles (les zones grises des règles indiquent les marges de page): Colonnes Pour appliquez une mise en page à plusieurs colonnes, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes et sélectionnez le type de la colonne nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options suivantes sont disponibles: Deux pour ajouter deux colonnes de la même largeur, Trois pour ajouter trois colonnes de la même largeur, À gauche, pour ajouter deux colonnes: une étroite colonne à gauche et une large colonne à droite, À droite pour ajouter deux colonnes: une étroite colonne à droite et une large colonne à gauche. Si vous souhaitez ajuster les paramètres de colonne, sélectionnez l'option Colonnes personnalisées dans la liste. La fenêtre Colonnes s'ouvrira où vous pouvez définir le Nombre de colonnes, la Largeur des colonnes et et Espacement. Entrez vos nouvelles valeurs dans les champs de saisie ou ajustez les valeurs existantes en utilisant les boutons de direction. Activez l'option Largeurs de colonne identiques pour appliquer la même largeur à toutes les colonnes. Activez l'option Diviseur de colonne pour ajouter une ligne verticale entre les colonnes. Lorsque tout est prêt, cliquez sur OK pour valider les changements. Pour indiquer la position exacte d'une nouvelle colonne, placez le curseur avant le texte à déplacer dans une nouvelle colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de colonne. Le texte sera déplacé vers la colonne suivante. Les sauts de colonne ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par une ligne pointillée: . Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de colonne insérés, cliquez sur l'icône sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de colonne,sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur une touche Suppr. Pour modifier manuellement la largeur et l'espacement entre les colonnes, vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale. Pour annuler les colonnes et revenir à la mise en page à une seule colonne, cliquez sur l'icône Colonnes de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Une dans la liste." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", @@ -421,9 +441,9 @@ var indexes = "body": "Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE dispose d'une extension qui va lire un texte à voix haute. Sélectionnez le texte à lire à haute voix. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez Parole. Le texte sera lu à haute voix." }, { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Prise en charge des graphiques SmartArt par ONLYOFFICE Document Editor", - "body": "Prise en charge des graphiques SmartArt par l'Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Éditeur de documents ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les graphiques SmartArt qui étaient créés dans d'autres applications. Vous pouvez ouvrir un fichier contenant SmartArt et le modifier en tant qu'un élément graphique en utilisant les outils d'édition disponibles. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur un graphique SmartArt, les onglets suivants deviennent actifs sur la barre latérale droite pour modifier la disposition du graphique : Paramètres du paragraphe pour modifier les retraits et l'espacement, les enchaînements, les bordures et le remplissage, la police, les taquets et les marges intérieures. Veuillez consulter la section Mise en forme de paragraphe pour une description détaillée de toutes options disponibles. Cette onglet n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Paramètres de la forme pour modifier les formes inclues dans le graphique. Vous pouvez modifier les formes, le remplissage, les lignes, la taille, le style d'habillage, la position, les poids et les flèches, la zone de texte et le texte de remplacement. Paramètres de Texte Art pour modifier le style des objets Texte Art inclus dans le graphique SmartArt pour mettre en évidence du texte. Vous pouvez modifier le modèle de l'objet Text Art, le remplissage, la couleur et l'opacité, le poids, la couleur et le type des traits. Cette onglet n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Faites un clic droit sur la bordure du graphique SmartArt ou de ses éléments pour accéder aux options suivantes : L'option Style d'habillage permet de déterminer la façon de positionner l'objet par rapport au texte. L'option Style d'habillage ne devient disponible que pour le graphique SmartArt entier. Rotation pour définir le sens de rotation de l'élément inclus dans le graphique SmartArt : Faire pivoter à droite de 90°, Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°, Retourner horizontalement, Retourner verticalement. L'option Rotation n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Insérer une légende pour étiqueter des éléments du graphique SmartArt pour faire un renvoi. Paramètres avancés de la forme pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de mise en forme. Faites un clic droit sur l'élément du graphique SmartArt pour accéder aux options suivantes : Alignement vertical pour définir l'alignement du texte dans l'élément du graphique SmartArt : Aligner en haut, Aligner au milieu ou Aligner en bas. Orientation du texte pour définir l'orientation du texte dans l'élément du graphique SmartArt : Horizontal, Rotation du texte vers le bas, Rotation du texte vers le haut. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de mise en forme du paragraphe." + "id": "UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm", + "title": "Saisie vocale", + "body": "Dans l'éditeur de documents, vous pouvez écrire à la voix. Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter du texte, passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et sélectionnez Saisie vocale, sélectionnez la langue de reconnaissance vocale dans la fenêtre contextuelle, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer la dictée et commencez à parler. Une fois que vous pausez, le texte est ajouté dans le document. Pour désactiver la reconnaissance vocale, cliquez sur le bouton encore une fois. Pour assurer le bon fonctionnement du module complémentaire, vous devez disposer d'une périphérique d'entrée (par ex. un microphone ou une casque) et accorder à votre navigateur l'autorisation d'enregistrer." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", @@ -448,7 +468,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "Afficher les informations sur le document", - "body": "Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité dans l'Éditeur de Documents, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Descriptif du document.... Informations générales Le descriptif du document comprend l'ensemble des propriétés d'un document. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés. Emplacement - le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Ces paramètres ne sont disponibles que sous la version en ligne. Statistiques - le nombre de pages, paragraphes, mots, symboles, symboles avec des espaces. Titre, sujet, commentaire - ces paramètres facilitent la classification des documents. Vos pouvez saisir l'information nécessaire dans les champs appropriés. Dernière modification - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été modifié la dernière fois. Dernière modification par - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a apporté la dernière modification au document. Cette option est disponible pour édition collaborative du document quand plusieurs utilisateurs travaillent sur un même document. Application - l'application dans laquelle on a créé le document. Auteur - la personne qui a créé le fichier. Saisissez le nom approprié dans ce champ. Appuyez sur la touche Entrée pour ajouter un nouveau champ et spécifier encore un auteur. Si vous avez modifié les paramètres du fichier, cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. Remarque : Les Éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du document directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK. Informations d'autorisation Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur les permissions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est disponible que pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le document, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits. Historique des versions Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter l'historique des versions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à ce document, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Historique des versions de l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce document (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de document, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Les modifications apportées par l'auteur de la version/révision sont marquées avec la couleur qui est affichée à côté du nom de l'auteur dans la barre latérale gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer. Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions. Pour fermer l'onglet Fichier et reprendre le travail sur votre document, sélectionnez l'option Retour au document." + "body": "Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité dans l'Éditeur de Documents, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Descriptif du document... Informations générales Le descriptif du document comprend l'ensemble des propriétés d'un document. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés. Emplacement - le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Ces paramètres ne sont disponibles que sous la version en ligne. Statistiques - le nombre de pages, paragraphes, mots, symboles, symboles avec des espaces. Titre, sujet, commentaire - ces paramètres facilitent la classification des documents. Vos pouvez saisir l'information nécessaire dans les champs appropriés. Dernière modification - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été modifié la dernière fois. Dernière modification par - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a apporté la dernière modification au document. Cette option est disponible pour édition collaborative du document quand plusieurs utilisateurs travaillent sur un même document. Application - l'application dans laquelle on a créé le document. Auteur - la personne qui a créé le fichier. Saisissez le nom approprié dans ce champ. Appuyez sur la touche Entrée pour ajouter un nouveau champ et spécifier encore un auteur. Si vous avez modifié les paramètres du fichier, cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. Remarque : Les Éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du document directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK. Informations d'autorisation Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur les permissions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est disponible que pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le document, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits. Historique des versions Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter l'historique des versions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à ce document, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Historique des versions de l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce document (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de document, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Les modifications apportées par l'auteur de la version/révision sont marquées avec la couleur qui est affichée à côté du nom de l'auteur dans la barre latérale gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer. Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions. Pour fermer l'onglet Fichier et reprendre le travail sur votre document, sélectionnez l'option Retour au document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm", @@ -463,11 +483,11 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Insérer une vidéo", - "body": "Vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer. (l'adresse complète dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur) Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la vidéo doit être insérée. Passezà l'onglet Modules compléméntaires et choisissez YouTube. Collez l'URL et cliquez sur OK. Vérifiez si la vidéo est vrai et cliquez sur OK au-dessous la vidéo. Maintenant la vidéo est insérée dans votre document." + "body": "Vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre document dans l'Éditeur de Documents. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer. (l'adresse complète dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur) Accédez à votre document et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la vidéo doit être insérée. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez YouTube. Collez l'URL et cliquez sur OK. Vérifiez si la vidéo est vrai et cliquez sur OK au-dessous la vidéo. Maintenant la vidéo est insérée dans votre document." }, { - "id": "UsageInstructions/insertdropcap.htm", - "title": "Insérer une lettrine", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Documents, une Lettrine est une lettre initiale majuscule placée au début d'un paragraphe ou d'une section. La taille d'une lettrine est généralement plusieurs lignes. Pour ajouter une lettrine, placez le curseur à l'intérieur du paragraphe dans lequel vous voulez insérer une lettrine, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Lettrine sur la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante : Dans le texte - pour insérer une lettrine dans le paragraphe. Dans la marge - pour placer une lettrine dans la marge gauche. La lettre initiale du paragraphe sélectionné sera transformée en une lettrine. Si vous avez besoin d'ajouter quelques lettres, vous pouvez le faire manuellement : sélectionnez la lettrine et tapez les lettres nécessaires. Pour régler l'apparence de la lettrine (par exemple, taille de police, type, style de décoration ou couleur), sélectionnez la lettre et utilisez les icônes correspondantes sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure. La lettrine sélectionnée est entourée par un cadre (un conteneur utilisé pour positionner la lettrine sur la page). Vous pouvez facilement changer la taille du cadre en faisant glisser ses bordures ou changer sa position en utilisant l'icône qui apparaît si vous positionnez le curseur sur le cadre. Pour supprimer la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône Lettrine sous l'onglet Insérer sur la barre d'outils supérieure et choisissez l'option Aucune dans la liste déroulante. Pour modifier les paramètres de la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône Lettrine sous l'onglet Insérer sur la barre d'outils supérieure et choisissez l'option Paramètres de la lettrine dans la liste déroulante. La fenêtre Lettrine - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Lettrine vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants : Position sert à changer l'emplacement de la lettrine. Sélectionnez l'option Dans le texte ou Dans la marge, ou cliquez sur Aucune pour supprimer la lettrine. Police sert à sélectionner la police dans la liste des polices disponibles. Hauteur des lignes sert à spécifier le nombre des lignes occupées par la lettrine. Il est possible de sélectionner de 1 à 10 lignes. Distance du texte sert à spécifier l'espace entre le texte du paragraphe et la bordure droite du cadre qui entoure la lettrine. L'onglet Bordures et remplissage vous permet d'ajouter une bordure autour de la lettrine et de régler ses paramètres. Ils sont les suivants : Paramètres de la Bordure (taille, couleur, sa présence ou absence) - définissez la taille des bordures, sélectionnez leur couleur et choisissez les bordures auxquelles (en haut, en bas, à gauche, à droite ou quelques unes à la fois) vous voulez appliquer ces paramètres. Couleur d'arrière-plan - choisissez la couleur pour l'arrère-plan de la lettrine. L'onglet Marges vous permet de définir la distance entre la lettrine et les bordures En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite autour d'elle (si les bordures ont été préalablement ajoutées). Après avoir ajouté la lettrine vous pouvez également changer les paramètres du Cadre. Pour y accéder, cliquez droit à l'intérieur du cadre et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancées du cadre du menu contextuel. La fenêtre Cadre - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Cadre vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants : Position sert à sélectionner une des styles d'habillage Aligné ou Flottant. Ou vous pouvez cliquer sur Aucune pour supprimer le cadre. Largeur et Hauteur servent à changer la taille du cadre. L'option Auto vous permet de régler la taille du cadre automatiquement en l'ajustant à la lettrine à l'intérieur. L'option Exactement vous permet de spécifier les valeurs fixes. L'option Au moins est utilisée pour définir la hauteur minimale (si vous changez la taille du cadre, la hauteur du cadre change en conséquence, mais elle ne peut pas être inférieure à la valeur spécifiée). Horizontal sert à définir la position exacte du cadre des unités sélectionnées par rapport à la marge, la page ou la colonne, ou à aligner le cadre (à gauche, au centre ou à droite) par rapport à un des points de référence. Vous pouvez également définir la Distance du texte horizontale c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bordures verticales du cadre et le texte du paragraphe. Vertical sert à définir la position exacte du cadre des unités sélectionnées par rapport à la marge, la page ou le paragraphe, ou à aligner le cadre (en haut, au centre ou en bas) par rapport à un des points de référence. Vous pouvez également définir la Distance du texte verticale c'est-à-dire l'espace entre les bordures horizontales et le texte du paragraphe. Déplacer avec le texte contrôle si la lettrine se déplace comme le paragraphe auquel elle est liée. Les onglets Bordures et remplissage et Marges permettent de définir les mêmes paramètres que dans les onglets de la fenêtre Lettrine - Paramètres avancés." + "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", + "title": "Zoom", + "body": "Le module complémentaire Zoom permet créer et programmer des réunions de Zoom directement depuis l'éditeur en quelques clics. Le module complémentaire est compatible avec la version auto-hébergée des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE et c'est possible de l'ajouter manuellement aux instances ONLYOFFICE. Installation Pour installer le module complémentaire Zoom, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires. Recherchez Zoom sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter la documentation API d'ONLYOFFICE. Configuration Enregistrez l'éditeur en tant que l'application JWT sur la page Zoom Developer pour utiliser la programmation des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Le jeton JWT sera assigné à l'application. Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom . Créez l'application Meeting SDK sur la page Zoom Developer pour pouvoir joindre des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Les informations d'identification SDK seront assignées à l'application. Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom . Saisissez les clés SDK Key, SDK Secret et le jeton JWT Token dans les champs appropriés sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur ONLYOFFICE et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Utilisation Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom. Saisissez le thème de la réunion et sélectionnez Démarrer une réunion ou Programmer une réunion. Les notifications de réunion sont affichées dans le Chat de l'éditeur en ligne et dans les Commentaires de l'éditeur du bureau. Une fenêtre noire peut apparaître dans le navigateur Safari lorsqu'on se joint à la réunion. Pour faire disparaître l'erreur, il faut redimensionner la fenêtre du module complémentaire ou zoomer sur la page de navigateur." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index 5a8855dfb5..161c25b029 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/speechinput_plugin.gif b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/speechinput_plugin.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a06b50f991 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/speechinput_plugin.gif differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index db9c543188..f004e24ba5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -414,18 +414,24 @@ height: 28px; } -.icon-wordpress { +.icon-speechinput { background-position: -228px -84px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } -.icon-youtube { +.icon-wordpress { background-position: -228px -112px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } +.icon-youtube { + background-position: -228px -140px; + width: 28px; + height: 28px; +} + .icon-thumbnailsettingicon { background-position: 0px -212px; width: 34px; @@ -433,91 +439,91 @@ } .icon-cross_refference_icon { - background-position: -228px -140px; + background-position: -228px -168px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-favorites_iconpdf { - background-position: -228px -166px; + background-position: -34px -212px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-translator { - background-position: -34px -212px; + background-position: -60px -212px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-next_field_icon { - background-position: -60px -212px; + background-position: -86px -212px; width: 25px; height: 25px; } .icon-previous_field_icon { - background-position: -85px -212px; + background-position: -111px -212px; width: 25px; height: 25px; } .icon-submit_form_icon { - background-position: -110px -212px; + background-position: -136px -212px; width: 25px; height: 25px; } .icon-filelocationiconpdf { - background-position: -135px -212px; + background-position: -161px -212px; width: 26px; height: 24px; } .icon-drawio { - background-position: -161px -212px; + background-position: -187px -212px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-help { - background-position: -185px -212px; + background-position: -211px -212px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-rainbow_icon { - background-position: -209px -212px; + background-position: -256px 0px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-telegram_icon { - background-position: -256px 0px; + background-position: -256px -24px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-downloadpdf { - background-position: -256px -24px; + background-position: -256px -48px; width: 22px; height: 24px; } .icon-printiconpdf { - background-position: -256px -48px; + background-position: -256px -72px; width: 22px; height: 24px; } .icon-slicer_icon { - background-position: -256px -72px; + background-position: -256px -96px; width: 21px; height: 24px; } .icon-spellchecking_toptoolbar_activated { - background-position: -256px -96px; + background-position: -256px -120px; width: 21px; height: 24px; } @@ -529,25 +535,25 @@ } .icon-arrow { - background-position: -256px -120px; + background-position: -256px -144px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-insert_pivot { - background-position: -256px -143px; + background-position: -256px -167px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-comparebutton { - background-position: -256px -166px; + background-position: -256px -190px; width: 20px; height: 23px; } .icon-review_displaymode { - background-position: -256px -189px; + background-position: -256px -213px; width: 20px; height: 23px; } @@ -589,109 +595,109 @@ } .icon-zip_code_icon { - background-position: -256px -212px; + background-position: -280px 0px; width: 24px; height: 22px; } .icon-inserttexticon { - background-position: -233px -212px; + background-position: -280px -22px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-larger { - background-position: -280px 0px; + background-position: -280px -44px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-orientation { - background-position: -280px -22px; + background-position: -280px -66px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-radio_button_icon { - background-position: -280px -44px; + background-position: -280px -88px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-role_down { - background-position: -280px -66px; + background-position: -280px -110px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-role_up { - background-position: -280px -88px; + background-position: -280px -132px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-smaller { - background-position: -280px -110px; + background-position: -280px -154px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-table_figures_button { - background-position: -280px -132px; + background-position: -280px -176px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-zotero { - background-position: -280px -154px; + background-position: -280px -198px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-pagebreak1 { - background-position: -280px -176px; + background-position: -280px -220px; width: 21px; height: 22px; } .icon-trackchangestoptoolbar { - background-position: -280px -198px; + background-position: -235px -212px; width: 21px; height: 22px; } .icon-refresh_button { - background-position: -280px -220px; + background-position: -172px -85px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-spellchecking_toptoolbar { - background-position: -172px -85px; + background-position: -129px -95px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-wrapping_toptoolbar { - background-position: -129px -95px; + background-position: -260px -239px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-coeditingmode { - background-position: -260px -239px; + background-position: 0px -262px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-headerfooter { - background-position: 0px -262px; + background-position: -18px -262px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-pagesize { - background-position: -18px -262px; + background-position: -36px -262px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } @@ -703,25 +709,25 @@ } .icon-watermark { - background-position: -36px -262px; + background-position: -54px -262px; width: 16px; height: 22px; } .icon-versionhistoryicon { - background-position: -52px -262px; + background-position: -70px -262px; width: 24px; height: 21px; } .icon-fittowidth { - background-position: -76px -262px; + background-position: -94px -262px; width: 23px; height: 21px; } .icon-pivot_refresh { - background-position: -99px -262px; + background-position: -117px -262px; width: 21px; height: 21px; } @@ -733,31 +739,31 @@ } .icon-toccontentcontrol { - background-position: -120px -262px; + background-position: -138px -262px; width: 16px; height: 21px; } .icon-bookmark { - background-position: -136px -262px; + background-position: -154px -262px; width: 13px; height: 21px; } .icon-viewsettingsiconpdf { - background-position: -228px -192px; + background-position: -167px -262px; width: 27px; height: 20px; } .icon-credit_card_icon { - background-position: -149px -262px; + background-position: -194px -262px; width: 26px; height: 20px; } .icon-sheetview_icon { - background-position: -175px -262px; + background-position: -220px -262px; width: 25px; height: 20px; } @@ -769,235 +775,247 @@ } .icon-bringforward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -200px -262px; + background-position: -245px -262px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-chatgpt_icon { + background-position: -265px -262px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-checkbox_icon { - background-position: -220px -262px; + background-position: 0px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-constantproportionsactivated { - background-position: -240px -262px; + background-position: -20px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-copystyle_selected { - background-position: -260px -262px; + background-position: -40px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-email_address_icon { - background-position: -280px -262px; + background-position: -60px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-eraser_tool { - background-position: -302px 0px; + background-position: -80px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-group_toptoolbar { - background-position: -302px -20px; + background-position: -100px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image { - background-position: -302px -40px; + background-position: -120px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image_form_icon { - background-position: -302px -60px; + background-position: -140px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insertautoshape { - background-position: -302px -80px; + background-position: -160px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insert_symbol_icon { - background-position: -302px -100px; + background-position: -180px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sendbackward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -302px -120px; + background-position: -200px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-show_password { - background-position: -302px -140px; + background-position: -220px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-spellcheckactivated { - background-position: -302px -160px; + background-position: -240px -284px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-zoom_icon { + background-position: -260px -284px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-align_toptoolbar { - background-position: -302px -180px; + background-position: -285px -262px; width: 19px; height: 20px; } .icon-fittopage { - background-position: -302px -200px; + background-position: -280px -284px; width: 17px; height: 20px; } .icon-inserttextarticon { - background-position: -302px -220px; + background-position: -304px 0px; width: 16px; height: 20px; } .icon-pagemargins { - background-position: -302px -240px; + background-position: -304px -20px; width: 16px; height: 20px; } .icon-sortcommentsicon { - background-position: 0px -284px; + background-position: -320px 0px; width: 31px; height: 19px; } .icon-chat_toptoolbar { - background-position: -31px -284px; + background-position: -320px -19px; width: 24px; height: 19px; } .icon-comment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -55px -284px; + background-position: -320px -38px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertchart { - background-position: -77px -284px; + background-position: -320px -57px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertequationicon { - background-position: -99px -284px; + background-position: -320px -76px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-pivotselecticon { - background-position: -121px -284px; + background-position: -320px -95px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-review_next { - background-position: -143px -284px; + background-position: -320px -114px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-review_previous { - background-position: -165px -284px; + background-position: -320px -133px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-combo_box_icon { - background-position: -187px -284px; + background-position: -320px -152px; width: 21px; height: 19px; } .icon-dropdown_list_icon { - background-position: -302px -260px; + background-position: -320px -171px; width: 20px; height: 19px; } .icon-addhyperlink { - background-position: -208px -284px; + background-position: -320px -190px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-hiderulers { - background-position: -227px -284px; + background-position: -320px -209px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-noborders { - background-position: -246px -284px; + background-position: -320px -228px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertcolumns { - background-position: -265px -284px; + background-position: -320px -247px; width: 18px; height: 19px; } .icon-insert_dropcap_icon { - background-position: -283px -284px; + background-position: -320px -266px; width: 18px; height: 19px; } .icon-tocrefreshicon { - background-position: -301px -284px; + background-position: -320px -285px; width: 16px; height: 19px; } .icon-removecomment_toptoolbar { - background-position: 0px -303px; + background-position: -336px -285px; width: 15px; height: 19px; } .icon-backgroundcolor { - background-position: -15px -303px; + background-position: -228px -194px; width: 26px; height: 18px; } .icon-backgroundcolor_selected { - background-position: -41px -303px; + background-position: 0px -304px; width: 26px; height: 18px; } .icon-review_accepttoptoolbar { - background-position: -67px -303px; + background-position: -26px -304px; width: 22px; height: 18px; } .icon-review_rejecttoptoolbar { - background-position: -89px -303px; + background-position: -48px -304px; width: 22px; height: 18px; } @@ -1009,391 +1027,391 @@ } .icon-pencil_tool { - background-position: -111px -303px; + background-position: -70px -304px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-phone_number_icon { - background-position: -129px -303px; + background-position: -88px -304px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-search_advanced { - background-position: -147px -303px; + background-position: -106px -304px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-usericon { - background-position: -165px -303px; + background-position: -124px -304px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-searchbuttons { - background-position: -183px -303px; + background-position: -142px -304px; width: 33px; height: 17px; } .icon-changecolumnwidth { - background-position: -216px -303px; + background-position: -175px -304px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-sharingicon { - background-position: -237px -303px; + background-position: -196px -304px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-chaticon_new { - background-position: -258px -303px; + background-position: -217px -304px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-search_icon_header { - background-position: -277px -303px; + background-position: -236px -304px; width: 17px; height: 17px; } .icon-easybib { - background-position: -294px -303px; + background-position: -304px -40px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-insertslicer { - background-position: -322px 0px; + background-position: -304px -57px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-paste_style { - background-position: -322px -17px; + background-position: -304px -74px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-slicer_settings { - background-position: -322px -34px; + background-position: -304px -91px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-downloadicon { - background-position: -322px -51px; + background-position: -304px -108px; width: 15px; height: 17px; } .icon-addgradientpoint { - background-position: -322px -68px; + background-position: -339px -190px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-removegradientpoint { - background-position: -322px -85px; + background-position: -339px -209px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-highlightcolor { - background-position: 0px -322px; + background-position: -253px -304px; width: 25px; height: 16px; } .icon-complex_field_icon { - background-position: -25px -322px; + background-position: -278px -304px; width: 24px; height: 16px; } .icon-text_field_icon { - background-position: -49px -322px; + background-position: -302px -304px; width: 24px; height: 16px; } .icon-view_form_icon { - background-position: -73px -322px; + background-position: -326px -304px; width: 24px; height: 16px; } .icon-insertccicon { - background-position: -97px -322px; + background-position: 0px -322px; width: 23px; height: 16px; } .icon-table { - background-position: -120px -322px; + background-position: -23px -322px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-usersnumber { - background-position: -142px -322px; + background-position: -45px -322px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-close_icon { - background-position: -164px -322px; + background-position: -67px -322px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-saveupdate { - background-position: -182px -322px; + background-position: -85px -322px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-savewhilecoediting { - background-position: -200px -322px; + background-position: -103px -322px; width: 17px; height: 16px; } .icon-converttorange { - background-position: -322px -102px; + background-position: -304px -125px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-dropdownarrow { - background-position: -322px -118px; + background-position: -304px -141px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-favorites_icon { - background-position: -322px -134px; + background-position: -304px -157px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-filterbutton { - background-position: -322px -150px; + background-position: -304px -173px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-trackchangesstatusbar { - background-position: -322px -166px; + background-position: -304px -189px; width: 15px; height: 16px; } .icon-distributevertically { - background-position: -322px -182px; + background-position: -304px -205px; width: 14px; height: 16px; } .icon-handtool { - background-position: -322px -198px; + background-position: -338px -247px; width: 13px; height: 16px; } .icon-pagethumbnails { - background-position: -322px -214px; + background-position: -339px -228px; width: 12px; height: 16px; } .icon-textart_settings_icon { - background-position: -322px -230px; + background-position: -338px -266px; width: 12px; height: 16px; } .icon-selectiontool { - background-position: -322px -246px; + background-position: -341px -152px; width: 10px; height: 16px; } .icon-search_options { - background-position: -217px -322px; + background-position: -120px -322px; width: 22px; height: 15px; } .icon-addfootnote { - background-position: -239px -322px; + background-position: -142px -322px; width: 21px; height: 15px; } .icon-access_rights { - background-position: -260px -322px; + background-position: -163px -322px; width: 19px; height: 15px; } .icon-chaticon { - background-position: -279px -322px; + background-position: -182px -322px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-gotodocuments { - background-position: -297px -322px; + background-position: -200px -322px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-print { - background-position: -315px -322px; + background-position: -218px -322px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } .icon-bgcolor { - background-position: -322px -262px; + background-position: -304px -221px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_behind_toptoolbar { - background-position: -322px -277px; + background-position: -304px -236px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_infront_toptoolbar { - background-position: -322px -292px; + background-position: -304px -251px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_inline_toptoolbar { - background-position: -322px -307px; + background-position: -304px -266px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_square_toptoolbar { - background-position: -338px 0px; + background-position: -304px -281px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar { - background-position: -338px -15px; + background-position: -235px -322px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_tight_toptoolbar { - background-position: -338px -30px; + background-position: -251px -322px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_topandbottom_toptoolbar { - background-position: -338px -45px; + background-position: -267px -322px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-about { - background-position: -338px -60px; + background-position: -283px -322px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-abouticon { - background-position: -338px -75px; + background-position: -298px -322px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-advanced_settings_icon { - background-position: -338px -90px; + background-position: -313px -322px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-document_language { - background-position: -338px -105px; + background-position: -328px -322px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-insertpivot { - background-position: -338px -120px; + background-position: -351px 0px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopcenter { - background-position: -338px -135px; + background-position: -351px -15px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopleft { - background-position: -338px -150px; + background-position: -351px -30px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopright { - background-position: -338px -165px; + background-position: -351px -45px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-anchor { - background-position: -338px -180px; + background-position: -351px -60px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-feedback { - background-position: -338px -195px; + background-position: -351px -75px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-flipupsidedown { - background-position: -338px -210px; + background-position: -351px -90px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-file { - background-position: -338px -225px; + background-position: -351px -105px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-fitpage { - background-position: -338px -240px; + background-position: -351px -120px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-back { - background-position: -338px -255px; + background-position: -351px -135px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } .icon-lock_form_icon { - background-position: -338px -270px; + background-position: -351px -150px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } @@ -1417,163 +1435,163 @@ } .icon-distributehorizontally { - background-position: -338px -285px; + background-position: -74px -338px; width: 16px; height: 14px; } .icon-columnwidthmarker { - background-position: -338px -299px; + background-position: -351px -165px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-fliplefttoright { - background-position: -338px -313px; + background-position: -351px -179px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectbottom { - background-position: -74px -338px; + background-position: -351px -193px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectleft { - background-position: -88px -338px; + background-position: -351px -207px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectright { - background-position: -102px -338px; + background-position: -351px -221px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjecttop { - background-position: -116px -338px; + background-position: -351px -235px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-bringforward { - background-position: -130px -338px; + background-position: -351px -249px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-bringtofront { - background-position: -144px -338px; + background-position: -351px -263px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-chart_settings_icon { - background-position: -158px -338px; + background-position: -351px -277px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-commentsicon { - background-position: -172px -338px; + background-position: -351px -291px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-deleteicon { - background-position: -186px -338px; + background-position: -351px -305px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-group { - background-position: -200px -338px; + background-position: -351px -319px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-image_settings_icon { - background-position: -214px -338px; + background-position: -90px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-save { - background-position: -228px -338px; + background-position: -104px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-searchicon { - background-position: -242px -338px; + background-position: -118px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-sendbackward { - background-position: -256px -338px; + background-position: -132px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-sendtoback { - background-position: -270px -338px; + background-position: -146px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-shape_settings_icon { - background-position: -284px -338px; + background-position: -160px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-ungroup { - background-position: -298px -338px; + background-position: -174px -338px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectcenter { - background-position: -312px -338px; + background-position: -188px -338px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-highlight_color_mouse_pointer { - background-position: -325px -338px; + background-position: -201px -338px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-tocrefreshiconcc { - background-position: -338px -338px; + background-position: -214px -338px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-copystyle { - background-position: -310px -303px; + background-position: -227px -338px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-gradientslider { - background-position: -354px 0px; + background-position: -239px -338px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-combo_delete_values { - background-position: -354px -14px; + background-position: -340px -171px; width: 11px; height: 14px; } .icon-hard { - background-position: -354px -28px; + background-position: -342px -38px; width: 9px; height: 14px; } @@ -1591,19 +1609,19 @@ } .icon-review { - background-position: 0px -352px; + background-position: -251px -338px; width: 23px; height: 13px; } .icon-tocicon { - background-position: -23px -352px; + background-position: -274px -338px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-visible_area { - background-position: -43px -352px; + background-position: -294px -338px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } @@ -1615,235 +1633,235 @@ } .icon-removeduplicates { - background-position: -63px -352px; + background-position: -314px -338px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-text_autoshape { - background-position: -79px -352px; + background-position: -330px -338px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-changerange { - background-position: -95px -352px; + background-position: -346px -338px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-clearstyle { - background-position: -110px -352px; + background-position: 0px -352px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-clear_fields_icon { - background-position: -125px -352px; + background-position: -15px -352px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-feedbackicon { - background-position: -140px -352px; + background-position: -30px -352px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-greencircle { - background-position: -155px -352px; + background-position: -45px -352px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectmiddle { - background-position: -170px -352px; + background-position: -60px -352px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-copy { - background-position: -184px -352px; + background-position: -74px -352px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-multiselect { - background-position: -198px -352px; + background-position: -88px -352px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-paste { - background-position: -212px -352px; + background-position: -102px -352px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-selectall { - background-position: -226px -352px; + background-position: -116px -352px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_none { - background-position: -240px -352px; + background-position: -130px -352px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-movetable_handle { - background-position: -253px -352px; + background-position: -143px -352px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-zoomin { - background-position: -266px -352px; + background-position: -156px -352px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-editcommenticon { - background-position: -354px -42px; + background-position: -169px -352px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-equationplaceholder { - background-position: -354px -55px; + background-position: -181px -352px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertpagenumber { - background-position: -354px -68px; + background-position: -193px -352px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotateclockwise { - background-position: -354px -81px; + background-position: -205px -352px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotatecounterclockwise { - background-position: -354px -94px; + background-position: -217px -352px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-linespacing { - background-position: -279px -352px; + background-position: -229px -352px; width: 25px; height: 12px; } .icon-spellcheckdeactivated { - background-position: -304px -352px; + background-position: -254px -352px; width: 15px; height: 12px; } .icon-slicer_clearfilter { - background-position: -319px -352px; + background-position: -269px -352px; width: 14px; height: 12px; } .icon-circle { - background-position: -354px -107px; + background-position: -283px -352px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-follow_move { - background-position: -354px -119px; + background-position: -295px -352px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-nofill { - background-position: -354px -131px; + background-position: -307px -352px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-sup { - background-position: -354px -143px; + background-position: -319px -352px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-deletecommenticon { - background-position: -354px -155px; + background-position: -331px -352px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-review_delete { - background-position: -354px -167px; + background-position: -342px -352px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-tabletemplate { - background-position: -333px -352px; + background-position: -366px 0px; width: 26px; height: 11px; } .icon-footnotes { - background-position: -366px 0px; + background-position: -366px -11px; width: 24px; height: 11px; } .icon-insertfunction { - background-position: -366px -11px; + background-position: -366px -22px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-nonprintingcharacters { - background-position: -366px -22px; + background-position: -366px -33px; width: 20px; height: 11px; } .icon-fitwidth { - background-position: -366px -33px; + background-position: -366px -44px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-table_settings_icon { - background-position: -366px -44px; + background-position: -366px -55px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-viewsettingsicon { - background-position: -366px -55px; + background-position: -366px -66px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-mailmergeicon { - background-position: -366px -66px; + background-position: -366px -77px; width: 15px; height: 11px; } .icon-review_accept { - background-position: -366px -77px; + background-position: -366px -88px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-sub { - background-position: -366px -88px; + background-position: -379px -88px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } @@ -1957,277 +1975,277 @@ } .icon-combo_add_values { - background-position: -379px -77px; + background-position: -381px -77px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortatoz { - background-position: -379px -88px; + background-position: -366px -198px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortztoa { - background-position: -366px -198px; + background-position: -377px -198px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-threecolumns { - background-position: -377px -198px; + background-position: -366px -209px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-underline { - background-position: -366px -209px; + background-position: -382px -44px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-zoomout { - background-position: -376px -209px; + background-position: -382px -55px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-navigationicon { - background-position: -366px -220px; + background-position: -377px -209px; width: 13px; height: 10px; } .icon-strike { - background-position: -366px -230px; + background-position: -366px -220px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-yellowdiamond { - background-position: -379px -220px; + background-position: -378px -220px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-firstline_indent { - background-position: -378px -230px; + background-position: -382px -66px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-review_reject { - background-position: -366px -240px; + background-position: -366px -230px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-bold { - background-position: -382px -33px; + background-position: -376px -230px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-italic { - background-position: -382px -44px; + background-position: -384px -230px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } .icon-selectcolumnpointer { - background-position: -382px -55px; + background-position: -366px -240px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } .icon-redo { - background-position: -366px -250px; + background-position: -373px -240px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-undo { - background-position: -366px -259px; + background-position: -366px -250px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-combo_values_up { - background-position: -376px -240px; + background-position: -366px -259px; width: 10px; height: 9px; } .icon-cellrow { - background-position: -381px -66px; + background-position: -383px -250px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-resize_square { - background-position: -366px -268px; + background-position: -376px -259px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-searchdownbutton { - background-position: -375px -268px; + background-position: -366px -268px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-searchupbutton { - background-position: -366px -277px; + background-position: -366px -276px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-constantproportions { - background-position: -366px -285px; + background-position: -366px -284px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-rowheightmarker { - background-position: -366px -293px; + background-position: -379px -284px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopcenter_marker { - background-position: -366px -301px; + background-position: -380px -268px; width: 12px; height: 8px; } .icon-hanging { - background-position: -380px -277px; + background-position: -380px -276px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-right_indent { - background-position: -379px -285px; + background-position: -366px -292px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-soft { - background-position: -379px -293px; + background-position: -376px -292px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-selectcellpointer { - background-position: -378px -301px; + background-position: -366px -300px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopleft_marker { - background-position: -366px -309px; + background-position: -374px -300px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopright_marker { - background-position: -374px -309px; + background-position: -382px -300px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-nextfootnote { - background-position: -383px -250px; + background-position: -386px -33px; width: 6px; height: 8px; } .icon-previousfootnote { - background-position: -383px -259px; + background-position: -385px -259px; width: 6px; height: 8px; } .icon-collapse { - background-position: -366px -317px; + background-position: -366px -308px; width: 11px; height: 7px; } .icon-expand { - background-position: -377px -317px; + background-position: -377px -308px; width: 11px; height: 7px; } .icon-selectrowpointer { - background-position: -366px -324px; + background-position: -366px -315px; width: 10px; height: 7px; } .icon-resizetable_handle { - background-position: -382px -309px; + background-position: -376px -315px; width: 7px; height: 7px; } .icon-redo1 { - background-position: -376px -324px; + background-position: -366px -322px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-undo1 { - background-position: -366px -331px; + background-position: -379px -322px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-combo_values_down { - background-position: -366px -337px; + background-position: -366px -328px; width: 12px; height: 6px; } .icon-leftindent { - background-position: -379px -331px; + background-position: -378px -328px; width: 10px; height: 6px; } .icon-nextpage { - background-position: -378px -337px; + background-position: -387px -22px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-previouspage { - background-position: -383px -337px; + background-position: -386px -292px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-tab { - background-position: -366px -343px; + background-position: -366px -334px; width: 10px; height: 5px; } .icon-nonbreakspace { - background-position: -376px -343px; + background-position: -387px -28px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-square { - background-position: -381px -343px; + background-position: -383px -315px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-space { - background-position: -387px -11px; + background-position: -390px -11px; width: 2px; height: 3px; } diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0f1ca4a698 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/speechinput.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/speechinput.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a9e1c967e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/speechinput.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eab263b724 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css index 08402e6b89..e55a8b6ad9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css @@ -157,6 +157,8 @@ text-decoration: none; .search-field { display: block; float: right; + margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json index 837d8d3bf0..64640baff1 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json @@ -3,7 +3,8 @@ {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Файл"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Главная"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Вставка"}, - {"src": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Макет" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Рисование"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Макет" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Ссылки"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Формы"}, { "src": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Совместная работа" }, @@ -48,6 +49,7 @@ {"src":"UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Вставка диаграмм" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Вставка текстовых объектов" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Вставка объектов SmartArt" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Рисование от руки на документе" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "name": "Добавление названий" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Вставка символов и знаков" }, {"src":"UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "name": "Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на странице" }, @@ -63,7 +65,7 @@ { "src": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", "name": "Общение в режиме реального времени" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "name": "Комментирование документов" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "name": "Рецензирование документа" }, - { "src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Сравнение документов" }, + { "src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Сравнение и объединение документов" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "name": "История версий" }, {"src":"UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "Просмотр сведений о документе", "headername": "Инструменты и настройки"}, {"src":"UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Сохранение/скачивание/печать документа" }, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm index 47be9a59b3..09dc8f501d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Сравнение документов + Сравнение и объединение документов @@ -14,16 +14,17 @@
                                  -

                                  Сравнение документов

                                  +

                                  Сравнение и объединение документов

                                  Редактор документов позволяет осуществлять постоянный общекомандный подход к рабочему процессу: предоставлять доступ к файлам и папкам, общаться прямо в редакторе, комментировать определенные фрагменты документов, требующие особого внимания, сохранять версии документов для дальнейшего использования, рецензировать документы и добавлять изменения, не редактируя файл непосредственно.

                                  Если вам требуется сравнить и объединить два документа, вы можете использовать функцию сравнения Редакторе документов. Она позволяет отобразить различия между двумя документами и объединить документы путем принятия изменений - каждого в отдельности или всех сразу.

                                  +

                                  Функция Объединить может показаться одинаковой, но с одним важным отличием: Отслеживаемые изменения в обеих версиях объединяются в одну версию, а остальной текст сравнивается.

                                  После сравнения и объединения двух документов результат будет сохранен на портале как новая версия исходного файла.

                                  Если объединять сравниваемые документы не требуется, вы можете отклонить все изменения, чтобы исходный документ остался неизмененным.

                                  Выбор документа для сравнения

                                  Чтобы сравнить два документа, откройте исходный документ, который требуется сравнить, и выберите второй документ для сравнения:

                                    -
                                  1. перейдите на вкладку Совместная работа на верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку
                                    Сравнить,
                                    2. +
                                  2. перейдите на вкладку Совместная работа на верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку
                                    Сравнить,
                                  3. выберите одну из следующих опций для загрузки документа:
                                      @@ -38,41 +39,58 @@

                                      Выбор документа для сравнения<

                                  После выбора второго документа для сравнения запускается процесс сравнения и документ приобретает вид рецензируемого. Все изменения выделяются цветом, и вы можете просматривать изменения, переходить от одного к другому, принимать или отклонять их по отдельности или все сразу. Также можно изменить режим отображения и посмотреть, как выглядит документ до сравнения, в процессе сравнения или как он будет выглядеть после сравнения, если принять все изменения.

                                  +

                                  Выбор документа для объединения

                                  +

                                  Чтобы объединить два документа, откройте исходный документ и выберите второй документ для объединения:

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. перейдите на вкладку Совместная работа на верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку
                                    Объединить,
                                    2. +
                                  2. + выберите одну из следующих опций для загрузки документа: +
                                      +
                                    • при выборе опции Документ из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл в формате .docx на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть.
                                      • +
                                    • + при выборе опции Документ с URL-адреса откроется окно, в котором вы можете ввести ссылку на файл, сохраненный в стороннем веб-хранилище (например, Nextcloud), если у вас есть соответствующие права доступа. Ссылка должна быть прямой ссылкой на скачивание файла. Когда ссылка будет указана, нажмите кнопку OK. +

                                      Примечание: Прямая ссылка позволяет напрямую скачать файл, не открывая его в браузере. Например, для получения прямой ссылки в Nextcloud найдите нужный документ в списке файлов, выберите в меню файла пункт Подробно. На панели с подробными сведениями о файле нажмите на значок Копировать прямую ссылку (работает только для пользователей с правами доступа к этому файлу или каталогу) справа от имени файла. Чтобы узнать, как получить прямую ссылку на скачивание файла в другом стороннем веб-хранилище, обратитесь к документации по соответствующему стороннему сервису.

                                      +
                                      • +
                                    +
                                    3. +
                                  +

                                  После выбора второго документа для сравнения запускается процесс сравнения и документ приобретает вид рецензируемого. Все изменения выделяются цветом, и вы можете просматривать изменения, переходить от одного к другому, принимать или отклонять их по отдельности или все сразу. Также можно изменить режим объединенияя и посмотреть, как выглядит документ до объединения, в процессе объединения или как он будет выглядеть после объединения, если принять все изменения.

                                  +

                                  Выбор режима отображения изменений

                                  -

                                  Нажмите кнопку Отображение на верхней панели инструментов и выберите из списка один из доступных режимов:

                                  +

                                  Нажмите кнопку Отображение на верхней панели инструментов и выберите из списка один из доступных режимов:

                                  • - Изменения - этот режим выбран по умолчанию. Он используется, чтобы отобразить документ в процессе сравнения. Этот режим позволяет и просматривать изменения, и редактировать документ. + Изменения - этот режим выбран по умолчанию. Он используется, чтобы отобразить документ в процессе сравнения/объединения. Этот режим позволяет и просматривать изменения, и редактировать документ.

                                    Сравнение документов - Изменения

                                  • - Измененный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ после сравнения, как если бы все изменения были приняты. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности принять все изменения, а только дает возможность увидеть, как будет выглядеть документ после того, как вы примете все изменения. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать. + Измененный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ после сравнения/объединения, как если бы все изменения были приняты. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности принять все изменения, а только дает возможность увидеть, как будет выглядеть документ после того, как вы примете все изменения. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать.

                                    Сравнение документов - Измененный документ

                                  • - Исходный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ до сравнения, как если бы все изменения были отклонены. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности отклонить все изменения, а только дает возможность просмотреть документ без изменений. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать. + Исходный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ до сравнения/объединения, как если бы все изменения были отклонены. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности отклонить все изменения, а только дает возможность просмотреть документ без изменений. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать.

                                    Сравнение документов - Исходный документ

                                  Принятие и отклонение изменений

                                  -

                                  Используйте кнопки К предыдущему и К следующему на верхней панели инструментов для навигации по изменениям.

                                  +

                                  Используйте кнопки К предыдущему и К следующему на верхней панели инструментов для навигации по изменениям.

                                  Чтобы принять выделенное в данный момент изменение, можно сделать следующее:

                                    -
                                  • нажмите кнопку
                                    Принять на верхней панели инструментов или
                                    • +
                                  • нажмите кнопку
                                    Принять на верхней панели инструментов или
                                  • нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять текущее изменение (в этом случае изменение будет принято, и вы перейдете к следующему изменению) или
                                    • -
                                  • нажмите кнопку Принять
                                    во всплывающем окне с изменением.
                                    • +
                                  • нажмите кнопку Принять
                                    во всплывающем окне с изменением.
                                  -

                                  Чтобы быстро принять все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять все изменения.

                                  +

                                  Чтобы быстро принять все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять все изменения.

                                  Чтобы отклонить текущее изменение, можно сделать следующее:

                                    -
                                  • нажмите кнопку
                                    Отклонить на верхней панели инструментов или
                                    • +
                                  • нажмите кнопку
                                    Отклонить на верхней панели инструментов или
                                  • нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить текущее изменение (в этом случае изменение будет отклонено, и вы перейдете к следующему доступному изменению) или
                                    • -
                                  • нажмите кнопку Отклонить
                                    во всплывающем окне с изменением.
                                    • +
                                  • нажмите кнопку Отклонить
                                    во всплывающем окне с изменением.
                                  -

                                  Чтобы быстро отклонить все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить все изменения.

                                  +

                                  Чтобы быстро отклонить все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить все изменения.

                                  -

                                  Дополнительные сведения о функции сравнения

                                  +

                                  Дополнительные сведения о функцих сравнения и объединения

                                  Принцип сравнения

                                  Сравнение документов ведется по словам. Если слово содержит изменение хотя бы на один символ (например, если символ был удален или заменен), в результате отличие будет отображено как изменение всего слова целиком, а не символа.

                                  Приведенное ниже изображение иллюстрирует случай, когда исходный файл содержит слово 'Символы', а документ для сравнения содержит слово 'Символ'.

                                  @@ -88,8 +106,9 @@

                                  Авторство документа

                                  Если авторы двух файлов - разные пользователи, то автор второго файла, загруженного для сравнения, будет автором добавленных или удаленных изменений.

                                  Наличие рецензирования в сравниваемом документе

                                  -

                                  Если исходный документ содержит изменения, внесенные в режиме рецензирования, то в результате сравнения документа они будут приняты. При выборе второго файла для сравнения вы увидите соответствующее предупреждение.

                                  +

                                  Если исходный документ содержит изменения, внесенные в режиме рецензирования, то в результате сравнения документа они будут приняты. При выборе второго файла для сравнения вы увидите соответствующее предупреждение.

                                  В этом случае при выборе режима отображения Исходный документ документ не будет содержать изменений.

                                  +

                                  Если оба документа содержат изменения, внесенные в режиме рецензирования, то они будут объединены в одну версию в результате объединения.

                                  \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index d3af750c91..d5c7c2df93 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -138,14 +138,14 @@

                                  Подсказки для клавиш

          + + + + + --> - + @@ -243,15 +243,15 @@

          Подсказки для клавиш

          + + + + + + + + + --> @@ -351,6 +351,12 @@

          Подсказки для клавиш

          + + + + + @@ -359,14 +365,14 @@

          Подсказки для клавиш

          - - + + - - + + @@ -580,10 +586,10 @@

          Подсказки для клавиш

          + + + + --> @@ -685,10 +691,10 @@

          Подсказки для клавиш

          + + + + --> @@ -719,6 +725,12 @@

          Подсказки для клавиш

          + + + + + +
          Сбросить масштаб текущего документа до значения по умолчанию 100%.
          Закрыть окно (вкладку)Ctrl+F4⌘ Cmd+F4Закрыть вкладку в браузере.
          Навигация
          Перейти в начало строки Home Переместить курсор на одно слово вправо.
          Перейти на один абзац вверхCtrl+Стрелка вверхПереместить курсор на один абзац вверх.
          Перейти на один абзац внизCtrl+Стрелка внизПереместить курсор на один абзац вниз.
          Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑ ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированный текст из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Текст может быть ранее скопирован из того же самого документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы.
          Вставить текст без форматирования стиляCtrl+⇧ Shift+V,
          +           		⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+VВставить ранее скопированный фрагмент текста из буфера обмена компьютера в текущую позицию курсора без сохранения исходного форматирования. Текст можно предварительно скопировать из того же документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы
          Вставить гиперссылку Ctrl+K
          Копировать форматированиеCtrl+⇧ Shift+C⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+CAlt+Ctrl+C⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Скопировать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента редактируемого текста. Скопированное форматирование можно затем применить к другому тексту в этом же документе.
          Применить форматированиеCtrl+⇧ Shift+V⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+VAlt+Ctrl+V⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Применить ранее скопированное форматирование к тексту редактируемого документа.
          Добавить номер текущей страницы в текущей позиции курсора.
          Добавить дефисNum-Добавить дефис.
          Непечатаемые символы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Вставка специальных символов
          Вставка знака ЕвроAlt+Ctrl+EВставить знак Евро (€) в текущей позиции курсора.
          Вставка уравнения Alt+= ⌥ Option+␣ Spacebar Вставить неразрывный пробел ‘o’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора.
          Вставка символа авторского праваCtrl+Alt+G⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+GВставить символ авторского права ‘©’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора.
          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 195b0665a7..1ae747c3e5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -40,12 +40,14 @@

          Настройте параметры представления

          наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели вправо, чтобы увеличить ширину панели. Чтобы восстановить исходную ширину, перетащите край панели влево.

          Для осуществления навигации по документу используйте следующие инструменты:

          -

          Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего документа. - Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%) - или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . - Нажмите значок По ширине , чтобы ширина страницы документа соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. - Чтобы вся страница целиком помещалась в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру страницы . - Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладке Вид.

          +

          + Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего документа. + Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 250% / 300% / 350%/ 400% / 450% / 500%) + или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . + Нажмите значок По ширине , чтобы ширина страницы документа соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. + Чтобы вся страница целиком помещалась в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру страницы . + Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладке Вид. +

          Указатель номера страницы показывает текущую страницу в составе всех страниц текущего документа (страница 'n' из 'nn'). Щелкните по этой надписи, чтобы открыть окно, в котором Вы можете ввести номер нужной страницы и быстро перейти на нее.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Password.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Password.htm index b1d85ebab8..8171265eb0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Password.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Password.htm @@ -22,7 +22,8 @@

          Защита документов с помощью пароля

          Установка пароля

            -
          • перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить, +
          • + перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить. Нажмите кнопку Добавить пароль, чтобы открыть окно Установка пароля,

            или перейдите на вкладку Защита и выберите опцию Шифровать,

          • введите пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль. Нажмите
            , чтобы показать или скрыть пароль. @@ -38,7 +39,7 @@

            Установка пароля

            Смена пароля

            • - перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить, + перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить. Нажмите кнопку Добавить пароль, чтобы открыть окно Установка пароля,

              или перейдите на вкладку Защита и выберите опцию Шифровать,

            • нажмите кнопку Изменить пароль,
              • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 743b148899..2927d1c683 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

              Функция поиска и замены

              Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, использованные в документе, который вы в данный момент редактируете, нажмите на значок , расположенный на левой боковой панели, или значок , расположенный в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска.

              -

              В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск.

              +

              В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Панель включает в себя текстовое поле для ввода поискового запроса, количество результатов поиска и элементы управления для перехода к предыдущему, следующему результату и закрытия панели.

              Маленькая панель Поиск

              Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H.

              Откроется панель Поиск и замена:

              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 68fa56ad88..2bed3c9395 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -18,18 +18,18 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              Электронные документы - это одни из наиболее широко используемых компьютерных файлов. Благодаря высокому уровню развития современных компьютерных сетей распространять электронные документы становится удобнее, чем печатные. Многообразие устройств, используемых для представления документов, обуславливает большое количество проприетарных и открытых файловых форматов. - Редактор документов работает с самыми популярными из них.

              + Редактор документов работает с самыми популярными из них.

              При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (DOCX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости.

              Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование.

              - - - - - +
              ФорматыОписаниеПросмотр в исходном формате
              + + + + - + - + @@ -86,6 +86,14 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              + + + + + + + + @@ -102,14 +110,22 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              - - - + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -118,14 +134,14 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              - - - + + + - - + + @@ -142,22 +158,54 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -166,16 +214,16 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              - - - + + + - - -
              ФорматыОписаниеПросмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXMLРедактирование в исходном форматеРедактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML
              DjVu Формат файлов, предназначенный главным образом для хранения отсканированных документов, особенно тех, которые содержат комбинацию текста, рисунков и фотографий +
              FODTТекстовый документ, сохраненный в формате OpenDocument, но хранящийся в виде XML-файла++
              FB2 Расширение для электронных книг, позволяющее читать книги на компьютере или мобильных устройствах +
              ODTФормат текстовых файлов OpenDocument, открытый стандарт для электронных документов
              MHTMLMIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML
              Архив веб-страницы, включающий все ее содержимое              		 + +
              +
              ODTФормат текстовых файлов OpenDocument, открытый стандарт для электронных документов++
              OFORM Формат для заполнения Формы. Поля формы являются заполняемыми, но пользователи не могут изменять форматирование или настройки элементов формы.*+
              OTTOpenDocument Document Template
              Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов текстовых документов. Шаблон OTT содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества документов со схожим форматированием
              OTTOpenDocument Document Template
              Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов текстовых документов. Шаблон OTT содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества документов со схожим форматированием              		 + +
              +
              PDF Portable Document Format
              Формат файлов, используемый для представления документов независимо от программного обеспечения, аппаратных средств и операционных систем
              RTFRich Text Format
              Формат документов, разработанный компанией Microsoft, для кроссплатформенного обмена документами
              RTFRich Text Format
              Формат документов, разработанный компанией Microsoft, для кроссплатформенного обмена документами              		++
              STWStarOffice Document Template
              Формат файла, используемый для сохранения документов обработки текста в OpenOffice.org Writer. Файл STW можно редактировать с помощью любого другого программного обеспечения, поддерживающего стандарт OpenDocument Format (ODF). Файлы STW содержат текст, изображения и другую информацию о форматировании.              		++
              SXWStarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document
              Формат текстового документа, включенный в пакет StarOffice, основанный на формате XML OpenDocument и совместимый с Apache OpenOffice (ранее OpenOffice.org) Writer, преемником StarOffice Writer.              		++
              TXTРасширение имени файла для текстовых файлов, как правило, с минимальным форматированием + +
              TXTРасширение имени файла для текстовых файлов, как правило, с минимальным форматированием+
              WPSMicrosoft Works Word Processor Text Document
              Текстовый документ, созданный текстовым редактором Microsoft Works, программой, которая была заменена Microsoft Word. Файлы WPS похожи на документы Word, но имеют меньше параметров форматирования.              		 + +
              +
              WPTWordPerfect Text Document
              Текстовый файл с расширением .wpt сохраняется в двоичном формате и может содержать текст, диаграммы, изображения, таблицы и другие текстовые данные..              		++
              XML Расширяемый язык разметки (XML).
              Простой и гибкий язык разметки, созданный на основе SGML (ISO 8879) и предназначенный для хранения и передачи данных              		 +
              XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
              Открытый бесплатный формат фиксированной разметки, разработанный компанией Microsoft
              XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
              Открытый бесплатный формат фиксированной разметки, разработанный компанией Microsoft              		 +
              -

              Примечание*: формат OFORM — это формат заполнения формы. Поэтому только поля формы доступны для редактирования.

              + + + +

              *Примечание: формат OFORM — это формат заполнения формы. Поэтому только поля формы доступны для редактирования.

              Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать документ из меню Файл -> Скачать как.

              @@ -188,71 +236,91 @@

              Поддерживаемые форматы электронных доку

              - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + + + + + - + - + - + - + - + - + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - +
              DOCDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              DOCMDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              DOCXDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              DOCXFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              DOTXDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              EPUBDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              FB2DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              HTMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              MHTMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
              ODTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              OFORMDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              OTTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              PDFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              PDF/ADOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF, PNG, RTF, TXT
              RTFDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              STWDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
              SXWDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
              TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              WPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
              WPTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT
              XMLDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXTDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT
              XPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT, XPSDOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT, XPS

              Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации документов в самые известные форматы файлов.

              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..96d1f9b58d --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Вкладка Рисование + + + + + + + + +
              +
              + +
              +

              Вкладка Рисование

              +

              Вкладка Рисование Редактора документов позволяет выполнять основные операции рисования.

              +
              +

              Окно онлайн-редактора документов:

              +

              Вкладка Рисование

              +
              +
              +

              Окно десктопного редактора документов:

              +

              Вкладка Рисование

              +
              +

              С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия:

              +
                +
              • выделять рисунки, чтобы изменить их размер или удалить,
                • +
              • использовать ручку и маркер, чтобы рисовать или добавлять рукописные заметки и выделение,
                • +
              • использовать ластик, чтобы удалять весь рисунок или рукописный текст.
                • +
              +
              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 568e64d986..a03bbb4951 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -3,8 +3,7 @@ Вкладка Вставка - - + @@ -16,7 +15,6 @@

              Вкладка Вставка

              -

              Что такое вкладка Вставка?

              Вкладка Вставка Редактора документов позволяет добавлять элементы форматирования страницы, а также визуальные объекты и комментарии.

              Окно онлайн-редактора документов:

              @@ -26,7 +24,6 @@

              Что такое вкладка Вставка?

              Окно десктопного редактора документов:

              Вкладка Вставка

              -

              Назначение вкладки Вставка

              С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия:

              • вставлять пустую страницу,
                • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 801e00b4e5..09f5010bdc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

                Вкладка Плагины

                Окно десктопного редактора документов:

                Вкладка Плагины

                -

                Кнопка Настройки позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные.

                +

                Кнопка Менеджер плагинов позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные.

                Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API.

                В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины:

                  diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index f120a5be7f..bbea46aa53 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@

                  Знакомство с пользовательским интерфейс
                • На Левой боковой панели находятся следующие значки:
                  • - позволяет использовать инструмент поиска и замены,
                    • -
                  • - позволяет открыть панель Комментариев
                    • +
                  • - позволяет открыть панель Комментариев
                  • - позволяет перейти в панель Заголовки для управления заголовками
                  • (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет открыть панель Чата,
                  • (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет обратиться в службу технической поддержки,
                    • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm index 1acb51f88e..0100426229 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -1,59 +1,57 @@  - - Выбор цветовой схемы - - - - - - - - -
                    + + Выбор цветовой схемы + + + + + + + + +
                    -

                    Выбор цветовой схемы

                    -

                    Цветовые схемы применяются ко всему документу. Они используются для быстрого изменения вида документа, поскольку они определяют палитру - Цвета темы для элементов документа (шрифт, фон, - таблицы, автофигуры, - диаграммы). Если вы применили какие-то Цвета темы к элементам документа, а потом - выбрали другую Цветовую схему, то цвета, примененные в вашем документе, соответствующим образом изменятся. -

                    -

                    - Для изменения цветовой схемы щелкните по направленной вниз стрелке рядом со значком Изменить цветовую схему на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов - и выберите нужную цветовую схему из имеющихся вариантов: Стандартная, Оттенки серого, - Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, - Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская, Яркая. Выбранная цветовая схема будет выделена в списке. -

                    -

                    - Цветовые схемы -

                    -

                    - Выбрав предпочтительную цветовую схему, вы сможете выбрать цвета в окне цветовых палитр, соответствующем тому элементу документа, к которому вы хотите - применить тот или иной цвет. Для большинства элементов документа к окну цветовых палитр можно получить доступ, нажав на цветной прямоугольник на правой боковой панели, когда нужный элемент выделен. Для шрифта это окно можно открыть с помощью направленной вниз стрелки рядом со значком Цвет шрифта на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Предусмотрены следующие палитры:

                    -

                    +

                    Выбор цветовой схемы

                    - Палитра + Цветовые схемы применяются ко всему документу. Они используются для быстрого изменения вида документа, поскольку они определяют палитру + Цвета темы для элементов документа (шрифт, фон, + таблицы, автофигуры, + диаграммы). Если вы применили какие-то Цвета темы к элементам документа, а потом + выбрали другую Цветовую схему, то цвета, примененные в вашем документе, соответствующим образом изменятся.

                    +

                    + Для изменения цветовой схемы щелкните по направленной вниз стрелке рядом со значком Изменить цветовую схему на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов + и выберите нужную цветовую схему из имеющихся вариантов: Стандартная, Оттенки серого, + Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, + Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская, Яркая. Выбранная цветовая схема будет выделена в списке. +

                    +

                    + Цветовые схемы +

                    +

                    + Выбрав предпочтительную цветовую схему, вы сможете выбрать цвета в окне цветовых палитр, соответствующем тому элементу документа, к которому вы хотите + применить тот или иной цвет. Для большинства элементов документа к окну цветовых палитр можно получить доступ, нажав на цветной прямоугольник на правой боковой панели, когда нужный элемент выделен. Для шрифта это окно можно открыть с помощью направленной вниз стрелки рядом со значком Цвет шрифта на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Предусмотрены следующие палитры: +

                    +

                    +

                    Палитра

                      -
                    • - Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме документа. -
                      • -
                    • - Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Выбранная цветовая схема на них не влияет. -
                      • -
                    • - Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: -

                      - Палитра - Пользовательский цвет -

                      -

                      - Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет. -

                      -
                      • -
                    +
                  • Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме документа.
                    • +
                  • Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Выбранная цветовая схема на них не влияет.
                    • +
                  • + Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты:: +
                      +
                    • Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в документе.
                      • +
                    • + Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: +

                      Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                      +

                      Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет.

                      +
                      • +
                    +
                    • +
                  \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm index 506c24d605..8c53be9392 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                  Создание списков

                  -

                  Для создания в документе списка:

                  +

                  Чтобы создать список в Редакторе документов:

                  1. установите курсор в том месте, где начнется список (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст),
                  2. перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов,
                    3. @@ -83,12 +83,15 @@

                    Изменение параметров списков

                  3. Маркер - позволяет выбрать нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. При нажатии на поле Шрифт и символ открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье.
                  4. Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный тип нумерации, используемый для нумерованного списка. Доступны следующие варианты: Нет, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
                  5. Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать нужный тип выравнивания маркеров или нумерации, который используется для горизонтального выравнивания маркеров или нумерации внутри отведенного для них пространства. Доступны следующие типы выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру, По правому краю.
                    6. -
                  6. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96.
                    7. -
                  7. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или нумерации соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задать пользовательский цвет.
                    8. +
                  8. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96.
                    9. +
                  9. Полужирный/Курсив/Цвет - позволяет выделить и акцентировать внимание на нужный маркированный/нумерованный список. Для параметра Цвет по умолчанию установлено значение Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или номеров соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать один из Цветов темы, Стандартных цветов, Недавних цветов из палитры или нажмите Другие цвета, чтобы выбрать собственный цвет.

                Все изменения отображаются в поле Просмотр.

                -
              • нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек.
                • +
              • + нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек. +

                Нажмите правой кнопкой мыши на маркированный список и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Изменение отступов в списке, чтобы получить доступ к Параметрам списка так же, как и для многоуровневого списка.

                +

        Для того чтобы изменить параметры многоуровневого списка,

          @@ -103,7 +106,20 @@

          Изменение параметров списков

        1. Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный тип нумерации, используемый для нумерованного списка, или нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. Для нумерованного списка доступны следующие варианты: Нет, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Для маркированного списка можно выбрать один из стандартных символов или использовать опцию Новый маркер. При выборе этой опции открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье.
        2. Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать нужный тип выравнивания маркеров или нумерации, который используется для горизонтального выравнивания маркеров или нумерации внутри отведенного для них пространства в начале абзаца. Доступны следующие типы выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру, По правому краю.
        3. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96.
          4. -
        4. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или нумерации соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задать пользовательский цвет.
          5. +
        5. Полужирный/Курсив/Цвет - позволяет выделить и акцентировать внимание на нужный маркированный/нумерованный список. Для параметра Цвет по умолчанию установлено значение Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или номеров соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать один из Цветов темы, Стандартных цветов, Недавних цветов из палитры или нажмите Другие цвета, чтобы выбрать собственный цвет.
          6. +
        6. Формат номера - показывает стиль символа, использованного для создания списка.
          7. +
        7. + Нажмите двойную стрелку рядом с полем Формат номера, чтобы получить доступ к расширенным настройкам списка. Вы можете индивидуально настроить каждый уровень многоуровневого списка, выбрав нужный уровень в разделе Выбрать уровень.. +

          Окно настроек многоуровневого списка

          +
            +
          • Шрифт - позволяет выбрать форматирование шрифта,
            • +
          • Включить номер уровня - позволяет указать номер родительского уровня для нижестоящего уровня,
            • +
          • Начать с - позволяет выбрать необходимый порядковый номер, с которого начинается нумерованный список. Установите флажок Нумеровать заного, чтобы перезапустить нумерацию списка,
            • +
          • Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать необходимый тип выравнивания для каждого уровня списка. Выберите из раскрывающегося списка один из следующих типов выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю и укажите интервал перед символом списка,
            • +
          • Отступ текста - позволяет изменить смещение между символом списка и текстом,
            • +
          • Символ после номера - позволяет изменить, что должно идти после символа, который вы выбрали в качестве формата номера. Выберите Знак табуляции, Пробел или Нет из выпадающего списка. Когда вы выбираете Знак табуляции, становится доступной опция Добавить переход по Tab в:. Установите флажок напротив Добавить переход по Tab в: и укажите длину отступа.
            • +
          +

          8. Все изменения отображаются в поле Просмотр.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm index 594779a8ee..800508fdce 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm @@ -25,40 +25,40 @@

          Настройка типа, размера и цвета шрифта

          Размер шрифта -
          +
          Используется для выбора предустановленного значения размера шрифта из выпадающего списка (доступны следующие стандартные значения: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 и 96). Также можно вручную ввести произвольное значение до 300 пунктов в поле ввода и нажать клавишу Enter. Увеличить размер шрифта -
          +
          Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт крупнее при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Уменьшить размер шрифта -
          +
          Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт мельче при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Изменить регистр -
          +
          Используется для изменения регистра шрифта. Как в предложениях. - регистр совпадает с обычным предложением. нижнеий регистр - все буквы маленькие. ВЕРХНИЙ РЕГИСТР - все буквы прописные. Каждое Слово С Прописной - каждое слово начинается с заглавной буквы. иЗМЕНИТЬ рЕГИСТР - поменять регистр выделенного текста или слова, в котором находится курсор мыши. Цвет выделения -
          +
          Используется для выделения отдельных предложений, фраз, слов или даже символов путем добавления цветовой полосы, имитирующей отчеркивание текста маркером. Можно выделить нужную часть текста, а потом нажать направленную вниз стрелку рядом с этим значком, чтобы выбрать цвет на палитре (этот набор цветов не зависит от выбранной Цветовой схемы и включает в себя 16 цветов), и этот цвет будет применен к выбранному тексту. Или же можно сначала выбрать цвет выделения, а потом начать выделять текст мышью - указатель мыши будет выглядеть так:
          - и появится возможность выделить несколько разных частей текста одну за другой. Чтобы остановить выделение текста, просто еще раз щелкните по значку. Для очистки цвета выделения воспользуйтесь опцией Без заливки. - Цвет выделения отличается от Цвета фона
          , + Цвет выделения отличается от Цвета фона
          , поскольку последний применяется ко всему абзацу и полностью заполняет пространство абзаца от левого поля страницы до правого поля страницы. Цвет шрифта -
          +
          Используется для изменения цвета букв/символов в тексте. По умолчанию в новом пустом документе установлен автоматический цвет шрифта. Он отображается как черный шрифт на белом фоне. Если изменить цвет фона на черный, цвет шрифта автоматически изменится на белый, так чтобы текст по-прежнему был четко виден. Для diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 02e37368f0..8286714d70 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -11,45 +11,56 @@
          -
          - -
          +
          + +

          Вставка автофигур

          -

          Вставка автофигуры

          +

          Вставка автофигуры

          Для добавления автофигуры в документ:

            -
          1. перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
            2. -
          2. щелкните по значку
            Фигура на верхней панели инструментов,
            3. +
          3. перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
            4. +
          4. щелкните по значку
            Фигура на верхней панели инструментов,
          5. выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Последние использованные, Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии,
          6. щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы,
            7. -
          7. установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, +
          8. + установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру,
            9. -
          9. после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. -

            Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на странице выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней).

            +
          10. + после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. +

            Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на странице выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней).

          -

          К автофигуре также можно добавить подпись. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с подписями к автофигурам вы можете обратиться к этой статье.

          -

          Перемещение и изменение размера автофигур

          -

          Для изменения размера автофигуры перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по краям автофигуры. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранной автофигуры при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков.

          -

          -

          При изменении некоторых фигур, например, фигурных стрелок или выносок, также доступен желтый значок в форме ромба . Он позволяет изменять отдельные параметры формы, например, длину указателя стрелки.

          +

          К автофигуре также можно добавить подпись. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с подписями к автофигурам вы можете обратиться к этой статье.

          +

          Перемещение и изменение размера автофигур

          +

          Для изменения размера автофигуры перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по краям автофигуры. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранной автофигуры при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков.

          +

          +

          При изменении некоторых фигур, например, фигурных стрелок или выносок, также доступен желтый значок в форме ромба . Он позволяет изменять отдельные параметры формы, например, длину указателя стрелки.

          - Для изменения местоположения автофигуры используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на автофигуру. Перетащите автофигуру на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. - При перемещении автофигуры на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте"). Чтобы перемещать автофигуру с шагом в один пиксель, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре. + Для изменения местоположения автофигуры используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на автофигуру. Перетащите автофигуру на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. + При перемещении автофигуры на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте"). Чтобы перемещать автофигуру с шагом в один пиксель, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре. Чтобы перемещать автофигуру строго по горизонтали/вертикали и предотвратить ее смещение в перпендикулярном направлении, при перетаскивании удерживайте клавишу Shift.

          -

          Чтобы повернуть автофигуру, наведите курсор мыши на маркер поворота и перетащите его по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки. Чтобы ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов, при поворачивании удерживайте клавишу Shift.

          -

          - Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. -

          -
          -

          Изменение параметров автофигуры

          -

          Чтобы выровнять или расположить автофигуры в определенном порядке, используйте контекстное меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты:

          +

          Чтобы повернуть автофигуру, наведите курсор мыши на маркер поворота и перетащите его по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки. Чтобы ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов, при поворачивании удерживайте клавишу Shift.

          +

          + Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. +

          +
          +

          Копирование форматирования стиля автофигуры

          +

          Чтобы скопировать определенное форматирование стиля автофигуры,

          +
            +
          1. выберите автофигуру, форматирование которой нужно скопировать, и с помощью мыши или клавиатуры,
            2. +
          2. щелкните значок Копировать стиль
            на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов (указатель мыши будет выглядеть следующим образом
            ),
            3. +
          3. выберите нужную автофигуру, чтобы применить такое же форматирование.
            4. +
          +
          +

          Изменение параметров автофигуры

          +

          Чтобы выровнять или расположить автофигуры в определенном порядке, используйте контекстное меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты:

          • Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор.
          • Напечатать выделенное - используется для печати только выбранной части документа.
          • Принять / Отклонить изменения - используется для принятия или отклонения отслеживаемых изменений в общем документе.
            • -
          • Изменить точки - используется для редактирования формы или изменения кривизны автофигуры. +
          • + Изменить точки - используется для редактирования формы или изменения кривизны автофигуры.
            1. Чтобы активировать редактируемые опорные точки фигуры, щелкните по фигуре правой кнопкой мыши и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Изменить точки. Черные квадраты, которые становятся активными, — это точки, где встречаются две линии, а красная линия очерчивает фигуру. Щелкните и перетащите квадрат, чтобы изменить положение точки и изменить контур фигуры.
            2. @@ -65,186 +76,203 @@

              Изменение параметров автофигуры

            3. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранную автофигуру на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать автофигуры для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице.
            4. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять фигуру по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице.
              5. -
            5. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию.
              6. +
            6. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию.
            7. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз.
              8. +
            8. Сохранить как рисунок - используется , чтобы сохранить автофигуру в виде изображения на жестком диске.
            9. Дополнительные параметры фигуры - используется для вызова окна 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры'.
          -

          Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по фигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства:

          +

          Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по фигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства:

            -
          • Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: -
              -
            • Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. -

              Заливка цветом

              -

              Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится.

              -
              • -
            • Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. -

              Градиентная заливка

              -
                -
              • - Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: -
                  -
                • Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол.
                  • -
                • Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям.
                  • -
                -
                • -
              • - Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. -
                  -
                • Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку
                  Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку
                  Удалить точку градиента.
                  • -
                • Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения.
                  • -
                • Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет.
                  • -
                -
                • -
              -
              • -
            • Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. -

              Заливка с помощью изображения или текстуры

              +
            • + Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты:
                -
              • Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале.
                • -
              • Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. -

                В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево.

                +
              • + Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. +

                Заливка цветом

                +

                Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится.

                • -
              -
                -
              • В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. -

                Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                -

                Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                -

                Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение.

                +
              • + Градиентная заливка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы заполнить фигуру двумя или более исчезающими цветами. Настройте свою градиентную заливку без каких-либо ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры
                , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой боковой панели. +

                Градиентная заливка

                +

                Доступные опции меню:

                +
                  +
                • + Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: +
                    +
                  • Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол.
                    • +
                  • Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям.
                    • +
                  +
                  • +
                • + Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. +
                    +
                  • Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку
                    Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку
                    Удалить точку градиента.
                    • +
                  • Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения.
                    • +
                  • Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет.
                    • +
                  +
                  • +
                • +
              • + Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. +

                Заливка с помощью изображения или текстуры

                +
                  +
                • Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале.
                  • +
                • + Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. +

                  В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево.

                  +
                  • +
                +
                  +
                • + В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. +

                  Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                  +

                  Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                  +

                  Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение.

                  +
                  • +
                +
                • +
              • + Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. +

                Заливка с помощью узора

                +
                  +
                • Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню.
                  • +
                • Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора.
                  • +
                • Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора.
                  • +
                +
                • +
              • Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
              • -
            • Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. -

              Заливка с помощью узора

              -
                -
              • Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню.
                • -
              • Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора.
                • -
              • Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора.
                • -
              -
              • -
            • Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
              • -
            -

          Вкладка Параметры автофигуры

            -
          • Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности.
            • -
          • Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. -
              -
            • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
              • -
            • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
              • -
            • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: -
              -
            • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки
              • -
            • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке
              • -
            • чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо)
              • -
            • чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз)
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже).
            • -
          • Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка.
            • -
          • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью.
            • +
          • Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности.
            • +
          • + Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. +
              +
            • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
              • +
            • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
              • +
            • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
              • +
            • Для изменения непрозрачности, введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь ползунком.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • + Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: +
              +
            • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки
              • +
            • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке
              • +
            • чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо)
              • +
            • чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз)
              • +
            +
            • +
          • Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже).
            • +
          • Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка.
            • +
          • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью.
          -

          Изменение дополнительных параметров автофигуры

          +

          Изменение дополнительных параметров автофигуры

          Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры':

          -

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          +

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры:

            -
          • - Ширина - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить ширину автофигуры. -
              -
            • Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...).
              • -
            • Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно ширины левого поля, поля (то есть расстояния между левым и правым полями), ширины страницы или ширины правого поля.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • - Высота - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить высоту автофигуры. -
              -
            • Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...).
              • -
            • Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно поля (то есть расстояния между верхним и нижним полями), высоты нижнего поля, высоты страницы или высоты верхнего поля.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Если установлен флажок Сохранять пропорции, ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры.
            • -
          -

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Поворот

          -

          Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры:

          -
            -
          • Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа.
            • -
          • Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз).
            • -
          -

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          +
        8. + Ширина - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить ширину автофигуры. +
            +
          • Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...).
            • +
          • Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно ширины левого поля, поля (то есть расстояния между левым и правым полями), ширины страницы или ширины правого поля.
            • +
          +
          9. +
        9. + Высота - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить высоту автофигуры. +
            +
          • Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...).
            • +
          • Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно поля (то есть расстояния между верхним и нижним полями), высоты нижнего поля, высоты страницы или высоты верхнего поля.
            • +
          +
          10. +
        10. Если установлен флажок Сохранять пропорции, ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры.
          11. + +

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Поворот

          +

          Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры:

          +
            +
          • Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа.
            • +
          • Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз).
            • +
          +

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры:

            -
          • Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения автофигуры относительно текста: или она будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания "В тексте") или текст будет обтекать ее со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). -
              -

            • В тексте - автофигура считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста фигура тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны.

              -

              Если выбран один из следующих стилей, автофигуру можно перемещать независимо от текста и и точно задавать положение фигуры на странице:

              -
              • -

            • Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает автофигуру.

              • -

            • По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры автофигуры.

              • -

            • Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров автофигуры и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри фигуры. Чтобы этот эффект проявился, используйте опцию Изменить границу обтекания из контекстного меню.

              • -

            • Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже автофигуры.

              • -

            • Перед текстом - автофигура перекрывает текст.

              • -

            • За текстом - текст перекрывает автофигуру.

              • -
            +
          • + Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения автофигуры относительно текста: или она будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания "В тексте") или текст будет обтекать ее со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). +
              +
            • +

              В тексте - автофигура считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста фигура тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны.

              +

              Если выбран один из следующих стилей, автофигуру можно перемещать независимо от текста и и точно задавать положение фигуры на странице:

              +
              • +

            • Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает автофигуру.

              • +

            • По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры автофигуры.

              • +

            • Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров автофигуры и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри фигуры. Чтобы этот эффект проявился, используйте опцию Изменить границу обтекания из контекстного меню.

              • +

            • Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже автофигуры.

              • +

            • Перед текстом - автофигура перекрывает текст.

              • +

            • За текстом - текст перекрывает автофигуру.

              • +

          При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа).

          -

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          -

          Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания:

          +

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          +

          Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания:

            -
          • - В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: -
              -
            • Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля,
              • -
            • Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля,
              • -
            • Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • - В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: -
              -
            • Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля,
              • -
            • Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля,
              • -
            • Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля.
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли автофигура перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому она привязана.
            • +
          • + В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: +
              +
            • Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля,
              • +
            • Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля,
              • +
            • Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • + В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: +
              +
            • Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля,
              • +
            • Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля,
              • +
            • Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля.
              • +
            +
            • +
          • Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли автофигура перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому она привязана.
          • Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться две автофигуры, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице.

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры:

            -
          • Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: -
              -
            • Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: -
                -
              • Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими.
                • -
              • Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными.
                • -
              • Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными.
                • -
              -
              • -
            • Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: +
            • + Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры:
                -
              • Закругленный - угол будет закругленным.
                • -
              • Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось.
                • -
              • Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами.
                • +
              • + Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: +
                  +
                • Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими.
                  • +
                • Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными.
                  • +
                • Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными.
                  • +
                +
                • +
              • + Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: +
                  +
                • Закругленный - угол будет закругленным.
                  • +
                • Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось.
                  • +
                • Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами.
                  • +
                +

                Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины.

                +
              -

              Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины.

              -
              • -
          • Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков.
          -

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          +

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры).

          -

          Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна.

          -

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          -

          Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура.

          +

          Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна.

          +

          Фигура - дополнительные параметры

          +

          Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура.

          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index d8a87c6044..91eaa36dc9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -87,6 +87,14 @@

          Вставка диаграммы

        11. Точечная с прямыми отрезками
          12. +
          + Лепестковая +
            +
          • Лепестковая
            • +
          • Лепестковая с маркерами
            • +
          • Заполненная лепестковая
            • +
          +
          Комбинированные
            @@ -114,7 +122,7 @@

            Вставка диаграммы

            Нажмите кнопку Выбрать данные, расположенную в окне Редактора диаграмм. Откроется окно Данные диаграммы.
            1. - Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления диапазоном данных диаграммы, элементами легенды (ряды), подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и переключением строк / столбцов. + Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления Диапазоном данных диаграммы, Элементами легенды (ряды), Подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и Переключением строк / столбцов.

              Окно Диапазон данных

              • @@ -192,7 +200,7 @@

                Вставка диаграммы

              • Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху.
              • Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу.
              • Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху.
                • -
              • Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков и Линейчатых диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру.
                • +
              • Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков, Линейчатых, Лепестковых и Комбинированных диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру.
            2. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение,
              3. @@ -244,6 +252,7 @@

              Вставка диаграммы

              Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. +
            3. Логарифмическая шкала - используется для включения логарифмического масштабирования до Базового значения, определяемой пользователем.
            4. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения:
                @@ -375,7 +384,7 @@

                Редактирование элементов диаграммы

                C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. - При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина и тип линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. + При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина, тип и непрозрачность линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице.

                Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен.

                Если вам нужно изменить размер элементов диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых квадратов , расположенных по периметру элемента.

                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index b3fc945cf3..2e0c059a25 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -82,6 +82,7 @@

                Изменение параметров изображения

              • Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять изображение по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице.
              • Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля "В тексте". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию.
              • Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз.
                • +
              • Сохранить как рисунок - используется, чтобы сохранить изображение на жестком диске.
              • Обрезать - используется, чтобы применить один из вариантов обрезки: Обрезать, Заливка или Вписать. Выберите из подменю пункт Обрезать, затем перетащите маркеры обрезки, чтобы задать область обрезки, и нажмите на одну из этих трех опций в подменю еще раз, чтобы применить изменения.
              • Реальный размер - используется для смены текущего размера изображения на реальный размер.
              • Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы заменить текущее изображение, загрузив другое Из файла или По URL.
                • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index 0aa79edf8d..25a1428362 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -23,7 +23,9 @@

                Вставка объектов SmartArt

              • наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс,
              • выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню.
            +

            Вы можете сохранить объект SmartArt как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

            Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели:

            +

            Обратите внимание, что настройки цвета, стиля и типа формы могут быть настроены индивидуально.

            • @@ -91,6 +93,7 @@

              Вставка объектов SmartArt

            • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
            • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
            • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
              • +
            • Для изменения непрозрачности контура введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь соответствующим ползунком.
          • Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом.
            • @@ -100,21 +103,21 @@

            Вставка объектов SmartArt

          Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры.

          +

          Параметры фигуры - для редактирования фигур, используемых в макете. Вы можете изменять размер формы, редактировать заливку, контур, толщину, стиль обтекания, положение, линии и стрелки, текстовое поле и альтернативный текст.

          +

          + Параметры объекта Text Art - для редактирования стиля Text Art, который используется SmartArt для выделения текста. Вы можете изменить шаблон Text Art, тип заливки, цвет и непрозрачность, толщину линии, цвет и тип. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. +

          +

          Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по SmartArt или по границе данного элемента, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования:

          +

          Меню SmartArt

          +

          Стиль обтекания - для определения способа расположения объекта относительно текста. Параметр Стиль обтекания доступен после щелчка по границе графического объекта SmartArt.

          +

          Вставить название - для добавления возможности ссылаться на графический объект SmartArt в документе.

          +

          Дополнительные параметры фигуры - для доступа к дополнительным параметрам форматирования фигуры.

          + +

          Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по графическому объекту SmartArt, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования текста:

          +

          Меню SmartArt

          +

          Выравнивание по вертикали - для выбрать выравнивание текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Выровнять по верхнему краю, Выровнять по середине, Выровнять по нижнему краю.

          +

          Направление текста - выбрать направление направления текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Горизонтальное, Повернуть текст вниз, Повернуть текст вверх.

          +

          Обратитесь к Дополнительным параметрам абзаца, чтобы получить информацию о дополнительных параметрах форматирования абзаца.

          --> \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index e275143326..cc5c387f1a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -38,8 +38,9 @@

          Форматирование текстового поля

          Выделенное текстовое поле

          • чтобы изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры.
            • -
          • чтобы изменить заливку, контур, стиль обтекания текстового поля или заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры
            на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции.
            • +
          • чтобы изменить заливку, контур, стиль обтекания текстового поля или заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры
            на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции.
          • чтобы выровнять текстовое поле на странице, расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, повернуть или отразить текстовое поле, изменить стиль обтекания или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. Подробнее о выравнивании и расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице.
            • +

            Вы можете сохранить текстовое поле в виде изображенияя на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

          Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля

          Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии.

          @@ -90,11 +91,12 @@

          Изменение стиля объекта Text Art

        12. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
          13. -

          Настройте толщину, цвет и тип Контура шрифта.

          +

          Настройте толщину, цвет, тип и непрозрачность Контура шрифта.

          • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
          • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
          • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
            • +
          • Для изменения непрозрачности, введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь ползунком.

          Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба.

          Трансформация объекта Text Art

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index ea1fffd4d5..f660f85dff 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -63,722 +63,722 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          !! -
          +
          Символы ... -
          +
          Точки :: -
          +
          Операторы := -
          +
          Операторы /< -
          +
          Операторы отношения /> -
          +
          Операторы отношения /= -
          +
          Операторы отношения \above -
          +
          Символы Above/Below \acute -
          +
          Акценты \aleph -
          +
          Буквы иврита \alpha -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Alpha -
          +
          Греческие буквы \amalg -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \angle -
          +
          Геометрические обозначения \aoint -
          +
          Интегралы \approx -
          +
          Операторы отношений \asmash -
          +
          Стрелки \ast -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \asymp -
          +
          Операторы отношений \atop -
          +
          Операторы \bar -
          +
          Черта сверху/снизу \Bar -
          +
          Акценты \because -
          +
          Операторы отношений \begin -
          +
          Разделители \below -
          +
          Символы Above/Below \bet -
          +
          Буквы иврита \beta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Beta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \beth -
          +
          Буквы иврита \bigcap -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigcup -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigodot -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigoplus -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigotimes -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigsqcup -
          +
          Крупные операторы \biguplus -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigvee -
          +
          Крупные операторы \bigwedge -
          +
          Крупные операторы \binomial -
          +
          Уравнения \bot -
          +
          Логические обозначения \bowtie -
          +
          Операторы отношений \box -
          +
          Символы \boxdot -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \boxminus -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \boxplus -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \bra -
          +
          Разделители \break -
          +
          Символы \breve -
          +
          Акценты \bullet -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \cap -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \cbrt -
          +
          Квадратные корни и радикалы \cases -
          +
          Символы \cdot -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \cdots -
          +
          Точки \check -
          +
          Акценты \chi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Chi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \circ -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \close -
          +
          Разделители \clubsuit -
          +
          Символы \coint -
          +
          Интегралы \cong -
          +
          Операторы отношений \coprod -
          +
          Математические операторы \cup -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \dalet -
          +
          Буквы иврита \daleth -
          +
          Буквы иврита \dashv -
          +
          Операторы отношений \dd -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \Dd -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \ddddot -
          +
          Акценты \dddot -
          +
          Акценты \ddot -
          +
          Акценты \ddots -
          +
          Точки \defeq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \degc -
          +
          Символы \degf -
          +
          Символы \degree -
          +
          Символы \delta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Delta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Deltaeq -
          +
          Операторы \diamond -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \diamondsuit -
          +
          Символы \div -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \dot -
          +
          Акценты \doteq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \dots -
          +
          Точки \doublea -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleA -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleb -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleB -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublec -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleC -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubled -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleD -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublee -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleE -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublef -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleF -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleg -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleG -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleh -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleH -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublei -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleI -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublej -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleJ -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublek -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleK -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublel -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleL -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublem -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleM -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublen -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleN -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleo -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleO -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublep -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleP -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleq -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleQ -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubler -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleR -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubles -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleS -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublet -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleT -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleu -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleU -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublev -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleV -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublew -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleW -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublex -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleX -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubley -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleY -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doublez -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleZ -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \downarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Downarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \dsmash -
          +
          Стрелки \ee -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \ell -
          +
          Символы \emptyset -
          +
          Обозначения множеств @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \end -
          +
          Разделители @@ -798,297 +798,297 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \epsilon -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Epsilon -
          +
          Греческие буквы \eqarray -
          +
          Символы \equiv -
          +
          Операторы отношений \eta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Eta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \exists -
          +
          Логические обозначения \forall -
          +
          Логические обозначения \fraktura -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturA -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturb -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturB -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturc -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturC -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturd -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturD -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakture -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturE -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturf -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturF -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturg -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturG -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturh -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturH -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturi -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturI -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturk -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturK -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturl -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturL -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturm -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturM -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturn -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturN -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturo -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturO -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturp -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturP -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturq -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturQ -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturr -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturR -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturs -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturS -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturt -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturT -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturu -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturU -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturv -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturV -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturw -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturW -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturx -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturX -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \fraktury -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturY -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturz -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frakturZ -
          +
          Буквы готического шрифта \frown -
          +
          Операторы отношений @@ -1098,47 +1098,47 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \G -
          +
          Греческие буквы \gamma -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Gamma -
          +
          Греческие буквы \ge -
          +
          Операторы отношений \geq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \gets -
          +
          Стрелки \gg -
          +
          Операторы отношений \gimel -
          +
          Буквы иврита \grave -
          +
          Акценты @@ -1148,112 +1148,112 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \hat -
          +
          Акценты \hbar -
          +
          Символы \heartsuit -
          +
          Символы \hookleftarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \hookrightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \hphantom -
          +
          Стрелки \hsmash -
          +
          Стрелки \hvec -
          +
          Акценты \identitymatrix -
          +
          Матрицы \ii -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \iiint -
          +
          Интегралы \iint -
          +
          Интегралы \iiiint -
          +
          Интегралы \Im -
          +
          Символы \imath -
          +
          Символы \in -
          +
          Операторы отношений \inc -
          +
          Символы \infty -
          +
          Символы \int -
          +
          Интегралы \integral -
          +
          Интегралы \iota -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Iota -
          +
          Греческие буквы @@ -1263,187 +1263,187 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \j -
          +
          Символы \jj -
          +
          Дважды начерченные буквы \jmath -
          +
          Символы \kappa -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Kappa -
          +
          Греческие буквы \ket -
          +
          Разделители \lambda -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Lambda -
          +
          Греческие буквы \langle -
          +
          Разделители \lbbrack -
          +
          Разделители \lbrace -
          +
          Разделители \lbrack -
          +
          Разделители \lceil -
          +
          Разделители \ldiv -
          +
          Дробная черта \ldivide -
          +
          Дробная черта \ldots -
          +
          Точки \le -
          +
          Операторы отношений \left -
          +
          Разделители \leftarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Leftarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \leftharpoondown -
          +
          Стрелки \leftharpoonup -
          +
          Стрелки \leftrightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Leftrightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \leq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \lfloor -
          +
          Разделители \lhvec -
          +
          Акценты \limit -
          +
          Лимиты \ll -
          +
          Операторы отношений \lmoust -
          +
          Разделители \Longleftarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Longleftrightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Longrightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \lrhar -
          +
          Стрелки \lvec -
          +
          Акценты \mapsto -
          +
          Стрелки \matrix -
          +
          Матрицы @@ -1453,42 +1453,42 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \mid -
          +
          Операторы отношений \middle -
          +
          Символы \models -
          +
          Операторы отношений \mp -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \mu -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Mu -
          +
          Греческие буквы \nabla -
          +
          Символы \naryand -
          +
          Операторы @@ -1498,772 +1498,772 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \ne -
          +
          Операторы отношений \nearrow -
          +
          Стрелки \neq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \ni -
          +
          Операторы отношений \norm -
          +
          Разделители \notcontain -
          +
          Операторы отношений \notelement -
          +
          Операторы отношений \notin -
          +
          Операторы отношений \nu -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Nu -
          +
          Греческие буквы \nwarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \o -
          +
          Греческие буквы \O -
          +
          Греческие буквы \odot -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \of -
          +
          Операторы \oiiint -
          +
          Интегралы \oiint -
          +
          Интегралы \oint -
          +
          Интегралы \omega -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Omega -
          +
          Греческие буквы \ominus -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \open -
          +
          Разделители \oplus -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \otimes -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \over -
          +
          Разделители \overbar -
          +
          Акценты \overbrace -
          +
          Акценты \overbracket -
          +
          Акценты \overline -
          +
          Акценты \overparen -
          +
          Акценты \overshell -
          +
          Акценты \parallel -
          +
          Геометрические обозначения \partial -
          +
          Символы \pmatrix -
          +
          Матрицы \perp -
          +
          Геометрические обозначения \phantom -
          +
          Символы \phi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Phi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \pi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Pi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \pm -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \pppprime -
          +
          Штрихи \ppprime -
          +
          Штрихи \pprime -
          +
          Штрихи \prec -
          +
          Операторы отношений \preceq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \prime -
          +
          Штрихи \prod -
          +
          Математические операторы \propto -
          +
          Операторы отношений \psi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Psi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \qdrt -
          +
          Квадратные корни и радикалы \quadratic -
          +
          Квадратные корни и радикалы \rangle -
          +
          Разделители \Rangle -
          +
          Разделители \ratio -
          +
          Операторы отношений \rbrace -
          +
          Разделители \rbrack -
          +
          Разделители \Rbrack -
          +
          Разделители \rceil -
          +
          Разделители \rddots -
          +
          Точки \Re -
          +
          Символы \rect -
          +
          Символы \rfloor -
          +
          Разделители \rho -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Rho -
          +
          Греческие буквы \rhvec -
          +
          Акценты \right -
          +
          Разделители \rightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Rightarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \rightharpoondown -
          +
          Стрелки \rightharpoonup -
          +
          Стрелки \rmoust -
          +
          Разделители \root -
          +
          Символы \scripta -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptA -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptb -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptB -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptc -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptC -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptd -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptD -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripte -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptE -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptf -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptF -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptg -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptG -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripth -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptH -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripti -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptI -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptk -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptK -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptl -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptL -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptm -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptM -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptn -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptN -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripto -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptO -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptp -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptP -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptq -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptQ -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptr -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptR -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripts -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptS -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptt -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptT -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptu -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptU -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptv -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptV -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptw -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptW -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptx -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptX -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripty -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptY -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptz -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptZ -
          +
          Буквы рукописного шрифта \sdiv -
          +
          Дробная черта \sdivide -
          +
          Дробная черта \searrow -
          +
          Стрелки \setminus -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \sigma -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Sigma -
          +
          Греческие буквы \sim -
          +
          Операторы отношений \simeq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \smash -
          +
          Стрелки \smile -
          +
          Операторы отношений \spadesuit -
          +
          Символы \sqcap -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \sqcup -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \sqrt -
          +
          Квадратные корни и радикалы \sqsubseteq -
          +
          Обозначения множеств \sqsuperseteq -
          +
          Обозначения множеств \star -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \subset -
          +
          Обозначения множеств \subseteq -
          +
          Обозначения множеств \succ -
          +
          Операторы отношений \succeq -
          +
          Операторы отношений \sum -
          +
          Математические операторы \superset -
          +
          Обозначения множеств \superseteq -
          +
          Обозначения множеств \swarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \tau -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Tau -
          +
          Греческие буквы \therefore -
          +
          Операторы отношений \theta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Theta -
          +
          Греческие буквы @@ -2278,172 +2278,172 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \tilde -
          +
          Акценты \times -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \to -
          +
          Стрелки \top -
          +
          Логические обозначения \tvec -
          +
          Стрелки \ubar -
          +
          Акценты \Ubar -
          +
          Акценты \underbar -
          +
          Акценты \underbrace -
          +
          Акценты \underbracket -
          +
          Акценты \underline -
          +
          Акценты \underparen -
          +
          Акценты \uparrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Uparrow -
          +
          Стрелки \updownarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \Updownarrow -
          +
          Стрелки \uplus -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \upsilon -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Upsilon -
          +
          Греческие буквы \varepsilon -
          +
          Греческие буквы \varphi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \varpi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \varrho -
          +
          Греческие буквы \varsigma -
          +
          Греческие буквы \vartheta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \vbar -
          +
          Разделители \vdash -
          +
          Операторы отношений \vdots -
          +
          Точки \vec -
          +
          Акценты \vee -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \vert -
          +
          Разделители \Vert -
          +
          Разделители \Vmatrix -
          +
          Матрицы \vphantom -
          +
          Стрелки @@ -2453,37 +2453,37 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          \wedge -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \wp -
          +
          Символы \wr -
          +
          Бинарные операторы \xi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Xi -
          +
          Греческие буквы \zeta -
          +
          Греческие буквы \Zeta -
          +
          Греческие буквы @@ -2498,42 +2498,42 @@

          Автозамена математическими символами

          ~= -
          +
          Операторы отношений -+ -
          +
          Бинарные операторы +- -
          +
          Бинарные операторы << -
          +
          Операторы отношений <= -
          +
          Операторы отношений -> -
          +
          Стрелки >= -
          +
          Операторы отношений >> -
          +
          Операторы отношений @@ -2554,6 +2554,10 @@

          Автоформат при вводе

          Автоформат при вводе

          Автозамена текста

          Вы можете настроить редактор на автоматическое использование заглавной буквы в каждом предложении. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить эту функцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена текста и снимите флажок с Делать первые буквы предложений прописными.

          +

          По умолчанию редактор делает заглавными первые буквы ячеек таблицы. Чтобы отключить данную опцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл > Дополнительные настройки -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены - > Автозамена текста и снимите флажок Делать первые буквы ячеек таблиц прописными..

          +

          Вы также можете настроить использование заглавных букв после определенных слов. Для этого введите нужные слова в поле Не использовать заглавные буквы после и нажав кнопку Добавить или выбрав нужные слова в соответствующем списке, находящимся ниже.

          +

          Вы можете изменять список исключений в зависимости от используемого языка в выпадающем списке Исключение для языка..

          +

          Используйте кнопку Сбросить настройки, чтобы отменить все пользовательские изменения..

          Автозамена текста

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 4f91e88b8a..5a05aa5006 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -16,10 +16,10 @@

          Сохранение, скачивание, печать документа

          Сохранение

          -

          По умолчанию онлайн-редактор документов автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры.

          +

          По умолчанию онлайн-редактор документов автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры.

          Чтобы сохранить текущий документ вручную в текущем формате и местоположении,

            -
          • нажмите значок Сохранить
            в левой части шапки редактора, или
            • +
          • нажмите значок Сохранить
            в левой части шапки редактора, или
          • используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или
          • нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить.
          @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@

          Сохранение

          1. нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов,
          2. выберите опцию Сохранить как,
            3. -
          3. выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDF/A, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон документа DOTX или OTT.
            4. +
          4. выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон документа DOTX или OTT.
          @@ -38,29 +38,47 @@

          Скачивание

          1. нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов,
          2. выберите опцию Скачать как,
            3. -
          3. выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM.
            4. +
          4. выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG.

          Сохранение копии

          Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию документа на портале,

          1. нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов,
          2. выберите опцию Сохранить копию как,
            3. -
          3. выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM.
            4. +
          4. выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG.
          5. выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить.

          Печать

          Чтобы распечатать текущий документ,

            -
          • нажмите значок Напечатать файл
            в левой части шапки редактора, или
            • +
          • нажмите значок Напечатать файл
            в левой части шапки редактора, или
          • используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или
          • нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать.
          В браузере Firefox возможна печатать документа без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf.
          -

          Также можно распечатать выделенный фрагмент текста с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное).

          +

          Print Settings window

          +

          В открывшемся окне Печать настройте следующие параметры:

          +
            +
          • Получатель — выберите получателя файла для печати, например, Сохранить в PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print в PDF, Fax и т.д.
            • +
          • Ориентация - выберите опцию Книжная, если вы хотите печатать на странице вертикально, или выберите Альбомная для горизонтальной печати.
            • +
          • Страницы - выберите один из вариантов печати страниц: Все, Текущая, Нечетные, < b>Четные или Диапазон. В последнем случае вам придется ввести количество страниц вручную.
            • +
          • + Цветной режим - выберите, хотите ли вы, чтобы ваш файл был напечатан в Цветном или в Черно-белом формате. Обратите внимание, что этот параметр доступен, если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Microsoft XPS Document Writer. Если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Fax, то по умолчанию задан цветовой режим Черно-белый. +

            Нажмите на заголовок Все настройки, чтобы открыть дополнительные настройки.

            +
            • +
          • Размер бумаги — выберите один из доступных размеров из раскрывающегося списка или задайте пользовательский.
            • +
          • Масштаб - выберите масштабирование файла при печати; вы можете выбрать опцию По ширине страницы или установить масштаб вручную с помощью переключателя Масштаб и соответствующего поля ввода рядом.
            • +
          • Страниц на одном листе — выберите количество страниц, печатаемых на одном листе, например, две, шесть, девять и т.д.
            • +
          • Поля — выберите поля страницы. Вы можете установить поля По умолчанию или пользовательские, измеряемые в милиметрах. Для пользовательских полей установите необходимые значения для верхнего, нижнего, левого и правого поля вручную. Вы также можете выбрать опцию Нет, чтобы не печатать поля.
            • +
          • Настройки. Установите флажок у Печатать колонтитулы, чтобы они печатались, или снимите этот флажок, чтобы верхние и нижние колонтитулы не печатались.
            • +
          • Печать, используя системный диалог – нажмите на этот заголовок, чтобы открыть системный диалог для настройки процесса печати.
            • +

          В десктопной версии документ будет напрямую отправлен на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати.

          +

          Также можно распечатать выделенный фрагмент текста с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное).

          +

          В онлайн-версии на основе документа будет создан PDF-файл. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его или сохранить на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать его позже. Некоторые браузеры (например, Chrome и Opera) поддерживают прямую печать.

          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm index a22ffddb3d..418ef0e4d5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Настройка параметров страницы

          -

          Чтобы изменить разметку страницы, а именно задать ориентацию и размер страницы, настроить поля и вставить колонки, используйте соответствующие значки на вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов.

          +

          Чтобы изменить разметку страницы в Редакторе документов, а именно задать ориентацию и размер страницы, настроить поля и вставить колонки, используйте соответствующие значки на вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов.

          Примечание: все эти параметры применяются ко всему документу. Если вам нужно установить разные поля, ориентацию, размер страниц или количество колонок в разных частях документа, обратитесь к этой странице.

          Ориентация страницы

          Измените текущий тип ориентации, нажав на значок Ориентация. По умолчанию используется Портретный тип ориентации, который можно переключить на Альбомный.

          @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@

          Колонки

        13. Слева
          - чтобы добавить две колонки: узкую слева и широкую справа,
        14. Справа
          - чтобы добавить две колонки: узкую справа и широкую слева.
          15. -

          Если требуется изменить параметры колонок, выберите из списка опцию Настраиваемые колонки. Откроется окно Колонки, в котором можно будет указать нужное Количество колонок (можно добавить не более 12 колонок) и Интервал между колонками. Введите новые значения в поля ввода или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Отметьте опцию Разделитель, чтобы добавить вертикальную линию между колонками. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения.

          +

          Если требуется изменить параметры колонок, выберите из списка опцию Настраиваемые колонки. Откроется окно Колонки, в котором можно будет указать нужное Количество колонок (можно добавить не более 14 колонок), Ширину и Интервал между колонками. Введите новые значения в поля ввода или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Отметьте опцию Столбцы одинаковой ширины, чтобы сделать ширину всех столбцов одинаковой. Отметьте опцию Разделитель, чтобы добавить вертикальную линию между колонками. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения.

          Настраиваемые колонки

          Чтобы точно определить, где должна начинаться новая колонка, установите курсор перед текстом, который требуется перенести в новую колонку, нажмите на значок Разрывы на верхней панели инструментов, а затем выберите опцию Вставить разрыв колонки. Текст будет перенесен в следующую колонку.

          Добавленные разрывы колонок обозначаются в документе пунктирной линией: . Если вы не видите вставленных разрывов колонок, для их отображения нужно нажать на кнопку на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Для того чтобы убрать разрыв колонки, выделите его мышью и нажмите клавишу Delete.

          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css index f4a9216317..fb8ee4149c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css @@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletedlistsettings.png index 1f6c42a249..1542bbc24d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customcolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customcolumns.png index 51b82d0b49..25dbdcc83b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customcolumns.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customcolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..216ddb7905 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index c1ce94dae1..5d2e6edb78 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 9ac0197671..2967bfb948 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png index 4160df8611..223dd10573 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 765f93ca23..c01905e38b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 8a974f8ab6..4c91be1d16 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index a8e3cd9a21..e4a7102c6d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 8ac1ef7e98..0006b1d827 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index bd792f9604..5ed3cc5b2f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png index 01e61846cc..c1fdb65c15 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png index 03feedb5ac..43fcab48e0 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index f38b3842ee..ec24c86f38 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2947c10f27 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png index f3c8080e9d..5922fd20ed 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png index d4a982e7a5..55b7072e4b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formstab.png index 21a638e203..07703333c5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png index 7b8468e564..b0c8508341 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png index eaf4a31e9c..121ec7a748 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png index 2bae18c9f0..71495b1e39 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 044016dea8..6094fdd7e6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png index 98cf3ebc75..741dd60ab2 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/referencestab.png index 44f0a5f5b8..1ebc633696 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/reviewtab.png index 63f16d1c68..c829f79a6b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png index 118d12be7d..8a29818cc0 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/listlevel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/listlevel.png index c81716b3c1..36356af721 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/listlevel.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/listlevel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings.png index 5f4211ab1c..c5648618e1 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..25d499f85f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/multilevellistsettings_advanced.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/orderedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/orderedlistsettings.png index 90ff701c7f..62e249f6e3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/orderedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/orderedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png index 6974a19624..86efe2f163 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f3bd27994a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png index f2f3b87d1a..89328590f6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart.png index 47021ce7e1..03be961ea9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_chart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png index c785b97a11..4b846ea1b6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png index 167b102ffb..fc6c56184c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js index 2d62c431e2..a785281d07 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js @@ -27,23 +27,23 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", - "title": "Сравнение документов", - "body": "Редактор документов позволяет осуществлять постоянный общекомандный подход к рабочему процессу: предоставлять доступ к файлам и папкам, общаться прямо в редакторе, комментировать определенные фрагменты документов, требующие особого внимания, сохранять версии документов для дальнейшего использования, рецензировать документы и добавлять изменения, не редактируя файл непосредственно. Если вам требуется сравнить и объединить два документа, вы можете использовать функцию сравнения Редакторе документов. Она позволяет отобразить различия между двумя документами и объединить документы путем принятия изменений - каждого в отдельности или всех сразу. После сравнения и объединения двух документов результат будет сохранен на портале как новая версия исходного файла. Если объединять сравниваемые документы не требуется, вы можете отклонить все изменения, чтобы исходный документ остался неизмененным. Выбор документа для сравнения Чтобы сравнить два документа, откройте исходный документ, который требуется сравнить, и выберите второй документ для сравнения: перейдите на вкладку Совместная работа на верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку Сравнить, выберите одну из следующих опций для загрузки документа: при выборе опции Документ из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл в формате .docx на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть. при выборе опции Документ с URL-адреса откроется окно, в котором вы можете ввести ссылку на файл, сохраненный в стороннем веб-хранилище (например, Nextcloud), если у вас есть соответствующие права доступа. Ссылка должна быть прямой ссылкой на скачивание файла. Когда ссылка будет указана, нажмите кнопку OK. Примечание: Прямая ссылка позволяет напрямую скачать файл, не открывая его в браузере. Например, для получения прямой ссылки в Nextcloud найдите нужный документ в списке файлов, выберите в меню файла пункт Подробно. На панели с подробными сведениями о файле нажмите на значок Копировать прямую ссылку (работает только для пользователей с правами доступа к этому файлу или каталогу) справа от имени файла. Чтобы узнать, как получить прямую ссылку на скачивание файла в другом стороннем веб-хранилище, обратитесь к документации по соответствующему стороннему сервису. при выборе опции Документ из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. В нем отображается список всех документов в формате .docx, сохраненных на портале, к которым у вас есть соответствующие права доступа. Для перехода по разделам модуля Документы используйте меню в левой части окна. Выберите нужный документ .docx и нажмите кнопку OK. После выбора второго документа для сравнения запускается процесс сравнения и документ приобретает вид рецензируемого. Все изменения выделяются цветом, и вы можете просматривать изменения, переходить от одного к другому, принимать или отклонять их по отдельности или все сразу. Также можно изменить режим отображения и посмотреть, как выглядит документ до сравнения, в процессе сравнения или как он будет выглядеть после сравнения, если принять все изменения. Выбор режима отображения изменений Нажмите кнопку Отображение на верхней панели инструментов и выберите из списка один из доступных режимов: Изменения - этот режим выбран по умолчанию. Он используется, чтобы отобразить документ в процессе сравнения. Этот режим позволяет и просматривать изменения, и редактировать документ. Измененный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ после сравнения, как если бы все изменения были приняты. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности принять все изменения, а только дает возможность увидеть, как будет выглядеть документ после того, как вы примете все изменения. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать. Исходный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ до сравнения, как если бы все изменения были отклонены. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности отклонить все изменения, а только дает возможность просмотреть документ без изменений. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать. Принятие и отклонение изменений Используйте кнопки К предыдущему и К следующему на верхней панели инструментов для навигации по изменениям. Чтобы принять выделенное в данный момент изменение, можно сделать следующее: нажмите кнопку Принять на верхней панели инструментов или нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять текущее изменение (в этом случае изменение будет принято, и вы перейдете к следующему изменению) или нажмите кнопку Принять во всплывающем окне с изменением. Чтобы быстро принять все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять все изменения. Чтобы отклонить текущее изменение, можно сделать следующее: нажмите кнопку Отклонить на верхней панели инструментов или нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить текущее изменение (в этом случае изменение будет отклонено, и вы перейдете к следующему доступному изменению) или нажмите кнопку Отклонить во всплывающем окне с изменением. Чтобы быстро отклонить все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить все изменения. Дополнительные сведения о функции сравнения Принцип сравнения Сравнение документов ведется по словам. Если слово содержит изменение хотя бы на один символ (например, если символ был удален или заменен), в результате отличие будет отображено как изменение всего слова целиком, а не символа. Приведенное ниже изображение иллюстрирует случай, когда исходный файл содержит слово 'Символы', а документ для сравнения содержит слово 'Символ'. Авторство документа При запуске процесса сравнения документов второй документ для сравнения загружается и сравнивается с текущим. Если загруженный документ содержит данные, которые отсутствуют в исходном документе, они будут помечены как добавленные рецензентом. Если исходный документ содержит данные, которые отсутствуют в загруженном документе, они будут помечены как удаленные рецензентом. Если авторы исходного и загруженного документа совпадают, то рецензентом будет тот же пользователь. Его имя отображается во всплывающем окне с изменением. Если авторы двух файлов - разные пользователи, то автор второго файла, загруженного для сравнения, будет автором добавленных или удаленных изменений. Наличие рецензирования в сравниваемом документе Если исходный документ содержит изменения, внесенные в режиме рецензирования, то в результате сравнения документа они будут приняты. При выборе второго файла для сравнения вы увидите соответствующее предупреждение. В этом случае при выборе режима отображения Исходный документ документ не будет содержать изменений." + "title": "Сравнение и объединение документов", + "body": "Редактор документов позволяет осуществлять постоянный общекомандный подход к рабочему процессу: предоставлять доступ к файлам и папкам, общаться прямо в редакторе, комментировать определенные фрагменты документов, требующие особого внимания, сохранять версии документов для дальнейшего использования, рецензировать документы и добавлять изменения, не редактируя файл непосредственно. Если вам требуется сравнить и объединить два документа, вы можете использовать функцию сравнения Редакторе документов. Она позволяет отобразить различия между двумя документами и объединить документы путем принятия изменений - каждого в отдельности или всех сразу. Функция Объединить может показаться одинаковой, но с одним важным отличием: Отслеживаемые изменения в обеих версиях объединяются в одну версию, а остальной текст сравнивается. После сравнения и объединения двух документов результат будет сохранен на портале как новая версия исходного файла. Если объединять сравниваемые документы не требуется, вы можете отклонить все изменения, чтобы исходный документ остался неизмененным. Выбор документа для сравнения Чтобы сравнить два документа, откройте исходный документ, который требуется сравнить, и выберите второй документ для сравнения: перейдите на вкладку Совместная работа на верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку Сравнить, выберите одну из следующих опций для загрузки документа: при выборе опции Документ из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл в формате .docx на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть. при выборе опции Документ с URL-адреса откроется окно, в котором вы можете ввести ссылку на файл, сохраненный в стороннем веб-хранилище (например, Nextcloud), если у вас есть соответствующие права доступа. Ссылка должна быть прямой ссылкой на скачивание файла. Когда ссылка будет указана, нажмите кнопку OK. Примечание: Прямая ссылка позволяет напрямую скачать файл, не открывая его в браузере. Например, для получения прямой ссылки в Nextcloud найдите нужный документ в списке файлов, выберите в меню файла пункт Подробно. На панели с подробными сведениями о файле нажмите на значок Копировать прямую ссылку (работает только для пользователей с правами доступа к этому файлу или каталогу) справа от имени файла. Чтобы узнать, как получить прямую ссылку на скачивание файла в другом стороннем веб-хранилище, обратитесь к документации по соответствующему стороннему сервису. при выборе опции Документ из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. В нем отображается список всех документов в формате .docx, сохраненных на портале, к которым у вас есть соответствующие права доступа. Для перехода по разделам модуля Документы используйте меню в левой части окна. Выберите нужный документ .docx и нажмите кнопку OK. После выбора второго документа для сравнения запускается процесс сравнения и документ приобретает вид рецензируемого. Все изменения выделяются цветом, и вы можете просматривать изменения, переходить от одного к другому, принимать или отклонять их по отдельности или все сразу. Также можно изменить режим отображения и посмотреть, как выглядит документ до сравнения, в процессе сравнения или как он будет выглядеть после сравнения, если принять все изменения. Выбор документа для объединения Чтобы объединить два документа, откройте исходный документ и выберите второй документ для объединения: перейдите на вкладку Совместная работа на верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку Объединить, выберите одну из следующих опций для загрузки документа: при выборе опции Документ из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл в формате .docx на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть. при выборе опции Документ с URL-адреса откроется окно, в котором вы можете ввести ссылку на файл, сохраненный в стороннем веб-хранилище (например, Nextcloud), если у вас есть соответствующие права доступа. Ссылка должна быть прямой ссылкой на скачивание файла. Когда ссылка будет указана, нажмите кнопку OK. Примечание: Прямая ссылка позволяет напрямую скачать файл, не открывая его в браузере. Например, для получения прямой ссылки в Nextcloud найдите нужный документ в списке файлов, выберите в меню файла пункт Подробно. На панели с подробными сведениями о файле нажмите на значок Копировать прямую ссылку (работает только для пользователей с правами доступа к этому файлу или каталогу) справа от имени файла. Чтобы узнать, как получить прямую ссылку на скачивание файла в другом стороннем веб-хранилище, обратитесь к документации по соответствующему стороннему сервису. После выбора второго документа для сравнения запускается процесс сравнения и документ приобретает вид рецензируемого. Все изменения выделяются цветом, и вы можете просматривать изменения, переходить от одного к другому, принимать или отклонять их по отдельности или все сразу. Также можно изменить режим объединенияя и посмотреть, как выглядит документ до объединения, в процессе объединения или как он будет выглядеть после объединения, если принять все изменения. Выбор режима отображения изменений Нажмите кнопку Отображение на верхней панели инструментов и выберите из списка один из доступных режимов: Изменения - этот режим выбран по умолчанию. Он используется, чтобы отобразить документ в процессе сравнения/объединения. Этот режим позволяет и просматривать изменения, и редактировать документ. Измененный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ после сравнения/объединения, как если бы все изменения были приняты. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности принять все изменения, а только дает возможность увидеть, как будет выглядеть документ после того, как вы примете все изменения. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать. Исходный документ - этот режим используется, чтобы отобразить документ до сравнения/объединения, как если бы все изменения были отклонены. Эта опция не позволяет в действительности отклонить все изменения, а только дает возможность просмотреть документ без изменений. В этом режиме документ нельзя редактировать. Принятие и отклонение изменений Используйте кнопки К предыдущему и К следующему на верхней панели инструментов для навигации по изменениям. Чтобы принять выделенное в данный момент изменение, можно сделать следующее: нажмите кнопку Принять на верхней панели инструментов или нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять текущее изменение (в этом случае изменение будет принято, и вы перейдете к следующему изменению) или нажмите кнопку Принять во всплывающем окне с изменением. Чтобы быстро принять все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Принять и выберите опцию Принять все изменения. Чтобы отклонить текущее изменение, можно сделать следующее: нажмите кнопку Отклонить на верхней панели инструментов или нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить текущее изменение (в этом случае изменение будет отклонено, и вы перейдете к следующему доступному изменению) или нажмите кнопку Отклонить во всплывающем окне с изменением. Чтобы быстро отклонить все изменения, нажмите направленную вниз стрелку под кнопкой Отклонить и выберите опцию Отклонить все изменения. Дополнительные сведения о функцих сравнения и объединения Принцип сравнения Сравнение документов ведется по словам. Если слово содержит изменение хотя бы на один символ (например, если символ был удален или заменен), в результате отличие будет отображено как изменение всего слова целиком, а не символа. Приведенное ниже изображение иллюстрирует случай, когда исходный файл содержит слово 'Символы', а документ для сравнения содержит слово 'Символ'. Авторство документа При запуске процесса сравнения документов второй документ для сравнения загружается и сравнивается с текущим. Если загруженный документ содержит данные, которые отсутствуют в исходном документе, они будут помечены как добавленные рецензентом. Если исходный документ содержит данные, которые отсутствуют в загруженном документе, они будут помечены как удаленные рецензентом. Если авторы исходного и загруженного документа совпадают, то рецензентом будет тот же пользователь. Его имя отображается во всплывающем окне с изменением. Если авторы двух файлов - разные пользователи, то автор второго файла, загруженного для сравнения, будет автором добавленных или удаленных изменений. Наличие рецензирования в сравниваемом документе Если исходный документ содержит изменения, внесенные в режиме рецензирования, то в результате сравнения документа они будут приняты. При выборе второго файла для сравнения вы увидите соответствующее предупреждение. В этом случае при выборе режима отображения Исходный документ документ не будет содержать изменений. Если оба документа содержат изменения, внесенные в режиме рецензирования, то они будут объединены в одну версию в результате объединения." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Сочетания клавиш", - "body": "Подсказки для клавиш Используйте сочетания клавиш для более быстрого и удобного доступа к функциям Редактора документов без использования мыши. Нажмите клавишу Alt, чтобы показать все подсказки для клавиш верхней панели инструментов, правой и левой боковой панели, а также строке состояния. Нажмите клавишу, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. В зависимости от нажатой клавиши, могут появляться дополнительные подсказки. Когда появляются дополнительные подсказки для клавиш, первичные - скрываются. Например, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка, нажмите Alt и просмотрите все подсказки по первичным клавишам. Нажмите букву И, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка и просмотреть все доступные сочетания клавиш для этой вкладки. Затем нажмите букву, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. Нажмите Alt, чтобы скрыть все подсказки для клавиш, или Escape, чтобы вернуться к предыдущей группе подсказок для клавиш. Windows/Linux Mac OS Работа с документом Открыть панель 'Файл' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Открыть панель Файл, чтобы сохранить, скачать, распечатать текущий документ, просмотреть сведения о нем, создать новый документ или открыть существующий, получить доступ к Справке по редактору документов или дополнительным параметрам. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена, чтобы начать поиск символа/слова/фразы в редактируемом документе. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' с полем замены Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена с полем замены, чтобы заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов. Повторить последнее действие 'Найти' ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Повторить действие Найти, которое было выполнено до нажатия этого сочетания клавиш. Открыть панель 'Комментарии' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Открыть панель Комментарии, чтобы добавить свой комментарий или ответить на комментарии других пользователей. Открыть поле комментария Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Открыть поле ввода данных, в котором можно добавить текст комментария. Открыть панель 'Чат' Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Открыть панель Чат и отправить сообщение. Сохранить документ Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Сохранить все изменения в редактируемом документе. Активный файл будет сохранен с текущим именем, в том же местоположении и формате. Печать документа Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Распечатать документ на одном из доступных принтеров или сохранить в файл. Скачать как... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Открыть панель Скачать как..., чтобы сохранить редактируемый документ на жестком диске компьютера в одном из поддерживаемых форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Полноэкранный режим F11 Переключиться в полноэкранный режим, чтобы развернуть редактор документов на весь экран. Меню Справка F1 F1 Открыть меню Справка редактора документов. Открыть существующий файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+O На вкладке Открыть локальный файл в десктопных редакторах позволяет открыть стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора существующего файла. Закрыть файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+W ⌘ Cmd+W Закрыть выбранный документ в десктопных редакторах . Контекстное меню элемента ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Открыть контекстное меню выбранного элемента. Сбросить масштаб Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 или ⌘ Cmd+0 Сбросить масштаб текущего документа до значения по умолчанию 100%. Навигация Перейти в начало строки Home Home Установить курсор в начале редактируемой строки. Перейти в начало документа Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Установить курсор в самом начале редактируемого документа. Перейти в конец строки End End Установить курсор в конце редактируемой строки. Перейти в конец документа Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Установить курсор в самом конце редактируемого документа. Перейти в начало предыдущей страницы Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Установить курсор в самом начале страницы, которая идет перед редактируемой страницей. Перейти в начало следующей страницы Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Установить курсор в самом начале страницы, которая идет после редактируемой страницы. Прокрутить вниз Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Прокрутить документ примерно на одну видимую область страницы вниз. Прокрутить вверх Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Прокрутить документ примерно на одну видимую область страницы вверх. Следующая страница Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Перейти на следующую страницу редактируемого документа. Предыдущая страница Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Перейти на предыдущую страницу редактируемого документа. Увеличить Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl++, ⌘ Cmd++ Увеличить масштаб редактируемого документа. Уменьшить Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Уменьшить масштаб редактируемого документа. Перейти на один символ влево ← ← Переместить курсор на один символ влево. Перейти на один символ вправо → → Переместить курсор на один символ вправо. Перейти в начало слова или на одно слово влево Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Переместить курсор в начало слова или на одно слово влево. Перейти на одно слово вправо Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Переместить курсор на одно слово вправо. Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑ ↑ Переместить курсор на одну строку вверх. Перейти на одну строку вниз ↓ ↓ Переместить курсор на одну строку вниз. Перейти между элементами управления ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти на следующий или предыдущий элемент управления в модальных окнах. Написание Закончить абзац ↵ Enter ↵ Return Завершить текущий абзац и начать новый. Добавить разрыв строки ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Сделать перевод строки, не начиная новый абзац. Удалить ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Удалить один символ слева (Backspace) или справа (Delete) от курсора. Удалить слово слева от курсора Ctrl+Backspace ^ Ctrl+Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+Backspace Удалить одно слово слева от курсора. Удалить слово справа от курсора Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Удалить одно слово справа от курсора. Создать неразрываемый пробел Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Создать между символами пробел, который нельзя использовать для начала новой строки. Создать неразрываемый дефис Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Создать между символами дефис, который нельзя использовать для начала новой строки. Отмена и повтор Отменить Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Отменить последнее выполненное действие. Повторить Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Повторить последнее отмененное действие. Вырезание, копирование и вставка Вырезать Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Удалить выделенный фрагмент текста и отправить его в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированный текст можно затем вставить в другое место этого же документа, в другой документ или в какую-то другую программу. Копировать Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Отправить выделенный фрагмент текста в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированный текст можно затем вставить в другое место этого же документа, в другой документ или в какую-то другую программу. Вставить Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированный текст из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Текст может быть ранее скопирован из того же самого документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы. Вставить гиперссылку Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Вставить гиперссылку, которую можно использовать для перехода по веб-адресу. Копировать форматирование Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Скопировать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента редактируемого текста. Скопированное форматирование можно затем применить к другому тексту в этом же документе. Применить форматирование Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Применить ранее скопированное форматирование к тексту редактируемого документа. Выделение текста Выделить все Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Выделить весь текст документа вместе с таблицами и изображениями. Выделить фрагмент ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Выделить текст посимвольно. Выделить с позиции курсора до начала строки ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала текущей строки. Выделить с позиции курсора до конца строки ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца текущей строки. Выделить один символ справа ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Выделить один символ справа от позиции курсора. Выделить один символ слева ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Выделить один символ слева от позиции курсора. Выделить до конца слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца слова. Выделить до начала слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала слова. Выделить одну строку выше ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Выделить одну строку выше (курсор находится в начале строки). Выделить одну строку ниже ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Выделить одну строку ниже (курсор находится в начале строки). Выделить страницу вверх ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Выделить часть страницы с позиции курсора до верхней части экрана. Выделить страницу вниз ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Выделить часть страницы с позиции курсора до нижней части экрана. Оформление текста Полужирный шрифт Ctrl+B ⌘ Cmd+B Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста полужирным, придав ему большую насыщенность. Курсив Ctrl+I ⌘ Cmd+I Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста курсивным, придав ему наклон вправо. Подчеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+U ⌘ Cmd+U Подчеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+5 ⌘ Cmd+5 Зачеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Подстрочные знаки Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Надстрочные знаки Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Стиль Заголовок 1 Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Применить к выделенному фрагменту текста стиль Заголовок 1. Стиль Заголовок 2 Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Применить к выделенному фрагменту текста стиль Заголовок 2. Стиль Заголовок 3 Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Применить к выделенному фрагменту текста стиль Заголовок 3. Маркированный список Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Создать из выделенного фрагмента текста неупорядоченный маркированный список или начать новый список. Убрать форматирование Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Убрать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента текста. Увеличить шрифт Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Увеличить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Уменьшить шрифт Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Уменьшить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Выровнять по центру/левому краю Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Переключать абзац между выравниванием по центру и по левому краю. Выровнять по ширине/левому краю Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Переключать абзац между выравниванием по ширине и по левому краю. Выровнять по правому краю/левому краю Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Переключать абзац между выравниванием по правому краю и по левому краю. Применение форматирования подстрочного текста (с автоматической установкой интервалов) Ctrl+= Применить форматирование подстрочного текста к выделенному фрагменту текста. Применение форматирования надстрочного текста (с автоматической установкой интервалов) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Применить форматирование надстрочного текста к выделенному фрагменту текста. Вставка разрыва страницы Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Вставить разрыв страницы в текущей позиции курсора. Увеличить отступ Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Увеличить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Уменьшить отступ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Уменьшить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Добавить номер страницы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Добавить номер текущей страницы в текущей позиции курсора. Непечатаемые символы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Показать или скрыть непечатаемые символы. Удалить один символ слева ← Backspace ← Backspace Удалить один символ слева от курсора. Удалить один символ справа Delete Delete Удалить один символ справа от курсора. Модификация объектов Ограничить движение ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание Ограничить перемещение выбранного объекта по горизонтали или вертикали. Задать угол поворота в 15 градусов ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) Ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов. Сохранять пропорции ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) Сохранять пропорции выбранного объекта при изменении размера. Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку: горизонтальную, вертикальную или под углом 45 градусов. Перемещение с шагом в один пиксель Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре, чтобы перемещать выбранный объект на один пиксель за раз. Работа с таблицами Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к следующей строке ↓ ↓ Перейти к следующей строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей строке ↑ ↑ Перейти к предыдущей строке таблицы. Начать новый абзац ↵ Enter ↵ Return Начать новый абзац внутри ячейки. Добавить новую строку ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. Добавить новую строку внизу таблицы. Вставить разрыв таблицы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Вставить разрыв таблицы внутри таблицы. Вставка специальных символов Вставка уравнения Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= Вставить уравнение в текущей позиции курсора. Вставка длинного тире Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Вставить длинное тире ‘—’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка короткого тире ⌥ Option+- Вставить короткое тире ‘-’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка неразрывного дефиса Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Вставить неразрывный дефис ‘-’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка неразрывного пробела Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌥ Option+␣ Spacebar Вставить неразрывный пробел ‘o’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора." + "body": "Подсказки для клавиш Используйте сочетания клавиш для более быстрого и удобного доступа к функциям Редактора документов без использования мыши. Нажмите клавишу Alt, чтобы показать все подсказки для клавиш верхней панели инструментов, правой и левой боковой панели, а также строке состояния. Нажмите клавишу, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. В зависимости от нажатой клавиши, могут появляться дополнительные подсказки. Когда появляются дополнительные подсказки для клавиш, первичные - скрываются. Например, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка, нажмите Alt и просмотрите все подсказки по первичным клавишам. Нажмите букву И, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка и просмотреть все доступные сочетания клавиш для этой вкладки. Затем нажмите букву, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. Нажмите Alt, чтобы скрыть все подсказки для клавиш, или Escape, чтобы вернуться к предыдущей группе подсказок для клавиш. Windows/Linux Mac OS Работа с документом Открыть панель 'Файл' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Открыть панель Файл, чтобы сохранить, скачать, распечатать текущий документ, просмотреть сведения о нем, создать новый документ или открыть существующий, получить доступ к Справке по редактору документов или дополнительным параметрам. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена, чтобы начать поиск символа/слова/фразы в редактируемом документе. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' с полем замены Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена с полем замены, чтобы заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов. Повторить последнее действие 'Найти' ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Повторить действие Найти, которое было выполнено до нажатия этого сочетания клавиш. Открыть панель 'Комментарии' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Открыть панель Комментарии, чтобы добавить свой комментарий или ответить на комментарии других пользователей. Открыть поле комментария Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Открыть поле ввода данных, в котором можно добавить текст комментария. Открыть панель 'Чат' (Онлайн-редакторы) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Открыть панель Чат в онлайн-редакторах и отправить сообщение. Сохранить документ Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Сохранить все изменения в редактируемом документе. Активный файл будет сохранен с текущим именем, в том же местоположении и формате. Печать документа Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Распечатать документ на одном из доступных принтеров или сохранить в файл. Скачать как... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Открыть панель Скачать как..., чтобы сохранить редактируемый документ на жестком диске компьютера в одном из поддерживаемых форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Полноэкранный режим (Онлайн-редакторы) F11 Переключиться в полноэкранный режим в онлайн-редакторах, чтобы развернуть редактор документов на весь экран. Меню Справка F1 F1 Открыть меню Справка редактора документов. Открыть существующий файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+O На вкладке Открыть локальный файл в десктопных редакторах позволяет открыть стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора существующего файла. Закрыть файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+W ⌘ Cmd+W Закрыть выбранный документ в десктопных редакторах . Контекстное меню элемента ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Открыть контекстное меню выбранного элемента. Сбросить масштаб Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 или ⌘ Cmd+0 Сбросить масштаб текущего документа до значения по умолчанию 100%. Навигация Перейти в начало строки Home Home Установить курсор в начале редактируемой строки. Перейти в начало документа Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Установить курсор в самом начале редактируемого документа. Перейти в конец строки End End Установить курсор в конце редактируемой строки. Перейти в конец документа Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Установить курсор в самом конце редактируемого документа. Перейти в начало предыдущей страницы Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Установить курсор в самом начале страницы, которая идет перед редактируемой страницей. Перейти в начало следующей страницы Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Установить курсор в самом начале страницы, которая идет после редактируемой страницы. Прокрутить вниз Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Прокрутить документ примерно на одну видимую область страницы вниз. Прокрутить вверх Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Прокрутить документ примерно на одну видимую область страницы вверх. Следующая страница Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Перейти на следующую страницу редактируемого документа. Предыдущая страница Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Перейти на предыдущую страницу редактируемого документа. Увеличить Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl++, ⌘ Cmd++ Увеличить масштаб редактируемого документа. Уменьшить Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Уменьшить масштаб редактируемого документа. Перейти на один символ влево ← ← Переместить курсор на один символ влево. Перейти на один символ вправо → → Переместить курсор на один символ вправо. Перейти в начало слова или на одно слово влево Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Переместить курсор в начало слова или на одно слово влево. Перейти на одно слово вправо Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Переместить курсор на одно слово вправо. Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑ ↑ Переместить курсор на одну строку вверх. Перейти на одну строку вниз ↓ ↓ Переместить курсор на одну строку вниз. Перейти между элементами управления ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти на следующий или предыдущий элемент управления в модальных окнах. Написание Закончить абзац ↵ Enter ↵ Return Завершить текущий абзац и начать новый. Добавить разрыв строки ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Сделать перевод строки, не начиная новый абзац. Удалить ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Удалить один символ слева (Backspace) или справа (Delete) от курсора. Удалить слово слева от курсора Ctrl+Backspace ^ Ctrl+Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+Backspace Удалить одно слово слева от курсора. Удалить слово справа от курсора Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Удалить одно слово справа от курсора. Создать неразрываемый пробел Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Создать между символами пробел, который нельзя использовать для начала новой строки. Создать неразрываемый дефис Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Создать между символами дефис, который нельзя использовать для начала новой строки. Отмена и повтор Отменить Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Отменить последнее выполненное действие. Повторить Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Повторить последнее отмененное действие. Вырезание, копирование и вставка Вырезать Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Удалить выделенный фрагмент текста и отправить его в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированный текст можно затем вставить в другое место этого же документа, в другой документ или в какую-то другую программу. Копировать Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Отправить выделенный фрагмент текста в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированный текст можно затем вставить в другое место этого же документа, в другой документ или в какую-то другую программу. Вставить Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированный текст из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Текст может быть ранее скопирован из того же самого документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы. Вставить текст без форматирования стиля Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Вставить ранее скопированный фрагмент текста из буфера обмена компьютера в текущую позицию курсора без сохранения исходного форматирования. Текст можно предварительно скопировать из того же документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы Вставить гиперссылку Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Вставить гиперссылку, которую можно использовать для перехода по веб-адресу. Копировать форматирование Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Скопировать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента редактируемого текста. Скопированное форматирование можно затем применить к другому тексту в этом же документе. Применить форматирование Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Применить ранее скопированное форматирование к тексту редактируемого документа. Выделение текста Выделить все Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Выделить весь текст документа вместе с таблицами и изображениями. Выделить фрагмент ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Выделить текст посимвольно. Выделить с позиции курсора до начала строки ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала текущей строки. Выделить с позиции курсора до конца строки ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца текущей строки. Выделить один символ справа ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Выделить один символ справа от позиции курсора. Выделить один символ слева ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Выделить один символ слева от позиции курсора. Выделить до конца слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца слова. Выделить до начала слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала слова. Выделить одну строку выше ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Выделить одну строку выше (курсор находится в начале строки). Выделить одну строку ниже ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Выделить одну строку ниже (курсор находится в начале строки). Выделить страницу вверх ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Выделить часть страницы с позиции курсора до верхней части экрана. Выделить страницу вниз ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Выделить часть страницы с позиции курсора до нижней части экрана. Оформление текста Полужирный шрифт Ctrl+B ⌘ Cmd+B Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста полужирным, придав ему большую насыщенность. Курсив Ctrl+I ⌘ Cmd+I Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста курсивным, придав ему наклон вправо. Подчеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+U ⌘ Cmd+U Подчеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+5 ⌘ Cmd+5 Зачеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Подстрочные знаки Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Надстрочные знаки Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Стиль Заголовок 1 Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Применить к выделенному фрагменту текста стиль Заголовок 1. Стиль Заголовок 2 Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Применить к выделенному фрагменту текста стиль Заголовок 2. Стиль Заголовок 3 Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Применить к выделенному фрагменту текста стиль Заголовок 3. Маркированный список Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Создать из выделенного фрагмента текста неупорядоченный маркированный список или начать новый список. Убрать форматирование Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Убрать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента текста. Увеличить шрифт Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Увеличить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Уменьшить шрифт Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Уменьшить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Выровнять по центру/левому краю Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Переключать абзац между выравниванием по центру и по левому краю. Выровнять по ширине/левому краю Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Переключать абзац между выравниванием по ширине и по левому краю. Выровнять по правому краю/левому краю Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Переключать абзац между выравниванием по правому краю и по левому краю. Применение форматирования подстрочного текста (с автоматической установкой интервалов) Ctrl+= Применить форматирование подстрочного текста к выделенному фрагменту текста. Применение форматирования надстрочного текста (с автоматической установкой интервалов) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Применить форматирование надстрочного текста к выделенному фрагменту текста. Вставка разрыва страницы Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Вставить разрыв страницы в текущей позиции курсора. Увеличить отступ Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Увеличить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Уменьшить отступ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Уменьшить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Добавить номер страницы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Добавить номер текущей страницы в текущей позиции курсора. Непечатаемые символы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Показать или скрыть непечатаемые символы. Удалить один символ слева ← Backspace ← Backspace Удалить один символ слева от курсора. Удалить один символ справа Delete Delete Удалить один символ справа от курсора. Модификация объектов Ограничить движение ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание Ограничить перемещение выбранного объекта по горизонтали или вертикали. Задать угол поворота в 15 градусов ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) Ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов. Сохранять пропорции ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) Сохранять пропорции выбранного объекта при изменении размера. Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку: горизонтальную, вертикальную или под углом 45 градусов. Перемещение с шагом в один пиксель Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре, чтобы перемещать выбранный объект на один пиксель за раз. Работа с таблицами Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к следующей строке ↓ ↓ Перейти к следующей строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей строке ↑ ↑ Перейти к предыдущей строке таблицы. Начать новый абзац ↵ Enter ↵ Return Начать новый абзац внутри ячейки. Добавить новую строку ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. Добавить новую строку внизу таблицы. Вставить разрыв таблицы Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Вставить разрыв таблицы внутри таблицы. Вставка специальных символов Вставка уравнения Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+= Вставить уравнение в текущей позиции курсора. Вставка длинного тире Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Вставить длинное тире ‘—’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка короткого тире ⌥ Option+- Вставить короткое тире ‘-’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка неразрывного дефиса Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Вставить неразрывный дефис ‘-’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка неразрывного пробела Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌥ Option+␣ Spacebar Вставить неразрывный пробел ‘o’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора. Вставка символа авторского права Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G Вставить символ авторского права ‘©’ в текущем документе справа от позиции курсора." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Параметры представления и инструменты навигации", - "body": "В редакторе документов доступен ряд инструментов, позволяющих облегчить просмотр и навигацию по документу: масштаб, указатель номера страницы и другие. Настройте параметры представления Чтобы настроить стандартные параметры представления и установить наиболее удобный режим работы с документом, перейдите на вкладку Вид и выберите, какие элементы интерфейса требуется скрыть или отобразить. На вкладке Вид можно выбрать следующие опции: Заголовки – чтобы показать заголовки документа в левой панели. Масштаб – чтобы выбрать из выпадающего списка нужное значение масштаба от 50% до 500%. По размеру страницы - чтобы вся страница целиком помещалась в видимой части рабочей области. По ширине - чтобы ширина страницы документа соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Тема интерфейса – выберите из выпадающего меню одну из доступных тем интерфейса: Системная, Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная, Контрастная темная. Когда включена Темная или Контрастная темная тема, становится активным переключатель Темный документ; используйте его, чтобы выбрать для рабочей области белый или темно-серый цвет. Всегда показывать панель инструментов – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта верхняя панель инструментов, которая содержит команды. Названия вкладок при этом остаются видимыми. Можно также дважды щелкнуть по любой вкладке, чтобы скрыть верхнюю панель инструментов или отобразить ее снова. Строка состояния – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта самая нижняя панель, на которой находится Указатель номера страницы, Счетчик количества слов и кнопки Масштаба. Чтобы отобразить скрытую строку состояния, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Линейки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты линейки, которые используются для выравнивания текста, графики, таблиц, и других элементов в документе, установки полей, позиций табуляции и отступов абзацев. Чтобы отобразить скрытые линейки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Левая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта левая панель, на которой расположены кнопки Поиск, Комментарии и т. д. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Левую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта правая панель, на которой расположены Параметры. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Правую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая боковая панель свернута по умолчанию. Чтобы ее развернуть, выделите любой объект или фрагмент текста и щелкните по значку вкладки, которая в данный момент активирована (чтобы свернуть правую боковую панель, щелкните по этому значку еще раз). Когда открыта панель Комментарии или Чат , левую боковую панель можно настроить путем простого перетаскивания: наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели вправо, чтобы увеличить ширину панели. Чтобы восстановить исходную ширину, перетащите край панели влево. Используйте инструменты навигации Для осуществления навигации по документу используйте следующие инструменты: Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего документа. Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . Нажмите значок По ширине , чтобы ширина страницы документа соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Чтобы вся страница целиком помещалась в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру страницы . Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладке Вид. Указатель номера страницы показывает текущую страницу в составе всех страниц текущего документа (страница 'n' из 'nn'). Щелкните по этой надписи, чтобы открыть окно, в котором Вы можете ввести номер нужной страницы и быстро перейти на нее." + "body": "В редакторе документов доступен ряд инструментов, позволяющих облегчить просмотр и навигацию по документу: масштаб, указатель номера страницы и другие. Настройте параметры представления Чтобы настроить стандартные параметры представления и установить наиболее удобный режим работы с документом, перейдите на вкладку Вид и выберите, какие элементы интерфейса требуется скрыть или отобразить. На вкладке Вид можно выбрать следующие опции: Заголовки – чтобы показать заголовки документа в левой панели. Масштаб – чтобы выбрать из выпадающего списка нужное значение масштаба от 50% до 500%. По размеру страницы - чтобы вся страница целиком помещалась в видимой части рабочей области. По ширине - чтобы ширина страницы документа соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Тема интерфейса – выберите из выпадающего меню одну из доступных тем интерфейса: Системная, Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная, Контрастная темная. Когда включена Темная или Контрастная темная тема, становится активным переключатель Темный документ; используйте его, чтобы выбрать для рабочей области белый или темно-серый цвет. Всегда показывать панель инструментов – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта верхняя панель инструментов, которая содержит команды. Названия вкладок при этом остаются видимыми. Можно также дважды щелкнуть по любой вкладке, чтобы скрыть верхнюю панель инструментов или отобразить ее снова. Строка состояния – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта самая нижняя панель, на которой находится Указатель номера страницы, Счетчик количества слов и кнопки Масштаба. Чтобы отобразить скрытую строку состояния, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Линейки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты линейки, которые используются для выравнивания текста, графики, таблиц, и других элементов в документе, установки полей, позиций табуляции и отступов абзацев. Чтобы отобразить скрытые линейки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Левая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта левая панель, на которой расположены кнопки Поиск, Комментарии и т. д. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Левую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта правая панель, на которой расположены Параметры. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Правую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая боковая панель свернута по умолчанию. Чтобы ее развернуть, выделите любой объект или фрагмент текста и щелкните по значку вкладки, которая в данный момент активирована (чтобы свернуть правую боковую панель, щелкните по этому значку еще раз). Когда открыта панель Комментарии или Чат , левую боковую панель можно настроить путем простого перетаскивания: наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели вправо, чтобы увеличить ширину панели. Чтобы восстановить исходную ширину, перетащите край панели влево. Используйте инструменты навигации Для осуществления навигации по документу используйте следующие инструменты: Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего документа. Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 250% / 300% / 350%/ 400% / 450% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . Нажмите значок По ширине , чтобы ширина страницы документа соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Чтобы вся страница целиком помещалась в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру страницы . Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладке Вид. Указатель номера страницы показывает текущую страницу в составе всех страниц текущего документа (страница 'n' из 'nn'). Щелкните по этой надписи, чтобы открыть окно, в котором Вы можете ввести номер нужной страницы и быстро перейти на нее." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", "title": "Защита документов с помощью пароля", - "body": "Вы можете защитить свои документы при помощи пароля, который требуется вашим соавторам для входа в режим редактирования. Пароль можно изменить или удалить позже. Вы не сможете восстановить свой пароль, если потеряете его или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Также можно защитить документ, ограничив права доступа. Установка пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить, или перейдите на вкладку Защита и выберите опцию Шифровать, введите пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль. Нажмите , чтобы показать или скрыть пароль. нажмите кнопку OK. Чтобы открыть документ с полными правами доступа, пользователь должен ввести заданный пароль. Смена пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить, или перейдите на вкладку Защита и выберите опцию Шифровать, нажмите кнопку Изменить пароль, введите новый пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль. Нажмите , чтобы показать или скрыть пароль. нажмите кнопку OK. Удаление пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Защитить, нажмите кнопку Удалить пароль. Защита документа перейдите на вкладку Защита, нажмите кнопку Защитить документ, задайте пароль, если необходимо, выберите нужные права доступа к документу: Только чтение - пользователь может только просматривать документ. Заполнение форм - пользователь может только заполнять форму. Отслеживаемые изменения - пользователь может может редактировать документ, но все изменения будут отслеживаться. Комментарии - пользователь может только оставлять комментарии и отвечать на них. нажмите кнопку Защитить. Чтобы снять защиту с документа при условии, что был задан пароль, перейдите на вкладку Защита, нажмите кнопку Защитить документ, введите заданный пароль в окне Снять защиту документа." + "body": "Вы можете защитить свои документы при помощи пароля, который требуется вашим соавторам для входа в режим редактирования. Пароль можно изменить или удалить позже. Вы не сможете восстановить свой пароль, если потеряете его или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Также можно защитить документ, ограничив права доступа. Установка пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить. Нажмите кнопку Добавить пароль, чтобы открыть окно Установка пароля, или перейдите на вкладку Защита и выберите опцию Шифровать, введите пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль. Нажмите , чтобы показать или скрыть пароль. нажмите кнопку OK. Чтобы открыть документ с полными правами доступа, пользователь должен ввести заданный пароль. Смена пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Защитить. Нажмите кнопку Добавить пароль, чтобы открыть окно Установка пароля, или перейдите на вкладку Защита и выберите опцию Шифровать, нажмите кнопку Изменить пароль, введите новый пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль. Нажмите , чтобы показать или скрыть пароль. нажмите кнопку OK. Удаление пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Защитить, нажмите кнопку Удалить пароль. Защита документа перейдите на вкладку Защита, нажмите кнопку Защитить документ, задайте пароль, если необходимо, выберите нужные права доступа к документу: Только чтение - пользователь может только просматривать документ. Заполнение форм - пользователь может только заполнять форму. Отслеживаемые изменения - пользователь может может редактировать документ, но все изменения будут отслеживаться. Комментарии - пользователь может только оставлять комментарии и отвечать на них. нажмите кнопку Защитить. Чтобы снять защиту с документа при условии, что был задан пароль, перейдите на вкладку Защита, нажмите кнопку Защитить документ, введите заданный пароль в окне Снять защиту документа." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Функция поиска и замены", - "body": "Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, использованные в документе, который вы в данный момент редактируете, нажмите на значок , расположенный на левой боковой панели, или значок , расположенный в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска. В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H. Откроется панель Поиск и замена: Введите запрос в соответствующее поле ввода данных Поиск. Если требуется заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов, введите текст для замены в соответствующее поле ввода данных Заменить на. Вы можете заменить одно выделенное в данный момент вхождение или заменить все вхождения, нажав соответствующие кнопки Заменить или Заменить все. Для навигации по найденным вхождениям нажмите одну из кнопок со стрелками. Кнопка показывает следующее вхождение, а кнопка показывает предыдущее. Задайте параметры поиска, отметив нужные опции, расположенные под полями ввода: С учетом регистра - используется для поиска только тех вхождений, которые набраны в таком же регистре, что и ваш запрос, (например, если Вы ввели запрос 'Редактор', такие слова, как 'редактор' или 'РЕДАКТОР' и т.д. не будут найдены). Только слово целиком - используется для подсветки только слов целиком. Все вхождения будут подсвечены в файле и показаны в виде списка на панели Поиск слева. Используйте список для перехода к нужному вхождению или используйте кнопки навигации и . Редактор документов поддерживает поиск специальных символов. Чтобы найти специальный символ, введите его в поле поиска. Список специальных символов, которые можно использовать в поиске Специальный символ Описание ^l Разрыв строки ^t Позиция табуляции ^? Любой символ ^# Любая цифра ^$ Любая буква ^n Разрыв колонки ^e Концевая сноска ^f Сноска ^g Графический элемент ^m Разрыв страницы ^~ Неразрывный дефис ^s Неразрывный пробел ^^ Символ Крышечка ^w Любой пробел ^+ Тире ^= Дефис ^y Любая черточка Специальные символы, которые также можно использовать для замены: Специальный символ Описание ^l Разрыв строки ^t Позиция табуляции ^n Разрыв колонки ^m Разрыв страницы ^~ Неразрывный дефис ^s Неразрывный пробел ^+ Тире ^= Дефис" + "body": "Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, использованные в документе, который вы в данный момент редактируете, нажмите на значок , расположенный на левой боковой панели, или значок , расположенный в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска. В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Панель включает в себя текстовое поле для ввода поискового запроса, количество результатов поиска и элементы управления для перехода к предыдущему, следующему результату и закрытия панели. Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H. Откроется панель Поиск и замена: Введите запрос в соответствующее поле ввода данных Поиск. Если требуется заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов, введите текст для замены в соответствующее поле ввода данных Заменить на. Вы можете заменить одно выделенное в данный момент вхождение или заменить все вхождения, нажав соответствующие кнопки Заменить или Заменить все. Для навигации по найденным вхождениям нажмите одну из кнопок со стрелками. Кнопка показывает следующее вхождение, а кнопка показывает предыдущее. Задайте параметры поиска, отметив нужные опции, расположенные под полями ввода: С учетом регистра - используется для поиска только тех вхождений, которые набраны в таком же регистре, что и ваш запрос, (например, если Вы ввели запрос 'Редактор', такие слова, как 'редактор' или 'РЕДАКТОР' и т.д. не будут найдены). Только слово целиком - используется для подсветки только слов целиком. Все вхождения будут подсвечены в файле и показаны в виде списка на панели Поиск слева. Используйте список для перехода к нужному вхождению или используйте кнопки навигации и . Редактор документов поддерживает поиск специальных символов. Чтобы найти специальный символ, введите его в поле поиска. Список специальных символов, которые можно использовать в поиске Специальный символ Описание ^l Разрыв строки ^t Позиция табуляции ^? Любой символ ^# Любая цифра ^$ Любая буква ^n Разрыв колонки ^e Концевая сноска ^f Сноска ^g Графический элемент ^m Разрыв страницы ^~ Неразрывный дефис ^s Неразрывный пробел ^^ Символ Крышечка ^w Любой пробел ^+ Тире ^= Дефис ^y Любая черточка Специальные символы, которые также можно использовать для замены: Специальный символ Описание ^l Разрыв строки ^t Позиция табуляции ^n Разрыв колонки ^m Разрыв страницы ^~ Неразрывный дефис ^s Неразрывный пробел ^+ Тире ^= Дефис" }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Поддерживаемые форматы электронных документов", - "body": "Электронные документы - это одни из наиболее широко используемых компьютерных файлов. Благодаря высокому уровню развития современных компьютерных сетей распространять электронные документы становится удобнее, чем печатные. Многообразие устройств, используемых для представления документов, обуславливает большое количество проприетарных и открытых файловых форматов. Редактор документов работает с самыми популярными из них. При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (DOCX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование. Форматы Описание Просмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXML Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML DjVu Формат файлов, предназначенный главным образом для хранения отсканированных документов, особенно тех, которые содержат комбинацию текста, рисунков и фотографий + DOC Расширение имени файла для текстовых документов, созданных программой Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Расширение имени файла для текстовых документов, созданных программой Microsoft Word 2007 (или более поздних версий) с поддержкой макросов + + DOCX Office Open XML разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для представления электронных таблиц, диаграмм, презентаций и текстовых документов + + DOCXF Формат для создания, редактирования и совместной работы над Шаблоном формы. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов текстовых документов. Шаблон DOTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества документов со схожим форматированием + + EPUB Electronic Publication Бесплатный открытый стандарт для электронных книг, созданный Международным форумом по цифровым публикациям (International Digital Publishing Forum) + + FB2 Расширение для электронных книг, позволяющее читать книги на компьютере или мобильных устройствах + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Основной язык разметки веб-страниц + + ODT Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument, открытый стандарт для электронных документов + + OFORM Формат для заполнения Формы. Поля формы являются заполняемыми, но пользователи не могут изменять форматирование или настройки элементов формы.* + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов текстовых документов. Шаблон OTT содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества документов со схожим форматированием + + PDF Portable Document Format Формат файлов, используемый для представления документов независимо от программного обеспечения, аппаратных средств и операционных систем + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Подмножество формата PDF, содержащее ограниченный набор возможностей представления данных. Данный формат является стандартом ISO и предназначен для долгосрочного архивного хранения электронных документов. + RTF Rich Text Format Формат документов, разработанный компанией Microsoft, для кроссплатформенного обмена документами + + TXT Расширение имени файла для текстовых файлов, как правило, с минимальным форматированием + + XML Расширяемый язык разметки (XML). Простой и гибкий язык разметки, созданный на основе SGML (ISO 8879) и предназначенный для хранения и передачи данных + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Открытый бесплатный формат фиксированной разметки, разработанный компанией Microsoft + Примечание*: формат OFORM — это формат заполнения формы. Поэтому только поля формы доступны для редактирования. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать документ из меню Файл -> Скачать как. Исходный формат Можно скачать как DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT OFORM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, OFORM, PDF, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, RTF, TXT, XPS Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации документов в самые известные форматы файлов." + "body": "Электронные документы - это одни из наиболее широко используемых компьютерных файлов. Благодаря высокому уровню развития современных компьютерных сетей распространять электронные документы становится удобнее, чем печатные. Многообразие устройств, используемых для представления документов, обуславливает большое количество проприетарных и открытых файловых форматов. Редактор документов работает с самыми популярными из них. При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (DOCX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование. Форматы Описание Просмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXML Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML DjVu Формат файлов, предназначенный главным образом для хранения отсканированных документов, особенно тех, которые содержат комбинацию текста, рисунков и фотографий + DOC Расширение имени файла для текстовых документов, созданных программой Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Расширение имени файла для текстовых документов, созданных программой Microsoft Word 2007 (или более поздних версий) с поддержкой макросов + + DOCX Office Open XML разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для представления электронных таблиц, диаграмм, презентаций и текстовых документов + + DOCXF Формат для создания, редактирования и совместной работы над Шаблоном формы. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов текстовых документов. Шаблон DOTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества документов со схожим форматированием + + EPUB Electronic Publication Бесплатный открытый стандарт для электронных книг, созданный Международным форумом по цифровым публикациям (International Digital Publishing Forum) + + FODT Текстовый документ, сохраненный в формате OpenDocument, но хранящийся в виде XML-файла + + FB2 Расширение для электронных книг, позволяющее читать книги на компьютере или мобильных устройствах + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Основной язык разметки веб-страниц + + MHTML MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML Архив веб-страницы, включающий все ее содержимое + + ODT Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument, открытый стандарт для электронных документов + + OFORM Формат для заполнения Формы. Поля формы являются заполняемыми, но пользователи не могут изменять форматирование или настройки элементов формы.* + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов текстовых документов. Шаблон OTT содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества документов со схожим форматированием + + PDF Portable Document Format Формат файлов, используемый для представления документов независимо от программного обеспечения, аппаратных средств и операционных систем + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Подмножество формата PDF, содержащее ограниченный набор возможностей представления данных. Данный формат является стандартом ISO и предназначен для долгосрочного архивного хранения электронных документов. + RTF Rich Text Format Формат документов, разработанный компанией Microsoft, для кроссплатформенного обмена документами + + STW StarOffice Document Template Формат файла, используемый для сохранения документов обработки текста в OpenOffice.org Writer. Файл STW можно редактировать с помощью любого другого программного обеспечения, поддерживающего стандарт OpenDocument Format (ODF). Файлы STW содержат текст, изображения и другую информацию о форматировании. + + SXW StarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document Формат текстового документа, включенный в пакет StarOffice, основанный на формате XML OpenDocument и совместимый с Apache OpenOffice (ранее OpenOffice.org) Writer, преемником StarOffice Writer. + + TXT Расширение имени файла для текстовых файлов, как правило, с минимальным форматированием + + WPS Microsoft Works Word Processor Text Document Текстовый документ, созданный текстовым редактором Microsoft Works, программой, которая была заменена Microsoft Word. Файлы WPS похожи на документы Word, но имеют меньше параметров форматирования. + + WPT WordPerfect Text Document Текстовый файл с расширением .wpt сохраняется в двоичном формате и может содержать текст, диаграммы, изображения, таблицы и другие текстовые данные.. + + XML Расширяемый язык разметки (XML). Простой и гибкий язык разметки, созданный на основе SGML (ISO 8879) и предназначенный для хранения и передачи данных + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Открытый бесплатный формат фиксированной разметки, разработанный компанией Microsoft + *Примечание: формат OFORM — это формат заполнения формы. Поэтому только поля формы доступны для редактирования. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать документ из меню Файл -> Скачать как. Исходный формат Можно скачать как DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT MHTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OFORM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, OFORM, PDF, PNG, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT STW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT SXW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT WPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT WPT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OFORM, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT, XPS Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации документов в самые известные форматы файлов." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", @@ -75,6 +75,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Просмотрщик документов ONLYOFFICE", "body": "Вы можете использовать Просмотрщик документов ONLYOFFICE для открытия и просмотра файлов PDF, XPS, DjVu. Просмотрщик документов ONLYOFFICE позволяет: просматривать файлы PDF, XPS, DjVu, добавлять комментарии при помощи чата, перемещаться между файлами при помощи навигационной панели, а также просматривать эскизы страниц, использовать инструмент выделения и инструмент \"Рука\", распечатывать и скачивать файлы, использовать внутренние и внешние ссылки, получать доступ к дополнительным параметрам редактора и просматривать информацию о документе при помощи вкладки Файл или Вид: Размещение (доступно только для онлайн-версии версии) – папка в модуле Документы, в которой хранится файл. Владелец (доступно только для онлайн-версии версии) – имя пользователя, который создал файл. Загружен (доступно только для онлайн-версии версии) – дата и время загрузки файла. Статистика – количество страниц, абзацев, слов, символов, символов с пробелами. Размер страницы – размеры страниц в файле. Последнее изменение – дата и время последнего изменения файла. Создан – дата и время создания документа. Приложение – приложение, в котором был создан документ. Автор – имя человека, создавшего файл. Производитель PDF – приложение, используемое для преобразования документа в формат PDF. Версия PDF – версия файла PDF. PDF с тегами – показывает, содержит ли файл PDF теги. Быстрый веб-просмотр – показывает, включен ли быстрый веб-просмотр для документа. использовать плагины Плагины, доступные в десктопной версии: Переводчик, Send, Синонимы. Плагины, доступные в онлайн-версии: Controls example, Get and paste html, Telegram, Типограф, Count word, Речь, Сининимы, Переводчик. Интерфейс Просмотрщика документов ONLYOFFICE: Верхняя панель инструментов предоставляет доступ к вкладкам Файл, Вид и Плагины, а также к следующим значкам: Напечатать позволяет распечатать файл; Скачать позволяет скачать файл на ваш компьютер; Доступ (доступно только для онлайн-версии версии) позволяет непосредственно из документа управлять пользователями, имеющими доступ к файлу: приглашать новых пользователей, предоставляя им права на редактирование, просмотр, комментирование, заполнение форм или рецензирование документа, или запрещать доступ к файлу для некоторых пользователей. Открыть расположение файла в десктопной версии позволяет в окне Проводника открыть папку, в которой хранится файл. В онлайн-версии позволяет открыть в новой вкладке браузера папку модуля Документы, в которой хранится файл; Добавить в избранное / Удалить из избранного чтобы легко и быстро найти файл, щелкните пустую звездочку. Этот файл будет добавлен в избранное. Щелкните заполненную звездочку, чтобы удалить файл из избранного. Добавленный файл — это ярлык, поэтому сам файл остается в исходном месте. Удаление файла из избранного не приводит к удалению файла из его исходного местоположения; Поиск позволяет искать в документе определенное слово, символ и т.д. Пользователь отображает имя пользователя при наведении на него курсора мыши. В Строке состояния, расположенной в нижней части окна Просмотрщика документов ONLYOFFICE, указывается номер страницы и отображаются фоновые уведомления о состоянии. В строке находятся следующие инструменты: Инструмент выделения позволяет выделять текст в файле. Инструмент \"Рука\" позволяет перетаскивать и прокручивать страницу. По размеру страницы позволяет изменить размер страницы, чтобы на экране отображалась вся страница. По ширине позволяет изменить размер страницы, чтобы она соответствовала ширине экрана. Масштаб позволяет увеличивать и уменьшать масштаб страницы. На Левой боковай панели находятся следующие значки: - позволяет использовать инструмент поиска и замены, (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет открыть панель Чата, - позволяет открыть панель Заголовки, на которой отображается список всех заголовков с учетом соответствующих уровней вложенности. Щелкните на заголовок, чтобы перейти к странице, содержащей выбранный заголовок. Щелкните по значку Параметры заголовков справа от панели Заголовки и используйте один из доступных пунктов меню: Развернуть все – чтобы развернуть все уровни заголовков на панели Заголовки. Свернуть все – чтобы свернуть все уровни заголовков, кроме уровня 1, на панели Заголовки. Развернуть до уровня – чтобы развернуть структуру заголовков до выбранного уровня. Например, если выбрать уровень 3, то будут развернуты уровни 1, 2 и 3, а уровень 4 и все более низкие уровни будут свернуты. Размер шрифта – чтобы настроить размер шрифта для текста на панели Заголовки, выбрав один из доступных пресетов: Маленький, Средний и Большой. Переносить длинные заголовки – чтобы переносить текст длинных заголовков. Чтобы вручную развернуть или свернуть определенные уровни заголовков, используйте стрелки слева от заголовков. Чтобы закрыть панель Заголовки, еще раз нажмите на значок Заголовки на левой боковой панели. - позволяет отображать эскизы страниц для быстрой навигаци по документу. Щелкните на значок на панели Эскизы страниц, чтобы получить доступ к Параметрам эскизов: Перетащите ползунок, чтобы изменить размер эскиза, Чтобы указать область, которая в данный момент находится на экране, активируйте опцию Выделить видимую часть страницы. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить ее, щелкните еще раз. Чтобы закрыть панель Эскизов страниц, еще раз нажмите на значок Эскизы страниц на левой боковой панели. - позволяет обратиться в службу технической поддержки, - позволяет посмотреть информацию о программе." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Вкладка Рисование", + "body": "Вкладка Рисование Редактора документов позволяет выполнять основные операции рисования. Окно онлайн-редактора документов: Окно десктопного редактора документов: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: выделять рисунки, чтобы изменить их размер или удалить, использовать ручку и маркер, чтобы рисовать или добавлять рукописные заметки и выделение, использовать ластик, чтобы удалять весь рисунок или рукописный текст." + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Файл", @@ -93,7 +98,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Вставка", - "body": "Что такое вкладка Вставка? Вкладка Вставка Редактора документов позволяет добавлять элементы форматирования страницы, а также визуальные объекты и комментарии. Окно онлайн-редактора документов: Окно десктопного редактора документов: Назначение вкладки Вставка С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: вставлять пустую страницу, вставлять разрывы страниц, разрывы разделов и разрывы колонок, вставлять таблицы, изображения, диаграммы, фигуры, вставлять гиперссылки, комментарии, вставлять колонтитулы и номера страниц, дату и время, вставлять текстовые поля и объекты Text Art, уравнения, символы, буквицы, элементы управления содержимым, вставлять объекты SmartArt." + "body": "Вкладка Вставка Редактора документов позволяет добавлять элементы форматирования страницы, а также визуальные объекты и комментарии. Окно онлайн-редактора документов: Окно десктопного редактора документов: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: вставлять пустую страницу, вставлять разрывы страниц, разрывы разделов и разрывы колонок, вставлять таблицы, изображения, диаграммы, фигуры, вставлять гиперссылки, комментарии, вставлять колонтитулы и номера страниц, дату и время, вставлять текстовые поля и объекты Text Art, уравнения, символы, буквицы, элементы управления содержимым, вставлять объекты SmartArt." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", @@ -103,7 +108,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Плагины", - "body": "Вкладка Плагины позволяет получить доступ к дополнительным возможностям редактирования, используя доступные сторонние компоненты. Здесь также можно использовать макросы для автоматизации рутинных задач. Окно онлайн-редактора документов: Окно десктопного редактора документов: Кнопка Настройки позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные. Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины: Отправить - позволяет отправить документ по электронной почте с помощью десктопного почтового клиента по умолчанию (доступно только в десктопной версии), Подсветка кода - позволяет подсвечивать синтаксис кода, выбирая нужный язык, стиль, цвет фона, Распознавание текста - позволяет распознавать текст с картинки и вставлять его в текст документа, Фоторедактор - позволяет редактировать изображения: обрезать, отражать, поворачивать их, рисовать линии и фигуры, добавлять иконки и текст, загружать маску и применять фильтры, такие как Оттенки серого, Инверсия, Сепия, Размытие, Резкость, Рельеф и другие, Речь - позволяет преобразовать выделенный текст в речь (доступно только в онлайн-версии), Синонимы - позволяет находить синонимы и антонимы какого-либо слова и заменять его на выбранный вариант, Переводчик - позволяет переводить выделенный текст на другие языки, Примечание: этот плагин не работает в Internet Explorer. YouTube - позволяет встраивать в документ видео с YouTube, Mendeley - позволяет находить исследовательские работы и создавать библиографии для научных статей (доступно только в онлайн-версии), Zotero - позволяет работать с библиографическими данные и сопутствующими исследовательскими материалами (доступно только в онлайн-версии), EasyBib - помогает находить и вставлять похожие книги, журнальные статьи и веб-сайты (доступно только в онлайн-версии). Плагины Wordpress и EasyBib можно использовать, если подключить соответствующие сервисы в настройках портала. Можно воспользоваться следующими инструкциями для серверной версии или для SaaS-версии. Плагины Wordpress и EasyBib не включены в бесплатную версию редакторов. Для получения дополнительной информации о плагинах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. Все доступные примеры плагинов с открытым исходным кодом доступны на GitHub." + "body": "Вкладка Плагины позволяет получить доступ к дополнительным возможностям редактирования, используя доступные сторонние компоненты. Здесь также можно использовать макросы для автоматизации рутинных задач. Окно онлайн-редактора документов: Окно десктопного редактора документов: Кнопка Менеджер плагинов позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные. Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины: Отправить - позволяет отправить документ по электронной почте с помощью десктопного почтового клиента по умолчанию (доступно только в десктопной версии), Подсветка кода - позволяет подсвечивать синтаксис кода, выбирая нужный язык, стиль, цвет фона, Распознавание текста - позволяет распознавать текст с картинки и вставлять его в текст документа, Фоторедактор - позволяет редактировать изображения: обрезать, отражать, поворачивать их, рисовать линии и фигуры, добавлять иконки и текст, загружать маску и применять фильтры, такие как Оттенки серого, Инверсия, Сепия, Размытие, Резкость, Рельеф и другие, Речь - позволяет преобразовать выделенный текст в речь (доступно только в онлайн-версии), Синонимы - позволяет находить синонимы и антонимы какого-либо слова и заменять его на выбранный вариант, Переводчик - позволяет переводить выделенный текст на другие языки, Примечание: этот плагин не работает в Internet Explorer. YouTube - позволяет встраивать в документ видео с YouTube, Mendeley - позволяет находить исследовательские работы и создавать библиографии для научных статей (доступно только в онлайн-версии), Zotero - позволяет работать с библиографическими данные и сопутствующими исследовательскими материалами (доступно только в онлайн-версии), EasyBib - помогает находить и вставлять похожие книги, журнальные статьи и веб-сайты (доступно только в онлайн-версии). Плагины Wordpress и EasyBib можно использовать, если подключить соответствующие сервисы в настройках портала. Можно воспользоваться следующими инструкциями для серверной версии или для SaaS-версии. Плагины Wordpress и EasyBib не включены в бесплатную версию редакторов. Для получения дополнительной информации о плагинах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. Все доступные примеры плагинов с открытым исходным кодом доступны на GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", @@ -178,7 +183,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "title": "Выбор цветовой схемы", - "body": "Цветовые схемы применяются ко всему документу. Они используются для быстрого изменения вида документа, поскольку они определяют палитру Цвета темы для элементов документа (шрифт, фон, таблицы, автофигуры, диаграммы). Если вы применили какие-то Цвета темы к элементам документа, а потом выбрали другую Цветовую схему, то цвета, примененные в вашем документе, соответствующим образом изменятся. Для изменения цветовой схемы щелкните по направленной вниз стрелке рядом со значком Изменить цветовую схему на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выберите нужную цветовую схему из имеющихся вариантов: Стандартная, Оттенки серого, Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская, Яркая. Выбранная цветовая схема будет выделена в списке. Выбрав предпочтительную цветовую схему, вы сможете выбрать цвета в окне цветовых палитр, соответствующем тому элементу документа, к которому вы хотите применить тот или иной цвет. Для большинства элементов документа к окну цветовых палитр можно получить доступ, нажав на цветной прямоугольник на правой боковой панели, когда нужный элемент выделен. Для шрифта это окно можно открыть с помощью направленной вниз стрелки рядом со значком Цвет шрифта на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Предусмотрены следующие палитры: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме документа. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Выбранная цветовая схема на них не влияет. Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет." + "body": "Цветовые схемы применяются ко всему документу. Они используются для быстрого изменения вида документа, поскольку они определяют палитру Цвета темы для элементов документа (шрифт, фон, таблицы, автофигуры, диаграммы). Если вы применили какие-то Цвета темы к элементам документа, а потом выбрали другую Цветовую схему, то цвета, примененные в вашем документе, соответствующим образом изменятся. Для изменения цветовой схемы щелкните по направленной вниз стрелке рядом со значком Изменить цветовую схему на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выберите нужную цветовую схему из имеющихся вариантов: Стандартная, Оттенки серого, Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская, Яркая. Выбранная цветовая схема будет выделена в списке. Выбрав предпочтительную цветовую схему, вы сможете выбрать цвета в окне цветовых палитр, соответствующем тому элементу документа, к которому вы хотите применить тот или иной цвет. Для большинства элементов документа к окну цветовых палитр можно получить доступ, нажав на цветной прямоугольник на правой боковой панели, когда нужный элемент выделен. Для шрифта это окно можно открыть с помощью направленной вниз стрелки рядом со значком Цвет шрифта на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Предусмотрены следующие палитры: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме документа. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Выбранная цветовая схема на них не влияет. Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты:: Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в документе. Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", @@ -208,7 +213,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "title": "Создание списков", - "body": "Для создания в документе списка: установите курсор в том месте, где начнется список (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип списка, который требуется создать: Неупорядоченный список с маркерами создается с помощью значка Маркированный список , расположенного на верхней панели инструментов Упорядоченный список с цифрами или буквами создается с помощью значка Нумерованный список , расположенного на верхней панели инструментов Примечание: нажмите направленную вниз стрелку рядом со значком Маркированный список или Нумерованный список, чтобы выбрать, как должен выглядеть список. теперь при каждом нажатии в конце строки клавиши Enter будет появляться новый элемент упорядоченного или неупорядоченного списка. Чтобы закончить список, нажмите клавишу Backspace и продолжайте текст обычного абзаца. Нумерованные списки также создаются автоматически при вводе цифры 1 с точкой или скобкой и пробелом после нее: 1., 1). Маркированные списки создаются автоматически при вводе символов -, * и пробела после них. Можно также изменить отступы текста в списках и их вложенность с помощью значков Многоуровневый список , Уменьшить отступ и Увеличить отступ на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Чтобы изменить уровень списка, щелкните значок Нумерованный список , Маркированный список или Многоуровневый список и в пункте меню Изменить уровень списка выберите подходящий стиль списка. Чтобы перейти на следующий уровень списка, поместите курсор на начало строки и нажмите на клавиатуре клавишу Tab. Примечание: дополнительные параметры отступов и интервалов можно изменить на правой боковой панели и в окне дополнительных параметров. Чтобы получить дополнительную информацию об этом, прочитайте разделы Изменение отступов абзацев и Настройка междустрочного интервала в абзацах. Объединение и разделение списков Для того чтобы объединить список с предыдущим списком: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по первому пункту второго списка, используйте опцию контекстного меню Объединить с предыдущим списком. Списки будут объединены, и нумерация будет продолжена в соответствии с нумерацией первого списка. Для того чтобы разделить список: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по тому пункту списка, с которого требуется начать новый список, используйте опцию контекстного меню Начать новый список. Список будет разделен, и во втором списке нумерация начнется заново. Изменение нумерации Для того чтобы продолжить во втором списке последовательную нумерацию в соответствии с предыдущим списком: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по первому пункту второго списка, используйте опцию контекстного меню Продолжить нумерацию. Нумерация будет продолжена в соответствии с нумерацией первого списка. Для того чтобы задать произвольное начальное значение нумерации: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по тому пункту списка, к которому требуется применить новое значение нумерации, используйте опцию контекстного меню Задать начальное значение, в новом открывшемся окне укажите нужное числовое значение и нажмите кнопку OK. Изменение параметров списков Для того чтобы изменить параметры списка, такие как тип, выравнивание, размер и цвет маркеров или нумерации: щелкните по какому-либо пункту существующего списка или выделите текст, который требуется отформатировать как список, нажмите на кнопку Маркированный список или Нумерованный список на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Параметры списка, откроется окно Параметры списка. Окно настроек маркированного списка выглядит следующим образом: Окно настроек нумерованного списка выглядит следующим образом: Для маркированного списка можно выбрать символ, используемый в качестве маркера, тогда как для нумерованного списка можно выбрать тип нумерации. Параметры Выравнивание, Размер и Цвет идентичны как для маркированных, так и для нумерованных списков. Маркер - позволяет выбрать нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. При нажатии на поле Шрифт и символ открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный тип нумерации, используемый для нумерованного списка. Доступны следующие варианты: Нет, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать нужный тип выравнивания маркеров или нумерации, который используется для горизонтального выравнивания маркеров или нумерации внутри отведенного для них пространства. Доступны следующие типы выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру, По правому краю. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или нумерации соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задать пользовательский цвет. Все изменения отображаются в поле Просмотр. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек. Для того чтобы изменить параметры многоуровневого списка, щелкните по какому-либо пункту списка, нажмите на кнопку Многоуровневый список на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Параметры списка, откроется окно Параметры списка. Окно настроек многоуровневого списка выглядит следующим образом: Выберите нужный уровень списка в поле Уровень слева, затем используйте кнопки в верхней части окна настроек, чтобы настроить внешний вид маркера или нумерации для выбранного уровня: Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный тип нумерации, используемый для нумерованного списка, или нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. Для нумерованного списка доступны следующие варианты: Нет, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Для маркированного списка можно выбрать один из стандартных символов или использовать опцию Новый маркер. При выборе этой опции открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать нужный тип выравнивания маркеров или нумерации, который используется для горизонтального выравнивания маркеров или нумерации внутри отведенного для них пространства в начале абзаца. Доступны следующие типы выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру, По правому краю. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или нумерации соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задать пользовательский цвет. Все изменения отображаются в поле Просмотр. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек." + "body": "Чтобы создать список в Редакторе документов: установите курсор в том месте, где начнется список (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип списка, который требуется создать: Неупорядоченный список с маркерами создается с помощью значка Маркированный список , расположенного на верхней панели инструментов Упорядоченный список с цифрами или буквами создается с помощью значка Нумерованный список , расположенного на верхней панели инструментов Примечание: нажмите направленную вниз стрелку рядом со значком Маркированный список или Нумерованный список, чтобы выбрать, как должен выглядеть список. теперь при каждом нажатии в конце строки клавиши Enter будет появляться новый элемент упорядоченного или неупорядоченного списка. Чтобы закончить список, нажмите клавишу Backspace и продолжайте текст обычного абзаца. Нумерованные списки также создаются автоматически при вводе цифры 1 с точкой или скобкой и пробелом после нее: 1., 1). Маркированные списки создаются автоматически при вводе символов -, * и пробела после них. Можно также изменить отступы текста в списках и их вложенность с помощью значков Многоуровневый список , Уменьшить отступ и Увеличить отступ на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Чтобы изменить уровень списка, щелкните значок Нумерованный список , Маркированный список или Многоуровневый список и в пункте меню Изменить уровень списка выберите подходящий стиль списка. Чтобы перейти на следующий уровень списка, поместите курсор на начало строки и нажмите на клавиатуре клавишу Tab. Примечание: дополнительные параметры отступов и интервалов можно изменить на правой боковой панели и в окне дополнительных параметров. Чтобы получить дополнительную информацию об этом, прочитайте разделы Изменение отступов абзацев и Настройка междустрочного интервала в абзацах. Объединение и разделение списков Для того чтобы объединить список с предыдущим списком: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по первому пункту второго списка, используйте опцию контекстного меню Объединить с предыдущим списком. Списки будут объединены, и нумерация будет продолжена в соответствии с нумерацией первого списка. Для того чтобы разделить список: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по тому пункту списка, с которого требуется начать новый список, используйте опцию контекстного меню Начать новый список. Список будет разделен, и во втором списке нумерация начнется заново. Изменение нумерации Для того чтобы продолжить во втором списке последовательную нумерацию в соответствии с предыдущим списком: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по первому пункту второго списка, используйте опцию контекстного меню Продолжить нумерацию. Нумерация будет продолжена в соответствии с нумерацией первого списка. Для того чтобы задать произвольное начальное значение нумерации: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по тому пункту списка, к которому требуется применить новое значение нумерации, используйте опцию контекстного меню Задать начальное значение, в новом открывшемся окне укажите нужное числовое значение и нажмите кнопку OK. Изменение параметров списков Для того чтобы изменить параметры списка, такие как тип, выравнивание, размер и цвет маркеров или нумерации: щелкните по какому-либо пункту существующего списка или выделите текст, который требуется отформатировать как список, нажмите на кнопку Маркированный список или Нумерованный список на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Параметры списка, откроется окно Параметры списка. Окно настроек маркированного списка выглядит следующим образом: Окно настроек нумерованного списка выглядит следующим образом: Для маркированного списка можно выбрать символ, используемый в качестве маркера, тогда как для нумерованного списка можно выбрать тип нумерации. Параметры Выравнивание, Размер и Цвет идентичны как для маркированных, так и для нумерованных списков. Маркер - позволяет выбрать нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. При нажатии на поле Шрифт и символ открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный тип нумерации, используемый для нумерованного списка. Доступны следующие варианты: Нет, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать нужный тип выравнивания маркеров или нумерации, который используется для горизонтального выравнивания маркеров или нумерации внутри отведенного для них пространства. Доступны следующие типы выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру, По правому краю. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96. Полужирный/Курсив/Цвет - позволяет выделить и акцентировать внимание на нужный маркированный/нумерованный список. Для параметра Цвет по умолчанию установлено значение Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или номеров соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать один из Цветов темы, Стандартных цветов, Недавних цветов из палитры или нажмите Другие цвета, чтобы выбрать собственный цвет. Все изменения отображаются в поле Просмотр. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек. Нажмите правой кнопкой мыши на маркированный список и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Изменение отступов в списке, чтобы получить доступ к Параметрам списка так же, как и для многоуровневого списка. Для того чтобы изменить параметры многоуровневого списка, щелкните по какому-либо пункту списка, нажмите на кнопку Многоуровневый список на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Параметры списка, откроется окно Параметры списка. Окно настроек многоуровневого списка выглядит следующим образом: Выберите нужный уровень списка в поле Уровень слева, затем используйте кнопки в верхней части окна настроек, чтобы настроить внешний вид маркера или нумерации для выбранного уровня: Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный тип нумерации, используемый для нумерованного списка, или нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. Для нумерованного списка доступны следующие варианты: Нет, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Для маркированного списка можно выбрать один из стандартных символов или использовать опцию Новый маркер. При выборе этой опции открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать нужный тип выравнивания маркеров или нумерации, который используется для горизонтального выравнивания маркеров или нумерации внутри отведенного для них пространства в начале абзаца. Доступны следующие типы выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру, По правому краю. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер маркеров или нумерации. По умолчанию выбрана опция Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, размер маркеров или нумерации соответствует размеру текста. Вы можете выбрать один из предварительно заданных размеров от 8 до 96. Полужирный/Курсив/Цвет - позволяет выделить и акцентировать внимание на нужный маркированный/нумерованный список. Для параметра Цвет по умолчанию установлено значение Как текст. Когда выбрана эта опция, цвет маркеров или номеров соответствует цвету текста. Вы можете выбрать опцию Автоматически, чтобы применить автоматический цвет, или выбрать один из Цветов темы, Стандартных цветов, Недавних цветов из палитры или нажмите Другие цвета, чтобы выбрать собственный цвет. Формат номера - показывает стиль символа, использованного для создания списка. Нажмите двойную стрелку рядом с полем Формат номера, чтобы получить доступ к расширенным настройкам списка. Вы можете индивидуально настроить каждый уровень многоуровневого списка, выбрав нужный уровень в разделе Выбрать уровень.. Шрифт - позволяет выбрать форматирование шрифта, Включить номер уровня - позволяет указать номер родительского уровня для нижестоящего уровня, Начать с - позволяет выбрать необходимый порядковый номер, с которого начинается нумерованный список. Установите флажок Нумеровать заного, чтобы перезапустить нумерацию списка, Выравнивание - позволяет выбрать необходимый тип выравнивания для каждого уровня списка. Выберите из раскрывающегося списка один из следующих типов выравнивания: По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю и укажите интервал перед символом списка, Отступ текста - позволяет изменить смещение между символом списка и текстом, Символ после номера - позволяет изменить, что должно идти после символа, который вы выбрали в качестве формата номера. Выберите Знак табуляции, Пробел или Нет из выпадающего списка. Когда вы выбираете Знак табуляции, становится доступной опция Добавить переход по Tab в:. Установите флажок напротив Добавить переход по Tab в: и укажите длину отступа. Все изменения отображаются в поле Просмотр. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", @@ -238,7 +243,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Вставка автофигур", - "body": "Вставка автофигуры Для добавления автофигуры в документ: перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Последние использованные, Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии, щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы, установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на странице выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней). К автофигуре также можно добавить подпись. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с подписями к автофигурам вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Перемещение и изменение размера автофигур Для изменения размера автофигуры перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по краям автофигуры. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранной автофигуры при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков. При изменении некоторых фигур, например, фигурных стрелок или выносок, также доступен желтый значок в форме ромба . Он позволяет изменять отдельные параметры формы, например, длину указателя стрелки. Для изменения местоположения автофигуры используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на автофигуру. Перетащите автофигуру на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. При перемещении автофигуры на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\"). Чтобы перемещать автофигуру с шагом в один пиксель, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре. Чтобы перемещать автофигуру строго по горизонтали/вертикали и предотвратить ее смещение в перпендикулярном направлении, при перетаскивании удерживайте клавишу Shift. Чтобы повернуть автофигуру, наведите курсор мыши на маркер поворота и перетащите его по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки. Чтобы ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов, при поворачивании удерживайте клавишу Shift. Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. Изменение параметров автофигуры Чтобы выровнять или расположить автофигуры в определенном порядке, используйте контекстное меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты: Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор. Напечатать выделенное - используется для печати только выбранной части документа. Принять / Отклонить изменения - используется для принятия или отклонения отслеживаемых изменений в общем документе. Изменить точки - используется для редактирования формы или изменения кривизны автофигуры. Чтобы активировать редактируемые опорные точки фигуры, щелкните по фигуре правой кнопкой мыши и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Изменить точки. Черные квадраты, которые становятся активными, — это точки, где встречаются две линии, а красная линия очерчивает фигуру. Щелкните и перетащите квадрат, чтобы изменить положение точки и изменить контур фигуры. После сдвига опорной точки фигуры, появятся две синие линии с белыми квадратами на концах. Это кривые Безье, которые позволяют создавать кривую и изменять ее значение. Пока опорные точки активны, вы можете добавлять и удалять их. Чтобы добавить точку к фигуре, удерживайте Ctrl и щелкните место, где вы хотите добавить опорную точку. Чтобы удалить точку, удерживайте Ctrl и щелкните по ненужной точке. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранную автофигуру на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать автофигуры для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять фигуру по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Дополнительные параметры фигуры - используется для вызова окна 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры'. Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по фигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз) Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже). Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью. Изменение дополнительных параметров автофигуры Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры': Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить ширину автофигуры. Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...). Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно ширины левого поля, поля (то есть расстояния между левым и правым полями), ширины страницы или ширины правого поля. Высота - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить высоту автофигуры. Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...). Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно поля (то есть расстояния между верхним и нижним полями), высоты нижнего поля, высоты страницы или высоты верхнего поля. Если установлен флажок Сохранять пропорции, ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры: Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения автофигуры относительно текста: или она будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания \"В тексте\") или текст будет обтекать ее со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). В тексте - автофигура считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста фигура тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны. Если выбран один из следующих стилей, автофигуру можно перемещать независимо от текста и и точно задавать положение фигуры на странице: Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает автофигуру. По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры автофигуры. Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров автофигуры и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри фигуры. Чтобы этот эффект проявился, используйте опцию Изменить границу обтекания из контекстного меню. Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже автофигуры. Перед текстом - автофигура перекрывает текст. За текстом - текст перекрывает автофигуру. При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа). Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания: В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля. В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля. Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли автофигура перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому она привязана. Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться две автофигуры, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице. Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры: Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими. Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными. Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными. Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: Закругленный - угол будет закругленным. Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось. Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами. Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины. Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков. На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры). Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура." + "body": "Вставка автофигуры Для добавления автофигуры в документ: перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Последние использованные, Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии, щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы, установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на странице выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней). К автофигуре также можно добавить подпись. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с подписями к автофигурам вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Перемещение и изменение размера автофигур Для изменения размера автофигуры перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по краям автофигуры. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранной автофигуры при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков. При изменении некоторых фигур, например, фигурных стрелок или выносок, также доступен желтый значок в форме ромба . Он позволяет изменять отдельные параметры формы, например, длину указателя стрелки. Для изменения местоположения автофигуры используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на автофигуру. Перетащите автофигуру на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. При перемещении автофигуры на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\"). Чтобы перемещать автофигуру с шагом в один пиксель, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре. Чтобы перемещать автофигуру строго по горизонтали/вертикали и предотвратить ее смещение в перпендикулярном направлении, при перетаскивании удерживайте клавишу Shift. Чтобы повернуть автофигуру, наведите курсор мыши на маркер поворота и перетащите его по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки. Чтобы ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов, при поворачивании удерживайте клавишу Shift. Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. Копирование форматирования стиля автофигуры Чтобы скопировать определенное форматирование стиля автофигуры, выберите автофигуру, форматирование которой нужно скопировать, и с помощью мыши или клавиатуры, щелкните значок Копировать стиль на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов (указатель мыши будет выглядеть следующим образом ), выберите нужную автофигуру, чтобы применить такое же форматирование. Изменение параметров автофигуры Чтобы выровнять или расположить автофигуры в определенном порядке, используйте контекстное меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты: Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор. Напечатать выделенное - используется для печати только выбранной части документа. Принять / Отклонить изменения - используется для принятия или отклонения отслеживаемых изменений в общем документе. Изменить точки - используется для редактирования формы или изменения кривизны автофигуры. Чтобы активировать редактируемые опорные точки фигуры, щелкните по фигуре правой кнопкой мыши и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Изменить точки. Черные квадраты, которые становятся активными, — это точки, где встречаются две линии, а красная линия очерчивает фигуру. Щелкните и перетащите квадрат, чтобы изменить положение точки и изменить контур фигуры. После сдвига опорной точки фигуры, появятся две синие линии с белыми квадратами на концах. Это кривые Безье, которые позволяют создавать кривую и изменять ее значение. Пока опорные точки активны, вы можете добавлять и удалять их. Чтобы добавить точку к фигуре, удерживайте Ctrl и щелкните место, где вы хотите добавить опорную точку. Чтобы удалить точку, удерживайте Ctrl и щелкните по ненужной точке. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранную автофигуру на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать автофигуры для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять фигуру по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Сохранить как рисунок - используется , чтобы сохранить автофигуру в виде изображения на жестком диске. Дополнительные параметры фигуры - используется для вызова окна 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры'. Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по фигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится. Градиентная заливка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы заполнить фигуру двумя или более исчезающими цветами. Настройте свою градиентную заливку без каких-либо ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой боковой панели. Доступные опции меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Для изменения непрозрачности, введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь ползунком. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз) Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже). Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью. Изменение дополнительных параметров автофигуры Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры': Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить ширину автофигуры. Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...). Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно ширины левого поля, поля (то есть расстояния между левым и правым полями), ширины страницы или ширины правого поля. Высота - используйте одну из этих опций, чтобы изменить высоту автофигуры. Абсолютная - укажите точное значение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...). Относительная - укажите размер в процентах относительно поля (то есть расстояния между верхним и нижним полями), высоты нижнего поля, высоты страницы или высоты верхнего поля. Если установлен флажок Сохранять пропорции, ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры: Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения автофигуры относительно текста: или она будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания \"В тексте\") или текст будет обтекать ее со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). В тексте - автофигура считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста фигура тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны. Если выбран один из следующих стилей, автофигуру можно перемещать независимо от текста и и точно задавать положение фигуры на странице: Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает автофигуру. По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры автофигуры. Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров автофигуры и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри фигуры. Чтобы этот эффект проявился, используйте опцию Изменить границу обтекания из контекстного меню. Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже автофигуры. Перед текстом - автофигура перекрывает текст. За текстом - текст перекрывает автофигуру. При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа). Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания: В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля. В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования автофигуры: Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля. Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли автофигура перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому она привязана. Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться две автофигуры, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице. Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры: Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими. Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными. Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными. Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: Закругленный - угол будет закругленным. Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось. Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами. Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины. Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков. На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры). Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", @@ -248,7 +253,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Вставка диаграмм", - "body": "Вставка диаграммы Для вставки диаграммы в документ: Установите курсор там, где требуется поместить диаграмму. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов. Щелкните по значку Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: Гистограмма Гистограмма с группировкой Гистограмма с накоплением Нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма с группировкой Трехмерная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма График График График с накоплением Нормированный график с накоплением График с маркерами График с накоплениями с маркерами Нормированный график с маркерами и накоплением Трехмерный график Круговая Круговая Кольцевая диаграмма Трехмерная круговая диаграмма Линейчатая Линейчатая с группировкой Линейчатая с накоплением Нормированная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная линейчатая с группировкой Трехмерная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная линейчатая с накоплением С областями С областями Диаграмма с областями с накоплением Нормированная с областями и накоплением Биржевая Точечная Точечная диаграмма Точечная с гладкими кривыми и маркерами Точечная с гладкими кривыми Точечная с прямыми отрезками и маркерами Точечная с прямыми отрезками Комбинированные Гистограмма с группировкой и график Гистограмма с группировкой и график на вспомогательной оси С областями с накоплением и гистограмма с группировкой Пользовательская комбинация Примечание: Редактор документов ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм. После этого появится окно Редактор диаграмм, в котором можно ввести в ячейки необходимые данные при помощи следующих элементов управления: и для копирования и вставки скопированных данных и для отмены и повтора действий для вставки функции и для уменьшения и увеличения числа десятичных знаков для изменения числового формата, то есть того, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в ячейках для выбора диаграммы другого типа. Нажмите кнопку Выбрать данные, расположенную в окне Редактора диаграмм. Откроется окно Данные диаграммы. Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления диапазоном данных диаграммы, элементами легенды (ряды), подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и переключением строк / столбцов. Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы. Щелкните значок справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Элементы легенды (ряды) - добавляйте, редактируйте или удаляйте записи легенды. Введите или выберите ряд для записей легенды. В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить. В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку справа от поля Имя ряда. Подписи горизонтальной оси (категории) - изменяйте текст подписи категории. В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать. В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Переключить строку/столбец - переставьте местами данные, которые расположены на диаграмме. Переключите строки на столбцы, чтобы данные отображались на другой оси. Нажмите кнопку ОК, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав на кнопку Изменить тип диаграммы в окне Редактор диаграмм, чтобы выбрать тип и стиль диаграммы. Выберите диаграмму из доступных разделов: гистограмма, график, круговая, линейчатая, с областями, биржевая, точечная, комбинированные. Когда вы выбираете Комбинированные диаграммы, в окне Тип диаграммы расположены ряды диаграмм, для которых можно выбрать типы диаграмм и данные для размещения на вторичной оси. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав кнопку Редактировать диаграмму в окне Редактор диаграмм. Откроется окно Диаграмма - Дополнительные настройки. На вкладке Макет можно изменить расположение элементов диаграммы: Укажите местоположение Заголовка диаграммы относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы заголовок диаграммы не отображался, Наложение, чтобы наложить заголовок на область построения диаграммы и выровнять его по центру, Без наложения, чтобы показать заголовок над областью построения диаграммы. Укажите местоположение Условных обозначений относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы условные обозначения не отображались, Снизу, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд под областью построения диаграммы, Сверху, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд над областью построения диаграммы, Справа, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их справа от области построения диаграммы, Слева, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их слева от области построения диаграммы, Наложение слева, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру слева, Наложение справа, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру справа. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных): Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу. Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков и Линейчатых диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение, Введите символ (запятая, точка с запятой и т.д.), который вы хотите использовать для разделения нескольких подписей, в поле Разделитель подписей данных. Линии - используется для выбора типа линий для линейчатых/точечных диаграмм. Можно выбрать одну из следующих опций: Прямые для использования прямых линий между элементами данных, Сглаженные для использования сглаженных кривых линий между элементами данных или Нет для того, чтобы линии не отображались. Маркеры - используется для указания того, нужно показывать маркеры (если флажок поставлен) или нет (если флажок снят) на линейчатых/точечных диаграммах. Примечание: Опции Линии и Маркеры доступны только для Линейчатых диаграмм и Точечных диаграмм. Вкладка Вертикальная ось позволяет изменять параметры вертикальной оси, также называемой осью значений или осью Y, которая отображает числовые значения. Обратите внимание, что вертикальная ось будет осью категорий, которая отображает подпись для Гистограмм, таким образом, параметры вкладки Вертикальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в следующем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Примечание: Параметры оси и Линии сетки недоступны для круговых диаграмм, так как у круговых диаграмм нет осей и линий сетки. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть вертикальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать название вертикальной оси, Повернутое - показать название снизу вверх слева от вертикальной оси, По горизонтали - показать название по горизонтали слева от вертикальной оси. Минимум - используется для указания наименьшего значения, которое отображается в начале вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае минимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Максимум - используется для указания наибольшего значения, которое отображается в конце вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае максимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на вертикальной оси, в которой она должна пересекаться с горизонтальной осью. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимум/Максимум на вертикальной оси. Единицы отображения - используется для определения порядка числовых значений на вертикальной оси. Эта опция может пригодиться, если вы работаете с большими числами и хотите, чтобы отображение цифр на оси было более компактным и удобочитаемым (например, можно сделать так, чтобы 50 000 показывалось как 50, воспользовавшись опцией Тысячи). Выберите желаемые единицы отображения из выпадающего списка: Сотни, Тысячи, 10 000, 100 000, Миллионы, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Миллиарды, Триллионы или выберите опцию Нет, чтобы вернуться к единицам отображения по умолчанию. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения: Нет - не отображать основные/дополнительные деления, На пересечении - отображать основные/дополнительные деления по обе стороны от оси, Внутри - отображать основные/дополнительные деления внутри оси, Снаружи - отображать основные/дополнительные деления за пределами оси. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет определить положение подписей основных делений, отображающих значения. Для того, чтобы задать Положение подписи относительно вертикальной оси, выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет - не отображать подписи, Ниже - показывать подписи слева от области диаграммы, Выше - показывать подписи справа от области диаграммы, Рядом с осью - показывать подписи рядом с осью. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Примечание: второстепенные оси поддерживаются только в Комбинированных диаграммах. Второстепенные оси полезны в комбинированных диаграммах, когда ряды данных значительно различаются или для построения диаграммы используются смешанные типы данных. Второстепенные оси упрощают чтение и понимание комбинированной диаграммы. Вкладка Вспомогательная вертикальная / горизонтальная ось появляется, когда вы выбираете соответствующий ряд данных для комбинированной диаграммы. Все настройки и параметры на вкладке Вспомогательная вертикальная/горизонтальная ось такие же, как настройки на вертикальной / горизонтальной оси. Подробное описание параметров Вертикальная / горизонтальная ось смотрите выше / ниже. Вкладка Горизонтальная ось позволяет изменять параметры горизонтальной оси, также называемой осью категорий или осью x, которая отображает текстовые метки. Обратите внимание, что горизонтальная ось будет осью значений, которая отображает числовые значения для Гистограмм, поэтому в этом случае параметры вкладки Горизонтальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в предыдущем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть горизонтальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать заголовок горизонтальной оси, Без наложения - отображать заголовок под горизонтальной осью, Линии сетки используется для отображения Горизонтальных линий сетки путем выбора необходимого параметра в раскрывающемся списке: Нет, Основные, Незначительное или Основные и Дополнительные. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на горизонтальной оси, в которой вертикальная ось должна пересекать ее. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Из выпадающего списка можно выбрать опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимальном/Максимальном значении на вертикальной оси. Положение оси - используется для указания места размещения подписей на оси: на Делениях или Между делениями. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения категорий в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, категории располагаются слева направо. Когда этот флажок отмечен, категории располагаются справа налево. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет определять местоположение делений на горизонтальной шкале. Деления основного типа - это более крупные деления шкалы, у которых могут быть подписи, отображающие значения категорий. Деления дополнительного типа - это более мелкие деления шкалы, которые располагаются между делениями основного типа и у которых нет подписей. Кроме того, деления шкалы указывают, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если на вкладке Макет выбрана соответствующая опция. Можно редактировать следующие параметры делений: Основной/Дополнительный тип - используется для указания следующих вариантов размещения: Нет, чтобы деления основного/дополнительного типа не отображались, На пересечении, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа по обеим сторонам оси, Внутри чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с внутренней стороны оси, Снаружи, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с наружной стороны оси. Интервал между делениями - используется для указания того, сколько категорий нужно показывать между двумя соседними делениями. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет настроить внешний вид меток, отображающих категории. Положение подписи - используется для указания того, где следует располагать подписи относительно горизонтальной оси. Выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы подписи категорий не отображались, Ниже, чтобы подписи категорий располагались снизу области диаграммы, Выше, чтобы подписи категорий располагались наверху области диаграммы, Рядом с осью, чтобы подписи категорий отображались рядом с осью. Расстояние до подписи - используется для указания того, насколько близко подписи должны располагаться от осей. Можно указать нужное значение в поле ввода. Чем это значение больше, тем дальше расположены подписи от осей. Интервал между подписями - используется для указания того, как часто нужно показывать подписи. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае подписи отображаются для каждой категории. Можно выбрать опцию Вручную и указать нужное значение в поле справа. Например, введите 2, чтобы отображать подписи у каждой второй категории, и т.д. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер диаграммы также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера диаграммы. Если ячейка перемещается, диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры диаграммы останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера диаграммы при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. Перемещение и изменение размера диаграмм После того, как диаграмма будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и положение. Для изменения размера диаграммы перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по ее краям. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранной диаграммы при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков. Для изменения местоположения диаграммы используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на диаграмму. Перетащите диаграмму на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. При перемещении диаграммы на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\"). Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. Редактирование элементов диаграммы Чтобы изменить Заголовок диаграммы, выделите мышью стандартный текст и введите вместо него свой собственный. Чтобы изменить форматирование шрифта внутри текстовых элементов, таких как заголовок диаграммы, названия осей, элементы условных обозначений, подписи данных и так далее, выделите нужный текстовый элемент, щелкнув по нему левой кнопкой мыши. Затем используйте значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы изменить тип, размер, цвет шрифта или его стиль оформления. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выделите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. При выборе диаграммы справа также появляется значок Параметры фигуры , поскольку фигура используется в качестве фона для диаграммы. Щелкнув по этому значку, можно открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели инструментов и задать заливку, обводку и Стиль обтекания. Обратите внимание на то, что тип фигуры изменить нельзя. C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина и тип линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен. Если вам нужно изменить размер элементов диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых квадратов , расположенных по периметру элемента. Чтобы изменить положение элемента, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши, убедитесь, что ваш курсор изменился на , удерживайте левую кнопку мыши и перетащите элемент в нужное положение. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выберите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Можно также поворачивать 3D-диаграммы с помощью мыши. Щелкните левой кнопкой мыши внутри области построения диаграммы и удерживайте кнопку мыши. Не отпуская кнопку мыши, перетащите курсор, чтобы изменить ориентацию 3D-диаграммы. Изменение параметров диаграммы Некоторые параметры диаграммы можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры диаграммы на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по диаграмме и выберите значок Параметры диаграммы справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Размер - используется, чтобы просмотреть текущую Ширину и Высоту диаграммы. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже). Изменить тип диаграммы - используется, чтобы изменить выбранный тип и/или стиль диаграммы. Для выбора нужного Стиля диаграммы используйте второе выпадающее меню в разделе Изменить тип диаграммы. Изменить данные - используется для вызова окна 'Редактор диаграмм'. Примечание: для быстрого вызова окна 'Редактор диаграмм' можно также дважды щелкнуть мышкой по диаграмме в документе. Некоторые из этих опций можно также найти в контекстном меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты: Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранную диаграмму на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать диаграммы для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять диаграмму по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом. Опция Изменить границу обтекания для диаграмм недоступна. Изменить данные - используется для вызова окна 'Редактор диаграмм'. Дополнительные параметры диаграммы - используется для вызова окна 'Диаграмма - дополнительные параметры'. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры диаграммы, щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры диаграммы. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств диаграммы: Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту диаграммы. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон диаграммы. Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры: Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения диаграммы относительно текста: или она будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания \"В тексте\") или текст будет обтекать ее со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). В тексте - диаграмма считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста диаграмма тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны. Если выбран один из следующих стилей, диаграмму можно перемещать независимо от текста и и точно задавать положение диаграммы на странице: Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает диаграмму. По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры диаграммы. Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров диаграммы и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри диаграммы. Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже диаграммы. Перед текстом - диаграмма перекрывает текст. За текстом - текст перекрывает диаграмму. При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа). Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания: В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования диаграммы: Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля. В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования диаграммы: Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля. Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли диаграмма перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому она привязана. Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться две диаграммы, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма." + "body": "Вставка диаграммы Для вставки диаграммы в документ: Установите курсор там, где требуется поместить диаграмму. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов. Щелкните по значку Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: Гистограмма Гистограмма с группировкой Гистограмма с накоплением Нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма с группировкой Трехмерная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма График График График с накоплением Нормированный график с накоплением График с маркерами График с накоплениями с маркерами Нормированный график с маркерами и накоплением Трехмерный график Круговая Круговая Кольцевая диаграмма Трехмерная круговая диаграмма Линейчатая Линейчатая с группировкой Линейчатая с накоплением Нормированная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная линейчатая с группировкой Трехмерная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная линейчатая с накоплением С областями С областями Диаграмма с областями с накоплением Нормированная с областями и накоплением Биржевая Точечная Точечная диаграмма Точечная с гладкими кривыми и маркерами Точечная с гладкими кривыми Точечная с прямыми отрезками и маркерами Точечная с прямыми отрезками Лепестковая Лепестковая Лепестковая с маркерами Заполненная лепестковая Комбинированные Гистограмма с группировкой и график Гистограмма с группировкой и график на вспомогательной оси С областями с накоплением и гистограмма с группировкой Пользовательская комбинация Примечание: Редактор документов ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм. После этого появится окно Редактор диаграмм, в котором можно ввести в ячейки необходимые данные при помощи следующих элементов управления: и для копирования и вставки скопированных данных и для отмены и повтора действий для вставки функции и для уменьшения и увеличения числа десятичных знаков для изменения числового формата, то есть того, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в ячейках для выбора диаграммы другого типа. Нажмите кнопку Выбрать данные, расположенную в окне Редактора диаграмм. Откроется окно Данные диаграммы. Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления Диапазоном данных диаграммы, Элементами легенды (ряды), Подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и Переключением строк / столбцов. Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы. Щелкните значок справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Элементы легенды (ряды) - добавляйте, редактируйте или удаляйте записи легенды. Введите или выберите ряд для записей легенды. В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить. В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку справа от поля Имя ряда. Подписи горизонтальной оси (категории) - изменяйте текст подписи категории. В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать. В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Переключить строку/столбец - переставьте местами данные, которые расположены на диаграмме. Переключите строки на столбцы, чтобы данные отображались на другой оси. Нажмите кнопку ОК, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав на кнопку Изменить тип диаграммы в окне Редактор диаграмм, чтобы выбрать тип и стиль диаграммы. Выберите диаграмму из доступных разделов: гистограмма, график, круговая, линейчатая, с областями, биржевая, точечная, комбинированные. Когда вы выбираете Комбинированные диаграммы, в окне Тип диаграммы расположены ряды диаграмм, для которых можно выбрать типы диаграмм и данные для размещения на вторичной оси. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав кнопку Редактировать диаграмму в окне Редактор диаграмм. Откроется окно Диаграмма - Дополнительные настройки. На вкладке Макет можно изменить расположение элементов диаграммы: Укажите местоположение Заголовка диаграммы относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы заголовок диаграммы не отображался, Наложение, чтобы наложить заголовок на область построения диаграммы и выровнять его по центру, Без наложения, чтобы показать заголовок над областью построения диаграммы. Укажите местоположение Условных обозначений относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы условные обозначения не отображались, Снизу, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд под областью построения диаграммы, Сверху, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд над областью построения диаграммы, Справа, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их справа от области построения диаграммы, Слева, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их слева от области построения диаграммы, Наложение слева, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру слева, Наложение справа, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру справа. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных): Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу. Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков, Линейчатых, Лепестковых и Комбинированных диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение, Введите символ (запятая, точка с запятой и т.д.), который вы хотите использовать для разделения нескольких подписей, в поле Разделитель подписей данных. Линии - используется для выбора типа линий для линейчатых/точечных диаграмм. Можно выбрать одну из следующих опций: Прямые для использования прямых линий между элементами данных, Сглаженные для использования сглаженных кривых линий между элементами данных или Нет для того, чтобы линии не отображались. Маркеры - используется для указания того, нужно показывать маркеры (если флажок поставлен) или нет (если флажок снят) на линейчатых/точечных диаграммах. Примечание: Опции Линии и Маркеры доступны только для Линейчатых диаграмм и Точечных диаграмм. Вкладка Вертикальная ось позволяет изменять параметры вертикальной оси, также называемой осью значений или осью Y, которая отображает числовые значения. Обратите внимание, что вертикальная ось будет осью категорий, которая отображает подпись для Гистограмм, таким образом, параметры вкладки Вертикальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в следующем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Примечание: Параметры оси и Линии сетки недоступны для круговых диаграмм, так как у круговых диаграмм нет осей и линий сетки. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть вертикальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать название вертикальной оси, Повернутое - показать название снизу вверх слева от вертикальной оси, По горизонтали - показать название по горизонтали слева от вертикальной оси. Минимум - используется для указания наименьшего значения, которое отображается в начале вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае минимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Максимум - используется для указания наибольшего значения, которое отображается в конце вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае максимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на вертикальной оси, в которой она должна пересекаться с горизонтальной осью. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимум/Максимум на вертикальной оси. Единицы отображения - используется для определения порядка числовых значений на вертикальной оси. Эта опция может пригодиться, если вы работаете с большими числами и хотите, чтобы отображение цифр на оси было более компактным и удобочитаемым (например, можно сделать так, чтобы 50 000 показывалось как 50, воспользовавшись опцией Тысячи). Выберите желаемые единицы отображения из выпадающего списка: Сотни, Тысячи, 10 000, 100 000, Миллионы, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Миллиарды, Триллионы или выберите опцию Нет, чтобы вернуться к единицам отображения по умолчанию. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. Логарифмическая шкала - используется для включения логарифмического масштабирования до Базового значения, определяемой пользователем. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения: Нет - не отображать основные/дополнительные деления, На пересечении - отображать основные/дополнительные деления по обе стороны от оси, Внутри - отображать основные/дополнительные деления внутри оси, Снаружи - отображать основные/дополнительные деления за пределами оси. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет определить положение подписей основных делений, отображающих значения. Для того, чтобы задать Положение подписи относительно вертикальной оси, выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет - не отображать подписи, Ниже - показывать подписи слева от области диаграммы, Выше - показывать подписи справа от области диаграммы, Рядом с осью - показывать подписи рядом с осью. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Примечание: второстепенные оси поддерживаются только в Комбинированных диаграммах. Второстепенные оси полезны в комбинированных диаграммах, когда ряды данных значительно различаются или для построения диаграммы используются смешанные типы данных. Второстепенные оси упрощают чтение и понимание комбинированной диаграммы. Вкладка Вспомогательная вертикальная / горизонтальная ось появляется, когда вы выбираете соответствующий ряд данных для комбинированной диаграммы. Все настройки и параметры на вкладке Вспомогательная вертикальная/горизонтальная ось такие же, как настройки на вертикальной / горизонтальной оси. Подробное описание параметров Вертикальная / горизонтальная ось смотрите выше / ниже. Вкладка Горизонтальная ось позволяет изменять параметры горизонтальной оси, также называемой осью категорий или осью x, которая отображает текстовые метки. Обратите внимание, что горизонтальная ось будет осью значений, которая отображает числовые значения для Гистограмм, поэтому в этом случае параметры вкладки Горизонтальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в предыдущем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть горизонтальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать заголовок горизонтальной оси, Без наложения - отображать заголовок под горизонтальной осью, Линии сетки используется для отображения Горизонтальных линий сетки путем выбора необходимого параметра в раскрывающемся списке: Нет, Основные, Незначительное или Основные и Дополнительные. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на горизонтальной оси, в которой вертикальная ось должна пересекать ее. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Из выпадающего списка можно выбрать опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимальном/Максимальном значении на вертикальной оси. Положение оси - используется для указания места размещения подписей на оси: на Делениях или Между делениями. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения категорий в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, категории располагаются слева направо. Когда этот флажок отмечен, категории располагаются справа налево. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет определять местоположение делений на горизонтальной шкале. Деления основного типа - это более крупные деления шкалы, у которых могут быть подписи, отображающие значения категорий. Деления дополнительного типа - это более мелкие деления шкалы, которые располагаются между делениями основного типа и у которых нет подписей. Кроме того, деления шкалы указывают, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если на вкладке Макет выбрана соответствующая опция. Можно редактировать следующие параметры делений: Основной/Дополнительный тип - используется для указания следующих вариантов размещения: Нет, чтобы деления основного/дополнительного типа не отображались, На пересечении, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа по обеим сторонам оси, Внутри чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с внутренней стороны оси, Снаружи, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с наружной стороны оси. Интервал между делениями - используется для указания того, сколько категорий нужно показывать между двумя соседними делениями. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет настроить внешний вид меток, отображающих категории. Положение подписи - используется для указания того, где следует располагать подписи относительно горизонтальной оси. Выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы подписи категорий не отображались, Ниже, чтобы подписи категорий располагались снизу области диаграммы, Выше, чтобы подписи категорий располагались наверху области диаграммы, Рядом с осью, чтобы подписи категорий отображались рядом с осью. Расстояние до подписи - используется для указания того, насколько близко подписи должны располагаться от осей. Можно указать нужное значение в поле ввода. Чем это значение больше, тем дальше расположены подписи от осей. Интервал между подписями - используется для указания того, как часто нужно показывать подписи. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае подписи отображаются для каждой категории. Можно выбрать опцию Вручную и указать нужное значение в поле справа. Например, введите 2, чтобы отображать подписи у каждой второй категории, и т.д. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер диаграммы также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера диаграммы. Если ячейка перемещается, диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры диаграммы останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера диаграммы при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. Перемещение и изменение размера диаграмм После того, как диаграмма будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и положение. Для изменения размера диаграммы перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по ее краям. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранной диаграммы при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков. Для изменения местоположения диаграммы используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на диаграмму. Перетащите диаграмму на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. При перемещении диаграммы на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\"). Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. Редактирование элементов диаграммы Чтобы изменить Заголовок диаграммы, выделите мышью стандартный текст и введите вместо него свой собственный. Чтобы изменить форматирование шрифта внутри текстовых элементов, таких как заголовок диаграммы, названия осей, элементы условных обозначений, подписи данных и так далее, выделите нужный текстовый элемент, щелкнув по нему левой кнопкой мыши. Затем используйте значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы изменить тип, размер, цвет шрифта или его стиль оформления. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выделите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. При выборе диаграммы справа также появляется значок Параметры фигуры , поскольку фигура используется в качестве фона для диаграммы. Щелкнув по этому значку, можно открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели инструментов и задать заливку, обводку и Стиль обтекания. Обратите внимание на то, что тип фигуры изменить нельзя. C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина, тип и непрозрачность линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен. Если вам нужно изменить размер элементов диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых квадратов , расположенных по периметру элемента. Чтобы изменить положение элемента, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши, убедитесь, что ваш курсор изменился на , удерживайте левую кнопку мыши и перетащите элемент в нужное положение. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выберите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Можно также поворачивать 3D-диаграммы с помощью мыши. Щелкните левой кнопкой мыши внутри области построения диаграммы и удерживайте кнопку мыши. Не отпуская кнопку мыши, перетащите курсор, чтобы изменить ориентацию 3D-диаграммы. Изменение параметров диаграммы Некоторые параметры диаграммы можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры диаграммы на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по диаграмме и выберите значок Параметры диаграммы справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Размер - используется, чтобы просмотреть текущую Ширину и Высоту диаграммы. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже). Изменить тип диаграммы - используется, чтобы изменить выбранный тип и/или стиль диаграммы. Для выбора нужного Стиля диаграммы используйте второе выпадающее меню в разделе Изменить тип диаграммы. Изменить данные - используется для вызова окна 'Редактор диаграмм'. Примечание: для быстрого вызова окна 'Редактор диаграмм' можно также дважды щелкнуть мышкой по диаграмме в документе. Некоторые из этих опций можно также найти в контекстном меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты: Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранную диаграмму на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать диаграммы для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять диаграмму по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом. Опция Изменить границу обтекания для диаграмм недоступна. Изменить данные - используется для вызова окна 'Редактор диаграмм'. Дополнительные параметры диаграммы - используется для вызова окна 'Диаграмма - дополнительные параметры'. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры диаграммы, щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры диаграммы. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств диаграммы: Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту диаграммы. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон диаграммы. Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры: Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения диаграммы относительно текста: или она будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания \"В тексте\") или текст будет обтекать ее со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). В тексте - диаграмма считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста диаграмма тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны. Если выбран один из следующих стилей, диаграмму можно перемещать независимо от текста и и точно задавать положение диаграммы на странице: Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает диаграмму. По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры диаграммы. Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров диаграммы и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри диаграммы. Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже диаграммы. Перед текстом - диаграмма перекрывает текст. За текстом - текст перекрывает диаграмму. При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа). Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания: В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования диаграммы: Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля. В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования диаграммы: Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля. Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли диаграмма перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому она привязана. Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться две диаграммы, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", @@ -293,7 +298,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Вставка изображений", - "body": "В редакторе документов можно вставлять в документ изображения самых популярных форматов. Поддерживаются следующие форматы изображений: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Вставка изображения Для вставки изображения в текст документа: установите курсор там, где требуется поместить изображение, перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, нажмите значок Изображение на верхней панели инструментов, для загрузки изображения выберите одну из следующих опций: при выборе опции Изображение из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть В онлайн-редакторе вы можете выбрать сразу несколько изображений. при выборе опции Изображение по URL откроется окно, в котором Вы можете ввести веб-адрес нужного изображения, а затем нажмите кнопку OK при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK после того, как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер, свойства и положение. К изображению также можно добавить подпись. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с подписями к изображениям вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Перемещение и изменение размера изображений Для изменения размера изображения перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по его краям. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранного изображения при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков. Для изменения местоположения изображения используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на изображение. Перетащите изображение на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. При перемещении изображения на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\"). Чтобы повернуть изображение, наведите курсор мыши на маркер поворота и перетащите его по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки. Чтобы ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов, при поворачивании удерживайте клавишу Shift. Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. Изменение параметров изображения Некоторые параметры изображения можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по изображению и выберите значок Параметры изображения справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Размер - используется, чтобы просмотреть текущую Ширину и Высоту изображения. При необходимости можно восстановить размер изображения по умолчанию, нажав кнопку По умолчанию. Кнопка Вписать позволяет изменить размер изображения таким образом, чтобы оно занимало все пространство между левым и правым полями страницы. Кнопка Обрезать используется, чтобы обрезать изображение. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать, чтобы активировать маркеры обрезки, которые появятся в углах изображения и в центре каждой его стороны. Вручную перетаскивайте маркеры, чтобы задать область обрезки. Вы можете навести курсор мыши на границу области обрезки, чтобы курсор превратился в значок , и перетащить область обрезки. Чтобы обрезать одну сторону, перетащите маркер, расположенный в центре этой стороны. Чтобы одновременно обрезать две смежных стороны, перетащите один из угловых маркеров. Чтобы равномерно обрезать две противоположные стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании маркера в центре одной из этих сторон. Чтобы равномерно обрезать все стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании любого углового маркера. Когда область обрезки будет задана, еще раз нажмите на кнопку Обрезать, или нажмите на клавишу Esc, или щелкните мышью за пределами области обрезки, чтобы применить изменения. После того, как область обрезки будет задана, также можно использовать опции Обрезать, Заливка и Вписать, доступные в выпадающем меню Обрезать. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать еще раз и выберите нужную опцию: При выборе опции Обрезать изображение будет заполнять определенную форму. Вы можете выбрать фигуру из галереи, которая открывается при наведении указателя мыши на опцию Обрезать по фигуре. Вы по-прежнему можете использовать опции Заливка и Вписать, чтобы настроить, как изображение будет соответствовать фигуре. При выборе опции Заливка центральная часть исходного изображения будет сохранена и использована в качестве заливки выбранной области обрезки, в то время как остальные части изображения будут удалены. При выборе опции Вписать размер изображения будет изменен, чтобы оно соответствовало высоте или ширине области обрезки. Никакие части исходного изображения не будут удалены, но внутри выбранной области обрезки могут появится пустые пространства. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз) Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже). Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы заменить текущее изображение, загрузив другое Из файла, Из хранилища или По URL. Некоторые из этих опций можно также найти в контекстном меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты: Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранное изображение на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать изображения для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять изображение по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз. Обрезать - используется, чтобы применить один из вариантов обрезки: Обрезать, Заливка или Вписать. Выберите из подменю пункт Обрезать, затем перетащите маркеры обрезки, чтобы задать область обрезки, и нажмите на одну из этих трех опций в подменю еще раз, чтобы применить изменения. Реальный размер - используется для смены текущего размера изображения на реальный размер. Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы заменить текущее изображение, загрузив другое Из файла или По URL. Дополнительные параметры изображения - используется для вызова окна 'Изображение - дополнительные параметры'. Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину и цвет Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом. На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображеню. Изменение дополнительных параметров изображения Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры изображения, щелкните по нему правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры изображения. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств изображения: Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту изображения. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон изображения. Чтобы восстановить реальный размер добавленного изображения, нажмите кнопку Реальный размер. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть изображение на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры: Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения изображения относительно текста: или оно будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания \"В тексте\") или текст будет обтекать его со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). В тексте - изображение считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста изображение тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны. Если выбран один из следующих стилей, изображение можно перемещать независимо от текста и точно задавать положение изображения на странице: Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает изображение. По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры изображения. Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров изображения и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри него. Чтобы этот эффект проявился, используйте опцию Изменить границу обтекания из контекстного меню. Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже изображения. Перед текстом - изображение перекрывает текст. За текстом - текст перекрывает изображение. При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа). Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания: В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования изображения: Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля. В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования изображения: Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля. Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли изображение перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому оно привязано. Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться два изображения, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение." + "body": "В редакторе документов можно вставлять в документ изображения самых популярных форматов. Поддерживаются следующие форматы изображений: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Вставка изображения Для вставки изображения в текст документа: установите курсор там, где требуется поместить изображение, перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, нажмите значок Изображение на верхней панели инструментов, для загрузки изображения выберите одну из следующих опций: при выборе опции Изображение из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть В онлайн-редакторе вы можете выбрать сразу несколько изображений. при выборе опции Изображение по URL откроется окно, в котором Вы можете ввести веб-адрес нужного изображения, а затем нажмите кнопку OK при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK после того, как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер, свойства и положение. К изображению также можно добавить подпись. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с подписями к изображениям вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Перемещение и изменение размера изображений Для изменения размера изображения перетаскивайте маленькие квадраты , расположенные по его краям. Чтобы сохранить исходные пропорции выбранного изображения при изменении размера, удерживайте клавишу Shift и перетаскивайте один из угловых значков. Для изменения местоположения изображения используйте значок , который появляется после наведения курсора мыши на изображение. Перетащите изображение на нужное место, не отпуская кнопку мыши. При перемещении изображения на экране появляются направляющие, которые помогают точно расположить объект на странице (если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\"). Чтобы повернуть изображение, наведите курсор мыши на маркер поворота и перетащите его по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки. Чтобы ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов, при поворачивании удерживайте клавишу Shift. Примечание: список сочетаний клавиш, которые можно использовать при работе с объектами, доступен здесь. Изменение параметров изображения Некоторые параметры изображения можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по изображению и выберите значок Параметры изображения справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Размер - используется, чтобы просмотреть текущую Ширину и Высоту изображения. При необходимости можно восстановить размер изображения по умолчанию, нажав кнопку По умолчанию. Кнопка Вписать позволяет изменить размер изображения таким образом, чтобы оно занимало все пространство между левым и правым полями страницы. Кнопка Обрезать используется, чтобы обрезать изображение. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать, чтобы активировать маркеры обрезки, которые появятся в углах изображения и в центре каждой его стороны. Вручную перетаскивайте маркеры, чтобы задать область обрезки. Вы можете навести курсор мыши на границу области обрезки, чтобы курсор превратился в значок , и перетащить область обрезки. Чтобы обрезать одну сторону, перетащите маркер, расположенный в центре этой стороны. Чтобы одновременно обрезать две смежных стороны, перетащите один из угловых маркеров. Чтобы равномерно обрезать две противоположные стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании маркера в центре одной из этих сторон. Чтобы равномерно обрезать все стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании любого углового маркера. Когда область обрезки будет задана, еще раз нажмите на кнопку Обрезать, или нажмите на клавишу Esc, или щелкните мышью за пределами области обрезки, чтобы применить изменения. После того, как область обрезки будет задана, также можно использовать опции Обрезать, Заливка и Вписать, доступные в выпадающем меню Обрезать. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать еще раз и выберите нужную опцию: При выборе опции Обрезать изображение будет заполнять определенную форму. Вы можете выбрать фигуру из галереи, которая открывается при наведении указателя мыши на опцию Обрезать по фигуре. Вы по-прежнему можете использовать опции Заливка и Вписать, чтобы настроить, как изображение будет соответствовать фигуре. При выборе опции Заливка центральная часть исходного изображения будет сохранена и использована в качестве заливки выбранной области обрезки, в то время как остальные части изображения будут удалены. При выборе опции Вписать размер изображения будет изменен, чтобы оно соответствовало высоте или ширине области обрезки. Никакие части исходного изображения не будут удалены, но внутри выбранной области обрезки могут появится пустые пространства. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз) Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом (для получения дополнительной информации смотрите описание дополнительных параметров ниже). Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы заменить текущее изображение, загрузив другое Из файла, Из хранилища или По URL. Некоторые из этих опций можно также найти в контекстном меню. Меню содержит следующие пункты: Вырезать, копировать, вставить - стандартные опции, которые используются для вырезания или копирования выделенного текста/объекта и вставки ранее вырезанного/скопированного фрагмента текста или объекта в то место, где находится курсор. Порядок - используется, чтобы вынести выбранное изображение на передний план, переместить на задний план, перенести вперед или назад, а также сгруппировать или разгруппировать изображения для выполнения операций над несколькими из них сразу. Подробнее о расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы выровнять изображение по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю, по верхнему краю, по середине, по нижнему краю. Подробнее о выравнивании объектов рассказывается на этой странице. Стиль обтекания - используется, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом - или для изменения границы обтекания. Опция Изменить границу обтекания доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Чтобы произвольно изменить границу, перетаскивайте точки границы обтекания. Чтобы создать новую точку границы обтекания, щелкните в любом месте на красной линии и перетащите ее в нужную позицию. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз. Сохранить как рисунок - используется, чтобы сохранить изображение на жестком диске. Обрезать - используется, чтобы применить один из вариантов обрезки: Обрезать, Заливка или Вписать. Выберите из подменю пункт Обрезать, затем перетащите маркеры обрезки, чтобы задать область обрезки, и нажмите на одну из этих трех опций в подменю еще раз, чтобы применить изменения. Реальный размер - используется для смены текущего размера изображения на реальный размер. Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы заменить текущее изображение, загрузив другое Из файла или По URL. Дополнительные параметры изображения - используется для вызова окна 'Изображение - дополнительные параметры'. Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину и цвет Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом. На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображеню. Изменение дополнительных параметров изображения Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры изображения, щелкните по нему правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры изображения. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств изображения: Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту изображения. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон изображения. Чтобы восстановить реальный размер добавленного изображения, нажмите кнопку Реальный размер. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть изображение на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Обтекание текстом содержит следующие параметры: Стиль обтекания - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить способ размещения изображения относительно текста: или оно будет являться частью текста (если выбран стиль обтекания \"В тексте\") или текст будет обтекать его со всех сторон (если выбран один из остальных стилей). В тексте - изображение считается частью текста, как отдельный символ, поэтому при перемещении текста изображение тоже перемещается. В этом случае параметры расположения недоступны. Если выбран один из следующих стилей, изображение можно перемещать независимо от текста и точно задавать положение изображения на странице: Вокруг рамки - текст обтекает прямоугольную рамку, которая окружает изображение. По контуру - текст обтекает реальные контуры изображения. Сквозное - текст обтекает вокруг контуров изображения и заполняет незамкнутое свободное место внутри него. Чтобы этот эффект проявился, используйте опцию Изменить границу обтекания из контекстного меню. Сверху и снизу - текст находится только выше и ниже изображения. Перед текстом - изображение перекрывает текст. За текстом - текст перекрывает изображение. При выборе стиля обтекания вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное или сверху и снизу можно задать дополнительные параметры - расстояние до текста со всех сторон (сверху, снизу, слева, справа). Вкладка Положение доступна только в том случае, если выбран стиль обтекания, отличный от стиля \"В тексте\". Вкладка содержит следующие параметры, которые различаются в зависимости от выбранного стиля обтекания: В разделе По горизонтали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования изображения: Выравнивание (по левому краю, по центру, по правому краю) относительно символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), справа от символа, столбца, левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно левого поля, поля, страницы или правого поля. В разделе По вертикали можно выбрать один из следующих трех способов позиционирования изображения: Выравнивание (по верхнему краю, по центру, по нижнему краю) относительно строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Абсолютное Положение, определяемое в абсолютных единицах, то есть Сантиметрах/Пунктах/Дюймах (в зависимости от того, какой параметр указан на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры...), ниже строки, поля, нижнего поля, абзаца, страницы или верхнего поля, Относительное положение, определяемое в процентах, относительно поля, нижнего поля, страницы или верхнего поля. Опция Перемещать с текстом определяет, будет ли изображение перемещаться вместе с текстом, к которому оно привязано. Опция Разрешить перекрытие определяет, будут ли перекрываться два изображения, если перетащить их близко друг к другу на странице. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertLineNumbers.htm", @@ -308,7 +313,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Вставка объектов SmartArt", - "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Вставляйте новые графические объекты SmartArt или редактируйте объекты SmartArt, добавленные с помощью сторонних редакторов. Чтобы вставить объект SmartArt, перейдите на вкладку Вставка, нажмите кнопку SmartArt, наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс, выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню. Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку объекта SmartArt. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: Доступные пункты меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона объекта SmartArt какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем объект SmartArt, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура объекта SmartArt. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью. Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры." + "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Вставляйте новые графические объекты SmartArt или редактируйте объекты SmartArt, добавленные с помощью сторонних редакторов. Чтобы вставить объект SmartArt, перейдите на вкладку Вставка, нажмите кнопку SmartArt, наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс, выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню. Вы можете сохранить объект SmartArt как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели: Обратите внимание, что настройки цвета, стиля и типа формы могут быть настроены индивидуально. Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку объекта SmartArt. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: Доступные пункты меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона объекта SmartArt какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем объект SmartArt, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура объекта SmartArt. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Для изменения непрозрачности контура введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь соответствующим ползунком. Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью. Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", @@ -323,7 +328,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Вставка текстовых объектов", - "body": "Чтобы сделать текст более выразительным и привлечь внимание к определенной части документа, можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). Добавление текстового объекта Текстовый объект можно добавить в любом месте страницы. Для этого: перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите нужный тип текстового объекта: чтобы добавить текстовое поле, щелкните по значку Надпись на верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните там, где требуется поместить надпись, удерживайте кнопку мыши и перетаскивайте границу текстового поля, чтобы задать его размер. Когда вы отпустите кнопку мыши, в добавленном текстовом поле появится курсор, и вы сможете ввести свой текст. Примечание: надпись можно также вставить, если щелкнуть по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов и выбрать фигуру из группы Основные фигуры. чтобы добавить объект Text Art, щелкните по значку Text Art, затем щелкните по нужному шаблону стиля – объект Text Art будет добавлен в текущей позиции курсора. Выделите мышью стандартный текст внутри текстового поля и напишите вместо него свой текст. щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к документу. Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним). Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку с текстом внутри (у объектов Text Art по умолчанию невидимые границы), а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста. Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален. Форматирование текстового поля Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии. чтобы изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры. чтобы изменить заливку, контур, стиль обтекания текстового поля или заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции. чтобы выровнять текстовое поле на странице, расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, повернуть или отразить текстовое поле, изменить стиль обтекания или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. Подробнее о выравнивании и расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии. Примечание: форматирование текста можно изменить и в том случае, если выделено текстовое поле, а не сам текст. В этом случае любые изменения будут применены ко всему тексту в текстовом поле. Некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта (тип, размер, цвет и стили оформления шрифта) можно отдельно применить к предварительно выделенному фрагменту текста. Чтобы повернуть текст внутри текстового поля, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Направление текста, а затем - один из доступных вариантов: Горизонтальное (выбран по умолчанию), Повернуть текст вниз (задает вертикальное направление, сверху вниз) или Повернуть текст вверх (задает вертикальное направление, снизу вверх). Чтобы выровнять текст внутри текстового поля по вертикали, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Вертикальное выравнивание, а затем - один из доступных вариантов: По верхнему краю, По центру или По нижнему краю. Другие параметры форматирования, которые можно применить, точно такие же, как и для обычного текста. Обратитесь к соответствующим разделам справки за дополнительными сведениями о нужном действии. Вы можете: выровнять текст внутри текстового поля по горизонтали изменить тип, размер, цвет шрифта, применить стили оформления и предустановленные стили форматирования задать междустрочный интервал, изменить отступы абзаца, настроить позиции табуляции для многострочного текста внутри текстового поля вставить гиперссылку Можно также нажать на значок Параметры объекта Text Art на правой боковой панели и изменить некоторые параметры стиля. Изменение стиля объекта Text Art Выделите текстовый объект и щелкните по значку Параметры объекта Text Art на правой боковой панели. Измените примененный стиль текста, выбрав из галереи новый Шаблон. Можно также дополнительно изменить этот базовый стиль, выбрав другой тип, размер шрифта и т.д. Измените Заливку шрифта. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство букв. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится: Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить буквы двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Примечание: при выборе одной из этих двух опций можно также задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Настройте толщину, цвет и тип Контура шрифта. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба." + "body": "Чтобы сделать текст более выразительным и привлечь внимание к определенной части документа, можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). Добавление текстового объекта Текстовый объект можно добавить в любом месте страницы. Для этого: перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите нужный тип текстового объекта: чтобы добавить текстовое поле, щелкните по значку Надпись на верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните там, где требуется поместить надпись, удерживайте кнопку мыши и перетаскивайте границу текстового поля, чтобы задать его размер. Когда вы отпустите кнопку мыши, в добавленном текстовом поле появится курсор, и вы сможете ввести свой текст. Примечание: надпись можно также вставить, если щелкнуть по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов и выбрать фигуру из группы Основные фигуры. чтобы добавить объект Text Art, щелкните по значку Text Art, затем щелкните по нужному шаблону стиля – объект Text Art будет добавлен в текущей позиции курсора. Выделите мышью стандартный текст внутри текстового поля и напишите вместо него свой текст. щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к документу. Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним). Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку с текстом внутри (у объектов Text Art по умолчанию невидимые границы), а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста. Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален. Форматирование текстового поля Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии. чтобы изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры. чтобы изменить заливку, контур, стиль обтекания текстового поля или заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции. чтобы выровнять текстовое поле на странице, расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, повернуть или отразить текстовое поле, изменить стиль обтекания или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. Подробнее о выравнивании и расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. Вы можете сохранить текстовое поле в виде изображенияя на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии. Примечание: форматирование текста можно изменить и в том случае, если выделено текстовое поле, а не сам текст. В этом случае любые изменения будут применены ко всему тексту в текстовом поле. Некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта (тип, размер, цвет и стили оформления шрифта) можно отдельно применить к предварительно выделенному фрагменту текста. Чтобы повернуть текст внутри текстового поля, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Направление текста, а затем - один из доступных вариантов: Горизонтальное (выбран по умолчанию), Повернуть текст вниз (задает вертикальное направление, сверху вниз) или Повернуть текст вверх (задает вертикальное направление, снизу вверх). Чтобы выровнять текст внутри текстового поля по вертикали, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Вертикальное выравнивание, а затем - один из доступных вариантов: По верхнему краю, По центру или По нижнему краю. Другие параметры форматирования, которые можно применить, точно такие же, как и для обычного текста. Обратитесь к соответствующим разделам справки за дополнительными сведениями о нужном действии. Вы можете: выровнять текст внутри текстового поля по горизонтали изменить тип, размер, цвет шрифта, применить стили оформления и предустановленные стили форматирования задать междустрочный интервал, изменить отступы абзаца, настроить позиции табуляции для многострочного текста внутри текстового поля вставить гиперссылку Можно также нажать на значок Параметры объекта Text Art на правой боковой панели и изменить некоторые параметры стиля. Изменение стиля объекта Text Art Выделите текстовый объект и щелкните по значку Параметры объекта Text Art на правой боковой панели. Измените примененный стиль текста, выбрав из галереи новый Шаблон. Можно также дополнительно изменить этот базовый стиль, выбрав другой тип, размер шрифта и т.д. Измените Заливку шрифта. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство букв. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится: Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить буквы двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Примечание: при выборе одной из этих двух опций можно также задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Настройте толщину, цвет, тип и непрозрачность Контура шрифта. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Для изменения непрозрачности, введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь ползунком. Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", @@ -333,7 +338,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "Функции автозамены", - "body": "Функции автозамены используются для автоматического форматирования текста при обнаружении или вставки специальных математических символов путем распознавания определенных символов. Доступные параметры автозамены перечислены в соответствующем диалоговом окне. Чтобы его открыть, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены. Диалоговое окно Автозамена содержит четыре вкладки: Автозамена математическими символами, Распознанные функции, Автоформат при вводе и Автозамена. Автозамена математическими символами При работе с уравнениями множество символов, диакритических знаков и знаков математических действий можно добавить путем ввода с клавиатуры, а не выбирая шаблон из коллекции. В редакторе уравнений установите курсор в нужном поле для ввода, введите специальный код и нажмите Пробел. Введенный код будет преобразован в соответствующий символ, а пробел будет удален. Примечание: коды чувствительны к регистру. Вы можете добавлять, изменять, восстанавливать и удалять записи автозамены из списка автозамены. Перейдите во вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Чтобы добавить запись в список автозамены, Введите код автозамены, который хотите использовать, в поле Заменить. Введите символ, который будет присвоен введенному вами коду, в поле На. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы изменить запись в списке автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите изменить. Вы можете изменить информацию в полях Заменить для кода и На для символа. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите удалить. Щелкните на кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите из списка запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами запись автозамены будет удалена, а измененные значения будут восстановлены до их исходных значений. Чтобы отключить автозамену математическими символами и избежать автоматических изменений и замен, снимите флажок Заменять текст при вводе. В таблице ниже приведены все поддерживаемые в настоящее время коды, доступные в Редакторе документов. Полный список поддерживаемых кодов также можно найти на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры... -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Поддерживаемые коды Код Символ Категория !! Символы ... Точки :: Операторы := Операторы /< Операторы отношения /> Операторы отношения /= Операторы отношения \\above Символы Above/Below \\acute Акценты \\aleph Буквы иврита \\alpha Греческие буквы \\Alpha Греческие буквы \\amalg Бинарные операторы \\angle Геометрические обозначения \\aoint Интегралы \\approx Операторы отношений \\asmash Стрелки \\ast Бинарные операторы \\asymp Операторы отношений \\atop Операторы \\bar Черта сверху/снизу \\Bar Акценты \\because Операторы отношений \\begin Разделители \\below Символы Above/Below \\bet Буквы иврита \\beta Греческие буквы \\Beta Греческие буквы \\beth Буквы иврита \\bigcap Крупные операторы \\bigcup Крупные операторы \\bigodot Крупные операторы \\bigoplus Крупные операторы \\bigotimes Крупные операторы \\bigsqcup Крупные операторы \\biguplus Крупные операторы \\bigvee Крупные операторы \\bigwedge Крупные операторы \\binomial Уравнения \\bot Логические обозначения \\bowtie Операторы отношений \\box Символы \\boxdot Бинарные операторы \\boxminus Бинарные операторы \\boxplus Бинарные операторы \\bra Разделители \\break Символы \\breve Акценты \\bullet Бинарные операторы \\cap Бинарные операторы \\cbrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\cases Символы \\cdot Бинарные операторы \\cdots Точки \\check Акценты \\chi Греческие буквы \\Chi Греческие буквы \\circ Бинарные операторы \\close Разделители \\clubsuit Символы \\coint Интегралы \\cong Операторы отношений \\coprod Математические операторы \\cup Бинарные операторы \\dalet Буквы иврита \\daleth Буквы иврита \\dashv Операторы отношений \\dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\Dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\ddddot Акценты \\dddot Акценты \\ddot Акценты \\ddots Точки \\defeq Операторы отношений \\degc Символы \\degf Символы \\degree Символы \\delta Греческие буквы \\Delta Греческие буквы \\Deltaeq Операторы \\diamond Бинарные операторы \\diamondsuit Символы \\div Бинарные операторы \\dot Акценты \\doteq Операторы отношений \\dots Точки \\doublea Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleA Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleb Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleB Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublec Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleC Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubled Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleD Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublee Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleE Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublef Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleF Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleg Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleG Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleh Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleH Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublei Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleI Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublej Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleJ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublek Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleK Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublel Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleL Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublem Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleM Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublen Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleN Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleo Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleO Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublep Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleP Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleq Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleQ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubler Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleR Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubles Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleS Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublet Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleT Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleu Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleU Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublev Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleV Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublew Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleW Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublex Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleX Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubley Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleY Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublez Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleZ Дважды начерченные буквы \\downarrow Стрелки \\Downarrow Стрелки \\dsmash Стрелки \\ee Дважды начерченные буквы \\ell Символы \\emptyset Обозначения множеств \\emsp Знаки пробела \\end Разделители \\ensp Знаки пробела \\epsilon Греческие буквы \\Epsilon Греческие буквы \\eqarray Символы \\equiv Операторы отношений \\eta Греческие буквы \\Eta Греческие буквы \\exists Логические обозначения \\forall Логические обозначения \\fraktura Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturA Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturb Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturB Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturc Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturC Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturd Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturD Буквы готического шрифта \\frakture Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturE Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturf Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturF Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturg Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturG Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturh Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturH Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturi Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturI Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturk Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturK Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturl Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturL Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturm Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturM Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturn Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturN Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturo Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturO Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturp Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturP Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturq Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturQ Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturr Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturR Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturs Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturS Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturt Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturT Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturu Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturU Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturv Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturV Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturw Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturW Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturx Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturX Буквы готического шрифта \\fraktury Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturY Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturz Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturZ Буквы готического шрифта \\frown Операторы отношений \\funcapply Бинарные операторы \\G Греческие буквы \\gamma Греческие буквы \\Gamma Греческие буквы \\ge Операторы отношений \\geq Операторы отношений \\gets Стрелки \\gg Операторы отношений \\gimel Буквы иврита \\grave Акценты \\hairsp Знаки пробела \\hat Акценты \\hbar Символы \\heartsuit Символы \\hookleftarrow Стрелки \\hookrightarrow Стрелки \\hphantom Стрелки \\hsmash Стрелки \\hvec Акценты \\identitymatrix Матрицы \\ii Дважды начерченные буквы \\iiint Интегралы \\iint Интегралы \\iiiint Интегралы \\Im Символы \\imath Символы \\in Операторы отношений \\inc Символы \\infty Символы \\int Интегралы \\integral Интегралы \\iota Греческие буквы \\Iota Греческие буквы \\itimes Математические операторы \\j Символы \\jj Дважды начерченные буквы \\jmath Символы \\kappa Греческие буквы \\Kappa Греческие буквы \\ket Разделители \\lambda Греческие буквы \\Lambda Греческие буквы \\langle Разделители \\lbbrack Разделители \\lbrace Разделители \\lbrack Разделители \\lceil Разделители \\ldiv Дробная черта \\ldivide Дробная черта \\ldots Точки \\le Операторы отношений \\left Разделители \\leftarrow Стрелки \\Leftarrow Стрелки \\leftharpoondown Стрелки \\leftharpoonup Стрелки \\leftrightarrow Стрелки \\Leftrightarrow Стрелки \\leq Операторы отношений \\lfloor Разделители \\lhvec Акценты \\limit Лимиты \\ll Операторы отношений \\lmoust Разделители \\Longleftarrow Стрелки \\Longleftrightarrow Стрелки \\Longrightarrow Стрелки \\lrhar Стрелки \\lvec Акценты \\mapsto Стрелки \\matrix Матрицы \\medsp Знаки пробела \\mid Операторы отношений \\middle Символы \\models Операторы отношений \\mp Бинарные операторы \\mu Греческие буквы \\Mu Греческие буквы \\nabla Символы \\naryand Операторы \\nbsp Знаки пробела \\ne Операторы отношений \\nearrow Стрелки \\neq Операторы отношений \\ni Операторы отношений \\norm Разделители \\notcontain Операторы отношений \\notelement Операторы отношений \\notin Операторы отношений \\nu Греческие буквы \\Nu Греческие буквы \\nwarrow Стрелки \\o Греческие буквы \\O Греческие буквы \\odot Бинарные операторы \\of Операторы \\oiiint Интегралы \\oiint Интегралы \\oint Интегралы \\omega Греческие буквы \\Omega Греческие буквы \\ominus Бинарные операторы \\open Разделители \\oplus Бинарные операторы \\otimes Бинарные операторы \\over Разделители \\overbar Акценты \\overbrace Акценты \\overbracket Акценты \\overline Акценты \\overparen Акценты \\overshell Акценты \\parallel Геометрические обозначения \\partial Символы \\pmatrix Матрицы \\perp Геометрические обозначения \\phantom Символы \\phi Греческие буквы \\Phi Греческие буквы \\pi Греческие буквы \\Pi Греческие буквы \\pm Бинарные операторы \\pppprime Штрихи \\ppprime Штрихи \\pprime Штрихи \\prec Операторы отношений \\preceq Операторы отношений \\prime Штрихи \\prod Математические операторы \\propto Операторы отношений \\psi Греческие буквы \\Psi Греческие буквы \\qdrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\quadratic Квадратные корни и радикалы \\rangle Разделители \\Rangle Разделители \\ratio Операторы отношений \\rbrace Разделители \\rbrack Разделители \\Rbrack Разделители \\rceil Разделители \\rddots Точки \\Re Символы \\rect Символы \\rfloor Разделители \\rho Греческие буквы \\Rho Греческие буквы \\rhvec Акценты \\right Разделители \\rightarrow Стрелки \\Rightarrow Стрелки \\rightharpoondown Стрелки \\rightharpoonup Стрелки \\rmoust Разделители \\root Символы \\scripta Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptA Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptb Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptB Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptc Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptC Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptd Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptD Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripte Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptE Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptf Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptF Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptg Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptG Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripth Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptH Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripti Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptI Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptk Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptK Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptl Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptL Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptm Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptM Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptn Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptN Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripto Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptO Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptp Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptP Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptq Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptQ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptr Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptR Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripts Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptS Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptt Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptT Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptu Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptU Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptv Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptV Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptw Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptW Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptx Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptX Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripty Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptY Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptz Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptZ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\sdiv Дробная черта \\sdivide Дробная черта \\searrow Стрелки \\setminus Бинарные операторы \\sigma Греческие буквы \\Sigma Греческие буквы \\sim Операторы отношений \\simeq Операторы отношений \\smash Стрелки \\smile Операторы отношений \\spadesuit Символы \\sqcap Бинарные операторы \\sqcup Бинарные операторы \\sqrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\sqsubseteq Обозначения множеств \\sqsuperseteq Обозначения множеств \\star Бинарные операторы \\subset Обозначения множеств \\subseteq Обозначения множеств \\succ Операторы отношений \\succeq Операторы отношений \\sum Математические операторы \\superset Обозначения множеств \\superseteq Обозначения множеств \\swarrow Стрелки \\tau Греческие буквы \\Tau Греческие буквы \\therefore Операторы отношений \\theta Греческие буквы \\Theta Греческие буквы \\thicksp Знаки пробела \\thinsp Знаки пробела \\tilde Акценты \\times Бинарные операторы \\to Стрелки \\top Логические обозначения \\tvec Стрелки \\ubar Акценты \\Ubar Акценты \\underbar Акценты \\underbrace Акценты \\underbracket Акценты \\underline Акценты \\underparen Акценты \\uparrow Стрелки \\Uparrow Стрелки \\updownarrow Стрелки \\Updownarrow Стрелки \\uplus Бинарные операторы \\upsilon Греческие буквы \\Upsilon Греческие буквы \\varepsilon Греческие буквы \\varphi Греческие буквы \\varpi Греческие буквы \\varrho Греческие буквы \\varsigma Греческие буквы \\vartheta Греческие буквы \\vbar Разделители \\vdash Операторы отношений \\vdots Точки \\vec Акценты \\vee Бинарные операторы \\vert Разделители \\Vert Разделители \\Vmatrix Матрицы \\vphantom Стрелки \\vthicksp Знаки пробела \\wedge Бинарные операторы \\wp Символы \\wr Бинарные операторы \\xi Греческие буквы \\Xi Греческие буквы \\zeta Греческие буквы \\Zeta Греческие буквы \\zwnj Знаки пробела \\zwsp Знаки пробела ~= Операторы отношений -+ Бинарные операторы +- Бинарные операторы << Операторы отношений <= Операторы отношений -> Стрелки >= Операторы отношений >> Операторы отношений Распознанные функции На этой вкладке вы найдете список математических выражений, которые будут распознаваться редактором формул как функции и поэтому не будут автоматически выделены курсивом. Чтобы просмотреть список распознанных функций, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Распознанные функции. Чтобы добавить запись в список распознаваемых функций, введите функцию в пустое поле и нажмите кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка распознанных функций, выберите функцию, которую нужно удалить, и нажмите кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите в списке запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами функция будет удалена, а удаленные - восстановлены. Автоформат при вводе По умолчанию, редактор применяет форматирование во время набора текста в соответствии с предустановками автоматического форматирования: заменяет кавычки, автоматически запускает маркированный список или нумерованный список при обнаружении списка и заменяет кавычки или преобразует дефисы в тире. Если вам нужно отключить предустановки автоформатирования, снимите отметку с ненужных опций, для этого перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автоформат при вводе. Опция Добавлять точку двойным пробелом по умолчанию отключена. Включите данную опцию, если хотите, чтобы точка автоматически добавлялась при двойном нажатии клавиши пробела. Чтобы включить или отключить предустановки автоматического форматирования, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Проверка правописания -> Параметры автозамены -> Автоформат при вводе. Автозамена текста Вы можете настроить редактор на автоматическое использование заглавной буквы в каждом предложении. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить эту функцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена текста и снимите флажок с Делать первые буквы предложений прописными." + "body": "Функции автозамены используются для автоматического форматирования текста при обнаружении или вставки специальных математических символов путем распознавания определенных символов. Доступные параметры автозамены перечислены в соответствующем диалоговом окне. Чтобы его открыть, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены. Диалоговое окно Автозамена содержит четыре вкладки: Автозамена математическими символами, Распознанные функции, Автоформат при вводе и Автозамена. Автозамена математическими символами При работе с уравнениями множество символов, диакритических знаков и знаков математических действий можно добавить путем ввода с клавиатуры, а не выбирая шаблон из коллекции. В редакторе уравнений установите курсор в нужном поле для ввода, введите специальный код и нажмите Пробел. Введенный код будет преобразован в соответствующий символ, а пробел будет удален. Примечание: коды чувствительны к регистру. Вы можете добавлять, изменять, восстанавливать и удалять записи автозамены из списка автозамены. Перейдите во вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Чтобы добавить запись в список автозамены, Введите код автозамены, который хотите использовать, в поле Заменить. Введите символ, который будет присвоен введенному вами коду, в поле На. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы изменить запись в списке автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите изменить. Вы можете изменить информацию в полях Заменить для кода и На для символа. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите удалить. Щелкните на кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите из списка запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами запись автозамены будет удалена, а измененные значения будут восстановлены до их исходных значений. Чтобы отключить автозамену математическими символами и избежать автоматических изменений и замен, снимите флажок Заменять текст при вводе. В таблице ниже приведены все поддерживаемые в настоящее время коды, доступные в Редакторе документов. Полный список поддерживаемых кодов также можно найти на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительные параметры... -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Поддерживаемые коды Код Символ Категория !! Символы ... Точки :: Операторы := Операторы /< Операторы отношения /> Операторы отношения /= Операторы отношения \\above Символы Above/Below \\acute Акценты \\aleph Буквы иврита \\alpha Греческие буквы \\Alpha Греческие буквы \\amalg Бинарные операторы \\angle Геометрические обозначения \\aoint Интегралы \\approx Операторы отношений \\asmash Стрелки \\ast Бинарные операторы \\asymp Операторы отношений \\atop Операторы \\bar Черта сверху/снизу \\Bar Акценты \\because Операторы отношений \\begin Разделители \\below Символы Above/Below \\bet Буквы иврита \\beta Греческие буквы \\Beta Греческие буквы \\beth Буквы иврита \\bigcap Крупные операторы \\bigcup Крупные операторы \\bigodot Крупные операторы \\bigoplus Крупные операторы \\bigotimes Крупные операторы \\bigsqcup Крупные операторы \\biguplus Крупные операторы \\bigvee Крупные операторы \\bigwedge Крупные операторы \\binomial Уравнения \\bot Логические обозначения \\bowtie Операторы отношений \\box Символы \\boxdot Бинарные операторы \\boxminus Бинарные операторы \\boxplus Бинарные операторы \\bra Разделители \\break Символы \\breve Акценты \\bullet Бинарные операторы \\cap Бинарные операторы \\cbrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\cases Символы \\cdot Бинарные операторы \\cdots Точки \\check Акценты \\chi Греческие буквы \\Chi Греческие буквы \\circ Бинарные операторы \\close Разделители \\clubsuit Символы \\coint Интегралы \\cong Операторы отношений \\coprod Математические операторы \\cup Бинарные операторы \\dalet Буквы иврита \\daleth Буквы иврита \\dashv Операторы отношений \\dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\Dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\ddddot Акценты \\dddot Акценты \\ddot Акценты \\ddots Точки \\defeq Операторы отношений \\degc Символы \\degf Символы \\degree Символы \\delta Греческие буквы \\Delta Греческие буквы \\Deltaeq Операторы \\diamond Бинарные операторы \\diamondsuit Символы \\div Бинарные операторы \\dot Акценты \\doteq Операторы отношений \\dots Точки \\doublea Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleA Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleb Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleB Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublec Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleC Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubled Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleD Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublee Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleE Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublef Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleF Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleg Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleG Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleh Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleH Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublei Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleI Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublej Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleJ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublek Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleK Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublel Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleL Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublem Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleM Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublen Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleN Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleo Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleO Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublep Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleP Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleq Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleQ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubler Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleR Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubles Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleS Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublet Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleT Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleu Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleU Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublev Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleV Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublew Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleW Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublex Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleX Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubley Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleY Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublez Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleZ Дважды начерченные буквы \\downarrow Стрелки \\Downarrow Стрелки \\dsmash Стрелки \\ee Дважды начерченные буквы \\ell Символы \\emptyset Обозначения множеств \\emsp Знаки пробела \\end Разделители \\ensp Знаки пробела \\epsilon Греческие буквы \\Epsilon Греческие буквы \\eqarray Символы \\equiv Операторы отношений \\eta Греческие буквы \\Eta Греческие буквы \\exists Логические обозначения \\forall Логические обозначения \\fraktura Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturA Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturb Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturB Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturc Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturC Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturd Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturD Буквы готического шрифта \\frakture Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturE Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturf Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturF Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturg Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturG Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturh Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturH Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturi Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturI Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturk Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturK Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturl Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturL Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturm Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturM Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturn Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturN Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturo Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturO Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturp Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturP Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturq Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturQ Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturr Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturR Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturs Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturS Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturt Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturT Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturu Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturU Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturv Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturV Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturw Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturW Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturx Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturX Буквы готического шрифта \\fraktury Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturY Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturz Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturZ Буквы готического шрифта \\frown Операторы отношений \\funcapply Бинарные операторы \\G Греческие буквы \\gamma Греческие буквы \\Gamma Греческие буквы \\ge Операторы отношений \\geq Операторы отношений \\gets Стрелки \\gg Операторы отношений \\gimel Буквы иврита \\grave Акценты \\hairsp Знаки пробела \\hat Акценты \\hbar Символы \\heartsuit Символы \\hookleftarrow Стрелки \\hookrightarrow Стрелки \\hphantom Стрелки \\hsmash Стрелки \\hvec Акценты \\identitymatrix Матрицы \\ii Дважды начерченные буквы \\iiint Интегралы \\iint Интегралы \\iiiint Интегралы \\Im Символы \\imath Символы \\in Операторы отношений \\inc Символы \\infty Символы \\int Интегралы \\integral Интегралы \\iota Греческие буквы \\Iota Греческие буквы \\itimes Математические операторы \\j Символы \\jj Дважды начерченные буквы \\jmath Символы \\kappa Греческие буквы \\Kappa Греческие буквы \\ket Разделители \\lambda Греческие буквы \\Lambda Греческие буквы \\langle Разделители \\lbbrack Разделители \\lbrace Разделители \\lbrack Разделители \\lceil Разделители \\ldiv Дробная черта \\ldivide Дробная черта \\ldots Точки \\le Операторы отношений \\left Разделители \\leftarrow Стрелки \\Leftarrow Стрелки \\leftharpoondown Стрелки \\leftharpoonup Стрелки \\leftrightarrow Стрелки \\Leftrightarrow Стрелки \\leq Операторы отношений \\lfloor Разделители \\lhvec Акценты \\limit Лимиты \\ll Операторы отношений \\lmoust Разделители \\Longleftarrow Стрелки \\Longleftrightarrow Стрелки \\Longrightarrow Стрелки \\lrhar Стрелки \\lvec Акценты \\mapsto Стрелки \\matrix Матрицы \\medsp Знаки пробела \\mid Операторы отношений \\middle Символы \\models Операторы отношений \\mp Бинарные операторы \\mu Греческие буквы \\Mu Греческие буквы \\nabla Символы \\naryand Операторы \\nbsp Знаки пробела \\ne Операторы отношений \\nearrow Стрелки \\neq Операторы отношений \\ni Операторы отношений \\norm Разделители \\notcontain Операторы отношений \\notelement Операторы отношений \\notin Операторы отношений \\nu Греческие буквы \\Nu Греческие буквы \\nwarrow Стрелки \\o Греческие буквы \\O Греческие буквы \\odot Бинарные операторы \\of Операторы \\oiiint Интегралы \\oiint Интегралы \\oint Интегралы \\omega Греческие буквы \\Omega Греческие буквы \\ominus Бинарные операторы \\open Разделители \\oplus Бинарные операторы \\otimes Бинарные операторы \\over Разделители \\overbar Акценты \\overbrace Акценты \\overbracket Акценты \\overline Акценты \\overparen Акценты \\overshell Акценты \\parallel Геометрические обозначения \\partial Символы \\pmatrix Матрицы \\perp Геометрические обозначения \\phantom Символы \\phi Греческие буквы \\Phi Греческие буквы \\pi Греческие буквы \\Pi Греческие буквы \\pm Бинарные операторы \\pppprime Штрихи \\ppprime Штрихи \\pprime Штрихи \\prec Операторы отношений \\preceq Операторы отношений \\prime Штрихи \\prod Математические операторы \\propto Операторы отношений \\psi Греческие буквы \\Psi Греческие буквы \\qdrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\quadratic Квадратные корни и радикалы \\rangle Разделители \\Rangle Разделители \\ratio Операторы отношений \\rbrace Разделители \\rbrack Разделители \\Rbrack Разделители \\rceil Разделители \\rddots Точки \\Re Символы \\rect Символы \\rfloor Разделители \\rho Греческие буквы \\Rho Греческие буквы \\rhvec Акценты \\right Разделители \\rightarrow Стрелки \\Rightarrow Стрелки \\rightharpoondown Стрелки \\rightharpoonup Стрелки \\rmoust Разделители \\root Символы \\scripta Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptA Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptb Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptB Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptc Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptC Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptd Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptD Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripte Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptE Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptf Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptF Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptg Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptG Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripth Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptH Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripti Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptI Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptk Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptK Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptl Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptL Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptm Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptM Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptn Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptN Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripto Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptO Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptp Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptP Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptq Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptQ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptr Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptR Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripts Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptS Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptt Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptT Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptu Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptU Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptv Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptV Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptw Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptW Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptx Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptX Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripty Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptY Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptz Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptZ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\sdiv Дробная черта \\sdivide Дробная черта \\searrow Стрелки \\setminus Бинарные операторы \\sigma Греческие буквы \\Sigma Греческие буквы \\sim Операторы отношений \\simeq Операторы отношений \\smash Стрелки \\smile Операторы отношений \\spadesuit Символы \\sqcap Бинарные операторы \\sqcup Бинарные операторы \\sqrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\sqsubseteq Обозначения множеств \\sqsuperseteq Обозначения множеств \\star Бинарные операторы \\subset Обозначения множеств \\subseteq Обозначения множеств \\succ Операторы отношений \\succeq Операторы отношений \\sum Математические операторы \\superset Обозначения множеств \\superseteq Обозначения множеств \\swarrow Стрелки \\tau Греческие буквы \\Tau Греческие буквы \\therefore Операторы отношений \\theta Греческие буквы \\Theta Греческие буквы \\thicksp Знаки пробела \\thinsp Знаки пробела \\tilde Акценты \\times Бинарные операторы \\to Стрелки \\top Логические обозначения \\tvec Стрелки \\ubar Акценты \\Ubar Акценты \\underbar Акценты \\underbrace Акценты \\underbracket Акценты \\underline Акценты \\underparen Акценты \\uparrow Стрелки \\Uparrow Стрелки \\updownarrow Стрелки \\Updownarrow Стрелки \\uplus Бинарные операторы \\upsilon Греческие буквы \\Upsilon Греческие буквы \\varepsilon Греческие буквы \\varphi Греческие буквы \\varpi Греческие буквы \\varrho Греческие буквы \\varsigma Греческие буквы \\vartheta Греческие буквы \\vbar Разделители \\vdash Операторы отношений \\vdots Точки \\vec Акценты \\vee Бинарные операторы \\vert Разделители \\Vert Разделители \\Vmatrix Матрицы \\vphantom Стрелки \\vthicksp Знаки пробела \\wedge Бинарные операторы \\wp Символы \\wr Бинарные операторы \\xi Греческие буквы \\Xi Греческие буквы \\zeta Греческие буквы \\Zeta Греческие буквы \\zwnj Знаки пробела \\zwsp Знаки пробела ~= Операторы отношений -+ Бинарные операторы +- Бинарные операторы << Операторы отношений <= Операторы отношений -> Стрелки >= Операторы отношений >> Операторы отношений Распознанные функции На этой вкладке вы найдете список математических выражений, которые будут распознаваться редактором формул как функции и поэтому не будут автоматически выделены курсивом. Чтобы просмотреть список распознанных функций, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Распознанные функции. Чтобы добавить запись в список распознаваемых функций, введите функцию в пустое поле и нажмите кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка распознанных функций, выберите функцию, которую нужно удалить, и нажмите кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите в списке запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами функция будет удалена, а удаленные - восстановлены. Автоформат при вводе По умолчанию, редактор применяет форматирование во время набора текста в соответствии с предустановками автоматического форматирования: заменяет кавычки, автоматически запускает маркированный список или нумерованный список при обнаружении списка и заменяет кавычки или преобразует дефисы в тире. Если вам нужно отключить предустановки автоформатирования, снимите отметку с ненужных опций, для этого перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автоформат при вводе. Опция Добавлять точку двойным пробелом по умолчанию отключена. Включите данную опцию, если хотите, чтобы точка автоматически добавлялась при двойном нажатии клавиши пробела. Чтобы включить или отключить предустановки автоматического форматирования, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Проверка правописания -> Параметры автозамены -> Автоформат при вводе. Автозамена текста Вы можете настроить редактор на автоматическое использование заглавной буквы в каждом предложении. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить эту функцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена текста и снимите флажок с Делать первые буквы предложений прописными. По умолчанию редактор делает заглавными первые буквы ячеек таблицы. Чтобы отключить данную опцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл > Дополнительные настройки -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены - > Автозамена текста и снимите флажок Делать первые буквы ячеек таблиц прописными.. Вы также можете настроить использование заглавных букв после определенных слов. Для этого введите нужные слова в поле Не использовать заглавные буквы после и нажав кнопку Добавить или выбрав нужные слова в соответствующем списке, находящимся ниже. Вы можете изменять список исключений в зависимости от используемого языка в выпадающем списке Исключение для языка.. Используйте кнопку Сбросить настройки, чтобы отменить все пользовательские изменения.." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", @@ -358,7 +363,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Сохранение, скачивание, печать документа", - "body": "Сохранение По умолчанию онлайн-редактор документов автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы сохранить текущий документ вручную в текущем формате и местоположении, нажмите значок Сохранить в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить. Чтобы не допустить потери данных в десктопной версии в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы, вы можете включить опцию Автовосстановление на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы в десктопной версии сохранить документ под другим именем, в другом местоположении или в другом формате, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить как, выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDF/A, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон документа DOTX или OTT. Скачивание Чтобы в онлайн-версии скачать готовый документ и сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Скачать как, выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. Сохранение копии Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию документа на портале, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить копию как, выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB, DOCXF, OFORM. выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить. Печать Чтобы распечатать текущий документ, нажмите значок Напечатать файл в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать. В браузере Firefox возможна печатать документа без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf. Также можно распечатать выделенный фрагмент текста с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное). В десктопной версии документ будет напрямую отправлен на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати." + "body": "Сохранение По умолчанию онлайн-редактор документов автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы сохранить текущий документ вручную в текущем формате и местоположении, нажмите значок Сохранить в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить. Чтобы не допустить потери данных в десктопной версии в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы, вы можете включить опцию Автовосстановление на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы в десктопной версии сохранить документ под другим именем, в другом местоположении или в другом формате, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить как, выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон документа DOTX или OTT. Скачивание Чтобы в онлайн-версии скачать готовый документ и сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Скачать как, выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG. Сохранение копии Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию документа на портале, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить копию как, выберите один из доступных форматов: DOCX, PDF, ODT, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, TXT, FB2, EPUB, HTML, JPG, PNG. выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить. Печать Чтобы распечатать текущий документ, нажмите значок Напечатать файл в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать. В браузере Firefox возможна печатать документа без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf. В открывшемся окне Печать настройте следующие параметры: Получатель — выберите получателя файла для печати, например, Сохранить в PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print в PDF, Fax и т.д. Ориентация - выберите опцию Книжная, если вы хотите печатать на странице вертикально, или выберите Альбомная для горизонтальной печати. Страницы - выберите один из вариантов печати страниц: Все, Текущая, Нечетные, < b>Четные или Диапазон. В последнем случае вам придется ввести количество страниц вручную. Цветной режим - выберите, хотите ли вы, чтобы ваш файл был напечатан в Цветном или в Черно-белом формате. Обратите внимание, что этот параметр доступен, если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Microsoft XPS Document Writer. Если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Fax, то по умолчанию задан цветовой режим Черно-белый. Нажмите на заголовок Все настройки, чтобы открыть дополнительные настройки. Размер бумаги — выберите один из доступных размеров из раскрывающегося списка или задайте пользовательский. Масштаб - выберите масштабирование файла при печати; вы можете выбрать опцию По ширине страницы или установить масштаб вручную с помощью переключателя Масштаб и соответствующего поля ввода рядом. Страниц на одном листе — выберите количество страниц, печатаемых на одном листе, например, две, шесть, девять и т.д. Поля — выберите поля страницы. Вы можете установить поля По умолчанию или пользовательские, измеряемые в милиметрах. Для пользовательских полей установите необходимые значения для верхнего, нижнего, левого и правого поля вручную. Вы также можете выбрать опцию Нет, чтобы не печатать поля. Настройки. Установите флажок у Печатать колонтитулы, чтобы они печатались, или снимите этот флажок, чтобы верхние и нижние колонтитулы не печатались. Печать, используя системный диалог – нажмите на этот заголовок, чтобы открыть системный диалог для настройки процесса печати. В десктопной версии документ будет напрямую отправлен на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати. Также можно распечатать выделенный фрагмент текста с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное). В онлайн-версии на основе документа будет создан PDF-файл. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его или сохранить на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать его позже. Некоторые браузеры (например, Chrome и Opera) поддерживают прямую печать." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", @@ -373,18 +378,13 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Настройка параметров страницы", - "body": "Чтобы изменить разметку страницы, а именно задать ориентацию и размер страницы, настроить поля и вставить колонки, используйте соответствующие значки на вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов. Примечание: все эти параметры применяются ко всему документу. Если вам нужно установить разные поля, ориентацию, размер страниц или количество колонок в разных частях документа, обратитесь к этой странице. Ориентация страницы Измените текущий тип ориентации, нажав на значок Ориентация. По умолчанию используется Портретный тип ориентации, который можно переключить на Альбомный. Размер страницы Измените используемый по умолчанию формат A4, нажав на значок Размер и выбрав нужный из списка. Доступны следующие предустановленные размеры: US Letter (21,59 см x 27,94 см) US Legal (21,59 см x 35,56 см) A4 (21 см x 29,7 см) A5 (14,81 см x 20,99 см) B5 (17,6 см x 25,01 см) Envelope #10 (10,48 см x 24,13 см) Envelope DL (11,01 см x 22,01 см) Tabloid (27,94 см x 43,17 см) AЗ (29,7 см x 42,01 см) Tabloid Oversize (30,48 см x 45,71 см) ROC 16K (19,68 см x 27,3 см) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99 см x 23,49 см) Super B/A3 (33,02 см x 48,25 см) Можно также задать нестандартный размер страницы, выбрав из списка опцию Особый размер страницы. Откроется окно Размер страницы, в котором можно будет выбрать нужную Предустановку (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) или указать произвольные значения Ширины и Высоты. Введите новые значения в поля ввода или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения.

          Поля страницы Измените используемые по умолчанию поля, то есть пустое пространство между левым, правым, верхним и нижним краями страницы и текстом абзаца, нажав на значок Поля и выбрав один из доступных предустановленных вариантов: Обычные, Обычные (американский стандарт), Узкие, Средние, Широкие. Можно также использовать опцию Настраиваемые поля и указать свои собственные значения в открывшемся окне Поля. Введите в поля ввода нужные значения для Верхнего, Нижнего, Левого и Правого полей страницы или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Положение переплета используется для установки дополнительного пространства слева или сверху документа. Функция Положение переплета может пригодиться, чтобы убедиться, что переплет книги или документа не закрывает текст. В окне Поля введите нужную длину переплета в поле ввода и выберите место, куда он будет помещен. Примечание: Когда выбрана опция Зеркальные поля, вы можете только изменить расстояние положения переплета, поскольку в данном случае он будет располагаться параллельно с двух противоположных сторон листа. В выпадающем списке Несколько страниц выберите опцию Зеркальные поля, чтобы настроить лицевые страницы для двусторонних документов. Когда выбрана данная опция, левые и правые поля превращаются в внутренние и внешние поля соответственно. В раскрывающемся меню Ориентация выберите Книжная или Альбомная. Все внесенные в документ изменения будут отображены в окне Предварительного просмотра. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Особые поля будут применены к текущему документу, а в списке Поля появится пункт Последние настраиваемые с указанными параметрами, чтобы можно было применить их к каким-то другим документам. Поля можно также изменить вручную, перемещая мышью границу между серой и белой областью на линейке (серые области на линейке обозначают поля страниц): Колонки Примените разметку с несколькими колонками, нажав на значок Колонки и выбрав из выпадающего списка нужный тип колонок. Доступны следующие варианты: Две - чтобы добавить две колонки одинаковой ширины, Три - чтобы добавить три колонки одинаковой ширины, Слева - чтобы добавить две колонки: узкую слева и широкую справа, Справа - чтобы добавить две колонки: узкую справа и широкую слева. Если требуется изменить параметры колонок, выберите из списка опцию Настраиваемые колонки. Откроется окно Колонки, в котором можно будет указать нужное Количество колонок (можно добавить не более 12 колонок) и Интервал между колонками. Введите новые значения в поля ввода или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Отметьте опцию Разделитель, чтобы добавить вертикальную линию между колонками. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения. Чтобы точно определить, где должна начинаться новая колонка, установите курсор перед текстом, который требуется перенести в новую колонку, нажмите на значок Разрывы на верхней панели инструментов, а затем выберите опцию Вставить разрыв колонки. Текст будет перенесен в следующую колонку. Добавленные разрывы колонок обозначаются в документе пунктирной линией: . Если вы не видите вставленных разрывов колонок, для их отображения нужно нажать на кнопку на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Для того чтобы убрать разрыв колонки, выделите его мышью и нажмите клавишу Delete. Чтобы вручную изменить ширину колонок и расстояние между ними, можно использовать горизонтальную линейку. Чтобы отменить разбиение на колонки и вернуться к обычной разметке с одной колонкой, нажмите на значок Колонки на верхней панели инструментов и выберите из списка опцию Одна ." + "body": "Чтобы изменить разметку страницы в Редакторе документов, а именно задать ориентацию и размер страницы, настроить поля и вставить колонки, используйте соответствующие значки на вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов. Примечание: все эти параметры применяются ко всему документу. Если вам нужно установить разные поля, ориентацию, размер страниц или количество колонок в разных частях документа, обратитесь к этой странице. Ориентация страницы Измените текущий тип ориентации, нажав на значок Ориентация. По умолчанию используется Портретный тип ориентации, который можно переключить на Альбомный. Размер страницы Измените используемый по умолчанию формат A4, нажав на значок Размер и выбрав нужный из списка. Доступны следующие предустановленные размеры: US Letter (21,59 см x 27,94 см) US Legal (21,59 см x 35,56 см) A4 (21 см x 29,7 см) A5 (14,81 см x 20,99 см) B5 (17,6 см x 25,01 см) Envelope #10 (10,48 см x 24,13 см) Envelope DL (11,01 см x 22,01 см) Tabloid (27,94 см x 43,17 см) AЗ (29,7 см x 42,01 см) Tabloid Oversize (30,48 см x 45,71 см) ROC 16K (19,68 см x 27,3 см) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99 см x 23,49 см) Super B/A3 (33,02 см x 48,25 см) Можно также задать нестандартный размер страницы, выбрав из списка опцию Особый размер страницы. Откроется окно Размер страницы, в котором можно будет выбрать нужную Предустановку (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) или указать произвольные значения Ширины и Высоты. Введите новые значения в поля ввода или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения.

          Поля страницы Измените используемые по умолчанию поля, то есть пустое пространство между левым, правым, верхним и нижним краями страницы и текстом абзаца, нажав на значок Поля и выбрав один из доступных предустановленных вариантов: Обычные, Обычные (американский стандарт), Узкие, Средние, Широкие. Можно также использовать опцию Настраиваемые поля и указать свои собственные значения в открывшемся окне Поля. Введите в поля ввода нужные значения для Верхнего, Нижнего, Левого и Правого полей страницы или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Положение переплета используется для установки дополнительного пространства слева или сверху документа. Функция Положение переплета может пригодиться, чтобы убедиться, что переплет книги или документа не закрывает текст. В окне Поля введите нужную длину переплета в поле ввода и выберите место, куда он будет помещен. Примечание: Когда выбрана опция Зеркальные поля, вы можете только изменить расстояние положения переплета, поскольку в данном случае он будет располагаться параллельно с двух противоположных сторон листа. В выпадающем списке Несколько страниц выберите опцию Зеркальные поля, чтобы настроить лицевые страницы для двусторонних документов. Когда выбрана данная опция, левые и правые поля превращаются в внутренние и внешние поля соответственно. В раскрывающемся меню Ориентация выберите Книжная или Альбомная. Все внесенные в документ изменения будут отображены в окне Предварительного просмотра. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Особые поля будут применены к текущему документу, а в списке Поля появится пункт Последние настраиваемые с указанными параметрами, чтобы можно было применить их к каким-то другим документам. Поля можно также изменить вручную, перемещая мышью границу между серой и белой областью на линейке (серые области на линейке обозначают поля страниц): Колонки Примените разметку с несколькими колонками, нажав на значок Колонки и выбрав из выпадающего списка нужный тип колонок. Доступны следующие варианты: Две - чтобы добавить две колонки одинаковой ширины, Три - чтобы добавить три колонки одинаковой ширины, Слева - чтобы добавить две колонки: узкую слева и широкую справа, Справа - чтобы добавить две колонки: узкую справа и широкую слева. Если требуется изменить параметры колонок, выберите из списка опцию Настраиваемые колонки. Откроется окно Колонки, в котором можно будет указать нужное Количество колонок (можно добавить не более 14 колонок), Ширину и Интервал между колонками. Введите новые значения в поля ввода или скорректируйте имеющиеся значения с помощью кнопок со стрелками. Отметьте опцию Столбцы одинаковой ширины, чтобы сделать ширину всех столбцов одинаковой. Отметьте опцию Разделитель, чтобы добавить вертикальную линию между колонками. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения. Чтобы точно определить, где должна начинаться новая колонка, установите курсор перед текстом, который требуется перенести в новую колонку, нажмите на значок Разрывы на верхней панели инструментов, а затем выберите опцию Вставить разрыв колонки. Текст будет перенесен в следующую колонку. Добавленные разрывы колонок обозначаются в документе пунктирной линией: . Если вы не видите вставленных разрывов колонок, для их отображения нужно нажать на кнопку на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Для того чтобы убрать разрыв колонки, выделите его мышью и нажмите клавишу Delete. Чтобы вручную изменить ширину колонок и расстояние между ними, можно использовать горизонтальную линейку. Чтобы отменить разбиение на колонки и вернуться к обычной разметке с одной колонкой, нажмите на значок Колонки на верхней панели инструментов и выберите из списка опцию Одна ." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", "title": "Установка позиций табуляции", "body": "В онлайн-редакторе документов можно изменить позиции табуляции, то есть те позиции, куда переходит курсор при нажатии клавиши Tab на клавиатуре. Для установки позиций табуляции можно использовать горизонтальную линейку: Выберите нужный тип позиции табуляции, нажав на кнопку в левом верхнем углу рабочей области. Доступны следующие три типа табуляции: По левому краю - выравнивает текст по левому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется вправо от позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . По центру - центрирует текст относительно позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . По правому краю - выравнивает текст по правому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется влево от позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . Щелкните по нижнему краю линейки в том месте, где требуется установить позицию табуляции. Для изменения местоположения позиции табуляции перетащите ее по линейке. Для удаления добавленной позиции табуляции перетащите ее за пределы линейки. Для настройки позиций табуляции можно также использовать окно свойств абзаца. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши, выберите в контекстном меню пункт Дополнительные параметры абзаца или используйте ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. В открывшемся окне Абзац - дополнительные параметры переключитесь на вкладку Табуляция. Можно задать следующие параметры: Позиция табуляции По умолчанию имеет значение 1.25 см. Это значение можно уменьшить или увеличить, используя кнопки со стрелками или введя в поле нужное значение. Позиция - используется, чтобы задать пользовательские позиции табуляции. Введите в этом поле нужное значение, настройте его более точно, используя кнопки со стрелками, и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Пользовательская позиция табуляции будет добавлена в список в расположенном ниже поле. Если ранее Вы добавили какие-то позиции табуляции при помощи линейки, все эти позиции тоже будут отображены в списке. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы задать нужный тип выравнивания для каждой из позиций табуляции в расположенном выше списке. Выделите нужную позицию табуляции в списке, выберите опцию По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю из выпадающего списка и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Заполнитель - позволяет выбрать символ, который используется для создания заполнителя для каждой из позиций табуляции. Заполнитель - это строка символов (точек или дефисов), заполняющая пространство между позициями табуляции. Выделите нужную позицию табуляции в списке, выберите тип заполнителя из выпадающего списка и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Для удаления позиций табуляции из списка выделите позицию табуляции и нажмите кнопку Удалить или Удалить все." }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Поддержка SmartArt в редакторе документов ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Редактор документов ONLYOFFICE поддерживает графические объекты SmartArt, добавленную с помощью сторонних редакторов. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий SmartArt, и редактировать его как графический объект с помощью доступных инструментов. Если выделить графический объект SmartArt или его элемент, на правой боковой панели станут доступны следующие вкладки: Параметры абзаца - для редактирования отступов и интервалов, положения на странице, границ и заливки, шрифтов, табуляций и внутренних полей. Обратитесь к разделу Форматирование абзаца для подробного описания каждого параметра. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. Параметры фигуры - для редактирования фигур, используемых в макете. Вы можете изменять размер формы, редактировать заливку, контур, толщину, стиль обтекания, положение, линии и стрелки, текстовое поле и альтернативный текст. Параметры объекта Text Art - для редактирования стиля Text Art, который используется SmartArt для выделения текста. Вы можете изменить шаблон Text Art, тип заливки, цвет и непрозрачность, толщину линии, цвет и тип. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по SmartArt или по границе данного элемента, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования: Стиль оптекания - для определения способа расположения объекта относительно текста. Параметр Стиль обтекания доступен после щелчка по границе графического объекта SmartArt. Вставить название - для добавления возможности ссылаться на графический объект SmartArt в документе. Дополнительные параметры фигуры - для доступа к дополнительным параметрам форматирования фигуры. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по графическому объекту SmartArt, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования текста: Выравнивание по вертикали - для выбрать выравнивание текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Выровнять по верхнему краю, Выровнять по середине, Выровнять по нижнему краю. Направление текста - выбрать направление направления текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Горизонтальное, Повернуть текст вниз, Повернуть текст вверх. Обратитесь к Дополнительным параметрам абзаца, чтобы получить информацию о дополнительных параметрах форматирования абзаца." - }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "title": "Использование слияния", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css index c4ea4bce08..d1977425a6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ html{ - overflow: scroll; + overflow: auto; scrollbar-track-color: #eee; scrollbar-face-color: #f7f7f7; scrollbar-highlight-color: #eee; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css index f9ec3918c6..32cb90f217 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css @@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/clear-style.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-clear-style.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/clear-style.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-clear-style.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/next-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-next-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/next-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-next-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/previous-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-previous-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/previous-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-previous-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/save-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-save-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/save-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-save-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/submit-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-submit-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/submit-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.25x/big/btn-submit-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/clear-style.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-clear-style.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/clear-style.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-clear-style.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/next-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-next-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/next-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-next-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/previous-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-previous-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/previous-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-previous-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/save-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-save-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/save-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-save-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/submit-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-submit-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/submit-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.5x/big/btn-submit-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/clear-style.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-clear-style.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/clear-style.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-clear-style.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/next-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-next-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/next-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-next-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/previous-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-previous-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/previous-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-previous-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/save-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-save-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/save-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-save-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/submit-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-submit-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/submit-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1.75x/big/btn-submit-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/clear-style.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-clear-style.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/clear-style.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-clear-style.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/next-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-next-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/next-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-next-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/previous-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-previous-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/previous-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-previous-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/save-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-save-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/save-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-save-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/submit-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-submit-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/submit-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/1x/big/btn-submit-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/clear-style.svg b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-clear-style.svg similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/clear-style.svg rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-clear-style.svg diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/next-field.svg b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-next-field.svg similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/next-field.svg rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-next-field.svg diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/previous-field.svg b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-previous-field.svg similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/previous-field.svg rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-previous-field.svg diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/save-form.svg b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-save-form.svg similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/save-form.svg rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-save-form.svg diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/submit-form.svg b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-submit-form.svg similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/submit-form.svg rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2.5x/big/btn-submit-form.svg diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/clear-style.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-clear-style.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/clear-style.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-clear-style.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/next-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-next-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/next-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-next-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/previous-field.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-previous-field.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/previous-field.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-previous-field.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/save-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-save-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/save-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-save-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/submit-form.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-submit-form.png similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/submit-form.png rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/img/toolbar/2x/big/btn-submit-form.png diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/az.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/az.json index 0cf6dddc6b..f0747dda01 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/az.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/az.json @@ -237,6 +237,7 @@ "textCancel": "Ləğv", "textCellMargins": "Xanalardakı Kənar Boşluqlar", "textCentered": "Mərkəzlənmiş", + "textChangeShape": "Formanı dəyiş", "textChart": "Diaqram", "textClose": "Bağlayın", "textColor": "Rəng", @@ -324,7 +325,6 @@ "textAmountOfLevels": "Amount of Levels", "textApril": "April", "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClassic": "Classic", "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", "textCurrent": "Current", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/be.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/be.json index db7a974a05..fccf100078 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/be.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/be.json @@ -234,6 +234,7 @@ "textBringToForeground": "Перанесці на пярэдні план", "textBullets": "Адзнакі", "textCellMargins": "Палі ячэйкі", + "textChangeShape": "Змяніць фігуру", "textChart": "Дыяграма", "textClose": "Закрыць", "textColor": "Колер", @@ -340,7 +341,6 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCentered": "Centered", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClassic": "Classic", "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", "textCurrent": "Current", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json index 24e506f265..a302e0f1f4 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json @@ -1,13 +1,184 @@ { + "Edit": { + "textChangeShape": "Промяна на форма", + "textRemoveShape": "Премахване на формата", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "textActualSize": "Actual size", + "textAddCustomColor": "Add custom color", + "textAdditional": "Additional", + "textAdditionalFormatting": "Additional formatting", + "textAddress": "Address", + "textAdvanced": "Advanced", + "textAdvancedSettings": "Advanced settings", + "textAfter": "After", + "textAlign": "Align", + "textAllCaps": "All caps", + "textAllowOverlap": "Allow overlap", + "textAmountOfLevels": "Amount of Levels", + "textApril": "April", + "textArrange": "Arrange", + "textAugust": "August", + "textAuto": "Auto", + "textAutomatic": "Automatic", + "textBack": "Back", + "textBackground": "Background", + "textBandedColumn": "Banded column", + "textBandedRow": "Banded row", + "textBefore": "Before", + "textBehind": "Behind Text", + "textBorder": "Border", + "textBringToForeground": "Bring to Foreground", + "textBullets": "Bullets", + "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", + "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textCellMargins": "Cell Margins", + "textCentered": "Centered", + "textChart": "Chart", + "textClassic": "Classic", + "textClose": "Close", + "textColor": "Color", + "textContinueFromPreviousSection": "Continue from previous section", + "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", + "textCurrent": "Current", + "textCustomColor": "Custom Color", + "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", + "textDecember": "December", + "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", + "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", + "textDesign": "Design", + "textDifferentFirstPage": "Different first page", + "textDifferentOddAndEvenPages": "Different odd and even pages", + "textDisplay": "Display", + "textDistanceFromText": "Distance from text", + "textDistinctive": "Distinctive", + "textDone": "Done", + "textDoubleStrikethrough": "Double Strikethrough", + "textEditLink": "Edit Link", + "textEffects": "Effects", + "textEmpty": "Empty", + "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify image URL.", + "textEnterTitleNewStyle": "Enter title of a new style", + "textFebruary": "February", + "textFill": "Fill", + "textFirstColumn": "First Column", + "textFirstLine": "First Line", + "textFlow": "Flow", + "textFontColor": "Font Color", + "textFontColors": "Font Colors", + "textFonts": "Fonts", + "textFooter": "Footer", + "textFormal": "Formal", + "textFr": "Fr", + "textHeader": "Header", + "textHeaderRow": "Header Row", + "textHighlightColor": "Highlight Color", + "textHyperlink": "Hyperlink", + "textImage": "Image", + "textImageURL": "Image URL", + "textInFront": "In Front of Text", + "textInline": "In Line with Text", + "textJanuary": "January", + "textJuly": "July", + "textJune": "June", + "textKeepLinesTogether": "Keep Lines Together", + "textKeepWithNext": "Keep with Next", + "textLastColumn": "Last Column", + "textLeader": "Leader", + "textLetterSpacing": "Letter Spacing", + "textLevels": "Levels", + "textLineSpacing": "Line Spacing", + "textLink": "Link", + "textLinkSettings": "Link Settings", + "textLinkToPrevious": "Link to Previous", + "textMarch": "March", + "textMay": "May", + "textMo": "Mo", + "textModern": "Modern", + "textMoveBackward": "Move Backward", + "textMoveForward": "Move Forward", + "textMoveWithText": "Move with Text", + "textNextParagraphStyle": "Next paragraph style", + "textNone": "None", + "textNoStyles": "No styles for this type of charts.", + "textNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", + "textNovember": "November", + "textNumbers": "Numbers", + "textOctober": "October", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textOnline": "Online", + "textOpacity": "Opacity", + "textOptions": "Options", + "textOrphanControl": "Orphan Control", + "textPageBreakBefore": "Page Break Before", + "textPageNumbering": "Page Numbering", + "textPageNumbers": "Page Numbers", + "textParagraph": "Paragraph", + "textParagraphStyle": "Paragraph Style", + "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", + "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", + "textPt": "pt", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", + "textRefresh": "Refresh", + "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", + "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", + "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", + "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", + "textRemoveTableContent": "Remove table of contents", + "textRepeatAsHeaderRow": "Repeat as Header Row", + "textReplace": "Replace", + "textReplaceImage": "Replace Image", + "textRequired": "Required", + "textResizeToFitContent": "Resize to Fit Content", + "textRightAlign": "Right Align", + "textSa": "Sa", + "textSameCreatedNewStyle": "Same as created new style", + "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", + "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", + "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", + "textSeptember": "September", + "textSettings": "Settings", + "textShape": "Shape", + "textSimple": "Simple", + "textSize": "Size", + "textSmallCaps": "Small Caps", + "textSpaceBetweenParagraphs": "Space Between Paragraphs", + "textSquare": "Square", + "textStandard": "Standard", + "textStartAt": "Start at", + "textStrikethrough": "Strikethrough", + "textStructure": "Structure", + "textStyle": "Style", + "textStyleOptions": "Style Options", + "textStyles": "Styles", + "textSu": "Su", + "textSubscript": "Subscript", + "textSuperscript": "Superscript", + "textTable": "Table", + "textTableOfCont": "TOC", + "textTableOptions": "Table Options", + "textText": "Text", + "textTextWrapping": "Text Wrapping", + "textTh": "Th", + "textThrough": "Through", + "textTight": "Tight", + "textTitle": "Title", + "textTopAndBottom": "Top and Bottom", + "textTotalRow": "Total Row", + "textTu": "Tu", + "textType": "Type", + "textWe": "We", + "textWrap": "Wrap", + "textWrappingStyle": "Wrapping Style" + }, "About": { "textAbout": "About", "textAddress": "Address", "textBack": "Back", + "textEditor": "Document Editor", "textEmail": "Email", "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", "textTel": "Tel", - "textVersion": "Version", - "textEditor": "Document Editor" + "textVersion": "Version" }, "Add": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", @@ -26,6 +197,7 @@ "textContinuousPage": "Continuous Page", "textCurrentPosition": "Current Position", "textDisplay": "Display", + "textDone": "Done", "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify image URL.", "textEvenPage": "Even Page", "textFootnote": "Footnote", @@ -42,12 +214,16 @@ "textLocation": "Location", "textNextPage": "Next Page", "textOddPage": "Odd Page", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOther": "Other", "textPageBreak": "Page Break", "textPageNumber": "Page Number", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", "textPosition": "Position", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", + "textRequired": "Required", "textRightBottom": "Right Bottom", "textRightTop": "Right Top", "textRows": "Rows", @@ -56,16 +232,11 @@ "textShape": "Shape", "textStartAt": "Start At", "textTable": "Table", - "textTableSize": "Table Size", - "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", - "textOk": "Ok", "textTableContents": "Table of Contents", - "textWithPageNumbers": "With Page Numbers", + "textTableSize": "Table Size", "textWithBlueLinks": "With Blue Links", - "textDone": "Done", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "textWithPageNumbers": "With Page Numbers", + "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"" }, "Common": { "Collaboration": { @@ -124,13 +295,14 @@ "textMultiple": "multiple", "textNoBreakBefore": "No page break before", "textNoChanges": "There are no changes.", - "textNoComments": "This document doesn't contain comments", + "textNoComments": "No Comments", "textNoContextual": "Add interval between paragraphs of the same style", "textNoKeepLines": "Don't keep lines together", "textNoKeepNext": "Don't keep with next", "textNot": "Not ", "textNoWidow": "No widow control", "textNum": "Change numbering", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOriginal": "Original", "textParaDeleted": "Paragraph Deleted", "textParaFormatted": "Paragraph Formatted", @@ -147,6 +319,7 @@ "textReviewChange": "Review Change", "textRight": "Align right", "textShape": "Shape", + "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings", "textShd": "Background color", "textSmallCaps": "Small caps", "textSpacing": "Spacing", @@ -163,17 +336,15 @@ "textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.", "textUnderline": "Underline", "textUsers": "Users", - "textWidow": "Widow control", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings" + "textWidow": "Widow control" + }, + "HighlightColorPalette": { + "textNoFill": "No Fill" }, "ThemeColorPalette": { "textCustomColors": "Custom Colors", "textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", "textThemeColors": "Theme Colors" - }, - "HighlightColorPalette": { - "textNoFill": "No Fill" } }, "ContextMenu": { @@ -181,207 +352,32 @@ "menuAddComment": "Add comment", "menuAddLink": "Add link", "menuCancel": "Cancel", + "menuContinueNumbering": "Continue numbering", "menuDelete": "Delete", "menuDeleteTable": "Delete Table", "menuEdit": "Edit", + "menuEditLink": "Edit Link", + "menuJoinList": "Join to previous list", "menuMerge": "Merge", "menuMore": "More", "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", "menuReview": "Review", "menuReviewChange": "Review Change", + "menuSeparateList": "Separate list", "menuSplit": "Split", + "menuStartNewList": "Start new list", + "menuStartNumberingFrom": "Set numbering value", "menuViewComment": "View Comment", + "textCancel": "Cancel", "textColumns": "Columns", "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", - "textRows": "Rows", - "menuStartNewList": "Start new list", - "menuStartNumberingFrom": "Set numbering value", - "menuContinueNumbering": "Continue numbering", - "menuSeparateList": "Separate list", - "menuJoinList": "Join to previous list", - "textOk": "OK", - "textCancel": "Cancel", "textNumberingValue": "Numbering Value", + "textOk": "OK", "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", - "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
          Are you sure you want to continue?", - "menuEditLink": "Edit Link" - }, - "Edit": { - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "textActualSize": "Actual size", - "textAddCustomColor": "Add custom color", - "textAdditional": "Additional", - "textAdditionalFormatting": "Additional formatting", - "textAddress": "Address", - "textAdvanced": "Advanced", - "textAdvancedSettings": "Advanced settings", - "textAfter": "After", - "textAlign": "Align", - "textAllCaps": "All caps", - "textAllowOverlap": "Allow overlap", - "textAuto": "Auto", - "textAutomatic": "Automatic", - "textBack": "Back", - "textBackground": "Background", - "textBandedColumn": "Banded column", - "textBandedRow": "Banded row", - "textBefore": "Before", - "textBehind": "Behind", - "textBorder": "Border", - "textBringToForeground": "Bring to foreground", - "textBullets": "Bullets", - "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", - "textCellMargins": "Cell Margins", - "textChart": "Chart", - "textClose": "Close", - "textColor": "Color", - "textContinueFromPreviousSection": "Continue from previous section", - "textCustomColor": "Custom Color", - "textDifferentFirstPage": "Different first page", - "textDifferentOddAndEvenPages": "Different odd and even pages", - "textDisplay": "Display", - "textDistanceFromText": "Distance from text", - "textDoubleStrikethrough": "Double Strikethrough", - "textEditLink": "Edit Link", - "textEffects": "Effects", - "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify image URL.", - "textFill": "Fill", - "textFirstColumn": "First Column", - "textFirstLine": "FirstLine", - "textFlow": "Flow", - "textFontColor": "Font Color", - "textFontColors": "Font Colors", - "textFonts": "Fonts", - "textFooter": "Footer", - "textHeader": "Header", - "textHeaderRow": "Header Row", - "textHighlightColor": "Highlight Color", - "textHyperlink": "Hyperlink", - "textImage": "Image", - "textImageURL": "Image URL", - "textInFront": "In Front", - "textInline": "Inline", - "textKeepLinesTogether": "Keep Lines Together", - "textKeepWithNext": "Keep with Next", - "textLastColumn": "Last Column", - "textLetterSpacing": "Letter Spacing", - "textLineSpacing": "Line Spacing", - "textLink": "Link", - "textLinkSettings": "Link Settings", - "textLinkToPrevious": "Link to Previous", - "textMoveBackward": "Move Backward", - "textMoveForward": "Move Forward", - "textMoveWithText": "Move with Text", - "textNone": "None", - "textNoStyles": "No styles for this type of charts.", - "textNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", - "textOpacity": "Opacity", - "textOptions": "Options", - "textOrphanControl": "Orphan Control", - "textPageBreakBefore": "Page Break Before", - "textPageNumbering": "Page Numbering", - "textParagraph": "Paragraph", - "textParagraphStyles": "Paragraph Styles", - "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", - "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", - "textPt": "pt", - "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveImage": "Remove Image", - "textRemoveLink": "Remove Link", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", - "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", - "textReorder": "Reorder", - "textRepeatAsHeaderRow": "Repeat as Header Row", - "textReplace": "Replace", - "textReplaceImage": "Replace Image", - "textResizeToFitContent": "Resize to Fit Content", - "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", - "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", - "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", - "textSettings": "Settings", - "textShape": "Shape", - "textSize": "Size", - "textSmallCaps": "Small Caps", - "textSpaceBetweenParagraphs": "Space Between Paragraphs", - "textSquare": "Square", - "textStartAt": "Start at", - "textStrikethrough": "Strikethrough", - "textStyle": "Style", - "textStyleOptions": "Style Options", - "textSubscript": "Subscript", - "textSuperscript": "Superscript", - "textTable": "Table", - "textTableOptions": "Table Options", - "textText": "Text", - "textThrough": "Through", - "textTight": "Tight", - "textTopAndBottom": "Top and Bottom", - "textTotalRow": "Total Row", - "textType": "Type", - "textWrap": "Wrap", - "textNumbers": "Numbers", - "textDesign": "Design", - "textSu": "Su", - "textMo": "Mo", - "textTu": "Tu", - "textWe": "We", - "textTh": "Th", - "textFr": "Fr", - "textSa": "Sa", - "textJanuary": "January", - "textFebruary": "February", - "textMarch": "March", - "textApril": "April", - "textMay": "May", - "textJune": "June", - "textJuly": "July", - "textAugust": "August", - "textSeptember": "September", - "textOctober": "October", - "textNovember": "November", - "textDecember": "December", - "textEmpty": "Empty", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textTableOfCont": "TOC", - "textPageNumbers": "Page Numbers", - "textSimple": "Simple", - "textRightAlign": "Right Align", - "textLeader": "Leader", - "textStructure": "Structure", - "textRefresh": "Refresh", - "textLevels": "Levels", - "textRemoveTableContent": "Remove table of content", - "textCurrent": "Current", - "textOnline": "Online", - "textClassic": "Classic", - "textDistinctive": "Distinctive", - "textCentered": "Centered", - "textFormal": "Formal", - "textStandard": "Standard", - "textModern": "Modern", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", - "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", - "textStyles": "Styles", - "textAmountOfLevels": "Amount of Levels", - "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", - "textDone": "Done", - "textTitle": "Title", - "textEnterTitleNewStyle": "Enter title of a new style", - "textNextParagraphStyle": "Next paragraph style", - "textSameCreatedNewStyle": "Same as created new style", - "textParagraphStyle": "Paragraph Style", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textTextWrapping": "Text Wrapping", - "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", - "textWrappingStyle": "Wrapping Style", - "textArrange": "Arrange" + "textRows": "Rows", + "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
          Are you sure you want to continue?" }, "Error": { "convertationTimeoutText": "Conversion timeout exceeded.", @@ -389,27 +385,40 @@ "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", "downloadErrorText": "Download failed.", "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
          Please, contact your admin.", - "errorBadImageUrl": "Image url is incorrect", + "errorBadImageUrl": "Image URL is incorrect", "errorConnectToServer": "Can't save this doc. Check your connection settings or contact the admin.
          When you click OK, you will be prompted to download the document.", "errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
          Database connection error. Please, contact support.", "errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", "errorDataRange": "Incorrect data range.", "errorDefaultMessage": "Error code: %1", + "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
          This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", "errorEditingDownloadas": "An error occurred during the work with the document.
          Download document to save the file backup copy locally.", + "errorEmptyTOC": "Start creating a table of contents by applying a heading style from the Styles gallery to the selected text.", "errorFilePassProtect": "The file is password protected and could not be opened.", "errorFileSizeExceed": "The file size exceeds your server limit.
          Please, contact your admin.", + "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content does not match the file extension.", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", "errorKeyEncrypt": "Unknown key descriptor", "errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", + "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", "errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Loading failed", "errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Merge failed.", + "errorNoTOC": "There's no table of contents to update. You can insert one from the References tab.", + "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization.", "errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please, reload the page.", "errorSessionIdle": "The document has not been edited for quite a long time. Please, reload the page.", "errorSessionToken": "The connection to the server has been interrupted. Please, reload the page.", "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
          opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", - "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internet connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
          Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", + "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "The value entered does not match the format of the field.", + "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
          Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", "errorUserDrop": "The file can't be accessed right now.", "errorUsersExceed": "The number of users allowed by the pricing plan was exceeded", - "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
          but you won't be able to download it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", + "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
          but you won't be able to download or print it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "openErrorText": "An error has occurred while opening the file", "saveErrorText": "An error has occurred while saving the file", @@ -420,24 +429,12 @@ "unknownErrorText": "Unknown error.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Unknown image format.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No images uploaded.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB.", - "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorEmptyTOC": "Start creating a table of contents by applying a heading style from the Styles gallery to the selected text.", - "errorNoTOC": "There's no table of contents to update. You can insert one from the References tab.", - "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "The value entered does not match the format of the field.", - "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
          This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB." }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "Loading data...", "applyChangesTitleText": "Loading Data", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", "downloadMergeText": "Downloading...", "downloadMergeTitle": "Downloading", "downloadTextText": "Downloading document...", @@ -464,14 +461,13 @@ "saveTitleText": "Saving Document", "sendMergeText": "Sending Merge...", "sendMergeTitle": "Sending Merge", + "textContinue": "Continue", "textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", + "textUndo": "Undo", "txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", "uploadImageTextText": "Uploading image...", "uploadImageTitleText": "Uploading Image", - "waitText": "Please, wait...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", - "textUndo": "Undo", - "textContinue": "Continue" + "waitText": "Please, wait..." }, "Main": { "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", @@ -549,41 +545,39 @@ "textClose": "Close", "textContactUs": "Contact sales", "textCustomLoader": "Sorry, you are not entitled to change the loader. Contact our sales department to get a quote.", + "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "You may edit this document, but all changes will be tracked", + "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", + "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", + "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", + "textDocumentProtected": "The document is protected. Edit settings are not available", "textGuest": "Guest", "textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
          Do you want to run macros?", "textNo": "No", "textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", "textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", "textRemember": "Remember my choice", + "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", + "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", + "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", "textYes": "Yes", + "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", "titleLicenseExp": "License expired", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", "titleServerVersion": "Editor updated", "titleUpdateVersion": "Version changed", + "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
          Please contact your administrator.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact your administrator to learn more.", "warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired. Please, update your license and refresh the page.", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "License expired. You have no access to document editing functionality. Please, contact your admin.", - "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "The license needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
          Please contact your administrator to get full access", + "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "License needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
          Please contact your administrator to get full access", "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", "warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit this file.", - "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", - "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", - "textDocumentProtected": "The document is protected. Edit settings are not available", - "textOk": "Ok", - "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
          Please contact your administrator.", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", - "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", - "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", - "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "You may edit this document, but all changes will be tracked", - "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit this file." }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "Protected File", @@ -596,10 +590,14 @@ "textApplicationSettings": "Application Settings", "textAuthor": "Author", "textBack": "Back", + "textBeginningDocument": "Beginning of document", "textBottom": "Bottom", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCaseSensitive": "Case Sensitive", "textCentimeter": "Centimeter", + "textChangePassword": "Change Password", + "textChooseEncoding": "Choose Encoding", + "textChooseTxtOptions": "Choose TXT Options", "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", "textColorSchemes": "Color Schemes", "textComment": "Comment", @@ -607,6 +605,8 @@ "textCommentsDisplay": "Comments Display", "textCreated": "Created", "textCustomSize": "Custom Size", + "textDialogUnprotect": "Enter a password to unprotect document", + "textDirection": "Direction", "textDisableAll": "Disable All", "textDisableAllMacrosWithNotification": "Disable all macros with notification", "textDisableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Disable all macros without notification", @@ -618,9 +618,15 @@ "textDownloadAs": "Download As", "textDownloadRtf": "If you continue saving in this format some of the formatting might be lost. Are you sure you want to continue?", "textDownloadTxt": "If you continue saving in this format all features except the text will be lost. Are you sure you want to continue?", + "textEmptyHeading": "Empty Heading", + "textEmptyScreens": "There are no headings in the document. Apply a headings style to the text so that it appears in the table of contents.", "textEnableAll": "Enable All", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Enable all macros without notification", "textEncoding": "Encoding", + "textEncryptFile": "Encrypt File", + "textFastWV": "Fast Web View", + "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", + "textFillingForms": "Filling forms", "textFind": "Find", "textFindAndReplace": "Find and Replace", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "Find and Replace All", @@ -633,36 +639,70 @@ "textLastModified": "Last Modified", "textLastModifiedBy": "Last Modified By", "textLeft": "Left", + "textLeftToRight": "Left To Right", "textLoading": "Loading...", "textLocation": "Location", "textMacrosSettings": "Macros Settings", "textMargins": "Margins", "textMarginsH": "Top and bottom margins are too high for a given page height", "textMarginsW": "Left and right margins are too wide for a given page width", + "textMobileView": "Mobile View", + "textNavigation": "Navigation", + "textNo": "No", + "textNoChanges": "No changes (Read only)", "textNoCharacters": "Nonprinting Characters", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOpenFile": "Enter a password to open the file", "textOrientation": "Orientation", "textOwner": "Owner", + "textPages": "Pages", + "textPageSize": "Page Size", + "textParagraphs": "Paragraphs", + "textPassword": "Password", + "textPasswordNotMatched": "Passwords Don’t Match", + "textPdfProducer": "PDF Producer", + "textPdfTagged": "Tagged PDF", + "textPdfVer": "PDF Version", "textPoint": "Point", "textPortrait": "Portrait", "textPrint": "Print", + "textProtectDocument": "Protect Document", + "textProtection": "Protection", + "textProtectTurnOff": "Protection is turned off", "textReaderMode": "Reader Mode", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", + "textRequired": "Required", + "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", "textResolvedComments": "Resolved Comments", + "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", "textRight": "Right", + "textRightToLeft": "Right To Left", + "textSave": "Save", "textSearch": "Search", + "textSetPassword": "Set Password", "textSettings": "Settings", "textShowNotification": "Show Notification", + "textSpaces": "Spaces", "textSpellcheck": "Spell Checking", "textStatistic": "Statistic", "textSubject": "Subject", + "textSymbols": "Symbols", "textTitle": "Title", "textTop": "Top", + "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", + "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", "textUnitOfMeasurement": "Unit Of Measurement", + "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", "textUploaded": "Uploaded", + "textVerify": "Verify", + "textWords": "Words", + "textYes": "Yes", + "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document", + "txtDownloadTxt": "Download TXT", "txtIncorrectPwd": "Password is incorrect", + "txtOk": "Ok", "txtProtected": "Once you enter the password and open the file, the current password will be reset", "txtScheme1": "Office", "txtScheme10": "Median", @@ -685,55 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Concourse", "txtScheme7": "Equity", "txtScheme8": "Flow", - "txtScheme9": "Foundry", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textChooseEncoding": "Choose Encoding", - "textChooseTxtOptions": "Choose TXT Options", - "txtDownloadTxt": "Download TXT", - "txtOk": "Ok", - "textPages": "Pages", - "textParagraphs": "Paragraphs", - "textSpaces": "Spaces", - "textSymbols": "Symbols", - "textWords": "Words", - "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", - "textNavigation": "Navigation", - "textEmptyScreens": "There are no headings in the document. Apply a headings style to the text so that it appeas in the table of cotents.", - "textBeginningDocument": "Beginning of document", - "textEmptyHeading": "Empty Heading", - "textPageSize": "Page Size", - "textPdfVer": "PDF Version", - "textPdfTagged": "Tagged PDF", - "textFastWV": "Fast Web View", - "textYes": "Yes", - "textNo": "No", - "textPdfProducer": "PDF Producer", - "textDirection": "Direction", - "textLeftToRight": "Left To Right", - "textRightToLeft": "Right To Left", - "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", - "textMobileView": "Mobile View", - "textProtection": "Protection", - "textProtectDocument": "Protect Document", - "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document", - "textDialogUnprotect": "Enter a password to unprotect document", - "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", - "textProtectTurnOff": "Protect turn off", - "textSetPassword": "Set Password", - "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", - "textNoChanges": "No changes (Read only)", - "textFillingForms": "Filling forms", - "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", - "textPassword": "Password", - "textVerify": "Verify", - "textSave": "Save", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textPasswordNotMatched": "Passwords Don’t Match", - "textEncryptFile": "Encrypt File", - "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", - "textChangePassword": "Change Password", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Foundry" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "You have unsaved changes. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/da.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/da.json index 24e506f265..70672b6c72 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/da.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/da.json @@ -1,15 +1,6 @@ { - "About": { - "textAbout": "About", - "textAddress": "Address", - "textBack": "Back", - "textEmail": "Email", - "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", - "textTel": "Tel", - "textVersion": "Version", - "textEditor": "Document Editor" - }, "Add": { + "textShape": "Figur", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAddLink": "Add link", "textAddress": "Address", @@ -26,6 +17,7 @@ "textContinuousPage": "Continuous Page", "textCurrentPosition": "Current Position", "textDisplay": "Display", + "textDone": "Done", "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify image URL.", "textEvenPage": "Even Page", "textFootnote": "Footnote", @@ -42,33 +34,32 @@ "textLocation": "Location", "textNextPage": "Next Page", "textOddPage": "Odd Page", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOther": "Other", "textPageBreak": "Page Break", "textPageNumber": "Page Number", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", "textPosition": "Position", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", + "textRequired": "Required", "textRightBottom": "Right Bottom", "textRightTop": "Right Top", "textRows": "Rows", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", "textSectionBreak": "Section Break", - "textShape": "Shape", "textStartAt": "Start At", "textTable": "Table", - "textTableSize": "Table Size", - "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", - "textOk": "Ok", "textTableContents": "Table of Contents", - "textWithPageNumbers": "With Page Numbers", + "textTableSize": "Table Size", "textWithBlueLinks": "With Blue Links", - "textDone": "Done", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "textWithPageNumbers": "With Page Numbers", + "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"" }, "Common": { "Collaboration": { + "textShape": "Figur", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAccept": "Accept", "textAcceptAllChanges": "Accept all changes", @@ -124,13 +115,14 @@ "textMultiple": "multiple", "textNoBreakBefore": "No page break before", "textNoChanges": "There are no changes.", - "textNoComments": "This document doesn't contain comments", + "textNoComments": "No Comments", "textNoContextual": "Add interval between paragraphs of the same style", "textNoKeepLines": "Don't keep lines together", "textNoKeepNext": "Don't keep with next", "textNot": "Not ", "textNoWidow": "No widow control", "textNum": "Change numbering", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOriginal": "Original", "textParaDeleted": "Paragraph Deleted", "textParaFormatted": "Paragraph Formatted", @@ -146,7 +138,7 @@ "textReview": "Review", "textReviewChange": "Review Change", "textRight": "Align right", - "textShape": "Shape", + "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings", "textShd": "Background color", "textSmallCaps": "Small caps", "textSpacing": "Spacing", @@ -163,52 +155,21 @@ "textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.", "textUnderline": "Underline", "textUsers": "Users", - "textWidow": "Widow control", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings" + "textWidow": "Widow control" + }, + "HighlightColorPalette": { + "textNoFill": "No Fill" }, "ThemeColorPalette": { "textCustomColors": "Custom Colors", "textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", "textThemeColors": "Theme Colors" - }, - "HighlightColorPalette": { - "textNoFill": "No Fill" } }, - "ContextMenu": { - "errorCopyCutPaste": "Copy, cut and paste actions using the context menu will be performed within the current file only.", - "menuAddComment": "Add comment", - "menuAddLink": "Add link", - "menuCancel": "Cancel", - "menuDelete": "Delete", - "menuDeleteTable": "Delete Table", - "menuEdit": "Edit", - "menuMerge": "Merge", - "menuMore": "More", - "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", - "menuReview": "Review", - "menuReviewChange": "Review Change", - "menuSplit": "Split", - "menuViewComment": "View Comment", - "textColumns": "Columns", - "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", - "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", - "textRows": "Rows", - "menuStartNewList": "Start new list", - "menuStartNumberingFrom": "Set numbering value", - "menuContinueNumbering": "Continue numbering", - "menuSeparateList": "Separate list", - "menuJoinList": "Join to previous list", - "textOk": "OK", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textNumberingValue": "Numbering Value", - "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", - "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", - "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
          Are you sure you want to continue?", - "menuEditLink": "Edit Link" - }, "Edit": { + "textChangeShape": "Skift form", + "textRemoveShape": "Fjern figur", + "textShape": "Figur", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textActualSize": "Actual size", "textAddCustomColor": "Add custom color", @@ -221,6 +182,10 @@ "textAlign": "Align", "textAllCaps": "All caps", "textAllowOverlap": "Allow overlap", + "textAmountOfLevels": "Amount of Levels", + "textApril": "April", + "textArrange": "Arrange", + "textAugust": "August", "textAuto": "Auto", "textAutomatic": "Automatic", "textBack": "Back", @@ -228,160 +193,191 @@ "textBandedColumn": "Banded column", "textBandedRow": "Banded row", "textBefore": "Before", - "textBehind": "Behind", + "textBehind": "Behind Text", "textBorder": "Border", - "textBringToForeground": "Bring to foreground", + "textBringToForeground": "Bring to Foreground", "textBullets": "Bullets", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", + "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCellMargins": "Cell Margins", + "textCentered": "Centered", "textChart": "Chart", + "textClassic": "Classic", "textClose": "Close", "textColor": "Color", "textContinueFromPreviousSection": "Continue from previous section", + "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", + "textCurrent": "Current", "textCustomColor": "Custom Color", + "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", + "textDecember": "December", + "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", + "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", + "textDesign": "Design", "textDifferentFirstPage": "Different first page", "textDifferentOddAndEvenPages": "Different odd and even pages", "textDisplay": "Display", "textDistanceFromText": "Distance from text", + "textDistinctive": "Distinctive", + "textDone": "Done", "textDoubleStrikethrough": "Double Strikethrough", "textEditLink": "Edit Link", "textEffects": "Effects", + "textEmpty": "Empty", "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify image URL.", + "textEnterTitleNewStyle": "Enter title of a new style", + "textFebruary": "February", "textFill": "Fill", "textFirstColumn": "First Column", - "textFirstLine": "FirstLine", + "textFirstLine": "First Line", "textFlow": "Flow", "textFontColor": "Font Color", "textFontColors": "Font Colors", "textFonts": "Fonts", "textFooter": "Footer", + "textFormal": "Formal", + "textFr": "Fr", "textHeader": "Header", "textHeaderRow": "Header Row", "textHighlightColor": "Highlight Color", "textHyperlink": "Hyperlink", "textImage": "Image", "textImageURL": "Image URL", - "textInFront": "In Front", - "textInline": "Inline", + "textInFront": "In Front of Text", + "textInline": "In Line with Text", + "textJanuary": "January", + "textJuly": "July", + "textJune": "June", "textKeepLinesTogether": "Keep Lines Together", "textKeepWithNext": "Keep with Next", "textLastColumn": "Last Column", + "textLeader": "Leader", "textLetterSpacing": "Letter Spacing", + "textLevels": "Levels", "textLineSpacing": "Line Spacing", "textLink": "Link", "textLinkSettings": "Link Settings", "textLinkToPrevious": "Link to Previous", + "textMarch": "March", + "textMay": "May", + "textMo": "Mo", + "textModern": "Modern", "textMoveBackward": "Move Backward", "textMoveForward": "Move Forward", "textMoveWithText": "Move with Text", + "textNextParagraphStyle": "Next paragraph style", "textNone": "None", "textNoStyles": "No styles for this type of charts.", "textNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", + "textNovember": "November", + "textNumbers": "Numbers", + "textOctober": "October", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textOnline": "Online", "textOpacity": "Opacity", "textOptions": "Options", "textOrphanControl": "Orphan Control", "textPageBreakBefore": "Page Break Before", "textPageNumbering": "Page Numbering", + "textPageNumbers": "Page Numbers", "textParagraph": "Paragraph", - "textParagraphStyles": "Paragraph Styles", + "textParagraphStyle": "Paragraph Style", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", "textPt": "pt", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", + "textRefresh": "Refresh", + "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", + "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveImage": "Remove Image", - "textRemoveLink": "Remove Link", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", - "textReorder": "Reorder", + "textRemoveTableContent": "Remove table of contents", "textRepeatAsHeaderRow": "Repeat as Header Row", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceImage": "Replace Image", + "textRequired": "Required", "textResizeToFitContent": "Resize to Fit Content", + "textRightAlign": "Right Align", + "textSa": "Sa", + "textSameCreatedNewStyle": "Same as created new style", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", + "textSeptember": "September", "textSettings": "Settings", - "textShape": "Shape", + "textSimple": "Simple", "textSize": "Size", "textSmallCaps": "Small Caps", "textSpaceBetweenParagraphs": "Space Between Paragraphs", "textSquare": "Square", + "textStandard": "Standard", "textStartAt": "Start at", "textStrikethrough": "Strikethrough", + "textStructure": "Structure", "textStyle": "Style", "textStyleOptions": "Style Options", + "textStyles": "Styles", + "textSu": "Su", "textSubscript": "Subscript", "textSuperscript": "Superscript", "textTable": "Table", + "textTableOfCont": "TOC", "textTableOptions": "Table Options", "textText": "Text", + "textTextWrapping": "Text Wrapping", + "textTh": "Th", "textThrough": "Through", "textTight": "Tight", + "textTitle": "Title", "textTopAndBottom": "Top and Bottom", "textTotalRow": "Total Row", - "textType": "Type", - "textWrap": "Wrap", - "textNumbers": "Numbers", - "textDesign": "Design", - "textSu": "Su", - "textMo": "Mo", "textTu": "Tu", + "textType": "Type", "textWe": "We", - "textTh": "Th", - "textFr": "Fr", - "textSa": "Sa", - "textJanuary": "January", - "textFebruary": "February", - "textMarch": "March", - "textApril": "April", - "textMay": "May", - "textJune": "June", - "textJuly": "July", - "textAugust": "August", - "textSeptember": "September", - "textOctober": "October", - "textNovember": "November", - "textDecember": "December", - "textEmpty": "Empty", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textTableOfCont": "TOC", - "textPageNumbers": "Page Numbers", - "textSimple": "Simple", - "textRightAlign": "Right Align", - "textLeader": "Leader", - "textStructure": "Structure", - "textRefresh": "Refresh", - "textLevels": "Levels", - "textRemoveTableContent": "Remove table of content", - "textCurrent": "Current", - "textOnline": "Online", - "textClassic": "Classic", - "textDistinctive": "Distinctive", - "textCentered": "Centered", - "textFormal": "Formal", - "textStandard": "Standard", - "textModern": "Modern", + "textWrap": "Wrap", + "textWrappingStyle": "Wrapping Style" + }, + "About": { + "textAbout": "About", + "textAddress": "Address", + "textBack": "Back", + "textEditor": "Document Editor", + "textEmail": "Email", + "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", + "textTel": "Tel", + "textVersion": "Version" + }, + "ContextMenu": { + "errorCopyCutPaste": "Copy, cut and paste actions using the context menu will be performed within the current file only.", + "menuAddComment": "Add comment", + "menuAddLink": "Add link", + "menuCancel": "Cancel", + "menuContinueNumbering": "Continue numbering", + "menuDelete": "Delete", + "menuDeleteTable": "Delete Table", + "menuEdit": "Edit", + "menuEditLink": "Edit Link", + "menuJoinList": "Join to previous list", + "menuMerge": "Merge", + "menuMore": "More", + "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", + "menuReview": "Review", + "menuReviewChange": "Review Change", + "menuSeparateList": "Separate list", + "menuSplit": "Split", + "menuStartNewList": "Start new list", + "menuStartNumberingFrom": "Set numbering value", + "menuViewComment": "View Comment", "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textColumns": "Columns", + "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", + "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", + "textNumberingValue": "Numbering Value", + "textOk": "OK", "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", - "textStyles": "Styles", - "textAmountOfLevels": "Amount of Levels", - "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", - "textDone": "Done", - "textTitle": "Title", - "textEnterTitleNewStyle": "Enter title of a new style", - "textNextParagraphStyle": "Next paragraph style", - "textSameCreatedNewStyle": "Same as created new style", - "textParagraphStyle": "Paragraph Style", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textTextWrapping": "Text Wrapping", - "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", - "textWrappingStyle": "Wrapping Style", - "textArrange": "Arrange" + "textRows": "Rows", + "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
          Are you sure you want to continue?" }, "Error": { "convertationTimeoutText": "Conversion timeout exceeded.", @@ -389,27 +385,40 @@ "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", "downloadErrorText": "Download failed.", "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
          Please, contact your admin.", - "errorBadImageUrl": "Image url is incorrect", + "errorBadImageUrl": "Image URL is incorrect", "errorConnectToServer": "Can't save this doc. Check your connection settings or contact the admin.
          When you click OK, you will be prompted to download the document.", "errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
          Database connection error. Please, contact support.", "errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", "errorDataRange": "Incorrect data range.", "errorDefaultMessage": "Error code: %1", + "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
          This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", "errorEditingDownloadas": "An error occurred during the work with the document.
          Download document to save the file backup copy locally.", + "errorEmptyTOC": "Start creating a table of contents by applying a heading style from the Styles gallery to the selected text.", "errorFilePassProtect": "The file is password protected and could not be opened.", "errorFileSizeExceed": "The file size exceeds your server limit.
          Please, contact your admin.", + "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content does not match the file extension.", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", "errorKeyEncrypt": "Unknown key descriptor", "errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", + "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", "errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Loading failed", "errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Merge failed.", + "errorNoTOC": "There's no table of contents to update. You can insert one from the References tab.", + "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization.", "errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please, reload the page.", "errorSessionIdle": "The document has not been edited for quite a long time. Please, reload the page.", "errorSessionToken": "The connection to the server has been interrupted. Please, reload the page.", "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
          opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", - "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internet connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
          Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", + "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "The value entered does not match the format of the field.", + "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
          Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", "errorUserDrop": "The file can't be accessed right now.", "errorUsersExceed": "The number of users allowed by the pricing plan was exceeded", - "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
          but you won't be able to download it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", + "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
          but you won't be able to download or print it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "openErrorText": "An error has occurred while opening the file", "saveErrorText": "An error has occurred while saving the file", @@ -420,24 +429,12 @@ "unknownErrorText": "Unknown error.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Unknown image format.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No images uploaded.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB.", - "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorEmptyTOC": "Start creating a table of contents by applying a heading style from the Styles gallery to the selected text.", - "errorNoTOC": "There's no table of contents to update. You can insert one from the References tab.", - "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "The value entered does not match the format of the field.", - "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
          This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB." }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "Loading data...", "applyChangesTitleText": "Loading Data", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", "downloadMergeText": "Downloading...", "downloadMergeTitle": "Downloading", "downloadTextText": "Downloading document...", @@ -464,14 +461,13 @@ "saveTitleText": "Saving Document", "sendMergeText": "Sending Merge...", "sendMergeTitle": "Sending Merge", + "textContinue": "Continue", "textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", + "textUndo": "Undo", "txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", "uploadImageTextText": "Uploading image...", "uploadImageTitleText": "Uploading Image", - "waitText": "Please, wait...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", - "textUndo": "Undo", - "textContinue": "Continue" + "waitText": "Please, wait..." }, "Main": { "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", @@ -549,41 +545,39 @@ "textClose": "Close", "textContactUs": "Contact sales", "textCustomLoader": "Sorry, you are not entitled to change the loader. Contact our sales department to get a quote.", + "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "You may edit this document, but all changes will be tracked", + "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", + "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", + "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", + "textDocumentProtected": "The document is protected. Edit settings are not available", "textGuest": "Guest", "textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
          Do you want to run macros?", "textNo": "No", "textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", "textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", "textRemember": "Remember my choice", + "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", + "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", + "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", "textYes": "Yes", + "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", "titleLicenseExp": "License expired", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", "titleServerVersion": "Editor updated", "titleUpdateVersion": "Version changed", + "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
          Please contact your administrator.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact your administrator to learn more.", "warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired. Please, update your license and refresh the page.", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "License expired. You have no access to document editing functionality. Please, contact your admin.", - "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "The license needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
          Please contact your administrator to get full access", + "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "License needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
          Please contact your administrator to get full access", "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", "warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit this file.", - "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", - "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", - "textDocumentProtected": "The document is protected. Edit settings are not available", - "textOk": "Ok", - "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
          Please contact your administrator.", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", - "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", - "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", - "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "You may edit this document, but all changes will be tracked", - "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit this file." }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "Protected File", @@ -596,10 +590,14 @@ "textApplicationSettings": "Application Settings", "textAuthor": "Author", "textBack": "Back", + "textBeginningDocument": "Beginning of document", "textBottom": "Bottom", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCaseSensitive": "Case Sensitive", "textCentimeter": "Centimeter", + "textChangePassword": "Change Password", + "textChooseEncoding": "Choose Encoding", + "textChooseTxtOptions": "Choose TXT Options", "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", "textColorSchemes": "Color Schemes", "textComment": "Comment", @@ -607,6 +605,8 @@ "textCommentsDisplay": "Comments Display", "textCreated": "Created", "textCustomSize": "Custom Size", + "textDialogUnprotect": "Enter a password to unprotect document", + "textDirection": "Direction", "textDisableAll": "Disable All", "textDisableAllMacrosWithNotification": "Disable all macros with notification", "textDisableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Disable all macros without notification", @@ -618,9 +618,15 @@ "textDownloadAs": "Download As", "textDownloadRtf": "If you continue saving in this format some of the formatting might be lost. Are you sure you want to continue?", "textDownloadTxt": "If you continue saving in this format all features except the text will be lost. Are you sure you want to continue?", + "textEmptyHeading": "Empty Heading", + "textEmptyScreens": "There are no headings in the document. Apply a headings style to the text so that it appears in the table of contents.", "textEnableAll": "Enable All", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Enable all macros without notification", "textEncoding": "Encoding", + "textEncryptFile": "Encrypt File", + "textFastWV": "Fast Web View", + "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", + "textFillingForms": "Filling forms", "textFind": "Find", "textFindAndReplace": "Find and Replace", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "Find and Replace All", @@ -633,36 +639,70 @@ "textLastModified": "Last Modified", "textLastModifiedBy": "Last Modified By", "textLeft": "Left", + "textLeftToRight": "Left To Right", "textLoading": "Loading...", "textLocation": "Location", "textMacrosSettings": "Macros Settings", "textMargins": "Margins", "textMarginsH": "Top and bottom margins are too high for a given page height", "textMarginsW": "Left and right margins are too wide for a given page width", + "textMobileView": "Mobile View", + "textNavigation": "Navigation", + "textNo": "No", + "textNoChanges": "No changes (Read only)", "textNoCharacters": "Nonprinting Characters", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOpenFile": "Enter a password to open the file", "textOrientation": "Orientation", "textOwner": "Owner", + "textPages": "Pages", + "textPageSize": "Page Size", + "textParagraphs": "Paragraphs", + "textPassword": "Password", + "textPasswordNotMatched": "Passwords Don’t Match", + "textPdfProducer": "PDF Producer", + "textPdfTagged": "Tagged PDF", + "textPdfVer": "PDF Version", "textPoint": "Point", "textPortrait": "Portrait", "textPrint": "Print", + "textProtectDocument": "Protect Document", + "textProtection": "Protection", + "textProtectTurnOff": "Protection is turned off", "textReaderMode": "Reader Mode", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", + "textRequired": "Required", + "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", "textResolvedComments": "Resolved Comments", + "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", "textRight": "Right", + "textRightToLeft": "Right To Left", + "textSave": "Save", "textSearch": "Search", + "textSetPassword": "Set Password", "textSettings": "Settings", "textShowNotification": "Show Notification", + "textSpaces": "Spaces", "textSpellcheck": "Spell Checking", "textStatistic": "Statistic", "textSubject": "Subject", + "textSymbols": "Symbols", "textTitle": "Title", "textTop": "Top", + "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", + "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", "textUnitOfMeasurement": "Unit Of Measurement", + "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", "textUploaded": "Uploaded", + "textVerify": "Verify", + "textWords": "Words", + "textYes": "Yes", + "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document", + "txtDownloadTxt": "Download TXT", "txtIncorrectPwd": "Password is incorrect", + "txtOk": "Ok", "txtProtected": "Once you enter the password and open the file, the current password will be reset", "txtScheme1": "Office", "txtScheme10": "Median", @@ -685,55 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Concourse", "txtScheme7": "Equity", "txtScheme8": "Flow", - "txtScheme9": "Foundry", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textChooseEncoding": "Choose Encoding", - "textChooseTxtOptions": "Choose TXT Options", - "txtDownloadTxt": "Download TXT", - "txtOk": "Ok", - "textPages": "Pages", - "textParagraphs": "Paragraphs", - "textSpaces": "Spaces", - "textSymbols": "Symbols", - "textWords": "Words", - "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", - "textNavigation": "Navigation", - "textEmptyScreens": "There are no headings in the document. Apply a headings style to the text so that it appeas in the table of cotents.", - "textBeginningDocument": "Beginning of document", - "textEmptyHeading": "Empty Heading", - "textPageSize": "Page Size", - "textPdfVer": "PDF Version", - "textPdfTagged": "Tagged PDF", - "textFastWV": "Fast Web View", - "textYes": "Yes", - "textNo": "No", - "textPdfProducer": "PDF Producer", - "textDirection": "Direction", - "textLeftToRight": "Left To Right", - "textRightToLeft": "Right To Left", - "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", - "textMobileView": "Mobile View", - "textProtection": "Protection", - "textProtectDocument": "Protect Document", - "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document", - "textDialogUnprotect": "Enter a password to unprotect document", - "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", - "textProtectTurnOff": "Protect turn off", - "textSetPassword": "Set Password", - "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", - "textNoChanges": "No changes (Read only)", - "textFillingForms": "Filling forms", - "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", - "textPassword": "Password", - "textVerify": "Verify", - "textSave": "Save", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textPasswordNotMatched": "Passwords Don’t Match", - "textEncryptFile": "Encrypt File", - "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", - "textChangePassword": "Change Password", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Foundry" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "You have unsaved changes. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/el.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/el.json index fab39bf62a..d6991b2b45 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/el.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/el.json @@ -51,6 +51,7 @@ "textPictureFromLibrary": "Εικόνα από τη Βιβλιοθήκη", "textPictureFromURL": "Εικόνα από Σύνδεσμο", "textPosition": "Θέση", + "textRecommended": "Προτεινόμενα", "textRightBottom": "Δεξιά Κάτω", "textRightTop": "Δεξιά Πάνω", "textRows": "Γραμμές", @@ -64,7 +65,6 @@ "textWithBlueLinks": "Με Μπλε Συνδέσμους", "textWithPageNumbers": "Με Αριθμούς Σελίδων", "txtNotUrl": "Αυτό το πεδίο πρέπει να είναι μια διεύθυνση URL με τη μορφή «http://www.example.com»", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRequired": "Required" }, "Common": { @@ -325,6 +325,7 @@ "textPictureFromLibrary": "Εικόνα από τη Βιβλιοθήκη", "textPictureFromURL": "Εικόνα από Σύνδεσμο", "textPt": "pt", + "textRecommended": "Προτεινόμενα", "textRefresh": "Ανανέωση", "textRefreshEntireTable": "Ανανέωση ολόκληρου πίνακα", "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Ανανέωση αριθμών σελίδων μόνο", @@ -364,6 +365,7 @@ "textTableOfCont": "ΠΠ", "textTableOptions": "Επιλογές Πίνακα", "textText": "Κείμενο", + "textTextWrapping": "Αναδίπλωση Κειμένου", "textTh": "Πεμ", "textThrough": "Διά μέσου", "textTight": "Σφιχτό", @@ -374,9 +376,7 @@ "textType": "Τύπος", "textWe": "Τετ", "textWrap": "Αναδίπλωση", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRequired": "Required", - "textTextWrapping": "Text Wrapping", "textWrappingStyle": "Wrapping Style" }, "Error": { @@ -411,6 +411,7 @@ "errorSessionIdle": "Το έγγραφο δεν τροποποιήθηκε για μεγάλο χρονικό διάστημα. Παρακαλούμε, φορτώστε ξανά τη σελίδα.", "errorSessionToken": "Η σύνδεση με τον εξυπηρετητή διακόπηκε. Παρακαλούμε, φορτώστε ξανά τη σελίδα.", "errorStockChart": "Εσφαλμένη διάταξη γραμμών. Για να φτιάξετε γράφημα μετοχών, βάλτε τα δεδομένα στο φύλλο με την ακόλουθη σειρά:
          τιμή εκκίνησης, μέγιστη τιμή, ελάχιστη τιμή, τιμή κλεισίματος.", + "errorTokenExpire": "Το κλειδί ασφαλείας του εγγράφου έληξε.
          Παρακαλούμε επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή του Εξυπηρετητή Εγγράφων.", "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Η σύνδεση στο Διαδίκτυο έχει αποκατασταθεί και η έκδοση του αρχείου έχει αλλάξει.
          Προτού συνεχίσετε να εργάζεστε, πρέπει να κατεβάσετε το αρχείο ή να αντιγράψετε το περιεχόμενό του για να βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν έχει χαθεί τίποτα. Στη συνέχεια, φορτώστε ξανά αυτή τη σελίδα.", "errorUserDrop": "Το αρχείο δεν είναι προσβάσιμο αυτή τη στιγμή.", "errorUsersExceed": "Υπέρβαση του αριθμού των χρηστών που επιτρέπονται από το πρόγραμμα τιμολόγησης", @@ -428,8 +429,7 @@ "uploadImageSizeMessage": "Η εικόνα είναι πολύ μεγάλη. Το μέγιστο μέγεθος είναι 25MB.", "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization.", "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "The value entered does not match the format of the field.", - "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator." + "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
          Please contact your Document Server administrator." }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "Φόρτωση δεδομένων...", @@ -462,12 +462,12 @@ "sendMergeTitle": "Αποστολή Συγχώνευσης", "textContinue": "Συνέχεια", "textLoadingDocument": "Φόρτωση εγγράφου", + "textUndo": "Αναίρεση", "txtEditingMode": "Ορισμός κατάστασης επεξεργασίας...", "uploadImageTextText": "Μεταφόρτωση εικόνας...", "uploadImageTitleText": "Μεταφόρτωση Εικόνας", "waitText": "Παρακαλούμε, περιμένετε...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", - "textUndo": "Undo" + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost)." }, "Main": { "criticalErrorTitle": "Σφάλμα", @@ -549,6 +549,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "Το αρχείο περιέχει αυτόματες μακροεντολές.
          Θέλετε να εκτελέσετε μακροεντολές;", "textNo": "Όχι", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Το όριο της άδειας προσεγγίσθηκε", + "textNoMatches": "Χωρίς ταίριασμα", "textOk": "Εντάξει", "textPaidFeature": "Δυνατότητα επί πληρωμή", "textRemember": "Απομνημόνευση επιλογής", @@ -560,6 +561,7 @@ "titleLicenseNotActive": "Η άδεια δεν είναι ενεργή", "titleServerVersion": "Ο συντάκτης ενημερώθηκε", "titleUpdateVersion": "Η έκδοση άλλαξε", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Δεν επιτρέπεται η πρόσβαση για ανώνυμους χρήστες.
          Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοίξει μόνο για προβολή.", "warnLicenseBefore": "Η άδεια δεν είναι ενεργή.
          Παρακαλούμε, επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Φτάσατε το όριο ταυτόχρονων συνδέσεων σε %1 συντάκτες. Το έγγραφο θα ανοίξει μόνο για ανάγνωση. Επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας για περισσότερες πληροφορίες.", "warnLicenseExp": "Η άδειά σας έληξε. Παρακαλούμε, ενημερώστε την άδειά σας και ανανεώστε τη σελίδα.", @@ -574,10 +576,8 @@ "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", "textDocumentProtected": "The document is protected. Edit settings are not available", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", - "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics." }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "Προστατευμένο Αρχείο", @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "Όχι", "textNoChanges": "Καμία αλλαγή (Ανάγνωση μόνο)", "textNoCharacters": "Μη Εκτυπώσιμοι Χαρακτήρες", + "textNoMatches": "Χωρίς ταίριασμα", "textOk": "Εντάξει", "textOpenFile": "Εισάγετε συνθηματικό για να ανοίξετε το αρχείο", "textOrientation": "Προσανατολισμός", @@ -667,14 +668,19 @@ "textPortrait": "Κατακόρυφος", "textPrint": "Εκτύπωση", "textProtectDocument": "Προστασία Eγγράφου", + "textProtection": "Προστασία", + "textProtectTurnOff": "Η προστασία είναι απενεργοποιημένη", "textReaderMode": "Κατάσταση Αναγνώστη", "textReplace": "Αντικατάσταση", "textReplaceAll": "Αντικατάσταση Όλων", + "textRequirePassword": "Απαιτείται κωδικός πρόσβασης", "textResolvedComments": "Επιλυμένα Σχόλια", "textRestartApplication": "Παρακαλούμε επανεκκινήστε την εφαρμογή για να εφαρμοστούν οι αλλαγές", "textRight": "Δεξιά", "textRightToLeft": "Δεξιά Προς Αριστερά", + "textSave": "Αποθήκευση", "textSearch": "Αναζήτηση", + "textSetPassword": "Ορισμός κωδικού πρόσβασης", "textSettings": "Ρυθμίσεις", "textShowNotification": "Εμφάνιση Ειδοποίησης", "textSpaces": "Κενά", @@ -684,8 +690,10 @@ "textSymbols": "Σύμβολα", "textTitle": "Τίτλος", "textTop": "Πάνω", + "textTrackedChanges": "Εντοπισμένες αλλαγές", "textUnitOfMeasurement": "Μονάδα Μέτρησης", "textUploaded": "Μεταφορτώθηκε", + "textVerify": "Επιβεβαίωση", "textWords": "Λέξεις", "textYes": "Ναι", "txtDownloadTxt": "Λήψη TXT", @@ -714,17 +722,9 @@ "txtScheme7": "Μετοχή", "txtScheme8": "Ροή", "txtScheme9": "Χυτήριο", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "textProtection": "Protection", - "textProtectTurnOff": "Protection is turned off", "textRequired": "Required", - "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", - "textSave": "Save", - "textSetPassword": "Set Password", - "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", - "textVerify": "Verify", "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document" }, "Toolbar": { diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/es.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/es.json index 6aa926b52b..d3b77ed559 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/es.json @@ -47,6 +47,7 @@ "textOther": "Otros", "textPageBreak": "Salto de página ", "textPageNumber": "Número de página", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Pegar la URL de una imagen", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Imagen desde biblioteca", "textPictureFromURL": "Imagen desde URL", "textPosition": "Posición", @@ -64,8 +65,7 @@ "textTableSize": "Tamaño de tabla", "textWithBlueLinks": "Con enlaces azules", "textWithPageNumbers": "Con números de página", - "txtNotUrl": "Este campo debe ser una dirección URL en el formato \"http://www.example.com\"", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "Este campo debe ser una dirección URL en el formato \"http://www.example.com\"" }, "Common": { "Collaboration": { @@ -407,6 +407,7 @@ "errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Error de carga", "errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Error de combinar.", "errorNoTOC": "No hay una tabla de contenidos para actualizar. Se puede insertar uno desde la pestaña de Referencias.", + "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "La contraseña proporcionada no es correcta. Compruebe que la tecla BLOQ MAYÚS está desactivada y asegúrese de utilizar las mayúsculas correctas.", "errorSessionAbsolute": "La sesión de edición del documento ha expirado. Por favor, vuelva a cargar la página.", "errorSessionIdle": "El documento no ha sido editado desde hace mucho tiempo. Por favor, vuelva a cargar la página.", "errorSessionToken": "La conexión con el servidor se ha interrumpido. Por favor, vuelva a cargar la página.", @@ -428,8 +429,7 @@ "unknownErrorText": "Error desconocido.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Formato de imagen desconocido.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No hay imágenes subidas.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "La imagen es demasiado grande. El tamaño máximo es de 25 MB.", - "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "La imagen es demasiado grande. El tamaño máximo es de 25 MB." }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "Cargando datos...", @@ -545,11 +545,16 @@ "textClose": "Cerrar", "textContactUs": "Contactar con el equipo de ventas", "textCustomLoader": "No tiene permiso para cambiar el cargador. Póngase en contacto con nuestro departamento de ventas para obtener un presupuesto.", + "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "Puede editar este documento, pero todos los cambios serán revisados", + "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "Solo puede insertar comentarios en este documento", + "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "Solo puede rellenar los formularios de este documento", + "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "Solo puede visualizar este documento", "textDocumentProtected": "El documento está protegido. Los ajustes de edición no están disponibles", "textGuest": "Invitado", "textHasMacros": "El archivo contiene macros automáticas.
          ¿Quiere ejecutar macros?", "textNo": "No", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Se ha alcanzado el límite de licencia", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textOk": "OK", "textPaidFeature": "Característica de pago", "textRemember": "Recordar mi elección", @@ -557,9 +562,14 @@ "textReplaceSuccess": "Se ha realizado la búsqueda. Ocurrencias reemplazadas: {0}", "textRequestMacros": "Una macro hace una petición a la URL. ¿Quiere permitir la petición al %1?", "textYes": "Sí", + "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "El documento está protegido", "titleLicenseExp": "Licencia ha expirado", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "Licencia no activa", "titleServerVersion": "Editor ha sido actualizado", "titleUpdateVersion": "Versión ha cambiado", + "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Su {0} se convertirá en un formato editable. Esto puede llevar un tiempo. El documento resultante será optimizado para permitirle editar el texto, por lo que puede que no se vea exactamente como el {0} original, especialmente si el archivo original contenía muchos gráficos.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acceso denegado para usuarios anónimos.
          Este documento se abrirá solo para su visualización.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "Licencia no activa.
          Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización. Póngase en contacto con su administrador para obtener más información.", "warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado. Por favor, actualice su licencia y actualice la página.", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "La licencia ha expirado. No tiene acceso a la funcionalidad de edición de documentos. Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", @@ -567,17 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para %1 editores. Póngase en contacto con su administrador para saber más.", "warnNoLicense": "Ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización. Póngase en contacto con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer las condiciones de actualización personal.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para %1 editores. Póngase en contacto con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer las condiciones de actualización personal.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "No tiene permiso para editar este archivo.", - "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "You may edit this document, but all changes will be tracked", - "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", - "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", - "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
          Please contact your administrator." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "No tiene permiso para editar este archivo." }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "Archivo protegido", @@ -595,6 +595,7 @@ "textCancel": "Cancelar", "textCaseSensitive": "Distinguir mayúsculas de minúsculas", "textCentimeter": "Centímetro", + "textChangePassword": "Cambiar contraseña", "textChooseEncoding": "Elegir codificación", "textChooseTxtOptions": "Elegir opciones de archivo TXT", "textCollaboration": "Colaboración", @@ -604,6 +605,7 @@ "textCommentsDisplay": "Visualización de comentarios", "textCreated": "Creado", "textCustomSize": "Tamaño personalizado", + "textDialogUnprotect": "Introduzca una contraseña para desbloquear el documento", "textDirection": "Dirección ", "textDisableAll": "Deshabilitar todo", "textDisableAllMacrosWithNotification": "Deshabilitar todas las macros con notificación", @@ -621,8 +623,10 @@ "textEnableAll": "Habilitar todo", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Habilitar todas las macros sin notificación", "textEncoding": "Codificación", + "textEncryptFile": "Cifrar archivo", "textFastWV": "Vista rápida de la web", "textFeedback": "Comentarios y asistencia", + "textFillingForms": "Rellenado de formularios", "textFind": "Buscar", "textFindAndReplace": "Buscar y reemplazar", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "Buscar y reemplazar todo", @@ -645,7 +649,9 @@ "textMobileView": "Vista móvil", "textNavigation": "Navegación", "textNo": "No", + "textNoChanges": "Sin cambios (solo lectura)", "textNoCharacters": "Caracteres no imprimibles", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "Introduzca la contraseña para abrir el archivo", "textOrientation": "Orientación ", @@ -653,20 +659,29 @@ "textPages": "Páginas", "textPageSize": "Tamaño de la página", "textParagraphs": "Párrafos", + "textPassword": "Contraseña", + "textPasswordNotMatched": "Las contraseñas no coinciden", "textPdfProducer": "Generador de PDF", "textPdfTagged": "PDF etiquetado", "textPdfVer": "Versión PDF", "textPoint": "Punto", "textPortrait": "Vertical", "textPrint": "Imprimir", + "textProtectDocument": "Proteger documento", + "textProtection": "Protección", + "textProtectTurnOff": "La protección está desactivada", "textReaderMode": "Modo de lectura", "textReplace": "Reemplazar", "textReplaceAll": "Reemplazar todo", + "textRequired": "Requerido", + "textRequirePassword": "Requerir contraseña", "textResolvedComments": "Comentarios resueltos.", "textRestartApplication": "Reinicie la aplicación para que los cambios surtan efecto", "textRight": "Derecha", "textRightToLeft": "De derecha a izquierda", + "textSave": "Guardar", "textSearch": "Buscar", + "textSetPassword": "Establecer contraseña", "textSettings": "Ajustes", "textShowNotification": "Mostrar notificación", "textSpaces": "Espacios", @@ -676,10 +691,15 @@ "textSymbols": "Símbolos", "textTitle": "Título", "textTop": "Arriba", + "textTrackedChanges": "Cambios realizados", + "textTypeEditing": "Tipo de edición", "textUnitOfMeasurement": "Unidad de medida", + "textUnprotect": "Quitar la protección", "textUploaded": "Cargado", + "textVerify": "Verificar", "textWords": "Palabras", "textYes": "Sí", + "titleDialogUnprotect": "Desbloquear documento", "txtDownloadTxt": "Descargar TXT", "txtIncorrectPwd": "La contraseña es incorrecta", "txtOk": "OK", @@ -705,27 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Concurrencia", "txtScheme7": "Equidad ", "txtScheme8": "Flujo", - "txtScheme9": "Fundición", - "textChangePassword": "Change Password", - "textDialogUnprotect": "Enter a password to unprotect document", - "textEncryptFile": "Encrypt File", - "textFillingForms": "Filling forms", - "textNoChanges": "No changes (Read only)", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "textPassword": "Password", - "textPasswordNotMatched": "Passwords Don’t Match", - "textProtectDocument": "Protect Document", - "textProtection": "Protection", - "textProtectTurnOff": "Protection is turned off", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", - "textSave": "Save", - "textSetPassword": "Set Password", - "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", - "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", - "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", - "textVerify": "Verify", - "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document" + "txtScheme9": "Fundición" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "Tiene cambios sin guardar. Haga clic en \"Permanecer en esta página\" para esperar a que se guarde automáticamente. Haga clic en \"Salir de esta página\" para descartar todos los cambios no guardados.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json index 8f6c3cd55d..44e6da2081 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ "textPageNumber": "Numéro de page", "textPasteImageUrl": "Coller l'URL de l'image", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Image depuis la bibliothèque", - "textPictureFromURL": "Image depuis URL", + "textPictureFromURL": "Image à partir d'une URL", "textPosition": "Position", "textRecommended": "Recommandés", "textRequired": "Obligatoire", @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ "textCancel": "Annuler", "textCellMargins": "Marges de la cellule", "textCentered": "Centré", - "textChangeShape": "Changer la forme", + "textChangeShape": "Modifier la forme", "textChart": "Graphique", "textClassic": "Classique", "textClose": "Fermer", @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ "textParagraph": "Paragraphe", "textParagraphStyle": "Style de paragraphe", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Image depuis la bibliothèque", - "textPictureFromURL": "Image depuis URL", + "textPictureFromURL": "Image à partir d'une URL", "textPt": "pt", "textRecommended": "Recommandés", "textRefresh": "Actualiser", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json index f980128fe2..abf632b7a0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json @@ -239,6 +239,7 @@ "textCancel": "Cancelar", "textCellMargins": "Marxes das celdas", "textCentered": "Centrado", + "textChangeShape": "Cambiar forma", "textChart": "Gráfico", "textClassic": "Clásico", "textClose": "Pechar", @@ -370,7 +371,6 @@ "textWe": "Me", "textWrap": "Axuste", "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json index 5571fb0656..c10aa7427e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json @@ -47,6 +47,7 @@ "textOther": "Այլ", "textPageBreak": "Էջատում", "textPageNumber": "Էջի համար", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Տեղադրեք պատկերի URL", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Նկար գրադարանից", "textPictureFromURL": "Նկար URL-ից", "textPosition": "Դիրք", @@ -64,8 +65,7 @@ "textTableSize": "Աղյուսակի չափ", "textWithBlueLinks": "Կապույտ հղումներով", "textWithPageNumbers": "Էջի համարներով", - "txtNotUrl": "Այս դաշտը պիտի լինի URL հասցե՝ \"http://www.example.com\" ձևաչափով։ ", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "Այս դաշտը պիտի լինի URL հասցե՝ \"http://www.example.com\" ձևաչափով։ " }, "Common": { "Collaboration": { @@ -554,6 +554,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "Ֆայլում կան ինքնաշխատ մակրոներ։
          Գործարկե՞լ դրանք։", "textNo": "Ոչ", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Լիցենզիայի սահմանաչափը հասել է", + "textNoMatches": "Համընկնում չկա", "textOk": "Լավ", "textPaidFeature": "Վճարովի գործառույթ", "textRemember": "Հիշել իմ ընտրությունը", @@ -567,6 +568,7 @@ "titleServerVersion": "Խմբագրիչը արդիացվել է", "titleUpdateVersion": "Տարբերակը փոխվել է", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Ձեր {0}-ը կվերածվի խմբագրվող ձևաչափի:Սա կարող է որոշ ժամանակ տևել:Ստացված փաստաթուղթը կօպտիմիզացվի՝ թույլ տալու համար խմբագրել տեքստը, այնպես որ այն կարող է նման չլինել սկզբնական {0}-ին, հատկապես, եթե սկզբնական ֆայլը պարունակում է շատ գրաֆիկական պատկերներ:", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Մուտքն արգելված է անանուն օգտատերերի համար:
          Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:", "warnLicenseBefore": "Լիցենզիան ակտիվ չէ:
          Խնդրում ենք կապվել ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ:", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների հետ միաժամանակյա միացումների սահմանաչափին:Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:Կապվեք Ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ՝ ավելին իմանալու համար:", "warnLicenseExp": "Ձեր լիցենզիայի ժամկետը լրացել է:Խնդրում ենք թարմացնել Ձեր լիցենզիան և թարմացնել էջը:", @@ -575,9 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագրիչներին միաժամանակ միանալու սահմանափակմանը։Կապվեք Ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ՝ ավելին իմանալու համար:", "warnNoLicense": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների հետ միաժամանակյա միացումների սահմանաչափին:Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:նձնական թարմացման պայմանների համար կապվեք %1 վաճառքի թիմի հետ:", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների օգտվողի սահմանաչափին:Անձնական թարմացման պայմանների համար կապվեք %1 վաճառքի թիմի հետ:", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "Դուք այս ֆայլը խմբագրելու թույլտվություն չունեք:", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "Դուք այս ֆայլը խմբագրելու թույլտվություն չունեք:" }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "Պաշտպանված նիշք", @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "Ոչ", "textNoChanges": "Փոփոխություններ չկան (Միայն-կարդալու)", "textNoCharacters": "Չտպվող գրանշաններ", + "textNoMatches": "Համընկնում չկա", "textOk": "Լավ", "textOpenFile": "Մուտքագրել գաղտնաբառ՝ ֆայլը բացելու համար", "textOrientation": "Կողմնորոշում", @@ -724,8 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Համագումար ", "txtScheme7": "Սեփական կապիտալ", "txtScheme8": "Հոսք", - "txtScheme9": "Հրատարակիչ", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Հրատարակիչ" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "Դուք չպահված փոփոխություններ ունեք:Սեղմեք «Մնա այս էջում»՝ սպասելու ավտոմատ պահպանմանը:Սեղմեք «Լքել այս էջը»՝ չպահված բոլոր փոփոխությունները մերժելու համար:", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/id.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/id.json index 2808e96f98..a504f280be 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/id.json @@ -554,6 +554,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "File berisi macros otomatis.
          Apakah Anda ingin menjalankan macros?", "textNo": "Tidak", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Batas lisensi sudah tercapai", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yamg Cocok", "textOk": "Ok", "textPaidFeature": "Fitur berbayar", "textRemember": "Ingat pilihan saya", @@ -567,6 +568,7 @@ "titleServerVersion": "Editor mengupdate", "titleUpdateVersion": "Versi telah diubah", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "{0} Anda akan dikonversi ke format yang bisa disunting. Hal ini mungkin akan membutuhkan waktu. Dokumen yang dihasilkan akan dioptimalkan untuk memungkinkan Anda menyunting teks, sehingga mungkin tidak terlihat persis seperti aslinya {0}, terutama jika file asli berisi banyak gambar.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Akses ditolak untuk pengguna anonim.
          Dokumen ini akan dibuka hanya untuk dilihat.", "warnLicenseBefore": "Lisensi tidak aktif.
          Harap hubungi administrator Anda.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja. Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "warnLicenseExp": "Lisensi Anda sudah kadaluwarsa. Silakan update dan muat ulang halaman.", @@ -575,9 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas user untuk %1 editor. Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "warnNoLicense": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja. Hubungi %1 tim sales untuk syarat personal upgrade.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Anda sudah mencapai batas user untuk %1 editor. Hubungi %1 tim sales untuk syarat personal upgrade.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "Anda tidak memiliki izin edit file ini.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "Anda tidak memiliki izin edit file ini." }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "File yang Diproteksi", @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "Tidak", "textNoChanges": "Tidak ada perubahan (Baca saja)", "textNoCharacters": "Karakter Tidak Dicetak", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yamg Cocok", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "Masukkan kata sandi untuk buka file", "textOrientation": "Orientasi", @@ -724,8 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Himpunan", "txtScheme7": "Margin Sisa", "txtScheme8": "Alur", - "txtScheme9": "Cetakan", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Cetakan" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "Anda memiliki perubahan yang belum tersimpan. Klik 'Tetap di Halaman Ini' untuk menunggu simpan otomatis. Klik ‘Tinggalkan Halaman Ini’ untuk membatalkan semua perubahan yang belum disimpan.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/it.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/it.json index 1466433d69..25c0b52cfc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/it.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/it.json @@ -239,6 +239,7 @@ "textCancel": "Annulla", "textCellMargins": "Margini di cella", "textCentered": "Centrato", + "textChangeShape": "Cambia forma", "textChart": "Grafico", "textClassic": "Classico", "textClose": "Chiudere", @@ -375,7 +376,6 @@ "textWrap": "Avvolgere", "textWrappingStyle": "Stile di disposizione testo", "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image" }, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json index b8e03b19b7..0f09ea9270 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json @@ -554,6 +554,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "ファイルには自動マクロが含まれています。
          マクロを実行しますか？", "textNo": "いいえ", "textNoLicenseTitle": "ライセンス制限に達しました", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textOk": "OK", "textPaidFeature": "有料機能", "textRemember": "選択を覚える", @@ -567,6 +568,7 @@ "titleServerVersion": "編集者が更新された", "titleUpdateVersion": "バージョンが変更されました", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "あなたの{0}は編集可能な形式に変換されます。これには時間がかかる場合があります。変換後のドキュメントは、テキストを編集できるように最適化されるため、特に元のファイルに多くのグラフィックが含まれている場合、元の {0} と全く同じようには見えないかもしれません。", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名ユーザーのアクセスは拒否されます。
          このドキュメントは閲覧専用に開かれます。", "warnLicenseBefore": "ライセンスが無効になっています。
          管理者までご連絡ください。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "％１エディター　時接続数の制限に達しました。この文書が見るだけのために開かれる。詳細についてはアドミニストレータを連絡してください。", "warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの有効期限が切れています。ライセンスを更新してページをリロードしてください。", @@ -575,9 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "％1エディターのユーザー制限に達しました。 詳細についてはアドミニストレータを連絡してください。", "warnNoLicense": "％１エディター　時接続数の制限に達しました。この文書が見るだけのために開かれる。個人的なアップグレード条件については、％1営業チームを連絡してください。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "％1エディターのユーザー制限に達しました。 個人的なアップグレード条件については、％1営業チームを連絡してください。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限がありません！", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限がありません！" }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "保護されたファイル", @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "いいえ", "textNoChanges": "変更不可 (閲覧のみ)", "textNoCharacters": "印刷されない文字", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "ファイルを開くためにパスワードを入力してください", "textOrientation": "向き", @@ -724,8 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "コンコース", "txtScheme7": "株主資本", "txtScheme8": "フロー", - "txtScheme9": "ファウンドリ", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "ファウンドリ" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "保存されていない変更があります。自動保存を待つように「このページから移動しない」をクリックしてください。保存されていない変更を破棄ように「このページから移動する」をクリックしてください。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json index f6100d8f97..5ea583bcf7 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json @@ -234,6 +234,7 @@ "textBullets": "Opsommingstekens", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Opsommingstekens en nummers", "textCellMargins": "Celmarges", + "textChangeShape": "Vorm wijzigen", "textChart": "Grafiek", "textClose": "Sluiten", "textColor": "Kleur", @@ -324,7 +325,6 @@ "textAugust": "August", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCentered": "Centered", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClassic": "Classic", "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", "textCurrent": "Current", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json index 9dcf4e3d81..c71eca3535 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -550,6 +550,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "O ficheiro contém macros automáticas.
          Deseja executar as macros?", "textNo": "Não", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Limite de licença atingido", + "textNoMatches": "Sem correspondência", "textOk": "Aceitar", "textPaidFeature": "Funcionalidade paga", "textRemember": "Memorizar a minha escolha", @@ -575,7 +576,6 @@ "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "Your {0} will be converted to an editable format. This may take a while. The resulting document will be optimized to allow you to edit the text, so it might not look exactly like the original {0}, especially if the original file contained lots of graphics.", "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." }, @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "Não", "textNoChanges": "Sem alterações (apenas leitura)", "textNoCharacters": "Caracteres não imprimíveis", + "textNoMatches": "Sem correspondência", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "Introduza a palavra-passe para abrir o ficheiro", "textOrientation": "Orientação", @@ -692,6 +693,7 @@ "textTop": "Cima", "textTrackedChanges": "Alterações registadas", "textUnitOfMeasurement": "Unidade de medida", + "textUnprotect": "Desproteger", "textUploaded": "Carregado", "textVerify": "Verificar", "textWords": "Palavras", @@ -722,9 +724,7 @@ "txtScheme7": "Equidade", "txtScheme8": "Fluxo", "txtScheme9": "Fundição", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", - "textUnprotect": "Unprotect", "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document" }, "Toolbar": { diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/si.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/si.json index 1e520c0097..52e7a29b38 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/si.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/si.json @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ "textBack": "ආපසු", "textEditor": "ලේඛන සංස්කරකය", "textEmail": "වි-තැපෑල", - "textPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "textPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "textTel": "දු.ක.", "textVersion": "අනුවාදය" }, @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ "menuEdit": "සංස්කරණය", "menuEditLink": "සබැඳිය සංස්කරණය", "menuJoinList": "කලින් ලේඛනයට එක්වන්න", - "menuMerge": "සංයුක්ත", + "menuMerge": "ඒකාබද්ධ", "menuMore": "තව", "menuOpenLink": "සබැඳිය විවෘත කරන්න", "menuReview": "පෙරදසුන", @@ -554,6 +554,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "ගොනුවේ ස්වයංක්‍රීය සාර්ව අඩංගු වේ.
          ඔබට සාර්ව ධාවනයට වුවමනාද?", "textNo": "නැහැ", "textNoLicenseTitle": "බලපත්‍රයේ සීමාවට ලඟාවුණි", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textOk": "හරි", "textPaidFeature": "ගෙවන විශේෂාංගයකි", "textRemember": "මාගේ තේරීම මතක තබාගන්න", @@ -567,6 +568,7 @@ "titleServerVersion": "සංස්කරකය යාවත්කාල විය", "titleUpdateVersion": "අනුවාදය වෙනස් විය", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "ඔබගේ {0} සංස්කරණය කළ හැකි ආකෘතියකට හරවනු ඇත. මෙයට යම් කාලයක් ගත වීමට හැකිය. ප්‍රතිඵලයක් ලෙස ලැබෙන ලේඛනය ඔබට පෙළ සංස්කරණය කිරීමට ඉඩ සලසන පරිදි ප්‍රශස්ත කෙරේ, එබැවින් එය තත්‍වාකාරයෙන් මුල් {0} මෙන් නොපෙනෙනු ඇත, උදා: මුල් ගොනුවේ විත්‍රණ බොහෝ ප්‍රමාණයක් තිබේ නම්.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික පරිශ්‍රීලකයින් සඳහා ප්‍රවේශය ප්‍රතික්‍ෂේපිතයි.
          මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වනු ඇත.", "warnLicenseBefore": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත.
          කරුණාකර ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ. තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnLicenseExp": "ඔබගේ බලපත්‍රය කල් ඉකුත්ය. බලපත්‍රය යාවත්කාල කර පිටුව නැවුම් කරන්න.", @@ -575,9 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක සඳහා පරිශීලක සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnNoLicense": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ. පුද්ගලික උත්ශ්‍රේණි නියම සඳහා %1 අලෙවි කණ්ඩායම අමතන්න.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක සඳහා පරිශීලක සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. පුද්ගලික උත්ශ්‍රේණි නියම සඳහා %1 අලෙවි කණ්ඩායම අමතන්න.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "ඔබට මෙම ගොනුව සංස්කරණයට අවසර නැත.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "ඔබට මෙම ගොනුව සංස්කරණයට අවසර නැත." }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "රක්‍ෂිත ගොනුවකි", @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "නැහැ", "textNoChanges": "වෙනස්කම් නැත (කියවීමට පමණි)", "textNoCharacters": "මුද්‍රණය නොවන අකුරු", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textOk": "හරි", "textOpenFile": "ගොනුව විවෘත කිරීමට මුරපදයක් යොදන්න", "textOrientation": "හැඩගැස්ම", @@ -724,8 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "ජනසමූහය", "txtScheme7": "සමකොටස්", "txtScheme8": "ගලායාම", - "txtScheme9": "වාත්තු පොළ", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "වාත්තු පොළ" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "ඔබ සතුව නොසුරකින ලද වෙනස්කම් තිබේ. ස්වයං සුරැකීම සඳහා රැඳෙන්න 'මෙම පිටුවෙහි රැඳී සිටින්න' ඔබන්න. නොසුරකින ලද සියළුම වෙනස්කම් ඉවත දැමීමට 'මෙම පිටුවෙන් ඉවත් වන්න' ඔබන්න.", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json index 2a9d8e57ac..c53166ee75 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json @@ -236,6 +236,7 @@ "textBullets": "Odrážky", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Odrážky & Číslovanie", "textCellMargins": "Okraje bunky", + "textChangeShape": "Zmeniť tvar", "textChart": "Graf", "textClose": "Zatvoriť", "textColor": "Farba", @@ -344,7 +345,6 @@ "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCentered": "Centered", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClassic": "Classic", "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", "textCurrent": "Current", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json index 9ca6dffa2b..b224f986d2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ "textBack": "Nazaj", "textCancel": "Zapri", "textImage": "Slika", + "textShape": "Oblika", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textBelowText": "Below text", "textBottomOfPage": "Bottom of page", @@ -58,7 +59,6 @@ "textRows": "Rows", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", "textSectionBreak": "Section Break", - "textShape": "Shape", "textStartAt": "Start At", "textTable": "Table", "textTableContents": "Table of Contents", @@ -82,6 +82,7 @@ "textHighlight": "Barva za označevanje besedila", "textImage": "Slika", "textNoContextual": "Dodajte interval med odstavki istega sloga", + "textShape": "Oblika", "textShd": "Barva ozadja", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAllChangesAcceptedPreview": "All changes accepted (Preview)", @@ -148,7 +149,6 @@ "textReview": "Review", "textReviewChange": "Review Change", "textRight": "Align right", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings", "textSmallCaps": "Small caps", "textSpacing": "Spacing", @@ -225,9 +225,12 @@ "textBack": "Nazaj", "textBackground": "Ozadje", "textCancel": "Zapri", + "textChangeShape": "Spremeni obliko", "textHighlightColor": "Barva za označevanje besedila", "textHyperlink": "Hiperpovezava", "textImage": "Slika", + "textRemoveShape": "Odstrani obliko", + "textShape": "Oblika", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAllCaps": "All caps", "textAllowOverlap": "Allow overlap", @@ -243,7 +246,6 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", "textCellMargins": "Cell Margins", "textCentered": "Centered", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textChart": "Chart", "textClassic": "Classic", "textClose": "Close", @@ -330,7 +332,6 @@ "textRefreshEntireTable": "Refresh entire table", "textRefreshPageNumbersOnly": "Refresh page numbers only", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", "textRemoveTableContent": "Remove table of contents", "textRepeatAsHeaderRow": "Repeat as Header Row", @@ -346,7 +347,6 @@ "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", "textSeptember": "September", "textSettings": "Settings", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSimple": "Simple", "textSize": "Size", "textSmallCaps": "Small Caps", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sv.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sv.json index df9e441d31..4470b24603 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sv.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/sv.json @@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ "textCenterBottom": "Centrerad nederkant", "textCenterTop": "Centrerad överkant", "textComment": "Kommentera", + "textShape": "Form", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textColumnBreak": "Column Break", "textColumns": "Columns", @@ -58,7 +59,6 @@ "textRows": "Rows", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", "textSectionBreak": "Section Break", - "textShape": "Shape", "textStartAt": "Start At", "textTable": "Table", "textTableContents": "Table of Contents", @@ -97,6 +97,7 @@ "textNoContextual": "Lägg till intervall mellan stycken i samma stil", "textNum": "Ändra numrering", "textRight": "Justera till höger", + "textShape": "Form", "textShd": "Bakgrundsfärg", "textTabs": "Byt flik", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", @@ -149,7 +150,6 @@ "textResolve": "Resolve", "textReview": "Review", "textReviewChange": "Review Change", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings", "textSmallCaps": "Small caps", "textSpacing": "Spacing", @@ -242,6 +242,7 @@ "textDesign": "Design", "textDifferentFirstPage": "Annan förstasida", "textDifferentOddAndEvenPages": "Olika udda och jämna sidor", + "textShape": "Form", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAmountOfLevels": "Amount of Levels", "textAuto": "Auto", @@ -346,7 +347,6 @@ "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", "textSeptember": "September", "textSettings": "Settings", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSimple": "Simple", "textSize": "Size", "textSmallCaps": "Small Caps", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/uk.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/uk.json index 24e000dfe1..0b60991e13 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/uk.json @@ -236,11 +236,12 @@ "textBullets": "Маркери", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Маркери та нумерація", "textCellMargins": "Поля клітинки", + "textChangeShape": "Змінити фігуру", "textChart": "Діаграма", "textClose": "Закрити", "textColor": "Колір", "textContinueFromPreviousSection": "Продовжити", - "textCustomColor": "Користувальницький колір", + "textCustomColor": "Власний колір", "textDecember": "Грудень", "textDesign": "Вигляд", "textDifferentFirstPage": "Особливий для першої сторінки", @@ -344,7 +345,6 @@ "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCentered": "Centered", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClassic": "Classic", "textCreateTextStyle": "Create new text style", "textCurrent": "Current", @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ "closeButtonText": "Закрити файл", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Увага", "textAbout": "Про програму", - "textApplication": "Додаток", + "textApplication": "Застосунок", "textApplicationSettings": "Налаштування додатка", "textAuthor": "Автор", "textBack": "Назад", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json index cf504629fa..e5f1637965 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -47,6 +47,7 @@ "textOther": "其它", "textPageBreak": "分頁符", "textPageNumber": "頁碼", + "textPasteImageUrl": "貼上圖片網址", "textPictureFromLibrary": "來自圖庫的圖片", "textPictureFromURL": "網址圖片", "textPosition": "位置", @@ -64,8 +65,7 @@ "textTableSize": "表格大小", "textWithBlueLinks": "帶有藍色連結", "textWithPageNumbers": "帶有頁碼", - "txtNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為“ http://www.example.com”的URL。", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為“ http://www.example.com”的URL。" }, "Common": { "Collaboration": { @@ -240,6 +240,7 @@ "textCancel": "取消", "textCellMargins": "儲存格邊距", "textCentered": "置中", + "textChangeShape": "更改形狀", "textChart": "圖表", "textClassic": "經典", "textClose": "關閉", @@ -248,7 +249,10 @@ "textCreateTextStyle": "建立新的文字樣式", "textCurrent": "當前", "textCustomColor": "自訂顏色", + "textCustomStyle": "自訂樣式", "textDecember": "十二月", + "textDeleteImage": "刪除影像", + "textDeleteLink": "刪除連結", "textDesign": "設計", "textDifferentFirstPage": "首頁不同", "textDifferentOddAndEvenPages": "單/雙數頁不同", @@ -373,11 +377,7 @@ "textType": "類型", "textWe": "We", "textWrap": "包覆", - "textWrappingStyle": "包覆風格", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textCustomStyle": "Custom Style", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link" + "textWrappingStyle": "包覆風格" }, "Error": { "convertationTimeoutText": "轉換逾時。", @@ -391,20 +391,28 @@ "errorDataEncrypted": "已收到加密的更改，無法解密。", "errorDataRange": "不正確的資料範圍", "errorDefaultMessage": "錯誤編號：%1", + "errorDirectUrl": "請驗證指向文檔的連結。
          此連結必須是指向要下載文件的直接連結。", "errorEditingDownloadas": "操作文件時發生錯誤
          請將文件備份到本機端。", "errorEmptyTOC": "用選取的文字然後利用樣式庫中的標題風格來創造目錄", "errorFilePassProtect": "此文件使用密碼保護功能，無法開啟。", "errorFileSizeExceed": "此文件大小已超出主機之限制。
          請聯絡您的帳戶管理員。", + "errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "errorKeyEncrypt": "未知密鑰描述符", "errorKeyExpire": "密鑰已過期", "errorLoadingFont": "字型未載入。
          請聯絡文件服務(Document Server)管理員。", "errorMailMergeLoadFile": "載入失敗", "errorMailMergeSaveFile": "合併失敗。", "errorNoTOC": "沒有目錄需要更新。你可以從引用頁來插入。", + "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "您輸入的密碼不正確。請確認大寫鎖定鍵已關閉，並確保使用正確的大小寫。", "errorSessionAbsolute": "該文件編輯時效已欲期。請重新載入此頁面。", "errorSessionIdle": "無 該文件已經有一段時間沒有進行編輯了。 請重新載入頁面。", "errorSessionToken": "主機連線被中斷，請重新載入此頁面。", "errorStockChart": "行序錯誤。要建立股票圖表，請將數據按照以下順序工作表：
          開盤價、最高價、最低價、收盤價。", + "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "輸入的值與欄位格式不符。", "errorToken": "文檔安全令牌的格式不正確。
          請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "errorTokenExpire": "文檔安全令牌已過期。
          請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "網路連接已恢復，文件版本已更改。
          在繼續工作之前，您需要下載文件或複制其內容以確保沒有資料遺失，然後重新整裡此頁面。", @@ -421,19 +429,12 @@ "unknownErrorText": "未知錯誤。", "uploadImageExtMessage": "圖片格式未知。", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "無上傳圖片。", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大為25MB。", - "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
          This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
          The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization.", - "errorTextFormWrongFormat": "The value entered does not match the format of the field." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大為25MB。" }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "載入資料中...", "applyChangesTitleText": "載入資料中", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "操作的大小超過了伺服器設定的限制。
          按下「復原」以取消最後一個動作，或按下「繼續」以在本地保留動作（需下載檔案或複製其內容，以確保不會遺失任何內容）", "downloadMergeText": "載入中...", "downloadMergeTitle": "載入中", "downloadTextText": "文件載入中...", @@ -466,8 +467,7 @@ "txtEditingMode": "設定編輯模式...", "uploadImageTextText": "正在上傳圖片...", "uploadImageTitleText": "上傳圖片中", - "waitText": "請耐心等待...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
          Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost)." + "waitText": "請耐心等待..." }, "Main": { "criticalErrorTitle": "錯誤", @@ -545,6 +545,11 @@ "textClose": "關閉", "textContactUs": "聯絡銷售人員", "textCustomLoader": "很抱歉，您無權變更載入程序。 聯繫我們的業務部門取得報價。", + "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "您可以編輯此文件，但所有更改都將被追蹤。", + "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "您只能在此文件中插入註解。", + "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "您只能在此文件中填寫表單。", + "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "您只能查看此文件。", + "textDocumentProtected": "該檔案受到保護。編輯設定為不可用", "textGuest": "訪客", "textHasMacros": "此檔案包含自動巨集程式。
          是否要運行這些巨集？", "textNo": "沒有", @@ -557,10 +562,14 @@ "textReplaceSuccess": "搜尋已完成。已替換次數：{0}", "textRequestMacros": "有一個巨集指令要求連結至URL。是否允許該要求至%1?", "textYes": "是", + "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "文件已受到保護。", "titleLicenseExp": "憑證過期", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "授權未啟用", "titleServerVersion": "編輯器已更新", "titleUpdateVersion": "版本已更改", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "您的 {0} 將轉換成一份可修改的文件。系統需要處理一段時間。轉換後的文件即可隨之修改，但可能不完全跟您的原 {0} 相同，特別是如果原文件有過多的圖像將會更有差異。", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名使用者無法存取。
          此文件將僅供檢視。", + "warnLicenseBefore": "授權未啟用。
          請聯絡您的管理員。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "您已達到同時連接到 %1 編輯器的限制。此文件將只提供檢視。請聯繫您的管理員以了解更多資訊。", "warnLicenseExp": "您的憑證已過期。請更新您的憑證，然後重新更新頁面。", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "憑證已過期。您無法使用文件編輯功能。請聯絡您的帳號管理員", @@ -568,16 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。請與您的管理員聯繫以了解更多信息。", "warnNoLicense": "您已達到同時連接到 %1 編輯器的限制。此文件將只提供檢視。有關個人升級條款，請聯繫 %1 業務團隊。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。與％1銷售團隊聯繫以了解個人升級條款。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "您沒有編輯這個文件的權限。", - "textDialogProtectedChangesTracked": "You may edit this document, but all changes will be tracked", - "textDialogProtectedEditComments": "You may only insert comments to this document", - "textDialogProtectedFillForms": "You may only fill in forms in this document", - "textDialogProtectedOnlyView": "You may only view this document", - "textDocumentProtected": "The document is protected. Edit settings are not available", - "titleDialogProtectedDocument": "The document is protected", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
          Please contact your administrator." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "您沒有編輯這個文件的權限。" }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "受保護的檔案", @@ -595,6 +595,7 @@ "textCancel": "取消", "textCaseSensitive": "區分大小寫", "textCentimeter": "公分", + "textChangePassword": "變更密碼", "textChooseEncoding": "選擇編碼方式", "textChooseTxtOptions": "選擇文字選項", "textCollaboration": "共同編輯", @@ -604,6 +605,7 @@ "textCommentsDisplay": "顯示回應", "textCreated": "已建立", "textCustomSize": "自訂大小", + "textDialogUnprotect": "輸入密碼以解除對文件的保護", "textDirection": "方向", "textDisableAll": "全部停用", "textDisableAllMacrosWithNotification": "停用所有帶通知的巨集", @@ -621,8 +623,10 @@ "textEnableAll": "全部啟用", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "啟用所有不帶通知的巨集", "textEncoding": "編碼方式", + "textEncryptFile": "檔案加密", "textFastWV": "快速Web預覽", "textFeedback": "反饋與支持", + "textFillingForms": "填寫表單", "textFind": "尋找", "textFindAndReplace": "尋找與取代", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "尋找與全部取代", @@ -642,8 +646,10 @@ "textMargins": "邊界", "textMarginsH": "對於給定的頁面高度，上下邊距太高", "textMarginsW": "給定頁面寬度，左右頁邊距太寬", + "textMobileView": "行動裝置檢視", "textNavigation": "導航", "textNo": "沒有", + "textNoChanges": "沒有變更（唯獨）", "textNoCharacters": "非印刷字符", "textNoMatches": "無匹配", "textOk": "確定", @@ -654,6 +660,7 @@ "textPageSize": "頁面大小", "textParagraphs": "段落", "textPassword": "密碼", + "textPasswordNotMatched": "密碼不符", "textPdfProducer": "PDF產生器", "textPdfTagged": "已標記為PDF", "textPdfVer": "PDF版本", @@ -662,10 +669,12 @@ "textPrint": "列印", "textProtectDocument": "受保護的文件", "textProtection": "保護", + "textProtectTurnOff": "保護已關閉", "textReaderMode": "閱讀模式", "textReplace": "取代", "textReplaceAll": "取代全部", "textRequired": "需要", + "textRequirePassword": "需要密碼", "textResolvedComments": "已解決的註解", "textRestartApplication": "請重新啟動應用程式以讓變更生效", "textRight": "右", @@ -682,12 +691,15 @@ "textSymbols": "符號", "textTitle": "標題", "textTop": "上方", + "textTrackedChanges": "已追蹤的變更", + "textTypeEditing": "編輯類型", "textUnitOfMeasurement": "測量單位", "textUnprotect": "解鎖", "textUploaded": "\n已上傳", "textVerify": "校驗", "textWords": "文字", "textYes": "是", + "titleDialogUnprotect": "解除保護文件", "txtDownloadTxt": "下載 TXT", "txtIncorrectPwd": "密碼錯誤", "txtOk": "確定", @@ -713,19 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "大堂", "txtScheme7": "產權", "txtScheme8": "流程", - "txtScheme9": "鑄造廠", - "textChangePassword": "Change Password", - "textDialogUnprotect": "Enter a password to unprotect document", - "textEncryptFile": "Encrypt File", - "textFillingForms": "Filling forms", - "textMobileView": "Mobile View", - "textNoChanges": "No changes (Read only)", - "textPasswordNotMatched": "Passwords Don’t Match", - "textProtectTurnOff": "Protection is turned off", - "textRequirePassword": "Require Password", - "textTrackedChanges": "Tracked changes", - "textTypeEditing": "Type Of Editing", - "titleDialogUnprotect": "Unprotect Document" + "txtScheme9": "鑄造廠" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "您有未儲存的變更。點擊“留在此頁面”以等待自動儲存。點擊“離開此頁面”以放棄所有未儲存的變更。", @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ "leaveButtonText": "離開這個頁面", "stayButtonText": "保持此頁上", "textOk": "確定", - "textSwitchedMobileView": "Switched to Mobile view", - "textSwitchedStandardView": "Switched to Standard view" + "textSwitchedMobileView": "切換到行動裝置檢視", + "textSwitchedStandardView": "切換到標準檢視" } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json index abaa25bd8d..add70c1e08 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json @@ -554,6 +554,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "这个文件带有自动宏。
          是否要运行宏？", "textNo": "不", "textNoLicenseTitle": "触碰到许可证数量限制。", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textOk": "OK", "textPaidFeature": "付费功能", "textRemember": "记住我的选择", @@ -567,6 +568,7 @@ "titleServerVersion": "编辑器已更新", "titleUpdateVersion": "版本已变化", "warnDownloadAsPdf": "您的 {0} 将转换成一份可修改的文件。系统需要处理一段时间。转换后的文件即可随之修改，但可能不完全跟您的原 {0} 相同，特别是如果原文件有过多的图像将会更有差异。", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "拒绝匿名用户的访问。
          本文档将以仅查看模式而打开。", "warnLicenseBefore": "许可证未激活。
          请联系管理员。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。该文档打开后，你将只能查看。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", "warnLicenseExp": "你的许可证已过期。恳请你更新许可证，然后刷新该页面。", @@ -575,9 +577,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", "warnNoLicense": "你已经触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制. 该文档打开后，你将只能查看。请联系 %1 的销售团队，获取个人升级条款。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。请与 %1 的销售团队联系，以获取个人升级条款。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "你没有编辑这个文件的权限。", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
          This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "你没有编辑这个文件的权限。" }, "Settings": { "advDRMOptions": "受保护的文件", @@ -651,6 +651,7 @@ "textNo": "否", "textNoChanges": "不允许任何更改（只读）", "textNoCharacters": "非打印字符", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textOk": "好", "textOpenFile": "输入密码来打开文件", "textOrientation": "方向", @@ -724,8 +725,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "汇合", "txtScheme7": "公平", "txtScheme8": "流动", - "txtScheme9": "发现", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "发现" }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "你有未保存的修改。点击“留在该页”可等待自动保存完成。点击“离开该页”将丢弃全部未经保存的修改。", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Main.jsx b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Main.jsx index 7fc640fbeb..d033cd1a69 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Main.jsx +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Main.jsx @@ -795,7 +795,7 @@ class MainController extends Component { const { t } = this.props; const storeAppOptions = this.props.storeAppOptions; const props = this.getDocProps(true); - const isProtected = props && (props.isReadOnly || props.isCommentsOnly || props.isFormsOnly || props.isReviewOnly); + const isProtected = props && (props.isReadOnly || props.isCommentsOnly || props.isFormsOnly || props.isReviewOnly || props.isTrackedChanges); let textWarningDialog; if(!storeAppOptions.isReviewOnly) { @@ -822,6 +822,7 @@ class MainController extends Component { } storeAppOptions.setProtection(isProtected); + storeAppOptions.setTypeProtection(props.type); props && this.applyRestrictions(props.type); Common.Notifications.trigger('protect:doclock', props); @@ -852,7 +853,8 @@ class MainController extends Component { storeAppOptions.canComments && this.api.asc_setRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.OnlyComments); storeAppOptions.canFillForms && this.api.asc_setRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.OnlyForms); } else { - this.api.asc_setRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.None); + // this.api.asc_setRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.None); + this.api.asc_setRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.View); } } }; @@ -871,7 +873,8 @@ class MainController extends Component { isReadOnly: type === Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.ReadOnly, isCommentsOnly: type === Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.Comments, isReviewOnly: type === Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.TrackedChanges, - isFormsOnly: type === Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.Forms + isFormsOnly: type === Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.Forms, + isTrackedChanges: type === Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.TrackedChanges }; } diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Toolbar.jsx b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Toolbar.jsx index 9e8ca96577..a0c29b5086 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Toolbar.jsx +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/Toolbar.jsx @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ const ToolbarController = inject('storeAppOptions', 'users', 'storeReview', 'sto f7.popover.close('.document-menu.modal-in', false); - appOptions.changeViewerMode(); + appOptions.changeViewerMode(true); api.asc_addRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.View); } diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/settings/DocumentProtection.jsx b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/settings/DocumentProtection.jsx index 2fd08ed41d..56c0cb6ee9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/settings/DocumentProtection.jsx +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/controller/settings/DocumentProtection.jsx @@ -27,9 +27,10 @@ class ProtectionDocumentController extends React.Component { appOptions.setProtection(true); appOptions.setTypeProtection(typeProtection); - if(typeProtection !== Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.TrackedChanges && !isViewer) { - appOptions.changeViewerMode(); - } + // if(typeProtection !== Asc.c_oAscEDocProtect.TrackedChanges && !isViewer) { + appOptions.changeViewerMode(true); + api.asc_addRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.View); + // } protection.asc_setEditType(typeProtection); protection.asc_setPassword(password); diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/page/main.jsx b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/page/main.jsx index d78a72f2e8..ea6a28c1e9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/page/main.jsx +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/page/main.jsx @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ class MainPage extends Component { f7.popover.close('.document-menu.modal-in', false); f7.navbar.show('.main-navbar', false); - appOptions.changeViewerMode(); + appOptions.changeViewerMode(false); api.asc_removeRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.View) api.asc_addRestriction(Asc.c_oAscRestrictionType.None); }; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/store/appOptions.js b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/store/appOptions.js index 2ca554857d..d876450b0e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/store/appOptions.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/mobile/src/store/appOptions.js @@ -64,10 +64,9 @@ export class storeAppOptions { this.isMobileView = !this.isMobileView; } - isViewer = true; - changeViewerMode() { - this.isViewer = !this.isViewer; + changeViewerMode(value) { + this.isViewer = value; } canViewComments = false; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json index 4de5d37087..1559593afd 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -12,17 +12,17 @@ "PE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "A descarregar apresentação…", "PE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar executar uma ação para a qual não tem permissão.
          Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", "PE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Código de erro: %1", - "PE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "O documento está protegido por palavra-passe e não pode ser aberto.", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "O ficheiro está protegido por palavra-passe e não pode ser aberto.", "PE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "O tamanho do documento excede o limite permitido pelo servidor.
          Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos para mais informações.", - "PE.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "Ocorreu um erro ao guardar o ficheiro. Utilize a opção 'Descarregar como' para guardar o ficheiro no computador ou tente novamente mais tarde.", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "Ocorreu um erro ao guardar o ficheiro. Utilize a opção 'Descarregar como' para guardar o ficheiro no computador ou tente mais tarde.", "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExt": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
          O conteúdo do ficheiro não coincide com a sua extensão.", "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
          O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a um documento de texto (doc, docx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
          O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a um dos seguintes formatos: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
          O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma apresentação (ppt, pptx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
          O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma folha de cálculo (xls, xlsx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "PE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
          Por favor contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "PE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
          Entre em contacto com o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "PE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro foi alterada.
          Antes de poder continuar a trabalhar, é necessário descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e depois voltar a carregar esta página.", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
          Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro alterada.
          Antes de poder trabalhar, tem que descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e, depois, recarregue esta página.", "PE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "De momento, não é possível aceder ao ficheiro.", "PE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "PE.ApplicationController.openErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json index 4f84b76932..a735a603ba 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -15,6 +15,11 @@ "PE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "該文件受密碼保護，無法打開。", "PE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "此檔案超過這一主機限制的大小
          進一步資訊，請聯絡您的文件服務主機的管理者。", "PE.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "儲存文件檔時發生錯誤。請使用 “下載為” 選項將文件存到硬碟，或稍後再試。", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "PE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "PE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "字體未加載。
          請聯繫文件服務器管理員。", "PE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "此文件安全憑證(Security Token)已過期。
          請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "PE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internet連接已恢復，文件版本已更改。
          在繼續工作之前，您需要下載文件或複制其內容以確保沒有丟失，然後重新加載此頁面。", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/app/view/Viewport.js b/apps/presentationeditor/main/app/view/Viewport.js index 8d1db155b7..9a02e0d76d 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/app/view/Viewport.js +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/app/view/Viewport.js @@ -80,6 +80,8 @@ define([ $('body').addClass('chrome'); } + el.on('scroll', function () { el.scrollTop(0); }); + var $container = $('#viewport-vbox-layout', el); var items = $container.find(' > .layout-item'); this.vlayout = new Common.UI.VBoxLayout({ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/az.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/az.json index 19d5eff590..64556d6b5a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/az.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/az.json @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Genişlik", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ Mətn", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Təsvir", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, avtoformada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, formada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlıq", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Diaqram - Təkmilləşdirilmiş Parametrlər", "PE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "{0} üçün defolt formatı təyin edin: \"{1}\"", @@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "En", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ Mətn", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Təsvir", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, avtoformada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, formada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlıq", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Bucaq", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Çevrilmiş", @@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Cədvəl parametrləri", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Mətn Şəkli parametrləri", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Arxa fon rəngi", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Avtoformanı dəyiş", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Formanı dəyiş", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Rəng", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Doldur", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Ön plan rəngi", @@ -1584,7 +1584,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Mətn Araqatı", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ Mətn", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Təsvir", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, avtoformada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, formada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlıq", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Bucaq", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Oxlar", @@ -1768,7 +1768,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Mövzulu Üslub", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ Mətn", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Təsvir", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, avtoformada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Şəkildə, formada, diaqramda və ya cədvəldə hansı məlumatın olduğunu daha yaxşı anlamağa kömək etmək üçün görmə və ya idrak qüsurları olan insanlara oxunacaq vizual obyekt məlumatının alternativ mətn əsaslı təqdimatı.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlıq", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Aşağı", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Defolt kənarları istifadə edin", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/be.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/be.json index 5c6f4fcec7..56dac92fa2 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/be.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/be.json @@ -1594,7 +1594,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Паварочванне па Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтэрнатыўны тэкст", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Апісанне", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, аўтафігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, фігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Загаловак", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Па цэнтры", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "Ад", @@ -2007,7 +2007,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Шырыня", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтэрнатыўны тэкст", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Апісанне", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, аўтафігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, фігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Загаловак", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Вугал", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Па цэнтры", @@ -2108,7 +2108,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Налады табліцы", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Налады Text Art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Колер фону", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змяніць аўтафігуру", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змяніць фігуру", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Колер", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Заліўка", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Колер пярэдняга плану", @@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Водступ вакол тэксту", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтэрнатыўны тэкст", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Апісанне", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, аўтафігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, фігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Загаловак", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Вугал", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрэлкі", @@ -2363,7 +2363,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Стыль з тэмы", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтэрнатыўны тэкст", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Апісанне", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, аўтафігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтэрнатыўная тэкставая падача інфармацыі пра візуальны аб’ект, якая будзе агучвацца для слабавідушчых людзей ці людзей з кагнітыўнымі парушэннямі, каб дапамагчы ім зразумець інфармацыю, якую змяшчае выява, фігура, дыяграма ці табліца.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Загаловак", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Знізу", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Па цэнтры", @@ -2535,7 +2535,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Уставіць гарызантальнае тэкставае поле", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Дадаць гіперспасылку", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Уставіць выяву", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Уставіць аўтафігуру", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Уставіць фігуру", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Уставіць SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Уставіць сімвал", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Уставіць табліцу", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/bg.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/bg.json index c10469c4f6..070e321d96 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/bg.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/bg.json @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Повърхност", "Common.define.effectData.textFillColor": "Цвят на запълване", "Common.define.effectData.textFontColor": "Цвят на шрифта", + "Common.define.effectData.textShape": "Форма", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "Нов Потребителски Цвят", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Няма граници", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Няма граници", @@ -929,7 +930,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Алтернативен текст", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, автосистемата, диаграмата или таблицата.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, формата, диаграмата или таблицата.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заглавие", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Диаграма - Разширени настройки", "PE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Дата и час", @@ -1223,7 +1224,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Алтернативен текст", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, автосистемата, диаграмата или таблицата.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, формата, диаграмата или таблицата.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заглавие", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ъгъл", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Огледален", @@ -1342,7 +1343,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Попълване на текст", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Алтернативен текст", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, автосистемата, диаграмата или таблицата.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, формата, диаграмата или таблицата.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заглавие", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ъгъл", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Cтрелките", @@ -1503,7 +1504,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Няма граници", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Алтернативен текст", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, автосистемата, диаграмата или таблицата.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Алтернативното текстово представяне на визуалната информация за обекта, което ще бъде прочетено на хората с визуални или когнитивни увреждания, за да им помогне да разберат по-добре каква информация има в изображението, формата, диаграмата или таблицата.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заглавие", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Дъно", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Използвайте полетата по подразбиране", @@ -1629,7 +1630,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Вмъкване на уравнение", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Добави връзка", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Вмъкване на изображение", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вмъкване на автоматична форма", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вмъкване на форма", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Вмъкване на таблица", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Вмъкни текстовото поле", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Вмъкни текст Чл", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ca.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ca.json index 9037650565..5c860db3ee 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ca.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ca.json @@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Rotació Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternatiu", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripció", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, autoforma, gràfic o taula.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, forma, gràfic o taula.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Títol", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centra", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "De", @@ -2057,7 +2057,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Amplada", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternatiu", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripció", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, autoforma, gràfic o taula.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, forma, gràfic o taula.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Títol", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centra", @@ -2165,7 +2165,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Configuració de la taula", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Configuració de la galeria de text", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Color de fons", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Canvia la forma automàtica", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Canvia la forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Color", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Emplena", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Color de primer pla", @@ -2224,7 +2224,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Espaiat del text", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternatiu", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripció", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, autoforma, gràfic o taula.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, forma, gràfic o taula.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Títol", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Fletxes", @@ -2420,7 +2420,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Estil amb tema", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternatiu", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripció", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, autoforma, gràfic o taula.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La representació de la informació dels objectes visuals, que es basa en text alternatiu, es llegirà en veu alta per ajudar les persones amb dificultats de visió o cognició perquè puguin comprendre millor la informació que hi ha a la imatge, forma, gràfic o taula.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Títol", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Inferior", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centra", @@ -2593,7 +2593,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserir un quadre de text horitzontal", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Afegeix un enllaç", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insereix una imatge", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insereix una forma automàtica", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insereix una forma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Inserir una imatge SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insereix un símbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insereix una taula", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/da.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/da.json index 5050fe1047..ed7cc79cd6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/da.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/da.json @@ -92,10 +92,10 @@ "Common.UI.Window.yesButtonText": "Ja", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "cm", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtPt": "pt", - "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Adresse:", + "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "adresse:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "Licenstager", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "Licensgiver", - "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "Email:", + "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "email:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Drevet af", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tlf.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Version", @@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Bredde", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ tekst", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autofigur, diagram eller tabel.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, figur, diagram eller tabel.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Diagram - avancerede indstillinger", "PE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Indstil standardformat for {0}: \"{1}\"", @@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Bredde", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ tekst", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autofigur, diagram eller tabel.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, figur, diagram eller tabel.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Vinkel", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Vendt", @@ -1585,7 +1585,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Tekst fyld", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ tekst", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autofigur, diagram eller tabel.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, figur, diagram eller tabel.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Vinkel", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pile", @@ -1770,7 +1770,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Tematiseret stil", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativ tekst", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autofigur, diagram eller tabel.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive oplæst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer, for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, figur, diagram eller tabel.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bund", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Brug standard margener", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/de.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/de.json index 7351b2a384..2c30c2a420 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/de.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/de.json @@ -468,6 +468,13 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Strg", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Umschalt", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "schwarz", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "blau", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "grau", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "grün", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "rot", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "weiß", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "gelb", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Adresse: ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LIZENZNEHMER", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LIZENZGEBER", @@ -544,6 +551,12 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "zum Einfügen", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Ladevorgang...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Freigabeeinstellungen", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Radierer", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Auswahl", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Radierer", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Textmarker", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Stift", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Auswahl", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Diagramm bearbeiten", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Schließen", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Speichern und beenden", @@ -750,7 +763,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignDialog.textItalic": "Kursiv", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textNameError": "Der Name des Signaturgebers darf nicht leer sein.", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textPurpose": "Zweck der Signierung dieses Dokuments", - "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelect": "Wählen", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelect": "Auswahl", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelectImage": "Bild auswählen", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSignature": "Wie sieht Signatur aus:", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textTitle": "Dokument signieren", @@ -1161,7 +1174,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_classic": "Klassisch", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_corner": "Ecke", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_dotted": "Gepunktet", - "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_green": "Grün", + "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_green": "grün", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_green_leaf": "Grünes Blatt ", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_lines": "Linien", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_office": "Büro", @@ -1592,7 +1605,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Y-Rotation", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativer Text", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschreibung", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, AutoForm, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, Form, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Zentriert", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "Ab", @@ -1663,7 +1676,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.removeHyperlinkText": "Hyperlink entfernen", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.rightText": "Rechts", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.rowText": "Zeile", - "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectText": "Wählen", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectText": "Auswahl", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.spellcheckText": "Rechtschreibprüfung", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "Zelle teilen...", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "Zelle teilen", @@ -2005,7 +2018,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Breite", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativer Text", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschreibung", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, AutoForm, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, Form, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Winkel", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Zentriert", @@ -2106,7 +2119,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Tabellen-Einstellungen", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "TextArt-Einstellungen", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Hintergrundfarbe", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "AutoForm ändern", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Form ändern", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farbe", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Füllung", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Vordergrundfarbe", @@ -2142,7 +2155,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "90 Grad drehen", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotation", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Bild auswählen", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Wählen", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Auswahl", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Ausdehnung", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Stil", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textTexture": "Aus Textur", @@ -2165,7 +2178,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Ränder um den Text", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativer Text", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschreibung", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, AutoForm, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, Form, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Winkel", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pfeile", @@ -2248,7 +2261,7 @@ "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textReset": "Änderungen zurücksetzen", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textSelectImage": "Bild auswählen", - "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textSelectTexture": "Wählen", + "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textSelectTexture": "Auswahl", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textStretch": "Ausdehnung", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textStyle": "Stil", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textTexture": "Aus Textur", @@ -2361,7 +2374,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Designformatvorlage", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternativer Text", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschreibung", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, AutoForm, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Die alternative textbasierte Darstellung der visuellen Objektinformation, die den Menschen mit geistigen Behinderungen oder Sehbehinderungen vorgelesen wird, um besser verstehen zu können, was genau auf dem Bild, Form, Diagramm oder der Tabelle dargestellt wurde.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Unten", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Zentriert", @@ -2407,7 +2420,7 @@ "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textPatternFill": "Muster", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textPosition": "Stellung", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", - "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Wählen", + "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Auswahl", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textStretch": "Ausdehnung", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textStyle": "Stil", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Vorlage", @@ -2497,6 +2510,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Hochgestellt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Animation", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Zusammenarbeit", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Zeichnen", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Datei", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Startseite", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Einfügen", @@ -2533,7 +2547,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Horizontales Textfeld einfügen", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Hyperlink hinzufügen", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Bild einfügen", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "AutoForm einfügen", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Form einfügen", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "SmartArt einfügen", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Symbol einfügen", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Tabelle einfügen", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/el.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/el.json index 06fb6510c8..7759d3d672 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/el.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/el.json @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Κλείσιμο", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "Το αντικείμενο είναι απενεργοποιημένο επειδή χρησιμοποιείται από άλλο χρήστη.", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningTitle": "Προειδοποίηση", + "Common.Controllers.ExternalOleEditor.textAnonymous": "Ανώνυμος", "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Περιοχή", "Common.define.chartData.textAreaStacked": "Σωρευμένη περιοχή", "Common.define.chartData.textAreaStackedPer": "100% Σωρευμένη περιοχή", @@ -294,6 +295,11 @@ "Common.UI.Window.yesButtonText": "Ναι", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "εκ", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtPt": "pt", + "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Μαύρο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "Μπλε", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "Ανοιχτό πράσινο", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "Καφέ", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "Διεύθυνση: ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "ΑΔΕΙΟΔΕΚΤΗΣ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "ΑΔΕΙΟΔΟΤΗΣ", @@ -366,6 +372,10 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "για Επικόλληση", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Φόρτωση...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Ρυθμίσεις Διαμοιρασμού", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Επιλογή", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Γόμα", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Επιλογή", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Μέγεθος", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Συντάκτης Γραφήματος", "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Οι χρήστες που επεξεργάζονται το αρχείο:", "Common.Views.Header.textAddFavorite": "Σημείωση ως αγαπημένο", @@ -416,6 +426,7 @@ "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Επιλογή γλώσσας εγγράφου", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBulleted": "Με κουκίδες", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "Αριθμημένο", + "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Επιλογή από", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Αλλαγή κουκίδων", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Κουκκίδα", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Χρώμα", @@ -610,6 +621,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtUntitled": "Άτιτλο", "PE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Φόρτωση δεδομένων...", "PE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Φόρτωση Δεδομένων", + "PE.Controllers.Main.confirmMaxChangesSize": "Το μέγεθος των ενεργειών υπερβαίνει τον περιορισμό που έχει οριστεί για τον διακομιστή σας.
          Πατήστε \"Αναίρεση\" για να ακυρώσετε την τελευταία σας ενέργεια ή πατήστε \"Συνέχεια\" για να διατηρήσετε την ενέργεια τοπικά (πρέπει να κατεβάσετε το αρχείο ή να αντιγράψετε το περιεχόμενό του για να βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν θα χαθεί τίποτα).", "PE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Υπέρβαση χρονικού ορίου μετατροπής.", "PE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Πατήστε \"Εντάξει\" για να επιστρέψετε στη λίστα εγγράφων.", "PE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Σφάλμα", @@ -705,6 +717,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Σχήμα", "PE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Αυστηρή κατάσταση", "PE.Controllers.Main.textText": "Κείμενο", + "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryQuickPrint": "Έχετε επιλέξει Γρήγορη εκτύπωση: ολόκληρο το έγγραφο θα εκτυπωθεί στον τελευταίο επιλεγμένο ή προεπιλεγμένο εκτυπωτή.
          Θέλετε να συνεχίσετε;", "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Οι λειτουργίες Αναίρεση/Επανάληψη είναι απενεργοποιημένες στην κατάσταση Γρήγορης συν-επεξεργασίας.
          Κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί 'Αυστηρή κατάσταση' για να μεταβείτε στην Αυστηρή κατάσταση συν-επεξεργασίας όπου επεξεργάζεστε το αρχείο χωρίς παρέμβαση άλλων χρηστών και στέλνετε τις αλλαγές σας αφού τις αποθηκεύσετε. Η μετάβαση μεταξύ των δύο καταστάσεων γίνεται μέσω των Προηγμένων Ρυθμίσεων.", "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "Οι λειτουργίες Αναίρεση/Επανάληψη απενεργοποιούνται για τη λειτουργία γρήγορης συν-επεξεργασίας.", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Η άδεια έληξε", @@ -973,6 +986,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Παρακαλούμε, περιμένετε...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Η εφαρμογή έχει πενιχρές δυνατότητες στον IE9. Δοκιμάστε IE10 ή νεώτερο.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Η τρέχουσα ρύθμιση εστίασης του περιηγητή σας δεν υποστηρίζεται πλήρως. Παρακαλούμε επιστρέψτε στην προεπιλεγμένη εστίαση πατώντας Ctrl+0.", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Δεν επιτρέπεται η πρόσβαση για ανώνυμους χρήστες.
          Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοίξει μόνο για προβολή.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Έχετε φτάσει το όριο για ταυτόχρονες συνδέσεις με συντάκτες %1. Αυτό το έγγραφο θα ανοιχτεί μόνο για προβολή.​​
          Παρακαλούμε επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας για περισσότερες πληροφορίες.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Η άδειά σας έχει λήξει.
          Παρακαλούμε ενημερώστε την άδεια χρήσης σας και ανανεώστε τη σελίδα.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Η άδεια έληξε.
          Δεν έχετε πρόσβαση στη δυνατότητα επεξεργασίας εγγράφων.
          Επικοινωνήστε με τον διαχειριστή σας.", @@ -1363,7 +1377,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Πλάτος", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Εναλλακτικό Κείμενο", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Περιγραφή", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, αυτόματο σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Τίτλος", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Κέντρο", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "Από", @@ -1386,11 +1400,14 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Από πάνω", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Προσθήκη Σχολίου", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.addToLayoutText": "Προσθήκη στη Διάταξη", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedChartText": "Προηγμένες ρυθμίσεις γραφήματος", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedImageText": "Προηγμένες Ρυθμίσεις Εικόνας", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedParagraphText": "Προηγμένες Ρυθμίσεις Παραγράφου", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedShapeText": "Προηγμένες Ρυθμίσεις Σχήματος", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "Προηγμένες Ρυθμίσεις Πίνακα", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "Στοίχιση", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.allLinearText": "Όλα - Γραμμικό", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.allProfText": "Όλα - Επαγγελματικό", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "Από κάτω", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Κατακόρυφη Στοίχιση Κελιού", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Κελί", @@ -1615,6 +1632,7 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Θέμα", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Τίτλος", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Μεταφορτώθηκε", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtAccessRights": "Δικαιώματα πρόσβασης", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Αλλαγή δικαιωμάτων πρόσβασης", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Άτομα που έχουν δικαιώματα", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Προειδοποίηση", @@ -1649,6 +1667,7 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Απενεργοποιημένο", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Αποθήκευση ενδιάμεσων εκδόσεων", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Κάθε Λεπτό", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAdvancedSettings": "Προηγμένες ρυθμίσεις", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Προβολή Όλων", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Επιλογής αυτόματης διόρθωσης...", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Προεπιλεγμένη κατάσταση λανθάνουσας μνήμης", @@ -1665,6 +1684,7 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Εγγενής", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Διόρθωση Κειμένου", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Σημείο", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtQuickPrintTip": "Το έγγραφο θα εκτυπωθεί στον τελευταίο επιλεγμένο ή προεπιλεγμένο εκτυπωτή", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Ενεργοποίηση Όλων", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Ενεργοποίηση όλων των μακροεντολών χωρίς ειδοποίηση", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Έλεγχος Ορθογραφίας", @@ -1736,7 +1756,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Πλάτος", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Εναλλακτικό Κείμενο", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Περιγραφή", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, αυτόματο σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Τίτλος", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Γωνία", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Κέντρο", @@ -1825,7 +1845,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Ρυθμίσεις πίνακα", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Ρυθμίσεις Τεχνοκειμένου", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Χρώμα παρασκηνίου", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Αλλαγή Αυτόματου Σχήματος", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Αλλαγή Σχήματος", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Χρώμα", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Γέμισμα", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Χρώμα προσκηνίου", @@ -1884,7 +1904,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Απόσταση Κειμένου", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Εναλλακτικό Κείμενο", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Περιγραφή", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, αυτόματο σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Τίτλος", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Γωνία", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Βέλη", @@ -2075,7 +2095,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Θεματική Τεχνοτροπία", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Εναλλακτικό Κείμενο", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Περιγραφή", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, αυτόματο σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Η εναλλακτική, κειμενική αναπαράσταση των πληροφοριών του οπτικού αντικειμένου, που θα αναγνωστεί σε ανθρώπους με προβλήματα όρασης ή γνωστικές αδυναμίες, για να κατανοήσουν καλύτερα τις πληροφορίες που περιέχονται στην εικόνα, σχήμα, γράφημα ή πίνακα.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Τίτλος", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Κάτω", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Κέντρο", @@ -2209,6 +2229,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Εκθέτης", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Animation", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Συνεργασία", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Σχεδίαση", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Αρχείο", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Αρχική", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Εισαγωγή", @@ -2243,7 +2264,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Εισαγωγή εξίσωσης", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Προσθήκη υπερσυνδέσμου", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Εισαγωγή εικόνας", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Εισαγωγή αυτόματου σχήματος", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Εισαγωγή σχήματος", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Εισαγωγή συμβόλου", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Εισαγωγή πίνακα", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Εισαγωγή πλαισίου κειμένου", @@ -2267,6 +2288,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Επανάληψη", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "Αποθήκευση", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "Αποθηκεύστε τις αλλαγές σας για να τις δουν οι άλλοι χρήστες.", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSelectAll": "Επιλογή όλων ", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipShapeAlign": "Στοίχιση σχήματος", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipShapeArrange": "Τακτοποίηση σχήματος", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSlideNum": "Εισαγωγή αριθμού διαφάνειας", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/en.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/en.json index a186de81a5..4f6b7a6192 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/en.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/en.json @@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Y rotation", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative text", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, shape, chart, or table.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Center", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "From", @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Width", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative text", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, shape, chart, or table.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Center", @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Table settings", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Text Art settings", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Background color", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Change Autoshape", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Change Shape", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Color", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Fill", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Foreground color", @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Text padding", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative text", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, shape, chart, or table.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Arrows", @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Themed Style", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative text", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, shape, chart, or table.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bottom", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Center", @@ -2594,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Insert horizontal text box", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Add hyperlink", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insert image", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insert autoshape", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insert shape", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Insert SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insert symbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insert table", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/es.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/es.json index d768358851..217b81c4f4 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/es.json @@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Gráfico circular", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "Circular 3D", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Dispersión)", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "Radial", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarFilled": "Radial relleno", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarMarker": "Radial con marcadores", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "Dispersión", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "Dispersión con líneas rectas", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "Dispersión con líneas rectas y marcadores", @@ -416,6 +419,7 @@ "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "Crear copia", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "Abrir en solo lectura", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textAutoColor": "Automático", + "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textEyedropper": "Cuentagotas", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "Más colores", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Sin bordes", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Sin bordes", @@ -468,6 +472,44 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Control", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Mayús", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "Acento", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "Aguamarina", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Fondo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Negro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "Azul", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "Verde vivo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "Marrón", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "Azul oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "Más oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "Gris oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "Verde oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "Púrpura oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "Rojo oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "Verde azulado oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "Amarillo oscuro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "Oro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "Gris", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "Verde", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "Añil", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLavender": "Lavanda", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "Azul claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLighter": "Más claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "Gris claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "Verde claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightOrange": "Naranja claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightYellow": "Amarillo claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtOrange": "Naranja", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPink": "Rosa", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPurple": "Púrpura", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "Rojo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "Rosa claro", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "Azul cielo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "Verde azulado", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "Texto", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTurquosie": "Turquesa", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtViolet": "Violeta", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "Blanco", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "Amarillo", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "dirección: ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LICENCIATARIO ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENCIANTE", @@ -544,6 +586,14 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "para pegar", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Cargando...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Ajustes de uso compartido", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Borrador", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Seleccionar", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Borrador", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Marcador de resaltado", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "mm", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Bolígrafo", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Seleccionar", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Tamaño", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Editor de gráficos", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Cerrar", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Guardar y salir", @@ -917,6 +967,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "Las funciones «Deshacer/Rehacer» se desactivan en el modo de «coedición rápido».", "PE.Controllers.Main.textUndo": "Deshacer", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Licencia ha expirado", + "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseNotActive": "Licencia no activa", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "El editor se ha actualizado", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtAddFirstSlide": "Haga clic para añadir la primera diapositiva", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtAddNotes": "Haga clic para añadir notas", @@ -1182,6 +1233,8 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Por favor, espere...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Esta aplicación tiene bajas capacidades en IE9. Utilice IE10 o superior", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "La configuración actual de 'zoom' de su navegador no es compatible por completo. Por favor, restablezca el 'zoom' predeterminado pulsando Ctrl+0.", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acceso denegado para usuarios anónimos.
          Este documento se abrirá solo para su visualización.", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "Licencia no activa.
          Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá en modo de solo lectura.
          Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado.
          Por favor, actualice su licencia y después recargue la página.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Licencia expirada.
          No tiene acceso a la funcionalidad de edición de documentos.
          Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", @@ -1592,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Rotación Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripción", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, autoforma, gráfico o tabla.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, forma, gráfico o tabla.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centrado", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "De", @@ -2005,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Ancho", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripción", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, autoforma, gráfico o tabla.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, forma, gráfico o tabla.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centrada", @@ -2086,10 +2139,16 @@ "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Párrafo - Ajustes avanzados", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Auto", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Todas las diapositivas", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Imprimir en ambas caras", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "Girar páginas por borde largo", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "Girar páginas por borde corto", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Copias", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Diapositiva actual", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Impresión personalizada", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtEmptyTable": "No hay nada que imprimir porque la presentación está vacía", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "de {0}", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Imprimir a una cara", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "Imprimir solo en una cara de la página", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Diapositiva", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "Número de diapositiva no válido", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPages": "Diapositivas", @@ -2097,6 +2156,7 @@ "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Imprimir", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Imprimir en PDF", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Intervalo de impresión", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Caras de impresión", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Ajustes de gráfico", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "Ajustes de imagen", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "Ajustes de párrafo", @@ -2106,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Ajustes de tabla", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Ajustes de galería de texto", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Color del fondo", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar autoforma", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Color", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Relleno", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Color de primer plano", @@ -2165,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Espaciado del texto", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripción", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, autoforma, gráfico o tabla.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, forma, gráfico o tabla.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Flechas", @@ -2361,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Estilo temático", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descripción", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, autoforma, gráfico o tabla.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representación de texto alternativa de la información sobre el objeto visual que se leerá para las personas con deficiencia visual o deterioro cognitivo para ayudarlos a entender mejor la información que contiene la imagen, forma, gráfico o tabla.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Inferior", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centrada", @@ -2497,6 +2557,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Superíndice", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Animación", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Colaboración", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Dibujar", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Archivo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Inicio", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Insertar", @@ -2533,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Insertar cuadro de texto horizontal", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Añadir hipervínculo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insertar imagen", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insertar autoforma", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insertar forma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Insertar SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insertar símbolo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insertar tabla", @@ -2602,9 +2663,9 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.strDuration": "Duración ", "PE.Views.Transitions.strStartOnClick": "Iniciar al hacer clic", "PE.Views.Transitions.textBlack": "En negro", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottom": "Abajo ", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomLeft": "Abajo a la izquierda", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomRight": "Abajo a la derecha", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottom": "Desde abajo", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomLeft": "Desde la parte inferior izquierda", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomRight": "Desde la parte inferior derecha", "PE.Views.Transitions.textClock": "Reloj", "PE.Views.Transitions.textClockwise": "En el sentido de las agujas del reloj", "PE.Views.Transitions.textCounterclockwise": "En el sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj", @@ -2612,15 +2673,15 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.textFade": "Atenuación", "PE.Views.Transitions.textHorizontalIn": "Horizontal entrante", "PE.Views.Transitions.textHorizontalOut": "Horizontal saliente", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textLeft": "A la izquierda", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textLeft": "Desde la izquierda", "PE.Views.Transitions.textNone": "Ninguna", "PE.Views.Transitions.textPush": "Empuje", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textRight": "A la derecha", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textRight": "Desde la derecha", "PE.Views.Transitions.textSmoothly": "Suavemente", "PE.Views.Transitions.textSplit": "Dividir", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTop": "Arriba", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopLeft": "Arriba a la izquierda", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopRight": "Arriba a la derecha", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTop": "Desde arriba", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopLeft": "Desde la parte superior izquierda", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopRight": "Desde la parte superior derecha", "PE.Views.Transitions.textUnCover": "Revelar", "PE.Views.Transitions.textVerticalIn": "Vertical entrante", "PE.Views.Transitions.textVerticalOut": "Vertical saliente", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/eu.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/eu.json index a204b062f5..53ec67c768 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/eu.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/eu.json @@ -1594,7 +1594,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Y biraketa", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Ordezko testua", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskribapena", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma automatiko, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Izenburua", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Erdia", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "Nork", @@ -2007,7 +2007,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Zabalera", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Ordezko testua", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskribapena", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma automatiko, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Izenburua", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angelua", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Erdia", @@ -2108,7 +2108,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Taularen ezarpenak", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Testu-artearen ezarpenak", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Atzeko planoaren kolorea", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Aldatu forma automatikoa", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Aldatu forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Kolorea", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Bete", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Aurreko planoaren kolorea", @@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Testuaren betegarria", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Ordezko testua", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskribapena", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma automatiko, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Izenburua", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angelua", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Geziak", @@ -2363,7 +2363,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Gaiaren estiloa", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Ordezko testua", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskribapena", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma automatiko, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Objektuaren informazio bisualaren testuan oinarritutako ordezko irudikapena, zeina ikusmen-urritasun edo narriadura kognitiboa duten pertsonei irakurriko zaien; irudi, forma, diagrama edo taulan dagoen informazioa hobeto ulertzen laguntzeko.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Izenburua", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Behean", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Erdia", @@ -2535,7 +2535,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Txertatu testu-koadro horizontala", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Gehitu hiperesteka", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Txertatu irudia", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Txertatu forma automatikoa", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Txertatu forma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Txertatu SmartArt-a", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Txertatu ikurra", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Txertatu taula", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fi.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fi.json index eece9b266f..3dba41314a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fi.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fi.json @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Taulukon asetukset", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Taiteellisen tekstin asetukset", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Taustan väri", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Muuta automaattista muotoa", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Muuta muotoa", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Väri", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Täytä", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Etualan väri", @@ -1303,7 +1303,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Lisää yhtälö", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Lisää linkki", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Lisää Kuva", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Lisää automaattinen muoto", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Lisää muoto", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Lisää taulukko", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Lisää teksti", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Viivaväli", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fr.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fr.json index 737106459a..4d9737b0dd 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fr.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/fr.json @@ -648,9 +648,9 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Fractionner la cellule", "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Sélectionner la langue du document", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBulleted": "à puces", - "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "Numéroté", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Sélectionner à partir de", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Changer de puce", @@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Rotation Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texte de remplacement", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme automatique, du graphique ou du tableau.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme, du graphique ou du tableau.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titre", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Au centre", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "De", @@ -1741,9 +1741,9 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditPoints": "Modifier les points", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "Retourner horizontalement", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Retourner verticalement", - "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textGridlines": "Quadrillage", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textGuides": "Repères", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Diapositive suivante", @@ -1880,7 +1880,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.txtPause": "Pauser la présentation", "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.txtPlay": "Démarrer la présentation", "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.txtPrev": "Diapositive précédente", - "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.txtReset": "Remettre à zéro", + "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.txtReset": "Réinitialiser", "PE.Views.FileMenu.btnAboutCaption": "À propos", "PE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier", "PE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Fermer le menu", @@ -2041,9 +2041,9 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Modifier l'objet", "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitSlide": "Ajuster à la diapositive", "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Retournement", - "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Hauteur", "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°", "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint90": "Faire pivoter à droite de 90°", @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Largeur", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texte de remplacement", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme automatique, du graphique ou du tableau.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme, du graphique ou du tableau.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titre", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Au centre", @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Paramètres du tableau", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Paramètres de texte d'art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Couleur d'arrière-plan", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modifier la forme automatique", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modifier la forme", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Couleur", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Remplissage", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Couleur de premier plan", @@ -2183,9 +2183,9 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Direction", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Pas de modèles", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Retournement", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Dégradé", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint270": "Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°", @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Marges intérieures", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texte de remplacement", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme automatique, du graphique ou du tableau.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme, du graphique ou du tableau.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titre", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Flèches", @@ -2295,9 +2295,9 @@ "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textColor": "Couleur de remplissage", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textDirection": "Direction", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Pas de modèles", - "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textFromStorage": "À partir de l'espace de stockage", - "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textGradient": "Dégradé", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé", "PE.Views.SlideSettings.textImageTexture": "Image ou Texture", @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Style à thème", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texte de remplacement", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme automatique, du graphique ou du tableau.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "La représentation textuelle des informations sur l’objet visuel, qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre le contenu de l’image, de la forme, du graphique ou du tableau.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titre", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "En bas", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Au centre", @@ -2457,8 +2457,8 @@ "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Couleur de remplissage", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Direction", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Pas de modèles", - "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", - "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", + "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textFromFile": "À partir du fichier", + "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textFromUrl": "À partir d'une URL", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textImageTexture": "Image ou texture", @@ -2470,7 +2470,7 @@ "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textStretch": "Stretch", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textStyle": "Style", - "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Template", + "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Modèle", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTexture": "From Texture", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTile": "Tile", "PE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transformer", @@ -2594,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Insérer une zone de texte horizontale", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Ajouter un lien hypertexte", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Insérer une image", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insérer une forme automatique", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Insérer une forme", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Insérer un graphique SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Insérer un symbole", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Insérer un tableau", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/gl.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/gl.json index 8c060c9c6b..148b3676a0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/gl.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/gl.json @@ -1362,7 +1362,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Largura", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrición", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma automática, gráfico ou táboa.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma, gráfico ou táboa.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "De", @@ -1735,7 +1735,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Largura", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrición", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma automática, gráfico ou táboa.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma, gráfico ou táboa.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", @@ -1824,7 +1824,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Configuración da táboa", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Configuración do Text Art ", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Cor de fondo", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar autoforma", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambiar forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Cor", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Encher", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Cor de primeiro plano", @@ -1883,7 +1883,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Marxes interiores", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrición", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma automática, gráfico ou táboa.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma, gráfico ou táboa.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Frechas", @@ -2074,7 +2074,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Estilo temático", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrición", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma automática, gráfico ou táboa.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representación alternativa baseada en texto da información do obxecto visual, que se lerá ás persoas con problemas de visión ou cognitivos para axudalos a comprender mellor que información hai na imaxe, forma, gráfico ou táboa.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Inferior", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", @@ -2242,7 +2242,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Inserir ecuación", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Engadir hiperligazón", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir imaxe", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma automática", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir símbolo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir táboa", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Inserir caixa do texto", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hu.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hu.json index 3a001fbfa6..9ec4904c97 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hu.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hu.json @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENCTULAJDONOS", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-mail:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.: ", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Verzió", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Hozzáadás", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Alkalmazza gépelés közben", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hy.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hy.json index d5521e5ed2..135124d09b 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hy.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/hy.json @@ -586,6 +586,14 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "Փակցնելու համար", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Բեռնում...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Համօգտագործման կարգավորումներ", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "Ջնջիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Ընտրել", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "Ջնջիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Գունանշիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "մմ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Գրիչ", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Ընտրել", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Չափ", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Գծապատկերի խմբագրիչ", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Փակել", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Պահպանել և դուրս գալ", @@ -1225,6 +1233,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Խնդրում ենք սպասել...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Հավելվածը ցածր հնարավորություններ ունի IE9-ի վրա:Օգտագործեք IE10 կամ ավելի բարձր", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Ձեր դիտարկիչի դիտափոխման ներկա կարգավորումը չի աջակցվում ամբողջությամբ։ Ctrl+0 սեղմելով վերադարձեք սկզբնադիր դիտափոխմանը։", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Մուտքն արգելված է անանուն օգտատերերի համար:
          Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "Լիցենզիան ակտիվ չէ:
          Խնդրում ենք կապվել ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ:", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագրիչներին միաժամանակ միանալու սահմանափակմանը։ Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն ընթերցման համար։
          Մանրամասների համար դիմեք վարիչին։", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Ձեր թույլատրագրի ժամկետը սպառվել է։
          Թարմացրեք թույլատրագիրը, ապա՝ էջը։", @@ -2130,10 +2139,16 @@ "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Պարբերություն- ընդլայնված կարգավորումներ", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "ինքնաշխատ", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Բոլոր սլայդները", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Տպել երկու կողմից", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "Շրջել էջերը երկար եզրով", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "Շրջել էջերը կարճ եզրով", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Պատճեններ", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Ընթացիկ սլայդ", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Հարմարեցված տպագրություն", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtEmptyTable": "Տպելու բան չկա, քանի որ ներկայացումը դատարկ է", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "{0}-ից", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Տպել միակողմանի", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "Տպել միայն էջի մի կողմում", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Սահիկ", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "Սլայդի համարն անվավեր է", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPages": "Սահոցներ", @@ -2141,6 +2156,7 @@ "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Տպել", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Տպել PDF-ով", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Տպման տիրույթ", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Տպել կողմերը", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Գծապատկերի կարգավորումներ", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "Նկարի կարգավորումներ", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "Պարբերության կարգավորումներ", @@ -2541,6 +2557,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Վերգիր", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Շարժունացում", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Համագործակցում", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Նկարել", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Ֆայլ", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Գլխավոր", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Զետեղել", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/id.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/id.json index 046677f321..49c7588d53 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/id.json @@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Diagram Lingkaran", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "Pie 3-D", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Scatter)", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "Radar", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "Sebar", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "Diagram sebar dengan garis lurus", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "Diagram sebar dengan garis lurus dan marker", @@ -416,7 +417,7 @@ "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "Buat salinan", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "Buka untuk dilihat", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textAutoColor": "Otomatis", - "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "Tambahkan warna khusus baru", + "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "Lebih banyak warna", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Tidak ada pembatas", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Tidak ada pembatas", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Tidak ada model", @@ -445,8 +446,8 @@ "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplaceAll": "Ganti semua", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "Jangan tampilkan pesan ini lagi", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "Dokumen telah diubah oleh pengguna lain.
          Silakan klik untuk menyimpan perubahan dan memuat ulang pembaruan.", - "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textRecentColors": "Warna Terakhir", - "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Warna Standar", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textRecentColors": "Warna-warna terakhir", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Warna standar", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Warna Tema", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeClassicLight": "Terang Klasik", "Common.UI.Themes.txtThemeContrastDark": "Gelap Kontras", @@ -468,6 +469,34 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textAlt": "Alt", "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Shift", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "Aksen", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "Aqua", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "Latar belakang", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "Hitam", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "Biru", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "Hijau terang", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "Coklat", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "Biru gelap", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "Lebih gelap", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "Kelabu gelap", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "Hijau tua", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "Ungu tua", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "Merah tua", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "Kuning tua", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "Emas", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "Kelabu", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "Hijau", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "Indigo", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "Biru terang", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "Kelabu muda", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "Hijau muda", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightYellow": "Kuning muda", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "Merah", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "Mawar", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "Biru langit", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "Teks", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "Putih", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "Kuning", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "alamat:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "PEMEGANG LISENSI", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "PEMBERI LISENSI", @@ -485,6 +514,7 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDoubleSpaces": "Tambahkan titik dengan spasi ganda", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLCells": "Besarkan huruf pertama di sel tabel", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLSentence": "Besarkan huruf pertama di kalimat", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textForLangFL": "Pengecualian bagi bahasa:", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyperlink": "Internet dan jalur jaringan dengan hyperlink.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyphens": "Hyphens (--) dengan garis putus-putus (—)", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "AutoCorrect Matematika", @@ -499,7 +529,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textResetAll": "Atur ulang kembali ke awal", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textRestore": "Pemulihan", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "AutoCorrect", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddFL": "Pengecualian hanya boleh memuat huruf besar atau kecil.", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddRec": "Fungsi yang diterima harus memiliki huruf A sampai Z, huruf besar atau huruf kecil.", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetFL": "Semua pengecualian yang Anda tambahkan akan dihapus dan yang sebelumnya dihapus akan dipulihkan. Apakah Anda hendak melanjutkan?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetRec": "Semua ekspresi yang Anda tambahkan akan dihilangkan dan yang sudah terhapus akan dikembalikan. Apakah Anda ingin melanjutkan?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReplace": "Entri autocorrect untuk %1 sudah ada. Apakah Anda ingin menggantinya?", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReset": "Semua autocorrect yang Anda tambahkan akan dihilangkan dan yang sudah diganti akan dikembalikan ke nilai awalnya. Apakah Anda ingin melanjutkan?", @@ -540,6 +572,12 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "untuk Tempel", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Memuat...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Pengaturan berbagi", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "Pilih", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "Penyorot", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "mm", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "Pena", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "Pilih", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "Ukuran", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Editor Bagan", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textClose": "Tutup", "Common.Views.ExternalEditor.textSave": "Simpan & Keluar", @@ -674,13 +712,13 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Tutup", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Mode Edit Bersama", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Hilangkan semua komentar", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Hilangkan Komentar Saat Ini", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Hilangkan Komentar Saya", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Hilangkan komentar saat ini", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Hilangkan komentar saya", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "Hilangkan Komentar Saya Saat Ini", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Hapus", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolve": "Selesaikan", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveAll": "Selesaikan Semua Komentar", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveCurrent": "Selesaikan Komentar Saat Ini", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveAll": "Selesaikan semua komentar", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveCurrent": "Selesaikan komentar saat ini", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveMy": "Selesaikan komentar saya", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentResolveMyCurrent": "Selesaikan Komentar Saya Saat Ini", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Bahasa", @@ -722,9 +760,11 @@ "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textContentChanged": "Dokumen telah diubah.", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFind": "Temukan", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFindAndReplace": "Temukan dan ganti", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textItemsSuccessfullyReplaced": "{0} item sukses diganti.", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textMatchUsingRegExp": "Cocokkan dengan ekspresi reguler", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoMatches": "Tidak ada yang cocok", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoSearchResults": "Tidak ada hasil pencarian", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textPartOfItemsNotReplaced": "{0}/{1} item diganti. Sisa {2} item sedang dikunci oleh pengguna lain.", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplace": "Ganti", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceAll": "Ganti Semua", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceWith": "Ganti dengan", @@ -911,6 +951,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "Fungsi Undo/Redo dinonaktifkan untuk mode Co-editing Cepat.", "PE.Controllers.Main.textUndo": "Batalkan", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Lisensi kadaluwarsa", + "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseNotActive": "Lisensi tidak aktif", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "Editor mengupdate", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtAddFirstSlide": "Klik untuk tambah slide pertama", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtAddNotes": "Klik untuk tambah catatan", @@ -1176,6 +1217,8 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Silahkan menunggu", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Aplikasi ini tidak berjalan dengan baik di IE9. Gunakan IE10 atau versi yang terbaru.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Pengaturan pembesaran tampilan pada browser Anda saat ini tidak didukung sepenuhnya. Silakan atur ulang ke tampilan standar dengan menekan Ctrl+0.", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "Akses ditolak untuk pengguna anonim.
          Dokumen ini akan dibuka hanya untuk dilihat.", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "Lisensi tidak aktif.
          Harap hubungi administrator Anda.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja.
          Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Lisensi Anda sudah kadaluwarsa.
          Silakan update lisensi Anda dan muat ulang halaman.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "Lisensi kadaluwarsa.
          Anda tidak memiliki akses untuk editing dokumen secara keseluruhan.
          Silakan hubungi admin Anda.", @@ -1242,10 +1285,10 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_3": "Tanda kurung dengan pemisah", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "Tanda Kurung", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "Kurung kurawal", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_Delimiter_2": "Tanda kurung dengan pemisah", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_NoneOpen": "Kurung kurawal tutup", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_OpenNone": "Kurung kurawal buka", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_1": "Kasus (Dua Kondisi)", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_2": "Kasus (Tiga Kondisi)", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_3": "Tumpuk objek", @@ -1253,24 +1296,24 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_5": "Contoh Kasus", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_6": "Koefisien binomial", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_7": "Koefisien binomial", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Tanda Kurung", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Bilah vertikal", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Bilah vertikal kanan", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Bilah vertikal kiri", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "Tanda Kurung", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_NoneOpen": "Bilah vertikal ganda kanan", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim": "Tanda Kurung", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_NoneNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round": "Tanda Kurung", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_Delimiter_2": "Tanda kurung dengan pemisah", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "Tanda Kurung", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_NoneOpen": "Kurung tutup", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_OpenNone": "Kurung buka", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "Kurung siku", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseClose": "Tanda Kurung", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseOpen": "Tanda Kurung", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenNone": "Kurung Kurawal Single", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_NoneOpen": "Kurung siku kanan", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenNone": "Kurung siku buka", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "Tanda Kurung", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "Tanda Kurung", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_NoneOpen": "Kurung Kurawal Single", @@ -1330,7 +1373,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedSubSup": "Integral Kontur", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTriple": "Volume integral", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleCenterSubSup": "Volume integral", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleSubSup": "Volume integral", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleSubSup": "Integral volume dengan batas", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralSubSup": "Integral", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTriple": "Triple integral", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTripleCenterSubSup": "Triple integral", @@ -1349,7 +1392,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_2": "Penjumlahan", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_3": "Penjumlahan", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_4": "Produk", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_5": "Union", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_5": "Contoh union", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction": "Vee", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction_CenterSub": "Vee", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction_CenterSubSup": "Vee", @@ -1369,12 +1412,12 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSub": "Penjumlahan", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSubSup": "Penjumlahan", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_Sub": "Penjumlahan", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_SubSup": "Penjumlahan", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_SubSup": "Penjumlahan dengan batas subskrip/superskrip", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union": "Union", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_CenterSub": "Union", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_CenterSubSup": "Union", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_Sub": "Union", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_SubSup": "Union", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_SubSup": "Union dengan batas subskrip/superskrip", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Custom_1": "Contoh Limit", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Custom_2": "Contoh Maksimal", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Lim": "Limit", @@ -1401,9 +1444,9 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Vertical": "Titik Vertikal", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Flat_Round": "Sparse Matrix", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Flat_Square": "Sparse Matrix", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_2": "matriks identitas 2x2", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_2": "matriks identitas 2x2 dengan nol", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_2_NoZeros": "matriks identitas 3x3", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_3": "matriks identitas 3x3", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_3": "matriks identitas 3x3 dengan nol", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_3_NoZeros": "matriks identitas 3x3", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowD_Bot": "Tanda Panah Kanan-Kiri Bawah", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowD_Top": "Tanda Panah Kanan-Kiri Atas", @@ -1434,7 +1477,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalSqrt": "Akar pangkat dua", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_1": "Akar", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_2": "Akar", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_3": "Akar", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_3": "x kuadrat", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_4": "Akar", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSub": "Subskrip", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSubSup": "Subskrip-SuperskripKiri", @@ -1554,7 +1597,7 @@ "PE.Views.Animation.textStartWithPrevious": "Dengan Sebelumnya", "PE.Views.Animation.textUntilEndOfSlide": "Hingga Akhir Slide", "PE.Views.Animation.textUntilNextClick": "Hingga Klik Selanjutnya", - "PE.Views.Animation.txtAddEffect": "Tambah animasi", + "PE.Views.Animation.txtAddEffect": "Tambah Animasi", "PE.Views.Animation.txtAnimationPane": "Panel Animasi", "PE.Views.Animation.txtParameters": "Parameter", "PE.Views.Animation.txtPreview": "Pratinjau", @@ -1586,7 +1629,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Rotasi Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Teks alternatif", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskripsi", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, autoshape, grafik, atau tabel.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, shape, grafik, atau tabel.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Judul", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Tengah", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "Dari", @@ -1857,11 +1900,13 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Terakhir Dimodifikasi", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "Pemilik", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Lokasi", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPresentationInfo": "Info Presentasi", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Orang yang memiliki hak", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Subyek", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTags": "Tag", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Judul", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Diunggah", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtAccessRights": "Hak Akses", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Ubah hak akses", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Orang yang memiliki hak", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Peringatan", @@ -1897,6 +1942,7 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Nonaktif", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Menyimpan versi intermedier", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Tiap Menit", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAdvancedSettings": "Pengaturan Lanjut", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Lihat Semua", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Opsi AutoCorrect...", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Mode cache default", @@ -1927,6 +1973,8 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Nonaktifkan semua macros dengan notifikasi", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "sebagai Windows", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWorkspace": "Ruang Kerja", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveAs.textDownloadAs": "Unduh sebagai", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveCopy.textSaveCopyAs": "Simpan Salinan sebagai", "PE.Views.GridSettings.textCm": "cm", "PE.Views.GridSettings.textCustom": "Kustom", "PE.Views.GridSettings.textSpacing": "Spasi", @@ -1990,7 +2038,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Lebar", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Teks alternatif", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskripsi", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, autoshape, grafik, atau tabel.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, shape, grafik, atau tabel.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Judul", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Sudut", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Tengah", @@ -2071,10 +2119,13 @@ "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Paragraf - Pengaturan lanjut", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Otomatis", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "Semua slide", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "Cetak pada kedua sisi", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "Salinan", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "Slide saat ini", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "Cetak khusus", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtEmptyTable": "Tidak ada yang akan dicetak karena presentasi kosong", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "dari {0}", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "Cetak satu sisi", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "Slide", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "Nomor slide tidak valid", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPages": "Slide", @@ -2082,6 +2133,7 @@ "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "Cetak", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "Cetak ke PDF", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "Rentang cetak", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "Sisi cetak", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Pengaturan Bagan", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "Pengaturan Gambar", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "Pengaturan Paragraf", @@ -2091,7 +2143,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Pengaturan Tabel", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Pengaturan Text Art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Warna latar", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ubah Bentuk Otomatis", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ubah Bentuk", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Warna", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Isi", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Warna latar depan", @@ -2150,7 +2202,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Pengganjal teks", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Teks alternatif", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskripsi", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, autoshape, grafik, atau tabel.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, shape, grafik, atau tabel.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Judul", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Sudut", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Tanda panah", @@ -2346,7 +2398,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Themed Style", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Teks alternatif", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Deskripsi", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, autoshape, grafik, atau tabel.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Representasi alternatif berbasis teks dari informasi objek visual, yang akan dibaca kepada orang dengan gangguan penglihatan atau kognitif untuk membantu mereka lebih memahami informasi yang ada dalam gambar, shape, grafik, atau tabel.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Judul", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bawah", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Tengah", @@ -2435,14 +2487,14 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.capTabHome": "Halaman Depan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.capTabInsert": "Sisipkan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniCapitalizeWords": "Huruf Kapital Setiap Kata", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Sisipkan Tabel Khusus", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Sisipkan tabel ubahan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Gambar dari File", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "Gambar dari Penyimpanan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "Gambar dari URL", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniInsertSSE": "Sisipkan Spreadsheet", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniLowerCase": "huruf kecil", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniSentenceCase": "Case kalimat.", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniSlideAdvanced": "Pengaturan Lanjut", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniSlideAdvanced": "Pengaturan lanjut", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniSlideStandard": "Standard (4:3)", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniSlideWide": "Widescreen (16:9)", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniToggleCase": "tOGGLE cASE", @@ -2460,7 +2512,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textArrangeForward": "Majukan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textArrangeFront": "Tampilkan di Halaman Muka", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Tebal", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Custom Kolom", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Kolom ubahan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Satu Kolom", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Tiga Kolom", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Dua Kolom", @@ -2482,6 +2534,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Superskrip", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Animasi", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Kolaborasi", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Gambar", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "File", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Halaman Depan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Sisipkan", @@ -2518,7 +2571,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Sisipkan kotak teks horizontal", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Tambahkan hyperlink", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Sisipkan Gambar", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Sisipkan Bentuk Otomatis", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Sisipkan Bentuk", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Sisipkan SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Sisipkan simbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Sisipkan Tabel", @@ -2541,6 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "Tempel", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPreview": "Mulai slideshow", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "Cetak", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrintQuick": "Cetak cepat", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Ulangi", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "Simpan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "Simpan perubahan yang Anda buat agar dapat dilihat oleh pengguna lain", @@ -2555,7 +2609,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipViewSettings": "Lihat Pengaturan", "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Distribusikan Horizontal", "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Distribusikan Vertikal", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtDuplicateSlide": "Duplikasi Slide", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtDuplicateSlide": "Gandakan slide", "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtGroup": "Grup", "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Ratakan Objek yang Dipilih", "PE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Office", @@ -2586,9 +2640,9 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.strDuration": "Durasi", "PE.Views.Transitions.strStartOnClick": "Mulai Saat Klik", "PE.Views.Transitions.textBlack": "Through Black", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottom": "Bawah", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomLeft": "Kiri", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomRight": "Bawah-Kanan", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottom": "Dari Bawah", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomLeft": "Dari Kiri Bawah", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomRight": "Dari Kanan Bawah", "PE.Views.Transitions.textClock": "Jam", "PE.Views.Transitions.textClockwise": "Searah Jarum Jam", "PE.Views.Transitions.textCounterclockwise": "Berlawanan Jarum Jam", @@ -2596,15 +2650,15 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.textFade": "Pudar", "PE.Views.Transitions.textHorizontalIn": "Horizontal Masuk", "PE.Views.Transitions.textHorizontalOut": "Horizontal Keluar", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textLeft": "Kiri", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textLeft": "Dari Kiri", "PE.Views.Transitions.textNone": "Tidak ada", "PE.Views.Transitions.textPush": "Tekan", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textRight": "Kanan", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textRight": "Dari Kanan", "PE.Views.Transitions.textSmoothly": "Dengan Mulus", "PE.Views.Transitions.textSplit": "Split", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTop": "Atas", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopLeft": "Atas-Kiri", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopRight": "Atas-Kanan", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTop": "Dari Atas", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopLeft": "Dari Kiri Atas", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopRight": "Dari Kanan Atas", "PE.Views.Transitions.textUnCover": "UnCover", "PE.Views.Transitions.textVerticalIn": "Masuk Vertikal", "PE.Views.Transitions.textVerticalOut": "Keluar Horizontal", @@ -2618,8 +2672,8 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.txtParameters": "Parameter", "PE.Views.Transitions.txtPreview": "Pratinjau", "PE.Views.Transitions.txtSec": "s", - "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAddHGuides": "Tambahkan Pemandu Horizontal", - "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAddVGuides": "Tambahkan Pemandu Vertikal", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAddHGuides": "Tambahkan pemandu horizontal", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAddVGuides": "Tambahkan pemandu vertikal", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAlwaysShowToolbar": "Selalu Tampilkan Bilah Alat", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textClearGuides": "Hapus Pemandu", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textCm": "cm", @@ -2635,7 +2689,7 @@ "PE.Views.ViewTab.textRulers": "Penggaris", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textShowGridlines": "Tampilkan Garis Kisi", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textShowGuides": "Tampilkan Pemandu", - "PE.Views.ViewTab.textSmartGuides": "Pemandu Pintar", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textSmartGuides": "Pemandu pintar", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textSnapObjects": "Posisikan Objek pada Kisi", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textStatusBar": "Bar Status", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textZoom": "Pembesaran", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/it.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/it.json index 1de75c952b..44ca8e4a0a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/it.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/it.json @@ -1872,7 +1872,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Impostazioni tabella", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Impostazioni Text Art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Colore sfondo", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modifica forma automatica", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambia forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Colore", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Riempimento", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Colore primo piano", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ja.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ja.json index e46f6dd3e1..be8dd6bd28 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ja.json @@ -1233,6 +1233,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "少々お待ちください...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "このアプリケーションはIE9では低機能です。IE10以上のバージョンをご利用ください。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "お使いのブラウザの現在のZoomの設定は完全にはサポートされていません。Ctrl+0を押して、デフォルトのZoomにリセットしてください。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名ユーザーのアクセスは拒否されます。
          このドキュメントは閲覧専用に開かれます。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "ライセンスが無効になっています。
          管理者までご連絡ください。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "％1エディターへの同時接続の制限に達しました。 このドキュメントは表示専用で開かれます。
          詳細については、管理者にお問い合わせください。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの有効期限が切れています。
          ライセンスを更新してページを再読み込みしてください。", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/lv.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/lv.json index 9def4ad2c5..24d68af3d9 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/lv.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/lv.json @@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Text Padding", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatīvs teksts", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Apraksts", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redze vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, automātiskajā figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redze vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Nosaukums", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Leņķis", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Arrows", @@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Akcents", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatīvs teksts", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Apraksts", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redze vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, automātiskajā figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Vizuālās objekta informācijas attainojums alternatīvā teksta veidā, kuru lasīs cilvēki ar redze vai uztveres traucējumiem un kuriem tas labāk palīdzēs izprast, kāda informācija ir ietverta tekstā, figūrā, diagrammā vai tabulā.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Nosaukums", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bottom", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centrā", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ms.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ms.json index c039566cdd..6a56de7b51 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ms.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ms.json @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "PEMBERI LESEN", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-mel:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Dikuasakan oleh", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versi", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Tambah", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Guna Semasa Anda Menaip", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/nl.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/nl.json index 2f3947c0e6..0e1da020bb 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/nl.json @@ -136,6 +136,8 @@ "Common.define.effectData.textPointStar8": "Achtpuntsster", "Common.define.effectData.textRightDown": "Rechtsonder", "Common.define.effectData.textRightUp": "Rechtsboven", + "Common.define.effectData.textShape": "Vorm", + "Common.define.effectData.textShapes": "Vormen", "Common.define.effectData.textSpoke1": "1 spaak", "Common.define.effectData.textSpoke2": "2 spaken", "Common.define.effectData.textSpoke3": "3 spaken", @@ -192,7 +194,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENTIEVERLENER", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-mail:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Aangedreven door", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versie", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Toevoegen", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Toepassen terwijl u typt", @@ -1219,7 +1221,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Breedte", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatieve tekst", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschrijving", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, AutoVorm, grafiek of tabel.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, Vorm, grafiek of tabel.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centreren", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "Van", @@ -1573,7 +1575,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Breedte", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatieve tekst", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschrijving", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, AutoVorm, grafiek of tabel.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, Vorm, grafiek of tabel.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Hoek", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centreren", @@ -1716,7 +1718,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Opvulling van tekst", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatieve tekst", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschrijving", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, AutoVorm, grafiek of tabel.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, Vorm, grafiek of tabel.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Hoek", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pijlen", @@ -1902,7 +1904,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Thema-stijl", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatieve tekst", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beschrijving", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, AutoVorm, grafiek of tabel.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "De alternatieve, op tekst gebaseerde weergave van de visuele objectinformatie. Deze wordt voorgelezen voor mensen met visuele of cognitieve handicaps om hen te helpen begrijpen welke informatie aanwezig is in de afbeelding, Vorm, grafiek of tabel.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Onder", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centreren", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json index 4018d73224..4c200c9473 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Rotação Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto Alternativo", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "De", @@ -1803,7 +1803,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Largura", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto Alternativo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", @@ -1892,7 +1892,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Definições de tabela", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Definições de texto artístico", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Cor de fundo", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma automática", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Cor", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Preencher", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Cor principal", @@ -1951,7 +1951,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Preenchimento de texto", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto Alternativo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Setas", @@ -2147,7 +2147,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Estilo com Tema", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto Alternativo", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Baixo", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", @@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserir caixa de texto horizontal", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Adicionar hiperligação", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir imagem", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma automática", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir símbolo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir tabela", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Inserir caixa de texto", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt.json index e0843d3c50..fb08752c88 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/pt.json @@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Rotação Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "de", @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Largura", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Configurações da tabela", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Text Art Settings", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Cor do plano de fundo", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma automática", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Alterar forma", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Cor", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Preencher", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Cor do plano de fundo", @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Preenchimento de texto", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Setas", @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Estilo do Tema", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Texto alternativo", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descrição", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma automática, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "A representação alternativa baseada em texto da informação visual do objeto, que será lida para as pessoas com deficiências visuais ou cognitivas para ajudá-las a entender melhor que informação, forma, gráfico ou tabela existe na imagem.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Título", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Inferior", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Centro", @@ -2594,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserir caixa de texto horizontal", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Adicionar hiperlink", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserir imagem", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma automática", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserir forma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Inserir SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserir símbolo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserir tabela", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ro.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ro.json index 6588c8a847..f75f4cf7d3 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ro.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ro.json @@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Axa de rotație Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternativ", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descriere", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme automate, diagramei sau tabele.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme, diagramei sau tabele.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titlu", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "La centru", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "De la", @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Lățime", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternativ", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descriere", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme automate, diagramei sau tabele.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme, diagramei sau tabele.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titlu", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Unghi", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "La centru", @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Setări tabel", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Setări TextArt", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Culoare de fundal", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modificare formă automată", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modificare formă", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Culoare", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Umplere", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Culoarea de prim plan", @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Spațierea în jurul textului", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternativ", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descriere", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme automate, diagramei sau tabele.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme, diagramei sau tabele.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titlu", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Unghi", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Săgeți", @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Stil tematic", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Text alternativ", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Descriere", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme automate, diagramei sau tabele.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Furnizarea textului alternativ pentru conținut vizual destinat persoanelor cu deficiențe de vedere și cognitive pentru a le ajuta să înțăleagă mai bine conținutul unei imagini, forme, diagramei sau tabele.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titlu", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Jos", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "La centru", @@ -2594,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Inserare casetă text orizontală", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Adăugare hyperlink", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserare imagine", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserare formă automată", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserare formă", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Inserare SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserare simbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserare tabel", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ru.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ru.json index d1b06c5232..685195c878 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ru.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/ru.json @@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "По оси Y", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативный текст", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, автофигура, диаграмма или таблица.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, фигура, диаграмма или таблица.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заголовок", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "По центру", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "От", @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативный текст", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, автофигура, диаграмма или таблица.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, фигура, диаграмма или таблица.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заголовок", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Угол", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "По центру", @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Параметры таблицы", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Параметры объектов Text Art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Цвет фона", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Изменить автофигуру", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Изменить фигуру", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Цвет", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Заливка", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Цвет переднего плана", @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Поля вокруг текста", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативный текст", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, автофигура, диаграмма или таблица.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, фигура, диаграмма или таблица.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заголовок", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Угол", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрелки", @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Стиль из темы", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативный текст", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Описание", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, автофигура, диаграмма или таблица.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативное текстовое представление информации о визуальном объекте, которое будет зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение, фигура, диаграмма или таблица.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Заголовок", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Снизу", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "По центру", @@ -2594,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "Вставить горизонтальную надпись", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Добавить гиперссылку", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Вставить изображение", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вставить автофигуру", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вставить фигуру", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "Вставить SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Вставить символ", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Вставить таблицу", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/si.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/si.json index e95f55a965..2c0b602199 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/si.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/si.json @@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "පී", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "ත්‍රිමාණ පී", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (විහිදුම)", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "රේඩාර්", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarFilled": "පිරුණු රේඩාර්", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarMarker": "සලකුණුකාරක සහිත රේඩාර්", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "විසිරණය", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "සරල රේඛා සමඟ අතුරන්න", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "සරල රේඛා සහ සලකුණු සමඟ අතුරන්න", @@ -470,21 +473,27 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "මාරුව", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "උදාත්තය", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "හරිත නිල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "පසුබිම", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "කළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "නිල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "දීප්තිමත් කොළ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "දුඹුරු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "තද නිල්", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "තද අඳුරු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "තද අළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "තද කොළ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "තද දම්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "තද රතු", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "අඳුරු ටීල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "තද කහ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "රන්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "අළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "කොළ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "අවරිය", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLavender": "මධ්‍ය දම්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "ලා නිල්", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLighter": "තද දීප්ත", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "ලා අළු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "ලා කොළ", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightOrange": "ලා තැඹිලි", @@ -495,14 +504,17 @@ "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "රතු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "රෝස", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "අහස් නිල", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "ටීල්", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "පෙළ", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTurquosie": "නීලමණි", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtViolet": "ජම්බූල", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "සුදු", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "කහ", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "ලිපිනය:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "බලපත්‍රය", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "බලපත්‍රදායකයා", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "වි-තැපෑල:", - "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "දු.ක.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "අනුවාදය", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "එකතු කරන්න", @@ -577,7 +589,9 @@ "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "මකනය", "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "තෝරන්න", "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "මකනය", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "උද්දීපකය", "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "මි.මී.", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "පෑන", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "තෝරන්න", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "ප්‍රමාණය", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "ප්‍රස්තාරය සංස්කරකය", @@ -1055,7 +1069,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticTape": "ගැලීම් සටහන: අනුක්‍රමික ප්‍රවේශ ආචයනය", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualInput": "ගැලීම් සටහන: අතින් ආදානය ", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualOperation": "ගැලීම් සටහන: අතින් මෙහෙයුම", - "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "ගැලීම් සටහන: සංයුක්ත", + "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "ගැලීම් සටහන: ඒකාබද්ධ", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMultidocument": "ගැලීම් සටහන: බහුලේඛන", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOffpageConnector": "ගැලීම් සටහන: බැහැර පිටු සම්බන්ධකය", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOnlineStorage": "ගැලීම් සටහන: ගබඩා කළ දත්ත", @@ -1219,6 +1233,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "කරුණාකර, රැඳෙන්න...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "යෙදුම IE9 හි අඩු ක්‍රියාකාරිත්වයක් ඇත. IE10 හෝ නව අනුවාද භාවිතා කරන්න", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "ඔබගේ අතිරික්සුවෙහි වත්මන් විශාලන සැකසුම් පූර්ණ වශයෙන් සහාය නොදක්වයි. කරුණාකර Ctrl+0 එබීමෙන් පෙරනිමි විශාලනයට යළි සකන්න.", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික පරිශ්‍රීලකයින් සඳහා ප්‍රවේශය ප්‍රතික්‍ෂේපිතයි.
          මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වනු ඇත.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත.
          කරුණාකර ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට පැමිණ ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ.
          තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "ඔබගේ බලපත්‍රය කල් ඉකුත්ව ඇත.
          බලපත්‍රය යාවත්කාල කර පිටුව නැවුම් කරන්න.", @@ -1630,7 +1645,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Y කරකැවීම", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "විකල්පමය පාඨය", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "සවිස්තරය", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු විකල්ප පාඨ මත පදනම්ව නිරූපණය, දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, ස්වයං හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "පෙළ මත පදනම්ව දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු නිරූපණ විකල්පය මගින් දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "සිරැසිය", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "මැද", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "වෙතින්", @@ -2043,7 +2058,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "පළල", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "විකල්පමය පාඨය", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "සවිස්තරය", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු විකල්ප පාඨ මත පදනම්ව නිරූපණය, දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, ස්වයං හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "පෙළ මත පදනම්ව දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු නිරූපණ විකල්පය මගින් දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "සිරැසිය", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "කෝනය", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "මැද", @@ -2124,11 +2139,16 @@ "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "ඡේදය - වැඩිදුර සැකසුම්", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "ස්වයං", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "සියළු චිත්‍රකාච", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "දෙපසම මුද්‍රණය කරන්න", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "දිගු දාරය මත පිටු පෙරළන්න", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "කෙටි දාරය මත පිටු පෙරළන්න", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "පිටපත්", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "වත්මන් චිත්‍රකාචය", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "අභිරුචි මුද්‍රණය", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtEmptyTable": "සමර්පණය හිස් බැවින් මුද්‍රණයට කිසිවක් නැත", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "/ {0}", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "එක් පසක මුද්‍රණය කරන්න", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "පිටුවේ එක් පැත්තක පමණක් මුද්‍රණය කරන්න", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "චිත්‍රකාචය", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "චිත්‍රකාචයේ අංකය වලංගු නොවේ", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPages": "චිත්‍රකාච", @@ -2136,6 +2156,7 @@ "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "මුද්‍රණය", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "පීඩීඑෆ් ලෙස මුද්‍රණය", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "මුද්‍රණ පරාසය", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "මුද්‍රණ පැති", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "ප්‍රස්තාරයේ සැකසුම්", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "අනුරුවේ සැකසුම්", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "ඡේදයේ සැකසුම්", @@ -2145,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "වගුවේ සැකසුම්", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "පෙළ චිත්‍රයේ සැකසුම්", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "පසුබිමෙහි වර්ණය", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "ස්වයංහැඩගැසීම වෙනස් කරන්න", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "හැඩය සංශෝධනය", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "වර්ණය", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "පුරවන්න", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "පෙරබිමෙහි පාට", @@ -2204,7 +2225,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "පෙළ පිරවීම", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "විකල්පමය පාඨය", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "සවිස්තරය", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු විකල්ප පාඨ මත පදනම්ව නිරූපණය, දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, ස්වයං හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "පෙළ මත පදනම්ව දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු නිරූපණ විකල්පය මගින් දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "සිරැසිය", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "කෝනය", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "ඊතල", @@ -2400,7 +2421,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "තේමාගත ශෛලිය", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "විකල්පමය පාඨය", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "සවිස්තරය", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු විකල්ප පාඨ මත පදනම්ව නිරූපණය, දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, ස්වයං හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "පෙළ මත පදනම්ව දෘශ්‍ය වස්තුවල තොරතුරු නිරූපණ විකල්පය මගින් දෘෂ්ටි හෝ සංජානන දුර්වලතා ඇති පුද්ගලයින්ට රූප, හැඩ, ප්‍රස්ථාර හෝ වගුවල අඩංගු තොරතුරු වඩා හොඳින් අවබෝධ කර ගැනීමේ පහසුව සඳහා කියවනු ලැබේ.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "සිරැසිය", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "පහළ", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "මැද", @@ -2573,7 +2594,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "තිරස් පෙළ පෙට්ටියක් යොදන්න", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "අතිසබැඳිය එක්කරන්න", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "අනුරුවක් ඇතුළු කරන්න", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "ස්වයංහැඩගැසීම ඇතුළුකරන්න", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "හැඩයක් යොදන්න", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "බුහුටි කලාවක් යොදන්න", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "සංකේතයක් ඇතුළු කරන්න", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "වගුවක් ඇතුළු කරන්න", @@ -2642,9 +2663,9 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.strDuration": "කාල සීමාව", "PE.Views.Transitions.strStartOnClick": "එබීමේදී අරඹන්න", "PE.Views.Transitions.textBlack": "කළු අතරින්", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottom": "පහළ", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomLeft": "පහළ-වම", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomRight": "පහළ-දකුණ", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottom": "පහළින්", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomLeft": "පහළ-වමෙන්", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textBottomRight": "පහළ-දකුණෙන්", "PE.Views.Transitions.textClock": "ඔරලෝසුව", "PE.Views.Transitions.textClockwise": "දක්‍ෂිණාවර්ත", "PE.Views.Transitions.textCounterclockwise": "වාමාවර්තව", @@ -2652,15 +2673,15 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.textFade": "මැලවීම", "PE.Views.Transitions.textHorizontalIn": "තිරස් අතට", "PE.Views.Transitions.textHorizontalOut": "තිරස් පිටතට", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textLeft": "වම", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textLeft": "වමෙන්", "PE.Views.Transitions.textNone": "කිසිවක් නැත", "PE.Views.Transitions.textPush": "තල්ලුව", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textRight": "දකුණ", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textRight": "දකුණෙන්", "PE.Views.Transitions.textSmoothly": "සුමටව", "PE.Views.Transitions.textSplit": "පැළීම", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTop": "මුදුන", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopLeft": "ඉහළ-වම", - "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopRight": "ඉහළ-දකුණ", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTop": "මුදුනෙන්", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopLeft": "මුදුනේ-වමෙන්", + "PE.Views.Transitions.textTopRight": "මුදුනේ-දකුණෙන්", "PE.Views.Transitions.textUnCover": "අරින්න", "PE.Views.Transitions.textVerticalIn": "සිරස් අතට", "PE.Views.Transitions.textVerticalOut": "සිරස් පිටතට", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sk.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sk.json index 279f14605e..604d2e321b 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sk.json @@ -1316,7 +1316,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Šírka", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatívny text", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Graf - Pokročilé nastavenia", "PE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Nastaviť defaultný formát pre {0}: \"{1}\"", @@ -1668,7 +1668,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Šírka", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatívny text", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Uhol", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Prevrátený", @@ -1751,7 +1751,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Nastavenie tabuľky", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Nastavenie Text Art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Farba pozadia", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Zmeniť automatický tvar", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Zmeniť tvar", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farba", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Vyplniť", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Farba popredia", @@ -1810,7 +1810,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Textová výplň", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatívny text", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Uhol", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Šípky", @@ -1994,7 +1994,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Téma štýlu", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatívny text", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Dole", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Použiť predvolené okraje", @@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Vložiť rovnicu", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Pridať odkaz", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vložiť obrázok", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vložiť automatický tvar", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vložiť tvar", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vložiť symbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vložiť tabuľku", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vložiť textové pole", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sl.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sl.json index 6319765bbb..7ac775a4ac 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sl.json @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Nastavitve tabele", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Text Art Settings", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Barva ozadja", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Spremeni samodejno obliko", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Spremeni obliko", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Barva", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Dopolni", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Barva ospredja", @@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Vstavi enačbo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Dodaj Hiperpovezavo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vstavi sliko", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vstavi samodejno obliko", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vstavi obliko", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vstavi simbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vstavi tabelo", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vstavi besedilo", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sv.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sv.json index 10d043bdeb..d4b4d784e9 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sv.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/sv.json @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LICENSGIVARE", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "e-post:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Version", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Lägg till", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Korrigera när du skriver", @@ -1830,7 +1830,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Tabell inställningar", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Text Art inställningar", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Bakgrundsfärg", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ändra autoform", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Ändra form", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Färg", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Fyll", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Förgrundsfärg", @@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Infoga ekvation", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Lägg till länk", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Infoga bild", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Infoga autoform", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Infoga form", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Infoga symbol", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Infoga tabell", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Infoga textruta", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/tr.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/tr.json index a6a92d1cd3..f406a68175 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/tr.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/tr.json @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "adres:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LİSANS SAHİBİ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "LİSANS VEREN", - "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "Eposta:", + "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "eposta:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Tarafından desteklenmektedir", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Sürüm", @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Genişlik", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatif Metin", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Açıklama", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, otomatik şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlık", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Orta ", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textFrom": "İtibaren", @@ -1620,7 +1620,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Genişlik", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatif Metin", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Açıklama", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, otomatik şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlık", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Açı", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Orta", @@ -1706,7 +1706,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Tablo Ayarları", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Yazı Sanatı ayarları", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Arka plan rengi", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Otomatik Şeklini Değiştir", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Şeklini Değiştir", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Renk", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Doldur", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Önplan rengi", @@ -1765,7 +1765,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Metin Dolgulama", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatif Metin", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Açıklama", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, otomatik şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlık", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Açı", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Oklar", @@ -1952,7 +1952,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Temalı Stil", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternatif Metin", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Açıklama", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, otomatik şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Görsel nesne bilgisinin, görsel, şekil, çizelge veya tabloda hangi bilgilerin olduğunu daha iyi anlamalarına yardımcı olmak için görme veya bilişsel bozukluğu olan kişilere okunacak alternatif metin tabanlı temsili.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Başlık", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Alt", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Orta", @@ -2080,11 +2080,13 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Üstsimge", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Animasyon", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Ortak Çalışma", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Çizim", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Dosya", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Ana Sayfa", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Ekle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabProtect": "Koruma", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabTransitions": "Geçişler", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabView": "Görüntüle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTitleError": "Hata", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textUnderline": "Altı çizili", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipAddSlide": "Slayt ekle", @@ -2113,7 +2115,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Denklem Ekle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Köprü ekle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Resim ekle", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Otomatik Şekil ekle", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Şekil ekle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Simge ekle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Tablo ekle", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Metin kutusu ekle", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/uk.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/uk.json index cd61c4f22a..5b252d4f13 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/uk.json @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "Ліцензіар", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "пошта:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Під керуванням", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Тел.:", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "тел.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Версія", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textAdd": "Додати", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textApplyText": "Застосовувати під час введення", @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textReply": "Відповісти", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Вирішити", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolved": "Вирішено", - "Common.Views.Comments.textSort": "Сортувати коментарі", + "Common.Views.Comments.textSort": "Впорядкувати коментарі", "Common.Views.Comments.textViewResolved": "У вас немає прав для повторного відкриття коментарю", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Не показувати це повідомлення знову", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "Копіювання, вирізання та вставлення дій за допомогою кнопок панелі інструментів редактора та дій контекстного меню буде виконуватися тільки на цій вкладці редактора.

          Щоб скопіювати або вставити до або з додатків за межами вкладки редактора, використовуйте такі комбінації клавіш:", @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "Для вставлення", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Завантаження...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Налаштувати доступ", - "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "редагування діаграми", + "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Редагування діаграми", "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Користувачі, що редагують документ:", "Common.Views.Header.textAddFavorite": "Додати в обране", "Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "Додаткові налаштування", @@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartProcess": "Блок-схема: процес", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "Блок-схема: картка", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedTape": "Блок-схема: перфострічка", - "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "Блок-схема: сортування", + "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "Блок-схема: впорядкування", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSummingJunction": "Блок-схема: вузол суми", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartTerminator": "Блок-схема: знак закінчення", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_foldedCorner": "Загнутий кут", @@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTChartAndTx": "Графік та текст", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTClipArtAndTx": "Картинки і текст", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTClipArtAndVertTx": "Картинки і вертикальний текст", - "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTCust": "Користувальницький", + "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTCust": "Власний", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTDgm": "Діаграма", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTFourObj": "4 об'єкти", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSldLtTMediaAndTx": "Медіа і текст", @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSlideNumber": "Номер слайду", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSlideSubtitle": "Підзаголовки слайду", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSlideText": "Текст слайду", - "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSlideTitle": "назва слайду", + "PE.Controllers.Main.txtSlideTitle": "Назва слайду", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Зірки та стрічки", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_basic": "Базова", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtTheme_blank": "Пустий слайд", @@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Statusbar.zoomText": "Збільшити {0}%", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.confirmAddFontName": "Шрифт, який ви збираєтеся зберегти, недоступний на поточному пристрої.
          Текстовий стиль відображатиметься за допомогою одного з системних шрифтів, збережений шрифт буде використовуватися, коли він буде доступний.
          Ви хочете продовжити ?", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.textAccent": "Акценти", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.textBracket": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.textBracket": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.textEmptyImgUrl": "Потрібно вказати URL-адресу зображення.", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "Введене значення невірно.
          Будь ласка, введіть числове значення від 1 до 300", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Дроби", @@ -991,12 +991,12 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Hat": "Капелюх", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Smile": "Короткий", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Tilde": "Тільда", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_2": "Дужки з роздільниками", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_3": "Дужки з роздільниками", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_Delimiter_2": "Дужки з роздільниками", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", @@ -1007,29 +1007,29 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_5": "Приклад регістру символів", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_6": "Биномиальный коефіцієнт", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_7": "Биномиальный коефіцієнт", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_NoneNone": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_Delimiter_2": "Дужки з роздільниками", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "дужки", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseClose": "дужки", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseOpen": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "Дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseClose": "Дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseOpen": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "дужки", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "Дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "дужки", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "Дужки", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_NoneOpen": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_OpenNone": "Єдина дужка", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDiagonal": "Обмотана фракція", @@ -1247,12 +1247,12 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ni": "Містить в якості учасника", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_not": "Не підписаний", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_notexists": "Там не існує", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_nu": "ню", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_nu": "Ню", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_o": "Омікрон", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_omega": "Омега", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_partial": "Частковий диференціал", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_percent": "відсотковий вміст", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_phi": "фі", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_percent": "Відсотковий вміст", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_phi": "Фі", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pi": "Пі", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_plus": "Плюс", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pm": "Плюс мінус", @@ -1261,24 +1261,24 @@ "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qdrt": "Четвертий корінь", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qed": "Кінець показника", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rddots": "Вгору справа Діагональ Еліпсіс", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rho": "ро", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rho": "Ро", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rightarrow": "Права стрілочка", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sigma": "сігма", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sigma": "Сігма", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sqrt": "Радикальний знак", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_tau": "тау", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_tau": "Тау", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_therefore": "Тому", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_theta": "тета", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_theta": "Тета", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_times": "Знак множення", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_uparrow": "Стрілочка вгору", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_upsilon": "іпсилон", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_upsilon": "Iпсилон", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varepsilon": "Епсілон Варіант", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varphi": "варіант фі", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varphi": "Варіант фі", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varpi": "Пі варіант", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varrho": "Ро варіант", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varsigma": "сігма варіант", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vartheta": "тета варіант", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varsigma": "Сігма варіант", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vartheta": "Тета варіант", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "Вертикальний Еліпсіс", - "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "ксі", + "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "Ксі", "PE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Зета", "PE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "За розміром слайду", "PE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "По ширині", @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", - "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, автофігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", + "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, фігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Діаграма - Розширені налаштування", "PE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Встановити типовий формат для {0}: \"{1}\"", @@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "Повернути на 90° проти годинникової стрілки", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "Повернути на 90° за годинниковою стрілкою", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Вирівняти знизу", - "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Вирівняти центр", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Відцентрувати", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "Вирівняти зліва", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignMiddle": "Вирівняти посередині", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "Вирівняти справа", @@ -1543,7 +1543,7 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Застосувати", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Додати автора", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Додати текст", - "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Додаток", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Застосунок", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Автор", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Коментар", @@ -1582,7 +1582,7 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text30Minutes": "Кожні 30 хвилин", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text5Minutes": "Кожні 5 хвилин", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text60Minutes": "Кожну годину", - "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Посібники з вирівнювання", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Лінійка вирівнювання", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Автовідновлення", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Автозбереження", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Заблокований", @@ -1667,7 +1667,7 @@ "PE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", - "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, автофігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", + "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, фігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Нахил", "PE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Віддзеркалено", @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ "PE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrialDev": "Пробний режим розробника", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "Лінія інтервалу", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "Параметр інтервалу", - "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingAfter": "після", + "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingAfter": "Після", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingBefore": "Перед", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAt": "при", @@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Налаштування таблиці", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Налаштування текст Art", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Колір фону", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змінити автофігуру", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змінити фігуру", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Колір", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Заповнити", "PE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Колір переднього плану", @@ -1809,7 +1809,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Текстове накладення тексту", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, автофігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, фігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Нахил", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрілки", @@ -1905,7 +1905,7 @@ "PE.Views.SlideSettings.txtWood": "Дерево", "PE.Views.SlideshowSettings.textLoop": "Цикл буде безперезвним до натискання 'Esc' ", "PE.Views.SlideshowSettings.textTitle": "Показати налаштування", - "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.strLandscape": "ландшафт", + "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.strLandscape": "Ландшафт", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.strPortrait": "Портрет", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.textHeight": "Висота", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.textSlideOrientation": "Орієнтація слайду", @@ -1918,7 +1918,7 @@ "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtB4": "Папір B4 (ICO) (250x353 мм)", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtB5": "Папір B5 (ICO) (176x250 мм)", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtBanner": "Банер", - "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtCustom": "Користувальницький", + "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtCustom": "Власний", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtLedger": "Папір для книг (11x17 дюймів)", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtLetter": "Листовий папір (8,5x11 дюйма)", "PE.Views.SlideSizeSettings.txtOverhead": "Накладні витрати", @@ -1933,7 +1933,7 @@ "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Пристосувати до слайду", "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "Придатний до ширини", "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipPreview": "Розпочати слайдшоу", - "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "вибрати мову тексту", + "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "Вибрати мову тексту", "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "Збільшити", "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "Збільшити зображення", "PE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Зменшити зображення", @@ -1993,7 +1993,7 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ThemedStyle": "Стиль із теми", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", - "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, автофігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", + "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація міститься в зображенні, фігурі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Внизу", "PE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Використовувати поля за замовчуванням", @@ -2068,7 +2068,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.capTabFile": "Файл", "PE.Views.Toolbar.capTabHome": "Головна", "PE.Views.Toolbar.capTabInsert": "Вставити", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniCapitalizeWords": "Кожне слово з великої літери", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniCapitalizeWords": "Кожне Слово З Великої Літери", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Вставити спеціальну таблицю", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Картинка з файлу", "PE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "Зображення зі сховища", @@ -2101,7 +2101,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textListSettings": "Налаштування списку", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textRecentlyUsed": "Останні використані", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textShapeAlignBottom": "Вирівняти знизу", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.textShapeAlignCenter": "Вирівняти центр", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textShapeAlignCenter": "Відцентрувати", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textShapeAlignLeft": "Вирівняти зліва", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textShapeAlignMiddle": "Вирівняти посередині", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textShapeAlignRight": "Вирівняти справа", @@ -2115,6 +2115,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Надрядковий", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "Анімація", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Співпраця", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "Малювати", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Файл", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Домашній", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Вставити", @@ -2149,14 +2150,14 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Вставити рівняння", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "Додати гіперсилку", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Вставити зображення", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "вставити автофігури", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Вставити фігури", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Вставити символ", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Вставити таблицю", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Вставити напис", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Вставити текст Art", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Вставити Text Art", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertVideo": "Вставити відео", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Лінія інтервалу", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Кулі", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Ненумерований список", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersArrow": "Маркери-стрілки", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersCheckmark": "Маркери-галочки", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersDash": "Маркери-тире", @@ -2165,7 +2166,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersFSquare": "Заповнені квадратні маркери", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersHRound": "Пусті круглі маркери", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkersStar": "Маркери-зірочки", - "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "Нумерація", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "Нумерований список", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "Вставити", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPreview": "Розпочати слайдшоу", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "Роздрукувати", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json index 5ae273c880..4b20b98a95 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "餅", "Common.define.chartData.textPie3d": "3-D 圓餅圖", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY（散點圖）", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadar": "雷達", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarFilled": "填色雷達圖", + "Common.define.chartData.textRadarMarker": "含標記的雷達", "Common.define.chartData.textScatter": "散佈圖", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLine": "散佈圖同直線", "Common.define.chartData.textScatterLineMarker": "散佈圖同直線及標記", @@ -250,15 +253,173 @@ "Common.define.effectData.textZoom": "放大", "Common.define.gridlineData.txtCm": "公分", "Common.define.gridlineData.txtPt": "pt", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAccentedPicture": "強調圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAccentProcess": "強調處理", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingFlow": "交替流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingHexagons": "交替六邊形", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingPictureBlocks": "交替圖片區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAlternatingPictureCircles": "交替圖片圓形", + "Common.define.smartArt.textArchitectureLayout": "架構佈局", + "Common.define.smartArt.textArrowRibbon": "箭頭緞帶", + "Common.define.smartArt.textAscendingPictureAccentProcess": "升序圖片強調處理", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBalance": "平衡", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicBendingProcess": "基本彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicBlockList": "基本塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicChevronProcess": "基本雪佛龍流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicCycle": "基本循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicMatrix": "基本矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicPie": "基本圓餅圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicProcess": "基本流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicPyramid": "基本金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicRadial": "基本射線狀", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicTarget": "基本目標", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicTimeline": "基本時間軸", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBasicVenn": "基本文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureAccentList": "彎曲圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureBlocks": "彎曲圖片區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureCaption": "彎曲圖片標題", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureCaptionList": "彎曲圖片標題清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBendingPictureSemiTranparentText": "彎曲圖片半透明文字", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBlockCycle": "區塊循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textBubblePictureList": "氣泡圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCaptionedPictures": "帶標題的圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textChevronAccentProcess": "箭頭強調流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textChevronList": "箭頭清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleAccentTimeline": "圓形強調時間軸", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleArrowProcess": "圓形箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCirclePictureHierarchy": "圓形圖片階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleProcess": "圓形流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircleRelationship": "圓形關係", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircularBendingProcess": "圓形彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCircularPictureCallout": "圓形圖片註解", + "Common.define.smartArt.textClosedChevronProcess": "閉合箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousArrowProcess": "連續箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousBlockProcess": "連續塊流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousCycle": "連續循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textContinuousPictureList": "連續圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingArrows": "匯聚箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingRadial": "匯聚射線狀", + "Common.define.smartArt.textConvergingText": "匯聚文字", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCounterbalanceArrows": "平衡箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCycle": "循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textCycleMatrix": "循環矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingBlockList": "降序區塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDescendingProcess": "降序流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDetailedProcess": "詳細流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDivergingArrows": "發散箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textDivergingRadial": "發散徑向", "Common.define.smartArt.textEquation": "方程式", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFramedTextPicture": "框架文字圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textFunnel": "漏斗", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGear": "齒輪", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGridMatrix": "網格矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textGroupedList": "分組清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHalfCircleOrganizationChart": "半圓形組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHexagonCluster": "六邊形群組", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHexagonRadial": "六邊形徑向", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchy": "階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHierarchyList": "階層清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalBulletList": "水平項目符號清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalHierarchy": "水平階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalLabeledHierarchy": "水平標籤階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalMultiLevelHierarchy": "水平多層階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalOrganizationChart": "水平組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textHorizontalPictureList": "水平圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textIncreasingArrowProcess": "遞增箭頭流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textIncreasingCircleProcess": "遞增圓圈流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInterconnectedBlockProcess": "互連區塊流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInterconnectedRings": "互連環圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textInvertedPyramid": "倒金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textLabeledHierarchy": "含標籤的階層結構", + "Common.define.smartArt.textLinearVenn": "線性文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textLinedList": "有格線的清單", "Common.define.smartArt.textList": "清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textMatrix": "矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textMultidirectionalCycle": "多方向循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textNameAndTitleOrganizationChart": "名稱與職稱組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textNestedTarget": "巢狀目標", + "Common.define.smartArt.textNondirectionalCycle": "無方向循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOpposingArrows": "相對箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOpposingIdeas": "相對觀點", + "Common.define.smartArt.textOrganizationChart": "組織圖", "Common.define.smartArt.textOther": "其它", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPhasedProcess": "分階處理", "Common.define.smartArt.textPicture": "圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureAccentBlocks": "圖片強調區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureAccentList": "圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureAccentProcess": "圖片強調流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureCaptionList": "圖片標題列表", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureFrame": "圖片框架", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureGrid": "圖片網格", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureLineup": "圖片排列", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureOrganizationChart": "圖片組織圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPictureStrips": "圖片條帶", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPieProcess": "圓餅圖流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPlusAndMinus": "加號和減號", + "Common.define.smartArt.textProcess": "流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textProcessArrows": "流程箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textProcessList": "流程清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPyramid": "金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textPyramidList": "金字塔清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialCluster": "徑向群組", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialCycle": "徑向循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialList": "徑向清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialPictureList": "徑向圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRadialVenn": "徑向文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRandomToResultProcess": "隨機結果處理", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRelationship": "關聯性", + "Common.define.smartArt.textRepeatingBendingProcess": "重複彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textReverseList": "反向清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSegmentedCycle": "分段循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSegmentedProcess": "分段流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSegmentedPyramid": "分段金字塔", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSnapshotPictureList": "快照圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSpiralPicture": "螺旋圖片", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSquareAccentList": "方形強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStackedList": "堆疊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStackedVenn": "堆疊文氏圖", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStaggeredProcess": "交錯式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStepDownProcess": "向下階梯式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textStepUpProcess": "向上階梯式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textSubStepProcess": "子階段式流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTabbedArc": "已定位的弧形", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTableHierarchy": "表格階層", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTableList": "表格清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTabList": "定位清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTargetList": "目標清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTextCycle": "文字循環", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureAccent": "主題圖片強調", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureAlternatingAccent": "主題圖片交替強調", + "Common.define.smartArt.textThemePictureGrid": "主題圖片網格", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitledMatrix": "標題矩陣", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitledPictureAccentList": "標題圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitledPictureBlocks": "標題圖片區塊", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTitlePictureLineup": "標題圖片排列", + "Common.define.smartArt.textTrapezoidList": "梯形清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textUpwardArrow": "向上箭頭", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVaryingWidthList": "寬度不一的清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalAccentList": "垂直強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalArrowList": "垂直箭頭清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBendingProcess": "垂直彎曲流程", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBlockList": "垂直區塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBoxList": "垂直方塊清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBracketList": "垂直括弧清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalBulletList": "垂直項目符號清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalChevronList": "垂直V型清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalCircleList": "垂直循環清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalCurvedList": "垂直彎曲清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalEquation": "垂直方程式", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalPictureAccentList": "垂直圖片強調清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalPictureList": "垂直圖片清單", + "Common.define.smartArt.textVerticalProcess": "垂直流程", "Common.Translation.textMoreButton": "更多", + "Common.Translation.tipFileLocked": "文件已鎖定編輯。您可以進行更改並保存為本機副本。", + "Common.Translation.tipFileReadOnly": "此檔案是唯讀的。若要保留您的更改，請以新名稱或不同位置儲存此檔案。", "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "該文件正在另一個應用程序中進行編輯。您可以繼續編輯並將其另存為副本。", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnEdit": "\n建立副本", "Common.Translation.warnFileLockedBtnView": "打開查看", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textAutoColor": "自動", + "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textEyedropper": "滴管工具", "Common.UI.ButtonColored.textNewColor": "新增自訂顏色", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "無邊框", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "無邊框", @@ -312,8 +473,43 @@ "Common.Utils.String.textCtrl": "Ctrl", "Common.Utils.String.textShift": "Shift", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtaccent": "口音", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtAqua": "淺綠色", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtbackground": "背景", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlack": "黑色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBlue": "藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrightGreen": "亮綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtBrown": "棕色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkBlue": "深藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarker": "較深的", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGray": "深灰色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkGreen": "深綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkPurple": "深紫色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkRed": "深紅色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkTeal": "藍綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtDarkYellow": "深黃色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGold": "金色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGray": "灰色", "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtGreen": "綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtIndigo": "靛藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLavender": "薰衣草色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightBlue": "淺藍色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLighter": "較淺的", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGray": "淺灰色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightGreen": "淺綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightOrange": "淺橙色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtLightYellow": "淺黃色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtOrange": "橘色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPink": "粉紅色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtPurple": "紫色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRed": "紅色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtRose": "玫瑰色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtSkyBlue": "天空藍", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTeal": "藍綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txttext": "文字", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtTurquosie": "藍綠色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtViolet": "紫羅蘭色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtWhite": "白色", + "Common.Utils.ThemeColor.txtYellow": "黃色", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "地址:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "被許可人", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "許可人", @@ -330,7 +526,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDelete": "刪除", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textDoubleSpaces": "按兩下空白鍵自動增加一個句點(.)符號", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLCells": "儲存格首字母大寫", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLDont": "請勿在之後大寫", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textFLSentence": "句子第一個字母大寫", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textForLangFL": "語言例外：", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyperlink": "網絡路徑超連結", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textHyphens": "帶連字符（-）的連字符（-）", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "數學自動更正", @@ -345,7 +543,9 @@ "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textResetAll": "重置為預設", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textRestore": "回復", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "自動更正", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddFL": "例外必須包含只有字母，大小寫不拘。", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnAddRec": "公認的函數只能包含字母A到Z，大寫或小寫。", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetFL": "您新增的所有例外狀況都將被移除，已移除的例外狀況將會被還原。您要繼續嗎？", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textWarnResetRec": "您添加的所有表達式都將被刪除，被刪除的表達式將被恢復。你想繼續嗎？", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReplace": "％1的自動更正條目已存在。您要更換嗎？", "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.warnReset": "您添加的所有自動更正將被刪除，更改後的自動更正將恢復為其原始值。你想繼續嗎？", @@ -386,8 +586,12 @@ "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "粘貼", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "載入中...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "分享設定", + "Common.Views.Draw.hintEraser": "橡皮擦", "Common.Views.Draw.hintSelect": "選擇", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtEraser": "橡皮擦", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtHighlighter": "螢光筆", "Common.Views.Draw.txtMM": "分", + "Common.Views.Draw.txtPen": "筆", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSelect": "選擇", "Common.Views.Draw.txtSize": "大小", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "圖表編輯器", @@ -414,6 +618,7 @@ "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "下載文件", "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "編輯當前文件", "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "列印文件", + "Common.Views.Header.tipPrintQuick": "快速列印", "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "重做", "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "儲存", "Common.Views.Header.tipSearch": "搜尋", @@ -443,15 +648,18 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "分割儲存格", "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "選擇文件語言", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textBulleted": "已加入項目點", + "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "自檔案", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "從存儲", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "從 URL", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "已編號", + "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textSelect": "從...選取", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.tipChange": "更改項目點", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "項目點", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "顏色", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtImage": "圖像", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtImport": "匯入", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "新子彈點", + "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewImage": "新影像", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "無", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtOfText": "文字百分比", "Common.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "大小", @@ -565,14 +773,18 @@ "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "保存文件夾", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textCaseSensitive": "區分大小寫", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textCloseSearch": "關閉搜索", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textContentChanged": "文件已變更", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFind": "尋找", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textFindAndReplace": "尋找與取代", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textItemsSuccessfullyReplaced": "{0} 項成功取代。", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textMatchUsingRegExp": "用正規表達式進行匹配", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoMatches": "無匹配", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textNoSearchResults": "查無搜索结果", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textPartOfItemsNotReplaced": "{0}/{1} 項已取代。剩餘 {2} 項被其他使用者鎖定。", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplace": "取代", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceAll": "全部替換", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textReplaceWith": "替換為", + "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchAgain": "{0}進行新的搜尋{1}以獲得準確的結果。", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchHasStopped": "搜索已停止", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textSearchResults": "搜索结果：{0}/{1}", "Common.Views.SearchPanel.textTooManyResults": "因數量過多而無法顯示部分結果", @@ -597,6 +809,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "字體名稱", "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "字體大小", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "允許簽名者在簽名對話框中添加註釋", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textDefInstruction": "在簽署此文件之前，請驗證您正在簽署的內容是否正確。", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "電子郵件", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "名稱", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "簽名人稱號", @@ -645,6 +858,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtUntitled": "無標題", "PE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "加載數據中...", "PE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "加載數據中", + "PE.Controllers.Main.confirmMaxChangesSize": "操作的大小超過了伺服器設定的限制。
          按下「復原」以取消最後一個動作，或按下「繼續」以在本地保留動作（需下載檔案或複製其內容，以確保不會遺失任何內容）", "PE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "轉換逾時。", "PE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "按“確定”返回文檔列表。", "PE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "錯誤", @@ -653,6 +867,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "下載簡報中", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "您嘗試進行未被授權的動作。
          請聯繫您的文件伺服器主機的管理者。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "不正確的圖像 URL", + "PE.Controllers.Main.errorCannotPasteImg": "我們無法從剪貼簿貼上此圖片，但您可以將其儲存到您的設備並從那邊插入，或您可以複製不帶有文字的圖片並將其貼上至簡報中。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "服務器連接丟失。該文檔目前無法編輯。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorComboSeries": "新增組合圖表需選兩個以上的數據系列。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "此文件無法儲存。請檢查連線設定或聯絡您的管理者
          當您點選'OK'按鈕, 您將會被提示來進行此文件的下載。", @@ -667,6 +882,11 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "該文件受密碼保護，無法打開。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorFileSizeExceed": "此檔案超過這一主機限制的大小
          進一步資訊，請聯絡您的文件服務主機的管理者。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "保存文件時發生錯誤。請使用\"下載為\"選項將文件保存到電腦機硬碟中，或稍後再試。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
          檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "未知密鑰描述符", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "密鑰描述符已過期", "PE.Controllers.Main.errorLoadingFont": "字體未加載。
          請聯繫文件服務器管理員。", @@ -742,10 +962,12 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "形狀", "PE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "嚴格模式", "PE.Controllers.Main.textText": "文字", + "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryQuickPrint": "您已選擇快速列印：整個文件將由上次選定或預設的印表機列印。
          是否要繼續？", "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "快速共同編輯模式禁用了“撤消/重做”功能。
          單擊“嚴格模式”按鈕切換到“嚴格共同編輯”模式以編輯文件而不會受到其他用戶的干擾，並且僅在保存後發送更改他們。您可以使用編輯器的“高級”設置在共同編輯模式之間切換。", "PE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedoWarn": "在快速共同編輯模式下，撤消/重做功能被禁用。", "PE.Controllers.Main.textUndo": "復原", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "證件過期", + "PE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseNotActive": "授權未啟用", "PE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "編輯器已更新", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtAddFirstSlide": "點擊以新增第一張投影片", "PE.Controllers.Main.txtAddNotes": "點擊添加筆記", @@ -1011,6 +1233,8 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "請耐心等待...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "該應用程序在IE9上具有較低的功能。使用IE10或更高版本", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "瀏覽器當前的縮放設置不受完全支持。請按Ctrl + 0重置為預設縮放。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名使用者無法存取。
          此文件將僅供檢視。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "授權未啟用。
          請聯絡您的管理員。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "您的系統已經達到同時編輯連線的 %1 編輯者。只能以檢視模式開啟此文件。
          進一步訊息, 請聯繫您的管理者。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "您的授權證已過期.
          請更新您的授權證並重新整理頁面。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "授權過期
          您已沒有編輯文件功能的授權
          請與您的管理者聯繫。", @@ -1019,6 +1243,8 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "您的系統已經達到同時編輯連線的 %1 編輯者。只能以檢視模式開啟此文件。
          請聯繫 %1 銷售團隊來取得個人升級的需求。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。與％1銷售團隊聯繫以了解個人升級條款。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "您被拒絕編輯文件的權利。", + "PE.Controllers.Print.txtPrintRangeInvalid": "無效的列印範圍", + "PE.Controllers.Print.txtPrintRangeSingleRange": "請輸入單一投影片編號或投影片範圍（例如，5-12）。或者以PDF格式列印。", "PE.Controllers.Search.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", "PE.Controllers.Search.textNoTextFound": "找不到您一直在搜索的數據。請調整您的搜索選項。", "PE.Controllers.Search.textReplaceSkipped": "替換已完成。 {0}個事件被跳過。", @@ -1394,18 +1620,29 @@ "PE.Views.Animation.txtSec": "秒", "PE.Views.AnimationDialog.textPreviewEffect": "預覽效果", "PE.Views.AnimationDialog.textTitle": "其他特效", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dDepth": "深度（基準的百分比）", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dHeight": "高度（基準的百分比）", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.text3dRotation": "3D 旋轉", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "顯示進階設定", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textAutoscale": "自動縮放", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "更改圖表類型", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textDefault": "預設旋轉", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textDown": "下", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "編輯資料", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "高度", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textKeepRatio": "比例不變", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textLeft": "左", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textNarrow": "窄視角", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textPerspective": "透視", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textRight": "右", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textRightAngle": "直角座標軸", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textSize": "大小", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "樣式", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textUp": "上", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWiden": "廣角", "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "寬度", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textX": "X軸旋轉", + "PE.Views.ChartSettings.textY": "Y軸旋轉", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "替代文字", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "描述", "PE.Views.ChartSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "視覺對象信息的替代基於文本的表示形式，將向有視力或認知障礙的人讀取，以幫助他們更好地理解圖像，自動成型，圖表或表格中包含的信息。", @@ -1432,16 +1669,21 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "增加評論", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.addToLayoutText": "添加到佈局", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedChartText": "圖表進階設置", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedEquationText": "方程式設定", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedImageText": "圖像進階設置", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedParagraphText": "文字進階設定", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedShapeText": "形狀進階設定", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "表格進階設定", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "對齊", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.allLinearText": "全部 - 線性", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.allProfText": "全部 - 專業", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "之下", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "單元格垂直對齊", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "單元格", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "中心", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.columnText": "欄", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.currLinearText": "目前 - 線性", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.currProfText": "目前 - 專業", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteColumnText": "刪除欄位", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteRowText": "刪除行列", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteTableText": "刪除表格", @@ -1479,10 +1721,13 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "分割儲存格...", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "分割儲存格", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "表格", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAddHGuides": "新增水平參考線", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAddVGuides": "新增垂直參考線", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBack": "傳送到背景", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "向後發送", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "向前帶進", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "移到前景", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textClearGuides": "清晰指南", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCm": "公分", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "複製", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "修剪", @@ -1490,6 +1735,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "切合", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCustom": "自訂", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "剪下", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDeleteGuide": "刪除參考線", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "分配列", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "分配行", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditPoints": "編輯點", @@ -1499,6 +1745,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "從存儲", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "從 URL", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textGridlines": "網格線", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textGuides": "參考線", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "下一張投影片", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "貼上", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPrevPage": "上一張投影片", @@ -1507,6 +1754,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "逆時針旋轉90°", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "順時針旋轉90°", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRulers": "尺規", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSaveAsPicture": "另存為圖片", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "底部對齊", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "居中對齊", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "對齊左側", @@ -1514,8 +1762,12 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "對齊右側", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "上方對齊", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShowGridlines": "顯示網格線", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShowGuides": "顯示參考線", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSlideSettings": "投影片設定", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSmartGuides": "智慧參考線", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSnapObjects": "對齊物件到網格", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "復原", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipGuides": "顯示參考線", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "該元素當前正在由另一個用戶編輯。", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "添加到字典", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "添加底部邊框", @@ -1614,6 +1866,7 @@ "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUnderbar": "槓至文字底下", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUngroup": "解開組合", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtWarnUrl": "這鏈接有可能對您的設備和數據造成損害。
          您確定要繼續嗎？", + "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.unicodeText": "Unicode 碼", "PE.Views.DocumentHolder.vertAlignText": "垂直對齊", "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.goToSlideText": "轉到投影片", "PE.Views.DocumentPreview.slideIndexText": "在{1}投影片中的第{0}張", @@ -1676,9 +1929,12 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "帶密碼", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "保護演示", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "帶簽名", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddedSignature": "已將有效簽名加入簡報。
          該簡報受到編輯保護。", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtAddSignature": "添加無形的數位簽章以確保簡報的完整性", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "編輯簡報", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "編輯將刪除演示文稿中的簽名。
          確定要繼續嗎？", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "此演示文稿已受密碼保護", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtProtectPresentation": "使用密碼加密此簡報", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "有效的簽名已添加到演示文稿中。演示文稿受到保護，無法編輯。", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "演示文稿中的某些數字簽名無效或無法驗證。演示文稿受到保護，無法編輯。", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "查看簽名", @@ -1723,6 +1979,8 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "本機", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "打樣", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "點", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtQuickPrint": "在編輯器標頭中顯示快速列印按鈕", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtQuickPrintTip": "文件將由最後選取或預設的印表機列印。", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "全部啟用", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "不用提示啟用全部巨集", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "拼字檢查", @@ -1736,9 +1994,11 @@ "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "作為Windows", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWorkspace": "工作空間", "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveAs.textDownloadAs": "下載為", + "PE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ViewSaveCopy.textSaveCopyAs": "另存新檔為", "PE.Views.GridSettings.textCm": "公分", "PE.Views.GridSettings.textCustom": "自訂", "PE.Views.GridSettings.textSpacing": "間距", + "PE.Views.GridSettings.textTitle": "網格設定", "PE.Views.HeaderFooterDialog.applyAllText": "全部應用", "PE.Views.HeaderFooterDialog.applyText": "套用", "PE.Views.HeaderFooterDialog.diffLanguage": "您不能使用與投影片母片不同的語言的日期格式。
          要更改母片，請點擊“全部應用”而不是“應用”", @@ -1878,11 +2138,25 @@ "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabRight": "右", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "段落-進階設置", "PE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "自動", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtAllPages": "所有投影片", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSides": "雙面列印", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesLongDesc": "依長邊翻轉頁面", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtBothSidesShortDesc": "依短邊翻轉頁面", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCopies": "副本", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCurrentPage": "目前投影片", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtCustomPages": "自訂列印", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtEmptyTable": "沒有可列印的內容，因簡報為空白", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOf": "之 {0}", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSide": "單面列印", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtOneSideDesc": "只印單面", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPage": "滑動", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPageNumInvalid": "投影片編號無效", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPages": "投影片", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPaperSize": "紙張尺寸", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrint": "打印", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintPdf": "以PDF格式列印", "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintRange": "列印範圍", + "PE.Views.PrintWithPreview.txtPrintSides": "列印面", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "圖表設定", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "影像設定", "PE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "文字設定", @@ -1975,7 +2249,7 @@ "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textKeepRatio": "比例不變", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textLineStyle": "線型", - "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "Miter", + "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "斜接角", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textNofit": "不要自動調整", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textPlacement": "放置", "PE.Views.ShapeSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "職務", @@ -2132,8 +2406,10 @@ "PE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "僅設置右外框", "PE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "僅設置外部頂部邊框", "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Custom": "自訂", + "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Dark": "暗", "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Light": "光", "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Medium": "中", + "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtGroupTable_Optimal": "檔案最佳匹配", "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "無邊框", "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "強調", "PE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_DarkStyle": "黑暗風格", @@ -2281,6 +2557,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "上標", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabAnimation": "動畫", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "協作", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabDraw": "繪圖", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "檔案", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "首頁", "PE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "插入", @@ -2314,13 +2591,16 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertAudio": "插入音頻", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertChart": "插入圖表", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "插入方程式", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHorizontalText": "插入水平文字方塊", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertHyperlink": "新增超連結", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "插入圖片", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "插入自動形狀", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSmartArt": "插入SmartArt", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "插入符號", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "插入表格", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "插入文字框", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "插入文字藝術", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertVerticalText": "插入垂直文字方塊", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertVideo": "插入影片", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "行間距", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "項目符號", @@ -2337,6 +2617,7 @@ "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "貼上", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPreview": "開始投影片放映", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "列印", + "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrintQuick": "快速列印", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "重做", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "儲存", "PE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "保存您的更改，以供其他用戶查看。", @@ -2414,20 +2695,30 @@ "PE.Views.Transitions.txtParameters": "參量", "PE.Views.Transitions.txtPreview": "預覽", "PE.Views.Transitions.txtSec": "S", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAddHGuides": "新增水平參考線", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAddVGuides": "新增垂直參考線", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textAlwaysShowToolbar": "永遠顯示工具欄", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textClearGuides": "清晰指南", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textCm": "公分", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textCustom": "自訂", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textFitToSlide": "與投影片切合", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textFitToWidth": "配合寬度", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textGridlines": "網格線", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textGuides": "參考線", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textInterfaceTheme": "介面主題", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textLeftMenu": "左側面板", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textNotes": "備忘稿", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textRightMenu": "右側面板", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textRulers": "尺規", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textShowGridlines": "顯示網格線", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textShowGuides": "顯示參考線", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textSmartGuides": "智慧參考線", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.textSnapObjects": "對齊物件到網格", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textStatusBar": "狀態欄", "PE.Views.ViewTab.textZoom": "放大", "PE.Views.ViewTab.tipFitToSlide": "與投影片切合", "PE.Views.ViewTab.tipFitToWidth": "配合寬度", "PE.Views.ViewTab.tipGridlines": "顯示網格線", + "PE.Views.ViewTab.tipGuides": "顯示參考線", "PE.Views.ViewTab.tipInterfaceTheme": "介面主題" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh.json index 8fb19ca372..a7fcd82e22 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/locale/zh.json @@ -1233,6 +1233,7 @@ "PE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "请稍候...", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "该应用程序在IE9上的功能很差。使用IE10或更高版本", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "您的浏览器当前缩放设置不完全支持。请按Ctrl + 0重设为默认缩放。", + "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseAnonymous": "拒绝匿名用户的访问。
          本文档将以仅查看模式而打开。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseBefore": "许可证未激活。
          请联系管理员。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "您已达到同时连接%1编辑器的限制。该文档将被打开仅供查看。
          请联系您的管理员以了解更多。", "PE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "您的许可证已过期。
          请更新您的许可证并刷新页面。", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css index 9452c3de97..d789dacd08 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index 183742440f..4e5b860a9e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -2,7 +2,8 @@ {"src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Introducing Presentation Editor user interface", "headername": "Program Interface"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "File tab"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Home Tab"}, - {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Insert tab" }, + { "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Insert tab" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Drawing tab"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm", "name": "Transitions tab" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm", "name": "Animation tab" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm", "name": "Collaboration tab" }, @@ -23,7 +24,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "name": "Insert and adjust images"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Insert and edit charts" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "name": "Insert and format tables" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insert SmartArt objects" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insert SmartArt objects" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Draw freehand on a slide" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm", "name": "Adding animations" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm", "name": "Creating a motion path animation" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insert symbols and characters" }, @@ -41,6 +43,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "name": "Translate text" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Replace a word by a synonym" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communicate while editing"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Host and schedule Zoom meetings"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm", "name": "View presentation information", "headername": "Tools and settings"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Save/print/download your presentation" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Advanced settings of Presentation Editor"}, diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 30107fb133..181ece07e7 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -161,8 +161,8 @@

          Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

          Zoom Out - Ctrl+- - ^ Ctrl+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+- + Ctrl+- + ^ Ctrl+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited presentation. @@ -378,6 +378,12 @@

          Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

          ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied object from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. + + Paste text without style formatting + Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V,
          + ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V + Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. + Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K @@ -386,14 +392,14 @@

          Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

          Copy style - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C + Alt+Ctrl+C + ^ Ctrl+Alt+C,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V + Alt+Ctrl+V + ^ Ctrl+Alt+V,
          ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. @@ -625,17 +631,17 @@

          Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

          Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide + One paragraph up + Ctrl+↑ + + Move the cursor one paragraph up. + + + One paragraph down + Ctrl+↓ + + Move the cursor one paragraph down. + --> Jump to the beginning of the line Home diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index db02a91e44..85f842ed20 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@

          Search and Replace Function

          To search for the needed characters, words or phrases in the Presentation Editor, click the icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel.

          -

          A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.

          +

          A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar.

          Find small panel

          To access the advanced settings, click the icon.

          The Find and replace panel will open:

          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 9acd0fdefb..27100edb6d 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -19,18 +19,42 @@

          Supported Formats of Electronic Presentation

          The Presentation Editor handles the following presentation formats.

          While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (PPTX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability.

          The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing.

          - - - - +
          FormatsDescription
          + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + @@ -38,23 +62,55 @@

          Supported Formats of Electronic Presentation

          - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + @@ -68,44 +124,84 @@

          Supported Formats of Electronic Presentation

          - + - - + + + + - + + + + - -
          FormatsDescription View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML
          DPSWPS Office Presentation Document by Kingsoft
          A slideshow presentation format included in the WPS Office suite that contains a collection of slides, which may consist of a title slide followed by content slides that may include text, images, video, audio, and shapes.          		++
          DPTKingsoft Presentation Template
          A file format for saving the default layout and styles for a presentation and for creating presentations (.DPS files) with the same formatting.          		++
          FODPOpenDocument Flat XML Presentation Format
          A file format for storing saved presentation in the OpenDocument XML file format without any compression.          		++
          ODPOpenDocument Presentation
          File format that represents presentations created by Impress application, which is a part of OpenOffice based office suites          		OpenDocument Presentation
          File format that represents presentations created by Impress application, which is a part of OpenOffice based office suites.          		 +
          OTPOpenDocument Presentation Template
          OpenDocument file format for presentation templates. An OTP template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting          		OpenDocument Presentation Template
          OpenDocument file format for presentation templates. An OTP template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting.          		++
          POTPortable object template
          A file format for creating slide show presentations that contain the default layout, formatting, and styles for a slide show. POT files are used to create multiple .PPT files with the same formatting.          		+ +
          POTMA macro-enabled presentation template by Microsoft PowerPoint
          A file format for creating slide show presentations that contain default images, slide templates, macros, and formatting.          		+ +
          POTXPowerPoint Open XML Document Template
          Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for presentation templates. A POTX template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting          		PowerPoint Open XML Document Template
          Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for presentation templates. A POTX template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting.          		 + +
          PPSPowerPoint Slideshow File
          A file format format that is used in the preparation of slideshows and presentations, to store a variety of data such as video, audio, text, animations, and pictures.          		++
          PPSMMacro-enabled slide show by Microsoft PowerPoint
          A file format that is used to create slide shows and presentations and contains one or more macro-enabled slides, which may include text, images, and transitions.          		++
          PPSXMicrosoft PowerPoint Slide Show
          Presentation file format used for slide show playback          		Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show
          Presentation file format used for slide show playback.          		 + +
          PPTXOffice Open XML Presentation
          Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents          		+Office Open XML Presentation
          Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents.          		++ +
          SXIStarOffice Impress Presentation
          A presentation format used for creating slideshow presentations that may consist of title and content slides with text and digital objects; supports audio, video, and transition effects.
          + + + + + +

          The following table contains the formats in which you can download a presentation from the File -> Download as menu.

          - + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - + + + + +
          Input format Can be downloaded as
          DPSJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          DPTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          FODPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          ODPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          OTPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          POTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          POTMJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          POTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          PPSJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          PPSMJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          PPSXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPTM, PPTX
          PPTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
          PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM
          SXIJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX

          You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your presentations into the most known file formats.

          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f0964d41f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Draw tab + + + + + + + + +
          +
          + +
          +

          Draw tab

          +

          The Draw tab of the Presentation Editor allows users to perform basic drawing operations.

          +
          +

          The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor:

          +

          Draw tab

          +
          +
          +

          The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor:

          +

          Draw tab

          +
          +

          Using this tab, you can:

          + +
          + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 76d0faa57d..6028e1d147 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

          Plugins tab

          The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor:

          Plugins tab

          -

          The Settings button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones.

          +

          The Plugin Manager button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones.

          The Macros button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation.

          Currently, the following plugins are available:

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1291514716 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + ChatGPT + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            ChatGPT

            +

            The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code.

            + +

            Installation

            +

            To install the ChatGPT plugin,

            +
              +
            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
              2. +
            2. Open the Plugin Manager.
              3. +
            3. Find
              ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
              4. +
            4. Click the
              ChatGPT icon in the Plugins tab.
              5. +
            5. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
              6. +
            + +

            Configuration

            +
              +
            1. Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page.
              2. +
            2. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field in the left panel of the editor.
              3. +
            +

            ChatGPT settings

            + +

            How to use

            +
              +
            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
              2. +
            2. Click the
              ChatGPT icon.
              3. +
            3. + Click the Show advanced settings button to see all the available settings: +
                +
              • Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website.
                • +
              • Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion.
                • +
              • Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive.
                • +
              • Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass.
                • +
              • Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence.
                • +
              +
              4. +
            4. Enter the request and click the Submit button to process it, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one.
              5. +
            +

            ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the "as is" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE.

            +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..32def4ea1f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Draw freehand on a slide + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            Draw freehand on a slide

            +

            In the Presentation Editor, you can use the Draw tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your slide.

            +

            Drawing options

            +

            To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon, and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the needed color is not in the palette.

            +

            Pen tool

            +

            When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button.

            +

            Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke.

            +

            Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element.

            +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm index ec73e4fb41..6d168106de 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm @@ -38,10 +38,19 @@

            Fill objects and select colors

            • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected theme/color scheme of the presentation. Once you apply a different theme or color scheme, the Theme Colors set will change.
            • Standard Colors - the default colors set.
              • -
            • Custom Color - click on this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (Red, Green, Blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: -

              Palette - Custom Color

              -

              The custom color will be applied to your object and added to the Custom color palette of the menu.

              -
              • +
            • + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
                +
              • + Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the presentation. +
                • +
              • + More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

                Palette - Custom Color

                +

                The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette.

                +
                • +
              +

            You can use the same color types when selecting the color of the autoshape stroke, adjusting the font color, or changing the table background or border color.

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 1b5000133b..509e7ffade 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -10,17 +10,17 @@ -
            -
            - -
            -

            Insert and format autoshapes

            +
            +
            + +
            +

            Insert and format autoshapes

            Insert an autoshape

            -

            To add an autoshape to a slide in the Presentation Editor,

            +

            To add an autoshape to a slide in the Presentation Editor,

            1. in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the autoshape to,
            2. - click the
              Shape icon on the Home tab or the
              Shape gallery dropdown arrow on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, + click the
              Shape icon on the Home tab or the
              Shape gallery dropdown arrow on the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
            3. select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines,
            4. click on the necessary autoshape within the selected group,
              5. @@ -29,47 +29,70 @@

              Insert an autoshape

              Note: you can click and drag to stretch the shape.

            5. - once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. + once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

              Note: to add a caption within the autoshape, make sure the shape is selected on the slide and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).

            It's also possible to add an autoshape to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article.

            -
            +
            +

            Copy autoshape style formatting

            +

            To copy a certain autoshape style formatting,

            +
              +
            1. select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
              2. +
            2. click the Copy style
              icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this
              ),
              3. +
            3. select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting.
              4. +
            + +

            Adjust autoshape settings

            -

            Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

            -

            Shape settings tab

            -
              -
            • Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: -
                -
              • Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape.
                • -
              • Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.
                • -
              • Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.
                • -
              • Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements.
                • -
              • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                • -
              -

              For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section.

              -
              • -
            • Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. -
                -
              • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
                • -
              • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color.
                • -
              • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                • -
              -
              • +

              Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

              +

              Shape settings tab

              +
                +
              • + Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: +
                  +
                • Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape.
                  • +
                • Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.
                  • +
                • Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.
                  • +
                • Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements.
                  • +
                • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                  • +
                +

                For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section.

                +
                • +
              • + Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. +
                  +
                • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
                  • +
                • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color.
                  • +
                • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                  • +
                • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
                  • +
                +
              • Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons:
                  -
                • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
                  • -
                • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
                  • -
                • to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
                  • -
                • to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
                  • +
                • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
                  • +
                • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
                  • +
                • to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
                  • +
                • to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
              • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
              • Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow.
                • -
              -
              -

              To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened:

              +
            +
            +

            To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened:

            Shape Properties - Size tab

            The Placement tab allows you to change the autoshape Width and/or Height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original autoshape aspect ratio.

            You can also set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center.

            @@ -80,57 +103,61 @@

            Adjust autoshape settings

          • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).

          Shape Properties - Weights & Arrows tab

          -

          The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

          -
            -
          • Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters: -
              -
            • Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: -
                -
              • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                • -
              • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                • -
              • Square - the end points will be square.
                • -
              -
              • -
            • Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: -
                -
              • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                • -
              • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                • -
              • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                • -
              -

              Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

              -
              • -
            -
            • -
          • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists.
            • -
          -

          Shape Properties - Text Padding tab

          -

          The Text Box tab contains the following parameters: +

          The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

            -
          • AutoFit - to change the way text is displayed within the shape: Do not Autofit, Shrink text on overflow, Resize shape to fit text.
            • -
          • Text Padding - to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e., the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).
            • +
          • + Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters: +
              +
            • + Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: +
                +
              • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                • +
              • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                • +
              • Square - the end points will be square.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • + Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: +
                +
              • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                • +
              • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                • +
              • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                • +
              +

              Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists.
          +

          Shape Properties - Text Padding tab

          +

          + The Text Box tab contains the following parameters: +

            +
          • AutoFit - to change the way text is displayed within the shape: Do not Autofit, Shrink text on overflow, Resize shape to fit text.
            • +
          • Text Padding - to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e., the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).
            • +

          Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

          -

          Shape Properties - Columns tab

          +

          Shape Properties - Columns tab

          The Columns tab allows adding columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another.

          Shape Properties - Alternative Text tab

          The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the shape.

          -

          To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar.

          -

          To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key.

          -

          To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section.

          +

          To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar.

          +

          To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key.

          +

          To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section.

          Join autoshapes using connectors

          You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that,

            -
          1. click the
            Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar,
            2. +
          2. click the
            Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar,
          3. select the Lines group from the menu,

            Shapes - Lines

          4. click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform),
          5. - hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points
            that appear on the shape outline, + hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points
            that appear on the shape outline,

          6. @@ -141,6 +168,6 @@

            Join autoshapes using connectors

            If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them.

            You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points.

            - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index 7e46eeebfa..b5c295b1a6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@

            Insert a chart

            1. Put the cursor where you want to add a chart.
            2. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
              3. -
            3. Click the
              Chart icon on the top toolbar.
              4. +
            4. Click the
              Chart icon on the top toolbar.
            5. Select the needed chart type from the available ones:
              @@ -88,6 +88,14 @@

              Insert a chart

            6. Scatter with straight lines
              7. +
              + Radar Charts +
                +
              • Radar
                • +
              • Radar with markers
                • +
              • Filled radar
                • +
              +
              Combo Charts
                @@ -100,7 +108,7 @@

                Insert a chart

                Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools.

              • - After that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: + After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls:
                • and
                  for copying and pasting the copied data
                • and
                  for undoing and redoing actions
                  • @@ -112,51 +120,51 @@

                  Insert a chart

                  Chart Editor window

                • - Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart Data window will open. + Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open.
                  1. - Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column. + Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis labels and Switch row/column.

                    Chart Data window

                    • - Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. + Chart data range - select data for your chart.
                      • - Click the
                        icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. + Click the
                        icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select the data range.

                        Select Data Range window

                    • - Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. + Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select a series name for legend entries.
                        -
                      • In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button.
                        • +
                      • In Legend entries (series), click Add button.
                      • - In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the
                        icon on the right of the Select name box. + In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the
                        icon on the right of the Select name box.

                        Edit Series window

                    • - Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. + Horizontal (category) axis labels - change the text for category labels.
                        -
                      • In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit.
                        • +
                      • In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit.
                      • - In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the
                        icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. + In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the
                        icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select the data range.

                        Axis Labels window

                      • -
                    • Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis.
                      • +
                    • Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis.
                    2. -
                  2. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window.
                    3. +
                  3. Click the OK button to apply the changes and close the window.
                • - Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), or Combo. + Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose the chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo.

                  Chart Type window

                  -

                  When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart Type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a seconary axis.

                  +

                  When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine as well as select data series to place on a secondary axis.

                  Chart Type Combo

                • @@ -165,39 +173,39 @@

                  Insert a chart

                  The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.

                  • - Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                      -
                    • None not to display the title of a chart,
                      • +
                    • None to display no chart title,
                    • Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area,
                      • -
                    • No Overlay to display the title above the plot area.
                      • +
                    • No overlay to display the title above the plot area.
                  • - Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                      -
                    • None not to display a legend,
                      • +
                    • None to display no legend,
                    • Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area,
                    • Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area,
                    • Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area,
                    • Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area,
                      • -
                    • Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area,
                      • -
                    • Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area.
                      • +
                    • Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area,
                      • +
                    • Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area.
                  • - Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
                    + Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
                    • Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type.
                        -
                      • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top.
                        • +
                      • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top.
                      • For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom.
                        • -
                      • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top.
                        • -
                      • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
                        • +
                      • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top.
                        • +
                      • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
                      • -
                    • Select the data you wish to include into your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value,
                      • -
                    • Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field.
                      • +
                    • Select the data you wish to include in your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value,
                      • +
                    • Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data labels separator entry field.
                  • Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines among data points, Smooth to use smooth curves among data points, or None not to display lines.
                    • @@ -207,41 +215,43 @@

                    Insert a chart

                  Chart - Advanced Settings window

                  -

                  The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                  +

                  The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                  Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

                    -
                  • Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed.
                    • +
                  • Select Hide to hide the vertical axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the vertical axis displayed.
                  • Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                      -
                    • None to not display a vertical axis title
                      • +
                    • None to display no vertical axis title,
                    • Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis,
                    • Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis.
                    • -
                  • Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                    • -
                  • Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                    • -
                  • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
                    • -
                  • Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                    • +
                  • Gridlines are used to specify the vertical gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major, Minor, or Major and minor.
                    • +
                  • Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                    • +
                  • Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                    • +
                  • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
                    • +
                  • Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                  • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
                    • +
                  • Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user.
                  • - The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options:
                      -
                    • None to not display major/minor tick marks,
                      • +
                    • None to display no major/minor tick marks,
                    • Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,
                    • In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis,
                    • Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                  • - The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: + The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                      -
                    • None to not display tick mark labels,
                      • +
                    • None to display no tick mark labels,
                    • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
                    • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
                    • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
                    • - To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. + To specify a Label format, click the Label format button, and choose a category as deemed appropriate.

                      Available label format categories:

                      • General
                        • @@ -256,7 +266,7 @@

                        Insert a chart

                      • Text
                      • Custom
                      -

                      Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page.

                      +

                      Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page.

                    • Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart.
                    @@ -266,38 +276,38 @@

                    Insert a chart

                    Chart - Advanced Settings window

                    Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only.

                    -

                    Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart.

                    -

                    The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below.

                    +

                    Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series varies considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart.

                    +

                    The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal axis options, see the description above/below.

                    Chart - Advanced Settings window

                    -

                    The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                    +

                    The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis that displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis that displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                      -
                    • Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed.
                      • +
                    • Select Hide to hide the horizontal axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the horizontal axis displayed.
                    • Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                      • None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title,
                        • -
                      • No Overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis,
                        • +
                      • No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis,
                      • -
                    • Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor.
                      • -
                    • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
                      • -
                    • Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks.
                      • +
                    • Gridlines are used to specify the horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor.
                      • +
                    • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
                      • +
                    • Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks.
                    • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
                    • - The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions that can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions that are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
                        -
                      • Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                        • -
                      • Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
                        • +
                      • Major/Minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                        • +
                      • Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
                    • - The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. + The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels that display categories.
                        -
                      • Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                        • -
                      • Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                        • -
                      • Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
                        • +
                      • Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                        • +
                      • Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                        • +
                      • Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category, etc.
                      • - To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. + To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate.

                        Available label format categories:

                        • General
                          • @@ -312,21 +322,21 @@

                          Insert a chart

                        • Text
                        • Custom
                        -

                        Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page.

                        +

                        Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page.

                      • Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart.

                    Chart - Advanced Settings: Cell Snapping

                    -

                    The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                    +

                    The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                      -
                    • Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well.
                      • -
                    • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.
                      • -
                    • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.
                      • +
                    • Move and size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well.
                      • +
                    • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.
                      • +
                    • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows preventing the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.

                    Chart Settings window

                    -

                    The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart.

                    +

                    The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart.

                  • Once the chart is added, you can also change its size and position. @@ -338,25 +348,25 @@

                    Insert a chart

                    It's also possible to add a chart to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article.

                    Edit chart elements

                    -

                    To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead.

                    +

                    To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own instead.

                    To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels, etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color.

                    -

                    When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                    +

                    When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                    - Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. - When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. + Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture, picture, or pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. + When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills, and lines, please refer to this page.

                    Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements.

                    If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element.

                    -

                    To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position.

                    +

                    To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button, and drag the element to the needed position.

                    -

                    To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key.

                    +

                    To delete a chart element, left-click it to select it, and press the Delete key.

                    You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation.

                    3D chart

                    Adjust chart settings

                    Chart tab -

                    The chart size, type and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right.

                    +

                    The chart size, type, and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right.

                    The Size section allows you to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.

                    The Change Chart Type section allows you to change the type of the selected chart type and/or its style using the corresponding drop-down menu.

                    To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section.

                    @@ -365,8 +375,8 @@

                    Adjust chart settings

                    Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts:

                    Chart Settings tab

                      -
                    • X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right.
                      • -
                    • Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right.
                      • +
                    • X rotation - set the required value for the X-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right.
                      • +
                    • Y rotation - set the required value for the Y-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right.
                    • Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right.
                    • Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view.
                    • Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually.
                      • @@ -383,10 +393,10 @@

                      Adjust chart settings

                      The Placement tab allows you to set the following properties:

                      • Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions
                        button is clicked (in this case it looks like this
                        ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio.
                        • -
                      • Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center.
                        • +
                      • Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top left corner and Center.

                      Chart Advanced Settings window

                      -

                      The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart.

                      +

                      The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart.

                      To delete the inserted chart, left-click it and press the Delete key.

                      To learn how to align a chart on the slide or arrange several objects, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section.

                      diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index 9df1ffe4be..b01fef42a9 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@

                      Insert an image

                    • the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button
                    • -
                  • once the image is added, you can change its size and position.
                    • +
                  • once the image is added, you can change its size and position. You can save the image as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

            You can also add an image into a text placeholder pressing the Image from file in it and selecting the necessary image stored on your PC, or use the Image from URL button and specify the image URL address:

            Add image to placeholder

            @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@

            Adjust image settings

          7. to flip the image horizontally (left to right)
          8. to flip the image vertically (upside down)
            9. -

            When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the Line type, size and color of the shape as well as change its type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

            +

            When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the Line type, size, color, and opacity, as well as change its type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

            On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image.

            Shape Settings tab

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index 7f55353467..88fc459578 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -23,6 +23,7 @@

            Insert SmartArt objects

          9. hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process,
          10. choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item.
          +

          You can save the SmartArt object as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

          You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel:

          Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually.

          @@ -88,9 +89,10 @@

          Insert SmartArt objects

        15. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line.
            -
          • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
            • +
          • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
          • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
          • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
            • +
          • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
        16. Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow.
          17. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm index 4d74e5bd5f..84e731961e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@

          Insert and format your text

          -

          Insert your text box into presentation

          -

          In the Presentation Editor, you can add a new text in three different ways:

          +

          Insert your text box into a presentation

          +

          In the Presentation Editor, you can add new text in three different ways:

          • Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text.
          • Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: @@ -33,6 +33,7 @@

            Insert your text box into presentation

            Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide.

            The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).

            As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

            +

            You can save the text box as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

            To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted.

            Format a text box

            Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

            @@ -40,31 +41,31 @@

            Format a text box

            • to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
            • to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings
              icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
              • -
            • to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options.
              • -
            • to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon
              on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window.
              • +
            • to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options.
              • +
            • to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon
              on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window.

            Format the text within the text box

            Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

            Text selected

            -

            Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately.

            +

            Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately.

            Align your text within the text box

            -

            The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center or justified. To do that:

            +

            The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center, or justified. To do that:

              -
            1. place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
              2. +
            2. place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
            3. drop-down the Horizontal align
              list on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
            4. select the alignment type you would like to apply:
              • the Align text left option
                allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned).
                • -
              • the Align text center option
                allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remains unaligned).
                • +
              • the Align text center option
                allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remain unaligned).
              • the Align text right option
                allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned).
              • the Justify option
                allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment).

            Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

            -

            The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle or bottom. To do that:

            +

            The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle, or bottom. To do that:

              -
            1. place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
              2. +
            2. place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
            3. drop-down the Vertical align
              list on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
            4. select the alignment type you would like to apply:
                @@ -76,16 +77,16 @@

                Format the text within the text box

            Change the text direction

            -

            To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

            +

            To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

            Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles

            -

            You can select the font type, its size and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

            -

            Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only.

            +

            You can select the font type, size, and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

            +

            Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only.

            - + @@ -105,7 +106,7 @@

            Format the text within the text box

            - + @@ -175,7 +176,7 @@

            Adjust paragraph advanced settings

            The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to:

            • change the alignment type for the paragraph text,
              • -
            • change the paragraph indents as related to internal margins of the text box, +
            • change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box,
              • Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
              • Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
                • @@ -193,7 +194,7 @@

                Adjust paragraph advanced settings

              • Left Indent marker
                is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box.
              • Right Indent marker
                is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box.
              -

              Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

              +

              Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

              Paragraph Properties - Font tab

              The Font tab contains the following parameters:

                @@ -201,7 +202,7 @@

                Adjust paragraph advanced settings

              • Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters.
              • Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
              • Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                • -
              • Small caps is used to make all letters lower case.
                • +
              • Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase.
              • All caps is used to make all letters upper case.
              • Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box.

                All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.

                @@ -211,11 +212,11 @@

                Adjust paragraph advanced settings

                The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key.

                • Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box.
                  • -
                • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below.
                  • -
                • Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list and press the Specify button. +
                • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below.
                  • +
                • Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center, or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list, and press the Specify button.
                  • Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                    marker.
                    • -
                  • Center - centres the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                    marker.
                    • +
                  • Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                    marker.
                  • Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                    marker.

                  To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button.

                  @@ -226,16 +227,16 @@

                  Adjust paragraph advanced settings

                • Click the tab selector button
                  in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left
                  , Center
                  , Right
                  .
                • Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler.

                  -

                  Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

                  +

                  Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

                  • Edit a Text Art style

                  Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.

                  Text Art setting tab

                    -
                  • Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc.
                    • +
                  • Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc.
                  • Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes.
                    • -
                  • Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.
                    • +
                  • Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.

                  Text Art Transformation

                  diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index 9b96e0e3b3..87a037d411 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -61,722 +61,722 @@

                  Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + @@ -796,297 +796,297 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1096,47 +1096,47 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1146,112 +1146,112 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1261,187 +1261,187 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1451,42 +1451,42 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1496,772 +1496,772 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -2276,172 +2276,172 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -2451,37 +2451,37 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -2496,42 +2496,42 @@

            Math AutoCorrect

            - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
            Font
            		Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version.Used to select one of the fonts from the list of available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version.
            Font size
            Change case
            		Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned.Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capitalized. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned.
            Highlight color
            !!
            		 Symbols
            ...
            		 Dots
            ::
            		 Operators
            :=
            		 Operators
            /<
            		 Relational operators
            />
            		 Relational operators
            /=
            		 Relational operators
            \above
            		 Above/Below scripts
            \acute
            		 Accents
            \aleph
            		 Hebrew letters
            \alpha
            		 Greek letters
            \Alpha
            		 Greek letters
            \amalg
            		 Binary operators
            \angle
            		 Geometry notation
            \aoint
            		 Integrals
            \approx
            		 Relational operators
            \asmash
            		 Arrows
            \ast
            		 Binary operators
            \asymp
            		 Relational operators
            \atop
            		 Operators
            \bar
            		 Over/Underbar
            \Bar
            		 Accents
            \because
            		 Relational operators
            \begin
            		 Delimiters
            \below
            		 Above/Below scripts
            \bet
            		 Hebrew letters
            \beta
            		 Greek letters
            \Beta
            		 Greek letters
            \beth
            		 Hebrew letters
            \bigcap
            		 Large operators
            \bigcup
            		 Large operators
            \bigodot
            		 Large operators
            \bigoplus
            		 Large operators
            \bigotimes
            		 Large operators
            \bigsqcup
            		 Large operators
            \biguplus
            		 Large operators
            \bigvee
            		 Large operators
            \bigwedge
            		 Large operators
            \binomial
            		 Equations
            \bot
            		 Logic notation
            \bowtie
            		 Relational operators
            \box
            		 Symbols
            \boxdot
            		 Binary operators
            \boxminus
            		 Binary operators
            \boxplus
            		 Binary operators
            \bra
            		 Delimiters
            \break
            		 Symbols
            \breve
            		 Accents
            \bullet
            		 Binary operators
            \cap
            		 Binary operators
            \cbrt
            		 Square roots and radicals
            \cases
            		 Symbols
            \cdot
            		 Binary operators
            \cdots
            		 Dots
            \check
            		 Accents
            \chi
            		 Greek letters
            \Chi
            		 Greek letters
            \circ
            		 Binary operators
            \close
            		 Delimiters
            \clubsuit
            		 Symbols
            \coint
            		 Integrals
            \cong
            		 Relational operators
            \coprod
            		 Math operators
            \cup
            		 Binary operators
            \dalet
            		 Hebrew letters
            \daleth
            		 Hebrew letters
            \dashv
            		 Relational operators
            \dd
            		 Double-struck letters
            \Dd
            		 Double-struck letters
            \ddddot
            		 Accents
            \dddot
            		 Accents
            \ddot
            		 Accents
            \ddots
            		 Dots
            \defeq
            		 Relational operators
            \degc
            		 Symbols
            \degf
            		 Symbols
            \degree
            		 Symbols
            \delta
            		 Greek letters
            \Delta
            		 Greek letters
            \Deltaeq
            		 Operators
            \diamond
            		 Binary operators
            \diamondsuit
            		 Symbols
            \div
            		 Binary operators
            \dot
            		 Accents
            \doteq
            		 Relational operators
            \dots
            		 Dots
            \doublea
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleA
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleb
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleB
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublec
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleC
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubled
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleD
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublee
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleE
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublef
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleF
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleg
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleG
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleh
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleH
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublei
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleI
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublej
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleJ
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublek
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleK
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublel
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleL
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublem
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleM
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublen
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleN
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleo
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleO
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublep
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleP
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleq
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleQ
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubler
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleR
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubles
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleS
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublet
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleT
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleu
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleU
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublev
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleV
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublew
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleW
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublex
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleX
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubley
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleY
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doublez
            		 Double-struck letters
            \doubleZ
            		 Double-struck letters
            \downarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Downarrow
            		 Arrows
            \dsmash
            		 Arrows
            \ee
            		 Double-struck letters
            \ell
            		 Symbols
            \emptyset
            		 Set notations
            \end
            		 Delimiters
            \epsilon
            		 Greek letters
            \Epsilon
            		 Greek letters
            \eqarray
            		 Symbols
            \equiv
            		 Relational operators
            \eta
            		 Greek letters
            \Eta
            		 Greek letters
            \exists
            		 Logic notations
            \forall
            		 Logic notations
            \fraktura
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturA
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturb
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturB
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturc
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturC
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturd
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturD
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakture
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturE
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturf
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturF
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturg
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturG
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturh
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturH
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturi
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturI
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturk
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturK
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturl
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturL
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturm
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturM
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturn
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturN
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturo
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturO
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturp
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturP
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturq
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturQ
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturr
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturR
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturs
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturS
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturt
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturT
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturu
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturU
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturv
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturV
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturw
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturW
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturx
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturX
            		 Fraktur letters
            \fraktury
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturY
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturz
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frakturZ
            		 Fraktur letters
            \frown
            		 Relational operators
            \G
            		 Greek letters
            \gamma
            		 Greek letters
            \Gamma
            		 Greek letters
            \ge
            		 Relational operators
            \geq
            		 Relational operators
            \gets
            		 Arrows
            \gg
            		 Relational operators
            \gimel
            		 Hebrew letters
            \grave
            		 Accents
            \hat
            		 Accents
            \hbar
            		 Symbols
            \heartsuit
            		 Symbols
            \hookleftarrow
            		 Arrows
            \hookrightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \hphantom
            		 Arrows
            \hsmash
            		 Arrows
            \hvec
            		 Accents
            \identitymatrix
            		 Matrices
            \ii
            		 Double-struck letters
            \iiint
            		 Integrals
            \iint
            		 Integrals
            \iiiint
            		 Integrals
            \Im
            		 Symbols
            \imath
            		 Symbols
            \in
            		 Relational operators
            \inc
            		 Symbols
            \infty
            		 Symbols
            \int
            		 Integrals
            \integral
            		 Integrals
            \iota
            		 Greek letters
            \Iota
            		 Greek letters
            \j
            		 Symbols
            \jj
            		 Double-struck letters
            \jmath
            		 Symbols
            \kappa
            		 Greek letters
            \Kappa
            		 Greek letters
            \ket
            		 Delimiters
            \lambda
            		 Greek letters
            \Lambda
            		 Greek letters
            \langle
            		 Delimiters
            \lbbrack
            		 Delimiters
            \lbrace
            		 Delimiters
            \lbrack
            		 Delimiters
            \lceil
            		 Delimiters
            \ldiv
            		 Fraction slashes
            \ldivide
            		 Fraction slashes
            \ldots
            		 Dots
            \le
            		 Relational operators
            \left
            		 Delimiters
            \leftarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Leftarrow
            		 Arrows
            \leftharpoondown
            		 Arrows
            \leftharpoonup
            		 Arrows
            \leftrightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Leftrightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \leq
            		 Relational operators
            \lfloor
            		 Delimiters
            \lhvec
            		 Accents
            \limit
            		 Limits
            \ll
            		 Relational operators
            \lmoust
            		 Delimiters
            \Longleftarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Longleftrightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Longrightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \lrhar
            		 Arrows
            \lvec
            		 Accents
            \mapsto
            		 Arrows
            \matrix
            		 Matrices
            \mid
            		 Relational operators
            \middle
            		 Symbols
            \models
            		 Relational operators
            \mp
            		 Binary operators
            \mu
            		 Greek letters
            \Mu
            		 Greek letters
            \nabla
            		 Symbols
            \naryand
            		 Operators
            \ne
            		 Relational operators
            \nearrow
            		 Arrows
            \neq
            		 Relational operators
            \ni
            		 Relational operators
            \norm
            		 Delimiters
            \notcontain
            		 Relational operators
            \notelement
            		 Relational operators
            \notin
            		 Relational operators
            \nu
            		 Greek letters
            \Nu
            		 Greek letters
            \nwarrow
            		 Arrows
            \o
            		 Greek letters
            \O
            		 Greek letters
            \odot
            		 Binary operators
            \of
            		 Operators
            \oiiint
            		 Integrals
            \oiint
            		 Integrals
            \oint
            		 Integrals
            \omega
            		 Greek letters
            \Omega
            		 Greek letters
            \ominus
            		 Binary operators
            \open
            		 Delimiters
            \oplus
            		 Binary operators
            \otimes
            		 Binary operators
            \over
            		 Delimiters
            \overbar
            		 Accents
            \overbrace
            		 Accents
            \overbracket
            		 Accents
            \overline
            		 Accents
            \overparen
            		 Accents
            \overshell
            		 Accents
            \parallel
            		 Geometry notation
            \partial
            		 Symbols
            \pmatrix
            		 Matrices
            \perp
            		 Geometry notation
            \phantom
            		 Symbols
            \phi
            		 Greek letters
            \Phi
            		 Greek letters
            \pi
            		 Greek letters
            \Pi
            		 Greek letters
            \pm
            		 Binary operators
            \pppprime
            		 Primes
            \ppprime
            		 Primes
            \pprime
            		 Primes
            \prec
            		 Relational operators
            \preceq
            		 Relational operators
            \prime
            		 Primes
            \prod
            		 Math operators
            \propto
            		 Relational operators
            \psi
            		 Greek letters
            \Psi
            		 Greek letters
            \qdrt
            		 Square roots and radicals
            \quadratic
            		 Square roots and radicals
            \rangle
            		 Delimiters
            \Rangle
            		 Delimiters
            \ratio
            		 Relational operators
            \rbrace
            		 Delimiters
            \rbrack
            		 Delimiters
            \Rbrack
            		 Delimiters
            \rceil
            		 Delimiters
            \rddots
            		 Dots
            \Re
            		 Symbols
            \rect
            		 Symbols
            \rfloor
            		 Delimiters
            \rho
            		 Greek letters
            \Rho
            		 Greek letters
            \rhvec
            		 Accents
            \right
            		 Delimiters
            \rightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Rightarrow
            		 Arrows
            \rightharpoondown
            		 Arrows
            \rightharpoonup
            		 Arrows
            \rmoust
            		 Delimiters
            \root
            		 Symbols
            \scripta
            		 Scripts
            \scriptA
            		 Scripts
            \scriptb
            		 Scripts
            \scriptB
            		 Scripts
            \scriptc
            		 Scripts
            \scriptC
            		 Scripts
            \scriptd
            		 Scripts
            \scriptD
            		 Scripts
            \scripte
            		 Scripts
            \scriptE
            		 Scripts
            \scriptf
            		 Scripts
            \scriptF
            		 Scripts
            \scriptg
            		 Scripts
            \scriptG
            		 Scripts
            \scripth
            		 Scripts
            \scriptH
            		 Scripts
            \scripti
            		 Scripts
            \scriptI
            		 Scripts
            \scriptk
            		 Scripts
            \scriptK
            		 Scripts
            \scriptl
            		 Scripts
            \scriptL
            		 Scripts
            \scriptm
            		 Scripts
            \scriptM
            		 Scripts
            \scriptn
            		 Scripts
            \scriptN
            		 Scripts
            \scripto
            		 Scripts
            \scriptO
            		 Scripts
            \scriptp
            		 Scripts
            \scriptP
            		 Scripts
            \scriptq
            		 Scripts
            \scriptQ
            		 Scripts
            \scriptr
            		 Scripts
            \scriptR
            		 Scripts
            \scripts
            		 Scripts
            \scriptS
            		 Scripts
            \scriptt
            		 Scripts
            \scriptT
            		 Scripts
            \scriptu
            		 Scripts
            \scriptU
            		 Scripts
            \scriptv
            		 Scripts
            \scriptV
            		 Scripts
            \scriptw
            		 Scripts
            \scriptW
            		 Scripts
            \scriptx
            		 Scripts
            \scriptX
            		 Scripts
            \scripty
            		 Scripts
            \scriptY
            		 Scripts
            \scriptz
            		 Scripts
            \scriptZ
            		 Scripts
            \sdiv
            		 Fraction slashes
            \sdivide
            		 Fraction slashes
            \searrow
            		 Arrows
            \setminus
            		 Binary operators
            \sigma
            		 Greek letters
            \Sigma
            		 Greek letters
            \sim
            		 Relational operators
            \simeq
            		 Relational operators
            \smash
            		 Arrows
            \smile
            		 Relational operators
            \spadesuit
            		 Symbols
            \sqcap
            		 Binary operators
            \sqcup
            		 Binary operators
            \sqrt
            		 Square roots and radicals
            \sqsubseteq
            		 Set notation
            \sqsuperseteq
            		 Set notation
            \star
            		 Binary operators
            \subset
            		 Set notation
            \subseteq
            		 Set notation
            \succ
            		 Relational operators
            \succeq
            		 Relational operators
            \sum
            		 Math operators
            \superset
            		 Set notation
            \superseteq
            		 Set notation
            \swarrow
            		 Arrows
            \tau
            		 Greek letters
            \Tau
            		 Greek letters
            \therefore
            		 Relational operators
            \theta
            		 Greek letters
            \Theta
            		 Greek letters
            \tilde
            		 Accents
            \times
            		 Binary operators
            \to
            		 Arrows
            \top
            		 Logic notation
            \tvec
            		 Arrows
            \ubar
            		 Accents
            \Ubar
            		 Accents
            \underbar
            		 Accents
            \underbrace
            		 Accents
            \underbracket
            		 Accents
            \underline
            		 Accents
            \underparen
            		 Accents
            \uparrow
            		 Arrows
            \Uparrow
            		 Arrows
            \updownarrow
            		 Arrows
            \Updownarrow
            		 Arrows
            \uplus
            		 Binary operators
            \upsilon
            		 Greek letters
            \Upsilon
            		 Greek letters
            \varepsilon
            		 Greek letters
            \varphi
            		 Greek letters
            \varpi
            		 Greek letters
            \varrho
            		 Greek letters
            \varsigma
            		 Greek letters
            \vartheta
            		 Greek letters
            \vbar
            		 Delimiters
            \vdash
            		 Relational operators
            \vdots
            		 Dots
            \vec
            		 Accents
            \vee
            		 Binary operators
            \vert
            		 Delimiters
            \Vert
            		 Delimiters
            \Vmatrix
            		 Matrices
            \vphantom
            		 Arrows
            \wedge
            		 Binary operators
            \wp
            		 Symbols
            \wr
            		 Binary operators
            \xi
            		 Greek letters
            \Xi
            		 Greek letters
            \zeta
            		 Greek letters
            \Zeta
            		 Greek letters
            ~=
            		 Relational operators
            -+
            		 Binary operators
            +-
            		 Binary operators
            <<
            		 Relational operators
            <=
            		 Relational operators
            ->
            		 Arrows
            >=
            		 Relational operators
            >>
            		 Relational operators
            @@ -2551,6 +2551,10 @@

            AutoFormat as You Type

            AutoFormat as You Type

            Text AutoCorrect

            You can set the editor to capitalize the first word of each sentence automatically. The option is enabled by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of sentences option.

            +

            The editor capitalizes the first letter of table cells by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of table cells box.

            +

            You can also customize capitalizing after particular words by entering the required words in the Don't capitalize after field and clicking the Add button, or by choosing the required words in the corresponding list below.

            +

            You can choose the way the exceptions work based on the language in the Exceptions for the language dropdown list.

            +

            Use the Reset to default button to cancel all custom changes.

            AutoCorrect

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 5763981331..9a311974bc 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -11,15 +11,15 @@
            -
            - -
            +
            + +

            Save/print/download your presentation

            Saving

            By default, the online Presentation Editor automatically saves your file every 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if there are any. When the file is co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved within 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.

            To save your presentation manually in the current format and location,

              -
            • press the Save
              icon on the left side of the editor header, or
              • +
            • press the Save
              icon on the left side of the editor header, or
            • use the Ctrl+S key combination, or
            • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option.
            @@ -52,15 +52,33 @@

            Saving a copy

            Printing

            To print out the current presentation,

              -
            • click the Print
              icon on the left side of the editor header, or
              • +
            • click the Print
              icon on the left side of the editor header, or
            • use the Ctrl+P key combination, or
            • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option.
            The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first.
            +

            Print Settings window

            +

            Adjust the following parameters in the Print window that opens:

            +
              +
            • Destination - choose the destination of the printed file, e.g., Save to PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc.
              • +
            • Orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally.
              • +
            • Pages - choose one of the options for printing the pages: All, Current, Odd, Even, or Custom. In the latter case, you will have to enter the number of pages manually.
              • +
            • + Colour mode - choose whether you want your file printed in Colour or Black and white. Please note that this setting is available when the Microsoft XPS Document Writer Destination parameter is selected. For the Fax Destination parameter, the colour mode is set to black and white by default. +

              Click the More settings caption to open advanced settings.

              +
              • +
            • Paper size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list or set a user defined one.
              • +
            • Scale - set the file scaling when printed; you can fit it to page width or set the scaling manually via the Scale checkbox and the corresponding input field.
              • +
            • Pages per sheet - set the number of pages printed on one sheet, e.g., two, six, nine, etc.
              • +
            • Margins - define the page margins. You can choose either default margins or custom ones measured in inches. For custom margins, please set the required values for top, bottom, left and right margins manually. You can choose the None option as well to have no margins.
              • +
            • Options - check the Print headers and footers checkbox to have them printed, or uncheck this box to have no headers and footers printed.
              • +
            • Print using the system dialogue - click this caption to open the system dialogue to configure the printing process.
              • +
            + In the desktop version, the available printing settings are Print range, number of Slides, Copies, Print sides, and Paper size. You can also print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer.

            It's also possible to print the selected slides using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click on the selected slides and choose option Print selection).

            -

            In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file based on your presentation will be generated. You can open and print it out, or save onto the hard disk drive of your computer or a removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

            +

            In the online version, a PDF file based on your presentation will be generated. You can open and print it out, or save onto the hard disk drive of your computer or a removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2ac0f71535 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + Zoom + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            Zoom

            +

            The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks.

            +

            The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually.

            + +

            Installation

            +

            To install the Zoom plugin,

            +
              +
            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
              2. +
            2. Open the Plugin Manager.
              3. +
            3. Find
              Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
              4. +
            4. Click the
              Zoom icon in the Plugins tab.
              5. +
            5. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
              6. +
            +

            For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation.

            + +

            Configuration

            +
              +
            1. + Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. +

              If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation.

              +
              2. +
            2. + Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. +

              If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation.

              +
              3. +
            3. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save.
              4. +
            +

            Zoom settings

            + +

            How to use

            +
              +
            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
              2. +
            2. Click the
              Zoom icon.
              3. +
            3. + Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. +
                +
              • Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly.
                • +
              • Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready.
                • +
              +

              Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors.

              +
              4. +
            4. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again.
              5. +
            5. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language.
              6. +
            6. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard.
              7. +
            7. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode.
              8. +
            +

            A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page.

            +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css index 05d886262c..1924ad8d32 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/addtolayout.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/addtolayout.png index 73ea7e5d41..33abcfac6d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/addtolayout.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/addtolayout.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationduration.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationduration.png index f82bac32bd..70957bef51 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationduration.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationduration.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationgallery.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationgallery.png index 8590d2ab9d..7a38f3c211 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationgallery.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationgallery.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationrepeat.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationrepeat.png index c45459e23f..520c2115c5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationrepeat.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animationrepeat.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/anonymous_collab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/anonymous_collab.png index 0c7354424f..1667cabb1c 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/anonymous_collab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/anonymous_collab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/applylayout.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/applylayout.png index 0d9394b396..3e4fc5c5f3 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/applylayout.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/applylayout.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png index 42e80c7633..d31690f3ca 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png index 3d2edbb54d..a551fb9450 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings2.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings2.png index 21438a6922..f2abbc782e 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings2.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings2.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings3.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings3.png index 3be2866831..134d641a84 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings3.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings3.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings4.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings4.png index b4e32d7e8f..39a1209207 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings4.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings4.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings5.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings5.png index 5abc6a4ed8..83d4fb5c38 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings5.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings5.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings6.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings6.png index c79590e3f0..35037a539d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings6.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings6.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings7.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings7.png index 19f16838f4..2c91075be1 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings7.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings7.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings8.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings8.png index 9ee10b76e9..8a75288699 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings8.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings8.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png index d1cb7ba553..60777a85dc 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 9654418bf6..917f429826 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png index 1509222465..80c1933a2e 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 0ceee7c5e7..6587d1f047 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cc12bc6dba Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index 707631c25d..f48d431126 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index d7ad90818e..4584592450 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index c5d90ccc71..caa797211e 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 9b0df0aca7..a007e48d9e 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 8f1feb7a4e..7d6ad89171 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index 84b8184d68..e15837f087 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png index 1325f13581..25ae1d01df 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 267d563044..a55d4522bc 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..12567bcf4f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index d8fc19436e..e2120537f6 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index c41bd2a73b..653d99ca20 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index 414b86eab2..e376f47479 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index 097fca6abb..ec2712249d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 34f182e2d5..7ecf8a0d3e 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png index 9513c40d43..d9cc2ae0f7 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index acb1bdbe2d..52516dc03b 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palettes.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palettes.png index 41f69b2047..fe3278df62 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palettes.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palettes.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5395c28c4f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png index 9d1730e1af..33b01b9e3d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png index c6bfd7e8cf..68ac7feccd 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png index f9b94de146..5d8c6eaf9b 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png index 4279584741..eed082b45d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index a2cf67f17d..c48445f7b5 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Presentation Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Presentation Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access the Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Search' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Search dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save presentation Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with the Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved under its current name, in the same location and file format. Print presentation Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited presentation to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Presentation Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current presentation window in Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current presentation to the default 'Fit to slide' value. Navigation The first slide Home Home, Fn+← Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation. The last slide End End, Fn+→ Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation. Next slide Page Down Page Down, Fn+↓ Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation. Previous slide Page Up Page Up, Fn+↑ Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list. Move slide down Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Move the selected slide below the following one in the list. Move slide to beginning Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑ Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list. Move slide to end Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓ Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list. Performing Actions on Objects Create a copy Ctrl + drag, Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl + drag, ⌘ Cmd + drag, ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the selected object or press Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D for Mac) to create its copy. Group Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Select the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Select the next object after the currently selected one. Select the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select the previous object before the currently selected one. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree-rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl (⌘ Cmd for Mac) key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Previewing Presentation Start preview from the beginning Ctrl+F5 ^ Ctrl+F5 Start a presentation from the beginning. Navigate forward ↵ Enter, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide. Navigate backward Page Up, ←, ↑ Page Up, ←, ↑ Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide. Close preview Esc Esc End a presentation. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the selected object and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected object to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied object from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Copy style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected fragment ⇧ Shift ⇧ Shift Start the selection, hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Select text fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select text from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select text from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment slightly slanted to the right. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+⇧ Shift+> ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+⇧ Shift+< ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E Center the text between the left and the right edges. Align justified Ctrl+J Justify the text in the paragraph adding additional space between words so that the left and the right text edges will be aligned with the paragraph margins. Align right Ctrl+R Align right with the text lined up on the right side of the text box, the left side remains unaligned. Align left Ctrl+L Align left with the text lined up on the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned. Increase left indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Increase the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Decrease left indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Decrease the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Moving around in text Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move to next placeholder Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the text box Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text box. Jump to the end of the text box Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box." + "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Presentation Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Presentation Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access the Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Search' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Search dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save presentation Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with the Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved under its current name, in the same location and file format. Print presentation Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited presentation to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Presentation Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current presentation window in Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current presentation to the default 'Fit to slide' value. Navigation The first slide Home Home, Fn+← Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation. The last slide End End, Fn+→ Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation. Next slide Page Down Page Down, Fn+↓ Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation. Previous slide Page Up Page Up, Fn+↑ Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list. Move slide down Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Move the selected slide below the following one in the list. Move slide to beginning Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑ Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list. Move slide to end Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓ Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list. Performing Actions on Objects Create a copy Ctrl + drag, Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl + drag, ⌘ Cmd + drag, ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the selected object or press Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D for Mac) to create its copy. Group Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Select the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Select the next object after the currently selected one. Select the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select the previous object before the currently selected one. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree-rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl (⌘ Cmd for Mac) key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Previewing Presentation Start preview from the beginning Ctrl+F5 ^ Ctrl+F5 Start a presentation from the beginning. Navigate forward ↵ Enter, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide. Navigate backward Page Up, ←, ↑ Page Up, ←, ↑ Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide. Close preview Esc Esc End a presentation. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the selected object and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected object to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied object from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. Paste text without style formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Copy style Alt+Ctrl+C ^ Ctrl+Alt+C, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Alt+Ctrl+V ^ Ctrl+Alt+V, ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected fragment ⇧ Shift ⇧ Shift Start the selection, hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Select text fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select text from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select text from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment slightly slanted to the right. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+⇧ Shift+> ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+⇧ Shift+< ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E Center the text between the left and the right edges. Align justified Ctrl+J Justify the text in the paragraph adding additional space between words so that the left and the right text edges will be aligned with the paragraph margins. Align right Ctrl+R Align right with the text lined up on the right side of the text box, the left side remains unaligned. Align left Ctrl+L Align left with the text lined up on the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned. Increase left indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Increase the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Decrease left indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Decrease the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Moving around in text Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move to next placeholder Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the text box Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text box. Jump to the end of the text box Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Function", - "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases in the Presentation Editor, click the icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight whole words only. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered." + "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases in the Presentation Editor, click the icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight whole words only. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Supported Formats of Electronic Presentations", - "body": "Supported Formats of Electronic Presentation A presentation is a set of slides that may include different types of content such as images, media files, text, effects, etc. The Presentation Editor handles the following presentation formats. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (PPTX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML ODP OpenDocument Presentation File format that represents presentations created by Impress application, which is a part of OpenOffice based office suites + + OTP OpenDocument Presentation Template OpenDocument file format for presentation templates. An OTP template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting + + POTX PowerPoint Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for presentation templates. A POTX template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show Presentation file format used for slide show playback + + PPT File format used by Microsoft PowerPoint + + PPTX Office Open XML Presentation Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + The following table contains the formats in which you can download a presentation from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as ODP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX OTP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX POTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPSX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your presentations into the most known file formats." + "body": "Supported Formats of Electronic Presentation A presentation is a set of slides that may include different types of content such as images, media files, text, effects, etc. The Presentation Editor handles the following presentation formats. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (PPTX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML DPS WPS Office Presentation Document by Kingsoft A slideshow presentation format included in the WPS Office suite that contains a collection of slides, which may consist of a title slide followed by content slides that may include text, images, video, audio, and shapes. + + DPT Kingsoft Presentation Template A file format for saving the default layout and styles for a presentation and for creating presentations (.DPS files) with the same formatting. + + FODP OpenDocument Flat XML Presentation Format A file format for storing saved presentation in the OpenDocument XML file format without any compression. + + ODP OpenDocument Presentation File format that represents presentations created by Impress application, which is a part of OpenOffice based office suites. + + OTP OpenDocument Presentation Template OpenDocument file format for presentation templates. An OTP template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting. + + POT Portable object template A file format for creating slide show presentations that contain the default layout, formatting, and styles for a slide show. POT files are used to create multiple .PPT files with the same formatting. + + POTM A macro-enabled presentation template by Microsoft PowerPoint A file format for creating slide show presentations that contain default images, slide templates, macros, and formatting. + + POTX PowerPoint Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for presentation templates. A POTX template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting. + + PPS PowerPoint Slideshow File A file format format that is used in the preparation of slideshows and presentations, to store a variety of data such as video, audio, text, animations, and pictures. + + PPSM Macro-enabled slide show by Microsoft PowerPoint A file format format that is used to create slide shows and presentations and contains one or more macro-enabled slides, which may include text, images, and transitions. + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show Presentation file format used for slide show playback. + + PPT File format used by Microsoft PowerPoint + + PPTX Office Open XML Presentation Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents. + + SXI StarOffice Impress Presentation A presentation format used for creating slideshow presentations that may consist of title and content slides with text and digital objects; supports audio, video, and transition effects. + The following table contains the formats in which you can download a presentation from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as DPS JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX DPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX FODP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX ODP JPG, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX OTP JPG, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POTM JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPS JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPSM JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPSX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPTM, PPTX PPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM SXI JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your presentations into the most known file formats." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm", @@ -70,6 +70,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Collaboration tab", "body": "The Collaboration tab in the Presentation Editor allows collaborating on presentations. In the online version, you can share a file, select a co-editing mode and manage comments. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments and use the chat. In the desktop version, you can only manage comments. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: specify the sharing settings (available in the online version only), switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), add comments to your presentation and remove them, open the Chat panel (available in the online version only), track the version history (available in the online version only)." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Draw tab", + "body": "The Draw tab of the Presentation Editor allows users to perform basic drawing operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: use the select tool to resize or delete the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting, use the pen and the highlighter tools to draw or to add handwritten notes and highlighting, use the eraser tool to remove the whole drawing or the handwritten text," + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", @@ -88,7 +93,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Plugins tab", - "body": "The Plugins tab in the Presentation Editor makes it possible to access the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. Here you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: The Settings button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones. The Macros button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available: Send allows sending the presentation via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows highlighting the code syntax by selecting the necessary language, style, background color, etc., Photo Editor allows editing images: cropping, flipping, rotating, drawing lines and shapes, adding icons and text, loading a mask and applying filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Thesaurus allows finding synonyms and antonyms for the selected word and replacing it with the chosen one, Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, Note: this plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into your presentation. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." + "body": "The Plugins tab in the Presentation Editor makes it possible to access the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. Here you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: The Plugin Manager button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones. The Macros button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available: Send allows sending the presentation via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows highlighting the code syntax by selecting the necessary language, style, background color, etc., Photo Editor allows editing images: cropping, flipping, rotating, drawing lines and shapes, adding icons and text, loading a mask and applying filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Thesaurus allows finding synonyms and antonyms for the selected word and replacing it with the chosen one, Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, Note: this plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into your presentation. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", @@ -125,6 +130,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Apply transitions", "body": "A transition is an effect that appears when one slide advances to the next one during presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can apply the same transition to all slides or different transitions to each separate slide and adjust the transition parameters. To apply a transition to a single slide or several selected slides: Switch to the Transitions tab on the top toolbar. Select a slide (or several slides in the slide list) you want to apply a transition to. Select one of the available transition effects on the Transition tab: None, Fade, Push, Wipe, Split, Uncover, Cover, Clock, Zoom. Click the Parameters button to select one of the available effect options that define exactly how the effect appears. For example, the options available for Zoom effect are Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom and Rotate. Specify how long you want the transition to last. In the Duration box, enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Press the Preview button to view the slide with the transition applied in the slide editing area. Specify how long you want the slide to be displayed until it advances to the next one: Start on click – check this box if you don't want to restrict the time to display the selected slide. The slide will advance to the next one only when you click it with the mouse. Delay – use this option if you want the selected slide to be displayed within a specified period of time until it advances to the next one. Check this box and enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Note: if you check only the Delay box, the slides will advance automatically within a specified time interval. If you check both the Start on click and the Delay boxes and set the delay value, the slides will advance automatically as well, but you will also be able to click a slide to advance it to the next. To apply a transition to all slides in your presentation, click the Apply to All Slides button on the Transitions tab. To delete a transition, select the necessary slide and choose None among the transition effect options on the Transitions tab. To delete all transitions, select any slide, choose None among the transition effect options and press the Apply to All Slides button on the Transitions tab." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", + "title": "ChatGPT", + "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the ChatGPT icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field in the left panel of the editor. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the ChatGPT icon. Click the Show advanced settings button to see all the available settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Enter the request and click the Submit button to process it, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one. ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communicate while editing", @@ -145,10 +155,15 @@ var indexes = "title": "Create lists", "body": "To create a list in the Presentation Editor, place the cursor where a list should start (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon situated on the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon situated at the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Decrease indent and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Insert and format your text section. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet type, size and color: click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, click the Bullets or Numbering icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: Type - allows you to select the necessary character used for the list. When you click the New bullet option, the Symbol window opens, and you can choose one of the available characters. You can also add a new symbol. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. When you click the New image option, a new Import field appears where you can choose new images for bullets From File, From URL, or From Storage. Size - allows you to select the necessary bullet size depending on the current size of the text. It can be a value ranging from 25% to 400%. Color - allows you to select the necessary bullet color. You can select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. The numbered list settings window looks like this: Type - allows you to select the necessary number format used for the list. Size - allows you to select the necessary number size depending on the current size of the text. It can be a value ranging from 25% to 400%. Start at - allows you to select the necessary sequence number a numbered list starts from. Color - allows you to select the necessary number color. You can select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Draw freehand on a slide", + "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can use the Draw tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your slide. To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon, and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the needed color is not in the palette. When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button. Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke. Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm", "title": "Fill objects and select colors", - "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can apply different fills for the slide, autoshape and Text Art font background. Select an object To change the slide background fill, select the necessary slides in the slide list. The Slide settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. To change the autoshape fill, left-click the necessary autoshape. The Shape settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. To change the Text Art font fill, left-click the necessary text object. The Text Art settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Set the necessary fill type Adjust the selected fill properties (see the detailed description below for each fill type) For the autoshapes and Text Art font, regardless of the selected fill type, you can also set an Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. The following fill types are available: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected shape/slide. Click on the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected theme/color scheme of the presentation. Once you apply a different theme or color scheme, the Theme Colors set will change. Standard Colors - the default colors set. Custom Color - click on this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (Red, Green, Blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to your object and added to the Custom color palette of the menu. You can use the same color types when selecting the color of the autoshape stroke, adjusting the font color, or changing the table background or border color. Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide/shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Click the  Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu: Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - the direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available : top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Angle - set the numeric value for a precise color transition angle. Gradient Points are specific points of color transition. Use the Add Gradient Point button or a slider bar to add a gradient point, and the Remove Gradient Point button to delete one. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each of the following gradient points added does not affect the current gradient appearance. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify the Position in percentage for a precise location. To apply a color to the gradient point, click on the required point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape/slide background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape/slide, click the Select Picture button and add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape/slide, drop-down the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: Canvas, Carton, Dark Fabric, Grain, Granite, Grey Paper, Knit, Leather, Brown Paper, Papyrus, Wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape or slide has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the drop-down list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the slide or autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions, or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the slide or autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide/shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill." + "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can apply different fills for the slide, autoshape and Text Art font background. Select an object To change the slide background fill, select the necessary slides in the slide list. The Slide settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. To change the autoshape fill, left-click the necessary autoshape. The Shape settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. To change the Text Art font fill, left-click the necessary text object. The Text Art settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Set the necessary fill type Adjust the selected fill properties (see the detailed description below for each fill type) For the autoshapes and Text Art font, regardless of the selected fill type, you can also set an Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. The following fill types are available: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected shape/slide. Click on the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected theme/color scheme of the presentation. Once you apply a different theme or color scheme, the Theme Colors set will change. Standard Colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the presentation. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette. You can use the same color types when selecting the color of the autoshape stroke, adjusting the font color, or changing the table background or border color. Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide/shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Click the  Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu: Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - the direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available : top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Angle - set the numeric value for a precise color transition angle. Gradient Points are specific points of color transition. Use the Add Gradient Point button or a slider bar to add a gradient point, and the Remove Gradient Point button to delete one. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each of the following gradient points added does not affect the current gradient appearance. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify the Position in percentage for a precise location. To apply a color to the gradient point, click on the required point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape/slide background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape/slide, click the Select Picture button and add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape/slide, drop-down the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: Canvas, Carton, Dark Fabric, Grain, Granite, Grey Paper, Knit, Leather, Brown Paper, Papyrus, Wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape or slide has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the drop-down list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the slide or autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions, or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the slide or autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide/shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", @@ -158,12 +173,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert and format autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to a slide in the Presentation Editor, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the autoshape to, click the Shape icon on the Home tab or the Shape gallery dropdown arrow on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click on the necessary autoshape within the selected group, in the slide editing area, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, Note: you can click and drag to stretch the shape. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape, make sure the shape is selected on the slide and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add an autoshape to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Adjust autoshape settings Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape. Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to change the autoshape Width and/or Height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original autoshape aspect ratio. You can also set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists. The Text Box tab contains the following parameters: AutoFit - to change the way text is displayed within the shape: Do not Autofit, Shrink text on overflow, Resize shape to fit text. Text Padding - to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e., the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows adding columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the shape. To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to a slide in the Presentation Editor, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the autoshape to, click the Shape icon on the Home tab or the Shape gallery dropdown arrow on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click on the necessary autoshape within the selected group, in the slide editing area, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, Note: you can click and drag to stretch the shape. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape, make sure the shape is selected on the slide and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add an autoshape to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust autoshape settings Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape. Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to change the autoshape Width and/or Height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original autoshape aspect ratio. You can also set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists. The Text Box tab contains the following parameters: AutoFit - to change the way text is displayed within the shape: Do not Autofit, Shrink text on overflow, Resize shape to fit text. Text Padding - to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e., the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows adding columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the shape. To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insert and edit charts", - "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Presentation Editor, Put the cursor where you want to add a chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. After that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart Data window will open. Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column. Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button. In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart Type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a seconary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None not to display the title of a chart, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None not to display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines among data points, Smooth to use smooth curves among data points, or None not to display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. Once the chart is added, you can also change its size and position. You can specify the chart position on the slide by dragging it vertically or horizontally. You can also add a chart into a text placeholder by pressing the Chart icon within it and selecting the necessary chart type: It's also possible to add a chart to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels, etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings The chart size, type and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. The Size section allows you to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Change Chart Type section allows you to change the type of the selected chart type and/or its style using the corresponding drop-down menu. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. The Edit Data button allows you to open the Chart Editor window and start editing data as described above. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window, you can also double-click the chart on the slide. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. The Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar allows you to open the Chart - Advanced Settings window where you adjust the following parameters: The Placement tab allows you to set the following properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. To delete the inserted chart, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align a chart on the slide or arrange several objects, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section." + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Presentation Editor, Put the cursor where you want to add a chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis labels and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select the data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select a series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change the text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select the data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click the OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose the chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine as well as select data series to place on a secondary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include in your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines among data points, Smooth to use smooth curves among data points, or None not to display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide the vertical axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Gridlines are used to specify the vertical gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button, and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series varies considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal axis options, see the description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis that displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis that displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide the horizontal axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines are used to specify the horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions that can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions that are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels that display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category, etc. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows preventing the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. Once the chart is added, you can also change its size and position. You can specify the chart position on the slide by dragging it vertically or horizontally. You can also add a chart into a text placeholder by pressing the Chart icon within it and selecting the necessary chart type: It's also possible to add a chart to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels, etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture, picture, or pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills, and lines, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button, and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, left-click it to select it, and press the Delete key. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings The chart size, type, and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. The Size section allows you to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Change Chart Type section allows you to change the type of the selected chart type and/or its style using the corresponding drop-down menu. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. The Edit Data button allows you to open the Chart Editor window and start editing data as described above. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window, you can also double-click the chart on the slide. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. The Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar allows you to open the Chart - Advanced Settings window where you adjust the following parameters: The Placement tab allows you to set the following properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top left corner and Center. The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. To delete the inserted chart, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align a chart on the slide or arrange several objects, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", @@ -178,12 +193,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insert and adjust images", - "body": "Insert an image In the Presentation Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your presentation. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. To add an image on a slide, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the image to, click the Image icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window so that you can choose a file. Browse the hard disk drive your computer to select the necessary file and click the Open button In the online editor, you can select several images at once. the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the necessary image and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added, you can change its size and position. You can also add an image into a text placeholder pressing the Image from file in it and selecting the necessary image stored on your PC, or use the Image from URL button and specify the image URL address: It's also possible to add an image to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Adjust image settings The right sidebar is activated when you left-click an image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. It contains the following sections: Size - is used to view the Width and Height of the current image or restore its Actual Size if necessary. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of its each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape. If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Replace Image - is used to load another image instead of the current one from the desired source. You can select one of the options: From File, From Storage, or From URL. The Replace image option is also available in the right-click menu. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the Line type, size and color of the shape as well as change its type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. To change the advanced settings of the image, right-click the image and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click the image and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to set the following image properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the image. To delete the inserted image, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align an image on the slide or arrange several images, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section." + "body": "Insert an image In the Presentation Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your presentation. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. To add an image on a slide, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the image to, click the Image icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window so that you can choose a file. Browse the hard disk drive your computer to select the necessary file and click the Open button In the online editor, you can select several images at once. the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the necessary image and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added, you can change its size and position. You can save the image as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. You can also add an image into a text placeholder pressing the Image from file in it and selecting the necessary image stored on your PC, or use the Image from URL button and specify the image URL address: It's also possible to add an image to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Adjust image settings The right sidebar is activated when you left-click an image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. It contains the following sections: Size - is used to view the Width and Height of the current image or restore its Actual Size if necessary. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of its each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape. If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Replace Image - is used to load another image instead of the current one from the desired source. You can select one of the options: From File, From Storage, or From URL. The Replace image option is also available in the right-click menu. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the Line type, size, color, and opacity, as well as change its type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. To change the advanced settings of the image, right-click the image and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click the image and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to set the following image properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the image. To delete the inserted image, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align an image on the slide or arrange several images, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Insert SmartArt objects in ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor", - "body": "Insert SmartArt objects SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. Insert SmartArt objects or edit the ones added in third-party editors. To insert a SmartArt object, go to the Insert tab, click the SmartArt button, hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process, choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item. You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel: Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually. Fill - use this section to select the SmartArt object fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected SmartArt object. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the SmartArt object background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the SmartArt object, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the SmartArt object, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the SmartArt object has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the SmartArt object size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the SmartArt object surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the SmartArt object with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow. Click the Show advanced settings link to open the advanced settings." + "body": "Insert SmartArt objects SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. Insert SmartArt objects or edit the ones added in third-party editors. To insert a SmartArt object, go to the Insert tab, click the SmartArt button, hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process, choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item. You can save the SmartArt object as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel: Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually. Fill - use this section to select the SmartArt object fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected SmartArt object. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the SmartArt object background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the SmartArt object, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the SmartArt object, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the SmartArt object has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the SmartArt object size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the SmartArt object surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the SmartArt object with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow. Click the Show advanced settings link to open the advanced settings." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", @@ -198,7 +213,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm", "title": "Insert and format your text", - "body": "Insert your text box into presentation In the Presentation Editor, you can add a new text in three different ways: Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text. Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, choose one of the following options: Insert horizontal text box or Insert vertical text box, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text. Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately. Align your text within the text box The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center or justified. To do that: place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Horizontal align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text left option allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned). the Align text center option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remains unaligned). the Align text right option allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned). the Justify option allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle or bottom. To do that: place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Vertical align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text to the top option allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box. the Align text to the middle option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box. the Align text to the bottom option allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box. Change the text direction To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles You can select the font type, its size and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. Click the downward arrow next to the icon to select the color. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Set line spacing and change paragraph indents You can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. To do that, put the cursor within the required paragraph or select several paragraphs with the mouse, use the corresponding fields of the Paragraph settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines. To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . Adjust paragraph advanced settings To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu. It's also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: change the alignment type for the paragraph text, change the paragraph indents as related to internal margins of the text box, Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, change the paragraph line spacing. You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. First Line Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph. Hanging Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. Left Indent marker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box. Right Indent marker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. The Font tab contains the following parameters: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key. Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list and press the Specify button. Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Center - centres the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button. To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler: Click the tab selector button in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left , Center , Right . Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." + "body": "Insert your text box into a presentation In the Presentation Editor, you can add new text in three different ways: Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text. Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, choose one of the following options: Insert horizontal text box or Insert vertical text box, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text. Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. You can save the text box as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately. Align your text within the text box The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center, or justified. To do that: place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Horizontal align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text left option allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned). the Align text center option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remain unaligned). the Align text right option allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned). the Justify option allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle, or bottom. To do that: place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Vertical align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text to the top option allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box. the Align text to the middle option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box. the Align text to the bottom option allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box. Change the text direction To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles You can select the font type, size, and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capitalized. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. Click the downward arrow next to the icon to select the color. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Set line spacing and change paragraph indents You can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. To do that, put the cursor within the required paragraph or select several paragraphs with the mouse, use the corresponding fields of the Paragraph settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines. To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . Adjust paragraph advanced settings To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu. It's also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: change the alignment type for the paragraph text, change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box, Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, change the paragraph line spacing. You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. First Line Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph. Hanging Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. Left Indent marker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box. Right Indent marker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. The Font tab contains the following parameters: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key. Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center, or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list, and press the Specify button. Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button. To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler: Click the tab selector button in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left , Center , Right . Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc. Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm", @@ -213,7 +228,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "AutoCorrect Features", - "body": "The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of four tabs: Math Autocorrect, Recognized Functions, AutoFormat As You Type, and Text AutoCorrect. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Math AutoCorrect. Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list Select the entry to be modified. You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list Select an entry to remove from the list. Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box. The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Presentation Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab in the Advanced Settings... -> Spell checking -> Proofing section. The supported codes Code Symbol Category !! Symbols ... Dots :: Operators := Operators /< Relational operators /> Relational operators /= Relational operators \\above Above/Below scripts \\acute Accents \\aleph Hebrew letters \\alpha Greek letters \\Alpha Greek letters \\amalg Binary operators \\angle Geometry notation \\aoint Integrals \\approx Relational operators \\asmash Arrows \\ast Binary operators \\asymp Relational operators \\atop Operators \\bar Over/Underbar \\Bar Accents \\because Relational operators \\begin Delimiters \\below Above/Below scripts \\bet Hebrew letters \\beta Greek letters \\Beta Greek letters \\beth Hebrew letters \\bigcap Large operators \\bigcup Large operators \\bigodot Large operators \\bigoplus Large operators \\bigotimes Large operators \\bigsqcup Large operators \\biguplus Large operators \\bigvee Large operators \\bigwedge Large operators \\binomial Equations \\bot Logic notation \\bowtie Relational operators \\box Symbols \\boxdot Binary operators \\boxminus Binary operators \\boxplus Binary operators \\bra Delimiters \\break Symbols \\breve Accents \\bullet Binary operators \\cap Binary operators \\cbrt Square roots and radicals \\cases Symbols \\cdot Binary operators \\cdots Dots \\check Accents \\chi Greek letters \\Chi Greek letters \\circ Binary operators \\close Delimiters \\clubsuit Symbols \\coint Integrals \\cong Relational operators \\coprod Math operators \\cup Binary operators \\dalet Hebrew letters \\daleth Hebrew letters \\dashv Relational operators \\dd Double-struck letters \\Dd Double-struck letters \\ddddot Accents \\dddot Accents \\ddot Accents \\ddots Dots \\defeq Relational operators \\degc Symbols \\degf Symbols \\degree Symbols \\delta Greek letters \\Delta Greek letters \\Deltaeq Operators \\diamond Binary operators \\diamondsuit Symbols \\div Binary operators \\dot Accents \\doteq Relational operators \\dots Dots \\doublea Double-struck letters \\doubleA Double-struck letters \\doubleb Double-struck letters \\doubleB Double-struck letters \\doublec Double-struck letters \\doubleC Double-struck letters \\doubled Double-struck letters \\doubleD Double-struck letters \\doublee Double-struck letters \\doubleE Double-struck letters \\doublef Double-struck letters \\doubleF Double-struck letters \\doubleg Double-struck letters \\doubleG Double-struck letters \\doubleh Double-struck letters \\doubleH Double-struck letters \\doublei Double-struck letters \\doubleI Double-struck letters \\doublej Double-struck letters \\doubleJ Double-struck letters \\doublek Double-struck letters \\doubleK Double-struck letters \\doublel Double-struck letters \\doubleL Double-struck letters \\doublem Double-struck letters \\doubleM Double-struck letters \\doublen Double-struck letters \\doubleN Double-struck letters \\doubleo Double-struck letters \\doubleO Double-struck letters \\doublep Double-struck letters \\doubleP Double-struck letters \\doubleq Double-struck letters \\doubleQ Double-struck letters \\doubler Double-struck letters \\doubleR Double-struck letters \\doubles Double-struck letters \\doubleS Double-struck letters \\doublet Double-struck letters \\doubleT Double-struck letters \\doubleu Double-struck letters \\doubleU Double-struck letters \\doublev Double-struck letters \\doubleV Double-struck letters \\doublew Double-struck letters \\doubleW Double-struck letters \\doublex Double-struck letters \\doubleX Double-struck letters \\doubley Double-struck letters \\doubleY Double-struck letters \\doublez Double-struck letters \\doubleZ Double-struck letters \\downarrow Arrows \\Downarrow Arrows \\dsmash Arrows \\ee Double-struck letters \\ell Symbols \\emptyset Set notations \\emsp Space characters \\end Delimiters \\ensp Space characters \\epsilon Greek letters \\Epsilon Greek letters \\eqarray Symbols \\equiv Relational operators \\eta Greek letters \\Eta Greek letters \\exists Logic notations \\forall Logic notations \\fraktura Fraktur letters \\frakturA Fraktur letters \\frakturb Fraktur letters \\frakturB Fraktur letters \\frakturc Fraktur letters \\frakturC Fraktur letters \\frakturd Fraktur letters \\frakturD Fraktur letters \\frakture Fraktur letters \\frakturE Fraktur letters \\frakturf Fraktur letters \\frakturF Fraktur letters \\frakturg Fraktur letters \\frakturG Fraktur letters \\frakturh Fraktur letters \\frakturH Fraktur letters \\frakturi Fraktur letters \\frakturI Fraktur letters \\frakturk Fraktur letters \\frakturK Fraktur letters \\frakturl Fraktur letters \\frakturL Fraktur letters \\frakturm Fraktur letters \\frakturM Fraktur letters \\frakturn Fraktur letters \\frakturN Fraktur letters \\frakturo Fraktur letters \\frakturO Fraktur letters \\frakturp Fraktur letters \\frakturP Fraktur letters \\frakturq Fraktur letters \\frakturQ Fraktur letters \\frakturr Fraktur letters \\frakturR Fraktur letters \\frakturs Fraktur letters \\frakturS Fraktur letters \\frakturt Fraktur letters \\frakturT Fraktur letters \\frakturu Fraktur letters \\frakturU Fraktur letters \\frakturv Fraktur letters \\frakturV Fraktur letters \\frakturw Fraktur letters \\frakturW Fraktur letters \\frakturx Fraktur letters \\frakturX Fraktur letters \\fraktury Fraktur letters \\frakturY Fraktur letters \\frakturz Fraktur letters \\frakturZ Fraktur letters \\frown Relational operators \\funcapply Binary operators \\G Greek letters \\gamma Greek letters \\Gamma Greek letters \\ge Relational operators \\geq Relational operators \\gets Arrows \\gg Relational operators \\gimel Hebrew letters \\grave Accents \\hairsp Space characters \\hat Accents \\hbar Symbols \\heartsuit Symbols \\hookleftarrow Arrows \\hookrightarrow Arrows \\hphantom Arrows \\hsmash Arrows \\hvec Accents \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Double-struck letters \\iiint Integrals \\iint Integrals \\iiiint Integrals \\Im Symbols \\imath Symbols \\in Relational operators \\inc Symbols \\infty Symbols \\int Integrals \\integral Integrals \\iota Greek letters \\Iota Greek letters \\itimes Math operators \\j Symbols \\jj Double-struck letters \\jmath Symbols \\kappa Greek letters \\Kappa Greek letters \\ket Delimiters \\lambda Greek letters \\Lambda Greek letters \\langle Delimiters \\lbbrack Delimiters \\lbrace Delimiters \\lbrack Delimiters \\lceil Delimiters \\ldiv Fraction slashes \\ldivide Fraction slashes \\ldots Dots \\le Relational operators \\left Delimiters \\leftarrow Arrows \\Leftarrow Arrows \\leftharpoondown Arrows \\leftharpoonup Arrows \\leftrightarrow Arrows \\Leftrightarrow Arrows \\leq Relational operators \\lfloor Delimiters \\lhvec Accents \\limit Limits \\ll Relational operators \\lmoust Delimiters \\Longleftarrow Arrows \\Longleftrightarrow Arrows \\Longrightarrow Arrows \\lrhar Arrows \\lvec Accents \\mapsto Arrows \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Space characters \\mid Relational operators \\middle Symbols \\models Relational operators \\mp Binary operators \\mu Greek letters \\Mu Greek letters \\nabla Symbols \\naryand Operators \\nbsp Space characters \\ne Relational operators \\nearrow Arrows \\neq Relational operators \\ni Relational operators \\norm Delimiters \\notcontain Relational operators \\notelement Relational operators \\notin Relational operators \\nu Greek letters \\Nu Greek letters \\nwarrow Arrows \\o Greek letters \\O Greek letters \\odot Binary operators \\of Operators \\oiiint Integrals \\oiint Integrals \\oint Integrals \\omega Greek letters \\Omega Greek letters \\ominus Binary operators \\open Delimiters \\oplus Binary operators \\otimes Binary operators \\over Delimiters \\overbar Accents \\overbrace Accents \\overbracket Accents \\overline Accents \\overparen Accents \\overshell Accents \\parallel Geometry notation \\partial Symbols \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Geometry notation \\phantom Symbols \\phi Greek letters \\Phi Greek letters \\pi Greek letters \\Pi Greek letters \\pm Binary operators \\pppprime Primes \\ppprime Primes \\pprime Primes \\prec Relational operators \\preceq Relational operators \\prime Primes \\prod Math operators \\propto Relational operators \\psi Greek letters \\Psi Greek letters \\qdrt Square roots and radicals \\quadratic Square roots and radicals \\rangle Delimiters \\Rangle Delimiters \\ratio Relational operators \\rbrace Delimiters \\rbrack Delimiters \\Rbrack Delimiters \\rceil Delimiters \\rddots Dots \\Re Symbols \\rect Symbols \\rfloor Delimiters \\rho Greek letters \\Rho Greek letters \\rhvec Accents \\right Delimiters \\rightarrow Arrows \\Rightarrow Arrows \\rightharpoondown Arrows \\rightharpoonup Arrows \\rmoust Delimiters \\root Symbols \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Fraction slashes \\sdivide Fraction slashes \\searrow Arrows \\setminus Binary operators \\sigma Greek letters \\Sigma Greek letters \\sim Relational operators \\simeq Relational operators \\smash Arrows \\smile Relational operators \\spadesuit Symbols \\sqcap Binary operators \\sqcup Binary operators \\sqrt Square roots and radicals \\sqsubseteq Set notation \\sqsuperseteq Set notation \\star Binary operators \\subset Set notation \\subseteq Set notation \\succ Relational operators \\succeq Relational operators \\sum Math operators \\superset Set notation \\superseteq Set notation \\swarrow Arrows \\tau Greek letters \\Tau Greek letters \\therefore Relational operators \\theta Greek letters \\Theta Greek letters \\thicksp Space characters \\thinsp Space characters \\tilde Accents \\times Binary operators \\to Arrows \\top Logic notation \\tvec Arrows \\ubar Accents \\Ubar Accents \\underbar Accents \\underbrace Accents \\underbracket Accents \\underline Accents \\underparen Accents \\uparrow Arrows \\Uparrow Arrows \\updownarrow Arrows \\Updownarrow Arrows \\uplus Binary operators \\upsilon Greek letters \\Upsilon Greek letters \\varepsilon Greek letters \\varphi Greek letters \\varpi Greek letters \\varrho Greek letters \\varsigma Greek letters \\vartheta Greek letters \\vbar Delimiters \\vdash Relational operators \\vdots Dots \\vec Accents \\vee Binary operators \\vert Delimiters \\Vert Delimiters \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Arrows \\vthicksp Space characters \\wedge Binary operators \\wp Symbols \\wr Binary operators \\xi Greek letters \\Xi Greek letters \\zeta Greek letters \\Zeta Greek letters \\zwnj Space characters \\zwsp Space characters ~= Relational operators -+ Binary operators +- Binary operators << Relational operators <= Relational operators -> Arrows >= Relational operators >> Relational operators Recognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored. AutoFormat as You Type By default, the editor formats the text while you are typing according to the auto-formatting presets: replaces quotation marks, converts hyphens to dashes, converts text recognized as internet or network path into a hyperlink, starts a bullet list or a numbered list when a list is detected. The Add period with double-space option allows to add a period when you double tap the spacebar. Enable or disable it as appropriate.By default, this option is disabled for Linux and Windows, and is enabled for macOS. To enable or disable the auto-formatting presets, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Text AutoCorrect You can set the editor to capitalize the first word of each sentence automatically. The option is enabled by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of sentences option." + "body": "The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of four tabs: Math Autocorrect, Recognized Functions, AutoFormat As You Type, and Text AutoCorrect. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Math AutoCorrect. Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list Select the entry to be modified. You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list Select an entry to remove from the list. Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box. The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Presentation Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab in the Advanced Settings... -> Spell checking -> Proofing section. The supported codes Code Symbol Category !! Symbols ... Dots :: Operators := Operators /< Relational operators /> Relational operators /= Relational operators \\above Above/Below scripts \\acute Accents \\aleph Hebrew letters \\alpha Greek letters \\Alpha Greek letters \\amalg Binary operators \\angle Geometry notation \\aoint Integrals \\approx Relational operators \\asmash Arrows \\ast Binary operators \\asymp Relational operators \\atop Operators \\bar Over/Underbar \\Bar Accents \\because Relational operators \\begin Delimiters \\below Above/Below scripts \\bet Hebrew letters \\beta Greek letters \\Beta Greek letters \\beth Hebrew letters \\bigcap Large operators \\bigcup Large operators \\bigodot Large operators \\bigoplus Large operators \\bigotimes Large operators \\bigsqcup Large operators \\biguplus Large operators \\bigvee Large operators \\bigwedge Large operators \\binomial Equations \\bot Logic notation \\bowtie Relational operators \\box Symbols \\boxdot Binary operators \\boxminus Binary operators \\boxplus Binary operators \\bra Delimiters \\break Symbols \\breve Accents \\bullet Binary operators \\cap Binary operators \\cbrt Square roots and radicals \\cases Symbols \\cdot Binary operators \\cdots Dots \\check Accents \\chi Greek letters \\Chi Greek letters \\circ Binary operators \\close Delimiters \\clubsuit Symbols \\coint Integrals \\cong Relational operators \\coprod Math operators \\cup Binary operators \\dalet Hebrew letters \\daleth Hebrew letters \\dashv Relational operators \\dd Double-struck letters \\Dd Double-struck letters \\ddddot Accents \\dddot Accents \\ddot Accents \\ddots Dots \\defeq Relational operators \\degc Symbols \\degf Symbols \\degree Symbols \\delta Greek letters \\Delta Greek letters \\Deltaeq Operators \\diamond Binary operators \\diamondsuit Symbols \\div Binary operators \\dot Accents \\doteq Relational operators \\dots Dots \\doublea Double-struck letters \\doubleA Double-struck letters \\doubleb Double-struck letters \\doubleB Double-struck letters \\doublec Double-struck letters \\doubleC Double-struck letters \\doubled Double-struck letters \\doubleD Double-struck letters \\doublee Double-struck letters \\doubleE Double-struck letters \\doublef Double-struck letters \\doubleF Double-struck letters \\doubleg Double-struck letters \\doubleG Double-struck letters \\doubleh Double-struck letters \\doubleH Double-struck letters \\doublei Double-struck letters \\doubleI Double-struck letters \\doublej Double-struck letters \\doubleJ Double-struck letters \\doublek Double-struck letters \\doubleK Double-struck letters \\doublel Double-struck letters \\doubleL Double-struck letters \\doublem Double-struck letters \\doubleM Double-struck letters \\doublen Double-struck letters \\doubleN Double-struck letters \\doubleo Double-struck letters \\doubleO Double-struck letters \\doublep Double-struck letters \\doubleP Double-struck letters \\doubleq Double-struck letters \\doubleQ Double-struck letters \\doubler Double-struck letters \\doubleR Double-struck letters \\doubles Double-struck letters \\doubleS Double-struck letters \\doublet Double-struck letters \\doubleT Double-struck letters \\doubleu Double-struck letters \\doubleU Double-struck letters \\doublev Double-struck letters \\doubleV Double-struck letters \\doublew Double-struck letters \\doubleW Double-struck letters \\doublex Double-struck letters \\doubleX Double-struck letters \\doubley Double-struck letters \\doubleY Double-struck letters \\doublez Double-struck letters \\doubleZ Double-struck letters \\downarrow Arrows \\Downarrow Arrows \\dsmash Arrows \\ee Double-struck letters \\ell Symbols \\emptyset Set notations \\emsp Space characters \\end Delimiters \\ensp Space characters \\epsilon Greek letters \\Epsilon Greek letters \\eqarray Symbols \\equiv Relational operators \\eta Greek letters \\Eta Greek letters \\exists Logic notations \\forall Logic notations \\fraktura Fraktur letters \\frakturA Fraktur letters \\frakturb Fraktur letters \\frakturB Fraktur letters \\frakturc Fraktur letters \\frakturC Fraktur letters \\frakturd Fraktur letters \\frakturD Fraktur letters \\frakture Fraktur letters \\frakturE Fraktur letters \\frakturf Fraktur letters \\frakturF Fraktur letters \\frakturg Fraktur letters \\frakturG Fraktur letters \\frakturh Fraktur letters \\frakturH Fraktur letters \\frakturi Fraktur letters \\frakturI Fraktur letters \\frakturk Fraktur letters \\frakturK Fraktur letters \\frakturl Fraktur letters \\frakturL Fraktur letters \\frakturm Fraktur letters \\frakturM Fraktur letters \\frakturn Fraktur letters \\frakturN Fraktur letters \\frakturo Fraktur letters \\frakturO Fraktur letters \\frakturp Fraktur letters \\frakturP Fraktur letters \\frakturq Fraktur letters \\frakturQ Fraktur letters \\frakturr Fraktur letters \\frakturR Fraktur letters \\frakturs Fraktur letters \\frakturS Fraktur letters \\frakturt Fraktur letters \\frakturT Fraktur letters \\frakturu Fraktur letters \\frakturU Fraktur letters \\frakturv Fraktur letters \\frakturV Fraktur letters \\frakturw Fraktur letters \\frakturW Fraktur letters \\frakturx Fraktur letters \\frakturX Fraktur letters \\fraktury Fraktur letters \\frakturY Fraktur letters \\frakturz Fraktur letters \\frakturZ Fraktur letters \\frown Relational operators \\funcapply Binary operators \\G Greek letters \\gamma Greek letters \\Gamma Greek letters \\ge Relational operators \\geq Relational operators \\gets Arrows \\gg Relational operators \\gimel Hebrew letters \\grave Accents \\hairsp Space characters \\hat Accents \\hbar Symbols \\heartsuit Symbols \\hookleftarrow Arrows \\hookrightarrow Arrows \\hphantom Arrows \\hsmash Arrows \\hvec Accents \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Double-struck letters \\iiint Integrals \\iint Integrals \\iiiint Integrals \\Im Symbols \\imath Symbols \\in Relational operators \\inc Symbols \\infty Symbols \\int Integrals \\integral Integrals \\iota Greek letters \\Iota Greek letters \\itimes Math operators \\j Symbols \\jj Double-struck letters \\jmath Symbols \\kappa Greek letters \\Kappa Greek letters \\ket Delimiters \\lambda Greek letters \\Lambda Greek letters \\langle Delimiters \\lbbrack Delimiters \\lbrace Delimiters \\lbrack Delimiters \\lceil Delimiters \\ldiv Fraction slashes \\ldivide Fraction slashes \\ldots Dots \\le Relational operators \\left Delimiters \\leftarrow Arrows \\Leftarrow Arrows \\leftharpoondown Arrows \\leftharpoonup Arrows \\leftrightarrow Arrows \\Leftrightarrow Arrows \\leq Relational operators \\lfloor Delimiters \\lhvec Accents \\limit Limits \\ll Relational operators \\lmoust Delimiters \\Longleftarrow Arrows \\Longleftrightarrow Arrows \\Longrightarrow Arrows \\lrhar Arrows \\lvec Accents \\mapsto Arrows \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Space characters \\mid Relational operators \\middle Symbols \\models Relational operators \\mp Binary operators \\mu Greek letters \\Mu Greek letters \\nabla Symbols \\naryand Operators \\nbsp Space characters \\ne Relational operators \\nearrow Arrows \\neq Relational operators \\ni Relational operators \\norm Delimiters \\notcontain Relational operators \\notelement Relational operators \\notin Relational operators \\nu Greek letters \\Nu Greek letters \\nwarrow Arrows \\o Greek letters \\O Greek letters \\odot Binary operators \\of Operators \\oiiint Integrals \\oiint Integrals \\oint Integrals \\omega Greek letters \\Omega Greek letters \\ominus Binary operators \\open Delimiters \\oplus Binary operators \\otimes Binary operators \\over Delimiters \\overbar Accents \\overbrace Accents \\overbracket Accents \\overline Accents \\overparen Accents \\overshell Accents \\parallel Geometry notation \\partial Symbols \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Geometry notation \\phantom Symbols \\phi Greek letters \\Phi Greek letters \\pi Greek letters \\Pi Greek letters \\pm Binary operators \\pppprime Primes \\ppprime Primes \\pprime Primes \\prec Relational operators \\preceq Relational operators \\prime Primes \\prod Math operators \\propto Relational operators \\psi Greek letters \\Psi Greek letters \\qdrt Square roots and radicals \\quadratic Square roots and radicals \\rangle Delimiters \\Rangle Delimiters \\ratio Relational operators \\rbrace Delimiters \\rbrack Delimiters \\Rbrack Delimiters \\rceil Delimiters \\rddots Dots \\Re Symbols \\rect Symbols \\rfloor Delimiters \\rho Greek letters \\Rho Greek letters \\rhvec Accents \\right Delimiters \\rightarrow Arrows \\Rightarrow Arrows \\rightharpoondown Arrows \\rightharpoonup Arrows \\rmoust Delimiters \\root Symbols \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Fraction slashes \\sdivide Fraction slashes \\searrow Arrows \\setminus Binary operators \\sigma Greek letters \\Sigma Greek letters \\sim Relational operators \\simeq Relational operators \\smash Arrows \\smile Relational operators \\spadesuit Symbols \\sqcap Binary operators \\sqcup Binary operators \\sqrt Square roots and radicals \\sqsubseteq Set notation \\sqsuperseteq Set notation \\star Binary operators \\subset Set notation \\subseteq Set notation \\succ Relational operators \\succeq Relational operators \\sum Math operators \\superset Set notation \\superseteq Set notation \\swarrow Arrows \\tau Greek letters \\Tau Greek letters \\therefore Relational operators \\theta Greek letters \\Theta Greek letters \\thicksp Space characters \\thinsp Space characters \\tilde Accents \\times Binary operators \\to Arrows \\top Logic notation \\tvec Arrows \\ubar Accents \\Ubar Accents \\underbar Accents \\underbrace Accents \\underbracket Accents \\underline Accents \\underparen Accents \\uparrow Arrows \\Uparrow Arrows \\updownarrow Arrows \\Updownarrow Arrows \\uplus Binary operators \\upsilon Greek letters \\Upsilon Greek letters \\varepsilon Greek letters \\varphi Greek letters \\varpi Greek letters \\varrho Greek letters \\varsigma Greek letters \\vartheta Greek letters \\vbar Delimiters \\vdash Relational operators \\vdots Dots \\vec Accents \\vee Binary operators \\vert Delimiters \\Vert Delimiters \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Arrows \\vthicksp Space characters \\wedge Binary operators \\wp Symbols \\wr Binary operators \\xi Greek letters \\Xi Greek letters \\zeta Greek letters \\Zeta Greek letters \\zwnj Space characters \\zwsp Space characters ~= Relational operators -+ Binary operators +- Binary operators << Relational operators <= Relational operators -> Arrows >= Relational operators >> Relational operators Recognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored. AutoFormat as You Type By default, the editor formats the text while you are typing according to the auto-formatting presets: replaces quotation marks, converts hyphens to dashes, converts text recognized as internet or network path into a hyperlink, starts a bullet list or a numbered list when a list is detected. The Add period with double-space option allows to add a period when you double tap the spacebar. Enable or disable it as appropriate.By default, this option is disabled for Linux and Windows, and is enabled for macOS. To enable or disable the auto-formatting presets, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Text AutoCorrect You can set the editor to capitalize the first word of each sentence automatically. The option is enabled by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of sentences option. The editor capitalizes the first letter of table cells by default. To disable this option, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Text AutoCorrect and uncheck the Capitalize first letter of table cells box. You can also customize capitalizing after particular words by entering the required words in the Don't capitalize after field and clicking the Add button, or by choosing the required words in the corresponding list below. You can choose the way the exceptions work based on the language in the Exceptions for the language dropdown list. Use the Reset to default button to cancel all custom changes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm", @@ -238,18 +253,13 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Save/print/download your presentation", - "body": "Saving By default, the online Presentation Editor automatically saves your file every 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if there are any. When the file is co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved within 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your presentation manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the presentation under a different name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. You can also choose the Рresentation template (POTX or OTP) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting presentation onto the hard disk drive of your computer, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current presentation, click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. It's also possible to print the selected slides using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click on the selected slides and choose option Print selection). In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file based on your presentation will be generated. You can open and print it out, or save onto the hard disk drive of your computer or a removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." + "body": "Saving By default, the online Presentation Editor automatically saves your file every 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if there are any. When the file is co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved within 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your presentation manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the presentation under a different name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. You can also choose the Рresentation template (POTX or OTP) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting presentation onto the hard disk drive of your computer, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current presentation, click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. Adjust the following parameters in the Print window that opens: Destination - choose the destination of the printed file, e.g., Save to PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc. Orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally. Pages - choose one of the options for printing the pages: All, Current, Odd, Even, or Custom. In the latter case, you will have to enter the number of pages manually. Colour mode - choose whether you want your file printed in Colour or Black and white. Please note that this setting is available when the Microsoft XPS Document Writer Destination parameter is selected. For the Fax Destination parameter, the colour mode is set to black and white by default. Click the More settings caption to open advanced settings. Paper size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list or set a user defined one. Scale - set the file scaling when printed; you can fit it to page width or set the scaling manually via the Scale checkbox and the corresponding input field. Pages per sheet - set the number of pages printed on one sheet, e.g., two, six, nine, etc. Margins - define the page margins. You can choose either default margins or custom ones measured in inches. For custom margins, please set the required values for top, bottom, left and right margins manually. You can choose the None option as well to have no margins. Options - check the Print headers and footers checkbox to have them printed, or uncheck this box to have no headers and footers printed. Print using the system dialogue - click this caption to open the system dialogue to configure the printing process. In the desktop version, the available printing settings are Print range, number of Slides, Copies, Print sides, and Paper size. You can also print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer. It's also possible to print the selected slides using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click on the selected slides and choose option Print selection). In the online version, a PDF file based on your presentation will be generated. You can open and print it out, or save onto the hard disk drive of your computer or a removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm", "title": "Set slide parameters", "body": "To customize your presentation in the Presentation Editor, you can select a theme, color scheme, slide size and orientation for the entire presentation, change the background fill or slide layout for each separate slide, apply transitions between the slides. It's also possible to add explanatory notes to each slide that can be helpful when demonstrating the presentation in the Presenter mode. Themes allow you to quickly change the presentation design, notably the slides background appearance, predefined fonts for titles and texts and the color scheme that is used for the presentation elements. To select a theme for the presentation, click on the necessary predefined theme from the themes gallery on the right side of the top toolbar on the Home tab. The selected theme will be applied to all the slides if you have not previously selected certain slides to apply the theme to. To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme. Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list and applied to all the slides. To change the size of all the slides in the presentation, click the Select slide size icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the drop-down list. You can select: one of the two quick-access presets - Standard (4:3) or Widescreen (16:9), the Advanced Settings option that opens the Slide Size Settings window where you can select one of the available presets or set a Custom size specifying the desired Width and Height values. The available presets are: Standard (4:3), Widescreen (16:9), Widescreen (16:10), Letter Paper (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 Paper (297x420 mm), A4 Paper (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Paper (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Paper (176x250 mm), 35 mm Slides, Overhead, Banner. The Slide Orientation menu allows changing the currently selected orientation type. The default orientation type is Landscape that can be switched to Portrait. To change a background fill: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide. on the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides. Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - drag the slider or enter the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Transitions help make your presentation more dynamic and keep your audience's attention. To apply a transition: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a transition to, choose a transition in the Effect drop-down list on the Slide settings tab, To open the Slide settings tab, you can click the Slide settings icon on the right or right-click the slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. adjust the transition properties: choose a transition variation, duration and the way to advance slides, click the Apply to All Slides button if you want to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Apply transitions section. To change a slide layout: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a new layout to, click the Change slide layout icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary layout from the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary slide in the list on the left or in the editing area, select the Change Layout option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary layout. Currently, the following layouts are available: Title Slide, Title and Content, Section Header, Two Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with Caption, Picture with Caption, Title and Vertical Text, Vertical Title and Text. To add objects to a slide layout: click the Change slide layout icon and select a layout you want to add an object to, using the Insert tab of the top toolbar, add the necessary object to the slide (image, table, chart, shape), then right-click on this object and select Add to Layout option, on the Home tab, click Change slide layout and apply the changed layout. The selected objects will be added to the current theme's layout. Objects placed on a slide this way cannot be selected, resized, or moved. To return the slide layout to its original state: in the slide list on the left, select the slides that you want to return to the default state, Hold down the Ctrl key and select one slide at a time to select several slides at once, or hold down the Shift key to select all slides from the current to the selected. right-click on one of the slides and select the Reset slide option in the context menu, All text frames and objects located on slides will be reset and situated in accordinance with the slide layout. To add notes to a slide: in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add a note to, click the Click to add notes caption below the slide editing area, type in the text of your note. You can format the text using the icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When you start the slideshow in the Presenter mode, you will be able to see all the slide notes below the slide preview area." }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Support of SmartArt in ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor", - "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports SmartArt graphics that were inserted using third-party editors. You can open a file containing SmartArt and edit it as a graphic object using the available editing tools. Once you click the SmartArt graphic border or the border of its element, the following tabs become active on the right sidebar to customize a layout: Slide settings to change the slide background fill, opacity, and to show or to hide slide number, date and time. See Set Slide Parameters and Insert footers for details. Shape settings to configure the shapes used on a layout. You can change shapes, edit the fill, the lines, the wrapping style, the position, the weights and arrows, the text box and the alternative text. Paragraph settings to configure indents and spacing, fonts and tabs. See Text formatting section for a detailed description of every option. This tab becomes active for SmartArt elements only. Text Art settings to configure the Text Art style that is used in a SmartArt graphic to highlight the text. You can change the Text Art template, the fill type, color and opacity, the line size, color and type. This tab becomes active for SmartArt elements only. Right-click the border of a SmartArt graphic or its element to access the following formatting options: Arrange to arrange the objects using the following options: Bring to Foreground, Send to Background, Bring Forward and Bring Backward are available for SmartArt. Group and Ungroup are available for the SmartArt elements and depend on whether they are grouped or not. Align to align the graphic or the objects using the following options: Aligh Left, Align Center, Align Right, Align Top, Align Middle, Align Bottom, Distribute Horizontally, and Distribute Vertically. Rotate to choose the rotation direction for the selected element on a SmartArt graphic: Rotate 90° Clockwise, Rotate 90° Counterclockwise.The Rotate option becomes active for SmartArt elements only. Shape Advanced Settings to access additional shape formatting options. Add Comment to leave a comment to a certain SmartArt graphic or its element, Add to layout to add the SmartArt graphic to the slide layout. Right-click a SmartArt graphic element to access the following text formatting options: Vertical Alignment to choose the text alignment inside the selected SmarArt element: Align Top, Align Middle, Align Bottom. Text Direction to choose the text direction inside the selected SmarArt element: Horizontal, Rotate Text Down, Rotate Text Up. Paragraph Advanced Settings to access additional paragraph formatting options. Add Comment to leave a comment to a certain SmartArt graphic or its element. Hyperlink to add a hyperlink to the SmartArt element." - }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "title": "Replace a word by a synonym", @@ -269,5 +279,10 @@ var indexes = "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Include a video", "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can include a video in your presentation. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your presentation." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", + "title": "Zoom", + "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css index 9452c3de97..d789dacd08 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json index 9b68d0b99f..dd8fbe9c6f 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json @@ -1,8 +1,9 @@ [ - {"src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de Presentation Editor", "headername": "Interface du programme"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de présentations", "headername": "Interface du programme"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Fichier"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Accueil"}, - {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Insertion"}, + { "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Insertion" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Dessiner"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Transitions"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Animation"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Collaboration"}, @@ -23,7 +24,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "name": "Insérer et modifier des images"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Insérer et modifier des graphiques"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "name": "Insérer et mettre en forme des tableaux"}, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Dessiner à main levée sur une diapositive" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm", "name": "Ajouter des animations"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm", "name": "Créer une animation de trajectoire de mouvement"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insérer des symboles et des caractères"}, @@ -40,16 +42,18 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", "name": "Insérer le code en surbrillance" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "name": "Traduire un texte" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Remplacer un mot par synonyme" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communiquer lors de l'édition"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communiquer lors de l'édition" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Organiser et programmer des réunions de Zoom"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Utiliser l'intelligence artificielle pour rédiger un texte"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm", "name": "Afficher les informations sur la présentation", "headername": "Outils et paramètres"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre présentation"}, - {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Paramètres avancés de Presentation Editor"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de présentations"}, {"src": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "name": "Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation"}, {"src": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "name": "Fonction de recherche"}, {"src": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", "name": "Vérification de l'orthographe"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "name": "Fonctionnalités de correction automatique"}, {"src": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", "name": "Protéger une présentation avec un mot de passe"}, - {"src": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "name": "A propos de Presentation Editor", "headername": "Astuces utiles"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "name": "A propos de l'éditeur de présentations", "headername": "Astuces utiles"}, {"src": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "name": "Formats des présentations électroniques pris en charge"}, {"src": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "name": "Raccourcis clavier"} ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm index 07eb0eba05..5ae2350c62 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - À propos de l'Éditeur de Présentations + À propos de l'éditeur de présentations @@ -14,10 +14,10 @@
            -

            À propos de l'Éditeur de Présentations

            -

            Éditeur de Présentations est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir +

            À propos de l'éditeur de présentations

            +

            L'éditeur de présentations est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des présentations dans votre navigateur.

            -

            En utilisant l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, +

            En utilisant l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les présentations modifiées en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP.

            Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel, le numéro de build et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau pour Windows, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme. Dans la version de bureau pour Mac OS, accédez au menu ONLYOFFICE en haut de l'écran et sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos d'ONLYOFFICE.

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index bb98bae2ad..53b73321ef 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
            -

            Paramètres avancés de l'Éditeur de Présentations

            -

            Éditeur de Présentations vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés....

            +

            Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de présentations

            +

            L'éditeur de présentations vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés....

            Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants :

            Édition et enregistrement

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm index 765419ffdf..08ef1759d2 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Collaborer sur une présentation en temps réel - + @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@
            - +

            Collaborer sur une présentation en temps réel

            -

            Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions de la présentation pour une utilisation ultérieure.

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations il y a deux modes de collaborer sur des présentations en temps réel : Rapide et Strict.

            -

            Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes depuis Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure :

            +

            L'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions de la présentation pour une utilisation ultérieure.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de présentations il y a deux modes de collaborer sur des présentations en temps réel : Rapide et Strict.

            +

            Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes depuis la section Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure :

            Menu Mode de co-édition

            Le nombre d'utilisateurs qui travaillent sur la présentation actuelle est spécifié sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur - . Pour afficher les personnes qui travaillent sur le fichier, cliquez sur cette icône pour ouvrir le panneau Chat avec la liste complète affichée.

            Mode Rapide

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm index 9e45b8a89a..019ac66c79 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
            - +

            Commentaires

            -

            Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers,, collaborer sur présentations en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la présentation pour une utilisation ultérieure.

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de présentations sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer.

            +

            L'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers,, collaborer sur présentations en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la présentation pour une utilisation ultérieure.

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de présentations vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de présentations sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer.

            Laisser et répondre aux commentaires

            Pour laisser un commentaire sur un objet (zone de texte, forme etc.) :

              diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 13e2f682d4..abc2d4974b 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Raccourcis clavier - + @@ -18,20 +18,20 @@

            Raccourcis clavier

            Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

            -

            Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'Éditeur de Présentations sans l'aide de la souris.

            +

            Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'éditeur de présentations sans l'aide de la souris.

              -
            1. Appuyez sur la touche Altpour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état.
              2. +
            2. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état.
            3. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. -

              Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès.

              +

              Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur Alt pour afficher les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès.

              Primaires touches d'accès

              Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet.

              Touches d'accès supplémentaires

              Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer.

              4. -
            4. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour désactiver toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir aux suggestions de touches précédentes.
              5. +
            5. Appuyez sur Alt pour masquer toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir au groupe de suggestions de touches précédent.
            -

            Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants :

            +

            Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants:

            • Windows/Linux
              • . + ⌘ Cmd+X + Couper l'objet sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. L'objet coupé peut être inséré ensuite dans un autre endroit dans la même présentation. Copier Ctrl+C,
              Ctrl+Inser - ⌘ Cmd+C - Envoyer l'objet sélectionné et vers le presse-papiers. L'objet copié peut être insérées ensuite à un autre endroit dans la même présentation. + ⌘ Cmd+C + Envoyer l'objet sélectionné et vers le presse-papiers. L'objet copié peut être inséré ensuite dans un autre endroit dans la même présentation. Coller Ctrl+V,
              ⇧ Maj+Inser - ⌘ Cmd+V - Insérer l'objet précédemment copié depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. L'objet peut être copié à partir de la même présentation. + ⌘ Cmd+V + Insérer l'objet précédemment copié du presse-papiers dans la position actuelle du curseur. L'objet peut être copié de la même présentation. + + + Copiez du texte sans la mise en forme du style + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V,
              + ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V + Insérer le fragment du texte copié auparavant du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur sans utiliser la mise en forme de la source. C'est d'abord possible de copier le texte dans le même document, un autre document, ou une autre application. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K - ^ Ctrl+K,
              ⌘ Cmd+K + ^ Ctrl+K,
              ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web ou à une certaine diapositive de la présentation. Copier le style - Ctrl+⇧ Maj+C - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+C,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+C - Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être appliquée à un autre fragment du texte dans la même présentation. + Alt+Ctrl+C + ^ Ctrl+Alt+C,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+C + Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre fragment du texte dans la même présentation. - Appliquer le style - Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V - Appliquer la mise en forme précedemment copiée au texte de la partie en cours d'édition. + Appliquer du style + Alt+Ctrl+V + ^ Ctrl+Alt+V,
              ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V + Appliquer la mise en forme copiée au texte dans la zone de texte en cours d'édition. Sélectionner avec la souris @@ -403,7 +409,7 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Ajouter au fragment sélectionné ⇧ Maj ⇧ Maj - Démarrer la sélection, maintenez enfoncée la touche ⇧ Maj et cliquez sur l'endroit où vous souhaitez terminer la sélection. + Démarrer la sélection, maintenez la touche ⇧ Maj enfoncée et cliquez sur l'endroit où vous souhaitez terminer la sélection. Sélectionner avec le clavier @@ -411,11 +417,11 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A - ^ Ctrl+A,
              ⌘ Cmd+A + ^ Ctrl+A,
              ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner toutes les diapositives (dans la liste des diapositives) ou tous les objets de la diapositive (dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive) ou tout le texte (dans le bloc de texte) - selon la position du curseur de la souris. - Sélectionner le fragment du texte + Sélectionner un fragment du texte ⇧ Maj+→ ← ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. @@ -424,22 +430,22 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Sélectionner le texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Début - Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. + Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner le texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Fin - Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. + Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. - Sélectionner un caractère à droite + Sélectionnez un caractère à droite ⇧ Maj+→ ⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur. - Sélectionner un caractère à gauche + Sélectionnez un caractère à gauche ⇧ Maj+← ⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur. @@ -448,69 +454,69 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ - Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin d'un mot. + Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin du mot. - Sélectionner au début d'un mot + Sélectionner jusqu'au début d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← - Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début d'un mot. + Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début du mot. Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut ⇧ Maj+↑ ⇧ Maj+↑ - Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). + Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne). Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas ⇧ Maj+↓ ⇧ Maj+↓ - Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). + Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne). - Style de texte + Appliquer des styles au texte Gras Ctrl+B - ^ Ctrl+B,
              ⌘ Cmd+B + ^ Ctrl+B,
              ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I - ^ Ctrl+I,
              ⌘ Cmd+I + ^ Ctrl+I,
              ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U - ^ Ctrl+U,
              ⌘ Cmd+U + ^ Ctrl+U,
              ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 - ^ Ctrl+5,
              ⌘ Cmd+5 - Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. + ^ Ctrl+5,
              ⌘ Cmd+5 + Barrer le fragment de texte sélectionné avec une ligne qui passe à travers les lettres. Indice Ctrl+⇧ Maj+> - ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+> - Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. + ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+> + Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer dans la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+⇧ Maj+< - ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+< - Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. + ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+< + Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer dans la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Liste à puces Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. @@ -522,13 +528,13 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Agrandir la police Ctrl+] - ^ Ctrl+],
              ⌘ Cmd+] + ^ Ctrl+],
              ⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ - ^ Ctrl+[,
              ⌘ Cmd+[ + ^ Ctrl+[,
              ⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. @@ -550,22 +556,22 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Aligner à droite avec le texte aligné par le côté droit du bloc de texte, le côté gauche reste non aligné. - Alignement à gauche + Aligner à gauche Ctrl+L Aligner à gauche avec le texte aligné par le côté gauche du bloc de texte, le côté droit reste non aligné. - Augmenter le retrait gauche + Augmenter le retrait à gauche Ctrl+M - ^ Ctrl+M,
              ⌘ Cmd+M + ^ Ctrl+M,
              ⌘ Cmd+M Augmenter l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. - Diminuer l'indentation gauche + Réduire le retrait à gauche Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+M - Diminuer l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M,
              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+M + Réduire l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. Supprimer un caractère à gauche @@ -580,7 +586,7 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Supprimer un caractère à droite du curseur. - Se déplacer dans le texte + Déplacer à travers du texte Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche @@ -598,7 +604,7 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑ ↑ - Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut. + Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut Déplacer une ligne vers le bas @@ -607,55 +613,55 @@

              Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

              Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas. - Déplacer vers le début d'un mot ou un mot vers la gauche + Rendre au début du mot ou déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche Ctrl+← - ⌘ Cmd+← - Déplacer le curseur au début d'un mot ou d'un mot vers la gauche. + ⌘ Cmd+← + Déplacer le curseur au début du mot ou se déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche - Déplacer un caractère vers la droite + Déplacer d'un mot vers la droite Ctrl+→ - ⌘ Cmd+→ + ⌘ Cmd+→ Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite. - Passer à l'emplacement suivant + Déplacer vers l'espace réservé suivant Ctrl+↵ Entrée - ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour,
              ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour - Passer au titre ou au corps du texte suivant. S'il s'agit du dernier caractère de remplacement d'une diapositive, une nouvelle diapositive sera insérée avec la même disposition que la diapositive originale. + ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour,
              ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour + Déplacer vers l'espace suivant réservé au titre ou au corps du texte. Une fois le dernier espace réservé atteint, une nouvelle diapositive sera insérée ayant la même disposition que la diapositive source. + One paragraph up + Ctrl+↑ + + Move the cursor one paragraph up. + + + One paragraph down + Ctrl+↓ + + Move the cursor one paragraph down. + --> Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début - Placer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition. + Placez le curseur au début de la ligne en cours de modification - Sauter à la fin de la ligne - Fin - Fin - Placer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition. + Sauter à la fin de la ligne + End + End + Placez le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours de modification. - Aller au début de la zone de texte + Sauter au début de la zone de texte Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début de la zone de texte en cours d'édition. - Aller à la fin de la zone de texte + Sauter à la fin de la zone de texte Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la zone de texte en cours d'édition. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 790d355029..b94d440208 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation - + @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation

            -

            Presentation Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à afficher et naviguer à travers votre présentation: le zoom, les boutons de diapositive précédente/suivante et l'indicateur du numéro de diapositive etc.

            +

            L'éditeur de présentations vous propose plusieurs outils qui vous aide à afficher et naviguer à travers votre présentation: le zoom, les boutons de diapositive précédente/suivante et l'indicateur du numéro de diapositive etc.

            Régler les paramètres d'affichage

            Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec la présentation, passez à l'onglet Affichage . Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@

            Régler les paramètres d'affichage

            Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau.

          • Barre d'état - une fois désactivé, sert à masquer la barre qui se situe tout en bas avec les boutons Affichage des numéros de diapositives et Zoom. Pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois.
            • -
          • Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Diapositives, Commentaires sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case.
            • +
          • Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Diapositives, Commentaires sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case.
          • Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case.

          La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet/diapositive et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. La largeur de la barre latérale gauche est ajustée par simple glisser-déposer: déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche pour qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers la gauche pour réduire la largeur de la barre latérale ou vers la droite pour l'agrandir.

          Utiliser les outils de navigation

          Pour naviguer à travers votre présentation, utilisez les outils suivants:

          - Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans la présentation active. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la diapositive à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la diapositive entière à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la diapositive . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage. + Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans la présentation active. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la diapositive à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la diapositive entière à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la diapositive . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage.

          Vous pouvez définir une valeur de zoom par défaut. Basculez vers l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, allez à la section Paramètres avancés..., choisissez la Valeur de zoom par défaut nécessaire dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer.

          Pour accéder à la diapositive précédente ou suivante lors de la modification de la présentation, vous pouvez utiliser les boutons et en haut et en bas de la barre de défilement verticale sur le côté droit de la diapositive.

          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 91fa54c5c2..3ae71b2d2d 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -1,42 +1,41 @@  - Fonction de recherche + Fonctions de recherche et remplacement - + -
          +
          - -
          -

          Fonction de recherche et remplacement

          -

          - Pour rechercher des caractères, des mots ou des phrases dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, - cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône située au coin droit en haut ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Command+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir le petit panneau Recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H pour ouvrir le panneau complet Recherche. + +

          +

          Fonctions de recherche et remplacement

          +

          + Pour rechercher les caractères, les mots et les phrases nécessaires dans l'éditeur de présentations, cliquez sur l'icône sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Commande+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir la petite barre de recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+ H pour ouvrir le plein panneau de recherche.

          -

          Un petit panneau Recherche s'affiche au coin droit en haut de la zone de travail.

          -

          Petit panneau Recherche

          -

          Afin d'accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône .

          -

          La fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer s'ouvre :

          +

          Une petite barre Recherche apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de l'espace de travail. La barre inclut le champ de saisie de la requête de recherche, affiche le nombre de résultats de recherche et les contrôles pour basculer entre le résultat précédent ou suivant et masquer la barre.

          +

          Petite barre Recherche

          +

          Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône .

          +

          Le panneau Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche.

          Fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer
            -
          1. Saisissez votre enquête dans le champ de saisie correspondant Rechercher.
            2. -
          2. Si vous avez besoin de remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères saisis, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie correspondant Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer l'occurrence actuellement sélectionnée ou remplacer toutes les occurrences en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants Remplacer et Remplacer tout.
            3. -
          3. Afin de parcourir les occurrences trouvées, cliquez sur un des boutons à flèche. Le bouton
            affiche l'occurrence suivante, le bouton
            ) affiche l'occurrence précédente.
            4. +
          4. Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans le champ de saisie Rechercher.
            5. +
          5. S'il vous faut remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer une seule occurrence qui est mise en surbrillance ou toutes occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant Remplacer ou Remplacer tout.
            6. +
          6. Pour naviguer à travers des occurrences, cliquez sur les boutons fléchés. Le bouton
            affiche l'occurrence suivante et le bouton
            affiche l'occurrence précédente.
          7. - Spécifiez les paramètres de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires : + Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées en dessous du champ de saisie:
              -
            • Sensible à la casse sert à trouver les occurrences saisies de la même casse (par exemple, si votre enquête est 'Editeur' et cette option est sélectionnée, les mots tels que 'éditeur' ou 'EDITEUR' etc. ne seront pas trouvés).
              • -
            • Seulement les mots entiers - sert à surligner les mots entiers uniquement.
              • +
            • Sensible aux caractères sert à passer toutes les occurrences tenant compte de la casse (par exemple, quand vous rechercher le mot Éditeur», les mots «éditeur» et «ÉDITEUR» ne sont pas affichés).
              • +
            • Mots entiers uniquement set à mettre en surbrillance uniquement des mots entiers.
            8. -
          -

          La première diapositive contenant les caractères saisis dans la direction sélectionnée sera activée dans la liste des diapositives et affichée avec les caractères requis dans la zone de travail. Si ce n'est pas la diapositive que vous cherchez, cliquez sur le bouton sélectionné encore une fois pour passer à la diapositive suivante contenant les caractères saisis.

          -
          +
        +

        La première diapositive dans le sens sélectionné qui contient les caractères nécessaires sera mis en surbrillance dans la liste des diapositives aussi que dans l'espace de travail et les caractères recherchés seront surlignés. Si vous recherchez une autre diapositive, cliquez sur le bouton encore une fois pour rechercher la diapositive suivante comportant les caractères recherchés.

        + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm index c0edc4a37d..b7e4541724 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

        Vérification de l'orthographe

        -

        Éditeur de Présentations vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte saisi dans une certaine langue et corriger des fautes lors de l'édition. Sur l'édition de bureau, il est aussi possible d'ajouter les mots au dictionnaire personnalisé commun à tous les trois éditeurs.

        +

        L'éditeur de présentations vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte saisi dans une certaine langue et corriger des fautes lors de l'édition. Sur l'édition de bureau, il est aussi possible d'ajouter les mots au dictionnaire personnalisé commun à tous les trois éditeurs.

        À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en charge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page.

        Tout d'abord, choisissez la langue pour tout le document. Cliquez sur l'icône sur le côté droit de la barre d'état. Dans la fenêtre ouverte sélectionnez la langue nécessaire et cliquez sur OK. La langue sélectionnée sera appliquée à tout le document.

        Fenêtre Définir la langue du document

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index a189e2cf67..fbd42210bc 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Formats des présentations électroniques pris en charge - + @@ -15,22 +15,45 @@

        Formats des présentations électroniques pris en charge

        -

        Une présentation est l'ensemble des diapositives qui peut inclure de différents types de contenu tels que des images, des fichiers multimédias, des textes, des effets etc. - Éditeur de Présentations prend en charge les formats suivants :

        +

        Une présentation est l'ensemble des diapositives qui peut inclure de différents types de contenu tels que des images, des fichiers multimédias, des textes, des effets etc. L'éditeur de présentations prend en charge les formats suivants:

        Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Office Open XML (PPTX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données.

        Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition.

        - - - - +
        FormatsDescription
        + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + @@ -38,20 +61,52 @@

        Formats des présentations électroniques pris en charge

        - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -68,44 +123,84 @@

        Formats des présentations électroniques pris en charge

        - + - - + + + + - + + + + - -
        FormatsDescription Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML
        DPSWPS Office Presentation Document by Kingsoft
        Un format de présentation diaporama inclus dans la suite WPS Office qui comporte une collection de diapositives comprenant une diapositive de titre suivi par des diapositives de contenu qui peuvent contenir du texte, des images, des vidéos, des audios et des formes.        		++
        DPTKingsoft Presentation Template
        Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder la disposition et le style pour une présentation par défaut et des créer des présentations (fichiers .DPS files) avec le même mise en forme.        		++
        FODPFormat de Présentation OpenDocument Flat XML
        Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder une présentation qu'on a enregistré dans le format OpenDocument XML sans aucune compression.        		++
        ODPPrésentation OpenDocument
        Format de fichier utilisé pour les présentations créées par l'application Impress, qui fait partie des applications OpenOffice        		Présentation OpenDocument
        Format de fichier utilisé pour les présentations créées par l'application Impress, qui fait partie des applications OpenOffice.        		 +
        OTPModèle de présentation OpenDocument
        Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle OTP contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme        		Modèle de présentation OpenDocument
        Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle OTP contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme.        		++
        POTPortable object template
        Un format de fichier pour créer des présentations en diaporama comportant la disposition, la mise en forme et les styles pour une diaporama par défaut. Le format POT permet de créer plusieurs fichiers .PPT avec la même mise en forme.        		+ +
        POTMModèles de présentation prenant en charge les macros par Microsoft PowerPoint
        Un format de fichier pour créer des présentations comportant des images, des modèle de diapositives, des macros et de la mise en forme par défaut.        		+ +
        POTXModèle de document PowerPoint Open XML
        Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle POTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme        		Modèle de document PowerPoint Open XML
        Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle POTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme.        		 + +
        PPSPowerPoint Slideshow
        Un format de fichier qui est utilisé pour préparer des diaporamas et des présentations comprenant plusieurs types de données tels que des vidéo, audio, texte, animations et images.        		++
        PPSMDiaporama prenant en charge les macros par Microsoft PowerPoint
        Un format de fichier pour créer des diaporamas et des présentations prenant en charge les macros sur une ou plusieurs diapositives qui peuvent contenir du texte, des images et des transitions.        		++
        PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show
        Un format de présentation pour démarrer le diaporama.        		 +
        PPTXPrésentation Office Open XML
        Compressé, le format de fichier basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des classeurs, des tableaux, des présentations et des documents de traitement de texte        		+Présentation Office Open XML
        Compressé, le format de fichier basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des classeurs, des tableaux, des présentations et des documents de traitement de texte.        		++ +
        SXIStarOffice Impress Presentation
        Un format de présentation permettant de créer des présentations diaporama qui peuvent comprendre une diapositive et des diapositives de contenu avec du texte et des éléments numériques et prennent en charge des vidéos et des effet de transition.
        + + + + + +

        Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'une présentation dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme.

        - + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - + + + + +
        Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme
        DPSJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        DPTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        FODPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        ODPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        OTPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        POTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        POTMJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        POTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        PPSJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        PPSMJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        PPSXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPTM, PPTX
        PPTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
        PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM
        SXIJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX

        Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos présentations dans des formats les plus populaires.

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm index 8cdfc481d4..ac0c25d2ab 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
        - +

        Communiquer en temps réel

        -

        Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur présentations en temps réel, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du classeur pour une utilisation ultérieure.

        -

        Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations il est possible de communiquer avec vos co-auteurs en temps réel en utilisant l'outil intégré Chat et les modules complémentaires utiles, par ex. Telegram ou Rainbow.

        +

        L'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur présentations en temps réel, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions du classeur pour une utilisation ultérieure.

        +

        Dans l'éditeur de présentations il est possible de communiquer avec vos co-auteurs en temps réel en utilisant l'outil intégré Chat et les modules complémentaires utiles, par ex. Telegram ou Rainbow.

        Pour accéder au Chat et laisser un message pour les autres utilisateurs,

        1. cliquez sur
          l'icône sur la barre latérale gauche,
          2. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm index fdbf428818..bbab463d04 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
          - +

          Historique des versions

          -

          L'éditeur Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des présentations en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne.

          -

          Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations vous pouvez afficher l'historique des versions de la présentation sur laquelle vous collaborez.

          +

          L'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des présentations en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la présentation nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne.

          +

          Dans l'éditeur de présentations vous pouvez afficher l'historique des versions de la présentation sur laquelle vous collaborez.

          Afficher l'historique des versions :

          Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à la présentation,

            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm index 16a735c6dd..70fa4ad507 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm @@ -16,14 +16,14 @@

          Onglet Animation

          - L'onglet Animation de l'Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer des effets d'animation. Vous pouvez ajouter des effets d'animation, définir des trajectoires des effets et configurer d'autres paramètres des animations pour personnaliser votre présentation. + L'onglet Animation dans l'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer des effets d'animation. Vous pouvez ajouter des effets d'animation, définir des trajectoires des effets et configurer d'autres paramètres des animations pour personnaliser votre présentation.

          -

          Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

          +

          L'onglet Animation dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

          Onglet Animation

          -

          Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

          +

          L'onglet Animation dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

          Onglet Animation

          En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm index 32fd88e0f8..c635f4c81c 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

        Onglet Collaboration

        -

        L'onglet Collaboration dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur une présentation. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires. En mode Commentaires, vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer les commentaires et utiliser le chat. Dans la version de bureau, vous ne pouvez que gérer les commentaires.

        +

        L'onglet Collaboration dans l'éditeur de présentations permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur une présentation. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires. En mode Commentaires, vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer les commentaires et utiliser le chat. Dans la version de bureau, vous ne pouvez que gérer des commentaires.

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        L'onglet Collaboration dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Onglet Collaboration

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        L'onglet Collaboration dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Onglet Collaboration

        En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..065e4de544 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Onglet Dessiner + + + + + + + + +
        +
        + +
        +

        Onglet Dessiner

        +

        L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de présentations permet d'effectuer les opérations dessin de base.

        +
        +

        Fenêtre de l'éditeur de présentations en ligne:

        +

        Onglet Dessiner

        +
        +
        +

        Fenêtre de l'éditeur de présentations de bureau:

        +

        Onglet Dessiner

        +
        +

        En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

        +
          +
        • utiliser l'outil de sélection pour redimensionner ou supprimer l'inscription, le dessin et la mise en surbrillance,
          • +
        • utiliser l'outil Stylo et Surligneur pour dessiner ou ajouter les notes manuscrites ou la mise en surbrillance,
          • +
        • utiliser l'outil Gomme pour effacer le dessin entier ou le texte manuscrit.
          • +
        +
        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 2e8830e327..97616591ab 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

        Onglet Fichier

        -

        L'onglet Fichier dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

        +

        L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de présentations permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Onglet Fichier

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Onglet Fichier

        En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index 2342856e24..97c201fc47 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

        Onglet Accueil

        -

        L'onglet Accueil dans l'Éditeur de Présentations s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez une présentation. Il permet de définir les paramètres généraux de la diapositive, mettre en forme le texte, insérer des objets, les aligner et les organiser.

        +

        L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de présentations s'affiche par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez une présentation. Sous cet onglet il est possible de définir les paramètres généraux de la diapositive, mettre en forme le texte, insérer des objets, les aligner et les organiser.

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Onglet Accueil

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Onglet Accueil

        En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 4504d28e17..45577e05b0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

        Onglet Insertion

        -

        L'onglet Insertion dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'ajouter des objets visuels et des commentaires dans votre présentation.

        +

        L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de présentations permet d'ajouter des objets visuels et des commentaires dans votre présentation.

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Onglet Insertion

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Onglet Insertion

        Sous cet onglet vous pouvez

        @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@

        Onglet Insertion

      6. insérer des équations, symboles,
      7. ajouter des enregistrements audio et vidéo stockés sur votre ordinateur (disponible en version de bureau seulement, n'est pas disponible sur Mac OS),

        - Remarque : Il est nécessaire d'installer un pack de codec permettant de lire les fichiers vidéos, par exemple, K-Lite. + Remarque : Il est nécessaire d'installer un pack de codec permettant de lire les fichiers vidéos, par exemple, K-Lite.

        8. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 0c178b46b5..598ba9ade0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

        Onglet Modules complémentaires

        -

        L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

        +

        L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de présentations permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Onglet Modules complémentaires

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Onglet Modules complémentaires

        Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer toutes les extensions installées et ajouter vos propres modules.

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 984402a48a..3e7d95f0dc 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'Éditeur de Présentations + Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de présentations - + @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@
        -

        Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'Éditeur de Présentations

        -

        Éditeur de Présentations utilise une interface à onglets dans laquelle les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

        +

        Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de présentations

        +

        L'éditeur de présentations utilise une interface à onglets dans laquelle les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

        -

        La fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        La fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne

        -

        La fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        La fenêtre principale de l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau

        L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants :

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm index d8aa5a929c..3f293bca3e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm @@ -12,16 +12,16 @@
        - +

        Onglet Transitions

        -

        L'onglet Transitions de l'Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer les transitions entre les diapositives. Vous pouvez ajouter des effets de transition, définir la durée de la transition et configurer d'autres paramètres des transitions entre les diapositives.

        +

        L'onglet Transitions dans l'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer les transitions entre les diapositives. Vous pouvez ajouter des effets de transition, définir la durée de la transition et configurer d'autres paramètres des transitions entre les diapositives.

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne :

        +

        L'onglet Transitions dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne :

        Onglet Transitions

        -

        Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau :

        +

        L'onglet Transitions dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau :

        Onglet Transitions

        En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index 83f054564a..67b19fc571 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -16,14 +16,14 @@

        Onglet Affichage

        - L'onglet Affichage dans Presentation Editor permet de gérer l'apparence de la présentation pendant que vous travaillez sur celui-ci. + L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de présentations permet de gérer l'apparence de la présentation pendant que vous travaillez sur celui-ci.

        -

        L'onglet dans l'éditeur en ligne Presentation Editor:

        +

        L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de présentations en ligne:

        Onglet Animation

        -

        L'onglet dans l'éditeur de bureau Presentation Editor:

        +

        L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de présentations de bureau:

        Onglet Animation

        Les options d'affichage disponibles sous cet onglet:

        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm index 0e506d00cf..c88b71a01e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

        Ajouter des liens hypertextes

        -

        Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte dans l'Éditeur de Présentations,

        +

        Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte dans l'éditeur de présentations,

        1. placez le curseur dans le bloc de texte à une position où vous voulez ajouter un lien hypertexte,
        2. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
          3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm index 970a636a1b..17f3bbd246 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Aligner et organiser des objets dans une diapositive

          -

          Les formes automatiques, images, graphiques et blocs de texte ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés, triés, répartis horizontalement et verticalement dans une diapositive dans l'Éditeur de Présentations. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, premièrement sélectionnez un objet ou plusieurs objets dans la zone de travail. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel.

          +

          Les formes automatiques, images, graphiques et blocs de texte ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés, triés, répartis horizontalement et verticalement dans une diapositive dans l'éditeur de présentations. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, premièrement sélectionnez un objet ou plusieurs objets dans la zone de travail. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel.

          Aligner des objets

          Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés,

          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm index 508469679f..6f5efb7d1a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

          Appliquer des transitions

          -

          Une transition est un effet d'animation qui apparaît entre deux diapositives quand une diapositive avance vers la suivante pendant la démonstration. Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez appliquer une même transition à toutes les diapositives ou à de différentes transitions à chaque diapositive séparée et régler leurs propriétés.

          +

          Une transition est un effet d'animation qui apparaît entre deux diapositives quand une diapositive avance vers la suivante pendant la démonstration. Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez appliquer une même transition à toutes les diapositives ou à de différentes transitions à chaque diapositive séparée et régler leurs propriétés.

          Pour appliquer une transition à une seule diapositive ou à plusieurs diapositives sélectionnées :

          1. Passez à l'onglet Transitions de la barre d'outils supérieure. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb858096b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + ChatGPT + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            ChatGPT

            +

            Le module complémentaire ChatGPT permet d'utiliser l'agent conversationnel OpenAI pour effectuer les tâches visant à comprendre et à générer le langage naturel ou le code.

            + +

            Installation

            +

            Pour installer le module complémentaire ChatGPT,

            +
              +
            1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
              2. +
            2. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires.
              3. +
            3. Recherchez
              ChatGPT sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous.
              4. +
            4. Cliquez sur
              l'icône ChatGPT sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
              5. +
            5. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire.
              6. +
            + +

            Configuration

            +
              +
            1. Créez sur votre API key sur la page OpenAI API key.
              2. +
            2. Copiez la clé générée API key dans le champ correspondant sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur.
              3. +
            +

            Paramètres de ChatGPT

            + +

            Utilisation

            +
              +
            1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
              2. +
            2. Cliquez sur
              l'icône ChatGPT.
              3. +
            3. Configurez les paramètres disponibles tels que Modèle, Longueur maximale, Température etc.
              4. +
            +

            ONLYOFFICE n'assume aucune responsabilité quant aux réponses du ChatGPT qui peuvent contenir des erreurs, des omissions ou du contenu haineux ou inapproprié. Tout le texte envoyé depuis le module complémentaire est généré par ChatGPT et est fourni tel quel, sans filtrage d'aucune sorte par ONLYOFFICE.

            +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm index 7fc609bc60..ab7cf9cf91 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Communiquer lors de l'édition - + @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
            - +

            Communiquer lors de l'édition

            -

            Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow.

            -
            Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur.
            +

            Dans l'éditeur de présentations ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow.

            +
            Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à l'éditeur de bureau ONLYOFFICE, Ajouter des modiles complémentaires au cloud ONLYOFFICE, ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur.

            Telegram

            Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram,

              diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm index f9c6ca39b4..35c68b1715 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

            Copier/effacer la mise en forme

            -

            Pour copier une certaine mise en forme du texte dans l'Éditeur de Présentations,

            +

            Pour copier une certaine mise en forme du texte dans l'éditeur de présentations,

            1. sélectionnez le fragment du texte contenant la mise en forme à copier en utilisant la souris ou le clavier,
            2. cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style
              dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante
              ),
              3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm index 335107a537..7ecb66e5f4 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

              Copier/coller les données, annuler/rétablir vos actions

              Utiliser les opérations de base du presse-papiers

              -

              Pour couper, copier et coller les objets sélectionnés (diapositives, passages de texte, formes automatiques) dans Éditeur de Présentations ou annuler/rétablir vos actions, utilisez les icônes correspondantes sur la barre d'outils supérieure :

              +

              Pour couper, copier et coller les objets sélectionnés (diapositives, passages de texte, formes automatiques) dans l'éditeur de présentations ou annuler/rétablir vos actions, utilisez les icônes correspondantes sur la barre d'outils supérieure :

              • Couper – sélectionnez un objet et utilisez l'option Couper du menu contextuel pour effacer la sélection et l'envoyer dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées ensuite à un autre endroit de la même présentation
              • Copier – sélectionnez un objet et utilisez l'option Copier dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Copier
                de la barre d'outils supérieure pour copier la sélection dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. L'objet copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans la même présentation.
                • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm index 6de8877660..0dfc4de1b3 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                Créer des listes

                -

                Pour créer une liste dans l'Éditeur de Présentations,

                +

                Pour créer une liste dans l'éditeur de présentations,

                1. placez le curseur dans le bloc de texte à la position où vous voulez commencer la liste (cela peut être une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi),
                2. passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dfcc09b524 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Dessiner à main levée sur une diapositive + + + + + + + + +
                  +
                  + +
                  +

                  Dessiner à main levée sur une diapositive

                  +

                  Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez utiliser l'onglet Dessiner pour dessiner à main levée, ajouter des notes manuscrites, mettre en surbrillance du texte et effacer sur votre présentation.

                  +

                  Options de dessin

                  +

                  Pour dessiner, écrire ou mettre en surbrillance du texte, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur et déplacez le curseur. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement pour personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du trait. Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs lorsque la couleur nécessaire manque à la palette.

                  +

                  Outil Stylo

                  +

                  Lorsque vous avez fini de dessiner, d'écrire ou de surligner, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur encore une fois, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap.

                  +

                  Cliquez sur l'outil Gomme et déplacez le curseur d'avant en arrière pour effacer le trait. La Gomme efface uniquement le trait entier.

                  +

                  Utilisez le bouton Sélectionner pour sélectionner l'inscription, le dessin ou la mise en surbrillance. Une fois sélectionné, il est possible de redimensionner ou supprimer l'élément.

                  +
                  + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm index 7e7e8e7e07..5edab32b9a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Remplir des objets et sélectionner des couleurs - + @@ -15,50 +15,59 @@

                  Remplir des objets et sélectionner des couleurs

                  -

                  Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez appliquer de différents remplissages pour l'arrière-plan de diapositives ainsi que pour les formes automatiques et l'arrière-plan de Text Art.

                  +

                  Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez appliquer de différents remplissages pour l'arrière-plan de diapositives ainsi que pour les formes automatiques et l'arrière-plan de Text Art.

                    -
                  1. Sélectionnez un objet. +
                  2. Sélectionnez un objet
                      -
                    • Pour modifier le remplissage de l'arrière-plan de la diapositive, sélectionnez les diapositives voulues dans la liste des diapositives. L'onglet
                      Paramètres de la diapositive sera activé sur la barre latérale droite.
                      • -
                    • Pour modifier le remplissage de la forme automatique, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris la forme automatique concernée. L'onglet
                      Paramètres de la forme sera activé sur la barre latérale droite.
                      • -
                    • Pour modifier le remplissage de la police Text Art, cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur l'objet texte concerné. L'onglet
                      Paramètres Text Art sera activé sur la barre latérale droite.
                      • +
                    • Pour modifier le remplissage de l'arrière-plan de la diapositive, sélectionnez les diapositives voulues dans la liste des diapositives. L'onglet
                      Paramètres de la diapositive sera activé sur la barre latérale droite.
                      • +
                    • Pour modifier le remplissage de la forme automatique, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris la forme automatique concernée. Paramètres de la forme sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. L'onglet
                      Paramètres de la forme sera activé sur la barre latérale droite.
                      • +
                    • Pour modifier le remplissage de la police Text Art, cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur l'objet texte concerné. L'onglet
                      Paramètres Text Art sera activé sur la barre latérale droite.
                  3. Définissez le type de remplissage nécessaire.
                  4. Réglez les paramètres du remplissage sélectionné (voir la description détaillée de chaque type de remplissage ci-après) -

                    Remarque : Quel que soit le type de remplissage sélectionné, vous pouvez toujours régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.

                    +

                    Quel que soit le type de remplissage sélectionné pour les formes automatiques et la police de Text Art, vous pouvez également définir le niveau d'opacité en faisant glisser le curseur ou saisissez la valeur manuellement. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.

                  -

                  Les types de remplissage disponibles sont les suivants

                  +

                  Les types de remplissage disponibles sont les suivants:

                    -
                  • Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme / diapositive sélectionnée. +
                  • Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme/diapositive.

                    Couleur de remplissage

                    -

                    Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur que vous aimez :

                    +

                    Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur que vous aimez:

                    Palettes

                      -
                    • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la présentation. Une fois que vous avez appliqué un thème ou un jeu de couleurs différent, le jeu de Couleurs du thème change.
                      • +
                    • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette/jeu de couleurs sélectionné dans la présentation. Une fois que vous avez appliqué un thème ou un jeu de couleurs différent, l'ensemble de Couleurs de thème changera.
                    • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut.
                      • -
                    • Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case afin que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : -

                      Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                      -

                      La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à votre objet et ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu.

                      -
                      • +
                    • + Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: +
                        +
                      • + Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans la présentation. +
                        • +
                      • + Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: +

                        Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                        +

                        La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes.

                        +
                        • +
                      +
                    -

                    Remarque : vous pouvez utiliser les mêmes types de couleurs lors de la sélection de la couleur du trait de la forme automatique, ou lors du changement de la couleur de police ou de l'arrière-plan de tableau ou la couleur de bordure.

                    +

                    Vous pouvez utiliser les mêmes types de couleurs lors de la sélection de la couleur du trait de la forme automatique, ou lors du changement de la couleur de l'arrière-plan du tableau ou la couleur de la bordure.

                  • - Dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Cliquez sur l'icône
                    Paramètres de la forme pour ouvrir le menu de Remplissage : + Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour définir deux couleurs et remplir la forme/diapositive avec une transition douce entre elles. Cliquez sur
                    l'icône Paramètres de la forme pour ouvrir le menu de Remplissage:

                    Remplissage en dégradé

                      -
                    • Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle).
                      • -
                    • Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle.
                      • -
                    • Angle - spécifiez l'angle selon lequel les couleurs se fondent.
                      • -
                    • Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt où une couleur se fond dans une autre. +
                    • Style - choisissez une des options disponibles: Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle).
                      • +
                    • Direction la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée s'affiche dans la fenêtre d'aperçu de la direction, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle.
                      • +
                    • Angle - spécifiez l'angle selon lequel les couleurs se fondent.
                      • +
                    • Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt où une couleur se fond dans une autre.
                        -
                      1. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé et le bouton Supprimer le point de dégradé pour le supprimer. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé.
                        2. -
                      2. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis.
                        3. +
                      3. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé et le bouton Supprimer le point de dégradé pour le supprimer. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé.
                        4. +
                      4. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis.
                      5. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée.
                      • @@ -67,28 +76,28 @@

                      Remplir des objets et sélectionner des couleurs

                      -
                    • Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive. +
                    • Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme/diapositive.

                      Picture or Texture Fill

                      • - Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner l'image et ajoutez une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en la sélectionnant sur votre portail. + Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner l'image et ajoutez une image À partir d'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur votre ordinateur ou À partir d'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail.
                        • -
                      • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. -

                        Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                        +
                      • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme/diapositive, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. +

                        Actuellement, les palettes disponibles sont les suivants: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                        -
                      • Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante. +
                      • Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Étirement ou Mosaïque de la liste déroulante.

                        L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la diapositive ou de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                        -

                        L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                        -

                        Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, si nécessaire.

                        +

                        L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                        +

                        Tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, le cas échéant.

                      -
                    • Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. +
                    • Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour choisir un modèle à deux couleurs composé d'éléments répétés.

                      Pattern Fill

                      • Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu.
                        • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm index 3fb07cd90e..e2915bc229 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                        Insérer le code en surbrillance

                        -

                        Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez intégrer votre code mis en surbrillance auquel le style est déjà appliqué à correspondre avec le langage de programmation et le style de coloration dans le programme choisi.

                        +

                        Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez intégrer votre code mis en surbrillance auquel le style est déjà appliqué à correspondre avec le langage de programmation et le style de coloration dans le programme choisi.

                        1. Accédez à votre présentation et placez le curseur à l'endroit où le code doit être inséré.
                        2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                          Code en surbrillance.
                          3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 0d2fc7d612..21d7e6c335 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer et mettre en forme des formes automatiques - + @@ -16,121 +16,149 @@

                          Insérer et mettre en forme des formes automatiques

                          Insérer une forme automatique

                          -

                          Pour ajouter une forme automatique à une diapositive dans l'Éditeur de Présentations,

                          +

                          Pour ajouter une forme automatique à une diapositive dans l'éditeur de présentations,

                            -
                          1. sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une forme automatique dans la liste des diapositives à gauche.
                            2. +
                          2. sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une forme automatique dans la liste des diapositives à gauche,
                          3. - cliquez sur l'icône
                            Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou sur la flèche déroulante de la
                            Galerie de formes dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, + cliquez sur l'icône
                            Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou sur
                            la flèche déroulante de la Galerie de formes dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                            4. -
                          4. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles dans la Galerie des formes : Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
                            5. -
                          5. cliquez sur la forme automatique voulue du groupe sélectionné,
                            6. +
                          6. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles depuis la Galerie de formes: Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
                            7. +
                          7. cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné,
                          8. - dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, -

                            Remarque : vous pouvez cliquer et faire glisser pour étirer la forme.

                            + dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive, placez le curseur de la souris à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer la forme, +

                            Remarque: vous pouvez cliquer et faire glisser pour étirer la forme.

                          9. - après avoir ajouté la forme automatique vous pouvez modifier sa taille, sa position et ses propriétés. -

                            Remarque : pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). + une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier le taille, la position et les paramètres de la forme. Vous pouvez sauvegarder la forme en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. +

                            Remarque: pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée sur la diapositive et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (lorsque vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte se déplace avec la forme).

                          -

                          Il est possible d'ajouter une forme automatique à la disposition d'une diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article.

                          +

                          Il est également possible d'ajouter une forme à une disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article.

                          -

                          Modifier les paramètres de la forme automatique

                          -

                          Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                          +

                          Copier la mise en forme du style de la forme automatique

                          +

                          Pour copier la mise en forme du style d'une forme automatique,

                          +
                            +
                          1. sélectionnez la forme automatique dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme en utilisant la souris ou le clavier,
                            2. +
                          2. cliquez l'icône Copier le style
                            sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci
                            ),
                            3. +
                          3. sélectionnez la forme automatique à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme.
                            4. +
                          + +
                          +

                          Ajuster les paramètres de la forme automatique

                          +

                          Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur la forme automatique et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants:

                          Onglet Paramètres de la forme

                            -
                          • Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : -
                              -
                            • Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à appliquer aux diapositives sélectionnées.
                              • -
                            • Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs et remplir la forme avec une transition douce entre elles.
                              • -
                            • Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme.
                              • -
                            • Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour choisir un modèle à deux couleurs composé d'éléments répétés.
                              • -
                            • Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.
                              • -
                            -

                            Pour en savoir plus consultez le chapitre Remplir les objets et sélectionner les couleurs.

                            -
                            • -
                          • Ligne - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du ligne de la forme automatique. -
                              -
                            • Pour modifier la largeur du contour, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas de contour.
                              • -
                            • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Vous pouvez utiliser la couleur de thème sélectionnée, une couleur standard ou choisir une couleur personnalisée.
                              • -
                            • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                              • -
                            -
                          • - Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : + Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: +
                              +
                            • Couleur de remplissage - sert à spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir la forme sélectionnée.
                              • +
                            • Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs et remplir la forme avec une transition douce entre elles.
                              • +
                            • Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme.
                              • +
                            • Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour choisir un modèle à deux couleurs composé d'éléments répétés.
                              • +
                            • Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.
                              • +
                            +

                            Pour en savoir plus consultez la section Remplir les objets et sélectionner les couleurs .

                            +
                            • +
                          • + Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme.
                              -
                            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • -
                            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • -
                            • pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                              • -
                            • pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
                              • +
                            • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas de contour.
                              • +
                            • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Vous pouvez utiliser la couleur de thème sélectionnée, une couleur standard ou choisir une couleur personnalisée.
                              • +
                            • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                              • +
                            • Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur.
                            • -
                          • Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante.
                            • -
                          • Ajouter une ombre - cochez cette case pour affichage de la forme ombré.
                            • +
                          • + Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: +
                              +
                            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • +
                            • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • +
                            • pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                              • +
                            • pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
                              • +
                            +
                            • +
                          • Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante.
                            • +
                          • Ajouter une ombre sert à afficher une ombre portée à une forme.
                          -

                          Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu contextuel ou cliquez avec le bouton gauche et utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Propriétés de la forme s'ouvre :

                          -

                          Paramètres de la forme - onglet Taille

                          -

                          L'onglet Emplacement vous permet de modifier la Largeur et/ou Hauteur de la forme automatique. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (auquel cas il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps et le ratio d'aspect de la forme automatique originale sera préservé.

                          +

                          Pour modifier les paramètres avancés d'une forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de la forme dans menu contextuel ou cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre paramètres de la forme s'ouvre:

                          +

                          Paramètres de la forme - Onglet Taille

                          +

                          L'onglet Emplacement vous permet de modifier la Largeur et/ou la Hauteur de la forme automatique. Lorsque le bouton Verrouiller les proportions est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps et le ratio d'aspect de la forme automatique originale sera préservé.

                          Vous pouvez également saisir la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre.

                          Forme - Paramètres avancés

                          -

                          L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

                          +

                          L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants:

                            -
                          • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                            • -
                          • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers).
                            • +
                          • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                            • +
                          • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers).
                          -

                          Paramètres de la forme - onglet Poids et flèches

                          -

                          L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants :

                          +

                          Paramètres de la forme - Poids et flèches

                          +

                          L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants:

                            -
                          • Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : -
                              -
                            • Type de lettrine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc. : -
                                -
                              • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                                • -
                              • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                                • -
                              • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                                • -
                              -
                              • -
                            • Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : +
                            • + Style de la ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants:
                                -
                              • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                                • -
                              • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                                • -
                              • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.
                                • +
                              • + Type de bouchon - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin du trait, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: +
                                  +
                                • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                                  • +
                                • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                                  • +
                                • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                                  • +
                                +
                                • +
                              • + Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle: +
                                  +
                                • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                                  • +
                                • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                                  • +
                                • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.
                                  • +
                                +

                                Remarque: l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

                                +
                              -

                              Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

                              -
                              • -
                            • -
                          • Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée des listes déroulantes.
                            • +
                          • Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il est possible de définir le Style de début, le Style final et la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante.
                          -

                          Paramètres de la forme - onglet Marge de texte

                          -

                          L'onglet Zone de texte contient les paramètres suivants : -

                            -
                          • Ajuster automatiquement - pour modifier la façon dont le texte est affiché à l'intérieur de la forme : Ne pas ajuster automatiquement, Rétrécir le texte dans la zone de débordement uniquement, Redimensionner la forme pour ajuster le texte.
                            • -
                          • L'onglet Marges intérieures - afin de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite de la forme automatique (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).
                            • +

                            Paramètres de la forme - Zone de texte

                            +

                            + L'onglet Zone de texte comprend les options suivantes: +

                              +
                            • Ajuster automatiquement - pour modifier la façon dont le texte est affiché à l'intérieur de la forme: +L'onglet Marges intérieures - afin de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite de la forme automatique (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Ne pas ajuster automatiquement, Rétrécir le texte dans la zone de débordement uniquement, Redimensionner la forme pour ajuster le texte.
                              • +
                            • Marges intérieures permet de modifier les marges intérieures de la forme En haut, En bas, À gauche, À droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).

                            -

                            Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

                            -

                            Paramètres de la forme - onglet Colonnes

                            -

                            L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre.

                            -

                            Paramètres de la forme - onglet Texte alternatif

                            -

                            L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau.

                            +

                            Remarque: cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

                            +

                            Paramètres de la forme - L'onglet Colonnes

                            +

                            L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre.

                            +

                            Paramètres de la forme - Onglet Texte de remplacement

                            +

                            L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information inclus dans la forme.

                            -

                            Pour remplacer la forme automatique, cliquez dessus avec le bouton gauche de la souris et utilisez la liste déroulante Modifier la forme automatique dans l'onglet Paramètres de forme de la barre latérale droite.

                            +

                            Pour remplacer la forme automatique, cliquez dessus avec le bouton gauche de la souris et utilisez la liste déroulante Modifier la forme automatique dans l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite.

                            Pour supprimer la forme automatique ajoutée, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer.

                            -

                            Pour apprendre à aligner une forme automatique sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs formes, reportez-vous à la section Aligner et organiser les objets dans une diapositive.

                            +

                            Pour apprendre à aligner une forme automatique sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs images, veuillez consulter la section Aligner et organiser les objets sur une diapositive.

                            Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs

                            -

                            Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour le faire,

                            +

                            Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour ce faire,

                              -
                            1. cliquez sur l'icône
                              Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                              2. +
                            2. cliquez sur l'icône
                              Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                            3. - sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, + sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu,

                              Formes - Lignes

                            4. cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre),
                            5. - passez le curseur de la souris sur la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexions
                              apparaissant sur le contour, + faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexion
                              qui s'affiche sur le contour de la forme,

                            6. @@ -138,7 +166,7 @@

                              Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs

                            -

                            Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles.

                            +

                            Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles.

                            Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion.

                            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index f97af87231..14d0c5ce61 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -3,30 +3,30 @@ Insérer et modifier des graphiques - + -
                            -
                            - -
                            -

                            Insérer et modifier des graphiques

                            +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            Insérer et modifier des graphiques

                            Insérer un graphique

                            -

                            Pour insérer un graphique dans Presentation Editor,

                            +

                            Pour insérer un graphique dans l'éditeur de présentations,

                            1. Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer un graphique,
                            2. Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                              3. -
                            3. Cliquez sur
                              l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                              4. +
                            4. Cliquez sur
                              l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                            5. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié:
                              Graphique à colonnes
                              • Histogramme groupé
                              • Histogramme empilé
                                • -
                              • Histogramme empilé 100%
                                • +
                              • Histogramme empilé 100 %
                              • Histogramme groupé en 3D
                              • Histogramme empilé en 3D
                              • Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D
                                • @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@

                                Insérer un graphique

                                • Aires
                                • Aires empilées
                                  • -
                                • Aires empilées 100%
                                  • +
                                • Aires empilées 100 %
                              Graphiques boursiers
                              Nuage de points (XY)
                                @@ -72,9 +72,15 @@

                                Insérer un graphique

                              • Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs
                              • Disperser avec des lignes droites
                              +
                              Radars +
                                +
                              • Radar
                                • +
                              • Radar avec marqueurs
                                • +
                              • Radar plein
                                • +
                              Graphiques Combo
                                -
                              • Histogramme groupé - lignes
                                • +
                              • Histogramme groupé - Courbe
                              • Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire
                              • Aires empilées - histogramme groupé
                              • Combinaison personnalisée
                                • @@ -98,7 +104,7 @@

                                Insérer un graphique

                                Cliquez sur le bouton Sélection de données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche.
                                1. - Utiliser la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, la Série de la légende, le Nom de l'axe horizontal, et Changer de ligne ou de colonne. + Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, les Entrées de légende (Série), le Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), et Intervertir ligne/colonne.

                                  La fenêtre Données du graphique

                                  • @@ -106,14 +112,14 @@

                                    Insérer un graphique

                                    • Cliquez sur
                                      l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. -

                                      La fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                                      +

                                      Fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                                  • - Série de la légende - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. + Entrées de légende (Série) - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende.
                                      -
                                    • Dans la Série de la légende, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                                      • +
                                    • Dans Entrées de légende (Série), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                                    • Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur
                                      à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom.

                                      La fenêtre Modifier la série

                                      @@ -121,25 +127,25 @@

                                      Insérer un graphique

                                  • - Nom de l'axe horizontal - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe + Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse) - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe.
                                      -
                                    • Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'axe horizontal cliquez sur Modifier.
                                      • +
                                    • Dans Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), cliquez sur Modifier.
                                    • - Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur
                                      l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. + Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur
                                      l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données.

                                      La fenêtre Étiquettes de l'axe

                                    • -
                                  • Changer de ligne ou de colonne - modifier le façon de traçage des données dans la feuille de calcul. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe.
                                    • +
                                  • Intervertir ligne/colonne - réorganiser la configuration de données dans la feuille de calcul selon vos besoins. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe.
                                  2. -
                                2. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre.
                                  3. +
                                3. Cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre.
                              • - Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Nuages de points (XY), Boursier. + Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Boursier, Nuages de points (XY), Radar, Combo.

                                La fenêtre Type de graphique

                                -

                                Lorsque vous choisissez Graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire.

                                +

                                Lorsque vous choisissez graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire.

                                Type de graphique Combo

                              • @@ -148,9 +154,9 @@

                                Insérer un graphique

                                L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique.

                                • - Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: + Définissez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option appropriée dans la liste déroulante:
                                    -
                                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique,
                                    • +
                                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique,
                                  • Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé,
                                  • Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé.
                                  @@ -158,12 +164,12 @@

                                  Insérer un graphique

                                • Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                                    -
                                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher de légende,
                                    • +
                                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher la légende,
                                  • En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé,
                                    • -
                                  • En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé,
                                    • +
                                  • En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé,
                                  • À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé,
                                  • À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                                    • -
                                  • Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                                    • +
                                  • Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                                  • Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé.
                                  • @@ -173,14 +179,14 @@

                                  Insérer un graphique

                                • Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné.
                                    -
                                  • Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                                    • -
                                  • Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Centre, À gauche, À droite, En haut.
                                    • -
                                  • Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                                    • -
                                  • Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, Ligne, Barres et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre.
                                    • +
                                  • Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, En bas à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                                    • +
                                  • Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, À droite, À gauche, En haut, En bas.
                                    • +
                                  • Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                                    • +
                                  • Pour les graphiques En aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, En ligne, En barres, Radar et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre.
                                  • -
                                • Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur,
                                  • -
                                • Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données.
                                  • +
                                • Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de série, Nom de catégorie, Valeur,
                                  • +
                                • Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données.
                              • Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes.
                                • @@ -193,35 +199,37 @@

                                Insérer un graphique

                                L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage.

                                  -
                                • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
                                  • +
                                • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
                                • Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante:
                                    -
                                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical
                                    • +
                                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical,
                                  • Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical,
                                  • Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical.
                                  • -
                                • Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                                  • +
                                • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du quadrillage vertical que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun, Principal, Secondaire ou Principales et secondaires.
                                  • +
                                • Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                                • Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                                  • -
                                • Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical.
                                  • -
                                • Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
                                  • +
                                • Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes sur la Valeur minimale/maximale sur l'axe vertical.
                                  • +
                                • Unités d'affichage - sert à déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
                                • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas.
                                  • +
                                • Échelle logarithmique - sert à activer l'échelle logarithmique pour la Base définie par l'utilisateur.
                                • La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes:
                                    -
                                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires,
                                    • -
                                  • Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe,
                                    • -
                                  • Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe,
                                    • -
                                  • A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                                    • +
                                  • Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires,
                                    • +
                                  • Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe,
                                    • +
                                  • Dans pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe,
                                    • +
                                  • En dehors pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                                • - La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: + La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                                    -
                                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations,
                                    • -
                                  • En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                                    • -
                                  • En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé,
                                    • +
                                  • Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations,
                                    • +
                                  • En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                                    • +
                                  • En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé,
                                  • À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe.
                                  • Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. @@ -249,10 +257,10 @@

                                    Insérer un graphique

                                    Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                                    Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont disponibles sur les graphiques Combo uniquement.

                                    -

                                    Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement.

                                    -

                                    L'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous.

                                    +

                                    Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement.

                                    +

                                    L'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous.

                                    Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                                    -

                                    L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                    +

                                    L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Veuillez noter que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                    • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
                                    • @@ -262,25 +270,25 @@

                                      Insérer un graphique

                                    • Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal.
                                    • -
                                  • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires.
                                    • -
                                  • Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical.
                                    • -
                                  • Position de l'étiquette - est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduation ou Entre graduations.
                                    • +
                                  • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires.
                                    • +
                                  • Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimale/maximale (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe horizontal.
                                    • +
                                  • Position de l'axe - sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduations ou Entre graduations.
                                  • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche.
                                  • - La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations principales sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: + La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants:
                                      -
                                    • Type principal/secondaire est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                                      • -
                                    • Intervalle entre les marques - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes.
                                      • +
                                    • Type principale/secondaire - sert à spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                                      • +
                                    • Intervalle entre les graduations - sert à spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes.
                                  • La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories.
                                      -
                                    • Position de l'étiquette est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe.
                                      • -
                                    • Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande.
                                      • -
                                    • Intervalle entre les étiquettes - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux.
                                      • +
                                    • Position de l'étiquette sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe.
                                      • +
                                    • Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - sert à spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande.
                                      • +
                                    • Intervalle entre les étiquettes - sert à spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux.
                                    • - Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. + Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton Format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée.

                                      Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles:

                                      • Général
                                        • @@ -302,7 +310,7 @@

                                        Insérer un graphique

                                      La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés Alignement dans une cellule

                                      -

                                      L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes:

                                      +

                                      L'onglet Accrochage à la cellule comprend les options suivantes:

                                      • Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi.
                                      • Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé.
                                        • @@ -323,9 +331,9 @@

                                        Insérer un graphique

                                        Modifier les éléments de graphique

                                        Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place.

                                        Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur.

                                        -

                                        Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage, le Trait et le Style d'habillage de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme.

                                        +

                                        Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder à l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et la Ligne de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme.

                                        - Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans le panneau droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, taille et type. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cet page. + Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme sur le panneau de droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, largeur, taille et opacité. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et des traits veuillez accéder à cette page.

                                        Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique.

                                        Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément.

                                        @@ -365,7 +373,7 @@

                                        Ajuster les paramètres du graphique

                                        L'onglet Emplacement permet de modifier les paramètres suivants:

                                        • Taille utilisez cet option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                                          est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ),
                                          la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé.
                                          • -
                                        • Position définissez la position exacte à l'aide des champs Horizontal et Vertical, aussi que le champ De pour accéder aux tels paramètres comme Coin supérieur gauche et Centre.
                                          • +
                                        • Position définissez la position exacte à l'aide des champs Horizontal et Vertical, aussi que le champ De pour accéder aux tels paramètres comme Coin supérieur gauche et Centre.

                                        La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                                        L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique.

                                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm index 8841240240..ceb2f35059 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Insérer des équations

                            -

                            Presentation Editor vous permet de créer des équations à l'aide des modèles intégrés, de les modifier, d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (à savoir des opérateurs mathématiques, des lettres grecques, des accents, etc.).

                            +

                            L'éditeur de présentations vous permet de créer des équations à l'aide des modèles intégrés, de les modifier, d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (à savoir des opérateurs mathématiques, des lettres grecques, des accents, etc.).

                            Ajouter une nouvelle équation

                            Pour insérer une équation depuis la galerie,

                              diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm index 64022254d5..3c48ef505d 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                            Insérer les pieds de page

                            Les pieds de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une diapositive, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de la diapositive ou un texte.

                            -

                            Pour insérer un pied de page dans l'Éditeur de Présentations :

                            +

                            Pour insérer un pied de page dans l'éditeur de présentations :

                            1. Passez à l'onglet Insertion.
                            2. Cliquez sur le bouton
                              Modifier le pied de page dans la barre d'outils supérieure.
                              3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index 1b6355d3cd..84be33a8a6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer et modifier des images - + @@ -16,75 +16,75 @@

                              Insérer et modifier des images

                              Insérer une image

                              -

                              Éditeur de Présentations vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre présentation. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                              -

                              Pour ajouter une image à une diapositive,

                              +

                              L'éditeur de présentations vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre présentation. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                              +

                              Pour ajouter une image à une diapositive,

                              1. sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une image dans la liste des diapositives à gauche,
                              2. cliquez sur l'icône
                                Image dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                              3. sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image :
                                  -
                                • l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir -

                                  Dans l’éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à la fois.

                                  +
                                • l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner un fichier. Recherchez le fichier nécessaire sur votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir +

                                  Dans l'éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionnez plusieurs images à la fois.

                                  • -
                                • l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK
                                  • +
                                • l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre dans laquelle il faut saisir l'adresse Web de l'image, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK
                                • l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK
                                4. -
                              4. après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position.
                                5. +
                              5. une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier la taille, les paramètres et la position de l'image. Vous pouvez sauvegarder l'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel.
                              -

                              On peut ajouter une image dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Image à partir d'un fichier à l'intérieur de l'espace et sélectionner l'image stockée sur votre ordinateur, ou utiliser le bouton Image à partir d'une URL et saisissez l'adresse URL de l'image :

                              -

                              Ajouter une image dans l'espace réservé

                              -

                              On peut aussi ajouter une image à la disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article.

                              +

                              Il est possible d'ajouter une image dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Image à partir d'un fichier à l'intérieur de l'espace et sélectionner l'image stockée sur votre ordinateur, ou utiliser le bouton Image à partir d'une URL et saisissez l'adresse URL de l'image:

                              +

                              Ajouter l'image dans l'espace réservé

                              +

                              Il est également possible d'ajouter une image à une disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article.

                              Ajuster les paramètres de l'image

                              -

                              La barre latérale droite est activée lorsque vous cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur une image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Elle comporte les sections suivantes :

                              - L'onglet Paramètres de l'image -

                              Taille - permet d'afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle ou de restaurer la Taille par défaut de l'image si nécessaire.

                              +

                              La barre latérale droite est activée lorsque vous cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur une image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Elle comporte les sections suivantes:

                              + Onglet Paramètres de l'image +

                              Taille - permet d'afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle ou de restaurer la Taille actuelle de l'image si nécessaire.

                              -

                              Le bouton Rogner sert à recadrer l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez positionner le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage lorsque il se transforme en et faites la glisser.

                              +

                              Le bouton Rogner sert à recadrer l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez placer le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de rognage lorsque il se transforme en icône et faites glisser la zone.

                              • Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté.
                              • Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle.
                              • Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés.
                              • Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle.
                              -

                              Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications.

                              -

                              Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir ou Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix :

                              +

                              Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications.

                              +

                              Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix:

                                -
                              • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme.
                                • -
                              • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées.
                                • -
                              • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent :
                                • +
                              • Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme.
                                • +
                              • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplissage, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées.
                                • +
                              • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée.
                              -

                              Remplacer l'image - est utilisé pour charger une autre image à la place de celle en cours en sélectionnant la source désirée. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : A partir du fichier, Image de stockage ou A partir de l'URL. L'option Remplacer l'image est également disponible dans le menu contextuel.

                              -

                              Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons :

                              +

                              Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre image à partir d'une source préférée. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: À partir d'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou À partir d'une URL. L'option Remplacer l'image est également disponible dans le menu contextuel.

                              +

                              Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons:

                              • pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                              • pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers)
                              -

                              Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type du Ligne la taille et la couleur de la forme ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence.

                              +

                              Une fois l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme deviendra aussi disponible à droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur et l'opacité de la Ligne ainsi que le type de la forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence.

                              Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image.

                              L'onglet Paramètres de la forme

                              -

                              Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre :

                              -

                              Paramètres de l'image

                              -

                              L'onglet Emplacement vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants :

                              +

                              Pour modifier les paramètres avancés d'une image, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de l'image dans menu contextuel ou cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur une image et cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre:

                              +

                              Paramètres de l'image

                              +

                              L'onglet Emplacement permet de modifier les paramètres suivants:

                                -
                              • Taille - utilisez cette options pour modifier la largeur/hauteur de l'image. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                                est activé (Ajouter un ombre)
                                , le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle.
                                • -
                              • Position - saisissez la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement, ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre.
                                • +
                              • Taille utilisez cet option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                                est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci
                                ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle.
                                • +
                              • Position définissez la position exacte à l'aide des champs Horizontalement et Verticalement, aussi que le champ De pour accéder aux tels paramètres comme Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre.
                              -

                              Paramètres de l'image : Rotation

                              -

                              L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

                              +

                              Paramètres de l'image: Rotation

                              +

                              L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants:

                              • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                              • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers).

                              Paramètres de l'image

                              -

                              L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image.

                              +

                              L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information inclus dans limage.

                              Pour supprimer une image insérée, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer.

                              -

                              Pour apprendre à aligner une image sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs images, reportez-vous à la section Aligner et organiser les objets dans une diapositive .

                              +

                              Pour apprendre à aligner une image sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs images, veuillez consulter la section Aligner et organiser les objets sur une diapositive.

                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index 5a26253d77..46639d9564 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Insérer des graphiques SmartArt dans ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor + Insérer des graphiques SmartArt dans l'éditeur de présentations ONLYOFFICE - + @@ -18,12 +18,14 @@

                              Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                              Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers.

                              Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt,

                                -
                              1. passez à l'onglet Insertion,
                                2. +
                              2. passez à l'onglet Insertion,
                              3. cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt,
                              4. placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus.
                              5. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance.
                              +

                              Vous pouvez sauvegarder un graphique SmartArt en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel.

                              Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite:

                              +

                              Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme.

                              • @@ -62,8 +64,7 @@

                                Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                              • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail.
                              • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. -

                                Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: -Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                                +

                                Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                                @@ -88,9 +89,10 @@

                                Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                              • Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt.
                                  -
                                • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                                  • +
                                • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                                • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                                • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                                  • +
                                • Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur.
                              • Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt.
                                • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm index 948cfda873..7f9fdf0c31 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                Insérer des symboles et des caractères

                                -

                                Pendant le processus de travail dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous devrez peut-être insérer un symbole qui n'est pas sur votre clavier. Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre présentation, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples :

                                +

                                Pendant le processus de travail dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous devrez peut-être insérer un symbole qui n'est pas sur votre clavier. Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre présentation, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples :

                                • placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un symbole spécifique,
                                • passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm index ddcce02c62..ff28108adf 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                  Insérer et mettre en forme des tableaux

                                  Insérer un tableau

                                  -

                                  Pour insérer un tableau sur une diapositive dans l'Éditeur de Présentations,

                                  +

                                  Pour insérer un tableau sur une diapositive dans l'éditeur de présentations,

                                  1. sélectionnez la diapositive où le tableau sera ajouté,
                                  2. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                    3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm index 41897f7055..9fe31be6a5 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Insérer et mettre en forme du texte + Insérer et mettre en forme votre texte - + @@ -14,15 +14,15 @@
                                    -

                                    Insérer et mettre en forme du texte

                                    -

                                    Insérer une zone de texte dans votre présentation

                                    -

                                    Dans Presentation Editor, vous pouvez ajouter un nouveau texte de trois manières différentes:

                                    +

                                    Insérer et mettre en forme votre texte

                                    +

                                    Insérer une zone de texte dans une présentation

                                    +

                                    L'éditeur de présentations vous offre trois façons d'ajouter du texte:

                                    • Ajoutez un passage de texte dans l'espace réservé de texte correspondant inclus dans la présentation de diapositive. Pour ce faire, placez simplement le curseur dans l'espace réservé et tapez votre texte ou collez-le en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+V à la place du texte par défaut correspondant.
                                    • Ajoutez un passage de texte n'importe où sur une diapositive. Vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Selon le type d'objet textuel voulu, vous pouvez effectuer les opérations suivantes:
                                      • - pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur
                                        l'icône Zone de texte sous l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes: Insérer une zone de texte horizontale ou Insérer une zone de texte verticale, ensuite cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. + pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur
                                        l'icône Zone de texte sous l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes: Insérer une zone de texte horizontale ou Insérer une zone de texte verticale, ensuite cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte.

                                        Il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme du groupe Formes de base.

                                      • pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur
                                        l'icône Text Art sous l'onglet Insertion dans la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la diapositive. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte.
                                        • @@ -33,6 +33,7 @@

                                        Insérer une zone de texte dans votre présentation

                                        Cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir à la diapositive.

                                        Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi).

                                        Comme un objet texte inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte.

                                        +

                                        Vous pouvez sauvegarder une zone de texte en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel.

                                        Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé.

                                        Mettre en forme une zone de texte

                                        Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées).

                                        @@ -40,31 +41,31 @@

                                        Mettre en forme une zone de texte

                                        • Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme.
                                        • pour modifier le remplissage, le contour ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme
                                          dans la barre latérale sur la droite et utilisez les options correspondantes.
                                          • -
                                        • pour aligner une zone de texte sur la diapositive, la faire pivoter ou la retourner, organiser des zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utilisez les options de menu contextuel.
                                          • -
                                        • pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône appropriée
                                          de la barre de mise en forme du texte et choisissez l'option appropriée, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez sur Paramètres avancés de forme et passez à l'onglet Colonnes dans la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés.
                                          • +
                                        • pour aligner une zone de texte sur la diapositive, la faire pivoter ou la retourner, organiser des zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utilisez les options de menu contextuel.
                                          • +
                                        • pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône appropriée
                                          de la barre de mise en forme du texte et choisissez l'option appropriée, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez sur Paramètres avancés de la forme et passez sous l'onglet Colonnes dans la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés.

                                        Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte

                                        Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées.

                                        Texte sélectionné

                                        Remarque: il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée.

                                        Aligner le texte dans la zone de texte

                                        -

                                        Le texte peut être aligné horizontalement de quatre façons : aligné à gauche, centré, aligné à droite et justifié. Pour ce faire:

                                        +

                                        Le texte peut être aligné horizontalement de quatre façons: aligné à gauche, centré, aligné à droite et justifié. Pour ce faire:

                                          -
                                        1. placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi),
                                          2. +
                                        2. placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi),
                                        3. faites dérouler la liste Alignement horizontal
                                          sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        4. sélectionnez le type d'alignement que vous allez appliquer:
                                          • l'option Aligner le texte à gauche
                                            permet d'aligner votre texte sur le côté gauche de la zone de texte (le côté droit reste non aligné).
                                            • -
                                          • l'option Aligner le texte au centre
                                            permet d'aligner votre texte au centre de la zone de texte (les côtés droit et gauche ne sont pas alignés).
                                            • +
                                          • l'option Aligner le texte au centre
                                            permet d'aligner votre texte au centre de la zone de texte (les côtés droit et gauche ne sont pas alignés).
                                          • l'option Aligner le texte à droite
                                            permet d'aligner votre texte sur le côté droit de la zone de texte (le côté gauche reste non aligné).
                                          • l'option Justifier
                                            permet d'aligner votre texte par les côtés gauche et droit de la zone de texte (l'espacement supplémentaire est ajouté si nécessaire pour garder l'alignement).

                                        Remarque: on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés .

                                        -

                                        Le texte peut être aligné verticalement de trois façons: haut, milieu ou bas. Pour ce faire:

                                        +

                                        Le texte est aligné verticalement de trois façons: en haut, au milieu ou en bas. Pour ce faire:

                                          -
                                        1. placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi),
                                          2. +
                                        2. placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi),
                                        3. faites dérouler la liste Alignement vertical
                                          sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        4. sélectionnez le type d'alignement que vous allez appliquer:
                                            @@ -76,11 +77,11 @@

                                            Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte

                                        Changer la direction du texte

                                        -

                                        Pour Faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut).

                                        +

                                        Pour Faire pivoter du texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut).

                                        Ajuster le type de police, la taille, la couleur et appliquer les styles de décoration

                                        Vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police et appliquer l'un des styles de décoration en utilisant les icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                                        -

                                        Remarque: si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavieret appliquez la mise en forme. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme.

                                        +

                                        Remarque: si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme.

                                        @@ -105,7 +106,7 @@

                                        Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte

                                        - + @@ -175,7 +176,7 @@

                                        Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe< Paramètres du paragraphe - Retraits et espacement

                                        L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de:

                                          -
                                        • modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe,
                                          • +
                                        • modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe,
                                        • modifier les retraits du paragraphe par rapport aux marges internes de la zone de texte,
                                          • A gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée,
                                            • @@ -212,19 +213,19 @@

                                            Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe<

                                            L'onglet Tabulation vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation c'est-à-dire l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier.

                                            • La Tabulation par défaut est 2.54 cm. Vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer cette valeur en utilisant les boutons à flèche ou en saisissant la valeur nécessaire dans la zone.
                                              • -
                                            • Position sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons à flèche et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisée sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ au-dessous.
                                              • -
                                            • Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option De gauche, De centre ou De droite dans la liste déroulante Alignement et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. +
                                            • Position du taquet de tabulation sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons flechés et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisé sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ en dessous.
                                              • +
                                            • Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option À gauche, Au centre ou À droite dans la liste déroulante Alignement et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier.
                                                -
                                              • De gauche sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le
                                                marqueur.
                                                • -
                                              • Du centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le
                                                marqueur.
                                                • -
                                              • De droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le
                                                marqueur.
                                                • +
                                              • À gauche sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le
                                                marqueur.
                                                • +
                                              • Au centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le
                                                marqueur.
                                                • +
                                              • À droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le
                                                marqueur.

                                              Pour supprimer un taquet de tabulation de la liste sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou utilisez le bouton Supprimer tout pour vider la liste.

                                            Pour définir les taquets de tabulation vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale:

                                              -
                                            1. Cliquez sur le bouton de sélection de tabulation
                                              dans le coin supérieur gauche de la zone de travail pour choisir le type d'arrêt de tabulation requis: À gauche,
                                              Au centre,
                                              À droite
                                              .
                                              2. +
                                            2. Cliquez sur le bouton de sélection de tabulation
                                              dans le coin supérieur gauche de la zone de travail pour choisir le type d'arrêt de tabulation requis: À gauche
                                              , Au centre
                                              , À droite
                                              .
                                            3. Cliquez sur le bord inférieur de la règle là où vous voulez positionner le taquet de tabulation. Faites-le glisser tout au long de la règle pour changer son emplacement. Pour supprimer le taquet de tabulation ajouté faites-le glisser en dehors de la règle.

                                              Remarque: si vous ne voyez pas les règles, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et décochez l'option Masquer les règles pour les afficher.

                                              @@ -234,9 +235,9 @@

                                              Modifier un style Text Art

                                              Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale sur la droite.

                                              Onglet Paramètres de Text Art

                                                -
                                              • Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police différent, une autre taille, etc.
                                                • +
                                              • Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un autre type de police, une autre taille, etc.
                                              • Changez le remplissage et le contourde police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques.
                                                • -
                                              • Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose.
                                                • +
                                              • Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le niveau de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose.

                                              Transformation de Text Art

                                              diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm index 8a30e1e1a2..1f35c51ce6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                              Gérer des diapositives

                                              -

                                              Par défaut, une nouvelle présentation inclut une diapositive de titre vide. Dans Presentation Editor, vous pouvez créer de nouvelles diapositives, copier une diapositive et la coller dans l'endroit nécessaire dans la liste des diapositives, dupliquer des diapositives, déplacer les diapositives pour modifier l'ordre d'apparition, supprimer des diapositives inutiles et masquer certaines diapositives.

                                              +

                                              Par défaut, une nouvelle présentation inclut une diapositive de titre vide. Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez créer de nouvelles diapositives, copier une diapositive et la coller dans l'endroit nécessaire dans la liste des diapositives, dupliquer des diapositives, déplacer les diapositives pour modifier l'ordre d'apparition, supprimer des diapositives inutiles et masquer certaines diapositives.

                                              Pour créer une nouvelle diapositive de titre ou une diapositive pour votre table des matières:

                                              • cliquez sur
                                                l'icône Ajouter diapositive sous l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                                                • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm index b473fd8f0a..0bd6f33667 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                                Manipuler des objets

                                                -

                                                Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter différents objets manuellement sur une diapositive à l'aide des poignées spéciales. Vous pouvez également spécifier les dimensions et la position de certains objets à l'aide de la barre latérale droite ou de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés.

                                                +

                                                Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter différents objets manuellement sur une diapositive à l'aide des poignées spéciales. Vous pouvez également spécifier les dimensions et la position de certains objets à l'aide de la barre latérale droite ou de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés.

                                                Remarque : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici.

                                                diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index 98b5748435..bc80e5e9e0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Fonctionnalités de correction automatique - + @@ -15,14 +15,14 @@

                                                Fonctionnalités de correction automatique

                                                -

                                                Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique ONLYOFFICE dans l'Éditeur de Présentations fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus.

                                                -

                                                Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique.

                                                -

                                                La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets : AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues, Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et Correction automatique de texte.

                                                +

                                                Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique de l'éditeur de présentations ONLYOFFICE servent à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus.

                                                +

                                                Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique.

                                                +

                                                La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets: AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et Correction automatique de texte.

                                                AutoMaths

                                                -

                                                Lorsque vous travaillez dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en les tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque.

                                                +

                                                Lorsque vous travailler dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque.

                                                Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé.

                                                -

                                                Remarque : Les codes sont sensibles à la casse.

                                                -

                                                Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique --> AutoMaths.

                                                +

                                                Les codes sont sensibles à la casse

                                                +

                                                Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths.

                                                Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques.

                                                  @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@

                                                  AutoMaths

                                                  • Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier.
                                                    • -
                                                  • Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones : le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par.
                                                    • +
                                                  • Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones: le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par.
                                                  • Cliquez sur Remplacer.

                                                  @@ -50,9 +50,8 @@

                                                  AutoMaths

                                                  Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine.

                                                  Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe.

                                                  Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe

                                                  -

                                                  Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous le codes disponibles dans l'Éditeur de Présentations à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier dans les Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification

                                                  -
                                                  - Les codes disponibles +

                                                  Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous les codes prises en charge par l'éditeur de presentations à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier dans les Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification

                                                  +
                                                  Les codes disponibles

                                        Police
                                        Modifier la casse
                                        		Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte.Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres. Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte.
                                        Couleur de surlignage
                                        @@ -61,722 +60,722 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -786,7 +785,7 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + @@ -796,297 +795,297 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1096,47 +1095,47 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1146,112 +1145,112 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1261,187 +1260,187 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1451,42 +1450,42 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -1496,772 +1495,772 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -2276,172 +2275,172 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -2451,37 +2450,37 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + @@ -2496,62 +2495,65 @@

                                        AutoMaths

                                        - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
                                        Code
                                        !!
                                        		 Symboles
                                        ...
                                        		 Dots
                                        ::
                                        		 Opérateurs
                                        :=
                                        		 Opérateurs
                                        /<
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        />
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        /=
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \above
                                        		 Indices et exposants
                                        \acute
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \aleph
                                        		 Lettres hébraïques
                                        \alpha
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Alpha
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \amalg
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \angle
                                        		 Notation de géométrie
                                        \aoint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \approx
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \asmash
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \ast
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \asymp
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \atop
                                        		 Opérateurs
                                        \bar
                                        		 Trait suscrit/souscrit
                                        \Bar
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \because
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \begin
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \below
                                        		 Indices et exposants
                                        \bet
                                        		 Lettres hébraïques
                                        \beta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Beta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \beth
                                        		 Lettres hébraïques
                                        \bigcap
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigcup
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigodot
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigoplus
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigotimes
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigsqcup
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \biguplus
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigvee
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \bigwedge
                                        		 Grands opérateurs
                                        \binomial
                                        		 Équations
                                        \bot
                                        		 Notations logiques
                                        \bowtie
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \box
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \boxdot
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \boxminus
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \boxplus
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \bra
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \break
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \breve
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \bullet
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \cap
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \cbrt
                                        		 Racine carrée et radicaux
                                        \cases
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \cdot
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \cdots
                                        		 Dots
                                        \check
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \chi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Chi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \circ
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \close
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \clubsuit
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \coint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \cong
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \coprod
                                        		 Opérateurs mathématiques
                                        \cup
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \dalet
                                        		 Lettres hébraïques
                                        \daleth
                                        		 Lettres hébraïques
                                        \dashv
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \dd
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \Dd
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \ddddot
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \dddot
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \ddot
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \ddots
                                        		 Dots
                                        \defeq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \degc
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \degf
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \degree
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \delta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Delta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Deltaeq
                                        		 Opérateurs
                                        \diamond
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \diamondsuit
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \div
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \dot
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \doteq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \dots
                                        		 Dots
                                        \doublea
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleA
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleb
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleB
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublec
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleC
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubled
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleD
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublee
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleE
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublef
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleF
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleg
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleG
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleh
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleH
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublei
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleI
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublej
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleJ
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublek
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleK
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublel
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleL
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublem
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleM
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublen
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleN
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleo
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleO
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublep
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleP
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleq
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleQ
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubler
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleR
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubles
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleS
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublet
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleT
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleu
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleU
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublev
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleV
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublew
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleW
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublex
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleX
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubley
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleY
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doublez
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \doubleZ
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \downarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Downarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \dsmash
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \ee
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \ell
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \emptyset
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \end
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \epsilon
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Epsilon
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \eqarray
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \equiv
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \eta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Eta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \exists
                                        		 Notations logiques
                                        \forall
                                        		 Notations logiques
                                        \fraktura
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturA
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturb
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturB
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturc
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturC
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturd
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturD
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakture
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturE
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturf
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturF
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturg
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturG
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturh
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturH
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturi
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturI
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturk
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturK
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturl
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturL
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturm
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturM
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturn
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturN
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturo
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturO
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturp
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturP
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturq
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturQ
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturr
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturR
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturs
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturS
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturt
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturT
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturu
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturU
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturv
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturV
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturw
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturW
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturx
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturX
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \fraktury
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturY
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturz
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frakturZ
                                        		 Fraktur
                                        \frown
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \G
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \gamma
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Gamma
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \ge
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \geq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \gets
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \gg
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \gimel
                                        		 Lettres hébraïques
                                        \grave
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \hat
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \hbar
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \heartsuit
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \hookleftarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \hookrightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \hphantom
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \hsmash
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \hvec
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \identitymatrix
                                        		 Matrices
                                        \ii
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \iiint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \iint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \iiiint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \Im
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \imath
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \in
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \inc
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \infty
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \int
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \integral
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \iota
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Iota
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \j
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \jj
                                        		 Lettres avec double barres
                                        \jmath
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \kappa
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Kappa
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \ket
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \lambda
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Lambda
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \langle
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \lbbrack
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \lbrace
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \lbrack
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \lceil
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \ldiv
                                        		 Barres obliques
                                        \ldivide
                                        		 Barres obliques
                                        \ldots
                                        		 Dots
                                        \le
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \left
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \leftarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Leftarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \leftharpoondown
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \leftharpoonup
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \leftrightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Leftrightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \leq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \lfloor
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \lhvec
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \limit
                                        		 Limites
                                        \ll
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \lmoust
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \Longleftarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Longleftrightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Longrightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \lrhar
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \lvec
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \mapsto
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \matrix
                                        		 Matrices
                                        \mid
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \middle
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \models
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \mp
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \mu
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Mu
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \nabla
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \naryand
                                        		 Opérateurs
                                        \ne
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \nearrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \neq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \ni
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \norm
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \notcontain
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \notelement
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \notin
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \nu
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Nu
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \nwarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \o
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \O
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \odot
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \of
                                        		 Opérateurs
                                        \oiiint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \oiint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \oint
                                        		 Intégrales
                                        \omega
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Omega
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \ominus
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \open
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \oplus
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \otimes
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \over
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \overbar
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \overbrace
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \overbracket
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \overline
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \overparen
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \overshell
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \parallel
                                        		 Notation de géométrie
                                        \partial
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \pmatrix
                                        		 Matrices
                                        \perp
                                        		 Notation de géométrie
                                        \phantom
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \phi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Phi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \pi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Pi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \pm
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \pppprime
                                        		 Nombres premiers
                                        \ppprime
                                        		 Nombres premiers
                                        \pprime
                                        		 Nombres premiers
                                        \prec
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \preceq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \prime
                                        		 Nombres premiers
                                        \prod
                                        		 Opérateurs mathématiques
                                        \propto
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \psi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Psi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \qdrt
                                        		 Racine carrée et radicaux
                                        \quadratic
                                        		 Racine carrée et radicaux
                                        \rangle
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \Rangle
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \ratio
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \rbrace
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \rbrack
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \Rbrack
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \rceil
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \rddots
                                        		 Dots
                                        \Re
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \rect
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \rfloor
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \rho
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Rho
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \rhvec
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \right
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \rightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Rightarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \rightharpoondown
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \rightharpoonup
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \rmoust
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \root
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \scripta
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptA
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptb
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptB
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptc
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptC
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptd
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptD
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scripte
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptE
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptf
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptF
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptg
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptG
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scripth
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptH
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scripti
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptI
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptk
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptK
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptl
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptL
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptm
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptM
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptn
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptN
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scripto
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptO
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptp
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptP
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptq
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptQ
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptr
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptR
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scripts
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptS
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptt
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptT
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptu
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptU
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptv
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptV
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptw
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptW
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptx
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptX
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scripty
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptY
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptz
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \scriptZ
                                        		 Scripts
                                        \sdiv
                                        		 Barres obliques
                                        \sdivide
                                        		 Barres obliques
                                        \searrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \setminus
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \sigma
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Sigma
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \sim
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \simeq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \smash
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \smile
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \spadesuit
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \sqcap
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \sqcup
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \sqrt
                                        		 Racine carrée et radicaux
                                        \sqsubseteq
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \sqsuperseteq
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \star
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \subset
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \subseteq
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \succ
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \succeq
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \sum
                                        		 Opérateurs mathématiques
                                        \superset
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \superseteq
                                        		 Ensemble de notations
                                        \swarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \tau
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Tau
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \therefore
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \theta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Theta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \tilde
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \times
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \to
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \top
                                        		 Notations logiques
                                        \tvec
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \ubar
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \Ubar
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \underbar
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \underbrace
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \underbracket
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \underline
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \underparen
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \uparrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Uparrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \updownarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \Updownarrow
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \uplus
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \upsilon
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Upsilon
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \varepsilon
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \varphi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \varpi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \varrho
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \varsigma
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \vartheta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \vbar
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \vdash
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        \vdots
                                        		 Dots
                                        \vec
                                        		 Accentuation
                                        \vee
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \vert
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \Vert
                                        		 Séparateurs
                                        \Vmatrix
                                        		 Matrices
                                        \vphantom
                                        		 Flèches
                                        \wedge
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \wp
                                        		 Symboles
                                        \wr
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        \xi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Xi
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \zeta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        \Zeta
                                        		 Lettres grecques
                                        ~=
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        -+
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        +-
                                        		 Opérateurs binaires
                                        <<
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        <=
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        ->
                                        		 Flèches
                                        >=
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        >>
                                        		 Opérateurs relationnels
                                        - -
                                        +

                                        Fonctions reconnues

                                        -

                                        Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnaît comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Pour accéder à la liste de fonctions reconnues, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification-> Options de correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues.

                                        +

                                        Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues.

                                        Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter.

                                        Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer.

                                        Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer.

                                        Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies.

                                        Fonctions reconnues

                                        Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe

                                        -

                                        Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, comme par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des adresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste.

                                        -

                                        L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon le cas. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS.

                                        -

                                        Si vous souhaitez désactiver une des options de mise en forme automatique, désactivez la case à coche de l'élément pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas de mise en forme automatique sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe

                                        +

                                        Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des adresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste.

                                        +

                                        L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon vos besoins. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS.

                                        +

                                        Si vous souhaitez désactiver les options de mise en forme automatique, passez sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe.

                                        Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe

                                        Correction automatique de texte

                                        -

                                        Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des phrases. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase.

                                        -

                                        AutoCorrect

                                        +

                                        Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des propositions. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase.

                                        +

                                        Par défaut, l'éditeur met la première lettre du mot dans une cellule en majuscule. Pour désactiver cette option, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Mettre la première lettre des cellules du tableau en majuscule.

                                        +

                                        Vous pouvez également personnaliser la mise en majuscule après certains mots en saisissant les mots requis dans le champ Ne pas mettre en majuscule après et en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter, ou en choisissant les mots requis dans la liste correspondante ci-dessous.

                                        +

                                        Vous pouvez choisir le mode de fonctionnement des exceptions en fonction de la langue dans la liste déroulante Exceptions pour la langue.

                                        +

                                        Utilisez le bouton Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour annuler toutes les modifications personnalisées.

                                        +

                                        Corrections automatiques

                                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm index ea04b397a3..3351b85f4e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
                                        - +

                                        Créer une animation de trajectoire de mouvement

                                        Trajectoires du mouvement font partie de la galerie d'effets d'animation et déterminent le mouvement d'un objet et la trajectoire qu'il suit. Les icônes de la galerie représentent la trajectoire suggérée. La galerie d'animations est disponible dans l'onglet Animation dans la barre d'outils supérieure.

                                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 391f2ca2d2..9ed7cf820c 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                        Créer une nouvelle présentation ou ouvrir une présentation existante

                                        -

                                        Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez ouvrir une présentation existante, créer une nouvelle présentation ou revenir à la liste de présentations existantes.

                                        +

                                        Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez ouvrir une présentation existante, créer une nouvelle présentation ou revenir à la liste de présentations existantes.

                                        Pour créer une nouvelle présentation

                                        Dans la version en ligne

                                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm index 511c7622c4..bd0603d3a4 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                        Modification d'une image

                                        -

                                        Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations.

                                        +

                                        L'éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations.

                                        1. Sélectionnez une image incorporée dans votre présentation.
                                        2. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PreviewPresentation.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PreviewPresentation.htm index 4a73d23d15..5d41ffaf57 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PreviewPresentation.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PreviewPresentation.htm @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@

                                          Aperçu de la présentation

                                          Démarrer l'aperçu

                                          Remarque : Lors du téléchargement d'une présentation crée à l'aide des outils de présentation alternatifs, il est possible de lancer un aperçu des effets d'animation éventuels.

                                          -

                                          Pour afficher un aperçu de la présentation en cours de l'édition dans l'Éditeur de Présentations :

                                          +

                                          Pour afficher un aperçu de la présentation en cours de l'édition dans l'éditeur de présentations :

                                          • cliquez sur l'icône Démarrer le diaporama
                                            dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou sur le côté gauche de la barre d'état, ou
                                          • sélectionnez une diapositive dans la liste à gauche, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez l'option Démarrer le diaporama dans le menu contextuel.
                                            • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index df4ead703d..661456c89b 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur + Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre présentation - + @@ -11,56 +11,74 @@
                                            -
                                            - -
                                            -

                                            Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre présentation

                                            +
                                            + +
                                            +

                                            Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur

                                            Enregistrement

                                            -

                                            Par défaut, l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                                            +

                                            Par défaut, l'éditeur de présentations en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés .

                                            Pour enregistrer manuellement votre présentation actuelle dans le format et l'emplacement actuels,

                                              -
                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer
                                              dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                                              • +
                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer
                                              dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                                            • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou
                                            • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer.
                                            -

                                            Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                                            +

                                            Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés .

                                            Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer la présentation sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format,

                                            1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                              2. -
                                            2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous...,
                                              3. -
                                            3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de présentation (POTX or OTP).
                                              4. +
                                            4. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous,
                                              5. +
                                            5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de présentation (POTX or OTP).

                                            Téléchargement en cours

                                            -

                                            Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la présentation résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                                            +

                                            Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la présentation résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                                            1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                              2. -
                                            2. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme...,
                                              3. -
                                            3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG.
                                              4. +
                                            4. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme,
                                              5. +
                                            5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG.

                                            Enregistrer une copie

                                            Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail,

                                            1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                              2. -
                                            2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous...,
                                              3. -
                                            3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG.
                                              4. +
                                            4. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer une copie sous,
                                              5. +
                                            5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG.
                                            6. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer.

                                            Impression

                                            Pour imprimer la présentation active,

                                              -
                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer
                                              dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                                              • +
                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer
                                              dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                                            • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou
                                            • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer.
                                            Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance.
                                            +

                                            La fenêtre Paramètres d'impression

                                            +

                                            Configurez les paramètres suivants dans la fenêtre Imprimer qui s'affiche:

                                            +
                                              +
                                            • Destination - sélectionnez la destination du fichier à imprimer, par ex. Enregistrer au format PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc.
                                              • +
                                            • Orientation - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale.
                                              • +
                                            • Pages - sélectionnez l'une des options d'impression: Tous, Actuelle, Pages impaires uniquement, Pages paires uniquement ou Personnalisé. Dans ce dernier cas, il faut saisir les numéros de pages manuellement.
                                              • +
                                            • + Mode couleur - sélectionnez si vous souhaitez imprimer le fichier Couleur ou Noir et blanc. Veuillez noter que cette option n'est disponible que si Microsoft XPS Document Writer est défini comme le paramètre de Destination. Lorsque Fax est défini comme le paramètre de Destination, la couleur par défaut est noir et blanc. +

                                              Cliquez sur Plus de paramètres pour accéder aux paramètres avancés,

                                              +
                                              • +
                                            • Taille du papier - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante ou définissez la taille de l'utilisateur.
                                              • +
                                            • Mise à l'échelle - définir la mise à l'échelle du fichier lors de l'impression, ajuster à la largeur de page ou sélectionnez la mise à l'échelle personnalisée en utilisant la case à cocher Échelle et le champ de saisie approprié.
                                              • +
                                            • Pages par feuille - définir le nombre de pages que vous voulez sur une page imprimée, par ex. deux, six, neuf etc.;
                                              • +
                                            • Marges - définir les marges de la page. Vous pouvez choisir les marges par défaut ou personnaliser les marges en pouces. Pour les marges personnalisées, définissez manuellement les valeurs pour la marge supérieure, inférieure, gauche et droite. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Aucun pour ne pas avoir de marges.
                                              • +
                                            • Options - cochez la case pour Imprimer les en-têtes et les pieds de page ou décochez cette option pour imprimer sans aucun en-tête et les pied de page.
                                              • +
                                            • Imprimer via la boîte de dialogue du système - cliquez sur cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue du système et configurer l'impression.
                                              • +
                                            + Dans la version de bureau, les paramètres d'impression disponibles sont Zone d'impression, le nombre deDiapositives, Copies, Impression sur les deux côtés, Format de papier. Vous pouvez également imprimer au format PDF ou utilisez le bouton Impression rapide de la barre d'outils supérieure pour imprimer le fichier sur la dernière imprimante sélectionnée ou sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par défaut.

                                            Il est aussi possible d'imprimer les diapositives sélectionnés en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur les diapositives sélectionnées et choisissez Imprimer la sélection).

                                            -

                                            Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF est généré depuis votre présentation. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                                            +

                                            Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF est généré depuis votre présentation. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm index 63ae6ff8e7..531acbfff0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                            Définir les paramètres de la diapositive

                                            -

                                            Pour personnaliser votre présentation dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez sélectionner le thème, les jeux de couleurs, la taille et l'orientation de la diapositive pour toute la présentation, changer le remplissage de l'arrière-plan ou la mise en page pour chaque diapositive séparée aussi bien qu'appliquer des transitions entre les diapositives. Il est également possible d'ajouter des notes explicatives à chaque diapositive qui peuvent être utiles lorsque la présentation est en mode Présentateur.

                                            +

                                            Pour personnaliser votre présentation dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez sélectionner le thème, les jeux de couleurs, la taille et l'orientation de la diapositive pour toute la présentation, changer le remplissage de l'arrière-plan ou la mise en page pour chaque diapositive séparée aussi bien qu'appliquer des transitions entre les diapositives. Il est également possible d'ajouter des notes explicatives à chaque diapositive qui peuvent être utiles lorsque la présentation est en mode Présentateur.

                                            • Les Thèmes vous permettent de changer rapidement la conception de présentation, notamment l'apparence d'arrière-plan de diapositives, les polices prédéfinies pour les titres et les textes, la palette de couleurs qui est utilisée pour les éléments de présentation. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index ab62c25106..cf74a37f00 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                              Remplacer un mot par synonyme

                                              - Si on répète plusieurs fois le même mot ou il ne semble pas que le mot est juste, l'Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE vous permet de trouver les synonymes. + Si on répète plusieurs fois le même mot ou il ne semble pas que le mot est juste, l'éditeur de présentations ONLYOFFICE vous permet de trouver les synonymes. Retrouvez les antonymes du mot affiché aussi.

                                                diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index bffb5c2f8e..54c6c9a591 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                                Traduire un texte

                                                -

                                                Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez traduire votre présentation dans de nombreuses langues disponibles.

                                                +

                                                Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez traduire votre présentation dans de nombreuses langues disponibles.

                                                1. Sélectionnez le texte à traduire.
                                                2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                                  Traducteur, l'application de traduction fait son apparition dans le panneau de gauche.
                                                  3. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm index 9ace7f2c38..4fe0d66f5c 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                                  Afficher les informations sur la présentation

                                                  -

                                                  Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur la présentation actuellement modifiée dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Descriptif.

                                                  +

                                                  Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur la présentation actuellement modifiée dans l'éditeur de présentations, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Descriptif.

                                                  Informations générales

                                                  L'information sur la présentation comprend le titre de la présentation et l'application avec laquelle la présentation a été créée. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés.

                                                    diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm index d8496f32cc..9dba3bb3fa 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                                    Insérer une vidéo

                                                    -

                                                    Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre présentation. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici.

                                                    +

                                                    Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre présentation. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici.

                                                    1. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer
                                                      diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7f5db06ee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + Zoom + + + + + + + + +
                                                      +
                                                      + +
                                                      +

                                                      Zoom

                                                      +

                                                      Le module complémentaire Zoom permet créer et programmer des réunions de Zoom directement dans l'éditeur en quelques clics.

                                                      +

                                                      Le module complémentaire est compatible avec la version auto-hébergée des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE et c'est possible de l'ajouter manuellement aux instances ONLYOFFICE.

                                                      + +

                                                      Installation

                                                      +

                                                      Pour installer le module complémentaire Zoom,

                                                      +
                                                        +
                                                      1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                                        2. +
                                                      2. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de plugins.
                                                        3. +
                                                      3. Recherchez
                                                        Zoom sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous.
                                                        4. +
                                                      4. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom
                                                        sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                                        5. +
                                                      5. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire.
                                                        6. +
                                                      +

                                                      Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter la documentation API ONLYOFFICE.

                                                      + +

                                                      Configuration

                                                      +
                                                        +
                                                      1. + Enregistrez l'éditeur en tant que l'application JWT sur la page Zoom Developer pour utiliser la programmation des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Le jeton JWT sera assigné à l'application. +

                                                        Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom .

                                                        +
                                                        2. +
                                                      2. + Créez l'application Meeting SDK sur la page Zoom Developer pour pouvoir joindre des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Les informations d'identification SDK seront assignées à l'application. +

                                                        Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom .

                                                        +
                                                        3. +
                                                      3. Saisissez les clés SDK Key, SDK Secret et le jeton JWT Token dans les champs appropriés sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur ONLYOFFICE et cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                                        4. +
                                                      +

                                                      Paramètres Zoom

                                                      + +

                                                      Utilisation

                                                      +
                                                        +
                                                      1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                                        2. +
                                                      2. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom
                                                        .
                                                        3. +
                                                      3. + Saisissez le thème de la réunion et sélectionnez Démarrer une réunion ou Programmer une réunion. +
                                                          +
                                                        • Démarrer une réunion sert à créer une nouvelle réunion. Tous les détails s'affichent dans le chat de l'éditeur. Appuyez sur les touches de la combinaison Alt + Q pour un accès rapide au chat.
                                                          • +
                                                        • Programmer une réunion - définir les paramètres obligatoires de la réunion à venir tels que l'heur, la date et la durée. Accédez aux Paramètres avancés pour afficher les paramètres supplémentaires. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                                          • +
                                                        +

                                                        Les notifications de réunion sont affichées dans le Chat de l'éditeur en ligne et dans les Commentaires de l'éditeur du bureau.

                                                        +
                                                        4. +
                                                      4. Cliquez sur Reconfigurer pour définir les paramètres encore une fois.
                                                        5. +
                                                      5. Cliquez sur le bouton Mode réunion pour accéder au menu de la réunion dans lequel vous pouvez configurez les paramètres suivants: Nom, ID Réunion, Email et Mot de passe. Sélectionnez votre rôle, région de la réunion et langue de la réunion.
                                                        6. +
                                                      6. Cliquez sur le bouton Joindre pour vous associer à la réunion ou cliquez sur Copier le lien direct vers la réunion pour copier le lien dans le presse-papiers.
                                                        7. +
                                                      7. Lorsque vous rejoignez la réunion, la fenêtre Zoom s'affichera sur le panneau du module complémentaire. De la manière habituelle, vous pouvez activer ou désactiver le micro ou la caméra, effectuer diverses actions et passer au mode d'affichage Plein écran.
                                                        8. +
                                                      +

                                                      Une fenêtre noire peut apparaître dans le navigateur Safari lorsqu'on se joint à la réunion. Pour faire disparaître l'erreur, il faut redimensionner la fenêtre du module complémentaire ou zoomer sur la page de navigateur.

                                                      +
                                                      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css index bb845e934e..d1eec13133 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings7.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings7.png index 848f3e674a..cce6b3075d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings7.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/chartsettings7.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png index aa4bd6bfc7..f5fc29f27c 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/animationtab.png index 25cf8b1bb7..2e1d132ab5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 3d2f41926c..fe921cee5f 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png index 0df32ddf53..ca290b3b63 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index b35292ac13..96c9839cf6 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..03ed5d0f02 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index e77b830198..3451c2faae 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index fe558d4532..d13b3ce219 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 9bca24c980..77598e2658 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index cbb3ebc33d..7673e42810 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index d19939009a..7e56d3b1cc 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index af8c6847f5..c1c5b763b5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png index 9670601b6e..2b07804a08 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index d5eb822158..c9d6568198 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b6ab21c072 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png index fff35a5fa7..7e042ecf4c 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png index 28cc1f0248..a3223a9ba7 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png index 096d59a082..4f5dd9acab 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png index cf3dca222e..99758a8ef6 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 5e5d9a3084..2d6e44cf09 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/transitionstab.png index 3e623c7910..021f4b2982 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png index c7e54258fe..b2bd921c44 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png index b38920dae2..d380729429 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png index ad8b47422a..72ac80fb0c 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palettes.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palettes.png index 0668ab3ca2..7c67730224 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palettes.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/palettes.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..addcf079ca Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png index e47699a7de..18ab8e3666 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png index 1155e03072..9d2bbb917b 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png index af1d45b803..56159082f1 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties1.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties1.png index 9b153ef5bd..624bf70df1 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties1.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties1.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties2.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties2.png index ac04ef6e7b..e3c6e54049 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties2.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties2.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties3.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties3.png index 49ba8e4686..d79c88b136 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties3.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties3.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties4.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties4.png index 3617a72489..834aaf0a38 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties4.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties4.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties5.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties5.png index 0ccc56258e..0ab5bf4aab 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties5.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties5.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shapesettingstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shapesettingstab.png index 6467bc5ecf..b9a7adac13 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shapesettingstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shapesettingstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png index f7f8ec7197..a8548e741a 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js index 51a6c56e99..c2175a2c54 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Paramètres avancés de l'Éditeur de Présentations", - "body": "Éditeur de Présentations vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Édition et enregistrement Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique est utilisée dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les présentations en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Afficher le bouton \"Options de collage\" lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu à la présentation. Collaboration Le Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage des modifications apportées à la présentation lors de la co-édition. Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition de la présentation verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Vérification The Vérification de l'orthographe sert à activer/désactiver l'option de vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Le menu Options d'auto-correction... permet d'acceder aux paramètres d'auto-correction tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc. Espace de travail L'option Guides d'alignement est utilisée pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la diapositive. L'option Hiéroglyphes est utilisée pour activer/désactiver l'affichage des hiéroglyphes. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier est utilisée pour activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt / Option à un raccourci clavier. L'option Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. L'option Identique à système rend le thème d'interface de l'éditeur identique à celui de votre système. Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour. Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire. Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit. Le mode Contraste sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. Remarque : En plus des thèmes de l'interface disponibles Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste sombre il est possible de personnaliser ONLYOFFICE editors en utilisant votre propre couleur de thème. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Ajuster à la diapositive ou Ajuster à la largeur. L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans l'Éditeur de Présentations. Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est-à-dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est-à-dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte soit affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Mise en cache par défaut - sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. Éditeur de Présentations gère deux modes de mise en cache : Dans le premier mode de mise en cache, chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache, l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc. Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé : Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. L'option Réglages macros s'utilise pour définir l'affichage des macros avec notification. Choisissez Désactivez tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans votre présentation. Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans une présentation. Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans une présentation. Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." + "body": "Éditeur de Présentations vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Édition et enregistrement Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique est utilisée dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les présentations en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Afficher le bouton \"Options de collage\" lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu à la présentation. Collaboration Le Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage des modifications apportées à la présentation lors de la co-édition. Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition de la présentation verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Vérification Vérification de l'orthographe sert à activer/désactiver l'option de vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Le menu Options d'auto-correction... permet d'accéder aux paramètres d'auto-correction tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc. Espace de travail L'option Guides d'alignement est utilisée pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la diapositive. L'option Hiéroglyphes est utilisée pour activer/désactiver l'affichage des hiéroglyphes. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier est utilisée pour activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt / Option à un raccourci clavier. L'option Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. L'option Identique à système rend le thème d'interface de l'éditeur identique à celui de votre système. Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour. Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire. Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit. Le mode Contraste sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. Remarque : En plus des thèmes de l'interface disponibles Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste sombre il est possible de personnaliser les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en utilisant votre propre couleur de thème. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Ajuster à la diapositive ou Ajuster à la largeur. L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans l'Éditeur de Présentations. Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est-à-dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est-à-dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte soit affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Mise en cache par défaut - sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. Éditeur de Présentations gère deux modes de mise en cache : Dans le premier mode de mise en cache, chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache, l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc. Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé : Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. L'option Réglages macros s'utilise pour définir l'affichage des macros avec notification. Choisissez Désactivez tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans votre présentation. Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans une présentation. Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans une présentation. Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -18,17 +18,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "title": "Commentaires", - "body": "Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers,, collaborer sur présentations en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la présentation pour une utilisation ultérieure. Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de présentations sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Laisser et répondre aux commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire sur un objet (zone de texte, forme etc.) : sélectionnez l'objet où vous pensez qu'il y a une erreur ou un problème, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration sur la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires ou faites un clic droit sur l'objet et sélectionnez Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. L'objet que vous commenter sera marqué par l'icône . Pour lire le commentaire, il suffit de cliquer sur cette icône. Pour ajouter un commentaire à une diapositive, sélectionnez la diapositive et utilisez le bouton Commentaires sous l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le commentaire ajouté sera affiché dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive. Pour créer un commentaire de niveau présentation qui n'est pas lié à un objet ou une diapositive spécifique, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et utilisez le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document. Les commentaires au niveau de la présentation sont affichés sur le panneau Commentaires. Les commentaires relatifs aux objets et aux diapositives sont également disponibles sur ce panneau. Tout autre utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référence au travail fait. Pour ce faire, il suffit de cliquer sur le lien Ajouter une réponse situé au-dessous du commentaire, saisissez votre réponse dans le champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton Répondre. Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Gérer les commentaires Vous pouvez gérer les commentaires ajoutés en utilisant les icônes de la bulle de commentaire ou sur le panneau gauche Commentaires : trier les commentaires ajoutés en cliquant sur l'icône : par date : Plus récent ou Plus ancien. par auteur : Auteur de A à Z ou Auteur de Z à Z Filtrer par groupe : Tout ou sélectionnez un groupe de la liste. Cette option de trie n'est disponible que si votre version prend en charge cette fonctionnalité. modifier le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, supprimer le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, fermer la discussion actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône , si vous souhaitez gérer plusieurs commentaires à la fois, ouvrez le menu contextuel Résoudre sous l'onglet Collaboration. Sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : résoudre les commentaires actuels, marquer mes commentaires comme résolus ou marquer tous les commentaires comme résolus dans la présentation. Ajouter les mentions Ce n'est qu'au contenu d'une présentation que vous pouvez ajouter des mentions et pas à la présentation la-même. Lorsque vous ajoutez un commentaire sur lequel vous voulez attirer l'attention d'une personne, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction de mentions et envoyer une notification par courrier électronique ou Talk. Pour ajouter une mention, Saisissez \"+\" ou \"@\" n'importe où dans votre commentaire, alors la liste de tous les utilisateurs du portail s'affichera. Pour faire la recherche plus rapide, tapez les premières lettres du prénom de la personne, la liste propose les suggestions au cours de la frappe. Puis sélectionnez le nom souhaité dans la liste. Si la personne mentionnée n'a pas l'autorisation d'ouvrir ce fichier, la fenêtre Paramètres de partage va apparaître. Par défaut, un document est partagé en Lecture seule. Modifiez la permission, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur OK. La personne mentionnée recevra une notification par courrier électronique informant que son nom est mentionné dans un commentaire. La personne recevra encore une notification lorsque un fichier commenté est partagé. Supprimer des commentaires Pour supprimer les commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer sous l'onglet Collaboration dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Supprimer les commentaires actuels à supprimer la sélection du moment. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer mes commentaires à supprimer vos commentaire et laisser les commentaires d'autres. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées à vos commentaires seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer tous les commentaires sert à supprimer tous les commentaires de la présentation. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires, cliquez sur l'icône de la barre latérale de gauche encore une fois." + "body": "Éditeur de Présentations permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers,, collaborer sur présentations en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la présentation pour une utilisation ultérieure. Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenue de présentations sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Laisser et répondre aux commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire sur un objet (zone de texte, forme etc.) : sélectionnez l'objet où vous pensez qu'il y a une erreur ou un problème, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration sur la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires ou faites un clic droit sur l'objet et sélectionnez Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. L'objet que vous commenter sera marqué par l'icône . Pour lire le commentaire, il suffit de cliquer sur cette icône. Pour ajouter un commentaire à une diapositive, sélectionnez la diapositive et utilisez le bouton Commentaires sous l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le commentaire ajouté sera affiché dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive. Pour créer un commentaire de niveau présentation qui n'est pas lié à un objet ou une diapositive spécifique, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et utilisez le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document. Les commentaires au niveau de la présentation sont affichés sur le panneau Commentaires. Les commentaires relatifs aux objets et aux diapositives sont également disponibles sur ce panneau. Tout autre utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référence au travail fait. Pour ce faire, il suffit de cliquer sur le lien Ajouter une réponse situé au-dessous du commentaire, saisissez votre réponse dans le champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton Répondre. Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Gérer les commentaires Vous pouvez gérer les commentaires ajoutés en utilisant les icônes de la bulle de commentaire ou sur le panneau gauche Commentaires : trier les commentaires ajoutés en cliquant sur l'icône : par date : Plus récent ou Plus ancien. par auteur : Auteur de A à Z ou Auteur de Z à Z Filtrer par groupe : Tout ou sélectionnez un groupe de la liste. Cette option de trie n'est disponible que si votre version prend en charge cette fonctionnalité. modifier le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, supprimer le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, fermer la discussion actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône , si vous souhaitez gérer plusieurs commentaires à la fois, ouvrez le menu contextuel Résoudre sous l'onglet Collaboration. Sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : résoudre les commentaires actuels, marquer mes commentaires comme résolus ou marquer tous les commentaires comme résolus dans la présentation. Ajouter les mentions Ce n'est qu'au contenu d'une présentation que vous pouvez ajouter des mentions et pas à la présentation la-même. Lorsque vous ajoutez un commentaire sur lequel vous voulez attirer l'attention d'une personne, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction de mentions et envoyer une notification par courrier électronique ou Chat. Pour ajouter une mention, Saisissez \"+\" ou \"@\" n'importe où dans votre commentaire, alors la liste de tous les utilisateurs du portail s'affichera. Pour faire la recherche plus rapide, tapez les premières lettres du prénom de la personne, la liste propose les suggestions au cours de la frappe. Puis sélectionnez le nom souhaité dans la liste. Si la personne mentionnée n'a pas l'autorisation d'ouvrir ce fichier, la fenêtre Paramètres de partage va apparaître. Par défaut, un document est partagé en Lecture seule. Modifiez la permission, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur OK. La personne mentionnée recevra une notification par courrier électronique informant que son nom est mentionné dans un commentaire. La personne recevra encore une notification lorsque un fichier commenté est partagé. Supprimer des commentaires Pour supprimer les commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer sous l'onglet Collaboration dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Supprimer les commentaires actuels à supprimer la sélection du moment. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer mes commentaires à supprimer vos commentaire et laisser les commentaires d'autres. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées à vos commentaires seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer tous les commentaires sert à supprimer tous les commentaires de la présentation. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires, cliquez sur l'icône de la barre latérale de gauche encore une fois." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Raccourcis clavier", - "body": "Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'Éditeur de Présentations sans l'aide de la souris. Appuyez sur la touche Altpour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès. Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour désactiver toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir aux suggestions de touches précédentes. Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants : Windows/Linux Mac OS En travaillant sur la présentation Ouvrir le panneau \"Fichier\" Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le panneau Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer la présentation actuelle, voir ses informations, créer une nouvelle présentation ou ouvrir une présentation existatante, accéder à l'aide de l'Éditeur de Présentations ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue « Rechercher » Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la fenêtre Recherche pour commencer à chercher un caractère/mot/phrase dans la présentation actuelle. Ouvir le panneau \"Commentaires\" Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau \"Chat\" Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat et envoyer un message. Enregistrer la présentation Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans la présentation en cours d'édition dans l'Éditeur de Présentations. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer la présentation Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer la présentation avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Enregistrer (Télécharger comme) Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S Ouvrir le panneau Télécharger comme pour enregistrer la présentation en cours d'édition sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans un des formats pris en charge : PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP. Plein écran F11 Passer à l'affichage en plein écran pour adapter l'Éditeur de Présentations à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de l'Éditeur de Présentations. Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O L'onglet Ouvrir fichier local de Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Fermer la fenêtre de présentation actuelle dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l'élément ⇧ Maj+F10 ⇧ Maj+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom de la présentation actuelle par défaut pour Ajuster à la diapositive. Navigation Première diapositive Début Début, Fn+← Passer à la première diapositive de la présentation actuelle. Dernière diapositive Fin Fin, Fn+→ Passer à la dernière diapositive de la présentation actuelle. Diapositive suivante Pg. suiv Pg. suiv, Fn+↓ Passer à la diapositive suivante de la présentation actuelle. Diapositive précédente Pg. préc Pg. préc, Fn+↑ Passer à la diapositive précédente de la présentation actuelle. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Agrandir la présentation en cours d'édition. Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Effectuer un zoom arrière de la présentation en cours d'édition. Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. Exécuter des actions sur des diapositives Nouvelle diapositive Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Créer une nouvelle diapositive et l'ajouter après la diapositive sélectionnée dans la liste. Dupliquer la diapositive Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D Dupliquer la diapositive sélectionnée dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive vers le haut Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée au-dessus de la diapositive précedente dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive vers le bas Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée dessous la diapositive suivante dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive au début Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+↑ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée à la première position dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive à la fin Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+↓ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée à la dernière position dans la liste. Exécuter des actions sur des objets Créer une copie Ctrl + faire glisser, Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl + faire glisser, ⌘ Cmd + faire glisser, ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Maintenez la touche Ctrl pour faire glisser l'objet sélectionné ou appuyez sur Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D pour Mac) pour créer sa copie. Grouper Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G Grouper les objets sélectionnés. Dissocier Ctrl+⇧ Maj+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+G Dissocier le groupe d'objets sélectionnés. Sélectionner l'objet suivant ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Sélectionner l'objet suivant après l'objet sélectionné. Sélectionner l'objet précédent ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Sélectionner l'objet précédent avant l'objet actuellement sélectionné. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Maj + faire glisser ⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Définir la rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Limiter l'angle de rotation à des incréments de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Mouvement pixel par pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl (⌘ Cmd pour Mac) enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois. Utilisation des tableaux Passer à la cellule suivante d'une ligne ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Aller à la cellule suivante d'une ligne de tableau. Passer à la cellule précédente d'une ligne ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Aller à la cellule précédente d'une ligne de tableau. Passer à la ligne suivante ↓ ↓ Aller à la ligne suivante d'un tableau. Passer à la ligne précédente ↑ ↑ Aller à la ligne précédente d'un tableau. Commencer un nouveau paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Commencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne au bas du tableau. Prévisualisation de la présentation Démarrer l'affichage de l'aperçu dès le début Ctrl+F5 ^ Ctrl+F5 Démarrer une présentation dès le début. Naviguer vers l'avant ↵ Entrée, Pg. suiv, →, ↓, ␣ Barre d'espace ↵ Retour, Pg. suiv, →, ↓, ␣ Barre d'espace Effectuer l'animation suivante ou passer à la diapositive suivant. Navigation à rebours Pg. préc, ←, ↑ Pg. préc, ←, ↑ Effectuer l'animation précédente ou revenir à la diapositive précédente. Fermer l'aperçu Échap Échap Terminer la présentation. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X Couper l'objet sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. L'objet sélectionné peut inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans la même présentation. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer l'objet sélectionné et vers le presse-papiers. L'objet copié peut être insérées ensuite à un autre endroit dans la même présentation. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Maj+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer l'objet précédemment copié depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. L'objet peut être copié à partir de la même présentation. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web ou à une certaine diapositive de la présentation. Copier le style Ctrl+⇧ Maj+C ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+C, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être appliquée à un autre fragment du texte dans la même présentation. Appliquer le style Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V Appliquer la mise en forme précedemment copiée au texte de la partie en cours d'édition. Sélectionner avec la souris Ajouter au fragment sélectionné ⇧ Maj ⇧ Maj Démarrer la sélection, maintenez enfoncée la touche ⇧ Maj et cliquez sur l'endroit où vous souhaitez terminer la sélection. Sélectionner avec le clavier Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner toutes les diapositives (dans la liste des diapositives) ou tous les objets de la diapositive (dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive) ou tout le texte (dans le bloc de texte) - selon la position du curseur de la souris. Sélectionner le fragment du texte ⇧ Maj+→ ← ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. Sélectionner le texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner le texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner un caractère à droite ⇧ Maj+→ ⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur. Sélectionner un caractère à gauche ⇧ Maj+← ⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur. Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin d'un mot. Sélectionner au début d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début d'un mot. Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut ⇧ Maj+↑ ⇧ Maj+↑ Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas ⇧ Maj+↓ ⇧ Maj+↓ Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). Style de texte Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Indice Ctrl+⇧ Maj+> ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+> Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+⇧ Maj+< ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+< Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Liste à puces Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. Supprimer la mise en forme Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné. Agrandir la police Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Alignement centré Ctrl+E Centrer le texte entre les bords gauche et droit. Justifié Ctrl+J Justifier le texte du paragraphe en ajoutant un espace supplémentaire entre les mots pour que les bords gauche et droit du texte soient alignés avec les marges du paragraphe. Aligner à droite Ctrl+R Aligner à droite avec le texte aligné par le côté droit du bloc de texte, le côté gauche reste non aligné. Alignement à gauche Ctrl+L Aligner à gauche avec le texte aligné par le côté gauche du bloc de texte, le côté droit reste non aligné. Augmenter le retrait gauche Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Augmenter l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. Diminuer l'indentation gauche Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+M Diminuer l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. Supprimer un caractère à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur. Supprimer un caractère à droite Supprimer Fn+Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à droite du curseur. Se déplacer dans le texte Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche ← ← Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite → → Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite. Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑ ↑ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut. Déplacer une ligne vers le bas ↓ ↓ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas. Déplacer vers le début d'un mot ou un mot vers la gauche Ctrl+← ⌘ Cmd+← Déplacer le curseur au début d'un mot ou d'un mot vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite Ctrl+→ ⌘ Cmd+→ Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite. Passer à l'emplacement suivant Ctrl+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour Passer au titre ou au corps du texte suivant. S'il s'agit du dernier caractère de remplacement d'une diapositive, une nouvelle diapositive sera insérée avec la même disposition que la diapositive originale. Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Placer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin de la ligne Fin Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition. Aller au début de la zone de texte Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début de la zone de texte en cours d'édition. Aller à la fin de la zone de texte Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la zone de texte en cours d'édition." + "body": "Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'éditeur de présentations sans l'aide de la souris. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur Alt pour afficher les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès. Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer. Appuyez sur Alt pour masquer toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir au groupe de suggestions de touches précédent. Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants: Windows/Linux Mac OS Travailler avec une présentation Ouvrir le panneau 'Fichier' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le panneau Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, voir ses informations, créer un nouveau classeur ou ouvrir un classeur existant, accéder au Centre d'aide de l'éditeur de présentations ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Recherche Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Recherche pour commencer à rechercher un caractère/un mot/une phrase dans la présentation en cours de modification. Ouvrir le panneau 'Commentaires' Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau Chat (éditeurs en ligne) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat dans l'éditeur en ligne et envoyer un message: Enregistrer une présentation Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans la présentation en cours d'édition dans l'éditeur de présentations. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer une présentation Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer la présentation avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Télécharger comme... Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme... pour enregistrer la présentation qu'on vient de modifier sur votre ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Plein écran (éditeurs en ligne) F11 Passer à l'affichage en plein écran dans les éditeurs en ligne pour adapter l'éditeur de présentations à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de l'éditeur de présentations Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O Dans l'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans l'éditeur de bureau, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (l'éditeur de bureau) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Fermer la fenêtre du document actuel dans l'éditeur de bureau. Menu contextuel de l'élément ⇧ Maj+F10 ⇧ Maj+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel pour l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Restaurer le niveau de zoom par défaut Ajuster à la diapositive dans la présentation actuelle. Navigation La première diapositive Début Début, Fn+← Passer à la première diapositive de la présentation en cours d'édition. La dernière diapositive Fin Fin, Fn+→ Passer à la dernière diapositive de la présentation en cours d'édition. Diapositive suivante Pge. suiv Pge suiv., Fn+↓ Passer à la diapositive suivante dans la présentation en cours d'édition. Diapisitive précédente Pge. préc Pge préc., Fn+↓ Passer à la diapositive précédente dans la présentation en cours d'édition. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoomer sur la présentation en cours d'édition Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Dézoomer sur la présentation en cours d'édition Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. Actions sur les diapositives Nouvelle diapositive Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Créer une nouvelle diapositive et l'ajouter après la diapositive sélectionnée dans la liste. Dupliquer la diapositive Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D Dupliquer la diapositive sélectionnée dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive vers le haut Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée au-dessus de la diapositive précédente dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive vers le bas Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée en dessous la diapositive suivante dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive au début Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+↑ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée à la première position dans la liste. Déplacer la diapositive à la fin Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+↓ Déplacer la diapositive sélectionnée à la dernière position dans la liste. Actions sur des objets Créer une copie Ctrl + faire glisser, Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl + faire glisser, ⌘ Cmd + faire glisser, ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Maintenez la touche Ctrl pour faire glisser l'objet sélectionné ou appuyez sur Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D sur Mac) pour créer sa copie. Grouper Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G Grouper les objets sélectionnés. Dégouper Ctrl+⇧ Maj+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+G Dissocier le groupe d'objets sélectionnés. Sélectionner l'objet suivant ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Sélectionner l'objet suivant après l'objet sélectionné. Sélectionner l'objet précédent ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Sélectionner l'objet précédent avant l'objet actuellement sélectionné. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Maj + faire glisser ⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Définir la rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Limiter l'angle de rotation à des incréments de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Mouvement pixel par pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl (⌘ Cmd sur Mac) enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois. Utilisation des tableaux Déplacer vers la cellule suivante dans une ligne ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Passer à la cellule suivante dans une ligne du tableau. Déplacer vers la cellule précédente dans une ligne ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Passer à la cellule précédente dans une ligne du tableau. Passer à la ligne suivante ↓ ↓ Passer à la ligne suivante dans une ligne du tableau. Passer à la ligne précédente ↑ ↑ Passer à la ligne précédente dans une ligne du tableau. Commencer un nouveau paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Commencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne en bas du tableau. Aperçu de la présentation Démarrer l'affichage de l'aperçu dès le début Ctrl+F5 ^ Ctrl+F5 Démarrer une présentation dès le début. Naviguer vers l'avant ↵ Entrée, Pge. suiv., →, ↓, ␣ Barre d'espace ↵ Retour, Pge. suiv., →, ↓, ␣ Barre d'espace Afficher la transition suivante ou passer à la diapositive suivante. Navigation à rebours Pge préc., ←, ↑ Pge préc., ←, ↑ Afficher la transition précédente ou revenir à la diapositive suivante. Fermer l'aperçu Échap Échap Terminer la présentation. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X Couper l'objet sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. L'objet coupé peut être inséré ensuite dans un autre endroit dans la même présentation. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer l'objet sélectionné et vers le presse-papiers. L'objet copié peut être inséré ensuite dans un autre endroit dans la même présentation. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Maj+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer l'objet précédemment copié du presse-papiers dans la position actuelle du curseur. L'objet peut être copié de la même présentation. Copiez du texte sans la mise en forme du style Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V Insérer le fragment du texte copié auparavant du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur sans utiliser la mise en forme de la source. C'est d'abord possible de copier le texte dans le même document, un autre document, ou une autre application. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web ou à une certaine diapositive de la présentation. Copier le style Alt+Ctrl+C ^ Ctrl+Alt+C, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre fragment du texte dans la même présentation. Appliquer du style Alt+Ctrl+V ^ Ctrl+Alt+V, ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Appliquer la mise en forme copiée au texte dans la zone de texte en cours d'édition. Sélectionner avec la souris Ajouter au fragment sélectionné ⇧ Maj ⇧ Maj Démarrer la sélection, maintenez la touche ⇧ Maj enfoncée et cliquez sur l'endroit où vous souhaitez terminer la sélection. Sélectionner avec le clavier Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner toutes les diapositives (dans la liste des diapositives) ou tous les objets de la diapositive (dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive) ou tout le texte (dans le bloc de texte) - selon la position du curseur de la souris. Sélectionner un fragment du texte ⇧ Maj+→ ← ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. Sélectionner le texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner le texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionnez un caractère à droite ⇧ Maj+→ ⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur. Sélectionnez un caractère à gauche ⇧ Maj+← ⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur. Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin du mot. Sélectionner jusqu'au début d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner le fragment du texte à partir de la position du curseur jusqu'au début du mot. Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut ⇧ Maj+↑ ⇧ Maj+↑ Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne). Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas ⇧ Maj+↓ ⇧ Maj+↓ Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (lorsque le curseur est au début de la ligne). Appliquer des styles au texte Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Barrer le fragment de texte sélectionné avec une ligne qui passe à travers les lettres. Indice Ctrl+⇧ Maj+> ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+> Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer dans la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+⇧ Maj+< ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+< Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer dans la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Liste à puces Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. Supprimer la mise en forme Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné. Agrandir la police Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Alignement centré Ctrl+E Centrer le texte entre les bords gauche et droit. Justifié Ctrl+J Justifier le texte du paragraphe en ajoutant un espace supplémentaire entre les mots pour que les bords gauche et droit du texte soient alignés avec les marges du paragraphe. Aligner à droite Ctrl+R Aligner à droite avec le texte aligné par le côté droit du bloc de texte, le côté gauche reste non aligné. Aligner à gauche Ctrl+L Aligner à gauche avec le texte aligné par le côté gauche du bloc de texte, le côté droit reste non aligné. Augmenter le retrait à gauche Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Augmenter l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. Réduire le retrait à gauche Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+M Réduire l'alinéa de gauche d'une position de tabulation. Supprimer un caractère à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur. Supprimer un caractère à droite Supprimer Fn+Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à droite du curseur. Déplacer à travers du texte Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche ← ← Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite → → Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite. Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑ ↑ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut Déplacer une ligne vers le bas ↓ ↓ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas. Rendre au début du mot ou déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche Ctrl+← ⌘ Cmd+← Déplacer le curseur au début du mot ou se déplacer d'un mot vers la gauche Déplacer d'un mot vers la droite Ctrl+→ ⌘ Cmd+→ Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite. Déplacer vers l'espace réservé suivant Ctrl+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Retour Déplacer vers l'espace suivant réservé au titre ou au corps du texte. Une fois le dernier espace réservé atteint, une nouvelle diapositive sera insérée ayant la même disposition que la diapositive source. Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Placez le curseur au début de la ligne en cours de modification Sauter à la fin de la ligne End End Placez le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours de modification. Sauter au début de la zone de texte Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début de la zone de texte en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin de la zone de texte Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la zone de texte en cours d'édition." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation", - "body": "Presentation Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à afficher et naviguer à travers votre présentation: le zoom, les boutons de diapositive précédente/suivante et l'indicateur du numéro de diapositive etc. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec la présentation, passez à l'onglet Affichage . Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Zoom - sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles. Ajuster à la diapositive sert à adapter la diapositive entière à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Ajuster à la largeur sert à adapter la largeur de la diapositive à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles dans la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre. Notes - une fois désactivé, les notes au-dessous de la diapositive sont masquées. Il est également possible de masquer/afficher cette section en la faisant glisser avec la souris. Règles une fois désactivé, masque les règles qui sont utilisées pour définir des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe dans une zone de texte. Pour afficher les Règles masquées, cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Repères - sélectionnez le type de repères approprié pour positionner correctement des objets sur une diapositive. Les options disponibles pour un positionnement amélioré vertical, horizontal et repères actifs. Quadrillage - sélectionnez la taille de la grille appropriée parmi les modèles disponibles ou indiquez la taille personnalisée et activez ou désactivez les options d'aligner sur la grille pour améliorer le positionnement des objets. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sont masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles. Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Barre d'état - une fois désactivé, sert à masquer la barre qui se situe tout en bas avec les boutons Affichage des numéros de diapositives et Zoom. Pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Diapositives, Commentaires sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case. Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case. La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet/diapositive et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. La largeur de la barre latérale gauche est ajustée par simple glisser-déposer: déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche pour qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers la gauche pour réduire la largeur de la barre latérale ou vers la droite pour l'agrandir. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre présentation, utilisez les outils suivants: Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans la présentation active. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la diapositive à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la diapositive entière à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la diapositive . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage. Vous pouvez définir une valeur de zoom par défaut. Basculez vers l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, allez à la section Paramètres avancés..., choisissez la Valeur de zoom par défaut nécessaire dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer. Pour accéder à la diapositive précédente ou suivante lors de la modification de la présentation, vous pouvez utiliser les boutons et en haut et en bas de la barre de défilement verticale sur le côté droit de la diapositive. Indicateur du numéro de diapositive affiche la diapositive actuelle en tant que partie de toute la présentation actuelle (diapositive 'n' de 'nn'). Cliquez sur la légende pour ouvrir la fenêtre dans laquelle vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la diapositive et y accéder rapidement. Si la Barre d'état est masquée, cet outil reste inaccessible." + "body": "L'éditeur de présentations vous propose plusieurs outils qui vous aide à afficher et naviguer à travers votre présentation: le zoom, les boutons de diapositive précédente/suivante et l'indicateur du numéro de diapositive etc. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec la présentation, passez à l'onglet Affichage . Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Zoom - sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles. Ajuster à la diapositive sert à adapter la diapositive entière à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Ajuster à la largeur sert à adapter la largeur de la diapositive à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles dans la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre. Notes - une fois désactivé, les notes au-dessous de la diapositive sont masquées. Il est également possible de masquer/afficher cette section en la faisant glisser avec la souris. Règles une fois désactivé, masque les règles qui sont utilisées pour définir des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe dans une zone de texte. Pour afficher les Règles masquées, cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Repères - sélectionnez le type de repères approprié pour positionner correctement des objets sur une diapositive. Les options disponibles pour un positionnement amélioré vertical, horizontal et repères actifs. Quadrillage - sélectionnez la taille de la grille appropriée parmi les modèles disponibles ou indiquez la taille personnalisée et activez ou désactivez les options d'aligner sur la grille pour améliorer le positionnement des objets. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sont masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles. Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Barre d'état - une fois désactivé, sert à masquer la barre qui se situe tout en bas avec les boutons Affichage des numéros de diapositives et Zoom. Pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Diapositives, Commentaires sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case. Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case. La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet/diapositive et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. La largeur de la barre latérale gauche est ajustée par simple glisser-déposer: déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche pour qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers la gauche pour réduire la largeur de la barre latérale ou vers la droite pour l'agrandir. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre présentation, utilisez les outils suivants: Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans la présentation active. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la diapositive à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la diapositive entière à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la diapositive . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage. Vous pouvez définir une valeur de zoom par défaut. Basculez vers l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, allez à la section Paramètres avancés..., choisissez la Valeur de zoom par défaut nécessaire dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer. Pour accéder à la diapositive précédente ou suivante lors de la modification de la présentation, vous pouvez utiliser les boutons et en haut et en bas de la barre de défilement verticale sur le côté droit de la diapositive. Indicateur du numéro de diapositive affiche la diapositive actuelle en tant que partie de toute la présentation actuelle (diapositive 'n' de 'nn'). Cliquez sur la légende pour ouvrir la fenêtre dans laquelle vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la diapositive et y accéder rapidement. Si la Barre d'état est masquée, cet outil reste inaccessible." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", - "title": "Fonction de recherche", - "body": "et remplacement Pour rechercher des caractères, des mots ou des phrases dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône située au coin droit en haut ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Command+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir le petit panneau Recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H pour ouvrir le panneau complet Recherche. Un petit panneau Recherche s'affiche au coin droit en haut de la zone de travail. Afin d'accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône . La fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer s'ouvre : Saisissez votre enquête dans le champ de saisie correspondant Rechercher. Si vous avez besoin de remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères saisis, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie correspondant Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer l'occurrence actuellement sélectionnée ou remplacer toutes les occurrences en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants Remplacer et Remplacer tout. Afin de parcourir les occurrences trouvées, cliquez sur un des boutons à flèche. Le bouton affiche l'occurrence suivante, le bouton ) affiche l'occurrence précédente. Spécifiez les paramètres de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires : Sensible à la casse sert à trouver les occurrences saisies de la même casse (par exemple, si votre enquête est 'Editeur' et cette option est sélectionnée, les mots tels que 'éditeur' ou 'EDITEUR' etc. ne seront pas trouvés). Seulement les mots entiers - sert à surligner les mots entiers uniquement. La première diapositive contenant les caractères saisis dans la direction sélectionnée sera activée dans la liste des diapositives et affichée avec les caractères requis dans la zone de travail. Si ce n'est pas la diapositive que vous cherchez, cliquez sur le bouton sélectionné encore une fois pour passer à la diapositive suivante contenant les caractères saisis." + "title": "Fonctions de recherche et remplacement", + "body": "Pour rechercher les caractères, les mots et les phrases nécessaires dans l'éditeur de présentations, cliquez sur l'icône sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Commande+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir la petite barre de recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+ H pour ouvrir le plein panneau de recherche. Une petite barre Recherche apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de l'espace de travail. La barre inclut le champ de saisie de la requête de recherche, affiche le nombre de résultats de recherche et les contrôles pour basculer entre le résultat précédent ou suivant et masquer la barre. Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône . Le panneau Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche. Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans le champ de saisie Rechercher. S'il vous faut remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer une seule occurrence qui est mise en surbrillance ou toutes occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant Remplacer ou Remplacer tout. Pour naviguer à travers des occurrences, cliquez sur les boutons fléchés. Le bouton affiche l'occurrence suivante et le bouton affiche l'occurrence précédente. Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées en dessous du champ de saisie: Sensible aux caractères sert à passer toutes les occurrences tenant compte de la casse (par exemple, quand vous rechercher le mot Éditeur», les mots «éditeur» et «ÉDITEUR» ne sont pas affichés). Mots entiers uniquement set à mettre en surbrillance uniquement des mots entiers. La première diapositive dans le sens sélectionné qui contient les caractères nécessaires sera mis en surbrillance dans la liste des diapositives aussi que dans l'espace de travail et les caractères recherchés seront surlignés. Si vous recherchez une autre diapositive, cliquez sur le bouton encore une fois pour rechercher la diapositive suivante comportant les caractères recherchés." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Formats des présentations électroniques pris en charge", - "body": "Une présentation est l'ensemble des diapositives qui peut inclure de différents types de contenu tels que des images, des fichiers multimédias, des textes, des effets etc. Éditeur de Présentations prend en charge les formats suivants : Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Office Open XML (PPTX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition. Formats Description Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML ODP Présentation OpenDocument Format de fichier utilisé pour les présentations créées par l'application Impress, qui fait partie des applications OpenOffice + + OTP Modèle de présentation OpenDocument Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle OTP contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme + + POTX Modèle de document PowerPoint Open XML Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle POTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show Un format de présentation pour démarrer le diaporama. + + PPT Format de fichier utilisé par Microsoft PowerPoint + + PPTX Présentation Office Open XML Compressé, le format de fichier basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des classeurs, des tableaux, des présentations et des documents de traitement de texte + + Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'une présentation dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme. Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme ODP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX OTP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX POTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPSX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos présentations dans des formats les plus populaires." + "body": "Une présentation est l'ensemble des diapositives qui peut inclure de différents types de contenu tels que des images, des fichiers multimédias, des textes, des effets etc. L'éditeur de présentations prend en charge les formats suivants: Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Office Open XML (PPTX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition. Formats Description Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML DPS WPS Office Presentation Document by Kingsoft Un format de présentation diaporama inclus dans la suite WPS Office qui comporte une collection de diapositives comprenant une diapositive de titre suivi par des diapositives de contenu qui peuvent contenir du texte, des images, des vidéos, des audios et des formes. + + DPT Kingsoft Presentation Template Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder la disposition et le style pour une présentation par défaut et des créer des présentations (fichiers .DPS files) avec le même mise en forme. + + FODP Format de Présentation OpenDocument Flat XML Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder une présentation qu'on a enregistré dans le format OpenDocument XML sans aucune compression. + + ODP Présentation OpenDocument Format de fichier utilisé pour les présentations créées par l'application Impress, qui fait partie des applications OpenOffice. + + OTP Modèle de présentation OpenDocument Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle OTP contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme. + + POT Portable object template Un format de fichier pour créer des présentations en diaporama comportant la disposition, la mise en forme et les styles pour une diaporama par défaut. Le format POT permet de créer plusieurs fichiers .PPT avec la même mise en forme. + + POTM Modèles de présentation prenant en charge les macros par Microsoft PowerPoint Un format de fichier pour créer des présentations comportant des images, des modèle de diapositives, des macros et de la mise en forme par défaut. + + POTX Modèle de document PowerPoint Open XML Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de présentation. Un modèle POTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs présentations avec la même mise en forme. + + PPS PowerPoint Slideshow Un format de fichier qui est utilisé pour préparer des diaporamas et des présentations comprenant plusieurs types de données tels que des vidéo, audio, texte, animations et images. + + PPSM Diaporama prenant en charge les macros par Microsoft PowerPoint Un format de fichier pour créer des diaporamas et des présentations prenant en charge les macros sur une ou plusieurs diapositives qui peuvent contenir du texte, des images et des transitions. + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show Un format de présentation pour démarrer le diaporama. + + PPT Format de fichier utilisé par Microsoft PowerPoint + + PPTX Présentation Office Open XML Compressé, le format de fichier basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des classeurs, des tableaux, des présentations et des documents de traitement de texte. + + SXI StarOffice Impress Presentation Un format de présentation permettant de créer des présentations diaporama qui peuvent comprendre une diapositive et des diapositives de contenu avec du texte et des éléments numériques et prennent en charge des vidéos et des effet de transition. + Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'une présentation dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme. Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme DPS JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX DPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX FODP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX ODP JPG, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX OTP JPG, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POTM JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPS JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPSM JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPSX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPTM, PPTX PPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM SXI JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos présentations dans des formats les plus populaires." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm", @@ -70,6 +70,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Onglet Collaboration", "body": "L'onglet Collaboration dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur une présentation. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires. En mode Commentaires, vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer les commentaires et utiliser le chat. Dans la version de bureau, vous ne pouvez que gérer les commentaires. Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne : Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : spécifier les paramètres de partage (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), basculer entre les modes d'édition collaborative Strict et Rapide (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), ajouter des commentaires à la présentation et les supprimer, ouvrir le panneau de Chat (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne). parcourir l'historique des versions (disponible uniquement sous version en ligne)." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Onglet Dessiner", + "body": "L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de présentations permet d'effectuer les opérations dessin de base. Fenêtre de l'éditeur de présentations en ligne: Fenêtre de l'éditeur de présentations de bureau: En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez: utiliser l'outil de sélection pour redimensionner ou supprimer l'inscription, le dessin et la mise en surbrillance, utiliser l'outil Stylo et Surligneur pour dessiner ou ajouter les notes manuscrites ou la mise en surbrillance, utiliser l'outil Gomme pour effacer le dessin entier ou le texte manuscrit." + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Fichier", @@ -88,12 +93,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Modules complémentaires", - "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne : Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer toutes les extensions installées et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : Envoyer permet d'envoyer la présentation par e-mail à l'aide d'un client de messagerie installé sur votre ordinateur (disponible en version de bureau seulement), Code en surbrillance sert à surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond approprié etc., Éditeur de photos sert à modifier les images : rogner, retourner, pivoter, dessiner les lignes et le formes, ajouter des icônes et du texte, charger l'image de masque et appliquer des filtres comme Niveaux de gris, Inverser, Sépia, Flou, Embosser, Affûter etc., Thésaurus sert à trouver les synonymes et les antonymes et les utiliser à remplacer le mot sélectionné, Traducteur sert à traduire le texte sélectionné dans des langues disponibles, Remarque : ce module complémentaire ne fonctionne pas sur Internet Explorer. You Tube permet d'ajouter les videos YouTube dans votre présentation. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuels sont disponibles sur GitHub." + "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'Éditeur de Présentations permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne : Fenêtre de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer toutes les extensions installées et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : Envoyer permet d'envoyer la présentation par e-mail à l'aide d'un client de messagerie installé sur votre ordinateur (disponible en version de bureau seulement), Code en surbrillance sert à surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond approprié etc., Éditeur de photos sert à modifier les images : rogner, retourner, pivoter, dessiner les lignes et le formes, ajouter des icônes et du texte, charger l'image de masque et appliquer des filtres comme Niveaux de gris, Inverser, Sépia, Flou, Embosser, Affûter etc., Thésaurus sert à trouver les synonymes et les antonymes et les utiliser à remplacer le mot sélectionné, Traducteur sert à traduire le texte sélectionné dans des langues disponibles, Remarque : ce module complémentaire ne fonctionne pas sur Internet Explorer. You Tube permet d'ajouter les vidéos YouTube dans votre présentation. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuels sont disponibles sur GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'Éditeur de Présentations", - "body": "Éditeur de Présentations utilise une interface à onglets dans laquelle les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité. La fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne : La fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau : L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants : L'en-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets de présentations ouvertes et leurs titres et les onglets du menu. Dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur se trouvent les boutons Enregistrer, Imprimer le fichier, Annuler et Rétablir. Dans la partie droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, le nom de l'utilisateur est affiché ainsi que les icônes suivantes : Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier - dans la version de bureau, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur. Gérer les droits d'accès au document - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès aux documents stockés dans le cloud. Marquer en tant que favori - cliquez sur l'étoile pour ajouter le fichier aux favoris et pour le retrouver rapidement. Ce n'est qu'un fichier de raccourcis car le fichier lui-même est dans l'emplacement de stockage d'origine. Le fichier réel n'est pas supprimé quand vous le supprimez de Favoris. Recherche - permet de rechercher dans la présentation un mot ou un symbole particulier, etc. La barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Collaboration, Protection, Modules complémentaires. Des options Copier et Coller sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné. La Barre d'état en bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient l'icône Démarrer le diaporama et certains outils de navigation : l'indicateur de numéro de diapositive et les boutons de zoom. La Barre d'état affiche également certaines notifications (telles que Toutes les modifications enregistrées ou Connection est perdue quand l'éditeur ne pavient pas à se connecter etc.) et permet de définir la langue du texte et d'activer la vérification orthographique. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer , - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique, - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet de visualiser les informations sur le programme. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier sur une diapositive, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite. Les Règles horizontales et verticales vous aident à placer des objets sur une diapositive et permettent de définir des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe dans les zones de texte. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu de la présentation, d'entrer et de modifier les données. La Barre de défilement sur la droite permet de faire défiler la présentation de haut en bas. Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez masquer certains composants et les afficher à nouveau lorsque cela est nécessaire. Pour en savoir plus sur l'ajustement des paramètres d'affichage, reportez-vous à cette page." + "body": "Éditeur de Présentations utilise une interface à onglets dans laquelle les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité. La fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne : La fenêtre principale de l'Éditeur de Présentations de bureau : L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants : L'en-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets de présentations ouvertes et leurs titres et les onglets du menu. Dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur se trouvent les boutons Enregistrer, Imprimer le fichier, Annuler et Rétablir. Dans la partie droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, le nom de l'utilisateur est affiché ainsi que les icônes suivantes : Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier - dans la version de bureau, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur. Gérer les droits d'accès au document - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès aux documents stockés dans le cloud. Marquer en tant que favori - cliquez sur l'étoile pour ajouter le fichier aux favoris et pour le retrouver rapidement. Ce n'est qu'un fichier de raccourcis car le fichier lui-même est dans l'emplacement de stockage d'origine. Le fichier réel n'est pas supprimé quand vous le supprimez de Favoris. Recherche - permet de rechercher dans la présentation un mot ou un symbole particulier, etc. La barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Collaboration, Protection, Modules complémentaires. Des options Copier et Coller sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné. La Barre d'état en bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient l'icône Démarrer le diaporama et certains outils de navigation : l'indicateur de numéro de diapositive et les boutons de zoom. La Barre d'état affiche également certaines notifications (telles que Toutes les modifications enregistrées ou Connexion est perdue quand l'éditeur ne parvient pas à se connecter etc.) et permet de définir la langue du texte et d'activer la vérification orthographique. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer , - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique, - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet de visualiser les informations sur le programme. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier sur une diapositive, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite. Les Règles horizontales et verticales vous aident à placer des objets sur une diapositive et permettent de définir des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe dans les zones de texte. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu de la présentation, d'entrer et de modifier les données. La Barre de défilement sur la droite permet de faire défiler la présentation de haut en bas. Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez masquer certains composants et les afficher à nouveau lorsque cela est nécessaire. Pour en savoir plus sur l'ajustement des paramètres d'affichage, reportez-vous à cette page." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm", @@ -125,10 +130,15 @@ var indexes = "title": "Appliquer des transitions", "body": "Une transition est un effet d'animation qui apparaît entre deux diapositives quand une diapositive avance vers la suivante pendant la démonstration. Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez appliquer une même transition à toutes les diapositives ou à de différentes transitions à chaque diapositive séparée et régler leurs propriétés. Pour appliquer une transition à une seule diapositive ou à plusieurs diapositives sélectionnées : Passez à l'onglet Transitions de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez une diapositive nécessaire (ou plusieurs diapositives de la liste) à laquelle vous voulez appliquer une transition. Sélectionnez une transition appropriée parmi les transitions disponibles sous l'onglet Transitions: Aucune, Fondu, Expulsion, Effacement, Diviser, Découvrir, Couvrir, Horloge, Zoom. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour sélectionner l'un des effets disponibles et définir le mode d'apparition de l'effet. Par exemple, si vous appliquez l'effet Zoom, vous pouvez sélectionner une des options suivantes: Zoom avant, Zoom arrière ou Zoom et rotation. Spécifiez la durée de la transition dans la boîte Durée, saisissez ou sélectionnez la valeur appropriée mesurée en secondes. Cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu pour visualiser la diapositive avec la transition appliquée dans la zone d'édition. Précisez combien de temps la diapositive doit être affichée avant d'avancer vers une autre: Démarrer en cliquant - cochez cette case si vous ne voulez pas limiter le temps de l'affichage de la diapositive sélectionnée. La diapositive n'avance vers une autre qu'après un clic de la souris. Retard utilisez cette option si vous voulez préciser le temps de l'affichage d'une diapositive avant son avancement vers une autre. Cochez cette case et saisissez la valeur appropriée, mesurée en secondes. Remarque: si vous ne cochez que la case Retard, les diapositives avancent automatiquement avec un intervalle de temps indiqué. Si vous cochez les deux cases Démarrer en cliquant et Retard et précisez la valeur de temps nécessaire, l'avancement des diapositives se fait aussi automatiquement, mais vous aurez la possibilité de cliquer sur la diapositive pour vous avancer vers une autre. Pour appliquer une transition à toutes les diapositives de la présentation cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à toutes les diapositives sous l'onglet Transitions. Pour supprimer une transition: sélectionnez une diapositive nécessaire et choisissez l'option Aucun parmi les effets disponibles sous l'onglet Transitions. Pour supprimer toutes les transitions: sélectionnez une diapositive, choisissez l'option Aucun parmi les effets disponibles et appuyez sur Appliquer à toutes les diapositives sous l'onglet Transitions." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", + "title": "ChatGPT", + "body": "Le module complémentaire ChatGPT permet d'utiliser l'agent conversationnel OpenAI pour effectuer les tâches visant à comprendre et à générer le langage naturel ou le code. Installation Pour installer le module complémentaire ChatGPT, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires. Recherchez ChatGPT sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous. Cliquez sur l'icône ChatGPT sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire. Configuration Créez sur votre API key sur la page OpenAI API key. Copiez la clé générée API key dans le champ correspondant sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur. Utilisation Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Cliquez sur l'icône ChatGPT. Configurez les paramètres disponibles tels que Modèle, Longueur maximale, Température etc. ONLYOFFICE n'assume aucune responsabilité quant aux réponses du ChatGPT qui peuvent contenir des erreurs, des omissions ou du contenu haineux ou inapproprié. Tout le texte envoyé depuis le module complémentaire est généré par ChatGPT et est fourni tel quel, sans filtrage d'aucune sorte par ONLYOFFICE." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communiquer lors de l'édition", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow. Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur . Telegram Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Telegram, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone dans le champ correspondant, cochez la case Rester connecté lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Suivant, saisissez le code reçu dans votre application Telegram, ou connectez-vous en utilisant le Code QR, ouvrez l'application Telegram sur votre téléphone, go to Settings > Devices > Numériser QR, numérisez l'image pour vous connecter. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser Telegram au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Rainbow Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Rainbow, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Rainbow, enregistrez un nouveau compte en cliquant sur le bouton Inscription ou connectez-vous à un compte déjà créé. Pour le faire, saisissez votre email dans le champ correspondant et cliquez sur Continuer, puis saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte, cochez la case Maintenir ma session lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Connecter. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à chatter dans Rainbow et travailler au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en même temps." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow. Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur . Telegram Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Telegram, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone dans le champ correspondant, cochez la case Rester connecté lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Suivant, saisissez le code reçu dans votre application Telegram, ou connectez-vous en utilisant le Code QR, ouvrez l'application Telegram sur votre téléphone, passez à Paramètres > Appareils > Numériser QR, numérisez l'image pour vous connecter. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser Telegram au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Rainbow Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Rainbow, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Rainbow, enregistrez un nouveau compte en cliquant sur le bouton Inscription ou connectez-vous à un compte déjà créé. Pour le faire, saisissez votre email dans le champ correspondant et cliquez sur Continuer, puis saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte, cochez la case Maintenir ma session lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Connecter. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à chatter dans Rainbow et travailler au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en même temps." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm", @@ -143,12 +153,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "title": "Créer des listes", - "body": "Pour créer une liste dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, placez le curseur dans le bloc de texte à la position où vous voulez commencer la liste (cela peut être une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi), passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type de liste à créer : Liste non ordonnée avec des marqueurs est créée à l'aide de l'icône Puces de la barre d'outils supérieure Liste ordonnée avec numérotage spécial est créée à l'aide de l'icône Numérotation de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Puces ou Numérotation pour sélectionner le format de puces ou de numérotation souhaité. appuyez sur la touche Entrée à la fin de la ligne pour ajouter un nouvel élément à la liste. Pour terminer la liste, appuyez sur la touche Retour arrière et continuez le travail. Il est aussi possible de modifier le retrait et l'imbrication des listes en utilisant des icônes Diminuer le retrait et Augmenter le retrait sous l'onglet Acceuil de la barre barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : on peut configurer les paramètres du retrait et de l'espacement supplémentaire sur la barre latérale droite dans la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Pour en savoir plus, consultez Insertion en mise en forme du texte. Configurer les paramètres de la liste Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste comme la puce, la taille et la couleur : cliquez sur l'élément de la liste actuelle ou sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer une liste, cliquez sur l'icône Puces ou Numérotation sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils en haut, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste, la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste à puces se présente sous cet aspect : Type - permet de sélectionner le caractère nécessaire utilisé pour la liste. Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle puce, la fenêtre Symbole s'ouvre et vous pouvez choisir l'un des caractères disponibles. Vous pouvez également ajouter un nouveau symbole. Pour en savoir plus sur le travail avec les symboles, veuillez consulter cet article. Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle image, un nouveau champ Importer va apparaître dans lequel vous pouvez choisir de nouvelles images pour les puces Depuis un fichier, D'une URL, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage. Taille - permet de sélectionner la taille des puces nécessaire en fonction de la taille actuelle du texte. La taille peut être configuré de 25% à 400%. Couleur - permet de choisir la couleur des puces nécessaire. Vous pouvez choisir l'une des couleurs de thème, ou des couleurs standard de la palette ou définir la couleur personnalisée. La fenêtre des paramètres de la liste numérotée se présente sous cet aspect : Type - permet de sélectionner le format des numéros nécessaire utilisé pour la liste. Taille - permet de sélectionner la taille des numéros nécessaire en fonction de la taille actuelle du texte. La taille peut être configuré de 25% à 400%. Commencer par - permet de sélectionner le numéro de séquence nécessaire à partir duquel une liste numérotée commence. Couleur - permet de choisir la couleur des numéros nécessaire. Vous pouvez choisir l'une des couleurs de thème, ou des couleurs standard de la palette ou définir la couleur personnalisée. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre des paramètres." + "body": "Pour créer une liste dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, placez le curseur dans le bloc de texte à la position où vous voulez commencer la liste (cela peut être une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi), passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type de liste à créer : Liste non ordonnée avec des marqueurs est créée à l'aide de l'icône Puces de la barre d'outils supérieure Liste ordonnée avec numérotage spécial est créée à l'aide de l'icône Numérotation de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône Puces ou Numérotation pour sélectionner le format de puces ou de numérotation souhaité. appuyez sur la touche Entrée à la fin de la ligne pour ajouter un nouvel élément à la liste. Pour terminer la liste, appuyez sur la touche Retour arrière et continuez le travail. Il est aussi possible de modifier le retrait et l'imbrication des listes en utilisant des icônes Diminuer le retrait et Augmenter le retrait sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : on peut configurer les paramètres du retrait et de l'espacement supplémentaire sur la barre latérale droite dans la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Pour en savoir plus, consultez Insertion en mise en forme du texte. Configurer les paramètres de la liste Pour configurer les paramètres de la liste comme la puce, la taille et la couleur : cliquez sur l'élément de la liste actuelle ou sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer une liste, cliquez sur l'icône Puces ou Numérotation sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils en haut, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de la liste, la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste s'affiche. La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste à puces se présente sous cet aspect : Type - permet de sélectionner le caractère nécessaire utilisé pour la liste. Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle puce, la fenêtre Symbole s'ouvre et vous pouvez choisir l'un des caractères disponibles. Vous pouvez également ajouter un nouveau symbole. Pour en savoir plus sur le travail avec les symboles, veuillez consulter cet article. Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle image, un nouveau champ Importer va apparaître dans lequel vous pouvez choisir de nouvelles images pour les puces Depuis un fichier, D'une URL, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage. Taille - permet de sélectionner la taille des puces nécessaire en fonction de la taille actuelle du texte. La taille peut être configuré de 25% à 400%. Couleur - permet de choisir la couleur des puces nécessaire. Vous pouvez choisir l'une des couleurs de thème, ou des couleurs standard de la palette ou définir la couleur personnalisée. La fenêtre des paramètres de la liste numérotée se présente sous cet aspect : Type - permet de sélectionner le format des numéros nécessaire utilisé pour la liste. Taille - permet de sélectionner la taille des numéros nécessaire en fonction de la taille actuelle du texte. La taille peut être configuré de 25% à 400%. Commencer par - permet de sélectionner le numéro de séquence nécessaire à partir duquel une liste numérotée commence. Couleur - permet de choisir la couleur des numéros nécessaire. Vous pouvez choisir l'une des couleurs de thème, ou des couleurs standard de la palette ou définir la couleur personnalisée. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre des paramètres." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Dessiner à main levée sur une diapositive", + "body": "Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez utiliser l'onglet Dessiner pour dessiner à main levée, ajouter des notes manuscrites, mettre en surbrillance du texte et effacer sur votre présentation. Pour dessiner, écrire ou mettre en surbrillance du texte, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur et déplacez le curseur. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement pour personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du trait. Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs lorsque la couleur nécessaire manque à la palette. Lorsque vous avez fini de dessiner, d'écrire ou de surligner, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur encore une fois, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap. Cliquez sur l'outil Gomme et déplacez le curseur d'avant en arrière pour effacer le trait. La Gomme efface uniquement le trait entier. Utilisez le bouton Sélectionner pour sélectionner l'inscription, le dessin ou la mise en surbrillance. Une fois sélectionné, il est possible de redimensionner ou supprimer l'élément." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm", "title": "Remplir des objets et sélectionner des couleurs", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez appliquer de différents remplissages pour l'arrière-plan de diapositives ainsi que pour les formes automatiques et l'arrière-plan de Text Art. Sélectionnez un objet. Pour modifier le remplissage de l'arrière-plan de la diapositive, sélectionnez les diapositives voulues dans la liste des diapositives. L'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. Pour modifier le remplissage de la forme automatique, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris la forme automatique concernée. L'onglet Paramètres de la forme sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. Pour modifier le remplissage de la police Text Art, cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur l'objet texte concerné. L'onglet Paramètres Text Art sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. Définissez le type de remplissage nécessaire. Réglez les paramètres du remplissage sélectionné (voir la description détaillée de chaque type de remplissage ci-après) Remarque : Quel que soit le type de remplissage sélectionné, vous pouvez toujours régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Les types de remplissage disponibles sont les suivants Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme / diapositive sélectionnée. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur que vous aimez : Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la présentation. Une fois que vous avez appliqué un thème ou un jeu de couleurs différent, le jeu de Couleurs du thème change. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case bafin que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à votre objet et ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu. Remarque : vous pouvez utiliser les mêmes types de couleurs lors de la sélection de la couleur du trait de la forme automatique, ou lors du changement de la couleur de police ou de l'arrière-plan de tableau ou la couleur de bordure. Dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme pour ouvrir le menu de Remplissage : Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle). Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle. Angle - spécifiez l'angle selon lequel les couleurs se fondent. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt où une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé et le bouton Supprimer le point de dégradé pour le supprimer. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner l'image et ajoutez une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en la sélectionnant sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la diapositive ou de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage." + "body": "Dans l'éditeur de présentations, vous pouvez appliquer de différents remplissages pour l'arrière-plan de diapositives ainsi que pour les formes automatiques et l'arrière-plan de Text Art. Sélectionnez un objet Pour modifier le remplissage de l'arrière-plan de la diapositive, sélectionnez les diapositives voulues dans la liste des diapositives. L'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. Pour modifier le remplissage de la forme automatique, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris la forme automatique concernée. Paramètres de la forme sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. L'onglet Paramètres de la forme sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. Pour modifier le remplissage de la police Text Art, cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur l'objet texte concerné. L'onglet Paramètres Text Art sera activé sur la barre latérale droite. Définissez le type de remplissage nécessaire. Réglez les paramètres du remplissage sélectionné (voir la description détaillée de chaque type de remplissage ci-après) Quel que soit le type de remplissage sélectionné pour les formes automatiques et la police de Text Art, vous pouvez également définir le niveau d'opacité en faisant glisser le curseur ou saisissez la valeur manuellement. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Les types de remplissage disponibles sont les suivants: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme/diapositive. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur que vous aimez: Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette/jeu de couleurs sélectionné dans la présentation. Une fois que vous avez appliqué un thème ou un jeu de couleurs différent, l'ensemble de Couleurs de thème changera. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans la présentation. Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes. Vous pouvez utiliser les mêmes types de couleurs lors de la sélection de la couleur du trait de la forme automatique, ou lors du changement de la couleur de l'arrière-plan du tableau ou la couleur de la bordure. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour définir deux couleurs et remplir la forme/diapositive avec une transition douce entre elles. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme pour ouvrir le menu de Remplissage: Style - choisissez une des options disponibles: Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle). Direction la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée s'affiche dans la fenêtre d'aperçu de la direction, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle. Angle - spécifiez l'angle selon lequel les couleurs se fondent. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt où une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé et le bouton Supprimer le point de dégradé pour le supprimer. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme/diapositive. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme / diapositive, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner l'image et ajoutez une image À partir d'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur votre ordinateur ou À partir d'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme/diapositive, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les palettes disponibles sont les suivants: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Étirement ou Mosaïque de la liste déroulante. L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la diapositive ou de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, le cas échéant. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour choisir un modèle à deux couleurs composé d'éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", @@ -158,12 +173,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insérer et mettre en forme des formes automatiques", - "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour ajouter une forme automatique à une diapositive dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une forme automatique dans la liste des diapositives à gauche. cliquez sur l'icône Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou sur la flèche déroulante de la Galerie de formes dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles dans la Galerie des formes : Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique voulue du groupe sélectionné, dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, Remarque : vous pouvez cliquer et faire glisser pour étirer la forme. après avoir ajouté la forme automatique vous pouvez modifier sa taille, sa position et ses propriétés. Remarque : pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Il est possible d'ajouter une forme automatique à la disposition d'une diapositive. Pour en sqvoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Modifier les paramètres de la forme automatique Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à appliquer aux diapositives sélectionnées. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs et remplir la forme avec une transition douce entre elles. Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour choisir un modèle à deux couleurs composé d'éléments répétés. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Pour en savoir plus consultez le chapitre Remplir les objets et sélectionner les couleurs. Ligne - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du ligne de la forme automatique. Pour modifier la largeur du contour, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas de contour. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Vous pouvez utiliser la couleur de thème sélectionnée, une couleur standard ou choisir une couleur personnalisée. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante. Ajouter une ombre - cochez cette case pour affichage de la forme ombré. Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu contextuel ou cliquez avec le bouton gauche et utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Propriétés de la forme s'ouvre : L'onglet Emplacement vous permet de modifier la Largeur et/ou Hauteur de la forme automatique. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (auquel cas il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps et le ratio d'aspect de la forme automatique originale sera préservé. Vous pouvez également saisir la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants : Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : Type de litterine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc. : Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée des listes déroulantes. L'onglet Zone de texte contient les paramètres suivants : Ajuster automatiquement - pour modifier la façon dont le texte est affiché à l'intérieur de la forme : Ne pas ajuster automatiquement, Rétrécir le texte dans la zone de débordement uniquement, Redimensionner la forme pour ajuster le texte. L'onglet Marges intérieures - afin de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite de la forme automatique (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau. Pour remplacer la forme automatique, cliquez dessus avec le bouton gauche de la souris et utilisez la liste déroulante Modifier la forme automatique dans l'onglet Paramètres de forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour supprimer la forme automatique ajoutée, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer. Pour apprendre à aligner une forme automatique sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs formes, reportez-vous à la section Aligner et organiser les objets dans une diapositive. Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour le faire, cliquez sur l'icône Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre), passez le curseur de la souris sur la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexions apparaissant sur le contour, faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la deuxième forme automatique et cliquez sur le point de connexion voulu sur son contour. Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles. Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion." + "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour ajouter une forme automatique à une diapositive dans l'éditeur de présentations, sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une forme automatique dans la liste des diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur l'icône Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou sur la flèche déroulante de la Galerie de formes dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles depuis la Galerie de formes: Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive, placez le curseur de la souris à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer la forme, Remarque: vous pouvez cliquer et faire glisser pour étirer la forme. une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier le taille, la position et les paramètres de la forme. Vous pouvez sauvegarder la forme en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Remarque: pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée sur la diapositive et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (lorsque vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte se déplace avec la forme). Il est également possible d'ajouter une forme à une disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Copier la mise en forme du style de la forme automatique Pour copier la mise en forme du style d'une forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme automatique dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, cliquez l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci ), sélectionnez la forme automatique à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme. Ajuster les paramètres de la forme automatique Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur la forme automatique et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants: Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sert à spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir la forme sélectionnée. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs et remplir la forme avec une transition douce entre elles. Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour choisir un modèle à deux couleurs composé d'éléments répétés. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Pour en savoir plus consultez la section Remplir les objets et sélectionner les couleurs . Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas de contour. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Vous pouvez utiliser la couleur de thème sélectionnée, une couleur standard ou choisir une couleur personnalisée. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante. Ajouter une ombre sert à afficher une ombre portée à une forme. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés d'une forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de la forme dans menu contextuel ou cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre paramètres de la forme s'ouvre: L'onglet Emplacement vous permet de modifier la Largeur et/ou la Hauteur de la forme automatique. Lorsque le bouton Verrouiller les proportions est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps et le ratio d'aspect de la forme automatique originale sera préservé. Vous pouvez également saisir la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants: Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants: Style de la ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants: Type de bouchon - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin du trait, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle: Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque: l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il est possible de définir le Style de début, le Style final et la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. L'onglet Zone de texte comprend les options suivantes: Ajuster automatiquement - pour modifier la façon dont le texte est affiché à l'intérieur de la forme: L'onglet Marges intérieures - afin de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite de la forme automatique (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Ne pas ajuster automatiquement, Rétrécir le texte dans la zone de débordement uniquement, Redimensionner la forme pour ajuster le texte. Marges intérieures permet de modifier les marges intérieures de la forme En haut, En bas, À gauche, À droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque: cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information inclus dans la forme. Pour remplacer la forme automatique, cliquez dessus avec le bouton gauche de la souris et utilisez la liste déroulante Modifier la forme automatique dans l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour supprimer la forme automatique ajoutée, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer. Pour apprendre à aligner une forme automatique sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs images, veuillez consulter la section Aligner et organiser les objets sur une diapositive. Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'icône Forme dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre), faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexion qui s'affiche sur le contour de la forme, faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la deuxième forme automatique et cliquez sur le point de connexion voulu sur son contour. Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles. Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insérer et modifier des graphiques", - "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans Presentation Editor, Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer un graphique, Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié: Graphique à colonnes Histogramme groupé Histogramme empilé Histogramme empilé 100% Histogramme groupé en 3D Histogramme empilé en 3D Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D Histogrammes en 3D Graphiques en ligne Ligne Lignes empilées Lignes empilées 100% Lignes avec marques de données Lignes empilées avec marques de données Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données Lignes 3D Graphiques en secteurs Secteurs Donut Camembert 3D Graphiques à barres Barres groupées Barres empilées Barres empilées 100 % Barres groupées en 3D Barres empilées en 3D Barres empilées 100 % en 3D Graphiques en aires Aires Aires empilées Aires empilées 100% Graphiques boursiers Nuage de points (XY) Disperser Barres empilées Disperser avec lignes lissées et marqueurs Disperser avec lignes lissées Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs Disperser avec des lignes droites Graphiques Combo Histogramme groupé - lignes Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire Aires empilées - histogramme groupé Combinaison personnalisée Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles. Lorsque la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique s'affiche, vous pouvez saisir les données en utilisant des boutons suivants: et pour copier et coller des données et pour annuler et rétablir une action pour insérer une fonction et pour réduire et ajouter une décimale modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi pour modifier le type de graphique. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélection de données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche. Utiliser la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, la Série de la légende, le Nom de l'axe horizontal, et Changer de ligne ou de colonne. Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. Série de la légende - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. Dans la Série de la légende, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom. Nom de l'axe horizontal - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'axe horizontal cliquez sur Modifier. Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. Changer de ligne ou de colonne - modifier le façon de traçage des données dans la feuille de calcul. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Nuages de points (XY), Boursier. Lorsque vous choisissez Graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire. Paramétrer le graphique en cliquant sur Modifier le graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés s'affiche. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher de légende, En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données): Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Centre, À gauche, À droite, En haut. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, Ligne, Barres et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre. Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur, Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont disponibles sur les graphiques Combo uniquement. Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement. L'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal. Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires. Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical. Position de l'étiquette - est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduation ou Entre graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations principales sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: Type principal/secondaire est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les marques - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories. Position de l'étiquette est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe. Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande. Intervalle entre les étiquettes - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du graphique si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Une fois le graphique ajouté, on peut également modifier sa taille et sa position. Vous pouvez définir la position du graphique sur la diapositive en le faisant glisser à l'horizontale/verticale. On peut ajouter un graphique dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Graphique à l'intérieur de l'espace et en sélectionnant le type du graphique approprié: On peut aussi ajouter un graphique à la disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur. Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage, le Trait et le Style d'habillage de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans le panneau droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, taille et type. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cet page. Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique. Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément. Pour modifier la position d'un élément, cliquez sur cet élément avec le bouton gauche de souris, vérifiez si le curseur est devenu , maintenez le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé et faites-le glisser vers la position souhaité. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Ajuster les paramètres du graphique Modifiez la taille, le type et le style du graphique aussi que les données utilisés pour créer un graphique sur la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le graphique et sélectionne l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. La section Taille vous permet de modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. La section Modifier le type de graphique vous permet de modifier le type et/ou le style de graphique sélectionné à l'aide du menu déroulant correspondant. Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique. Le bouton Modifier les données vous permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique et d'éditer les données comme décrit ci-dessus. Remarque: pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre Éditeur de graphiques, vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document. En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D: Rotation X - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe X en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Gauche et Droite. Rotation Y - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe Y en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Haut et Bas. Perspective - définissez la valeur appropriée de profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Rétrécir le champ ou Élargir le champ. Axes à angle droit sert à définir l'angle de l'axe à droite. Mise à l'échelle automatique - activez cette option pour mettre automatiquement à l'échelle la profondeur et la hauteur du graphique ou désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement la profondeur et la hauteur. Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. Veuillez noter que c'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble. L'option Afficher les paramètres avancés dans la barre latérale droite permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés dans laquelle vous pouvez configurer le paramètres suivants: L'onglet Emplacement permet de modifier les paramètres suivants: Taille utilisez cet option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Position définissez la position exacte à l'aide des champs Horizontal et Vertical, aussi que le champ De pour accéder aux tels paramètres comme Coin supérieur gauche et Centre. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Pour supprimer un graphique inséré, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Pour apprendre à aligner un graphique sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs objets, reportez-vous à la section Aligner et organiser les objets dans une diapositive ." + "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans l'éditeur de présentations, Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer un graphique, Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié: Graphique à colonnes Histogramme groupé Histogramme empilé Histogramme empilé 100 % Histogramme groupé en 3D Histogramme empilé en 3D Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D Histogrammes en 3D Graphiques en ligne Ligne Lignes empilées Lignes empilées 100% Lignes avec marques de données Lignes empilées avec marques de données Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données Lignes 3D Graphiques en secteurs Secteurs Donut Camembert 3D Graphiques à barres Barres groupées Barres empilées Barres empilées 100 % Barres groupées en 3D Barres empilées en 3D Barres empilées 100 % en 3D Graphiques en aires Aires Aires empilées Aires empilées 100 % Graphiques boursiers Nuage de points (XY) Disperser Barres empilées Disperser avec lignes lissées et marqueurs Disperser avec lignes lissées Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs Disperser avec des lignes droites Radars Radar Radar avec marqueurs Radar plein Graphiques Combo Histogramme groupé - Courbe Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire Aires empilées - histogramme groupé Combinaison personnalisée Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles. Lorsque la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique s'affiche, vous pouvez saisir les données en utilisant des boutons suivants: et pour copier et coller des données et pour annuler et rétablir une action pour insérer une fonction et pour réduire et ajouter une décimale modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi pour modifier le type de graphique. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélection de données dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Données du graphique s'affiche. Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, les Entrées de légende (Série), le Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), et Intervertir ligne/colonne. Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. Entrées de légende (Série) - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. Dans Entrées de légende (Série), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom. Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse) - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe. Dans Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), cliquez sur Modifier. Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. Intervertir ligne/colonne - réorganiser la configuration de données dans la feuille de calcul selon vos besoins. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe. Cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le type de graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique pour choisir le type et le style du graphique. Sélectionnez le graphique approprié dans des sections disponibles: Colonne, Graphique en ligne, Graphique à secteurs, En barres, En aires, Boursier, Nuages de points (XY), Radar, Combo. Lorsque vous choisissez graphiques Combo, la fenêtre Type de graphique représente les séries du graphiques et permet de choisir les types de graphiques à combiner et de sélectionner la série de données à placer sur l'axe secondaire. Paramétrer le graphique en cliquant sur Modifier le graphique dans la fenêtre Éditeur du graphique. La fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés s'affiche. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Définissez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option appropriée dans la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher la légende, En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données): Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, En bas à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, À droite, À gauche, En haut, En bas. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques En aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, En ligne, En barres, Radar et Combo vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre. Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de série, Nom de catégorie, Valeur, Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical, Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du quadrillage vertical que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun, Principal, Secondaire ou Principales et secondaires. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes sur la Valeur minimale/maximale sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - sert à déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. Échelle logarithmique - sert à activer l'échelle logarithmique pour la Base définie par l'utilisateur. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, En dehors pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont disponibles sur les graphiques Combo uniquement. Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement. L'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Veuillez noter que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal. Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimale/maximale (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe horizontal. Position de l'axe - sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduations ou Entre graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: Type principale/secondaire - sert à spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les graduations - sert à spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories. Position de l'étiquette sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe. Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - sert à spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande. Intervalle entre les étiquettes - sert à spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton Format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. L'onglet Accrochage à la cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du graphique si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Une fois le graphique ajouté, on peut également modifier sa taille et sa position. Vous pouvez définir la position du graphique sur la diapositive en le faisant glisser à l'horizontale/verticale. On peut ajouter un graphique dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Graphique à l'intérieur de l'espace et en sélectionnant le type du graphique approprié: On peut aussi ajouter un graphique à la disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur. Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder à l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et la Ligne de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme sur le panneau de droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, largeur, taille et opacité. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et des traits veuillez accéder à cette page. Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique. Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément. Pour modifier la position d'un élément, cliquez sur cet élément avec le bouton gauche de souris, vérifiez si le curseur est devenu , maintenez le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé et faites-le glisser vers la position souhaité. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Ajuster les paramètres du graphique Modifiez la taille, le type et le style du graphique aussi que les données utilisés pour créer un graphique sur la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le graphique et sélectionne l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. La section Taille vous permet de modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. La section Modifier le type de graphique vous permet de modifier le type et/ou le style de graphique sélectionné à l'aide du menu déroulant correspondant. Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique. Le bouton Modifier les données vous permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique et d'éditer les données comme décrit ci-dessus. Remarque: pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre Éditeur de graphiques, vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document. En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D: Rotation X - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe X en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Gauche et Droite. Rotation Y - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe Y en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Haut et Bas. Perspective - définissez la valeur appropriée de profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Rétrécir le champ ou Élargir le champ. Axes à angle droit sert à définir l'angle de l'axe à droite. Mise à l'échelle automatique - activez cette option pour mettre automatiquement à l'échelle la profondeur et la hauteur du graphique ou désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement la profondeur et la hauteur. Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. Veuillez noter que c'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble. L'option Afficher les paramètres avancés dans la barre latérale droite permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés dans laquelle vous pouvez configurer le paramètres suivants: L'onglet Emplacement permet de modifier les paramètres suivants: Taille utilisez cet option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Position définissez la position exacte à l'aide des champs Horizontal et Vertical, aussi que le champ De pour accéder aux tels paramètres comme Coin supérieur gauche et Centre. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Pour supprimer un graphique inséré, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Pour apprendre à aligner un graphique sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs objets, reportez-vous à la section Aligner et organiser les objets dans une diapositive ." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", @@ -173,32 +188,32 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "title": "Insérer les pieds de page", - "body": "Les pieds de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une diapositive, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de la diapositive ou un texte. Pour insérer un pied de page dans l'Éditeur de Présentations : Passez à l'onglet Insertion Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le pied de page dans la barre d'outils supérieure, La fenêtre Paramètres des pieds de page s'ouvre. Cochez le type de données que vous souhaitez ajouter dans le pied de page. Les modifications sont affichées dans la fenêtre d'aperçu à droite. Cochez la case Date et heure pour insérer une date ou une heure dans un format sélectionné. La date sélectionnée sera ajoutée au champ gauche du pied de page de la diapositive. Spécifiez le format de données : Mettre à jour automatiquement - sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez mettre à jour automatiquement la date et l'heure en fonction de la date et de l'heure actuelles. Sélectionnez ensuite le Format de date et d'heure et la Langue dans les listes déroulantes. Corrigé - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas mettre à jour automatiquement la date et l'heure. Cochez la case Numéro de diapositive pour insérer le numéro de diapositive en cours. Le numéro de la diapositive sera ajouté dans le champ droit du pied de page de la diapositive. Cochez la case Texte en pied de page pour insérer le texte. Saisissez le texte nécessaire dans le champ de saisie ci-dessous. Le texte sera ajouté dans le champ central du pied de page de la diapositive. Cochez l'option Ne pas afficher sur la diapositive titre, si nécessaire, Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tous pour appliquer les modifications à toutes les diapositives ou utilisez le bouton Appliquer pour appliquer les modifications à la diapositive actuelle uniquement. Pour insérer rapidement une date ou un numéro de diapositive dans le pied de page de la diapositive sélectionnée, vous pouvez utiliser les options Afficher le numéro de diapositive et Afficher la date et l'heure dans l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive de la barre latérale droite. Dans ce cas, les paramètres sélectionnés seront appliqués à la diapositive actuelle uniquement. La date et l'heure ou le numéro de diapositive ajoutés de cette manière peuvent être ajustés ultérieurement à l'aide de la fenêtre Paramètres de pied de page Pour modifier le pied de page ajouté, cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le pied de page dans la barre d'outils supérieure, apportez les modifications nécessaires dans la fenêtre Paramètres de pied de page, puis cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer ou Appliquer à tous pour enregistrer les modifications. Insérer la date et l'heure et le numéro de diapositive dans la zone de texte Il est également possible d'insérer la date et l'heure ou le numéro de diapositive dans la zone de texte sélectionnée à l'aide des boutons correspondants de l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Insérer la date et l'heure Placez le curseur de la souris dans la zone de texte où vous souhaitez insérer la date et l'heure, Cliquez sur le bouton Date & Heure dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez la Langue nécessaire dans la liste et choisissez le Format de date et d'heure nécessaire dans la fenêtre Date & Heure, Si nécessaire, cochez la case Mettre à jour automatiquement ou sélectionnez l'option Définir par défaut pour définir le format de date et d'heure sélectionné par défaut pour la langue spécifiée, Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications. La date et l'heure seront insérées à la position actuelle du curseur. Pour modifier la date et l'heure insérées, sélectionnez la date et l'heure insérées dans la zone de texte, cliquez sur le bouton Date & Heure dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, Choisissez le format nécessaire dans la fenêtre Date & Heure, Cliquez sur OK. Insérer un numéro de diapositive Placez le curseur de la souris dans la zone de texte ou vous souhaitez insérer le numéro de diapositive, Cliquez sur le bouton Numéro de diapositive dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, Cochez la case Numéro de diapositive dans la fenêtre Paramètres de pied de page, Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications. Le numéro de diapositive sera inséré à la position actuelle du curseur." + "body": "Les pieds de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une diapositive, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de la diapositive ou un texte. Pour insérer un pied de page dans l'Éditeur de Présentations : Passez à l'onglet Insertion. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le pied de page dans la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Paramètres des pieds de page s'ouvre. Cochez le type de données que vous souhaitez ajouter dans le pied de page. Les modifications sont affichées dans la fenêtre d'aperçu à droite. Cochez la case Date et heure pour insérer une date ou une heure dans un format sélectionné. La date sélectionnée sera ajoutée au champ gauche du pied de page de la diapositive. Spécifiez le format de données : Mettre à jour automatiquement - sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez mettre à jour automatiquement la date et l'heure en fonction de la date et de l'heure actuelles. Sélectionnez ensuite le Format de date et d'heure et la Langue dans les listes déroulantes. Corrigé - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas mettre à jour automatiquement la date et l'heure. Cochez la case Numéro de diapositive pour insérer le numéro de diapositive en cours. Le numéro de la diapositive sera ajouté dans le champ droit du pied de page de la diapositive. Cochez la case Texte en pied de page pour insérer le texte. Saisissez le texte nécessaire dans le champ de saisie ci-dessous. Le texte sera ajouté dans le champ central du pied de page de la diapositive. Cochez l'option Ne pas afficher sur la diapositive titre, si nécessaire. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tous pour appliquer les modifications à toutes les diapositives ou utilisez le bouton Appliquer pour appliquer les modifications à la diapositive actuelle uniquement. Pour insérer rapidement une date ou un numéro de diapositive dans le pied de page de la diapositive sélectionnée, vous pouvez utiliser les options Afficher le numéro de diapositive et Afficher la date et l'heure dans l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive de la barre latérale droite. Dans ce cas, les paramètres sélectionnés seront appliqués à la diapositive actuelle uniquement. La date et l'heure ou le numéro de diapositive ajoutés de cette manière peuvent être ajustés ultérieurement à l'aide de la fenêtre Paramètres de pied de page. Pour modifier le pied de page ajouté, cliquez sur le bouton Modifier le pied de page dans la barre d'outils supérieure, apportez les modifications nécessaires dans la fenêtre Paramètres de pied de page, puis cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer ou Appliquer à tous pour enregistrer les modifications. Insérer la date et l'heure et le numéro de diapositive dans la zone de texte Il est également possible d'insérer la date et l'heure ou le numéro de diapositive dans la zone de texte sélectionnée à l'aide des boutons correspondants de l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Insérer la date et l'heure Placez le curseur de la souris dans la zone de texte où vous souhaitez insérer la date et l'heure, Cliquez sur le bouton Date & Heure dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez la Langue nécessaire dans la liste et choisissez le Format de date et d'heure nécessaire dans la fenêtre Date & Heure, Si nécessaire, cochez la case Mettre à jour automatiquement ou sélectionnez l'option Définir par défaut pour définir le format de date et d'heure sélectionné par défaut pour la langue spécifiée. Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications. La date et l'heure seront insérées à la position actuelle du curseur. Pour modifier la date et l'heure insérées, sélectionnez la date et l'heure insérées dans la zone de texte, cliquez sur le bouton Date & Heure dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, Choisissez le format nécessaire dans la fenêtre Date & Heure, Cliquez sur OK. Insérer un numéro de diapositive Placez le curseur de la souris dans la zone de texte ou vous souhaitez insérer le numéro de diapositive, Cliquez sur le bouton Numéro de diapositive dans l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, Cochez la case Numéro de diapositive dans la fenêtre Paramètres de pied de page, Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications. Le numéro de diapositive sera inséré à la position actuelle du curseur." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insérer et modifier des images", - "body": "Insérer une image Éditeur de Présentations vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre présentation. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Pour ajouter une image à une diapositive, sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une image dans la liste des diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur l'icône Image dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir Dans l’éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à la fois. l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses paramètres et sa position. On peut ajouter une image dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Image à partir d'un fichier à l'intérieur de l'espace et sélectionner l'image stockée sur votre ordinateur, ou utiliser le bouton Image à partir d'une URL et saisissez l'adresse URL de l'image : On peut aussi ajouter une image à la disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image La barre latérale droite est activée lorsque vous cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur une image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Elle comporte les sections suivantes : Taille - permet d'afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle ou de restaurer la Taille par défaut de l'image si nécessaire. Le bouton Rogner sert à recadrer l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez positionner le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage lorsque il se transforme en et faites la glisser. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir ou Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix : Si vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le poiunteur de la soiris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent Remplacer l'image - est utilisé pour charger une autre image à la place de celle en cours en sélectionnant la source désirée. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : A partir du fichier, Image de stockage ou A partir de l'URL. L'option Remplacer l'image est également disponible dans le menu contextuel. Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers) Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type du Ligne la taille et la couleur de la forme ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre : L'onglet Emplacement vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants : Taille - utilisez cette options pour modifier la largeur/hauteur de l'image. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (Ajouter un ombre) ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Position - saisissez la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement, ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image. Pour supprimer une image insérée, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer Pour apprendre à aligner une image sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs images, reportez-vous à la section Aligner et organiser les objets dans une diapositive ." + "body": "Insérer une image L'éditeur de présentations vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre présentation. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Pour ajouter une image à une diapositive, sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une image dans la liste des diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur l'icône Image dans l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner un fichier. Recherchez le fichier nécessaire sur votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir Dans l'éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionnez plusieurs images à la fois. l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre dans laquelle il faut saisir l'adresse Web de l'image, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK une fois ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier la taille, les paramètres et la position de l'image. Vous pouvez sauvegarder l'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Il est possible d'ajouter une image dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Image à partir d'un fichier à l'intérieur de l'espace et sélectionner l'image stockée sur votre ordinateur, ou utiliser le bouton Image à partir d'une URL et saisissez l'adresse URL de l'image: Il est également possible d'ajouter une image à une disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image La barre latérale droite est activée lorsque vous cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur une image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Elle comporte les sections suivantes: Taille - permet d'afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle ou de restaurer la Taille actuelle de l'image si nécessaire. Le bouton Rogner sert à recadrer l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez placer le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de rognage lorsque il se transforme en icône et faites glisser la zone. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix: Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplissage, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée. Remplacer l'image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre image à partir d'une source préférée. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: À partir d'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou À partir d'une URL. L'option Remplacer l'image est également disponible dans le menu contextuel. Rotation permet de faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers) Une fois l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme deviendra aussi disponible à droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur et l'opacité de la Ligne ainsi que le type de la forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés d'une image, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de l'image dans menu contextuel ou cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur une image et cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre: L'onglet Emplacement permet de modifier les paramètres suivants: Taille utilisez cet option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Position définissez la position exacte à l'aide des champs Horizontalement et Verticalement, aussi que le champ De pour accéder aux tels paramètres comme Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants: Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information inclus dans limage. Pour supprimer une image insérée, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer. Pour apprendre à aligner une image sur la diapositive ou à organiser plusieurs images, veuillez consulter la section Aligner et organiser les objets sur une diapositive." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt dans ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor", - "body": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers. Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt, passez à l'onglet Insertion, cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt, placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite: Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage du graphique SmartArt. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que le graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options Prolonger ouTuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface du graphique SmartArt afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour accéder aux paramètres avancés." + "body": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers. Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt, passez à l'onglet Insertion, cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt, placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez sauvegarder un graphique SmartArt en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite: Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme. Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage du graphique SmartArt. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que le graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options Prolonger ouTuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface du graphique SmartArt afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur. Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour accéder aux paramètres avancés." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "title": "Insérer des symboles et des caractères", - "body": "Pendant le processus de travail dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous devrez peut-être insérer un symbole qui n'est pas sur votre clavier. Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre présentation, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples : placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un symbole spécifique, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur Symbole, De la fenêtre Symbole qui apparaît sélectionnez le symbole approprié, utilisez la section Plage pour trouvez rapidement le symbole nécessaire. Tous les symboles sont divisés en groupes spécifiques, par exemple, sélectionnez des «symboles monétaires» spécifiques si vous souhaitez insérer un caractère monétaire. Si ce caractère n'est pas dans le jeu, sélectionnez une police différente. Plusieurs d'entre elles ont également des caractères différents que ceux du jeu standard. Ou, entrez la valeur hexadécimale Unicode du symbole souhaité dans le champ Valeur hexadécimale Unicode. Ce code se trouve dans la Carte des caractères. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'onglet Symboles spéciaux pour choisir un symbole spéciale proposé dans la liste. Les symboles précédemment utilisés sont également affichés dans le champ des Caractères spéciaux récemment utilisés, cliquez sur Insérer. Le caractère sélectionné sera ajouté au document. Insérer des symboles ASCII La table ASCII est utilisée pour ajouter des caractères. Pour le faire, maintenez la touche ALT enfoncée et utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le code de caractère. Remarque : utilisez le pavé numérique, pas les chiffres du clavier principal. Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur la touche verrouillage numérique. Par exemple, pour ajouter un caractère de paragraphe (§), maintenez la touche ALT tout en tapant 789, puis relâchez la touche ALT. Insérer des symboles à l'aide de la table des caractères Unicode Des caractères et symboles supplémentaires peuvent également être trouvés dans la table des symboles Windows. Pour ouvrir cette table, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : Dans le champ Rechercher, tapez 'Table de caractères' et ouvrez-la, Appuyez simultanément sur Win+R, puis dans la fenêtre ouverte tapez charmap.exe et cliquez sur OK. Dans la Table des caractères ouverte, sélectionnez l'un des Jeux de caractères, Groupes et Polices. Ensuite, cliquez sur les caractères nécessaires, copiez-les dans le presse-papiers et insérez-les au bon endroit dans la présentation." + "body": "Pendant le processus de travail dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous devrez peut-être insérer un symbole qui n'est pas sur votre clavier. Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre présentation, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples : placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un symbole spécifique, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur Symbole, de la fenêtre Symbole qui apparaît sélectionnez le symbole approprié, utilisez la section Plage pour trouvez rapidement le symbole nécessaire. Tous les symboles sont divisés en groupes spécifiques, par exemple, sélectionnez des «symboles monétaires» spécifiques si vous souhaitez insérer un caractère monétaire. Si ce caractère n'est pas dans le jeu, sélectionnez une police différente. Plusieurs d'entre elles ont également des caractères différents que ceux du jeu standard. Ou, entrez la valeur hexadécimale Unicode du symbole souhaité dans le champ Valeur hexadécimale Unicode. Ce code se trouve dans la Carte des caractères. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'onglet Symboles spéciaux pour choisir un symbole spéciale proposé dans la liste. Les symboles précédemment utilisés sont également affichés dans le champ des Caractères spéciaux récemment utilisés, cliquez sur Insérer. Le caractère sélectionné sera ajouté au document. Insérer des symboles ASCII La table ASCII est utilisée pour ajouter des caractères. Pour le faire, maintenez la touche ALT enfoncée et utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le code de caractère. Remarque : utilisez le pavé numérique, pas les chiffres du clavier principal. Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur la touche verrouillage numérique. Par exemple, pour ajouter un caractère de paragraphe (§), maintenez la touche ALT tout en tapant 789, puis relâchez la touche ALT. Insérer des symboles à l'aide de la table des caractères Unicode Des caractères et symboles supplémentaires peuvent également être trouvés dans la table des symboles Windows. Pour ouvrir cette table, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : Dans le champ Rechercher, tapez 'Table de caractères' et ouvrez-la, Appuyez simultanément sur Win+R, puis dans la fenêtre ouverte tapez charmap.exe et cliquez sur OK. Dans la Table des caractères ouverte, sélectionnez l'un des Jeux de caractères, Groupes et Polices. Ensuite, cliquez sur les caractères nécessaires, copiez-les dans le presse-papiers et insérez-les au bon endroit dans la présentation." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "title": "Insérer et mettre en forme des tableaux", - "body": "Insérer un tableau Pour insérer un tableau sur une diapositive dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, sélectionnez la diapositive où le tableau sera ajouté, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour créer le tableau : soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum) Si vous voulez ajouter rapidement un tableau, il vous suffit de sélectionner le nombre de lignes (8 au maximum) et de colonnes (10 au maximum). soit un tableau personnalisé Si vous avez besoin d'un tableau de plus de 10 par 8 cellules, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre et spécifiez le nombre nécessaire de lignes et de colonnes, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK. lorsque vous voulez insérer un tableau comme un objet OLE : Sélectionnez l'option Insérer la feuille de calcul au menu Tableau dans l'onglet Insérer. La fenêtre correspondante s'ouvre dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir les données requises et les modifier en utilisant les outils de formatage du Tableur, par exemple sélectionner la police, le type et le style, saisir le format de nombre, insérer des functions, mettre en forme les tableaux etc. L'en-tête contient le bouton Zone visible dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Choisissez l'option Modifier la zone visible afin de sélectionner la zone qui sera affichée quand l'objet est inseré au sein du présentation ; les autres données ne sont pas perdues mais seulement masquées. Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque c'est prêt. Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher la zone visible afin d'afficher la zone sélectionnée qui aura une bordure bleue. Quand tout est prêt, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et quitter. après avoir ajouté le tableau, vous pouvez modifier ses paramètres et son position. On peut aussi ajouter un tableau dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Tableau à l'intérieur de l'espace et spécifier le nombre de cellules ou en utilisant l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé : Pour déplacer une tableau, faites glisser les poignées situés sur ses bords jusqu'à ce que la taille du tableau soit atteinte. Vous pouvez également modifier manuellement la largeur d'une certaine colonne ou la hauteur d'une ligne. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure droite de la colonne de sorte que le curseur se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure vers la gauche ou la droite pour définir la largeur nécessaire. Pour modifier manuellement la hauteur d'une seule ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure inférieure de la ligne afin que le curseur devienne la flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers le haut ou le bas. Vous pouvez définir la position du tableau sur la diapositive en le faisant glisser horizontalement ou verticalement. Remarque : pour vous déplacer dans un tableau, vous pouvez utiliser des raccourcis clavier. On peut aussi ajouter un tableau à la disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Ajuster les paramètres du tableau Plusieurs paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le tableau et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. Les sections Lignes et Colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : En-tête - accentue la ligne la plus haute du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Total -accentue la ligne la plus basse du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les lignes paires et impaires. Première - accentue la colonne la plus à gauche du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Dernière - accentue la colonne la plus à droite du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires. La section Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections Lignes et/ou Colonnes ci-dessus, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous avez coché l'option En-tête dans la section Lignes et l'option Bordé dans la section Colonnes, la liste des modèles affichés inclura uniquement les modèles avec la ligne d'en-tête et les colonnes en bandes activées : La section Style de bordure vous permet de modifier la mise en forme appliquée qui correspond au modèle sélectionné. Vous pouvez sélectionner toute la table ou une certaine plage de cellules dont vous souhaitez modifier la mise en forme et définir tous les paramètres manuellement. Paramètres de Bordure - définissez la largeur de la bordure en utilisant la liste (ou choisissez l'option Aucune bordure), sélectionnez sa Couleur dans les palettes disponibles et déterminez la façon dont elle sera affichée dans les cellules en cliquant sur les icônes : Couleur d'arrière-plan - sélectionnez la couleur de l'arrière-plan dans les cellules sélectionnées. La section Lignes et colonnes vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : Sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, une cellule (en fonction de la position du curseur) ou la totalité du tableau. Insérer une nouvelle ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de celle sélectionnée ainsi qu'une nouvelle colonne à gauche ou à droite de celle sélectionnée. Supprimer une ligne, une colonne (en fonction de la position du curseur ou de la sélection) ou la totalité du tableau. Fusionner les cellules - pour fusionner les cellules précédemment sélectionnées en une seule. Fractionner la cellule... - scinder une cellule précédemment sélectionnée en un certain nombre de lignes et de colonnes. Cette option ouvre la fenêtre suivante : Entrez le Nombre de colonnes et le Nombre de lignes en lesquelles la cellule sélectionnée doit être divisée et appuyez sur OK. Remarque : les options de la section Lignes et colonnes sont également accessibles depuis le menu contextuel. Taille de la cellule est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur. Les options Distribuer les lignes/les colonnes sont également accessibles depuis le menu contextuel. Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre : L'onglet Emplacement permet de saisir les paramètres du tableau suivants : Taille - utilisez cette option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du tableau. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect de l'image originale sera préservé. Position - saisissez la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement, ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre. La section Marges permet d'ajuster l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule : entrez manuellement les valeurs de Marges de cellule, ou cochez la case Utiliser les marges par défaut pour appliquer les valeurs prédéfinies (si nécessaire, elles peuvent également être ajustées). L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau. Pour mettre en forme le texte saisi dans les cellules du tableau, vous pouvez utiliser les icônes dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le menu contextuel qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur la table avec le bouton droit de la souris inclut deux options supplémentaires : Alignement vertical des cellules - vous permet de définir le type préféré d'alignement vertical du texte dans les cellules sélectionnées : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas. Lien hypertexte - vous permet d'insérer un lien hypertexte dans la cellule sélectionnée." + "body": "Insérer un tableau Pour insérer un tableau sur une diapositive dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, sélectionnez la diapositive où le tableau sera ajouté, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour créer le tableau : soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum) Si vous voulez ajouter rapidement un tableau, il vous suffit de sélectionner le nombre de lignes (8 au maximum) et de colonnes (10 au maximum). soit un tableau personnalisé Si vous avez besoin d'un tableau de plus de 10 par 8 cellules, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre et spécifiez le nombre nécessaire de lignes et de colonnes, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK. lorsque vous voulez insérer un tableau comme un objet OLE : Sélectionnez l'option Insérer la feuille de calcul au menu Tableau dans l'onglet Insérer. La fenêtre correspondante s'ouvre dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir les données requises et les modifier en utilisant les outils de formatage du Tableur, par exemple sélectionner la police, le type et le style, saisir le format de nombre, insérer des functions, mettre en forme les tableaux etc. L'en-tête contient le bouton Zone visible dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Choisissez l'option Modifier la zone visible afin de sélectionner la zone qui sera affichée quand l'objet est inséré au sein de la présentation ; les autres données ne sont pas perdues mais seulement masquées. Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque c'est prêt. Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher la zone visible afin d'afficher la zone sélectionnée qui aura une bordure bleue. Quand tout est prêt, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et quitter. après avoir ajouté le tableau, vous pouvez modifier ses paramètres et son position. On peut aussi ajouter un tableau dans l'espace réservé en cliquant sur l'icône Tableau à l'intérieur de l'espace et spécifier le nombre de cellules ou en utilisant l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé : Pour déplacer une tableau, faites glisser les poignées situés sur ses bords jusqu'à ce que la taille du tableau soit atteinte. Vous pouvez également modifier manuellement la largeur d'une certaine colonne ou la hauteur d'une ligne. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure droite de la colonne de sorte que le curseur se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure vers la gauche ou la droite pour définir la largeur nécessaire. Pour modifier manuellement la hauteur d'une seule ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure inférieure de la ligne afin que le curseur devienne la flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers le haut ou le bas. Vous pouvez définir la position du tableau sur la diapositive en le faisant glisser horizontalement ou verticalement. Remarque : pour vous déplacer dans un tableau, vous pouvez utiliser des raccourcis clavier. On peut aussi ajouter un tableau à la disposition de diapositive. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter cet article. Ajuster les paramètres du tableau Plusieurs paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le tableau et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. Les sections Lignes et Colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : En-tête - accentue la ligne la plus haute du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Total -accentue la ligne la plus basse du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les lignes paires et impaires. Première - accentue la colonne la plus à gauche du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Dernière - accentue la colonne la plus à droite du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires. La section Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections Lignes et/ou Colonnes ci-dessus, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous avez coché l'option En-tête dans la section Lignes et l'option Bordé dans la section Colonnes, la liste des modèles affichés inclura uniquement les modèles avec la ligne d'en-tête et les colonnes en bandes activées : La section Style de bordure vous permet de modifier la mise en forme appliquée qui correspond au modèle sélectionné. Vous pouvez sélectionner toute la table ou une certaine plage de cellules dont vous souhaitez modifier la mise en forme et définir tous les paramètres manuellement. Paramètres de Bordure - définissez la largeur de la bordure en utilisant la liste (ou choisissez l'option Aucune bordure), sélectionnez sa Couleur dans les palettes disponibles et déterminez la façon dont elle sera affichée dans les cellules en cliquant sur les icônes : Couleur d'arrière-plan - sélectionnez la couleur de l'arrière-plan dans les cellules sélectionnées. La section Lignes et colonnes vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : Sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, une cellule (en fonction de la position du curseur) ou la totalité du tableau. Insérer une nouvelle ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de celle sélectionnée ainsi qu'une nouvelle colonne à gauche ou à droite de celle sélectionnée. Supprimer une ligne, une colonne (en fonction de la position du curseur ou de la sélection) ou la totalité du tableau. Fusionner les cellules - pour fusionner les cellules précédemment sélectionnées en une seule. Fractionner la cellule... - scinder une cellule précédemment sélectionnée en un certain nombre de lignes et de colonnes. Cette option ouvre la fenêtre suivante : Entrez le Nombre de colonnes et le Nombre de lignes en lesquelles la cellule sélectionnée doit être divisée et appuyez sur OK. Remarque : les options de la section Lignes et colonnes sont également accessibles depuis le menu contextuel. Taille de la cellule est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur. Les options Distribuer les lignes/les colonnes sont également accessibles depuis le menu contextuel. Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre : L'onglet Emplacement permet de saisir les paramètres du tableau suivants : Taille - utilisez cette option pour modifier la largeur et/ou la hauteur du tableau. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect de l'image originale sera préservé. Position - saisissez la position exacte en utilisant les champs Horizontalement et Verticalement, ainsi que le champ De dans lesquels vous pouvez accéder aux paramètres tels que Coin supérieur gauche et Au centre. La section Marges permet d'ajuster l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule : entrez manuellement les valeurs de Marges de cellule, ou cochez la case Utiliser les marges par défaut pour appliquer les valeurs prédéfinies (si nécessaire, elles peuvent également être ajustées). L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau. Pour mettre en forme le texte saisi dans les cellules du tableau, vous pouvez utiliser les icônes dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le menu contextuel qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur la table avec le bouton droit de la souris inclut deux options supplémentaires : Alignement vertical des cellules - vous permet de définir le type préféré d'alignement vertical du texte dans les cellules sélectionnées : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas. Lien hypertexte - vous permet d'insérer un lien hypertexte dans la cellule sélectionnée." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm", - "title": "Insérer et mettre en forme du texte", - "body": "Insérer une zone de texte dans votre présentation Dans Presentation Editor, vous pouvez ajouter un nouveau texte de trois manières différentes: Ajoutez un passage de texte dans l'espace réservé de texte correspondant inclus dans la présentation de diapositive. Pour ce faire, placez simplement le curseur dans l'espace réservé et tapez votre texte ou collez-le en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+V à la place du texte par défaut correspondant. Ajoutez un passage de texte n'importe où sur une diapositive. Vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Selon le type d'objet textuel voulu, vous pouvez effectuer les opérations suivantes: pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de texte sous l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes: Insérer une zone de texte horizontale ou Insérer une zone de texte verticale, ensuite cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. Il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme du groupe Formes de base. pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art sous l'onglet Insertion dans la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la diapositive. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte. Ajouter un passage de texte dans une forme automatique. Sélectionnez une forme et commencez à taper votre texte. Cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir à la diapositive. Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi). Comme un objet texte inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte. Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé. Mettre en forme une zone de texte Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées). Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme. pour modifier le remplissage, le contour ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale sur la droite et utilisez les options correspondantes. pour aligner une zone de texte sur la diapositive, la faire pivoter ou la retourner, organiser des zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utilisez les options de menu contextuel. pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône appropriée de la barre de mise en forme du texte et choisissez l'option appropriée, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez sur Paramètres avancés de forme et passez à l'onglet Colonnes dans la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés. Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées. Remarque: il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée. Aligner le texte dans la zone de texte Le texte peut être aligné horizontalement de quatre façons : aligné à gauche, centré, aligné à droite et justifié. Pour ce faire: placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi), faites dérouler la liste Alignement horizontal sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'alignement que vous allez appliquer: l'option Aligner le texte à gauche permet d'aligner votre texte sur le côté gauche de la zone de texte (le côté droit reste non aligné). l'option Aligner le texte au centre permet d'aligner votre texte au centre de la zone de texte (les côtés droit et gauche ne sont pas alignés). l'option Aligner le texte à droite permet d'aligner votre texte sur le côté droit de la zone de texte (le côté gauche reste non aligné). l'option Justifier permet d'aligner votre texte par les côtés gauche et droit de la zone de texte (l'espacement supplémentaire est ajouté si nécessaire pour garder l'alignement). Remarque: on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés . Le texte peut être aligné verticalement de trois façons: haut, milieu ou bas. Pour ce faire: placez le curseur à la position où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi), faites dérouler la liste Alignement vertical sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'alignement que vous allez appliquer: l'option Aligner le texte en haut permet d'aligner votre texte en haut de la zone de texte. l'option Aligner le texte au milieu permet d'aligner votre texte au centre de la zone de texte. l'option Aligner le texte en bas permet d'aligner votre texte en bas de la zone de texte. Changer la direction du texte Pour Faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut). Ajuster le type de police, la taille, la couleur et appliquer les styles de décoration Vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police et appliquer l'un des styles de décoration en utilisant les icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque: si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavieret appliquez la mise en forme. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme. Police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante, les valeurs par défaut sont: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police jusqu'à 300 pt. Appuyer sur la touche Entrée pour confirmer Augmenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Diminuer la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Modifier la casse Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte. Couleur de surlignage Est utilisé pour marquer des phrases, des fragments, des mots ou même des caractères séparés en ajoutant une bande de couleur qui imite l'effet du surligneur sur le texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner la partie voulue du texte, puis cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner une couleur dans la palette (cet ensemble de couleurs ne dépend pas du Jeux de couleurs sélectionné et comprend 16 couleurs). La couleur sera appliquée à la sélection. Alternativement, vous pouvez tout d'abord choisir une couleur de surbrillance et ensuite commencer à sélectionner le texte avec la souris - le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et vous serez en mesure de surligner plusieurs parties différentes de votre texte de manière séquentielle. Pour enlever la mise en surbrillance, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Pour effacer la couleur de surbrillance, choisissez l'option Pas de remplissage. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres /caractères dans le texte. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner la couleur. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Exposant Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Définir l'interligne et modifier les retraits de paragraphe Vous pouvez définir l'interligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et le précédent ou le suivant. Pour ce faire, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris, utilisez les champs correspondants de l'onglet Paramètres de texte dans la barre latérale sur la droite pour obtenir les résultats nécessaires: Interligne - réglez la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe. Vous pouvez choisir parmi deux options: multiple (sert à régler l'interligne exprimée en nombre supérieur à 1), exactement (sert à définir l'interligne fixe). Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Espacement de paragraphe - définissez l'espace entre les paragraphes. Avant - réglez la taille de l'espace avant le paragraphe. Après - réglez la taille de l'espace après le paragraphe. Remarque: on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés . Pour modifier rapidement l'interligne du paragraphe actuel, vous pouvez aussi cliquer sur l'icône Interligne sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez la valeur nécessaire dans la liste: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, ou 3.0 lignes. Pour modifier le décalage de paragraphe du côté gauche de la zone de texte, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes à l'aide de la souris et utilisez les icônes correspondantes dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure: Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait . Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés, faites un clic droit sur le texte et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du texte dans le menu. Il est également possible de placer le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix - l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe devient actif sur la barre latérale droite. Appuyez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres du paragraphe s'ouvre: L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de: modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe, modifier les retraits du paragraphe par rapport aux marges internes de la zone de texte, A gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, A droite - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne droite de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Spécial - spécifier le retrait de la première ligne du paragraphe: sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu, modifiez l'interligne du paragraphe. Vous pouvez également utilisez la règle horizontale pour changer les retraits. Sélectionnez le(s) paragraphe(s) et faites glisser les marqueurs tout au long de la règle Le marqueur Retrait de première ligne sert à définir le décalage de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte pour la première ligne du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait suspendu sert à définir le décalage de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte pour la deuxième ligne et toutes les lignes suivantes du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait de gauche sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte. Le marqueur Retrait de droite sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte. Remarque: si vous ne voyez pas les règles, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et décochez l'option Masquer les règles pour les afficher. L'onglet Police comporte les paramètres suivants: Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement des caractères sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous. L'onglet Tabulation vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation c'est-à-dire l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier. La Tabulation par défaut est 2.54 cm. Vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer cette valeur en utilisant les boutons à flèche ou en saisissant la valeur nécessaire dans la zone. Position sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons à flèche et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisée sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ au-dessous. Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option De gauche, De centre ou De droite dans la liste déroulante Alignement et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. De gauche sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le marqueur. Du centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le marqueur. De droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le marqueur. Pour supprimer un taquet de tabulation de la liste sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou utilisez le bouton Supprimer tout pour vider la liste. Pour définir les taquets de tabulation vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale: Cliquez sur le bouton de sélection de tabulation dans le coin supérieur gauche de la zone de travail pour choisir le type d'arrêt de tabulation requis: À gauche, Au centre, À droite . Cliquez sur le bord inférieur de la règle là où vous voulez positionner le taquet de tabulation. Faites-le glisser tout au long de la règle pour changer son emplacement. Pour supprimer le taquet de tabulation ajouté faites-le glisser en dehors de la règle. Remarque: si vous ne voyez pas les règles, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et décochez l'option Masquer les règles pour les afficher. Modifier un style Text Art Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale sur la droite. Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police différent, une autre taille, etc. Changez le remplissage et le contourde police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques. Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose." + "title": "Insérer et mettre en forme votre texte", + "body": "Insérer une zone de texte dans une présentation L'éditeur de présentations offre trois façons d'ajouter du texte: Ajoutez un passage de texte dans l'espace réservé de texte correspondant inclus dans la présentation de diapositive. Pour ce faire, placez simplement le curseur dans l'espace réservé et tapez votre texte ou collez-le en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+V à la place du texte par défaut correspondant. Ajoutez un passage de texte n'importe où sur une diapositive. Vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Selon le type d'objet textuel voulu, vous pouvez effectuer les opérations suivantes: pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de texte sous l'onglet Accueil ou Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes: Insérer une zone de texte horizontale ou Insérer une zone de texte verticale, ensuite cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. Il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme du groupe Formes de base. pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art sous l'onglet Insertion dans la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la diapositive. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte. Ajouter un passage de texte dans une forme automatique. Sélectionnez une forme et commencez à taper votre texte. Cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir à la diapositive. Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi). Comme un objet texte inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte. Vous pouvez sauvegarder une zone de texte en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé. Mettre en forme une zone de texte Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées). Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme. pour modifier le remplissage, le contour ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale sur la droite et utilisez les options correspondantes. pour aligner une zone de texte sur la diapositive, la faire pivoter ou la retourner, organiser des zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utilisez les options de menu contextuel. pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône appropriée de la barre de mise en forme du texte et choisissez l'option appropriée, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez sur Paramètres avancés de la forme et passez sous l'onglet Colonnes dans la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés. Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées. Remarque: il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée. Aligner le texte dans la zone de texte Le texte peut être aligné horizontalement de quatre façons: aligné à gauche, centré, aligné à droite et justifié. Pour ce faire: placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi), faites dérouler la liste Alignement horizontal sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'alignement que vous allez appliquer: l'option Aligner le texte à gauche permet d'aligner votre texte sur le côté gauche de la zone de texte (le côté droit reste non aligné). l'option Aligner le texte au centre permet d'aligner votre texte au centre de la zone de texte (les côtés droit et gauche ne sont pas alignés). l'option Aligner le texte à droite permet d'aligner votre texte sur le côté droit de la zone de texte (le côté gauche reste non aligné). l'option Justifier permet d'aligner votre texte par les côtés gauche et droit de la zone de texte (l'espacement supplémentaire est ajouté si nécessaire pour garder l'alignement). Remarque: on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés . Le texte est aligné verticalement de trois façons: en haut, au milieu ou en bas. Pour ce faire: placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez appliquer l'alignement (une nouvelle ligne ou le texte déjà saisi), faites dérouler la liste Alignement vertical sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'alignement que vous allez appliquer: l'option Aligner le texte en haut permet d'aligner votre texte en haut de la zone de texte. l'option Aligner le texte au milieu permet d'aligner votre texte au centre de la zone de texte. l'option Aligner le texte en bas permet d'aligner votre texte en bas de la zone de texte. Changer la direction du texte Pour Faire pivoter du texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut). Ajuster le type de police, la taille, la couleur et appliquer les styles de décoration Vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police et appliquer l'un des styles de décoration en utilisant les icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque: si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Vous pouvez aussi positionner le curseur de la souris sur le mot à mettre en forme. Police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante, les valeurs par défaut sont: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police jusqu'à 300 pt. Appuyer sur la touche Entrée pour confirmer Augmenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Diminuer la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Modifier la casse Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres. Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte. Couleur de surlignage Est utilisé pour marquer des phrases, des fragments, des mots ou même des caractères séparés en ajoutant une bande de couleur qui imite l'effet du surligneur sur le texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner la partie voulue du texte, puis cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner une couleur dans la palette (cet ensemble de couleurs ne dépend pas du Jeux de couleurs sélectionné et comprend 16 couleurs). La couleur sera appliquée à la sélection. Alternativement, vous pouvez tout d'abord choisir une couleur de surbrillance et ensuite commencer à sélectionner le texte avec la souris - le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et vous serez en mesure de surligner plusieurs parties différentes de votre texte de manière séquentielle. Pour enlever la mise en surbrillance, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Pour effacer la couleur de surbrillance, choisissez l'option Pas de remplissage. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres /caractères dans le texte. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner la couleur. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Exposant Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Définir l'interligne et modifier les retraits de paragraphe Vous pouvez définir l'interligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et le précédent ou le suivant. Pour ce faire, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris, utilisez les champs correspondants de l'onglet Paramètres de texte dans la barre latérale sur la droite pour obtenir les résultats nécessaires: Interligne - réglez la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe. Vous pouvez choisir parmi deux options: multiple (sert à régler l'interligne exprimée en nombre supérieur à 1), exactement (sert à définir l'interligne fixe). Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Espacement de paragraphe - définissez l'espace entre les paragraphes. Avant - réglez la taille de l'espace avant le paragraphe. Après - réglez la taille de l'espace après le paragraphe. Remarque: on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés . Pour modifier rapidement l'interligne du paragraphe actuel, vous pouvez aussi cliquer sur l'icône Interligne sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez la valeur nécessaire dans la liste: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, ou 3.0 lignes. Pour modifier le décalage de paragraphe du côté gauche de la zone de texte, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes à l'aide de la souris et utilisez les icônes correspondantes dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure: Réduire le retrait et Augmenter le retrait . Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés, faites un clic droit sur le texte et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du texte dans le menu. Il est également possible de placer le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix - l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe devient actif sur la barre latérale droite. Appuyez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres du paragraphe s'ouvre: L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de: modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe, modifier les retraits du paragraphe par rapport aux marges internes de la zone de texte, A gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, A droite - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne droite de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Spécial - spécifier le retrait de la première ligne du paragraphe: sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu, modifiez l'interligne du paragraphe. Vous pouvez également utilisez la règle horizontale pour changer les retraits. Sélectionnez le(s) paragraphe(s) et faites glisser les marqueurs tout au long de la règle Le marqueur Retrait de première ligne sert à définir le décalage de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte pour la première ligne du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait suspendu sert à définir le décalage de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte pour la deuxième ligne et toutes les lignes suivantes du paragraphe. Le marqueur Retrait de gauche sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte. Le marqueur Retrait de droite sert à définir le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte. Remarque: si vous ne voyez pas les règles, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et décochez l'option Masquer les règles pour les afficher. L'onglet Police comporte les paramètres suivants: Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement des caractères sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous. L'onglet Tabulation vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation c'est-à-dire l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier. La Tabulation par défaut est 2.54 cm. Vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer cette valeur en utilisant les boutons à flèche ou en saisissant la valeur nécessaire dans la zone. Position du taquet de tabulation sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons flechés et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisé sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ en dessous. Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option À gauche, Au centre ou À droite dans la liste déroulante Alignement et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. À gauche sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le marqueur. Au centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le marqueur. À droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Le taquet de tabulation sera indiqué sur la règle horizontale par le marqueur. Pour supprimer un taquet de tabulation de la liste sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou utilisez le bouton Supprimer tout pour vider la liste. Pour définir les taquets de tabulation vous pouvez utiliser la règle horizontale: Cliquez sur le bouton de sélection de tabulation dans le coin supérieur gauche de la zone de travail pour choisir le type d'arrêt de tabulation requis: À gauche, Au centre, À droite . Cliquez sur le bord inférieur de la règle là où vous voulez positionner le taquet de tabulation. Faites-le glisser tout au long de la règle pour changer son emplacement. Pour supprimer le taquet de tabulation ajouté faites-le glisser en dehors de la règle. Remarque: si vous ne voyez pas les règles, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et décochez l'option Masquer les règles pour les afficher. Modifier un style Text Art Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale sur la droite. Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un autre type de police, une autre taille, etc. Changez le remplissage et le contourde police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques. Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le niveau de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm", @@ -208,12 +223,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm", "title": "Manipuler des objets", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter différents objets manuellement sur une diapositive à l'aide des poignées spéciales. Vous pouvez également spécifier les dimensions et la position de certains objets à l'aide de la barre latérale droite ou de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Remarque : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Redimensionner des objets Pour changer la taille d'une forme automatique/image/graphique/zone de texte, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de l'objet. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour spécifier la largeur et la hauteur précise d'un graphique, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et utilisez la section Taille de la barre latérale droite activée. Pour spécifier les dimensions précises d'une image ou d'une forme automatique, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'objet nécessaire et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de l'image/forme automatique du menu contextuel. Réglez les valeurs nécessaires dans l'onglet Taille de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Modifier des formes automatiques Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des Flèches figurées ou les Légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle vous permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier une forme, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Modifier les points dans le menu contextuel. Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer : Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité. Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu. Déplacer des objets Pour modifier la position d'une forme automatique/image/tableau/graphique/bloc de texte, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'objet. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Pour déplacer l'objet par incrément équivaut à un pixel, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer l'objet strictement à l'horizontale/verticale et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée lors du glissement. Pour spécifier les dimensions précises d'une image, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'objet nécessaire et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel. Réglez les valeurs nécessaires dans l'onglet Taille de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Faire pivoter des objets Pour faire pivoter manuellement une forme automatique/image/bloc de texte, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou vers la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en faisant pivoter. Pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre/dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou le retourner horizontalement/verticalement, vous pouvez utiliser la section Rotation de la barre latérale droite qui sera activée lorsque vous aurez sélectionné l'objet nécessaire. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme ou Paramètres de l'image à droite. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'objet horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'objet verticalement (à l'envers) Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'objet, de choisir l'option Faire pivoter dans le menu contextuel, puis d'utiliser une des options de rotation disponibles. Pour faire pivoter l'objet selon un angle exactement spécifié, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés dans la barre latérale droite et utilisez l'onglet Rotation de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire mesurée en degrés dans le champ Angle et cliquez sur OK." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter différents objets manuellement sur une diapositive à l'aide des poignées spéciales. Vous pouvez également spécifier les dimensions et la position de certains objets à l'aide de la barre latérale droite ou de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Remarque : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Redimensionner des objets Pour changer la taille d'une forme automatique/image/graphique/zone de texte, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de l'objet. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour spécifier la largeur et la hauteur précise d'un graphique, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et utilisez la section Taille de la barre latérale droite activée. Pour spécifier les dimensions précises d'une image ou d'une forme automatique, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'objet nécessaire et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de l'image/forme automatique du menu contextuel. Réglez les valeurs nécessaires dans l'onglet Taille de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Modifier des formes automatiques Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des Flèches figurées ou les Légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle vous permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier une forme, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Modifier les points dans le menu contextuel. Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer : Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité. Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu. Déplacer des objets Pour modifier la position d'une forme automatique/image/tableau/graphique/bloc de texte, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'objet. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Pour déplacer l'objet par incrément équivaut à un pixel, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer l'objet strictement à l'horizontale/verticale et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée lors du glissement. Pour spécifier les dimensions précises d'une image, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'objet nécessaire et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel. Réglez les valeurs nécessaires dans l'onglet Taille de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Faire pivoter des objets Pour faire pivoter manuellement une forme automatique/image/bloc de texte, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou vers la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée. Pour faire pivoter par incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez enfoncée la touche Shift tout en faisant pivoter. Pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre/dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou le retourner horizontalement/verticalement, vous pouvez utiliser la section Rotation de la barre latérale droite qui sera activée lorsque vous aurez sélectionné l'objet nécessaire. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme ou Paramètres de l'image à droite. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'objet horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'objet verticalement (à l'envers) Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'objet, de choisir l'option Faire pivoter dans le menu contextuel, puis d'utiliser une des options de rotation disponibles. Pour faire pivoter l'objet selon un angle exactement spécifié, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés dans la barre latérale droite et utilisez l'onglet Rotation de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire mesurée en degrés dans le champ Angle et cliquez sur OK." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "Fonctionnalités de correction automatique", - "body": "Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique ONLYOFFICE dans l'Éditeur de Présentations fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus. Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique. La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets : AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues, Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et Correction automatique de texte. AutoMaths Lorsque vous travaillez dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en les tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque. Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé. Remarque : Les codes sont sensibles à la casse. Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique --> AutoMaths. Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques. Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer. Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier. Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones : le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Remplacer. Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste. Cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine. Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe. Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous le codes disponibles dans l'Éditeur de Présentations à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier dans les Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification Les codes disponibles Code Symbole Catégorie !! Symboles ... Dots :: Opérateurs := Opérateurs /< Opérateurs relationnels /> Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels \\above Indices et exposants \\acute Accentuation \\aleph Lettres hébraïques \\alpha Lettres grecques \\Alpha Lettres grecques \\amalg Opérateurs binaires \\angle Notation de géométrie \\aoint Intégrales \\approx Opérateurs relationnels \\asmash Flèches \\ast Opérateurs binaires \\asymp Opérateurs relationnels \\atop Opérateurs \\bar Trait suscrit/souscrit \\Bar Accentuation \\because Opérateurs relationnels \\begin Séparateurs \\below Indices et exposants \\bet Lettres hébraïques \\beta Lettres grecques \\Beta Lettres grecques \\beth Lettres hébraïques \\bigcap Grands opérateurs \\bigcup Grands opérateurs \\bigodot Grands opérateurs \\bigoplus Grands opérateurs \\bigotimes Grands opérateurs \\bigsqcup Grands opérateurs \\biguplus Grands opérateurs \\bigvee Grands opérateurs \\bigwedge Grands opérateurs \\binomial Équations \\bot Notations logiques \\bowtie Opérateurs relationnels \\box Symboles \\boxdot Opérateurs binaires \\boxminus Opérateurs binaires \\boxplus Opérateurs binaires \\bra Séparateurs \\break Symboles \\breve Accentuation \\bullet Opérateurs binaires \\cap Opérateurs binaires \\cbrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\cases Symboles \\cdot Opérateurs binaires \\cdots Dots \\check Accentuation \\chi Lettres grecques \\Chi Lettres grecques \\circ Opérateurs binaires \\close Séparateurs \\clubsuit Symboles \\coint Intégrales \\cong Opérateurs relationnels \\coprod Opérateurs mathématiques \\cup Opérateurs binaires \\dalet Lettres hébraïques \\daleth Lettres hébraïques \\dashv Opérateurs relationnels \\dd Lettres avec double barres \\Dd Lettres avec double barres \\ddddot Accentuation \\dddot Accentuation \\ddot Accentuation \\ddots Dots \\defeq Opérateurs relationnels \\degc Symboles \\degf Symboles \\degree Symboles \\delta Lettres grecques \\Delta Lettres grecques \\Deltaeq Opérateurs \\diamond Opérateurs binaires \\diamondsuit Symboles \\div Opérateurs binaires \\dot Accentuation \\doteq Opérateurs relationnels \\dots Dots \\doublea Lettres avec double barres \\doubleA Lettres avec double barres \\doubleb Lettres avec double barres \\doubleB Lettres avec double barres \\doublec Lettres avec double barres \\doubleC Lettres avec double barres \\doubled Lettres avec double barres \\doubleD Lettres avec double barres \\doublee Lettres avec double barres \\doubleE Lettres avec double barres \\doublef Lettres avec double barres \\doubleF Lettres avec double barres \\doubleg Lettres avec double barres \\doubleG Lettres avec double barres \\doubleh Lettres avec double barres \\doubleH Lettres avec double barres \\doublei Lettres avec double barres \\doubleI Lettres avec double barres \\doublej Lettres avec double barres \\doubleJ Lettres avec double barres \\doublek Lettres avec double barres \\doubleK Lettres avec double barres \\doublel Lettres avec double barres \\doubleL Lettres avec double barres \\doublem Lettres avec double barres \\doubleM Lettres avec double barres \\doublen Lettres avec double barres \\doubleN Lettres avec double barres \\doubleo Lettres avec double barres \\doubleO Lettres avec double barres \\doublep Lettres avec double barres \\doubleP Lettres avec double barres \\doubleq Lettres avec double barres \\doubleQ Lettres avec double barres \\doubler Lettres avec double barres \\doubleR Lettres avec double barres \\doubles Lettres avec double barres \\doubleS Lettres avec double barres \\doublet Lettres avec double barres \\doubleT Lettres avec double barres \\doubleu Lettres avec double barres \\doubleU Lettres avec double barres \\doublev Lettres avec double barres \\doubleV Lettres avec double barres \\doublew Lettres avec double barres \\doubleW Lettres avec double barres \\doublex Lettres avec double barres \\doubleX Lettres avec double barres \\doubley Lettres avec double barres \\doubleY Lettres avec double barres \\doublez Lettres avec double barres \\doubleZ Lettres avec double barres \\downarrow Flèches \\Downarrow Flèches \\dsmash Flèches \\ee Lettres avec double barres \\ell Symboles \\emptyset Ensemble de notations \\emsp Caractères d'espace \\end Séparateurs \\ensp Caractères d'espace \\epsilon Lettres grecques \\Epsilon Lettres grecques \\eqarray Symboles \\equiv Opérateurs relationnels \\eta Lettres grecques \\Eta Lettres grecques \\exists Notations logiques \\forall Notations logiques \\fraktura Fraktur \\frakturA Fraktur \\frakturb Fraktur \\frakturB Fraktur \\frakturc Fraktur \\frakturC Fraktur \\frakturd Fraktur \\frakturD Fraktur \\frakture Fraktur \\frakturE Fraktur \\frakturf Fraktur \\frakturF Fraktur \\frakturg Fraktur \\frakturG Fraktur \\frakturh Fraktur \\frakturH Fraktur \\frakturi Fraktur \\frakturI Fraktur \\frakturk Fraktur \\frakturK Fraktur \\frakturl Fraktur \\frakturL Fraktur \\frakturm Fraktur \\frakturM Fraktur \\frakturn Fraktur \\frakturN Fraktur \\frakturo Fraktur \\frakturO Fraktur \\frakturp Fraktur \\frakturP Fraktur \\frakturq Fraktur \\frakturQ Fraktur \\frakturr Fraktur \\frakturR Fraktur \\frakturs Fraktur \\frakturS Fraktur \\frakturt Fraktur \\frakturT Fraktur \\frakturu Fraktur \\frakturU Fraktur \\frakturv Fraktur \\frakturV Fraktur \\frakturw Fraktur \\frakturW Fraktur \\frakturx Fraktur \\frakturX Fraktur \\fraktury Fraktur \\frakturY Fraktur \\frakturz Fraktur \\frakturZ Fraktur \\frown Opérateurs relationnels \\funcapply Opérateurs binaires \\G Lettres grecques \\gamma Lettres grecques \\Gamma Lettres grecques \\ge Opérateurs relationnels \\geq Opérateurs relationnels \\gets Flèches \\gg Opérateurs relationnels \\gimel Lettres hébraïques \\grave Accentuation \\hairsp Caractères d'espace \\hat Accentuation \\hbar Symboles \\heartsuit Symboles \\hookleftarrow Flèches \\hookrightarrow Flèches \\hphantom Flèches \\hsmash Flèches \\hvec Accentuation \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Lettres avec double barres \\iiint Intégrales \\iint Intégrales \\iiiint Intégrales \\Im Symboles \\imath Symboles \\in Opérateurs relationnels \\inc Symboles \\infty Symboles \\int Intégrales \\integral Intégrales \\iota Lettres grecques \\Iota Lettres grecques \\itimes Opérateurs mathématiques \\j Symboles \\jj Lettres avec double barres \\jmath Symboles \\kappa Lettres grecques \\Kappa Lettres grecques \\ket Séparateurs \\lambda Lettres grecques \\Lambda Lettres grecques \\langle Séparateurs \\lbbrack Séparateurs \\lbrace Séparateurs \\lbrack Séparateurs \\lceil Séparateurs \\ldiv Barres obliques \\ldivide Barres obliques \\ldots Dots \\le Opérateurs relationnels \\left Séparateurs \\leftarrow Flèches \\Leftarrow Flèches \\leftharpoondown Flèches \\leftharpoonup Flèches \\leftrightarrow Flèches \\Leftrightarrow Flèches \\leq Opérateurs relationnels \\lfloor Séparateurs \\lhvec Accentuation \\limit Limites \\ll Opérateurs relationnels \\lmoust Séparateurs \\Longleftarrow Flèches \\Longleftrightarrow Flèches \\Longrightarrow Flèches \\lrhar Flèches \\lvec Accentuation \\mapsto Flèches \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Caractères d'espace \\mid Opérateurs relationnels \\middle Symboles \\models Opérateurs relationnels \\mp Opérateurs binaires \\mu Lettres grecques \\Mu Lettres grecques \\nabla Symboles \\naryand Opérateurs \\nbsp Caractères d'espace \\ne Opérateurs relationnels \\nearrow Flèches \\neq Opérateurs relationnels \\ni Opérateurs relationnels \\norm Séparateurs \\notcontain Opérateurs relationnels \\notelement Opérateurs relationnels \\notin Opérateurs relationnels \\nu Lettres grecques \\Nu Lettres grecques \\nwarrow Flèches \\o Lettres grecques \\O Lettres grecques \\odot Opérateurs binaires \\of Opérateurs \\oiiint Intégrales \\oiint Intégrales \\oint Intégrales \\omega Lettres grecques \\Omega Lettres grecques \\ominus Opérateurs binaires \\open Séparateurs \\oplus Opérateurs binaires \\otimes Opérateurs binaires \\over Séparateurs \\overbar Accentuation \\overbrace Accentuation \\overbracket Accentuation \\overline Accentuation \\overparen Accentuation \\overshell Accentuation \\parallel Notation de géométrie \\partial Symboles \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Notation de géométrie \\phantom Symboles \\phi Lettres grecques \\Phi Lettres grecques \\pi Lettres grecques \\Pi Lettres grecques \\pm Opérateurs binaires \\pppprime Nombres premiers \\ppprime Nombres premiers \\pprime Nombres premiers \\prec Opérateurs relationnels \\preceq Opérateurs relationnels \\prime Nombres premiers \\prod Opérateurs mathématiques \\propto Opérateurs relationnels \\psi Lettres grecques \\Psi Lettres grecques \\qdrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\quadratic Racine carrée et radicaux \\rangle Séparateurs \\Rangle Séparateurs \\ratio Opérateurs relationnels \\rbrace Séparateurs \\rbrack Séparateurs \\Rbrack Séparateurs \\rceil Séparateurs \\rddots Dots \\Re Symboles \\rect Symboles \\rfloor Séparateurs \\rho Lettres grecques \\Rho Lettres grecques \\rhvec Accentuation \\right Séparateurs \\rightarrow Flèches \\Rightarrow Flèches \\rightharpoondown Flèches \\rightharpoonup Flèches \\rmoust Séparateurs \\root Symboles \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Barres obliques \\sdivide Barres obliques \\searrow Flèches \\setminus Opérateurs binaires \\sigma Lettres grecques \\Sigma Lettres grecques \\sim Opérateurs relationnels \\simeq Opérateurs relationnels \\smash Flèches \\smile Opérateurs relationnels \\spadesuit Symboles \\sqcap Opérateurs binaires \\sqcup Opérateurs binaires \\sqrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\sqsubseteq Ensemble de notations \\sqsuperseteq Ensemble de notations \\star Opérateurs binaires \\subset Ensemble de notations \\subseteq Ensemble de notations \\succ Opérateurs relationnels \\succeq Opérateurs relationnels \\sum Opérateurs mathématiques \\superset Ensemble de notations \\superseteq Ensemble de notations \\swarrow Flèches \\tau Lettres grecques \\Tau Lettres grecques \\therefore Opérateurs relationnels \\theta Lettres grecques \\Theta Lettres grecques \\thicksp Caractères d'espace \\thinsp Caractères d'espace \\tilde Accentuation \\times Opérateurs binaires \\to Flèches \\top Notations logiques \\tvec Flèches \\ubar Accentuation \\Ubar Accentuation \\underbar Accentuation \\underbrace Accentuation \\underbracket Accentuation \\underline Accentuation \\underparen Accentuation \\uparrow Flèches \\Uparrow Flèches \\updownarrow Flèches \\Updownarrow Flèches \\uplus Opérateurs binaires \\upsilon Lettres grecques \\Upsilon Lettres grecques \\varepsilon Lettres grecques \\varphi Lettres grecques \\varpi Lettres grecques \\varrho Lettres grecques \\varsigma Lettres grecques \\vartheta Lettres grecques \\vbar Séparateurs \\vdash Opérateurs relationnels \\vdots Dots \\vec Accentuation \\vee Opérateurs binaires \\vert Séparateurs \\Vert Séparateurs \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Flèches \\vthicksp Caractères d'espace \\wedge Opérateurs binaires \\wp Symboles \\wr Opérateurs binaires \\xi Lettres grecques \\Xi Lettres grecques \\zeta Lettres grecques \\Zeta Lettres grecques \\zwnj Caractères d'espace \\zwsp Caractères d'espace ~= Opérateurs relationnels -+ Opérateurs binaires +- Opérateurs binaires << Opérateurs relationnels <= Opérateurs relationnels -> Flèches >= Opérateurs relationnels >> Opérateurs relationnels Fonctions reconnues Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Pour accéder à la liste de fonctions reconnues, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification-> Options de correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues. Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies. Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, comme par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des addresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste. L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon le cas. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS. Si vous souhaitez désactiver une des options de mise en forme automatique, désactivez la case à coche de l'élément pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas de mise en forme automatique sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Correction automatique de texte Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des phrases. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase." + "body": "Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique de l'éditeur de présentations ONLYOFFICE servent à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus. Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique. La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend quatre onglets: AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et Correction automatique de texte. AutoMaths Lorsque vous travailler dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque. Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé. Les codes sont sensibles à la casse Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques. Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer. Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier. Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones: le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Remplacer. Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste. Cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine. Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe. Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous les codes prises en charge par l'éditeur de presentations à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier dans les Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification Les codes disponibles Code Symbole Catégorie !! Symboles ... Dots :: Opérateurs := Opérateurs /< Opérateurs relationnels /> Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels \\above Indices et exposants \\acute Accentuation \\aleph Lettres hébraïques \\alpha Lettres grecques \\Alpha Lettres grecques \\amalg Opérateurs binaires \\angle Notation de géométrie \\aoint Intégrales \\approx Opérateurs relationnels \\asmash Flèches \\ast Opérateurs binaires \\asymp Opérateurs relationnels \\atop Opérateurs \\bar Trait suscrit/souscrit \\Bar Accentuation \\because Opérateurs relationnels \\begin Séparateurs \\below Indices et exposants \\bet Lettres hébraïques \\beta Lettres grecques \\Beta Lettres grecques \\beth Lettres hébraïques \\bigcap Grands opérateurs \\bigcup Grands opérateurs \\bigodot Grands opérateurs \\bigoplus Grands opérateurs \\bigotimes Grands opérateurs \\bigsqcup Grands opérateurs \\biguplus Grands opérateurs \\bigvee Grands opérateurs \\bigwedge Grands opérateurs \\binomial Équations \\bot Notations logiques \\bowtie Opérateurs relationnels \\box Symboles \\boxdot Opérateurs binaires \\boxminus Opérateurs binaires \\boxplus Opérateurs binaires \\bra Séparateurs \\break Symboles \\breve Accentuation \\bullet Opérateurs binaires \\cap Opérateurs binaires \\cbrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\cases Symboles \\cdot Opérateurs binaires \\cdots Dots \\check Accentuation \\chi Lettres grecques \\Chi Lettres grecques \\circ Opérateurs binaires \\close Séparateurs \\clubsuit Symboles \\coint Intégrales \\cong Opérateurs relationnels \\coprod Opérateurs mathématiques \\cup Opérateurs binaires \\dalet Lettres hébraïques \\daleth Lettres hébraïques \\dashv Opérateurs relationnels \\dd Lettres avec double barres \\Dd Lettres avec double barres \\ddddot Accentuation \\dddot Accentuation \\ddot Accentuation \\ddots Dots \\defeq Opérateurs relationnels \\degc Symboles \\degf Symboles \\degree Symboles \\delta Lettres grecques \\Delta Lettres grecques \\Deltaeq Opérateurs \\diamond Opérateurs binaires \\diamondsuit Symboles \\div Opérateurs binaires \\dot Accentuation \\doteq Opérateurs relationnels \\dots Dots \\doublea Lettres avec double barres \\doubleA Lettres avec double barres \\doubleb Lettres avec double barres \\doubleB Lettres avec double barres \\doublec Lettres avec double barres \\doubleC Lettres avec double barres \\doubled Lettres avec double barres \\doubleD Lettres avec double barres \\doublee Lettres avec double barres \\doubleE Lettres avec double barres \\doublef Lettres avec double barres \\doubleF Lettres avec double barres \\doubleg Lettres avec double barres \\doubleG Lettres avec double barres \\doubleh Lettres avec double barres \\doubleH Lettres avec double barres \\doublei Lettres avec double barres \\doubleI Lettres avec double barres \\doublej Lettres avec double barres \\doubleJ Lettres avec double barres \\doublek Lettres avec double barres \\doubleK Lettres avec double barres \\doublel Lettres avec double barres \\doubleL Lettres avec double barres \\doublem Lettres avec double barres \\doubleM Lettres avec double barres \\doublen Lettres avec double barres \\doubleN Lettres avec double barres \\doubleo Lettres avec double barres \\doubleO Lettres avec double barres \\doublep Lettres avec double barres \\doubleP Lettres avec double barres \\doubleq Lettres avec double barres \\doubleQ Lettres avec double barres \\doubler Lettres avec double barres \\doubleR Lettres avec double barres \\doubles Lettres avec double barres \\doubleS Lettres avec double barres \\doublet Lettres avec double barres \\doubleT Lettres avec double barres \\doubleu Lettres avec double barres \\doubleU Lettres avec double barres \\doublev Lettres avec double barres \\doubleV Lettres avec double barres \\doublew Lettres avec double barres \\doubleW Lettres avec double barres \\doublex Lettres avec double barres \\doubleX Lettres avec double barres \\doubley Lettres avec double barres \\doubleY Lettres avec double barres \\doublez Lettres avec double barres \\doubleZ Lettres avec double barres \\downarrow Flèches \\Downarrow Flèches \\dsmash Flèches \\ee Lettres avec double barres \\ell Symboles \\emptyset Ensemble de notations \\emsp Caractères d'espace \\end Séparateurs \\ensp Caractères d'espace \\epsilon Lettres grecques \\Epsilon Lettres grecques \\eqarray Symboles \\equiv Opérateurs relationnels \\eta Lettres grecques \\Eta Lettres grecques \\exists Notations logiques \\forall Notations logiques \\fraktura Fraktur \\frakturA Fraktur \\frakturb Fraktur \\frakturB Fraktur \\frakturc Fraktur \\frakturC Fraktur \\frakturd Fraktur \\frakturD Fraktur \\frakture Fraktur \\frakturE Fraktur \\frakturf Fraktur \\frakturF Fraktur \\frakturg Fraktur \\frakturG Fraktur \\frakturh Fraktur \\frakturH Fraktur \\frakturi Fraktur \\frakturI Fraktur \\frakturk Fraktur \\frakturK Fraktur \\frakturl Fraktur \\frakturL Fraktur \\frakturm Fraktur \\frakturM Fraktur \\frakturn Fraktur \\frakturN Fraktur \\frakturo Fraktur \\frakturO Fraktur \\frakturp Fraktur \\frakturP Fraktur \\frakturq Fraktur \\frakturQ Fraktur \\frakturr Fraktur \\frakturR Fraktur \\frakturs Fraktur \\frakturS Fraktur \\frakturt Fraktur \\frakturT Fraktur \\frakturu Fraktur \\frakturU Fraktur \\frakturv Fraktur \\frakturV Fraktur \\frakturw Fraktur \\frakturW Fraktur \\frakturx Fraktur \\frakturX Fraktur \\fraktury Fraktur \\frakturY Fraktur \\frakturz Fraktur \\frakturZ Fraktur \\frown Opérateurs relationnels \\funcapply Opérateurs binaires \\G Lettres grecques \\gamma Lettres grecques \\Gamma Lettres grecques \\ge Opérateurs relationnels \\geq Opérateurs relationnels \\gets Flèches \\gg Opérateurs relationnels \\gimel Lettres hébraïques \\grave Accentuation \\hairsp Caractères d'espace \\hat Accentuation \\hbar Symboles \\heartsuit Symboles \\hookleftarrow Flèches \\hookrightarrow Flèches \\hphantom Flèches \\hsmash Flèches \\hvec Accentuation \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Lettres avec double barres \\iiint Intégrales \\iint Intégrales \\iiiint Intégrales \\Im Symboles \\imath Symboles \\in Opérateurs relationnels \\inc Symboles \\infty Symboles \\int Intégrales \\integral Intégrales \\iota Lettres grecques \\Iota Lettres grecques \\itimes Opérateurs mathématiques \\j Symboles \\jj Lettres avec double barres \\jmath Symboles \\kappa Lettres grecques \\Kappa Lettres grecques \\ket Séparateurs \\lambda Lettres grecques \\Lambda Lettres grecques \\langle Séparateurs \\lbbrack Séparateurs \\lbrace Séparateurs \\lbrack Séparateurs \\lceil Séparateurs \\ldiv Barres obliques \\ldivide Barres obliques \\ldots Dots \\le Opérateurs relationnels \\left Séparateurs \\leftarrow Flèches \\Leftarrow Flèches \\leftharpoondown Flèches \\leftharpoonup Flèches \\leftrightarrow Flèches \\Leftrightarrow Flèches \\leq Opérateurs relationnels \\lfloor Séparateurs \\lhvec Accentuation \\limit Limites \\ll Opérateurs relationnels \\lmoust Séparateurs \\Longleftarrow Flèches \\Longleftrightarrow Flèches \\Longrightarrow Flèches \\lrhar Flèches \\lvec Accentuation \\mapsto Flèches \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Caractères d'espace \\mid Opérateurs relationnels \\middle Symboles \\models Opérateurs relationnels \\mp Opérateurs binaires \\mu Lettres grecques \\Mu Lettres grecques \\nabla Symboles \\naryand Opérateurs \\nbsp Caractères d'espace \\ne Opérateurs relationnels \\nearrow Flèches \\neq Opérateurs relationnels \\ni Opérateurs relationnels \\norm Séparateurs \\notcontain Opérateurs relationnels \\notelement Opérateurs relationnels \\notin Opérateurs relationnels \\nu Lettres grecques \\Nu Lettres grecques \\nwarrow Flèches \\o Lettres grecques \\O Lettres grecques \\odot Opérateurs binaires \\of Opérateurs \\oiiint Intégrales \\oiint Intégrales \\oint Intégrales \\omega Lettres grecques \\Omega Lettres grecques \\ominus Opérateurs binaires \\open Séparateurs \\oplus Opérateurs binaires \\otimes Opérateurs binaires \\over Séparateurs \\overbar Accentuation \\overbrace Accentuation \\overbracket Accentuation \\overline Accentuation \\overparen Accentuation \\overshell Accentuation \\parallel Notation de géométrie \\partial Symboles \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Notation de géométrie \\phantom Symboles \\phi Lettres grecques \\Phi Lettres grecques \\pi Lettres grecques \\Pi Lettres grecques \\pm Opérateurs binaires \\pppprime Nombres premiers \\ppprime Nombres premiers \\pprime Nombres premiers \\prec Opérateurs relationnels \\preceq Opérateurs relationnels \\prime Nombres premiers \\prod Opérateurs mathématiques \\propto Opérateurs relationnels \\psi Lettres grecques \\Psi Lettres grecques \\qdrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\quadratic Racine carrée et radicaux \\rangle Séparateurs \\Rangle Séparateurs \\ratio Opérateurs relationnels \\rbrace Séparateurs \\rbrack Séparateurs \\Rbrack Séparateurs \\rceil Séparateurs \\rddots Dots \\Re Symboles \\rect Symboles \\rfloor Séparateurs \\rho Lettres grecques \\Rho Lettres grecques \\rhvec Accentuation \\right Séparateurs \\rightarrow Flèches \\Rightarrow Flèches \\rightharpoondown Flèches \\rightharpoonup Flèches \\rmoust Séparateurs \\root Symboles \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Barres obliques \\sdivide Barres obliques \\searrow Flèches \\setminus Opérateurs binaires \\sigma Lettres grecques \\Sigma Lettres grecques \\sim Opérateurs relationnels \\simeq Opérateurs relationnels \\smash Flèches \\smile Opérateurs relationnels \\spadesuit Symboles \\sqcap Opérateurs binaires \\sqcup Opérateurs binaires \\sqrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\sqsubseteq Ensemble de notations \\sqsuperseteq Ensemble de notations \\star Opérateurs binaires \\subset Ensemble de notations \\subseteq Ensemble de notations \\succ Opérateurs relationnels \\succeq Opérateurs relationnels \\sum Opérateurs mathématiques \\superset Ensemble de notations \\superseteq Ensemble de notations \\swarrow Flèches \\tau Lettres grecques \\Tau Lettres grecques \\therefore Opérateurs relationnels \\theta Lettres grecques \\Theta Lettres grecques \\thicksp Caractères d'espace \\thinsp Caractères d'espace \\tilde Accentuation \\times Opérateurs binaires \\to Flèches \\top Notations logiques \\tvec Flèches \\ubar Accentuation \\Ubar Accentuation \\underbar Accentuation \\underbrace Accentuation \\underbracket Accentuation \\underline Accentuation \\underparen Accentuation \\uparrow Flèches \\Uparrow Flèches \\updownarrow Flèches \\Updownarrow Flèches \\uplus Opérateurs binaires \\upsilon Lettres grecques \\Upsilon Lettres grecques \\varepsilon Lettres grecques \\varphi Lettres grecques \\varpi Lettres grecques \\varrho Lettres grecques \\varsigma Lettres grecques \\vartheta Lettres grecques \\vbar Séparateurs \\vdash Opérateurs relationnels \\vdots Dots \\vec Accentuation \\vee Opérateurs binaires \\vert Séparateurs \\Vert Séparateurs \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Flèches \\vthicksp Caractères d'espace \\wedge Opérateurs binaires \\wp Symboles \\wr Opérateurs binaires \\xi Lettres grecques \\Xi Lettres grecques \\zeta Lettres grecques \\Zeta Lettres grecques \\zwnj Caractères d'espace \\zwsp Caractères d'espace ~= Opérateurs relationnels -+ Opérateurs binaires +- Opérateurs binaires << Opérateurs relationnels <= Opérateurs relationnels -> Flèches >= Opérateurs relationnels >> Opérateurs relationnels Fonctions reconnues Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues. Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies. Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Par défaut, l'éditeur met en forme automatiquement lors de la saisie selon les paramètres de format automatique, par exemple remplacer les guillemets ou les traits d'union par un tiret demi-cadratin, convertir des adresses web ou des chemins d'accès réseau en lien hypertextes, appliquer une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée lorsqu'il détecte que vous tapez une liste. L'option Ajouter un point avec un double espace permet d'insérer un point lorsqu'on appuie deux fois sur la barre d'espace. Activez ou désactivez cette option selon vos besoins. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée sur Linux et Windows et est activée sur macOS. Si vous souhaitez désactiver les options de mise en forme automatique, passez sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. Correction automatique de texte Il est possible d'activer la correction automatique pour convertir en majuscule la première lettre des propositions. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Pour la désactiver, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Majuscule en début de phrase. Par défaut, l'éditeur met la première lettre du mot dans une cellule en majuscule. Pour désactiver cette option, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Correction automatique de texte et désactivez l'option Mettre la première lettre des cellules du tableau en majuscule. Vous pouvez également personnaliser la mise en majuscule après certains mots en saisissant les mots requis dans le champ Ne pas mettre en majuscule après et en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter, ou en choisissant les mots requis dans la liste correspondante ci-dessous. Vous pouvez choisir le mode de fonctionnement des exceptions en fonction de la langue dans la liste déroulante Exceptions pour la langue. Utilisez le bouton Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour annuler toutes les modifications personnalisées." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm", @@ -237,18 +252,13 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", - "title": "Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur", - "body": "Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre présentation Enregistrement Par défaut, l'Éditeur de Présentations en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés. Pour enregistrer manuellement votre présentation actuelle dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer la présentation sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de présentation (POTX or OTP). Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la présentation résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer la présentation active, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance. Il est aussi possible d'imprimer les diapositives sélectionnés en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur les diapositives sélectionnées et choisissez Imprimer la sélection). Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF est généré depuis votre présentation. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe." + "title": "Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre présentation", + "body": "Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur Enregistrement Par défaut, l'éditeur de présentations en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés . Pour enregistrer manuellement votre présentation actuelle dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés . Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer la présentation sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de présentation (POTX or OTP). Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la présentation résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer une copie sous, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer la présentation active, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance. Configurez les paramètres suivants dans la fenêtre Imprimer qui s'affiche: Destination - sélectionnez la destination du fichier à imprimer, par ex. Enregistrer au format PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print to PDF, Fax, etc. Orientation - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale. Pages - sélectionnez l'une des options d'impression: Tous, Actuelle, Pages impaires uniquement, Pages paires uniquement ou Personnalisé. Dans ce dernier cas, il faut saisir les numéros de pages manuellement. Mode couleur - sélectionnez si vous souhaitez imprimer le fichier Couleur ou Noir et blanc. Veuillez noter que cette option n'est disponible que si Microsoft XPS Document Writer est défini comme le paramètre de Destination. Lorsque Fax est défini comme le paramètre de Destination, la couleur par défaut est noir et blanc. Cliquez sur Plus de paramètres pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, Taille du papier - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante ou définissez la taille de l'utilisateur. Mise à l'échelle - définir la mise à l'échelle du fichier lors de l'impression, ajuster à la largeur de page ou sélectionnez la mise à l'échelle personnalisée en utilisant la case à cocher Échelle et le champ de saisie approprié. Pages par feuille - définir le nombre de pages que vous voulez sur une page imprimée, par ex. deux, six, neuf etc.; Marges - définir les marges de la page. Vous pouvez choisir les marges par défaut ou personnaliser les marges en pouces. Pour les marges personnalisées, définissez manuellement les valeurs pour la marge supérieure, inférieure, gauche et droite. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Aucun pour ne pas avoir de marges. Options - cochez la case pour Imprimer les en-têtes et les pieds de page ou décochez cette option pour imprimer sans aucun en-tête et les pied de page. Imprimer via la boîte de dialogue du système - cliquez sur cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue du système et configurer l'impression. Dans la version de bureau, les paramètres d'impression disponibles sont Zone d'impression, le nombre deDiapositives, Copies, Impression sur les deux côtés, Format de papier. Vous pouvez également imprimer au format PDF ou utilisez le bouton Impression rapide de la barre d'outils supérieure pour imprimer le fichier sur la dernière imprimante sélectionnée ou sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par défaut. Il est aussi possible d'imprimer les diapositives sélectionnés en utilisant l'option Imprimer la sélection du menu contextuel en mode Édition aussi que en mode Affichage (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur les diapositives sélectionnées et choisissez Imprimer la sélection). Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF est généré depuis votre présentation. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm", "title": "Définir les paramètres de la diapositive", - "body": "Pour personnaliser votre présentation dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez sélectionner le thème, les jeux de couleurs, la taille et l'orientation de la diapositive pour toute la présentation, changer le remplissage de l'arrière-plan ou la mise en page pour chaque diapositive séparée aussi bien qu'appliquer des transitions entre les diapositives. Il est également possible d'ajouter des notes explicatives à chaque diapositive qui peuvent être utiles lorsque la présentation est en mode Présentateur. Les Thèmes vous permettent de changer rapidement la conception de présentation, notamment l'apparence d'arrière-plan de diapositives, les polices prédéfinies pour les titres et les textes, la palette de couleurs qui est utilisée pour les éléments de présentation. Pour sélectionner un thème pour la présentation, cliquez sur le thème prédéfini voulu dans la galerie de thèmes sur le côté droit de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le thème choisi sera appliqué à toutes les diapositives à moins que vous n'en ayez choisi quelques-unes pour appliquer le thème. Pour modifier le thème sélectionné pour une ou plusieurs diapositives, vous pouvez cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les diapositives sélectionnées dans la liste de gauche (ou cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une diapositive dans la zone d'édition), sélectionner l'option Changer de thème dans le menu contextuel et choisir le thème voulu. Les Jeux de couleurs servent à définir des couleurs prédéfinies utilisées pour les éléments de présentation (polices, lignes, remplissages etc.) et vous permettent de maintenir la cohérence des couleurs dans toute la présentation. Pour changer de jeu de couleurs, cliquez sur l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le jeu nécessaire de la liste déroulante. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionné sera appliqué à toutes les diapositives. Pour changer la taille de toutes les diapositives de la présentation, cliquez sur l'icône Sélectionner la taille de la diapositive sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez sélectionner : l'un des deux paramètres prédéfinis - Standard (4:3) ou Écran large (16:9), l'option Paramètres avancés pour ouvrir la fenêtre Paramètres de taille et sélectionnez l'un des préréglages disponibles ou définissez la taille Personnalisée en spécifiant les valeurs de Largeur et Hauteur. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Standard (4:3), Plein écran (16:9), Plein écran (16:10), Papier à lettres (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 (297x420 mm), Format A4 (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Papier (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Papier (176x250 mm), Diapositives 35 mm, Transparent, Bannière, Plein écran, Personnalisé. Le menu Orientation de la diapositive permet de changer le type d'orientation actuellement sélectionné. Le type d'orientation par défaut est Paysage qui peut être commuté sur Portrait. Pour modifier le remplissage de l'arrière-plan: sélectionnez les diapositives dont le remplissage vous voulez modifier de la liste des diapositives à gauche. Ou cliquez sur n'importe quel espace vide dans la diapositive en cours de la modification dans la zone de travail pour changer le type de remplissage de cette diapositive séparée. dans l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive de la barre latérale droite, sélectionnez une des options : Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la diapositive sélectionnée. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner deux couleurs et remplir la diapositive d'une transition douce entre elles. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la diapositive. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la diapositive. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité - faites glisser le curseur ou saisissez la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Pour en savoir plus consultez la section Remplir les objets et sélectionner les couleurs . Transitions vous aident à rendre votre présentation plus dynamique et captiver l'attention de votre auditoire. Pour appliquer une transition : sélectionnez les diapositives auxquelles vous voulez appliquer la transition de la liste de diapositives à gauche, sélectionnez une transition de la liste déroulante Effet de l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive, Pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive, vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône Paramètres de la diapositive à droite ou cliquer avec le bouton droit sur la diapositive dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive et sélectionner l'option Paramètres de la diapositive dans le menu contextuel. réglez les paramètres de la transition : choisissez le type de la transition, la durée et le mode de l'avancement des diapositives, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à toutes les diapositives si vous voulez appliquer la même transition à toutes les diapositives de la présentation. Pour en savoir plus sur ces options consultez le chapitre Appliquer des transitions . Pour appliquer une mise en page : sélectionnez les diapositives auxquelles vous voulez appliquer une nouvelle mise en page de la liste de diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur l'icône Modifier la disposition de la diapositive dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une mise en page nécessaire de la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur la diapositive nécessaire dans la liste située à gauche, sélectionnez l'option Modifier la disposition de diapositive depuis le menu contextuel et sélectionnez la mise en page nécessaire. Actuellement les mises en page suivantes sont disponibles : Titre, Titre et objet, En-tête de section, Objet et deux objets, Deux textes et deux objets, Titre seulement, Vide, Titre, Objet et Légende, Image et Légende, Texte vertical, Texte vertical et texte. Pour ajouter des objets à la disposition d'une diapositive : cliquez sur l'icône Modifier la disposition de diapositive et sélectionnez la disposition pour laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter un objet, ajoutez les objets appropriés à la diapositive (image, tableau, graphique, forme) sous l'onglet Insertion dans la barre d'outil supérieure, ensuite cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur cet objet et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter dans une mise en page, cliquez sur Modifier la disposition de diapositive sous l'onglet Accueil et sélectionnez la disposition modifiée. Les objets sélectionnés seront ajoutés à la disposition du thème actuel. Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner, redimensionner ou déplacer des objets que vous ajoutez d'une telle façon. Pour réinitialiser la disposition de diapositive à son état d'origine : sélectionnez les diapositives à réinitialiser la disposition à son état d'origine de la liste des diapositives à gauche, Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et sélectionnez une diapositive à la foi, ou maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives à partir de la diapositive actuelle jusqu'à la dernière. cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une diapositive et sélectionnez l'option Réinitialiser la diapositive dans le menu contextuelle. Toutes les zones de texte et les objets dans la diapositive sont réinitialisés selon la disposition de la diapositive. Pour ajouter des notes à une diapositive : sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une note dans la liste de diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur la légende Cliquez pour ajouter des notes sous la zone d'édition de la diapositive, tapez le texte de votre note. Vous pouvez mettre en forme du texte à l'aide des icônes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Lorsque vous démarrez le diaporama en mode Présentateur, vous pouvez voir toutes les notes de la diapositive sous la zone d'aperçu de la diapositive." - }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Prise en charge des graphiques SmartArt par l'Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Éditeur de Présentations ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les graphiques SmartArt qui étaient créés dans d'autres applications. Vous pouvez ouvrir un fichier contenant SmartArt et le modifier en tant qu'un élément graphique en utilisant les outils d'édition disponibles. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur le graphique SmartArt ou sur son élément, les onglets suivants deviennent actifs sur la barre latérale droite pour modifier la disposition du graphique : Paramètres de la diapositive pour modifier le remplissage d'arrière plan sur la diapositive, afficher ou masquer le numéro de diapositive, la date et l'heure. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter Définir les paramètres de la diapositive et Insérer les pieds de page. Paramètres de la forme pour modifier les formes inclues dans le graphique. Vous pouvez modifier les formes, le remplissage, les lignes, le style d'habillage, la position, les poids et les flèches, la zone de texte et le texte de remplacement. Paramètres du paragraphe pour modifier les retraits et l'espacement, les enchaînements, les bordures et le remplissage, la police, les taquets et les marges intérieures. Veuillez consulter la section Mise en forme du texte pour une description détaillée de toutes options disponibles. Cette onglet n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Paramètres de Texte Art pour modifier le style des objets Texte Art inclus dans le graphique SmartArt pour mettre en évidence du texte. Vous pouvez modifier le modèle de l'objet Text Art, le remplissage, la couleur et l'opacité, le poids, la couleur et le type des traits. Cette onglet n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Faites un clic droit sur la bordure du graphique SmartArt ou sur la bordure de ses éléments pour accéder aux options suivantes : Organiser pour organiser des objets en utilisant les options suivantes : Mettre au premier plan, Mettre en arrière plan, Déplacer vers l'avant et Reculer sont disponibles pour le graphique SmartArt. Les options Grouper et Dissocier sont disponibles pour les éléments du graphique SmartArt et dépendent du fait s'ils sont groupés ou non. Aligner pour aligner du graphic ou des objets en utilisant les options suivantes : Aligner à gauche, Aligner au centre, Aligner à droite, Aligner en haut, Aligner au milieu, Aligner en bas, Distribuer horizontalement et Distribuer verticalement. Rotation pour définir le sens de rotation de l'élément inclus dans le graphique SmartArt. Faire pivoter à droite de 90°, Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°, Retourner horizontalement, Retourner verticalement. L'option Rotation n'est disponible que pour les éléments du graphique SmartArt. Paramètres avancés de la forme pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de mise en forme. Ajouter un commentaire pour laisser un commentaire sur le graphique SmartArt ou son élément. Ajouter dans une mise en page pour ajouter un graphique SmartArt à la disposition d'une diapositive. Faites un clic droit sur l'élément du graphique SmartArt pour accéder aux options suivantes : Alignement vertical pour définir l'alignement du texte dans l'élément du graphique SmartArt : Aligner en haut, Aligner au milieu ou Aligner en bas. Orientation du texte pour définir l'orientation du texte dans l'élément du graphique SmartArt : Horizontal, Rotation du texte vers le bas, Rotation du texte vers le haut. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de mise en forme du paragraphe. Ajouter un commentaire pour laisser un commentaire sur le graphique SmartArt ou son élément. Lien hypertexte pour ajouter un lien hypertexte menant à l'élément du graphique SmartArt." + "body": "Pour personnaliser votre présentation dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez sélectionner le thème, les jeux de couleurs, la taille et l'orientation de la diapositive pour toute la présentation, changer le remplissage de l'arrière-plan ou la mise en page pour chaque diapositive séparée aussi bien qu'appliquer des transitions entre les diapositives. Il est également possible d'ajouter des notes explicatives à chaque diapositive qui peuvent être utiles lorsque la présentation est en mode Présentateur. Les Thèmes vous permettent de changer rapidement la conception de présentation, notamment l'apparence d'arrière-plan de diapositives, les polices prédéfinies pour les titres et les textes, la palette de couleurs qui est utilisée pour les éléments de présentation. Pour sélectionner un thème pour la présentation, cliquez sur le thème prédéfini voulu dans la galerie de thèmes sur le côté droit de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le thème choisi sera appliqué à toutes les diapositives à moins que vous n'en ayez choisi quelques-unes pour appliquer le thème. Pour modifier le thème sélectionné pour une ou plusieurs diapositives, vous pouvez cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les diapositives sélectionnées dans la liste de gauche (ou cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une diapositive dans la zone d'édition), sélectionner l'option Changer de thème dans le menu contextuel et choisir le thème voulu. Les Jeux de couleurs servent à définir des couleurs prédéfinies utilisées pour les éléments de présentation (polices, lignes, remplissages etc.) et vous permettent de maintenir la cohérence des couleurs dans toute la présentation. Pour changer de jeu de couleurs, cliquez sur l'icône Modifier le jeu de couleurs dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le jeu nécessaire de la liste déroulante. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionné sera appliqué à toutes les diapositives. Pour changer la taille de toutes les diapositives de la présentation, cliquez sur l'icône Sélectionner la taille de la diapositive sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez sélectionner : l'un des deux paramètres prédéfinis - Standard (4:3) ou Écran large (16:9), l'option Paramètres avancés pour ouvrir la fenêtre Paramètres de taille et sélectionnez l'un des préréglages disponibles ou définissez la taille Personnalisée en spécifiant les valeurs de Largeur et Hauteur. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Standard (4:3), Plein écran (16:9), Plein écran (16:10), Papier à lettres (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 (297x420 mm), Format A4 (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Papier (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Papier (176x250 mm), Diapositives 35 mm, Transparent, Bannière, Plein écran, Personnalisé. Le menu Orientation de la diapositive permet de changer le type d'orientation actuellement sélectionné. Le type d'orientation par défaut est Paysage qui peut être commuté sur Portrait. Pour modifier le remplissage de l'arrière-plan: sélectionnez les diapositives dont le remplissage vous voulez modifier de la liste des diapositives à gauche. Ou cliquez sur n'importe quel espace vide dans la diapositive en cours de la modification dans la zone de travail pour changer le type de remplissage de cette diapositive séparée. dans l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive de la barre latérale droite, sélectionnez une des options : Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la diapositive sélectionnée. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner deux couleurs et remplir la diapositive d'une transition douce entre elles. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la diapositive. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la diapositive. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité - faites glisser le curseur ou saisissez la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Pour en savoir plus consultez la section Remplir les objets et sélectionner les couleurs. Transitions vous aident à rendre votre présentation plus dynamique et captiver l'attention de votre auditoire. Pour appliquer une transition : sélectionnez les diapositives auxquelles vous voulez appliquer la transition de la liste de diapositives à gauche, sélectionnez une transition de la liste déroulante Effet de l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive, Pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la diapositive, vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône Paramètres de la diapositive à droite ou cliquer avec le bouton droit sur la diapositive dans la zone d'édition de la diapositive et sélectionner l'option Paramètres de la diapositive dans le menu contextuel. réglez les paramètres de la transition : choisissez le type de la transition, la durée et le mode de l'avancement des diapositives, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à toutes les diapositives si vous voulez appliquer la même transition à toutes les diapositives de la présentation. Pour en savoir plus sur ces options consultez le chapitre Appliquer des transitions . Pour appliquer une mise en page : sélectionnez les diapositives auxquelles vous voulez appliquer une nouvelle mise en page de la liste de diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur l'icône Modifier la disposition de la diapositive dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une mise en page nécessaire de la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur la diapositive nécessaire dans la liste située à gauche, sélectionnez l'option Modifier la disposition de diapositive depuis le menu contextuel et sélectionnez la mise en page nécessaire. Actuellement les mises en page suivantes sont disponibles : Titre, Titre et objet, En-tête de section, Objet et deux objets, Deux textes et deux objets, Titre seulement, Vide, Titre, Objet et Légende, Image et Légende, Texte vertical, Texte vertical et texte. Pour ajouter des objets à la disposition d'une diapositive : cliquez sur l'icône Modifier la disposition de diapositive et sélectionnez la disposition pour laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter un objet, ajoutez les objets appropriés à la diapositive (image, tableau, graphique, forme) sous l'onglet Insertion dans la barre d'outil supérieure, ensuite cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur cet objet et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter dans une mise en page, cliquez sur Modifier la disposition de diapositive sous l'onglet Accueil et sélectionnez la disposition modifiée. Les objets sélectionnés seront ajoutés à la disposition du thème actuel. Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner, redimensionner ou déplacer des objets que vous ajoutez d'une telle façon. Pour réinitialiser la disposition de diapositive à son état d'origine : sélectionnez les diapositives à réinitialiser la disposition à son état d'origine de la liste des diapositives à gauche, Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et sélectionnez une diapositive à la foi, ou maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives à partir de la diapositive actuelle jusqu'à la dernière. cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une diapositive et sélectionnez l'option Réinitialiser la diapositive dans le menu contextuelle. Toutes les zones de texte et les objets dans la diapositive sont réinitialisés selon la disposition de la diapositive. Pour ajouter des notes à une diapositive : sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une note dans la liste de diapositives à gauche, cliquez sur la légende Cliquez pour ajouter des notes sous la zone d'édition de la diapositive, tapez le texte de votre note. Vous pouvez mettre en forme du texte à l'aide des icônes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Lorsque vous démarrez le diaporama en mode Présentateur, vous pouvez voir toutes les notes de la diapositive sous la zone d'aperçu de la diapositive." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", @@ -268,6 +278,11 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Insérer une vidéo", - "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre présentation. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer. (l'adresse complète dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur) Accédez à votre présentation et placez le curseur à l'endroit où le vidéo doit être inséré. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez YouTube. Collez l'URL et cliquez sur OK. Vérifiez si la vidéo est vrai et cliquez sur OK au-dessous la vidéo. Maintenant la vidéo est insérée dans votre présentation." + "body": "Dans l'Éditeur de Présentations, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre présentation. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer (l'adresse complète dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur). Accédez à votre présentation et placez le curseur à l'endroit où le vidéo doit être inséré. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez YouTube. Collez l'URL et cliquez sur OK. Vérifiez si la vidéo est vrai et cliquez sur OK au-dessous la vidéo. Maintenant la vidéo est insérée dans votre présentation." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", + "title": "Zoom", + "body": "Le module complémentaire Zoom permet créer et programmer des réunions de Zoom directement depuis l'éditeur en quelques clics. Le module complémentaire est compatible avec la version auto-hébergée des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE et c'est possible de l'ajouter manuellement aux instances ONLYOFFICE. Installation Pour installer le module complémentaire Zoom, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires. Recherchez Zoom sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter la documentation API d'ONLYOFFICE. Configuration Enregistrez l'éditeur en tant que l'application JWT sur la page Zoom Developer pour utiliser la programmation des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Le jeton JWT sera assigné à l'application. Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom . Créez l'application Meeting SDK sur la page Zoom Developer pour pouvoir joindre des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Les informations d'identification SDK seront assignées à l'application. Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom . Saisissez les clés SDK Key, SDK Secret et le jeton JWT Token dans les champs appropriés sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur ONLYOFFICE et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Utilisation Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom. Saisissez le thème de la réunion et sélectionnez Démarrer une réunion ou Programmer une réunion. Les notifications de réunion sont affichées dans le Chat de l'éditeur en ligne et dans les Commentaires de l'éditeur du bureau. Une fenêtre noire peut apparaître dans le navigateur Safari lorsqu'on se joint à la réunion. Pour faire disparaître l'erreur, il faut redimensionner la fenêtre du module complémentaire ou zoomer sur la page de navigateur." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index c55cb36665..9300c01f40 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index ad2fe7003f..7b05e68e0b 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -366,332 +366,344 @@ height: 20px; } -.icon-constantproportionsactivated { +.icon-chatgpt_icon { background-position: -98px -124px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-copystyle_selected { +.icon-constantproportionsactivated { background-position: -118px -124px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-image { +.icon-copystyle_selected { background-position: -148px 0px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-insert_symbol_icon { +.icon-image { background-position: -148px -20px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-placeholder_imagefromfile { +.icon-insert_symbol_icon { background-position: -148px -40px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-pointer_enabled { +.icon-placeholder_imagefromfile { background-position: -148px -60px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-show_password { +.icon-pointer_enabled { background-position: -148px -80px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-spellcheckactivated { +.icon-show_password { background-position: -148px -100px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-vector { +.icon-spellcheckactivated { background-position: -148px -120px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } -.icon-sortcommentsicon { +.icon-vector { background-position: 0px -145px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-zoom_icon { + background-position: -20px -145px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-sortcommentsicon { + background-position: -40px -145px; width: 31px; height: 19px; } .icon-inserttable { - background-position: -31px -145px; + background-position: -71px -145px; width: 28px; height: 19px; } .icon-chat_toptoolbar { - background-position: -59px -145px; + background-position: -99px -145px; width: 24px; height: 19px; } -.icon-comment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -83px -145px; +.icon-chart { + background-position: -123px -145px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } -.icon-insertchart { - background-position: -105px -145px; +.icon-comment_toptoolbar { + background-position: -145px -145px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-placeholder_chart { - background-position: -127px -145px; + background-position: -168px 0px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-hiderulers { - background-position: -149px -145px; + background-position: -168px -19px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-noborders { - background-position: -168px 0px; + background-position: -168px -38px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-removecomment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -168px -19px; + background-position: -168px -57px; width: 15px; height: 19px; } .icon-equationplaceholder { - background-position: -168px -38px; + background-position: -168px -76px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-search_advanced { - background-position: -168px -56px; + background-position: -168px -94px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-searchbuttons { - background-position: 0px -164px; + background-position: 0px -165px; width: 33px; height: 17px; } .icon-insert_columns { - background-position: -33px -164px; + background-position: -33px -165px; width: 25px; height: 17px; } .icon-insertequationicon { - background-position: -58px -164px; + background-position: -168px -112px; width: 22px; height: 17px; } .icon-changecolumnwidth { - background-position: -80px -164px; + background-position: -168px -129px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-sharingicon { - background-position: -101px -164px; + background-position: -168px -146px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-chaticon_new { - background-position: -168px -74px; + background-position: -58px -165px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-search_icon_header { - background-position: -168px -91px; + background-position: -77px -165px; width: 17px; height: 17px; } .icon-paste_style { - background-position: -168px -108px; + background-position: -94px -165px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-addgradientpoint { - background-position: -168px -125px; + background-position: -136px -44px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-removegradientpoint { - background-position: -168px -142px; + background-position: -68px -56px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-placeholder_table { - background-position: -122px -164px; + background-position: -110px -165px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-usersnumber { - background-position: -144px -164px; + background-position: -132px -165px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-access_rights { - background-position: -166px -164px; + background-position: -154px -165px; width: 19px; height: 16px; } .icon-saveupdate { - background-position: -187px 0px; + background-position: -190px 0px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-savewhilecoediting { - background-position: -187px -16px; + background-position: -190px -16px; width: 17px; height: 16px; } .icon-favorites_icon { - background-position: -187px -32px; + background-position: -190px -32px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-chaticon { - background-position: -187px -48px; + background-position: -190px -48px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-gotodocuments { - background-position: -187px -63px; + background-position: -190px -63px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-print { - background-position: -187px -78px; + background-position: -190px -78px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } .icon-added_comment_icon { - background-position: -187px -93px; + background-position: -190px -93px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-bgcolor { - background-position: -187px -108px; + background-position: -190px -108px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-about { - background-position: -187px -123px; + background-position: -190px -123px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-abouticon { - background-position: -187px -138px; + background-position: -190px -138px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-advanced_settings_icon { - background-position: -187px -153px; + background-position: -190px -153px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-document_language { - background-position: 0px -181px; + background-position: -173px -165px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-group { - background-position: -15px -181px; + background-position: 0px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-pagesize { - background-position: -30px -181px; + background-position: -15px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-search_options { - background-position: -45px -181px; + background-position: -30px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopcenter { - background-position: -60px -181px; + background-position: -45px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopleft { - background-position: -75px -181px; + background-position: -60px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopright { - background-position: -90px -181px; + background-position: -75px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-ungroup { - background-position: -105px -181px; + background-position: -90px -182px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-feedback { - background-position: -120px -181px; + background-position: -105px -182px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-fitpage { - background-position: -134px -181px; + background-position: -119px -182px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-flipupsidedown { - background-position: -148px -181px; + background-position: -133px -182px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } @@ -703,7 +715,7 @@ } .icon-back { - background-position: -136px -44px; + background-position: -147px -182px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } @@ -715,7 +727,7 @@ } .icon-fontcolor { - background-position: -162px -181px; + background-position: -159px -182px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } @@ -727,79 +739,79 @@ } .icon-columnwidthmarker { - background-position: -187px -181px; + background-position: -190px -168px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-fliplefttoright { - background-position: -205px 0px; + background-position: -184px -182px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-autoshape { - background-position: -205px -14px; + background-position: -208px 0px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-commentsicon { - background-position: -205px -28px; + background-position: -208px -14px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-deleteicon { - background-position: -205px -42px; + background-position: -208px -28px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-save { - background-position: -205px -56px; + background-position: -208px -42px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-searchicon { - background-position: -205px -70px; + background-position: -208px -56px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-gradientslider { - background-position: -205px -84px; + background-position: -208px -70px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-highlight_color_mouse_pointer { - background-position: -205px -98px; + background-position: -208px -84px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-textart_settings_icon { - background-position: -205px -112px; + background-position: -208px -98px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-hard { - background-position: -205px -126px; + background-position: -208px -112px; width: 9px; height: 14px; } .icon-highlightcolor { - background-position: 0px -196px; + background-position: 0px -197px; width: 27px; height: 13px; } .icon-outline { - background-position: -27px -196px; + background-position: -27px -197px; width: 25px; height: 13px; } @@ -811,331 +823,331 @@ } .icon-arrangeshape { - background-position: -52px -196px; + background-position: -52px -197px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-changelayout { - background-position: -73px -196px; + background-position: -73px -197px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-table { - background-position: -94px -196px; + background-position: -94px -197px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-verticalalign { - background-position: -115px -196px; + background-position: -115px -197px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-visible_area { - background-position: -136px -196px; + background-position: -136px -197px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-orientation { - background-position: -187px -168px; + background-position: -156px -197px; width: 17px; height: 13px; } .icon-cut { - background-position: -156px -196px; + background-position: -173px -197px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-changerange { - background-position: -205px -140px; + background-position: -189px -197px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-feedbackicon { - background-position: -205px -153px; + background-position: -204px -197px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-fitslide { - background-position: -205px -166px; + background-position: -222px 0px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-greencircle { - background-position: -205px -179px; + background-position: -222px -13px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-clearstyle { - background-position: -172px -196px; + background-position: -222px -26px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-copy { - background-position: -186px -196px; + background-position: -222px -39px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-paste { - background-position: -200px -196px; + background-position: -222px -52px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-selectall { - background-position: -220px 0px; + background-position: -222px -65px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignbottom { - background-position: -220px -13px; + background-position: -222px -78px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignmiddle { - background-position: -220px -26px; + background-position: -222px -91px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectbottom { - background-position: -220px -39px; + background-position: -222px -104px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectcenter { - background-position: -220px -52px; + background-position: -222px -117px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectleft { - background-position: -220px -65px; + background-position: -222px -130px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectmiddle { - background-position: -220px -78px; + background-position: -222px -143px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectright { - background-position: -220px -91px; + background-position: -222px -156px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjecttop { - background-position: -220px -104px; + background-position: -222px -169px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-aligntop { - background-position: -220px -117px; + background-position: -222px -182px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringforward { - background-position: -220px -130px; + background-position: -222px -195px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringtofront { - background-position: -220px -143px; + background-position: -208px -126px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-chart_settings_icon { - background-position: -220px -156px; + background-position: -208px -139px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-copystyle { - background-position: -220px -169px; + background-position: -208px -152px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-distributehorizontally { - background-position: -220px -182px; + background-position: -208px -165px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-distributevertically { - background-position: -220px -195px; + background-position: -208px -178px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-exitfullscreen { - background-position: 0px -209px; + background-position: 0px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-fullscreen { - background-position: -13px -209px; + background-position: -13px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-image_settings_icon { - background-position: -26px -209px; + background-position: -26px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-nextpage { - background-position: -39px -209px; + background-position: -39px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-previouspage { - background-position: -52px -209px; + background-position: -52px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendbackward { - background-position: -65px -209px; + background-position: -65px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendtoback { - background-position: -78px -209px; + background-position: -78px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-shape_settings_icon { - background-position: -91px -209px; + background-position: -91px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-slide_settings_icon { - background-position: -104px -209px; + background-position: -104px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-startpreview { - background-position: -117px -209px; + background-position: -117px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-text_settings_icon { - background-position: -130px -209px; + background-position: -130px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-zoomin { - background-position: -143px -209px; + background-position: -143px -210px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-aligncenter { - background-position: -68px -56px; + background-position: -156px -210px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignleft { - background-position: -156px -209px; + background-position: -168px -210px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignright { - background-position: -168px -209px; + background-position: -180px -210px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-editcommenticon { - background-position: -180px -209px; + background-position: -192px -210px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-justify { - background-position: -192px -209px; + background-position: -204px -210px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-selectslidesizeicon { - background-position: -204px -209px; + background-position: 0px -223px; width: 25px; height: 12px; } .icon-spellcheckdeactivated { - background-position: 0px -222px; + background-position: -216px -210px; width: 15px; height: 12px; } .icon-rotateclockwise { - background-position: -15px -222px; + background-position: -25px -223px; width: 13px; height: 12px; } .icon-rotatecounterclockwise { - background-position: -28px -222px; + background-position: -38px -223px; width: 13px; height: 12px; } .icon-circle { - background-position: -41px -222px; + background-position: -51px -223px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-nofill { - background-position: -53px -222px; + background-position: -63px -223px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-sup { - background-position: -65px -222px; + background-position: -75px -223px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-deletecommenticon { - background-position: -77px -222px; + background-position: -87px -223px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } @@ -1147,217 +1159,217 @@ } .icon-startpresentation { - background-position: -88px -222px; + background-position: -199px -182px; width: 9px; height: 12px; } .icon-numbering { - background-position: -97px -222px; + background-position: -98px -223px; width: 23px; height: 11px; } .icon-bullets { - background-position: -120px -222px; + background-position: -121px -223px; width: 22px; height: 11px; } .icon-horizontalalign { - background-position: -142px -222px; + background-position: -143px -223px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-insertfunction { - background-position: -163px -222px; + background-position: -164px -223px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-linespacing { - background-position: -184px -222px; + background-position: -185px -223px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-fitwidth { - background-position: -205px -222px; + background-position: -206px -223px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-viewsettingsicon { - background-position: -234px 0px; + background-position: -237px 0px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-larger { - background-position: -234px -11px; + background-position: -237px -11px; width: 14px; height: 11px; } .icon-sub { - background-position: -234px -22px; + background-position: -237px -22px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreasedec { - background-position: -234px -33px; + background-position: -237px -33px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreaseindent { - background-position: -234px -44px; + background-position: -237px -44px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increasedec { - background-position: -234px -55px; + background-position: -237px -55px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increaseindent { - background-position: -234px -66px; + background-position: -237px -66px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolvedicon { - background-position: -234px -77px; + background-position: -237px -77px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolveicon { - background-position: -234px -88px; + background-position: -237px -88px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-closepreview { - background-position: -234px -99px; + background-position: -237px -99px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-underline { - background-position: -234px -110px; + background-position: -237px -110px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-zoomout { - background-position: -234px -121px; + background-position: -237px -121px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-smaller { - background-position: -234px -132px; + background-position: -237px -132px; width: 13px; height: 10px; } .icon-nextslide { - background-position: -234px -142px; + background-position: -237px -142px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-presenter_nextslide { - background-position: -234px -152px; + background-position: -237px -152px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-presenter_previousslide { - background-position: -234px -162px; + background-position: -237px -162px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-previousslide { - background-position: -234px -172px; + background-position: -237px -172px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-strike { - background-position: -234px -182px; + background-position: -237px -182px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-yellowdiamond { - background-position: -234px -192px; + background-position: -237px -192px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-firstline_indent { - background-position: -234px -202px; + background-position: -237px -202px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-pointer { - background-position: -234px -212px; + background-position: -237px -212px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-bold { - background-position: -234px -222px; + background-position: -237px -222px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-pausepresentation { - background-position: -242px -222px; + background-position: -245px -222px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-presenter_pausepresentation { - background-position: -68px -69px; + background-position: -222px -223px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-italic { - background-position: -180px -125px; + background-position: -183px -57px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } .icon-redo { - background-position: 0px -234px; + background-position: 0px -235px; width: 16px; height: 9px; } .icon-undo { - background-position: -16px -234px; + background-position: -16px -235px; width: 16px; height: 9px; } .icon-cellrow { - background-position: -221px -222px; + background-position: -32px -235px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-resize_square { - background-position: -32px -234px; + background-position: -41px -235px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } @@ -1369,25 +1381,25 @@ } .icon-searchupbutton { - background-position: -41px -234px; + background-position: -50px -235px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-constantproportions { - background-position: -55px -234px; + background-position: -64px -235px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-rowheightmarker { - background-position: -68px -234px; + background-position: -77px -235px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopcenter_marker { - background-position: -81px -234px; + background-position: -90px -235px; width: 12px; height: 8px; } @@ -1405,61 +1417,61 @@ } .icon-soft { - background-position: -93px -234px; + background-position: -102px -235px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopleft_marker { - background-position: -103px -234px; + background-position: -112px -235px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopright_marker { - background-position: -111px -234px; + background-position: -120px -235px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-redo1 { - background-position: -90px -95px; + background-position: -208px -191px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-undo1 { - background-position: -119px -234px; + background-position: -90px -95px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-leftindent { - background-position: -136px -59px; + background-position: -68px -73px; width: 10px; height: 6px; } .icon-tab { - background-position: -168px -159px; + background-position: -148px -140px; width: 10px; height: 5px; } .icon-connectionpoint { - background-position: -245px -99px; + background-position: -248px -99px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-square { - background-position: -245px -104px; + background-position: -248px -104px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-space { - background-position: -248px -11px; + background-position: -251px -11px; width: 2px; height: 3px; } diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chart.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chart.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0b965c50c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chart.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0f1ca4a698 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eab263b724 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css index ae79f29754..1b5ef71724 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css @@ -147,6 +147,8 @@ text-decoration: none; .search-field { display: block; float: right; + margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json index 8bbcb03850..410a8033d4 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Файл"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Главная"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Вставка" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Рисование"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Переходы" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Анимация" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Совместная работа" }, @@ -24,6 +25,7 @@ { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Вставка и редактирование диаграмм" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "name": "Вставка и форматирование таблиц" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Вставка объектов SmartArt" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Рисование от руки на слайде" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm", "name": "Добавление анимации" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm", "name": "Создание анимации пути перемещения" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Вставка символов и знаков" }, diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 078261d1e3..11109b07fd 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -378,6 +378,12 @@

                                                      Подсказки для клавиш

                                                      ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированный объект из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Объект может быть ранее скопирован из этой же презентации. + + Вставить текст без форматирования стиля + Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V,
                                                      + ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V + Вставить ранее скопированный фрагмент текста из буфера обмена компьютера в текущую позицию курсора без сохранения исходного форматирования. Текст можно предварительно скопировать из того же документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы + Вставить гиперссылку Ctrl+K @@ -386,14 +392,14 @@

                                                      Подсказки для клавиш

                                                      Копировать форматирование - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C,
                                                      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C + Alt+Ctrl+C + ^ Ctrl+Alt+C,
                                                      ⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Скопировать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента редактируемого текста. Скопированное форматирование можно затем применить к другому тексту в этой же презентации. Применить форматирование - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V,
                                                      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V + Alt+Ctrl+V + ^ Ctrl+Alt+V,
                                                      ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Применить ранее скопированное форматирование к тексту редактируемого текстового поля. @@ -625,15 +631,15 @@

                                                      Подсказки для клавиш

                                                      Перейти к следующему текстовому заполнителю с заголовком или основным текстом слайда. Если это последний текстовый заполнитель на слайде, будет вставлен новый слайд с таким же макетом, как у исходного. + Перейти на один абзац вверх + Ctrl+Стрелка вверх + Переместить курсор на один абзац вверх. + + + Перейти на один абзац вниз + Ctrl+Стрелка вниз + Переместить курсор на один абзац вниз. + --> Перейти в начало строки Home diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 01ee7d6800..5a5b3f8dc5 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@

                                                      Настройте параметры представления

                                                      Используйте инструменты навигации

                                                      Для осуществления навигации по презентации используйте следующие инструменты:

                                                      Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения масштаба текущей презентации. - Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%/ 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки + Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . Щелкните по значку По ширине , чтобы ширина слайда соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Чтобы весь слайд целиком помещался в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру слайда . diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index e8bd2c114d..202f3a4e95 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -17,9 +17,9 @@

                                                      Функция поиска и замены

                                                      Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, которые используются в редактируемой презентации, нажмите на значок , расположенный на левой боковой панели, или значок , расположенный в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска.

                                                      -

                                                      В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск.

                                                      +

                                                      В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Панель включает в себя текстовое поле для ввода поискового запроса, количество результатов поиска и элементы управления для перехода к предыдущему, следующему результату и закрытия панели.

                                                      Маленькая панель Поиск

                                                      -

                                                      Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H.

                                                      +

                                                      Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок .

                                                      Откроется панель Поиск и замена:

                                                      Панель Поиск и замена
                                                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 2fe698ba99..ef4dfd3287 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@

                                                        Поддерживаемые форматы электронных презентаций

                                                        Презентация - это серия слайдов, которые могут содержать различные типы контента, такие как изображения, файлы мультимедиа, текст, эффекты и т.д. - Редактор презентаций работает со следующими форматами презентаций. + Редактор презентаций работает со следующими форматами презентаций.

                                                        При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (PPTX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости.

                                                        Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование.

                                                        @@ -30,9 +30,33 @@

                                                        Поддерживаемые форматы электронных през Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML + + DPS + WPS Office Presentation Document by Kingsoft
                                                        Формат презентации, входящий в пакет WPS Office. Он включает в себя набор слайдов, который может состоять из титульного слайда, за которым следуют слайды с содержимым: текст, изображения, видео, аудио и фигуры + + + + + + + + + DPT + Kingsoft Presentation Template
                                                        Формат файла для сохранения стандартного макета макета и стилей для презентации и для создания презентаций (файлы .DPS) с тем же форматированием + + + + + + + + + FODP + OpenDocument Flat XML Presentation Format
                                                        Формат файлов презентаций для хранения сохраненной презентации в формате OpenDocument XML без сжатия + + + + + + + ODP - OpenDocument Presentation
                                                        Формат файлов, который представляет презентации, созданные приложением Impress, входящим в состав пакетов офисных приложений на базе OpenOffice + OpenDocument Presentation
                                                        Формат файлов презентаций, созданный приложением Impress и входящий в состав пакетов офисных приложений на базе OpenOffice + @@ -46,6 +70,22 @@

                                                        Поддерживаемые форматы электронных през + + + POT + Portable object template
                                                        Формат файлов презентаций, содержащий стандартные макеты, форматирование и стили. Файлы POT используются для создания нескольких файлов .PPT с одинаковым форматированием + + + + + + + + + POTM + A macro-enabled presentation template by Microsoft PowerPoint
                                                        Формат файла презентаций, который содержит стандартные изображения, шаблоны слайдов, макросы и форматирование. + + + + + + + POTX PowerPoint Open XML Document Template
                                                        разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов презентаций. Шаблон POTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества презентаций со схожим форматированием @@ -54,6 +94,22 @@

                                                        Поддерживаемые форматы электронных през + + + PPS + PowerPoint Slideshow File
                                                        Формат файла презентаций, содержащий различные данные, такие как видео, аудио, текст, анимация и изображения + + + + + + + + + PPSM + Macro-enabled slide show by Microsoft PowerPoint
                                                        Формат файла презентаций, содержащий один или несколько слайдов с поддержкой макросов, а также текст, изображения и переходы + + + + + + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show
                                                        Формат файлов презентаций, используемый для воспроизведения слайд-шоу @@ -78,6 +134,14 @@

                                                        Поддерживаемые форматы электронных през + + + SXI + StarOffice Impress Presentation
                                                        Формат презентаций, которые могут содержать слайды с заголовком, текст и цифровые объекты; также поддерживает аудио, видео и эффекты перехода + + + + + +

                                                        Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать презентацию из меню Файл -> Скачать как.

                                                        @@ -85,29 +149,61 @@

                                                        Поддерживаемые форматы электронных през

                                                        + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - + + + + +
                                                        Исходный формат Можно скачать как
                                                        DPSJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        DPTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        FODPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        ODPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        OTPJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        POTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        POTMJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        POTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        PPSJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        PPSMJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        PPSXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        PPTJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX
                                                        PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTXJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM
                                                        SXIJPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX

                                                        Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации презентаций в самые известные форматы файлов.

                                                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..da9bf701a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Вкладка Рисование + + + + + + + + +
                                                        +
                                                        + +
                                                        +

                                                        Вкладка Рисование

                                                        +

                                                        Вкладка Рисование Редактора презентаций позволяет выполнять основные операции рисования.

                                                        +
                                                        +

                                                        Окно онлайн-редактора презентаций:

                                                        +

                                                        Draw tab

                                                        +
                                                        +
                                                        +

                                                        Окно десктопного редактора презентаций:

                                                        +

                                                        Draw tab

                                                        +
                                                        +

                                                        С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия:

                                                        +
                                                          +
                                                        • выделять рисунки, чтобы изменить их размер или удалить,
                                                          • +
                                                        • использовать ручку и маркер, чтобы рисовать или добавлять рукописные заметки и выделение,
                                                          • +
                                                        • использовать ластик, чтобы удалять весь рисунок или рукописный текст.
                                                          • +
                                                        +
                                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index a8bca649f6..120360273a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

                                                        Вкладка Плагины

                                                        Окно десктопного редактора презентаций:

                                                        Вкладка Плагины

                                                        -

                                                        Кнопка Настройки позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные.

                                                        +

                                                        Кнопка Менеджер плагинов позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные.

                                                        Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API.

                                                        В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины:

                                                          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c167d8fb17 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Рисование от руки на слайде + + + + + + + + +
                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          +

                                                          Рисование от руки на слайде

                                                          +

                                                          В Редакторе презентаций, вы можете использовать вкладку Рисование, чтобы выделять в документе текст маркером, рисовать от руки, добавлять рукописные заметки и стирать их.

                                                          +

                                                          Функции рисования

                                                          +

                                                          Чтобы начать рисовать, писать или выделять текст, нажмите значок Ручка или Маркер и перемещайте курсор. Щелкните стрелку раскрывающегося списка, чтобы настроить цвет и толщину обводки. Нажмите Другие цвета, если нужного цвета нет в палитре.

                                                          +

                                                          Инструмент Ручка

                                                          +

                                                          Когда вы закончите рисовать, писать или выделять, снова щелкните значок Ручка или Маркер или нажмите клавишу Esc.

                                                          +

                                                          Щелкните на Ластик и перемещайте курсор вперед и назад, чтобы стереть рисунок. Ластик удаляет только весь рисунок.

                                                          +

                                                          Используйте функцию Выделить, чтобы выбрать надпись или рисунок. После выбора вы можете изменить размер или удалить выбранный элемент.

                                                          +
                                                          + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm index e115ac7a14..8c46fa52a2 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm @@ -38,10 +38,17 @@

                                                          Заливка объектов и выбор цветов

                                                          • Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной теме/цветовой схеме презентации. Как только вы примените какую-то другую тему или цветовую схему, набор Цвета темы изменится.
                                                          • Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов.
                                                            • -
                                                          • Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: -

                                                            Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                                                            -

                                                            Пользовательский цвет будет применен к объекту и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет.

                                                            -
                                                            • +
                                                          • + Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты: +
                                                              +
                                                            • Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в презентации.
                                                              • +
                                                            • + Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: +

                                                              Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                                                              +

                                                              Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет.

                                                              +
                                                              • +
                                                            +

                                                          Примечание: такие же типы цветов можно использовать при выборе цвета обводки автофигуры, настройке цвета шрифта или изменении цвета фона или границ таблицы.

                                                          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index b060127864..b192a50999 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -10,64 +10,77 @@ -
                                                          -
                                                          - -
                                                          -

                                                          Вставка и форматирование автофигур

                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          +

                                                          Вставка и форматирование автофигур

                                                          Вставка автофигуры

                                                          -

                                                          Для добавления автофигуры на слайд:

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          1. в списке слайдов слева выберите тот слайд, на который требуется добавить автофигуру,
                                                            2. -
                                                          2. щелкните по значку
                                                            Фигура на вкладке Главная или по стрелочке рядом с
                                                            Галереей фигур на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                                            3. -
                                                          3. выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии,
                                                            4. -
                                                          4. щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы,
                                                            5. -
                                                          5. в области редактирования слайда установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, -

                                                            Примечание: чтобы растянуть фигуру, можно перетащить курсор при нажатой кнопке мыши.

                                                            -
                                                            6. -
                                                          6. после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. -

                                                            Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на слайде выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней).

                                                            -
                                                            7. -
                                                          +

                                                          Для добавления автофигуры на слайд:

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. в списке слайдов слева выберите тот слайд, на который требуется добавить автофигуру,
                                                            2. +
                                                          2. щелкните по значку
                                                            Фигура на вкладке Главная или по стрелочке рядом с
                                                            Галереей фигур на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                                            3. +
                                                          3. выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии,
                                                            4. +
                                                          4. щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы,
                                                            5. +
                                                          5. + в области редактирования слайда установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, +

                                                            Примечание: чтобы растянуть фигуру, можно перетащить курсор при нажатой кнопке мыши.

                                                            +
                                                            6. +
                                                          6. + после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. Вы можете сохранить автофигуру как изображение на жестком диске с помощью пункта Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. +

                                                            Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на слайде выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней).

                                                            +
                                                            7. +

                                                          Также можно добавить автофигуру в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье.

                                                          -
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Копирование форматирования стиля автофигуры

                                                          +

                                                          Чтобы скопировать определенное форматирование стиля автофигуры,

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. выберите автофигуру, форматирование которой нужно скопировать, и с помощью мыши или клавиатуры,
                                                            2. +
                                                          2. щелкните значок Копировать стиль
                                                            на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов (указатель мыши будет выглядеть следующим образом
                                                            ),
                                                            3. +
                                                          3. выберите нужную автофигуру, чтобы применить такое же форматирование.
                                                            4. +
                                                          +

                                                          Изменение параметров автофигуры

                                                          -

                                                          Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по автофигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства:

                                                          -

                                                          Вкладка Параметры фигуры

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          • Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: -
                                                              -
                                                            • Заливка цветом - чтобы задать сплошной цвет, который требуется применить к выбранной фигуре.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Градиентная заливка - чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Изображение или текстура - чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Узор - чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
                                                              • -
                                                            -

                                                            Чтобы получить более подробную информацию об этих опциях, обратитесь к разделу Заливка объектов и выбор цветов.

                                                            -
                                                            • -
                                                          • Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. -
                                                              -
                                                            • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Можно использовать цвет выбранной темы, стандартный цвет или выбрать пользовательский цвет.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
                                                              • -
                                                            -
                                                            • +

                                                            Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по автофигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства:

                                                            +

                                                            Вкладка Параметры фигуры

                                                            +
                                                              +
                                                            • + Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: +
                                                                +
                                                              • Заливка цветом - чтобы задать сплошной цвет, который требуется применить к выбранной фигуре.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Градиентная заливка - чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Изображение или текстура - чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Узор - чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
                                                                • +
                                                              +

                                                              Чтобы получить более подробную информацию об этих опциях, обратитесь к разделу Заливка объектов и выбор цветов.

                                                              +
                                                              • +
                                                            • + Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. +
                                                                +
                                                              • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Можно использовать цвет выбранной темы, стандартный цвет или выбрать пользовательский цвет.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
                                                                • +
                                                              • Для изменения непрозрачности, введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь ползунком.
                                                                • +
                                                              +
                                                            • Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок:
                                                                -
                                                              • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки
                                                                • -
                                                              • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке
                                                                • -
                                                              • чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо)
                                                                • -
                                                              • чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз)
                                                                • +
                                                              • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки
                                                                • +
                                                              • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке
                                                                • +
                                                              • чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо)
                                                                • +
                                                              • чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз)
                                                            • Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка.
                                                            • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью.
                                                              • -
                                                            -
                                                            -

                                                            Для изменения дополнительных параметров автофигуры щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры фигуры или щелкните левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств фигуры:

                                                            +
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Для изменения дополнительных параметров автофигуры щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры фигуры или щелкните левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств фигуры:

                                                          Свойства фигуры - вкладка Положение

                                                          -

                                                          На вкладке Положение можно изменить Ширину и/или Высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры.

                                                          +

                                                          На вкладке Положение можно изменить Ширину и/или Высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры.

                                                          Также можно задать точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру.

                                                          Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Поворот

                                                          Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры:

                                                          @@ -76,29 +89,32 @@

                                                          Изменение параметров автофигуры

                                                        • Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз).

                                                        Свойства фигуры - вкладка Линии и стрелки

                                                        -

                                                        Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры:

                                                        -
                                                          -
                                                        • Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: -
                                                            -
                                                          • Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: -
                                                              -
                                                            • Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными.
                                                              • -
                                                            -
                                                            • -
                                                          • Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: -
                                                              -
                                                            • Закругленный - угол будет закругленным.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось.
                                                              • -
                                                            • Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами.
                                                              • -
                                                            -

                                                            Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины.

                                                            -
                                                            • -
                                                          -
                                                          • -
                                                        • Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков.
                                                          • -
                                                        +

                                                        Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры:

                                                        +
                                                          +
                                                        • + Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: +
                                                            +
                                                          • + Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: +
                                                              +
                                                            • Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими.
                                                              • +
                                                            • Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными.
                                                              • +
                                                            • Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными.
                                                              • +
                                                            +
                                                            • +
                                                          • + Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: +
                                                              +
                                                            • Закругленный - угол будет закругленным.
                                                              • +
                                                            • Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось.
                                                              • +
                                                            • Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами.
                                                              • +
                                                            +

                                                            Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины.

                                                            +
                                                            • +
                                                          +
                                                          • +
                                                        • Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков.
                                                          • +

                                                        Свойства фигуры - вкладка Поля вокруг текста

                                                        Вкладка Текстовое поле содержит следующие параметры: @@ -112,22 +128,22 @@

                                                        Изменение параметров автофигуры

                                                        На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую.

                                                        Свойства фигуры - вкладка Альтернативный текст

                                                        Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура.

                                                        -
                                                        -

                                                        Чтобы заменить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и используйте выпадающий список Изменить автофигуру на вкладке Параметры фигуры правой боковой панели.

                                                        -

                                                        Чтобы удалить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре.

                                                        -

                                                        Чтобы узнать, как выровнять автофигуру на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько автофигур, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде.

                                                        +
                                                        +

                                                        Чтобы заменить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и используйте выпадающий список Изменить автофигуру на вкладке Параметры фигуры правой боковой панели.

                                                        +

                                                        Чтобы удалить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре.

                                                        +

                                                        Чтобы узнать, как выровнять автофигуру на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько автофигур, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде.

                                                        Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий

                                                        Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого:

                                                          -
                                                        1. щелкните по значку
                                                          Фигура на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                                          2. +
                                                        2. щелкните по значку
                                                          Фигура на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                                        3. выберите в меню группу Линии,

                                                          Фигуры - Линии

                                                        4. щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма),
                                                        5. - наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения
                                                          , появившихся на контуре фигуры, + наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения
                                                          , появившихся на контуре фигуры,

                                                        6. @@ -138,6 +154,6 @@

                                                          Соединение автофигур с помощью соедините

                                                          При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними.

                                                          Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения.

                                                          - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index b34eaa05b1..8a7d9af9ff 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -20,8 +20,9 @@

                                                          Вставка диаграммы

                                                          1. Установите курсор там, где требуется поместить диаграмму.
                                                          2. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов.
                                                            3. -
                                                          3. Щелкните по значку
                                                            Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов.
                                                            4. -
                                                          4. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: +
                                                          5. Щелкните по значку
                                                            Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов.
                                                            6. +
                                                          6. + Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы:
                                                            Гистограмма
                                                              @@ -86,6 +87,14 @@

                                                              Вставка диаграммы

                                                            • Точечная с прямыми отрезками
                                                            +
                                                            + Лепестковая +
                                                              +
                                                            • Лепестковая
                                                              • +
                                                            • Лепестковая с маркерами
                                                              • +
                                                            • Заполненная лепестковая
                                                              • +
                                                            +
                                                            Комбинированные
                                                              @@ -97,12 +106,13 @@

                                                              Вставка диаграммы

                                                            Примечание: Редактор презентаций ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм.

                                                            7. -
                                                          7. После этого появится окно Редактор диаграмм, в котором можно ввести в ячейки необходимые данные при помощи следующих элементов управления: +
                                                          8. + После этого появится окно Редактор диаграмм, в котором можно ввести в ячейки необходимые данные при помощи следующих элементов управления:
                                                              -
                                                            • и
                                                              для копирования и вставки скопированных данных
                                                              • -
                                                            • и
                                                              для отмены и повтора действий
                                                              • -
                                                            • для вставки функции
                                                              • -
                                                            • и
                                                              для уменьшения и увеличения числа десятичных знаков
                                                              • +
                                                            • и
                                                              для копирования и вставки скопированных данных
                                                              • +
                                                            • и
                                                              для отмены и повтора действий
                                                              • +
                                                            • для вставки функции
                                                              • +
                                                            • и
                                                              для уменьшения и увеличения числа десятичных знаков
                                                            • Формат чисел для изменения числового формата, то есть того, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в ячейках
                                                            • Тип диаграммы для выбора диаграммы другого типа.
                                                            @@ -112,14 +122,14 @@

                                                            Вставка диаграммы

                                                            Нажмите кнопку Выбрать данные, расположенную в окне Редактора диаграмм. Откроется окно Данные диаграммы.
                                                            1. - Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления диапазоном данных диаграммы, элементами легенды (ряды), подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и переключением строк / столбцов. + Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления Диапазоном данных диаграммы, Элементами легенды (ряды), Подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и Переключением строк / столбцов.

                                                              Окно Диапазон данных

                                                              • Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы.
                                                                • - Щелкните значок
                                                                  справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. + Щелкните значок
                                                                  справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек.

                                                                  Окно Диапазон данных для диаграммы

                                                                @@ -129,7 +139,7 @@

                                                                Вставка диаграммы

                                                                • В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить.
                                                                • - В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку
                                                                  справа от поля Имя ряда. + В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку
                                                                  справа от поля Имя ряда.

                                                                  Окно Изменить ряд

                                                                @@ -139,7 +149,7 @@

                                                                Вставка диаграммы

                                                                • В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать.
                                                                • - В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку
                                                                  , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. + В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку
                                                                  , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек.

                                                                  Окно Подписи оси

                                                                @@ -151,7 +161,7 @@

                                                                Вставка диаграммы

                                                          9. - Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав на кнопку Изменить тип диаграммы в окне Редактор диаграмм, чтобы выбрать тип и стиль диаграммы. Выберите диаграмму из доступных разделов: гистограмма, график, круговая, линейчатая, с областями, биржевая, точечная, комбинированные. + Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав на кнопку Изменить тип диаграммы в окне Редактор диаграмм, чтобы выбрать тип и стиль диаграммы. Выберите диаграмму из доступных разделов: гистограмма, график, круговая, линейчатая, с областями, биржевая, точечная, лепестковая, комбинированные.

                                                            Окно Тип диаграммы

                                                            Когда вы выбираете Комбинированные диаграммы, в окне Тип диаграммы расположены ряды диаграмм, для которых можно выбрать типы диаграмм и данные для размещения на вторичной оси.

                                                            Комбинированные диаграммы

                                                            @@ -184,12 +194,13 @@

                                                            Вставка диаграммы

                                                          10. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных):
                                                              -
                                                            • Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. +
                                                            • + Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы.
                                                              • Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху.
                                                              • Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу.
                                                              • Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху.
                                                                • -
                                                              • Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков и Линейчатых диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру.
                                                                • +
                                                              • Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков, Линейчатых, Лепестковых и Комбинированных диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру.
                                                            • Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение,
                                                              • @@ -241,6 +252,7 @@

                                                              Вставка диаграммы

                                                              Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. +
                                                            • Логарифмическая шкала - используется для включения логарифмического масштабирования до Базового значения, определяемой пользователем.
                                                            • Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения:
                                                                @@ -351,7 +363,7 @@

                                                                Вставка диаграммы

                                                                После того, как диаграмма будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и положение.

                                                                Вы можете задать положение диаграммы на слайде, перетащив ее по вертикали или горизонтали.

                                                                -
                                                          +

                                                        Также можно добавить диаграмму в текстовый заполнитель, нажав на значок Диаграмма внутри него и выбрав нужный тип диаграммы:

                                                        Добавление диаграммы в заполнитель

                                                        Также можно добавить диаграмму в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье.

                                                        @@ -367,7 +379,7 @@

                                                        Редактирование элементов диаграммы

                                                        C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. - При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина и тип линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. + При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина,тип и непрозрачность линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице.

                                                        Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен.

                                                        Если вам нужно изменить размер элементов диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых квадратов , расположенных по периметру элемента.

                                                        @@ -401,6 +413,7 @@

                                                        Изменение параметров диаграммы

                                                        Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом.

                                                  +

                                                  Опция Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели позволяет открыть окно Диаграмма - дополнительные параметры, в котором можно настроить следующие параметры:

                                                  Окно дополнительных параметров диаграммы

                                                  На вкладке Положение можно задать следующие свойства:

                                                  @@ -409,8 +422,8 @@

                                                  Изменение параметров диаграммы

                                                3. Позиция - задайте точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру.

                                            Окно дополнительных параметров диаграммы

                                            -

                                            Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма.

                                            +

                                            Чтобы удалить добавленную диаграмму, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре.

                                            Чтобы узнать, как выровнять диаграмму на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько объектов, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде.

                                            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index 4c5409b32f..2fd76084f2 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@

                                            Вставка изображения

                                          • при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK
                                          3. -
                                        3. после того как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер и положение.
                                          4. +
                                        4. после того как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер и положение. Вы можете сохранить изображение как рисунок на жестком диске с помощью пункта Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

                                        Вы также можете добавить изображение внутри текстовой рамки, нажав на кнопку Изображение из файла в ней и выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на компьютере, или используйте кнопку Изображение по URL и укажите URL-адрес изображения:

                                        Добавление диаграммы в текстовую рамку

                                        @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@

                                        Изменение параметров изображения

                                      • чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо)
                                      • чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз)
                                      -

                                      Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину и цвет Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом.

                                      +

                                      Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину, цвет и непрозрачность Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом.

                                      На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображеню.

                                      Вкладка Параметры фигуры

                                      diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index ca84e5ee0b..79bf79a5c5 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -23,7 +23,9 @@

                                      Вставка объектов SmartArt

                                    • наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс,
                                    • выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню.
                                  +

                                  Вы можете сохранить объект SmartArt как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

                                  Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели:

                                  +

                                  Обратите внимание, что настройки цвета, стиля и типа формы могут быть настроены индивидуально.

                                  • @@ -91,30 +93,30 @@

                                    Вставка объектов SmartArt

                                  • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
                                  • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
                                  • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
                                    • +
                                  • Для изменения непрозрачности контура введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь соответствующим ползунком.
                                  -
                                • Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом.
                                • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью.

                              Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры.

                              +

                              Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по графическому объекту SmartArt, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования текста:

                              +

                              Меню SmartArt

                              +

                              Выравнивание по вертикали - для выбрать выравнивание текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Выровнять по верхнему краю, Выровнять по середине, Выровнять по нижнему краю.

                              +

                              Направление текста - выбрать направление направления текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Горизонтальное, Повернуть текст вниз, Повернуть текст вверх.

                              +

                              Обратитесь к Дополнительным параметрам абзаца, чтобы получить информацию о дополнительных параметрах форматирования абзаца.

                              --> \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm index 7efc39823a..db1fba62b0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@

                              Вставка и форматирование текста презентации

                              Вставка текста

                              -

                              Новый текст можно добавить тремя разными способами:

                              +

                              В Редакторе презентаций новый текст можно добавить тремя разными способами:

                              • Добавить фрагмент текста внутри соответствующей текстовой рамки, предусмотренной на макете слайда. Для этого установите курсор внутри текстовой рамки и напишите свой текст или вставьте его, используя сочетание клавиш Ctrl+V, вместо соответствующего текста по умолчанию.
                              • Добавить фрагмент текста в любом месте на слайде. Можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). В зависимости от требуемого типа текстового объекта можно сделать следующее: @@ -34,7 +34,8 @@

                                Вставка текста

                                Щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к слайду.

                                Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним).

                                Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку (у нее по умолчанию невидимые границы) с текстом внутри, а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста.

                                -

                                Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален.

                                +

                                Вы можете сохранить текстовый объект как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

                                +

                                Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален.

                                Форматирование текстовых полей презентации

                                Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии.

                                Выделенное текстовое поле

                                diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index 932bb394bf..04cb4a25dc 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -63,722 +63,722 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                !! -
                                +
                                Символы ... -
                                +
                                Точки :: -
                                +
                                Операторы := -
                                +
                                Операторы /< -
                                +
                                Операторы отношения /> -
                                +
                                Операторы отношения /= -
                                +
                                Операторы отношения \above -
                                +
                                Символы Above/Below \acute -
                                +
                                Акценты \aleph -
                                +
                                Буквы иврита \alpha -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Alpha -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \amalg -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \angle -
                                +
                                Геометрические обозначения \aoint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \approx -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \asmash -
                                +
                                Стрелки \ast -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \asymp -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \atop -
                                +
                                Операторы \bar -
                                +
                                Черта сверху/снизу \Bar -
                                +
                                Акценты \because -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \begin -
                                +
                                Разделители \below -
                                +
                                Символы Above/Below \bet -
                                +
                                Буквы иврита \beta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Beta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \beth -
                                +
                                Буквы иврита \bigcap -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigcup -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigodot -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigoplus -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigotimes -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigsqcup -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \biguplus -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigvee -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \bigwedge -
                                +
                                Крупные операторы \binomial -
                                +
                                Уравнения \bot -
                                +
                                Логические обозначения \bowtie -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \box -
                                +
                                Символы \boxdot -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \boxminus -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \boxplus -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \bra -
                                +
                                Разделители \break -
                                +
                                Символы \breve -
                                +
                                Акценты \bullet -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \cap -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \cbrt -
                                +
                                Квадратные корни и радикалы \cases -
                                +
                                Символы \cdot -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \cdots -
                                +
                                Точки \check -
                                +
                                Акценты \chi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Chi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \circ -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \close -
                                +
                                Разделители \clubsuit -
                                +
                                Символы \coint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \cong -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \coprod -
                                +
                                Математические операторы \cup -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \dalet -
                                +
                                Буквы иврита \daleth -
                                +
                                Буквы иврита \dashv -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \dd -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \Dd -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \ddddot -
                                +
                                Акценты \dddot -
                                +
                                Акценты \ddot -
                                +
                                Акценты \ddots -
                                +
                                Точки \defeq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \degc -
                                +
                                Символы \degf -
                                +
                                Символы \degree -
                                +
                                Символы \delta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Delta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Deltaeq -
                                +
                                Операторы \diamond -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \diamondsuit -
                                +
                                Символы \div -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \dot -
                                +
                                Акценты \doteq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \dots -
                                +
                                Точки \doublea -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleA -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleb -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleB -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublec -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleC -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubled -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleD -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublee -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleE -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublef -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleF -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleg -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleG -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleh -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleH -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublei -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleI -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublej -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleJ -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublek -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleK -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublel -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleL -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublem -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleM -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublen -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleN -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleo -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleO -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublep -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleP -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleq -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleQ -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubler -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleR -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubles -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleS -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublet -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleT -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleu -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleU -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublev -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleV -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublew -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleW -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublex -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleX -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubley -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleY -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doublez -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \doubleZ -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \downarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Downarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \dsmash -
                                +
                                Стрелки \ee -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \ell -
                                +
                                Символы \emptyset -
                                +
                                Обозначения множествs @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \end -
                                +
                                Разделители @@ -798,297 +798,297 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \epsilon -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Epsilon -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \eqarray -
                                +
                                Символы \equiv -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \eta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Eta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \exists -
                                +
                                Логические обозначенияs \forall -
                                +
                                Логические обозначенияs \fraktura -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturA -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturb -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturB -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturc -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturC -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturd -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturD -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakture -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturE -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturf -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturF -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturg -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturG -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturh -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturH -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturi -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturI -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturk -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturK -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturl -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturL -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturm -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturM -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturn -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturN -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturo -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturO -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturp -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturP -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturq -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturQ -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturr -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturR -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturs -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturS -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturt -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturT -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturu -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturU -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturv -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturV -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturw -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturW -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturx -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturX -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \fraktury -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturY -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturz -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frakturZ -
                                +
                                Буквы готического шрифта \frown -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений @@ -1098,47 +1098,47 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \G -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \gamma -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Gamma -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \ge -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \geq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \gets -
                                +
                                Стрелки \gg -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \gimel -
                                +
                                Буквы иврита \grave -
                                +
                                Акценты @@ -1148,112 +1148,112 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \hat -
                                +
                                Акценты \hbar -
                                +
                                Символы \heartsuit -
                                +
                                Символы \hookleftarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \hookrightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \hphantom -
                                +
                                Стрелки \hsmash -
                                +
                                Стрелки \hvec -
                                +
                                Акценты \identitymatrix -
                                +
                                Матрицы \ii -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \iiint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \iint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \iiiint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \Im -
                                +
                                Символы \imath -
                                +
                                Символы \in -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \inc -
                                +
                                Символы \infty -
                                +
                                Символы \int -
                                +
                                Интегралы \integral -
                                +
                                Интегралы \iota -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Iota -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы @@ -1263,187 +1263,187 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \j -
                                +
                                Символы \jj -
                                +
                                Дважды начерченные буквы \jmath -
                                +
                                Символы \kappa -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Kappa -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \ket -
                                +
                                Разделители \lambda -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Lambda -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \langle -
                                +
                                Разделители \lbbrack -
                                +
                                Разделители \lbrace -
                                +
                                Разделители \lbrack -
                                +
                                Разделители \lceil -
                                +
                                Разделители \ldiv -
                                +
                                Дробная черта \ldivide -
                                +
                                Дробная черта \ldots -
                                +
                                Точки \le -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \left -
                                +
                                Разделители \leftarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Leftarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \leftharpoondown -
                                +
                                Стрелки \leftharpoonup -
                                +
                                Стрелки \leftrightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Leftrightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \leq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \lfloor -
                                +
                                Разделители \lhvec -
                                +
                                Акценты \limit -
                                +
                                Лимиты \ll -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \lmoust -
                                +
                                Разделители \Longleftarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Longleftrightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Longrightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \lrhar -
                                +
                                Стрелки \lvec -
                                +
                                Акценты \mapsto -
                                +
                                Стрелки \matrix -
                                +
                                Матрицы @@ -1453,42 +1453,42 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \mid -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \middle -
                                +
                                Символы \models -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \mp -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \mu -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Mu -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \nabla -
                                +
                                Символы \naryand -
                                +
                                Операторы @@ -1498,772 +1498,772 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \ne -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \nearrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \neq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \ni -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \norm -
                                +
                                Разделители \notcontain -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \notelement -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \notin -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \nu -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Nu -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \nwarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \o -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \O -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \odot -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \of -
                                +
                                Операторы \oiiint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \oiint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \oint -
                                +
                                Интегралы \omega -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Omega -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \ominus -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \open -
                                +
                                Разделители \oplus -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \otimes -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \over -
                                +
                                Разделители \overbar -
                                +
                                Акценты \overbrace -
                                +
                                Акценты \overbracket -
                                +
                                Акценты \overline -
                                +
                                Акценты \overparen -
                                +
                                Акценты \overshell -
                                +
                                Акценты \parallel -
                                +
                                Геометрические обозначения \partial -
                                +
                                Символы \pmatrix -
                                +
                                Матрицы \perp -
                                +
                                Геометрические обозначения \phantom -
                                +
                                Символы \phi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Phi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \pi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Pi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \pm -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \pppprime -
                                +
                                Штрихи \ppprime -
                                +
                                Штрихи \pprime -
                                +
                                Штрихи \prec -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \preceq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \prime -
                                +
                                Штрихи \prod -
                                +
                                Математические операторы \propto -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \psi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Psi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \qdrt -
                                +
                                Квадратные корни и радикалы \quadratic -
                                +
                                Квадратные корни и радикалы \rangle -
                                +
                                Разделители \Rangle -
                                +
                                Разделители \ratio -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \rbrace -
                                +
                                Разделители \rbrack -
                                +
                                Разделители \Rbrack -
                                +
                                Разделители \rceil -
                                +
                                Разделители \rddots -
                                +
                                Точки \Re -
                                +
                                Символы \rect -
                                +
                                Символы \rfloor -
                                +
                                Разделители \rho -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Rho -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \rhvec -
                                +
                                Акценты \right -
                                +
                                Разделители \rightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Rightarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \rightharpoondown -
                                +
                                Стрелки \rightharpoonup -
                                +
                                Стрелки \rmoust -
                                +
                                Разделители \root -
                                +
                                Символы \scripta -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptA -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptb -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptB -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptc -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptC -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptd -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptD -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripte -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptE -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptf -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptF -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptg -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptG -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripth -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptH -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripti -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptI -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptk -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptK -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptl -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptL -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptm -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptM -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptn -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptN -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripto -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptO -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptp -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptP -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptq -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptQ -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptr -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptR -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripts -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptS -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptt -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptT -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptu -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptU -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptv -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptV -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptw -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptW -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptx -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptX -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scripty -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptY -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptz -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \scriptZ -
                                +
                                Буквы рукописного шрифта \sdiv -
                                +
                                Дробная черта \sdivide -
                                +
                                Дробная черта \searrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \setminus -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \sigma -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Sigma -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \sim -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \simeq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \smash -
                                +
                                Стрелки \smile -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \spadesuit -
                                +
                                Символы \sqcap -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \sqcup -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \sqrt -
                                +
                                Квадратные корни и радикалы \sqsubseteq -
                                +
                                Обозначения множеств \sqsuperseteq -
                                +
                                Обозначения множеств \star -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \subset -
                                +
                                Обозначения множеств \subseteq -
                                +
                                Обозначения множеств \succ -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \succeq -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \sum -
                                +
                                Математические операторы \superset -
                                +
                                Обозначения множеств \superseteq -
                                +
                                Обозначения множеств \swarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \tau -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Tau -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \therefore -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \theta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Theta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы @@ -2278,172 +2278,172 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \tilde -
                                +
                                Акценты \times -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \to -
                                +
                                Стрелки \top -
                                +
                                Логические обозначения \tvec -
                                +
                                Стрелки \ubar -
                                +
                                Акценты \Ubar -
                                +
                                Акценты \underbar -
                                +
                                Акценты \underbrace -
                                +
                                Акценты \underbracket -
                                +
                                Акценты \underline -
                                +
                                Акценты \underparen -
                                +
                                Акценты \uparrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Uparrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \updownarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \Updownarrow -
                                +
                                Стрелки \uplus -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \upsilon -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Upsilon -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \varepsilon -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \varphi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \varpi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \varrho -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \varsigma -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \vartheta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \vbar -
                                +
                                Разделители \vdash -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений \vdots -
                                +
                                Точки \vec -
                                +
                                Акценты \vee -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \vert -
                                +
                                Разделители \Vert -
                                +
                                Разделители \Vmatrix -
                                +
                                Матрицы \vphantom -
                                +
                                Стрелки @@ -2453,37 +2453,37 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                \wedge -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \wp -
                                +
                                Символы \wr -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы \xi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Xi -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \zeta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы \Zeta -
                                +
                                Греческие буквы @@ -2498,42 +2498,42 @@

                                Автозамена математическими символами

                                ~= -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений -+ -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы +- -
                                +
                                Бинарные операторы << -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений <= -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений -> -
                                +
                                Стрелки >= -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений >> -
                                +
                                Операторы отношений @@ -2553,6 +2553,10 @@

                                Автоформат при вводе

                                Автоформат при вводе

                                Автозамена текста

                                Вы можете настроить редактор на автоматическое использование заглавной буквы в каждом предложении. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить эту функцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена текста и снимите флажок с Делать первые буквы предложений прописными.

                                +

                                По умолчанию редактор делает заглавными первые буквы ячеек таблицы. Чтобы отключить данную опцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл > Дополнительные настройки -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены - > Автозамена текста и снимите флажок Делать первые буквы ячеек таблиц прописными..

                                +

                                Вы также можете настроить использование заглавных букв после определенных слов. Для этого введите нужные слова в поле Не использовать заглавные буквы после и нажав кнопку Добавить или выбрав нужные слова в соответствующем списке, находящимся ниже.

                                +

                                Вы можете изменять список исключений в зависимости от используемого языка в выпадающем списке Исключение для языка..

                                +

                                Используйте кнопку Сбросить настройки, чтобы отменить все пользовательские изменения..

                                Автозамена текста

                                diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index ea41e495bb..681f9bd236 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@

                                Сохранение

                                По умолчанию онлайн-редактор презентаций автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры.

                                Чтобы сохранить презентацию вручную в текущем формате и местоположении,

                                  -
                                • нажмите значок Сохранить
                                  в левой части шапки редактора, или
                                  • +
                                • нажмите значок Сохранить
                                  в левой части шапки редактора, или
                                • используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или
                                • нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить.
                                @@ -52,15 +52,33 @@

                                Сохранение копии

                                Печать

                                Чтобы распечатать текущую презентацию,

                                  -
                                • нажмите значок Напечатать файл
                                  в левой части шапки редактора, или
                                  • +
                                • нажмите значок Напечатать файл
                                  в левой части шапки редактора, или
                                • используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или
                                • нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать.
                                В браузере Firefox возможна печатать презентации без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf.
                                +

                                Print Settings window

                                +

                                В открывшемся окне Печать настройте следующие параметры:

                                +
                                  +
                                • Получатель — выберите получателя файла для печати, например, Сохранить в PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print в PDF, Fax и т.д.
                                  • +
                                • Ориентация - выберите опцию Книжная, если вы хотите печатать на странице вертикально, или выберите Альбомная для горизонтальной печати.
                                  • +
                                • Страницы - выберите один из вариантов печати страниц: Все, Текущая, Нечетные, < b>Четные или Диапазон. В последнем случае вам придется ввести количество страниц вручную.
                                  • +
                                • + Цветной режим - выберите, хотите ли вы, чтобы ваш файл был напечатан в Цветном или в Черно-белом формате. Обратите внимание, что этот параметр доступен, если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Microsoft XPS Document Writer. Если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Fax, то по умолчанию задан цветовой режим Черно-белый. +

                                  Нажмите на заголовок Все настройки, чтобы открыть дополнительные настройки.

                                  +
                                  • +
                                • Размер бумаги — выберите один из доступных размеров из раскрывающегося списка или задайте пользовательский.
                                  • +
                                • Масштаб - выберите масштабирование файла при печати; вы можете выбрать опцию По ширине страницы или установить масштаб вручную с помощью переключателя Масштаб и соответствующего поля ввода рядом.
                                  • +
                                • Страниц на одном листе — выберите количество страниц, печатаемых на одном листе, например, две, шесть, девять и т.д.
                                  • +
                                • Поля — выберите поля страницы. Вы можете установить поля По умолчанию или пользовательские, измеряемые в милиметрах. Для пользовательских полей установите необходимые значения для верхнего, нижнего, левого и правого поля вручную. Вы также можете выбрать опцию Нет, чтобы не печатать поля.
                                  • +
                                • Настройки. Установите флажок у Печатать колонтитулы, чтобы они печатались, или снимите этот флажок, чтобы верхние и нижние колонтитулы не печатались.
                                  • +
                                • Печать, используя системный диалог – нажмите на этот заголовок, чтобы открыть системный диалог для настройки процесса печати.
                                  • +
                                +

                                В десктопной версии презентация будет напрямую отправлена на печать. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже.

                                Также можно распечатать выделенные слайды с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенным слайдам и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное).

                                -

                                В десктопной версии презентация будет напрямую отправлена на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данной презентации будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати.

                                +

                                В онлайн-версии на основе презентации будет создан PDF-файл. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его или сохранить на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать его позже. Некоторые браузеры (например, Chrome и Opera) поддерживают прямую печать.

                                \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css index 05d886262c..1924ad8d32 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/animationtab.png index 7bde9742bb..6d7a562c3f 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 97194a2245..7bcdf578e3 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png index 6aca787f9a..fb5f635395 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 9d7cd2c8b4..cb01ece44d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e7ef03b6f2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index f482065393..25be11958d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index b55ea12c9f..9c4f54ece1 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index bb5996f2ac..4f6ce1b604 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 35bd9fbd2d..33bfd7859a 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 8c8a8ee762..32f7136d4a 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png index 838c0a720a..b127d1faa8 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 724373fd88..567685155b 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0aaafab7f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 26ac733456..4dc5700b98 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png index 9ceb9a338b..7421f87d55 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png index 348d00f80b..e184a5c2c0 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png index a13094883e..cab9c23bad 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png index b1e8f7882f..da9110e7c0 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/transitionstab.png index 95a7e4430e..94036774e5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png index 65ba82c4dd..aa5835c8c7 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palettes.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palettes.png index fe6afa24f2..03b8df2a2e 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palettes.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palettes.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png index 02583d0e55..a7a60414f4 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png index d2bd286188..d9547bb56c 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png index 23a451d741..27cd2e6888 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/shapesettingstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/shapesettingstab.png index 3526ae64b8..fb407872bb 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/shapesettingstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/shapesettingstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png index b2be56a618..787ec57d89 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js index deb84bb953..59810c3273 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js @@ -23,12 +23,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Сочетания клавиш", - "body": "Подсказки для клавиш Используйте сочетания клавиш для более быстрого и удобного доступа к функциям Редактора презентаций без использования мыши. Нажмите клавишу Alt, чтобы показать все подсказки для клавиш верхней панели инструментов, правой и левой боковой панели, а также строке состояния. Нажмите клавишу, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. В зависимости от нажатой клавиши, могут появляться дополнительные подсказки. Когда появляются дополнительные подсказки для клавиш, первичные - скрываются. Например, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка, нажмите Alt и просмотрите все подсказки по первичным клавишам. Нажмите букву И, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка и просмотреть все доступные сочетания клавиш для этой вкладки. Затем нажмите букву, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. Нажмите Alt, чтобы скрыть все подсказки для клавиш, или Escape, чтобы вернуться к предыдущей группе подсказок для клавиш. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Работа с презентацией Открыть панель 'Файл' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Открыть панель Файл, чтобы сохранить, скачать, распечатать текущую презентацию, просмотреть сведения о ней, создать новую презентацию или открыть существующую, получить доступ к Справке по онлайн-редактору презентаций или дополнительным параметрам. Открыть окно 'Поиск' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск, чтобы начать поиск символа/слова/фразы в редактируемой презентации. Открыть панель 'Комментарии' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Открыть панель Комментарии, чтобы добавить свой комментарий или ответить на комментарии других пользователей. Открыть поле комментария Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Открыть поле ввода данных, в котором можно добавить текст комментария. Открыть панель 'Чат' Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Открыть панель Чат и отправить сообщение. Сохранить презентацию Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Сохранить все изменения в редактируемой презентации. Активный файл будет сохранен с текущим именем, в том же местоположении и формате. Печать презентации Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Распечатать презентацию на одном из доступных принтеров или сохранить в файл. Скачать как... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Открыть панель Скачать как..., чтобы сохранить редактируемую презентацию на жестком диске компьютера в одном из поддерживаемых форматов: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP. Полноэкранный режим F11 Переключиться в полноэкранный режим, чтобы развернуть онлайн-редактор презентаций на весь экран. Вызов справки F1 F1 Открыть меню Справка онлайн-редактора презентаций. Открыть существующий файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+O На вкладке Открыть локальный файл в десктопных редакторах позволяет открыть стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора существующего файла. Закрыть файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Закрыть выбранную презентацию в десктопных редакторах. Контекстное меню элемента ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Открыть контекстное меню выбранного элемента. Сбросить масштаб Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 или ⌘ Cmd+0 Сбросить масштаб текущей презентации до значения по умолчанию 'По размеру слайда'. Навигация Первый слайд Home Home, Fn+← Перейти к первому слайду редактируемой презентации. Последний слайд End End, Fn+→ Перейти к последнему слайду редактируемой презентации. Следующий слайд Page Down Page Down, Fn+↓ Перейти к следующему слайду редактируемой презентации. Предыдущий слайд Page Up Page Up, Fn+↑ Перейти к предыдущему слайду редактируемой презентации. Увеличить масштаб Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Увеличить масштаб редактируемой презентации. Уменьшить масштаб Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Уменьшить масштаб редактируемой презентации. Перейти между элементами управления Tab, Shift+Tab Tab, Shift+Tab Перейти на следующий или предыдущий элемент управления в модальных окнах. Выполнение действий со слайдами Новый слайд Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Создать новый слайд и добавить его после выделенного в списке слайдов. Дублировать слайд Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D Дублировать выделенный в списке слайд. Переместить слайд вверх Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Поместить выделенный слайд над предыдущим в списке. Переместить слайд вниз Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Поместить выделенный слайд под последующим в списке. Переместить слайд в начало Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑ Переместить выделенный слайд в самое начало списка. Переместить слайд в конец Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓ Переместить выделенный слайд в самый конец списка. Выполнение действий с объектами Создать копию Ctrl + перетаскивание, Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl + перетаскивание, ⌘ Cmd + перетаскивание, ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании выбранного объекта или нажмите Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D для Mac), чтобы создать копию объекта. Сгруппировать Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G Сгруппировать выделенные объекты. Разгруппировать Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G Разгруппировать выбранную группу объектов. Выделить следующий объект ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Выделить следующий объект после выбранного в данный момент. Выделить предыдущий объект ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Выделить предыдущий объект перед выбранным в данный момент. Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку: горизонтальную, вертикальную или под углом 45 градусов. Модификация объектов Ограничить движение ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание Ограничить перемещение выбранного объекта по горизонтали или вертикали. Задать угол поворота в 15 градусов ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) Ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов. Сохранять пропорции ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) Сохранять пропорции выбранного объекта при изменении размера. Попиксельное перемещение Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl (⌘ Cmd для Mac) и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре, чтобы перемещать выбранный объект на один пиксель за раз. Работа с таблицами Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к следующей строке ↓ ↓ Перейти к следующей строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей строке ↑ ↑ Перейти к предыдущей строке таблицы. Начать новый абзац ↵ Enter ↵ Return Начать новый абзац внутри ячейки. Добавить новую строку ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. Добавить новую строку внизу таблицы. Просмотр презентации Начать просмотр с начала Ctrl+F5 ^ Ctrl+F5 Запустить презентацию с начала. Перейти вперед ↵ Enter, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar Показать следующий эффект перехода или перейти к следующему слайду. Перейти назад Page Up, ←, ↑ Page Up, ←, ↑ Показать предыдущий эффект перехода или вернуться к предыдущему слайду. Закрыть просмотр Esc Esc Закончить просмотр слайдов. Отмена и повтор Отменить Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Отменить последнее выполненное действие. Повторить Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Повторить последнее отмененное действие. Вырезание, копирование и вставка Вырезать Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Вырезать выделенный объект и отправить его в буфер обмена компьютера. Вырезанный объект можно затем вставить в другое место этой же презентации. Копировать Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Отправить выделенный объект и в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированный объект можно затем вставить в другое место этой же презентации. Вставить Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированный объект из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Объект может быть ранее скопирован из этой же презентации. Вставить гиперссылку Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Вставить гиперссылку, которую можно использовать для перехода по веб-адресу или для перехода на определенный слайд этой презентации. Копировать форматирование Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Скопировать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента редактируемого текста. Скопированное форматирование можно затем применить к другому тексту в этой же презентации. Применить форматирование Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Применить ранее скопированное форматирование к тексту редактируемого текстового поля. Выделение с помощью мыши Добавить в выделенный фрагмент ⇧ Shift ⇧ Shift Начните выделение, удерживайте клавишу ⇧ Shift и щелкните там, где требуется закончить выделение. Выделение с помощью клавиатуры Выделить все Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Выделить все слайды (в списке слайдов), или все объекты на слайде (в области редактирования слайда), или весь текст (внутри текстового поля) - в зависимости от того, где установлен курсор мыши. Выделить фрагмент текста ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Выделить текст посимвольно. Выделить текст с позиции курсора до начала строки ⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала текущей строки. Выделить текст с позиции курсора до конца строки ⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца текущей строки. Выделить один символ справа ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Выделить один символ справа от позиции курсора. Выделить один символ слева ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Выделить один символ слева от позиции курсора. Выделить до конца слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца слова. Выделить до начала слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала слова. Выделить одну строку выше ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Выделить одну строку выше (курсор находится в начале строки). Выделить одну строку ниже ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Выделить одну строку ниже (курсор находится в начале строки). Оформление текста Полужирный шрифт Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста полужирным, придав ему большую насыщенность. Курсив Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста курсивным, придав ему наклон вправо. Подчеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Подчеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Зачеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Подстрочные знаки Ctrl+⇧ Shift+> ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Надстрочные знаки Ctrl+⇧ Shift+< ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Маркированный список Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Создать из выделенного фрагмента текста неупорядоченный маркированный список или начать новый список. Убрать форматирование Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Убрать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента текста. Увеличить шрифт Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Увеличить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Уменьшить шрифт Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Уменьшить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Выровнять по центру Ctrl+E Выровнять текст по центру между правым и левым краем текстового поля. Выровнять по ширине Ctrl+J Выровнять текст как по левому, так и по правому краю текстового поля (выравнивание осуществляется за счет добавления дополнительных интервалов там, где это необходимо). Выровнять по правому краю Ctrl+R Выровнять текст по правому краю текстового поля (левый край остается невыровненным). Выровнять по левому краю Ctrl+L Выровнять текст по левому краю текстового поля (правый край остается невыровненным). Увеличить отступ слева Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Увеличить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Уменьшить отступ слева Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Уменьшить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Удалить один символ слева ← Backspace ← Backspace Удалить один символ слева от курсора. Удалить один символ справа Delete Fn+Delete Удалить один символ справа от курсора. Перемещение по тексту Перейти на один символ влево ← ← Переместить курсор на один символ влево. Перейти на один символ вправо → → Переместить курсор на один символ вправо. Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑ ↑ Переместить курсор на одну строку вверх. Перейти на одну строку вниз ↓ ↓ Переместить курсор на одну строку вниз. Перейти в начало слова или на одно слово влево Ctrl+← ⌘ Cmd+← Переместить курсор в начало слова или на одно слово влево. Перейти на одно слово вправо Ctrl+→ ⌘ Cmd+→ Переместить курсор на одно слово вправо. Перейти к следующему текстовому заполнителю Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Перейти к следующему текстовому заполнителю с заголовком или основным текстом слайда. Если это последний текстовый заполнитель на слайде, будет вставлен новый слайд с таким же макетом, как у исходного. Перейти в начало строки Home Home Установить курсор в начале редактируемой строки. Перейти в конец строки End End Установить курсор в конце редактируемой строки. Перейти в начало текстового поля Ctrl+Home Установить курсор в начале редактируемого текстового поля. Перейти в конец текстового поля Ctrl+End Установить курсор в конце редактируемого текстового поля." + "body": "Подсказки для клавиш Используйте сочетания клавиш для более быстрого и удобного доступа к функциям Редактора презентаций без использования мыши. Нажмите клавишу Alt, чтобы показать все подсказки для клавиш верхней панели инструментов, правой и левой боковой панели, а также строке состояния. Нажмите клавишу, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. В зависимости от нажатой клавиши, могут появляться дополнительные подсказки. Когда появляются дополнительные подсказки для клавиш, первичные - скрываются. Например, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка, нажмите Alt и просмотрите все подсказки по первичным клавишам. Нажмите букву И, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка и просмотреть все доступные сочетания клавиш для этой вкладки. Затем нажмите букву, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. Нажмите Alt, чтобы скрыть все подсказки для клавиш, или Escape, чтобы вернуться к предыдущей группе подсказок для клавиш. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Работа с презентацией Открыть панель 'Файл' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Открыть панель Файл, чтобы сохранить, скачать, распечатать текущую презентацию, просмотреть сведения о ней, создать новую презентацию или открыть существующую, получить доступ к Справке по онлайн-редактору презентаций или дополнительным параметрам. Открыть окно 'Поиск' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск, чтобы начать поиск символа/слова/фразы в редактируемой презентации. Открыть панель 'Комментарии' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Открыть панель Комментарии, чтобы добавить свой комментарий или ответить на комментарии других пользователей. Открыть поле комментария Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Открыть поле ввода данных, в котором можно добавить текст комментария. Открыть панель 'Чат' (Онлайн-редакторы) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Открыть панель Чат в онлайн-редакторах и отправить сообщение. Сохранить презентацию Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Сохранить все изменения в редактируемой презентации. Активный файл будет сохранен с текущим именем, в том же местоположении и формате. Печать презентации Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Распечатать презентацию на одном из доступных принтеров или сохранить в файл. Скачать как... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Открыть панель Скачать как..., чтобы сохранить редактируемую презентацию на жестком диске компьютера в одном из поддерживаемых форматов: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP. Полноэкранный режим (Онлайн-редакторы) F11 Переключиться в полноэкранный режим в онлайн-редакторах, чтобы развернуть редактор презентаций на весь экран. Вызов справки F1 F1 Открыть меню Справка онлайн-редактора презентаций. Открыть существующий файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+O На вкладке Открыть локальный файл в десктопных редакторах позволяет открыть стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора существующего файла. Закрыть файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Закрыть выбранную презентацию в десктопных редакторах. Контекстное меню элемента ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Открыть контекстное меню выбранного элемента. Сбросить масштаб Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 или ⌘ Cmd+0 Сбросить масштаб текущей презентации до значения по умолчанию 'По размеру слайда'. Навигация Первый слайд Home Home, Fn+← Перейти к первому слайду редактируемой презентации. Последний слайд End End, Fn+→ Перейти к последнему слайду редактируемой презентации. Следующий слайд Page Down Page Down, Fn+↓ Перейти к следующему слайду редактируемой презентации. Предыдущий слайд Page Up Page Up, Fn+↑ Перейти к предыдущему слайду редактируемой презентации. Увеличить масштаб Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Увеличить масштаб редактируемой презентации. Уменьшить масштаб Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Уменьшить масштаб редактируемой презентации. Перейти между элементами управления ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти на следующий или предыдущий элемент управления в модальных окнах. Выполнение действий со слайдами Новый слайд Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Создать новый слайд и добавить его после выделенного в списке слайдов. Дублировать слайд Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D Дублировать выделенный в списке слайд. Переместить слайд вверх Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Поместить выделенный слайд над предыдущим в списке. Переместить слайд вниз Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Поместить выделенный слайд под последующим в списке. Переместить слайд в начало Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑ Переместить выделенный слайд в самое начало списка. Переместить слайд в конец Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓ Переместить выделенный слайд в самый конец списка. Выполнение действий с объектами Создать копию Ctrl + перетаскивание, Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl + перетаскивание, ⌘ Cmd + перетаскивание, ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании выбранного объекта или нажмите Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D для Mac), чтобы создать копию объекта. Сгруппировать Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G Сгруппировать выделенные объекты. Разгруппировать Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G Разгруппировать выбранную группу объектов. Выделить следующий объект ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Выделить следующий объект после выбранного в данный момент. Выделить предыдущий объект ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Выделить предыдущий объект перед выбранным в данный момент. Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку: горизонтальную, вертикальную или под углом 45 градусов. Модификация объектов Ограничить движение ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание Ограничить перемещение выбранного объекта по горизонтали или вертикали. Задать угол поворота в 15 градусов ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) Ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов. Сохранять пропорции ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) Сохранять пропорции выбранного объекта при изменении размера. Попиксельное перемещение Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl (⌘ Cmd для Mac) и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре, чтобы перемещать выбранный объект на один пиксель за раз. Работа с таблицами Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Перейти к следующей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти к предыдущей ячейке в строке таблицы. Перейти к следующей строке ↓ ↓ Перейти к следующей строке таблицы. Перейти к предыдущей строке ↑ ↑ Перейти к предыдущей строке таблицы. Начать новый абзац ↵ Enter ↵ Return Начать новый абзац внутри ячейки. Добавить новую строку ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. ↹ Tab в правой нижней ячейке таблицы. Добавить новую строку внизу таблицы. Просмотр презентации Начать просмотр с начала Ctrl+F5 ^ Ctrl+F5 Запустить презентацию с начала. Перейти вперед ↵ Enter, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar Показать следующий эффект перехода или перейти к следующему слайду. Перейти назад Page Up, ←, ↑ Page Up, ←, ↑ Показать предыдущий эффект перехода или вернуться к предыдущему слайду. Закрыть просмотр Esc Esc Закончить просмотр слайдов. Отмена и повтор Отменить Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Отменить последнее выполненное действие. Повторить Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Повторить последнее отмененное действие. Вырезание, копирование и вставка Вырезать Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Вырезать выделенный объект и отправить его в буфер обмена компьютера. Вырезанный объект можно затем вставить в другое место этой же презентации. Копировать Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Отправить выделенный объект и в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированный объект можно затем вставить в другое место этой же презентации. Вставить Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированный объект из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Объект может быть ранее скопирован из этой же презентации. Вставить текст без форматирования стиля Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Вставить ранее скопированный фрагмент текста из буфера обмена компьютера в текущую позицию курсора без сохранения исходного форматирования. Текст можно предварительно скопировать из того же документа, из другого документа или из какой-то другой программы Вставить гиперссылку Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Вставить гиперссылку, которую можно использовать для перехода по веб-адресу или для перехода на определенный слайд этой презентации. Копировать форматирование Alt+Ctrl+C ^ Ctrl+Alt+C, ⌘ Cmd+Alt+C Скопировать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента редактируемого текста. Скопированное форматирование можно затем применить к другому тексту в этой же презентации. Применить форматирование Alt+Ctrl+V ^ Ctrl+Alt+V, ⌘ Cmd+Alt+V Применить ранее скопированное форматирование к тексту редактируемого текстового поля. Выделение с помощью мыши Добавить в выделенный фрагмент ⇧ Shift ⇧ Shift Начните выделение, удерживайте клавишу ⇧ Shift и щелкните там, где требуется закончить выделение. Выделение с помощью клавиатуры Выделить все Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Выделить все слайды (в списке слайдов), или все объекты на слайде (в области редактирования слайда), или весь текст (внутри текстового поля) - в зависимости от того, где установлен курсор мыши. Выделить фрагмент текста ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Выделить текст посимвольно. Выделить текст с позиции курсора до начала строки ⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала текущей строки. Выделить текст с позиции курсора до конца строки ⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца текущей строки. Выделить один символ справа ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Выделить один символ справа от позиции курсора. Выделить один символ слева ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Выделить один символ слева от позиции курсора. Выделить до конца слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до конца слова. Выделить до начала слова Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Выделить фрагмент текста с позиции курсора до начала слова. Выделить одну строку выше ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Выделить одну строку выше (курсор находится в начале строки). Выделить одну строку ниже ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Выделить одну строку ниже (курсор находится в начале строки). Оформление текста Полужирный шрифт Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста полужирным, придав ему большую насыщенность. Курсив Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста курсивным, придав ему наклон вправо. Подчеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Подчеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Зачеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Подстрочные знаки Ctrl+⇧ Shift+> ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Надстрочные знаки Ctrl+⇧ Shift+< ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Сделать выделенный фрагмент текста мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Маркированный список Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Создать из выделенного фрагмента текста неупорядоченный маркированный список или начать новый список. Убрать форматирование Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Убрать форматирование из выделенного фрагмента текста. Увеличить шрифт Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Увеличить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Уменьшить шрифт Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Уменьшить на 1 пункт размер шрифта для выделенного фрагмента текста. Выровнять по центру Ctrl+E Выровнять текст по центру между правым и левым краем текстового поля. Выровнять по ширине Ctrl+J Выровнять текст как по левому, так и по правому краю текстового поля (выравнивание осуществляется за счет добавления дополнительных интервалов там, где это необходимо). Выровнять по правому краю Ctrl+R Выровнять текст по правому краю текстового поля (левый край остается невыровненным). Выровнять по левому краю Ctrl+L Выровнять текст по левому краю текстового поля (правый край остается невыровненным). Увеличить отступ слева Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Увеличить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Уменьшить отступ слева Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Уменьшить отступ абзаца слева на одну позицию табуляции. Удалить один символ слева ← Backspace ← Backspace Удалить один символ слева от курсора. Удалить один символ справа Delete Fn+Delete Удалить один символ справа от курсора. Перемещение по тексту Перейти на один символ влево ← ← Переместить курсор на один символ влево. Перейти на один символ вправо → → Переместить курсор на один символ вправо. Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑ ↑ Переместить курсор на одну строку вверх. Перейти на одну строку вниз ↓ ↓ Переместить курсор на одну строку вниз. Перейти в начало слова или на одно слово влево Ctrl+← ⌘ Cmd+← Переместить курсор в начало слова или на одно слово влево. Перейти на одно слово вправо Ctrl+→ ⌘ Cmd+→ Переместить курсор на одно слово вправо. Перейти к следующему текстовому заполнителю Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Перейти к следующему текстовому заполнителю с заголовком или основным текстом слайда. Если это последний текстовый заполнитель на слайде, будет вставлен новый слайд с таким же макетом, как у исходного. Перейти в начало строки Home Home Установить курсор в начале редактируемой строки. Перейти в конец строки End End Установить курсор в конце редактируемой строки. Перейти в начало текстового поля Ctrl+Home Установить курсор в начале редактируемого текстового поля. Перейти в конец текстового поля Ctrl+End Установить курсор в конце редактируемого текстового поля." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Параметры представления и инструменты навигации", - "body": "В редакторе презентаций доступен ряд инструментов, позволяющих облегчить просмотр и навигацию по презентации: масштаб, кнопки перехода на предыдущий/следующий слайд, указатель номера слайда. Настройте параметры представления Чтобы настроить стандартные параметры представления и установить наиболее удобный режим работы с презентацией, перейдите на вкладку Вид. Можно выбрать следующие опции: Масштаб – чтобы выбрать из выпадающего списка нужное значение масштаба от 50% до 500%. По размеру слайда - чтобы весь слайд целиком помещался в видимой части рабочей области. По ширине - чтобы ширина слайда соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Тема интерфейса – выберите из выпадающего меню одну из доступных тем интерфейса: Системная, Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная, Контрастная темная. Заметки - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта секция заметки, которая находится под слайдом. Данную секцию также можно скрыть/показать, перетащив её курсором мыши. Линейки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты линейки, которые используются для становки позиций табуляции и отступов абзацев внутри текстовых полей. Чтобы отобразить скрытые линейки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Направляющие – выберите нужный тип направляющих для правильного позиционирования объектов на слайде. Доступны следующие варианты: вертикальные, горизонтальные и смарт-направляющие для лучшего позиционирования. Линии сетки – выберите нужный размер сетки из доступных шаблонов или задайте пользовательский размер, и укажите, надо ли привязать объекты к сетке, для лучшего позиционирования объектов. Всегда показывать панель инструментов – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта верхняя панель инструментов, которая содержит команды. Названия вкладок при этом остаются видимыми. Можно также дважды щелкнуть по любой вкладке, чтобы скрыть верхнюю панель инструментов или отобразить ее снова. Строка состояния - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта самая нижняя панель, на которой находится Указатель номера слайда и кнопки Масштаба. Чтобы отобразить скрытую строку состояния, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Левая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта левая панель, на которой расположены кнопки Поиск, Комментарии и т. д. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Левую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта правая панель, на которой расположены Параметры. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Правую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая боковая панель свернута по умолчанию. Чтобы ее развернуть, выделите любой объект или слайд и щелкните по значку вкладки, которая в данный момент активирована (чтобы свернуть правую боковую панель, щелкните по этому значку еще раз). Левую боковую панель можно настроить путем простого перетаскивания: наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели влево, чтобы уменьшить ширину панели, или вправо, чтобы ее увеличить. Используйте инструменты навигации Для осуществления навигации по презентации используйте следующие инструменты: Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения масштаба текущей презентации. Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%/ 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . Щелкните по значку По ширине , чтобы ширина слайда соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Чтобы весь слайд целиком помещался в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру слайда . Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладкe Вид. Можно задать значение масштаба по умолчанию. Откройте вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, перейдите в раздел Дополнительные параметры..., выберите из списка нужное Стандартное значение масштаба и нажмите кнопку Применить. Для перехода на предыдущий или следующий слайд в ходе редактирования презентации можно использовать кнопки и , расположенные сверху и снизу вертикальной полосы прокрутки, которая находится справа от слайда. Указатель номера слайда показывает текущий слайд в составе всех слайдов текущей презентации (слайд 'n' из 'nn'). Щелкните по этой надписи, чтобы открыть окно, в котором можно ввести номер нужного слайда и быстро перейти к нему. Если Вы решите скрыть строку состояния, этот инструмент станет недоступен." + "body": "В редакторе презентаций доступен ряд инструментов, позволяющих облегчить просмотр и навигацию по презентации: масштаб, кнопки перехода на предыдущий/следующий слайд, указатель номера слайда. Настройте параметры представления Чтобы настроить стандартные параметры представления и установить наиболее удобный режим работы с презентацией, перейдите на вкладку Вид. Можно выбрать следующие опции: Масштаб – чтобы выбрать из выпадающего списка нужное значение масштаба от 50% до 500%. По размеру слайда - чтобы весь слайд целиком помещался в видимой части рабочей области. По ширине - чтобы ширина слайда соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Тема интерфейса – выберите из выпадающего меню одну из доступных тем интерфейса: Системная, Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная, Контрастная темная. Заметки - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта секция заметки, которая находится под слайдом. Данную секцию также можно скрыть/показать, перетащив её курсором мыши. Линейки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты линейки, которые используются для становки позиций табуляции и отступов абзацев внутри текстовых полей. Чтобы отобразить скрытые линейки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Направляющие – выберите нужный тип направляющих для правильного позиционирования объектов на слайде. Доступны следующие варианты: вертикальные, горизонтальные и смарт-направляющие для лучшего позиционирования. Линии сетки – выберите нужный размер сетки из доступных шаблонов или задайте пользовательский размер, и укажите, надо ли привязать объекты к сетке, для лучшего позиционирования объектов. Всегда показывать панель инструментов – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта верхняя панель инструментов, которая содержит команды. Названия вкладок при этом остаются видимыми. Можно также дважды щелкнуть по любой вкладке, чтобы скрыть верхнюю панель инструментов или отобразить ее снова. Строка состояния - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта самая нижняя панель, на которой находится Указатель номера слайда и кнопки Масштаба. Чтобы отобразить скрытую строку состояния, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Левая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта левая панель, на которой расположены кнопки Поиск, Комментарии и т. д. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Левую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта правая панель, на которой расположены Параметры. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Правую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая боковая панель свернута по умолчанию. Чтобы ее развернуть, выделите любой объект или слайд и щелкните по значку вкладки, которая в данный момент активирована (чтобы свернуть правую боковую панель, щелкните по этому значку еще раз). Левую боковую панель можно настроить путем простого перетаскивания: наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели влево, чтобы уменьшить ширину панели, или вправо, чтобы ее увеличить. Используйте инструменты навигации Для осуществления навигации по презентации используйте следующие инструменты: Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения масштаба текущей презентации. Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить . Щелкните по значку По ширине , чтобы ширина слайда соответствовала видимой части рабочей области. Чтобы весь слайд целиком помещался в видимой части рабочей области, нажмите значок По размеру слайда . Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладкe Вид. Можно задать значение масштаба по умолчанию. Откройте вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, перейдите в раздел Дополнительные параметры..., выберите из списка нужное Стандартное значение масштаба и нажмите кнопку Применить. Для перехода на предыдущий или следующий слайд в ходе редактирования презентации можно использовать кнопки и , расположенные сверху и снизу вертикальной полосы прокрутки, которая находится справа от слайда. Указатель номера слайда показывает текущий слайд в составе всех слайдов текущей презентации (слайд 'n' из 'nn'). Щелкните по этой надписи, чтобы открыть окно, в котором можно ввести номер нужного слайда и быстро перейти к нему. Если Вы решите скрыть строку состояния, этот инструмент станет недоступен." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Функция поиска и замены", - "body": "Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, которые используются в редактируемой презентации, нажмите на значок , расположенный на левой боковой панели, или значок , расположенный в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска. В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H. Откроется панель Поиск и замена: Введите запрос в соответствующее поле ввода данных Поиск. Если требуется заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов, введите текст для замены в соответствующее поле ввода данных Заменить на. Вы можете заменить одно выделенное в данный момент вхождение или заменить все вхождения, нажав соответствующие кнопки Заменить или Заменить все. Для навигации по найденным вхождениям нажмите одну из кнопок со стрелками. Кнопка показывает следующее вхождение, а кнопка показывает предыдущее. Задайте параметры поиска, отметив нужные опции, расположенные под полями ввода: С учетом регистра - используется для поиска только тех вхождений, которые набраны в таком же регистре, что и ваш запрос, (например, если Вы ввели запрос 'Редактор', такие слова, как 'редактор' или 'РЕДАКТОР' и т.д. не будут найдены). Только слово целиком - используется для подсветки только слов целиком. Первый слайд в в выбранном направлении, содержащий заданные символы, будет выделен в списке слайдов и отображен в рабочей области. Нужные символы будут подсвечены. Если это не тот слайд, который вы ищете, нажмите на выбранную кнопку еще раз, чтобы найти следующий слайд, содержащий заданные символы." + "body": "Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, которые используются в редактируемой презентации, нажмите на значок , расположенный на левой боковой панели, или значок , расположенный в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска. В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Панель включает в себя текстовое поле для ввода поискового запроса, количество результатов поиска и элементы управления для перехода к предыдущему, следующему результату и закрытия панели. Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок . Откроется панель Поиск и замена: Введите запрос в соответствующее поле ввода данных Поиск. Если требуется заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов, введите текст для замены в соответствующее поле ввода данных Заменить на. Вы можете заменить одно выделенное в данный момент вхождение или заменить все вхождения, нажав соответствующие кнопки Заменить или Заменить все. Для навигации по найденным вхождениям нажмите одну из кнопок со стрелками. Кнопка показывает следующее вхождение, а кнопка показывает предыдущее. Задайте параметры поиска, отметив нужные опции, расположенные под полями ввода: С учетом регистра - используется для поиска только тех вхождений, которые набраны в таком же регистре, что и ваш запрос, (например, если Вы ввели запрос 'Редактор', такие слова, как 'редактор' или 'РЕДАКТОР' и т.д. не будут найдены). Только слово целиком - используется для подсветки только слов целиком. Первый слайд в в выбранном направлении, содержащий заданные символы, будет выделен в списке слайдов и отображен в рабочей области. Нужные символы будут подсвечены. Если это не тот слайд, который вы ищете, нажмите на выбранную кнопку еще раз, чтобы найти следующий слайд, содержащий заданные символы." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Поддерживаемые форматы электронных презентаций", - "body": "Презентация - это серия слайдов, которые могут содержать различные типы контента, такие как изображения, файлы мультимедиа, текст, эффекты и т.д. Редактор презентаций работает со следующими форматами презентаций. При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (PPTX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование. Форматы Описание Просмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXML Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML ODP OpenDocument Presentation Формат файлов, который представляет презентации, созданные приложением Impress, входящим в состав пакетов офисных приложений на базе OpenOffice + + OTP OpenDocument Presentation Template Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов презентаций. Шаблон OTP содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества презентаций со схожим форматированием + + POTX PowerPoint Open XML Document Template разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов презентаций. Шаблон POTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества презентаций со схожим форматированием + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show Формат файлов презентаций, используемый для воспроизведения слайд-шоу + + PPT Формат файлов, используемый программой Microsoft PowerPoint + + PPTX Office Open XML Presentation разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для представления электронных таблиц, диаграмм, презентаций и текстовых документов + + Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать презентацию из меню Файл -> Скачать как. Исходный формат Можно скачать как ODP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX OTP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX POTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPSX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX PPTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSX, PPTX Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации презентаций в самые известные форматы файлов." + "body": "Презентация - это серия слайдов, которые могут содержать различные типы контента, такие как изображения, файлы мультимедиа, текст, эффекты и т.д. Редактор презентаций работает со следующими форматами презентаций. При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (PPTX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование. Форматы Описание Просмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXML Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML DPS WPS Office Presentation Document by Kingsoft Формат презентации, входящий в пакет WPS Office. Он включает в себя набор слайдов, который может состоять из титульного слайда, за которым следуют слайды с содержимым: текст, изображения, видео, аудио и фигуры + + DPT Kingsoft Presentation Template Формат файла для сохранения стандартного макета макета и стилей для презентации и для создания презентаций (файлы .DPS) с тем же форматированием + + FODP OpenDocument Flat XML Presentation Format Формат файлов презентаций для хранения сохраненной презентации в формате OpenDocument XML без сжатия + + ODP OpenDocument Presentation Формат файлов презентаций, созданный приложением Impress и входящий в состав пакетов офисных приложений на базе OpenOffice + + OTP OpenDocument Presentation Template Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов презентаций. Шаблон OTP содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества презентаций со схожим форматированием + + POT Portable object template Формат файлов презентаций, содержащий стандартные макеты, форматирование и стили. Файлы POT используются для создания нескольких файлов .PPT с одинаковым форматированием + + POTM A macro-enabled presentation template by Microsoft PowerPoint Формат файла презентаций, который содержит стандартные изображения, шаблоны слайдов, макросы и форматирование. + + POTX PowerPoint Open XML Document Template разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов презентаций. Шаблон POTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества презентаций со схожим форматированием + + PPS PowerPoint Slideshow File Формат файла презентаций, содержащий различные данные, такие как видео, аудио, текст, анимация и изображения + + PPSM Macro-enabled slide show by Microsoft PowerPoint Формат файла презентаций, содержащий один или несколько слайдов с поддержкой макросов, а также текст, изображения и переходы + + PPSX Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Show Формат файлов презентаций, используемый для воспроизведения слайд-шоу + + PPT Формат файлов, используемый программой Microsoft PowerPoint + + PPTX Office Open XML Presentation разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для представления электронных таблиц, диаграмм, презентаций и текстовых документов + + SXI StarOffice Impress Presentation Формат презентаций, которые могут содержать слайды с заголовком, текст и цифровые объекты; также поддерживает аудио, видео и эффекты перехода + Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать презентацию из меню Файл -> Скачать как. Исходный формат Можно скачать как DPS JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX DPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX FODP JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX ODP JPG, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX OTP JPG, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POTM JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX POTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPS JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPSM JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPSX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTM, POTX, PPSM, PPTM, PPTX PPT JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX PPTX JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM SXI JPG, ODP, OTP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, POTX, PPSM, PPSX, PPTM, PPTX Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации презентаций в самые известные форматы файлов." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm", @@ -70,6 +70,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Вкладка Совместная работа", "body": "Вкладка Совместная работа позволяет организовать совместную работу над презентацией. В онлайн-версии можно предоставлять доступ к файлу, выбирать режим совместного редактирования, управлять комментариями. В режиме комментирования вы можете добавлять и удалять комментарии и использовать чат. В десктопной версии можно управлять комментариями. Окно онлайн-редактора презентаций: Окно десктопного редактора презентаций: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: задавать настройки совместного доступа (доступно только в онлайн-версии), переключаться между Строгим и Быстрым режимами совместного редактирования (доступно только в онлайн-версии), добавлять или удалять комментарии к презентации, открывать панель Чата (доступно только в онлайн-версии), отслеживать историю версий (доступно только в онлайн-версии)." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Вкладка Рисование", + "body": "Вкладка Рисование Редактора презентаций позволяет выполнять основные операции рисования. Окно онлайн-редактора презентаций: Окно десктопного редактора презентаций: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: выделять рисунки, чтобы изменить их размер или удалить, использовать ручку и маркер, чтобы рисовать или добавлять рукописные заметки и выделение, использовать ластик, чтобы удалять весь рисунок или рукописный текст." + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Файл", @@ -88,7 +93,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Плагины", - "body": "Вкладка Плагины позволяет получить доступ к дополнительным возможностям редактирования, используя доступные сторонние компоненты. Здесь также можно использовать макросы для автоматизации рутинных задач. Окно онлайн-редактора презентаций: Окно десктопного редактора презентаций: Кнопка Настройки позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные. Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины: Отправить - позволяет отправить презентацию по электронной почте с помощью десктопного почтового клиента по умолчанию (доступно только в десктопной версии), Подсветка кода - позволяет подсвечивать синтаксис кода, выбирая нужный язык, стиль, цвет фона, Фоторедактор - позволяет редактировать изображения: обрезать, отражать, поворачивать их, рисовать линии и фигуры, добавлять иконки и текст, загружать маску и применять фильтры, такие как Оттенки серого, Инверсия, Сепия, Размытие, Резкость, Рельеф и другие, Синонимы - позволяет находить синонимы и антонимы какого-либо слова и заменять его на выбранный вариант, Переводчик позволяет переводить выделенный текст на другие языки, Примечание: этот плагин не работает в Internet Explorer. YouTube позволяет встраивать в презентацию видео с YouTube. Для получения дополнительной информации о плагинах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. Все доступные примеры плагинов с открытым исходным кодом доступны на GitHub." + "body": "Вкладка Плагины позволяет получить доступ к дополнительным возможностям редактирования, используя доступные сторонние компоненты. Здесь также можно использовать макросы для автоматизации рутинных задач. Окно онлайн-редактора презентаций: Окно десктопного редактора презентаций: Кнопка Менеджер плагинов позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные. Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины: Отправить - позволяет отправить презентацию по электронной почте с помощью десктопного почтового клиента по умолчанию (доступно только в десктопной версии), Подсветка кода - позволяет подсвечивать синтаксис кода, выбирая нужный язык, стиль, цвет фона, Фоторедактор - позволяет редактировать изображения: обрезать, отражать, поворачивать их, рисовать линии и фигуры, добавлять иконки и текст, загружать маску и применять фильтры, такие как Оттенки серого, Инверсия, Сепия, Размытие, Резкость, Рельеф и другие, Синонимы - позволяет находить синонимы и антонимы какого-либо слова и заменять его на выбранный вариант, Переводчик позволяет переводить выделенный текст на другие языки, Примечание: этот плагин не работает в Internet Explorer. YouTube позволяет встраивать в презентацию видео с YouTube. Для получения дополнительной информации о плагинах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. Все доступные примеры плагинов с открытым исходным кодом доступны на GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", @@ -140,20 +145,25 @@ var indexes = "title": "Создание списков", "body": "Для создания списка в презентации, установите курсор в том месте, где начнется список (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип списка, который требуется создать: Неупорядоченный список с маркерами создается с помощью значка Маркированный список , расположенного на верхней панели инструментов; Упорядоченный список с цифрами или буквами создается с помощью значка Нумерованный список , расположенного на верхней панели инструментов; Примечание: нажмите направленную вниз стрелку рядом со значком Маркированный список или Нумерованный список, чтобы выбрать, как должен выглядеть список. теперь при каждом нажатии клавиши Enter в конце строки будет появляться новый элемент упорядоченного или неупорядоченного списка. Чтобы закончить список, нажмите клавишу Backspace и продолжайте текст обычного абзаца. На вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов при помощи значков Уменьшить отступ и Увеличить отступ можно изменить отступы текста в списках. Примечание: дополнительные параметры отступов и интервалов можно изменить на правой боковой панели и в окне дополнительных параметров. Чтобы получить дополнительную информацию об этом, прочитайте раздел Вставка и форматирование текста. Изменение параметров списков Чтобы изменить параметры списка, такие как тип, размер и цвет маркеров или нумерации: щелкните по какому-либо пункту существующего списка или выделите текст, который требуется отформатировать как список, нажмите на кнопку Маркированный список или Нумерованный список на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Параметры списка, откроется окно Параметры списка. Окно настроек маркированного списка выглядит следующим образом: Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. При нажатии на поле Новый маркер открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. При нажатии на поле Новое изображение появляется новое поле Импорт, в котором можно выбрать новое изображение для маркеров Из файла, По URL или Из хранилища. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер для каждого из маркеров в зависимости от текущего размера текста. Может принимать значение от 25% до 400%. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров. Для этого выберите на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задайте пользовательский цвет. Окно настроек нумерованного списка выглядит следующим образом: Тип - позволяет выбрать нужный числовой формат, используемый для нумерованного списка. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер для нумераций в зависимости от текущего размера текста. Может принимать значение от 25% до 400%. Начать с - позволяет выбрать нужный порядковый номер, с которого будет начинаться нумерованный список. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет нумерации. Для этого выберите на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задайте пользовательский цвет. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно настроек." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Рисование от руки на слайде", + "body": "В Редакторе презентаций, вы можете использовать вкладку Рисование, чтобы выделять в документе текст маркером, рисовать от руки, добавлять рукописные заметки и стирать их. Чтобы начать рисовать, писать или выделять текст, нажмите значок Ручка или Маркер и перемещайте курсор. Щелкните стрелку раскрывающегося списка, чтобы настроить цвет и толщину обводки. Нажмите Другие цвета, если нужного цвета нет в палитре. Когда вы закончите рисовать, писать или выделять, снова щелкните значок Ручка или Маркер или нажмите клавишу Esc. Щелкните на Ластик и перемещайте курсор вперед и назад, чтобы стереть рисунок. Ластик удаляет только весь рисунок. Используйте функцию Выделить, чтобы выбрать надпись или рисунок. После выбора вы можете изменить размер или удалить выбранный элемент." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FillObjectsSelectColor.htm", "title": "Заливка объектов и выбор цветов", - "body": "Можно использовать различные заливки для фона слайда, автофигур и шрифта объектов Text Art. Выберите объект Чтобы изменить заливку фона слайда, выделите нужные слайды в списке слайдов. На правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры слайда. Чтобы изменить заливку автофигуры, щелкните по нужной автофигуре левой кнопкой мыши. На правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры фигуры. Чтобы изменить заливку шрифта объекта Text Art, выделите нужный текстовый объект. На правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры объектов Text Art. Определите нужный тип заливки Настройте свойства выбранной заливки (подробное описание для каждого типа заливки смотрите ниже) Примечание: для автофигур и шрифта объектов Text Art, независимо от выбранного типа заливки, можно также задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Доступны следующие типы заливки: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры или слайда. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной теме/цветовой схеме презентации. Как только вы примените какую-то другую тему или цветовую схему, набор Цвета темы изменится. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к объекту и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет. Примечание: такие же типы цветов можно использовать при выборе цвета обводки автофигуры, настройке цвета шрифта или изменении цвета фона или границ таблицы. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить слайд или фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите один из доступных вариантов: Линейный (цвета изменяются по прямой, то есть по горизонтальной/вертикальной оси или по диагонали под углом 45 градусов) или Радиальный (цвета изменяются по кругу от центра к краям). Направление - в окне предварительного просмотра направления отображается выбранный цвет градиента. Нажмите на стрелку, чтобы выбрать шаблон из меню. Если выбран Линейный градиент, доступны следующие направления : из левого верхнего угла в нижний правый, сверху вниз, из правого верхнего угла в нижний левый, справа налево, из правого нижнего угла в верхний левый, снизу вверх, из левого нижнего угла в верхний правый, слева направо. Если выбран Радиальный градиент, доступен только один шаблон. Угол - установите числовое значение для точного угла перехода цвета. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры или слайда изображение или предустановленную текстуру. Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры или слайда, нажмите кнопку Выбрать изображение и добавьте изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры или слайда, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура или слайд, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер слайда или автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади слайда или автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить слайд или фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку." + "body": "Можно использовать различные заливки для фона слайда, автофигур и шрифта объектов Text Art. Выберите объект Чтобы изменить заливку фона слайда, выделите нужные слайды в списке слайдов. На правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры слайда. Чтобы изменить заливку автофигуры, щелкните по нужной автофигуре левой кнопкой мыши. На правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры фигуры. Чтобы изменить заливку шрифта объекта Text Art, выделите нужный текстовый объект. На правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры объектов Text Art. Определите нужный тип заливки Настройте свойства выбранной заливки (подробное описание для каждого типа заливки смотрите ниже) Примечание: для автофигур и шрифта объектов Text Art, независимо от выбранного типа заливки, можно также задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Доступны следующие типы заливки: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры или слайда. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной теме/цветовой схеме презентации. Как только вы примените какую-то другую тему или цветовую схему, набор Цвета темы изменится. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты: Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в презентации. Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет. Примечание: такие же типы цветов можно использовать при выборе цвета обводки автофигуры, настройке цвета шрифта или изменении цвета фона или границ таблицы. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить слайд или фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите один из доступных вариантов: Линейный (цвета изменяются по прямой, то есть по горизонтальной/вертикальной оси или по диагонали под углом 45 градусов) или Радиальный (цвета изменяются по кругу от центра к краям). Направление - в окне предварительного просмотра направления отображается выбранный цвет градиента. Нажмите на стрелку, чтобы выбрать шаблон из меню. Если выбран Линейный градиент, доступны следующие направления : из левого верхнего угла в нижний правый, сверху вниз, из правого верхнего угла в нижний левый, справа налево, из правого нижнего угла в верхний левый, снизу вверх, из левого нижнего угла в верхний правый, слева направо. Если выбран Радиальный градиент, доступен только один шаблон. Угол - установите числовое значение для точного угла перехода цвета. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры или слайда изображение или предустановленную текстуру. Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры или слайда, нажмите кнопку Выбрать изображение и добавьте изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры или слайда, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура или слайд, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер слайда или автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади слайда или автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить слайд или фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Вставка и форматирование автофигур", - "body": "Вставка автофигуры Для добавления автофигуры на слайд: в списке слайдов слева выберите тот слайд, на который требуется добавить автофигуру, щелкните по значку Фигура на вкладке Главная или по стрелочке рядом с Галереей фигур на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии, щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы, в области редактирования слайда установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, Примечание: чтобы растянуть фигуру, можно перетащить курсор при нажатой кнопке мыши. после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на слайде выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней). Также можно добавить автофигуру в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Изменение параметров автофигуры Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по автофигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - чтобы задать сплошной цвет, который требуется применить к выбранной фигуре. Градиентная заливка - чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Изображение или текстура - чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Узор - чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Чтобы получить более подробную информацию об этих опциях, обратитесь к разделу Заливка объектов и выбор цветов. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Можно использовать цвет выбранной темы, стандартный цвет или выбрать пользовательский цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз) Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью. Для изменения дополнительных параметров автофигуры щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры фигуры или щелкните левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств фигуры: На вкладке Положение можно изменить Ширину и/или Высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры. Также можно задать точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры: Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими. Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными. Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными. Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: Закругленный - угол будет закругленным. Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось. Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами. Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины. Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков. Вкладка Текстовое поле содержит следующие параметры: Автоподбор - чтобы изменить способ отображения текста внутри фигуры: Без автоподбора, Сжать текст при переполнении, Подгонять размер фигуры под текст. Поля вокруг текста - чтобы изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры). Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна. На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура. Чтобы заменить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и используйте выпадающий список Изменить автофигуру на вкладке Параметры фигуры правой боковой панели. Чтобы удалить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Чтобы узнать, как выровнять автофигуру на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько автофигур, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде. Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого: щелкните по значку Фигура на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите в меню группу Линии, щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма), наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения , появившихся на контуре фигуры, перетащите указатель мыши ко второй фигуре и щелкните по нужной точке соединения на ее контуре. При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними. Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения." + "body": "Вставка автофигуры Для добавления автофигуры на слайд: в списке слайдов слева выберите тот слайд, на который требуется добавить автофигуру, щелкните по значку Фигура на вкладке Главная или по стрелочке рядом с Галереей фигур на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии, щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы, в области редактирования слайда установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, Примечание: чтобы растянуть фигуру, можно перетащить курсор при нажатой кнопке мыши. после того, как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер, местоположение и свойства. Вы можете сохранить автофигуру как изображение на жестком диске с помощью пункта Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Примечание: чтобы добавить надпись внутри фигуры, убедитесь, что фигура на слайде выделена, и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней). Также можно добавить автофигуру в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Копирование форматирования стиля автофигуры Чтобы скопировать определенное форматирование стиля автофигуры, выберите автофигуру, форматирование которой нужно скопировать, и с помощью мыши или клавиатуры, щелкните значок Копировать стиль на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов (указатель мыши будет выглядеть следующим образом ), выберите нужную автофигуру, чтобы применить такое же форматирование. Изменение параметров автофигуры Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по автофигуре и выберите значок Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - чтобы задать сплошной цвет, который требуется применить к выбранной фигуре. Градиентная заливка - чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Изображение или текстура - чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Узор - чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Чтобы получить более подробную информацию об этих опциях, обратитесь к разделу Заливка объектов и выбор цветов. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Можно использовать цвет выбранной темы, стандартный цвет или выбрать пользовательский цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Для изменения непрозрачности, введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь ползунком. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз) Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью. Для изменения дополнительных параметров автофигуры щелкните по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры фигуры или щелкните левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств фигуры: На вкладке Положение можно изменить Ширину и/или Высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры. Также можно задать точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры: Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими. Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными. Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными. Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: Закругленный - угол будет закругленным. Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось. Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами. Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины. Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков. Вкладка Текстовое поле содержит следующие параметры: Автоподбор - чтобы изменить способ отображения текста внутри фигуры: Без автоподбора, Сжать текст при переполнении, Подгонять размер фигуры под текст. Поля вокруг текста - чтобы изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры). Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна. На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит фигура. Чтобы заменить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и используйте выпадающий список Изменить автофигуру на вкладке Параметры фигуры правой боковой панели. Чтобы удалить добавленную автофигуру, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Чтобы узнать, как выровнять автофигуру на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько автофигур, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде. Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого: щелкните по значку Фигура на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите в меню группу Линии, щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма), наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения , появившихся на контуре фигуры, перетащите указатель мыши ко второй фигуре и щелкните по нужной точке соединения на ее контуре. При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними. Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Вставка и редактирование диаграмм", - "body": "Вставка диаграммы Для вставки диаграммы в презентацию, Установите курсор там, где требуется поместить диаграмму. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов. Щелкните по значку Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: Гистограмма Гистограмма с группировкой Гистограмма с накоплением Нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма с группировкой Трехмерная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма График График График с накоплением Нормированный график с накоплением График с маркерами График с накоплениями с маркерами Нормированный график с маркерами и накоплением Трехмерный график Круговая Круговая Кольцевая диаграмма Трехмерная круговая диаграмма Линейчатая Линейчатая с группировкой Линейчатая с накоплением Нормированная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная линейчатая с группировкой Трехмерная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная линейчатая с накоплением С областями С областями Диаграмма с областями с накоплением Нормированная с областями и накоплением Биржевая Точечная Точечная диаграмма Точечная с гладкими кривыми и маркерами Точечная с гладкими кривыми Точечная с прямыми отрезками и маркерами Точечная с прямыми отрезками Комбинированные Гистограмма с группировкой и график Гистограмма с группировкой и график на вспомогательной оси С областями с накоплением и гистограмма с группировкой Пользовательская комбинация Примечание: Редактор презентаций ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм. После этого появится окно Редактор диаграмм, в котором можно ввести в ячейки необходимые данные при помощи следующих элементов управления: и для копирования и вставки скопированных данных и для отмены и повтора действий для вставки функции и для уменьшения и увеличения числа десятичных знаков для изменения числового формата, то есть того, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в ячейках для выбора диаграммы другого типа. Нажмите кнопку Выбрать данные, расположенную в окне Редактора диаграмм. Откроется окно Данные диаграммы. Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления диапазоном данных диаграммы, элементами легенды (ряды), подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и переключением строк / столбцов. Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы. Щелкните значок справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Элементы легенды (ряды) - добавляйте, редактируйте или удаляйте записи легенды. Введите или выберите ряд для записей легенды. В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить. В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку справа от поля Имя ряда. Подписи горизонтальной оси (категории) - изменяйте текст подписи категории. В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать. В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Переключить строку/столбец - переставьте местами данные, которые расположены на диаграмме. Переключите строки на столбцы, чтобы данные отображались на другой оси. Нажмите кнопку ОК, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав на кнопку Изменить тип диаграммы в окне Редактор диаграмм, чтобы выбрать тип и стиль диаграммы. Выберите диаграмму из доступных разделов: гистограмма, график, круговая, линейчатая, с областями, биржевая, точечная, комбинированные. Когда вы выбираете Комбинированные диаграммы, в окне Тип диаграммы расположены ряды диаграмм, для которых можно выбрать типы диаграмм и данные для размещения на вторичной оси. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав кнопку Редактировать диаграмму в окне Редактор диаграмм. Откроется окно Диаграмма - Дополнительные параметры. На вкладке Макет можно изменить расположение элементов диаграммы: Укажите местоположение Заголовка диаграммы относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы заголовок диаграммы не отображался, Наложение, чтобы наложить заголовок на область построения диаграммы и выровнять его по центру, Без наложения, чтобы показать заголовок над областью построения диаграммы. Укажите местоположение Условных обозначений относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы условные обозначения не отображались, Снизу, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд под областью построения диаграммы, Сверху, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд над областью построения диаграммы, Справа, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их справа от области построения диаграммы, Слева, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их слева от области построения диаграммы, Наложение слева, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру слева, Наложение справа, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру справа. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных): Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу. Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков и Линейчатых диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение, Введите символ (запятая, точка с запятой и т.д.), который вы хотите использовать для разделения нескольких подписей, в поле Разделитель подписей данных. Линии - используется для выбора типа линий для линейчатых/точечных диаграмм. Можно выбрать одну из следующих опций: Прямые для использования прямых линий между элементами данных, Сглаженные для использования сглаженных кривых линий между элементами данных или Нет для того, чтобы линии не отображались. Маркеры - используется для указания того, нужно показывать маркеры (если флажок поставлен) или нет (если флажок снят) на линейчатых/точечных диаграммах. Примечание: Опции Линии и Маркеры доступны только для Линейчатых диаграмм и Точечных диаграмм. Вкладка Вертикальная ось позволяет изменять параметры вертикальной оси, также называемой осью значений или осью Y, которая отображает числовые значения. Обратите внимание, что вертикальная ось будет осью категорий, которая отображает подпись для Гистограмм, таким образом, параметры вкладки Вертикальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в следующем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Примечание: Параметры оси и Линии сетки недоступны для круговых диаграмм, так как у круговых диаграмм нет осей и линий сетки. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть вертикальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать название вертикальной оси, Повернутое - показать название снизу вверх слева от вертикальной оси, По горизонтали - показать название по горизонтали слева от вертикальной оси. Минимум - используется для указания наименьшего значения, которое отображается в начале вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае минимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Максимум - используется для указания наибольшего значения, которое отображается в конце вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае максимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на вертикальной оси, в которой она должна пересекаться с горизонтальной осью. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимум/Максимум на вертикальной оси. Единицы отображения - используется для определения порядка числовых значений на вертикальной оси. Эта опция может пригодиться, если вы работаете с большими числами и хотите, чтобы отображение цифр на оси было более компактным и удобочитаемым (например, можно сделать так, чтобы 50 000 показывалось как 50, воспользовавшись опцией Тысячи). Выберите желаемые единицы отображения из выпадающего списка: Сотни, Тысячи, 10 000, 100 000, Миллионы, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Миллиарды, Триллионы или выберите опцию Нет, чтобы вернуться к единицам отображения по умолчанию. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения: Нет - не отображать основные/дополнительные деления, На пересечении - отображать основные/дополнительные деления по обе стороны от оси, Внутри - отображать основные/дополнительные деления внутри оси, Снаружи - отображать основные/дополнительные деления за пределами оси. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет определить положение подписей основных делений, отображающих значения. Для того, чтобы задать Положение подписи относительно вертикальной оси, выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет - не отображать подписи, Ниже - показывать подписи слева от области диаграммы, Выше - показывать подписи справа от области диаграммы, Рядом с осью - показывать подписи рядом с осью. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Примечание: второстепенные оси поддерживаются только в Комбинированных диаграммах. Второстепенные оси полезны в комбинированных диаграммах, когда ряды данных значительно различаются или для построения диаграммы используются смешанные типы данных. Второстепенные оси упрощают чтение и понимание комбинированной диаграммы. Вкладка Вспомогательная вертикальная / горизонтальная ось появляется, когда вы выбираете соответствующий ряд данных для комбинированной диаграммы. Все настройки и параметры на вкладке Вспомогательная вертикальная/горизонтальная ось такие же, как настройки на вертикальной / горизонтальной оси. Подробное описание параметров Вертикальная / горизонтальная ось смотрите выше / ниже. Вкладка Горизонтальная ось позволяет изменять параметры горизонтальной оси, также называемой осью категорий или осью x, которая отображает текстовые метки. Обратите внимание, что горизонтальная ось будет осью значений, которая отображает числовые значения для Гистограмм, поэтому в этом случае параметры вкладки Горизонтальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в предыдущем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть горизонтальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать заголовок горизонтальной оси, Без наложения - отображать заголовок под горизонтальной осью, Линии сетки используется для отображения Горизонтальных линий сетки путем выбора необходимого параметра в раскрывающемся списке: Нет, Основные, Незначительное или Основные и Дополнительные. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на горизонтальной оси, в которой вертикальная ось должна пересекать ее. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Из выпадающего списка можно выбрать опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимальном/Максимальном значении на вертикальной оси. Положение оси - используется для указания места размещения подписей на оси: на Делениях или Между делениями. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения категорий в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, категории располагаются слева направо. Когда этот флажок отмечен, категории располагаются справа налево. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет определять местоположение делений на горизонтальной шкале. Деления основного типа - это более крупные деления шкалы, у которых могут быть подписи, отображающие значения категорий. Деления дополнительного типа - это более мелкие деления шкалы, которые располагаются между делениями основного типа и у которых нет подписей. Кроме того, деления шкалы указывают, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если на вкладке Макет выбрана соответствующая опция. Можно редактировать следующие параметры делений: Основной/Дополнительный тип - используется для указания следующих вариантов размещения: Нет, чтобы деления основного/дополнительного типа не отображались, На пересечении, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа по обеим сторонам оси, Внутри чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с внутренней стороны оси, Снаружи, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с наружной стороны оси. Интервал между делениями - используется для указания того, сколько категорий нужно показывать между двумя соседними делениями. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет настроить внешний вид меток, отображающих категории. Положение подписи - используется для указания того, где следует располагать подписи относительно горизонтальной оси. Выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы подписи категорий не отображались, Ниже, чтобы подписи категорий располагались снизу области диаграммы, Выше, чтобы подписи категорий располагались наверху области диаграммы, Рядом с осью, чтобы подписи категорий отображались рядом с осью. Расстояние до подписи - используется для указания того, насколько близко подписи должны располагаться от осей. Можно указать нужное значение в поле ввода. Чем это значение больше, тем дальше расположены подписи от осей. Интервал между подписями - используется для указания того, как часто нужно показывать подписи. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае подписи отображаются для каждой категории. Можно выбрать опцию Вручную и указать нужное значение в поле справа. Например, введите 2, чтобы отображать подписи у каждой второй категории, и т.д. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер диаграммы также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера диаграммы. Если ячейка перемещается, диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры диаграммы останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера диаграммы при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. После того, как диаграмма будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и положение. Вы можете задать положение диаграммы на слайде, перетащив ее по вертикали или горизонтали. Также можно добавить диаграмму в текстовый заполнитель, нажав на значок Диаграмма внутри него и выбрав нужный тип диаграммы: Также можно добавить диаграмму в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Редактирование элементов диаграммы Чтобы изменить Заголовок диаграммы, выделите мышью стандартный текст и введите вместо него свой собственный. Чтобы изменить форматирование шрифта внутри текстовых элементов, таких как заголовок диаграммы, названия осей, элементы условных обозначений, подписи данных и так далее, выделите нужный текстовый элемент, щелкнув по нему левой кнопкой мыши. Затем используйте значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы изменить тип, стиль, размер или цвет шрифта. При выборе диаграммы становится также активным значок Параметры фигуры справа, так как фигура используется в качестве фона для диаграммы. Можно щелкнуть по этому значку, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели инструментов и изменить параметры Заливки и Обводки фигуры. Обратите, пожалуйста, внимание, что вы не можете изменить тип фигуры. C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина и тип линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен. Если вам нужно изменить размер элементов диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых квадратов , расположенных по периметру элемента. Чтобы изменить положение элемента, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши, убедитесь, что ваш курсор изменился на , удерживайте левую кнопку мыши и перетащите элемент в нужное положение. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выделите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Можно также поворачивать 3D-диаграммы с помощью мыши. Щелкните левой кнопкой мыши внутри области построения диаграммы и удерживайте кнопку мыши. Не отпуская кнопку мыши, перетащите курсор, чтобы изменить ориентацию 3D-диаграммы. Изменение параметров диаграммы Размер, тип и стиль диаграммы, а также данные, используемые для построения диаграммы, можно изменить с помощью правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по диаграмме и выберите значок Параметры диаграммы справа. Раздел Размер позволяет изменить ширину и/или высоту диаграммы. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон диаграммы. Раздел Изменить тип диаграммы позволяет изменить выбранный тип и/или стиль диаграммы с помощью соответствующего выпадающего меню. Для выбора нужного Стиля диаграммы используйте второе выпадающее меню в разделе Изменить тип диаграммы. Кнопка Изменить данные позволяет вызвать окно Редактор диаграмм и начать редактирование данных, как описано выше. Примечание: чтобы быстро вызвать окно Редактор диаграмм, можно также дважды щелкнуть мышью по диаграмме на слайде. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. Опция Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели позволяет открыть окно Диаграмма - дополнительные параметры, в котором можно настроить следующие параметры: На вкладке Положение можно задать следующие свойства: Размер - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту диаграммы. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон диаграммы. Позиция - задайте точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. Чтобы удалить добавленную диаграмму, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Чтобы узнать, как выровнять диаграмму на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько объектов, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде." + "body": "Вставка диаграммы Для вставки диаграммы в презентацию, Установите курсор там, где требуется поместить диаграмму. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов. Щелкните по значку Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: Гистограмма Гистограмма с группировкой Гистограмма с накоплением Нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма с группировкой Трехмерная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма График График График с накоплением Нормированный график с накоплением График с маркерами График с накоплениями с маркерами Нормированный график с маркерами и накоплением Трехмерный график Круговая Круговая Кольцевая диаграмма Трехмерная круговая диаграмма Линейчатая Линейчатая с группировкой Линейчатая с накоплением Нормированная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная линейчатая с группировкой Трехмерная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная линейчатая с накоплением С областями С областями Диаграмма с областями с накоплением Нормированная с областями и накоплением Биржевая Точечная Точечная диаграмма Точечная с гладкими кривыми и маркерами Точечная с гладкими кривыми Точечная с прямыми отрезками и маркерами Точечная с прямыми отрезками Лепестковая Лепестковая Лепестковая с маркерами Заполненная лепестковая Комбинированные Гистограмма с группировкой и график Гистограмма с группировкой и график на вспомогательной оси С областями с накоплением и гистограмма с группировкой Пользовательская комбинация Примечание: Редактор презентаций ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм. После этого появится окно Редактор диаграмм, в котором можно ввести в ячейки необходимые данные при помощи следующих элементов управления: и для копирования и вставки скопированных данных и для отмены и повтора действий для вставки функции и для уменьшения и увеличения числа десятичных знаков для изменения числового формата, то есть того, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в ячейках для выбора диаграммы другого типа. Нажмите кнопку Выбрать данные, расположенную в окне Редактора диаграмм. Откроется окно Данные диаграммы. Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления Диапазоном данных диаграммы, Элементами легенды (ряды), Подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и Переключением строк / столбцов. Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы. Щелкните значок справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Элементы легенды (ряды) - добавляйте, редактируйте или удаляйте записи легенды. Введите или выберите ряд для записей легенды. В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить. В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку справа от поля Имя ряда. Подписи горизонтальной оси (категории) - изменяйте текст подписи категории. В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать. В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Переключить строку/столбец - переставьте местами данные, которые расположены на диаграмме. Переключите строки на столбцы, чтобы данные отображались на другой оси. Нажмите кнопку ОК, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав на кнопку Изменить тип диаграммы в окне Редактор диаграмм, чтобы выбрать тип и стиль диаграммы. Выберите диаграмму из доступных разделов: гистограмма, график, круговая, линейчатая, с областями, биржевая, точечная, лепестковая, комбинированные. Когда вы выбираете Комбинированные диаграммы, в окне Тип диаграммы расположены ряды диаграмм, для которых можно выбрать типы диаграмм и данные для размещения на вторичной оси. Измените параметры диаграммы, нажав кнопку Редактировать диаграмму в окне Редактор диаграмм. Откроется окно Диаграмма - Дополнительные параметры. На вкладке Макет можно изменить расположение элементов диаграммы: Укажите местоположение Заголовка диаграммы относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы заголовок диаграммы не отображался, Наложение, чтобы наложить заголовок на область построения диаграммы и выровнять его по центру, Без наложения, чтобы показать заголовок над областью построения диаграммы. Укажите местоположение Условных обозначений относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы условные обозначения не отображались, Снизу, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд под областью построения диаграммы, Сверху, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд над областью построения диаграммы, Справа, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их справа от области построения диаграммы, Слева, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их слева от области построения диаграммы, Наложение слева, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру слева, Наложение справа, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру справа. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных): Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу. Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков, Линейчатых, Лепестковых и Комбинированных диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение, Введите символ (запятая, точка с запятой и т.д.), который вы хотите использовать для разделения нескольких подписей, в поле Разделитель подписей данных. Линии - используется для выбора типа линий для линейчатых/точечных диаграмм. Можно выбрать одну из следующих опций: Прямые для использования прямых линий между элементами данных, Сглаженные для использования сглаженных кривых линий между элементами данных или Нет для того, чтобы линии не отображались. Маркеры - используется для указания того, нужно показывать маркеры (если флажок поставлен) или нет (если флажок снят) на линейчатых/точечных диаграммах. Примечание: Опции Линии и Маркеры доступны только для Линейчатых диаграмм и Точечных диаграмм. Вкладка Вертикальная ось позволяет изменять параметры вертикальной оси, также называемой осью значений или осью Y, которая отображает числовые значения. Обратите внимание, что вертикальная ось будет осью категорий, которая отображает подпись для Гистограмм, таким образом, параметры вкладки Вертикальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в следующем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Примечание: Параметры оси и Линии сетки недоступны для круговых диаграмм, так как у круговых диаграмм нет осей и линий сетки. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть вертикальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать название вертикальной оси, Повернутое - показать название снизу вверх слева от вертикальной оси, По горизонтали - показать название по горизонтали слева от вертикальной оси. Минимум - используется для указания наименьшего значения, которое отображается в начале вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае минимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Максимум - используется для указания наибольшего значения, которое отображается в конце вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае максимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на вертикальной оси, в которой она должна пересекаться с горизонтальной осью. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимум/Максимум на вертикальной оси. Единицы отображения - используется для определения порядка числовых значений на вертикальной оси. Эта опция может пригодиться, если вы работаете с большими числами и хотите, чтобы отображение цифр на оси было более компактным и удобочитаемым (например, можно сделать так, чтобы 50 000 показывалось как 50, воспользовавшись опцией Тысячи). Выберите желаемые единицы отображения из выпадающего списка: Сотни, Тысячи, 10 000, 100 000, Миллионы, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Миллиарды, Триллионы или выберите опцию Нет, чтобы вернуться к единицам отображения по умолчанию. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. Логарифмическая шкала - используется для включения логарифмического масштабирования до Базового значения, определяемой пользователем. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения: Нет - не отображать основные/дополнительные деления, На пересечении - отображать основные/дополнительные деления по обе стороны от оси, Внутри - отображать основные/дополнительные деления внутри оси, Снаружи - отображать основные/дополнительные деления за пределами оси. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет определить положение подписей основных делений, отображающих значения. Для того, чтобы задать Положение подписи относительно вертикальной оси, выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет - не отображать подписи, Ниже - показывать подписи слева от области диаграммы, Выше - показывать подписи справа от области диаграммы, Рядом с осью - показывать подписи рядом с осью. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Примечание: второстепенные оси поддерживаются только в Комбинированных диаграммах. Второстепенные оси полезны в комбинированных диаграммах, когда ряды данных значительно различаются или для построения диаграммы используются смешанные типы данных. Второстепенные оси упрощают чтение и понимание комбинированной диаграммы. Вкладка Вспомогательная вертикальная / горизонтальная ось появляется, когда вы выбираете соответствующий ряд данных для комбинированной диаграммы. Все настройки и параметры на вкладке Вспомогательная вертикальная/горизонтальная ось такие же, как настройки на вертикальной / горизонтальной оси. Подробное описание параметров Вертикальная / горизонтальная ось смотрите выше / ниже. Вкладка Горизонтальная ось позволяет изменять параметры горизонтальной оси, также называемой осью категорий или осью x, которая отображает текстовые метки. Обратите внимание, что горизонтальная ось будет осью значений, которая отображает числовые значения для Гистограмм, поэтому в этом случае параметры вкладки Горизонтальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в предыдущем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть горизонтальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать заголовок горизонтальной оси, Без наложения - отображать заголовок под горизонтальной осью, Линии сетки используется для отображения Горизонтальных линий сетки путем выбора необходимого параметра в раскрывающемся списке: Нет, Основные, Незначительное или Основные и Дополнительные. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на горизонтальной оси, в которой вертикальная ось должна пересекать ее. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Из выпадающего списка можно выбрать опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимальном/Максимальном значении на вертикальной оси. Положение оси - используется для указания места размещения подписей на оси: на Делениях или Между делениями. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения категорий в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, категории располагаются слева направо. Когда этот флажок отмечен, категории располагаются справа налево. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет определять местоположение делений на горизонтальной шкале. Деления основного типа - это более крупные деления шкалы, у которых могут быть подписи, отображающие значения категорий. Деления дополнительного типа - это более мелкие деления шкалы, которые располагаются между делениями основного типа и у которых нет подписей. Кроме того, деления шкалы указывают, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если на вкладке Макет выбрана соответствующая опция. Можно редактировать следующие параметры делений: Основной/Дополнительный тип - используется для указания следующих вариантов размещения: Нет, чтобы деления основного/дополнительного типа не отображались, На пересечении, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа по обеим сторонам оси, Внутри чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с внутренней стороны оси, Снаружи, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с наружной стороны оси. Интервал между делениями - используется для указания того, сколько категорий нужно показывать между двумя соседними делениями. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет настроить внешний вид меток, отображающих категории. Положение подписи - используется для указания того, где следует располагать подписи относительно горизонтальной оси. Выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы подписи категорий не отображались, Ниже, чтобы подписи категорий располагались снизу области диаграммы, Выше, чтобы подписи категорий располагались наверху области диаграммы, Рядом с осью, чтобы подписи категорий отображались рядом с осью. Расстояние до подписи - используется для указания того, насколько близко подписи должны располагаться от осей. Можно указать нужное значение в поле ввода. Чем это значение больше, тем дальше расположены подписи от осей. Интервал между подписями - используется для указания того, как часто нужно показывать подписи. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае подписи отображаются для каждой категории. Можно выбрать опцию Вручную и указать нужное значение в поле справа. Например, введите 2, чтобы отображать подписи у каждой второй категории, и т.д. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер диаграммы также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера диаграммы. Если ячейка перемещается, диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры диаграммы останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера диаграммы при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. После того, как диаграмма будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и положение. Вы можете задать положение диаграммы на слайде, перетащив ее по вертикали или горизонтали. Также можно добавить диаграмму в текстовый заполнитель, нажав на значок Диаграмма внутри него и выбрав нужный тип диаграммы: Также можно добавить диаграмму в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Редактирование элементов диаграммы Чтобы изменить Заголовок диаграммы, выделите мышью стандартный текст и введите вместо него свой собственный. Чтобы изменить форматирование шрифта внутри текстовых элементов, таких как заголовок диаграммы, названия осей, элементы условных обозначений, подписи данных и так далее, выделите нужный текстовый элемент, щелкнув по нему левой кнопкой мыши. Затем используйте значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы изменить тип, стиль, размер или цвет шрифта. При выборе диаграммы становится также активным значок Параметры фигуры справа, так как фигура используется в качестве фона для диаграммы. Можно щелкнуть по этому значку, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели инструментов и изменить параметры Заливки и Обводки фигуры. Обратите, пожалуйста, внимание, что вы не можете изменить тип фигуры. C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина,тип и непрозрачность линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен. Если вам нужно изменить размер элементов диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых квадратов , расположенных по периметру элемента. Чтобы изменить положение элемента, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши, убедитесь, что ваш курсор изменился на , удерживайте левую кнопку мыши и перетащите элемент в нужное положение. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выделите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Можно также поворачивать 3D-диаграммы с помощью мыши. Щелкните левой кнопкой мыши внутри области построения диаграммы и удерживайте кнопку мыши. Не отпуская кнопку мыши, перетащите курсор, чтобы изменить ориентацию 3D-диаграммы. Изменение параметров диаграммы Размер, тип и стиль диаграммы, а также данные, используемые для построения диаграммы, можно изменить с помощью правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее активировать, щелкните по диаграмме и выберите значок Параметры диаграммы справа. Раздел Размер позволяет изменить ширину и/или высоту диаграммы. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон диаграммы. Раздел Изменить тип диаграммы позволяет изменить выбранный тип и/или стиль диаграммы с помощью соответствующего выпадающего меню. Для выбора нужного Стиля диаграммы используйте второе выпадающее меню в разделе Изменить тип диаграммы. Кнопка Изменить данные позволяет вызвать окно Редактор диаграмм и начать редактирование данных, как описано выше. Примечание: чтобы быстро вызвать окно Редактор диаграмм, можно также дважды щелкнуть мышью по диаграмме на слайде. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. Опция Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели позволяет открыть окно Диаграмма - дополнительные параметры, в котором можно настроить следующие параметры: На вкладке Положение можно задать следующие свойства: Размер - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту диаграммы. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон диаграммы. Позиция - задайте точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. Чтобы удалить добавленную диаграмму, щелкните по ней левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Чтобы узнать, как выровнять диаграмму на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько объектов, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", @@ -168,12 +178,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Вставка и настройка изображений", - "body": "Вставка изображения В онлайн-редакторе презентаций можно вставлять в презентацию изображения самых популярных форматов. Поддерживаются следующие форматы изображений: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Для добавления изображения на слайд: в списке слайдов слева выберите тот слайд, на который требуется добавить изображение, щелкните по значку Изображение на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов, для загрузки изображения выберите одну из следующих опций: при выборе опции Изображение из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть В онлайн-редакторе вы можете выбрать сразу несколько изображений. при выборе опции Изображение по URL откроется окно, в котором можно ввести веб-адрес нужного изображения, а затем нажать кнопку OK при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK после того как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер и положение. Вы также можете добавить изображение внутри текстовой рамки, нажав на кнопку Изображение из файла в ней и выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на компьютере, или используйте кнопку Изображение по URL и укажите URL-адрес изображения: Также можно добавить изображение в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Изменение параметров изображения Правая боковая панель активируется при щелчке по изображению левой кнопкой мыши и выборе значка Параметры изображения справа. Вкладка содержит следующие разделы: Размер - используется, чтобы просмотреть текущую Ширину и Высоту изображения или при необходимости восстановить Реальный размер изображения. Кнопка Обрезать используется, чтобы обрезать изображение. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать, чтобы активировать маркеры обрезки, которые появятся в углах изображения и в центре каждой его стороны. Вручную перетаскивайте маркеры, чтобы задать область обрезки. Вы можете навести курсор мыши на границу области обрезки, чтобы курсор превратился в значок , и перетащить область обрезки. Чтобы обрезать одну сторону, перетащите маркер, расположенный в центре этой стороны. Чтобы одновременно обрезать две смежных стороны, перетащите один из угловых маркеров. Чтобы равномерно обрезать две противоположные стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании маркера в центре одной из этих сторон. Чтобы равномерно обрезать все стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании любого углового маркера. Когда область обрезки будет задана, еще раз нажмите на кнопку Обрезать, или нажмите на клавишу Esc, или щелкните мышью за пределами области обрезки, чтобы применить изменения. После того, как область обрезки будет задана, также можно использовать опции Обрезать, Заливка и Вписать, доступные в выпадающем меню Обрезать. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать еще раз и выберите нужную опцию: При выборе опции Обрезать изображение будет заполнять определенную форму. Вы можете выбрать фигуру из галереи, которая открывается при наведении указателя мыши на опцию Обрезать по фигуре. Вы по-прежнему можете использовать опции Заливка и Вписать, чтобы настроить, как изображение будет соответствовать фигуре. При выборе опции Заливка центральная часть исходного изображения будет сохранена и использована в качестве заливки выбранной области обрезки, в то время как остальные части изображения будут удалены. При выборе опции Вписать размер изображения будет изменен, чтобы оно соответствовало высоте или ширине области обрезки. Никакие части исходного изображения не будут удалены, но внутри выбранной области обрезки могут появится пустые пространства. Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы загрузить другое изображение вместо текущего, выбрав нужный источник. Можно выбрать одну из опций: Из файла, Из хранилища или По URL. Опция Заменить изображение также доступна в контекстном меню, вызываемом правой кнопкой мыши. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз) Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину и цвет Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом. На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображеню. Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры изображения, щелкните по нему правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню опцию Дополнительные параметры изображения или щелкните по изображению левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств изображения: Вкладка Положение позволяет задать следующие свойства изображения: Размер - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту изображения. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон изображения. Чтобы восстановить реальный размер добавленного изображения, нажмите кнопку Реальный размер. Положение - задайте точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть изображение на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение. Чтобы удалить вставленное изображение, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Чтобы узнать, как выровнять изображение на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько изображений, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде." + "body": "Вставка изображения В онлайн-редакторе презентаций можно вставлять в презентацию изображения самых популярных форматов. Поддерживаются следующие форматы изображений: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Для добавления изображения на слайд: в списке слайдов слева выберите тот слайд, на который требуется добавить изображение, щелкните по значку Изображение на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов, для загрузки изображения выберите одну из следующих опций: при выборе опции Изображение из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть В онлайн-редакторе вы можете выбрать сразу несколько изображений. при выборе опции Изображение по URL откроется окно, в котором можно ввести веб-адрес нужного изображения, а затем нажать кнопку OK при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK после того как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер и положение. Вы можете сохранить изображение как рисунок на жестком диске с помощью пункта Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Вы также можете добавить изображение внутри текстовой рамки, нажав на кнопку Изображение из файла в ней и выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на компьютере, или используйте кнопку Изображение по URL и укажите URL-адрес изображения: Также можно добавить изображение в макет слайда. Для получения дополнительной информации вы можете обратиться к этой статье. Изменение параметров изображения Правая боковая панель активируется при щелчке по изображению левой кнопкой мыши и выборе значка Параметры изображения справа. Вкладка содержит следующие разделы: Размер - используется, чтобы просмотреть текущую Ширину и Высоту изображения или при необходимости восстановить Реальный размер изображения. Кнопка Обрезать используется, чтобы обрезать изображение. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать, чтобы активировать маркеры обрезки, которые появятся в углах изображения и в центре каждой его стороны. Вручную перетаскивайте маркеры, чтобы задать область обрезки. Вы можете навести курсор мыши на границу области обрезки, чтобы курсор превратился в значок , и перетащить область обрезки. Чтобы обрезать одну сторону, перетащите маркер, расположенный в центре этой стороны. Чтобы одновременно обрезать две смежных стороны, перетащите один из угловых маркеров. Чтобы равномерно обрезать две противоположные стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании маркера в центре одной из этих сторон. Чтобы равномерно обрезать все стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании любого углового маркера. Когда область обрезки будет задана, еще раз нажмите на кнопку Обрезать, или нажмите на клавишу Esc, или щелкните мышью за пределами области обрезки, чтобы применить изменения. После того, как область обрезки будет задана, также можно использовать опции Обрезать, Заливка и Вписать, доступные в выпадающем меню Обрезать. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать еще раз и выберите нужную опцию: При выборе опции Обрезать изображение будет заполнять определенную форму. Вы можете выбрать фигуру из галереи, которая открывается при наведении указателя мыши на опцию Обрезать по фигуре. Вы по-прежнему можете использовать опции Заливка и Вписать, чтобы настроить, как изображение будет соответствовать фигуре. При выборе опции Заливка центральная часть исходного изображения будет сохранена и использована в качестве заливки выбранной области обрезки, в то время как остальные части изображения будут удалены. При выборе опции Вписать размер изображения будет изменен, чтобы оно соответствовало высоте или ширине области обрезки. Никакие части исходного изображения не будут удалены, но внутри выбранной области обрезки могут появится пустые пространства. Заменить изображение - используется, чтобы загрузить другое изображение вместо текущего, выбрав нужный источник. Можно выбрать одну из опций: Из файла, Из хранилища или По URL. Опция Заменить изображение также доступна в контекстном меню, вызываемом правой кнопкой мыши. Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить изображение слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз) Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину, цвет и непрозрачность Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом. На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображеню. Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры изображения, щелкните по нему правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню опцию Дополнительные параметры изображения или щелкните по изображению левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств изображения: Вкладка Положение позволяет задать следующие свойства изображения: Размер - используйте эту опцию, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту изображения. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон изображения. Чтобы восстановить реальный размер добавленного изображения, нажмите кнопку Реальный размер. Положение - задайте точную позицию, используя поля По горизонтали и По вертикали, а также поле От, где доступны параметры Верхний левый угол и По центру. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть изображение на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение. Чтобы удалить вставленное изображение, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Чтобы узнать, как выровнять изображение на слайде или расположить в определенном порядке несколько изображений, обратитесь к разделу Выравнивание и упорядочивание объектов на слайде." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Вставка объектов SmartArt", - "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Вставляйте новые графические объекты SmartArt или редактируйте объекты SmartArt, добавленные с помощью сторонних редакторов. Чтобы вставить объект SmartArt, перейдите на вкладку Вставка, нажмите кнопку SmartArt, наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс, выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню. Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку объекта SmartArt. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: Доступные пункты меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона объекта SmartArt какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем объект SmartArt, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура объекта SmartArt. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Стиль обтекания - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать один из доступных стилей обтекания текстом - в тексте, вокруг рамки, по контуру, сквозное, сверху и снизу, перед текстом, за текстом. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью. Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры." + "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Вставляйте новые графические объекты SmartArt или редактируйте объекты SmartArt, добавленные с помощью сторонних редакторов. Чтобы вставить объект SmartArt, перейдите на вкладку Вставка, нажмите кнопку SmartArt, наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс, выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню. Вы можете сохранить объект SmartArt как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели: Обратите внимание, что настройки цвета, стиля и типа формы могут быть настроены индивидуально. Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку объекта SmartArt. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: Доступные пункты меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, Используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона объекта SmartArt какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем объект SmartArt, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура объекта SmartArt. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Для изменения непрозрачности контура введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь соответствующим ползунком. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью. Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", @@ -188,7 +198,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm", "title": "Как вставить текст в презентацию PowerPoint - ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Вставка и форматирование текста презентации Вставка текста Новый текст можно добавить тремя разными способами: Добавить фрагмент текста внутри соответствующей текстовой рамки, предусмотренной на макете слайда. Для этого установите курсор внутри текстовой рамки и напишите свой текст или вставьте его, используя сочетание клавиш Ctrl+V, вместо соответствующего текста по умолчанию. Добавить фрагмент текста в любом месте на слайде. Можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). В зависимости от требуемого типа текстового объекта можно сделать следующее: чтобы добавить текстовое поле, щелкните по значку Надпись на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из следующих опций: Вставить горизонтальную надпись или Вставить вертикальную надпись, затем щелкните там, где требуется поместить надпись, удерживайте кнопку мыши и перетаскивайте границу текстового поля, чтобы задать его размер. Когда вы отпустите кнопку мыши, в добавленном текстовом поле появится курсор, и вы сможете ввести свой текст. Примечание: надпись можно также вставить, если щелкнуть по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов и выбрать фигуру из группы Основные фигуры. чтобы добавить объект Text Art, щелкните по значку Text Art на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните по нужному шаблону стиля – объект Text Art будет добавлен в центре слайда. Выделите мышью стандартный текст внутри текстового поля и напишите вместо него свой текст. Добавить фрагмент текста внутри автофигуры. Выделите фигуру и начинайте печатать текст. Щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к слайду. Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним). Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку (у нее по умолчанию невидимые границы) с текстом внутри, а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста. Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален. Форматирование текстовых полей презентации Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии. чтобы изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры. чтобы изменить заливку, контур текстового поля, заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции. чтобы выровнять текстовое поле на слайде, повернуть или отразить поле, расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. чтобы создать колонки текста внутри текстового поля, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля, нажмите на пункт меню Дополнительные параметры фигуры и перейдите на вкладку Колонки в окне Фигура - дополнительные параметры. Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии. Примечание: форматирование текста можно изменить и в том случае, если выделено текстовое поле, а не сам текст. В этом случае любые изменения будут применены ко всему тексту в текстовом поле. Некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта (тип, размер, цвет и стили оформления шрифта) можно отдельно применить к предварительно выделенному фрагменту текста. Выравнивание текста внутри текстового поля Горизонтально текст выравнивается четырьмя способами: по левому краю, по правому краю, по центру или по ширине. Для этого: установите курсор в том месте, где требуется применить выравнивание (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), разверните список Горизонтальное выравнивание на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип выравнивания, который вы хотите применить: опция Выравнивание текста по левому краю позволяет выровнять текст по левому краю текстового поля (правый край остается невыровненным). опция Выравнивание текста по центру позволяет выровнять текст по центру текстового поля (правый и левый края остаются невыровненными). опция Выравнивание текста по правому краю позволяет выровнять текст по правому краю текстового поля (левый край остается невыровненным). опция Выравнивание текста по ширине позволяет выровнять текст как по левому, так и по правому краю текстового поля (выравнивание осуществляется за счет добавления дополнительных интервалов там, где это необходимо). Примечание: эти параметры также можно найти в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Вертикально текст выравнивается тремя способами: по верхнему краю, по середине или по нижнему краю. Для этого: установите курсор в том месте, где требуется применить выравнивание (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), разверните список Вертикальное выравнивание на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип выравнивания, который вы хотите применить: опция Выравнивание текста по верхнему краю позволяет выровнять текст по верхнему краю текстового поля. опция Выравнивание текста по середине позволяет выровнять текст по центру текстового поля. опция Выравнивание текста по нижнему краю позволяет выровнять текст по нижнему краю текстового поля. Изменение направления текста Чтобы повернуть текст внутри текстового поля, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Направление текста, а затем выберите один из доступных вариантов: Горизонтальное (выбран по умолчанию), Повернуть текст вниз (задает вертикальное направление, сверху вниз) или Повернуть текст вверх (задает вертикальное направление, снизу вверх). Настройка типа, размера, цвета шрифта и применение стилей оформления Можно выбрать тип, размер и цвет шрифта, а также применить различные стили оформления шрифта, используя соответствующие значки, расположенные на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Примечание: если необходимо применить форматирование к тексту, который уже есть в презентации, выделите его мышью или с помощью клавиатуры, а затем примените форматирование. Также можно поместить курсор мыши в нужное слово, чтобы применить форматирование только к этому слову. Шрифт Используется для выбора шрифта из списка доступных. Если требуемый шрифт отсутствует в списке, его можно скачать и установить в вашей операционной системе, после чего он будет доступен для использования в десктопной версии. Размер шрифта Используется для выбора предустановленного значения размера шрифта из выпадающего списка (доступны следующие стандартные значения: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 и 96). Также можно вручную ввести произвольное значение до 300 пунктов в поле ввода и нажать клавишу Enter. Увеличить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт крупнее при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Уменьшить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт мельче при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Изменить регистр Используется для изменения регистра шрифта. Как в предложениях. - регистр совпадает с обычным предложением. нижнеий регистр - все буквы маленькие. ВЕРХНИЙ РЕГИСТР - все буквы прописные. Каждое Слово С Прописной - каждое слово начинается с заглавной буквы. иЗМЕНИТЬ рЕГИСТР - поменять регистр выделенного текста или слова, в котором находится курсор мыши. Цвет выделения Используется для выделения отдельных предложений, фраз, слов или даже символов путем добавления цветовой полосы, имитирующей отчеркивание текста маркером. Можно выделить нужную часть текста, а потом нажать направленную вниз стрелку рядом с этим значком, чтобы выбрать цвет на палитре (этот набор цветов не зависит от выбранной Цветовой схемы и включает в себя 16 цветов), и этот цвет будет применен к выбранному тексту. Или же можно сначала выбрать цвет выделения, а потом начать выделять текст мышью - указатель мыши будет выглядеть так: - и появится возможность выделить несколько разных частей текста одну за другой. Чтобы остановить выделение текста, просто еще раз щелкните по значку. Для очистки цвета выделения воспользуйтесь опцией Без заливки. Цвет шрифта Используется для изменения цвета букв/символов в тексте. Для выбора цвета нажмите направленную вниз стрелку рядом со значком. Полужирный Используется для придания шрифту большей насыщенности. Курсив Используется для придания шрифту наклона вправо. Подчеркнутый Используется для подчеркивания текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачеркнутый Используется для зачеркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Надстрочные знаки Используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Подстрочные знаки Используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Задание междустрочного интервала и изменение отступов абзацев Можно задать высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце, а также поля между текущим и предыдущим или последующим абзацем. Для этого: установите курсор в пределах нужного абзаца, или выделите мышью несколько абзацев, используйте соответствующие поля вкладки Параметры текста на правой боковой панели, чтобы добиться нужного результата: Междустрочный интервал - задайте высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце. Вы можете выбрать одну из двух опций: множитель (устанавливает междустрочный интервал, который может быть выражен в числах больше 1), точно (устанавливает фиксированный междустрочный интервал). Необходимое значение можно указать в поле справа. Интервал между абзацами - задайте величину свободного пространства между абзацами. Перед - задайте величину свободного пространства перед абзацем. После - задайте величину свободного пространства после абзаца. Примечание: эти параметры также можно найти в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы быстро изменить междустрочный интервал в текущем абзаце, можно также использовать значок Междустрочный интервал на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выбрав нужное значение из списка: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, или 3.0 строки. Чтобы изменить смещение абзаца от левого края текстового поля, установите курсор в пределах нужного абзаца или выделите мышью несколько абзацев и используйте соответствующие значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов: Уменьшить отступ и Увеличить отступ . Изменение дополнительных параметров абзаца Чтобы открыть окно Абзац - Дополнительные параметры, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши и выберите в контекстном меню пункт Дополнительные параметры текста. Также можно установить курсор в пределах нужного абзаца - на правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры текста. Нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры. Откроется окно свойств абзаца: На вкладке Отступы и интервалы можно выполнить следующие действия: изменить тип выравнивания текста внутри абзаца, изменить отступы абзаца от внутренних полей текстового объекта, Слева - задайте смещение всего абзаца от левого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Справа - задайте смещение всего абзаца от правого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Первая строка - задайте отступ для первой строки абзаца, выбрав соответствующий пункт меню ((нет), Отступ, Выступ) и изменив числовое значение для Отступа или Выступа, заданное по умолчанию, изменить междустрочный интервал внутри абзаца. Чтобы задать отступы, можно также использовать горизонтальную линейку. Выделите нужный абзац или абзацы и перетащите маркеры отступов по линейке. Маркер отступа первой строки используется, чтобы задать смещение от левого внутреннего поля текстового объекта для первой строки абзаца. Маркер выступа используется, чтобы задать смещение от левого внутреннего поля текстового объекта для второй и всех последующих строк абзаца. Маркер отступа слева используется, чтобы задать смещение от левого внутреннего поля текстового объекта для всего абзаца. Маркер отступа справа используется, чтобы задать смещение абзаца от правого внутреннего поля текстового объекта. Примечание: если вы не видите линеек, перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Параметры представления в правом верхнем углу и снимите отметку с опции Скрыть линейки, чтобы отобразить их. Вкладка Шрифт содержит следующие параметры: Зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Двойное зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста двойной чертой, проведенной по буквам. Надстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Подстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Малые прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы строчными. Все прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы прописными. Межзнаковый интервал - используется, чтобы задать расстояние между символами. Увеличьте значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Разреженный интервал, или уменьшите значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Уплотненный интервал. Используйте кнопки со стрелками или введите нужное значение в поле ввода. Все изменения будут отображены в расположенном ниже поле предварительного просмотра. На вкладке Табуляция можно изменить позиции табуляции, то есть те позиции, куда переходит курсор при нажатии клавиши Tab на клавиатуре. Позиция табуляции По умолчанию имеет значение 2.54 см. Это значение можно уменьшить или увеличить, используя кнопки со стрелками или введя в поле нужное значение. Позиция - используется, чтобы задать пользовательские позиции табуляции. Введите в этом поле нужное значение, настройте его более точно, используя кнопки со стрелками, и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Пользовательская позиция табуляции будет добавлена в список в расположенном ниже поле. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы задать нужный тип выравнивания для каждой из позиций табуляции в расположенном выше списке. Выделите нужную позицию табуляции в списке, выберите в выпадающем списке Выравнивание опцию По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю и нажмите на кнопку Задать. По левому краю - выравнивает текст по левому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется вправо от позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . По центру - центрирует текст относительно позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . По правому краю - выравнивает текст по правому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется влево от позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . Для удаления позиций табуляции из списка выделите позицию табуляции и нажмите кнопку Удалить или Удалить все. Для установки позиций табуляции можно также использовать горизонтальную линейку: Выберите нужный тип позиции табуляции, нажав на кнопку в левом верхнем углу рабочей области: По левому краю , По центру , По правому краю . Щелкните по нижнему краю линейки в том месте, где требуется установить позицию табуляции. Для изменения местоположения позиции табуляции перетащите ее по линейке. Для удаления добавленной позиции табуляции перетащите ее за пределы линейки. Примечание: если вы не видите линеек, перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Параметры представления в правом верхнем углу и снимите отметку с опции Скрыть линейки, чтобы отобразить их. Изменение стиля объекта Text Art Выделите текстовый объект и щелкните по значку Параметры объектов Text Art на правой боковой панели. Измените примененный стиль текста, выбрав из галереи новый Шаблон. Можно также дополнительно изменить этот базовый стиль, выбрав другой тип, размер шрифта и т.д. Измените заливку и контур шрифта. Доступны точно такие же опции, как и для автофигур. Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба." + "body": "Вставка и форматирование текста презентации Вставка текста В Редакторе презентаций новый текст можно добавить тремя разными способами: Добавить фрагмент текста внутри соответствующей текстовой рамки, предусмотренной на макете слайда. Для этого установите курсор внутри текстовой рамки и напишите свой текст или вставьте его, используя сочетание клавиш Ctrl+V, вместо соответствующего текста по умолчанию. Добавить фрагмент текста в любом месте на слайде. Можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). В зависимости от требуемого типа текстового объекта можно сделать следующее: чтобы добавить текстовое поле, щелкните по значку Надпись на вкладке Главная или Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из следующих опций: Вставить горизонтальную надпись или Вставить вертикальную надпись, затем щелкните там, где требуется поместить надпись, удерживайте кнопку мыши и перетаскивайте границу текстового поля, чтобы задать его размер. Когда вы отпустите кнопку мыши, в добавленном текстовом поле появится курсор, и вы сможете ввести свой текст. Примечание: надпись можно также вставить, если щелкнуть по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов и выбрать фигуру из группы Основные фигуры. чтобы добавить объект Text Art, щелкните по значку Text Art на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните по нужному шаблону стиля – объект Text Art будет добавлен в центре слайда. Выделите мышью стандартный текст внутри текстового поля и напишите вместо него свой текст. Добавить фрагмент текста внутри автофигуры. Выделите фигуру и начинайте печатать текст. Щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к слайду. Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним). Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку (у нее по умолчанию невидимые границы) с текстом внутри, а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста. Вы можете сохранить текстовый объект как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален. Форматирование текстовых полей презентации Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии. чтобы изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры. чтобы изменить заливку, контур текстового поля, заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции. чтобы выровнять текстовое поле на слайде, повернуть или отразить поле, расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. чтобы создать колонки текста внутри текстового поля, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля, нажмите на пункт меню Дополнительные параметры фигуры и перейдите на вкладку Колонки в окне Фигура - дополнительные параметры. Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии. Примечание: форматирование текста можно изменить и в том случае, если выделено текстовое поле, а не сам текст. В этом случае любые изменения будут применены ко всему тексту в текстовом поле. Некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта (тип, размер, цвет и стили оформления шрифта) можно отдельно применить к предварительно выделенному фрагменту текста. Выравнивание текста внутри текстового поля Горизонтально текст выравнивается четырьмя способами: по левому краю, по правому краю, по центру или по ширине. Для этого: установите курсор в том месте, где требуется применить выравнивание (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), разверните список Горизонтальное выравнивание на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип выравнивания, который вы хотите применить: опция Выравнивание текста по левому краю позволяет выровнять текст по левому краю текстового поля (правый край остается невыровненным). опция Выравнивание текста по центру позволяет выровнять текст по центру текстового поля (правый и левый края остаются невыровненными). опция Выравнивание текста по правому краю позволяет выровнять текст по правому краю текстового поля (левый край остается невыровненным). опция Выравнивание текста по ширине позволяет выровнять текст как по левому, так и по правому краю текстового поля (выравнивание осуществляется за счет добавления дополнительных интервалов там, где это необходимо). Примечание: эти параметры также можно найти в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Вертикально текст выравнивается тремя способами: по верхнему краю, по середине или по нижнему краю. Для этого: установите курсор в том месте, где требуется применить выравнивание (это может быть новая строка или уже введенный текст), разверните список Вертикальное выравнивание на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите тип выравнивания, который вы хотите применить: опция Выравнивание текста по верхнему краю позволяет выровнять текст по верхнему краю текстового поля. опция Выравнивание текста по середине позволяет выровнять текст по центру текстового поля. опция Выравнивание текста по нижнему краю позволяет выровнять текст по нижнему краю текстового поля. Изменение направления текста Чтобы повернуть текст внутри текстового поля, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Направление текста, а затем выберите один из доступных вариантов: Горизонтальное (выбран по умолчанию), Повернуть текст вниз (задает вертикальное направление, сверху вниз) или Повернуть текст вверх (задает вертикальное направление, снизу вверх). Настройка типа, размера, цвета шрифта и применение стилей оформления Можно выбрать тип, размер и цвет шрифта, а также применить различные стили оформления шрифта, используя соответствующие значки, расположенные на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Примечание: если необходимо применить форматирование к тексту, который уже есть в презентации, выделите его мышью или с помощью клавиатуры, а затем примените форматирование. Также можно поместить курсор мыши в нужное слово, чтобы применить форматирование только к этому слову. Шрифт Используется для выбора шрифта из списка доступных. Если требуемый шрифт отсутствует в списке, его можно скачать и установить в вашей операционной системе, после чего он будет доступен для использования в десктопной версии. Размер шрифта Используется для выбора предустановленного значения размера шрифта из выпадающего списка (доступны следующие стандартные значения: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 и 96). Также можно вручную ввести произвольное значение до 300 пунктов в поле ввода и нажать клавишу Enter. Увеличить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт крупнее при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Уменьшить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт мельче при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Изменить регистр Используется для изменения регистра шрифта. Как в предложениях. - регистр совпадает с обычным предложением. нижнеий регистр - все буквы маленькие. ВЕРХНИЙ РЕГИСТР - все буквы прописные. Каждое Слово С Прописной - каждое слово начинается с заглавной буквы. иЗМЕНИТЬ рЕГИСТР - поменять регистр выделенного текста или слова, в котором находится курсор мыши. Цвет выделения Используется для выделения отдельных предложений, фраз, слов или даже символов путем добавления цветовой полосы, имитирующей отчеркивание текста маркером. Можно выделить нужную часть текста, а потом нажать направленную вниз стрелку рядом с этим значком, чтобы выбрать цвет на палитре (этот набор цветов не зависит от выбранной Цветовой схемы и включает в себя 16 цветов), и этот цвет будет применен к выбранному тексту. Или же можно сначала выбрать цвет выделения, а потом начать выделять текст мышью - указатель мыши будет выглядеть так: - и появится возможность выделить несколько разных частей текста одну за другой. Чтобы остановить выделение текста, просто еще раз щелкните по значку. Для очистки цвета выделения воспользуйтесь опцией Без заливки. Цвет шрифта Используется для изменения цвета букв/символов в тексте. Для выбора цвета нажмите направленную вниз стрелку рядом со значком. Полужирный Используется для придания шрифту большей насыщенности. Курсив Используется для придания шрифту наклона вправо. Подчеркнутый Используется для подчеркивания текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачеркнутый Используется для зачеркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Надстрочные знаки Используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Подстрочные знаки Используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Задание междустрочного интервала и изменение отступов абзацев Можно задать высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце, а также поля между текущим и предыдущим или последующим абзацем. Для этого: установите курсор в пределах нужного абзаца, или выделите мышью несколько абзацев, используйте соответствующие поля вкладки Параметры текста на правой боковой панели, чтобы добиться нужного результата: Междустрочный интервал - задайте высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце. Вы можете выбрать одну из двух опций: множитель (устанавливает междустрочный интервал, который может быть выражен в числах больше 1), точно (устанавливает фиксированный междустрочный интервал). Необходимое значение можно указать в поле справа. Интервал между абзацами - задайте величину свободного пространства между абзацами. Перед - задайте величину свободного пространства перед абзацем. После - задайте величину свободного пространства после абзаца. Примечание: эти параметры также можно найти в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы быстро изменить междустрочный интервал в текущем абзаце, можно также использовать значок Междустрочный интервал на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выбрав нужное значение из списка: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, или 3.0 строки. Чтобы изменить смещение абзаца от левого края текстового поля, установите курсор в пределах нужного абзаца или выделите мышью несколько абзацев и используйте соответствующие значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов: Уменьшить отступ и Увеличить отступ . Изменение дополнительных параметров абзаца Чтобы открыть окно Абзац - Дополнительные параметры, щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши и выберите в контекстном меню пункт Дополнительные параметры текста. Также можно установить курсор в пределах нужного абзаца - на правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры текста. Нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры. Откроется окно свойств абзаца: На вкладке Отступы и интервалы можно выполнить следующие действия: изменить тип выравнивания текста внутри абзаца, изменить отступы абзаца от внутренних полей текстового объекта, Слева - задайте смещение всего абзаца от левого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Справа - задайте смещение всего абзаца от правого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Первая строка - задайте отступ для первой строки абзаца, выбрав соответствующий пункт меню ((нет), Отступ, Выступ) и изменив числовое значение для Отступа или Выступа, заданное по умолчанию, изменить междустрочный интервал внутри абзаца. Чтобы задать отступы, можно также использовать горизонтальную линейку. Выделите нужный абзац или абзацы и перетащите маркеры отступов по линейке. Маркер отступа первой строки используется, чтобы задать смещение от левого внутреннего поля текстового объекта для первой строки абзаца. Маркер выступа используется, чтобы задать смещение от левого внутреннего поля текстового объекта для второй и всех последующих строк абзаца. Маркер отступа слева используется, чтобы задать смещение от левого внутреннего поля текстового объекта для всего абзаца. Маркер отступа справа используется, чтобы задать смещение абзаца от правого внутреннего поля текстового объекта. Примечание: если вы не видите линеек, перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Параметры представления в правом верхнем углу и снимите отметку с опции Скрыть линейки, чтобы отобразить их. Вкладка Шрифт содержит следующие параметры: Зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Двойное зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста двойной чертой, проведенной по буквам. Надстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Подстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Малые прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы строчными. Все прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы прописными. Межзнаковый интервал - используется, чтобы задать расстояние между символами. Увеличьте значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Разреженный интервал, или уменьшите значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Уплотненный интервал. Используйте кнопки со стрелками или введите нужное значение в поле ввода. Все изменения будут отображены в расположенном ниже поле предварительного просмотра. На вкладке Табуляция можно изменить позиции табуляции, то есть те позиции, куда переходит курсор при нажатии клавиши Tab на клавиатуре. Позиция табуляции По умолчанию имеет значение 2.54 см. Это значение можно уменьшить или увеличить, используя кнопки со стрелками или введя в поле нужное значение. Позиция - используется, чтобы задать пользовательские позиции табуляции. Введите в этом поле нужное значение, настройте его более точно, используя кнопки со стрелками, и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Пользовательская позиция табуляции будет добавлена в список в расположенном ниже поле. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы задать нужный тип выравнивания для каждой из позиций табуляции в расположенном выше списке. Выделите нужную позицию табуляции в списке, выберите в выпадающем списке Выравнивание опцию По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю и нажмите на кнопку Задать. По левому краю - выравнивает текст по левому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется вправо от позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . По центру - центрирует текст относительно позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . По правому краю - выравнивает текст по правому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется влево от позиции табуляции. Такая позиция табуляции будет обозначена на горизонтальной линейке маркером . Для удаления позиций табуляции из списка выделите позицию табуляции и нажмите кнопку Удалить или Удалить все. Для установки позиций табуляции можно также использовать горизонтальную линейку: Выберите нужный тип позиции табуляции, нажав на кнопку в левом верхнем углу рабочей области: По левому краю , По центру , По правому краю . Щелкните по нижнему краю линейки в том месте, где требуется установить позицию табуляции. Для изменения местоположения позиции табуляции перетащите ее по линейке. Для удаления добавленной позиции табуляции перетащите ее за пределы линейки. Примечание: если вы не видите линеек, перейдите на вкладку Главная верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Параметры представления в правом верхнем углу и снимите отметку с опции Скрыть линейки, чтобы отобразить их. Изменение стиля объекта Text Art Выделите текстовый объект и щелкните по значку Параметры объектов Text Art на правой боковой панели. Измените примененный стиль текста, выбрав из галереи новый Шаблон. Можно также дополнительно изменить этот базовый стиль, выбрав другой тип, размер шрифта и т.д. Измените заливку и контур шрифта. Доступны точно такие же опции, как и для автофигур. Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm", @@ -203,7 +213,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "Функции автозамены", - "body": "Функции автозамены используются для автоматического форматирования текста при обнаружении или вставки специальных математических символов путем распознавания определенных символов. Доступные параметры автозамены перечислены в соответствующем диалоговом окне. Чтобы его открыть, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены. Диалоговое окно Автозамена содержит четыре вкладки: Автозамена математическими символами, Распознанные функции, Автоформат при вводе и Автозамена. Автозамена математическими символами При работе с уравнениями множество символов, диакритических знаков и знаков математических действий можно добавить путем ввода с клавиатуры, а не выбирая шаблон из коллекции. В редакторе уравнений установите курсор в нужном поле для ввода, введите специальный код и нажмите Пробел. Введенный код будет преобразован в соответствующий символ, а пробел будет удален. Примечание: коды чувствительны к регистру. Вы можете добавлять, изменять, восстанавливать и удалять записи автозамены из списка автозамены. Перейдите во вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Чтобы добавить запись в список автозамены, Введите код автозамены, который хотите использовать, в поле Заменить. Введите символ, который будет присвоен введенному вами коду, в поле На. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы изменить запись в списке автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите изменить. Вы можете изменить информацию в полях Заменить для кода и На для символа. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите удалить. Щелкните на кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите из списка запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами запись автозамены будет удалена, а измененные значения будут восстановлены до их исходных значений. Чтобы отключить автозамену математическими символами и избежать автоматических изменений и замен, снимите флажок Заменять текст при вводе. В таблице ниже приведены все поддерживаемые в настоящее время коды, доступные в Редакторе презентаций. Полный список поддерживаемых кодов также можно найти на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительыне параметры... -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Поддерживаемые коды Код Символ Категория !! Символы ... Точки :: Операторы := Операторы /< Операторы отношения /> Операторы отношения /= Операторы отношения \\above Символы Above/Below \\acute Акценты \\aleph Буквы иврита \\alpha Греческие буквы \\Alpha Греческие буквы \\amalg Бинарные операторы \\angle Геометрические обозначения \\aoint Интегралы \\approx Операторы отношений \\asmash Стрелки \\ast Бинарные операторы \\asymp Операторы отношений \\atop Операторы \\bar Черта сверху/снизу \\Bar Акценты \\because Операторы отношений \\begin Разделители \\below Символы Above/Below \\bet Буквы иврита \\beta Греческие буквы \\Beta Греческие буквы \\beth Буквы иврита \\bigcap Крупные операторы \\bigcup Крупные операторы \\bigodot Крупные операторы \\bigoplus Крупные операторы \\bigotimes Крупные операторы \\bigsqcup Крупные операторы \\biguplus Крупные операторы \\bigvee Крупные операторы \\bigwedge Крупные операторы \\binomial Уравнения \\bot Логические обозначения \\bowtie Операторы отношений \\box Символы \\boxdot Бинарные операторы \\boxminus Бинарные операторы \\boxplus Бинарные операторы \\bra Разделители \\break Символы \\breve Акценты \\bullet Бинарные операторы \\cap Бинарные операторы \\cbrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\cases Символы \\cdot Бинарные операторы \\cdots Точки \\check Акценты \\chi Греческие буквы \\Chi Греческие буквы \\circ Бинарные операторы \\close Разделители \\clubsuit Символы \\coint Интегралы \\cong Операторы отношений \\coprod Математические операторы \\cup Бинарные операторы \\dalet Буквы иврита \\daleth Буквы иврита \\dashv Операторы отношений \\dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\Dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\ddddot Акценты \\dddot Акценты \\ddot Акценты \\ddots Точки \\defeq Операторы отношений \\degc Символы \\degf Символы \\degree Символы \\delta Греческие буквы \\Delta Греческие буквы \\Deltaeq Операторы \\diamond Бинарные операторы \\diamondsuit Символы \\div Бинарные операторы \\dot Акценты \\doteq Операторы отношений \\dots Точки \\doublea Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleA Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleb Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleB Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublec Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleC Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubled Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleD Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublee Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleE Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublef Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleF Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleg Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleG Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleh Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleH Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublei Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleI Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublej Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleJ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublek Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleK Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublel Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleL Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublem Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleM Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublen Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleN Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleo Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleO Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublep Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleP Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleq Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleQ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubler Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleR Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubles Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleS Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublet Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleT Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleu Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleU Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublev Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleV Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublew Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleW Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublex Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleX Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubley Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleY Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublez Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleZ Дважды начерченные буквы \\downarrow Стрелки \\Downarrow Стрелки \\dsmash Стрелки \\ee Дважды начерченные буквы \\ell Символы \\emptyset Обозначения множествs \\emsp Знаки пробела \\end Разделители \\ensp Знаки пробела \\epsilon Греческие буквы \\Epsilon Греческие буквы \\eqarray Символы \\equiv Операторы отношений \\eta Греческие буквы \\Eta Греческие буквы \\exists Логические обозначенияs \\forall Логические обозначенияs \\fraktura Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturA Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturb Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturB Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturc Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturC Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturd Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturD Буквы готического шрифта \\frakture Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturE Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturf Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturF Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturg Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturG Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturh Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturH Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturi Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturI Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturk Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturK Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturl Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturL Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturm Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturM Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturn Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturN Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturo Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturO Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturp Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturP Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturq Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturQ Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturr Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturR Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturs Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturS Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturt Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturT Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturu Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturU Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturv Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturV Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturw Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturW Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturx Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturX Буквы готического шрифта \\fraktury Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturY Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturz Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturZ Буквы готического шрифта \\frown Операторы отношений \\funcapply Бинарные операторы \\G Греческие буквы \\gamma Греческие буквы \\Gamma Греческие буквы \\ge Операторы отношений \\geq Операторы отношений \\gets Стрелки \\gg Операторы отношений \\gimel Буквы иврита \\grave Акценты \\hairsp Знаки пробела \\hat Акценты \\hbar Символы \\heartsuit Символы \\hookleftarrow Стрелки \\hookrightarrow Стрелки \\hphantom Стрелки \\hsmash Стрелки \\hvec Акценты \\identitymatrix Матрицы \\ii Дважды начерченные буквы \\iiint Интегралы \\iint Интегралы \\iiiint Интегралы \\Im Символы \\imath Символы \\in Операторы отношений \\inc Символы \\infty Символы \\int Интегралы \\integral Интегралы \\iota Греческие буквы \\Iota Греческие буквы \\itimes Математические операторы \\j Символы \\jj Дважды начерченные буквы \\jmath Символы \\kappa Греческие буквы \\Kappa Греческие буквы \\ket Разделители \\lambda Греческие буквы \\Lambda Греческие буквы \\langle Разделители \\lbbrack Разделители \\lbrace Разделители \\lbrack Разделители \\lceil Разделители \\ldiv Дробная черта \\ldivide Дробная черта \\ldots Точки \\le Операторы отношений \\left Разделители \\leftarrow Стрелки \\Leftarrow Стрелки \\leftharpoondown Стрелки \\leftharpoonup Стрелки \\leftrightarrow Стрелки \\Leftrightarrow Стрелки \\leq Операторы отношений \\lfloor Разделители \\lhvec Акценты \\limit Лимиты \\ll Операторы отношений \\lmoust Разделители \\Longleftarrow Стрелки \\Longleftrightarrow Стрелки \\Longrightarrow Стрелки \\lrhar Стрелки \\lvec Акценты \\mapsto Стрелки \\matrix Матрицы \\medsp Знаки пробела \\mid Операторы отношений \\middle Символы \\models Операторы отношений \\mp Бинарные операторы \\mu Греческие буквы \\Mu Греческие буквы \\nabla Символы \\naryand Операторы \\nbsp Знаки пробела \\ne Операторы отношений \\nearrow Стрелки \\neq Операторы отношений \\ni Операторы отношений \\norm Разделители \\notcontain Операторы отношений \\notelement Операторы отношений \\notin Операторы отношений \\nu Греческие буквы \\Nu Греческие буквы \\nwarrow Стрелки \\o Греческие буквы \\O Греческие буквы \\odot Бинарные операторы \\of Операторы \\oiiint Интегралы \\oiint Интегралы \\oint Интегралы \\omega Греческие буквы \\Omega Греческие буквы \\ominus Бинарные операторы \\open Разделители \\oplus Бинарные операторы \\otimes Бинарные операторы \\over Разделители \\overbar Акценты \\overbrace Акценты \\overbracket Акценты \\overline Акценты \\overparen Акценты \\overshell Акценты \\parallel Геометрические обозначения \\partial Символы \\pmatrix Матрицы \\perp Геометрические обозначения \\phantom Символы \\phi Греческие буквы \\Phi Греческие буквы \\pi Греческие буквы \\Pi Греческие буквы \\pm Бинарные операторы \\pppprime Штрихи \\ppprime Штрихи \\pprime Штрихи \\prec Операторы отношений \\preceq Операторы отношений \\prime Штрихи \\prod Математические операторы \\propto Операторы отношений \\psi Греческие буквы \\Psi Греческие буквы \\qdrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\quadratic Квадратные корни и радикалы \\rangle Разделители \\Rangle Разделители \\ratio Операторы отношений \\rbrace Разделители \\rbrack Разделители \\Rbrack Разделители \\rceil Разделители \\rddots Точки \\Re Символы \\rect Символы \\rfloor Разделители \\rho Греческие буквы \\Rho Греческие буквы \\rhvec Акценты \\right Разделители \\rightarrow Стрелки \\Rightarrow Стрелки \\rightharpoondown Стрелки \\rightharpoonup Стрелки \\rmoust Разделители \\root Символы \\scripta Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptA Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptb Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptB Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptc Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptC Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptd Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptD Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripte Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptE Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptf Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptF Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptg Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptG Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripth Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptH Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripti Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptI Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptk Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptK Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptl Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptL Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptm Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptM Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptn Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptN Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripto Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptO Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptp Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptP Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptq Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptQ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptr Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptR Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripts Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptS Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptt Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptT Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptu Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptU Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptv Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptV Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptw Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptW Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptx Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptX Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripty Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptY Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptz Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptZ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\sdiv Дробная черта \\sdivide Дробная черта \\searrow Стрелки \\setminus Бинарные операторы \\sigma Греческие буквы \\Sigma Греческие буквы \\sim Операторы отношений \\simeq Операторы отношений \\smash Стрелки \\smile Операторы отношений \\spadesuit Символы \\sqcap Бинарные операторы \\sqcup Бинарные операторы \\sqrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\sqsubseteq Обозначения множеств \\sqsuperseteq Обозначения множеств \\star Бинарные операторы \\subset Обозначения множеств \\subseteq Обозначения множеств \\succ Операторы отношений \\succeq Операторы отношений \\sum Математические операторы \\superset Обозначения множеств \\superseteq Обозначения множеств \\swarrow Стрелки \\tau Греческие буквы \\Tau Греческие буквы \\therefore Операторы отношений \\theta Греческие буквы \\Theta Греческие буквы \\thicksp Знаки пробела \\thinsp Знаки пробела \\tilde Акценты \\times Бинарные операторы \\to Стрелки \\top Логические обозначения \\tvec Стрелки \\ubar Акценты \\Ubar Акценты \\underbar Акценты \\underbrace Акценты \\underbracket Акценты \\underline Акценты \\underparen Акценты \\uparrow Стрелки \\Uparrow Стрелки \\updownarrow Стрелки \\Updownarrow Стрелки \\uplus Бинарные операторы \\upsilon Греческие буквы \\Upsilon Греческие буквы \\varepsilon Греческие буквы \\varphi Греческие буквы \\varpi Греческие буквы \\varrho Греческие буквы \\varsigma Греческие буквы \\vartheta Греческие буквы \\vbar Разделители \\vdash Операторы отношений \\vdots Точки \\vec Акценты \\vee Бинарные операторы \\vert Разделители \\Vert Разделители \\Vmatrix Матрицы \\vphantom Стрелки \\vthicksp Знаки пробела \\wedge Бинарные операторы \\wp Символы \\wr Бинарные операторы \\xi Греческие буквы \\Xi Греческие буквы \\zeta Греческие буквы \\Zeta Греческие буквы \\zwnj Знаки пробела \\zwsp Знаки пробела ~= Операторы отношений -+ Бинарные операторы +- Бинарные операторы << Операторы отношений <= Операторы отношений -> Стрелки >= Операторы отношений >> Операторы отношений Распознанные функции На этой вкладке вы найдете список математических выражений, которые будут распознаваться редактором формул как функции и поэтому не будут автоматически выделены курсивом. Чтобы просмотреть список распознанных функций, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Распознанные функции. Чтобы добавить запись в список распознаваемых функций, введите функцию в пустое поле и нажмите кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка распознанных функций, выберите функцию, которую нужно удалить, и нажмите кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите в списке запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами функция будет удалена, а удаленные - восстановлены. Автоформат при вводе По умолчанию, редактор применяет форматирование во время набора текста в соответствии с предустановками автоматического форматирования: заменяет кавычки, автоматически запускает маркированный список или нумерованный список при обнаружении списка и заменяет кавычки или преобразует дефисы в тире. Опция Добавлять точку двойным пробелом по умолчанию отключена. Включите данную опцию, если хотите, чтобы точка автоматически добавлялась при двойном нажатии клавиши пробела. Чтобы включить или отключить предустановки автоматического форматирования, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Проверка правописания -> Параметры автозамены -> Автоформат при вводе. Автозамена текста Вы можете настроить редактор на автоматическое использование заглавной буквы в каждом предложении. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить эту функцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена текста и снимите флажок с Делать первые буквы предложений прописными." + "body": "Функции автозамены используются для автоматического форматирования текста при обнаружении или вставки специальных математических символов путем распознавания определенных символов. Доступные параметры автозамены перечислены в соответствующем диалоговом окне. Чтобы его открыть, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены. Диалоговое окно Автозамена содержит четыре вкладки: Автозамена математическими символами, Распознанные функции, Автоформат при вводе и Автозамена. Автозамена математическими символами При работе с уравнениями множество символов, диакритических знаков и знаков математических действий можно добавить путем ввода с клавиатуры, а не выбирая шаблон из коллекции. В редакторе уравнений установите курсор в нужном поле для ввода, введите специальный код и нажмите Пробел. Введенный код будет преобразован в соответствующий символ, а пробел будет удален. Примечание: коды чувствительны к регистру. Вы можете добавлять, изменять, восстанавливать и удалять записи автозамены из списка автозамены. Перейдите во вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Чтобы добавить запись в список автозамены, Введите код автозамены, который хотите использовать, в поле Заменить. Введите символ, который будет присвоен введенному вами коду, в поле На. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы изменить запись в списке автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите изменить. Вы можете изменить информацию в полях Заменить для кода и На для символа. Щелкните на кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка автозамены, Выберите запись, которую хотите удалить. Щелкните на кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите из списка запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами запись автозамены будет удалена, а измененные значения будут восстановлены до их исходных значений. Чтобы отключить автозамену математическими символами и избежать автоматических изменений и замен, снимите флажок Заменять текст при вводе. В таблице ниже приведены все поддерживаемые в настоящее время коды, доступные в Редакторе презентаций. Полный список поддерживаемых кодов также можно найти на вкладке Файл -> Дополнительыне параметры... -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена математическими символами. Поддерживаемые коды Код Символ Категория !! Символы ... Точки :: Операторы := Операторы /< Операторы отношения /> Операторы отношения /= Операторы отношения \\above Символы Above/Below \\acute Акценты \\aleph Буквы иврита \\alpha Греческие буквы \\Alpha Греческие буквы \\amalg Бинарные операторы \\angle Геометрические обозначения \\aoint Интегралы \\approx Операторы отношений \\asmash Стрелки \\ast Бинарные операторы \\asymp Операторы отношений \\atop Операторы \\bar Черта сверху/снизу \\Bar Акценты \\because Операторы отношений \\begin Разделители \\below Символы Above/Below \\bet Буквы иврита \\beta Греческие буквы \\Beta Греческие буквы \\beth Буквы иврита \\bigcap Крупные операторы \\bigcup Крупные операторы \\bigodot Крупные операторы \\bigoplus Крупные операторы \\bigotimes Крупные операторы \\bigsqcup Крупные операторы \\biguplus Крупные операторы \\bigvee Крупные операторы \\bigwedge Крупные операторы \\binomial Уравнения \\bot Логические обозначения \\bowtie Операторы отношений \\box Символы \\boxdot Бинарные операторы \\boxminus Бинарные операторы \\boxplus Бинарные операторы \\bra Разделители \\break Символы \\breve Акценты \\bullet Бинарные операторы \\cap Бинарные операторы \\cbrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\cases Символы \\cdot Бинарные операторы \\cdots Точки \\check Акценты \\chi Греческие буквы \\Chi Греческие буквы \\circ Бинарные операторы \\close Разделители \\clubsuit Символы \\coint Интегралы \\cong Операторы отношений \\coprod Математические операторы \\cup Бинарные операторы \\dalet Буквы иврита \\daleth Буквы иврита \\dashv Операторы отношений \\dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\Dd Дважды начерченные буквы \\ddddot Акценты \\dddot Акценты \\ddot Акценты \\ddots Точки \\defeq Операторы отношений \\degc Символы \\degf Символы \\degree Символы \\delta Греческие буквы \\Delta Греческие буквы \\Deltaeq Операторы \\diamond Бинарные операторы \\diamondsuit Символы \\div Бинарные операторы \\dot Акценты \\doteq Операторы отношений \\dots Точки \\doublea Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleA Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleb Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleB Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublec Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleC Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubled Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleD Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublee Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleE Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublef Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleF Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleg Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleG Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleh Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleH Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublei Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleI Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublej Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleJ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublek Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleK Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublel Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleL Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublem Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleM Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublen Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleN Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleo Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleO Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublep Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleP Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleq Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleQ Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubler Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleR Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubles Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleS Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublet Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleT Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleu Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleU Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublev Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleV Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublew Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleW Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublex Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleX Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubley Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleY Дважды начерченные буквы \\doublez Дважды начерченные буквы \\doubleZ Дважды начерченные буквы \\downarrow Стрелки \\Downarrow Стрелки \\dsmash Стрелки \\ee Дважды начерченные буквы \\ell Символы \\emptyset Обозначения множествs \\emsp Знаки пробела \\end Разделители \\ensp Знаки пробела \\epsilon Греческие буквы \\Epsilon Греческие буквы \\eqarray Символы \\equiv Операторы отношений \\eta Греческие буквы \\Eta Греческие буквы \\exists Логические обозначенияs \\forall Логические обозначенияs \\fraktura Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturA Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturb Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturB Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturc Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturC Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturd Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturD Буквы готического шрифта \\frakture Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturE Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturf Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturF Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturg Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturG Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturh Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturH Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturi Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturI Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturk Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturK Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturl Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturL Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturm Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturM Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturn Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturN Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturo Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturO Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturp Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturP Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturq Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturQ Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturr Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturR Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturs Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturS Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturt Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturT Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturu Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturU Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturv Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturV Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturw Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturW Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturx Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturX Буквы готического шрифта \\fraktury Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturY Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturz Буквы готического шрифта \\frakturZ Буквы готического шрифта \\frown Операторы отношений \\funcapply Бинарные операторы \\G Греческие буквы \\gamma Греческие буквы \\Gamma Греческие буквы \\ge Операторы отношений \\geq Операторы отношений \\gets Стрелки \\gg Операторы отношений \\gimel Буквы иврита \\grave Акценты \\hairsp Знаки пробела \\hat Акценты \\hbar Символы \\heartsuit Символы \\hookleftarrow Стрелки \\hookrightarrow Стрелки \\hphantom Стрелки \\hsmash Стрелки \\hvec Акценты \\identitymatrix Матрицы \\ii Дважды начерченные буквы \\iiint Интегралы \\iint Интегралы \\iiiint Интегралы \\Im Символы \\imath Символы \\in Операторы отношений \\inc Символы \\infty Символы \\int Интегралы \\integral Интегралы \\iota Греческие буквы \\Iota Греческие буквы \\itimes Математические операторы \\j Символы \\jj Дважды начерченные буквы \\jmath Символы \\kappa Греческие буквы \\Kappa Греческие буквы \\ket Разделители \\lambda Греческие буквы \\Lambda Греческие буквы \\langle Разделители \\lbbrack Разделители \\lbrace Разделители \\lbrack Разделители \\lceil Разделители \\ldiv Дробная черта \\ldivide Дробная черта \\ldots Точки \\le Операторы отношений \\left Разделители \\leftarrow Стрелки \\Leftarrow Стрелки \\leftharpoondown Стрелки \\leftharpoonup Стрелки \\leftrightarrow Стрелки \\Leftrightarrow Стрелки \\leq Операторы отношений \\lfloor Разделители \\lhvec Акценты \\limit Лимиты \\ll Операторы отношений \\lmoust Разделители \\Longleftarrow Стрелки \\Longleftrightarrow Стрелки \\Longrightarrow Стрелки \\lrhar Стрелки \\lvec Акценты \\mapsto Стрелки \\matrix Матрицы \\medsp Знаки пробела \\mid Операторы отношений \\middle Символы \\models Операторы отношений \\mp Бинарные операторы \\mu Греческие буквы \\Mu Греческие буквы \\nabla Символы \\naryand Операторы \\nbsp Знаки пробела \\ne Операторы отношений \\nearrow Стрелки \\neq Операторы отношений \\ni Операторы отношений \\norm Разделители \\notcontain Операторы отношений \\notelement Операторы отношений \\notin Операторы отношений \\nu Греческие буквы \\Nu Греческие буквы \\nwarrow Стрелки \\o Греческие буквы \\O Греческие буквы \\odot Бинарные операторы \\of Операторы \\oiiint Интегралы \\oiint Интегралы \\oint Интегралы \\omega Греческие буквы \\Omega Греческие буквы \\ominus Бинарные операторы \\open Разделители \\oplus Бинарные операторы \\otimes Бинарные операторы \\over Разделители \\overbar Акценты \\overbrace Акценты \\overbracket Акценты \\overline Акценты \\overparen Акценты \\overshell Акценты \\parallel Геометрические обозначения \\partial Символы \\pmatrix Матрицы \\perp Геометрические обозначения \\phantom Символы \\phi Греческие буквы \\Phi Греческие буквы \\pi Греческие буквы \\Pi Греческие буквы \\pm Бинарные операторы \\pppprime Штрихи \\ppprime Штрихи \\pprime Штрихи \\prec Операторы отношений \\preceq Операторы отношений \\prime Штрихи \\prod Математические операторы \\propto Операторы отношений \\psi Греческие буквы \\Psi Греческие буквы \\qdrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\quadratic Квадратные корни и радикалы \\rangle Разделители \\Rangle Разделители \\ratio Операторы отношений \\rbrace Разделители \\rbrack Разделители \\Rbrack Разделители \\rceil Разделители \\rddots Точки \\Re Символы \\rect Символы \\rfloor Разделители \\rho Греческие буквы \\Rho Греческие буквы \\rhvec Акценты \\right Разделители \\rightarrow Стрелки \\Rightarrow Стрелки \\rightharpoondown Стрелки \\rightharpoonup Стрелки \\rmoust Разделители \\root Символы \\scripta Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptA Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptb Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptB Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptc Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptC Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptd Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptD Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripte Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptE Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptf Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptF Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptg Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptG Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripth Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptH Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripti Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptI Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptk Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptK Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptl Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptL Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptm Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptM Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptn Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptN Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripto Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptO Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptp Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptP Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptq Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptQ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptr Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptR Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripts Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptS Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptt Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptT Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptu Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptU Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptv Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptV Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptw Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptW Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptx Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptX Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scripty Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptY Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptz Буквы рукописного шрифта \\scriptZ Буквы рукописного шрифта \\sdiv Дробная черта \\sdivide Дробная черта \\searrow Стрелки \\setminus Бинарные операторы \\sigma Греческие буквы \\Sigma Греческие буквы \\sim Операторы отношений \\simeq Операторы отношений \\smash Стрелки \\smile Операторы отношений \\spadesuit Символы \\sqcap Бинарные операторы \\sqcup Бинарные операторы \\sqrt Квадратные корни и радикалы \\sqsubseteq Обозначения множеств \\sqsuperseteq Обозначения множеств \\star Бинарные операторы \\subset Обозначения множеств \\subseteq Обозначения множеств \\succ Операторы отношений \\succeq Операторы отношений \\sum Математические операторы \\superset Обозначения множеств \\superseteq Обозначения множеств \\swarrow Стрелки \\tau Греческие буквы \\Tau Греческие буквы \\therefore Операторы отношений \\theta Греческие буквы \\Theta Греческие буквы \\thicksp Знаки пробела \\thinsp Знаки пробела \\tilde Акценты \\times Бинарные операторы \\to Стрелки \\top Логические обозначения \\tvec Стрелки \\ubar Акценты \\Ubar Акценты \\underbar Акценты \\underbrace Акценты \\underbracket Акценты \\underline Акценты \\underparen Акценты \\uparrow Стрелки \\Uparrow Стрелки \\updownarrow Стрелки \\Updownarrow Стрелки \\uplus Бинарные операторы \\upsilon Греческие буквы \\Upsilon Греческие буквы \\varepsilon Греческие буквы \\varphi Греческие буквы \\varpi Греческие буквы \\varrho Греческие буквы \\varsigma Греческие буквы \\vartheta Греческие буквы \\vbar Разделители \\vdash Операторы отношений \\vdots Точки \\vec Акценты \\vee Бинарные операторы \\vert Разделители \\Vert Разделители \\Vmatrix Матрицы \\vphantom Стрелки \\vthicksp Знаки пробела \\wedge Бинарные операторы \\wp Символы \\wr Бинарные операторы \\xi Греческие буквы \\Xi Греческие буквы \\zeta Греческие буквы \\Zeta Греческие буквы \\zwnj Знаки пробела \\zwsp Знаки пробела ~= Операторы отношений -+ Бинарные операторы +- Бинарные операторы << Операторы отношений <= Операторы отношений -> Стрелки >= Операторы отношений >> Операторы отношений Распознанные функции На этой вкладке вы найдете список математических выражений, которые будут распознаваться редактором формул как функции и поэтому не будут автоматически выделены курсивом. Чтобы просмотреть список распознанных функций, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Распознанные функции. Чтобы добавить запись в список распознаваемых функций, введите функцию в пустое поле и нажмите кнопку Добавить. Чтобы удалить запись из списка распознанных функций, выберите функцию, которую нужно удалить, и нажмите кнопку Удалить. Чтобы восстановить ранее удаленные записи, выберите в списке запись, которую нужно восстановить, и нажмите кнопку Восстановить. Чтобы восстановить настройки по умолчанию, нажмите кнопку Сбросить настройки. Любая добавленная вами функция будет удалена, а удаленные - восстановлены. Автоформат при вводе По умолчанию, редактор применяет форматирование во время набора текста в соответствии с предустановками автоматического форматирования: заменяет кавычки, автоматически запускает маркированный список или нумерованный список при обнаружении списка и заменяет кавычки или преобразует дефисы в тире. Опция Добавлять точку двойным пробелом по умолчанию отключена. Включите данную опцию, если хотите, чтобы точка автоматически добавлялась при двойном нажатии клавиши пробела. Чтобы включить или отключить предустановки автоматического форматирования, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Проверка правописания -> Параметры автозамены -> Автоформат при вводе. Автозамена текста Вы можете настроить редактор на автоматическое использование заглавной буквы в каждом предложении. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Чтобы отключить эту функцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл -> Дополнительные параметры -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены -> Автозамена текста и снимите флажок с Делать первые буквы предложений прописными. По умолчанию редактор делает заглавными первые буквы ячеек таблицы. Чтобы отключить данную опцию, перейдите на вкладку Файл > Дополнительные настройки -> Правописание -> Параметры автозамены - > Автозамена текста и снимите флажок Делать первые буквы ячеек таблиц прописными.. Вы также можете настроить использование заглавных букв после определенных слов. Для этого введите нужные слова в поле Не использовать заглавные буквы после и нажав кнопку Добавить или выбрав нужные слова в соответствующем списке, находящимся ниже. Вы можете изменять список исключений в зависимости от используемого языка в выпадающем списке Исключение для языка.. Используйте кнопку Сбросить настройки, чтобы отменить все пользовательские изменения.." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MotionPath.htm", @@ -223,18 +233,13 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Сохранение / печать / скачивание презентации", - "body": "Сохранение По умолчанию онлайн-редактор презентаций автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы сохранить презентацию вручную в текущем формате и местоположении, нажмите значок Сохранить в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить. Чтобы не допустить потери данных в десктопной версии в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы, вы можете включить опцию Автовосстановление на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы в десктопной версии сохранить презентацию под другим именем, в другом местоположении или в другом формате, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить как, выберите один из доступных форматов: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон презентации POTX или OTP. Скачивание Чтобы в онлайн-версии скачать готовую презентацию и сохранить ее на жестком диске компьютера, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Скачать как, выберите один из доступных форматов: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Сохранение копии Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию презентации на портале, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить копию как, выберите один из доступных форматов: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG, выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить. Печать Чтобы распечатать текущую презентацию, нажмите значок Напечатать файл в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать. В браузере Firefox возможна печатать презентации без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf. Также можно распечатать выделенные слайды с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенным слайдам и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное). В десктопной версии презентация будет напрямую отправлена на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данной презентации будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати." + "body": "Сохранение По умолчанию онлайн-редактор презентаций автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы сохранить презентацию вручную в текущем формате и местоположении, нажмите значок Сохранить в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить. Чтобы не допустить потери данных в десктопной версии в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы, вы можете включить опцию Автовосстановление на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы в десктопной версии сохранить презентацию под другим именем, в другом местоположении или в другом формате, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить как, выберите один из доступных форматов: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон презентации POTX или OTP. Скачивание Чтобы в онлайн-версии скачать готовую презентацию и сохранить ее на жестком диске компьютера, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Скачать как, выберите один из доступных форматов: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Сохранение копии Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию презентации на портале, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить копию как, выберите один из доступных форматов: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG, выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить. Печать Чтобы распечатать текущую презентацию, нажмите значок Напечатать файл в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать. В браузере Firefox возможна печатать презентации без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf. В открывшемся окне Печать настройте следующие параметры: Получатель — выберите получателя файла для печати, например, Сохранить в PDF, Microsoft XPS Document Writer, Microsoft Print в PDF, Fax и т.д. Ориентация - выберите опцию Книжная, если вы хотите печатать на странице вертикально, или выберите Альбомная для горизонтальной печати. Страницы - выберите один из вариантов печати страниц: Все, Текущая, Нечетные, < b>Четные или Диапазон. В последнем случае вам придется ввести количество страниц вручную. Цветной режим - выберите, хотите ли вы, чтобы ваш файл был напечатан в Цветном или в Черно-белом формате. Обратите внимание, что этот параметр доступен, если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Microsoft XPS Document Writer. Если в качестве Получателя выбрана опция Fax, то по умолчанию задан цветовой режим Черно-белый. Нажмите на заголовок Все настройки, чтобы открыть дополнительные настройки. Размер бумаги — выберите один из доступных размеров из раскрывающегося списка или задайте пользовательский. Масштаб - выберите масштабирование файла при печати; вы можете выбрать опцию По ширине страницы или установить масштаб вручную с помощью переключателя Масштаб и соответствующего поля ввода рядом. Страниц на одном листе — выберите количество страниц, печатаемых на одном листе, например, две, шесть, девять и т.д. Поля — выберите поля страницы. Вы можете установить поля По умолчанию или пользовательские, измеряемые в милиметрах. Для пользовательских полей установите необходимые значения для верхнего, нижнего, левого и правого поля вручную. Вы также можете выбрать опцию Нет, чтобы не печатать поля. Настройки. Установите флажок у Печатать колонтитулы, чтобы они печатались, или снимите этот флажок, чтобы верхние и нижние колонтитулы не печатались. Печать, используя системный диалог – нажмите на этот заголовок, чтобы открыть системный диалог для настройки процесса печати. В десктопной версии презентация будет напрямую отправлена на печать. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе чтобы распечатать позже. Также можно распечатать выделенные слайды с помощью пункта контекстного меню Напечатать выделенное как в режиме Редактирования, так и в режиме Просмотра (кликните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенным слайдам и выберите опцию Напечатать выделенное). В онлайн-версии на основе презентации будет создан PDF-файл. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его или сохранить на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать его позже. Некоторые браузеры (например, Chrome и Opera) поддерживают прямую печать." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm", "title": "Настройка параметров слайда", "body": "Чтобы настроить внешний вид презентации, можно выбрать тему, цветовую схему, размер и ориентацию слайдов для всей презентации, изменить заливку фона или макет слайда для каждого отдельного слайда, применить переходы между слайдами. Также можно добавить поясняющие заметки к каждому слайду, которые могут пригодиться при показе презентации в режиме докладчика. Темы позволяют быстро изменить дизайн презентации, а именно оформление фона слайдов, предварительно заданные шрифты для заголовков и текстов и цветовую схему, которая используется для элементов презентации. Для выбора темы презентации щелкните по нужной готовой теме из галереи тем, расположенной в правой части вкладки Главная верхней панели инструментов. Выбранная тема будет применена ко всем слайдам, если вы предварительно не выделили определенные слайды, к которым надо применить эту тему. Чтобы изменить выбранную тему для одного или нескольких слайдов, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенным слайдам в списке слева (или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по слайду в области редактирования слайда), выберите в контекстном меню пункт Изменить тему, а затем выберите нужную тему. Цветовые схемы влияют на предварительно заданные цвета, используемые для элементов презентации (шрифтов, линий, заливок и т.д.) и позволяют обеспечить сочетаемость цветов во всей презентации. Для изменения цветовой схемы презентации щелкните по значку Изменение цветовой схемы на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выберите нужную схему из выпадающего списка. Выбранная схема будет выделена в списке и применена ко всем слайдам. Для изменения размера всех слайдов в презентации, щелкните по значку Выбор размеров слайда на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Можно выбрать: один из двух быстродоступных пресетов - Стандартный (4:3) или Широкоэкранный (16:9), команду Дополнительные параметры, которая вызывает окно Настройки размера слайда, где можно выбрать один из имеющихся предустановленных размеров или задать Пользовательский размер, указав нужные значения Ширины и Высоты. Доступны следующие предустановленные размеры: Стандартный (4:3), Широкоэкранный (16:9), Широкоэкранный (16:10), Лист Letter (8.5x11 дюймов), Лист Ledger (11x17 дюймов), Лист A3 (297x420 мм), Лист A4 (210x297 мм), Лист B4 (ICO) (250x353 мм), Лист B5 (ICO) (176x250 мм), Слайды 35 мм, Прозрачная пленка, Баннер. Меню Ориентация слайда позволяет изменить выбранный в настоящий момент тип ориентации слайда. По умолчанию используется Альбомная ориентация, которую можно изменить на Книжную. Для изменения заливки фона: в списке слайдов слева выделите слайды, к которым требуется применить заливку. Или в области редактирования слайдов щелкните по любому свободному месту внутри слайда, который в данный момент редактируется, чтобы изменить тип заливки для этого конкретного слайда. на вкладке Параметры слайда на правой боковой панели выберите нужную опцию: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, который требуется применить к выбранным слайдам. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы чтобы залить слайд двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона слайда какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить слайд с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Непрозрачность - перетащите ползунок или введите процентное значение вручную. Значение по умолчанию - 100%. Это соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Чтобы получить более подробную информацию об этих опциях, обратитесь к разделу Заливка объектов и выбор цветов. Переходы помогают сделать презентацию более динамичной и удерживать внимание аудитории. Для применения перехода: в списке слайдов слева выделите слайды, к которым требуется применить переход, на вкладке Параметры слайда выберите переход из выпадающего списка Эффект, Примечание: чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры слайда, можно щелкнуть по значку Параметры слайда справа или щелкнуть правой кнопкой мыши по слайду в области редактирования слайда и выбрать в контекстном меню пункт Параметры слайда. настройте свойства перехода: выберите вариант перехода, его длительность и то, каким образом должны сменяться слайды, если требуется применить один и тот же переход ко всем слайдам в презентации, нажмите кнопку Применить ко всем слайдам. Чтобы получить более подробную информацию об этих опциях, обратитесь к разделу Применение переходов. Для изменения макета слайда: в списке слайдов слева выделите слайды, для которых требуется применить новый макет, щелкните по значку Изменить макет слайда на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите в меню нужный макет. Вы можете также щелкнуть правой кнопкой мыши по нужному слайду в списке слева, выбрать в контекстном меню пункт Изменить макет и выбрать нужный макет. Примечание: в настоящий момент доступны следующие макеты: Титульный слайд, Заголовок и объект, Заголовок раздела, Два объекта, Сравнение, Только заголовок, Пустой слайд, Объект с подписью, Рисунок с подписью, Заголовок и вертикальный текст, Вертикальный заголовок и текст. Для добавления объектов к макету слайда: щелкните по значку Изменить макет слайда и выберите макет, к которому вы хотите добавить объект, при помощи вкладки Вставка верхней панели инструментов добавьте нужный объект на слайд (изображение, таблица, диаграмма, автофигура), далее нажмите правой кнопкой мыши на данный объект и выберите пункт Добавить в макет, на вкладке Главная нажмите Изменить макет слайда и примените измененный макет. Выделенные объекты будут добавлены к текущему макету темы. Примечание: расположенные таким образом объекты на слайде не могут быть выделены, изменены или передвинуты. Для возвращения макета слада в исходное состояние: в списке слайдов слева выделите слайды, которые нужно вернуть в состояние по умолчанию, Примечание: чтобы выбрать несколько сладов сразу, зажмите клавишу Ctrl и по одному выделяйте нужные или зажмите клавишу Shift, чтобы выделить все слайды от текущего до выбранного. щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по одному из слайдов и в контекстном меню выберите опцию Сбросить макет слайда, Ко всем выделенным слайдам вернется первоначальное положение текстовых рамок и объектов в соответствии с макетами. Для добавления заметок к слайду: в списке слайдов слева выберите слайд, к которому требуется добавить заметку, щелкните по надписи Нажмите, чтобы добавить заметки под областью редактирования слайда, введите текст заметки. Примечание: текст можно отформатировать с помощью значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. При показе слайдов в режиме докладчика заметки к слайду будут отображаться под областью просмотра слайда." }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Поддержка SmartArt в редакторе резентаций ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Поддержка SmartArt в редакторе презентаций ONLYOFFICE Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Редактор презентаций ONLYOFFICE поддерживает графические объекты SmartArt, добавленную с помощью сторонних редакторов. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий SmartArt, и редактировать его как графический объект с помощью доступных инструментов. Если выделить графический объект SmartArt или его элемент, на правой боковой панели станут доступны следующие вкладки: Параметры слайда - для изменения заливки и прозрачности фона слайда, а также для отображения или скрытия номера слайда, даты и времени. Обратитесь к Настройке параметров слайда и Вставке колонтитулов для получения дополнительной информации. Параметры фигуры - для редактирования фигур, используемых в макете. Вы можете изменять размер формы, редактировать заливку, контур, толщину, стиль обтекания, положение, линии и стрелки, текстовое поле и альтернативный текст. Параметры абзаца - для редактирования отступов и интервалов, шрифтов и табуляций. Обратитесь к разделу Форматирование текста для подробного описания каждого параметра. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. Параметры объекта Text Art - для редактирования стиля Text Art, который используется SmartArt для выделения текста. Вы можете изменить шаблон Text Art, тип заливки, цвет и непрозрачность, толщину линии, цвет и тип. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по SmartArt или по границе данного элемента, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования: Порядок - упорядочить объекты, используя следующие параметры: Перенести на передний план, Перенести на задний план, Перенести вперед, Перенести назад , Сгруппировать и Разгруппировать. Поворот - изменить направление вращения для выбранного элемента на SmartArt: Повернуть на 90° по часовой стрелке, Повернуть на 90° против часовой стрелки. Этот параметр становится активным только для объектов SmartArt. Назначить макрос - обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в презентации. Дополнительные параметры фигуры - для доступа к дополнительным параметрам форматирования фигуры. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по графическому объекту SmartArt, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования текста: Выравнивание по вертикали - выбрать выравнивание текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Выровнять по верхнему краю, Выровнять по середине, Выровнять по нижнему краю. Направление текста - выбрать направление текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Горизонтальное, Повернуть текст вниз, Повернуть текст вверх. Гиперссылка - добавить гиперссылку к объекту SmartArt. Обратитесь к Дополнительным параметрам абзаца, чтобы получить информацию о дополнительных параметрах форматирования абзаца." - }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm", "title": "Просмотр сведений о презентации", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css index c4ea4bce08..d1977425a6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ html{ - overflow: scroll; + overflow: auto; scrollbar-track-color: #eee; scrollbar-face-color: #f7f7f7; scrollbar-highlight-color: #eee; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css index 8afa79bd73..99b24032c2 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/az.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/az.json index 0c47043e2c..4b47e00961 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/az.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/az.json @@ -299,6 +299,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Markerlər və Ədədlər", "textCaseSensitive": "Böyük/Kiçik Hərfə Həssas", "textCellMargins": "Xanalardakı Kənar Boşluqlar", + "textChangeShape": "Formanı dəyiş", "textChart": "Diaqram", "textClock": "Saat", "textClockwise": "Saat əqrəbi istiqamətində", @@ -413,7 +414,6 @@ "textArrange": "Arrange", "textAutomatic": "Automatic", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDesign": "Design", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/be.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/be.json index 00d1267aa3..c3d372ed2a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/be.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/be.json @@ -299,6 +299,7 @@ "textBullets": "Адзнакі", "textCaseSensitive": "Улічваць рэгістр", "textCellMargins": "Палі ячэйкі", + "textChangeShape": "Змяніць фігуру", "textChart": "Дыяграма", "textClock": "Гадзіннік", "textClockwise": "Па стрэлцы гадзінніка", @@ -410,7 +411,6 @@ "textArrange": "Arrange", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify the image URL.", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/bg.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/bg.json index 70288d8fda..f06f5ee72e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/bg.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/bg.json @@ -1,233 +1,7 @@ { - "About": { - "textAbout": "About", - "textAddress": "Address", - "textBack": "Back", - "textEmail": "Email", - "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", - "textTel": "Tel", - "textVersion": "Version", - "textEditor": "Presentation Editor" - }, - "Common": { - "Collaboration": { - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "textAddComment": "Add Comment", - "textAddReply": "Add Reply", - "textBack": "Back", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", - "textComments": "Comments", - "textDeleteComment": "Delete Comment", - "textDeleteReply": "Delete Reply", - "textDone": "Done", - "textEdit": "Edit", - "textEditComment": "Edit Comment", - "textEditReply": "Edit Reply", - "textEditUser": "Users who are editing the file:", - "textMessageDeleteComment": "Do you really want to delete this comment?", - "textMessageDeleteReply": "Do you really want to delete this reply?", - "textNoComments": "This document doesn't contain comments", - "textReopen": "Reopen", - "textResolve": "Resolve", - "textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.", - "textUsers": "Users", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings" - }, - "ThemeColorPalette": { - "textCustomColors": "Custom Colors", - "textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", - "textThemeColors": "Theme Colors" - }, - "HighlightColorPalette": { - "textNoFill": "No Fill" - } - }, - "ContextMenu": { - "errorCopyCutPaste": "Copy, cut and paste actions using the context menu will be performed within the current file only.", - "menuAddComment": "Add Comment", - "menuAddLink": "Add Link", - "menuCancel": "Cancel", - "menuDelete": "Delete", - "menuDeleteTable": "Delete Table", - "menuEdit": "Edit", - "menuMerge": "Merge", - "menuMore": "More", - "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", - "menuSplit": "Split", - "menuViewComment": "View Comment", - "textColumns": "Columns", - "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", - "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", - "textRows": "Rows", - "textOk": "Ok", - "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
                                Are you sure you want to continue?", - "menuEditLink": "Edit Link" - }, - "Controller": { - "Main": { - "advDRMOptions": "Protected File", - "advDRMPassword": "Password", - "closeButtonText": "Close File", - "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", - "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
                                Please, contact your admin.", - "errorOpensource": "Using the free Community version, you can open documents for viewing only. To access mobile web editors, a commercial license is required.", - "errorProcessSaveResult": "Saving failed.", - "errorServerVersion": "The editor version has been updated. The page will be reloaded to apply the changes.", - "errorUpdateVersion": "The file version has been changed. The page will be reloaded.", - "leavePageText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "SDK": { - "Chart": "Chart", - "Click to add first slide": "Click to add first slide", - "Click to add notes": "Click to add notes", - "ClipArt": "Clip Art", - "Date and time": "Date and time", - "Diagram": "Diagram", - "Diagram Title": "Chart Title", - "Footer": "Footer", - "Header": "Header", - "Image": "Image", - "Loading": "Loading", - "Media": "Media", - "None": "None", - "Picture": "Picture", - "Series": "Series", - "Slide number": "Slide number", - "Slide subtitle": "Slide subtitle", - "Slide text": "Slide text", - "Slide title": "Slide title", - "Table": "Table", - "X Axis": "X Axis XAS", - "Y Axis": "Y Axis", - "Your text here": "Your text here" - }, - "textAnonymous": "Anonymous", - "textBuyNow": "Visit website", - "textClose": "Close", - "textContactUs": "Contact sales", - "textCustomLoader": "Sorry, you are not entitled to change the loader. Please, contact our sales department to get a quote.", - "textGuest": "Guest", - "textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
                                Do you want to run macros?", - "textNo": "No", - "textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", - "textOpenFile": "Enter a password to open the file", - "textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", - "textRemember": "Remember my choice", - "textYes": "Yes", - "titleLicenseExp": "License expired", - "titleServerVersion": "Editor updated", - "titleUpdateVersion": "Version changed", - "txtIncorrectPwd": "Password is incorrect", - "txtProtected": "Once you enter the password and open the file, the current password to the file will be reset", - "warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact your administrator to learn more.", - "warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired. Please, update it and refresh the page.", - "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "License expired. You have no access to document editing functionality. Please, contact your administrator.", - "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "The license needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
                                Please contact your administrator to get full access", - "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", - "warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit the file.", - "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", - "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
                                Please contact your administrator.", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only." - } - }, - "Error": { - "convertationTimeoutText": "Conversion timeout exceeded.", - "criticalErrorExtText": "Press 'OK' to go back to the document list.", - "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", - "downloadErrorText": "Download failed.", - "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
                                Please contact your admin.", - "errorBadImageUrl": "Image url is incorrect", - "errorConnectToServer": "Can't save this doc. Check your connection settings or contact your admin.
                                When you click the 'OK' button, you will be prompted to download the document.", - "errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
                                Database connection error. Please, contact support.", - "errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", - "errorDataRange": "Incorrect data range.", - "errorDefaultMessage": "Error code: %1", - "errorEditingDownloadas": "An error occurred during the work with the document.
                                Use the 'Download' option to save the file backup copy locally.", - "errorFilePassProtect": "The file is password protected and could not be opened.", - "errorFileSizeExceed": "The file size exceeds your server limitation.
                                Please, contact your admin.", - "errorKeyEncrypt": "Unknown key descriptor", - "errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", - "errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please, reload the page.", - "errorSessionIdle": "The document has not been edited for quite a long time. Please, reload the page.", - "errorSessionToken": "The connection to the server has been interrupted. Please, reload the page.", - "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
                                opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", - "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internet connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
                                Before you can continue working, download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", - "errorUserDrop": "The file cannot be accessed right now.", - "errorUsersExceed": "The number of users allowed by the pricing plan was exceeded", - "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
                                but you won't be able to download it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "openErrorText": "An error has occurred while opening the file", - "saveErrorText": "An error has occurred while saving the file", - "scriptLoadError": "The connection is too slow, some of the components could not be loaded. Please, reload the page.", - "splitDividerErrorText": "The number of rows must be a divisor of %1", - "splitMaxColsErrorText": "The number of columns must be less than %1", - "splitMaxRowsErrorText": "The number of rows must be less than %1", - "unknownErrorText": "Unknown error.", - "uploadImageExtMessage": "Unknown image format.", - "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No images uploaded.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB.", - "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
                                This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator." - }, - "LongActions": { - "applyChangesTextText": "Loading data...", - "applyChangesTitleText": "Loading Data", - "downloadTextText": "Downloading document...", - "downloadTitleText": "Downloading Document", - "loadFontsTextText": "Loading data...", - "loadFontsTitleText": "Loading Data", - "loadFontTextText": "Loading data...", - "loadFontTitleText": "Loading Data", - "loadImagesTextText": "Loading images...", - "loadImagesTitleText": "Loading Images", - "loadImageTextText": "Loading image...", - "loadImageTitleText": "Loading Image", - "loadingDocumentTextText": "Loading document...", - "loadingDocumentTitleText": "Loading document", - "loadThemeTextText": "Loading theme...", - "loadThemeTitleText": "Loading Theme", - "openTextText": "Opening document...", - "openTitleText": "Opening Document", - "printTextText": "Printing document...", - "printTitleText": "Printing Document", - "savePreparingText": "Preparing to save", - "savePreparingTitle": "Preparing to save. Please wait...", - "saveTextText": "Saving document...", - "saveTitleText": "Saving Document", - "textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", - "txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", - "uploadImageTextText": "Uploading image...", - "uploadImageTitleText": "Uploading Image", - "waitText": "Please, wait...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
                                Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", - "textUndo": "Undo", - "textContinue": "Continue" - }, - "Toolbar": { - "dlgLeaveMsgText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", - "dlgLeaveTitleText": "You leave the application", - "leaveButtonText": "Leave this page", - "stayButtonText": "Stay on this Page" - }, "View": { "Add": { + "textShape": "Форма", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAddLink": "Add Link", "textAddress": "Address", @@ -237,6 +11,7 @@ "textComment": "Comment", "textDefault": "Selected text", "textDisplay": "Display", + "textDone": "Done", "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify the image URL.", "textExternalLink": "External Link", "textFirstSlide": "First Slide", @@ -250,26 +25,27 @@ "textLinkTo": "Link to", "textLinkType": "Link Type", "textNextSlide": "Next Slide", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOther": "Other", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", "textPreviousSlide": "Previous Slide", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", + "textRequired": "Required", "textRows": "Rows", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSlide": "Slide", "textSlideInThisPresentation": "Slide in this Presentation", "textSlideNumber": "Slide Number", "textTable": "Table", "textTableSize": "Table Size", - "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textDone": "Done", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"" }, "Edit": { + "textChangeShape": "Промяна на форма", + "textRemoveShape": "Премахване на формата", + "textShape": "Форма", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textActualSize": "Actual Size", "textAddCustomColor": "Add Custom Color", @@ -286,7 +62,9 @@ "textAlignTop": "Align Top", "textAllCaps": "All Caps", "textApplyAll": "Apply to All Slides", + "textArrange": "Arrange", "textAuto": "Auto", + "textAutomatic": "Automatic", "textBack": "Back", "textBandedColumn": "Banded Column", "textBandedRow": "Banded Row", @@ -299,6 +77,7 @@ "textBringToForeground": "Bring to Foreground", "textBullets": "Bullets", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Bullets & Numbers", + "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCaseSensitive": "Case Sensitive", "textCellMargins": "Cell Margins", "textChart": "Chart", @@ -310,7 +89,10 @@ "textCustomColor": "Custom Color", "textDefault": "Selected text", "textDelay": "Delay", + "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", + "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDeleteSlide": "Delete Slide", + "textDesign": "Design", "textDisplay": "Display", "textDistanceFromText": "Distance From Text", "textDistributeHorizontally": "Distribute Horizontally", @@ -344,6 +126,7 @@ "textHyperlink": "Hyperlink", "textImage": "Image", "textImageURL": "Image URL", + "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", "textLastColumn": "Last Column", "textLastSlide": "Last Slide", "textLayout": "Layout", @@ -357,11 +140,12 @@ "textMoveBackward": "Move Backward", "textMoveForward": "Move Forward", "textNextSlide": "Next Slide", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", "textNone": "None", "textNoStyles": "No styles for this type of chart.", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", "textNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", "textNumbers": "Numbers", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOpacity": "Opacity", "textOptions": "Options", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from Library", @@ -369,22 +153,19 @@ "textPreviousSlide": "Previous Slide", "textPt": "pt", "textPush": "Push", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveImage": "Remove Image", - "textRemoveLink": "Remove Link", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", - "textReorder": "Reorder", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", "textReplaceImage": "Replace Image", + "textRequired": "Required", "textRight": "Right", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", "textSearch": "Search", "textSec": "s", "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSize": "Size", "textSlide": "Slide", "textSlideInThisPresentation": "Slide in this Presentation", @@ -405,7 +186,7 @@ "textTopLeft": "Top-Left", "textTopRight": "Top-Right", "textTotalRow": "Total Row", - "textTransition": "Transition", + "textTransitions": "Transitions", "textType": "Type", "textUnCover": "UnCover", "textVerticalIn": "Vertical In", @@ -415,25 +196,12 @@ "textZoom": "Zoom", "textZoomIn": "Zoom In", "textZoomOut": "Zoom Out", - "textZoomRotate": "Zoom and Rotate", - "textTransitions": "Transitions", - "textDesign": "Design", - "textAutomatic": "Automatic", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", - "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "Zoom and Rotate" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "Standard (4:3)", "mniSlideWide": "Widescreen (16:9)", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAbout": "About", "textAddress": "address:", "textApplication": "Application", @@ -446,6 +214,7 @@ "textColorSchemes": "Color Schemes", "textComment": "Comment", "textCreated": "Created", + "textDarkTheme": "Dark Theme", "textDisableAll": "Disable All", "textDisableAllMacrosWithNotification": "Disable all macros with notification", "textDisableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Disable all macros without notification", @@ -455,6 +224,7 @@ "textEmail": "email:", "textEnableAll": "Enable All", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Enable all macros without notification", + "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", "textFind": "Find", "textFindAndReplace": "Find and Replace", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "Find and Replace All", @@ -466,7 +236,8 @@ "textLoading": "Loading...", "textLocation": "Location", "textMacrosSettings": "Macros Settings", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOwner": "Owner", "textPoint": "Point", "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", @@ -476,6 +247,8 @@ "textPrint": "Print", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", + "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", + "textRTL": "RTL", "textSearch": "Search", "textSettings": "Settings", "textShowNotification": "Show Notification", @@ -508,15 +281,232 @@ "txtScheme6": "Concourse", "txtScheme7": "Equity", "txtScheme8": "Flow", - "txtScheme9": "Foundry", - "textDarkTheme": "Dark Theme", - "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", + "txtScheme9": "Foundry" + } + }, + "About": { + "textAbout": "About", + "textAddress": "Address", + "textBack": "Back", + "textEditor": "Presentation Editor", + "textEmail": "Email", + "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", + "textTel": "Tel", + "textVersion": "Version" + }, + "Common": { + "Collaboration": { + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "textAddComment": "Add Comment", + "textAddReply": "Add Reply", + "textBack": "Back", + "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", + "textComments": "Comments", + "textDeleteComment": "Delete Comment", + "textDeleteReply": "Delete Reply", + "textDone": "Done", + "textEdit": "Edit", + "textEditComment": "Edit Comment", + "textEditReply": "Edit Reply", + "textEditUser": "Users who are editing the file:", + "textMessageDeleteComment": "Do you really want to delete this comment?", + "textMessageDeleteReply": "Do you really want to delete this reply?", + "textNoComments": "No Comments", "textOk": "Ok", - "textRTL": "RTL", - "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", + "textReopen": "Reopen", + "textResolve": "Resolve", + "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings", + "textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.", + "textUsers": "Users" + }, + "HighlightColorPalette": { + "textNoFill": "No Fill" + }, + "ThemeColorPalette": { + "textCustomColors": "Custom Colors", + "textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", + "textThemeColors": "Theme Colors" + } + }, + "ContextMenu": { + "errorCopyCutPaste": "Copy, cut and paste actions using the context menu will be performed within the current file only.", + "menuAddComment": "Add Comment", + "menuAddLink": "Add Link", + "menuCancel": "Cancel", + "menuDelete": "Delete", + "menuDeleteTable": "Delete Table", + "menuEdit": "Edit", + "menuEditLink": "Edit Link", + "menuMerge": "Merge", + "menuMore": "More", + "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", + "menuSplit": "Split", + "menuViewComment": "View Comment", + "textColumns": "Columns", + "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", + "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textRows": "Rows", + "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
                                Are you sure you want to continue?" + }, + "Controller": { + "Main": { + "advDRMOptions": "Protected File", + "advDRMPassword": "Password", + "closeButtonText": "Close File", + "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", + "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
                                Please, contact your admin.", + "errorOpensource": "Using the free Community version, you can open documents for viewing only. To access mobile web editors, a commercial license is required.", + "errorProcessSaveResult": "Saving failed.", + "errorServerVersion": "The editor version has been updated. The page will be reloaded to apply the changes.", + "errorUpdateVersion": "The file version has been changed. The page will be reloaded.", + "leavePageText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "SDK": { + "Chart": "Chart", + "Click to add first slide": "Click to add first slide", + "Click to add notes": "Click to add notes", + "ClipArt": "Clip Art", + "Date and time": "Date and time", + "Diagram": "Diagram", + "Diagram Title": "Chart Title", + "Footer": "Footer", + "Header": "Header", + "Image": "Image", + "Loading": "Loading", + "Media": "Media", + "None": "None", + "Picture": "Picture", + "Series": "Series", + "Slide number": "Slide number", + "Slide subtitle": "Slide subtitle", + "Slide text": "Slide text", + "Slide title": "Slide title", + "Table": "Table", + "X Axis": "X Axis XAS", + "Y Axis": "Y Axis", + "Your text here": "Your text here" + }, + "textAnonymous": "Anonymous", + "textBuyNow": "Visit website", + "textClose": "Close", + "textContactUs": "Contact sales", + "textCustomLoader": "Sorry, you are not entitled to change the loader. Please, contact our sales department to get a quote.", + "textGuest": "Guest", + "textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
                                Do you want to run macros?", + "textNo": "No", + "textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOpenFile": "Enter a password to open the file", + "textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", + "textRemember": "Remember my choice", + "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", + "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", + "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", + "textYes": "Yes", + "titleLicenseExp": "License expired", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", + "titleServerVersion": "Editor updated", + "titleUpdateVersion": "Version changed", + "txtIncorrectPwd": "Password is incorrect", + "txtProtected": "Once you enter the password and open the file, the current password to the file will be reset", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
                                Please contact your administrator.", + "warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact your administrator to learn more.", + "warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired. Please, update your license and refresh the page.", + "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "License expired. You have no access to document editing functionality. Please, contact your administrator.", + "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "License needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
                                Please contact your administrator to get full access", + "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", + "warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", + "warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", + "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit the file." } + }, + "Error": { + "convertationTimeoutText": "Conversion timeout exceeded.", + "criticalErrorExtText": "Press 'OK' to go back to the document list.", + "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", + "downloadErrorText": "Download failed.", + "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
                                Please contact your admin.", + "errorBadImageUrl": "Image URL is incorrect", + "errorConnectToServer": "Can't save this doc. Check your connection settings or contact your admin.
                                When you click the 'OK' button, you will be prompted to download the document.", + "errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
                                Database connection error. Please, contact support.", + "errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", + "errorDataRange": "Incorrect data range.", + "errorDefaultMessage": "Error code: %1", + "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
                                This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", + "errorEditingDownloadas": "An error occurred during the work with the document.
                                Use the 'Download' option to save the file backup copy locally.", + "errorFilePassProtect": "The file is password protected and could not be opened.", + "errorFileSizeExceed": "The file size exceeds your server limitation.
                                Please, contact your admin.", + "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content does not match the file extension.", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorKeyEncrypt": "Unknown key descriptor", + "errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", + "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please, reload the page.", + "errorSessionIdle": "The document has not been edited for quite a long time. Please, reload the page.", + "errorSessionToken": "The connection to the server has been interrupted. Please, reload the page.", + "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
                                opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", + "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
                                Before you can continue working, download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", + "errorUserDrop": "The file cannot be accessed right now.", + "errorUsersExceed": "The number of users allowed by the pricing plan was exceeded", + "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
                                but you won't be able to download or print it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "openErrorText": "An error has occurred while opening the file", + "saveErrorText": "An error has occurred while saving the file", + "scriptLoadError": "The connection is too slow, some of the components could not be loaded. Please, reload the page.", + "splitDividerErrorText": "The number of rows must be a divisor of %1", + "splitMaxColsErrorText": "The number of columns must be less than %1", + "splitMaxRowsErrorText": "The number of rows must be less than %1", + "unknownErrorText": "Unknown error.", + "uploadImageExtMessage": "Unknown image format.", + "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No images uploaded.", + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB." + }, + "LongActions": { + "applyChangesTextText": "Loading data...", + "applyChangesTitleText": "Loading Data", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
                                Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", + "downloadTextText": "Downloading document...", + "downloadTitleText": "Downloading Document", + "loadFontsTextText": "Loading data...", + "loadFontsTitleText": "Loading Data", + "loadFontTextText": "Loading data...", + "loadFontTitleText": "Loading Data", + "loadImagesTextText": "Loading images...", + "loadImagesTitleText": "Loading Images", + "loadImageTextText": "Loading image...", + "loadImageTitleText": "Loading Image", + "loadingDocumentTextText": "Loading document...", + "loadingDocumentTitleText": "Loading document", + "loadThemeTextText": "Loading theme...", + "loadThemeTitleText": "Loading Theme", + "openTextText": "Opening document...", + "openTitleText": "Opening Document", + "printTextText": "Printing document...", + "printTitleText": "Printing Document", + "savePreparingText": "Preparing to save", + "savePreparingTitle": "Preparing to save. Please wait...", + "saveTextText": "Saving document...", + "saveTitleText": "Saving Document", + "textContinue": "Continue", + "textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", + "textUndo": "Undo", + "txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", + "uploadImageTextText": "Uploading image...", + "uploadImageTitleText": "Uploading Image", + "waitText": "Please, wait..." + }, + "Toolbar": { + "dlgLeaveMsgText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", + "dlgLeaveTitleText": "You leave the application", + "leaveButtonText": "Leave this page", + "stayButtonText": "Stay on this Page" } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/cs.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/cs.json index 2ef74e0d84..1ba826f8ef 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/cs.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/cs.json @@ -300,6 +300,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Odrážky & Číslování", "textCaseSensitive": "Rozlišovat malá a velká písmena", "textCellMargins": "Okraje buňky", + "textChangeShape": "Změnit obrazec", "textChart": "Graf", "textClock": "Hodiny", "textClockwise": "Po směru hodinových ručiček", @@ -415,7 +416,6 @@ "textZoomRotate": "Přiblížit a otočit", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/el.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/el.json index 053f192f52..a7c2940aeb 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/el.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/el.json @@ -300,6 +300,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Κουκκίδες & Αρίθμηση", "textCaseSensitive": "Διάκριση Πεζών-Κεφαλαίων", "textCellMargins": "Περιθώρια Κελιού", + "textChangeShape": "Αλλαγή Σχήματος", "textChart": "Γράφημα", "textClock": "Ρολόι", "textClockwise": "Δεξιόστροφα", @@ -415,7 +416,6 @@ "textZoomRotate": "Εστίαση και Περιστροφή", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/es.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/es.json index 5e1d72854e..05c4a3fef4 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/es.json @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "El archivo contiene macros automáticas.
                                ¿Quiere ejecutar macros?", "textNo": "No", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Se ha alcanzado el límite de licencia", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textOpenFile": "Introduzca la contraseña para abrir el archivo", "textPaidFeature": "Característica de pago", "textRemember": "Recordar mi elección", @@ -120,10 +121,13 @@ "textRequestMacros": "Una macro realiza una solicitud a la URL. ¿Quiere permitir la solicitud al %1?", "textYes": "Sí", "titleLicenseExp": "Licencia ha expirado", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "Licencia no activa", "titleServerVersion": "Editor ha sido actualizado", "titleUpdateVersion": "Versión ha cambiado", "txtIncorrectPwd": "La contraseña es incorrecta", "txtProtected": "Una vez que se ha introducido la contraseña y abierto el archivo, la contraseña actual del archivo se restablecerá", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acceso denegado para usuarios anónimos.
                                Este documento se abrirá solo para su visualización.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "Licencia no activa.
                                Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización. Póngase en contacto con su administrador para obtener más información.", "warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado. Por favor, actualícela y recargue la página.", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "La licencia ha expirado. No tiene acceso a la funcionalidad de edición de documentos. Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", @@ -131,11 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para los editores de %1. Contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", "warnNoLicense": "Ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización. Póngase en contacto con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer las condiciones de actualización personal.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para los editores de %1.
                                Contacte con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer los términos de actualización personal.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "No tiene permiso para editar el archivo.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
                                Please contact your administrator." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "No tiene permiso para editar el archivo." } }, "Error": { @@ -251,6 +251,7 @@ "textNextSlide": "Diapositiva siguiente", "textOk": "Aceptar", "textOther": "Otro", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Pegar la URL de una imagen", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Imagen desde biblioteca", "textPictureFromURL": "Imagen desde URL", "textPreviousSlide": "Diapositiva anterior", @@ -264,8 +265,7 @@ "textSlideNumber": "Número de diapositiva", "textTable": "Tabla", "textTableSize": "Tamaño de tabla", - "txtNotUrl": "Este campo debe ser una dirección URL en el formato \"http://www.example.com\"", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "Este campo debe ser una dirección URL en el formato \"http://www.example.com\"" }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advertencia", @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "Mover hacia atrás", "textMoveForward": "Moverse hacia adelante", "textNextSlide": "Diapositiva siguiente", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textNone": "Ninguno", "textNoStyles": "No hay estilos para este tipo de gráfico.", "textNotUrl": "Este campo debe ser una dirección URL en el formato \"http://www.example.com\"", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "Zoom", "textZoomIn": "Acercar", "textZoomOut": "Alejar", - "textZoomRotate": "Zoom y giro", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "Zoom y giro" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "Estándar (4:3)", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "Cargando...", "textLocation": "Ubicación", "textMacrosSettings": "Ajustes de macros", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textOk": "Aceptar", "textOwner": "Propietario", "textPoint": "Punto", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Concurrencia", "txtScheme7": "Equidad ", "txtScheme8": "Flujo", - "txtScheme9": "Fundición", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Fundición" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/fr.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/fr.json index 03ea9a199c..66e8e8bde7 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/fr.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/fr.json @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ "textOther": "Autre", "textPasteImageUrl": "Coller l'URL de l'image", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Image depuis la bibliothèque", - "textPictureFromURL": "Image depuis URL", + "textPictureFromURL": "Image à partir d'une URL", "textPreviousSlide": "Diapositive précédente", "textRecommended": "Recommandés", "textRequired": "Obligatoire", @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ "textCancel": "Annuler", "textCaseSensitive": "Sensible à la casse", "textCellMargins": "Marges de la cellule", - "textChangeShape": "Changer la forme", + "textChangeShape": "Modifier la forme", "textChart": "Graphique", "textClock": "Horloge", "textClockwise": "Dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre", @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ "textFontColors": "Couleurs de police", "textFonts": "Polices", "textFromLibrary": "Image depuis la bibliothèque", - "textFromURL": "Image depuis URL", + "textFromURL": "Image à partir d'une URL", "textHeaderRow": "Ligne d'en-tête", "textHighlight": "Surligner les résultats", "textHighlightColor": "Couleur de surlignage", @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ "textOpacity": "Opacité", "textOptions": "Options", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Image depuis la bibliothèque", - "textPictureFromURL": "Image depuis URL", + "textPictureFromURL": "Image à partir d'une URL", "textPreviousSlide": "Diapositive précédente", "textPt": "pt", "textPush": "Expulsion", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/gl.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/gl.json index 766ac05b66..987a7dac03 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/gl.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/gl.json @@ -300,6 +300,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Viñetas e números", "textCaseSensitive": "Diferenciar maiúsculas de minúsculas", "textCellMargins": "Marxes das celdas", + "textChangeShape": "Cambiar forma", "textChart": "Gráfico", "textClock": "Reloxo", "textClockwise": "No sentido das agullas do reloxo", @@ -415,7 +416,6 @@ "textZoomRotate": "Ampliar e rotación", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/hy.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/hy.json index 3ce6441221..da3eedc9ac 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/hy.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/hy.json @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "Ֆայլում կան ինքնաշխատ մակրոներ։
                                Գործարկե՞լ դրանք։", "textNo": "Ոչ", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Լիցենզիայի սահմանաչափը հասել է", + "textNoMatches": "Համընկնում չկա", "textOpenFile": "Մուտքագրել գաղտնաբառ՝ ֆայլը բացելու համար", "textPaidFeature": "Վճարովի գործառույթ", "textRemember": "Հիշել իմ ընտրությունը", @@ -125,6 +126,7 @@ "titleUpdateVersion": "Տարբերակը փոխվել է", "txtIncorrectPwd": "Գաղտնաբառը սխալ է", "txtProtected": "Երբ գաղտնաբառը մուտքագրեք ու նիշքը բացեք, ընթացիկ գաղտնաբառը կվերակայվի", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Մուտքն արգելված է անանուն օգտատերերի համար:
                                Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:", "warnLicenseBefore": "Լիցենզիան ակտիվ չէ:
                                Խնդրում ենք կապվել ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ:", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների հետ միաժամանակյա միացումների սահմանաչափին:Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:Կապվեք Ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ՝ ավելին իմանալու համար:", "warnLicenseExp": "Ձեր լիցենզիայի ժամկետը լրացել է:Խնդրում ենք արդիացնել այն և թարմացնել էջը։", @@ -133,9 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագրիչներին միաժամանակ միանալու սահմանափակմանը։Կապվեք Ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ՝ ավելին իմանալու համար:", "warnNoLicense": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների հետ միաժամանակյա միացումների սահմանաչափին:Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:նձնական թարմացման պայմանների համար կապվեք %1 վաճառքի թիմի հետ:", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների օգտվողի սահմանաչափին:Անձնական թարմացման պայմանների համար կապվեք %1 վաճառքի թիմի հետ:", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "Դուք ֆայլը խմբագրելու թույլտվություն չունեք:", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "Դուք ֆայլը խմբագրելու թույլտվություն չունեք:" } }, "Error": { @@ -251,6 +251,7 @@ "textNextSlide": "Հաջորդ սահիկ", "textOk": "Լավ", "textOther": "Այլ", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Տեղադրեք պատկերի URL", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Նկար գրադարանից", "textPictureFromURL": "Նկար URL-ից", "textPreviousSlide": "Նախորդ սահիկ", @@ -264,8 +265,7 @@ "textSlideNumber": "Սահիկի համարը", "textTable": "Աղյուսակ", "textTableSize": "Աղյուսակի չափ", - "txtNotUrl": "Այս դաշտը պիտի լինի URL հասցե՝ \"http://www.example.com\" ձևաչափով։ ", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "Այս դաշտը պիտի լինի URL հասցե՝ \"http://www.example.com\" ձևաչափով։ " }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Զգուշացում", @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "Տանել հետ", "textMoveForward": "Տանել առաջ", "textNextSlide": "Հաջորդ սահիկ", + "textNoMatches": "Համընկնում չկա", "textNone": "Ոչ մեկը", "textNoStyles": "Այս տեսակի գծապատկերների համար ոճեր չկան:", "textNotUrl": "Այս դաշտը պիտի լինի URL հասցե՝ \"http://www.example.com\" ձևաչափով։ ", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "Խոշորացնել", "textZoomIn": "Մեծացնել", "textZoomOut": "Փոքրացնել", - "textZoomRotate": "Դիտափոխում և պտտում", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "Դիտափոխում և պտտում" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "Ստանդարտ (4:3)", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "Բեռնում...", "textLocation": "Տեղ", "textMacrosSettings": "Մակրոների կարգավորումներ", + "textNoMatches": "Համընկնում չկա", "textOk": "Լավ", "textOwner": "Տնօրինող", "textPoint": "Կետ", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Համագումար ", "txtScheme7": "Սեփական կապիտալ", "txtScheme8": "Հոսք", - "txtScheme9": "Հրատարակիչ", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Հրատարակիչ" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/id.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/id.json index f1b2b0e3ef..3c8145cc44 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/id.json @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "File berisi macros otomatis.
                                Apakah Anda ingin menjalankan macros?", "textNo": "Tidak", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Batas lisensi sudah tercapai", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yamg Cocok", "textOpenFile": "Masukkan kata sandi untuk buka file", "textPaidFeature": "Fitur berbayar", "textRemember": "Ingat pilihan saya", @@ -125,6 +126,7 @@ "titleUpdateVersion": "Versi telah diubah", "txtIncorrectPwd": "Password salah", "txtProtected": "Jika Anda memasukkan password dan membuka file, password file saat ini akan di reset.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Akses ditolak untuk pengguna anonim.
                                Dokumen ini akan dibuka hanya untuk dilihat.", "warnLicenseBefore": "Lisensi tidak aktif.
                                Harap hubungi administrator Anda.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja. Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "warnLicenseExp": "Lisensi Anda sudah kedaluwarsa. Silakan perbarui lisensi Anda dan muat ulang halaman.", @@ -133,9 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas user untuk %1 editor. Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "warnNoLicense": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja. Hubungi %1 tim sales untuk syarat personal upgrade.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Anda sudah mencapai batas user untuk %1 editor. Hubungi %1 tim sales untuk syarat personal upgrade.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "Anda tidak memiliki izin edit file ini.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "Anda tidak memiliki izin edit file ini." } }, "Error": { @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "Pindah Kebelakang", "textMoveForward": "Majukan", "textNextSlide": "Slide Berikutnya", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yamg Cocok", "textNone": "Tidak ada", "textNoStyles": "Tanpa style untuk tipe grafik ini.", "textNotUrl": "Ruas ini harus berupa sebuah URL dalam format “http://www.contoh.com”", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "Pembesaran", "textZoomIn": "Perbesar", "textZoomOut": "Perkecil", - "textZoomRotate": "Zoom dan Rotasi", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "Zoom dan Rotasi" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "Standard (4:3)", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "Memuat...", "textLocation": "Lokasi", "textMacrosSettings": "Pengaturan Macros", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yamg Cocok", "textOk": "OK", "textOwner": "Pemilik", "textPoint": "Titik", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Himpunan", "txtScheme7": "Margin Sisa", "txtScheme8": "Alur", - "txtScheme9": "Cetakan", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Cetakan" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/it.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/it.json index 56a670b769..b2176a13a9 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/it.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/it.json @@ -300,6 +300,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Puntato e numerato", "textCaseSensitive": "Maiuscole/minuscole", "textCellMargins": "Margini di cella", + "textChangeShape": "Cambia forma", "textChart": "Grafico", "textClock": "Orologio", "textClockwise": "In senso orario", @@ -415,7 +416,6 @@ "textZoomRotate": "Zoom e rotazione", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/ja.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/ja.json index 0cc8ae61d4..17aa06d281 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/ja.json @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "ファイルには自動マクロが含まれています。
                                マクロを実行しますか？", "textNo": "いいえ", "textNoLicenseTitle": "ライセンス制限に達しました", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textOpenFile": "ファイルを開くためにパスワードを入力してください", "textPaidFeature": "有料機能", "textRemember": "選択を覚える", @@ -125,6 +126,7 @@ "titleUpdateVersion": "バージョンが変更されました", "txtIncorrectPwd": "パスワードが間違い", "txtProtected": "パスワードを入力してファイルを開くと、現在のパスワードがリセットされます", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名ユーザーのアクセスは拒否されます。
                                このドキュメントは閲覧専用に開かれます。", "warnLicenseBefore": "ライセンスが無効になっています。
                                管理者までご連絡ください。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "％１エディター　時接続数の制限に達しました。この文書が見るだけのために開かれる。詳細についてはアドミニストレータを連絡してください。", "warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの有効期限が切れています。ライセンスを更新してページをリロードしてください。", @@ -133,9 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "％1エディターのユーザー制限に達しました。 詳細についてはアドミニストレータを連絡してください。", "warnNoLicense": "％１エディター　時接続数の制限に達しました。この文書が見るだけのために開かれる。個人的なアップグレード条件については、％1営業チームを連絡してください。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "％1エディターのユーザー制限に達しました。 個人的なアップグレード条件については、％1営業チームを連絡してください。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限がありません！", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限がありません！" } }, "Error": { @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "背面に動かす", "textMoveForward": "前面に動かす", "textNextSlide": "次のスライド", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textNone": "なし", "textNoStyles": "このチャットのタイプためにスタイルがない", "textNotUrl": "このフィールドは、「http://www.example.com」の形式のURLである必要があります。", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "ズーム", "textZoomIn": "拡大", "textZoomOut": "縮小", - "textZoomRotate": "ズームと回転", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "ズームと回転" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "標準(4:3)", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "読み込み中...", "textLocation": "場所", "textMacrosSettings": "マクロの設定", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textOk": "OK", "textOwner": "所有者", "textPoint": "ポイント", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "コンコース", "txtScheme7": "株主資本", "txtScheme8": "フロー", - "txtScheme9": "ファウンドリ", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "ファウンドリ" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/nl.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/nl.json index d091d7b20e..469eb39a6b 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/nl.json @@ -300,6 +300,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Opsommingstekens en nummers", "textCaseSensitive": "Hoofdlettergevoelig", "textCellMargins": "Celmarges", + "textChangeShape": "Vorm wijzigen", "textChart": "Grafiek", "textClock": "Klok", "textClockwise": "Rechtsom", @@ -415,7 +416,6 @@ "textZoomRotate": "Zoomen en draaien", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json index 58f802dc62..8d97af01ab 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ "textEditUser": "Utilizadores que estão a editar o ficheiro:", "textMessageDeleteComment": "Tem a certeza de que deseja eliminar este comentário?", "textMessageDeleteReply": "Tem a certeza de que deseja eliminar esta resposta?", - "textNoComments": "Este documento não contém comentários", + "textNoComments": "Sem comentários", "textOk": "OK", "textReopen": "Reabrir", "textResolve": "Resolver", @@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ "advDRMPassword": "Palavra-passe", "closeButtonText": "Fechar ficheiro", "criticalErrorTitle": "Erro", - "errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar realizar uma ação para a qual não tem autorização.
                                Por favor, contacte o seu administrador.", - "errorOpensource": "Utilizando a versão comunitária gratuita, pode abrir documentos apenas para visualização. Para aceder aos editores da web móvel, é necessária uma licença comercial.", + "errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar realizar uma ação para a qual não tem permissão.
                                Por favor, contacte o seu administrador.", + "errorOpensource": "Com a versão comunitária gratuita, apenas pode abrir documentos para visualização. Para aceder aos editores web móvel, é necessária uma licença comercial.", "errorProcessSaveResult": "Falha ao guardar.", "errorServerVersion": "A versão do editor foi atualizada. A página será recarregada para aplicar as alterações.", "errorUpdateVersion": "A versão do ficheiro foi alterada. A página será recarregada.", @@ -90,12 +90,12 @@ "Header": "Cabeçalho", "Image": "Imagem", "Loading": "A carregar", - "Media": "Multimédia", + "Media": "Média", "None": "Nenhum", "Picture": "Imagem", "Series": "Série", "Slide number": "Número do diapositivo", - "Slide subtitle": "Legenda do diapositivo", + "Slide subtitle": "Subtítulo do diapositivo", "Slide text": "Texto do diapositivo", "Slide title": "Título do diapositivo", "Table": "Tabela", @@ -107,35 +107,35 @@ "textBuyNow": "Visitar site", "textClose": "Fechar", "textContactUs": "Contacte a equipa comercial", - "textCustomLoader": "Desculpe mas não tem o direito de mudar o carregador. Por favor, contacte o nosso departamento de vendas para obter um orçamento.", + "textCustomLoader": "Desculpe, mas não tem o permissão para mudar o carregador. Contacte o nosso departamento de vendas para obter um orçamento.", "textGuest": "Convidado", "textHasMacros": "O ficheiro contém macros automáticas.
                                Deseja executar as macros?", "textNo": "Não", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Atingiu o limite da licença", + "textNoMatches": "Nenhuma ocorrência", "textOpenFile": "Introduza a palavra-passe para abrir o ficheiro", "textPaidFeature": "Funcionalidade paga", - "textRemember": "Memorizar a minha escolha", + "textRemember": "Memorizar escolha", "textReplaceSkipped": "A substituição foi realizada. {0} ocorrências foram ignoradas.", "textReplaceSuccess": "A pesquisa foi realizada. Ocorrências substituídas: {0}", - "textRequestMacros": "Uma macro faz um pedido de URL. Quer permitir o pedido à %1?", + "textRequestMacros": "Uma macro fez um pedido de URL. Deseja permitir o pedido à %1?", "textYes": "Sim", "titleLicenseExp": "Licença expirada", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "Licença inativa", "titleServerVersion": "Editor atualizado", "titleUpdateVersion": "Versão alterada", "txtIncorrectPwd": "A palavra-passe está incorreta", "txtProtected": "Assim que introduzir a palavra-passe e abrir o ficheiro, a palavra-passe atual será reposta", - "warnLicenseExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas a %1 editores. Este documento será aberto apenas para visualização. Contacte o seu administrador para obter mais informações.", - "warnLicenseExp": "A sua licença expirou. Por favor, renove-a e recarregue a página.", - "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "A licença expirou. Não tem acesso à funcionalidade de edição de documentos. Por favor contacte o seu administrador.", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acesso recusado para utilizadores anónimos.
                                O documento será aberto no modo de leitura.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "Licença inativa.
                                Contacte o administrador de sistemas.", + "warnLicenseExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas aos editores %1. Este documento será aberto no modo de leitura.
                                Contacte o seu administrador para mais detalhes.", + "warnLicenseExp": "A sua licença expirou. Renove a sua licença e recarregue a página.", + "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "A licença expirou. Não tem acesso à edição de documentos. Por favor contacte o seu administrador.", "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "Tem que renovar a sua licença. A edição de documentos está com funcionalidades limitadas.
                                Contacte o administrador para obter acesso total.", - "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de %1 editores. Contacte o seu administrador para obter detalhes.", - "warnNoLicense": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas a %1 editores. Este documento será aberto apenas para visualização. Contacte a %1 equipa de vendas para consultar os termos de atualização para si.", - "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Atingiu o limite de %1 editores. Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para obter mais informações.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "Não tem autorização para editar este ficheiro.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
                                Please contact your administrator." + "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Atingiu o limite de utilizadores para os editores %1. Contacte o seu administrador para obter detalhes.", + "warnNoLicense": "Atingiu o limite de ligações simultâneas aos editores %1. Este documento será aberto no modo de leitura.
                                Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para saber mais sobre os termos de licenciamento.", + "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Atingiu o limite de utilizadores para os editores %1. Contacte a equipa comercial %1 para obter mais informações.", + "warnProcessRightsChange": "Não tem permissões para editar este ficheiro." } }, "Error": { @@ -143,17 +143,17 @@ "criticalErrorExtText": "Clique em \"OK\" para voltar à lista de documentos.", "criticalErrorTitle": "Erro", "downloadErrorText": "Falha ao descarregar.", - "errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar realizar uma ação para a qual não tem autorização.
                                Por favor, contacte o seu administrador.", + "errorAccessDeny": "Está a tentar realizar uma ação para a qual não tem permissão.
                                Por favor, contacte o seu administrador.", "errorBadImageUrl": "O URL da imagem está incorreto", - "errorConnectToServer": "Não é possível guardar este documento. Verifique as definições de ligação ou entre em contato com o administrador.
                                Ao clicar no botão 'OK', será solicitado a descarregar o documento.", + "errorConnectToServer": "Não foi possível guardar este documento. Verifique as definições de ligação ou contacte o seu administrador.
                                Se clicar no botão 'OK', será solicitado a descarregar o documento.", "errorDatabaseConnection": "Erro externo.
                                Erro de ligação à base de dados. Contacte o suporte.", "errorDataEncrypted": "Foram recebidas alterações cifradas que não puderam ser decifradas.", "errorDataRange": "Intervalo de dados incorreto.", "errorDefaultMessage": "Código de erro: %1", "errorDirectUrl": "Verifique a ligação ao documento.
                                Deve ser uma ligação direta para o ficheiro a descarregar.", "errorEditingDownloadas": "Ocorreu um erro ao trabalhar com o documento.
                                Use a opção 'Descarregar' para guardar a cópia de segurança do ficheiro localmente.", - "errorFilePassProtect": "Este ficheiro está protegido por uma palavra-passe e não foi possível abrir.", - "errorFileSizeExceed": "O tamanho do ficheiro excede o limitação permitido pelo servidor.
                                Por favor, contacte o seu administrador.", + "errorFilePassProtect": "Este ficheiro está protegido por palavra-passe e não pode ser aberto.", + "errorFileSizeExceed": "O tamanho do ficheiro excede o limite permitido pelo servidor.
                                Contacte o seu administrador.", "errorInconsistentExt": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro não coincide com a sua extensão.", "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a um documento de texto (doc, docx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a um dos seguintes formatos: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", @@ -161,33 +161,33 @@ "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma folha de cálculo (xls, xlsx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "errorKeyEncrypt": "Descritor de chave desconhecido", "errorKeyExpire": "Descritor de chave expirado", - "errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
                                Por favor contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "errorSessionAbsolute": "A sessão de edição de documentos expirou. Por favor, recarregue a página.", - "errorSessionIdle": "O documento não foi editado durante muito tempo. Por favor, recarregue a página.", - "errorSessionToken": "A ligação ao servidor foi interrompida. Por favor, recarregue a página.", - "errorStockChart": "Ordem das linhas incorreta. Para construir um gráfico de cotações, introduza os dados na folha com a seguinte ordem:
                                preço de abertura, preço máximo, preço mínimo, preço de fecho.", - "errorToken": "O token de segurança do documento não está formado corretamente.
                                Entre em contato com o administrador do Servidor de Documentos.", - "errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
                                Entre em contacto com o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação com a Internet foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro foi alterada.
                                Antes de continuar a trabalhar, descarregue o ficheiro ou copie o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada seja perdido e depois recarregue esta página.", + "errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
                                Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "errorSessionAbsolute": "A sessão de edição de documentos expirou. Recarregue a página.", + "errorSessionIdle": "O documento não foi editado durante muito tempo. Recarregue a página.", + "errorSessionToken": "A ligação ao servidor foi interrompida. Recarregue a página.", + "errorStockChart": "Ordem de linhas incorreta. Para criar um gráfico de cotações, introduza os dados na folha com a seguinte ordem:
                                preço de abertura, preço máximo, preço mínimo, preço de fecho.", + "errorToken": "O 'token' de segurança do documento não está formatado corretamente.
                                Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
                                Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação à Internet foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro foi alterada.
                                Antes de continuar a trabalhar, descarregue o ficheiro ou copie o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada seja perdido e, depois, recarregue a página.", "errorUserDrop": "De momento, não é possível aceder ao ficheiro.", "errorUsersExceed": "Excedeu o número máximo de utilizadores permitidos pelo seu plano", "errorViewerDisconnect": "Ligação perdida. Ainda pode ver o documento mas não será
                                possível descarregar ou imprimir até que a ligação seja restaurada e a página recarregada.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "openErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro", "saveErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao guardar o ficheiro", - "scriptLoadError": "A ligação está demasiado lenta e não foi possível carregar alguns dos componentes. Por favor, recarregue a página. ", + "scriptLoadError": "A ligação está demasiado lenta e não foi possível carregar alguns dos componentes. Recarregue a página. ", "splitDividerErrorText": "O número de linhas tem que ser um divisor de %1", "splitMaxColsErrorText": "O número de colunas tem que ser inferior a %1", "splitMaxRowsErrorText": "O número de linhas tem que ser inferior a %1", "unknownErrorText": "Erro desconhecido.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Formato de imagem desconhecido.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Nenhuma imagem foi carregada.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "A imagem é muito grande. O tamanho máximo é de 25 MB." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "A imagem é muito grande. O tamanho máximo permitido é de 25 MB." }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "A carregar dados...", "applyChangesTitleText": "A carregar dados", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "O tamanho das ações excede a limitação definida para o seu servidor.
                                Pressione \"Desfazer\" para cancelar a sua última ação ou pressione \"Continuar\" para manter a ação localmente (precisa de transferir o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada seja perdido).", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "O tamanho das ações excede o limite definido para o seu servidor.
                                Clique em \"Desfazer\" para cancelar a sua última ação ou em \"Continuar\" para manter a ação localmente (tem que descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada seja perdido).", "downloadTextText": "A descarregar documento...", "downloadTitleText": "A descarregar documento", "loadFontsTextText": "A carregar dados...", @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ "textComment": "Comentário", "textDefault": "Texto selecionado", "textDisplay": "Exibição", - "textDone": "Concluido", + "textDone": "Concluído", "textEmptyImgUrl": "Tem que especificar o URL da imagem.", "textExternalLink": "Ligação externa", "textFirstSlide": "Primeiro diapositivo", @@ -251,6 +251,7 @@ "textNextSlide": "Diapositivo seguinte", "textOk": "OK", "textOther": "Outros", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Colar um URL de imagem", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Imagem da biblioteca", "textPictureFromURL": "Imagem de um URL", "textPreviousSlide": "Diapositivo anterior", @@ -264,8 +265,7 @@ "textSlideNumber": "Número do diapositivo", "textTable": "Tabela", "textTableSize": "Tamanho da tabela", - "txtNotUrl": "Este campo deve ser um URL no formato \"http://www.exemplo.com\"", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtNotUrl": "Este campo deve ser um URL no formato \"http://www.exemplo.com\"" }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", @@ -279,13 +279,13 @@ "textAlignBottom": "Alinhar em baixo", "textAlignCenter": "Alinhar ao centro", "textAlignLeft": "Alinhar à esquerda", - "textAlignMiddle": "Alinhar ao centro", + "textAlignMiddle": "Alinhar ao meio", "textAlignRight": "Alinhar à direita", "textAlignTop": "Alinhar em cima", "textAllCaps": "Tudo em maiúsculas", "textApplyAll": "Aplicar a todos os diapositivos", "textArrange": "Organizar", - "textAuto": "Automático", + "textAuto": "Auto", "textAutomatic": "Automático", "textBack": "Recuar", "textBandedColumn": "Diferenciação de colunas", @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "Mover para trás", "textMoveForward": "Mover para a frente", "textNextSlide": "Diapositivo seguinte", + "textNoMatches": "Nenhuma ocorrência", "textNone": "Nenhum", "textNoStyles": "Sem estilos para este tipo de gráficos.", "textNotUrl": "Este campo deve ser um URL no formato \"http://www.exemplo.com\"", @@ -387,7 +388,7 @@ "textScreenTip": "Dica no ecrã", "textSearch": "Pesquisar", "textSec": "s", - "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Selecione o objeto para editar", + "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Selecione o objeto a editar", "textSendToBackground": "Enviar para segundo plano", "textShape": "Forma", "textSize": "Tamanho", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "Ampliação", "textZoomIn": "Ampliar", "textZoomOut": "Reduzir", - "textZoomRotate": "Ampliação e rotação", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "Ampliação e rotação" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "Padrão (4:3)", @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ "textEmail": "e-mail:", "textEnableAll": "Ativar tudo", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Ativar todas as macros sem notificação", - "textFeedback": "Feedback e suporte", + "textFeedback": "Comentários e suporte", "textFind": "Localizar", "textFindAndReplace": "Localizar e substituir", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "Localizar e substituir tudo", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "A carregar...", "textLocation": "Localização", "textMacrosSettings": "Definições de macros", + "textNoMatches": "Nenhuma ocorrência", "textOk": "OK", "textOwner": "Proprietário", "textPoint": "Ponto", @@ -489,12 +490,12 @@ "txtScheme11": "Metro", "txtScheme12": "Módulo", "txtScheme13": "Opulento", - "txtScheme14": "Janela saliente", + "txtScheme14": "Oriel", "txtScheme15": "Origem", "txtScheme16": "Papel", "txtScheme17": "Solstício", "txtScheme18": "Técnico", - "txtScheme19": "Viagem", + "txtScheme19": "Trek", "txtScheme2": "Escala de cinza", "txtScheme20": "Urbano", "txtScheme21": "Verve", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "Concurso", "txtScheme7": "Equidade", "txtScheme8": "Fluxo", - "txtScheme9": "Fundição", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "Fundição" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/si.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/si.json index 7046e80cb4..1b9ce96860 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/si.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/si.json @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ "textBack": "ආපසු", "textEditor": "සමර්පණ සංස්කරකය", "textEmail": "වි-තැපෑල", - "textPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "textPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "textTel": "දු.ක.", "textVersion": "අනුවාදය" }, @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ "menuDeleteTable": "වගුව මකන්න", "menuEdit": "සංස්කරණය", "menuEditLink": "සබැඳිය සංස්කරණය", - "menuMerge": "සංයුක්ත", + "menuMerge": "ඒකාබද්ධ", "menuMore": "තව", "menuOpenLink": "සබැඳිය විවෘත කරන්න", "menuSplit": "පැළීම", @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "ගොනුවේ ස්වයංක්‍රීය සාර්ව අඩංගු වේ.
                                ඔබට සාර්ව ධාවනයට වුවමනාද?", "textNo": "නැහැ", "textNoLicenseTitle": "බලපත්‍රයේ සීමාවට ලඟාවුණි", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textOpenFile": "ගොනුව විවෘත කිරීමට මුරපදයක් යොදන්න", "textPaidFeature": "ගෙවන විශේෂාංගයකි", "textRemember": "මාගේ තේරීම මතක තබාගන්න", @@ -125,6 +126,7 @@ "titleUpdateVersion": "අනුවාදය වෙනස් කෙරිණි", "txtIncorrectPwd": "මුරපදය සාවද්‍යයි", "txtProtected": "ඔබ මුරපදය ඇතුල් කර ගොනුව විවෘත කළ පසු, ගොනුවේ වත්මන් මුරපදය යළි සැකසෙනු ඇත", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික පරිශ්‍රීලකයින් සඳහා ප්‍රවේශය ප්‍රතික්‍ෂේපිතයි.
                                මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වනු ඇත.", "warnLicenseBefore": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත.
                                කරුණාකර ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ. තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnLicenseExp": "ඔබගේ බලපත්‍රය කල් ඉකුත් වී ඇත. එය යාවත්කාල කර පිටුව නැවුම් කරන්න.", @@ -133,9 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක සඳහා පරිශීලක සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnNoLicense": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ. පුද්ගලික උත්ශ්‍රේණි නියම සඳහා %1 අලෙවි කණ්ඩායම අමතන්න.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක සඳහා පරිශීලක සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. පුද්ගලික උත්ශ්‍රේණි නියම සඳහා %1 අලෙවි කණ්ඩායම අමතන්න.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "ඔබට ගොනුව සංස්කරණය කිරීමට අවසර නැත.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "ඔබට ගොනුව සංස්කරණය කිරීමට අවසර නැත." } }, "Error": { @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "ආපස්සට ගෙනයන්න", "textMoveForward": "ඉදිරියට ගෙනයන්න", "textNextSlide": "ඊළඟ චිත්‍රකාචය", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textNone": "කිසිවක් නැත", "textNoStyles": "මෙම වර්ගයේ ප්‍රස්ථාර සඳහා ශෛලීන් නැත.", "textNotUrl": "මෙම ක්‍ෂේත්‍රය \"http://උපවසම.උදාහරණය.ලංකා\" ආකෘතියේ ඒ.ස.නි. ක් විය යුතුය.", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "විශාල කරන්න", "textZoomIn": "විශාලනය", "textZoomOut": "කුඩාලනය", - "textZoomRotate": "විශාලනය හා කරකවන්න", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "විශාලනය හා කරකවන්න" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "සම්මත (4:3)", @@ -461,10 +461,11 @@ "textLoading": "පූරණය වෙමින්...", "textLocation": "ස්ථානය", "textMacrosSettings": "සාර්ව සැකසුම්", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textOk": "හරි", "textOwner": "හිමිකරු", "textPoint": "ලක්‍ෂය", - "textPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "textPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "textPresentationInfo": "සමර්පණයේ තොරතුරු", "textPresentationSettings": "සමර්පණයෙහි සැකසුම්", "textPresentationTitle": "සමර්පණයෙහි සිරැසිය", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "ජනසමූහය", "txtScheme7": "සමකොටස්", "txtScheme8": "ගලායාම", - "txtScheme9": "වාත්තු පොළ", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "වාත්තු පොළ" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sk.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sk.json index 3bf9411cca..178e428804 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sk.json @@ -300,6 +300,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Odrážky & Číslovanie", "textCaseSensitive": "Rozlišovať veľkosť písmen", "textCellMargins": "Okraje bunky", + "textChangeShape": "Zmeniť tvar", "textChart": "Graf", "textClock": "Hodiny", "textClockwise": "V smere hodinových ručičiek", @@ -415,7 +416,6 @@ "textZoomRotate": "Priblížiť a otáčať", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sl.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sl.json index e4bd3be19a..09e8b667d6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/sl.json @@ -73,6 +73,7 @@ "textCancel": "Zapri", "textColumns": "Stolpci", "textComment": "Komentar", + "textShape": "Oblika", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textDefault": "Selected text", "textDisplay": "Display", @@ -100,7 +101,6 @@ "textRequired": "Required", "textRows": "Rows", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSlide": "Slide", "textSlideInThisPresentation": "Slide in this Presentation", "textSlideNumber": "Slide Number", @@ -115,6 +115,9 @@ "textAdditionalFormatting": "Dodatno oblikovanje", "textAfter": "po", "textBack": "Nazaj", + "textChangeShape": "Spremeni obliko", + "textRemoveShape": "Odstrani obliko", + "textShape": "Oblika", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAddress": "Address", "textAlign": "Align", @@ -143,7 +146,6 @@ "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCaseSensitive": "Case Sensitive", "textCellMargins": "Cell Margins", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textChart": "Chart", "textClock": "Clock", "textClockwise": "Clockwise", @@ -219,7 +221,6 @@ "textPush": "Push", "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", @@ -231,7 +232,6 @@ "textSec": "s", "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSize": "Size", "textSlide": "Slide", "textSlideInThisPresentation": "Slide in this Presentation", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/tr.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/tr.json index ee0ad08c57..c9b55699a9 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/tr.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/tr.json @@ -299,6 +299,7 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "madde imleri ve numaralandırma", "textCaseSensitive": "Büyük küçük harfe duyarlı", "textCellMargins": "Hücre Kenar Boşluğu", + "textChangeShape": "Şekli değiştir", "textChart": "Grafik", "textClock": "Saat", "textClockwise": "Saat yönünde", @@ -412,7 +413,6 @@ "textArrange": "Arrange", "textAutomatic": "Automatic", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDesign": "Design", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/uk.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/uk.json index 0127a3c478..4c456ffddf 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/uk.json @@ -190,6 +190,7 @@ "textAddress": "Адреса", "textBack": "Назад", "textCancel": "Скасувати", + "textShape": "Фігура", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textColumns": "Columns", "textComment": "Comment", @@ -219,7 +220,6 @@ "textRequired": "Required", "textRows": "Rows", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSlide": "Slide", "textSlideInThisPresentation": "Slide in this Presentation", "textSlideNumber": "Slide Number", @@ -258,12 +258,14 @@ "textBulletsAndNumbers": "Маркери та нумерація", "textCaseSensitive": "З урахуванням регістру", "textCellMargins": "Поля клітинки", + "textChangeShape": "Змінити фігуру", "textChart": "Діаграма", + "textRemoveShape": "Видалити форму", + "textShape": "Фігура", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textBlack": "Through Black", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClock": "Clock", "textClockwise": "Clockwise", "textColor": "Color", @@ -338,7 +340,6 @@ "textPush": "Push", "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", "textRemoveTable": "Remove Table", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", @@ -350,7 +351,6 @@ "textSec": "s", "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSize": "Size", "textSlide": "Slide", "textSlideInThisPresentation": "Slide in this Presentation", diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json index 6d0b9008be..8718507dbc 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ "textOk": "確定", "textReopen": "重開", "textResolve": "解決", + "textSharingSettings": "分享設定", "textTryUndoRedo": "在快速共同編輯模式下，撤消/重做功能被禁用。", - "textUsers": "使用者", - "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings" + "textUsers": "使用者" }, "HighlightColorPalette": { "textNoFill": "沒有填充" @@ -52,6 +52,7 @@ "menuDelete": "刪除", "menuDeleteTable": "刪除表格", "menuEdit": "編輯", + "menuEditLink": "編輯連結", "menuMerge": "合併", "menuMore": "更多", "menuOpenLink": "打開連結", @@ -62,8 +63,7 @@ "textDoNotShowAgain": "不再顯示", "textOk": "確定", "textRows": "行列", - "txtWarnUrl": "這連結可能對您的設備和資料造成損害。
                                您確定要繼續嗎？", - "menuEditLink": "Edit Link" + "txtWarnUrl": "這連結可能對您的設備和資料造成損害。
                                您確定要繼續嗎？" }, "Controller": { "Main": { @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "此檔案包含自動巨集程式。
                                是否要運行這些巨集？", "textNo": "沒有", "textNoLicenseTitle": "達到許可限制", + "textNoMatches": "無匹配", "textOpenFile": "輸入檔案密碼", "textPaidFeature": "付費功能", "textRemember": "記住我的選擇", @@ -120,10 +121,13 @@ "textRequestMacros": "有一個巨集指令要求連結至URL。是否允許該要求至%1?", "textYes": "是", "titleLicenseExp": "證件過期", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "授權未啟用", "titleServerVersion": "編輯器已更新", "titleUpdateVersion": "版本已更改", "txtIncorrectPwd": "密碼錯誤", "txtProtected": "輸入密碼並打開文件後，該文件的當前密碼將被重置", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名使用者無法存取。
                                此文件將僅供檢視。", + "warnLicenseBefore": "授權未啟用。
                                請聯絡您的管理員。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "您已達到同時連接到 %1 編輯器的限制。此文件將只提供檢視。請聯繫您的管理員以了解更多資訊。", "warnLicenseExp": "您的授權已過期。請更新它並重新載入頁面。", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "授權過期。 您無法進入文件編輯功能。 請聯繫您的管理員。", @@ -131,11 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。請與您的管理員聯繫以了解更多信息。", "warnNoLicense": "您已達到同時連接到 %1 編輯器的限制。此文件將只提供檢視。有關個人升級條款，請聯繫 %1 業務團隊。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。與％1銷售團隊聯繫以了解個人升級條款。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "您沒有編輯此文件的權限。", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
                                Please contact your administrator." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "您沒有編輯此文件的權限。" } }, "Error": { @@ -150,9 +150,15 @@ "errorDataEncrypted": "已收到加密的更改，無法解密。", "errorDataRange": "不正確的資料範圍", "errorDefaultMessage": "錯誤編號：%1", + "errorDirectUrl": "請驗證指向文檔的連結。
                                此連結必須是指向要下載文件的直接連結。", "errorEditingDownloadas": "處理文件檔時發生錯誤。
                                請使用\"下載\"來儲存一份備份檔案到本機端。", "errorFilePassProtect": "此文件使用密碼保護功能，無法開啟。", "errorFileSizeExceed": "檔案大小已超過了您的伺服器限制。
                                請聯繫您的管理員。", + "errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "errorKeyEncrypt": "未知密鑰描述符", "errorKeyExpire": "密鑰描述符已過期", "errorLoadingFont": "字體未載入。
                                請聯絡文件服務(Document Server)管理員。", @@ -160,6 +166,8 @@ "errorSessionIdle": "無 該文件已經有一段時間沒有進行編輯了。 請重新載入頁面。", "errorSessionToken": "主機連線被中斷，請重新載入此頁面。", "errorStockChart": "行序錯誤。要建立股票圖表，請將數據按照以下順序工作表：
                                開盤價、最高價、最低價、收盤價。", + "errorToken": "文檔安全令牌的格式不正確。
                                請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", + "errorTokenExpire": "文檔安全令牌已過期。
                                請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "網路連線已恢復，且文件版本已變更。
                                在您繼續工作之前，請下載文件或複製其內容以確保沒有任何內容遺失，之後重新載入本頁面。", "errorUserDrop": "目前無法存取該文件。", "errorUsersExceed": "超出了定價計劃所允許的用戶數量", @@ -174,19 +182,12 @@ "unknownErrorText": "未知錯誤。", "uploadImageExtMessage": "圖片格式未知。", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "沒有上傳圖片。", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大大小為25MB。", - "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
                                This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
                                The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
                                Please contact your Document Server administrator." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大大小為25MB。" }, "LongActions": { "applyChangesTextText": "加載數據中...", "applyChangesTitleText": "加載數據中", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "操作的大小超過了伺服器設定的限制。
                                按下「復原」以取消最後一個動作，或按下「繼續」以在本地保留動作（需下載檔案或複製其內容，以確保不會遺失任何內容）", "downloadTextText": "文件下載中...", "downloadTitleText": "文件下載中", "loadFontsTextText": "加載數據中...", @@ -209,14 +210,13 @@ "savePreparingTitle": "正在準備保存。請耐心等待...", "saveTextText": "儲存文件...", "saveTitleText": "儲存文件", + "textContinue": "繼續", "textLoadingDocument": "載入文件", + "textUndo": "復原", "txtEditingMode": "設定編輯模式...", "uploadImageTextText": "正在上傳圖片...", "uploadImageTitleText": "上載圖片", - "waitText": "請耐心等待...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
                                Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", - "textContinue": "Continue", - "textUndo": "Undo" + "waitText": "請耐心等待..." }, "Toolbar": { "dlgLeaveMsgText": "您在此文件中有未儲存的變更。點擊\"留在此頁面\"以等待自動儲存。點擊\"離開此頁面\"以放棄所有未儲存的變更。", @@ -235,6 +235,7 @@ "textComment": "評論", "textDefault": "所選文字", "textDisplay": "顯示", + "textDone": "完成", "textEmptyImgUrl": "您需要指定影像的 URL。", "textExternalLink": "外部連結", "textFirstSlide": "第一張幻燈片", @@ -250,9 +251,12 @@ "textNextSlide": "下一張幻燈片", "textOk": "確定", "textOther": "其它", + "textPasteImageUrl": "貼上圖片網址", "textPictureFromLibrary": "圖片來自圖書館", "textPictureFromURL": "網址圖片", "textPreviousSlide": "上一張幻燈片", + "textRecommended": "推薦的", + "textRequired": "需要", "textRows": "行列", "textScreenTip": "屏幕提示", "textShape": "形狀", @@ -261,11 +265,7 @@ "textSlideNumber": "幻燈片頁碼", "textTable": "表格", "textTableSize": "表格大小", - "txtNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為“ http://www.example.com”的URL。", - "textDone": "Done", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required" + "txtNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為“ http://www.example.com”的URL。" }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -284,6 +284,7 @@ "textAlignTop": "上方對齊", "textAllCaps": "全部大寫", "textApplyAll": "應用於所有投影片", + "textArrange": "安排", "textAuto": "自動", "textAutomatic": "自動", "textBack": "返回", @@ -298,8 +299,10 @@ "textBringToForeground": "移到前景執行", "textBullets": "項目符號", "textBulletsAndNumbers": "符號項目與編號", + "textCancel": "取消", "textCaseSensitive": "區分大小寫", "textCellMargins": "儲存格邊距", + "textChangeShape": "更改形狀", "textChart": "圖表", "textClock": "時鐘", "textClockwise": "順時針", @@ -309,6 +312,8 @@ "textCustomColor": "自訂顏色", "textDefault": "所選文字", "textDelay": "延遲", + "textDeleteImage": "刪除影像", + "textDeleteLink": "刪除連結", "textDeleteSlide": "刪除幻燈片", "textDesign": "設計", "textDisplay": "顯示", @@ -344,6 +349,7 @@ "textHyperlink": "超連結", "textImage": "圖像", "textImageURL": "圖像 URL", + "textInsertImage": "插入圖片", "textLastColumn": "最後一欄", "textLastSlide": "最後一張幻燈片", "textLayout": "佈局", @@ -357,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "向後移動", "textMoveForward": "向前移動", "textNextSlide": "下一張幻燈片", + "textNoMatches": "無匹配", "textNone": "無", "textNoStyles": "此類型的圖表沒有樣式。", "textNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為\"http://www.example.com\"的URL。", @@ -369,12 +376,14 @@ "textPreviousSlide": "上一張幻燈片", "textPt": "pt", "textPush": "推", + "textRecommended": "推薦的", "textRemoveChart": "刪除圖表", "textRemoveShape": "去除形狀", "textRemoveTable": "刪除表", "textReplace": "取代", "textReplaceAll": "全部替換", "textReplaceImage": "替換圖片", + "textRequired": "需要", "textRight": "右", "textScreenTip": "屏幕提示", "textSearch": "搜尋", @@ -412,16 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "放大", "textZoomIn": "放大", "textZoomOut": "縮小", - "textZoomRotate": "放大和旋轉", - "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", - "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textRequired": "Required" + "textZoomRotate": "放大和旋轉" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "標準(4:3)", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "載入中...", "textLocation": "位置", "textMacrosSettings": "巨集設定", + "textNoMatches": "無匹配", "textOk": "確定", "textOwner": "擁有者", "textPoint": "點", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "大堂", "txtScheme7": "產權", "txtScheme8": "流程", - "txtScheme9": "鑄造廠", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "鑄造廠" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh.json b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh.json index 44d2d657dc..c0f2f5c06a 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/mobile/locale/zh.json @@ -112,6 +112,7 @@ "textHasMacros": "这个文件带有自动宏。
                                是否要运行宏？", "textNo": "不", "textNoLicenseTitle": "触碰到许可证数量限制。", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textOpenFile": "输入密码来打开文件", "textPaidFeature": "付费功能", "textRemember": "记住我的选择", @@ -125,6 +126,7 @@ "titleUpdateVersion": "版本已变化", "txtIncorrectPwd": "密码有误", "txtProtected": "在您输入密码和打开文件后，该文件的当前密码将被重置", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "拒绝匿名用户的访问。
                                本文档将以仅查看模式而打开。", "warnLicenseBefore": "许可证未激活。
                                请联系管理员。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。该文档打开后，你将只能查看。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", "warnLicenseExp": "你的许可证过期了。请更新你的许可证，然后刷新该页。", @@ -133,9 +135,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", "warnNoLicense": "你已经触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制. 该文档打开后，你将只能查看。请联系 %1 的销售团队，获取个人升级条款。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "你没有编辑文件的权限。", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
                                This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "你没有编辑文件的权限。" } }, "Error": { @@ -363,6 +363,7 @@ "textMoveBackward": "向后移动", "textMoveForward": "向前移动", "textNextSlide": "下一张幻灯片", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textNone": "无", "textNoStyles": "这个类型的表格没有对应的样式设定。", "textNotUrl": "该字段应为“http://www.example.com”格式的URL", @@ -420,8 +421,7 @@ "textZoom": "放大", "textZoomIn": "放大", "textZoomOut": "缩小", - "textZoomRotate": "缩放并旋转", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "textZoomRotate": "缩放并旋转" }, "Settings": { "mniSlideStandard": "标准（4：3）", @@ -461,6 +461,7 @@ "textLoading": "加载中…", "textLocation": "位置", "textMacrosSettings": "宏设置", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textOk": "确定", "textOwner": "创建者", "textPoint": "点", @@ -505,8 +506,7 @@ "txtScheme6": "中央大厅", "txtScheme7": "公平", "txtScheme8": "流动", - "txtScheme9": "发现", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "txtScheme9": "发现" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json index 7cadc5bb24..9722e36d1e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/pt-pt.json @@ -20,9 +20,9 @@ "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a um dos seguintes formatos: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma apresentação (ppt, pptx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.
                                O conteúdo do ficheiro corresponde a uma folha de cálculo (xls, xlsx...), mas a extensão de ficheiro não é consistente: %1", - "SSE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
                                Por favor contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "SSE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
                                Entre em contacto com o administrador do servidor de documentos.", - "SSE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro foi alterada.
                                Antes de poder continuar a trabalhar, é necessário descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e depois voltar a carregar esta página.", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "Tipos de letra não carregados.
                                Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "O 'token' de segurança do documento expirou.
                                Contacte o administrador do servidor de documentos.", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A ligação foi restaurada e a versão do ficheiro alterada.
                                Antes de poder trabalhar, tem que descarregar o ficheiro ou copiar o seu conteúdo para garantir que nada se perde e, depois, recarregue esta página.", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "De momento, não é possível aceder ao ficheiro.", "SSE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", "SSE.ApplicationController.openErrorText": "Ocorreu um erro ao abrir o ficheiro.", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/uk.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/uk.json index 9467549ba0..0ffb4565bc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/uk.json @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Висота", "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Розповсюдити посилання", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Ширина", + "common.view.SearchBar.textFind": "Знайти", "SSE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Не вдалося конвертувати", "SSE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Термін переходу перевищено.", "SSE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Помилка", @@ -34,5 +35,6 @@ "SSE.ApplicationView.txtFileLocation": "Відкрити розташування файлу", "SSE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Повноекранний режим", "SSE.ApplicationView.txtPrint": "Друк", + "SSE.ApplicationView.txtSearch": "Пошук", "SSE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Доступ" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json index 94964d4302..0bd1b55eb9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/embed/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -15,6 +15,11 @@ "SSE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "該文件受密碼保護，無法打開。", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "此檔案超過這一主機限制的大小
                                進一步資訊，請聯絡您的文件服務主機的管理者。", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorForceSave": "保存文件時發生錯誤。請使用“下載為”選項將文件保存到電腦機硬碟中，或稍後再試。", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "SSE.ApplicationController.errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
                                檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorLoadingFont": "字體未加載。
                                請聯繫文件服務器管理員。", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorTokenExpire": "此文件安全憑證(Security Token)已過期。
                                請與您的Document Server管理員聯繫。", "SSE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internet連接已恢復，文件版本已更改。
                                在繼續工作之前，您需要下載文件或複制其內容以確保沒有丟失，然後重新加載此頁面。", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/controller/Statusbar.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/controller/Statusbar.js index 2562916701..0f2b3ba002 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/controller/Statusbar.js +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/controller/Statusbar.js @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ define([ } } var listItem =this.statusbar.sheetListMenu.items[index]; - if (listItem.$el.children().first().data('hidden')) { + if (listItem && listItem.$el && listItem.$el.children().first().data('hidden')) { listItem.setDisabled(locked); } }, diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/view/AutoFilterDialog.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/view/AutoFilterDialog.js index 25d15882c1..15dca294e8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/view/AutoFilterDialog.js +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/app/view/AutoFilterDialog.js @@ -1010,8 +1010,8 @@ define([ '
                                ', '
                                ', '
                                ', - '', - '
                                ', + '', + '
                                ', '
                                ', '
                                ', '
                                ', @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ define([ el: $('#id-dlg-filter-values', this.$window), store: this.cells, simpleAddMode: true, - template: _.template(['
                                '].join('')), + template: _.template(['
                                '].join('')), itemTemplate: _.template([ '
                                ', '

                                Search and Replace Functions

                                To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel.

                                -

                                A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.

                                +

                                A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar.

                                Find small panel

                                To access the advanced settings, click the icon.

                                The Find and replace panel will open:

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 650bdb63d6..e2f7fa3089 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -20,18 +20,42 @@

                                Supported Formats of Spreadsheets

                                The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to open, view and edit the most popular spreadsheet file formats.

                                While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (XLSX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability.

                                The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing.

                                - - - - +
                                FormatsDescription
                                + + + - + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -39,7 +63,7 @@

                                Supported Formats of Spreadsheets

                                - + @@ -47,45 +71,69 @@

                                Supported Formats of Spreadsheets

                                - + - - - + + + - - - - + + + - - + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - -
                                FormatsDescription View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML
                                CSVComma Separated Values
                                File format used to store tabular data (numbers and text) in plain-text form                                		Comma Separated Values
                                A file format used to store tabular data (numbers and text) in plain-text form.                                		++
                                ETWPS Spreadsheets Workbook
                                A spreadsheet file format included in the WPS Office suite that supports charts and formulas and stores data in rows and columns of cells.                                		++
                                ETTWPS Spreadsheets Template
                                A spreadsheet template included in the WPS Office suite. ETT files are similar to ET files, storing rows and columns of data, charts, and graphs, but they are primarily used for duplicating spreadsheets with similar layouts and information.                                		++
                                FODSOpenDocument Flat XML Spreadsheet
                                An XML-based file format for saving and exchanging spreadsheets.                                		 +
                                ODSFile extension for spreadsheet files used by OpenOffice and StarOffice suites, an open standard for spreadsheetsA file extension for spreadsheet files used by OpenOffice and StarOffice suites, an open standard for spreadsheets. +
                                OTSOpenDocument Spreadsheet Template
                                OpenDocument file format for spreadsheet templates. An OTS template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting                                		OpenDocument Spreadsheet Template
                                An OpenDocument file format for spreadsheet templates. An OTS template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting                                		 + +
                                XLSFile extension for spreadsheet files created by Microsoft Excel
                                SXCSun XML Calc
                                An XML based spreadsheet file format that belongs to OpenOffice suite, supports formulas, functions, macros and charts.                                		 + +
                                XLSXDefault file extension for spreadsheet files written in Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (or later versions)+Default file extension for spreadsheet files written in Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (or later versions).+ ++
                                XLTMAn XLTM file is a macro-enabled spreadsheet template created by Microsoft Excel.++
                                XLTXExcel Open XML Spreadsheet Template
                                Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for spreadsheet templates. An XLTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting                                		Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template
                                Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for spreadsheet templates. An XLTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting.                                		 + +
                                + + + XML + Extensible Markup Language (XML)
                                A file format that is used for structuring, storing and transmitting data. + + + + + + + +

                                The following table contains the formats in which you can download a spreadsheet from the File -> Download as menu.

                                @@ -94,31 +142,55 @@

                                Supported Formats of Spreadsheets

                                - + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + - - + + - + + + + --> + + + + - + - - + + + + + +
                                CSVCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXJPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                ETCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                ETTCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                FODSCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                ODSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                SXCCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                OTSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX
                                CSV, JPG, ODS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                XLSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                XLSBCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTX
                                XLSMCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                XLSXCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLTM, XLTX
                                XLTXCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXXLTMCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTX
                                XMLCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX

                                You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your spreadsheets into the most known file formats.

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm index 9dac1c0bd6..f6555189aa 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@

                                Data tab

                              • group and ungroup data,
                              • set data validation parameters,
                              • get data from TXT/CSV file,
                                • -
                              • view other files the spreadsheet is linked to via the External Links button.
                                • +
                              • view other files the spreadsheet is linked to via the External Links button.
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e5c66e8e74 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Draw tab + + + + + + + + +
                              +
                              + +
                              +

                              Draw tab

                              +

                              The Draw tab of the Spreadsheet Editor allows users to perform basic drawing operations.

                              +
                              +

                              The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor:

                              +

                              Draw tab

                              +
                              +
                              +

                              The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor:

                              +

                              Draw tab

                              +
                              +

                              Using this tab, you can:

                              + +
                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 1ba43b2875..dfa91273aa 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

                              Plugins tab

                              The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor:

                              Plugins tab

                              -

                              The Settings button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all the installed plugins and add your own ones.

                              +

                              The Plugin Manager button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all the installed plugins and add your own ones.

                              The Macros button allows you to open the window where you can create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation.

                              Currently, the following plugins are available:

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm index dc0417b8fc..d138fa31d2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@

                                Protection tab

                              • Encrypt your document by setting a password,
                              • Protect workbook structure with or without a password,
                              • Protect sheet by restricting editing abilities within a sheet with or without a password,
                                • -
                              • Allow edit ranges of locked cells with or without a password,
                                • -
                              • Enable and disable the following options: Locked Cell, Hidden Formulas, Shape Locked, Lock Text.
                                • +
                              • Enable and disable the following options: Locked Cell, Hidden Formulas, Shape Locked, Lock Text,
                                • +
                              • Protect range to restrict editing ranges to selected users.
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index b1d631e528..f120cb194d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -29,6 +29,8 @@

                              View tab

                              View options available on this tab:

                              • Sheet View allows to manage sheet view presets.
                                • +
                              • Normal allows to see the spreadsheet fully.
                                • +
                              • Page Break Preview allows to see the printed area of the spreadsheet only.
                              • Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your spreadsheet.
                              • Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme.
                              • Freeze Panes allows to freeze and unfreeze certain panes or rows and columns.
                                • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm index ef2592aac2..4adaba9b46 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm @@ -35,9 +35,17 @@

                                Add a cell background

                              • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet.
                              • Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them.
                              • - Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the required colors range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: -

                                Palette - Custom Color

                                -

                                The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette.

                                + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
                                  +
                                • + Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the spreadsheet. +
                                  • +
                                • + More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

                                  Palette - Custom Color

                                  +

                                  The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette.

                                  +
                                  • +
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bf65289600 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + Add external links to cells + + + + + + + + +
                              +
                              + +
                              +

                              Add external links to cells

                              +

                              In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can create an external link to a cell or a range of cells in another workbook. The external links to cells can be created between files within the current portal (in the online editor) or between local files (in the desktop editor).

                              +

                              Note: in the online editor, the ability to insert data via an external link must also be implemented on the integrator side (e.g., in a third-party document management system).

                              +

                              If data in the source workbook changes, you can update values in the destination workbook without copying them manually once again.

                              +

                              To add an external link,

                              +
                                +
                              1. open the source workbook and the destination workbook,
                                2. +
                              2. in the source workbook, copy a cell or a range of cells (Ctrl+C),
                                3. +
                              3. in the destination workbook, paste the copied data (Ctrl+V),
                                4. +
                              4. click the Paste Special button and choose the Paste link (Ctrl+N) option.
                                5. +
                              +

                              The link will be added. If you click the cell which contains an external link, it looks like ='[SourceWorkbook.xlsx]Sheet1'!A1 in the formula bar.

                              +

                              To update the added external links,

                              +
                                +
                              1. switch to the Data tab,
                                2. +
                              2. click the External Links button,
                                3. +
                              3. select the necessary link in the list, +

                                External Links

                                +
                                4. +
                              4. click the Update Values button or click the arrow next to it and choose whether you want to Update values (currently selected) or Update all.
                                5. +
                              +

                              The status will be changed to 'OK'.

                              +

                              When you open the workbook which contains external links, the warning appears:

                              +

                              External Links

                              +

                              Click Update to update all external links.

                              +

                              To break the added external links,

                              +
                                +
                              1. switch to the Data tab,
                                2. +
                              2. click the External Links button,
                                3. +
                              3. select the necessary link in the list,
                                4. +
                              4. click the Break Links button or click the arrow next to it and choose whether you want to Break links (currently selected) or Break all links.
                                5. +
                              +

                              The links will be broken, and the values will not be updated.

                              +
                              + + diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 4890802d7e..0000000000 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ - - - - Allow edit ranges - - - - - - - - -
                              -
                              - -
                              - -

                              Allow edit ranges

                              -

                              The Allow Edit Ranges option allows you to specify cell ranges a user can work with in a protected sheet. You can allow users to edit specific ranges of locked cells with or without a password. If you don’t use a password, the cell range can be edited.

                              -

                              To select a range of locked cells a user will be allowed to change:

                              -
                                -
                              1. - Click the Allow Edit Ranges button on the top toolbar. The Allow Users to Edit Ranges window will open. -

                                Edit Ranges

                                -
                                2. -
                              2. - Click the New button in the Allow Users to Edit Ranges window to select and to add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit. -

                                New Range

                                -
                                3. -
                              3. - In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Password is optional, so enter and confirm it if you want users to access the editable cell ranges with a password. Click OK to confirm. -

                                The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place.

                                -
                                4. - -
                              4. Click the Protect Sheet button if you are finished, or click OK to save changes and to continue working in the unprotected sheet.
                                5. -
                              5. - If you click the Protect Sheet button, the Protect Sheet window appears for you to select the operations a user will be allowed to perform in order to prevent any unwanted changes. Enter and confirm the password, if you want to set a password to unprotect this sheet. -

                                Protect Sheet

                                -
                                - Operations a user may be allowed to perform. -
                                  -
                                • Select locked cells
                                  • -
                                • Select unlocked cells
                                  • -
                                • Format cells
                                  • -
                                • Format columns
                                  • -
                                • Format rows
                                  • -
                                • Insert columns
                                  • -
                                • Insert rows
                                  • -
                                • Insert hyperlink
                                  • -
                                • Delete columns
                                  • -
                                • Delete rows
                                  • -
                                • Sort
                                  • -
                                • Use Autofilter
                                  • -
                                • Use PivotTable and PivotChart
                                  • -
                                • Edit objects
                                  • -
                                • Edit scenarios
                                  • -
                                -
                                -
                              6. - Click the Protect button to enable the protection. The Protect Sheet button stays highlighted when a sheet is protected. -

                                Protect Sheet Highlighted

                                -
                                7. -
                              7. - When a sheet is not protected, you can still make changes to the allowed ranges. Click the Allow Edit Ranges button to open the Allow Users to Edit Ranges window. Use Edit and Delete buttons to manage the selected ranges of cells. Then click the Protect Sheet button to enable the sheet protection, or click OK to save changes and to continue working in the unprotected sheet. -

                                Edit Ranges

                                -
                                8. -
                              8. - For ranges protected with a password, when someone is trying to edit the selected range of cells, the Unlock Range window appears, where the user is prompted to enter the password. -

                                Unlock Range

                                -
                                9. -
                              -
                              - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm index 79dece9314..3e908c3b24 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm @@ -32,7 +32,8 @@

                              Apply a number format

                              Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following currency symbols: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Pound, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Croatian Kuna.

                            3. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-).
                              4. -
                            4. Date - is used to display dates,
                              5. +
                            5. Short Date - is used to display date in the DD.MM.YYYY format,
                              6. +
                            6. Long Date - is used to display date in the DD.month in full.YYYY format,
                            7. Time - is used to display time,
                            8. Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %,

                              Note: to quickly apply the percent style to the data, you can also use the Percent style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1291514716 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + ChatGPT + + + + + + + + +
                              +
                              + +
                              +

                              ChatGPT

                              +

                              The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code.

                              + +

                              Installation

                              +

                              To install the ChatGPT plugin,

                              +
                                +
                              1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                                2. +
                              2. Open the Plugin Manager.
                                3. +
                              3. Find
                                ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
                                4. +
                              4. Click the
                                ChatGPT icon in the Plugins tab.
                                5. +
                              5. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
                                6. +
                              + +

                              Configuration

                              +
                                +
                              1. Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page.
                                2. +
                              2. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field in the left panel of the editor.
                                3. +
                              +

                              ChatGPT settings

                              + +

                              How to use

                              +
                                +
                              1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                                2. +
                              2. Click the
                                ChatGPT icon.
                                3. +
                              3. + Click the Show advanced settings button to see all the available settings: +
                                  +
                                • Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website.
                                  • +
                                • Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion.
                                  • +
                                • Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive.
                                  • +
                                • Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass.
                                  • +
                                • Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence.
                                  • +
                                +
                                4. +
                              4. Enter the request and click the Submit button to process it, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one.
                                5. +
                              +

                              ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the "as is" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE.

                              +
                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm index 3a4fffe659..118f8f531a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@

                              Use the Paste Special feature

                        3. Paste only formatting (Ctrl+R) - allows you to paste the cell formatting only without pasting the cell contents.
                          4. -
                        4. Paste link (Ctrl+N) - allows you to paste the inner link to a cell or a file within the current portal. +
                        5. Paste link (Ctrl+N) - allows you to paste the inner link to a cell or a file within the current portal.

                          Paste options

                          1. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b9f8cd55a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Draw freehand on a spreadsheet + + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            Draw freehand on a spreadsheet

                            +

                            In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can use the Draw tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your spreadsheet.

                            +

                            Drawing options

                            +

                            To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon, and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the needed color is not in the palette.

                            +

                            Pen tool

                            +

                            When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button.

                            +

                            Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke.

                            +

                            Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element.

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm index 4ddd6eccdb..726b74c184 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm @@ -19,63 +19,68 @@

                            Set font type, size, style, and colors

                            Note: if you want to apply formatting to the data in the spreadsheet, select them with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the required formatting. If you need to apply the formatting to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse.

                            - - + + - + - + - + + + + + + - + - + - + - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + - +
                            Font
                            		Font
                            		 Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version.
                            Font size
                            		 Used to select the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 409 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm.
                            Increment font size
                            		 Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the icon is clicked.
                            Decrement font size
                            		 Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the icon is clicked.
                            Change case
                            		Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned.
                            Bold
                            		 Used to make the font bold making it heavier.
                            Italic
                            		 Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right.
                            Underline
                            		 Used to make the text underlined with a line going below the letters.
                            Strikethrough
                            		Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.
                            Subscript/Superscript
                            		Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                            Strikethrough
                            		Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.
                            Subscript/Superscript
                            		Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                            Font color
                            		 Used to change the color of the letters/characters in cells.
                            Fill color
                            		 Used to change the color of the cell fill. Using this icon you can apply a solid color fill. The color of the cell fill can also be changed using the Fill section on the Cell settings tab of the right sidebar.
                            Change color scheme
                            		 This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, or Verve.
                            @@ -91,9 +96,18 @@

                            Set font type, size, style, and colors

                            • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet.
                            • Standard Colors - the default colors set.
                              • -
                            • Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: -

                              Palette - Custom Color

                              -

                              The custom color will be applied to the selected text/cell and added to the Custom color palette.

                              +
                            • + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
                                +
                              • + Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the spreadsheet. +
                                • +
                              • + More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

                                Palette - Custom Color

                                +

                                The custom color will be applied to the text/cell and added to the Recent colors palette.

                                +
                                • +
                            2. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm index 87f7a095e6..92578518d2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm @@ -30,6 +30,8 @@

                            Insert array formulas

                          2. CHOOSECOLS
                          3. COLUMN
                          4. DROP
                            5. +
                          5. EXPAND
                            6. +
                          6. FILTER
                          7. FORMULATEXT
                          8. FREQUENCY
                          9. GROWTH
                            10. @@ -46,6 +48,8 @@

                            Insert array formulas

                          10. OFFSET
                          11. RANDARRAY
                          12. ROW
                            13. +
                          13. SEQUENCE
                            14. +
                          14. SORT
                          15. TAKE
                          16. TEXTSPLIT
                          17. TOCOL
                            18. @@ -56,6 +60,7 @@

                            Insert array formulas

                          18. WRAPROWS
                          19. UNIQUE
                          20. VSTACK
                            21. +
                          21. XMATCH
                          22. XLOOKUP
                      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 5997fca771..667b304cf6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -11,190 +11,241 @@
                      -
                      - -
                      +
                      + +

                      Insert and format autoshapes

                      Insert an autoshape

                      To add an autoshape in the Spreadsheet Editor,

                      1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                        2. -
                      2. click the
                        Shape icon on the top toolbar,
                        3. +
                      3. click the
                        Shape icon on the top toolbar,
                      4. select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines,
                      5. click the necessary autoshape within the selected group,
                      6. place the mouse cursor where the shape sholud be added,
                        7. -
                      7. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. +
                      8. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.
                      +

                      Copy autoshape style formatting

                      +

                      To copy a certain autoshape style formatting,

                      +
                        +
                      1. select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
                        2. +
                      2. click the Copy style
                        icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this
                        ),
                        3. +
                      3. select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting.
                        4. +
                      + +

                      Adjust the autoshape settings

                      Some of the autoshape settings can be changed using the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar that will open if you select the inserted autoshape with the mouse and click the Shape settings icon. The following settings can be changed:

                        -
                      • Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: -
                          -
                        • Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. -

                          Color Fill

                          -

                          Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                          +
                        • + Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:
                            -
                          • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet.
                            • -
                          • Standard Colors - the default colors set.
                            • -
                          • Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button. The custom color will be applied to your autoshape and added to the Custom color palette. +
                          • + Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. +

                            Color Fill

                            +

                            Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                            +
                              +
                            • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet.
                              • +
                            • Standard Colors - the default colors set.
                              • +
                            • + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
                                +
                              • + Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. +
                                • +
                              • + More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

                                Palette - Custom Color

                                +

                                The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette.

                                +
                                • +
                              +
                              • +
                            • -
                          -
                          • -
                        • Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings
                          icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: -

                          Gradient Fill

                          -

                          Available menu options:

                          -
                            -
                          • Style - choose between Linear or Radial: -
                              -
                            • Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle.
                              • -
                            • Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward.
                              • -
                            -
                            • -
                          • Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. -
                              -
                            • Use the
                              Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the
                              Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point.
                              • -
                            • Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location.
                              • -
                            • To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want.
                              • -
                            -
                            • -
                          -
                          • -
                        • Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. -

                          Picture or Texture Fill

                          -
                            -
                          • If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window.
                            • -
                          • If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. -

                            Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

                            +
                          • + Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings
                            icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: +

                            Gradient Fill

                            +

                            Available menu options:

                            +
                              +
                            • + Style - choose between Linear or Radial: +
                                +
                              • Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle.
                                • +
                              • Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward.
                                • +
                              +
                              • +
                            • + Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. +
                                +
                              • Use the
                                Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the
                                Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point.
                                • +
                              • Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location.
                                • +
                              • To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want.
                                • +
                              +
                              • +
                            • -
                          -
                            -
                          • In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. -

                            The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely.

                            -

                            The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely.

                            -

                            Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary.

                            +
                          • + Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. +

                            Picture or Texture Fill

                            +
                              +
                            • If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window.
                              • +
                            • + If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. +

                              Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

                              +
                              • +
                            +
                              +
                            • + In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. +

                              The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely.

                              +

                              The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely.

                              +

                              Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary.

                              +
                              • +
                            +
                            • +
                          • + Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. +

                            Pattern Fill

                            +
                              +
                            • Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu.
                              • +
                            • Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements.
                              • +
                            • Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background.
                              • +
                            • +
                          • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                          • -
                        • Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. -

                          Pattern Fill

                          +
                        +

                        Autoshape Settings tab

                        +
                          +
                        • Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency.
                          • +
                        • + Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line.
                            -
                          • Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu.
                            • -
                          • Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements.
                            • -
                          • Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background.
                            • +
                          • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
                            • +
                          • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
                            • +
                          • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                            • +
                          • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
                          -
                          • -
                        • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                          • -
                        -
                        • -
                      • Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency.
                        • -
                      • Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. +
                        • +
                      • + Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: +
                          +
                        • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
                          • +
                        • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
                          • +
                        • to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
                          • +
                        • to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
                          • +
                        +
                        • +
                      • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
                        • +
                      • Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow.
                        • +
                      +
                      +

                      Adjust shape advanced settings

                      +

                      To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:

                      +

                      Shape - Advanced Settings

                      +

                      The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                        -
                      • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
                        • -
                      • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
                        • -
                      • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                        • +
                      • Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions
                        button is clicked (in this case it looks like this
                        ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio.
                      -
                      • -
                    • - Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: -
                        -
                      • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
                        • -
                      • to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
                        • -
                      • to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
                        • -
                      • to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
                        • -
                      -
                      • -
                    • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
                      • -
                    • Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow.
                      • -
                    -
                    -

                    Adjust shape advanced settings

                    -

                    To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:

                    -

                    Shape - Advanced Settings

                    -

                    The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                    -
                      -
                    • Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions
                      button is clicked (in this case it looks like this
                      ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio.
                      • -
                    -

                    Shape - Advanced Settings

                    -

                    The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

                    -
                      -
                    • Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right.
                      • -
                    • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).
                      • -
                    -

                    Shape - Advanced Settings

                    -

                    The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

                    -
                      -
                    • Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: +

                      Shape - Advanced Settings

                      +

                      The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

                        -
                      • Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: -
                          -
                        • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                          • -
                        • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                          • -
                        • Square - the end points will be square.
                          • -
                        -
                        • -
                      • Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: -
                          -
                        • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                          • -
                        • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                          • -
                        • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                          • -
                        -

                        Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

                        -
                        • +
                      • Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right.
                        • +
                      • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).
                      -
                      • -
                    • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.
                      • -
                    -

                    Shape - Advanced Settings

                    -

                    The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).

                    -

                    Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

                    -

                    Shape Properties - Columns tab

                    -

                    The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one.

                    -

                    Shape - Advanced Settings: Cell Snapping

                    -

                    The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                    -
                      -
                    • Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well.
                      • -
                    • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged.
                      • -
                    • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.
                      • -
                    -

                    Shape - Advanced Settings: Alternative Text

                    -

                    The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains.

                    -
                    -

                    Insert and format text within the autoshape

                    -

                    To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it).

                    -

                    All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here.

                    -
                    -

                    Join autoshapes using connectors

                    -

                    You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that,

                    -
                      -
                    1. click the
                      Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                      2. -
                    2. select the Lines group from the menu, -

                      Shapes - Lines

                      -
                      3. -
                    3. click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform),
                      4. -
                    4. hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points
                      that appear on the shape outline, -

                      -
                      5. -
                    5. drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. -

                      -
                      6. -
                    -

                    If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them.

                    -

                    -

                    You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points.

                    -

                    Assign a Macro to a Shape

                    -

                    You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it.

                    -

                    To assign a macro:

                    -
                      -
                    • - Right-click the shape to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. -

                      Assign Macro on Menu

                      -
                      • -
                    • The Assign Macro dialogue will open
                      • -
                    • - Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. -

                      Assign Macro

                      -
                      • -
                    - +

                    Shape - Advanced Settings

                    +

                    The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

                    +
                      +
                    • + Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: +
                        +
                      • + Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: +
                          +
                        • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                          • +
                        • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                          • +
                        • Square - the end points will be square.
                          • +
                        +
                        • +
                      • + Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: +
                          +
                        • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                          • +
                        • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                          • +
                        • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                          • +
                        +

                        Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

                        +
                        • +
                      +
                      • +
                    • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.
                      • +
                    +

                    Shape - Advanced Settings

                    +

                    The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).

                    +

                    Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

                    +

                    Shape Properties - Columns tab

                    +

                    The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one.

                    +

                    Shape - Advanced Settings: Cell Snapping

                    +

                    The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                    +
                      +
                    • Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well.
                      • +
                    • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged.
                      • +
                    • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.
                      • +
                    +

                    Shape - Advanced Settings: Alternative Text

                    +

                    The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains.

                    +
                    +

                    Insert and format text within the autoshape

                    +

                    To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it).

                    +

                    All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here.

                    +
                    +

                    Join autoshapes using connectors

                    +

                    You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that,

                    +
                      +
                    1. click the
                      Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                      2. +
                    2. + select the Lines group from the menu, +

                      Shapes - Lines

                      +
                      3. +
                    3. click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform),
                      4. +
                    4. + hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points
                      that appear on the shape outline, +

                      +
                      5. +
                    5. + drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. +

                      +
                      6. +
                    +

                    If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them.

                    +

                    +

                    You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points.

                    +

                    Assign a Macro to a Shape

                    +

                    You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it.

                    +

                    To assign a macro:

                    +
                      +
                    • + Right-click the shape to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. +

                      Assign Macro on Menu

                      +
                      • +
                    • The Assign Macro dialogue will open
                      • +
                    • + Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. +

                      Assign Macro

                      +
                      • +
                    + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm index 82f3b3eb28..2d0f654ac5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm @@ -88,6 +88,14 @@

                    Insert a chart

                  • Scatter with straight lines
                  +
                  + Radar Charts +
                    +
                  • Radar
                    • +
                  • Radar with markers
                    • +
                  • Filled radar
                    • +
                  +
                  Combo Charts
                    @@ -134,11 +142,11 @@

                    Adjust the chart settings

                    1. Click the Select Data button on the right-side panel.
                    2. - Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column. + Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column.

                      Chart Data window

                      • - Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. + Chart data range - select data for your chart.
                        • Click the
                          icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. @@ -147,68 +155,68 @@

                          Adjust the chart settings

                      • - Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. + Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries.
                          -
                        • In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button.
                          • +
                        • In Legend entries (series), click Add button.
                        • - In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the
                          icon on the right of the Select name box. + In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the
                          icon on the right of the Series name box.

                          Edit Series window

                      • - Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. + Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels.
                          -
                        • In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit.
                          • +
                        • In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit.
                        • In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the
                          icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range.

                          Axis Labels window

                        • -
                      • Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis.
                        • +
                      • Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis.
                    3. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window.
                    -

                    Click Show Advanced Settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical Axis, Secondary Vertical Axis, Horizontal Axis, Secondary Horizontal Axis, Cell Snapping and Alternative Text.

                    +

                    Click Show advanced settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical axis, Secondary vertical axis, Horizontal axis, Secondary horizontal axis, Cell snapping and Alternative text.

                    Chart - Advanced Settings window

                    The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.

                    • - Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                        -
                      • None to not display a chart title,
                        • +
                      • None to display no chart title,
                      • Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area,
                        • -
                      • No Overlay to display the title above the plot area.
                        • +
                      • No overlay to display the title above the plot area.
                    • Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                        -
                      • None to not display the legend,
                        • +
                      • None to display no legend,
                      • Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area,
                      • Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area,
                      • Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area,
                      • Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area,
                        • -
                      • Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area,
                        • -
                      • Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area.
                        • +
                      • Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area,
                        • +
                      • Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area.
                    • - Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
                      + Specify the Data labels (i.e., text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
                      • - Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. + Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type.
                          -
                        • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top.
                          • +
                        • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top.
                        • For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom.
                          • -
                        • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top.
                          • -
                        • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
                          • +
                        • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top.
                          • +
                        • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Radar, and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
                        • -
                      • Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value,
                        • -
                      • Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field.
                        • +
                      • Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value,
                        • +
                      • Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field.
                    • Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines.
                      • @@ -218,43 +226,44 @@

                      Adjust the chart settings

                    Chart - Advanced Settings window

                    -

                    The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                    -

                    Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

                    +

                    The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                    +

                    Note: the Axis settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

                    • Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed.
                    • Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                        -
                      • None to not display a vertical axis title
                        • +
                      • None to display no vertical axis title,
                      • Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis,
                      • Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis.
                      • -
                    • Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                      • -
                    • Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                      • -
                    • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
                      • -
                    • Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                      • -
                    • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
                      • +
                    • Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                      • +
                    • Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                      • +
                    • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
                      • +
                    • Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                      • +
                    • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
                      • +
                    • Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user.
                    • - The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options:
                        -
                      • None to not display major/minor tick marks,
                        • +
                      • None to display no major/minor tick marks,
                      • Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,
                      • In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis,
                      • Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                    • - The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: + The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                        -
                      • None to not display tick mark labels,
                        • +
                      • None to display no tick mark labels,
                      • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
                      • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
                      • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
                      • - To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. + To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate.

                        Available label format categories:

                        • General
                          • @@ -282,37 +291,37 @@

                          Adjust the chart settings

                          Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only.

                          Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart.

                          -

                          The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below.

                          +

                          The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below.

                          Chart - Advanced Settings window

                          -

                          The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                          +

                          The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                          • Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed.
                          • Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                            • None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title,
                              • -
                            • No Overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis,
                              • +
                            • No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis,
                            • -
                          • Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor.
                            • -
                          • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
                            • -
                          • Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks.
                            • +
                          • Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor.
                            • +
                          • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
                            • +
                          • Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks.
                          • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
                          • The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
                              -
                            • Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                              • -
                            • Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
                              • +
                            • Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                              • +
                            • Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
                          • - The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. + The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories.
                              -
                            • Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                              • -
                            • Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                              • -
                            • Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
                              • +
                            • Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                              • +
                            • Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                              • +
                            • Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
                            • - To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. + To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate.

                              Available label format categories:

                              • General
                                • @@ -335,22 +344,22 @@

                                Adjust the chart settings

                            -

                            The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                            +

                            The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                            • Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well.
                            • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.
                            • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.

                            Chart - Advanced Settings: Cell Snapping

                            -

                            The Alternative Text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.

                            +

                            The Alternative text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.

                            Chart - Advanced Settings

                            Edit chart elements

                            To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead.

                            To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color.

                            -

                            When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape Settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Stroke. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                            +

                            When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                            - Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. - When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. + Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. + When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page.

                            Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements.

                            If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element.

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm index 87358ec4f5..b781bd4d1e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@

                            Insert functions

                            Text and Data Functions Used to correctly display the text data in the spreadsheet. - ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT + ARRAYTOTEXT; ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT Statistical Functions @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@

                            Insert functions

                            Math and Trigonometry Functions Used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. - ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; MUNIT; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDARRAY; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC + ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; MUNIT; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDARRAY; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SEQUENCE; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Date and Time Functions @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@

                            Insert functions

                            Lookup and Reference Functions Used to easily find information from the data list. - ADDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNS; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; HYPERLINLK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; XLOOKUP; HSTACK; VSTACK; TOROW; TOCOL; WRAPROWS; WRAPCOLS; DROP; TAKE; CHOOSEROWS; CHOOSECOLS + ADDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNS; EXPAND; FILTER; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; HYPERLINLK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; SORT; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; XLOOKUP; HSTACK; VSTACK; TOROW; TOCOL; WRAPROWS; WRAPCOLS; DROP; TAKE; CHOOSEROWS; CHOOSECOLS; XMATCH Information Functions diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index c3eee7b5cf..9c6125be65 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@

                            Insert an image

                -

                After that the image will be added to the worksheet.

                +

                After that, the image will be added to the worksheet. You can save the image as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

                Adjust the image settings

                Once the image is added, you can change its size and position.

                To specify the exact dimensions of the image:

                @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@

                Adjust the image settings

              • in the Size section, set the necessary Width and Height values. If the Constant proportions
                button is clicked (in this case it looks like this
                ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button.

            To crop the image:

            -

            Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area.

            +

            Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles that appear on the image corners and in the center of each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area.

            • To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side.
            • To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles.
              • @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@

              Adjust the image settings

            • To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles.

            When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes.

            -

            After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need:

            +

            After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill, and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need:

            • If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape.
            • If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed.
              • @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@

              Adjust the image settings

          The selected image will be replaced.

          -

          When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, its size and color as well as change the shape type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

          +

          When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, size, color, and opacity, as well as change the shape type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

          On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image.

          Shape Settings tab

          Adjust the image advanced settings

          @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@

          Adjust the image advanced settings

          The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains.

          To delete the inserted image, click it and press the Delete key.

          Assign a Macro to an Image

          -

          You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any image. Once you assign a macro, the image appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it.

          +

          You can provide quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any image. Once you assign a macro, the image appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it.

          To assign a macro:

          • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index 13b07ebaa1..f339c98fdf 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -21,7 +21,8 @@

            Insert SmartArt objects

          • go to the Insert tab,
          • click the SmartArt button,
          • hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process,
            • -
          • choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item.
            • +
          • choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item,
            • +
          • you can save the SmartArt object as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

        You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel:

        Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually.

        @@ -88,9 +89,10 @@

        Insert SmartArt objects

      8. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line.
          -
        • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
          • +
        • To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line.
        • To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
        • To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
          • +
        • To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar.
      9. Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow.
        10. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index 6054555ed8..40a9ca8ac2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -15,14 +15,14 @@

        Insert text objects

        -

        In the Spreadsheet Editor you can draw attention to a specific part of the spreadsheet, for this, insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects).

        +

        In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can draw attention to a specific part of the spreadsheet, for this, insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter the text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects).

        Add a text object

        You can add a text object anywhere in the worksheet. To do that:

        1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
        2. select the necessary text object type:
            -
          • to add a text box, click the
            Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be inserted, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, and you will bу able to enter your text. +
          • to add a text box, click the
            Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be inserted, hold the mouse button, and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, and you will be able to enter your text.

            It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape from the Basic Shapes group.

          • to add a Text Art object, click the
            Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the worksheet. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
            • @@ -32,6 +32,7 @@

            Add a text object

        The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).

        As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

        +

        You can save the text object as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

        To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted.

        Format a text box

        Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

        @@ -39,24 +40,24 @@

        Format a text box

        • to manually resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
        • to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings
          icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
          • -
        • to arrange text boxes as related to other objects, align several text boxes as related to each other, rotate or flip a text box, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page.
          • -
        • to create columns of text within the text box, right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window.
          • +
        • to arrange text boxes as related to other objects, align several text boxes as related to each other, rotate or flip a text box, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page.
          • +
        • to create columns of text within the text box, right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window.

        Format the text within the text box

        Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

        Text selected

        -

        It's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately.

        +

        It's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately.

          -
        • Adjust the font formatting settings (change the font type, its size, color and apply decoration styles) using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Some additional font settings can be also changed on the Font tab of the paragraph properties window. To access it, right-click the text in the text box and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option.
          • +
        • Adjust the font formatting settings (change the font type, size, color and apply decoration styles) using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Some additional font settings can be also changed on the Font tab of the paragraph properties window. To access it, right-click the text in the text box and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option.
        • Align the text horizontally within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.
          • -
        • Align the text vertically within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. You can also right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom.
          • -
        • Rotate the text within the text box. To do that, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).
          • +
        • Align the text vertically within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. You can also right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom.
          • +
        • Rotate the text within the text box. To do that, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom), or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).
        • - Create a bulleted or numbered list. To do that, right-click the text, select the Bullets and Numbering option from the contextual menu and then choose one of the available bullet characters or numbering styles. + Create a bulleted or numbered list. To do that, right-click the text, select the Bullets and Numbering option from the contextual menu, and then choose one of the available bullet characters or numbering styles.

          Bullets and numbering

          The List Settings option allows you to open the List Settings window where you can adjust the settings for a corresponding list type:

          Bulleted list settings

          -

          Type (bulleted) - allows you to select the necessary character for the bulleted list. When you click the New bullet option, the Symbol window will open, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.

          +

          Type (bulleted) - allows you to select the necessary character for the bulleted list. When you click the New bullet option, the Symbol window will open, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more about how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.

          When you click the New image option, a new Import field appears where you can choose new images for bullets From File, From URL, or From Storage.

          Numbered list settings

          Type (numbered) - allows you to select the necessary format for the numbered list.

          @@ -90,7 +91,7 @@

          Adjust paragraph advanced settings

          • change the alignment type for the paragraph text,
          • - change the paragraph indents as related to internal margins of the text box, + change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box,
            • Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
            • Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
              • @@ -106,7 +107,7 @@

              Adjust paragraph advanced settings

            • Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters.
            • Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
            • Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
              • -
            • Small caps is used to make all letters lower case.
              • +
            • Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase.
            • All caps is used to make all letters upper case.
            • Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box.

              All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.

              @@ -116,19 +117,19 @@

              Adjust paragraph advanced settings

              The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard.

              • Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box.
                • -
              • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and click the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below.
                • +
              • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and click the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below.
              • Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option in the Alignment drop-down list and click the Specify button.
                • Left - lines up your text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type.
                  • -
                • Center - centres the text at the tab stop position.
                  • +
                • Center - centers the text at the tab stop position.
                • Right - lines up your text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type.

                To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and click the Remove or Remove All button.

              Assign a Macro to a Text Box

              -

              You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any text box. Once you assign a macro, the text box appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it.

              +

              You can provide quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any text box. Once you assign a macro, the text box appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it.

              To assign a macro:

              • @@ -145,9 +146,9 @@

                Edit a Text Art style

                Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.

                Text Art setting tab

                  -
                • Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc.
                  • +
                • Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc.
                • Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes.
                  • -
                • Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.
                  • +
                • Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.

                Text Art Transformation

                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm index db41ea0cc0..f3797ff6c6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@

                Create a new pivot table

      An empty pivot table will be inserted in the selected location.

      -

      The Pivot table settings tab on the right sidebar will be opened. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon.

      +

      The Pivot table settings tab on the right sidebar will be opened. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon. Pivot table settings are also available in the context menu that appears when you right click the table. The context menu options depend on the field you click.

      Pivot table settings tab

      Select fields to display

      @@ -127,7 +127,8 @@

      Rearrange fields and adjust their properties

      • The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set.
      • The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table.
        • -
      • The Summarize value field by list allows you to choose the function used to calculate the summation value for all values from this field. By default, Sum is used for numeric values, Count is used for text values. The available functions are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp.
        • +
      • The Summarize value field by option allows you to choose the function used to calculate the summation value for all values from this field. By default, Sum is used for numeric values, Count is used for text values. The available functions are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp.
        • +
      • The Show values as option allows you to show instant custom calculations instead of adding a formula and creating a calculated field. No calculation is the default option that displays the actual value in the field. Other calculation options: % of grand total, % of column total, % of row total, % of, % of parent row total, % of parent column total, % of parent total, Difference from, % difference from, Running total in, % running total in, Rank smallest to largest, Rank largest to smallest, Index. Use Base field and Base item when these options are available for the calculation you selected (% of, % of parent total, Difference from, % difference from, Running total in, % running total in).

      Group and ungroup data

      @@ -224,7 +225,7 @@

      Change the style of pivot tables

      The template list allows you to choose one of the predefined pivot table styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding, etc. - Depending on the options checked for rows and columns, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Row Headers and Banded Columns options, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the row headers highlighted and banded columns enabled. + Depending on the options checked for rows and columns, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Row Headers and Banded Columns options, the visible part of the templates list will include templates with the row headers highlighted and banded columns enabled, but you can expand the full list by clicking the arrow to see all the available templates.

      Filter, sort and add slicers in pivot tables

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..18b54d0ed2 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + Protect ranges + + + + + + + + +
      +
      + +
      + +

      Protect ranges

      +

      The Protect Range option allows you to specify cell ranges that cannot be edited by users without corresponding editing rights that are granted by the creator of the file or a user with full access to it.

      +

      To select a range of locked cells a user will be allowed to change:

      +
        +
      1. + Click the Protect Range button on the top toolbar of the Protection tab. The Protected Ranges window will open. +

        Edit Ranges

        +
        2. +
      2. Use the Filter drop-down list to choose the required sheet. Click the New button in the Protected Ranges window to select and add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit.
        3. +
      3. + In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Select users who can edit this range and click OK to confirm. +

        New Range

        +
        4. +
      4. To edit or delete a range, select it in the Protected Ranges window and click the Edit or Delete button accordingly.
        5. +
      5. Click the Close button in the Protected Ranges window when you are ready.
        6. +
      +

      To learn more about allowing edit ranges, please refer to the following article.

      +
      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm index 98e5cfcf5d..e2dd3a5d68 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm @@ -17,29 +17,31 @@

      Protecting a sheet

      The Protect Sheet option allows you to protect the sheets and to control changes made by other users in a sheet as to prevent the unwanted changes to data and to restrict the editing abilities of other users. You can protect a sheet with or without a password. If you don’t use a password, anyone can unprotect the protected sheet.

      -

      To protect a sheet:

      +

      Protect a sheet

      1. - Go to the Protection tab, and click the Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar. -

        or

        -

        Right-click the sheet tab you want to protect, and select Protect from the list of options

        + Go to the Protection tab, and click the Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar.
        + or
        + right-click the sheet tab you want to protect, and select Protect from the list of options

        Protect Sheet Tab

        2. -
      2. In the Protect Sheet window that opens, enter and confirm the password, if you want to set a password to unprotect this sheet. -

        Protect Sheet

        -

        The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place.

        -
        3. -
      3. Check the boxes in the Allow all users of this sheet to list to select operations that users will be able to perform. The operations Select locked cells and Select unlocked cells are allowed by default. -
        - Operations a user may be allowed to perform. -
          -
        • Select locked cells
          • -
        • Select unlocked cells
          • -
        • Format cells
          • -
        • Format columns
          • -
        • Format rows
          • -
        • Insert columns
          • -
        • Insert rows
          • +
        • + In the Protect sheet window that opens, enter and confirm the password, if you want to set a password to unprotect this sheet. +

          Protect Sheet

          +

          The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place.

          +
          • +
        • + Check the boxes in the Allow all users of this sheet to list to select operations that users will be able to perform. The operations Select locked cells and Select unlocked cells are allowed by default. +
          + Operations a user may be allowed to perform. +
            +
          • Select locked cells
            • +
          • Select unlocked cells
            • +
          • Format cells
            • +
          • Format columns
            • +
          • Format rows
            • +
          • Insert columns
            • +
          • Insert rows
          • Insert hyperlink
          • Delete columns
          • Delete rows
            • @@ -48,24 +50,53 @@

            Protecting a sheet

          • Use PivotTable and PivotChart
          • Edit objects
          • Edit scenarios
            • -
          -
          -
          • -
        • click the Protect button to enable the protection. The Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar stays highlighted once the sheet is protected. -

          Protect Sheet Highlighted

          -
          • -
        • To unprotect the sheet: -
            -
          • click the Protect Sheet button, -

            or

            -

            right-click the protected sheet tab and select Unprotect from the list of options

            -

            Unrotect Sheet Tab

            -
            • -
          • Enter a password and click OK in the Unprotect Sheet window if prompted. -

            Unrotect Sheet

            -
            • -
          +
        +
        +
        4. +
      4. + click the Protect button to enable the protection. The Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar stays highlighted once the sheet is protected. +

        Protect Sheet Highlighted

        +
        5. +
      + +

      Allow edit ranges

      +
        +
      1. Click the Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar of the Protection tab. The Protect sheet window will open.
        2. +
      2. Click the Allow edit ranges button to specify ranges unlocked by the password when the sheet is protected. This option works for locked cells only.
        3. +
      3. + Click the New button to add a new range. The New range window will be opened. Specify the Title of the range, the range itself, and enter and repeat a password. Click OK when ready. +

        The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place.

        +
        4. +
      4. + When a sheet is not protected, you can still make changes to the allowed ranges: +
          +
        • If you need to edit a created range, select it in the Allow users to edit ranges window and click the Edit button.
          • +
        • To delete a created range, select it in the Allow users to edit ranges window and click the Delete button.
          • +
        +
        5. +
      5. Click the Protect button when ready.
      +

      For ranges protected with a password, when someone is trying to edit the selected range of cells, the Unlock Range window appears, where the user is prompted to enter the password.

      +

      Unlock Range

      +

      To learn more about protecting ranges, please refer to the following article.

      + +

      Unprotect a sheet

      +
        +
      1. + To unprotect the sheet: +
          +
        • + click the Protect Sheet button,
          + or
          + right-click the protected sheet tab and select Unprotect from the list of options +

          Unprotect Sheet Tab

          +
          • +
        • + enter a password and click OK in the Unprotect Sheet window if prompted. +

          Unrotect Sheet

          +
          • +
        +
      \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm index 76c1924953..0dd0eb9c53 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm @@ -19,9 +19,9 @@

      Protecting a spreadsheet

      Protection tab

      The available protection options include:

      Encrypt to control access to the file and prevent it from being opened by other users.

      -

      Protect workbook to control user’s manipulations with the workbook and to prevent unwanted changes to the workbook structure.

      -

      Protect sheet to control user’s actions within a sheet and to prevent unwanted changes to data.

      -

      Allow edit ranges to specify cell ranges a user can work with in a protected sheet.

      +

      Protect Workbook to control user’s manipulations with the workbook and to prevent unwanted changes to the workbook structure.

      +

      Protect Sheet to control user’s actions within a sheet and to prevent unwanted changes to data.

      +

      Protect Range to protect ranges by restricting or prohibiting their editing. The editing rights can be granted to certain users. Users with no editing rights will be able to just view the protected range but they can edit the rest of the spreadsheet provided they have full access rights for the file.

      Use the Protection tab checkboxes to lock or unlock quickly the sheet contents in a protected sheet.

      Note: these options will not take effect until you enable sheet protection.

      By default, the cells, the shapes and the text inside a shape are locked in a sheet, uncheck the appropriate checkbox to unlock them. The unlocked objects can still be edited when a sheet is protected. The options Shape Locked and Lock Text become active when a shape is selected. The Shape Locked option is applicable both to shapes and other objects such as charts, images and text boxes. The Lock Text option locks text inside all graphical objects except charts.

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 3637573f63..417cb474f9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@

      Saving

      1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
      2. select the Save as option,
        3. -
      3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A. You can also choose the Spreadsheet template (XLTX or OTS) option.
        4. +
      4. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. You can also choose the Spreadsheet template option.
      @@ -39,8 +39,8 @@

      Downloading

    3. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
    4. select the Download as option,
    5. - choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. -

      Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character).

      + choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. +

      Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas, etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character).

    Saving a copy

    @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@

    Saving a copy

    1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
    2. select the Save Copy as option,
      3. -
    3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS,
      4. +
    4. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG,
    5. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save.
    @@ -65,12 +65,13 @@

    Printing

    The spreadsheet Preview and the available printing options will open.

    Some of these settings (page Margins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar.

    Print Settings window

    -

    Here you can adjust the following parameters:

    +

    Here you can adjust the following parameters. In the desktop version you can also define the Print sides option to print on one or two sides flipping the pages on long or short edge as well as print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer.

    • - Print range - specify what to print: Current sheet, All sheets or Selection, + Print range - specify what to print: Active sheets, All sheets or Selection,

      If you previously set a constant print area but want to print the entire sheet, check the Ignore print area box.

      • +
    • Pages - specify the range of pages for printing. You can enter the numbers manually or use the corresponding arrows,
    • Settings of sheet - specify individual print settings for each separate sheet, if you have selected the All Sheets option in the Print range drop-down list,
    • Page size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list,
    • Page orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally,
      • @@ -89,11 +90,12 @@

      Printing

    • Header/footer settings - allow to add some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc.
      • +
    • First page number - specify the number of the first page printed.

    After you have configured the printing settings click the Print button to save changes and print out the spreadsheet or the Save button to save changes made to printing settings.

    All changes you made will be lost if you don't print the spreadsheet or save the changes.

    The spreadsheet Preview allows you to navigate a spreadsheet using arrows at the bottom to see how your data will be displayed on a sheet when printed and to correct eventual faults using the print setting above.

    -

    In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

    +

    In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

    Setting up the print area

    If you want to print the selected cell range only instead of the entire worksheet, you can use the Selection option from the Print range drop-down list. When the workbook is saved, this setting is not saved, it is intended for single use.

    If a cell range should be printed frequently, you can set a constant print area on the worksheet. When the workbook is saved, the print area is also saved, it can be used when you open the spreadsheet next time. It's also possible to set several constant print areas in a sheet, in this case each area will be printed on a separate page.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm index 1a33c8f9de..24b4960edf 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm @@ -184,37 +184,45 @@

    Sort data by several columns/rows

    To sort data by several columns/rows you can create several sorting levels using the Custom Sort function.

    1. select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell to sort the entire range),
      2. -
    2. click the Custom Sort
      icon situated on the Data tab of the top toolbar,
      3. +
    3. click the Custom Sort icon situated on the Data tab of the top toolbar,
    4. the Sort window will appear. Sorting by columns is selected by default.

      Custom Sort window

      -

      To change the sorting orientation (i.e. sorting data by rows instead of columns), click the Options button on the top. The Sort Options window will open:

      -

      Sort Options window

      -
        -
      1. check the My data has headers box, if necessary,
        2. -
      2. choose the necessary Orientation: Sort top to bottom to sort data by columns or Sort left to right to sort data by rows,
        3. -
      3. click OK to apply the changes and close the window.
        4. -
      -
    5. - set the first sorting level in the Sort by field: -

      Custom Sort window

      -
        -
      • in the Column / Row section, select the first column / row you want to sort,
        • -
      • in the Sort on list choose one of the following options: Values, Cell color, or Font color,
        • -
      • - in the Order list, specify the necessary sorting order. The available options differ depending on the option chosen in the Sort on list: + use the Levels sections to add new levels and to manage the added levels.
          -
        • if the Values option is selected, choose the Ascending / Descending option if the cell range contains numbers or A to Z / Z to A option if the cell range contains text values,
          • -
        • if the Cell color option is selected, choose the necessary cell color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows,
          • -
        • if the Font color option is selected, choose the necessary font color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows.
          • -
        -
        • -
      -
      6. -
    6. add the next sorting level by clicking the Add level button, select the second column / row you want to sort and specify other sorting parameters in the Then by field as described above. If necessary, add more levels in the same way.
      7. -
    7. manage the added levels using the buttons at the top of the window: Delete level, Copy level or change the level order by using the arrow buttons Move the level up / Move the level down,
      8. -
    8. click OK to apply the changes and close the window.
      9. +
    9. New button to add a new level, select the second column / row you want to sort and specify other sorting parameters in the Then by field as described above. If necessary, add more levels in the same way, +
    10. Copy button to copy the selected level and to duplicate all the existing settings,
      11. +
    11. + Options button to change the sorting orientation (i.e. sorting data by rows instead of columns). Click the button to open the Sort Options window: +

      Sort Options window

      +
        +
      • check the My data has headers box, if necessary
        • +
      • choose the necessary Orientation: Sort top to bottom to sort data by columns or Sort left to right to sort data by rows,
        • +
      • click OK to apply the changes and close the window.
        • +
      + +
    12. Delete button to delete the selected level, +
    13. Arrow buttons Move the level up / Move the level down to change the order of levels.
      14. + + +
    14. + set the first sorting level in the Sort by field: +

      Custom Sort window

      +
        +
      • in the Column / Row section, select the first column / row you want to sort,
        • +
      • in the Sort on list choose one of the following options: Values, Cell color, or Font color,
        • +
      • + in the Order list, specify the necessary sorting order. The available options differ depending on the option chosen in the Sort on list: +
          +
        • if the Values option is selected, choose the Ascending / Descending option if the cell range contains numbers or A to Z / Z to A option if the cell range contains text values,
          • +
        • if the Cell color option is selected, choose the necessary cell color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows,
          • +
        • if the Font color option is selected, choose the necessary font color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows.
          • +
        +
        • +
      +
      15. +
    15. click OK to apply the changes and close the window.

    The data will be sorted according to the specified sorting levels.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2ac0f71535 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + Zoom + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Zoom

    +

    The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks.

    +

    The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually.

    + +

    Installation

    +

    To install the Zoom plugin,

    +
      +
    1. Go to the Plugins tab.
      2. +
    2. Open the Plugin Manager.
      3. +
    3. Find
      Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
      4. +
    4. Click the
      Zoom icon in the Plugins tab.
      5. +
    5. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
      6. +
    +

    For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation.

    + +

    Configuration

    +
      +
    1. + Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. +

      If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation.

      +
      2. +
    2. + Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. +

      If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation.

      +
      3. +
    3. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save.
      4. +
    +

    Zoom settings

    + +

    How to use

    +
      +
    1. Go to the Plugins tab.
      2. +
    2. Click the
      Zoom icon.
      3. +
    3. + Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. +
        +
      • Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly.
        • +
      • Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready.
        • +
      +

      Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors.

      +
      4. +
    4. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again.
      5. +
    5. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language.
      6. +
    6. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard.
      7. +
    7. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode.
      8. +
    +

    A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page.

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css index 05d886262c..1924ad8d32 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png index 22b7de709c..18e8d0a321 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/arraytotext.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/arraytotext.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7c68d69997 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/arraytotext.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclick.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclick.png index 0be6aae033..d780226c88 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclick.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclick.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickchart.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickchart.png index 3db66290fc..a1d9407a04 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickchart.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickchart.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickimage.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickimage.png index 8d306b4598..ee4109c73f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickimage.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickimage.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png index 59cc0fede2..a204348e12 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclicktextobject.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclicktextobject.png index 0de931142b..098a784c00 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclicktextobject.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/assignmacro_rightclicktextobject.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png index 6f1e6d9af6..1313722e29 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/autoformatasyoutype.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png index 42e80c7633..d31690f3ca 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/axislabels.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png index e35d3a2692..77af20a87c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow4.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow4.png index bdab464ae8..361cd66fac 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow4.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow4.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow5.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow5.png index ad6d919284..6a4c4c4aed 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow5.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartwindow5.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_dropdown.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_dropdown.png index 3137ff3635..d8d4ee789d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_dropdown.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_dropdown.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_hometab.png index a66681cc4b..1c6e2af24f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png index 62aadd34a5..405fd5ee82 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightsidebar.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightsidebar.png index e417a5b4dc..d97854b8a0 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightsidebar.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/conditionalformatting_rightsidebar.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow.png index a76f32282c..834c5aaf74 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow2.png index 39e4122ded..64fbb475f4 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customsortwindow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editpoints_rightclick.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editpoints_rightclick.png index 5a04b21b62..9465eccde9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editpoints_rightclick.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editpoints_rightclick.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editranges.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editranges.png index f59a0059f4..eba1efe8f7 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editranges.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editranges.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_2color.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_2color.png index 98d5285537..d18f7de666 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_2color.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_2color.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_3color.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_3color.png index 9e3a2ec2b0..5cec890856 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_3color.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_3color.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_databar.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_databar.png index 1a80fb2e9f..1475692f9d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_databar.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_databar.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_iconsets.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_iconsets.png index ac0b81b542..843f30d580 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_iconsets.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_iconsets.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_valueis.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_valueis.png index 1283cac3be..966905dabb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_valueis.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editrule_valueis.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c72d14ee33 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/externallinks.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/externallinks.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b5e45eca59 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/externallinks.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/extlinkwarning.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/extlinkwarning.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..860eeceeb4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/extlinkwarning.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/filter.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/filter.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..70947061c8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/filter.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formulatabtoptoolbar.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formulatabtoptoolbar.png index 936f9a414f..31ae9dae67 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formulatabtoptoolbar.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formulatabtoptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/grouping.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/grouping.png index 8b53c4bf08..9e848c32a7 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/grouping.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/grouping.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 840c89115e..65a56d4c31 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png index a8d5368db4..3559e3794c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 8354251d64..95975d8b60 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png index 3a15af3ebb..b9c14b9d9e 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c8da4d4826 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index d6662c72be..1b269d4179 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 6de7554c31..4e3b194b29 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png index 72ad59f261..1eae538cac 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 1617d19896..5473c96039 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index cb4c894db0..4ad5ff3f5e 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index eee9621f1e..ed690a9937 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png index 583da781ff..3ea8bb6b41 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index acaec87882..86d4d38859 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index 3f784ca399..ac61e82217 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 9a0a978f95..8e8f9715d5 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desltop_drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desltop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f808896df2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desltop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c640d70381 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index 7bbff7c513..7dc2b11bae 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png index bd91f23301..21a7faa0c6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index 43f21e60fa..784b8f7da1 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index 23180ffbb5..efb9eb8f9c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png index c3e060a9e2..10faa71efe 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png index d2848649e0..2c9c340c1e 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 015cd8d470..10981b3e30 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png index cf84d19d02..372a95c82f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index eb2fd85085..9ee9f9f977 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png index 6aabe9b43e..4283eaf293 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips1.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png index 945a8bd3e8..1bc36ca14f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/keytips2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/managerules.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/managerules.png index 840ee36451..ffa0104dbb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/managerules.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/managerules.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/merge_across_menu.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/merge_across_menu.png index b5f2803d38..abf143ba77 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/merge_across_menu.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/merge_across_menu.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namemanagerwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namemanagerwindow.png index b353c45497..64834d078c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namemanagerwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namemanagerwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_2colorscale.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_2colorscale.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6121f71686 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_2colorscale.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_3colorscale.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_3colorscale.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a906d2ec5e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_3colorscale.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_average.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_average.png index f7085a24c8..2845785585 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_average.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_average.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_blankerror.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_blankerror.png index 357a5da98d..205b723bf3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_blankerror.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_blankerror.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_databar.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_databar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61ec24ba7f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_databar.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_date.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_date.png index f1c6ed2316..89f1491b76 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_date.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_date.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_duplicateunique.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_duplicateunique.png index 4614a649c5..5f29803983 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_duplicateunique.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_duplicateunique.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_formula.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_formula.png index 69c918d1a4..59c1783b31 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_formula.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_formula.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_iconsets.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_iconsets.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5ec244bee9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_iconsets.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_text.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_text.png index 75e097fc70..28ecbc6792 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_text.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_text.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_topbottom.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_topbottom.png index 3b5eb56406..4aae676c69 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_topbottom.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_topbottom.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_valueis.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_valueis.png index 423b8003e1..ae607aa84c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_valueis.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/newrule_valueis.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png index 41f69b2047..fe3278df62 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_top.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_top.png index 4a9154d6d5..7a7c2a0e48 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_top.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_top.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png index 6b3dbc6f6c..5e6a4c056b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivottoptoolbar.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivottoptoolbar.png index 8e63749129..94982a0cbd 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivottoptoolbar.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivottoptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png index 0ee66c750d..242d58e13b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protect_sheet.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protect_sheet.png index 3d0737bae1..ad7c91db7b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protect_sheet.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protect_sheet.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png index 44bb017518..50be90b70f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png index bea2ec1960..8a0f14237f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png index 7cc4c9d306..a9ab620ffa 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png index d1f489244f..f465ba0e23 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png index f68f83bb07..8069b2166e 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/search_window.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/search_window.png index 5e95dbc9e2..d929c49fa0 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/search_window.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/search_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/sequence.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/sequence.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..039a1557b6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/sequence.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png index 848b74901c..3f55f5b2aa 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick2.png index bbe0da1226..575c195080 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_rightclick2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png index 4279584741..78774749ba 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/sort.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/sort.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2c3ef1399b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/sort.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/unprotect_sheet.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/unprotect_sheet.png index 9de54d867e..1f441a59bc 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/unprotect_sheet.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/unprotect_sheet.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index ea6f49ad2a..a942a71e26 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -70,6 +70,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "ARABIC Function", "body": "The ARABIC function is one of the math and trigonometry functions. The function is used to convert a Roman numeral to an Arabic numeral. The ARABIC function syntax is: ARABIC(x) where x is a text representation of a Roman numeral: a string enclosed in quotation marks or a reference to a cell containing text. Note: if an empty string (\"\") is used as an argument, the function returns the value 0. To apply the ARABIC function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Math and trigonometry function group from the list, click the ARABIC function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." }, + { + "id": "Functions/arraytotext.htm", + "title": "ARRAYTOTEXT Function", + "body": "The ARRAYTOTEXT function is a a text and data function. It is used to return a range of data as a text string. The ARRAYTOTEXT function syntax is: =ARRAYTOTEXT(array, [format]) where array is the range of data to return as text, [format] is an optional argument. The following values are available: 0 the values in the text string will be separated by comma (set by default), 1 to enclose each text value in double quotes (except for numbers, true/false values and errors), to use a semicolon as a delimiter and to enclose the whole text string in curly braces. To apply the ARRAYTOTEXT function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Text and data function group from the list, click the ARRAYTOTEXT function, enter the required arguments separating them by comma, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." + }, { "id": "Functions/asc.htm", "title": "ASC Function", @@ -720,6 +725,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "EXP Function", "body": "The EXP function is one of the math and trigonometry functions. It is used to return the e constant raised to the desired power. The e constant is equal to 2,71828182845904. The EXP function syntax is: EXP(x) where x is a power you wish to raise e to, a numeric value entered manually or included into the cell you make reference to. To apply the EXP function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Math and trigonometry function group from the list, click the EXP function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." }, + { + "id": "Functions/expand.htm", + "title": "EXPAND Function", + "body": "The EXPAND function is a lookup and reference function. It is used to expand a range of data (array) by adding rows and columns. Please note that this is an array formula. To learn more, please read the Insert array formulas article. The EXPAND function syntax is: =EXPAND(array, rows, [columns], [pad_with]) where array is the range of cells to be expanded, rows is the number of rows in the returned array. Although this is a required argument, if omitted, rows will not be added and the number of columns must be specified. [columns] is an optional argument identifying the number of columns in the returned array. If omitted, columns will not be added and the number of rows must be specified. [pad_with] is the value to fill in the added cells. #N/A is the default value. To apply the EXPAND function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the EXPAND function, enter the required arguments separating them by comma, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." + }, { "id": "Functions/expon-dist.htm", "title": "EXPON.DIST Function", @@ -775,6 +785,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "FDIST Function", "body": "The FDIST function is one of the statistical functions. It is used to return the (right-tailed) F probability distribution (degree of diversity) for two data sets. You can use this function to determine whether two data sets have different degrees of diversity. The FDIST function syntax is: FDIST(x, deg-freedom1, deg-freedom2) where x is the value at which the function should be calculated. A numeric value greater than 0. deg-freedom1 is the numerator degrees of freedom, a numeric value greater than 1 and less than 10^10. deg-freedom2 is denominator degrees of freedom, a numeric value greater than 1 and less than 10^10. The values can be entered manually or included into the cells you make reference to. To apply the FDIST function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Statistical function group from the list, click the FDIST function, enter the required arguments separating them by commas, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." }, + { + "id": "Functions/filter.htm", + "title": "FILTER Function", + "body": "The FILTER function is a lookup and reference function. It is used to filter a range of data and to return the results that match the criteria you specify. The FILTER function only extracts the necessary data and the results update when the original data change. Please note that this is an array formula. To learn more, please read the Insert array formulas article. The FILTER function syntax is: FILTER(array,include,[if_empty]) where array is the range of cells to filter, include is the filtering criteria supplied as a Boolean array (TRUE/FALSE) the same height (columns) and width (rows) as the array, [if_empty] is the value to return when the filter returns no results. This argument is optional. To apply the FILTER function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the FILTER function, enter the required arguments separating them by comma, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." + }, { "id": "Functions/find.htm", "title": "FIND/FINDB Function", @@ -1875,6 +1890,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "SECOND Function", "body": "The SECOND function is one of the date and time functions. It returns the second (a number from 0 to 59) of the time value. The SECOND function syntax is: SECOND( time-value ) where time-value is a value entered manually or included into the cell you make reference to. Note: the time-value may be expressed as a string value (e.g. \"13:39:15\"), a decimal number (e.g. 0.56 corresponds to 13:26:24) , or the result of a formula (e.g. the result of the NOW function - 9/26/12 13:39) To apply the SECOND function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Date and time function group from the list, click the SECOND function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." }, + { + "id": "Functions/sequence.htm", + "title": "SEQUENCE Function", + "body": "The SEQUENCE function is one of the math and trigonometry functions. It is used to generate an array of sequential numbers. Please note that this is an array formula. To learn more, please read the Insert array formulas article. The SEQUENCE function syntax is: SEQUENCE(rows,[columns],[start],[step]) where rows is used to set the number of rows to return. columns is used to set the number of columns to return. start is used to set the first number in the sequence. step is used to control the increment for each subsequent value in the array. To apply the SEQUENCE function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Math and trigonometry function group from the list, click the SEQUENCE function, enter the required arguments separating them by comma, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." + }, { "id": "Functions/seriessum.htm", "title": "SERIESSUM Function", @@ -1930,6 +1950,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "SMALL Function", "body": "The SMALL function is one of the statistical functions. It is used to analyze the range of data and find the k-th smallest value. The SMALL function syntax is: SMALL(array , k) where array is the selected range of cells. k is the position of the number from the smallest value, a numeric value entered manually or included into the cell you make reference to. To apply the SMALL function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Statistical function group from the list, click the SMALL function, enter the required arguments separating them by commas, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." }, + { + "id": "Functions/sort.htm", + "title": "SORT Function", + "body": "The SORT function is a lookup and reference function. It is used to sort a range of data or an array and to return the sorted array. Please note that this is an array formula. To learn more, please read the Insert array formulas article. The SORT function syntax is: =SORT(array,[sort_index],[sort_order],[by_col]) where array is the range of data to sort. [sort_index] is an optional argument. A number identifying the column or the row to sort by. [sort_order] is an optional argument. A number determining the sorting order: 1 or omitted for ascending order (by default), -1 for descending order, [by_col] is an optional argument. A value indicating the sorting direction: FALSE or omitted for sorting by rows when your data is organized vertically TRUE for sorting by columns when your data is organized horizontally. To apply the SORT function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the SORT function, enter the required arguments separating them by comma, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." + }, { "id": "Functions/sqrt.htm", "title": "SQRT Function", @@ -2325,6 +2350,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "XLOOKUP Function", "body": "The XLOOKUP function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to perform the search for a specific item by row both horizontally and vertically. The result is returned in another column and can accommodate two-dimensional datasets. The XLOOKUP function syntax is: XLOOKUP (lookup_value, lookup_array, return_array, [if_not_found], [match_mode], [search_mode]) where lookup_value is a value to search for. lookup_array is an array or range to search in. return_array is an array or range to return the results to. if_not_found is an optional argument. If there is no search result, the argument returns the text stated in [if_not_found]. In case the text is not specified, the “N/A” is returned. match_mode is an optional argument. The following values are available: 0 (set by default) returns the exact match; if there is no match, the “N/A” is returned instead. -1 returns the exact match; if there is none, the next smaller item is returned. 1 returns the exact match; if there is none, the next larger item is returned. 2 is a wildcard match. search_mode is an optional argument. The following values are available: 1 starts a search at the first item (set by default). -1 starts a reverse search, i.e. at the last item. 2 starts a binary search with the lookup_array sorted in ascending order. If not sorted, invalid results will be returned. -2 starts a binary search with the lookup_array sorted in descending order. If not sorted, invalid results will be returned. Wildcard characters include the question mark (?) that matches a single character and the asterisk (*) that matches multiple characters. If you want to find a question mark or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character. To apply the XLOOKUP function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the XLOOKUP function, enter the required arguments in the Function Arguments window, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." }, + { + "id": "Functions/xmatch.htm", + "title": "XMATCH Function", + "body": "The XMATCH function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to return the relative position of an item in an array. By default, an exact match is required. Please note that this is an array formula. To learn more, please read the Insert array formulas article. The XMATCH function syntax is: XMATCH(lookup_value, lookup_array, [match_mode], [search_mode]) where lookup_value is a value to search for. lookup_array is an array or range to search in. match_mode is an optional argument. The following values are available: 0 (set by default) returns the exact match; if there is no match, the “N/A” is returned instead. -1 returns the exact match; if there is none, the next smaller item is returned. 1 returns the exact match; if there is none, the next larger item is returned. 2 is a wildcard match. search_mode is an optional argument. The following values are available: 1 starts a search at the first item (set by default). -1 starts a reverse search, i.e. at the last item. 2 starts a binary search with the lookup_array sorted in ascending order. If not sorted, invalid results will be returned. -2 starts a binary search with the lookup_array sorted in descending order. If not sorted, invalid results will be returned. Wildcard characters include the question mark (?) that matches a single character and the asterisk (*) that matches multiple characters. If you want to find a question mark or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character. To apply the XMATCH function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the XMATCH function, enter the required arguments in the Function Arguments window, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell." + }, { "id": "Functions/xnpv.htm", "title": "XNPV Function", @@ -2378,7 +2408,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Advanced Settings of the Spreadsheet Editor", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes made during the editing process. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover spreadsheets if the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the spreadsheet. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the spreadsheet when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the spreadsheet co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. Show changes from other users. This feature allows to see changes made by other users in the spreadsheet opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the spreadsheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the spreadsheet. Workspace The R1C1 reference style option is disabled by default and the A1 reference style is used. When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number. In case you refer to other cells using the R1C1 reference style, the reference to a target cell is formed based on the distance from an active cell. For example, when you select the cell in row 5 and column 1 and refer to the cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[-2]C[1]. The numbers in square brackets designate the position of the cell relative to the current cell position, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows up and 1 column to the right of the active cell. If you select the cell in row 1 and column 2 and refer to the same cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[2]C, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows down from the active cell and in the same column. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native to display the text with hinting embedded into the font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue with the enabled hardware acceleration in the Google Chrome browser occurs. The Spreadsheet Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet. Regional Settings The Formula Language option is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names, argument names, and descriptions. Formula language is supported for 32 languages: Belarussian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Lao, Latvian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese. The Region option is used to set the display mode for currency, date, and time. The Use separators based on regional settings option is enabled by default, the separators will correspond to the set region. To set custom separators, uncheck this option and enter the required separators in Decimal separator and Thousands separator fields. Proofing The Dictionary language option is used to set the preferred dictionary for the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Calculating The Use 1904 date system option is used to calculate dates by using January 1, 1904, as a starting point. It can be useful when working with spreadsheets created in MS Excel 2008 for Mac and earlier MS Excel for Mac versions. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes made during the editing process. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover spreadsheets if the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the spreadsheet. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the spreadsheet when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the spreadsheet co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. Show changes from other users. This feature allows to see changes made by other users in the spreadsheet opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the spreadsheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the spreadsheet. Workspace The R1C1 reference style option is disabled by default and the A1 reference style is used. When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number. In case you refer to other cells using the R1C1 reference style, the reference to a target cell is formed based on the distance from an active cell. For example, when you select the cell in row 5 and column 1 and refer to the cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[-2]C[1]. The numbers in square brackets designate the position of the cell relative to the current cell position, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows up and 1 column to the right of the active cell. If you select the cell in row 1 and column 2 and refer to the same cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[2]C, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows down from the active cell and in the same column. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native to display the text with hinting embedded into the font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue with the enabled hardware acceleration in the Google Chrome browser occurs. The Spreadsheet Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet. Regional Settings The Formula Language option is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names, argument names, and descriptions. Formula language is supported for 33 languages: Armenian, Belarussian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Lao, Latvian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese. The Region option is used to set the display mode for currency, date, and time. Available regions: Azerbaijani, Bulgarian, Czech, Danish, German (Austria), German (Germany), German (Switzerland), Greek (Greece), English (Australia), English (United Kingdom), English (USA), Spanish (Spain), Spanish (Mexico), Finnish (Finland), French (France), French (Switzerland), Italian (Italy), Italian (Switzerland), Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Hungarian, Dutch (Netherlands), Polish (Poland), Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Slovak, Slovenian, Swedish (Finland), Swedish (Sweden), Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Chinese, Taiwanese. The Use separators based on regional settings option is enabled by default, the separators will correspond to the set region. To set custom separators, uncheck this option and enter the required separators in Decimal separator and Thousands separator fields. Proofing The Dictionary language option is used to set the preferred dictionary for the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Calculating The Use 1904 date system option is used to calculate dates by using January 1, 1904, as a starting point. It can be useful when working with spreadsheets created in MS Excel 2008 for Mac and earlier MS Excel for Mac versions. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -2403,17 +2433,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Spreadsheet Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Spreadsheet Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access the help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor or its advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a cell containing the required characters. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with the Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download as... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Spreadsheet Editor on the screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor . Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O Open the standard dialog box on the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors that allows you to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Tab/Shift+Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Close the current spreadsheet window in the Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the contextual menu of the selected element. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current spreadsheet to a default 100%. Duplicate a worksheet Press and hold down Ctrl+ drag the sheet tab Press and hold down ⌥ Option+ drag the sheet tab Copy an entire worksheet in a workbook and move it to the tab location you need. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, or right ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell above/below the currently selected one or to the left/to the right of it. Jump to the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell at the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data in a worksheet. If the region does not contain data, the last cell of the visible area will be selected. If the region contains data, the next cell with data will be selected. Jump to the beginning of the row Home Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Outline the cell A1. Jump to the end of the row End, Ctrl+→ End, ⌘ Cmd+→ Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the end of the spreadsheet Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Outline the lower right used cell in the worksheet situated in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row ↓, ↵ Enter ↵ Return Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one column ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one column →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Move vertical scrollbar Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Move vertical scrollbar up/down. Move horizontal scrollbar Left/Right ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down Move horizontal scrollbar left/right. To move the scrollbar to the right, scroll the mouse wheel down. To move the scrollbar to the left, scroll the mouse wheel up. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Data Selection Select all Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌘ Cmd+A Select the entire worksheet. Select column Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select a fragment cell by cell. Select from cursor to beginning of row ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. Select from cursor to end of row ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the current row. Extend the selection to beginning of worksheet Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. Extend the selection to the last used cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell in the worksheet (in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Select one cell to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select one cell to the left in a table. Select one cell to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Select one cell to the right in a table. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell to the right ⇧ Shift+End, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+End Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the right of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell to the left ⇧ Shift+Home, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+Home Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the left of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell up/down the column Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same column up/down from the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection down one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen down from the active cell. Extend the selection up one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen up from the active cell. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected data to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Data Formatting Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal or remove the bold formatting. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters or remove underlining. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Add Hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet. Edit active cell F2 F2 Edit the active cell and position the insertion point at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Format as table template Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and move down ↵ Enter ↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and move up ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move to the cell above. Complete cell entry and move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell to the right. Start new line Alt+↵ Enter Start a new line in the same cell. Cancel Esc Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the content of the active cell. Delete to the right Delete Delete, Fn+← Backspace Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments. Clear cell content Delete, ← Backspace Delete, ← Backspace Remove the content (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting the cell format or comments. Complete a cell entry and move to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. Complete a cell entry and move to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . Insert cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Open the dialog box for inserting new cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the right, a shift down, inserting an entire row or an entire column. Delete cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Open the dialog box for deleting cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the left, a shift up, deleting an entire row or an entire column. Insert the current date Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Insert the today date within an active cell. Insert the current time Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current time within an active cell. Insert the current date and time Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; then ␣ Spacebar then ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current date and time within an active cell. Pivot tables Update pivot table Alt+F5 ⌥ Option+F5 Update the previously selected pivot table. Functions Insert function ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+F3 Open the dialog box for inserting a new function by choosing from the provided list. SUM function Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Open drop-down list Alt+↓ Open a selected drop-down list. Open contextual menu ≣ Menu Open a contextual menu for the selected cell or cell range. Recalculate functions F9 F9 Recalculate the entire workbook. Recalculate functions ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+F9 Recalculate the current worksheet. Data Formats Open the 'Number Format' dialog box Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. Apply the General format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Apply the General number format. Apply the Currency format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Apply the Currency format with two decimal places (negative numbers in parentheses). Apply the Percentage format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Apply the Percentage format with no decimal places. Apply the Exponential format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Apply the Exponential number format with two decimal places. Apply the Date format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the Number format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Apply the Number format with two decimal places, thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for negative values. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time." + "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Spreadsheet Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below: Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Spreadsheet Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access the help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor or its advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a cell containing the required characters. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with the Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download as... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Spreadsheet Editor on the screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor . Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O Open the standard dialog box on the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors that allows you to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Tab/Shift+Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Close the current spreadsheet window in the Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the contextual menu of the selected element. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current spreadsheet to a default 100%. Duplicate a worksheet Press and hold down Ctrl+ drag the sheet tab Press and hold down ⌥ Option+ drag the sheet tab Copy an entire worksheet in a workbook and move it to the tab location you need. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, or right ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell above/below the currently selected one or to the left/to the right of it. Jump to the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell at the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data in a worksheet. If the region does not contain data, the last cell of the visible area will be selected. If the region contains data, the next cell with data will be selected. Jump to the beginning of the row Home Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Outline the cell A1. Jump to the end of the row End, Ctrl+→ End, ⌘ Cmd+→ Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the end of the spreadsheet Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Outline the lower right used cell in the worksheet situated in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row ↓, ↵ Enter ↵ Return Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one column ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one column →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Move vertical scrollbar Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Move vertical scrollbar up/down. Move horizontal scrollbar Left/Right ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down Move horizontal scrollbar left/right. To move the scrollbar to the right, scroll the mouse wheel down. To move the scrollbar to the left, scroll the mouse wheel up. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Data Selection Select all Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌘ Cmd+A Select the entire worksheet. Select column Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select a fragment cell by cell. Select from cursor to beginning of row ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. Select from cursor to end of row ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the current row. Extend the selection to beginning of worksheet Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. Extend the selection to the last used cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell in the worksheet (in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Select one cell to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select one cell to the left in a table. Select one cell to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Select one cell to the right in a table. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell to the right ⇧ Shift+End, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+End Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the right of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell to the left ⇧ Shift+Home, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+Home Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the left of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell up/down the column Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same column up/down from the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection down one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen down from the active cell. Extend the selection up one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen up from the active cell. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected data to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Data Formatting Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal or remove the bold formatting. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters or remove underlining. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Add Hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet. Edit active cell F2 F2 Edit the active cell and position the insertion point at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Format as table template Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and move down ↵ Enter ↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and move up ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move to the cell above. Complete cell entry and move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell to the right. Start new line Alt+↵ Enter Start a new line in the same cell. Cancel Esc Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the content of the active cell. Delete to the right Delete Delete, Fn+← Backspace Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments. Clear cell content Delete, ← Backspace Delete, ← Backspace Remove the content (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting the cell format or comments. Complete a cell entry and move to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. Complete a cell entry and move to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . Insert cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Open the dialog box for inserting new cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the right, a shift down, inserting an entire row or an entire column. Delete cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Open the dialog box for deleting cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the left, a shift up, deleting an entire row or an entire column. Insert the current date Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Insert the today date within an active cell. Insert the current time Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current time within an active cell. Insert the current date and time Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; then ␣ Spacebar then ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current date and time within an active cell. Pivot tables Update pivot table Alt+F5 ⌥ Option+F5 Update the previously selected pivot table. Functions Insert function ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+F3 Open the dialog box for inserting a new function by choosing from the provided list. SUM function Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Open drop-down list Alt+↓ Open a selected drop-down list. Open contextual menu ≣ Menu Open a contextual menu for the selected cell or cell range. Recalculate functions F9 F9 Recalculate the entire workbook. Recalculate functions ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+F9 Recalculate the current worksheet. Data Formats Open the 'Number Format' dialog box Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. Apply the General format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Apply the General number format. Apply the Currency format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Apply the Currency format with two decimal places (negative numbers in parentheses). Apply the Percentage format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Apply the Percentage format with no decimal places. Apply the Exponential format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Apply the Exponential number format with two decimal places. Apply the Date format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the Number format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Apply the Number format with two decimal places, thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for negative values. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", - "body": "To help you view and select cells in large spreadsheets, the Spreadsheet Editor offers several tools: adjustable bars, scrollbars, sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs and zoom. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and to set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, go to the View tab. You can select the following options: Sheet View - to manage sheet views. To learn more about sheet views, please read the following article. Zoom - to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list. Interface theme - choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. Freeze panes - freezes all the rows above the active cell and all the columns to the left of the active cell so that they remain visible when you scroll the spreadsheet to the right or down. To unfreeze the panes, just click this option once again or right-click anywhere within the worksheet and select the Unfreeze Panes option from the menu. Formula bar - when disabled, hides the bar below the top toolbar which is used to enter and review the formulas and their contents. To show the hidden Formula Bar, click this option once again. Dragging formula bar bottom line to expand it toggles Formula Bar height to show one row. Headings - when disabled, hides the column heading at the top and row heading on the left side of the worksheet. To show the hidden Headings, click this option once again. Gridlines - when disabled, hides the lines around the cells. To show the hidden Gridlines, click this option once again. Show zeros - allows “0” to be visible when entered in a cell. TO disable this option, uncheck the box. Always show toolbar - when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Combine sheet and status bars - displays all sheet navigation tools and status bar in a single line. By default, this option is active. If you disable it, the status bar will appear in two lines. Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box. Right Panel - when disabled, hides the right panel where Settings are located. To show the right panel, check this box. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. You can also change the size of the opened Comments or Chat panel using the simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your spreadsheet, use the following tools: Use the Tab key on your keyboard to move to the cell to the right of the selected one. The Scrollbars (at the bottom or on the right side) are used to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. To navigate a spreadsheet using the scrollbars: click the up/down or right/left arrows on the scrollbars; drag the scroll box; scroll the mouse wheel to move vertically; use the combination of the Shift key and the mouse Scroll wheel to move horizontally; click any area to the left/right or above/below the scroll box on the scrollbar. You can also use the mouse scroll wheel to scroll your spreadsheet up or down. The Sheet Navigation buttons are situated in the left lower corner and are used to scroll the sheet list to the right/left and navigate among the sheet tabs. click the Scroll sheet list left button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the left; click the Scroll sheet list right button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the right; Use the button on the status bar to add a new worksheet. To select the necessary sheet: click button on the status bar to open the list of all sheets and to select the sheet you need. The list of sheets also displays the sheet status, or click the appropriate Sheet Tab next to button. The Zoom buttons are situated in the lower right corner and are used to zoom in and out of the current sheet. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. The Zoom settings are also available on the View tab." + "body": "To help you view and select cells in large spreadsheets, the Spreadsheet Editor offers several tools: adjustable bars, scrollbars, sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs and zoom. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and to set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, go to the View tab. You can select the following options: Sheet View - to manage sheet views. To learn more about sheet views, please read the following article. Zoom - to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list. Interface Theme - choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. Freeze Panes - freezes all the rows above the active cell and all the columns to the left of the active cell so that they remain visible when you scroll the spreadsheet to the right or down. To unfreeze the panes, just click this option once again or right-click anywhere within the worksheet and select the Unfreeze Panes option from the menu. Formula Bar - when disabled, hides the bar below the top toolbar which is used to enter and review the formulas and their contents. To show the hidden Formula Bar, click this option once again. Dragging formula bar bottom line to expand it toggles Formula Bar height to show one row. Headings - when disabled, hides the column heading at the top and row heading on the left side of the worksheet. To show the hidden Headings, click this option once again. Gridlines - when disabled, hides the lines around the cells. To show the hidden Gridlines, click this option once again. Show Zeros - allows “0” to be visible when entered in a cell. TO disable this option, uncheck the box. Always Show Toolbar - when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Combine Sheet and Status Bars - displays all sheet navigation tools and status bar in a single line. By default, this option is active. If you disable it, the status bar will appear in two lines. Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box. Right Panel - when disabled, hides the right panel where Settings are located. To show the right panel, check this box. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g., image, chart, shape) and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. You can also change the size of the opened Comments or Chat panel using the simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your spreadsheet, use the following tools: Use the Tab key on your keyboard to move to the cell to the right of the selected one. The Scrollbars (at the bottom or on the right side) are used to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. To navigate a spreadsheet using the scrollbars: click the up/down or right/left arrows on the scrollbars; drag the scroll box; scroll the mouse wheel to move vertically; use the combination of the Shift key and the mouse Scroll wheel to move horizontally; click any area to the left/right or above/below the scroll box on the scrollbar. You can also use the mouse scroll wheel to scroll your spreadsheet up or down. The Sheet Navigation buttons are situated in the left lower corner and are used to scroll the sheet list to the right/left and navigate among the sheet tabs. click the Scroll sheet list left button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the left; click the Scroll sheet list right button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the right; Use the button on the status bar to add a new worksheet. To select the necessary sheet: click button on the status bar to open the list of all sheets and to select the sheet you need. The list of sheets also displays the sheet status, or click the appropriate Sheet Tab next to button. The Zoom buttons are situated in the lower right corner and are used to zoom in and out of the current sheet. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. The Zoom settings are also available on the View tab." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Functions", - "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently selected occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. Specify search options by checking the necessary options: Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only, the whole Workbook, or the Specific range. In the latter case, the Select Data range field will become active where you can specify the required range. Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is '56' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as '0.56' or '156' etc. will not be found). All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons." + "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently selected occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. Specify search options by checking the necessary options: Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only, the whole Workbook, or the Specific range. In the latter case, the Select Data range field will become active where you can specify the required range. Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is '56' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as '0.56' or '156' etc. will not be found). All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -2423,7 +2453,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Supported Formats of Spreadsheets", - "body": "A spreadsheet is a table of data organized in rows and columns. It is most frequently used to store financial information because of its ability to re-calculate the entire sheet automatically after a change to a single cell is made. The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to open, view and edit the most popular spreadsheet file formats. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (XLSX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML CSV Comma Separated Values File format used to store tabular data (numbers and text) in plain-text form + + ODS File extension for spreadsheet files used by OpenOffice and StarOffice suites, an open standard for spreadsheets + + OTS OpenDocument Spreadsheet Template OpenDocument file format for spreadsheet templates. An OTS template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting + + XLS File extension for spreadsheet files created by Microsoft Excel + + XLSX Default file extension for spreadsheet files written in Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (or later versions) + + XLTX Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for spreadsheet templates. An XLTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting + + The following table contains the formats in which you can download a spreadsheet from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as CSV CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX ODS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX OTS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLSX CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLTX CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your spreadsheets into the most known file formats." + "body": "A spreadsheet is a table of data organized in rows and columns. It is most frequently used to store financial information because of its ability to re-calculate the entire sheet automatically after a change to a single cell is made. The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to open, view and edit the most popular spreadsheet file formats. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (XLSX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML CSV Comma Separated Values A file format used to store tabular data (numbers and text) in plain-text form. + + ET WPS Spreadsheets Workbook A spreadsheet file format included in the WPS Office suite that supports charts and formulas and stores data in rows and columns of cells. + + ETT WPS Spreadsheets Template A spreadsheet template included in the WPS Office suite. ETT files are similar to ET files, storing rows and columns of data, charts, and graphs, but they are primarily used for duplicating spreadsheets with similar layouts and information. + + FODS OpenDocument Flat XML Spreadsheet An XML-based file format for saving and exchanging spreadsheets. + + ODS A file extension for spreadsheet files used by OpenOffice and StarOffice suites, an open standard for spreadsheets. + + OTS OpenDocument Spreadsheet Template An OpenDocument file format for spreadsheet templates. An OTS template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting + + SXC Sun XML Calc An XML based spreadsheet file format that belongs to OpenOffice suite, supports formulas, functions, macros and charts. + + XLS File extension for spreadsheet files created by Microsoft Excel. + + XLSX Default file extension for spreadsheet files written in Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (or later versions). + + XLTM An XLTM file is a macro-enabled spreadsheet template created by Microsoft Excel. + + XLTX Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for spreadsheet templates. An XLTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting. + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML) A file format that is used for structuring, storing and transmitting data. + + The following table contains the formats in which you can download a spreadsheet from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as CSV JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ET CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ETT CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX FODS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ODS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX SXC CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX OTS CSV, JPG, ODS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLSM CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLSX CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLTM, XLTX XLTM CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTX XML CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your spreadsheets into the most known file formats." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", @@ -2440,6 +2470,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Data tab", "body": "The Data tab allows managing data in the Spreadsheet Editor. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: sort and filter data, convert text to columns, remove duplicates from a data range, group and ungroup data, set data validation parameters, get data from TXT/CSV file, view other files the spreadsheet is linked to via the External Links button." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Draw tab", + "body": "The Draw tab of the Spreadsheet Editor allows users to perform basic drawing operations. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: use the select tool to resize or delete the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting, use the pen and the highlighter tools to draw or to add handwritten notes and highlighting, use the eraser tool to remove the whole drawing or the handwritten text," + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", @@ -2473,7 +2508,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Plugins tab", - "body": "The Plugins tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. With this tab, you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: The Settings button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all the installed plugins and add your own ones. The Macros button allows you to open the window where you can create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available: Send allows to send the spreadsheet via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, Photo Editor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages, Note: this plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your spreadsheet. To learn more about plugins please refer to our API Documentation. All the existing open-source plugin examples are currently available on GitHub." + "body": "The Plugins tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. With this tab, you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: The Plugin Manager button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all the installed plugins and add your own ones. The Macros button allows you to open the window where you can create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available: Send allows to send the spreadsheet via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, Photo Editor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages, Note: this plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your spreadsheet. To learn more about plugins please refer to our API Documentation. All the existing open-source plugin examples are currently available on GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", @@ -2483,37 +2518,42 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm", "title": "Protection tab", - "body": "The Protection tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to prevent unauthorized access by encrypting and protecting the workbook or the sheets. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: Encrypt your document by setting a password, Protect workbook structure with or without a password, Protect sheet by restricting editing abilities within a sheet with or without a password, Allow edit ranges of locked cells with or without a password, Enable and disable the following options: Locked Cell, Hidden Formulas, Shape Locked, Lock Text." + "body": "The Protection tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to prevent unauthorized access by encrypting and protecting the workbook or the sheets. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: Encrypt your document by setting a password, Protect workbook structure with or without a password, Protect sheet by restricting editing abilities within a sheet with or without a password, Enable and disable the following options: Locked Cell, Hidden Formulas, Shape Locked, Lock Text, Protect range to restrict editing ranges to selected users." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "View tab", - "body": "The View tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to manage sheet view presets based on applied filters view options. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: View options available on this tab: Sheet View allows to manage sheet view presets. Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your spreadsheet. Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. Freeze Panes allows to freeze and unfreeze certain panes or rows and columns. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Formula Bar to show a formula bar above the spreadsheet. Headings to show headings, i.e., column headings at the top and row headings on the left. Gridlines to show gridlines, i.e., cell outlines. Show Zeros to always show \"0\" when entered in a cell. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Combine Sheet and Status Bars to display all sheet navigation tools and status bar in a single line. The status bar will appear in two lines when this box is unchecked. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible." + "body": "The View tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to manage sheet view presets based on applied filters view options. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: View options available on this tab: Sheet View allows to manage sheet view presets. Normal allows to see the spreadsheet fully. Page Break Preview allows to see the printed area of the spreadsheet only. Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your spreadsheet. Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. Freeze Panes allows to freeze and unfreeze certain panes or rows and columns. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Formula Bar to show a formula bar above the spreadsheet. Headings to show headings, i.e., column headings at the top and row headings on the left. Gridlines to show gridlines, i.e., cell outlines. Show Zeros to always show \"0\" when entered in a cell. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Combine Sheet and Status Bars to display all sheet navigation tools and status bar in a single line. The status bar will appear in two lines when this box is unchecked. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "title": "Add cell background and borders", - "body": "Add a cell background To apply and format a cell background in the Spreadsheet Editor, select a cell or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. to apply a solid color fill to the cell background, click the Background color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and choose the required color. to use other fill types, such as a gradient fill or pattern, click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Fill section: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the selected cells with. Click the colored box below and select one of the following palettes: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the required colors range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette. Gradient Fill - fill the selected cells with two colors which smoothly change from one to the other. Angle - manually specify an exact value in degrees that defines the gradient direction (colors change in a straight line at the specified angle). Direction - choose a predefined template from the menu. The following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right (45°), top to bottom (90°), top-right to bottom-left (135°), right to left (180°), bottom-right to top-left (225°), bottom to top (270°), bottom-left to top-right (315°), left to right (0°). Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Pattern - select this option to fill the selected cells with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Add cell borders To add and format borders to a worksheet, select a cell, a range of cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. click the Borders icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar or click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Borders Style section, select the border style you wish to apply: open the Border Style submenu and select one of the available options, open the Border Color icon submenu or use the Color palette on the right sidebar and select the required color from the palette, select one of the available border templates: Outside Borders , All Borders , Top Borders , Bottom Borders , Left Borders , Right Borders , No Borders , Inside Borders , Inside Vertical Borders , Inside Horizontal Borders , Diagonal Up Border , Diagonal Down Border ." + "body": "Add a cell background To apply and format a cell background in the Spreadsheet Editor, select a cell or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. to apply a solid color fill to the cell background, click the Background color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and choose the required color. to use other fill types, such as a gradient fill or pattern, click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Fill section: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the selected cells with. Click the colored box below and select one of the following palettes: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the spreadsheet. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette. Gradient Fill - fill the selected cells with two colors which smoothly change from one to the other. Angle - manually specify an exact value in degrees that defines the gradient direction (colors change in a straight line at the specified angle). Direction - choose a predefined template from the menu. The following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right (45°), top to bottom (90°), top-right to bottom-left (135°), right to left (180°), bottom-right to top-left (225°), bottom to top (270°), bottom-left to top-right (315°), left to right (0°). Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Pattern - select this option to fill the selected cells with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Add cell borders To add and format borders to a worksheet, select a cell, a range of cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. click the Borders icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar or click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Borders Style section, select the border style you wish to apply: open the Border Style submenu and select one of the available options, open the Border Color icon submenu or use the Color palette on the right sidebar and select the required color from the palette, select one of the available border templates: Outside Borders , All Borders , Top Borders , Bottom Borders , Left Borders , Right Borders , No Borders , Inside Borders , Inside Vertical Borders , Inside Horizontal Borders , Diagonal Up Border , Diagonal Down Border ." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm", + "title": "Add external links to cells", + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can create an external link to a cell or a range of cells in another workbook. The external links to cells can be created between files within the current portal (in the online editor) or between local files (in the desktop editor). Note: in the online editor, the ability to insert data via an external link must also be implemented on the integrator side (e.g., in a third-party document management system). If data in the source workbook changes, you can update values in the destination workbook without copying them manually once again. To add an external link, open the source workbook and the destination workbook, in the source workbook, copy a cell or a range of cells (Ctrl+C), in the destination workbook, paste the copied data (Ctrl+V), click the Paste Special button and choose the Paste link (Ctrl+N) option. The link will be added. If you click the cell which contains an external link, it looks like ='[SourceWorkbook.xlsx]Sheet1'!A1 in the formula bar. To update the added external links, switch to the Data tab, click the External Links button, select the necessary link in the list, click the Update Values button or click the arrow next to it and choose whether you want to Update values (currently selected) or Update all. The status will be changed to 'OK'. When you open the workbook which contains external links, the warning appears: Click Update to update all external links. To break the added external links, switch to the Data tab, click the External Links button, select the necessary link in the list, click the Break Links button or click the arrow next to it and choose whether you want to Break links (currently selected) or Break all links. The links will be broken, and the values will not be updated." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", "title": "Add hyperlinks", - "body": "To add a hyperlink in the Spreadsheet Editor, select a cell where a hyperlink should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar, the Hyperlink Settings window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink settings: Select the required link type: Use the External Link option and enter enter a URL in the http://www.example.com format in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. If you need to add a hyperlink to a local file, enter the URL in the file://path/Spreadsheet.xlsx (for Windows) or file:///path/Spreadsheet.xlsx (for MacOS and Linux) format in the Link to field. The file://path/Spreadsheet.xlsx or file:///path/Spreadsheet.xlsx hyperlink type can be opened only in the desktop version of the editor. In the web editor you can only add the link without being able to open it. Use the Internal Data Range option, select a worksheet and a cell range in the fields below, or a previously added Named range if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain cell range in the same spreadsheet. You can also generate an external link which will lead to a particular cell or a range of cells by clicking the Get Link button or using the Get link to this range option in the contextual right-click menu of the required cell range. Display - enter a text that will become clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. Note: if the selected cell already contains data, it will be automatically displayed in this field. ScreenTip Text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label connected to the hyperlink. click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button the position where the hyperlink should be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. When you hover the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear. To follow the link, click the link in the spreadsheet. To select a cell that contains a link without opening the link, click and hold the mouse button. To delete the added hyperlink, activate the cell containing the added hyperlink and press the Delete key, or right-click the cell and select the Clear All option from the drop-down list." + "body": "To add a hyperlink in the Spreadsheet Editor, select a cell where a hyperlink should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar, the Hyperlink Settings window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink settings: Select the required link type: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the http://www.example.com format in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. If you need to add a hyperlink to a local file, enter the URL in the file://path/Spreadsheet.xlsx (for Windows) or file:///path/Spreadsheet.xlsx (for MacOS and Linux) format in the Link to field. The file://path/Spreadsheet.xlsx or file:///path/Spreadsheet.xlsx hyperlink type can be opened only in the desktop version of the editor. In the web editor you can only add the link without being able to open it. Use the Internal Data Range option, select a worksheet and a cell range in the fields below, or a previously added Named range if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain cell range in the same spreadsheet. You can also generate an external link which will lead to a particular cell or a range of cells by clicking the Get Link button or using the Get link to this range option in the contextual right-click menu of the required cell range. Display - enter a text that will become clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. Note: if the selected cell already contains data, it will be automatically displayed in this field. ScreenTip Text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label connected to the hyperlink. click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button the position where the hyperlink should be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. When you hover the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear. To follow the link, click the link in the spreadsheet. To select a cell that contains a link without opening the link, click and hold the mouse button. To delete the added hyperlink, activate the cell containing the added hyperlink and press the Delete key, or right-click the cell and select the Clear All option from the drop-down list." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", "title": "Align data in cells", "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can align data horizontally and vertically or even rotate data within a cell. To do that, select a cell or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination. You can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Then perform one of the following operations using the icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Apply one of the horizontal alignment styles to the data within a cell, click the Align left icon to align the data to the left side of the cell (the right side remains unaligned); click the Align center icon to align the data in the center of the cell (the right and the left sides remains unaligned); click the Align right icon to align the data to the right side of the cell (the left side remains unaligned); click the Justified icon to align the data both to the left and the right sides of the cell (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). Change the vertical alignment of the data within a cell, click the Align top icon to align your data to the top of the cell; click the Align middle icon to align your data to the middle of the cell; click the Align bottom icon to align your data to the bottom of the cell. Change the angle of the data within a cell by clicking the Orientation icon and choosing one of the following options: use the Horizontal Text option to place the text horizontally (default option), use the Angle Counterclockwise option to place the text from the bottom left corner to the top right corner of a cell, use the Angle Clockwise option to place the text from the top left corner to the bottom right corner of a cell, use the Vertical text option to place the text vertically, use the Rotate Text Up option to place the text from bottom to top of a cell, use the Rotate Text Down option to place the text from top to bottom of a cell. Indent text within a cell using the Indent section on the Cell Settings right sidebar. Specify the value (i.e. the number of characters) by which the contents will be moved to the right. If you change the orientation of the text, indents will be reset. If you change indents for the rotated text, the orientation of the text will be reset. Indents can only be set if the horizontal or vertical text orientation is selected. Rotate the text by an exactly specified angle, click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Orientation. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the Angle field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Fit your data to the column width by clicking the Wrap text icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar or by checking the Wrap text checkbox on the right sidebar. If you change the column width, data wrapping adjusts automatically. Fit your data to the cell width by checking the Shrink to fit checkbox on the right sidebar. The contents of the cell will be reduced in size to such an extent that it can fit in it." }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm", - "title": "Allow edit ranges", - "body": "The Allow Edit Ranges option allows you to specify cell ranges a user can work with in a protected sheet. You can allow users to edit specific ranges of locked cells with or without a password. If you don’t use a password, the cell range can be edited. To select a range of locked cells a user will be allowed to change: Click the Allow Edit Ranges button on the top toolbar. The Allow Users to Edit Ranges window will open. Click the New button in the Allow Users to Edit Ranges window to select and to add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit. In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Password is optional, so enter and confirm it if you want users to access the editable cell ranges with a password. Click OK to confirm. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. Click the Protect Sheet button if you are finished, or click OK to save changes and to continue working in the unprotected sheet. If you click the Protect Sheet button, the Protect Sheet window appears for you to select the operations a user will be allowed to perform in order to prevent any unwanted changes. Enter and confirm the password, if you want to set a password to unprotect this sheet. Operations a user may be allowed to perform. Select locked cells Select unlocked cells Format cells Format columns Format rows Insert columns Insert rows Insert hyperlink Delete columns Delete rows Sort Use Autofilter Use PivotTable and PivotChart Edit objects Edit scenarios Click the Protect button to enable the protection. The Protect Sheet button stays highlighted when a sheet is protected. When a sheet is not protected, you can still make changes to the allowed ranges. Click the Allow Edit Ranges button to open the Allow Users to Edit Ranges window. Use Edit and Delete buttons to manage the selected ranges of cells. Then click the Protect Sheet button to enable the sheet protection, or click OK to save changes and to continue working in the unprotected sheet. For ranges protected with a password, when someone is trying to edit the selected range of cells, the Unlock Range window appears, where the user is prompted to enter the password." - }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm", "title": "Change number format", - "body": "Apply a number format In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers appear in a spreadsheet. To do that, select a cell, a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. drop-down the Number format button list situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply: General - is used to display the data as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols to the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following currency symbols: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Pound, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Croatian Kuna. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). Date - is used to display dates, Time - is used to display time, Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to the data, you can also use the Percent style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as possible. More formats - is used to create a custom number format or to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). Custom - is used to create a custom format: select a cell, a range of cells, or the whole worksheet for values you want to format, choose the Custom option from the More formats menu, enter the required codes and check the result in the preview area or choose one of the templates and/or combine them. If you want to create a format based on the existing one, first apply the existing format and then edit the codes to your preference, click OK. change the number of decimal places if needed: use the Increase decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, use the Decrease decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. Note: to change the number format you can also use keyboard shortcuts. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: select the cells whose number format you want to customize, drop-down the Number format button list on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu, select the More formats option, in the opened Number Format window, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Scientific and Percentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr-15,  06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15. for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). click the OK button to apply the changes." + "body": "Apply a number format In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers appear in a spreadsheet. To do that, select a cell, a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. drop-down the Number format button list situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply: General - is used to display the data as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols to the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following currency symbols: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Pound, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Croatian Kuna. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). Short Date - is used to display date in the DD.MM.YYYY format, Long Date - is used to display date in the DD.month in full.YYYY format, Time - is used to display time, Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to the data, you can also use the Percent style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as possible. More formats - is used to create a custom number format or to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). Custom - is used to create a custom format: select a cell, a range of cells, or the whole worksheet for values you want to format, choose the Custom option from the More formats menu, enter the required codes and check the result in the preview area or choose one of the templates and/or combine them. If you want to create a format based on the existing one, first apply the existing format and then edit the codes to your preference, click OK. change the number of decimal places if needed: use the Increase decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, use the Decrease decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. Note: to change the number format you can also use keyboard shortcuts. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: select the cells whose number format you want to customize, drop-down the Number format button list on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu, select the More formats option, in the opened Number Format window, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Scientific and Percentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr-15,  06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15. for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). click the OK button to apply the changes." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", + "title": "ChatGPT", + "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the ChatGPT icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field in the left panel of the editor. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the ChatGPT icon. Click the Show advanced settings button to see all the available settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Enter the request and click the Submit button to process it, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one. ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm", @@ -2540,10 +2580,15 @@ var indexes = "title": "Data validation", "body": "ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor offers a data validation feature that controls the parameters of the information entered in cells by users. To access the data validation feature, choose a cell, a range of cells, or a whole spreadsheet you want to apply the feature to, open the Data tab, and click the Data Validation icon on the top toolbar. The opened Data Validation window contains three tabs: Settings, Input Message, and Error Alert. Settings The Settings section allows you to specify the type of data that can be entered: Note: Check the Apply these changes to all other cells with the same settings box to use the same settings to the selected range of cells or a whole worksheet. choose the required option in the Allow menu: Any value: no limitations on information type. Whole number: only whole numbers are allowed. Decimal: only numbers with a decimal point are allowed. List: only options from the drop-down list you created are allowed. Uncheck the Show drop-down list in cell box to hide the drop-down arrow. Date: only cells with the date format are allowed. Time: only cells with the time format are allowed. Text length: sets the characters limit. Other: sets the necessary validation parameter given as a formula. Note: Check the Apply these changes to all other cells with the same settings box to use the same settings to the selected range of cells or a whole worksheet. specify a validation condition in the Data menu: between: the data in cells should be within the range set by the validation rule. not between: the data in cells should not be within the range set by the validation rule. equals: the data in cells should be equal to the value set by the validation rule. does not equal: the data in cells should not be equal to the value set by the validation rule. greater than: the data in cells should exceed the values set by the validation rule. less than: the data in cells should be less than the values set by the validation rule. greater than or equal to: the data in cells should exceed or be equal to the value set by the validation rule. less than or equal to: the data in cells should be less than or equal to the value set by the validation rule. create a validation rule depending on the allowed information type: Validation condition Validation rule Description Availability Between / not between Minimum / Maximum Sets the value range Whole number / Decimal / Text length Start date / End date Sets the date range Date Start time / End time Sets the time period Time Equals / does not equal Compare to Sets the value for comparison Whole number / Decimal Date Sets the date for comparison Date Elapsed time Sets the time for comparison Time Length Sets the text length value for comparison Text length Greater than / greater than or equal to Minimum Sets the lower limit Whole number / Decimal / Text length Start date Sets the starting date Date Start time Sets the starting time Time Less than / less than or equal to Maximum Sets the higher limit Whole number / Decimal / Text length End date Sets the ending date Date End time Sets the ending time Time As well as: Source: provide the source of information for the List information type. Formula: enter the required formula to create a custom validation rule for the Other information type. Input Message The Input Message section allows you to create a customized message displayed when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the cell. Specify the Title and the body of your Input Message. Uncheck the Show input message when cell is selected to disable the display of the message. Leave it to display the message. Error Alert The Error Alert section allows you to specify the message displayed when the data given by users does not meet the validation rules. Style: choose one of the available presets, Stop, Alert, or Message. Title: specify the title of the alert message. Error Message: enter the text of the alert message. Uncheck the Show error alert after invalid data is entered box to disable the display of the alert message." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Draw freehand on a spreadsheet", + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can use the Draw tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your spreadsheet. To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon, and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the needed color is not in the palette. When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button. Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke. Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm", "title": "Set font type, size, style, and colors", - "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can select the font type and its size, apply one of the decoration styles and change the font and background colors by clicking the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: if you want to apply formatting to the data in the spreadsheet, select them with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the required formatting. If you need to apply the formatting to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to select the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 409 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the icon is clicked. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the icon is clicked. Bold Used to make the font bold making it heavier. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikethrough Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript/Superscript Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in cells. Fill color Used to change the color of the cell fill. Using this icon you can apply a solid color fill. The color of the cell fill can also be changed using the Fill section on the Cell settings tab of the right sidebar. Change color scheme This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, or Verve. Note: it's also possible to apply one of the formatting presets selecting the cell you wish to format and choosing the desired preset from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar: To change the font color or use a solid color fill as the cell background, select characters/cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the corresponding icon on the top toolbar, select any color in the available palettes Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected text/cell and added to the Custom color palette. To remove the background color from a certain cell, select a cell, or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the Fill color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the icon." + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can select the font type and its size, apply one of the decoration styles and change the font and background colors by clicking the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: if you want to apply formatting to the data in the spreadsheet, select them with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the required formatting. If you need to apply the formatting to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to select the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 409 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the icon is clicked. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the icon is clicked. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Bold Used to make the font bold making it heavier. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikethrough Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript/Superscript Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in cells. Fill color Used to change the color of the cell fill. Using this icon you can apply a solid color fill. The color of the cell fill can also be changed using the Fill section on the Cell settings tab of the right sidebar. Change color scheme This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, or Verve. Note: it's also possible to apply one of the formatting presets selecting the cell you wish to format and choosing the desired preset from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar: To change the font color or use a solid color fill as the cell background, select characters/cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the corresponding icon on the top toolbar, select any color in the available palettes Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the spreadsheet. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the text/cell and added to the Recent colors palette. To remove the background color from a certain cell, select a cell, or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the Fill color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the icon." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm", @@ -2563,17 +2608,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm", "title": "Insert array formulas", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to use array formulas. Array formulas ensure consistency among formulas in a spreadsheet, as you can enter a single array formula instead of several usual formulas, they simplify working with large amount of data, allow you to quickly fill a sheet with data, and much more. You can enter formulas and built-in functions as array formulas in order to: perform multiple calculations at once and display a single result, or return a range of values displayed in multiple rows or/and columns. There are also specially designated functions which can return multiple values. If you enter them by pressing Enter, they return a single value. If you select an output range of cells to display the results and then enter a function by pressing Ctrl + Shift + Enter, it returns a range of values (the number of returned values depends on the size of the previously selected output range). The list below contains links to detailed descriptions of these functions. Array functions CELL CHOOSEROWS CHOOSECOLS COLUMN DROP FORMULATEXT FREQUENCY GROWTH HSTACK HYPERLINLK INDIRECT INDEX ISFORMULA LINEST LOGEST MINVERSE MMULT MUNIT OFFSET RANDARRAY ROW TAKE TEXTSPLIT TOCOL TOROW TRANSPOSE TREND WRAPCOLS WRAPROWS UNIQUE VSTACK XLOOKUP Insert array formulas To insert an array formula, Select a range of cells where you wish to display results. Enter the formula you want to use in the formula bar, specifying necessary arguments within parentheses (). Press the Ctrl + Shift + Enter key combination. The results will be displayed in the selected range of cells, and the formula in the formula bar will be automatically enclosed in the curly braces { } to indicate that it is an array formula. For example, {=UNIQUE(B2:D6)}. These braces cannot be entered manually. Create a single-cell array formula The following example illustrates the result of the array formula displayed in a single cell. Select a cell, enter =SUM(C2:C11*D2:D11), and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Create a multi-cell array formula The following example illustrates the results of the array formula displayed in a range of cells. Select a range of cells, enter =C2:C11*D2:D11, and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Edit array formulas Every time you edit an entered array formula (e.g., change arguments), you need to press the Ctrl + Shift + Enter key combination to save the changes. The following example explains how to expand a multi-cell array formula when you add new data. Select all the cells which contain an array formula, as well as empty cells next to new data, edit arguments in the formula bar so that they include new data, and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. If you want to apply a multi-cell array formula to a smaller range of cells, you need to delete the current array formula and then enter a new array formula. A part of the array cannot be modified or deleted. If you try to edit, move, or delete a single cell within the array, or insert a new cell to the array, you get the following warning: You cannot change part of an array. To delete an array formula, select all the cells which contain the array formula and press Delete. Alternatively, select the array formula in the formula bar, press Delete and then press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Examples of array formula usage This section provides some examples on how to use array formulas to perform certain tasks. Count a number of characters in a range of cells You can use the following array formula, replacing the cell range in the argument with your own one: =SUM(LEN(B2:B11)). The LEN function calculates the length of each text string in the range of cells. The SUM function adds the values together. To get the average number of characters, replace SUM with AVERAGE. Find the longest string in a range of cells You can use the following array formula, replacing cell ranges in arguments with your own ones: =INDEX(B2:B11,MATCH(MAX(LEN(B2:B11)),LEN(B2:B11),0),1). The LEN function calculates the length of each text string in the range of cells. The MAX function calculates the largest value. The MATCH function finds the address of the cell with the longest string. The INDEX function returns the value from the found cell. To find the shortest string, replace MAX with MIN. Sum values based on conditions To sum values greater than a specified number (2 in this example), you can use the following array formula, replacing cell ranges in arguments with your own ones: =SUM(IF(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). The IF function creates an array of positive and false values. The SUM function ignores false values and adds the positive values together." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to use array formulas. Array formulas ensure consistency among formulas in a spreadsheet, as you can enter a single array formula instead of several usual formulas, they simplify working with large amount of data, allow you to quickly fill a sheet with data, and much more. You can enter formulas and built-in functions as array formulas in order to: perform multiple calculations at once and display a single result, or return a range of values displayed in multiple rows or/and columns. There are also specially designated functions which can return multiple values. If you enter them by pressing Enter, they return a single value. If you select an output range of cells to display the results and then enter a function by pressing Ctrl + Shift + Enter, it returns a range of values (the number of returned values depends on the size of the previously selected output range). The list below contains links to detailed descriptions of these functions. Array functions CELL CHOOSEROWS CHOOSECOLS COLUMN DROP EXPAND FILTER FORMULATEXT FREQUENCY GROWTH HSTACK HYPERLINLK INDIRECT INDEX ISFORMULA LINEST LOGEST MINVERSE MMULT MUNIT OFFSET RANDARRAY ROW SEQUENCE SORT TAKE TEXTSPLIT TOCOL TOROW TRANSPOSE TREND WRAPCOLS WRAPROWS UNIQUE VSTACK XMATCH XLOOKUP Insert array formulas To insert an array formula, Select a range of cells where you wish to display results. Enter the formula you want to use in the formula bar, specifying necessary arguments within parentheses (). Press the Ctrl + Shift + Enter key combination. The results will be displayed in the selected range of cells, and the formula in the formula bar will be automatically enclosed in the curly braces { } to indicate that it is an array formula. For example, {=UNIQUE(B2:D6)}. These braces cannot be entered manually. Create a single-cell array formula The following example illustrates the result of the array formula displayed in a single cell. Select a cell, enter =SUM(C2:C11*D2:D11), and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Create a multi-cell array formula The following example illustrates the results of the array formula displayed in a range of cells. Select a range of cells, enter =C2:C11*D2:D11, and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Edit array formulas Every time you edit an entered array formula (e.g., change arguments), you need to press the Ctrl + Shift + Enter key combination to save the changes. The following example explains how to expand a multi-cell array formula when you add new data. Select all the cells which contain an array formula, as well as empty cells next to new data, edit arguments in the formula bar so that they include new data, and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. If you want to apply a multi-cell array formula to a smaller range of cells, you need to delete the current array formula and then enter a new array formula. A part of the array cannot be modified or deleted. If you try to edit, move, or delete a single cell within the array, or insert a new cell to the array, you get the following warning: You cannot change part of an array. To delete an array formula, select all the cells which contain the array formula and press Delete. Alternatively, select the array formula in the formula bar, press Delete and then press Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Examples of array formula usage This section provides some examples on how to use array formulas to perform certain tasks. Count a number of characters in a range of cells You can use the following array formula, replacing the cell range in the argument with your own one: =SUM(LEN(B2:B11)). The LEN function calculates the length of each text string in the range of cells. The SUM function adds the values together. To get the average number of characters, replace SUM with AVERAGE. Find the longest string in a range of cells You can use the following array formula, replacing cell ranges in arguments with your own ones: =INDEX(B2:B11,MATCH(MAX(LEN(B2:B11)),LEN(B2:B11),0),1). The LEN function calculates the length of each text string in the range of cells. The MAX function calculates the largest value. The MATCH function finds the address of the cell with the longest string. The INDEX function returns the value from the found cell. To find the shortest string, replace MAX with MIN. Sum values based on conditions To sum values greater than a specified number (2 in this example), you can use the following array formula, replacing cell ranges in arguments with your own ones: =SUM(IF(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). The IF function creates an array of positive and false values. The SUM function ignores false values and adds the positive values together." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert and format autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Spreadsheet Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape sholud be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. Adjust the autoshape settings Some of the autoshape settings can be changed using the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar that will open if you select the inserted autoshape with the mouse and click the Shape settings icon. The following settings can be changed: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button. The custom color will be applied to your autoshape and added to the Custom color palette. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow. Adjust shape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains. Insert and format text within the autoshape To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it). All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points. Assign a Macro to a Shape You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the shape to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Spreadsheet Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape sholud be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust the autoshape settings Some of the autoshape settings can be changed using the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar that will open if you select the inserted autoshape with the mouse and click the Shape settings icon. The following settings can be changed: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow. Adjust shape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains. Insert and format text within the autoshape To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it). All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points. Assign a Macro to a Shape You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the shape to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm", "title": "Insert charts", - "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Spreadsheet Editor, Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination After that the chart will be added to the worksheet. Note: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. Adjust the chart settings Now you can change the settings of the inserted chart. To change the chart type, Select the chart with the mouse. Click the Chart settings icon on the right sidebar. Open the Style drop-down list below and select the style which suits you best. Open the Change type drop-down list and select the type you need. Click the Switch row/column option to change the positioning of chart rows and columns. The selected chart type and style will be changed. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To edit chart data: Click the Select Data button on the right-side panel. Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column. Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button. In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click Show Advanced Settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical Axis, Secondary Vertical Axis, Horizontal Axis, Secondary Horizontal Axis, Cell Snapping and Alternative Text. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display the legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape Settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Stroke. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. If necessary, you can change the chart size and position. To delete the inserted chart, click it and press the Delete key. Assign a Macro to a Chart You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any chart. Once you assign a macro, the chart appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the chart to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. Once a macro is assigned, you can still select the chart to perform other operations by left-clicking on chart surface. Using sparklines ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports Sparklines. Sparklines are small charts that fit into a cell, and are an efficient data visualization tool. For more information about how to create, edit and format sparklines, please see our Insert Sparklines guidelines." + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Spreadsheet Editor, Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination After that the chart will be added to the worksheet. Note: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. Adjust the chart settings Now you can change the settings of the inserted chart. To change the chart type, Select the chart with the mouse. Click the Chart settings icon on the right sidebar. Open the Style drop-down list below and select the style which suits you best. Open the Change type drop-down list and select the type you need. Click the Switch row/column option to change the positioning of chart rows and columns. The selected chart type and style will be changed. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To edit chart data: Click the Select Data button on the right-side panel. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Series name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click Show advanced settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical axis, Secondary vertical axis, Horizontal axis, Secondary horizontal axis, Cell snapping and Alternative text. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e., text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Radar, and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. If necessary, you can change the chart size and position. To delete the inserted chart, click it and press the Delete key. Assign a Macro to a Chart You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any chart. Once you assign a macro, the chart appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the chart to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. Once a macro is assigned, you can still select the chart to perform other operations by left-clicking on chart surface. Using sparklines ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports Sparklines. Sparklines are small charts that fit into a cell, and are an efficient data visualization tool. For more information about how to create, edit and format sparklines, please see our Insert Sparklines guidelines." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm", @@ -2588,7 +2633,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm", "title": "Insert functions", - "body": "The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using the Spreadsheet Editor. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a cell range in your spreadsheet: Average is used to analyze the selected cell range and find the average value. Count is used to count the number of the selected cells with values ignoring the empty cells. Min is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. Max is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. Sum is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring the empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner on the status bar. You can manage the status bar by right-clicking on it and choosing only those functions to display that you need. To perform any other calculations, you can insert the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. The abilities to work with Functions are accessible from both the Home and Formula tab or by pressing Shift+F3 key combination. On the Home tab, you can use the Insert function button to add one of the most commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Use the search box to find the exact function by its name. On the Formula tab you can use the following buttons: Function - to open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Autosum - to quickly access the SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT functions. When you select a functions from this group, it automatically performs calculations for all cells in the column above the selected cell so that you don't need to enter arguments. Recently used - to quickly access 10 recently used functions. Financial, Logical, Text and data, Date and time, Lookup and references, Math and trigonometry - to quickly access functions that belongs to the corresponding categories. More functions - to access the functions from the following groups: Database, Engineering, Information and Statistical. Named ranges - to open the Name Manager, or define a new name, or paste a name as a function argument. For more details, you can refer to this page. Calculation - to force the program to recalculate functions. To insert a function, Select a cell where you wish to insert a function. Proceed in one of the following ways: switch to the Formula tab and use the buttons available on the top toolbar to access a function from a specific group, then click the necessary function to open the Function Arguments wizard. You can also use the Additional option from the menu or click the Function button on the top toolbar to open the Insert Function window. switch to the Home tab, click the Insert function icon, select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option to open the Insert Function window. right-click within the selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the contextual menu. click the icon before the formula bar. In the opened Insert Function window, enter its name in the search box or select the necessary function group, then choose the required function from the list and click OK. Once you click the necessary function, the Function Arguments window will open: In the opened Function Arguments window, enter the necessary values of each argument. You can enter the function arguments either manually or by clicking the icon and selecting a cell or cell range to be included as an argument. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. The function result will be displayed below. When all the agruments are specified, click the OK button in the Function Arguments window. To enter a function manually using the keyboard, Select a cell. Enter the equal sign (=). Each formula must begin with the equal sign (=). Enter the function name. Once you type the initial letters, the Formula Autocomplete list will be displayed. As you type, the items (formulas and names) that match the entered characters are displayed in it. If you hover the mouse pointer over a formula, a tooltip with the formula description will be displayed. You can select the necessary formula from the list and insert it by clicking it or pressing the Tab key. Enter the function arguments either manually or by dragging to select a cell range to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Arguments must be enclosed into parentheses. The opening parenthesis '(' is added automatically if you select a function from the list. When you enter arguments, a tooltip that contains the formula syntax is also displayed. When all the agruments are specified, enter the closing parenthesis ')' and press Enter. If you enter new data or change the values used as arguments, recalculation of functions is performed automatically by default. You can force the program to recalculate functions by using the Calculation button on the Formula tab. Click the Calculation button to recalculate the entire workbook, or click the arrow below the button and choose the necessary option from the menu: Calculate workbook or Calculate current sheet. You can also use the following key combinations: F9 to recalculate the workbook, Shift +F9 to recalculate the current worksheet. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: Function Category Description Functions Text and Data Functions Used to correctly display the text data in the spreadsheet. ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT Statistical Functions Used to analyze data: finding the average value, the largest or smallest values in a cell range. AVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; AVERAGEIFS; BETADIST; BETA.DIST; BETA.INV; BETAINV; BINOMDIST; BINOM.DIST; BINOM.DIST.RANGE; BINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIINV; CHISQ.DIST; CHISQ.DIST.RT; CHISQ.INV; CHISQ.INV.RT; CHITEST; CHISQ.TEST; CONFIDENCE; CONFIDENCE.NORM; CONFIDENCE.T; CORREL; COUNT; COUNTA; COUNBLANK; COUNTIF; COUNTIFS; COVAR; COVARIANCE.P; COVARIANCE.S; CRITBINOM; DEVSQ; EXPON.DIST; EXPONDIST; F.DIST; FDIST; F.DIST.RT; F.INV; FINV; F.INV.RT; FISHER; FISHERINV; FORECAST; FORECAST.ETS; FORECAST.ETS.CONFINT; FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY; FORECAST.ETS.STAT; FORECAST.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TEST; GAMMA; GAMMA.DIST; GAMMADIST; GAMMA.INV; GAMMAINV; GAMMALN; GAMMALN.PRECISE; GAUSS; GEOMEAN; GROWTH; HARMEAN; HYPGEOMDIST; HYPGEOM.DIST; INTERCEPT; KURT; LARGE; LINEST; LOGEST, LOGINV; LOGNORM.DIST; LOGNORM.INV; LOGNORMDIST; MAX; MAXA; MAXIFS; MEDIAN; MIN; MINA; MINIFS; MODE; MODE.MULT; MODE.SNGL; NEGBINOMDIST; NEGBINOM.DIST; NORMDIST; NORM.DIST; NORMINV; NORM.INV; NORMSDIST; NORM.S.DIST; NORMSINV; NORM.S.INV; PEARSON; PERCENTILE; PERCENTILE.EXC; PERCENTILE.INC; PERCENTRANK; PERCENTRANK.EXC; PERCENTRANK.INC; PERMUT; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; POISSON; POISSON.DIST; PROB; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXC; QUARTILE.INC; RANK; RANK.AVG; RANK.EQ; RSQ; SKEW; SKEW.P; SLOPE; SMALL; STANDARDIZE; STDEV; STDEV.S; STDEVA; STDEVP; STDEV.P; STDEVPA; STEYX; TDIST; T.DIST; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T.INV; T.INV.2T; TINV; TREND, TRIMMEAN; TTEST; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; WEIBULL; WEIBULL.DIST; ZTEST; Z.TEST Math and Trigonometry Functions Used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; MUNIT; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDARRAY; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Date and Time Functions Used to correctly display the date and time in the spreadsheet. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVALUE; DAY; DAYS; DAYS360; EDATE; EOMONTH; HOUR; ISOWEEKNUM; MINUTE; MONTH; NETWORKDAYS; NETWORKDAYS.INTL; NOW; SECOND; TIME; TIMEVALUE; TODAY; WEEKDAY; WEEKNUM; WORKDAY; WORKDAY.INTL; YEAR; YEARFRAC Engineering Functions Used to perform some engineering calculations: converting between different bases number systems, finding complex numbers etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BIN2DEC; BIN2HEX; BIN2OCT; BITAND; BITLSHIFT; BITOR; BITRSHIFT; BITXOR; COMPLEX; CONVERT; DEC2BIN; DEC2HEX; DEC2OCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECISE; ERFC; ERFC.PRECISE; GESTEP; HEX2BIN; HEX2DEC; HEX2OCT; IMABS; IMAGINARY; IMARGUMENT; IMCONJUGATE; IMCOS; IMCOSH; IMCOT; IMCSC; IMCSCH; IMDIV; IMEXP; IMLN; IMLOG10; IMLOG2; IMPOWER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMSIN; IMSINH; IMSQRT; IMSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2BIN; OCT2DEC; OCT2HEX Database Functions Used to perform calculations for the values in a certain field of the database that meet the specified criteria. DAVERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; DMIN; DPRODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVAR; DVARP Financial Functions Used to perform some financial calculations: calculating the net present value, payments etc. ACCRINT; ACCRINTM; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; COUPDAYBS; COUPDAYS; COUPDAYSNC; COUPNCD; COUPNUM; COUPPCD; CUMIPMT; CUMPRINC; DB; DDB; DISC; DOLLARDE; DOLLARFR; DURATION; EFFECT; FV; FVSCHEDULE; INTRATE; IPMT; IRR; ISPMT; MDURATION; MIRR; NOMINAL; NPER; NPV; ODDFPRICE; ODDFYIELD; ODDLPRICE; ODDLYIELD; PDURATION; PMT; PPMT; PRICE; PRICEDISC; PRICEMAT; PV; RATE; RECEIVED; RRI; SLN; SYD; TBILLEQ; TBILLPRICE; TBILLYIELD; VDB; XIRR; XNPV; YIELD; YIELDDISC; YIELDMAT Lookup and Reference Functions Used to easily find information from the data list. ADDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNS; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; HYPERLINLK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; XLOOKUP; HSTACK; VSTACK; TOROW; TOCOL; WRAPROWS; WRAPCOLS; DROP; TAKE; CHOOSEROWS; CHOOSECOLS Information Functions Used to provide information about the data in the selected cell or cell range. CELL; ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE Logical Functions Used to check if a condition is true or false. AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR" + "body": "The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using the Spreadsheet Editor. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a cell range in your spreadsheet: Average is used to analyze the selected cell range and find the average value. Count is used to count the number of the selected cells with values ignoring the empty cells. Min is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. Max is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. Sum is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring the empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner on the status bar. You can manage the status bar by right-clicking on it and choosing only those functions to display that you need. To perform any other calculations, you can insert the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. The abilities to work with Functions are accessible from both the Home and Formula tab or by pressing Shift+F3 key combination. On the Home tab, you can use the Insert function button to add one of the most commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Use the search box to find the exact function by its name. On the Formula tab you can use the following buttons: Function - to open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Autosum - to quickly access the SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT functions. When you select a functions from this group, it automatically performs calculations for all cells in the column above the selected cell so that you don't need to enter arguments. Recently used - to quickly access 10 recently used functions. Financial, Logical, Text and data, Date and time, Lookup and references, Math and trigonometry - to quickly access functions that belongs to the corresponding categories. More functions - to access the functions from the following groups: Database, Engineering, Information and Statistical. Named ranges - to open the Name Manager, or define a new name, or paste a name as a function argument. For more details, you can refer to this page. Calculation - to force the program to recalculate functions. To insert a function, Select a cell where you wish to insert a function. Proceed in one of the following ways: switch to the Formula tab and use the buttons available on the top toolbar to access a function from a specific group, then click the necessary function to open the Function Arguments wizard. You can also use the Additional option from the menu or click the Function button on the top toolbar to open the Insert Function window. switch to the Home tab, click the Insert function icon, select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option to open the Insert Function window. right-click within the selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the contextual menu. click the icon before the formula bar. In the opened Insert Function window, enter its name in the search box or select the necessary function group, then choose the required function from the list and click OK. Once you click the necessary function, the Function Arguments window will open: In the opened Function Arguments window, enter the necessary values of each argument. You can enter the function arguments either manually or by clicking the icon and selecting a cell or cell range to be included as an argument. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. The function result will be displayed below. When all the agruments are specified, click the OK button in the Function Arguments window. To enter a function manually using the keyboard, Select a cell. Enter the equal sign (=). Each formula must begin with the equal sign (=). Enter the function name. Once you type the initial letters, the Formula Autocomplete list will be displayed. As you type, the items (formulas and names) that match the entered characters are displayed in it. If you hover the mouse pointer over a formula, a tooltip with the formula description will be displayed. You can select the necessary formula from the list and insert it by clicking it or pressing the Tab key. Enter the function arguments either manually or by dragging to select a cell range to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Arguments must be enclosed into parentheses. The opening parenthesis '(' is added automatically if you select a function from the list. When you enter arguments, a tooltip that contains the formula syntax is also displayed. When all the agruments are specified, enter the closing parenthesis ')' and press Enter. If you enter new data or change the values used as arguments, recalculation of functions is performed automatically by default. You can force the program to recalculate functions by using the Calculation button on the Formula tab. Click the Calculation button to recalculate the entire workbook, or click the arrow below the button and choose the necessary option from the menu: Calculate workbook or Calculate current sheet. You can also use the following key combinations: F9 to recalculate the workbook, Shift +F9 to recalculate the current worksheet. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: Function Category Description Functions Text and Data Functions Used to correctly display the text data in the spreadsheet. ARRAYTOTEXT; ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT Statistical Functions Used to analyze data: finding the average value, the largest or smallest values in a cell range. AVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; AVERAGEIFS; BETADIST; BETA.DIST; BETA.INV; BETAINV; BINOMDIST; BINOM.DIST; BINOM.DIST.RANGE; BINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIINV; CHISQ.DIST; CHISQ.DIST.RT; CHISQ.INV; CHISQ.INV.RT; CHITEST; CHISQ.TEST; CONFIDENCE; CONFIDENCE.NORM; CONFIDENCE.T; CORREL; COUNT; COUNTA; COUNBLANK; COUNTIF; COUNTIFS; COVAR; COVARIANCE.P; COVARIANCE.S; CRITBINOM; DEVSQ; EXPON.DIST; EXPONDIST; F.DIST; FDIST; F.DIST.RT; F.INV; FINV; F.INV.RT; FISHER; FISHERINV; FORECAST; FORECAST.ETS; FORECAST.ETS.CONFINT; FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY; FORECAST.ETS.STAT; FORECAST.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TEST; GAMMA; GAMMA.DIST; GAMMADIST; GAMMA.INV; GAMMAINV; GAMMALN; GAMMALN.PRECISE; GAUSS; GEOMEAN; GROWTH; HARMEAN; HYPGEOMDIST; HYPGEOM.DIST; INTERCEPT; KURT; LARGE; LINEST; LOGEST, LOGINV; LOGNORM.DIST; LOGNORM.INV; LOGNORMDIST; MAX; MAXA; MAXIFS; MEDIAN; MIN; MINA; MINIFS; MODE; MODE.MULT; MODE.SNGL; NEGBINOMDIST; NEGBINOM.DIST; NORMDIST; NORM.DIST; NORMINV; NORM.INV; NORMSDIST; NORM.S.DIST; NORMSINV; NORM.S.INV; PEARSON; PERCENTILE; PERCENTILE.EXC; PERCENTILE.INC; PERCENTRANK; PERCENTRANK.EXC; PERCENTRANK.INC; PERMUT; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; POISSON; POISSON.DIST; PROB; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXC; QUARTILE.INC; RANK; RANK.AVG; RANK.EQ; RSQ; SKEW; SKEW.P; SLOPE; SMALL; STANDARDIZE; STDEV; STDEV.S; STDEVA; STDEVP; STDEV.P; STDEVPA; STEYX; TDIST; T.DIST; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T.INV; T.INV.2T; TINV; TREND, TRIMMEAN; TTEST; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; WEIBULL; WEIBULL.DIST; ZTEST; Z.TEST Math and Trigonometry Functions Used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; MUNIT; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDARRAY; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SEQUENCE; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Date and Time Functions Used to correctly display the date and time in the spreadsheet. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVALUE; DAY; DAYS; DAYS360; EDATE; EOMONTH; HOUR; ISOWEEKNUM; MINUTE; MONTH; NETWORKDAYS; NETWORKDAYS.INTL; NOW; SECOND; TIME; TIMEVALUE; TODAY; WEEKDAY; WEEKNUM; WORKDAY; WORKDAY.INTL; YEAR; YEARFRAC Engineering Functions Used to perform some engineering calculations: converting between different bases number systems, finding complex numbers etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BIN2DEC; BIN2HEX; BIN2OCT; BITAND; BITLSHIFT; BITOR; BITRSHIFT; BITXOR; COMPLEX; CONVERT; DEC2BIN; DEC2HEX; DEC2OCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECISE; ERFC; ERFC.PRECISE; GESTEP; HEX2BIN; HEX2DEC; HEX2OCT; IMABS; IMAGINARY; IMARGUMENT; IMCONJUGATE; IMCOS; IMCOSH; IMCOT; IMCSC; IMCSCH; IMDIV; IMEXP; IMLN; IMLOG10; IMLOG2; IMPOWER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMSIN; IMSINH; IMSQRT; IMSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2BIN; OCT2DEC; OCT2HEX Database Functions Used to perform calculations for the values in a certain field of the database that meet the specified criteria. DAVERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; DMIN; DPRODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVAR; DVARP Financial Functions Used to perform some financial calculations: calculating the net present value, payments etc. ACCRINT; ACCRINTM; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; COUPDAYBS; COUPDAYS; COUPDAYSNC; COUPNCD; COUPNUM; COUPPCD; CUMIPMT; CUMPRINC; DB; DDB; DISC; DOLLARDE; DOLLARFR; DURATION; EFFECT; FV; FVSCHEDULE; INTRATE; IPMT; IRR; ISPMT; MDURATION; MIRR; NOMINAL; NPER; NPV; ODDFPRICE; ODDFYIELD; ODDLPRICE; ODDLYIELD; PDURATION; PMT; PPMT; PRICE; PRICEDISC; PRICEMAT; PV; RATE; RECEIVED; RRI; SLN; SYD; TBILLEQ; TBILLPRICE; TBILLYIELD; VDB; XIRR; XNPV; YIELD; YIELDDISC; YIELDMAT Lookup and Reference Functions Used to easily find information from the data list. ADDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNS; EXPAND; FILTER; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; HYPERLINLK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; SORT; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; XLOOKUP; HSTACK; VSTACK; TOROW; TOCOL; WRAPROWS; WRAPCOLS; DROP; TAKE; CHOOSEROWS; CHOOSECOLS; XMATCH Information Functions Used to provide information about the data in the selected cell or cell range. CELL; ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE Logical Functions Used to check if a condition is true or false. AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", @@ -2598,12 +2643,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insert images", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to insert images in the most popular formats into your worksheet. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the spreadsheet, place the cursor where the image should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon on the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window to select a file. Browse the hard disk drive of your computer to find the required file and click the Open button In the online editor, you can select several images at once. the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the required image and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button After that the image will be added to the worksheet. Adjust the image settings Once the image is added, you can change its size and position. To specify the exact dimensions of the image: select the required image with the mouse, click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, in the Size section, set the necessary Width and Height values. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. To crop the image: Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape. If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height or width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. To rotate the image: select the required image with the mouse, click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, in the Rotation section, click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Rotate option from the contextual menu. To replace the inserted image, select the required image with the mouse, click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, click the Replace Image button, choose the necessary option: From File, From Storage, or From URL and select the desired image. Alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Replace image option from the contextual menu. The selected image will be replaced. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, its size and color as well as change the shape type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust the image advanced settings To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the image to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the image will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the image will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the image to the cell behind it preventing the image from being resized. If the cell moves, the image will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the image dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the image from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains. To delete the inserted image, click it and press the Delete key. Assign a Macro to an Image You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any image. Once you assign a macro, the image appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the image to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to insert images in the most popular formats into your worksheet. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the spreadsheet, place the cursor where the image should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon on the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window to select a file. Browse the hard disk drive of your computer to find the required file and click the Open button In the online editor, you can select several images at once. the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the required image and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button After that, the image will be added to the worksheet. You can save the image as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Adjust the image settings Once the image is added, you can change its size and position. To specify the exact dimensions of the image: select the required image with the mouse, click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, in the Size section, set the necessary Width and Height values. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. To crop the image: Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles that appear on the image corners and in the center of each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Crop to shape, Fill, and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Crop to shape option, the picture will fill a certain shape. You can select a shape from the gallery, which opens when you hover your mouse pointer over the Crop to Shape option. You can still use the Fill and Fit options to choose the way your picture matches the shape. If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height or width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. To rotate the image: select the required image with the mouse, click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, in the Rotation section, click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Rotate option from the contextual menu. To replace the inserted image, select the required image with the mouse, click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, click the Replace Image button, choose the necessary option: From File, From Storage, or From URL and select the desired image. Alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Replace image option from the contextual menu. The selected image will be replaced. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Line type, size, color, and opacity, as well as change the shape type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust the image advanced settings To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the image to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the image will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the image will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the image to the cell behind it preventing the image from being resized. If the cell moves, the image will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the image dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the image from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains. To delete the inserted image, click it and press the Delete key. Assign a Macro to an Image You can provide quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any image. Once you assign a macro, the image appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the image to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Insert SmartArt objects", - "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. Insert SmartArt objects or edit the ones added in third-party editors. To insert a SmartArt object, go to the Insert tab, click the SmartArt button, hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process, choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item. You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel: Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually. Fill - use this section to select the SmartArt object fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected SmartArt object. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the SmartArt object background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the SmartArt object, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the SmartArt object, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the SmartArt object has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the SmartArt object size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the SmartArt object surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the SmartArt object with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow. Click the Show advanced settings link to open the advanced settings." + "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. Insert SmartArt objects or edit the ones added in third-party editors. To insert a SmartArt object, go to the Insert tab, click the SmartArt button, hover over one of the available layout styles, e.g., List or Process, choose one of the available layout types from the list appeared to the right of the highlighted menu item, you can save the SmartArt object as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. You can customize the SmartArt settings in the right panel: Please note that color, style and form type settings can be customized individually. Fill - use this section to select the SmartArt object fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected SmartArt object. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the SmartArt object background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the SmartArt object, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the SmartArt object, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the SmartArt object has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the SmartArt object size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the SmartArt object surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the SmartArt object with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the SmartArt object line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Show shadow - check this box to make the SmartArt object cast a shadow. Click the Show advanced settings link to open the advanced settings." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm", @@ -2618,7 +2663,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Insert text objects", - "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor you can draw attention to a specific part of the spreadsheet, for this, insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere in the worksheet. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be inserted, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, and you will bу able to enter your text. It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the worksheet. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the worksheet. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to manually resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to arrange text boxes as related to other objects, align several text boxes as related to each other, rotate or flip a text box, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page. to create columns of text within the text box, right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. It's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately. Adjust the font formatting settings (change the font type, its size, color and apply decoration styles) using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Some additional font settings can be also changed on the Font tab of the paragraph properties window. To access it, right-click the text in the text box and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option. Align the text horizontally within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. Align the text vertically within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. You can also right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. Rotate the text within the text box. To do that, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Create a bulleted or numbered list. To do that, right-click the text, select the Bullets and Numbering option from the contextual menu and then choose one of the available bullet characters or numbering styles. The List Settings option allows you to open the List Settings window where you can adjust the settings for a corresponding list type: Type (bulleted) - allows you to select the necessary character for the bulleted list. When you click the New bullet option, the Symbol window will open, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. When you click the New image option, a new Import field appears where you can choose new images for bullets From File, From URL, or From Storage. Type (numbered) - allows you to select the necessary format for the numbered list. Size - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number size depending on the current size of the text. The value can vary from 25% up to 400%. Color - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number color. You can select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. Start at - allows you to set the necessary numeric value you want to start numbering with. Insert a hyperlink. Set line and paragraph spacing for the multi-line text within the text box by using the Paragraph settings tab of the right sidebar that will open if you click the Paragraph settings icon. Set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. Adjust paragraph advanced settings Change the advanced settings of the paragraph (you can adjust paragraph indents and tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box and apply some font formatting settings). Put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Click the Show advanced settings link. It's also possible to right-click the text in a text box and use the Paragraph Advanced Settings item from the contextual menu. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: change the alignment type for the paragraph text, change the paragraph indents as related to internal margins of the text box, Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, change the paragraph line spacing. The Font tab contains the following parameters: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard. Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and click the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option in the Alignment drop-down list and click the Specify button. Left - lines up your text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. Center - centres the text at the tab stop position. Right - lines up your text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and click the Remove or Remove All button. Assign a Macro to a Text Box You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any text box. Once you assign a macro, the text box appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the text box to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can draw attention to a specific part of the spreadsheet, for this, insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter the text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere in the worksheet. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be inserted, hold the mouse button, and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, and you will be able to enter your text. It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the worksheet. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the worksheet. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. You can save the text object as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to manually resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to arrange text boxes as related to other objects, align several text boxes as related to each other, rotate or flip a text box, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page. to create columns of text within the text box, right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. It's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately. Adjust the font formatting settings (change the font type, size, color and apply decoration styles) using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Some additional font settings can be also changed on the Font tab of the paragraph properties window. To access it, right-click the text in the text box and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option. Align the text horizontally within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. Align the text vertically within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. You can also right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom. Rotate the text within the text box. To do that, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom), or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Create a bulleted or numbered list. To do that, right-click the text, select the Bullets and Numbering option from the contextual menu, and then choose one of the available bullet characters or numbering styles. The List Settings option allows you to open the List Settings window where you can adjust the settings for a corresponding list type: Type (bulleted) - allows you to select the necessary character for the bulleted list. When you click the New bullet option, the Symbol window will open, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more about how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. When you click the New image option, a new Import field appears where you can choose new images for bullets From File, From URL, or From Storage. Type (numbered) - allows you to select the necessary format for the numbered list. Size - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number size depending on the current size of the text. The value can vary from 25% up to 400%. Color - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number color. You can select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. Start at - allows you to set the necessary numeric value you want to start numbering with. Insert a hyperlink. Set line and paragraph spacing for the multi-line text within the text box by using the Paragraph settings tab of the right sidebar that will open if you click the Paragraph settings icon. Set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. Adjust paragraph advanced settings Change the advanced settings of the paragraph (you can adjust paragraph indents and tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box and apply some font formatting settings). Put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Click the Show advanced settings link. It's also possible to right-click the text in a text box and use the Paragraph Advanced Settings item from the contextual menu. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: change the alignment type for the paragraph text, change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box, Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, change the paragraph line spacing. The Font tab contains the following parameters: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard. Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and click the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option in the Alignment drop-down list and click the Specify button. Left - lines up your text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Right - lines up your text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and click the Remove or Remove All button. Assign a Macro to a Text Box You can provide quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any text box. Once you assign a macro, the text box appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the text box to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc. Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm", @@ -2658,17 +2703,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm", "title": "Create and edit pivot tables", - "body": "Pivot tables allow you to group and arrange data of large data sets to get summarized information. In the Spreadsheet Editor you can reorganize data in many different ways to display only the necessary information and focus on important aspects. Create a new pivot table To create a pivot table, Prepare the source data set you want to use for creating a pivot table. It should include column headers. The data set should not contain empty rows or columns. Select any cell within the source data range. Switch to the Pivot Table tab of the top toolbar and click the Insert Table icon. If you want to create a pivot table on the base of a formatted table, you can also use the Insert pivot table option on the Table settings tab of the right sidebar. The Create Pivot Table window will appear. The Source data range is already specified. In this case, all data from the source data range will be used. If you want to change the data range (e.g. to include only a part of source data), click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range on the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. Specify where you want to place the pivot table. The New worksheet option is selected by default. It allows you to place the pivot table in a new worksheet. You can also select the Existing worksheet option and choose a certain cell. In this case, the selected cell will be the upper right cell of the created pivot table. To select a cell, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the cell address in the following format: Sheet1!$G$2. You can also click the necessary cell in the sheet. When ready, click OK. When you select the pivot table location, click OK in the Create Table window. An empty pivot table will be inserted in the selected location. The Pivot table settings tab on the right sidebar will be opened. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon. Select fields to display The Select Fields section contains the fields named according to the column headers in your source data set. Each field contains values from the corresponding column of the source table. The following four sections are available below: Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values. Check the fields you want to display in the pivot table. When you check a field, it will be added to one of the available sections on the right sidebar depending on the data type and will be displayed in the pivot table. Fields containing text values will be added to the Rows section; fields containing numeric values will be added to the Values section. You can simply drag fields to the necessary section as well as drag the fields between sections to quickly reorganize your pivot table. To remove a field from the current section, drag it out of this section. In order to add a field to the necessary section, it's also possible to click the black arrow to the right of a field in the Select Fields section and choose the necessary option from the menu: Add to Filters, Add to Rows, Add to Columns, Add to Values. Below you can see some examples of using the Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values sections. If you add a field to the Filters section, a separate filter will be added above the pivot table. It will be applied to the entire pivot table. If you click the drop-down arrow in the added filter, you'll see the values from the selected field. When you uncheck some values in the filter option window and click OK, the unchecked values will not be displayed in the pivot table. If you add a field to the Columns section, the pivot table will contain a number of columns equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total column will also be added. If you add a field to the Rows section, the pivot table will contain a number of rows equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total row will also be added. If you add a field to the Values section, the pivot table will display the summation value for all numeric values from the selected field. If the field contains text values, the count of values will be displayed. The function used to calculate the summation value can be changed in the field settings. Rearrange fields and adjust their properties Once the fields are added to the necessary sections, you can manage them to change the layout and format of the pivot table. Click the black arrow to the right of a field within the Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values sections to access the field context menu. It allows you to: Move the selected field Up, Down, to the Beginning, or to the End of the current section if you have added more than one field to the current section. Move the selected field to a different section - to Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values. The option that corresponds to the current section will be disabled. Remove the selected field from the current section. Adjust the selected field settings. The Filters, Columns, and Rows field settings look similarly: The Layout tab contains the following options: The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. The Report Form section allows you to change the way the selected field is displayed in the pivot table: Choose the necessary layout for the selected field in the pivot table: The Tabular form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. The Outline form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. The Compact form displays items from different row section fields in a single column. The Repeat items labels at each row option allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. The Insert blank rows after each item option allows you to add blank lines after items of the selected field. The Show subtotals option allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals for the selected field. You can select one of the options: Show at top of group or Show at bottom of group. The Show items with no data option allows you to show or hide blank items in the selected field. The Subtotals tab allows you to choose Functions for Subtotals. Check the necessary functions in the list: Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. Values field settings The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. The Summarize value field by list allows you to choose the function used to calculate the summation value for all values from this field. By default, Sum is used for numeric values, Count is used for text values. The available functions are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. Group and ungroup data Data in pivot tables can be grouped according to custom requirements. Grouping is available for dates and basic numbers. Grouping dates To group dates, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed dates. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a date, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. Starting at - the first date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the starting point. Ending at - the last date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the ending point. By - the Seconds, Minutes, and Hours options group the data according to the time given in the source data. The Months option eliminates days and leaves months only. The Quarters option operates at a condition: four months constitute a quarter, thus providing Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. The Years option groups dates as per years given in the source data. Combine the options to achieve the needed result. Number of days - set the required value to determine a date range. Click OK when finished. Grouping numbers To group numbers, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed numbers. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a number, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. Starting at - the smallest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the smallest number. Ending at - the largest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the largest number. By - set the required interval for grouping numbers. E.g., “2” will group the set of numbers from 1 through 10 as “1-2”, “3-4”, etc. Click OK when finished. Ungrouping data To ungroup previously grouped data, right-click any cell that is in the group, select the Ungroup option in the context menu. Change the appearance of pivot tables You can use options available on the top toolbar to adjust the way your pivot table is displayed. These options are applied to the entire pivot table. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The Report Layout drop-down list allows you to choose the necessary layout for your pivot table: Show in Compact Form - allows you to display items from different row section fields in a single column. Show in Outline Form - allows you to display the pivot table in the classic pivot table style. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. Show in Tabular Form - allows you to display the pivot table in a traditional table format. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. Don't Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to hide item labels if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. The Blank Rows drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display blank lines after items: Insert Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to add blank lines after items. Remove Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to remove the added blank lines. The Subtotals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals in the pivot table: Don't Show Subtotals - allows you to hide subtotals for all items. Show all Subtotals at Bottom of Group - allows you to display subtotals below the subtotaled rows. Show all Subtotals at Top of Group - allows you to display subtotals above the subtotaled rows. The Grand Totals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table: Off for Rows and Columns - allows you to hide grand totals for both rows and columns. On for Rows and Columns - allows you to display grand totals for both rows and columns. On for Rows Only - allows you to display grand totals for rows only. On for Columns Only - allows you to display grand totals for columns only. Note: the similar settings are also available in the pivot table advanced settings window in the Grand Totals section of the Name and Layout tab. The Select button allows you to select the entire pivot table. If you change the data in your source data set, select the pivot table and click the Refresh button to update the pivot table. Change the style of pivot tables You can change the appearance of pivot tables in a spreadsheet using the style editing tools available on the top toolbar. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The rows and columns options allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: Row Headers - allows you to highlight the row headers with special formatting. Column Headers - allows you to highlight the column headers with special formatting. Banded Rows - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. Banded Columns - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The template list allows you to choose one of the predefined pivot table styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding, etc. Depending on the options checked for rows and columns, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Row Headers and Banded Columns options, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the row headers highlighted and banded columns enabled. Filter, sort and add slicers in pivot tables You can filter pivot tables by labels or values and use the additional sort parameters. Filtering Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. The Filter option list will open: Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display or filter the data by certain criteria. Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. Note: the (blank) checkbox corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. Filter data by certain criteria You can choose either the Label filter or the Value filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: For the Label filter the following options are available: For texts: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain... For numbers: Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between. For the Value filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between, Top 10. After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10), the Label/Value Filter window will open. The corresponding field and criterion will be selected in the first and second drop-down lists. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Value filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item, Percent, or Sum. The fourth drop-down list displays the selected field name. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. It means that the filter is applied. Sorting You can sort your pivot table data using the sort options. Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table and then select Sort Lowest to Highest or Sort Highest to Lowest option from the submenu. The More Sort Options option allows you to open the Sort window where you can select the necessary sorting order - Ascending or Descending - and then select a certain field you want to sort. Adding slicers You can add slicers to filter data easier by displaying only what is needed. To learn more about slicers, please read the guide on creating slicers. Adjust pivot table advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the pivot table, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Pivot Table - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Name and Layout tab allows you to change the pivot table common properties. The Name option allows you to change the pivot table name. The Grand Totals section allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table. The Show for rows and Show for columns options are checked by default. You can uncheck either one of them or both these options to hide the corresponding grand totals from your pivot table. Note: the similar settings are available on the top toolbar in the Grand Totals menu. The Display fields in report filter area section allows you to adjust the report filters which appear when you add fields to the Filters section: The Down, then over option is used for column arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the column. The Over, then down option is used for row arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the row. The Report filter fields per column option allows you to select the number of filters to go in each column. The default value is set to 0. You can set the necessary numeric value. The Show field headers for rows and columns option allows you to choose if you want to display field headers in your pivot table. The option is enabled by default. Uncheck it to hide field headers from your pivot table. The Autofit column widths on update option allows you to enable/disable automatic adjusting of the column widths. The option is enabled by default. The Data Source tab allows you to change the data you wish to use to create the pivot table. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the pivot table contains. Delete a pivot table To delete a pivot table, Select the entire pivot table using the Select button on the top toolbar. Press the Delete key." + "body": "Pivot tables allow you to group and arrange data of large data sets to get summarized information. In the Spreadsheet Editor you can reorganize data in many different ways to display only the necessary information and focus on important aspects. Create a new pivot table To create a pivot table, Prepare the source data set you want to use for creating a pivot table. It should include column headers. The data set should not contain empty rows or columns. Select any cell within the source data range. Switch to the Pivot Table tab of the top toolbar and click the Insert Table icon. If you want to create a pivot table on the base of a formatted table, you can also use the Insert pivot table option on the Table settings tab of the right sidebar. The Create Pivot Table window will appear. The Source data range is already specified. In this case, all data from the source data range will be used. If you want to change the data range (e.g. to include only a part of source data), click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range on the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. Specify where you want to place the pivot table. The New worksheet option is selected by default. It allows you to place the pivot table in a new worksheet. You can also select the Existing worksheet option and choose a certain cell. In this case, the selected cell will be the upper right cell of the created pivot table. To select a cell, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the cell address in the following format: Sheet1!$G$2. You can also click the necessary cell in the sheet. When ready, click OK. When you select the pivot table location, click OK in the Create Table window. An empty pivot table will be inserted in the selected location. The Pivot table settings tab on the right sidebar will be opened. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon. Pivot table settings are also available in the context menu that appears when you right click the table. The context menu options depend on the field you click. Select fields to display The Select Fields section contains the fields named according to the column headers in your source data set. Each field contains values from the corresponding column of the source table. The following four sections are available below: Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values. Check the fields you want to display in the pivot table. When you check a field, it will be added to one of the available sections on the right sidebar depending on the data type and will be displayed in the pivot table. Fields containing text values will be added to the Rows section; fields containing numeric values will be added to the Values section. You can simply drag fields to the necessary section as well as drag the fields between sections to quickly reorganize your pivot table. To remove a field from the current section, drag it out of this section. In order to add a field to the necessary section, it's also possible to click the black arrow to the right of a field in the Select Fields section and choose the necessary option from the menu: Add to Filters, Add to Rows, Add to Columns, Add to Values. Below you can see some examples of using the Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values sections. If you add a field to the Filters section, a separate filter will be added above the pivot table. It will be applied to the entire pivot table. If you click the drop-down arrow in the added filter, you'll see the values from the selected field. When you uncheck some values in the filter option window and click OK, the unchecked values will not be displayed in the pivot table. If you add a field to the Columns section, the pivot table will contain a number of columns equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total column will also be added. If you add a field to the Rows section, the pivot table will contain a number of rows equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total row will also be added. If you add a field to the Values section, the pivot table will display the summation value for all numeric values from the selected field. If the field contains text values, the count of values will be displayed. The function used to calculate the summation value can be changed in the field settings. Rearrange fields and adjust their properties Once the fields are added to the necessary sections, you can manage them to change the layout and format of the pivot table. Click the black arrow to the right of a field within the Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values sections to access the field context menu. It allows you to: Move the selected field Up, Down, to the Beginning, or to the End of the current section if you have added more than one field to the current section. Move the selected field to a different section - to Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values. The option that corresponds to the current section will be disabled. Remove the selected field from the current section. Adjust the selected field settings. The Filters, Columns, and Rows field settings look similarly: The Layout tab contains the following options: The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. The Report Form section allows you to change the way the selected field is displayed in the pivot table: Choose the necessary layout for the selected field in the pivot table: The Tabular form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. The Outline form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. The Compact form displays items from different row section fields in a single column. The Repeat items labels at each row option allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. The Insert blank rows after each item option allows you to add blank lines after items of the selected field. The Show subtotals option allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals for the selected field. You can select one of the options: Show at top of group or Show at bottom of group. The Show items with no data option allows you to show or hide blank items in the selected field. The Subtotals tab allows you to choose Functions for Subtotals. Check the necessary functions in the list: Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. Values field settings The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. The Summarize value field by option allows you to choose the function used to calculate the summation value for all values from this field. By default, Sum is used for numeric values, Count is used for text values. The available functions are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. The Show values as option allows you to show instant custom calculations instead of adding a formula and creating a calculated field. No calculation is the default option that displays the actual value in the field. Other calculation options: % of grand total, % of column total, % of row total, % of, % of parent row total, % of parent column total, % of parent total, Difference from, % difference from, Running total in, % running total in, Rank smallest to largest, Rank largest to smallest, Index. Use Base field and Base item when these options are available for the calculation you selected (% of, % of parent total, Difference from, % difference from, Running total in, % running total in). Group and ungroup data Data in pivot tables can be grouped according to custom requirements. Grouping is available for dates and basic numbers. Grouping dates To group dates, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed dates. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a date, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. Starting at - the first date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the starting point. Ending at - the last date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the ending point. By - the Seconds, Minutes, and Hours options group the data according to the time given in the source data. The Months option eliminates days and leaves months only. The Quarters option operates at a condition: four months constitute a quarter, thus providing Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. The Years option groups dates as per years given in the source data. Combine the options to achieve the needed result. Number of days - set the required value to determine a date range. Click OK when finished. Grouping numbers To group numbers, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed numbers. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a number, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. Starting at - the smallest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the smallest number. Ending at - the largest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the largest number. By - set the required interval for grouping numbers. E.g., “2” will group the set of numbers from 1 through 10 as “1-2”, “3-4”, etc. Click OK when finished. Ungrouping data To ungroup previously grouped data, right-click any cell that is in the group, select the Ungroup option in the context menu. Change the appearance of pivot tables You can use options available on the top toolbar to adjust the way your pivot table is displayed. These options are applied to the entire pivot table. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The Report Layout drop-down list allows you to choose the necessary layout for your pivot table: Show in Compact Form - allows you to display items from different row section fields in a single column. Show in Outline Form - allows you to display the pivot table in the classic pivot table style. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. Show in Tabular Form - allows you to display the pivot table in a traditional table format. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. Don't Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to hide item labels if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. The Blank Rows drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display blank lines after items: Insert Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to add blank lines after items. Remove Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to remove the added blank lines. The Subtotals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals in the pivot table: Don't Show Subtotals - allows you to hide subtotals for all items. Show all Subtotals at Bottom of Group - allows you to display subtotals below the subtotaled rows. Show all Subtotals at Top of Group - allows you to display subtotals above the subtotaled rows. The Grand Totals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table: Off for Rows and Columns - allows you to hide grand totals for both rows and columns. On for Rows and Columns - allows you to display grand totals for both rows and columns. On for Rows Only - allows you to display grand totals for rows only. On for Columns Only - allows you to display grand totals for columns only. Note: the similar settings are also available in the pivot table advanced settings window in the Grand Totals section of the Name and Layout tab. The Select button allows you to select the entire pivot table. If you change the data in your source data set, select the pivot table and click the Refresh button to update the pivot table. Change the style of pivot tables You can change the appearance of pivot tables in a spreadsheet using the style editing tools available on the top toolbar. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The rows and columns options allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: Row Headers - allows you to highlight the row headers with special formatting. Column Headers - allows you to highlight the column headers with special formatting. Banded Rows - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. Banded Columns - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The template list allows you to choose one of the predefined pivot table styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding, etc. Depending on the options checked for rows and columns, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Row Headers and Banded Columns options, the visible part of the templates list will include templates with the row headers highlighted and banded columns enabled, but you can expand the full list by clicking the arrow to see all the available templates. Filter, sort and add slicers in pivot tables You can filter pivot tables by labels or values and use the additional sort parameters. Filtering Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. The Filter option list will open: Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display or filter the data by certain criteria. Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. Note: the (blank) checkbox corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. Filter data by certain criteria You can choose either the Label filter or the Value filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: For the Label filter the following options are available: For texts: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain... For numbers: Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between. For the Value filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between, Top 10. After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10), the Label/Value Filter window will open. The corresponding field and criterion will be selected in the first and second drop-down lists. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Value filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item, Percent, or Sum. The fourth drop-down list displays the selected field name. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. It means that the filter is applied. Sorting You can sort your pivot table data using the sort options. Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table and then select Sort Lowest to Highest or Sort Highest to Lowest option from the submenu. The More Sort Options option allows you to open the Sort window where you can select the necessary sorting order - Ascending or Descending - and then select a certain field you want to sort. Adding slicers You can add slicers to filter data easier by displaying only what is needed. To learn more about slicers, please read the guide on creating slicers. Adjust pivot table advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the pivot table, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Pivot Table - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Name and Layout tab allows you to change the pivot table common properties. The Name option allows you to change the pivot table name. The Grand Totals section allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table. The Show for rows and Show for columns options are checked by default. You can uncheck either one of them or both these options to hide the corresponding grand totals from your pivot table. Note: the similar settings are available on the top toolbar in the Grand Totals menu. The Display fields in report filter area section allows you to adjust the report filters which appear when you add fields to the Filters section: The Down, then over option is used for column arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the column. The Over, then down option is used for row arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the row. The Report filter fields per column option allows you to select the number of filters to go in each column. The default value is set to 0. You can set the necessary numeric value. The Show field headers for rows and columns option allows you to choose if you want to display field headers in your pivot table. The option is enabled by default. Uncheck it to hide field headers from your pivot table. The Autofit column widths on update option allows you to enable/disable automatic adjusting of the column widths. The option is enabled by default. The Data Source tab allows you to change the data you wish to use to create the pivot table. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the pivot table contains. Delete a pivot table To delete a pivot table, Select the entire pivot table using the Select button on the top toolbar. Press the Delete key." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm", + "title": "Protect ranges", + "body": "The Protect Range option allows you to specify cell ranges that cannot be edited by users without corresponding editing rights that are granted by the creator of the file or a user with full access to it. To select a range of locked cells a user will be allowed to change: Click the Protect Range button on the top toolbar of the Protection tab. The Protected Ranges window will open. Use the Filter drop-down list to choose the required sheet. Click the New button in the Protected Ranges window to select and add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit. In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Select users who can edit this range and click OK to confirm. To edit or delete a range, select it in the Protected Ranges window and click the Edit or Delete button accordingly. Click the Close button in the Protected Ranges window when you are ready. To learn more about allowing edit ranges, please refer to the following article." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm", "title": "Protecting a sheet", - "body": "The Protect Sheet option allows you to protect the sheets and to control changes made by other users in a sheet as to prevent the unwanted changes to data and to restrict the editing abilities of other users. You can protect a sheet with or without a password. If you don’t use a password, anyone can unprotect the protected sheet. To protect a sheet: Go to the Protection tab, and click the Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar. or Right-click the sheet tab you want to protect, and select Protect from the list of options In the Protect Sheet window that opens, enter and confirm the password, if you want to set a password to unprotect this sheet. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. Check the boxes in the Allow all users of this sheet to list to select operations that users will be able to perform. The operations Select locked cells and Select unlocked cells are allowed by default. Operations a user may be allowed to perform. Select locked cells Select unlocked cells Format cells Format columns Format rows Insert columns Insert rows Insert hyperlink Delete columns Delete rows Sort Use Autofilter Use PivotTable and PivotChart Edit objects Edit scenarios click the Protect button to enable the protection. The Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar stays highlighted once the sheet is protected. To unprotect the sheet: click the Protect Sheet button, or right-click the protected sheet tab and select Unprotect from the list of options Enter a password and click OK in the Unprotect Sheet window if prompted." + "body": "The Protect Sheet option allows you to protect the sheets and to control changes made by other users in a sheet as to prevent the unwanted changes to data and to restrict the editing abilities of other users. You can protect a sheet with or without a password. If you don’t use a password, anyone can unprotect the protected sheet. Protect a sheet Go to the Protection tab, and click the Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar. or right-click the sheet tab you want to protect, and select Protect from the list of options In the Protect sheet window that opens, enter and confirm the password, if you want to set a password to unprotect this sheet. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. Check the boxes in the Allow all users of this sheet to list to select operations that users will be able to perform. The operations Select locked cells and Select unlocked cells are allowed by default. Operations a user may be allowed to perform. Select locked cells Select unlocked cells Format cells Format columns Format rows Insert columns Insert rows Insert hyperlink Delete columns Delete rows Sort Use Autofilter Use PivotTable and PivotChart Edit objects Edit scenarios click the Protect button to enable the protection. The Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar stays highlighted once the sheet is protected. Allow edit ranges Click the Protect Sheet button on the top toolbar of the Protection tab. The Protect sheet window will open. Click the Allow edit ranges button to specify ranges unlocked by the password when the sheet is protected. This option works for locked cells only. Click the New button to add a new range. The New range window will be opened. Specify the Title of the range, the range itself, and enter and repeat a password. Click OK when ready. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. When a sheet is not protected, you can still make changes to the allowed ranges: If you need to edit a created range, select it in the Allow users to edit ranges window and click the Edit button. To delete a created range, select it in the Allow users to edit ranges window and click the Delete button. Click the Protect button when ready. For ranges protected with a password, when someone is trying to edit the selected range of cells, the Unlock Range window appears, where the user is prompted to enter the password. To learn more about protecting ranges, please refer to the following article. Unprotect a sheet To unprotect the sheet: click the Protect Sheet button, or right-click the protected sheet tab and select Unprotect from the list of options enter a password and click OK in the Unprotect Sheet window if prompted." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm", "title": "Protecting a spreadsheet", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor gives you an opportunity to protect a shared spreadsheet when you intend to restrict access or editing abilities for other users. Spreadsheet Editor offers different levels of protection to control both access to the file and editing abilities inside a workbook and within the sheets. Use the Protection tab to configure the available protection options as you deem it appropriate. The available protection options include: Encrypt to control access to the file and prevent it from being opened by other users. Protect workbook to control user’s manipulations with the workbook and to prevent unwanted changes to the workbook structure. Protect sheet to control user’s actions within a sheet and to prevent unwanted changes to data. Allow edit ranges to specify cell ranges a user can work with in a protected sheet. Use the Protection tab checkboxes to lock or unlock quickly the sheet contents in a protected sheet. Note: these options will not take effect until you enable sheet protection. By default, the cells, the shapes and the text inside a shape are locked in a sheet, uncheck the appropriate checkbox to unlock them. The unlocked objects can still be edited when a sheet is protected. The options Shape Locked and Lock Text become active when a shape is selected. The Shape Locked option is applicable both to shapes and other objects such as charts, images and text boxes. The Lock Text option locks text inside all graphical objects except charts. Check the Hidden Formulas box to hide formulas in a selected range or cell when a sheet is protected. The hidden formula will not appear in the formula bar when you click the cell." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor gives you an opportunity to protect a shared spreadsheet when you intend to restrict access or editing abilities for other users. Spreadsheet Editor offers different levels of protection to control both access to the file and editing abilities inside a workbook and within the sheets. Use the Protection tab to configure the available protection options as you deem it appropriate. The available protection options include: Encrypt to control access to the file and prevent it from being opened by other users. Protect Workbook to control user’s manipulations with the workbook and to prevent unwanted changes to the workbook structure. Protect Sheet to control user’s actions within a sheet and to prevent unwanted changes to data. Protect Range to protect ranges by restricting or prohibiting their editing. The editing rights can be granted to certain users. Users with no editing rights will be able to just view the protected range but they can edit the rest of the spreadsheet provided they have full access rights for the file. Use the Protection tab checkboxes to lock or unlock quickly the sheet contents in a protected sheet. Note: these options will not take effect until you enable sheet protection. By default, the cells, the shapes and the text inside a shape are locked in a sheet, uncheck the appropriate checkbox to unlock them. The unlocked objects can still be edited when a sheet is protected. The options Shape Locked and Lock Text become active when a shape is selected. The Shape Locked option is applicable both to shapes and other objects such as charts, images and text boxes. The Lock Text option locks text inside all graphical objects except charts. Check the Hidden Formulas box to hide formulas in a selected range or cell when a sheet is protected. The hidden formula will not appear in the formula bar when you click the cell." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm", @@ -2683,7 +2733,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Save/print/download your spreadsheet", - "body": "Saving By default, the online Spreadsheet Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data from loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current spreadsheet manually in the current format and location, click the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the spreadsheet with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A. You can also choose the Spreadsheet template (XLTX or OTS) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting spreadsheet onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character). Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current spreadsheet, click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. The spreadsheet Preview and the available printing options will open. Some of these settings (page Margins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Here you can adjust the following parameters: Print range - specify what to print: Current sheet, All sheets or Selection, If you previously set a constant print area but want to print the entire sheet, check the Ignore print area box. Settings of sheet - specify individual print settings for each separate sheet, if you have selected the All Sheets option in the Print range drop-down list, Page size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list, Page orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally, Scaling - if you do not want some columns or rows to be printed on the second page, you can shrink sheet contents to fit it on one page by selecting the corresponding option: Actual Size, Fit Sheet on One Page, Fit All Columns on One Page or Fit All Rows on One Page. Leave the Actual Size option to print the sheet without adjusting. If you choose the Custom Options item from the menu, the Scale Settings window will open: Fit To: allows you to select the necessary number of pages you want to fit the printed worksheet to. Select the necessary number of pages from the Width and Height lists. Scale To: allows you to enlarge or reduce the scale of the worksheet to fit printed pages by manually specifying the percentage of normal size. Print titles - if you want to print row or column titles on every page, use Repeat rows at top and/or Repeat columns at left to indicate the row and the column with the title to repeat, or select one of the available options from the drop-down list: Frozen rows/columns, First row/column or Don't repeat. Margins - specify the distance between the worksheet data and the edges of the printed page changing the default sizes in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right fields, Gridlines and headings - specify the worksheet elements to print by checking the corresponding boxes: Print gridlines and Print row and column headings. Header/footer settings - allow to add some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc. After you have configured the printing settings click the Print button to save changes and print out the spreadsheet or the Save button to save changes made to printing settings. All changes you made will be lost if you don't print the spreadsheet or save the changes. The spreadsheet Preview allows you to navigate a spreadsheet using arrows at the bottom to see how your data will be displayed on a sheet when printed and to correct eventual faults using the print setting above. In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing. Setting up the print area If you want to print the selected cell range only instead of the entire worksheet, you can use the Selection option from the Print range drop-down list. When the workbook is saved, this setting is not saved, it is intended for single use. If a cell range should be printed frequently, you can set a constant print area on the worksheet. When the workbook is saved, the print area is also saved, it can be used when you open the spreadsheet next time. It's also possible to set several constant print areas in a sheet, in this case each area will be printed on a separate page. To set the print area: select the necessary cell range on the worksheet. To select multiple cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Set Print Area option. The created print area is saved when the workbook is saved. When you open the file next time, the specified print area will be printed. When you create a print area, a Print_Area named range is also automatically created, which is displayed in the Name Manager. To highlight the borders of all the print areas on the current worksheet, you can click the arrow in the name box located to the left of the the formula bar and select the Print_Area name from the name list. To add cells to the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, select the necessary cell range on the worksheet, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Add to Print Area option. A new print area will be added. Each print area will be printed on a separate page. To remove the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Clear Print Area option. All the existing print areas in this sheet will be removed. Then the entire sheet will be printed." + "body": "Saving By default, the online Spreadsheet Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data from loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current spreadsheet manually in the current format and location, click the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the spreadsheet with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. You can also choose the Spreadsheet template option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting spreadsheet onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas, etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character). Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current spreadsheet, click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. The spreadsheet Preview and the available printing options will open. Some of these settings (page Margins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Here you can adjust the following parameters. In the desktop version you can also define the Print sides option to print on one or two sides flipping the pages on long or short edge as well as print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer. Print range - specify what to print: Active sheets, All sheets or Selection, If you previously set a constant print area but want to print the entire sheet, check the Ignore print area box. Pages - specify the range of pages for printing. You can enter the numbers manually or use the corresponding arrows, Settings of sheet - specify individual print settings for each separate sheet, if you have selected the All Sheets option in the Print range drop-down list, Page size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list, Page orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally, Scaling - if you do not want some columns or rows to be printed on the second page, you can shrink sheet contents to fit it on one page by selecting the corresponding option: Actual Size, Fit Sheet on One Page, Fit All Columns on One Page or Fit All Rows on One Page. Leave the Actual Size option to print the sheet without adjusting. If you choose the Custom Options item from the menu, the Scale Settings window will open: Fit To: allows you to select the necessary number of pages you want to fit the printed worksheet to. Select the necessary number of pages from the Width and Height lists. Scale To: allows you to enlarge or reduce the scale of the worksheet to fit printed pages by manually specifying the percentage of normal size. Print titles - if you want to print row or column titles on every page, use Repeat rows at top and/or Repeat columns at left to indicate the row and the column with the title to repeat, or select one of the available options from the drop-down list: Frozen rows/columns, First row/column or Don't repeat. Margins - specify the distance between the worksheet data and the edges of the printed page changing the default sizes in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right fields, Gridlines and headings - specify the worksheet elements to print by checking the corresponding boxes: Print gridlines and Print row and column headings. Header/footer settings - allow to add some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc. First page number - specify the number of the first page printed. After you have configured the printing settings click the Print button to save changes and print out the spreadsheet or the Save button to save changes made to printing settings. All changes you made will be lost if you don't print the spreadsheet or save the changes. The spreadsheet Preview allows you to navigate a spreadsheet using arrows at the bottom to see how your data will be displayed on a sheet when printed and to correct eventual faults using the print setting above. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing. Setting up the print area If you want to print the selected cell range only instead of the entire worksheet, you can use the Selection option from the Print range drop-down list. When the workbook is saved, this setting is not saved, it is intended for single use. If a cell range should be printed frequently, you can set a constant print area on the worksheet. When the workbook is saved, the print area is also saved, it can be used when you open the spreadsheet next time. It's also possible to set several constant print areas in a sheet, in this case each area will be printed on a separate page. To set the print area: select the necessary cell range on the worksheet. To select multiple cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Set Print Area option. The created print area is saved when the workbook is saved. When you open the file next time, the specified print area will be printed. When you create a print area, a Print_Area named range is also automatically created, which is displayed in the Name Manager. To highlight the borders of all the print areas on the current worksheet, you can click the arrow in the name box located to the left of the the formula bar and select the Print_Area name from the name list. To add cells to the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, select the necessary cell range on the worksheet, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Add to Print Area option. A new print area will be added. Each print area will be printed on a separate page. To remove the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Clear Print Area option. All the existing print areas in this sheet will be removed. Then the entire sheet will be printed." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm", @@ -2703,12 +2753,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SortData.htm", "title": "Sort and filter data", - "body": "Sort Data You can quickly sort the data in the Spreadsheet Editor using one of the following options: Ascending is used to sort the data in ascending order - from A to Z alphabetically or from the smallest to the largest number for numerical data. Descending is used to sort the data in descending order - from Z to A alphabetically or from the largest to the smallest for numerical data. Note: the Sort options are accessible from both Home and Data tab. To sort the data, select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell in a range to sort the entire range), click the Sort ascending icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar to sort the data in ascending order, OR click the Sort descending icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar to sort the data in descending order. Note: if you select a single column/row within a cell range or a part of the column/row, you will be asked if you want to expand the selection to include adjacent cells or sort the selected data only. You can also sort your data using the contextual menu options. Right-click the selected range of cells, select the Sort option from the menu and then select Ascending or Descending option from the submenu. It's also possible to sort the data by color using the contextual menu: right-click a cell containing the color by which you want to sort the data, select the Sort option from the menu, select the necessary option from the submenu: Selected Cell Color on top - to display the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, Selected Font Color on top - to display the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. Filter Data To display only the rows that meet certain criteria and hide other ones, make use of the Filter option. Note: the Filter options are accessible from both Home and Data tab. To enable a filter, Select a cell range containing data to filter (you can select a single cell in a range to filter the entire range), Click the Filter icon situated at the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The drop-down arrow will appear in the first cell of each column of the selected cell range. It means that the filter is enabled. To apply a filter, Click the drop-down arrow . The Filter option list will open: Note: you can adjust the size of the filter window by dragging its right border to the right or to the left to display the data as convenient as possible. Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display, filter the data by certain criteria or filter data by color. Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. The number of unique values in the filtered range is displayed to the right of each value within the filter window. Note: the {Blanks} check box corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. Filter data by certain criteria Depending on the data in the selected column, you can choose either the Number filter or the Text filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: For the Number filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Top 10, Above Average, Below Average, Custom Filter.... For the Text filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain..., Custom Filter.... After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10 and Above/Below Average), the Custom Filter window will open. The corresponding criterion will be selected in the upper drop-down list. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. To add one more criterion, use the And radiobutton if you need the data to satisfy both criteria or click the Or radiobutton if either or both criteria can be satisfied. Then select the second criterion from the lower drop-down list and enter the necessary value on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Custom Filter... option from the Number/Text filter option list, the first criterion is not selected automatically, you can set it yourself. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Number filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item or Percent. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Above/Below Average option from the Number filter option list, the filter will be applied right now. Filter data by color If the cell range you want to filter contains some cells you have formatted changing their background or font color (manually or using predefined styles), you can use one of the following options: Filter by cells color - to display only the entries with a certain cell background color and hide other ones, Filter by font color - to display only the entries with a certain cell font color and hide other ones. When you select the necessary option, a palette that contains colors used in the selected cell range will open. Choose one of the colors to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the first cell of the column. It means that the filter is applied. The number of filtered records will be displayed at the status bar (e.g. 25 of 80 records filtered). Note: when the filter is applied, the rows that are filtered out cannot be modified when autofilling, formatting, deleting the visible contents. Such actions affect the visible rows only, the rows that are hidden by the filter remain unchanged. When copying and pasting the filtered data, only visible rows can be copied and pasted. This is not equivalent to manually hidden rows which are affected by all similar actions. Sort filtered data You can set the sorting order of the data you have enabled or applied filter for. Click the drop-down arrow or the Filter button and select one of the options in the Filter option list: Sort Lowest to Highest - allows sorting the data in ascending order, displaying the lowest value on the top of the column, Sort Highest to Lowest - allows sorting the data in descending order, displaying the highest value on the top of the column, Sort by cells color - allows selecting one of the colors and displaying the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, Sort by font color - allows selecting one of the colors and displaying the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. The latter two options can be used if the cell range you want to sort contains some cells you have formatted changing their background or font color (manually or using predefined styles). The sorting direction will be indicated by an arrow in the filter buttons. if the data is sorted in ascending order, the drop-down arrow in the first cell of the column looks like this: and the Filter button looks the following way: . if the data is sorted in descending order, the drop-down arrow in the first cell of the column looks like this: and the Filter button looks the following way: . You can also quickly sort the data by color using the contextual menu options: right-click a cell containing the color by which you want to sort the data, select the Sort option from the menu, select the necessary option from the submenu: Selected Cell Color on top - to display the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, Selected Font Color on top - to display the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. Filter by the selected cell contents You can also quickly filter your data by the selected cell contents using the contextual menu options. Right-click a cell, select the Filter option from the menu and then select one of the available options: Filter by Selected cell's value - to display only the entries with the same value as the selected cell contains. Filter by cell's color - to display only the entries with the same cell background color as the selected cell has. Filter by font color - to display only the entries with the same cell font color as the selected cell has. Format as Table Template To facilitate your work with data, the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to apply a table template to a selected cell range automatically enabling the filter. To do that, select a range of cells you need to format, click the Format as table template icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. select the required template in the gallery, in the opened pop-up window check the cell range to be formatted as a table, check the Title if you wish the table headers to be included in the selected cell range, otherwise the header row will be added at the top while the selected cell range will be moved one row down, click the OK button to apply the selected template. The template will be applied to the selected range of cells and you will be able to edit the table headers and apply the filter to work with your data. To learn more on working with formatted tables, please refer to this page. Reapply Filter If the filtered data has been changed, you can refresh the filter to display an up-to-date result: click the Filter button in the first cell of the column that contains the filtered data, select the Reapply option in the opened Filter option list. You can also right-click a cell within the column that contains the filtered data and select the Reapply option from the contextual menu. Clear Filter To clear the filter, click the Filter button in the first cell of the column that contains the filtered data, select the Clear option in the opened Filter option list. You can also proceed in the following way: select the range of cells containing the filtered data, click the Clear filter icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The filter will remain enabled, but all the applied filter parameters will be removed, and the Filter buttons in the first cells of the columns will change into the drop-down arrows . Remove Filter To remove the filter, select the range of cells containing the filtered data, click the Filter icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The filter will be disabled, and the drop-down arrows will disappear from the first cells of the columns. Sort data by several columns/rows To sort data by several columns/rows you can create several sorting levels using the Custom Sort function. select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell to sort the entire range), click the Custom Sort icon situated on the Data tab of the top toolbar, the Sort window will appear. Sorting by columns is selected by default. To change the sorting orientation (i.e. sorting data by rows instead of columns), click the Options button on the top. The Sort Options window will open: check the My data has headers box, if necessary, choose the necessary Orientation: Sort top to bottom to sort data by columns or Sort left to right to sort data by rows, click OK to apply the changes and close the window. set the first sorting level in the Sort by field: in the Column / Row section, select the first column / row you want to sort, in the Sort on list choose one of the following options: Values, Cell color, or Font color, in the Order list, specify the necessary sorting order. The available options differ depending on the option chosen in the Sort on list: if the Values option is selected, choose the Ascending / Descending option if the cell range contains numbers or A to Z / Z to A option if the cell range contains text values, if the Cell color option is selected, choose the necessary cell color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows, if the Font color option is selected, choose the necessary font color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows. add the next sorting level by clicking the Add level button, select the second column / row you want to sort and specify other sorting parameters in the Then by field as described above. If necessary, add more levels in the same way. manage the added levels using the buttons at the top of the window: Delete level, Copy level or change the level order by using the arrow buttons Move the level up / Move the level down, click OK to apply the changes and close the window. The data will be sorted according to the specified sorting levels." - }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Support of SmartArt in ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor", - "body": "SmartArt graphics are used to create a visual representation of a hierarchical structure by choosing a layout that fits best. ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports SmartArt graphics that were inserted using third-party editors. You can open a file containing SmartArt and edit it as a graphic object using the available editing tools. Once you click a SmartArt graphic or its element, the following tabs become active on the right sidebar to customize the layout: Shape settings to configure the shapes used on a layout. You can change shapes, edit the fill, the lines, the wrapping style, the position, the weights and arrows, the text box, the cell snapping and the alternative text. Paragraph settings to configure indents and spacing, fonts and tabs. See Cell text formatting section for a detailed description of every option. This tab becomes active for SmartArt elements only. Text Art settings to configure the Text Art style that is used in a SmartArt graphic to highlight the text. You can change the Text Art template, the fill type, color and opacity, the line size, color and type. This tab becomes active for SmartArt elements only. Right-click the border of a SmartArt graphic or its element to access the following formatting options: Arrange to arrange the objects using the following options: Bring to Foreground, Send to Background, Bring Forward, Bring Backward, Group, and Ungroup. Rotate to choose the rotation direction for the selected element on a SmartArt graphic: Rotate 90° Clockwise, Rotate 90° Counterclockwise.The Rotate option becomes active for SmartArt elements only Asign Macro to provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet. Shape Advanced Settings to access additional shape formatting options. Right-click a SmartArt graphic element to access the following text formatting options: Vertical Alignment to choose the text alignment inside the selected SmarArt element: Align Top, Align Middle, Align Bottom. Text Direction to choose the text direction inside the selected SmarArt element: Horizontal, Rotate Text Down, Rotate Text Up. Hyperlink to add a hyperlink to the SmartArt element. Cell text formatting to access additional paragraph formatting options." + "body": "Sort Data You can quickly sort the data in the Spreadsheet Editor using one of the following options: Ascending is used to sort the data in ascending order - from A to Z alphabetically or from the smallest to the largest number for numerical data. Descending is used to sort the data in descending order - from Z to A alphabetically or from the largest to the smallest for numerical data. Note: the Sort options are accessible from both Home and Data tab. To sort the data, select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell in a range to sort the entire range), click the Sort ascending icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar to sort the data in ascending order, OR click the Sort descending icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar to sort the data in descending order. Note: if you select a single column/row within a cell range or a part of the column/row, you will be asked if you want to expand the selection to include adjacent cells or sort the selected data only. You can also sort your data using the contextual menu options. Right-click the selected range of cells, select the Sort option from the menu and then select Ascending or Descending option from the submenu. It's also possible to sort the data by color using the contextual menu: right-click a cell containing the color by which you want to sort the data, select the Sort option from the menu, select the necessary option from the submenu: Selected Cell Color on top - to display the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, Selected Font Color on top - to display the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. Filter Data To display only the rows that meet certain criteria and hide other ones, make use of the Filter option. Note: the Filter options are accessible from both Home and Data tab. To enable a filter, Select a cell range containing data to filter (you can select a single cell in a range to filter the entire range), Click the Filter icon situated at the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The drop-down arrow will appear in the first cell of each column of the selected cell range. It means that the filter is enabled. To apply a filter, Click the drop-down arrow . The Filter option list will open: Note: you can adjust the size of the filter window by dragging its right border to the right or to the left to display the data as convenient as possible. Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display, filter the data by certain criteria or filter data by color. Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. The number of unique values in the filtered range is displayed to the right of each value within the filter window. Note: the {Blanks} check box corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. Filter data by certain criteria Depending on the data in the selected column, you can choose either the Number filter or the Text filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: For the Number filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Top 10, Above Average, Below Average, Custom Filter.... For the Text filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain..., Custom Filter.... After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10 and Above/Below Average), the Custom Filter window will open. The corresponding criterion will be selected in the upper drop-down list. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. To add one more criterion, use the And radiobutton if you need the data to satisfy both criteria or click the Or radiobutton if either or both criteria can be satisfied. Then select the second criterion from the lower drop-down list and enter the necessary value on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Custom Filter... option from the Number/Text filter option list, the first criterion is not selected automatically, you can set it yourself. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Number filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item or Percent. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Above/Below Average option from the Number filter option list, the filter will be applied right now. Filter data by color If the cell range you want to filter contains some cells you have formatted changing their background or font color (manually or using predefined styles), you can use one of the following options: Filter by cells color - to display only the entries with a certain cell background color and hide other ones, Filter by font color - to display only the entries with a certain cell font color and hide other ones. When you select the necessary option, a palette that contains colors used in the selected cell range will open. Choose one of the colors to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the first cell of the column. It means that the filter is applied. The number of filtered records will be displayed at the status bar (e.g. 25 of 80 records filtered). Note: when the filter is applied, the rows that are filtered out cannot be modified when autofilling, formatting, deleting the visible contents. Such actions affect the visible rows only, the rows that are hidden by the filter remain unchanged. When copying and pasting the filtered data, only visible rows can be copied and pasted. This is not equivalent to manually hidden rows which are affected by all similar actions. Sort filtered data You can set the sorting order of the data you have enabled or applied filter for. Click the drop-down arrow or the Filter button and select one of the options in the Filter option list: Sort Lowest to Highest - allows sorting the data in ascending order, displaying the lowest value on the top of the column, Sort Highest to Lowest - allows sorting the data in descending order, displaying the highest value on the top of the column, Sort by cells color - allows selecting one of the colors and displaying the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, Sort by font color - allows selecting one of the colors and displaying the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. The latter two options can be used if the cell range you want to sort contains some cells you have formatted changing their background or font color (manually or using predefined styles). The sorting direction will be indicated by an arrow in the filter buttons. if the data is sorted in ascending order, the drop-down arrow in the first cell of the column looks like this: and the Filter button looks the following way: . if the data is sorted in descending order, the drop-down arrow in the first cell of the column looks like this: and the Filter button looks the following way: . You can also quickly sort the data by color using the contextual menu options: right-click a cell containing the color by which you want to sort the data, select the Sort option from the menu, select the necessary option from the submenu: Selected Cell Color on top - to display the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, Selected Font Color on top - to display the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. Filter by the selected cell contents You can also quickly filter your data by the selected cell contents using the contextual menu options. Right-click a cell, select the Filter option from the menu and then select one of the available options: Filter by Selected cell's value - to display only the entries with the same value as the selected cell contains. Filter by cell's color - to display only the entries with the same cell background color as the selected cell has. Filter by font color - to display only the entries with the same cell font color as the selected cell has. Format as Table Template To facilitate your work with data, the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to apply a table template to a selected cell range automatically enabling the filter. To do that, select a range of cells you need to format, click the Format as table template icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. select the required template in the gallery, in the opened pop-up window check the cell range to be formatted as a table, check the Title if you wish the table headers to be included in the selected cell range, otherwise the header row will be added at the top while the selected cell range will be moved one row down, click the OK button to apply the selected template. The template will be applied to the selected range of cells and you will be able to edit the table headers and apply the filter to work with your data. To learn more on working with formatted tables, please refer to this page. Reapply Filter If the filtered data has been changed, you can refresh the filter to display an up-to-date result: click the Filter button in the first cell of the column that contains the filtered data, select the Reapply option in the opened Filter option list. You can also right-click a cell within the column that contains the filtered data and select the Reapply option from the contextual menu. Clear Filter To clear the filter, click the Filter button in the first cell of the column that contains the filtered data, select the Clear option in the opened Filter option list. You can also proceed in the following way: select the range of cells containing the filtered data, click the Clear filter icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The filter will remain enabled, but all the applied filter parameters will be removed, and the Filter buttons in the first cells of the columns will change into the drop-down arrows . Remove Filter To remove the filter, select the range of cells containing the filtered data, click the Filter icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The filter will be disabled, and the drop-down arrows will disappear from the first cells of the columns. Sort data by several columns/rows To sort data by several columns/rows you can create several sorting levels using the Custom Sort function. select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell to sort the entire range), click the Custom Sort icon situated on the Data tab of the top toolbar, the Sort window will appear. Sorting by columns is selected by default. use the Levels sections to add new levels and to manage the added levels. New button to add a new level, select the second column / row you want to sort and specify other sorting parameters in the Then by field as described above. If necessary, add more levels in the same way, Copy button to copy the selected level and to duplicate all the existing settings, Options button to change the sorting orientation (i.e. sorting data by rows instead of columns). Click the button to open the Sort Options window: check the My data has headers box, if necessary choose the necessary Orientation: Sort top to bottom to sort data by columns or Sort left to right to sort data by rows, click OK to apply the changes and close the window. Delete button to delete the selected level, Arrow buttons Move the level up / Move the level down to change the order of levels. set the first sorting level in the Sort by field: in the Column / Row section, select the first column / row you want to sort, in the Sort on list choose one of the following options: Values, Cell color, or Font color, in the Order list, specify the necessary sorting order. The available options differ depending on the option chosen in the Sort on list: if the Values option is selected, choose the Ascending / Descending option if the cell range contains numbers or A to Z / Z to A option if the cell range contains text values, if the Cell color option is selected, choose the necessary cell color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows, if the Font color option is selected, choose the necessary font color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows. click OK to apply the changes and close the window. The data will be sorted according to the specified sorting levels." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", @@ -2744,5 +2789,10 @@ var indexes = "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Include a video", "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can include a video in your spreadsheet. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your spreadsheet." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", + "title": "Zoom", + "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css index bb845e934e..d1eec13133 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/es/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json index b4262b4c08..723f1adc55 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ [ { "src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", - "name": "Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de Spreadsheet Editor", + "name": "Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de classeurs", "headername": "Interface du programme" }, { @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Insertion" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Dessiner"}, { "src": "ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Formule" }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm", "name": "Onglet Données" }, { @@ -41,10 +42,11 @@ "src": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm", "name": "Couper/copier/coller des données" }, - { - "src": "UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm", - "name": "Annuler/rétablir vos actions" - }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm", + "name": "Annuler/rétablir vos actions" + }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm", "name": "Ajouter des liens externes vers des cellules" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm", "name": "Gérer des feuilles de calcul", @@ -130,7 +132,8 @@ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Insérer des objets textuels" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Dessiner à main levée dans un classeur" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insérer des symboles et des caractères" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm", @@ -151,7 +154,7 @@ { "src": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "name": "Commentaires" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "name": "Historique des versions" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm", "name": "Protéger une feuille de calcul", "headername": "Protéger une feuille de calcul" }, - { "src": "UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm", "name": "Autoriser la modification des plages" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm", "name": "Protéger des plages" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/Password.htm", "name": "Protéger un classeur avec un mot de passe" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm", "name": "Protéger une feuille de calcul" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm", "name": "Protéger un classeur" }, @@ -160,7 +163,9 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", "name": "Insérer le code en surbrillance" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "name": "Traduire un texte" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Remplacer un mot par synonyme" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communiquer lors de l'édition"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communiquer lors de l'édition" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Organiser et programmer des réunions de Zoom"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Utiliser l'intelligence artificielle pour rédiger un texte"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "Afficher les informations de fichier", @@ -173,7 +178,7 @@ }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", - "name": "Paramètres avancés de Spreadsheet Editor" + "name": "Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de classeurs" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", @@ -188,7 +193,7 @@ {"src": "HelpfulHints/ImportData.htm", "name": "Obtenir des données à partir de fichiers Texte/CSV"}, { "src": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", - "name": "A propos de Spreadsheet Editor", + "name": "A propos de l'éditeur de classeurs", "headername": "Astuces utiles" }, { diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/abs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/abs.htm index 72a565a80e..a0e6e4b368 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/abs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/abs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ABS

    La fonction ABS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur absolue d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrint.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrint.htm index 8a41ce88e7..235ad7d36b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrint.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrint.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INTERET.ACC

    La fonction INTERET.ACC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle sert à calculer l'intérêt couru pour un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrintm.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrintm.htm index 35d6314364..24fd007243 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrintm.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/accrintm.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INTERET.ACC.MAT

    La fonction INTERET.ACC.MAT est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle sert à calculer les intérêts courus pour un titre qui rapporte des intérêts à l'échéance.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acos.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acos.htm index 47fb5c9a9b..969745038d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acos.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acos.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ACOS

    La fonction ACOS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'arccosinus d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acosh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acosh.htm index 8868af651b..51863baa64 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acosh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acosh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ACOSH

    La fonction ACOSH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le cosinus hyperbolique inversé d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acot.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acot.htm index c4f7fc464f..d7eaee064f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acot.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acot.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ACOT

    La fonction ACOT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur principale de l'arccotangente, ou cotangente inverse, d'un nombre. L'angle renvoyé est mesuré en radians dans l'intervalle de 0 à Pi.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acoth.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acoth.htm index 7d031a6aaa..eb09f8c4c1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acoth.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/acoth.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ACOTH

    La fonction ACOTH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cotangente hyperbolique inverse d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/address.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/address.htm index 954c649da2..2ff0f5396a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/address.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/address.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ADRESSE

    La fonction ADRESSE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une représentation textuelle de l'adresse d'une cellule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/aggregate.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/aggregate.htm index 85d3db6594..3d371ad199 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/aggregate.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/aggregate.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AGREGAT

    La fonction AGREGAT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Cette fonction est utilisée pour renvoyer un agrégat dans une liste ou une base de données. La fonction AGREGAT peut appliquer différentes fonctions d'agrégat à une liste ou une base de données avec l'option d'ignorer les lignes cachées et les valeurs d'erreur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amordegrc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amordegrc.htm index 9ce0e62fb7..e3c367424f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amordegrc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amordegrc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AMORDEGRC

    La fonction AMORDEGRC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la dépréciation d'un actif pour chaque période comptable en utilisant une méthode d'amortissement dégressif.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorintm.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorintm.htm index 06eae6a79a..110dc53aee 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorintm.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorintm.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FV

    La fonction FV est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur future d'un investissement à la base du taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorlinc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorlinc.htm index d32a8c5ed3..9f778680a8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorlinc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/amorlinc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AMORLINC

    La fonction AMORLINC est l'une des fonctions financières. Il est utilisé pour calculer l'amortissement d'un actif pour chaque période comptable en utilisant une méthode d'amortissement linéaire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/and.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/and.htm index 78c0b26327..18418a0ec1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/and.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/and.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ET

    La fonction ET est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est vraie (TRUE) ou fausse (FALSE). La fonction retourne vrai (TRUE) si tous les arguments sont vrais (TRUE).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arabic.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arabic.htm index 0a83e18885..a6e616b4af 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arabic.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arabic.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE

    La fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un chiffre romain en nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arraytotext.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arraytotext.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fc2c163996 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/arraytotext.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + Fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE

    +

    La fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE appartient aux fonctions de données et texte. Cette fonction permet de renvoyer et convertir une plage de données en texte.

    +

    Le syntaxe de la fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE:

    +

    =TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE(tableau, [format])

    +

    où:

    +

    tableau est la plage de cellules à renvoyer sous forme de texte,

    +

    + [format] est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: +

      +
    • 0 sert à séparer les valeurs par une virgule dans la chaîne texte (valeur par défaut),
      • +
    • 1 sert à placer chaque valeur entre guillemets doubles (sauf des nombres, des valeurs vrai/faux et des erreurs), utiliser le point-virgule en tant que délimiteur et place la chaîne de texte entière entre accolades.
      • + +
    +

    + +

    Pour appliquer la fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE,

    +
      +
    1. sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
      2. +
    2. + cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu,
      ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, +
      3. +
    3. sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions de Données et texte depuis la liste,
      4. +
    4. cliquez sur la fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE,
      5. +
    5. insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules,
      6. +
    6. appuyez sur la touche Entrée.
      7. +
    +

    Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie.

    +

    Fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asc.htm index c253c91f1b..5b3e08d89a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ASC

    La fonction ASC est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Permet de changer les caractères pleine largeur (double octet) en caractères demi-largeur (simple octet) pour les langues qui utilisent le jeu de caractères double octet (DBCS) comme le japonais, le chinois, le coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asin.htm index 9136a7fe95..6def17e07b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ASIN

    La fonction ASIN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'arcsinus d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asinh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asinh.htm index 4c8209cc1a..f8e7d638c6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asinh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/asinh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ASINH

    La fonction ASINH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le sinus hyperbolique inverse d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan.htm index eb56e36b7a..fc91ddad1a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ATAN

    La fonction ATAN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'arctangente d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan2.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan2.htm index ed6483fc5a..df19fcb09c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan2.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atan2.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ATAN2

    La fonction ATAN2 est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l’arctangente des coordonnées x et y.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atanh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atanh.htm index 31812e8ff4..b7460721b8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atanh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/atanh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ATANH

    La fonction ATANH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la tangente hyperbolique inverse d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/avedev.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/avedev.htm index 3503b585a6..4c46fd503b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/avedev.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/avedev.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ECART.MOYEN

    La fonction ECART.MOYEN est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer la moyenne des écarts absolus des nombres de leur moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/average.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/average.htm index f2f53b9146..f0ab1f3965 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/average.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/average.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE

    La fonction MOYENNE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la valeur moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averagea.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averagea.htm index 72075450a9..6ca829d7d3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averagea.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averagea.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AVERAGEA

    La fonction AVERAGEA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données y compris du texte et des valeurs logiques et trouver la moyenne. La fonction AVERAGEA considère le texte et FALSE (FAUX) comme 0 et TRUE (VRAI) comme 1.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageif.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageif.htm index 89c31579c7..c72d368068 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageif.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageif.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE.SI

    La fonction MOYENNE.SI est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et trouver la moyenne de tous les nombres dans une plage de cellules à la base du critère spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageifs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageifs.htm index d8bf9b9e8c..d9e6cf8ec7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageifs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/averageifs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE.SI.ENS

    La fonction MOYENNE.SI.ENS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et trouver la moyenne de tous les nombres dans une plage de cellules en fonction de plusieurs critères.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/base.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/base.htm index c1e9eb67e7..8477711e6d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/base.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/base.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BASE

    La fonction BASE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre en une représentation de texte avec la base donnée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besseli.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besseli.htm index daf305deb4..d4148de713 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besseli.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besseli.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BESSELI

    La fonction BESSELI est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la fonction de Bessel modifiée, qui est équivalente a la fonction de Bessel évaluée pour des arguments purement imaginaires.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselj.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselj.htm index a137aaa887..7afb71fa50 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselj.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselj.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BESSELJ

    La fonction BESSELJ est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la fonction de Bessel.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselk.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselk.htm index b45b433322..7b71cec1e2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselk.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/besselk.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BESSELK

    La fonction BESSELK est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la fonction de Bessel modifiée, qui est équivalente aux fonctions de Bessel évaluées pour des arguments purement imaginaires.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bessely.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bessely.htm index 0c8f3be0de..411d41d0b5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bessely.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bessely.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BESSELY

    La fonction BESSELY est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la fonction de Bessel, également appelée fonction de Weber ou fonction de Neumann.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-dist.htm index c426ede45d..2024e2a156 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BETA.N

    La fonction LOI.BETA.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution bêta.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-inv.htm index 45fbcd89da..b1a35f8b33 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/beta-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BETA.INVERSE.N

    La fonction BETA.INVERSE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'inverse de la fonction de densité de probabilité cumulative bêta (BETA.DIST).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betadist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betadist.htm index 36a5b1c3a2..79692c351b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betadist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betadist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BETA

    La fonction LOI.BETA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la fonction de densité de probabilité bêta cumulative.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betainv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betainv.htm index b8365b7b37..93ea4ba8ca 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betainv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/betainv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BETA.INVERSE

    La fonction BETA.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'inverse de la fonction de densité de probabilité bêta cumulative pour une distribution bêta donnée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2dec.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2dec.htm index 86a283ac31..203f86ec79 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2dec.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2dec.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BINDEC

    La fonction BINDEC est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre binaire en un nombre décimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2hex.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2hex.htm index 6464774767..1b0861e6f9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2hex.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2hex.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BINHEX

    La fonction BINHEX est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre binaire en un nombre hexadécimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2oct.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2oct.htm index 9c3fa673fd..ab9cd30c20 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2oct.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bin2oct.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BINOCT

    La fonction BINOCT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre binaire en un nombre octal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist-range.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist-range.htm index 064e82e011..3fcc5fa481 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist-range.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist-range.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.SERIE

    La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.SERIE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la probabilité d'un résultat d'essai en utilisant une distribution binomiale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist.htm index 6594879395..0431066652 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.N

    La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité d'une variable aléatoire discrète suivant la loi binomiale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-inv.htm index f67663e3ac..fa21572bc0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binom-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la plus petite valeur pour laquelle la distribution binomiale cumulative est supérieure ou égale à une valeur de critère.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binomdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binomdist.htm index 3b635c0d9e..75cbc50e52 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binomdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/binomdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BINOMIALE

    La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité d'une variable aléatoire discrète suivant la loi binomiale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitand.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitand.htm index cfa885bd60..18a9d2849f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitand.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitand.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BITET

    La fonction BITET est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le ET bit-à-bit de deux nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitlshift.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitlshift.htm index 50946279e9..c8ad57c5b1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitlshift.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitlshift.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BITDECALG

    La fonction BITDECALG est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer un nombre décalé à gauche du nombre de bits spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitor.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitor.htm index 6a4a006aa2..fe54bfd4be 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitor.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitor.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BITOU

    La fonction BITOU est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le OU bit-à-bit de deux nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitrshift.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitrshift.htm index 7834ff74f1..5ed09e4452 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitrshift.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitrshift.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BITDECALD

    La fonction BITDECALD est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer un nombre décalé à droite du nombre de bits spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitxor.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitxor.htm index 7d7dc77e58..b89c0b75c8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitxor.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/bitxor.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BITOUEXCLUSIF

    La fonction BITOUEXCLUSIF est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le OU exclusif bit-à-bit de deux nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-math.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-math.htm index d2b684cf28..e4a57da840 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-math.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-math.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PLAFOND.MATH

    La fonction PLAFOND.MATH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre à l'excès à l'entier ou au multiple significatif le plus proche.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-precise.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-precise.htm index 507e353c7e..3ea852c877 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-precise.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling-precise.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PLAFOND.PRECIS

    La fonction PLAFOND.PRECIS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre à l'excès à l'entier ou au multiple significatif le plus proche. Le nombre est toujours arrondi à l'excès indépendamment de son signe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling.htm index e23a915a43..94f68ac597 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ceiling.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PLAFOND

    La fonction PLAFOND est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre au multiple le plus proche de l'argument de précision.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/char.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/char.htm index 257d4e430b..eeef9591c0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/char.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/char.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CAR

    La focntion CAR est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le caractère ASCII déterminé par un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chidist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chidist.htm index 1c7586bfd8..0d777095e5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chidist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chidist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.KHIDEUX

    La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité à droite de la distribution du khi-carré.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chiinv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chiinv.htm index 2d76fdd427..9828e9084b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chiinv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chiinv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction KHIDEUX.INVERSE

    La fonction KHIDEUX.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la probabilité à droite de la distribution du khi-carré.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist-rt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist-rt.htm index 0eb359c434..390360db1d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist-rt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist-rt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.DROITE

    La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.DROITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité à droite de la distribution du khi-carré.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist.htm index 28284b8afc..e426045970 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.N

    La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution du khi-carré.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv-rt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv-rt.htm index d4f3df9f5c..17c2c1502c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv-rt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv-rt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE.DROITE

    La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE.DROITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la probabilité à droite de la distribution du khi-carré.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv.htm index fb61117898..c37cd0ef43 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la probabilité à gauche de la distribution du khi-carré.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-test.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-test.htm index 4f0e61eff7..5873dad2ea 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-test.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chisq-test.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHISQ.TEST

    La fonction CHISQ.TEST est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Il est utilisé pour retourner le test d'indépendance, la valeur de la distribution du khi-deux (χ2) pour la statistique et les degrés de liberté appropriés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chitest.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chitest.htm index 1068bb32f3..dc2827d33b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chitest.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chitest.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEST.KHIDEUX

    La fonction TEST.KHIDEUX est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Il est utilisé pour retourner le test d'indépendance, la valeur de la distribution du khi-deux (χ2) pour la statistique et les degrés de liberté appropriés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choose.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choose.htm index 97b01237dc..0b7d9cb1df 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choose.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choose.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHOISIR

    La fonction CHOISIR est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une valeur à partir d'une liste de valeurs à la base d'un indice spécifié (position).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choosecols.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choosecols.htm index 0a10bc2a8b..5562961237 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choosecols.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/choosecols.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHOISIRCOLS

    La fonction CHOISIRCOLS est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction renvoie les colonnes à partir d'une matrice ou d'une référence.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chooserows.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chooserows.htm index f3e7544176..3f1ca92d8e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chooserows.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/chooserows.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHOISIRLIGNES

    La fonction CHOISIRLIGNES est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction renvoie les lignes à partir d'une matrice ou d'une référence.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/clean.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/clean.htm index 96bd2513f3..f48c1e3db4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/clean.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/clean.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EPURAGE

    La focntion EPURAGE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour supprimer tous les caractères de contrôle d'une chaîne sélectionnée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/code.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/code.htm index 2e05bcabcc..cfab1d39e0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/code.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/code.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CODE

    La focntion CODE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur ASCII d'un caractère déterminé ou d'un premier caractère dans la cellule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/column.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/column.htm index ea704341e4..a72aebee1b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/column.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/column.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COLONNE

    La fonction COLONNE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro de colonne d'une cellule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/columns.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/columns.htm index 9ccceeaf96..edd875d406 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/columns.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/columns.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COLONNES

    La fonction COLONNES est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de colonnes dans une référence de cellule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combin.htm index 51450524b5..d4971a5560 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMBIN

    La fonction COMBIN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de combinaisons pour un certain nombre d'éléments.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combina.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combina.htm index a0522ea27d..73e3effca8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combina.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/combina.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMBINA

    La fonction COMBINA est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de combinaisons(avec répétitions) pour un certain nombre d'éléments.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/complex.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/complex.htm index 36987cb94a..a618b39713 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/complex.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/complex.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE

    La fonction COMPLEXE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir une partie réelle et une partie imaginaire en un nombre complexe exprimé sous la forme a+ bi ou a + bj.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concat.htm index 2a0671957d..ea0c059205 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concat.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CONCAT

    La fonction CONCAT est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour combiner les données de deux ou plusieurs cellules en une seule. Cette fonction remplace la fonction CONCATENATE.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concatenate.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concatenate.htm index b61ae7c0ae..dc3ee0387f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concatenate.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/concatenate.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CONCATENER

    La fonction CONCATENER est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour combiner les données de deux ou plusieurs cellules en une seule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-norm.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-norm.htm index a5e83a4ac3..263a27871e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-norm.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-norm.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.NORMAL

    La fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.NORMAL est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'intervalle de confiance pour une moyenne de population en utilisant une distribution binomiale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-t.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-t.htm index 05d447b619..fa6364d577 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-t.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence-t.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.STUDENT

    La fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.STUDENT est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'intervalle de confiance pour une moyenne de population, en utilisant la distribution en T de Student.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence.htm index 7b3b27a5b9..ed5c8cd294 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/confidence.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE

    La fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'intervalle de confiance.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/convert.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/convert.htm index 70857f07af..85b811b385 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/convert.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/convert.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CONVERT

    La fonction CONVERT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre d’une unité de mesure à une autre. Par exemple, la CONVERT peut traduire un tableau de distances en miles en un tableau de distances en kilomètres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/correl.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/correl.htm index 5d9fe06de3..a6d3de9f58 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/correl.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/correl.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION

    La fonction COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer le coefficient de corrélation entre deux séries de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cos.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cos.htm index d955eff339..8298f7a681 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cos.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cos.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COS

    La fonction COS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le cosinus de l'angle spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cosh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cosh.htm index 7695d77856..c1a239bf65 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cosh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cosh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COSH

    La fonction COSH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le cosinus hyperbolique d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cot.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cot.htm index 750c104be4..9a9fb7aeb0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cot.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cot.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COT

    La fonction COT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cotangente d'un angle spécifié en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coth.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coth.htm index cc048fb178..2e37c1667b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coth.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coth.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COTH

    La fonction COTH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cotangente hyperbolique d'un angle hyperbolique.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/count.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/count.htm index 3e8941e9d0..464a710a39 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/count.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/count.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB

    La fonction NB est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées qui contiennent des nombres en ignorant les cellules vides ou avec du texte.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/counta.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/counta.htm index c304c9f262..360b989560 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/counta.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/counta.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NBVAL

    La fonction NBVAL est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de cellules et compter le nombre de cellules qui ne sont pas vides.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countblank.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countblank.htm index 3b57791697..bfd6186510 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countblank.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countblank.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.VIDE

    La fonction NB.VIDE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser una plage de cellules et renvoyer le nombre de cellules vides.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countif.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countif.htm index b1e5f718b6..e02843ca9a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countif.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countif.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.SI

    La fonction NB.SI est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées à la base du critère spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countifs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countifs.htm index 062f26424d..6c0323b0cb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countifs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/countifs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.SI.ENS

    La fonction NB.SI.ENS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées en fonction de critères multiples.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaybs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaybs.htm index c141c0ccdc..1fdf8fb0ae 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaybs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaybs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC

    La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le nombre de jours depuis le début de la période de coupon jusqu'à la date de règlement.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdays.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdays.htm index 7f945d91b9..beaf88d477 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdays.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdays.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.JOURS.COUPONS

    La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPONS est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le nombre de jours dans la période de coupon comprenant la date de règlement.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaysnc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaysnc.htm index 8296f566d8..a270d6d55b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaysnc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupdaysnc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV

    La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le nombre de jours entre la date de règlement et le prochain paiement du coupon.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupncd.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupncd.htm index 46c92495e3..229bdab57d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupncd.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupncd.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DATE.COUPON.SUIV

    La fonction DATE.COUPON.SUIV est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la date du coupon suivant après la date de règlement.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupnum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupnum.htm index e6dd8856cc..385ce10ed2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupnum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/coupnum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.COUPONS

    La fonction NB.COUPONS est l'une des fonctions financières. Il est utilisé pour calculer le nombre de coupons entre la date de règlement et la date d'échéance.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/couppcd.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/couppcd.htm index 069dc17a2d..b1c3fd0b4f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/couppcd.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/couppcd.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DATE.COUPON.PREC

    La fonction DATE.COUPON.PREC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la date du coupon précédent avant la date de règlement.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covar.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covar.htm index 371718dd25..c6a5276c27 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covar.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covar.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COVARIANCE

    La fonction COVARIANCE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la covariance de deux plages de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-p.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-p.htm index c3d51d781c..f37edb7fad 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-p.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-p.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COVARIANCE.PEARSON

    La fonction COVARIANCE.PEARSON est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la covariance de population, la moyenne des produits des écarts pour chaque paire de points de données dans deux ensembles de données; utilisez la covariance pour déterminer la relation entre deux ensembles de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-s.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-s.htm index 4510ebe648..76e02458ed 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-s.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/covariance-s.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COVARIANCE.STANDARD

    La fonction COVARIANCE.STANDARD est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la covariance de l'échantillon, la moyenne des produits des écarts pour chaque paire de points de données dans deux ensembles de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/critbinom.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/critbinom.htm index c7f936112a..8883796ad2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/critbinom.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/critbinom.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE

    La fonction CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur plus petite pour laquelle la distribution binomiale cumulée est supérieure ou égale à la valeur alpha spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csc.htm index fc538e8ad3..d57cf529af 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CSC

    La fonction CSC est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cosécante d'un angle spécifié en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csch.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csch.htm index 50ec897f10..87d552552c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csch.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/csch.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CSCH

    La fonction CSCH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cosécante hyperbolique d'un angle spécifié en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumipmt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumipmt.htm index 9760ad4421..b5fc628d2f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumipmt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumipmt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CUMUL.INTER

    La fonction CUMUL.INTER est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer l'intérêt cumulé payé sur un investissement entre deux périodes en fonction d'un taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumprinc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumprinc.htm index a0dfee4c27..a78cfb02b8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumprinc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/cumprinc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CUMUL.PRINCPER

    La fonction CUMUL.PRINCPER est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le capital cumulé payé sur un investissement entre deux périodes en fonction d'un taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/date.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/date.htm index d6d91f7b6b..5153352624 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/date.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/date.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DATE

    La fonction DATE est l'une des fonctions de date et d’heure. Elle est utilisée pour ajouter des dates au format par défaut jj/MM/aaaa.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datedif.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datedif.htm index d5d202f6db..71ff134e0b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datedif.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datedif.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DATEDIF

    La fonction DATEDIF est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la defférence entre deux dates (start-date et end-date) à la base d'un intervalle (unité) spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datevalue.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datevalue.htm index abdace49dd..065d9268ea 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datevalue.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/datevalue.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DATEVAL

    La fonction DATEVAL est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Il est utilisé pour renvoyer le nombre de série de la date déterminée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/daverage.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/daverage.htm index 74f8787234..55ea65fa56 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/daverage.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/daverage.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDMOYENNE

    La fonction BDMOYENNE est l'une des fonctions de base de données. Elle est utilisée pour faire la moyenne des valeurs dans un champ(colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/day.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/day.htm index 94180e1517..d56631866d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/day.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/day.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction JOUR

    La fonction JOUR est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie le jour (un nombre de 1 à 31) de la date indiquée au format numérique (jj/MM/aaaa par défaut).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days.htm index 156354153a..7273082f93 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction JOURS

    La fonction JOURS est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Est utilisé pour retourner le nombre de jours entre deux dates.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days360.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days360.htm index b687c87985..167ef461cc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days360.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/days360.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction JOURS360

    La fonction JOURS360 est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de jours entre deux dates (start-date et end-date) à la base d'une année de 360 jours en utilisant un des modes de calcul (américain ou européen).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/db.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/db.htm index c2328afaeb..95c78c1f69 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/db.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/db.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DB

    La fonction DB est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la dépréciation d'un actif pour une période comptable spécifiée en utilisant la méthode du solde fixe-dégressif.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcount.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcount.htm index c84e3d9178..8a6e7a1b43 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcount.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcount.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BCOMPTE

    La fonction BCOMPTE est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour compter les cellules contenant des nombres dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcounta.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcounta.htm index ded23b8b68..4bb7acfd40 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcounta.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dcounta.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDNBVAL

    La fonction BDNBVAL est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour compter les cellules non vides (les valeurs logiques et le texte sont également comptés) dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ddb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ddb.htm index fad089f596..ad866c7d2c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ddb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ddb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DDB

    La fonction DDB est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la dépréciation d'un actif pour une période comptable donnée en utilisant la méthode du solde dégressif double.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2bin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2bin.htm index e4961154fe..a8fe3a0216 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2bin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2bin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DECBIN

    La fonction DECBIN est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre décimal en un nombre binaire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2hex.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2hex.htm index 99aaa76f12..aa7ef355e4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2hex.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2hex.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DECHEX

    La fonction DECHEX est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre décimal en un nombre hexadécimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2oct.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2oct.htm index 3e9a06e259..af261fb72b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2oct.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dec2oct.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DECOCT

    La fonction DECOCT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre décimal en un nombre octal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/decimal.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/decimal.htm index d1abe7af78..05ffca5727 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/decimal.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/decimal.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DECIMAL

    La fonction DECIMAL est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Il est utilisé pour convertir une représentation textuelle d'un nombre dans une base donnée en un nombre décimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/degrees.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/degrees.htm index 103d58a29b..383766c840 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/degrees.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/degrees.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DEGRES

    La focntion DEGRES est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir les radians en degrés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/delta.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/delta.htm index a39c51f1d4..eac144445c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/delta.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/delta.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DELTA

    La fonction DELTA est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Il est utilisé pour tester si deux nombres sont égaux. La fonction renvoie 1 si les nombres sont égaux et 0 sinon.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/devsq.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/devsq.htm index c584e8164e..29fb221297 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/devsq.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/devsq.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS

    La fonction SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et calculer la somme des carrés des déviations des nombres de leur moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dget.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dget.htm index a55f058881..81dcc4eb6f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dget.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dget.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDLIRE

    La fonction BDLIRE est l'une des fonctions de base de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire une seule valeur d'une colonne d'une liste ou d'une base de données qui correspond aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/disc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/disc.htm index ea64f16fb8..fc0b65851d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/disc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/disc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE

    La fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le taux d'actualisation d'un titre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmax.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmax.htm index 60e4cea29b..65b333e891 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmax.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmax.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDMAX

    La fonction BDMAX est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le plus grand nombre dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspond aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmin.htm index 87cfb2db86..0296fcce1d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dmin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDMIN

    La fonction BDMIN est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le plus petit nombre dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspond aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollar.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollar.htm index b83c2cf2c8..458bdcf81e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollar.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollar.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DEVISE

    La focntion DEVISE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre dans le texte en utilisant le format monétaire $#.##.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarde.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarde.htm index 96d3f0a274..f602ba19f7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarde.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarde.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.DEC

    La fonction PRIX.DEC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un prix en dollars représenté sous forme de fraction en un prix en dollars représenté par un nombre décimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarfr.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarfr.htm index c3b8dde69e..3e8d252cc8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarfr.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dollarfr.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.FRAC

    La fonction PRIX.FRAC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un prix en dollars représenté par un nombre décimal en un prix en dollars représenté sous forme de fraction.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dproduct.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dproduct.htm index 5d39ee2538..57d2679c96 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dproduct.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dproduct.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDPRODUIT

    La fonction BDPRODUIT est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour multiplier les valeurs dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/drop.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/drop.htm index 9d183b75d8..3c71927734 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/drop.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/drop.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EXCLURE

    La fonction EXCLURE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Sert à exclure des lignes ou des colonnes du début ou de la fin.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdev.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdev.htm index c6bebf7784..7d06d87321 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdev.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdev.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDECARTYPE

    La fonction BDECARTYPE est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour estimer l'écart-type d'une population en fonction d'un échantillon en utilisant les numéros d'un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdevp.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdevp.htm index eb7aea37aa..8f3b1ec31a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdevp.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dstdevp.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDECARTYPEP

    La fonction BDECARTYPEP est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour calculer l'écart-type d'une population basée sur la population entière en utilisant les nombres dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dsum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dsum.htm index 647bab712d..c25779aae4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dsum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dsum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDSOMME

    La fonction BDSOMME est l'une des fonctions de base de données. Elle est utilisée pour ajouter les numéros dans un champ(colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/duration.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/duration.htm index 6284121787..89e3fcbbe5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/duration.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/duration.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DUREE

    La fonction DUREE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la duration de Macaulay d'un titre avec une valeur nominale de 100 $.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvar.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvar.htm index 801a5ab95b..5da867346d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvar.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvar.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDVAR

    La fonction BDVAR est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour estimer la variance d'une population en fonction d'un échantillon en utilisant les numéros d'un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvarp.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvarp.htm index 3637080168..ad4fd48574 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvarp.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/dvarp.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction BDVARP

    La fonction BDVARP est l'une des fonctions de bases de données. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la variance d'une population basée sur la population entière en utilisant les nombres dans un champ (colonne) d'enregistrements dans une liste ou une base de données qui correspondent aux conditions que vous spécifiez.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ecma-ceiling.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ecma-ceiling.htm index d6c80a5838..e167797102 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ecma-ceiling.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ecma-ceiling.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ECMA.PLAFOND

    La fonction ECMA.PLAFOND est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre au multiple le plus proche de l'argument de précision. Les nombres négatifs sont arrondis à zéro.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/edate.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/edate.htm index 3a9e656526..96c1a3d097 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/edate.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/edate.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOIS.DECALER

    La fonction MOIS.DECALER est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro de série de la date qui vient le nombre de mois spécifié (month-offset) avant ou après la date déterminée (start-date).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/effect.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/effect.htm index 037ccaa8ba..0eb5667ac3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/effect.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/effect.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX.EFFECTIF

    La fonction TAUX.EFFECTIF est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle sert à calculer le taux d'intérêt annuel effectif d'un titre en fonction d'un taux d'intérêt annuel nominal déterminé et du nombre de périodes de composition par année.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/eomonth.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/eomonth.htm index 4c650848ce..1077be7e0b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/eomonth.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/eomonth.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FIN.MOIS

    La fonction FIN.MOIS est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro de série du dernier jour du mois qui vient le nombre de mois spécifié avant ou après la date déterminée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf-precise.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf-precise.htm index f8f852f395..493bb90205 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf-precise.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf-precise.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ERF.PRECIS

    La fonction ERF.PRECIS est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la fonction d'erreur intégrée entre 0 et la limite inférieure spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf.htm index 35ae81ebd3..b20e0fe124 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erf.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ERF

    La fonction ERF est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Il est utilisé pour calculer la fonction d'erreur intégrée entre les limites inférieure et supérieure spécifiées.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc-precise.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc-precise.htm index 17b0155f47..91ee53a9ff 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc-precise.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc-precise.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ERFC.PRECIS

    La fonction ERFC.PRECIS est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la fonction d'erreur complémentaire intégrée entre la limite inférieure et l'infini.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc.htm index c3b927d76b..ade6a0f809 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/erfc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ERFC

    La fonction ERFC est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la fonction d'erreur complémentaire intégrée entre la limite inférieure et l'infini.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/error-type.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/error-type.htm index 764ce36303..5644939212 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/error-type.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/error-type.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TYPE.ERREUR

    La fonction TYPE.ERREUR est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer un nombre correspondant à un type d'erreur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/even.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/even.htm index c80c02b2fd..b3ab7afb7e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/even.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/even.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PAIR

    La fonction PAIR est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir un nombre au nombre entier pair immédiatement supérieur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exact.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exact.htm index 7b56f95713..ea789793e2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exact.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exact.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EXACT

    La focntion EXACT est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour comparer les données de deux cellules. La fonction renvoie vrai (TRUE) si les données sont identiques, et faux (FALSE) dans le cas contraire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exp.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exp.htm index 87d7c6b022..725c925795 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exp.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/exp.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EXP

    La fonction EXP est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la constante e élevée à la puissance désirée. La constante e est égale à 2,71828182845904.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expand.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expand.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1f8535e380 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expand.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + Fonction EXPAND + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Fonction EXPAND

    +

    La fonction EXPAND appartient aux fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction permet d'agrandir la plage de données (le tableau) en insérant des lignes et des colonnes.

    +

    Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau.

    +

    Le syntaxe de la fonction EXPAND:

    +

    =EXPAND(tableau, lignes, [colonnes], [pad_width])

    +

    où:

    +

    tableau est la plage de cellules à agrandir,

    +

    lignes est le nombre de lignes dans le tableau renvoyé, Bien qu'il s'agisse d'un argument obligatoire, s'il est omis, les lignes ne seront pas ajoutées et on doit indiquer le nombre de colonnes.

    +

    [colonnes] est un argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de colonnes à renvoyer. Si cet argument est omis, les colonnes ne seront pas ajoutées et on doit indiquer le nombre de lignes.

    +

    [pad_with] est la valeur avec laquelle on va remplir les cellules ajoutées. #N/A est la valeur par défaut.

    +

    Pour appliquer la fonction EXPAND,

    +
      +
    1. sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
      2. +
    2. + cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu,
      ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, +
      3. +
    3. sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste,
      4. +
    4. cliquez sur la fonction EXPAND,
      5. +
    5. insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules,
      6. +
    6. appuyez sur la touche Entrée.
      7. +
    +

    Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie.

    +

    Fonction EXPAND

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expon-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expon-dist.htm index 3f4cde3f06..ff692c885b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expon-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expon-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE.N

    La fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une distribution exponentielle.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expondist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expondist.htm index 0fd1c4db44..8560fcb7af 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expondist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/expondist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE

    La fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une distribution exponentielle.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist-rt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist-rt.htm index 770bb02fc1..17f6dbb5be 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist-rt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist-rt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.F.DROITE

    La fonction LOI.F.DROITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Il est utilisé pour renvoyer la distribution de probabilité F(droite), ou degré de diversité, pour deux ensembles de données. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour déterminer si deux ensembles de données ont des degrés de diversité différents.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist.htm index 30c5e4a4f0..05aef573f1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.F.N

    La fonction LOI.F.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution de probabilité F. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour déterminer si deux ensembles de données ont des degrés de diversité différents.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv-rt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv-rt.htm index 84bc133d93..05b63fd787 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv-rt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv-rt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INVERSE.LOI.F.DROITE

    La fonction INVERSE.LOI.F.DROITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution de probabilité F (droite). La distribution F peut être utilisée dans un test F qui compare le degré de variabilité dans deux ensembles de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv.htm index ef51a8c25c..acc77f8a9e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INVERSE.LOI.F.N

    La fonction INVERSE.LOI.F.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution de probabilité F (droite). La distribution F peut être utilisée dans un test F qui compare le degré de variabilité dans deux ensembles de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-test.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-test.htm index 1ceaafc989..c18eadbb1c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-test.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/f-test.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction F.TEST

    La fonction F.TEST est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le résultat d’un test F, la probabilité bilatérale que les variances des arguments matrice1 et matrice2 ne présentent pas de différences significatives. Utilisez cette fonction pour comparer les variances de deux échantillons.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fact.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fact.htm index 83a12fee90..7b102611ae 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fact.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fact.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FACT

    La fonction FACT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la factorielle d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/factdouble.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/factdouble.htm index a07f1d6767..7aae643c71 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/factdouble.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/factdouble.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FACTDOUBLE

    La fonction FACTDOUBLE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la factorielle double d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/false.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/false.htm index 849afe7532..99e9ee597e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/false.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/false.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FAUX

    La fonction FAUX est l'une des fonctions logiques. La fonction renvoie la valeur logique faux (FAUX) et n'exige aucun argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fdist.htm index 93013151b1..30fff17952 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.F

    La fonction LOI.F est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Il est utilisé pour renvoyer la distribution de probabilité F(droite), ou degré de diversité, pour deux ensembles de données. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour déterminer si deux ensembles de données ont des degrés de diversité différents.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/filter.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/filter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2581535750 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/filter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + Fonction FILTRE + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Fonction FILTRE

    +

    La fonction FILTRE appartient aux fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction permet de filtrer une plage de données et renvoyer les résultats qui répondent aux critères spécifiés. La fonction FILTRE extrait uniquement les données nécessaires et les résultats sont mis à jour lorsque les données source changent.

    +

    Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau.

    +

    Le syntaxe de la fonction FILTRE:

    +

    =FILTRE(tableau; inclure; [si_vide])

    +

    où:

    +

    tableau est la plage de cellules à trier.

    +

    inclure est le critère de filtrage qui est une matrice booléenne (VRAI/FAUX) de la même hauteur (colonnes) et la même largeur (lignes) que le tableau.

    +

    [si_vide] est la valeur à renvoyer lorsqu'il n'y a pas de résulats à renvoyer. C'est un argument facultatif.

    +

    Pour appliquer la fonction FILTRE,

    +
      +
    1. sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
      2. +
    2. + cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu,
      ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, +
      3. +
    3. sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste,
      4. +
    4. cliquez sur la fonction FILTRE,
      5. +
    5. insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules,
      6. +
    6. appuyez sur la touche Entrée.
      7. +
    +

    Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie.

    +

    Fonction FILTRE

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/find.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/find.htm index 2b5827a21b..0800f11eef 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/find.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/find.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TROUVE/TROUVERB

    La focntion TROUVE/TROUVERB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour trouver une sous-chaîne déterminée (string-1) à l'intérieure d'une chaîne (string-2). La fonction TROUVE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que TROUVERB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/findb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/findb.htm index b5c2b9865f..be468ba93f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/findb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/findb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TROUVE/TROUVERB

    La focntion TROUVE/TROUVERB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour trouver une sous-chaîne déterminée (string-1) à l'intérieure d'une chaîne (string-2). La fonction TROUVE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que TROUVERB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/finv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/finv.htm index 5b491ea08f..b757e3da10 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/finv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/finv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INVERSE.LOI.F

    La fonction INVERSE.LOI.F est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution de probabilité F (droite). La distribution F peut être utilisée dans un test F qui compare le degré de variabilité dans deux ensembles de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisher.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisher.htm index 73c6438878..644fb29f87 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisher.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisher.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FISHER

    La fonction FISHER est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une transformation Fisher d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisherinv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisherinv.htm index fbdac9706f..63a490f2f2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisherinv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fisherinv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FISHER.INVERSE

    La fonction FISHER.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour effectuer une transformation inversée de Fisher.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fixed.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fixed.htm index 30687e6dd3..38b0e3d092 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fixed.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fixed.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CTXT

    La focntion CTXT est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la représentation textuelle d'un nombre arrondi au nombre de décimales déterminé.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-math.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-math.htm index d933a60d83..689c924f4b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-math.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-math.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PLANCHER.MATH

    La fonction PLANCHER.MATH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre par défaut à l'entier ou au multiple significatif le plus proche.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-precise.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-precise.htm index e9842691ab..07ec07761f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-precise.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor-precise.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PLANCHER.PRECIS

    La fonction PLANCHER.PRECIS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre par défaut à l'entier ou au multiple significatif le plus proche. Le nombre est toujours arrondi par défaut indépendamment de son signe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor.htm index b2e761930a..30f0f8cc64 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/floor.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PLANCHER

    La fonction PLANCHER est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre au multiple le plus proche de signification.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-confint.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-confint.htm index 37748b3b68..90d10851cb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-confint.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-confint.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PREVISION.ETS.CONFINT

    La fonction PREVISION.ETS.CONFINT est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner un intervalle de confiance pour la prévision à la date cible spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-seasonality.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-seasonality.htm index b0817fa354..8ba13e2032 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-seasonality.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-seasonality.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PREVISION.ETS.CARACTERESAISONNIER

    La fonction PREVISION.ETS.CARACTERESAISONNIER est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la durée du modèle de répétition détecté par application pour la série chronologique spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-stat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-stat.htm index 9ecefd31a6..711467cd99 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-stat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets-stat.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PREVISION.ETS.STAT

    La fonction PREVISION.ETS.STAT est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une valeur statistique suite à la prévision de la série chronologique. Le type statistique indique quelle statistique est requise par cette fonction.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets.htm index 17cde64a30..89adcf6f35 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-ets.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PREVISION.ETS

    La fonction PREVISION.ETS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour prédire une valeur future en fonction des valeurs existantes (historiques) à l’aide de la version AAA de l’algorithme de lissage exponentiel (Exponential Smoothing, ETS).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-linear.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-linear.htm index a9381492de..423f4e81de 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-linear.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast-linear.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PREVISION.LINEAIRE

    La fonction PREVISION.LINEAIRE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer, ou prédire, une valeur future en utilisant des valeurs existantes; la valeur prédite est une valeur y pour une valeur x donnée. Les valeurs connues sont des valeurs x et des valeurs y existantes, et la nouvelle valeur est prédite en utilisant une régression linéaire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast.htm index d16ee9acdd..ae66950adf 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/forecast.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PREVISION

    La fonction PREVISION est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour prédire une valeur future à la base des valeurs existantes fournies.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/formulatext.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/formulatext.htm index d07325010b..15b5099aa1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/formulatext.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/formulatext.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FORMULETEXTE

    La fonction FORMULETEXTE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une formule en tant que chaîne (c'est-à-dire la chaîne de texte affichée dans la barre de formule si vous sélectionnez la cellule contenant la formule).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/frequency.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/frequency.htm index a79b2bbce5..4b3a5a402c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/frequency.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/frequency.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FREQUENCE

    La fonction FREQUENCE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la fréquence de la présence des valeurs dans une plage de cellules sélectionnée et afficher la première valeur de la matrice de nombres renvoyée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ftest.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ftest.htm index 1459451de4..27f355b959 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ftest.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ftest.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEST.F

    La fonction TEST.F est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le résultat d’un test F. Un test F renvoie la probabilité bilatérale que les variances des arguments matrice1 et matrice2 ne présentent pas de différences significatives. Utilisez cette fonction pour comparer les variances de deux échantillons.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fv.htm index 6e12a975ff..0b6d3e3e6b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VC

    La fonction VC est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur future d'un investissement à la base du taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fvschedule.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fvschedule.htm index b1d69076b0..d815d87c17 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fvschedule.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/fvschedule.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VC.PAIEMENTS

    La fonction VC.PAIEMENTS est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur future d'un investissement à la base d'une série de taux d'intérêt changeants.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-dist.htm index 7f15353469..d5eae2b776 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.GAMMA.N

    La fonction LOI.GAMMA.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-inv.htm index 1f4689b8c7..8001e3b872 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE.N

    La fonction LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution cumulative gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma.htm index 4f34eefc7f..27d21a19f9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gamma.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction GAMMA

    La fonction GAMMA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la valeur de la fonction gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammadist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammadist.htm index 39f7376acc..973111ecd0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammadist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammadist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.GAMMA

    La fonction LOI.GAMMA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammainv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammainv.htm index 2eaf26527a..133411a40a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammainv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammainv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution cumulative gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln-precise.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln-precise.htm index 8b347d0de2..3d729d707c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln-precise.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln-precise.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LNGAMMA.PRECIS

    La fonction LNGAMMA.PRECIS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le logarithme népérien de la fonction Gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln.htm index 1778a74d79..f46a1c3917 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gammaln.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LNGAMMA

    La fonction LNGAMMA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le logarithme népérien de la fonction Gamma.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gauss.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gauss.htm index 7c1abd3b12..e7620efbd0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gauss.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gauss.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction GAUSS

    La fonction GAUSS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la probabilité qu'un membre d'une population normale standard se situe entre la moyenne et les écarts-types z de la moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gcd.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gcd.htm index c182e04ec6..68a186e631 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gcd.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gcd.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PGCD

    La fonction PGCD est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le plus grand dénominateur commun de deux ou plusieurs nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/geomean.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/geomean.htm index 179de9c6e0..f487450ccb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/geomean.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/geomean.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE

    La fonction MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la moyenne géométrique d'une série de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gestep.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gestep.htm index 7a20019112..06ab0f43ec 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gestep.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/gestep.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SUP.SEUIL

    La fonction SUP.SEUIL est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour tester si un nombre est supérieur à une valeur de seuil. La fonction renvoie 1 si le nombre est supérieur ou égal à la valeur de seuil et 0 sinon.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/harmean.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/harmean.htm index f553efebe4..0655e391ba 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/harmean.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/harmean.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE

    La fonction MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la moyenne harmonique d'une série de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2bin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2bin.htm index 68e6b8f8e4..809a79a5a3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2bin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2bin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction HEXBIN

    La fonction HEXBIN est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre hexadécimal en binaire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2dec.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2dec.htm index f628013038..648be61473 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2dec.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2dec.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction HEXDEC

    La fonction HEXDEC est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre hexadécimal en nombre décimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2oct.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2oct.htm index cefffe89db..9cdb498a27 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2oct.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hex2oct.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction HEXOCT

    La fonction HEXOCT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre hexadécimal en octal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hlookup.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hlookup.htm index 938efed95c..7a6929c2d2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hlookup.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hlookup.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RECHERCHEH

    La fonction RECHERCHEH est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour effectuer la recherche horizontale d'une valeur dans la ligne supérieure d'un tableau ou renvoyer la valeur dans la même colonne à la base d'un numéro d'index de la ligne spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hour.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hour.htm index 38458271a2..e559b700ac 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hour.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hour.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction HEURE

    La fonction HEURE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie l'heure (nombre de 0 à 23) de la valeur de l'heure.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hstack.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hstack.htm index 0429668f44..f94b45874b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hstack.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hstack.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ASSEMB.H

    La fonction ASSEMB.H est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction retourne un tableau assemblant horizontalement plusieurs tableaux.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hyperlink.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hyperlink.htm index 78ea880925..3886948c11 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hyperlink.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hyperlink.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LIEN_HYPERTEXTE

    La fonction LIEN_HYPERTEXTE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour créer un raccourci qui saute à un autre emplacement dans le classeur actuel ou ouvre un document stocké sur un serveur réseau, un intranet ou internet.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeom-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeom-dist.htm index 180b93f67b..c3779cae60 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeom-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeom-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE.N

    La fonction LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité d'une variable aléatoire discrète suivant une loi hypergéométrique.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeomdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeomdist.htm index 7d3a65b958..601cfaec40 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeomdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/hypgeomdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE

    La fonction LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité d'une variable aléatoire discrète suivant une loi hypergéométrique.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/if.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/if.htm index 6de7ab01e3..d282852add 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/if.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/if.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SI

    La fonction SI est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle sert à analyser une expression logique et renvoyer une valeur si elle est vraie ( TRUE ) et une autre valeur si elle est fausse ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iferror.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iferror.htm index 5502b41a0b..d533de851e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iferror.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iferror.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SIERREUR

    La fonction SIERREUR est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier s'il y a une erreur dans le premier argument de la formule. La fonction renvoie le résultat de la formule s'il n'y a pas d'erreur, ou la valeur_si_erreur si une formule génère une erreur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifna.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifna.htm index b041faccb9..9f1bac260a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifna.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifna.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SI.NON.DISP

    La fonction SI.NON.DISP est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier s'il y a une erreur dans le premier argument de la formule. La fonction renvoie la valeur que vous spécifiez si la formule renvoie la valeur d'erreur #N/A, sinon renvoie le résultat de la formule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifs.htm index dbc99c42e6..223eb63d31 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ifs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SI.CONDITIONS

    La fonction SI.CONDITIONS est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier si une ou plusieurs conditions sont remplies et renvoie une valeur correspondant à la première condition VRAI.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imabs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imabs.htm index ba89217180..766a717a30 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imabs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imabs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.MODULE

    La fonction COMPLEXE.MODULE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur absolue d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imaginary.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imaginary.htm index d880360cf3..c666edd289 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imaginary.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imaginary.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.IMAGINAIRE

    La fonction COMPLEXE.IMAGINAIRE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la partie entière du nombre complexe spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imargument.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imargument.htm index 810bf86246..1564155152 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imargument.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imargument.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.ARGUMENT

    La fonction COMPLEXE.ARGUMENT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'argument Theta, un angle exprimé en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imconjugate.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imconjugate.htm index e7ccf82494..3ca33be414 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imconjugate.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imconjugate.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.CONJUGUE

    La fonction COMPLEXE.CONJUGUE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le conjugué complexe d’un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcos.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcos.htm index 67347bd1a0..3c9e3a474c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcos.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcos.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.COS

    La fonction COMPLEXE.COS est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le cosinus d’un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcosh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcosh.htm index 2745598716..e57041aed2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcosh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcosh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.COSH

    La fonction COMPLEXE.COSH est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le cosinus hyperbolique d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcot.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcot.htm index 7e18cffcb0..4af16e454e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcot.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcot.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.COT

    La fonction COMPLEXE.COT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cotangente d’un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsc.htm index 6d78f760ab..cfa811d234 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.CSC

    La fonction COMPLEXE.CSC est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cosécante d’un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsch.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsch.htm index 91fd404567..f5ac7b8b00 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsch.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imcsch.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.CSCH

    La fonction COMPLEXE.CSCH est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la cosécante hyperbolique d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imdiv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imdiv.htm index ce452bd191..250387d058 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imdiv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imdiv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.DIV

    La fonction COMPLEXE.DIV est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le quotient de deux nombres complexes exprimés en forme x + yi ou x + yj.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imexp.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imexp.htm index 129495bc47..81aaf49954 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imexp.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imexp.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.EXP

    La fonction COMPLEXE.EXP est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la constante e élevée à la puissance spécifiée par un nombre complexe. La constante e est égale à 2,71828182845904.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imln.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imln.htm index 3cd66aa885..d328ece9d3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imln.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imln.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.LN

    La fonction COMPLEXE.LN est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le logarithme naturel d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog10.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog10.htm index d53adb8cb6..750af5c0b9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog10.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog10.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.LOG10

    La fonction COMPLEXE.LOG10 est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le logarithme en base 10 d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog2.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog2.htm index 81890debb2..b3ec3696ed 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog2.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imlog2.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.LOG2

    La fonction COMPLEXE.LOG2 est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le logarithme en base 2 d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/impower.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/impower.htm index b8a5f02fc3..76d25a6830 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/impower.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/impower.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.PUISSANCE

    La fonction COMPLEXE.PUISSANCE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le résultat d'un nombre complexe élevé à la puissance désirée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/improduct.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/improduct.htm index cee5772943..64d0fc4a1d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/improduct.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/improduct.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.PRODUIT

    La fonction COMPLEXE.PRODUIT est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le produit des nombres complexes spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imreal.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imreal.htm index f567670538..ea7951dd04 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imreal.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imreal.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.REEL

    La fonction COMPLEXE.REEL est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la partie entière du nombre complexe spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsec.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsec.htm index f0e3ba7a5d..9806c2d242 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsec.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsec.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.SEC

    La fonction COMPLEXE.SEC est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la sécante d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsech.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsech.htm index f69e0bdcd0..086826b8d4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsech.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsech.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.SECH

    La fonction COMPLEXE.SECH est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la sécante hyperbolique d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsin.htm index 2c56f73255..8df4f8124c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.SIN

    La fonction COMPLEXE.SIN est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le sinus d’un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsinh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsinh.htm index a0eb260302..15d8233c5f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsinh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsinh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.SINH

    La fonction COMPLEXE.SINH est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le sinus hyperbolique d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsqrt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsqrt.htm index 266d8171db..3f14598b38 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsqrt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsqrt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.RACINE

    La fonction COMPLEXE.RACINE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la racine carrée d'un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsub.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsub.htm index 1c3f5004f6..86aa06948b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsub.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsub.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.DIFFERENCE

    La fonction COMPLEXE.DIFFERENCE est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la différence de deux nombres complexes exprimés sous la forme x + yi ou x + yj.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsum.htm index ca3ba65373..07b18cb767 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imsum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.SOMME

    La fonction COMPLEXE.SOMME est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la somme des nombres complexes spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imtan.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imtan.htm index fdfbce675e..768b753429 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imtan.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/imtan.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COMPLEXE.TAN

    La fonction COMPLEXE.TAN est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la tangente d’un nombre complexe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/index.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/index.htm index 077e70c89c..da2d074078 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/index.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/index.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INDEX

    La fonction INDEX est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une valeur dans une plage de cellules sur la base d'un numéro de ligne et de colonne spécifié. La fonction INDEX a deux formes.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/indirect.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/indirect.htm index 6296ffb8fc..da190cb44c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/indirect.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/indirect.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INDIRECT

    La fonction INDIRECT est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la référence à une cellule en fonction de sa représentation sous forme de chaîne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/int.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/int.htm index 8e2cd378c7..e8682c4c22 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/int.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/int.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ENT

    La fonction ENT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser et renvoyer la partie entière du nombre spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intercept.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intercept.htm index 355a0b49ad..c119bbbb5c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intercept.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intercept.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ORDONNEE.ORIGINE

    La fonction ORDONNEE.ORIGINE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser les valeurs de la première matrice et de la deuxième pour calculer le point d'intersection.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intrate.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intrate.htm index 85a8965229..6f90451a9f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intrate.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/intrate.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX.INTERET

    La fonction TAUX.INTERET est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle sert à calculer le taux d'intérêt d'un titre entièrement investi qui ne rapporte des intérêts à l'échéance.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ipmt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ipmt.htm index 77726d8284..b94de12107 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ipmt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ipmt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INTPER

    La fonction INTPER est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le paiement d'intérêts pour un investissement basé sur un taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/irr.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/irr.htm index bb8ed87f2c..b89b53167d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/irr.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/irr.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TRI

    La fonction TRI est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le taux de rendement interne d'une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isblank.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isblank.htm index 433e8c4c77..30230b42b6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isblank.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isblank.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTVIDE

    La focntion ESTVIDE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier si la cellule est vide ou non. Si la cellule ne contient pas de valeur, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserr.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserr.htm index dd776c897a..2fe614e0e0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserr.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserr.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTERR

    La fonction ESTERR est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur d'erreur. Si la cellule contient une valeur d'erreur (à l'exception de #N/A), la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserror.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserror.htm index 742e8a54c2..b592624d3a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserror.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iserror.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTERREUR

    La fonction ESTERREUR est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur d'erreur. Si la cellule contient une des valeurs d'erreur : #N/A, #VALEUR!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NOMBRE!, #NOM? ou #NUL!, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iseven.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iseven.htm index c724a61fd2..85d581ff14 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iseven.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iseven.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EST.PAIR

    La fonction EST.PAIR est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur paire. Si la cellule contient une valeur paire, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ). Si la valeur est impaire, elle renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isformula.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isformula.htm index b8a3387dbf..b3b5425be7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isformula.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isformula.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTFORMULE

    La fonction ESTFORMULE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier s'il existe une référence à une cellule contenant une formule. Si la cellule contient une formule, la fonction renvoie vrai (TRUE), sinon la fonction renvoie faux (FALSE).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/islogical.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/islogical.htm index a91c0c0561..419b8ce033 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/islogical.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/islogical.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTLOGIQUE

    La fonction ESTLOGIQUE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur logique (TRUE ou FALSE). Si la cellule contient une valeur logique, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isna.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isna.htm index a6b7b201bf..02f00158b8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isna.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isna.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTNA

    La fonction ESTNA est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une erreur #N/A. Si la cellule contient une valeur d'erreur #N/A, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnontext.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnontext.htm index 13ef811fff..1d7a9e7654 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnontext.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnontext.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTNONTEXTE

    La fonction ESTNONTEXTE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier si une valeur ne correspond pas au texte. Si la cellule ne contient pas une valeur de texte, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnumber.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnumber.htm index 227d54b0b9..89a4a34a0d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnumber.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isnumber.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTNUM

    La fonction ESTNUM est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur numérique. Si la cellule contient une valeur numérique, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iso-ceiling.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iso-ceiling.htm index 89e3b6baef..a7110e507d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iso-ceiling.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/iso-ceiling.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ISO.PLAFOND

    La fonction ISO.PLAFOND est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre à l'excès à l'entier ou au multiple significatif le plus proche. Le nombre est toujours arrondi à l'excès indépendamment de son signe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isodd.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isodd.htm index 3d69049446..54d88ed092 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isodd.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isodd.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EST.IMPAIR

    La fonction EST.IMPAIR est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur impaire. Si la cellule contient une valeur impaire, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ). Si la valeur est paire elle renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isoweeknum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isoweeknum.htm index 271489a1dc..552a0d4375 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isoweeknum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isoweeknum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NO.SEMAINE.ISO

    La fonction NO.SEMAINE.ISO est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro ISO de la semaine de l'année pour une date donnée. Renvoie un nombre entre 1 et 54.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ispmt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ispmt.htm index 9e3c303ea2..efd40c4f31 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ispmt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ispmt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ISPMT

    La fonction ISPMT est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le paiement d'intérêts pour une période déterminée d'un investissement basé sur un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isref.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isref.htm index 7398e409ba..79c1d07937 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isref.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/isref.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTREF

    La fonction ESTREF est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une référence.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/istext.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/istext.htm index 4d62458edb..a28f99d227 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/istext.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/istext.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ESTTEXTE

    La fonction ESTTEXTE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier une valeur de texte. Si la cellule contient une valeur de texte, la fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ), sinon la fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/kurt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/kurt.htm index f456c8741f..44ab7eb397 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/kurt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/kurt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction KURTOSIS

    La fonction KURTOSIS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le kurtosis d'une série de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/large.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/large.htm index 26285d8150..ff53847001 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/large.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/large.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction GRANDE.VALEUR

    La fonction GRANDE.VALEUR est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de cellules et renvoyer la k-ième plus grande valeur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lcm.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lcm.htm index 17444a8d41..9d82a6be42 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lcm.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lcm.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PPCM

    La fonction PPCM est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le plus petit dénominateur commun de deux ou plusieurs nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/left.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/left.htm index 17ae0dc269..d531a68961 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/left.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/left.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction GAUCHE/GAUCHEB

    La focntion GAUCHE/GAUCHEB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire la sous-chaîne de la chaîne spécifiée à partir du caractère gauche. La fonction GAUCHE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que GAUCHEB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/leftb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/leftb.htm index 01f9e72477..18515803f7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/leftb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/leftb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction GAUCHE/GAUCHEB

    La focntion GAUCHE/GAUCHEB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire la sous-chaîne de la chaîne spécifiée à partir du caractère gauche. La fonction GAUCHE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que GAUCHEB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/len.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/len.htm index 4866e99be4..8155a5e919 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/len.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/len.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NBCAR/LENB

    La focntion NBCAR/LENB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une chaîne de caractères et renvoyer leur nombre. La fonction NBCAR est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que LENB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lenb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lenb.htm index a19aecaeee..e3f0f5c30a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lenb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lenb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NBCAR/LENB

    La focntion NBCAR/LENB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une chaîne de caractères et renvoyer leur nombre. La fonction NBCAR est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que LENB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ln.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ln.htm index 8d69b0bd86..6243ed9b45 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ln.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ln.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LN

    La fonction LN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le logarithme naturel d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log.htm index 39699937b1..e0e6a37221 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOG

    La fonction LOG est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le logarithme d'un nombre à la base spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log10.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log10.htm index 9dc63e7886..eac1c3e11f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log10.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/log10.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOG10

    La fonction LOG10 est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le logarithme en base 10 d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/logest.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/logest.htm index 32a2440e10..4b42a0a73c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/logest.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/logest.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOGREG

    La fonction LOGREG est l'une des fonctions statistiques. La fonction LOGREG calcule une courbe exponentielle qui correspond à vos données et renvoie une matrice de valeurs qui décrivent la courbe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/loginv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/loginv.htm index 83795e4266..2cf26be122 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/loginv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/loginv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la fonction de distribution de x suivant une loi lognormale cumulée en utilisant les paramètres spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-dist.htm index cfdce30c7b..0a2f206875 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.N

    La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la distribution log-normale de x, où ln() est normalement distribué avec les paramètres mean et standard-dev.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-inv.htm index 0e05489bc3..bf01b5c3ee 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognorm-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE.N

    La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'inverse de la fonction de distribution log-normale de x, où ln() est normalement distribué avec les paramètres mean et standard-dev.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognormdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognormdist.htm index 89d4d649d0..1be8651f36 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognormdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lognormdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE

    La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser les données logarythmiquement trqnsformées et renvoyer la fonction de distribution de x suivant une loi lognormale cumulée en utilisant les paramètres spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lookup.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lookup.htm index cefe72ea69..6895d6b042 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lookup.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lookup.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RECHERCHE

    La fonction RECHERCHE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une valeur à partir d'une plage sélectionnée (ligne ou colonne contenant les données dans l'ordre croissant).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lower.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lower.htm index 5b5046fc0b..6949ef8c17 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lower.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/lower.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MINUSCULE

    La fonction MINUSCULE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour convertir des majuscules en minuscules dans la cellule sélectionnée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/match.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/match.htm index da2b24f397..7f2acf6179 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/match.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/match.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EQUIV

    La fonction EQUIV est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une position relative d'un élément spécifié dans une plage de cellules.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/max.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/max.htm index 4ddfbff58a..a95d60bf55 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/max.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/max.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MAX

    La fonction MAX est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus grand nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxa.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxa.htm index 618054e669..3da3e4f1ee 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxa.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxa.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MAXA

    La fontion MAXA est l'une des functions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la plus grande valeur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxifs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxifs.htm index b0d328a02b..e677cdb85e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxifs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/maxifs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MAX.SI.ENS

    La fonction MAX.SI.ENS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur maximale parmi les cellules spécifiées par un ensemble donné de conditions ou de critères.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mdeterm.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mdeterm.htm index e2a4546af0..c999d8a33d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mdeterm.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mdeterm.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DETERMAT

    La fonction DETERMAT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le déterminant d'une matrice.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mduration.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mduration.htm index b69c7c267e..ad0be59f5d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mduration.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mduration.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DUREE.MODIFIEE

    La fonction DUREE.MODIFIEE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la duration de Macaulay modifiée d'un titre avec une valeur nominale de 100 $.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/median.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/median.htm index 00060b5b83..1b2f81ef55 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/median.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/median.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MEDIANE

    La fonction MEDIANE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur médiane de la liste d'arguments.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mid.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mid.htm index 3c6bf84723..58109f1173 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mid.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mid.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction STXT/MIDB

    La fonction STXT/MIDB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire les caractères de la chaîne déterminée à partir de n'importe quelle position. La fonction STXT est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que MIDB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/midb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/midb.htm index 3f34d1da90..13403aa0d5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/midb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/midb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction STXT/MIDB

    La fonction STXT/MIDB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire les caractères de la chaîne déterminée à partir de n'importe quelle position. La fonction STXT est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que MIDB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/min.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/min.htm index b2bc7af37e..a0a0a618c0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/min.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/min.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MIN

    La fonction MIN est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et de trouver le plus petit nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mina.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mina.htm index 07cecc597b..956710a24a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mina.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mina.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MINA

    La fonction MINA est l'une des functions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la plus petite valeur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minifs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minifs.htm index 84b5f7c878..07b08c74aa 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minifs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minifs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MIN.SI.ENS

    La fonction MIN.SI.ENS est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur minimale parmi les cellules spécifiées par un ensemble donné de conditions ou de critères.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minute.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minute.htm index c74df619f5..3641f9cff3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minute.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minute.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MINUTE

    La fonction MINUTE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie les minutes (un nombre de 0 à 59) correspondant à une valeur d'heure.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minverse.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minverse.htm index 773731dc96..03856a6c20 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minverse.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/minverse.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction INVERSEMAT

    La fonction INVERSEMAT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la matrice inversée de la matrice donnée et afficher la première valeur de la matrice de nombres renvoyée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mirr.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mirr.htm index ca87216fe0..d43426156f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mirr.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mirr.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TRIM

    La fonction TRIM est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le taux de rendement interne d'une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mmult.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mmult.htm index e8c262b17f..4467bfbbab 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mmult.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mmult.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRODUITMAT

    La fonction PRODUITMAT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le produit de deux matrices et afficher la première valeur de la matrice de nombres renvoyée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mod.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mod.htm index 44a78de69c..795318ab0a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mod.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mod.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOD

    La fonction MOD est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le reste de la division de l'argument nombre par l'argument diviseur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-mult.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-mult.htm index 8d3a49d531..8a4392e45b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-mult.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-mult.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MODE.MULTIPLE

    La fonction MODE.MULTIPLE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur la plus fréquente ou répétitive dans un tableau ou une plage de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-sngl.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-sngl.htm index 3976cdd50a..bb78fa2f8d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-sngl.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode-sngl.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MODE.SIMPLE

    La fonction MODE.SIMPLE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur la plus fréquente ou répétitive dans un tableau ou une plage de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode.htm index a44695e6af..bf876f80a0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mode.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MODE

    La fonction MODE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer la valeur la plus fréquente.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/month.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/month.htm index cb833093ad..28335ab971 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/month.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/month.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOIS

    La fonction MOIS est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie le mois (nombre de 1 à 12) d'une date indiquée au format numérique (jj/MM/aaaa par défault).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mround.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mround.htm index e94b4a8468..b14ffa5d47 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mround.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/mround.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE

    La fonction ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour donner l'arrondi d'un nombre au multiple spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/multinomial.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/multinomial.htm index e2fc7c30c3..de030b9a91 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/multinomial.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/multinomial.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MULTINOMIALE

    La fonction MULTINOMIALE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le rapport de la factorielle de la somme de nombres au produit de factorielles.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/n.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/n.htm index 999db22205..7aa737fa22 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/n.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/n.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction N

    La fonction N est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une valeur convertie en nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/na.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/na.htm index 14c14ab19e..b40c7effae 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/na.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/na.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NA

    La fonction NA est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur d'erreur #N/A. Cette fonction n'exige pas d'argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinom-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinom-dist.htm index e9399aef3e..7df558ec2b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinom-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinom-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG.N

    La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la distribution binomiale négative, la probabilité qu'il y aura Number_f échecs avant le Number_s-ème succès, avec une probabilité de succès Probability_s.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinomdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinomdist.htm index e2fcfe8140..ee3b31210f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinomdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/negbinomdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG

    La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution négative binomiale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays-intl.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays-intl.htm index f9ffb83384..80e3401587 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays-intl.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays-intl.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.JOURS.OUVRES.INTL

    La fonction NB.JOURS.OUVRES.INTL est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le nombre de jours de travail entiers entre deux dates en utilisant des paramètres pour indiquer quels jours et combien de jours sont des jours de week-end.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays.htm index 5520711fdb..f67697f89c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/networkdays.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NB.JOURS.OUVRES

    La fonction NB.JOURS.OUVRES est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de jours ouvrables entre deux dates (start date et end-date) à l'exclusion des week-ends et dates cosidérées comme jours fériés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nominal.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nominal.htm index 6af5315751..bc16cf2cad 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nominal.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nominal.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX.NOMINAL

    La fonction TAUX.NOMINAL est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle sert à calculer le taux d'intérêt annuel nominal d'un titre en fonction d'un taux d'intérêt annuel effectif déterminé et du nombre de périodes de composition par année.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-dist.htm index 543f704d16..420826d9f8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.N

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution normale pour la moyenne spécifiée et l'écart type.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-inv.htm index 935594e3ff..f261bf19eb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE.N

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution cumulative normale pour la moyenne et l'écart-type spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-dist.htm index e53cfb0c23..d447b6c721 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.N

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'inverse de la distribution cumulative normale standard; la distribution a une moyenne de zéro et un écart-type de un.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-inv.htm index 7ceb4b5465..c27337beeb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norm-s-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE.N

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'inverse de la distribution cumulative normale standard; la distribution a une moyenne de zéro et un écart-type de un.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normdist.htm index b2d07b77ec..4a1c45f714 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la distribution normale pour la moyenne spécifiée et l'écart type.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norminv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norminv.htm index 5f0ab26121..63360336a1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norminv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/norminv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution cumulative normale pour la moyenne et l'écart-type spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsdist.htm index a4bb3e79d2..1fa2159da2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la fonction de distribution cumulative normale standard.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsinv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsinv.htm index 0d42f6a009..3f7b92eeb1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsinv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/normsinv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'inverse de la distribution cumulative normale standard.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/not.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/not.htm index be5034e8e3..f954d5dc0e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/not.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/not.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PAS

    La fonction PAS est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est vraie ( TRUE ) ou fausse ( FALSE ). La fonction renvoie vrai ( TRUE ) si l'argument est faux ( FALSE ) et renvoie faux ( FALSE ) si l'argument est vrai ( TRUE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/now.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/now.htm index 854530a942..c9445d7063 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/now.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/now.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MAINTENANT

    La fonction MAINTENANT est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour ajouter la date et l'heure à votre feuille de calcul au format suivant MM/jj/aa hh:mm. Cette fonction n'exige pas d'argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nper.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nper.htm index b951f095be..46664c8870 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nper.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/nper.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NPM

    La fonction NPM est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le nombre de périodes pour un investissement à la base du taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/npv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/npv.htm index 0f12bb0399..380344a8f4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/npv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/npv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VAN

    La fonction VAN est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur nette actuelle d'un investissement à la base d'un taux d'escompte spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/numbervalue.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/numbervalue.htm index 8333e0b3c6..a60b76e2d2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/numbervalue.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/numbervalue.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VALEURNOMBRE

    La fonction VALEURNOMBRE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle sert à convertir le texte en nombre, de manière indépendante des paramètres régionaux. Si le texte à convertir ce n'est pas un nombre, la fonction renvoie l'erreur #VALUE!.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2bin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2bin.htm index cc8dd00739..66f854984c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2bin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2bin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction OCTBIN

    La fonction OCTBIN est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre octal en un nombre binaire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2dec.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2dec.htm index 17e82b0f40..c30c6bd65d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2dec.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2dec.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction OCTDEC

    La fonction OCTDEC est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre octal en un nombre décimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2hex.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2hex.htm index e6e493390f..85998ce4c0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2hex.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oct2hex.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction OCTHEX

    La fonction OCTHEX est l'une des fonctions d'ingénierie. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre octal en un nombre hexadécimal.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/odd.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/odd.htm index 7a011992c3..5edd9a7cec 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/odd.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/odd.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction IMPAIR

    La fonction IMPAIR est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir le nombre au nombre entier impair le plus proche.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfprice.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfprice.htm index 3b9276f6ac..411584de41 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfprice.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfprice.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.PCOUPON.IRREG

    La fonction PRIX.PCOUPON.IRREG est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le prix par valeur nominale de 100$ pour un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques mais qui a une première période impaire (elle est plus courte ou plus longue que les autres périodes).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfyield.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfyield.htm index 47a9cbba05..29eaa56385 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfyield.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddfyield.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction REND.PCOUPON.IRREG

    La fonction REND.PCOUPON.IRREG est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement pour un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques mais qui a une première période impaire (elle est plus courte ou plus longue que les autres périodes).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlprice.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlprice.htm index 2c78ae4b3c..0f65492872 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlprice.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlprice.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.DCOUPON.IRREG

    La fonction PRIX.DCOUPON.IRREG est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le prix par valeur nominale de 100$ pour un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques mais qui a une dernière période impaire (plus courte ou plus longue que les autres périodes).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlyield.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlyield.htm index 70429220b6..ad6f8602f9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlyield.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/oddlyield.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction REND.DCOUPON.IRREG

    La fonction REND.DCOUPON.IRREG est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement d'un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques mais qui a une dernière période impaire(plus courte ou plus longue que les autres périodes).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/offset.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/offset.htm index 991c6ecc73..b03a2cd3e1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/offset.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/offset.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DECALER

    La fonction DECALER est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer une référence à une cellule déplacée de la cellule spécifiée (ou de la cellule supérieure gauche dans la plage de cellules) à un certain nombre de lignes et de colonnes.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/or.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/or.htm index 8ea925a791..54d5527a5b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/or.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/or.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction OU

    La fonction OU est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est vraie (TRUE ) ou fausse (FALSE). La fonction renvoie faux ( FALSE ) si tous les arguments sont faux ( FALSE ).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pduration.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pduration.htm index 0ad8c63f48..36ed206ea3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pduration.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pduration.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PDUREE

    La fonction PDUREE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le nombre de périodes requises pour qu’un investissement atteigne une valeur spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pearson.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pearson.htm index c2a932ac20..69f23349ba 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pearson.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pearson.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PEARSON

    La fonction PEARSON est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le coefficient de corrélation des moments du produit de Pearson.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-exc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-exc.htm index 1576c54ea5..4d23f7c77e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-exc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-exc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CENTILE.EXCLURE

    La fonction CENTILE.EXCLURE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le kème centile des valeurs dans une plage, où k est dans l'intervalle ouvert 0..1.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-inc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-inc.htm index 15dc3ed157..601f15e82d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-inc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile-inc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CENTILE.INCLURE

    La fonction CENTILE.INCLURE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le kème percentile des valeurs dans une plage, où k est compris entre 0..1 inclus.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile.htm index 3fa9c4edb4..85621b0ce3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentile.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CENTILE

    La fonction CENTILE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer le nième centile.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-exc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-exc.htm index 2e1287e09e..f2cbda2517 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-exc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-exc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE.EXCLURE

    La fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE.EXCLURE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le rang d'une valeur dans une série de valeurs en tant qu'un pourcentage(dans l'inervalle ouvert 0..1) de la série.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-inc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-inc.htm index 829784088c..9a47c8b771 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-inc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank-inc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE.INCLURE

    La fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE.INCLURE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le rang d'une valeur dans une série de valeurs en tant qu'un pourcentage(dans l'inervalle fermé 0..1) de la série.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank.htm index 1aa4e1129b..4218cc332c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/percentrank.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE

    La fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le rang d'une valeur dans une série de valeurs en tant que pourcentage de la série.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permut.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permut.htm index b7298239f5..bcb5750f54 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permut.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permut.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PERMUTATION

    La fonction PERMUTATION est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de permutations pour un nombre d'objets spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permutationa.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permutationa.htm index 6929d2c510..ad724011a7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permutationa.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/permutationa.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PERMUTATIONA

    La fonction PERMUTATIONA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle sert à retourner le nombre de permutations pour un nombre donné d'objets (avec des répétitions) qui peuvent être sélectionnés parmi les objets totaux.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/phi.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/phi.htm index 406d97d331..cd5eb38072 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/phi.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/phi.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PHI

    La fonction PHI est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur de la fonction de densité pour une distribution normale standard.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pi.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pi.htm index 13d57c37e6..b1c63848e4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pi.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pi.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PI

    La fonction PI est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle renvoie la valeur 3.14159265358979, la constante mathématique pi. Elle ne prend aucun argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pmt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pmt.htm index 577f3f0576..21f2754eb4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pmt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pmt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VPM

    La fonction VPM est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le montant du paiement d'un emprunt à la base du taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson-dist.htm index d49ae44f60..ec89d61295 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.POISSON.N

    La fonction LOI.POISSON.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la distribution de Poisson; une application courante de la distribution de Poisson est de prédire le nombre d'événements sur une période donnée, comme le nombre de voitures arrivant sur un péage en 1 minute.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson.htm index ebf0b884df..45384c10ba 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/poisson.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.POISSON

    La fonction LOI.POISSON est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité d'une variable aléatoire suivant une loi de Poisson.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/power.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/power.htm index cfc53f2362..013028765d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/power.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/power.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PUISSANCE

    La focntion PUISSANCE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le résultat d'un nombre élevé à la puissance désirée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ppmt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ppmt.htm index 8c350893b1..b402a366ad 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ppmt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ppmt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRINCPER

    La fonction PRINCPER est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le paiement du capital pour un investissement basé sur un taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/price.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/price.htm index 10fb311a0a..6ea0212e39 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/price.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/price.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.TITRE

    La fonction PRIX.TITRE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le prix par valeur nominale de 100 $ pour un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricedisc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricedisc.htm index 79f96c4f7e..fbb2778a8b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricedisc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricedisc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT

    La fonction VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le prix par valeur nominale de 100 $ pour un titre à prix réduit.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricemat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricemat.htm index 03733d05ba..b66ae97865 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricemat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pricemat.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE

    La fonction PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le prix par valeur nominale de 100 $ pour un titre qui paie des intérêts à l'échéance.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/prob.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/prob.htm index 189b61a307..a2aa9554d8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/prob.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/prob.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PROBABILITE

    La fonction PROBABILITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité dont les valeurs se trouvent dans une plage entre les limites inférieure et supérieure.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/product.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/product.htm index 65ea81918b..efa779ab0f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/product.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/product.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRODUIT

    La fonction PRODUIT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour multiplier tous les nombres dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée et renvoyer le produit.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/proper.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/proper.htm index 5498cdcb99..17bebe795b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/proper.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/proper.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NOMPROPRE

    La fonction NOMPROPRE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour convertir le premier caractère de chaque mot en majuscules et tous les autres en minuscules.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pv.htm index 05cbc823e3..34707bde5d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/pv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VA

    La fonction VA est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur actuelle d'un investissement à la base du taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-exc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-exc.htm index f3c2f20c99..4213acdf7e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-exc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-exc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction QUARTILE.EXCLURE

    La fonction QUARTILE.EXCLURE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour envoyer le quartile de l'ensemble de données, basé sur les valeurs de centile de l'intervalle ouvert 0..1.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-inc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-inc.htm index 5303c8de6a..76d155d403 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-inc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile-inc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction QUARTILE.INCLURE

    La fonction QUARTILE.INCLURE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le quartile de l'ensemble de données, en se basant sur les valeurs de centile de l'intervalle fermé 0..1.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile.htm index e6a2113a16..6e6a824acd 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quartile.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction QUARTILE

    La fonction QUARTILE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et renvoyer le quartile.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quotient.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quotient.htm index 74d84c7a36..ed5ad99005 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quotient.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/quotient.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction QUOTIENT

    La fonction QUOTIENT est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la partie entière de la division.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/radians.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/radians.htm index 0408f25504..ec3c44ecbb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/radians.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/radians.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RADIANS

    La fonction RADIANS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir des degrés en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rand.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rand.htm index 96d50c4b37..34fa48be77 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rand.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rand.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ALEA

    La fonction ALEA est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. La fonction renvoie un nombre aléatoire supérieur ou égal à 0 et inférieur à 1. Elle ne prend aucun argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/randbetween.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/randbetween.htm index 9d826e9cfe..d7c54a93e2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/randbetween.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/randbetween.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES

    La fonction ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer un nombre aléatoire supérieur ou égal à lower-bound et inférieur ou égal à upper-bound.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-avg.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-avg.htm index dd55a4d04a..10570323ac 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-avg.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-avg.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE.RANG

    La fonction MOYENNE.RANG est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le rang d'un nombre dans une liste de nombres. Le rang d'un nombre est sa taille par rapport à d'autres valeurs dans une liste (si vous deviez trier la liste, le rang du nombre serait sa position). Si plusieurs valeurs occupent le même rang, le rang moyen est renvoyé.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-eq.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-eq.htm index 2d430c19c5..3d41a6517c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-eq.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank-eq.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction EQUATION.RANG

    La fonction EQUATION.RANG est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le rang d'un nombre dans une liste de nombres. Le rang d'un nombre est sa taille par rapport à d'autres valeurs dans une liste (si vous deviez trier la liste, le rang du nombre serait sa position). Si plusieurs valeur occupent le même rang, le premier rang de cet ensemble de valeurs est renvoyé.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank.htm index 8cdfc28232..1183846078 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rank.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RANG

    La fonction RANG est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner le rang d'un nombre dans une liste de nombres. Le rang d'un nombre est sa taille par rapport à d'autres valeurs dans une liste (si vous deviez trier la liste, le rang du nombre serait sa position).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rate.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rate.htm index 8843f8273e..9736e5575d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rate.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rate.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX

    La fonction TAUX est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le taux d'intérêt d'un investissement basé sur un échéancier de paiement constant.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/received.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/received.htm index c1ef4fa47e..0b351054f0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/received.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/received.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VALEUR.NOMINALE

    La fonction VALEUR.NOMINALE est l'une des fonctions financières. Il est utilisé pour calculer le montant reçu à l'échéance pour un titre entièrement investi.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replace.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replace.htm index 66c94aad39..8650474808 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replace.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replace.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction REMPLACER/REMPLACERB

    La fonction REMPLACER/REMPLACERB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour remplacer un jeu de caractères à la base du nombre de caractères et la position initiale, par un nouveau jeu de caractères. La fonction REMPLACER est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que REMPLACERB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replaceb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replaceb.htm index de8f3881b4..b2476ed45b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replaceb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/replaceb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction REMPLACER/REMPLACERB

    La fonction REMPLACER/REMPLACERB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour remplacer un jeu de caractères à la base du nombre de caractères et la position initiale, par un nouveau jeu de caractères. La fonction REMPLACER est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que REMPLACERB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rept.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rept.htm index 2ca2a5b2a3..5fdb20a246 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rept.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rept.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction REPT

    La fonction REPT est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour remplir une cellule avec plusieurs instances d'une chaîne de texte.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/right.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/right.htm index 4f2401358a..ea673b9952 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/right.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/right.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DROITE/DROITEB

    La fonction DROITE/DROITEB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire une sous-chaîne de la chaîne à partir du caractère droit à la base du nombre de caractères spécifié. La fonction DROITE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que DROITEB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rightb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rightb.htm index 7b7a73e568..e7551d7f3c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rightb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rightb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DROITE/DROITEB

    La fonction DROITE/DROITEB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour extraire une sous-chaîne de la chaîne à partir du caractère droit à la base du nombre de caractères spécifié. La fonction DROITE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que DROITEB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roman.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roman.htm index 9b032245d8..49a768b038 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roman.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roman.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ROMAIN

    La fonction ROMAIN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un nombre en un chiffre romain.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/round.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/round.htm index b5f5545ac1..da33cf9644 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/round.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/round.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ARRONDI

    La fonction ARRONDI est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir un nombre à un nombre de décimales spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rounddown.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rounddown.htm index 728f73f08d..7ef5fe5804 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rounddown.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rounddown.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ARRONDI.INF

    La fonction ARRONDI.INF est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir au-dessous le nombre au nombre de décimales voulu.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roundup.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roundup.htm index a86fc68306..5f6ebb0376 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roundup.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/roundup.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ARRONDI.SUP

    La fonction ARRONDI.SUP est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour arrondir au-dessus le nombre au nombre de décimales voulu.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/row.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/row.htm index 28c279dc25..95fbff47d0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/row.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/row.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LIGNE

    La fonction LIGNE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro de ligne d'une cellule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rows.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rows.htm index 3e5fd99eb2..8376133995 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rows.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rows.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LIGNES

    La fonction LIGNES est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de lignes dans une référence de cellule.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rri.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rri.htm index dc0422106a..4f3b0e1faa 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rri.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rri.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX.INT.EQUIV

    La fonction TAUX.INT.EQUIV est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour retourner un taux d'intérêt équivalent pour la croissance d'un investissement.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rsq.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rsq.htm index d707a04b11..6b7b5cb71f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rsq.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/rsq.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COEFFICIENT.DETERMINATION

    La fonction COEFFICIENT.DETERMINATION est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le carré du coefficient de corrélation des moments du produit de Pearson.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/search.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/search.htm index 70d6792553..84c1135d86 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/search.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/search.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHERCHE/CHERCHERB

    La fonction CHERCHE/CHERCHERB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la position de la sous-chaîne dans la chaîne. La fonction CHERCHE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que CHERCHERB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/searchb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/searchb.htm index d5b2a6ef65..d6121ac360 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/searchb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/searchb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CHERCHE/CHERCHERB

    La fonction CHERCHE/CHERCHERB est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la position de la sous-chaîne dans la chaîne. La fonction CHERCHE est destinée pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à un octet (SBCS), tendis que CHERCHERB est pour les langues qui utilisent un jeu de caractères à deux octets (DBCS) telles que japonais, chinois, coréen etc.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sec.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sec.htm index d99d6d5fb3..1526ca8bff 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sec.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sec.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SEC

    La fonction SEC est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la sécante d'un angle spécifié en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sech.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sech.htm index 63b9f2955d..adcc86a056 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sech.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sech.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SECH

    La fonction SECH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la sécante hyperbolique d'un angle spécifié en radians.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/second.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/second.htm index 68a8486524..84bba24ee2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/second.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/second.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SECONDE

    La fonction SECONDE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie les secondes (un nombre de 0 à 59) d'une valeur de temps.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sequence.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sequence.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e900b135a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sequence.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + Fonction SEQUENCE + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Fonction SEQUENCE

    +

    Fonction SEQUENCE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Cette fonction permet de générer un tableau de nombres séquentiels.

    +

    Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau.

    +

    Le syntaxe de la fonction SEQUENCE:

    +

    =SEQUENCE(lignes;[colonnes];[début];[étape])

    +

    où:

    +

    lignes sert à définir le nombre de lignes à renvoyer.

    +

    colonnes sert à définir le nombre de colonnes à renvoyer.

    +

    début sert à définir le premier nombre de la séquence.

    +

    étape sert à contrôler la valeur ajoutée à chaque valeur ultérieure par l'incrément.

    +

    Pour appliquer la fonction SEQUENCE,

    +
      +
    1. sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
      2. +
    2. + cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction
      de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu,
      ou cliquez sur
      l'icône de la barre de formule, +
      3. +
    3. sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Maths et trigonométrie dans la liste,
      4. +
    4. cliquez sur la fonction SEQUENCE,
      5. +
    5. insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules,
      6. +
    6. appuyez sur la touche Entrée.
      7. +
    +

    Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie.

    +

    SEQUENCE Function

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/seriessum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/seriessum.htm index de46fe753d..021464235e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/seriessum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/seriessum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.SERIES

    La fonction SOMME.SERIES est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la somme d'une série géométrique.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheet.htm index d02b3ce71c..df97287f87 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheet.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FEUILLE

    La fonction FEUILLE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro de feuille d'une feuille de référence.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheets.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheets.htm index e9c7cdef2b..c3f7716521 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheets.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sheets.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FEUILLES

    La fonction FEUILLES est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de feuilles dans une référence.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sign.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sign.htm index 3ccbf84f93..aa69be0109 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sign.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sign.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SIGNE

    La fonction SIGNE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le signe d’un nombre. Si le nombre est positif, la fonction renvoie 1. Si le nombre est négatif, la fonction renvoie -1. Si le nombre est 0, la fonction renvoie 0.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sin.htm index 205808d5ae..7526367be6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SIN

    La fonction SIN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le sinus d'un angle donné.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sinh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sinh.htm index 23019b9d09..25f830e941 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sinh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sinh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SINH

    La fonction SINH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le sinus hyperbolique d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew-p.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew-p.htm index 3a015a6a20..e84d2a8f8b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew-p.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew-p.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE.P

    La fonction COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE.P est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner l'asymétrie d'une distribution basée sur une population: une caractérisation du degré d'asymétrie d'une distribution autour de sa moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew.htm index 5bbe7a4782..8e4ffc0594 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/skew.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE

    La fonction COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et renvoyer l'asymétrie de la distribution de la liste d'arguments.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sln.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sln.htm index cc8d456da0..8803fcfa52 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sln.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sln.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AMORLIN

    La fonction AMORLIN est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la dépréciation d'un actif pour une période comptable en utilisant la méthode d'amortissement linéaire.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/slope.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/slope.htm index 9a05a5ce2b..624b27c157 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/slope.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/slope.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PENTE

    La fonction PENTE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la pente d'une droite de régression linéaire à travers les données dans deux matrices.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/small.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/small.htm index 59c42025c0..ed808aed10 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/small.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/small.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PETITE.VALEUR

    La fonction PETITE.VALEUR est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de cellules et renvoyer la k-ième plus petite valeur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sort.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sort.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0a29058794 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sort.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + Fonction TRIER + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Fonction TRIER

    +

    La fonction TRIER appartient aux fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction est destinée au tri d'une plage de données ou d'un tableau et au renvoi du plage triée.

    +

    Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau.

    +

    Le syntaxe de la fonction TRIER:

    +

    =TRIER(tableau;[index_tri];[ordre_tri];[par_col])

    +

    où:

    +

    tableau est la plage de données à trier.

    +

    [index_tri] est un argument facultatif. C'est le nombre de la colonne ou de la ligne à trier.

    +

    + [ordre_tri] est un argument facultatif. C'est un nombre définissant l'ordre de tri: +

      +
    • 1 ou s'il est omis pour l'ordre croissant (par défaut),
      • +
    • -1 pour l'ordre décroissant,
      • +
    +

    +

    + [par_col] est un argument facultatif. C'est une valeur indiquant la direction de tri: +

      +
    • FAUX ou si elle est omise pour trier les données qui sont organisées verticalement
      • +
    • VRAI pour trier par colonne lorsque vos données sont organisées horizontalement.
      • +
    +

    +

    Pour appliquer la fonction TRIER,

    +
      +
    1. sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
      2. +
    2. + cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu,
      ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, +
      3. +
    3. sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste,
      4. +
    4. cliquez sur la fonction TRIER,
      5. +
    5. insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules,
      6. +
    6. appuyez sur la touche Entrée.
      7. +
    +

    Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie.

    +

    Fonction TRIER

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrt.htm index 91a3daa47d..94d14e2f7b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RACINE

    La fonction RACINE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la racine carrée d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrtpi.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrtpi.htm index 1a3c9b0679..814df682a4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrtpi.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sqrtpi.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RACINE.PI

    La fonction RACINE.PI est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la racine carrée de la constante pi (3.14159265358979) multipliée par le nombre spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/standardize.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/standardize.htm index 9f2053c5cf..526d7aa196 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/standardize.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/standardize.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction CENTREE.REDUITE

    La fonction CENTREE.REDUITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur normalisée de la distribution caractérisée par des paramètres spécifiés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-p.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-p.htm index 1a9107c4dc..b6f70376dc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-p.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-p.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ECARTYPE.PEARSON

    La fonction ECARTYPE.PEARSON est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer l'écart-type basé sur la population entière donnée comme arguments (ignore les valeurs logiques et le texte).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-s.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-s.htm index 32b7392da2..95077c0aa7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-s.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev-s.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ECARTYPE.STANDARD

    La fonction ECARTYPE.STANDARD est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour estimer l'écart-type sur la base d'un échantillon (ignore les valeurs logiques et le texte de l'échantillon).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev.htm index 1c60558b1f..908853c0b7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdev.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ECARTYPE

    La fonction ECARTYPE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer l'écart type de la population à la base d'une série de nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdeva.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdeva.htm index 5d85a2857e..6740ab20cf 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdeva.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdeva.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction STDEVA

    La fonction STDEVA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer l'écart type de la population à la base d'une série de nombres, textes et valeurs logiques (TRUE (VRAI) ou FALSE (FAUX)). La fonction STDEVA considère tout texte et FALSE (FAUX) d'être égal à 0 et TRUE (VRAI) d'être égal à 1.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevp.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevp.htm index 3bda36fe36..b2ce4aea6b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevp.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevp.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ECARTYPEP

    La fonction ECARTYPEP est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer l'écart type de toute une population.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevpa.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevpa.htm index 7a5435e827..166eb7f5f8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevpa.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/stdevpa.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction STDEVPA

    La fonction STDEVPA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer l'écart type de toute une population.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/steyx.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/steyx.htm index fc1dbd572b..ff099fb5b9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/steyx.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/steyx.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ERREUR.TYPE.XY

    La fonction ERREUR.TYPE.XY est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer l'erreur standard de la valeur y prédite pour chaque x dans la ligne de régression.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/substitute.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/substitute.htm index 1fb68e1703..f24a10e81e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/substitute.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/substitute.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SUBSTITUE

    La fonction SUBSTITUE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour remplacer un jeu de caractères par un nouveau.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/subtotal.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/subtotal.htm index 6c07b89e4e..217e3952f6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/subtotal.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/subtotal.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOUS.TOTAL

    La fonction SOUS.TOTAL est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Cette fonction est utilisée pour renvoyer un sous-total dans une liste ou une base de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sum.htm index 3a4253603c..4ff2662251 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME

    La fonction SOMME est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour additionner tous les nombres contenus dans une plage de cellules et renvoyer le résultat.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumif.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumif.htm index 5b8f0937b3..f613891890 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumif.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumif.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.SI

    La fonction SOMME.SI est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour additionner tous les nombres dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée à la base d'un critère déterminé et renvoyer le résultat.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumifs.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumifs.htm index d1e754099f..11840e09df 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumifs.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumifs.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.SI.ENS

    La fonction SOMME.SI.ENS est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour additionner tous les nombres dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée en fonction de plusieurs critères et renvoyer le résultat.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumproduct.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumproduct.htm index abf4334881..2403b17e69 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumproduct.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumproduct.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMMEPROD

    La fonction SOMMEPROD est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour multiplier les valeurs de la plage de cellules sélectionnée ou matrices et renvoyer la somme des produits.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumsq.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumsq.htm index c9fd7e4759..6fd3a2c041 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumsq.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumsq.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.CARRES

    La fonction SOMME.CARRES est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour additionner des carrés des nombres et renvoyer le résultat.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2my2.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2my2.htm index 26ca3e0204..21fca0c904 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2my2.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2my2.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.X2MY2

    La fonction SOMME.X2MY2 est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour additionner la différence des carrés entre deux matrices.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2py2.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2py2.htm index 4d3d7d5037..00189589f7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2py2.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumx2py2.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.X2PY2

    La fonction SOMME.X2PY2 est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour additionner des carrés des nombres des matrices sélectionnées et renvoyer la somme des résultats.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumxmy2.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumxmy2.htm index cf082275cb..c8b7458b8f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumxmy2.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/sumxmy2.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SOMME.XMY2

    La fonction SOMME.XMY2 est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la somme des carrés des différences de deux valeurs correspondantes des matrices.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/switch.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/switch.htm index bc10256e89..7e6807511d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/switch.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/switch.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SI.MULTIPLE

    La fonction SI.MULTIPLE est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour évaluer une valeur (appelée l'expression) par rapport à une liste de valeurs et renvoyer le résultat correspondant à la première valeur correspondante. Si aucune valeur ne correspond, une valeur par défaut est renvoyée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/syd.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/syd.htm index ef1c1bfd4c..369a5066d0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/syd.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/syd.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AMORANN

    La fonction AMORANN est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la dépréciation d'un actif pour une période comptable donnée en utilisant la somme des chiffres de l'année.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-2t.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-2t.htm index 73f9f55780..c634bc3668 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-2t.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-2t.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT.BILATERALE

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT.BILATERALE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Renvoie la distribution bilatérale en T de Student. La distribution en T de Student est utilisée dans le test d'hypothèse de petits ensembles de données d'échantillons. Utilisez cette fonction à la place d'une table de valeurs critiques pour la distribution en T.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-rt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-rt.htm index fe8cd93fd1..bdc88868f5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-rt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist-rt.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT.DROITE

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT.DROITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Renvoie la distribution T de droite de Student. La distribution en T est utilisée dans le test d'hypothèses sur un petit échantillon de données. Utilisez cette fonction à la place d'une table de valeurs critiques pour la distribution en T.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist.htm index 0bfa9dfa9e..ecdd756915 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT.N

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Renvoie la distribution T de gauche de Student. La distribution en T est utilisée dans le test d'hypothèses sur un petit échantillon de données. Utilisez cette fonction à la place d'une table de valeurs critiques pour la distribution en T.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv-2t.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv-2t.htm index f767ddf014..30bc340a5f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv-2t.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv-2t.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.BILATERALE

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.BILATERALE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Renvoie l'inverse de la distribution bilatérale en T de Student.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv.htm index a7ce944dce..fe5b56d568 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-inv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.N

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle renvoie l'inverse de la distribution de gauche en T de Student.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-test.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-test.htm index 708168d0d3..241027e1bd 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-test.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t-test.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction T.TEST

    La fonction T.TEST est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité associée au test en T de Student. Utilisez T.TEST pour déterminer si deux échantillons sont susceptibles de provenir de deux mêmes populations identiques ayant la même moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t.htm index a5b02844c4..e6fab46197 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/t.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction T

    La fonction T est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour vérifier si la valeur dans la cellule (ou utilisée comme argument) c'est un texte ou non. Si ce n'est pas un texte, la fonction renvoie un résultat vide. Si la valeur/argument est un texte, la fonction renvoie la même valeur du texte.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/take.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/take.htm index 05b691c2ef..8ba3876369 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/take.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/take.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRENDRE

    La fonction PRENDRE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction renvoie des lignes ou des colonnes du début ou de la fin du tableau.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tan.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tan.htm index 74c14efe5e..84eb1d1213 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tan.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tan.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAN

    La fonction TAN est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la tangente d'un angle donné.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tanh.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tanh.htm index 159ae0eb59..9f849e9d98 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tanh.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tanh.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TANH

    La fonction TANH est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la tangente hyperbolique d'un nombre.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbilleq.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbilleq.htm index 3a867f162b..21a5c3ccfd 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbilleq.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbilleq.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE.R

    La fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE.R est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement équivalent en obligations d'un bon du Trésor.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillprice.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillprice.htm index d2e41b02f7..8714f5f7a2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillprice.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillprice.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction PRIX.BON.TRESOR

    La fonction PRIX.BON.TRESOR est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le prix par valeur nominale de 100 $ pour un bon du Trésor.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillyield.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillyield.htm index 570d6b092d..a628e38a61 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillyield.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tbillyield.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RENDEMENT.BON.TRESOR

    La fonction RENDEMENT.BON.TRESOR est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement d'un bon du Trésor.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tdist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tdist.htm index d73dd0724b..6da8996bf6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tdist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tdist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Renvoie les points de pourcentage (probabilité) pour la distribution en T de Student où une valeur numérique (x) est une valeur calculée de T pour laquelle les points de pourcentage doivent être calculés. La distribution en T est utilisée dans le test d'hypothèses sur un petit échantillon de données. Utilisez cette fonction à la place d'une table de valeurs critiques pour la distribution en T.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/text.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/text.htm index 755168e697..813269c365 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/text.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/text.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEXTE

    La fonction TEXTE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour convertir une valeur au format spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textafter.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textafter.htm index 2ccc36be80..50a53f59cf 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textafter.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textafter.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEXTE.APRES

    La fonction TEXTE.APRES est l'une des fonctions de données et texte. Cette fonction renvoie le texte qui se trouve après le caractère de délimitation.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textbefore.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textbefore.htm index f174527f8d..9e1da13c4a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textbefore.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textbefore.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEXTE.AVANT

    La fonction TEXTE.AVANTest l'une des fonctions de données et texte. Cette fonction renvoie le texte qui se trouve avant le caractère de délimitation.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textjoin.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textjoin.htm index 2e486ef134..7e3abb8c48 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textjoin.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textjoin.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction JOINDRE.TEXTE

    La fonction JOINDRE.TEXTE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour combiner le texte de plusieurs plages et/ou chaînes, et inclut un délimiteur que vous spécifiez entre chaque valeur de texte qui sera combinée. Si le délimiteur est une chaîne de texte vide, cette fonction concaténera les plages. Cette fonction est similaire à la fonction CONCAT, mais la différence est que la fonction CONCAT ne peut pas accepter un délimiteur.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textsplit.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textsplit.htm index b897332356..4456a66cb3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textsplit.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/textsplit.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FRACTIONNER.TEXTE

    La fonction FRACTIONNER.TEXTE est l'une des fonctions de données et texte. Cette fonction divise le texte en lignes ou en colonnes à l'aide de délimiteurs.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/time.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/time.htm index ffc546d16e..cee76d0414 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/time.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/time.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEMPS

    La fonction TEMPS est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour ajouter l'heure spécifiée au format sélectionnée (hh:mm tt par défaut).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/timevalue.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/timevalue.htm index 8007b9728d..ac736a091c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/timevalue.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/timevalue.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEMPSVAL

    La fonction TEMPSVAL est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le nombre de série d'une valeur de temps.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tinv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tinv.htm index 7202f8d5a9..7365a5d245 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tinv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tinv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE

    La fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Renvoie l'inverse de la distribution bilatérale en T de Student.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tocol.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tocol.htm index 3e9dd87cdb..40c3a0df04 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tocol.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/tocol.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DANSCOL

    La fonction DANSCOL est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction renvoie le tableau dans une seule colonne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/today.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/today.htm index 111b6957ae..9aa9934dcc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/today.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/today.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction AUJOURDHUI

    La fonction AUJOURDHUI est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour ajouter la date actuelle au format MM/jj/aa. Cette fonction n'exige pas d'argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/torow.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/torow.htm index 0507a1c93c..85cd304e3e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/torow.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/torow.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction DANSLIGNE

    La fonction DANSLIGNE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction renvoie le tableau dans une seule ligne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/transpose.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/transpose.htm index 17dfe03602..9649c4d0ae 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/transpose.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/transpose.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TRANSPOSE

    La fonction TRANSPOSE est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le premier élément d'un tableau.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trim.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trim.htm index 6312ca3730..c495760024 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trim.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trim.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SUPPRESPACE

    La fonction SUPPRESPACE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour supprimer des espaces à gauche ou à droite d'une chaîne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trimmean.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trimmean.htm index 7a8a15f635..2b1d269ab4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trimmean.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trimmean.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MOYENNE.REDUITE

    La fonction MOYENNE.REDUITE est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la moyenne de l'intérieur d'un ensemble de données. MOYENNE.REDUITE calcule la moyenne prise en excluant un pourcentage de points de données des queues supérieure et inférieure d'un ensemble de données.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/true.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/true.htm index 68a20d2fd4..87ef4f1c30 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/true.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/true.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VRAI

    La fonction VRAI est l'une des fonctions logiques. La fonction renvoie TRUE (vrai) et n'exige aucun argument.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trunc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trunc.htm index ed30245bc6..0f7ddc52b8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trunc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/trunc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TRONQUE

    La fonction TRONQUE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer un nombre tronqué au nombre de décimales spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ttest.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ttest.htm index 5d8560ee72..ecb0c01020 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ttest.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/ttest.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TEST.STUDENT

    La fonction TEST.STUDENT est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la probabilité associée au test en T de Student. Utilisez TEST.STUDENT pour déterminer si deux échantillons sont susceptibles de provenir de deux mêmes populations identiques ayant la même moyenne.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/type.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/type.htm index 27b6fee7d1..bdc7c9f211 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/type.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/type.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TYPE

    La fonction TYPE est l'une des fonctions d'information. Elle est utilisée pour déterminer le type de la valeur résultante ou affichée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unichar.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unichar.htm index bb471aa5f6..bbd9d3f7f9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unichar.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unichar.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction UNICAR

    La fonction UNICAR est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Est utilisé pour renvoyer le caractère Unicode référencé par la valeur numérique donnée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unicode.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unicode.htm index 8dca5bc527..45f42767bb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unicode.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/unicode.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction UNICODE

    La fonction UNICODE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Est utilisé pour retourner le nombre(valeur d'encodage) correspondant au premier caractère du texte.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/upper.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/upper.htm index 56b0a110e3..cd6d03955f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/upper.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/upper.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction MAJUSCULE

    La fonction MAJUSCULE est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour convertir les minuscules en majuscules dans la cellule sélectionnée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/value.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/value.htm index 7a3984fc0c..3f5a561a5d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/value.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/value.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VALEUR

    La fonction VALEUR est l'une des fonctions de texte et de données. Elle est utilisée pour convertir une valeur de texte représentant un nombre à un nombre. Si le texte à convertir ce n'est pas un nombre, la fonction renvoie l'erreur #VALEUR!.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-p.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-p.htm index 3641ef16ee..e075109bbd 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-p.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-p.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VAR.P.N

    La fonction VAR.P.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la variance sur la base de toute la population(ignore les valeurs logiques et le texte dans la population).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-s.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-s.htm index 612c70a6d1..ab0d3c5f7e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-s.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var-s.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VAR.S

    La fonction VAR.S est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour estimer la variance sur la base d'un échantillon (ignore les valeurs logiques et le texte de l'échantillon).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var.htm index 029df1532c..ad9ddad16d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/var.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VAR

    La fonction VAR est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer la variance de la population à la base d'une série de nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vara.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vara.htm index 830b00cc6a..ef82de153a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vara.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vara.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VARA

    La fonction VARA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer la variance de la population à la base d'une série de nombres.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varp.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varp.htm index 1f93e05272..1c412458c9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varp.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varp.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VAR.P

    La fonction VAR.P est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et calculer la variance de la population totale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varpa.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varpa.htm index 717efd6dc3..4da8d4a424 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varpa.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/varpa.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VARPA

    La fonction VARPA est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de données et renvoyer la variance de la population totale.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vdb.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vdb.htm index b0f69c0d90..891d5a0b28 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vdb.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vdb.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VDB

    La fonction VDB est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la dépréciation d'un actif pour une période comptable spécifiée ou partielle en utilisant la méthode du solde dégressif variable.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vlookup.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vlookup.htm index 93a8e4c490..0017b15d40 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vlookup.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vlookup.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RECHERCHEV

    La fonction RECHERCHEV est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour effectuer la recherche verticale d'une valeur dans la première colonne à gauche d'un tableau et retourner la valeur qui se trouve dans la même ligne à la base d'un numéro d'index de colonne spécifié.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vstack.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vstack.htm index e3dc48ee50..e77707762b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vstack.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/vstack.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ASSEMB.V

    La fonction ASSEMB.V est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction retourne un tableau assemblant verticalement plusieurs tableaux.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weekday.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weekday.htm index a7d49f8eb4..70859a0f48 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weekday.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weekday.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction JOURSEM

    La fonction JOURSEM est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour déterminer le jour de la semaine de la date spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weeknum.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weeknum.htm index 59c1eb0c1d..b03324ca0a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weeknum.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weeknum.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction NO.SEMAINE

    La fonction NO.SEMAINE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer le numéro de la semaine de l'année au cours de laquelle la date déterminée tombe.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull-dist.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull-dist.htm index d009a83643..e4e13b24fd 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull-dist.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull-dist.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.WEIBULL.N

    La fonction LOI.WEIBULL.N est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la distribution de Weibull. Utilisez cette distribution dans une analyse de fiabilité, telle que le calcul du délai moyen de défaillance d'un appareil.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull.htm index dba56bcce3..9ab30f4e47 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/weibull.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction LOI.WEIBULL

    La fonction LOI.WEIBULL est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner la distribution de Weibull. Utilisez cette distribution dans une analyse de fiabilité, telle que le calcul du délai moyen de défaillance d'un appareil.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday-intl.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday-intl.htm index 16e90f214d..5b40507a1f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday-intl.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday-intl.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE.INTL

    La fonction SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE.INTL est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la date avant ou après un nombre spécifié de jours de travail avec des paramètres de week-end personnalisés. Les paramètres de week-ends indiquent combien de jours et lesquels sont comptés dans le week-end.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday.htm index 4b8185487e..1062e65de9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/workday.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE

    La fonction SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la date qui vient le nombre de jours indiqué (day-offset) avant ou après la date déterminée à l'exclusion des week-ends et des dates considérées comme jours fériés.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wrapcols.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wrapcols.htm index 46eda27a0c..d3af197768 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wrapcols.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wrapcols.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ORGA.COLS

    La fonction ORGA.COLS est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction enveloppe un vecteur ligne ou colonne après un nombre spécifié de valeurs.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wraprows.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wraprows.htm index 03577492fa..d6fd5e11dd 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wraprows.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/wraprows.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ORGA.LIGNES

    La fonction ORGA.LIGNES est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction enveloppe un vecteur ligne ou colonne après un nombre spécifié de valeurs.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xirr.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xirr.htm index 6f7ca610dd..5aa04fc31e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xirr.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xirr.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction TRI.PAIEMENTS

    La fonction TRI.PAIEMENTS est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le taux de rendement interne d'une série de flux de trésorerie irréguliers.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xmatch.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xmatch.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..82fdcb0153 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xmatch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + Fonction EQUIVX + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Fonction EQUIVX

    +

    Fonction EQUIVX est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction permet de renvoyer la position relative de l'élément dans un tableau. Par défaut, cette fonction nécessite une correspondance exacte.

    +

    Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau.

    +

    Le syntaxe de la fonction EQUIVX:

    +

    =EQUIVX(valeur_recherche, tableau_recherche, [mode_correspondance], [mode_recherche])

    +

    où:

    +

    valeur_recherche est la valeur à rechercher.

    +

    tableau_recherche est la matrice ou la plage à rechercher.

    +

    + mode_correspondance est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: +

      +
    • 0 (par défaut) renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune n'a été trouvée la #N/A est renvoyée.
      • +
    • -1 renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune information n'a été trouvée, l'élément le plus petit suivant est renvoyé.
      • +
    • 1 renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune information n'a été trouvée, l'élément plus grand suivant est renvoyé.
      • +
    • 2 est une correspondance avec caractère générique.
      • +
    +

    +

    + mode_recherche est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: +

      +
    • 1 la recherche est effectuée à partir du premier élément (valeurnpar défaut).
      • +
    • -1 une recherche inverse est effectuée, c-à-d à partir du dernier élément.
      • +
    • 2 une recherche binaire est effectuée quand le tableau_recherche est triée dans l'ordre croissant. S'il n'est pas trié, des résultats non valides seront renvoyés.
      • +
    • -2 une recherche binaire est effectuée quand le tableau_recherche est triée dans l'ordre décroissant. S'il n'est pas trié, des résultats non valides seront renvoyés.
      • +
    +

    +

    + Des caractères génériques sont (?) le point d'interrogation pour rechercher un seul caractère et (*) l'astérisque pour rechercher plusieurs caractères. Quand vous recherchez le point d'interrogation ou l'astérisque, saisissez un tilde (~) avant le caractère. +

    +

    Pour appliquer la fonction EQUIVX,

    +
      +
    1. sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
      2. +
    2. + cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction
      de la barre d'outils supérieure,
      ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu,
      ou cliquez sur
      l'icône de la barre de formule, +
      3. +
    3. sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste,
      4. +
    4. cliquez sur la fonction EQUIVX,
      5. +
    5. saisissez les arguments requis dans la fenêtre Arguments de la fonction,
      6. +
    6. appuyez sur la touche Entrée.
      7. +
    +

    Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie.

    + +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xnpv.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xnpv.htm index 8dbb3a8ddb..195a9d3a2e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xnpv.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xnpv.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction VAN.PAIEMENTS

    La fonction VAN.PAIEMENTS est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer la valeur actuelle d'un investissement à la base du taux d'intérêt spécifié et d'un échéancier de paiement irréguliers.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xor.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xor.htm index 5398277ec3..8b555d551a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xor.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/xor.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction OUX

    La fonction OUX est l'une des fonctions logiques. Elle est utilisée pour retourner un OU exclusif logique de tous les arguments. La fonction renvoie TRUE lorsque le nombre d'entrées valant TRUE est impair et FALSE lorsque le nombre d'entrées valant TRUE est pair.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/year.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/year.htm index 907ba85513..f52ce370e3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/year.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/year.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction ANNEE

    La fonction ANNEE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie l'année (nombre de 1900 à 9999) du date au format numérique (jj/MM/aaaa par défault).

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yearfrac.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yearfrac.htm index 70ff565a10..d105399c15 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yearfrac.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yearfrac.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction FRACTION.ANNEE

    La fonction FRACTION.ANNEE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la fraction d'une année représentée par le nombre de jours complets à partir de la start-date jusqu'à l'end-date calculé à la base spécifiée.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yield.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yield.htm index 5c4adb2d62..545f36ebee 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yield.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yield.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE

    La fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement d'un titre qui paie des intérêts périodiques.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yielddisc.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yielddisc.htm index 5228401c23..d389d16dd8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yielddisc.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yielddisc.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RENDEMENT.SIMPLE

    La fonction RENDEMENT.SIMPLE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement annuel d'un titre à prix réduit.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yieldmat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yieldmat.htm index f4e5f319cf..5580ca89a4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yieldmat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/yieldmat.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE

    La fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE est l'une des fonctions financières. Elle est utilisée pour calculer le rendement annuel d'un titre qui paie des intérêts à l'échéance.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/z-test.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/z-test.htm index 2866078e01..93a52e5e2a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/z-test.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Functions/z-test.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
    - +

    Fonction Z.TEST

    La fonction Z.TEST est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la valeur de probabilité unilatérale d'un test z. Pour une moyenne de population hypothétique donnée, x, Z.TEST renvoie la probabilité que la moyenne de l'échantillon soit supérieure à la moyenne des observations dans l'ensemble de données(tableau), c'est-à-dire la moyenne de l'échantillon observé.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm index d41e8f7670..22e3af4e4b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - À propos du Tableur + À propos de l'éditeur de classeurs - + @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@
    -

    À propos du Tableur

    -

    Tableur est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des feuilles de calcul dans votre navigateur.

    -

    En utilisant le Tableur, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les feuilles de calcul modifiées en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS.

    +

    À propos de l'éditeur de classeurs

    +

    L'éditeur de classeurs est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des feuilles de calcul dans votre navigateur.

    +

    En utilisant l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les feuilles de calcul modifiées en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS.

    Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel, le numéro de build et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône À propos dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau pour Windows, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme. Dans la version de bureau pour Mac OS, accédez au menu ONLYOFFICE en haut de l'écran et sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos d'ONLYOFFICE.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index e62099f67b..eaa8b04167 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Paramètres avancés du Tableur + Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de classeurs - + @@ -14,94 +14,96 @@
    -

    Paramètres avancés du Tableur

    -

    Tableur vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés....

    -

    Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants :

    +

    Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de classeurs

    +

    L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.

    +

    Les paramètres avancés sont groupés comme suit:

    Édition et enregistrement

    1. Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition.
      2. -
    2. Récupération automatique est utilisée dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les feuilles de calcul en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme.
      3. -
    3. Afficher le bouton "Options de collage" lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu à la feuille de calcul.
      4. +
    4. Récupération automatique - est utilisé dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les feuilles de calcul en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme.
      5. +
    5. Afficher le bouton Options de collage lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu à la feuille de calcul.

    Collaboration

    1. - Le paragraphe Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage préférable des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition de la feuille de calcul. + La rubrique Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage préférable des modifications effectuées lors de la collaboration sur la feuille de calcul.
      • Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition de la feuille de calcul verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs.
        • -
      • Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer
        pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs.
        • +
      • Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront uniquement lorsque vous cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer
        pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs.
      2. -
    2. Activer l'affichage des commentaires. Si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires
      dans la barre latérale gauche.
      3. -
    3. Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus. Cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans la feuille de calcul. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires
      dans la barre latérale gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans la feuille de calcul.
      4. +
    4. Afficher les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs. Cette option permet d'afficher les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs dans une feuille de calcul disponible en lecture seul en mode Lecteur en direct uniquement.
      5. +
    5. Afficher les commentaires dans la feuille. Une fois désactivée, les fragments commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement lorsque vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires
      sur la barre latérale gauche.
      6. +
    6. Afficher les commentaires résolus. Cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans la feuille de calcul. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires
      sur la barre latérale gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans le texte du classeur.

    Espace de travail

    1. L'option Style de référence R1C1 est désactivée et le style de référence A1 est utilisé.

      -

      Lorsque le style de référence A1 est utilisé, les colonnes sont désignées par des lettres et les lignes par des chiffres. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule située dans la rangée 3 et la colonne 2, son adresse affichée dans la case à gauche de la barre de formule ressemble à ceci : B3. Si le style de référence R1C1 est activé, les lignes et les colonnes sont désignées par des numéros. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule à l'intersection de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, son adresse ressemblera à ceci : R3C2. La lettre R indique le numéro de ligne et la lettre C le numéro de colonne.

      -

      Active cell

      -

      Si vous vous référez à d'autres cellules en utilisant le style de référence A1, la référence à une cellule cible est formée en fonction de la distance à partir de la cellule active. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 5 et de la colonne 1 et faites référence à la cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[-2]C[1]. Les chiffres entre crochets désignent la position de la cellule à laquelle vous vous référez par rapport à la position actuelle de la cellule, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes plus haut et 1 colonne à droite de la cellule active. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 1 et de la colonne 2 et que vous vous référez à la même cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[2]C, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes en dessous de la cellule active et dans la même colonne.

      +

      Lorsque le style de référence A1 est utilisé, les colonnes sont désignées par des lettres et les lignes par des chiffres. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule située dans la rangée 3 et la colonne 2, son adresse affichée dans la case à gauche de la barre de formule ressemble à ceci: B3. Si le style de référence R1C1 est activé, les lignes et les colonnes sont désignées par des numéros. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule à l'intersection de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, son adresse ressemblera à ceci: R3C2. La lettre R indique le numéro de ligne et la lettre C le numéro de colonne.

      +

      Cellule active

      +

      Si vous vous référez à d'autres cellules en utilisant le style de référence R1C1, la référence à une cellule cible est formée en fonction de la distance à partir de la cellule active. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 5 et de la colonne 1 et faites référence à la cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[-2]C[1]. Les chiffres entre crochets désignent la position de la cellule à laquelle vous vous référez par rapport à la position actuelle de la cellule, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes plus haut et 1 colonne à droite de la cellule active. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 1 et de la colonne 2 et que vous vous référez à la même cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[2]C, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes en dessous de la cellule active et dans la même colonne.

      2. -
    2. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier est utilisée pour activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt / Option à un raccourci clavier.
      3. +
    3. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier sert à activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt/Option dans raccourcis clavier.
    4. - L'option Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. + Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur.
        -
      • L'option Identique à système rend le thème d'interface de l'éditeur identique à celui de votre système.
        • +
      • L'option Identique à système permet d'utiliser le thème système par l'éditeur.
      • Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour.
      • Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire.
      • Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit.
      • - Le mode Contraste sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. -

        Remarque : En plus des thèmes de l'interface disponibles Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste sombre, il est possible de personnaliser les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en utilisant votre propre couleur de thème. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions.

        + Le mode Contraste élevé sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. +

        Remarque: Outre les thèmes d'interface Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste élevé sombre, il est possible de personnaliser le thème de vos éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions.

    5. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce.
      6. -
    6. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%.
      7. +
    7. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%.
    8. - L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans le Tableur. + L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans l'éditeur de classeurs.
        -
      • Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est-à-dire en utilisant la police de Windows.
        • -
      • Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est-à-dire sans hinting.
        • -
      • Choisissez Natif pour afficher le texte avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices.
        • +
      • Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est à dire en utilisant la police de Windows.
        • +
      • Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est à dire sans hinting.
        • +
      • Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte sera affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices.
      • - Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. -

        Le Tableur gère deux modes de mise en cache :

        + Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. +

        L'éditer de classeurs gère deux modes de mise en cache:

          -
        1. Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante.
          2. -
        2. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc.
          3. +
        3. Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mis en cache comme une image indépendante.
          4. +
        4. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mis en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il y a de mémoire suffisante etc.
        -

        Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé :

        +

        Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé:

          -
        • Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs.
          • -
        • Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs.
          • +
        • Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs.
          • +
        • Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs.
    9. - L'option Réglages macros s'utilise pour définir l'affichage des macros avec notification. + L'option Réglages macros sert à désactiver toutes les macros avec notification.
        -
      • Choisissez Désactivez tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans la feuille de calcul.
        • -
      • Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans la feuille de calcul.
        • -
      • Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans la feuille de calcul.
        • +
      • Choisissez Désactiver tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans votre feuille de calcul.
        • +
      • Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans une feuille de calcul.
        • +
      • Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans votre feuille de calcul.
      -
      10. +

    Paramètres régionaux

    1. L'option Langage de formule est utilisée pour sélectionner la langue d'affichage et de saisie des noms de formules, des noms et des descriptions d'arguments. -

      Langage de formule est disponible dans 32 langues :

      -

      Allemand, Anglais, Biélorusse, Bulgare, Catalan, Chinois, Coréen, Danois, Espagnol, Finnois, Français, Grec, Hongrois, Indonésien, Italien, Japonais, Laotien, Letton, Norvégien, Néerlandais, Polonais, Portugais, Portugais (Brésil), Roumain, Russe, Slovaque, Slovène, Suédois, Tchèque, Turc, Ukrainien, Vietnamien.

      +

      Les formules sont pris en charge dans 33 langues:

      +

      Allemand, anglais, arménien, bulgare, catalan, chinois, danois, espagnol, finnois, français, grec, hongrois, indonésien, italien, japonais, coréen, lao, letton, norvégien, néerlandais, polonais, portugais (Brésil), portugais (Portugal), roumain, russe, slovaque, slovène, suédois, tchèque, turc, ukrainien, vietnamien.

      2. -
    2. L'option Paramètres régionaux est utilisée pour sélectionner le format d'affichage par défaut pour la devise, la date et l'heure.
      3. +
    3. L'option Région est utilisée pour sélectionner le format d'affichage par défaut pour la devise, la date et l'heure.
      4. +
    4. Régions disponibles: Azerbaïdjan (Azerbaïdjan), bulgare (Bulgarie), tchèque (République tchèque), danois (Danemark), allemand (Autriche), allemand (Allemagne), allemand (Suisse), grec (Grèce), anglais (Australie), anglais (Royaume-Uni), anglais (USA), espagnol (Espagne), espagnol (Mexique), finnois (Finlande), français (France), français (Suisse), italien (Italie), italien (Suisse), japonais (Japon), coréen (Corée), letton (Lettonie), hongrois (Hongrie), néerlandais (Pays-Bas), polonais (Pologne), portugais (Brésil), portugais (Portugal), russe (Russie), slovaque (Slovaquie), slovène (République de Slovénie), suédois (Finlande), suédois (Suède), turc (Turquie), ukrainien (Ukraine), vietnamien (Viêt Nam), chinois (Chine), taïwanais (Taïwan).
    5. L'option Utiliser des séparateurs basés sur les paramètres régionaux est activée par défaut, les séparateurs correspondront à la région définie. Afin de définir les séparateurs personnalisés, désactivez cette option et saisissez les séparateurs requis dans les champs Séparateur décimal et Séparateur de milliers.
    @@ -110,14 +112,14 @@

    Vérification

  • L'option Langue du dictionnaire est utilisée afin de sélectionner le dictionnaire préféré pour la vérification de l'orthographe.
  • Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe.
  • Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe.
    • -
  • Le menu Options d'auto-correction... permet d'accéder aux paramètres d'auto-correction tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc.
    • +
  • Le menu Options de correction automatique permet d'accéder aux paramètres de correction automatique tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc.
    • -

    Calcul en cours

    +

    Calcul

    1. L'option Utiliser le calendrier depuis 1904 permet de calculer les dates à partir du 1er janvier 1904 comme point de départ. Elle peut être utile lorsque vous travaillez avec des feuilles de calcul créées dans la version MS Excel 2008 pour Mac ou des versions antérieures de MS Excel pour Mac.
    -

    Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer.

    +

    Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm index 1c9e38c0da..e9941a8e44 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@
    - +

    Collaborer sur des feuilles de calcul en temps réel

    -

    Tableur permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la feuille de calcul nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure.

    -

    Dans le Tableur il y a deux modes de collaborer sur des feuilles de calcul en temps réel : Rapide et Strict.

    -

    Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes depuis Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure :

    +

    L'éditeur de classeurs permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la feuille de calcul nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure.

    +

    Dans l'éditeur de classeurs il y a deux modes de collaborer sur des feuilles de calcul en temps réel : Rapide et Strict.

    +

    Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes depuis la section Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure :

    Menu Mode de co-édition

    Le nombre d'utilisateurs qui travaillent sur la feuille de calcul actuelle est spécifié sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur - . Pour afficher les personnes qui travaillent sur le fichier, cliquez sur cette icône pour ouvrir le panneau Chat avec la liste complète affichée.

    Mode Rapide

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm index daad030809..7ef4b7b223 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
    - +

    Commentaires

    -

    Tableur permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers, collaborer sur feuilles de calcul en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure.

    -

    Dans le Tableur vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenu de feuilles de calcul sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer.

    +

    L'éditeur de classeurs permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers, collaborer sur feuilles de calcul en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure.

    +

    Dans l'éditeur de classeurs vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenu de feuilles de calcul sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer.

    Laisser et répondre aux commentaires

    Pour laisser un commentaire :

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm index 160dc7d525..68b0cf39c5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
      - +

      Communiquer en temps réel

      -

      Tableur permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur feuilles de calcul en temps réel, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments des feuilles de calcul nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure.

      -

      Dans le Tableur il est possible de communiquer avec vos co-auteurs en temps réel en utilisant l'outil intégré Chat et les modules complémentaires utiles tels que Telegram ou Rainbow.

      +

      L'éditeur de classeurs permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur feuilles de calcul en temps réel, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments des feuilles de calcul nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure.

      +

      Dans l'éditeur de classeurs il est possible de communiquer avec vos co-auteurs en temps réel en utilisant l'outil intégré Chat et les modules complémentaires utiles tels que Telegram ou Rainbow.

      Pour accéder au Chat et laisser un message pour les autres utilisateurs,

      1. cliquez sur
        l'icône sur la barre latérale gauche,
        2. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/ImportData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/ImportData.htm index cb7e808c12..25d78d3dd8 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/ImportData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/ImportData.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
        - +

        Obtenir des données à partir de fichiers Texte/CSV

        Quand vous avez besoin d'obtenir rapidement des données à partir d'un fichier .txt/.csv file et l'organiser et positionner correctement dans une feuille de calcul, utilisez l'option Récupérer les données à partir d'un fichier texte/CSV file sous l'onglet Données.

        diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index a7bc2cd314..4cb4ad7300 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Raccourcis clavier - + @@ -18,20 +18,20 @@

        Raccourcis clavier

        Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

        -

        Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès au Tableur sans l'aide de la souris.

        +

        Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'éditeur de classeurs sans l'aide de la souris.

          -
        1. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état.
          2. +
        2. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état.
        3. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. -

          Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès.

          +

          Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur Alt pour afficher les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès.

          Primaires touches d'accès

          Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet.

          Touches d'accès supplémentaires

          Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer.

          4. -
        4. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour désactiver toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir aux suggestions de touches précédentes.
          5. +
        5. Appuyez sur Alt pour masquer toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir au groupe de suggestions de touches précédent.
        -

        Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants :

        +

        Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants:

        • Windows/Linux
          • - Passer à l'affichage en plein écran pour adapter le Tableur à votre écran. + Passer à l'affichage en plein écran dans les éditeurs en ligne pour adapter l'éditeur de classeurs à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 - Ouvrir le menu Aide du Tableur. + Ouvrir le menu Aide Spreadsheet Editor. Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) @@ -116,25 +116,25 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) - Tab/Shift+Tab - ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab - Fermer la fenêtre de la feuille de calcul actuelle dans Desktop Editors. + Tab/Maj+Tab + ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab + Fermer la fenêtre du classeur actuel dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l'élément - ⇧ Shift+F10 - ⇧ Shift+F10 - Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. + ⇧ Maj+F10 + ⇧ Maj+F10 + Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 - Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du document actuel par défaut à 100%. + Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du classeur actuel par défaut à 100%. Copier une feuille de calcul - Appuyez et maintenez la touche Ctrl+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul + Appuyez et maintenez la touche Ctrl+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul Appuyez et maintenez la touche ⌥ Option+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul Copier une feuille de calcul entière et déplacer-la pour modifier la position de l'onglet. @@ -148,10 +148,10 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Activer le contour d'une cellule au-dessus/en-dessous de la cellule sélectionnée ou à gauche/à droite de celle-ci. - Aller au bord de la zone de données actuelle + Sauter au bord de la zone visible de données ou à la cellule suivante comportant des données. Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ - Activer une cellule à la limite de la région de données courante dans une feuille de calcul. + Entourer la cellule au bord de la zone visible de données ou la cellule suivante comportant des données sur la feuille de calcul. S'il n'a a pas de données dans la zone, c'est la dernière cellule dans la zone visible qui sera sélectionnée. S'il y a des données dans la zone, la cellule suivante comportant des données sera sélectionnée. Sauter au début de la ligne @@ -181,18 +181,18 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Passer à la feuille précédente Alt+Pg. préc ⌥ Option+Pg. préc - Passer à la feuille précédente de votre feuille de calcul. + Passer à la feuille précédente de votre classeur. Passer à la feuille suivante Alt+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+Pg. suiv - Passer à la feuille suivante de votre feuille de calcul. + Passer à la feuille suivante de votre classeur. Se déplacer d'une ligne vers le haut - ↑,
          ⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée - ⇧ Shift+↵ Retour + ↑,
          ⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée + ⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Activer la cellule au-dessus de la cellule actuelle dans la même colonne. @@ -203,8 +203,8 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Se déplacer d'une colonne vers la gauche - ←,
          ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab - ←,
          ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab + ←,
          ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab + ←,
          ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Activer la cellule précédente de la ligne actuelle. @@ -225,34 +225,34 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Pg. préc Déplacer un écran vers le haut dans la feuille de travail. - - Déplacement la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas - Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas - Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas - Déplacer la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas. - - - Déplacement la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite - ⇧ Shift+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas - ⇧ Shift+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas - Déplacer la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite. Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la droite, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le bas. Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la gauche, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le haut. - - - Zoom avant - Ctrl++ - ^ Ctrl+=,
          ⌘ Cmd+= - Zoom avant sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. - + + Déplacer la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas + Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas + Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas + Déplacer la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas + + + Déplacer la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite + ⇧ Maj+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas + ⇧ Maj+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas + Déplacer la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la droite, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le bas. Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la gauche, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le haut. + + + Zoom avant + Ctrl++ + ^ Ctrl+=,
          ⌘ Cmd+= + Zoom avant sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. + Zoom arrière Ctrl+- - ^ Ctrl+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+- + ^ Ctrl+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom arrière sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal - ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab - ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab + ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab + ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Sélectionner tout - Ctrl+A,
          Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace + Ctrl+A,
          Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner toute la feuille de calcul. @@ -272,44 +272,44 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Sélectionner une ligne - ⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace - ⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace + ⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace + ⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace Sélectionner une ligne entière d'une feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une plage - ⇧ Shift+→ ← - ⇧ Shift+→ ← + ⇧ Maj+→ ← + ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner cellule par cellule. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne - ⇧ Shift+Début - ⇧ Shift+Début + ⇧ Maj+Début + ⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner une plage depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne - ⇧ Shift+Fin - ⇧ Shift+Fin + ⇧ Maj+Fin + ⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner une plage depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Étendre la sélection jusqu'au début de la feuille de calcul - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Début - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Début + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Début + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner une plage à partir des cellules sélectionnées jusqu'au début de la feuille de calcul. Étendre la sélection à la dernière cellule utilisée - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fin - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fin + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Fin + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner un fragment à partir des cellules sélectionnées actuelles jusqu'à la dernière cellule utilisée sur la feuille de calcul (à la ligne du bas avec les données de la colonne la plus à droite avec les données). Si le curseur se trouve dans la barre de formule, tout le texte de la barre de formule sera sélectionné de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin sans affecter la hauteur de la barre de formule. Sélectionner une cellule à gauche - ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab - ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab + ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab + ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Sélectionner une cellule à gauche dans un tableau. @@ -320,32 +320,32 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche à droite. - ⇧ Shift+Fin,
          Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ - ⇧ Shift+Fin + ⇧ Maj+Fin,
          Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ + ⇧ Maj+Fin Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même rangée à droite de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche à gauche. - ⇧ Shift+Début,
          Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ - ⇧ Shift+Début + ⇧ Maj+Début,
          Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← + ⇧ Maj+Début Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même rangée à gauche de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche en haut/en bas de la colonne - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↑ ↓ Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même colonne en haut/en bas à partir de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection vers le bas de l'écran - ⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv - ⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv + ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv + ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv Étendre la sélection à toutes les cellules situées à un écran en dessous de la cellule active. Étendre la sélection vers le haut d'un écran - ⇧ Shift+Pg. préc - ⇧ Shift+Pg. préc + ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc + ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc Étendre la sélection à toutes les cellules situées un écran plus haut que la cellule active. @@ -368,21 +368,21 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Couper - Ctrl+X,
          ⇧ Shift+Supprimer + Ctrl+X,
          ⇧ Maj+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X - Couper les données sélectionnées et les envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit de la même feuille de calcul, dans une autre feuille de calcul, ou dans un autre programme. + Couper les données sélectionnées et les envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit du même classeur, dans un autre classeur, ou dans un autre programme. Copier Ctrl+C,
          Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C - Envoyer les données sélectionnées vers le presse-papiers. Les données copiées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit de la même feuille de calcul, dans une autre feuille de calcul, ou dans un autre programme. + Envoyer les données sélectionnées vers le presse-papiers. Les données copiées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit du même classeur, dans un autre classeur, ou dans un autre programme. Coller - Ctrl+V,
          ⇧ Shift+Inser + Ctrl+V,
          ⇧ Maj+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V - Insérer les données précédemment copiées/coupées depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. Les données peuvent être copiées à partir de la même feuille de calcul, à partir d'une autre feuille de calcul, ou provenant d'un autre programme. + Insérer les données précédemment copiées/coupées depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. Les données peuvent être copiées à partir du même classeur, à partir d'un autre classeur, ou provenant d'un autre programme. Mise en forme des données @@ -428,8 +428,8 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Activer/Supprimer le filtre - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Activer un filtre pour une plage de cellules sélectionnée ou supprimer le filtre. @@ -449,15 +449,15 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers le haut - ⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée - ⇧ Shift+↵ Retour + ⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée + ⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée, et passer à la cellule située au-dessus. - Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers la cellule suivante dans la ligne + Valider la saisie de données et passer à la cellule suivante dans la ligne. ↹ Tab ↹ Tab - Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et se déplacer vers la cellule à droite. + Valider une entrée de cellule dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et déplacez-vous vers la cellule de droite. Commencer une nouvelle ligne @@ -497,47 +497,56 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Valider une entrée de cellule et déplacez-la vers la gauche. - ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab - ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab + ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab + ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et passer à la cellule de gauche . Insérer des cellules - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+= + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+=,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+= Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pur insérer de nouvelles cellules dans la feuille de calcul actuelle et spécifier les paramètres supplémentaires pour se déplacer vers la droite, vers le bas ou insérer une ligne ou une colonne entière. Supprimer les cellules - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+- + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+-,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+- Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pur supprimer les cellules dans la feuille de calcul actuelle et spécifier les paramètres supplémentaires pour se déplacer vers la droite, vers le bas ou supprimer une ligne ou une colonne entière. Insérer la date actuelle Ctrl+; - Ctrl+;,
          ⌘ Cmd+; + Ctrl+;,
          ⌘ Cmd+; Insérer la date courante dans la cellule sélectionnée. Insérer l'heure actuelle - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+; + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+;,
          ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+; Insérer l'heure courante dans la cellule sélectionnée. Insérer la date et l'heure actuelles - Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; - Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;,
          ⌘ Cmd+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; + Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Maj+; + Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Maj+;,
          ⌘ Cmd+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+; Insérer la date et l'heure courantes dans la cellule sélectionnée. + + Tableaux croisés dynamiques + + + Mettre à jour le tableau croisé dynamique. + Alt+F5 + ⌥ Option+F5 + Actualiser le tableau croisé dynamique.sélectionné auparavant. + Fonctions Insérer une fonction - ⇧ Shift+F3 - ⇧ Shift+F3 + ⇧ Maj+F3 + ⇧ Maj+F3 Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pour insérer une nouvelle fonction de la liste prédéfinie. @@ -562,12 +571,12 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Recalculer des fonctions F9 F9 - Recalcul de la feuille de calcul entière. + Recalcul du classeur entier. Recalculer des fonctions - ⇧ Shift+F9 - ⇧ Shift+F9 + ⇧ Maj+F9 + ⇧ Maj+F9 Recalcul de la feuille de calcul actuelle. @@ -576,49 +585,49 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue 'Format de numéro' Ctrl+1 - ^ Ctrl+1,
          ⌘ Cmd+1 + ^ Ctrl+1,
          ⌘ Cmd+1 Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Format de numéro Appliquer le format Général - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+~ + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+~ Appliquer le format de nombre Général. Appliquer le format Devise - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+$ + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+$ Appliquer le format Devise avec deux décimales (nombres négatifs entre parenthèses). Appliquer le format Pourcentage - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+% + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+% Appliquer le format Pourcentage sans décimales. Appliquer le format Exponentiel - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+^ + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+^ Appliquer le format des nombres exponentiels avec deux décimales. Appliquer le format Date - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+# + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+# Appliquer le format Date avec le jour, le mois et l'année. Appliquer le format Heure - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+@ + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+@ Appliquer le format Heure avec l'heure et les minutes, et le format AM ou PM. Appliquer un format de nombre - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! - ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! + Ctrl+⇧ Maj+! + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+! Appliquer le format Nombre avec deux décimales, un séparateur de milliers et le signe moins (-) pour les valeurs négatives. @@ -626,26 +635,26 @@

          Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès

          Limiter le déplacement - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Limiter la rotation à à des incréments de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) - ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) + ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 9e0e09232c..8187235a9b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation - + @@ -15,29 +15,29 @@

      Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation

      -

      Pour vous aider à afficher et sélectionner des cellules dans un grand classeur, l'éditeur des feuilles de calcul Spreadsheet Editor propose plusieurs outils de navigation: les barres de défilement, les boutons de défilement, les onglets de classeur et le zoom.

      +

      Pour vous aider à afficher et sélectionner des cellules dans un grand classeur, l'éditeur de classeurs vous propose plusieurs outils de navigation: les barres de défilement, les boutons de défilement, les onglets de classeur et le zoom.

      Régler les paramètres d'affichage

      Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler sur une feuille de calcul, passez à l'onglet Affichage. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes:

        -
      • Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille. Pour en savoir plus sur des droits d'accès, veuillez consulter cet article.
        • +
      • Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affichage des feuilles de calcul, veuillez consulter cet article.
      • Zoom - sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles.
      • Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles dans la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre.
        • -
      • Figer les volets - fige toutes les lignes au-dessus de la cellule active et toutes les colonnes à gauche de la cellule active afin qu'elles restent visibles lorsque vous faites défiler la feuille vers la droite ou vers le bas. Pour débloquer les volets, cliquez à nouveau sur cette option ou cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la feuille de calcul et sélectionnez l'option Libérer les volets dans le menu.
        • +
      • Verrouiller les volets - fige toutes les lignes au-dessus de la cellule active et toutes les colonnes à gauche de la cellule active afin qu'elles restent visibles lorsque vous faites défiler la feuille vers la droite ou vers le bas. Pour débloquer les volets, cliquez à nouveau sur cette option ou cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la feuille de calcul et sélectionnez l'option Libérer les volets dans le menu.
      • Masquer la barre de formule une fois désactivé, sert à masquer la barre au-dessous de la barre d'outils supérieure, utilisée pour saisir et réviser la formule et son contenu. Pour afficher la Barre de formule masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. La Barre de formule est développée d'une ligne quand vous faites glisser le bas de la zone de formule pour l'élargir.
      • En-têtes une fois désactivé, sert à masquer les en-têtes des colonnes en haut et les en-têtes des lignes à gauche de la feuille de calcul. Pour afficher les En-têtes masqués, cliquez sur cette option encore une fois.
      • Quadrillage une fois désactivé, sert à masquer les lignes autour des cellules. Pour afficher le Quadrillage masqué cliquez sur cette option encore une fois.
        • -
      • Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Décochez cette case pour désactiver cette option.
        • +
      • Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Décochez cette case pour désactiver cette option.
      • Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sont masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles.

        Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau.

        • -
      • Combiner la barre de la feuille et la barre d'état sert à afficher des outils de navigation dans la feuille de calcul et la barre d'état sur une seule ligne. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Une fois désactivée, la barre d'état s'affichera sur deux lignes.
        • +
      • Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Une fois désactivée, la barre d'état s'affichera sur deux lignes.
      • Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Commentaireset autres onglets sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case.
      • Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case.
      -

      La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône.

      +

      La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône.

      Vous pouvez également modifier la taille du panneau Commentaires ou Chat ouvert en utilisant un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur le bord gauche de la barre latérale. Quand il se transforme dans la flèche bidirectionnelle, faites glisser le bord à droite pour augmenter la largeur de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à gauche.

      Utiliser les outils de navigation

      Pour naviguer à travers votre classeur, utilisez les outils suivants:

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index e2bd6df5bb..1440d06fab 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -3,45 +3,45 @@ Fonctions de recherche et remplacement - + -
      +
      -

      Fonctions de recherche et remplacement

      -

      Pour rechercher les caractères, mots ou phrases dans le Tableur, cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône située dans le coin droit supérieur ou utilisez la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Command+F pour MacOS) afin d'ouvrir le petit panneau Recherche ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H afin d'ouvrir le panneau Recherche complet.

      -

      Le petit panneau Recherche sera ouvert dans le coin droit supérieur de la zone de travail.

      -

      Petit panneau Recherche

      -

      Afin d'accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône .

      -

      La fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer s'ouvre :

      - Fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer -
        -
      1. Saisissez votre enquête dans le champ de saisie correspondant Recherche.
        2. -
      2. Afin de parcourir les occurrences trouvées, cliquez sur l'un des boutons à flèche. Le bouton
        affiche l'occurrence suivante, le bouton
        affiche l'occurrence précédente.
        3. -
      3. Si vous avez besoin de remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères saisis, tapez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie correspondant Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer l'occurrence actuellement sélectionnée ou toutes les occurrences en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants Remplacer et Remplacer tout.
        4. -
      4. - Spécifiez les options de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires : -
          -
        • Dans - permet de rechercher dans la Feuille active uniquement, dans l'ensemble de la Feuille de calcul ou dans la Plage spécifique. Dans ce dernier cas le champ Sélectionner une plage de données devient actif dans lequel vous pouvez saisir la plage de données requise.
          • -
        • Recherche - est utilisée pour spécifier la direction dans laquelle vous souhaitez rechercher : à droite par lignes ou en bas par colonnes.
          • -
        • Regarder dans - est utilisée pour spécifier si vous voulez rechercher la Valeur des cellules ou leurs Formules sous-jacentes.
          • -
        -
        5. -
      5. - Spécifiez les paramètres de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires au-dessous du champ de saisie : -
          -
        • Sensible à la casse sert à trouver les occurrences saisies de la même casse (par exemple, si votre enquête est 'Editeur' et cette option est sélectionnée, les mots tels que 'éditeur' ou 'EDITEUR' etc. ne seront pas trouvés).
          • -
        • Contenu de la cellule entière - est utilisée pour trouver uniquement les cellules qui ne contiennent pas d'autres caractères que ceux spécifiés dans votre enquête (par exemple si vous cherchez '56' et que cette option est sélectionnée, les cellules contenant des données telles que '0,56' ou '156' etc. ne seront pas considérées).
          • -
        -
        6. -
      -

      Toutes les occurrences seront surlignées dans le fichier et affichées sous forme de liste dans le panneau Recherche à gauche. Pour passer à l'occurrence requise utilisez la liste ou les boutons de navigation et .

      -
      +

      Fonctions de recherche et remplacement

      +

      Pour rechercher les caractères, les mots et les phrases nécessaires dans l'éditeur de classeurs, cliquez sur l'icône Recherche sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Commande+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir la petite barre de recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+ H pour ouvrir le plein panneau de recherche..

      +

      Une petite barre Recherche apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de l'espace de travail. La barre inclut le champ de saisie de la requête de recherche, affiche le nombre de résultats de recherche et les contrôles pour basculer entre le résultat précédent ou suivant et masquer la barre.

      +

      Petite barre Recherche

      +

      Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône .

      +

      Le panneau Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche.

      + Fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer +
        +
      1. Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans le champ de saisie Rechercher.
        2. +
      2. Pour naviguer à travers des occurrences, cliquez sur les boutons fléchés. Le bouton
        affiche l'occurrence suivante et le bouton
        affiche l'occurrence précédente.
        3. +
      3. S'il vous faut remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer une seule occurrence qui est mise en surbrillance ou toutes occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant Remplacer ou Remplacer tout.
        4. +
      4. + Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées: +
          +
        • Dans sert à rechercher des données dans la Feuille de calcul active, dans le Classeur entier ou dans une Plage spécifique. Dans ce dernier cas, le champ Sélectionner une plage de données deviendra disponible pour saisir la plage de données nécessaire.
          • +
        • Recherche sert à définir la direction de la recherche: à droite dans lignes ou en bas dans colonnes.
          • +
        • Rechercher dans sert à spécifier si vous voulez rechercher la Valeur des cellules ou les Formules sous-jacentes.
          • +
        +
        5. +
      5. + Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées en dessous du champ de saisie: +
          +
        • Sensible aux caractères sert à passer toutes les occurrences tenant compte de la casse (par exemple, quand vous rechercher le mot «Éditeur», les mots «éditeur» et «ÉDITEUR» ne sont pas affichés).
          • +
        • Contenu complet de la cellule sert à rechercher des cellules contenant uniquement les caractères que vous avez indiqué dans votre requête de recherche (par ex. si vous recherchez '56' et cette option est active, les cellules contenant '0.56' ou '156' etc. ne seront pas renvoyées).
          • +
        +
        6. +
      +

      Toutes les occurrences seront mises en surbrillance dans le fichier et seront affichés sous forme de liste sur le panneau Recherche de gauche. Utilisez la liste pour basculer vers l'occurrence recherchée ou utilisez les boutons de navigation et .

      +
      \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm index fe30345b0d..e4b9daddb0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

    Vérification de l'orthographe

    -

    Tableur vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte dans une certaine langue et de corriger les erreurs lors de l'édition. Dans la version de bureau, il est également possible d'ajouter des mots dans un dictionnaire personnalisé qui est commun aux trois éditeurs.

    +

    L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte dans une certaine langue et de corriger les erreurs lors de l'édition. Dans la version de bureau, il est également possible d'ajouter des mots dans un dictionnaire personnalisé qui est commun aux trois éditeurs.

    À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en charge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page.

    Cliquez sur l'icône Vérification de l'orthographe dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau de vérification orthographique.

    Le panneau Vérification de l'orthographe

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index c3d015945e..16ae6e12b1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Formats des feuilles de calcul pris en charge + Formats des classeurs pris en charge - + @@ -14,21 +14,19 @@
    -

    Formats des feuilles de calcul pris en charge

    -

    Une feuille de calcul c'est une table de données organisées en lignes et en colonnes. - Grâce à la capacité de recalculer automatiquement la feuille toute entière après un changement dans une seule cellule, elle est la plus souvent utilisée pour stocker l'information financière. - Tableur vous permet d'ouvrir et de modifier les formats les plus populaires.

    +

    Formats des classeurs pris en charge

    +

    Un classeur c'est une table de données organisées en lignes et en colonnes. Grâce à la capacité de recalculer automatiquement la feuille toute entière après un changement dans une seule cellule, elle est la plus souvent utilisée pour stocker l'information financière. L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet d'ouvrir et de modifier les formats les plus populaires.

    Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Office Open XML (XLSX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données.

    Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition.

    - - - - +
    FormatsDescription
    + + + - + @@ -37,9 +35,34 @@

    Formats des feuilles de calcul pris en charge

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + @@ -53,40 +76,64 @@

    Formats des feuilles de calcul pris en charge

    - - - + + + - - - - + + + - - + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - -
    FormatsDescription Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML
    CSV Valeurs séparées par une virgule
    Le format de fichier utilisé pour stocker des données tabulaires (des chiffres et du texte) sous forme de texte clair    		 +
    ETWPS Spreadsheets Workbook
    Un format de feuille de calcul inclus dans la suite WPS Office qui prend en charge des graphiques et des formules et organise des données par lignes et par colonnes.    		++
    ETTWPS Spreadsheets Template
    Un format de feuille de calcul inclus dans la suite WPS Office. Les fichiers ETT sont similaires aux fichiers ET qu'on utilise pour organiser des données par lignes et par colonnes, créer des graphiques mais premièrement pour doubler les classeurs ayant la même disposition et les informations.    		++
    FODSOpenDocument Flat XML Spreadsheet
    Format de fichier basé sur XML pour sauvegarder et échanger des feuilles de calcul.    		++
    ODSL'extension de fichier pour une feuille de calcul utilisée par les suites OpenOffice et StarOffice, un standard ouvert pour les feuilles de calculL'extension de fichier pour un classeur utilisé par les suites OpenOffice et StarOffice, un standard ouvert pour les feuilles de calcul. + +
    XLSL'extension de fichier pour une feuille de calcul créée par Microsoft Excel
    SXCSun XML Calc
    Un format de classeur basé sur XML qui fait partie de la suite bureautique OpenOffice et prend en charge des formules, des fonctions, des macros.    		 + +
    XLSXL'extension de fichier par défaut pour une feuille de calcul créée par Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (ou la version ultérieure)+L'extension de fichier par défaut pour un classeur créé par Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (ou la version ultérieure).+ ++
    XLTMUn fichier XLTM est une modèle de classeur prenant en charge les macros par Microsoft Excel.++
    XLTXModèle de feuille de calcul Excel Open XML
    Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de feuilles de calcul. U n modèle XLTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs feuilles de calcul avec la même mise en forme    		Modèle de feuille de calcul Excel Open XML
    Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de feuilles de calcul. U Un modèle XLTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs classeurs avec la même mise en forme.    		 + +
    -

    Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'une feuille de calcul dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme.

    + + + XML + Extensible Markup Language (XML)
    Un format de fichier pour structurer, sauvegarder et transmettre des données. + + + + + + + + +

    Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'un classeur dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme.

    @@ -94,34 +141,58 @@

    Formats des feuilles de calcul pris en charge

    - + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + - - + + - + + + + --> + + + + - + - - + + + + + +
    Format en entrée
    CSVCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXJPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    ETCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    ETTCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    FODSCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    ODSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    SXCCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    OTSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX
    CSV, JPG, ODS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    XLSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    XLSBCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTX
    XLSMCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    XLSXCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLTM, XLTX
    XLTXCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXXLTMCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTX
    XMLCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
    -

    Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos feuilles de calcul dans des formats les plus populaires.

    +

    Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos classeurs dans des formats les plus populaires.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm index 0c71256813..f70c50adc4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
    - +

    Historique des versions

    -

    Tableur permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des feuilles de calcul en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la feuille de calcul nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne.

    -

    Dans le Tableur vous pouvez afficher l'historique des versions du document sur lequel vous collaborez.

    +

    L'éditeur de classeurs permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et des dossiers, collaborer sur des feuilles de calcul en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, laisser des commentaires pour des fragments de la feuille de calcul nécessitant la participation d'une tierce personne.

    +

    Dans l'éditeur de classeurs vous pouvez afficher l'historique des versions du document sur lequel vous collaborez.

    Afficher l'historique des versions :

    Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à la feuille de calcul,

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm index 5ad634b20b..b950283ca7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Collaboration - + @@ -12,16 +12,16 @@
      - +

      Onglet Collaboration

      -

      L'onglet Collaboration permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif dans le Tableur. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner le mode de co-édition approprié, gérer les commentaires. En mode Commentaires, vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer les commentaires et utiliser le chat. Dans la version de bureau, vous ne pouvez que gérer des commentaires.

      +

      L'onglet Collaboration permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif dans l'éditeur de classeurs. Dans l'éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner le mode de co-édition approprié, gérer les commentaires. En mode Commentaires, vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer les commentaires et utiliser le chat. Dans l'éditeur de bureau, vous ne pouvez que gérer des commentaires.

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

      +

      L'onglet Collaboration dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne:

      Onglet Collaboration

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur pour le bureau :

      +

      L'onglet Collaboration dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau:

      Onglet Collaboration

      En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm index 3b8d216c8f..92de17960e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Données - + @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

      Onglet Données

      -

      L'onglet Données permet de gérer les données dans Spreadsheet Editor.

      +

      L'onglet Données permet de gérer les données dans l'éditeur de classeurs.

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre de Spreadsheet Editor en ligne:

      +

      L'onglet Données dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne:

      Onglet Données

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre de Spreadsheet Editor pour le bureau:

      +

      L'onglet Données dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau:

      Onglet Données

      En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb7a4c0dcc --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Onglet Dessiner + + + + + + + + +
      +
      + +
      +

      Onglet Dessiner

      +

      L'onglet Dessiner dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'effectuer les opérations dessin de base.

      +
      +

      L'onglet Dessiner dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne:

      +

      Onglet Dessiner

      +
      +
      +

      L'onglet Dessiner dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau:

      +

      Onglet Dessiner

      +
      +

      En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

      +
        +
      • utiliser l'outil de sélection pour redimensionner ou supprimer l'inscription, le dessin et la mise en surbrillance,
        • +
      • utiliser l'outil Stylo et Surligneur pour dessiner ou ajouter les notes manuscrites ou la mise en surbrillance,
        • +
      • utiliser l'outil Gomme pour effacer le dessin entier ou le texte manuscrit.
        • +
      +
      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index c6347cab41..fd5e561d97 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Fichier - + @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

    Onglet Fichier

    -

    L'onglet Fichier dans le Tableur permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

    +

    L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

    -

    Fenêtre principale du Tableur en ligne :

    +

    L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

    Onglet Fichier

    -

    Fenêtre principale du Tableur de bureau :

    +

    L'onglet Fichier dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

    Onglet Fichier

    En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm index 473abc8131..0a6de0ff28 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Formule - + @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

    Onglet Formule

    -

    L'onglet Formule dans le Tableur permet de travailler facilement avec toutes les fonctions.

    +

    L'onglet Formule dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet de travailler facilement avec toutes les fonctions.

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

    +

    L'onglet Formule dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

    Formula tab

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau :

    +

    L'onglet Formule dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

    Formula tab

    Cet onglet vous permet de :

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index 8dd19837e2..d7e03ebd30 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Accueil - + @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

    Onglet Accueil

    -

    L'onglet Accueil dans le Tableur s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez une feuille de calcul. Il permet de formater des cellules et des données en leur sein, appliquer des filtres, insérer des fonctions. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que la fonction Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau, etc.

    +

    L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de classeurs s'affiche par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez une feuille de calcul. Il permet de formater des cellules et des données en leur sein, appliquer des filtres, insérer des fonctions. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que la fonction Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau, etc.

    -

    Fenêtre Tableur en ligne :

    +

    L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

    Onglet Accueil

    -

    Fenêtre Tableur de bureau :

    +

    L'onglet Accueil dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

    Onglet Accueil

    En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 99cb47d625..3050b6068a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Insertion - + @@ -16,13 +16,13 @@

    Onglet Insertion

    Qu'est-ce que l'onglet Insertion ?

    -

    L'onglet Insertion dans le Tableur permet d'ajouter des objets visuels et des commentaires dans votre feuille de calcul.

    +

    L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'ajouter des objets visuels et des commentaires dans votre feuille de calcul.

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

    +

    L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

    Onglet Insertion

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau :

    +

    L'onglet Insertion dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

    Onglet Insertion

    Fonctions de l'onglet Insertion

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index cb11b0d462..e9ea80e9a9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Mise en page - + @@ -16,13 +16,13 @@

    Onglet Mise en page

    Qu'est-ce que l'onglet Mise en page ?

    -

    L'onglet Mise en page dans le Tableur permet de modifier l'aspect de la feuille de calcul : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la disposition des éléments visuels.

    +

    L'onglet Mise en page dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet de modifier l'aspect de la feuille de calcul : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la disposition des éléments visuels.

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

    +

    L'onglet Mise en page dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

    Onglet Mise en page

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau :

    +

    L'onglet Mise en page dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

    Onglet Mise en page

    Fonctions de l'onglet Mise en page

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm index fbeac75013..dd1d3eb5e7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Tableau croisé dynamique - + @@ -15,10 +15,10 @@

    Onglet Tableau croisé dynamique

    -

    L'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans le Tableur permet de créer et modifier des tableaux croisés dynamiques.

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

    +

    L'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet de créer et modifier des tableaux croisés dynamiques.

    +

    L'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans de l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

    Onglet Tableau croisé dynamique

    -

    Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau :

    +

    L'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans de l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

    Pivot Table tab

    En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 4b7e54f735..f686cd6ec5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Modules complémentaires - + @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

      Onglet Modules complémentaires

      -

      L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans le Tableur permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Sous cet onglet vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

      +

      L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Sous cet onglet vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

      +

      L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

      Onglet Modules complémentaires

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur pour le bureau :

      +

      L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

      Onglet Modules complémentaires

      Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer toutes les extensions installées et ajouter vos propres modules.

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 6e78ecf147..b34928128d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Présentation de l'interface utilisateur du Tableur - + @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@
      -

      Présentation de l'interface utilisateur du Tableur

      -

      Tableur utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

      +

      Présentation de l'interface utilisateur de l'éditeur de classeurs

      +

      l'éditeur de classeurs utilise une interface aux onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

      -

      Fenêtre principale du Tableur en ligne :

      +

      Fenêtre principale l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne :

      Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

      -

      Fenêtre principale du Tableur de bureau :

      +

      Fenêtre principale l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau :

      Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau :

      L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants :

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm index b3a3a34fa9..4cc338c82f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm @@ -3,34 +3,34 @@ Onglet Protection - - + +
      - +

      Onglet Protection

      -

      L'onglet Protection du Tableur permet d'empêcher tout accès non autorisé en utilisant le chiffrement ou la protection au niveau du classeur ou au niveau de la feuille de calcul.

      +

      L'onglet Protection dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'empêcher tout accès non autorisé en utilisant le chiffrement ou la protection au niveau du classeur ou au niveau de la feuille de calcul.

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur en ligne :

      +

      L'onglet Protection dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne:

      Onglet Protection

      -

      Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur pour le bureau :

      +

      L'onglet Protection dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau:

      Onglet Protection

      -

      En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

      +

      En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez:

      • Chiffrer votre document en définissant un mot de passe,
        • -
      • Protéger le livre avec ou sans un mot de passe afin de protéger sa structure,
        • +
      • Protéger le classeur avec ou sans un mot de passe afin de protéger sa structure,
      • Protéger la feuille de calcul en limitant les possibilités de modification dans une feuille de calcul avec ou sans un mot de passe,
        • -
      • Autoriser la modification des plages de cellules verrouillées avec ou sans mot de passe.
        • -
      • Activer et désactiver les options suivantes : Cellule verrouillée, Formules cachées, Forme verrouillé, Verrouiller le texte.
        • +
      • Activer et désactiver les options suivantes: Cellule verrouillée, Formules cachées, Forme verrouillé, Verrouiller le texte.
        • +
      • Protéger la plage pour protéger les plages et limiter ou interdire l'édition.
      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index 8f949c60f2..d4ebce22e3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Onglet Affichage - + @@ -12,23 +12,27 @@
      - +

      Onglet Affichage

      - L'onglet Affichage dans Spreadsheet Editor permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de la feuille de calcul en fonction du filtre appliqué et des options d'affichage activées. + L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de la feuille de calcul en fonction du filtre appliqué et des options d'affichage activées.

      -

      L'onglet dans l'éditeur en ligne Spreadsheet Editor:

      +

      L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne:

      Onglet Affichage

      -

      Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Spreadsheet Editor:

      +

      L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau:

      Onglet Affichage

      Les options d'affichage disponibles sous cet onglet:

      • Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille.
        • +
      • + Normal permet d'afficher la feuille de calcul entière. +

        Aperçu des sauts de page permet d'afficher iniquement la zone d'impression d'une feuille de calcul.

        +
      • Zoom permet de zoomer et dézoomer sur une feuille de calcul.
      • Thème d'interface permet de modifier le thème d'interface en choisissant le thème Identique à système, Clair, Classique clair, Sombre ou Contraste élevé sombre.
      • Figer les volets permet de figer et libérer des certains volets ou des lignes et des colonnes.
        • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm index 6b52670756..2420d0793b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Ajouter des bordures et l'arrière-plan d'une cellule - + @@ -14,43 +14,51 @@
        -

        Ajouter des bordures et l'arrière-plan d'une cellule

        +

        Ajouter des bordures et l'arrière-plan d'une cellule

        Ajouter l'arrière-plan d'une cellule

        -

        Pour ajouter et mettre en forme l'arrière-plan d'une cellule dans le Tableur,

        +

        Pour ajouter et mettre en forme l'arrière-plan d'une cellule dans l'éditeur de classeurs,

        1. sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en appuyant Ctrl+A sur le clavier, -

          Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

          +

          Remarque: vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

          2. -
        2. pour remplir la cellule avec une couleur unie, cliquez sur l'icône Couleur d'arrière plan
          sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure et sélectionnez la couleur appropriée. +
        3. pour remplir la cellule avec une couleur unie, cliquez sur l'icône Couleur d'arrière plan
          sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure et sélectionnez la couleur appropriée.
          4. -
        4. pour utiliser des options de remplissage telles que remplissage en dégradé ou modèle, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule
          depuis la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la section Remplissage : +
        5. pour utiliser d'autres options de remplissage telles que remplissage en dégradé ou modèle, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule
          de la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la section Remplissage:
          • Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir les cellules sélectionnées.

            Couleur de remplissage

            -

            Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez une des palettes :

            +

            Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez une des palettes:

            Palette

            • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul.
              • -
            • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionnée ne les affecte pas.
              • +
            • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionnée ne les affecte pas.
            • - Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : -

              Palette - Couleur personnalisée

              -

              La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu.

              + Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: +
                +
              • + Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans la feuille de calcul. +
                • +
              • + Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: +

                Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                +

                La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes.

                +
                • +
          • - Remplissage en dégradé - remplir les cellules sélectionnées avec deux couleurs et une transition en douceur appliquée. + Remplissage en dégradé - remplir les cellules sélectionnées avec deux couleurs et une transition en douceur appliquée.

            Remplissage en dégradé

              -
            • Angle - spécifiez manuellement l'angle précis de la direction du dégradé (transition se fait en ligne de dégradé sous un certain angle).
              • -
            • Direction - choisissez un modèle prédéfini du menu. Les directions disponibles : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite (45°), de haut en bas (90°), du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche (135°), de droite à gauche (180°), du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche (225°), du bas en haut (270°), du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite (315°), de gauche à droite (0°).
              • +
            • Angle - spécifiez manuellement l'angle précis de la direction du dégradé (transition se fait en ligne de dégradé sous un certain angle).
              • +
            • Direction - choisissez un modèle prédéfini du menu. Les directions disponibles: du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite (45°), de haut en bas (90°), du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche (135°), de droite à gauche (180°), du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche (225°), du bas en haut (270°), du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite (315°), de gauche à droite (0°).
            • Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs.
                -
              • Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé
                ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé
                pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé.
                • +
              • Utilisez le bouton
                Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton
                Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé.
              • Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis.
              • Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée.
              @@ -70,21 +78,21 @@

              Ajouter l'arrière-plan d'une cellule

        - +

        Ajouter des bordures

        Pour ajouter et mettre en forme des bordures dans une feuille de calcul,

        1. sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant le raccourci clavier Ctrl+A, -

          Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

          +

          Remarque: vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

          2. -
        2. cliquez sur l'icône Bordures
          située sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule
          dans la barre latérale droite et utiliser la section Style des bordures, +
        3. cliquez sur l'icône Bordures
          sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure ou cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule
          de la barre latérale droite et utilisez la section Style des bordures,

          L'onglet Paramètres de cellule

          4. -
        4. sélectionnez le style de bordure à ajouter : +
        5. sélectionnez le style de bordure à ajouter:
            -
          1. ouvrez le sous-menu Style des bordures
            et choisissez parmi les options disponibles,
            2. -
          2. ouvrez le sous-menu Couleur de bordure
            ou utilisez la palette de Couleur dans la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la couleur dont vous avez besoin dans la palette.
            3. -
          3. sélectionnez l'un des modèles de bordure disponibles : Bordures extérieures
            , Toutes les bordures
            , Bordures supérieures
            , Bordures inférieures
            , Bordures gauches
            , Bordures droites
            , Pas de bordures
            , Bordures intérieures
            , Bordures intérieures verticales
            , Bordures intérieures horizontales
            , Bordure diagonale ascendante
            , Bordure diagonale descendante
            .
            4. +
          4. ouvrez le sous-menu Style des bordures
            et sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles,
            5. +
          5. ouvrez le sous-menu Couleur de bordure
            ou utilisez la palette de Couleur de la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire dans la palette.
            6. +
          6. sélectionnez l'un des modèles de bordure disponibles: Bordures extérieures,
            Toutes les bordures,
            Bordures supérieures,
            Bordures inférieures,
            Bordures gauches,
            Bordures droites,
            Aucune bordure,
            Bordures intérieures,
            Bordures intérieures verticales,
            Bordures intérieures horizontales,
            Bordure diagonale ascendante,
            Bordure diagonale descendante
            .
        diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a5d2c2ac5b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + Ajouter des liens externes vers des cellules + + + + + + + + +
        +
        + +
        +

        Ajouter des liens externes vers des cellules

        +

        Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, il est possible de créer un lien externe vers une cellule ou une plage de cellules d'un autre classeur. C'est possible de créer des liens externes entre les fichiers stockés sur le portail actuel (depuis l'éditeur en ligne) ou sur l'ordinateur (depuis l'éditeur du bureau).

        +

        Lors de la modification de données dans le classeur source, vous pouvez actualiser les données dans le classeur de destination sans les copier manuellement encore une fois.

        +

        Pour ajouter un lien externe,

        +
          +
        1. ouvrez le classeur source et le classeur de destination,
          2. +
        2. dans le classeur source, copiez la cellule ou la plage de cellules (Ctrl+C),
          3. +
        3. dans le classeur de destination, collez les données copiés (Ctrl+V),
          4. +
        4. cliquez sur le bouton Collage spécial et sélectionnez l'option Coller avec liaison (Ctrl+N).
          5. +
        +

        La liaison sera crée. Lorsque vous cliquez sur la cellule comportant un lien externe, cette cellule s'affiche dans la barre de formule ainsi: ='[SourceWorkbook.xlsx]Sheet1'!A1.

        +

        Pour actualiser les liens externes que vous avez ajouté,

        +
          +
        1. passez à l'onglet Données,
          2. +
        2. cliquez sur le bouton Liens externes,
          3. +
        3. sélectionnez le lien nécessaire de la liste, +

          Liens externes

          +
          4. +
        4. cliquez sur Mettre à jour les valeurs ou cliquez sur la flèche à côté et sélectionnez Mettre à jour les valeurs (l'option sélectionnée actuellement) ou Tout mettre à jour.
          5. +
        +

        L'état va devenir OK.

        +

        Un avertissement s'affichera lorsque vous ouvrez le classeur comportant les liens externes:

        +

        Liens externes

        +

        Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour actualiser tous les liens externes.

        +

        Pour rompre la liaison,

        +
          +
        1. passez à l'onglet Données,
          2. +
        2. cliquez sur le bouton Liens externes,
          3. +
        3. sélectionnez le lien nécessaire de la liste,
          4. +
        4. cliquez sur Rompre les liaisons ou cliquez sur la flèche à côté de ce bouton pour sélectionner Rompre les valeurs (l'option sélectionnée actuellement) ou Rompre toutes les liaisons.
          5. +
        +

        Les liaisons seront rompus et les valeurs ne seront pas actualisées.

        +
        + + diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm index f81c3ed71b..9a27b490fc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

      Ajouter des liens hypertextes

      -

      Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte dans le Tableur,

      +

      Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte dans l'éditeur de classeurs,

      1. sélectionnez une cellule où un lien hypertexte sera ajouté,
      2. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
        3. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm index ee755b5117..d981201f40 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

        Aligner les données dans une cellule

        -

        Dans le Tableur vous pouvez aligner vos données horizontalement ou verticalement ou même les faire pivoter dans une cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en appuyant Ctrl+A sur le clavier, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. Remarque : vous pouvez mettre en forme du texte à l'aide des icônes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

        +

        Dans l'éditeur de classeurs vous pouvez aligner vos données horizontalement ou verticalement ou même les faire pivoter dans une cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en appuyant Ctrl+A sur le clavier, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. Remarque : vous pouvez mettre en forme du texte à l'aide des icônes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

        • Appliquez l'une des options d'alignement horizontal dans la cellule, diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm deleted file mode 100644 index e0d89e7df7..0000000000 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ - - - - Autoriser la modification des plages - - - - - - - - -
          -
          - -
          - -

          Autoriser la modification des plages

          -

          L'option Autoriser la modification des plages permet de sélectionner les cellules dont un autre utilisateur pourra modifier dans une feuille de calcul protégé. Vous pouvez autoriser la modification de certaines plages de cellules verrouillées avec ou sans mot de passe. On peut modifier la plage de cellules qui n'est pas protégé par un mot de passe.

          -

          Pour sélectionner une plage de cellules verrouillées qui peut être modifiée :

          -
            -
          1. - Cliquez sur le bouton Autoriser la modification des plages dans la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages s'affiche : -

            Modifier des plages

            -
            2. -
          2. - Dans la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau pour sélectionner et ajouter les cellules qui peuvent être modifiées par un utilisateur. -

            Nouvelle plage

            -
            3. -
          3. - Dans la fenêtre Nouvelle plage, saisissez le Titre de la plage et sélectionnez la plage de cellules en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données. Le Mot de passe est facultatif, alors saisissez et validez-le si vous souhaitez protéger les plages de cellules par un mot de passe. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. -

            Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

            -
            4. - -
          4. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les modifications et continuer à travailler dans la feuille de calcul non protégée.
            5. -
          5. - Lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul, la fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul s'affiche pour que vous sélectionniez les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter afin d'empêcher toute modification indésirable. Si vous optez pour une protection avec un mot de passe, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour annuler la protection de la feuille de calcul. -

            Protéger la feuille de calcul

            -
            - Les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter. -
              -
            • Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées
              • -
            • Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées
              • -
            • Modifier les cellules
              • -
            • Modifier les colonnes
              • -
            • Modifier les lignes
              • -
            • Insérer des colonnes
              • -
            • Insérer des lignes
              • -
            • Insérer un lien hypertexte
              • -
            • Supprimer les colonnes
              • -
            • Supprimer les lignes
              • -
            • Trier
              • -
            • Utiliser Autofilter
              • -
            • Utiliser tableau et graphique croisés dynamiques
              • -
            • Modifier les objets
              • -
            • Modifier les scénarios
              • -
            -
            -
          6. - Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection. Une fois la feuille de calcul protégée, le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul devient activé. -

            Protéger la feuille de calcul activé

            -
            7. -
          7. - Vous pouvez modifier les plages de cellules, tant que la feuille de calcul n'est pas protégée. Cliquez sur le bouton Autoriser la modification des plages pour ouvrir la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages : Utilisez les boutons Modifier et Supprimer pour gérer les plages de cellules sélectionnées. Ensuite, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul pour activer la protection de la feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les modifications et continuer à travailler dans la feuille de calcul non protégée. -

            Modifier des plages

            -
            8. -
          8. - Avec des plages protégées avec un mot de passe, la fenêtre Déverrouiller la plage s'affiche invitant à saisir le mot de passe lorsque quelqu'un essaie de modifier la plage protégée. -

            Déverrouiller la plage

            -
            9. -
          -
          - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm index 9ac35890a2..a4314c7321 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Modifier le format de nombre - + @@ -16,12 +16,12 @@

          Modifier le format de nombre

          Appliquer un format de nombre

          -

          Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez facilement modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi dans votre feuille de calcul. Pour ce faire,

          +

          Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez facilement modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi dans votre feuille de calcul. Pour ce faire,

          1. sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, -

            Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

            +

            Remarque: vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

            2. -
          2. faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre Bouton Format général située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel. Sélectionnez le format de nombre approprié : +
          3. faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre Bouton Format général située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel. Sélectionnez le format de nombre approprié:
            • Général sert à afficher les données saisies en tant que nombres standards de façon la plus compacte, sans aucun signe supplémentaire,
            • Nombre sert à afficher les nombres avec 0-30 chiffres après le point décimal où un séparateur de milliers ajouté entre chaque groupe de trois chiffres avant le point décimal,
              • @@ -29,52 +29,53 @@

              Appliquer un format de nombre

            • Scientifique (exponentiel) sert à exprimer le nombre sous la forme d.dddE+ddd ou d.dddE-ddd où chaque d c'est un chiffre de 0 à 9,
            • Comptabilité - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs monétaires avec le symbole monétaire par défaut et deux décimales. Pour appliquer un autre symbole monétaire ou nombre de décimales, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Contrairement au format Devise, le format Comptabilité aligne les symboles monétaires sur le côté gauche de la cellule, représente les valeurs nulles sous forme de tirets et affiche les valeurs négatives entre parenthèses.

              Formats numériques Comptabilité et Devise

              -

              Remarque : pour appliquer rapidement le format Comptabilité aux données sélectionnées, vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône Style comptable dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le symbole de devise requis parmi les symboles monétaires suivants : $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Livre Sterling, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Kuna Croate.

              +

              Remarque: pour appliquer rapidement le format Comptabilité aux données sélectionnées, vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône Style comptable sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le symbole de devise approprié parmi les symboles monétaires suivants: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Livre Sterling, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Kuna Croate.

            • Monétaire - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs monétaires avec le symbole monétaire par défaut et deux décimales. Pour appliquer un autre symbole monétaire ou nombre de décimales, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Contrairement au format Comptabilité, le format Monétaire place un symbole de devise directement avant le premier chiffre et affiche des valeurs négatives avec le signe négatif (-).
              • -
            • Date - est utilisé pour afficher les dates,
              • -
            • Heure - est utilisé pour afficher les heures,
              • +
            • Date courte sert à afficher la date au format DD.MM.YYYY,
              • +
            • Date longue sert à afficher la date au format DD.month in full.YYYY;
              • +
            • Heure - est utilisé pour afficher les heures,
            • Pourcentage sert à afficher les données en pourcentage avec un symbole de pourcentage %, -

              Remarque : pour ajouter rapidement un symbole de pourcentage à vos données vous pouvez également utiliser l'icône Pour cent style située sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure.

              +

              Remarque: pour ajouter rapidement un symbole de pourcentage à vos données vous pouvez également utiliser l'icône Style de pourcentage sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure.

              • -
            • Fraction sert à afficher les nombres comme des fractions usuelles plutôt que des nombres décimaux.
              • +
            • Fraction sert à afficher les nombres comme des fractions usuelles plutôt que des nombres décimaux.
            • Texte sert à afficher les valeurs numériques qui sont traitées comme du texte simple avec la plus grande précision disponible.
            • Autres formats - est utilisé pour créer un format de nombre personnalisé ou personnaliser les formats de nombres déjà appliqués en spécifiant des paramètres supplémentaires (voir la description ci-dessous).
              • -
            • Personnalisé sert à créer le format personnalisé : +
            • Personnalisé sert à créer le format personnalisé:
              • sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules ou la feuille de calcul entière contenant les valeurs à mettre en forme,
                • -
              • sélectionnez l'option Personnalisé dans le menu Autre formats :
                • +
              • sélectionnez l'option Personnalisé dans le menu Autre formats:
              • saisissez les codes appropriés et vérifiez le résultat dans la zone d'aperçu ou choisissez un modèle et/ou combinez-les. Si vous voulez créer un format d'après un modèle, appliquez donc un format existant et modifiez-le selon votre préférence.
              • cliquez sur OK.
            4. -
          4. modifiez le nombre de décimales, si nécessaire : +
          5. modifiez le nombre de décimales, si nécessaire:
              -
            • utilisez l'icône Ajouter une décimale
              située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher plus de chiffres après la virgule,
              • -
            • utilisez l'icône Réduire les décimales
              située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher moins de chiffres après la virgule.
              • +
            • utilisez l'icône Ajouter une décimale
              sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher plus de chiffres après la virgule,
              • +
            • utilisez l'icône Réduire les décimales
              sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher moins de chiffres après la virgule,

          - Remarque : pour modifier le format de nombre, vous pouvez aussi se servir des raccourcis clavier. + Remarque: pour modifier le format de nombre, vous pouvez aussi se servir des raccourcis clavier.

          Personnaliser un format de nombre

          -

          Vous pouvez personnaliser le format numérique appliqué de la manière suivante :

          +

          Vous pouvez personnaliser le format numérique appliqué de la manière suivante:

          1. sélectionnez les cellules pour lesquelles vous souhaitez personnaliser le format de nombre,
          2. faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre Bouton Format général sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel.
          3. sélectionnez l'option Autres formats,
            4. -
          4. Dans la fenêtre Format de nombre qui s'ouvre, ajustez les paramètres disponibles. Les options diffèrent en fonction du format numérique appliqué aux cellules sélectionnées. Vous pouvez utiliser la liste Catégorie pour modifier le format numérique. +
          5. Dans la fenêtre Format de nombre qui s'ouvre, ajustez les paramètres disponibles. Les options diffèrent en fonction du format numérique appliqué aux cellules sélectionnées. Vous pouvez utiliser la liste Catégorie pour modifier le format numérique.

            Fenêtre de format de nombre

            • Pour le format Nombre, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales, spécifier si vous souhaitez Utiliser le séparateur de milliers ou non et choisir l'un des Formats disponibles pour l'affichage des valeurs négatives.
            • Pour les formats Scientifique et Pourcentage, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales.
            • Pour les formats Comptabilité et Monétaire, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales, choisir l'un des Symboles de devise disponibles et l'un des Formats disponibles pour afficher les valeurs négatives.
              • -
            • Pour le format Date, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats de date disponibles : 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, Avril15 2006, 15-Avr, 15-Avr-06, Avr-06, Avril-06, A-06, 06-Avr, 15-Avr-2006, 2006-Avr-15, 06-Avr-15, 06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Avr, 15/Avr/06, Avr/06, Avril/06, A/06, 06/Avr, 15/Avr/2006, 2006/Avr/15, 06/Avr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Avr, 15 Avr 06, Avr 06, Avril 06, A 06, 06 Avr, 15 Avr 2006, 2006 Avr 15, 06 Avr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15.
              • -
            • Pour le format Heure, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats d'heure disponibles : 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58.
              • -
            • Pour le format Fraction, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats disponibles : D'un chiffre (1/3), De deux chiffres (12/25), De trois chiffres (131/135), Demis (1/2), Quarts (2/4), Huitièmes (4/8), Seizièmes (8/16), Dixièmes (5/10), Centièmes (50/100).
              • +
            • Pour le format Date, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats de date disponibles: 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, Avril15 2006, 15-Avr, 15-Avr-06, Avr-06, Avril-06, A-06, 06-Avr, 15-Avr-2006, 2006-Avr-15, 06-Avr-15, 06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Avr, 15/Avr/06, Avr/06, Avril/06, A/06, 06/Avr, 15/Avr/2006, 2006/Avr/15, 06/Avr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Avr, 15 Avr 06, Avr 06, Avril 06, A 06, 06 Avr, 15 Avr 2006, 2006 Avr 15, 06 Avr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15.
              • +
            • Pour le format Heure, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats d'heure disponibles: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58.
              • +
            • Pour le format Fraction, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats disponibles: D'un chiffre (1/3), De deux chiffres (12/25), De trois chiffres (131/135), Demis (1/2), Quarts (2/4), Huitièmes (4/8), Seizièmes (8/16), Dixièmes (5/10), Centièmes (50/100).
          6. Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications.
            7. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb858096b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + ChatGPT + + + + + + + + +
            +
            + +
            +

            ChatGPT

            +

            Le module complémentaire ChatGPT permet d'utiliser l'agent conversationnel OpenAI pour effectuer les tâches visant à comprendre et à générer le langage naturel ou le code.

            + +

            Installation

            +

            Pour installer le module complémentaire ChatGPT,

            +
              +
            1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
              2. +
            2. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires.
              3. +
            3. Recherchez
              ChatGPT sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous.
              4. +
            4. Cliquez sur
              l'icône ChatGPT sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
              5. +
            5. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire.
              6. +
            + +

            Configuration

            +
              +
            1. Créez sur votre API key sur la page OpenAI API key.
              2. +
            2. Copiez la clé générée API key dans le champ correspondant sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur.
              3. +
            +

            Paramètres de ChatGPT

            + +

            Utilisation

            +
              +
            1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
              2. +
            2. Cliquez sur
              l'icône ChatGPT.
              3. +
            3. Configurez les paramètres disponibles tels que Modèle, Longueur maximale, Température etc.
              4. +
            +

            ONLYOFFICE n'assume aucune responsabilité quant aux réponses du ChatGPT qui peuvent contenir des erreurs, des omissions ou du contenu haineux ou inapproprié. Tout le texte envoyé depuis le module complémentaire est généré par ChatGPT et est fourni tel quel, sans filtrage d'aucune sorte par ONLYOFFICE.

            +
            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm index 0f3597a253..5a32b7acb9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

            Effacer un texte ou une mise en forme d'une cellule

            Effacer la mise en forme

            -

            Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez supprimer rapidement le texte ou la mise en forme de la cellule sélectionnée. Pour le faire,

            +

            Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez supprimer rapidement le texte ou la mise en forme de la cellule sélectionnée. Pour le faire,

            1. sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A,

              Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm index f7ed897f6d..6cd6e9bb11 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Communiquer lors de l'édition - + @@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
              - +

              Communiquer lors de l'édition

              -

              Dans le Tableur ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow.

              +

              Dans l'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow.

              Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors, Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur.

              Telegram

              Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram,

              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConditionalFormatting.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConditionalFormatting.htm index ed5206e079..8a6a8d79ff 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConditionalFormatting.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ConditionalFormatting.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

              Mise en forme conditionnelle

              La mise en forme conditionnelle permet d'appliquer des différents styles de mise en forme (couleur, police, décoration, dégradé) de cellules pour travailler avec les données en tableaux : mettre en surbrillance, trier les données et les afficher selon un ou plusieurs critères. Adaptez les critères à vos besoins, créez de nouvelles règles de mise en forme, modifiez, gérez ou effacez des règles existantes. - Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les règles de mise en forme conditionnelle suivantes :

              + L'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les règles de mise en forme conditionnelle suivantes :

              Valeur est, Premiers/Derniers, Moyenne, Texte, Date, Vide/Erreur, Doublon/Unique, Barres de données, Échelle de couleurs, Formule.

              Pour un accès rapide ou si vous souhaitez choisir l'une des conditions prédéfinies ou accéder à toutes les options de mise en forme conditionnelle disponibles, passez à l'onglet Accueil et cliquez sur le bouton Mise en forme conditionnelle .

              Onglet Accueil mise en forme conditionnelle

              @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@

              Mise en forme conditionnelle

              Mise en forme en utilisant des jeux d'icônes -

              Jeux d'icônes s'utilisent pour afficher l'icône pour la cellule répondant aux critères définis. Le Tableur prend en charge plusieurs jeux d'icônes :

              +

              Jeux d'icônes s'utilisent pour afficher l'icône pour la cellule répondant aux critères définis. L'éditeur de classeurs prend en charge plusieurs jeux d'icônes :

              • Directionnel
              • Formes
                • @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@

                Effacer la mise en forme conditionnelle

              • À partir de ce tableau
              • À partir d'un tableau croisé dynamique
              -

              Veuillez noter que ce guide comprend des informations graphiques du manuel Microsoft Office La mise en forme conditionnelle : exemples et instructions. Téléchargez ce manuel et ouvrez-le avec le Tableur pour essayer ces règles de visualisation.

              +

              Veuillez noter que ce guide comprend des informations graphiques du manuel Microsoft Office La mise en forme conditionnelle : exemples et instructions. Téléchargez ce manuel et ouvrez-le avec l'éditeur de classeurs pour essayer ces règles de visualisation.

              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm index d0e87eaeb0..7263e8ed87 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteData.htm @@ -16,13 +16,13 @@

              Couper/copier/coller des données

              Utiliser les opérations de base du presse-papiers

              -

              Pour couper, copier et coller les données dans le classeur actuel, utilisez le menu contextuel ou les icônes correspondantes sur la barre d'outils supérieure de Spreadsheet Editor,

              +

              Pour couper, copier et coller les données dans le classeur actuel, utilisez le menu contextuel ou les icônes correspondantes sur la barre d'outils supérieure de l'éditeur de classeurs,

              • Couper - sélectionnez les données et utilisez l'option Couper du menu contextuel ou l'icône Couper de la barre d'outils supérieure pour supprimer les données sélectionnées et les envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit du même classeur.
              • Copier - sélectionnez les données et utilisez l'icône Copier sur la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Copier depuis le menu pour envoyer les données sélectionnées vers le presse-papiers. Les données copiées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit du même classeur.
              • Coller - sélectionnez l'endroit et utilisez l'icône Coller sur la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Coller du menu pour insérer les données copiées/coupées depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. Les données peuvent être copiées à partir du même classeur.
              -

              Dans la version en ligne, les combinaisons de touches suivantes ne sont utilisées que pour copier ou coller des données de/vers une autre feuille de calcul ou un autre programme, dans la version de bureau, les boutons/options de menu et les combinaisons de touches correspondantes peuvent être utilisées pour toute opération copier/coller:

              +

              Dans l'éditeur en ligne, les combinaisons de touches suivantes ne sont utilisées que pour copier ou coller des données de/vers une autre feuille de calcul ou un autre programme, dans la version de bureau, les boutons/options de menu et les combinaisons de touches correspondantes peuvent être utilisées pour toute opération copier/coller:

              • Ctrl+X pour couper;
              • Ctrl+X pour couper;
                • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DataValidation.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DataValidation.htm index f40d2fa701..e22a11e2ea 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DataValidation.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DataValidation.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                Validation des données

                -

                Tableur ONLYOFFICE vous fait bénéficier des fonctionnalités de validation des données pour contrôler les données saisies par les autres utilisateurs.

                +

                L'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE vous fait bénéficier des fonctionnalités de validation des données pour contrôler les données saisies par les autres utilisateurs.

                Pour ce faire, sélectionnez la cellule, la plage de cellules ou la feuille de calcul entière dont vous voulez limiter la saisie, passez à l'onglet Données et cliquez sur icône Validation des données dans la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Validation des données avec trois onglets s'ouvre : Paramètres, Entrer le message et Avertissement d'erreur.

                Paramètres

                La section Paramètres permet de définir le type de données à contrôler :

                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a7e59ce782 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Dessiner à main levée dans un classeur + + + + + + + + +
                +
                + +
                +

                Dessiner à main levée dans un classeur

                +

                L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de classeurs permet de dessiner à main levée, ajouter des notes manuscrites, mettre en surbrillance du texte et effacer dans votre classeur.

                +

                Options de dessin

                +

                Pour dessiner, écrire ou mettre en surbrillance du texte, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur et déplacez le curseur. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement pour personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du trait. Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs lorsque la couleur nécessaire manque à la palette.

                +

                Outil Stylo

                +

                Lorsque vous avez fini de dessiner, d'écrire ou de surligner, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur encore une fois, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap.

                +

                Cliquez sur l'outil Gomme et déplacez le curseur d'avant en arrière pour effacer le trait. La Gomme efface uniquement le trait entier.

                +

                Utilisez le bouton Sélectionner pour sélectionner l'inscription, le dessin ou la mise en surbrillance. Une fois sélectionné, il est possible de redimensionner ou supprimer l'élément.

                +
                + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm index 4ce008e2b7..156897604c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Définir le type de police, la taille, le style et la couleur - + @@ -15,85 +15,98 @@

                Définir le type de police, la taille, le style et la couleur

                -

                Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez sélectionner le type de police et sa taille, appliquer l'un des styles de décoration et modifier les couleurs de police et fond en utilisant les icônes correspondantes situées sur barre d'outils supérieure.

                -

                Remarque : si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme aux données déjà présentes dans le classeur, sélectionnez-les avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme à plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

                +

                L'éditeur de classeurs permet de sélectionner le type et la taille de la police, appliquer l'un des styles de décoration et modifier les couleurs de la police et de l'arrière-plan en utilisant les icônes correspondantes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure..

                +

                Remarque: si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme aux données déjà présentes dans le classeur, sélectionnez-les avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme à plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris.

                - - + + - - + + - - + + - - - + + + + + + + + - + - + - + - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - + - - + + - - - + + +
                Nom de la police
                		Police
                		 Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau.
                Taille de la police
                		Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante (les valeurs par défaut sont : 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police, puis d'appuyer sur Entrée.
                		Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante (les valeurs par défaut sont: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police jusqu'à 409 pt. Appuyer sur la touche Entrée pour confirmer
                Augmenter la taille de la police
                		Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus grosse chaque fois que vous cliquez sur l'icône.
                		Sert à augmenter la taille de police par incréments de 1 point à chaque clic sur le bouton.
                Réduire la taille de la police
                		Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus petite chaque fois que vous cliquez sur l'icône.Diminuer la taille de la police
                		Sert à augmenter la taille de police par incréments de 1 point à chaque clic sur le bouton.
                Modifier la casse
                		Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte.
                Gras
                		 Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids.
                Italique
                		 Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite.
                Souligné
                		 Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
                Barré
                		Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres.
                Indice/Exposant
                		Permet de choisir l'option Exposant ou Indice. L'option Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les fractions. L'option Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les formules chimiques.
                Barré
                		Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres.
                Indice/Exposant
                		Permet de choisir l'option Exposant ou Indice. L'option Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les fractions. L'option Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les formules chimiques.
                Couleur de police
                		 Sert à changer la couleur des lettres et des caractères dans les cellules.
                Couleur de remplissage
                		Sert à modifier la couleur d'arrière-plan de la cellule. La couleur de remplissage de la cellule peut également être modifiée à l'aide de la palette de couleur de remplissage dans l'onglet Paramètres de cellule de la barre latérale de droite.
                		Sert à modifier la couleur d'arrière-plan de la cellule. Utilisez cette icône pour remplir une cellule avec une couleur unie. La couleur d'arrière-plan de la cellule peut également être modifiée à l'aide de la section Remplissage sous l'onglet Paramètres de cellule de la barre latérale de droite.
                Modifier le jeu de couleurs
                		Sert à modifier la palette de couleurs par défaut pour les éléments de classeur (police, arrière-plan, graphique et ses éléments) en sélectionnant la palette disponible : New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urbain, ou Verve.Modifier le jeu de couleurs
                		Ce bouton se trouve sous l'onglet Mise en page. Sert à modifier la palette de couleurs par défaut pour les éléments de classeur (police, arrière-plan, graphique et ses éléments) en sélectionnant l'option disponible: New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urban ou Verve.
                -

                Remarque : il est également possible d'appliquer une des mises en forme prédéfinies en sélectionnant la cellule que vous voulez mettre en forme et en choisissant la mise en forme désirée de la liste sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure :

                - Mises en forme prédéfinies -

                -

                Pour modifier la couleur de police / de remplissage,

                +

                Remarque: il est également possible d'appliquer une des mises en forme prédéfinies en sélectionnant la cellule que vous voulez mettre en forme et en choisissant la mise en forme désirée de la liste sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure:

                Mises en forme prédéfinies +

                +

                Pour modifier la couleur de police ou remplir la cellule avec une couleur unie,

                1. sélectionnez les caractères / cellules avec la souris ou une feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A,
                  2. -
                2. cliquez sur l'iсône correspondante sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                  3. +
                3. cliquez sur l'icône correspondante sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                4. sélectionnez une couleur dans les palettes disponibles -

                  Palette

                  +

                  Palette

                    -
                  • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée du classeur.
                    • +
                  • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul.
                  • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut.
                    • -
                  • Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas la couleur recherchée dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB (RVB) en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel afin que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : -

                    Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                    -

                    La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée au paragraphe et ajoutée à la palette Couleur personnalisée.

                    +
                  • + Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: +
                      +
                    • + Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans la feuille de calcul. +
                      • +
                    • + Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: +

                      Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                      +

                      La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée au texte/cellule et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes.

                      +
                      • +
                  5. @@ -101,8 +114,8 @@

                  Définir le type de police, la taille, le style et la couleur

                  Pour effacer une couleur d'arrière-plan d'une certaine cellule,

                  1. sélectionnez une cellule, ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou une feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A,
                    2. -
                  2. cliquez sur l'icône Couleur de remplissage
                    sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                    3. -
                  3. sélectionnez l'icône
                    .
                    4. +
                  4. cliquez sur l'icône Couleur de remplissage
                    sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                    5. +
                  5. sélectionnez l'icône
                    .
                  diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm index 23eaadc08b..adeee5f16b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau - + @@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
                  - +

                  Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau

                  Créer un nouveau tableau mis en forme

                  -

                  Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, Tableur vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire,

                  +

                  Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, l'éditeur de classeurs vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire,

                  1. sélectionnez une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez mettre en forme,
                  2. cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau
                    sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure,
                    3. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/GroupData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/GroupData.htm index c25e86fe3c..61902d6658 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/GroupData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/GroupData.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                  Grouper des données

                  -

                  La possibilité de regrouper les lignes et les colonnes ainsi que de créer un plan vous permet de travailler plus facilement avec une feuille de calcul contenant une grande quantité de données. Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez réduire ou agrandir les lignes et les colonnes groupées pour afficher uniquement les données nécessaires. Il est également possible de créer une structure à plusieurs niveaux des lignes /colonnes groupées. Lorsque c'est nécessaire, vous pouvez dissocier les lignes/colonnes précédemment groupées.

                  +

                  La possibilité de regrouper les lignes et les colonnes ainsi que de créer un plan vous permet de travailler plus facilement avec une feuille de calcul contenant une grande quantité de données. Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez réduire ou agrandir les lignes et les colonnes groupées pour afficher uniquement les données nécessaires. Il est également possible de créer une structure à plusieurs niveaux des lignes /colonnes groupées. Lorsque c'est nécessaire, vous pouvez dissocier les lignes/colonnes précédemment groupées.

                  Grouper les lignes et colonnes

                  Pour grouper les lignes et colonnes :

                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm index e15da24616..72ffffcf4a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                    Insérer le code en surbrillance

                    -

                    Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez intégrer votre code mis en surbrillance auquel le style est déjà appliqué à correspondre avec le langage de programmation et le style de coloration dans le programme choisi.

                    +

                    Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez intégrer votre code mis en surbrillance auquel le style est déjà appliqué à correspondre avec le langage de programmation et le style de coloration dans le programme choisi.

                    1. Accédez à votre feuille de calcul et placez le curseur à l'endroit où le code doit être inséré.
                    2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                      Code en surbrillance.
                      3. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm index 0fa1a64979..58bf2d2da0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm @@ -12,16 +12,16 @@
                      - +

                      Insérer des formules de tableau

                      -

                      L'éditeur des feuilles de calcul Spreadsheet Editor permet d'utiliser les formules de tableau. Les formules de tableau assurent la cohérence entre les formules dans une feuille de calcul, puisque vous pouvez saisir une seule formule au lieu de plusieurs formules habituelles, elles simplifient le travail sur une grande quantité de données et permettent de remplir une feuille avec des données, etc.

                      +

                      L'éditeur de classeurs permet d'utiliser les formules de tableau. Les formules de tableau assurent la cohérence entre les formules dans une feuille de calcul, puisque vous pouvez saisir une seule formule au lieu de plusieurs formules habituelles, elles simplifient le travail sur une grande quantité de données et permettent de remplir une feuille avec des données, etc.

                      Vous pouvez saisir des formules et des fonctions incorporées en tant que formules de tableau pour:

                      • effectuer plusieurs calculs à la fois et afficher un seul résultat, ou
                      • renvoyer une plage de valeurs affichées dans plusieurs lignes et/ou colonnes.
                      -

                      Il existe également des fonctions désignées qui peuvent renvoyer plusieurs valeurs. Si vous les saisissez en appuyant sur Entrée, elles renvoient une seule valeur. Si vous sélectionnez une plage de sortie de cellules pour afficher les résultats, ensuite saisissez une fonction en appuyant sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée, une plage de valeurs sera renvoyée (le nombre de valeurs renvoyées dépend de la taille de la plage de sortie précédemment sélectionnée). La liste ci-dessous contient des liens vers les descriptions détaillées de ces fonctions.

                      +

                      Il existe également des fonctions désignées qui peuvent renvoyer plusieurs valeurs. Si vous les saisissez en appuyant sur Entrée, elles renvoient une seule valeur. Si vous sélectionnez une plage de sortie de cellules pour afficher les résultats, ensuite saisissez une fonction en appuyant sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée, une plage de valeurs sera renvoyée (le nombre de valeurs renvoyées dépend de la taille de la plage de sortie précédemment sélectionnée). La liste ci-dessous contient des liens vers les descriptions détaillées de ces fonctions.

                      Fonctions de tableau
                      @@ -71,32 +76,32 @@

                      Insérer des formules de tableau

                      Insérer des formules de tableau

                    -

                    Les résultats seront affichés dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, et la formule dans la barre de formule sera automatiquement placée entre accolades { } pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'une formule de tableau. Par exemple, {=UNIQUE(B2:D6)}. Les accolades ne peuvent pas être saisies manuellement.

                    +

                    Les résultats seront affichés dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, et la formule dans la barre de formule sera automatiquement placée entre accolades { } pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'une formule de tableau. Par exemple, {=UNIQUE(B2:D6)}. Les accolades ne peuvent pas être saisies manuellement.

                    Créer des formules de tableau à cellule unique

                    -

                    L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une seule cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule, saisissez =SOMME(C2:C11*D2:D11) et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    +

                    L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une seule cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule, saisissez =SOMME(C2:C11*D2:D11) et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    Insérer des formules de tableau

                    Créer des formules de tableau à plusieurs cellules

                    -

                    L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une plage de cellules. Sélectionnez une plage de cellules, saisissez =C2:C11*D2:D11 et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    +

                    L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une plage de cellules. Sélectionnez une plage de cellules, saisissez =C2:C11*D2:D11 et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    Insérer des formules de tableau

                    Modifier des formules de tableau

                    Chaque fois que vous modifiez une formule de tableau saisie (par exemple, modifiez les arguments), vous avez besoin d'utiliser la combinaison de touches Ctrl + Maj + Entrée afin d'enregistrer les modifications.

                    L'exemple qui suit explique comment développer une formule de tableau plusieurs cellules lorsque vous ajoutez de nouvelles données. Sélectionnez toutes les cellules qui contiennent une formule de tableau, ainsi que les cellules vides à côté des nouvelles données, modifiez les arguments dans la barre de formule afin qu'ils incluent les nouvelles données, ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    Modifier des formules de tableau

                    Si vous souhaitez appliquer une formule de tableau à plusieurs cellules dans une plage de cellules plus petite, il vous faut supprimer la formule de tableau actuelle, puis saisir une nouvelle formule de tableau.

                    -

                    Une partie de matrice ne peut pas être modifiée ou supprimée. Si vous essayez de modifier, déplacer ou supprimer une seule cellule dans le tableau ou d'insérer une nouvelle cellule dans le tableau, vous obtenez l'avertissement: Impossible de modifier une partie de matrice.

                    -

                    Afin de supprimer une formule de tableau, sélectionnez toutes les cellules avec la formule de tableau et cliquez sur Supprimer. Vou pouvez également sélectionner une formule de tableau dans la barre de formules, cliquez sur Supprimer et ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    +

                    Une partie de matrice ne peut pas être modifiée ou supprimée. Si vous essayez de modifier, déplacer ou supprimer une seule cellule dans le tableau ou d'insérer une nouvelle cellule dans le tableau, vous obtenez l'avertissement: Impossible de modifier une partie de matrice.

                    +

                    Afin de supprimer une formule de tableau, sélectionnez toutes les cellules avec la formule de tableau et cliquez sur Supprimer. Vou pouvez également sélectionner une formule de tableau dans la barre de formules, cliquez sur Supprimer et ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée.

                    Exemples d'utilisation de formules de tableau

                    Cette section présente quelques exemples d'utilisation des formules de tableau pour accomplir certaines tâches.

                    Compter le nombre de caractères dans une plage de cellules

                    -

                    Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: =SOMME(NBCAR(B2:B11)). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction SOMME permet d'additionner les valeurs.

                    +

                    Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: =SOMME(NBCAR(B2:B11)). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction SOMME permet d'additionner les valeurs.

                    Insérer des formules de tableau

                    Pour obtenir le nombre moyen de caractères, remplacez SOMME par MOYENNE.

                    Trouver la chaîne la plus longue dans une plage de cellules

                    -

                    Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: La fonction NBCAR calcule la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. =INDEX(B2:B11,EQUIV(MAX(NBCAR(B2:B11)),NBCAR(B2:B11),0),1). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction MAX permet de calculer la plus grande valeur. La fonction EQUIV trouve l'adresse de la cellule avec la chaîne la plus longue. La fonction INDEX retourne la valeur de la cellule trouvée.

                    +

                    Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: La fonction NBCAR calcule la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. =INDEX(B2:B11,EQUIV(MAX(NBCAR(B2:B11)),NBCAR(B2:B11),0),1). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction MAX permet de calculer la plus grande valeur. La fonction EQUIV trouve l'adresse de la cellule avec la chaîne la plus longue. La fonction INDEX retourne la valeur de la cellule trouvée.

                    Insérer des formules de tableau

                    Pour trouver la chaîne la plus courte, remplacez MAX par MIN.

                    Faire la somme des valeurs à base des conditions

                    -

                    Pour faire la somme des valeurs supérieures à un nombre spécifié (2 dans cet exemple), vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant les plages de cellules dans les arguments par vos propres plages: =SOMME(IF(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). La fonction SI permet de créer un tableau de valeurs vraies et fausses. La fonction SOMME permet d'ignorer les fausses valeurs et additionne les valeurs vraies.

                    +

                    Pour faire la somme des valeurs supérieures à un nombre spécifié (2 dans cet exemple), vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant les plages de cellules dans les arguments par vos propres plages: =SOMME(IF(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). La fonction SI permet de créer un tableau de valeurs vraies et fausses. La fonction SOMME permet d'ignorer les fausses valeurs et additionne les valeurs vraies.

                    Insérer des formules de tableau

                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 60ce623495..38cae975c3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer et mettre en forme des formes automatiques - + @@ -11,190 +11,242 @@
                    -
                    - -
                    +
                    + +

                    Insérer et mettre en forme des formes automatiques

                    Insérer une forme automatique

                    -

                    Pour ajouter une forme automatique au Tableur,

                    +

                    Pour insérer une forme dans l'éditeur de classeurs,

                      -
                    1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                      2. -
                    2. cliquez sur l'icône Forme
                      de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                      3. -
                    3. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles dans la Galerie des formes : Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
                      4. +
                    4. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                      5. +
                    5. cliquez sur l'icône
                      l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                      6. +
                    6. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles depuis la Galerie de formes: Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
                    7. cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné,
                    8. placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme,
                      9. -
                    9. une fois que la forme automatique est ajoutée vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position aussi bien que ses propriétés. +
                    10. une fois que la forme automatique est ajoutée vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position aussi bien que ses propriétés. Vous pouvez sauvegarder la forme en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel.
                    +

                    Copier la mise en forme du style de la forme automatique

                    +

                    Pour copier la mise en forme du style d'une forme automatique,

                    +
                      +
                    1. sélectionnez la forme automatique dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme en utilisant la souris ou le clavier,
                      2. +
                    2. cliquez l'icône Copier le style
                      sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci
                      ),
                      3. +
                    3. sélectionnez la forme automatique à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme.
                      4. +
                    + +

                    Régler les paramètres de la forme automatique

                    -

                    Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite qui s'ouvre si vous sélectionnez la forme automatique avec la souris et cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme . Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                    +

                    Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite qui s'ouvre si vous sélectionnez la forme automatique avec la souris et cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme . Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants:

                      -
                    • Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : -
                        -
                      • Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. -

                        Couleur de remplissage

                        -

                        Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix :

                        +
                      • + Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes:
                          -
                        • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul.
                          • -
                        • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut.
                          • -
                        • Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à la forme automatique et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu. +
                        • + Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. +

                          Couleur de remplissage

                          +

                          Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur que vous aimez:

                          +
                            +
                          • Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul.
                            • +
                          • Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut.
                            • +
                          • + Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: +
                              +
                            • + Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans le document. +
                              • +
                            • + Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: +

                              Palette - Couleur personnalisée

                              +

                              La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes.

                              +
                              • +
                            +
                            • +
                          • -
                        -
                        • -
                      • Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur Paramètres de la forme
                        pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale droite : -

                        Remplissage en dégradé

                        -

                        Les options disponibles du menu :

                        -
                          -
                        • Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial : -
                            -
                          • Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé.
                            • -
                          • Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée.
                            • -
                          -
                          • -
                        • Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. -
                            -
                          • Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé
                            ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé
                            pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé.
                            • -
                          • Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis.
                            • -
                          • Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée.
                            • -
                          -
                          • -
                        -
                        • -
                      • Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme. -

                        Remplissage Image ou Texture

                        -
                          -
                        • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez cliquez sur Sélectionnez l'image et ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou A partir de l'espace de stockage à l'aide du gestionnaire de fichiers ONLYOFFICE, ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte.
                          • -
                        • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. -

                          Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                          +
                        • + Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme.
                          pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: +

                          Remplissage en dégradé

                          +

                          Les options disponibles du menu:

                          +
                            +
                          • + Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: +
                              +
                            • Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé.
                              • +
                            • Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée.
                              • +
                            +
                            • +
                          • + Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. +
                              +
                            • Utilisez le bouton
                              Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton
                              Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé.
                              • +
                            • Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis.
                              • +
                            • Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée.
                              • +
                            +
                            • +
                          • -
                        -
                          -
                        • Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Prolonger ou Tuile depuis la liste déroulante. -

                          L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                          -

                          L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                          -

                          Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire.

                          +
                        • + Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme. +

                          Remplissage Image ou Texture

                          +
                            +
                          • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez cliquez sur Sélectionnez l'image et ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou A partir de l'espace de stockage à l'aide du gestionnaire de fichiers ONLYOFFICE, ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte.
                            • +
                          • + Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. +

                            Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: +Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                            +
                            • +
                          +
                            +
                          • + Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Prolonger ou Tuile depuis la liste déroulante. +

                            L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                            +

                            L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                            +

                            Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire.

                            +
                            • +
                          • +
                        • + Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. +

                          Remplissage avec un modèle

                          +
                            +
                          • Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu.
                            • +
                          • Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle.
                            • +
                          • Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle.
                            • +
                          +
                          • +
                        • Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.
                        • -
                      • Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. -

                        Remplissage avec un modèle

                        +
                      +

                      Onglet Paramètres de la forme

                      +
                        +
                      • Opacité sert à régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Celle-ci correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.
                        • +
                      • + Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme.
                          -
                        • Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu.
                          • -
                        • Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle.
                          • -
                        • Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle.
                          • +
                        • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                          • +
                        • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                          • +
                        • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                          • +
                        • Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur.
                        -
                        • -
                      • Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.
                        • -
                      -
                      • -
                    • Opacité sert à régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Celle-ci correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.
                      • -
                    • Ligne - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme. +
                      • +
                    • + Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: +
                        +
                      • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                        • +
                      • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                        • +
                      • pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                        • +
                      • pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
                        • +
                      +
                      • +
                    • Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante.
                      • +
                    • Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à une forme.
                      • +
                    +
                    +

                    Configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme

                    +

                    Pour configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre:

                    +

                    Forme - Paramètres avancés

                    +

                    L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants:

                      -
                    • Pour modifier la largeur du ligne, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de ligne.
                      • -
                    • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                      • -
                    • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                      • +
                    • Largeur et Hauteur utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur de la forme. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                      est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci),
                      la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps et le ratio d'aspect de la forme automatique originale sera préservé.
                    - -
                  1. - Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : -
                      -
                    • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                      • -
                    • pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                      • -
                    • pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                      • -
                    • pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
                      • -
                    -
                    2. -
                  2. Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante.
                    3. -
                  3. Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à une forme.
                    4. -
              -
              -

              Configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme

              -

              Pour configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre :

              -

              Forme - Paramètres avancés

              -

              L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants :

              -
                -
              • Largeur et Hauteur  utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur de la forme. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes
                est activé (dans ce cas elle se présente comme suit
                ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement.
                • -
              -

              Forme - Paramètres avancés

              -

              L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

              -
                -
              • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                • -
              • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers).
                • -
              -

              Forme - Paramètres avancés

              -

              L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants :

              -
                -
              • Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : +

                Forme - Paramètres avancés

                +

                L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants:

                  -
                • Type de lettrine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc. : -
                    -
                  • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                    • -
                  • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                    • -
                  • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                    • -
                  -
                  • -
                • Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : -
                    -
                  • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                    • -
                  • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                    • -
                  • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.
                    • -
                  -

                  Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

                  -
                  • +
                • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                  • +
                • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers).
                -
                • -
              • Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante.
                • -
              -

              Forme - Paramètres avancés

              -

              L'onglet Zone de texte vous permet de Redimensionner la forme pour contenir la texte, Autoriser le texte à sortir de la forme ou changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).

              -

              Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

              -

              Paramètres de la forme - L'onglet Colonnes

              -

              L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre.

              -

              Forme - Paramètres avancés Alignement dans une cellule

              -

              L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes :

              -
                -
              • Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer la forme derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple : insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), la forme se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension de la forme s'ajuste aussi.
                • -
              • Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé la forme derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher sa redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, la forme se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, la forme demeure inchangée.
                • -
              • Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement de la forme si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées.
                • -
              -

              Forme - Paramètres avancés L'onglet Texte de remplacement

              -

              L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de la forme.

              -
              -

              Insérer et mettre en forme du texte dans la forme automatique

              -

              Pour insérer un texte dans la forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme avec la souris et commencez à taper votre texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi).

              -

              Toutes les options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer au texte dans la forme automatique sont listées ici.

              -
              -

              Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs

              -

              Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour ce faire,

              -
                -
              1. cliquez sur l'icône Forme
                dans l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                2. -
              2. sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, -

                Formes - Lignes

                -
                3. -
              3. cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre),
                4. -
              4. passez le curseur de la souris sur la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexions
                apparaissant sur le contour, -

                -
                5. -
              5. faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la deuxième forme automatique et cliquez sur le point de connexion voulu sur son contour. -

                -
                6. -
              -

              Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles.

              -

              -

              Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion.

              -

              Affecter une macro à une forme

              -

              Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une forme. Une fois la macro affectée, la forme apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus.

              -

              Pour affecter une macro :

              -
                -
              • - Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la forme et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. -

                Affecter une macro dans le menu

                -
                • -
              • La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche.
                • -
              • - Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK. -

                Affecter une macro

                -
                • -
              - +

              Forme - Paramètres avancés

              +

              L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants:

              +
                +
              • + Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants: +
                  +
                • + Type de lettrine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: +
                    +
                  • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                    • +
                  • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                    • +
                  • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                    • +
                  +
                  • +
                • + Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle: +
                    +
                  • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                    • +
                  • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                    • +
                  • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.
                    • +
                  +

                  Remarque: l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

                  +
                  • +
                +
                • +
              • Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante.
                • +
              +

              Forme - Paramètres avancés

              +

              L'onglet Zone de texte vous permet de Redimensionner la forme pour contenir la texte, Autoriser le texte à sortir de la forme ou changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).

              +

              Remarque: cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

              +

              Paramètres de la forme - L'onglet Colonnes

              +

              L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre.

              +

              Forme - Paramètres avancés Alignement dans une cellule

              +

              L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes:

              +
                +
              • Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer la forme derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), la forme se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension de la forme s'ajuste aussi.
                • +
              • Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé la forme derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher sa redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, la forme se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, la forme demeure inchangée.
                • +
              • Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement de la forme si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées.
                • +
              +

              Forme - Paramètres avancés L'onglet Texte de remplacement

              +

              L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de la forme.

              +
              +

              Insérer et mettre en forme du texte dans la forme automatique

              +

              Pour insérer un texte dans la forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme avec la souris et commencez à taper votre texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi).

              +

              Toutes les options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer au texte dans la forme automatique sont listées ici.

              +
              +

              Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs

              +

              Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour ce faire,

              +
                +
              1. cliquez sur l'icône
                Forme sous l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                2. +
              2. + sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, +

                Formes - Lignes

                +
                3. +
              3. cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre),
                4. +
              4. + faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexion
                qui s'affiche sur le contour de la forme, +

                +
                5. +
              5. + faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la deuxième forme automatique et cliquez sur le point de connexion voulu sur son contour. +

                +
                6. +
              +

              Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles.

              +

              +

              Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion.

              +

              Affecter une macro à une forme

              +

              Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une forme. Une fois la macro affectée, la forme apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus.

              +

              Pour affecter une macro:

              +
                +
              • + Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la forme et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. +

                Affecter une macro dans le menu

                +
                • +
              • La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche.
                • +
              • + Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK. +

                Affecter une macro

                +
                • +
              + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm index 660bd2af7a..846cc5c8f6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer des graphiques - + @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

              Insérer des graphiques

              Insérer un graphique

              -

              Pour insérer un graphique dans Spreadsheet Editor,

              +

              Pour insérer un graphique dans l'éditeur de claseurs,

              1. Sélectionnez la plage de cellules comportant des données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour le graphique,
              2. Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                3. @@ -26,10 +26,10 @@

                Insérer un graphique

                • Histogramme groupé
                • Histogramme empilé
                  • -
                • Histogramme empilé 100%
                  • +
                • Histogramme empilé 100 %
                • Histogramme groupé en 3D
                • Histogramme empilé en 3D
                  • -
                • Histogramme empilé 100% en 3D
                  • +
                • Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D
                • Histogrammes en 3D
              Graphiques en ligne @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@

              Insérer un graphique

              • Barres groupées
              • Barres empilées
                • -
              • Barres empilées 100%
                • +
              • Barres empilées 100 %
              • Barres groupées en 3D
              • Barres empilées en 3D
                • -
              • Barres empilées 100% en 3D
                • +
              • Barres empilées 100 % en 3D
              Graphiques en aires
                @@ -72,9 +72,15 @@

                Insérer un graphique

              • Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs
              • Disperser avec des lignes droites
              +
              Radars +
                +
              • Radar
                • +
              • Radar avec marqueurs
                • +
              • Radar plein
                • +
              Graphiques Combo
                -
              • Histogramme groupé - lignes
                • +
              • Histogramme groupé - Courbe
              • Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire
              • Aires empilées - histogramme groupé
              • Combinaison personnalisée
                • @@ -117,51 +123,51 @@

                Régler les paramètres du graphique

                1. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données sur le panneau latéral droit.
                2. - Utiliser la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, la Série de la légende, le Nom de l'axe horizontal, et Changer de ligne ou de colonne. + Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, les Entrées de légende (Série), le Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), et Intervertir ligne/colonne.

                  La fenêtre Données du graphique

                  • - Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. + Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique.
                    • Cliquez sur
                      l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. -

                      La fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                      +

                      Fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                  • - Série de la légende - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. + Entrées de légende (Série) - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende.
                      -
                    • Dans la Série de la légende, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                      • +
                    • Dans Entrées de légende (Série), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter.
                    • - Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur
                      à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom. -

                      La fenêtre Modifier la série

                      + Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur
                      l'icône à droite de la zone Nom de la série. +

                      La fenêtre Modifier la série

                  • - Nom de l'axe horizontal - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe + Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse) - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe.
                      -
                    • Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'axe horizontal cliquez sur Modifier.
                      • +
                    • Dans Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), cliquez sur Modifier.
                    • Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur
                      l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données.

                      La fenêtre Étiquettes de l'axe

                    • -
                  • Changer de ligne ou de colonne - modifier le façon de traçage des données dans la feuille de calcul. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe.
                    • +
                  • Intervertir ligne/colonne - réorganiser la configuration de données dans la feuille de calcul selon vos besoins. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe.
                3. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre.
                -

                Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour modifier paramètres tels que Disposition, Axe vertical, Second axe vertical, Axe horizontal, Second axe horizontal, Alignement dans une cellule et Texte de remplacement.

                +

                Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour modifier les paramètres suivants: Disposition, Axe vertical, Axe vertical secondaire, Axe horizontal, Axe horizontal secondaire, Accrochage à la cellule et Texte de remplacement.

                Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique.

                • - Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: + Définissez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option appropriée dans la liste déroulante:
                    -
                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique,
                    • +
                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique,
                  • Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé,
                  • Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé.
                  @@ -169,29 +175,29 @@

                  Régler les paramètres du graphique

                • Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                    -
                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher de légende,
                    • +
                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher la légende,
                  • En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                  • Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé.
                    • +
                  • Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé.
                • Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données):
                  • - Spécifiez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. + Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné.
                      -
                    • Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                      • -
                    • Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Centre, À gauche, À droite, En haut.
                      • -
                    • Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                      • -
                    • Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, en Ligne et à Barres vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre.
                      • +
                    • Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, En bas à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                      • +
                    • Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, À droite, À gauche, En haut, En bas.
                      • +
                    • Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur.
                      • +
                    • Pour les graphiques En aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, En ligne, Radar et En barres vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre.
                    • -
                  • Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur,
                    • -
                  • Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur d'étiquettes de données.
                    • +
                  • Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de série, Nom de catégorie, Valeur,
                    • +
                  • Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données.
                • Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes.
                  • @@ -201,39 +207,40 @@

                  Régler les paramètres du graphique

                Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                -

                L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                +

                L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Veuillez noter que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage.

                • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
                • Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante:
                    -
                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical
                    • +
                  • Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical,
                  • Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical,
                  • Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical.
                  • -
                • Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                  • +
                • Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                • Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                  • -
                • Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical.
                  • -
                • Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
                  • -
                • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas.
                  • +
                • Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical.
                  • +
                • Unités d'affichage - sert à déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
                  • +
                • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - sert à afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas.
                  • +
                • Échelle logarithmique - sert à activer l'échelle logarithmique pour la Base définie par l'utilisateur.
                • La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes:
                    -
                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires,
                    • -
                  • Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe,
                    • -
                  • Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe,
                    • -
                  • A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                    • +
                  • Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires,
                    • +
                  • Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe,
                    • +
                  • Dans pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe,
                    • +
                  • En dehors pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                • - La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: + La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                    -
                  • Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations,
                    • -
                  • En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé,
                    • -
                  • À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe.
                    • +
                  • Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations,
                    • +
                  • En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé,
                    • +
                  • À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe.
                  • @@ -265,9 +272,9 @@

                    Régler les paramètres du graphique

                    Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont pris en charge par des graphiques Combo uniquement.

                    Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement.

                    -

                    L'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous.

                    +

                    L'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous.

                    Fenêtre Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                    -

                    L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                    +

                    L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Veuillez noter que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                    • Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe.
                    • @@ -277,23 +284,23 @@

                      Régler les paramètres du graphique

                    • Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal.
                    • -
                  • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires.
                    • -
                  • Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical.
                    • -
                  • Position de l'étiquette - est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduation ou Entre graduations.
                    • +
                  • Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun, Principal, Secondaire ou Principales et secondaires.
                    • +
                  • Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimale/maximale (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical.
                    • +
                  • Position de l'axe - sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduations ou Entre graduations.
                  • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche.
                  • - La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations principales sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: + La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants:
                      -
                    • Type principal/secondaire est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                      • -
                    • Intervalle entre les marques - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes.
                      • +
                    • Type principale/secondaire - sert à spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe.
                      • +
                    • Intervalle entre les graduations - sert à spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes.
                  • La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories.
                      -
                    • Position de l'étiquette est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe.
                      • -
                    • Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande.
                      • -
                    • Intervalle entre les étiquettes - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux.
                      • +
                    • Position de l'étiquette sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe.
                      • +
                    • Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - sert à spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande.
                      • +
                    • Intervalle entre les étiquettes - sert à spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux.
                    • Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée.

                      Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles:

                      @@ -318,7 +325,7 @@

                      Régler les paramètres du graphique

                  -

                  L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes:

                  +

                  L'onglet Accrochage à la cellule comprend les options suivantes:

                  • Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi.
                  • Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé.
                    • @@ -330,9 +337,9 @@

                    Régler les paramètres du graphique

                    Modifier les éléments de graphique

                    Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place.

                    Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur.

                    -

                    Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder à l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et le Trait. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme.

                    +

                    Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder à l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et la Ligne de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme.

                    - Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans le panneau droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, taille et type. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cet page. + Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme sur le panneau de droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, largeur, taille et opacité. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cet page.

                    Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique.

                    Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément.

                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm index 3cf7d8d0d7..bbc8367936 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                    Insérer ou supprimer des cellules, des lignes et des colonnes

                    -

                    Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez insérer des cellules vides au-dessus ou à gauche de la cellule sélectionnée dans une feuille de calcul. Vous pouvez également insérer une ligne entière au-dessus de la ligne sélectionnée ou une colonne à gauche de la colonne sélectionnée. Pour faciliter la visualisation d'une grande quantité d'informations, vous pouvez masquer certaines lignes ou colonnes et les afficher à nouveau. Il est également possible de spécifier une certaine hauteur de ligne et largeur de colonne.

                    +

                    Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez insérer des cellules vides au-dessus ou à gauche de la cellule sélectionnée dans une feuille de calcul. Vous pouvez également insérer une ligne entière au-dessus de la ligne sélectionnée ou une colonne à gauche de la colonne sélectionnée. Pour faciliter la visualisation d'une grande quantité d'informations, vous pouvez masquer certaines lignes ou colonnes et les afficher à nouveau. Il est également possible de spécifier une certaine hauteur de ligne et largeur de colonne.

                    Insérer une cellule, une ligne ou une colonne

                    Pour insérer une cellule vide à gauche de la cellule sélectionnée :

                      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm index b96d671511..e209624a8a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                      Insérer des équations

                      -

                      Spreadsheet Editor vous permet de créer des équations à l'aide des modèles intégrés, de les modifier, d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (à savoir des opérateurs mathématiques, des lettres grecques, des accents, etc.).

                      +

                      L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet de créer des équations à l'aide des modèles intégrés, de les modifier, d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (à savoir des opérateurs mathématiques, des lettres grecques, des accents, etc.).

                      Ajouter une nouvelle équation

                      Pour insérer une équation depuis la galerie,

                        diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm index 8e59a4dc12..05ec4da0dc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer une fonction - + @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                        Insérer une fonction

                        -

                        La possibilité d'accomplir les opérations de calcul de base est la raison principale d'utiliserSpreadsheet Editor. Certaines d'entre elles sont exécutées automatiquement lorsque vous sélectionnez une plage de cellules dans votre feuille de calcul:

                        +

                        La possibilité d'accomplir les opérations de calcul de base est la raison principale d'utiliser l'éditeur de classeurs. Certaines d'entre elles sont exécutées automatiquement lorsque vous sélectionnez une plage de cellules dans votre feuille de calcul:

                          @@ -89,9 +89,10 @@

                          Insérer des graphiques SmartArt

                        • Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt.
                            -
                          • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                            • +
                          • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                          • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                          • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                            • +
                          • Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur.
                        • Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt.
                          • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm index 7c6a9644b6..e21db9dba0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                          Insérer des graphiques sparkline

                          Utiliser des graphiques sparkline

                          -

                          Un graphique sparkline est un graphique tout petit qui s'adapte à la taille de la cellule et représente des tendances ou des variations des données. Les fonctionnalités des graphiques sparkline sont limitées par comparaison avec des graphiques habituels mais c'est un excellent outil d'analyse rapide des données et de représentation visuelle compacte. La taille d'un graphique sparkline dépend de la taille de la cellule, ajustez la largeur et la longueur de la cellule pour paramétrer la taille du graphique sparkline. Une fois le graphique sparkline ajouté, il est possible de saisir du texte ou appliquer une mise en forme conditionnelle dans la même cellule. Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE vous propose trois types de graphiques sparkline :

                          +

                          Un graphique sparkline est un graphique tout petit qui s'adapte à la taille de la cellule et représente des tendances ou des variations des données. Les fonctionnalités des graphiques sparkline sont limitées par comparaison avec des graphiques habituels mais c'est un excellent outil d'analyse rapide des données et de représentation visuelle compacte. La taille d'un graphique sparkline dépend de la taille de la cellule, ajustez la largeur et la longueur de la cellule pour paramétrer la taille du graphique sparkline. Une fois le graphique sparkline ajouté, il est possible de saisir du texte ou appliquer une mise en forme conditionnelle dans la même cellule. L'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE vous propose trois types de graphiques sparkline:

                          • Colonne est similaire à un Graphique à colonnes ordinaire.
                            • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm index 63922ba144..af68a1b0c2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Insérer des symboles et des caractères

                            -

                            Pendant le processus de travail dans le Tableur, vous devrez peut-être insérer un symbole qui n'est pas sur votre clavier. Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre document, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples :

                            +

                            Pendant le processus de travail dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous devrez peut-être insérer un symbole qui n'est pas sur votre clavier. Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre document, utilisez l'option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples:

                            • placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un symbole spécifique,
                            • passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                              • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index 194d87241d..7fe791e4e0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Insérer des objets textuels - + @@ -15,49 +15,50 @@

                              Insérer des objets textuels

                              -

                              Dans le Tableur pour attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique de la feuille de calcul, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte).

                              +

                              L'éditeur de classeurs permet d'attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique de la feuille de calcul, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte).

                              Ajouter un objet textuel

                              -

                              Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la feuille de calcul. Pour le faire :

                              +

                              Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la feuille de calcul. Pour ce faire:

                              1. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                2. -
                              2. sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel voulu : +
                              3. sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel voulu:
                                  -
                                • Pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône
                                  Zone de texte de la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. -

                                  Remarque : il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme dans le groupe Formes de base.

                                  +
                                • pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur
                                  l'icône Zone de texte de la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. +

                                  Il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez la forme d'insertion du texte dans le groupe Formes de base.

                                  • -
                                • Pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte.
                                  • +
                                • pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur
                                  l'icône Text Art de la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte.
                              4. cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir à la feuille de calcul.

                              Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi).

                              Comme un objet textuel inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte.

                              +

                              Vous pouvez sauvegarder un objet textuel en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel.

                              Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé.

                              Mettre en forme une zone de texte

                              Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées).

                              Zone de texte sélectionnée

                              • Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte manuellement, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme.
                                • -
                              • Pour modifier le remplissage, le contourou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramèteres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme
                                dans la barre latérale de droite et utilisez les options correspondantes.
                                • -
                              • Pour organiser les zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, aligner plusieurs zones de texte les unes par rapport aux autres, faire pivoter ou retourner une zone de texte, cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utiliser les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                • -
                              • Pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez ensuite sur l'option Paramètres avancés de forme et passez à l'onglet Colonnes de la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés.
                                • +
                              • pour modifier le remplissage, le contour ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme
                                dans la barre latérale sur la droite et utilisez les options correspondantes.
                                • +
                              • pour organiser les zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, aligner plusieurs zones de texte les unes par rapport aux autres, faire pivoter ou retourner une zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utiliser les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                • +
                              • pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez ensuite sur l'option Paramètres avancés de forme et passez à l'onglet Colonnes dans la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés.

                              Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte

                              Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées.

                              Texte sélectionné

                              -

                              Remarque : il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée.

                              +

                              Il est également possible de modifier la mise en forme du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à chaque fragment du texte sélectionnée à part.

                                -
                              • Ajustez les paramètres de mise en forme des polices (modifiez le type de police, la taille, la couleur et l'application des styles de décoration) à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Certains paramètres de police supplémentaires peuvent également être modifiés dans l'onglet Police de la fenêtre des propriétés de paragraphe. Pour y accéder, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte dans la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe.
                                • -
                              • Alignez le texte horizontalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés.
                                • -
                              • Alignez le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte et choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas.
                                • -
                              • Faites pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut).
                                • +
                              • Ajustez les paramètres de mise en forme des polices (modifiez le type de police, la taille, la couleur et l'application des styles de décoration) à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Certains paramètres de police supplémentaires peuvent également être modifiés dans l'onglet Police de la fenêtre des propriétés de paragraphe. Pour y accéder, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte dans la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe.
                                • +
                              • Alignez le texte horizontalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés .
                                • +
                              • Alignez le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte et choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas.
                                • +
                              • Faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut).
                              • Créez une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Puces et numérotation dans le menu contextuel, puis choisissez l'un des caractères à puce ou des styles de numérotation disponibles.

                                Puces et la numérotation

                                -

                                L'option paramètres de la liste permet d'afficher la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste où on peut configurer les paramètres de la liste appropriée :

                                +

                                L'option paramètres de la liste permet d'afficher la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste où on peut configurer les paramètres de la liste appropriée:

                                La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste à puces

                                -

                                Type (à puces) - permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur Nouvelle puce, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître où vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles.

                                -

                                Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle image, un nouveau champ Importer s'ouvre dans lequel vous pouvez choisir de nouvelles images pour les puces A partir d'un fichier, A partir d'une URL, ou A partir de l'espace de stockage.

                                +

                                Type (à puces) - permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur Nouvelle puce, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître où vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des symboles, veuillez consulter cette page.

                                +

                                Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle image, un nouveau champ Importer s'ouvre dans lequel vous pouvez choisir de nouvelles images pour les puces À partir d'un fichier, À partir d'une URL, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage.

                                La fenêtre Paramètres de la liste à puces

                                Type (Numéroté) - permet de sélectionner la mise en forme appropriée des éléments de la liste numérotée.

                                  @@ -66,41 +67,41 @@

                                  Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texteCommencer par sert à spécifier le numéro à partir duquel vous voulez commencer la numérotation.

                                • -
                              • Insérez un lien hypertexte
                                • +
                              • insérer un lien hypertexte
                              • - Définissez l'espacement des lignes et des paragraphes pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte à l'aide de l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe de la barre latérale de droite qui s'ouvre si vous cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du paragraphe
                                . Spécifiez l'interligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et le précédent ou le suivant. -

                                L'onglet Paramètres du texte

                                + Définissez l'espacement des lignes et des paragraphes pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte à l'aide de l'onglet Paramètres de paragraphe de la barre latérale de droite qui s'ouvre si vous cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de paragraphe
                                . Spécifiez l'interligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et le précédent ou le suivant. +

                                Onglet Paramètres de paragraphe

                                  -
                                • Interligne - réglez la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe. Vous pouvez choisir parmi deux options : Multiple (sert à régler l'interligne exprimée en nombre supérieur à 1), Exactement (sert à définir l'interligne fixe). Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite.
                                  • +
                                • Interligne - réglez la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe. Vous pouvez choisir parmi deux options: multiple (sert à régler l'interligne exprimée en nombre supérieur à 1), exactement (sert à définir l'interligne fixe). Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite.
                                • Espacement de paragraphe - définissez l'espace entre les paragraphes.
                                  • Avant - réglez la taille de l'espace avant le paragraphe.
                                  • Après - réglez la taille de l'espace après le paragraphe.
                                  -

                                  Remarque : on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés.

                                  +

                                  Ces paramètres sont également accessibles dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancées.

                              Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe

                              -

                              Modifiez les paramètres avancés du paragraphe (vous pouvez configurer les retraits du paragraphe ou les taquets de tabulation pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte et modifier quelques paramètres de mise en forme de la police) Placer le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix - l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe devient actif sur la barre latérale droite. Appuyez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit dans la zone de texte et utiliser l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe dans le menu contextuel. La fenêtre paramètres du paragraphe s'ouvre :

                              +

                              Modifiez les paramètres avancés du paragraphe (vous pouvez configurer les retraits du paragraphe ou les taquets de tabulation pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte et modifier quelques paramètres de mise en forme de la police) Placer le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix - l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe devient actif sur la barre latérale droite. Appuyez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit dans la zone de texte et utiliser l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe dans le menu contextuel. La fenêtre paramètres du paragraphe s'ouvre:

                              Paramètres du paragraphe - Retraits et espacement

                              -

                              L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de :

                              +

                              L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de:

                              • modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe,
                              • modifier les retraits du paragraphe par rapport aux marges internes de la zone de texte,
                                  -
                                • A gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée,
                                  • -
                                • A droite - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne droite de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée,
                                  • -
                                • Spécial - spécifier le retrait de première ligne du paragraphe : sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu,
                                  • +
                                • À gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée,
                                  • +
                                • À droite - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne droite de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée,
                                  • +
                                • Spécial - spécifier le retrait de la première ligne du paragraphe: sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu,
                              • modifiez l'interligne du paragraphe.

                              Paramètres du paragraphe - l'onglet Police

                              -

                              L'onglet Police comporte les paramètres suivants :

                              +

                              L'onglet Police comporte les paramètres suivants:

                              • Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres.
                              • Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres.
                                • @@ -116,38 +117,38 @@

                                Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe<

                                L'onglet Tabulation vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation c'est-à-dire l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier.

                                • La tabulation Par défaut est 2.54 cm. Vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer cette valeur en utilisant les boutons à flèche ou en saisissant la valeur nécessaire dans le champ.
                                  • -
                                • Position sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons à flèche et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisée sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ au-dessous.
                                  • +
                                • Position sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons fléchés et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisée sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ au-dessous.
                                • - Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option A gauche, Au centre ou A droite dans la liste déroulante et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. + Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option À gauche, Au centre ou À droite dans la liste déroulante et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier.
                                    -
                                  • A gauche - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation ; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte.
                                    • +
                                  • À gauche - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte.
                                  • Au centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation.
                                    • -
                                  • A droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation ; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte.
                                    • +
                                  • À droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte.

                                  Pour supprimer un taquet de tabulation de la liste sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou Supprimer tout.

                                  • -
                                +

                              Affecter une macro à une zone de texte

                              Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une zone de texte. Une fois la macro affectée, la zone de texte apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus.

                              -

                              Pour affecter une macro :

                              +

                              Pour affecter une macro:

                              • Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. -

                                Affecter une macro dans le menu

                                +

                                Affecter une macro dans le menu

                                • -
                              • La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche.
                                • +
                              • La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche.
                              • Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK.

                                Affecter une macro

                                • -
                              +

                            Modifier un style Text Art

                            -

                            Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale de droite.

                            +

                            Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale sur la droite.

                            Onglet Paramètres de Text Art

                              -
                            • Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police différent, une autre taille, etc.
                              • -
                            • Changez le remplissage et le contour de police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques.
                              • -
                            • Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose.
                              • +
                            • Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un autre type de police, une autre taille, etc.
                              • +
                            • Changez le remplissage et le contourde police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques.
                              • +
                            • Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le niveau de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose.

                            Transformation de Text Art

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm index c080131b34..65d7e8cbd4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Gérer des feuilles de calcul - + @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Gérer des feuilles de calcul

                            -

                            Par défaut, un classeur nouvellement créé contient une feuille de calcul. Le moyen le plus simple d'en ajouter dans le Tableur une est de cliquer sur le bouton Plus situé à la droite des boutons de Navigation de feuille dans le coin inférieur gauche.

                            +

                            Par défaut, un classeur nouvellement créé contient une feuille de calcul. Le moyen le plus simple d'en ajouter dans l'éditeur de classeurs une est de cliquer sur le bouton Plus situé à la droite des boutons de Navigation de feuille dans le coin inférieur gauche.

                            Une autre façon d'ajouter une nouvelle feuille est :

                            1. faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul après laquelle vous souhaitez insérer une nouvelle feuille,
                              2. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm index b5965f0262..17df0c137b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm @@ -15,12 +15,12 @@

                              Manipuler des objets

                              -

                              Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez redimensionner, arranger des formes, des images et des graphiques insérés dans votre classeur.

                              +

                              Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez redimensionner, arranger des formes, des images et des graphiques insérés dans votre classeur.

                              Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici.

                              Redimensionner des objets

                              -

                              Pour changer la taille d'une forme automatique/image/graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de l'objet. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

                              +

                              Pour changer la taille d'une forme automatique/image/graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de l'objet. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

                              Remarque : pour redimensionner des graphiques et des images vous pouvez également utiliser la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer il vous suffit de sélectionner un objet avec la souris. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du graphique ou Paramètres de l'image à droite.

                              Déplacer des objets

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm index 4528d798d1..b53bb73c77 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                              Fonctionnalités de correction automatique

                              -

                              Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique dans le Tableur ONLYOFFICE fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus.

                              +

                              Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique dans l'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus.

                              Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique.

                              La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend trois onglets : AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe.

                              AutoMaths

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm index 6d3c7ad52f..e921cc6ae1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
                              - +

                              Fusionner les cellules

                              Lorsque vous avez besoin de fusionner des cellules afin de mieux positionner votre texte (par exemple, le nom du tableau ou un long fragment de texte dans le tableau), utilisez l'outil Fusionner du Tableur ONLYOFFICE.

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index dc119a8949..606f59760d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -15,10 +15,10 @@

                              Créer un nouveau classeur ou ouvrir un classeur existant

                              -

                              Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez ouvrir une feuille de calcul modifiée récemment, créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou revenir à la liste des feuilles de calcul existantes.

                              +

                              Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez ouvrir une feuille de calcul modifiée récemment, créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou revenir à la liste des feuilles de calcul existantes.

                              Pour créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul

                              -

                              Dans la version en ligne

                              +

                              Dans l'éditeur en ligne

                              1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                              2. sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau.
                                3. @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@

                                Pour créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul

                                Pour ouvrir un document existant

                                -

                                Dans l'éditeur de bureau

                                +

                                Dans l'éditeur de bureau

                                1. dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Ouvrir fichier local dans la barre latérale gauche,
                                2. choisissez la feuille de calcul nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir.
                                  3. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@

                                  Pour ouvrir un document existant

                                  Pour ouvrir une feuille de calcul récemment modifiée

                                  -

                                  Dans la version en ligne

                                  +

                                  Dans l'éditeur en ligne

                                  1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                  2. sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent...,
                                    3. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@

                                    Pour ouvrir une feuille de calcul récemment modifiée

                                  -

                                  Dans l'éditeur de bureau

                                  +

                                  Dans l'éditeur de bureau

                                  1. dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Fichiers récents dans la barre latérale gauche,
                                  2. choisissez la feuille de calcul dont vous avez besoin dans la liste des documents récemment édités.
                                    3. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@

                                    Pour ouvrir une feuille de calcul récemment modifiée

                                    Pour renommer une feuille de calcul ouverte

                                    -

                                    Dans l'éditeur en ligne

                                    +

                                    Dans l'éditeur en ligne

                                    1. cliquez sur le nom de la feuille de calcul en haut de la page,
                                    2. saisissez un nouveau nom de feuille de calcul,
                                      3. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm index 16d0fa1533..78b3822bfb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                    Modification d'une image

                                    -

                                    Tableur ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations.

                                    +

                                    L'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations.

                                    1. Sélectionnez une image incorporée dans votre feuille de calcul.
                                    2. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm index 14e8ed78e0..7bccd402b4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Créer et éditer les tableaux croisés dynamiques - + @@ -15,31 +15,31 @@

                                  Créer et éditer les tableaux croisés dynamiques

                                  -

                                  Les tableaux croisés dynamiques vous permet de grouper et organiser de vastes ensembles de données pour présenter des données de synthèse. Dans le Tableur vous pouvez réorganiser les données de plusieurs façons pour n'afficher que les informations importantes et pour se concentrer uniquement sur les aspects importants.

                                  +

                                  Les tableaux croisés dynamiques vous permet de grouper et organiser de vastes ensembles de données pour présenter des données de synthèse. Dans l'éditeur de classeurs vous pouvez réorganiser les données de plusieurs façons pour n'afficher que les informations importantes et pour se concentrer uniquement sur les aspects importants.

                                  Créer un nouveau tableau croisé dynamique

                                  Pour créer un tableau croisé dynamique,

                                  1. Préparez l'ensemble de données sources à partir duquel vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique. Ceux-ci doivent comprendre les en-têtes. L'ensemble de données ne peut pas comprendre les lignes ou les colonnes vides.
                                  2. Sélectionnez une cellule appartenant à la plage de données sources.
                                  3. - Passez à l'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau
                                    . -

                                    Si vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique basé sur une tableau mis en forme, vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Insérer un tableau croisé dynamique sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite.

                                    + Passez à l'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau
                                    . +

                                    Si vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique basé sur un tableau mis en forme, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Insérer un tableau croisé dynamique sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau sur la barre latérale droite.

                                  4. - Une fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique apparaîtra. + Une fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique apparaîtra.

                                    Fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique

                                    • - La Ligne de données de la source est déjà spécifié. Dans ce cas, toutes le données sources sont utilisées. Si vous voulez modifier la plage de données (par exemple, à inclure seulement une part de données), cliquez sur l'icône
                                      . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant : Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. + La Ligne de données de la source est déjà spécifié. Dans ce cas, toutes le données sources sont utilisées. Si vous voulez modifier la plage de données (par exemple, à inclure seulement une part de données), cliquez sur l'icône
                                      . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer.
                                    • Choisissez l'emplacement du tableau croisé dynamique.
                                        -
                                      • La valeur par défaut est Nouvelle feuille de calcul. Votre tableau croisé dynamique sera créé dans une feuille de calcul nouvelle.
                                        • +
                                      • La valeur par défaut est Nouvelle feuille de calcul. Votre tableau croisé dynamique sera créé dans une feuille de calcul nouvelle.
                                      • - Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'élément Feuille de calcul existante et choisir la cellule. Dans ce cas, c'est la cellule supérieure droite du tableau croisé dynamique créé. Pour sélectionner la cellule, cliquez sur l'icône
                                        . -

                                        La fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                                        -

                                        Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez l'adresse de la cellule sous le format suivant : Sheet1!$G$2. Vous pouvez également sélectionner la cellule nécessaire dans votre feuille. Cliquez OK pour confirmer.

                                        + Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'élément Feuille de calcul existante et choisir la cellule. Dans ce cas, c'est la cellule supérieure droite du tableau croisé dynamique créé. Pour sélectionner la cellule, cliquez sur l'icône .
                                        . +

                                        Fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                                        +

                                        Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez l'adresse de la cellule sous le format suivant: Sheet1!$G$2. Vous pouvez également sélectionner la cellule nécessaire dans votre feuille. Cliquez OK pour confirmer.

                                      • @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@

                                      Créer un nouveau tableau croisé dynamique

                                  Le tableau croisé dynamique vide est inséré selon l'emplacement choisi.

                                  -

                                  L'onglet Paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique s'ouvre sur la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur l'icône pour masquer ou afficher cet onglet.

                                  +

                                  L'onglet Paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique s'ouvre sur la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur l'icône pour masquer ou afficher cet onglet. Il est également possible d'accéder les paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique depuis le menu contextuel qui s'affiche lorsque vous faites un clic droit sur le tableau. Les options du menu contextuel varient en fonction du champ su lequel on fait le clic.

                                  L'onglet Paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique

                                  Sélectionner les champs à afficher

                                  -

                                  La section Sélectionner les champs à afficher comprend les champs dénommés comme les en-têtes de colonnes dans l'ensemble de votre données sources. Chaque champ contient les valeurs de la colonne correspondante du tableau source. Les sections disponibles : Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs.

                                  -

                                  Pour afficher un champ à votre tableau croisé dynamique, activez la case à cocher du nom de champ. Lorsque vous activez une case à cocher, le champ correspondant à cette case est ajouté à une des sections disponibles sur la barre latérale droite en fonction du type de données et est affiché dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les champs de type texte sont ajoutés à Lignes ; les champs numériques sont ajoutés à Valeurs.

                                  +

                                  La section Sélectionner les champs à afficher comprend les champs dénommés comme les en-têtes de colonnes dans l'ensemble de votre données sources. Chaque champ contient les valeurs de la colonne correspondante du tableau source. Les sections disponibles: Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs.

                                  +

                                  Pour afficher un champ à votre tableau croisé dynamique, activez la case à cocher du nom de champ. Lorsque vous activez une case à cocher, le champ correspondant à cette case est ajouté à une des sections disponibles sur la barre latérale droite en fonction du type de données et est affiché dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les champs de type texte sont ajoutés à Lignes; les champs numériques sont ajoutés à Valeurs.

                                  Faites glisser les champs directement dans les sections voulues ou faites glisser les champs d'une section dans l'autre pour les réorganiser dans votre tableau croisé dynamique rapidement. Pour supprimer un champ dans une section, faites-le glisser en dehors de cette section.

                                  -

                                  Pour ajouter un champ à une section, on peut aussi cliquer sur la flèche noire à droite du champ et choisir l'option appropriée dans le menu de la section Sélectionner les champs : Déplacer vers les filtres, Déplacer vers les lignes, Déplacer vers les colonnes, Déplacer vers les valeurs.

                                  +

                                  Pour ajouter un champ à une section, on peut aussi cliquer sur la flèche noire à droite du champ et choisir l'option appropriée dans le menu de la section Sélectionner les champs: Déplacer vers les filtres, Déplacer vers les lignes, Déplacer vers les colonnes, Déplacer vers les valeurs.

                                  L'onglet Paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique

                                  Ci-dessous, vous pouvez découvrir quelques exemples d'utilisation des sections Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs.

                                  • - Lorsque un champ est ajouté à Filtres, un filtre de rapport apparaisse au-dessus du tableau croisé dynamique. Celui-ci est appliqué au tableau croisé dynamique entier. Si vous cliquer sur la flèche
                                    de filtre ajouté, vous pouvez voir toutes les valeurs du champ choisi. Lorsque vous désactivez quelques valeurs parmi les options de filtre et appuyez sur OK, celles-ci ne sont pas affichées dans le tableau croisé dynamique. + Lorsque un champ est ajouté à Filtres, un filtre de rapport apparaisse au-dessus du tableau croisé dynamique. Celui-ci est appliqué au tableau croisé dynamique entier. Si vous cliquer sur la flèche déroulante
                                    du filtre ajouté, vous pouvez voir toutes les valeurs du champ choisi. Lorsque vous désactivez quelques valeurs parmi les options de filtre et appuyez sur OK, celles-ci ne sont pas affichées dans le tableau croisé dynamique.

                                    Filtres du tableau croisé dynamique

                                  • @@ -80,54 +80,52 @@

                                    Sélectionner les champs à afficher

                                    Réorganiser les champs et configurer les paramètres

                                    Une foi les champs ajoutés aux sections appropriées, vous pouvez les gérer pour modifier la mise en page et la mise en forme du tableau croisé dynamique. Cliquez sur la flèche noire à droit du champ dans les sections Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs pour afficher le menu contextuel du champ.

                                    Menu du tableau croisé dynamique

                                    -

                                    Ce menu vous permet :

                                    +

                                    Il vous permet:

                                      -
                                    • Déplacer le champ sélectionné : Monter, Descendre, Aller au début, ou Déplacer vers le fin de la section actuelle si vous avez ajouté plusieurs champs.
                                      • +
                                    • Déplacer le champ sélectionné: Monter, Descendre, Aller au début, ou Déplacer vers le fin de la section actuelle si vous avez ajouté plusieurs champs.
                                    • Déplacer le champ vers une autre section - Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes ou Valeurs. L'option déjà appliquée à la section actuelle sera désactivée.
                                    • Supprimer le champ sélectionné de la section actuelle.
                                    • Configurer les paramètres du champ choisi.
                                    -

                                    Les options Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs semblent similaires :

                                    +

                                    Les options Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs semblent similaires:

                                    Les options des Filtres du tableau croisé dynamique

                                    -

                                    L'onglet Disposition comprend les options suivantes :

                                    +

                                    L'onglet Disposition comprend les options suivantes:

                                      -
                                    • L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparaît à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources.
                                      • +
                                    • L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources.
                                    • L'option Nom vous permet de changer le nom du champ choisi à afficher dans le tableau croisé dynamique.
                                    • - L'option Formulaire de rapport vous permet de modifier la présentation du champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique : + L'option Formulaire de rapport vous permet de modifier la présentation du champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique:
                                      • Utiliser l'un des formulaires disponibles à présenter le champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique.
                                        • - Formulaire Tabulaire affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. - + Formulaire Tabulaire affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ.
                                        • - Formulaire Contour affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Ce formulaire permet aussi d'afficher les sous-totaux en haut de chaque groupe. - + Formulaire Contour affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Ce formulaire permet aussi d'afficher les sous-totaux en haut de chaque groupe.
                                        • - Formulaire Compact affiche les éléments de champs de section de ligne différents dans une colonne. - + Formulaire Compact affiche les éléments de champs de section de ligne différents dans une colonne.
                                      • Répéter les étiquettes des éléments sur chaque ligne permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire.
                                      • Insérer une ligne vide après chaque élément permet d'insérer une ligne vide après les éléments du champ choisi.
                                        • -
                                      • Afficher les sous-totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les sous-totaux pour le champ choisi. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : Afficher en haut du groupe ou Afficher en bas du groupe.
                                        • +
                                      • Afficher les sous-totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les sous-totaux pour le champ choisi. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Afficher en haut du groupe ou Afficher en bas du groupe.
                                      • Afficher les éléments sans données permet d'afficher ou de masquer les éléments de ligne qui ne contiennent pas de valeurs dans le champ choisi.

                                    Les options des Filtres du tableau croisé dynamique

                                    -

                                    Sous l'onglet Sous-totaux vous pouvez choisir les Fonctions pour sous-totaux. Cochez une des fonctions disponibles dans la liste : Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype, StdDevp, Var, Varp.

                                    +

                                    Sous l'onglet Sous-totaux vous pouvez choisir les Fonctions pour sous-totaux. Cochez une des fonctions disponibles dans la liste: Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp.

                                    Paramètres du champ Valeurs

                                    Les options de Valeurs du tableau croisé dynamique

                                      -
                                    • L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparaît à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources.
                                      • +
                                    • L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources.
                                    • L'option Nom vous permet de changer le nom du champ choisi à afficher dans le tableau croisé dynamique.
                                      • -
                                    • Résumer les valeurs du champ par permet de choisir la fonction à utiliser pour calculer la somme des valeurs pour toutes les valeurs de ce champ. Par défaut, la fonction Somme est utilisée pour les champs de valeurs numériques, et la fonction Total est utilisée pour les valeurs de texte. Les fonctions disponibles : Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp.
                                      • +
                                    • Résumer les valeurs du champ par permet de choisir la fonction à utiliser pour calculer la somme des valeurs pour toutes les valeurs de ce champ. Par défaut, la fonction Somme est utilisée pour les champs de valeurs numériques, et la fonction Total est utilisée pour les valeurs de texte. Les fonctions disponibles: Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp.
                                      • +
                                    • L'option Afficher les valeurs comme permet d'afficher les résultats du calcul personnalisé instantané au lieu d'ajouter une formule et un champ calculé. Aucun calcul est l'option par défaut et c'est valeur actuelle qui s'affiche dans le champ. Autres options du calcul instantané: % du total général, % du total de la colonne, % du total de la ligne, % de, % du total de la ligne parente, % du total de la ligne parente, % du total du parent, Différence par rapport à, % de différence avec, Résultat cumulé par, % résultat cumulé dans, Trier du plus petit au plus grand, Trier du plus grand au plus petit, Index. Utilisez Champ de base et Élément de base lorsque ces options deviennent disponibles pour le calcul que vous avez sélectionné (% de, % du total du parent, Différence par rapport à, % de différence avec, Résultat cumulé par, % résultat cumulé dans).

                                    Grouper et dissocier des données

                                    @@ -138,9 +136,9 @@

                                    Grouper les dates

                                    • Commence à - la première date des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour la modifier, saisissez la date appropriée dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le début.
                                    • Fin à - la dernière date des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour la modifier, saisissez la date appropriée dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le fin.
                                      • -
                                    • Par - on peut grouper les dates par Secondes, Minutes et Heures selon l'heure spécifiée dans les données sources. L'option Mois enlève les jours et maintient uniquement les mois. L'option Quartiers fonctionne à la condition que quatre mois est un quartier, alors on fournit Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. L'option Années groupe les dates selon les années spécifiées dans les données source. Vous pouvez combiner plusieurs options pour obtenir le résultat souhaité,
                                      • -
                                    • Nombre de jours sert à définir la valeur appropriée pour spécifier une certaine période.
                                      • -
                                    • Cliquez sur OK pour valider.
                                      • +
                                    • Par - on peut grouper les dates par Secondes, Minutes et Heures selon l'heure spécifiée dans les données sources. L'option Mois enlève les jours et maintient uniquement les mois. L'option Quartiers fonctionne à la condition que quatre mois est un quartier, alors on fournit Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. L'option Années groupe les dates selon les années spécifiées dans les données source. Vous pouvez combiner plusieurs options pour obtenir le résultat souhaité,
                                      • +
                                    • Nombre de jours sert à définir la valeur appropriée pour spécifier une certaine période.
                                      • +
                                    • Cliquez sur OK pour valider.

                                    Grouper des nombres

                                    Pour grouper les nombres, créez un tableau croisé dynamique comprenant l'ensemble de nombres en question. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'une des cellules comprenant un nombre dans le tableau croisé dynamique, choisissez l'option Grouper dans le menu contextuel et configurez les paramètres appropriés dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche.

                                    @@ -148,8 +146,8 @@

                                    Grouper des nombres

                                    • Commence à - le plus petit nombre des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour le modifier, saisissez le nombre approprié dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le plus petit nombre.
                                    • Fin à - le plus grand nombre des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour le modifier, saisissez le nombre approprié dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le plus grand nombre.
                                      • -
                                    • Par - définissez l'intervalle pour grouper des numéros : Ex., “2” va grouper l'ensemble de numéros de 1 à 10 comme “1-2”, “3-4”, etc.
                                      • -
                                    • Cliquez sur OK pour valider.
                                      • +
                                    • Par - définissez l'intervalle pour grouper des numéros: Ex., “2” va grouper l'ensemble de numéros de 1 à 10 comme “1-2”, “3-4”, etc.
                                      • +
                                    • Cliquez sur OK pour valider.

                                    Dissocier des données

                                    Pour dissocier des données groupées,

                                    @@ -178,12 +176,12 @@

                                    Modifier la disposition d'un tableau croisé dynamique

                                    Afficher sous forme de tableau - pour présenter les données dans un format de tableau traditionnel. Cette forme affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ.

                                    Forme tabulaire du tableau croisé dynamique

                                    • -
                                  • Répéter les étiquettes de tous les éléments - permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire.
                                    • -
                                  • Ne pas répéter toutes les étiquettes d'éléments - permet de masquer les étiquettes d'élément pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire.
                                    • +
                                  • Répéter les étiquettes de tous les éléments - permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire.
                                    • +
                                  • Ne pas répéter toutes les étiquettes d'éléments - permet de masquer les étiquettes d'élément pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire.
                                3. - La liste déroulante Lignes vides permet d'afficher les lignes vides après chaque élément : + La liste déroulante Lignes vides permet d'afficher les lignes vides après chaque élément:
                                  • Insérer une ligne vide après chaque élément - permet d'insérer une ligne vide après les éléments.
                                  • Supprimer la ligne vide après chaque élément - permet de supprimer les lignes vides ajoutées.
                                    • @@ -205,17 +203,17 @@

                                    Modifier la disposition d'un tableau croisé dynamique

                                  • Activé pour les lignes uniquement - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux seulement pour les lignes.
                                  • Activé pour les colonnes uniquement - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux seulement pour les colonnes.
                                  -

                                  Remarque : les options similaires sont aussi disponibles parmi les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique dans la section Grand totaux sous l'onglet Nom et disposition.

                                  +

                                  Remarque: les options similaires sont aussi disponibles parmi les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique dans la section Grand totaux sous l'onglet Nom et disposition.

                          -

                          Le bouton Sélectionner tableau croisé dynamique complet permet de sélectionner le tableau croisé dynamique entier.

                          -

                          Quand vous avez modifié l'ensemble de données sources, sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique et cliquez sur le bouton Actualiser pour mettre à jour le tableau croisé dynamique.

                          +

                          Le bouton Sélectionner permet de sélectionner le tableau croisé dynamique entier.

                          +

                          Lorsque vous avez modifié l'ensemble de données sources, sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique et cliquez sur le bouton Actualiser pour mettre à jour le tableau croisé dynamique.

                          Modifier le style d'un tableau croisé dynamique

                          Vous pouvez modifier la présentation du tableau croisé dynamique dans une feuille de calcul en utilisant les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure.

                          Sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau croisé dynamique avec la souris pour activer les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure.

                          L'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique

                          -

                          Les sections lignes et colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles :

                          +

                          Les sections lignes et colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles:

                          • En-têtes de ligne - permet de mettre en évidence les en-têtes de ligne avec un formatage spécial.
                          • En-têtes de colonne - permet de mettre en évidence les en-têtes de colonne avec un formatage spécial.
                            • @@ -223,22 +221,21 @@

                            Modifier le style d'un tableau croisé dynamique

                          • Colonnes en bandes - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires..

                          - La liste des modèles vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux croisés prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. - Selon les options cochées dans les sections lignes et/ou colonnes, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous avez coché les options En-têtes de ligne et Colonnes en bandes, la liste des modèles affichés inclurait uniquement les modèles avec la ligne d'en-tête et les colonnes en bandes activées. + La liste des modèles vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux croisés prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections lignes et/ou colonnes, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous activez les options En-têtes de ligne et Colonnes en bandes, la partie visible de la liste des modèles inclura uniquement les modèles avec des lignes d'en-tête mises en surbrillance et des colonnes en bandes activées, mais vous pouvez développer la liste en cliquant sur la flèche pour afficher tous les modèles disponibles.

                          Filtrer, trier et insérer des segments dans des tableaux croisées dynamiques

                          Vous pouvez filtrez les tableaux croisé dynamique par étiquettes ou valeurs aussi que utiliser les options de tri supplémentaires.

                          Filtrage

                          -

                          Cliquez sur la flèche déroulante dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. La liste des options de Filtrage s'affiche :

                          +

                          Cliquez sur la flèche déroulante dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. La liste des options de Filtrage s'affiche:

                          La fenêtre de Filtrage

                          -

                          Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Procédez d'une des manières suivantes : sélectionnez les données à afficher ou filtrez les données selon certains critères.

                          +

                          Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Procédez d'une des manières suivantes: sélectionnez les données à afficher ou filtrez les données selon certains critères.

                          • Sélectionner les données à afficher

                            Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtrage sont triées par ordre croissant.

                            -

                            Remarque : la case à cocher (vide) correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules.

                            -

                            Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ, les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles :

                            +

                            Remarque: la case à cocher (vide) correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules.

                            +

                            Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ, les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles:

                            • Sélectionner tous les résultats de la recherche - cochée par défaut. Permet de sélectionner toutes les valeurs correspondant à la requête.
                            • Ajouter le sélection actuelle au filtre - si vous cochez cette case, les valeurs sélectionnées ne seront pas masquées lorsque vous appliquerez le filtre.
                              • @@ -247,67 +244,67 @@

                              Filtrage

                            • Filtrer les données selon certains critères -

                              En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre étiquette ou le Filtre de valeur dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtrage, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu :

                              +

                              En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre étiquette ou le Filtre de valeur dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtrage, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu:

                              • - Pour le Filtre étiquette les options suivantes sont disponibles : + Pour le Filtre étiquette les options suivantes sont disponibles:
                                  -
                                • Pour texte : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas...
                                  • -
                                • Pour nombres : Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre.
                                  • +
                                • Pour texte: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas...
                                  • +
                                • Pour nombres: Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre.
                                • -
                              • Pour le Filtre de valeur, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre, Les 10 premiers.
                                • +
                              • Pour le Filtre de valeur, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre, Les 10 premiers.

                              Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers), la fenêtre Filtre étiquette/de valeur s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la première ou secondaire liste déroulante. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite.

                              Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre.

                              Fenêtre Filtre numérique

                              -

                              Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de valeur, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira :

                              +

                              Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de valeur, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira:

                              Fenêtre Filtre 10 premiers.

                              -

                              La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure : Élément, Pour cent ou Somme. La quatrième liste déroulante affiche le nom du champ choisi. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre.

                              +

                              La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure: Élément, Pour cent ou Somme. La quatrième liste déroulante affiche le nom du champ choisi. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre.

                            -

                            Le bouton de Filtrage s'affiche dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué.

                            +

                            Le bouton Filtre s'affiche dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué.

                            Tri

                            -

                            Vous pouvez effectuer le tri des données du tableau croisé dynamique en utilisant les options de tri. Cliquez sur la flèche de la liste déroulante dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique et sélectionnez Trier du plus bas au plus élevé ou Trier du plus élevé au plus bas dans le sous-menu.

                            -

                            Les Options de tri supplémentaires vous permettent d'ouvrir la fenêtre et choisir une option de tri : Ordre croissant ou Ordre décroissant, et puis spécifier le champ à trier.

                            +

                            Vous pouvez effectuer le tri des données du tableau croisé dynamique en utilisant les options de tri. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique et sélectionnez Trier du plus bas au plus élevé ou Trier du plus élevé au plus bas dans le sous-menu.

                            +

                            Les Options de tri supplémentaires vous permettent d'ouvrir la fenêtre et choisir une option de tri: Ordre croissant ou Ordre décroissant, et puis spécifier le champ à trier.

                            Options de tri tableau croisé dynamique

                            Insérer des segments

                            Vous pouvez insérer des segments pour filtrer facilement les données et sélectionner les éléments que vous voulez afficher. Pour en savoir plus sur les segments, veuillez consulter le guide de création des segments.

                            Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique

                            -

                            Pour configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Tableau croisé dynamique - Paramètres avancés, s'ouvre :

                            +

                            Pour configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Tableau croisé dynamique - Paramètres avancés, s'ouvre:

                            Paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique

                            Sous l'onglet Nom et disposition vous pouvez configurer les paramètres communs du tableau croisé dynamique.

                            -
                              -
                            • L'option Nom permet de modifier le nom du tableau croisé dynamique.
                              • -
                            • - La section Grands Totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les totaux généraux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les options Afficher pour les lignes et Afficher pour les colonnes sont activées par défaut. Vous pouvez les désactiver toutes les deux ou décocher la case appropriée pour masquer les certains grand totaux du tableau croisé dynamique. -

                              Remarque : les options similaires sont aussi disponibles sur le menu Grands Totaux dans la barre d'outils en haut.

                              -
                              • -
                            • - La section Afficher les champs dans la zone de filtre du rapport permet de configurer les filtres dans la section Filtres quand vous les y ajoutez : -
                                -
                              • L'option Vers le bas, puis à droite s'utilise pour organiser les colonnes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la colonne.
                                • -
                              • L'option À droite, puis vers le bas s'utilise pour organiser les lignes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la ligne.
                                • -
                              • L'option Afficher les champs de filtre de rapport par colonne sélectionnez le nombre de filtres à afficher pour chaque colonne. La valeur par défaut est 0. Vous pouvez régler la valeur numérique.
                                • -
                              -
                              • -
                            • L'option Afficher les en-têtes des champs pour les lignes et les colonnes permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les en-têtes de champ dans le tableau croisé dynamique. L'option est activée par défaut. Décochez-la pour masquer les en-têtes de champ du tableau croisé dynamique.
                              • -
                            • L'option Ajuster automatiquement la largeur de colonne lors de la mise à jour permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'ajustement automatique de la largeur de colonne. L'option est activée par défaut.
                              • -
                            +
                              +
                            • L'option Nom permet de modifier le nom du tableau croisé dynamique.
                              • +
                            • + La section Grands Totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les totaux généraux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les options Afficher pour les lignes et Afficher pour les colonnes sont activées par défaut. Vous pouvez les désactiver toutes les deux ou décocher la case appropriée pour masquer les certains grand totaux du tableau croisé dynamique. +

                              Remarque: les options similaires sont aussi disponibles sur le menu Grands Totaux dans la barre d'outils en haut.

                              +
                              • +
                            • + La section Afficher les champs dans la zone de filtre du rapport permet de configurer les filtres dans la section Filtres quand vous les y ajoutez: +
                                +
                              • L'option Vers le bas, puis à droite s'utilise pour organiser les colonnes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la colonne.
                                • +
                              • L'option À droite, puis vers le bas s'utilise pour organiser les lignes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la ligne.
                                • +
                              • L'option Afficher les champs de filtre de rapport par colonne sélectionnez le nombre de filtres à afficher pour chaque colonne. La valeur par défaut est 0. Vous pouvez régler la valeur numérique.
                                • +
                              +
                              • +
                            • La section Afficher les en-têtes des champs pour les lignes et les colonnes permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les en-têtes des champs dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Cette option est activée par défaut. Décochez-la pour masquer les en-têtes de champ du tableau croisé dynamique.
                              • +
                            • L'option Ajuster automatiquement la largeur de colonne lors de la mise à jour permet d'activer/désactiver l'ajustement automatique de la largeur des colonnes. Cette option est activée par défaut.
                              • +

                            Paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique

                            Sous l'onglet La source de données vous pouvez modifier les données à utiliser pour créer le tableau croisé dynamique.

                            Vérifiez la Plage de données et modifiez-la si nécessaire. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'icône .

                            -

                            La fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                            -

                            Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant : Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer.

                            +

                            Fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données

                            +

                            Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer.

                            Paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique

                            L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau croisé dynamique.

                            Supprimer le tableau croisé dynamique

                            Pour supprimer un tableau croisé dynamique,

                              -
                            1. Sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique entier en utilisant le bouton
                              Sélectionner dans la barre d'outils supérieure.
                              2. +
                            2. Sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique entier à l'aide du bouton
                              Sélectionner de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                            3. Appuyez sur la touche de Suppression.
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..95db0a1116 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + Protéger des plages + + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            + +

                            Protéger des plages

                            +

                            + L'option Protéger la plage permet de spécifier les plages de cellules pour qu'aucun utilisateur ne puisse les modifier sans autorisations appropriées. +

                            +

                            Pour sélectionner une plage de cellules verrouillées qui peut être modifiée:

                            +
                              +
                            1. + Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la plage sous l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Protéger la plage s'affichera. +

                              Modifier des plages

                              +
                              2. +
                            2. Utilisez la liste déroulante Filtre pour rechercher la feuille de calcul nécessaire. Dans la fenêtre Protéger la plage, cliquez sur le bouton Nouvelle pour sélectionner et ajouter la plage des cellules qui peuvent être modifiées par un utilisateur.
                              3. +
                            3. + Dans la fenêtre Nouvelle plage, saisissez le Titre de la plage et sélectionnez la plage de cellules en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données. Sélectionnez qui peut modifier cette plage et cliquez sur OK. +

                              Nouvelle plage

                              +
                              4. +
                            4. Pour modifier ou supprimer une plage, cliquez sur Modifier ou Supprimer dans la fenêtre Protéger la plage.
                              5. +
                            5. Cliquez sur le bouton Fermer dans la fenêtre Protéger la plage.
                              6. +
                            +

                            Pour en savoir plus sur l'autorisation de la modification des plages, veuillez consulter cet article.

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm index 89466e030d..5146d8c34d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm @@ -3,9 +3,9 @@ Protéger une feuille de calcul - - + + @@ -17,29 +17,27 @@

                            Protéger une feuille de calcul

                            L'option Protéger la feuille de calcul permet de protéger des feuilles de calcul et de contrôler les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs à la feuille de calcul pour empêcher toute modification indésirable et limiter les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. Vois pouvez protéger une feuille de calcul avec ou sans un mot de passe. Si vous opter pour la protection sans un mot de passe, toute personne peut désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul.

                            -

                            Pour protéger une feuille de calcul :

                            +

                            Protéger une feuille de calcul

                            1. - Passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul de la barre d'outils supérieure. -

                              ou

                              -

                              Faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à protéger et sélectionnez Protéger de la liste d'options.

                              + Passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                              ou
                              faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à protéger et sélectionnez Protéger de la liste d'options.

                              Protéger depuis l'onglet de la feuille de calcul

                              2. -
                            2. Dans la fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul qui s'affiche, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour désactiver la protection de la feuille de calcul. -

                              Protéger la feuille de calcul

                              -

                              Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

                              -
                              3. -
                            3. Activez les options appropriées sous la rubrique Permettre à tous les utilisateurs de cette feuille pour définir les opérations que les utilisateurs pourront effectuer. Les opérations par défaut sont Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées et Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées. -
                              - Les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter. -
                                -
                              • Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées
                                • -
                              • Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées
                                • -
                              • Modifier les cellules
                                • -
                              • Modifier les colonnes
                                • -
                              • Modifier les lignes
                                • -
                              • Insérer des colonnes
                                • -
                              • Insérer des lignes
                                • +
                              • + Dans la fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul qui s'affiche, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour désactiver la protection de la feuille de calcul. +

                                Protéger la feuille de calcul

                                +

                                Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

                                +
                                • +
                              • + Activez les options appropriées sous la rubrique Permettre à tous les utilisateurs de cette feuille pour définir les opérations que les utilisateurs pourront effectuer. Les opérations par défaut sont Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées et Sélectionner les cellules no verrouillées.
                                Les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter. +
                                  +
                                • Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées
                                  • +
                                • Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées
                                  • +
                                • Modifier les cellules
                                  • +
                                • Modifier les colonnes
                                  • +
                                • Modifier les lignes
                                  • +
                                • Insérer des colonnes
                                  • +
                                • Insérer des lignes
                                • Insérer un lien hypertexte
                                • Supprimer les colonnes
                                • Supprimer les lignes
                                  • @@ -48,24 +46,51 @@

                                  Protéger une feuille de calcul

                                • Utiliser tableau et graphique croisés dynamiques
                                • Modifier les objets
                                • Modifier les scénarios
                                  • -
                                -
                                -
                                • -
                              • Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection. Une fois la feuille de calcul protégée, le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul devient activé. -

                                Protéger la feuille de calcul activé

                                -
                                • -
                              • Pour désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul : -
                                  -
                                • cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul, -

                                  ou

                                  -

                                  faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul protégée et sélectionnez Déprotéger de la liste d'options.

                                  -

                                  Déprotéger depuis l'onglet de la feuille de calcul

                                  -
                                  • -
                                • Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK si la fenêtre Déprotéger la feuille apparaît. -

                                  Déprotéger la feuille

                                  -
                                  • -
                                +
                              +
                              +
                              4. +
                            4. + cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection. Une fois la feuille de calcul protégée, le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul devient activé. +

                              Protéger la feuille de calcul activé

                              +
                              5. +
                            + +

                            Autoriser la modification des plages

                            +
                              +
                            1. Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul sous l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul s'ouvrira.
                              2. +
                            2. Cliquez sur Autoriser la modification des plages pour indiquer les plages à déverrouiller par un mot de passe lorsque la feuille de calcul est protégée. Cette option ne fonctionne que pour les cellules verrouillées.
                              3. +
                            3. + Cliquez sur le bouton Nouvelle pour ajouter une nouvelle plage. La fenêtre Nouvelle plage s'affiche: Indiquez le Nom de la plage, la plage la-même et saisissez et validez le mot de passe. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. +

                              Il n'est pas possible de réinitialiser un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

                              +
                              4. +
                            4. + Vous pouvez modifier les plages de cellules, tant que la feuille de calcul n'est pas protégée. +
                                +
                              • Pour modifier une plage, cliquez sur le bouton Modifier dans la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages.
                                • +
                              • Pour supprimer une plage, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer dans la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages.
                                • +
                              +
                              5. +
                            5. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur Protéger.
                            +

                            Avec des plages protégées avec un mot de passe, la fenêtre Déverrouiller la plage s'affiche invitant à saisir le mot de passe lorsque quelqu'un essaie de modifier la plage protégée.

                            +

                            Déverrouiller la plage

                            +

                            Pour en savoir plus sur la protection des plages, veuillez consulter cet article.

                            + +

                            Protéger une feuille de calcul

                            +
                              +
                            1. + Pour désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul: +
                                +
                              • + cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul,
                                ou
                                faites in clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille protégée et sélectionnez Déprotéger de la liste d'options. +

                                Onglet Déprotéger feuille de calcul

                                +
                                • +
                              • + saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Déprotéger la feuille de calcul si vous y êtes invité. +

                                Déprotéger la feuille

                                +
                                • +
                              +
                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm index e2a695e11e..9f243aa0b7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@  - Protéger une feuille de calcul + Protéger un classeur - - + + @@ -15,15 +15,15 @@

                            Protéger un classeur

                            -

                            Tableur permet de protéger un classeur partagé lorsque vous souhaitez limiter l'accès ou les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. Tableur propose la protection du classeur aux différents niveaux pour contrôler l'accès au fichier aussi que les possibilités de modification à l'intérieur d'un classeur ou à l'intérieur d'une feuille de calcul. Utiliser l'onglet Protection pour paramétrer les options de protection disponibles selon ce que vous jugez approprié.

                            +

                            L'éditeur de classeurs permet de protéger un classeur partagé lorsque vous souhaitez limiter l'accès ou les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. L'éditeur de classurs propose la protection du classeur aux différents niveaux pour contrôler l'accès au fichier aussi que les possibilités de modification à l'intérieur d'un classeur ou à l'intérieur d'une feuille de calcul. Utiliser l'onglet Protection pour paramétrer les options de protection disponibles selon ce que vous jugez approprié.

                            Onglet Protection

                            -

                            Les options de protection comprennent :

                            +

                            Les options de protection comprennent:

                            Chiffrer pour contrôler l'accès au fichier et empêcher d'autres utilisateurs de l'ouvrir.

                            -

                            Protéger le livre pour contrôler des manipulations d'utilisateur au niveau de classeur et empêcher toute modification indésirable à la structure du classeur.

                            -

                            Protéger la feuille de calcul pour contrôler des actions d'utilisateur au niveau de feuille de calcul et empêcher toute modification indésirable aux données.

                            -

                            Autoriser la modification des plages pour sélectionner les cellules dont un autre utilisateur pourra modifier dans une feuille de calcul protégée.

                            +

                            Protéger le classeur pour contrôler des manipulations d'utilisateur au niveau de classeur et empêcher toute modification indésirable à la structure du classeur.

                            +

                            Protéger la feuille de calcul pour contrôler des manipulations d'utilisateur au niveau de classeur et empêcher toute modification indésirable à la structure du classeur.

                            +

                            Protéger la plage pour protéger les plages et limiter ou interdire l'édition. On peut accorder des droits de modification aux certains utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs qui n'ont aucun droit à la modification, ne puissent qu'afficher la plage protégée, mais puissent modifier le reste de la feuille de calcul à condition qu'ils aient tous les droits d'accès au fichier.

                            Utilisez des cases à cocher de l'onglet Protection pour verrouiller et déverrouiller rapidement le contenu de d'une feuille de calcul protégée.

                            -

                            Remarque : ces options ne prendront effet que lors de l'activation de protection de la feuille de calcul.

                            +

                            Remarque: ces options ne prendront effet que lors de l'activation de protection de la feuille de calcul.

                            Par défaut, les cellules, les formes et le texte à l'intérieur d'une forme sont verrouillés dans une feuille de calcul, décochez les cases appropriées pour les déverrouiller. On peut modifier des objets déverrouillés dans une feuille de calcul protégée. Les options Forme verrouillée et Verrouiller le texte deviennent actives lorsque une forme est sélectionnée. L'option Forme verrouillée est applicable tant aux formes qu'aux autres objets tels que graphiques, images et zones de texte. L'option Verrouiller le texte permet de verrouiller le texte à l'intérieur des objets, les graphiques exceptés.

                            Activez l'option Formules cachées pour masquer les formules d'une plage de cellules ou d'une cellule sélectionnée lorsque la feuille de calcul est protégé. La formule masquée ne s'affiche pas dans la barre de formule quand on fait un clic sur la cellule.

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm index 434c0b10c1..149d62aa69 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Protéger un classeur + Protéger la structure d'un classeur @@ -15,28 +15,28 @@ -

                            Protéger un classeur

                            -

                            L'option Protéger le livre permet de protéger la structure du classeur et de contrôler les manipulations d'utilisateur pour que personne ne puisse accéder aux classeurs masqués, ajouter, déplacer, supprimer, masquer et renommer des classeurs. Vois pouvez protéger un classeur avec ou sans un mot de passe. Si vous opter pour la protection sans un mot de passe, toute personne peut désactiver la protection du classeur.

                            +

                            Protéger la structure d'un classeur

                            +

                            L'option Protéger le classeur permet de protéger la structure du classeur et de contrôler les manipulations d'utilisateur pour que personne ne puisse accéder aux classeurs masqués, ajouter, déplacer, supprimer, masquer et renommer des classeurs. Vois pouvez protéger un classeur avec ou sans un mot de passe. Si vous opter pour la protection sans un mot de passe, toute personne peut désactiver la protection du classeur.

                            Pour protéger un classeur :

                              -
                            1. Passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le livre de la barre d'outils supérieure. +
                            2. Passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le classeur de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                            3. - Dans la fenêtre Protéger la structure du livre qui s'affiche, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour désactiver la protection du classeur. + Dans la fenêtre Protéger la structure du classeur qui s'affiche, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour désactiver la protection du classeur.

                              Protéger un classeur

                            4. Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection avec ou sans un mot de passe.

                              Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé.

                              -

                              Une fois le classeur protégé, le bouton Protéger le livre devient activé.

                              +

                              Une fois le classeur protégé, le bouton Protéger le classeur devient activé.

                              Protéger le classeur activé

                            5. Pour désactiver la protection d'un classeur :
                                -
                              • avec un classeur protégé par un mot de passe, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le livre de la barre d'outils supérieure, saisissez le mot de passe dans la fenêtre contextuelle Déprotéger le livre et cliquez sur OK. +
                              • avec un classeur protégé par un mot de passe, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le classeur de la barre d'outils supérieure, saisissez le mot de passe dans la fenêtre contextuelle Déprotéger le classeur et cliquez sur OK.

                                Désactiver la protection su classeur

                                • -
                              • avec un classeur protégé sans un mot de passe, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le livre de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                                • +
                              • avec un classeur protégé sans un mot de passe, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger le classeur de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/RemoveDuplicates.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/RemoveDuplicates.htm index 4fe55daf40..d43c9744a1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/RemoveDuplicates.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/RemoveDuplicates.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées

                            -

                            Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez supprimer les données dupliquées d'une plage de données ou d'un tableau mis en forme.

                            +

                            Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez supprimer les données dupliquées d'une plage de données ou d'un tableau mis en forme.

                            Pour supprimer les valeurs en double :

                            1. Sélectionnez la plage de données appropriée avec doublons.
                              2. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 89f6d10569..b96714dbc7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur - + @@ -12,24 +12,24 @@
                              - +

                              Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur

                              Enregistrement

                              -

                              Par défaut, le Tableur en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                              +

                              Par défaut, l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés .

                              Pour enregistrer manuellement votre feuille de calcul actuelle dans le format et l'emplacement actuels,

                              • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer
                                dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                              • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou
                              • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer.
                              -

                              Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                              +

                              Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés .

                              Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer la feuille de calcul sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format,

                              1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                2. -
                              2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous...,
                                3. -
                              3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de feuille de calcul (XLTX ou OTS).
                                4. +
                              4. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous,
                                5. +
                              5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'option Modèle de classeur.
                              @@ -37,18 +37,18 @@

                              Téléchargement en cours

                              Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la feuille de calcul résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                              1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                2. -
                              2. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme...,
                                3. +
                              3. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme,
                              4. - sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. -

                                Remarque : si vous sélectionnez le format CSV, toutes les fonctionnalités (formatage de police, formules, etc.) à l'exception du texte brut ne seront pas conservées dans le fichier CSV. Si vous continuez à enregistrer, la fenêtre Choisir les options CSV s'ouvre. Par défaut, Unicode (UTF-8) est utilisé comme type d'Encodage. Le Séparateur par défaut est la virgule (,), mais les options suivantes sont également disponibles: point-virgule ( ;), deux-points ( :), tabulation, espace et autre (cette option vous permet de définir un caractère séparateur personnalisé).

                                + sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. +

                                Remarque: si vous sélectionnez le format CSV, toutes les fonctionnalités (formatage de police, formules, etc.) à l'exception du texte brut ne seront pas conservées dans le fichier CSV. Si vous continuez à enregistrer, la fenêtre Choisir les options CSV s'ouvre. Par défaut, Unicode (UTF-8) est utilisé comme type d'Encodage. Le Séparateur par défaut est la virgule (,), mais les options suivantes sont également disponibles: point-virgule ( ;), deux-points ( :), tabulation, espace et autre (cette option vous permet de définir un caractère séparateur personnalisé).

                              Enregistrer une copie

                              Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail,

                              1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                2. -
                              2. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous...,
                                3. -
                              3. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS,
                                4. +
                              4. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer une copie sous,
                                5. +
                              5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG,
                              6. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer.
                              @@ -62,62 +62,64 @@

                              Impression

                              Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance.
                              -

                              Une Aperçu et tous les paramètres d'impression disponibles s'affichent.

                              +

                              L'aperçu du classeur et les options d'impression s'afficheront.

                              Certains de ces paramètres (Marges, Orientation, Taille, Zone d'impression aussi que Mise à l'échelle) sont également disponibles dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                              La fenêtre Paramètres d'impression

                              -

                              Ici, vous pouvez régler les paramètres suivants :

                              +

                              Ici, vous pouvez régler les paramètres suivants:. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez également configurer Impression sur les deux côtés pour imprimer sur un seul ou sur les deux côtés en retournant la feuille sur le côté long ou sur le petit côté aussi que Imprimer au format PDF ou utiliser le bouton Impression rapide de la barre d'outils supérieure pour imprimer le fichier sur la dernière imprimante sélectionnée ou sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par défaut.

                              • - Zone d'impression - spécifiez les éléments à imprimer : Feuille actuelle, Toutes les feuilles ou Sélection, -

                                Si vous avez déjà défini une zone d'impression constante mais il vous faut imprimer la feuille entière, cochez la case Ignorer la zone d'impression.

                                + Zone d'impression - spécifiez les éléments à imprimer: Feuilles actives, Toutes les feuilles ou Sélection, +

                                Si vous avez déjà défini une zone d'impression constante mais que vous souhaitez imprimer la feuille entière, cochez la case Ignorer la zone d'impression.

                                • +
                              • Pages - sélectionnez les pages à imprimer: Saisissez les numéros manuellement ou utilisez les flèches appropriées,
                              • Paramètres de la feuille - spécifiez les paramètres d'impression individuels pour chaque feuille séparée, si vous avez sélectionné l'option Toutes les feuilles dans la liste déroulante Zone d'impression,
                              • Taille de la page - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante,
                              • Orientation de page - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale,
                              • - Mise à l'échelle - si vous ne souhaitez pas que certaines colonnes ou lignes soient imprimées sur une deuxième page, vous pouvez réduire le contenu de la feuille pour l'adapter à une page en sélectionnant l'option correspondante : Ajuster la feuille à une page, Ajuster toutes les colonnes à une page ou Ajuster toutes les lignes à une page. Laissez l'option Taille réelle pour imprimer la feuille sans l'ajuster. -

                                Lorsque vous choisissez Options personnalisées du menu, la fenêtre Paramètres de mise à l'échelle s'affiche :

                                + Mise à l'échelle - si vous ne souhaitez pas que certaines colonnes ou lignes soient imprimées sur une deuxième page, vous pouvez réduire le contenu de la feuille pour l'adapter à une page en sélectionnant l'option correspondante: Ajuster la feuille à une page, Ajuster toutes les colonnes à une page ou Ajuster toutes les lignes à une page. Laissez l'option Taille réelle pour imprimer la feuille sans l'ajuster. +

                                Lorsque vous choisissez Options personnalisées du menu, la fenêtre Paramètres de mise à l'échelle s'affiche:

                                La fenêtre Paramètres de mise à l'échelle

                                1. Ajuster à permet de définir un nombre de pages défini à imprimer votre feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le nombre de page des listes Largeur et Hauteur.
                                  2. -
                                2. échelle permet de réduire ou agrandir l'échelle de la feuille de calcule pour l'ajuster sur les pages imprimées et définir manuellement le pourcentage de la taille réelle.
                                  3. +
                                3. Échelle permet de réduire ou agrandir l'échelle de la feuille de calcule pour l'ajuster sur les pages imprimées et définir manuellement le pourcentage de la taille réelle.
                                • -
                              • Titres à imprimer - quand vous avez besoin d'imprimer les titres de lignes et colonnes sur chaque page, il faut utiliser Répéter les lignes en haut ou Répéter les colonnes à gauche et indiquer la ligne ou la colonne à répéter ou sélectionner l'une des options disponibles dans le menu déroulant : Lignes/colonnes verrouillées, Première ligne/colonne ou Ne pas répéter.
                                • -
                              • Marges - spécifiez la distance entre les données de la feuille de calcul et les bords de la page imprimée en modifiant les paramètres prédéfinis dans les champs En haut, En bas, à gauche et à droite,
                                • -
                              • Quadrillage et titres sert à définir des éléments à imprimer en activant la case à coché appropriée : Imprimer le quadrillage et Imprimer les titres des lignes et des colonnes.
                                • +
                              • Titres à imprimer - quand vous avez besoin d'imprimer les titres de lignes et colonnes sur chaque page, il faut utiliser Répéter les lignes en haut ou Colonnes à répéter à gauche et sélectionner une des options disponibles dans le menu déroulant: sélectionner la ligne, lignes/colonnes verrouillées, première ligne/colonne. Lignes/colonnes verrouillées, Première ligne/colonne ou Ne pas répéter.
                                • +
                              • Marges - spécifiez la distance entre les données de la feuille de calcul et les bords de la page imprimée en modifiant les paramètres prédéfinis dans les champs En haut, En bas, À gauche et À droite,
                                • +
                              • Quadrillage et titres sert à définir des éléments à imprimer en activant la case à coché appropriée: Imprimer le quadrillage et Imprimer les titres des lignes et des colonnes.
                              • - Paramètres de l'en-tête/du pied de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une feuille de calcul imprimée, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de page, le nom de la feuille, etc. + Paramètres de l'en-tête/du pied de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une feuille de calcul imprimée, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de page, le nom de la feuille, etc. Les en-têtes et les pieds de pages sont affichés dans la version imprimée de la feuille de calcul.
                                • +
                              • Numéro de la première page - indiquez le numéro de la première page à imprimer.
                              -

                              Une fois tous les paramètres configurés, cliquez sur le bouton Imprimer pour sauvegarder vos modifications et imprimer la feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer pour sauvegarder tous les paramètres que vous avez modifié.

                              -

                              Si vous n'arrivez pas à imprimer ou à sauvegarder la feuille de calcul, toutes les modifications apportées seront perdues.

                              -

                              Aperçu permet de parcourir le classeur à l'aide des flèches en bas pour afficher l'aperçu des données sur la feuille de calcul après impression et pour corriger des erreurs éventuelles en utilisant les paramètres d'impression disponibles.

                              -

                              Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                              +

                              Une fois les paramètres d'impression configurés, cliquez sur Imprimer pour enregistrer les modifications et imprimer la feuille de calcul pu le bouton Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications apportées aux paramètres d'impression.

                              +

                              Toutes les modifications apportées seront perdues si vous n'imprimer pas la feuille de calcule ou n'enregistrer pas les modifications.

                              +

                              L'aperçu de la feuille de calcul permet de parcourir le classeur à l'aide des flèches en bas pour afficher l'aperçu des données sur la feuille de calcul après impression et pour corriger des erreurs éventuelles en utilisant les paramètres d'impression disponibles.

                              +

                              Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                              Configurer la zone d'impression

                              Si vous souhaitez imprimer une plage de cellules sélectionnée uniquement au lieu d'une feuille de calcul complète, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Sélection dans la liste déroulante Zone d'impression. Lorsque le classeur est sauvegardé, cette option n'est pas sauvegardée, elle est destinée à un usage unique.

                              Si une plage de cellules doit être imprimée fréquemment, vous pouvez définir une zone d'impression constante sur la feuille de calcul. Lorsque la feuille de calcul est sauvegardée, la zone d'impression est également sauvegardée, elle peut être utilisée la prochaine fois que vous ouvrirez la feuille de calcul. Il est également possible de définir plusieurs zones d'impression constantes sur une feuille, dans ce cas chaque zone sera imprimée sur une page séparée.

                              -

                              Pour définir une zone d'impression :

                              +

                              Pour définir une zone d'impression:

                              1. Sélectionnez la plage de cellules nécessaire sur la feuille de calcul. Pour sélectionner plusieurs plages de cellules, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée,
                              2. passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                3. -
                              3. cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression
                                et sélectionnez l'option Sélectionner la zone d'impression.
                                4. +
                              4. cliquez sur la flèche à côté du
                                bouton Zone d'impression et choisissez l'option Sélectionner la zone d'impression.

                              La zone d'impression créée est sauvegardée lorsque la feuille de calcul est sauvegardée. Lorsque vous ouvrirez le fichier la prochaine fois, la zone d'impression spécifiée sera imprimée.

                              -

                              Lorsque vous créez une zone d'impression, il se crée automatiquement pour la Zone_d_impression une plage nommée, qui s'affiche dans le Gestionnaire de noms. Pour mettre en surbrillance les bordures de toutes les zones d'impression de la feuille de calcul actuelle, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche dans la boîte de nom située à gauche de la barre de formule et sélectionner le nom de la Zone_d_impression dans la liste des noms.

                              -

                              Pour ajouter des cellules à une zone d'impression :

                              +

                              Lorsque vous créez une zone d'impression, il se crée automatiquement pour la Zone_d_impression une plage nommée , qui s'affiche dans le Gestionnaire de noms. Pour mettre en surbrillance les bordures de toutes les zones d'impression de la feuille de calcul actuelle, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche dans la boîte de nom située à gauche de la barre de formule et sélectionner le nom de la Zone_d_impression dans la liste des noms.

                              +

                              Pour ajouter des cellules à une zone d'impression:

                              1. ouvrir la feuille de calcul voulue où la zone d'impression est ajoutée,
                              2. sélectionner la plage de cellules nécessaire sur la feuille de calcul,
                              3. passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                4. -
                              4. cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression
                                et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter à la zone d'impression.
                                5. +
                              5. cliquez sur la flèche à côté du
                                du bouton Zone d'impression et choisissez l'option Ajouter à la zone d'impression.

                              Une nouvelle zone d'impression sera ajoutée. Chaque zone d'impression sera imprimée sur une page séparée.

                              Pour supprimer une zone d'impression :

                              1. ouvrir la feuille de calcul voulue où la zone d'impression est ajoutée,
                              2. passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                3. -
                              3. cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression
                                et sélectionnez l'option Vider la zone d'impression.
                                4. +
                              4. cliquez sur la flèche à côté
                                du bouton Zone d'impression et choisissez l'option Effacer la zone d'impression.

                              Toutes les zones d'impression existantes sur cette feuille seront supprimées. Ensuite, la feuille entière sera imprimée.

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm index 04e4051a9f..48de8b4138 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                              Mettre une feuille de calcul à l'échelle

                              -

                              Si vous souhaitez insérer une feuille de calcul entière sur une seule page à imprimer, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Mettre à l'échelle. Cette fonction du Tableur permet de mettre à l'échelle les données sur un nombre défini de pages.

                              +

                              Si vous souhaitez insérer une feuille de calcul entière sur une seule page à imprimer, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Mettre à l'échelle. Cette fonction de l'éditeur de classeurs permet de mettre à l'échelle les données sur un nombre défini de pages.

                              Pour faire cela, suivez ces simples étapes :

                              • Dans la barre d'outils supérieure, accédez à l'onglet Mise en page et choisissez la fonction
                                Mettre à l'échelle, diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SheetView.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SheetView.htm index 1db7756275..135188bd09 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SheetView.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SheetView.htm @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille - + @@ -16,9 +16,9 @@

                                Configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille

                                -

                                Tableur ONLYOFFICE permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de feuille en fonction du filtre appliqué. Vous pouvez configurer les options de filtrage pour un affichage de feuille et le utiliser plus tard avec vos collègues ou vous pouvez même configurer plusieurs affichages de feuille sur la même feuille de calcul et basculer rapidement entre les différents affichages. Si vous collaborez sur une feuille de calcul avec d'autres personnes, vous pouvez créer des affichages personnalisés et utiliser les fonctionnalités de filtre sans être perturbés par d'autres co-auteurs.

                                +

                                L'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage d'une feuille de calcul en fonction du filtre appliqué. Vous pouvez configurer les options de filtrage pour un affichage de feuille et le utiliser plus tard avec vos collègues ou vous pouvez même configurer plusieurs affichages de feuille sur la même feuille de calcul et basculer rapidement entre les différents affichages. Si vous collaborez sur une feuille de calcul avec d'autres personnes, vous pouvez créer des affichages personnalisés et utiliser les fonctionnalités de filtre sans être perturbés par d'autres co-auteurs.

                                Créer un nouveau affichage de feuille

                                -

                                Étant donné que l'affichage de feuille est conçu pour personnaliser la filtrage , vous devez donc configurer les paramètres de la feuille. Veuillez consulter cette page pour en savoir plus sur la filtrage.

                                +

                                Étant donné que l'affichage de feuille est conçu pour personnaliser la filtrage, vous devez donc configurer les paramètres de la feuille. Veuillez consulter cette page pour en savoir plus sur la filtrage.

                                Il existe deux façons de créer un nouveau affichage de feuille. Vous pouvez

                                • passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône
                                  Affichage de feuille.
                                  • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Slicers.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Slicers.htm index 53cab1c4e7..1042447055 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Slicers.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Slicers.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                  Créer des segments dans les tableaux mis en forme d'après un modèle

                                  Créer un nouveau segment

                                  -

                                  Une fois que vous avez créé dans le Tableur ou un tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle, vous pouvez créer des segments pour filtrer les données rapidement. Pour ce faire,

                                  +

                                  Lorsque vous avez créé un tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle ou un tableau croisé dynamique dans l'éditeur de classeurs vous pouvez créer des segments pour filtrer les données rapidement. Pour ce faire,

                                  1. sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau mis en forme avec la souris et appuyez sur l'icône Paramètres du tableau
                                    à droite.
                                  2. Cliquez sur
                                    Insérer un segment sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite. Vous pouvez également passer à l'onglet Insérer dans la barre d'outils supérieure et y appuyer sur le bouton
                                    Segment. La fenêtre Insérer segments s'affiche : diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm index d84749f7a0..2571aa2ab2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Trier et filtrer les données - + @@ -16,88 +16,86 @@

                                    Trier et filtrer les données

                                    Trier les données

                                    -

                                    Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez trier rapidement vos données dans une feuille de calcul en utilisant l'une des options disponibles :

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez trier rapidement vos données dans l'éditeur de classeurs en utilisant l'une des options disponibles:

                                    • Croissant sert à trier vos données dans l'ordre croissant - De A à Z par ordre alphabétique ou de plus petit au plus grand pour les données numériques.
                                    • Décroissant sert à trier vos données dans l'ordre décroissant - De Z à A par ordre alphabétique ou de plus grand au plus petit pour les données numériques.
                                    -

                                    Remarque : les options de Tri sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données.

                                    +

                                    Remarque: les options de Tri sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données.

                                    Pour trier vos données,

                                    1. sélectionner une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour trier toute la plage),
                                      2. -
                                    2. cliquez sur l'icône Trier de A à Z
                                      située sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données dans l'ordre croissant, -
                                      OU
                                      - cliquez sur l'icône Trier de Z à A
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données dans l'ordre décroissant. +
                                    3. cliquez sur icône Trier par ordre croissant
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données par ordre croissant,
                                      OU
                                      cliquez sur l'icône Trier par ordre décroissant
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données par ordre décroissant.
                                    -

                                    Remarque : si vous sélectionnez une seule colonne/ligne dans une plage de cellules ou une partie de la colonne/ligne, il vous sera demandé si vous souhaitez étendre la sélection pour inclure des cellules adjacentes ou trier uniquement les données sélectionnées.

                                    -

                                    Vous pouvez également trier vos données en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'option de A à Z ou de Z à A dans le sous-menu.

                                    -

                                    Il est également possible de trier les données par une couleur en utilisant le menu contextuel :

                                    +

                                    Remarque: si vous sélectionnez une seule colonne/ligne dans une plage de cellules ou une partie de la colonne/ligne, il vous sera demandé si vous souhaitez étendre la sélection pour inclure des cellules adjacentes ou trier uniquement les données sélectionnées.

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également trier vos données en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'option de A à Z ou de Z à A dans le sous-menu.

                                    +

                                    Il est également possible de trier les données par une couleur en utilisant le menu contextuel:

                                    1. faites un clic droit sur une cellule contenant la couleur que vous voulez utiliser pour trier vos données,
                                    2. sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu,
                                    3. - sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu : + sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu:
                                      • Couleur de cellule sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne,
                                      • Couleur de police sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne.
                                      4. -
                                    - +
                                  +

                                  Filtrer les données

                                  -

                                  Pour afficher uniquement les lignes qui répondent aux certains critères utilisez l'option Filtrer.

                                  -

                                  Remarque : les options de Filtre sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données.

                                  +

                                  Pour afficher uniquement les lignes qui répondent aux certains critères utilisez l'option Filtre.

                                  +

                                  Remarque: les options de Filtrage sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données.

                                  Pour activer un filtre,
                                  1. Sélectionnez une plage de cellules contenant des données à filtrer (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour filtrer toute la plage),
                                  2. - Cliquez sur l'icône Filtrer
                                    dans l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. + Cliquez sur l'icône Filtrer
                                    sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                                    La flèche de déroulement apparaît dans la première cellule de chaque colonne de la plage de cellules sélectionnée. Cela signifie que le filtre est activé.

                                  -

                                  Pour appliquer un filtre :

                                  +

                                  Pour appliquer un filtre:

                                    -
                                  1. Cliquez sur la flèche déroulante
                                    . La liste des options de Filtre s'affiche : -

                                    La fenêtre de Filtre

                                    -

                                    Remarque : vous pouvez ajuster la taille de la fenêtre de filtrage en faisant glisser sa bordure droite à droite ou à gauche pour afficher les données d'une manière aussi convenable que possible.

                                    +
                                  2. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement
                                    . La liste des options de Filtrage s'affiche: +

                                    La fenêtre de Filtrage

                                    +

                                    Remarque: vous pouvez ajuster la taille de la fenêtre de filtrage en faisant glisser sa bordure droite à droite ou à gauche pour afficher les données d'une manière aussi convenable que possible.

                                  3. -

                                    Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Vous pouvez procéder de l'une des trois manières suivantes : sélectionnez les données à afficher, filtrez les données selon certains critères ou filtrez les données par couleur.

                                    +

                                    Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Vous pouvez procéder de l'une des trois manières suivantes: sélectionnez les données à afficher, filtrez les données selon certains critères ou filtrez les données par couleur.

                                    • Sélectionner les données à afficher -

                                      Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtre sont triées par ordre croissant.

                                      +

                                      Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtrage sont triées par ordre croissant.

                                      Le nombre de valeurs uniques dans la plage de données filtrée s'affiche à droite de chaque valeur dans la fenêtre de filtrage.

                                      -

                                      Remarque : la case à cocher {Vides} correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules.

                                      -

                                      Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ , les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles :

                                      +

                                      Remarque: la case à cocher {Vides} correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules.

                                      +

                                      Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ , les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles:

                                      • Sélectionner tous les résultats de la recherche - cochée par défaut. Permet de sélectionner toutes les valeurs correspondant à la requête.
                                      • Ajouter le sélection actuelle au filtre - si vous cochez cette case, les valeurs sélectionnées ne seront pas masquées lorsque vous appliquerez le filtre.
                                      -

                                      Après avoir sélectionné toutes les données nécessaires, cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la liste des options de Filtre pour appliquer le filtre.

                                      +

                                      Après avoir sélectionné toutes les données nécessaires, cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la liste des options de Filtrage pour appliquer le filtre.

                                    • Filtrer les données selon certains critères -

                                      En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre de nombre ou le Filtre de texte dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtre, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu :

                                      +

                                      En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre de nombre ou le Filtre de texte dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtrage, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu:

                                        -
                                      • Pour le Filtre de nombre, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Les 10 premiers, Au dessus de la moyenne, Au dessous de la moyenne, Filtre personnalisé.
                                        • -
                                      • Pour le Filtre de texte, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas..., Filtre personnalisé.
                                        • +
                                      • Pour le Filtre de nombre, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Les 10 premiers, Au dessus de la moyenne, Au dessous de la moyenne, Filtre personnalisé.
                                        • +
                                      • Pour le Filtre de texte, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas..., Filtre personnalisé.
                                      -

                                      Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers et Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne), la fenêtre Filtre personnalisé s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la liste déroulante supérieure. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite.

                                      +

                                      Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers et Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne), la fenêtre Filtre personnalisé s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la liste déroulante supérieure. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite.

                                      Pour ajouter un critère supplémentaire, utilisez le bouton de commande Et si vous avez besoin de données qui satisfont aux deux critères ou cliquez sur le bouton de commande Ou si l'un des critères ou les deux peuvent être satisfaits. Sélectionnez ensuite le deuxième critère dans la liste déroulante inférieure et entrez la valeur nécessaire sur la droite.

                                      Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre.

                                      Fenêtre de filtre personnalisé

                                      Si vous choisissez l'option Filtre personnalisé... dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre/texte, le premier critère n'est pas sélectionné automatiquement, vous pouvez le définir vous-même.

                                      -

                                      Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira :

                                      +

                                      Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira:

                                      Fenêtre Filtre 10 premiers.

                                      -

                                      La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure : Élément ou Pour cent. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre.

                                      +

                                      La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure: Élément ou Pour cent. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre.

                                      Lorsque vous choisissez Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne de la liste Filtre de nombre, le filtre est appliqué tout de suite.

                                    • Filtrer les données par couleur -

                                      Si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez filtrer contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou leur couleur de police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis), vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options suivantes :

                                      +

                                      Si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez filtrer contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou leur couleur de police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis), vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options suivantes

                                      • Filtrer par couleur des cellules - pour n'afficher que les entrées avec une certaine couleur de fond de cellule et masquer les autres,
                                      • Filtrer par couleur de police - pour afficher uniquement les entrées avec une certaine couleur de police de cellule et masquer les autres.
                                        • @@ -106,12 +104,12 @@

                                        Filtrer les données

                                        Filtrer les données par couleur

                                      -

                                      Le bouton Filtre apparaîtra dans la première cellule de la colonne. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué. Le nombre d'enregistrements filtrés sera affiché dans la barre d'état (par exemple 25 des 80 enregistrements filtrés).

                                      -

                                      Remarque : lorsque le filtre est appliqué, les lignes filtrées ne peuvent pas être modifiées lors du remplissage automatique, du formatage ou de la suppression du contenu visible. De telles actions affectent uniquement les lignes visibles, les lignes masquées par le filtre restent inchangées. Lorsque vous copiez et collez les données filtrées, seules les lignes visibles peuvent être copiées et collées. Ceci n'est pas équivalent aux lignes masquées manuellement qui sont affectées par toutes les actions similaires.

                                      +

                                      Le bouton Filtrer apparaîtra dans la première cellule de la colonne. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué. Le nombre d'enregistrements filtrés sera affiché dans la barre d'état (par exemple 25 des 80 enregistrements filtrés).

                                      +

                                      Remarque: lorsque le filtre est appliqué, les lignes filtrées ne peuvent pas être modifiées lors du remplissage automatique, du formatage ou de la suppression du contenu visible. De telles actions affectent uniquement les lignes visibles, les lignes masquées par le filtre restent inchangées. Lorsque vous copiez et collez les données filtrées, seules les lignes visibles peuvent être copiées et collées. Ceci n'est pas équivalent aux lignes masquées manuellement qui sont affectées par toutes les actions similaires.

                                  Trier les données filtrées

                                  -

                                  Vous pouvez définir l'ordre de tri des données que vous avez activées ou auxquelles vous avez appliqué un filtre. Cliquez sur la flèche de la liste déroulante ou sur le bouton Filtre et sélectionnez l'une des options dans la liste des options de Filtre :

                                  +

                                  Vous pouvez définir l'ordre de tri des données que vous avez activées ou auxquelles vous avez appliqué un filtre. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement ou sur le bouton Filtrer et sélectionnez l'une des options dans la liste des options de Filtre:

                                  • Trier du plus petit au plus grand - permet de trier vos données dans l'ordre croissant, en affichant la valeur la plus basse en haut de la colonne,
                                  • Trier du plus grand au plus petit - permet de trier vos données dans l'ordre décroissant, en affichant la valeur la plus élevée en haut de la colonne,
                                    • @@ -121,15 +119,15 @@

                                    Trier les données filtrées

                                    Les deux dernières options peuvent être utilisées si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou la couleur de leur police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis).

                                    Le sens du tri sera indiqué par une flèche dans les boutons du filtre.

                                      -
                                    • si les données sont triées par ordre croissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci :
                                      et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci :
                                      .
                                      • -
                                    • Si les données sont triées par ordre décroissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci :
                                      et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci :
                                      .
                                      • +
                                    • si les données sont triées par ordre croissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci:
                                      et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci:
                                      .
                                      • +
                                    • Si les données sont triées par ordre décroissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci:
                                      et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci:
                                      .
                                    -

                                    Vous pouvez également trier rapidement vos données par couleur en utilisant les options du menu contextuel.

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également trier rapidement vos données par couleur en utilisant les options du menu contextuel.

                                    1. faites un clic droit sur une cellule contenant la couleur que vous voulez utiliser pour trier vos données,
                                    2. sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu,
                                    3. - sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu : + sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu:
                                      • Couleur de cellule sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne,
                                      • Couleur de police sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne.
                                        • @@ -137,17 +135,17 @@

                                        Trier les données filtrées

                                    Filtrer par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée

                                    -

                                    Vous pouvez également filtrer rapidement vos données par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une cellule, sélectionnez l'option Filtre dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles :

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également filtrer rapidement vos données par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une cellule, sélectionnez l'option Filtre dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles:

                                    • Filtrer par valeur de la cellule sélectionnée - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même valeur que la cellule sélectionnée.
                                    • Filtrer par couleur de cellule - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même couleur de fond de cellule que la cellule sélectionnée.
                                    • Filtrer par couleur de police - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même couleur de police de cellule que la cellule sélectionnée.

                                    Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau

                                    -

                                    Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, le Tableur vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire,

                                    +

                                    Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, Spreadsheet Editor vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire,

                                    1. sélectionnez une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez mettre en forme,
                                      2. -
                                    2. cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure.
                                      3. +
                                    3. cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                                    4. Sélectionnez le modèle souhaité dans la galerie,
                                    5. dans la fenêtre contextuelle ouverte, vérifiez la plage de cellules à mettre en forme comme un tableau,
                                    6. cochez la case Titre si vous souhaitez inclure les en-têtes de tableau dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sinon la ligne d'en-tête sera ajoutée en haut tandis que la plage de cellules sélectionnée sera déplacée d'une ligne vers le bas,
                                      7. @@ -155,66 +153,74 @@

                                      Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau

                                    Le modèle sera appliqué à la plage de cellules sélectionnée et vous serez en mesure d'éditer les en-têtes de tableau et d'appliquer le filtre pour travailler avec vos données. Pour en savoir plus sur la mise en forme des tableaux d'après un modèle, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.

                                    Appliquer à nouveau le filtre

                                    -

                                    Si les données filtrées ont été modifiées, vous pouvez actualiser le filtre pour afficher un résultat à jour :

                                    +

                                    Si les données filtrées ont été modifiées, vous pouvez actualiser le filtre pour afficher un résultat à jour:

                                      -
                                    1. cliquez sur le bouton Filtre
                                      dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant les données filtrées,
                                      2. -
                                    2. sélectionnez l'option Réappliquer dans la liste des options de Filtre qui s'ouvre.
                                      3. +
                                    3. cliquez sur l'icône Filtre
                                      dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant des données filtrées,
                                      4. +
                                    4. sélectionnez l'option Réappliquer dans la liste des options de Filtrage qui s'ouvre.

                                    Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une cellule dans la colonne contenant les données filtrées et sélectionner l'option Réappliquer dans le menu contextuel.

                                    Effacer le filtre

                                    Pour effacer le filtre,

                                      -
                                    1. cliquez sur le bouton Filtre
                                      dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant les données filtrées,
                                      2. -
                                    2. sélectionnez l'option Effacer dans la liste d'options de Filtre qui s'ouvre.
                                      3. +
                                    3. cliquez sur l'icône Filtre
                                      dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant des données filtrées,
                                      4. +
                                    4. sélectionnez l'option Effacer dans la liste d'options de Filtrage qui s'ouvre.
                                    -

                                    Vous pouvez également procéder de la manière suivante :

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également procéder de la manière suivante:

                                    1. sélectionner la plage de cellules contenant les données filtrées,
                                      2. -
                                    2. cliquez sur l'icône Effacer le filtre
                                      située dans l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                                      3. +
                                    3. cliquez sur l'icône Effacer le filtre
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                                    Le filtre restera activé, mais tous les paramètres de filtre appliqués seront supprimés et les boutons Filtre dans les premières cellules des colonnes seront remplacés par les flèches déroulantes .

                                    Supprimer le filtre

                                    -

                                    Pour enlever le filtre,

                                    +

                                    Pour supprimer un filtre,

                                    1. sélectionner la plage de cellules contenant les données filtrées,
                                      2. -
                                    2. cliquez sur l'icône Filtrer
                                      située dans l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure.
                                      3. +
                                    3. cliquez sur l'icône Filtre
                                      sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                                    Le filtre sera désactivé et les flèches déroulantes disparaîtront des premières cellules des colonnes.

                                    Trier les données en fonction de plusieurs colonnes/lignes

                                    Pour trier les données en fonction de plusieurs colonnes/lignes, vous pouvez créer un tri à plusieurs niveaux en utilisant l'option Tri personnalisé.

                                    1. sélectionner une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour trier toute la plage),
                                      2. -
                                    2. cliquez sur l'icône Tri personnalisé
                                      sous l'onglet Données de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                      3. +
                                    3. cliquez sur l'icône Tri personnalisé sous l'onglet Données de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                    4. - La fenêtre Trier s'affiche : La tri par défaut est par colonne. + La fenêtre Trier s'affiche: La tri par défaut est par colonne.

                                      La fenêtre Tri personnalisé

                                      -

                                      Pour modifier l'orientation de tri (c'est à dire trier les données sur les lignes au lieu de colonnes), cliquez sur le bouton Options en haut. La fenêtre Options de tri s'affiche :

                                      -

                                      La fenêtre Options de tri

                                      -
                                        -
                                      1. activez la case Mes données ont des en-têtes le cas échéant.
                                        2. -
                                      2. choisissez Orientation appropriée : Trier du haut vers le bas pour trier les données sur colonnes ou Trier de la gauche vers la droite pour trier les données sur lignes,
                                        3. -
                                      3. cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermez la fenêtre.
                                        4. -
                                      -
                                    5. - spécifiez le premier niveau de tri dans le champ Trier par : -

                                      La fenêtre Tri personnalisé

                                      -
                                        -
                                      • dans la section Colonne/Ligne sélectionnez la première colonne/ligne à trier,
                                        • -
                                      • dans la liste Trier sur, choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Valeurs, Couleur de cellule ou Couleur de police,
                                        • -
                                      • - dans la liste Ordre, spécifiez l'ordre de tri. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du choix dans la liste Trier sur : + utilisez les sections Niveaux pour ajouter de nouveaux niveaux et pour gérer des niveaux qu'on a déjà ajouté.
                                          -
                                        • si vous choisissez l'option Valeurs, choisissez entre Ascendant/Descendant pour les valeurs numériques dans la plage ou de A à Z / de Z à A pour les valeurs de texte dans la plage,
                                          • -
                                        • si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de cellule, choisissez la couleur de cellule appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes,
                                          • -
                                        • si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de police, choisissez la couleur de police appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes,
                                          • -
                                        -
                                        • -
                                      -
                                      6. -
                                    6. ajoutez encore un niveau de tri en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter un niveau, sélectionnez la deuxième ligne/colonne à trier et configurez le autres paramètres de tri dans des champs Puis par comme il est décrit ci-dessus. Ajoutez plusieurs niveaux de la même façon le cas échéant.
                                      7. -
                                    7. Gérez tous les niveaux ajouté à l'aide des boutons en haut de la fenêtre : Supprimer un niveau, Copier un niveau ou changer l'ordre des niveaux à l'aide des boutons fléché Passer au niveau inférieur/Passer au niveau supérieur.
                                      8. -
                                    8. Cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermez la fenêtre.
                                      9. +
                                    9. Le bouton Nouveau pour ajouter un nouveau niveau, sélectionnez la deuxième ligne/colonne à trier et configurez les autres paramètres de tri dans des champs Puis par comme il est décrit ci-dessus. Ajoutez plusieurs niveaux de la même façon, le cas échéant, +
                                    10. Le bouton Copier pour copier le niveau sélectionné et pour doubler tous les paramètres définis,
                                      11. +
                                    11. + Le bouton Options pour modifier l'orientation de tri (c-à-d trier des données par lignes au lieu de trier par colonnes). Cliquez sur le bouton pour ouvrir la fenêtre Options de tri, +

                                      Fenêtre Options de tri

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • activez la case Mes données ont des en-têtes, le cas échéant,
                                        • +
                                      • choisissez Orientation appropriée: Trier du haut vers le bas pour trier les données par colonnes ou Trier de la gauche vers la droite pour trier les données par lignes,
                                        • +
                                      • cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermez la fenêtre.
                                        • +
                                      + +
                                    12. Le bouton Supprimer pour effacer le niveau sélectionné. +
                                    13. Les boutons fléchés Monter d'un niveau/Descendre d'un niveau pour modifier la séquence de niveaux.
                                      14. +
                                  + +
                                • + spécifiez le premier niveau de tri dans le champ Trier par: +

                                  La fenêtre Tri personnalisé

                                  +
                                    +
                                  • dans la section Colonne/Ligne sélectionnez la première colonne/ligne à trier,
                                    • +
                                  • dans la liste Trier sur, choisissez l'une des options suivantes: Valeurs, Couleur de cellule ou Couleur de police,
                                    • +
                                  • + dans la liste Ordre, spécifiez l'ordre de tri. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du choix dans la liste Trier sur: +
                                      +
                                    • si vous choisissez l'option Valeurs, choisissez entre Ascendant/Descendant pour les valeurs numériques dans la plage ou de A à Z / de Z à A pour les valeurs de texte dans la plage,
                                      • +
                                    • si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de cellule, choisissez la couleur de cellule appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes,
                                      • +
                                    • si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de police, choisissez la couleur de police appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes,
                                      • +
                                    +
                                    • +
                                  +
                                  • +
                                • Cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre.

                            Toutes les données seront triées selon les niveaux de tri définis.

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index 7bf92a07b1..92d9cdbb07 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                            Remplacer un mot par synonyme

                            - Si on répète plusieurs fois le même mot ou il ne semble pas que le mot est juste, l'Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE vous permet de trouver les synonymes. + Si on répète plusieurs fois le même mot ou il ne semble pas que le mot est juste, l'éditeur de classeurs ONLYOFFICE vous permet de trouver les synonymes. Retrouvez les antonymes du mot affiché aussi.

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index bf44318a71..747b4d31a2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                              Traduire un texte

                              -

                              Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez traduire votre feuille de calcul dans de nombreuses langues disponibles.

                              +

                              Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez traduire votre feuille de calcul dans de nombreuses langues disponibles.

                              1. Sélectionnez le texte à traduire.
                              2. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez
                                Traducteur, l'application de traduction s'affiche dans le panneau de gauche.
                                3. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm index d9127d2be2..ff0eb46cb9 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Annuler/rétablir vos actions - + @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                Annuler/rétablir vos actions

                                -

                                Pour effectuer les opérations annuler/rétablir, utilisez les icônes correspondantes disponibles dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête du Tableur :

                                +

                                Pour effectuer les opérations annuler/rétablir, utilisez les icônes correspondantes disponibles dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur de classeurs:

                                • Annuler – utilisez l'icône Annuler
                                  pour annuler la dernière action effectuée.
                                • Rétablir – utilisez l'icône Rétablir
                                  pour rétablir la dernière action annulée.
                                  • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseNamedRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseNamedRanges.htm index 9385610770..d06812709e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseNamedRanges.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseNamedRanges.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                  Utiliser les plages nommées

                                  -

                                  Les noms sont des notations significatives pouvant être affectées à une cellule ou à une plage de cellules et utilisées pour simplifier l'utilisation de formules dans le Tableur. En créant une formule, vous pouvez insérer un nom comme argument au lieu d'utiliser une référence à une plage de cellules. Par exemple, si vous affectez le nom Revenu_Annuel àune plage de cellules, il sera possible d'entrer =SUM(Revenu_Annuel) au lieu de =SOMME(B1:B12). Sous une telle forme, les formules deviennent plus claires. Cette fonctionnalité peut également être utile dans le cas où beaucoup de formules se réfèrent à une même plage de cellules. Si l'adresse de plage est modifiée, vous pouvez effectuer la correction en une seule fois à l'aide du Gestionnaire de noms au lieu de modifier toutes les formules une par une.

                                  +

                                  Les noms sont des notations significatives pouvant être affectées à une cellule ou à une plage de cellules et utilisées pour simplifier l'utilisation de formules dans l'éditeur de classeurs. En créant une formule, vous pouvez insérer un nom comme argument au lieu d'utiliser une référence à une plage de cellules. Par exemple, si vous affectez le nom Revenu_Annuel àune plage de cellules, il sera possible d'entrer =SUM(Revenu_Annuel) au lieu de =SOMME(B1:B12). Sous une telle forme, les formules deviennent plus claires. Cette fonctionnalité peut également être utile dans le cas où beaucoup de formules se réfèrent à une même plage de cellules. Si l'adresse de plage est modifiée, vous pouvez effectuer la correction en une seule fois à l'aide du Gestionnaire de noms au lieu de modifier toutes les formules une par une.

                                  Deux types de noms peuvent être utilisés :

                                  • Nom défini - nom arbitraire que vous pouvez spécifier pour une certaine plage de cellules. Les noms définis incluent également les noms créés automatiquement lors de la configuration de zones d'impression.
                                    • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index 62bfc583fb..4c43b9d252 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -15,9 +15,10 @@

                                    Afficher les informations sur le fichier

                                    -

                                    Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le classeur actuellement édité dans le Tableur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations du classeur...

                                    +

                                    Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le classeur actuellement édité dans l'éditeur de classeurs, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations du classeur...

                                    +

                                    L'information sur le classeur comprend le titre de le classeur et l'application avec laquelle le classeur a été créée. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés.

                                    Informations générales

                                    -

                                    L'information sur la présentation comprend le titre de la présentation et l'application avec laquelle la présentation a été créée. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés.

                                    +

                                    L'information sur le classeur comprend le titre de le classeur et l'application avec laquelle le a été créé. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés.

                                    • Emplacement - le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Ces paramètres ne sont disponibles que sous la version en ligne.
                                    • Titre, sujet, commentaire - ces paramètres facilitent la classification des documents. Vos pouvez saisir l'information nécessaire dans les champs appropriés.
                                      • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WatchWindow.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WatchWindow.htm index b0f5890f30..23e76098b3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WatchWindow.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/WatchWindow.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                      Fenêtre Espions

                                      -

                                      Lorsque l'on travaille avec de grands ensembles de données dans Spreadsheet Editor, la Fenêtre Espions peut être utile pour surveiller les cellules et les formules. La Fenêtre Espions permet de surveiller les modifications apportées aux cellules qui ne sont pas visibles dans une feuille de calcul. Vous pouvez basculer vite vers la cellule nécessaire en double-cliquant sur celle-ci dans la Fenêtre Espions.

                                      +

                                      Lorsque l'on travaille avec de grands ensembles de données dans l'éditeur de classeurs, la Fenêtre Espions peut être utile pour surveiller les cellules et les formules. La Fenêtre Espions permet de surveiller les modifications apportées aux cellules qui ne sont pas visibles dans une feuille de calcul. Vous pouvez basculer vite vers la cellule nécessaire en double-cliquant sur celle-ci dans la Fenêtre Espions.

                                      La Fenêtre Espions permet de suivre les éléments suivants: Classeur, Feuille de calcul, Nom, Cellule, Valeur et Formule.

                                      Fenêtre Espions

                                      Pour ajouter un nouveau espion,

                                      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm index def713838c..cf0831f94a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                      Insérer une vidéo

                                      -

                                      Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre feuille de calcul. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici.

                                      +

                                      Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre feuille de calcul. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici.

                                      1. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer
                                        diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..094c49bfb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + Zoom + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Zoom

                                        +

                                        Le module complémentaire Zoom permet créer et programmer des réunions de Zoom directement dans l'éditeur en quelques clics.

                                        +

                                        Le module complémentaire est compatible avec la version auto-hébergée des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE et c'est possible de l'ajouter manuellement aux instances ONLYOFFICE.

                                        + +

                                        Installation

                                        +

                                        Pour installer le module complémentaire Zoom,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                          2. +
                                        2. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de plugins.
                                          3. +
                                        3. Recherchez
                                          Zoom sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous.
                                          4. +
                                        4. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom
                                          sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                          5. +
                                        5. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire.
                                          6. +
                                        +

                                        Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter la documentation API ONLYOFFICE.

                                        + +

                                        Configuration

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. + Enregistrez l'éditeur en tant que l'application JWT sur la page Zoom Developer pour utiliser la programmation des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Le jeton JWT sera assigné à l'application. +

                                          Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom .

                                          +
                                          2. +
                                        2. + Créez l'application Meeting SDK sur la page Zoom Developer pour pouvoir joindre des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Les informations d'identification SDK seront assignées à l'application. +

                                          Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom .

                                          +
                                          3. +
                                        3. Saisissez les clés SDK Key, SDK Secret et le jeton JWT Token dans les champs appropriés sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur ONLYOFFICE et cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                          4. +
                                        +

                                        Paramètres Zoom

                                        + +

                                        Utilisation

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires.
                                          2. +
                                        2. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom
                                          .
                                          3. +
                                        3. + Saisissez le thème de la réunion et sélectionnez Démarrer une réunion ou Programmer une réunion. +
                                            +
                                          • Démarrer une réunion sert à créer une nouvelle réunion. Tous les détails s'affichent dans le chat de l'éditeur. Appuyez sur les touches de la combinaison Alt + Q pour un accès rapide au chat.
                                            • +
                                          • Programmer une réunion - définir les paramètres obligatoires de la réunion à venir tels que l'heur, la date et la durée. Accédez aux Paramètres avancés pour afficher les paramètres supplémentaires. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer.
                                            • +
                                          +

                                          Les notifications de réunion sont affichées dans le Chat de l'éditeur en ligne et dans les Commentaires de l'éditeur du bureau.

                                          +
                                          4. +
                                        4. Cliquez sur Reconfigurer pour définir les paramètres encore une fois.
                                          5. +
                                        5. Cliquez sur le bouton Mode réunion pour accéder au menu de la réunion dans lequel vous pouvez configurez les paramètres suivants: Nom, ID Réunion, Email et Mot de passe. Sélectionnez votre rôle, région de la réunion et langue de la réunion.
                                          6. +
                                        6. Cliquez sur le bouton Joindre pour vous associer à la réunion ou cliquez sur Copier le lien direct vers la réunion pour copier le lien dans le presse-papiers.
                                          7. +
                                        7. Lorsque vous rejoignez la réunion, la fenêtre Zoom s'affichera sur le panneau du module complémentaire. De la manière habituelle, vous pouvez activer ou désactiver le micro ou la caméra, effectuer diverses actions et passer au mode d'affichage Plein écran.
                                          8. +
                                        +

                                        Une fenêtre noire peut apparaître dans le navigateur Safari lorsqu'on se joint à la réunion. Pour faire disparaître l'erreur, il faut redimensionner la fenêtre du module complémentaire ou zoomer sur la page de navigateur.

                                        +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css index 9452c3de97..d789dacd08 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/allowedit_newrange.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/allowedit_newrange.png index 1934a7d3fd..01567a28e4 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/allowedit_newrange.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/allowedit_newrange.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/arraytotext.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/arraytotext.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..54d36d061f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/arraytotext.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png index 3e78f7ee65..0bac6c94df 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png index 80efffe467..e370404825 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/conditionalformatting_rightclick.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/editranges.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/editranges.png index 26d38849d7..00ea487663 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/editranges.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/editranges.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/expand.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/expand.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d362acfcf9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/expand.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/externallinks.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/externallinks.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..65a3443cca Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/externallinks.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/extlinkwarning.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/extlinkwarning.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2cbc2e9f67 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/extlinkwarning.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/filter.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/filter.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3efe4e6f6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/filter.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupewindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupewindow.png index c4ff5c15b7..53319ca756 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupewindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupewindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 87b9b0627e..c777797ef3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/datatab.png index e80c6b32ff..59e847b60b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 2db704b065..c3f59226fc 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png index 9a7e234eb4..e3c3e52533 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..823ca0e074 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index 11714739fd..1c05208f97 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index f0faa0ea52..c6ff513d0b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png index dcdcf61e0b..86136f5654 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 8f80a8a1b1..ad6e37cb95 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 2d81f38942..4006255fb3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index f5913af4d4..812ce2878b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png index 4f6250955c..7d7295dadb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 3672eebbb2..741cded999 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index de3933b56b..0158e0bec6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index bbf54cb172..7346aaecc9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5a6c5b3e0b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 03f52a8e5c..7e8723813d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png index e79a6c41d3..b188901677 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/formulatab.png index a2527106a1..c8c590464f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png index b67069c40c..211ca02d51 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png index e02ecfdcfe..fa289675cf 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png index a214ea0a5f..f89ea7a631 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pivottabletab.png index b867f739c7..9f74b53a59 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 575400623c..9f140bf5b6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png index 4d0f833f9e..2267e77eb6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectsheet_highlighted.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectsheet_highlighted.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c24e860dfe Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/protectsheet_highlighted.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png index 8ad1f9244d..62660be6ab 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png index b176375573..6a19da8599 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips1.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png index c35556b26e..0d6587804d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/keytips2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/managerules.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/managerules.png index d1323b1609..d28ef0d60d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/managerules.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/managerules.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_across_menu.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_across_menu.png index f2d93af6c1..9e3b3c14d9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_across_menu.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_across_menu.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_menu.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_menu.png index 4fe8bad442..25d7465e41 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_menu.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/merge_menu.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/pivot_top.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/pivot_top.png index de484cc711..1e6d42ee44 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/pivot_top.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/pivot_top.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png index f010f881a3..9f999a21ca 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_sheet.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_sheet.png index 0aef070f7d..2236c4bd2a 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_sheet.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_sheet.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_workbook.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_workbook.png index f23167e9c3..8af235268b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_workbook.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protect_workbook.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png index 03bf039eb2..8a788be4a3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png index b540026aff..4861ea7194 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/protectworkbook_highlighted.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png index 7cc4c9d306..f97217b751 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png index db9be15917..215a174bbc 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/scalesettings.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/scalesettings.png index 9ff3802c07..7dfefe0e56 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/scalesettings.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/scalesettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/sequence.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/sequence.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..039a1557b6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/sequence.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/sort.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/sort.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9a32094424 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/sort.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unlockrange.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unlockrange.png index 5fef5364e9..eff8631eca 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unlockrange.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unlockrange.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unmerge.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unmerge.png index ef54227061..6b3298b49f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unmerge.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unmerge.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheet.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheet.png index a982c4e834..ed3601a5b1 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheet.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheet.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheettab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheettab.png index a0818a3ab8..8dc98e7e76 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheettab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_sheettab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_workbook.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_workbook.png index adc1b01068..b8bb3e8cec 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_workbook.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/unprotect_workbook.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js index a0d7dabc03..da537aaff1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js @@ -70,6 +70,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE", "body": "La fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour convertir un chiffre romain en nombre. La syntaxe de la fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE est : CHIFFRE.ARABE(x) où x est une représentation textuelle d'un nombre romain : une chaîne entre guillemets ou une référence à une cellule contenant du texte. Remarque : si une chaîne vide (\"\") est utilisée comme argument, la fonction renvoie la valeur 0. Pour appliquer la fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE, sélectionnez la cellule où vous souhaitez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction située sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Maths et trigonométrie depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction CHIFFRE.ARABE, saisissez l'argument requis, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée." }, + { + "id": "Functions/arraytotext.htm", + "title": "Fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE", + "body": "La fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE appartient aux fonctions de données et texte. Cette fonction permet de renvoyer et convertir une plage de données en texte. Le syntaxe de la fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE: =TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE(tableau, [format]) où: tableau est la plage de cellules à renvoyer sous forme de texte, [format] est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: 0 sert à séparer les valeurs par une virgule dans la chaîne texte (valeur par défaut), 1 sert à placer chaque valeur entre guillemets doubles (sauf des nombres, des valeurs vrai/faux et des erreurs), utiliser le point-virgule en tant que délimiteur et place la chaîne de texte entière entre accolades. Pour appliquer la fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions de Données et texte depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE, insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." + }, { "id": "Functions/asc.htm", "title": "Fonction ASC", @@ -720,6 +725,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Fonction EXP", "body": "La fonction EXP est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Elle est utilisée pour renvoyer la constante e élevée à la puissance désirée. La constante e est égale à 2,71828182845904. La syntaxe de la fonction EXP est : EXP(x) où x est une puissance à laquelle vous souhauter élever e, une valeur numérique saisie à la main ou incluse dans la cellule à laquelle il est fait référence. Pour appliquer la fonction EXP, sélectionnez la cellule où vous souhaitez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction située sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Maths et trigonométrie depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction EXP, saisissez l'argument requis, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée." }, + { + "id": "Functions/expand.htm", + "title": "Fonction EXPAND", + "body": "La fonction EXPAND appartient aux fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction permet d'agrandir la plage de données (le tableau) en insérant des lignes et des colonnes. Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau. Le syntaxe de la fonction EXPAND: =EXPAND(tableau, lignes, [colonnes], [pad_width]) où: tableau est la plage de cellules à agrandir, lignes est le nombre de lignes dans le tableau renvoyé, Bien qu'il s'agisse d'un argument obligatoire, s'il est omis, les lignes ne seront pas ajoutées et on doit indiquer le nombre de colonnes. [colonnes] est un argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de colonnes à renvoyer. Si cet argument est omis, les colonnes ne seront pas ajoutées et on doit indiquer le nombre de lignes. [pad_with] est la valeur avec laquelle on va remplir les cellules ajoutées. #N/A est la valeur par défaut. Pour appliquer la fonction EXPAND, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction EXPAND, insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." + }, { "id": "Functions/expon-dist.htm", "title": "Fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE.N", @@ -775,6 +785,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Fonction LOI.F", "body": "La fonction LOI.F est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Il est utilisé pour renvoyer la distribution de probabilité F(droite), ou degré de diversité, pour deux ensembles de données. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour déterminer si deux ensembles de données ont des degrés de diversité différents. La syntaxe de la fonction LOI.F est : LOI.F(x, deg-freedom1, deg-freedom2) où x est la valeur pour laquelle la fonction doit être calculée. Une valeur numérique supérieure à 0. deg-freedom1 est le nombre de degrés de liberté du numérateur, une valeur numérique supérieure à 1 et inférieure à 10^10. deg-freedom2 est le nombre de degrés de liberté du dénominateur, une valeur numérique supérieure à 1 et inférieure à 10^10. Les données peuvent être saisies à la main ou incluses dans les cellules auxquelles il est fait référence. Pour appliquer la fonction LOI.F, sélectionnez la cellule où vous souhaitez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction située sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Statistique depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction LOI.F, insérez les arguments requis en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée." }, + { + "id": "Functions/filter.htm", + "title": "Fonction FILTRE", + "body": "La fonction FILTRE appartient aux fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction permet de filtrer une plage de données et renvoyer les résultats qui répondent aux critères spécifiés. La fonction FILTRE extrait uniquement les données nécessaires et les résultats sont mis à jour lorsque les données source changent. Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau. Le syntaxe de la fonction FILTRE: =FILTRE(tableau; inclure; [si_vide]) où: tableau est la plage de cellules à trier. inclure est le critère de filtrage qui est une matrice booléenne (VRAI/FAUX) de la même hauteur (colonnes) et la même largeur (lignes) que le tableau, [si_vide]) est la valeur à renvoyer lorsqu'il n'y a pas de résulats à renvoyer. C'est un argument facultatif. Pour appliquer la fonction FILTRE, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction FILTRE, insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." + }, { "id": "Functions/find.htm", "title": "Fonction TROUVE/TROUVERB", @@ -1875,6 +1890,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Fonction SECONDE", "body": "La fonction SECONDE est l'une des fonctions de date et d'heure. Elle renvoie les secondes (un nombre de 0 à 59) d'une valeur de temps. La syntaxe de la fonction SECONDE est : SECONDE( time-value ) où time-value est une valeur saisie à la main ou incluse dans la cellule à laquelle il est fait référence. Remarque: time-value (valeur de temps) peut être exprimée comme une valeur de chaîne (par exemple \"13:39:15\"), un nombre décimal (par exemple 0.56 correspondant à 13:26:24) , ou le résultat d'une formule (par exemple le résultat de la fonction NOW - 9/26/12 13:39) Pour appliquer la fonction SECONDE, sélectionnez la cellule où vous souhaitez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction située sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Date et heure depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction SECONDE, saisissez l'argument requis, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée." }, + { + "id": "Functions/sequence.htm", + "title": "Fonction SEQUENCE", + "body": "Fonction SEQUENCE est l'une des fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques. Cette fonction permet de générer un tableau de nombres séquentiels. Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau. Le syntaxe de la fonction SEQUENCE: =SEQUENCE(lignes;[colonnes];[début];[étape]) où: lignes sert à définir le nombre de lignes à renvoyer. colonnes sert à définir le nombre de colonnes à renvoyer. début sert à définir le premier nombre de la séquence. étape sert à contrôler la valeur ajoutée à chaque valeur ultérieure par l'incrément. Pour appliquer la fonction SEQUENCE, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Maths et trigonométrie dans la liste, cliquez sur la fonction SEQUENCE, insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." + }, { "id": "Functions/seriessum.htm", "title": "Fonction SOMME.SERIES", @@ -1930,6 +1950,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Fonction PETITE.VALEUR", "body": "La fonction PETITE.VALEUR est l'une des fonctions statistiques. Elle est utilisée pour analyser une plage de cellules et renvoyer la k-ième plus petite valeur. La syntaxe de la fonction PETITE.VALEUR est : PETITE.VALEUR(array , k) où array est une plage de cellules à analyser. k est la position du nombre à partir de la plus petite valeur, une valeur numérique supérieure à 0 saisie à la main ou incluse dans la cellule à laquelle il est fait référence. Pour appliquer la fonction PETITE.VALEUR, sélectionnez la cellule où vous souhaitez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction située sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Statistique depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction PETITE.VALEUR, insérez les arguments requis en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée." }, + { + "id": "Functions/sort.htm", + "title": "Fonction TRIER", + "body": "La fonction TRIER appartient aux fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction est destinée au tri d'une plage de données ou d'un tableau et au renvoi du plage triée. Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau. Le syntaxe de la fonction TRIER: =TRIER(tableau;[index_tri];[ordre_tri];[par_col]) où: tableau est la plage de données à trier. [index_tri] est un argument facultatif. C'est le nombre de la colonne ou de la ligne à trier. [ordre_tri] est un argument facultatif. C'est un nombre définissant l'ordre de tri: 1 ou s'il est omis pour l'ordre croissant (par défaut), -1 pour l'ordre décroissant, [par_col] est un argument facultatif. C'est une valeur indiquant la direction de tri: FAUX ou si elle est omise pour trier les données qui sont organisées verticalement VRAI pour trier par colonne lorsque vos données sont organisées horizontalement. Pour appliquer la fonction TRIER, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction TRIER, insérez les arguments nécessaires en les séparant par des virgules, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." + }, { "id": "Functions/sqrt.htm", "title": "Fonction RACINE", @@ -2325,6 +2350,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Fonction XLOOKUP", "body": "La fonction XLOOKUP (RECHERCHEX) est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Elle est utilisée pour rechercher des éléments par ligne verticalement et horizontalement. Cette fonction permet de renvoyer un résultat dans une autre colonne et de prendre en charge des feuilles de calcul à deux dimensions. Le syntaxe de la fonction XLOOKUP: XLOOKUP (lookup_value, lookup_array, return_array, [if_not_found], [match_mode], [search_mode]) où: valeur_cherchée est une valeur à chercher. lookup_array est matrice ou plage à rechercher. return_array est matrice ou plage à renvoyer. if_not_found est un argument facultatif. Lorsqu'aucune résultat n'est trouvée, cet argument renvoie le texte [if_not_found] que vous définissez. Si le texte est manquant, la #N/A est renvoyée. match_mode est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: 0 (par défaut) renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune n'a été trouvée la #N/A est renvoyée. -1 renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune information n'a été trouvée, l'élément le plus petit suivant est renvoyé. 1 renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune information n'a été trouvée, l'élément plus grand suivant est renvoyé. 2 est une correspondance avec caractère générique. search_mode est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: 1 la recherche est effectuée à partir du premier élément (valeurnpar défaut). -1 une recherche inverse est effectuée, c-à-d à partir du dernier élément. 2 une recherche binaire est effectuée quand lookup_array est triée dans l'ordre croissant. S'il n'est pas trié, des résultats non valides seront renvoyés. -2 une recherche binaire est effectuée quand lookup_array est triée dans l'ordre décroissant. S'il n'est pas trié, des résultats non valides seront renvoyés. Des caractères génériques sont (?) le point d'interrogation pour rechercher un seul caractère et (*) l'astérisque pour rechercher plusieurs caractères. Quand vous recherchez le point d'interrogation ou l'astérisque, saisissez un tilde (~) avant le caractère. Pour appliquer la fonction XLOOKUP, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, appuyez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction XLOOKUP, saisissez les arguments requis dans la fenêtre Argument de formule, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." }, + { + "id": "Functions/xmatch.htm", + "title": "Fonction EQUIVX", + "body": "Fonction EQUIVX est l'une des fonctions de recherche et de référence. Cette fonction permet de renvoyer la position relative de l'élément dans un tableau. Par défaut, cette fonction nécessite une correspondance exacte. Veillez noter que c'est une formule de tableau. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter le guide Insérer des formules de tableau. Le syntaxe de la fonction EQUIVX: =EQUIVX(valeur_recherche, tableau_recherche, [mode_correspondance], [mode_recherche]) où: valeur_recherche est la valeur à rechercher. lookup_array est matrice ou plage à rechercher. mode_correspondance est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: 0 (par défaut) renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune n'a été trouvée la #N/A est renvoyée. -1 renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune information n'a été trouvée, l'élément le plus petit suivant est renvoyé. 1 renvoie une correspondance exacte, si aucune information n'a été trouvée, l'élément plus grand suivant est renvoyé. 2 est une correspondance avec caractère générique. search_mode est un argument facultatif. Les valeurs disponibles: 1 la recherche est effectuée à partir du premier élément (valeurnpar défaut). -1 une recherche inverse est effectuée, c-à-d à partir du dernier élément. 2 une recherche binaire est effectuée quand lookup_array est triée dans l'ordre croissant. S'il n'est pas trié, des résultats non valides seront renvoyés. -2 une recherche binaire est effectuée quand lookup_array est triée dans l'ordre décroissant. S'il n'est pas trié, des résultats non valides seront renvoyés. Des caractères génériques sont (?) le point d'interrogation pour rechercher un seul caractère et (*) l'astérisque pour rechercher plusieurs caractères. Quand vous recherchez le point d'interrogation ou l'astérisque, saisissez un tilde (~) avant le caractère. Pour appliquer la fonction EQUIVX, sélectionnez la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule et choisissez l'option Insérer une fonction dans le menu, ou cliquez sur l'icône de la barre de formule, sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions Recherche et référence depuis la liste, cliquez sur la fonction EQUIVX, saisissez les arguments requis dans la fenêtre Arguments de la fonction, appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Le résultat s'affiche dans la cellule choisie." + }, { "id": "Functions/xnpv.htm", "title": "Fonction VAN.PAIEMENTS", @@ -2377,8 +2407,8 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", - "title": "Paramètres avancés du Tableur", - "body": "Tableur vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Édition et enregistrement Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique est utilisée dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les feuilles de calcul en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Afficher le bouton \"Options de collage\" lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu à la feuille de calcul. Collaboration Le paragraphe Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage préférable des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition de la feuille de calcul. Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition de la feuille de calcul verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Activer l'affichage des commentaires. Si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale gauche. Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus. Cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans la feuille de calcul. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans la feuille de calcul. Espace de travail L'option Style de référence R1C1 est désactivée et le style de référence A1 est utilisé. Lorsque le style de référence A1 est utilisé, les colonnes sont désignées par des lettres et les lignes par des chiffres. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule située dans la rangée 3 et la colonne 2, son adresse affichée dans la case à gauche de la barre de formule ressemble à ceci : B3. Si le style de référence R1C1 est activé, les lignes et les colonnes sont désignées par des numéros. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule à l'intersection de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, son adresse ressemblera à ceci : R3C2. La lettre R indique le numéro de ligne et la lettre C le numéro de colonne. Si vous vous référez à d'autres cellules en utilisant le style de référence A1, la référence à une cellule cible est formée en fonction de la distance à partir de la cellule active. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 5 et de la colonne 1 et faites référence à la cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[-2]C[1]. Les chiffres entre crochets désignent la position de la cellule à laquelle vous vous référez par rapport à la position actuelle de la cellule, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes plus haut et 1 colonne à droite de la cellule active. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 1 et de la colonne 2 et que vous vous référez à la même cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[2]C, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes en dessous de la cellule active et dans la même colonne. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier est utilisée pour activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt / Option à un raccourci clavier. L'option Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. L'option Identique à système rend le thème d'interface de l'éditeur identique à celui de votre système. Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour. Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire. Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit. Le mode Contraste sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. Remarque : En plus des thèmes de l'interface disponibles Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste sombre, il est possible de personnaliser les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en utilisant votre propre couleur de thème. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%. L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans le Tableur. Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est-à-dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est-à-dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif pour afficher le texte avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. Le Tableur gère deux modes de mise en cache : Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mise en cache comme une image indépendante. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mise en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il n'y a pas de mémoire suffisante etc. Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé : Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. L'option Réglages macros s'utilise pour définir l'affichage des macros avec notification. Choisissez Désactivez tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans la feuille de calcul. Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans la feuille de calcul. Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans la feuille de calcul. Paramètres régionaux L'option Language de formule est utilisée pour sélectionner la langue d'affichage et de saisie des noms de formules, des noms et des descriptions d'arguments. Language de formule est disponible dans 32 langues : Allemand, Anglais, Biélorusse, Bulgare, Catalan, Chinois, Coréen, Danois, Espagnol, Finnois, Français, Grec, Hongrois, Indonésien, Italien, Japonais, Laotien, Letton, Norvégien, Néerlandais, Polonais, Portugais, Portugais (Brésil), Roumain, Russe, Slovaque, Slovène, Suédois, Tchèque, Turc, Ukrainien, Vietnamien. L'option Paramètres régionaux est utilisée pour sélectionner le format d'affichage par défaut pour la devise, la date et l'heure. L'option Utiliser des séparateurs basés sur les paramètres régionaux est activée par défaut, les séparateurs correspondront à la région définie. Afin de définir les séparateurs personnalisés, désactivez cette option et saisissez les séparateurs requis dans les champs Séparateur décimal et Séparateur de milliers. Vérification L'option Langue du dictionnaire est utilisée afin de sélectionner le dictionnaire préféré pour la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Le menu Options d'auto-correction... permet d'acceder aux paramètres d'auto-correction tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc. Calcul en cours L'option Utiliser le calendrier depuis 1904 permet de calculer les dates à partir du 1er janvier 1904 comme point de départ. Elle peut être utile lorsque vous travaillez avec des feuilles de calcul créées dans la version MS Excel 2008 pour Mac ou des versions antérieures de MS Excel pour Mac. Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." + "title": "Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de classeurs", + "body": "L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés. Les paramètres avancés sont groupés comme suit: Édition et enregistrement Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique - est utilisé dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les feuilles de calcul en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Afficher le bouton Options de collage lorsque le contenu est collé. L'icône correspondante sera affichée lorsque vous collez le contenu à la feuille de calcul. Collaboration La rubrique Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner le mode d'affichage préférable des modifications effectuées lors de la collaboration sur la feuille de calcul. Rapide (par défaut). Les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition de la feuille de calcul verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Strict. Tous les changements apparaîtront uniquement lorsque vous cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Afficher les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs. Cette option permet d'afficher les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs dans une feuille de calcul disponible en lecture seul en mode Lecteur en direct uniquement. Afficher les commentaires dans la feuille. Une fois désactivée, les fragments commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement lorsque vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires sur la barre latérale gauche. Afficher les commentaires résolus. Cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans la feuille de calcul. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires sur la barre latérale gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans le texte du classeur. Espace de travail L'option Style de référence R1C1 est désactivée et le style de référence A1 est utilisé. Lorsque le style de référence A1 est utilisé, les colonnes sont désignées par des lettres et les lignes par des chiffres. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule située dans la rangée 3 et la colonne 2, son adresse affichée dans la case à gauche de la barre de formule ressemble à ceci: B3. Si le style de référence R1C1 est activé, les lignes et les colonnes sont désignées par des numéros. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule à l'intersection de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, son adresse ressemblera à ceci: R3C2. La lettre R indique le numéro de ligne et la lettre C le numéro de colonne. Si vous vous référez à d'autres cellules en utilisant le style de référence R1C1, la référence à une cellule cible est formée en fonction de la distance à partir de la cellule active. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 5 et de la colonne 1 et faites référence à la cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[-2]C[1]. Les chiffres entre crochets désignent la position de la cellule à laquelle vous vous référez par rapport à la position actuelle de la cellule, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes plus haut et 1 colonne à droite de la cellule active. Si vous sélectionnez la cellule de la ligne 1 et de la colonne 2 et que vous vous référez à la même cellule de la ligne 3 et de la colonne 2, la référence est R[2]C, c'est-à-dire que la cellule cible est à 2 lignes en dessous de la cellule active et dans la même colonne. L'option Utiliser la touche Alt pour naviguer dans l'interface utilisateur à l'aide du clavier sert à activer l'utilisation de la touche Alt/Option dans raccourcis clavier. Thème d'interface permet de modifier les jeux de couleurs de l'interface d'éditeur. L'option Identique à système permet d'utiliser le thème système par l'éditeur. Le mode Claire comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire à contraste réduit et est destiné à un travail de jour. Le mode Claire classique comprend l'affichage en couleurs standards bleu, blanc et gris claire. Le mode Sombre comprend l'affichage en tons sombres noir, gris foncé et gris claire destinés à un travail de nuit. Le mode Contraste élevé sombre comprend l'affichage des éléments de l'interface utilisateur en couleurs noir, gris foncé et blanc à plus de contraste et est destiné à mettre en surbrillance la zone de travail du fichier. Remarque: Outre les thèmes d'interface Claire, Classique claire, Sombre et Contraste élevé sombre, il est possible de personnaliser le thème de vos éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter ces instructions. L'option Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre, Point ou Pouce. L'option Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 500%. L'option Hinting de la police sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans l'éditeur de classeurs. Choisissez Comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est à dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez Comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est à dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte sera affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Mise en cache par défaut sert à sélectionner cache de police. Il n'est pas recommandé de désactiver ce mode-ci sans raison évidente. C'est peut être utile dans certains cas, par exemple les problèmes d'accélération matérielle activé sous Google Chrome. L'éditer de classeurs gère deux modes de mise en cache: Dans le premier mode de mise en cache chaque lettre est mis en cache comme une image indépendante. Dans le deuxième mode de mise en cache l'image d'une certaine taille est sélectionnée avec les lettres dynamiques et avec de l'allocation/libération de la mémoire mis en place. La deuxième image est créée s'il y a de mémoire suffisante etc. Le Mode de mise en cache par défaut est activé en fonction du navigateur utilisé: Avec la mise en cache par défaut activée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. Avec la mise en cache par défaut désactivée, dans Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) le premier mode de mise en cache est utilisé, le deuxième mode de mise en cache est utilisé dans les autres navigateurs. L'option Réglages macros sert à désactiver toutes les macros avec notification. Choisissez Désactiver tout pour désactiver toutes les macros dans votre feuille de calcul. Choisissez Montrer la notification pour afficher les notifications lorsque des macros sont présentes dans une feuille de calcul. Choisissez Activer tout pour exécuter automatiquement toutes les macros dans votre feuille de calcul. Paramètres régionaux L'option Langage de formule est utilisée pour sélectionner la langue d'affichage et de saisie des noms de formules, des noms et des descriptions d'arguments. Les formules sont pris en charge dans 33 langues: Allemand, anglais, arménien, bulgare, catalan, chinois, danois, espagnol, finnois, français, grec, hongrois, indonésien, italien, japonais, coréen, lao, letton, norvégien, néerlandais, polonais, portugais (Brésil), portugais (Portugal), roumain, russe, slovaque, slovène, suédois, tchèque, turc, ukrainien, vietnamien. L'option Région est utilisée pour sélectionner le format d'affichage par défaut pour la devise, la date et l'heure. Régions disponibles: Azerbaïdjan (Azerbaïdjan), bulgare (Bulgarie), tchèque (République tchèque), danois (Danemark), allemand (Autriche), allemand (Allemagne), allemand (Suisse), grec (Grèce), anglais (Australie), anglais (Royaume-Uni), anglais (USA), espagnol (Espagne), espagnol (Mexique), finnois (Finlande), français (France), français (Suisse), italien (Italie), italien (Suisse), japonais (Japon), coréen (Corée), letton (Lettonie), hongrois (Hongrie), néerlandais (Pays-Bas), polonais (Pologne), portugais (Brésil), portugais (Portugal), russe (Russie), slovaque (Slovaquie), slovène (République de Slovénie), suédois (Finlande), suédois (Suède), turc (Turquie), ukrainien (Ukraine), vietnamien (Viêt Nam), chinois (Chine), taïwanais (Taïwan). L'option Utiliser des séparateurs basés sur les paramètres régionaux est activée par défaut, les séparateurs correspondront à la région définie. Afin de définir les séparateurs personnalisés, désactivez cette option et saisissez les séparateurs requis dans les champs Séparateur décimal et Séparateur de milliers. Vérification L'option Langue du dictionnaire est utilisée afin de sélectionner le dictionnaire préféré pour la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES. Les mots tapés en majuscules sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres. Les mots contenant des chiffres sont ignorés lors de la vérification de l'orthographe. Le menu Options de correction automatique permet d'accéder aux paramètres de correction automatique tels que remplacement au cours de la frappe, fonctions de reconnaissance, mise en forme automatique etc. Calcul L'option Utiliser le calendrier depuis 1904 permet de calculer les dates à partir du 1er janvier 1904 comme point de départ. Elle peut être utile lorsque vous travaillez avec des feuilles de calcul créées dans la version MS Excel 2008 pour Mac ou des versions antérieures de MS Excel pour Mac. Pour enregistrer toutes les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -2388,7 +2418,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "title": "Commentaires", - "body": "Tableur permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers, collaborer sur feuilles de calcul en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure. Dans le Tableur vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenu de feuilles de calcul sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Laisser et répondre aux commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire : sélectionnez la cellule où vous pensez qu'il y a une erreur ou un problème, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration sur la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires ou utilisez l'icône Commentaires sur la barre latérale de gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et cliquez sur le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu contextuel, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Pour afficher le commentaire, cliquez sur la cellule. Tout utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référence au travail qu'il/elle a fait. Pour ce faire, utilisez le lien Ajouter une réponse, saisissez le texte de votre réponse dans le champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton Répondre. Désactiver l'affichage des commentaires Le commentaire sera affiché sur le panneau à gauche. Le triangle orange apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de la cellule que vous avez commentée. Si vous souhaitez désactiver cette fonctionnalité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage de commentaires. Dans ce cas, les cellules commentées ne seront marquées que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires . Gérer les commentaires Vous pouvez gérer les commentaires ajoutés en utilisant les icônes de la bulle de commentaire ou sur le panneau gauche Commentaires : trier les commentaires ajoutés en cliquant sur l'icône : par date : Plus récent ou Plus ancien. par auteur : Auteur de A à Z ou Auteur de Z à Z par groupe : Tout ou sélectionnez un groupe de la liste. Cette option de trie n'est disponible que si votre version prend en charge cette fonctionnalité. modifier le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, supprimer le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, fermer la discussion actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône. l'icône. Si vous souhaitez masquer les commentaires résolus, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Dans ce cas, les commentaires résolus ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône. si vous souhaitez gérer plusieurs commentaires à la fois, ouvrez le menu contextuel Résoudre sous l'onglet Collaboration. Sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : résoudre les commentaires actuels, marquer mes commentaires comme résolus ou marquer tous les commentaires comme résolus dans la feuille de calcul. Ajouter les mentions Ce n'est qu'au contenu d'une feuille de calcul que vous pouvez ajouter des mentions et pas à la feuille de calcul elle-même. Lorsque vous ajoutez un commentaire sur lequel vous voulez attirer l'attention d'une personne, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction de mentions et envoyer une notification par courrier électronique ou Talk. Pour ajouter une mention, Saisissez \"+\" ou \"@\" n'importe où dans votre commentaire, alors la liste de tous les utilisateurs du portail s'affichera. Pour faire la recherche plus rapide, tapez le prénom approprié dans le champ de saisie, la liste propose les suggestions au cours de la frappe. Puis sélectionnez le nom souhaité dans la liste. Si la personne mentionnée n'a pas l'autorisation d'ouvrir ce fichier, la fenêtre Paramètres de partage va apparaître. Par défaut, un document est partagé en Lecture seule. Modifiez la permission, le cas échéant.. Cliquez sur OK. La personne mentionnée recevra une notification par courrier électronique informant que son nom est mentionné dans un commentaire. La personne recevra encore une notification lorsque un fichier commenté est partagé. Supprimer des commentaires Pour supprimer les commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer sous l'onglet Collaboration dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Supprimer les commentaires actuels à supprimer la sélection du moment. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer mes commentaires à supprimer vos commentaire et laisser les commentaires d'autres. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées à vos commentaires seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer tous les commentaires sert à supprimer tous les commentaires du document. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires, cliquez sur l'icône \"Commentaires\" de la barre latérale de gauche encore une fois." + "body": "Tableur permet de gérer le flux de travail continu par l'ensemble de l'équipe : partager des fichiers et dossiers, collaborer sur feuilles de calcul en temps réel, communiquer directement depuis l'éditeur, sauvegarder des versions de la feuille de calcul pour une utilisation ultérieure. Dans le Tableur vous pouvez laisser les commentaires pour le contenu de feuilles de calcul sans le modifier. Contrairement au messages de chat, les commentaires sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Laisser et répondre aux commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire : sélectionnez la cellule où vous pensez qu'il y a une erreur ou un problème, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration sur la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires ou utilisez l'icône Commentaires sur la barre latérale de gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et cliquez sur le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu contextuel, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Pour afficher le commentaire, cliquez sur la cellule. Tout utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référence au travail qu'il/elle a fait. Pour ce faire, utilisez le lien Ajouter une réponse, saisissez le texte de votre réponse dans le champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton Répondre. Désactiver l'affichage des commentaires Le commentaire sera affiché sur le panneau à gauche. Le triangle orange apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de la cellule que vous avez commentée. Si vous souhaitez désactiver cette fonctionnalité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage de commentaires. Dans ce cas, les cellules commentées ne seront marquées que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires . Gérer les commentaires Vous pouvez gérer les commentaires ajoutés en utilisant les icônes de la bulle de commentaire ou sur le panneau gauche Commentaires : trier les commentaires ajoutés en cliquant sur l'icône : par date : Plus récent ou Plus ancien. par auteur : Auteur de A à Z ou Auteur de Z à A. par groupe : Tout ou sélectionnez un groupe de la liste. Cette option de trie n'est disponible que si votre version prend en charge cette fonctionnalité. modifier le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, supprimer le commentaire actuel en cliquant sur l'icône, fermer la discussion actuelle en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône . Si vous souhaitez masquer les commentaires résolus, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Dans ce cas, les commentaires résolus ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône. si vous souhaitez gérer plusieurs commentaires à la fois, ouvrez le menu contextuel Résoudre sous l'onglet Collaboration. Sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : résoudre les commentaires actuels, marquer mes commentaires comme résolus ou marquer tous les commentaires comme résolus dans la feuille de calcul. Ajouter les mentions Ce n'est qu'au contenu d'une feuille de calcul que vous pouvez ajouter des mentions et pas à la feuille de calcul elle-même. Lorsque vous ajoutez un commentaire sur lequel vous voulez attirer l'attention d'une personne, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction de mentions et envoyer une notification par courrier électronique ou Chat. Pour ajouter une mention, Saisissez \"+\" ou \"@\" n'importe où dans votre commentaire, alors la liste de tous les utilisateurs du portail s'affichera. Pour faire la recherche plus rapide, tapez le prénom approprié dans le champ de saisie, la liste propose les suggestions au cours de la frappe. Puis sélectionnez le nom souhaité dans la liste. Si la personne mentionnée n'a pas l'autorisation d'ouvrir ce fichier, la fenêtre Paramètres de partage va apparaître. Par défaut, un document est partagé en Lecture seule. Modifiez la permission, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur OK. La personne mentionnée recevra une notification par courrier électronique informant que son nom est mentionné dans un commentaire. La personne recevra encore une notification lorsque un fichier commenté est partagé. Supprimer des commentaires Pour supprimer les commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer sous l'onglet Collaboration dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Supprimer les commentaires actuels à supprimer la sélection du moment. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer mes commentaires à supprimer vos commentaire et laisser les commentaires d'autres. Toutes les réponses qui déjà ont été ajoutées à vos commentaires seront supprimés aussi. Supprimer tous les commentaires sert à supprimer tous les commentaires du document. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires, cliquez sur l'icône \"Commentaires\" de la barre latérale de gauche encore une fois." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", @@ -2403,27 +2433,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Raccourcis clavier", - "body": "Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès au Tableur sans l'aide de la souris. Appuyez sur la touche Altpour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès. Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour désactiver toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir aux suggestions de touches précédentes. Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants : Windows/Linux Mac OS En travaillant sur la feuille de calcul Ouvrir le panneau 'Fichier' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le panneau Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer la feuille de calcul actuelle, voir ses informations, créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou ouvrir une feuille de calcul existante, accéder à l'aide du Tableur ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à rechercher une cellule contenant les caractères requis. Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer' avec le champ de remplacement Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés. Ouvrir le panneau 'Commentaires' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau 'Chat' Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat et envoyer un message. Enregistrer la feuille de calcul Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition dans le Tableur. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer la feuille de calcul Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer la feuille de calcul avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Télécharger comme... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme... pour enregistrer la feuille de calcul actuellement affichée sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge : XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Plein écran F11 Passer à l'affichage en plein écran pour adapter le Tableur à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide du Tableur. Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O Dans l'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) Tab/Shift+Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Fermer la fenêtre de la feuille de calcul actuelle dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l'élément ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du document actuel par défaut à 100%. Copier une feuille de calcul Appuyez et maintenez la touche Ctrl+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul Appuyez et maintenez la touche ⌥ Option+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul Copier une feuille de calcul entière et déplacer-la pour modifier la position de l'onglet. Navigation Déplacer une cellule vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Activer le contour d'une cellule au-dessus/en-dessous de la cellule sélectionnée ou à gauche/à droite de celle-ci. Aller au bord de la zone de données actuelle Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Activer une cellule à la limite de la région de données courante dans une feuille de calcul. Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Activer une cellule dans la colonne A de la ligne courante. Sauter au début de la feuille de calcul Ctrl+Début ^ Ctrl+Début Activer la cellule A1. Sauter à la fin de la ligne Fin, Ctrl+→ Fin, ⌘ Cmd+→ Activer la dernière cellule de la ligne actuelle. Sauter à la fin de la feuille de calcul Ctrl+Fin ^ Ctrl+Fin Activer la cellule utilisée en bas à droite de la feuille de calcul située en bas de la ligne du bas avec les données de la colonne la plus à droite avec les données. Si le curseur est sur la ligne de la formule, il sera placé à la fin du texte. Passer à la feuille précédente Alt+Pg. préc ⌥ Option+Pg. préc Passer à la feuille précédente de votre feuille de calcul. Passer à la feuille suivante Alt+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+Pg. suiv Passer à la feuille suivante de votre feuille de calcul. Se déplacer d'une ligne vers le haut ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée ⇧ Shift+↵ Retour Activer la cellule au-dessus de la cellule actuelle dans la même colonne. Se déplacer d'une ligne vers le bas ↓, ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Activer la cellule au-dessous de la cellule actuelle dans la même colonne. Se déplacer d'une colonne vers la gauche ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Activer la cellule précédente de la ligne actuelle. Se déplacer d'une colonne vers la droite →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Activer la cellule suivante de la ligne actuelle. Déplacement vers le bas d'un écran Pg. suiv Pg. suiv Déplacer un écran vers le bas dans la feuille de calcul. Déplacement vers le haut d'un écran Pg. préc Pg. préc Déplacer un écran vers le haut dans la feuille de travail. Déplacement la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas Déplacer la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas. Déplacement la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite ⇧ Shift+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas ⇧ Shift+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas Déplacer la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite. Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la droite, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le bas. Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la gauche, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le haut. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom avant sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom arrière sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. Sélection de données Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner toute la feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une colonne Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Sélectionner une colonne entière d'une feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une ligne ⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace ⇧ Shift+␣ Barre d'espace Sélectionner une ligne entière d'une feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une plage ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Sélectionner cellule par cellule. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Shift+Début ⇧ Shift+Début Sélectionner une plage depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Shift+Fin ⇧ Shift+Fin Sélectionner une plage depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Étendre la sélection jusqu'au début de la feuille de calcul Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Début ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Début Sélectionner une plage à partir des cellules sélectionnées jusqu'au début de la feuille de calcul. Étendre la sélection à la dernière cellule utilisée Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fin ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fin Sélectionner un fragment à partir des cellules sélectionnées actuelles jusqu'à la dernière cellule utilisée sur la feuille de calcul (à la ligne du bas avec les données de la colonne la plus à droite avec les données). Si le curseur se trouve dans la barre de formule, tout le texte de la barre de formule sera sélectionné de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin sans affecter la hauteur de la barre de formule. Sélectionner une cellule à gauche ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Sélectionner une cellule à gauche dans un tableau. Sélectionner une cellule à droite ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Sélectionner une cellule à droite dans un tableau. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche à droite. ⇧ Shift+Fin, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+Fin Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même rangée à droite de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche à gauche. ⇧ Shift+Début, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+Début Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même rangée à gauche de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche en haut/en bas de la colonne Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même colonne en haut/en bas à partir de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection vers le bas de l'écran ⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv ⇧ Shift+Pg. suiv Étendre la sélection à toutes les cellules situées à un écran en dessous de la cellule active. Étendre la sélection vers le haut d'un écran ⇧ Shift+Pg. préc ⇧ Shift+Pg. préc Étendre la sélection à toutes les cellules situées un écran plus haut que la cellule active. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X Couper les données sélectionnées et les envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit de la même feuille de calcul, dans une autre feuille de calcul, ou dans un autre programme. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer les données sélectionnées vers le presse-papiers. Les données copiées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit de la même feuille de calcul, dans une autre feuille de calcul, ou dans un autre programme. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer les données précédemment copiées/coupées depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. Les données peuvent être copiées à partir de la même feuille de calcul, à partir d'une autre feuille de calcul, ou provenant d'un autre programme. Mise en forme des données Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite ou supprimer la mise en forme italique. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres ou supprimer le soulignage. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Barrer le fragment de texte sélectionné avec une ligne qui passe à travers les lettres ou supprimer la barre. Ajouter un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte vers un site Web externe ou une autre feuille de calcul. Éditer la cellule active F2 F2 Éditer la cellule active et positionner le point d'insertion à la fin du contenu de la cellule. Si l'édition dans une cellule est désactivée, le point d'insertion sera déplacé dans la barre de formule. Filtrage de données Activer/Supprimer le filtre Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Activer un filtre pour une plage de cellules sélectionnée ou supprimer le filtre. Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Appliquez un modèle de table à une plage de cellules sélectionnée. Saisie des données Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers le bas ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule, et passer à la cellule située au-dessous. Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers le haut ⇧ Shift+↵ Entrée ⇧ Shift+↵ Retour Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée, et passer à la cellule située au-dessus. Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers la cellule suivante dans la ligne ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et se déplacer vers la cellule à droite. Commencer une nouvelle ligne Alt+↵ Entrée Commencer une nouvelle ligne dans la même cellule. Annuler Échap Échap Annuler la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule. Supprimer à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche dans la barre de formule ou dans la cellule sélectionnée lorsque le mode d'édition de cellule est activé. Supprime également le contenu de la cellule active. Supprimer à droite Supprimer Supprimer, Fn+← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à droite dans la barre de formule ou dans la cellule sélectionnée lorsque le mode d'édition de cellule est activé. Supprimer le contenu (données et formules) des cellules sélectionnées en gardant la mise en forme des cellules ou les commentaires. Effacer le contenu de cellule Supprimer, ← Retour arrière Supprimer, ← Retour arrière Supprimer le contenu (données et formules) des cellules sélectionnées en gardant la mise en forme des cellules ou les commentaires. Valider une entrée de cellule et se déplacer vers la droite ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Valider une entrée de cellule dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et déplacez-vous vers la cellule de droite. Valider une entrée de cellule et déplacez-la vers la gauche. ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et passer à la cellule de gauche . Insérer des cellules Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pur insérer de nouvelles cellules dans la feuille de calcul actuelle et spécifier les paramètres supplémentaires pour se déplacer vers la droite, vers le bas ou insérer une ligne ou une colonne entière. Supprimer les cellules Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pur supprimer les cellules dans la feuille de calcul actuelle et spécifier les paramètres supplémentaires pour se déplacer vers la droite, vers le bas ou supprimer une ligne ou une colonne entière. Insérer la date actuelle Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Insérer la date courante dans la cellule sélectionnée. Insérer l'heure actuelle Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insérer l'heure courante dans la cellule sélectionnée. Insérer la date et l'heure actuelles Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insérer la date et l'heure courantes dans la cellule sélectionnée. Fonctions Insérer une fonction ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+F3 Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pour insérer une nouvelle fonction de la liste prédéfinie. Fonction SOMME Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Insérer la fonction SOMME dans la cellule active. Ouvrir la liste déroulante Alt+↓ Ouvrir une liste déroulante sélectionnée. Ouvrir le menu contextuel ≣ Menu Ouvrir un menu contextuel pour la cellule ou la plage de cellules sélectionnée. Recalculer des fonctions F9 F9 Recalcul de la feuille de calcul entière. Recalculer des fonctions ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+F9 Recalcul de la feuille de calcul actuelle. Formats de données Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue 'Format de numéro' Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Format de numéro Appliquer le format Général Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Appliquer le format de nombre Général. Appliquer le format Devise Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Appliquer le format Devise avec deux décimales (nombres négatifs entre parenthèses). Appliquer le format Pourcentage Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Appliquer le format Pourcentage sans décimales. Appliquer le format Exponentiel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Appliquer le format des nombres exponentiels avec deux décimales. Appliquer le format Date Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Appliquer le format Date avec le jour, le mois et l'année. Appliquer le format Heure Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Appliquer le format Heure avec l'heure et les minutes, et le format AM ou PM. Appliquer un format de nombre Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Appliquer le format Nombre avec deux décimales, un séparateur de milliers et le signe moins (-) pour les valeurs négatives. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Shift + faire glisser ⇧ Shift + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Limiter la rotation à à des incréments de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Shift + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois." + "body": "Raccourcis clavier pour les touches d'accès Utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour faciliter et accélérer l'accès à l'éditeur de classeurs sans l'aide de la souris. Appuyez sur la touche Alt pour activer toutes les touches d'accès pour l'en-tête, la barre d'outils supérieure, les barres latérales droite et gauche et la barre d'état. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément dont vous avez besoin. D'autres suggestions de touches peuvent s'afficher en fonction de la touche que vous appuyez. Les premières suggestions de touches se cachent lorsque les suggestions supplémentaires s'affichent. Par exemple, pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion, appuyez sur Alt pour afficher les primaires suggestions de touches d'accès. Appuyez sur la lettre I pour accéder à l'onglet Insertion et activer tous les raccourcis clavier disponibles sous cet onglet. Appuyez sur la lettre qui correspond à l'élément que vous allez paramétrer. Appuyez sur Alt pour masquer toutes les suggestions de touches d'accès ou appuyez sur Échap pour revenir au groupe de suggestions de touches précédent. Trouverez ci-dessous les raccourcis clavier les plus courants: Windows/Linux Mac OS En travaillant sur le classeur Ouvrir le panneau 'Fichier' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le panneau Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le classeur actuel, voir ses informations, créer un nouveau classeur ou ouvrir un classeur existant, accéder à l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la fenêtre 'Rechercher et remplacer' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à rechercher une cellule contenant les caractères requis. Ouvrir la fenêtre \"Rechercher et remplacer\" avec le champ de remplacement Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés. Ouvrir le panneau 'Commentaires' Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau Chat (éditeurs en ligne) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat dans l'éditeur en ligne et envoyer un message: Enregistrer le classeur Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le classeur en cours d'édition dans Spreadsheet Editor. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer le classeur Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer le classeur avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Télécharger comme... Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme... pour enregistrer le classeur actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Plein écran (éditeurs en ligne) F11 Passer à l'affichage en plein écran dans les éditeurs en ligne pour adapter l'éditeur de classeurs à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide Spreadsheet Editor. Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O Dans l'onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) Tab/Maj+Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Fermer la fenêtre du classeur actuel dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l'élément ⇧ Maj+F10 ⇧ Maj+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Réinitialiser le niveau de zoom du classeur actuel par défaut à 100%. Copier une feuille de calcul Appuyez et maintenez la touche Ctrl+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul Appuyez et maintenez la touche ⌥ Option+ faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul Copier une feuille de calcul entière et déplacer-la pour modifier la position de l'onglet. Navigation Déplacer une cellule vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Activer le contour d'une cellule au-dessus/en-dessous de la cellule sélectionnée ou à gauche/à droite de celle-ci. Sauter au bord de la zone visible de données ou à la cellule suivante comportant des données. Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Entourer la cellule au bord de la zone visible de données ou la cellule suivante comportant des données sur la feuille de calcul. S'il n'a a pas de données dans la zone, c'est la dernière cellule dans la zone visible qui sera sélectionnée. S'il y a des données dans la zone, la cellule suivante comportant des données sera sélectionnée. Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Activer une cellule dans la colonne A de la ligne courante. Sauter au début de la feuille de calcul Ctrl+Début ^ Ctrl+Début Activer la cellule A1. Sauter à la fin de la ligne Fin, Ctrl+→ Fin, ⌘ Cmd+→ Activer la dernière cellule de la ligne actuelle. Sauter à la fin de la feuille de calcul Ctrl+Fin ^ Ctrl+Fin Activer la cellule utilisée en bas à droite de la feuille de calcul située en bas de la ligne du bas avec les données de la colonne la plus à droite avec les données. Si le curseur est sur la ligne de la formule, il sera placé à la fin du texte. Passer à la feuille précédente Alt+Pg. préc ⌥ Option+Pg. préc Passer à la feuille précédente de votre classeur. Passer à la feuille suivante Alt+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+Pg. suiv Passer à la feuille suivante de votre classeur. Se déplacer d'une ligne vers le haut ↑, ⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée ⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Activer la cellule au-dessus de la cellule actuelle dans la même colonne. Se déplacer d'une ligne vers le bas ↓, ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Activer la cellule au-dessous de la cellule actuelle dans la même colonne. Se déplacer d'une colonne vers la gauche ←, ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Activer la cellule précédente de la ligne actuelle. Se déplacer d'une colonne vers la droite →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Activer la cellule suivante de la ligne actuelle. Déplacement vers le bas d'un écran Pg. suiv Pg. suiv Déplacer un écran vers le bas dans la feuille de calcul. Déplacement vers le haut d'un écran Pg. préc Pg. préc Déplacer un écran vers le haut dans la feuille de travail. Déplacer la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas Déplacer la barre de défilement verticale vers le haut/bas Déplacer la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite ⇧ Maj+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas ⇧ Maj+Faire défiler la souris vers le haut/bas Déplacer la barre de défilement horizontale vers la gauche/droite Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la droite, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le bas. Afin de déplacer la barre de défilement vers la gauche, faites défiler la roulette de la souris vers le haut. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom avant sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom arrière sur la feuille de calcul en cours d'édition. Naviguer entre les contrôles dans un dialogue modal ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Naviguer entre les contrôles pour mettre en évidence le contrôle précédent ou suivant dans les dialogues modaux. Sélection de données Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner toute la feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une colonne Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Sélectionner une colonne entière d'une feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une ligne ⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace ⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace Sélectionner une ligne entière d'une feuille de calcul. Sélectionner une plage ⇧ Maj+→ ← ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner cellule par cellule. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Début ⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner une plage depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Fin ⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner une plage depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Étendre la sélection jusqu'au début de la feuille de calcul Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Début ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner une plage à partir des cellules sélectionnées jusqu'au début de la feuille de calcul. Étendre la sélection à la dernière cellule utilisée Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Fin ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner un fragment à partir des cellules sélectionnées actuelles jusqu'à la dernière cellule utilisée sur la feuille de calcul (à la ligne du bas avec les données de la colonne la plus à droite avec les données). Si le curseur se trouve dans la barre de formule, tout le texte de la barre de formule sera sélectionné de la position du curseur jusqu'à la fin sans affecter la hauteur de la barre de formule. Sélectionner une cellule à gauche ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Sélectionner une cellule à gauche dans un tableau. Sélectionner une cellule à droite ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Sélectionner une cellule à droite dans un tableau. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche à droite. ⇧ Maj+Fin, Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ ⇧ Maj+Fin Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même rangée à droite de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche à gauche. ⇧ Maj+Début, Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← ⇧ Maj+Début Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même rangée à gauche de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche en haut/en bas de la colonne Ctrl+⇧ Maj+↑ ↓ Étendre la sélection à la cellule non vierge la plus proche dans la même colonne en haut/en bas à partir de la cellule active. Si la cellule suivante est vide, la sélection sera étendue à la cellule suivante non vide. Étendre la sélection vers le bas de l'écran ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv Étendre la sélection à toutes les cellules situées à un écran en dessous de la cellule active. Étendre la sélection vers le haut d'un écran ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc Étendre la sélection à toutes les cellules situées un écran plus haut que la cellule active. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X Couper les données sélectionnées et les envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit du même classeur, dans un autre classeur, ou dans un autre programme. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer les données sélectionnées vers le presse-papiers. Les données copiées peuvent être insérées ensuite dans un autre endroit du même classeur, dans un autre classeur, ou dans un autre programme. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Maj+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer les données précédemment copiées/coupées depuis le presse-papiers à la position actuelle du curseur. Les données peuvent être copiées à partir du même classeur, à partir d'un autre classeur, ou provenant d'un autre programme. Mise en forme des données Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite ou supprimer la mise en forme italique. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres ou supprimer le soulignage. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Barrer le fragment de texte sélectionné avec une ligne qui passe à travers les lettres ou supprimer la barre. Ajouter un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte vers un site Web externe ou une autre feuille de calcul. Éditer la cellule active F2 F2 Éditer la cellule active et positionner le point d'insertion à la fin du contenu de la cellule. Si l'édition dans une cellule est désactivée, le point d'insertion sera déplacé dans la barre de formule. Filtrage de données Activer/Supprimer le filtre Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Activer un filtre pour une plage de cellules sélectionnée ou supprimer le filtre. Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Appliquez un modèle de table à une plage de cellules sélectionnée. Saisie des données Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers le bas ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule, et passer à la cellule située au-dessous. Valider la saisie de données dans une cellule et se déplacer vers le haut ⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée ⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée, et passer à la cellule située au-dessus. Valider la saisie de données et passer à la cellule suivante dans la ligne. ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Valider une entrée de cellule dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et déplacez-vous vers la cellule de droite. Commencer une nouvelle ligne Alt+↵ Entrée Commencer une nouvelle ligne dans la même cellule. Annuler Échap Échap Annuler la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule. Supprimer à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche dans la barre de formule ou dans la cellule sélectionnée lorsque le mode d'édition de cellule est activé. Supprime également le contenu de la cellule active. Supprimer à droite Supprimer Supprimer, Fn+← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à droite dans la barre de formule ou dans la cellule sélectionnée lorsque le mode d'édition de cellule est activé. Supprimer le contenu (données et formules) des cellules sélectionnées en gardant la mise en forme des cellules ou les commentaires. Effacer le contenu de cellule Supprimer, ← Retour arrière Supprimer, ← Retour arrière Supprimer le contenu (données et formules) des cellules sélectionnées en gardant la mise en forme des cellules ou les commentaires. Valider une entrée de cellule et se déplacer vers la droite ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Valider une entrée de cellule dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et déplacez-vous vers la cellule de droite. Valider une entrée de cellule et déplacez-la vers la gauche. ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Valider la saisie de données dans la cellule sélectionnée ou dans la barre de formule et passer à la cellule de gauche . Insérer des cellules Ctrl+⇧ Maj+= Ctrl+⇧ Maj+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+= Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pur insérer de nouvelles cellules dans la feuille de calcul actuelle et spécifier les paramètres supplémentaires pour se déplacer vers la droite, vers le bas ou insérer une ligne ou une colonne entière. Supprimer les cellules Ctrl+⇧ Maj+- Ctrl+⇧ Maj+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+- Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pur supprimer les cellules dans la feuille de calcul actuelle et spécifier les paramètres supplémentaires pour se déplacer vers la droite, vers le bas ou supprimer une ligne ou une colonne entière. Insérer la date actuelle Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Insérer la date courante dans la cellule sélectionnée. Insérer l'heure actuelle Ctrl+⇧ Maj+; Ctrl+⇧ Maj+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+; Insérer l'heure courante dans la cellule sélectionnée. Insérer la date et l'heure actuelles Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Maj+; Ctrl+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite Ctrl+⇧ Maj+;, ⌘ Cmd+; ensuite ␣ Barre d'espace ensuite ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+; Insérer la date et l'heure courantes dans la cellule sélectionnée. Tableaux croisés dynamiques Mettre à jour le tableau croisé dynamique. Alt+F5 ⌥ Option+F5 Actualiser le tableau croisé dynamique.sélectionné auparavant. Fonctions Insérer une fonction ⇧ Maj+F3 ⇧ Maj+F3 Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue pour insérer une nouvelle fonction de la liste prédéfinie. Fonction SOMME Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Insérer la fonction SOMME dans la cellule active. Ouvrir la liste déroulante Alt+↓ Ouvrir une liste déroulante sélectionnée. Ouvrir le menu contextuel ≣ Menu Ouvrir un menu contextuel pour la cellule ou la plage de cellules sélectionnée. Recalculer des fonctions F9 F9 Recalcul du classeur entier. Recalculer des fonctions ⇧ Maj+F9 ⇧ Maj+F9 Recalcul de la feuille de calcul actuelle. Formats de données Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue 'Format de numéro' Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Format de numéro Appliquer le format Général Ctrl+⇧ Maj+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+~ Appliquer le format de nombre Général. Appliquer le format Devise Ctrl+⇧ Maj+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+$ Appliquer le format Devise avec deux décimales (nombres négatifs entre parenthèses). Appliquer le format Pourcentage Ctrl+⇧ Maj+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+% Appliquer le format Pourcentage sans décimales. Appliquer le format Exponentiel Ctrl+⇧ Maj+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+^ Appliquer le format des nombres exponentiels avec deux décimales. Appliquer le format Date Ctrl+⇧ Maj+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+# Appliquer le format Date avec le jour, le mois et l'année. Appliquer le format Heure Ctrl+⇧ Maj+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+@ Appliquer le format Heure avec l'heure et les minutes, et le format AM ou PM. Appliquer un format de nombre Ctrl+⇧ Maj+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+! Appliquer le format Nombre avec deux décimales, un séparateur de milliers et le signe moins (-) pour les valeurs négatives. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Maj + faire glisser ⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Limiter la rotation à à des incréments de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation", - "body": "Pour vous aider à afficher et sélectionner des cellules dans un grand classeur, l'éditeur des feuilles de calcul Spreadsheet Editor propose plusieurs outils de navigation: les barres de défilement, les boutons de défilement, les onglets de classeur et le zoom. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler sur une feuille de calcul, passez à l'onglet Affichage. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille. Pour en savoir plus sur des droits d'accès, veuillez consulter cet article. Zoom - sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles. Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles dans la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre. Figer les volets - fige toutes les lignes au-dessus de la cellule active et toutes les colonnes à gauche de la cellule active afin qu'elles restent visibles lorsque vous faites défiler la feuille vers la droite ou vers le bas. Pour débloquer les volets, cliquez à nouveau sur cette option ou cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la feuille de calcul et sélectionnez l'option Libérer les volets dans le menu. Masquer la barre de formule une fois désactivé, sert à masquer la barre au-dessous de la barre d'outils supérieure, utilisée pour saisir et réviser la formule et son contenu. Pour afficher la Barre de formule masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. La Barre de formule est développée d'une ligne quand vous faites glisser le bas de la zone de formule pour l'élargir. En-têtes une fois désactivé, sert à masquer les en-têtes des colonnes en haut et les en-têtes des lignes à gauche de la feuille de calcul. Pour afficher les En-têtes masqués, cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Quadrillage une fois désactivé, sert à masquer les lignes autour des cellules. Pour afficher le Quadrillage masqué cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Décochez cette case pour désactiver cette option. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sont masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles. Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Combiner la barre de la feuille et la barre d'état sert à afficher des outils de navigation dans la feuille de calcul et la barre d'état sur une seule ligne. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Une fois désactivée, la barre d'état s'affichera sur deux lignes. Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Commentaireset autres onglets sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case. Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case. La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Vous pouvez également modifier la taille du panneau Commentaires ou Chat ouvert en utilisant un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur le bord gauche de la barre latérale. Quand il se transforme dans la flèche bidirectionnelle, faites glisser le bord à droite pour augmenter la largeur de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à gauche. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre classeur, utilisez les outils suivants: Utilisez la touche Tab sur votre clavier pour vous déplacer à droite de la cellule sélectionnée. Les barres de défilement (horizontale et verticale) servent à faire défiler la feuille de calcul actuelle vers le haut /le bas et vers la gauche/la droite. Pour naviguer dans une feuille de calcul à l'aide des barres de défilement: cliquez sur la flèche vers le haut/bas ou vers la droite/gauche sur la barre de défilement; faites glisser la case de défilement; faites tourner la molette pour vous déplacer verticalement; utilisez la combinaison de touches Maj + molette de défilement de la souris pour vous déplacer horizontalement; cliquez n'importe où à gauche/à droite ou en haut/en bas de la case de défilement sur la barre de défilement. Vous pouvez également utiliser la molette de la souris pour faire défiler votre feuille de calcul vers le haut ou vers le bas. Les boutons de Navigation des feuilles sont situés dans le coin inférieur gauche et servent à faire défiler la liste de feuilles vers la droite/gauche et à naviguer parmi les onglets des feuilles. cliquez sur Faire défiler la liste des feuilles à gauche pour pour faire défiler la liste des feuilles de calcul du classeur actuel vers la gauche; cliquez sur Faire défiler la liste des feuilles à droite pour pour faire défiler la liste des feuilles de calcul du classeur actuel vers la droite; Utilisez sur la barre d'état pour ajouter une nouvelle feuille de calcul. Pour sélectionner une feuille de calcul nécessaire: cliquez sur le bouton sur la barre d'état pour ouvrir la liste des feuilles de calcul et sélectionner la feuille de calcul nécessaire. L'état de la feuille s'affiche aussi dans la liste des feuilles de calcul, ou cliquez sur l'onglet de la feuille approprié à côté du bouton . Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et servent à faire un zoom avant ou un zoom arrière. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage." + "body": "Pour vous aider à afficher et sélectionner des cellules dans un grand classeur, l'éditeur de classeurs vous propose plusieurs outils de navigation: les barres de défilement, les boutons de défilement, les onglets de classeur et le zoom. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler sur une feuille de calcul, passez à l'onglet Affichage. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille. Pour en savoir plus sur l'affichage des feuilles de calcul, veuillez consulter cet article. Zoom - sert à définir la valeur de zoom de 50% à 200% en sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles. Thème d'interface - sélectionnez l'une des thèmes d'interface disponibles dans la liste déroulante: Identique à système, Claire, Classique claire, Sombre, Contraste élevé sombre. Verrouiller les volets - fige toutes les lignes au-dessus de la cellule active et toutes les colonnes à gauche de la cellule active afin qu'elles restent visibles lorsque vous faites défiler la feuille vers la droite ou vers le bas. Pour débloquer les volets, cliquez à nouveau sur cette option ou cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans la feuille de calcul et sélectionnez l'option Libérer les volets dans le menu. Masquer la barre de formule une fois désactivé, sert à masquer la barre au-dessous de la barre d'outils supérieure, utilisée pour saisir et réviser la formule et son contenu. Pour afficher la Barre de formule masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. La Barre de formule est développée d'une ligne quand vous faites glisser le bas de la zone de formule pour l'élargir. En-têtes une fois désactivé, sert à masquer les en-têtes des colonnes en haut et les en-têtes des lignes à gauche de la feuille de calcul. Pour afficher les En-têtes masqués, cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Quadrillage une fois désactivé, sert à masquer les lignes autour des cellules. Pour afficher le Quadrillage masqué cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Décochez cette case pour désactiver cette option. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils - une fois désactivé, la barre d'outils supérieure comportant toutes les commandes sont masquée mais tous les onglets restent visibles. Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Par défaut, cette option est activée. Une fois désactivée, la barre d'état s'affichera sur deux lignes. Panneau gauche - une fois désactivé, le panneau gauche comportant les onglets Rechercher, Commentaireset autres onglets sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau gauche, cochez cette case. Panneau droit - une fois désactivé, le panneau droit comportant les options de configurations des Paramètres sera masqué. Pour afficher le panneau droit, cochez cette case. La barre latérale sur la droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale sur la droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Vous pouvez également modifier la taille du panneau Commentaires ou Chat ouvert en utilisant un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur le bord gauche de la barre latérale. Quand il se transforme dans la flèche bidirectionnelle, faites glisser le bord à droite pour augmenter la largeur de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à gauche. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre classeur, utilisez les outils suivants: Utilisez la touche Tab sur votre clavier pour vous déplacer à droite de la cellule sélectionnée. Les barres de défilement (horizontale et verticale) servent à faire défiler la feuille de calcul actuelle vers le haut /le bas et vers la gauche/la droite. Pour naviguer dans une feuille de calcul à l'aide des barres de défilement: cliquez sur la flèche vers le haut/bas ou vers la droite/gauche sur la barre de défilement; faites glisser la case de défilement; faites tourner la molette pour vous déplacer verticalement; utilisez la combinaison de touches Maj + molette de défilement de la souris pour vous déplacer horizontalement; cliquez n'importe où à gauche/à droite ou en haut/en bas de la case de défilement sur la barre de défilement. Vous pouvez également utiliser la molette de la souris pour faire défiler votre feuille de calcul vers le haut ou vers le bas. Les boutons de Navigation des feuilles sont situés dans le coin inférieur gauche et servent à faire défiler la liste de feuilles vers la droite/gauche et à naviguer parmi les onglets des feuilles. cliquez sur Faire défiler la liste des feuilles à gauche pour pour faire défiler la liste des feuilles de calcul du classeur actuel vers la gauche; cliquez sur Faire défiler la liste des feuilles à droite pour pour faire défiler la liste des feuilles de calcul du classeur actuel vers la droite; Utilisez sur la barre d'état pour ajouter une nouvelle feuille de calcul. Pour sélectionner une feuille de calcul nécessaire: cliquez sur le bouton sur la barre d'état pour ouvrir la liste des feuilles de calcul et sélectionner la feuille de calcul nécessaire. L'état de la feuille s'affiche aussi dans la liste des feuilles de calcul, ou cliquez sur l'onglet de la feuille approprié à côté du bouton . Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et servent à faire un zoom avant ou un zoom arrière. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Les options de zoom sont également disponibles sous l'onglet Affichage." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Fonctions de recherche et remplacement", - "body": "Pour rechercher les caractères, mots ou phrases dans le Tableur, cliquez sur l'icône située sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône située dans le coin droit supérieur ou utilisez la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Command+F pour MacOS) afin d'ouvrir le petit panneau Recherche ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+H afin d'ouvrir le panneau Recherche complet. Le petit panneau Recherche sera ouvert dans le coin droit supérieur de la zone de travail. Afin d'accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône . La fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer s'ouvre : Saisissez votre enquête dans le champ de saisie correspondant Recherche. Afin de parcourir les occurrences trouvées, cliquez sur l'un des boutons à flèche. Le bouton affiche l'occurrence suivante, le bouton affiche l'occurrence précédente. Si vous avez besoin de remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères saisis, tapez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie correspondant Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer l'occurrence actuellement sélectionnée ou toutes les occurrences en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants Remplacer et Remplacer tout. Spécifiez les options de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires : Dans - permet de rechercher dans la Feuille active uniquement, dans l'ensemble de la Feuille de calcul ou dans la Plage spécifique. Dans ce dernier cas le champ Sélectionner une plage de données devient actif dans lequel vous pouvez saisir la plage de données requise. Recherche - est utilisée pour spécifier la direction dans laquelle vous souhaitez rechercher : à droite par lignes ou en bas par colonnes. Regarder dans - est utilisée pour spécifier si vous voulez rechercher la Valeur des cellules ou leurs Formules sous-jacentes. Spécifiez les paramètres de recherche en cochant les options nécessaires au-dessous du champ de saisie : Sensible à la casse sert à trouver les occurrences saisies de la même casse (par exemple, si votre enquête est 'Editeur' et cette option est sélectionnée, les mots tels que 'éditeur' ou 'EDITEUR' etc. ne seront pas trouvés). Contenu de la cellule entière - est utilisée pour trouver uniquement les cellules qui ne contiennent pas d'autres caractères que ceux spécifiés dans votre enquête (par exemple si vous cherchez '56' et que cette option est sélectionnée, les cellules contenant des données telles que '0,56' ou '156' etc. ne seront pas considérées). Toutes les occurrences seront surlignées dans le fichier et affichées sous forme de liste dans le panneau Recherche à gauche. Pour passer à l'occurrence requise utilisez la liste ou les boutons de navigation et ." + "body": "Pour rechercher les caractères, les mots et les phrases nécessaires dans l'éditeur de classeurs, cliquez sur l'icône Recherche sur la barre latérale gauche, sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+F (Commande+F pour MacOS) pour ouvrir la petite barre de recherche ou sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl+ H pour ouvrir le plein panneau de recherche.. Une petite barre Recherche apparaîtra dans le coin supérieur droit de l'espace de travail. La barre inclut le champ de saisie de la requête de recherche, affiche le nombre de résultats de recherche et les contrôles pour basculer entre le résultat précédent ou suivant et masquer la barre. Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'icône . Le panneau Rechercher et remplacer s'affiche. Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans le champ de saisie Rechercher. Pour naviguer à travers des occurrences, cliquez sur les boutons fléchés. Le bouton affiche l'occurrence suivante et le bouton affiche l'occurrence précédente. S'il vous faut remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés, saisissez le texte de remplacement dans le champ de saisie Remplacer par. Vous pouvez remplacer une seule occurrence qui est mise en surbrillance ou toutes occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant Remplacer ou Remplacer tout. Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées: Dans sert à rechercher des données dans la Feuille de calcul active, dans le Classeur entier ou dans une Plage spécifique. Dans ce dernier cas, le champ Sélectionner une plage de données deviendra disponible pour saisir la plage de données nécessaire. Recherche sert à définir la direction de la recherche: à droite dans lignes ou en bas dans colonnes. Rechercher dans sert à spécifier si vous voulez rechercher la Valeur des cellules ou les Formules sous-jacentes. Indiquez les paramètres de recherche en activant les options appropriées en dessous du champ de saisie: Sensible aux caractères sert à passer toutes les occurrences tenant compte de la casse (par exemple, quand vous rechercher le mot «Éditeur», les mots «éditeur» et «ÉDITEUR» ne sont pas affichés). Contenu complet de la cellule sert à rechercher des cellules contenant uniquement les caractères que vous avez indiqué dans votre requête de recherche (par ex. si vous recherchez '56' et cette option est active, les cellules contenant '0.56' ou '156' etc. ne seront pas renvoyées). Toutes les occurrences seront mises en surbrillance dans le fichier et seront affichés sous forme de liste sur le panneau Recherche de gauche. Utilisez la liste pour basculer vers l'occurrence recherchée ou utilisez les boutons de navigation et ." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", "title": "Vérification de l'orthographe", - "body": "Tableur vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte dans une certaine langue et de corriger les erreurs lors de l'édition. Dans la version de bureau, il est également possible d'ajouter des mots dans un dictionnaire personnalisé qui est commun aux trois éditeurs. À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en charge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page. Cliquez l'icône Vérification de l'orthographe dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau de vérification orthographique. La cellule supérieure gauche qui contient une valeur de texte mal orthographiée sera automatiquement sélectionnée dans la feuille de calcul actuelle. Le premier mot contenant une erreur sera affiché dans le champ de vérification orthographique, et les mots similaires avec une orthographe correcte apparaîtront dans le champ en-dessous. Utilisez le bouton Passer au mot suivant pour naviguer entre les mots dont l'orthographe est erronée. Remplacer les mots mal orthographiés Pour remplacer le mot sélectionné qui est actuellement mal orthographié par celui suggéré, choisissez l'un des mots similaires suggérés dont l'orthographe est correcte, et utilisez l'option Modification : cliquez le bouton Modification, ou cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Modification et sélectionnez l'option Modification Le mot actuel sera remplacé et vous passerez au mot suivant mal orthographié. Pour remplacer rapidement tous les mots identiques répétés sur la feuille de calcul, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Modification et sélectionnez l'option Changer tout. Ignorer des mots Pour passer le mot actuel : cliquez sur le bouton Ignorer, ou cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Ignorer et sélectionnez l'option Ignorer. Le mot actuel sera ignoré et vous passerez au mot suivant mal orthographié. Pour ignorer tous les mots identiques répétés sur la feuille de calcul, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Ignorer et sélectionnez l'option Ignorer tout. Si le mot actuel manque dans le dictionnaire, vous pouvez l'ajouter au dictionnaire personnalisé à l'aide du bouton Ajouter au dictionnaire dans le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe. Ce mot ne sera pas traité comme une erreur la prochaine fois. Cette option est disponible dans la version de bureau. La Langue du dictionnaire utilisée pour la vérification de l'orthographe s'affiche dans la liste ci-dessous. Vous pouvez le modifier si nécessaire. Une fois que vous avez vérifié tous les mots de la feuille de calcul, le message La vérification de l'orthographe est terminée s'affiche dans le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe. Pour fermer le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe, cliquez sur l'icône de Vérification de l'orthographe dans la barre latérale gauche. Modifier les paramètres de vérification de l'orthographe Pour modifier les paramètres de vérification de l'orthographe, accédez aux paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de feuille de calcul (onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) et passez à l'onglet Vérification de l'orthographe. Ici, vous pouvez régler les paramètres suivants : Langue du dictionnaire - sélectionnez l'une des langues disponibles dans la liste. La Langue du dictionnaire dans le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe sera modifiée en conséquence. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES - cochez cette option pour ignorer les mots écrits en majuscules, par exemple des acronymes comme SMB. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres - cochez cette option pour ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres, p.e. des acronymes comme B2B. Vérification sert à remplacer automatiquement le mot ou le symbole saisi dans le champ Remplacer ou choisi de la liste par un nouveau mot ou symbole du champ Par. Pour sauvegarder les changements que vous avez faits, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." + "body": "Tableur vous permet de vérifier l'orthographe du texte dans une certaine langue et de corriger les erreurs lors de l'édition. Dans la version de bureau, il est également possible d'ajouter des mots dans un dictionnaire personnalisé qui est commun aux trois éditeurs. À partir de la version 6.3, les éditeurs ONLYOFFICE prennent en charge l'interface SharedWorker pour un meilleur fonctionnement en évitant une utilisation élevée de la mémoire. Si votre navigateur ne prend pas en charge SharedWorker, alors c'est seulement Worker qui sera actif. Pour en savoir plus sur SharedWorker, veuillez consulter cette page. Cliquez sur l'icône Vérification de l'orthographe dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau de vérification orthographique. La cellule supérieure gauche qui contient une valeur de texte mal orthographiée sera automatiquement sélectionnée dans la feuille de calcul actuelle. Le premier mot contenant une erreur sera affiché dans le champ de vérification orthographique, et les mots similaires avec une orthographe correcte apparaîtront dans le champ en-dessous. Utilisez le bouton Passer au mot suivant pour naviguer entre les mots dont l'orthographe est erronée. Remplacer les mots mal orthographiés Pour remplacer le mot sélectionné qui est actuellement mal orthographié par celui suggéré, choisissez l'un des mots similaires suggérés dont l'orthographe est correcte, et utilisez l'option Modification : cliquez sur le bouton Modification, ou cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Modification et sélectionnez l'option Modification Le mot actuel sera remplacé et vous passerez au mot suivant mal orthographié. Pour remplacer rapidement tous les mots identiques répétés sur la feuille de calcul, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Modification et sélectionnez l'option Changer tout. Ignorer des mots Pour passer le mot actuel : cliquez sur le bouton Ignorer, ou cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Ignorer et sélectionnez l'option Ignorer. Le mot actuel sera ignoré et vous passerez au mot suivant mal orthographié. Pour ignorer tous les mots identiques répétés sur la feuille de calcul, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas à côté du bouton Ignorer et sélectionnez l'option Ignorer tout. Si le mot actuel manque dans le dictionnaire, vous pouvez l'ajouter au dictionnaire personnalisé à l'aide du bouton Ajouter au dictionnaire dans le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe. Ce mot ne sera pas traité comme une erreur la prochaine fois. Cette option est disponible dans la version de bureau. La Langue du dictionnaire utilisée pour la vérification de l'orthographe s'affiche dans la liste ci-dessous. Vous pouvez le modifier si nécessaire. Une fois que vous avez vérifié tous les mots de la feuille de calcul, le message La vérification de l'orthographe est terminée s'affiche dans le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe. Pour fermer le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe, cliquez sur l'icône de Vérification de l'orthographe dans la barre latérale gauche. Modifier les paramètres de vérification de l'orthographe Pour modifier les paramètres de vérification de l'orthographe, accédez aux paramètres avancés de l'éditeur de feuille de calcul (onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) et passez à l'onglet Vérification de l'orthographe. Ici, vous pouvez régler les paramètres suivants : Langue du dictionnaire - sélectionnez l'une des langues disponibles dans la liste. La Langue du dictionnaire dans le panneau de vérification de l'orthographe sera modifiée en conséquence. Ignorer les mots en MAJUSCULES - cochez cette option pour ignorer les mots écrits en majuscules, par exemple des acronymes comme SMB. Ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres - cochez cette option pour ignorer les mots contenant des chiffres, p.e. des acronymes comme B2B. Vérification sert à remplacer automatiquement le mot ou le symbole saisi dans le champ Remplacer ou choisi de la liste par un nouveau mot ou symbole du champ Par. Pour sauvegarder les changements que vous avez faits, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", - "title": "Formats des feuilles de calcul pris en charge", - "body": "Une feuille de calcul c'est une table de données organisées en lignes et en colonnes. Grâce à la capacité de recalculer automatiquement la feuille toute entière après un changement dans une seule cellule, elle est la plus souvent utilisée pour stocker l'information financière. Tableur vous permet d'ouvrir et de modifier les formats les plus populaires. Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Office Open XML (XLSX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition. Formats Description Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML CSV Valeurs séparées par une virgule Le format de fichier utilisé pour stocker des données tabulaires (des chiffres et du texte) sous forme de texte clair + + ODS L'extension de fichier pour une feuille de calcul utilisée par les suites OpenOffice et StarOffice, un standard ouvert pour les feuilles de calcul + + OTS Modèle de feuille de calcul OpenDocument Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de feuilles de calcul. Un modèle OTS contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs feuilles de calcul avec la même mise en forme + + XLS L'extension de fichier pour une feuille de calcul créée par Microsoft Excel + + XLSX L'extension de fichier par défaut pour une feuille de calcul créée par Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (ou la version ultérieure) + + XLTX Modèle de feuille de calcul Excel Open XML Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de feuilles de calcul. U n modèle XLTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs feuilles de calcul avec la même mise en forme + + Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'une feuille de calcul dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme. Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme CSV CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX ODS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX OTS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLSX CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLTX CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos feuilles de calcul dans des formats les plus populaires." + "title": "Formats des classeurs pris en charge", + "body": "Un classeur c'est une table de données organisées en lignes et en colonnes. Grâce à la capacité de recalculer automatiquement la feuille toute entière après un changement dans une seule cellule, elle est la plus souvent utilisée pour stocker l'information financière. L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet d'ouvrir et de modifier les formats les plus populaires. Lors du téléchargement ou de l'ouverture d'un fichier, celui-ci sera converti au format Office Open XML (XLSX). Cette conversion permet d'accélérer le traitement des fichiers et d'améliorer l'interopérabilité des données. Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats de fichiers pour l'affichage et/ou pour l'édition. Formats Description Affichage au format natif Affichage lors de la conversion en OOXML Édition au format natif Édition lors de la conversion en OOXML CSV Valeurs séparées par une virgule Le format de fichier utilisé pour stocker des données tabulaires (des chiffres et du texte) sous forme de texte clair + + ET WPS Spreadsheets Workbook Un format de feuille de calcul inclus dans la suite WPS Office qui prend en charge des graphiques et des formules et organise des données par lignes et par colonnes. + + ETT WPS Spreadsheets Template Un format de feuille de calcul inclus dans la suite WPS Office. Les fichiers ETT sont similaires aux fichiers ET qu'on utilise pour organiser des données par lignes et par colonnes, créer des graphiques mais premièrement pour doubler les classeurs ayant la même disposition et les informations. + + FODS OpenDocument Flat XML Spreadsheet Format de fichier basé sur XML pour sauvegarder et échanger des feuilles de calcul. + + ODS L'extension de fichier pour un classeur utilisé par les suites OpenOffice et StarOffice, un standard ouvert pour les feuilles de calcul. + + OTS Modèle de feuille de calcul OpenDocument Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de feuilles de calcul. Un modèle OTS contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs feuilles de calcul avec la même mise en forme + + SXC Sun XML Calc Un format de classeur basé sur XML qui fait partie de la suite bureautique OpenOffice et prend en charge des formules, des fonctions, des macros. + + XLS L'extension de fichier pour un classeur créé par Microsoft Excel + + XLSX L'extension de fichier par défaut pour un classeur créé par Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (ou la version ultérieure). + + XLTM Un fichier XLTM est une modèle de classeur prenant en charge les macros par Microsoft Excel. + + XLTX Modèle de feuille de calcul Excel Open XML Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de feuilles de calcul. U Un modèle XLTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs classeurs avec la même mise en forme. + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML) Un format de fichier pour structurer, sauvegarder et transmettre des données. + + Le tableau ci-dessous présente les formats pris en charge pour le téléchargement d'un classeur dans le menu Fichier -> Télécharger comme. Format en entrée Téléchargeable comme CSV JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ET CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ETT CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX FODS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ODS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX SXC CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX OTS CSV, JPG, ODS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLSM CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLSX CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLTM, XLTX XLTM CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTX XML CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX Veuillez consulter la matrice de conversion sur api.onlyoffice.com pour vérifier s'il est possible de convertir vos classeurs dans des formats les plus populaires." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", @@ -2440,10 +2470,15 @@ var indexes = "title": "Onglet Données", "body": "L'onglet Données permet de gérer les données dans Spreadsheet Editor. Présentation de la fenêtre de Spreadsheet Editor en ligne: Présentation de la fenêtre de Spreadsheet Editor pour le bureau: En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez: trier et filtrer les données, transformer texte en colonnes, supprimer les valeurs en double de la plage de données, grouper et dissocier des données, régler les paramètres de validation de données, obtenir les données à partir d'un fichier TXT/CSV, afficher d'autres fichiers auxquels le classer est lié à l'aide du bouton Lien externe." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Onglet Dessiner", + "body": "L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'effectuer les opérations dessin de base. Fenêtre de l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne: Fenêtre de l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau: En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez: utiliser l'outil de sélection pour redimensionner ou supprimer l'inscription, le dessin et la mise en surbrillance, utiliser l'outil Stylo et Surligneur pour dessiner ou ajouter les notes manuscrites ou la mise en surbrillance, utiliser l'outil Gomme pour effacer le dessin entier ou le texte manuscrit." + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Fichier", - "body": "L'onglet Fichier dans le Tableur permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours. Fenêtre principale du Tableur en ligne : Fenêtre principale du Tableur de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : dans la version en ligne, enregistrer le fichier actuel (si l'option Enregistrement automatique est désactivée), télécharger comme (enregistrer la feuille de calcul dans le format sélectionné sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur), enregistrer la copie sous (enregistrer une copie de la feuille de calcul dans le format sélectionné dans les documents du portail), imprimer ou renommer le fichier actuel, dans la version bureau, enregistrer le fichier actuel en conservant le format et l'emplacement actuels à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer ou enregistrer le fichier actuel avec un nom, un emplacement ou un format différent à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer sous, imprimer le fichier. proteger le fichier en utilisant un mot de passe, changer ou supprimer le mot de passe ; protéger le fichier à l'aide d'un mot de passe, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe (disponible dans la version de bureau uniquement); créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou ouvrez une feuille de calcul récemment éditée (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), voir des informations générales sur la feuille de calcul, suivre l'historique des versions  (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), gérer les droits d'accès (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur, dans la version de bureau, ouvrez le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, ouvrez le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur." + "body": "L'onglet Fichier dans le Tableur permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours. Fenêtre principale du Tableur en ligne : Fenêtre principale du Tableur de bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : dans la version en ligne, enregistrer le fichier actuel (si l'option Enregistrement automatique est désactivée), télécharger comme (enregistrer la feuille de calcul dans le format sélectionné sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur), enregistrer la copie sous (enregistrer une copie de la feuille de calcul dans le format sélectionné dans les documents du portail), imprimer ou renommer le fichier actuel, dans la version bureau, enregistrer le fichier actuel en conservant le format et l'emplacement actuels à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer ou enregistrer le fichier actuel avec un nom, un emplacement ou un format différent à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer sous, imprimer le fichier. protéger le fichier en utilisant un mot de passe, changer ou supprimer le mot de passe ; protéger le fichier à l'aide d'un mot de passe, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe (disponible dans la version de bureau uniquement); créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou ouvrez une feuille de calcul récemment éditée (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), voir des informations générales sur la feuille de calcul, suivre l'historique des versions  (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), gérer les droits d'accès (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur, dans la version de bureau, ouvrez le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, ouvrez le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm", @@ -2458,7 +2493,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Insertion", - "body": "Qu'est-ce que l'onglet Insertion ? L'onglet Insertion dans le Tableur permet d'ajouter des objets visuels et des commentaires dans votre feuille de calcul. Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne : Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau : Fonctions de l'onglet Insertion En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : innsérer des tableaux croisés dynamiques, appliquer une mise en forme de tableau , insérer des images, des formes, des zones de texte et des objets Text Art, des graphiques, des graphiques sparklines insérer des commentaires et des liens hypertexte, insérer des en-têtes/pieds de page, insérer des équations et des symboles. insérer des segments." + "body": "Qu'est-ce que l'onglet Insertion ? L'onglet Insertion dans le Tableur permet d'ajouter des objets visuels et des commentaires dans votre feuille de calcul. Fenêtre du Tableur en ligne : Fenêtre du Tableur de bureau : Fonctions de l'onglet Insertion En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : insérer des tableaux croisés dynamiques, appliquer une mise en forme de tableau , insérer des images, des formes, des zones de texte et des objets Text Art, des graphiques, des graphiques sparklines insérer des commentaires et des liens hypertexte, insérer des en-têtes/pieds de page, insérer des équations et des symboles. insérer des segments." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", @@ -2473,27 +2508,32 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Modules complémentaires", - "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans le Tableur permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Sous cet onglet vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur en ligne : Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur pour le bureau : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer toutes les extensions installées et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : Envoyer permet d'envoyer la feuille de calcul par e-mail à l'aide d'un client de messagerie installé sur votre ordinateur (disponible en version de bureau seulement), Code en surbrillance sert à surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond approprié etc., Éditeur de photos sert à modifier les images : rogner, retourner, pivoter, dessiner les lignes et le formes, ajouter des icônes et du texte, charger l'image de masque et appliquer des filtres comme Niveaux de gris, Inverser, Sépia, Flou, Embosser, Affûter etc., Thésaurus sert à trouver les synonymes et les antonymes et les utiliser à remplacer le mot sélectionné, Traducteur sert à traduire le texte sélectionné dans des langues disponibles, Remarque : ce module complémentaire ne fonctionne pas sur Internet Explorer. You Tube permet d'ajouter les videos YouTube dans votre feuille de calcul. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuels sont disponibles sur GitHub." + "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires dans le Tableur permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Sous cet onglet vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur en ligne : Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur pour le bureau : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer toutes les extensions installées et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : Envoyer permet d'envoyer la feuille de calcul par e-mail à l'aide d'un client de messagerie installé sur votre ordinateur (disponible en version de bureau seulement), Code en surbrillance sert à surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond approprié etc., Éditeur de photos sert à modifier les images : rogner, retourner, pivoter, dessiner les lignes et le formes, ajouter des icônes et du texte, charger l'image de masque et appliquer des filtres comme Niveaux de gris, Inverser, Sépia, Flou, Embosser, Affûter etc., Thésaurus sert à trouver les synonymes et les antonymes et les utiliser à remplacer le mot sélectionné, Traducteur sert à traduire le texte sélectionné dans des langues disponibles, Remarque : ce module complémentaire ne fonctionne pas sur Internet Explorer. You Tube permet d'ajouter les vidéos YouTube dans votre feuille de calcul. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuels sont disponibles sur GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Présentation de l'interface utilisateur du Tableur", - "body": "Tableur utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité. Fenêtre principale du Tableur en ligne : Fenêtre principale du Tableur de bureau : L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants : L'en-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets des documents ouverts, le nom de la feuille de calcul et les onglets du menu. Dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur se trouvent les boutons Enregistrer, Imprimer le fichier, Annuler et Rétablir. Dans la partie droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, le nom de l'utilisateur est affiché ainsi que les icônes suivantes : Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier - dans la version de bureau, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre de l'Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur. Gérer les droits d'accès au document - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès aux documents stockés dans le cloud. Marquer en tant que favori - cliquez sur l'étoile pour ajouter le fichier aux favoris et pour le retrouver rapidement. Ce n'est qu'un fichier de raccourcis car le fichier lui-même est dans l'emplacement de stockage d'origine. Le fichier réel n'est pas supprimé quand vous le supprimez de Favoris. Recherche - permet de rechercher dans la feuille de calcul un mot ou un symbole particulier, etc. La barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Mise en page, Formule, Données, Tableau croisé dynamique, Collaboration, Protection, Affichage, Modules complémentaires. Des options Copier et Coller sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné. La Barre de formule permet d'entrer et de modifier des formules ou des valeurs dans les cellules. La Barre de formule affiche le contenu de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. La Barre d'état en bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient des outils de navigation : boutons de navigation de feuille, bouton pour ajouter une feuille de calcul, bouton pour afficher la liste de feuilles de calcul, onglets de feuille et boutons de zoom. La Barre d'état affiche également l'état de sauvegarde s'exécutant en arrière-plan, l'état de connection quand l'éditeur ne pavient pas à se connecter, le nombre d'enregistrements filtrés si vous appliquez un filtre ou les résultats des calculs automatiques si vous sélectionnez plusieurs cellules contenant des données. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer , - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat , - permet de vérifier l'orthographe de votre texte dans une certaine langue et de corriger les erreurs lors de l'édition. - permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique, - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet de visualiser les informations sur le programme. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier sur une feuille de calcul, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu de la feuille de calcul, d'entrer et de modifier les données. Les Barres de défilement horizontales et verticales permettent de faire défiler la feuille actuelle de haut en bas ou de gauche à droite. Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez masquer certains composants et les afficher à nouveau lorsque cela est nécessaire. Pour en savoir plus sur l'ajustement des paramètres d'affichage, reportez-vous à cette page." + "body": "Tableur utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité. Fenêtre principale du Tableur en ligne : Fenêtre principale du Tableur de bureau : L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants : L'en-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets des documents ouverts, le nom de la feuille de calcul et les onglets du menu. Dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur se trouvent les boutons Enregistrer, Imprimer le fichier, Annuler et Rétablir. Dans la partie droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, le nom de l'utilisateur est affiché ainsi que les icônes suivantes : Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier - dans la version de bureau, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre de l'Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur. Gérer les droits d'accès au document - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès aux documents stockés dans le cloud. Marquer en tant que favori - cliquez sur l'étoile pour ajouter le fichier aux favoris et pour le retrouver rapidement. Ce n'est qu'un fichier de raccourcis car le fichier lui-même est dans l'emplacement de stockage d'origine. Le fichier réel n'est pas supprimé quand vous le supprimez de Favoris. Recherche - permet de rechercher dans la feuille de calcul un mot ou un symbole particulier, etc. La barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Mise en page, Formule, Données, Tableau croisé dynamique, Collaboration, Protection, Affichage, Modules complémentaires. Des options Copier et Coller sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné. La Barre de formule permet d'entrer et de modifier des formules ou des valeurs dans les cellules. La Barre de formule affiche le contenu de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. La Barre d'état en bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient des outils de navigation : boutons de navigation de feuille, bouton pour ajouter une feuille de calcul, bouton pour afficher la liste de feuilles de calcul, onglets de feuille et boutons de zoom. La Barre d'état affiche également l'état de sauvegarde s'exécutant en arrière-plan, l'état de connexion quand l'éditeur ne parvient pas à se connecter, le nombre d'enregistrements filtrés si vous appliquez un filtre ou les résultats des calculs automatiques si vous sélectionnez plusieurs cellules contenant des données. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer , - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires , - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat , - permet de vérifier l'orthographe de votre texte dans une certaine langue et de corriger les erreurs lors de l'édition. - permet de contacter notre équipe d'assistance technique, - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet de visualiser les informations sur le programme. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier sur une feuille de calcul, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu de la feuille de calcul, d'entrer et de modifier les données. Les Barres de défilement horizontales et verticales permettent de faire défiler la feuille actuelle de haut en bas ou de gauche à droite. Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez masquer certains composants et les afficher à nouveau lorsque cela est nécessaire. Pour en savoir plus sur l'ajustement des paramètres d'affichage, reportez-vous à cette page." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Protection", - "body": "L'onglet Protection du Tableur permet d'empêcher tout accès non autorisé en utilisant le chiffrement ou la protection au niveau du classeur ou au niveau de la feuille de calcul. Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur en ligne : Présentation de la fenêtre du Tableur pour le bureau : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : Chiffrer votre document en définissant un mot de passe, Protéger le livre avec ou sans un mot de passe afin de protéger sa structure, Protéger la feuille de calcul en limitant les possibilités de modification dans une feuille de calcul avec ou sans un mot de passe, Autoriser la modification des plages de cellules verrouillées avec ou sans mot de passe. Activer et désactiver les options suivantes : Cellule verrouillée, Formules cachées, Forme verrouillé, Verrouiller le texte." + "body": "L'onglet Protection de l'éditeur de classeurs permet d'empêcher tout accès non autorisé en utilisant le chiffrement ou la protection au niveau du classeur ou au niveau de la feuille de calcul. Fenêtre de l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne: Fenêtre de l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau: En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez: Chiffrer votre document en définissant un mot de passe, Protéger le classeur avec ou sans un mot de passe afin de protéger sa structure, Protéger la feuille de calcul en limitant les possibilités de modification dans une feuille de calcul avec ou sans un mot de passe, Activer et désactiver les options suivantes: Cellule verrouillée, Formules cachées, Forme verrouillé, Verrouiller le texte. Protéger la plage pour protéger les plages et limiter ou interdire l'édition." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Affichage", - "body": "L'onglet Affichage dans Spreadsheet Editor permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de la feuille de calcul en fonction du filtre appliqué et des options d'affichage activées. L'onglet dans l'éditeur en ligne Spreadsheet Editor: Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Spreadsheet Editor: Les options d'affichage disponibles sous cet onglet: Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille. Zoom permet de zoomer et dézoomer sur une feuille de calcul. Thème d'interface permet de modifier le thème d'interface en choisissant le thème Identique à système, Clair, Classique clair, Sombre ou Contraste élevé sombre. Figer les volets permet de figer et libérer des certains volets ou des lignes et des colonnes. Les options suivantes permettent de choisir les éléments à afficher ou à cacher. Cachez les cases appropriées aux éléments que vous souhaitez rendre visible: Barre de formule permet d'afficher la barre de formule au dessus du classeur. E-têtes permet d'afficher des en-têtes, c-à-d des en-têtes des colonnes en haut et des en-têtes des lignes à gauche de la feuille de calcul. Quadrillage permet d'afficher les lignes de quadrillage, c-à-d les bordures des cellules. Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils permet de rendre visible la barre d'outils supérieure. Combiner la barre de la feuille et la barre d'état permet d'afficher des outils de navigation dans la feuille de calcul et la barre d'état sur une seule ligne. Une fois désactivée, la barre d'état s'affichera sur deux lignes. Panneau gauche permet de rendre visible le panneau gauche. Panneau droit permet de rendre visible le panneau droit." + "body": "L'onglet Affichage dans l'éditeur de classeurs permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de la feuille de calcul en fonction du filtre appliqué et des options d'affichage activées. Fenêtre de l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne: Fenêtre de l'éditeur de classeurs de bureau: Les options d'affichage disponibles sous cet onglet: Afficher une feuille permet configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille. Normal permet d'afficher la feuille de calcul entière. Aperçu des sauts de page permet d'afficher iniquement la zone d'impression d'une feuille de calcul. Zoom permet de zoomer et dézoomer sur une feuille de calcul. Thème d'interface permet de modifier le thème d'interface en choisissant le thème Identique à système, Clair, Classique clair, Sombre ou Contraste élevé sombre. Figer les volets permet de figer et libérer des certains volets ou des lignes et des colonnes. Les options suivantes permettent de choisir les éléments à afficher ou à cacher. Cachez les cases appropriées aux éléments que vous souhaitez rendre visible: Barre de formule permet d'afficher la barre de formule au dessus du classeur. E-têtes permet d'afficher des en-têtes, c-à-d des en-têtes des colonnes en haut et des en-têtes des lignes à gauche de la feuille de calcul. Quadrillage permet d'afficher les lignes de quadrillage, c-à-d les bordures des cellules. Afficher les zéros permet d'afficher 0 lors de la saisie dans une cellule. Toujours afficher la barre d'outils permet de rendre visible la barre d'outils supérieure. Combiner la barre de la feuille et la barre d'état permet d'afficher des outils de navigation dans la feuille de calcul et la barre d'état sur une seule ligne. Une fois désactivée, la barre d'état s'affichera sur deux lignes. Panneau gauche permet de rendre visible le panneau gauche. Panneau droit permet de rendre visible le panneau droit." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "title": "Ajouter des bordures et l'arrière-plan d'une cellule", - "body": "Ajouter l'arrière-plan d'une cellule Pour ajouter et mettre en forme l'arrière-plan d'une cellule dans le Tableur, sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en appuyant Ctrl+A sur le clavier, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. pour remplir la cellule avec une couleur unie, cliquez sur l'icône Couleur d'arrière plan sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure et sélectionnez la couleur appropriée. pour utiliser des options de remplissage telles que remplissage en dégradé ou modèle, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule depuis la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la section Remplissage : Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir les cellules sélectionnées. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez une des palettes : Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionnée ne les affecte pas. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu. Remplissage en dégradé - remplir les cellules sélectionnées avec deux couleurs et une transition en douceur appliquée. Angle - spécifiez manuellement l'angle précis de la direction du dégradé (transition se fait en ligne de dégradé sous un certain angle). Direction - choisissez un modèle prédéfini du menu. Les directions disponibles : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite (45°), de haut en bas (90°), du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche (135°), de droite à gauche (180°), du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche (225°), du bas en haut (270°), du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite (315°), de gauche à droite (0°). Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour remplir la cellule sélectionnée avec un modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Ajouter des bordures Pour ajouter et mettre en forme des bordures dans une feuille de calcul, sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant le raccourci clavier Ctrl+A, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. cliquez sur l'icône Bordures située sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule dans la barre latérale droite et utiliser la section Style des bordures, sélectionnez le style de bordure à ajouter : ouvrez le sous-menu Style des bordures et choisissez parmi les options disponibles, ouvrez le sous-menu Couleur de bordure ou utilisez la palette de Couleur dans la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la couleur dont vous avez besoin dans la palette. sélectionnez l'un des modèles de bordure disponibles : Bordures extérieures , Toutes les bordures , Bordures supérieures , Bordures inférieures , Bordures gauches , Bordures droites , Pas de bordures , Bordures intérieures , Bordures intérieures verticales , Bordures intérieures horizontales , Bordure diagonale ascendante , Bordure diagonale descendante ." + "body": "Ajouter l'arrière-plan d'une cellule Pour ajouter et mettre en forme l'arrière-plan d'une cellule dans l'éditeur de classeurs, sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en appuyant Ctrl+A sur le clavier, Remarque: vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. pour remplir la cellule avec une couleur unie, cliquez sur l'icône Couleur d'arrière plan sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure et sélectionnez la couleur appropriée. pour utiliser d'autres options de remplissage telles que remplissage en dégradé ou modèle, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule de la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la section Remplissage: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir les cellules sélectionnées. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez une des palettes: Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Le jeu de couleurs sélectionnée ne les affecte pas. Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans la feuille de calcul. Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes. Remplissage en dégradé - remplir les cellules sélectionnées avec deux couleurs et une transition en douceur appliquée. Angle - spécifiez manuellement l'angle précis de la direction du dégradé (transition se fait en ligne de dégradé sous un certain angle). Direction - choisissez un modèle prédéfini du menu. Les directions disponibles: du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite (45°), de haut en bas (90°), du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche (135°), de droite à gauche (180°), du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche (225°), du bas en haut (270°), du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite (315°), de gauche à droite (0°). Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour remplir la cellule sélectionnée avec un modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Ajouter des bordures Pour ajouter et mettre en forme des bordures dans une feuille de calcul, sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant le raccourci clavier Ctrl+A, Remarque: vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. cliquez sur l'icône Bordures sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure ou cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule de la barre latérale droite et utilisez la section Style des bordures, sélectionnez le style de bordure à ajouter: ouvrez le sous-menu Style des bordures et sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles, ouvrez le sous-menu Couleur de bordure ou utilisez la palette de Couleur de la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire dans la palette. sélectionnez l'un des modèles de bordure disponibles: Bordures extérieures, Toutes les bordures, Bordures supérieures, Bordures inférieures, Bordures gauches, Bordures droites, Aucune bordure, Bordures intérieures, Bordures intérieures verticales, Bordures intérieures horizontales, Bordure diagonale ascendante, Bordure diagonale descendante ." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm", + "title": "Ajouter des liens externes vers des cellules", + "body": "Dans l'éditeur de classeurs Spreadsheet Editor, il est possible de créer un lien externe vers une cellule ou une plage de cellules d'un autre classeur. C'est possible de créer des liens externes entre les fichiers stockés sur le portail actuel (depuis l'éditeur en ligne) ou sur l'ordinateur (depuis l'éditeur du bureau). Lors de la modification de données dans le classeur source, vous pouvez actualiser les données dans le classeur de destination sans les copier manuellement encore une fois. Pour ajouter un lien externe, ouvrez le classeur source et le classeur de destination, dans le classeur source, copiez la cellule ou la plage de cellules (Ctrl+C), dans le classeur de destination, collez les données copiés (Ctrl+V), cliquez sur le bouton Collage spécial et sélectionnez l'option Coller avec liaison (Ctrl+N). La liaison sera crée. Lorsque vous cliquez sur la cellule comportant un lien externe, cette cellule s'affiche dans la barre de formule ainsi: ='[SourceWorkbook.xlsx]Sheet1'!A1. Pour actualiser les liens externes que vous avez ajouté, passez à l'onglet Données, cliquez sur le bouton Liens externes, sélectionnez le lien nécessaire de la liste, cliquez sur Mettre à jour les valeurs ou cliquez sur la flèche à côté et sélectionnez Mettre à jour les valeurs (l'option sélectionnée actuellement) ou Tout mettre à jour. L'état va devenir OK. Un avertissement s'affichera lorsque vous ouvrez le classeur comportant les liens externes: Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour actualiser tous les liens externes. Pour rompre la liaison, passez à l'onglet Données, cliquez sur le bouton Liens externes, sélectionnez le lien nécessaire de la liste, cliquez sur Rompre les liaisons ou cliquez sur la flèche à côté de ce bouton pour sélectionner Rompre les valeurs (l'option sélectionnée actuellement) ou Rompre toutes les liaisons. Les liaisons seront rompus et les valeurs ne seront pas actualisées." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", @@ -2505,25 +2545,25 @@ var indexes = "title": "Aligner les données dans une cellule", "body": "Dans le Tableur vous pouvez aligner vos données horizontalement ou verticalement ou même les faire pivoter dans une cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en appuyant Ctrl+A sur le clavier, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. Remarque : vous pouvez mettre en forme du texte à l'aide des icônes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Appliquez l'une des options d'alignement horizontal dans la cellule, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner à gauche pour aligner les données sur le bord gauche de la cellule (le bord droit reste non aligné) ; cliquez sur l'icône Aligner au centre pour aligner les données par le centre de la cellule (les bords droit et gauche restent non alignés) ; cliquez sur l'icône Aligner à droite pour aligner les données sur le bord droit de la cellule (le bord gauche reste non aligné) ; cliquez sur l'icône Justifié pour aligner vos données sur le bord gauche et droit de la cellule (un espacement supplémentaire est ajouté si nécessaire pour garder l'alignement). Changez l'alignement vertical des données dans la cellule, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner en haut pour aligner vos données sur le bord supérieur de la cellule ; cliquez sur l'icône Aligner au milieu pour aligner vos données au milieu de la cellule ; cliquez sur l'icône Aligner en bas pour aligner vos données sur le bord inférieur de la cellule. Changez l'angle des données en cliquant sur l'icône Orientation et en choisissant l'une des options : utilisez l'option Texte horizontal pour positionner le texte à l'horizontale (par défaut), utilisez l'option Rotation dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour positionner le texte du coin inférieur gauche au coin supérieur droit d'une cellule, utilisez l'option Rotation dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour positionner le texte du coin supérieur gauche au coin inférieur droit d'une cellule, utilisez l'option Texte vertical pour positionner le texte verticalement, utilisez l'option Rotation du texte vers le haut pour positionner le texte de bas en haut d'une cellule, utilisez l'option Rotation du texte vers le bas pour positionner le texte de haut en bas d'une cellule. Appliquez un retrait au contenu d'une cellule à l'aide de la section Retrait sur la barre latérale droite Paramètres de cellule. Définissez la valeur (c'est-à-dire le nombre de caractères) de déplacer le contenu de cellule à droite. Les retraits sont réinitialisés lorsque vous modifier l'orientation du texte. Lorsque vous modifiez les retraits du texte pivoté, l'orientation du texte est réinitialisée. Il est possible de définir les retraits seulement si le texte est orienté horizontalement ou verticalement. Pour faire pivoter le texte selon un angle exactement spécifié, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de cellule dans la barre latérale de droite et utilisez l'Orientation. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ Angle ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Adaptez vos données à la largeur de la colonne en cliquant sur l'icône Renvoyer à la ligne automatiquement sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outil supérieure ou en activant la case à cocher Renvoyer à la ligne automatiquement sur la barre latérale droite. Si vous modifiez la largeur de la colonne, les données seront automatiquement ajustées en conséquence. Adaptez vos données à la largeur de la cellule en activant Réduire pour ajuster sur la barre latérale droite. Le contenu de la cellule est réduit pour s'adapter à la largeur de la cellule." }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm", - "title": "Autoriser la modification des plages", - "body": "L'option Autoriser la modification des plages permet de sélectionner les cellules dont un autre utilisateur pourra modifier dans une feuille de calcul protégé. Vous pouvez autoriser la modification de certaines plages de cellules verrouillées avec ou sans mot de passe. On peut modifier la plage de cellules qui n'est pas protégé par un mot de passe. Pour sélectionner une plage de cellules verrouillées qui peut être modifiée : Cliquez sur le bouton Autoriser la modification des plages dans la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages s'affiche : Dans la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau pour sélectionner et ajouter les cellules qui peuvent être modifiées par un utilisateur. Dans la fenêtre Nouvelle plage, saisissez le Titre de la plage et sélectionnez la plage de cellules en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données. Le Mot de passe est facultatif, alors saisissez et validez-le si vous souhaitez protéger les plages de cellules par un mot de passe. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les modifications et continuer à travailler dans la feuille de calcul non protégée. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul, la fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul s'affiche pour que vous sélectionniez les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter afin d'empêcher toute modification indésirable. Si vous optez pour une protection avec un mot de passe, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour annuler la protection de la feuille de calcul. Les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter. Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées Modifier les cellules Modifier les colonnes Modifier les lignes Insérer des colonnes Insérer des lignes Insérer un lien hypertexte Supprimer les colonnes Supprimer les lignes Trier Utiliser Autofilter Utiliser tableau et graphique croisés dynamiques Modifier les objets Modifier les scénarios Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection. Une fois la feuille de calcul protégée, le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul devient activé. Vous pouvez modifier les plages de cellules, tant que la feuille de calcul n'est pas protégée. Cliquez sur le bouton Autoriser la modification des plages pour ouvrir la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages : Utilisez les boutons Modifier et Supprimer pour gérer les plages de cellules sélectionnées. Ensuite, cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul pour activer la protection de la feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les modifications et continuer à travailler dans la feuille de calcul non protégée. Avec des plages protégées avec un mot de passe, la fenêtre Déverrouiller la plage s'affiche invitant à saisir le mot de passe lorsque quelqu'un essaie de modifier la plage protégée." - }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm", "title": "Modifier le format de nombre", - "body": "Appliquer un format de nombre Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez facilement modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi dans votre feuille de calcul. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel. Sélectionnez le format de nombre approprié : Général sert à afficher les données saisies en tant que nombres standards de façon la plus compacte, sans aucun signe supplémentaire, Nombre sert à afficher les nombres avec 0-30 chiffres après le point décimal où un séparateur de milliers ajouté entre chaque groupe de trois chiffres avant le point décimal, Scientifique (exponentiel) sert à exprimer le nombre sous la forme d.dddE+ddd ou d.dddE-ddd où chaque d c'est un chiffre de 0 à 9, Comptabilité - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs monétaires avec le symbole monétaire par défaut et deux décimales. Pour appliquer un autre symbole monétaire ou nombre de décimales, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Contrairement au format Devise, le format Comptabilité aligne les symboles monétaires sur le côté gauche de la cellule, représente les valeurs nulles sous forme de tirets et affiche les valeurs négatives entre parenthèses. Remarque : pour appliquer rapidement le format Comptabilité aux données sélectionnées, vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône Style comptable dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le symbole de devise requis parmi les symboles monétaires suivants : $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Livre Sterling, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Kuna Croate. Monétaire - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs monétaires avec le symbole monétaire par défaut et deux décimales. Pour appliquer un autre symbole monétaire ou nombre de décimales, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Contrairement au format Comptabilité, le format Monétaire place un symbole de devise directement avant le premier chiffre et affiche des valeurs négatives avec le signe négatif (-). Date - est utilisé pour afficher les dates, Heure - est utilisé pour afficher les heures, Pourcentage sert à afficher les données en pourcentage avec un symbole de pourcentage %, Remarque : pour ajouter rapidement un symbole de pourcentage à vos données vous pouvez également utiliser l'icône Pour cent style située sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure. Fraction sert à afficher les nombres comme des fractions usuelles plutôt que des nombres décimaux. Texte sert à afficher les valeurs numériques qui sont traitées comme du texte simple avec la plus grande précision disponible. Autres formats - est utilisé pour créer un format de nombre personnalisé ou personnaliser les formats de nombres déjà appliqués en spécifiant des paramètres supplémentaires (voir la description ci-dessous). Personnalisé sert à créer le format personnalisé : sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules ou la feuille de calcul entière contenant les valeurs à mettre en forme, sélectionnez l'option Personnalisé dans le menu Autre formats : saisissez les codes appropriés et vérifiez le résultat dans la zone d'aperçu ou choisissez un modèle et/ou combinez-les. Si vous voulez créer un format d'après un modèle, appliquez donc un format existant et modifiez-le selon votre préférence. cliquez sur OK. modifiez le nombre de décimales, si nécessaire : utilisez l'icône Ajouter une décimale située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher plus de chiffres après la virgule, utilisez l'icône Réduire les décimales située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher moins de chiffres après la virgule. Remarque : pour modifier le format de nombre, vous pouvez aussi se servir des raccourcis clavier. Personnaliser un format de nombre Vous pouvez personnaliser le format numérique appliqué de la manière suivante : sélectionnez les cellules pour lesquelles vous souhaitez personnaliser le format de nombre, faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel. sélectionnez l'option Autres formats, Dans la fenêtre Format de nombre qui s'ouvre, ajustez les paramètres disponibles. Les options diffèrent en fonction du format numérique appliqué aux cellules sélectionnées. Vous pouvez utiliser la liste Catégorie pour modifier le format numérique. Pour le format Nombre, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales, spécifier si vous souhaitez Utiliser le séparateur de milliers ou non et choisir l'un des Formats disponibles pour l'affichage des valeurs négatives. Pour les formats Scientifique et Pourcentage, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales. Pour les formats Comptabilité et Monétaire, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales, choisir l'un des Symboles de devise disponibles et l'un des Formats disponibles pour afficher les valeurs négatives. Pour le format Date, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats de date disponibles : 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, Avril15 2006, 15-Avr, 15-Avr-06, Avr-06, Avril-06, A-06, 06-Avr, 15-Avr-2006, 2006-Avr-15, 06-Avr-15, 06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Avr, 15/Avr/06, Avr/06, Avril/06, A/06, 06/Avr, 15/Avr/2006, 2006/Avr/15, 06/Avr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Avr, 15 Avr 06, Avr 06, Avril 06, A 06, 06 Avr, 15 Avr 2006, 2006 Avr 15, 06 Avr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15. Pour le format Heure, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats d'heure disponibles : 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. Pour le format Fraction, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats disponibles : D'un chiffre (1/3), De deux chiffres (12/25), De trois chiffres (131/135), Demis (1/2), Quarts (2/4), Huitièmes (4/8), Seizièmes (8/16), Dixièmes (5/10), Centièmes (50/100). Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications." + "body": "Appliquer un format de nombre Dans l'éditeur de classeurs, vous pouvez facilement modifier le format de nombre, c'est à dire l'apparence d'un nombre saisi dans votre feuille de calcul. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, Remarque: vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel. Sélectionnez le format de nombre approprié: Général sert à afficher les données saisies en tant que nombres standards de façon la plus compacte, sans aucun signe supplémentaire, Nombre sert à afficher les nombres avec 0-30 chiffres après le point décimal où un séparateur de milliers ajouté entre chaque groupe de trois chiffres avant le point décimal, Scientifique (exponentiel) sert à exprimer le nombre sous la forme d.dddE+ddd ou d.dddE-ddd où chaque d c'est un chiffre de 0 à 9, Comptabilité - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs monétaires avec le symbole monétaire par défaut et deux décimales. Pour appliquer un autre symbole monétaire ou nombre de décimales, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Contrairement au format Devise, le format Comptabilité aligne les symboles monétaires sur le côté gauche de la cellule, représente les valeurs nulles sous forme de tirets et affiche les valeurs négatives entre parenthèses. Remarque: pour appliquer rapidement le format Comptabilité aux données sélectionnées, vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône Style comptable sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le symbole de devise approprié parmi les symboles monétaires suivants: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Livre Sterling, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Kuna Croate. Monétaire - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs monétaires avec le symbole monétaire par défaut et deux décimales. Pour appliquer un autre symbole monétaire ou nombre de décimales, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Contrairement au format Comptabilité, le format Monétaire place un symbole de devise directement avant le premier chiffre et affiche des valeurs négatives avec le signe négatif (-). Date courte sert à afficher la date au format DD.MM.YYYY, Date longue sert à afficher la date au format DD.month in full.YYYY; Heure - est utilisé pour afficher les heures, Pourcentage sert à afficher les données en pourcentage avec un symbole de pourcentage %, Remarque: pour ajouter rapidement un symbole de pourcentage à vos données vous pouvez également utiliser l'icône Style de pourcentage sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure. Fraction sert à afficher les nombres comme des fractions usuelles plutôt que des nombres décimaux. Texte sert à afficher les valeurs numériques qui sont traitées comme du texte simple avec la plus grande précision disponible. Autres formats - est utilisé pour créer un format de nombre personnalisé ou personnaliser les formats de nombres déjà appliqués en spécifiant des paramètres supplémentaires (voir la description ci-dessous). Personnalisé sert à créer le format personnalisé: sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules ou la feuille de calcul entière contenant les valeurs à mettre en forme, sélectionnez l'option Personnalisé dans le menu Autre formats: saisissez les codes appropriés et vérifiez le résultat dans la zone d'aperçu ou choisissez un modèle et/ou combinez-les. Si vous voulez créer un format d'après un modèle, appliquez donc un format existant et modifiez-le selon votre préférence. cliquez sur OK. modifiez le nombre de décimales, si nécessaire: utilisez l'icône Ajouter une décimale sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher plus de chiffres après la virgule, utilisez l'icône Réduire les décimales sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour afficher moins de chiffres après la virgule, Remarque: pour modifier le format de nombre, vous pouvez aussi se servir des raccourcis clavier. Personnaliser un format de nombre Vous pouvez personnaliser le format numérique appliqué de la manière suivante: sélectionnez les cellules pour lesquelles vous souhaitez personnaliser le format de nombre, faites dérouler la liste Format de nombre sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les cellules sélectionnées et utilisez l'option Format de nombre du menu contextuel. sélectionnez l'option Autres formats, Dans la fenêtre Format de nombre qui s'ouvre, ajustez les paramètres disponibles. Les options diffèrent en fonction du format numérique appliqué aux cellules sélectionnées. Vous pouvez utiliser la liste Catégorie pour modifier le format numérique. Pour le format Nombre, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales, spécifier si vous souhaitez Utiliser le séparateur de milliers ou non et choisir l'un des Formats disponibles pour l'affichage des valeurs négatives. Pour les formats Scientifique et Pourcentage, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales. Pour les formats Comptabilité et Monétaire, vous pouvez définir le nombre de Décimales, choisir l'un des Symboles de devise disponibles et l'un des Formats disponibles pour afficher les valeurs négatives. Pour le format Date, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats de date disponibles: 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, Avril15 2006, 15-Avr, 15-Avr-06, Avr-06, Avril-06, A-06, 06-Avr, 15-Avr-2006, 2006-Avr-15, 06-Avr-15, 06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Avr, 15/Avr/06, Avr/06, Avril/06, A/06, 06/Avr, 15/Avr/2006, 2006/Avr/15, 06/Avr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Avr, 15 Avr 06, Avr 06, Avril 06, A 06, 06 Avr, 15 Avr 2006, 2006 Avr 15, 06 Avr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15. Pour le format Heure, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats d'heure disponibles: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. Pour le format Fraction, vous pouvez sélectionner l'un des formats disponibles: D'un chiffre (1/3), De deux chiffres (12/25), De trois chiffres (131/135), Demis (1/2), Quarts (2/4), Huitièmes (4/8), Seizièmes (8/16), Dixièmes (5/10), Centièmes (50/100). Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", + "title": "ChatGPT", + "body": "Le module complémentaire ChatGPT permet d'utiliser l'agent conversationnel OpenAI pour effectuer les tâches visant à comprendre et à générer le langage naturel ou le code. Installation Pour installer le module complémentaire ChatGPT, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires. Recherchez ChatGPT sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous. Cliquez sur l'icône ChatGPT sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire. Configuration Créez sur votre API key sur la page OpenAI API key. Copiez la clé générée API key dans le champ correspondant sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur. Utilisation Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Cliquez sur l'icône ChatGPT. Configurez les paramètres disponibles tels que Modèle, Longueur maximale, Température etc. ONLYOFFICE n'assume aucune responsabilité quant aux réponses du ChatGPT qui peuvent contenir des erreurs, des omissions ou du contenu haineux ou inapproprié. Tout le texte envoyé depuis le module complémentaire est généré par ChatGPT et est fourni tel quel, sans filtrage d'aucune sorte par ONLYOFFICE." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm", "title": "Effacer un texte ou une mise en forme d'une cellule", - "body": "Effacer la mise en forme Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez supprimer rapidement le texte ou la mise en forme de la cellule sélectionnée. Pour le faire, sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. cliquez sur l'icône Effacer située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : utilisez l'option Tout si vous souhaitez effacer complètement le contenu des cellules de la plage sélectionnée y compris le texte, la mise en forme, la fonction etc ; utilisez l'option Texte si vous souhaitez effacer le texte des cellules de la plage sélectionnée ; utilisez l'option Format si vous souhaitez effacer la mise en forme des cellules de la plage séletionnée. Le texte et les fonctions, s'ils sont présents, seront gardés. utilisez l'option Commentaires si vous souhaitez retirer les commentaires de la plage sélectionnée ; utilisez l'option Hyperliens si vous souhaitez retirer les liens hypertexte de la plage sélectionnée. Remarque : toutes ces options sont également disponibles dans le menu contextuel. Copier la mise en forme de cellule Vous pouvez rapidement copier une certaine mise en forme de cellule et l'appliquer à d'autres cellules. Pour appliquer la mise en forme copiée à une seule cellule ou plusieurs cellules adjacentes, sélectionnez la cellule/plage de cellules dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier, cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante ), sélectionnez la cellule/plage de cellules à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la même mise en forme. Pour appliquer la mise en forme copiée à plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes, sélectionnez la cellule/plage de cellules dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier, double-cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et l'icône Copier le style restera sélectionnée ), cliquez sur des cellules individuelles ou sélectionnez les plages de cellules une par une pour appliquer le même format à chacune d'elles, pour quitter ce mode, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Copier le style ou appuyez sur la touche Échap du clavier." + "body": "Effacer la mise en forme Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez supprimer rapidement le texte ou la mise en forme de la cellule sélectionnée. Pour le faire, sélectionnez une cellule, une plage de cellules avec la souris ou la feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, Remarque : vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. cliquez sur l'icône Effacer située dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : utilisez l'option Tout si vous souhaitez effacer complètement le contenu des cellules de la plage sélectionnée y compris le texte, la mise en forme, la fonction etc ; utilisez l'option Texte si vous souhaitez effacer le texte des cellules de la plage sélectionnée ; utilisez l'option Format si vous souhaitez effacer la mise en forme des cellules de la plage sélectionnée. Le texte et les fonctions, s'ils sont présents, seront gardés. utilisez l'option Commentaires si vous souhaitez retirer les commentaires de la plage sélectionnée ; utilisez l'option Hyperliens si vous souhaitez retirer les liens hypertexte de la plage sélectionnée. Remarque : toutes ces options sont également disponibles dans le menu contextuel. Copier la mise en forme de cellule Vous pouvez rapidement copier une certaine mise en forme de cellule et l'appliquer à d'autres cellules. Pour appliquer la mise en forme copiée à une seule cellule ou plusieurs cellules adjacentes, sélectionnez la cellule/plage de cellules dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier, cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris aura la forme suivante ), sélectionnez la cellule/plage de cellules à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la même mise en forme. Pour appliquer la mise en forme copiée à plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes, sélectionnez la cellule/plage de cellules dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier, double-cliquez sur l'icône Copier le style dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure (le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et l'icône Copier le style restera sélectionnée ), cliquez sur des cellules individuelles ou sélectionnez les plages de cellules une par une pour appliquer le même format à chacune d'elles, pour quitter ce mode, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Copier le style ou appuyez sur la touche Échap du clavier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communiquer lors de l'édition", - "body": "Dans le Tableur ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow. Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur . Telegram Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Telegram, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone dans le champ correspondant, cochez la case Rester connecté lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Suivant, saisissez le code reçu dans votre application Telegram, ou connectez-vous en utilisant le Code QR, ouvrez l'application Telegram sur votre téléphone, passez à Paramètres > Appareils > Numériser QR, numérisez l'image pour vous connecter. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser Telegram au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Rainbow Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Rainbow, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Rainbow, enregistrez un nouveau compte en cliquant sur le bouton Inscription ou connectez-vous à un compte déjà créé. Pour le faire, saisissez votre email dans le champ correspondant et cliquez sur Continuer, puis saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte, cochez la case Maintenir ma session lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Connecter. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à chatter dans Rainbow et travailler au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en même temps." + "body": "Dans le Tableur ONLYOFFICE vous pouvez toujours rester en contact avec vos collègues et utiliser des messageries en ligne populaires, par exemple Telegram et Rainbow. Les plug-ins Telegram et Rainbow ne sont pas installés par défaut. Pour en savoir plus sur leur installation, veuillez consulter l'article approprié : Ajouter des modules complémentaires à ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors , Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud ou Ajouter de nouveaux modules complémentaires aux éditeurs de serveur . Telegram Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Telegram, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Telegram, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone dans le champ correspondant, cochez la case Rester connecté lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Suivant, saisissez le code reçu dans votre application Telegram, ou connectez-vous en utilisant le Code QR, ouvrez l'application Telegram sur votre téléphone, passez à Paramètres > Appareils > Numériser QR, numérisez l'image pour vous connecter. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser Telegram au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE. Rainbow Pour commencer à chatter dans le plug-in Rainbow, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et cliquez sur Rainbow, enregistrez un nouveau compte en cliquant sur le bouton Inscription ou connectez-vous à un compte déjà créé. Pour le faire, saisissez votre email dans le champ correspondant et cliquez sur Continuer, puis saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte, cochez la case Maintenir ma session lorsque vous souhaitez enregistrer vos données pour la session en cours, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton Connecter. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à chatter dans Rainbow et travailler au sein de l'interface des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE en même temps." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ConditionalFormatting.htm", @@ -2538,17 +2578,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/DataValidation.htm", "title": "Validation des données", - "body": "Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE vous fait bénéficier des fonctionnalités de validation des données pour contrôler les données saisies par les autres utilisateurs. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez la cellule, la plage de cellules ou la feuille de calcul entière dont vous voulez limiter la saisie, passez à l'onglet Données et cliquez sur icône Validation des données dans la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Validation des données avec trois onglets s'ouvre : Paramètres, Entrer le message et Avertissement d'erreur. Paramètres La section Paramètres permet de définir le type de données à contrôler : Remarque : Cochez la case Appliquer ces modifications à toutes les cellules ayant les mêmes paramètres pour limiter toutes les cellules sélectionnées ou la feuille de calcul entière. sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu Autoriser : Aucune valeur : saisie de données sans restrictions. Nombre entier : n'autoriser que la saisie de nombres entiers. Décimales : n'autoriser que la saisie de nombres décimaux. Liste : limiter les cellules à n'accepter que des données dans la liste déroulante que vous avez créé. Décochez Afficher une liste déroulante dans une cellule pour masquer la flèche de la liste déroulante. Date : n'autoriser que les dates dans les cellules. Temps : n'autoriser que les heures dans les cellules. Longueur du texte : permet de limiter la longueur du texte. Autre : permet de personnaliser la formule de validation. Remarque : Cochez la case Appliquer ces modifications à toutes les cellules ayant les mêmes paramètres pour limiter toutes les cellules sélectionnées ou la feuille de calcul entière. sélectionnez des conditions dans le menu Données : entre : la valeur doit être comprise dans l'intervalle de données selon la règle de validation définie. pas entre : la valeur ne doit pas être comprise dans l'intervalle de données selon la règle de validation définie. est égal : la valeur dans la cellule doit être égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. n'est pas égal : la valeur dans la cellule ne doit pas être égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. supérieur à : la valeur doit être supérieure à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. inférieur à : la valeur doit être inférieure à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. est supérieur ou égal à : la valeur dans la cellule doit être supérieure ou égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. est inférieur ou égal à : la valeur dans la cellule doit être inférieure ou égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. créez une règle de validation en fonction du type de données autorisé : Condition de validation Règle de validation Description Disponibilité Entre / pas entre Minimum / Maximum Définir un intervalle de données Nombre entier / Décimal / Longueur du texte Date de début / Date limite Définir un intervalle de dates Date Heure de début / Heure de fin Définir un intervalle de temps Temps Est égal / n'est pas égal Comparer à Définir la valeur à comparer à Nombre entier / Décimal Date Définir la date à comparer à Date Temps écoulé Définir l'heure à comparer à Temps Longueur Définir la longueur à comparer à Longueur du texte Supérieur à / est supérieur ou égal à Minimum Définir la limite inférieure, Nombre entier / Décimal / Longueur du texte Date de début Définir la date de début Date Heure de début Définir l'heure de début Temps Inférieur à / est inférieur ou égal à Maximum Définir la limite supérieure, Nombre entier / Décimal / Longueur du texte Date limite Définir la date limite Date Heure de fin Définir l'heure de fin Temps Ainsi que : Source : spécifiez la source de données pour limiter les entrées à une sélection dans une liste déroulante. Formule : entrez la formule à personnaliser la règle de validation sous l'option d'autorisation Autre. Entrer le message La section Entrer le message permet de personnaliser le message qui s'affichera chez les utilisateurs lorsqu'ils feront glisser la souris sur la cellule. Saisissez le Titre et le texte du Message de saisie. Décochez Affichez un message de saisie lorsqu'une cellule est sélectionnée pour désactiver l'affichage du message de saisie. Lassez la case active pour affiche le message. Avertissement d'erreur La section Avertissement d'erreur permet de personnaliser le message d'erreur avertissant les utilisateurs que les données entrées ne sont pas valides. Style : choisissez le type d'alerte parmi les options disponibles : Arrêter, Alerte ou Message : Titre : saisissez le titre du message d'alerte. Message d'erreur : saisissez le texte du message d'alerte. Décochez Affichez un avertissement d'erreur lorsque les données invalides sont saisies pour désactiver l'affichage des alertes." + "body": "Tableur ONLYOFFICE vous fait bénéficier des fonctionnalités de validation des données pour contrôler les données saisies par les autres utilisateurs. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez la cellule, la plage de cellules ou la feuille de calcul entière dont vous voulez limiter la saisie, passez à l'onglet Données et cliquez sur icône Validation des données dans la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Validation des données avec trois onglets s'ouvre : Paramètres, Entrer le message et Avertissement d'erreur. Paramètres La section Paramètres permet de définir le type de données à contrôler : Remarque : Cochez la case Appliquer ces modifications à toutes les cellules ayant les mêmes paramètres pour limiter toutes les cellules sélectionnées ou la feuille de calcul entière. sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu Autoriser : Aucune valeur : saisie de données sans restrictions. Nombre entier : n'autoriser que la saisie de nombres entiers. Décimales : n'autoriser que la saisie de nombres décimaux. Liste : limiter les cellules à n'accepter que des données dans la liste déroulante que vous avez créé. Décochez Afficher une liste déroulante dans une cellule pour masquer la flèche de la liste déroulante. Date : n'autoriser que les dates dans les cellules. Temps : n'autoriser que les heures dans les cellules. Longueur du texte : permet de limiter la longueur du texte. Autre : permet de personnaliser la formule de validation. Remarque : Cochez la case Appliquer ces modifications à toutes les cellules ayant les mêmes paramètres pour limiter toutes les cellules sélectionnées ou la feuille de calcul entière. sélectionnez des conditions dans le menu Données : entre : la valeur doit être comprise dans l'intervalle de données selon la règle de validation définie. pas entre : la valeur ne doit pas être comprise dans l'intervalle de données selon la règle de validation définie. est égal : la valeur dans la cellule doit être égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. n'est pas égal : la valeur dans la cellule ne doit pas être égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. supérieur à : la valeur doit être supérieure à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. inférieur à : la valeur doit être inférieure à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. est supérieur ou égal à : la valeur dans la cellule doit être supérieure ou égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. est inférieur ou égal à : la valeur dans la cellule doit être inférieure ou égale à la valeur définie par la règle de validation. créez une règle de validation en fonction du type de données autorisé : Condition de validation Règle de validation Description Disponibilité Entre / pas entre Minimum / Maximum Définir un intervalle de données Nombre entier / Décimal / Longueur du texte Date de début / Date limite Définir un intervalle de dates Date Heure de début / Heure de fin Définir un intervalle de temps Temps Est égal / n'est pas égal Comparer à Définir la valeur à comparer à Nombre entier / Décimal Date Définir la date à comparer à Date Temps écoulé Définir l'heure à comparer à Temps Longueur Définir la longueur à comparer à Longueur du texte Supérieur à / est supérieur ou égal à Minimum Définir la limite inférieure, Nombre entier / Décimal / Longueur du texte Date de début Définir la date de début Date Heure de début Définir l'heure de début Temps Inférieur à / est inférieur ou égal à Maximum Définir la limite supérieure, Nombre entier / Décimal / Longueur du texte Date limite Définir la date limite Date Heure de fin Définir l'heure de fin Temps Ainsi que : Source : spécifiez la source de données pour limiter les entrées à une sélection dans une liste déroulante. Formule : entrez la formule à personnaliser la règle de validation sous l'option d'autorisation Autre. Entrer le message La section Entrer le message permet de personnaliser le message qui s'affichera chez les utilisateurs lorsqu'ils feront glisser la souris sur la cellule. Saisissez le Titre et le texte du Message de saisie. Décochez Affichez un message de saisie lorsqu'une cellule est sélectionnée pour désactiver l'affichage du message de saisie. Lassez la case active pour affiche le message. Avertissement d'erreur La section Avertissement d'erreur permet de personnaliser le message d'erreur avertissant les utilisateurs que les données entrées ne sont pas valides. Style : choisissez le type d'alerte parmi les options disponibles : Arrêter, Alerte ou Message : Titre : saisissez le titre du message d'alerte. Message d'erreur : saisissez le texte du message d'alerte. Décochez Affichez un avertissement d'erreur lorsque les données invalides sont saisies pour désactiver l'affichage des alertes." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Dessiner à main levée dans un classeur", + "body": "L'onglet Dessiner de l'éditeur de classeurs permet de dessiner à main levée, ajouter des notes manuscrites, mettre en surbrillance du texte et effacer dans votre classeur. Pour dessiner, écrire ou mettre en surbrillance du texte, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur et déplacez le curseur. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement pour personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du trait. Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs lorsque la couleur nécessaire manque à la palette. Lorsque vous avez fini de dessiner, d'écrire ou de surligner, cliquez sur l'icône Stylo ou Surligneur encore une fois, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap. Cliquez sur l'outil Gomme et déplacez le curseur d'avant en arrière pour effacer le trait. La Gomme efface uniquement le trait entier. Utilisez le bouton Sélectionner pour sélectionner l'inscription, le dessin ou la mise en surbrillance. Une fois sélectionné, il est possible de redimensionner ou supprimer l'élément." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm", "title": "Définir le type de police, la taille, le style et la couleur", - "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez sélectionner le type de police et sa taille, appliquer l'un des styles de décoration et modifier les couleurs de police et fond en utilisant les icônes correspondantes situées sur barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme aux données déjà présentes dans le classeur, sélectionnez-les avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme à plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. Nom de la police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante (les valeurs par défaut sont : 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police, puis d'appuyer sur Entrée. Augmenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus grosse chaque fois que vous cliquez sur l'icône. Réduire la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la rendant plus petite chaque fois que vous cliquez sur l'icône. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Indice/Exposant Permet de choisir l'option Exposant ou Indice. L'option Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les fractions. L'option Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les formules chimiques. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres et des caractères dans les cellules. Couleur de remplissage Sert à modifier la couleur d'arrière-plan de la cellule. La couleur de remplissage de la cellule peut également être modifiée à l'aide de la palette de couleur de remplissage dans l'onglet Paramètres de cellule de la barre latérale de droite. Modifier le jeu de couleurs Sert à modifier la palette de couleurs par défaut pour les éléments de classeur (police, arrière-plan, graphique et ses élements) en sélectionnant la palette disponible : New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urbain, ou Verve. Remarque : il est également possible d'appliquer une des mises en forme prédéfinies en sélectionnant la cellule que vous voulez mettre en forme et en choisissant la mise en forme désirée de la liste sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure : Pour modifier la couleur de police / de remplissage, sélectionnez les caractères / cellules avec la souris ou une feuille de calcul entière en utilisanst la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur l'iсône correspondante sur la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une couleur dans les palettes disponibles Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée du classeur. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas la couleur recherchée dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB (RVB) en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel afin que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée au paragraphe et ajoutée à la palette Couleur personnalisée. Pour effacer une couleur d'arrière-plan d'une certaine cellule, sélectionnez une cellule, ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou une feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur l'icône Couleur de remplissage sous l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'icône ." + "body": "L'éditeur de classeurs permet de sélectionner le type et la taille de la police, appliquer l'un des styles de décoration et modifier les couleurs de la police et de l'arrière-plan en utilisant les icônes correspondantes sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.. Remarque: si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme aux données déjà présentes dans le classeur, sélectionnez-les avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Si vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme à plusieurs cellules ou plages non adjacentes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les cellules/plages à l'aide de la souris. Police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante (les valeurs par défaut sont: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police jusqu'à 409 pt. Appuyer sur la touche Entrée pour confirmer Augmenter la taille de la police Sert à augmenter la taille de police par incréments de 1 point à chaque clic sur le bouton. Diminuer la taille de la police Sert à augmenter la taille de police par incréments de 1 point à chaque clic sur le bouton. Modifier la casse Sert à modifier la casse du texte. Majuscule en début de phrase - la casse à correspondre la casse de la proposition ordinaire. minuscule - mettre en minuscule toutes les lettres MAJUSCULES - mettre en majuscule toutes les lettres Mettre en majuscule chaque mot - mettre en majuscule la première lettre de chaque mot Inverser la casse - basculer entre d'affichages de la casse du texte. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Indice/Exposant Permet de choisir l'option Exposant ou Indice. L'option Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les fractions. L'option Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les formules chimiques. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres et des caractères dans les cellules. Couleur de remplissage Sert à modifier la couleur d'arrière-plan de la cellule. Utilisez cette icône pour remplir une cellule avec une couleur unie. La couleur d'arrière-plan de la cellule peut également être modifiée à l'aide de la section Remplissage sous l'onglet Paramètres de cellule de la barre latérale de droite. Modifier le jeu de couleurs Ce bouton se trouve sous l'onglet Mise en page. Sert à modifier la palette de couleurs par défaut pour les éléments de classeur (police, arrière-plan, graphique et ses éléments) en sélectionnant l'option disponible: New Office, Office, Niveaux de gris, Apex, Aspect, Civil, Rotonde, Capitaux, Flux, Fonderie, Médian, Métro, Module, Opulent, Oriel, Origine, Papier, Solstice, Technique, Promenade, Urban ou Verve. Remarque: il est également possible d'appliquer une des mises en forme prédéfinies en sélectionnant la cellule que vous voulez mettre en forme et en choisissant la mise en forme désirée de la liste sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure: Pour modifier la couleur de police ou remplir la cellule avec une couleur unie, sélectionnez les caractères / cellules avec la souris ou une feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur l'icône correspondante sur la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une couleur dans les palettes disponibles Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans la feuille de calcul. Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée au texte/cellule et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes. Pour effacer une couleur d'arrière-plan d'une certaine cellule, sélectionnez une cellule, ou une plage de cellules avec la souris ou une feuille de calcul entière en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur l'icône Couleur de remplissage sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'icône ." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm", "title": "Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau", - "body": "Créer un nouveau tableau mis en forme Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, Tableur vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez mettre en forme, cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez le modèle souhaité dans la galerie, dans la fenêtre contextuelle ouverte, vérifiez la plage de cellules à mettre en forme comme un tableau, cochez la case Titre si vous souhaitez inclure les en-têtes de tableau dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sinon la ligne d'en-tête sera ajoutée en haut tandis que la plage de cellules sélectionnée sera déplacée d'une ligne vers le bas, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer le modèle sélectionné. Le modèle sera appliqué à la plage de cellules sélectionnée et vous serez en mesure d'éditer les en-têtes de tableau et d'appliquer le filtre pour travailler avec vos données. Vous pouvez aussi appliquer un modèle de tableau en utilisant le bouton Tableau sous l'onglet Insérer. Dans ce cas, un modèle par défaut s'applique. Remarque : une fois que vous avez créé un nouveau tableau, un nom par défaut (Tableau1, Tableau2 etc.) lui sera automatiquement affecté. Vous pouvez changer ce nom pour le rendre plus significatif et l'utiliser pour d'autres travaux. Si vous entrez une nouvelle valeur dans une cellule sous la dernière ligne du tableau (si le tableau n'a pas la ligne Total) ou dans une cellule à droite de la dernière colonne du tableau, le tableau mis en forme sera automatiquement étendue pour inclure une nouvelle ligne ou colonne. Si vous ne souhaitez pas étendre le tableau, cliquez sur le bouton Coller qui s'affiche et sélectionnez l'option Annuler l'expansion automatique du tableau. Une fois cette action annulée, l'option Rétablir l’expansion automatique du tableau sera disponible dans ce menu. Remarque : Pour activer ou désactiver l'option de développent automatique du tableau, accédez à Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et décochez la case Inclure nouvelles lignes et colonnes dans le tableau. Sélectionner les lignes et les colonnes Pour sélectionner la ligne entière, déplacez le curseur sur la bordure gauche de la ligne du tableau lorsque il se transforme en flèche noir , puis cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner la colonne entière du tableau mis en forme, déplacez le curseur sur le bord inférieur de l'en-tête de la colonne lorsque il se transforme en flèche noir , puis cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris. Sur un clic unique toutes les données de la colonne sont sélectionnées (comme indiqué sur l'illustration ci-dessous); sur un double clic la colonne entière y compris l'en-tête est sélectionnée. Pour sélectionner le tableau entier, déplacez le curseur sur le coin supérieur gauche du tableau lorsque il se transforme en flèche noir en diagonale , puis cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris. éditer un tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle Certains paramètres du tableau peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres du tableau de la barre latérale droite qui s'ouvre si vous sélectionnez au moins une cellule du tableau avec la souris et cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du tableau sur la droite. Les sections Lignes et Colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : En-tête - permet d'afficher la ligne d'en-tête. Total - ajoute la ligne Résumé en bas du tableau. Remarque : lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, on peut utiliser la fonction pour calculer le résumé des valeurs. Une fois la cellule pour la ligne Résumé sélectionnée, le bouton est disponible à droite de la cellule. Cliquez sur ce bouton et choisissez parmi les fonctions proposées dans la liste : Moyenne, Calculer, Max, Min, Somme, Ecartype ou Var. L'option Plus de fonctions permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction et de sélectionner une autre fonction. Si vous choisissez l'option Aucune le résumé des données de la colonne ne s'affiche pas dans la ligne Résumé. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les lignes paires et impaires. Bouton Filtre - permet d'afficher les flèches déroulantes dans les cellules de la ligne d'en-tête. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque l'option En-tête est sélectionnée. Première - accentue la colonne la plus à gauche du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Dernière - accentue la colonne la plus à droite du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires. La section Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections Lignes et/ou Colonnes ci-dessus, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous avez coché l'option En-tête dans la section Lignes et l'option Bordé dans la section Colonnes, la liste des modèles affichés inclura uniquement les modèles avec la ligne d'en-tête et les colonnes en bandes activées : Si vous souhaitez effacer le style de tableau actuel (couleur d'arrière-plan, bordures, etc.) sans supprimer le tableau lui-même, appliquez le modèle Aucun à partir de la liste des modèles : La section Redimensionner le tableau vous permet de modifier la plage de cellules auxquelles la mise en forme du tableau est appliquée. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données - une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira. Modifiez le lien vers la plage de cellules dans le champ de saisie ou sélectionnez la plage de cellules nécessaire dans la feuille de calcul avec la souris et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Remarque : Les en-têtes doivent rester sur la même ligne et la plage de valeurs du tableau de résultat doit se superposer à la plage de valeur du tableau d'origine. La section Lignes et colonnes vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : Sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, toutes les données de colonnes à l'exclusion de la ligne d'en-tête ou la table entière incluant la ligne d'en-tête. Insérer une nouvelle ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de celle sélectionnée ainsi qu'une nouvelle colonne à gauche ou à droite de celle sélectionnée. Supprimer une ligne, une colonne (en fonction de la position du curseur ou de la sélection) ou la totalité du tableau. Remarque : les options de la section Lignes et colonnes sont également accessibles depuis le menu contextuel. L'option Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées vous permet de supprimer les valeurs en double dans le tableau mis en forme. Pour plus de détails sur suppression des doublons, veuillez vous référer à cette page. L'option Conversion en plage peut être utilisée si vous souhaitez transformer le tableau en une plage de données normale en supprimant le filtre tout en préservant le style de la table (c'est-à-dire les couleurs de cellule et de police, etc.). Une fois que vous avez appliqué cette option, l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite serait indisponible. L'option Insérer un segment vous permet de créer un segment pour filtrer les données du tableau. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des segments, veuillez vous référer à cette page. L'option Insérer un tableau croisé dynamique vous permet de créer un tableau croisé dynamique à base du tableau auquel la mise en forme est appliqué. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des tableaux croisés dynamiques, veuillez vous référer à cette page. Configurer les paramètres du tableau Pour changer les paramètres avancés du tableau, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Tableau - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau. Remarque : Pour activer ou désactiver l'option d'expansion automatique du tableau, accédez à Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. Utiliser la saisie automatique de formule pour ajouter des formules aux tableaux mis en forme d'après un modèle La liste de Saisie automatique de formule affiche des options disponibles pour des formules ajoutées aux tableaux mis en forme d'après un modèle. Vous pouvez faire un renvoi vers un tableau dans votre formules à l'intérieur ou en dehors du tableau. Les titres des colonnes et des éléments sont utilisés en tant que références au lieu des adresses de cellule. L'exemple ci-dessous illustre un renvoi vers le tableau dans la fonction SUM. Sélectionnez une cellule et commencez à saisir une formule qui commence par un signe égal, sélectionnez la fonction nécessaire dans la liste de Saisie automatique de formule. Après la parenthèse ouvrante, commencez à saisir le nom du tableau et sélectionnez-le dans la liste Saisie automatique de formule. Ensuite, saisissez le crochet ouvrant [ pour ouvrir la liste déroulante des colonnes et des éléments qu'on peut utiliser dans la formule. Une info-bulle avec la description de la référence s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur la référence dans la liste. Remarque : Chaque référence doit comprendre un crochet ouvrant et un crochet fermant. Veuillez vérifier la syntaxe de la formule." + "body": "Créer un nouveau tableau mis en forme Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, Tableur vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez mettre en forme, cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez le modèle souhaité dans la galerie, dans la fenêtre contextuelle ouverte, vérifiez la plage de cellules à mettre en forme comme un tableau, cochez la case Titre si vous souhaitez inclure les en-têtes de tableau dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sinon la ligne d'en-tête sera ajoutée en haut tandis que la plage de cellules sélectionnée sera déplacée d'une ligne vers le bas, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer le modèle sélectionné. Le modèle sera appliqué à la plage de cellules sélectionnée et vous serez en mesure d'éditer les en-têtes de tableau et d'appliquer le filtre pour travailler avec vos données. Vous pouvez aussi appliquer un modèle de tableau en utilisant le bouton Tableau sous l'onglet Insérer. Dans ce cas, un modèle par défaut s'applique. Remarque : une fois que vous avez créé un nouveau tableau, un nom par défaut (Tableau1, Tableau2 etc.) lui sera automatiquement affecté. Vous pouvez changer ce nom pour le rendre plus significatif et l'utiliser pour d'autres travaux. Si vous entrez une nouvelle valeur dans une cellule sous la dernière ligne du tableau (si le tableau n'a pas la ligne Total) ou dans une cellule à droite de la dernière colonne du tableau, le tableau mis en forme sera automatiquement étendue pour inclure une nouvelle ligne ou colonne. Si vous ne souhaitez pas étendre le tableau, cliquez sur le bouton Coller qui s'affiche et sélectionnez l'option Annuler l'expansion automatique du tableau. Une fois cette action annulée, l'option Rétablir l’expansion automatique du tableau sera disponible dans ce menu. Remarque : Pour activer ou désactiver l'option de développent automatique du tableau, accédez à Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe et décochez la case Inclure nouvelles lignes et colonnes dans le tableau. Sélectionner les lignes et les colonnes Pour sélectionner la ligne entière, déplacez le curseur sur la bordure gauche de la ligne du tableau lorsque il se transforme en flèche noir , puis cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner la colonne entière du tableau mis en forme, déplacez le curseur sur le bord inférieur de l'en-tête de la colonne lorsque il se transforme en flèche noir , puis cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris. Sur un clic unique toutes les données de la colonne sont sélectionnées (comme indiqué sur l'illustration ci-dessous); sur un double clic la colonne entière y compris l'en-tête est sélectionnée. Pour sélectionner le tableau entier, déplacez le curseur sur le coin supérieur gauche du tableau lorsque il se transforme en flèche noir en diagonale , puis cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris. Éditer un tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle Certains paramètres du tableau peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres du tableau de la barre latérale droite qui s'ouvre si vous sélectionnez au moins une cellule du tableau avec la souris et cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du tableau sur la droite. Les sections Lignes et Colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : En-tête - permet d'afficher la ligne d'en-tête. Total - ajoute la ligne Résumé en bas du tableau. Remarque : lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, on peut utiliser la fonction pour calculer le résumé des valeurs. Une fois la cellule pour la ligne Résumé sélectionnée, le bouton est disponible à droite de la cellule. Cliquez sur ce bouton et choisissez parmi les fonctions proposées dans la liste : Moyenne, Calculer, Max, Min, Somme, Ecartype ou Var. L'option Plus de fonctions permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction et de sélectionner une autre fonction. Si vous choisissez l'option Aucune le résumé des données de la colonne ne s'affiche pas dans la ligne Résumé. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les lignes paires et impaires. Bouton Filtre - permet d'afficher les flèches déroulantes dans les cellules de la ligne d'en-tête. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque l'option En-tête est sélectionnée. Première - accentue la colonne la plus à gauche du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Dernière - accentue la colonne la plus à droite du tableau avec un formatage spécial. Bordé - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires. La section Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections Lignes et/ou Colonnes ci-dessus, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous avez coché l'option En-tête dans la section Lignes et l'option Bordé dans la section Colonnes, la liste des modèles affichés inclura uniquement les modèles avec la ligne d'en-tête et les colonnes en bandes activées : Si vous souhaitez effacer le style de tableau actuel (couleur d'arrière-plan, bordures, etc.) sans supprimer le tableau lui-même, appliquez le modèle Aucun à partir de la liste des modèles : La section Redimensionner le tableau vous permet de modifier la plage de cellules auxquelles la mise en forme du tableau est appliquée. Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données - une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira. Modifiez le lien vers la plage de cellules dans le champ de saisie ou sélectionnez la plage de cellules nécessaire dans la feuille de calcul avec la souris et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Remarque : Les en-têtes doivent rester sur la même ligne et la plage de valeurs du tableau de résultat doit se superposer à la plage de valeur du tableau d'origine. La section Lignes et colonnes vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : Sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, toutes les données de colonnes à l'exclusion de la ligne d'en-tête ou la table entière incluant la ligne d'en-tête. Insérer une nouvelle ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de celle sélectionnée ainsi qu'une nouvelle colonne à gauche ou à droite de celle sélectionnée. Supprimer une ligne, une colonne (en fonction de la position du curseur ou de la sélection) ou la totalité du tableau. Remarque : les options de la section Lignes et colonnes sont également accessibles depuis le menu contextuel. L'option Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées vous permet de supprimer les valeurs en double dans le tableau mis en forme. Pour plus de détails sur suppression des doublons, veuillez vous référer à cette page. L'option Conversion en plage peut être utilisée si vous souhaitez transformer le tableau en une plage de données normale en supprimant le filtre tout en préservant le style de la table (c'est-à-dire les couleurs de cellule et de police, etc.). Une fois que vous avez appliqué cette option, l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite serait indisponible. L'option Insérer un segment vous permet de créer un segment pour filtrer les données du tableau. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des segments, veuillez vous référer à cette page. L'option Insérer un tableau croisé dynamique vous permet de créer un tableau croisé dynamique à base du tableau auquel la mise en forme est appliqué. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des tableaux croisés dynamiques, veuillez vous référer à cette page. Configurer les paramètres du tableau Pour changer les paramètres avancés du tableau, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Tableau - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau. Remarque : Pour activer ou désactiver l'option d'expansion automatique du tableau, accédez à Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Options de correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. Utiliser la saisie automatique de formule pour ajouter des formules aux tableaux mis en forme d'après un modèle La liste de Saisie automatique de formule affiche des options disponibles pour des formules ajoutées aux tableaux mis en forme d'après un modèle. Vous pouvez faire un renvoi vers un tableau dans votre formules à l'intérieur ou en dehors du tableau. Les titres des colonnes et des éléments sont utilisés en tant que références au lieu des adresses de cellule. L'exemple ci-dessous illustre un renvoi vers le tableau dans la fonction SUM. Sélectionnez une cellule et commencez à saisir une formule qui commence par un signe égal, sélectionnez la fonction nécessaire dans la liste de Saisie automatique de formule. Après la parenthèse ouvrante, commencez à saisir le nom du tableau et sélectionnez-le dans la liste Saisie automatique de formule. Ensuite, saisissez le crochet ouvrant [ pour ouvrir la liste déroulante des colonnes et des éléments qu'on peut utiliser dans la formule. Une info-bulle avec la description de la référence s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur la référence dans la liste. Remarque : Chaque référence doit comprendre un crochet ouvrant et un crochet fermant. Veuillez vérifier la syntaxe de la formule." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/GroupData.htm", @@ -2563,17 +2608,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm", "title": "Insérer des formules de tableau", - "body": "L'éditeur des feuilles de calcul Spreadsheet Editor permet d'utiliser les formules de tableau. Les formules de tableau assurent la cohérence entre les formules dans une feuille de calcul, puisque vous pouvez saisir une seule formule au lieu de plusieurs formules habituelles, elles simplifient le travail sur une grande quantité de données et permettent de remplir une feuille avec des données, etc. Vous pouvez saisir des formules et des fonctions incorporées en tant que formules de tableau pour: effectuer plusieurs calculs à la fois et afficher un seul résultat, ou renvoyer une plage de valeurs affichées dans plusieurs lignes et/ou colonnes. Il existe également des fonctions désignées qui peuvent renvoyer plusieurs valeurs. Si vous les saisissez en appuyant sur Entrée, elles renvoient une seule valeur. Si vous sélectionnez une plage de sortie de cellules pour afficher les résultats, ensuite saisissez une fonction en appuyant sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée, une plage de valeurs sera renvoyée (le nombre de valeurs renvoyées dépend de la taille de la plage de sortie précédemment sélectionnée). La liste ci-dessous contient des liens vers les descriptions détaillées de ces fonctions. Fonctions de tableau CELLULE CHOISIRLIGNES CHOISIRCOLS COLONNE EXCLURE FORMULETEXTE FREQUENCE CROISSANCE ASSEMB.H LIEN_HYPERTEXTE INDIRECT INDEX ESTFORMULE DROITEREG LOGREG INVERSEMAT PRODUITMAT MATRICE.UNITAIRE DECALER TABLEAU.ALEA LIGNE PRENDRE FRACTIONNER.TEXTE DANSCOL DANSLIGNE TRANSPOSE TENDANCE ORGA.COLS ORGA.LIGNES UNIQUE ASSEMB.V RECHERCHEX Insérer des formules de tableau Pour insérer une formule de tableau, Sélectionnez une plage de cellules où vous souhaitez afficher les résultats. Saisissez la formule que vous souhaitez utiliser dans la barre de formule, en spécifiant les arguments nécessaires entre parenthèses (). Appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Les résultats seront affichés dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, et la formule dans la barre de formule sera automatiquement placée entre accolades { } pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'une formule de tableau. Par exemple, {=UNIQUE(B2:D6)}. Les accolades ne peuvent pas être saisies manuellement. Créer des formules de tableau à cellule unique L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une seule cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule, saisissez =SOMME(C2:C11*D2:D11) et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Créer des formules de tableau à plusieurs cellules L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une plage de cellules. Sélectionnez une plage de cellules, saisissez =C2:C11*D2:D11 et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Modifier des formules de tableau Chaque fois que vous modifiez une formule de tableau saisie (par exemple, modifiez les arguments), vous avez besoin d'utiliser la combinaison de touches Ctrl + Maj + Entrée afin d'enregistrer les modifications. L'exemple qui suit explique comment développer une formule de tableau plusieurs cellules lorsque vous ajoutez de nouvelles données. Sélectionnez toutes les cellules qui contiennent une formule de tableau, ainsi que les cellules vides à côté des nouvelles données, modifiez les arguments dans la barre de formule afin qu'ils incluent les nouvelles données, ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Si vous souhaitez appliquer une formule de tableau à plusieurs cellules dans une plage de cellules plus petite, il vous faut supprimer la formule de tableau actuelle, puis saisir une nouvelle formule de tableau. Une partie de matrice ne peut pas être modifiée ou supprimée. Si vous essayez de modifier, déplacer ou supprimer une seule cellule dans le tableau ou d'insérer une nouvelle cellule dans le tableau, vous obtenez l'avertissement: Impossible de modifier une partie de matrice. Afin de supprimer une formule de tableau, sélectionnez toutes les cellules avec la formule de tableau et cliquez sur Supprimer. Vou pouvez également sélectionner une formule de tableau dans la barre de formules, cliquez sur Supprimer et ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Exemples d'utilisation de formules de tableau Cette section présente quelques exemples d'utilisation des formules de tableau pour accomplir certaines tâches. Compter le nombre de caractères dans une plage de cellules Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: =SOMME(NBCAR(B2:B11)). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction SOMME permet d'additionner les valeurs. Pour obtenir le nombre moyen de caractères, remplacez SOMME par MOYENNE. Trouver la chaîne la plus longue dans une plage de cellules Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: La fonction NBCAR calcule la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. =INDEX(B2:B11,EQUIV(MAX(NBCAR(B2:B11)),NBCAR(B2:B11),0),1). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction MAX permet de calculer la plus grande valeur. La fonction EQUIV trouve l'adresse de la cellule avec la chaîne la plus longue. La fonction INDEX retourne la valeur de la cellule trouvée. Pour trouver la chaîne la plus courte, remplacez MAX par MIN. Faire la somme des valeurs à base des conditions Pour faire la somme des valeurs supérieures à un nombre spécifié (2 dans cet exemple), vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant les plages de cellules dans les arguments par vos propres plages: =SOMME(IF(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). La fonction SI permet de créer un tableau de valeurs vraies et fausses. La fonction SOMME permet d'ignorer les fausses valeurs et additionne les valeurs vraies." + "body": "L'éditeur de classeurs permet d'utiliser les formules de tableau. Les formules de tableau assurent la cohérence entre les formules dans une feuille de calcul, puisque vous pouvez saisir une seule formule au lieu de plusieurs formules habituelles, elles simplifient le travail sur une grande quantité de données et permettent de remplir une feuille avec des données, etc. Vous pouvez saisir des formules et des fonctions incorporées en tant que formules de tableau pour: effectuer plusieurs calculs à la fois et afficher un seul résultat, ou renvoyer une plage de valeurs affichées dans plusieurs lignes et/ou colonnes. Il existe également des fonctions désignées qui peuvent renvoyer plusieurs valeurs. Si vous les saisissez en appuyant sur Entrée, elles renvoient une seule valeur. Si vous sélectionnez une plage de sortie de cellules pour afficher les résultats, ensuite saisissez une fonction en appuyant sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée, une plage de valeurs sera renvoyée (le nombre de valeurs renvoyées dépend de la taille de la plage de sortie précédemment sélectionnée). La liste ci-dessous contient des liens vers les descriptions détaillées de ces fonctions. Fonctions de tableau CELLULE CHOISIRLIGNES CHOISIRCOLS COLONNE EXCLURE EXPAND FILTRE FORMULETEXTE FREQUENCE CROISSANCE ASSEMB.H LIEN_HYPERTEXTE INDIRECT INDEX ESTFORMULE DROITEREG LOGREG INVERSEMAT PRODUITMAT MATRICE.UNITAIRE DECALER TABLEAU.ALEA LIGNE SEQUENCE TRIER PRENDRE FRACTIONNER.TEXTE DANSCOL DANSLIGNE TRANSPOSE TENDANCE ORGA.COLS ORGA.LIGNES UNIQUE ASSEMB.V EQUIVX RECHERCHEX Insérer des formules de tableau Pour insérer une formule de tableau, Sélectionnez une plage de cellules où vous souhaitez afficher les résultats. Saisissez la formule que vous souhaitez utiliser dans la barre de formule, en spécifiant les arguments nécessaires entre parenthèses (). Appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Les résultats seront affichés dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, et la formule dans la barre de formule sera automatiquement placée entre accolades { } pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'une formule de tableau. Par exemple, {=UNIQUE(B2:D6)}. Les accolades ne peuvent pas être saisies manuellement. Créer des formules de tableau à cellule unique L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une seule cellule. Sélectionnez une cellule, saisissez =SOMME(C2:C11*D2:D11) et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Créer des formules de tableau à plusieurs cellules L'exemple qui suit permet de montrer le résultat de la formule de tableau affiché dans une plage de cellules. Sélectionnez une plage de cellules, saisissez =C2:C11*D2:D11 et appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Modifier des formules de tableau Chaque fois que vous modifiez une formule de tableau saisie (par exemple, modifiez les arguments), vous avez besoin d'utiliser la combinaison de touches Ctrl + Maj + Entrée afin d'enregistrer les modifications. L'exemple qui suit explique comment développer une formule de tableau plusieurs cellules lorsque vous ajoutez de nouvelles données. Sélectionnez toutes les cellules qui contiennent une formule de tableau, ainsi que les cellules vides à côté des nouvelles données, modifiez les arguments dans la barre de formule afin qu'ils incluent les nouvelles données, ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Si vous souhaitez appliquer une formule de tableau à plusieurs cellules dans une plage de cellules plus petite, il vous faut supprimer la formule de tableau actuelle, puis saisir une nouvelle formule de tableau. Une partie de matrice ne peut pas être modifiée ou supprimée. Si vous essayez de modifier, déplacer ou supprimer une seule cellule dans le tableau ou d'insérer une nouvelle cellule dans le tableau, vous obtenez l'avertissement: Impossible de modifier une partie de matrice. Afin de supprimer une formule de tableau, sélectionnez toutes les cellules avec la formule de tableau et cliquez sur Supprimer. Vou pouvez également sélectionner une formule de tableau dans la barre de formules, cliquez sur Supprimer et ensuite appuyez sur Ctrl + Maj + Entrée. Exemples d'utilisation de formules de tableau Cette section présente quelques exemples d'utilisation des formules de tableau pour accomplir certaines tâches. Compter le nombre de caractères dans une plage de cellules Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: =SOMME(NBCAR(B2:B11)). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction SOMME permet d'additionner les valeurs. Pour obtenir le nombre moyen de caractères, remplacez SOMME par MOYENNE. Trouver la chaîne la plus longue dans une plage de cellules Vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant la plage de cellules dans l'argument par votre propre plage: La fonction NBCAR calcule la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. =INDEX(B2:B11,EQUIV(MAX(NBCAR(B2:B11)),NBCAR(B2:B11),0),1). La fonction NBCAR permet de calculer la longueur de chaque chaîne de texte dans la plage de cellules. La fonction MAX permet de calculer la plus grande valeur. La fonction EQUIV trouve l'adresse de la cellule avec la chaîne la plus longue. La fonction INDEX retourne la valeur de la cellule trouvée. Pour trouver la chaîne la plus courte, remplacez MAX par MIN. Faire la somme des valeurs à base des conditions Pour faire la somme des valeurs supérieures à un nombre spécifié (2 dans cet exemple), vous pouvez utiliser la formule de tableau suivante, en remplaçant les plages de cellules dans les arguments par vos propres plages: =SOMME(IF(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). La fonction SI permet de créer un tableau de valeurs vraies et fausses. La fonction SOMME permet d'ignorer les fausses valeurs et additionne les valeurs vraies." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insérer et mettre en forme des formes automatiques", - "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour ajouter une forme automatique au Tableur, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles dans la Galerie des formes : Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, une fois que la forme automatique est ajoutée vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position aussi bien que ses propriétés. Régler les paramètres de la forme automatique Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite qui s'ouvre si vous sélectionnez la forme automatique avec la souris et cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme . Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix : Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à la forme automatique et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur Paramètres de la forme pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale droite : Les options disponibles du menu : Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial : Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez cliquez sur Sélectionnez l'image et ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou A partir de l'espace de stockage à l'aide du gestionnaire de fichiers ONLYOFFICE, ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Prolonger ou Tuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité sert à régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Celle-ci correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Ligne - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme. Pour modifier la largeur du ligne, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de ligne. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante. Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à une forme. Configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme Pour configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur et Hauteur  utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur de la forme. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas elle se présente comme suit) ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants : Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : Type de lettrine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc. : Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. L'onglet Zone de texte vous permet de Redimensionner la forme pour contenir la texte, Autoriser le texte à sortir de la forme ou changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes : Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer la forme derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple : insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), la forme se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension de la forme s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé la forme derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher sa redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, la forme se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, la forme demeure inchangée. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement de la forme si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de la forme. Insérer et mettre en forme du texte dans la forme automatique Pour insérer un texte dans la forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme avec la souris et commencez à taper votre texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Toutes les options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer au texte dans la forme automatique sont listées ici. Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'icône Forme dans l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre), passez le curseur de la souris sur la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexions apparaissant sur le contour, faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la deuxième forme automatique et cliquez sur le point de connexion voulu sur son contour. Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles. Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion. Affecter une macro à une forme Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une forme. Une fois la macro affectée, la forme apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro : Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la forme et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK." + "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour insérer une forme dans l'éditeur de classeurs, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles depuis la Galerie de formes: Récemment utilisé, Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, une fois que la forme automatique est ajoutée vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position aussi bien que ses propriétés. Vous pouvez sauvegarder la forme en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Copier la mise en forme du style de la forme automatique Pour copier la mise en forme du style d'une forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme automatique dont vous souhaitez copier la mise en forme en utilisant la souris ou le clavier, cliquez l'icône Copier le style sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ( le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci ), sélectionnez la forme automatique à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer la mise en forme. Régler les paramètres de la forme automatique Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite qui s'ouvre si vous sélectionnez la forme automatique avec la souris et cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme . Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants: Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur nécessaire à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur que vous aimez: Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Il y a deux façons d'appliquer une couleur personnalisée: Pipette - sert à sélectionner la couleur nécessaire en cliquant sur celle-ci dans le document. Plus de couleurs sert à rechercher la couleur manquante dans la palette. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter: La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'élément sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleurs récentes. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez cliquez sur Sélectionnez l'image et ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou A partir de l'espace de stockage à l'aide du gestionnaire de fichiers ONLYOFFICE, ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique ou diapositive, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options Prolonger ou Tuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique ou de la diapositive afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité sert à régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Celle-ci correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour de la forme. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l'image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons: pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Modifier la forme automatique sert à remplacer la forme actuelle par une autre en la sélectionnant de la liste déroulante. Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à une forme. Configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme Pour configurer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre: L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants: Largeur et Hauteur utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur de la forme. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps et le ratio d'aspect de la forme automatique originale sera préservé. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants: Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants: Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants: Type de lettrine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle: Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque: l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. L'onglet Zone de texte vous permet de Redimensionner la forme pour contenir la texte, Autoriser le texte à sortir de la forme ou changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque: cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Colonnes permet d'ajouter des colonnes de texte dans la forme automatique en spécifiant le Nombre de colonnes nécessaires (jusqu'à 16) et l'Espacement entre les colonnes. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, le texte qui existe déjà ou tout autre texte que vous entrez dans la forme automatique apparaîtra dans les colonnes et circulera d'une colonne à l'autre. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer la forme derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), la forme se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension de la forme s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé la forme derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher sa redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, la forme se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, la forme demeure inchangée. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement de la forme si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de la forme. Insérer et mettre en forme du texte dans la forme automatique Pour insérer un texte dans la forme automatique, sélectionnez la forme avec la souris et commencez à taper votre texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Toutes les options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer au texte dans la forme automatique sont listées ici. Joindre des formes automatiques à l'aide de connecteurs Vous pouvez connecter des formes automatiques à l'aide de lignes munies de points de connexion pour démontrer les dépendances entre les objets (par exemple, si vous souhaitez créer un diagramme). Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'icône Forme sous l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le groupe Lignes dans le menu, cliquez sur la forme souhaitée dans le groupe sélectionné (à l'exception des trois dernières formes qui ne sont pas des connecteurs, à savoir les formes Courbe, Dessin à main levée et Forme libre), faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la première forme automatique et cliquez sur l'un des points de connexion qui s'affiche sur le contour de la forme, faites glisser le curseur de la souris vers la deuxième forme automatique et cliquez sur le point de connexion voulu sur son contour. Si vous déplacez les formes automatiques jointes, le connecteur reste attaché aux formes et se déplace avec elles. Vous pouvez également détacher le connecteur des formes, puis l'attacher à d'autres points de connexion. Affecter une macro à une forme Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une forme. Une fois la macro affectée, la forme apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro: Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la forme et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm", "title": "Insérer des graphiques", - "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans Spreadsheet Editor, Sélectionnez la plage de cellules comportant des données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour le graphique, Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié: Graphique à colonnes Histogramme groupé Histogramme empilé Histogramme empilé 100% Histogramme groupé en 3D Histogramme empilé en 3D Histogramme empilé 100% en 3D Histogrammes en 3D Graphiques en ligne Ligne Lignes empilées Lignes empilées 100% Lignes avec marques de données Lignes empilées avec marques de données Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données Lignes 3D Graphiques en secteurs Secteurs Donut Camembert 3D Graphiques à barres Barres groupées Barres empilées Barres empilées 100% Barres groupées en 3D Barres empilées en 3D Barres empilées 100% en 3D Graphiques en aires Aires Aires empilées Aires empilées 100 % Graphiques boursiers Nuage de points (XY) Disperser Barres empilées Disperser avec lignes lissées et marqueurs Disperser avec lignes lissées Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs Disperser avec des lignes droites Graphiques Combo Histogramme groupé - lignes Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire Aires empilées - histogramme groupé Combinaison personnalisée Après cela, le graphique sera ajouté à la feuille de calcul. Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles. Régler les paramètres du graphique Vous pouvez maintenant modifier les propriétés du graphique inséré: Pour modifier le type de graphique, Sélectionnez le graphique avec la souris. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du graphique. sur la barre latérale gauche, Ouvrez la liste déroulante Style et sélectionnez le style qui vous convient le mieux. Ouvrez la liste déroulante Modifier le type et sélectionnez le type approprié. Cliquez sur l'option Intervertir ligne/colonne pour repositionner les lignes et les colonnes du graphique. Le type et le style de graphique sélectionnés seront modifiés. En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D: Rotation X - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe X en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Gauche et Droite. Rotation Y - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe Y en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Haut et Bas. Perspective - définissez la valeur appropriée de profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Rétrécir le champ ou Élargir le champ. Axes à angle droit sert à définir l'angle de l'axe à droite. Mise à l'échelle automatique - activez cette option pour mettre automatiquement à l'échelle la profondeur et la hauteur du graphique ou désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement la profondeur et la hauteur. Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. Veuillez noter que c'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble. Pour modifier les données du graphiques: Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données sur le panneau latéral droit. Utiliser la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, la Série de la légende, le Nom de l'axe horizontal, et Changer de ligne ou de colonne. Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. Série de la légende - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. Dans la Série de la légende, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur à droite de la zone Sélectionner un nom. Nom de l'axe horizontal - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'axe horizontal cliquez sur Modifier. Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. Changer de ligne ou de colonne - modifier le façon de traçage des données dans la feuille de calcul. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour modifier paramètres tels que Disposition, Axe vertical, Second axe vertical, Axe horizontal, Second axe horizontal, Alignement dans une cellule et Texte de remplacement. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher de légende, En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données): Spécifiez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Centre, À gauche, À droite, En haut. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, en Ligne et à Barres vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Rien, Au centre. Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur, Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur d'étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont pris en charge par des graphiques Combo uniquement. Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement. L'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Second axe vertical/horizontal sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal. Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Rien, Principaux, Secondaires ou Principaux et secondaires. Croisement de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical. Position de l'étiquette - est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduation ou Entre graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations principales sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: Type principal/secondaire est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Rien pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, A l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les marques - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories. Position de l'étiquette est utilisé pour spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe. Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande. Intervalle entre les étiquettes - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du graphique si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur. Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder à l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et le Trait. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans le panneau droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, taille et type. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cet page. Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique. Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément. Pour modifier la position d'un élément, cliquez sur cet élément avec le bouton gauche de souris, vérifiez si le curseur est devenu , maintenez le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé et faites-le glisser vers la position souhaité. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier la taille et la position du graphique. Pour supprimer un graphique inséré, cliquez sur celui-ci et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Affecter une macro à un graphique Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à un graphique. Une fois la macro affectée, le graphique apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro: Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le graphique et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK. Une fois la macro affectée, vous pouvez toujours sélectionner le graphique pour effectuer d'autres opérations en cliquant avec le bouton gauche de la souris sur la surface du graphique. Utiliser des graphiques sparkline ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor prend en charge des Graphiques sparkline. Un graphique sparkline est un graphique tout petit qui s'adapte à la taille de la cellule et est un excellent outil de représentation visuelle des données. Pour en savoir plus sur la création, la modification et mise en forme des graphiques sparkline, veuillez consulter des instructions Insérer des graphiques sparkline guidelines." + "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans l'éditeur de claseurs, Sélectionnez la plage de cellules comportant des données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour le graphique, Passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l'icône Graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le type de graphique approprié: Graphique à colonnes Histogramme groupé Histogramme empilé Histogramme empilé 100 % Histogramme groupé en 3D Histogramme empilé en 3D Histogramme empilé 100 % en 3D Histogrammes en 3D Graphiques en ligne Ligne Lignes empilées Lignes empilées 100% Lignes avec marques de données Lignes empilées avec marques de données Lignes empilées 100 % avec des marques de données Lignes 3D Graphiques en secteurs Secteurs Donut Camembert 3D Graphiques à barres Barres groupées Barres empilées Barres empilées 100 % Barres groupées en 3D Barres empilées en 3D Barres empilées 100 % en 3D Graphiques en aires Aires Aires empilées Aires empilées 100 % Graphiques boursiers Nuage de points (XY) Disperser Barres empilées Disperser avec lignes lissées et marqueurs Disperser avec lignes lissées Disperser avec des lignes droites et marqueurs Disperser avec des lignes droites Radars Radar Radar avec marqueurs Radar plein Graphiques Combo Histogramme groupé - Courbe Histogramme groupé - ligne sur un axe secondaire Aires empilées - histogramme groupé Combinaison personnalisée Après cela, le graphique sera ajouté à la feuille de calcul. Remarque: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor prend en charge la modification des graphiques créés dans d'autres applications tels que: Graphiques en pyramides, à barres (pyramides), horizontal/vertical à cylindre, horizontal/vertical à cônes. Vous pouvez ouvrir le fichier comportant tels graphiques et les modifier en utilisant les outils disponibles. Régler les paramètres du graphique Vous pouvez maintenant modifier les propriétés du graphique inséré: Pour modifier le type de graphique, Sélectionnez le graphique avec la souris. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du graphique. sur la barre latérale gauche, Ouvrez la liste déroulante Style et sélectionnez le style qui vous convient le mieux. Ouvrez la liste déroulante Modifier le type et sélectionnez le type approprié. Cliquez sur l'option Intervertir ligne/colonne pour repositionner les lignes et les colonnes du graphique. Le type et le style de graphique sélectionnés seront modifiés. En outre, la configuration de Rotation 3D est disponible pour des graphiques 3D: Rotation X - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe X en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Gauche et Droite. Rotation Y - définissez la valeur de rotation de l'axe Y en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Haut et Bas. Perspective - définissez la valeur appropriée de profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou les flèches Rétrécir le champ ou Élargir le champ. Axes à angle droit sert à définir l'angle de l'axe à droite. Mise à l'échelle automatique - activez cette option pour mettre automatiquement à l'échelle la profondeur et la hauteur du graphique ou désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement la profondeur et la hauteur. Profondeur (% de la base) - définissez la profondeur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Hauteur (% de la base) - définissez la hauteur en utilisant le clavier ou le flèches. Rotation par défaut - restaurer les paramètres 3D par défaut. Veuillez noter que c'est pas possible de modifier chaque élément du graphique, tous paramètres seront appliqués au graphique dans son ensemble. Pour modifier les données du graphiques: Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des données sur le panneau latéral droit. Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Données du graphique pour gérer la Plage de données du graphique, les Entrées de légende (Série), le Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), et Intervertir ligne/colonne. Plage de données du graphique - sélectionnez les données pour votre graphique. Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la boîte Plage de données du graphique pour sélectionner la plage de données. Entrées de légende (Série) - ajouter, modifier ou supprimer les entrées de légende. Tapez ou sélectionnez le nom de série des entrées de légende. Dans Entrées de légende (Série), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Dans Modifier la série, saisissez une nouvelle entrée de légende ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Nom de la série. Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse) - modifier le texte de l'étiquette de l'axe. Dans Étiquette de l'axe horizontal (abscisse), cliquez sur Modifier. Dans Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe, saisissez les étiquettes à ajouter ou cliquez sur l'icône à droite de la zone Plage de données de l'étiquette de l'axe pour sélectionner la plage de données. Intervertir ligne/colonne - réorganiser la configuration de données dans la feuille de calcul selon vos besoins. Changer de ligne ou de colonne pour afficher des données sur un autre axe. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour modifier les paramètres suivants: Disposition, Axe vertical, Axe vertical secondaire, Axe horizontal, Axe horizontal secondaire, Accrochage à la cellule et Texte de remplacement. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Définissez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option appropriée dans la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Sans superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher la légende, En bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, À droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, À gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposition à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données): Définissez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, En bas à l'intérieur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/ Nuage de points (XY)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, À droite, À gauche, En haut, En bas. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre, Ajuster à la largeur, En haut à l'intérieur, En haut à l'extérieur. Pour les graphiques En aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, En ligne, Radar et En barres vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes: Aucun, Au centre. Sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de série, Nom de catégorie, Valeur, Saisissez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur des étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Droit pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Lisse pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Rien pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). Remarque: les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et Ligne/Nuage de points (XY). L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Veuillez noter que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Remarque: les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe vertical du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Aucun - pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical, Incliné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. Valeur minimale sert à définir la valeur la plus basse à afficher au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale sert à définir la valeur la plus élevée à afficher à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixé dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - sert à déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante: Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Rien pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - sert à afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. Échelle logarithmique - sert à activer l'échelle logarithmique pour la Base définie par l'utilisateur. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations du type secondaire sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type principal/secondaire contiennent les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, En dehors pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes de graduations du type principal qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position de l'étiquette par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de graduations, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de graduations à côté de l'axe. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. Remarque: Les axes secondaires sont pris en charge par des graphiques Combo uniquement. Axes secondaires sont utiles pour des graphiques Combo lorsque les nombres varient considérablement, ou lorsque des types de données mixtes sont utilisés pour créer un graphique. Avec des axes secondaires on peut lire et comprendre un graphique combiné plus facilement. L'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire s'affiche lorsque vous choisissez une série de données appropriée pour votre graphique combiné. Les options et les paramètres disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal secondaire sont les mêmes que ceux sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal. Pour une description détaillée des options disponibles sous l'onglet Axe vertical/horizontal, veuillez consulter les sections appropriées ci-dessus/ci-dessous. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes textuels. Veuillez noter que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les graphiques En barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques Nuage de points (XY), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. Sélectionnez Masquer pour masquer l'axe horizontal du graphique, laissez cette option décochée pour afficher l'axe. Définissez l'orientation du Titre en choisissant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante: Rien pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal. Sans superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun, Principal, Secondaire ou Principales et secondaires. Croisement de l'axe - sert à spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimale/maximale (correspondant à la première et la dernière catégorie) sur l'axe vertical. Position de l'axe - sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés: Graduations ou Entre graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case est désactivée, les valeurs sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est activée, les valeurs sont affichées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations du type principal sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs de catégorie. Les graduations secondaires sont les divisions à moins grande d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations principales et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants: Type principale/secondaire - sert à spécifier les options de placement suivantes: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les graduations principales/secondaires, Sur l'axe pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires des deux côtés de l'axe, Dans pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires dans l'axe, À l'extérieur pour afficher les graduations principales/secondaires à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les graduations - sert à spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options d'étiquettes permet d'ajuster l'apparence des étiquettes qui affichent des catégories. Position de l'étiquette sert à spécifier où les étiquettes de l'axe doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal: Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher les étiquettes de catégorie, En bas pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie au bas de la zone de tracé, En haut pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les étiquettes de catégorie à côté de l'axe. Distance de l'étiquette de l'axe - sert à spécifier la distance entre les étiquettes et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les étiquettes est grande. Intervalle entre les étiquettes - sert à spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les étiquettes doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les étiquettes sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les étiquettes pour une catégorie sur deux. Pour définir le Format d'étiquette cliquez sur le bouton format d'étiquette et choisissez la catégorie appropriée. Les catégories du format d'étiquette disponibles: Général Nombre Scientifique Comptabilité Monétaire Date Heure Pourcentage Fraction Texte Personnalisé Les options du format d'étiquette varient en fonction de la catégorie sélectionné. Pour en savoir plus sur la modification du format de nombre, veuillez consulter cette page. Activez Lié à la source pour conserver la représentation de nombre de la source de données du graphique. L'onglet Accrochage à la cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le graphique se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du graphique s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placer le graphique derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le graphique se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le graphique demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du graphique si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur. Une fois le graphique sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est aussi disponible à la droite car une forme est utilisé en arrière plan du graphique. Vous pouvez appuyer sur cette icône pour accéder à l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite et configurer le Remplissage et la Ligne de la forme. Veuillez noter qu'on ne peut pas modifier le type de la forme. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme sur le panneau de droit, vous pouvez configurer la zone du graphique là-même aussi que les éléments du graphique tels que la zone de tracé, la série de données, le titre du graphique, la légende et les autres et ajouter les différents types de remplissage. Sélectionnez l'élément du graphique nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et choisissez le type de remplissage approprié: couleur de remplissage, remplissage en dégradé, image ou texture, modèle. Configurez les paramètres du remplissage et spécifier le niveau d'opacité si nécessaire. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'axe vertical ou horizontal ou le quadrillage, vous pouvez configurer le paramètres du trait seulement sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme: couleur, largeur, taille et opacité. Pour plus de détails sur utilisation des couleurs de la forme, du remplissage et du trait veuillez accéder à cet page. Remarque: l'option Ajouter un ombre est aussi disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, mais elle est désactivée pour les éléments du graphique. Si vous voulez redimensionner les éléments du graphique, sélectionnez l'élément nécessaire en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser un des huit carreaux blancs le long du périmètre de l'élément. Pour modifier la position d'un élément, cliquez sur cet élément avec le bouton gauche de souris, vérifiez si le curseur est devenu , maintenez le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé et faites-le glisser vers la position souhaité. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier la taille et la position du graphique. Pour supprimer un graphique inséré, cliquez sur celui-ci et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Affecter une macro à un graphique Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à un graphique. Une fois la macro affectée, le graphique apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro: Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le graphique et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK. Une fois la macro affectée, vous pouvez toujours sélectionner le graphique pour effectuer d'autres opérations en cliquant avec le bouton gauche de la souris sur la surface du graphique. Utiliser des graphiques sparkline ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor prend en charge des Graphiques sparkline. Un graphique sparkline est un graphique tout petit qui s'adapte à la taille de la cellule et est un excellent outil de représentation visuelle des données. Pour en savoir plus sur la création, la modification et mise en forme des graphiques sparkline, veuillez consulter des instructions Insérer des graphiques sparkline guidelines." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm", @@ -2588,7 +2633,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm", "title": "Insérer une fonction", - "body": "La possibilité d'accomplir les opérations de calcul de base est la raison principale d'utiliserSpreadsheet Editor. Certaines d'entre elles sont exécutées automatiquement lorsque vous sélectionnez une plage de cellules dans votre feuille de calcul: MOYENNE est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la valeur moyenne. NB est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées qui contiennent des nombres en ignorant les cellules vides. MIN est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et de trouver le plus petit nombre. MAX est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus grand nombre. SOMME est utilisée pour ajouter tous les nombres dans la plage sélectionnée en ignorant les cellules vides ou celles contenant du texte. Les résultats de ces calculs sont affichés dans le coin inférieur droit de la barre d'état. Pour personnaliser la barre d'état et choisir quelles fonctions sont visibles, cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la barre d'état. Pour effectuer les autres opérations de calcul, vous pouvez insérer une formule nécessaire à la main en utilisant des opérateurs mathématiques appropriés ou insérer une formule prédéfinie - Fonction. On peut accéder aux Fonctions et les utiliser sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Formule, ou en appuyant sur le raccourci Shift+F3. Sous l'onglet Accueil, vous pouvez utiliser le bouton Insérer une fonction pour ajouter l'une des fonctions d'usage courant (SOMME, MOYENNE, MIN, MAX, NB) ou ouvrez la fenêtre Insérer une fonction où on peut trouver toutes les fonctions disponibles classées en catégories. Utilisez la barre de recherche pour faire une recherche précise par nom de la fonction. Sous l'onglet Formule vous pouvez utiliser les boutons suivants: Fonction sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction où on peut trouver toutes les fonctions disponibles classées en catégories. Somme automatique fournit un accès rapide aux fonctions SOMME, MIN, MAX, NB. Lorsque vous choisissez les fonctions de ce groupe, le calcul se produit automatiquement dans toutes les cellules de la colonne au-dessus de la cellule sélectionnée et on n'a pas besoin de saisir les arguments. Récemment utilisées fournit un accès rapide aux 10 fonctions récentes. Financier, Logique, Texte et données, Date et heure, Recherche et référence, Maths et trigonométrie fournit un accès rapide aux fonctions de ces catégories. Plus de fonctions fournit un accès aux fonctions des catégories suivantes: Base de données, Ingénierie, Information, Statistiques. Plages nommées sert à afficher le Gestionnaire de noms ou à définir un nom nouveau, ou coller un nom tels que l'argument d'une fonction. Pour en savoir plus, veiller consulter cette page. Calcul sert à forcer le recalcul sur toutes les fonctions. Pour insérer une fonction, sélectionnez une cellule dans laquelle vous voulez insérer une fonction, Procédez de l'une des façons suivantes: passez à l'onglet Formule et accédez à la fonction du groupe approprié en utilisant les boutons disponibles sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur la fonction appropriée pour ouvrir l'assistant Argument de formule. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Supplémentaire du menu ou cliquez sur le bouton Fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure pour ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction. passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction, sélectionnez l'une des fonctions d'usage courant (SOMME, MOYENNE, MIN, MAX, NB) ou cliquez sur l'option Supplémentaire pour ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction. faites un clic droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et utilisez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu contextuel. cliquez sur l'icône avant la barre de formule, Dans la fenêtre Insérer une fonction qui s'affiche, saisissez le nom dans la barre de recherche ou sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions souhaité, puis choisissez la fonction dont vous avez besoin dans la liste et cliquez sur OK. Lorsque vous cliquez sur la fonction appropriée, la fenêtre Argument de formule s'affiche: Dans la fenêtre Argument de formule qui s'affiche, saisissez les valeurs de chaque argument. Vous pouvez saisir les arguments de la fonction manuellement ou sélectionnez une plage de cellules à inclure en tant qu'argument en cliquant sur l'icône . Remarque: en règle générale, les valeurs numériques, les valeurs logiques (TRUE, FALSE), les valeurs de texte (entre guillemets), les références de cellules, les références de plage de cellules, les plages nommées et autres fonctions peuvent être utilisés comme arguments d'une fonction. Le résultat de fonction s'affiche au-dessous. Lorsque tous les arguments sont introduits, cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Arguments de la fonction. Pour entrer manuellement une fonction à l'aide du clavier, sélectionner une cellule, entrez le signe égal (=) Chaque formule doit commencer par le signe égal (=). entrez le nom de la fonction Une fois que vous avez tapé les lettres initiales, la liste Autocomplétion de formule sera affichée. Au fur et à mesure que vous tapez, les éléments (formules et noms) correspondant aux caractères saisis sont affichés. Si vous passez le pointeur de la souris sur une formule, une info-bulle avec la description de la formule s'affiche. Vous pouvez sélectionner la formule nécessaire dans la liste et l'insérer en cliquant dessus ou en appuyant sur la touche Tabulation. Saisissez les arguments de la fonction manuellement ou en faisant glisser le curseur pour sélectionner une plage de cellules à inclure en tant que argument. Si la fonction nécessite plusieurs arguments, ils doivent être séparés par des virgules. Les arguments doivent être mis entre parenthèses. La parenthèse ouvrante '(' est ajoutée automatiquement si vous sélectionnez une fonction dans la liste. Lorsque vous saisissez des arguments, une infobulle contenant la syntaxe de la formule s'affiche également. Lorsque tous les arguments sont spécifiés, entrer la parenthèse fermante ')' et appuyer sur Entrée. Lorsque vous saisissez de nouveaux données ou modifiez les valeurs des arguments, par défaut le recalcul sur les fonctions se produit automatiquement. Il est possible de forcer le recalcul sur les fonctions à l'aide du bouton Calcul sous l'onglet Formule. Cliquez sur le bouton Calcul pour recalculer le classeur entier ou cliquez sur la flèche au-dessous du bouton et choisissez l'option appropriées dans le menu: Calculer le classeur ou Calculer la feuille courante. Vous pouvez également clavier comme suit: F9 à recalculer le classeur, Maj + F9 à recalculer la feuille courante. Voici la liste des fonctions disponibles regroupées par catégories: Catégorie de fonctions Description Fonctions Fonctions de données et texte Servent à afficher correctement les données de texte dans votre classeur. ASC; CAR; EPURAGE; CODE; CONCATENER; CONCAT; DEVISE; EXACT; TROUVE; TROUVERB; CTXT; GAUCHE; GAUCHEB; NBCAR; LENB; MINUSCULE; STXT; MIDB; VALEURNOMBRE; NOMPROPRE; REMPLACER; REMPLACERB; REPT; DROITE; DROITEB; CHERCHE; CHERCHERB; SUBSTITUE; T; TEXTE; JOINDRE.TEXTE; SUPPRESPACE; UNICAR; UNICODE; MAJUSCULE; VALEUR; TEXTE.AVANT; TEXTE.APRES; FRACTIONNER.TEXTE Fonctions statistiques Servent à analyser les données: trouver la valeur moyenne, les valeurs plus grandes ou plus petites dans une plage de cellules. ECART.MOYEN; MOYENNE; AVERAGEA; MOYENNE.SI; MOYENNE.SI.ENS; LOI.BETA; LOI.BETA.N; BETA.INVERSE.N; BETA.INVERSE; LOI.BINOMIALE; LOI.BINOMIALE.N; LOI.BINOMIALE.SERIE; LOI.BINOMIALE.INVERSE; LOI.KHIDEUX; KHIDEUX.INVERSE; LOI.KHIDEUX.N; LOI.KHIDEUX.DROITE; LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE; LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE.DROITE; TEST.KHIDEUX; CHISQ.TEST; INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE; INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.NORMAL; INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.STUDENT; COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION; NB; NBVAL; NB.VIDE; NB.SI; NB.SI.ENS; COVARIANCE; COVARIANCE.PEARSON; COVARIANCE.STANDARD; CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE; SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS; LOI.EXPONENTIELLE.N; LOI.EXPONENTIELLE; LOI.F.N; LOI.F; LOI.F.DROITE; INVERSE.LOI.F.N; INVERSE.LOI.F; INVERSE.LOI.F.DROITE; FISHER; FISHER.INVERSE; PREVISION; PREVISION.ETS; PREVISION.ETS.CONFINT; PREVISION.ETS.CARACTERESAISONNIER; PREVISION.ETS.STAT; PREVISION.LINEAIRE; FREQUENCE; TEST.F; F.TEST; GAMMA; LOI.GAMMA.N; LOI.GAMMA; LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE.N; LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE; LNGAMMA; LNGAMMA.PRECIS; GAUSS; MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE; CROISSANCE; MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE; LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE; LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE.N; ORDONNEE.ORIGINE; KURTOSIS; GRANDE.VALEUR; DROITEREG; LOGREG; LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE; LOI.LOGNORMALE.N; LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE.N; LOI.LOGNORMALE; MAX; MAXA; MAX.SI.ENS; MEDIANE; MIN; MINA; MIN.SI.ENS; MODE; MODE.MULTIPLE; MODE.SIMPLE; LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG; LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG.N; LOI.NORMALE; LOI.NORMALE.N; LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE; LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE.N; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.N; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE.N; PEARSON; CENTILE; CENTILE.EXCLURE; CENTILE.INCLURE; RANG.POURCENTAGE; RANG.POURCENTAGE.EXCLURE; RANG.POURCENTAGE.INCLURE; PERMUTATION; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; LOI.POISSON; LOI.POISSON.N; PROBABILITE; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXCLURE; QUARTILE.INCLURE; RANG; MOYENNE.RANG; EQUATION.RANG; COEFFICIENT.DETERMINATION; COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE; COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE.P; PENTE; PETITE.VALEUR; CENTREE.REDUITE; ECARTYPE; ECARTYPE.STANDARD; STDEVA; ECARTYPEP; ECARTYPE.PEARSON; STDEVPA; ERREUR.TYPE.XY; LOI.STUDENT; LOI.STUDENT.N; LOI.STUDENT.BILATERALE; LOI.STUDENT.DROITE; LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.N; LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.BILATERALE; LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE; TENDANCE, MOYENNE.REDUITE; TEST.STUDENT; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VAR.P; VAR.P.N; VAR.S; VARPA; LOI.WEIBULL; LOI.WEIBULL.N; TEST.Z; Z.TEST Fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques Servent à effectuer des opérations mathématiques et trigonométriques telles que l'ajout, la multiplication, la division, l'arrondissement, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGREGAT; CHIFFRE.ARABE; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; PLAFOND; PLAFOND.MATH; PLAFOND.PRECIS; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGRES; ECMA.PLAFOND; PAIR; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; PLANCHER; PLANCHER.PRECIS; PLANCHER.MATH; PGCD; ENT; ISO.PLAFOND; PPCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; DETERMAT; INVERSEMAT; PRODUITMAT; MOD; ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE; MULTINOMIALE; MATRICE.UNITAIRE; IMPAIR; PI; PUISSANCE; PRODUIT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; ALEA; TABLEAU.ALEAT; ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES; ROMAIN; ARRONDI; ARRONDI.INF; ARRONDI.SUP; SEC; SECH; SOMME.SERIES; SIGNE; SIN; SINH; RACINE; RACINE.PI; SOUS.TOTAL; SOMME; SOMME.SI; SOMME.SI.ENS; SOMMEPROD; SOMME.CARRES; SOMME.X2MY2; SOMME.X2PY2; SOMME.XMY2; TAN; TANH; TRONQUE Fonctions Date et Heure Servent à afficher correctement la date et l'heure dans votre classeur. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVAL; JOUR; JOURS; JOURS360; MOIS.DECALER; FIN.MOIS; HEURE; NO.SEMAINE.ISO; MINUTE; MOIS; NB.JOURS.OUVRES; NB.JOURS.OUVRES.INTL; MAINTENANT; SECONDE; TEMPS; TEMPSVAL; AUJOURDHUI; JOURSEM; NO.SEMAINE; SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE; SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE.INTL; ANNEE; FRACTION.ANNEE Fonctions d'ingénierie Sont utilisés pour effectuer des calculs d'ingénierie: conversion entre différentes bases, recherche de nombres complexes, etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BINDEC; BINHEX; BINOCT; BITET; BITDECALG; BITOU; BITDECALD; BITOUEXCLUSIF; COMPLEXE; CONVERT; DECBIN; DECHEX; DECOCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECIS; ERFC; ERFC.PRECIS; SUP.SEUIL; HEXBIN; HEXDEC; HEXOCT; COMPLEXE.MODULE; COMPLEXE.IMAGINAIRE; COMPLEXE.ARGUMENT; COMPLEXE.CONJUGUE; COMPLEXE.COS; COMPLEXE.COSH; COMPLEXE.COT; COMPLEXE.CSC; COMPLEXE.CSCH; COMPLEXE.DIV; COMPLEXE.EXP; COMPLEXE.LN; COMPLEXE.LOG10; COMPLEXE.LOG2; COMPLEXE.PUISSANCE; COMPLEXE.PRODUIT; COMPLEXE.REEL; COMPLEXE.SEC; COMPLEXE.SECH; COMPLEXE.SIN; COMPLEXE.SINH; COMPLEXE.RACINE; COMPLEXE.DIFFERENCE; COMPLEXE.SOMME; COMPLEXE.TAN; OCTBIN; OCTDEC; OCTHEX Fonctions de base de données Sont utilisés pour effectuer des calculs sur les valeurs dans un certain champ de la base de données qui correspondent aux critères spécifiés. BDMOYENNE; BCOMPTE; BDNBVAL; BDLIRE; BDMAX; BDMIN; BDPRODUIT; BDECARTYPE; BDECARTYPEP; BDSOMME; BDVAR; BDVARP Fonctions financières Servent à effectuer certaines opérations financières, calculer la valeur nette actuelle, les paiements etc... INTERET.ACC; INTERET.ACC.MAT; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC; NB.JOURS.COUPONS; NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV; DATE.COUPON.SUIV; NB.COUPONSv; DATE.COUPON.PREC; CUMUL.INTER; CUMUL.PRINCPER; DB; DDB; TAUX.ESCOMPTE; PRIX.DEC; PRIX.FRAC; DUREE; TAUX.EFFECTIF; VC; VC.PAIEMENTS; TAUX.INTERET; INTPER; TRI; ISPMT; DUREE.MODIFIEE; TRIM; TAUX.NOMINAL; PM; VAN; PRIX.PCOUPON.IRREG; REND.PCOUPON.IRREG; PRIX.DCOUPON.IRREG; REND.DCOUPON.IRREG; PDUREE; VPM; PRINCPER; PRIX.TITRE; VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT; PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE; VA; TAUX; VALEUR.NOMINALE; TAUX.INT.EQUIV; AMORLIN; AMORANN; TAUX.ESCOMPTE.R; PRIX.BON.TRESOR; RENDEMENT.BON.TRESOR; VDB; TRI.PAIEMENTS; VAN.PAIEMENTS; RENDEMENT.TITRE; RENDEMENT.SIMPLE; RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE Fonctions de recherche et de référence Servent à trouver facilement les informations dans la liste de données. ADRESSE; CHOISIR; COLONNE; COLONNES; FORMULETEXTE; RECHERCHEH; LIEN_HYPERTEXTE; INDEX; INDIRECT; RECHERCHE; EQUIV; DECALER; LIGNE; LIGNES; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; RECHERCHEV; RECHERCHEX; ASSEMB.V; ASSEMB.H; DANSLIGNE; DANSCOL; ORGA.LIGNES; ORGA.COLS; EXCLURE; PRENDRE; CHOISIRLIGNES; CHOISIRCOLS Fonctions d'information Servent à vous donner les informations sur les données de la cellule sélectionnée ou une plage de cellules. CELLULE; TYPE.ERREUR; ESTVIDE; ESTERR; ESTERREUR; EST.PAIR; ESTFORMULE; ESTLOGIQUE; ESTNA; ESTNONTEXTE; ESTNUM; EST.IMPAIR; ESTREF; ESTTEXTE; N; NA; FEUILLE; FEUILLES; TYPE Fonctions logiques Servent uniquement à vous donner une réponse VRAI ou FAUX. ET; FAUX; SI; SIERREUR; SI.NON.DISP; SI.CONDITIONS; PAS; OU; SI.MULTIPLE; VRAI; OUX" + "body": "La possibilité d'accomplir les opérations de calcul de base est la raison principale d'utiliser l'éditeur de classeurs. Certaines d'entre elles sont exécutées automatiquement lorsque vous sélectionnez une plage de cellules dans votre feuille de calcul: MOYENNE est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la valeur moyenne. NB est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées qui contiennent des nombres en ignorant les cellules vides. MIN est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et de trouver le plus petit nombre. MAX est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus grand nombre. SOMME est utilisée pour ajouter tous les nombres dans la plage sélectionnée en ignorant les cellules vides ou celles contenant du texte. Les résultats de ces calculs sont affichés dans le coin inférieur droit de la barre d'état. Pour personnaliser la barre d'état et choisir quelles fonctions sont visibles, cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la barre d'état. Pour effectuer les autres opérations de calcul, vous pouvez insérer une formule nécessaire à la main en utilisant des opérateurs mathématiques appropriés ou insérer une formule prédéfinie - Fonction. On peut accéder aux Fonctions et les utiliser sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Formule, ou en appuyant sur le raccourci Shift+F3. Sous l'onglet Accueil, vous pouvez utiliser le bouton Insérer une fonction pour ajouter l'une des fonctions d'usage courant (SOMME, MOYENNE, MIN, MAX, NB) ou ouvrez la fenêtre Insérer une fonction où on peut trouver toutes les fonctions disponibles classées en catégories. Utilisez la barre de recherche pour faire une recherche précise par nom de la fonction. Sous l'onglet Formule vous pouvez utiliser les boutons suivants: Fonction sert à ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction où on peut trouver toutes les fonctions disponibles classées en catégories. Somme automatique fournit un accès rapide aux fonctions SOMME, MIN, MAX, NB. Lorsque vous choisissez les fonctions de ce groupe, le calcul se produit automatiquement dans toutes les cellules de la colonne au-dessus de la cellule sélectionnée et on n'a pas besoin de saisir les arguments. Récemment utilisées fournit un accès rapide aux 10 fonctions récentes. Financier, Logique, Texte et données, Date et heure, Recherche et référence, Maths et trigonométrie fournit un accès rapide aux fonctions de ces catégories. Plus de fonctions fournit un accès aux fonctions des catégories suivantes: Base de données, Ingénierie, Information, Statistiques. Plages nommées sert à afficher le Gestionnaire de noms ou à définir un nom nouveau, ou coller un nom tels que l'argument d'une fonction. Pour en savoir plus, veiller consulter cette page. Calcul sert à forcer le recalcul sur toutes les fonctions. Pour insérer une fonction, sélectionnez une cellule dans laquelle vous voulez insérer une fonction, Procédez de l'une des façons suivantes: passez à l'onglet Formule et accédez à la fonction du groupe approprié en utilisant les boutons disponibles sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur la fonction appropriée pour ouvrir l'assistant Argument de formule. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Supplémentaire du menu ou cliquez sur le bouton Fonction de la barre d'outils supérieure pour ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction. passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une fonction, sélectionnez l'une des fonctions d'usage courant (SOMME, MOYENNE, MIN, MAX, NB) ou cliquez sur l'option Supplémentaire pour ouvrir la fenêtre Insérer une fonction. faites un clic droit sur la cellule sélectionnée et utilisez l'option Insérer une fonction depuis le menu contextuel. cliquez sur l'icône avant la barre de formule, Dans la fenêtre Insérer une fonction qui s'affiche, saisissez le nom dans la barre de recherche ou sélectionnez le groupe de fonctions souhaité, puis choisissez la fonction dont vous avez besoin dans la liste et cliquez sur OK. Lorsque vous cliquez sur la fonction appropriée, la fenêtre Argument de formule s'affiche: Dans la fenêtre Argument de formule qui s'affiche, saisissez les valeurs de chaque argument. Vous pouvez saisir les arguments de la fonction manuellement ou sélectionnez une plage de cellules à inclure en tant qu'argument en cliquant sur l'icône . Remarque: en règle générale, les valeurs numériques, les valeurs logiques (TRUE, FALSE), les valeurs de texte (entre guillemets), les références de cellules, les références de plage de cellules, les plages nommées et autres fonctions peuvent être utilisés comme arguments d'une fonction. Le résultat de fonction s'affiche au-dessous. Lorsque tous les arguments sont introduits, cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Arguments de la fonction. Pour entrer manuellement une fonction à l'aide du clavier, sélectionner une cellule, entrez le signe égal (=) Chaque formule doit commencer par le signe égal (=). entrez le nom de la fonction Une fois que vous avez tapé les lettres initiales, la liste Autocomplétion de formule sera affichée. Au fur et à mesure que vous tapez, les éléments (formules et noms) correspondant aux caractères saisis sont affichés. Si vous passez le pointeur de la souris sur une formule, une info-bulle avec la description de la formule s'affiche. Vous pouvez sélectionner la formule nécessaire dans la liste et l'insérer en cliquant dessus ou en appuyant sur la touche Tabulation. Saisissez les arguments de la fonction manuellement ou en faisant glisser le curseur pour sélectionner une plage de cellules à inclure en tant que argument. Si la fonction nécessite plusieurs arguments, ils doivent être séparés par des virgules. Les arguments doivent être mis entre parenthèses. La parenthèse ouvrante '(' est ajoutée automatiquement si vous sélectionnez une fonction dans la liste. Lorsque vous saisissez des arguments, une infobulle contenant la syntaxe de la formule s'affiche également. Lorsque tous les arguments sont spécifiés, entrer la parenthèse fermante ')' et appuyer sur Entrée. Lorsque vous saisissez de nouveaux données ou modifiez les valeurs des arguments, par défaut le recalcul sur les fonctions se produit automatiquement. Il est possible de forcer le recalcul sur les fonctions à l'aide du bouton Calcul sous l'onglet Formule. Cliquez sur le bouton Calcul pour recalculer le classeur entier ou cliquez sur la flèche au-dessous du bouton et choisissez l'option appropriées dans le menu: Calculer le classeur ou Calculer la feuille courante. Vous pouvez également clavier comme suit: F9 à recalculer le classeur, Maj + F9 à recalculer la feuille courante. Voici la liste des fonctions disponibles regroupées par catégories: Catégorie de fonctions Description Fonctions Fonctions de données et texte Servent à afficher correctement les données de texte dans votre classeur. ASC; CAR; EPURAGE; CODE; CONCATENER; CONCAT; DEVISE; EXACT; TROUVE; TROUVERB; CTXT; GAUCHE; GAUCHEB; NBCAR; LENB; MINUSCULE; STXT; MIDB; VALEURNOMBRE; NOMPROPRE; REMPLACER; REMPLACERB; REPT; DROITE; DROITEB; CHERCHE; CHERCHERB; SUBSTITUE; T; TEXTE; JOINDRE.TEXTE; SUPPRESPACE; UNICAR; UNICODE; MAJUSCULE; VALEUR; TEXTE.AVANT; TEXTE.APRES; FRACTIONNER.TEXTE Fonctions statistiques Servent à analyser les données: trouver la valeur moyenne, les valeurs plus grandes ou plus petites dans une plage de cellules. TABLEAU.EN.TEXTE;ECART.MOYEN; MOYENNE; AVERAGEA; MOYENNE.SI; AVERAGEIFS; MOYENNE.SI.ENS; LOI.BETA.N; BETA.INVERSE.N; BETA.INVERSE; LOI.BINOMIALE; LOI.BINOMIALE.N; LOI.BINOMIALE.SERIE; LOI.BINOMIALE.INVERSE; LOI.KHIDEUX; KHIDEUX.INVERSE; LOI.KHIDEUX.N; LOI.KHIDEUX.DROITE; LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE; LOI.KHIDEUX.INVERSE.DROITE; TEST.KHIDEUX; CHISQ.TEST; INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE; INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.NORMAL; INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE.STUDENT; COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION; NB; NBVA; NB.VIDE; NB.SI; NB.SI.ENS; COVARIANCE; COVARIANCE.PEARSON; COVARIANCE.STANDARD; CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE; SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS; LOI.EXPONENTIELLE.N; LOI.EXPONENTIELLE; LOI.F.N; LOI.F; LOI.F.DROITE; INVERSE.LOI.F.N; INVERSE.LOI.F; INVERSE.LOI.F.DROITE; FISHER; FISHER.INVERSE; PREVISION; PREVISION.ETS; PREVISION.ETS.CONFINT; PREVISION.ETS.CARACTERESAISONNIER; PREVISION.ETS.STAT; PREVISION.LINEAIRE; FREQUENCE; TEST.F; F.TEST; GAMMA; LOI.GAMMA.N; LOI.GAMMA; LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE.N; LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE; LNGAMMA; LNGAMMA.PRECIS; GAUSS; MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE; CROISSANCE; MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE; LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE; LOI.HYPERGEOMETRIQUE.N; ORDONNEE.ORIGINE; KURTOSIS; GRANDE.VALEUR; DROITEREG; LOGREG, LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE; LOI.LOGNORMALE.N; LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE.N; LOI.LOGNORMALE; MAX; MAXA; MAX.SI.ENS MEDIANE; MIN; MINA; MIN.SI.ENS; MODE; MODE.MULTIPLE; MODE.SIMPLE; LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG; LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG.N; LOI.NORMALE; LOI.NORMALE.N; LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE; LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE.N; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.N; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE; LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE.N; PEARSON; CENTILE; CENTILE.EXCLURE; CENTILE.INCLURE; RANG.POURCENTAGE; RANG.POURCENTAGE.EXCLURE; RANG.POURCENTAGE.INCLURE; PERMUTATION; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; LOI.POISSON; LOI.POISSON.N; PROBABILITE; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXCLURE; QUARTILE.INCLURE; RANG; MOYENNE.RANG; EQUATION.RANG; COEFFICIENT.DETERMINATION; COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE; COEFFICIENT.ASYMETRIE.P; PENTE; PETITE.VALEUR; CENTREE.REDUITE; ECARTYPE; ECARTYPE.STANDARD; STDEVA; ECARTYPEP; ECARTYPE.PEARSON; STDEVPA; ERREUR.TYPE.XY; LOI.STUDENT; LOI.STUDENT.N; LOI.STUDENT.BILATERALE; LOI.STUDENT.DROITE; LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.N; LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE.BILATERALE; LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE; TENDANCE, MOYENNE.REDUITE; TEST.STUDENT; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; LOI.WEIBULL; LOI.WEIBULL.N; TEST.Z; Z.TEST Fonctions mathématiques et trigonométriques Servent à effectuer des opérations mathématiques et trigonométriques telles que l'ajout, la multiplication, la division, l'arrondissement, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGREGAT; CHIFFRE.ARABE; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; PLAFOND; PLAFOND.MATH; PLAFOND.PRECIS; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGRES; ECMA.PLAFOND; PAIR; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; PLANCHER; PLANCHER.PRECIS; PLANCHER.MATH; PGCD; ENT; ISO.PLAFOND; PPCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; DETERMAT; INVERSEMAT; PRODUITMAT; MOD; ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE; MULTINOMIALE; MATRICE.UNITAIRE; IMPAIR; PI; PUISSANCE; PRODUIT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; ALEA; TABLEAU.ALEAT; ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES; ROMAIN; ARRONDI; ARRONDI.INF; ARRONDI.SUP; SEC; SECH; SOMME.SERIES; SIGNE; SIN; SINH; RACINE; RACINE.PI; SOUS.TOTAL; SOMME; SOMME.SI; SOMME.SI.ENS; SOMMEPROD; SOMME.CARRES; SOMME.X2MY2; SOMME.X2PY2; SOMME.XMY2; TAN; TANH; TRONQUE Fonctions Date & Heure Servent à afficher correctement la date et l'heure dans votre classeur. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVAL; JOUR; JOURS; JOURS360; MOIS.DECALER; FIN.MOIS; HEURE; NO.SEMAINE.ISO; MINUTE; MOIS; NB.JOURS.OUVRES; NB.JOURS.OUVRES.INTL; MAINTENANT; SECONDE; TEMPS; TEMPSVAL; AUJOURDHUI; JOURSEM; NO.SEMAINE; SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE; SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE.INTL; ANNEE; FRACTION.ANNEE Fonctions d'ingénierie Sont utilisés pour effectuer des calculs d'ingénierie : conversion entre différentes bases, recherche de nombres complexes, etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BINDEC; BINHEX; BINOCT; BITET; BITDECALG; BITOU; BITDECALD; BITOUEXCLUSIF; COMPLEXE; CONVERT; DECBIN; DECHEX; DECOCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECIS; ERFC; ERFC.PRECIS; SUP.SEUIL; HEXBIN; HEXDEC; HEXOCT; COMPLEXE.MODULE; COMPLEXE.IMAGINAIRE; COMPLEXE.ARGUMENT; COMPLEXE.CONJUGUE; COMPLEXE.COS; COMPLEXE.COSH; COMPLEXE.COT; COMPLEXE.CSC; COMPLEXE.CSCH; COMPLEXE.DIV; COMPLEXE.EXP; COMPLEXE.LN; COMPLEXE.LOG10; COMPLEXE.LOG2; COMPLEXE.PUISSANCE; COMPLEXE.PRODUIT; COMPLEXE.REEL; COMPLEXE.SEC; COMPLEXE.SECH; COMPLEXE.SIN; COMPLEXE.SINH; COMPLEXE.RACINE; COMPLEXE.DIFFERENCE; COMPLEXE.SOMME; COMPLEXE.TAN; OCTBIN; OCTDEC; OCTHEX Fonctions de base de données Sont utilisés pour effectuer des calculs sur les valeurs dans un certain champ de la base de données qui correspondent aux critères spécifiés. BDMOYENNE; BCOMPTE; BDNBVAL; BDLIRE; BDMAX; BDMIN; BDPRODUIT; BDECARTYPE; BDECARTYPEP; BDSOMME; BDVAR; BDVARP Fonctions financières Servent à effectuer certaines opérations financières, calculer la valeur nette actuelle, les paiements etc... INTERET.ACC; INTERET.ACC.MAT; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC; NB.JOURS.COUPONS; NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV; DATE.COUPON.SUIV; NB.COUPONSv; DATE.COUPON.PREC; CUMUL.INTER; CUMUL.PRINCPER; DB; DDB; TAUX.ESCOMPTE; PRIX.DEC; PRIX.FRAC; DUREE; TAUX.EFFECTIF; VC; VC.PAIEMENTS; TAUX.INTERET; INTPER; TRI; ISPMT; DUREE.MODIFIEE; TRIM; TAUX.NOMINAL; PM; VAN; PRIX.PCOUPON.IRREG; REND.PCOUPON.IRREG; PRIX.DCOUPON.IRREG; REND.DCOUPON.IRREG; PDUREE; VPM; PRINCPER; PRIX.TITRE; VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT; PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE; VA; TAUX; VALEUR.NOMINALE; TAUX.INT.EQUIV; AMORLIN; AMORANN; TAUX.ESCOMPTE.R; PRIX.BON.TRESOR; RENDEMENT.BON.TRESOR; VDB; TRI.PAIEMENTS; VAN.PAIEMENTS; RENDEMENT.TITRE; RENDEMENT.SIMPLE; RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE Fonctions de recherche et de référence Servent à trouver facilement les informations dans la liste de données. ADRESSE; CHOISIR; COLONNE; COLONNES; EXPAND; FILTRE; FORMULETEXTE; RECHERCHEH; LIEN_HYPERTEXTE; INDEX; INDIRECT; RECHERCHE; EQUIV; EQUIV; DECALER; LIGNE; LIGNES; TRIER; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; RECHERCHEV; RECHERCHEX; ASSEMB.H; ASSEMB.V; DANSLIGNE; DANSCOL; ORGA.LIGNES; ORGA.COLS; EXCLURE; PRENDRE; CHOISIRLIGNES; CHOISIRCOLS Fonctions d’information Servent à vous donner les informations sur les données de la cellule sélectionnée ou une plage de cellules. CELLULE; TYPE.ERREUR; ESTVIDE; ESTERR; ESTERREUR; EST.PAIR; ESTFORMULE; ESTLOGIQUE; ESTNA; ESTNONTEXTE; ESTNUM; EST.IMPAIR; ESTREF; ESTTEXTE; N; NA; FEUILLE; FEUILLES; TYPE Fonctions logiques Servent uniquement à vous donner une réponse VRAI ou FAUX. ET; FAUX; SI; SIERREUR; SI.NON.DISP; SI.CONDITIONS; PAS; OU; SI.MULTIPLE; VRAI; OUX" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", @@ -2598,12 +2643,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insérer des images", - "body": "Tableur vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insérer une image Pour insérer une image dans la feuille de calcul, placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer l'image, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Imagede la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir Dans l’éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à la fois. l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK l'option Image provenant du stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK Après cela, l'image sera ajoutée à la feuille de calcul. Régler les paramètres de l'image une fois l'image ajoutée, vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour spécifier les dimensions exactes de l'image : sélectionnez l'image que vous voulez redimensionner avec la souris, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite, Dans la section Taille, définissez les valeurs Largeur et Hauteur requises. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est cliqué(auquel cas il ressemble à ceci ), les proportions d'image originales sera gardées lors de la modification de la largeur/hauteur. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Par défaut. Pour rogner l'image : Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui apparaissent sur les coins de l'image et au milieu de chaque côté. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez déplacer le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage pour qu'il se transforme en icône et faire glisser la zone. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir ou Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix : Si vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le poiunteur de la soiris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée. Pour faire pivoter l'image : sélectionnez l'image que vous souhaitez faire pivoter avec la souris, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite, dans la section Rotation, cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l’image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l’image verticalement (à l'envers) Remarque : vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur l'image et utiliser l'option Faire pivoter dans le menu contextuel. Pour remplacer l'image insérée, sélectionnez l'image insérée avec la souris, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite, cliquez sur le bouton Remplacer l'image, choisissez l'option nécessaire : D'un fichier ou D'une URL et sélectionnez l'image désirée. Remarque : vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur l'image et utiliser l'option Remplacer l'image dans le menu contextuel. L'image sélectionnée sera remplacée. Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type du Ligne sa taille et sa couleur ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image. Ajuster les paramètres avancés de l'image Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre : L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes : Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer l'image derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple : insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), l'image se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension de l'image s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé l'image derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher le redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, l'image se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, l'image demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement de l'image si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image. Pour supprimer l'image insérée, cliquez sur celle-ci et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Affecter une macro à une image Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une image. Une fois la macro affectée, l'image apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro : Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'image et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK." + "body": "L'éditeur de classeurs vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires dans votre feuille de calcul. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insérer une image Pour insérer une image dans votre classeur, placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer l'image, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône l'icône Image de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir Dans l'éditeur en ligne, vous pouvez sélectionnez plusieurs images à la fois. l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK l'option Image de stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK Après cela, l'image sera ajouté à la feuille de calcul. Vous pouvez sauvegarder l'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Régler les paramètres de l'image Après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour spécifier les dimensions exactes de l'image: sélectionnez l'image avec la souris, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite, Dans la section Taille, définissez les valeurs Largeur et Hauteur requises. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Taille actuelle. Pour rogner l'image: Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui appairaient par chaque coin et sur les côtés. Faites glisser manuellement les pognées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez placer le curseur sur la bordure de la zone de rognage lorsque il se transforme en icône fléchée et faites glisser la zone. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Rogner à la forme, Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix: Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Rogner à la forme, l'image va s'ajuster à une certaine forme. Vous pouvez sélectionner la forme appropriée dans la galerie qui s'affiche lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'option Rogner à la forme. Vous pouvez toujours utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster pour choisir le façon d'ajuster votre image à la forme. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplissage, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent Pour faire pivoter l'image: sélectionnez l'image avec la souris, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite, dans la section Rotation, cliquez sur l'un des boutons: pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers) Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur l'image et utiliser l'option Faire pivoter dans le menu contextuel. Pour remplacer l'image insérée, sélectionnez l'image avec la souris, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de l'image sur la barre latérale droite, Cliquez sur le bouton Remplacer l'image, choisissez l'option appropriée: D'un fichier, À partir de l'espace de stockage ou D'une URL et sélectionnez l'image désirée. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur l'image et utiliser l'option Remplacer l'image dans le menu contextuel. L'image sélectionnée sera remplacée. Une fois l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de la forme deviendra aussi disponible à droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur et l'opacité de la Ligne ainsi que le type de la forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Sous l'onglet Paramètres de la forme, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Ajouter une ombre pour créer une zone ombrée autour de l'image. Ajuster les paramètres avancés de l'image Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés de l'image du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher les paramètres avancés. La fenêtre paramètres de l'image s'ouvre: L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants: Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l'image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l'image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l'image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes: Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placer l'image derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple: insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), l'image se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension de l'image s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé l'image derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher le redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, l'image se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, l'image demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement de l'image si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image. Pour supprimer l'image insérée, cliquez sur celle-ci et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Affecter une macro à une image Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une image. Une fois la macro affectée, l'image apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro: Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'image et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt ", - "body": "Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers. Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt, passez à l'onglet Insertion, cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt, placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite: Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme. Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage du graphique SmartArt. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que le graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options Prolonger ouTuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface du graphique SmartArt afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour accéder aux paramètres avancés." + "title": "Insérer des graphiques SmartArt", + "body": "Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Insérez des graphiques SmartArt ou modifiez des graphiques SmartArt qui ont été créés dans des logiciels d'éditeurs tiers. Pour ajouter un graphiques SmartArt, passez à l'onglet Insertion, cliquez sur le bouton SmartArt, placez le pointeur sur l'un des styles de mise en page disponibles, par ex. Liste ou Processus. sélectionnez le type de mise en page de la liste qui apparaît à droite de l'option du menu mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez sauvegarder un graphique SmartArt en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez personnaliser la configuration SmartArt sur le panneau à droite: Veuillez noter qu'il est possible de personnaliser les paramètres de couleur, style et forme. Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage du graphique SmartArt. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: Couleur de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à utiliser pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Remplissage en dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Personnaliser votre dégradé sans aucune contrainte. Cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme. pour ouvrir le menu Remplissage de la barre latérale sur la droite: Les options disponibles du menu: Style - choisissez Linéaire or Radial: Linéaire sert à remplir par un dégradé de gauche à droite, de bas en haut ou sous l'angle partant en direction définie. La fenêtre d'aperçu Direction affiche la couleur de dégradé sélectionnée, cliquez sur la flèche pour définir la direction du dégradé. Utilisez les paramètres Angle pour définir un angle précis du dégradé. Radial sert à remplir par un dégradé de forme circulaire entre le point de départ et le point d'arrivée. Point de dégradé est le point d'arrêt de d'une couleur et de la transition entre les couleurs. Utilisez le bouton Ajouter un point de dégradé ou le curseur de dégradé pour ajouter un point de dégradé. Vous pouvez ajouter 10 points de dégradé. Le nouveau arrêt de couleur n'affecte pas l'aspect actuel du dégradé. Utilisez le bouton Supprimer un point de dégradé pour supprimer un certain point de dégradé. Faites glisser le curseur de déragé pour changer l'emplacement des points de dégradé ou spécifiez la Position en pourcentage pour l'emplacement plus précis. Pour choisir la couleur au dégradé, cliquez sur l'arrêt concerné sur le curseur de dégradé, ensuite cliquez sur Couleur pour sélectionner la couleur appropriée. Image ou Texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage en sélectionnant l'image nécessaire sur votre portail. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan du graphique SmartArt, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire. Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles: Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que le graphique SmartArt, vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options Prolonger ouTuile depuis la liste déroulante. L'option Prolonger permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Tuile permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface du graphique SmartArt afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque: tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Prolonger, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés pour remplir l'espace intérieur du graphique SmartArt. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Trait - sert à régler la taille, la couleur et le type du contour du graphique SmartArt. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Pour modifier l'opacité du trait, saisissez la valeur manuellement ou utilisez la barre de curseur. Ajouter une ombre activez cette option pour ajouter une ombre portée à un graphique SmartArt. Cliquez sur Afficher les paramètres avancés pour accéder aux paramètres avancés." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm", @@ -2618,22 +2663,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Insérer des objets textuels", - "body": "Dans le Tableur pour attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique de la feuille de calcul, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Ajouter un objet textuel Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la feuille de calcul. Pour le faire : passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel voulu : Pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de texte de la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. Remarque : il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme dans le groupe Formes de base. Pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte. cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir à la feuille de calcul. Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi). Comme un objet textuel inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte. Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé. Mettre en forme une zone de texte Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées). Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte manuellement, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme. Pour modifier le remplissage, le contourou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramèteres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale de droite et utilisez les options correspondantes. Pour organiser les zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, aligner plusieurs zones de texte les unes par rapport aux autres, faire pivoter ou retourner une zone de texte, cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utiliser les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez ensuite sur l'option Paramètres avancés de forme et passez à l'onglet Colonnes de la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés. Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées. Remarque : il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée. Ajustez les paramètres de mise en forme des polices (modifiez le type de police, la taille, la couleur et l'application des styles de décoration) à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Certains paramètres de police supplémentaires peuvent également être modifiés dans l'onglet Police de la fenêtre des propriétés de paragraphe. Pour y accéder, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte dans la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe. Alignez le texte horizontalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés . Alignez le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte et choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas. Faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut). Créez une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Puces et numérotation dans le menu contextuel, puis choisissez l'un des caractères à puce ou des styles de numérotation disponibles. L'option paramètres de la liste permet d'afficher la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste où on peut configurer les paramètres de la liste appropriée : Type (à puces) - permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur Nouvelle puce, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître où vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Veuillez consulter cet article pour en savoir plus sur utilisation des symboles. Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle image, un nouveau champ Importer s'ouvre dans lequel vous pouvez choisir de nouvelles images pour les puces A partir d'un fichier, A partir d'une URL, ou A partir de l'espace de stockage. Type (Numéroté) - permet de sélectionner la mise en forme appropriée des éléments de la liste numérotée. Taille - permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros en fonction de la talle actuelle du texte. La taille peut être configuré de 25% à 400%. Couleur - permet de choisir la couleur des puces/numéros. Vous pouvez choisir une des couleurs de thème, ou des couleurs standard de la palette ou définissez la Couleur personnalisée. Commencer par sert à spécifier le numéro à partir duquel vous voulez commencer la numérotation. insérer un lien hypertexte Définissez l'espacement des lignes et des paragraphes pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte à l'aide de l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe de la barre latérale de droite qui s'ouvre si vous cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du paragraphe . Spécifiez l'interligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et le précédent ou le suivant. Interligne - réglez la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe. Vous pouvez choisir parmi deux options : Multiple (sert à régler l'interligne exprimée en nombre supérieur à 1), Exactement (sert à définir l'interligne fixe). Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Espacement de paragraphe - définissez l'espace entre les paragraphes. Avant - réglez la taille de l'espace avant le paragraphe. Après - réglez la taille de l'espace après le paragraphe. Remarque : on peut configurer les mêmes paramètres dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés. Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe Modifiez les paramètres avancés du paragraphe (vous pouvez configurer les retraits du paragraphe ou les taquets de tabulation pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte et modifier quelques paramètres de mise en forme de la police) Placer le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix - l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe devient actif sur la barre latérale droite. Appuyez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit dans la zone de texte et utiliser l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe dans le menu contextuel. La fenêtre paramètres du paragraphe s'ouvre : L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de : modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe, modifier les retraits du paragraphe par rapport aux marges internes de la zone de texte, A gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, A droite - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne droite de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Spécial - spécifier le retrait de première ligne du paragraphe : sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu, modifiez l'interligne du paragraphe. L'onglet Police comporte les paramètres suivants : Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. L'option Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les fractions. L'option Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement des caractères sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous. L'onglet Tabulation vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation c'est-à-dire l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier. La tabulation Par défaut est 2.54 cm. Vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer cette valeur en utilisant les boutons à flèche ou en saisissant la valeur nécessaire dans le champ. Position sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons à flèche et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisée sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ au-dessous. Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option A gauche, Au centre ou A droite dans la liste déroulante et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. A gauche - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation ; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Au centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation. A droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation ; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Pour supprimer un taquet de tabulation de la liste sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou Supprimer tout. Affecter une macro à une zone de texte Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une zone de texte. Une fois la macro affectée, la zone de texte apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro : Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK. Modifier un style Text Art Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale de droite. Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police différent, une autre taille, etc. Changez le remplissage et le contour de police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques. Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose." + "body": "L'éditeur de classeurs permet d'attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique de la feuille de calcul, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police et une couleur prédéfinis permettant d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Ajouter un objet textuel Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la feuille de calcul. Pour ce faire: passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel voulu: pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de texte de la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte. Il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez la forme d'insertion du texte dans le groupe Formes de base. pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art de la barre d'outils supérieure, ensuite cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté au centre de la feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte. cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir à la feuille de calcul. Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi). Comme un objet textuel inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte. Vous pouvez sauvegarder un objet textuel en tant qu'image sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer en tant qu'image dans le menu contextuel. Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé. Mettre en forme une zone de texte Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées). Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte manuellement, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme. pour modifier le remplissage, le contour ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale sur la droite et utilisez les options correspondantes. pour organiser les zones de texte par rapport à d'autres objets, aligner plusieurs zones de texte les unes par rapport aux autres, faire pivoter ou retourner une zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de texte et utiliser les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. pour créer des colonnes de texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de la zone de texte, cliquez ensuite sur l'option Paramètres avancés de forme et passez à l'onglet Colonnes dans la fenêtre Forme - Paramètres avancés. Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées. Il est également possible de modifier la mise en forme du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à chaque fragment du texte sélectionnée à part. Ajustez les paramètres de mise en forme des polices (modifiez le type de police, la taille, la couleur et l'application des styles de décoration) à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Certains paramètres de police supplémentaires peuvent également être modifiés dans l'onglet Police de la fenêtre des propriétés de paragraphe. Pour y accéder, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte dans la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe. Alignez le texte horizontalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure ou dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés . Alignez le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte et choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas. Faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles: Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut). Créez une liste à puces ou une liste numérotée. Pour ce faire, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Puces et numérotation dans le menu contextuel, puis choisissez l'un des caractères à puce ou des styles de numérotation disponibles. L'option paramètres de la liste permet d'afficher la fenêtre Paramètres de la liste où on peut configurer les paramètres de la liste appropriée: Type (à puces) - permet de sélectionner le caractère approprié pour les éléments de la liste. Lorsque vous appuyez sur Nouvelle puce, la fenêtre Symbole va apparaître où vous pouvez choisir parmi les caractères disponibles. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des symboles, veuillez consulter cette page. Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'option Nouvelle image, un nouveau champ Importer s'ouvre dans lequel vous pouvez choisir de nouvelles images pour les puces À partir d'un fichier, À partir d'une URL, ou À partir de l'espace de stockage. Type (Numéroté) - permet de sélectionner la mise en forme appropriée des éléments de la liste numérotée. Taille - permet d'ajuster la taille des puces/numéros en fonction de la talle actuelle du texte. La taille peut être configuré de 25% à 400%. Couleur - permet de choisir la couleur des puces/numéros. Vous pouvez choisir une des couleurs de thème, ou des couleurs standard de la palette ou définissez la Couleur personnalisée. Commencer par sert à spécifier le numéro à partir duquel vous voulez commencer la numérotation. insérer un lien hypertexte Définissez l'espacement des lignes et des paragraphes pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte à l'aide de l'onglet Paramètres de paragraphe de la barre latérale de droite qui s'ouvre si vous cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de paragraphe . Spécifiez l'interligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe ainsi que les marges entre le paragraphe courant et le précédent ou le suivant. Interligne - réglez la hauteur de la ligne pour les lignes de texte dans le paragraphe. Vous pouvez choisir parmi deux options: multiple (sert à régler l'interligne exprimée en nombre supérieur à 1), exactement (sert à définir l'interligne fixe). Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Espacement de paragraphe - définissez l'espace entre les paragraphes. Avant - réglez la taille de l'espace avant le paragraphe. Après - réglez la taille de l'espace après le paragraphe. Ces paramètres sont également accessibles dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancées. Configurer les paramètres avancés du paragraphe Modifiez les paramètres avancés du paragraphe (vous pouvez configurer les retraits du paragraphe ou les taquets de tabulation pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte et modifier quelques paramètres de mise en forme de la police) Placer le curseur dans le paragraphe de votre choix - l'onglet Paramètres du paragraphe devient actif sur la barre latérale droite. Appuyez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit dans la zone de texte et utiliser l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe dans le menu contextuel. La fenêtre paramètres du paragraphe s'ouvre: L'onglet Retrait et emplacement permet de: modifier le type d'alignement du paragraphe, modifier les retraits du paragraphe par rapport aux marges internes de la zone de texte, A gauche - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne gauche de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, A droite - spécifiez le décalage du paragraphe de la marge interne droite de la zone de texte et saisissez la valeur numérique appropriée, Spécial - spécifier le retrait de la première ligne du paragraphe: sélectionnez l'élément approprié du menu ((aucun), Première ligne, Suspendu) et modifiez la valeur numérique par défaut pour les options Première ligne ou Suspendu, modifiez l'interligne du paragraphe. L'onglet Police comporte les paramètres suivants: Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. L'option Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les fractions. L'option Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, comme par exemple dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement des caractères sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous. L'onglet Tabulation vous permet de changer des taquets de tabulation c'est-à-dire l'emplacement où le curseur s'arrête quand vous appuyez sur la touche Tab du clavier. La tabulation Par défaut est 2.54 cm. Vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer cette valeur en utilisant les boutons à flèche ou en saisissant la valeur nécessaire dans le champ. Position sert à personnaliser les taquets de tabulation. Saisissez la valeur nécessaire dans ce champ, réglez-la en utilisant les boutons fléchés et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. La position du taquet de tabulation personnalisée sera ajoutée à la liste dans le champ au-dessous. Alignement sert à définir le type d'alignement pour chaque taquet de tabulation de la liste. Sélectionnez le taquet nécessaire dans la liste, choisissez l'option A gauche, Au centre ou A droite dans la liste déroulante et cliquez sur le bouton Spécifier. A gauche - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté gauche du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à droite du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Au centre - sert à centrer le texte à l'emplacement du taquet de tabulation. A droite - sert à aligner le texte sur le côté droit du taquet de tabulation; le texte se déplace à gauche du taquet de tabulation quand vous saisissez le texte. Pour supprimer un taquet de tabulation de la liste sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou Supprimer tout. Affecter une macro à une zone de texte Pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul, vous pouvez affecter une macro à une zone de texte. Une fois la macro affectée, la zone de texte apparaît ainsi comme un bouton de contrôle et vous pouvez lancer la macro par un clic dessus. Pour affecter une macro: Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la zone de texte et sélectionnez l'option Affecter une macro dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Affecter une macro s'affiche. Sélectionnez la macro dans la liste ou saisissez le nom et cliquez sur OK. Modifier un style Text Art Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres de Text Art dans la barre latérale sur la droite. Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un autre type de police, une autre taille, etc. Changez le remplissage et le contourde police. Les options disponibles sont les mêmes que pour les formes automatiques. Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le niveau de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm", "title": "Gérer des feuilles de calcul", - "body": "Par défaut, un classeur nouvellement créé contient une feuille de calcul. Le moyen le plus simple d'en ajouter dans le Tableur une est de cliquer sur le bouton Plus situé à la droite des boutons de Navigation de feuille dans le coin inférieur gauche. Une autre façon d'ajouter une nouvelle feuille est : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul après laquelle vous souhaitez insérer une nouvelle feuille, sélectionnez l'option Insérer depuis le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle feuille de calcul sera insérée après la feuille sélectionnée. Pour activer la feuille requise, utilisez les onglets de la feuille dans le coin inférieur gauche de chaque feuille de calcul. Remarque : pour trouver la feuille que vous cherchez si vous en avez beaucoup, utilisez les boutons de Navigation de feuille situés dans le coin inférieur gauche. Pour supprimer une feuille de calcul inutile : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à supprimer, sélectionnez l'option Supprimer depuis le menu contextuel. La feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera supprimée à partir du classeur actuel. Pour renommer une feuille de calcul : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à renommer, sélectionnez l'option Renommer depuis le menu contextuel, saisissez le Nom de feuille dans la fenêtre de dialogue et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Le nom de la feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera modifiée. Pour copier une feuille de calcul : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à copier, sélectionnez l'option Copier depuis le menu contextuel, sélectionnez la feuille de calcul avant laquelle vous souhaitez insérer la copie ou utilisez l'option Copier à la fin pour insérer la feuille de calcul copiée après toutes les feuilles existantes, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour confirmer votre choix. ou maintenez la touche CTRL et faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille vers la droite pour le dupliquer et déplacez la copie à l'emplacement nécaissaire. La feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera copiée et insérée à l'endroit choisi. Pour déplacer une feuille de calcul : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à déplacer, sélectionnez l'option Déplacer depuis le menu contextuel, sélectionnez la feuille de calcul avant laquelle vous souhaitez insérer la feuille de calcul sélectionnée ou utilisez l'option Déplacer à la fin pour déplacer la feuille de caclul sélectionnée après toutes les feuilles existantes, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour confirmer votre choix. Ou tout simplement faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul et déposez-le là où vous voulez. La feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera déplacée. Vous pouvez également déplacer une feuille de calcul entre des classeurs manuellement par glisser-déposer. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez la feuille de calcul à déplacer et faites-la glisser vers la barre d'onglets des feuilles dans un autre classeur. Par exemple, vous pouvez glisser une feuille de calcul de l'éditeur en ligne vers l'éditeur de bureau : Dans ce cas-ci, la feuille de calcul dans le classeur d'origine sera supprimée. Si vous avez beaucoup de feuilles de calcul, pour faciliter le travail vous pouvez masquer certains d'entre eux dont vous n'avez pas besoin pour l'instant. Pour ce faire, faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à copier, sélectionnez l'option Masquer depuis le menu contextuel. Pour afficher l'onglet de la feuille de calcul masquée, faites un clic droit sur n'importe quel onglet de la feuille, ouvrez la liste Masquée et sélectionnez le nom de la feuille de calcul dont l'onglet vous souhaitez afficher. Pour différencier les feuilles, vous pouvez affecter différentes couleurs aux onglets de la feuille. Pour ce faire, faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à colorer, sélectionnez l'option Couleur d'onglet depuis le menu contextuel. sélectionnez une couleur dans les palettes disponibles Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'onglet sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu. Vous pouvez travaillez simultanément sur plusieurs feuilles de calcul : sélectionnez la première feuille à inclure dans le groupe, appuyez et maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée pour choisir plusieurs feuilles adjacentes, ou utilisez la touche Ctrl pour choisir les feuilles non adjacentes. faites un clic droit sur un des onglets de feuille choisis pour ouvrir le menu contextuel, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Insérer sert à insérer le même nombre de feuilles de calcul vierges que dans le groupe choisi, Supprimer sert à supprimer toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois (il n'est pas possible de supprimer toutes les feuilles du classeur car un classeur doit contenir au moins une feuille visible), Renommer cette option ne s'applique qu'à chaque feuille individuelle, Copier sert à copier toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois et les coller à un endroit précis. Déplacer sert à déplacer toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois et les coller à un endroit précis. Masquer sert à masquer toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois (il n'est pas possible de masquer toutes les feuilles du classeur car un classeur doit contenir au moins une feuille visible), Couleur d'onglet sert à affecter la même couleur à tous les onglets de feuilles à la fois, Sélectionner toutes les feuilles sert à sélectionner toutes les feuilles du classeur actuel, Dissocier les feuilles sert à dissocier les feuilles sélectionnées. Il est aussi possible de dissocier les feuilles en faisant un double clic sur n'importe quel onglet de feuille du groupe ou en cliquant sur l'onglet de feuille qui ne fait pas partie du groupe." + "body": "Par défaut, un classeur nouvellement créé contient une feuille de calcul. Le moyen le plus simple d'en ajouter dans le Tableur une est de cliquer sur le bouton Plus situé à la droite des boutons de Navigation de feuille dans le coin inférieur gauche. Une autre façon d'ajouter une nouvelle feuille est : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul après laquelle vous souhaitez insérer une nouvelle feuille, sélectionnez l'option Insérer depuis le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle feuille de calcul sera insérée après la feuille sélectionnée. Pour activer la feuille requise, utilisez les onglets de la feuille dans le coin inférieur gauche de chaque feuille de calcul. Remarque : pour trouver la feuille que vous cherchez si vous en avez beaucoup, utilisez les boutons de Navigation de feuille situés dans le coin inférieur gauche. Pour supprimer une feuille de calcul inutile : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à supprimer, sélectionnez l'option Supprimer depuis le menu contextuel. La feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera supprimée à partir du classeur actuel. Pour renommer une feuille de calcul : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à renommer, sélectionnez l'option Renommer depuis le menu contextuel, saisissez le Nom de feuille dans la fenêtre de dialogue et cliquez sur le bouton OK. Le nom de la feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera modifiée. Pour copier une feuille de calcul : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à copier, sélectionnez l'option Copier depuis le menu contextuel, sélectionnez la feuille de calcul avant laquelle vous souhaitez insérer la copie ou utilisez l'option Copier à la fin pour insérer la feuille de calcul copiée après toutes les feuilles existantes, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour confirmer votre choix. ou maintenez la touche CTRL et faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille vers la droite pour le dupliquer et déplacez la copie à l'emplacement nécessaire. La feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera copiée et insérée à l'endroit choisi. Pour déplacer une feuille de calcul : faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à déplacer, sélectionnez l'option Déplacer depuis le menu contextuel, sélectionnez la feuille de calcul avant laquelle vous souhaitez insérer la feuille de calcul sélectionnée ou utilisez l'option Déplacer à la fin pour déplacer la feuille de calcul sélectionnée après toutes les feuilles existantes, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour confirmer votre choix. Ou tout simplement faites glisser l'onglet de la feuille de calcul et déposez-le là où vous voulez. La feuille de calcul sélectionnée sera déplacée. Vous pouvez également déplacer une feuille de calcul entre des classeurs manuellement par glisser-déposer. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez la feuille de calcul à déplacer et faites-la glisser vers la barre d'onglets des feuilles dans un autre classeur. Par exemple, vous pouvez glisser une feuille de calcul de l'éditeur en ligne vers l'éditeur de bureau : Dans ce cas-ci, la feuille de calcul dans le classeur d'origine sera supprimée. Si vous avez beaucoup de feuilles de calcul, pour faciliter le travail vous pouvez masquer certains d'entre eux dont vous n'avez pas besoin pour l'instant. Pour ce faire, faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à copier, sélectionnez l'option Masquer depuis le menu contextuel. Pour afficher l'onglet de la feuille de calcul masquée, faites un clic droit sur n'importe quel onglet de la feuille, ouvrez la liste Masquée et sélectionnez le nom de la feuille de calcul dont l'onglet vous souhaitez afficher. Pour différencier les feuilles, vous pouvez affecter différentes couleurs aux onglets de la feuille. Pour ce faire, faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à colorer, sélectionnez l'option Couleur d'onglet depuis le menu contextuel, sélectionnez une couleur dans les palettes disponibles. Couleurs de thème - les couleurs qui correspondent à la palette de couleurs sélectionnée de la feuille de calcul. Couleurs standard - le jeu de couleurs par défaut. Couleur personnalisée - choisissez cette option si il n'y a pas de couleur nécessaire dans les palettes disponibles. Sélectionnez la gamme de couleurs nécessaire en déplaçant le curseur vertical et définissez la couleur spécifique en faisant glisser le sélecteur de couleur dans le grand champ de couleur carré. Une fois que vous sélectionnez une couleur avec le sélecteur de couleur, les valeurs de couleur appropriées RGB et sRGB seront affichées dans les champs à droite. Vous pouvez également spécifier une couleur sur la base du modèle de couleur RGB en entrant les valeurs numériques nécessaires dans les champs R, G, B (rouge, vert, bleu) ou saisir le code hexadécimal dans le champ sRGB marqué par le signe #. La couleur sélectionnée apparaît dans la case de prévisualisation Nouveau. Si l'objet a déjà été rempli d'une couleur personnalisée, cette couleur sera affichée dans la case Actuel que vous puissiez comparer les couleurs originales et modifiées. Lorsque la couleur est spécifiée, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter : La couleur personnalisée sera appliquée à l'onglet sélectionné et sera ajoutée dans la palette Couleur personnalisée du menu. Vous pouvez travaillez simultanément sur plusieurs feuilles de calcul : sélectionnez la première feuille à inclure dans le groupe, appuyez et maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée pour choisir plusieurs feuilles adjacentes, ou utilisez la touche Ctrl pour choisir les feuilles non adjacentes. faites un clic droit sur un des onglets de feuille choisis pour ouvrir le menu contextuel, sélectionnez l'option convenable du menu : Insérer sert à insérer le même nombre de feuilles de calcul vierges que dans le groupe choisi, Supprimer sert à supprimer toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois (il n'est pas possible de supprimer toutes les feuilles du classeur car un classeur doit contenir au moins une feuille visible), Renommer cette option ne s'applique qu'à chaque feuille individuelle, Copier sert à copier toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois et les coller à un endroit précis. Déplacer sert à déplacer toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois et les coller à un endroit précis. Masquer sert à masquer toutes les feuilles sélectionnées à la fois (il n'est pas possible de masquer toutes les feuilles du classeur car un classeur doit contenir au moins une feuille visible), Couleur d'onglet sert à affecter la même couleur à tous les onglets de feuilles à la fois, Sélectionner toutes les feuilles sert à sélectionner toutes les feuilles du classeur actuel, Dissocier les feuilles sert à dissocier les feuilles sélectionnées. Il est aussi possible de dissocier les feuilles en faisant un double clic sur n'importe quel onglet de feuille du groupe ou en cliquant sur l'onglet de feuille qui ne fait pas partie du groupe." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm", "title": "Manipuler des objets", - "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez redimensionner, arranger des formes, des images et des graphiques insérés dans votre classeur. Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Redimensionner des objets Pour changer la taille d'une forme automatique/image/graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de l'objet. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Remarque : pour redimensionner des graphiques et des images vous pouvez également utiliser la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer il vous suffit de sélectionner un objet avec la souris. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du graphique ou Paramètres de l'image à droite. Déplacer des objets Pour modifier la position d'une forme automatique/image/graphique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'objet. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Pour déplacer l'objet par incrément équivaut à un pixel, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer l'objet strictement à l'horizontale/verticale et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée lors du glissement. Faire pivoter des objets Pour faire pivoter manuellement une forme automatique/image, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou vers la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Pour faire pivoter une forme ou une image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre/dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou le retourner horizontalement/verticalement, vous pouvez utiliser la section Rotation de la barre latérale droite qui sera activée lorsque vous aurez sélectionné l'objet nécessaire. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme ou Paramètres de l'image à droite. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'objet horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'objet verticalement (à l'envers) Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'image ou la forme, de choisir l'option Faire pivoter dans le menu contextuel, puis d'utiliser une des options de rotation disponibles. Pour faire pivoter une forme ou une image selon un angle exactement spécifié, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés dans la barre latérale droite et utilisez l'onglet Rotation de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire mesurée en degrés dans le champ Angle et cliquez sur OK. Modifier des formes automatiques Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des Flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle vous permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier une forme, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Modifier les points dans le menu contextuel. Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer : Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité. Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu. Aligner des objets Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés les uns par rapport aux autres, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les objets avec la souris, puis cliquez sur l'icône Aligner dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'alignement souhaité dans la liste : Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord gauche de l'objet le plus à gauche, Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets l'un par rapport à l'autre par leurs centres, Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord droit de l'objet le plus à droite, Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord supérieur de l'objet le plus haut, Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets l'un par rapport à l'autre par leur milieu, Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord inférieur de l'objet le plus bas. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options d'alignement disponibles. Remarque  : les options d'alignement sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. Distribuer des objets Pour distribuer horizontalement ou verticalement trois ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés entre deux objets sélectionnés les plus à l'extérieur de manière à ce que la distance égale apparaisse entre eux, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type de distribution nécessaire dans la liste : Distribuer horizontalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les objets sélectionnés les plus à gauche et les plus à droite. Distribuer verticalement - pour répartir les objets de façon égale entre les objets sélectionnés les plus en haut et les plus en bas. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles. Remarque  : les options de distribution sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de trois objets. Grouper plusieurs objets Pour manipuler plusieurs objets à la fois, vous pouvez les grouper. Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les objets avec la souris, puis cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Grouper dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option voulue depuis la liste : Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique. Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné d'objets préalablement combinés. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier. Remarque  : l'option Grouper est désactivée si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. L'option Dégrouper n'est disponible que lorsqu'un groupe des objets précédemment joints est sélectionné. Organiser plusieurs objets Pour organiser l'objet ou les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes Déplacer vers l'avant et Envoyer vers l'arrière dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'ordre voulu dans la liste. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Déplacer vers l'avant dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'organisation appropriée dans la liste : Mettre au premier plan pour placer l'objet ou les objets devant tous les autres, Déplacer vers l'avant pour déplacer l'objet ou les objets d'un niveau vers l'avant. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Envoyer vers l'arrière dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'organisation appropriée dans la liste : Mettre en arrière plan pour placer l'objet ou les objets derrière tous les autres, Reculer pour déplacer l'objet ou les objets d'un niveau vers l'arrière. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Organiser dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles." + "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez redimensionner, arranger des formes, des images et des graphiques insérés dans votre classeur. Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Redimensionner des objets Pour changer la taille d'une forme automatique/image/graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de l'objet. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Remarque : pour redimensionner des graphiques et des images vous pouvez également utiliser la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer il vous suffit de sélectionner un objet avec la souris. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres du graphique ou Paramètres de l'image à droite. Déplacer des objets Pour modifier la position d'une forme automatique/image/graphique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'objet. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Pour déplacer l'objet par incrément équivaut à un pixel, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer l'objet strictement à l'horizontale/verticale et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée lors du glissement. Faire pivoter des objets Pour faire pivoter manuellement une forme automatique/image, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou vers la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Shift enfoncée. Pour faire pivoter une forme ou une image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre/dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou le retourner horizontalement/verticalement, vous pouvez utiliser la section Rotation de la barre latérale droite qui sera activée lorsque vous aurez sélectionné l'objet nécessaire. Pour l'ouvrir, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de la forme ou Paramètres de l'image à droite. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l'objet de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l'objet horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l'objet verticalement (à l'envers) Il est également possible de cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'image ou la forme, de choisir l'option Faire pivoter dans le menu contextuel, puis d'utiliser une des options de rotation disponibles. Pour faire pivoter une forme ou une image selon un angle exactement spécifié, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés dans la barre latérale droite et utilisez l'onglet Rotation de la fenêtre Paramètres avancés. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire mesurée en degrés dans le champ Angle et cliquez sur OK. Modifier des formes automatiques Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des Flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle vous permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier une forme, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Modifier les points dans le menu contextuel. Modifier les points sert à personnaliser ou modifier le contour d'une forme. Pour activer les points d'ancrage modifiables, faites un clic droit sur la forme et sélectionnez Modifier les points dans le menu. Les carrés noirs qui apparaissent sont les points de rencontre entre deux lignes et la ligne rouge trace le contour de la forme. Cliquez sur l'un de ces points et faites-le glisser pour repositionner et modifier le contour de la forme. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le point d'ancrage, deux lignes bleus avec des carrés blanches apparaissent. Ce sont les points de contrôle Bézier permettant de créer une courbe et de modifier la finesse de la courbe. Autant que les points d'ancrage sont actifs, vous pouvez les modifier et supprimer : Pour ajouter un point de contrôle à une forme, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur l'emplacement du point de contrôle souhaité. Pour supprimer un point, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur le point superflu. Aligner des objets Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés les uns par rapport aux autres, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les objets avec la souris, puis cliquez sur l'icône Aligner dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'alignement souhaité dans la liste : Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord gauche de l'objet le plus à gauche, Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets l'un par rapport à l'autre par leurs centres, Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord droit de l'objet le plus à droite, Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord supérieur de l'objet le plus haut, Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets l'un par rapport à l'autre par leur milieu, Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres par le bord inférieur de l'objet le plus bas. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options d'alignement disponibles. Remarque  : les options d'alignement sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. Distribuer des objets Pour distribuer horizontalement ou verticalement trois ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés entre deux objets sélectionnés les plus à l'extérieur de manière à ce que la distance égale apparaisse entre eux, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type de distribution nécessaire dans la liste : Distribuer horizontalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les objets sélectionnés les plus à gauche et les plus à droite. Distribuer verticalement - pour répartir les objets de façon égale entre les objets sélectionnés les plus en haut et les plus en bas. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles. Remarque  : les options de distribution sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de trois objets. Grouper plusieurs objets Pour manipuler plusieurs objets à la fois, vous pouvez les grouper. Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les objets avec la souris, puis cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Grouper dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option voulue depuis la liste : Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique. Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné d'objets préalablement combinés. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier. Remarque  : l'option Grouper est désactivée si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. L'option Dégrouper n'est disponible que lorsqu'un groupe des objets précédemment joints est sélectionné. Organiser plusieurs objets Pour organiser l'objet ou les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes Déplacer vers l'avant et Envoyer vers l'arrière dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'ordre voulu dans la liste. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Déplacer vers l'avant dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'organisation appropriée dans la liste : Mettre au premier plan pour placer l'objet ou les objets devant tous les autres, Déplacer vers l'avant pour déplacer l'objet ou les objets d'un niveau vers l'avant. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Envoyer vers l'arrière dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'organisation appropriée dans la liste : Mettre en arrière plan pour placer l'objet ou les objets derrière tous les autres, Reculer pour déplacer l'objet ou les objets d'un niveau vers l'arrière. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Organiser dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "title": "Fonctionnalités de correction automatique", - "body": "Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique dans l'Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus. Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique. La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend trois onglets : AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. AutoMaths Lorsque vous travailler dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque. Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé. Remarque : Les codes sont sensibles à la casse Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques. Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer. Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier. Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones : le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Remplacer. Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste. Cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine. Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe. Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous le codes disponibles dans le Tableur à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier dans les Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification Les codes disponibles Code Symbole Catégorie !! Symboles ... Dots :: Opérateurs := Opérateurs /< Opérateurs relationnels /> Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels \\above Indices et exposants \\acute Accentuation \\aleph Lettres hébraïques \\alpha Lettres grecques \\Alpha Lettres grecques \\amalg Opérateurs binaires \\angle Notation de géométrie \\aoint Intégrales \\approx Opérateurs relationnels \\asmash Flèches \\ast Opérateurs binaires \\asymp Opérateurs relationnels \\atop Opérateurs \\bar Trait suscrit/souscrit \\Bar Accentuation \\because Opérateurs relationnels \\begin Séparateurs \\below Indices et exposants \\bet Lettres hébraïques \\beta Lettres grecques \\Beta Lettres grecques \\beth Lettres hébraïques \\bigcap Grands opérateurs \\bigcup Grands opérateurs \\bigodot Grands opérateurs \\bigoplus Grands opérateurs \\bigotimes Grands opérateurs \\bigsqcup Grands opérateurs \\biguplus Grands opérateurs \\bigvee Grands opérateurs \\bigwedge Grands opérateurs \\binomial Équations \\bot Notations logiques \\bowtie Opérateurs relationnels \\box Symboles \\boxdot Opérateurs binaires \\boxminus Opérateurs binaires \\boxplus Opérateurs binaires \\bra Séparateurs \\break Symboles \\breve Accentuation \\bullet Opérateurs binaires \\cap Opérateurs binaires \\cbrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\cases Symboles \\cdot Opérateurs binaires \\cdots Dots \\check Accentuation \\chi Lettres grecques \\Chi Lettres grecques \\circ Opérateurs binaires \\close Séparateurs \\clubsuit Symboles \\coint Intégrales \\cong Opérateurs relationnels \\coprod Opérateurs mathématiques \\cup Opérateurs binaires \\dalet Lettres hébraïques \\daleth Lettres hébraïques \\dashv Opérateurs relationnels \\dd Lettres avec double barres \\Dd Lettres avec double barres \\ddddot Accentuation \\dddot Accentuation \\ddot Accentuation \\ddots Dots \\defeq Opérateurs relationnels \\degc Symboles \\degf Symboles \\degree Symboles \\delta Lettres grecques \\Delta Lettres grecques \\Deltaeq Opérateurs \\diamond Opérateurs binaires \\diamondsuit Symboles \\div Opérateurs binaires \\dot Accentuation \\doteq Opérateurs relationnels \\dots Dots \\doublea Lettres avec double barres \\doubleA Lettres avec double barres \\doubleb Lettres avec double barres \\doubleB Lettres avec double barres \\doublec Lettres avec double barres \\doubleC Lettres avec double barres \\doubled Lettres avec double barres \\doubleD Lettres avec double barres \\doublee Lettres avec double barres \\doubleE Lettres avec double barres \\doublef Lettres avec double barres \\doubleF Lettres avec double barres \\doubleg Lettres avec double barres \\doubleG Lettres avec double barres \\doubleh Lettres avec double barres \\doubleH Lettres avec double barres \\doublei Lettres avec double barres \\doubleI Lettres avec double barres \\doublej Lettres avec double barres \\doubleJ Lettres avec double barres \\doublek Lettres avec double barres \\doubleK Lettres avec double barres \\doublel Lettres avec double barres \\doubleL Lettres avec double barres \\doublem Lettres avec double barres \\doubleM Lettres avec double barres \\doublen Lettres avec double barres \\doubleN Lettres avec double barres \\doubleo Lettres avec double barres \\doubleO Lettres avec double barres \\doublep Lettres avec double barres \\doubleP Lettres avec double barres \\doubleq Lettres avec double barres \\doubleQ Lettres avec double barres \\doubler Lettres avec double barres \\doubleR Lettres avec double barres \\doubles Lettres avec double barres \\doubleS Lettres avec double barres \\doublet Lettres avec double barres \\doubleT Lettres avec double barres \\doubleu Lettres avec double barres \\doubleU Lettres avec double barres \\doublev Lettres avec double barres \\doubleV Lettres avec double barres \\doublew Lettres avec double barres \\doubleW Lettres avec double barres \\doublex Lettres avec double barres \\doubleX Lettres avec double barres \\doubley Lettres avec double barres \\doubleY Lettres avec double barres \\doublez Lettres avec double barres \\doubleZ Lettres avec double barres \\downarrow Flèches \\Downarrow Flèches \\dsmash Flèches \\ee Lettres avec double barres \\ell Symboles \\emptyset Ensemble de notations \\emsp Caractères d'espace \\end Séparateurs \\ensp Caractères d'espace \\epsilon Lettres grecques \\Epsilon Lettres grecques \\eqarray Symboles \\equiv Opérateurs relationnels \\eta Lettres grecques \\Eta Lettres grecques \\exists Notations logiques \\forall Notations logiques \\fraktura Fraktur \\frakturA Fraktur \\frakturb Fraktur \\frakturB Fraktur \\frakturc Fraktur \\frakturC Fraktur \\frakturd Fraktur \\frakturD Fraktur \\frakture Fraktur \\frakturE Fraktur \\frakturf Fraktur \\frakturF Fraktur \\frakturg Fraktur \\frakturG Fraktur \\frakturh Fraktur \\frakturH Fraktur \\frakturi Fraktur \\frakturI Fraktur \\frakturk Fraktur \\frakturK Fraktur \\frakturl Fraktur \\frakturL Fraktur \\frakturm Fraktur \\frakturM Fraktur \\frakturn Fraktur \\frakturN Fraktur \\frakturo Fraktur \\frakturO Fraktur \\frakturp Fraktur \\frakturP Fraktur \\frakturq Fraktur \\frakturQ Fraktur \\frakturr Fraktur \\frakturR Fraktur \\frakturs Fraktur \\frakturS Fraktur \\frakturt Fraktur \\frakturT Fraktur \\frakturu Fraktur \\frakturU Fraktur \\frakturv Fraktur \\frakturV Fraktur \\frakturw Fraktur \\frakturW Fraktur \\frakturx Fraktur \\frakturX Fraktur \\fraktury Fraktur \\frakturY Fraktur \\frakturz Fraktur \\frakturZ Fraktur \\frown Opérateurs relationnels \\funcapply Opérateurs binaires \\G Lettres grecques \\gamma Lettres grecques \\Gamma Lettres grecques \\ge Opérateurs relationnels \\geq Opérateurs relationnels \\gets Flèches \\gg Opérateurs relationnels \\gimel Lettres hébraïques \\grave Accentuation \\hairsp Caractères d'espace \\hat Accentuation \\hbar Symboles \\heartsuit Symboles \\hookleftarrow Flèches \\hookrightarrow Flèches \\hphantom Flèches \\hsmash Flèches \\hvec Accentuation \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Lettres avec double barres \\iiint Intégrales \\iint Intégrales \\iiiint Intégrales \\Im Symboles \\imath Symboles \\in Opérateurs relationnels \\inc Symboles \\infty Symboles \\int Intégrales \\integral Intégrales \\iota Lettres grecques \\Iota Lettres grecques \\itimes Opérateurs mathématiques \\j Symboles \\jj Lettres avec double barres \\jmath Symboles \\kappa Lettres grecques \\Kappa Lettres grecques \\ket Séparateurs \\lambda Lettres grecques \\Lambda Lettres grecques \\langle Séparateurs \\lbbrack Séparateurs \\lbrace Séparateurs \\lbrack Séparateurs \\lceil Séparateurs \\ldiv Barres obliques \\ldivide Barres obliques \\ldots Dots \\le Opérateurs relationnels \\left Séparateurs \\leftarrow Flèches \\Leftarrow Flèches \\leftharpoondown Flèches \\leftharpoonup Flèches \\leftrightarrow Flèches \\Leftrightarrow Flèches \\leq Opérateurs relationnels \\lfloor Séparateurs \\lhvec Accentuation \\limit Limites \\ll Opérateurs relationnels \\lmoust Séparateurs \\Longleftarrow Flèches \\Longleftrightarrow Flèches \\Longrightarrow Flèches \\lrhar Flèches \\lvec Accentuation \\mapsto Flèches \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Caractères d'espace \\mid Opérateurs relationnels \\middle Symboles \\models Opérateurs relationnels \\mp Opérateurs binaires \\mu Lettres grecques \\Mu Lettres grecques \\nabla Symboles \\naryand Opérateurs \\nbsp Caractères d'espace \\ne Opérateurs relationnels \\nearrow Flèches \\neq Opérateurs relationnels \\ni Opérateurs relationnels \\norm Séparateurs \\notcontain Opérateurs relationnels \\notelement Opérateurs relationnels \\notin Opérateurs relationnels \\nu Lettres grecques \\Nu Lettres grecques \\nwarrow Flèches \\o Lettres grecques \\O Lettres grecques \\odot Opérateurs binaires \\of Opérateurs \\oiiint Intégrales \\oiint Intégrales \\oint Intégrales \\omega Lettres grecques \\Omega Lettres grecques \\ominus Opérateurs binaires \\open Séparateurs \\oplus Opérateurs binaires \\otimes Opérateurs binaires \\over Séparateurs \\overbar Accentuation \\overbrace Accentuation \\overbracket Accentuation \\overline Accentuation \\overparen Accentuation \\overshell Accentuation \\parallel Notation de géométrie \\partial Symboles \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Notation de géométrie \\phantom Symboles \\phi Lettres grecques \\Phi Lettres grecques \\pi Lettres grecques \\Pi Lettres grecques \\pm Opérateurs binaires \\pppprime Nombres premiers \\ppprime Nombres premiers \\pprime Nombres premiers \\prec Opérateurs relationnels \\preceq Opérateurs relationnels \\prime Nombres premiers \\prod Opérateurs mathématiques \\propto Opérateurs relationnels \\psi Lettres grecques \\Psi Lettres grecques \\qdrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\quadratic Racine carrée et radicaux \\rangle Séparateurs \\Rangle Séparateurs \\ratio Opérateurs relationnels \\rbrace Séparateurs \\rbrack Séparateurs \\Rbrack Séparateurs \\rceil Séparateurs \\rddots Dots \\Re Symboles \\rect Symboles \\rfloor Séparateurs \\rho Lettres grecques \\Rho Lettres grecques \\rhvec Accentuation \\right Séparateurs \\rightarrow Flèches \\Rightarrow Flèches \\rightharpoondown Flèches \\rightharpoonup Flèches \\rmoust Séparateurs \\root Symboles \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Barres obliques \\sdivide Barres obliques \\searrow Flèches \\setminus Opérateurs binaires \\sigma Lettres grecques \\Sigma Lettres grecques \\sim Opérateurs relationnels \\simeq Opérateurs relationnels \\smash Flèches \\smile Opérateurs relationnels \\spadesuit Symboles \\sqcap Opérateurs binaires \\sqcup Opérateurs binaires \\sqrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\sqsubseteq Ensemble de notations \\sqsuperseteq Ensemble de notations \\star Opérateurs binaires \\subset Ensemble de notations \\subseteq Ensemble de notations \\succ Opérateurs relationnels \\succeq Opérateurs relationnels \\sum Opérateurs mathématiques \\superset Ensemble de notations \\superseteq Ensemble de notations \\swarrow Flèches \\tau Lettres grecques \\Tau Lettres grecques \\therefore Opérateurs relationnels \\theta Lettres grecques \\Theta Lettres grecques \\thicksp Caractères d'espace \\thinsp Caractères d'espace \\tilde Accentuation \\times Opérateurs binaires \\to Flèches \\top Notations logiques \\tvec Flèches \\ubar Accentuation \\Ubar Accentuation \\underbar Accentuation \\underbrace Accentuation \\underbracket Accentuation \\underline Accentuation \\underparen Accentuation \\uparrow Flèches \\Uparrow Flèches \\updownarrow Flèches \\Updownarrow Flèches \\uplus Opérateurs binaires \\upsilon Lettres grecques \\Upsilon Lettres grecques \\varepsilon Lettres grecques \\varphi Lettres grecques \\varpi Lettres grecques \\varrho Lettres grecques \\varsigma Lettres grecques \\vartheta Lettres grecques \\vbar Séparateurs \\vdash Opérateurs relationnels \\vdots Dots \\vec Accentuation \\vee Opérateurs binaires \\vert Séparateurs \\Vert Séparateurs \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Flèches \\vthicksp Caractères d'espace \\wedge Opérateurs binaires \\wp Symboles \\wr Opérateurs binaires \\xi Lettres grecques \\Xi Lettres grecques \\zeta Lettres grecques \\Zeta Lettres grecques \\zwnj Caractères d'espace \\zwsp Caractères d'espace ~= Opérateurs relationnels -+ Opérateurs binaires +- Opérateurs binaires << Opérateurs relationnels <= Opérateurs relationnels -> Flèches >= Opérateurs relationnels >> Opérateurs relationnels Fonctions reconnues Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnait comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Pour accéder à la liste de fonctions reconnues, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues. Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies. Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Par défaut, l'éditeur remplace des chemins d'accès à réseau et à Internet par des liens hypertexte lorsque vous saisissez les données dans une cellule. L'éditeur aussi inclut les nouvelles lignes et colonnes dans le tableau lorsque vous saisissez des nouvelles données dans la ligne au-dessous du tableaux ou dans la colonne à côté de celui-ci. Si vous souhaitez désactiver l'une des options de mise en forme automatique, désactivez la case à cocher de l'élément pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas de mise en forme automatique sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe" + "body": "Les fonctionnalités de correction automatique dans le Tableur ONLYOFFICE fournissent des options pour définir les éléments à mettre en forme automatiquement ou insérer des symboles mathématiques à remplacer les caractères reconnus. Toutes les options sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue appropriée. Pour y accéder, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique. La boîte de dialogue Correction automatique comprend trois onglets : AutoMaths, Fonctions reconnues et Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe. AutoMaths Lorsque vous travailler dans l'éditeur d'équations, vous pouvez insérer plusieurs symboles, accents et opérateurs mathématiques en tapant sur clavier plutôt que de les rechercher dans la bibliothèque. Dans l'éditeur d'équations, placez le point d'insertion dans l'espace réservé et tapez le code de correction mathématique, puis touchez la Barre d'espace. Le code que vous avez saisi, serait converti en symbole approprié mais l'espace est supprimé. Remarque : Les codes sont sensibles à la casse Vous pouvez ajouter, modifier, rétablir et supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> AutoMaths. Ajoutez un élément à la liste de corrections automatiques. Saisissez le code de correction automatique dans la zone Remplacer. Saisissez le symbole que vous souhaitez attribuer au code approprié dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Modifier un élément de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier. Vous pouvez modifier les informations dans toutes les deux zones : le code dans la zone Remplacer et le symbole dans la zone Par. Cliquez sur Remplacer. Supprimer les éléments de la liste de corrections automatiques. Sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez supprimer de la liste. Cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Tous les éléments que vous avez ajouté, seraient supprimés et toutes les modifications seraient annulées pour rétablir sa valeur d'origine. Pour désactiver la correction automatique mathématique et éviter les changements et les remplacements automatiques, il faut décocher la case Remplacer le texte au cours de la frappe. Le tableau ci-dessous affiche tous le codes disponibles dans le Tableur à présent. On peut trouver la liste complète de codes disponibles sous l'onglet Fichier dans les Paramètres avancés... -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification Les codes disponibles Code Symbole Catégorie !! Symboles ... Dots :: Opérateurs := Opérateurs /< Opérateurs relationnels /> Opérateurs relationnels /= Opérateurs relationnels \\above Indices et exposants \\acute Accentuation \\aleph Lettres hébraïques \\alpha Lettres grecques \\Alpha Lettres grecques \\amalg Opérateurs binaires \\angle Notation de géométrie \\aoint Intégrales \\approx Opérateurs relationnels \\asmash Flèches \\ast Opérateurs binaires \\asymp Opérateurs relationnels \\atop Opérateurs \\bar Trait suscrit/souscrit \\Bar Accentuation \\because Opérateurs relationnels \\begin Séparateurs \\below Indices et exposants \\bet Lettres hébraïques \\beta Lettres grecques \\Beta Lettres grecques \\beth Lettres hébraïques \\bigcap Grands opérateurs \\bigcup Grands opérateurs \\bigodot Grands opérateurs \\bigoplus Grands opérateurs \\bigotimes Grands opérateurs \\bigsqcup Grands opérateurs \\biguplus Grands opérateurs \\bigvee Grands opérateurs \\bigwedge Grands opérateurs \\binomial Équations \\bot Notations logiques \\bowtie Opérateurs relationnels \\box Symboles \\boxdot Opérateurs binaires \\boxminus Opérateurs binaires \\boxplus Opérateurs binaires \\bra Séparateurs \\break Symboles \\breve Accentuation \\bullet Opérateurs binaires \\cap Opérateurs binaires \\cbrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\cases Symboles \\cdot Opérateurs binaires \\cdots Dots \\check Accentuation \\chi Lettres grecques \\Chi Lettres grecques \\circ Opérateurs binaires \\close Séparateurs \\clubsuit Symboles \\coint Intégrales \\cong Opérateurs relationnels \\coprod Opérateurs mathématiques \\cup Opérateurs binaires \\dalet Lettres hébraïques \\daleth Lettres hébraïques \\dashv Opérateurs relationnels \\dd Lettres avec double barres \\Dd Lettres avec double barres \\ddddot Accentuation \\dddot Accentuation \\ddot Accentuation \\ddots Dots \\defeq Opérateurs relationnels \\degc Symboles \\degf Symboles \\degree Symboles \\delta Lettres grecques \\Delta Lettres grecques \\Deltaeq Opérateurs \\diamond Opérateurs binaires \\diamondsuit Symboles \\div Opérateurs binaires \\dot Accentuation \\doteq Opérateurs relationnels \\dots Dots \\doublea Lettres avec double barres \\doubleA Lettres avec double barres \\doubleb Lettres avec double barres \\doubleB Lettres avec double barres \\doublec Lettres avec double barres \\doubleC Lettres avec double barres \\doubled Lettres avec double barres \\doubleD Lettres avec double barres \\doublee Lettres avec double barres \\doubleE Lettres avec double barres \\doublef Lettres avec double barres \\doubleF Lettres avec double barres \\doubleg Lettres avec double barres \\doubleG Lettres avec double barres \\doubleh Lettres avec double barres \\doubleH Lettres avec double barres \\doublei Lettres avec double barres \\doubleI Lettres avec double barres \\doublej Lettres avec double barres \\doubleJ Lettres avec double barres \\doublek Lettres avec double barres \\doubleK Lettres avec double barres \\doublel Lettres avec double barres \\doubleL Lettres avec double barres \\doublem Lettres avec double barres \\doubleM Lettres avec double barres \\doublen Lettres avec double barres \\doubleN Lettres avec double barres \\doubleo Lettres avec double barres \\doubleO Lettres avec double barres \\doublep Lettres avec double barres \\doubleP Lettres avec double barres \\doubleq Lettres avec double barres \\doubleQ Lettres avec double barres \\doubler Lettres avec double barres \\doubleR Lettres avec double barres \\doubles Lettres avec double barres \\doubleS Lettres avec double barres \\doublet Lettres avec double barres \\doubleT Lettres avec double barres \\doubleu Lettres avec double barres \\doubleU Lettres avec double barres \\doublev Lettres avec double barres \\doubleV Lettres avec double barres \\doublew Lettres avec double barres \\doubleW Lettres avec double barres \\doublex Lettres avec double barres \\doubleX Lettres avec double barres \\doubley Lettres avec double barres \\doubleY Lettres avec double barres \\doublez Lettres avec double barres \\doubleZ Lettres avec double barres \\downarrow Flèches \\Downarrow Flèches \\dsmash Flèches \\ee Lettres avec double barres \\ell Symboles \\emptyset Ensemble de notations \\emsp Caractères d'espace \\end Séparateurs \\ensp Caractères d'espace \\epsilon Lettres grecques \\Epsilon Lettres grecques \\eqarray Symboles \\equiv Opérateurs relationnels \\eta Lettres grecques \\Eta Lettres grecques \\exists Notations logiques \\forall Notations logiques \\fraktura Fraktur \\frakturA Fraktur \\frakturb Fraktur \\frakturB Fraktur \\frakturc Fraktur \\frakturC Fraktur \\frakturd Fraktur \\frakturD Fraktur \\frakture Fraktur \\frakturE Fraktur \\frakturf Fraktur \\frakturF Fraktur \\frakturg Fraktur \\frakturG Fraktur \\frakturh Fraktur \\frakturH Fraktur \\frakturi Fraktur \\frakturI Fraktur \\frakturk Fraktur \\frakturK Fraktur \\frakturl Fraktur \\frakturL Fraktur \\frakturm Fraktur \\frakturM Fraktur \\frakturn Fraktur \\frakturN Fraktur \\frakturo Fraktur \\frakturO Fraktur \\frakturp Fraktur \\frakturP Fraktur \\frakturq Fraktur \\frakturQ Fraktur \\frakturr Fraktur \\frakturR Fraktur \\frakturs Fraktur \\frakturS Fraktur \\frakturt Fraktur \\frakturT Fraktur \\frakturu Fraktur \\frakturU Fraktur \\frakturv Fraktur \\frakturV Fraktur \\frakturw Fraktur \\frakturW Fraktur \\frakturx Fraktur \\frakturX Fraktur \\fraktury Fraktur \\frakturY Fraktur \\frakturz Fraktur \\frakturZ Fraktur \\frown Opérateurs relationnels \\funcapply Opérateurs binaires \\G Lettres grecques \\gamma Lettres grecques \\Gamma Lettres grecques \\ge Opérateurs relationnels \\geq Opérateurs relationnels \\gets Flèches \\gg Opérateurs relationnels \\gimel Lettres hébraïques \\grave Accentuation \\hairsp Caractères d'espace \\hat Accentuation \\hbar Symboles \\heartsuit Symboles \\hookleftarrow Flèches \\hookrightarrow Flèches \\hphantom Flèches \\hsmash Flèches \\hvec Accentuation \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Lettres avec double barres \\iiint Intégrales \\iint Intégrales \\iiiint Intégrales \\Im Symboles \\imath Symboles \\in Opérateurs relationnels \\inc Symboles \\infty Symboles \\int Intégrales \\integral Intégrales \\iota Lettres grecques \\Iota Lettres grecques \\itimes Opérateurs mathématiques \\j Symboles \\jj Lettres avec double barres \\jmath Symboles \\kappa Lettres grecques \\Kappa Lettres grecques \\ket Séparateurs \\lambda Lettres grecques \\Lambda Lettres grecques \\langle Séparateurs \\lbbrack Séparateurs \\lbrace Séparateurs \\lbrack Séparateurs \\lceil Séparateurs \\ldiv Barres obliques \\ldivide Barres obliques \\ldots Dots \\le Opérateurs relationnels \\left Séparateurs \\leftarrow Flèches \\Leftarrow Flèches \\leftharpoondown Flèches \\leftharpoonup Flèches \\leftrightarrow Flèches \\Leftrightarrow Flèches \\leq Opérateurs relationnels \\lfloor Séparateurs \\lhvec Accentuation \\limit Limites \\ll Opérateurs relationnels \\lmoust Séparateurs \\Longleftarrow Flèches \\Longleftrightarrow Flèches \\Longrightarrow Flèches \\lrhar Flèches \\lvec Accentuation \\mapsto Flèches \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Caractères d'espace \\mid Opérateurs relationnels \\middle Symboles \\models Opérateurs relationnels \\mp Opérateurs binaires \\mu Lettres grecques \\Mu Lettres grecques \\nabla Symboles \\naryand Opérateurs \\nbsp Caractères d'espace \\ne Opérateurs relationnels \\nearrow Flèches \\neq Opérateurs relationnels \\ni Opérateurs relationnels \\norm Séparateurs \\notcontain Opérateurs relationnels \\notelement Opérateurs relationnels \\notin Opérateurs relationnels \\nu Lettres grecques \\Nu Lettres grecques \\nwarrow Flèches \\o Lettres grecques \\O Lettres grecques \\odot Opérateurs binaires \\of Opérateurs \\oiiint Intégrales \\oiint Intégrales \\oint Intégrales \\omega Lettres grecques \\Omega Lettres grecques \\ominus Opérateurs binaires \\open Séparateurs \\oplus Opérateurs binaires \\otimes Opérateurs binaires \\over Séparateurs \\overbar Accentuation \\overbrace Accentuation \\overbracket Accentuation \\overline Accentuation \\overparen Accentuation \\overshell Accentuation \\parallel Notation de géométrie \\partial Symboles \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Notation de géométrie \\phantom Symboles \\phi Lettres grecques \\Phi Lettres grecques \\pi Lettres grecques \\Pi Lettres grecques \\pm Opérateurs binaires \\pppprime Nombres premiers \\ppprime Nombres premiers \\pprime Nombres premiers \\prec Opérateurs relationnels \\preceq Opérateurs relationnels \\prime Nombres premiers \\prod Opérateurs mathématiques \\propto Opérateurs relationnels \\psi Lettres grecques \\Psi Lettres grecques \\qdrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\quadratic Racine carrée et radicaux \\rangle Séparateurs \\Rangle Séparateurs \\ratio Opérateurs relationnels \\rbrace Séparateurs \\rbrack Séparateurs \\Rbrack Séparateurs \\rceil Séparateurs \\rddots Dots \\Re Symboles \\rect Symboles \\rfloor Séparateurs \\rho Lettres grecques \\Rho Lettres grecques \\rhvec Accentuation \\right Séparateurs \\rightarrow Flèches \\Rightarrow Flèches \\rightharpoondown Flèches \\rightharpoonup Flèches \\rmoust Séparateurs \\root Symboles \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Barres obliques \\sdivide Barres obliques \\searrow Flèches \\setminus Opérateurs binaires \\sigma Lettres grecques \\Sigma Lettres grecques \\sim Opérateurs relationnels \\simeq Opérateurs relationnels \\smash Flèches \\smile Opérateurs relationnels \\spadesuit Symboles \\sqcap Opérateurs binaires \\sqcup Opérateurs binaires \\sqrt Racine carrée et radicaux \\sqsubseteq Ensemble de notations \\sqsuperseteq Ensemble de notations \\star Opérateurs binaires \\subset Ensemble de notations \\subseteq Ensemble de notations \\succ Opérateurs relationnels \\succeq Opérateurs relationnels \\sum Opérateurs mathématiques \\superset Ensemble de notations \\superseteq Ensemble de notations \\swarrow Flèches \\tau Lettres grecques \\Tau Lettres grecques \\therefore Opérateurs relationnels \\theta Lettres grecques \\Theta Lettres grecques \\thicksp Caractères d'espace \\thinsp Caractères d'espace \\tilde Accentuation \\times Opérateurs binaires \\to Flèches \\top Notations logiques \\tvec Flèches \\ubar Accentuation \\Ubar Accentuation \\underbar Accentuation \\underbrace Accentuation \\underbracket Accentuation \\underline Accentuation \\underparen Accentuation \\uparrow Flèches \\Uparrow Flèches \\updownarrow Flèches \\Updownarrow Flèches \\uplus Opérateurs binaires \\upsilon Lettres grecques \\Upsilon Lettres grecques \\varepsilon Lettres grecques \\varphi Lettres grecques \\varpi Lettres grecques \\varrho Lettres grecques \\varsigma Lettres grecques \\vartheta Lettres grecques \\vbar Séparateurs \\vdash Opérateurs relationnels \\vdots Dots \\vec Accentuation \\vee Opérateurs binaires \\vert Séparateurs \\Vert Séparateurs \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Flèches \\vthicksp Caractères d'espace \\wedge Opérateurs binaires \\wp Symboles \\wr Opérateurs binaires \\xi Lettres grecques \\Xi Lettres grecques \\zeta Lettres grecques \\Zeta Lettres grecques \\zwnj Caractères d'espace \\zwsp Caractères d'espace ~= Opérateurs relationnels -+ Opérateurs binaires +- Opérateurs binaires << Opérateurs relationnels <= Opérateurs relationnels -> Flèches >= Opérateurs relationnels >> Opérateurs relationnels Fonctions reconnues Sous cet onglet, vous pouvez trouver les expressions mathématiques que l'éditeur d'équations reconnaît comme les fonctions et lesquelles ne seront pas mises en italique automatiquement. Pour accéder à la liste de fonctions reconnues, passez à l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Fonctions reconnues. Pour ajouter un élément à la liste de fonctions reconnues, saisissez la fonction dans le champ vide et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un élément de la liste de fonctions reconnues, sélectionnez la fonction à supprimer et appuyez sur Supprimer. Pour rétablir les éléments supprimés, sélectionnez l'élément que vous souhaitez rétablir dans la liste et appuyez sur Restaurer. Utilisez l'option Rétablir paramètres par défaut pour réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. Toutes les fonctions que vous avez ajoutées, seraient supprimées et celles qui ont été supprimées, seraient rétablies. Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe Par défaut, l'éditeur remplace des chemins d'accès à réseau et à Internet par des liens hypertexte lorsque vous saisissez les données dans une cellule. L'éditeur aussi inclut les nouvelles lignes et colonnes dans le tableau lorsque vous saisissez des nouvelles données dans la ligne au-dessous du tableaux ou dans la colonne à côté de celui-ci. Si vous souhaitez désactiver l'une des options de mise en forme automatique, désactivez la case à cocher de l'élément pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas de mise en forme automatique sous l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés -> Vérification de l'orthographe -> Vérification -> Correction automatique -> Mise en forme automatique au cours de la frappe" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm", @@ -2643,32 +2688,37 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "title": "Créer un nouveau classeur ou ouvrir un classeur existant", - "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez ouvrir une feuille de calcul modifiée récemment, créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou revenir à la liste des feuilles de calcul existantes.. Pour créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul Dans la version en ligne cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau. Dans l'éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Feuille de calcul dans la section Créer nouveau de la barre latérale gauche - un nouveau fichier s'ouvrira dans un nouvel onglet, une fois tous les changements nécessaires effectués, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans le coin supérieur gauche ou passez à l'onglet Fichier et choisissez l'élément de menu Enregistrer sous. dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionnez l'emplacement du fichier, spécifiez son nom, choisissez le format dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer la feuille de calcul (XLSX, Modèle de feuille de calcul (XLTX), ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF ou PDFA) et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir un document existant Dans l'éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Ouvrir fichier local dans la barre latérale gauche, choisissez la feuille de calcul nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la feuille de calcul nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionner l'option Ouvrir avec et choisir l'application nécessaire dans le menu. Si les fichiers de documents Office sont associés à l'application, vous pouvez également ouvrir les feuilles de calcul en double-cliquant sur le nom du fichier dans la fenêtre d'exploration de fichiers. Tous les répertoires auxquels vous avez accédé à l'aide de l'éditeur de bureau seront affichés dans la liste Dossiers récents afin que vous puissiez y accéder rapidement. Cliquez sur le dossier nécessaire pour sélectionner l'un des fichiers qui y sont stockés. Pour ouvrir une feuille de calcul récemment modifiée Dans la version en ligne cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent..., choisissez la feuille de calcul dont vous avez besoin dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Dans l'éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Fichiers récents dans la barre latérale gauche, choisissez la feuille de calcul dont vous avez besoin dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Pour renommer une feuille de calcul ouverte Dans l'éditeur en ligne cliquez sur le nom de la feuille de calcul en haut de la page, saisissez un nouveau nom de feuille de calcul, cliquez sur Enter afin d'accepter les modifications. Pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur de la version en ligne, dans la fenêtre de l'explorateur de fichiers de la version de bureau, cliquez sur l'icône Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier à droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur. Vous pouvez aussi passer à l'onglet Fichier sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner l'option Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier." + "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez ouvrir une feuille de calcul modifiée récemment, créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul ou revenir à la liste des feuilles de calcul existantes. Pour créer une nouvelle feuille de calcul Dans la version en ligne cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau. Dans l'éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Feuille de calcul dans la section Créer nouveau de la barre latérale gauche - un nouveau fichier s'ouvrira dans un nouvel onglet, une fois tous les changements nécessaires effectués, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans le coin supérieur gauche ou passez à l'onglet Fichier et choisissez l'élément de menu Enregistrer sous. dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionnez l'emplacement du fichier, spécifiez son nom, choisissez le format dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer la feuille de calcul (XLSX, Modèle de feuille de calcul (XLTX), ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF ou PDFA) et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir un document existant Dans l'éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Ouvrir fichier local dans la barre latérale gauche, choisissez la feuille de calcul nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la feuille de calcul nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionner l'option Ouvrir avec et choisir l'application nécessaire dans le menu. Si les fichiers de documents Office sont associés à l'application, vous pouvez également ouvrir les feuilles de calcul en double-cliquant sur le nom du fichier dans la fenêtre d'exploration de fichiers. Tous les répertoires auxquels vous avez accédé à l'aide de l'éditeur de bureau seront affichés dans la liste Dossiers récents afin que vous puissiez y accéder rapidement. Cliquez sur le dossier nécessaire pour sélectionner l'un des fichiers qui y sont stockés. Pour ouvrir une feuille de calcul récemment modifiée Dans la version en ligne cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent..., choisissez la feuille de calcul dont vous avez besoin dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Dans l'éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Fichiers récents dans la barre latérale gauche, choisissez la feuille de calcul dont vous avez besoin dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Pour renommer une feuille de calcul ouverte Dans l'éditeur en ligne cliquez sur le nom de la feuille de calcul en haut de la page, saisissez un nouveau nom de feuille de calcul, cliquez sur Entrée afin d'accepter les modifications. Pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur de la version en ligne, dans la fenêtre de l'explorateur de fichiers de la version de bureau, cliquez sur l'icône Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier à droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur. Vous pouvez aussi passer à l'onglet Fichier sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner l'option Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Password.htm", "title": "Protéger un classeur avec un mot de passe", - "body": "Vous pouvez contrôler l'accès à vos classeurs avec un mot de passe afin que tous les coauteurs puissent d'accéder en mode d'édition. On peut modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe, le cas échéant. Il y a deux façons de protéger votre classeur par un mot de passe : depuis l'onglet Protection ou depuis l'onglet Fichier. Il n'est pas possible de réinitialiser un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Définir un mot de passe depuis l'onglet Protection. passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur l'icône Chiffrer. dans la fenêtre Définir un mot de passe qui s'affiche, saisissez et confirmer le mot de passe que vous allez utilisez pour accéder à votre fichier. Cliquez sur OK pour valider.. le bouton Chiffrer de la barre d'outils supérieure affiche une flèche lorsque le fichier est chiffré. Cliquez la flèche si vous souhaitez modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe. Modifier le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur le bouton Chiffrer et sélectionnez l'option Modifier le mot de passe de la liste déroulante, saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmez le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK.Cliquez sur pour afficher pi masquer les caractèrs du mot de passe lors de la saisie. Supprimer le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur le bouton Chiffrer et sélectionnez l'option Modifier le mot de passe de la liste déroulante, Définir un mot de passe depuis l'onglet Fichier. passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un mot de passe. saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmez le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK. Modifier le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Modifier un mot de passe. saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmez le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK. Supprimer le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer un mot de passe." + "body": "Vous pouvez contrôler l'accès à vos classeurs avec un mot de passe afin que tous les coauteurs puissent d'accéder en mode d'édition. On peut modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe, le cas échéant. Il y a deux façons de protéger votre classeur par un mot de passe : depuis l'onglet Protection ou depuis l'onglet Fichier. Il n'est pas possible de réinitialiser un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Définir un mot de passe depuis l'onglet Protection. passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur l'icône Chiffrer. dans la fenêtre Définir un mot de passe qui s'affiche, saisissez et confirmer le mot de passe que vous allez utilisez pour accéder à votre fichier. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. le bouton Chiffrer de la barre d'outils supérieure affiche une flèche lorsque le fichier est chiffré. Cliquez la flèche si vous souhaitez modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe. Modifier le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur le bouton Chiffrer et sélectionnez l'option Modifier le mot de passe de la liste déroulante, saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmez le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK.Cliquez sur pour afficher pi masquer les caractèrs du mot de passe lors de la saisie. Supprimer le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur le bouton Chiffrer et sélectionnez l'option Modifier le mot de passe de la liste déroulante. Définir un mot de passe depuis l'onglet Fichier passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un mot de passe, saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmez le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK. Modifier le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Modifier un mot de passe, saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ Mot de passe et validez-le dans le champ Confirmez le mot de passe au-dessous, ensuite cliquez sur OK. Supprimer le mot de passe passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, choisissez l'option Protéger, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer un mot de passe." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm", "title": "Modification d'une image", - "body": "Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations. Sélectionnez une image incorporée dans votre feuille de calcul. Passez à l'onglet Plugins et choisissez Photo Editor. Vous êtes dans l'environnement de traitement des images. Au-dessous de l'image il y a les cases à cocher et les filtres en curseur suivants : Niveaux de gris, Sépia 1, Sépia 2, Flou, Embosser, Inverser, Affûter ; Enlever les blancs (Seuil, Distance), Transparence des dégradés, Brillance, Bruit, Pixélateur, Filtre de couleur ; Teinte, Multiplication, Mélange. Au-dessous, les filtres dont vous pouvez accéder avec les boutons Annuler, Rétablir et Remettre à zéro ; Supprimer, Supprimer tout ; Rogner (Personnalisé, Carré, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9) ; Retournement (Retourner X, Retourner Y, Remettre à zéro) ; Rotation (à 30 degrés, -30 degrés, Gamme) ; Dessiner (Libre, Direct, Couleur, Gamme) ; Forme (Rectangle, Cercle, Triangle, Remplir, Trait, Largeur du trait) ; Icône (Flèches, Étoiles, Polygone, Emplacement, Cœur, Bulles, Icône personnalisée, Couleur) ; Texte (Gras, Italique, Souligné, Gauche, Centre, Droite, Couleur, Taille de texte) ; Masque. N'hésitez pas à les essayer tous et rappelez-vous que vous pouvez annuler les modifications à tout moment. Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Maintenant l'image modifiée est insérée dans votre feuille de calcul." + "body": "Tableur ONLYOFFICE dispose d'un éditeur de photos puissant qui permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer divers effets de filtre à vos images et de faire les différents types d'annotations. Sélectionnez une image incorporée dans votre feuille de calcul. Passez à l'onglet Plugins et choisissez Photo Editor. Vous êtes dans l'environnement de traitement des images. Au-dessous de l'image il y a les cases à cocher et les filtres en curseur suivants : Niveaux de gris, Sépia 1, Sépia 2, Flou, Embosser, Inverser, Affûter ; Enlever les blancs (Seuil, Distance), Transparence des dégradés, Brillance, Bruit, Pixélateur, Filtre de couleur ; Teinte, Multiplication, Mélange. Au-dessous, les filtres dont vous pouvez accéder avec les boutons Annuler, Rétablir et Remettre à zéro ; Supprimer, Supprimer tout ; Rogner (Personnalisé, Carré, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9) ; Retournement (Retourner X, Retourner Y, Remettre à zéro) ; Rotation (à 30 degrés, -30 degrés, Gamme) ; Dessiner (Libre, Direct, Couleur, Gamme) ; Forme (Rectangle, Cercle, Triangle, Remplir, Trait, Largeur du trait) ; Icône (Flèches, Étoiles, Polygone, Emplacement, Cœur, Bulles, Icône personnalisée, Couleur) ; Texte (Gras, Italique, Souligné, Gauche, Centre, Droite, Couleur, Taille de texte) ; Masque. N'hésitez pas à les essayer tous et rappelez-vous que vous pouvez annuler les modifications à tout moment. Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Maintenant l'image modifiée est insérée dans votre feuille de calcul." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm", "title": "Créer et éditer les tableaux croisés dynamiques", - "body": "Les tableaux croisés dynamiques vous permet de grouper et organiser de vastes ensembles de données pour présenter des données de synthèse. Dans le Tableur vous pouvez réorganiser les données de plusieurs façons pour n'afficher que les informations importantes et pour se concentrer uniquement sur les aspects importants. Créer un nouveau tableau croisé dynamique Pour créer un tableau croisé dynamique, Préparez l'ensemble de données sources à partir duquel vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique. Ceux-ci doivent comprendre les en-têtes. L'ensemble de données ne peut pas comprendre les lignes ou les colonnes vides. Sélectionnez une cellule appartenant à la plage de données sources. Passez à l'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau . Si vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique basé sur une tableau mis en forme, vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Insérer un tableau croisé dynamique sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite. Une fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique apparaîtra. La Ligne de données de la source est déjà spécifié. Dans ce cas, toutes le données sources sont utilisées. Si vous voulez modifier la plage de données (par exemple, à inclure seulement une part de données), cliquez sur l'icône . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant : Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. Choisissez l'emplacement du tableau croisé dynamique. La valeur par défaut est Nouvelle feuille de calcul. Votre tableau croisé dynamique sera créé dans une feuille de calcul nouvelle. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'élément Feuille de calcul existante et choisir la cellule. Dans ce cas, c'est la cellule supérieure droite du tableau croisé dynamique créé. Pour sélectionner la cellule, cliquez sur l'icône . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez l'adresse de la cellule sous le format suivant : Sheet1!$G$2. Vous pouvez également sélectionner la cellule nécessaire dans votre feuille. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. Une fois l'emplacement du tableau croisé dynamique est choisi, cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique. Le tableau croisé dynamique vide est inséré selon l'emplacement choisi. L'onglet Paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique s'ouvre sur la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur l'icône pour masquer ou afficher cet onglet. Sélectionner les champs à afficher La section Sélectionner les champs à afficher comprend les champs dénommés comme les en-têtes de colonnes dans l'ensemble de votre données sources. Chaque champ contient les valeurs de la colonne correspondante du tableau source. Les sections disponibles : Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs. Pour afficher un champ à votre tableau croisé dynamique, activez la case à cocher du nom de champ. Lorsque vous activez une case à cocher, le champ correspondant à cette case est ajouté à une des sections disponibles sur la barre latérale droite en fonction du type de données et est affiché dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les champs de type texte sont ajoutés à Lignes ; les champs numériques sont ajoutés à Valeurs. Faites glisser les champs directement dans les sections voulues ou faites glisser les champs d'une section dans l'autre pour les réorganiser dans votre tableau croisé dynamique rapidement. Pour supprimer un champ dans une section, faites-le glisser en dehors de cette section. Pour ajouter un champ à une section, on peut aussi cliquer sur la flèche noire à droite du champ et choisir l'option appropriée dans le menu de la section Sélectionner les champs : Déplacer vers les filtres, Déplacer vers les lignes, Déplacer vers les colonnes, Déplacer vers les valeurs. Ci-dessous, vous pouvez découvrir quelques exemples d'utilisation des sections Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs. Lorsque un champ est ajouté à Filtres, un filtre de rapport apparaisse au-dessus du tableau croisé dynamique. Celui-ci est appliqué au tableau croisé dynamique entier. Si vous cliquer sur la flèche de filtre ajouté, vous pouvez voir toutes les valeurs du champ choisi. Lorsque vous désactivez quelques valeurs parmi les options de filtre et appuyez sur OK, celles-ci ne sont pas affichées dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Quand vous ajoutez un champ à Colonnes, le nombre de colonnes dans le tableau croisé dynamique correspond au nombre de valeurs du champ choisi. La colonne Total général est aussi ajoutée. Quand vous ajoutez un champ à Lignes, le nombre de lignes dans le tableau croisé dynamique correspond au nombre de valeurs du champ choisi. La ligne Total général est aussi ajoutée. Quand vous ajoutez un champ à Valeurs, le tableau croisé dynamique affiche la somme de toutes les valeurs numériques du champ choisi. Si votre champ contient des valeurs texte, la somme ne s'affiche pas. Vous pouvez choisir une autre fonction de synthèse dans les paramètres du champ. Réorganiser les champs et configurer les paramètres Une foi les champs ajoutés aux sections appropriées, vous pouvez les gérer pour modifier la mise en page et la mise en forme du tableau croisé dynamique. Cliquez sur la flèche noire à droit du champ dans les sections Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs pour afficher le menu contextuel du champ. Ce menu vous permet : Déplacer le champ sélectionné : Monter, Descendre, Aller au début, ou Déplacer vers le fin de la section actuelle si vous avez ajouté plusieurs champs. Déplacer le champ vers une autre section - Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes ou Valeurs. L'option déjà appliquée à la section actuelle sera désactivée. Supprimer le champ sélectionné de la section actuelle. Configurer les paramètres du champ choisi. Les options Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs semblent similaires : L'onglet Disposition comprend les options suivantes : L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources. L'option Nom vous permet de changer le nom du champ choisi à afficher dans le tableau croisé dynamique. L'option Formulaire de rapport vous permet de modifier la présentation du champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique : Utiliser l'un des formulaires disponibles à présenter le champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Formulaire Tabulaire affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Formulaire Contour affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Ce formulaire permet aussi d'afficher les sous-totaux en haut de chaque groupe. Formulaire Compact affiche les éléments de champs de section de ligne différents dans une colonne. Répéter les étiquettes des éléments sur chaque ligne permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire. Insérer une ligne vide après chaque élément permet d'insérer une ligne vide après les éléments du champ choisi. Afficher les sous-totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les sous-totaux pour le champ choisi. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : Afficher en haut du groupe ou Afficher en bas du groupe. Afficher les éléments sans données permet d'afficher ou de masquer les éléments de ligne qui ne contiennent pas de valeurs dans le champ choisi. Sous l'onglet Sous-totaux vous pouvez choisir les Fonctions pour sous-totaux. Cochez une des fonctions disponibles dans la liste : Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp. Paramètres du champ Valeurs L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources. L'option Nom vous permet de changer le nom du champ choisi à afficher dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Résumer les valeurs du champ par permet de choisir la fonction à utiliser pour calculer la somme des valeurs pour toutes les valeurs de ce champ. Par défaut, la fonction Somme est utilisée pour les champs de valeurs numériques, et la fonction Total est utilisée pour les valeurs de texte. Les fonctions disponibles : Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp. Grouper et dissocier des données Il est possible de grouper les données d'un tableau croisé dynamique selon des critères personnalisés. La fonctionnalité de groupage est disponible pour les dates et les nombres simples. Grouper les dates Pour grouper les dates, créez un tableau croisé dynamique comprenant l'ensemble de dates en question. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'une des cellules comprenant une date dans le tableau croisé dynamique, choisissez l'option Grouper dans le menu contextuel et configurez les paramètres appropriés dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche. Commence à - la première date des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour la modifier, saisissez la date appropriée dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le début. Fin à - la dernière date des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour la modifier, saisissez la date appropriée dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le fin. Par - on peut grouper les dates par Secondes, Minutes et Heures selon l'heure spécifiée dans les données sources. L'option Mois enlève les jours et maintient uniquement les mois. L'option Quartiers fonctionne à la condition que quatre mois est un quartier, alors on fournit Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. L'option Années groupe les dates selon les années spécifiées dans les données source. Vous pouvez combiner plusieurs options pour obtenir le résultat souhaité, Nombre de jours sert à définir la valeur appropriée pour spécifier une certaine période. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Grouper des nombres Pour grouper les nombres, créez un tableau croisé dynamique comprenant l'ensemble de nombres en question. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'une des cellules comprenant un nombre dans le tableau croisé dynamique, choisissez l'option Grouper dans le menu contextuel et configurez les paramètres appropriés dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche. Commence à - le plus petit nombre des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour le modifier, saisissez le nombre approprié dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le plus petit nombre. Fin à - le plus grand nombre des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour le modifier, saisissez le nombre approprié dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le plus grand nombre. Par - définissez l'intervalle pour grouper des numéros : Ex., “2” va grouper l'ensemble de numéros de 1 à 10 comme “1-2”, “3-4”, etc. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Dissocier des données Pour dissocier des données groupées, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une cellule du groupe, sélectionnez l'option Dissocier dans le menu contextuel. Modifier la disposition d'un tableau croisé dynamique Vous pouvez utiliser les options disponibles dans la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le format du tableau croisé dynamique. Ces paramètres sont appliquées au tableau croisé dynamique entier. Sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau croisé dynamique avec la souris pour activer les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Dans la liste déroulante Mise en page du rapport choisissez la forme à afficher pour votre tableau croisé dynamique. Afficher sous forme compacte - pour afficher les éléments de champs de section de ligne différents dans une colonne. Afficher sous forme de plan - pour présenter les données dans le style de tableau croisé dynamique classique. Cette forme affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Elle permet aussi d'afficher les sous-totaux en haut de chaque groupe. Afficher sous forme de tableau - pour présenter les données dans un format de tableau traditionnel. Cette forme affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Répéter les étiquettes de tous les éléments - permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire. Ne pas répéter toutes les étiquettes d'éléments - permet de masquer les étiquettes d'élément pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire. La liste déroulante Lignes vides permet d'afficher les lignes vides après chaque élément : Insérer une ligne vide après chaque élément - permet d'insérer une ligne vide après les éléments. Supprimer la ligne vide après chaque élément - permet de supprimer les lignes vides ajoutées. La liste déroulante Sous-totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les sous-totaux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Ne pas afficher les sous-totaux - permet de masquer les sou-totaux pour tous éléments. Afficher les sous-totaux au bas du groupe - permet d'afficher les sous-totaux au-dessous des lignes résumées. Afficher les sous-totaux en haut du groupe - permet d'afficher les sous-totaux au-dessus des lignes résumées. La liste déroulante Grands Totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les totaux généraux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Désactivé pour les lignes et les colonnes - permet de masquer les totaux généraux pour les lignes et les colonnes. Activé pour les lignes et les colonnes - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux pour les lignes et les colonnes. Activé pour les lignes uniquement - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux seulement pour les lignes. Activé pour les colonnes uniquement - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux seulement pour les colonnes. Remarque : les options similaires sont aussi disponibles parmi les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique dans la section Grand totaux sous l'onglet Nom et disposition. Le bouton Sélectionner tableau croisé dynamique complet permet de sélectionner le tableau croisé dynamique entier. Quand vous avez modifié l'ensemble de données sources, sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique et cliquez sur le bouton Actualiser pour mettre à jour le tableau croisé dynamique. Modifier le style d'un tableau croisé dynamique Vous pouvez modifier la présentation du tableau croisé dynamique dans une feuille de calcul en utilisant les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau croisé dynamique avec la souris pour activer les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Les sections lignes et colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles : En-têtes de ligne - permet de mettre en évidence les en-têtes de ligne avec un formatage spécial. En-têtes de colonne - permet de mettre en évidence les en-têtes de colonne avec un formatage spécial. Lignes en bandes - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les lignes paires et impaires. Colonnes en bandes - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires.. La liste des modèles vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux croisés prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections lignes et/ou colonnes, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous avez coché les options En-têtes de ligne et Colonnes en bandes, la liste des modèles affichés inclurait uniquement les modèles avec la ligne d'en-tête et les colonnes en bandes activées. Filtrer, trier et insérer des segments dans des tableaux croisées dynamiques Vous pouvez filtrez les tableaux croisé dynamique par étiquettes ou valeurs aussi que utiliser les options de tri supplémentaires. Filtrage Cliquez sur la flèche déroulante dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. La liste des options de Filtrage s'affiche : Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Procédez d'une des manières suivantes : sélectionnez les données à afficher ou filtrez les données selon certains critères. Sélectionner les données à afficher Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtrage sont triées par ordre croissant. Remarque : la case à cocher (vide) correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules. Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ, les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles : Sélectionner tous les résultats de la recherche - cochée par défaut. Permet de sélectionner toutes les valeurs correspondant à la requête. Ajouter le sélection actuelle au filtre - si vous cochez cette case, les valeurs sélectionnées ne seront pas masquées lorsque vous appliquerez le filtre. Après avoir sélectionné toutes les données nécessaires, cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la liste des options de Filtrage pour appliquer le filtre. Filtrer les données selon certains critères En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre étiquette ou le Filtre de valeur dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtrage, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu : Pour le Filtre étiquette les options suivantes sont disponibles : Pour texte : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas... Pour nombres : Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre. Pour le Filtre de valeur, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre, Les 10 premiers. Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers), la fenêtre Filtre étiquette/de valeur s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la première ou secondaire liste déroulante. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de valeur, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira : La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure : Élément, Pour cent ou Somme. La quatrième liste déroulante affiche le nom du champ choisi. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Le bouton de Filtrage s'affiche dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué. Tri Vous pouvez effectuer le tri des données du tableau croisé dynamique en utilisant les options de tri. Cliquez sur la flèche de la liste déroulante dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique et sélectionnez Trier du plus bas au plus élevé ou Trier du plus élevé au plus bas dans le sous-menu. Les Options de tri supplémentaires vous permettent d'ouvrir la fenêtre et choisir une option de tri : Ordre croissant ou Ordre décroissant, et puis spécifier le champ à trier. Insérer des segments Vous pouvez insérer des segments pour filtrer facilement les données et sélectionner les éléments que vous voulez afficher. Pour en savoir plus sur les segments, veuillez consulter le guide de création des segments. Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique Pour configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Tableau croisé dynamique - Paramètres avancés, s'ouvre : Sous l'onglet Nom et disposition vous pouvez configurer les paramètres communs du tableau croisé dynamique. L'option Nom permet de modifier le nom du tableau croisé dynamique. La section Grands Totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les totaux généraux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les options Afficher pour les lignes et Afficher pour les colonnes sont activées par défaut. Vous pouvez les désactiver toutes les deux ou décocher la case appropriée pour masquer les certains grand totaux du tableau croisé dynamique. Remarque : les options similaires sont aussi disponibles sur le menu Grands Totaux dans la barre d'outils en haut. La section Afficher les champs dans la zone de filtre du rapport permet de configurer les filtres dans la section Filtres quand vous les y ajoutez : L'option Vers le bas, puis à droite s'utilise pour organiser les colonnes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la colonne. L'option À droite, puis vers le bas s'utilise pour organiser les lignes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la ligne. L'option Afficher les champs de filtre de rapport par colonne sélectionnez le nombre de filtres à afficher pour chaque colonne. La valeur par défaut est 0. Vous pouvez régler la valeur numérique. L'option Afficher les en-têtes des champs pour les lignes et les colonnes permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les en-têtes de champ dans le tableau croisé dynamique. L'option est activée par défaut. Décochez-la pour masquer les en-têtes de champ du tableau croisé dynamique. L'option Ajuster automatiquement la largeur de colonne lors de la mise à jour permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'ajustement automatique de la largeur de colonne. L'option est activée par défaut. Sous l'onglet La source de données vous pouvez modifier les données à utiliser pour créer le tableau croisé dynamique. Vérifiez la Plage de données et modifiez-la si nécessaire. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'icône . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant : Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau croisé dynamique. Supprimer le tableau croisé dynamique Pour supprimer un tableau croisé dynamique, Sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique entier en utilisant le bouton Sélectionner dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Appuyez sur la touche de Suppression." + "body": "Les tableaux croisés dynamiques vous permet de grouper et organiser de vastes ensembles de données pour présenter des données de synthèse. Dans l'éditeur de classeurs vous pouvez réorganiser les données de plusieurs façons pour n'afficher que les informations importantes et pour se concentrer uniquement sur les aspects importants. Créer un nouveau tableau croisé dynamique Pour créer un tableau croisé dynamique, Préparez l'ensemble de données sources à partir duquel vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique. Ceux-ci doivent comprendre les en-têtes. L'ensemble de données ne peut pas comprendre les lignes ou les colonnes vides. Sélectionnez une cellule appartenant à la plage de données sources. Passez à l'onglet Tableau croisé dynamique dans la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau . Si vous voulez créer un tableau croisé dynamique basé sur un tableau mis en forme, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Insérer un tableau croisé dynamique sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau sur la barre latérale droite. Une fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique apparaîtra. La Ligne de données de la source est déjà spécifié. Dans ce cas, toutes le données sources sont utilisées. Si vous voulez modifier la plage de données (par exemple, à inclure seulement une part de données), cliquez sur l'icône . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. Choisissez l'emplacement du tableau croisé dynamique. La valeur par défaut est Nouvelle feuille de calcul. Votre tableau croisé dynamique sera créé dans une feuille de calcul nouvelle. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'élément Feuille de calcul existante et choisir la cellule. Dans ce cas, c'est la cellule supérieure droite du tableau croisé dynamique créé. Pour sélectionner la cellule, cliquez sur l'icône . . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez l'adresse de la cellule sous le format suivant: Sheet1!$G$2. Vous pouvez également sélectionner la cellule nécessaire dans votre feuille. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. Une fois l'emplacement du tableau croisé dynamique est choisi, cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Créer un tableau croisé dynamique. Le tableau croisé dynamique vide est inséré selon l'emplacement choisi. L'onglet Paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique s'ouvre sur la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur l'icône pour masquer ou afficher cet onglet. Il est également possible d'accéder les paramètres du tableau croisé dynamique depuis le menu contextuel qui s'affiche lorsque vous faites un clic droit sur le tableau. Les options du menu contextuel varient en fonction du champ su lequel on fait le clic. Sélectionner les champs à afficher La section Sélectionner les champs à afficher comprend les champs dénommés comme les en-têtes de colonnes dans l'ensemble de votre données sources. Chaque champ contient les valeurs de la colonne correspondante du tableau source. Les sections disponibles: Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs. Pour afficher un champ à votre tableau croisé dynamique, activez la case à cocher du nom de champ. Lorsque vous activez une case à cocher, le champ correspondant à cette case est ajouté à une des sections disponibles sur la barre latérale droite en fonction du type de données et est affiché dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les champs de type texte sont ajoutés à Lignes; les champs numériques sont ajoutés à Valeurs. Faites glisser les champs directement dans les sections voulues ou faites glisser les champs d'une section dans l'autre pour les réorganiser dans votre tableau croisé dynamique rapidement. Pour supprimer un champ dans une section, faites-le glisser en dehors de cette section. Pour ajouter un champ à une section, on peut aussi cliquer sur la flèche noire à droite du champ et choisir l'option appropriée dans le menu de la section Sélectionner les champs: Déplacer vers les filtres, Déplacer vers les lignes, Déplacer vers les colonnes, Déplacer vers les valeurs. Ci-dessous, vous pouvez découvrir quelques exemples d'utilisation des sections Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs. Lorsque un champ est ajouté à Filtres, un filtre de rapport apparaisse au-dessus du tableau croisé dynamique. Celui-ci est appliqué au tableau croisé dynamique entier. Si vous cliquer sur la flèche déroulante du filtre ajouté, vous pouvez voir toutes les valeurs du champ choisi. Lorsque vous désactivez quelques valeurs parmi les options de filtre et appuyez sur OK, celles-ci ne sont pas affichées dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Quand vous ajoutez un champ à Colonnes, le nombre de colonnes dans le tableau croisé dynamique correspond au nombre de valeurs du champ choisi. La colonne Total général est aussi ajoutée. Quand vous ajoutez un champ à Lignes, le nombre de lignes dans le tableau croisé dynamique correspond au nombre de valeurs du champ choisi. La ligne Total général est aussi ajoutée. Quand vous ajoutez un champ à Valeurs, le tableau croisé dynamique affiche la somme de toutes les valeurs numériques du champ choisi. Si votre champ contient des valeurs texte, la somme ne s'affiche pas. Vous pouvez choisir une autre fonction de synthèse dans les paramètres du champ. Réorganiser les champs et configurer les paramètres Une foi les champs ajoutés aux sections appropriées, vous pouvez les gérer pour modifier la mise en page et la mise en forme du tableau croisé dynamique. Cliquez sur la flèche noire à droit du champ dans les sections Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs pour afficher le menu contextuel du champ. Il vous permet: Déplacer le champ sélectionné: Monter, Descendre, Aller au début, ou Déplacer vers le fin de la section actuelle si vous avez ajouté plusieurs champs. Déplacer le champ vers une autre section - Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes ou Valeurs. L'option déjà appliquée à la section actuelle sera désactivée. Supprimer le champ sélectionné de la section actuelle. Configurer les paramètres du champ choisi. Les options Filtres, Colonnes, Lignes et Valeurs semblent similaires: L'onglet Disposition comprend les options suivantes: L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources. L'option Nom vous permet de changer le nom du champ choisi à afficher dans le tableau croisé dynamique. L'option Formulaire de rapport vous permet de modifier la présentation du champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique: Utiliser l'un des formulaires disponibles à présenter le champ choisi dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Formulaire Tabulaire affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Formulaire Contour affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Ce formulaire permet aussi d'afficher les sous-totaux en haut de chaque groupe. Formulaire Compact affiche les éléments de champs de section de ligne différents dans une colonne. Répéter les étiquettes des éléments sur chaque ligne permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire. Insérer une ligne vide après chaque élément permet d'insérer une ligne vide après les éléments du champ choisi. Afficher les sous-totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les sous-totaux pour le champ choisi. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes: Afficher en haut du groupe ou Afficher en bas du groupe. Afficher les éléments sans données permet d'afficher ou de masquer les éléments de ligne qui ne contiennent pas de valeurs dans le champ choisi. Sous l'onglet Sous-totaux vous pouvez choisir les Fonctions pour sous-totaux. Cochez une des fonctions disponibles dans la liste: Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp. Paramètres du champ Valeurs L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources. L'option Nom vous permet de changer le nom du champ choisi à afficher dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Résumer les valeurs du champ par permet de choisir la fonction à utiliser pour calculer la somme des valeurs pour toutes les valeurs de ce champ. Par défaut, la fonction Somme est utilisée pour les champs de valeurs numériques, et la fonction Total est utilisée pour les valeurs de texte. Les fonctions disponibles: Somme, Total, Moyenne, Max, Min, Produit, Chiffres, Écartype , StdDevp, Var, Varp. L'option Afficher les valeurs comme permet d'afficher les résultats du calcul personnalisé instantané au lieu d'ajouter une formule et un champ calculé. Aucun calcul est l'option par défaut et c'est valeur actuelle qui s'affiche dans le champ. Autres options du calcul instantané: % du total général, % du total de la colonne, % du total de la ligne, % de, % du total de la ligne parente, % du total de la ligne parente, % du total du parent, Différence par rapport à, % de différence avec, Résultat cumulé par, % résultat cumulé dans, Trier du plus petit au plus grand, Trier du plus grand au plus petit, Index. Utilisez Champ de base et Élément de base lorsque ces options deviennent disponibles pour le calcul que vous avez sélectionné (% de, % du total du parent, Différence par rapport à, % de différence avec, Résultat cumulé par, % résultat cumulé dans). Grouper et dissocier des données Il est possible de grouper les données d'un tableau croisé dynamique selon des critères personnalisés. La fonctionnalité de groupage est disponible pour les dates et les nombres simples. Grouper les dates Pour grouper les dates, créez un tableau croisé dynamique comprenant l'ensemble de dates en question. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'une des cellules comprenant une date dans le tableau croisé dynamique, choisissez l'option Grouper dans le menu contextuel et configurez les paramètres appropriés dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche. Commence à - la première date des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour la modifier, saisissez la date appropriée dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le début. Fin à - la dernière date des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour la modifier, saisissez la date appropriée dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le fin. Par - on peut grouper les dates par Secondes, Minutes et Heures selon l'heure spécifiée dans les données sources. L'option Mois enlève les jours et maintient uniquement les mois. L'option Quartiers fonctionne à la condition que quatre mois est un quartier, alors on fournit Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. L'option Années groupe les dates selon les années spécifiées dans les données source. Vous pouvez combiner plusieurs options pour obtenir le résultat souhaité, Nombre de jours sert à définir la valeur appropriée pour spécifier une certaine période. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Grouper des nombres Pour grouper les nombres, créez un tableau croisé dynamique comprenant l'ensemble de nombres en question. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'une des cellules comprenant un nombre dans le tableau croisé dynamique, choisissez l'option Grouper dans le menu contextuel et configurez les paramètres appropriés dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche. Commence à - le plus petit nombre des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour le modifier, saisissez le nombre approprié dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le plus petit nombre. Fin à - le plus grand nombre des données sources est définie par défaut. Pour le modifier, saisissez le nombre approprié dans ce champ-là. Désactivez cette option pour ignorer le plus grand nombre. Par - définissez l'intervalle pour grouper des numéros: Ex., “2” va grouper l'ensemble de numéros de 1 à 10 comme “1-2”, “3-4”, etc. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Dissocier des données Pour dissocier des données groupées, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une cellule du groupe, sélectionnez l'option Dissocier dans le menu contextuel. Modifier la disposition d'un tableau croisé dynamique Vous pouvez utiliser les options disponibles dans la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le format du tableau croisé dynamique. Ces paramètres sont appliquées au tableau croisé dynamique entier. Sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau croisé dynamique avec la souris pour activer les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Dans la liste déroulante Mise en page du rapport choisissez la forme à afficher pour votre tableau croisé dynamique. Afficher sous forme compacte - pour afficher les éléments de champs de section de ligne différents dans une colonne. Afficher sous forme de plan - pour présenter les données dans le style de tableau croisé dynamique classique. Cette forme affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Elle permet aussi d'afficher les sous-totaux en haut de chaque groupe. Afficher sous forme de tableau - pour présenter les données dans un format de tableau traditionnel. Cette forme affiche une colonne par champ et fournit de l'espace pour les en-têtes de champ. Répéter les étiquettes de tous les éléments - permet de grouper visuellement des lignes ou des colonnes pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire. Ne pas répéter toutes les étiquettes d'éléments - permet de masquer les étiquettes d'élément pour plusieurs champs affichés sous forme tabulaire. La liste déroulante Lignes vides permet d'afficher les lignes vides après chaque élément: Insérer une ligne vide après chaque élément - permet d'insérer une ligne vide après les éléments. Supprimer la ligne vide après chaque élément - permet de supprimer les lignes vides ajoutées. La liste déroulante Sous-totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les sous-totaux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Ne pas afficher les sous-totaux - permet de masquer les sou-totaux pour tous éléments. Afficher les sous-totaux au bas du groupe - permet d'afficher les sous-totaux au-dessous des lignes résumées. Afficher les sous-totaux en haut du groupe - permet d'afficher les sous-totaux au-dessus des lignes résumées. La liste déroulante Grands Totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les totaux généraux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Désactivé pour les lignes et les colonnes - permet de masquer les totaux généraux pour les lignes et les colonnes. Activé pour les lignes et les colonnes - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux pour les lignes et les colonnes. Activé pour les lignes uniquement - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux seulement pour les lignes. Activé pour les colonnes uniquement - permet d'afficher les totaux généraux seulement pour les colonnes. Remarque: les options similaires sont aussi disponibles parmi les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique dans la section Grand totaux sous l'onglet Nom et disposition. Le bouton Sélectionner permet de sélectionner le tableau croisé dynamique entier. Lorsque vous avez modifié l'ensemble de données sources, sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique et cliquez sur le bouton Actualiser pour mettre à jour le tableau croisé dynamique. Modifier le style d'un tableau croisé dynamique Vous pouvez modifier la présentation du tableau croisé dynamique dans une feuille de calcul en utilisant les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau croisé dynamique avec la souris pour activer les outils d'édition dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Les sections lignes et colonnes en haut vous permettent de mettre en évidence certaines lignes/colonnes en leur appliquant une mise en forme spécifique ou de mettre en évidence différentes lignes/colonnes avec les différentes couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les distinguer clairement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles: En-têtes de ligne - permet de mettre en évidence les en-têtes de ligne avec un formatage spécial. En-têtes de colonne - permet de mettre en évidence les en-têtes de colonne avec un formatage spécial. Lignes en bandes - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les lignes paires et impaires. Colonnes en bandes - permet l'alternance des couleurs d'arrière-plan pour les colonnes paires et impaires.. La liste des modèles vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de tableaux croisés prédéfinis. Chaque modèle combine certains paramètres de formatage, tels qu'une couleur d'arrière-plan, un style de bordure, des lignes/colonnes en bandes, etc. Selon les options cochées dans les sections lignes et/ou colonnes, l'ensemble de modèles sera affiché différemment. Par exemple, si vous activez les options En-têtes de ligne et Colonnes en bandes, la partie visible de la liste des modèles inclura uniquement les modèles avec des lignes d'en-tête mises en surbrillance et des colonnes en bandes activées, mais vous pouvez développer la liste en cliquant sur la flèche pour afficher tous les modèles disponibles. Filtrer, trier et insérer des segments dans des tableaux croisées dynamiques Vous pouvez filtrez les tableaux croisé dynamique par étiquettes ou valeurs aussi que utiliser les options de tri supplémentaires. Filtrage Cliquez sur la flèche déroulante dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. La liste des options de Filtrage s'affiche: Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Procédez d'une des manières suivantes: sélectionnez les données à afficher ou filtrez les données selon certains critères. Sélectionner les données à afficher Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtrage sont triées par ordre croissant. Remarque: la case à cocher (vide) correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules. Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ, les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles: Sélectionner tous les résultats de la recherche - cochée par défaut. Permet de sélectionner toutes les valeurs correspondant à la requête. Ajouter le sélection actuelle au filtre - si vous cochez cette case, les valeurs sélectionnées ne seront pas masquées lorsque vous appliquerez le filtre. Après avoir sélectionné toutes les données nécessaires, cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la liste des options de Filtrage pour appliquer le filtre. Filtrer les données selon certains critères En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre étiquette ou le Filtre de valeur dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtrage, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu: Pour le Filtre étiquette les options suivantes sont disponibles: Pour texte: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas... Pour nombres: Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre. Pour le Filtre de valeur, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Pas entre, Les 10 premiers. Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers), la fenêtre Filtre étiquette/de valeur s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la première ou secondaire liste déroulante. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de valeur, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira: La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure: Élément, Pour cent ou Somme. La quatrième liste déroulante affiche le nom du champ choisi. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Le bouton Filtre s'affiche dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué. Tri Vous pouvez effectuer le tri des données du tableau croisé dynamique en utilisant les options de tri. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement dans Étiquettes de lignes ou Étiquettes de colonnes du tableau croisé dynamique et sélectionnez Trier du plus bas au plus élevé ou Trier du plus élevé au plus bas dans le sous-menu. Les Options de tri supplémentaires vous permettent d'ouvrir la fenêtre et choisir une option de tri: Ordre croissant ou Ordre décroissant, et puis spécifier le champ à trier. Insérer des segments Vous pouvez insérer des segments pour filtrer facilement les données et sélectionner les éléments que vous voulez afficher. Pour en savoir plus sur les segments, veuillez consulter le guide de création des segments. Configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique Pour configurer les paramètres avancés du tableau croisé dynamique, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Tableau croisé dynamique - Paramètres avancés, s'ouvre: Sous l'onglet Nom et disposition vous pouvez configurer les paramètres communs du tableau croisé dynamique. L'option Nom permet de modifier le nom du tableau croisé dynamique. La section Grands Totaux permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les totaux généraux dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Les options Afficher pour les lignes et Afficher pour les colonnes sont activées par défaut. Vous pouvez les désactiver toutes les deux ou décocher la case appropriée pour masquer les certains grand totaux du tableau croisé dynamique. Remarque: les options similaires sont aussi disponibles sur le menu Grands Totaux dans la barre d'outils en haut. La section Afficher les champs dans la zone de filtre du rapport permet de configurer les filtres dans la section Filtres quand vous les y ajoutez: L'option Vers le bas, puis à droite s'utilise pour organiser les colonnes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la colonne. L'option À droite, puis vers le bas s'utilise pour organiser les lignes. Celle-ci vous permet d'afficher des filtres du rapport pour la ligne. L'option Afficher les champs de filtre de rapport par colonne sélectionnez le nombre de filtres à afficher pour chaque colonne. La valeur par défaut est 0. Vous pouvez régler la valeur numérique. La section Afficher les en-têtes des champs pour les lignes et les colonnes permet d'afficher ou de ne pas afficher les en-têtes des champs dans le tableau croisé dynamique. Cette option est activée par défaut. Décochez-la pour masquer les en-têtes de champ du tableau croisé dynamique. L'option Ajuster automatiquement la largeur de colonne lors de la mise à jour permet d'activer/désactiver l'ajustement automatique de la largeur des colonnes. Cette option est activée par défaut. Sous l'onglet La source de données vous pouvez modifier les données à utiliser pour créer le tableau croisé dynamique. Vérifiez la Plage de données et modifiez-la si nécessaire. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'icône . Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une plage de données, saisissez la plage de données appropriée sous le format suivant: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la plage de cellules qui vous convient avec la souris. Cliquez OK pour confirmer. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau croisé dynamique. Supprimer le tableau croisé dynamique Pour supprimer un tableau croisé dynamique, Sélectionnez le tableau croisé dynamique entier à l'aide du bouton Sélectionner de la barre d'outils supérieure. Appuyez sur la touche de Suppression." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm", + "title": "Protéger des plages", + "body": "L'option Protéger la plage permet de spécifier les plages de cellules pour qu'aucun utilisateur ne puisse les modifier sans autorisations appropriées. Pour sélectionner une plage de cellules verrouillées qui peut être modifiée: Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la plage sous l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Protéger la plage s'affichera. Utilisez la liste déroulante Filtre pour rechercher la feuille de calcul nécessaire. Dans la fenêtre Protéger la plage, cliquez sur le bouton Nouvelle pour sélectionner et ajouter la plage des cellules qui peuvent être modifiées par un utilisateur. Dans la fenêtre Nouvelle plage, saisissez le Titre de la plage et sélectionnez la plage de cellules en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données. Sélectionnez qui peut modifier cette plage et cliquez sur OK. Pour modifier ou supprimer une plage, cliquez sur Modifier ou Supprimer dans la fenêtre Protéger la plage. Cliquez sur le bouton Fermer dans la fenêtre Protéger la plage. Pour en savoir plus sur l'autorisation de la modification des plages, veuillez consulter cet article." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm", "title": "Protéger une feuille de calcul", - "body": "L'option Protéger la feuille de calcul permet de protéger des feuilles de calcul et de contrôler les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs à la feuille de calcul pour empêcher toute modification indésirable et limiter les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. Vois pouvez protéger une feuille de calcul avec ou sans un mot de passe. Si vous opter pour la protection sans un mot de passe, toute personne peut désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul. Pour protéger une feuille de calcul : Passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul de la barre d'outils supérieure. ou Faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à protéger et sélectionnez Protéger de la liste d'options. Dans la fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul qui s'affiche, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour désactiver la protection de la feuille de calcul. Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Activez les options appropriées sous la rubrique Permettre à tous les utilisateurs de cette feuille pour définir les opérations que les utilisateurs pourront effectuer. Les opérations par défaut sont Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées et Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées. Les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter. Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées Modifier les cellules Modifier les colonnes Modifier les lignes Insérer des colonnes Insérer des lignes Insérer un lien hypertexte Supprimer les colonnes Supprimer les lignes Trier Utiliser Autofilter Utiliser tableau et graphique croisés dynamiques Modifier les objets Modifier les scénarios cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection. Une fois la feuille de calcul protégée, le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul devient activé. Pour désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul : cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul, ou faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul protégée et sélectionnez Déprotéger de la liste d'options Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK si la fenêtre Déprotéger la feuille apparaît." + "body": "L'option Protéger la feuille de calcul permet de protéger des feuilles de calcul et de contrôler les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs à la feuille de calcul pour empêcher toute modification indésirable et limiter les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. Vois pouvez protéger une feuille de calcul avec ou sans un mot de passe. Si vous opter pour la protection sans un mot de passe, toute personne peut désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul. Protéger une feuille de calcul Passez à l'onglet Protection et cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul de la barre d'outils supérieure. ou faites un clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille de calcul à protéger et sélectionnez Protéger de la liste d'options. Dans la fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul qui s'affiche, saisissez et validez le mot de passe qu'on doit entrer pour désactiver la protection de la feuille de calcul. Il n'est pas possible de récupérer un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Activez les options appropriées sous la rubrique Permettre à tous les utilisateurs de cette feuille pour définir les opérations que les utilisateurs pourront effectuer. Les opérations par défaut sont Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées et Sélectionner les cellules no verrouillées. Les opérations que les utilisateurs peuvent exécuter. Sélectionner les cellules verrouillées Sélectionner les cellules non verrouillées Modifier les cellules Modifier les colonnes Modifier les lignes Insérer des colonnes Insérer des lignes Insérer un lien hypertexte Supprimer les colonnes Supprimer les lignes Trier Utiliser Autofilter Utiliser tableau et graphique croisés dynamiques Modifier les objets Modifier les scénarios cliquez sur le bouton Protéger pour activer la protection. Une fois la feuille de calcul protégée, le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul devient activé. Autoriser la modification des plages Cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul sous l'onglet Protection de la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Protéger la feuille de calcul s'ouvrira. Cliquez sur Autoriser la modification des plages pour indiquer les plages à déverrouiller par un mot de passe lorsque la feuille de calcul est protégée. Cette option ne fonctionne que pour les cellules verrouillées. Cliquez sur le bouton Nouvelle pour ajouter une nouvelle plage. La fenêtre Nouvelle plage s'affiche: Indiquez le Nom de la plage, la plage la-même et saisissez et validez le mot de passe. Cliquez sur OK pour valider. Il n'est pas possible de réinitialiser un mot de passe perdu ou oublié. Gardez vos mots de passe dans un endroit sécurisé. Vous pouvez modifier les plages de cellules, tant que la feuille de calcul n'est pas protégée. Pour modifier une plage, cliquez sur le bouton Modifier dans la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages. Pour supprimer une plage, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer dans la fenêtre Autoriser les utilisateurs à modifier les plages. Une fois terminé, cliquez sur Protéger. Avec des plages protégées avec un mot de passe, la fenêtre Déverrouiller la plage s'affiche invitant à saisir le mot de passe lorsque quelqu'un essaie de modifier la plage protégée. Pour en savoir plus sur la protection des plages, veuillez consulter cet article. Protéger une feuille de calcul Pour désactiver la protection d'une feuille de calcul: cliquez sur le bouton Protéger la feuille de calcul, ou faites in clic droit sur l'onglet de la feuille protégée et sélectionnez Déprotéger de la liste d'options. saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Déprotéger la feuille de calcul si vous y êtes invité." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm", - "title": "Protéger une feuille de calcul", - "body": "Protéger un classeur Tableur permet de protéger un classeur partagé lorsque vous souhaitez limiter l'accès ou les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. Tableur propose la protection du classeur aux différents niveaux pour contrôler l'accès au fichier aussi que les possibilités de modification à l'intérieur d'un classeur ou à l'intérieur d'une feuille de calcul. Utiliser l'onglet Protection pour paramétrer les options de protection disponibles selon ce que vous jugez approprié. Les options de protection comprennent : Chiffrer pour contrôler l'accès au fichier et empêcher d'autres utilisateurs de l'ouvrir. Protéger le livre pour contrôler des manipulations d'utilisateur au niveau de classeur et empêcher toute modification indésirable à la structure du classeur. Protéger la feuille de calcul pour contrôler des actions d'utilisateur au niveau de feuille de calcul et empêcher toute modification indésirable aux données. Autoriser la modification des plages pour sélectionner les cellules dont un autre utilisateur pourra modifier dans une feuille de calcul protégée. Utilisez des cases à cocher de l'onglet Protection pour verrouiller et déverrouiller rapidement le contenu de d'une feuille de calcul protégée. Remarque : ces options ne prendront effet que lors de l'activation de protection de la feuille de calcul. Par défaut, les cellules, les formes et le texte à l'intérieur d'une forme sont verrouillés dans une feuille de calcul, décochez les cases appropriées pour les déverrouiller. On peut modifier des objets déverrouillés dans une feuille de calcul protégée. Les options Forme verrouillée et Verrouiller le texte deviennent actives lorsque une forme est sélectionnée. L'option Forme verrouillée est applicable tant aux formes qu'aux autres objets tels que graphiques, images et zones de texte. L'option Verrouiller le texte permet de verrouiller le texte à l'intérieur des objets, les graphiques exceptés. Activez l'option Formules cachées pour masquer les formules d'une plage de cellules ou d'une cellule sélectionnée lorsque la feuille de calcul est protégé. La formule masquée ne s'affiche pas dans la barre de formule quand on fait un clic sur la cellule." + "title": "Protéger un classeur", + "body": "L'éditeur de classeurs permet de protéger un classeur partagé lorsque vous souhaitez limiter l'accès ou les possibilités de modification d'autres utilisateurs. Spreadsheet Editor propose la protection du classeur aux différents niveaux pour contrôler l'accès au fichier aussi que les possibilités de modification à l'intérieur d'un classeur ou à l'intérieur d'une feuille de calcul. Utiliser l'onglet Protection pour paramétrer les options de protection disponibles selon ce que vous jugez approprié. Les options de protection comprennent: Chiffrer pour contrôler l'accès au fichier et empêcher d'autres utilisateurs de l'ouvrir. Protéger le classeur pour contrôler des manipulations d'utilisateur au niveau de classeur et empêcher toute modification indésirable à la structure du classeur. Protéger la feuille de calcul pour contrôler des manipulations d'utilisateur au niveau de classeur et empêcher toute modification indésirable à la structure du classeur. Protéger la plage pour protéger les plages et limiter ou interdire l'édition. On peut accorder des droits de modification aux certains utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs qui n'ont aucun droit à la modification, ne puissent qu'afficher la plage protégée, mais puissent modifier le reste de la feuille de calcul à condition qu'ils aient tous les droits d'accès au fichier. Utilisez des cases à cocher de l'onglet Protection pour verrouiller et déverrouiller rapidement le contenu de d'une feuille de calcul protégée. Remarque: ces options ne prendront effet que lors de l'activation de protection de la feuille de calcul. Par défaut, les cellules, les formes et le texte à l'intérieur d'une forme sont verrouillés dans une feuille de calcul, décochez les cases appropriées pour les déverrouiller. On peut modifier des objets déverrouillés dans une feuille de calcul protégée. Les options Forme verrouillée et Verrouiller le texte deviennent actives lorsque une forme est sélectionnée. L'option Forme verrouillée est applicable tant aux formes qu'aux autres objets tels que graphiques, images et zones de texte. L'option Verrouiller le texte permet de verrouiller le texte à l'intérieur des objets, les graphiques exceptés. Activez l'option Formules cachées pour masquer les formules d'une plage de cellules ou d'une cellule sélectionnée lorsque la feuille de calcul est protégé. La formule masquée ne s'affiche pas dans la barre de formule quand on fait un clic sur la cellule." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm", @@ -2678,37 +2728,32 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/RemoveDuplicates.htm", "title": "Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées", - "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez supprimer les données dupliquées d'une plage de données ou d'un tableau mis en forme. Pour supprimer les valeurs en double : Sélectionnez la plage de données appropriée avec doublons. Passez à l'onglet Données et cliquez le bouton Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour supprimer les valeurs en double d'un tableau mis en forme, vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées sur la barre latérale droite. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une partie des données, une fenêtre d'avertissement est affichée vous demandant si vous voulez d'étendre la sélection afin que toutes les données soient inclues ou de continuer avec la sélection en cours. Appuyez sur Développer ou Déplacer dans sélectionnés. Si vous choisissez l'option Développer, les valeurs en double dans les cellules adjacentes à la zone sélectionnée ne seront pas supprimés. La fenêtre Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées s'affiche : Cochez la case appropriée dans la fenêtre Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées : Mes données ont des en-têtes - cochez cette case-ci pour retirer les en-têtes des colonnes de la sélection. Colonnes - continuez avec l'option Sélectionner tout, qui est activée par défaut ou décochez cette case et sélectionnez seulement les colonnes appropriées. Cliquez sur OK. Les valeurs en double sont supprimées et la fenêtre s'affiche indiquant le nombre de valeurs en double qui ont été supprimées et le nombre de valeurs uniques restantes. Si vous voulez récupérer les données supprimées, utiliser l'icône Annuler dans la barre d'outils supérieure ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Z." + "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez supprimer les données dupliquées d'une plage de données ou d'un tableau mis en forme. Pour supprimer les valeurs en double : Sélectionnez la plage de données appropriée avec doublons. Passez à l'onglet Données et cliquez le bouton Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Pour supprimer les valeurs en double d'un tableau mis en forme, vous pouvez aussi utiliser l'option Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées sur la barre latérale droite. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une partie des données, une fenêtre d'avertissement est affichée vous demandant si vous voulez d'étendre la sélection afin que toutes les données soient inclues ou de continuer avec la sélection en cours. Appuyez sur Développer ou Déplacer dans sélectionnés. Si vous choisissez l'option Développer, les valeurs en double dans les cellules adjacentes à la zone sélectionnée ne seront pas supprimés. La fenêtre Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées s'affiche : Cochez la case appropriée dans la fenêtre Supprimer les valeurs dupliquées : Mes données ont des en-têtes - cochez cette case-ci pour retirer les en-têtes des colonnes de la sélection. Colonnes - continuez avec l'option Sélectionner tout, qui est activée par défaut ou décochez cette case et sélectionnez seulement les colonnes appropriées. Cliquez sur OK. Les valeurs en double sont supprimées et la fenêtre s'affiche indiquant le nombre de valeurs en double qui ont été supprimées et le nombre de valeurs uniques restantes. Si vous voulez récupérer les données supprimées, utilisez l'icône Annuler dans la barre d'outils supérieure ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Z." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Enregistrer/imprimer/télécharger votre classeur", - "body": "Enregistrement Par défaut, le Tableur en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés. Pour enregistrer manuellement votre feuille de calcul actuelle dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer la feuille de calcul sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de feuille de calcul (XLTX ou OTS). Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la feuille de calcul résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez le format CSV, toutes les fonctionnalités (formatage de police, formules, etc.) à l'exception du texte brut ne seront pas conservées dans le fichier CSV. Si vous continuez à enregistrer, la fenêtre Choisir les options CSV s'ouvre. Par défaut, Unicode (UTF-8) est utilisé comme type d'Encodage. Le Séparateur par défaut est la virgule (,), mais les options suivantes sont également disponibles: point-virgule ( ;), deux-points ( :), tabulation, espace et autre (cette option vous permet de définir un caractère séparateur personnalisé). Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS, sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer la feuille de calcul active, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance. Une Aperçu et tous les paramètres d'impression disponibles s'affichent. Certains de ces paramètres (Marges, Orientation, Taille, Zone d'impression aussi que Mise à l'échelle) sont également disponibles dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure. Ici, vous pouvez régler les paramètres suivants : Zone d'impression - spécifiez les éléments à imprimer : Feuille actuelle, Toutes les feuilles ou Sélection, Si vous avez déjà défini une zone d'impression constante mais il vous faut imprimer la feuille entière, cochez la case Ignorer la zone d'impression. Paramètres de la feuille - spécifiez les paramètres d'impression individuels pour chaque feuille séparée, si vous avez sélectionné l'option Toutes les feuilles dans la liste déroulante Zone d'impression, Taille de la page - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante, Orientation de page - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale, Mise à l'échelle - si vous ne souhaitez pas que certaines colonnes ou lignes soient imprimées sur une deuxième page, vous pouvez réduire le contenu de la feuille pour l'adapter à une page en sélectionnant l'option correspondante : Ajuster la feuille à une page, Ajuster toutes les colonnes à une page ou Ajuster toutes les lignes à une page. Laissez l'option Taille réelle pour imprimer la feuille sans l'ajuster. Lorsque vous choisissez Options personnalisées du menu, la fenêtre Paramètres de mise à l'échelle s'affiche : Ajuster à permet de définir un nombre de pages défini à imprimer votre feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le nombre de page des listes Largeur et Hauteur. échelle permet de réduire ou agrandir l'échelle de la feuille de calcule pour l'ajuster sur les pages imprimées et définir manuellement le pourcentage de la taille réelle. Titres à imprimer - quand vous avez besoin d'imprimer les titres de lignes et colonnes sur chaque page, il faut utiliser Répéter les lignes en haut ou Répéter les colonnes à gauche et indiquer la ligne ou la colinne à répéter ou sélectionner l'une des options disponibles dans le menu déroulant : Lignes/colonnes verrouillées, Première ligne/colonne ou Ne pas répéter. Marges - spécifiez la distance entre les données de la feuille de calcul et les bords de la page imprimée en modifiant les paramètres prédéfinis dans les champs En haut, En bas, à gauche et à droite, Quadrillage et titres sert à définir des éléments à imprimer en activant la case à coché appropriée : Imprimer le quadrillage et Imprimer les titres des lignes et des colonnes. Paramètres de l'en-tête/du pied de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une feuille de calcul imprimée, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de page, le nom de la feuille, etc. Une fois tous les paramètres configurés, cliquez sur le bouton Imprimer pour savegarder vos modifications et imprimer la feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur le bouton Enregister pour sauvegarder tous les paramètres que vous avez modifié. Si vous n'arrivez pas à imprimer ou à savegarder la feuille de calcul, toutes les modifications apportées seront perdues. Aperçu permet de parcourir le classeur à l'aide des flèches en bas pour afficher l'aperçu des données sur la feuille de calcul après impression et pour corriger des erreurs éventuelles en utilisant les paramètres d'impression disponibles. Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe. Configurer la zone d'impression Si vous souhaitez imprimer une plage de cellules sélectionnée uniquement au lieu d'une feuille de calcul complète, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Sélection dans la liste déroulante Zone d'impression. Lorsque le classeur est sauvegardé, cette option n'est pas sauvegardée, elle est destinée à un usage unique. Si une plage de cellules doit être imprimée fréquemment, vous pouvez définir une zone d'impression constante sur la feuille de calcul. Lorsque la feuille de calcul est sauvegardée, la zone d'impression est également sauvegardée, elle peut être utilisée la prochaine fois que vous ouvrirez la feuille de calcul. Il est également possible de définir plusieurs zones d'impression constantes sur une feuille, dans ce cas chaque zone sera imprimée sur une page séparée. Pour définir une zone d'impression : Sélectionnez la plage de cellules nécessaire sur la feuille de calcul. Pour sélectionner plusieurs plages de cellules, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée, passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression et sélectionnez l'option Sélectionner la zone d'impression. La zone d'impression créée est sauvegardée lorsque la feuille de calcul est sauvegardée. Lorsque vous ouvrirez le fichier la prochaine fois, la zone d'impression spécifiée sera imprimée. Lorsque vous créez une zone d'impression, il se crée automatiquement pour la Zone_d_impression une plage nommée, qui s'affiche dans le Gestionnaire de noms. Pour mettre en surbrillance les bordures de toutes les zones d'impression de la feuille de calcul actuelle, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche dans la boîte de nom située à gauche de la barre de formule et sélectionner le nom de la Zone_d_impression dans la liste des noms. Pour ajouter des cellules à une zone d'impression : ouvrir la feuille de calcul voulue oùla zone d'impression est ajoutée, sélectionner la plage de cellules nécessaire sur la feuille de calcul, passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter à la zone d'impression. Une nouvelle zone d'impression sera ajoutée. Chaque zone d'impression sera imprimée sur une page séparée. Pour supprimer une zone d'impression : ouvrir la feuille de calcul voulue oùla zone d'impression est ajoutée, passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression et sélectionnez l'option Vider la zone d'impression. Toutes les zones d'impression existantes sur cette feuille seront supprimées. Ensuite, la feuille entière sera imprimée." + "body": "Enregistrement Par défaut, l'éditeur de classeurs en ligne enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés . Pour enregistrer manuellement votre feuille de calcul actuelle dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés . Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer la feuille de calcul sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'option Modèle de classeur. Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger la feuille de calcul résultante sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. Remarque: si vous sélectionnez le format CSV, toutes les fonctionnalités (formatage de police, formules, etc.) à l'exception du texte brut ne seront pas conservées dans le fichier CSV. Si vous continuez à enregistrer, la fenêtre Choisir les options CSV s'ouvre. Par défaut, Unicode (UTF-8) est utilisé comme type d'Encodage. Le Séparateur par défaut est la virgule (,), mais les options suivantes sont également disponibles: point-virgule ( ;), deux-points ( :), tabulation, espace et autre (cette option vous permet de définir un caractère séparateur personnalisé). Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer une copie sous, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG, sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer la feuille de calcul active, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Le navigateur Firefox permet d'imprimer sans télécharger le document au format .pdf d'avance. L'aperçu du classeur et les options d'impression s'afficheront. Certains de ces paramètres (Marges, Orientation, Taille, Zone d'impression aussi que Mise à l'échelle) sont également disponibles dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure. Ici, vous pouvez régler les paramètres suivants:. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez également configurer Impression sur les deux côtés pour imprimer sur un seul ou sur les deux côtés en retournant la feuille sur le côté long ou sur le petit côté aussi que Imprimer au format PDF ou utiliser le bouton Impression rapide de la barre d'outils supérieure pour imprimer le fichier sur la dernière imprimante sélectionnée ou sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par défaut. Zone d'impression - spécifiez les éléments à imprimer: Feuilles actives, Toutes les feuilles ou Sélection, Si vous avez déjà défini une zone d'impression constante mais que vous souhaitez imprimer la feuille entière, cochez la case Ignorer la zone d'impression. Pages - sélectionnez les pages à imprimer: Saisissez les numéros manuellement ou utilisez les flèches appropriées, Paramètres de la feuille - spécifiez les paramètres d'impression individuels pour chaque feuille séparée, si vous avez sélectionné l'option Toutes les feuilles dans la liste déroulante Zone d'impression, Taille de la page - sélectionnez l'une des tailles disponibles dans la liste déroulante, Orientation de page - choisissez l'option Portrait si vous souhaitez imprimer le contenu en orientation verticale, ou utilisez l'option Paysage pour l'imprimer en orientation horizontale, Mise à l'échelle - si vous ne souhaitez pas que certaines colonnes ou lignes soient imprimées sur une deuxième page, vous pouvez réduire le contenu de la feuille pour l'adapter à une page en sélectionnant l'option correspondante: Ajuster la feuille à une page, Ajuster toutes les colonnes à une page ou Ajuster toutes les lignes à une page. Laissez l'option Taille réelle pour imprimer la feuille sans l'ajuster. Lorsque vous choisissez Options personnalisées du menu, la fenêtre Paramètres de mise à l'échelle s'affiche: Ajuster à permet de définir un nombre de pages défini à imprimer votre feuille de calcul. Sélectionnez le nombre de page des listes Largeur et Hauteur. Échelle permet de réduire ou agrandir l'échelle de la feuille de calcule pour l'ajuster sur les pages imprimées et définir manuellement le pourcentage de la taille réelle. Titres à imprimer - quand vous avez besoin d'imprimer les titres de lignes et colonnes sur chaque page, il faut utiliser Répéter les lignes en haut ou Colonnes à répéter à gauche et sélectionner une des options disponibles dans le menu déroulant: sélectionner la ligne, lignes/colonnes verrouillées, première ligne/colonne. Lignes/colonnes verrouillées, Première ligne/colonne ou Ne pas répéter. Marges - spécifiez la distance entre les données de la feuille de calcul et les bords de la page imprimée en modifiant les paramètres prédéfinis dans les champs En haut, En bas, À gauche et À droite, Quadrillage et titres sert à définir des éléments à imprimer en activant la case à coché appropriée: Imprimer le quadrillage et Imprimer les titres des lignes et des colonnes. Paramètres de l'en-tête/du pied de page permettent d'ajouter des informations supplémentaires sur une feuille de calcul imprimée, telles que la date et l'heure, le numéro de page, le nom de la feuille, etc. Les en-têtes et les pieds de pages sont affichés dans la version imprimée de la feuille de calcul. Numéro de la première page - indiquez le numéro de la première page à imprimer. Une fois les paramètres d'impression configurés, cliquez sur Imprimer pour enregistrer les modifications et imprimer la feuille de calcul pu le bouton Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications apportées aux paramètres d'impression. Toutes les modifications apportées seront perdues si vous n'imprimer pas la feuille de calcule ou n'enregistrer pas les modifications. L'aperçu de la feuille de calcul permet de parcourir le classeur à l'aide des flèches en bas pour afficher l'aperçu des données sur la feuille de calcul après impression et pour corriger des erreurs éventuelles en utilisant les paramètres d'impression disponibles. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe. Configurer la zone d'impression Si vous souhaitez imprimer une plage de cellules sélectionnée uniquement au lieu d'une feuille de calcul complète, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Sélection dans la liste déroulante Zone d'impression. Lorsque le classeur est sauvegardé, cette option n'est pas sauvegardée, elle est destinée à un usage unique. Si une plage de cellules doit être imprimée fréquemment, vous pouvez définir une zone d'impression constante sur la feuille de calcul. Lorsque la feuille de calcul est sauvegardée, la zone d'impression est également sauvegardée, elle peut être utilisée la prochaine fois que vous ouvrirez la feuille de calcul. Il est également possible de définir plusieurs zones d'impression constantes sur une feuille, dans ce cas chaque zone sera imprimée sur une page séparée. Pour définir une zone d'impression: Sélectionnez la plage de cellules nécessaire sur la feuille de calcul. Pour sélectionner plusieurs plages de cellules, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée, passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression et choisissez l'option Sélectionner la zone d'impression. La zone d'impression créée est sauvegardée lorsque la feuille de calcul est sauvegardée. Lorsque vous ouvrirez le fichier la prochaine fois, la zone d'impression spécifiée sera imprimée. Lorsque vous créez une zone d'impression, il se crée automatiquement pour la Zone_d_impression une plage nommée , qui s'affiche dans le Gestionnaire de noms. Pour mettre en surbrillance les bordures de toutes les zones d'impression de la feuille de calcul actuelle, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche dans la boîte de nom située à gauche de la barre de formule et sélectionner le nom de la Zone_d_impression dans la liste des noms. Pour ajouter des cellules à une zone d'impression: ouvrir la feuille de calcul voulue où la zone d'impression est ajoutée, sélectionner la plage de cellules nécessaire sur la feuille de calcul, passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du du bouton Zone d'impression et choisissez l'option Ajouter à la zone d'impression. Une nouvelle zone d'impression sera ajoutée. Chaque zone d'impression sera imprimée sur une page séparée. Pour supprimer une zone d'impression : ouvrir la feuille de calcul voulue où la zone d'impression est ajoutée, passez à l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur la flèche à côté du bouton Zone d'impression et choisissez l'option Effacer la zone d'impression. Toutes les zones d'impression existantes sur cette feuille seront supprimées. Ensuite, la feuille entière sera imprimée." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm", "title": "Mettre une feuille de calcul à l'échelle", - "body": "Si vous souhaitez insérer une feuille de calcul entière sur une seule page à imprimer, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Mettre à l'échelle. Cette fonction du Tableur permet de mettre à l'échelle les données sur un nombre défini de pages. Pour faire cela, suivez ces simples étapes : Dans la barre d'outils supérieure, accédez à l'onglet Mise en page et choisissez la fonction Mettre à l'échelle, Dans la section Hauteur sélectionnez 1 page et définissez Largeur sur Auto pour imprimer toutes les feuilles sur une page. La valeur de l'échelle sera modifiée automatiquement. Cette valeur s'affiche dans la section Échelle. Vous pouvez aussi changer la valeur de l'échelle manuellement. Pour faire cela, définissez les paramètres de Hauteur et Largeur sur Auto et utilisez les boutons «+» et «-» pour changer l'échelle de la feuille de calcul. Les bordures de la page d'impression seront couvertes de lignes en pointillés sur la feuille de calcul. Sur l'onglet Fichier, cliquez sur Imprimer, ou utilisez le raccourci clavier Ctrl + P et dans la fenêtre suivante, ajustez les paramètres d'impression. Par exemple, s'il y a plusieurs colonnes sur une feuille, il peut être utile de changer l'orientation de la page en Portrait. Ou imprimez une plage de cellules présélectionnée range of cells. En savoir plus sur les paramètres d'impression dans cet article. Remarque  : gardez à l'esprit, cependant, que l'impression peut être difficile à lire car l'éditeur réduit les données pour les adapter." + "body": "Si vous souhaitez insérer une feuille de calcul entière sur une seule page à imprimer, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Mettre à l'échelle. Cette fonction du Tableur permet de mettre à l'échelle les données sur un nombre défini de pages. Pour faire cela, suivez ces simples étapes : Dans la barre d'outils supérieure, accédez à l'onglet Mise en page et choisissez la fonction Mettre à l'échelle, Dans la section Hauteur sélectionnez 1 page et définissez Largeur sur Auto pour imprimer toutes les feuilles sur une page. La valeur de l'échelle sera modifiée automatiquement. Cette valeur s'affiche dans la section Échelle. Vous pouvez aussi changer la valeur de l'échelle manuellement. Pour faire cela, définissez les paramètres de Hauteur et Largeur sur Auto et utilisez les boutons «+» et «-» pour changer l'échelle de la feuille de calcul. Les bordures de la page d'impression seront couvertes de lignes en pointillés sur la feuille de calcul. Sur l'onglet Fichier, cliquez sur Imprimer, ou utilisez le raccourci clavier Ctrl + P et dans la fenêtre suivante, ajustez les paramètres d'impression. Par exemple, s'il y a plusieurs colonnes sur une feuille, il peut être utile de changer l'orientation de la page en Portrait. Ou imprimez une plage de cellules présélectionnée. En savoir plus sur les paramètres d'impression dans cet article. Remarque  : gardez à l'esprit, cependant, que l'impression peut être difficile à lire car l'éditeur réduit les données pour les adapter." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SheetView.htm", "title": "Configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille", - "body": "Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de feuille en fonction du filtre appliqué. Vous pouvez configurer les options de filtrage pour un affichage de feuille et le utiliser plus tard avec vos collègues ou vous pouvez même configurer plusieurs affichages de feuille sur la même feuille de calcul et basculer rapidement entre les différents affichages. Si vous collaborez sur une feuille de calcul avec d'autres personnes, vous pouvez créer des affichages personnalisés et utiliser les fonctionnalités de filtre sans être perturbés par d'autres co-auteurs. Créer un nouveau affichage de feuille Étant donné que l'affichage de feuille est conçu pour personnaliser la filtrage , vous devez donc configurer les paramètres de la feuille. Veuillez consulter cette page pour en savoir plus sur la filtrage. Il existe deux façons de créer un nouveau affichage de feuille. Vous pouvez passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône Affichage de feuille. Choisissez le Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles dans la liste déroulante, appuyez sur Nouveau dans la fenêtre du Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles qui s'affiche et tapez le nom de l'affichage ou appuyez sur Nouveau sous l'onglet Affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure. L'affichage est dénommé par défaut “Affichage1/2/3...”. Pour changer le nom, il faut passer au Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles, sélectionner l'affichage que vous souhaitez renommer et appuyez sur Renommer. Appuyez sur Passer à l'aperçu, pour activer la configuration de l'affichage. Basculer entre les affichages passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône Affichage de feuille. Choisissez le Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles dans la liste déroulante. Sélectionnez l'affichage que vous souhaitez activer du champ Affichages de feuille. Appuyez sur Passer à l'aperçu pour activer la configuration de l'affichage. Pour quitter l'affichage actuel, appuyez sur l'icône, Fermer sous l'onglet Affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône Affichage de feuille. Choisissez le Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles dans la liste déroulante. Sélectionnez l'affichage que vous souhaitez modifier dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles qui s'affiche. Choisissez parmi les options suivantes : Renommer pour changer le nom de l'affichage choisi, Dupliquer pour copier l'affichage choisi, Supprimer pour effacer l'affichage choisi, Appuyez sur Passer à l'aperçu, pour activer la configuration de l'affichage choisi." + "body": "Tableur ONLYOFFICE permet de configurer différents paramètres d'affichage de feuille en fonction du filtre appliqué. Vous pouvez configurer les options de filtrage pour un affichage de feuille et le utiliser plus tard avec vos collègues ou vous pouvez même configurer plusieurs affichages de feuille sur la même feuille de calcul et basculer rapidement entre les différents affichages. Si vous collaborez sur une feuille de calcul avec d'autres personnes, vous pouvez créer des affichages personnalisés et utiliser les fonctionnalités de filtre sans être perturbés par d'autres co-auteurs. Créer un nouveau affichage de feuille Étant donné que l'affichage de feuille est conçu pour personnaliser la filtrage , vous devez donc configurer les paramètres de la feuille. Veuillez consulter cette page pour en savoir plus sur la filtrage. Il existe deux façons de créer un nouveau affichage de feuille. Vous pouvez passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône Affichage de feuille. Choisissez le Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles dans la liste déroulante, appuyez sur Nouveau dans la fenêtre du Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles qui s'affiche et tapez le nom de l'affichage ou appuyez sur Nouveau sous l'onglet Affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure. L'affichage est dénommé par défaut “Affichage1/2/3...”. Pour changer le nom, il faut passer au Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles, sélectionner l'affichage que vous souhaitez renommer et appuyez sur Renommer. Appuyez sur Passer à l'aperçu, pour activer la configuration de l'affichage. Basculer entre les affichages passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône Affichage de feuille. Choisissez le Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles dans la liste déroulante. Sélectionnez l'affichage que vous souhaitez activer du champ Affichages de feuille. Appuyez sur Passer à l'aperçu pour activer la configuration de l'affichage. Pour quitter l'affichage actuel, appuyez sur l'icône, Fermer sous l'onglet Affichage dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Configurer les paramètres d'affichage de feuille passer à l'onglet Affichage et cliquer sur l'icône Affichage de feuille. Choisissez le Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles dans la liste déroulante. Sélectionnez l'affichage que vous souhaitez modifier dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire d'affichage des feuilles qui s'affiche. Choisissez parmi les options suivantes : Renommer pour changer le nom de l'affichage choisi, Dupliquer pour copier l'affichage choisi, Supprimer pour effacer l'affichage choisi, Appuyez sur Passer à l'aperçu, pour activer la configuration de l'affichage choisi." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Slicers.htm", "title": "Créer des segments dans les tableaux mis en forme d'après un modèle", - "body": "Créer un nouveau segment Une fois que vous avez créé dans le Tableur ou un tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle, vous pouvez créer des segments pour filtrer les données rapidement. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau mis en forme avec la souris et appuyez sur l'icône Paramètres du tableau à droite. Cliquez sur Insérer un segment sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite. Vous pouvez également passer à l'onglet Insérer dans la barre d'outils supérieure et y appuyer sur le bouton Segment. La fenêtre Insérer segments s'affiche : Dans la fenêtre Insérer segments, activez les cases à cocher de colonnes appropriées. Cliquez sur OK. Un segment est inséré dans toutes les colonnes que vous avez sélectionnées. Si vous avez ajouté plusieurs segments, ceux-ci se superposent. Une fois ajouté, on peut modifier la taille et l'emplacement aussi que les paramètres du segment. Un segment comporte des boutons sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer pour filtrer les données du tableau mis en forme. Les boutons correspondants aux cellules vides portent les étiquettes (vide). Lorsque vous appuyer sur le bouton du segment, tous les autres boutons sont désactivés et la colonne visée du tableau source est filtrée pour afficher seulement les éléments choisis. Lorsque vous ajoutez plusieurs segments, la modification d'un segment peut affecter les éléments d'un autre. Lorsqu'il y a plusieurs filtres dans un même segment, les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données peuvent apparaître dans un autre segment (couleur de fond plus claire) : Vous pouvez modifier le façon d'affichage des éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données dans les paramètres du segment. Pour sélectionner plusieurs boutons de segment, utiliser l'icône Sélection multiple dans le coin supérieur droit du segment ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Alt+S. Sélectionnez les boutons du segment en cochant les cases une par une. Pour effacer le filtre du segment, appuyez sur l'icône Annuler les filtres dans le coin supérieur droit du segment ou appuyez sur Alt+C. Modifier les segments On peut modifier certains paramètres sous l'onglet Paramètres des segments sur la barre latérale droite qui s'affiche quand vous sélectionnez le segment avec la souris. Cliquez sur l'icône pour masquer ou afficher cet onglet. Modifier la taille et l'emplacement du segment Les options Largeur et Hauteur vous permettons de modifier la largeur et la taille du segment. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas elle se présente comme ça) ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. La section Position permet de modifier la position du segment Horizontal et/ou Vertical. L'option Désactiver le redimensionnement et le déplacement permet d'empêcher le segment d'être redimensionné ou déplacé. Lorsque cette option active, les options Largeur, Hauteur, Position et Boutons sont désactivées. Modifier la mise en forme et le style du segment La section Boutons permet de déterminer le nombre de Colonnes et de configurer la Largeur et la Hauteur des boutons. Par défaut, un segment comporte une colonne. Les éléments en texte court peuvent être affichée sur deux ou plusieurs colonnes : Si vous modifiez la largeur du bouton, la largeur du segment change en conséquence. Si vous modifiez la hauteur du bouton, une barre de défilement est insérée au segment : La section Style vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de segment prédéfinis. Utiliser les fonctionnalités de tri et de filtrage Croissant (A à Z) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus petit au plus grand. Décroissant (Z à A) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique décroissant de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus grand au plus petit. Masquer les éléments vides permet de masquer les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données dans le segment. Lorsque cette option est active, les options Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données et Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin sont désactivées. Lorsque l'option Masquer les éléments vides est désactivé, on peut utiliser les options suivantes : Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données pour afficher les éléments sans données sous format différent (couleur de fond plus claire). Si cette option est désactivée, le format de tous les éléments reste le même. Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin permet d'afficher les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données à la fin de la liste. Si cette option est désactivée, tous les éléments sont affichés dans l'ordre du tableau source. Configurer les paramètres avancés des segments Pour changer les paramètres avancés du segment, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Segment - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Style et taille comprend les options suivantes : L'option En-tête permet de modifier l'en-tête du segment. Il faut désactiver l'option Afficher l'en-tête si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher l'en-tête du segment. La section Style vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de segment prédéfinis. Les options Largeur et Hauteur vous permettons de modifier la largeur et la taille du segment. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas elle se présente comme ça) ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. La section Boutons permet de déterminer le nombre de Colonnes et de configurer la Largeur et la Hauteur des boutons. L'onglet Trier et filtrer comprend les options suivantes : Croissant (A à Z) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus petit au plus grand. Décroissant (Z à A) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique décroissant de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus grand au plus petit. Masquer les éléments vides permet de masquer les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données dans le segment. Lorsque cette option est active, les options Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données et Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin sont désactivées. Lorsque l'option Masquer les éléments vides est désactivé, on peut utiliser les options suivantes : Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données pour afficher les éléments sans données sous format différent (couleur de fond plus claire). Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin permet d'afficher les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données à la fin de la liste. L'onglet Références comprend les options suivantes : L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparait à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources. L'option Utiliser le nom dans les formules permet de visualiser le nom du segment dans le Gestionnaire de noms. L'option Nom permet de définir un nom personnalisé pour le rendre plus compréhensible et significatif. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes : Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placé le segment derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple : insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le segment se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du segment s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé le segment derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le segment se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le segment demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du segment si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du segment. Supprimer un segment Pour supprimer un segment, cliquez pour le sélectionner. Appuyez sur la touche de Suppression." + "body": "Créer un nouveau segment Une fois que vous avez créé dans le Tableur ou un tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle, vous pouvez créer des segments pour filtrer les données rapidement. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez au moins une cellule dans le tableau mis en forme avec la souris et appuyez sur l'icône Paramètres du tableau à droite. Cliquez sur Insérer un segment sous l'onglet Paramètres du tableau dans la barre latérale droite. Vous pouvez également passer à l'onglet Insérer dans la barre d'outils supérieure et y appuyer sur le bouton Segment. La fenêtre Insérer segments s'affiche : Dans la fenêtre Insérer segments, activez les cases à cocher de colonnes appropriées. Cliquez sur OK. Un segment est inséré dans toutes les colonnes que vous avez sélectionnées. Si vous avez ajouté plusieurs segments, ceux-ci se superposent. Une fois ajouté, on peut modifier la taille et l'emplacement aussi que les paramètres du segment. Un segment comporte des boutons sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer pour filtrer les données du tableau mis en forme. Les boutons correspondants aux cellules vides portent les étiquettes (vide). Lorsque vous appuyer sur le bouton du segment, tous les autres boutons sont désactivés et la colonne visée du tableau source est filtrée pour afficher seulement les éléments choisis. Lorsque vous ajoutez plusieurs segments, la modification d'un segment peut affecter les éléments d'un autre. Lorsqu'il y a plusieurs filtres dans un même segment, les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données peuvent apparaître dans un autre segment (couleur de fond plus claire) : Vous pouvez modifier le façon d'affichage des éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données dans les paramètres du segment. Pour sélectionner plusieurs boutons de segment, utiliser l'icône Sélection multiple dans le coin supérieur droit du segment ou appuyez sur la combinaison de touches Alt+S. Sélectionnez les boutons du segment en cochant les cases une par une. Pour effacer le filtre du segment, appuyez sur l'icône Annuler les filtres dans le coin supérieur droit du segment ou appuyez sur Alt+C. Modifier les segments On peut modifier certains paramètres sous l'onglet Paramètres des segments sur la barre latérale droite qui s'affiche quand vous sélectionnez le segment avec la souris. Cliquez sur l'icône pour masquer ou afficher cet onglet. Modifier la taille et l'emplacement du segment Les options Largeur et Hauteur vous permettons de modifier la largeur et la taille du segment. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas elle se présente comme ça ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. La section Position permet de modifier la position du segment Horizontal et/ou Vertical. L'option Désactiver le redimensionnement et le déplacement permet d'empêcher le segment d'être redimensionné ou déplacé. Lorsque cette option active, les options Largeur, Hauteur, Position et Boutons sont désactivées. Modifier la mise en forme et le style du segment La section Boutons permet de déterminer le nombre de Colonnes et de configurer la Largeur et la Hauteur des boutons. Par défaut, un segment comporte une colonne. Les éléments en texte court peuvent être affichée sur deux ou plusieurs colonnes : Si vous modifiez la largeur du bouton, la largeur du segment change en conséquence. Si vous modifiez la hauteur du bouton, une barre de défilement est insérée au segment : La section Style vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de segment prédéfinis. Utiliser les fonctionnalités de tri et de filtrage Croissant (A à Z) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus petit au plus grand. Décroissant (Z à A) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique décroissant de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus grand au plus petit. Masquer les éléments vides permet de masquer les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données dans le segment. Lorsque cette option est active, les options Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données et Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin sont désactivées. Lorsque l'option Masquer les éléments vides est désactivé, on peut utiliser les options suivantes : Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données pour afficher les éléments sans données sous format différent (couleur de fond plus claire). Si cette option est désactivée, le format de tous les éléments reste le même. Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin permet d'afficher les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données à la fin de la liste. Si cette option est désactivée, tous les éléments sont affichés dans l'ordre du tableau source. Configurer les paramètres avancés des segments Pour changer les paramètres avancés du segment, cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Segment - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre : L'onglet Style et taille comprend les options suivantes : L'option En-tête permet de modifier l'en-tête du segment. Il faut désactiver l'option Afficher l'en-tête si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher l'en-tête du segment. La section Style vous permet de choisir l'un des styles de segment prédéfinis. Les options Largeur et Hauteur vous permettons de modifier la largeur et la taille du segment. Lorsque le bouton Proportions constantes est activé (dans ce cas elle se présente comme ça) ), le rapport largeur/hauteur d'origine s'ajuste proportionnellement. La section Boutons permet de déterminer le nombre de Colonnes et de configurer la Largeur et la Hauteur des boutons. L'onglet Trier et filtrer comprend les options suivantes : Croissant (A à Z) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus petit au plus grand. Décroissant (Z à A) s'utilise pour trier les données par ordre alphabétique décroissant de A à Z ou par valeurs numériques du plus grand au plus petit. Masquer les éléments vides permet de masquer les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données dans le segment. Lorsque cette option est active, les options Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données et Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin sont désactivées. Lorsque l'option Masquer les éléments vides est désactivé, on peut utiliser les options suivantes : Indiquer visuellement les éléments sans données pour afficher les éléments sans données sous format différent (couleur de fond plus claire). Afficher les éléments sans données à la fin permet d'afficher les éléments qui ne contiennent pas de données à la fin de la liste. L'onglet Références comprend les options suivantes : L'option Nom de source vous permet de visualiser le nom du champ tel qu'il apparaît à l'en-tête de colonne dans l'ensemble de données sources. L'option Utiliser le nom dans les formules permet de visualiser le nom du segment dans le Gestionnaire de noms. L'option Nom permet de définir un nom personnalisé pour le rendre plus compréhensible et significatif. L'onglet Alignement dans une cellule comprend les options suivantes : Déplacer et dimensionner avec des cellules - cette option permet de placé le segment derrière la cellule. Quand une cellule se déplace (par exemple : insertion ou suppression des lignes/colonnes), le segment se déplace aussi. Quand vous ajustez la largeur ou la hauteur de la cellule, la dimension du segment s'ajuste aussi. Déplacer sans dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option permet de placé le segment derrière la cellule mais d'empêcher son redimensionnement. Quand une cellule se déplace, le segment se déplace aussi, mais si vous redimensionnez la cellule, le segment demeure inchangé. Ne pas déplacer et dimensionner avec les cellules - cette option empêche le déplacement ou redimensionnement du segment si la position ou la dimension de la cellule restent inchangées. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du segment. Supprimer un segment Pour supprimer un segment, cliquez pour le sélectionner. Appuyez sur la touche de Suppression." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SortData.htm", "title": "Trier et filtrer les données", - "body": "Trier les données Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez trier rapidement vos données dans une feuille de calcul en utilisant l'une des options disponibles : Croissant sert à trier vos données dans l'ordre croissant - De A à Z par ordre alphabétique ou de plus petit au plus grand pour les données numériques. Décroissant sert à trier vos données dans l'ordre décroissant - De Z à A par ordre alphabétique ou de plus grand au plus petit pour les données numériques. Remarque : les options de Tri sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données. Pour trier vos données, sélectionner une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour trier toute la plage), cliquez sur l'icône Trier de A à Z située sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données dans l'ordre croissant, OU cliquez sur l'icône Trier de Z à A sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données dans l'ordre décroissant. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez une seule colonne/ligne dans une plage de cellules ou une partie de la colonne/ligne, il vous sera demandé si vous souhaitez étendre la sélection pour inclure des cellules adjacentes ou trier uniquement les données sélectionnées. Vous pouvez également trier vos données en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'option de A à Z ou de Z à A dans le sous-menu. Il est également possible de trier les données par une couleur en utilisant le menu contextuel : faites un clic droit sur une cellule contenant la couleur que vous voulez utiliser pour trier vos données, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu : Couleur de cellule sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne, Couleur de police sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne. Filtrer les données Pour afficher uniquement les lignes qui répondent aux certains critères utilisez l'option Filtrer. Remarque : les options de Filtre sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données. Pour activer un filtre, Sélectionnez une plage de cellules contenant des données à filtrer (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour filtrer toute la plage), Cliquez sur l'icône Filtrer dans l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. La flèche de déroulement apparaît dans la première cellule de chaque colonne de la plage de cellules sélectionnée. Cela signifie que le filtre est activé. Pour appliquer un filtre : Cliquez sur la flèche déroulante . La liste des options de Filtre s'affiche : Remarque : vous pouvez ajuster la taille de la fenêtre de filtrage en faisant glisser sa bordure droite à droite ou à gauche pour afficher les données d'une manière aussi convenable que possible. Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Vous pouvez procéder de l'une des trois manières suivantes : sélectionnez les données à afficher, filtrez les données selon certains critères ou filtrez les données par couleur. Sélectionner les données à afficher Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtre sont triées par ordre croissant. Le nombre de valeurs uniques dans la plage de données filtrée s'affiche à droite de chaque valeur dans la fenêtre de filtrage. Remarque : la case à cocher {Vides} correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules. Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ , les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles : Sélectionner tous les résultats de la recherche - cochée par défaut. Permet de sélectionner toutes les valeurs correspondant à la requête. Ajouter le sélection actuelle au filtre - si vous cochez cette case, les valeurs sélectionnées ne seront pas masquées lorsque vous appliquerez le filtre. Après avoir sélectionné toutes les données nécessaires, cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la liste des options de Filtre pour appliquer le filtre. Filtrer les données selon certains critères En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre de nombre ou le Filtre de texte dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtre, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu : Pour le Filtre de nombre, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Les 10 premiers, Au dessus de la moyenne, Au dessous de la moyenne, Filtre personnalisé. Pour le Filtre de texte, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas..., Filtre personnalisé. Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers et Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne), la fenêtre Filtre personnalisé s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la liste déroulante supérieure. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Pour ajouter un critère supplémentaire, utilisez le bouton de commande Et si vous avez besoin de données qui satisfont aux deux critères ou cliquez sur le bouton de commande Ou si l'un des critères ou les deux peuvent être satisfaits. Sélectionnez ensuite le deuxième critère dans la liste déroulante inférieure et entrez la valeur nécessaire sur la droite. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Si vous choisissez l'option Filtre personnalisé... dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre/texte, le premier critère n'est pas sélectionné automatiquement, vous pouvez le définir vous-même. Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira : La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure : Élément ou Pour cent. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Lorsque vous choisissez Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne de la liste Filtre de nombre, le filtre est appliqué tout de suite. Filtrer les données par couleur Si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez filtrer contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou leur couleur de police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis), vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options suivantes Filtrer par couleur des cellules - pour n'afficher que les entrées avec une certaine couleur de fond de cellule et masquer les autres, Filtrer par couleur de police - pour afficher uniquement les entrées avec une certaine couleur de police de cellule et masquer les autres. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option souhaitée, une palette contenant les couleurs utilisées dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée s'ouvre. Choisissez l'une des couleurs pour appliquer le filtre. Le bouton Filtre apparaîtra dans la première cellule de la colonne. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué. Le nombre d'enregistrements filtrés sera affiché dans la barre d'état (par exemple 25 des 80 enregistrements filtrés). Remarque : lorsque le filtre est appliqué, les lignes filtrées ne peuvent pas être modifiées lors du remplissage automatique, du formatage ou de la suppression du contenu visible. De telles actions affectent uniquement les lignes visibles, les lignes masquées par le filtre restent inchangées. Lorsque vous copiez et collez les données filtrées, seules les lignes visibles peuvent être copiées et collées. Ceci n'est pas équivalent aux lignes masquées manuellement qui sont affectées par toutes les actions similaires. Trier les données filtrées Vous pouvez définir l'ordre de tri des données que vous avez activées ou auxquelles vous avez appliqué un filtre. Cliquez sur la flèche de la liste déroulante ou sur le bouton Filtre et sélectionnez l'une des options dans la liste des options de Filtre : Trier du plus petit au plus grand - permet de trier vos données dans l'ordre croissant, en affichant la valeur la plus basse en haut de la colonne, Trier du plus grand au plus petit - permet de trier vos données dans l'ordre décroissant, en affichant la valeur la plus élevée en haut de la colonne, Trier par couleur des cellules - permet de sélectionner l'une des couleurs et d'afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne, Trier par couleur de police - permet de sélectionner l'une des couleurs et d'afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne. Les deux dernières options peuvent être utilisées si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou la couleur de leur police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis). Le sens du tri sera indiqué par une flèche dans les boutons du filtre. si les données sont triées par ordre croissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci : et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci : . Si les données sont triées par ordre décroissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci : et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci : . Vous pouvez également trier rapidement vos données par couleur en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. faites un clic droit sur une cellule contenant la couleur que vous voulez utiliser pour trier vos données, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu : Couleur de cellule sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne, Couleur de police sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne. Filtrer par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée Vous pouvez également filtrer rapidement vos données par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une cellule, sélectionnez l'option Filtre dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : Filtrer par valeur de la cellule sélectionnée - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même valeur que la cellule sélectionnée. Filtrer par couleur de cellule - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même couleur de fond de cellule que la cellule sélectionnée. Filtrer par couleur de police - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même couleur de police de cellule que la cellule sélectionnée. Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, le Tableur vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez mettre en forme, cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau sous l'onglet Accueil dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le modèle souhaité dans la galerie, dans la fenêtre contextuelle ouverte, vérifiez la plage de cellules à mettre en forme comme un tableau, cochez la case Titre si vous souhaitez inclure les en-têtes de tableau dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sinon la ligne d'en-tête sera ajoutée en haut tandis que la plage de cellules sélectionnée sera déplacée d'une ligne vers le bas, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer le modèle sélectionné. Le modèle sera appliqué à la plage de cellules sélectionnée et vous serez en mesure d'éditer les en-têtes de tableau et d'appliquer le filtre pour travailler avec vos données. Pour en savoir plus sur la mise en forme des tableaux d'après un modèle, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Appliquer à nouveau le filtre Si les données filtrées ont été modifiées, vous pouvez actualiser le filtre pour afficher un résultat à jour : cliquez sur le bouton Filtre dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant les données filtrées, sélectionnez l'option Réappliquer dans la liste des options de Filtre qui s'ouvre. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une cellule dans la colonne contenant les données filtrées et sélectionner l'option Réappliquer dans le menu contextuel. Effacer le filtre Pour effacer le filtre, cliquez sur le bouton Filtre dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant les données filtrées, sélectionnez l'option Effacer dans la liste d'options de Filtre qui s'ouvre. Vous pouvez également procéder de la manière suivante : sélectionner la plage de cellules contenant les données filtrées, cliquez sur l'icône Effacer le filtre située dans l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le filtre restera activé, mais tous les paramètres de filtre appliqués seront supprimés et les boutons Filtre dans les premières cellules des colonnes seront remplacés par les flèches déroulantes . Supprimer le filtre Pour enlever le filtre, sélectionner la plage de cellules contenant les données filtrées, cliquez sur l'icône Filtrer située dans l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le filtre sera désactivé et les flèches déroulantes disparaîtront des premières cellules des colonnes. Trier les données en fonction de plusieurs colonnes/lignes Pour trier les données en fonction de plusieurs colonnes/lignes, vous pouvez créer un tri à plusieurs niveaux en utilisant l'option Tri personnalisé. sélectionner une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour trier toute la plage), cliquez sur l'icône Tri personnalisé sous l'onglet Données de la barre d'outils supérieure, La fenêtre Trier s'affiche : La tri par défaut est par colonne. Pour modifier l'orientation de tri (c'est à dire trier les données sur les lignes au lieu de colonnes), cliquez sur le bouton Options en haut. La fenêtre Options de tri s'affiche : activez la case Mes données ont des en-têtes le cas échéant. choisissez Orientation appropriée : Trier du haut vers le bas pour trier les données sur colonnes ou Trier de la gauche vers la droite pour trier les données sur lignes, cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermez la fenêtre. spécifiez le premier niveau de tri dans le champ Trier par : dans la section Colonne/Ligne sélectionnez la première colonne/ligne à trier, dans la liste Trier sur, choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Valeurs, Couleur de cellule ou Couleur de police, dans la liste Ordre, spécifiez l'ordre de tri. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du choix dans la liste Trier sur : si vous choisissez l'option Valeurs, choisissez entre Ascendant/Descendant pour les valeurs numériques dans la plage ou de A à Z / de Z à A pour les valeurs de texte dans la plage, si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de cellule, choisissez la couleur de cellule appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes, si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de police, choisissez la couleur de police appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes, ajoutez encore un niveau de tri en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter un niveau, sélectionnez la deuxième ligne/colonne à trier et configurez le autres paramètres de tri dans des champs Puis par comme il est décrit ci-dessus. Ajoutez plusieurs niveaux de la même façon le cas échéant. Gérez tous les niveaux ajouté à l'aide des boutons en haut de la fenêtre : Supprimer un niveau, Copier un niveau ou changer l'ordre des niveaux à l'aide des boutons fléché Passer au niveau inférieur/Passer au niveau supérieur. Cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermez la fenêtre. Toutes les données seront triées selon les niveaux de tri définis." - }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Prise en charge des graphiques SmartArt par l'Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Un graphique SmartArt sert à créer une représentation visuelle de la structure hiérarchique en choisissant le type du graphique qui convient le mieux. Éditeur de feuilles de calcul ONLYOFFICE prend en charge les graphiques SmartArt qui étaient créés dans d'autres applications. Vous pouvez ouvrir un fichier contenant SmartArt et le modifier en tant qu'un élément graphique en utilisant les outils d'édition disponibles. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur un graphique SmartArt ou sur ses éléments, les onglets suivants deviennent actifs sur la barre latérale droite pour modifier la disposition du graphique : Paramètres de la forme pour modifier les formes inclues dans le graphique. Vous pouvez modifier les formes, le remplissage, les lignes, le style d'habillage, la position, les poids et les flèches, la zone de texte, l'alignement dans une cellule et le texte de remplacement. Paramètres du paragraphe pour modifier les retraits et l'espacement, la police et les taquets. Veuillez consulter la section Mise en forme du texte de la cellule pour une description détaillée de toutes options disponibles. Cette onglet n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Paramètres de Texte Art pour modifier le style des objets Texte Art inclus dans le graphique SmartArt pour mettre en évidence du texte. Vous pouvez modifier le modèle de l'objet Text Art, le remplissage, la couleur et l'opacité, le poids, la couleur et le type des traits. Cette onglet n'est disponible que pour des éléments du graphique SmartArt. Faites un clic droit sur la bordure du graphique SmartArt ou sur la bordure de ses éléments pour accéder aux options suivantes : Organiser pour organiser des objets en utilisant les options suivantes : Mettre au premier plan, Mettre en arrière plan, Déplacer vers l'avant et Reculer sont disponibles pour le graphique SmartArt. Les options Grouper et Dissocier sont disponibles pour les éléments du graphique SmartArt et dépendent du fait s'ils sont groupés ou non. Rotation pour définir le sens de rotation de l'élément inclus dans le graphique SmartArt : Faire pivoter à droite de 90°, Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°, Retourner horizontalement, Retourner verticalement. L'option Rotation n'est disponible que pour les éléments du graphique SmartArt. Affecter une macro pour rendre l'accès à macro plus rapide et facile dans une feuille de calcul. Paramètres avancés de la forme pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de mise en forme. Faites un clic droit sur l'élément du graphique SmartArt pour accéder aux options suivantes : Alignement vertical pour définir l'alignement du texte dans l'élément du graphique SmartArt : Aligner en haut, Aligner au milieu ou Aligner en bas. Orientation du texte pour définir l'orientation du texte dans l'élément du graphique SmartArt : Horizontal, Rotation du texte vers le bas, Rotation du texte vers le haut. Lien hypertexte pour ajouter un lien hypertexte menant à l'élément du graphique SmartArt. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de mise en forme du paragraphe." + "body": "Trier les données Vous pouvez trier rapidement vos données dans l'éditeur de classeurs en utilisant l'une des options disponibles: Croissant sert à trier vos données dans l'ordre croissant - De A à Z par ordre alphabétique ou de plus petit au plus grand pour les données numériques. Décroissant sert à trier vos données dans l'ordre décroissant - De Z à A par ordre alphabétique ou de plus grand au plus petit pour les données numériques. Remarque: les options de Tri sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données. Pour trier vos données, sélectionner une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour trier toute la plage), cliquez sur icône Trier par ordre croissant sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données par ordre croissant, OU cliquez sur l'icône Trier par ordre décroissant sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure pour trier les données par ordre décroissant. Remarque: si vous sélectionnez une seule colonne/ligne dans une plage de cellules ou une partie de la colonne/ligne, il vous sera demandé si vous souhaitez étendre la sélection pour inclure des cellules adjacentes ou trier uniquement les données sélectionnées. Vous pouvez également trier vos données en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'option de A à Z ou de Z à A dans le sous-menu. Il est également possible de trier les données par une couleur en utilisant le menu contextuel: faites un clic droit sur une cellule contenant la couleur que vous voulez utiliser pour trier vos données, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu: Couleur de cellule sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne, Couleur de police sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne. Filtrer les données Pour afficher uniquement les lignes qui répondent aux certains critères utilisez l'option Filtre. Remarque: les options de Filtrage sont disponibles sous l'onglet Accueil aussi que sous l'onglet Données. Pour activer un filtre, Sélectionnez une plage de cellules contenant des données à filtrer (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour filtrer toute la plage), Cliquez sur l'icône Filtrer sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. La flèche de déroulement apparaît dans la première cellule de chaque colonne de la plage de cellules sélectionnée. Cela signifie que le filtre est activé. Pour appliquer un filtre: Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement . La liste des options de Filtrage s'affiche: Remarque: vous pouvez ajuster la taille de la fenêtre de filtrage en faisant glisser sa bordure droite à droite ou à gauche pour afficher les données d'une manière aussi convenable que possible. Configurez les paramètres du filtre. Vous pouvez procéder de l'une des trois manières suivantes: sélectionnez les données à afficher, filtrez les données selon certains critères ou filtrez les données par couleur. Sélectionner les données à afficher Décochez les cases des données que vous souhaitez masquer. A votre convenance, toutes les données dans la liste des options de Filtrage sont triées par ordre croissant. Le nombre de valeurs uniques dans la plage de données filtrée s'affiche à droite de chaque valeur dans la fenêtre de filtrage. Remarque: la case à cocher {Vides} correspond aux cellules vides. Celle-ci est disponible quand il y a au moins une cellule vide dans la plage de cellules. Pour faciliter la procédure, utilisez le champ de recherche en haut. Taper votre requête partiellement ou entièrement dans le champ , les valeurs qui comprennent ces caractères-ci, s'affichent dans la liste ci-dessous. Ces deux options suivantes sont aussi disponibles: Sélectionner tous les résultats de la recherche - cochée par défaut. Permet de sélectionner toutes les valeurs correspondant à la requête. Ajouter le sélection actuelle au filtre - si vous cochez cette case, les valeurs sélectionnées ne seront pas masquées lorsque vous appliquerez le filtre. Après avoir sélectionné toutes les données nécessaires, cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la liste des options de Filtrage pour appliquer le filtre. Filtrer les données selon certains critères En fonction des données contenues dans la colonne sélectionnée, vous pouvez choisir le Filtre de nombre ou le Filtre de texte dans la partie droite de la liste d'options de Filtrage, puis sélectionner l'une des options dans le sous-menu: Pour le Filtre de nombre, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Plus grand que..., Plus grand ou égal à..., Moins que..., Moins que ou égal à..., Entre, Les 10 premiers, Au dessus de la moyenne, Au dessous de la moyenne, Filtre personnalisé. Pour le Filtre de texte, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Équivaut à..., N'est pas égal à..., Commence par..., Ne pas commencer par..., Se termine par..., Ne se termine pas avec..., Contient..., Ne contient pas..., Filtre personnalisé. Après avoir sélectionné l'une des options ci-dessus (à l'exception des options Les 10 premiers et Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne), la fenêtre Filtre personnalisé s'ouvre. Le critère correspondant sera sélectionné dans la liste déroulante supérieure. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Pour ajouter un critère supplémentaire, utilisez le bouton de commande Et si vous avez besoin de données qui satisfont aux deux critères ou cliquez sur le bouton de commande Ou si l'un des critères ou les deux peuvent être satisfaits. Sélectionnez ensuite le deuxième critère dans la liste déroulante inférieure et entrez la valeur nécessaire sur la droite. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Si vous choisissez l'option Filtre personnalisé... dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre/texte, le premier critère n'est pas sélectionné automatiquement, vous pouvez le définir vous-même. Si vous choisissez l'option Les 10 premiers dans la liste des options de Filtre de nombre, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira: La première liste déroulante permet de choisir si vous souhaitez afficher les valeurs les plus élevées (Haut) ou les plus basses (Bas). La deuxième permet de spécifier le nombre d'entrées dans la liste ou le pourcentage du nombre total des entrées que vous souhaitez afficher (vous pouvez entrer un nombre compris entre 1 et 500). La troisième liste déroulante permet de définir des unités de mesure: Élément ou Pour cent. Une fois les paramètres nécessaires définis, cliquez sur OK pour appliquer le filtre. Lorsque vous choisissez Au dessus/Au dessous de la moyenne de la liste Filtre de nombre, le filtre est appliqué tout de suite. Filtrer les données par couleur Si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez filtrer contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou leur couleur de police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis), vous pouvez utiliser l'une des options suivantes Filtrer par couleur des cellules - pour n'afficher que les entrées avec une certaine couleur de fond de cellule et masquer les autres, Filtrer par couleur de police - pour afficher uniquement les entrées avec une certaine couleur de police de cellule et masquer les autres. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option souhaitée, une palette contenant les couleurs utilisées dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée s'ouvre. Choisissez l'une des couleurs pour appliquer le filtre. Le bouton Filtrer apparaîtra dans la première cellule de la colonne. Cela signifie que le filtre est appliqué. Le nombre d'enregistrements filtrés sera affiché dans la barre d'état (par exemple 25 des 80 enregistrements filtrés). Remarque: lorsque le filtre est appliqué, les lignes filtrées ne peuvent pas être modifiées lors du remplissage automatique, du formatage ou de la suppression du contenu visible. De telles actions affectent uniquement les lignes visibles, les lignes masquées par le filtre restent inchangées. Lorsque vous copiez et collez les données filtrées, seules les lignes visibles peuvent être copiées et collées. Ceci n'est pas équivalent aux lignes masquées manuellement qui sont affectées par toutes les actions similaires. Trier les données filtrées Vous pouvez définir l'ordre de tri des données que vous avez activées ou auxquelles vous avez appliqué un filtre. Cliquez sur la flèche de déroulement ou sur le bouton Filtrer et sélectionnez l'une des options dans la liste des options de Filtre: Trier du plus petit au plus grand - permet de trier vos données dans l'ordre croissant, en affichant la valeur la plus basse en haut de la colonne, Trier du plus grand au plus petit - permet de trier vos données dans l'ordre décroissant, en affichant la valeur la plus élevée en haut de la colonne, Trier par couleur des cellules - permet de sélectionner l'une des couleurs et d'afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne, Trier par couleur de police - permet de sélectionner l'une des couleurs et d'afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne. Les deux dernières options peuvent être utilisées si la plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier contient des cellules que vous avez formatées en modifiant leur arrière-plan ou la couleur de leur police (manuellement ou en utilisant des styles prédéfinis). Le sens du tri sera indiqué par une flèche dans les boutons du filtre. si les données sont triées par ordre croissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci: et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci: . Si les données sont triées par ordre décroissant, la flèche déroulante dans la première cellule de la colonne ressemble à ceci: et le bouton Filtre ressemble à ceci: . Vous pouvez également trier rapidement vos données par couleur en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. faites un clic droit sur une cellule contenant la couleur que vous voulez utiliser pour trier vos données, sélectionnez l'option Trier dans le menu, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans le sous-menu: Couleur de cellule sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de fond de cellule en haut de la colonne, Couleur de police sélectionnée en haut - pour afficher les entrées avec la même couleur de police en haut de la colonne. Filtrer par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée Vous pouvez également filtrer rapidement vos données par le contenu de la cellule sélectionnée en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une cellule, sélectionnez l'option Filtre dans le menu, puis sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles: Filtrer par valeur de la cellule sélectionnée - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même valeur que la cellule sélectionnée. Filtrer par couleur de cellule - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même couleur de fond de cellule que la cellule sélectionnée. Filtrer par couleur de police - pour n'afficher que les entrées ayant la même couleur de police de cellule que la cellule sélectionnée. Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau Pour faciliter le travail avec vos données, Spreadsheet Editor vous permet d'appliquer un modèle de tableau à une plage de cellules sélectionnée en activant automatiquement le filtre. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez mettre en forme, cliquez sur l'icône Mettre sous forme de modèle de tableau sous l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Sélectionnez le modèle souhaité dans la galerie, dans la fenêtre contextuelle ouverte, vérifiez la plage de cellules à mettre en forme comme un tableau, cochez la case Titre si vous souhaitez inclure les en-têtes de tableau dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée, sinon la ligne d'en-tête sera ajoutée en haut tandis que la plage de cellules sélectionnée sera déplacée d'une ligne vers le bas, cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer le modèle sélectionné. Le modèle sera appliqué à la plage de cellules sélectionnée et vous serez en mesure d'éditer les en-têtes de tableau et d'appliquer le filtre pour travailler avec vos données. Pour en savoir plus sur la mise en forme des tableaux d'après un modèle, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Appliquer à nouveau le filtre Si les données filtrées ont été modifiées, vous pouvez actualiser le filtre pour afficher un résultat à jour: cliquez sur l'icône Filtre dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant des données filtrées, sélectionnez l'option Réappliquer dans la liste des options de Filtrage qui s'ouvre. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une cellule dans la colonne contenant les données filtrées et sélectionner l'option Réappliquer dans le menu contextuel. Effacer le filtre Pour effacer le filtre, cliquez sur l'icône Filtre dans la première cellule de la colonne contenant des données filtrées, sélectionnez l'option Effacer dans la liste d'options de Filtrage qui s'ouvre. Vous pouvez également procéder de la manière suivante: sélectionner la plage de cellules contenant les données filtrées, cliquez sur l'icône Effacer le filtre sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le filtre restera activé, mais tous les paramètres de filtre appliqués seront supprimés et les boutons Filtre dans les premières cellules des colonnes seront remplacés par les flèches déroulantes . Supprimer le filtre Pour supprimer un filtre, sélectionner la plage de cellules contenant les données filtrées, cliquez sur l'icône Filtre sous l'onglet Accueil ou Données de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le filtre sera désactivé et les flèches déroulantes disparaîtront des premières cellules des colonnes. Trier les données en fonction de plusieurs colonnes/lignes Pour trier les données en fonction de plusieurs colonnes/lignes, vous pouvez créer un tri à plusieurs niveaux en utilisant l'option Tri personnalisé. sélectionner une plage de cellules que vous souhaitez trier (vous pouvez sélectionner une seule cellule dans une plage pour trier toute la plage), cliquez sur l'icône Tri personnalisé sous l'onglet Données de la barre d'outils supérieure, La fenêtre Trier s'affiche: La tri par défaut est par colonne. utilisez les sections Niveaux pour ajouter de nouveaux niveaux et pour gérer des niveaux qu'on a déjà ajouté. Le bouton Nouveau pour ajouter un nouveau niveau, sélectionnez la deuxième ligne/colonne à trier et configurez les autres paramètres de tri dans des champs Puis par comme il est décrit ci-dessus. Ajoutez plusieurs niveaux de la même façon, le cas échéant, Le bouton Copier pour copier le niveau sélectionné et pour doubler tous les paramètres définis, Le bouton Options pour modifier l'orientation de tri (c-à-d trier des données par lignes au lieu de trier par colonnes). Cliquez sur le bouton pour ouvrir la fenêtre Options de tri, activez la case Mes données ont des en-têtes, le cas échéant, choisissez Orientation appropriée: Trier du haut vers le bas pour trier les données par colonnes ou Trier de la gauche vers la droite pour trier les données par lignes, cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermez la fenêtre. Le bouton Supprimer pour effacer le niveau sélectionné. Les boutons fléchés Monter d'un niveau/Descendre d'un niveau pour modifier la séquence de niveaux. spécifiez le premier niveau de tri dans le champ Trier par: dans la section Colonne/Ligne sélectionnez la première colonne/ligne à trier, dans la liste Trier sur, choisissez l'une des options suivantes: Valeurs, Couleur de cellule ou Couleur de police, dans la liste Ordre, spécifiez l'ordre de tri. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du choix dans la liste Trier sur: si vous choisissez l'option Valeurs, choisissez entre Ascendant/Descendant pour les valeurs numériques dans la plage ou de A à Z / de Z à A pour les valeurs de texte dans la plage, si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de cellule, choisissez la couleur de cellule appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes, si vous choisissez l'option Couleur de police, choisissez la couleur de police appropriée et En haut/En dessous pour les colonnes ou À gauche/À droite pour les lignes, Cliquez sur OK pour valider toutes les modifications et fermer la fenêtre. Toutes les données seront triées selon les niveaux de tri définis." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", @@ -2728,12 +2773,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/UseNamedRanges.htm", "title": "Utiliser les plages nommées", - "body": "Les noms sont des notations significatives pouvant être affectées àune cellule ou àune plage de cellules et utilisées pour simplifier l'utilisation de formules dans le Tableur. En créant une formule, vous pouvez insérer un nom comme argument au lieu d'utiliser une référence à une plage de cellules. Par exemple, si vous affectez le nom Revenu_Annuel àune plage de cellules, il sera possible d'entrer =SUM(Revenu_Annuel) au lieu de =SOMME(B1:B12). Sous une telle forme, les formules deviennent plus claires. Cette fonctionnalité peut également être utile dans le cas où beaucoup de formules se réfèrent àune même plage de cellules. Si l'adresse de plage est modifiée, vous pouvez effectuer la correction en une seule fois àl'aide du Gestionnaire de noms au lieu de modifier toutes les formules une par une. Deux types de noms peuvent être utilisés : Nom défini - nom arbitraire que vous pouvez spécifier pour une certaine plage de cellules. Les noms définis incluent également les noms créés automatiquement lors de la configuration de zones d'impression. Nom de tableau - nom par défaut attribué automatiquement à un nouveau tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle (Table1, Table2, etc.). Ce type de nom peut être modifié ultérieurement. Si vous avez créé un segment pour le tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle , l'e nom du segment qui été ajouté automatiquement s'afficherait dans le Gestionnaire de noms (Slegment_Colonne1, Segment_Colonne2 etc.). Le nom comprend le libellé Segment_ et l'en-tête de la colonne correspondant àcelui-ci de l'ensemble de données sources). Ce type de nom peut être modifié ultérieurement. Les noms sont également classés par Étendue, c'est-à-dire par l'emplacement où un nom est reconnu. La portée d'un nom peut être étendue à l'ensemble du classeur (il sera reconnu pour n'importe quelle feuille de calcul dans ce classeur) ou àune feuille de calcul distincte (il sera reconnu pour la feuille de calcul spécifiée uniquement). Chaque nom doit être unique dans sa portée, les mêmes noms peuvent être utilisés dans des portées différentes. Créer de nouveaux noms Pour créer un nouveau nom défini pour une sélection : Sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules à laquelle vous souhaitez attribuer un nom. Ouvrez une nouvelle fenêtre de nom d'une manière appropriée : Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la sélection et choisissez l'option Définir le nom dans le menu contextuel, ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Définir un nom dans le menu. ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Formule de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Gestionnaire de noms dans le menu. Choisissez l'option Nouveau dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche. La fenêtre Nouveau nom s'ouvrira : Entrez le Nom nécessaire dans le champ de saisie de texte. Remarque : un nom ne peut pas commencer àpartir d'un nombre, contenir des espaces ou des signes de ponctuation. Les tirets bas (_) sont autorisés. La casse n'a pas d'importance. Indiquez l'Étendu du nom. L'étendue au Classeur est sélectionnée par défaut, mais vous pouvez spécifier une feuille de calcul individuelle en la sélectionnant dans la liste. Vérifiez l'adresse de la Plage de données sélectionnée. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez la changer. Cliquez sur l'icône - la fenêtre Sélectionner la plage de données s'ouvre. Modifiez le lien àla plage de cellules dans le champ de saisie ou sélectionnez une nouvelle plage dans la feuille de calcul avec la souris et cliquez sur OK. Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer le nouveau nom. Pour créer rapidement un nouveau nom pour la plage de cellules sélectionnée, vous pouvez également entrer le nom souhaité dans la zone de nom située àgauche de la barre de formule et appuyer sur Entrée. Un nom créé de cette manière a sa portée étendue au Classeur. Gérer les noms Tous les noms existants sont accessibles via le Gestionnaire de noms. Pour l'ouvrir : ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Gestionnaire de noms dans le menu. ou cliquez sur la flèche dans le champ du nom et sélectionnez l'option Gestionnaire de noms. La fenêtre Gestionnaire de noms s'ouvre : Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez filtrer les noms en sélectionnant la catégorie de nom que vous voulez afficher : Tous, Noms définis, Noms de tableaux, Noms étendus àla feuille ou Noms étendus au classeur. Les noms appartenant àla catégorie sélectionnée seront affichés dans la liste, les autres noms seront cachés. Pour modifier l'ordre de tri de la liste affichée, vous pouvez cliquer sur les titres Plages nommées ou Étendue dans cette fenêtre. Pour modifier un nom, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Modifier. La fenêtre Modifier le nom s'ouvre : Pour un nom défini, vous pouvez modifier le nom et la plage de données auxquels il fait référence. Pour un nom de tableau, vous pouvez uniquement changer le nom. Lorsque toutes les modifications nécessaires sont apportées, cliquez sur OK pour les appliquer. Pour annuler les modifications, cliquez sur Annuler. Si le nom modifié est utilisé dans une formule, la formule sera automatiquement modifiée en conséquence. Pour supprimer un nom, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Suppr. Remarque : si vous supprimez un nom utilisé dans une formule, la formule ne fonctionnera plus (elle retournera l'erreur #NAME?). Vous pouvez également créer un nouveau nom dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de noms en cliquant sur le bouton Nouveau. Utiliser des noms lorsque vous travaillez avec la feuille de calcul Pour naviguer rapidement entre les plages de cellules, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche dans la boite de nom et sélectionner le nom voulu dans la liste des noms - la plage de données correspondant à ce nom sera sélectionnée dans la feuille de calcul. Remarque : la liste de noms affiche les noms définis et les noms de tableaux étendus àla feuille de calcul en cours ou àl'ensemble du classeur. Pour ajouter un nom en tant que argument d'une formule : Placez le point d'insertion où vous devez ajouter un nom. Effectuez l'une des actions suivantes : Entrez manuellement le nom de la plage nommée choisie àl'aide du clavier. Une fois que vous avez tapé les lettres initiales, la liste Autocomplétion de formule sera affichée. Au fur et àmesure que vous tapez, les éléments (formules et noms) correspondant aux caractères saisis sont affichés. Vous pouvez sélectionner le nom défini ou le nom du tableau dans la liste et l'insérer dans la formule en double-cliquant dessus ou en appuyant sur la touche Tabulation. ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Coller le nom dans le menu, choisissez le nom voulu dans la fenêtre Coller le nom et cliquez sur OK : Remarque : la liste Coller le nom affiche les noms définis et les noms de tableaux étendus àla feuille de calcul en cours ou àl'ensemble du classeur. Utiliser un nom comme lien hypertexte interne : Placez le point d'insertion où vous devez ajouter un lien hypertexte. passer àl'onglet Insérer et cliquer sur l'icône Lien hypertexte. Dans la fenêtre Paramètres du lien hypertexte qui apparaît, choisissez l'onglet Plage de données interne. Cliquez sur OK." + "body": "Les noms sont des notations significatives pouvant être affectées à une cellule ou à une plage de cellules et utilisées pour simplifier l'utilisation de formules dans le Tableur. En créant une formule, vous pouvez insérer un nom comme argument au lieu d'utiliser une référence à une plage de cellules. Par exemple, si vous affectez le nom Revenu_Annuel àune plage de cellules, il sera possible d'entrer =SUM(Revenu_Annuel) au lieu de =SOMME(B1:B12). Sous une telle forme, les formules deviennent plus claires. Cette fonctionnalité peut également être utile dans le cas où beaucoup de formules se réfèrent à une même plage de cellules. Si l'adresse de plage est modifiée, vous pouvez effectuer la correction en une seule fois à l'aide du Gestionnaire de noms au lieu de modifier toutes les formules une par une. Deux types de noms peuvent être utilisés : Nom défini - nom arbitraire que vous pouvez spécifier pour une certaine plage de cellules. Les noms définis incluent également les noms créés automatiquement lors de la configuration de zones d'impression. Nom de tableau - nom par défaut attribué automatiquement à un nouveau tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle (Table1, Table2, etc.). Ce type de nom peut être modifié ultérieurement. Si vous avez créé un segment pour le tableau mis en forme d'après un modèle , l'e nom du segment qui été ajouté automatiquement s'afficherait dans le Gestionnaire de noms (Segment_Colonne1, Segment_Colonne2 etc.). Le nom comprend le libellé Segment_ et l'en-tête de la colonne correspondant àcelui-ci de l'ensemble de données sources). Ce type de nom peut être modifié ultérieurement. Les noms sont également classés par Étendue, c'est-à-dire par l'emplacement où un nom est reconnu. La portée d'un nom peut être étendue à l'ensemble du classeur (il sera reconnu pour n'importe quelle feuille de calcul dans ce classeur) ou à une feuille de calcul distincte (il sera reconnu pour la feuille de calcul spécifiée uniquement). Chaque nom doit être unique dans sa portée, les mêmes noms peuvent être utilisés dans des portées différentes. Créer de nouveaux noms Pour créer un nouveau nom défini pour une sélection : Sélectionnez une cellule ou une plage de cellules à laquelle vous souhaitez attribuer un nom. Ouvrez une nouvelle fenêtre de nom d'une manière appropriée : cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la sélection et choisissez l'option Définir le nom dans le menu contextuel, ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Définir un nom dans le menu. ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Formule de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Gestionnaire de noms dans le menu. Choisissez l'option Nouveau dans la fenêtre qui s'affiche. La fenêtre Nouveau nom s'ouvrira : Entrez le Nom nécessaire dans le champ de saisie de texte. Remarque : un nom ne peut pas commencer à partir d'un nombre, contenir des espaces ou des signes de ponctuation. Les tirets bas (_) sont autorisés. La casse n'a pas d'importance. Indiquez l'Étendu du nom. L'étendue au Classeur est sélectionnée par défaut, mais vous pouvez spécifier une feuille de calcul individuelle en la sélectionnant dans la liste. Vérifiez l'adresse de la Plage de données sélectionnée. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez la changer. Cliquez sur l'icône - la fenêtre Sélectionner la plage de données s'ouvre. Modifiez le lien à la plage de cellules dans le champ de saisie ou sélectionnez une nouvelle plage dans la feuille de calcul avec la souris et cliquez sur OK. Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer le nouveau nom. Pour créer rapidement un nouveau nom pour la plage de cellules sélectionnée, vous pouvez également entrer le nom souhaité dans la zone de nom située à gauche de la barre de formule et appuyer sur Entrée. Un nom créé de cette manière a sa portée étendue au Classeur. Gérer les noms Tous les noms existants sont accessibles via le Gestionnaire de noms. Pour l'ouvrir : ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Gestionnaire de noms dans le menu. ou cliquez sur la flèche dans le champ du nom et sélectionnez l'option Gestionnaire de noms. La fenêtre Gestionnaire de noms s'ouvre : Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez filtrer les noms en sélectionnant la catégorie de nom que vous voulez afficher : Tous, Noms définis, Noms de tableaux, Noms étendus à la feuille ou Noms étendus au classeur. Les noms appartenant à la catégorie sélectionnée seront affichés dans la liste, les autres noms seront cachés. Pour modifier l'ordre de tri de la liste affichée, vous pouvez cliquer sur les titres Plages nommées ou Étendue dans cette fenêtre. Pour modifier un nom, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Modifier. La fenêtre Modifier le nom s'ouvre : Pour un nom défini, vous pouvez modifier le nom et la plage de données auxquels il fait référence. Pour un nom de tableau, vous pouvez uniquement changer le nom. Lorsque toutes les modifications nécessaires sont apportées, cliquez sur OK pour les appliquer. Pour annuler les modifications, cliquez sur Annuler. Si le nom modifié est utilisé dans une formule, la formule sera automatiquement modifiée en conséquence. Pour supprimer un nom, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Suppr. Remarque : si vous supprimez un nom utilisé dans une formule, la formule ne fonctionnera plus (elle retournera l'erreur #NAME?). Vous pouvez également créer un nouveau nom dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de noms en cliquant sur le bouton Nouveau. Utiliser des noms lorsque vous travaillez avec la feuille de calcul Pour naviguer rapidement entre les plages de cellules, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche dans la boite de nom et sélectionner le nom voulu dans la liste des noms - la plage de données correspondant à ce nom sera sélectionnée dans la feuille de calcul. Remarque : la liste de noms affiche les noms définis et les noms de tableaux étendus à la feuille de calcul en cours ou à l'ensemble du classeur. Pour ajouter un nom en tant que argument d'une formule : Placez le point d'insertion où vous devez ajouter un nom. Effectuez l'une des actions suivantes : Entrez manuellement le nom de la plage nommée choisie à l'aide du clavier. Une fois que vous avez tapé les lettres initiales, la liste Autocomplétion de formule sera affichée. Au fur et à mesure que vous tapez, les éléments (formules et noms) correspondant aux caractères saisis sont affichés. Vous pouvez sélectionner le nom défini ou le nom du tableau dans la liste et l'insérer dans la formule en double-cliquant dessus ou en appuyant sur la touche Tabulation. ou cliquez sur l'icône Plages nommées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Coller le nom dans le menu, choisissez le nom voulu dans la fenêtre Coller le nom et cliquez sur OK : Remarque : la liste Coller le nom affiche les noms définis et les noms de tableaux étendus à la feuille de calcul en cours ou à l'ensemble du classeur. Utiliser un nom comme lien hypertexte interne : Placez le point d'insertion où vous devez ajouter un lien hypertexte. passer à l'onglet Insérer et cliquer sur l'icône Lien hypertexte. Dans la fenêtre Paramètres du lien hypertexte qui apparaît, choisissez l'onglet Plage de données interne. Cliquez sur OK." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "Afficher les informations sur le fichier", - "body": "Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le classeur actuellement édité dans le Tableur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations du classeur... Informations générales L'information sur la présentation comprend le titre de la présentation et l'application avec laquelle la présentation a été créée. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés. Emplacement - le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Ces paramètres ne sont disponibles que sous la version en ligne. Titre, sujet, commentaire - ces paramètres facilitent la classification des documents. Vos pouvez saisir l'information nécessaire dans les champs appropriés. Dernière modification - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été modifié la dernière fois. Dernière modification par - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a apporté la dernière modification au classeur quand plusieurs utilisateurs travaillent sur un même fichier. Application - l'application dans laquelle on a créé le classeur. Auteur - la personne qui a créé le fichier. Saisissez le nom approprié dans ce champ. Appuyez sur la touche Entrée pour ajouter un nouveau champ et spécifier encore un auteur. Si vous avez modifié les paramètres du fichier, cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. Remarque : Les éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du classeur directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK. Informations d'autorisation Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur les permissions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le classur, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits. Pour fermer l'onglet Fichier et reprendre le travail sur votre feuille de calcul, sélectionnez l'option Fermer le menu. Historique des versions Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter l'historique des versions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées au classeur, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche sous l'onglet Fichier. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Historique des versions sous l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce classeur (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de classeur, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer. Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions." + "body": "Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le classeur actuellement édité dans le Tableur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations du classeur... Informations générales L'information sur la présentation comprend le titre de la présentation et l'application avec laquelle la présentation a été créée. Certains de ces paramètres sont mis à jour automatiquement mais les autres peuvent être modifiés. Emplacement - le dossier dans le module Documents où le fichier est stocké. Propriétaire - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a créé le fichier. Chargé - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été créé. Ces paramètres ne sont disponibles que sous la version en ligne. Titre, sujet, commentaire - ces paramètres facilitent la classification des documents. Vos pouvez saisir l'information nécessaire dans les champs appropriés. Dernière modification - la date et l'heure quand le fichier a été modifié la dernière fois. Dernière modification par - le nom de l'utilisateur qui a apporté la dernière modification au classeur quand plusieurs utilisateurs travaillent sur un même fichier. Application - l'application dans laquelle on a créé le classeur. Auteur - la personne qui a créé le fichier. Saisissez le nom approprié dans ce champ. Appuyez sur la touche Entrée pour ajouter un nouveau champ et spécifier encore un auteur. Si vous avez modifié les paramètres du fichier, cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. Remarque : Les éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du classeur directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK. Informations d'autorisation Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur les permissions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le classeur, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits. Pour fermer l'onglet Fichier et reprendre le travail sur votre feuille de calcul, sélectionnez l'option Fermer le menu. Historique des versions Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter l'historique des versions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées au classeur, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche sous l'onglet Fichier. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Historique des versions sous l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce classeur (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de classeur, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer. Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/WatchWindow.htm", @@ -2743,6 +2788,11 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Insérer une vidéo", - "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre feuille de calcul. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer. (l'adresse complète dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur) Accédez à votre feuille de calcul et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la vidéo doit être inséré. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez YouTube. Collez l'URL et cliquez sur OK. Vérifiez si la vidéo est vrai et cliquez sur OK au-dessous la vidéo. Maintenant la vidéo est insérée dans votre feuille de calcul." + "body": "Dans le Tableur, vous pouvez insérer une vidéo dans votre feuille de calcul. Celle-ci sera affichée comme une image. Faites un double-clic sur l'image pour faire apparaître la boîte de dialogue vidéo. Vous pouvez démarrer votre vidéo ici. Copier l'URL de la vidéo à insérer (l'adresse complète dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur). Accédez à votre feuille de calcul et placez le curseur à l'endroit où la vidéo doit être inséré. Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires et choisissez YouTube. Collez l'URL et cliquez sur OK. Vérifiez si la vidéo est vrai et cliquez sur OK au-dessous la vidéo. Maintenant la vidéo est insérée dans votre feuille de calcul." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", + "title": "Zoom", + "body": "Le module complémentaire Zoom permet créer et programmer des réunions de Zoom directement depuis l'éditeur en quelques clics. Le module complémentaire est compatible avec la version auto-hébergée des éditeurs ONLYOFFICE et c'est possible de l'ajouter manuellement aux instances ONLYOFFICE. Installation Pour installer le module complémentaire Zoom, Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de modules complémentaires. Recherchez Zoom sur marketplace et cliquez sur le bouton Installer au-dessous. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom sous l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Poursuivez la configuration du module complémentaire. Pour en savoir plus, veuillez consulter la documentation API d'ONLYOFFICE. Configuration Enregistrez l'éditeur en tant que l'application JWT sur la page Zoom Developer pour utiliser la programmation des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Le jeton JWT sera assigné à l'application. Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom . Créez l'application Meeting SDK sur la page Zoom Developer pour pouvoir joindre des réunions. Remplissez les champs nécessaires et activez l'application. Les informations d'identification SDK seront assignées à l'application. Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour remplir les champs, veuillez consulter la documentation officielle de Zoom . Saisissez les clés SDK Key, SDK Secret et le jeton JWT Token dans les champs appropriés sur le panneau de gauche de l'éditeur ONLYOFFICE et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Utilisation Passez à l'onglet Modules complémentaires. Cliquez sur l'icône Zoom. Saisissez le thème de la réunion et sélectionnez Démarrer une réunion ou Programmer une réunion. Les notifications de réunion sont affichées dans le Chat de l'éditeur en ligne et dans les Commentaires de l'éditeur du bureau. Une fenêtre noire peut apparaître dans le navigateur Safari lorsqu'on se joint à la réunion. Pour faire disparaître l'erreur, il faut redimensionner la fenêtre du module complémentaire ou zoomer sur la page de navigateur." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index ffd732b318..ce02c3e5db 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index b4862cb985..578b22f9bb 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -270,50 +270,56 @@ height: 23px; } -.icon-fontsize { +.icon-change_case { background-position: -46px -80px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } -.icon-rowsandcolumns { +.icon-fontsize { background-position: -114px 0px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } -.icon-SearchOptions { +.icon-rowsandcolumns { background-position: -114px -22px; + width: 45px; + height: 22px; +} + +.icon-SearchOptions { + background-position: -114px -44px; width: 42px; height: 22px; } .icon-verticalalignment { - background-position: -114px -44px; + background-position: -114px -66px; width: 33px; height: 22px; } .icon-pastespecialbutton { - background-position: -114px -66px; + background-position: 0px -103px; width: 30px; height: 22px; } .icon-sparklines_button { - background-position: 0px -103px; + background-position: -30px -103px; width: 28px; height: 22px; } .icon-thesaurus_icon { - background-position: -28px -103px; + background-position: -58px -103px; width: 28px; height: 22px; } .icon-addworksheet { - background-position: -56px -103px; + background-position: -86px -103px; width: 24px; height: 22px; } @@ -325,1435 +331,1447 @@ } .icon-descendingbutton { - background-position: -80px -103px; + background-position: -110px -103px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-go_to_the_next_word { - background-position: -102px -103px; + background-position: -132px -103px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-inserttexticon { - background-position: -124px -103px; + background-position: 0px -125px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-printareabutton { - background-position: 0px -125px; + background-position: -22px -125px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-calculationicon { - background-position: -20px -125px; + background-position: -42px -125px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-coeditingmode { - background-position: -38px -125px; + background-position: -60px -125px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-header_footer_icon { - background-position: -56px -125px; + background-position: -78px -125px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-versionhistoryicon { - background-position: -74px -125px; + background-position: -96px -125px; width: 24px; height: 21px; } .icon-pivot_refresh { - background-position: -98px -125px; + background-position: -120px -125px; width: 21px; height: 21px; } .icon-selectall { - background-position: -119px -125px; + background-position: -159px 0px; width: 27px; height: 20px; } .icon-dataval_icon { - background-position: -159px 0px; + background-position: -159px -20px; width: 26px; height: 20px; } .icon-sheetview_icon { - background-position: -159px -20px; + background-position: -159px -40px; width: 25px; height: 20px; } .icon-bringforward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -159px -40px; + background-position: -159px -60px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-changecolorscheme { - background-position: -159px -60px; + background-position: -159px -80px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-chatgpt_icon { + background-position: -159px -100px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-constantproportionsactivated { - background-position: -159px -80px; + background-position: -159px -120px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-copystyle_selected { - background-position: -159px -100px; + background-position: 0px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-group_toptoolbar { - background-position: -159px -120px; + background-position: -20px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image { - background-position: 0px -147px; + background-position: -40px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insertautoshape { - background-position: -20px -147px; + background-position: -60px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insert_symbol_icon { - background-position: -40px -147px; + background-position: -80px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-scaletofit { - background-position: -60px -147px; + background-position: -100px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sendbackward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -80px -147px; + background-position: -120px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-show_password { - background-position: -100px -147px; + background-position: -140px -147px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-vector { - background-position: -120px -147px; + background-position: -160px -147px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-zoom_icon { + background-position: -186px 0px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-align_toptoolbar { - background-position: -140px -147px; + background-position: -186px -20px; width: 19px; height: 20px; } .icon-inserttextarticon { - background-position: -159px -147px; + background-position: -186px -40px; width: 16px; height: 20px; } .icon-sortcommentsicon { - background-position: -185px 0px; + background-position: 0px -167px; width: 31px; height: 19px; } .icon-chat_toptoolbar { - background-position: -185px -19px; + background-position: -31px -167px; width: 24px; height: 19px; } .icon-chart { - background-position: -185px -38px; + background-position: -55px -167px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-comment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -185px -57px; + background-position: -77px -167px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertequationicon { - background-position: -185px -76px; + background-position: -99px -167px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-pivotselecticon { - background-position: -185px -95px; + background-position: -121px -167px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-functionicon { - background-position: -185px -114px; + background-position: -186px -60px; width: 20px; height: 19px; } .icon-paste_style { - background-position: -185px -133px; + background-position: -186px -79px; width: 20px; height: 19px; } .icon-addhyperlink { - background-position: 0px -167px; + background-position: -186px -98px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-hiderulers { - background-position: -19px -167px; + background-position: -186px -117px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-removecomment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -144px -66px; + background-position: -186px -136px; width: 15px; height: 19px; } .icon-customsort { - background-position: -38px -167px; + background-position: -141px -125px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-new_icon { - background-position: -56px -167px; + background-position: -143px -167px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-search_advanced { - background-position: -74px -167px; + background-position: -161px -167px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-searchbuttons { - background-position: -92px -167px; + background-position: 0px -186px; width: 33px; height: 17px; } .icon-horizontalalignment { - background-position: -125px -167px; + background-position: -33px -186px; width: 31px; height: 17px; } .icon-backgroundcolor { - background-position: -156px -167px; + background-position: -179px -167px; width: 25px; height: 17px; } .icon-removeduplicates_icon { - background-position: -181px -167px; + background-position: -64px -186px; width: 24px; height: 17px; } .icon-table { - background-position: 0px -186px; + background-position: -88px -186px; width: 22px; height: 17px; } .icon-changecolumnwidthcursor { - background-position: -22px -186px; + background-position: -110px -186px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-sharingicon { - background-position: -43px -186px; + background-position: -131px -186px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-chaticon_new { - background-position: -64px -186px; + background-position: -152px -186px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-groupicon { - background-position: -83px -186px; + background-position: -171px -186px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-selectdata_icon { - background-position: -102px -186px; + background-position: -206px 0px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-ungroupicon { - background-position: -121px -186px; + background-position: -206px -17px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-search_icon_header { - background-position: -140px -186px; + background-position: -206px -34px; width: 17px; height: 17px; } .icon-insertslicer { - background-position: -157px -186px; + background-position: -206px -51px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-slicer_settings { - background-position: -173px -186px; + background-position: -206px -68px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-addgradientpoint { - background-position: -147px -44px; + background-position: -206px -85px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-removegradientpoint { - background-position: -146px -103px; + background-position: -206px -102px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-levelnumbericons { - background-position: -216px 0px; + background-position: 0px -203px; width: 48px; height: 16px; } .icon-usersnumber { - background-position: -216px -16px; + background-position: -48px -203px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-close_icon { - background-position: -238px -16px; + background-position: -206px -119px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-saveupdate { - background-position: -216px -32px; + background-position: -206px -135px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-savewhilecoediting { - background-position: -234px -32px; + background-position: -206px -151px; width: 17px; height: 16px; } .icon-collapserowsicon { - background-position: -216px -48px; + background-position: -206px -167px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-converttorange { - background-position: -232px -48px; + background-position: -206px -183px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-dropdownarrow { - background-position: -248px -48px; + background-position: -190px -186px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-expandrowsicon { - background-position: -216px -64px; + background-position: -70px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-filterbutton { - background-position: -232px -64px; + background-position: -86px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-firstlevelicon { - background-position: -248px -64px; + background-position: -102px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-highesttolowest { - background-position: -216px -80px; + background-position: -118px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-highesttolowest1 { - background-position: -232px -80px; + background-position: -134px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-lowesttohighest { - background-position: -248px -80px; + background-position: -150px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-lowesttohighest1 { - background-position: -216px -96px; + background-position: -166px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-pivot_settings { - background-position: -232px -96px; + background-position: -182px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-secondlevelicon { - background-position: -248px -96px; + background-position: -198px -203px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-thirdlevelicon { - background-position: -216px -112px; + background-position: -225px 0px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-distributevertically { - background-position: -232px -112px; + background-position: -225px -16px; width: 14px; height: 16px; } .icon-textart_settings_icon { - background-position: -251px -32px; + background-position: -225px -32px; width: 12px; height: 16px; } .icon-namedrangesicon { - background-position: -216px -128px; + background-position: -114px -88px; width: 23px; height: 15px; } .icon-search_options { - background-position: -239px -128px; + background-position: -137px -88px; width: 22px; height: 15px; } .icon-access_rights { - background-position: -216px -143px; + background-position: 0px -219px; width: 19px; height: 15px; } .icon-chaticon { - background-position: -246px -112px; + background-position: -19px -219px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-gotodocuments { - background-position: -235px -143px; + background-position: -37px -219px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-print { - background-position: -216px -158px; + background-position: -55px -219px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } .icon-bgcolor { - background-position: -233px -158px; + background-position: -225px -48px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-about { - background-position: -249px -158px; + background-position: -225px -63px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-abouticon { - background-position: -216px -173px; + background-position: -225px -78px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-advanced_settings_icon { - background-position: -231px -173px; + background-position: -225px -93px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-insertpivot { - background-position: -246px -173px; + background-position: -225px -108px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-plus { - background-position: -216px -188px; + background-position: -225px -123px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-plus_sheet { - background-position: -231px -188px; + background-position: -225px -138px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-save { - background-position: -246px -188px; + background-position: -225px -153px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopcenter { - background-position: -185px -152px; + background-position: -225px -168px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopleft { - background-position: -200px -152px; + background-position: -225px -183px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-feedback { - background-position: -114px -88px; + background-position: -225px -198px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-flipupsidedown { - background-position: -128px -88px; + background-position: -72px -219px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-shapesettings { - background-position: -142px -88px; + background-position: -86px -219px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-file { - background-position: -146px -125px; + background-position: -100px -219px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-back { - background-position: -189px -186px; + background-position: -147px -66px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } .icon-fontcolor { - background-position: 0px -203px; + background-position: -113px -219px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } .icon-numbering { - background-position: -25px -203px; + background-position: -138px -219px; width: 24px; height: 14px; } .icon-spellcheckactivated { - background-position: -49px -203px; + background-position: -162px -219px; width: 17px; height: 14px; } .icon-spellcheckdeactivated { - background-position: -66px -203px; + background-position: -179px -219px; width: 17px; height: 14px; } .icon-distributehorizontally { - background-position: -83px -203px; + background-position: -196px -219px; width: 16px; height: 14px; } .icon-fliplefttoright { - background-position: -201px -186px; + background-position: -212px -219px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-sort { - background-position: -99px -203px; + background-position: -241px 0px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectbottom { - background-position: -114px -203px; + background-position: -241px -14px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectleft { - background-position: -128px -203px; + background-position: -241px -28px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectright { - background-position: -142px -203px; + background-position: -241px -42px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjecttop { - background-position: -156px -203px; + background-position: -241px -56px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-bordercolor { - background-position: -170px -203px; + background-position: -241px -70px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-borderwidth { - background-position: -184px -203px; + background-position: -241px -84px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-chartsettingsicon { - background-position: -198px -203px; + background-position: -241px -98px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-clearicon { - background-position: -212px -203px; + background-position: -241px -112px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-commentsicon { - background-position: -226px -203px; + background-position: -241px -126px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-deleteicon { - background-position: -240px -203px; + background-position: -241px -140px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-function { - background-position: 0px -217px; + background-position: -241px -154px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-group { - background-position: -14px -217px; + background-position: -241px -168px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-image_settings_icon { - background-position: -28px -217px; + background-position: -241px -182px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-searchicon { - background-position: -42px -217px; + background-position: -241px -196px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-shape_settings_icon { - background-position: -56px -217px; + background-position: -241px -210px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-ungroup { - background-position: -70px -217px; + background-position: -227px -219px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectcenter { - background-position: -84px -217px; + background-position: 0px -234px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-copystyle { - background-position: -97px -217px; + background-position: -13px -234px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-gradientslider { - background-position: -109px -217px; + background-position: -25px -234px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-hard { - background-position: -253px -143px; + background-position: -80px -56px; width: 9px; height: 14px; } .icon-clear { - background-position: -121px -217px; + background-position: -37px -234px; width: 26px; height: 13px; } .icon-outline { - background-position: -147px -217px; + background-position: -63px -234px; width: 25px; height: 13px; } .icon-bullets { - background-position: -172px -217px; + background-position: -88px -234px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertfunction { - background-position: -196px -217px; + background-position: -112px -234px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-orientation { - background-position: -220px -217px; + background-position: -136px -234px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertchart { - background-position: 0px -231px; + background-position: -160px -234px; width: 22px; height: 13px; } .icon-insert_dropcap_icon { - background-position: -22px -231px; + background-position: -182px -234px; width: 22px; height: 13px; } .icon-pagebreak1 { - background-position: -44px -231px; + background-position: -204px -234px; width: 22px; height: 13px; } .icon-headerfooter { - background-position: -66px -231px; + background-position: -226px -234px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertcells { - background-position: -87px -231px; + background-position: -256px 0px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-pagesize { - background-position: -244px -217px; + background-position: -256px -13px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-cut { - background-position: -108px -231px; + background-position: -256px -26px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-removeduplicates { - background-position: -124px -231px; + background-position: -256px -39px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-text_autoshape { - background-position: -140px -231px; + background-position: -256px -52px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-changerange { - background-position: -156px -231px; + background-position: -256px -65px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-feedbackicon { - background-position: -171px -231px; + background-position: -256px -78px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-greencircle { - background-position: -186px -231px; + background-position: -256px -91px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectmiddle { - background-position: -201px -231px; + background-position: -256px -104px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-clearstyle { - background-position: -215px -231px; + background-position: -256px -117px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-copy { - background-position: -229px -231px; + background-position: -256px -130px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-hyperlink { - background-position: -243px -231px; + background-position: -256px -143px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-multiselect { - background-position: 0px -244px; + background-position: -256px -156px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-paste { - background-position: -14px -244px; + background-position: -256px -169px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-select_all { - background-position: -28px -244px; + background-position: -256px -182px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-wraptext { - background-position: -42px -244px; + background-position: -256px -195px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-allborders { - background-position: -56px -244px; + background-position: -256px -208px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bottomborders { - background-position: -69px -244px; + background-position: -256px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringforward { - background-position: -82px -244px; + background-position: -256px -234px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringtofront { - background-position: -95px -244px; + background-position: 0px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-document_language { - background-position: -108px -244px; + background-position: -13px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_margin { - background-position: -121px -244px; + background-position: -26px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_none { - background-position: -134px -244px; + background-position: -39px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_text { - background-position: -147px -244px; + background-position: -52px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-equationplaceholder { - background-position: -160px -244px; + background-position: -65px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-fitpage { - background-position: -173px -244px; + background-position: -78px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-fitwidth { - background-position: -186px -244px; + background-position: -91px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-insideborders { - background-position: -199px -244px; + background-position: -104px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-insidehorizontalborders { - background-position: -212px -244px; + background-position: -117px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-insideverticalborders { - background-position: -225px -244px; + background-position: -130px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-leftborders { - background-position: -238px -244px; + background-position: -143px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-noborders { - background-position: -251px -244px; + background-position: -156px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-outsideborders { - background-position: -264px 0px; + background-position: -169px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-rightborders { - background-position: -264px -13px; + background-position: -182px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendbackward { - background-position: -264px -26px; + background-position: -195px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendtoback { - background-position: -264px -39px; + background-position: -208px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-topborders { - background-position: -264px -52px; + background-position: -221px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-zoomin { - background-position: -264px -65px; + background-position: -234px -248px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-currencystyle { - background-position: -264px -78px; + background-position: -247px -248px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-editcommenticon { - background-position: -264px -91px; + background-position: -259px -248px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertpagenumber { - background-position: -264px -104px; + background-position: 0px -261px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotateclockwise { - background-position: -264px -117px; + background-position: -12px -261px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotatecounterclockwise { - background-position: -264px -130px; + background-position: -24px -261px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignmiddle { - background-position: -264px -143px; + background-position: -214px -203px; width: 11px; height: 13px; } .icon-textsettings { - background-position: -264px -156px; + background-position: -36px -261px; width: 10px; height: 13px; } .icon-accountingstyle { - background-position: 0px -257px; + background-position: -46px -261px; width: 26px; height: 12px; } .icon-cellsettings_rightpanel { - background-position: -26px -257px; + background-position: -186px -155px; width: 15px; height: 12px; } .icon-decreasedecimal { - background-position: -41px -257px; + background-position: -72px -261px; width: 14px; height: 12px; } .icon-slicer_clearfilter { - background-position: -55px -257px; + background-position: -86px -261px; width: 14px; height: 12px; } .icon-increasedecimal { - background-position: -264px -169px; + background-position: -100px -261px; width: 13px; height: 12px; } .icon-angleclockwise { - background-position: -264px -181px; + background-position: -113px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-anglecounterclockwise { - background-position: -264px -193px; + background-position: -125px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-circle { - background-position: -264px -205px; + background-position: -137px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-firstsheet { - background-position: -264px -217px; + background-position: -149px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-larger { - background-position: -264px -229px; + background-position: -161px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-nofill { - background-position: -264px -241px; + background-position: -173px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-sup { - background-position: -69px -257px; + background-position: -185px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-deletecommenticon { - background-position: -205px -114px; + background-position: -197px -261px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-selectcolumn_cursor { - background-position: -205px -133px; + background-position: -208px -261px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-tabletemplate { - background-position: -81px -257px; + background-position: -219px -261px; width: 26px; height: 11px; } .icon-merge { - background-position: -107px -257px; + background-position: -245px -261px; width: 24px; height: 11px; } .icon-subscripticon { - background-position: -131px -257px; + background-position: -277px 0px; width: 24px; height: 11px; } .icon-addborders { - background-position: -155px -257px; + background-position: -277px -11px; width: 22px; height: 11px; } .icon-deletecells { - background-position: -177px -257px; + background-position: -277px -22px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-linespacing { - background-position: -198px -257px; + background-position: -277px -33px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-nonprintingcharacters { - background-position: -219px -257px; + background-position: -277px -44px; width: 20px; height: 11px; } .icon-namedranges { - background-position: -239px -257px; + background-position: -277px -55px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-table_settings_icon { - background-position: -255px -257px; + background-position: -277px -66px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-viewsettingsicon { - background-position: -277px 0px; + background-position: -277px -77px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-sub { - background-position: -277px -11px; + background-position: -277px -88px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-aligncenter { - background-position: -277px -22px; + background-position: -277px -99px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignleft { - background-position: -277px -33px; + background-position: -289px -99px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignright { - background-position: -277px -44px; + background-position: -277px -110px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-borderstyle { - background-position: -277px -55px; + background-position: -289px -110px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-clearfilter { - background-position: -277px -66px; + background-position: -277px -121px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreasedec { - background-position: -277px -77px; + background-position: -289px -121px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreaseindent { - background-position: -277px -88px; + background-position: -277px -132px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increasedec { - background-position: -277px -99px; + background-position: -289px -132px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increaseindent { - background-position: -277px -110px; + background-position: -277px -143px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-justify { - background-position: -277px -121px; + background-position: -289px -143px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolvedicon { - background-position: -277px -132px; + background-position: -277px -154px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolveicon { - background-position: -277px -143px; + background-position: -289px -154px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-selecttable_cursor { - background-position: -277px -154px; + background-position: -277px -165px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortandfilter { - background-position: -277px -165px; + background-position: -289px -165px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignbottom { - background-position: -277px -176px; + background-position: -290px -88px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-aligntop { - background-position: -277px -187px; + background-position: -277px -176px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-diagonal_down_border { - background-position: -277px -198px; + background-position: -288px -176px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-diagonal_up_border { - background-position: -277px -209px; + background-position: -277px -187px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortatoz { - background-position: -277px -220px; + background-position: -288px -187px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortztoa { - background-position: -277px -231px; + background-position: -277px -198px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-percentstyle { - background-position: -277px -242px; + background-position: -288px -198px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-underline { - background-position: -277px -253px; + background-position: -277px -209px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-verticaltext { - background-position: -80px -56px; + background-position: -287px -209px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-zoomout { - background-position: -80px -67px; + background-position: -277px -220px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-rotatedown { - background-position: -207px -38px; + background-position: -287px -220px; width: 9px; height: 11px; } .icon-highlightcolor { - background-position: 0px -269px; + background-position: -277px -231px; width: 23px; height: 10px; } .icon-navigationicon { - background-position: -23px -269px; + background-position: -277px -241px; width: 13px; height: 10px; } .icon-strike { - background-position: -36px -269px; + background-position: -277px -251px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-smaller { - background-position: -205px -167px; + background-position: -290px -241px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-yellowdiamond { - background-position: -48px -269px; + background-position: -289px -251px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-lastsheet { - background-position: -175px -147px; + background-position: -277px -261px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-rotateup { - background-position: -207px -57px; + background-position: -287px -261px; width: 9px; height: 10px; } .icon-bold { - background-position: -256px -16px; + background-position: -293px -55px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-nextsheet { - background-position: -207px -76px; + background-position: -293px -66px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-previoussheet { - background-position: -207px -95px; + background-position: -293px -77px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-italic { - background-position: -209px -19px; + background-position: -270px -104px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } @@ -1765,127 +1783,127 @@ } .icon-undo { - background-position: -59px -269px; + background-position: 0px -274px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-selectrow_cursor { - background-position: -76px -269px; + background-position: -241px -224px; width: 12px; height: 9px; } .icon-horizontaltext { - background-position: -175px -157px; + background-position: -80px -70px; width: 10px; height: 9px; } .icon-cellrow { - background-position: -207px -67px; + background-position: -247px -234px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-resize_square { - background-position: -207px -86px; + background-position: -17px -274px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-searchdownbutton { - background-position: -88px -269px; + background-position: -26px -274px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-searchupbutton { - background-position: -102px -269px; + background-position: -40px -274px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-constantproportions { - background-position: -116px -269px; + background-position: -54px -274px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopcenter_marker { - background-position: -129px -269px; + background-position: -67px -274px; width: 12px; height: 8px; } .icon-soft { - background-position: -254px -203px; + background-position: -79px -274px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopleft_marker { - background-position: -207px -49px; + background-position: -269px -208px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopright_marker { - background-position: -207px -105px; + background-position: -269px -221px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-redo1 { - background-position: -159px -140px; + background-position: -225px -213px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-undo1 { - background-position: -172px -140px; + background-position: -159px -140px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-nextpage { - background-position: -288px -176px; + background-position: -296px -220px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-previouspage { - background-position: -288px -187px; + background-position: -296px -261px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-tab { - background-position: -277px -264px; + background-position: -172px -140px; width: 10px; height: 5px; } .icon-connectionpoint { - background-position: -288px -182px; + background-position: -296px -226px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-nonbreakspace { - background-position: -288px -193px; + background-position: -272px -26px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-square { - background-position: -288px -198px; + background-position: -272px -31px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-space { - background-position: -290px -11px; + background-position: -299px -11px; width: 2px; height: 3px; } diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/change_case.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/change_case.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..259c7f386f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/change_case.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0f1ca4a698 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chatgpt_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eab263b724 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/zoom_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css index ae79f29754..1b5ef71724 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css @@ -147,6 +147,8 @@ text-decoration: none; .search-field { display: block; float: right; + margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json index 47b20abf91..c2c723bf8c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Contents.json @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Файл"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Главная"}, { "src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Вставка" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Рисование"}, { "src": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Макет" }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Формула" }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/DataTab.htm", "name": "Вкладка Данные" }, @@ -42,6 +43,7 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "name": "Вставка и форматирование автофигур" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Вставка текстовых объектов" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Вставка объектов SmartArt" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Рисование от руки на таблице" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Вставка символов и знаков" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm", "name": "Работа с объектами"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", "name": "Вставка формул", "headername": "Математические формулы" }, @@ -51,7 +53,7 @@ { "src": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "name": "Комментирование электронных таблиц" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "name": "История версий" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm", "name": "Защита электронной таблицы", "headername": "Защита электронной таблицы" }, - { "src": "UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm", "name": "Разрешить редактировать диапазоны" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm", "name": "Защита диапазона" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/Password.htm", "name": "Защита электронных таблиц с помощью пароля" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm", "name": "Защита листа" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm", "name": "Защита книги" }, diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/arraytotext.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/arraytotext.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a0292f6240 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/arraytotext.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + Функция МАССИВВТЕКСТ + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Функция МАССИВВТЕКСТ

                                        +

                                        Функция МАССИВВТЕКСТ - это одна из функций для работы с текстом и данными.Она возвращает диапазон данных в виде текстовой строки.

                                        +

                                        Синтаксис функции МАССИВВТЕКСТ:

                                        +

                                        =МАССИВВТЕКСТ(массив, [формат])

                                        +

                                        где

                                        +

                                        массив - это диапазон данных, возвращаемых в виде текста,

                                        +

                                        + [формат] - это формат возвращаемых данных. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: +

                                          +
                                        • 0 - (установлено по умолчанию) значения в текстовой строке будут разделены запятой,
                                          • +
                                        • 1 - заключить каждое текстовое значение в двойные кавычки (кроме чисел, значений истина/ложь и ошибок), использовать точку с запятой в качестве разделителя и заключить всю текстовую строку в фигурные скобки.
                                          • +
                                        +

                                        +

                                        Чтобы применить функцию МАССИВВТЕКСТ,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат,
                                          2. +
                                        2. + щелкните по значку Вставить функцию
                                          , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, +
                                          или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, +
                                          или щелкните по значку
                                          перед строкой формул, +
                                          3. +
                                        3. выберите из списка группу функций Текст и данные,
                                          4. +
                                        4. щелкните по функции МАССИВВТЕКСТ,
                                          5. +
                                        5. введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек,
                                          6. +
                                        6. нажмите клавишу Enter.
                                          7. +
                                        +

                                        Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке.

                                        + +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/expand.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/expand.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c3b4eed5e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/expand.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + Функция РАЗВЕРНУТЬ + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Функция РАЗВЕРНУТЬ

                                        +

                                        Функция РАЗВЕРНУТЬ - это одна из поисковых функций. Она возвращает расширенный, путем добавления строк и столбцов, диапазон данных (массива).

                                        +

                                        Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива.

                                        +

                                        Синтаксис функции РАЗВЕРНУТЬ:

                                        +

                                        =РАЗВЕРНУТЬ(массив, строки, [столбцы], [заполняющее_значение])

                                        +

                                        где

                                        +

                                        массив - это массив, который нужно расширить,

                                        +

                                        строки - это количество строк в возвращаемом массиве. Это необязательный аргумент. Если он не указан, строки не будут добавлены, и необходимо указать количество столбцов.

                                        +

                                        [столбцы] - это количество строк в возвращаемом массиве. Это необязательный аргумент. Если он не указан, столбцы не будут добавлены, и необходимо указать количество строк.

                                        +

                                        [заполняющее_значение] - это значение для заполнения добавленных ячеек. Значение по умолчанию — #Н/Д.

                                        +

                                        Чтобы применить функцию РАЗВЕРНУТЬ,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат,
                                          2. +
                                        2. + щелкните по значку Вставить функцию
                                          , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, +
                                          или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, +
                                          или щелкните по значку
                                          перед строкой формул, +
                                          3. +
                                        3. выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки,
                                          4. +
                                        4. щелкните по функции РАЗВЕРНУТЬ,
                                          5. +
                                        5. введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек,
                                          6. +
                                        6. нажмите клавишу Enter.
                                          7. +
                                        +

                                        Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке.

                                        + +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/filter.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/filter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ed55f5f327 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/filter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + Функция ФИЛЬТР + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Функция ФИЛЬТР

                                        +

                                        Функция ФИЛЬТР - это одна из поисковых функций. возвращает отфильтрованный диапазон данных, соответствующий указанным вами критериям. Функция ФИЛЬТР извлекает только необходимые данные, и результаты обновляются при изменении исходных данных.

                                        +

                                        Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива.

                                        +

                                        Синтаксис функции ФИЛЬТР:

                                        +

                                        =ФИЛЬТР(массив,включить,[если_пусто])

                                        +

                                        где

                                        +

                                        массив - диапазон ячеек для фильтрации,

                                        +

                                        включить - критерий фильтрации, представленный в виде логического массива (ИСТИНА/ЛОЖЬ) той же высоты (столбцы) и ширины (строки), что и массив,

                                        +

                                        [если_пусто] - значение, которое будет возвращено, если фильтр не возвращает результатов. Это необязательный аргумент.

                                        +

                                        Чтобы применить функцию ФИЛЬТР,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат,
                                          2. +
                                        2. + щелкните по значку Вставить функцию
                                          , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, +
                                          или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, +
                                          или щелкните по значку
                                          перед строкой формул, +
                                          3. +
                                        3. выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки,
                                          4. +
                                        4. щелкните по функции ФИЛЬТР,
                                          5. +
                                        5. введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек,
                                          6. +
                                        6. нажмите клавишу Enter.
                                          7. +
                                        +

                                        Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке.

                                        + +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/sequence.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/sequence.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b86e416c3b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/sequence.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + Функция ПОСЛЕД + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Функция ПОСЛЕД

                                        +

                                        Функция ПОСЛЕД - это одна из математических и тригонометрических функций. Она возвращает сгенерированный массив последовательных чисел.

                                        +

                                        Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива.

                                        +

                                        Синтаксис функции ПОСЛЕД:

                                        +

                                        ПОСЛЕД(строки,[столбцы],[начало],[шаг])

                                        +

                                        где

                                        +

                                        строки - это количество возвращаемых строк.

                                        +

                                        столбцы - это количества возвращаемых столбцов.

                                        +

                                        начало - это первое число в последовательности.

                                        +

                                        шаг - это значение приращения для каждого последующего значения в диапазоне ячеек.

                                        +

                                        Чтобы применить функцию ПОСЛЕД,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат,
                                          2. +
                                        2. + щелкните по значку Вставить функцию
                                          , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, +
                                          или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, +
                                          или щелкните по значку
                                          перед строкой формул, +
                                          3. +
                                        3. выберите из списка группу функций Математические,
                                          4. +
                                        4. щелкните по функции ПОСЛЕД,
                                          5. +
                                        5. введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой,
                                          6. +
                                        6. нажмите клавишу Enter.
                                          7. +
                                        +

                                        Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке.

                                        + +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/sort.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/sort.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dd45577f9e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/sort.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + Функция СОРТ + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Функция СОРТ

                                        +

                                        The СОРТ - это одна из поисковых функций. Она возвращает отсортированное содержимое диапазона данных или массива.

                                        +

                                        Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива.

                                        +

                                        Синтаксис функции СОРТ:

                                        +

                                        =СОРТ(массив,[индекс_сортировки],[порядок_сортировки],[по_столбцу])

                                        +

                                        где

                                        +

                                        массив - диапазон ячеек для фильтрации.

                                        +

                                        [индекс_сортировки] - число, определяющее столбец или строку для сортировки. Это необязательный аргумент.

                                        +

                                        + [порядок_сортировки] - число, определяющее порядок сортировки. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: +

                                          +
                                        • 1 или не указано - (установлено по умолчанию) порядок по возрастанию,
                                          • +
                                        • -1 - порядок по убыванию,
                                          • +
                                        +

                                        +

                                        + [по_столбцу] - это логическое значение. Это необязательный аргумент. Он указывает направление сортировки. Он может принимать одно из логических числовых значений: +

                                          +
                                        • ИСТИНА или не указано - сортировка по строкам, когда ваши данные расположены вертикально.
                                          • +
                                        • ЛОЖЬ - сортировка по столбцам, когда ваши данные расположены горизонтально.
                                          • +
                                        +

                                        +

                                        Чтобы применить функцию СОРТ,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат,
                                          2. +
                                        2. + щелкните по значку Вставить функцию
                                          , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, +
                                          или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, +
                                          или щелкните по значку
                                          перед строкой формул, +
                                          3. +
                                        3. выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки,
                                          4. +
                                        4. щелкните по функции СОРТ,
                                          5. +
                                        5. введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек,
                                          6. +
                                        6. нажмите клавишу Enter.
                                          7. +
                                        +

                                        Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке.

                                        + +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/xmatch.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/xmatch.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..74b000ba65 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/Functions/xmatch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + Функция ПОИСКПОЗX + + + + + + + + +
                                        +
                                        + +
                                        +

                                        Функция ПОИСКПОЗX

                                        +

                                        Функция ПОИСКПОЗX - это одна из поисковых функций. Она возвращает относительное положение заданного элемента в диапазоне ячеек. По умолчанию требуется точное совпадение.

                                        +

                                        Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива.

                                        +

                                        Синтакс функции ПОИСКПОЗХ:

                                        +

                                        =ПОИСКПОЗХ(искомое_значение, просматриваемый_массив, [режим_сопоставления], [режим_поиска])

                                        +

                                        где

                                        +

                                        искомое_значение - это искомое значение.

                                        +

                                        просматриваемый_массив - это массив или диапазон для поиска.

                                        +

                                        + [режим_сопоставления] - это тип сопоставления. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: +

                                          +
                                        • 0 - (установлено по умолчанию) возвращает точное совпадение; если точное совпадение не найдено, функция возвращает ошибку #Н/Д.
                                          • +
                                        • -1 - возвращает точное совпадение; если точное значение не найдено, функция возвращает наименьшее значение, превышающее искомое_значение.
                                          • +
                                        • 1 - возвращает точное совпадение; если точное значение не найдено, функция возвращает наибольшее значение, превышающее искомое_значение.
                                          • +
                                        • 2 - совпадение с использованием подстановочных знаков.
                                          • +
                                        +

                                        +

                                        + [режим_поиска] - это тип поиска. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: +

                                          +
                                        • 1 - (установлено по умолчанию) начинает поиск с первого элемента.
                                          • +
                                        • -1 - начинает обратный поиск, т.е. с последнего элемента.
                                          • +
                                        • 2 - выполняет двоичный поиск в искомом_значении, отсортированным по возрастанию. Если сортировка не выполнена, будут возвращены недопустимые результаты.
                                          • +
                                        • -2 выполняет двоичный поиск в искомом_значении, отсортированным по убыванию. Если сортировка не выполнена, будут возвращены недопустимые результаты.
                                          • +
                                        +

                                        +

                                        + Аргумент режим_сопоставления может содержать подстановочные знаки — вопросительный знак (?), соответствующий одному символу, и звездочку (*), соответствующую любому количеству символов. Если требуется найти вопросительный знак или звездочку, введите перед этим символом тильду (~). +

                                        +

                                        Чтобы применить функцию ПОИСКПОЗX,

                                        +
                                          +
                                        1. выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат,
                                          2. +
                                        2. + щелкните по значку Вставить функцию
                                          , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, +
                                          или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, +
                                          или щелкните по значку
                                          перед строкой формул, +
                                          3. +
                                        3. выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки,
                                          4. +
                                        4. щелкните по функции ПОИСКПОЗX,
                                          5. +
                                        5. введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек,
                                          6. +
                                        6. нажмите клавишу Enter.
                                          7. +
                                        +

                                        Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке.

                                        + +
                                        + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index 8783ea38dd..8a8cf8569a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -99,8 +99,8 @@

                                        Региональные параметры

                                        1. Опция Язык формул используется для выбора языка отображения и ввода имен формул, аргументов и их описания. -

                                          Язык формул поддерживается на 32 языках:

                                          -

                                          белорусский, болгарский, каталонский, китайский, чешский, датский, голландский, английский, финский, французский, немецкий, греческий, венгерский, индонезийский, итальянский, японский, корейский, лаосский, латышский, норвежский, польский, португальский (Бразилия), португальский (Португалия), румынский, русский, словацкий, словенский, испанский, шведский, турецкий, украинский, вьетнамский.

                                          +

                                          Язык формул поддерживается на 33 языках:

                                          +

                                          армянский,белорусский, болгарский, каталонский, китайский, чешский, датский, голландский, английский, финский, французский, немецкий, греческий, венгерский, индонезийский, итальянский, японский, корейский, лаосский, латышский, норвежский, польский, португальский (Бразилия), португальский (Португалия), румынский, русский, словацкий, словенский, испанский, шведский, турецкий, украинский, вьетнамский.

                                        2. Опция Регион используется для выбора формата отображения денежных единиц и даты и времени по умолчанию.
                                        3. Опция Использовать разделители на базе региональных настроек выбрана по умолчанию, разделители соответствуют заданному региону. Если вы хотите использовать особые разделители, снимите этот флажок и введите нужные символы в расположенных ниже полях Десятичный разделитель и Разделитель разрядов тысяч.
                                          4. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 00dae25bb0..b33f47039d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -67,9 +67,9 @@

                                          Используйте инструменты навигации

                                          щелкните по соответствующей Вкладке листа напротив кнопки .

                                          Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего листа. - Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%/ 300% / 400% / 500%) или + Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить < class = "icon icon-zoomout">. - Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладкe Вид. + Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладкe Вид.

                                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 78cfb0cec7..1305d12f76 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                    Функция поиска и замены

                                    Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, которые используются в текущей электронной таблице, щелкните по значку , расположенному на левой боковой панели, или значку , расположенному в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска.

                                    -

                                    В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск.

                                    +

                                    В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. На панели находится текстовое поле для ввода поискового запроса, количество результатов поиска и элементы управления для перехода к предыдущему или следующему результату, а также закрытия панели.

                                    Маленькая панель Поиск

                                    Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H.

                                    Откроется панель Поиск и замена:

                                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 90a4c7aa9e..f401476753 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@

                                    Поддерживаемые форматы электронных табл

                                    Электронная таблица - это таблица данных, организованных в строки и столбцы. Очень часто используется для хранения финансовой информации благодаря возможности автоматически пересчитывать весь лист после изменения отдельной ячейки. - Редактор электронных таблиц позволяет открывать, просматривать и редактировать самые популярные форматы файлов электронных таблиц. + Редактор электронных таблиц позволяет открывать, просматривать и редактировать самые популярные форматы файлов электронных таблиц.

                                    -

                                    При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (XLSX>). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости.

                                    +

                                    При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (XLSX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости.

                                    Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование.

                                    @@ -40,36 +40,52 @@

                                    Поддерживаемые форматы электронных табл

                                    - - + + - - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -80,13 +96,13 @@

                                    Поддерживаемые форматы электронных табл

                                    + + + + + + + --> @@ -95,6 +111,14 @@

                                    Поддерживаемые форматы электронных табл

                                    + + + + + + + + @@ -103,6 +127,14 @@

                                    Поддерживаемые форматы электронных табл

                                    + + + + + + + +
                                    +
                                    ODSРасширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, используемых пакетами офисных приложений OpenOffice и StarOffice, открытый стандарт для электронных таблицETWPS Spreadsheets Workbook
                                    Формат файла электронной таблицы, включенный в пакет WPS Office, который поддерживает диаграммы, формулы и хранит данные в строках и столбцах ячеек                                    		 + +
                                    OTSOpenDocument Spreadsheet Template
                                    Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон OTS содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием                                    		ETTWPS Spreadsheets Template
                                    Шаблон электронной таблицы, включенный в пакет WPS Office. Файлы ETT аналогичны файлам ET, сохраняя строки и столбцы данных, диаграммы, графики, но в основном они используются для дублирования электронных таблиц с аналогичными макетами и информацией.                                    		 + +
                                    PDFPortable Document Format
                                    Формат файлов, используемый для представления документов независимо от программного обеспечения, аппаратных средств и операционных систем                                    		FODSOpenDocument Flat XML Spreadsheet
                                    Формат файла на основе XML для сохранения и обмена электронными таблицами..                                    		 + +
                                    ODSРасширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, используемых пакетами офисных приложений OpenOffice и StarOffice, открытый стандарт для электронных таблиц + +
                                    PDF/APortable Document Format / A
                                    Подмножество формата PDF, содержащее ограниченный набор возможностей представления данных. Данный формат является стандартом ISO и предназначен для долгосрочного архивного хранения электронных документов.                                    		OTSOpenDocument Spreadsheet Template
                                    Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон OTS содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием                                    		 + +
                                    SXCSun XML Calc
                                    Формат файла электронной таблицы на основе XML, входящий в состав OpenOffice. Поддерживает формулы, функции, макросы и диаграммы                                    		 + +
                                    XLS+
                                    XLSBExcel Binary Spreadsheet
                                    Расширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, хранящих информацию в двоичном формате вместо XML                                    		++
                                    XLSX Стандартное расширение для файлов электронных таблиц, созданных с помощью программы Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (или более поздних версий)+
                                    XLTMФайл XLTM представляет собой шаблон электронной таблицы с поддержкой макросов, созданный Microsoft Excel++
                                    XLTX Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template
                                    разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон XLTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием                                    		 +
                                    XMLExtensible Markup Language
                                    Формат файла, который используется для структурирования, хранения и передачи данных.                                    		++

                                    Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать таблицу из меню Файл -> Скачать как.

                                    @@ -112,31 +144,55 @@

                                    Поддерживаемые форматы электронных табл

                                    - + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + - + - + + + + --> + + + + - + - - + + + + + +
                                    CSVCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXJPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    ETCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    ETTCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    FODSCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    ODSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    SXCCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    OTSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    XLSCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    XLSBCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTX
                                    XLSMCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX
                                    XLSXCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLTM, XLTX
                                    XLTXCSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTXXLTMCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTX
                                    XMLCSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX

                                    Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации таблиц в самые известные форматы файлов.

                                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0526cbd298 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + Draw tab + + + + + + + + +
                                    +
                                    + +
                                    +

                                    Вкладка Рисование

                                    +

                                    Вкладка Рисование в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет выполнять основные операции рисования.

                                    +
                                    +

                                    Окно онлайн-редактора документов:

                                    +

                                    Вкладка Рисование

                                    +
                                    +
                                    +

                                    Окно десктопного редактора документов:

                                    +

                                    Вкладка Рисование

                                    +
                                    +

                                    С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия:

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • выделять рисунки, чтобы изменить их размер или удалить,
                                      • +
                                    • использовать ручку и маркер, чтобы рисовать или добавлять рукописные заметки и выделение,
                                      • +
                                    • использовать ластик, чтобы удалять весь рисунок или рукописный текст.
                                      • +
                                    +
                                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 45963c4a1b..c1fc439d83 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

                                    Вкладка Плагины

                                    Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц:

                                    Вкладка Плагины

                                    -

                                    Кнопка Настройки позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные.

                                    +

                                    Кнопка Менеджер плагинов позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные.

                                    Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API.

                                    В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины:

                                      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 48ab045834..3ee45c9cb3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                                      Знакомство с пользовательским интерфейсом редактора электронных таблиц

                                      -

                                      В редакторе электронных таблиц используется вкладочный интерфейс, в котором команды редактирования сгруппированы во вкладки по функциональности.

                                      + В Редакторе электронных таблиц используется вкладочный интерфейс, в котором команды редактирования сгруппированы во вкладки по функциональности.

                                      Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц:

                                      Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц

                                      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm index 012f640c0d..334adffc44 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@

                                      Вкладка Защита

                                    • Зашифровывать электронную таблицу при помощи пароля,
                                    • Защищать структуру книги с помощью пароля или без него,
                                    • Защищать лист, ограничив возможности редактирования листа с помощью пароля или без него,
                                      • -
                                    • Разрешать редактировать диапазоны заблокированных ячеек с паролем или без него,
                                      • -
                                    • Включать и отключать следующие опции: Заблокированная ячейка, Скрытые формулы, Заблокированная фигура, Заблокировать текст.
                                      • +
                                    • Включать и отключать следующие опции: Заблокированная ячейка, Скрытые формулы, Заблокированная фигура, Заблокировать текст,
                                      • +
                                    • Защитить диапазон, чтобы ограничить редактирование диапазонов выбранными пользователями.
                                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index 9b2e015a2b..4ecf535fb6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -29,8 +29,10 @@

                                    Вкладка Вид

                                    На этой вкладке доступны следующие параметры просмотра:

                                    • Представление листа - позволяет управлять предустановками представления листа.
                                      • +
                                    • Обычный - позволяет видеть таблицу полностью.
                                      • +
                                    • Страничный режим - позволяет видеть только печатную область электронной таблицы.
                                    • Масштаб - позволяет увеличивать и уменьшать масштаб документа.
                                      • -
                                    • Тема интерфейса позволяет изменить тему интерфейса на Системную, Светлую, Классическую светлую, Темную или Контрастную темную.
                                      • +
                                    • Тема интерфейса - позволяет изменить тему интерфейса на Системную, Светлую, Классическую светлую, Темную или Контрастную темную.
                                    • Закрепить области - позволяет закреплять и откреплять определенные строки и столбцы.

                                    Следующие параметры позволяют настроить отображение или скрытие элементов. Чтобы сделать их видимыми, отметьте галочкой следующие элементы:

                                    @@ -39,8 +41,8 @@

                                    Вкладка Вид

                                  • Заголовки - чтобы заголовки, столбцов вверху и заголовки строк слева всегда отображались.
                                  • Линии сетки - чтобы линии сетки, контуры ячеек всегда отображались.
                                  • Отображать нули - чтобы отображать значение "0" в ячейке.
                                    • -
                                  • Всегда показывать панель инструментов - всегда отображать верхнюю панель инструментов.
                                    • -
                                  • Объединить строки листов и состояния - отображать все инструменты навигации по листу и строку состояния в одной строке. Если этот флажок не установлен, строка состояния будет отображаться в виде двух строк.
                                    • +
                                  • Всегда показывать панель инструментов - чтобы всегда отображать верхнюю панель инструментов.
                                    • +
                                  • Объединить строки листов и состояния - чтобы отображать все инструменты навигации по листу и строку состояния в одной строке. Если этот флажок не установлен, строка состояния будет отображаться в виде двух строк.
                                  • Левая панель - чтобы левая панель отображалась.
                                  • Правая панель - чтобы правая панель отображалась.
                                  diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm index c2ee8f3c91..59247f1575 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                  Добавление фона и границ ячеек

                                  Добавление фона ячеек

                                  -

                                  Для применения и форматирования фона ячеек:

                                  +

                                  Для применения и форматирования фона ячеек в Редакторе таблиц:

                                  1. выделите ячейку или диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, @@ -29,7 +29,23 @@

                                    Добавление фона ячеек

                                  2. Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить выделенные ячейки.

                                    Заливка цветом

                                    -

                                    Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задайте пользовательский цвет.

                                    +

                                    Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите на палитре один из следующих цветов:

                                    +

                                    Палитра

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме таблицы.
                                      • +
                                    • Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Выбранная цветовая схема на них не влияет.
                                      • +
                                    • + Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты:: +
                                        +
                                      • Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в таблице.
                                        • +
                                      • + Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: +

                                        Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                                        +

                                        Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Недавние цвета.

                                        +
                                        • +
                                      +
                                      • +
                                  3. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить выделенные ячейки двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm deleted file mode 100644 index c151ca1d45..0000000000 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ - - - - Разрешить редактировать диапазоны - - - - - - - - -
                                    -
                                    - -
                                    - -

                                    Разрешить редактировать диапазоны

                                    -

                                    Опция Разрешить редактировать диапазоны позволяет указать диапазоны ячеек, с которыми пользователь может работать на защищенном листе. Вы можете разрешить пользователям редактировать определенные диапазоны заблокированных ячеек с паролем или без него. Если вы не используете пароль, диапазон ячеек можно редактировать.

                                    -

                                    Чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек, который пользователь может редактировать:

                                    -
                                      -
                                    1. - Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны на верхней панели инструментов. Откроется окно Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны. -

                                      Редактировать диапазоны

                                      -
                                      2. -
                                    2. - Нажмите кнопку Новый в окне Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны, чтобы выбрать и добавить диапазон ячеек, который пользователь сможет редактировать. -

                                      Новый диапазон

                                      -
                                      3. -
                                    3. - В окне Новый диапазон введите Название диапазона и выберите диапазон ячеек при помощи кнопки Выбор данных. Пароль не является обязательным, поэтому введите и затем подтвердите его, если вы хотите, чтобы пользователи получали доступ к редактируемым диапазонам ячеек с помощью пароля. Нажмите OK, чтобы подтвердить. -

                                      Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте.

                                      -
                                      4. - -
                                    4. Нажмите кнопку Защитить лист или нажмите OK, чтобы сохранить изменения и продолжить работу с незащищенным листом.
                                      5. -
                                    5. - Если вы нажмете кнопку Защитить лист, откроется окно Защитить лист. В нем вы можете выбрать операции, которые будет разрешено выполнять пользователю, чтобы предотвратить любые нежелательные изменения. Введите и подтвердите пароль, если вы хотите установить пароль для снятия защиты с этого листа. -

                                      Защитить лист

                                      -
                                      - Операции, которые может выполнять пользователь. -
                                        -
                                      • Выделять заблокированные ячейки
                                        • -
                                      • Выделять разблокированные ячейки
                                        • -
                                      • Форматировать ячейки
                                        • -
                                      • Форматировать столбцы
                                        • -
                                      • Форматировать строки
                                        • -
                                      • Вставлять столбцы
                                        • -
                                      • Вставлять строки
                                        • -
                                      • Вставлять гиперссылку
                                        • -
                                      • Удалить столбцы
                                        • -
                                      • Удалить строки
                                        • -
                                      • Сортировать
                                        • -
                                      • Использовать автофильтр
                                        • -
                                      • Использовать сводную таблицу и сводную диаграмму
                                        • -
                                      • Редактировать объекты
                                        • -
                                      • Редактировать сценарии
                                        • -
                                      -
                                      -
                                    6. - Нажмите кнопку Защитить, чтобы включить защиту. Кнопка Защитить лист остается выделенной, когда лист защищен. -

                                      Защитить лист выделен

                                      -
                                      7. -
                                    7. - Если лист не защищен, вы все равно можете вносить изменения в разрешенные диапазоны. Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны, чтобы открыть окно Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны. При помощи кнопок Редактировать и Удалить можно управлять выбранными диапазонами ячеек. Затем нажмите кнопку Защитить лист, чтобы включить защиту листа, или нажмите OK, чтобы сохранить изменения и продолжить работу с незащищенным листом. -

                                      Редактировать диапазон

                                      -
                                      8. -
                                    8. - Когда кто-то пытается отредактировать защищенный паролем диапазон ячеек, появляется окно Разблокировать диапазон, в котором пользователю предлагается ввести пароль. -

                                      Разблокировать диапазон

                                      -
                                      9. -
                                    -
                                    - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm index 033cc59991..3535b2fa57 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm @@ -33,7 +33,9 @@

                                    Применение числового формата

                                    Примечание: чтобы быстро применить к выделенным данным Финансовый формат, можно также щелкнуть по значку Финансовый формат на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выбрать нужное обозначение денежной единицы: $ Доллар, € Евро, £ Фунт, ₽ Рубль, ¥ Йена, kn Хорватская куна.

                                  4. Денежный - используется для отображения денежных значений с используемым по умолчанию обозначением денежной единицы и двумя десятичными знаками. Чтобы применить другое обозначение денежной единицы или количество десятичных знаков, следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям. В отличие от Финансового формата, в Денежном формате обозначение денежной единицы помещается непосредственно рядом с числом, а отрицательные значения отображаются с отрицательным знаком (-).
                                    5. -
                                  5. Дата - используется для отображения дат,
                                    6. +
                                  6. Краткий формат даты - используется для отображения даты в формате ДД.ММ.ГГГГ,
                                    7. +
                                  7. Длинный формат даты - используется для отображения даты в формате ДД.месяц в полном формате.ГГГГ,
                                    8. +
                                  8. Дата - используется для отображения дат,
                                  9. Время - используется для отображения времени,
                                  10. Процентный - используется для отображения данных в виде процентов со знаком процента %,

                                    Примечание: чтобы быстро применить к данным процентный формат, можно также использовать значок Процентный формат на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов.

                                    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3b2023fab0 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + Рисование от руки на таблице + + + + + + + + +
                                    +
                                    + +
                                    +

                                    Рисование от руки на таблице

                                    +

                                    В Редакторе таблиц, вы можете использовать вкладку Рисование, чтобы выделять в таблице текст маркером, рисовать от руки, добавлять рукописные заметки и стирать их.

                                    +

                                    Функции рисования

                                    +

                                    Чтобы начать рисовать, писать или выделять текст, нажмите значок Ручка или Маркер и перемещайте курсор. Щелкните стрелку раскрывающегося списка, чтобы настроить цвет и толщину обводки. Нажмите Другие цвета, если нужного цвета нет в палитре.

                                    +

                                    Инструмент Ручка

                                    +

                                    Когда вы закончите рисовать, писать или выделять, снова щелкните значок Ручка или Маркер или нажмите клавишу Esc.

                                    +

                                    Щелкните на Ластик и перемещайте курсор вперед и назад, чтобы стереть рисунок. Ластик удаляет только весь рисунок.

                                    +

                                    Используйте функцию Выделить, чтобы выбрать надпись или рисунок. После выбора вы можете изменить размер или удалить выбранный элемент.

                                    +
                                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm index f4998b8ce1..35cc8aacdc 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm @@ -19,63 +19,68 @@

                                    Настройка типа, размера, стиля и цветов шр

                                    Примечание: если необходимо применить форматирование к данным, которые уже есть в электронной таблице, выделите их мышью или с помощью клавиатуры, а затем примените форматирование. Если форматирование требуется применить к нескольким ячейкам или диапазонам ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши.

                                    - - + + - + - + - + + + + + + - + - + - + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + - + - + - +
                                    Шрифт
                                    		Шрифт
                                    		 Используется для выбора шрифта из списка доступных. Если требуемый шрифт отсутствует в списке, его можно скачать и установить в вашей операционной системе, после чего он будет доступен для использования в десктопной версии.
                                    Размер шрифта
                                    		 Используется для выбора предустановленного значения размера шрифта из выпадающего списка (доступны следующие стандартные значения: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 и 96). Также можно вручную ввести произвольное значение до 409 пунктов в поле ввода и нажать клавишу Enter.
                                    Увеличить размер шрифта
                                    		 Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт крупнее при каждом нажатии на кнопку.
                                    Уменьшить размер шрифта
                                    		 Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт мельче при каждом нажатии на кнопку.
                                    Изменить регистр
                                    		Используется для изменения регистра шрифта. Как в предложениях. - регистр совпадает с обычным предложением. нижнеий регистр - все буквы маленькие. ВЕРХНИЙ РЕГИСТР - все буквы прописные. Каждое Слово С Прописной - каждое слово начинается с заглавной буквы. иЗМЕНИТЬ рЕГИСТР - поменять регистр выделенного текста или слова, в котором находится курсор мыши.
                                    Полужирный
                                    		 Используется для придания шрифту большей насыщенности.
                                    Курсив
                                    		 Используется для придания шрифту наклона вправо.
                                    Подчеркнутый
                                    		 Используется для подчеркивания текста чертой, проведенной под буквами.
                                    Зачёркнутый
                                    		Используется для зачёркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам.
                                    Подстрочные/надстрочные знаки
                                    		Позволяет выбрать опцию Надстрочные знаки или Подстрочные знаки. Опция Надстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Опция Подстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах.
                                    Зачёркнутый
                                    		Используется для зачёркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам.
                                    Подстрочные/надстрочные знаки
                                    		Позволяет выбрать опцию Надстрочные знаки или Подстрочные знаки. Опция Надстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Опция Подстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах.
                                    Цвет шрифта
                                    		 Используется для изменения цвета букв/символов в ячейках.
                                    Цвет заливки
                                    		 Используется для изменения цвета заливки ячейки. С помощью этого значка можно применить заливку сплошным цветом. Цвет заливки ячейки также можно изменить с помощью палитры Заливка на вкладке Параметры ячейки правой боковой панели.
                                    Изменение цветовой схемы
                                    		 Используется для изменения цветовой палитры по умолчанию для элементов рабочего листа (шрифт, фон, диаграммы и их элементы) путем выбора одной из доступных схем: Новая офисная, Стандартная, Оттенки серого, Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская или Яркая.
                                    @@ -91,12 +96,19 @@

                                    Настройка типа, размера, стиля и цветов шр
                                    • Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы.
                                    • Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов.
                                      • -
                                    • Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: -

                                      Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                                      -

                                      Пользовательский цвет будет применен к тексту и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет.

                                      +
                                    • + Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты:: +
                                        +
                                      • Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в таблице.
                                        • +
                                      • + Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: +

                                        Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                                        +

                                        Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Недавние цвета.

                                        +
                                        • +
                                      • -
                                    -

                                    11. +
                                +

                              Чтобы очистить цвет фона определенной ячейки,

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm index 41e65f7f2c..566fae983a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm @@ -42,12 +42,14 @@

                                Вставка формул массива

                              1. ПОСТОЛБЦ
                              2. ПОСТРОК
                              3. ПРОСМОТРX
                                4. +
                              4. РАЗВЕРНУТЬ
                              5. РОСТ
                              6. СБРОСИТЬ
                              7. СВЕРНСТОЛБЦ
                              8. СВЕРНСТРОК
                              9. СЛУЧМАССИВ
                              10. СМЕЩ
                                11. +
                              11. СОРТ
                              12. СТОЛБЕЦ
                              13. СТРОКА
                              14. ТЕКСТРАЗД
                                15. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 2ce15ac1eb..0b63ed039a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -11,182 +11,211 @@
                                -
                                - -
                                +
                                + +

                                Вставка и форматирование автофигур

                                Вставка автофигур

                                Для добавления автофигуры в электронную таблицу,

                                  -
                                1. перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                  2. -
                                2. щелкните по значку
                                  Фигура на верхней панели инструментов,
                                  3. +
                                3. перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                  4. +
                                4. щелкните по значку
                                  Фигура на верхней панели инструментов,
                                5. выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Последние использованные, Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии,
                                6. щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы,
                                7. установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру,
                                  8. -
                                8. после того как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и местоположение и другие параметры. +
                                9. после того как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и местоположение и другие параметры. Вы можете сохранить автофигуру как изображение на жестком диске с помощью пункта Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. +
                                +

                                Копирование форматирования стиля автофигуры

                                +

                                Чтобы скопировать определенное форматирование стиля автофигуры,

                                +
                                  +
                                1. выберите автофигуру, форматирование которой нужно скопировать, и с помощью мыши или клавиатуры,
                                  2. +
                                2. щелкните значок Копировать стиль
                                  на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов (указатель мыши будет выглядеть следующим образом
                                  ),
                                  3. +
                                3. выберите нужную автофигуру, чтобы применить такое же форматирование.
                                +

                                Изменение параметров автофигуры

                                Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее открыть, выделите фигуру мышью и щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства:

                                  -
                                • Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: -
                                    -
                                  • Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. -

                                    Заливка цветом

                                    -

                                    Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится:

                                    +
                                  • + Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты:
                                      -
                                    • Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы.
                                      • -
                                    • Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов.
                                      • -
                                    • Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить. - Пользовательский цвет будет применен к автофигуре и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет. +
                                    • + Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. +

                                      Заливка цветом

                                      +

                                      Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится:

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы.
                                        • +
                                      • Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов.
                                        • +
                                      • + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
                                          +
                                        • Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в таблице.
                                          • +
                                        • + Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить. +

                                          Палитра - Пользовательский цвет

                                          +

                                          Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Недавние цвета.

                                          +
                                          • +
                                        +
                                        • +
                                      +
                                      • +
                                    • + Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. +

                                      Градиентная заливка

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • + Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: +
                                          +
                                        • Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол.
                                          • +
                                        • Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям.
                                          • +
                                        +
                                        • +
                                      • + Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. +
                                          +
                                        • Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку
                                          Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку
                                          Удалить точку градиента.
                                          • +
                                        • Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения.
                                          • +
                                        • Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет.
                                          • +
                                        +
                                        • +
                                      +
                                      • +
                                    • + Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. +

                                      Заливка с помощью изображения или текстуры

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно нажать кнопку Выбрать изображение и добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, Из хранилища, используя файловый менеджер ONLYOFFICE, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес.
                                        • +
                                      • + Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. +

                                        В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево.

                                        +
                                        • +
                                      +
                                        +
                                      • + В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. +

                                        Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                                        +

                                        Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                                        +

                                        Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение.

                                        +
                                        • +
                                      • +
                                    • + Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. +

                                      Заливка с помощью узора

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню.
                                        • +
                                      • Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора.
                                        • +
                                      • Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора.
                                        • +
                                      +
                                      • +
                                    • Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
                                    • -
                                  • Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. -

                                    Градиентная заливка

                                    -
                                      -
                                    • - Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: -
                                        -
                                      • Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол.
                                        • -
                                      • Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям.
                                        • -
                                      -
                                      • -
                                    • - Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. -
                                        -
                                      • Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку
                                        Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку
                                        Удалить точку градиента.
                                        • -
                                      • Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения.
                                        • -
                                      • Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет.
                                        • -
                                      -
                                      • -
                                    -
                                    • -
                                  • Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. -

                                    Заливка с помощью изображения или текстуры

                                    +
                                  +

                                  Autoshape Settings tab

                                  +
                                    +
                                  • Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности.
                                    • +
                                  • + Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура.
                                      -
                                    • Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно нажать кнопку Выбрать изображение и добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, Из хранилища, используя файловый менеджер ONLYOFFICE, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес.
                                      • -
                                    • Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. -

                                      В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево.

                                      -
                                      • +
                                    • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
                                      • +
                                    • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
                                      • +
                                    • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
                                    +
                                    • +
                                  • + Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок:
                                      -
                                    • В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. -

                                      Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                                      -

                                      Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство.

                                      -

                                      Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение.

                                      -
                                      • +
                                    • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки
                                      • +
                                    • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке
                                      • +
                                    • чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо)
                                      • +
                                    • чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз)
                                    • -
                                  • Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. -

                                    Заливка с помощью узора

                                    -
                                      -
                                    • Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню.
                                      • -
                                    • Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора.
                                      • -
                                    • Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора.
                                      • -
                                    -
                                    • -
                                  • Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку.
                                    • -
                                  -
                                  • -
                                • Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. -
                                  • -
                                • Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. -
                                    -
                                  • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
                                    • -
                                  • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
                                    • -
                                  • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
                                    • -
                                  -
                                  • -
                                • - Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: -
                                    -
                                  • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки
                                    • -
                                  • чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке
                                    • -
                                  • чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо)
                                    • -
                                  • чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз)
                                    • -
                                  -
                                  • -
                                • Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка.
                                  • -
                                • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью.
                                  • +
                                • Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка.
                                  • +
                                • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью.
                                -

                                Изменение дополнительныx параметров автофигуры

                                -

                                Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, используйте ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры':

                                -

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры

                                -

                                Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры:

                                +

                                Изменение дополнительныx параметров автофигуры

                                +

                                Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, используйте ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры':

                                +

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры

                                +

                                Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры:

                                  -
                                • Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции
                                  (в этом случае она выглядит так:
                                  ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры.
                                  • +
                                • Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции
                                  (в этом случае она выглядит так:
                                  ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры.
                                  • +
                                +

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Поворот

                                +

                                Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры:

                                +
                                  +
                                • Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа.
                                  • +
                                • Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз).
                                -

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Поворот

                                -

                                Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры:

                                -
                                  -
                                • Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа.
                                  • -
                                • Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз).
                                  • -

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры

                                Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры:

                                  -
                                • Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: -
                                    -
                                  • Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: -
                                      -
                                    • Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими.
                                      • -
                                    • Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными.
                                      • -
                                    • Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными.
                                      • -
                                    -
                                    • -
                                  • Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: +
                                  • + Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры:
                                      -
                                    • Закругленный - угол будет закругленным.
                                      • -
                                    • Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось.
                                      • -
                                    • Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами.
                                      • +
                                    • + Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: +
                                        +
                                      • Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими.
                                        • +
                                      • Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными.
                                        • +
                                      • Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными.
                                        • +
                                      +
                                      • +
                                    • + Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: +
                                        +
                                      • Закругленный - угол будет закругленным.
                                        • +
                                      • Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось.
                                        • +
                                      • Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами.
                                        • +
                                      +

                                      Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины.

                                      +
                                    -

                                    Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины.

                                    -
                                    • -
                                • Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков.
                                -

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры

                                -

                                На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст, Разрешить переполнение фигуры текстом или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры).

                                -

                                Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна.

                                -

                                Свойства фигуры - вкладка Колонки

                                -

                                На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую.

                                -

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Привязка к ячейке

                                -

                                Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры:

                                -
                                  -
                                • Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер фигуры также будет изменяться.
                                  • -
                                • Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера фигуры. Если ячейка перемещается, фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры фигуры останутся неизменными.
                                  • -
                                • Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера фигуры при изменении положения или размера ячейки.
                                  • -
                                -

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Альтернативный текст

                                -

                                Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит автофигура.

                                -
                                +

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры

                                +

                                На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст, Разрешить переполнение фигуры текстом или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры).

                                +

                                Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна.

                                +

                                Свойства фигуры - вкладка Колонки

                                +

                                На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую.

                                +

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Привязка к ячейке

                                +

                                Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры:

                                +
                                  +
                                • Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер фигуры также будет изменяться.
                                  • +
                                • Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера фигуры. Если ячейка перемещается, фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры фигуры останутся неизменными.
                                  • +
                                • Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера фигуры при изменении положения или размера ячейки.
                                  • +
                                +

                                Фигура - дополнительные параметры: Альтернативный текст

                                +

                                Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит автофигура.

                                +

                                Вставка и форматирование текста внутри автофигуры

                                Чтобы вставить текст в автофигуру, выделите фигуру и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней).

                                -

                                Все параметры форматирования, которые можно применить к тексту в автофигуре, перечислены здесь.

                                -
                                -

                                Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий

                                -

                                Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого:

                                -
                                  -
                                1. щелкните по значку
                                  Фигура на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                  2. -
                                2. - выберите в меню группу Линии, -

                                  Фигуры - Линии

                                  -
                                  3. -
                                3. щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма),
                                  4. -
                                4. - наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения
                                  , появившихся на контуре фигуры, -

                                  -
                                  5. -
                                5. - перетащите указатель мыши ко второй фигуре и щелкните по нужной точке соединения на ее контуре. -

                                  -
                                  6. -
                                -

                                При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними.

                                -

                                -

                                Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения.

                                +

                                Все параметры форматирования, которые можно применить к тексту в автофигуре, перечислены здесь.

                                +
                                +

                                Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий

                                +

                                Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого:

                                +
                                  +
                                1. щелкните по значку
                                  Фигура на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов,
                                  2. +
                                2. + выберите в меню группу Линии, +

                                  Фигуры - Линии

                                  +
                                  3. +
                                3. щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма),
                                  4. +
                                4. + наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения
                                  , появившихся на контуре фигуры, +

                                  +
                                  5. +
                                5. + перетащите указатель мыши ко второй фигуре и щелкните по нужной точке соединения на ее контуре. +

                                  +
                                  6. +
                                +

                                При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними.

                                +

                                +

                                Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения.

                                Назначение макроса к фигуре

                                Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любой фигуре. После назначения макроса, фигура отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на фигуру.

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm index 2d1bf4c94c..4ce6d4de7f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@

                                Вставка диаграммы

                                1. Выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих данные, которые необходимо использовать для диаграммы.
                                2. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов.
                                  3. -
                                3. Щелкните по значку
                                  Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов.
                                  4. +
                                4. Щелкните по значку
                                  Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов.
                                5. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы:
                                  @@ -87,6 +87,14 @@

                                  Вставка диаграммы

                                6. Точечная с прямыми отрезками
              +
              + Лепестковая +
                +
              • Лепестковая
                • +
              • Лепестковая с маркерами
                • +
              • Заполненная лепестковая
                • +
              +
              Комбинированные

            Выбранное изображение будет заменено.

            -

            Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину и цвет Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом.

            +

            Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину, цвет и непрозрачность Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом.

            На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображению.

            Вкладка Параметры фигуры

            Изменение дополнительныx параметров изображения

            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm index ca32d3434d..17fb19d3c7 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm @@ -21,9 +21,11 @@

            Вставка объектов SmartArt

          7. перейдите на вкладку Вставка,
          8. нажмите кнопку SmartArt,
          9. наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс,
            10. -
          10. выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню.
            11. +
          11. выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню,
            12. +
          12. вы можете сохранить объект SmartArt как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

          Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели:

          +

          Обратите внимание, что настройки цвета, стиля и типа формы могут быть настроены индивидуально.

          • @@ -31,7 +33,7 @@

            Вставка объектов SmartArt

            • Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. -

              Заливка цветом

              +

              Заливка цветом

            • Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры
              , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: @@ -90,6 +92,7 @@

              Вставка объектов SmartArt

            • Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур.
            • Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет.
            • Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий).
              • +
            • Для изменения непрозрачности контура введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь соответствующим ползунком.
          • Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью.
            • @@ -98,23 +101,23 @@

            Вставка объектов SmartArt

          Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры.

          +

          Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по графическому объекту SmartArt, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования текста:

          +

          Меню SmartArt

          +

          Выравнивание по вертикали - выбрать выравнивание текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Выровнять по верхнему краю, Выровнять по середине, Выровнять по нижнему краю.

          +

          Направление текста - выбрать направление текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Горизонтальное, Повернуть текст вниз, Повернуть текст вверх.

          +

          Гиперссылка - добавить гиперссылку к объекту SmartArt.

          +

          Обратитесь к Дополнительным параметрам абзаца, чтобы получить информацию о дополнительных параметрах форматирования абзаца.

          --> \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index c1fccf31cd..87c683e020 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -34,6 +34,7 @@

          Добавление текстового объекта

      Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним).

      Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку с текстом внутри (у объектов Text Art по умолчанию невидимые границы), а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста.

      +

      Вы можете сохранить текстовое поле в виде изображенияя на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню.

      Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален.

      Форматирование текстового поля

      Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии.

      diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm index c7e737b6a1..22261d6b3e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@

      Создание новой сводной таблицы

      Пустая сводная таблица будет вставлена в выбранном местоположении.

      -

      Откроется вкладка Параметры сводной таблицы на правой боковой панели. Эту вкладку можно скрыть или показать, нажав на значок .

      +

      Откроется вкладка Параметры сводной таблицы на правой боковой панели. Эту вкладку можно скрыть или показать, нажав на значок . Настройки сводной таблицы также доступны в контекстном меню, которое появляется при щелчке правой кнопкой мыши по таблице. Параметры контекстного меню зависят от поля, по которому вы щелкнули.

      Вкладка Параметры сводной таблицы

      Выбор полей для отображения

      @@ -128,6 +128,7 @@

      Упорядочивание полей и изменение их свой
    • Опция Имя источника позволяет посмотреть имя поля, соответствующее заголовку столбца из исходного набора данных.
    • Опция Пользовательское имя позволяет изменить имя выбранного поля, отображаемое в сводной таблице.
    • В списке Операция можно выбрать функцию, используемую для вычисления суммирующего значения всех значений из этого поля. По умолчанию для числовых значений используется функция Сумма, а для текстовых значений - функция Количество. Доступны следующие функции: Сумма, Количество, Среднее, Макс, Мин, Произведение.
      • +
    • Опция Дополнительные вычисления позволяет отображать мгновенные пользовательские вычисления вместо добавления формулы и создания вычисляемого поля. Без вычислений — эта опция выбрана по умолчанию, она отображает фактическое значение в поле. Другие опции вычисления: % от общего итога, % от столбца, % от строки, % от, % от общей суммы по родительской строке, % от общей суммы по родительскому столбцу, % от родительской суммы, Отличие, Разница (%), С нарастающем итогом в поле, % от суммы с нарастающим итогом в поле, Сортировка от минимального к максимальному, Сортировка от максимального к минимальному, Индекс. Используйте Базовое поле и Базовый элемент, если эти параметры доступны для выбранного вами вычисления (% от, % от общей суммы, Отличие, Разница (%), С нарастающем итогом в поле, % от суммы с нарастающим итогом в поле).

    Группировка и разгруппировка данных

    @@ -224,7 +225,7 @@

    Изменение стиля сводных таблиц

    Список шаблонов позволяет выбрать один из готовых стилей сводных таблиц. Каждый шаблон сочетает в себе определенные параметры форматирования, такие как цвет фона, стиль границ, чередование строк или столбцов и т.д. - Набор шаблонов отображается по-разному в зависимости от параметров, выбранных для строк и столбцов. Например, если вы отметили опции Заголовки строк и Чередовать столбцы, отображаемый список шаблонов будет содержать только шаблоны с выделенными заголовками строк и включенным чередованием столбцов. + Набор шаблонов отображается по-разному в зависимости от параметров, выбранных для строк и столбцов. Например, если вы отметили опции Заголовки строк и Чередовать столбцы, видимая часть списка шаблонов будет содержать шаблоны с выделенными заголовками строк и включенным чередованием столбцов, но можно развернуть полный список, нажав на стрелку, чтобы увидеть все доступные шаблоны.

    Фильтрация, сортировка и создание срезов в сводных таблицах

    Вы можете фильтровать сводные таблицы по подписям или значениям и использовать дополнительные параметры сортировки.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4fcf29e73b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + Защита диапазона + + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    + +

    Защита диапазона

    +

    Опция Разрешить редактировать диапазоны позволяет указать диапазоны ячеек, которые не могут редактироваться пользователями без соответствующих прав на редактирование, предоставленных создателем файла или пользователем с полным доступом к нему. +

    Чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек, который пользователю будет разрешено редактировать:

    +
      +
    1. + Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны на вкладке Защита верхней панели инструментов. Откроется окно Защищенные диапазоны. +

      Редактировать диапазоны

      +
      2. +
    2. + Нажмите кнопку Новый в окне Защищенные диапазоны, чтобы выбрать и добавить диапазон ячеек, который пользователь сможет редактировать. + +
      3. +
    3. + В окне Новый диапазон введите Название диапазона и выберите диапазон ячеек при помощи кнопки Выбор данных. Выберите пользователей, Кто может редактировать этот диапазон, и нажмите ОК для подтверждения. +

      Новый диапазон

      +
      4. +
    4. Чтобы изменить или удалить диапазон, выберите его в окне Защищенные диапазоны и нажмите кнопку Изменить или Удалить соответственно.
      5. +
    5. Нажмите кнопку Закрыть.
      6. +
    +

    Чтобы узнать больше о том, как управлять разрешениями редактировать диапазоны, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой статье.

    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm index eebc6244c4..80ea171a37 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm @@ -16,8 +16,8 @@

    Защита листа

    -

    Опция Защитить лист позволяет защитить листы и контролировать изменения, внесенные другими пользователями в лист, чтобы предотвратить нежелательные изменения данных и ограничить возможности редактирования другими пользователями.

    -

    Чтобы защитить лист:

    +

    Опция Защитить лист позволяет защитить листы и контролировать изменения, внесенные другими пользователями в лист, чтобы предотвратить нежелательные изменения данных и ограничить возможности редактирования другими пользователями. Вы можете защитить лист паролем или без него. Если вы не используете пароль, любой может снять защиту с защищенного листа.

    +

    Защита листа

    1. Перейдите на вкладку Защита и нажмите кнопку Защитить лист на верхней панели инструментов. @@ -25,46 +25,74 @@

      Защита листа

      Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по вкладке листа, который вы хотите защитить, и в списке выберите пункт Защитить

      Защитить лист

      2. -
    2. В открывшемся окне Защитить лист введите и подтвердите пароль, если вы хотите установить пароль для снятия защиты с этого листа. -

      Защитить лист

      -

      Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте.

      -
      3. -
    3. Установите флажки в списке Разрешить всем пользователям этого листа напротив тех операций, которые пользователи смогут выполнять. Операции Выбрать заблокированные ячейки и Выбрать разблокированные ячейки разрешены по умолчанию. -
      - Операции, которые может выполнять пользователь. -
        -
      • Выделять заблокированные ячейки
        • -
      • Выделять разблокированные ячейки
        • -
      • Форматировать ячейки
        • -
      • Форматировать столбцы
        • -
      • Форматировать строки
        • -
      • Вставлять столбцы
        • -
      • Вставлять строки
        • -
      • Вставлять гиперссылку
        • -
      • Удалить столбцы
        • -
      • Удалить строки
        • -
      • Сортировать
        • -
      • Использовать автофильтр
        • -
      • Использовать сводную таблицу и сводную диаграмму
        • -
      • Редактировать объекты
        • -
      • Редактировать сценарии
        • -
      -
      -
      4. -
    4. нажмите кнопку Защитить, чтобы включить защиту Кнопка Защитить лист остается выделенной, когда лист защищен. -

      Защитить лист выделен

      -
      5. -
    5. Чтобы снять защиту с листа: -
        -
      • нажмите кнопку Защитить лист, +
      • + В открывшемся окне Защитить лист введите и подтвердите пароль, если вы хотите установить пароль для снятия защиты с этого листа. +

        Защитить лист

        +

        Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте.

        +
        • +
      • + Установите флажки в списке Разрешить всем пользователям этого листа напротив тех операций, которые пользователи смогут выполнять. Операции Выбрать заблокированные ячейки и Выбрать разблокированные ячейки разрешены по умолчанию. +
        + Операции, которые может выполнять пользователь. +
          +
        • Выделять заблокированные ячейки
          • +
        • Выделять разблокированные ячейки
          • +
        • Форматировать ячейки
          • +
        • Форматировать столбцы
          • +
        • Форматировать строки
          • +
        • Вставлять столбцы
          • +
        • Вставлять строки
          • +
        • Вставлять гиперссылку
          • +
        • Удалить столбцы
          • +
        • Удалить строки
          • +
        • Сортировать
          • +
        • Использовать автофильтр
          • +
        • Использовать сводную таблицу и сводную диаграмму
          • +
        • Редактировать объекты
          • +
        • Редактировать сценарии
          • +
        +
        +
        • +
      • + нажмите кнопку Защитить, чтобы включить защиту Кнопка Защитить лист остается выделенной, когда лист защищен. +

        Защитить лист выделен

        +
        • +
    + +

    Разрешение редактировать диапазоны

    +
      +
    1. Нажмите кнопку Защитить лист на вкладке Защита верхней панели инструментов. Откроется окно Защитить лист.
      2. +
    2. Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны, чтобы указать диапазоны, разблокируемые паролем, когда лист защищен. Эта опция работает только для заблокированных ячеек.
      3. +
    3. + Нажмите кнопку Новый, чтобы добавить новый диапазон. Откроется окно Новый диапазон. Укажите Название диапазона, сам диапазон, введите и повторите пароль. Нажмите ОК. +

      Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте.

      +
      4. +
    4. + Когда лист не защищен, вы все равно можете вносить изменения в разрешенные диапазоны: +
        +
      • Если вам нужно отредактировать созданный диапазон, выберите его в окне Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны и нажмите кнопку Редактировать.
        • +
      • Чтобы удалить созданный диапазон, выберите его в окне Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны и нажмите кнопку Удалить..
        • +
      +
      5. +
    5. Нажмите кнопку Защитить.
      6. +
    +

    Для диапазонов, защищенных паролем, когда кто-то пытается отредактировать выбранный диапазон ячеек, появляется окно Разблокировать диапазон, в котором пользователю предлагается ввести пароль.

    +

    Разблокировать диапазон

    +

    Чтобы узнать больше о защите диапазонов, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой статье.

    + +

    Снятие защиты с листа

    +

    Чтобы снять защиту с листа:

    +
      +
    1. + нажмите кнопку Защитить лист,

      или

      щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по вкладке защищенного листа и в списке выберите пункт Снять защиту.

      Снять защиту с листа

      -
      2. -
    2. Введите пароль и нажмите ОК в окне Снять защиту с листа, если будет предложено. +
      3. +
    3. + Введите пароль и нажмите ОК в окне Снять защиту с листа, если будет предложено.

      Снять защиту с листа

      -
      4. - +
    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm index cd80e9a892..cdb0999800 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@

    Защита электронной таблицы

    Шифрование - для управления доступом к файлу и предотвращения его открытия другими пользователями.

    Защита книги - для контроля над действиями пользователей с книгой и предотвращения нежелательных изменений в структуре книги.

    Защита листа - для контроля над действиями пользователей в листе и предотвращения нежелательных изменений данных.

    -

    Разрешение редактировать диапазоны - для указания диапазона ячеек, с которыми пользователь может работать на защищенном листе.

    +

    Защитить диапазон - для защиты диапазонов, ограничивая или запрещая их редактирование. Права редактирования могут быть предоставлены определенным пользователям. Пользователи без прав редактирования смогут только просматривать защищенный диапазон, но они могут редактировать остальную часть электронной таблицы при условии, что у них есть полные права доступа к файлу.

    Использование флажков на вкладке Защита для быстрой блокировки или разблокировки содержимого защищенного листа.

    Примечание: эти опции не вступят в силу, пока вы не включите защиту листа.

    Ячейки, фигуры и текст внутри фигуры заблокированы на листе по умолчанию. Снимите соответствующий флажок, чтобы разблокировать их. Разблокированные объекты по-прежнему можно редактировать, когда лист защищен. Параметры Заблокированная фигура и Заблокировать текст становятся активными при выборе фигуры. Параметр Заблокированная фигура применяется как к фигурам, так и к другим объектам, таким как диаграммы, изображения и текстовые поля. Параметр Заблокировать текст блокирует текст внутри всех графических объектов, кроме диаграмм.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index ac15891af8..2b4b7a0bc4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@

    Сохранение

    1. нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов,
    2. выберите опцию Сохранить как,
      3. -
    3. выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон таблицы XLTX или OTS.
      4. +
    4. выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон таблицы.
    @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@

    Скачивание

  • нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов,
  • выберите опцию Скачать как,
  • - выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. + выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG.

    Примечание: если вы выберете формат CSV, весь функционал (форматирование шрифта, формулы и так далее), кроме обычного текста, не сохранится в файле CSV. Если вы продолжите сохранение, откроется окно Выбрать параметры CSV. По умолчанию в качестве типа Кодировки используется Unicode (UTF-8). Стандартным Разделителем является запятая (,), но доступны также следующие варианты: точка с запятой (;), двоеточие (:), Табуляция, Пробел и Другое (эта опция позволяет задать пользовательский символ разделителя).

    • @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@

    Сохранение копии

    1. нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов,
    2. выберите опцию Сохранить копию как,
      3. -
    3. выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS,
      4. +
    4. выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG,
    5. выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить.
    @@ -62,15 +62,16 @@

    Печать

    В браузере Firefox возможна печатать таблицы без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf.
    -

    Откроется окно Предпросмотра, в котором можно изменить параметры печати, заданные по умолчанию. Нажмите на кнопку Показать детали внизу окна, чтобы отобразить все параметры.

    -

    Параметры печати можно также настроить на странице Дополнительные параметры: нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и перейдите в раздел: Дополнительные параметры >> Параметры страницы.
    На вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов также доступны некоторые из этих настроек: Поля, Ориентация, Размер страницы, Область печати, Вписать.

    +

    Откроется окно Предпросмотра, в котором можно изменить параметры печати, заданные по умолчанию.

    +

    На вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов также доступны некоторые из этих настроек: Поля, Ориентация, Размер страницы, Область печати, Вписать.

    Окно Параметры печати

    Здесь можно задать следующие параметры:

    • - Диапазон печати - укажите, что необходимо напечатать: весь Текущий лист, Все листы электронной таблицы или предварительно выделенный диапазон ячеек (Выделенный фрагмент), + Диапазон печати - укажите, что необходимо напечатать: все Активные листы, Все листы электронной таблицы или предварительно выделенный диапазон ячеек (Выделенный фрагмент),

      Если вы ранее задали постоянную область печати, но хотите напечатать весь лист, поставьте галочку рядом с опцией Игнорировать область печати.

      • +
    • Страницы — укажите диапазон страниц для печати. Вы можете в вести цифры вручную или использовать соответствующие стрелки,
    • Параметры листа - укажите индивидуальные параметры печати для каждого отдельного листа, если в выпадающем списке Диапазон печати выбрана опция Все листы,
    • Размер страницы - выберите из выпадающего списка один из доступных размеров,
    • Ориентация страницы - выберите опцию Книжная, если при печати требуется расположить таблицу на странице вертикально, или используйте опцию Альбомная, чтобы расположить ее горизонтально,
      • @@ -89,9 +90,10 @@

      Печать

    • Параметры верхнего и нижнего колонтитулов - позволяет добавить некоторую дополнительную информацию к печатному листу, такую как дата и время, номер страницы, имя листа и т.д. Верхние и нижние колонтитулы будут отображаться в печатной версии электронной таблицы.
      • +
    • Номер первой страницы – укажите номер первой напечатанной страницы.

    После настройки параметров печати нажмите кнопку Печать, чтобы сохранить изменения и распечатать электронную таблицу, или кнопку Сохранить, чтобы сохранить изменения, внесенные в параметры печати.

    -

    В десктопной версии документ будет напрямую отправлен на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати.

    +

    В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати.

    Настройка области печати

    Если требуется распечатать только выделенный диапазон ячеек вместо всего листа, можно использовать настройку Выделенный фрагмент в выпадающем списке Диапазон печати. Эта настройка не сохраняется при сохранении рабочей книги и подходит для однократного использования.

    Если какой-то диапазон ячеек требуется распечатывать неоднократно, можно задать постоянную область печати на рабочем листе. Область печати будет сохранена при сохранении рабочей книги и может использоваться при последующем открытии электронной таблицы. Можно также задать несколько постоянных областей печати на листе, в этом случае каждая из них будет выводиться на печать на отдельной странице.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm index b0793ab25e..d7acd507ea 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/UsageInstructions/SortData.htm @@ -192,13 +192,23 @@

    Сортировка данных по нескольким столбцам
  • откроется окно Сортировка. По умолчанию включена сортировка по столбцам.

    Окно настраиваемой сортировки

    -

    Чтобы изменить ориентацию сортировки (то есть сортировать данные по строкам, а не по столбцам) нажмите кнопку Параметры наверху. Откроется окно Параметры сортировки:

    -

    Окно Параметры сортировки

    -
      -
    1. установите флажок Мои данные содержат заголовки, если это необходимо,
      2. -
    2. выберите нужную Ориентацию: Сортировать сверху вниз, чтобы сортировать данные по столбцам, или Сортировать слева направо, чтобы сортировать данные по строкам,
      3. -
    3. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно.
      4. -
    +
  • + используйте разделы Уровни для добавления новых уровней и управления добавленными уровнями. +
      +
    • Нажмите кнопку Создать, чтобы добавить новый уровень, выберите второй столбец/строку, которые вы хотите отсортировать, и укажите другие параметры сортировки в поле Затем по, как описано выше. В случае необходимости добавьте другие уровни таким же способом,
      • +
    • Нажмите кнопку Копировать, чтобы скопировать выбранный уровень и продублировать все существующие параметры,
      • +
    • + Нажмите кнопку Параметры, чтобы изменить ориентацию сортировки (то есть сортировать данные по строкам, а не по столбцам). Откроется окно Параметры сортировки: +

      Окно Параметры сортировки

      +
        +
      • установите флажок Мои данные содержат заголовки, если это необходимо,
        • +
      • выберите нужную Ориентацию: Сортировать сверху вниз, чтобы сортировать данные по столбцам, или Сортировать слева направо, чтобы сортировать данные по строкам,
        • +
      • нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно.
        • +
      +
      • +
    • Нажмите нопку Удалить, чтобы удалить выбранный уровень, +
    • Используйте кнопки со стрелками Переместить уровень вверх / Переместить уровень вниз, чтобы изменить порядок уровней.
      • +
  • задайте первый уровень сортировки в поле Сортировать по: @@ -216,8 +226,6 @@

    Сортировка данных по нескольким столбцам

    • -
  • добавьте следующий уровень сортировки, нажав кнопку Добавить уровень, выберите второй столбец / строку, который требуется отсортировать, и укажите другие параметры сортировки в поле Затем по, как описано выше. В случае необходимости добавьте другие уровни таким же способом.
    • -
  • управляйте добавленными уровнями, используя кнопки в верхней части окна: Удалить уровень, Копировать уровень или измените порядок уровней, используя кнопки со стрелками Переместить уровень вверх / Переместить уровень вниз,
  • нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно.

    • Данные будут отсортированы в соответствии с заданными уровнями сортировки.

    diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css index 05d886262c..1924ad8d32 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/allowedit_newrange.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/allowedit_newrange.png index ff67a5a5ed..9d7df73bbb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/allowedit_newrange.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/allowedit_newrange.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array1.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array1.png index ca1ca91ea2..ef9555b47a 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array1.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array1.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array2.png index ef9555b47a..ca1ca91ea2 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/array2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png index e17713b992..56594ded87 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/assignmacro_rightclickshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletsandnumbering.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletsandnumbering.png index 7d49d03352..ac0815c247 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletsandnumbering.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/bulletsandnumbering.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/cellsettingstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/cellsettingstab.png index 04b8f41062..8a7711da84 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/cellsettingstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/cellsettingstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow.png index 49693d4dad..6d214200f9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow2.png index 419106d161..c119c7420c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/customsortwindow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/editranges.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/editranges.png index 8b99bc1fc0..6604fb2286 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/editranges.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/editranges.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 292028fc9c..ea55de56ea 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/datatab.png index 809f2f9b34..48f145b667 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 2e45025c7a..73aad748b9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png index 8849a429a5..d4b723fa52 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9be9872015 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index 9f2bb032fc..a690cbc065 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index dfb4a4c93d..70f72849f1 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png index 9743648200..9b95ae26e9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index dfc3811099..d15501d319 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index e2df84417a..5545a548b3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index 13df8aeee4..7eb6be7250 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png index 4f4ae92638..f8f20279e4 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index ea514d2375..217490bc9b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index f202e0a5a8..f7b745115f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index aa7fefbc17..d0d35d06c6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b19f6e8aad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 2eaf26a3f8..5c090b39d8 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png index 84e60c5ff8..894e28c096 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formulatab.png index fd320e3b6b..d5fec5bfe2 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png index 7cfb6210e3..6ea4c807a5 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png index 6f490ab9f6..862b837d5a 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png index ed009a7760..92e00bec5f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pivottabletab.png index fbe0dac270..67b294f9cd 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 785ad73069..d9fb853635 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png index fc428a1a65..dd63b0eb07 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png index 8310886a83..3de85b3c4e 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png index 6974a19624..2fbfb0be2b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_top.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_top.png index 39cfc335f2..1590e5a1aa 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_top.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_top.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png index 5b056c7d4e..ae8467282d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivot_values_field_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivottoptoolbar.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivottoptoolbar.png index 6047ff0f2c..48c23622cb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivottoptoolbar.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/pivottoptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png index d7a5322c5a..bf84011947 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protect_sheet.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protect_sheet.png index 7908f6ac11..d081fa57f6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protect_sheet.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protect_sheet.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png index 1ab3b7111f..be39a9cf43 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/protectsheet_highlighted.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png index 7cc4c9d306..4102099e11 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png index 9869df68cd..6ef94e01a3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png index 07b984af5e..d9bab75501 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/images/smartart_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js index 5e6fb0e6c5..98ed6cc845 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/ru/search/indexes.js @@ -65,6 +65,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Функция АРАБСКОЕ", "body": "Функция АРАБСКОЕ - это одна из математических и тригонометрических функций. Преобразует римское число в арабское. Синтаксис функции АРАБСКОЕ: АРАБСКОЕ(x) где x - это текстовое представление римского числа: строка, заключенная в кавычки, или ссылка на ячейку, содержащую текст. Примечание: если в качестве аргумента используется пустая строка (\"\"), функция возвращает значение 0. Чтобы применить функцию АРАБСКОЕ, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Математические, щелкните по функции АРАБСКОЕ, введите требуемый аргумент, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." }, + { + "id": "Functions/arraytotext.htm", + "title": "Функция МАССИВВТЕКСТ", + "body": "Функция МАССИВВТЕКСТ - это одна из функций для работы с текстом и данными.Она возвращает диапазон данных в виде текстовой строки. Синтаксис функции МАССИВВТЕКСТ: =МАССИВВТЕКСТ(массив, [формат]) где массив - это диапазон данных, возвращаемых в виде текста, [формат] - это формат возвращаемых данных. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: 0 - (установлено по умолчанию) значения в текстовой строке будут разделены запятой, 1 - заключить каждое текстовое значение в двойные кавычки (кроме чисел, значений истина/ложь и ошибок), использовать точку с запятой в качестве разделителя и заключить всю текстовую строку в фигурные скобки. Чтобы применить функцию МАССИВВТЕКСТ, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Текст и данные, щелкните по функции МАССИВВТЕКСТ, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." + }, { "id": "Functions/asc.htm", "title": "Функция ASC", @@ -715,6 +720,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Функция EXP", "body": "Функция EXP - это одна из математических и тригонометрических функций. Она возвращает значение константы e, возведенной в заданную степень. Константа e равна 2,71828182845904. Синтаксис функции EXP: EXP(x) где x - это степень, в которую требуется возвести e; числовое значение, введенное вручную или находящееся в ячейке, на которую дается ссылка. Чтобы применить функцию EXP, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Математические, щелкните по функции EXP, введите требуемый аргумент, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." }, + { + "id": "Functions/expand.htm", + "title": "Функция РАЗВЕРНУТЬ", + "body": "Функция РАЗВЕРНУТЬ - это одна из поисковых функций. Она возвращает расширенный, путем добавления строк и столбцов, диапазон данных (массива). Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива. Синтаксис функции РАЗВЕРНУТЬ: =РАЗВЕРНУТЬ(массив, строки, [столбцы], [заполняющее_значение]) где массив - это массив, который нужно расширить, строки - это количество строк в возвращаемом массиве. Это необязательный аргумент. Если он не указан, строки не будут добавлены, и необходимо указать количество столбцов. [столбцы] - это количество строк в возвращаемом массиве. Это необязательный аргумент. Если он не указан, столбцы не будут добавлены, и необходимо указать количество строк. [заполняющее_значение] - это значение для заполнения добавленных ячеек. Значение по умолчанию — #Н/Д. Чтобы применить функцию РАЗВЕРНУТЬ, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки, щелкните по функции РАЗВЕРНУТЬ, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." + }, { "id": "Functions/expon-dist.htm", "title": "Функция ЭКСП.РАСП", @@ -770,6 +780,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Функция FРАСП", "body": "Функция FРАСП - это одна из статистических функций. Возвращает правый хвост F-распределения вероятности для двух наборов данных. Эта функция позволяет определить, имеют ли два множества данных различные степени разброса результатов. Синтаксис функции FРАСП: FРАСП(x;степени_свободы1;степени_свободы2) где x - значение, для которого вычисляется функция. Числовое значение больше 0. степени_свободы1 - числитель степеней свободы; числовое значение больше 1 и меньше 10^10. степени_свободы2 - знаменатель степеней свободы; числовое значение больше 1 и меньше 10^10. Эти аргументы можно ввести вручную или использовать в качестве аргументов ссылки на ячейки. Чтобы применить функцию FРАСП, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Статистические, щелкните по функции FРАСП, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." }, + { + "id": "Functions/filter.htm", + "title": "Функция ФИЛЬТР", + "body": "Функция ФИЛЬТР - это одна из поисковых функций. возвращает отфильтрованный диапазон данных, соответствующий указанным вами критериям. Функция ФИЛЬТР извлекает только необходимые данные, и результаты обновляются при изменении исходных данных. Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива. Синтаксис функции ФИЛЬТР: =ФИЛЬТР(массив,включить,[если_пусто]) где массив - диапазон ячеек для фильтрации, включить - критерий фильтрации, представленный в виде логического массива (ИСТИНА/ЛОЖЬ) той же высоты (столбцы) и ширины (строки), что и массив, [если_пусто] - значение, которое будет возвращено, если фильтр не возвращает результатов. Это необязательный аргумент. Чтобы применить функцию ФИЛЬТР, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки, щелкните по функции ФИЛЬТР, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." + }, { "id": "Functions/find.htm", "title": "Функция НАЙТИ/НАЙТИБ", @@ -1870,6 +1885,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Функция СЕКУНДЫ", "body": "Функция СЕКУНДЫ - это одна из функций даты и времени. Возвращает количество секунд (число от 0 до 59), соответствующее заданному значению времени. Синтаксис функции СЕКУНДЫ: СЕКУНДЫ(время_в_числовом_формате) где время_в_числовом_формате - это значение, введенное вручную или находящееся в ячейке, на которую дается ссылка. Примечание: аргумент время_в_числовом_формате может быть выражен строковым значением (например, \"13:39:15\"), десятичным числом (например, 0.56 соответствует 13:26:24) или результатом какой-либо формулы (например, результатом функции ТДАТА в стандартном формате - 26.09.2012 13:39) Чтобы применить функцию СЕКУНДЫ: выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Дата и время, щелкните по функции СЕКУНДЫ, введите требуемый аргумент, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." }, + { + "id": "Functions/sequence.htm", + "title": "Функция ПОСЛЕД", + "body": "Функция ПОСЛЕД - это одна из математических и тригонометрических функций. Она возвращает сгенерированный массив последовательных чисел. Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива. Синтаксис функции ПОСЛЕД: ПОСЛЕД(строки,[столбцы],[начало],[шаг]) где строки - это количество возвращаемых строк. столбцы - это количества возвращаемых столбцов. начало - это первое число в последовательности. шаг - это значение приращения для каждого последующего значения в диапазоне ячеек. Чтобы применить функцию ПОСЛЕД, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Математические, щелкните по функции ПОСЛЕД, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." + }, { "id": "Functions/seriessum.htm", "title": "Функция РЯД.СУММ", @@ -1925,6 +1945,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Функция НАИМЕНЬШИЙ", "body": "Функция НАИМЕНЬШИЙ - это одна из статистических функций. Анализирует диапазон данных и находит k-ое наименьшее значение. Синтаксис функции НАИМЕНЬШИЙ: НАИМЕНЬШИЙ(массив;k) где массив - выбранный диапазон ячеек. k - позиция числа, начиная с наименьшего числа; числовое значение, введенное вручную или находящееся в ячейке, на которую дается ссылка. Чтобы применить функцию НАИМЕНЬШИЙ, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Статистические, щелкните по функции НАИМЕНЬШИЙ, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." }, + { + "id": "Functions/sort.htm", + "title": "Функция СОРТ", + "body": "The СОРТ - это одна из поисковых функций. Она возвращает отсортированное содержимое диапазона данных или массива. Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива. Синтаксис функции СОРТ: =СОРТ(массив,[индекс_сортировки],[порядок_сортировки],[по_столбцу]) где массив - диапазон ячеек для фильтрации. [индекс_сортировки] - число, определяющее столбец или строку для сортировки. Это необязательный аргумент. [порядок_сортировки] - число, определяющее порядок сортировки. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: 1 или не указано - (установлено по умолчанию) порядок по возрастанию, -1 - порядок по убыванию, [по_столбцу] - это логическое значение. Это необязательный аргумент. Он указывает направление сортировки. Он может принимать одно из логических числовых значений: ИСТИНА или не указано - сортировка по строкам, когда ваши данные расположены вертикально. ЛОЖЬ - сортировка по столбцам, когда ваши данные расположены горизонтально. Чтобы применить функцию СОРТ, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки, щелкните по функции СОРТ, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." + }, { "id": "Functions/sqrt.htm", "title": "Функция КОРЕНЬ", @@ -2320,6 +2345,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Функция ПРОСМОТРX", "body": "Функция ПРОСМОТРX - это одна из поисковых функций. Она используется для поиска определенного элемента по строке как по горизонтали, так и по вертикали. Возвращает элемент, соответствующий первому совпадению. Синтаксис функции ПРОСМОТРX: ПРОСМОТРX (искомое_значение, просматриваемый_массив, возращаемый_массив, [если_ничего_не_найдено], [режим_сопоставления], [режим_поиска]) где искомое_значение- - это искомое значение. просматриваемый_массив - это массив или диапазон для поиска. возращаемый_массив - это массив или диапазон, в который возвращаются результаты. если_ничего_не_найдено  - это необязательный аргумент. Если результата поиска нет, аргумент возвращает текст, указанный в [если_ничего_не_найдено]. Если текст не указан, возвращается «Н/Д». режим_сопоставления - это необязательный аргумент. Доступны следующие значения: 0 (установлен по умолчанию) возвращает точное совпадение; если совпадений нет, вместо них возвращается «Н/Д». -1 возвращает точное совпадение; если его нет, возвращается следующий меньший элемент. 1 возвращает точное совпадение; если его нет, возвращается следующий больший элемент. 2 где постановочные знаки имеют специальное значение. режим_поиска - необязательный аргумент. Доступны следующие значения: 1 запускает поиск по первому элементу (установлен по умолчанию). -1 запускает обратный поиск, т.е. по последнему элементу. 2 запускает двоичный поиск с просматриваемый_массив , отсортированным в порядке возрастания. Если не отсортировано, будут возвращены недопустимые результаты. -2 запускает двоичный поиск с просматриваемый_массив , отсортированным в порядке убывания. Если не отсортировано, будут возвращены недопустимые результаты. Подстановочные знаки включают вопросительный знак (?), Который соответствует одному символу, и звездочку (*), которая соответствует нескольким символам. Если вы хотите найти вопросительный знак или звездочку, введите тильду (~) перед символом. Чтобы применить функцию ПРОСМОТРX, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки, щелкните по функции ПРОСМОТРX, введите требуемые аргументы в окно Аргументы функции, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." }, + { + "id": "Functions/xmatch.htm", + "title": "Функция ПОИСКПОЗX", + "body": "Функция ПОИСКПОЗX - это одна из поисковых функций. Она возвращает относительное положение заданного элемента в диапазоне ячеек. По умолчанию требуется точное совпадение. Обратите внимание, что это формула массива. Чтобы узнать больше, обратитесь к статье Вставка формул массива. Синтакс функции ПОИСКПОЗХ: =ПОИСКПОЗХ(искомое_значение, просматриваемый_массив, [режим_сопоставления], [режим_поиска]) где искомое_значение - это искомое значение. просматриваемый_массив - это массив или диапазон для поиска. [режим_сопоставления] - это тип сопоставления. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: 0 - (установлено по умолчанию) возвращает точное совпадение; если точное совпадение не найдено, функция возвращает ошибку #Н/Д. -1 - возвращает точное совпадение; если точное значение не найдено, функция возвращает наименьшее значение, превышающее искомое_значение. 1 - возвращает точное совпадение; если точное значение не найдено, функция возвращает наибольшее значение, превышающее искомое_значение. 2 - совпадение с использованием подстановочных знаков. [режим_поиска] - это тип поиска. Это необязательный аргумент. Он может принимать одно из следующих числовых значений: 1 - (установлено по умолчанию) начинает поиск с первого элемента. -1 - начинает обратный поиск, т.е. с последнего элемента. 2 - выполняет двоичный поиск в искомом_значении, отсортированным по возрастанию. Если сортировка не выполнена, будут возвращены недопустимые результаты. -2 выполняет двоичный поиск в искомом_значении, отсортированным по убыванию. Если сортировка не выполнена, будут возвращены недопустимые результаты. Аргумент режим_сопоставления может содержать подстановочные знаки — вопросительный знак (?), соответствующий одному символу, и звездочку (*), соответствующую любому количеству символов. Если требуется найти вопросительный знак или звездочку, введите перед этим символом тильду (~). Чтобы применить функцию ПОИСКПОЗX, выделите ячейку, в которой требуется отобразить результат, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , расположенному на верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в меню команду Вставить функцию, или щелкните по значку перед строкой формул, выберите из списка группу функций Поиск и ссылки, щелкните по функции ПОИСКПОЗX, введите требуемые аргументы через точку с запятой или выделите мышью диапазон ячеек, нажмите клавишу Enter. Результат будет отображен в выбранной ячейке." + }, { "id": "Functions/xnpv.htm", "title": "Функция ЧИСТНЗ", @@ -2373,7 +2403,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Дополнительные параметры редактора электронных таблиц", - "body": "Вы можете изменить дополнительные параметры редактора электронных таблиц. Для перехода к ним откройте вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Дополнительные параметры. Дополнительные параметры сгруппированы следующим образом: Редактирование и сохранение Автосохранение - используется в онлайн-версии для включения/отключения опции автоматического сохранения изменений, внесенных при редактировании. Автовосстановление - используется в десктопной версии для включения/отключения опции автоматического восстановления электронной таблицы в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Показывать кнопку Параметры вставки при вставке содержимого. Соответствующая кнопка будет появляться при вставке содержимого в электронную таблицу. Совместная работа Подраздел Режим совместного редактирования позволяет задать предпочтительный режим просмотра изменений, вносимых в электронную таблицу при совместной работе. Быстрый (по умолчанию). Пользователи, участвующие в совместном редактировании электронной таблицы, будут видеть изменения в реальном времени, как только они внесены другими пользователями. Строгий. Все изменения, внесенные участниками совместной работы, будут отображаться только после того, как вы нажмете на кнопку Сохранить с оповещением о наличии новых изменений. Показывать изменения других пользователей. Эта функция позволяет видеть изменения, которые вносят другие пользователи, в электонной таблице, открытой только на просмотр, в Режиме просмотра в реальном времени. Показывать комментарии в тексте. Если отключить эту функцию, ячейки, к которым добавлены комментарии, будут помечаться на листе, только когда Вы нажмете на значок Комментарии на левой боковой панели. Показывать решенные комментарии. Эта функция отключена по умолчанию, чтобы решенные комментарии были скрыты на листе. Просмотреть такие комментарии можно только при нажатии на значок Комментарии на левой боковой панели. Включите эту опцию, если требуется отображать решенные комментарии на листе. Рабочая область Опция Стиль ссылок R1C1 используется для включения/отключения стиля ссылок R1C1. По умолчанию эта опция отключена, и используется стиль ссылок A1. Когда используется стиль ссылок A1, столбцы обозначаются буквами, а строки - цифрами. Если выделить ячейку, расположенную в строке 3 и столбце 2, ее адрес, отображаемый в поле слева от строки формул, выглядит следующим образом: B3. Если включен стиль ссылок R1C1, и строки, и столбцы обозначаются числами. Если выделить ячейку на пересечении строки 3 и столбца 2, ее адрес будет выглядеть так: R3C2. Буква R указывает на номер строки, а буква C - на номер столбца. Если ссылаться на другие ячейки, используя стиль ссылок R1C1, ссылка на целевую ячейку формируется на базе расстояния от активной ячейки. Например, если выделить ячейку, расположенную в строке 5 и столбце 1, и ссылаться на ячейку в строке 3 и столбце 2, ссылка будет такой: R[-2]C[1]. Числа в квадратных скобках обозначают позицию ячейки, на которую дается ссылка, относительно позиции текущей ячейки, то есть, целевая ячейка находится на 2 строки выше и на 1 столбец правее от активной ячейки. Если выделить ячейку, расположенную в строке 1 и столбце 2, и ссылаться на ту же самую ячейку в строке 3 и столбце 2, ссылка будет такой: R[2]C, то есть целевая ячейка находится на 2 строки ниже активной ячейки и в том же самом столбце. Опция Использовать клавишу Alt для навигации по интерфейсу с помощью клавиатуры используется для включения использования клавиши Alt / Option в сочетаниях клавиш. Опция Тема интерфейса используется для изменения цветовой схемы интерфейса редактора. Опция Системная позволяет редактору соответствовать системной теме интерфейса. Светлая цветовая гамма включает стандартные синий, белый и светло-серый цвета с меньшим контрастом элементов интерфейса, подходящие для работы в дневное время. Классическая светлая цветовая гамма включает стандартные синий, белый и светло-серый цвета. Темная цветовая гамма включает черный, темно-серый и светло-серый цвета, подходящие для работы в ночное время. Контрастная темная цветовая гамма включает черный, темно-серый и белый цвета с большим контрастом элементов интерфейса, выделяющих рабочую область файла. Опция Включить темный режим используется, чтобы сделать рабочую область темнее, если для редактора выбрана Темная или Контрастная темная тема интерфейса. Поставьте галочку Включить темный режим, чтобы активировать эту опцию. Примечание: Помимо доступных тем интерфейса Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная и Контрастная темная, в редакторах ONLYOFFICE теперь можно использовать собственную цветовую тему. Чтобы узнать, как это сделать, пожалуйста, следуйте данному руководству. Опция Единица измерения используется для определения единиц, которые должны использоваться для измерения параметров элементов, таких как ширина, высота, интервалы, поля и т.д. Можно выбрать опцию Сантиметр, Пункт или Дюйм. Опция Стандартное значение масштаба используется для установки стандартного значения масштаба путем его выбора из списка доступных вариантов от 50% до 500%. Опция Хинтинг шрифтов используется для выбора типа отображения шрифта в онлайн-редакторе электронных таблиц: Выберите опцию Как Windows, если Вам нравится отображение шрифтов в операционной системе Windows, то есть с использованием хинтинга шрифтов Windows. Выберите опцию Как OS X, если Вам нравится отображение шрифтов в операционной системе Mac, то есть вообще без хинтинга шрифтов. Выберите опцию Собственный, если хотите, чтобы текст отображался с хинтингом, встроенным в файлы шрифтов. Режим кэширования по умолчанию - используется для выбора режима кэширования символов шрифта. Не рекомендуется переключать без особых причин. Это может быть полезно только в некоторых случаях, например, при возникновении проблемы в браузере Google Chrome с включенным аппаратным ускорением. В редакторе электронных таблиц есть два режима кэширования: В первом режиме кэширования каждая буква кэшируется как отдельная картинка. Во втором режиме кэширования выделяется картинка определенного размера, в которой динамически располагаются буквы, а также реализован механизм выделения и удаления памяти в этой картинке. Если памяти недостаточно, создается другая картинка, и так далее. Настройка Режим кэширования по умолчанию применяет два вышеуказанных режима кэширования по отдельности для разных браузеров: Когда настройка Режим кэширования по умолчанию включена, в Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) используется второй режим кэширования, в других браузерах используется первый режим кэширования. Когда настройка Режим кэширования по умолчанию выключена, в Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) используется первый режим кэширования, в других браузерах используется второй режим кэширования. Опция Настройки макросов используется для настройки отображения макросов с уведомлением. Выберите опцию Отключить все, чтобы отключить все макросы в электронной таблице; Выберите опцию Показывать уведомление, чтобы получать уведомления о макросах в электронной таблице; Выберите опцию Включить все, чтобы автоматически запускать все макросы в электронной таблице. Региональные параметры Опция Язык формул используется для выбора языка отображения и ввода имен формул, аргументов и их описания. Язык формул поддерживается на 32 языках: белорусский, болгарский, каталонский, китайский, чешский, датский, голландский, английский, финский, французский, немецкий, греческий, венгерский, индонезийский, итальянский, японский, корейский, лаосский, латышский, норвежский, польский, португальский (Бразилия), португальский (Португалия), румынский, русский, словацкий, словенский, испанский, шведский, турецкий, украинский, вьетнамский. Опция Регион используется для выбора формата отображения денежных единиц и даты и времени по умолчанию. Опция Использовать разделители на базе региональных настроек выбрана по умолчанию, разделители соответствуют заданному региону. Если вы хотите использовать особые разделители, снимите этот флажок и введите нужные символы в расположенных ниже полях Десятичный разделитель и Разделитель разрядов тысяч. Правописание Опция Язык словаря используется для выбора предпочтительного словаря для проверки орфографии. Пропускать слова из ПРОПИСНЫХ БУКВ. Слова, написанные прописными буквами, игнорируются при проверке орфографии. Пропускать слова с цифрами. Слова, в которых есть цифры, игнорируются при проверке орфографии. Меню Параметры автозамены... позволяет открыть параметры автозамены, такие как замена текста при вводе, распознанные функции, автоформат при вводе и другие. Вычисление Опция Использовать систему дат 1904 опция служит для вычисления дат с использованием 1 января 1904 года в качестве отправной точки. Это может пригодиться при работе с электронными таблицами, созданными в MS Excel 2008 для Mac и более ранних версиях MS Excel для Mac. Чтобы сохранить внесенные изменения, нажмите кнопку Применить." + "body": "Вы можете изменить дополнительные параметры редактора электронных таблиц. Для перехода к ним откройте вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Дополнительные параметры. Дополнительные параметры сгруппированы следующим образом: Редактирование и сохранение Автосохранение - используется в онлайн-версии для включения/отключения опции автоматического сохранения изменений, внесенных при редактировании. Автовосстановление - используется в десктопной версии для включения/отключения опции автоматического восстановления электронной таблицы в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Показывать кнопку Параметры вставки при вставке содержимого. Соответствующая кнопка будет появляться при вставке содержимого в электронную таблицу. Совместная работа Подраздел Режим совместного редактирования позволяет задать предпочтительный режим просмотра изменений, вносимых в электронную таблицу при совместной работе. Быстрый (по умолчанию). Пользователи, участвующие в совместном редактировании электронной таблицы, будут видеть изменения в реальном времени, как только они внесены другими пользователями. Строгий. Все изменения, внесенные участниками совместной работы, будут отображаться только после того, как вы нажмете на кнопку Сохранить с оповещением о наличии новых изменений. Показывать изменения других пользователей. Эта функция позволяет видеть изменения, которые вносят другие пользователи, в электонной таблице, открытой только на просмотр, в Режиме просмотра в реальном времени. Показывать комментарии в тексте. Если отключить эту функцию, ячейки, к которым добавлены комментарии, будут помечаться на листе, только когда Вы нажмете на значок Комментарии на левой боковой панели. Показывать решенные комментарии. Эта функция отключена по умолчанию, чтобы решенные комментарии были скрыты на листе. Просмотреть такие комментарии можно только при нажатии на значок Комментарии на левой боковой панели. Включите эту опцию, если требуется отображать решенные комментарии на листе. Рабочая область Опция Стиль ссылок R1C1 используется для включения/отключения стиля ссылок R1C1. По умолчанию эта опция отключена, и используется стиль ссылок A1. Когда используется стиль ссылок A1, столбцы обозначаются буквами, а строки - цифрами. Если выделить ячейку, расположенную в строке 3 и столбце 2, ее адрес, отображаемый в поле слева от строки формул, выглядит следующим образом: B3. Если включен стиль ссылок R1C1, и строки, и столбцы обозначаются числами. Если выделить ячейку на пересечении строки 3 и столбца 2, ее адрес будет выглядеть так: R3C2. Буква R указывает на номер строки, а буква C - на номер столбца. Если ссылаться на другие ячейки, используя стиль ссылок R1C1, ссылка на целевую ячейку формируется на базе расстояния от активной ячейки. Например, если выделить ячейку, расположенную в строке 5 и столбце 1, и ссылаться на ячейку в строке 3 и столбце 2, ссылка будет такой: R[-2]C[1]. Числа в квадратных скобках обозначают позицию ячейки, на которую дается ссылка, относительно позиции текущей ячейки, то есть, целевая ячейка находится на 2 строки выше и на 1 столбец правее от активной ячейки. Если выделить ячейку, расположенную в строке 1 и столбце 2, и ссылаться на ту же самую ячейку в строке 3 и столбце 2, ссылка будет такой: R[2]C, то есть целевая ячейка находится на 2 строки ниже активной ячейки и в том же самом столбце. Опция Использовать клавишу Alt для навигации по интерфейсу с помощью клавиатуры используется для включения использования клавиши Alt / Option в сочетаниях клавиш. Опция Тема интерфейса используется для изменения цветовой схемы интерфейса редактора. Опция Системная позволяет редактору соответствовать системной теме интерфейса. Светлая цветовая гамма включает стандартные синий, белый и светло-серый цвета с меньшим контрастом элементов интерфейса, подходящие для работы в дневное время. Классическая светлая цветовая гамма включает стандартные синий, белый и светло-серый цвета. Темная цветовая гамма включает черный, темно-серый и светло-серый цвета, подходящие для работы в ночное время. Контрастная темная цветовая гамма включает черный, темно-серый и белый цвета с большим контрастом элементов интерфейса, выделяющих рабочую область файла. Опция Включить темный режим используется, чтобы сделать рабочую область темнее, если для редактора выбрана Темная или Контрастная темная тема интерфейса. Поставьте галочку Включить темный режим, чтобы активировать эту опцию. Примечание: Помимо доступных тем интерфейса Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная и Контрастная темная, в редакторах ONLYOFFICE теперь можно использовать собственную цветовую тему. Чтобы узнать, как это сделать, пожалуйста, следуйте данному руководству. Опция Единица измерения используется для определения единиц, которые должны использоваться для измерения параметров элементов, таких как ширина, высота, интервалы, поля и т.д. Можно выбрать опцию Сантиметр, Пункт или Дюйм. Опция Стандартное значение масштаба используется для установки стандартного значения масштаба путем его выбора из списка доступных вариантов от 50% до 500%. Опция Хинтинг шрифтов используется для выбора типа отображения шрифта в онлайн-редакторе электронных таблиц: Выберите опцию Как Windows, если Вам нравится отображение шрифтов в операционной системе Windows, то есть с использованием хинтинга шрифтов Windows. Выберите опцию Как OS X, если Вам нравится отображение шрифтов в операционной системе Mac, то есть вообще без хинтинга шрифтов. Выберите опцию Собственный, если хотите, чтобы текст отображался с хинтингом, встроенным в файлы шрифтов. Режим кэширования по умолчанию - используется для выбора режима кэширования символов шрифта. Не рекомендуется переключать без особых причин. Это может быть полезно только в некоторых случаях, например, при возникновении проблемы в браузере Google Chrome с включенным аппаратным ускорением. В редакторе электронных таблиц есть два режима кэширования: В первом режиме кэширования каждая буква кэшируется как отдельная картинка. Во втором режиме кэширования выделяется картинка определенного размера, в которой динамически располагаются буквы, а также реализован механизм выделения и удаления памяти в этой картинке. Если памяти недостаточно, создается другая картинка, и так далее. Настройка Режим кэширования по умолчанию применяет два вышеуказанных режима кэширования по отдельности для разных браузеров: Когда настройка Режим кэширования по умолчанию включена, в Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) используется второй режим кэширования, в других браузерах используется первый режим кэширования. Когда настройка Режим кэширования по умолчанию выключена, в Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) используется первый режим кэширования, в других браузерах используется второй режим кэширования. Опция Настройки макросов используется для настройки отображения макросов с уведомлением. Выберите опцию Отключить все, чтобы отключить все макросы в электронной таблице; Выберите опцию Показывать уведомление, чтобы получать уведомления о макросах в электронной таблице; Выберите опцию Включить все, чтобы автоматически запускать все макросы в электронной таблице. Региональные параметры Опция Язык формул используется для выбора языка отображения и ввода имен формул, аргументов и их описания. Язык формул поддерживается на 33 языках: армянский,белорусский, болгарский, каталонский, китайский, чешский, датский, голландский, английский, финский, французский, немецкий, греческий, венгерский, индонезийский, итальянский, японский, корейский, лаосский, латышский, норвежский, польский, португальский (Бразилия), португальский (Португалия), румынский, русский, словацкий, словенский, испанский, шведский, турецкий, украинский, вьетнамский. Опция Регион используется для выбора формата отображения денежных единиц и даты и времени по умолчанию. Опция Использовать разделители на базе региональных настроек выбрана по умолчанию, разделители соответствуют заданному региону. Если вы хотите использовать особые разделители, снимите этот флажок и введите нужные символы в расположенных ниже полях Десятичный разделитель и Разделитель разрядов тысяч. Правописание Опция Язык словаря используется для выбора предпочтительного словаря для проверки орфографии. Пропускать слова из ПРОПИСНЫХ БУКВ. Слова, написанные прописными буквами, игнорируются при проверке орфографии. Пропускать слова с цифрами. Слова, в которых есть цифры, игнорируются при проверке орфографии. Меню Параметры автозамены... позволяет открыть параметры автозамены, такие как замена текста при вводе, распознанные функции, автоформат при вводе и другие. Вычисление Опция Использовать систему дат 1904 опция служит для вычисления дат с использованием 1 января 1904 года в качестве отправной точки. Это может пригодиться при работе с электронными таблицами, созданными в MS Excel 2008 для Mac и более ранних версиях MS Excel для Mac. Чтобы сохранить внесенные изменения, нажмите кнопку Применить." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -2398,22 +2428,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Сочетания клавиш", - "body": "Подсказки для клавиш Используйте сочетания клавиш для более быстрого и удобного доступа к функциям Редактора электронных таблиц без использования мыши. Нажмите клавишу Alt, чтобы показать все подсказки для клавиш верхней панели инструментов, правой и левой боковой панели, а также строке состояния. Нажмите клавишу, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. В зависимости от нажатой клавиши, могут появляться дополнительные подсказки. Когда появляются дополнительные подсказки для клавиш, первичные - скрываются. Например, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка, нажмите Alt и просмотрите все подсказки по первичным клавишам. Нажмите букву И, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка и просмотреть все доступные сочетания клавиш для этой вкладки. Затем нажмите букву, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. Нажмите Alt, чтобы скрыть все подсказки для клавиш, или Escape, чтобы вернуться к предыдущей группе подсказок для клавиш. Windows/Linux Mac OS Работа с электронной таблицей Открыть панель 'Файл' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Открыть панель Файл, чтобы сохранить, скачать, распечатать текущую электронную таблицу, просмотреть сведения о ней, создать новую таблицу или открыть существующую, получить доступ к Справке по онлайн-редактору электронных таблиц или дополнительным параметрам. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена, чтобы начать поиск ячейки, содержащей требуемые символы. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' с полем замены Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена с полем замены, чтобы заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов. Открыть панель 'Комментарии' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Открыть панель Комментарии, чтобы добавить свой комментарий или ответить на комментарии других пользователей. Открыть поле комментария Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Открыть поле ввода данных, в котором можно добавить текст комментария. Открыть панель 'Чат' Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Открыть панель Чат и отправить сообщение. Сохранить электронную таблицу Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Сохранить все изменения в редактируемой электронной таблице. Активный файл будет сохранен с текущим именем, в том же местоположении и формате. Печать электронной таблицы Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Распечатать электронную таблицу на одном из доступных принтеров или сохранить в файл. Скачать как... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Открыть панель Скачать как..., чтобы сохранить редактируемую электронную таблицу на жестком диске компьютера в одном из поддерживаемых форматов: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Полноэкранный режим F11 Переключиться в полноэкранный режим, чтобы развернуть онлайн-редактор электронных таблиц на весь экран. Меню Справка F1 F1 Открыть меню Справка онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц. Открыть существующий файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+O На вкладке Открыть локальный файл в десктопных редакторах позволяет открыть стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора существующего файла. Закрыть файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Закрыть выбранную рабочую книгу в десктопных редакторах. Контекстное меню элемента ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Открыть контекстное меню выбранного элемента. Сбросить масштаб Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 или ⌘ Cmd+0 Сбросить масштаб текущей электронной таблицы до значения по умолчанию 100%. Навигация Перейти на одну ячейку вверх, вниз, влево или вправо ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Выделить ячейку выше/ниже выделенной в данный момент или справа/слева от нее. Перейти к краю видимой области данных или к следующей заполненной ячейке Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Выделить ячейку на краю видимой области данных или следующую заполненную ячейку на листе. Если в области нет данных, будет выделена последняя ячейка видимой области. Если область содержит данные, будет выделена следующая заполненная ячейка. Перейти в начало строки Home Home Выделить ячейку в столбце A текущей строки. Перейти в начало электронной таблицы Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Выделить ячейку A1. Перейти в конец строки End, Ctrl+→ End, ⌘ Cmd+→ Выделить последнюю ячейку текущей строки. Перейти в конец электронной таблицы Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Выделить правую нижнюю используемую ячейку на листе, расположенную в самой нижней используемой строке в крайнем правом используемом столбце. Если курсор находится в строке формул, он будет перемещен в конец текста. Перейти на предыдущий лист Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Перейти на предыдущий лист электронной таблицы. Перейти на следующий лист Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Перейти на следующий лист электронной таблицы. Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Выделить ячейку выше текущей, расположенную в том же самом столбце. Перейти на одну строку вниз ↓, ↵ Enter ↵ Return Выделить ячейку ниже текущей, расположенную в том же самом столбце. Перейти на один столбец влево ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Выделить предыдущую ячейку текущей строки. Перейти на один столбец вправо →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Выделить следующую ячейку текущей строки. Перейти на один экран вниз Page Down Page Down Перейти на один экран вниз по рабочему листу. Перейти на один экран вверх Page Up Page Up Перейти на один экран вверх по рабочему листу. Переместить вертикальную полосу прокрутки Вверх/Вниз Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз Переместить вертикальную полосу прокрутки Вверх/Вниз. Переместить горизонтальную полосу прокрутки Влево/Вправо ⇧ Shift+Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз ⇧ Shift+Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз Перемещение горизонтальной полосы прокрутки влево/вправо. Чтобы переместить полосу прокрутки вправо, прокрутите колесико мыши вниз. Чтобы переместить полосу прокрутки влево, прокрутите колесо мыши вверх. Увеличить Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Увеличить масштаб редактируемой электронной таблицы. Уменьшить Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Уменьшить масштаб редактируемой электронной таблицы. Перейти между элементами управления Tab, Shift+Tab Tab, Shift+Tab Перейти на следующий или предыдущий элемент управления в модальных окнах. Выделение данных Выделить все Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌘ Cmd+A Выделить весь рабочий лист. Выделить столбец Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Выделить весь столбец на рабочем листе. Выделить строку ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Выделить всю строку на рабочем листе. Выделить фрагмент ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Выделять ячейку за ячейкой. Выделить с позиции курсора до начала строки ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент с позиции курсора до начала текущей строки. Выделить с позиции курсора до конца строки ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент с позиции курсора до конца текущей строки. Расширить выделенный диапазон до начала рабочего листа Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент начиная с выделенных в данный момент ячеек до начала рабочего листа. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней используемой ячейки Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент начиная с выделенных в данный момент ячеек до последней используемой ячейки на рабочем листе (в самой нижней используемой строке в крайнем правом используемом столбце). Если курсор находится в строке формул, будет выделен весь текст в строке формул с позиции курсора и до конца. Это не повлияет на высоту строки формул. Выделить одну ячейку слева ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Выделить одну ячейку слева в таблице. Выделить одну ячейку справа ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Выделить одну ячейку справа в таблице. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки справа ⇧ Shift+End, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+End Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки в той же строке справа от активной ячейки. Если следующая ячейка пуста, выделенный диапазон будет расширен до следующей непустой ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки слева ⇧ Shift+Home, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+Home Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки в той же строке слева от активной ячейки. Если следующая ячейка пуста, выделенный диапазон будет расширен до следующей непустой ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки сверху/снизу в столбце Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки в том же столбце сверху/снизу от активной ячейки. Если следующая ячейка пуста, выделенный диапазон будет расширен до следующей непустой ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон на один экран вниз ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Расширить выделенный диапазон, чтобы включить все ячейки на один экран вниз от активной ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон на один экран вверх ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Расширить выделенный диапазон, чтобы включить все ячейки на один экран вверх от активной ячейки. Отмена и повтор Отменить Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z Отменить последнее выполненное действие. Повторить Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y Повторить последнее отмененное действие. Вырезание, копирование и вставка Вырезать Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Вырезать выделенные данные и отправить их в буфер обмена компьютера. Вырезанные данные можно затем вставить в другое место этого же рабочего листа, в другую электронную таблицу или в какую-то другую программу. Копировать Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Отправить выделенные данные в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированные данные можно затем вставить в другое место этого же рабочего листа, в другую электронную таблицу или в какую-то другую программу. Вставить Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированные/вырезанные данные из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Данные могут быть ранее скопированы из того же самого рабочего листа, из другой электронной таблицы или из какой-то другой программы. Форматирование данных Полужирный шрифт Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста полужирным, придав ему большую насыщенность, или удалить форматирование полужирным шрифтом. Курсив Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста курсивным, придав ему наклон вправо, или удалить форматирование курсивом. Подчеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Подчеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной под буквами, или убрать подчеркивание. Зачеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Зачеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной по буквам, или убрать зачеркивание. Добавить гиперссылку Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Вставить гиперссылку на внешний сайт или на другой рабочий лист. Редактирование активной ячейки F2 F2 Редактировать активную ячейку и поместить точку вставки в конце содержимого ячейки. Если редактирование для ячейки отключено, точка вставки помещается в строку формул. Фильтрация данных Включить/Удалить фильтр Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Включить фильтр для выбранного диапазона ячеек или удалить фильтр. Форматировать как таблицу Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Применить к выбранному диапазону ячеек форматирование таблицы. Ввод данных Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти вниз ↵ Enter ↵ Return Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул и перейти в ячейку ниже. Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти вверх ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку и перейти в ячейку выше. Начать новую строку Alt+↵ Enter Начать новую строку в той же самой ячейке. Отмена Esc Esc Отменить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул. Удалить знак слева ← Backspace ← Backspace Удалить один символ слева от курсора в строке формул или выделенной ячейке, когда активирован режим редактирования ячейки. Также удаляет содержимое активной ячейки. Удалить знак справа Delete Delete, Fn+← Backspace Удалить один символ справа от курсора в строке формул или выделенной ячейке, когда активирован режим редактирования ячейки. Также удаляет содержимое (данные и формулы) выделенных ячеек, не затрагивая форматирование ячеек или комментарии. Очистить содержимое ячеек Delete, ← Backspace Delete, ← Backspace Удалить содержимое (данные и формулы) из выделенных ячеек, не затрагивая форматирование ячеек или комментарии. Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти вправо ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул и перейти в ячейку справа. Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти влево ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул и перейти в ячейку слева. Вставка ячеек Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Открыть диалоговое окно для вставки новых ячеек в текущую электронную таблицу с дополнительным параметром: со сдвигом вправо, со сдвигом вниз, вставка целой строки или целого столбца. Удаление ячеек Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Открыть диалоговое окно для удаления ячеек из текущей электронной таблицы с дополнительным параметром: со сдвигом влево, со сдвигом вверх, удаление всей строки или всего столбца. Вставка текущей даты Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Вставить сегодняшнюю дату в активную ячейку. Вставка текущего времени Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Вставить текущее время в активную ячейку. Вставка текущей даты и времени Ctrl+; затем ␣ Spacebar затем Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; затем ␣ Spacebar затем Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; затем ␣ Spacebar затем ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Вставить текущую дату и время в активную ячейку. Функции Вставка функции ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+F3 Открыть диалоговое окно для вставки новой функции путем выбора из списка. Функция SUM Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Вставить функцию SUM в выделенную ячейку. Открыть выпадающий список Alt+↓ Открыть выбранный выпадающий список. Открыть контекстное меню ≣ Menu Открыть контекстное меню для выбранной ячейки или диапазона ячеек. Пересчет функций F9 F9 Выполнить пересчет всей рабочей книги. Пересчет функций ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+F9 Выполнить пересчет текущего рабочего листа. Форматы данных Открыть диалоговое окно 'Числовой формат' Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Открыть диалоговое окно Числовой формат. Применить общий формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Применить Общий числовой формат. Применить денежный формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Применить Денежный формат с двумя десятичными знаками (отрицательные числа отображаются в круглых скобках). Применить процентный формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Применить Процентный формат без дробной части. Применить экспоненциальный формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Применить Экспоненциальный числовой формат с двумя десятичными знаками. Применить формат даты Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Применить формат Даты с указанием дня, месяца и года. Применить формат времени Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Применить формат Времени с отображением часов и минут и индексами AM или PM. Применить числовой формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Применить Числовой формат с двумя десятичными знаками, разделителем разрядов и знаком минус (-) для отрицательных значений. Модификация объектов Ограничить движение ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание Ограничить перемещение выбранного объекта по горизонтали или вертикали. Задать угол поворота в 15 градусов ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) Ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов. Сохранять пропорции ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) Сохранять пропорции выбранного объекта при изменении размера. Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку: горизонтальную, вертикальную или под углом 45 градусов. Перемещение с шагом в один пиксель Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре, чтобы перемещать выбранный объект на один пиксель за раз." + "body": "Подсказки для клавиш Используйте сочетания клавиш для более быстрого и удобного доступа к функциям Редактора электронных таблиц без использования мыши. Нажмите клавишу Alt, чтобы показать все подсказки для клавиш верхней панели инструментов, правой и левой боковой панели, а также строке состояния. Нажмите клавишу, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. В зависимости от нажатой клавиши, могут появляться дополнительные подсказки. Когда появляются дополнительные подсказки для клавиш, первичные - скрываются. Например, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка, нажмите Alt и просмотрите все подсказки по первичным клавишам. Нажмите букву И, чтобы открыть вкладку Вставка и просмотреть все доступные сочетания клавиш для этой вкладки. Затем нажмите букву, соответствующую элементу, который вы хотите использовать. Нажмите Alt, чтобы скрыть все подсказки для клавиш, или Escape, чтобы вернуться к предыдущей группе подсказок для клавиш. Windows/Linux Mac OS Работа с электронной таблицей Открыть панель 'Файл' Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Открыть панель Файл, чтобы сохранить, скачать, распечатать текущую электронную таблицу, просмотреть сведения о ней, создать новую таблицу или открыть существующую, получить доступ к Справке по онлайн-редактору электронных таблиц или дополнительным параметрам. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена, чтобы начать поиск ячейки, содержащей требуемые символы. Открыть окно 'Поиск и замена' с полем замены Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Открыть диалоговое окно Поиск и замена с полем замены, чтобы заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов. Открыть панель 'Комментарии' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Открыть панель Комментарии, чтобы добавить свой комментарий или ответить на комментарии других пользователей. Открыть поле комментария Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Открыть поле ввода данных, в котором можно добавить текст комментария. Открыть панель 'Чат' (Онлайн-редакторы) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Открыть панель Чат в онлайн-редакторах и отправить сообщение. Сохранить электронную таблицу Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Сохранить все изменения в редактируемой электронной таблице. Активный файл будет сохранен с текущим именем, в том же местоположении и формате. Печать электронной таблицы Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Распечатать электронную таблицу на одном из доступных принтеров или сохранить в файл. Скачать как... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Открыть панель Скачать как..., чтобы сохранить редактируемую электронную таблицу на жестком диске компьютера в одном из поддерживаемых форматов: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Полноэкранный режим (Онлайн-редакторы) F11 Переключиться в полноэкранный режим в онлайн-редакторах, чтобы развернуть редактор электронных таблиц на весь экран. Меню Справка F1 F1 Открыть меню Справка онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц. Открыть существующий файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+O На вкладке Открыть локальный файл в десктопных редакторах позволяет открыть стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора существующего файла. Закрыть файл (десктопные редакторы) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Закрыть выбранную рабочую книгу в десктопных редакторах. Контекстное меню элемента ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Открыть контекстное меню выбранного элемента. Сбросить масштаб Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 или ⌘ Cmd+0 Сбросить масштаб текущей электронной таблицы до значения по умолчанию 100%. Навигация Перейти на одну ячейку вверх, вниз, влево или вправо ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Выделить ячейку выше/ниже выделенной в данный момент или справа/слева от нее. Перейти к краю видимой области данных или к следующей заполненной ячейке Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Выделить ячейку на краю видимой области данных или следующую заполненную ячейку на листе. Если в области нет данных, будет выделена последняя ячейка видимой области. Если область содержит данные, будет выделена следующая заполненная ячейка. Перейти в начало строки Home Home Выделить ячейку в столбце A текущей строки. Перейти в начало электронной таблицы Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Выделить ячейку A1. Перейти в конец строки End, Ctrl+→ End, ⌘ Cmd+→ Выделить последнюю ячейку текущей строки. Перейти в конец электронной таблицы Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Выделить правую нижнюю используемую ячейку на листе, расположенную в самой нижней используемой строке в крайнем правом используемом столбце. Если курсор находится в строке формул, он будет перемещен в конец текста. Перейти на предыдущий лист Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Перейти на предыдущий лист электронной таблицы. Перейти на следующий лист Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Перейти на следующий лист электронной таблицы. Перейти на одну строку вверх ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Выделить ячейку выше текущей, расположенную в том же самом столбце. Перейти на одну строку вниз ↓, ↵ Enter ↵ Return Выделить ячейку ниже текущей, расположенную в том же самом столбце. Перейти на один столбец влево ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Выделить предыдущую ячейку текущей строки. Перейти на один столбец вправо →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Выделить следующую ячейку текущей строки. Перейти на один экран вниз Page Down Page Down Перейти на один экран вниз по рабочему листу. Перейти на один экран вверх Page Up Page Up Перейти на один экран вверх по рабочему листу. Переместить вертикальную полосу прокрутки Вверх/Вниз Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз Переместить вертикальную полосу прокрутки Вверх/Вниз. Переместить горизонтальную полосу прокрутки Влево/Вправо ⇧ Shift+Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз ⇧ Shift+Прокрутка колесика мыши Вверх/Вниз Перемещение горизонтальной полосы прокрутки влево/вправо. Чтобы переместить полосу прокрутки вправо, прокрутите колесико мыши вниз. Чтобы переместить полосу прокрутки влево, прокрутите колесо мыши вверх. Увеличить Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Увеличить масштаб редактируемой электронной таблицы. Уменьшить Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Уменьшить масштаб редактируемой электронной таблицы. Перейти между элементами управления ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Перейти на следующий или предыдущий элемент управления в модальных окнах. Выделение данных Выделить все Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌘ Cmd+A Выделить весь рабочий лист. Выделить столбец Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Выделить весь столбец на рабочем листе. Выделить строку ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Выделить всю строку на рабочем листе. Выделить фрагмент ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Выделять ячейку за ячейкой. Выделить с позиции курсора до начала строки ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент с позиции курсора до начала текущей строки. Выделить с позиции курсора до конца строки ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент с позиции курсора до конца текущей строки. Расширить выделенный диапазон до начала рабочего листа Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home Выделить фрагмент начиная с выделенных в данный момент ячеек до начала рабочего листа. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней используемой ячейки Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End Выделить фрагмент начиная с выделенных в данный момент ячеек до последней используемой ячейки на рабочем листе (в самой нижней используемой строке в крайнем правом используемом столбце). Если курсор находится в строке формул, будет выделен весь текст в строке формул с позиции курсора и до конца. Это не повлияет на высоту строки формул. Выделить одну ячейку слева ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Выделить одну ячейку слева в таблице. Выделить одну ячейку справа ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Выделить одну ячейку справа в таблице. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки справа ⇧ Shift+End, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+End Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки в той же строке справа от активной ячейки. Если следующая ячейка пуста, выделенный диапазон будет расширен до следующей непустой ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки слева ⇧ Shift+Home, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+Home Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки в той же строке слева от активной ячейки. Если следующая ячейка пуста, выделенный диапазон будет расширен до следующей непустой ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки сверху/снизу в столбце Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Расширить выделенный диапазон до последней непустой ячейки в том же столбце сверху/снизу от активной ячейки. Если следующая ячейка пуста, выделенный диапазон будет расширен до следующей непустой ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон на один экран вниз ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Расширить выделенный диапазон, чтобы включить все ячейки на один экран вниз от активной ячейки. Расширить выделенный диапазон на один экран вверх ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Расширить выделенный диапазон, чтобы включить все ячейки на один экран вверх от активной ячейки. Отмена и повтор Отменить Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z Отменить последнее выполненное действие. Повторить Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y Повторить последнее отмененное действие. Вырезание, копирование и вставка Вырезать Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Вырезать выделенные данные и отправить их в буфер обмена компьютера. Вырезанные данные можно затем вставить в другое место этого же рабочего листа, в другую электронную таблицу или в какую-то другую программу. Копировать Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Отправить выделенные данные в буфер обмена компьютера. Скопированные данные можно затем вставить в другое место этого же рабочего листа, в другую электронную таблицу или в какую-то другую программу. Вставить Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Вставить ранее скопированные/вырезанные данные из буфера обмена компьютера в текущей позиции курсора. Данные могут быть ранее скопированы из того же самого рабочего листа, из другой электронной таблицы или из какой-то другой программы. Форматирование данных Полужирный шрифт Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста полужирным, придав ему большую насыщенность, или удалить форматирование полужирным шрифтом. Курсив Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Сделать шрифт в выделенном фрагменте текста курсивным, придав ему наклон вправо, или удалить форматирование курсивом. Подчеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Подчеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной под буквами, или убрать подчеркивание. Зачеркнутый шрифт Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Зачеркнуть выделенный фрагмент текста чертой, проведенной по буквам, или убрать зачеркивание. Добавить гиперссылку Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Вставить гиперссылку на внешний сайт или на другой рабочий лист. Редактирование активной ячейки F2 F2 Редактировать активную ячейку и поместить точку вставки в конце содержимого ячейки. Если редактирование для ячейки отключено, точка вставки помещается в строку формул. Фильтрация данных Включить/Удалить фильтр Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Включить фильтр для выбранного диапазона ячеек или удалить фильтр. Форматировать как таблицу Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Применить к выбранному диапазону ячеек форматирование таблицы. Ввод данных Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти вниз ↵ Enter ↵ Return Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул и перейти в ячейку ниже. Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти вверх ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку и перейти в ячейку выше. Начать новую строку Alt+↵ Enter Начать новую строку в той же самой ячейке. Отмена Esc Esc Отменить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул. Удалить знак слева ← Backspace ← Backspace Удалить один символ слева от курсора в строке формул или выделенной ячейке, когда активирован режим редактирования ячейки. Также удаляет содержимое активной ячейки. Удалить знак справа Delete Delete, Fn+← Backspace Удалить один символ справа от курсора в строке формул или выделенной ячейке, когда активирован режим редактирования ячейки. Также удаляет содержимое (данные и формулы) выделенных ячеек, не затрагивая форматирование ячеек или комментарии. Очистить содержимое ячеек Delete, ← Backspace Delete, ← Backspace Удалить содержимое (данные и формулы) из выделенных ячеек, не затрагивая форматирование ячеек или комментарии. Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти вправо ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул и перейти в ячейку справа. Завершить ввод в ячейку и перейти влево ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Завершить ввод в выделенную ячейку или строку формул и перейти в ячейку слева. Вставка ячеек Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Открыть диалоговое окно для вставки новых ячеек в текущую электронную таблицу с дополнительным параметром: со сдвигом вправо, со сдвигом вниз, вставка целой строки или целого столбца. Удаление ячеек Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Открыть диалоговое окно для удаления ячеек из текущей электронной таблицы с дополнительным параметром: со сдвигом влево, со сдвигом вверх, удаление всей строки или всего столбца. Вставка текущей даты Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Вставить сегодняшнюю дату в активную ячейку. Вставка текущего времени Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Вставить текущее время в активную ячейку. Вставка текущей даты и времени Ctrl+; затем ␣ Spacebar затем Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; затем ␣ Spacebar затем Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; затем ␣ Spacebar затем ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Вставить текущую дату и время в активную ячейку. Функции Вставка функции ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+F3 Открыть диалоговое окно для вставки новой функции путем выбора из списка. Функция SUM Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Вставить функцию SUM в выделенную ячейку. Открыть выпадающий список Alt+↓ Открыть выбранный выпадающий список. Открыть контекстное меню ≣ Menu Открыть контекстное меню для выбранной ячейки или диапазона ячеек. Пересчет функций F9 F9 Выполнить пересчет всей рабочей книги. Пересчет функций ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+F9 Выполнить пересчет текущего рабочего листа. Форматы данных Открыть диалоговое окно 'Числовой формат' Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Открыть диалоговое окно Числовой формат. Применить общий формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Применить Общий числовой формат. Применить денежный формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Применить Денежный формат с двумя десятичными знаками (отрицательные числа отображаются в круглых скобках). Применить процентный формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Применить Процентный формат без дробной части. Применить экспоненциальный формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Применить Экспоненциальный числовой формат с двумя десятичными знаками. Применить формат даты Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Применить формат Даты с указанием дня, месяца и года. Применить формат времени Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Применить формат Времени с отображением часов и минут и индексами AM или PM. Применить числовой формат Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Применить Числовой формат с двумя десятичными знаками, разделителем разрядов и знаком минус (-) для отрицательных значений. Модификация объектов Ограничить движение ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание Ограничить перемещение выбранного объекта по горизонтали или вертикали. Задать угол поворота в 15 градусов ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при поворачивании) Ограничить угол поворота шагом в 15 градусов. Сохранять пропорции ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при изменении размера) Сохранять пропорции выбранного объекта при изменении размера. Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) ⇧ Shift + перетаскивание (при рисовании линий или стрелок) Нарисовать прямую линию или стрелку: горизонтальную, вертикальную или под углом 45 градусов. Перемещение с шагом в один пиксель Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Удерживайте клавишу Ctrl и используйте стрелки на клавиатуре, чтобы перемещать выбранный объект на один пиксель за раз." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Параметры представления и инструменты навигации", - "body": "В Редакторе электронных таблиц доступен ряд инструментов для навигации, облегчающих просмотр и выделение ячеек в больших таблицах: настраиваемые панели, полосы прокрутки, кнопки навигации по листам, ярлычки листов и кнопки масштаба. Настройте параметры представления Чтобы настроить стандартные параметры представления и установить наиболее удобный режим работы с электронной таблицей, перейдите на вкладку Вид. Можно выбрать следующие опции: Представление листа - для управления представлениями листа. Чтобы получить дополнительную информацию о представлениях листа, прочитайте следующую статью. Масштаб - чтобы выбрать из выпадающего списка нужное значение масштаба от 50% до 500%. Тема интерфейса – выберите из выпадающего меню одну из доступных тем интерфейса: Системная, Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная, Контрастная темная. Закрепить области - закрепляет все строки выше активной ячейки и все столбцы слева от нее таким образом, что они остаются видимыми при прокрутке электронной таблицы вправо или вниз. Чтобы снять закрепление областей, щелкните по этой опции еще раз или щелкните в любом месте рабочего листа правой кнопкой мыши и выберите пункт меню Снять закрепление областей. Строка формул - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта панель, которая располагается под верхней панелью инструментов и используется для ввода и просмотра формул и их значений. Чтобы отобразить скрытую строку формул, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. При перетаскивании нижней линейки строки формул, чтобы расширить ее, высота строки формул меняется кратно высоте строки. Заголовки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты заголовки столбцов сверху и заголовки строк слева на рабочем листе. Чтобы отобразить скрытые заголовки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Линии сетки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты линии вокруг ячеек. Чтобы отобразить скрытые линии сетки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Отображать нули - позволяет отображать «0» в ячейке. Чтобы отключить эту опцию, снимите галочку. Всегда показывать панель инструментов – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта верхняя панель инструментов, которая содержит команды. Названия вкладок при этом остаются видимыми. Можно также дважды щелкнуть по любой вкладке, чтобы скрыть верхнюю панель инструментов или отобразить ее снова. Объединить строки листов и состояния - отображает все инструменты навигации и строку состояния в одной объединенной строке. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Если ее отключить, строка состояния и строка листов будет отображаться отдельно. Левая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта левая панель, на которой расположены кнопки Поиск, Комментарии и т. д. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Левую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта правая панель, на которой расположены Параметры. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Правую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая боковая панель свернута по умолчанию. Чтобы ее развернуть, выделите любой объект (например, изображение, диаграмму, фигуру) и щелкните по значку вкладки, которая в данный момент активирована. Чтобы свернуть правую боковую панель, щелкните по этому значку еще раз. Можно также изменить размер открытой панели Комментарии или Чат путем простого перетаскивания: наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели вправо, чтобы увеличить ширину панели. Чтобы восстановить исходную ширину, перетащите край панели влево. Используйте инструменты навигации Для осуществления навигации по электронной таблице используйте следующие инструменты: Используйте клавишу Tab на клавиатуре, чтобы перейти к ячейке справа от выбранной. Полосы прокрутки (внизу или справа) используются для прокручивания текущего листа вверх/вниз и влево/вправо. Для навигации по электронной таблице с помощью полос прокрутки: нажимайте стрелки вверх/вниз или вправо/влево на полосах прокрутки; перетаскивайте ползунок прокрутки; прокрутите колесико мыши для перемещения по вертикали; используйте комбинацию клавиши Shift и колесика прокрутки мыши для перемещения по горизонтали; щелкните в любой области слева/справа или выше/ниже ползунка на полосе прокрутки. Чтобы прокручивать электронную таблицу вверх или вниз, можно также использовать колесо прокрутки мыши. Кнопки Навигации по листам расположены в левом нижнем углу и используются для прокручивания списка листов вправо и влево и перемещения между ярлычками листов. нажмите на кнопку Прокрутить список листов влево , чтобы прокрутить список листов текущей электронной таблицы влево; нажмите на кнопку Прокрутить список листов вправо , чтобы прокрутить список листов текущей электронной таблицы вправо; Нажмите кнопку в строке состояния, чтобы добавить новый лист. Чтобы выбрать нужный лист: нажмите кнопку в строке состояния, чтобы открыть список всех листов и выбрать нужный лист. В списке листов также отображается статус листа. или щелкните по соответствующей Вкладке листа напротив кнопки  . Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего листа. Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%/ 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить < class = \"icon icon-zoomout\">. Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладкe Вид." - }, - { - "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", - "title": "Защита электронных таблиц с помощью пароля", - "body": "Вы можете защитить свои электронные таблицы при помощи пароля, который требуется вашим соавторам для входа в режим редактирования. Пароль можно изменить или удалить позже. Вы не сможете восстановить свой пароль, если потеряете его или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Установка пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Защитить, нажмите кнопку Добавить пароль, введите пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль, затем нажмите ОК. Нажмите , чтобы показать или скрыть пароль. Смена пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Защитить, нажмите кнопку Изменить пароль, введите пароль в поле Пароль и продублируйте его в поле Повторите пароль, затем нажмите ОК. Удаление пароля перейдите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Защитить, нажмите кнопку Удалить пароль." + "body": "В Редакторе электронных таблиц доступен ряд инструментов для навигации, облегчающих просмотр и выделение ячеек в больших таблицах: настраиваемые панели, полосы прокрутки, кнопки навигации по листам, ярлычки листов и кнопки масштаба. Настройте параметры представления Чтобы настроить стандартные параметры представления и установить наиболее удобный режим работы с электронной таблицей, перейдите на вкладку Вид. Можно выбрать следующие опции: Представление листа - для управления представлениями листа. Чтобы получить дополнительную информацию о представлениях листа, прочитайте следующую статью. Масштаб - чтобы выбрать из выпадающего списка нужное значение масштаба от 50% до 500%. Тема интерфейса – выберите из выпадающего меню одну из доступных тем интерфейса: Системная, Светлая, Классическая светлая, Темная, Контрастная темная. Закрепить области - закрепляет все строки выше активной ячейки и все столбцы слева от нее таким образом, что они остаются видимыми при прокрутке электронной таблицы вправо или вниз. Чтобы снять закрепление областей, щелкните по этой опции еще раз или щелкните в любом месте рабочего листа правой кнопкой мыши и выберите пункт меню Снять закрепление областей. Строка формул - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта панель, которая располагается под верхней панелью инструментов и используется для ввода и просмотра формул и их значений. Чтобы отобразить скрытую строку формул, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. При перетаскивании нижней линейки строки формул, чтобы расширить ее, высота строки формул меняется кратно высоте строки. Заголовки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты заголовки столбцов сверху и заголовки строк слева на рабочем листе. Чтобы отобразить скрытые заголовки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Линии сетки - когда эта опция отключена, будут скрыты линии вокруг ячеек. Чтобы отобразить скрытые линии сетки, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Отображать нули - позволяет отображать «0» в ячейке. Чтобы отключить эту опцию, снимите галочку. Всегда показывать панель инструментов – когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта верхняя панель инструментов, которая содержит команды. Названия вкладок при этом остаются видимыми. Можно также дважды щелкнуть по любой вкладке, чтобы скрыть верхнюю панель инструментов или отобразить ее снова. Объединить строки листов и состояния - отображает все инструменты навигации и строку состояния в одной объединенной строке. Данная опция включена по умолчанию. Если ее отключить, строка состояния и строка листов будет отображаться отдельно. Левая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта левая панель, на которой расположены кнопки Поиск, Комментарии и т. д. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Левую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая панель - когда эта опция отключена, будет скрыта правая панель, на которой расположены Параметры. Чтобы отобразить скрытую Правую панель, щелкните по этой опции еще раз. Правая боковая панель свернута по умолчанию. Чтобы ее развернуть, выделите любой объект (например, изображение, диаграмму, фигуру) и щелкните по значку вкладки, которая в данный момент активирована. Чтобы свернуть правую боковую панель, щелкните по этому значку еще раз. Можно также изменить размер открытой панели Комментарии или Чат путем простого перетаскивания: наведите курсор мыши на край левой боковой панели, чтобы курсор превратился в двунаправленную стрелку, и перетащите край панели вправо, чтобы увеличить ширину панели. Чтобы восстановить исходную ширину, перетащите край панели влево. Используйте инструменты навигации Для осуществления навигации по электронной таблице используйте следующие инструменты: Используйте клавишу Tab на клавиатуре, чтобы перейти к ячейке справа от выбранной. Полосы прокрутки (внизу или справа) используются для прокручивания текущего листа вверх/вниз и влево/вправо. Для навигации по электронной таблице с помощью полос прокрутки: нажимайте стрелки вверх/вниз или вправо/влево на полосах прокрутки; перетаскивайте ползунок прокрутки; прокрутите колесико мыши для перемещения по вертикали; используйте комбинацию клавиши Shift и колесика прокрутки мыши для перемещения по горизонтали; щелкните в любой области слева/справа или выше/ниже ползунка на полосе прокрутки. Чтобы прокручивать электронную таблицу вверх или вниз, можно также использовать колесо прокрутки мыши. Кнопки Навигации по листам расположены в левом нижнем углу и используются для прокручивания списка листов вправо и влево и перемещения между ярлычками листов. нажмите на кнопку Прокрутить список листов влево , чтобы прокрутить список листов текущей электронной таблицы влево; нажмите на кнопку Прокрутить список листов вправо , чтобы прокрутить список листов текущей электронной таблицы вправо; Нажмите кнопку в строке состояния, чтобы добавить новый лист. Чтобы выбрать нужный лист: нажмите кнопку в строке состояния, чтобы открыть список всех листов и выбрать нужный лист. В списке листов также отображается статус листа. или щелкните по соответствующей Вкладке листа напротив кнопки  . Кнопки Масштаб расположены в правом нижнем углу и используются для увеличения и уменьшения текущего листа. Чтобы изменить выбранное в текущий момент значение масштаба в процентах, щелкните по нему и выберите в списке один из доступных параметров масштабирования (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) или используйте кнопки Увеличить или Уменьшить < class = \"icon icon-zoomout\">. Параметры масштаба доступны также на вкладкe Вид." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Функция поиска и замены", - "body": "Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, которые используются в текущей электронной таблице, щелкните по значку , расположенному на левой боковой панели, или значку , расположенному в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска. В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H. Откроется панель Поиск и замена: Введите запрос в соответствующее поле ввода данных Поиск. Для навигации по найденным вхождениям нажмите одну из кнопок со стрелками. Кнопка показывает следующее вхождение, а кнопка показывает предыдущее. Если требуется заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов, введите текст для замены в соответствующее поле ввода данных Заменить на. Вы можете заменить одно выделенное в данный момент вхождение или заменить все вхождения, нажав соответствующие кнопки Заменить или Заменить все. Задайте параметры поиска, выбрав нужные опции: Искать - используется для поиска только на активном Листе или во всей Книге. Если вы хотите выполнить поиск внутри выделенной области на листе, убедитесь, что выбрана опция Лист. Просматривать - используется для указания нужного направления поиска: вправо По строкам или вниз По столбцам. Область поиска - используется для указания, надо ли произвести поиск по Значениям ячеек или по Формулам, на основании которых они высчитываются. Задайте параметры поиска, отметив нужные опции, расположенные под полями ввода: С учетом регистра - используется для поиска только тех вхождений, которые набраны в таком же регистре, что и ваш запрос, (например, если вы ввели запрос 'Редактор' и выбрали эту опцию, такие слова, как 'редактор' или 'РЕДАКТОР' и т.д. не будут найдены). Все содержимое ячеек - используется для поиска только тех ячеек, которые не содержат никаких других символов, кроме указанных в запросе (например, если вы ввели запрос '56' и выбрали эту опцию, то ячейки, содержащие такие данные, как '0,56', '156' и т.д., найдены не будут). Все вхождения будут подсвечены в файле и показаны в виде списка на панели Поиск слева. Используйте список для перехода к нужному вхождению или используйте кнопки навигации и ." + "body": "Чтобы найти нужные символы, слова или фразы, которые используются в текущей электронной таблице, щелкните по значку , расположенному на левой боковой панели, или значку , расположенному в правом верхнем углу. Вы также можете использовать сочетание клавиш Ctrl+F (Command+F для MacOS), чтобы открыть маленькую панель поиска, или сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H, чтобы открыть расширенную панель поиска. В правом верхнем углу рабочей области откроется маленькая панель Поиск. На панели находится текстовое поле для ввода поискового запроса, количество результатов поиска и элементы управления для перехода к предыдущему или следующему результату, а также закрытия панели. Чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры, нажмите значок или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+H. Откроется панель Поиск и замена: Введите запрос в соответствующее поле ввода данных Поиск. Для навигации по найденным вхождениям нажмите одну из кнопок со стрелками. Кнопка показывает следующее вхождение, а кнопка показывает предыдущее. Если требуется заменить одно или более вхождений найденных символов, введите текст для замены в соответствующее поле ввода данных Заменить на. Вы можете заменить одно выделенное в данный момент вхождение или заменить все вхождения, нажав соответствующие кнопки Заменить или Заменить все. Задайте параметры поиска, выбрав нужные опции: Искать - используется для поиска только на активном Листе или во всей Книге. Если вы хотите выполнить поиск внутри выделенной области на листе, убедитесь, что выбрана опция Лист. Просматривать - используется для указания нужного направления поиска: вправо По строкам или вниз По столбцам. Область поиска - используется для указания, надо ли произвести поиск по Значениям ячеек или по Формулам, на основании которых они высчитываются. Задайте параметры поиска, отметив нужные опции, расположенные под полями ввода: С учетом регистра - используется для поиска только тех вхождений, которые набраны в таком же регистре, что и ваш запрос, (например, если вы ввели запрос 'Редактор' и выбрали эту опцию, такие слова, как 'редактор' или 'РЕДАКТОР' и т.д. не будут найдены). Все содержимое ячеек - используется для поиска только тех ячеек, которые не содержат никаких других символов, кроме указанных в запросе (например, если вы ввели запрос '56' и выбрали эту опцию, то ячейки, содержащие такие данные, как '0,56', '156' и т.д., найдены не будут). Все вхождения будут подсвечены в файле и показаны в виде списка на панели Поиск слева. Используйте список для перехода к нужному вхождению или используйте кнопки навигации и ." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -2423,7 +2448,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Поддерживаемые форматы электронных таблиц", - "body": "Электронная таблица - это таблица данных, организованных в строки и столбцы. Очень часто используется для хранения финансовой информации благодаря возможности автоматически пересчитывать весь лист после изменения отдельной ячейки. Редактор электронных таблиц позволяет открывать, просматривать и редактировать самые популярные форматы файлов электронных таблиц. При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (XLSX>). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование. Форматы Описание Просмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXML Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML CSV Comma Separated Values Формат файлов, используемый для хранения табличных данных (чисел и текста) в текстовой форме + + ODS Расширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, используемых пакетами офисных приложений OpenOffice и StarOffice, открытый стандарт для электронных таблиц + + OTS OpenDocument Spreadsheet Template Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон OTS содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием + + PDF Portable Document Format Формат файлов, используемый для представления документов независимо от программного обеспечения, аппаратных средств и операционных систем PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Подмножество формата PDF, содержащее ограниченный набор возможностей представления данных. Данный формат является стандартом ISO и предназначен для долгосрочного архивного хранения электронных документов. XLS Расширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, созданных программой Microsoft Excel + + XLSX Стандартное расширение для файлов электронных таблиц, созданных с помощью программы Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (или более поздних версий) + + XLTX Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон XLTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием + + Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать таблицу из меню Файл -> Скачать как. Исходный формат Можно скачать как CSV CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX ODS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX OTS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLS CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLSX CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX XLTX CSV, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, XLSX, XLTX Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации таблиц в самые известные форматы файлов." + "body": "Электронная таблица - это таблица данных, организованных в строки и столбцы. Очень часто используется для хранения финансовой информации благодаря возможности автоматически пересчитывать весь лист после изменения отдельной ячейки. Редактор электронных таблиц позволяет открывать, просматривать и редактировать самые популярные форматы файлов электронных таблиц. При загрузке или открытии файла на редактирование он будет сконвертирован в формат Office Open XML (XLSX). Это делается для ускорения обработки файла и повышения совместимости. Следующая таблица содержит форматы, которые можно открыть на просмотр и/или редактирование. Форматы Описание Просмотр в исходном формате Просмотр после конвертации в OOXML Редактирование в исходном формате Редактирование после конвертации в OOXML CSV Comma Separated Values Формат файлов, используемый для хранения табличных данных (чисел и текста) в текстовой форме + + ET WPS Spreadsheets Workbook Формат файла электронной таблицы, включенный в пакет WPS Office, который поддерживает диаграммы, формулы и хранит данные в строках и столбцах ячеек + + ETT WPS Spreadsheets Template Шаблон электронной таблицы, включенный в пакет WPS Office. Файлы ETT аналогичны файлам ET, сохраняя строки и столбцы данных, диаграммы, графики, но в основном они используются для дублирования электронных таблиц с аналогичными макетами и информацией. + + FODS OpenDocument Flat XML Spreadsheet Формат файла на основе XML для сохранения и обмена электронными таблицами.. + + ODS Расширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, используемых пакетами офисных приложений OpenOffice и StarOffice, открытый стандарт для электронных таблиц + + OTS OpenDocument Spreadsheet Template Формат текстовых файлов OpenDocument для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон OTS содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием + + SXC Sun XML Calc Формат файла электронной таблицы на основе XML, входящий в состав OpenOffice. Поддерживает формулы, функции, макросы и диаграммы + + XLS Расширение имени файла для электронных таблиц, созданных программой Microsoft Excel + + XLSX Стандартное расширение для файлов электронных таблиц, созданных с помощью программы Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (или более поздних версий) + + XLTM Файл XLTM представляет собой шаблон электронной таблицы с поддержкой макросов, созданный Microsoft Excel + + XLTX Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template разработанный компанией Microsoft формат файлов на основе XML, сжатых по технологии ZIP. Предназначен для шаблонов электронных таблиц. Шаблон XLTX содержит настройки форматирования, стили и т.д. и может использоваться для создания множества электронных таблиц со схожим форматированием + + XML Extensible Markup Language Формат файла, который используется для структурирования, хранения и передачи данных. + + Следующая таблица содержит форматы, в которые можно скачать таблицу из меню Файл -> Скачать как. Исходный формат Можно скачать как CSV JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ET CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ETT CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX FODS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX ODS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX SXC CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX OTS CSV, JPG, ODS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLS CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLSM CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX XLSX CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLTM, XLTX XLTM CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTX XML CSV, JPG, ODS, OTS, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, XLSM, XLSX, XLTM, XLTX Вы также можете обратиться к матрице конвертации на сайте api.onlyoffice.com, чтобы узнать о возможности конвертации таблиц в самые известные форматы файлов." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", @@ -2440,6 +2465,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Вкладка Данные", "body": "Вкладка Данные в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет управлять данными на рабочем листе. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: выполнять сортировку и фильтрацию данных, преобразовывать текст в столбцы, удалять дубликаты из диапазона данных, группировать и отменять группировку данных, устанавливать параметры проверки данных, получать данные из текстового/CSV-файла, просматривать другие файлы, с которыми связана таблица, с помощью кнопки Внешние ссылки." }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm", + "title": "Draw tab", + "body": "Вкладка Рисование Вкладка Рисование в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет выполнять основные операции рисования. Окно онлайн-редактора документов: Окно десктопного редактора документов: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: выделять рисунки, чтобы изменить их размер или удалить, использовать ручку и маркер, чтобы рисовать или добавлять рукописные заметки и выделение, использовать ластик, чтобы удалять весь рисунок или рукописный текст." + }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Файл", @@ -2473,27 +2503,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Плагины", - "body": "Вкладка Плагины в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет получить доступ к дополнительным возможностям редактирования, используя доступные сторонние компоненты. Здесь также можно использовать макросы для автоматизации рутинных задач. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: Кнопка Настройки позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные. Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины: Отправить - позволяет отправить таблицу по электронной почте с помощью десктопного почтового клиента по умолчанию (доступно только в десктопной версии), Подсветка кода - позволяет подсвечивать синтаксис кода, выбирая нужный язык, стиль, цвет фона, Фоторедактор - позволяет редактировать изображения: обрезать, отражать, поворачивать их, рисовать линии и фигуры, добавлять иконки и текст, загружать маску и применять фильтры, такие как Оттенки серого, Инверсия, Сепия, Размытие, Резкость, Рельеф и другие, Синонимы - позволяет находить синонимы и антонимы какого-либо слова и заменять его на выбранный вариант, Переводчик - позволяет переводить выделенный текст на другие языки, Примечание: этот плагин не работает в Internet Explorer. YouTube - позволяет встраивать в электронную таблицу видео с YouTube. Для получения дополнительной информации о плагинах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. Все доступные примеры плагинов с открытым исходным кодом доступны на GitHub." + "body": "Вкладка Плагины в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет получить доступ к дополнительным возможностям редактирования, используя доступные сторонние компоненты. Здесь также можно использовать макросы для автоматизации рутинных задач. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: Кнопка Менеджер плагинов позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно просмотреть все установленные плагины, управлять ими и добавлять свои собственные. Кнопка Макросы позволяет открыть окно, в котором можно создавать собственные макросы и запускать их. Для получения дополнительной информации о макросах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. В настоящее время по умолчанию доступны следующие плагины: Отправить - позволяет отправить таблицу по электронной почте с помощью десктопного почтового клиента по умолчанию (доступно только в десктопной версии), Подсветка кода - позволяет подсвечивать синтаксис кода, выбирая нужный язык, стиль, цвет фона, Фоторедактор - позволяет редактировать изображения: обрезать, отражать, поворачивать их, рисовать линии и фигуры, добавлять иконки и текст, загружать маску и применять фильтры, такие как Оттенки серого, Инверсия, Сепия, Размытие, Резкость, Рельеф и другие, Синонимы - позволяет находить синонимы и антонимы какого-либо слова и заменять его на выбранный вариант, Переводчик - позволяет переводить выделенный текст на другие языки, Примечание: этот плагин не работает в Internet Explorer. YouTube - позволяет встраивать в электронную таблицу видео с YouTube. Для получения дополнительной информации о плагинах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к нашей Документации по API. Все доступные примеры плагинов с открытым исходным кодом доступны на GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Знакомство с пользовательским интерфейсом редактора электронных таблиц", - "body": "В редакторе электронных таблиц используется вкладочный интерфейс, в котором команды редактирования сгруппированы во вкладки по функциональности. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: Интерфейс редактора состоит из следующих основных элементов: В Шапке редактора отображается логотип, вкладки открытых документов, название документа и вкладки меню. В левой части Шапки редактора расположены кнопки Сохранить, Напечатать файл, Отменить и Повторить. В правой части Шапки редактора отображается имя пользователя и находятся следующие значки: Открыть расположение файла, с помощью которого в десктопной версии можно открыть в окне Проводника папку, в которой сохранен файл. В онлайн-версии можно открыть в новой вкладке браузера папку модуля Документы, в которой сохранен файл . Доступ (доступно только в онлайн-версии), с помощью которого можно задать права доступа к документам, сохраненным в облаке. Добавить в избранное, чтобы добавить файл в избранное и упростить поиск. Добавленный файл - это просто ярлык, поэтому сам файл остается в исходном месте. Удаление файла из избранного не приводит к удалению файла из исходного местоположения. Поиск - позволяет искать в электронной таблице определенное слово, символ и т.д. На Верхней панели инструментов отображается набор команд редактирования в зависимости от выбранной вкладки меню. В настоящее время доступны следующие вкладки: Файл, Главная, Вставка, Макет, Формула, Данные, Сводная таблица, Совместная работа, Защита, Вид, Плагины. Опции Копировать, Вставить, Вырезать и Выделить все всегда доступны в левой части Верхней панели инструментов, независимо от выбранной вкладки. Строка формул позволяет вводить и изменять формулы или значения в ячейках. В Строке формул отображается содержимое выделенной ячейки. В Строке состояния, расположенной внизу окна редактора, находятся некоторые инструменты навигации: кнопки навигации по листам, кнопка добавления нового листа, кнопка список листов, ярлычки листов и кнопки масштаба. В Строке состояния также отображается статус фонового сохранения и состояние восстановления соединения, когда редактор пытается переподключиться, количество отфильтрованных записей при применении фильтра или результаты автоматических вычислений при выделении нескольких ячеек, содержащих данные. На Левой боковой панели находятся следующие значки: - позволяет использовать инструмент поиска и замены, - позволяет открыть панель Комментариев (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет открыть панель Чата, - позволяет обратиться в службу технической поддержки, (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет посмотреть информацию о программе. Правая боковая панель позволяет настроить дополнительные параметры различных объектов. При выделении на рабочем листе определенного объекта активируется соответствующий значок на правой боковой панели. Нажмите на этот значок, чтобы развернуть правую боковую панель. В Рабочей области вы можете просматривать содержимое электронной таблицы, вводить и редактировать данные. Горизонтальная и вертикальная Полосы прокрутки позволяют прокручивать текущий лист вверх/вниз и влево/вправо. Для удобства вы можете скрыть некоторые элементы и снова отобразить их при необходимости. Для получения дополнительной информации о настройке параметров представления, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице." + "body": "В Редакторе электронных таблиц используется вкладочный интерфейс, в котором команды редактирования сгруппированы во вкладки по функциональности.

    Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: Интерфейс редактора состоит из следующих основных элементов: В Шапке редактора отображается логотип, вкладки открытых документов, название документа и вкладки меню. В левой части Шапки редактора расположены кнопки Сохранить, Напечатать файл, Отменить и Повторить. В правой части Шапки редактора отображается имя пользователя и находятся следующие значки: Открыть расположение файла, с помощью которого в десктопной версии можно открыть в окне Проводника папку, в которой сохранен файл. В онлайн-версии можно открыть в новой вкладке браузера папку модуля Документы, в которой сохранен файл . Доступ (доступно только в онлайн-версии), с помощью которого можно задать права доступа к документам, сохраненным в облаке. Добавить в избранное, чтобы добавить файл в избранное и упростить поиск. Добавленный файл - это просто ярлык, поэтому сам файл остается в исходном месте. Удаление файла из избранного не приводит к удалению файла из исходного местоположения. Поиск - позволяет искать в электронной таблице определенное слово, символ и т.д. На Верхней панели инструментов отображается набор команд редактирования в зависимости от выбранной вкладки меню. В настоящее время доступны следующие вкладки: Файл, Главная, Вставка, Макет, Формула, Данные, Сводная таблица, Совместная работа, Защита, Вид, Плагины. Опции Копировать, Вставить, Вырезать и Выделить все всегда доступны в левой части Верхней панели инструментов, независимо от выбранной вкладки. Строка формул позволяет вводить и изменять формулы или значения в ячейках. В Строке формул отображается содержимое выделенной ячейки. В Строке состояния, расположенной внизу окна редактора, находятся некоторые инструменты навигации: кнопки навигации по листам, кнопка добавления нового листа, кнопка список листов, ярлычки листов и кнопки масштаба. В Строке состояния также отображается статус фонового сохранения и состояние восстановления соединения, когда редактор пытается переподключиться, количество отфильтрованных записей при применении фильтра или результаты автоматических вычислений при выделении нескольких ячеек, содержащих данные. На Левой боковой панели находятся следующие значки: - позволяет использовать инструмент поиска и замены, - позволяет открыть панель Комментариев (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет открыть панель Чата, - позволяет обратиться в службу технической поддержки, (доступно только в онлайн-версии) - позволяет посмотреть информацию о программе. Правая боковая панель позволяет настроить дополнительные параметры различных объектов. При выделении на рабочем листе определенного объекта активируется соответствующий значок на правой боковой панели. Нажмите на этот значок, чтобы развернуть правую боковую панель. В Рабочей области вы можете просматривать содержимое электронной таблицы, вводить и редактировать данные. Горизонтальная и вертикальная Полосы прокрутки позволяют прокручивать текущий лист вверх/вниз и влево/вправо. Для удобства вы можете скрыть некоторые элементы и снова отобразить их при необходимости. Для получения дополнительной информации о настройке параметров представления, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Защита", - "body": "Вкладка Защита в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет предотвратить несанкционированный доступ путем шифрования и защиты рабочей книги или листов. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: Зашифровывать электронную таблицу при помощи пароля, Защищать структуру книги с помощью пароля или без него, Защищать лист, ограничив возможности редактирования листа с помощью пароля или без него, Разрешать редактировать диапазоны заблокированных ячеек с паролем или без него, Включать и отключать следующие опции: Заблокированная ячейка, Скрытые формулы, Заблокированная фигура, Заблокировать текст." + "body": "Вкладка Защита в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет предотвратить несанкционированный доступ путем шифрования и защиты рабочей книги или листов. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: С помощью этой вкладки вы можете выполнить следующие действия: Зашифровывать электронную таблицу при помощи пароля, Защищать структуру книги с помощью пароля или без него, Защищать лист, ограничив возможности редактирования листа с помощью пароля или без него, Включать и отключать следующие опции: Заблокированная ячейка, Скрытые формулы, Заблокированная фигура, Заблокировать текст, Защитить диапазон, чтобы ограничить редактирование диапазонов выбранными пользователями." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "Вкладка Вид", - "body": "Вкладка Вид в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет управлять предустановками представления рабочего листа на основе примененных фильтров. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: На этой вкладке доступны следующие параметры просмотра: Представление листа - позволяет управлять предустановками представления листа. Масштаб - позволяет увеличивать и уменьшать масштаб документа. Тема интерфейса позволяет изменить тему интерфейса на Системную, Светлую, Классическую светлую, Темную или Контрастную темную. Закрепить области - позволяет закреплять и откреплять определенные строки и столбцы. Следующие параметры позволяют настроить отображение или скрытие элементов. Чтобы сделать их видимыми, отметьте галочкой следующие элементы: Строка формул - чтобы строка формул всегда отображалась над рабочей областью. Заголовки - чтобы заголовки, столбцов вверху и заголовки строк слева всегда отображались. Линии сетки - чтобы линии сетки, контуры ячеек всегда отображались. Отображать нули - чтобы отображать значение \"0\" в ячейке. Всегда показывать панель инструментов - всегда отображать верхнюю панель инструментов. Объединить строки листов и состояния - отображать все инструменты навигации по листу и строку состояния в одной строке. Если этот флажок не установлен, строка состояния будет отображаться в виде двух строк. Левая панель - чтобы левая панель отображалась. Правая панель - чтобы правая панель отображалась." + "body": "Вкладка Вид в Редакторе электронных таблиц позволяет управлять предустановками представления рабочего листа на основе примененных фильтров. Окно онлайн-редактора электронных таблиц: Окно десктопного редактора электронных таблиц: На этой вкладке доступны следующие параметры просмотра: Представление листа - позволяет управлять предустановками представления листа. Обычный - позволяет видеть таблицу полностью. Страничный режим - позволяет видеть только печатную область электронной таблицы. Масштаб - позволяет увеличивать и уменьшать масштаб документа. Тема интерфейса - позволяет изменить тему интерфейса на Системную, Светлую, Классическую светлую, Темную или Контрастную темную. Закрепить области - позволяет закреплять и откреплять определенные строки и столбцы. Следующие параметры позволяют настроить отображение или скрытие элементов. Чтобы сделать их видимыми, отметьте галочкой следующие элементы: Строка формул - чтобы строка формул всегда отображалась над рабочей областью. Заголовки - чтобы заголовки, столбцов вверху и заголовки строк слева всегда отображались. Линии сетки - чтобы линии сетки, контуры ячеек всегда отображались. Отображать нули - чтобы отображать значение \"0\" в ячейке. Всегда показывать панель инструментов - чтобы всегда отображать верхнюю панель инструментов. Объединить строки листов и состояния - чтобы отображать все инструменты навигации по листу и строку состояния в одной строке. Если этот флажок не установлен, строка состояния будет отображаться в виде двух строк. Левая панель - чтобы левая панель отображалась. Правая панель - чтобы правая панель отображалась." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "title": "Добавление фона и границ ячеек", - "body": "Добавление фона ячеек Для применения и форматирования фона ячеек: выделите ячейку или диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, Примечание: можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. чтобы применить к фону ячейки заливку сплошным цветом, щелкните по значку Цвет заливки , расположенному на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, и выберите нужный цвет, чтобы применить другие типы заливок, такие как градиентная заливка или узор, нажмите на значок Параметры ячейки на правой боковой панели и используйте раздел Заливка: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить выделенные ячейки. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов или задайте пользовательский цвет. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить выделенные ячейки двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Угол - вручную укажите точное значение в градусах, определяющее направление градиента (цвета изменяются по прямой под заданным углом). Направление - выберите готовый шаблон из меню. Доступны следующие направления: из левого верхнего угла в нижний правый (45°), сверху вниз (90°), из правого верхнего угла в нижний левый (135°), справа налево (180°), из правого нижнего угла в верхний левый (225°), снизу вверх (270°), из левого нижнего угла в верхний правый (315°), слева направо (0°). Точки градиента - это определенные точки перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить выделенные ячейки с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Добавление границ ячеек Для добавления и форматирования границ на рабочем листе: выделите ячейку или диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, Примечание: можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. щелкните по значку Границы , расположенному на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, или нажмите на значок Параметры ячейки на правой боковой панели и используйте раздел Стиль границ, выберите стиль границ, который требуется применить: откройте подменю Стиль границ и выберите один из доступных вариантов, откройте подменю Цвет границ или используйте палитру Цвет на правой боковой панели и выберите нужный цвет на палитре, выберите один из доступных шаблонов границ: Внешние границы , Все границы , Верхние границы , Нижние границы , Левые границы , Правые границы , Без границ , Внутренние границы , Внутренние вертикальные границы , Внутренние горизонтальные границы , Диагональная граница снизу вверх , Диагональная граница сверху вниз ." + "body": "Добавление фона ячеек Для применения и форматирования фона ячеек в Редакторе таблиц: выделите ячейку или диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, Примечание: можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. чтобы применить к фону ячейки заливку сплошным цветом, щелкните по значку Цвет заливки , расположенному на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, и выберите нужный цвет, чтобы применить другие типы заливок, такие как градиентная заливка или узор, нажмите на значок Параметры ячейки на правой боковой панели и используйте раздел Заливка: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить выделенные ячейки. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите на палитре один из следующих цветов: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме таблицы. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Выбранная цветовая схема на них не влияет. Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты:: Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в таблице. Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Недавние цвета. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить выделенные ячейки двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Угол - вручную укажите точное значение в градусах, определяющее направление градиента (цвета изменяются по прямой под заданным углом). Направление - выберите готовый шаблон из меню. Доступны следующие направления: из левого верхнего угла в нижний правый (45°), сверху вниз (90°), из правого верхнего угла в нижний левый (135°), справа налево (180°), из правого нижнего угла в верхний левый (225°), снизу вверх (270°), из левого нижнего угла в верхний правый (315°), слева направо (0°). Точки градиента - это определенные точки перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить выделенные ячейки с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Добавление границ ячеек Для добавления и форматирования границ на рабочем листе: выделите ячейку или диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, Примечание: можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. щелкните по значку Границы , расположенному на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, или нажмите на значок Параметры ячейки на правой боковой панели и используйте раздел Стиль границ, выберите стиль границ, который требуется применить: откройте подменю Стиль границ и выберите один из доступных вариантов, откройте подменю Цвет границ или используйте палитру Цвет на правой боковой панели и выберите нужный цвет на палитре, выберите один из доступных шаблонов границ: Внешние границы , Все границы , Верхние границы , Нижние границы , Левые границы , Правые границы , Без границ , Внутренние границы , Внутренние вертикальные границы , Внутренние горизонтальные границы , Диагональная граница снизу вверх , Диагональная граница сверху вниз ." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", @@ -2505,15 +2535,10 @@ var indexes = "title": "Выравнивание данных в ячейках", "body": "Данные внутри ячейки можно выравнивать горизонтально или вертикально или даже поворачивать. Для этого выделите ячейку, диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A. Можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. Затем выполните одну из следующих операций, используя значки, расположенные на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Примените один из типов горизонтального выравнивания данных внутри ячейки: нажмите на значок По левому краю для выравнивания данных по левому краю ячейки (правый край остается невыровненным); нажмите на значок По центру для выравнивания данных по центру ячейки (правый и левый края остаются невыровненными); нажмите на значок По правому краю для выравнивания данных по правому краю ячейки (левый край остается невыровненным); нажмите на значок По ширине для выравнивания данных как по левому, так и по правому краю ячейки (выравнивание осуществляется за счет добавления дополнительных интервалов там, где это необходимо). Измените вертикальное выравнивание данных внутри ячейки: нажмите на значок По верхнему краю для выравнивания данных по верхнему краю ячейки; нажмите на значок По середине для выравнивания данных по центру ячейки; нажмите на значок По нижнему краю для выравнивания данных по нижнему краю ячейки. Измените угол наклона данных внутри ячейки, щелкнув по значку Ориентация и выбрав одну из опций: используйте опцию Горизонтальный текст , чтобы расположить текст по горизонтали (эта опция используется по умолчанию), используйте опцию Текст против часовой стрелки , чтобы расположить текст в ячейке от левого нижнего угла к правому верхнему, используйте опцию Текст по часовой стрелке , чтобы расположить текст в ячейке от левого верхнего угла к правому нижнему углу, используйте опцию Вертикальный текст , чтобы расположить текст вертикально, используйте опцию Повернуть текст вверх , чтобы расположить текст в ячейке снизу вверх, используйте опцию Повернуть текст вниз , чтобы расположить текст в ячейке сверху вниз. Чтобы добавить отступ для текста в ячейке, в разделе Параметры ячейки правой боковой панели введите значение Отступа, на которое содержимое ячейки будет перемещено вправо. Если вы измените ориентацию текста, отступы будут сброшены. Если вы измените отступы для повернутого текста, ориентация текста будет сброшена. Отступы можно установить только если выбрана горизонтальная или вертикальная ориентация текста. Чтобы повернуть текст на точно заданный угол, нажмите на значок Параметры ячейки на правой боковой панели и используйте раздел Ориентация. Введите в поле Угол нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Расположите данные в ячейке в соответствии с шириной столбца, щелкнув по значку Перенос текста . При изменении ширины столбца перенос текста настраивается автоматически. Чтобы расположить данные в ячейке в соответствии с шириной ячейки, установите флажок Автоподбор ширины на правой боковой панели. Содержимое ячейки будет уменьшено в размерах так, чтобы оно могло полностью уместиться внутри." }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/AllowEditRanges.htm", - "title": "Разрешить редактировать диапазоны", - "body": "Опция Разрешить редактировать диапазоны позволяет указать диапазоны ячеек, с которыми пользователь может работать на защищенном листе. Вы можете разрешить пользователям редактировать определенные диапазоны заблокированных ячеек с паролем или без него. Если вы не используете пароль, диапазон ячеек можно редактировать. Чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек, который пользователь может редактировать: Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны на верхней панели инструментов. Откроется окно Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны. Нажмите кнопку Новый в окне Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны, чтобы выбрать и добавить диапазон ячеек, который пользователь сможет редактировать. В окне Новый диапазон введите Название диапазона и выберите диапазон ячеек при помощи кнопки Выбор данных. Пароль не является обязательным, поэтому введите и затем подтвердите его, если вы хотите, чтобы пользователи получали доступ к редактируемым диапазонам ячеек с помощью пароля. Нажмите OK, чтобы подтвердить. Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Нажмите кнопку Защитить лист или нажмите OK, чтобы сохранить изменения и продолжить работу с незащищенным листом. Если вы нажмете кнопку Защитить лист, откроется окно Защитить лист. В нем вы можете выбрать операции, которые будет разрешено выполнять пользователю, чтобы предотвратить любые нежелательные изменения. Введите и подтвердите пароль, если вы хотите установить пароль для снятия защиты с этого листа. Операции, которые может выполнять пользователь. Выделять заблокированные ячейки Выделять разблокированные ячейки Форматировать ячейки Форматировать столбцы Форматировать строки Вставлять столбцы Вставлять строки Вставлять гиперссылку Удалить столбцы Удалить строки Сортировать Использовать автофильтр Использовать сводную таблицу и сводную диаграмму Редактировать объекты Редактировать сценарии Нажмите кнопку Защитить, чтобы включить защиту. Кнопка Защитить лист остается выделенной, когда лист защищен. Если лист не защищен, вы все равно можете вносить изменения в разрешенные диапазоны. Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны, чтобы открыть окно Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны. При помощи кнопок Редактировать и Удалить можно управлять выбранными диапазонами ячеек. Затем нажмите кнопку Защитить лист, чтобы включить защиту листа, или нажмите OK, чтобы сохранить изменения и продолжить работу с незащищенным листом. Когда кто-то пытается отредактировать защищенный паролем диапазон ячеек, появляется окно Разблокировать диапазон, в котором пользователю предлагается ввести пароль." - }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm", "title": "Изменение формата представления чисел", - "body": "Применение числового формата Можно легко изменить числовой формат, то есть то, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в электронной таблице. Для этого: выделите ячейку, диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, Примечание: можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. разверните список Числовой формат , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните по выделенным ячейкам правой кнопкой мыши и используйте пункт контекстного меню Числовой формат. Выберите формат представления чисел, который надо применить: Общий - используется для отображения введенных данных как обычных чисел, самым компактным образом без дополнительных знаков, Числовой - используется для отображения чисел с 0-30 знаками после десятичной запятой, где между каждой группой из трех цифр перед десятичной запятой вставляется разделитель тысяч, Научный (экспоненциальный) - используется для представления очень длинных чисел за счет преобразования в строку типа d.dddE+ddd или d.dddE-ddd, где каждый символ d обозначает цифру от 0 до 9, Финансовый - используется для отображения денежных значений с используемым по умолчанию обозначением денежной единицы и двумя десятичными знаками. Чтобы применить другое обозначение денежной единицы или количество десятичных знаков, следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям. В отличие от Денежного формата, в Финансовом формате обозначения денежной единицы выравниваются по левому краю ячейки, нулевые значения представляются как тире, а отрицательные значения отображаются в скобках. Примечание: чтобы быстро применить к выделенным данным Финансовый формат, можно также щелкнуть по значку Финансовый формат на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выбрать нужное обозначение денежной единицы: $ Доллар, € Евро, £ Фунт, ₽ Рубль, ¥ Йена, kn Хорватская куна. Денежный - используется для отображения денежных значений с используемым по умолчанию обозначением денежной единицы и двумя десятичными знаками. Чтобы применить другое обозначение денежной единицы или количество десятичных знаков, следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям. В отличие от Финансового формата, в Денежном формате обозначение денежной единицы помещается непосредственно рядом с числом, а отрицательные значения отображаются с отрицательным знаком (-). Дата - используется для отображения дат, Время - используется для отображения времени, Процентный - используется для отображения данных в виде процентов со знаком процента %, Примечание: чтобы быстро применить к данным процентный формат, можно также использовать значок Процентный формат на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Дробный - используется для отображения чисел в виде обыкновенных, а не десятичных дробей. Текстовый - используется для отображения числовых значений, при котором они рассматриваются как обычный текст, с максимально доступной точностью. Другие форматы - используется для настройки уже примененных числовых форматов с указанием дополнительных параметров (см. описание ниже). Особый - используется для создания собственного формата: выберите ячейку, диапазон ячеек или весь лист для значений, которые вы хотите отформатировать, выберите пункт Особый в меню Другие форматы, введите требуемые коды и проверьте результат в области предварительного просмотра или выберите один из шаблонов и / или объедините их. Если вы хотите создать формат на основе существующего, сначала примените существующий формат, а затем отредактируйте коды по своему усмотрению, нажмите OK. при необходимости измените количество десятичных разрядов: используйте значок Увеличить разрядность , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы увеличить количество знаков, отображаемых после десятичной запятой, используйте значок Уменьшить разрядность , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы уменьшить количество знаков, отображаемых после десятичной запятой. Примечание: чтобы изменить числовой формат, можно также использовать сочетания клавиш. Настройка числового формата Настроить числовой формат можно следующим образом: выделите ячейки, для которых требуется настроить числовой формат, разверните список Числовой формат , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните по выделенным ячейкам правой кнопкой мыши и используйте пункт контекстного меню Числовой формат, выберите опцию Другие форматы, в открывшемся окне Числовой формат настройте доступные параметры. Опции различаются в зависимости от того, какой числовой формат применен к выделенным ячейкам. Чтобы изменить числовой формат, можно использовать список Категория. для Числового формата можно задать количество Десятичных знаков, указать, надо ли Использовать разделитель разрядов, и выбрать один из доступных Форматов для отображения отрицательных значений. для Научного и Процентного форматов, можно задать количество Десятичных знаков. для Финансового и Денежного форматов, можно задать количество Десятичных знаков, выбрать одно из доступных Обозначений денежных единиц и один из доступных Форматов для отображения отрицательных значений. для формата Дата можно выбрать один из доступных форматов представления дат: 15.4, 15.4.06, 15.04.06, 15.4.2006, 15.4.06 0:00, 15.4.06 12:00 AM, A, апреля 15 2006, 15-апр, 15-апр-06, апр-06, Апрель-06, A-06, 06-апр, 15-апр-2006, 2006-апр-15, 06-апр-15, 15.апр, 15.апр.06, апр.06, Апрель.06, А.06, 06.апр, 15.апр.2006, 2006.апр.15, 06.апр.15, 15 апр, 15 апр 06, апр 06, Апрель 06, А 06, 06 апр, 15 апр 2006, 2006 апр 15, 06 апр 15, 06.4.15, 06.04.15, 2006.4.15. для формата Время можно выбрать один из доступных форматов представления времени: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57,6, 36:48:58. для Дробного формата можно выбрать один из доступных форматов: До одной цифры (1/3), До двух цифр (12/25), До трех цифр (131/135), Половинными долями (1/2), Четвертыми долями (2/4), Восьмыми долями (4/8), Шестнадцатыми долями (8/16), Десятыми долями (5/10), Сотыми долями (50/100). нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения." + "body": "Применение числового формата Можно легко изменить числовой формат, то есть то, каким образом выглядят введенные числа в электронной таблице. Для этого: выделите ячейку, диапазон ячеек мышью или весь рабочий лист, нажав сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, Примечание: можно также выделить несколько ячеек или диапазонов ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживая клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. разверните список Числовой формат , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните по выделенным ячейкам правой кнопкой мыши и используйте пункт контекстного меню Числовой формат. Выберите формат представления чисел, который надо применить: Общий - используется для отображения введенных данных как обычных чисел, самым компактным образом без дополнительных знаков, Числовой - используется для отображения чисел с 0-30 знаками после десятичной запятой, где между каждой группой из трех цифр перед десятичной запятой вставляется разделитель тысяч, Научный (экспоненциальный) - используется для представления очень длинных чисел за счет преобразования в строку типа d.dddE+ddd или d.dddE-ddd, где каждый символ d обозначает цифру от 0 до 9, Финансовый - используется для отображения денежных значений с используемым по умолчанию обозначением денежной единицы и двумя десятичными знаками. Чтобы применить другое обозначение денежной единицы или количество десятичных знаков, следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям. В отличие от Денежного формата, в Финансовом формате обозначения денежной единицы выравниваются по левому краю ячейки, нулевые значения представляются как тире, а отрицательные значения отображаются в скобках. Примечание: чтобы быстро применить к выделенным данным Финансовый формат, можно также щелкнуть по значку Финансовый формат на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов и выбрать нужное обозначение денежной единицы: $ Доллар, € Евро, £ Фунт, ₽ Рубль, ¥ Йена, kn Хорватская куна. Денежный - используется для отображения денежных значений с используемым по умолчанию обозначением денежной единицы и двумя десятичными знаками. Чтобы применить другое обозначение денежной единицы или количество десятичных знаков, следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям. В отличие от Финансового формата, в Денежном формате обозначение денежной единицы помещается непосредственно рядом с числом, а отрицательные значения отображаются с отрицательным знаком (-). Краткий формат даты - используется для отображения даты в формате ДД.ММ.ГГГГ, Длинный формат даты - используется для отображения даты в формате ДД.месяц в полном формате.ГГГГ, Дата - используется для отображения дат, Время - используется для отображения времени, Процентный - используется для отображения данных в виде процентов со знаком процента %, Примечание: чтобы быстро применить к данным процентный формат, можно также использовать значок Процентный формат на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Дробный - используется для отображения чисел в виде обыкновенных, а не десятичных дробей. Текстовый - используется для отображения числовых значений, при котором они рассматриваются как обычный текст, с максимально доступной точностью. Другие форматы - используется для настройки уже примененных числовых форматов с указанием дополнительных параметров (см. описание ниже). Особый - используется для создания собственного формата: выберите ячейку, диапазон ячеек или весь лист для значений, которые вы хотите отформатировать, выберите пункт Особый в меню Другие форматы, введите требуемые коды и проверьте результат в области предварительного просмотра или выберите один из шаблонов и / или объедините их. Если вы хотите создать формат на основе существующего, сначала примените существующий формат, а затем отредактируйте коды по своему усмотрению, нажмите OK. при необходимости измените количество десятичных разрядов: используйте значок Увеличить разрядность , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы увеличить количество знаков, отображаемых после десятичной запятой, используйте значок Уменьшить разрядность , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы уменьшить количество знаков, отображаемых после десятичной запятой. Примечание: чтобы изменить числовой формат, можно также использовать сочетания клавиш. Настройка числового формата Настроить числовой формат можно следующим образом: выделите ячейки, для которых требуется настроить числовой формат, разверните список Числовой формат , расположенный на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, или щелкните по выделенным ячейкам правой кнопкой мыши и используйте пункт контекстного меню Числовой формат, выберите опцию Другие форматы, в открывшемся окне Числовой формат настройте доступные параметры. Опции различаются в зависимости от того, какой числовой формат применен к выделенным ячейкам. Чтобы изменить числовой формат, можно использовать список Категория. для Числового формата можно задать количество Десятичных знаков, указать, надо ли Использовать разделитель разрядов, и выбрать один из доступных Форматов для отображения отрицательных значений. для Научного и Процентного форматов, можно задать количество Десятичных знаков. для Финансового и Денежного форматов, можно задать количество Десятичных знаков, выбрать одно из доступных Обозначений денежных единиц и один из доступных Форматов для отображения отрицательных значений. для формата Дата можно выбрать один из доступных форматов представления дат: 15.4, 15.4.06, 15.04.06, 15.4.2006, 15.4.06 0:00, 15.4.06 12:00 AM, A, апреля 15 2006, 15-апр, 15-апр-06, апр-06, Апрель-06, A-06, 06-апр, 15-апр-2006, 2006-апр-15, 06-апр-15, 15.апр, 15.апр.06, апр.06, Апрель.06, А.06, 06.апр, 15.апр.2006, 2006.апр.15, 06.апр.15, 15 апр, 15 апр 06, апр 06, Апрель 06, А 06, 06 апр, 15 апр 2006, 2006 апр 15, 06 апр 15, 06.4.15, 06.04.15, 2006.4.15. для формата Время можно выбрать один из доступных форматов представления времени: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57,6, 36:48:58. для Дробного формата можно выбрать один из доступных форматов: До одной цифры (1/3), До двух цифр (12/25), До трех цифр (131/135), Половинными долями (1/2), Четвертыми долями (2/4), Восьмыми долями (4/8), Шестнадцатыми долями (8/16), Десятыми долями (5/10), Сотыми долями (50/100). нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm", @@ -2535,10 +2560,15 @@ var indexes = "title": "Проверка данных", "body": "Редактор электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE предоставляет функцию Проверка данных, которая позволяет настраивать параметры данных, вводимые в ячейки. Чтобы получить доступ к функции проверки данных, выберите ячейку, диапазон ячеек или всю электронную таблицу, к которой вы хотите применить эту функцию, на верхней панели инструментов перейдите на вкладку Данные и нажмите кнопку Проверка данных. Открытое окно Проверка данных содержит три вкладки: Настройки, Подсказка по вводу и Сообщение об ошибке. Настройки На вкладке Настройки вы можете указать тип данных, которые можно вводить: Примечание: Установите флажок Распространить изменения на все другие ячейки с тем же условием, чтобы использовать те же настройки для выбранного диапазона ячеек или всего листа. выберите нужный вариант в выпадающем списке Разрешить: Любое значение: без ограничений по типу данных. Целое число: разрешены только целые числа. Десятичное число: разрешены только числа с десятичной запятой. Список: разрешены только варианты из выпадающего списка, который вы создали. Снимите флажок Показывать раскрывающийся список в ячейке, чтобы скрыть стрелку раскрывающегося списка. Дата: разрешены только ячейки с форматом даты. Время: разрешены только ячейки с форматом времени. Длина текста: устанавливает лимит символов. Другое: устанавливает желаемый параметр проверки, заданный в виде формулы. Примечание: Установите флажок Распространить изменения на все другие ячейки с тем же условием, чтобы использовать те же настройки для выбранного диапазона ячеек или всего листа. укажите условие проверки в выпадающем списке Данные: между: данные в ячейках должны быть в пределах диапазона, установленного правилом проверки. не между: данные в ячейках не должны находиться в пределах диапазона, установленного правилом проверки. равно: данные в ячейках должны быть равны значению, установленному правилом проверки. не равно: данные в ячейках не должны быть равны значению, установленному правилом проверки. больше: данные в ячейках должны превышать значения, установленные правилом проверки. меньше: данные в ячейках должны быть меньше значений, установленных правилом проверки. больше или равно: данные в ячейках должны быть больше или равны значению, установленному правилом проверки. меньше или равно: данные в ячейках должны быть меньше или равны значению, установленному правилом проверки. создайте правило проверки в зависимости от разрешенного типа данных: Условие проверки Правило проверки Описание Доступно Между / не между Минимум / Максимум Устанавливает диапазон значений Целое число / Десятичное число / Длина текста Дата начала / Дата окончания Устанавливает диапазон дат Дата Время начала / Время окончание Устанавливает временной диапазон Время Равно / не равно Сравнение Устанавливает значение для сравнения Целое число / Десятичное число Дата Устанавливает дату для сравнения Дата Пройденное время Устанавливает время для сравнения Время Длина Устанавливает значение длины текста для сравнения Длина текста Больше / больше или равно Минимум Устанавливает нижний предел Целое число / Десятичное число / Длина текста Дата начала Устанавливает дату начала Дата Время начала Устанавливает время начала Время Меньше / меньше или равно Максимум Устанавливает верхний предел Целое число / Десятичное число / Длина текста Дата окончания Устанавливает дату окончания Время Дата окончания Устанавливает дату окончания Время А также: Источник: укажите ячейку или диапазон ячеек данных для типа данных Список. Формула: введите требуемую формулу или ячейку, содержащую формулу, чтобы создать настраиваемое правило проверки для типа данных Другое. Подсказка по вводу Вкладка Подсказка по вводу позволяет создавать настраиваемое сообщение, отображаемое при наведении курсором мыши на ячейку. Укажите Заголовок и текст вашей Подсказки по вводу. Уберите флажок с Отображать подсказку, если ячейка является текущей, чтобы отключить отображение сообщения. Оставьте его, чтобы отображать сообщение. Сообщение об ошибке Вкладка Сообщение об ошибке позволяет указать, какое сообщение будет отображаться, когда данные, введенные пользователями, не соответствуют правилам проверки. Стиль: выберите одну из доступных опций оповещения: Стоп, Предупреждение или Сообщение. Заголовок: укажите заголовок сообщения об ошибке. Сообщение об ошибке: введите текст сообщения об ошибке. Снимите флажок с Выводить сообщение об ошибке, чтобы отключить отображение сообщения об ошибке." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", + "title": "Рисование от руки на таблице", + "body": "В Редакторе таблиц, вы можете использовать вкладку Рисование, чтобы выделять в таблице текст маркером, рисовать от руки, добавлять рукописные заметки и стирать их. Чтобы начать рисовать, писать или выделять текст, нажмите значок Ручка или Маркер и перемещайте курсор. Щелкните стрелку раскрывающегося списка, чтобы настроить цвет и толщину обводки. Нажмите Другие цвета, если нужного цвета нет в палитре. Когда вы закончите рисовать, писать или выделять, снова щелкните значок Ручка или Маркер или нажмите клавишу Esc. Щелкните на Ластик и перемещайте курсор вперед и назад, чтобы стереть рисунок. Ластик удаляет только весь рисунок. Используйте функцию Выделить, чтобы выбрать надпись или рисунок. После выбора вы можете изменить размер или удалить выбранный элемент." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm", "title": "Настройка типа, размера, стиля и цветов шрифта", - "body": "Можно выбрать тип шрифта и его размер, применить один из стилей оформления и изменить цвета шрифта и фона, используя соответствующие значки, расположенные на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Примечание: если необходимо применить форматирование к данным, которые уже есть в электронной таблице, выделите их мышью или с помощью клавиатуры, а затем примените форматирование. Если форматирование требуется применить к нескольким ячейкам или диапазонам ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. Шрифт Используется для выбора шрифта из списка доступных. Если требуемый шрифт отсутствует в списке, его можно скачать и установить в вашей операционной системе, после чего он будет доступен для использования в десктопной версии. Размер шрифта Используется для выбора предустановленного значения размера шрифта из выпадающего списка (доступны следующие стандартные значения: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 и 96). Также можно вручную ввести произвольное значение до 409 пунктов в поле ввода и нажать клавишу Enter. Увеличить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт крупнее при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Уменьшить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт мельче при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Полужирный Используется для придания шрифту большей насыщенности. Курсив Используется для придания шрифту наклона вправо. Подчеркнутый Используется для подчеркивания текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачёркнутый Используется для зачёркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Подстрочные/надстрочные знаки Позволяет выбрать опцию Надстрочные знаки или Подстрочные знаки. Опция Надстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Опция Подстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Цвет шрифта Используется для изменения цвета букв/символов в ячейках. Цвет заливки Используется для изменения цвета заливки ячейки. С помощью этого значка можно применить заливку сплошным цветом. Цвет заливки ячейки также можно изменить с помощью палитры Заливка на вкладке Параметры ячейки правой боковой панели. Изменение цветовой схемы Используется для изменения цветовой палитры по умолчанию для элементов рабочего листа (шрифт, фон, диаграммы и их элементы) путем выбора одной из доступных схем: Новая офисная, Стандартная, Оттенки серого, Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская или Яркая. Примечание: можно также применить один из предустановленных стилей форматирования текста. Для этого выделите ячейку, которую требуется отформатировать, и выберите нужную предустановку из списка на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов: Чтобы изменить цвет шрифта или использовать заливку сплошным цветом в качестве фона ячейки, выделите мышью символы/ячейки или весь рабочий лист, используя сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, щелкните по соответствующему значку на верхней панели инструментов, выберите любой цвет на доступных палитрах Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к тексту и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет. Чтобы очистить цвет фона определенной ячейки, выделите мышью ячейку или диапазон ячеек, или весь рабочий лист с помощью сочетания клавиш Ctrl+A, нажмите на значок Цвет заливки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите значок ." + "body": "Можно выбрать тип шрифта и его размер, применить один из стилей оформления и изменить цвета шрифта и фона, используя соответствующие значки, расположенные на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Примечание: если необходимо применить форматирование к данным, которые уже есть в электронной таблице, выделите их мышью или с помощью клавиатуры, а затем примените форматирование. Если форматирование требуется применить к нескольким ячейкам или диапазонам ячеек, которые не являются смежными, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl при выделении ячеек и диапазонов с помощью мыши. Шрифт Используется для выбора шрифта из списка доступных. Если требуемый шрифт отсутствует в списке, его можно скачать и установить в вашей операционной системе, после чего он будет доступен для использования в десктопной версии. Размер шрифта Используется для выбора предустановленного значения размера шрифта из выпадающего списка (доступны следующие стандартные значения: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 и 96). Также можно вручную ввести произвольное значение до 409 пунктов в поле ввода и нажать клавишу Enter. Увеличить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт крупнее при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Уменьшить размер шрифта Используется для изменения размера шрифта, делая его на один пункт мельче при каждом нажатии на кнопку. Изменить регистр Используется для изменения регистра шрифта. Как в предложениях. - регистр совпадает с обычным предложением. нижнеий регистр - все буквы маленькие. ВЕРХНИЙ РЕГИСТР - все буквы прописные. Каждое Слово С Прописной - каждое слово начинается с заглавной буквы. иЗМЕНИТЬ рЕГИСТР - поменять регистр выделенного текста или слова, в котором находится курсор мыши. Полужирный Используется для придания шрифту большей насыщенности. Курсив Используется для придания шрифту наклона вправо. Подчеркнутый Используется для подчеркивания текста чертой, проведенной под буквами. Зачёркнутый Используется для зачёркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Подстрочные/надстрочные знаки Позволяет выбрать опцию Надстрочные знаки или Подстрочные знаки. Опция Надстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Опция Подстрочные знаки используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Цвет шрифта Используется для изменения цвета букв/символов в ячейках. Цвет заливки Используется для изменения цвета заливки ячейки. С помощью этого значка можно применить заливку сплошным цветом. Цвет заливки ячейки также можно изменить с помощью палитры Заливка на вкладке Параметры ячейки правой боковой панели. Изменение цветовой схемы Используется для изменения цветовой палитры по умолчанию для элементов рабочего листа (шрифт, фон, диаграммы и их элементы) путем выбора одной из доступных схем: Новая офисная, Стандартная, Оттенки серого, Апекс, Аспект, Официальная, Открытая, Справедливость, Поток, Литейная, Обычная, Метро, Модульная, Изящная, Эркер, Начальная, Бумажная, Солнцестояние, Техническая, Трек, Городская или Яркая. Примечание: можно также применить один из предустановленных стилей форматирования текста. Для этого выделите ячейку, которую требуется отформатировать, и выберите нужную предустановку из списка на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов: Чтобы изменить цвет шрифта или использовать заливку сплошным цветом в качестве фона ячейки, выделите мышью символы/ячейки или весь рабочий лист, используя сочетание клавиш Ctrl+A, щелкните по соответствующему значку на верхней панели инструментов, выберите любой цвет на доступных палитрах Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Вы также можете применить пользовательский цвет, используя следующие варианты:: Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в таблице. Другие цвета - щелкните по этой надписи, если на доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предварительного просмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить: Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Недавние цвета. Чтобы очистить цвет фона определенной ячейки, выделите мышью ячейку или диапазон ячеек, или весь рабочий лист с помощью сочетания клавиш Ctrl+A, нажмите на значок Цвет заливки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, выберите значок ." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm", @@ -2553,17 +2583,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm", "title": "Вставка формул массива", - "body": "Редактор электронных таблиц позволяет использовать формулы массива. Формулы массива обеспечивают согласованность формул в электронной таблице, так как вместо нескольких обычных формул можно ввести одну формулу массива. Формула массива упрощает работу с большим объемом данных, предоставляет возможность быстро заполнить лист данными и многое другое. Вы можете вводить формулы и встроенные функции в качестве формулы массива, чтобы: выполнять несколько вычислений одновременно и отображать один результат, или возвращать диапазон значений, отображаемых в нескольких строках и/или столбцах. Существуют специально назначенные функции, которые могут возвращать несколько значений. Если ввести их, нажав клавишу Enter, они вернут одно значение. Если выбрать выходной диапазон ячеек для отображения результатов, а затем ввести функцию, нажав Ctrl + Shift + Enter, будет возвращен диапазон значений (количество возвращаемых значений зависит от размера ранее выбранного диапазона). Список ниже содержит ссылки на подробные описания этих функций. Формулы массива ВЗЯТЬ ВСТОЛБИК ВЫБОРСТОЛБЦ ВЫБОРСТРОК ГИПЕРССЫЛКА ГСТОЛБИК ДВССЫЛ ЕФОРМУЛА ИНДЕКС ЛГРФПРИБЛ ЛИНЕЙН МЕДИН МОБР МУМНОЖ ПОСТОЛБЦ ПОСТРОК ПРОСМОТРX РОСТ СБРОСИТЬ СВЕРНСТОЛБЦ СВЕРНСТРОК СЛУЧМАССИВ СМЕЩ СТОЛБЕЦ СТРОКА ТЕКСТРАЗД ТЕНДЕНЦИЯ ТРАНСП УНИК Ф.ТЕКСТ ЧАСТОТА ЯЧЕЙКА Вставка формул массива Чтобы вставить формулу массива, Выберите диапазон ячеек, в которых вы хотите отобразить результаты. Введите формулу, которую вы хотите использовать, в строке формул и укажите необходимые аргументы в круглых скобках (). Нажмите комбинацию клавиш Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Результаты будут отображаться в выбранном диапазоне ячеек, а формула в строке формул будет автоматически заключена в фигурные скобки { }, чтобы указать, что это формула массива. Например, {=УНИК(B2:D6)}. Эти фигурные скобки нельзя вводить вручную. Создание формулы массива в одной ячейке В следующем примере показан результат формулы массива, отображаемый в одной ячейке. Выберите ячейку, введите =СУММ(C2:C11*D2:D11) и нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Создание формулы массива в нескольких ячейках В следующем примере показаны результаты формулы массива, отображаемые в диапазоне ячеек. Выберите диапазон ячеек, введите =C2:C11*D2:D11 и нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Редактирование формулы массива Каждый раз, когда вы редактируете введенную формулу массива (например, меняете аргументы), вам нужно нажимать комбинацию клавиш Ctrl + Shift + Enter, чтобы сохранить изменения. В следующем примере показано, как расширить формулу массива с несколькими ячейками при добавлении новых данных. Выделите все ячейки, содержащие формулу массива, а также пустые ячейки рядом с новыми данными, отредактируйте аргументы в строке формул, чтобы они включали новые данные, и нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Если вы хотите применить формулу массива с несколькими ячейками к меньшему диапазону ячеек, вам нужно удалить текущую формулу массива, а затем ввести новую формулу массива. Часть массива нельзя изменить или удалить. Если вы попытаетесь изменить, переместить или удалить одну ячейку в массиве или вставить новую ячейку в массив, вы получите следующее предупреждение: Нельзя изменить часть массива. Чтобы удалить формулу массива, выделите все ячейки, содержащие формулу массива, и нажмите клавишу Delete. Либо выберите формулу массива в строке формул, нажмите Delete, а затем нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Примеры использования формулы массива В этом разделе приведены некоторые примеры того, как использовать формулы массива для выполнения определенных задач. Подсчет количества символов в диапазоне ячеек Вы можете использовать следующую формулу массива, заменив диапазон ячеек в аргументе на свой собственный: =СУММ(ДЛСТР(B2:B11)). Функция ДЛСТР вычисляет длину каждой текстовой строки в диапазоне ячеек. Функция СУММ складывает значения. Чтобы получить среднее количество символов, замените СУММ на СРЗНАЧ. Нахождение самой длинной строки в диапазоне ячеек Вы можете использовать следующую формулу массива, заменив диапазоны ячеек в аргументе на свои собственные: =ИНДЕКС(B2:B11,ПОИСКПОЗ(МАКС(ДЛСТР(B2:B11)),ДЛСТР(B2:B11),0),1). Функция ДЛСТР вычисляет длину каждой текстовой строки в диапазоне ячеек. Функция МАКС вычисляет наибольшее значение. Функция ПОИСКПОЗ находит адрес ячейки с самой длинной строкой. Функция ИНДЕКС возвращает значение из найденной ячейки. Чтобы найти кратчайшую строку, замените МАКС на МИН. Сумма значений на основе условий Чтобы суммировать значения больше указанного числа (2 в этом примере), вы можете использовать следующую формулу массива, заменив диапазоны ячеек в аргументах своими собственными: =СУММ(ЕСЛИ(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). Функция ЕСЛИ создает массив истинных и ложных значений. Функция СУММ игнорирует ложные значения и складывает истинные значения вместе." + "body": "Редактор электронных таблиц позволяет использовать формулы массива. Формулы массива обеспечивают согласованность формул в электронной таблице, так как вместо нескольких обычных формул можно ввести одну формулу массива. Формула массива упрощает работу с большим объемом данных, предоставляет возможность быстро заполнить лист данными и многое другое. Вы можете вводить формулы и встроенные функции в качестве формулы массива, чтобы: выполнять несколько вычислений одновременно и отображать один результат, или возвращать диапазон значений, отображаемых в нескольких строках и/или столбцах. Существуют специально назначенные функции, которые могут возвращать несколько значений. Если ввести их, нажав клавишу Enter, они вернут одно значение. Если выбрать выходной диапазон ячеек для отображения результатов, а затем ввести функцию, нажав Ctrl + Shift + Enter, будет возвращен диапазон значений (количество возвращаемых значений зависит от размера ранее выбранного диапазона). Список ниже содержит ссылки на подробные описания этих функций. Формулы массива ВЗЯТЬ ВСТОЛБИК ВЫБОРСТОЛБЦ ВЫБОРСТРОК ГИПЕРССЫЛКА ГСТОЛБИК ДВССЫЛ ЕФОРМУЛА ИНДЕКС ЛГРФПРИБЛ ЛИНЕЙН МЕДИН МОБР МУМНОЖ ПОСТОЛБЦ ПОСТРОК ПРОСМОТРX РАЗВЕРНУТЬ РОСТ СБРОСИТЬ СВЕРНСТОЛБЦ СВЕРНСТРОК СЛУЧМАССИВ СМЕЩ СОРТ СТОЛБЕЦ СТРОКА ТЕКСТРАЗД ТЕНДЕНЦИЯ ТРАНСП УНИК Ф.ТЕКСТ ЧАСТОТА ЯЧЕЙКА Вставка формул массива Чтобы вставить формулу массива, Выберите диапазон ячеек, в которых вы хотите отобразить результаты. Введите формулу, которую вы хотите использовать, в строке формул и укажите необходимые аргументы в круглых скобках (). Нажмите комбинацию клавиш Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Результаты будут отображаться в выбранном диапазоне ячеек, а формула в строке формул будет автоматически заключена в фигурные скобки { }, чтобы указать, что это формула массива. Например, {=УНИК(B2:D6)}. Эти фигурные скобки нельзя вводить вручную. Создание формулы массива в одной ячейке В следующем примере показан результат формулы массива, отображаемый в одной ячейке. Выберите ячейку, введите =СУММ(C2:C11*D2:D11) и нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Создание формулы массива в нескольких ячейках В следующем примере показаны результаты формулы массива, отображаемые в диапазоне ячеек. Выберите диапазон ячеек, введите =C2:C11*D2:D11 и нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Редактирование формулы массива Каждый раз, когда вы редактируете введенную формулу массива (например, меняете аргументы), вам нужно нажимать комбинацию клавиш Ctrl + Shift + Enter, чтобы сохранить изменения. В следующем примере показано, как расширить формулу массива с несколькими ячейками при добавлении новых данных. Выделите все ячейки, содержащие формулу массива, а также пустые ячейки рядом с новыми данными, отредактируйте аргументы в строке формул, чтобы они включали новые данные, и нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Если вы хотите применить формулу массива с несколькими ячейками к меньшему диапазону ячеек, вам нужно удалить текущую формулу массива, а затем ввести новую формулу массива. Часть массива нельзя изменить или удалить. Если вы попытаетесь изменить, переместить или удалить одну ячейку в массиве или вставить новую ячейку в массив, вы получите следующее предупреждение: Нельзя изменить часть массива. Чтобы удалить формулу массива, выделите все ячейки, содержащие формулу массива, и нажмите клавишу Delete. Либо выберите формулу массива в строке формул, нажмите Delete, а затем нажмите Ctrl + Shift + Enter. Примеры использования формулы массива В этом разделе приведены некоторые примеры того, как использовать формулы массива для выполнения определенных задач. Подсчет количества символов в диапазоне ячеек Вы можете использовать следующую формулу массива, заменив диапазон ячеек в аргументе на свой собственный: =СУММ(ДЛСТР(B2:B11)). Функция ДЛСТР вычисляет длину каждой текстовой строки в диапазоне ячеек. Функция СУММ складывает значения. Чтобы получить среднее количество символов, замените СУММ на СРЗНАЧ. Нахождение самой длинной строки в диапазоне ячеек Вы можете использовать следующую формулу массива, заменив диапазоны ячеек в аргументе на свои собственные: =ИНДЕКС(B2:B11,ПОИСКПОЗ(МАКС(ДЛСТР(B2:B11)),ДЛСТР(B2:B11),0),1). Функция ДЛСТР вычисляет длину каждой текстовой строки в диапазоне ячеек. Функция МАКС вычисляет наибольшее значение. Функция ПОИСКПОЗ находит адрес ячейки с самой длинной строкой. Функция ИНДЕКС возвращает значение из найденной ячейки. Чтобы найти кратчайшую строку, замените МАКС на МИН. Сумма значений на основе условий Чтобы суммировать значения больше указанного числа (2 в этом примере), вы можете использовать следующую формулу массива, заменив диапазоны ячеек в аргументах своими собственными: =СУММ(ЕСЛИ(C2:C11>2,C2:C11)). Функция ЕСЛИ создает массив истинных и ложных значений. Функция СУММ игнорирует ложные значения и складывает истинные значения вместе." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Вставка и форматирование автофигур", - "body": "Вставка автофигур Для добавления автофигуры в электронную таблицу, перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Последние использованные, Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии, щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы, установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, после того как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и местоположение и другие параметры. Изменение параметров автофигуры Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее открыть, выделите фигуру мышью и щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить. Пользовательский цвет будет применен к автофигуре и добавлен в палитру Пользовательский цвет. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно нажать кнопку Выбрать изображение и добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, Из хранилища, используя файловый менеджер ONLYOFFICE, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес. Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз) Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью. Изменение дополнительныx параметров автофигуры Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, используйте ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры': Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры: Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими. Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными. Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными. Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: Закругленный - угол будет закругленным. Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось. Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами. Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины. Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков. На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст, Разрешить переполнение фигуры текстом или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры). Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна. На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер фигуры также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера фигуры. Если ячейка перемещается, фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры фигуры останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера фигуры при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит автофигура. Вставка и форматирование текста внутри автофигуры Чтобы вставить текст в автофигуру, выделите фигуру и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней). Все параметры форматирования, которые можно применить к тексту в автофигуре, перечислены здесь. Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого: щелкните по значку Фигура на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите в меню группу Линии, щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма), наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения , появившихся на контуре фигуры, перетащите указатель мыши ко второй фигуре и щелкните по нужной точке соединения на ее контуре. При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними. Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения. Назначение макроса к фигуре Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любой фигуре. После назначения макроса, фигура отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на фигуру. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по фигуре и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК." + "body": "Вставка автофигур Для добавления автофигуры в электронную таблицу, перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, щелкните по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов, выберите одну из доступных групп автофигур: Последние использованные, Основные фигуры, Фигурные стрелки, Математические знаки, Схемы, Звезды и ленты, Выноски, Кнопки, Прямоугольники, Линии, щелкните по нужной автофигуре внутри выбранной группы, установите курсор там, где требуется поместить автофигуру, после того как автофигура будет добавлена, можно изменить ее размер и местоположение и другие параметры. Вы можете сохранить автофигуру как изображение на жестком диске с помощью пункта Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Копирование форматирования стиля автофигуры Чтобы скопировать определенное форматирование стиля автофигуры, выберите автофигуру, форматирование которой нужно скопировать, и с помощью мыши или клавиатуры, щелкните значок Копировать стиль на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов (указатель мыши будет выглядеть следующим образом ), выберите нужную автофигуру, чтобы применить такое же форматирование. Изменение параметров автофигуры Некоторые параметры автофигуры можно изменить с помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее открыть, выделите фигуру мышью и щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры справа. Здесь можно изменить следующие свойства: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку автофигуры. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранной фигуры. Нажмите на цветной прямоугольник, расположенный ниже, и выберите нужный цвет из доступных наборов цветов или задайте любой цвет, который вам нравится: Цвета темы - цвета, соответствующие выбранной цветовой схеме электронной таблицы. Стандартные цвета - набор стандартных цветов. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Пипетка - используйте эту опцию, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет, щелкнув по нему в таблице. Пользовательский цвет - щелкните по этой надписи, если в доступных палитрах нет нужного цвета. Выберите нужный цветовой диапазон, перемещая вертикальный ползунок цвета, и определите конкретный цвет, перетаскивая инструмент для выбора цвета внутри большого квадратного цветового поля. Как только Вы выберете какой-то цвет, в полях справа отобразятся соответствующие цветовые значения RGB и sRGB. Также можно задать цвет на базе цветовой модели RGB, введя нужные числовые значения в полях R, G, B (красный, зеленый, синий), или указать шестнадцатеричный код sRGB в поле, отмеченном знаком #. Выбранный цвет появится в окне предпросмотра Новый. Если к объекту был ранее применен какой-то пользовательский цвет, этот цвет отображается в окне Текущий, так что вы можете сравнить исходный и измененный цвета. Когда цвет будет задан, нажмите на кнопку Добавить. Пользовательский цвет будет применен к выбранному элементу и добавлен в палитру Недавние цвета. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона фигуры какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если Вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона фигуры, можно нажать кнопку Выбрать изображение и добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, Из хранилища, используя файловый менеджер ONLYOFFICE, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес. Если Вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона фигуры, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем автофигура, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади автофигуры, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить фигуру с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если Вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Непрозрачность - используйте этот раздел, чтобы задать уровень Непрозрачности, перетаскивая ползунок или вручную вводя значение в процентах. Значение, заданное по умолчанию, составляет 100%. Оно соответствует полной непрозрачности. Значение 0% соответствует полной прозрачности. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Поворот - используется, чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке или против часовой стрелки, а также чтобы отразить фигуру слева направо или сверху вниз. Нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть фигуру на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз) Изменить автофигуру - используйте этот раздел, чтобы заменить текущую автофигуру на другую, выбрав ее из выпадающего списка. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать фигуру с тенью. Изменение дополнительныx параметров автофигуры Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры автофигуры, используйте ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Фигура - дополнительные параметры': Вкладка Размер содержит следующие параметры: Ширина и Высота - используйте эти опции, чтобы изменить ширину и/или высоту автофигуры. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон фигуры. Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть фигуру на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить фигуру по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить фигуру по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Линии и стрелки содержит следующие параметры: Стиль линии - эта группа опций позволяет задать такие параметры: Тип окончания - эта опция позволяет задать стиль окончания линии, поэтому ее можно применить только для фигур с разомкнутым контуром, таких как линии, ломаные линии и т.д.: Плоский - конечные точки будут плоскими. Закругленный - конечные точки будут закругленными. Квадратный - конечные точки будут квадратными. Тип соединения - эта опция позволяет задать стиль пересечения двух линий, например, она может повлиять на контур ломаной линии или углов треугольника или прямоугольника: Закругленный - угол будет закругленным. Скошенный - угол будет срезан наискось. Прямой - угол будет заостренным. Хорошо подходит для фигур с острыми углами. Примечание: эффект будет лучше заметен при использовании контура большей толщины. Стрелки - эта группа опций доступна только в том случае, если выбрана фигура из группы автофигур Линии. Она позволяет задать Начальный и Конечный стиль и Размер стрелки, выбрав соответствующие опции из выпадающих списков. На вкладке Текстовое поле можно Подгонять размер фигуры под текст, Разрешить переполнение фигуры текстом или изменить внутренние поля автофигуры Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа (то есть расстояние между текстом внутри фигуры и границами автофигуры). Примечание: эта вкладка доступна, только если в автофигуру добавлен текст, в противном случае вкладка неактивна. На вкладке Колонки можно добавить колонки текста внутри автофигуры, указав нужное Количество колонок (не более 16) и Интервал между колонками. После того как вы нажмете кнопку ОК, уже имеющийся текст или любой другой текст, который вы введете, в этой автофигуре будет представлен в виде колонок и будет перетекать из одной колонки в другую. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер фигуры также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать фигуру к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера фигуры. Если ячейка перемещается, фигура будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры фигуры останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера фигуры при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит автофигура. Вставка и форматирование текста внутри автофигуры Чтобы вставить текст в автофигуру, выделите фигуру и начинайте печатать текст. Текст, добавленный таким способом, становится частью автофигуры (при перемещении или повороте автофигуры текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ней). Все параметры форматирования, которые можно применить к тексту в автофигуре, перечислены здесь. Соединение автофигур с помощью соединительных линий Автофигуры можно соединять, используя линии с точками соединения, чтобы продемонстрировать зависимости между объектами (например, если вы хотите создать блок-схему). Для этого: щелкните по значку Фигура на вкладке Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите в меню группу Линии, щелкните по нужной фигуре в выбранной группе (кроме трех последних фигур, которые не являются соединительными линиями, а именно Кривая, Рисованная кривая и Произвольная форма), наведите указатель мыши на первую автофигуру и щелкните по одной из точек соединения , появившихся на контуре фигуры, перетащите указатель мыши ко второй фигуре и щелкните по нужной точке соединения на ее контуре. При перемещении соединенных автофигур соединительная линия остается прикрепленной к фигурам и перемещается вместе с ними. Можно также открепить соединительную линию от фигур, а затем прикрепить ее к любым другим точкам соединения. Назначение макроса к фигуре Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любой фигуре. После назначения макроса, фигура отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на фигуру. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по фигуре и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm", "title": "Вставка диаграмм", - "body": "Вставка диаграммы Для вставки диаграммы в электронную таблицу: Выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих данные, которые необходимо использовать для диаграммы. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов. Щелкните по значку Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: Гистограмма Гистограмма с группировкой Гистограмма с накоплением Нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма с группировкой Трехмерная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма График График График с накоплением Нормированный график с накоплением График с маркерами График с накоплениями с маркерами Нормированный график с маркерами и накоплением Трехмерный график Круговая Круговая Кольцевая диаграмма Трехмерная круговая диаграмма Линейчатая Линейчатая с группировкой Линейчатая с накоплением Нормированная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная линейчатая с группировкой Трехмерная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная линейчатая с накоплением С областями С областями Диаграмма с областями с накоплением Нормированная с областями и накоплением Биржевая Точечная Точечная диаграмма Точечная с гладкими кривыми и маркерами Точечная с гладкими кривыми Точечная с прямыми отрезками и маркерами Точечная с прямыми отрезками Комбинированные Гистограмма с группировкой и график Гистограмма с группировкой и график на вспомогательной оси С областями с накоплением и гистограмма с группировкой Пользовательская комбинация После этого диаграмма будет добавлена на рабочий лист. Примечание: Редактор электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм. Изменение параметров диаграммы Теперь можно изменить параметры вставленной диаграммы. Чтобы изменить тип диаграммы: Выделите диаграмму мышью. Щелкните по значку Параметры диаграммы на правой боковой панели. Раскройте выпадающий список Стиль, расположенный ниже, и выберите подходящий стиль. Раскройте выпадающий список Изменить тип и выберите нужный тип. Нажмите опцию Переключить строку/столбец, чтобы изменить расположение строк и столбцов диаграммы. Тип и стиль выбранной диаграммы будут изменены. Если требуется отредактировать данные, использованные для построения диаграммы, Нажмите кнопку Выбор данных на правой боковой панели. Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления диапазоном данных диаграммы, элементами легенды (ряды), подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и переключением строк / столбцов. Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы. Щелкните значок справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Элементы легенды (ряды) - добавляйте, редактируйте или удаляйте записи легенды. Введите или выберите ряд для записей легенды. В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить. В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку справа от поля Имя ряда. Подписи горизонтальной оси (категории) - изменяйте текст подписи категории В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать. В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Переключить строку/столбец - переставьте местами данные, которые расположены на диаграмме. Переключите строки на столбцы, чтобы данные отображались на другой оси. Нажмите кнопку ОК, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Нажмите Дополнительные параметры, чтобы изменить другие настройки, такие как Макет, Вертикальная ось, Вспомогательная вертикальная ось, Горизонтальная ось, Вспомогательная горизонтальная ось, Привязка к ячейке и Альтернативный текст. На вкладке Макет можно изменить расположение элементов диаграммы: Укажите местоположение Заголовка диаграммы относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы заголовок диаграммы не отображался, Наложение, чтобы наложить заголовок на область построения диаграммы и выровнять его по центру, Без наложения, чтобы показать заголовок над областью построения диаграммы. Укажите местоположение Условных обозначений относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы условные обозначения не отображались, Снизу, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд под областью построения диаграммы, Сверху, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд над областью построения диаграммы, Справа, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их справа от области построения диаграммы, Слева, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их слева от области построения диаграммы, Наложение слева, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру слева, Наложение справа, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру справа. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных): Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу. Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков и Линейчатых диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение, Введите символ (запятая, точка с запятой и т.д.), который вы хотите использовать для разделения нескольких подписей, в поле Разделитель подписей данных. Линии - используется для выбора типа линий для линейчатых/точечных диаграмм. Можно выбрать одну из следующих опций: Прямые для использования прямых линий между элементами данных, Сглаженные для использования сглаженных кривых линий между элементами данных или Нет для того, чтобы линии не отображались. Маркеры - используется для указания того, нужно показывать маркеры (если флажок поставлен) или нет (если флажок снят) на линейчатых/точечных диаграммах. Примечание: Опции Линии и Маркеры доступны только для Линейчатых диаграмм и Точечных диаграмм. Вкладка Вертикальная ось позволяет изменять параметры вертикальной оси, также называемой осью значений или осью Y, которая отображает числовые значения. Обратите внимание, что вертикальная ось будет осью категорий, которая отображает подпись для Гистограмм, таким образом, параметры вкладки Вертикальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в следующем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Примечание: Параметры оси и Линии сетки недоступны для круговых диаграмм, так как у круговых диаграмм нет осей и линий сетки. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть вертикальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать название вертикальной оси, Повернутое - показать название снизу вверх слева от вертикальной оси, По горизонтали - показать название по горизонтали слева от вертикальной оси. Минимум - используется для указания наименьшего значения, которое отображается в начале вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае минимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Максимум - используется для указания наибольшего значения, которое отображается в конце вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае максимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на вертикальной оси, в которой она должна пересекаться с горизонтальной осью. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимум/Максимум на вертикальной оси. Единицы отображения - используется для определения порядка числовых значений на вертикальной оси. Эта опция может пригодиться, если вы работаете с большими числами и хотите, чтобы отображение цифр на оси было более компактным и удобочитаемым (например, можно сделать так, чтобы 50 000 показывалось как 50, воспользовавшись опцией Тысячи). Выберите желаемые единицы отображения из выпадающего списка: Сотни, Тысячи, 10 000, 100 000, Миллионы, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Миллиарды, Триллионы или выберите опцию Нет, чтобы вернуться к единицам отображения по умолчанию. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения: Нет - не отображать основные/дополнительные деления, На пересечении - отображать основные/дополнительные деления по обе стороны от оси, Внутри - отображать основные/дополнительные деления внутри оси, Снаружи - отображать основные/дополнительные деления за пределами оси. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет определить положение подписей основных делений, отображающих значения. Для того чтобы задать Положение подписи относительно вертикальной оси, выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет - не отображать подписи, Ниже - показывать подписи слева от области диаграммы, Выше - показывать подписи справа от области диаграммы, Рядом с осью - показывать подписи рядом с осью. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Примечание: второстепенные оси поддерживаются только в Комбинированных диаграммах. Второстепенные оси полезны в комбинированных диаграммах, когда ряды данных значительно различаются или для построения диаграммы используются смешанные типы данных. Второстепенные оси упрощают чтение и понимание комбинированной диаграммы. Вкладка Вспомогательная вертикальная / горизонтальная ось появляется, когда вы выбираете соответствующий ряд данных для комбинированной диаграммы. Все настройки и параметры на вкладке Вспомогательная вертикальная/горизонтальная ось такие же, как настройки на вертикальной / горизонтальной оси. Подробное описание параметров Вертикальная / горизонтальная ось смотрите выше / ниже. Вкладка Горизонтальная ось позволяет изменять параметры горизонтальной оси, также называемой осью категорий или осью x, которая отображает текстовые метки. Обратите внимание, что горизонтальная ось будет осью значений, которая отображает числовые значения для Гистограмм, поэтому в этом случае параметры вкладки Горизонтальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в предыдущем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть горизонтальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать заголовок горизонтальной оси, Без наложения - отображать заголовок под горизонтальной осью, Линии сетки используется для отображения Горизонтальных линий сетки путем выбора необходимого параметра в раскрывающемся списке: Нет, Основные, Незначительное или Основные и Дополнительные. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на горизонтальной оси, в которой вертикальная ось должна пересекать ее. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Из выпадающего списка можно выбрать опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимальном/Максимальном значении на вертикальной оси. Положение оси - используется для указания места размещения подписей на оси: на Делениях или Между делениями. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения категорий в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, категории располагаются слева направо. Когда этот флажок отмечен, категории располагаются справа налево. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет определять местоположение делений на горизонтальной шкале. Деления основного типа - это более крупные деления шкалы, у которых могут быть подписи, отображающие значения категорий. Деления дополнительного типа - это более мелкие деления шкалы, которые располагаются между делениями основного типа и у которых нет подписей. Кроме того, деления шкалы указывают, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если на вкладке Макет выбрана соответствующая опция. Можно редактировать следующие параметры делений: Основной/Дополнительный тип - используется для указания следующих вариантов размещения: Нет, чтобы деления основного/дополнительного типа не отображались, На пересечении, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа по обеим сторонам оси, Внутри, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с внутренней стороны оси, Снаружи, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с наружной стороны оси. Интервал между делениями - используется для указания того, сколько категорий нужно показывать между двумя соседними делениями. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет настроить внешний вид меток, отображающих категории. Положение подписи - используется для указания того, где следует располагать подписи относительно горизонтальной оси. Выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы подписи категорий не отображались, Ниже, чтобы подписи категорий располагались снизу области диаграммы, Выше, чтобы подписи категорий располагались наверху области диаграммы, Рядом с осью, чтобы подписи категорий отображались рядом с осью. Расстояние до подписи - используется для указания того, насколько близко подписи должны располагаться от осей. Можно указать нужное значение в поле ввода. Чем это значение больше, тем дальше расположены подписи от осей. Интервал между подписями - используется для указания того, как часто нужно показывать подписи. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае подписи отображаются для каждой категории. Можно выбрать опцию Вручную и указать нужное значение в поле справа. Например, введите 2, чтобы отображать подписи у каждой второй категории, и т.д. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер диаграммы также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера диаграммы. Если ячейка перемещается, диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры диаграммы останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера диаграммы при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. Редактирование элементов диаграммы Чтобы изменить Заголовок диаграммы, выделите мышью стандартный текст и введите вместо него свой собственный. Чтобы изменить форматирование шрифта внутри текстовых элементов, таких как заголовок диаграммы, названия осей, элементы условных обозначений, подписи данных и так далее, выделите нужный текстовый элемент, щелкнув по нему левой кнопкой мыши. Затем используйте значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы изменить тип, размер, стиль или цвет шрифта. При выборе диаграммы становится также активным значок Параметры фигуры справа, так как фигура используется в качестве фона для диаграммы. Можно щелкнуть по этому значку, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели инструментов и изменить параметры Заливки и Обводки фигуры. Обратите, пожалуйста, внимание, что вы не можете изменить вид фигуры. C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина и тип линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен. Если требуется изменить размер элемента диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых маркеров , расположенных по периметру элемента. Чтобы изменить позицию элемента, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши, убедитесь, что курсор принял вид , удерживайте левую кнопку мыши и перетащите элемент в нужное место. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выделите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Можно также поворачивать 3D-диаграммы с помощью мыши. Щелкните левой кнопкой мыши внутри области построения диаграммы и удерживайте кнопку мыши. Не отпуская кнопку мыши, перетащите курсор, чтобы изменить ориентацию 3D-диаграммы. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. В случае необходимости можно изменить размер и положение диаграммы. Чтобы удалить вставленную диаграмму, щелкните по ней и нажмите клавишу Delete. Назначение макроса к диаграмме Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любой диаграмме. После назначения макроса, фигура отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на фигуру. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по диаграмме и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК. После назначения макроса, вы все еще можете выделить диаграмму для выполнения других операций. Для этого щелкните левой кнопкой мыши по поверхности диаграммы. Редактирование спарклайнов Редактор электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE поддерживает спарклайны. Спарклайн - это небольшая диаграмма, помещенная в одну ячейку. Спарклайны могут быть полезны, если требуется наглядно представить информацию для каждой строки или столбца в больших наборах данных. Чтобы узнать больше о том, как создавать и редактировать спарклайны, ознакомьтесь с нашим руководством по Вставке спарклайнов." + "body": "Вставка диаграммы Для вставки диаграммы в электронную таблицу: Выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих данные, которые необходимо использовать для диаграммы. Перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов. Щелкните по значку Диаграмма на верхней панели инструментов. Выберите из доступных типов диаграммы: Гистограмма Гистограмма с группировкой Гистограмма с накоплением Нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма с группировкой Трехмерная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная гистограмма с накоплением Трехмерная гистограмма График График График с накоплением Нормированный график с накоплением График с маркерами График с накоплениями с маркерами Нормированный график с маркерами и накоплением Трехмерный график Круговая Круговая Кольцевая диаграмма Трехмерная круговая диаграмма Линейчатая Линейчатая с группировкой Линейчатая с накоплением Нормированная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная линейчатая с группировкой Трехмерная линейчатая с накоплением Трехмерная нормированная линейчатая с накоплением С областями С областями Диаграмма с областями с накоплением Нормированная с областями и накоплением Биржевая Точечная Точечная диаграмма Точечная с гладкими кривыми и маркерами Точечная с гладкими кривыми Точечная с прямыми отрезками и маркерами Точечная с прямыми отрезками Лепестковая Лепестковая Лепестковая с маркерами Заполненная лепестковая Комбинированные Гистограмма с группировкой и график Гистограмма с группировкой и график на вспомогательной оси С областями с накоплением и гистограмма с группировкой Пользовательская комбинация После этого диаграмма будет добавлена на рабочий лист. Примечание: Редактор электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE поддерживает следующие типы диаграмм, созданных в сторонних редакторах: Пирамида, Гистограмма (пирамида), Горизонтальные/Вертикальные цилиндры, Горизонтальные/вертикальные конусы. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий такую диаграмму, и изменить его, используя доступные инструменты редактирования диаграмм. Изменение параметров диаграммы Теперь можно изменить параметры вставленной диаграммы. Чтобы изменить тип диаграммы: Выделите диаграмму мышью. Щелкните по значку Параметры диаграммы на правой боковой панели. Раскройте выпадающий список Стиль, расположенный ниже, и выберите подходящий стиль. Раскройте выпадающий список Изменить тип и выберите нужный тип. Нажмите опцию Переключить строку/столбец, чтобы изменить расположение строк и столбцов диаграммы. Тип и стиль выбранной диаграммы будут изменены. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. Если требуется отредактировать данные, использованные для построения диаграммы, Нажмите кнопку Выбор данных на правой боковой панели. Используйте диалоговое окно Данные диаграммы для управления Диапазоном данных диаграммы, Элементами легенды (ряды), Подписями горизонтальной оси (категории) и Переключением строк / столбцов. Диапазон данных для диаграммы - выберите данные для вашей диаграммы. Щелкните значок справа от поля Диапазон данных для диаграммы, чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Элементы легенды (ряды) - добавляйте, редактируйте или удаляйте записи легенды. Введите или выберите ряд для записей легенды. В Элементах легенды (ряды) нажмите кнопку Добавить. В диалоговом окне Изменить ряд выберите диапазон ячеек для легенды или нажмите на иконку справа от поля Имя ряда. Подписи горизонтальной оси (категории) - изменяйте текст подписи категории В Подписях горизонтальной оси (категории) нажмите Редактировать. В поле Диапазон подписей оси введите названия для категорий или нажмите на иконку , чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек. Переключить строку/столбец - переставьте местами данные, которые расположены на диаграмме. Переключите строки на столбцы, чтобы данные отображались на другой оси. Нажмите кнопку ОК, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Нажмите Дополнительные параметры, чтобы изменить другие настройки, такие как Макет, Вертикальная ось, Вспомогательная вертикальная ось, Горизонтальная ось, Вспомогательная горизонтальная ось, Привязка к ячейке и Альтернативный текст. На вкладке Макет можно изменить расположение элементов диаграммы: Укажите местоположение Заголовка диаграммы относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы заголовок диаграммы не отображался, Наложение, чтобы наложить заголовок на область построения диаграммы и выровнять его по центру, Без наложения, чтобы показать заголовок над областью построения диаграммы. Укажите местоположение Условных обозначений относительно диаграммы, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы условные обозначения не отображались, Снизу, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд под областью построения диаграммы, Сверху, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их в ряд над областью построения диаграммы, Справа, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их справа от области построения диаграммы, Слева, чтобы показать условные обозначения и расположить их слева от области построения диаграммы, Наложение слева, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру слева, Наложение справа, чтобы наложить условные обозначения на область построения диаграммы и выровнять их по центру справа. Определите параметры Подписей данных (то есть текстовых подписей, показывающих точные значения элементов данных): Укажите местоположение Подписей данных относительно элементов данных, выбрав нужную опцию из выпадающего списка. Доступные варианты зависят от выбранного типа диаграммы. Для Гистограмм и Линейчатых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Внутри снизу, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для Графиков и Точечных или Биржевых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, Слева, Справа, Сверху, Снизу. Для Круговых диаграмм можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру, По ширине, Внутри сверху, Снаружи сверху. Для диаграмм С областями, а также для Гистограмм, Графиков, Линейчатых, Лепестковых и Комбинированных диаграмм в формате 3D можно выбрать следующие варианты: Нет, По центру. Выберите данные, которые вы хотите включить в ваши подписи, поставив соответствующие флажки: Имя ряда, Название категории, Значение, Введите символ (запятая, точка с запятой и т.д.), который вы хотите использовать для разделения нескольких подписей, в поле Разделитель подписей данных. Линии - используется для выбора типа линий для линейчатых/точечных диаграмм. Можно выбрать одну из следующих опций: Прямые для использования прямых линий между элементами данных, Сглаженные для использования сглаженных кривых линий между элементами данных или Нет для того, чтобы линии не отображались. Маркеры - используется для указания того, нужно показывать маркеры (если флажок поставлен) или нет (если флажок снят) на линейчатых/точечных диаграммах. Примечание: Опции Линии и Маркеры доступны только для Линейчатых диаграмм и Точечных диаграмм. Вкладка Вертикальная ось позволяет изменять параметры вертикальной оси, также называемой осью значений или осью Y, которая отображает числовые значения. Обратите внимание, что вертикальная ось будет осью категорий, которая отображает подпись для Гистограмм, таким образом, параметры вкладки Вертикальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в следующем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Примечание: Параметры оси и Линии сетки недоступны для круговых диаграмм, так как у круговых диаграмм нет осей и линий сетки. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть вертикальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать название вертикальной оси, Повернутое - показать название снизу вверх слева от вертикальной оси, По горизонтали - показать название по горизонтали слева от вертикальной оси. Минимум - используется для указания наименьшего значения, которое отображается в начале вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае минимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Максимум - используется для указания наибольшего значения, которое отображается в конце вертикальной оси. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае максимальное значение высчитывается автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Фиксированный и указать в поле справа другое значение. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на вертикальной оси, в которой она должна пересекаться с горизонтальной осью. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто; в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Можно выбрать из выпадающего списка опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимум/Максимум на вертикальной оси. Единицы отображения - используется для определения порядка числовых значений на вертикальной оси. Эта опция может пригодиться, если вы работаете с большими числами и хотите, чтобы отображение цифр на оси было более компактным и удобочитаемым (например, можно сделать так, чтобы 50 000 показывалось как 50, воспользовавшись опцией Тысячи). Выберите желаемые единицы отображения из выпадающего списка: Сотни, Тысячи, 10 000, 100 000, Миллионы, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Миллиарды, Триллионы или выберите опцию Нет, чтобы вернуться к единицам отображения по умолчанию. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения значений в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, наименьшее значение находится внизу, а наибольшее - наверху. Когда этот флажок отмечен, значения располагаются сверху вниз. Логарифмическая шкала - используется для включения логарифмического масштабирования до Базового значения, определяемой пользователем. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет настроить отображение делений на вертикальной шкале. Основной тип - это деления шкалы большего размера, на которых могут быть подписи с числовыми значениями. Дополнительный тип - это деления шкалы, которые помещаются между основными делениями и не имеют подписей. Отметки также определяют, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если соответствующий параметр установлен на вкладке Макет. В раскрывающихся списках Основной/Дополнительный тип содержатся следующие варианты размещения: Нет - не отображать основные/дополнительные деления, На пересечении - отображать основные/дополнительные деления по обе стороны от оси, Внутри - отображать основные/дополнительные деления внутри оси, Снаружи - отображать основные/дополнительные деления за пределами оси. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет определить положение подписей основных делений, отображающих значения. Для того чтобы задать Положение подписи относительно вертикальной оси, выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет - не отображать подписи, Ниже - показывать подписи слева от области диаграммы, Выше - показывать подписи справа от области диаграммы, Рядом с осью - показывать подписи рядом с осью. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Примечание: второстепенные оси поддерживаются только в Комбинированных диаграммах. Второстепенные оси полезны в комбинированных диаграммах, когда ряды данных значительно различаются или для построения диаграммы используются смешанные типы данных. Второстепенные оси упрощают чтение и понимание комбинированной диаграммы. Вкладка Вспомогательная вертикальная / горизонтальная ось появляется, когда вы выбираете соответствующий ряд данных для комбинированной диаграммы. Все настройки и параметры на вкладке Вспомогательная вертикальная/горизонтальная ось такие же, как настройки на вертикальной / горизонтальной оси. Подробное описание параметров Вертикальная / горизонтальная ось смотрите выше / ниже. Вкладка Горизонтальная ось позволяет изменять параметры горизонтальной оси, также называемой осью категорий или осью x, которая отображает текстовые метки. Обратите внимание, что горизонтальная ось будет осью значений, которая отображает числовые значения для Гистограмм, поэтому в этом случае параметры вкладки Горизонтальная ось будут соответствовать параметрам, описанным в предыдущем разделе. Для Точечных диаграмм обе оси являются осями значений. Нажмите Скрыть ось, чтобы скрыть горизонтальную ось на диаграмме. Укажите ориентацию Заголовка, выбрав нужный вариант из раскрывающегося списка: Нет - не отображать заголовок горизонтальной оси, Без наложения - отображать заголовок под горизонтальной осью, Линии сетки используется для отображения Горизонтальных линий сетки путем выбора необходимого параметра в раскрывающемся списке: Нет, Основные, Незначительное или Основные и Дополнительные. Пересечение с осью - используется для указания точки на горизонтальной оси, в которой вертикальная ось должна пересекать ее. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае точка пересечения осей определяется автоматически в зависимости от выбранного диапазона данных. Из выпадающего списка можно выбрать опцию Значение и указать в поле справа другое значение или установить точку пересечения осей на Минимальном/Максимальном значении на вертикальной оси. Положение оси - используется для указания места размещения подписей на оси: на Делениях или Между делениями. Значения в обратном порядке - используется для отображения категорий в обратном порядке. Когда этот флажок снят, категории располагаются слева направо. Когда этот флажок отмечен, категории располагаются справа налево. Раздел Параметры делений позволяет определять местоположение делений на горизонтальной шкале. Деления основного типа - это более крупные деления шкалы, у которых могут быть подписи, отображающие значения категорий. Деления дополнительного типа - это более мелкие деления шкалы, которые располагаются между делениями основного типа и у которых нет подписей. Кроме того, деления шкалы указывают, где могут отображаться линии сетки, если на вкладке Макет выбрана соответствующая опция. Можно редактировать следующие параметры делений: Основной/Дополнительный тип - используется для указания следующих вариантов размещения: Нет, чтобы деления основного/дополнительного типа не отображались, На пересечении, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа по обеим сторонам оси, Внутри, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с внутренней стороны оси, Снаружи, чтобы отображать деления основного/дополнительного типа с наружной стороны оси. Интервал между делениями - используется для указания того, сколько категорий нужно показывать между двумя соседними делениями. Раздел Параметры подписи позволяет настроить внешний вид меток, отображающих категории. Положение подписи - используется для указания того, где следует располагать подписи относительно горизонтальной оси. Выберите нужную опцию из выпадающего списка: Нет, чтобы подписи категорий не отображались, Ниже, чтобы подписи категорий располагались снизу области диаграммы, Выше, чтобы подписи категорий располагались наверху области диаграммы, Рядом с осью, чтобы подписи категорий отображались рядом с осью. Расстояние до подписи - используется для указания того, насколько близко подписи должны располагаться от осей. Можно указать нужное значение в поле ввода. Чем это значение больше, тем дальше расположены подписи от осей. Интервал между подписями - используется для указания того, как часто нужно показывать подписи. По умолчанию выбрана опция Авто, в этом случае подписи отображаются для каждой категории. Можно выбрать опцию Вручную и указать нужное значение в поле справа. Например, введите 2, чтобы отображать подписи у каждой второй категории, и т.д. Чтобы указать Формат подписи, нажмите Формат подписи и в окне Числовой формат выберите подходящую категорию. Доступные категории подписей: Общий Числовой Научный Финансовый Денежный Дата Время Процентный Дробный Текстовый Особый Параметры формата подписи различаются в зависимости от выбранной категории. Для получения дополнительной информации об изменении числового формата, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой странице. Установите флажок напротив Связать с источником, чтобы сохранить форматирование чисел из источника данных в диаграмме. Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер диаграммы также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать диаграмму к ячейке позади нее, не допуская изменения размера диаграммы. Если ячейка перемещается, диаграмма будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры диаграммы останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера диаграммы при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит диаграмма. Редактирование элементов диаграммы Чтобы изменить Заголовок диаграммы, выделите мышью стандартный текст и введите вместо него свой собственный. Чтобы изменить форматирование шрифта внутри текстовых элементов, таких как заголовок диаграммы, названия осей, элементы условных обозначений, подписи данных и так далее, выделите нужный текстовый элемент, щелкнув по нему левой кнопкой мыши. Затем используйте значки на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, чтобы изменить тип, размер, стиль или цвет шрифта. При выборе диаграммы становится также активным значок Параметры фигуры справа, так как фигура используется в качестве фона для диаграммы. Можно щелкнуть по этому значку, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели инструментов и изменить параметры Заливки и Обводки фигуры. Обратите, пожалуйста, внимание, что вы не можете изменить вид фигуры. C помощью вкладки Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели можно изменить не только саму область диаграммы, но и элементы диаграммы, такие как область построения, ряды данных, заголовок диаграммы, легенда и другие, и применить к ним различные типы заливки. Выберите элемент диаграммы, нажав на него левой кнопкой мыши, и выберите нужный тип заливки: сплошной цвет, градиент, текстура или изображение, узор. Настройте параметры заливки и при необходимости задайте уровень прозрачности. При выделении вертикальной или горизонтальной оси или линий сетки на вкладке Параметры фигуры будут доступны только параметры обводки: цвет, толщина, тип и непрозрачность линии. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с цветами, заливками и обводкой фигур можно обратиться к этой странице. Обратите внимание: параметр Отображать тень также доступен на вкладке Параметры фигуры, но для элементов диаграммы он неактивен. Если требуется изменить размер элемента диаграммы, щелкните левой кнопкой мыши, чтобы выбрать нужный элемент, и перетащите один из 8 белых маркеров , расположенных по периметру элемента. Чтобы изменить позицию элемента, щелкните по нему левой кнопкой мыши, убедитесь, что курсор принял вид , удерживайте левую кнопку мыши и перетащите элемент в нужное место. Чтобы удалить элемент диаграммы, выделите его, щелкнув левой кнопкой мыши, и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Можно также поворачивать 3D-диаграммы с помощью мыши. Щелкните левой кнопкой мыши внутри области построения диаграммы и удерживайте кнопку мыши. Не отпуская кнопку мыши, перетащите курсор, чтобы изменить ориентацию 3D-диаграммы. Для 3D-диаграмм также доступны настройки Трехмерного поворота: По оси X - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси X с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. По оси Y - задайте нужное значение для поворота по оси Y с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Влево и Вправо. Перспектива - задайте нужное значение для поворота по глубине с помощью клавиатуры или расположенных справа стрелок Сузить поле зрения и Расширить поле зрения. Оси под прямым углом - используется, чтобы установить вид оси под прямым углом. Автомасштабирование - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы автоматически масштабировать значения глубины и высоты диаграммы, или снимите эту галочку, чтобы задать значения глубины и высоты вручную. Глубина (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение глубины с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Высота (% от базовой) - задайте нужное значение высоты с помощью клавиатуры или стрелок. Поворот по умолчанию - установите параметры трехмерного поворота по умолчанию. Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что нельзя отредактировать отдельные элементы диаграммы; настройки будут применены к диаграмме в целом. В случае необходимости можно изменить размер и положение диаграммы. Чтобы удалить вставленную диаграмму, щелкните по ней и нажмите клавишу Delete. Назначение макроса к диаграмме Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любой диаграмме. После назначения макроса, фигура отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на фигуру. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по диаграмме и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК. После назначения макроса, вы все еще можете выделить диаграмму для выполнения других операций. Для этого щелкните левой кнопкой мыши по поверхности диаграммы. Редактирование спарклайнов Редактор электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE поддерживает спарклайны. Спарклайн - это небольшая диаграмма, помещенная в одну ячейку. Спарклайны могут быть полезны, если требуется наглядно представить информацию для каждой строки или столбца в больших наборах данных. Чтобы узнать больше о том, как создавать и редактировать спарклайны, ознакомьтесь с нашим руководством по Вставке спарклайнов." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm", @@ -2578,7 +2608,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm", "title": "Вставка функций", - "body": "Важная причина использования электронных таблиц - это возможность выполнять основные расчеты. Некоторые из них выполняются автоматически при выделении диапазона ячеек на рабочем листе: Среднее - используется для того, чтобы проанализировать выбранный диапазон ячеек и рассчитать среднее значение. Количество - используется для того, чтобы подсчитать количество выбранных ячеек, содержащих значения, без учета пустых ячеек. Мин - используется для того, чтобы проанализировать выбранный диапазон ячеек и найти наименьшее число. Макс - используется для того, чтобы проанализировать выбранный диапазон ячеек и найти наибольшее число. Сумма - используется для того, чтобы сложить все числа в выбранном диапазоне без учета пустых или содержащих текст ячеек. Результаты этих расчетов отображаются в правом нижнем углу строки состояния. Вы можете управлять строкой состояния, щелкнув по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выбрав только те функции, которые требуется отображать. Для выполнения любых других расчетов можно ввести нужную формулу вручную, используя общепринятые математические операторы, или вставить заранее определенную формулу - Функцию. Возможности работы с Функциями доступны как на вкладке Главная, так и на вкладке Формула. Также можно использовать сочетание клавиш Shift+F3. На вкладке Главная, вы можете использовать кнопку Вставить функцию , чтобы добавить одну из часто используемых функций (СУММ, СРЗНАЧ, МИН, МАКС, СЧЁТ) или открыть окно Вставить функцию, содержащее все доступные функции, распределенные по категориям. Используйте поле поиска, чтобы найти нужную функцию по имени. На вкладке Формула можно использовать следующие кнопки: Функция - чтобы открыть окно Вставить функцию, содержащее все доступные функции, распределенные по категориям. Автосумма - чтобы быстро получить доступ к функциям СУММ, МИН, МАКС, СЧЁТ. При выборе функции из этой группы она автоматически выполняет вычисления для всех ячеек в столбце, расположенных выше выделенной ячейки, поэтому вам не потребуется вводить аргументы. Последние использованные - чтобы быстро получить доступ к 10 последним использованным функциям. Финансовые, Логические, Текст и данные, Дата и время, Поиск и ссылки, Математические - чтобы быстро получить доступ к функциям, относящимся к определенной категории. Другие функции - чтобы получить доступ к функциям из следующих групп: Базы данных, Инженерные, Информационные и Статистические. Именованные диапазоны - чтобы открыть Диспетчер имен, или присвоить новое имя, или вставить имя в качестве аргумента функции. Для получения дополнительной информации обратитесь к этой странице. Пересчет - чтобы принудительно выполнить пересчет функций. Для вставки функции: Выделите ячейку, в которую требуется вставить функцию. Действуйте одним из следующих способов: перейдите на вкладку Формула и используйте кнопки на верхней панели инструментов, чтобы получить доступ к функциям из определенной группы, затем щелкните по нужной функции, чтобы открыть окно Аргументы функции. Также можно выбрать в меню опцию Дополнительно или нажать кнопку Функция на верхней панели инструментов, чтобы открыть окно Вставить функцию. перейдите на вкладку Главная, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , выберите одну из часто используемых функций (СУММ, СРЗНАЧ, МИН, МАКС, СЧЁТ) или выберите опцию Дополнительно, чтобы открыть окно Вставить функцию. щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в контекстном меню команду Вставить функцию. щелкните по значку перед строкой формул. В открывшемся окне Вставить функцию введите имя функции в поле поиска или выберите нужную группу функций, а затем выберите из списка требуемую функцию и нажмите OK. Когда вы выберете нужную функцию, откроется окно Аргументы функции: В открывшемся окне Аргументы функции введите нужные значения для каждого аргумента. Аргументы функции можно вводить вручную или нажав на кнопку и выбрав ячейку или диапазон ячеек, который надо добавить в качестве аргумента. Примечание: в общих случаях, в качестве аргументов функций можно использовать числовые значения, логические значения (ИСТИНА, ЛОЖЬ), текстовые значения (они должны быть заключены в кавычки), ссылки на ячейки, ссылки на диапазоны ячеек, имена, присвоенные диапазонам, и другие функции. Результат функции будет отображен ниже. Когда все аргументы будут указаны, нажмите кнопку OK в окне Аргументы функции. Чтобы ввести функцию вручную с помощью клавиатуры, Выделите ячейку. Введите знак \"равно\" (=). Каждая формула должна начинаться со знака \"равно\" (=). Введите имя функции. Как только вы введете начальные буквы, появится список Автозавершения формул. По мере ввода в нем отображаются элементы (формулы и имена), которые соответствуют введенным символам. При наведении курсора на формулу отображается всплывающая подсказка с ее описанием. Можно выбрать нужную формулу из списка и вставить ее, щелкнув по ней или нажав клавишу Tab. Введите аргументы функции или вручную, или выделив мышью диапазон ячеек, который надо добавить в качестве аргумента. Если функция требует несколько аргументов, их надо вводить через точку с запятой. Аргументы должны быть заключены в круглые скобки. При выборе функции из списка открывающая скобка '(' добавляется автоматически. При вводе аргументов также отображается всплывающая подсказка с синтаксисом формулы. Когда все аргументы будут указаны, добавьте закрывающую скобку ')' и нажмите клавишу Enter. При вводе новых данных или изменении значений, используемых в качестве аргументов, пересчет функций по умолчанию выполняется автоматически. Вы можете принудительно выполнить пересчет функций с помощью кнопки Пересчет на вкладке Формула. Нажатие на саму кнопку Пересчет позволяет выполнить пересчет всей рабочей книги, также можно нажать на стрелку под этой кнопкой и выбрать в меню нужный вариант: Пересчет книги или Пересчет рабочего листа. Также можно использовать следующие сочетания клавиш: F9 для пересчета рабочей книги, Shift +F9 для пересчета текущего рабочего листа. Ниже приводится список доступных функций, сгруппированных по категориям: Категория функций Описание Функции Функции для работы с текстом и данными Используются для корректного отображения текстовых данных в электронной таблице. ASC; СИМВОЛ; ПЕЧСИМВ; КОДСИМВ; СЦЕПИТЬ; СЦЕП; РУБЛЬ; СОВПАД; НАЙТИ; НАЙТИБ; ФИКСИРОВАННЫЙ; ЛЕВСИМВ; ЛЕВБ; ДЛСТР; ДЛИНБ; СТРОЧН; ПСТР; ПСТРБ; ЧЗНАЧ; ПРОПНАЧ; ЗАМЕНИТЬ; ЗАМЕНИТЬБ; ПОВТОР; ПРАВСИМВ; ПРАВБ; ПОИСК; ПОИСКБ; ПОДСТАВИТЬ; T; ТЕКСТ; ОБЪЕДИНИТЬ; СЖПРОБЕЛЫ; ЮНИСИМВ; UNICODE; ПРОПИСН; ЗНАЧЕН; ТЕКСТДО; ТЕКСТПОСЛЕ; ТЕКСТРАЗД Статистические функции Используются для анализа данных: нахождения среднего значения, наибольшего или наименьшего значения в диапазоне ячеек. СРОТКЛ; СРЗНАЧ; СРЗНАЧА; СРЗНАЧЕСЛИ; СРЗНАЧЕСЛИМН; БЕТАРАСП; БЕТА.РАСП; БЕТА.ОБР; БЕТАОБР; БИНОМРАСП; БИНОМ.РАСП; БИНОМ.РАСП.ДИАП; БИНОМ.ОБР; ХИ2РАСП; ХИ2ОБР; ХИ2.РАСП; ХИ2.РАСП.ПХ; ХИ2.ОБР; ХИ2.ОБР.ПХ; ХИ2ТЕСТ; ХИ2.ТЕСТ; ДОВЕРИТ; ДОВЕРИТ.НОРМ; ДОВЕРИТ.СТЬЮДЕНТ; КОРРЕЛ; СЧЁТ; СЧЁТЗ; СЧИТАТЬПУСТОТЫ; СЧЁТЕСЛИ; СЧЁТЕСЛИМН; КОВАР; КОВАРИАЦИЯ.Г; КОВАРИАЦИЯ.В; КРИТБИНОМ; КВАДРОТКЛ; ЭКСП.РАСП; ЭКСПРАСП; F.РАСП; FРАСП; F.РАСП.ПХ; F.ОБР; FРАСПОБР; F.ОБР.ПХ; ФИШЕР; ФИШЕРОБР; ПРЕДСКАЗ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ETS; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ЕTS.ДОВИНТЕРВАЛ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ETS.СЕЗОННОСТЬ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ETS.СТАТ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ЛИНЕЙН; ЧАСТОТА; ФТЕСТ; F.ТЕСТ; ГАММА; ГАММА.РАСП; ГАММАРАСП; ГАММА.ОБР; ГАММАОБР; ГАММАНЛОГ; ГАММАНЛОГ.ТОЧН; ГАУСС; СРГЕОМ; РОСТ; СРГАРМ; ГИПЕРГЕОМЕТ; ГИПЕРГЕОМ.РАСП; ОТРЕЗОК; ЭКСЦЕСС; НАИБОЛЬШИЙ; ЛИНЕЙН; ЛГРФПРИБЛ; ЛОГНОРМОБР; ЛОГНОРМ.РАСП; ЛОГНОРМ.ОБР; ЛОГНОРМРАСП; МАКС; МАКСА; МАКСЕСЛИ; МЕДИАНА; МИН; МИНА; МИНЕСЛИ; МОДА; МОДА.НСК; МОДА.ОДН; ОТРБИНОМРАСП; ОТРБИНОМ.РАСП; НОРМРАСП; НОРМ.РАСП; НОРМОБР; НОРМ.ОБР; НОРМСТРАСП; НОРМ.СТ.РАСП; НОРМСТОБР; НОРМ.СТ.ОБР; ПИРСОН; ПЕРСЕНТИЛЬ; ПРОЦЕНТИЛЬ.ИСКЛ; ПРОЦЕНТИЛЬ.ВКЛ; ПРОЦЕНТРАНГ; ПРОЦЕНТРАНГ.ИСКЛ; ПРОЦЕНТРАНГ.ВКЛ; ПЕРЕСТ; ПЕРЕСТА; ФИ; ПУАССОН; ПУАССОН.РАСП; ВЕРОЯТНОСТЬ; КВАРТИЛЬ; КВАРТИЛЬ.ИСКЛ; КВАРТИЛЬ.ВКЛ; РАНГ; РАНГ.СР; РАНГ.РВ; КВПИРСОН; СКОС; СКОС.Г; НАКЛОН; НАИМЕНЬШИЙ; НОРМАЛИЗАЦИЯ; СТАНДОТКЛОН; СТАНДОТКЛОН.В; СТАНДОТКЛОНА; СТАНДОТКЛОНП; СТАНДОТКЛОН.Г; СТАНДОТКЛОНПА; СТОШYX; СТЬЮДРАСП; СТЬЮДЕНТ.РАСП; СТЬЮДЕНТ.РАСП.2Х; СТЬЮДЕНТ.РАСП.ПХ; СТЬЮДЕНТ.ОБР; СТЬЮДЕНТ.ОБР.2Х; СТЬЮДРАСПОБР; ТЕНДЕНЦИЯ; УРЕЗСРЕДНЕЕ; ТТЕСТ; СТЬЮДЕНТ.ТЕСТ; ДИСП; ДИСПА; ДИСПР; ДИСП.Г; ДИСП.В; ДИСПРА; ВЕЙБУЛЛ; ВЕЙБУЛЛ.РАСП; ZТЕСТ; Z.ТЕСТ Математические функции Используются для выполнения базовых математических и тригонометрических операций, таких как сложение, умножение, деление, округление и т.д. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; АГРЕГАТ; АРАБСКОЕ; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; ОСНОВАНИЕ; ОКРВВЕРХ; ОКРВВЕРХ.МАТ; ОКРВВЕРХ.ТОЧН; ЧИСЛКОМБ; ЧИСЛКОМБА; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; ДЕС; ГРАДУСЫ; ECMA.ОКРВВЕРХ; ЧЁТН; EXP; ФАКТР; ДВФАКТР; ОКРВНИЗ; ОКРВНИЗ.ТОЧН; ОКРВНИЗ.МАТ; НОД; ЦЕЛОЕ; ISO.ОКРВВЕРХ; НОК; LN; LOG; LOG10; МОПРЕД; МОБР; МУМНОЖ; ОСТАТ; ОКРУГЛТ; МУЛЬТИНОМ; МЕДИН; НЕЧЁТ; ПИ; СТЕПЕНЬ; ПРОИЗВЕД; ЧАСТНОЕ; РАДИАНЫ; СЛЧИС; СЛУЧМАССИВ; СЛУЧМЕЖДУ; РИМСКОЕ; ОКРУГЛ; ОКРУГЛВНИЗ; ОКРУГЛВВЕРХ; SEC; SECH; РЯД.СУММ; ЗНАК; SIN; SINH; КОРЕНЬ; КОРЕНЬПИ; ПРОМЕЖУТОЧНЫЕ.ИТОГИ; СУММ; СУММЕСЛИ; СУММЕСЛИМН; СУММПРОИЗВ; СУММКВ; СУММРАЗНКВ; СУММСУММКВ; СУММКВРАЗН; TAN; TANH; ОТБР; Функции даты и времени Используются для корректного отображения даты и времени в электронной таблице. ДАТА; РАЗНДАТ; ДАТАЗНАЧ; ДЕНЬ; ДНИ; ДНЕЙ360; ДАТАМЕС; КОНМЕСЯЦА; ЧАС; НОМНЕДЕЛИ.ISO; МИНУТЫ; МЕСЯЦ; ЧИСТРАБДНИ; ЧИСТРАБДНИ.МЕЖД; ТДАТА; СЕКУНДЫ; ВРЕМЯ; ВРЕМЗНАЧ; СЕГОДНЯ; ДЕНЬНЕД; НОМНЕДЕЛИ; РАБДЕНЬ; РАБДЕНЬ.МЕЖД; ГОД; ДОЛЯГОДА Инженерные функции Используются для выполнения инженерных расчетов: преобразования чисел из одной системы счисления в другую, работы с комплексными числами и т.д. БЕССЕЛЬ.I; БЕССЕЛЬ.J; БЕССЕЛЬ.K; БЕССЕЛЬ.Y; ДВ.В.ДЕС; ДВ.В.ШЕСТН; ДВ.В.ВОСЬМ; БИТ.И; БИТ.СДВИГЛ; БИТ.ИЛИ; БИТ.СДВИГП; БИТ.ИСКЛИЛИ; КОМПЛЕКСН; ПРЕОБР; ДЕС.В.ДВ; ДЕС.В.ШЕСТН; ДЕС.В.ВОСЬМ; ДЕЛЬТА; ФОШ; ФОШ.ТОЧН; ДФОШ; ДФОШ.ТОЧН; ПОРОГ; ШЕСТН.В.ДВ; ШЕСТН.В.ДЕС; ШЕСТН.В.ВОСЬМ; МНИМ.ABS; МНИМ.ЧАСТЬ; МНИМ.АРГУМЕНТ; МНИМ.СОПРЯЖ; МНИМ.COS; МНИМ.COSH; МНИМ.COT; МНИМ.CSC; МНИМ.CSCH; МНИМ.ДЕЛ; МНИМ.EXP; МНИМ.LN; МНИМ.LOG10; МНИМ.LOG2; МНИМ.СТЕПЕНЬ; МНИМ.ПРОИЗВЕД; МНИМ.ВЕЩ; МНИМ.SEC; МНИМ.SECH; МНИМ.SIN; МНИМ.SINH; МНИМ.КОРЕНЬ; МНИМ.РАЗН; МНИМ.СУММ; МНИМ.TAN; ВОСЬМ.В.ДВ; ВОСЬМ.В.ДЕС; ВОСЬМ.В.ШЕСТН Функции для работы с базами данных Используются для выполнения вычислений по значениям определенного поля базы данных, соответствующих заданным критериям. ДСРЗНАЧ; БСЧЁТ; БСЧЁТА; БИЗВЛЕЧЬ; ДМАКС; ДМИН; БДПРОИЗВЕД; ДСТАНДОТКЛ; ДСТАНДОТКЛП; БДСУММ; БДДИСП; БДДИСПП Финансовые функции Используются для выполнения финансовых расчетов: вычисления чистой приведенной стоимости, суммы платежа и т.д. НАКОПДОХОД; НАКОПДОХОДПОГАШ; АМОРУМ; АМОРУВ; ДНЕЙКУПОНДО; ДНЕЙКУПОН; ДНЕЙКУПОНПОСЛЕ; ДАТАКУПОНПОСЛЕ; ЧИСЛКУПОН; ДАТАКУПОНДО; ОБЩПЛАТ; ОБЩДОХОД; ФУО; ДДОБ; СКИДКА; РУБЛЬ.ДЕС; РУБЛЬ.ДРОБЬ; ДЛИТ; ЭФФЕКТ; БС; БЗРАСПИС; ИНОРМА; ПРПЛТ; ВСД; ПРОЦПЛАТ; МДЛИТ; МВСД; НОМИНАЛ; КПЕР; ЧПС; ЦЕНАПЕРВНЕРЕГ; ДОХОДПЕРВНЕРЕГ; ЦЕНАПОСЛНЕРЕГ; ДОХОДПОСЛНЕРЕГ; ПДЛИТ; ПЛТ; ОСПЛТ; ЦЕНА; ЦЕНАСКИДКА; ЦЕНАПОГАШ; ПС; СТАВКА; ПОЛУЧЕНО; ЭКВ.СТАВКА; АПЛ; АСЧ; РАВНОКЧЕК; ЦЕНАКЧЕК; ДОХОДКЧЕК; ПУО; ЧИСТВНДОХ; ЧИСТНЗ; ДОХОД; ДОХОДСКИДКА; ДОХОДПОГАШ Поисковые функции Используются для упрощения поиска информации по списку данных. АДРЕС; ВЫБОР; СТОЛБЕЦ; ЧИСЛСТОЛБ; Ф.ТЕКСТ; ГПР; ГИПЕРССЫЛКА; ИНДЕКС; ДВССЫЛ; ПРОСМОТР; ПОИСКПОЗ; СМЕЩ; СТРОКА; ЧСТРОК; ТРАНСП; УНИК; ВПР; ПРОСМОТРX; ГСТОЛБИК; ВСТОЛБИК; ПОСТРОК; ПОСТОЛБЦ; СВЕРНСТРОК; СВЕРНСТОЛБЦ; СБРОСИТЬ; ВЗЯТЬ; ВЫБОРСТРОК; ВЫБОРСТОЛБЦ Информационные функции Используются для предоставления информации о данных в выделенной ячейке или диапазоне ячеек. ЯЧЕЙКА; ТИП.ОШИБКИ; ЕПУСТО; ЕОШ; ЕОШИБКА; ЕЧЁТН; ЕФОРМУЛА; ЕЛОГИЧ; ЕНД; ЕНЕТЕКСТ; ЕЧИСЛО; ЕНЕЧЁТ; ЕССЫЛКА; ЕТЕКСТ; Ч; НД; ЛИСТ; ЛИСТЫ; ТИП Логические функции Используются для выполнения проверки, является ли условие истинным или ложным. И; ЛОЖЬ; ЕСЛИ; ЕСЛИОШИБКА; ЕСНД; ЕСЛИМН; НЕ; ИЛИ; ПЕРЕКЛЮЧ; ИСТИНА; ИСКЛИЛИ" + "body": "Важная причина использования электронных таблиц - это возможность выполнять основные расчеты. Некоторые из них выполняются автоматически при выделении диапазона ячеек на рабочем листе: Среднее - используется для того, чтобы проанализировать выбранный диапазон ячеек и рассчитать среднее значение. Количество - используется для того, чтобы подсчитать количество выбранных ячеек, содержащих значения, без учета пустых ячеек. Мин - используется для того, чтобы проанализировать выбранный диапазон ячеек и найти наименьшее число. Макс - используется для того, чтобы проанализировать выбранный диапазон ячеек и найти наибольшее число. Сумма - используется для того, чтобы сложить все числа в выбранном диапазоне без учета пустых или содержащих текст ячеек. Результаты этих расчетов отображаются в правом нижнем углу строки состояния. Вы можете управлять строкой состояния, щелкнув по ней правой кнопкой мыши и выбрав только те функции, которые требуется отображать. Для выполнения любых других расчетов можно ввести нужную формулу вручную, используя общепринятые математические операторы, или вставить заранее определенную формулу - Функцию. Возможности работы с Функциями доступны как на вкладке Главная, так и на вкладке Формула. Также можно использовать сочетание клавиш Shift+F3. На вкладке Главная, вы можете использовать кнопку Вставить функцию , чтобы добавить одну из часто используемых функций (СУММ, СРЗНАЧ, МИН, МАКС, СЧЁТ) или открыть окно Вставить функцию, содержащее все доступные функции, распределенные по категориям. Используйте поле поиска, чтобы найти нужную функцию по имени. На вкладке Формула можно использовать следующие кнопки: Функция - чтобы открыть окно Вставить функцию, содержащее все доступные функции, распределенные по категориям. Автосумма - чтобы быстро получить доступ к функциям СУММ, МИН, МАКС, СЧЁТ. При выборе функции из этой группы она автоматически выполняет вычисления для всех ячеек в столбце, расположенных выше выделенной ячейки, поэтому вам не потребуется вводить аргументы. Последние использованные - чтобы быстро получить доступ к 10 последним использованным функциям. Финансовые, Логические, Текст и данные, Дата и время, Поиск и ссылки, Математические - чтобы быстро получить доступ к функциям, относящимся к определенной категории. Другие функции - чтобы получить доступ к функциям из следующих групп: Базы данных, Инженерные, Информационные и Статистические. Именованные диапазоны - чтобы открыть Диспетчер имен, или присвоить новое имя, или вставить имя в качестве аргумента функции. Для получения дополнительной информации обратитесь к этой странице. Пересчет - чтобы принудительно выполнить пересчет функций. Для вставки функции: Выделите ячейку, в которую требуется вставить функцию. Действуйте одним из следующих способов: перейдите на вкладку Формула и используйте кнопки на верхней панели инструментов, чтобы получить доступ к функциям из определенной группы, затем щелкните по нужной функции, чтобы открыть окно Аргументы функции. Также можно выбрать в меню опцию Дополнительно или нажать кнопку Функция на верхней панели инструментов, чтобы открыть окно Вставить функцию. перейдите на вкладку Главная, щелкните по значку Вставить функцию , выберите одну из часто используемых функций (СУММ, СРЗНАЧ, МИН, МАКС, СЧЁТ) или выберите опцию Дополнительно, чтобы открыть окно Вставить функцию. щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенной ячейке и выберите в контекстном меню команду Вставить функцию. щелкните по значку перед строкой формул. В открывшемся окне Вставить функцию введите имя функции в поле поиска или выберите нужную группу функций, а затем выберите из списка требуемую функцию и нажмите OK. Когда вы выберете нужную функцию, откроется окно Аргументы функции: В открывшемся окне Аргументы функции введите нужные значения для каждого аргумента. Аргументы функции можно вводить вручную или нажав на кнопку и выбрав ячейку или диапазон ячеек, который надо добавить в качестве аргумента. Примечание: в общих случаях, в качестве аргументов функций можно использовать числовые значения, логические значения (ИСТИНА, ЛОЖЬ), текстовые значения (они должны быть заключены в кавычки), ссылки на ячейки, ссылки на диапазоны ячеек, имена, присвоенные диапазонам, и другие функции. Результат функции будет отображен ниже. Когда все аргументы будут указаны, нажмите кнопку OK в окне Аргументы функции. Чтобы ввести функцию вручную с помощью клавиатуры, Выделите ячейку. Введите знак \"равно\" (=). Каждая формула должна начинаться со знака \"равно\" (=). Введите имя функции. Как только вы введете начальные буквы, появится список Автозавершения формул. По мере ввода в нем отображаются элементы (формулы и имена), которые соответствуют введенным символам. При наведении курсора на формулу отображается всплывающая подсказка с ее описанием. Можно выбрать нужную формулу из списка и вставить ее, щелкнув по ней или нажав клавишу Tab. Введите аргументы функции или вручную, или выделив мышью диапазон ячеек, который надо добавить в качестве аргумента. Если функция требует несколько аргументов, их надо вводить через точку с запятой. Аргументы должны быть заключены в круглые скобки. При выборе функции из списка открывающая скобка '(' добавляется автоматически. При вводе аргументов также отображается всплывающая подсказка с синтаксисом формулы. Когда все аргументы будут указаны, добавьте закрывающую скобку ')' и нажмите клавишу Enter. При вводе новых данных или изменении значений, используемых в качестве аргументов, пересчет функций по умолчанию выполняется автоматически. Вы можете принудительно выполнить пересчет функций с помощью кнопки Пересчет на вкладке Формула. Нажатие на саму кнопку Пересчет позволяет выполнить пересчет всей рабочей книги, также можно нажать на стрелку под этой кнопкой и выбрать в меню нужный вариант: Пересчет книги или Пересчет рабочего листа. Также можно использовать следующие сочетания клавиш: F9 для пересчета рабочей книги, Shift +F9 для пересчета текущего рабочего листа. Ниже приводится список доступных функций, сгруппированных по категориям: Категория функций Описание Функции Функции для работы с текстом и данными Используются для корректного отображения текстовых данных в электронной таблице. ASC; СИМВОЛ; ПЕЧСИМВ; КОДСИМВ; СЦЕПИТЬ; СЦЕП; РУБЛЬ; СОВПАД; НАЙТИ; НАЙТИБ; ФИКСИРОВАННЫЙ; ЛЕВСИМВ; ЛЕВБ; ДЛСТР; ДЛИНБ; СТРОЧН; ПСТР; ПСТРБ; ЧЗНАЧ; ПРОПНАЧ; ЗАМЕНИТЬ; ЗАМЕНИТЬБ; ПОВТОР; ПРАВСИМВ; ПРАВБ; ПОИСК; ПОИСКБ; ПОДСТАВИТЬ; T; ТЕКСТ; ОБЪЕДИНИТЬ; СЖПРОБЕЛЫ; ЮНИСИМВ; UNICODE; ПРОПИСН; ЗНАЧЕН; ТЕКСТДО; ТЕКСТПОСЛЕ; ТЕКСТРАЗД; МАССИВВТЕКСТ Статистические функции Используются для анализа данных: нахождения среднего значения, наибольшего или наименьшего значения в диапазоне ячеек. СРОТКЛ; СРЗНАЧ; СРЗНАЧА; СРЗНАЧЕСЛИ; СРЗНАЧЕСЛИМН; БЕТАРАСП; БЕТА.РАСП; БЕТА.ОБР; БЕТАОБР; БИНОМРАСП; БИНОМ.РАСП; БИНОМ.РАСП.ДИАП; БИНОМ.ОБР; ХИ2РАСП; ХИ2ОБР; ХИ2.РАСП; ХИ2.РАСП.ПХ; ХИ2.ОБР; ХИ2.ОБР.ПХ; ХИ2ТЕСТ; ХИ2.ТЕСТ; ДОВЕРИТ; ДОВЕРИТ.НОРМ; ДОВЕРИТ.СТЬЮДЕНТ; КОРРЕЛ; СЧЁТ; СЧЁТЗ; СЧИТАТЬПУСТОТЫ; СЧЁТЕСЛИ; СЧЁТЕСЛИМН; КОВАР; КОВАРИАЦИЯ.Г; КОВАРИАЦИЯ.В; КРИТБИНОМ; КВАДРОТКЛ; ЭКСП.РАСП; ЭКСПРАСП; F.РАСП; FРАСП; F.РАСП.ПХ; F.ОБР; FРАСПОБР; F.ОБР.ПХ; ФИШЕР; ФИШЕРОБР; ПРЕДСКАЗ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ETS; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ЕTS.ДОВИНТЕРВАЛ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ETS.СЕЗОННОСТЬ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ETS.СТАТ; ПРЕДСКАЗ.ЛИНЕЙН; ЧАСТОТА; ФТЕСТ; F.ТЕСТ; ГАММА; ГАММА.РАСП; ГАММАРАСП; ГАММА.ОБР; ГАММАОБР; ГАММАНЛОГ; ГАММАНЛОГ.ТОЧН; ГАУСС; СРГЕОМ; РОСТ; СРГАРМ; ГИПЕРГЕОМЕТ; ГИПЕРГЕОМ.РАСП; ОТРЕЗОК; ЭКСЦЕСС; НАИБОЛЬШИЙ; ЛИНЕЙН; ЛГРФПРИБЛ; ЛОГНОРМОБР; ЛОГНОРМ.РАСП; ЛОГНОРМ.ОБР; ЛОГНОРМРАСП; МАКС; МАКСА; МАКСЕСЛИ; МЕДИАНА; МИН; МИНА; МИНЕСЛИ; МОДА; МОДА.НСК; МОДА.ОДН; ОТРБИНОМРАСП; ОТРБИНОМ.РАСП; НОРМРАСП; НОРМ.РАСП; НОРМОБР; НОРМ.ОБР; НОРМСТРАСП; НОРМ.СТ.РАСП; НОРМСТОБР; НОРМ.СТ.ОБР; ПИРСОН; ПЕРСЕНТИЛЬ; ПРОЦЕНТИЛЬ.ИСКЛ; ПРОЦЕНТИЛЬ.ВКЛ; ПРОЦЕНТРАНГ; ПРОЦЕНТРАНГ.ИСКЛ; ПРОЦЕНТРАНГ.ВКЛ; ПЕРЕСТ; ПЕРЕСТА; ФИ; ПУАССОН; ПУАССОН.РАСП; ВЕРОЯТНОСТЬ; КВАРТИЛЬ; КВАРТИЛЬ.ИСКЛ; КВАРТИЛЬ.ВКЛ; РАНГ; РАНГ.СР; РАНГ.РВ; КВПИРСОН; СКОС; СКОС.Г; НАКЛОН; НАИМЕНЬШИЙ; НОРМАЛИЗАЦИЯ; СТАНДОТКЛОН; СТАНДОТКЛОН.В; СТАНДОТКЛОНА; СТАНДОТКЛОНП; СТАНДОТКЛОН.Г; СТАНДОТКЛОНПА; СТОШYX; СТЬЮДРАСП; СТЬЮДЕНТ.РАСП; СТЬЮДЕНТ.РАСП.2Х; СТЬЮДЕНТ.РАСП.ПХ; СТЬЮДЕНТ.ОБР; СТЬЮДЕНТ.ОБР.2Х; СТЬЮДРАСПОБР; ТЕНДЕНЦИЯ; УРЕЗСРЕДНЕЕ; ТТЕСТ; СТЬЮДЕНТ.ТЕСТ; ДИСП; ДИСПА; ДИСПР; ДИСП.Г; ДИСП.В; ДИСПРА; ВЕЙБУЛЛ; ВЕЙБУЛЛ.РАСП; ZТЕСТ; Z.ТЕСТ Математические функции Используются для выполнения базовых математических и тригонометрических операций, таких как сложение, умножение, деление, округление и т.д. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; АГРЕГАТ; АРАБСКОЕ; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; ОСНОВАНИЕ; ОКРВВЕРХ; ОКРВВЕРХ.МАТ; ОКРВВЕРХ.ТОЧН; ЧИСЛКОМБ; ЧИСЛКОМБА; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; ДЕС; ГРАДУСЫ; ECMA.ОКРВВЕРХ; ЧЁТН; EXP; ФАКТР; ДВФАКТР; ОКРВНИЗ; ОКРВНИЗ.ТОЧН; ОКРВНИЗ.МАТ; НОД; ЦЕЛОЕ; ISO.ОКРВВЕРХ; НОК; LN; LOG; LOG10; МОПРЕД; МОБР; МУМНОЖ; ОСТАТ; ОКРУГЛТ; МУЛЬТИНОМ; МЕДИН; НЕЧЁТ; ПИ; СТЕПЕНЬ; ПРОИЗВЕД; ЧАСТНОЕ; РАДИАНЫ; СЛЧИС; СЛУЧМАССИВ; СЛУЧМЕЖДУ; РИМСКОЕ; ОКРУГЛ; ОКРУГЛВНИЗ; ОКРУГЛВВЕРХ; SEC; SECH; РЯД.СУММ; ПОСЛЕД; ЗНАК; SIN; SINH; КОРЕНЬ; КОРЕНЬПИ; ПРОМЕЖУТОЧНЫЕ.ИТОГИ; СУММ; СУММЕСЛИ; СУММЕСЛИМН; СУММПРОИЗВ; СУММКВ; СУММРАЗНКВ; СУММСУММКВ; СУММКВРАЗН; TAN; TANH; ОТБР; Функции даты и времени Используются для корректного отображения даты и времени в электронной таблице. ДАТА; РАЗНДАТ; ДАТАЗНАЧ; ДЕНЬ; ДНИ; ДНЕЙ360; ДАТАМЕС; КОНМЕСЯЦА; ЧАС; НОМНЕДЕЛИ.ISO; МИНУТЫ; МЕСЯЦ; ЧИСТРАБДНИ; ЧИСТРАБДНИ.МЕЖД; ТДАТА; СЕКУНДЫ; ВРЕМЯ; ВРЕМЗНАЧ; СЕГОДНЯ; ДЕНЬНЕД; НОМНЕДЕЛИ; РАБДЕНЬ; РАБДЕНЬ.МЕЖД; ГОД; ДОЛЯГОДА Инженерные функции Используются для выполнения инженерных расчетов: преобразования чисел из одной системы счисления в другую, работы с комплексными числами и т.д. БЕССЕЛЬ.I; БЕССЕЛЬ.J; БЕССЕЛЬ.K; БЕССЕЛЬ.Y; ДВ.В.ДЕС; ДВ.В.ШЕСТН; ДВ.В.ВОСЬМ; БИТ.И; БИТ.СДВИГЛ; БИТ.ИЛИ; БИТ.СДВИГП; БИТ.ИСКЛИЛИ; КОМПЛЕКСН; ПРЕОБР; ДЕС.В.ДВ; ДЕС.В.ШЕСТН; ДЕС.В.ВОСЬМ; ДЕЛЬТА; ФОШ; ФОШ.ТОЧН; ДФОШ; ДФОШ.ТОЧН; ПОРОГ; ШЕСТН.В.ДВ; ШЕСТН.В.ДЕС; ШЕСТН.В.ВОСЬМ; МНИМ.ABS; МНИМ.ЧАСТЬ; МНИМ.АРГУМЕНТ; МНИМ.СОПРЯЖ; МНИМ.COS; МНИМ.COSH; МНИМ.COT; МНИМ.CSC; МНИМ.CSCH; МНИМ.ДЕЛ; МНИМ.EXP; МНИМ.LN; МНИМ.LOG10; МНИМ.LOG2; МНИМ.СТЕПЕНЬ; МНИМ.ПРОИЗВЕД; МНИМ.ВЕЩ; МНИМ.SEC; МНИМ.SECH; МНИМ.SIN; МНИМ.SINH; МНИМ.КОРЕНЬ; МНИМ.РАЗН; МНИМ.СУММ; МНИМ.TAN; ВОСЬМ.В.ДВ; ВОСЬМ.В.ДЕС; ВОСЬМ.В.ШЕСТН Функции для работы с базами данных Используются для выполнения вычислений по значениям определенного поля базы данных, соответствующих заданным критериям. ДСРЗНАЧ; БСЧЁТ; БСЧЁТА; БИЗВЛЕЧЬ; ДМАКС; ДМИН; БДПРОИЗВЕД; ДСТАНДОТКЛ; ДСТАНДОТКЛП; БДСУММ; БДДИСП; БДДИСПП Финансовые функции Используются для выполнения финансовых расчетов: вычисления чистой приведенной стоимости, суммы платежа и т.д. НАКОПДОХОД; НАКОПДОХОДПОГАШ; АМОРУМ; АМОРУВ; ДНЕЙКУПОНДО; ДНЕЙКУПОН; ДНЕЙКУПОНПОСЛЕ; ДАТАКУПОНПОСЛЕ; ЧИСЛКУПОН; ДАТАКУПОНДО; ОБЩПЛАТ; ОБЩДОХОД; ФУО; ДДОБ; СКИДКА; РУБЛЬ.ДЕС; РУБЛЬ.ДРОБЬ; ДЛИТ; ЭФФЕКТ; БС; БЗРАСПИС; ИНОРМА; ПРПЛТ; ВСД; ПРОЦПЛАТ; МДЛИТ; МВСД; НОМИНАЛ; КПЕР; ЧПС; ЦЕНАПЕРВНЕРЕГ; ДОХОДПЕРВНЕРЕГ; ЦЕНАПОСЛНЕРЕГ; ДОХОДПОСЛНЕРЕГ; ПДЛИТ; ПЛТ; ОСПЛТ; ЦЕНА; ЦЕНАСКИДКА; ЦЕНАПОГАШ; ПС; СТАВКА; ПОЛУЧЕНО; ЭКВ.СТАВКА; АПЛ; АСЧ; РАВНОКЧЕК; ЦЕНАКЧЕК; ДОХОДКЧЕК; ПУО; ЧИСТВНДОХ; ЧИСТНЗ; ДОХОД; ДОХОДСКИДКА; ДОХОДПОГАШ Поисковые функции Используются для упрощения поиска информации по списку данных. АДРЕС; ВЫБОР; СТОЛБЕЦ; СОРТ; ЧИСЛСТОЛБ; Ф.ТЕКСТ; ГПР; ГИПЕРССЫЛКА; ИНДЕКС; ДВССЫЛ; ПРОСМОТР; ПОИСКПОЗ; СМЕЩ; СТРОКА; ЧСТРОК; ТРАНСП; УНИК; ВПР; ПРОСМОТРX; ГСТОЛБИК; ВСТОЛБИК; ПОСТРОК; ПОСТОЛБЦ; СВЕРНСТРОК; СВЕРНСТОЛБЦ; СБРОСИТЬ; ВЗЯТЬ; ВЫБОРСТРОК; ВЫБОРСТОЛБЦ; ПОИСКПОЗX; ФИЛЬТР Информационные функции Используются для предоставления информации о данных в выделенной ячейке или диапазоне ячеек. ЯЧЕЙКА; ТИП.ОШИБКИ; ЕПУСТО; ЕОШ; ЕОШИБКА; ЕЧЁТН; ЕФОРМУЛА; ЕЛОГИЧ; ЕНД; ЕНЕТЕКСТ; ЕЧИСЛО; ЕНЕЧЁТ; ЕССЫЛКА; ЕТЕКСТ; Ч; НД; ЛИСТ; ЛИСТЫ; ТИП Логические функции Используются для выполнения проверки, является ли условие истинным или ложным. И; ЛОЖЬ; ЕСЛИ; ЕСЛИОШИБКА; ЕСНД; ЕСЛИМН; НЕ; ИЛИ; ПЕРЕКЛЮЧ; ИСТИНА; ИСКЛИЛИ" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", @@ -2588,12 +2618,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Вставка изображений", - "body": "В онлайн-редакторе электронных таблиц можно вставлять в электронную таблицу изображения самых популярных форматов. Поддерживаются следующие форматы изображений: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Вставка изображения Для вставки изображения в электронную таблицу: установите курсор там, где требуется поместить изображение, перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, нажмите значок Изображение на верхней панели инструментов, для загрузки изображения выберите одну из следующих опций: при выборе опции Изображение из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть В онлайн-редакторе вы можете выбрать сразу несколько изображений. при выборе опции Изображение по URL откроется окно, в котором можно ввести веб-адрес нужного изображения, а затем нажать кнопку OK при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK После этого изображение будет добавлено на рабочий лист. Изменение параметров изображения После того как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер и положение. Для того чтобы задать точные размеры изображения: выделите мышью изображение, размер которого требуется изменить, щелкните по значку Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели, в разделе Размер задайте нужные значения Ширины и Высоты. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон изображения. Чтобы восстановить реальный размер добавленного изображения, нажмите кнопку Реальный размер. Для того чтобы обрезать изображение: Кнопка Обрезать используется, чтобы обрезать изображение. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать, чтобы активировать маркеры обрезки, которые появятся в углах изображения и в центре каждой его стороны. Вручную перетаскивайте маркеры, чтобы задать область обрезки. Вы можете навести курсор мыши на границу области обрезки, чтобы курсор превратился в значок , и перетащить область обрезки. Чтобы обрезать одну сторону, перетащите маркер, расположенный в центре этой стороны. Чтобы одновременно обрезать две смежных стороны, перетащите один из угловых маркеров. Чтобы равномерно обрезать две противоположные стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании маркера в центре одной из этих сторон. Чтобы равномерно обрезать все стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании любого углового маркера. Когда область обрезки будет задана, еще раз нажмите на кнопку Обрезать, или нажмите на клавишу Esc, или щелкните мышью за пределами области обрезки, чтобы применить изменения. После того как область обрезки будет задана, также можно использовать опции Обрезать, Заливка и Вписать, доступные в выпадающем меню Обрезать. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать еще раз и выберите нужную опцию: При выборе опции Обрезать изображение будет заполнять определенную форму. Вы можете выбрать фигуру из галереи, которая открывается при наведении указателя мыши на опцию Обрезать по фигуре. Вы по-прежнему можете использовать опции Заливка и Вписать, чтобы настроить, как изображение будет соответствовать фигуре. При выборе опции Заливка центральная часть исходного изображения будет сохранена и использована в качестве заливки выбранной области обрезки, в то время как остальные части изображения будут удалены. При выборе опции Вписать размер изображения будет изменен, чтобы оно соответствовало высоте или ширине области обрезки. Никакие части исходного изображения не будут удалены, но внутри выбранной области обрезки могут появиться пустые пространства. Для того чтобы повернуть изображение: выделите мышью изображение, которое требуется повернуть, щелкните по значку Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели, в разделе Поворот нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз) Примечание: вы также можете щелкнуть по изображению правой кнопкой мыши и использовать пункт контекстного меню Поворот. Для замены вставленного изображения: выделите мышью изображение, которое требуется заменить, щелкните по значку Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели, нажмите кнопку Заменить изображение, выберите нужную опцию: Из файла, Из хранилища или По URL и выберите требуемое изображение. Примечание: вы также можете щелкнуть по изображению правой кнопкой мыши и использовать пункт контекстного меню Заменить изображение. Выбранное изображение будет заменено. Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину и цвет Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом. На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображению. Изменение дополнительныx параметров изображения Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры изображения, щелкните по нему правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры изображения. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств изображения: Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть изображение на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать изображение к ячейке позади него. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), изображение будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер изображения также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать изображение к ячейке позади него, не допуская изменения размера изображения. Если ячейка перемещается, изображение будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры изображения останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера изображения при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение. Чтобы удалить вставленное изображение, щелкните по нему и нажмите клавишу Delete. Назначение макроса к изображению Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любому изображению. После назначения макроса, изображение отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на изображение. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по изображению и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК." + "body": "В онлайн-редакторе электронных таблиц можно вставлять в электронную таблицу изображения самых популярных форматов. Поддерживаются следующие форматы изображений: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Вставка изображения Для вставки изображения в электронную таблицу: установите курсор там, где требуется поместить изображение, перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, нажмите значок Изображение на верхней панели инструментов, для загрузки изображения выберите одну из следующих опций: при выборе опции Изображение из файла откроется стандартное диалоговое окно для выбора файлов. Выберите нужный файл на жестком диске компьютера и нажмите кнопку Открыть В онлайн-редакторе вы можете выбрать сразу несколько изображений. при выборе опции Изображение по URL откроется окно, в котором можно ввести веб-адрес нужного изображения, а затем нажать кнопку OK при выборе опции Изображение из хранилища откроется окно Выбрать источник данных. Выберите изображение, сохраненное на вашем портале, и нажмите кнопку OK После этого изображение будет добавлено на рабочий лист. Вы можете сохранить изображение как картинку на жесткий диск при помощи опции Сохранить как рисунок в контекстном меню. Изменение параметров изображения После того как изображение будет добавлено, можно изменить его размер и положение. Для того чтобы задать точные размеры изображения: выделите мышью изображение, размер которого требуется изменить, щелкните по значку Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели, в разделе Размер задайте нужные значения Ширины и Высоты. Если нажата кнопка Сохранять пропорции (в этом случае она выглядит так: ), ширина и высота будут изменены пропорционально, сохраняя исходное соотношение сторон изображения. Чтобы восстановить реальный размер добавленного изображения, нажмите кнопку Реальный размер. Для того чтобы обрезать изображение: Кнопка Обрезать используется, чтобы обрезать изображение. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать, чтобы активировать маркеры обрезки, которые появятся в углах изображения и в центре каждой его стороны. Вручную перетаскивайте маркеры, чтобы задать область обрезки. Вы можете навести курсор мыши на границу области обрезки, чтобы курсор превратился в значок , и перетащить область обрезки. Чтобы обрезать одну сторону, перетащите маркер, расположенный в центре этой стороны. Чтобы одновременно обрезать две смежных стороны, перетащите один из угловых маркеров. Чтобы равномерно обрезать две противоположные стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании маркера в центре одной из этих сторон. Чтобы равномерно обрезать все стороны изображения, удерживайте нажатой клавишу Ctrl при перетаскивании любого углового маркера. Когда область обрезки будет задана, еще раз нажмите на кнопку Обрезать, или нажмите на клавишу Esc, или щелкните мышью за пределами области обрезки, чтобы применить изменения. После того как область обрезки будет задана, также можно использовать опции Обрезать, Заливка и Вписать, доступные в выпадающем меню Обрезать. Нажмите кнопку Обрезать еще раз и выберите нужную опцию: При выборе опции Обрезать изображение будет заполнять определенную форму. Вы можете выбрать фигуру из галереи, которая открывается при наведении указателя мыши на опцию Обрезать по фигуре. Вы по-прежнему можете использовать опции Заливка и Вписать, чтобы настроить, как изображение будет соответствовать фигуре. При выборе опции Заливка центральная часть исходного изображения будет сохранена и использована в качестве заливки выбранной области обрезки, в то время как остальные части изображения будут удалены. При выборе опции Вписать размер изображения будет изменен, чтобы оно соответствовало высоте или ширине области обрезки. Никакие части исходного изображения не будут удалены, но внутри выбранной области обрезки могут появиться пустые пространства. Для того чтобы повернуть изображение: выделите мышью изображение, которое требуется повернуть, щелкните по значку Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели, в разделе Поворот нажмите на одну из кнопок: чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов против часовой стрелки чтобы повернуть изображение на 90 градусов по часовой стрелке чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо) чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз) Примечание: вы также можете щелкнуть по изображению правой кнопкой мыши и использовать пункт контекстного меню Поворот. Для замены вставленного изображения: выделите мышью изображение, которое требуется заменить, щелкните по значку Параметры изображения на правой боковой панели, нажмите кнопку Заменить изображение, выберите нужную опцию: Из файла, Из хранилища или По URL и выберите требуемое изображение. Примечание: вы также можете щелкнуть по изображению правой кнопкой мыши и использовать пункт контекстного меню Заменить изображение. Выбранное изображение будет заменено. Когда изображение выделено, справа также доступен значок Параметры фигуры . Можно щелкнуть по нему, чтобы открыть вкладку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и настроить тип, толщину, цвет и непрозрачность Контуров фигуры, а также изменить тип фигуры, выбрав другую фигуру в меню Изменить автофигуру. Форма изображения изменится соответствующим образом. На вкладке Параметры фигуры также можно использовать опцию Отображать тень, чтобы добавить тень к изображению. Изменение дополнительныx параметров изображения Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры изображения, щелкните по нему правой кнопкой мыши и выберите из контекстного меню пункт Дополнительные параметры изображения. Или нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно свойств изображения: Вкладка Поворот содержит следующие параметры: Угол - используйте эту опцию, чтобы повернуть изображение на точно заданный угол. Введите в поле нужное значение в градусах или скорректируйте его, используя стрелки справа. Отражено - отметьте галочкой опцию По горизонтали, чтобы отразить изображение по горизонтали (слева направо), или отметьте галочкой опцию По вертикали, чтобы отразить изображение по вертикали (сверху вниз). Вкладка Привязка к ячейке содержит следующие параметры: Перемещать и изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать изображение к ячейке позади него. Если ячейка перемещается (например, при вставке или удалении нескольких строк/столбцов), изображение будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой. При увеличении или уменьшении ширины или высоты ячейки размер изображения также будет изменяться. Перемещать, но не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет привязать изображение к ячейке позади него, не допуская изменения размера изображения. Если ячейка перемещается, изображение будет перемещаться вместе с ячейкой, но при изменении размера ячейки размеры изображения останутся неизменными. Не перемещать и не изменять размеры вместе с ячейками - эта опция позволяет запретить перемещение или изменение размера изображения при изменении положения или размера ячейки. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит изображение. Чтобы удалить вставленное изображение, щелкните по нему и нажмите клавишу Delete. Назначение макроса к изображению Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любому изображению. После назначения макроса, изображение отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на изображение. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по изображению и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "title": "Вставка объектов SmartArt", - "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Вставляйте новые графические объекты SmartArt или редактируйте объекты SmartArt, добавленные с помощью сторонних редакторов. Чтобы вставить объект SmartArt, перейдите на вкладку Вставка, нажмите кнопку SmartArt, наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс, выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню. Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели: Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку объекта SmartArt. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: Доступные пункты меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона объекта SmartArt какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем объект SmartArt, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура объекта SmartArt. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью. Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры." + "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Вставляйте новые графические объекты SmartArt или редактируйте объекты SmartArt, добавленные с помощью сторонних редакторов. Чтобы вставить объект SmartArt, перейдите на вкладку Вставка, нажмите кнопку SmartArt, наведите курсор на один из доступных стилей макета, например, Список или Процесс, выберите один из доступных типов макета из списка, появившегося справа от выделенного пункта меню, вы можете сохранить объект SmartArt как изображение на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Вы можете настроить параметры SmartArt на правой панели: Обратите внимание, что настройки цвета, стиля и типа формы могут быть настроены индивидуально. Заливка - используйте этот раздел, чтобы выбрать заливку объекта SmartArt. Можно выбрать следующие варианты: Заливка цветом - выберите эту опцию, чтобы задать сплошной цвет, которым требуется заполнить внутреннее пространство выбранного объекта SmartArt. Градиентная заливка - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt двумя цветами, плавно переходящими друг в друга. Настраивайте градиентную заливку без ограничений. Нажмите значок Параметры фигуры , чтобы открыть меню Заливка на правой панели: Доступные пункты меню: Стиль - выберите Линейный или Радиальный: Линейный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись слева направо, сверху вниз или под любым выбранным вами углом в одном направлении. Чтобы выбрать предустановленное направление, щелкните на стрелку рядом с окном предварительного просмотра Направление или же задайте точное значение угла градиента в поле Угол. Радиальный используется, когда вам нужно, чтобы цвета изменялись по кругу от центра к краям. Точка градиента - это определенная точка перехода от одного цвета к другому. Чтобы добавить точку градиента, используйте кнопку Добавить точку градиента или ползунок. Вы можете добавить до 10 точек градиента. Каждая следующая добавленная точка градиента никоим образом не повлияет на внешний вид текущей градиентной заливки. Чтобы удалить определенную точку градиента, используйте кнопку Удалить точку градиента. Чтобы изменить положение точки градиента, используйте ползунок или укажите Положение в процентах для точного местоположения. Чтобы применить цвет к точке градиента, щелкните точку на панели ползунка, а затем нажмите Цвет, чтобы выбрать нужный цвет. Изображение или текстура - выберите эту опцию, чтобы использовать в качестве фона объекта SmartArt какое-то изображение или готовую текстуру. Если вы хотите использовать изображение в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, можно добавить изображение Из файла, выбрав его на жестком диске компьютера, или По URL, вставив в открывшемся окне соответствующий URL-адрес, или Из хранилища, выбрав нужное изображение, сохраненное на портале. Если вы хотите использовать текстуру в качестве фона объекта SmartArt, разверните меню Из текстуры и выберите нужную предустановленную текстуру. В настоящее время доступны следующие текстуры: Холст, Картон, Темная ткань, Песок, Гранит, Серая бумага, Вязание, Кожа, Крафт-бумага, Папирус, Дерево. В том случае, если выбранное изображение имеет большие или меньшие размеры, чем объект SmartArt, можно выбрать из выпадающего списка параметр Растяжение или Плитка. Опция Растяжение позволяет подогнать размер изображения под размер объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Опция Плитка позволяет отображать только часть большего изображения, сохраняя его исходные размеры, или повторять меньшее изображение, сохраняя его исходные размеры, по всей площади объекта SmartArt, чтобы оно могло полностью заполнить пространство. Примечание: любая выбранная предустановленная текстура полностью заполняет пространство, но в случае необходимости можно применить эффект Растяжение. Узор - выберите эту опцию, чтобы залить объект SmartArt с помощью двухцветного рисунка, который образован регулярно повторяющимися элементами. Узор - выберите один из готовых рисунков в меню. Цвет переднего плана - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет элементов узора. Цвет фона - нажмите на это цветовое поле, чтобы изменить цвет фона узора. Без заливки - выберите эту опцию, если вы вообще не хотите использовать заливку. Контур - используйте этот раздел, чтобы изменить толщину, цвет или тип контура объекта SmartArt. Для изменения толщины контура выберите из выпадающего списка Толщина одну из доступных опций. Доступны следующие опции: 0.5 пт, 1 пт, 1.5 пт, 2.25 пт, 3 пт, 4.5 пт, 6 пт. Или выберите опцию Без линии, если вы вообще не хотите использовать контур. Для изменения цвета контура щелкните по цветному прямоугольнику и выберите нужный цвет. Для изменения типа контура выберите нужную опцию из соответствующего выпадающего списка (по умолчанию применяется сплошная линия, ее можно изменить на одну из доступных пунктирных линий). Для изменения непрозрачности контура введите необходимое значение вручную или воспользуйтесь соответствующим ползунком. Отображать тень - отметьте эту опцию, чтобы отображать объект SmartArt с тенью. Нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры, чтобы открыть дополнительные параметры." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSparklines.htm", @@ -2608,7 +2638,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Вставка текстовых объектов", - "body": "Чтобы привлечь внимание к определенной части электронной таблицы, можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). Добавление текстового объекта Текстовый объект можно добавить в любом месте рабочего листа. Для этого: перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите нужный тип текстового объекта: чтобы добавить текстовое поле, щелкните по значку Надпись на верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните там, где требуется поместить надпись, удерживайте кнопку мыши и перетаскивайте границу текстового поля, чтобы задать его размер. Когда вы отпустите кнопку мыши, в добавленном текстовом поле появится курсор, и вы сможете ввести свой текст. Примечание: надпись можно также вставить, если щелкнуть по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов и выбрать фигуру из группы Основные фигуры. чтобы добавить объект Text Art, щелкните по значку Text Art на верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните по нужному шаблону стиля – объект Text Art будет добавлен в центре рабочего листа. Выделите мышью стандартный текст внутри текстового поля и напишите вместо него свой текст. щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к рабочему листу. Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним). Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку с текстом внутри (у объектов Text Art по умолчанию невидимые границы), а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста. Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален. Форматирование текстового поля Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии. чтобы вручную изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры. чтобы изменить заливку, контур, заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции. чтобы расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, выровнять несколько текстовых полей относительно друг друга, повернуть или отразить текстовое поле, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. Подробнее о выравнивании и расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. чтобы создать колонки текста внутри текстового поля, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля, нажмите на пункт меню Дополнительные параметры фигуры и перейдите на вкладку Колонки в окне Фигура - дополнительные параметры. Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии. Примечание: форматирование текста можно изменить и в том случае, если выделено текстовое поле, а не сам текст. В этом случае любые изменения будут применены ко всему тексту в текстовом поле. Некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта (тип, размер, цвет и стили оформления шрифта) можно отдельно применить к предварительно выделенному фрагменту текста. Настройте параметры форматирования шрифта (измените его тип, размер, цвет и примените стили оформления) с помощью соответствующих значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Некоторые дополнительные параметры шрифта можно также изменить на вкладке Шрифт в окне свойств абзаца. Чтобы его открыть, щелкнуть правой кнопкой мыши по тексту в текстовом поле и выберите опцию Дополнительные параметры текста. Выровняйте текст внутри текстового поля по горизонтали с помощью соответствующих значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов или в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Выровняйте текст внутри текстового поля по вертикали с помощью соответствующих значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Можно также щелкнуть по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выбрать опцию Вертикальное выравнивание, а затем - один из доступных вариантов: По верхнему краю, По центру или По нижнему краю. Поверните текст внутри текстового поля. Для этого щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Направление текста, а затем выберите один из доступных вариантов: Горизонтальное (выбран по умолчанию), Повернуть текст вниз (задает вертикальное направление, сверху вниз) или Повернуть текст вверх (задает вертикальное направление, снизу вверх). Создайте маркированный или нумерованный список. Для этого щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите в контекстном меню пункт Маркеры и нумерация, а затем выберите один из доступных знаков маркера или стилей нумерации. Опция Параметры списка позволяет открыть окно Параметры списка, в котором можно настроить параметры для соответствующего типа списка: Тип (маркированный список) - позволяет выбрать нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. При нажатии на поле Новый маркер открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. При нажатии на поле Новое изображение появляется новое поле Импорт, в котором можно выбрать новое изображение для маркеров Из файла, По URL или Из хранилища. Тип (нумерованный список) - позволяет выбрать нужный формат нумерованного списка. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер для каждого из маркеров или нумераций в зависимости от текущего размера текста. Может принимать значение от 25% до 400%. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров или нумерации. Вы можете выбрать на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов, или задать пользовательский цвет. Начать с - позволяет задать нужное числовое значение, с которого вы хотите начать нумерацию. Вставьте гиперссылку. Задайте междустрочный интервал и интервал между абзацами для многострочного текста внутри текстового поля с помощью вкладки Параметры текста на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее открыть, щелкните по значку Параметры текста . Здесь можно задать высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце, а также поля между текущим и предыдущим или последующим абзацем. Междустрочный интервал - задайте высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце. Вы можете выбрать одну из двух опций: множитель (устанавливает междустрочный интервал, который может быть выражен в числах больше 1), точно (устанавливает фиксированный междустрочный интервал). Необходимое значение можно указать в поле справа. Интервал между абзацами - задайте величину свободного пространства между абзацами. Перед - задайте величину свободного пространства перед абзацем. После - задайте величину свободного пространства после абзаца. Примечание: эти параметры также можно найти в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Изменение дополнительных параметров абзаца Измените дополнительные параметры абзаца (можно настроить отступы абзаца и позиции табуляции для многострочного текста внутри текстового поля и применить некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта). Установите курсор в пределах нужного абзаца - на правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры текста. Нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры. Также можно щелкнуть по тексту в текстовом поле правой кнопкой мыши и использовать пункт контекстного меню Дополнительные параметры текста. Откроется окно свойств абзаца: На вкладке Отступы и интервалы можно выполнить следующие действия: изменить тип выравнивания текста внутри абзаца, изменить отступы абзаца от внутренних полей текстового объекта, Слева - задайте смещение всего абзаца от левого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Справа - задайте смещение всего абзаца от правого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Первая строка - задайте отступ для первой строки абзаца, выбрав соответствующий пункт меню ((нет), Отступ, Выступ) и изменив числовое значение для Отступа или Выступа, заданное по умолчанию, изменить междустрочный интервал внутри абзаца. Вкладка Шрифт содержит следующие параметры: Зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Двойное зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста двойной чертой, проведенной по буквам. Надстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Подстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Малые прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы строчными. Все прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы прописными. Межзнаковый интервал - используется, чтобы задать расстояние между символами. Увеличьте значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Разреженный интервал, или уменьшите значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Уплотненный интервал. Используйте кнопки со стрелками или введите нужное значение в поле ввода. Все изменения будут отображены в расположенном ниже поле предварительного просмотра. На вкладке Табуляция можно изменить позиции табуляции, то есть те позиции, куда переходит курсор при нажатии клавиши Tab на клавиатуре. Позиция табуляции По умолчанию имеет значение 2.54 см. Это значение можно уменьшить или увеличить, используя кнопки со стрелками или введя в поле нужное значение. Позиция - используется, чтобы задать пользовательские позиции табуляции. Введите в этом поле нужное значение, настройте его более точно, используя кнопки со стрелками, и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Пользовательская позиция табуляции будет добавлена в список в расположенном ниже поле. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы задать нужный тип выравнивания для каждой из позиций табуляции в расположенном выше списке. Выделите нужную позицию табуляции в списке, выберите в выпадающем списке Выравнивание опцию По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю и нажмите на кнопку Задать. По левому краю - выравнивает текст по левому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется вправо от позиции табуляции. По центру - центрирует текст относительно позиции табуляции. По правому краю - выравнивает текст по правому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется влево от позиции табуляции. Для удаления позиций табуляции из списка выделите позицию табуляции и нажмите кнопку Удалить или Удалить все. Назначение макроса к текстовому объекту Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любому текстовому объекту. После назначения макроса, графический объект отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на объект. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по текстовому объекту и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК. Изменение стиля объекта Text Art Выделите текстовый объект и щелкните по значку Параметры объектов Text Art на правой боковой панели. Измените примененный стиль текста, выбрав из галереи новый Шаблон. Можно также дополнительно изменить этот базовый стиль, выбрав другой тип, размер шрифта и т.д. Измените заливку и контур шрифта. Доступны точно такие же опции, как и для автофигур. Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба." + "body": "Чтобы привлечь внимание к определенной части электронной таблицы, можно вставить надпись (прямоугольную рамку, внутри которой вводится текст) или объект Text Art (текстовое поле с предварительно заданным стилем и цветом шрифта, позволяющее применять текстовые эффекты). Добавление текстового объекта Текстовый объект можно добавить в любом месте рабочего листа. Для этого: перейдите на вкладку Вставка верхней панели инструментов, выберите нужный тип текстового объекта: чтобы добавить текстовое поле, щелкните по значку Надпись на верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните там, где требуется поместить надпись, удерживайте кнопку мыши и перетаскивайте границу текстового поля, чтобы задать его размер. Когда вы отпустите кнопку мыши, в добавленном текстовом поле появится курсор, и вы сможете ввести свой текст. Примечание: надпись можно также вставить, если щелкнуть по значку Фигура на верхней панели инструментов и выбрать фигуру из группы Основные фигуры. чтобы добавить объект Text Art, щелкните по значку Text Art на верхней панели инструментов, затем щелкните по нужному шаблону стиля – объект Text Art будет добавлен в центре рабочего листа. Выделите мышью стандартный текст внутри текстового поля и напишите вместо него свой текст. щелкните за пределами текстового объекта, чтобы применить изменения и вернуться к рабочему листу. Текст внутри текстового объекта является его частью (при перемещении или повороте текстового объекта текст будет перемещаться или поворачиваться вместе с ним). Поскольку вставленный текстовый объект представляет собой прямоугольную рамку с текстом внутри (у объектов Text Art по умолчанию невидимые границы), а эта рамка является обычной автофигурой, можно изменять свойства и фигуры, и текста. Вы можете сохранить текстовое поле в виде изображенияя на жесткий диск. Для этого нажмите пункт Сохранить как рисунок контекстного меню. Чтобы удалить добавленный текстовый объект, щелкните по краю текстового поля и нажмите клавишу Delete на клавиатуре. Текст внутри текстового поля тоже будет удален. Форматирование текстового поля Выделите текстовое поле, щелкнув по его границе, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текстовое поле выделено, его границы отображаются как сплошные, а не пунктирные линии. чтобы вручную изменить размер текстового поля, переместить, повернуть его, используйте специальные маркеры по краям фигуры. чтобы изменить заливку, контур, заменить прямоугольное поле на какую-то другую фигуру или открыть дополнительные параметры фигуры, щелкните по значку Параметры фигуры на правой боковой панели и используйте соответствующие опции. чтобы расположить текстовые поля в определенном порядке относительно других объектов, выровнять несколько текстовых полей относительно друг друга, повернуть или отразить текстовое поле, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля и используйте опции контекстного меню. Подробнее о выравнивании и расположении объектов в определенном порядке рассказывается на этой странице. чтобы создать колонки текста внутри текстового поля, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по границе текстового поля, нажмите на пункт меню Дополнительные параметры фигуры и перейдите на вкладку Колонки в окне Фигура - дополнительные параметры. Форматирование текста внутри текстового поля Щелкните по тексту внутри текстового поля, чтобы можно было изменить его свойства. Когда текст выделен, границы текстового поля отображаются как пунктирные линии. Примечание: форматирование текста можно изменить и в том случае, если выделено текстовое поле, а не сам текст. В этом случае любые изменения будут применены ко всему тексту в текстовом поле. Некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта (тип, размер, цвет и стили оформления шрифта) можно отдельно применить к предварительно выделенному фрагменту текста. Настройте параметры форматирования шрифта (измените его тип, размер, цвет и примените стили оформления) с помощью соответствующих значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Некоторые дополнительные параметры шрифта можно также изменить на вкладке Шрифт в окне свойств абзаца. Чтобы его открыть, щелкнуть правой кнопкой мыши по тексту в текстовом поле и выберите опцию Дополнительные параметры текста. Выровняйте текст внутри текстового поля по горизонтали с помощью соответствующих значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов или в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Выровняйте текст внутри текстового поля по вертикали с помощью соответствующих значков на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов. Можно также щелкнуть по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выбрать опцию Вертикальное выравнивание, а затем - один из доступных вариантов: По верхнему краю, По центру или По нижнему краю. Поверните текст внутри текстового поля. Для этого щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите опцию Направление текста, а затем выберите один из доступных вариантов: Горизонтальное (выбран по умолчанию), Повернуть текст вниз (задает вертикальное направление, сверху вниз) или Повернуть текст вверх (задает вертикальное направление, снизу вверх). Создайте маркированный или нумерованный список. Для этого щелкните по тексту правой кнопкой мыши, выберите в контекстном меню пункт Маркеры и нумерация, а затем выберите один из доступных знаков маркера или стилей нумерации. Опция Параметры списка позволяет открыть окно Параметры списка, в котором можно настроить параметры для соответствующего типа списка: Тип (маркированный список) - позволяет выбрать нужный символ, используемый для маркированного списка. При нажатии на поле Новый маркер открывается окно Символ, в котором можно выбрать один из доступных символов. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с символами вы можете обратиться к этой статье. При нажатии на поле Новое изображение появляется новое поле Импорт, в котором можно выбрать новое изображение для маркеров Из файла, По URL или Из хранилища. Тип (нумерованный список) - позволяет выбрать нужный формат нумерованного списка. Размер - позволяет выбрать нужный размер для каждого из маркеров или нумераций в зависимости от текущего размера текста. Может принимать значение от 25% до 400%. Цвет - позволяет выбрать нужный цвет маркеров или нумерации. Вы можете выбрать на палитре один из цветов темы или стандартных цветов, или задать пользовательский цвет. Начать с - позволяет задать нужное числовое значение, с которого вы хотите начать нумерацию. Вставьте гиперссылку. Задайте междустрочный интервал и интервал между абзацами для многострочного текста внутри текстового поля с помощью вкладки Параметры текста на правой боковой панели. Чтобы ее открыть, щелкните по значку Параметры текста . Здесь можно задать высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце, а также поля между текущим и предыдущим или последующим абзацем. Междустрочный интервал - задайте высоту строки для строк текста в абзаце. Вы можете выбрать одну из двух опций: множитель (устанавливает междустрочный интервал, который может быть выражен в числах больше 1), точно (устанавливает фиксированный междустрочный интервал). Необходимое значение можно указать в поле справа. Интервал между абзацами - задайте величину свободного пространства между абзацами. Перед - задайте величину свободного пространства перед абзацем. После - задайте величину свободного пространства после абзаца. Примечание: эти параметры также можно найти в окне Абзац - Дополнительные параметры. Изменение дополнительных параметров абзаца Измените дополнительные параметры абзаца (можно настроить отступы абзаца и позиции табуляции для многострочного текста внутри текстового поля и применить некоторые параметры форматирования шрифта). Установите курсор в пределах нужного абзаца - на правой боковой панели будет активирована вкладка Параметры текста. Нажмите на ссылку Дополнительные параметры. Также можно щелкнуть по тексту в текстовом поле правой кнопкой мыши и использовать пункт контекстного меню Дополнительные параметры текста. Откроется окно свойств абзаца: На вкладке Отступы и интервалы можно выполнить следующие действия: изменить тип выравнивания текста внутри абзаца, изменить отступы абзаца от внутренних полей текстового объекта, Слева - задайте смещение всего абзаца от левого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Справа - задайте смещение всего абзаца от правого внутреннего поля текстового блока, указав нужное числовое значение, Первая строка - задайте отступ для первой строки абзаца, выбрав соответствующий пункт меню ((нет), Отступ, Выступ) и изменив числовое значение для Отступа или Выступа, заданное по умолчанию, изменить междустрочный интервал внутри абзаца. Вкладка Шрифт содержит следующие параметры: Зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста чертой, проведенной по буквам. Двойное зачёркивание - используется для зачеркивания текста двойной чертой, проведенной по буквам. Надстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в верхней части строки, например, как в дробях. Подстрочные - используется, чтобы сделать текст мельче и поместить его в нижней части строки, например, как в химических формулах. Малые прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы строчными. Все прописные - используется, чтобы сделать все буквы прописными. Межзнаковый интервал - используется, чтобы задать расстояние между символами. Увеличьте значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Разреженный интервал, или уменьшите значение, заданное по умолчанию, чтобы применить Уплотненный интервал. Используйте кнопки со стрелками или введите нужное значение в поле ввода. Все изменения будут отображены в расположенном ниже поле предварительного просмотра. На вкладке Табуляция можно изменить позиции табуляции, то есть те позиции, куда переходит курсор при нажатии клавиши Tab на клавиатуре. Позиция табуляции По умолчанию имеет значение 2.54 см. Это значение можно уменьшить или увеличить, используя кнопки со стрелками или введя в поле нужное значение. Позиция - используется, чтобы задать пользовательские позиции табуляции. Введите в этом поле нужное значение, настройте его более точно, используя кнопки со стрелками, и нажмите на кнопку Задать. Пользовательская позиция табуляции будет добавлена в список в расположенном ниже поле. Выравнивание - используется, чтобы задать нужный тип выравнивания для каждой из позиций табуляции в расположенном выше списке. Выделите нужную позицию табуляции в списке, выберите в выпадающем списке Выравнивание опцию По левому краю, По центру или По правому краю и нажмите на кнопку Задать. По левому краю - выравнивает текст по левому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется вправо от позиции табуляции. По центру - центрирует текст относительно позиции табуляции. По правому краю - выравнивает текст по правому краю относительно позиции табуляции; при наборе текст движется влево от позиции табуляции. Для удаления позиций табуляции из списка выделите позицию табуляции и нажмите кнопку Удалить или Удалить все. Назначение макроса к текстовому объекту Вы можете обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице, назначив макрос любому текстовому объекту. После назначения макроса, графический объект отображается как кнопка, и вы можете запускать макрос всякий раз, когда нажимаете на объект. Чтобы назначить макрос, Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по текстовому объекту и в контекстном меню выберите пункт Назначить макрос. Откроется окно Назначить макрос Выберите макрос из списка или вручную введите название макроса и нажмите ОК. Изменение стиля объекта Text Art Выделите текстовый объект и щелкните по значку Параметры объектов Text Art на правой боковой панели. Измените примененный стиль текста, выбрав из галереи новый Шаблон. Можно также дополнительно изменить этот базовый стиль, выбрав другой тип, размер шрифта и т.д. Измените заливку и контур шрифта. Доступны точно такие же опции, как и для автофигур. Примените текстовый эффект, выбрав нужный тип трансформации текста из галереи Трансформация. Можно скорректировать степень искривления текста, перетаскивая розовый маркер в форме ромба." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm", @@ -2643,17 +2673,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm", "title": "Создание и редактирование сводных таблиц", - "body": "Сводные таблицы позволяют группировать и систематизировать данные из больших наборов данных для получения сводной информации. Вы можете упорядочивать данные множеством разных способов, чтобы отображать только нужную информацию и сфокусироваться на важных аспектах. Создание новой сводной таблицы Для создания сводной таблицы: Подготовьте исходный набор данных, который требуется использовать для создания сводной таблицы. Он должен включать заголовки столбцов. Набор данных не должен содержать пустых строк или столбцов. Выделите любую ячейку в исходном диапазоне данных. Перейдите на вкладку Сводная таблица верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку Вставить таблицу . Если вы хотите создать сводную таблицу на базе форматированной таблицы, также можно использовать опцию Вставить сводную таблицу на вкладке Параметры таблицы правой боковой панели. Откроется окно Создать сводную таблицу. Диапазон исходных данных уже указан. В этом случае будут использоваться все данные из исходного диапазона. Если вы хотите изменить диапазон данных (например, включить только часть исходных данных), нажмите на кнопку . В окне Выбор диапазона данных введите нужный диапазон данных в формате Лист1!$A$1:$E$10. Вы также можете выделить нужный диапазон данных на листе с помощью мыши. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Укажите, где требуется разместить сводную таблицу. Опция Новый лист выбрана по умолчанию. Она позволяет разместить сводную таблицу на новом рабочем листе. Также можно выбрать опцию Существующий лист и затем выбрать определенную ячейку. В этом случае выбранная ячейка будет правой верхней ячейкой созданной сводной таблицы. Чтобы выбрать ячейку, нажмите на кнопку . В окне Выбор диапазона данных введите адрес ячейки в формате Лист1!$G$2. Также можно щелкнуть по нужной ячейке на листе. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Когда местоположение таблицы будет выбрано, нажмите кнопку OK в окне Создать таблицу. Пустая сводная таблица будет вставлена в выбранном местоположении. Откроется вкладка Параметры сводной таблицы на правой боковой панели. Эту вкладку можно скрыть или показать, нажав на значок . Выбор полей для отображения Раздел Выбрать поля содержит названия полей, соответствующие заголовкам столбцов в исходном наборе данных. Каждое поле содержит значения из соответствующего столбца исходной таблицы. Ниже доступны следующие четыре поля: Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки и Значения. Отметьте галочками поля, которые требуется отобразить в сводной таблице. Когда вы отметите поле, оно будет добавлено в один из доступных разделов на правой боковой панели в зависимости от типа данных и будет отображено в сводной таблице. Поля, содержащие текстовые значения, будут добавлены в раздел Строки; поля, содержащие числовые значения, будут добавлены в раздел Значения. Вы можете просто перетаскивать поля в нужный раздел, а также перетаскивать поля между разделами, чтобы быстро перестроить сводную таблицу. Чтобы удалить поле из текущего раздела, перетащите его за пределы этого раздела. Чтобы добавить поле в нужный раздел, также можно нажать на черную стрелку справа от поля в разделе Выбрать поля и выбрать нужную опцию из меню: Добавить в фильтры, Добавить в строки, Добавить в столбцы, Добавить в значения. Ниже приводятся примеры использования разделов Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки и Значения. При добавлении поля в раздел Фильтры над сводной таблицей будет добавлен отдельный фильтр. Он будет применен ко всей сводной таблице. Если нажать на кнопку со стрелкой в добавленном фильтре, вы увидите значения из выбранного поля. Если снять галочки с некоторых значений в окне фильтра и нажать кнопку OK, значения, с которых снято выделение, не будут отображаться в сводной таблице. При добавлении поля в раздел Столбцы, сводная таблица будет содержать столько же столбцов, сколько значений содержится в выбранном поле. Также будет добавлен столбец Общий итог. При добавлении поля в раздел Строки, сводная таблица будет содержать столько же строк, сколько значений содержится в выбранном поле. Также будет добавлена строка Общий итог. При добавлении поля в раздел Значения в сводной таблице будет отображаться суммирующее значение для всех числовых значений из выбранных полей. Если поле содержит текстовые значения, будет отображаться количество значений. Функцию, которая используется для вычисления суммирующего значения, можно изменить в настройках поля. Упорядочивание полей и изменение их свойств Когда поля будут добавлены в нужные разделы, ими можно управлять, чтобы изменить макет и формат сводной таблицы. Нажмите на черную стрелку справа от поля в разделе Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки или Значения, чтобы открыть контекстное меню поля. С его помощью можно: Переместить выбранное поле Вверх, Вниз, В начало или В конец текущего раздела, если в текущий раздел добавлено несколько полей. Переместить выбранное поле в другой раздел - в Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки или Значения. Опция, соответствующая текущему разделу, будет неактивна. Удалить выбранное поле из текущего раздела. Изменить параметры выбранного поля. Параметры полей из раздела Фильтры, Столбцы и Строки выглядят одинаково: На вкладке Макет содержатся следующие опции: Опция Имя источника позволяет посмотреть имя поля, соответствующее заголовку столбца из исходного набора данных. Опция Пользовательское имя позволяет изменить имя выбранного поля, отображаемое в сводной таблице. В разделе Форма отчета можно изменить способ отображения выбранного поля в сводной таблице: Выберите нужный макет для выбранного поля в сводной таблице: В форме В виде таблицы отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. В форме Структуры отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. В ней также можно отображать промежуточные итоги над каждой группой. В Компактной форме элементы из разных полей раздела строк отображаются в одном столбце. Опция Повторять метки элементов в каждой строке позволяет визуально группировать строки или столбцы при наличии нескольких полей в табличной форме. Опция Добавлять пустую строку после каждой записи позволяет добавлять пустые строки после элементов выбранного поля. Опция Показывать промежуточные итоги позволяет выбрать, надо ли отображать промежуточные итоги для выбранного поля. Можно выбрать одну из опций: Показывать в заголовке группы или Показывать в нижней части группы. Опция Показывать элементы без данных позволяет показать или скрыть пустые элементы в выбранном поле. На вкладке Промежуточные итоги можно выбрать Функции для промежуточных итогов. Отметьте галочкой нужную функцию в списке: Сумма, Количество, Среднее, Макс, Мин, Произведение, Количество чисел, Стандотклон, Стандотклонп, Дисп, Диспр. Параметры поля значений Опция Имя источника позволяет посмотреть имя поля, соответствующее заголовку столбца из исходного набора данных. Опция Пользовательское имя позволяет изменить имя выбранного поля, отображаемое в сводной таблице. В списке Операция можно выбрать функцию, используемую для вычисления суммирующего значения всех значений из этого поля. По умолчанию для числовых значений используется функция Сумма, а для текстовых значений - функция Количество. Доступны следующие функции: Сумма, Количество, Среднее, Макс, Мин, Произведение. Группировка и разгруппировка данных Данные в сводных таблицах можно сгруппировать в соответствии с индивидуальными требованиями. Группировка может быть выполнена по датам и основным числам. Группировка дат Чтобы сгруппировать даты, создайте сводную таблицу, содержащую необходимые даты. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по любой ячейке в сводной таблице с датой, в контекстном меню выберите параметр Сгруппировать и установите необходимые параметры в открывшемся окне. Начиная с - по умолчанию выбирается первая дата в исходных данных. Чтобы ее изменить, введите в это поле нужную дату. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать начальную точку. Заканчивая в - по умолчанию выбирается последняя дата в исходных данных. Чтобы ее изменить, введите в это поле нужную дату. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать конечную точку. По - параметры Секунды, Минуты и Часы группируют данные в соответствии со временем, указанным в исходных данных. Параметр Месяцы исключает дни и оставляет только месяцы. Опция Кварталы работает при следующем условии: четыре месяца составляют квартал Кв1, Кв2 и т.д. опция Годы группирует даты по годам, указанным в исходных данных. Комбинируйте варианты, чтобы добиться желаемого результата. Количество дней - устанавливает необходимое значение для определения диапазона дат. По завершении нажмите ОК. Группировка чисел Чтобы сгруппировать числа, создайте сводную таблицу, включающую набор необходимых чисел. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши любую ячейку в сводной таблице с номером, в контекстном меню выберите опцию Сгруппировать и установите необходимые параметры в открывшемся окне. Начиная с - по умолчанию выбирается наименьшее число в исходных данных. Чтобы изменить его, введите в это поле нужное число. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать наименьшее число. Заканчивая в - по умолчанию выбирается наибольшее число в исходных данных. Чтобы изменить его, введите в это поле нужный номер. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать наибольшее число. По - установить необходимый интервал для группировки номеров. Например, «2» сгруппирует набор чисел от 1 до 10 как и «1-2», «3-4» и т.д. По завершении нажмите ОК. Разгруппировка данных Чтобы разгруппировать ранее сгруппированные данные, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши любую ячейку в группе, выберите опцию Разгруппировать в контекстном меню. Изменение оформления сводных таблиц Опции, доступные на верхней панели инструментов, позволяют изменить способ отображения сводной таблицы. Эти параметры применяются ко всей сводной таблице. Чтобы активировать инструменты редактирования на верхней панели инструментов, выделите мышью хотя бы одну ячейку в сводной таблице. В выпадающем списке Макет отчета можно выбрать нужный макет для сводной таблицы: Показать в сжатой форме - позволяет отображать элементы из разных полей раздела строк в одном столбце. Показать в форме структуры - позволяет отображать сводную таблицу в классическом стиле. В этой форме отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. В ней также можно отображать промежуточные итоги над каждой группой. Показать в табличной форме - позволяет отображать сводную таблицу в традиционном табличном формате. В этой форме отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. Повторять все метки элементов - позволяет визуально группировать строки или столбцы при наличии нескольких полей в табличной форме. Не повторять все метки элементов - позволяет скрыть метки элементов при наличии нескольких полей в табличной форме. В выпадающем списке Пустые строки можно выбрать, надо ли отображать пустые строки после элементов: Вставлять пустую строку после каждого элемента - позволяет добавить пустые строки после элементов. Удалить пустую строку после каждого элемента - позволяет убрать добавленные пустые строки. В выпадающем списке Промежуточные итоги можно выбрать, надо ли отображать промежуточные итоги в сводной таблице: Не показывать промежуточные итоги - позволяет скрыть промежуточные итоги для всех элементов. Показывать все промежуточные итоги в нижней части группы - позволяет отобразить промежуточные итоги под строками, для которых производится промежуточное суммирование. Показывать все промежуточные итоги в верхней части группы - позволяет отобразить промежуточные итоги над строками, для которых производится промежуточное суммирование. В выпадающем списке Общие итоги можно выбрать, надо ли отображать общие итоги в сводной таблице: Отключить для строк и столбцов - позволяет скрыть общие итоги как для строк, так и для столбцов. Включить для строк и столбцов - позволяет отобразить общие итоги как для строк, так и для столбцов. Включить только для строк - позволяет отобразить общие итоги только для строк. Включить только для столбцов - позволяет отобразить общие итоги только для столбцов. Примечание: аналогичные настройки также доступны в окне дополнительных параметров сводной таблицы в разделе Общие итоги вкладки Название и макет. Кнопка Выделить позволяет выделить всю сводную таблицу. Если вы изменили данные в исходном наборе данных, выделите сводную таблицу и нажмите кнопку Обновить, чтобы обновить сводную таблицу. Изменение стиля сводных таблиц Вы можете изменить оформление сводных таблиц в электронной таблице с помощью инструментов редактирования стиля, доступных на верхней панели инструментов. Чтобы активировать инструменты редактирования на верхней панели инструментов, выделите мышью хотя бы одну ячейку в сводной таблице. Параметры строк и столбцов позволяют выделить некоторые строки или столбцы при помощи особого форматирования, или выделить разные строки и столбцы с помощью разных цветов фона для их четкого разграничения. Доступны следующие опции: Заголовки строк - позволяет выделить заголовки строк при помощи особого форматирования. Заголовки столбцов - позволяет выделить заголовки столбцов при помощи особого форматирования. Чередовать строки - включает чередование цвета фона для четных и нечетных строк. Чередовать столбцы - включает чередование цвета фона для четных и нечетных столбцов. Список шаблонов позволяет выбрать один из готовых стилей сводных таблиц. Каждый шаблон сочетает в себе определенные параметры форматирования, такие как цвет фона, стиль границ, чередование строк или столбцов и т.д. Набор шаблонов отображается по-разному в зависимости от параметров, выбранных для строк и столбцов. Например, если вы отметили опции Заголовки строк и Чередовать столбцы, отображаемый список шаблонов будет содержать только шаблоны с выделенными заголовками строк и включенным чередованием столбцов. Фильтрация, сортировка и создание срезов в сводных таблицах Вы можете фильтровать сводные таблицы по подписям или значениям и использовать дополнительные параметры сортировки. Фильтрация Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой в Названиях строк или Названиях столбцов сводной таблицы. Откроется список команд фильтра: Настройте параметры фильтра. Можно действовать одним из следующих способов: выбрать данные, которые надо отображать, или отфильтровать данные по определенным критериям. Выбор данных, которые надо отображать Снимите флажки рядом с данными, которые требуется скрыть. Для удобства все данные в списке команд фильтра отсортированы в порядке возрастания. Примечание: флажок (пусто) соответствует пустым ячейкам. Он доступен, если в выделенном диапазоне есть хотя бы одна пустая ячейка. Чтобы облегчить этот процесс, используйте поле поиска. Введите в этом поле свой запрос полностью или частично - в списке ниже будут отображены значения, содержащие эти символы. Также будут доступны следующие две опции: Выделить все результаты поиска - выбрана по умолчанию. Позволяет выделить все значения в списке, соответствующие вашему запросу. Добавить выделенный фрагмент в фильтр - если установить этот флажок, выбранные значения не будут скрыты после применения фильтра. После того как вы выберете все нужные данные, нажмите кнопку OK в списке команд фильтра, чтобы применить фильтр. Фильтрация данных по определенным критериям В правой части окна фильтра можно выбрать команду Фильтр подписей или Фильтр значений, а затем выбрать одну из опций в подменю: Для Фильтра подписей доступны следующие опции: Для текстовых значений: Равно..., Не равно..., Начинается с..., Не начинается с..., Оканчивается на..., Не оканчивается на..., Содержит..., Не содержит.... Для числовых значений: Больше..., Больше или равно..., Меньше..., Меньше или равно..., Между, Не между. Для Фильтра значений доступны следующие опции: Равно..., Не равно..., Больше..., Больше или равно..., Меньше..., Меньше или равно..., Между, Не между, Первые 10. После выбора одной из вышеуказанных опций (кроме опций Первые 10), откроется окно Фильтра подписей/Значений. В первом и втором выпадающих списках будут выбраны соответствующее поле и критерий. Введите нужное значение в поле справа. Нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. При выборе опции Первые 10 из списка опций Фильтра значений откроется новое окно: В первом выпадающем списке можно выбрать, надо ли отобразить Наибольшие или Наименьшие значения. Во втором поле можно указать, сколько записей из списка или какой процент от общего количества записей требуется отобразить (можно ввести число от 1 до 500). В третьем выпадающем списке можно задать единицы измерения: Элемент или Процент. В четвертом выпадающем списке отображается имя выбранного поля. Когда нужные параметры будут заданы, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. Кнопка Фильтр появится в Названиях строк или Названиях столбцов сводной таблицы. Это означает, что фильтр применен. Сортировка Данные сводной таблицы можно сортировать, используя параметры сортировки. Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой в Названиях строк или Названиях столбцов сводной таблицы и выберите опцию Сортировка по возрастанию или Сортировка по убыванию в подменю. Опция Дополнительные параметры сортировки... позволяет открыть окно Сортировать, в котором можно выбрать нужный порядок сортировки - По возрастанию (от А до Я) или По убыванию (от Я до А) - а затем выбрать определенное поле, которое требуется отсортировать. Создание срезов Чтобы упростить фильтрацию данных и отображать только то, что необходимо, вы можете добавить срезы. Чтобы узнать больше о срезах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к руководству по созданию срезов. Изменение дополнительных параметров сводной таблицы Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры сводной таблицы, нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Сводная таблица - Дополнительные параметры': На вкладке Название и макет можно изменить общие свойства сводной таблицы. С помощью опции Название можно изменить название сводной таблицы. В разделе Общие итоги можно выбрать, надо ли отображать общие итоги в сводной таблице. Опции Показывать для строк и Показывать для столбцов отмечены по умолчанию. Вы можете снять галочку или с одной из них, или с них обеих, чтобы скрыть соответствующие общие итоги из сводной таблицы. Примечание: аналогичные настройки также доступны на верхней панели инструментов в меню Общие итоги. В разделе Отображать поля в области фильтра отчета можно настроить фильтры отчета, которые появляются при добавлении полей в раздел Фильтры: Опция Вниз, затем вправо используется для организации столбцов. Она позволяет отображать фильтры отчета по столбцам. Опция Вправо, затем вниз используется для организации строк. Она позволяет отображать фильтры отчета по строкам. Опция Число полей фильтра отчета в столбце позволяет выбрать количество фильтров для отображения в каждом столбце. По умолчанию задано значение 0. Вы можете выбрать нужное числовое значение. Опция Показывать заголовки полей для строк и столбцов позволяет выбрать, надо ли отображать заголовки полей в сводной таблице. Эта опция выбрана по умолчанию. Снимите с нее галочку, если хотите скрыть заголовки полей из сводной таблицы. Опция Автоматически изменять ширину столбцов при обновлении позволяет включить/отключить автоматическую корректировку ширины столбцов. Эта опция выбрана по умолчанию. На вкладке Источник данных можно изменить данные, которые требуется использовать для создания сводной таблицы. Проверьте выбранный Диапазон данных и измените его в случае необходимости. Для этого нажмите на кнопку . В окне Выбор диапазона данных введите нужный диапазон данных в формате Лист1!$A$1:$E$10. Также можно выбрать нужный диапазон ячеек на рабочем листе с помощью мыши. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит сводная таблица. Удаление сводной таблицы Для удаления сводной таблицы: Выделите всю сводную таблицу с помощью кнопки Выделить на верхней панели инструментов. Нажмите клавишу Delete." + "body": "Сводные таблицы позволяют группировать и систематизировать данные из больших наборов данных для получения сводной информации. Вы можете упорядочивать данные множеством разных способов, чтобы отображать только нужную информацию и сфокусироваться на важных аспектах. Создание новой сводной таблицы Для создания сводной таблицы: Подготовьте исходный набор данных, который требуется использовать для создания сводной таблицы. Он должен включать заголовки столбцов. Набор данных не должен содержать пустых строк или столбцов. Выделите любую ячейку в исходном диапазоне данных. Перейдите на вкладку Сводная таблица верхней панели инструментов и нажмите на кнопку Вставить таблицу . Если вы хотите создать сводную таблицу на базе форматированной таблицы, также можно использовать опцию Вставить сводную таблицу на вкладке Параметры таблицы правой боковой панели. Откроется окно Создать сводную таблицу. Диапазон исходных данных уже указан. В этом случае будут использоваться все данные из исходного диапазона. Если вы хотите изменить диапазон данных (например, включить только часть исходных данных), нажмите на кнопку . В окне Выбор диапазона данных введите нужный диапазон данных в формате Лист1!$A$1:$E$10. Вы также можете выделить нужный диапазон данных на листе с помощью мыши. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Укажите, где требуется разместить сводную таблицу. Опция Новый лист выбрана по умолчанию. Она позволяет разместить сводную таблицу на новом рабочем листе. Также можно выбрать опцию Существующий лист и затем выбрать определенную ячейку. В этом случае выбранная ячейка будет правой верхней ячейкой созданной сводной таблицы. Чтобы выбрать ячейку, нажмите на кнопку . В окне Выбор диапазона данных введите адрес ячейки в формате Лист1!$G$2. Также можно щелкнуть по нужной ячейке на листе. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Когда местоположение таблицы будет выбрано, нажмите кнопку OK в окне Создать таблицу. Пустая сводная таблица будет вставлена в выбранном местоположении. Откроется вкладка Параметры сводной таблицы на правой боковой панели. Эту вкладку можно скрыть или показать, нажав на значок . Настройки сводной таблицы также доступны в контекстном меню, которое появляется при щелчке правой кнопкой мыши по таблице. Параметры контекстного меню зависят от поля, по которому вы щелкнули. Выбор полей для отображения Раздел Выбрать поля содержит названия полей, соответствующие заголовкам столбцов в исходном наборе данных. Каждое поле содержит значения из соответствующего столбца исходной таблицы. Ниже доступны следующие четыре поля: Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки и Значения. Отметьте галочками поля, которые требуется отобразить в сводной таблице. Когда вы отметите поле, оно будет добавлено в один из доступных разделов на правой боковой панели в зависимости от типа данных и будет отображено в сводной таблице. Поля, содержащие текстовые значения, будут добавлены в раздел Строки; поля, содержащие числовые значения, будут добавлены в раздел Значения. Вы можете просто перетаскивать поля в нужный раздел, а также перетаскивать поля между разделами, чтобы быстро перестроить сводную таблицу. Чтобы удалить поле из текущего раздела, перетащите его за пределы этого раздела. Чтобы добавить поле в нужный раздел, также можно нажать на черную стрелку справа от поля в разделе Выбрать поля и выбрать нужную опцию из меню: Добавить в фильтры, Добавить в строки, Добавить в столбцы, Добавить в значения. Ниже приводятся примеры использования разделов Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки и Значения. При добавлении поля в раздел Фильтры над сводной таблицей будет добавлен отдельный фильтр. Он будет применен ко всей сводной таблице. Если нажать на кнопку со стрелкой в добавленном фильтре, вы увидите значения из выбранного поля. Если снять галочки с некоторых значений в окне фильтра и нажать кнопку OK, значения, с которых снято выделение, не будут отображаться в сводной таблице. При добавлении поля в раздел Столбцы, сводная таблица будет содержать столько же столбцов, сколько значений содержится в выбранном поле. Также будет добавлен столбец Общий итог. При добавлении поля в раздел Строки, сводная таблица будет содержать столько же строк, сколько значений содержится в выбранном поле. Также будет добавлена строка Общий итог. При добавлении поля в раздел Значения в сводной таблице будет отображаться суммирующее значение для всех числовых значений из выбранных полей. Если поле содержит текстовые значения, будет отображаться количество значений. Функцию, которая используется для вычисления суммирующего значения, можно изменить в настройках поля. Упорядочивание полей и изменение их свойств Когда поля будут добавлены в нужные разделы, ими можно управлять, чтобы изменить макет и формат сводной таблицы. Нажмите на черную стрелку справа от поля в разделе Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки или Значения, чтобы открыть контекстное меню поля. С его помощью можно: Переместить выбранное поле Вверх, Вниз, В начало или В конец текущего раздела, если в текущий раздел добавлено несколько полей. Переместить выбранное поле в другой раздел - в Фильтры, Столбцы, Строки или Значения. Опция, соответствующая текущему разделу, будет неактивна. Удалить выбранное поле из текущего раздела. Изменить параметры выбранного поля. Параметры полей из раздела Фильтры, Столбцы и Строки выглядят одинаково: На вкладке Макет содержатся следующие опции: Опция Имя источника позволяет посмотреть имя поля, соответствующее заголовку столбца из исходного набора данных. Опция Пользовательское имя позволяет изменить имя выбранного поля, отображаемое в сводной таблице. В разделе Форма отчета можно изменить способ отображения выбранного поля в сводной таблице: Выберите нужный макет для выбранного поля в сводной таблице: В форме В виде таблицы отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. В форме Структуры отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. В ней также можно отображать промежуточные итоги над каждой группой. В Компактной форме элементы из разных полей раздела строк отображаются в одном столбце. Опция Повторять метки элементов в каждой строке позволяет визуально группировать строки или столбцы при наличии нескольких полей в табличной форме. Опция Добавлять пустую строку после каждой записи позволяет добавлять пустые строки после элементов выбранного поля. Опция Показывать промежуточные итоги позволяет выбрать, надо ли отображать промежуточные итоги для выбранного поля. Можно выбрать одну из опций: Показывать в заголовке группы или Показывать в нижней части группы. Опция Показывать элементы без данных позволяет показать или скрыть пустые элементы в выбранном поле. На вкладке Промежуточные итоги можно выбрать Функции для промежуточных итогов. Отметьте галочкой нужную функцию в списке: Сумма, Количество, Среднее, Макс, Мин, Произведение, Количество чисел, Стандотклон, Стандотклонп, Дисп, Диспр. Параметры поля значений Опция Имя источника позволяет посмотреть имя поля, соответствующее заголовку столбца из исходного набора данных. Опция Пользовательское имя позволяет изменить имя выбранного поля, отображаемое в сводной таблице. В списке Операция можно выбрать функцию, используемую для вычисления суммирующего значения всех значений из этого поля. По умолчанию для числовых значений используется функция Сумма, а для текстовых значений - функция Количество. Доступны следующие функции: Сумма, Количество, Среднее, Макс, Мин, Произведение. Опция Дополнительные вычисления позволяет отображать мгновенные пользовательские вычисления вместо добавления формулы и создания вычисляемого поля. Без вычислений — эта опция выбрана по умолчанию, она отображает фактическое значение в поле. Другие опции вычисления: % от общего итога, % от столбца, % от строки, % от, % от общей суммы по родительской строке, % от общей суммы по родительскому столбцу, % от родительской суммы, Отличие, Разница (%), С нарастающем итогом в поле, % от суммы с нарастающим итогом в поле, Сортировка от минимального к максимальному, Сортировка от максимального к минимальному, Индекс. Используйте Базовое поле и Базовый элемент, если эти параметры доступны для выбранного вами вычисления (% от, % от общей суммы, Отличие, Разница (%), С нарастающем итогом в поле, % от суммы с нарастающим итогом в поле). Группировка и разгруппировка данных Данные в сводных таблицах можно сгруппировать в соответствии с индивидуальными требованиями. Группировка может быть выполнена по датам и основным числам. Группировка дат Чтобы сгруппировать даты, создайте сводную таблицу, содержащую необходимые даты. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по любой ячейке в сводной таблице с датой, в контекстном меню выберите параметр Сгруппировать и установите необходимые параметры в открывшемся окне. Начиная с - по умолчанию выбирается первая дата в исходных данных. Чтобы ее изменить, введите в это поле нужную дату. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать начальную точку. Заканчивая в - по умолчанию выбирается последняя дата в исходных данных. Чтобы ее изменить, введите в это поле нужную дату. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать конечную точку. По - параметры Секунды, Минуты и Часы группируют данные в соответствии со временем, указанным в исходных данных. Параметр Месяцы исключает дни и оставляет только месяцы. Опция Кварталы работает при следующем условии: четыре месяца составляют квартал Кв1, Кв2 и т.д. опция Годы группирует даты по годам, указанным в исходных данных. Комбинируйте варианты, чтобы добиться желаемого результата. Количество дней - устанавливает необходимое значение для определения диапазона дат. По завершении нажмите ОК. Группировка чисел Чтобы сгруппировать числа, создайте сводную таблицу, включающую набор необходимых чисел. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши любую ячейку в сводной таблице с номером, в контекстном меню выберите опцию Сгруппировать и установите необходимые параметры в открывшемся окне. Начиная с - по умолчанию выбирается наименьшее число в исходных данных. Чтобы изменить его, введите в это поле нужное число. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать наименьшее число. Заканчивая в - по умолчанию выбирается наибольшее число в исходных данных. Чтобы изменить его, введите в это поле нужный номер. Отключите это поле, чтобы игнорировать наибольшее число. По - установить необходимый интервал для группировки номеров. Например, «2» сгруппирует набор чисел от 1 до 10 как и «1-2», «3-4» и т.д. По завершении нажмите ОК. Разгруппировка данных Чтобы разгруппировать ранее сгруппированные данные, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши любую ячейку в группе, выберите опцию Разгруппировать в контекстном меню. Изменение оформления сводных таблиц Опции, доступные на верхней панели инструментов, позволяют изменить способ отображения сводной таблицы. Эти параметры применяются ко всей сводной таблице. Чтобы активировать инструменты редактирования на верхней панели инструментов, выделите мышью хотя бы одну ячейку в сводной таблице. В выпадающем списке Макет отчета можно выбрать нужный макет для сводной таблицы: Показать в сжатой форме - позволяет отображать элементы из разных полей раздела строк в одном столбце. Показать в форме структуры - позволяет отображать сводную таблицу в классическом стиле. В этой форме отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. В ней также можно отображать промежуточные итоги над каждой группой. Показать в табличной форме - позволяет отображать сводную таблицу в традиционном табличном формате. В этой форме отображается один столбец для каждого поля и выделяется место для заголовков полей. Повторять все метки элементов - позволяет визуально группировать строки или столбцы при наличии нескольких полей в табличной форме. Не повторять все метки элементов - позволяет скрыть метки элементов при наличии нескольких полей в табличной форме. В выпадающем списке Пустые строки можно выбрать, надо ли отображать пустые строки после элементов: Вставлять пустую строку после каждого элемента - позволяет добавить пустые строки после элементов. Удалить пустую строку после каждого элемента - позволяет убрать добавленные пустые строки. В выпадающем списке Промежуточные итоги можно выбрать, надо ли отображать промежуточные итоги в сводной таблице: Не показывать промежуточные итоги - позволяет скрыть промежуточные итоги для всех элементов. Показывать все промежуточные итоги в нижней части группы - позволяет отобразить промежуточные итоги под строками, для которых производится промежуточное суммирование. Показывать все промежуточные итоги в верхней части группы - позволяет отобразить промежуточные итоги над строками, для которых производится промежуточное суммирование. В выпадающем списке Общие итоги можно выбрать, надо ли отображать общие итоги в сводной таблице: Отключить для строк и столбцов - позволяет скрыть общие итоги как для строк, так и для столбцов. Включить для строк и столбцов - позволяет отобразить общие итоги как для строк, так и для столбцов. Включить только для строк - позволяет отобразить общие итоги только для строк. Включить только для столбцов - позволяет отобразить общие итоги только для столбцов. Примечание: аналогичные настройки также доступны в окне дополнительных параметров сводной таблицы в разделе Общие итоги вкладки Название и макет. Кнопка Выделить позволяет выделить всю сводную таблицу. Если вы изменили данные в исходном наборе данных, выделите сводную таблицу и нажмите кнопку Обновить, чтобы обновить сводную таблицу. Изменение стиля сводных таблиц Вы можете изменить оформление сводных таблиц в электронной таблице с помощью инструментов редактирования стиля, доступных на верхней панели инструментов. Чтобы активировать инструменты редактирования на верхней панели инструментов, выделите мышью хотя бы одну ячейку в сводной таблице. Параметры строк и столбцов позволяют выделить некоторые строки или столбцы при помощи особого форматирования, или выделить разные строки и столбцы с помощью разных цветов фона для их четкого разграничения. Доступны следующие опции: Заголовки строк - позволяет выделить заголовки строк при помощи особого форматирования. Заголовки столбцов - позволяет выделить заголовки столбцов при помощи особого форматирования. Чередовать строки - включает чередование цвета фона для четных и нечетных строк. Чередовать столбцы - включает чередование цвета фона для четных и нечетных столбцов. Список шаблонов позволяет выбрать один из готовых стилей сводных таблиц. Каждый шаблон сочетает в себе определенные параметры форматирования, такие как цвет фона, стиль границ, чередование строк или столбцов и т.д. Набор шаблонов отображается по-разному в зависимости от параметров, выбранных для строк и столбцов. Например, если вы отметили опции Заголовки строк и Чередовать столбцы, видимая часть списка шаблонов будет содержать шаблоны с выделенными заголовками строк и включенным чередованием столбцов, но можно развернуть полный список, нажав на стрелку, чтобы увидеть все доступные шаблоны. Фильтрация, сортировка и создание срезов в сводных таблицах Вы можете фильтровать сводные таблицы по подписям или значениям и использовать дополнительные параметры сортировки. Фильтрация Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой в Названиях строк или Названиях столбцов сводной таблицы. Откроется список команд фильтра: Настройте параметры фильтра. Можно действовать одним из следующих способов: выбрать данные, которые надо отображать, или отфильтровать данные по определенным критериям. Выбор данных, которые надо отображать Снимите флажки рядом с данными, которые требуется скрыть. Для удобства все данные в списке команд фильтра отсортированы в порядке возрастания. Примечание: флажок (пусто) соответствует пустым ячейкам. Он доступен, если в выделенном диапазоне есть хотя бы одна пустая ячейка. Чтобы облегчить этот процесс, используйте поле поиска. Введите в этом поле свой запрос полностью или частично - в списке ниже будут отображены значения, содержащие эти символы. Также будут доступны следующие две опции: Выделить все результаты поиска - выбрана по умолчанию. Позволяет выделить все значения в списке, соответствующие вашему запросу. Добавить выделенный фрагмент в фильтр - если установить этот флажок, выбранные значения не будут скрыты после применения фильтра. После того как вы выберете все нужные данные, нажмите кнопку OK в списке команд фильтра, чтобы применить фильтр. Фильтрация данных по определенным критериям В правой части окна фильтра можно выбрать команду Фильтр подписей или Фильтр значений, а затем выбрать одну из опций в подменю: Для Фильтра подписей доступны следующие опции: Для текстовых значений: Равно..., Не равно..., Начинается с..., Не начинается с..., Оканчивается на..., Не оканчивается на..., Содержит..., Не содержит.... Для числовых значений: Больше..., Больше или равно..., Меньше..., Меньше или равно..., Между, Не между. Для Фильтра значений доступны следующие опции: Равно..., Не равно..., Больше..., Больше или равно..., Меньше..., Меньше или равно..., Между, Не между, Первые 10. После выбора одной из вышеуказанных опций (кроме опций Первые 10), откроется окно Фильтра подписей/Значений. В первом и втором выпадающих списках будут выбраны соответствующее поле и критерий. Введите нужное значение в поле справа. Нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. При выборе опции Первые 10 из списка опций Фильтра значений откроется новое окно: В первом выпадающем списке можно выбрать, надо ли отобразить Наибольшие или Наименьшие значения. Во втором поле можно указать, сколько записей из списка или какой процент от общего количества записей требуется отобразить (можно ввести число от 1 до 500). В третьем выпадающем списке можно задать единицы измерения: Элемент или Процент. В четвертом выпадающем списке отображается имя выбранного поля. Когда нужные параметры будут заданы, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. Кнопка Фильтр появится в Названиях строк или Названиях столбцов сводной таблицы. Это означает, что фильтр применен. Сортировка Данные сводной таблицы можно сортировать, используя параметры сортировки. Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой в Названиях строк или Названиях столбцов сводной таблицы и выберите опцию Сортировка по возрастанию или Сортировка по убыванию в подменю. Опция Дополнительные параметры сортировки... позволяет открыть окно Сортировать, в котором можно выбрать нужный порядок сортировки - По возрастанию (от А до Я) или По убыванию (от Я до А) - а затем выбрать определенное поле, которое требуется отсортировать. Создание срезов Чтобы упростить фильтрацию данных и отображать только то, что необходимо, вы можете добавить срезы. Чтобы узнать больше о срезах, пожалуйста, обратитесь к руководству по созданию срезов. Изменение дополнительных параметров сводной таблицы Чтобы изменить дополнительные параметры сводной таблицы, нажмите ссылку Дополнительные параметры на правой боковой панели. Откроется окно 'Сводная таблица - Дополнительные параметры': На вкладке Название и макет можно изменить общие свойства сводной таблицы. С помощью опции Название можно изменить название сводной таблицы. В разделе Общие итоги можно выбрать, надо ли отображать общие итоги в сводной таблице. Опции Показывать для строк и Показывать для столбцов отмечены по умолчанию. Вы можете снять галочку или с одной из них, или с них обеих, чтобы скрыть соответствующие общие итоги из сводной таблицы. Примечание: аналогичные настройки также доступны на верхней панели инструментов в меню Общие итоги. В разделе Отображать поля в области фильтра отчета можно настроить фильтры отчета, которые появляются при добавлении полей в раздел Фильтры: Опция Вниз, затем вправо используется для организации столбцов. Она позволяет отображать фильтры отчета по столбцам. Опция Вправо, затем вниз используется для организации строк. Она позволяет отображать фильтры отчета по строкам. Опция Число полей фильтра отчета в столбце позволяет выбрать количество фильтров для отображения в каждом столбце. По умолчанию задано значение 0. Вы можете выбрать нужное числовое значение. Опция Показывать заголовки полей для строк и столбцов позволяет выбрать, надо ли отображать заголовки полей в сводной таблице. Эта опция выбрана по умолчанию. Снимите с нее галочку, если хотите скрыть заголовки полей из сводной таблицы. Опция Автоматически изменять ширину столбцов при обновлении позволяет включить/отключить автоматическую корректировку ширины столбцов. Эта опция выбрана по умолчанию. На вкладке Источник данных можно изменить данные, которые требуется использовать для создания сводной таблицы. Проверьте выбранный Диапазон данных и измените его в случае необходимости. Для этого нажмите на кнопку . В окне Выбор диапазона данных введите нужный диапазон данных в формате Лист1!$A$1:$E$10. Также можно выбрать нужный диапазон ячеек на рабочем листе с помощью мыши. Когда все будет готово, нажмите кнопку OK. Вкладка Альтернативный текст позволяет задать Заголовок и Описание, которые будут зачитываться для людей с нарушениями зрения или когнитивными нарушениями, чтобы помочь им лучше понять, какую информацию содержит сводная таблица. Удаление сводной таблицы Для удаления сводной таблицы: Выделите всю сводную таблицу с помощью кнопки Выделить на верхней панели инструментов. Нажмите клавишу Delete." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm", + "title": "Защита диапазона", + "body": "Опция Разрешить редактировать диапазоны позволяет указать диапазоны ячеек, которые не могут редактироваться пользователями без соответствующих прав на редактирование, предоставленных создателем файла или пользователем с полным доступом к нему. Чтобы выбрать диапазон ячеек, который пользователю будет разрешено редактировать: Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны на вкладке Защита верхней панели инструментов. Откроется окно Защищенные диапазоны. Нажмите кнопку Новый в окне Защищенные диапазоны, чтобы выбрать и добавить диапазон ячеек, который пользователь сможет редактировать. В окне Новый диапазон введите Название диапазона и выберите диапазон ячеек при помощи кнопки Выбор данных. Выберите пользователей, Кто может редактировать этот диапазон, и нажмите ОК для подтверждения. Чтобы изменить или удалить диапазон, выберите его в окне Защищенные диапазоны и нажмите кнопку Изменить или Удалить соответственно. Нажмите кнопку Закрыть. Чтобы узнать больше о том, как управлять разрешениями редактировать диапазоны, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой статье." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm", "title": "Защита листа", - "body": "Опция Защитить лист позволяет защитить листы и контролировать изменения, внесенные другими пользователями в лист, чтобы предотвратить нежелательные изменения данных и ограничить возможности редактирования другими пользователями. Чтобы защитить лист: Перейдите на вкладку Защита и нажмите кнопку Защитить лист на верхней панели инструментов. или Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по вкладке листа, который вы хотите защитить, и в списке выберите пункт Защитить В открывшемся окне Защитить лист введите и подтвердите пароль, если вы хотите установить пароль для снятия защиты с этого листа. Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Установите флажки в списке Разрешить всем пользователям этого листа напротив тех операций, которые пользователи смогут выполнять. Операции Выбрать заблокированные ячейки и Выбрать разблокированные ячейки разрешены по умолчанию. Операции, которые может выполнять пользователь. Выделять заблокированные ячейки Выделять разблокированные ячейки Форматировать ячейки Форматировать столбцы Форматировать строки Вставлять столбцы Вставлять строки Вставлять гиперссылку Удалить столбцы Удалить строки Сортировать Использовать автофильтр Использовать сводную таблицу и сводную диаграмму Редактировать объекты Редактировать сценарии нажмите кнопку Защитить, чтобы включить защиту Кнопка Защитить лист остается выделенной, когда лист защищен. Чтобы снять защиту с листа: нажмите кнопку Защитить лист, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по вкладке защищенного листа и в списке выберите пункт Снять защиту. Введите пароль и нажмите ОК в окне Снять защиту с листа, если будет предложено." + "body": "Опция Защитить лист позволяет защитить листы и контролировать изменения, внесенные другими пользователями в лист, чтобы предотвратить нежелательные изменения данных и ограничить возможности редактирования другими пользователями. Вы можете защитить лист паролем или без него. Если вы не используете пароль, любой может снять защиту с защищенного листа. Защита листа Перейдите на вкладку Защита и нажмите кнопку Защитить лист на верхней панели инструментов. или Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по вкладке листа, который вы хотите защитить, и в списке выберите пункт Защитить В открывшемся окне Защитить лист введите и подтвердите пароль, если вы хотите установить пароль для снятия защиты с этого листа. Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Установите флажки в списке Разрешить всем пользователям этого листа напротив тех операций, которые пользователи смогут выполнять. Операции Выбрать заблокированные ячейки и Выбрать разблокированные ячейки разрешены по умолчанию. Операции, которые может выполнять пользователь. Выделять заблокированные ячейки Выделять разблокированные ячейки Форматировать ячейки Форматировать столбцы Форматировать строки Вставлять столбцы Вставлять строки Вставлять гиперссылку Удалить столбцы Удалить строки Сортировать Использовать автофильтр Использовать сводную таблицу и сводную диаграмму Редактировать объекты Редактировать сценарии нажмите кнопку Защитить, чтобы включить защиту Кнопка Защитить лист остается выделенной, когда лист защищен. Разрешение редактировать диапазоны Нажмите кнопку Защитить лист на вкладке Защита верхней панели инструментов. Откроется окно Защитить лист. Нажмите кнопку Разрешить редактировать диапазоны, чтобы указать диапазоны, разблокируемые паролем, когда лист защищен. Эта опция работает только для заблокированных ячеек. Нажмите кнопку Новый, чтобы добавить новый диапазон. Откроется окно Новый диапазон. Укажите Название диапазона, сам диапазон, введите и повторите пароль. Нажмите ОК. Пароль невозможно восстановить, если вы его потеряете или забудете. Пожалуйста, храните его в надежном месте. Когда лист не защищен, вы все равно можете вносить изменения в разрешенные диапазоны: Если вам нужно отредактировать созданный диапазон, выберите его в окне Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны и нажмите кнопку Редактировать. Чтобы удалить созданный диапазон, выберите его в окне Разрешить пользователям редактировать диапазоны и нажмите кнопку Удалить.. Нажмите кнопку Защитить. Для диапазонов, защищенных паролем, когда кто-то пытается отредактировать выбранный диапазон ячеек, появляется окно Разблокировать диапазон, в котором пользователю предлагается ввести пароль. Чтобы узнать больше о защите диапазонов, пожалуйста, обратитесь к этой статье. Снятие защиты с листа Чтобы снять защиту с листа: нажмите кнопку Защитить лист, или щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по вкладке защищенного листа и в списке выберите пункт Снять защиту. Введите пароль и нажмите ОК в окне Снять защиту с листа, если будет предложено." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSpreadsheet.htm", "title": "Защита электронной таблицы", - "body": "Редактор электронных таблиц предоставляет возможность защитить электронную таблицу, когда вы хотите ограничить доступ или возможности редактирования для других пользователей. Редактор электронных таблиц предлагает различные уровни защиты для управления доступом к файлу и возможностями редактирования внутри книги и листах. Используйте вкладку Защита, чтобы настраивать доступные параметры защиты по своему усмотрению. Доступные варианты защиты: Шифрование - для управления доступом к файлу и предотвращения его открытия другими пользователями. Защита книги - для контроля над действиями пользователей с книгой и предотвращения нежелательных изменений в структуре книги. Защита листа - для контроля над действиями пользователей в листе и предотвращения нежелательных изменений данных. Разрешение редактировать диапазоны - для указания диапазона ячеек, с которыми пользователь может работать на защищенном листе. Использование флажков на вкладке Защита для быстрой блокировки или разблокировки содержимого защищенного листа. Примечание: эти опции не вступят в силу, пока вы не включите защиту листа. Ячейки, фигуры и текст внутри фигуры заблокированы на листе по умолчанию. Снимите соответствующий флажок, чтобы разблокировать их. Разблокированные объекты по-прежнему можно редактировать, когда лист защищен. Параметры Заблокированная фигура и Заблокировать текст становятся активными при выборе фигуры. Параметр Заблокированная фигура применяется как к фигурам, так и к другим объектам, таким как диаграммы, изображения и текстовые поля. Параметр Заблокировать текст блокирует текст внутри всех графических объектов, кроме диаграмм. Установите флажок напротив параметра Скрытые формулы, чтобы скрыть формулы в выбранном диапазоне или ячейке, когда лист защищен. Скрытая формула не будет отображаться в строке формул при нажатии на ячейку." + "body": "Редактор электронных таблиц предоставляет возможность защитить электронную таблицу, когда вы хотите ограничить доступ или возможности редактирования для других пользователей. Редактор электронных таблиц предлагает различные уровни защиты для управления доступом к файлу и возможностями редактирования внутри книги и листах. Используйте вкладку Защита, чтобы настраивать доступные параметры защиты по своему усмотрению. Доступные варианты защиты: Шифрование - для управления доступом к файлу и предотвращения его открытия другими пользователями. Защита книги - для контроля над действиями пользователей с книгой и предотвращения нежелательных изменений в структуре книги. Защита листа - для контроля над действиями пользователей в листе и предотвращения нежелательных изменений данных. Защитить диапазон - для защиты диапазонов, ограничивая или запрещая их редактирование. Права редактирования могут быть предоставлены определенным пользователям. Пользователи без прав редактирования смогут только просматривать защищенный диапазон, но они могут редактировать остальную часть электронной таблицы при условии, что у них есть полные права доступа к файлу. Использование флажков на вкладке Защита для быстрой блокировки или разблокировки содержимого защищенного листа. Примечание: эти опции не вступят в силу, пока вы не включите защиту листа. Ячейки, фигуры и текст внутри фигуры заблокированы на листе по умолчанию. Снимите соответствующий флажок, чтобы разблокировать их. Разблокированные объекты по-прежнему можно редактировать, когда лист защищен. Параметры Заблокированная фигура и Заблокировать текст становятся активными при выборе фигуры. Параметр Заблокированная фигура применяется как к фигурам, так и к другим объектам, таким как диаграммы, изображения и текстовые поля. Параметр Заблокировать текст блокирует текст внутри всех графических объектов, кроме диаграмм. Установите флажок напротив параметра Скрытые формулы, чтобы скрыть формулы в выбранном диапазоне или ячейке, когда лист защищен. Скрытая формула не будет отображаться в строке формул при нажатии на ячейку." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectWorkbook.htm", @@ -2668,7 +2703,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Сохранение / печать / скачивание таблицы", - "body": "Сохранение По умолчанию онлайн-редактор электронных таблиц автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы сохранить текущую электронную таблицу вручную в текущем формате и местоположении, щелкните по значку Сохранить в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить. Чтобы не допустить потери данных в десктопной версии в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы, вы можете включить опцию Автовосстановление на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы в десктопной версии сохранить электронную таблицу под другим именем, в другом местоположении или в другом формате, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить как, выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон таблицы XLTX или OTS. Скачивание Чтобы в онлайн-версии скачать готовую электронную таблицу и сохранить ее на жестком диске компьютера, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Скачать как, выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Примечание: если вы выберете формат CSV, весь функционал (форматирование шрифта, формулы и так далее), кроме обычного текста, не сохранится в файле CSV. Если вы продолжите сохранение, откроется окно Выбрать параметры CSV. По умолчанию в качестве типа Кодировки используется Unicode (UTF-8). Стандартным Разделителем является запятая (,), но доступны также следующие варианты: точка с запятой (;), двоеточие (:), Табуляция, Пробел и Другое (эта опция позволяет задать пользовательский символ разделителя). Сохранение копии Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию электронной таблицы на портале, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить копию как, выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS, выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить. Печать Чтобы распечатать текущую электронную таблицу: щелкните по значку Печать в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать. В браузере Firefox возможна печатать таблицы без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf. Откроется окно Предпросмотра, в котором можно изменить параметры печати, заданные по умолчанию. Нажмите на кнопку Показать детали внизу окна, чтобы отобразить все параметры. Параметры печати можно также настроить на странице Дополнительные параметры: нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и перейдите в раздел: Дополнительные параметры >> Параметры страницы. На вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов также доступны некоторые из этих настроек: Поля, Ориентация, Размер страницы, Область печати, Вписать. Здесь можно задать следующие параметры: Диапазон печати - укажите, что необходимо напечатать: весь Текущий лист, Все листы электронной таблицы или предварительно выделенный диапазон ячеек (Выделенный фрагмент), Если вы ранее задали постоянную область печати, но хотите напечатать весь лист, поставьте галочку рядом с опцией Игнорировать область печати. Параметры листа - укажите индивидуальные параметры печати для каждого отдельного листа, если в выпадающем списке Диапазон печати выбрана опция Все листы, Размер страницы - выберите из выпадающего списка один из доступных размеров, Ориентация страницы - выберите опцию Книжная, если при печати требуется расположить таблицу на странице вертикально, или используйте опцию Альбомная, чтобы расположить ее горизонтально, Масштаб - если вы не хотите, чтобы некоторые столбцы или строки были напечатаны на второй странице, можно сжать содержимое листа, чтобы оно помещалось на одной странице, выбрав соответствующую опцию: Вписать лист на одну страницу, Вписать все столбцы на одну страницу или Вписать все строки на одну страницу. Оставьте опцию Реальный размер, чтобы распечатать лист без корректировки, При выборе пункта меню Настраиваемые параметры откроется окно Настройки масштаба: Разместить не более чем на: позволяет выбрать нужное количество страниц, на котором должен разместиться напечатанный рабочий лист. Выберите нужное количество страниц из списков Ширина и Высота. Установить: позволяет увеличить или уменьшить масштаб рабочего листа, чтобы он поместился на напечатанных страницах, указав вручную значение в процентах от обычного размера. Печатать заголовки - если вы хотите печатать заголовки строк или столбцов на каждой странице, используйте опцию Повторять строки сверху или Повторять столбцы слева и выберите одну из доступных опций из выпадающего списка: повторять элементы из выбранного диапазона, повторять закрепленные строки, повторять только первую строку/первый столбец. Поля - укажите расстояние между данными рабочего листа и краями печатной страницы, изменив размеры по умолчанию в полях Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа, Печать - укажите элементы рабочего листа, которые необходимо выводить на печать, установив соответствующие флажки: Печать сетки и Печать заголовков строк и столбцов. Параметры верхнего и нижнего колонтитулов - позволяет добавить некоторую дополнительную информацию к печатному листу, такую как дата и время, номер страницы, имя листа и т.д. Верхние и нижние колонтитулы будут отображаться в печатной версии электронной таблицы. После настройки параметров печати нажмите кнопку Печать, чтобы сохранить изменения и распечатать электронную таблицу, или кнопку Сохранить, чтобы сохранить изменения, внесенные в параметры печати. В десктопной версии документ будет напрямую отправлен на печать. В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати. Настройка области печати Если требуется распечатать только выделенный диапазон ячеек вместо всего листа, можно использовать настройку Выделенный фрагмент в выпадающем списке Диапазон печати. Эта настройка не сохраняется при сохранении рабочей книги и подходит для однократного использования. Если какой-то диапазон ячеек требуется распечатывать неоднократно, можно задать постоянную область печати на рабочем листе. Область печати будет сохранена при сохранении рабочей книги и может использоваться при последующем открытии электронной таблицы. Можно также задать несколько постоянных областей печати на листе, в этом случае каждая из них будет выводиться на печать на отдельной странице. Чтобы задать область печати: выделите нужный диапазон ячеек на рабочем листе. Чтобы выделить несколько диапазонов, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl, перейдите на вкладку Макет верхней панели инструментов, нажмите на стрелку рядом с кнопкой Область печати и выберите опцию Задать область печати. Созданная область печати сохраняется при сохранении рабочей книги. При последующем открытии файла на печать будет выводиться заданная область печати. При создании области печати также автоматически создается именованный диапазон Область_печати, отображаемый в Диспетчере имен. Чтобы выделить границы всех областей печати на текущем рабочем листе, можно нажать на стрелку в поле \"Имя\" слева от строки формул и выбрать из списка имен Область_печати. Чтобы добавить ячейки в область печати: откройте нужный рабочий лист, на котором добавлена область печати, выделите нужный диапазон ячеек на рабочем листе, перейдите на вкладку Макет верхней панели инструментов, нажмите на стрелку рядом с кнопкой Область печати и выберите опцию Добавить в область печати. Будет добавлена новая область печати. Каждая из областей печати будет выводиться на печать на отдельной странице. Чтобы удалить область печати: откройте нужный рабочий лист, на котором добавлена область печати, перейдите на вкладку Макет верхней панели инструментов, нажмите на стрелку рядом с кнопкой Область печати и выберите опцию Очистить область печати. Будут удалены все области печати, существующие на этом листе. После этого на печать будет выводиться весь лист." + "body": "Сохранение По умолчанию онлайн-редактор электронных таблиц автоматически сохраняет файл каждые 2 секунды, когда вы работаете над ним, чтобы не допустить потери данных в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы. Если вы совместно редактируете файл в Быстром режиме, таймер запрашивает наличие изменений 25 раз в секунду и сохраняет их, если они были внесены. При совместном редактировании файла в Строгом режиме изменения автоматически сохраняются каждые 10 минут. При необходимости можно легко выбрать предпочтительный режим совместного редактирования или отключить функцию автоматического сохранения на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы сохранить текущую электронную таблицу вручную в текущем формате и местоположении, щелкните по значку Сохранить в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+S, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Сохранить. Чтобы не допустить потери данных в десктопной версии в случае непредвиденного закрытия программы, вы можете включить опцию Автовосстановление на странице Дополнительные параметры. Чтобы в десктопной версии сохранить электронную таблицу под другим именем, в другом местоположении или в другом формате, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить как, выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. Также можно выбрать вариант Шаблон таблицы. Скачивание Чтобы в онлайн-версии скачать готовую электронную таблицу и сохранить ее на жестком диске компьютера, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Скачать как, выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. Примечание: если вы выберете формат CSV, весь функционал (форматирование шрифта, формулы и так далее), кроме обычного текста, не сохранится в файле CSV. Если вы продолжите сохранение, откроется окно Выбрать параметры CSV. По умолчанию в качестве типа Кодировки используется Unicode (UTF-8). Стандартным Разделителем является запятая (,), но доступны также следующие варианты: точка с запятой (;), двоеточие (:), Табуляция, Пробел и Другое (эта опция позволяет задать пользовательский символ разделителя). Сохранение копии Чтобы в онлайн-версии сохранить копию электронной таблицы на портале, нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов, выберите опцию Сохранить копию как, выберите один из доступных форматов: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG, выберите местоположение файла на портале и нажмите Сохранить. Печать Чтобы распечатать текущую электронную таблицу: щелкните по значку Печать в левой части шапки редактора, или используйте сочетание клавиш Ctrl+P, или нажмите на вкладку Файл на верхней панели инструментов и выберите опцию Печать. В браузере Firefox возможна печатать таблицы без предварительной загрузки в виде файла .pdf. Откроется окно Предпросмотра, в котором можно изменить параметры печати, заданные по умолчанию. На вкладке Макет верхней панели инструментов также доступны некоторые из этих настроек: Поля, Ориентация, Размер страницы, Область печати, Вписать. Здесь можно задать следующие параметры: Диапазон печати - укажите, что необходимо напечатать: все Активные листы, Все листы электронной таблицы или предварительно выделенный диапазон ячеек (Выделенный фрагмент), Если вы ранее задали постоянную область печати, но хотите напечатать весь лист, поставьте галочку рядом с опцией Игнорировать область печати. Страницы — укажите диапазон страниц для печати. Вы можете в вести цифры вручную или использовать соответствующие стрелки, Параметры листа - укажите индивидуальные параметры печати для каждого отдельного листа, если в выпадающем списке Диапазон печати выбрана опция Все листы, Размер страницы - выберите из выпадающего списка один из доступных размеров, Ориентация страницы - выберите опцию Книжная, если при печати требуется расположить таблицу на странице вертикально, или используйте опцию Альбомная, чтобы расположить ее горизонтально, Масштаб - если вы не хотите, чтобы некоторые столбцы или строки были напечатаны на второй странице, можно сжать содержимое листа, чтобы оно помещалось на одной странице, выбрав соответствующую опцию: Вписать лист на одну страницу, Вписать все столбцы на одну страницу или Вписать все строки на одну страницу. Оставьте опцию Реальный размер, чтобы распечатать лист без корректировки, При выборе пункта меню Настраиваемые параметры откроется окно Настройки масштаба: Разместить не более чем на: позволяет выбрать нужное количество страниц, на котором должен разместиться напечатанный рабочий лист. Выберите нужное количество страниц из списков Ширина и Высота. Установить: позволяет увеличить или уменьшить масштаб рабочего листа, чтобы он поместился на напечатанных страницах, указав вручную значение в процентах от обычного размера. Печатать заголовки - если вы хотите печатать заголовки строк или столбцов на каждой странице, используйте опцию Повторять строки сверху или Повторять столбцы слева и выберите одну из доступных опций из выпадающего списка: повторять элементы из выбранного диапазона, повторять закрепленные строки, повторять только первую строку/первый столбец. Поля - укажите расстояние между данными рабочего листа и краями печатной страницы, изменив размеры по умолчанию в полях Сверху, Снизу, Слева и Справа, Печать - укажите элементы рабочего листа, которые необходимо выводить на печать, установив соответствующие флажки: Печать сетки и Печать заголовков строк и столбцов. Параметры верхнего и нижнего колонтитулов - позволяет добавить некоторую дополнительную информацию к печатному листу, такую как дата и время, номер страницы, имя листа и т.д. Верхние и нижние колонтитулы будут отображаться в печатной версии электронной таблицы. Номер первой страницы – укажите номер первой напечатанной страницы. После настройки параметров печати нажмите кнопку Печать, чтобы сохранить изменения и распечатать электронную таблицу, или кнопку Сохранить, чтобы сохранить изменения, внесенные в параметры печати. В онлайн-версии на основе данного документа будет сгенерирован файл PDF. Вы можете открыть и распечатать его, или сохранить его на жестком диске компьютера или съемном носителе, чтобы распечатать позже. В некоторых браузерах, например Хром и Опера, есть встроенная возможность для прямой печати. Настройка области печати Если требуется распечатать только выделенный диапазон ячеек вместо всего листа, можно использовать настройку Выделенный фрагмент в выпадающем списке Диапазон печати. Эта настройка не сохраняется при сохранении рабочей книги и подходит для однократного использования. Если какой-то диапазон ячеек требуется распечатывать неоднократно, можно задать постоянную область печати на рабочем листе. Область печати будет сохранена при сохранении рабочей книги и может использоваться при последующем открытии электронной таблицы. Можно также задать несколько постоянных областей печати на листе, в этом случае каждая из них будет выводиться на печать на отдельной странице. Чтобы задать область печати: выделите нужный диапазон ячеек на рабочем листе. Чтобы выделить несколько диапазонов, удерживайте клавишу Ctrl, перейдите на вкладку Макет верхней панели инструментов, нажмите на стрелку рядом с кнопкой Область печати и выберите опцию Задать область печати. Созданная область печати сохраняется при сохранении рабочей книги. При последующем открытии файла на печать будет выводиться заданная область печати. При создании области печати также автоматически создается именованный диапазон Область_печати, отображаемый в Диспетчере имен. Чтобы выделить границы всех областей печати на текущем рабочем листе, можно нажать на стрелку в поле \"Имя\" слева от строки формул и выбрать из списка имен Область_печати. Чтобы добавить ячейки в область печати: откройте нужный рабочий лист, на котором добавлена область печати, выделите нужный диапазон ячеек на рабочем листе, перейдите на вкладку Макет верхней панели инструментов, нажмите на стрелку рядом с кнопкой Область печати и выберите опцию Добавить в область печати. Будет добавлена новая область печати. Каждая из областей печати будет выводиться на печать на отдельной странице. Чтобы удалить область печати: откройте нужный рабочий лист, на котором добавлена область печати, перейдите на вкладку Макет верхней панели инструментов, нажмите на стрелку рядом с кнопкой Область печати и выберите опцию Очистить область печати. Будут удалены все области печати, существующие на этом листе. После этого на печать будет выводиться весь лист." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm", @@ -2688,12 +2723,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SortData.htm", "title": "Сортировка и фильтрация данных", - "body": "Сортировка данных Данные в электронной таблице можно быстро отсортировать, используя одну из доступных опций: По возрастанию используется для сортировки данных в порядке возрастания - от A до Я по алфавиту или от наименьшего значения к наибольшему для числовых данных. По убыванию используется для сортировки данных в порядке убывания - от Я до A по алфавиту или от наибольшего значения к наименьшему для числовых данных. Примечание: параметры сортировки доступны как на вкладке Главная, так и на вкладке Данные. Для сортировки данных: выделите диапазон ячеек, который требуется отсортировать (можно выделить отдельную ячейку в диапазоне, чтобы отсортировать весь диапазон), щелкните по значку Сортировка по возрастанию , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов, для сортировки данных в порядке возрастания, ИЛИ щелкните по значку Сортировка по убыванию , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов, для сортировки данных в порядке убывания. Примечание: если вы выделите отдельный столбец/строку в диапазоне ячеек или часть строки/столбца, вам будет предложено выбрать, хотите ли вы расширить выделенный диапазон, чтобы включить смежные ячейки, или отсортировать только выделенные данные. Данные также можно сортировать, используя команды контекстного меню. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенному диапазону ячеек, выберите в меню команду Сортировка, а затем выберите из подменю опцию По возрастанию или По убыванию. С помощью контекстного меню данные можно также отсортировать по цвету: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке, содержащей цвет, по которому требуется отсортировать данные, выберите в меню команду Сортировка, выберите из подменю нужную опцию: Сначала ячейки с выделенным цветом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек в верхней части столбца, Сначала ячейки с выделенным шрифтом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом шрифта в верхней части столбца. Фильтрация данных Чтобы отобразить только те строки, которые соответствуют определенным критериям, и скрыть остальные, воспользуйтесь Фильтром. Примечание: параметры фильтрации доступны как на вкладке Главная, так и на вкладке Данные. Чтобы включить фильтр: Выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих данные, которые требуется отфильтровать (можно выделить отдельную ячейку в диапазоне, чтобы отфильтровать весь диапазон), Щелкните по значку Фильтр , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов. В первой ячейке каждого столбца выделенного диапазона ячеек появится кнопка со стрелкой . Это означает, что фильтр включен. Чтобы применить фильтр: Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой . Откроется список команд фильтра: Примечание: можно изменить размер окна фильтра путем перетаскивания его правой границы вправо или влево, чтобы отображать данные максимально удобным образом. Настройте параметры фильтра. Можно действовать одним из трех следующих способов: выбрать данные, которые надо отображать, отфильтровать данные по определенным критериям или отфильтровать данные по цвету. Выбор данных, которые надо отображать Снимите флажки рядом с данными, которые требуется скрыть. Для удобства все данные в списке команд фильтра отсортированы в порядке возрастания. Количество уникальных значений в отфильтрованном диапазоне отображено справа от каждого значения в окне фильтра. Примечание: флажок {Пустые} соответствует пустым ячейкам. Он доступен, если в выделенном диапазоне есть хотя бы одна пустая ячейка. Чтобы облегчить этот процесс, используйте поле поиска. Введите в этом поле свой запрос полностью или частично - в списке ниже будут отображены значения, содержащие эти символы. Также будут доступны следующие две опции: Выделить все результаты поиска - выбрана по умолчанию. Позволяет выделить все значения в списке, соответствующие вашему запросу. Добавить выделенный фрагмент в фильтр - если установить этот флажок, выбранные значения не будут скрыты после применения фильтра. После того как вы выберете все нужные данные, нажмите кнопку OK в списке команд фильтра, чтобы применить фильтр. Фильтрация данных по определенным критериям В зависимости от данных, содержащихся в выбранном столбце, в правой части окна фильтра можно выбрать команду Числовой фильтр или Текстовый фильтр, а затем выбрать одну из опций в подменю: Для Числового фильтра доступны следующие опции: Равно..., Не равно..., Больше..., Больше или равно..., Меньше..., Меньше или равно..., Между, Первые 10, Выше среднего, Ниже среднего, Пользовательский.... Для Текстового фильтра доступны следующие опции: Равно..., Не равно..., Начинается с..., Не начинается с..., Оканчивается на..., Не оканчивается на..., Содержит..., Не содержит..., Пользовательский.... После выбора одной из вышеуказанных опций (кроме опций Первые 10 и Выше/Ниже среднего), откроется окно Пользовательский фильтр. В верхнем выпадающем списке будет выбран соответствующий критерий. Введите нужное значение в поле справа. Для добавления еще одного критерия используйте переключатель И, если требуется, чтобы данные удовлетворяли обоим критериям, или выберите переключатель Или, если могут удовлетворяться один или оба критерия. Затем выберите из нижнего выпадающего списка второй критерий и введите нужное значение справа. Нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. При выборе опции Пользовательский... из списка опций Числового/Текстового фильтра, первое условие не выбирается автоматически, вы можете выбрать его сами. При выборе опции Первые 10 из списка опций Числового фильтра, откроется новое окно: В первом выпадающем списке можно выбрать, надо ли отобразить Наибольшие или Наименьшие значения. Во втором поле можно указать, сколько записей из списка или какой процент от общего количества записей требуется отобразить (можно ввести число от 1 до 500). В третьем выпадающем списке можно задать единицы измерения: Элемент или Процент. Когда нужные параметры будут заданы, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. При выборе опции Выше/Ниже среднего из списка опций Числового фильтра, фильтр будет применен сразу. Фильтрация данных по цвету Если в диапазоне ячеек, который требуется отфильтровать, есть ячейки, которые вы отформатировали, изменив цвет их фона или шрифта (вручную или с помощью готовых стилей), можно использовать одну из следующих опций: Фильтр по цвету ячеек - чтобы отобразить только записи с определенным цветом фона ячеек и скрыть остальные, Фильтр по цвету шрифта - чтобы отобразить только записи с определенным цветом шрифта в ячейках и скрыть остальные. Когда вы выберете нужную опцию, откроется палитра, содержащая цвета, использованные в выделенном диапазоне ячеек. Выберите один из цветов, чтобы применить фильтр. В первой ячейке столбца появится кнопка Фильтр . Это означает, что фильтр применен. Количество отфильтрованных записей будет отображено в строке состояния (например, отфильтровано записей: 25 из 80). Примечание: когда фильтр применен, строки, отсеянные в результате фильтрации, нельзя изменить при автозаполнении, форматировании, удалении видимого содержимого. Такие действия влияют только на видимые строки, а строки, скрытые фильтром, остаются без изменений. При копировании и вставке отфильтрованных данных можно скопировать и вставить только видимые строки. Это не эквивалентно строкам, скрытым вручную, которые затрагиваются всеми аналогичными действиями. Сортировка отфильтрованных данных Можно задать порядок сортировки данных, для которых включен или применен фильтр. Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой или кнопку Фильтр и выберите одну из опций в списке команд фильтра: Сортировка по возрастанию - позволяет сортировать данные в порядке возрастания, отобразив в верхней части столбца наименьшее значение, Сортировка по убыванию - позволяет сортировать данные в порядке убывания, отобразив в верхней части столбца наибольшее значение, Сортировка по цвету ячеек - позволяет выбрать один из цветов и отобразить записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек в верхней части столбца, Сортировка по цвету шрифта - позволяет выбрать один из цветов и отобразить записи с таким же цветом шрифта в верхней части столбца. Последние две команды можно использовать, если в диапазоне ячеек, который требуется отсортировать, есть ячейки, которые вы отформатировали, изменив цвет их фона или шрифта (вручную или с помощью готовых стилей). Направление сортировки будет обозначено с помощью стрелки в кнопках фильтра. если данные отсортированы по возрастанию, кнопка со стрелкой в первой ячейке столбца выглядит так: , а кнопка Фильтр выглядит следующим образом: . если данные отсортированы по убыванию, кнопка со стрелкой в первой ячейке столбца выглядит так: , а кнопка Фильтр выглядит следующим образом: . Данные можно также быстро отсортировать по цвету с помощью команд контекстного меню: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке, содержащей цвет, по которому требуется отсортировать данные, выберите в меню команду Сортировка, выберите из подменю нужную опцию: Сначала ячейки с выделенным цветом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек в верхней части столбца, Сначала ячейки с выделенным шрифтом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом шрифта в верхней части столбца. Фильтр по содержимому выделенной ячейки Данные можно также быстро фильтровать по содержимому выделенной ячейки с помощью команд контекстного меню. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке, выберите в меню команду Фильтр, а затем выберите одну из доступных опций: Фильтр по значению выбранной ячейки - чтобы отобразить только записи с таким же значением, как и в выделенной ячейке. Фильтр по цвету ячейки - чтобы отобразить только записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек, как и у выделенной ячейки. Фильтр по цвету шрифта - чтобы отобразить только записи с таким же цветом шрифта, как и у выделенной ячейки. Форматирование по шаблону таблицы Чтобы облегчить работу с данными, в редакторе электронных таблиц предусмотрена возможность применения к выделенному диапазону ячеек шаблона таблицы с автоматическим включением фильтра. Для этого: выделите диапазон ячеек, которые требуется отформатировать, щелкните по значку Форматировать как шаблон таблицы , расположенному на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, в галерее выберите требуемый шаблон, в открывшемся всплывающем окне проверьте диапазон ячеек, которые требуется отформатировать как таблицу, установите флажок Заголовок, если требуется, чтобы заголовки таблицы входили в выделенный диапазон ячеек; в противном случае строка заголовка будет добавлена наверху, в то время как выделенный диапазон ячеек сместится на одну строку вниз, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить выбранный шаблон. Шаблон будет применен к выделенному диапазону ячеек, и вы сможете редактировать заголовки таблицы и применять фильтр для работы с данными. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с форматированными таблицами, обратитесь к этой странице. Повторное применение фильтра Если отфильтрованные данные были изменены, можно обновить фильтр, чтобы отобразить актуальный результат: нажмите на кнопку Фильтр в первой ячейке столбца, содержащего отфильтрованные данные, в открывшемся списке команд фильтра выберите опцию Применить повторно. Можно также щелкнуть правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке в столбце, содержащем отфильтрованные данные, и выбрать из контекстного меню команду Применить повторно. Очистка фильтра Для очистки фильтра: нажмите на кнопку Фильтр в первой ячейке столбца, содержащего отфильтрованные данные, в открывшемся списке команд фильтра выберите опцию Очистить. Можно также поступить следующим образом: выделите диапазон ячеек, которые содержат отфильтрованные данные, щелкните по значку Очистить фильтр , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов. Фильтр останется включенным, но все примененные параметры фильтра будут удалены, а кнопки Фильтр в первых ячейках столбцов изменятся на кнопки со стрелкой . Удаление фильтра Для удаления фильтра: выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих отфильтрованные данные, щелкните по значку Фильтр , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов. Фильтр будет отключен, а кнопки со стрелкой исчезнут из первых ячеек столбцов. Сортировка данных по нескольким столбцам/строкам Для сортировки данных по нескольким столбцам/строкам можно создать несколько уровней сортировки, используя функцию Настраиваемая сортировка. выделите диапазон ячеек, который требуется отсортировать (можно выделить отдельную ячейку в диапазоне, чтобы отсортировать весь диапазон), щелкните по значку Настраиваемая сортировка , расположенному на вкладке Данные верхней панели инструментов, откроется окно Сортировка. По умолчанию включена сортировка по столбцам. Чтобы изменить ориентацию сортировки (то есть сортировать данные по строкам, а не по столбцам) нажмите кнопку Параметры наверху. Откроется окно Параметры сортировки: установите флажок Мои данные содержат заголовки, если это необходимо, выберите нужную Ориентацию: Сортировать сверху вниз, чтобы сортировать данные по столбцам, или Сортировать слева направо, чтобы сортировать данные по строкам, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. задайте первый уровень сортировки в поле Сортировать по: в разделе Столбец / Строка выберите первый столбец / строку, который требуется отсортировать, в списке Сортировка выберите одну из следующих опций: Значения, Цвет ячейки или Цвет шрифта, в списке Порядок укажите нужный порядок сортировки. Доступные параметры различаются в зависимости от опции, выбранной в списке Сортировка: если выбрана опция Значения, выберите опцию По возрастанию / По убыванию, если диапазон ячеек содержит числовые значения, или опцию От А до Я / От Я до А, если диапазон ячеек содержит текстовые значения, если выбрана опция Цвет ячейки, выберите нужный цвет ячейки и выберите опцию Сверху / Снизу для столбцов или Слева / Справа для строк, если выбрана опция Цвет шрифта, выберите нужный цвет шрифта и выберите опцию Сверху / Снизу для столбцов или Слева / Справа для строк. добавьте следующий уровень сортировки, нажав кнопку Добавить уровень, выберите второй столбец / строку, который требуется отсортировать, и укажите другие параметры сортировки в поле Затем по, как описано выше. В случае необходимости добавьте другие уровни таким же способом. управляйте добавленными уровнями, используя кнопки в верхней части окна: Удалить уровень, Копировать уровень или измените порядок уровней, используя кнопки со стрелками Переместить уровень вверх / Переместить уровень вниз, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Данные будут отсортированы в соответствии с заданными уровнями сортировки." - }, - { - "id": "UsageInstructions/SupportSmartArt.htm", - "title": "Поддержка SmartArt в редакторе электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE", - "body": "Графика SmartArt используется для создания визуального представления иерархической структуры при помощи выбора наиболее подходящего макета. Редактор электронных таблиц ONLYOFFICE поддерживает графические объекты SmartArt, добавленную с помощью сторонних редакторов. Вы можете открыть файл, содержащий SmartArt, и редактировать его как графический объект с помощью доступных инструментов. Если выделить графический объект SmartArt или его элемент, на правой боковой панели станут доступны следующие вкладки: Параметры фигуры - для редактирования фигур, используемых в макете. Вы можете изменять размер формы, редактировать заливку, контур, толщину, стиль обтекания, положение, линии и стрелки, текстовое поле и альтернативный текст. Параметры абзаца - для редактирования отступов и интервалов, шрифтов и табуляций. Обратитесь к разделу Форматирование текста в ячейках для подробного описания каждого параметра. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. Параметры объекта Text Art - для редактирования стиля Text Art, который используется SmartArt для выделения текста. Вы можете изменить шаблон Text Art, тип заливки, цвет и непрозрачность, толщину линии, цвет и тип. Эта вкладка становится активной только для объектов SmartArt. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по SmartArt или по границе данного элемента, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования: Порядок - упорядочить объекты, используя следующие параметры: Перенести на передний план, Перенести на задний план, Перенести вперед, Перенести назад, Сгруппировать и Разгруппировать. Поворот - изменить направление вращения для выбранного элемента на SmartArt: Повернуть на 90° по часовой стрелке, Повернуть на 90° против часовой стрелки. Этот параметр становится активным только для объектов SmartArt. Назначить макрос - обеспечить быстрый и легкий доступ к макросу в электронной таблице. Дополнительные параметры фигуры - для доступа к дополнительным параметрам форматирования фигуры. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по графическому объекту SmartArt, чтобы получить доступ к следующим параметрам форматирования текста: Выравнивание по вертикали - выбрать выравнивание текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Выровнять по верхнему краю, Выровнять по середине, Выровнять по нижнему краю. Направление текста - выбрать направление текста внутри выбранного объекта SmartArt: Горизонтальное, Повернуть текст вниз, Повернуть текст вверх. Гиперссылка - добавить гиперссылку к объекту SmartArt. Обратитесь к Дополнительным параметрам абзаца, чтобы получить информацию о дополнительных параметрах форматирования абзаца." + "body": "Сортировка данных Данные в электронной таблице можно быстро отсортировать, используя одну из доступных опций: По возрастанию используется для сортировки данных в порядке возрастания - от A до Я по алфавиту или от наименьшего значения к наибольшему для числовых данных. По убыванию используется для сортировки данных в порядке убывания - от Я до A по алфавиту или от наибольшего значения к наименьшему для числовых данных. Примечание: параметры сортировки доступны как на вкладке Главная, так и на вкладке Данные. Для сортировки данных: выделите диапазон ячеек, который требуется отсортировать (можно выделить отдельную ячейку в диапазоне, чтобы отсортировать весь диапазон), щелкните по значку Сортировка по возрастанию , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов, для сортировки данных в порядке возрастания, ИЛИ щелкните по значку Сортировка по убыванию , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов, для сортировки данных в порядке убывания. Примечание: если вы выделите отдельный столбец/строку в диапазоне ячеек или часть строки/столбца, вам будет предложено выбрать, хотите ли вы расширить выделенный диапазон, чтобы включить смежные ячейки, или отсортировать только выделенные данные. Данные также можно сортировать, используя команды контекстного меню. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по выделенному диапазону ячеек, выберите в меню команду Сортировка, а затем выберите из подменю опцию По возрастанию или По убыванию. С помощью контекстного меню данные можно также отсортировать по цвету: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке, содержащей цвет, по которому требуется отсортировать данные, выберите в меню команду Сортировка, выберите из подменю нужную опцию: Сначала ячейки с выделенным цветом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек в верхней части столбца, Сначала ячейки с выделенным шрифтом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом шрифта в верхней части столбца. Фильтрация данных Чтобы отобразить только те строки, которые соответствуют определенным критериям, и скрыть остальные, воспользуйтесь Фильтром. Примечание: параметры фильтрации доступны как на вкладке Главная, так и на вкладке Данные. Чтобы включить фильтр: Выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих данные, которые требуется отфильтровать (можно выделить отдельную ячейку в диапазоне, чтобы отфильтровать весь диапазон), Щелкните по значку Фильтр , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов. В первой ячейке каждого столбца выделенного диапазона ячеек появится кнопка со стрелкой . Это означает, что фильтр включен. Чтобы применить фильтр: Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой . Откроется список команд фильтра: Примечание: можно изменить размер окна фильтра путем перетаскивания его правой границы вправо или влево, чтобы отображать данные максимально удобным образом. Настройте параметры фильтра. Можно действовать одним из трех следующих способов: выбрать данные, которые надо отображать, отфильтровать данные по определенным критериям или отфильтровать данные по цвету. Выбор данных, которые надо отображать Снимите флажки рядом с данными, которые требуется скрыть. Для удобства все данные в списке команд фильтра отсортированы в порядке возрастания. Количество уникальных значений в отфильтрованном диапазоне отображено справа от каждого значения в окне фильтра. Примечание: флажок {Пустые} соответствует пустым ячейкам. Он доступен, если в выделенном диапазоне есть хотя бы одна пустая ячейка. Чтобы облегчить этот процесс, используйте поле поиска. Введите в этом поле свой запрос полностью или частично - в списке ниже будут отображены значения, содержащие эти символы. Также будут доступны следующие две опции: Выделить все результаты поиска - выбрана по умолчанию. Позволяет выделить все значения в списке, соответствующие вашему запросу. Добавить выделенный фрагмент в фильтр - если установить этот флажок, выбранные значения не будут скрыты после применения фильтра. После того как вы выберете все нужные данные, нажмите кнопку OK в списке команд фильтра, чтобы применить фильтр. Фильтрация данных по определенным критериям В зависимости от данных, содержащихся в выбранном столбце, в правой части окна фильтра можно выбрать команду Числовой фильтр или Текстовый фильтр, а затем выбрать одну из опций в подменю: Для Числового фильтра доступны следующие опции: Равно..., Не равно..., Больше..., Больше или равно..., Меньше..., Меньше или равно..., Между, Первые 10, Выше среднего, Ниже среднего, Пользовательский.... Для Текстового фильтра доступны следующие опции: Равно..., Не равно..., Начинается с..., Не начинается с..., Оканчивается на..., Не оканчивается на..., Содержит..., Не содержит..., Пользовательский.... После выбора одной из вышеуказанных опций (кроме опций Первые 10 и Выше/Ниже среднего), откроется окно Пользовательский фильтр. В верхнем выпадающем списке будет выбран соответствующий критерий. Введите нужное значение в поле справа. Для добавления еще одного критерия используйте переключатель И, если требуется, чтобы данные удовлетворяли обоим критериям, или выберите переключатель Или, если могут удовлетворяться один или оба критерия. Затем выберите из нижнего выпадающего списка второй критерий и введите нужное значение справа. Нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. При выборе опции Пользовательский... из списка опций Числового/Текстового фильтра, первое условие не выбирается автоматически, вы можете выбрать его сами. При выборе опции Первые 10 из списка опций Числового фильтра, откроется новое окно: В первом выпадающем списке можно выбрать, надо ли отобразить Наибольшие или Наименьшие значения. Во втором поле можно указать, сколько записей из списка или какой процент от общего количества записей требуется отобразить (можно ввести число от 1 до 500). В третьем выпадающем списке можно задать единицы измерения: Элемент или Процент. Когда нужные параметры будут заданы, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить фильтр. При выборе опции Выше/Ниже среднего из списка опций Числового фильтра, фильтр будет применен сразу. Фильтрация данных по цвету Если в диапазоне ячеек, который требуется отфильтровать, есть ячейки, которые вы отформатировали, изменив цвет их фона или шрифта (вручную или с помощью готовых стилей), можно использовать одну из следующих опций: Фильтр по цвету ячеек - чтобы отобразить только записи с определенным цветом фона ячеек и скрыть остальные, Фильтр по цвету шрифта - чтобы отобразить только записи с определенным цветом шрифта в ячейках и скрыть остальные. Когда вы выберете нужную опцию, откроется палитра, содержащая цвета, использованные в выделенном диапазоне ячеек. Выберите один из цветов, чтобы применить фильтр. В первой ячейке столбца появится кнопка Фильтр . Это означает, что фильтр применен. Количество отфильтрованных записей будет отображено в строке состояния (например, отфильтровано записей: 25 из 80). Примечание: когда фильтр применен, строки, отсеянные в результате фильтрации, нельзя изменить при автозаполнении, форматировании, удалении видимого содержимого. Такие действия влияют только на видимые строки, а строки, скрытые фильтром, остаются без изменений. При копировании и вставке отфильтрованных данных можно скопировать и вставить только видимые строки. Это не эквивалентно строкам, скрытым вручную, которые затрагиваются всеми аналогичными действиями. Сортировка отфильтрованных данных Можно задать порядок сортировки данных, для которых включен или применен фильтр. Нажмите на кнопку со стрелкой или кнопку Фильтр и выберите одну из опций в списке команд фильтра: Сортировка по возрастанию - позволяет сортировать данные в порядке возрастания, отобразив в верхней части столбца наименьшее значение, Сортировка по убыванию - позволяет сортировать данные в порядке убывания, отобразив в верхней части столбца наибольшее значение, Сортировка по цвету ячеек - позволяет выбрать один из цветов и отобразить записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек в верхней части столбца, Сортировка по цвету шрифта - позволяет выбрать один из цветов и отобразить записи с таким же цветом шрифта в верхней части столбца. Последние две команды можно использовать, если в диапазоне ячеек, который требуется отсортировать, есть ячейки, которые вы отформатировали, изменив цвет их фона или шрифта (вручную или с помощью готовых стилей). Направление сортировки будет обозначено с помощью стрелки в кнопках фильтра. если данные отсортированы по возрастанию, кнопка со стрелкой в первой ячейке столбца выглядит так: , а кнопка Фильтр выглядит следующим образом: . если данные отсортированы по убыванию, кнопка со стрелкой в первой ячейке столбца выглядит так: , а кнопка Фильтр выглядит следующим образом: . Данные можно также быстро отсортировать по цвету с помощью команд контекстного меню: щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке, содержащей цвет, по которому требуется отсортировать данные, выберите в меню команду Сортировка, выберите из подменю нужную опцию: Сначала ячейки с выделенным цветом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек в верхней части столбца, Сначала ячейки с выделенным шрифтом - чтобы отобразить записи с таким же цветом шрифта в верхней части столбца. Фильтр по содержимому выделенной ячейки Данные можно также быстро фильтровать по содержимому выделенной ячейки с помощью команд контекстного меню. Щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке, выберите в меню команду Фильтр, а затем выберите одну из доступных опций: Фильтр по значению выбранной ячейки - чтобы отобразить только записи с таким же значением, как и в выделенной ячейке. Фильтр по цвету ячейки - чтобы отобразить только записи с таким же цветом фона ячеек, как и у выделенной ячейки. Фильтр по цвету шрифта - чтобы отобразить только записи с таким же цветом шрифта, как и у выделенной ячейки. Форматирование по шаблону таблицы Чтобы облегчить работу с данными, в редакторе электронных таблиц предусмотрена возможность применения к выделенному диапазону ячеек шаблона таблицы с автоматическим включением фильтра. Для этого: выделите диапазон ячеек, которые требуется отформатировать, щелкните по значку Форматировать как шаблон таблицы , расположенному на вкладке Главная верхней панели инструментов, в галерее выберите требуемый шаблон, в открывшемся всплывающем окне проверьте диапазон ячеек, которые требуется отформатировать как таблицу, установите флажок Заголовок, если требуется, чтобы заголовки таблицы входили в выделенный диапазон ячеек; в противном случае строка заголовка будет добавлена наверху, в то время как выделенный диапазон ячеек сместится на одну строку вниз, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить выбранный шаблон. Шаблон будет применен к выделенному диапазону ячеек, и вы сможете редактировать заголовки таблицы и применять фильтр для работы с данными. Для получения дополнительной информации о работе с форматированными таблицами, обратитесь к этой странице. Повторное применение фильтра Если отфильтрованные данные были изменены, можно обновить фильтр, чтобы отобразить актуальный результат: нажмите на кнопку Фильтр в первой ячейке столбца, содержащего отфильтрованные данные, в открывшемся списке команд фильтра выберите опцию Применить повторно. Можно также щелкнуть правой кнопкой мыши по ячейке в столбце, содержащем отфильтрованные данные, и выбрать из контекстного меню команду Применить повторно. Очистка фильтра Для очистки фильтра: нажмите на кнопку Фильтр в первой ячейке столбца, содержащего отфильтрованные данные, в открывшемся списке команд фильтра выберите опцию Очистить. Можно также поступить следующим образом: выделите диапазон ячеек, которые содержат отфильтрованные данные, щелкните по значку Очистить фильтр , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов. Фильтр останется включенным, но все примененные параметры фильтра будут удалены, а кнопки Фильтр в первых ячейках столбцов изменятся на кнопки со стрелкой . Удаление фильтра Для удаления фильтра: выделите диапазон ячеек, содержащих отфильтрованные данные, щелкните по значку Фильтр , расположенному на вкладке Главная или Данные верхней панели инструментов. Фильтр будет отключен, а кнопки со стрелкой исчезнут из первых ячеек столбцов. Сортировка данных по нескольким столбцам/строкам Для сортировки данных по нескольким столбцам/строкам можно создать несколько уровней сортировки, используя функцию Настраиваемая сортировка. выделите диапазон ячеек, который требуется отсортировать (можно выделить отдельную ячейку в диапазоне, чтобы отсортировать весь диапазон), щелкните по значку Настраиваемая сортировка , расположенному на вкладке Данные верхней панели инструментов, откроется окно Сортировка. По умолчанию включена сортировка по столбцам. используйте разделы Уровни для добавления новых уровней и управления добавленными уровнями. Нажмите кнопку Создать, чтобы добавить новый уровень, выберите второй столбец/строку, которые вы хотите отсортировать, и укажите другие параметры сортировки в поле Затем по, как описано выше. В случае необходимости добавьте другие уровни таким же способом, Нажмите кнопку Копировать, чтобы скопировать выбранный уровень и продублировать все существующие параметры, Нажмите кнопку Параметры, чтобы изменить ориентацию сортировки (то есть сортировать данные по строкам, а не по столбцам). Откроется окно Параметры сортировки: установите флажок Мои данные содержат заголовки, если это необходимо, выберите нужную Ориентацию: Сортировать сверху вниз, чтобы сортировать данные по столбцам, или Сортировать слева направо, чтобы сортировать данные по строкам, нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Нажмите нопку Удалить, чтобы удалить выбранный уровень, Используйте кнопки со стрелками Переместить уровень вверх / Переместить уровень вниз, чтобы изменить порядок уровней. задайте первый уровень сортировки в поле Сортировать по: в разделе Столбец / Строка выберите первый столбец / строку, который требуется отсортировать, в списке Сортировка выберите одну из следующих опций: Значения, Цвет ячейки или Цвет шрифта, в списке Порядок укажите нужный порядок сортировки. Доступные параметры различаются в зависимости от опции, выбранной в списке Сортировка: если выбрана опция Значения, выберите опцию По возрастанию / По убыванию, если диапазон ячеек содержит числовые значения, или опцию От А до Я / От Я до А, если диапазон ячеек содержит текстовые значения, если выбрана опция Цвет ячейки, выберите нужный цвет ячейки и выберите опцию Сверху / Снизу для столбцов или Слева / Справа для строк, если выбрана опция Цвет шрифта, выберите нужный цвет шрифта и выберите опцию Сверху / Снизу для столбцов или Слева / Справа для строк. нажмите кнопку OK, чтобы применить изменения и закрыть окно. Данные будут отсортированы в соответствии с заданными уровнями сортировки." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css index c4ea4bce08..d1977425a6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/scroll.css @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ html{ - overflow: scroll; + overflow: auto; scrollbar-track-color: #eee; scrollbar-face-color: #f7f7f7; scrollbar-highlight-color: #eee; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css index 8afa79bd73..99b24032c2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/tr/editor.css @@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ text-decoration: none; display: block; float: right; margin-top: 10px; + margin-left: 20px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/less/filterdialog.less b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/less/filterdialog.less index eca45906f0..d005ae08c6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/less/filterdialog.less +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/less/filterdialog.less @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .combo-values { width: 100%; - height: 100%; + display: flex; overflow: hidden; .list-item { diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/az.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/az.json index f253e3f929..cab31195ef 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/az.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/az.json @@ -430,6 +430,7 @@ "textBringToForeground": "Ön plana Çıxarın", "textCell": "Xana", "textCenter": "Mərkəz", + "textChangeShape": "Formanı dəyiş", "textChart": "Diaqram", "textChartTitle": "Diaqram Başlığı", "textClearFilter": "Süzgəci Təmizlə", @@ -578,7 +579,6 @@ "textAutomatic": "Automatic", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCellStyle": "Cell Style", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDone": "Done", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/be.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/be.json index 0f4ae83e85..ef227d9df6 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/be.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/be.json @@ -421,6 +421,7 @@ "textCell": "Ячэйка", "textCellStyle": "Стыль ячэйкі", "textCenter": "Па цэнтры", + "textChangeShape": "Змяніць фігуру", "textChart": "Дыяграма", "textChartTitle": "Загаловак дыяграмы", "textColor": "Колер", @@ -455,7 +456,6 @@ "textBottom": "Bottom", "textBottomBorder": "Bottom Border", "textBringToForeground": "Bring to Foreground", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textClearFilter": "Clear Filter", "textCross": "Cross", "textCrossesValue": "Crosses Value", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json index 45c3950a1e..08fb91c113 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/bg.json @@ -1,409 +1,71 @@ { - "About": { - "textAbout": "About", - "textAddress": "Address", - "textBack": "Back", - "textEmail": "Email", - "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", - "textTel": "Tel", - "textVersion": "Version", - "textEditor": "Spreadsheet Editor" - }, - "Common": { - "Collaboration": { + "View": { + "Add": { + "textShape": "Форма", + "errorMaxRows": "ERROR! The maximum number of data series per chart is 255.", + "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
    opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "textAddComment": "Add Comment", - "textAddReply": "Add Reply", + "sCatDateAndTime": "Date and time", + "sCatEngineering": "Engineering", + "sCatFinancial": "Financial", + "sCatInformation": "Information", + "sCatLogical": "Logical", + "sCatLookupAndReference": "Lookup and Reference", + "sCatMathematic": "Math and trigonometry", + "sCatStatistical": "Statistical", + "sCatTextAndData": "Text and data", + "textAddLink": "Add Link", + "textAddress": "Address", + "textAllTableHint": "Returns the entire contents of the table or specified table columns including column headers, data and total rows", "textBack": "Back", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", - "textComments": "Comments", - "textDeleteComment": "Delete Comment", - "textDeleteReply": "Delete Reply", + "textChart": "Chart", + "textComment": "Comment", + "textDataTableHint": "Returns the data cells of the table or specified table columns", + "textDisplay": "Display", "textDone": "Done", - "textEdit": "Edit", - "textEditComment": "Edit Comment", - "textEditReply": "Edit Reply", - "textEditUser": "Users who are editing the file:", - "textMessageDeleteComment": "Do you really want to delete this comment?", - "textMessageDeleteReply": "Do you really want to delete this reply?", - "textNoComments": "This document doesn't contain comments", - "textReopen": "Reopen", - "textResolve": "Resolve", - "textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.", - "textUsers": "Users", + "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify the image URL.", + "textExternalLink": "External Link", + "textFilter": "Filter", + "textFunction": "Function", + "textGroups": "CATEGORIES", + "textHeadersTableHint": "Returns the column headers for the table or specified table columns", + "textImage": "Image", + "textImageURL": "Image URL", + "textInsert": "Insert", + "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", + "textInternalDataRange": "Internal Data Range", + "textInvalidRange": "ERROR! Invalid cells range", + "textLink": "Link", + "textLinkSettings": "Link Settings", + "textLinkType": "Link Type", "textOk": "Ok", - "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings" + "textOther": "Other", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL", + "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from library", + "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", + "textRange": "Range", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", + "textRequired": "Required", + "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", + "textSelectedRange": "Selected Range", + "textSheet": "Sheet", + "textSortAndFilter": "Sort and Filter", + "textThisRowHint": "Choose only this row of the specified column", + "textTotalsTableHint": "Returns the total rows for the table or specified table columns", + "txtExpand": "Expand and sort", + "txtExpandSort": "The data next to the selection will not be sorted. Do you want to expand the selection to include the adjacent data or continue with sorting the currently selected cells only?", + "txtLockSort": "Data is found next to your selection, but you do not have sufficient permissions to change those cells.
    Do you wish to continue with the current selection?", + "txtNo": "No", + "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", + "txtSorting": "Sorting", + "txtSortSelected": "Sort selected", + "txtYes": "Yes" }, - "ThemeColorPalette": { - "textCustomColors": "Custom Colors", - "textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", - "textThemeColors": "Theme Colors" - } - }, - "ContextMenu": { - "errorCopyCutPaste": "Copy, cut, and paste actions using the context menu will be performed within the current file only.", - "menuAddComment": "Add Comment", - "menuAddLink": "Add Link", - "menuCancel": "Cancel", - "menuCell": "Cell", - "menuDelete": "Delete", - "menuEdit": "Edit", - "menuFreezePanes": "Freeze Panes", - "menuHide": "Hide", - "menuMerge": "Merge", - "menuMore": "More", - "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", - "menuShow": "Show", - "menuUnfreezePanes": "Unfreeze Panes", - "menuUnmerge": "Unmerge", - "menuUnwrap": "Unwrap", - "menuViewComment": "View Comment", - "menuWrap": "Wrap", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", - "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", - "warnMergeLostData": "The operation can destroy data in the selected cells. Continue?", - "errorInvalidLink": "The link reference does not exist. Please correct the link or delete it.", - "textOk": "Ok", - "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
    Are you sure you want to continue?", - "menuEditLink": "Edit Link" - }, - "Controller": { - "Main": { - "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", - "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
    Please, contact your admin.", - "errorProcessSaveResult": "Saving is failed.", - "errorServerVersion": "The editor version has been updated. The page will be reloaded to apply the changes.", - "errorUpdateVersion": "The file version has been changed. The page will be reloaded.", - "leavePageText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "SDK": { - "txtAccent": "Accent", - "txtAll": "(All)", - "txtArt": "Your text here", - "txtBlank": "(blank)", - "txtByField": "%1 of %2", - "txtClearFilter": "Clear Filter (Alt+C)", - "txtColLbls": "Column Labels", - "txtColumn": "Column", - "txtConfidential": "Confidential", - "txtDate": "Date", - "txtDays": "Days", - "txtDiagramTitle": "Chart Title", - "txtFile": "File", - "txtGrandTotal": "Grand Total", - "txtGroup": "Group", - "txtHours": "Hours", - "txtMinutes": "Minutes", - "txtMonths": "Months", - "txtMultiSelect": "Multi-Select (Alt+S)", - "txtOr": "%1 or %2", - "txtPage": "Page", - "txtPageOf": "Page %1 of %2", - "txtPages": "Pages", - "txtPreparedBy": "Prepared by", - "txtPrintArea": "Print_Area", - "txtQuarter": "Qtr", - "txtQuarters": "Quarters", - "txtRow": "Row", - "txtRowLbls": "Row Labels", - "txtSeconds": "Seconds", - "txtSeries": "Series", - "txtStyle_Bad": "Bad", - "txtStyle_Calculation": "Calculation", - "txtStyle_Check_Cell": "Check Cell", - "txtStyle_Comma": "Comma", - "txtStyle_Currency": "Currency", - "txtStyle_Explanatory_Text": "Explanatory Text", - "txtStyle_Good": "Good", - "txtStyle_Heading_1": "Heading 1", - "txtStyle_Heading_2": "Heading 2", - "txtStyle_Heading_3": "Heading 3", - "txtStyle_Heading_4": "Heading 4", - "txtStyle_Input": "Input", - "txtStyle_Linked_Cell": "Linked Cell", - "txtStyle_Neutral": "Neutral", - "txtStyle_Normal": "Normal", - "txtStyle_Note": "Note", - "txtStyle_Output": "Output", - "txtStyle_Percent": "Percent", - "txtStyle_Title": "Title", - "txtStyle_Total": "Total", - "txtStyle_Warning_Text": "Warning Text", - "txtTab": "Tab", - "txtTable": "Table", - "txtTime": "Time", - "txtValues": "Values", - "txtXAxis": "X Axis", - "txtYAxis": "Y Axis", - "txtYears": "Years" - }, - "textAnonymous": "Anonymous", - "textBuyNow": "Visit website", - "textClose": "Close", - "textContactUs": "Contact sales", - "textCustomLoader": "Sorry, you are not entitled to change the loader. Please, contact our sales department to get a quote.", - "textGuest": "Guest", - "textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
    Do you want to run macros?", - "textNo": "No", - "textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", - "textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", - "textRemember": "Remember my choice", - "textYes": "Yes", - "titleServerVersion": "Editor updated", - "titleUpdateVersion": "Version changed", - "warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact your administrator to learn more.", - "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "License expired. You have no access to document editing functionality. Please, contact your admin.", - "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "License needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
    Please contact your administrator to get full access", - "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", - "warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit the file.", - "textNoChoices": "There are no choices for filling the cell.
    Only text values from the column can be selected for replacement.", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", - "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "errorOpensource": "Using the free Community version, you can open documents for viewing only. To access mobile web editors, a commercial license is required.", - "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", - "titleLicenseExp": "License expired", - "warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired. Please, update your license and refresh the page.", - "textDontUpdate": "Don't Update", - "textUpdate": "Update", - "textWarnUpdateExternalData": "This workbook contains links to one or more external sources that could be unsafe. If you trust the links, update them to get the latest data.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
    Please contact your administrator.", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only." - } - }, - "Error": { - "convertationTimeoutText": "Conversion timeout exceeded.", - "criticalErrorExtText": "Press 'OK' to go back to the document list.", - "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", - "downloadErrorText": "Download failed.", - "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
    Please, contact your admin.", - "errorArgsRange": "An error in the formula.
    Incorrect arguments range.", - "errorAutoFilterChange": "The operation is not allowed as it is attempting to shift cells in a table on your worksheet.", - "errorAutoFilterChangeFormatTable": "The operation could not be done for the selected cells as you cannot move a part of a table.
    Select another data range so that the whole table is shifted and try again.", - "errorAutoFilterDataRange": "The operation could not be done for the selected range of cells.
    Select a uniform data range inside or outside the table and try again.", - "errorAutoFilterHiddenRange": "The operation cannot be performed because the area contains filtered cells.
    Please, unhide the filtered elements and try again.", - "errorBadImageUrl": "Image url is incorrect", - "errorChangeArray": "You cannot change part of an array.", - "errorConnectToServer": "Can't save this doc. Check your connection settings or contact your admin.
    When you click the 'OK' button, you will be prompted to download the document.", - "errorCopyMultiselectArea": "This command cannot be used with multiple selections.
    Select a single range and try again.", - "errorCountArg": "An error in the formula.
    Invalid number of arguments.", - "errorCountArgExceed": "An error in the formula.
    Maximum number of arguments exceeded.", - "errorCreateDefName": "The existing named ranges cannot be edited and the new ones cannot be created
    at the moment as some of them are being edited.", - "errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
    Database connection error. Please, contact support.", - "errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", - "errorDataRange": "Incorrect data range.", - "errorDataValidate": "The value you entered is not valid.
    A user has restricted values that can be entered into this cell.", - "errorDefaultMessage": "Error code: %1", - "errorEditingDownloadas": "An error occurred during the work with the document.
    Use the 'Download' option to save the file backup copy locally.", - "errorFilePassProtect": "The file is password protected and could not be opened.", - "errorFileRequest": "External error.
    File Request. Please, contact support.", - "errorFileSizeExceed": "The file size exceeds your server limitation.
    Please, contact your admin for details.", - "errorFileVKey": "External error.
    Incorrect security key. Please, contact support.", - "errorFillRange": "Could not fill the selected range of cells.
    All the merged cells need to be the same size.", - "errorFormulaName": "An error in the formula.
    Incorrect formula name.", - "errorFormulaParsing": "Internal error while the formula parsing.", - "errorFrmlMaxLength": "You cannot add this formula as its length exceeds the allowed number of characters.
    Please, edit it and try again.", - "errorFrmlMaxReference": "You cannot enter this formula because it has too many values,
    cell references, and/or names.", - "errorFrmlMaxTextLength": "Text values in formulas are limited to 255 characters.
    Use the CONCATENATE function or concatenation operator (&)", - "errorFrmlWrongReferences": "The function refers to a sheet that does not exist.
    Please, check the data and try again.", - "errorInvalidRef": "Enter a correct name for the selection or a valid reference to go to.", - "errorKeyEncrypt": "Unknown key descriptor", - "errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", - "errorLockedAll": "The operation could not be done as the sheet has been locked by another user.", - "errorLockedCellPivot": "You cannot change data inside a pivot table.", - "errorLockedWorksheetRename": "The sheet cannot be renamed at the moment as it is being renamed by another user", - "errorMaxPoints": "The maximum number of points in series per chart is 4096.", - "errorMoveRange": "Cannot change a part of a merged cell", - "errorMultiCellFormula": "Multi-cell array formulas are not allowed in tables.", - "errorOpenWarning": "The length of one of the formulas in the file exceeded
    the allowed number of characters and it was removed.", - "errorOperandExpected": "The entered function syntax is not correct. Please, check if you missed one of the parentheses - '(' or ')'.", - "errorPasteMaxRange": "The copy and paste area does not match. Please, select an area of the same size or click the first cell in a row to paste the copied cells.", - "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "Unfortunately, it’s not possible to print more than 1500 pages at once in the current version of the program.
    This restriction will be eliminated in upcoming releases.", - "errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please, reload the page.", - "errorSessionIdle": "The document has not been edited for quite a long time. Please, reload the page.", - "errorSessionToken": "The connection to the server has been interrupted. Please, reload the page.", - "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
    opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", - "errorUnexpectedGuid": "External error.
    Unexpected Guid. Please, contact support.", - "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internet connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
    Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", - "errorUserDrop": "The file cannot be accessed right now.", - "errorUsersExceed": "The number of users allowed by the pricing plan was exceeded", - "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
    but you won't be able to download it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", - "errorWrongBracketsCount": "An error in the formula.
    Wrong number of brackets.", - "errorWrongOperator": "An error in the entered formula. Wrong operator is used.
    Please correct the error.", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "openErrorText": "An error has occurred while opening the file", - "pastInMergeAreaError": "Cannot change a part of a merged cell", - "saveErrorText": "An error has occurred while saving the file", - "scriptLoadError": "The connection is too slow, some of the components could not be loaded. Please, reload the page.", - "unknownErrorText": "Unknown error.", - "uploadImageExtMessage": "Unknown image format.", - "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No images uploaded.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB.", - "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorChangeOnProtectedSheet": "The cell or chart you are trying to change is on a protected sheet. To make a change, unprotect the sheet. You might be requested to enter a password.", - "textErrorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct.
    Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization.", - "errorCannotUseCommandProtectedSheet": "You cannot use this command on a protected sheet. To use this command, unprotect the sheet.
    You might be requested to enter a password.", - "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
    This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textOk": "Ok", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", - "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing." - }, - "LongActions": { - "applyChangesTextText": "Loading data...", - "applyChangesTitleText": "Loading Data", - "confirmMoveCellRange": "The destination cells range can contain data. Continue the operation?", - "confirmPutMergeRange": "The source data contains merged cells.
    They will be unmerged before they are pasted into the table.", - "confirmReplaceFormulaInTable": "Formulas in the header row will be removed and converted to static text.
    Do you want to continue?", - "downloadTextText": "Downloading document...", - "downloadTitleText": "Downloading Document", - "loadFontsTextText": "Loading data...", - "loadFontsTitleText": "Loading Data", - "loadFontTextText": "Loading data...", - "loadFontTitleText": "Loading Data", - "loadImagesTextText": "Loading images...", - "loadImagesTitleText": "Loading Images", - "loadImageTextText": "Loading image...", - "loadImageTitleText": "Loading Image", - "loadingDocumentTextText": "Loading document...", - "loadingDocumentTitleText": "Loading document", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "openTextText": "Opening document...", - "openTitleText": "Opening Document", - "printTextText": "Printing document...", - "printTitleText": "Printing Document", - "savePreparingText": "Preparing to save", - "savePreparingTitle": "Preparing to save. Please wait...", - "saveTextText": "Saving document...", - "saveTitleText": "Saving Document", - "textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", - "textNo": "No", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textYes": "Yes", - "txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", - "uploadImageTextText": "Uploading image...", - "uploadImageTitleText": "Uploading Image", - "waitText": "Please, wait...", - "advDRMPassword": "Password", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textErrorWrongPassword": "The password you supplied is not correct.", - "textUnlockRange": "Unlock Range", - "textUnlockRangeWarning": "A range you are trying to change is password protected.", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
    Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", - "textUndo": "Undo", - "textContinue": "Continue" - }, - "Statusbar": { - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textDelete": "Delete", - "textDuplicate": "Duplicate", - "textErrNameExists": "Worksheet with this name already exists.", - "textErrNameWrongChar": "A sheet name cannot contains characters: \\, /, *, ?, [, ], :", - "textErrNotEmpty": "Sheet name must not be empty", - "textErrorLastSheet": "The workbook must have at least one visible worksheet.", - "textErrorRemoveSheet": "Can't delete the worksheet.", - "textHide": "Hide", - "textMore": "More", - "textRename": "Rename", - "textRenameSheet": "Rename Sheet", - "textSheet": "Sheet", - "textSheetName": "Sheet Name", - "textUnhide": "Unhide", - "textWarnDeleteSheet": "The worksheet maybe has data. Proceed operation?", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textMove": "Move", - "textMoveBack": "Move back", - "textMoveForward": "Move forward", - "textHidden": "Hidden", - "textMoveBefore": "Move before sheet", - "textMoveToEnd": "(Move to end)", - "textTabColor": "Tab Color" - }, - "Toolbar": { - "dlgLeaveMsgText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", - "dlgLeaveTitleText": "You leave the application", - "leaveButtonText": "Leave this Page", - "stayButtonText": "Stay on this Page" - }, - "View": { - "Add": { - "errorMaxRows": "ERROR! The maximum number of data series per chart is 255.", - "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
    opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", - "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", - "sCatDateAndTime": "Date and time", - "sCatEngineering": "Engineering", - "sCatFinancial": "Financial", - "sCatInformation": "Information", - "sCatLogical": "Logical", - "sCatLookupAndReference": "Lookup and Reference", - "sCatMathematic": "Math and trigonometry", - "sCatStatistical": "Statistical", - "sCatTextAndData": "Text and data", - "textAddLink": "Add Link", - "textAddress": "Address", - "textBack": "Back", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChart": "Chart", - "textComment": "Comment", - "textDisplay": "Display", - "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify the image URL.", - "textExternalLink": "External Link", - "textFilter": "Filter", - "textFunction": "Function", - "textGroups": "CATEGORIES", - "textImage": "Image", - "textImageURL": "Image URL", - "textInsert": "Insert", - "textInsertImage": "Insert Image", - "textInternalDataRange": "Internal Data Range", - "textInvalidRange": "ERROR! Invalid cells range", - "textLink": "Link", - "textLinkSettings": "Link Settings", - "textLinkType": "Link Type", - "textOther": "Other", - "textPictureFromLibrary": "Picture from library", - "textPictureFromURL": "Picture from URL", - "textRange": "Range", - "textRequired": "Required", - "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", - "textShape": "Shape", - "textSheet": "Sheet", - "textSortAndFilter": "Sort and Filter", - "txtExpand": "Expand and sort", - "txtExpandSort": "The data next to the selection will not be sorted. Do you want to expand the selection to include the adjacent data or continue with sorting the currently selected cells only?", - "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", - "txtSorting": "Sorting", - "txtSortSelected": "Sort selected", - "textSelectedRange": "Selected Range", - "txtLockSort": "Data is found next to your selection, but you do not have sufficient permissions to change those cells.
    Do you wish to continue with the current selection?", - "txtNo": "No", - "txtYes": "Yes", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textThisRowHint": "Choose only this row of the specified column", - "textAllTableHint": "Returns the entire contents of the table or specified table columns including column headers, data and total rows", - "textDataTableHint": "Returns the data cells of the table or specified table columns", - "textHeadersTableHint": "Returns the column headers for the table or specified table columns", - "textTotalsTableHint": "Returns the total rows for the table or specified table columns", - "textDone": "Done", - "textRecommended": "Recommended", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" - }, - "Edit": { + "Edit": { + "textChangeShape": "Промяна на форма", + "textRemoveShape": "Премахване на формата", + "textShape": "Форма", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "textAccounting": "Accounting", "textActualSize": "Actual Size", @@ -419,7 +81,9 @@ "textAllBorders": "All Borders", "textAngleClockwise": "Angle Clockwise", "textAngleCounterclockwise": "Angle Counterclockwise", + "textArrange": "Arrange", "textAuto": "Auto", + "textAutomatic": "Automatic", "textAxisCrosses": "Axis Crosses", "textAxisOptions": "Axis Options", "textAxisPosition": "Axis Position", @@ -432,8 +96,9 @@ "textBottom": "Bottom", "textBottomBorder": "Bottom Border", "textBringToForeground": "Bring to Foreground", + "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCell": "Cell", - "textCellStyles": "Cell Styles", + "textCellStyle": "Cell Style", "textCenter": "Center", "textChart": "Chart", "textChartTitle": "Chart Title", @@ -447,12 +112,15 @@ "textDate": "Date", "textDefault": "Selected range", "textDeleteFilter": "Delete Filter", + "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", + "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDesign": "Design", "textDiagonalDownBorder": "Diagonal Down Border", "textDiagonalUpBorder": "Diagonal Up Border", "textDisplay": "Display", "textDisplayUnits": "Display Units", "textDollar": "Dollar", + "textDone": "Done", "textEditLink": "Edit Link", "textEffects": "Effects", "textEmptyImgUrl": "You need to specify the image URL.", @@ -520,6 +188,7 @@ "textNoOverlay": "No Overlay", "textNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", "textNumber": "Number", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOnTickMarks": "On Tick Marks", "textOpacity": "Opacity", "textOut": "Out", @@ -532,11 +201,8 @@ "textPound": "Pound", "textPt": "pt", "textRange": "Range", + "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveImage": "Remove Image", - "textRemoveLink": "Remove Link", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", - "textReorder": "Reorder", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceImage": "Replace Image", "textRequired": "Required", @@ -553,7 +219,6 @@ "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", "textSettings": "Settings", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSheet": "Sheet", "textSize": "Size", "textStyle": "Style", @@ -581,18 +246,7 @@ "textYen": "Yen", "txtNotUrl": "This field should be a URL in the format \"http://www.example.com\"", "txtSortHigh2Low": "Sort Highest to Lowest", - "txtSortLow2High": "Sort Lowest to Highest", - "textAutomatic": "Automatic", - "textOk": "Ok", - "del_textCellStyles": "Cell Styles", - "textCellStyle": "Cell Style", - "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", - "textDone": "Done", - "textRecommended": "Recommended" + "txtSortLow2High": "Sort Lowest to Highest" }, "Settings": { "advCSVOptions": "Choose CSV options", @@ -601,6 +255,8 @@ "advDRMPassword": "Password", "closeButtonText": "Close File", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "strFuncLocale": "Formula Language", + "strFuncLocaleEx": "Example: SUM; MIN; MAX; COUNT", "textAbout": "About", "textAddress": "Address", "textApplication": "Application", @@ -612,6 +268,9 @@ "textByRows": "By rows", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCentimeter": "Centimeter", + "textChooseCsvOptions": "Choose CSV Options", + "textChooseDelimeter": "Choose Delimeter", + "textChooseEncoding": "Choose Encoding", "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", "textColorSchemes": "Color Schemes", "textComment": "Comment", @@ -619,6 +278,9 @@ "textComments": "Comments", "textCreated": "Created", "textCustomSize": "Custom Size", + "textDarkTheme": "Dark Theme", + "textDelimeter": "Delimiter", + "textDirection": "Direction", "textDisableAll": "Disable All", "textDisableAllMacrosWithNotification": "Disable all macros with a notification", "textDisableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Disable all macros without a notification", @@ -628,6 +290,9 @@ "textEmail": "Email", "textEnableAll": "Enable All", "textEnableAllMacrosWithoutNotification": "Enable all macros without a notification", + "textEncoding": "Encoding", + "textExample": "Example", + "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", "textFind": "Find", "textFindAndReplace": "Find and Replace", "textFindAndReplaceAll": "Find and Replace All", @@ -643,13 +308,15 @@ "textLastModified": "Last Modified", "textLastModifiedBy": "Last Modified By", "textLeft": "Left", + "textLeftToRight": "Left To Right", "textLocation": "Location", "textLookIn": "Look In", "textMacrosSettings": "Macros Settings", "textMargins": "Margins", "textMatchCase": "Match Case", "textMatchCell": "Match Cell", - "textNoTextFound": "Text not found", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", "textOpenFile": "Enter a password to open the file", "textOrientation": "Orientation", "textOwner": "Owner", @@ -662,7 +329,9 @@ "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceAll": "Replace All", "textResolvedComments": "Resolved Comments", + "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", "textRight": "Right", + "textRightToLeft": "Right To Left", "textSearch": "Search", "textSearchBy": "Search", "textSearchIn": "Search In", @@ -682,10 +351,39 @@ "textValues": "Values", "textVersion": "Version", "textWorkbook": "Workbook", + "txtBe": "Belarusian", + "txtBg": "Bulgarian", + "txtCa": "Catalan", + "txtColon": "Colon", + "txtComma": "Comma", + "txtCs": "Czech", + "txtDa": "Danish", + "txtDe": "Deutsch", "txtDelimiter": "Delimiter", + "txtDownloadCsv": "Download CSV", + "txtEl": "Greek", + "txtEn": "English", "txtEncoding": "Encoding", + "txtEs": "Spanish", + "txtFi": "Finnish", + "txtFr": "French", + "txtHu": "Hungarian", + "txtId": "Indonesian", "txtIncorrectPwd": "Password is incorrect", + "txtIt": "Italian", + "txtJa": "Japanese", + "txtKo": "Korean", + "txtLo": "Lao", + "txtLv": "Latvian", + "txtNb": "Norwegian", + "txtNl": "Dutch", + "txtOk": "Ok", + "txtPl": "Polish", "txtProtected": "Once you enter the password and open the file, the current password to the file will be reset", + "txtPtbr": "Portuguese (Brazil)", + "txtPtlang": "Portuguese (Portugal)", + "txtRo": "Romanian", + "txtRu": "Russian", "txtScheme1": "Office", "txtScheme10": "Median", "txtScheme11": "Metro", @@ -708,63 +406,354 @@ "txtScheme7": "Equity", "txtScheme8": "Flow", "txtScheme9": "Foundry", + "txtSemicolon": "Semicolon", + "txtSk": "Slovak", + "txtSl": "Slovenian", "txtSpace": "Space", + "txtSv": "Swedish", "txtTab": "Tab", - "warnDownloadAs": "If you continue saving in this format all features except the text will be lost.
    Are you sure you want to continue?", - "textOk": "Ok", - "textChooseCsvOptions": "Choose CSV Options", - "textChooseDelimeter": "Choose Delimeter", - "textChooseEncoding": "Choose Encoding", - "textDelimeter": "Delimiter", - "textEncoding": "Encoding", - "txtColon": "Colon", - "txtComma": "Comma", - "txtDownloadCsv": "Download CSV", - "txtOk": "Ok", - "txtSemicolon": "Semicolon", - "textExample": "Example", - "textDarkTheme": "Dark Theme", - "textFeedback": "Feedback & Support", - "textLeftToRight": "Left To Right", - "textRightToLeft": "Right To Left", - "textDirection": "Direction", - "textRestartApplication": "Please restart the application for the changes to take effect", - "strFuncLocale": "Formula Language", - "strFuncLocaleEx": "Example: SUM; MIN; MAX; COUNT", - "txtBe": "Belarusian", - "txtBg": "Bulgarian", - "txtCa": "Catalan", - "txtCs": "Czech", - "txtDa": "Danish", - "txtDe": "Deutsch", - "txtEl": "Greek", - "txtEn": "English", - "txtEs": "Spanish", - "txtFi": "Finnish", - "txtFr": "French", - "txtHu": "Hungarian", - "txtId": "Indonesian", - "txtIt": "Italian", - "txtJa": "Japanese", - "txtKo": "Korean", - "txtLo": "Lao", - "txtLv": "Latvian", - "txtNb": "Norwegian", - "txtNl": "Dutch", - "txtPl": "Polish", - "txtPtbr": "Portuguese (Brazil)", - "txtPtlang": "Portuguese (Portugal)", - "txtRo": "Romanian", - "txtRu": "Russian", - "txtSk": "Slovak", - "txtSl": "Slovenian", - "txtSv": "Swedish", "txtTr": "Turkish", "txtUk": "Ukrainian", "txtVi": "Vietnamese", "txtZh": "Chinese", - "del_textNoTextFound": "Text not found", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "If you continue saving in this format all features except the text will be lost.
    Are you sure you want to continue?" + } + }, + "About": { + "textAbout": "About", + "textAddress": "Address", + "textBack": "Back", + "textEditor": "Spreadsheet Editor", + "textEmail": "Email", + "textPoweredBy": "Powered By", + "textTel": "Tel", + "textVersion": "Version" + }, + "Common": { + "Collaboration": { + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "textAddComment": "Add Comment", + "textAddReply": "Add Reply", + "textBack": "Back", + "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textCollaboration": "Collaboration", + "textComments": "Comments", + "textDeleteComment": "Delete Comment", + "textDeleteReply": "Delete Reply", + "textDone": "Done", + "textEdit": "Edit", + "textEditComment": "Edit Comment", + "textEditReply": "Edit Reply", + "textEditUser": "Users who are editing the file:", + "textMessageDeleteComment": "Do you really want to delete this comment?", + "textMessageDeleteReply": "Do you really want to delete this reply?", + "textNoComments": "No Comments", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textReopen": "Reopen", + "textResolve": "Resolve", + "textSharingSettings": "Sharing Settings", + "textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.", + "textUsers": "Users" + }, + "ThemeColorPalette": { + "textCustomColors": "Custom Colors", + "textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", + "textThemeColors": "Theme Colors" + } + }, + "ContextMenu": { + "errorCopyCutPaste": "Copy, cut, and paste actions using the context menu will be performed within the current file only.", + "errorInvalidLink": "The link reference does not exist. Please correct the link or delete it.", + "menuAddComment": "Add Comment", + "menuAddLink": "Add Link", + "menuCancel": "Cancel", + "menuCell": "Cell", + "menuDelete": "Delete", + "menuEdit": "Edit", + "menuEditLink": "Edit Link", + "menuFreezePanes": "Freeze Panes", + "menuHide": "Hide", + "menuMerge": "Merge", + "menuMore": "More", + "menuOpenLink": "Open Link", + "menuShow": "Show", + "menuUnfreezePanes": "Unfreeze Panes", + "menuUnmerge": "Unmerge", + "menuUnwrap": "Unwrap", + "menuViewComment": "View Comment", + "menuWrap": "Wrap", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "textCopyCutPasteActions": "Copy, Cut and Paste Actions", + "textDoNotShowAgain": "Don't show again", + "textOk": "Ok", + "txtWarnUrl": "Clicking this link can be harmful to your device and data.
    Are you sure you want to continue?", + "warnMergeLostData": "Only the data from the upper-left cell will remain in the merged cell.
    Are you sure you want to continue?" + }, + "Controller": { + "Main": { + "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", + "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
    Please, contact your admin.", + "errorOpensource": "Using the free Community version, you can open documents for viewing only. To access mobile web editors, a commercial license is required.", + "errorProcessSaveResult": "Saving is failed.", + "errorServerVersion": "The editor version has been updated. The page will be reloaded to apply the changes.", + "errorUpdateVersion": "The file version has been changed. The page will be reloaded.", + "leavePageText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "SDK": { + "txtAccent": "Accent", + "txtAll": "(All)", + "txtArt": "Your text here", + "txtBlank": "(blank)", + "txtByField": "%1 of %2", + "txtClearFilter": "Clear Filter (Alt+C)", + "txtColLbls": "Column Labels", + "txtColumn": "Column", + "txtConfidential": "Confidential", + "txtDate": "Date", + "txtDays": "Days", + "txtDiagramTitle": "Chart Title", + "txtFile": "File", + "txtGrandTotal": "Grand Total", + "txtGroup": "Group", + "txtHours": "Hours", + "txtMinutes": "Minutes", + "txtMonths": "Months", + "txtMultiSelect": "Multi-Select (Alt+S)", + "txtOr": "%1 or %2", + "txtPage": "Page", + "txtPageOf": "Page %1 of %2", + "txtPages": "Pages", + "txtPreparedBy": "Prepared by", + "txtPrintArea": "Print_Area", + "txtQuarter": "Qtr", + "txtQuarters": "Quarters", + "txtRow": "Row", + "txtRowLbls": "Row Labels", + "txtSeconds": "Seconds", + "txtSeries": "Series", + "txtStyle_Bad": "Bad", + "txtStyle_Calculation": "Calculation", + "txtStyle_Check_Cell": "Check Cell", + "txtStyle_Comma": "Comma", + "txtStyle_Currency": "Currency", + "txtStyle_Explanatory_Text": "Explanatory Text", + "txtStyle_Good": "Good", + "txtStyle_Heading_1": "Heading 1", + "txtStyle_Heading_2": "Heading 2", + "txtStyle_Heading_3": "Heading 3", + "txtStyle_Heading_4": "Heading 4", + "txtStyle_Input": "Input", + "txtStyle_Linked_Cell": "Linked Cell", + "txtStyle_Neutral": "Neutral", + "txtStyle_Normal": "Normal", + "txtStyle_Note": "Note", + "txtStyle_Output": "Output", + "txtStyle_Percent": "Percent", + "txtStyle_Title": "Title", + "txtStyle_Total": "Total", + "txtStyle_Warning_Text": "Warning Text", + "txtTab": "Tab", + "txtTable": "Table", + "txtTime": "Time", + "txtValues": "Values", + "txtXAxis": "X Axis", + "txtYAxis": "Y Axis", + "txtYears": "Years" + }, + "textAnonymous": "Anonymous", + "textBuyNow": "Visit website", + "textClose": "Close", + "textContactUs": "Contact sales", + "textCustomLoader": "Sorry, you are not entitled to change the loader. Please, contact our sales department to get a quote.", + "textDontUpdate": "Don't Update", + "textGuest": "Guest", + "textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
    Do you want to run macros?", + "textNo": "No", + "textNoChoices": "There are no choices for filling the cell.
    Only text values from the column can be selected for replacement.", + "textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", + "textNoMatches": "No Matches", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", + "textRemember": "Remember my choice", + "textReplaceSkipped": "The replacement has been made. {0} occurrences were skipped.", + "textReplaceSuccess": "The search has been done. Occurrences replaced: {0}", + "textRequestMacros": "A macro makes a request to URL. Do you want to allow the request to the %1?", + "textUpdate": "Update", + "textWarnUpdateExternalData": "This workbook contains links to one or more external sources that could be unsafe. If you trust the links, update them to get the latest data.", + "textYes": "Yes", + "titleLicenseExp": "License expired", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", + "titleServerVersion": "Editor updated", + "titleUpdateVersion": "Version changed", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
    Please contact your administrator.", + "warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact your administrator to learn more.", + "warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired. Please, update your license and refresh the page.", + "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "License expired. You have no access to document editing functionality. Please, contact your admin.", + "warnLicenseLimitedRenewed": "License needs to be renewed. You have limited access to document editing functionality.
    Please contact your administrator to get full access", + "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", + "warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", + "warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", + "warnProcessRightsChange": "You don't have permission to edit the file." } + }, + "Error": { + "convertationTimeoutText": "Conversion timeout exceeded.", + "criticalErrorExtText": "Press 'OK' to go back to the document list.", + "criticalErrorTitle": "Error", + "downloadErrorText": "Download failed.", + "errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
    Please, contact your admin.", + "errorArgsRange": "An error in the formula.
    Incorrect arguments range.", + "errorAutoFilterChange": "The operation is not allowed as it is attempting to shift cells in a table on your worksheet.", + "errorAutoFilterChangeFormatTable": "The operation could not be done for the selected cells as you cannot move a part of a table.
    Select another data range so that the whole table is shifted and try again.", + "errorAutoFilterDataRange": "The operation could not be done for the selected range of cells.
    Select a uniform data range inside or outside the table and try again.", + "errorAutoFilterHiddenRange": "The operation cannot be performed because the area contains filtered cells.
    Please, unhide the filtered elements and try again.", + "errorBadImageUrl": "Image URL is incorrect", + "errorCannotUseCommandProtectedSheet": "You cannot use this command on a protected sheet. To use this command, unprotect the sheet.
    You might be requested to enter a password.", + "errorChangeArray": "You cannot change part of an array.", + "errorChangeOnProtectedSheet": "The cell or chart you are trying to change is on a protected sheet. To make a change, unprotect the sheet. You might be requested to enter a password.", + "errorConnectToServer": "Can't save this doc. Check your connection settings or contact your admin.
    When you click the 'OK' button, you will be prompted to download the document.", + "errorCopyMultiselectArea": "This command cannot be used with multiple selections.
    Select a single range and try again.", + "errorCountArg": "An error in the formula.
    Invalid number of arguments.", + "errorCountArgExceed": "An error in the formula.
    Maximum number of arguments exceeded.", + "errorCreateDefName": "The existing named ranges cannot be edited and the new ones cannot be created
    at the moment as some of them are being edited.", + "errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
    Database connection error. Please, contact support.", + "errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", + "errorDataRange": "Incorrect data range.", + "errorDataValidate": "The value you entered is not valid.
    A user has restricted values that can be entered into this cell.", + "errorDefaultMessage": "Error code: %1", + "errorDirectUrl": "Please verify the link to the document.
    This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.", + "errorEditingDownloadas": "An error occurred during the work with the document.
    Use the 'Download' option to save the file backup copy locally.", + "errorFilePassProtect": "The file is password protected and could not be opened.", + "errorFileRequest": "External error.
    File Request. Please, contact support.", + "errorFileSizeExceed": "The file size exceeds your server limitation.
    Please, contact your admin for details.", + "errorFileVKey": "External error.
    Incorrect security key. Please, contact support.", + "errorFillRange": "Could not fill the selected range of cells.
    All the merged cells need to be the same size.", + "errorFormulaName": "An error in the formula.
    Incorrect formula name.", + "errorFormulaParsing": "Internal error while the formula parsing.", + "errorFrmlMaxLength": "You cannot add this formula as its length exceeds the allowed number of characters.
    Please, edit it and try again.", + "errorFrmlMaxReference": "You cannot enter this formula because it has too many values,
    cell references, and/or names.", + "errorFrmlMaxTextLength": "Text values in formulas are limited to 255 characters.
    Use the CONCATENATE function or concatenation operator (&)", + "errorFrmlWrongReferences": "The function refers to a sheet that does not exist.
    Please, check the data and try again.", + "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content does not match the file extension.", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", + "errorInvalidRef": "Enter a correct name for the selection or a valid reference to go to.", + "errorKeyEncrypt": "Unknown key descriptor", + "errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", + "errorLoadingFont": "Fonts are not loaded.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorLockedAll": "The operation could not be done as the sheet has been locked by another user.", + "errorLockedCellPivot": "You cannot change data inside a pivot table.", + "errorLockedWorksheetRename": "The sheet cannot be renamed at the moment as it is being renamed by another user", + "errorMaxPoints": "The maximum number of points in series per chart is 4096.", + "errorMoveRange": "Cannot change a part of a merged cell", + "errorMultiCellFormula": "Multi-cell array formulas are not allowed in tables.", + "errorOpenWarning": "The length of one of the formulas in the file exceeded
    the allowed number of characters and it was removed.", + "errorOperandExpected": "The entered function syntax is not correct. Please, check if you missed one of the parentheses - '(' or ')'.", + "errorPasteMaxRange": "The copy and paste area does not match. Please, select an area of the same size or click the first cell in a row to paste the copied cells.", + "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "Unfortunately, it’s not possible to print more than 1500 pages at once in the current version of the program.
    This restriction will be eliminated in upcoming releases.", + "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing.", + "errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please, reload the page.", + "errorSessionIdle": "The document has not been edited for quite a long time. Please, reload the page.", + "errorSessionToken": "The connection to the server has been interrupted. Please, reload the page.", + "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
    opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", + "errorToken": "The document security token is not correctly formed.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorTokenExpire": "The document security token has expired.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", + "errorUnexpectedGuid": "External error.
    Unexpected Guid. Please, contact support.", + "errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
    Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.", + "errorUserDrop": "The file cannot be accessed right now.", + "errorUsersExceed": "The number of users allowed by the pricing plan was exceeded", + "errorViewerDisconnect": "Connection is lost. You can still view the document,
    but you won't be able to download or print it until the connection is restored and the page is reloaded.", + "errorWrongBracketsCount": "An error in the formula.
    Wrong number of brackets.", + "errorWrongOperator": "An error in the entered formula. Wrong operator is used.
    Please correct the error.", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "openErrorText": "An error has occurred while opening the file", + "pastInMergeAreaError": "Cannot change a part of a merged cell", + "saveErrorText": "An error has occurred while saving the file", + "scriptLoadError": "The connection is too slow, some of the components could not be loaded. Please, reload the page.", + "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textErrorPasswordIsNotCorrect": "The password you supplied is not correct.
    Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is off and be sure to use the correct capitalization.", + "textOk": "Ok", + "unknownErrorText": "Unknown error.", + "uploadImageExtMessage": "Unknown image format.", + "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No images uploaded.", + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "The image is too big. The maximum size is 25 MB." + }, + "LongActions": { + "advDRMPassword": "Password", + "applyChangesTextText": "Loading data...", + "applyChangesTitleText": "Loading Data", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
    Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost).", + "confirmMoveCellRange": "The destination cells range can contain data. Continue the operation?", + "confirmPutMergeRange": "The source data contains merged cells.
    They will be unmerged before they are pasted into the table.", + "confirmReplaceFormulaInTable": "Formulas in the header row will be removed and converted to static text.
    Do you want to continue?", + "downloadTextText": "Downloading document...", + "downloadTitleText": "Downloading Document", + "loadFontsTextText": "Loading data...", + "loadFontsTitleText": "Loading Data", + "loadFontTextText": "Loading data...", + "loadFontTitleText": "Loading Data", + "loadImagesTextText": "Loading images...", + "loadImagesTitleText": "Loading Images", + "loadImageTextText": "Loading image...", + "loadImageTitleText": "Loading Image", + "loadingDocumentTextText": "Loading document...", + "loadingDocumentTitleText": "Loading document", + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "openTextText": "Opening document...", + "openTitleText": "Opening Document", + "printTextText": "Printing document...", + "printTitleText": "Printing Document", + "savePreparingText": "Preparing to save", + "savePreparingTitle": "Preparing to save. Please wait...", + "saveTextText": "Saving document...", + "saveTitleText": "Saving Document", + "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textContinue": "Continue", + "textErrorWrongPassword": "The password you supplied is not correct.", + "textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", + "textNo": "No", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textUndo": "Undo", + "textUnlockRange": "Unlock Range", + "textUnlockRangeWarning": "A range you are trying to change is password protected.", + "textYes": "Yes", + "txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", + "uploadImageTextText": "Uploading image...", + "uploadImageTitleText": "Uploading Image", + "waitText": "Please, wait..." + }, + "Statusbar": { + "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", + "textCancel": "Cancel", + "textDelete": "Delete", + "textDuplicate": "Duplicate", + "textErrNameExists": "Worksheet with this name already exists.", + "textErrNameWrongChar": "A sheet name cannot contains characters: \\, /, *, ?, [, ], : or the character ' as first or last character", + "textErrNotEmpty": "Sheet name must not be empty", + "textErrorLastSheet": "The workbook must have at least one visible worksheet.", + "textErrorRemoveSheet": "Can't delete the worksheet.", + "textHidden": "Hidden", + "textHide": "Hide", + "textMore": "More", + "textMove": "Move", + "textMoveBefore": "Move before sheet", + "textMoveToEnd": "(Move to end)", + "textOk": "Ok", + "textRename": "Rename", + "textRenameSheet": "Rename Sheet", + "textSheet": "Sheet", + "textSheetName": "Sheet Name", + "textTabColor": "Tab Color", + "textUnhide": "Unhide", + "textWarnDeleteSheet": "The worksheet maybe has data. Proceed operation?" + }, + "Toolbar": { + "dlgLeaveMsgText": "You have unsaved changes in this document. Click 'Stay on this Page' to wait for autosave. Click 'Leave this Page' to discard all the unsaved changes.", + "dlgLeaveTitleText": "You leave the application", + "leaveButtonText": "Leave this Page", + "stayButtonText": "Stay on this Page" } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/cs.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/cs.json index 671cdd89e1..998fcd7580 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/cs.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/cs.json @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ "textCell": "Buňka", "textCellStyle": "Styl buňky", "textCenter": "Na střed", - "textChangeShape": "Vlastní tvar", + "textChangeShape": "Změnit tvar", "textChart": "Graf", "textChartTitle": "Název grafu", "textClearFilter": "Vymazat filtr", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/da.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/da.json index 3869281e66..32af1f5ea3 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/da.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/da.json @@ -378,6 +378,7 @@ "textRecommended": "Anbefalet", "textRequired": "Påkrævet", "textScreenTip": "Skærmtip", + "textShape": "Figur", "textSheet": "Ark", "textSortAndFilter": "Sortèr og filtrer", "txtExpand": "Udvid og sorter", @@ -393,7 +394,6 @@ "textOk": "Ok", "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL", "textSelectedRange": "Selected Range", - "textShape": "Shape", "textThisRowHint": "Choose only this row of the specified column", "textTotalsTableHint": "Returns the total rows for the table or specified table columns", "txtExpandSort": "The data next to the selection will not be sorted. Do you want to expand the selection to include the adjacent data or continue with sorting the currently selected cells only?", @@ -432,6 +432,7 @@ "textBringToForeground": "Før til forgrunden", "textCell": "Celle", "textCenter": "Center", + "textChangeShape": "Skift form", "textChart": "Diagram", "textChartTitle": "Diagram titel", "textClearFilter": "Ryd filter", @@ -534,6 +535,7 @@ "textScientific": "Videnskabelig", "textScreenTip": "Skærmtip", "textSettings": "Indstillinger", + "textShape": "Figur", "textSheet": "Ark", "textSize": "Størrelse", "textTenMillions": "10 000 000", @@ -553,7 +555,6 @@ "txtSortLow2High": "Sortèr lavest til højest", "textCancel": "Cancel", "textCellStyle": "Cell Style", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDefault": "Selected range", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", @@ -572,7 +573,6 @@ "textSelectAll": "Select All", "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", - "textShape": "Shape", "textStyle": "Style", "textTextOrientation": "Text Orientation", "textThick": "Thick", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/el.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/el.json index 20243a3d0b..828b289fb0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/el.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/el.json @@ -432,6 +432,7 @@ "textCell": "Κελί", "textCellStyle": "Τεχνοτροπία Κελιού", "textCenter": "Κέντρο", + "textChangeShape": "Αλλαγή Σχήματος", "textChart": "Γράφημα", "textChartTitle": "Τίτλος Γραφήματος", "textClearFilter": "Εκκαθάριση Φίλτρου", @@ -580,7 +581,6 @@ "txtSortLow2High": "Ταξινόμηση από το Χαμηλότερο στο Υψηλότερο", "textArrange": "Arrange", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDone": "Done" diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/es.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/es.json index 0c4d719e19..87a4ff03f1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/es.json @@ -151,6 +151,7 @@ "textNo": "No", "textNoChoices": "No hay opciones para rellenar la celda.
    Sólo se pueden seleccionar valores de texto de la columna para su sustitución.", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Se ha alcanzado el límite de licencia", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textOk": "Aceptar", "textPaidFeature": "Característica de pago", "textRemember": "Recordar mi elección", @@ -161,8 +162,11 @@ "textWarnUpdateExternalData": "Este libro contiene enlaces a una o varias fuentes externas que podrían no ser seguras. Si confía en los enlaces, actualícelos para obtener los datos más recientes.", "textYes": "Sí", "titleLicenseExp": "Licencia ha expirado", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "Licencia no activa", "titleServerVersion": "Editor ha sido actualizado", "titleUpdateVersion": "Versión ha cambiado", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Acceso denegado para usuarios anónimos.
    Este documento se abrirá solo para su visualización.", + "warnLicenseBefore": "Licencia no activa.
    Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización. Póngase en contacto con su administrador para obtener más información.", "warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado. Por favor, actualice su licencia y actualice la página.", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "La licencia ha expirado. No tiene acceso a la funcionalidad de edición de documentos. Por favor, póngase en contacto con su administrador.", @@ -170,11 +174,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para %1 editores. Póngase en contacto con su administrador para saber más.", "warnNoLicense": "Ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización. Póngase en contacto con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer las condiciones de actualización personal.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para %1 editores. Póngase en contacto con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer las condiciones de actualización personal.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "No tiene permiso para editar el archivo.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
    Please contact your administrator." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "No tiene permiso para editar el archivo." } }, "Error": { @@ -234,6 +234,7 @@ "errorOperandExpected": "La sintaxis de la función introducida no es correcta. Por favor, compruebe si ha omitido uno de los paréntesis - '(' o ')'.", "errorPasteMaxRange": "El área de copiar y pegar no coincide. Por favor, seleccione un área del mismo tamaño o haga clic en la primera celda de una fila para pegar las celdas copiadas.", "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "Por desgracia, no es posible imprimir más de 1500 páginas a la vez en la versión actual del programa.
    Esta restricción se eliminará en próximas versiones.", + "errorProtectedRange": "Este rango no se puede editar.", "errorSessionAbsolute": "La sesión de edición del documento ha expirado. Por favor, vuelva a cargar la página.", "errorSessionIdle": "El documento no ha sido editado desde hace mucho tiempo. Por favor, vuelva a cargar la página.", "errorSessionToken": "La conexión con el servidor se ha interrumpido. Por favor, vuelva a cargar la página.", @@ -258,8 +259,7 @@ "unknownErrorText": "Error desconocido.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Formato de imagen desconocido.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "No hay imágenes subidas.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "La imagen es demasiado grande. El tamaño máximo es de 25 MB.", - "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "La imagen es demasiado grande. El tamaño máximo es de 25 MB." }, "LongActions": { "advDRMPassword": "Contraseña", @@ -377,6 +377,7 @@ "textLinkType": "Tipo de enlace", "textOk": "Aceptar", "textOther": "Otro", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Pegar la URL de una imagen", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Imagen desde biblioteca", "textPictureFromURL": "Imagen desde URL", "textRange": "Rango", @@ -396,8 +397,7 @@ "txtNotUrl": "Este campo debe ser una dirección URL en el formato \"http://www.example.com\"", "txtSorting": "Ordenación", "txtSortSelected": "Ordenar los objetos seleccionados", - "txtYes": "Sí", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtYes": "Sí" }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advertencia", @@ -652,6 +652,7 @@ "textMargins": "Márgenes", "textMatchCase": "Coincidir mayúsculas y minúsculas", "textMatchCell": "Hacer coincidir las celdas", + "textNoMatches": "No hay coincidencias", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "Introduzca una contraseña para abrir el archivo", "textOrientation": "Orientación ", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "Ucraniano", "txtVi": "Vietnamita", "txtZh": "Chino", - "warnDownloadAs": "Si sigue guardando en este formato, todas las características a excepción del texto se perderán.
    ¿Está seguro de que desea continuar?", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "Si sigue guardando en este formato, todas las características a excepción del texto se perderán.
    ¿Está seguro de que desea continuar?" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json index 5625a7c5e8..6cba974594 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/fr.json @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ "textCell": "Cellule", "textCellStyle": "Style de cellule", "textCenter": "Au centre", - "textChangeShape": "Changer la forme", + "textChangeShape": "Modifier la forme", "textChart": "Graphique", "textChartTitle": "Titre du graphique", "textClearFilter": "Effacer le filtre", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json index 17270d8439..5fe68448da 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/gl.json @@ -433,6 +433,7 @@ "textCell": "Celda", "textCellStyle": "Estilo da celda", "textCenter": "Centro", + "textChangeShape": "Cambiar forma", "textChart": "Gráfico", "textChartTitle": "Título do gráfico", "textClearFilter": "Borrar filtro", @@ -581,7 +582,6 @@ "txtSortHigh2Low": "Ordenar de maior a menor", "txtSortLow2High": "Ordenar de menor a maior ", "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link" }, diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json index e3560cace9..b3bda12a4f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/hy.json @@ -164,6 +164,7 @@ "titleLicenseNotActive": "Լիցենզիան ակտիվ չէ", "titleServerVersion": "Խմբագրիչը արդիացվել է", "titleUpdateVersion": "Տարբերակը փոխվել է", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Մուտքն արգելված է անանուն օգտատերերի համար:
    Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:", "warnLicenseBefore": "Լիցենզիան ակտիվ չէ:
    Խնդրում ենք կապվել ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ:", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների հետ միաժամանակյա միացումների սահմանաչափին:Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:Կապվեք Ձեր ադմինիստրատորի հետ՝ ավելին իմանալու համար:", "warnLicenseExp": "Ձեր լիցենզիայի ժամկետը լրացել է:Խնդրում ենք թարմացնել Ձեր լիցենզիան և թարմացնել էջը:", @@ -173,8 +174,7 @@ "warnNoLicense": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների հետ միաժամանակյա միացումների սահմանաչափին:Այս փաստաթուղթը կբացվի միայն դիտելու համար:նձնական թարմացման պայմանների համար կապվեք %1 վաճառքի թիմի հետ:", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Դուք հասել եք %1 խմբագիրների օգտվողի սահմանաչափին:Անձնական թարմացման պայմանների համար կապվեք %1 վաճառքի թիմի հետ:", "warnProcessRightsChange": "Դուք ֆայլը խմբագրելու թույլտվություն չունեք:", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only." + "textNoMatches": "No Matches" } }, "Error": { @@ -234,6 +234,7 @@ "errorOperandExpected": "Մուտքագրված ֆունկցիայի շարահյուսությունը ճիշտ չէ:Խնդրում ենք ստուգել, ​​արդյոք բաց եք թողել փակագծերից մեկը՝'(' կամ ')'.", "errorPasteMaxRange": "Պատճենելու և փակցնելու տարածքը չի համընկնում:Խնդրում ենք ընտրել նույն չափի տարածքը կամ սեղմել առաջին տողի վանդակի վրա՝ պատճենված վանդակները փակցնելու համար:", "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "Ցավոք, ծրագրի ընթացիկ տարբերակում միանգամից 1500 էջից ավելի տպել հնարավոր չէ։
    Այս սահմանափակումը կվերացվի առաջիկա թողարկումներում:", + "errorProtectedRange": "Այս ընդգրկույթը թույլատրված չէ խմբագրման համար:", "errorSessionAbsolute": "Փաստաթղթերի խմբագրման աշխատաշրջանն ավարտվել է:Խնդրում ենք վերաբեռնել էջը:", "errorSessionIdle": "Փաստաթուղթը երկար ժամանակ չի խմբագրվել։Խնդրում ենք վերաբեռնել էջը:", "errorSessionToken": "Սերվերի հետ կապն ընդհատվել է:Խնդրում ենք վերաբեռնել էջը:", @@ -258,8 +259,7 @@ "unknownErrorText": "Անհայտ սխալ։", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Նկարի անհայտ ձևաչափ։", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Ոչ մի նկար չի բեռնվել։", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "Պատկերը չափազանց մեծ է:Առավելագույն չափը 25 ՄԲ է:", - "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "Պատկերը չափազանց մեծ է:Առավելագույն չափը 25 ՄԲ է:" }, "LongActions": { "advDRMPassword": "Գաղտնաբառ", @@ -377,6 +377,7 @@ "textLinkType": "Հղման տեսակ", "textOk": "Լավ", "textOther": "Այլ", + "textPasteImageUrl": "Տեղադրեք պատկերի URL", "textPictureFromLibrary": "Նկար գրադարանից", "textPictureFromURL": "Նկար URL-ից", "textRange": "Ընդգրկույթ", @@ -396,8 +397,7 @@ "txtNotUrl": "Այս դաշտը պիտի լինի URL հասցե՝ \"http://www.example.com\" ձևաչափով։ ", "txtSorting": "Տեսակավորում", "txtSortSelected": "Ընտրված տեսակավորում", - "txtYes": "Այո", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtYes": "Այո" }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Զգուշացում", @@ -652,6 +652,7 @@ "textMargins": "Լուսանցքներ", "textMatchCase": "Ճշգրիտ համընկում", "textMatchCell": "Վանդակները համընկեցնել", + "textNoMatches": "Համընկնում չկա", "textOk": "Լավ", "textOpenFile": "Մուտքագրել գաղտնաբառ՝ ֆայլը բացելու համար", "textOrientation": "Կողմնորոշում", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "ուկրաիներեն", "txtVi": "Վիետնամերեն", "txtZh": "Չինական", - "warnDownloadAs": "Եթե շարունակեք պահպանումն այս ձևաչափով, բոլոր հատկությունները՝ տեքստից բացի, կկորչեն։
    Վստա՞հ եք, որ ցանկանում եք շարունակել:", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "Եթե շարունակեք պահպանումն այս ձևաչափով, բոլոր հատկությունները՝ տեքստից բացի, կկորչեն։
    Վստա՞հ եք, որ ցանկանում եք շարունակել:" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/id.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/id.json index 068ad484d6..d8fce7a1f1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/id.json @@ -151,12 +151,13 @@ "textNo": "Tidak", "textNoChoices": "Tidak ada pilihan untuk mengisi sel.
    Hanya nilai teks dari kolom yang bisa dipilih untuk diganti.", "textNoLicenseTitle": "Batas lisensi sudah tercapai", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yang Cocok", "textOk": "OK", "textPaidFeature": "Fitur berbayar", "textRemember": "Ingat pilihan saya", "textReplaceSkipped": "Penggantian telah dilakukan. Ada {0} yang dilewatkan.", "textReplaceSuccess": "Pencarian telah dilakukan. Ada {0} yang diganti {0}", - "textRequestMacros": "Sebuah makro melakukan permintaan ke URL. Apakah Anda akan mengizinkan permintaan ini ke %1?", + "textRequestMacros": "Sebuah makro melakukan permintaan ke URL. Apakah Anda akan mengizinkan permintaan ke %1 tersebut?", "textUpdate": "Perbarui", "textWarnUpdateExternalData": "Buku kerja ini mengandung tautan ke satu atau lebih sumber eksternal yang bisa jadi tidak aman. Bila Anda mempercayai tautan, perbarui mereka untuk mendapatkan data terbaru.", "textYes": "Ya", @@ -164,6 +165,7 @@ "titleLicenseNotActive": "Lisensi tidak aktif", "titleServerVersion": "Editor mengupdate", "titleUpdateVersion": "Versi telah diubah", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Akses ditolak untuk pengguna anonim.
    Dokumen ini akan dibuka hanya untuk dilihat.", "warnLicenseBefore": "Lisensi tidak aktif.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja. Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "warnLicenseExp": "Lisensi Anda sudah kedaluwarsa. Silakan perbarui dan muat ulang halaman.", @@ -172,9 +174,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Anda sudah mencapai batas user untuk %1 editor. Hubungi admin Anda untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut.", "warnNoLicense": "Anda sudah mencapai batas untuk koneksi bersamaan ke %1 editor. Dokumen ini akan dibuka untuk dilihat saja. Hubungi %1 tim sales untuk syarat personal upgrade.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "Anda sudah mencapai batas user untuk %1 editor. Hubungi %1 tim sales untuk syarat personal upgrade.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "Anda tidak memiliki izin edit file ini.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "Anda tidak memiliki izin edit file ini." } }, "Error": { @@ -234,6 +234,7 @@ "errorOperandExpected": "Syntax fungsi yang dimasukkan tidak tepat. Silakan periksa lagi apakah Anda terlewat tanda kurung - '(' atau ')'.", "errorPasteMaxRange": "Area copy dan paste tidak cocok. Silakan pilih area dengan ukuran yang sama atau klik sel pertama di baris untuk paste sel yang di copy.", "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "Mohon maaf karena tidak bisa print lebih dari 1500 halaman dalam sekali waktu dengan versi program sekarang.
    Hal ini akan bisa dilakukan di versi selanjutnya.", + "errorProtectedRange": "Rentang ini tidak diizinkan untuk disunting.", "errorSessionAbsolute": "Waktu edit dokumen sudah selesai. Silakan muat ulang halaman.", "errorSessionIdle": "Dokumen sudah lama tidak diedit. Silakan muat ulang halaman.", "errorSessionToken": "Koneksi ke server terganggu. Silakan muat ulang halaman.", @@ -258,8 +259,7 @@ "unknownErrorText": "Kesalahan tidak diketahui.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "Format gambar tidak dikenal.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Tidak ada gambar yang diunggah.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "Melebihi ukuran maksimal file. Ukuran maksimum adalah 25 MB.", - "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "Melebihi ukuran maksimal file. Ukuran maksimum adalah 25 MB." }, "LongActions": { "advDRMPassword": "Kata Sandi", @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ "textOk": "OK", "textUndo": "Batalkan", "textUnlockRange": "Buka Kunci Rentang", - "textUnlockRangeWarning": "Rentang yang ingin Anda ubah dilindungi password.", + "textUnlockRangeWarning": "Rentang yang ingin Anda ubah dilindungi kata sandi.", "textYes": "Ya", "txtEditingMode": "Mengatur mode editing...", "uploadImageTextText": "Mengunggah gambar...", @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ "textDelete": "Hapus", "textDuplicate": "Duplikat", "textErrNameExists": "Worksheet dengan nama ini sudah ada.", - "textErrNameWrongChar": "Nama sheet tidak boleh memuat karakter: \\, /, *, ?, [, ], : atau karakter ' sebagai karakter pertama atau terakhir", + "textErrNameWrongChar": "Nama lembar tidak boleh memuat karakter: \\, /, *, ?, [, ], :, atau karakter ' sebagai karakter pertama atau terakhir", "textErrNotEmpty": "Nama sheet tidak boleh kosong", "textErrorLastSheet": "Workbook harus setidaknya memiliki satu worksheet yang terlihat.", "textErrorRemoveSheet": "Tidak bisa menghapus worksheet.", @@ -652,6 +652,7 @@ "textMargins": "Margin", "textMatchCase": "Sesuakian Case", "textMatchCell": "Sesuakian Sel", + "textNoMatches": "Tidak Ada yamg Cocok", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "Masukkan kata sandi untuk buka file", "textOrientation": "Orientasi", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "Ukraina", "txtVi": "Vietnam", "txtZh": "China", - "warnDownloadAs": "Jika Anda lanjut simpan dengan format ini, semua fitur kecuali teks akan hilang.
    Apakah Anda ingin melanjutkan?", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "Jika Anda lanjut simpan dengan format ini, semua fitur kecuali teks akan hilang.
    Apakah Anda ingin melanjutkan?" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/it.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/it.json index 6efe7c364c..d7004561a0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/it.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/it.json @@ -434,6 +434,7 @@ "textCell": "Cella", "textCellStyle": "Stile cella", "textCenter": "Al centro", + "textChangeShape": "Cambia forma", "textChart": "Grafico", "textChartTitle": "Titolo di grafico", "textClearFilter": "Svuotare filtro", @@ -582,7 +583,6 @@ "txtNotUrl": "Questo campo deve essere un URL nel formato \"http://www.example.com\"", "txtSortHigh2Low": "Ordinare dal più alto al più basso", "txtSortLow2High": "Ordinare dal più basso al più alto", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image" }, "Settings": { diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json index a1c70d8906..99b7d0024a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/ja.json @@ -151,6 +151,7 @@ "textNo": "いいえ", "textNoChoices": "セルを記入する選択肢がありません。
    置換対象として選択できるのは列のテキスト値のみです。", "textNoLicenseTitle": "ライセンス制限に達しました", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textOk": "OK", "textPaidFeature": "有料機能", "textRemember": "選択を覚える", @@ -164,6 +165,7 @@ "titleLicenseNotActive": "ライセンスが無効になっています", "titleServerVersion": "編集者が更新された", "titleUpdateVersion": "バージョンが変更されました", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名ユーザーのアクセスは拒否されます。
    このドキュメントは閲覧専用に開かれます。", "warnLicenseBefore": "ライセンスが無効になっています。
    管理者までご連絡ください。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "％１エディター　時接続数の制限に達しました。この文書が見るだけのために開かれる。詳細についてはアドミニストレータを連絡してください。", "warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの有効期限が切れています。ライセンスを更新してページを再読み込みしてください。", @@ -172,9 +174,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "％1エディターのユーザー制限に達しました。 詳細についてはアドミニストレータを連絡してください。", "warnNoLicense": "％１エディター　時接続数の制限に達しました。この文書が見るだけのために開かれる。個人的なアップグレード条件については、％1営業チームを連絡してください。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "％1エディターのユーザー制限に達しました。 個人的なアップグレード条件については、％1営業チームを連絡してください。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限がありません！", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限がありません！" } }, "Error": { @@ -652,6 +652,7 @@ "textMargins": "余白", "textMatchCase": "大文字と小文字の斟酌で", "textMatchCell": "セルの照合", + "textNoMatches": "一致する結果がありません", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "ファイルを開くためにパスワードを入力してください", "textOrientation": "向き", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "ウクライナ語", "txtVi": "ベトナム語", "txtZh": "中国語", - "warnDownloadAs": "この形式で保存する続けば、テクスト除いて全てが失います。続けてもよろしいですか？", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "この形式で保存する続けば、テクスト除いて全てが失います。続けてもよろしいですか？" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json index 6c64157329..769337f15c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/nl.json @@ -433,6 +433,7 @@ "textCell": "Cel", "textCellStyle": "Celstijl", "textCenter": "Midden", + "textChangeShape": "Vorm wijzigen", "textChart": "Grafiek", "textChartTitle": "Grafiektitel", "textClearFilter": "Filter wissen", @@ -580,7 +581,6 @@ "txtSortHigh2Low": "Sorteren van hoogste naar laagste", "txtSortLow2High": "Sorteren van laagste naar hoogste", "textCancel": "Cancel", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textOk": "Ok" diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/si.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/si.json index 68dcbf379b..c5ec06e503 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/si.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/si.json @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ "textBack": "ආපසු", "textEditor": "පැතුරුම්පත සංස්කරකය", "textEmail": "වි-තැපෑල", - "textPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "textPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "textTel": "දු.ක.", "textVersion": "අනුවාදය" }, @@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ "menuEditLink": "සබැඳිය සංස්කරණය", "menuFreezePanes": "මිටිය අත්හිටුවන්න", "menuHide": "සඟවන්න", - "menuMerge": "සංයුක්ත", + "menuMerge": "ඒකාබද්ධ", "menuMore": "තව", "menuOpenLink": "සබැඳිය විවෘත කරන්න", "menuShow": "පෙන්වන්න", "menuUnfreezePanes": "මිටිය මුදා හරින්න", - "menuUnmerge": "විසංයුක්ත", + "menuUnmerge": "අබද්ධ", "menuUnwrap": "ලිහන්න", "menuViewComment": "අදහස දකින්න", "menuWrap": "වෙළීම", @@ -151,6 +151,7 @@ "textNo": "නැහැ", "textNoChoices": "කෝෂය පිරවීමට තේරීම් නැත.
    තීරුවෙන් පාඨ අගයන් පමණක් ප්‍රතිස්ථාපනයට තෝරාගත හැකිය.", "textNoLicenseTitle": "බලපත්‍රයේ සීමාවට ලඟාවුණි", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textOk": "හරි", "textPaidFeature": "ගෙවන විශේෂාංගයකි", "textRemember": "මාගේ තේරීම මතක තබාගන්න", @@ -164,6 +165,7 @@ "titleLicenseNotActive": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත", "titleServerVersion": "සංස්කරකය යාවත්කාල විය", "titleUpdateVersion": "අනුවාදය වෙනස් විය", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "නිර්නාමික පරිශ්‍රීලකයින් සඳහා ප්‍රවේශය ප්‍රතික්‍ෂේපිතයි.
    මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වනු ඇත.", "warnLicenseBefore": "බලපත්‍රය සක්‍රිය නැත.
    කරුණාකර ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnLicenseExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ. තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnLicenseExp": "ඔබගේ බලපත්‍රය කල් ඉකුත්ය. බලපත්‍රය යාවත්කාල කර පිටුව නැවුම් කරන්න.", @@ -172,9 +174,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක සඳහා පරිශීලක සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. තව දැන ගැනීමට ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.", "warnNoLicense": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක වෙත සමකාල සම්බන්ධතා සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. මෙම ලේඛනය දැකීමට පමණක් විවෘත වේ. පුද්ගලික උත්ශ්‍රේණි නියම සඳහා %1 අලෙවි කණ්ඩායම අමතන්න.", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "ඔබ %1 සංස්කරක සඳහා පරිශීලක සීමාවට ළඟා වී ඇත. පුද්ගලික උත්ශ්‍රේණි නියම සඳහා %1 අලෙවි කණ්ඩායම අමතන්න.", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "ඔබට ගොනුව සංස්කරණය කිරීමට අවසර නැත.", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "ඔබට ගොනුව සංස්කරණය කිරීමට අවසර නැත." } }, "Error": { @@ -189,9 +189,9 @@ "errorAutoFilterDataRange": "තෝරාගත් කෝෂ පරාසය සඳහා මෙහෙයුම සිදු කිරීමට නොහැකිය.
    වගුව ඇතුළතින් හෝ පිටතින් ඒකාකාර දත්ත පරාසයක් තෝරා නැවත උත්සාහ කරන්න.", "errorAutoFilterHiddenRange": "ප්‍රදේශයේ පෙරන ලද කෝෂ අඩංගු බැවින් මෙහෙයුම සිදු කිරීමට නොහැකිය.
    පෙරූ අංග සඟවා නැවත උත්සාහ කරන්න.", "errorBadImageUrl": "අනුරුවෙහි ඒ.ස.නි. සාවද්‍යයි", - "errorCannotUseCommandProtectedSheet": "ඔබට මෙම විධානය ආරක්‍ෂිත පත්‍රයක භාවිතා කළ නොහැකිය. මෙම විධානය භාවිතා කිරීමට පත්‍රය අනාරක්‍ෂිත කරන්න.
    ඔබට මුරපදයක් ඇතුල් කිරීමට ඉල්ලා සිටීමට හැකිය.", + "errorCannotUseCommandProtectedSheet": "ඔබට මෙම විධානය ආරක්‍ෂිත පත්‍රයක භාවිතා කිරීමට නොහැකිය. මෙම විධානය භාවිතයට පත්‍රය අනාරක්‍ෂිත කරන්න.
    මුරපදයක් ඇතුල් කිරීමට ඔබගෙන් ඉල්ලනු ඇත.", "errorChangeArray": "ඔබට වැලක කොටසක් වෙනස් කළ නොහැකිය.", - "errorChangeOnProtectedSheet": "ඔබ වෙනස් කිරීමට උත්සාහ කරන කෝෂය හෝ ප්‍රස්ථාරය ආරක්‍ෂිත පත්‍රයක ඇත. වෙනසක් කිරීමට, පත්‍රය අනාරක්‍ෂිත කරන්න. මුරපදයක් ඇතුල් කිරීමට ඔබෙන් ඉල්ලා සිටීමට හැකිය.", + "errorChangeOnProtectedSheet": "ඔබ වෙනස් කිරීමට උත්සාහ කරන කෝෂය හෝ ප්‍රස්ථාරය ආරක්‍ෂිත පත්‍රයක ඇත. සංශෝධනයට, පත්‍රය අනාරක්‍ෂිත කරන්න. මුරපදයක් ඇතුල් කිරීමට ඔබගෙන් ඉල්ලනු ඇත.", "errorConnectToServer": "මෙම ලේඛනය සුරැකීමට නොහැකිය. ඔබගේ සම්බන්ධතා සැකසුම් පරීක්‍ෂා කරන්න හෝ ඔබගේ පරිපාලක අමතන්න.
    ඔබ 'හරි' බොත්තම එබූ විට ලේඛනය බාගැනීමට දක්වනු ඇත.", "errorCopyMultiselectArea": "මෙම විධානය බහු තේරීම් සමඟ භාවිතා කළ නොහැකිය.
    තනි පරාසයක් තෝරා නැවත උත්සාහ කරන්න.", "errorCountArg": "සූත්‍රයේ දෝෂයකි.
    වලංගු නොවන විස්තාර ගණනකි.", @@ -234,6 +234,7 @@ "errorOperandExpected": "ඇතුල් කළ ශ්‍රිත පද ගැළපුම නිවැරදි නොවේ. ඔබට සුළු වරහන් වලින් එකක් මග හැරී ඇත්දැයි පරීක්‍ෂා කරන්න - '(' හෝ ')'.", "errorPasteMaxRange": "පිටපත් කර අලවන ප්‍රදේශය නොගැළපේ. කරුණාකර, පිටපත් කළ කෝෂ ඇලවීමට සමාන ප්‍රමාණයේ ප්‍රදේශයක් තෝරන්න හෝ පේළියක පළමු කෝෂය ඔබන්න.", "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "කණගාටුයි, වැඩසටහනේ වත්මන් අනුවාදය මගින් එකවර පිටු 1500 කට වඩා මුද්‍රණය කළ නොහැකිය.
    ඉදිරි නිකුතු වලදී මෙම සීමාව අස් කරනු ලැබේ.", + "errorProtectedRange": "මෙම පරාසය සංස්කරණයට ඉඩ නොදේ.", "errorSessionAbsolute": "ලේඛනය සංස්කරණ වාරය කල් ඉකුත්ව ඇත. පිටුව නැවත පූරණය කරන්න.", "errorSessionIdle": "ලේඛනය සෑහෙන වේලාවකට සංස්කරණය කර නැත. පිටුව නැවත පූරණය කරන්න.", "errorSessionToken": "සේවාදායකයට තිබෙන සම්බන්ධතාවයට බාධා ඇති විය. පිටුව නැවත පූරණය කරන්න.", @@ -246,7 +247,7 @@ "errorUsersExceed": "මිලකරණ සැලසුමට ඉඩ දී ඇති පරිශීලකයින් ගණන ඉක්මවා ඇත", "errorViewerDisconnect": "සම්බන්ධතාවය නැති වී ගොස්ය. ඔබට තවමත් ලේඛනය දැකීමට හැකිය,
    එහෙත් සම්බන්ධතාවය ප්‍රත්‍යර්පණය වී පිටුව නැවත පූරණය කරන තෙක් ඔබට එය බාගැනීමට හෝ මුද්‍රණයට නොහැකි වනු ඇත.", "errorWrongBracketsCount": "සූත්‍රයේ දෝෂයකි.
    වැරදි වරහන් ගණනකි.", - "errorWrongOperator": "ඇතුල් කළ සූත්‍රයේ දෝෂයකි. වැරදි කාරකයක් භාවිතා කර ඇත.
    දෝෂය නිවරදි කරන්න.", + "errorWrongOperator": "ඇතුල් කළ සූත්‍රයේ දෝෂයකි. වැරදි කාරකයක් භාවිතා කර ඇත.
    දෝෂය නිවැරදි කරන්න.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "අවවාදයයි", "openErrorText": "ගොනුව විවෘත කිරීමේදී දෝෂයක් සිදු විය", "pastInMergeAreaError": "එකාබද්ධිත කෝෂයක කොටසක් වෙනස් කළ නොහැකිය", @@ -258,8 +259,7 @@ "unknownErrorText": "නොදන්නා දෝෂයකි.", "uploadImageExtMessage": "නොදන්නා අනුරුවක ආකෘතියකි.", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "අනුරුවක් උඩුගත කර නැත.", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "අනුරුව ඉතා විශාලට. උ. ප්‍රමාණය මෙ.බ. 25.", - "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "අනුරුව ඉතා විශාලට. උ. ප්‍රමාණය මෙ.බ. 25." }, "LongActions": { "advDRMPassword": "මුරපදය", @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ "textDelete": "මකන්න", "textDuplicate": "අනුපිටපත", "textErrNameExists": "මෙම නම සහිත වැඩපත්‍රයක් දැනටමත් පවතී.", - "textErrNameWrongChar": "පත්‍ර නාමයක අකුරු අඩංගු වීමට නොහැකිය: \\, /, *, ?, [, ], :", + "textErrNameWrongChar": "පත්‍ර නාමයක මෙම සංකේත අඩංගු වීමට නොහැකිය: \\, /, *, ?, [, ], : සහ මුලට හෝ අගට ' සංකේතය", "textErrNotEmpty": "කොළයේ නම හිස් නොවිය යුතුය", "textErrorLastSheet": "වැඩපොතෙහි අවම වශයෙන් එක් දෘශ්‍යමාන වැඩ පත්‍රිකාවක්වත් තිබිය යුතුය.", "textErrorRemoveSheet": "වැඩපත මැකීමට නොහැකිය.", @@ -652,13 +652,14 @@ "textMargins": "මායිම්", "textMatchCase": "ගැළපෙන අවස්ථාව", "textMatchCell": "ගැළපෙන කෝෂය", + "textNoMatches": "ගැළපීම් නැත", "textOk": "හරි", "textOpenFile": "ගොනුව විවෘත කිරීමට මුරපදයක් යොදන්න", "textOrientation": "හැඩගැස්ම", "textOwner": "හිමිකරු", "textPoint": "ලක්‍ෂය", "textPortrait": "සිරස්", - "textPoweredBy": "මගින් බලගැන්වේ", + "textPoweredBy": "බලගන්වන්නේ", "textPrint": "මුද්‍රණය", "textR1C1Style": "R1C1 යොමු ශෛලිය", "textRegionalSettings": "ප්‍රාදේශික සැකසුම්", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "යුක්රේනියානු", "txtVi": "වියට්නාම", "txtZh": "චීන", - "warnDownloadAs": "ඔබ දිගටම මෙම ආකෘතියෙන් සුරැකුවොත් පාඨය හැර අනෙකුත් සියළුම විශේෂාංග නැති වනු ඇත.
    ඔබට කරගෙන යාමට අවශ්‍ය බව විශ්වාසද?", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "ඔබ දිගටම මෙම ආකෘතියෙන් සුරැකුවොත් පාඨය හැර අනෙකුත් සියළුම විශේෂාංග නැති වනු ඇත.
    ඔබට කරගෙන යාමට අවශ්‍ය බව විශ්වාසද?" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json index 49671c7a34..5d20e4c62b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sk.json @@ -433,6 +433,7 @@ "textCell": "Bunka", "textCellStyle": "Štýl bunky", "textCenter": "Stred", + "textChangeShape": "Zmeniť tvar", "textChart": "Graf", "textChartTitle": "Názov grafu", "textClearFilter": "Vyčistiť filter", @@ -580,7 +581,6 @@ "txtSortHigh2Low": "Zoradiť od najvyššieho po najnižšie", "txtSortLow2High": "Zoradiť od najnižšieho po najvyššie", "textArrange": "Arrange", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link", "textDone": "Done" diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json index 7f301fa843..44d9090800 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/sl.json @@ -145,6 +145,7 @@ "View": { "Add": { "sCatTextAndData": "Besedilo in podatki", + "textShape": "Oblika", "errorMaxRows": "ERROR! The maximum number of data series per chart is 255.", "errorStockChart": "Incorrect row order. To build a stock chart, place the data on the sheet in the following order:
    opening price, max price, min price, closing price.", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", @@ -191,7 +192,6 @@ "textRequired": "Required", "textScreenTip": "Screen Tip", "textSelectedRange": "Selected Range", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSheet": "Sheet", "textSortAndFilter": "Sort and Filter", "textThisRowHint": "Choose only this row of the specified column", @@ -206,9 +206,12 @@ "txtYes": "Yes" }, "Edit": { + "textChangeShape": "Spremeni obliko", "textEmptyItem": "{Blanks}", "textHundredMil": "100 000 000", "textHundredThousands": "100 000", + "textRemoveShape": "Odstrani obliko", + "textShape": "Oblika", "textTenMillions": "10 000 000", "textTenThousands": "10 000", "notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", @@ -245,7 +248,6 @@ "textCell": "Cell", "textCellStyle": "Cell Style", "textCenter": "Center", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", "textChart": "Chart", "textChartTitle": "Chart Title", "textClearFilter": "Clear Filter", @@ -346,7 +348,6 @@ "textRange": "Range", "textRecommended": "Recommended", "textRemoveChart": "Remove Chart", - "textRemoveShape": "Remove Shape", "textReplace": "Replace", "textReplaceImage": "Replace Image", "textRequired": "Required", @@ -363,7 +364,6 @@ "textSelectObjectToEdit": "Select object to edit", "textSendToBackground": "Send to Background", "textSettings": "Settings", - "textShape": "Shape", "textSheet": "Sheet", "textSize": "Size", "textStyle": "Style", diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json index 03e80cbb29..cd8a0c917f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh-tw.json @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ "txtStyle_Heading_3": "標題 3", "txtStyle_Heading_4": "標題 4", "txtStyle_Input": "輸入", - "txtStyle_Linked_Cell": "已連接的單元格", + "txtStyle_Linked_Cell": "已連結單位格", "txtStyle_Neutral": "中立", "txtStyle_Normal": "標準", "txtStyle_Note": "備註", @@ -145,6 +145,7 @@ "textClose": "關閉", "textContactUs": "聯絡銷售人員", "textCustomLoader": "很抱歉，您無權變更載入程序。 請聯繫我們的業務部門取得報價。", + "textDontUpdate": "不要升級", "textGuest": "來賓", "textHasMacros": "此檔案包含自動巨集程式。
    是否要運行這些巨集？", "textNo": "沒有", @@ -158,10 +159,14 @@ "textReplaceSuccess": "搜索已完成。發生的事件已替換：{0}", "textRequestMacros": "有一個巨集指令要求連結至URL。是否允許該要求至%1?", "textUpdate": "更新", + "textWarnUpdateExternalData": "此工作簿包含連結到一個或多個可能不安全的外部來源。
    如果您信任這些連結，請更新它們以獲取最新資料。", "textYes": "是", "titleLicenseExp": "證件過期", + "titleLicenseNotActive": "授權未啟用", "titleServerVersion": "編輯器已更新", "titleUpdateVersion": "版本已更改", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "匿名使用者無法存取。
    此文件將僅供檢視。", + "warnLicenseBefore": "授權未啟用。
    請聯絡您的管理員。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "您已達到同時連接到 %1 編輯器的限制。此文件將只提供檢視。請聯繫您的管理員以了解更多資訊。", "warnLicenseExp": "您的憑證已過期。請更新您的憑證，然後重新更新頁面。", "warnLicenseLimitedNoAccess": "憑證已過期。您無法使用文件編輯功能。請聯絡您的帳號管理員", @@ -169,12 +174,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "您已達到 %1 個編輯器的使用者限制。請聯繫您的管理員以了解更多資訊。", "warnNoLicense": "您已達到同時連接到 %1 編輯器的限制。此文件將只提供檢視。有關個人升級條款，請聯繫 %1 業務團隊。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "您已達到％1個編輯器的用戶限制。與％1銷售團隊聯繫以了解個人升級條款。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "您沒有編輯此文件的權限。", - "textDontUpdate": "Don't Update", - "textWarnUpdateExternalData": "This workbook contains links to one or more external sources that could be unsafe. If you trust the links, update them to get the latest data.", - "titleLicenseNotActive": "License not active", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only.", - "warnLicenseBefore": "License not active.
    Please contact your administrator." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "您沒有編輯此文件的權限。" } }, "Error": { @@ -215,6 +215,11 @@ "errorFrmlMaxReference": "您無法輸入此公式，因為它具有太多的值，
    單元格引用和/或名稱。", "errorFrmlMaxTextLength": "在公式中的文字數值有255字元的限制。
    使用 CONCATENATE 函數或序連運算子(&)", "errorFrmlWrongReferences": "該函數引用了一個不存在的工作表。
    請檢查內容並重試。", + "errorInconsistentExt": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
    檔案內容與檔案的副檔名不相符。", + "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
    檔案內容對應文字文件 (例如 docx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
    檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
    檔案內容對應以下格式之一：pdf/djvu/xps/oxps，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", + "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "在開啟檔案時發生錯誤。
    檔案內容對應試算表 (例如 xlsx)，但檔案的副檔名不一致： %1。", "errorInvalidRef": "輸入正確的選擇名稱或有效參考。", "errorKeyEncrypt": "未知密鑰描述符", "errorKeyExpire": "密鑰描述符已過期", @@ -229,6 +234,7 @@ "errorOperandExpected": "輸入的函數語法不正確。請檢查您是否遺漏了任何括號之一 - '(' 或 ')'。", "errorPasteMaxRange": "複製和貼上的區域不匹配。 請選擇一個相同大小的區域或點擊一行中的第一個儲存格以貼上已複製的儲存格。", "errorPrintMaxPagesCount": "不幸的是，在目前版本的程式中一次不可列印超過 1500 頁。
    在即將發布的版本中將會取消此限制。", + "errorProtectedRange": "此範圍不允許進行編輯。", "errorSessionAbsolute": "該文件編輯時效已欲期。請重新載入此頁面。", "errorSessionIdle": "無 該文件已經有一段時間沒有進行編輯了。 請重新載入頁面。", "errorSessionToken": "主機連線被中斷，請重新載入此頁面。", @@ -253,18 +259,13 @@ "unknownErrorText": "未知錯誤。", "uploadImageExtMessage": "圖片格式未知。", "uploadImageFileCountMessage": "沒有上傳圖片。", - "uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大大小為25MB。", - "errorInconsistentExt": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content does not match the file extension.", - "errorInconsistentExtDocx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to text documents (e.g. docx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPdf": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to one of the following formats: pdf/djvu/xps/oxps, but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtPptx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to presentations (e.g. pptx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorInconsistentExtXlsx": "An error has occurred while opening the file.
    The file content corresponds to spreadsheets (e.g. xlsx), but the file has the inconsistent extension: %1.", - "errorProtectedRange": "This range is not allowed for editing." + "uploadImageSizeMessage": "圖像超出最大大小限制。最大大小為25MB。" }, "LongActions": { "advDRMPassword": "密碼", "applyChangesTextText": "加載數據中...", "applyChangesTitleText": "加載數據中", + "confirmMaxChangesSize": "操作的大小超過了伺服器設定的限制。
    按下「復原」以取消最後一個動作，或按下「繼續」以在本地保留動作（需下載檔案或複製其內容，以確保不會遺失任何內容）", "confirmMoveCellRange": "目標儲存格的範圍可以包含資料。繼續動作？", "confirmPutMergeRange": "資料來源包含合併的單元格。
    它們在貼上到表格之前將被取消合併。", "confirmReplaceFormulaInTable": "標題行中的公式將被刪除並轉換為靜態文本。
    是否繼續？", @@ -302,8 +303,7 @@ "txtEditingMode": "設定編輯模式...", "uploadImageTextText": "正在上傳圖片...", "uploadImageTitleText": "上載圖片", - "waitText": "請耐心等待...", - "confirmMaxChangesSize": "The size of actions exceeds the limitation set for your server.
    Press \"Undo\" to cancel your last action or press \"Continue\" to keep action locally (you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost)." + "waitText": "請耐心等待..." }, "Statusbar": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -377,6 +377,7 @@ "textLinkType": "鏈接類型", "textOk": "確定", "textOther": "其它", + "textPasteImageUrl": "貼上圖片網址", "textPictureFromLibrary": "圖片來自圖書館", "textPictureFromURL": "網址圖片", "textRange": "範圍", @@ -396,8 +397,7 @@ "txtNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為\"http://www.example.com\"的URL。", "txtSorting": "排序", "txtSortSelected": "排序已選擇項目", - "txtYes": "是", - "textPasteImageUrl": "Paste an image URL" + "txtYes": "是" }, "Edit": { "notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -434,6 +434,7 @@ "textCell": "單元格", "textCellStyle": "單元格樣式", "textCenter": "中心", + "textChangeShape": "更改形狀", "textChart": "圖表", "textChartTitle": "圖表標題", "textClearFilter": "清空篩選條件", @@ -446,6 +447,8 @@ "textDate": "日期", "textDefault": "選擇範圍", "textDeleteFilter": "刪除過濾器", + "textDeleteImage": "刪除影像", + "textDeleteLink": "刪除連結", "textDesign": "設計", "textDiagonalDownBorder": "對角向下邊界", "textDiagonalUpBorder": "對角上邊界", @@ -580,10 +583,7 @@ "textYen": "日圓", "txtNotUrl": "此字段應為格式為\"http://www.example.com\"的URL。", "txtSortHigh2Low": "最高到最低排序", - "txtSortLow2High": "從最低到最高排序", - "textChangeShape": "Change Shape", - "textDeleteImage": "Delete Image", - "textDeleteLink": "Delete Link" + "txtSortLow2High": "從最低到最高排序" }, "Settings": { "advCSVOptions": "選擇CSV選項", @@ -695,6 +695,7 @@ "txtComma": "逗號", "txtCs": "捷克語", "txtDa": "丹麥語", + "txtDe": "德語", "txtDelimiter": "分隔符號", "txtDownloadCsv": "下載CSV", "txtEl": "希腊语", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "烏克蘭文", "txtVi": "越南語", "txtZh": "中文", - "warnDownloadAs": "如果繼續以這種格式保存，則除文本外的所有功能都將丟失。
    確定要繼續嗎？", - "txtDe": "Deutsch" + "warnDownloadAs": "如果繼續以這種格式保存，則除文本外的所有功能都將丟失。
    確定要繼續嗎？" } } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json index 62c2d1f9f1..c93c98195a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/mobile/locale/zh.json @@ -151,6 +151,7 @@ "textNo": "不", "textNoChoices": "填充单元格没有选择。
    只能选择列中的文本值进行替换。", "textNoLicenseTitle": "触碰到许可证数量限制。", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textOk": "好", "textPaidFeature": "付费功能", "textRemember": "记住我的选择", @@ -164,6 +165,7 @@ "titleLicenseNotActive": "许可证未激活", "titleServerVersion": "编辑器已更新", "titleUpdateVersion": "版本已变化", + "warnLicenseAnonymous": "拒绝匿名用户的访问。
    本文档将以仅查看模式而打开。", "warnLicenseBefore": "许可证未激活。
    请联系管理员。", "warnLicenseExceeded": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。该文档打开后，你将只能查看。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", "warnLicenseExp": "您的许可证已过期。烦请您更新许可证，然后刷新该页面。", @@ -172,9 +174,7 @@ "warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。可联系管理员来了解更多信息。", "warnNoLicense": "你已经触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制. 该文档打开后，你将只能查看。请联系 %1 的销售团队，获取个人升级条款。", "warnNoLicenseUsers": "你触发了 %1 编辑器的同时在线数限制。请与 %1 的销售团队联系，以获取个人升级条款。", - "warnProcessRightsChange": "你没有编辑文件的权限。", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches", - "warnLicenseAnonymous": "Access denied for anonymous users.
    This document will be opened for viewing only." + "warnProcessRightsChange": "你没有编辑文件的权限。" } }, "Error": { @@ -652,6 +652,7 @@ "textMargins": "边距", "textMatchCase": "对应大小写", "textMatchCell": "匹配单元格", + "textNoMatches": "找不到匹配信息", "textOk": "OK", "textOpenFile": "输入密码来打开文件", "textOrientation": "方向", @@ -752,8 +753,7 @@ "txtUk": "乌克兰语", "txtVi": "越南语", "txtZh": "中文", - "warnDownloadAs": "如果您继续以此格式保存，除文本之外的所有功能将丢失。
    您确定要继续吗？", - "textNoMatches": "No Matches" + "warnDownloadAs": "如果您继续以此格式保存，除文本之外的所有功能将丢失。
    您确定要继续吗？" } } } \ No newline at end of file